summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-10-14 03:00:58 +0000
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-10-14 03:00:58 +0000
commit370853b6ba0be6e880b2f320268d4fefbd6aeef6 (patch)
tree6d5fc61b99808ac12a520651d0b2f9c59d2b0a94
parent3afcae17b4a1a6dffbaa749a6fd0b6406c4d34a9 (diff)
CTAN sync 201910140300
-rw-r--r--FILES.byname2700
-rw-r--r--FILES.byname.gzbin2135268 -> 2135394 bytes
-rw-r--r--FILES.last07days1771
-rw-r--r--fonts/adforn/README5
-rw-r--r--fonts/adforn/adforn.pdfbin0 -> 351127 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/adforn/adforn.sty2
-rw-r--r--fonts/adforn/manifest.txt1
-rw-r--r--fonts/adfsymbols/README4
-rw-r--r--fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty2
-rw-r--r--fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty2
-rw-r--r--fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.pdfbin0 -> 373428 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/gofonts/README2
-rw-r--r--fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty6
-rw-r--r--fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty10
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/README2
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ejn2og.enc (renamed from fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_kctjno.enc)14
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hlvv6p.enc (renamed from fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_5xld5w.enc)13
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_nb4g6w.enc (renamed from fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_yhzmyq.enc)14
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_spbxfw.enc (renamed from fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hau3x5.enc)14
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tdlrq7.enc67
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tf5jo5.enc (renamed from fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_f6scsm.enc)13
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_w4rwtq.enc (renamed from fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wpyws4.enc)12
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wmouhf.enc66
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_xsutkk.enc (renamed from fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ljoz2a.enc)13
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd299
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd299
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd27
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd27
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd27
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd27
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd27
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd27
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd27
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty20
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map289
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1796 -> 1804 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfmbin1800 -> 1808 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfmbin1292 -> 1296 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1752 -> 1760 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfmbin1768 -> 1776 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1812 -> 1808 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16088 -> 16084 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5068 -> 5068 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1760 -> 1760 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfmbin24960 -> 24960 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1368 -> 1424 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1388 -> 1452 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin2008 -> 2016 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin2012 -> 2020 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1496 -> 1500 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1976 -> 1984 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1988 -> 1996 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2024 -> 2020 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16300 -> 16296 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5272 -> 5272 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1984 -> 1984 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25180 -> 25180 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1424 -> 1492 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1440 -> 1516 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1816 -> 1824 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfmbin1820 -> 1828 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfmbin1308 -> 1316 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1740 -> 1748 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfmbin1752 -> 1760 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1848 -> 1844 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16552 -> 16548 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5376 -> 5376 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1752 -> 1752 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfmbin25588 -> 25588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1388 -> 1444 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1408 -> 1468 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin2040 -> 2048 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin2044 -> 2052 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1516 -> 1524 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1976 -> 1984 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1988 -> 1996 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2072 -> 2068 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16776 -> 16772 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5584 -> 5584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1988 -> 1988 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25824 -> 25824 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1456 -> 1524 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1472 -> 1544 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1804 -> 1812 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfmbin1808 -> 1816 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfmbin1296 -> 1304 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1732 -> 1740 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfmbin1748 -> 1756 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1824 -> 1820 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16392 -> 16388 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5344 -> 5344 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1736 -> 1736 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfmbin25240 -> 25240 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1392 -> 1444 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1412 -> 1472 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin2028 -> 2036 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin2032 -> 2040 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1512 -> 1520 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1972 -> 1980 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1988 -> 1996 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2048 -> 2044 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16616 -> 16612 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5564 -> 5564 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1976 -> 1976 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25480 -> 25480 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1460 -> 1524 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1476 -> 1548 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1816 -> 1820 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfmbin1820 -> 1824 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfmbin1308 -> 1312 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1748 -> 1752 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfmbin1760 -> 1764 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1824 -> 1820 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16460 -> 16456 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5316 -> 5316 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1744 -> 1744 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfmbin25432 -> 25432 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1384 -> 1428 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1404 -> 1456 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin2028 -> 2032 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin2032 -> 2036 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1472 -> 1476 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1960 -> 1964 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1972 -> 1976 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2040 -> 2036 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16676 -> 16672 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5484 -> 5484 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1960 -> 1960 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25648 -> 25648 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1432 -> 1480 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1452 -> 1508 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin2016 -> 2020 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfmbin2020 -> 2024 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1472 -> 1476 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1948 -> 1952 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfmbin1964 -> 1968 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2028 -> 2024 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16756 -> 16752 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5540 -> 5540 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1944 -> 1944 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25808 -> 25808 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1428 -> 1480 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1448 -> 1508 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1788 -> 1792 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfmbin1792 -> 1796 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfmbin1292 -> 1296 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1724 -> 1728 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfmbin1736 -> 1740 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1808 -> 1804 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16484 -> 16480 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5312 -> 5312 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1728 -> 1728 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfmbin25536 -> 25536 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1384 -> 1432 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1404 -> 1460 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1992 -> 1996 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin1996 -> 2000 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1456 -> 1460 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1932 -> 1936 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1944 -> 1948 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2012 -> 2008 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16688 -> 16684 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5476 -> 5476 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1936 -> 1936 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25744 -> 25744 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1424 -> 1476 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1444 -> 1504 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1816 -> 1824 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfmbin1820 -> 1828 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfmbin1304 -> 1312 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1752 -> 1760 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfmbin1764 -> 1772 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1840 -> 1836 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16544 -> 16540 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5364 -> 5364 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1756 -> 1756 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfmbin25592 -> 25592 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1384 -> 1440 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1404 -> 1468 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin2036 -> 2044 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin2040 -> 2048 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1488 -> 1496 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1968 -> 1976 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1980 -> 1988 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2064 -> 2060 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16768 -> 16764 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5552 -> 5552 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1976 -> 1976 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25812 -> 25812 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1444 -> 1504 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1460 -> 1528 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1812 -> 1816 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfmbin1816 -> 1820 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfmbin1308 -> 1312 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1744 -> 1748 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfmbin1760 -> 1764 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1820 -> 1816 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16548 -> 16544 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5372 -> 5372 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1736 -> 1736 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfmbin25600 -> 25600 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1384 -> 1432 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1404 -> 1460 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1808 -> 1816 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfmbin1812 -> 1820 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfmbin1308 -> 1316 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1736 -> 1744 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfmbin1752 -> 1760 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1832 -> 1828 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16540 -> 16536 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5372 -> 5372 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1744 -> 1744 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfmbin25588 -> 25588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1388 -> 1440 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1408 -> 1472 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin2040 -> 2048 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin2044 -> 2052 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1492 -> 1500 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1960 -> 1968 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1976 -> 1984 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2068 -> 2064 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16776 -> 16772 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5560 -> 5560 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1972 -> 1972 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25816 -> 25816 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1448 -> 1512 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1464 -> 1540 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1792 -> 1796 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfmbin1796 -> 1800 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfmbin1288 -> 1292 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1716 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfmbin1732 -> 1736 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin1800 -> 1796 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16216 -> 16212 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5076 -> 5076 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1708 -> 1708 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfmbin25176 -> 25176 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1388 -> 1436 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1408 -> 1464 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfmbin1988 -> 1992 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfmbin1992 -> 1996 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfmbin1436 -> 1440 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfmbin1916 -> 1920 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfmbin1928 -> 1932 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfmbin2000 -> 1996 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfmbin16416 -> 16412 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfmbin5228 -> 5228 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfmbin1912 -> 1912 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfmbin25376 -> 25376 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfmbin1432 -> 1484 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfmbin1452 -> 1512 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vfbin1676 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vfbin1696 -> 1708 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vfbin1688 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vfbin1712 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vfbin548 -> 584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1680 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1704 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1692 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1720 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin556 -> 588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vfbin1672 -> 1684 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vfbin1696 -> 1708 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vfbin1684 -> 1684 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vfbin1712 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vfbin548 -> 584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1680 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1704 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1692 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1716 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin552 -> 588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vfbin1680 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vfbin1700 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vfbin1692 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vfbin1716 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vfbin552 -> 588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1684 -> 1696 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1708 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1696 -> 1696 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1724 -> 1724 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin560 -> 592 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vfbin1680 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vfbin1704 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vfbin1692 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vfbin1716 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vfbin552 -> 588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1684 -> 1696 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1708 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1696 -> 1696 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1724 -> 1724 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin560 -> 596 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vfbin1676 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vfbin1700 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1688 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vfbin1712 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vfbin548 -> 584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vfbin1676 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vfbin1696 -> 1708 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vfbin1688 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vfbin1712 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vfbin548 -> 584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1680 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1704 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1692 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1720 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin556 -> 588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vfbin1676 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vfbin1700 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vfbin1688 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vfbin1712 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vfbin548 -> 584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1680 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1704 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1692 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1720 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin556 -> 592 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vfbin1676 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vfbin1700 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vfbin1688 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vfbin1716 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vfbin552 -> 584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vfbin1676 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vfbin1700 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vfbin1688 -> 1688 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vfbin1716 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vfbin552 -> 588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1684 -> 1696 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1708 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1696 -> 1696 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1720 -> 1720 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin556 -> 592 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vfbin1672 -> 1684 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vfbin1696 -> 1708 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vfbin1684 -> 1684 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vfbin1712 -> 1712 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vfbin548 -> 584 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vfbin1680 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vfbin1704 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vfbin1692 -> 1692 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vfbin1716 -> 1716 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vfbin552 -> 588 bytes
-rw-r--r--fonts/linguisticspro/README2
-rw-r--r--fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty6
-rw-r--r--fonts/marcellus/README2
-rw-r--r--fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty6
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/README.md2
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/alltt.pdfbin172940 -> 172933 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdfbin219622 -> 219616 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/changes.txt17
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/classes.pdfbin520779 -> 520771 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdfbin371688 -> 371681 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdfbin270773 -> 270763 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdfbin223458 -> 223453 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/doc.pdfbin628229 -> 628225 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdfbin469987 -> 469980 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/encguide.pdfbin1244570 -> 1510925 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/exscale.pdfbin195896 -> 195888 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdfbin261921 -> 261914 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdfbin356964 -> 356957 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdfbin156299 -> 156292 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdfbin205224 -> 205217 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdfbin294774 -> 294767 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdfbin391042 -> 225523 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex7
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdfbin245932 -> 245923 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdfbin192302 -> 192295 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/letter.pdfbin305223 -> 305216 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx11
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdfbin302614 -> 302608 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdfbin874488 -> 874481 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdfbin150037 -> 150029 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdfbin141568 -> 141561 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdfbin141553 -> 141545 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdfbin135588 -> 135582 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdfbin163996 -> 163988 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdfbin133153 -> 133148 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdfbin130846 -> 130839 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdfbin144488 -> 144481 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdfbin120228 -> 120220 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdfbin147958 -> 147952 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdfbin104961 -> 104954 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdfbin137932 -> 137927 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdfbin161084 -> 161077 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdfbin150934 -> 150928 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdfbin122102 -> 122098 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdfbin137511 -> 137504 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdfbin156570 -> 156562 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdfbin36022 -> 36015 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdfbin235086 -> 235078 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdfbin283194 -> 283187 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdfbin236117 -> 236109 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdfbin302730 -> 302724 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdfbin274345 -> 274338 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdfbin255315 -> 255308 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdfbin196347 -> 196341 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdfbin365476 -> 365469 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdfbin239777 -> 239770 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdfbin368527 -> 368520 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdfbin435477 -> 435472 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdfbin490987 -> 490980 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx2
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdfbin197812 -> 197803 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdfbin215398 -> 215391 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdfbin160694 -> 160685 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/modguide.pdfbin226754 -> 226745 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx6
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdfbin202443 -> 202438 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/proc.pdfbin216911 -> 216904 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/slides.pdfbin351783 -> 351773 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdfbin214312 -> 214304 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/source2e.pdfbin2867799 -> 2851662 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdfbin181755 -> 181750 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/tulm.pdfbin156547 -> 156542 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdfbin396665 -> 396657 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdfbin337638 -> 337628 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty219
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdfbin950277 -> 857631 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex29
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README137
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komamarks.pdfbin0 -> 165040 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt10
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html2006
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdfbin3150915 -> 3209539 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html1998
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdfbin2999593 -> 3056153 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdfbin195411 -> 195988 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdfbin714231 -> 714165 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdfbin254904 -> 254508 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide8
-rwxr-xr-xmacros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl46
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex22
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex7
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex27
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup22
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex9
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex352
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex295
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex65
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex52
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex51
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex31
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex30
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex50
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex45
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex338
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib38
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex15
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex30
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex30
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex96
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex72
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex38
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex114
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex310
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex100
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex132
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex332
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex48
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex38
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex86
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex442
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex116
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex290
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex266
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex24
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex24
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex38
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup22
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex312
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex96
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex136
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex1335
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex1327
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex2547
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex134
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex116
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex218
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex589
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex60
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex422
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex196
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex612
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex973
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex352
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex1008
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex1851
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex204
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex1677
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex168
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex1196
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx100
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls83
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex570
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog1374
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile20
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx37
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/komamarks.dtx588
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx101
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx43
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx1057
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx770
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx2241
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx271
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx33
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx281
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx621
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx584
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx229
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx147
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx626
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx283
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx127
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx991
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx446
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx2822
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx403
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx312
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx129
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx3666
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx313
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx1377
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx812
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx210
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx72
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx30
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx252
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx690
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx468
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx244
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins29
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx545
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex23
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx121
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx682
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx134
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md6
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdfbin313943 -> 316632 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex56
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx386
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdfbin656408 -> 660302 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README3
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex35
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex6
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex6
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex17
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex12
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex17
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.pdfbin0 -> 46008 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.tex66
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls64
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history12
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas3
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdfbin1220136 -> 1229192 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex111
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md2
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdfbin161341 -> 161335 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdfbin165759 -> 165753 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdfbin164359 -> 164353 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdfbin453064 -> 453056 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath-2018-12-01.sty2848
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdfbin379697 -> 379691 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdfbin129178 -> 129171 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdfbin193911 -> 193904 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdfbin104557 -> 104549 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt8
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdfbin101303 -> 101296 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdfbin130493 -> 130486 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdfbin428714 -> 428708 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md2
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt4
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdfbin201390 -> 201382 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdfbin263552 -> 263544 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdfbin154503 -> 154496 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx35
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdfbin282829 -> 283250 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdfbin232399 -> 232393 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdfbin310556 -> 310551 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdfbin222533 -> 222527 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdfbin150125 -> 150118 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdfbin245758 -> 245753 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdfbin162266 -> 162260 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdfbin191712 -> 191705 bytes
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-backend.tex2168
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-callbacks.tex2314
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-contents.tex38
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-enhancements.tex2742
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-export-titlepage.tex62
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-firstpage.tex64
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fontloader.tex2328
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fonts.tex1716
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-graphics.tex1662
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-introduction.tex348
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-languages.tex2226
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-logos.tex42
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-lua.tex1520
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-math.tex3294
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-modifications.tex2769
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-nodes.tex5328
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-preamble.tex220
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-registers.tex94
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-statistics.tex34
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-style.tex886
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-tex.tex5549
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex-titlepage.tex106
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex.pdfbin1560213 -> 1562010 bytes
-rw-r--r--systems/doc/luatex/luatex.tex206
-rw-r--r--systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl4
-rw-r--r--systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb488
-rw-r--r--systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md52
-rw-r--r--systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha5122
-rw-r--r--systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc14
-rw-r--r--systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xzbin2129008 -> 2128940 bytes
-rw-r--r--systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini6
-rw-r--r--systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini6
-rw-r--r--systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog12
-rw-r--r--timestamp2
647 files changed, 53880 insertions, 41225 deletions
diff --git a/FILES.byname b/FILES.byname
index 590048990d..8d13076074 100644
--- a/FILES.byname
+++ b/FILES.byname
@@ -4987,7 +4987,7 @@
1990/10/02 | 812 | dviware/vutex/vaxvms.ins
1990/10/02 | 127576 | dviware/vutex/vutex.web
2014/04/13 | 4600576 | dviware/xdvi/22.87/xdvik-22.87.tar.gz
-2019/10/12 | 704143 | FILES.last07days
+2019/10/13 | 947365 | FILES.last07days
2018/06/27 | 99883 | fonts/academicons/academicons.pdf
2018/06/27 | 10779 | fonts/academicons/academicons.sty
2018/06/27 | 5774 | fonts/academicons/academicons.tex
@@ -5084,21 +5084,23 @@
2013/11/04 | 1500 | fonts/accanthis/vf/AccanthisADFStdNo3-Regular-lf-t1.vf
2013/11/04 | 584 | fonts/accanthis/vf/AccanthisADFStdNo3-Regular-lf-ts1.vf
2013/11/06 | 785159 | fonts/accanthis.zip
-2019/09/24 | 3516 | fonts/adforn/adforn.sty
+2019/09/24 | 351127 | fonts/adforn/adforn.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3517 | fonts/adforn/adforn.sty
2019/09/24 | 13693 | fonts/adforn/adforn.tex
-2019/10/03 | 17992 | fonts/adforn/COPYING
-2019/09/24 | 815 | fonts/adforn/manifest.txt
-2019/10/03 | 1690 | fonts/adforn/NOTICE
+2019/10/13 | 17992 | fonts/adforn/COPYING
+2019/10/13 | 822 | fonts/adforn/manifest.txt
+2019/10/13 | 1690 | fonts/adforn/NOTICE
2010/09/24 | 8225 | fonts/adforn/OrnementsADF.afm
2019/09/24 | 2001 | fonts/adforn/OrnementsADF.enc
2019/09/24 | 100 | fonts/adforn/OrnementsADF.map
2010/09/24 | 33677 | fonts/adforn/OrnementsADF.pfb
2019/10/02 | 832 | fonts/adforn/OrnementsADF.tfm
-2019/10/02 | 1195 | fonts/adforn/README
+2019/10/13 | 1288 | fonts/adforn/README
2019/09/24 | 1012 | fonts/adforn/uornementsadf.fd
-2019/10/03 | 50885 | fonts/adforn.zip
-2019/09/24 | 5750 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty
-2019/09/24 | 801 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty
+2019/10/13 | 400901 | fonts/adforn.zip
+2019/10/13 | 5751 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty
+2019/10/13 | 802 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty
+2019/09/24 | 373428 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.pdf
2019/09/24 | 13022 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.tex
2010/09/14 | 2690 | fonts/adfsymbols/ArrowsADF.afm
2010/07/25 | 87 | fonts/adfsymbols/ArrowsADF.map
@@ -5108,14 +5110,14 @@
2010/07/25 | 90 | fonts/adfsymbols/BulletsADF.map
2010/09/12 | 12980 | fonts/adfsymbols/BulletsADF.pfb
2019/10/02 | 612 | fonts/adfsymbols/BulletsADF.tfm
-2019/10/03 | 17992 | fonts/adfsymbols/COPYING
+2007/09/29 | 17992 | fonts/adfsymbols/COPYING
2019/09/24 | 882 | fonts/adfsymbols/manifest.txt
-2019/10/03 | 1700 | fonts/adfsymbols/NOTICE
-2019/10/02 | 1227 | fonts/adfsymbols/README
+2009/05/17 | 1700 | fonts/adfsymbols/NOTICE
+2019/10/13 | 1288 | fonts/adfsymbols/README
2010/07/25 | 2018 | fonts/adfsymbols/SymbolsADF.enc
2010/07/25 | 916 | fonts/adfsymbols/uarrowsadf.fd
2010/07/25 | 948 | fonts/adfsymbols/ubulletsadf.fd
-2019/10/03 | 43859 | fonts/adfsymbols.zip
+2019/10/13 | 415868 | fonts/adfsymbols.zip
2006/03/22 | 160344 | fonts/adobe/afm/Adobe-Core35_AFMs-229.tar.gz
2006/03/22 | 315122 | fonts/adobe/afm/Adobe-Core35_AFMs-314.tar.gz
1999/08/08 | 84595 | fonts/adobe-euro/doc/eurosamp.pdf
@@ -42582,8 +42584,8 @@
2019/04/19 | 3094 | fonts/gofonts/enc/go_icpxvt.enc
2019/04/19 | 2878 | fonts/gofonts/enc/go_iypgt7.enc
2019/04/19 | 2769 | fonts/gofonts/enc/go_zwiz3b.enc
-2019/06/04 | 1729 | fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty
-2019/04/19 | 2246 | fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty
+2019/10/13 | 2234 | fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty
2019/06/04 | 1850 | fonts/gofonts/latex/LGRGoMono-TLF.fd
2019/04/19 | 2760 | fonts/gofonts/latex/LGRGo-TLF.fd
2019/06/04 | 1850 | fonts/gofonts/latex/LY1GoMono-TLF.fd
@@ -42595,7 +42597,7 @@
2019/06/04 | 1850 | fonts/gofonts/latex/TS1GoMono-TLF.fd
2019/04/19 | 2760 | fonts/gofonts/latex/TS1Go-TLF.fd
2019/04/19 | 7561 | fonts/gofonts/map/go.map
-2019/06/04 | 2267 | fonts/gofonts/README
+2019/10/13 | 2267 | fonts/gofonts/README
2019/04/19 | 1692 | fonts/gofonts/tfm/Go-Bold-Italic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/04/19 | 1824 | fonts/gofonts/tfm/Go-Bold-Italic-tlf-lgr.tfm
2019/04/19 | 1664 | fonts/gofonts/tfm/Go-Bold-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
@@ -42780,7 +42782,7 @@
2019/04/19 | 804 | fonts/gofonts/vf/GoSmallcaps-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/04/19 | 1688 | fonts/gofonts/vf/GoSmallcaps-tlf-sc-t1.vf
2019/04/19 | 560 | fonts/gofonts/vf/GoSmallcaps-tlf-sc-ts1.vf
-2019/06/04 | 2320239 | fonts/gofonts.zip
+2019/10/13 | 2320233 | fonts/gofonts.zip
1991/11/27 | 11053 | fonts/go/gomaps.ltx
1991/11/27 | 9765 | fonts/go/go.sty
1991/12/02 | 191 | fonts/go/mf/go10.mf
@@ -61611,477 +61613,481 @@
2019/06/25 | 1740 | fonts/librecaslon/vf/LibreCaslonText-Regular-tosf-t1.vf
2019/06/25 | 560 | fonts/librecaslon/vf/LibreCaslonText-Regular-tosf-ts1.vf
2019/06/25 | 1501821 | fonts/librecaslon.zip
-2019/05/10 | 33275 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/librefranklin-samples.pdf
-2019/05/10 | 545 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/librefranklin-samples.tex
-2019/05/10 | 4358 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/OFL.txt
-2019/05/10 | 2952 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_5xld5w.enc
-2019/05/10 | 2960 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_f6scsm.enc
-2019/05/10 | 3065 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hau3x5.enc
-2019/05/10 | 3034 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_kctjno.enc
-2019/05/10 | 2991 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ljoz2a.enc
-2019/05/10 | 2876 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wpyws4.enc
-2019/05/10 | 3269 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_yhzmyq.enc
-2019/05/10 | 4559 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty
-2019/05/10 | 6742 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
-2019/05/10 | 6742 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
-2019/05/10 | 6742 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
-2019/05/10 | 6742 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
-2019/05/10 | 6667 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
-2019/05/10 | 6667 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
-2019/05/10 | 6742 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
-2019/05/10 | 19875 | fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map
-2019/05/10 | 71176 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 68268 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Black.otf
-2019/05/10 | 71060 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 68328 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Bold.otf
-2019/05/10 | 71840 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 68956 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.otf
-2019/05/10 | 68572 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 65012 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.otf
-2019/05/10 | 68912 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Italic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 68536 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-LightItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 65444 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Light.otf
-2019/05/10 | 69640 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 65932 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Medium.otf
-2019/05/10 | 65848 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Regular.otf
-2019/05/10 | 69228 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 66332 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-SemiBold.otf
-2019/05/10 | 67604 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.otf
-2019/05/10 | 63376 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Thin.otf
-2019/05/10 | 2176 | fonts/librefranklin/README
-2019/05/10 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2008 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2012 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1496 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 956 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2024 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16300 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5272 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25180 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1424 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1440 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 848 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 852 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1800 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1292 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1768 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 848 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 896 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16088 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5068 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 24960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1368 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1388 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2040 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2044 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1516 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 944 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 992 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2072 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16776 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5584 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1456 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1472 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 884 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1308 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1740 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 888 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1848 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16552 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5376 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25588 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1388 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1408 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2028 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2032 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1512 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2048 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16616 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5564 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1804 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1296 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1732 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1748 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16392 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5344 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25240 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1392 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1412 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 912 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 916 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2028 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2032 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1472 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2040 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16676 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5484 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25648 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1452 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 868 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1308 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1748 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5316 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1384 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1404 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2016 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2020 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1472 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1948 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1964 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2028 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16756 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1944 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1428 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1448 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1992 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1456 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1944 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2012 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16688 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1424 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1444 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1788 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1792 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1292 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1724 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16484 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1728 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25536 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1384 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1404 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2036 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2040 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1488 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1980 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 980 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2064 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16768 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5552 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1444 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1304 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1764 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1840 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16544 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5364 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1756 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25592 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1384 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1404 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1308 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16548 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5372 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25600 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1384 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1404 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2040 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2044 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1492 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2068 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16776 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5560 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1448 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1464 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1308 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 884 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1832 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5372 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25588 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1388 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1408 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1992 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1436 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1916 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 952 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 2000 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16416 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5228 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1912 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25376 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1452 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 864 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 868 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1792 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1288 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1732 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 860 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1800 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 16216 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 5076 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 25176 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1388 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 1408 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfm
-2019/05/10 | 141462 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 133964 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 139699 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 134943 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 141498 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 135237 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 133265 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 125815 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 132711 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 132823 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 127605 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 136160 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 128259 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 127472 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 133698 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 130725 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 133713 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 124174 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1680 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1704 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 556 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1676 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 548 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1680 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1704 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 552 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1672 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 548 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1724 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 560 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1680 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1700 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 552 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1724 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 560 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1680 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1704 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 552 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1676 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1700 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 548 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1680 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1704 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 556 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1676 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 548 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1680 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1704 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 556 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1676 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1700 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 548 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1676 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1700 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 552 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 556 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1676 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1700 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 552 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1680 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1704 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 552 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1672 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 548 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/05/10 | 3896834 | fonts/librefranklin.zip
+2019/10/13 | 33275 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/librefranklin-samples.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 545 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/librefranklin-samples.tex
+2019/10/13 | 4358 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/OFL.txt
+2019/10/13 | 3132 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ejn2og.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3048 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hlvv6p.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3349 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_nb4g6w.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3163 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_spbxfw.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3409 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tdlrq7.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3066 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tf5jo5.enc
+2019/10/13 | 2984 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_w4rwtq.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3343 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wmouhf.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3097 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_xsutkk.enc
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 4516 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 6985 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 6985 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 25534 | fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map
+2019/10/13 | 71176 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68268 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Black.otf
+2019/10/13 | 71060 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68328 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Bold.otf
+2019/10/13 | 71840 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68956 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68572 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 65012 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68912 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Italic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68536 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-LightItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 65444 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Light.otf
+2019/10/13 | 69640 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 65932 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Medium.otf
+2019/10/13 | 65848 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Regular.otf
+2019/10/13 | 69228 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 66332 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-SemiBold.otf
+2019/10/13 | 67604 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 63376 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Thin.otf
+2019/10/13 | 2176 | fonts/librefranklin/README
+2019/10/13 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2016 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2020 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1500 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 956 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2020 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16296 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5272 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25180 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1492 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1516 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 848 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 852 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1804 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1296 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1776 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 848 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 896 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16084 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5068 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 24960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1424 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1452 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2048 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2052 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1524 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 944 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 992 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2068 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16772 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5584 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1524 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1544 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 884 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1316 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1748 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 888 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1844 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16548 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5376 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25588 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1444 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1468 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2036 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2040 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1520 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1980 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2044 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16612 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5564 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1524 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1548 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1304 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1740 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1756 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16388 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5344 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25240 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1444 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1472 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 912 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 916 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2032 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2036 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1964 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2036 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16672 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5484 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25648 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1508 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 868 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1764 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16456 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5316 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1428 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1456 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2020 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2024 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1952 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2024 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1944 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1508 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2000 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1948 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2008 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16684 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1504 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1792 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1296 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1728 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1740 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1804 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1728 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25536 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2044 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2048 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1496 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 980 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2060 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16764 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5552 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1504 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1528 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1772 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1836 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5364 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1756 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25592 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1440 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1468 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1748 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1764 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16544 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5372 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25600 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2048 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2052 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1500 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2064 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16772 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5560 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1512 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1316 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 884 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16536 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5372 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25588 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1440 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1472 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1992 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1440 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 952 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16412 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5228 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1912 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25376 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1484 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1512 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 864 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 868 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1800 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1292 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 860 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16212 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5076 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25176 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1436 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1464 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 141462 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 133964 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 139699 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 134943 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 141498 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 135237 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 133265 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 125815 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 132711 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 132823 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 127605 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 136160 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 128259 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 127472 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 133698 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 130725 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 133713 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 124174 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1724 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 592 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1724 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 596 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 592 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 592 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 3904283 | fonts/librefranklin.zip
2007/09/29 | 18332 | fonts/libris/doc/fonts/libris/COPYING
2010/07/06 | 511737 | fonts/libris/doc/fonts/libris/librisadf.pdf
2010/07/06 | 17420 | fonts/libris/doc/fonts/libris/librisadf.tex
@@ -62215,7 +62221,7 @@
2019/06/25 | 3264 | fonts/linguisticspro/enc/lnpr_yinvwd.enc
2019/06/25 | 2362 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/LGRLinguisticsPro-LF.fd
2019/06/25 | 2399 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/LGRLinguisticsPro-OsF.fd
-2019/06/25 | 3088 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty
+2019/10/13 | 3079 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty
2019/06/25 | 2362 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/LY1LinguisticsPro-LF.fd
2019/06/25 | 2399 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/LY1LinguisticsPro-OsF.fd
2019/06/25 | 2362 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/OT1LinguisticsPro-LF.fd
@@ -62239,7 +62245,7 @@
2019/06/25 | 116908 | fonts/linguisticspro/opentype/LinguisticsPro-Bold.otf
2019/06/25 | 220484 | fonts/linguisticspro/opentype/LinguisticsPro-Italic.otf
2019/06/25 | 170676 | fonts/linguisticspro/opentype/LinguisticsPro-Regular.otf
-2019/06/25 | 1741 | fonts/linguisticspro/README
+2019/10/13 | 1741 | fonts/linguisticspro/README
2019/06/25 | 1384 | fonts/linguisticspro/tfm/LinguisticsPro-BoldItalic-lf-lgr.tfm
2019/06/25 | 4892 | fonts/linguisticspro/tfm/LinguisticsPro-BoldItalic-lf-ly1.tfm
2019/06/25 | 4112 | fonts/linguisticspro/tfm/LinguisticsPro-BoldItalic-lf-ot1.tfm
@@ -62406,7 +62412,7 @@
2019/06/25 | 1728 | fonts/linguisticspro/vf/LinguisticsPro-Regular-osf-t1.vf
2019/06/25 | 1316 | fonts/linguisticspro/vf/LinguisticsPro-Regular-osf-t3.vf
2019/06/25 | 628 | fonts/linguisticspro/vf/LinguisticsPro-Regular-osf-ts1.vf
-2019/06/25 | 1826693 | fonts/linguisticspro.zip
+2019/10/13 | 1826686 | fonts/linguisticspro.zip
1994/04/25 | 58636 | fonts/ljmetrics/LJ3/CG-Times/3trb-pl.zip
1994/04/25 | 24102 | fonts/ljmetrics/LJ3/CG-Times/3trb-tfm.zip
1994/04/25 | 61574 | fonts/ljmetrics/LJ3/CG-Times/3tri-pl.zip
@@ -64387,14 +64393,14 @@
2019/05/11 | 2951 | fonts/marcellus/enc/mrcl_tzgqbn.enc
2019/05/11 | 886 | fonts/marcellus/latex/LY1Marcellus-LF.fd
2019/05/11 | 897 | fonts/marcellus/latex/LY1Marcellus-Sup.fd
-2019/09/18 | 1444 | fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty
+2019/10/13 | 1432 | fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty
2019/05/11 | 886 | fonts/marcellus/latex/OT1Marcellus-LF.fd
2019/05/11 | 897 | fonts/marcellus/latex/OT1Marcellus-Sup.fd
2019/05/11 | 877 | fonts/marcellus/latex/T1Marcellus-LF.fd
2019/05/11 | 888 | fonts/marcellus/latex/T1Marcellus-Sup.fd
2019/05/11 | 886 | fonts/marcellus/latex/TS1Marcellus-LF.fd
2019/05/11 | 2064 | fonts/marcellus/map/marcellus.map
-2019/09/18 | 1689 | fonts/marcellus/README
+2019/10/13 | 1689 | fonts/marcellus/README
2019/05/11 | 1788 | fonts/marcellus/tfm/Marcellus-Regular-lf-ly1--base.tfm
2019/05/11 | 6476 | fonts/marcellus/tfm/Marcellus-Regular-lf-ly1.tfm
2019/05/11 | 2604 | fonts/marcellus/tfm/Marcellus-Regular-lf-ot1.tfm
@@ -64437,7 +64443,7 @@
2019/05/11 | 1676 | fonts/marcellus/vf/MarcellusSmallCaps-sup-sc-ly1.vf
2019/05/11 | 752 | fonts/marcellus/vf/MarcellusSmallCaps-sup-sc-ot1.vf
2019/05/11 | 1700 | fonts/marcellus/vf/MarcellusSmallCaps-sup-sc-t1.vf
-2019/09/18 | 274444 | fonts/marcellus.zip
+2019/10/13 | 274440 | fonts/marcellus.zip
2012/04/06 | 4967 | fonts/marvosym/doc/fonts/marvosym/FONTLOG.txt
2012/04/05 | 353 | fonts/marvosym/doc/fonts/marvosym/Makefile
2012/04/06 | 162916 | fonts/marvosym/doc/fonts/marvosym/marvodoc.pdf
@@ -135682,10 +135688,10 @@
2019/08/21 | 6648 | info/biblio/texnique.twx
1999/02/20 | 312 | info/biblio/tugbib2.ltx
1999/02/20 | 315 | info/biblio/tugbib.ltx
-2019/05/17 | 3081589 | info/biblio/tugboat.bib
+2019/10/12 | 3082176 | info/biblio/tugboat.bib
2019/05/17 | 136044 | info/biblio/tugboat.def
-2019/05/17 | 3517 | info/biblio/tugboat.ltx
-2019/05/17 | 454561 | info/biblio/tugboat.twx
+2019/10/12 | 3525 | info/biblio/tugboat.ltx
+2019/10/12 | 454332 | info/biblio/tugboat.twx
2014/08/12 | 20186 | info/biblio/type.bib
2014/08/12 | 2026 | info/biblio/type.ltx
2019/10/05 | 1133227 | info/biblio/typeset.bib
@@ -158534,7 +158540,7 @@
2019/07/10 | 7942349 | install/fonts/gentium-tug.tds.zip
2010/07/30 | 245583 | install/fonts/gillcm.tds.zip
2013/11/03 | 1721213 | install/fonts/gillius.tds.zip
-2019/06/04 | 2337871 | install/fonts/gofonts.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 2337865 | install/fonts/gofonts.tds.zip
2012/09/06 | 467812 | install/fonts/hacm.tds.zip
2019/06/10 | 1774481 | install/fonts/heuristica.tds.zip
2015/10/04 | 3958236 | install/fonts/imfellEnglish.tds.zip
@@ -158549,11 +158555,11 @@
2013/09/20 | 841432 | install/fonts/librebaskerville.tds.zip
2016/01/12 | 776281 | install/fonts/librebodoni.tds.zip
2019/06/25 | 1527417 | install/fonts/librecaslon.tds.zip
-2019/05/10 | 3939648 | install/fonts/librefranklin.tds.zip
-2019/06/25 | 1849335 | install/fonts/linguisticspro.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 3948167 | install/fonts/librefranklin.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 1849328 | install/fonts/linguisticspro.tds.zip
2014/01/08 | 1176067 | install/fonts/lobster2.tds.zip
2015/08/23 | 460701 | install/fonts/lsabon.tds.zip
-2019/09/18 | 282684 | install/fonts/marcellus.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 282680 | install/fonts/marcellus.tds.zip
2013/08/29 | 6741457 | install/fonts/mathdesign.tds.zip
2009/07/22 | 1183893 | install/fonts/mathgifg.tds.zip
2010/11/03 | 232427 | install/fonts/mdputu.tds.zip
@@ -158830,7 +158836,7 @@
2008/07/31 | 81728 | install/macros/latex/contrib/inversepath.tds.zip
2017/08/01 | 2052950 | install/macros/latex/contrib/jmlr.tds.zip
2019/07/25 | 1083290 | install/macros/latex/contrib/jsclasses.tds.zip
-2019/02/03 | 15206559 | install/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 15682209 | install/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script.tds.zip
2015/12/09 | 171418 | install/macros/latex/contrib/ksp-thesis.tds.zip
2019/10/11 | 781473 | install/macros/latex/contrib/l3backend.tds.zip
2019/10/02 | 786307 | install/macros/latex/contrib/l3build.tds.zip
@@ -158986,14 +158992,14 @@
2019/09/13 | 2596084 | install/macros/latex-dev/required/latex-amsmath-dev.tds.zip
2019/09/13 | 2533479 | install/macros/latex-dev/required/latex-graphics-dev.tds.zip
2019/09/13 | 6963762 | install/macros/latex-dev/required/latex-tools-dev.tds.zip
-2019/10/03 | 20879690 | install/macros/latex/latex-base.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 20739076 | install/macros/latex/latex-base.tds.zip
2017/12/18 | 1359749 | install/macros/latex/required/amscls.tds.zip
2013/03/08 | 2480846 | install/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math.tds.zip
2019/09/28 | 2480966 | install/macros/latex/required/babel-base.tds.zip
-2019/10/03 | 2595534 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-amsmath.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 2612867 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-amsmath.tds.zip
2019/09/13 | 200270 | install/macros/latex/required/latexbug.tds.zip
2018/04/06 | 1324669 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-cyrillic.tds.zip
-2019/10/03 | 2532779 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-graphics.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 2531865 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-graphics.tds.zip
2019/10/03 | 6960780 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-tools.tds.zip
2016/09/02 | 108688 | install/macros/luatex/generic/cstypo.tds.zip
2015/10/01 | 154538 | install/macros/luatex/generic/ctablestack.tds.zip
@@ -174066,225 +174072,225 @@
1993/11/08 | 1691 | macros/latex209/contrib/zero/zero-test.tex
2006/09/21 | 3505 | macros/latex209/contrib/zero.zip
1997/01/22 | 274 | macros/latex209/distribs/README.obsolete
-2019/10/01 | 6654 | macros/latex/base/alltt.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 2906 | macros/latex/base/alltt.ins
-2019/10/03 | 172940 | macros/latex/base/alltt.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 3293 | macros/latex/base/bugs.txt
-2019/10/03 | 219622 | macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 22480 | macros/latex/base/cfgguide.tex
-2018/04/06 | 42717 | macros/latex/base/changes.old.txt
-2019/10/01 | 304451 | macros/latex/base/changes.txt
-2019/10/01 | 154723 | macros/latex/base/classes.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 4104 | macros/latex/base/classes.ins
-2019/10/03 | 520779 | macros/latex/base/classes.pdf
-2019/10/03 | 371688 | macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 69216 | macros/latex/base/clsguide.tex
-2019/10/01 | 5299 | macros/latex/base/cmextra.ins
-2019/10/01 | 43246 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
-2019/10/01 | 4341 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
-2019/10/03 | 270773 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf
-2019/10/03 | 223458 | macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 17520 | macros/latex/base/cyrguide.tex
-2019/10/01 | 203062 | macros/latex/base/doc.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 628229 | macros/latex/base/doc.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 163682 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 4237 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.ins
-2019/10/03 | 469987 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 4406 | macros/latex/base/ec.ins
-2019/10/03 | 1244570 | macros/latex/base/encguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 52927 | macros/latex/base/encguide.tex
-2019/10/01 | 7227 | macros/latex/base/exscale.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 3354 | macros/latex/base/exscale.ins
-2019/10/03 | 195896 | macros/latex/base/exscale.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 23521 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 2908 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.ins
-2019/10/03 | 261921 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf
-2019/10/03 | 356964 | macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 70758 | macros/latex/base/fntguide.tex
-2019/10/01 | 55836 | macros/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 8407 | macros/latex/base/format.ins
-2019/10/01 | 5515 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 2908 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.ins
-2019/10/03 | 156299 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 2726 | macros/latex/base/idx.tex
-2019/10/01 | 18305 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 2904 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.ins
-2019/10/03 | 205224 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 107001 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 5733 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.ins
-2019/10/03 | 294774 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 4103 | macros/latex/base/lablst.tex
-2019/10/01 | 38533 | macros/latex/base/latex209.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 4236 | macros/latex/base/latex209.ins
-2019/10/03 | 391042 | macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 34065 | macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex
-2019/10/01 | 32179 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 5251 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.ins
-2019/10/03 | 245932 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 6719 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 5065 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.ins
-2019/10/03 | 192302 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 1384 | macros/latex/base/legal.txt
-2019/10/01 | 61549 | macros/latex/base/letter.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 3391 | macros/latex/base/letter.ins
-2019/10/03 | 305223 | macros/latex/base/letter.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 9081 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt
-2018/04/06 | 14357 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt
-2018/04/06 | 14440 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt
-2018/04/06 | 19107 | macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
-2019/10/01 | 4304 | macros/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 14440 | macros/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 40203 | macros/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 93916 | macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 9562 | macros/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 22712 | macros/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 55754 | macros/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 34244 | macros/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 24024 | macros/latex/base/lterror.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 36585 | macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 39898 | macros/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 49835 | macros/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 28334 | macros/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 71304 | macros/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 10376 | macros/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 62037 | macros/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 20809 | macros/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 65861 | macros/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 4952 | macros/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 5865 | macros/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 4762 | macros/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 36085 | macros/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 3731 | macros/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 59577 | macros/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 302614 | macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 34845 | macros/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 43622 | macros/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 150037 | macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5290 | macros/latex/base/ltnews01.tex
-2019/10/03 | 141568 | macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5308 | macros/latex/base/ltnews02.tex
-2019/10/03 | 141553 | macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5213 | macros/latex/base/ltnews03.tex
-2019/10/03 | 135588 | macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5521 | macros/latex/base/ltnews04.tex
-2019/10/03 | 163996 | macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5621 | macros/latex/base/ltnews05.tex
-2019/10/03 | 133153 | macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5405 | macros/latex/base/ltnews06.tex
-2019/10/03 | 130846 | macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5436 | macros/latex/base/ltnews07.tex
-2019/10/03 | 144488 | macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5710 | macros/latex/base/ltnews08.tex
-2019/10/03 | 120228 | macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5313 | macros/latex/base/ltnews09.tex
-2019/10/03 | 147958 | macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5682 | macros/latex/base/ltnews10.tex
-2019/10/03 | 104961 | macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5544 | macros/latex/base/ltnews11.tex
-2019/10/03 | 137932 | macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5430 | macros/latex/base/ltnews12.tex
-2019/10/03 | 161084 | macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 6893 | macros/latex/base/ltnews13.tex
-2019/10/03 | 150934 | macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 6292 | macros/latex/base/ltnews14.tex
-2019/10/03 | 122102 | macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5859 | macros/latex/base/ltnews15.tex
-2019/10/03 | 137511 | macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5808 | macros/latex/base/ltnews16.tex
-2019/10/03 | 156570 | macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 8900 | macros/latex/base/ltnews17.tex
-2019/10/03 | 36022 | macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 1353 | macros/latex/base/ltnews18.tex
-2019/10/03 | 235086 | macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 4171 | macros/latex/base/ltnews19.tex
-2019/10/03 | 283194 | macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 7326 | macros/latex/base/ltnews20.tex
-2019/10/03 | 236117 | macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 9814 | macros/latex/base/ltnews21.tex
-2019/10/03 | 302730 | macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 10673 | macros/latex/base/ltnews22.tex
-2019/10/03 | 274345 | macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 10692 | macros/latex/base/ltnews23.tex
-2019/10/03 | 255315 | macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 12227 | macros/latex/base/ltnews24.tex
-2019/10/03 | 196347 | macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5475 | macros/latex/base/ltnews25.tex
-2019/10/03 | 365476 | macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 10699 | macros/latex/base/ltnews26.tex
-2019/10/03 | 239777 | macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5513 | macros/latex/base/ltnews27.tex
-2019/10/03 | 368527 | macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 14908 | macros/latex/base/ltnews28.tex
-2019/10/03 | 435477 | macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 19022 | macros/latex/base/ltnews29.tex
-2019/10/03 | 490987 | macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 23793 | macros/latex/base/ltnews30.tex
-2019/10/01 | 20270 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.cls
-2019/10/03 | 874488 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 7016 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.tex
-2019/10/01 | 168346 | macros/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 3336 | macros/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
-2019/10/01 | 175370 | macros/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 11451 | macros/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 2733 | macros/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 5854 | macros/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 50170 | macros/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 47764 | macros/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 31899 | macros/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 39973 | macros/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 46253 | macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 8737 | macros/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 9722 | macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 197812 | macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 18350 | macros/latex/base/ltx3info.tex
-2019/10/01 | 27139 | macros/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex
-2019/10/01 | 18558 | macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 215398 | macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 7578 | macros/latex/base/ltxguide.cls
-2019/10/01 | 14838 | macros/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 10606 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 3450 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.ins
-2019/10/03 | 160694 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 9882 | macros/latex/base/manifest.txt
-2019/10/01 | 1948 | macros/latex/base/minimal.cls
-2019/10/03 | 226754 | macros/latex/base/modguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 16262 | macros/latex/base/modguide.tex
-2019/10/01 | 4272 | macros/latex/base/newdc.ins
-2019/10/01 | 6363 | macros/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 18377 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 2909 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
-2019/10/03 | 202443 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 3980 | macros/latex/base/olddc.ins
-2019/10/01 | 8632 | macros/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 9374 | macros/latex/base/preload.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 13305 | macros/latex/base/proc.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 3417 | macros/latex/base/proc.ins
-2019/10/03 | 216911 | macros/latex/base/proc.pdf
-2019/10/03 | 3741 | macros/latex/base/README.md
-2018/04/06 | 7247 | macros/latex/base/sample2e.tex
-2019/10/01 | 89474 | macros/latex/base/slides.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 6784 | macros/latex/base/slides.ins
-2019/10/03 | 351783 | macros/latex/base/slides.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 15821 | macros/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
-2019/10/03 | 214312 | macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 1700 | macros/latex/base/small2e.tex
-2019/10/03 | 2867799 | macros/latex/base/source2e.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 14570 | macros/latex/base/source2e.tex
-2019/10/01 | 9401 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
-2019/10/01 | 2913 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.ins
-2019/10/03 | 181755 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 12537 | macros/latex/base/testpage.tex
-2018/04/06 | 2738 | macros/latex/base/tex2.txt
-2019/10/01 | 8541 | macros/latex/base/texpert.txt
-2019/10/01 | 12130 | macros/latex/base/tulm.fdd
-2019/10/01 | 3798 | macros/latex/base/tulm.ins
-2019/10/03 | 156547 | macros/latex/base/tulm.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 3194 | macros/latex/base/unpack.ins
-2019/10/03 | 396665 | macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 67931 | macros/latex/base/usrguide.tex
-2019/10/01 | 89294 | macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 337638 | macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf
-2019/10/04 | 20485404 | macros/latex/base.zip
+2019/10/13 | 6654 | macros/latex/base/alltt.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2906 | macros/latex/base/alltt.ins
+2019/10/13 | 172933 | macros/latex/base/alltt.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3293 | macros/latex/base/bugs.txt
+2019/10/13 | 219616 | macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 22480 | macros/latex/base/cfgguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 42717 | macros/latex/base/changes.old.txt
+2019/10/13 | 305028 | macros/latex/base/changes.txt
+2019/10/13 | 154723 | macros/latex/base/classes.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4104 | macros/latex/base/classes.ins
+2019/10/13 | 520771 | macros/latex/base/classes.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 371681 | macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 69216 | macros/latex/base/clsguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5299 | macros/latex/base/cmextra.ins
+2019/10/13 | 43246 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
+2019/10/13 | 4341 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
+2019/10/13 | 270763 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 223453 | macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 17520 | macros/latex/base/cyrguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 203062 | macros/latex/base/doc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 628225 | macros/latex/base/doc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 163682 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4237 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.ins
+2019/10/13 | 469980 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4406 | macros/latex/base/ec.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1510925 | macros/latex/base/encguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 52927 | macros/latex/base/encguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 7227 | macros/latex/base/exscale.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3354 | macros/latex/base/exscale.ins
+2019/10/13 | 195888 | macros/latex/base/exscale.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 23521 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2908 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.ins
+2019/10/13 | 261914 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 356957 | macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 70758 | macros/latex/base/fntguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 55836 | macros/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 8407 | macros/latex/base/format.ins
+2019/10/13 | 5515 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2908 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.ins
+2019/10/13 | 156292 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2726 | macros/latex/base/idx.tex
+2019/10/13 | 18305 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2904 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.ins
+2019/10/13 | 205217 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 107001 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5733 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 294767 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4103 | macros/latex/base/lablst.tex
+2019/10/13 | 38533 | macros/latex/base/latex209.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4236 | macros/latex/base/latex209.ins
+2019/10/13 | 225523 | macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 34286 | macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex
+2019/10/13 | 32179 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5251 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.ins
+2019/10/13 | 245923 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 6719 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5065 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.ins
+2019/10/13 | 192295 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1384 | macros/latex/base/legal.txt
+2019/10/13 | 61549 | macros/latex/base/letter.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3391 | macros/latex/base/letter.ins
+2019/10/13 | 305216 | macros/latex/base/letter.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 9081 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt
+2019/10/13 | 14357 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt
+2019/10/13 | 14440 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt
+2019/10/13 | 19107 | macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+2019/10/13 | 4304 | macros/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 14440 | macros/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 40203 | macros/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 93920 | macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 9562 | macros/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 22712 | macros/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 55754 | macros/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 34244 | macros/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 24024 | macros/latex/base/lterror.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 37017 | macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 39898 | macros/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 49835 | macros/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 28334 | macros/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 71304 | macros/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 10376 | macros/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 62037 | macros/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 20809 | macros/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 65861 | macros/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4952 | macros/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5865 | macros/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4762 | macros/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 36085 | macros/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3731 | macros/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 59577 | macros/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 302608 | macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 34845 | macros/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 43622 | macros/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 150029 | macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5290 | macros/latex/base/ltnews01.tex
+2019/10/13 | 141561 | macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5308 | macros/latex/base/ltnews02.tex
+2019/10/13 | 141545 | macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5213 | macros/latex/base/ltnews03.tex
+2019/10/13 | 135582 | macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5521 | macros/latex/base/ltnews04.tex
+2019/10/13 | 163988 | macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5621 | macros/latex/base/ltnews05.tex
+2019/10/13 | 133148 | macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5405 | macros/latex/base/ltnews06.tex
+2019/10/13 | 130839 | macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5436 | macros/latex/base/ltnews07.tex
+2019/10/13 | 144481 | macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5710 | macros/latex/base/ltnews08.tex
+2019/10/13 | 120220 | macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5313 | macros/latex/base/ltnews09.tex
+2019/10/13 | 147952 | macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5682 | macros/latex/base/ltnews10.tex
+2019/10/13 | 104954 | macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5544 | macros/latex/base/ltnews11.tex
+2019/10/13 | 137927 | macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5430 | macros/latex/base/ltnews12.tex
+2019/10/13 | 161077 | macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 6893 | macros/latex/base/ltnews13.tex
+2019/10/13 | 150928 | macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 6292 | macros/latex/base/ltnews14.tex
+2019/10/13 | 122098 | macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5859 | macros/latex/base/ltnews15.tex
+2019/10/13 | 137504 | macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5808 | macros/latex/base/ltnews16.tex
+2019/10/13 | 156562 | macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 8900 | macros/latex/base/ltnews17.tex
+2019/10/13 | 36015 | macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1353 | macros/latex/base/ltnews18.tex
+2019/10/13 | 235078 | macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4171 | macros/latex/base/ltnews19.tex
+2019/10/13 | 283187 | macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 7326 | macros/latex/base/ltnews20.tex
+2019/10/13 | 236109 | macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 9814 | macros/latex/base/ltnews21.tex
+2019/10/13 | 302724 | macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 10673 | macros/latex/base/ltnews22.tex
+2019/10/13 | 274338 | macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 10692 | macros/latex/base/ltnews23.tex
+2019/10/13 | 255308 | macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 12227 | macros/latex/base/ltnews24.tex
+2019/10/13 | 196341 | macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5475 | macros/latex/base/ltnews25.tex
+2019/10/13 | 365469 | macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 10699 | macros/latex/base/ltnews26.tex
+2019/10/13 | 239770 | macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5513 | macros/latex/base/ltnews27.tex
+2019/10/13 | 368520 | macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 14908 | macros/latex/base/ltnews28.tex
+2019/10/13 | 435472 | macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 19022 | macros/latex/base/ltnews29.tex
+2019/10/13 | 490980 | macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 23793 | macros/latex/base/ltnews30.tex
+2019/10/13 | 20270 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.cls
+2019/10/13 | 874481 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 7016 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.tex
+2019/10/13 | 168346 | macros/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3336 | macros/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 175370 | macros/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 11451 | macros/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2733 | macros/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5854 | macros/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 50170 | macros/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 47764 | macros/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 31899 | macros/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 39973 | macros/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 46389 | macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 8737 | macros/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 9722 | macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 197803 | macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 18350 | macros/latex/base/ltx3info.tex
+2019/10/13 | 27139 | macros/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex
+2019/10/13 | 18558 | macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 215391 | macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 7578 | macros/latex/base/ltxguide.cls
+2019/10/13 | 14838 | macros/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 10606 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3450 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.ins
+2019/10/13 | 160685 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 9882 | macros/latex/base/manifest.txt
+2019/10/13 | 1948 | macros/latex/base/minimal.cls
+2019/10/13 | 226745 | macros/latex/base/modguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 16262 | macros/latex/base/modguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 4272 | macros/latex/base/newdc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 6363 | macros/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 18407 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2909 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
+2019/10/13 | 202438 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3980 | macros/latex/base/olddc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 8632 | macros/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 9374 | macros/latex/base/preload.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 13305 | macros/latex/base/proc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3417 | macros/latex/base/proc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 216904 | macros/latex/base/proc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3755 | macros/latex/base/README.md
+2019/10/13 | 7247 | macros/latex/base/sample2e.tex
+2019/10/13 | 89474 | macros/latex/base/slides.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 6784 | macros/latex/base/slides.ins
+2019/10/13 | 351773 | macros/latex/base/slides.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 15821 | macros/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
+2019/10/13 | 214304 | macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1700 | macros/latex/base/small2e.tex
+2019/10/13 | 2851662 | macros/latex/base/source2e.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 14570 | macros/latex/base/source2e.tex
+2019/10/13 | 9401 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2913 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.ins
+2019/10/13 | 181750 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 12537 | macros/latex/base/testpage.tex
+2019/10/13 | 2738 | macros/latex/base/tex2.txt
+2019/10/13 | 8541 | macros/latex/base/texpert.txt
+2019/10/13 | 12130 | macros/latex/base/tulm.fdd
+2019/10/13 | 3798 | macros/latex/base/tulm.ins
+2019/10/13 | 156542 | macros/latex/base/tulm.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3194 | macros/latex/base/unpack.ins
+2019/10/13 | 396657 | macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 67931 | macros/latex/base/usrguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 89294 | macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 337628 | macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 20355733 | macros/latex/base.zip
2005/04/09 | 16501 | macros/latex/contrib/12many/12many.dtx
2005/04/09 | 1219 | macros/latex/contrib/12many/12many.ins
2005/04/09 | 393999 | macros/latex/contrib/12many/12many.pdf
@@ -179108,11 +179114,11 @@
2011/03/06 | 36170 | macros/latex/contrib/chemexec/chemexec.sty
2011/03/05 | 1572 | macros/latex/contrib/chemexec/README
2011/03/06 | 377701 | macros/latex/contrib/chemexec.zip
-2019/09/29 | 950277 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf
-2019/09/29 | 64999 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex
-2019/09/29 | 131377 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty
-2019/09/29 | 1386 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/README
-2019/09/30 | 985613 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula.zip
+2019/10/13 | 857631 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 65081 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex
+2019/10/13 | 131779 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty
+2019/10/13 | 1386 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/README
+2019/10/13 | 892882 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula.zip
2016/12/20 | 737766 | macros/latex/contrib/chemgreek/chemgreek_en.pdf
2016/12/20 | 19274 | macros/latex/contrib/chemgreek/chemgreek_en.tex
2016/12/20 | 47119 | macros/latex/contrib/chemgreek/chemgreek.sty
@@ -187829,203 +187835,205 @@
2012/01/04 | 12594 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-moderncvclassic/koma-moderncvclassic.sty
2012/01/04 | 1274 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-moderncvclassic/README
2012/01/04 | 194292 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-moderncvclassic.zip
-2019/02/01 | 7343 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/INSTALLD.txt
-2019/02/01 | 7066 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/INSTALL.txt
-2019/02/01 | 29553 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komabug.tex
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komascr.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/koma-script.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komascript.html
-2019/02/01 | 25055 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/lppl-de.txt
-2019/02/01 | 19110 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/lppl.txt
-2019/02/01 | 20111 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scraddr.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrartcl.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrbase.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrbook.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrdate.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrextend.html
-2019/02/01 | 176908 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html
-2019/02/01 | 3150915 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf
-2019/02/01 | 176325 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html
-2019/02/01 | 2999593 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrhack.html
-2019/02/01 | 195411 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-notecolumn.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-scrpage.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrletter.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlfile.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlttr2.html
-2019/02/01 | 714231 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdf
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrreprt.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrtime.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrwfile.html
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocbasic.html
-2019/02/01 | 254904 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdf
-2019/02/01 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/typearea.html
-2019/02/01 | 28970 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README
+2019/10/12 | 7343 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/INSTALLD.txt
+2019/10/12 | 7066 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/INSTALL.txt
+2019/10/12 | 29553 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komabug.tex
+2019/10/12 | 165040 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komamarks.pdf
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komascr.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/koma-script.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komascript.html
+2019/10/12 | 25055 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/lppl-de.txt
+2019/10/12 | 19110 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/lppl.txt
+2019/10/12 | 20182 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scraddr.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrartcl.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrbase.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrbook.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrdate.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrextend.html
+2019/10/12 | 188494 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html
+2019/10/12 | 3209539 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf
+2019/10/12 | 187550 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html
+2019/10/12 | 3056153 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrhack.html
+2019/10/12 | 195988 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-notecolumn.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-scrpage.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrletter.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlfile.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlttr2.html
+2019/10/12 | 714165 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdf
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrreprt.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrtime.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrwfile.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocbasic.html
+2019/10/12 | 254508 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdf
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/typearea.html
+2019/10/12 | 33563 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README
2005/05/31 | 242 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script-SFS/README
2005/05/31 | 39097 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script-SFS/SFSesim.pdf
2005/05/31 | 2390 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script-SFS/SFSesim.tex
2005/05/31 | 7229 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script-SFS/SFS.lco
2005/05/31 | 41293 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script-SFS.zip
-2019/02/01 | 465931 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog
-2019/02/01 | 96496 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog.2
-2019/02/01 | 6210 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl
-2019/02/01 | 6003 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genindex.pl
-2019/02/01 | 3859 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex
-2019/02/01 | 3178 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/authorpart.tex
-2019/02/01 | 8392 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex
-2019/02/01 | 10489 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex
-2019/02/01 | 5116 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex
-2019/02/01 | 8639 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex
-2019/02/01 | 26157 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex
-2019/02/01 | 7582 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex
-2019/02/01 | 15078 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex
-2019/02/01 | 33091 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex
-2019/02/01 | 5400 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex
-2019/02/01 | 4993 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex
-2019/02/01 | 10495 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex
-2019/02/01 | 47315 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
-2019/02/01 | 12352 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex
-2019/02/01 | 39691 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex
-2019/02/01 | 29527 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex
-2019/02/01 | 3724 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex
-2019/02/01 | 2872 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/expertpart.tex
-2019/02/01 | 17388 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex
-2019/02/01 | 2504 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup
-2019/02/01 | 18471 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex
-2019/02/01 | 26201 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex
-2019/02/01 | 1981 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/Makefile
-2019/02/01 | 6067 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex
-2019/02/01 | 10213 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex
-2019/02/01 | 71609 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex
-2019/02/01 | 82240 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 219828 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex
-2019/02/01 | 17640 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex
-2019/02/01 | 9050 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex
-2019/02/01 | 12903 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex
-2019/02/01 | 3392 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjuraexample.tex
-2019/02/01 | 49855 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex
-2019/02/01 | 4287 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex
-2019/02/01 | 32308 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
-2019/02/01 | 18403 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 53861 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
-2019/02/01 | 78150 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex
-2019/02/01 | 31891 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex
-2019/02/01 | 11138 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2examples.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 80924 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 159612 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex
-2019/02/01 | 13262 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex
-2019/02/01 | 119380 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex
-2019/02/01 | 11868 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 88641 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex
-2019/02/01 | 22993 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib
-2019/02/01 | 3854 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.tex
-2019/02/01 | 4404 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex
-2019/02/01 | 7170 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile
-2019/02/01 | 10699 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide
-2019/02/01 | 2515 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.latexinit
-2019/02/01 | 3756 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex
-2019/02/01 | 3333 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex
-2019/02/01 | 8765 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex
-2019/02/01 | 11545 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex
-2019/02/01 | 5200 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex
-2019/02/01 | 9734 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex
-2019/02/01 | 29609 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex
-2019/02/01 | 8149 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex
-2019/02/01 | 16048 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex
-2019/02/01 | 34154 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex
-2019/02/01 | 5692 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex
-2019/02/01 | 5450 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex
-2019/02/01 | 11488 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex
-2019/02/01 | 52936 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
-2019/02/01 | 12842 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex
-2019/02/01 | 42405 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex
-2019/02/01 | 31844 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex
-2019/02/01 | 3702 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex
-2019/02/01 | 2817 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex
-2019/02/01 | 18602 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex
-2019/02/01 | 2549 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup
-2019/02/01 | 22357 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex
-2019/02/01 | 1768 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/Makefile
-2019/02/01 | 6371 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex
-2019/02/01 | 11171 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex
-2019/02/01 | 84370 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex
-2019/02/01 | 93380 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 241271 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex
-2019/02/01 | 17973 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex
-2019/02/01 | 9668 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex
-2019/02/01 | 14291 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex
-2019/02/01 | 3750 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex
-2019/02/01 | 55436 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex
-2019/02/01 | 4623 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex
-2019/02/01 | 37613 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
-2019/02/01 | 20556 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 59890 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
-2019/02/01 | 91397 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex
-2019/02/01 | 34733 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex
-2019/02/01 | 11138 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 87074 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 175552 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex
-2019/02/01 | 14388 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex
-2019/02/01 | 132861 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex
-2019/02/01 | 13281 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex
-2019/02/01 | 99455 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex
-2019/02/01 | 42988 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 92054 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls
-2019/02/01 | 2212 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.gst
-2019/02/01 | 1789 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.ist
-2019/02/01 | 121016 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex
-2019/02/01 | 12311 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 16325 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile
-2019/02/01 | 8184 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile.baseinit
-2019/02/01 | 4104 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile.baserules
-2019/02/01 | 14016 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 13592 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrdoc.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 10309 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrdocstrip.tex
-2019/02/01 | 8048 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 46055 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 71698 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 171020 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 26710 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 5624 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 23102 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 74745 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 83462 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 23882 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 15836 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 68064 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 58042 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 17176 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 41528 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 43045 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 144299 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 32312 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 27615 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 11511 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 247978 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 34512 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 81581 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 123410 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 12823 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 7281 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 161160 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 23479 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 63194 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 109477 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 32132 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 4144 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlogo.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 22049 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins
-2019/02/01 | 79994 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 5034 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex
-2019/02/01 | 4433 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc
-2019/02/01 | 2545 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrop.inc
-2019/02/01 | 26278 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 15894 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 71560 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx
-2019/02/01 | 80219 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx
-2019/02/03 | 8817679 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script.zip
+2019/10/12 | 498841 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog
+2019/10/12 | 96496 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog.2
+2019/10/12 | 6675 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl
+2019/10/12 | 6003 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genindex.pl
+2019/10/12 | 3859 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3178 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/authorpart.tex
+2019/10/12 | 8392 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex
+2019/10/12 | 10489 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex
+2019/10/12 | 5116 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex
+2019/10/12 | 8639 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex
+2019/10/12 | 26157 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex
+2019/10/12 | 7582 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex
+2019/10/12 | 15078 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 33091 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex
+2019/10/12 | 5400 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex
+2019/10/12 | 4993 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 10439 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex
+2019/10/12 | 47291 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
+2019/10/12 | 12352 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex
+2019/10/12 | 39687 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex
+2019/10/12 | 29527 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3724 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex
+2019/10/12 | 2872 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/expertpart.tex
+2019/10/12 | 17931 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex
+2019/10/12 | 2565 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup
+2019/10/12 | 18471 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex
+2019/10/12 | 26178 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex
+2019/10/12 | 1981 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/Makefile
+2019/10/12 | 6067 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex
+2019/10/12 | 10213 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex
+2019/10/12 | 85883 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex
+2019/10/12 | 88983 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 220999 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex
+2019/10/12 | 17640 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex
+2019/10/12 | 9050 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex
+2019/10/12 | 15060 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3392 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjuraexample.tex
+2019/10/12 | 50841 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex
+2019/10/12 | 4287 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex
+2019/10/12 | 33679 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
+2019/10/12 | 18403 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 53861 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 78457 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex
+2019/10/12 | 31891 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11138 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2examples.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 83123 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 160445 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex
+2019/10/12 | 13262 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex
+2019/10/12 | 127040 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11868 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 88641 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex
+2019/10/12 | 23017 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib
+2019/10/12 | 3854 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.tex
+2019/10/12 | 4550 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex
+2019/10/12 | 7170 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile
+2019/10/12 | 10760 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide
+2019/10/12 | 2515 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.latexinit
+2019/10/12 | 3769 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3343 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex
+2019/10/12 | 8824 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11577 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex
+2019/10/12 | 5221 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex
+2019/10/12 | 9830 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex
+2019/10/12 | 29830 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex
+2019/10/12 | 8222 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex
+2019/10/12 | 16128 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 34375 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex
+2019/10/12 | 5712 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex
+2019/10/12 | 5463 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11543 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex
+2019/10/12 | 53222 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
+2019/10/12 | 12914 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex
+2019/10/12 | 42566 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex
+2019/10/12 | 32000 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3706 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex
+2019/10/12 | 2822 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex
+2019/10/12 | 19210 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex
+2019/10/12 | 2621 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup
+2019/10/12 | 22560 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex
+2019/10/12 | 1768 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/Makefile
+2019/10/12 | 6428 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11243 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex
+2019/10/12 | 100768 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex
+2019/10/12 | 101387 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 244175 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex
+2019/10/12 | 18042 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex
+2019/10/12 | 9735 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex
+2019/10/12 | 16684 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3789 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex
+2019/10/12 | 56746 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex
+2019/10/12 | 4623 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex
+2019/10/12 | 39452 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
+2019/10/12 | 20673 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 60357 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 92424 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex
+2019/10/12 | 34962 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11138 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 89967 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 177714 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex
+2019/10/12 | 14509 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex
+2019/10/12 | 142368 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex
+2019/10/12 | 13394 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 100334 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex
+2019/10/12 | 42976 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 93574 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls
+2019/10/12 | 2212 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.gst
+2019/10/12 | 1789 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.ist
+2019/10/12 | 121375 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex
+2019/10/12 | 12295 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 18016 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/komamarks.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 16519 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile
+2019/10/12 | 8184 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile.baseinit
+2019/10/12 | 4104 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile.baserules
+2019/10/12 | 14025 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 13592 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrdoc.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 10309 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrdocstrip.tex
+2019/10/12 | 8031 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 73267 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 74053 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 185412 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 26686 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 5598 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 23143 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 74898 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 83598 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 23867 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 15820 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 77323 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 58714 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 17154 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 43525 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 46645 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 189777 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 33776 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 28631 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 12314 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 260933 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 34812 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 104797 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 123503 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 15090 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 8051 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 161419 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 23653 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 68136 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 112648 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 33163 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 4144 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlogo.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 22513 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins
+2019/10/12 | 79506 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 5016 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex
+2019/10/12 | 4433 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc
+2019/10/12 | 2545 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrop.inc
+2019/10/12 | 26143 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 15892 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 71513 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 79328 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 9158525 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script.zip
2015/12/09 | 215 | macros/latex/contrib/ksp-thesis/demo/full/content/appendix/bibliography.tex
2015/12/09 | 688 | macros/latex/contrib/ksp-thesis/demo/full/content/appendix/lists.tex
2015/12/09 | 243 | macros/latex/contrib/ksp-thesis/demo/full/content/appendix.tex
@@ -190905,13 +190913,13 @@
1996/03/22 | 18862 | macros/latex/contrib/niceframe/umrandb.mf
2015/01/17 | 1370 | macros/latex/contrib/niceframe/umrand.mf
2015/01/17 | 287910 | macros/latex/contrib/niceframe.zip
-2019/10/05 | 239301 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx
-2019/10/05 | 313943 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf
-2019/10/05 | 77076 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex
+2019/10/13 | 240176 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 316632 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf
+2019/10/07 | 77436 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex
2019/01/16 | 1423 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.ins
-2019/10/05 | 656408 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf
-2019/09/28 | 976 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md
-2019/10/05 | 1004173 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix.zip
+2019/10/13 | 660302 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf
+2019/10/07 | 974 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md
+2019/10/13 | 1010353 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix.zip
2015/11/21 | 217 | macros/latex/contrib/nicetext/ANNOUNCE.txt
2012/03/18 | 254582 | macros/latex/contrib/nicetext/demo/arseneau.pdf
2011/09/14 | 10 | macros/latex/contrib/nicetext/demo/iso.txt
@@ -202619,104 +202627,106 @@
2019/08/13 | 12213 | macros/latex/contrib/xsavebox/xsavebox.sty
2019/06/24 | 10243 | macros/latex/contrib/xsavebox/xsavebox.tex
2019/08/13 | 380744 | macros/latex/contrib/xsavebox.zip
-2019/10/07 | 6298 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.auxfile.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 5934 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.base.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 5827 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.blanks.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 12945 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.collections.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 14603 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 15370 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 19295 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 9481 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.goals.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 4707 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.grades.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 20929 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 6689 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 15653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.properties.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 10594 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.random.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 13152 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.solutions.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 3454 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty
-2019/10/07 | 2565 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 6643 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.tags.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 5319 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.templates.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 4795 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.translations.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 3002 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsimverb.sty
-2019/10/07 | 7231 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.verbwrite.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 29952 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 469 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.tex
-2019/10/07 | 38376 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 570 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.tex
-2019/10/07 | 30938 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1069 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.tex
-2019/10/07 | 33206 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1394 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.tex
-2019/10/07 | 38749 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1351 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.tex
-2019/10/07 | 41167 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 776 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.tex
-2019/10/07 | 42153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1337 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.tex
-2019/10/07 | 31555 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1345 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.tex
-2019/10/07 | 37708 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1013 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.tex
-2019/10/07 | 46308 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 3442 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.tex
-2019/10/07 | 65379 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 2259 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.tex
-2019/10/07 | 23204 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 894 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.tex
-2019/10/07 | 45719 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1313 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.tex
-2019/10/07 | 45738 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 821 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.tex
-2019/10/07 | 57220 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1792 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.tex
-2019/10/07 | 31016 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1425 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.tex
-2019/10/07 | 28127 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.tex
-2019/10/07 | 23102 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 948 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.tex
-2019/10/07 | 86047 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1913 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.tex
-2019/10/07 | 20045 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 443 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.tex
-2019/10/07 | 56153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1183 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.tex
-2019/10/07 | 48094 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 613 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.tex
-2019/10/07 | 36968 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1072 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.tex
-2019/10/07 | 27155 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 247 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.tex
-2019/10/07 | 57235 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1828 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.tex
-2019/10/07 | 95065 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 3547 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.tex
-2019/10/07 | 65721 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1862 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.tex
-2019/10/07 | 46504 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 927 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.tex
-2019/10/07 | 55079 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1404 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.tex
-2019/10/07 | 28426 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 542 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.tex
-2019/10/07 | 25040 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1385 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.tex
-2019/10/07 | 50580 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1923 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.tex
-2019/10/07 | 36256 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 3142 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.tex
-2019/10/07 | 43899 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1777 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.tex
-2019/10/07 | 86646 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 5844 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.tex
-2019/10/07 | 6289 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history
-2019/10/07 | 1243 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas
-2019/10/07 | 24096 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls
-2019/10/07 | 1220136 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 101047 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex
-2019/10/07 | 3802 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README
-2019/10/07 | 2823197 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim.zip
+2019/10/13 | 6298 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.auxfile.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5934 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.base.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5827 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.blanks.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 12945 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.collections.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 14983 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 15379 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 19589 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 9481 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.goals.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 4707 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.grades.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 21296 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 6843 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 15653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.properties.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 10594 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.random.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 13152 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.solutions.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 3454 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty
+2019/10/13 | 3022 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 6643 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.tags.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5319 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.templates.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 4795 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.translations.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 3002 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsimverb.sty
+2019/10/13 | 7231 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.verbwrite.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 29952 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 469 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.tex
+2019/10/13 | 38376 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 570 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.tex
+2019/10/13 | 30938 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1069 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.tex
+2019/10/13 | 33206 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1394 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.tex
+2019/10/13 | 38749 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1351 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.tex
+2019/10/13 | 41167 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 776 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.tex
+2019/10/13 | 42153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1337 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.tex
+2019/10/13 | 31555 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1345 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.tex
+2019/10/13 | 37708 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1013 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.tex
+2019/10/13 | 46308 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3442 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.tex
+2019/10/13 | 65379 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2259 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.tex
+2019/10/13 | 23204 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 894 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.tex
+2019/10/13 | 45719 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1313 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.tex
+2019/10/13 | 45738 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 821 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.tex
+2019/10/13 | 57220 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1792 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.tex
+2019/10/13 | 31016 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1425 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.tex
+2019/10/13 | 28127 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.tex
+2019/10/13 | 23102 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 948 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.tex
+2019/10/13 | 86047 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1913 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.tex
+2019/10/13 | 20045 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 443 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.tex
+2019/10/13 | 56153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1183 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.tex
+2019/10/13 | 48094 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 613 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.tex
+2019/10/13 | 36968 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1072 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.tex
+2019/10/13 | 27155 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 247 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.tex
+2019/10/13 | 57235 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.tex
+2019/10/13 | 95065 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3547 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.tex
+2019/10/13 | 65721 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1862 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.tex
+2019/10/13 | 46504 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 927 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.tex
+2019/10/13 | 55079 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1404 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.tex
+2019/10/13 | 28426 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 542 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.tex
+2019/10/13 | 25040 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1385 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.tex
+2019/10/13 | 50580 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1923 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.tex
+2019/10/13 | 36256 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3142 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.tex
+2019/10/13 | 46008 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1518 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.tex
+2019/10/13 | 43899 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1777 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.tex
+2019/10/13 | 86646 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5844 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.tex
+2019/10/13 | 6936 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history
+2019/10/13 | 1086 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas
+2019/10/13 | 24781 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls
+2019/10/13 | 1229192 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 104328 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex
+2019/10/13 | 3852 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README
+2019/10/13 | 2879087 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim.zip
2019/06/23 | 1140 | macros/latex/contrib/xskak/README.md
2019/06/23 | 21142 | macros/latex/contrib/xskak/skak-comment-test.pdf
2019/06/23 | 195 | macros/latex/contrib/xskak/skak-comment-test.tex
@@ -203647,43 +203657,44 @@
2007/03/14 | 5281 | macros/latex/required/amscls/upref.dtx
2014/07/25 | 1999 | macros/latex/required/amscls/upref.ins
2017/12/19 | 1282746 | macros/latex/required/amscls.zip
-2019/10/01 | 8657 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.ins
-2019/10/03 | 161341 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 11293 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1468 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.ins
-2019/10/03 | 165759 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5323 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/ams-external.txt
-2019/10/01 | 13452 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.ins
-2019/10/03 | 164359 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 5860 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/ams-internal.txt
-2019/10/03 | 453064 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 104303 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.tex
-2019/10/01 | 219246 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1484 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.ins
-2019/10/03 | 379697 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 9204 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.ins
-2019/10/03 | 129178 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 69722 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstex.sty
-2019/10/01 | 11411 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1473 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.ins
-2019/10/03 | 193911 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 4345 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1473 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.ins
-2019/10/03 | 104557 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 4285 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt
-2018/04/06 | 22605 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/diffs-m.txt
-2018/04/06 | 369 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/manifest.txt
-2019/10/03 | 2712 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md
-2019/10/03 | 101303 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
-2018/04/08 | 6444 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.tex
-2019/10/03 | 130493 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 12005 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.tex
-2019/10/03 | 428714 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 82371 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.tex
-2019/10/04 | 2564749 | macros/latex/required/amsmath.zip
+2019/10/13 | 8657 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.ins
+2019/10/13 | 161335 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 11293 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1468 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.ins
+2019/10/13 | 165753 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5323 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/ams-external.txt
+2019/10/13 | 13452 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.ins
+2019/10/13 | 164353 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5860 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/ams-internal.txt
+2019/10/13 | 453056 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 104303 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.tex
+2019/10/13 | 85093 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath-2018-12-01.sty
+2019/10/13 | 219246 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1484 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.ins
+2019/10/13 | 379691 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 9204 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.ins
+2019/10/13 | 129171 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 69722 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstex.sty
+2019/10/13 | 11411 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1473 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.ins
+2019/10/13 | 193904 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4345 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1473 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.ins
+2019/10/13 | 104549 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4513 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt
+2019/10/13 | 22605 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/diffs-m.txt
+2019/10/13 | 369 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/manifest.txt
+2019/10/13 | 2726 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md
+2019/10/13 | 101296 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 6444 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.tex
+2019/10/13 | 130486 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 12005 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.tex
+2019/10/13 | 428708 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 82371 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.tex
+2019/10/13 | 2583500 | macros/latex/required/amsmath.zip
2019/09/27 | 624546 | macros/latex/required/babel/base/babel.dtx
2019/09/27 | 7392 | macros/latex/required/babel/base/babel.ins
2019/09/27 | 701228 | macros/latex/required/babel/base/babel.pdf
@@ -203713,35 +203724,35 @@
2018/04/06 | 27640 | macros/latex/required/cyrillic/t2lhfnt.fdd
2018/04/06 | 135567 | macros/latex/required/cyrillic/t2lhfnt.pdf
2018/04/06 | 1179110 | macros/latex/required/cyrillic.zip
-2018/04/06 | 15737 | macros/latex/required/graphics/cat.eps
-2019/10/01 | 31231 | macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt
-2019/10/01 | 30946 | macros/latex/required/graphics/color.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 201390 | macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 50759 | macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 263552 | macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 4062 | macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 154503 | macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 15433 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics-2017-06-25.sty
-2018/04/06 | 2994 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics-drivers.ins
-2019/10/01 | 64639 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx
-2018/04/06 | 1128 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.ins
-2019/10/03 | 282829 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 32181 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 232399 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdf
-2019/10/03 | 310556 | macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 39417 | macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.tex
-2019/10/01 | 13799 | macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 222533 | macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdf
-2019/10/01 | 3814 | macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 150125 | macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdf
-2019/10/03 | 2078 | macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md
-2019/10/01 | 21023 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 245758 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdf
-2019/10/03 | 162266 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdf
-2018/04/06 | 14590 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.tex
-2019/10/01 | 10651 | macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.dtx
-2019/10/03 | 191712 | macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdf
-2019/10/04 | 2498615 | macros/latex/required/graphics.zip
+2019/10/13 | 15737 | macros/latex/required/graphics/cat.eps
+2019/10/13 | 31362 | macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt
+2019/10/13 | 30946 | macros/latex/required/graphics/color.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 201382 | macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 50759 | macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 263544 | macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4062 | macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 154496 | macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 15433 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics-2017-06-25.sty
+2019/10/13 | 2994 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics-drivers.ins
+2019/10/13 | 65403 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1128 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.ins
+2019/10/13 | 283250 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 32181 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 232393 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 310551 | macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 39417 | macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 13799 | macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 222527 | macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3814 | macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 150118 | macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2092 | macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md
+2019/10/13 | 21023 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 245753 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 162260 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 14590 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.tex
+2019/10/13 | 10651 | macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 191705 | macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2499207 | macros/latex/required/graphics.zip
2019/09/13 | 250 | macros/latex/required/latexbug/changes.txt
2019/09/13 | 30667 | macros/latex/required/latexbug/latexbug.dtx
2019/09/13 | 1952 | macros/latex/required/latexbug/latexbug.ins
@@ -246216,14 +246227,13 @@
1991/06/04 | 90303 | systems/mac/macbibtex2_0-sit.hqx
1994/02/22 | 94984 | systems/mac/macmakeindex2.12.sea.hqx
1993/07/19 | 61321 | systems/mac/macmakeindex.sit.hqx
-2019/04/29 | 47 | systems/mac/mactex/BasicTeX.pkg.md5
2019/10/10 | 38234 | systems/mac/mactex/ExtrasFolder.pdf
2019/05/05 | 71 | systems/mac/mactex/Ghostscript.pkg.md5
2019/10/10 | 1780 | systems/mac/mactex/Licenses.txt
2019/05/08 | 4124396391 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-20190508.pkg
2019/05/09 | 54 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-20190508.pkg.md5
-2019/04/11 | 79593970 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-basictex-20190410.pkg
-2019/04/11 | 63 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-basictex-20190410.pkg.md5
+2019/10/12 | 94280706 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-basictex-20191011.pkg
+2019/10/12 | 55 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-basictex-20191011.pkg.md5
2019/05/03 | 20933117 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-ghostscript-9.27-20190502.pkg
2019/05/03 | 71 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-ghostscript-9.27-20190502.pkg.md5
2019/05/09 | 54 | systems/mac/mactex/MacTeX.pkg.md5
@@ -248716,8 +248726,8 @@
2019/02/28 | 86524 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/c90.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 9824 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/c90.source.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 1928 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/c90.tar.xz
-2019/05/03 | 43360 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cabin.doc.tar.xz
-2019/05/03 | 1904680 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cabin.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 131976 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cabin.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1906352 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cabin.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cachepic.aarch64-linux.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cachepic.amd64-freebsd.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cachepic.amd64-netbsd.tar.xz
@@ -249033,8 +249043,8 @@
2019/02/28 | 207692 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circ.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 38440 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circ.source.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 23692 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circ.tar.xz
-2019/09/01 | 810400 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuitikz.doc.tar.xz
-2019/09/01 | 101616 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuitikz.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 835720 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuitikz.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 102732 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuitikz.tar.xz
2019/09/06 | 2268008 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuit-macros.doc.tar.xz
2019/09/06 | 1496 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuit-macros.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 110028 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/citeall.doc.tar.xz
@@ -249240,7 +249250,7 @@
2019/03/28 | 1140 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-bibtexextra.tar.xz
2019/08/24 | 908 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-binextra.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 600 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-context.tar.xz
-2019/09/11 | 1736 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-fontsextra.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1748 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-fontsextra.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 560 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-fontsrecommended.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 528 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-fontutils.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 572 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-formatsextra.tar.xz
@@ -249516,8 +249526,8 @@
2019/02/28 | 3560 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/copyedit.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 1691464 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/copyrightbox.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 1480 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/copyrightbox.tar.xz
-2019/06/25 | 56152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cormorantgaramond.doc.tar.xz
-2019/06/25 | 4336372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cormorantgaramond.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 56160 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cormorantgaramond.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 4337280 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cormorantgaramond.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 478128 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/correctmathalign.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 1508 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/correctmathalign.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 155852 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/coseoul.doc.tar.xz
@@ -249546,9 +249556,9 @@
2019/02/28 | 2864 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cprotect.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 2510176 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cqubeamer.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 3104 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cqubeamer.tar.xz
-2019/02/28 | 1091424 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.doc.tar.xz
-2019/02/28 | 30292 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.source.tar.xz
-2019/02/28 | 16112 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1139568 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 31048 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.source.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 16116 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 29448 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/crbox.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 1544 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/crbox.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 34248 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/crimson.doc.tar.xz
@@ -250776,8 +250786,8 @@
2019/02/28 | 3740 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/engtlc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 266504 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enigma.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 18320 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enigma.tar.xz
-2019/10/01 | 459436 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enotez.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/01 | 7380 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enotez.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 456620 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enotez.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 7340 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enotez.tar.xz
2019/06/23 | 163332 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enumitem.doc.tar.xz
2019/06/23 | 13756 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enumitem.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 684148 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enumitem-zref.doc.tar.xz
@@ -252317,6 +252327,8 @@
2019/02/28 | 4072 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/imakeidx.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 143264 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/imfellenglish.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 2947156 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/imfellenglish.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 351692 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/imfellflowers.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 143340 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/imfellflowers.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 3943828 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/impatient-cn.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 516 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/impatient-cn.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 1562772 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/impatient.doc.tar.xz
@@ -252742,15 +252754,15 @@
2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3build.x86_64-linuxmusl.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 340 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3build.x86_64-linux.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 340 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3build.x86_64-solaris.tar.xz
-2019/09/30 | 3869584 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.doc.tar.xz
-2019/09/30 | 84896 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.source.tar.xz
-2019/09/30 | 25112 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 3869360 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 84956 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.source.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 25104 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 7956532 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3kernel.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 524688 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3kernel.source.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 145520 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3kernel.tar.xz
-2019/07/04 | 1756496 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.doc.tar.xz
-2019/07/04 | 64500 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.source.tar.xz
-2019/07/04 | 19856 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1728212 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 64820 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.source.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 19860 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 210236 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/labbook.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 23192 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/labbook.source.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 4180 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/labbook.tar.xz
@@ -254623,10 +254635,10 @@
2019/02/28 | 196212 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newspaper.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 6804 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newspaper.source.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 1924 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newspaper.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 804992 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 805044 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 332220 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtxsf.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 105228 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtxsf.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 4537212 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 4529676 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 80548 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtxtt.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 116900 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtxtt.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 389624 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newunicodechar.doc.tar.xz
@@ -257571,7 +257583,7 @@
2019/04/06 | 276 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-it.tar.xz
2019/08/31 | 1502868 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-ja.doc.tar.xz
2019/08/31 | 276 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-ja.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 140536 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-msg-translations.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 140568 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-msg-translations.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texliveonfly.aarch64-linux.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texliveonfly.amd64-freebsd.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texliveonfly.amd64-netbsd.tar.xz
@@ -257598,13 +257610,13 @@
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.amd64-freebsd.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.amd64-netbsd.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.armhf-linux.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 51244 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 51244 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.i386-cygwin.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.i386-freebsd.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.i386-linux.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.i386-netbsd.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.i386-solaris.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 85096 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 85084 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.tar.xz
2019/08/31 | 11636 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.win32.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 372 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.x86_64-cygwin.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 376 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.x86_64-darwinlegacy.tar.xz
@@ -259138,16 +259150,16 @@
2019/02/28 | 136844 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/zxjatype.doc.tar.xz
2019/02/28 | 8412 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/zxjatype.tar.xz
2019/08/08 | 106115 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl
-2019/10/12 | 3942010 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz
-2019/10/12 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 3942261 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz
+2019/10/13 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc
2019/05/09 | 4543 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.bat
-2019/10/12 | 18693192 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe
-2019/10/12 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc
-2019/10/12 | 22534272 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip
-2019/10/12 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 18691879 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe
+2019/10/13 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 22534469 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip
+2019/10/13 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc
2019/04/29 | 1221 | systems/texlive/tlnet/README.md
2019/03/13 | 5351 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/gpg/pubring.gpg
2016/04/12 | 600 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/gpg/random_seed
@@ -259156,7 +259168,7 @@
2019/03/13 | 1280 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/gpg/trustdb.gpg
2019/09/14 | 48351 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/config.guess
2010/11/11 | 11651 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/COPYING.MinGW-runtime.txt
-2019/10/11 | 5238 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl
+2019/10/12 | 5192 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl
2018/04/29 | 13647 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/DirSelect.pm
2017/04/16 | 2629 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/installer-options.txt
2019/06/25 | 5491 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/install-menu-extl.pl
@@ -259202,12 +259214,12 @@
2019/09/23 | 18176 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLCrypto.pm
2016/10/11 | 4618 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLDownload.pm
2017/11/14 | 27560 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPaper.pm
-2019/10/12 | 15957025 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb
-2019/10/12 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5
+2019/10/13 | 15958116 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb
+2019/10/13 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5
2019/09/24 | 87255 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPDB.pm
-2019/10/12 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc
-2019/10/12 | 2128460 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz
+2019/10/13 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 2129008 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz
2019/03/03 | 57785 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPOBJ.pm
2018/12/17 | 36910 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPSRC.pm
2018/08/31 | 14972 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLTREE.pm
@@ -260861,26 +260873,26 @@
2019/10/06 | 1769 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/tltcl/tclkit.exe.manifest
2018/11/30 | 1310 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/tltcl/tlmgr.gif
2019/10/11 | 19752 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/tltcl/tltcl.tcl
-2019/10/05 | 86980 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/cs.po
-2019/10/05 | 94843 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/de.po
-2019/10/05 | 86012 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/es.po
-2019/10/05 | 99194 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/fr.po
-2019/10/05 | 93133 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/it.po
-2019/10/05 | 99584 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/ja.po
-2019/10/05 | 58681 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/messages.pot
-2019/10/05 | 74416 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/nl.po
-2019/10/05 | 72661 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/pl.po
-2019/10/05 | 86675 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/pt_BR.po
+2019/10/12 | 86982 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/cs.po
+2019/10/12 | 94845 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/de.po
+2019/10/12 | 86014 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/es.po
+2019/10/12 | 99196 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/fr.po
+2019/10/12 | 93135 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/it.po
+2019/10/12 | 99586 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/ja.po
+2019/10/12 | 58683 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/messages.pot
+2019/10/12 | 74418 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/nl.po
+2019/10/12 | 72663 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/pl.po
+2019/10/12 | 86677 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/pt_BR.po
2019/03/25 | 430 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/README
-2019/10/05 | 111279 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/ru.po
-2019/10/05 | 94176 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sk.po
-2019/10/05 | 75147 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sl.po
-2019/10/05 | 102047 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sr.po
+2019/10/12 | 111281 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/ru.po
+2019/10/12 | 94178 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sk.po
+2019/10/12 | 75149 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sl.po
+2019/10/12 | 102049 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sr.po
2019/03/28 | 847 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/translators
-2019/10/05 | 87047 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/uk.po
-2019/10/05 | 95572 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/vi.po
-2019/10/05 | 72797 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/zh_CN.po
-2019/10/05 | 63356 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/zh_TW.po
+2019/10/12 | 87049 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/uk.po
+2019/10/12 | 95574 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/vi.po
+2019/10/12 | 72799 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/zh_CN.po
+2019/10/12 | 63358 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/zh_TW.po
2019/07/06 | 6353421 | systems/texlive/tlnet/update-tlmgr-r51561.sh
2019/07/06 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/update-tlmgr-r51561.sh.sha512
2019/07/06 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/update-tlmgr-r51561.sh.sha512.asc
@@ -262576,7 +262588,7 @@
2019/10/04 | 281928 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/filehook.tar.lzma
2012/12/04 | 924573 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fileinfo.tar.lzma
2011/09/21 | 281409 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/filemod.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 511722 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 511722 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma
2001/05/14 | 5617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/finbib.tar.lzma
2015/10/20 | 44379 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/findhyph.tar.lzma
2011/10/21 | 89323 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fink.tar.lzma
@@ -263676,9 +263688,9 @@
2018/01/12 | 157226 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zip-bin-x64.tar.lzma
2019/09/28 | 38716 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/09/28 | 42876 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 191273 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1140246 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1063188 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 191271 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1140500 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1063859 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/09/28 | 13043 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/09/28 | 14032 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2016/07/15 | 35914 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mil3.tar.lzma
@@ -263823,183 +263835,183 @@
2018/04/09 | 400132 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/newunicodechar.tar.lzma
2011/09/19 | 101312 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/newvbtm.tar.lzma
2019/09/11 | 231430 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/newverbs.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 511519 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 29251 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 33426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 863046 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 954180 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 24055 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 26196 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 29258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 34851 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 49733 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 57193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 84435 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 94258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 60337 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 67253 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 26649 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 30239 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 328751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 391449 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 32193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 36366 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 49274 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 53940 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 198186 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 214120 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 169240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 184240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 52036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 58852 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 20721 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 22911 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 450077 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 41010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 45777 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 271721 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 308931 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 40558 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 44955 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 112855 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 127165 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1205459 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1326762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 33355 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 38690 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 43447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 47971 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 45472 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 50507 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 56634 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 61778 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 133150 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 152131 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 69601 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 72691 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 68751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 77425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 246473 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 281505 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 25321 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 28739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 100717 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 116837 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 63277 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 72559 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 94163 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 110968 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 35221 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 39877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 457518 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 544493 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1101602 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1273248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 137122 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 149927 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 92920 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 108877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 15892 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 17692 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 27654 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 29712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 499166 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 560965 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 539378 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 575508 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 93414 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 102390 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1407481 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1620006 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 67252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 73601 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 26960 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 31187 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 7497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 8452 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 167815 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 182712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 247520 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 281256 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 87276 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 92003 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 77868 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 86746 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 165673 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 185586 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 146753 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 165557 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 194933 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 177647 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 80470 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 91205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 31009 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 34839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 56406 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 62919 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 41902 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 45726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 45618 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 52010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 354711 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 387871 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 321228 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 356014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 186820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 193858 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 202550 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 237450 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 77969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 87208 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 933133 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1042823 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 19792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 23334 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 31154 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 36624 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 63193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 71580 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 42565 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 50931 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1066578 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1194278 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 41908 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 50894 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 53397 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 59418 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 26742 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 29125 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 16038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 17768 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 63351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 69224 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 147140 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 160578 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 73170 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 82644 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 91284 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 96183 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 2457994 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 2579882 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 54821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 61567 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 26506 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 32351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 61554 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 65043 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 247003 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 276791 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 533670 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 563404 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 39211 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 42943 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 191315 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1140962 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1063400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 13060 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 14056 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 511519 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 29253 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 33427 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 863048 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 954182 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 24054 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26196 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 29258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 34851 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 49732 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 57193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 84435 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 94257 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 60337 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 67253 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26649 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 30239 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 328751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 391449 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 32194 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 36367 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 49273 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 53939 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 198186 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 214121 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 169240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 184240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 52036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 58852 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 20720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 22909 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 450077 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 41012 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 45776 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 271720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 308930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 40558 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 44955 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 112856 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 127165 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1205460 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1326762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 33356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 38690 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 43447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 47971 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 45472 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 50507 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 56633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 61780 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 133149 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 152130 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 69601 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 72690 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 68751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 77425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 246473 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 281505 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 25320 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 28739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 100718 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 116837 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 63278 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 72559 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 94162 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 110969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 35222 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 39877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 457517 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 544494 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1101602 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1273249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 137123 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 149927 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 92919 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 108877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 15892 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 17692 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 27654 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 29714 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 499166 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 560964 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 539378 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 575508 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 93415 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 102390 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1407480 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1620005 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 67252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 73602 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26960 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 31187 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 7497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 8452 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 167814 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 182712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 247519 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 281255 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 87274 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 92004 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 77869 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 86746 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 165674 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 185586 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 146753 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 165558 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 194934 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 177645 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 80470 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 91205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 31008 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 34838 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 56406 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 62918 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 41901 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 45726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 45617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 52010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 354710 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 387868 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 321227 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 356014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 186821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 193859 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 202550 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 237451 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 77970 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 87207 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 933131 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1042828 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 19792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 23334 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 31155 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 36628 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 63194 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 71581 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 42566 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 50931 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1066579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1194277 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 41908 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 50895 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 53398 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 59418 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26741 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 29125 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 16038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 17768 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 63350 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 69224 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 147141 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 160579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 73171 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 82644 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 91281 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 96183 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2457993 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2579881 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 54820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 61567 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26506 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 32350 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 61555 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 65041 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 247003 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 276792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 533672 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 563401 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 39211 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 42942 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 191275 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1140484 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1063659 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 13061 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 14056 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/03/12 | 1412 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nextpage.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 652 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini
+2019/10/13 | 652 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini
2018/07/06 | 145915 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nexus-otf.tar.lzma
2017/03/30 | 191149 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nfssext-cfr.tar.lzma
2012/12/20 | 612251 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicefilelist.tar.lzma
@@ -264297,7 +264309,7 @@
2008/11/07 | 35981 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/prettyref.tar.lzma
2017/07/26 | 201385 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/preview.tar.lzma
2019/06/20 | 375963 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/prftree.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 345 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini
+2019/10/13 | 345 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini
2010/09/27 | 248469 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/printlen.tar.lzma
2008/06/17 | 77313 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/proba.tar.lzma
2017/07/12 | 988486 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/probsoln.tar.lzma
@@ -265402,7 +265414,7 @@
2019/10/05 | 4910928 | systems/win32/w32tex/aleph-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/03 | 62949728 | systems/win32/w32tex/biblatex-biber.tar.xz
2016/12/13 | 65971452 | systems/win32/w32tex/cbfonts.tar.xz
-2019/10/11 | 519423 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog
+2019/10/12 | 520089 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog
2009/08/03 | 141221 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog.0
2009/08/03 | 221890 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog.1
2009/08/03 | 116462 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog.2
@@ -265410,13 +265422,13 @@
2017/06/24 | 644754 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog.4
2019/10/09 | 22137396 | systems/win32/w32tex/cjkzr.tar.xz
2013/04/27 | 15858676 | systems/win32/w32tex/context-doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/10 | 131805668 | systems/win32/w32tex/context.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 131820188 | systems/win32/w32tex/context.tar.xz
2019/08/14 | 904952 | systems/win32/w32tex/cweb-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/10 | 6210280 | systems/win32/w32tex/datetime2.tar.xz
2019/08/14 | 838256 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvi2ps-w32.tar.xz
2019/09/11 | 483568 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvi2tty-w32.tar.xz
-2019/10/09 | 4648844 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipdfm-w32.tar.xz
-2019/10/09 | 4450848 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipsk-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 4648800 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipdfm-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 4449972 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipsk-w32.tar.xz
2019/09/23 | 2616824 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvitools-w32.tar.xz
2019/09/23 | 685128 | systems/win32/w32tex/extractpdfmark-w32.tar.xz
2019/08/14 | 17348028 | systems/win32/w32tex/gregorio-w32.tar.xz
@@ -265431,20 +265443,20 @@
2019/10/05 | 3553844 | systems/win32/w32tex/luajittex-dev-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/10 | 5042448 | systems/win32/w32tex/luajittex-exp-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/05 | 5065984 | systems/win32/w32tex/luajittex-w32.tar.xz
-2019/10/05 | 14603268 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-dev-w32.tar.xz
-2019/10/10 | 16172588 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-exp-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 14603312 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-dev-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 16173128 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-exp-w32.tar.xz
2019/09/27 | 17698764 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatexja.tar.xz
-2019/10/05 | 15238636 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 15239620 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/05 | 1598764 | systems/win32/w32tex/makeindex-w32.tar.xz
2015/05/26 | 1542676 | systems/win32/w32tex/manual.tar.xz
-2019/10/10 | 438316 | systems/win32/w32tex/mftools.tar.xz
-2019/08/14 | 516620 | systems/win32/w32tex/mftrace-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 438200 | systems/win32/w32tex/mftools.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 526496 | systems/win32/w32tex/mftrace-w32.tar.xz
2018/07/14 | 6364952 | systems/win32/w32tex/minitoc.tar.xz
2019/01/25 | 882860 | systems/win32/w32tex/m-tx.tar.xz
-2019/10/09 | 8133752 | systems/win32/w32tex/newtxpx-boondoxfonts.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 8133716 | systems/win32/w32tex/newtxpx-boondoxfonts.tar.xz
2019/08/14 | 1237040 | systems/win32/w32tex/omegaj-w32.tar.xz
2019/09/08 | 357888 | systems/win32/w32tex/otfbeta.tar.xz
-2019/10/10 | 12841920 | systems/win32/w32tex/pdftex-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 12850656 | systems/win32/w32tex/pdftex-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/05 | 94637496 | systems/win32/w32tex/pgfcontrib.tar.xz
2015/01/26 | 189072 | systems/win32/w32tex/plain2-2.54-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/02 | 2930508 | systems/win32/w32tex/platex.tar.xz
@@ -265502,7 +265514,7 @@
2019/10/01 | 3107348 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/luatex-w64.tar.xz
2019/10/05 | 1068520 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/makeindex-w64.tar.xz
2019/08/14 | 430688 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/mftools-w64.tar.xz
-2019/08/14 | 376324 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/mftrace-w64.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 376164 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/mftrace-w64.tar.xz
2018/04/20 | 362532 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/m-tx-w64.tar.xz
2019/08/14 | 406956 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/omegaj-w64.tar.xz
2019/09/30 | 6288248 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/pdftex-w64.tar.xz
@@ -265618,7 +265630,7 @@
2004/06/04 | 404 | tds/tds.sed
2004/06/23 | 65418 | tds/tds.tex
2019/05/29 | 304264 | tds.zip
-2019/10/13 | 186 | timestamp
+2019/10/14 | 186 | timestamp
2002/08/26 | 61898 | usergrps/dante/antrag.pdf
2002/08/26 | 118217 | usergrps/dante/antrag.ps
2016/03/08 | 917 | usergrps/dante/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib
diff --git a/FILES.byname.gz b/FILES.byname.gz
index acc908623d..9e0432544e 100644
--- a/FILES.byname.gz
+++ b/FILES.byname.gz
Binary files differ
diff --git a/FILES.last07days b/FILES.last07days
index dc6c02eec2..29cf54f601 100644
--- a/FILES.last07days
+++ b/FILES.last07days
@@ -1,4 +1,1125 @@
+2019/10/13 | 992 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 9882 | macros/latex/base/manifest.txt
+2019/10/13 | 984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 9814 | macros/latex/base/ltnews21.tex
+2019/10/13 | 980 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 9722 | macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 96183 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 956 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 9562 | macros/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 954182 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 952 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 95065 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 948 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.tex
+2019/10/13 | 9481 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.goals.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 944 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 94257 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 94162 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 9401 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 93920 | macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 9374 | macros/latex/base/preload.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 93415 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 933131 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 92919 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 928 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 927 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.tex
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 924 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 9204 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 92004 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 916 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 9158525 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script.zip
+2019/10/13 | 912 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 91281 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 91205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 908 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 9081 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt
+2019/10/13 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 904 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 896 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 894 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.tex
+2019/10/13 | 89474 | macros/latex/base/slides.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 89294 | macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 892882 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula.zip
+2019/10/13 | 8900 | macros/latex/base/ltnews17.tex
+2019/10/13 | 888 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 884 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 884 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 880 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 876 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 874481 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 8737 | macros/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 872 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 87274 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 87207 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 868 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 868 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 86746 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 86646 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 8657 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 864 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 8632 | macros/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 863048 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 860 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 86047 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 857631 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 8541 | macros/latex/base/texpert.txt
+2019/10/13 | 852 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 85093 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath-2018-12-01.sty
+2019/10/13 | 85084 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 84956 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.source.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 848 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 848 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 8452 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 84435 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 8407 | macros/latex/base/format.ins
+2019/10/13 | 835720 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuitikz.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 82644 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 82371 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.tex
+2019/10/13 | 822 | fonts/adforn/manifest.txt
+2019/10/13 | 821 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.tex
+2019/10/13 | 805044 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 80470 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 802 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty
+2019/10/13 | 77970 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 77869 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 776 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.tex
+2019/10/13 | 77425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 7578 | macros/latex/base/ltxguide.cls
+2019/10/13 | 7497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 73602 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 7340 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enotez.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 7326 | macros/latex/base/ltnews20.tex
+2019/10/13 | 73171 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 72690 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 72559 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 7247 | macros/latex/base/sample2e.tex
+2019/10/13 | 7231 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.verbwrite.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 7227 | macros/latex/base/exscale.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 71840 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 71581 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 71304 | macros/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 71176 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 71060 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 70758 | macros/latex/base/fntguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7063 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 7016 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.tex
+2019/10/13 | 6985 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+2019/10/13 | 6985 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/13 | 69722 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstex.sty
+2019/10/13 | 69640 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 69601 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 6936 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history
+2019/10/13 | 69228 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 69224 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 69216 | macros/latex/base/clsguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 68956 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.otf
+2019/10/13 | 6893 | macros/latex/base/ltnews13.tex
+2019/10/13 | 68912 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Italic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 68572 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68536 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-LightItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 6843 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 68328 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Bold.otf
+2019/10/13 | 68268 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Black.otf
+2019/10/13 | 67931 | macros/latex/base/usrguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 6784 | macros/latex/base/slides.ins
+2019/10/13 | 67604 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.otf
+2019/10/13 | 67253 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 67252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 6719 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 6654 | macros/latex/base/alltt.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 6643 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.tags.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 66332 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-SemiBold.otf
+2019/10/13 | 660302 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 65932 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Medium.otf
+2019/10/13 | 65861 | macros/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 65848 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Regular.otf
+2019/10/13 | 65721 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 65444 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Light.otf
+2019/10/13 | 65403 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.tex
+2019/10/13 | 65379 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 652 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini
+2019/10/13 | 65081 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex
+2019/10/13 | 65041 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 65012 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.otf
+2019/10/13 | 64820 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.source.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 6444 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.tex
+2019/10/13 | 6363 | macros/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 63376 | fonts/librefranklin/opentype/LibreFranklin-Thin.otf
+2019/10/13 | 63350 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 63278 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 63194 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 6298 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.auxfile.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 6292 | macros/latex/base/ltnews14.tex
+2019/10/13 | 62918 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 628225 | macros/latex/base/doc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 62037 | macros/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 61780 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 61567 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 61555 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 61549 | macros/latex/base/letter.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 613 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.tex
+2019/10/13 | 60337 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 596 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 59577 | macros/latex/base/ltluatex.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 59418 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5934 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.base.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 592 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 592 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 592 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 588 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 58852 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5865 | macros/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5860 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/ams-internal.txt
+2019/10/13 | 5859 | macros/latex/base/ltnews15.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5854 | macros/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 584 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 5844 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5827 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.blanks.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5808 | macros/latex/base/ltnews16.tex
+2019/10/13 | 575508 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5751 | fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty
+2019/10/13 | 5733 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 57235 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 57220 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 57193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5710 | macros/latex/base/ltnews08.tex
+2019/10/13 | 570 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5682 | macros/latex/base/ltnews10.tex
+2019/10/13 | 56633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 56406 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 563401 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5621 | macros/latex/base/ltnews05.tex
+2019/10/13 | 56160 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cormorantgaramond.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 56153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 560964 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5584 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 55836 | macros/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 55754 | macros/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5564 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5560 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5552 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5544 | macros/latex/base/ltnews11.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5521 | macros/latex/base/ltnews04.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5515 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5513 | macros/latex/base/ltnews27.tex
+2019/10/13 | 55079 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 5484 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 54820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5475 | macros/latex/base/ltnews25.tex
+2019/10/13 | 545 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/librefranklin-samples.tex
+2019/10/13 | 544494 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5436 | macros/latex/base/ltnews07.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5430 | macros/latex/base/ltnews12.tex
+2019/10/13 | 542 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5405 | macros/latex/base/ltnews06.tex
+2019/10/13 | 53939 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 539378 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5376 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5372 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5372 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5364 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5344 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 53398 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 533672 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5323 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/ams-external.txt
+2019/10/13 | 5319 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.templates.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5316 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5313 | macros/latex/base/ltnews09.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5308 | macros/latex/base/ltnews02.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5299 | macros/latex/base/cmextra.ins
+2019/10/13 | 52927 | macros/latex/base/encguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5290 | macros/latex/base/ltnews01.tex
+2019/10/13 | 5272 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5251 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.ins
+2019/10/13 | 5228 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5213 | macros/latex/base/ltnews03.tex
+2019/10/13 | 520771 | macros/latex/base/classes.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 52036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 52010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 51244 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 511722 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 511519 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 50931 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 50895 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 5076 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 50759 | macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 5068 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 5065 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.ins
+2019/10/13 | 50580 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 50507 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 50170 | macros/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 499166 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 49835 | macros/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 49732 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 4952 | macros/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 49273 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 490980 | macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5
+2019/10/13 | 48094 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 47971 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 4795 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.translations.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 47764 | macros/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4762 | macros/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4707 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.grades.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 469 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.tex
+2019/10/13 | 469980 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 46504 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 46389 | macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 46308 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 46008 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 45776 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 457517 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 45738 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 45726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 45719 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 456620 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/enotez.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 45617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc
+2019/10/13 | 45472 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 453056 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4529676 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 4516 | fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty
+2019/10/13 | 4513 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt
+2019/10/13 | 450077 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 44955 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 443 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.tex
+2019/10/13 | 4406 | macros/latex/base/ec.ins
+2019/10/13 | 43899 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 43622 | macros/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 4358 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/OFL.txt
+2019/10/13 | 435472 | macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4345 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 43447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 4341 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
+2019/10/13 | 4337280 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cormorantgaramond.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 43246 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
+2019/10/13 | 4304 | macros/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 42942 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 428708 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4272 | macros/latex/base/newdc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 42717 | macros/latex/base/changes.old.txt
+2019/10/13 | 42566 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 4237 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.ins
+2019/10/13 | 4236 | macros/latex/base/latex209.ins
+2019/10/13 | 42153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 41908 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 41901 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 4171 | macros/latex/base/ltnews19.tex
+2019/10/13 | 415868 | fonts/adfsymbols.zip
+2019/10/13 | 41167 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 4104 | macros/latex/base/classes.ins
+2019/10/13 | 4103 | macros/latex/base/lablst.tex
+2019/10/13 | 41012 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 4062 | macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 40558 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 40203 | macros/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 400901 | fonts/adforn.zip
+2019/10/13 | 39973 | macros/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 39898 | macros/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 39877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3980 | macros/latex/base/olddc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 396657 | macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3948167 | install/fonts/librefranklin.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 3942261 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz
+2019/10/13 | 39417 | macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 39211 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 391449 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3904283 | fonts/librefranklin.zip
+2019/10/13 | 387868 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 38749 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3869360 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 38690 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 38533 | macros/latex/base/latex209.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3852 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README
+2019/10/13 | 38376 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3814 | macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3798 | macros/latex/base/tulm.ins
+2019/10/13 | 379691 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 37708 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3755 | macros/latex/base/README.md
+2019/10/13 | 3731 | macros/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 371681 | macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 37017 | macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 369 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/manifest.txt
+2019/10/13 | 36968 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 368520 | macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 36628 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 365469 | macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 36367 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 36256 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 36085 | macros/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 36015 | macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 356957 | macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 356014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3547 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.tex
+2019/10/13 | 354710 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 35222 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3517 | fonts/adforn/adforn.sty
+2019/10/13 | 351773 | macros/latex/base/slides.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 351692 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/imfellflowers.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 34851 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 34845 | macros/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 34838 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 345 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini
+2019/10/13 | 3454 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty
+2019/10/13 | 3450 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.ins
+2019/10/13 | 3442 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.tex
+2019/10/13 | 34286 | macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex
+2019/10/13 | 34244 | macros/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 3417 | macros/latex/base/proc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 340 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 3409 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tdlrq7.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3391 | macros/latex/base/letter.ins
+2019/10/13 | 337628 | macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 336 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 3354 | macros/latex/base/exscale.ins
+2019/10/13 | 3349 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_nb4g6w.enc
+2019/10/13 | 3343 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wmouhf.enc
+2019/10/13 | 33427 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3336 | macros/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
+2019/10/13 | 33356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 332 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 33275 | fonts/librefranklin/doc/librefranklin-samples.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 33206 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3293 | macros/latex/base/bugs.txt
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr.vf
+2019/10/13 | 328751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 32350 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 32194 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 32181 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 32179 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 321227 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3194 | macros/latex/base/unpack.ins
+2019/10/13 | 31899 | macros/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 316632 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3163 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_spbxfw.enc
+2019/10/13 | 31555 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 3142 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.tex
+2019/10/13 | 31362 | macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt
+2019/10/13 | 3132 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ejn2og.enc
+2019/10/13 | 31187 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 31155 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 310551 | macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 31048 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.source.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 31016 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 31008 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3097 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_xsutkk.enc
+2019/10/13 | 30946 | macros/latex/required/graphics/color.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 30938 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 308930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3079 | fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty
+2019/10/13 | 3066 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tf5jo5.enc
+2019/10/13 | 305216 | macros/latex/base/letter.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 305028 | macros/latex/base/changes.txt
+2019/10/13 | 3048 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hlvv6p.enc
+2019/10/13 | 302724 | macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 302608 | macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 30239 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 3022 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 3002 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsimverb.sty
+2019/10/13 | 29952 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2994 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics-drivers.ins
+2019/10/13 | 2984 | fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_w4rwtq.enc
+2019/10/13 | 29714 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 294767 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 29258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 29253 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2913 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.ins
+2019/10/13 | 29125 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2909 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
+2019/10/13 | 2908 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.ins
+2019/10/13 | 2908 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.ins
+2019/10/13 | 2906 | macros/latex/base/alltt.ins
+2019/10/13 | 2904 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.ins
+2019/10/13 | 2879087 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim.zip
+2019/10/13 | 28739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2851662 | macros/latex/base/source2e.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 28426 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 28334 | macros/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 283250 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 283187 | macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 282680 | install/fonts/marcellus.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 281505 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 28127 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 281255 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 276792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 27654 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 274440 | fonts/marcellus.zip
+2019/10/13 | 274338 | macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2738 | macros/latex/base/tex2.txt
+2019/10/13 | 2733 | macros/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2726 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md
+2019/10/13 | 2726 | macros/latex/base/idx.tex
+2019/10/13 | 271720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 27155 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 27139 | macros/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex
+2019/10/13 | 270763 | macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 26960 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26741 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26649 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 26506 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 263544 | macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 26196 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 261914 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2612867 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-amsmath.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 2583500 | macros/latex/required/amsmath.zip
+2019/10/13 | 25824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2579881 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 25744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25648 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25600 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25592 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25588 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25588 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25536 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25534 | fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map
+2019/10/13 | 255308 | macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 25480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25376 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25320 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2531865 | install/macros/latex/required/latex-graphics.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 25240 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25180 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25176 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 25104 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3experimental.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 25040 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2499207 | macros/latex/required/graphics.zip
+2019/10/13 | 24960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 247 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.tex
+2019/10/13 | 24781 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls
+2019/10/13 | 247519 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 247003 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 246473 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 245923 | macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2457993 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 245753 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 24054 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 24024 | macros/latex/base/lterror.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 240176 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 239770 | macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 23793 | macros/latex/base/ltnews30.tex
+2019/10/13 | 237451 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 236109 | macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 23521 | macros/latex/base/fix-cm.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 235078 | macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2337865 | install/fonts/gofonts.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 23334 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 232393 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 23204 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2320233 | fonts/gofonts.zip
+2019/10/13 | 23102 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 22909 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 22712 | macros/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2267 | fonts/gofonts/README
+2019/10/13 | 226745 | macros/latex/base/modguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 22605 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/diffs-m.txt
+2019/10/13 | 2259 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.tex
+2019/10/13 | 225523 | macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 22534469 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip
+2019/10/13 | 22480 | macros/latex/base/cfgguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 2234 | fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty
+2019/10/13 | 223453 | macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 222527 | macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 219616 | macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 219246 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2176 | fonts/librefranklin/README
+2019/10/13 | 216904 | macros/latex/base/proc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 215391 | macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 214304 | macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 214121 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 21296 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 2129008 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz
+2019/10/13 | 21023 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 2092 | macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md
+2019/10/13 | 20809 | macros/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 20739076 | install/macros/latex/latex-base.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 20720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2068 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2064 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2060 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2052 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2052 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 205217 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2048 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2048 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2048 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2044 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2044 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2040 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2036 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2036 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2036 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 20355733 | macros/latex/base.zip
+2019/10/13 | 2032 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 203062 | macros/latex/base/doc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 20270 | macros/latex/base/ltnews.cls
+2019/10/13 | 202550 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 2024 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2024 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 202438 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2020 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2020 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2020 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 2016 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 201382 | macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2008 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 20045 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 2000 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1996 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1992 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1988 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 19860 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1984 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 198186 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1980 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 19792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 197803 | macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1976 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1972 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1968 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1964 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 196341 | macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1960 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 19589 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 195888 | macros/latex/base/exscale.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1952 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 194934 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1948 | macros/latex/base/minimal.cls
+2019/10/13 | 1948 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1944 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 193904 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 193859 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1936 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1932 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1923 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.tex
+2019/10/13 | 192295 | macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1920 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 191705 | macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1913 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1912 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 191275 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 191271 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 19107 | macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+2019/10/13 | 1906352 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cabin.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 19022 | macros/latex/base/ltnews29.tex
+2019/10/13 | 18691879 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe
+2019/10/13 | 186821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1862 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.tex
+2019/10/13 | 18558 | macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 185586 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1849328 | install/fonts/linguisticspro.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 1844 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 184240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 18407 | macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1836 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 18350 | macros/latex/base/ltx3info.tex
+2019/10/13 | 18305 | macros/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1828 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 182712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1826686 | fonts/linguisticspro.zip
+2019/10/13 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1824 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1820 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 181750 | macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1816 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1812 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1808 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1804 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1804 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1800 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 17992 | fonts/adforn/COPYING
+2019/10/13 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1796 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1792 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1792 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1777 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1776 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 17768 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 177645 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1772 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 17692 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1764 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1764 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1760 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1756 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1756 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 175370 | macros/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 17520 | macros/latex/base/cyrguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1748 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/collection-fontsextra.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1748 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1748 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1744 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1741 | fonts/linguisticspro/README
+2019/10/13 | 1740 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1740 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1736 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 172933 | macros/latex/base/alltt.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1728 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1728 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1728212 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3packages.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1724 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1724 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1720 | fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1716 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1712 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1708 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1700 | macros/latex/base/small2e.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1696 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1692 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 169240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1690 | fonts/adforn/NOTICE
+2019/10/13 | 1689 | fonts/marcellus/README
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1688 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 1684 | fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf
+2019/10/13 | 168346 | macros/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 167814 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 16772 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16772 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16764 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16752 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16684 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16672 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16612 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 165753 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 165674 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 165558 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 16548 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16544 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16536 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16456 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 164353 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 16412 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 163988 | macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 16388 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 163682 | macros/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 16296 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 16262 | macros/latex/base/modguide.tex
+2019/10/13 | 162260 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 16212 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1620005 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 161335 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 16116 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 161077 | macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 16084 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 160685 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 160579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 16038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 15958116 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb
+2019/10/13 | 15892 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 15821 | macros/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
+2019/10/13 | 15737 | macros/latex/required/graphics/cat.eps
+2019/10/13 | 15682209 | install/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script.tds.zip
+2019/10/13 | 156562 | macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 156542 | macros/latex/base/tulm.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 15653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.properties.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 156292 | macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1548 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 154723 | macros/latex/base/classes.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1544 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 154496 | macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 15433 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics-2017-06-25.sty
+2019/10/13 | 1540 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 15379 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 1528 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1524 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1524 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1524 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 152130 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1520 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1518 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1516 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1512 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1512 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1510925 | macros/latex/base/encguide.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 150928 | macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1508 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1508 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1504 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1504 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 150118 | macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1500 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1500 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 150029 | macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 149927 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 14983 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1496 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1492 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 14908 | macros/latex/base/ltnews28.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1484 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1484 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 14838 | macros/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1480 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 147952 | macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1476 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1473 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1473 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1472 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1472 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 147141 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1470 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1468 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.ins
+2019/10/13 | 1468 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1468 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 146753 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1464 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1460 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 14590 | macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.tex
+2019/10/13 | 14570 | macros/latex/base/source2e.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1456 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1452 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512
+2019/10/13 | 1444 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1444 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 144481 | macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 14440 | macros/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 14440 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt
+2019/10/13 | 1440 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1440 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1440 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1436 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 14357 | macros/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt
+2019/10/13 | 143340 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/imfellflowers.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1432 | fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty
+2019/10/13 | 1432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1432 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1428 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1425 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1424 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 141561 | macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 141545 | macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 141498 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 141462 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1407480 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 14056 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 140568 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-msg-translations.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 1404 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.tex
+2019/10/13 | 139699 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1394 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1386 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/README
+2019/10/13 | 1385 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1384 | macros/latex/base/legal.txt
+2019/10/13 | 13799 | macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 137927 | macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 137504 | macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 137123 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 136160 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 135582 | macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1353 | macros/latex/base/ltnews18.tex
+2019/10/13 | 135237 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1351 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.tex
+2019/10/13 | 134943 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1345 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.tex
+2019/10/13 | 13452 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 133964 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1337 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.tex
+2019/10/13 | 133713 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 133698 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 133265 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 133149 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 133148 | macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 13305 | macros/latex/base/proc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 132823 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 132711 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1326762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 131976 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cabin.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 131779 | macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty
+2019/10/13 | 1316 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1316 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 13152 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.solutions.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1313 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1312 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 130839 | macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 130725 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 13061 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1304 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 130486 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1296 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 1296 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 12945 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.collections.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1292 | fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/13 | 129171 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1288 | fonts/adfsymbols/README
+2019/10/13 | 1288 | fonts/adforn/README
+2019/10/13 | 128259 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 127605 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 127472 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1273249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 127165 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 125815 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 12537 | macros/latex/base/testpage.tex
+2019/10/13 | 124174 | fonts/librefranklin/type1/LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+2019/10/13 | 1229192 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 12227 | macros/latex/base/ltnews24.tex
+2019/10/13 | 122098 | macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 12130 | macros/latex/base/tulm.fdd
+2019/10/13 | 1205460 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 120220 | macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 12005 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1194277 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1183 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.tex
+2019/10/13 | 116837 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 11451 | macros/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 11411 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1140500 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1140484 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1139568 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cquthesis.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 11293 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1128 | macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.ins
+2019/10/13 | 112856 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 110969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1101602 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 108877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1086 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas
+2019/10/13 | 1072 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.tex
+2019/10/13 | 107001 | macros/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1069 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.tex
+2019/10/13 | 10699 | macros/latex/base/ltnews26.tex
+2019/10/13 | 10692 | macros/latex/base/ltnews23.tex
+2019/10/13 | 10673 | macros/latex/base/ltnews22.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1066579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 10651 | macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 1063859 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1063659 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 10606 | macros/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 10594 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.random.code.tex
+2019/10/13 | 104954 | macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 104549 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 104328 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex
+2019/10/13 | 104303 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.tex
+2019/10/13 | 1042828 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 10376 | macros/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
+2019/10/13 | 102732 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/circuitikz.tar.xz
+2019/10/13 | 102390 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/13 | 1013 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.tex
+2019/10/13 | 101296 | macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
+2019/10/13 | 1010353 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix.zip
+2019/10/13 | 100718 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 998 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/doc/cormorantgaramond.tex
+2019/10/12 | 99586 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/ja.po
+2019/10/12 | 99196 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/fr.po
2019/10/12 | 9908 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/T1EBGaramond-TOsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 9850 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/OT1EBGaramond-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 9850 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/OT1EBGaramond-OsF.fd
@@ -6,58 +1127,59 @@
2019/10/12 | 9850 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LY1EBGaramond-OsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 9850 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LGREBGaramond-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 9850 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LGREBGaramond-OsF.fd
+2019/10/12 | 9830 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex
+2019/10/12 | 9735 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex
2019/10/12 | 9729 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/T1EBGaramond-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 9729 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/T1EBGaramond-OsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 967 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/conclusion.tex
2019/10/12 | 9671 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/OT1EBGaramond-LF.fd
2019/10/12 | 9671 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LY1EBGaramond-LF.fd
2019/10/12 | 9671 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LGREBGaramond-LF.fd
-2019/10/12 | 96183 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 96496 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog.2
2019/10/12 | 95579 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/cquthesis.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 95574 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/vi.po
2019/10/12 | 9550 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/T1EBGaramond-LF.fd
-2019/10/12 | 954180 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 952 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 952 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 948 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 948 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 948 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 948 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 94845 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/de.po
2019/10/12 | 944 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 944 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 94258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 94163 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 94280706 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-basictex-20191011.pkg
+2019/10/12 | 94178 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sk.po
2019/10/12 | 940 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 940 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 940 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 940 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 937491 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-Bold.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 93574 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls
2019/10/12 | 934 | fonts/imfellflowers/README
-2019/10/12 | 93414 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 934144 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-Regular.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 933133 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 932 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 932 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 92920 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 93135 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/it.po
2019/10/12 | 928831 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-ExtraBold.pfb
2019/10/12 | 927740 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-Medium.pfb
2019/10/12 | 924 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 924 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 92424 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex
2019/10/12 | 920 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/TS1EBGaramondInitials-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 920 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/OT1EBGaramondInitials-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 920 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LY1EBGaramondInitials-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 920 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LGREBGaramondInitials-TLF.fd
-2019/10/12 | 92003 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 913 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/T1EBGaramondInitials-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 912 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 912 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 912 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 912 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-sup-lgr--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 91284 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 91205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 908 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 908 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 908 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 908 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 9050 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex
2019/10/12 | 904 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 904 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 904 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
@@ -73,6 +1195,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 900 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 900 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 900 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 89967 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex
2019/10/12 | 89866 | fonts/ebgaramond/map/EBGaramond.map
2019/10/12 | 896 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 896 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
@@ -85,27 +1208,31 @@
2019/10/12 | 892 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 892 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-sup-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 88 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramondInitials-tlf-ts1.vf
+2019/10/12 | 88983 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 88641 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex
2019/10/12 | 88572 | fonts/cabin/doc/cabin-samples.pdf
2019/10/12 | 884179 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-BoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 8824 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex
2019/10/12 | 8822 | fonts/alegreya/latex/Alegreya.sty
2019/10/12 | 87570 | macros/latex/contrib/acro/acro_en.tex
2019/10/12 | 873792 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-MediumItalic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 873168 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 87276 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 872504 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-Italic.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 87208 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 86746 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 87049 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/uk.po
+2019/10/12 | 86982 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/cs.po
2019/10/12 | 867031 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 863046 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 86677 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/pt_BR.po
+2019/10/12 | 8639 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex
+2019/10/12 | 86014 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/es.po
+2019/10/12 | 85883 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex
2019/10/12 | 8548 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/ebgaramond.sty
2019/10/12 | 8528 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/README-Chinese.md
2019/10/12 | 85120 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/map/CormorantGaramond.map
-2019/10/12 | 85096 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 84822 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcirc.defines.tex
-2019/10/12 | 8452 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 84435 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 8392 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex
+2019/10/12 | 83598 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 83123 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex
2019/10/12 | 828 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-sc-ot1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 82644 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 824 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 824 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 824 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-sc-ot1.vf
@@ -113,6 +1240,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 824 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 824 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 824 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-sc-ot1.vf
+2019/10/12 | 8222 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex
2019/10/12 | 820 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 820 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 820 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-ot1.vf
@@ -125,6 +1253,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 820 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 820 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 820 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-sc-ot1.vf
+2019/10/12 | 8184 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile.baseinit
2019/10/12 | 816 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 816 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 816 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-ot1.vf
@@ -136,20 +1265,22 @@
2019/10/12 | 816 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 816 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 816 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-ot1.vf
+2019/10/12 | 8133716 | systems/win32/w32tex/newtxpx-boondoxfonts.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 812 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-ot1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 804992 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 80470 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 8051 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx
2019/10/12 | 803 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/denotation.tex
+2019/10/12 | 8031 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx
2019/10/12 | 7956532 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3kernel.doc.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 79506 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 79328 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx
2019/10/12 | 78882 | fonts/ebgaramond/doc/EBGaramond-Initials-Glyphs.pdf
2019/10/12 | 78512 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-Initials.otf
+2019/10/12 | 78457 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex
2019/10/12 | 780 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 780 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 780 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 780 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tosf-sc-ot1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 77969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 77908 | fonts/cabin/opentype/Cabin-SemiBold.otf
-2019/10/12 | 77868 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-ot1.vf
@@ -167,8 +1298,8 @@
2019/10/12 | 776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 776 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 77551 | fonts/ebgaramond/doc/ebgaramond-samples.pdf
-2019/10/12 | 77425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 773291 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/doc/circuitikzmanual.pdf
+2019/10/12 | 77323 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx
2019/10/12 | 77304 | fonts/cabin/opentype/Cabin-Medium.otf
2019/10/12 | 772 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 772 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
@@ -186,6 +1317,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 760 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 760 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 7608 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcirccurrent.tex
+2019/10/12 | 7582 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex
2019/10/12 | 75720 | fonts/cabin/type1/Cabin-MediumItalic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 756 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Medium-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
2019/10/12 | 756 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Italic-tlf-sc-ot1.vf
@@ -193,10 +1325,12 @@
2019/10/12 | 7540 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7528 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7528 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 7497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 75149 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sl.po
+2019/10/12 | 74898 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx
2019/10/12 | 74497 | fonts/cabin/type1/Cabin-Italic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 7448 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7444 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 74418 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/nl.po
2019/10/12 | 7440 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7432 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7428 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
@@ -204,19 +1338,20 @@
2019/10/12 | 74092 | fonts/cabin/opentype/CabinCondensed-SemiBold.otf
2019/10/12 | 7408 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7408 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tlf-swash-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 74053 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx
2019/10/12 | 7400 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7400 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tosf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7392 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7392 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tlf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 73852 | fonts/cabin/opentype/CabinCondensed-Medium.otf
-2019/10/12 | 73601 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 7344 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7344 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7344 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 7343 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/INSTALLD.txt
2019/10/12 | 7340 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcircflow.tex
+2019/10/12 | 73267 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx
2019/10/12 | 7324 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7320 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 73170 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 7316 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7312 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7312 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-ot1.tfm
@@ -225,24 +1360,27 @@
2019/10/12 | 73056 | fonts/cabin/opentype/Cabin-Regular.otf
2019/10/12 | 7300 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 72932 | fonts/cabin/opentype/CabinCondensed-Regular.otf
-2019/10/12 | 72691 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 72799 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/zh_CN.po
+2019/10/12 | 72663 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/pl.po
2019/10/12 | 72593 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 72559 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 725344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3backend.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 7240 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7224 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 72191 | fonts/cabin/type1/Cabin-SemiBold.pfb
2019/10/12 | 7180 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 7176 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 7170 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile
2019/10/12 | 7168 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 71580 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 7153773 | install/fonts/cormorantgaramond.tds.zip
+2019/10/12 | 71513 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx
2019/10/12 | 7144 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 71449 | fonts/cabin/type1/Cabin-Medium.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 714165 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdf
2019/10/12 | 71188 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-SemiBold.pfb
2019/10/12 | 7104 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 71001 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-Regular.pfb
2019/10/12 | 7068021 | fonts/cormorantgaramond.zip
+2019/10/12 | 7066 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/INSTALL.txt
2019/10/12 | 70628 | fonts/cabin/opentype/CabinCondensed-Bold.otf
2019/10/12 | 70568 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-Medium.pfb
2019/10/12 | 7052 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-ot1.tfm
@@ -251,17 +1389,14 @@
2019/10/12 | 70080 | fonts/cabin/opentype/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic.otf
2019/10/12 | 70062 | fonts/cabin/type1/Cabin-Regular.pfb
2019/10/12 | 69852 | fonts/cabin/opentype/Cabin-MediumItalic.otf
-2019/10/12 | 69601 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 6948 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6944 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6936 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6936 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6932 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6932 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 69224 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 690730 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/circuitikz-0.9.3.sty
2019/10/12 | 68916 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/figures/CQUbadge.pdf
-2019/10/12 | 68751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 68744 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/esindex.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 6872 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6868 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
@@ -272,18 +1407,18 @@
2019/10/12 | 683433 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/t-circuitikz-0.9.3.tex
2019/10/12 | 6833748 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/coelacanth.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 6832 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 68136 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
2019/10/12 | 6789170 | fonts/newtx.zip
2019/10/12 | 6756 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 675372 | fonts/imfellflowers.zip
2019/10/12 | 6744 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6740 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6728 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 67253 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 67252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 6724 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6716 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6712 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6712 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tlf-swash-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 6675 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl
2019/10/12 | 6668 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6656 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-ot1.tfm
@@ -307,11 +1442,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 6576 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6556 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6548 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 652 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini
2019/10/12 | 6516 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6516 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6512 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-osf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 65043 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 6496 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 64940 | fonts/cabin/opentype/Cabin-BoldItalic.otf
2019/10/12 | 648 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramondInitials-tlf-ly1.tfm
@@ -326,6 +1459,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 6448 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6444 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 64404 | fonts/cabin/opentype/Cabin-Italic.otf
+2019/10/12 | 6428 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex
2019/10/12 | 640 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 640 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 640 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-ts1.vf
@@ -349,7 +1483,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 636 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 636 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 636 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-ts1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 63351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 63358 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/zh_TW.po
2019/10/12 | 632 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 632 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 632 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
@@ -367,10 +1501,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 632 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 632 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 632 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-ts1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 63277 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 63193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 6300 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 62919 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 628 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tosf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 628 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 628 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-Italic-osf-ts1.vf
@@ -379,14 +1510,13 @@
2019/10/12 | 6200 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6196 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 6188 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 61778 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 6172 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 615906 | macros/latex/contrib/acro.zip
-2019/10/12 | 61567 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 61554 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 6067 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex
2019/10/12 | 6060 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 60337 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 60357 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
2019/10/12 | 6008 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 6003 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genindex.pl
2019/10/12 | 6000 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5996 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5976 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/T2CCormorantGaramond-TOsF.fd
@@ -402,7 +1532,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 5948 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-osf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5948 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5944 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tosf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 59418 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 5940 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5940 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 592 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
@@ -437,7 +1566,8 @@
2019/10/12 | 5885 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/OT1CormorantGaramond-OsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 5885 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/LY1CormorantGaramond-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 5885 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/LY1CormorantGaramond-OsF.fd
-2019/10/12 | 58852 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 58714 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 58683 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/messages.pot
2019/10/12 | 5856 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5856 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5852 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tosf-ot1.tfm
@@ -457,7 +1587,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 576 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 5760 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5756 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 575508 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 5744 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5744 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5740 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-swash-ot1.tfm
@@ -470,7 +1599,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 572 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 5728 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5724 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tosf-sc-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 57193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 5712 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex
2019/10/12 | 568 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 568 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 568 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
@@ -478,68 +1607,62 @@
2019/10/12 | 5677 | fonts/cabin/latex/OT1Cabin-Sup.fd
2019/10/12 | 5677 | fonts/cabin/latex/LY1Cabin-Sup.fd
2019/10/12 | 5677 | fonts/cabin/latex/LGRCabin-Sup.fd
-2019/10/12 | 56634 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 56746 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex
2019/10/12 | 5660 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 565833 | macros/latex/contrib/acro/acro_en.pdf
2019/10/12 | 564 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 564 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 564 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf
2019/10/12 | 564 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 56406 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 563404 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 5616 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5612 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 560 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 560965 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 5607 | fonts/cabin/latex/T1Cabin-Sup.fd
+2019/10/12 | 55 | systems/mac/mactex/mactex-basictex-20191011.pkg.md5
+2019/10/12 | 5598 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
2019/10/12 | 557176 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/stickstoo.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 556 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/ack.tex
-2019/10/12 | 54821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 544493 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 53940 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 539378 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 53397 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 533670 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 5463 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 5400 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex
+2019/10/12 | 53861 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
2019/10/12 | 5328 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 53222 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
2019/10/12 | 53141 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/doc/cormorantgaramond.pdf
2019/10/12 | 5304 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5292 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5280 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 52773 | fonts/cabin/type1/Cabin-Bold.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 526496 | systems/win32/w32tex/mftrace-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 52569 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-Bold.pfb
2019/10/12 | 524688 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3kernel.source.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 52432 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 52424 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5232 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5224 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 5221 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex
2019/10/12 | 5220 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-sc-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 52036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 52010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 520089 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog
+2019/10/12 | 5192 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl
2019/10/12 | 5192 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tosf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 51452 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5129 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/doc/ctikzmanutils.sty
-2019/10/12 | 51244 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 511 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/doc/circuitikz-context.tex
-2019/10/12 | 511722 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 511519 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 50931 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 50894 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 5116 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex
+2019/10/12 | 50841 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex
2019/10/12 | 5080 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5056 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 50507 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 5048 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 5044 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 499166 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 49733 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 5016 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex
+2019/10/12 | 4993 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 498841 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog
2019/10/12 | 49724 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 49274 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 49223 | fonts/cabin/type1/Cabin-BoldItalic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 492166 | install/fonts/almendra.tds.zip
2019/10/12 | 4920 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4912 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4900 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4900116 | macros/latex/contrib/l3experimental.zip
-2019/10/12 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5
2019/10/12 | 4884 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tosf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4872 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4869 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/cover.tex
@@ -553,40 +1676,35 @@
2019/10/12 | 4804 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4800 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4800 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 47971 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 4796 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4772 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4764 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 47584 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 47441 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcircmultipoles.tex
+2019/10/12 | 47291 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
2019/10/12 | 4720 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4688 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46884 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46864 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4684 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46688 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 46645 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
2019/10/12 | 46628 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46624 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46620 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46600 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4656 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 4648800 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipdfm-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 464714 | macros/latex/contrib/enotez.zip
2019/10/12 | 46408 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46400 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46396 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 46388 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4628 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/TS1CormorantGaramond-TOsF.fd
+2019/10/12 | 4623 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex
2019/10/12 | 46073 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcircmonopoles.tex
2019/10/12 | 45956 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 45872 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 45777 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 457518 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 45726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 45618 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc
-2019/10/12 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc
2019/10/12 | 4559 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/TS1CormorantGaramond-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 4559 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/TS1CormorantGaramond-OsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 4559 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/T2CCormorantGaramond-Sup.fd
@@ -599,8 +1717,8 @@
2019/10/12 | 4559 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/OT1CormorantGaramond-Inf.fd
2019/10/12 | 4559 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/LY1CormorantGaramond-Sup.fd
2019/10/12 | 4559 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/LY1CormorantGaramond-Inf.fd
-2019/10/12 | 45472 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 4537212 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/newtx.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 4550 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex
+2019/10/12 | 454332 | info/biblio/tugboat.twx
2019/10/12 | 4536 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 45352 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/microtype.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 4532 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
@@ -610,10 +1728,8 @@
2019/10/12 | 4512 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4500 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4500 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 450077 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 450056 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-Medium.otf
2019/10/12 | 449693 | macros/latex/contrib/enotez/enotez_en.pdf
-2019/10/12 | 44955 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 4490 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/latex/TS1CormorantGaramond-LF.fd
2019/10/12 | 4488 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4482 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/appendix.tex
@@ -628,6 +1744,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 446180 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-SemiBold.otf
2019/10/12 | 4456 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4452 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 4449972 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipsk-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 4444 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4444 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4444 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
@@ -635,6 +1752,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 4440 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4436 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4436 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 4433 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc
2019/10/12 | 4432 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4420 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tlf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4416 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tosf-swash-ot1.tfm
@@ -645,6 +1763,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 440 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tlshell.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 4408 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4397 | fonts/ebgaramond/doc/OFL.txt
+2019/10/12 | 438200 | systems/win32/w32tex/mftools.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 4380 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4376 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4376 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
@@ -653,8 +1772,8 @@
2019/10/12 | 4364 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4364 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4352 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-osf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 43525 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx
2019/10/12 | 4348 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 43447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 4340 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4332 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 4328 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tosf-ot1.tfm
@@ -664,11 +1783,12 @@
2019/10/12 | 4308 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 430508 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-ExtraBold.otf
2019/10/12 | 429904 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-MediumItalic.otf
+2019/10/12 | 42976 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx
2019/10/12 | 429620 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic.otf
2019/10/12 | 429484 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-BoldItalic.otf
-2019/10/12 | 42943 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 4287 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex
2019/10/12 | 4284 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 42565 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 42566 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex
2019/10/12 | 4252 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 424968 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-Regular.ttf
2019/10/12 | 4228 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-swash-ot1.tfm
@@ -693,22 +1813,20 @@
2019/10/12 | 4192 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-swash-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 419224 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-Light.ttf
2019/10/12 | 41920 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 41908 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 41902 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 418 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/doc/compatibility.tex
2019/10/12 | 416850 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/t-circuitikz-0.8.3.tex
2019/10/12 | 416340 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-Bold.ttf
2019/10/12 | 416208 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic.otf
2019/10/12 | 416064 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold.ttf
2019/10/12 | 415121 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-Medium.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 4144 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlogo.dtx
2019/10/12 | 41444 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 414189 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-Light.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 41010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 4104 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile.baserules
2019/10/12 | 4095 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/TS1EBGaramond-TOsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 408799 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold.pfb
2019/10/12 | 4082 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/makewin.bat
2019/10/12 | 40656 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 40558 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 405235 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-Bold.pfb
2019/10/12 | 404984 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-Regular.otf
2019/10/12 | 403539 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/circuitikz-0.7.sty
@@ -721,19 +1839,17 @@
2019/10/12 | 4026 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LGREBGaramond-Sup.fd
2019/10/12 | 4026 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LGREBGaramond-Inf.fd
2019/10/12 | 40100 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 39877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 398180 | fonts/ebgaramond/opentype/EBGaramond-Italic.otf
2019/10/12 | 3980 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/T1EBGaramond-Sup.fd
2019/10/12 | 3980 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/T1EBGaramond-Inf.fd
+2019/10/12 | 39687 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex
2019/10/12 | 396508 | fonts/ebgaramond/doc/EBGaramond-Regular-Glyphs.pdf
2019/10/12 | 3957 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/TS1EBGaramond-LF.fd
-2019/10/12 | 3942010 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz
+2019/10/12 | 39452 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
2019/10/12 | 3938 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/introduction.tex
2019/10/12 | 393856 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/circuitikz-0.6.sty
-2019/10/12 | 39211 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 391449 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 387871 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 38690 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 3859 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3854 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.tex
2019/10/12 | 38525845 | install/fonts/alegreya.tds.zip
2019/10/12 | 38416 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-osf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 38412 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-osf-t1.tfm
@@ -763,12 +1879,15 @@
2019/10/12 | 37970453 | fonts/alegreya.zip
2019/10/12 | 3791 | fonts/cabin/latex/cabin.sty
2019/10/12 | 379090 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramond12-Italic.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 3789 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3769 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex
+2019/10/12 | 376164 | systems/win32/w32tex/win64/mftrace-w64.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 37345 | macros/latex/contrib/enotez/enotez.sty
-2019/10/12 | 36624 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 3724 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex
+2019/10/12 | 3706 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex
2019/10/12 | 36428 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 364086 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/circuitikz-0.4.sty
2019/10/12 | 36368 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 36366 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3607 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_od3ly4.enc
2019/10/12 | 3601 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_govhzk.enc
2019/10/12 | 3590 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_yo6qap.enc
@@ -787,7 +1906,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 3561 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_w7jvgc.enc
2019/10/12 | 3561 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_oahxim.enc
2019/10/12 | 3560 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_a37mnv.enc
-2019/10/12 | 356014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3559 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_rhddgm.enc
2019/10/12 | 3554 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_t3ctnr.enc
2019/10/12 | 3553 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_3veehr.enc
@@ -795,17 +1913,16 @@
2019/10/12 | 3550 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_4ljeza.enc
2019/10/12 | 3547 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_nhfy4v.enc
2019/10/12 | 3547 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_rnb5y6.enc
-2019/10/12 | 354711 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omega-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3544 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_nnemy2.enc
2019/10/12 | 3543 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_bj5npy.enc
2019/10/12 | 3542 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_k5z2jz.enc
2019/10/12 | 3536 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_byuyni.enc
2019/10/12 | 3535 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_bzm33o.enc
2019/10/12 | 3526 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_yjkoc2.enc
+2019/10/12 | 3525 | info/biblio/tugboat.ltx
2019/10/12 | 3525 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_xoskhe.enc
2019/10/12 | 3524 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_kfeykp.enc
2019/10/12 | 3524 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_bszlvl.enc
-2019/10/12 | 35221 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3521 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_oqfidh.enc
2019/10/12 | 3520 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_zwpqa7.enc
2019/10/12 | 3520 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_mlvm5c.enc
@@ -813,17 +1930,16 @@
2019/10/12 | 3514966 | install/fonts/cabin.tds.zip
2019/10/12 | 3505 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_ton3vl.enc
2019/10/12 | 3497 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_h3pyvr.enc
+2019/10/12 | 34962 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex
2019/10/12 | 3492 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_dddv5p.enc
2019/10/12 | 348 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 3489 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_57ulwi.enc
-2019/10/12 | 34851 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 34839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3482 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_vptg7z.enc
+2019/10/12 | 34812 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx
2019/10/12 | 3477 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_y6ew3p.enc
2019/10/12 | 3475 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_gf4ecr.enc
2019/10/12 | 3468 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_sqqqn7.enc
2019/10/12 | 3464 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_zor4nh.enc
-2019/10/12 | 345 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini
2019/10/12 | 344 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 344 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 344 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-lgr.vf
@@ -833,6 +1949,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 3446 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_zni3vm.enc
2019/10/12 | 3440 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_i34oju.enc
2019/10/12 | 3437 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_tbob4m.enc
+2019/10/12 | 34375 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex
2019/10/12 | 3430 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_hfyizy.enc
2019/10/12 | 3430 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_g63n4u.enc
2019/10/12 | 34212 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
@@ -857,7 +1974,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 33960 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tlf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 33956 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 33956 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 3392 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjuraexample.tex
2019/10/12 | 33854 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcircquadpoles.tex
+2019/10/12 | 33776 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
2019/10/12 | 3375 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_h2c7fw.enc
2019/10/12 | 336 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 336 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr.vf
@@ -872,21 +1991,22 @@
2019/10/12 | 336 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 336 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-Bold-sup-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 336 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr.vf
+2019/10/12 | 33679 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
2019/10/12 | 3361 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_d2h6lj.enc
2019/10/12 | 3360 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_j4bgam.enc
2019/10/12 | 3359 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_doset5.enc
2019/10/12 | 33584 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3357 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_oge4ze.enc
2019/10/12 | 3357 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_ao6kf7.enc
+2019/10/12 | 33563 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README
2019/10/12 | 3355 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_yddfsn.enc
2019/10/12 | 3350 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_h5djnb.enc
2019/10/12 | 3349 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_j2crie.enc
2019/10/12 | 33492 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3348 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_ld6df2.enc
-2019/10/12 | 33426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 3343 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex
2019/10/12 | 3338 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_xgcnbw.enc
2019/10/12 | 3338 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_u7qtot.enc
-2019/10/12 | 33355 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 332 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-sc-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 332 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Regular-tlf-sc-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 332 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Medium-tlf-sc-lgr.vf
@@ -898,6 +2018,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 3324 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_yqpahr.enc
2019/10/12 | 3324 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_4v7kvs.enc
2019/10/12 | 3318 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_mvtsrz.enc
+2019/10/12 | 33163 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx
2019/10/12 | 3314 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_jwbavo.enc
2019/10/12 | 33148 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3313 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_t6g5sq.enc
@@ -905,6 +2026,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 3310 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_chpilv.enc
2019/10/12 | 33108 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3309 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_7tc6ve.enc
+2019/10/12 | 33091 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex
2019/10/12 | 33080 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3301 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_tz56ju.enc
2019/10/12 | 3299 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_5xwr64.enc
@@ -923,7 +2045,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 32892 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3288 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_fc5dte.enc
2019/10/12 | 3287 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_gaaohp.enc
-2019/10/12 | 328751 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 32872 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3283 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_5nrtpu.enc
2019/10/12 | 32836 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
@@ -948,14 +2069,12 @@
2019/10/12 | 3246 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_baamnb.enc
2019/10/12 | 3242 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_ry5pl7.enc
2019/10/12 | 3240 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_3urj7q.enc
-2019/10/12 | 32351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3234 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_vqv3w3.enc
2019/10/12 | 3231 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_jg7lls.enc
2019/10/12 | 3223 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_egoty6.enc
2019/10/12 | 3221 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_uxvg3l.enc
2019/10/12 | 3221 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_av2vwt.enc
2019/10/12 | 3221 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_6lx7yl.enc
-2019/10/12 | 32193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3218 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_p3eary.enc
2019/10/12 | 3218 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_daxi6k.enc
2019/10/12 | 3218 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_bkhmoh.enc
@@ -963,9 +2082,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 3213 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_s7tpqt.enc
2019/10/12 | 3212 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_qip76a.enc
2019/10/12 | 3212 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_fgdmu7.enc
-2019/10/12 | 321228 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3210 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_zzgqip.enc
2019/10/12 | 3210 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_imua2m.enc
+2019/10/12 | 3209539 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf
2019/10/12 | 3206 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_mlhtnn.enc
2019/10/12 | 3206 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_kzifr7.enc
2019/10/12 | 3206 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_3icris.enc
@@ -978,15 +2097,18 @@
2019/10/12 | 3201 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_7l65a5.enc
2019/10/12 | 3200 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_liamow.enc
2019/10/12 | 3200 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_qrc2n2.enc
+2019/10/12 | 32000 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex
2019/10/12 | 3195 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_rer7iq.enc
2019/10/12 | 3195 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_hjezmg.enc
2019/10/12 | 3195 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_7lhnpv.enc
2019/10/12 | 31940 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3191 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_lbrscz.enc
+2019/10/12 | 31891 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex
2019/10/12 | 3187 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_p5fsj2.enc
2019/10/12 | 3187 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_i4ztt6.enc
2019/10/12 | 3185 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_mq3pk7.enc
2019/10/12 | 3180 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_ndsebz.enc
+2019/10/12 | 3178 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/authorpart.tex
2019/10/12 | 3176 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_xwhmgi.enc
2019/10/12 | 3175 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_yxys5l.enc
2019/10/12 | 3175 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_ppb7ce.enc
@@ -1038,8 +2160,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 3122 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_fnl4sj.enc
2019/10/12 | 3121 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_5ysuwq.enc
2019/10/12 | 3120 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_fl2mea.enc
-2019/10/12 | 31187 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 31154 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3113 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_k24cav.enc
2019/10/12 | 3110 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_2ybfsp.enc
2019/10/12 | 3110 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_meva6t.enc
@@ -1048,17 +2168,16 @@
2019/10/12 | 31051 | fonts/newtx/README
2019/10/12 | 3102 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/main.tex
2019/10/12 | 3102 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_a56nal.enc
-2019/10/12 | 31009 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3095 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_34tkje.enc
2019/10/12 | 3095 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_ho7x2y.enc
2019/10/12 | 3091 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_ljow5q.enc
2019/10/12 | 3090 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_txosmw.enc
2019/10/12 | 3090 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_ggoxrw.enc
-2019/10/12 | 308931 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3088 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_edlrwy.enc
2019/10/12 | 3088 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/enc/cgrm_554p77.enc
2019/10/12 | 3084 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_535mcm.enc
2019/10/12 | 3082 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_hau3x5.enc
+2019/10/12 | 3082176 | info/biblio/tugboat.bib
2019/10/12 | 3080 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_utfkrl.enc
2019/10/12 | 3080 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_lmhdpa.enc
2019/10/12 | 3078 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_oskdwa.enc
@@ -1069,6 +2188,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 3072 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3067 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_tcdnmr.enc
2019/10/12 | 3056 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_ldtcgl.enc
+2019/10/12 | 3056153 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf
2019/10/12 | 3052 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3052 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 3051 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_3zuots.enc
@@ -1077,7 +2197,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 3034 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/makewin-en.bat
2019/10/12 | 3027 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_67ivnh.enc
2019/10/12 | 30242 | fonts/cabin/map/cabin.map
-2019/10/12 | 30239 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 3016 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_fp7bit.enc
2019/10/12 | 3014 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_i3ibnm.enc
2019/10/12 | 3008 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-swash-lgr.tfm
@@ -1087,10 +2206,10 @@
2019/10/12 | 2994 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_tsrvmb.enc
2019/10/12 | 2992 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_qhp2au.enc
2019/10/12 | 2983 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_xhqcff.enc
+2019/10/12 | 29830 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex
2019/10/12 | 2981 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_6qtp6p.enc
2019/10/12 | 2975 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/ctikzstyle-legacy.tex
2019/10/12 | 2975 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_i3ioen.enc
-2019/10/12 | 29712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2970 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_fc2mbn.enc
2019/10/12 | 29688 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 29680 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
@@ -1100,7 +2219,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 2963 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_puit2n.enc
2019/10/12 | 29616 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2959 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_gfppum.enc
+2019/10/12 | 29553 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komabug.tex
2019/10/12 | 2954 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_bevor6.enc
+2019/10/12 | 29527 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex
2019/10/12 | 29496 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 29494 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/cqunumerical.bst
2019/10/12 | 29464 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
@@ -1108,17 +2229,15 @@
2019/10/12 | 29452 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 29440 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2930 | fonts/ebgaramond/enc/ebgm_zcffwk.enc
-2019/10/12 | 29258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 29251 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2916 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/README.md
-2019/10/12 | 29125 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2903 | fonts/cabin/enc/cbn_jjp77t.enc
2019/10/12 | 28 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramondInitials-tlf-lgr.vf
2019/10/12 | 28836 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2881 | fonts/ebgaramond/doc/ebgaramond-samples.tex
2019/10/12 | 288024 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic.ttf
-2019/10/12 | 28739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 2872 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/expertpart.tex
2019/10/12 | 286368 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic.ttf
+2019/10/12 | 28631 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx
2019/10/12 | 286168 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic.ttf
2019/10/12 | 28564 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2852 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/experiment.tex
@@ -1126,14 +2245,13 @@
2019/10/12 | 28260 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 28256 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 282380 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic.ttf
+2019/10/12 | 2822 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex
2019/10/12 | 2820 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2820 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 28196 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2818 | fonts/alegreya/README
2019/10/12 | 2816 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-lf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2816 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-lf-lgr.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 281505 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 281256 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 281184 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/truetype/CormorantGaramond-Italic.ttf
2019/10/12 | 280 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/ctikzstyle-example.tex
2019/10/12 | 2808 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-swash-lgr.tfm
@@ -1157,8 +2275,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 2772 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2768 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2768 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-lgr.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 276791 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 27654 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2756 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2756 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2748 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tlf-swash-lgr.tfm
@@ -1189,7 +2305,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 27256 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 27228 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 27208 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-swash-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 271721 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 27164 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 27160 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 27144 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-swash-t1.tfm
@@ -1215,7 +2330,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 26988 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 26984 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 26976 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tosf-sc-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 26960 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 26960 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-swash-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 26952 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 26948 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-swash-ly1.tfm
@@ -1238,12 +2352,11 @@
2019/10/12 | 2676 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2676 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 26748 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-sc-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 26742 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 26692 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 26688 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-sc-t1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 26686 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
2019/10/12 | 2667888 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/stickstoo.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 26664 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-sc-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 26649 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 26556 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luamplib.source.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 2652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-lgr.tfm
@@ -1251,17 +2364,19 @@
2019/10/12 | 2652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-lgr.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 26506 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2624 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 26196 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 2621 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup
+2019/10/12 | 26178 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex
+2019/10/12 | 26157 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex
+2019/10/12 | 26143 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx
2019/10/12 | 26135 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcircshapes.tex
+2019/10/12 | 260933 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx
2019/10/12 | 2608 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2604 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 260450 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 2600 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2592 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 25900 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3backend.source.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 2579882 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2576 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2572 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2572 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
@@ -1269,6 +2384,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 2568 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2568 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2568 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 2565 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup
2019/10/12 | 256324 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-Italic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 2556 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2556 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-lgr.tfm
@@ -1280,13 +2396,14 @@
2019/10/12 | 2548 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2548 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2548 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 2545 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrop.inc
+2019/10/12 | 254508 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdf
2019/10/12 | 2544 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2544 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 254184 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 2540 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 253488 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 25328 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tlshell.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 25321 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2528 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2524 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-swash-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2524 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-lgr.tfm
@@ -1295,11 +2412,34 @@
2019/10/12 | 2520 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-osf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2516 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2516 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 2515 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.latexinit
2019/10/12 | 2512 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 250705 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/type1/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 25055 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/lppl-de.txt
2019/10/12 | 2504 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2500 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2500 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/typearea.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocbasic.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrwfile.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrtime.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrreprt.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlttr2.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlfile.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrletter.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-scrpage.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-notecolumn.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrhack.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrextend.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrdate.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrbook.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrbase.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrartcl.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scraddr.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komascript.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/koma-script.html
+2019/10/12 | 2497 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komascr.html
2019/10/12 | 2496 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2492 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2492 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
@@ -1310,14 +2450,11 @@
2019/10/12 | 2484 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2480 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2480 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 247520 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 247003 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 246473 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2460 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 2457994 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2452 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2452 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2444 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 244175 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex
2019/10/12 | 2440 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2436 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2436 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
@@ -1326,16 +2463,16 @@
2019/10/12 | 2412 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2408 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 240575 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/doc/circuitikzmanual.tex
-2019/10/12 | 24055 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2404 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2396 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2392 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 23867 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
2019/10/12 | 2384 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23816 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-swash-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2380 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23788 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 237450 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 23684 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 23653 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
2019/10/12 | 23648 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23644 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-swash-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23624 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-swash-ly1.tfm
@@ -1348,7 +2485,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 23532 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23504 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23416 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 23334 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 23328 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/contents/analysis.tex
2019/10/12 | 23320 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23316 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-ly1.tfm
@@ -1357,14 +2493,18 @@
2019/10/12 | 23284 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23196 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 23196 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 23143 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx
2019/10/12 | 23128 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-swash-t1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 23017 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib
2019/10/12 | 22936 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-swash-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 22911 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 22911 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcircvoltage.tex
2019/10/12 | 22828 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 22824 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-swash-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 22534272 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip
+2019/10/12 | 22560 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex
+2019/10/12 | 22513 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins
2019/10/12 | 22222 | macros/latex/contrib/enotez/enotez_en.tex
+2019/10/12 | 2212 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.gst
+2019/10/12 | 220999 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex
2019/10/12 | 2164 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2164 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-inf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2152 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
@@ -1374,7 +2514,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 21448 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 21436 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 21436 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-t2a.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 214120 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2140 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2140 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-inf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2140 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
@@ -1388,7 +2527,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 2132 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 21304 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 21296 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-sc-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 2128460 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz
2019/10/12 | 2124 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2124 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2124 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
@@ -1453,10 +2591,10 @@
2019/10/12 | 20752 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2072 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-swash-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2072 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-sup-t2a.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 20721 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2068 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-swash-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2068 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-sup-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2068 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 20673 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
2019/10/12 | 20660 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2064 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2064 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-sup-t2b.tfm
@@ -1537,7 +2675,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 2028 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-inf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 20284 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-osf-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 20260 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-t2a.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 202550 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 2024 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2024 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2024 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
@@ -1549,6 +2686,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 2024 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2024 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2020 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-inf-t2c.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 20182 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt
2019/10/12 | 2016 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2016 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 2016 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-inf-ly1.tfm
@@ -1629,7 +2767,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1984 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1984 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1984 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 198186 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 1981 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/Makefile
2019/10/12 | 1980 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1980 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1980 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
@@ -1638,7 +2776,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1980 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1980 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1980 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 19792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1976 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1976 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1976 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-sc-t1--base.tfm
@@ -1667,6 +2804,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1960 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1960 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-inf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 19600 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-lf-t2a.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 195988 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf
2019/10/12 | 1956 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1956 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-lf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1956 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-inf-t1--base.tfm
@@ -1678,7 +2816,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1952 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1952 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-osf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1952 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-sc-t1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 194933 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1948 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1948 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1948 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-osf-t1--base.tfm
@@ -1691,7 +2828,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1944 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-inf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1944 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1940 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 193858 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1936 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1936 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-inf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1936 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-sup-t2a.tfm
@@ -1711,6 +2847,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 19240 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 19232 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 19232 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-t2a.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 19210 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex
2019/10/12 | 1920 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-sup-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1920 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-inf-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1920 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
@@ -1723,13 +2860,12 @@
2019/10/12 | 19172 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 19172 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 19168 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tlf-t2a.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 191315 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1912 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tosf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1912 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-inf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1912 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1912 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 191273 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 19112 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-osf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 19110 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/lppl.txt
2019/10/12 | 19108 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1908 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-inf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1908 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-inf-ly1.tfm
@@ -1746,6 +2882,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1904 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-inf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1900 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1900 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 189777 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
2019/10/12 | 18972 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1896 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-inf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1896 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-inf-lgr.tfm
@@ -1766,6 +2903,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1884 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-inf-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1884 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-sup-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1884 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-inf-t2b.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 188494 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html
2019/10/12 | 18844 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18836 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18836 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
@@ -1791,6 +2929,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1876 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-inf-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1876 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-sup-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1876 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-inf-t2c.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 187550 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html
2019/10/12 | 18736 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18736 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1872 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
@@ -1809,12 +2948,10 @@
2019/10/12 | 18716 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18716 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18704 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 18693192 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe
2019/10/12 | 18692 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1868 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-sup-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1868 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-inf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18684 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-osf-sc-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 186820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 18676 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18668 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18656 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-sc-t1.tfm
@@ -1846,9 +2983,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 18564 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18560 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1855 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/CONTRIBUTORS.md
-2019/10/12 | 185586 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 18556 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18552 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-lf-ly1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 185412 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx
2019/10/12 | 18540 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-osf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18536 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18536 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-t1.tfm
@@ -1874,6 +3011,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1848 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1848 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Regular-tlf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18484 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-osf-sc-t1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 18471 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex
2019/10/12 | 18464 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18464 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18460 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tosf-ly1.tfm
@@ -1893,7 +3031,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 18444 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-lf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18444 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18444 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 184240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 18412 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-osf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1840 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1840 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-inf-t1--base.tfm
@@ -1902,6 +3039,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1840 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1840 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1840 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 18403 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
2019/10/12 | 18400 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-lf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18396 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18384 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tosf-sc-t1.tfm
@@ -1938,7 +3076,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1828 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1828 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1828 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 182712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 18260 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 18256 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1824 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-lf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
@@ -1995,7 +3132,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 1804 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1804 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1804 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 18042 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex
2019/10/12 | 1803 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/cquthesis.cwl
+2019/10/12 | 18016 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/komamarks.dtx
2019/10/12 | 18016 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1800 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1800 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-t1--base.tfm
@@ -2014,6 +3153,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1796 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1796 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1796 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 17931 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex
2019/10/12 | 1792 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-ly1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1792 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-swash-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1792 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-t1--base.tfm
@@ -2023,6 +3163,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1792 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1792 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 17928 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-lf-t1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 1789 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.ist
2019/10/12 | 1788 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tlf-swash-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1788 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1788 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-swash-t1--base.tfm
@@ -2050,6 +3191,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1780 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1780 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 17776 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-lf-swash-t1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 177714 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex
2019/10/12 | 1776 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1776 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tosf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm
@@ -2058,9 +3200,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-inf-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1776 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1776 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 17768 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 17768 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-osf-swash-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 177647 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 17744 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tosf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 17744 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-swash-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1772 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-swash-t1--base.tfm
@@ -2072,7 +3212,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1772 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-sup-t1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1772 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1772 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 17692 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 1768 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/Makefile
2019/10/12 | 1768 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1768 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-osf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1768 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-swash-t1--base.tfm
@@ -2095,6 +3235,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1764 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1764 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1764 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 17640 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex
2019/10/12 | 1760 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-lf-swash-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1760 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-lf-t1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1760 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
@@ -2266,6 +3407,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1716 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1716 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-inf-t1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1716 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tlf-sc-t1--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 17154 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
2019/10/12 | 17152 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 17152 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 17144 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-ly1.tfm
@@ -2443,7 +3585,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1692 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Italic-tlf-sc-t1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1692 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Italic-sup-t1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1692 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Bold-tlf-sc-t1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 169240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1688 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1688 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-SemiBold-inf-t1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1688 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramond-Regular-sup-t1.vf
@@ -2489,7 +3630,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1680 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-sc-ly1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1680 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1680 | fonts/cabin/vf/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
-2019/10/12 | 167815 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1676 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-ly1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1676 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-sc-ly1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1676 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/vf/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-ly1.vf
@@ -2545,6 +3685,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1668 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Bold-tlf-sc-ly1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1668 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1668 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 16684 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex
2019/10/12 | 16668 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-swash-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1664 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf
2019/10/12 | 1664 | fonts/cabin/vf/Cabin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf
@@ -2564,9 +3705,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1656 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1656 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16568 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-t2b.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 165673 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 16556 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/doc/changelog.tex
-2019/10/12 | 165557 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 16552 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-osf-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1652 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-ts1.tfm
@@ -2577,8 +3716,10 @@
2019/10/12 | 1652 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1652 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1652 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 16519 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile
2019/10/12 | 16508 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16504 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tlf-t2b.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 165040 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komamarks.pdf
2019/10/12 | 16456 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-swash-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16452 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-swash-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1644 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
@@ -2607,18 +3748,19 @@
2019/10/12 | 1620 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1620 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1620 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 1620006 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 16173128 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-exp-w32.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 161419 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 16128 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex
2019/10/12 | 16100 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16092 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1608 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1608 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16072 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16072 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-lf-t2c.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 160578 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1604 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1604 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-osf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1604 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-lf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 16038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 160445 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex
2019/10/12 | 16016 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16016 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 16012 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t2c.tfm
@@ -2627,10 +3769,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 1596 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1596 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-lf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1596 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 15957025 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb
2019/10/12 | 1592 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1592 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 15892 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 15892 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx
2019/10/12 | 1588 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15888 | CTAN.sites
2019/10/12 | 1584 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm
@@ -2644,6 +3785,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 15829020 | fonts/ebgaramond.zip
2019/10/12 | 15828 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15826756 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/fira.tar.xz
+2019/10/12 | 15820 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx
2019/10/12 | 15820 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15812 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1580 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
@@ -2756,7 +3898,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1540 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1540 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1540 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-lf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512
2019/10/12 | 15396 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15392 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1536 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-ts1--base.tfm
@@ -2767,7 +3908,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 15320 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15320 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15304 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-osf-sc-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512
2019/10/12 | 152 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramondInitials-tlf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1528 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tosf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1528 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
@@ -2776,9 +3916,9 @@
2019/10/12 | 15288 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-tosf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15280 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-MediumItalic-tosf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1524 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 15239620 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 15224 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 152240 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luamplib.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 152131 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1520 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1520 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15184 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-tosf-sc-ly1.tfm
@@ -2796,6 +3936,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 15116 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-sc-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15096 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-sc-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15092 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-t2a.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 15090 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx
2019/10/12 | 1508 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1508 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1508 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-osf-ts1--base.tfm
@@ -2813,6 +3954,8 @@
2019/10/12 | 1508 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1508 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1508 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 15078 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex
+2019/10/12 | 15060 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex
2019/10/12 | 15060 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tosf-sc-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15056 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tosf-sc-t2a.tfm
2019/10/12 | 15052 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-t2a.tfm
@@ -2827,7 +3970,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1500 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14992 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tosf-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14992 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 149927 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1496 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic-inf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1496 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14960 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-t2c.tfm
@@ -2886,7 +4028,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1472 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1472 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14728 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-t2a.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 147140 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 14712 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1468 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-BoldItalic-inf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1468 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-ts1--base.tfm
@@ -2911,7 +4052,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1468 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1468 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14680 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBoldItalic-tosf-sc-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 146753 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 14668 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14668 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14660 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-t2a.tfm
@@ -2929,12 +4069,12 @@
2019/10/12 | 14608 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tlf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14608 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14604 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tlf-t2c.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 14603312 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-dev-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 14600 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tosf-t2c.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512
2019/10/12 | 1456 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1456 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 145520 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3kernel.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512
+2019/10/12 | 14509 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex
2019/10/12 | 1448 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1442 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcircutils.tex
2019/10/12 | 14372 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-t2c.tfm
@@ -2957,16 +4097,16 @@
2019/10/12 | 1428 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1424 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1424 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 142368 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex
2019/10/12 | 141706 | macros/latex/contrib/acro/acro.sty
2019/10/12 | 141568 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/microtype.source.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 140 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramondInitials-tlf-t1.vf
2019/10/12 | 140 | fonts/ebgaramond/vf/EBGaramondInitials-tlf-ly1.vf
2019/10/12 | 14084 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-t2c.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 1407481 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 14056 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1404 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1404 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Italic-tlf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14048 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-osf-t2c.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 14025 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx
2019/10/12 | 14024 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14020 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tlf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 14020 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
@@ -2982,7 +4122,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 13740 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tosf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 13736 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tlf-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1372 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 137122 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1368 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-inf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1368 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1368 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-inf-ot1.tfm
@@ -2995,6 +4134,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1360 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-inf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1360 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1360 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-inf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 13592 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrdoc.dtx
2019/10/12 | 13583 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/pgfcirclabel.tex
2019/10/12 | 1356 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1356 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
@@ -3021,14 +4161,14 @@
2019/10/12 | 1344 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1340 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1340 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 13394 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex
2019/10/12 | 13380 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1336 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1332 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-osf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1332 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 133150 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1328 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tosf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1328 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 1326762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 13262 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex
2019/10/12 | 1324 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1324 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Medium-tosf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1324 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
@@ -3041,6 +4181,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1320 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1320 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1320 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 131820188 | systems/win32/w32tex/context.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 1316 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-ExtraBold-tosf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1316 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1316 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
@@ -3061,7 +4202,6 @@
2019/10/12 | 1308 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-inf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 13084 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tosf-swash-ly1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 13084 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Italic-tlf-swash-ly1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 13060 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1300 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tosf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1297052 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/fira.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 1296 | macros/latex/contrib/acro/README
@@ -3070,6 +4210,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 1296 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1296 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1292 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-inf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 12914 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex
2019/10/12 | 12912 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1288 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-tosf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1288 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBold-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
@@ -3077,6 +4218,7 @@
2019/10/12 | 12888 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12880 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12868 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-osf-sc-t2b.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 12850656 | systems/win32/w32tex/pdftex-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/12 | 1284 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-sc-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1284 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12840 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-lf-sc-t2b.tfm
@@ -3090,9 +4232,8 @@
2019/10/12 | 12780 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tosf-sc-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-tlf-sc-t2b.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12776 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-tlf-sc-t2b.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 1273248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1272 | fonts/ebgaramond/tfm/EBGaramond-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 127165 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 127040 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex
2019/10/12 | 127036 | fonts/cabin/opentype/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic.otf
2019/10/12 | 12700 | fonts/cabin/tfm/Cabin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12672 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-osf-sc-t2b.tfm
@@ -3114,38 +4255,40 @@
2019/10/12 | 12356 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12356 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/12 | 12356 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 12352 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex
2019/10/12 | 123508 | fonts/cabin/opentype/CabinCondensed-Italic.otf
+2019/10/12 | 123503 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 12314 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 12295 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 121375 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex
2019/10/12 | 1210783 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis.zip
-2019/10/12 | 1205459 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 120024 | fonts/cabin/opentype/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic.otf
2019/10/12 | 11972 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/l3backend.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 1194278 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 11868 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex
2019/10/12 | 11820 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luamplib.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 116837 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1140962 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 1140246 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 112855 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 110968 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 11577 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11543 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex
+2019/10/12 | 112648 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 11243 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex
+2019/10/12 | 11138 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 11138 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2examples.dtx
+2019/10/12 | 111281 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/ru.po
2019/10/12 | 11067 | fonts/alegreya/latex/AlegreyaSans.sty
-2019/10/12 | 1101602 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 109876 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-docindex.tar.xz
-2019/10/12 | 108877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1084 | fonts/cabin/doc/cabin-samples.tex
2019/10/12 | 1084846 | macros/latex/contrib/cquthesis/cquthesis.pdf
2019/10/12 | 107783 | fonts/ebgaramond/type1/EBGaramondInitials.pfb
+2019/10/12 | 10760 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide
2019/10/12 | 107289 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
2019/10/12 | 10713 | fonts/cabin/latex/OT1Cabin-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 10713 | fonts/cabin/latex/LY1Cabin-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 10713 | fonts/cabin/latex/LGRCabin-TLF.fd
2019/10/12 | 10676 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-osf-sc-t2c.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 1066578 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 10652 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-lf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10644 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-osf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10636 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-osf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 106343 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-MediumItalic.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 1063400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 106319 | fonts/cabin/type1/CabinCondensed-Italic.pfb
-2019/10/12 | 1063188 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 10608 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Medium-lf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10604 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Regular-lf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10588 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-SemiBold-tosf-sc-t2c.tfm
@@ -3165,24 +4308,30 @@
2019/10/12 | 1048 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1048 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1048 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 10489 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex
+2019/10/12 | 104797 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
2019/10/12 | 10465 | graphics/pgf/contrib/circuitikz/tex/circuitikz.sty
2019/10/12 | 10460 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-osf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1044 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1044 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-Italic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1044 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1044 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-sup-lgr--base.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 10439 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex
2019/10/12 | 10428 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-lf-sc-t2c.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 1042823 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
2019/10/12 | 1040 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-sc-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 1040 | fonts/cabin/tfm/CabinCondensed-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10364 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tosf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10360 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Light-tlf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10344 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-osf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10324 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-t2c.tfm
+2019/10/12 | 10309 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrdocstrip.tex
2019/10/12 | 10256 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tosf-sc-t2c.tfm
2019/10/12 | 10256 | fonts/cormorantgaramond/tfm/CormorantGaramond-Bold-tlf-sc-t2c.tfm
-2019/10/12 | 102390 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma
-2019/10/12 | 100717 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma
+2019/10/12 | 10213 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex
+2019/10/12 | 102049 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/translations/sr.po
+2019/10/12 | 101387 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
+2019/10/12 | 100768 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex
+2019/10/12 | 100334 | macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex
2019/10/12 | 10029 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/OT1EBGaramond-TOsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 10029 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LY1EBGaramond-TOsF.fd
2019/10/12 | 10029 | fonts/ebgaramond/latex/LGREBGaramond-TOsF.fd
@@ -3524,13 +4673,11 @@
2019/10/11 | 5254 | graphics/asymptote/base/animation.asy
2019/10/11 | 524 | graphics/asymptote/doc/brokenaxis.asy
2019/10/11 | 5239 | graphics/asymptote/name.h
-2019/10/11 | 5238 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl
2019/10/11 | 521 | graphics/asymptote/examples/dimension.asy
2019/10/11 | 521 | graphics/asymptote/doc/Hobbycontrol.asy
2019/10/11 | 520 | graphics/asymptote/examples/smoothelevation.asy
2019/10/11 | 51 | graphics/asymptote/base/unicode.asy
2019/10/11 | 51 | graphics/asymptote/base/babel.asy
-2019/10/11 | 519423 | systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog
2019/10/11 | 5179 | graphics/asymptote/pipestream.cc
2019/10/11 | 51523 | graphics/asymptote/settings.cc
2019/10/11 | 5151 | graphics/asymptote/GUI/labelEditor.py
@@ -5069,7 +6216,6 @@
2019/10/10 | 439654890 | systems/mac/mactex/MacTeXtras-20191010.zip
2019/10/10 | 43960 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Light-lf-lgr.tfm
2019/10/10 | 4393 | fonts/fira/doc/LICENSE
-2019/10/10 | 438316 | systems/win32/w32tex/mftools.tar.xz
2019/10/10 | 43708 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Thin-tosf-t1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 43708 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 43484 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-ExtraLightItalic-lf-sc-ly1.tfm
@@ -6441,7 +7587,6 @@
2019/10/10 | 16220 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-ExtraLightItalic-lf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 1620 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-UltraLight-sup-lgr.tfm
2019/10/10 | 16176 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Book-osf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/10 | 16172588 | systems/win32/w32tex/luatex-exp-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/10 | 1616 | fonts/coelacanth/tfm/CoelacanthItalic-tlf-ot1--base.tfm
2019/10/10 | 16152 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Regular-osf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 16152 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Light-osf-ot1.tfm
@@ -6994,7 +8139,6 @@
2019/10/10 | 1320 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraMono-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 1320 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraMono-MediumOblique-tosf-ts1--base.tfm
2019/10/10 | 1320 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraMono-MediumOblique-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
-2019/10/10 | 131805668 | systems/win32/w32tex/context.tar.xz
2019/10/10 | 1316 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 1316 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Light-sup-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 1316 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Heavy-lf-sc-ot1--base.tfm
@@ -7075,7 +8219,6 @@
2019/10/10 | 12864 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 12848 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Medium-tosf-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 12848 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
-2019/10/10 | 12841920 | systems/win32/w32tex/pdftex-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/10 | 12800 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-UltraLight-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 12788 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Thin-lf-sc-ot1.tfm
2019/10/10 | 12700 | fonts/fira/tfm/FiraSans-Thin-osf-sc-ot1.tfm
@@ -7193,13 +8336,10 @@
2019/10/09 | 91275 | macros/latex/contrib/metrix/metrix.dtx
2019/10/09 | 905406 | fonts/alegreya/doc/alegreya-samples.pdf
2019/10/09 | 870728 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/beebe.tar.xz
-2019/10/09 | 8133752 | systems/win32/w32tex/newtxpx-boondoxfonts.tar.xz
2019/10/09 | 735 | macros/latex/contrib/metrix/metrix.ins
2019/10/09 | 68246 | fonts/newtx/doc/newtxdoc.tex
2019/10/09 | 637153 | macros/latex/contrib/metrix.zip
2019/10/09 | 623251 | macros/latex/contrib/metrix/metrix.pdf
-2019/10/09 | 4648844 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipdfm-w32.tar.xz
-2019/10/09 | 4450848 | systems/win32/w32tex/dvipsk-w32.tar.xz
2019/10/09 | 4391 | fonts/alegreya/doc/OFL.txt
2019/10/09 | 3187702 | install/fonts/newpx.tds.zip
2019/10/09 | 3158462 | fonts/newpx.zip
@@ -11820,153 +12960,78 @@
2019/10/07 | 993154 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tracklang.tar.lzma
2019/10/07 | 992992 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/mathalpha.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/07 | 97690 | macros/latex/contrib/dccpaper/dccpaper.dtx
+2019/10/07 | 974 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md
2019/10/07 | 972 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/866.tex
2019/10/07 | 972 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/inputs/866.tex
-2019/10/07 | 95065 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 948 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.tex
-2019/10/07 | 9481 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.goals.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 927 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.tex
2019/10/07 | 921632 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tracklang.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/07 | 894 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.tex
-2019/10/07 | 86646 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.pdf
2019/10/07 | 863 | macros/latex/contrib/gindex/README.md
-2019/10/07 | 86047 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 821 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.tex
2019/10/07 | 794 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/xecyr-ex7-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 776 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.tex
+2019/10/07 | 77436 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex
2019/10/07 | 752 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/iso.tex
2019/10/07 | 752 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/inputs/iso.tex
2019/10/07 | 750 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/xecyr-ex7-ru-x.tex
2019/10/07 | 7400 | macros/latex/contrib/gindex/gindex.tex
2019/10/07 | 728385 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr.zip
2019/10/07 | 7249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/bxpapersize.tar.lzma
-2019/10/07 | 7231 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.verbwrite.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 6778 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/rubibtex-ex-x.tex
2019/10/07 | 6777 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/rubibtex-ex-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 6689 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 6643 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.tags.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 65721 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.tex
-2019/10/07 | 65379 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.pdf
2019/10/07 | 642204 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc.zip
-2019/10/07 | 6298 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.auxfile.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 6289 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history
2019/10/07 | 622 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/README
2019/10/07 | 615613 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/acro.tar.lzma
-2019/10/07 | 613 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.tex
2019/10/07 | 59921 | macros/latex/contrib/dccpaper/dccpaper-by.eps
-2019/10/07 | 5934 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.base.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 592382 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fnpct.tar.lzma
2019/10/07 | 589912 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/acro.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/07 | 5844 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.various.tex
-2019/10/07 | 5827 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.blanks.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 57235 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 57220 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 570 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.tex
-2019/10/07 | 56153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.pdf
2019/10/07 | 5604 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/fancy_header.png
-2019/10/07 | 55079 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.pdf
2019/10/07 | 54690 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc/doc/aebminitocman.tex
-2019/10/07 | 542 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.tex
-2019/10/07 | 5319 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.templates.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 524 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/xecyr-ex5-ru-x.tex
2019/10/07 | 52196 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tracklang.source.tar.xz
2019/10/07 | 505 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/xecyr-ex5-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 50580 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.pdf
2019/10/07 | 5012 | macros/latex/contrib/dccpaper/dccpaper-by.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 48094 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-299534.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 4795 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.translations.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 4707 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.grades.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 469 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.tex
-2019/10/07 | 46504 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369636.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 46308 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.pdf
2019/10/07 | 460532 | macros/latex/contrib/tasks.zip
-2019/10/07 | 45738 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listings.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 45719 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.pdf
2019/10/07 | 448291 | macros/latex/contrib/tasks/tasks_en.pdf
2019/10/07 | 4444 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/bxpapersize.tar.xz
-2019/10/07 | 443 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.tex
-2019/10/07 | 43899 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.pdf
2019/10/07 | 4368 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/mathalpha.tar.xz
2019/10/07 | 4298 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/practicalreports.sty
-2019/10/07 | 42153 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 41167 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.description-list.pdf
2019/10/07 | 3934704 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tlshell.win32.tar.xz
-2019/10/07 | 38749 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 38376 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.boxed-headings.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 3802 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README
-2019/10/07 | 37708 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 36968 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.pdf
2019/10/07 | 3670 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/grafika_v_tex.tex
2019/10/07 | 36665 | macros/latex/contrib/gindex.zip
2019/10/07 | 3631 | macros/latex/contrib/dccpaper/README.md
-2019/10/07 | 36256 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.pdf
2019/10/07 | 358 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/pict2e-ex.tex
-2019/10/07 | 3547 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-350028.tex
2019/10/07 | 35477 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc/aeb-minitoc.dtx
2019/10/07 | 35245 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/example_figure.jpeg
-2019/10/07 | 3454 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty
-2019/10/07 | 3442 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-80640.tex
-2019/10/07 | 33206 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.pdf
2019/10/07 | 324 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/pict2e-ex.tex
2019/10/07 | 3240 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/bxpapersize.doc.tar.xz
2019/10/07 | 3184669 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov.zip
-2019/10/07 | 31555 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.pdf
2019/10/07 | 314 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/rumakeindex.sh
-2019/10/07 | 3142 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.tex
2019/10/07 | 3140 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/fancy_footer.png
-2019/10/07 | 31016 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 30938 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.pdf
2019/10/07 | 3090 | macros/latex/contrib/gindex/gindex.sty
2019/10/07 | 3086 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/normal_page.png
2019/10/07 | 307794 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc/doc/aeb-minitoc.pdf
2019/10/07 | 30705 | macros/latex/contrib/gindex/gindex.pdf
2019/10/07 | 3029 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/fancy_page.png
-2019/10/07 | 3002 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsimverb.sty
-2019/10/07 | 29952 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.blanks.pdf
2019/10/07 | 294972 | macros/latex/contrib/dccpaper.zip
2019/10/07 | 2928 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/new_title_page.png
2019/10/07 | 28751 | macros/latex/contrib/tasks/tasks.sty
-2019/10/07 | 28426 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-370642.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 2823197 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim.zip
2019/10/07 | 281 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/listings-utf8-ex.tex
-2019/10/07 | 28127 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.pointsums.pdf
2019/10/07 | 278 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/listings-utf8-ex.tex
2019/10/07 | 2742 | macros/latex/contrib/dccpaper/Makefile
-2019/10/07 | 27155 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.pdf
2019/10/07 | 2618 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/rumakeindex-ex-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 2565 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 254082 | macros/latex/contrib/dccpaper/dccpaper.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 25040 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 247 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-308883.tex
2019/10/07 | 2472 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/rumakeindex-ex-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 24096 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls
2019/10/07 | 2408 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/README
-2019/10/07 | 23204 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.grade-distribution.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 23102 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.randomexercises.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 2259 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.golatex-91339.tex
2019/10/07 | 225049 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports.zip
2019/10/07 | 2238 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/xecyr-doc-ru.tex
2019/10/07 | 222 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/rubibtex-ex-x.sh
2019/10/07 | 21456 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/acro.tar.xz
2019/10/07 | 210290440 | systems/win32/miktex/setup/windows-x64/basic-miktex-2.9.7219-x64.exe
-2019/10/07 | 20929 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 2074 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/rubibtex-ex.bib
2019/10/07 | 201617160 | systems/win32/miktex/setup/windows-x86/basic-miktex-2.9.7219.exe
-2019/10/07 | 20045 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-155630.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 19295 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1923 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1913 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-13635.tex
2019/10/07 | 1896 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/xecyr-ex3-ru-x.tex
2019/10/07 | 18687 | macros/latex/contrib/tasks/tasks_en.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1862 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369065.tex
2019/10/07 | 1859 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/1251.tex
2019/10/07 | 1859 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/inputs/1251.tex
2019/10/07 | 184987 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/practicalreports.pdf
2019/10/07 | 1844 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/xecyr-ex3-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1828 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-338165.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1792 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.listofexercises.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1777 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.tex
2019/10/07 | 17296 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tracklang.tar.xz
2019/10/07 | 172892 | info/biblio/font.twx
2019/10/07 | 159 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/NEWS
@@ -11974,155 +13039,19 @@
2019/10/07 | 1593 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/xecyr-ex4-ru-x.tex
2019/10/07 | 1581 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/koi8-r.tex
2019/10/07 | 1581 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/inputs/koi8-r.tex
-2019/10/07 | 15653 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.properties.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 1559 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/xecyr-doc-ru.tex
2019/10/07 | 1544 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/xecyr-ex4-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 15370 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 15269 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/tex/xecyr.sty
2019/10/07 | 1470 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/xecyr-ex6-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 14603 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1425 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.multiplechoice.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1404 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-369803.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1394 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.collections.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1385 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-391530.tex
2019/10/07 | 13776 | macros/latex/contrib/practicalreports/practicalreports.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1351 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.crossref.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1345 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.difficulties.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1337 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.different-point-types.tex
2019/10/07 | 1322 | macros/latex/contrib/tasks/README
-2019/10/07 | 13152 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.solutions.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1313 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.hints.tex
-2019/10/07 | 12945 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.collections.code.tex
2019/10/07 | 1286 | macros/latex/contrib/gindex/gindexh.ist
2019/10/07 | 12452 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/xecyr-ex1-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1243 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas
2019/10/07 | 1234 | macros/latex/contrib/gindex/gindex.ist
2019/10/07 | 1232 | macros/latex/contrib/tasks/tasks.cfg
2019/10/07 | 12312 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/sample2e-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1220136 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf
-2019/10/07 | 1183 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-199360.tex
2019/10/07 | 11099 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/old/xecyr-ex2-ru-x.tex
2019/10/07 | 10750 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/howto-tex-ru-x.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1072 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texsx-305110.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1069 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.code-and-output.tex
2019/10/07 | 1064430 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph.tar.lzma
-2019/10/07 | 10594 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.random.code.tex
-2019/10/07 | 1013 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.floating.tex
-2019/10/07 | 101047 | macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex
2019/10/07 | 1003157 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix.tar.lzma
2019/10/07 | 1000812 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mathalpha.tar.lzma
-2019/10/06 | 952048 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/nicematrix.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 941 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions.sty
-2019/10/06 | 877 | macros/generic/tracklang/README
-2019/10/06 | 8656 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/fnpct.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 848 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals2.sty
-2019/10/06 | 781 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang4.tex
-2019/10/06 | 7653 | macros/latex/contrib/bxpapersize.zip
-2019/10/06 | 71840 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tetex.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 689 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang5.tex
-2019/10/06 | 676481 | macros/generic/tracklang/tracklang.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 630 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-map.tex
-2019/10/06 | 6202 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang4.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 616 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc/README.md
-2019/10/06 | 6004 | macros/latex/contrib/bxpapersize/README.md
-2019/10/06 | 579228 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/fnpct.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 562 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-map2.tex
-2019/10/06 | 5440 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tikzmark.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 526 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals.sty
-2019/10/06 | 525320 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tetex.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 448492 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/hyperref.source.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 43180 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/fontools.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 42164 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/nicematrix.source.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 414492 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tikzmark.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 3884 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc/examples/minitoc-art.tex
-2019/10/06 | 3822 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de4.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 3820 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-de-poly.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 376 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-map3.tex
-2019/10/06 | 37189 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/howto-tex-ru-x.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 359 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-nomap.tex
-2019/10/06 | 3559 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-poly.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 3558 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-poly.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 3460 | macros/generic/tracklang/CHANGES
-2019/10/06 | 344448 | macros/generic/tracklang/tracklang.dtx
-2019/10/06 | 327 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-babel.tex
-2019/10/06 | 3161048 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/hyperref.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 313 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals2-en-GB.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 310 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals2-en-US.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 287680 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/updmap-map.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 271 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2.tex
-2019/10/06 | 26000 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-map.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 25852 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-map2.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 257 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions.tex
-2019/10/06 | 25468 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-nomap.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 2522 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov/README
-2019/10/06 | 249 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals-english.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 249 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals2-english.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 24924 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-map3.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 246 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals-german.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 246 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals2-german.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 226 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-IM.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 223 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals.tex
-2019/10/06 | 221 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-US.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 221 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-GB.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 221 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-CA.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 221 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-BE.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 221 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals-en-US.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 221 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/animals-en-GB.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 219042 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc/doc/aebminitocman.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 215 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-poly.tex
-2019/10/06 | 214 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-poly.tex
-2019/10/06 | 20000 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/mcf2graph.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 19897 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang6.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 19814 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang3.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 19802 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang2.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 19785 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-manx.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 19552 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 194 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de4.tex
-2019/10/06 | 193 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-manx.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 193 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-de-poly.tex
-2019/10/06 | 19239 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov/doc/altverse-ex3-ru.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 186 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2.tex
-2019/10/06 | 184076 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov/doc/sltables-doc-en.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 178 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de3.tex
-2019/10/06 | 1769 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/tltcl/tclkit.exe.manifest
-2019/10/06 | 17652 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tikzmark.source.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 173 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de.tex
-2019/10/06 | 17308 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov/doc/sltables-doc-en.tex
-2019/10/06 | 172 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-de.tex
-2019/10/06 | 171 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-german.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 16914 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang5.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 166 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de2.tex
-2019/10/06 | 165 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-dutch.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 164 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-french.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 164 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-english.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 1593 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov/doc/altverse-ex3-ru.tex
-2019/10/06 | 158 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2-manx.tex
-2019/10/06 | 1553 | macros/generic/tracklang/tracklang.ins
-2019/10/06 | 154415 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov/doc/classif2-ex-en.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 153 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions-italian.ldf
-2019/10/06 | 14855 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-babel.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 14716 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions2.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 14704 | macros/latex/contrib/bxpapersize/bxpapersize.sty
-2019/10/06 | 1459 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang3.tex
-2019/10/06 | 1454 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang.tex
-2019/10/06 | 1454 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang2.tex
-2019/10/06 | 140536 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-msg-translations.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 139921 | macros/latex/contrib/aeb-minitoc/examples/minitoc-art.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 13625 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals-de.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 13625 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 13625 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de2.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 13607 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2-de3.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 13161 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/sample-regions.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 12656 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 12656 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/animals/sample-animals2.pdf
-2019/10/06 | 125160 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/fontools.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 11884 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/nicematrix.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 115 | macros/xetex/latex/xecyr/doc/README
-2019/10/06 | 1133272 | install/macros/generic/tracklang.tds.zip
-2019/10/06 | 1124 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/regions/regions2.sty
-2019/10/06 | 1100502 | macros/generic/tracklang.zip
-2019/10/06 | 108764 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/hyperref.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 1086 | macros/latex/contrib/bxpapersize/LICENSE
-2019/10/06 | 10494 | macros/latex/contrib/shipunov/doc/classif2-ex-en.tex
-2019/10/06 | 1042780 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/mcf2graph.doc.tar.xz
-2019/10/06 | 1041 | macros/generic/tracklang/samples/sample-tracklang6.tex
diff --git a/fonts/adforn/README b/fonts/adforn/README
index dc22120ca6..eec053ddf8 100644
--- a/fonts/adforn/README
+++ b/fonts/adforn/README
@@ -37,4 +37,7 @@ Version 1.1a corrects a bug **if** I've understood the problem correctly, which
I'm far from convinced of. (All it does is add a pair of curly brackets in the
.sty.)
-2019/10/02
+Version 1.1b includes the PDF documentation *and* the TFM. Apologies for the
+inconvenience.
+
+2019/10/13
diff --git a/fonts/adforn/adforn.pdf b/fonts/adforn/adforn.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ac774e9015
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fonts/adforn/adforn.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/adforn/adforn.sty b/fonts/adforn/adforn.sty
index d0de7a639b..b52f55068c 100644
--- a/fonts/adforn/adforn.sty
+++ b/fonts/adforn/adforn.sty
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{adforn}[2019/09/24 v1.1 adforn CFR]
+\ProvidesPackage{adforn}[2019/10/13 v1.1b adforn CFR]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
{\Pifont{OrnementsADF}}
diff --git a/fonts/adforn/manifest.txt b/fonts/adforn/manifest.txt
index cc6e975cfb..5c18326c59 100644
--- a/fonts/adforn/manifest.txt
+++ b/fonts/adforn/manifest.txt
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ OrnementsADF.map
uornementsadf.fd
adforn.tex
manifest.txt
+README
Derived files:
OrnementsADF.tfm
diff --git a/fonts/adfsymbols/README b/fonts/adfsymbols/README
index 63854411b8..94799c8e56 100644
--- a/fonts/adfsymbols/README
+++ b/fonts/adfsymbols/README
@@ -36,4 +36,6 @@ Changes
Version 1.2a fixes a bug **if** I've understood the problem correctly, which I'm
far from sure about. (All it does is add a pair of curly brackets in the .sty.)
-2019/10/02
+Version 1.2b hopefully includes both the PDF *and* the TFM.
+
+2019/10/13
diff --git a/fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty b/fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty
index 02da945ba6..bcca7fdee2 100644
--- a/fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty
+++ b/fonts/adfsymbols/adfarrows.sty
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
%
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{adfarrows}[2019/09/24 v1.2 adfarrows CFR]
+\ProvidesPackage{adfarrows}[2019/10/13 v1.2b adfarrows CFR]
\RequirePackage{pifont,fp}
{\Pifont{ArrowsADF}}
diff --git a/fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty b/fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty
index 8d82e54550..50382d5125 100644
--- a/fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty
+++ b/fonts/adfsymbols/adfbullets.sty
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
%
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{adfbullets}[2019/09/24 v1.2 adfbullets CFR]
+\ProvidesPackage{adfbullets}[2019/10/13 v1.2b adfbullets CFR]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
{\Pifont{BulletsADF}}
diff --git a/fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.pdf b/fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d978ad3f27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/gofonts/README b/fonts/gofonts/README
index 4a3832303e..2843c9425b 100644
--- a/fonts/gofonts/README
+++ b/fonts/gofonts/README
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-This is the README for the gofonts package, version 2019-06-04.
+This is the README for the gofonts package, version 2019-10-12.
This package provides LaTeX, pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX
support for the GoSans and GoMono families of fonts designed
diff --git a/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty b/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty
index 27a22042a2..41b03098d4 100644
--- a/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty
+++ b/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoMono.sty
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{GoMono}
- [2019/06/04 (Bob Tennent and autoinst) Style file for GoMono fonts.]
+ [2019/10/12 (Bob Tennent and autoinst) Style file for GoMono fonts.]
\RequirePackage{ifxetex,ifluatex,xkeyval,textcomp}
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@
\else % type1
- \def\bfseries@tt{bold}
- \def\mdseries@tt{regular}
+ \def\bfseries@tt{b}
+ \def\mdseries@tt{m}
\fi
diff --git a/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty b/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty
index 9c70e8f6a0..7ef0648232 100644
--- a/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty
+++ b/fonts/gofonts/latex/GoSans.sty
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{GoSans}
- [2019/04/19 (Bob Tennent and autoinst) Style file for Go Sans fonts.]
+ [2019/10/12 (Bob Tennent and autoinst) Style file for Go Sans fonts.]
\RequirePackage{ifxetex,ifluatex,xkeyval,textcomp}
@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@
\else % type1
- \def\bfseries@sf{bold}
- \def\mdseries@sf{regular}
- \ifgo@medium\def\bfseries@sf{medium}\fi
+ \def\bfseries@sf{b}
+ \def\mdseries@sf{m}
+ \ifgo@medium\def\bfseries@sf{sb}\fi
\fi
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
\fi
-\def\gomedium{\fontfamily{\gofamily}\fontseries{m}\selectfont}
+\def\gomedium{\fontfamily{\gofamily}\fontseries{sb}\selectfont}
\def\gobold{\fontfamily{\gofamily}\fontseries{b}\selectfont}
\def\golgr{\fontencoding{LGR}\fontfamily{Go-TLF}\selectfont} % use Go-TLF even for ttf
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/README b/fonts/librefranklin/README
index 0a56a3f099..43632e44ff 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/README
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/README
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
This is the README for the librefranklin package, version
-2019-05-10.
+2019-10-13.
This package provides LaTeX, pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX
support for the LibreFranklin family of sans serif fonts
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_kctjno.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ejn2og.enc
index 6779f94d1d..adf50e77bc 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_kctjno.enc
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ejn2og.enc
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
-%%AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh
-% Encoding created by otftotfm on Fri May 10 09:25:16 2019
+%%AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:05 2019
% Command line follows encoding
-/AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh [
+/AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif [
%00
/grave /acute /circumflex /tilde /dieresis /hungarumlaut /ring /caron
/breve /macron /dotaccent /cedilla /ogonek /quotesinglbase /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright
%10
/quotedblleft /quotedblright /quotedblbase /guillemotleft /guillemotright /endash /emdash /.notdef
- /.notdef /dotlessi /uni0237 /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /dotlessi /uni0237 /.notdef /fi /fl /.notdef /.notdef
%20
/space /exclam /quotedbl /numbersign /dollar /percent /ampersand /quoteright
/parenleft /parenright /asterisk /plus /comma /hyphen /period /slash
@@ -61,5 +61,7 @@
% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN
-% --feature=kern --feature=liga --feature=sups --ligkern=* {KL} *
-% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1'
+% --feature=kern --feature=liga --feature=sups --ligkern=f i =: fi
+% --ligkern=f l =: fl --ligkern=f f =: ff --ligkern=ff i =: ffi --ligkern=ff
+% l =: ffl --ligkern=* {KL} * LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_5xld5w.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hlvv6p.enc
index 7d23b53008..2101d44ad7 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_5xld5w.enc
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hlvv6p.enc
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
-%%AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c
-% Encoding created by otftotfm on Fri May 10 09:25:16 2019
+%%AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:05 2019
% Command line follows encoding
-/AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c [
+/AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua [
%00
/.notdef /uni2206 /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
- /.notdef /.notdef /uni2126 /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /uni2126 /.notdef /fi /fl /.notdef /.notdef
%10
/dotlessi /uni0237 /grave /acute /caron /breve /macron /ring
/cedilla /germandbls /ae /oe /oslash /AE /OE /Oslash
@@ -61,5 +61,6 @@
% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=TEX TEXT --feature=kern --feature=liga
-% --feature=sups --ligkern=* {KL} * LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
-% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1'
+% --feature=sups --ligkern=f i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl --ligkern=f f =: ff
+% --ligkern=ff i =: ffi --ligkern=ff l =: ffl --ligkern=* {KL} *
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_yhzmyq.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_nb4g6w.enc
index c46ba563ca..f7fca6e559 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_yhzmyq.enc
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_nb4g6w.enc
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
-%%AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va
-% Encoding created by otftotfm on Fri May 10 09:25:16 2019
+%%AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:05 2019
% Command line follows encoding
-/AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va [
+/AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge [
%00
/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /cedilla /ogonek /quotesinglbase /C /asterisk
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
%F0
/.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /divide /.notdef
- /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /fl /l /fi /i /f
] def
% Command line: 'otftotfm --automatic --encoding=fontools_ts1
% --tfm-directory=texmf/fonts/tfm/impallari/librefranklin
@@ -60,5 +60,7 @@
% --truetype-directory=texmf/fonts/truetype/impallari/librefranklin
% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
-% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=TEX TEXT COMPANION SYMBOLS 1---TS1
-% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1'
+% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=TEX TEXT COMPANION SYMBOLS 1---TS1 --ligkern=f
+% i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl --ligkern=f f =: ff --ligkern=ff i =: ffi
+% --ligkern=ff l =: ffl LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hau3x5.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_spbxfw.enc
index 56d5308e9b..f1947a22d0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_hau3x5.enc
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_spbxfw.enc
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
-%%AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf
-% Encoding created by otftotfm on Fri May 10 09:25:16 2019
+%%AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:05 2019
% Command line follows encoding
-/AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf [
+/AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd [
%00
/.notdef /Euro /.notdef /.notdef /fraction /dotaccent /hungarumlaut /ogonek
- /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /fl /fi
%10
/dotlessi /uni0237 /grave /acute /caron /breve /macron /ring
/cedilla /germandbls /ae /oe /oslash /AE /OE /Oslash
@@ -61,5 +61,7 @@
% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=TEX TYPEWRITER AND WINDOWS ANSI --feature=kern
-% --feature=liga --feature=sups --ligkern=* {KL} *
-% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1'
+% --feature=liga --feature=sups --ligkern=f i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl
+% --ligkern=f f =: ff --ligkern=ff i =: ffi --ligkern=ff l =: ffl
+% --ligkern=* {KL} * LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tdlrq7.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tdlrq7.enc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..897b5be1b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tdlrq7.enc
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
+
+%%AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:05 2019
+% Command line follows encoding
+/AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg [
+%00
+ /endash /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%10
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /Euro /perthousand /uni0259 /.notdef /quoteleft /quoteright /breve /macron
+%20
+ /.notdef /exclam /dieresis /.notdef /.notdef /percent /periodcentered /.notdef
+ /parenleft /parenright /asterisk /plus /comma /hyphen /period /slash
+%30
+ /uni2070 /uni00B9 /uni00B2 /uni00B3 /uni2074 /uni2075 /uni2076 /uni2077
+ /uni2078 /uni2079 /colon /.notdef /.notdef /equal /.notdef /semicolon
+%40
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /uni2206 /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%50
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /uni2126
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /bracketleft /.notdef /bracketright /.notdef /.notdef
+%60
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /uni00B5 /.notdef /.notdef
+%70
+ /pi /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /guillemotleft /.notdef /guillemotright /.notdef /emdash
+%80
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%90
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%A0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%B0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%C0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%D0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%E0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%F0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+] def
+% Command line: 'otftotfm --automatic --encoding=fontools_lgr
+% --tfm-directory=texmf/fonts/tfm/impallari/librefranklin
+% --vf-directory=texmf/fonts/vf/impallari/librefranklin
+% --type1-directory=texmf/fonts/type1/impallari/librefranklin
+% --truetype-directory=texmf/fonts/truetype/impallari/librefranklin
+% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
+% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
+% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=GREEK FONT ENCODING - LGR --feature=kern
+% --feature=liga --feature=sups --ligkern=f i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl
+% --ligkern=f f =: ff --ligkern=ff i =: ffi --ligkern=ff l =: ffl
+% --ligkern=* {KL} * LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_f6scsm.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tf5jo5.enc
index 104a0c6a6e..e07716adb4 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_f6scsm.enc
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_tf5jo5.enc
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
-%%AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd
-% Encoding created by otftotfm on Fri May 10 09:25:15 2019
+%%AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:04 2019
% Command line follows encoding
-/AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd [
+/AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh [
%00
/grave /acute /circumflex /tilde /dieresis /hungarumlaut /ring /caron
/breve /macron /dotaccent /cedilla /ogonek /quotesinglbase /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright
%10
/quotedblleft /quotedblright /quotedblbase /guillemotleft /guillemotright /endash /emdash /.notdef
- /.notdef /dotlessi /uni0237 /fi /fl /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /dotlessi /uni0237 /.notdef /fi /fl /.notdef /.notdef
%20
/space /exclam /quotedbl /numbersign /dollar /percent /ampersand /quoteright
/parenleft /parenright /asterisk /plus /comma /hyphen /period /slash
@@ -61,5 +61,6 @@
% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN
-% --feature=kern --feature=liga LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
-% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1'
+% --feature=kern --feature=liga --ligkern=f i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl
+% --ligkern=f f =: ff --ligkern=ff i =: ffi --ligkern=ff l =: ffl
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wpyws4.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_w4rwtq.enc
index f49e8f6bc5..1d2f9ab0d5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wpyws4.enc
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_w4rwtq.enc
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
-%%AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg
-% Encoding created by otftotfm on Fri May 10 09:25:15 2019
+%%AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:04 2019
% Command line follows encoding
-/AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg [
+/AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d [
%00
/.notdef /uni2206 /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
- /.notdef /.notdef /uni2126 /fi /fl /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /uni2126 /.notdef /fi /fl /.notdef /.notdef
%10
/dotlessi /uni0237 /grave /acute /caron /breve /macron /ring
/cedilla /germandbls /ae /oe /oslash /AE /OE /Oslash
@@ -61,4 +61,6 @@
% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=TEX TEXT --feature=kern --feature=liga
-% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1'
+% --ligkern=f i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl --ligkern=f f =: ff --ligkern=ff i
+% =: ffi --ligkern=ff l =: ffl LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wmouhf.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wmouhf.enc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1a9dae44fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_wmouhf.enc
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
+
+%%AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:05 2019
+% Command line follows encoding
+/AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa [
+%00
+ /endash /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%10
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /Euro /perthousand /uni0259 /.notdef /quoteleft /quoteright /breve /macron
+%20
+ /.notdef /exclam /dieresis /.notdef /.notdef /percent /periodcentered /.notdef
+ /parenleft /parenright /asterisk /plus /comma /hyphen /period /slash
+%30
+ /zero /one /two /three /four /five /six /seven
+ /eight /nine /colon /.notdef /.notdef /equal /.notdef /semicolon
+%40
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /uni2206 /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%50
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /uni2126
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /bracketleft /.notdef /bracketright /.notdef /.notdef
+%60
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /uni00B5 /.notdef /.notdef
+%70
+ /pi /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /guillemotleft /.notdef /guillemotright /.notdef /emdash
+%80
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%90
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%A0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%B0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%C0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%D0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%E0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+%F0
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+] def
+% Command line: 'otftotfm --automatic --encoding=fontools_lgr
+% --tfm-directory=texmf/fonts/tfm/impallari/librefranklin
+% --vf-directory=texmf/fonts/vf/impallari/librefranklin
+% --type1-directory=texmf/fonts/type1/impallari/librefranklin
+% --truetype-directory=texmf/fonts/truetype/impallari/librefranklin
+% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
+% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
+% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=GREEK FONT ENCODING - LGR --feature=kern
+% --feature=liga --ligkern=f i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl --ligkern=f f =: ff
+% --ligkern=ff i =: ffi --ligkern=ff l =: ffl LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ljoz2a.enc b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_xsutkk.enc
index 49c604a1ff..f9726be607 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_ljoz2a.enc
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/enc/lbfr_xsutkk.enc
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
% THIS FILE WAS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED -- DO NOT EDIT
-%%AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb
-% Encoding created by otftotfm on Fri May 10 09:25:16 2019
+%%AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd
+% Encoding created by otftotfm on Sun Oct 13 09:33:04 2019
% Command line follows encoding
-/AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb [
+/AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd [
%00
- /fi /Euro /fl /.notdef /fraction /dotaccent /hungarumlaut /ogonek
- /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef
+ /.notdef /Euro /.notdef /.notdef /fraction /dotaccent /hungarumlaut /ogonek
+ /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /.notdef /fl /fi
%10
/dotlessi /uni0237 /grave /acute /caron /breve /macron /ring
/cedilla /germandbls /ae /oe /oslash /AE /OE /Oslash
@@ -61,5 +61,6 @@
% --encoding-directory=texmf/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin
% --map-file=texmf/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
% --no-updmap --coding-scheme=TEX TYPEWRITER AND WINDOWS ANSI --feature=kern
-% --feature=liga LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
+% --feature=liga --ligkern=f i =: fi --ligkern=f l =: fl --ligkern=f f =: ff
+% --ligkern=ff i =: ffi --ligkern=ff l =: ffl LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
% LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1'
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d09c053045
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd}
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for LGR/LibreFranklin-Sup.]
+
+\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
+ \let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
+\else
+ \edef\LibreFranklin@@scale{s*[\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname]}%
+\fi
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{}
+
+
+% ---- regular ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{regular}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{regular}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{regular}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- thin ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{thin}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{thin}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{thin}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/thin/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- semibold ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{semibold}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{semibold}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{semibold}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/semibold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- bold ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{bold}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{bold}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{bold}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/bold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- light ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{light}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{light}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{light}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/light/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- extrabold ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{extrabold}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{extrabold}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{extrabold}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extrabold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- black ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{black}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{black}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{black}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/black/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- medium ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{medium}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{medium}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{medium}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- extralight ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{extralight}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{extralight}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{extralight}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extralight/it
+}{}
+
+%
+% Extra 'ssub' rules to map the standard NFSS codes to our fancy names
+%
+
+% ul --> thin
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{ul}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/thin/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{ul}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/thin/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{ul}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/thin/it
+}{}
+
+
+% el --> extralight
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{el}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extralight/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{el}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extralight/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{el}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extralight/it
+}{}
+
+
+% l --> light
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{l}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/light/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{l}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/light/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{l}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/light/it
+}{}
+
+
+% sl --> regular
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/it
+}{}
+
+
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
+% sb --> semibold
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sb}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/semibold/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sb}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/semibold/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sb}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/semibold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% b --> bold
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{b}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/bold/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{b}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/bold/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{b}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/bold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% eb --> extrabold
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{eb}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extrabold/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{eb}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extrabold/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{eb}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/extrabold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ub --> black
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{ub}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/black/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{ub}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/black/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{ub}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/black/it
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{bx}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/b/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{bx}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/b/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{bx}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/b/it
+}{}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..aa897e7516
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
+%%
+\ProvidesFile{LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd}
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for LGR/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
+
+\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
+ \let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
+\else
+ \edef\LibreFranklin@@scale{s*[\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname]}%
+\fi
+
+\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{}
+
+
+% ---- regular ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{regular}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{regular}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{regular}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- thin ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{thin}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{thin}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{thin}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/thin/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- semibold ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{semibold}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{semibold}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{semibold}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/semibold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- bold ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{bold}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{bold}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{bold}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/bold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- light ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{light}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{light}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{light}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/light/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- extrabold ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{extrabold}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{extrabold}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{extrabold}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extrabold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- black ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{black}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{black}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{black}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/black/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- medium ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{medium}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{medium}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{medium}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ---- extralight ----
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{extralight}{n}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{extralight}{it}{
+ <-> \LibreFranklin@@scale LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{extralight}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extralight/it
+}{}
+
+%
+% Extra 'ssub' rules to map the standard NFSS codes to our fancy names
+%
+
+% ul --> thin
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{ul}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/thin/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{ul}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/thin/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{ul}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/thin/it
+}{}
+
+
+% el --> extralight
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{el}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extralight/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{el}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extralight/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{el}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extralight/it
+}{}
+
+
+% l --> light
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{l}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/light/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{l}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/light/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{l}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/light/it
+}{}
+
+
+% sl --> regular
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/it
+}{}
+
+
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
+% sb --> semibold
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sb}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/semibold/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sb}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/semibold/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sb}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/semibold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% b --> bold
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{b}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/bold/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{b}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/bold/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{b}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/bold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% eb --> extrabold
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{eb}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extrabold/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{eb}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extrabold/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{eb}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/extrabold/it
+}{}
+
+
+% ub --> black
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{ub}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/black/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{ub}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/black/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{ub}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/black/it
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{bx}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/b/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{bx}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/b/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{bx}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/b/it
+}{}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
index d10335efe2..5dc0ae142b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/05/10
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
%%
\ProvidesFile{LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd}
- [2019/05/10 (autoinst) Font definitions for LY1/LibreFranklin-Sup.]
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for LY1/LibreFranklin-Sup.]
\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
\let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
@@ -195,21 +195,36 @@
}{}
-% m --> regular
+% sl --> regular
-\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{sl}{
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{sl}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/sl
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{n}{
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{n}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/n
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{it}{
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{it}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/it
}{}
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
% sb --> semibold
\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sb}{sl}{
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
index 8aaf6ffcf7..4b803aad20 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/05/10
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
%%
\ProvidesFile{LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd}
- [2019/05/10 (autoinst) Font definitions for LY1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for LY1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
\let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
@@ -195,21 +195,36 @@
}{}
-% m --> regular
+% sl --> regular
-\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{sl}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/sl
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{n}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/n
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{it}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/it
}{}
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
% sb --> semibold
\DeclareFontShape{LY1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sb}{sl}{
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
index b83e67b5e8..e21d2d70bb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/05/10
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
%%
\ProvidesFile{OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd}
- [2019/05/10 (autoinst) Font definitions for OT1/LibreFranklin-Sup.]
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for OT1/LibreFranklin-Sup.]
\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
\let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
@@ -195,21 +195,36 @@
}{}
-% m --> regular
+% sl --> regular
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{sl}{
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{sl}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/sl
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{n}{
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{n}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/n
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{it}{
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{it}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/it
}{}
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
% sb --> semibold
\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sb}{sl}{
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
index 130124a487..c81d6a7c40 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/05/10
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
%%
\ProvidesFile{OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd}
- [2019/05/10 (autoinst) Font definitions for OT1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for OT1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
\let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
@@ -195,21 +195,36 @@
}{}
-% m --> regular
+% sl --> regular
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{sl}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/sl
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{n}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/n
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{it}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/it
}{}
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
% sb --> semibold
\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sb}{sl}{
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
index 82dc65883f..d71530f99a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/05/10
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
%%
\ProvidesFile{T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd}
- [2019/05/10 (autoinst) Font definitions for T1/LibreFranklin-Sup.]
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for T1/LibreFranklin-Sup.]
\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
\let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
@@ -195,21 +195,36 @@
}{}
-% m --> regular
+% sl --> regular
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{sl}{
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{sl}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/sl
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{n}{
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{n}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/n
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{it}{
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sl}{it}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/regular/it
}{}
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-Sup/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
% sb --> semibold
\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-Sup}{sb}{sl}{
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
index d45c4831a3..7167ab6298 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/05/10
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
%%
\ProvidesFile{T1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd}
- [2019/05/10 (autoinst) Font definitions for T1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for T1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
\let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
@@ -195,21 +195,36 @@
}{}
-% m --> regular
+% sl --> regular
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{sl}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/sl
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{n}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/n
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{it}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/it
}{}
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
% sb --> semibold
\DeclareFontShape{T1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sb}{sl}{
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
index a61da4ed57..520d777c63 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/05/10
+%% Generated by autoinst on 2019/10/13
%%
\ProvidesFile{TS1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd}
- [2019/05/10 (autoinst) Font definitions for TS1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
+ [2019/10/13 (autoinst) Font definitions for TS1/LibreFranklin-TLF.]
\expandafter\ifx\csname LibreFranklin@scale\endcsname\relax
\let\LibreFranklin@@scale\@empty
@@ -195,21 +195,36 @@
}{}
-% m --> regular
+% sl --> regular
-\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{sl}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/sl
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{n}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/n
}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sl}{it}{
<-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/regular/it
}{}
+% m --> medium
+
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/sl
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{n}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/n
+}{}
+
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{m}{it}{
+ <-> ssub * LibreFranklin-TLF/medium/it
+}{}
+
+
% sb --> semibold
\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{LibreFranklin-TLF}{sb}{sl}{
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty
index c1c39cc311..1edfcd8cb8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/latex/librefranklin.sty
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{librefranklin}
- [2019/05/10 (Bob Tennent) Supports LibreFranklin fonts for all LaTeX engines.]
+ [2019/10/13 (Bob Tennent) Supports LibreFranklin fonts for all LaTeX engines.]
\RequirePackage{ifxetex,ifluatex,xkeyval,textcomp}
@@ -55,15 +55,15 @@
\else % type1
- \def\bfseries@sf{bold}
- \iflibrefranklin@semibold\def\bfseries@sf{semibold}\fi
- \iflibrefranklin@extrabold\def\bfseries@sf{extrabold}\fi
- \iflibrefranklin@black\def\bfseries@sf{black}\fi
- \def\mdseries@sf{regular}
- \iflibrefranklin@medium\def\mdseries@sf{medium}\fi
- \iflibrefranklin@light\def\mdseries@sf{light}\fi
- \iflibrefranklin@extralight\def\mdseries@sf{extralight}\fi
- \iflibrefranklin@thin\def\mdseries@sf{thin}\fi
+ \def\bfseries@sf{b}
+ \iflibrefranklin@semibold\def\bfseries@sf{sb}\fi
+ \iflibrefranklin@extrabold\def\bfseries@sf{eb}\fi
+ \iflibrefranklin@black\def\bfseries@sf{ub}\fi
+ \def\mdseries@sf{sl}
+ \iflibrefranklin@medium\def\mdseries@sf{m}\fi
+ \iflibrefranklin@light\def\mdseries@sf{l}\fi
+ \iflibrefranklin@extralight\def\mdseries@sf{el}\fi
+ \iflibrefranklin@thin\def\mdseries@sf{ul}\fi
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map b/fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map
index c02d87a9ea..27c284edb4 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/map/LibreFranklin.map
@@ -1,128 +1,163 @@
-% Automatically maintained by otftotfm or other programs. Do not edit.
-LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
-LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_wpyws4wkjsopzwz3sbrwud2veg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wpyws4.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_f6scsmgqcwdreoglg43m7i3hcd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_f6scsm.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_ljoz2ajh6vhdqesyq5iiya7rsb ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ljoz2a.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_yhzmyqaxmy5zwjtkfrgblnd7va ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_yhzmyq.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_5xld5wrmxukokwwc7xt2m6qv4c ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_5xld5w.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_kctjnodmyj7yf6c2nvnk6c5qhh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_kctjno.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
-LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_hau3x57gtxdzdvbsbvzpyrbxxf ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hau3x5.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-BlackItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Black-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Black "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-Black.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-BoldItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-BoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Bold "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-Bold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraBold "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ExtraLight "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-ExtraLight.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Italic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-Italic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-LightItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-LightItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Light-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Light "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-Light.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-MediumItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-MediumItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Medium "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-Medium.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Regular "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-Regular.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-SemiBold "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-SemiBold.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-ThinItalic "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-ThinItalic.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1 LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_w4rwtqnqgnoept64akgqql332d ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_w4rwtq.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_tf5jo5rbspy7devs5mk6ojyjsh ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tf5jo5.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_xsutkk5qpbtpithjvjqe7koprd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_xsutkk.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_wmouhf4z42v5uhpgj5utxxh7aa ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_wmouhf.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_nb4g6wzye5m3cbfk6xf5i77kge ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_nb4g6w.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1 LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_hlvv6pvxkc4oyx2ghlcjhek2ua ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_hlvv6p.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_ejn2ogujybszasx55twffmhtif ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_ejn2og.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_spbxfw5fggzp42o7zrkdwszskd ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_spbxfw.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
+LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-lgr--base LibreFranklin-Thin "AutoEnc_tdlrq72emq4kowlyhtomnwrhhg ReEncodeFont" <[lbfr_tdlrq7.enc <LibreFranklin-Thin.pfb
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 09364b2a88..80c7777a85 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfm
index 0b745646fe..c17fa7a835 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfm
index 2412c69837..6336caa0b4 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfm
index c7ab84dff1..fab6b8c9b5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfm
index 14a2b0d82d..c5e6984862 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index caf4605ac8..0faabaf628 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 09effc34b1..13b9a96937 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfm
index b5d671e62b..d49c733078 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 91f8da17d2..2f1134eb8e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfm
index b30827cb06..6834e9b2c8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index de9cbf26f5..d58240e7b1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 55fcc8b156..b85b32bfb6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index e2d6762159..aadd0df881 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index fb9415a826..b1bfecca54 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 5eeeb07e34..4fd9111b64 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 689340f575..8b9488ce38 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index 0c67d9fd74..84cc460053 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 25c69d7ff4..f328a9b64d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 7496f6eef1..187be3095f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 8b06dc004b..65c14b41b9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 695391fa82..36838fb061 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index e03a8a7150..346c800e12 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 5f1af6f7ec..0c7b55fa2d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index af61604be9..fd144fc6d9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index c16aaa06b8..567cccea18 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfm
index d3284c60d4..d7a920182b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm
index bb27e3720a..a08a311d24 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 8e232d2f02..e3eec3773d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
index f885ebeb04..54e8c85d3a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 25d8aeea49..77465c9bf2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
index f6ea602439..d0e7fcd6f0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 56455015b5..d4a42fc682 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 6362d07968..e74a2d08a8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfm
index 9e6cf7821c..da6ae379fd 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index bb15a22268..88d7d11a58 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 770c4024ac..5396c03d36 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index e01d6cc3e6..2e267a96e9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index d29131c552..4a8d026b64 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 43a847ea88..6e2b7f9e7f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index e14e854532..a97dc2569d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index 14e5100545..27dd594635 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index cad66c6017..bce469e605 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index d998b1be4d..a968fb5d6d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 18a447a42e..c0194d9984 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index d5cfd77a1e..814f8febdf 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index 24a6cbb252..5fc52b36cc 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 661cef93c3..5768605c04 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 788f5812a2..2a985fc3c9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index e8b661ceba..29ab1bd2e3 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm
index 7e1401084a..94cd494f0d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfm
index 54faa17dfd..90ebe58f60 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 34f4159b98..3eeb60124c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm
index 7de291bc7d..681033f745 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index dad27467be..b04fd9d215 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 45f732d2bc..ed88106806 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 4193d90caa..25a7eda9b1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 2ce37ad1ff..30e4777da1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm
index 92c1809e76..7d929db27d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 4a0818da6b..b5e4955baa 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 71442e5311..f042a90dae 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index be81a469d7..69ad687285 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index ff2e36ab74..a603b5c50e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 71b34aa333..2f97b50bce 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 55932446d8..d3a4a88f5c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index 9d709771dc..75d2fc88ad 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 6f0a73306a..92849e1121 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 4ea16aebe4..72d9f575d1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 261f5a776e..474f35bc0a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 4f91b493c6..e00482cd6c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index 26f27f43b4..615aec0077 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 8f96524439..3e5a5695d0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 24d5e7eebc..4e9c143364 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index bf981db6de..c0517ed26d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfm
index ee33c0bd5f..ec8a582440 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfm
index fa9fcf3e63..d5830c28b2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 754371ba8a..a9e26d1339 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfm
index 0a244b9688..1224e06fa8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 59092eb401..1aa0632773 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 760d1af769..9fcb656d42 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 07b8d68b44..2bf07b105f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index bdefa9e734..ea498397ed 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfm
index 19d3fc98e1..4eba15fe37 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index a0ca1d66f0..c5c3ba84f1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 947d5db04d..34653f9ed4 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 0290801de5..821470181a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index 7a92760f7d..05b428a4f7 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 2c986843f0..380ceac56c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index f57a6bce18..5c9345a1a1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index 71ef4014c6..ad2c08e3a5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 899c55901b..061529cfa1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 0d8fa43168..3d6c1c886f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 28989c557a..7ff825f305 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index f0a0446820..f3cc9d7e23 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index 2626bc9ac6..b25e5bd93d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index fd75b44323..dae1e2ceaf 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 9c41bd267d..d8a16b3641 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 09a1b0d278..da8a6694b0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
index acd7aaa1a0..6bd37bcd1f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 080c7ecf82..14bf2a36db 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 2a15510a86..b0d062ccae 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
index aadfc78e7e..9d831f3e7a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 7b5365ce44..1e5f7dc78e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index e52e1ceb97..326de979fd 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 7cae298f9d..3cf8689538 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index c3e836a7e0..0e97568cb9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
index fd23eff892..fab4280dd8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 9d75c019a9..a41c375598 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 5dbff36c74..b0e4a4d340 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 178b6bc4a6..b721e3469b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfm
index 9a277565ef..93ef9f660e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfm
index 34ec0a779e..bee14675cc 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 818dde4eae..dc4e809edb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfm
index 3ba8ef93bb..3e8016aa29 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 32c24025e8..89fcb54688 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 240b9a3f54..939530581f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 39da26d9b6..141a3794fd 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index e96154cbfa..d0cf3765d5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfm
index 3d778a65f7..525b543d25 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index c68cb39f3f..053bbfb112 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfm
index d305e5ecb8..1ba5828dba 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index b895408e91..60c014539d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index a844a08a48..780c6910f6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 6014196fad..ea3958e334 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 405ab9ae00..14f53ef8d6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index 73c482564b..04e92b8204 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index ed1f70af8a..99d51f3c99 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 3732ab5bb3..2317012580 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 93d4c677f5..f28fd3dad0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index d03f4f550b..3eb42f430e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index 2957c41515..d7d9bc700a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 69b294d605..86282fba39 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 84faec97e9..7f09b4e852 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 2e1bcc8b2c..37b1fb1a54 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
index fc39b2e4c7..64a1613592 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm
index d4a27789e3..09cb9acc82 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm
index ee9d83d829..08a04853f2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfm
index d3727a2b19..f806fec460 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 9793972db2..925380a8f5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
index b592e3fd67..80f98766b0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 50813037a3..ec70897249 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index f1c22894be..d0d70e1fe0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
index 9e064175a6..df3603251b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 3eaed8d4bd..182c46f590 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfm
index ed9a194a25..7d48bb07b8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 846151a720..ac6934ea94 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index 081f6d4887..8cd04d1d7e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index ca549c9cf6..10b4523949 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 50a87700c1..7f52948e0f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index 29743346d6..cf68504662 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index ef0f8861fc..6cbfe3097b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 4c1f8d16b5..836fbc3f60 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 36f008e898..1d8d9c3ce1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 65cce61ee8..0c8a1cac7e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index 744ef6e0ef..ad1d03659e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 7b59e4496c..837d2a01c1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 719643246e..ad1286cb05 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 94033ca3cb..736a2ef1a3 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm
index 58944f52c7..5ea2d96fde 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
index ccbe46aa5d..fc77829ba6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 760e0d9bd1..d84025b4b9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfm
index 6693084720..f8c4d075d2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 3b401b0f62..20b20906c7 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
index fe46352175..b6989982d0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 167b565b5e..4ed167d1fe 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 0231363d69..73b183dd14 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
index 37bc8a1885..9cd87bcffb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 1be5e32bdc..d9ae38bd66 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm
index eaa1de60c5..4e41e18385 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 6e58113049..258686abcb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm
index 0826047dab..4cb72446f2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm
index d6cbb22bda..169b1111b6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 139cadd307..5391c7212a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm
index 1d87e94766..548ae28d70 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 25f18a9840..e06254efa8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
index bb93410d36..73571d59f1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 5d0d8c251e..421c5c139b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 2833c9a7dc..b87d3568a9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm
index 4e35a8ece3..534ee3d54e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 930614a753..bc7f92f758 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
index 1bec38d681..c646556afe 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index ab0bde8ecc..0f9f27db63 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index 619b12a090..c0e61296b5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 8d89094746..b492a0bcda 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index c66601e6e0..a711b050ba 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index cfb46bbf76..77ebaa9056 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 81c5881ebb..3af39d42d5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index c699c2fb47..a6a95a99b9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 64178cf99a..cf5d52d0cb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 99415b813d..b6bbea81dc 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index a12ee4bb4a..39c375e4f1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index ee82d29e70..00fc66ac35 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index f406ceeb68..543d24ede3 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 5bdd237d09..ce0523e73e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfm
index ff803d3aa1..f19380b055 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfm
index 1e9e8f4690..43880a7b66 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfm
index 608a21a745..4febee6742 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfm
index 91992437f0..5a10453ff9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index 760779be77..243dfe4f4c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 512941c251..03672f22e2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 5fff059064..00d743dd08 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index ffe454e810..94bbe90d07 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm
index 3f89db2661..29367de30a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index ebc80b4915..3d50b36484 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfm
index fa08a60c7c..6676aa1240 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
index 51bfe4d5cf..c187db0d91 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
index caf8e33b08..de5658a251 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
index 3b47edb4cd..5f071a3b77 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
index fa689fc48d..394a700352 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfm
index b3cf887130..bb72c9a487 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
index f934517721..fc73354629 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
index 465a3e6351..245889a82a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
index 5da8184dd4..1dd020f4b5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ot1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
index 9cb11e6b32..1ddd81a756 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
index a19f960a32..c3c1ca909d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
index 656149634c..cee7e6eb51 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1--base.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
index bfbeb97506..7685e7e014 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/tfm/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.tfm
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vf
index 54d9bfde47..9f4236b0fe 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vf
index b9d1490546..766fcfe629 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vf
index d66f44f0d3..5003154883 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vf
index 12d844785e..ed0cc2d134 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vf
index 934bd7c63e..44c3117ba0 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Black-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index 574379b3e7..f2020a71d6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vf
index cc095591e0..77fb734186 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index 30b91c872c..1f852b2fd6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index 7043da7182..8173f7d369 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index cbe4db36fb..ccfe81645d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf
index 2913246bdc..19fe0e829b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vf
index ada49688ae..b35195d0d1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf
index 055417dd64..9f1b79a06f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vf
index 8d1b35b0d4..70d69a0d3c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
index 067c374379..27a2287fe7 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Bold-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index 4130b3490f..97d3157753 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
index c823c8e78a..2c7a66bca5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index a4c8ed2879..d93cd2b152 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index 63097500dd..8b1132fdda 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index 7a00aa9963..e2a40aa967 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-BoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vf
index 99665f36e6..e18cd771d7 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vf
index 97b27fe87e..c35ef327e7 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vf
index 2dab775e36..703a5967cd 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vf
index 1197c8b3b9..265a4c9c4b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vf
index 9c6c4e08b6..eace262ef4 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBold-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index 628964f46f..b22fd8b62e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
index 77abc04344..5f962436a7 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index 8cd8fb95c0..a278915e09 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index 1c5cb16cc3..52e4e78a4c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index 2194146f55..363fa3cbc3 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vf
index f0dd211eb2..cbac4c4c47 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vf
index 6e64434ee4..8e9eb86365 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vf
index ce1d3fcc6d..cb66bebf7e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vf
index c4867cc710..c03f743a2b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vf
index 703e303c99..88ca306a1f 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLight-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index efe503e8d2..bcc227fed5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vf
index 4b3436fb6d..7f0e6a915e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index 89f14aaf98..b9f3e04c2d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index d519ec2aa3..68f392c563 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index 59ac2ed8fa..adb569d5d4 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ExtraLightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vf
index 07ec6e859a..ad468b7790 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vf
index 35054950b4..2c458e7597 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vf
index 13281c1c36..5746967aeb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vf
index 401ff94ea6..338b318aeb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
index 6053e64d6f..c9516d74d6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Italic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vf
index 1be636e5fd..e46cac0c72 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vf
index 6e80dbb88c..55e784a4da 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vf
index 9745c9252a..44a67cc45d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vf
index bfd820a040..b71990fec2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vf
index 3a50f6334d..234f69f77e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Light-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index 5fc213639b..ed39b33fd1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vf
index 06ffb3c3e4..77e46efcb9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index d40ecb26f1..cc1263cc86 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index c81ebf2467..1cd598fb64 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index c0ddcd44dd..0004b4fee2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-LightItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vf
index eb9f2b559d..f6431f46bf 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vf
index 8f17e6416e..dcaef4a100 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vf
index 2cffae718f..ba070660be 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vf
index 0716d161cc..c7a67af19d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf
index f5b9b6c6c2..2a0fe0c31b 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Medium-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index d98a21d89c..baf6747082 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vf
index 42ab4afbc1..51668c818a 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index 8bfa93f27a..ca79035814 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index 826b65e58f..05dc4695a3 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index 3efd63cbb1..a565bd3065 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-MediumItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vf
index fd39897dee..3d5fec19c5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vf
index e60eb829d7..bf21e190a6 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vf
index 3ab3979b07..5b339e9a28 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vf
index 5615b8c9fa..0ffcaa818e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf
index f7b5b6a26d..79b37ccfd2 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Regular-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vf
index 5d1dd7dac9..9d2df99eaa 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf
index 8d7369dc1e..6d7984b8a3 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vf
index 228d41504f..e186ca9887 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vf
index e103349b1e..39f25f494c 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
index 80b11bb525..d3ed86e3e8 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBold-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index 15fd9c5374..17539e0de1 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
index 2403229958..759d8e0327 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index a5efbce02d..d23da4975e 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index 1c47c318a6..ba38e1434d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index 416d02fa24..50f0dd18e5 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-SemiBoldItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vf
index 12c16a4adc..b2ee8ae6f9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vf
index 7ba23e1383..4f92f3c165 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vf
index 9e822fd4da..c263e8d5cb 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vf
index 51a32c8d65..9bb6407ef9 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vf
index 3a6fcfc81f..ab4b12b274 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-Thin-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vf
index e3b1844124..963c7935fe 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vf
index 12f1de93f5..290120df50 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-sup-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
index 5a070e2775..2c7ce7b14d 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf
index 6adbb9a6b8..4a29973933 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
index b4d5f5a5cf..2c99823983 100644
--- a/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+++ b/fonts/librefranklin/vf/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/fonts/linguisticspro/README b/fonts/linguisticspro/README
index 2998b89f3e..3dd8951cff 100644
--- a/fonts/linguisticspro/README
+++ b/fonts/linguisticspro/README
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
This is the README for the linguisticspro package, version
-2019-06-25.
+2019-10-13.
This package provides LaTeX, pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX
support for the LinguisticsPro family of fonts.
diff --git a/fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty b/fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty
index c4e376eedb..4c3810c2be 100644
--- a/fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty
+++ b/fonts/linguisticspro/latex/linguisticspro.sty
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{linguisticspro}
- [2019/06/25 (Bob Tennent and autoinst) Style file for LinguisticsPro fonts.]
+ [2019/10/13 (Bob Tennent and autoinst) Style file for LinguisticsPro fonts.]
\RequirePackage{ifxetex,ifluatex,xkeyval,textcomp}
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@
\else
\def\linguisticspro@figurestyle{OsF}
\fi
- \def\mdseries@rm{regular}
+ \def\mdseries@rm{m}
\def\seriesdefault{\mdseries@rm}
- \def\bfseries@rm{bold}
+ \def\bfseries@rm{b}
\fi
diff --git a/fonts/marcellus/README b/fonts/marcellus/README
index 85ae837b70..abdb202904 100644
--- a/fonts/marcellus/README
+++ b/fonts/marcellus/README
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
This is the README for the marcellus package, version
-2019-09-18.
+2019-10-13.
This package provides LaTeX, pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX
support for the Marcellus family of fonts, designed by
diff --git a/fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty b/fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty
index fd91f6a11f..e7cf2e9d7a 100644
--- a/fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty
+++ b/fonts/marcellus/latex/marcellus.sty
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
\ProvidesPackage{marcellus}[%
- 2019/09/18 (Bob Tennent) Supports Marcellus fonts for all LaTeX engines. ]
+ 2019/10/13 (Bob Tennent) Supports Marcellus fonts for all LaTeX engines. ]
\RequirePackage{ifxetex,ifluatex,textcomp}
@@ -48,8 +48,8 @@
\else % type1
- \def\mdseries@rm{regular}
- \def\bfseries@rm{regular}
+ \def\mdseries@rm{m}
+ \def\bfseries@rm{m}
\def\marcellusfamily{Marcellus-LF}
\renewcommand*\rmdefault{\marcellusfamily}
\newcommand*\marcellus{\fontfamily{\marcellusfamily}\selectfont}
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/README.md b/macros/latex/base/README.md
index 7679c72c38..a39ac09556 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/README.md
+++ b/macros/latex/base/README.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
The LaTeX kernel
================
-Release 2019-10-01
+Release 2019-10-01 patch level 1
Overview
--------
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/alltt.pdf b/macros/latex/base/alltt.pdf
index a7728590cd..016010a304 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/alltt.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/alltt.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf b/macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
index 20597b329c..3bb0472bbb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/changes.txt b/macros/latex/base/changes.txt
index 5415b5b002..3e233bcaa0 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/changes.txt
+++ b/macros/latex/base/changes.txt
@@ -5,6 +5,23 @@ are not part of the distribution.
=======================================================================
#########################
+# 2019-10-01 PL 1 Release
+#########################
+
+2019-10-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org>
+
+ * nfssfont.dtx: added a missing \else branch so that \action is always carried out
+
+2019-10-11 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org>
+
+ * ltfiles.dtx: Remove One Brace group before using \string\csname in \set@curr@file.
+
+2019-10-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org>
+
+ * lttab.dtx (subsection{array and tabular environments}):
+ \extracolsep needs to expand during preamble generation (gh/192)
+
+#########################
# 2019-10-01 Release
#########################
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/classes.pdf b/macros/latex/base/classes.pdf
index 502249fa08..40123556e5 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/classes.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/classes.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdf b/macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
index b58c4abd53..5b1faf5d22 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/clsguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf b/macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf
index c298bad40a..0fdaff8178 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/cmfonts.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf b/macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
index b08cb4a94a..81895e835c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/doc.pdf b/macros/latex/base/doc.pdf
index 93faf53cd7..c1b2103106 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/doc.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/doc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdf b/macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdf
index e2360ec12d..60eca19ba6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/docstrip.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/encguide.pdf b/macros/latex/base/encguide.pdf
index 669aeb3926..781687d8d5 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/encguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/encguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/exscale.pdf b/macros/latex/base/exscale.pdf
index f9a7789fc0..5235052d2d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/exscale.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/exscale.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf b/macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf
index fc0cb78ba7..a3e2a0b345 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdf b/macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
index a8a45dd8d9..2dfc7aaefd 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/fntguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdf b/macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdf
index 75b5e86322..7d9b7d400c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/graphpap.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdf
index 3e8494d21f..4fc9af4077 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ifthen.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdf b/macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdf
index 72b7963f2c..660d1dc947 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/inputenc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf b/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf
index dd29bde6fa..e081212262 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex b/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex
index 43780d3cf8..3e9bfe97e1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/base/latexchanges.tex
@@ -95,6 +95,13 @@ with the \Lpack{latexrelease} package being available to revert
changes to use definitions from an earlier format.
+\section{Changes introduced in 2019-10-01 patch~1}
+
+Adjustments to \verb|\set@curr@file|, and \verb|\@extracolsep|.
+
+Added missing \verb=\else= branch in \texttt{nfssfont} so that
+\verb=\action= is executed if provided.
+
\section{Changes introduced in 2019-10-01}
Introduced \LaTeX\texttt{-dev} formats for pre testing future \LaTeX{}
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf b/macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf
index 59546c3723..90585c9853 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/latexrelease.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdf b/macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdf
index 1c2af30f49..1c6c848e9b 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/latexsym.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/letter.pdf b/macros/latex/base/letter.pdf
index ce8635ed1a..6e539cb4ea 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/letter.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/letter.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx b/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
index 3d19971701..83aacf8ddb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltclass.dtx}
- [2019/09/11 v1.3c LaTeX Kernel (Class & Package Interface)]
+ [2019/10/07 v1.3c LaTeX Kernel (Class & Package Interface)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltclass.dtx}
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@
% verbatim to the file name given as the first argument, together with
% some comments about how it was produced.
%
-% The package can also be called with an optional argument which is
+% The environment can also be called with an optional argument which is
% used to alter some of its behavior: option \texttt{force} or
% \texttt{overwrite} will allow for overwriting existing files,
% option \texttt{nosearch} will only check the current directory
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx b/macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
index afb085a417..a2037e221f 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@
%<*driver>
% \fi
\ProvidesFile{ltfiles.dtx}
- [2019/08/27 v1.2b LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)]
+ [2019/10/11 v1.2c LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{ltfiles.dtx}
@@ -706,7 +706,14 @@
% A side effect of the new code is that we will see quotes around
% file name displays where there haven't been any before.
%
+% For compatibilty with existing code using |{abc}.tex| or |{one.two}.png|
+% an initial brace group is discarded before expansion and |\string| is applied
+% The content of the brace group is discarded. This means that a leading space
+% will be lost unless protected (by |{ }| or |" "| or |\space|) but filenames
+% with a space are hopefully rare.
+%
% \changes{v1.2a}{2019/07/01}{Support UTF-8}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{2019/10/11}{Remove one brace group}
% \begin{macrocode}
%</2ekernel>
%<*2ekernel|latexrelease>
@@ -715,7 +722,7 @@
\def\set@curr@file#1{%
\begingroup
\escapechar\m@ne
- \xdef\@curr@file{\expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname}%
+ \xdef\@curr@file{\expandafter\string\csname\@firstofone#1\@empty\endcsname}%
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf
index 11f55bd545..9f4bec2d00 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltluatex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdf
index b2f519fa0d..51dcd4b48a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
index 2e0dead725..a4e46c0392 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
index b11d1f3baa..af53fdd9dd 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
index ad670a274a..11315afc6d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
index 5fd42bd3d1..561075c467 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
index 59db7a5d89..685113547e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
index e23852f3a3..2d4bf9e464 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
index b07f0a5013..d57be5ca6c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
index 523f945587..6a6589e196 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
index 4057549d5a..e6ed2eba04 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
index 564fff2ba8..975aaa3689 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
index 2815ae3bed..f0686d8a26 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
index 08be9b4515..167a879ebe 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
index 057b9fc997..3384b86766 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
index 9242b2e92e..ae536034ce 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
index 55161365cd..ac63528ecb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
index c8c11f1ae4..6b57e1660c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf
index db4c5e161f..903317406a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews17.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf
index 4d7c4a9f20..0adbc8b9d9 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews18.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf
index 00d5df6ab1..00c7c35f52 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews19.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf
index 86c9b8942a..b7c29ba9b6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews20.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf
index b4d8b48342..5b5739998f 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews21.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf
index 013af12862..9bfcca00dd 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews22.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf
index c37e9f0bca..b5d31d6cd1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews23.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf
index 02776c7256..63fbe43ed2 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews24.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf
index 31867da62a..289602c008 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews25.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf
index 39671b7cf7..62fa7f5a61 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews26.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf
index a9f90cfc34..e8bdbe7454 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews27.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf
index bf2a5d93e7..9fa4b7cf13 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews28.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf
index 329f21266b..6eebd0a89d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews29.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf
index 48b32ce65b..2a51a11e96 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltnews30.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx b/macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx
index 646015daf3..aa2a00390f 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/base/lttab.dtx
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
%%% From File: lttab.dtx
%<*driver>
% \fi
-\ProvidesFile{lttab.dtx}[2019/08/27 v1.1p LaTeX Kernel (Columns)]
+\ProvidesFile{lttab.dtx}[2019/10/07 v1.1q LaTeX Kernel (Columns)]
% \iffalse
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\GetFileInfo{lttab.dtx}
@@ -806,8 +806,12 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\extracolsep}
+% This command needs to expand during the tabular preamble construction
+% so can't be robust.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1q}{2019/10/07}{This needs to expand}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\extracolsep[1]{\tabskip #1\relax}
+\def\extracolsep#1{\tabskip #1\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx b/macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
index 17f5f3ee5e..d15bd78404 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@
{2019-10-01}
%</2ekernel|latexrelease>
%<*2ekernel>
-\def\patch@level{0}
+\def\patch@level{1}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\development@branch@name}
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
index 6ee1395e6a..a7c2d93201 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf b/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf
index f641b9f483..4d383435d5 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/ltxdoc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdf b/macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdf
index f5985404bb..f2cc342e83 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/makeindx.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/modguide.pdf b/macros/latex/base/modguide.pdf
index 5024a2070a..7694852b7e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/modguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/modguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx b/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
index a77dfba7b3..fc92f83451 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
@@ -26,8 +26,8 @@
% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
%
% \fi
-\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.2d}
-\def\nfssfontfiledate{2015/02/01}
+\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.2e}
+\def\nfssfontfiledate{2019/10/12}
%
% \iffalse
@@ -258,6 +258,8 @@
\string\help\space for help [ \string\table\space\string\bye\space]:}%
\ifx\action\empty
\expandafter\table\expandafter\bye
+ \else
+ \expandafter\action
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf b/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf
index 88a54a902e..fcc1333dbc 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/nfssfont.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/proc.pdf b/macros/latex/base/proc.pdf
index 265e13a7be..2f57d69f53 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/proc.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/proc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/slides.pdf b/macros/latex/base/slides.pdf
index 5a581a8839..f56e7b44cb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/slides.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/slides.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdf b/macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdf
index 5e6de06797..14eda9d759 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/slifonts.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/source2e.pdf b/macros/latex/base/source2e.pdf
index c0586f08b7..995fc04783 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/source2e.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/source2e.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdf b/macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdf
index 37b44ac0bb..bcac8e0ec1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/syntonly.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/tulm.pdf b/macros/latex/base/tulm.pdf
index fcdbb53a17..c9b827e25c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/tulm.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/tulm.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdf b/macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
index c5f8d2818a..e49aeda5b7 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf b/macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf
index 37338ebb5a..86bf7e1ee7 100644
--- a/macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty
index 1b763583fd..4fc8bb60ed 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula.sty
@@ -30,9 +30,9 @@
\usetikzlibrary{arrows.meta}
\ExplSyntaxOn
-\tl_const:Nn \c_chemformula_date_tl {2019/09/27}
+\tl_const:Nn \c_chemformula_date_tl {2019/10/13}
\tl_const:Nn \c_chemformula_version_number_tl {4.15}
-\tl_const:Nn \c_chemformula_version_suffix_tl {g}
+\tl_const:Nn \c_chemformula_version_suffix_tl {h}
\tl_const:Nx \c_chemformula_version_tl
{ \c_chemformula_version_number_tl \c_chemformula_version_suffix_tl }
\tl_const:Nn \c_chemformula_info_tl
@@ -146,20 +146,20 @@
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
% variants of kernel functions:
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \keys_set:nn { nV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_blank:nF { V }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_in:nnT { x , nV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_eq:nnT { V, x }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_eq:nnTF { o }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_set:Nn { cV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_replace_all:Nnn { NV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_replace_once:Nnn { Nxx }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_set_rescan:Nnn { NnV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \prop_item:Nn { NV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \prop_if_in:NnT { Nx }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \dim_set:Nn { NV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \skip_set:Nn { cV }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \str_if_eq:nnT { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \keys_set:nn {nV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_blank:nF {V}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_in:nnT {x,nV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_eq:nnT {V,x}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_if_eq:nnTF {o}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_set:Nn {cV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_replace_all:Nnn {NV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_replace_once:Nnn {Nxx}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_set_rescan:Nnn {NnV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \prop_item:Nn {NV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \prop_if_in:NnT {Nx}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \dim_set:Nn {NV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \skip_set:Nn {cV}
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \str_if_eq:nnT {V}
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
% VARIABLES
@@ -342,6 +342,7 @@
\tl_set:Nn \l__chemformula_kroegervink_neutral_tl {$\times$}
\tl_new:N \l__chemformula_adduct_penalty_tl
\tl_set:Nn \l__chemformula_adduct_penalty_tl {300}
+\tl_new:N \l__chemformula_catcodes_tl
% property lists:
\prop_new:N \l__chemformula_arrows_code_prop
@@ -370,22 +371,22 @@
{
\group_begin:
\chemformula_tikzexternaldisable:
- \tikz [ #1 ] {#2}
+ \tikz [#1] {#2}
\group_end:
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_tikz:nn { xn,nf }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_tikz:nn {xn,nf}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_draw:nn #1#2
- { \draw [ #1 ] #2 ; }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_draw:nn { xn,nx,xx,xf,Vn }
+ { \draw [#1] #2 ; }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_draw:nn {xn,nx,xx,xf,Vn}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_node:nn #1#2
- { \node [ #1 ] {#2} ; }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_node:nn { x }
+ { \node [#1] {#2} ; }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_node:nn {x}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_node:nnn #1#2#3
- { \node [ #1 ] ( #2 ) {#3} ; }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_node:nnn { nx }
+ { \node [#1] (#2) {#3} ; }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_node:nnn {nx}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_allow_break:
{ \tex_penalty:D \c_zero_int }
@@ -430,7 +431,7 @@
% prevent externalisation of tikz parts of the formulae:
\AtBeginDocument { \providecommand \tikzexternaldisable {} }
-\keys_define:nn { chemformula }
+\keys_define:nn {chemformula}
{
tikz-external-disable .bool_set:N =
\l__chemformula_tikzexternaldisable_bool
@@ -638,7 +639,7 @@
{
\bool_if:NTF \l__chemformula_kroegervink_bool
{ \chemformula_kroegervink_negative: }
- { ' }
+ {'}
}
\keys_define:nn {chemformula}
@@ -875,7 +876,7 @@
\c_zero_skip
\l__chemformula_arrow_penalty_tl
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_arrow_draw:nnn { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_arrow_draw:nnn {V}
\prg_new_conditional:Npnn \chemformula_if_is_arrow:n #1 {p,T,F,TF}
{
@@ -1086,7 +1087,11 @@
\seq_map_function:NN
\l__chemformula_input_seq
\__chemformula_input:n
- \__chemformula_prepare_output:N \l__chemformula_input_tl
+ % \tl_analysis_show:N \l__chemformula_input_tl
+ \__chemformula_prepare_output:NV
+ \l__chemformula_input_tl
+ \l__chemformula_catcodes_tl
+ % \tl_analysis_show:N \l__chemformula_input_tl
\chemformula_write:V \l__chemformula_input_tl
}
\group_end:
@@ -1098,7 +1103,7 @@
{ \text { \chemformula_font_inner: #1} }
{ { \chemformula_font_inner: #1 } }
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_write:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_write:n {V}
% internal version of \ch command:
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_ch:nn #1#2
@@ -1114,7 +1119,7 @@
% \tl_show:N \g__chemformula_output_tl
\tl_gclear:N \g__chemformula_output_tl
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_ch:nn { V , nV , VV }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_ch:nn {V,nV,VV}
% Trickery to use \ch inside align environment:
% bypass \\:
@@ -1132,7 +1137,7 @@
}
}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_ch_newline_skip:w [ #1 ]
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_ch_newline_skip:w [#1]
{
\tl_gput_right:Nn \g__chemformula_output_tl { [#1] }
\__chemformula_ch_newline:w
@@ -1144,7 +1149,7 @@
\__chemformula_ch_intertext:w #1 \intertext{} \q_no_value \q_stop
\quark_if_no_value:nF {#2}
{
- \tl_gput_right:Nn \g__chemformula_output_tl { & }
+ \tl_gput_right:Nn \g__chemformula_output_tl {&}
\__chemformula_ch_align:w #2 \q_stop
}
}
@@ -1190,7 +1195,9 @@
\__chemformula_input_compound_no_check:NV
\l__chemformula_compound_tl
\l__chemformula_chemformula_tmpa_tl
- \__chemformula_prepare_output:N \l__chemformula_compound_tl
+ \__chemformula_prepare_output:NV
+ \l__chemformula_compound_tl
+ \l__chemformula_catcodes_tl
\chemformula_write:V \l__chemformula_compound_tl
}
\group_end:
@@ -1253,7 +1260,7 @@
}
\tl_set:NV #1 \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_generate_arrows:Nn { NV }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_generate_arrows:Nn {NV}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_detect_arrows:n #1
{
@@ -1315,15 +1322,15 @@
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_generate_name:Nn #1#2
{
\__chemformula_sanitize:Nn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl {#2}
- \tl_if_in:VnT \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl { ! }
+ \tl_if_in:VnT \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl {!}
{
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
- { ! }
+ {!}
{ \__chemformula_name_compound:w }
}
\tl_set:NV #1 \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_generate_name:Nn { NV }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_generate_name:Nn {NV}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_detect_name:n #1
{
@@ -1656,7 +1663,7 @@
{ \ensuremath {#1} }
{ \ensuremath { \text {#1} } }
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_number_style:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_number_style:n {V}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_charge_style:n #1
{
@@ -1664,7 +1671,7 @@
{ \ensuremath {#1} }
{ \ensuremath { \text {#1} } }
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_charge_style:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \chemformula_charge_style:n {V}
% subscripts
% remove double or nested sub- and superscripts
@@ -1705,7 +1712,7 @@
}
}
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_subscript:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_subscript:n {V}
% TODO: add hook for cleanup?
% similar to ChemCompoundProperty?
@@ -1729,10 +1736,10 @@
{ \chemformula_plus: }
\chemformula_add_subscript_cleanup:nn
{ \chemformula_adduct: }
- { . }
+ {.}
\chemformula_add_subscript_cleanup:nn
{ \chemformula_star_adduct: }
- { * }
+ {*}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_clean_subscript:
{
@@ -1742,14 +1749,6 @@
{##1}
{ \prop_item:Nn \l__chemformula_clean_subscript_prop {##1} }
}
- % \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_subscript_tl
- % { \chemformula_single_bond: } { \chemformula_minus: }
- % \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_subscript_tl
- % { \chemformula_triple_bond: } { \chemformula_plus: }
- % \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_subscript_tl
- % { \chemformula_adduct: } { . }
- % \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_subscript_tl
- % { \chemformula_star_adduct: } { * }
}
\cs_generate_variant:Nn \tl_replace_all:Nnn {Nnx}
@@ -1788,7 +1787,7 @@
}
\group_end:
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_subscript_write:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_subscript_write:n {V}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_measure_subscript:n #1
{
@@ -1798,7 +1797,7 @@
{ -\box_wd:N \l__chemformula_tmpa_box }
\box_clear:N \l__chemformula_tmpa_box
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_measure_subscript:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_measure_subscript:n {V}
% superscripts
% remove double or nested sub- and superscripts
@@ -1836,7 +1835,7 @@
}
}
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_superscript:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_superscript:n {V}
% TODO: add hook for cleanup?
% \prop_new:N \l__chemformula_clean_superscript_prop
@@ -1910,37 +1909,37 @@
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
{ \chemformula_single_bond: } { \chemformula_minus: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { - } { \chemformula_minus: }
+ {-} { \chemformula_minus: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
{ \chemformula_triple_bond: } { \chemformula_plus: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { + } { \chemformula_plus: }
+ {+} { \chemformula_plus: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
{ \chemformula_adduct: } { \chemformula_radical_or_decimal: }
\bool_if:NTF \l__chemformula_kroegervink_bool
{
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { ' } { \chemformula_kroegervink_negative: }
+ {'} { \chemformula_kroegervink_negative: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { \chemformula_adduct: } { . }
+ { \chemformula_adduct: } {.}
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { \chemformula_star_adduct: } { * }
+ { \chemformula_star_adduct: } {*}
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { \chemformula_radical_or_decimal: } { . }
+ { \chemformula_radical_or_decimal: } {.}
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
{ \chemformula_prime: } { \chemformula_kroegervink_negative: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { * } { \chemformula_kroegervink_positive: }
+ {*} { \chemformula_kroegervink_positive: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { . } { \chemformula_kroegervink_positive: }
+ {.} { \chemformula_kroegervink_positive: }
}
{
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { \chemformula_star_adduct: } { * }
+ { \chemformula_star_adduct: } {*}
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { . } { \chemformula_radical_or_decimal: }
+ {.} { \chemformula_radical_or_decimal: }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_superscript_tl
- { , } { \chemformula_decimal: }
+ {,} { \chemformula_decimal: }
}
}
@@ -1990,7 +1989,7 @@
}
\group_end:
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_superscript_write:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_superscript_write:n {V}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_measure_superscript:n #1
{
@@ -2000,7 +1999,7 @@
{ -\box_wd:N \l__chemformula_tmpa_box }
\box_clear:N \l__chemformula_tmpa_box
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_measure_superscript:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_measure_superscript:n {V}
% typeset both sub- and superscripts
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_use_sub_and_superscript:
@@ -2129,7 +2128,7 @@
{#1}
\tl_if_in:VnTF \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl { @ }
{
- \bool_set_true:N \l__chemformula_options_bool
+ \bool_set_false:N \l__chemformula_options_bool
\bool_set_true:N \l__chemformula_is_option_bool
\tl_remove_all:Nn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl { @ }
\exp_last_unbraced:Nno
@@ -2184,7 +2183,7 @@
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_print_stoich:n #1
{ \chemformula_parse_stoich:n {#1} }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_print_stoich:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_print_stoich:n {V}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_parse_stoich:n #1
{ \__chemformula_parse_stoich:w #1 \q_nil }
@@ -2305,13 +2304,14 @@
\__chemformula_input_options:n {#2}
\bool_if:NT \l__chemformula_is_option_bool
{
- \tl_put_right:Nn #1
+ \bool_set_true:N \l__chemformula_options_bool
+ \tl_put_right:Nx #1
{
\group_begin:
% open group
- \keys_set:nV
+ \keys_set:nn
{chemformula}
- \l__chemformula_internal_options_tl
+ { \exp_not:V \l__chemformula_internal_options_tl }
}
}
\bool_if:nT
@@ -2344,7 +2344,7 @@
\tl_clear:N \l__chemformula_stoich_tl
}
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_compound:Nn { NV }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_compound:Nn {NV}
% TODO: this is redundant at the moment
\bool_new:N \g__chemformula_compound_group_open_bool
@@ -2388,13 +2388,13 @@
% \cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_font: {}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_fontspec:n #1
{
- \tl_if_in:nnTF {#1} { [ }
+ \tl_if_in:nnTF {#1} {[}
{ \__chemformula_fontspec_aux:w #1 \q_stop }
{ \__chemformula_fontspec_aux:w [] #1 \q_stop }
}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_fontspec_aux:w [#1]#2 \q_stop
- { \newfontfamily \chemformula_font: [ #1 ] {#2} }
+ { \newfontfamily \chemformula_font: [#1] {#2} }
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_save_catcodes:
{
@@ -2410,6 +2410,7 @@
\char_set_catcode:nn { 34 } { \char_value_catcode:n { 34 } }% "
\char_set_catcode:nn { 60 } { \char_value_catcode:n { 60 } }% <
\char_set_catcode:nn { 62 } { \char_value_catcode:n { 62 } }% >
+ \char_set_catcode:nn { 126 } { \char_value_catcode:n { 126 } }% ~
}
}
@@ -2440,22 +2441,26 @@
}
{#2}
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_sanitize:Nn { NV }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_sanitize:Nn {NV}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_prepare_output:N #1
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_prepare_output:Nn #1#2
{
\tl_set_rescan:NnV #1
{
\__chemformula_restore:
- \ExplSyntaxOn
- \makeatletter
+ #2
+ % we /need/ those:
+ \char_set_catcode_letter:N \@
+ \char_set_catcode_letter:N \_
+ \char_set_catcode_letter:N \:
}
#1
}
-
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_prepare_output:Nn {NV}
+
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_reset:Nn #1#2
{ \tl_set_rescan:Nnn #1 { \__chemformula_restore: } {#2} }
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_reset:Nn { NV }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_reset:Nn {NV}
\prg_new_protected_conditional:Npnn \__chemformula_if_only_parens:n #1 {T,F,TF}
{
@@ -2549,6 +2554,7 @@
% start with formatting:
\tl_put_right:Nn #1
{
+ \tl_use:N \l__chemformula_format_tl
\group_begin:
\l__chemformula_atom_format_tl
}
@@ -2590,7 +2596,7 @@
}
\tl_clear:N \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_compound_no_check:Nn { NV }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_compound_no_check:Nn {NV}
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
% clean up chemmacros commands:
@@ -2600,7 +2606,7 @@
{ \mode_if_math:TF { \text {##1} } {##1} }
\cs_set:Npn \chemmacros_xspace: {}
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_clean_chemmacros:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_clean_chemmacros:n {V}
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
% input "and" sign
@@ -2799,7 +2805,7 @@
}
\bool_set_false:N \l__chemformula_is_arrow_bool
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_arrow:n { o,V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_arrow:n {o,V}
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
% input compound name
@@ -2856,7 +2862,7 @@
\__chemformula_read_escape_single:w #1 \q_nil
}
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_escape_text:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_input_escape_text:n {V}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \__chemformula_read_escape_text:n #1
{
@@ -2864,21 +2870,22 @@
{
\char_set_catcode_letter:N \_
\char_set_catcode_other:N \:
-
}
{#1}
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
{ \_ } { chemformulaplaceholder }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
- { _ } { \sb }
+ {_} { \sb }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
{ chemformulaplaceholder } { \_ }
% those cause trouble with chemmacros' \ox:
% \tl_put_left:Nn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
% { \chemformula_group_begin: }
% \tl_put_right:Nn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
- % { \chemformula_group_end: }
- % TODO: waum ist das auskommentiert
+ % { \chemformula_group_end: }
+ % \tl_set_rescan:NnV \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
+ % { \__chemformula_restore: \char_set_catcode_other:N \~ }
+ % \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
% \__chemformula_reset:NV \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
\tl_put_right:NV \l__chemformula_input_tl \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
}
@@ -2935,7 +2942,7 @@
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
{ \_ } { chemformulaplaceholder }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
- { _ } { \sb }
+ {_} { \sb }
\tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
{ chemformulaplaceholder } { \_ }
% \__chemformula_reset:NV \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
@@ -3074,7 +3081,8 @@
\bool_set_false:N \l__chemformula_fss_bool
\bool_set_false:N \l__chemformula_fontspec_bool
\tl_set:Nn \l__chemformula_format_tl {#1} ,
- atom-format .tl_set:N = \l__chemformula_atom_format_tl
+ atom-format .tl_set:N = \l__chemformula_atom_format_tl ,
+ set-catcodes .tl_set:N = \l__chemformula_catcodes_tl
}
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -3116,13 +3124,13 @@
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_get_lewis_sequence:Nn #1#2
{
\tl_set:Nn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl {#2}
- \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl { : } { \scan_stop: : , }
+ \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl {:} { \scan_stop: : , }
\tl_replace_all:NVn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl \c__chemformula_colon_tl
{ \scan_stop: : , }
- \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl { . } { \scan_stop: . , }
- \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl { | } { \scan_stop: | , }
- \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl { o } { \scan_stop: o , }
- \seq_set_split:NnV #1 { , } \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
+ \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl {.} { \scan_stop: . , }
+ \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl {|} { \scan_stop: | , }
+ \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl {o} { \scan_stop: o , }
+ \seq_set_split:NnV #1 {,} \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_lewis_get_angle_and_spec:n #1
@@ -3151,26 +3159,26 @@
\l__chemformula_tmpa_tl
{ \tl_use:N \l__chemformula_tmpa_tl }
}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_lewis_set_elspec_type:n { V }
+\cs_generate_variant:Nn \__chemformula_lewis_set_elspec_type:n {V}
% available types:
\cs_new_protected:Npn \chemformula_declare_lewis_elspec_type:nn #1#2
{ \prop_put:Nnn \l__chemformula_lewis_elspec_types_prop {#1} {#2} }
\chemformula_declare_lewis_elspec_type:nn
- { | }
+ {|}
{ \__chemformula_lewis_elspec_pair_line: }
\chemformula_declare_lewis_elspec_type:nn
- { : }
+ {:}
{ \__chemformula_lewis_elspec_pair_dots: }
\chemformula_declare_lewis_elspec_type:nn
- { . }
+ {.}
{ \__chemformula_lewis_elspec_single: }
\chemformula_declare_lewis_elspec_type:nn
- { o }
+ {o}
{ \__chemformula_lewis_elspec_empty: }
\chemformula_declare_lewis_elspec_type:nn
@@ -3565,9 +3573,12 @@ VERSION HISTORY
- implement \shortintertext bypass
2019/09/23 - version 4.15f - add missing definition for temporary variable
2019/09/27 - version 4.15g - bug fix in fontspec option
-
+2019/10/13 - version 4.15h - new (undocumented) option set-catcodes
+ - fix behaviour with category codes
+ (https://tex.stackexchange.com/q/511592/)
+ - fix bug: local format changes are now applied
+ again
+
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-% TODO
+% IDEAS:
- Addukte: Zahlen nach * und . automatisch erkennen?
-- make escaped text/math /truely/ escaped, i.e., behave as if it's been input
- /outside/ of \ch
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf
index 32caaea29a..b32d5e8205 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex
index 5dbb268e70..234fa89f71 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex
@@ -32,6 +32,7 @@
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
\documentclass[load-preamble+]{cnltx-doc}
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{chemformula}
\usepackage{chemmacros}
\setcnltx{
@@ -75,9 +76,14 @@
\usepackage{chemfig,booktabs,cancel,varioref}
\usepackage[version=4]{mhchem}
-\expandafter\def\csname libertine@figurestyle\endcsname{LF}
-\usepackage[libertine]{newtxmath}
-\expandafter\def\csname libertine@figurestyle\endcsname{OsF}
+\makeatletter
+\def\libertine@figurestyle{LF}
+\RequirePackage{amsmath}
+\undef\lvert \undef\lVert
+\undef\rvert \undef\rVert
+\RequirePackage[libertine]{newtxmath}
+\def\libertine@figurestyle{OsF}
+\makeatother
\chemsetup{
greek = newtx ,
@@ -234,7 +240,7 @@ the following command:
Set up \chemformula.
\end{commands}
-\chemformula\ is tightly intertwined with the \chemmacros\ package. If noth
+\chemformula\ is tightly intertwined with the \chemmacros\ package. If both
packages are loaded together, \chemformula\ is integrated into the
\chemmacros\ package. Then all of \chemformula's options belong to
\chemmacros' module \module{chemformula}. This means if you load it via
@@ -282,8 +288,8 @@ A blank in the input \emph{never} is a blank in the output. This role of the
blank strictly holds and disregarding it can have unexpected results and even
lead to errors.
-Another notable difference: \chemformula\ tries to avoid math mode whenever
-possible:
+The most visible differences regard spacing and the shapes of the default
+arrows:
\begin{example}[side-by-side]
\ch{A + B ->[a] C} \par
\ce{A + B ->[a] C}
@@ -297,11 +303,12 @@ which in this case is recognized as a compound.
\end{example}
This also means, that a part cannot contain a blank since this will
automatically divide it into two parts. If you need an extra blank in the
-output you need to use \verbcode+~+. However, since commands in most cases
-gobble a space after them a input like \cs{ch}\Marg{\cs*{command} ABC} will be
-treated as a single part. If you want or need to divide them you need to add
-an empty group: \cs{ch}\Marg{\cs*{command}\marg{} ABC}. The different input
-types are described in the following sections.
+output you need to use \verbcode+~+ or \cs*{~}. However, since commands
+in most cases gobble a space after them a input like
+\cs{ch}\Marg{\cs*{command} ABC} will be treated as a single part. If you want
+or need to divide them you need to add an empty group:
+\cs{ch}\Marg{\cs*{command}\marg{} ABC}. The different input types are
+described in the following sections.
% % TODO: Module überdenken, Beschreibung anpassen
% There are some options to customize the output of the \cs{ch} command. They
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README
index 1d6382d64e..3eba59c667 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/README
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-KOMA-Script 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+KOMA-Script 2019/10/12 v3.27
Copyright (c) Markus Kohm <komascript(at)gmx.info>, 1994-2019
This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License. See
@@ -24,6 +24,33 @@ For installation see INSTALL.txt (english) or INSTALLD.txt
Classes and Packages:
==============================================================================
+komamarks - providing extra marks commands similar to the LaTeX mark commands
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Maintainer: Markus Kohm
+E-Mail: komascript at gmx info
+Abstract: komamarks is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script bundle.
+ Sometimes the LaTeX mark commands \markboth, \markright,
+ \leftmark, \rightmark are not enough to generate the running
+ heads for a wanted layout. Even KOMA-Script package scrlayer's
+ extra commands \lefttopmark, \leftbotmark, \leftfirstmark,
+ \righttopmark, \rightbotmark and \rightfirstmark are maybe
+ not enough, e.g., if you want not only the chapter and
+ section in the heading, but maybe also the number of the
+ subsection.
+
+ Package komamarks provides commands to handle the extra marks
+ of ε-TeX with commands similar to the usual LaTeX commands and
+ the scrlayer extension. And it provides commands to extend
+ these two part marks (left and right one) to multi part marks.
+
+ The package is fully compatible with scrlayer and
+ scrlayer-scrpage.
+
+Requires: scrbase.sty
+License: LPPL 1.3c or later
+State: Author maintained, beta
+Version: 2018/05/03 v0.3199
+==============================================================================
scraddr - Package to provide data from scrlttr2's adr-files
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maintainer: Markus Kohm
@@ -58,7 +85,22 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal KOMA-Script package
Recommended: scrlayer-scrpage - KOMA-Script package
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
+==============================================================================
+scrarticle - wrapper class to scrartcl
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Maintainer: Markus Kohm
+E-Mail: komascript at gmx info
+Abstract: scrreport is a very simple wrapper class to scrartcl. Is has
+ been made, because several younger KOMA-Script users doe not
+ understand the 8.3 name scheme.
+
+ However it is still recommended to use scrartcl instead of
+ scrarticle.
+Requires: scrartcl.cls - KOMA-Script class
+License: LPPL 1.3c or later
+State: Author maintained
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrbase - basic features for KOMA-Script, e.g. conditionals and key=value
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -97,7 +139,7 @@ Requires: keyval - key=value package from the graphics bundle
manipulation
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrbook - versatile class may be used as a drop-in replacement of book
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -117,7 +159,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal KOMA-Script package
typearea - KOMA-Script package
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrdate - calender date operations, e.g. calculation of the day of the week
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -136,7 +178,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - KOMA-Script package for some basic features.
manipulation
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrdoc - internal source documentation class of KOMA-Script
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -165,7 +207,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal package with some basics of KOMA-Script
etoolbox - tool-box for LaTeX programming using e-TeX
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrfontsizes - package to generate a KOMA-Script font size file
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -177,7 +219,7 @@ Abstract: scrfontsizes is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script bundle.
Requires: scrextend - some KOMA-Script features for other classes
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrhack - patch some isues with other packages
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -195,7 +237,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal KOMA-Script package with basics
xpatch - extending etoolbox patching commands
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrjura - contract environment for advocates and scholary persons in law
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -211,7 +253,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal KOMA-Script package with basics
tocbasic - features for helper files and float environments
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrkbase - internal basic features for KOMA-Script classes and packages
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -226,7 +268,26 @@ Requires: scrbase - KOMA-Script package for some basic features.
manipulation
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
+==============================================================================
+scrlayer-fancyhdr - combining scrlayer with fancyhdr
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Maintainer: Markus Kohm
+E-Mail: komascript at gmx info
+Abstract: scrlayer-fancyhdr is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script
+ bundle. It uses KOMA-Script package scrlayer to redefine
+ the page styles of package fancyhdr as layer page styles.
+ This allows the combination of features of fancyhdr with
+ features of scrlayer.
+
+ Like most of the KOMA-Script packages, you can use this
+ package not only with KOMA-Script classes but also with
+ several other classes, e.g., the standard LaTeX classes.
+Requires: scrlayer.sty - KOMA-Script package
+ fancyhdr.sty - third party package
+License: LPPL 1.3c or later
+State: Author maintained, experimental
+Version: 2018/05/03 v0.1.3138 ALPHA
==============================================================================
scrlayer-notecolumn - control note columns parallel to the main text
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -247,7 +308,7 @@ Abstract: scrlayer-notecolumn is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script
Requires: scrlayer.sty
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained, proof of concept
-Version: 2018/08/29 v0.1.3011
+Version: 2019/06/27 v0.3.3161
==============================================================================
scrlayer-scrpage - controlling page headers and footers
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -267,7 +328,7 @@ Abstract: scrlayer-scrpage is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script
Requires: scrlayer.sty
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrlayer - defining layers and controlling page headers and footers
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -292,7 +353,22 @@ Abstract: scrlayer is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script bundle.
Requires: scrkbase.sty
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
+==============================================================================
+scrletter - wrapper class to scrlttr2
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Maintainer: Markus Kohm
+E-Mail: komascript at gmx info
+Abstract: scrreport is a very simple wrapper class to scrlttr2. Is has
+ been made, because several younger KOMA-Script users doe not
+ understand the 8.3 name scheme.
+
+ However it is still recommended to use scrlttr2 instead of
+ scrletter.
+Requires: scrlttr2.cls - KOMA-Script class
+License: LPPL 1.3c or later
+State: Author maintained
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrletter - letter extention to KOMA-Script classes
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -307,7 +383,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal KOMA-Script package
Recommended: marvosym - package by Martin Vogel providing symbols
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrlfile - control of package dependencies
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -325,7 +401,7 @@ Abstract: scrlfile is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script bundle. It
Requires:
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrlttr2 - versatile letter class with separation of text area and note paper
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -358,7 +434,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal KOMA-Script package
Recommended: marvosym - package by Martin Vogel providing symbols
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrpage2 - control of page headers and footers
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -383,7 +459,22 @@ Requires:
Successor: scrlayer-scrpage
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained, obsolete
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
+==============================================================================
+scrreport - wrapper class to scrreprt
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Maintainer: Markus Kohm
+E-Mail: komascript at gmx info
+Abstract: scrreport is a very simple wrapper class to scrreprt. Is has
+ been made, because several younger KOMA-Script users doe not
+ understand the 8.3 name scheme.
+
+ However it is still recommended to use scrreprt instead of
+ scrreport.
+Requires: scrreprt.cls - KOMA-Script class
+License: LPPL 1.3c or later
+State: Author maintained
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrreprt - versatile class may be used as a drop-in replacement of report
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -403,7 +494,7 @@ Requires: scrkbase - internal KOMA-Script package
typearea - KOMA-Script package
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrtime - show the time of the LaTeX run
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -415,7 +506,7 @@ Abstract: scrtime is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script bundle. It
Requires: scrkbase - internal package with some basics of KOMA-Script
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
scrwfile - Spare write handles for helper files to avoid `No room' messages
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -469,7 +560,7 @@ Abstract: tocbasic is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script bundle. The
Requires: scrbase - KOMA-Script package for some basic features.
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Author maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
tocstyle - Control layout of table of contents, list of figures etc.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -488,8 +579,8 @@ Abstract: tocstyle is a LaTeX package of the KOMA-Script bundle.
The current release is only a proof of concept.
Requires:
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
-State: Unstable
-Version: 2017/02/23 v0.2i-alpha
+State: Experimental and deprecated
+Version: 2019/10/09 v0.2j-alpha deprecated package (versatile toc styles)
==============================================================================
typearea - Calculating typeing area and margins depending on typographic rules
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -510,5 +601,5 @@ Abstract: Many LaTeX classes, including the standard classes, present
Requires: scrkbase - internal basic features for KOMA-Script packages
License: LPPL 1.3c or later
State: Autor maintained
-Version: 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+Version: 2019/10/12 v3.27
==============================================================================
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komamarks.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komamarks.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c27921f075
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/komamarks.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt
index 94fe1e0007..88695326ba 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/manifest.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% manifest.txt
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2016
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% manifest.txt
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2016
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien.
% ======================================================================
%
-% CONTENTS OF THE KOMA-SCRIPT RELEASE 2019/02/01 v3.26b
+% CONTENTS OF THE KOMA-SCRIPT RELEASE 2019/10/12 v3.27
% ------------------------------------------------------
%
%
@@ -321,6 +321,8 @@
% scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
% - KOMA-Script note column package using layers
%
+% komamarks.dtx - KOMA-Script extra marks package
+%
%
% Installation scripts for the various parts:
% -------------------------------------------
@@ -527,6 +529,8 @@ scrlayer.dtx
scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
+komamarks.dtx
+
scrdocstrip.tex
scrmain.ins
scrstrip.inc
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html
index d02b3755e1..1b786f68a6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html
@@ -1,997 +1,1021 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN">
<html>
<head><title>Index</title>
-<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
+ <meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
</head>
<body>
-<h1>Index der KOMA-Script-Anleitung</h1>
-<p>Dies ist ein Index der in KOMA-Script definierten Elemente. Dieser Index bezieht sich auf die <a href="scrguide.pdf">KOMA-Script-Anleitung</a>. Zur besseren Ãœbersicht ist der Index in mehrere Funktionsgruppen unterteilt:</p>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#option">Optionen</a></li><li><a href="#macro">Anweisungen</a></li><li><a href="#environment">Umgebungen</a></li><li><a href="#length">Längen</a></li><li><a href="#plength">Pseudolängen</a></li><li><a href="#variable">Variablen</a></li><li><a href="#pagestyle">Seitenstile</a></li><li><a href="#counter">Zähler</a></li><li><a href="#floatstyle">Stile für das float-Paket</a></li></ul>
-<h2><a name="option">Optionen</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="option.12h"></a><a href="#option.12h">12h</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.option.12h">287</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.BCOR"></a><a href="#option.BCOR">BCOR</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.BCOR">34</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.DIV"></a><a href="#option.DIV">DIV</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.DIV">35</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.abstract">75</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">291</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">291</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">291</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">291</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix">102</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.areasetadvanced"></a><a href="#option.areasetadvanced">areasetadvanced</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.areasetadvanced">490</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autoenlargeheadfoot"></a><a href="#option.autoenlargeheadfoot">autoenlargeheadfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autoenlargeheadfoot">254</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.automark">455</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autooneside">455</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">462</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.bibliography">159</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.captions">137</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterentrydots">79</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix">102</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.clausemark">322</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.cleardoublepage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.cleardoublepage">92</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">280</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.contract">320</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">450</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.draft">173</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.draft">272</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.draft">296</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.draft">456</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.draft">59</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">194</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature">296</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firsthead">195</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fleqn">136</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">192</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fontsize">184</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.fontsize">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fontsize">61</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">278</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footheight"></a><a href="#option.footheight">footheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footheight">47</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footinclude"></a><a href="#option.footinclude">footinclude</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footinclude">43</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footlines"></a><a href="#option.footlines">footlines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footlines">47</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footnotes">231</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.footnotes">308</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footnotes">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footsepline">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">278</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footsepline">85</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">277</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">462</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromalign">195</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromemail">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromfax">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">205</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromphone">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule">196</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromurl">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headheight"></a><a href="#option.headheight">headheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headheight">46</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headinclude"></a><a href="#option.headinclude">headinclude</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headinclude">43</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headings">102</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headlines"></a><a href="#option.headlines">headlines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headlines">46</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.headsepline">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">278</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headsepline">85</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">278</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">277</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.hmode"></a><a href="#option.hmode">hmode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.option.hmode">472</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">280</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.index">162</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.option.internalonly">357</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">322</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocindent">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratotoc">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.leqno">136</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.listof">153</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield">211</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.manualmark">455</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">272</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.markcase">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.mpinclude"></a><a href="#option.mpinclude">mpinclude</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.mpinclude">45</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.numbers">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">213</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">280</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsinit">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsselect">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.open">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.origlongtable">153</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.overfullrule"></a><a href="#option.overfullrule">overfullrule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.overfullrule">173</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.overfullrule">296</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.overfullrule">59</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">226</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.pagesize">51</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.pagestyleset"></a><a href="#option.pagestyleset">pagestyleset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.pagestyleset">267</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.paper">50</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.parnumber">323</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.parskip">223</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.parskip">82</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">280</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">280</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">280</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">280</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.priority">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.ref">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.refline">214</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.sectionentrydots">79</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.singlespacing"></a><a href="#option.singlespacing">singlespacing</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.singlespacing">450</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.subject">218</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.titlepage">300</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.titlepage">68</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.toc">76</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.twocolumn"></a><a href="#option.twocolumn">twocolumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twocolumn">43</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.twoside"></a><a href="#option.twoside">twoside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twoside">42</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.usegeometry"></a><a href="#option.usegeometry">usegeometry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.usegeometry">489</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.version">172</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.version">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.version">33</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.version">58</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="macro">Anweisungen</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">460</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">467</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">460</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">467</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">460</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">467</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">460</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">467</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">519</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Address">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">161</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">\AfterCalculatingTypearea*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">369</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">372</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">444</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea*">\AfterSettingArea*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea*">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea">\AfterSettingArea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">392</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">392</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">517</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">387</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">177</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">161</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">177</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">349</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">349</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">517</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">517</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">372</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">345</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">369</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">370</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">444</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">392</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">392</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">161</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.CenturyPart"></a><a href="#cmd.CenturyPart">\CenturyPart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.CenturyPart">281</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ClassInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">\ClassInfoNoLine</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">366</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassName">\ClassName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ClassName">493</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clause">320</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">322</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">407</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Comment">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DayName"></a><a href="#cmd.DayName">\DayName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayName">282</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DayNameByNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNameByNumber">\DayNameByNumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber">282</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNumber">\DayNumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNumber">281</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DecadePart"></a><a href="#cmd.DecadePart">\DecadePart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DecadePart">281</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">330</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">445</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">446</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">498</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">509</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">445</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">446</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">498</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">509</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">430</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">406</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">\DeclareTOCStyleEntries</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">397</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">397</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">341</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">342</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">341</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">406</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">406</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">406</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">406</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">406</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">406</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">442</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">445</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">453</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">349</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCSKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCSKey">\FamilyCSKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCSKey">354</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">356</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">346</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">342</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">342</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">342</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">342</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">342</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">351</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">348</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">347</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">349</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">351</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">\FamilySetUseLengthMacro</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">354</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">\FamilyUnknownKeyValue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">355</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">\FamilyUseLengthMacroKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">353</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FirstName">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">450</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">450</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeI">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeII">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">459</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">464</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">442</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">446</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ISODayName"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayName">\ISODayName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayName">282</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ISODayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayNumber">\ISODayNumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber">281</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ISOToday"></a><a href="#cmd.ISOToday">\ISOToday</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISOToday">283</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">102</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">497</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">\IfIsAliaskomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">497</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">453</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">442</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">453</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">453</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">288</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IsoToday"></a><a href="#cmd.IsoToday">\IsoToday</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.IsoToday">283</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAClassName">\KOMAClassName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.KOMAClassName">493</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">366</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">366</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoption">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoption">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoption">294</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoption">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoption">423</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoption">428</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoption">476</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoption">57</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoptions">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoptions">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoptions">294</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoptions">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoptions">423</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoptions">428</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoptions">476</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions">57</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.LastName">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.MakeMarkcase">272</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">392</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Name">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.PackageInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">\PackageInfoNoLine</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">366</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">445</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">446</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">498</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">509</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">445</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">446</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">498</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">509</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">375</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">374</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">375</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">378</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.SecDef"></a><a href="#cmd.SecDef">\SecDef</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.SecDef">517</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Sentence">326</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">378</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.SubClause">320</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">409</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Telephone">289</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">379</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">379</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XdivY">367</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XmodY">367</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">490</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark">119</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">390</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart*">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">250</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrchar">288</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrentry">288</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec*">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsecmark">119</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">494</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">389</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.addtokomafont">255</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.addtokomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.addtokomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.addtokomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">62</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontonearglist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">\addtokomafontonearglist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">170</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoplength">\addtoplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoplength">526</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">537</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">385</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">389</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">390</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">250</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrchar">288</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">248</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrentry">288</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.and">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.and">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.appendix">158</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">518</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.areaset"></a><a href="#cmd.areaset">\areaset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.areaset">48</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.areaset">490</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.author">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.author">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.autodot">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.automark*"></a><a href="#cmd.automark*">\automark*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark*">269</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark*">454</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">269</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark">454</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.backmatter">100</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">519</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">519</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.caption">140</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionabove">140</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">142</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelow">140</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">142</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionformat">147</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionof">142</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsacadian">\captionsacadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsacadian">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustralien">\captionsaustralien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustralien">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadian">\captionscanadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadian">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadien">\captionscanadien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadien">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsczech"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsczech">\captionsczech</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsczech">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrancais">\captionsfrancais</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrancais">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnewzealand">\captionsnewzealand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnewzealand">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnswissgerman">\captionsnswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnswissgerman">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionspolish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionspolish">\captionspolish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionspolish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsslovak">\captionsslovak</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsslovak">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswissgerman">\captionsswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswissgerman">545</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cc">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">261</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">258</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">267</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapapp">119</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">119</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter">107</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">510</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">\chapterheadmidvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">510</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">510</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">513</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">513</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermark">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">88</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">267</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">\cleardoubleevenpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">\cleardoubleoddpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">469</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">486</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.clearpage">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.clearpage">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.clearpage">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">469</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">469</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing">180</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">261</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">258</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpagebottommargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagebottommargin">\coverpagebottommargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">300</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">68</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpageleftmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpageleftmargin">\coverpageleftmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">300</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">68</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpagerightmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagerightmargin">\coverpagerightmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">300</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">68</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpagetopmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagetopmargin">\coverpagetopmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">300</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">68</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">444</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.date">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.date">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateacadian">\dateacadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateacadian">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustralien">\dateaustralien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustralien">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datecanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadian">\datecanadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadian">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datecanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadien">\datecanadien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadien">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateczech"></a><a href="#cmd.dateczech">\dateczech</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateczech">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datefrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrancais">\datefrancais</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrancais">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.datenewzealand">\datenewzealand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenewzealand">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datenswissgerman">\datenswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenswissgerman">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datepolish"></a><a href="#cmd.datepolish">\datepolish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datepolish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.dateslovak">\dateslovak</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateslovak">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswissgerman">\dateswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswissgerman">546</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dedication">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dedication">74</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">537</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname*">\defcaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname*">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnote">233</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnote">310</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote">97</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnotemark">233</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnotemark">310</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">97</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">468</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">393</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictum">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictum">311</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumauthorformat">311</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumrule">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumrule">311</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumwidth">311</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.documentclass">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.documentclass">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.documentclass">294</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.documentclass">315</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.documentclass">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.documentclass">422</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.documentclass">427</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.documentclass">475</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.documentclass">57</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">387</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">325</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.encl">183</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.extratitle">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.extratitle">70</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.figureformat">148</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.flushbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom">60</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnote">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnote">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotemark">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotemark">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotemark">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotetext">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotetext">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotetext">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footref">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footref">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footref">97</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.frontispiece"></a><a href="#cmd.frontispiece">\frontispiece</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.frontispiece">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontispiece">70</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontmatter">100</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.headmark">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">429</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">429</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">384</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">169</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">539</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">539</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">267</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifthispageodd">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.ifthispageodd">305</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">84</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">396</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">267</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">88</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.item"></a><a href="#cmd.item">\item</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.item">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.item">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.l@addto@macro"></a><a href="#cmd.l@addto@macro">\l@addto@macro</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.l@addto@macro">367</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumi">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumi">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumii">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiii">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiv">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemi">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemi">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemii">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemii">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiii">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiv">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">443</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">440</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">440</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">440</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">440</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">440</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">440</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">459</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">466</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">459</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">466</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftmark">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">459</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">466</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">261</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">258</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">178</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">225</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name">\listof/Dateierweiterung/name</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name">390</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listof/Zielendung/"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/Zielendung/">\listof/Zielendung/</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.listof/Zielendung/">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">390</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoffigures">156</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoftables">156</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">390</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">390</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">261</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">258</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.lowertitleback">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">74</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.mainmatter">100</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.makenote*"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote*">\makenote*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote*">483</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">483</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.maketitle">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.maketitle">69</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">269</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.manualmark">454</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginline">157</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginline">238</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginline">314</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginpar">157</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginpar">238</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginpar">314</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">276</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markboth">458</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markboth">88</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">276</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markleft">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markright">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">276</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markright">458</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markright">88</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.minisec">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.mobilephonename"></a><a href="#cmd.mobilephonename">\mobilephonename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multfootsep">231</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multfootsep">308</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multfootsep">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.nameday"></a><a href="#cmd.nameday">\nameday</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.nameday">284</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">519</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">519</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname*">\newcaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname*">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newdaylanguage"></a><a href="#cmd.newdaylanguage">\newdaylanguage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.newdaylanguage">284</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">537</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">537</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">468</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.newplength">\newplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newplength">526</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.numberline">397</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">267</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">267</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening">178</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.pagemark">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">90</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">226</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagestyle">86</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph*">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph">107</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmark">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphtocdepth">\paragraphtocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphtocdepth">81</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">325</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformat">324</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">324</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parname">332</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parshortname">332</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part*">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part">107</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">510</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">510</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">510</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">510</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">\partlineswithprefixformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">512</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmark">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmarkformat">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">88</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parttocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.parttocdepth">\parttocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.parttocdepth">81</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname*">\providecaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname*">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">468</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ps">180</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.publishers">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.publishers">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putC">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLL">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLR">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUL">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUR">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedbottom">60</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">115</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictum">311</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">311</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumtext">311</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedfootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedfootnote">\raggedfootnote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedfootnote">234</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggedfootnote">311</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedfootnote">99</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedpart">115</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection">115</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">239</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.recalctypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.recalctypearea">\recalctypearea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea">41</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ref">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClause">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refL">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refN">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refPar">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParL">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParN">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParS">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refS">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentence">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">261</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">258</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">387</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">537</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname*">\renewcaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname*">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">\renewpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">468</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">459</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">466</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">459</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">466</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightmark">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">459</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">466</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">261</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">258</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifluatex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifluatex">\scr@ifluatex</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifluatex">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">517</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">462</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">462</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">461</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">463</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section*">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section">107</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">515</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">515</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmark">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectiontocdepth">\sectiontocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectiontocdepth">81</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencename">332</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sentencenumberformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencenumberformat">\sentencenumberformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencenumberformat">326</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">332</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">160</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">150</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">149</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">149</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent">149</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">150</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">150</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcaptionalignment"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaptionalignment">\setcaptionalignment</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaptionalignment">151</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">150</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">122</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule">234</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">99</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">162</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont">255</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.setkomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.setkomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont">62</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">168</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">168</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">170</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">498</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">122</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setplength">\setplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength">526</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtodepth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtodepth">\setplengthtodepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtodepth">528</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtoheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtoheight">\setplengthtoheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtoheight">528</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtototalheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtototalheight">\setplengthtototalheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtototalheight">528</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtowidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtowidth">\setplengthtowidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtowidth">528</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.settime"></a><a href="#cmd.settime">\settime</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.settime">287</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">393</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subject">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subject">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph">107</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmark">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">\subparagraphtocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">81</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection*">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection">107</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmark">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectiontocdepth">\subsectiontocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectiontocdepth">81</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection">107</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">117</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmark">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">\subsubsectiontocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">81</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subtitle">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subtitle">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">484</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">486</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableformat">148</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">80</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook">\tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook">\tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsubscript">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsubscript">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsubscript">61</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsuperscript">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsuperscript">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">61</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thanks">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thanks">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumi">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumi">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumii">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiii">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiv">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiv">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thefootnotemark">233</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thefootnotemark">310</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">97</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thepar">324</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thesentence">326</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">178</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">226</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">86</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thistime*"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime*">\thistime*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime*">286</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thistime"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime">\thistime</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime">286</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.title">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.title">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlehead">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">305</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">88</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">410</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">410</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">409</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/">\tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">410</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">388</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.todaysname"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysname">\todaysname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysname">283</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.todaysnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysnumber">\todaysnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysnumber">283</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.toplevelpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.toplevelpagestyle">\toplevelpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.toplevelpagestyle">444</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.typearea"></a><a href="#cmd.typearea">\typearea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.typearea">41</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">393</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.uppertitleback">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">74</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefontofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefontofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefontofkomafont">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefontofkomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefontofkomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomafont">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usekomafont">255</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usekomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usekomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usekomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont">62</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">538</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">538</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usepackage">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usepackage">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usepackage">294</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usepackage">315</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.usepackage">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.usepackage">422</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.usepackage">427</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usepackage">475</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usepackage">57</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">170</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">317</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">477</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">397</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.withoutparnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.withoutparnumber">\withoutparnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.withoutparnumber">324</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">544</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">544</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="environment">Umgebungen</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.abstract">75</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin*">134</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin*">237</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin*">313</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin">134</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin">237</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin">313</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionbeside">144</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionofbeside">147</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.env.contract">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.description">129</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.description">236</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.enumerate">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.enumerate">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.itemize">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.itemize">235</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.labeling">130</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling">236</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.labeling">312</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.letter">176</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quotation">132</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quotation">237</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quote">132</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quote">237</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.titlepage">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.titlepage">69</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.verse">131</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.verse">236</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="length">Längen</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">254</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.footheight">454</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.length.footheight">47</a></li>
-<li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">254</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.headheight">454</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="plength">Pseudolängen</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">533</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">533</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">533</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">532</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">529</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">528</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">537</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">536</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">537</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">530</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">530</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">531</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">529</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">530</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">530</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">531</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">531</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">529</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">529</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">534</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">534</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">534</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">534</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">529</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">528</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">529</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">535</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">534</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">534</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">534</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">536</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">536</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">533</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">533</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">536</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">536</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">535</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">529</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">528</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">531</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">531</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">532</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">531</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">532</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="variable">Variablen</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer">215</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.date">214</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">183</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">206</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">196</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank">222</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">205</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname">196</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice">215</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.location">212</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref">215</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">229</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">229</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.place">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">215</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature">239</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject">218</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">218</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.title">217</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">215</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref">215</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">208</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="pagestyle">Seitenstile</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.@everystyle@"></a><a href="#pagestyle.@everystyle@">@everystyle@</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.@everystyle@">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.empty"></a><a href="#pagestyle.empty">empty</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.empty">226</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.empty">449</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.headings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.headings">headings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.headings">226</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.letter"></a><a href="#pagestyle.letter">letter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.letter">227</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.myheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.myheadings">myheadings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.myheadings">228</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.plain"></a><a href="#pagestyle.plain">plain</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.plain">228</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.scrheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.scrheadings">scrheadings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings">258</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="counter">Zähler</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.counter.letter">178</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.par">324</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth">121</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.sentence">326</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.counter.tocdepth">396</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth">81</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="floatstyle">Stile für das float-Paket</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">147</a></li>
-<li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">147</a></li>
-</ul>
-<p>
-<a href="http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer"><img
+ <h1>Index der KOMA-Script-Anleitung</h1>
+ <p>Dies ist ein Index der in KOMA-Script definierten Elemente. Dieser Index bezieht sich auf die <a href="scrguide.pdf">KOMA-Script-Anleitung</a>. Zur besseren Ãœbersicht ist der Index in mehrere Funktionsgruppen unterteilt:</p>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="#option">Optionen</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#macro">Anweisungen</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#environment">Umgebungen</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#length">Längen</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#plength">Pseudolängen</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#variable">Variablen</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#pagestyle">Seitenstile</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#counter">Zähler</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#floatstyle">Stile für das float-Paket</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="option">Optionen</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="option.12h"></a><a href="#option.12h">12h</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.option.12h">286</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.BCOR"></a><a href="#option.BCOR">BCOR</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.BCOR">34</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.DIV"></a><a href="#option.DIV">DIV</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.DIV">35</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.abstract">75</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">290</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">290</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">290</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">290</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix">102</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.areasetadvanced"></a><a href="#option.areasetadvanced">areasetadvanced</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.areasetadvanced">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">494</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autoenlargeheadfoot"></a><a href="#option.autoenlargeheadfoot">autoenlargeheadfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autoenlargeheadfoot">254</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.automark">462</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autooneside">462</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">469</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.bibliography">159</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.captions">137</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists">106</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterentrydots">79</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix">102</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.clausemark">321</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.cleardoublepage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage">305</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.cleardoublepage">92</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">279</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.contract">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.draft">173</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.draft">272</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.draft">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.draft">463</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.draft">59</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">194</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature">295</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">219</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firsthead">195</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fleqn">136</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">192</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fontsize">184</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.fontsize">296</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fontsize">61</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">278</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footheight"></a><a href="#option.footheight">footheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footheight">47</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footinclude"></a><a href="#option.footinclude">footinclude</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footinclude">43</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footlines"></a><a href="#option.footlines">footlines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footlines">47</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footnotes">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.footnotes">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footnotes">95</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footsepline">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">278</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footsepline">85</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">277</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">469</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromalign">195</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromemail">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromfax">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">204</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromphone">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule">196</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromurl">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headheight"></a><a href="#option.headheight">headheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headheight">45</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headinclude"></a><a href="#option.headinclude">headinclude</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headinclude">43</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headings">102</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headlines"></a><a href="#option.headlines">headlines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headlines">45</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.headsepline">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">278</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headsepline">85</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">278</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">277</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.hmode"></a><a href="#option.hmode">hmode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.option.hmode">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">279</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.index">162</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.option.internalonly">355</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">321</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocindent">318</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">318</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratotoc">317</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.leqno">136</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.listof">153</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield">211</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.manualmark">462</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">272</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.markcase">463</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.mpinclude"></a><a href="#option.mpinclude">mpinclude</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.mpinclude">44</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.numbers">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">212</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">279</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsinit">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsselect">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.open">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.origlongtable">153</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.overfullrule"></a><a href="#option.overfullrule">overfullrule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.overfullrule">173</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.overfullrule">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.overfullrule">59</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">225</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.pagesize">51</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.pagestyleset"></a><a href="#option.pagestyleset">pagestyleset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.pagestyleset">267</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.paper">50</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.parnumber">322</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.parskip">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.parskip">82</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">279</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">279</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">279</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">279</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.priority">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.ref">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.refline">213</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.sectionentrydots">79</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.singlespacing"></a><a href="#option.singlespacing">singlespacing</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.singlespacing">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.subject">217</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.titlepage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.titlepage">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.toc">76</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.twocolumn"></a><a href="#option.twocolumn">twocolumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twocolumn">43</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.twoside"></a><a href="#option.twoside">twoside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twoside">42</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.usegeometry"></a><a href="#option.usegeometry">usegeometry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.usegeometry">497</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.version">172</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.version">294</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.version">33</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.version">58</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="macro">Anweisungen</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">467</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">474</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">467</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">474</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">467</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">474</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">467</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">474</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">529</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">458</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">458</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">458</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Address">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddtoDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.AddtoDoHook">\AddtoDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AddtoDoHook">369</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook">\AddtoOneTimeDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook">369</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">161</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">\AfterCalculatingTypearea*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">373</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">376</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea*">\AfterSettingArea*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea*">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea">\AfterSettingArea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">396</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">396</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">528</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">391</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">177</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">161</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">177</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">347</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">347</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">528</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">528</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">376</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">343</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">373</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">396</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">396</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">161</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.CenturyPart"></a><a href="#cmd.CenturyPart">\CenturyPart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.CenturyPart">280</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ClassInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">\ClassInfoNoLine</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">366</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassName">\ClassName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ClassName">501</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clause">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">321</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Comment">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DayName"></a><a href="#cmd.DayName">\DayName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayName">281</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DayNameByNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNameByNumber">\DayNameByNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber">281</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNumber">\DayNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNumber">280</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DecadePart"></a><a href="#cmd.DecadePart">\DecadePart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DecadePart">280</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">328</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">485</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">453</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">517</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">421</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">485</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">453</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">517</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">437</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">412</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">\DeclareTOCStyleEntries</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">401</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">401</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">339</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">340</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">339</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">412</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">412</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">412</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">412</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">412</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">412</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">450</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">453</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ExecuteDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.ExecuteDoHook">\ExecuteDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook">368</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">348</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyCSKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCSKey">\FamilyCSKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCSKey">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">351</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">355</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">344</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyInverseBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyInverseBoolKey">\FamilyInverseBoolKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyInverseBoolKey">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">340</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">340</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">340</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">340</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">340</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">350</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">346</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">345</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">342</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">348</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">351</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetInverseBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetInverseBool">\FamilySetInverseBool</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetInverseBool">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">350</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">\FamilySetUseLengthMacro</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">\FamilyUnknownKeyValue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">353</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">\FamilyUseLengthMacroKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FirstName">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ForDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.ForDoHook">\ForDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ForDoHook">370</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">457</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeI">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeII">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">466</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">471</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">449</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">453</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ISODayName"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayName">\ISODayName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayName">281</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ISODayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayNumber">\ISODayNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber">280</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ISOToday"></a><a href="#cmd.ISOToday">\ISOToday</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISOToday">282</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfActiveMkBoth"></a><a href="#cmd.IfActiveMkBoth">\IfActiveMkBoth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.IfActiveMkBoth">360</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">102</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">\IfIsAliaskomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">449</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfSectionCommandStyleIs"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSectionCommandStyleIs">\IfSectionCommandStyleIs</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfSectionCommandStyleIs">518</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfUseNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUseNumber">\IfUseNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfUseNumber">527</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Ifplength"></a><a href="#cmd.Ifplength">\Ifplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.Ifplength">537</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">287</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IsoToday"></a><a href="#cmd.IsoToday">\IsoToday</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.IsoToday">282</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAClassName">\KOMAClassName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.KOMAClassName">501</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">365</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">365</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoption">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoption">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoption">293</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoption">315</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoption">429</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoption">435</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoption">483</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoption">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoptions">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoptions">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoptions">293</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoptions">315</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoptions">429</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoptions">435</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoptions">483</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.LastName">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.MakeMarkcase">272</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">396</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">463</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayers">\ModifyLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayers">447</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Name">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.PackageInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">\PackageInfoNoLine</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">366</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">381</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">381</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">485</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">453</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">517</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">485</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">453</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">517</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">342</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">458</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">379</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">378</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">379</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">382</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.SecDef"></a><a href="#cmd.SecDef">\SecDef</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.SecDef">527</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Sentence">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.SplitDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.SplitDoHook">\SplitDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.SplitDoHook">370</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">382</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.SubClause">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">386</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Telephone">288</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">383</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">383</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">381</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">381</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">381</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XdivY">367</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XmodY">367</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark">120</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">394</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart*">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">250</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrchar">287</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">248</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrentry">287</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec*">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsecmark">120</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">502</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">393</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.addtokomafont">255</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.addtokomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.addtokomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.addtokomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">62</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">505</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontonearglist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">\addtokomafontonearglist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">505</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">505</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">170</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoplength">\addtoplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoplength">537</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">548</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">393</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">394</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">250</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrchar">287</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">247</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrentry">287</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.and">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.and">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.appendix">158</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">528</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.areaset"></a><a href="#cmd.areaset">\areaset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.areaset">48</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.areaset">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.author">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.author">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.autodot">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.automark*"></a><a href="#cmd.automark*">\automark*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark*">269</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark*">462</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">269</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark">462</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.backmatter">100</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">529</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">529</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.caption">140</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionabove">140</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">142</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelow">140</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">142</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionformat">147</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionof">142</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsacadian">\captionsacadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsacadian">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustralien">\captionsaustralien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustralien">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionscanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadian">\captionscanadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadian">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionscanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadien">\captionscanadien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadien">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsczech"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsczech">\captionsczech</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsczech">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsfrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrancais">\captionsfrancais</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrancais">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnewzealand">\captionsnewzealand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnewzealand">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnswissgerman">\captionsnswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnswissgerman">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionspolish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionspolish">\captionspolish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionspolish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsslovak">\captionsslovak</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsslovak">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswissgerman">\captionsswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswissgerman">557</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cc">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">258</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">267</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapapp">119</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">119</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">519</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">\chapterheadmidvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">519</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">519</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">522</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">522</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermark">120</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">120</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">274</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">267</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">\cleardoubleevenpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">\cleardoubleoddpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">476</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">494</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">494</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.clearpage">229</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.clearpage">306</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.clearpage">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">476</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">476</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing">180</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">258</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpagebottommargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagebottommargin">\coverpagebottommargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpageleftmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpageleftmargin">\coverpageleftmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpagerightmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagerightmargin">\coverpagerightmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpagetopmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagetopmargin">\coverpagetopmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">451</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.date">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.date">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateacadian">\dateacadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateacadian">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustralien">\dateaustralien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustralien">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datecanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadian">\datecanadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadian">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datecanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadien">\datecanadien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadien">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateczech"></a><a href="#cmd.dateczech">\dateczech</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateczech">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datefrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrancais">\datefrancais</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrancais">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.datenewzealand">\datenewzealand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenewzealand">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datenswissgerman">\datenswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenswissgerman">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datepolish"></a><a href="#cmd.datepolish">\datepolish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datepolish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.dateslovak">\dateslovak</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateslovak">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswissgerman">\dateswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswissgerman">558</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dedication">303</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dedication">74</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">548</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname*">\defcaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname*">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnote">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnote">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote">97</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnotemark">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnotemark">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">97</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">477</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">475</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">397</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictum">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictum">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumauthorformat">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumrule">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumrule">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumwidth">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.documentclass">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.documentclass">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.documentclass">293</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.documentclass">314</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.documentclass">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.documentclass">428</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.documentclass">434</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.documentclass">482</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.documentclass">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">391</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.encl">183</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.extratitle">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.extratitle">70</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.figureformat">148</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.flushbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom">60</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote">231</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnote">308</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnote">95</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotemark">231</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotemark">308</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotemark">95</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotetext">231</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotetext">308</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotetext">95</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footref">231</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footref">308</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footref">97</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachemptykomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachemptykomavar">\foreachemptykomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachemptykomavar">550</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachkomavar">\foreachkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachkomavar">550</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachkomavarifempty"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachkomavarifempty">\foreachkomavarifempty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachkomavarifempty">550</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachnonemptykomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachnonemptykomavar">\foreachnonemptykomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachnonemptykomavar">550</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.frontispiece"></a><a href="#cmd.frontispiece">\frontispiece</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.frontispiece">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontispiece">70</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontmatter">100</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.headmark">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">436</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">436</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">388</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">358</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">359</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">359</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">358</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">358</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">358</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">359</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">359</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">359</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">360</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">359</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">169</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">550</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">550</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">356</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">360</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">122</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">267</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr">358</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">358</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifthispageodd">223</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.ifthispageodd">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">84</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">400</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">356</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">122</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">267</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.item"></a><a href="#cmd.item">\item</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.item">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.item">234</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.l@addto@macro"></a><a href="#cmd.l@addto@macro">\l@addto@macro</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.l@addto@macro">366</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumi">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumi">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumii">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiii">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiv">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemi">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemi">234</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemii">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemii">234</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiii">234</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiv">234</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">450</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">447</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">447</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">447</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">447</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">447</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">447</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">466</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">473</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">466</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">473</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftmark">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">466</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">473</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">258</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">178</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">224</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name">\listof/Dateierweiterung/name</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name">394</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listof/Zielendung/"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/Zielendung/">\listof/Zielendung/</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.listof/Zielendung/">386</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">394</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoffigures">156</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoftables">156</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">394</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">394</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">258</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.lowertitleback">303</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">74</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.mainmatter">100</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.makenote*"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote*">\makenote*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote*">490</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">490</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.maketitle">300</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.maketitle">69</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">269</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.manualmark">462</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginline">157</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginline">238</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginline">313</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginpar">157</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginpar">238</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginpar">313</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">228</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markboth">465</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markboth">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markleft">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markright">228</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markright">465</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markright">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.minisec">114</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.mobilephonename"></a><a href="#cmd.mobilephonename">\mobilephonename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multfootsep">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multfootsep">307</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multfootsep">95</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">231</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">308</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">95</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.nameday"></a><a href="#cmd.nameday">\nameday</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.nameday">283</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">529</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">529</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname*">\newcaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname*">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newdaylanguage"></a><a href="#cmd.newdaylanguage">\newdaylanguage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.newdaylanguage">283</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">548</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">548</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">477</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">475</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.newplength">\newplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newplength">537</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.numberline">401</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">267</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">267</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening">178</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.pagemark">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">90</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagestyle">86</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph*">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmark">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">274</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphtocdepth">\paragraphtocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphtocdepth">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformat">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parname">331</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parshortname">331</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part*">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">519</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">519</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">519</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">519</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">\partlineswithprefixformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">520</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmark">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">274</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmarkformat">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parttocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.parttocdepth">\parttocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.parttocdepth">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname*">\providecaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname*">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">477</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">475</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ps">180</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.publishers">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.publishers">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putC">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLL">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLR">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUL">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUR">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedbottom">60</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">116</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictum">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumtext">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedfootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedfootnote">\raggedfootnote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedfootnote">233</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggedfootnote">310</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedfootnote">99</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedpart">116</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection">116</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">239</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.recalctypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.recalctypearea">\recalctypearea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea">41</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ref">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClause">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refL">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refN">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refPar">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParL">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParN">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParS">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refS">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentence">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">326</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">258</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">391</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">548</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname*">\renewcaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname*">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">477</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">\renewpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">475</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">466</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">473</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">466</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">473</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">273</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightmark">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">466</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">473</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">258</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifluatex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifluatex">\scr@ifluatex</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifluatex">356</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">356</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">527</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">469</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">469</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">468</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">470</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section*">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">524</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">524</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmark">120</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">120</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">274</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectiontocdepth">\sectiontocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectiontocdepth">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencename">331</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sentencenumberformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencenumberformat">\sentencenumberformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencenumberformat">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">331</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">160</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">150</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">149</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">149</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent">149</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">150</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">150</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcaptionalignment"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaptionalignment">\setcaptionalignment</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaptionalignment">151</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">150</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">122</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule">233</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">99</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">162</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont">255</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setkomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.setkomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.setkomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont">62</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">168</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">168</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">170</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">122</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setplength">\setplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength">537</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtodepth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtodepth">\setplengthtodepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtodepth">539</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtoheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtoheight">\setplengthtoheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtoheight">539</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtototalheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtototalheight">\setplengthtototalheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtototalheight">539</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtowidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtowidth">\setplengthtowidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtowidth">539</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.settime"></a><a href="#cmd.settime">\settime</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.settime">286</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">397</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subject">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subject">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmark">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">274</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">\subparagraphtocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection*">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">120</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmark">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">120</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">274</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectiontocdepth">\subsectiontocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectiontocdepth">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">117</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">275</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmark">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">274</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">\subsubsectiontocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subtitle">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subtitle">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">491</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">493</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableformat">148</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">80</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook">\tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook">417</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook">\tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook">417</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsubscript">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsubscript">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsubscript">61</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsuperscript">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsuperscript">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">61</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thanks">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thanks">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumi">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumi">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumii">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiii">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiii">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiv">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiv">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thefootnotemark">232</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thefootnotemark">309</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">97</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thepar">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thesentence">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">178</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">86</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thistime*"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime*">\thistime*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime*">285</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thistime"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime">\thistime</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime">285</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.title">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.title">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlehead">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">417</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">417</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">416</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">417</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/">\tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">416</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">392</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.todaysname"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysname">\todaysname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysname">282</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.todaysnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysnumber">\todaysnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysnumber">282</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.toplevelpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.toplevelpagestyle">\toplevelpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.toplevelpagestyle">451</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.typearea"></a><a href="#cmd.typearea">\typearea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.typearea">41</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">397</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.uppertitleback">303</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">74</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefontofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefontofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefontofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefontofkomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefontofkomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomafont">188</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usekomafont">255</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usekomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usekomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usekomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont">62</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">549</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">169</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">549</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usepackage">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usepackage">253</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usepackage">293</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usepackage">314</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.usepackage">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.usepackage">428</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.usepackage">434</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usepackage">482</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usepackage">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">170</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">191</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">257</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">316</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">484</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">401</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.withoutparnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.withoutparnumber">\withoutparnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.withoutparnumber">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">556</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">556</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="environment">Umgebungen</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.abstract">75</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin*">134</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin*">236</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin*">312</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin">134</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin">236</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin">312</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionbeside">144</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionofbeside">147</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.env.contract">318</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.description">129</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.description">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.enumerate">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.enumerate">235</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.itemize">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.itemize">234</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.labeling">130</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling">235</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.labeling">311</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.letter">176</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quotation">132</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quotation">236</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quote">132</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quote">236</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.titlepage">300</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.titlepage">69</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.verse">131</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.verse">236</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="length">Längen</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">254</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.footheight">461</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.length.footheight">47</a></li>
+ <li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">254</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.headheight">461</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="plength">Pseudolängen</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">544</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">544</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">544</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">543</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">540</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">539</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">548</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">547</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">548</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">541</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">541</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">542</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">540</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">541</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">541</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">542</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">542</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">540</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">540</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">545</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">545</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">545</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">545</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">540</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">539</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">540</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">546</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">545</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">545</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">545</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">547</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">547</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">544</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">544</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">547</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">547</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">546</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">540</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">539</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">542</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">542</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">543</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">542</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">543</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="variable">Variablen</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer">214</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.date">212</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">183</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">220</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">196</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">204</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname">196</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice">214</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.location">211</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref">214</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">228</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">228</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.place">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">215</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature">238</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject">217</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">217</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.title">216</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">214</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref">214</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">206</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="pagestyle">Seitenstile</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.@everystyle@"></a><a href="#pagestyle.@everystyle@">@everystyle@</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.@everystyle@">456</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.empty"></a><a href="#pagestyle.empty">empty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.empty">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.empty">456</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.headings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.headings">headings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.headings">226</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.letter"></a><a href="#pagestyle.letter">letter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.letter">227</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.myheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.myheadings">myheadings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.myheadings">227</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.plain"></a><a href="#pagestyle.plain">plain</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.plain">227</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.scrheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.scrheadings">scrheadings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings">258</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="counter">Zähler</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.counter.letter">178</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.par">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth">121</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.sentence">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.counter.tocdepth">401</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth">81</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="floatstyle">Stile für das float-Paket</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">147</a></li>
+ <li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">147</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <p><a href="http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer"><img
src="http://www.w3.org/Icons/valid-html40"
-alt="Valid HTML 4.0 Strict" height="31" width="88"></a>
-</p>
-</body></html> \ No newline at end of file
+alt="Valid HTML 4.0 Strict" height="31" width="88"></a></p>
+</body>
+</html> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf
index e7aab67dff..2bfbd8a744 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html
index 2de1528db4..81cabe778f 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html
@@ -1,994 +1,1016 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN">
<html>
<head><title>Index</title>
-<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
+ <meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
</head>
<body>
-<h1>Index of the KOMA-Script Guide</h1>
-<p>This is an index of the elements defined at KOMA-Script. This index is related to the <a href="scrguien.pdf">KOMA-Script guide</a>. To improve the survey this index has serveral functional sections:</p>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#option">Options</a></li><li><a href="#macro">Commands</a></li><li><a href="#environment">Environments</a></li><li><a href="#length">Lengths</a></li><li><a href="#plength">Pseudolengths</a></li><li><a href="#variable">Variables</a></li><li><a href="#pagestyle">Page Styles</a></li><li><a href="#counter">Counter</a></li><li><a href="#floatstyle">Styles for the float Package</a></li></ul>
-<h2><a name="option">Options</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="option.12h"></a><a href="#option.12h">12h</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.option.12h">269</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.BCOR"></a><a href="#option.BCOR">BCOR</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.BCOR">33</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.DIV"></a><a href="#option.DIV">DIV</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.DIV">34</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.abstract">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">273</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">273</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">273</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">273</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.areasetadvanced"></a><a href="#option.areasetadvanced">areasetadvanced</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.areasetadvanced">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">448</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autoenlargeheadfoot"></a><a href="#option.autoenlargeheadfoot">autoenlargeheadfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autoenlargeheadfoot">239</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">254</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.automark">420</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">254</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autooneside">420</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">426</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.bibliography">147</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.captions">127</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists">100</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterentrydots">74</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.clausemark">301</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.cleardoublepage">215</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.cleardoublepage">86</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.contract">299</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">416</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.draft">161</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.draft">255</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.draft">278</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.draft">421</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.draft">56</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature">278</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">207</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firsthead">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fleqn">127</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">178</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fontsize">172</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.fontsize">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fontsize">57</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">260</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footheight"></a><a href="#option.footheight">footheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footheight">45</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footinclude"></a><a href="#option.footinclude">footinclude</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footinclude">42</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footlines"></a><a href="#option.footlines">footlines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footlines">45</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footnotes">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.footnotes">289</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footnotes">89</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footsepline">211</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">260</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footsepline">80</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">260</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">426</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromalign">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromemail">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromfax">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">191</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromphone">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromurl">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headheight"></a><a href="#option.headheight">headheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headheight">44</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headinclude"></a><a href="#option.headinclude">headinclude</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headinclude">42</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headings">96</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headlines"></a><a href="#option.headlines">headlines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headlines">44</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.headsepline">211</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">260</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headsepline">80</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">260</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">260</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.index">150</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.option.internalonly">332</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">301</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocindent">298</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">298</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratotoc">298</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.leqno">127</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.listof">142</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield">198</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">254</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.manualmark">420</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">255</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.markcase">421</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.mpinclude"></a><a href="#option.mpinclude">mpinclude</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.mpinclude">43</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.numbers">99</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">199</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsinit">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsselect">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.open">94</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.origlongtable">142</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.overfullrule"></a><a href="#option.overfullrule">overfullrule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.overfullrule">161</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.overfullrule">278</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.overfullrule">56</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">211</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.pagesize">49</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.pagestyleset"></a><a href="#option.pagestyleset">pagestyleset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.pagestyleset">251</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.paper">48</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.parnumber">302</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.parskip">209</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.parskip">77</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">262</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.priority">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.ref">306</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.refline">200</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.sectionentrydots">74</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.singlespacing"></a><a href="#option.singlespacing">singlespacing</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.singlespacing">415</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.subject">204</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.titlepage">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.titlepage">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.toc">72</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.twocolumn"></a><a href="#option.twocolumn">twocolumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twocolumn">41</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.twoside"></a><a href="#option.twoside">twoside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twoside">41</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.usegeometry"></a><a href="#option.usegeometry">usegeometry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.usegeometry">450</a></li>
-<li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.version">160</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.version">277</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.version">32</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.version">55</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="macro">Commands</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">425</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">431</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">425</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">431</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">425</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">431</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">425</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">431</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">416</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">416</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">416</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">417</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">417</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">417</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Address">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">149</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">\AfterCalculatingTypearea*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">343</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">344</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">346</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea*">\AfterSettingArea*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea*">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea">\AfterSettingArea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea">452</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">364</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">365</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">476</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">359</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">164</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">149</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">164</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">325</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">325</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">476</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">476</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">343</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">346</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">322</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">343</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">343</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">364</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">365</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">149</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.CenturyPart"></a><a href="#cmd.CenturyPart">\CenturyPart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.CenturyPart">263</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassName">\ClassName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ClassName">454</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clause">299</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">301</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">379</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Comment">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DayName"></a><a href="#cmd.DayName">\DayName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayName">264</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DayNameByNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNameByNumber">\DayNameByNumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber">264</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNumber">\DayNumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNumber">263</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DecadePart"></a><a href="#cmd.DecadePart">\DecadePart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DecadePart">263</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">400</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">306</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">400</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">459</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">469</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">385</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">459</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">469</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">398</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">\DeclareTOCStyleEntries</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">369</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">369</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">318</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">318</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">377</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">409</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">418</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">325</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCSKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCSKey">\FamilyCSKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCSKey">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">328</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">328</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">331</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">322</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">319</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">324</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">323</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">321</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">325</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">328</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">328</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">327</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">\FamilySetUseLengthMacro</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">\FamilyUnknownKeyValue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">330</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">\FamilyUseLengthMacroKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">329</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FirstName">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">416</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">416</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeI">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeII">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">424</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">428</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">409</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ISODayName"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayName">\ISODayName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayName">264</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ISODayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayNumber">\ISODayNumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber">263</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ISOToday"></a><a href="#cmd.ISOToday">\ISOToday</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISOToday">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">95</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">\IfIsAliaskomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">418</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">409</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">418</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">418</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">418</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle">418</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">270</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.IsoToday"></a><a href="#cmd.IsoToday">\IsoToday</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.IsoToday">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAClassName">\KOMAClassName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.KOMAClassName">454</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">340</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">340</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoption">159</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoption">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoption">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoption">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">32</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoption">393</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoption">397</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoption">438</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoption">54</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoptions">159</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoptions">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoptions">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoptions">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">32</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoptions">393</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoptions">397</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoptions">438</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions">54</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.LastName">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">380</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">380</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">380</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOption"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOption">\LoadLetterOption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOption">227</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOptions">\LoadLetterOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions">227</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.MakeMarkcase">255</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">365</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">421</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">400</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">417</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Name">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">350</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">350</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">400</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">459</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">469</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">400</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">441</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">411</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">412</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">459</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">469</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">321</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">416</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">348</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">347</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">348</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">351</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.SecDef"></a><a href="#cmd.SecDef">\SecDef</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.SecDef">476</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Sentence">304</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">351</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.SubClause">299</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">379</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">379</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">380</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">354</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Telephone">271</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">352</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">352</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">350</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">350</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">350</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">417</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XdivY">341</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XmodY">341</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart*">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">235</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrchar">270</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">233</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrentry">270</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec*">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsecmark">112</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">455</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.addtokomafont">240</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.addtokomafont">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.addtokomafont">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.addtokomafont">439</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">59</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontonearglist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">\addtokomafontonearglist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">158</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoplength">\addtoplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoplength">485</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">358</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">362</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">235</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrchar">270</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">232</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrentry">270</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.and">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.and">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.appendix">147</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">477</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.areaset"></a><a href="#cmd.areaset">\areaset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.areaset">451</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.areaset">46</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.author">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.author">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.autodot">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.automark*"></a><a href="#cmd.automark*">\automark*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark*">252</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark*">420</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">252</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark">420</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.backmatter">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.caption">130</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionabove">130</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">132</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelow">130</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">132</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionformat">137</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionof">132</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsacadian">\captionsacadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsacadian">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustralien">\captionsaustralien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustralien">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadian">\captionscanadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadian">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadien">\captionscanadien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadien">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsczech"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsczech">\captionsczech</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsczech">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrancais">\captionsfrancais</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrancais">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnewzealand">\captionsnewzealand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnewzealand">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsnswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnswissgerman">\captionsnswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnswissgerman">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionspolish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionspolish">\captionspolish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionspolish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsslovak">\captionsslovak</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsslovak">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.captionsswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswissgerman">\captionsswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswissgerman">503</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cc">169</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">248</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">246</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">245</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">243</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">250</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">249</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapapp">111</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">111</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">\chapterheadmidvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">473</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">473</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermark">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">83</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">250</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">249</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">\cleardoubleevenpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">\cleardoubleoddpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">433</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">448</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">448</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.clearpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.clearpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.clearpage">87</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">433</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">433</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing">166</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">248</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">246</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">245</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">243</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpagebottommargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagebottommargin">\coverpagebottommargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpageleftmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpageleftmargin">\coverpageleftmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpagerightmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagerightmargin">\coverpagerightmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.coverpagetopmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagetopmargin">\coverpagetopmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">410</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.date">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.date">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateacadian">\dateacadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateacadian">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustralien">\dateaustralien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustralien">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datecanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadian">\datecanadian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadian">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datecanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadien">\datecanadien</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadien">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateczech"></a><a href="#cmd.dateczech">\dateczech</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateczech">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datefrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrancais">\datefrancais</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrancais">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.datenewzealand">\datenewzealand</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenewzealand">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datenswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datenswissgerman">\datenswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenswissgerman">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datepolish"></a><a href="#cmd.datepolish">\datepolish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datepolish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.dateslovak">\dateslovak</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateslovak">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dateswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswissgerman">\dateswissgerman</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswissgerman">504</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dedication">286</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dedication">70</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname*">\defcaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname*">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnote">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnote">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote">91</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnotemark">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnotemark">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">91</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">433</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">365</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictum">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictum">292</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumauthorformat">292</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumrule">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumrule">292</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumwidth">292</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.documentclass">158</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.documentclass">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.documentclass">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.documentclass">295</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.documentclass">31</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.documentclass">392</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.documentclass">396</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.documentclass">438</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.documentclass">54</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">303</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.encl">171</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.extratitle">283</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.extratitle">66</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.figureformat">138</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.flushbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom">56</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnote">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnote">89</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotemark">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotemark">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotemark">89</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotetext">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotetext">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotetext">89</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footref">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footref">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footref">90</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.frontispiece"></a><a href="#cmd.frontispiece">\frontispiece</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.frontispiece">283</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontispiece">66</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontmatter">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.headmark">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">334</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">397</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">398</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">357</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">335</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">334</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">336</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">335</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">334</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">334</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">335</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">335</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">335</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">336</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">336</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">335</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">157</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">497</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">497</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">336</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">250</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">249</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr">334</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">334</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifthispageodd">210</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.ifthispageodd">286</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">79</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">368</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">332</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">250</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">249</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">83</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.item"></a><a href="#cmd.item">\item</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.item">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.item">220</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumi">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumi">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumii">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiii">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiv">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemi">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemi">220</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemii">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemii">220</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiii">220</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiv">220</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">409</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">407</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">407</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">407</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">407</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">407</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">407</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">248</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">246</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">424</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">430</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">424</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">430</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftmark">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">424</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">430</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">245</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">243</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">165</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">210</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listof/extension/name"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/extension/name">\listof/extension/name</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listof/extension/name">363</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">363</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoffigures">145</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoftables">145</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">363</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">363</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">248</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">246</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">245</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">243</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.lowertitleback">285</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">70</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.mainmatter">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.makenote*"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote*">\makenote*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote*">445</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">445</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.maketitle">283</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.maketitle">66</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">252</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.manualmark">420</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginline">146</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginline">224</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginline">294</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginpar">146</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginpar">224</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginpar">294</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">214</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markboth">423</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markboth">82</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markleft">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markright">214</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markright">423</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markright">82</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.minisec">106</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.mobilephonename"></a><a href="#cmd.mobilephonename">\mobilephonename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multfootsep">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multfootsep">289</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multfootsep">89</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">89</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.nameday"></a><a href="#cmd.nameday">\nameday</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.nameday">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">478</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname*">\newcaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname*">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newdaylanguage"></a><a href="#cmd.newdaylanguage">\newdaylanguage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.newdaylanguage">266</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">457</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">433</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.newplength">\newplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newplength">485</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.numberline">369</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">250</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">249</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">250</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">249</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening">166</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.pagemark">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">84</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagestyle">80</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph*">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmark">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.paragraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphtocdepth">\paragraphtocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphtocdepth">76</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">303</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformat">303</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">303</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parname">310</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parshortname">310</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part*">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">470</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">\partlineswithprefixformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">471</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmark">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmarkformat">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">83</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.parttocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.parttocdepth">\parttocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.parttocdepth">76</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname*">\providecaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname*">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">433</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ps">167</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.publishers">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.publishers">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putC">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLL">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLR">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUL">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUR">408</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedbottom">56</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">108</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">456</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictum">292</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">292</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumtext">292</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedfootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedfootnote">\raggedfootnote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedfootnote">219</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggedfootnote">291</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedfootnote">93</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedpart">108</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection">108</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">224</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.recalctypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.recalctypearea">\recalctypearea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea">40</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ref">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClause">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refL">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refN">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refPar">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParL">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParN">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParS">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refS">305</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentence">306</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">306</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">306</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">306</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">248</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">246</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">245</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">243</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">360</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname*">\renewcaptionname*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname*">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">337</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">433</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">\renewpairofpagestyles</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">432</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">424</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">430</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">424</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">430</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightmark">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">424</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">430</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">248</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">246</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">245</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">243</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">334</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifluatex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifluatex">\scr@ifluatex</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifluatex">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">333</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">332</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">476</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">426</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">426</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">426</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">427</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section*">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">475</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">475</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmark">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectiontocdepth">\sectiontocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectiontocdepth">76</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencename">310</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sentencenumberformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencenumberformat">\sentencenumberformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencenumberformat">304</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">310</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">148</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">140</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">138</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">138</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent">138</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">140</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">140</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcaptionalignment"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaptionalignment">\setcaptionalignment</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaptionalignment">141</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">140</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">114</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule">219</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">92</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">150</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont">240</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setkomafont">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.setkomafont">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.setkomafont">439</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont">59</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">156</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">156</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">158</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">458</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">114</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setplength">\setplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength">485</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtodepth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtodepth">\setplengthtodepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtodepth">485</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtoheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtoheight">\setplengthtoheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtoheight">485</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtototalheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtototalheight">\setplengthtototalheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtototalheight">485</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setplengthtowidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtowidth">\setplengthtowidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtowidth">485</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.settime"></a><a href="#cmd.settime">\settime</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.settime">268</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">366</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">451</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subject">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subject">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmark">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">\subparagraphtocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">76</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection*">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmark">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectiontocdepth">\subsectiontocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectiontocdepth">76</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">105</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection">101</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">109</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmark">423</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">422</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">\subsubsectiontocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">76</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subtitle">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subtitle">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">446</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">447</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableformat">138</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">75</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsubscript">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsubscript">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsubscript">58</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsuperscript">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsuperscript">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">58</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thanks">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thanks">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumi">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumi">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumii">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiii">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiv">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiv">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thefootnotemark">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thefootnotemark">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">91</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thepar">303</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thesentence">304</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">165</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">80</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thistime*"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime*">\thistime*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime*">268</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.thistime"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime">\thistime</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime">268</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.title">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.title">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlehead">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead">67</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">83</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook">\tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook">\tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">381</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">381</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">380</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/">\tocbasic@listhead@/extension/</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/">382</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">381</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">361</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.todaysname"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysname">\todaysname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysname">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.todaysnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysnumber">\todaysnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysnumber">265</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.toplevelpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.toplevelpagestyle">\toplevelpagestyle</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.toplevelpagestyle">410</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.typearea"></a><a href="#cmd.typearea">\typearea</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.typearea">40</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">366</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.uppertitleback">285</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">70</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">440</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">440</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefontofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefontofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefontofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefontofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefontofkomafont">440</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomafont">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usekomafont">240</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usekomafont">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usekomafont">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usekomafont">439</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont">59</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">496</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usepackage">158</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usepackage">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usepackage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usepackage">295</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.usepackage">31</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.usepackage">392</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.usepackage">396</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usepackage">438</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usepackage">54</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">158</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">440</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">440</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">298</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">440</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">64</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">369</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.withoutparnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.withoutparnumber">\withoutparnumber</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.withoutparnumber">303</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">502</a></li>
-<li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">502</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="environment">Environments</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.abstract">71</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin*">125</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin*">222</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin*">293</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin">125</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin">222</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin">293</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionbeside">134</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionofbeside">137</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.env.contract">299</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.description">120</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.description">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.enumerate">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.enumerate">221</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.itemize">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.itemize">220</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.labeling">121</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling">221</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.labeling">293</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.letter">163</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quotation">124</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quotation">222</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quote">124</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quote">222</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.titlepage">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.titlepage">65</a></li>
-<li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.verse">122</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.verse">222</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="length">Lengths</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">239</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.footheight">419</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.length.footheight">45</a></li>
-<li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">239</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.headheight">419</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="plength">Pseudolengths</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">495</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">489</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">489</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">489</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">488</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">488</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">488</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">489</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">489</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">488</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">488</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">492</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">493</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">493</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">493</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">493</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">494</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">494</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">494</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">494</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">494</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">487</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">490</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">490</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">491</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">490</a></li>
-<li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">490</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="variable">Variables</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">169</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer">200</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.date">199</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">171</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">207</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank">208</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">191</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname">182</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice">200</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.location">198</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref">200</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">214</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">214</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.place">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">201</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature">224</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject">204</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">204</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.title">203</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname">193</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">187</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">200</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref">200</a></li>
-<li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">193</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="pagestyle">Page Styles</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.@everystyle@"></a><a href="#pagestyle.@everystyle@">@everystyle@</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.@everystyle@">414</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.empty"></a><a href="#pagestyle.empty">empty</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.empty">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.empty">414</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.headings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.headings">headings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.headings">212</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.letter"></a><a href="#pagestyle.letter">letter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.letter">212</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.myheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.myheadings">myheadings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.myheadings">212</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.plain"></a><a href="#pagestyle.plain">plain</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.plain">212</a></li>
-<li><a name="pagestyle.scrheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.scrheadings">scrheadings</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings">242</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="counter">Counter</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.counter.letter">165</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.par">303</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth">113</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.sentence">304</a></li>
-<li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.counter.tocdepth">368</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth">76</a></li>
-</ul>
-<h2><a name="floatstyle">Styles for the float Package</a></h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">137</a></li>
-<li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> --&gt; <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">137</a></li>
-</ul>
-<p>
-<a href="http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer"><img
+ <h1>Index of the KOMA-Script Guide</h1>
+ <p>This is an index of the elements defined at KOMA-Script. This index is related to the <a href="scrguien.pdf">KOMA-Script guide</a>. To improve the survey this index has serveral functional sections:</p>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="#option">Options</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#macro">Commands</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#environment">Environments</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#length">Lengths</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#plength">Pseudolengths</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#variable">Variables</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#pagestyle">Page Styles</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#counter">Counter</a></li>
+ <li><a href="#floatstyle">Styles for the float Package</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="option">Options</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="option.12h"></a><a href="#option.12h">12h</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.option.12h">269</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.BCOR"></a><a href="#option.BCOR">BCOR</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.BCOR">34</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.DIV"></a><a href="#option.DIV">DIV</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.DIV">35</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.abstract">72</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">273</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">273</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">273</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">273</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix">96</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.areasetadvanced"></a><a href="#option.areasetadvanced">areasetadvanced</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.areasetadvanced">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">456</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autoenlargeheadfoot"></a><a href="#option.autoenlargeheadfoot">autoenlargeheadfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autoenlargeheadfoot">239</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">254</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.automark">427</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">254</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autooneside">427</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">433</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.bibliography">147</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.captions">127</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists">100</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterentrydots">75</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix">96</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.clausemark">301</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.cleardoublepage">215</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.cleardoublepage">87</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.contract">299</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">423</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.draft">161</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.draft">255</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.draft">278</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.draft">428</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.draft">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature">278</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">206</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firsthead">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fleqn">127</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">178</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fontsize">172</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.fontsize">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fontsize">58</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">260</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footheight"></a><a href="#option.footheight">footheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footheight">46</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footinclude"></a><a href="#option.footinclude">footinclude</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footinclude">43</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footlines"></a><a href="#option.footlines">footlines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footlines">46</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footnotes">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.footnotes">289</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footnotes">90</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footsepline">211</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">260</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footsepline">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">260</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">433</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromalign">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromemail">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromfax">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">191</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromphone">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromurl">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headheight"></a><a href="#option.headheight">headheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headheight">45</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headinclude"></a><a href="#option.headinclude">headinclude</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headinclude">43</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headings">97</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headlines"></a><a href="#option.headlines">headlines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headlines">45</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.headsepline">211</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">260</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headsepline">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">260</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">260</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.index">150</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.option.internalonly">332</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">301</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocindent">298</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">298</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratotoc">298</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.leqno">127</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.listof">142</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield">198</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">254</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.manualmark">427</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">255</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.markcase">428</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.mpinclude"></a><a href="#option.mpinclude">mpinclude</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.mpinclude">44</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.numbers">99</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">199</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">262</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsinit">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsselect">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.open">95</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.origlongtable">142</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.overfullrule"></a><a href="#option.overfullrule">overfullrule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.overfullrule">161</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.overfullrule">278</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.overfullrule">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">211</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.pagesize">50</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.pagestyleset"></a><a href="#option.pagestyleset">pagestyleset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.pagestyleset">251</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.paper">48</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.parnumber">302</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.parskip">209</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.parskip">78</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">261</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.priority">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.ref">306</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.refline">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.sectionentrydots">75</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.singlespacing"></a><a href="#option.singlespacing">singlespacing</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.singlespacing">422</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.subject">204</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.titlepage">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.titlepage">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.toc">73</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.twocolumn"></a><a href="#option.twocolumn">twocolumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twocolumn">42</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.twoside"></a><a href="#option.twoside">twoside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twoside">41</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.usegeometry"></a><a href="#option.usegeometry">usegeometry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.usegeometry">458</a></li>
+ <li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.version">160</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.version">277</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.version">33</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.version">56</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="macro">Commands</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">432</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">438</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">432</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">438</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">432</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">438</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">432</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">438</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">489</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">423</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">423</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">423</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">424</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">424</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">424</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Address">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddtoDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.AddtoDoHook">\AddtoDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AddtoDoHook">344</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook">\AddtoOneTimeDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook">344</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">149</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">\AfterCalculatingTypearea*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">348</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">349</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">351</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea*">\AfterSettingArea*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea*">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea">\AfterSettingArea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea">460</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">369</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">370</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">487</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">364</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">164</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">149</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">164</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions*">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">487</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">487</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">348</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">351</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">322</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">348</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">348</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">369</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">370</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">149</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.CenturyPart"></a><a href="#cmd.CenturyPart">\CenturyPart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.CenturyPart">263</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clause">299</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">301</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">386</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Comment">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DayName"></a><a href="#cmd.DayName">\DayName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayName">264</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DayNameByNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNameByNumber">\DayNameByNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber">264</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNumber">\DayNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNumber">263</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DecadePart"></a><a href="#cmd.DecadePart">\DecadePart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DecadePart">263</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">407</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">306</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">407</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">419</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">468</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">478</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">392</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">419</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">468</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">478</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">405</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">384</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">\DeclareTOCStyleEntries</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntries">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">318</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">318</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">384</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">384</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">384</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">384</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">384</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">384</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">416</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">419</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">425</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ExecuteDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.ExecuteDoHook">\ExecuteDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook">343</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyCSKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCSKey">\FamilyCSKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCSKey">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">328</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">331</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">322</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyInverseBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyInverseBoolKey">\FamilyInverseBoolKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyInverseBoolKey">327</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">319</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">327</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">324</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">323</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">321</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">325</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">328</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetInverseBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetInverseBool">\FamilySetInverseBool</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetInverseBool">327</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">327</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">\FamilySetUseLengthMacro</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetUseLengthMacro">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">\FamilyUnknownKeyValue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">330</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">\FamilyUseLengthMacroKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUseLengthMacroKey">329</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FirstName">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ForDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.ForDoHook">\ForDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ForDoHook">345</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">423</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">423</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeI">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeII">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">431</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">435</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">416</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">419</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ISODayName"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayName">\ISODayName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayName">264</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ISODayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayNumber">\ISODayNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber">263</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ISOToday"></a><a href="#cmd.ISOToday">\ISOToday</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISOToday">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfActiveMkBoth"></a><a href="#cmd.IfActiveMkBoth">\IfActiveMkBoth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.IfActiveMkBoth">336</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">96</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">466</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">\IfIsAliaskomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfIsAliaskomafont">466</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">425</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">416</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">425</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">425</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">425</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfSectionCommandStyleIs"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSectionCommandStyleIs">\IfSectionCommandStyleIs</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfSectionCommandStyleIs">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle">425</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfUseNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUseNumber">\IfUseNumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfUseNumber">486</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Ifplength"></a><a href="#cmd.Ifplength">\Ifplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.Ifplength">496</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">270</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.IsoToday"></a><a href="#cmd.IsoToday">\IsoToday</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.IsoToday">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">341</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">341</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoption">159</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoption">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoption">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoption">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">33</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoption">399</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoption">404</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoption">445</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoption">55</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoptions">159</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoptions">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoptions">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoptions">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">33</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoptions">399</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoptions">404</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoptions">445</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions">55</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.LastName">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">387</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">387</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">387</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOption"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOption">\LoadLetterOption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOption">227</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOptions">\LoadLetterOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions">227</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.MakeMarkcase">255</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">370</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">428</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">407</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">424</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayers">\ModifyLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayers">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Name">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">355</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">355</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">407</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">419</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">468</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">478</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">407</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">448</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">418</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">419</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">468</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">478</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">321</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">423</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">353</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">352</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">353</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">356</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.SecDef"></a><a href="#cmd.SecDef">\SecDef</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.SecDef">486</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Sentence">304</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.SplitDoHook"></a><a href="#cmd.SplitDoHook">\SplitDoHook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.SplitDoHook">345</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">356</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.SubClause">299</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">386</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">386</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">387</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">359</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Telephone">271</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">357</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">355</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">355</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">355</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">424</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XdivY">342</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XmodY">342</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*">106</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap">106</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">367</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart*">106</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart">106</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">235</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrchar">270</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">233</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrentry">270</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec*">106</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec">106</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsecmark">112</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">463</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">366</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.addtokomafont">240</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.addtokomafont">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.addtokomafont">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.addtokomafont">446</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">60</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontonearglist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">\addtokomafontonearglist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontonearglist">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">158</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoplength">\addtoplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoplength">496</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">363</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">367</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">367</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">235</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrchar">270</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">232</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrentry">270</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.and">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.and">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.appendix">147</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">487</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.areaset"></a><a href="#cmd.areaset">\areaset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.areaset">459</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.areaset">47</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.author">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.author">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.autodot">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.automark*"></a><a href="#cmd.automark*">\automark*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark*">252</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark*">427</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">252</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark">427</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.backmatter">94</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">489</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">489</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.caption">130</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionabove">130</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">132</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelow">130</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">132</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionformat">137</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionof">132</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsacadian">\captionsacadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsacadian">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustralien">\captionsaustralien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustralien">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionscanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadian">\captionscanadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadian">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionscanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadien">\captionscanadien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadien">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsczech"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsczech">\captionsczech</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsczech">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsfrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrancais">\captionsfrancais</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrancais">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnewzealand">\captionsnewzealand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnewzealand">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsnswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnswissgerman">\captionsnswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnswissgerman">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionspolish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionspolish">\captionspolish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionspolish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsslovak">\captionsslovak</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsslovak">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.captionsswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswissgerman">\captionsswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswissgerman">515</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cc">169</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">248</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">246</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">245</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">243</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">250</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">249</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapapp">111</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">111</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">\chapterheadmidvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">482</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">482</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermark">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">84</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">250</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">249</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">\cleardoubleevenpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">\cleardoubleoddpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">440</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">455</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">456</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.clearpage">216</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.clearpage">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.clearpage">88</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">440</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">440</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing">166</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">248</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">246</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">245</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">243</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpagebottommargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagebottommargin">\coverpagebottommargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagebottommargin">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpageleftmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpageleftmargin">\coverpageleftmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpageleftmargin">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpagerightmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagerightmargin">\coverpagerightmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagerightmargin">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.coverpagetopmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.coverpagetopmargin">\coverpagetopmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.coverpagetopmargin">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">417</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.date">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.date">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateacadian">\dateacadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateacadian">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustralien">\dateaustralien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustralien">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datecanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadian">\datecanadian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadian">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datecanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadien">\datecanadien</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadien">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateczech"></a><a href="#cmd.dateczech">\dateczech</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateczech">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datefrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrancais">\datefrancais</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrancais">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.datenewzealand">\datenewzealand</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenewzealand">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datenswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datenswissgerman">\datenswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenswissgerman">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datepolish"></a><a href="#cmd.datepolish">\datepolish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datepolish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.dateslovak">\dateslovak</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateslovak">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dateswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswissgerman">\dateswissgerman</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswissgerman">516</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dedication">286</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dedication">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname*">\defcaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname*">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnote">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnote">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote">92</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnotemark">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnotemark">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">92</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">440</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">370</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictum">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictum">292</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumauthorformat">292</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumrule">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumrule">292</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumwidth">292</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.documentclass">158</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.documentclass">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.documentclass">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.documentclass">295</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.documentclass">32</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.documentclass">398</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.documentclass">403</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.documentclass">445</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.documentclass">55</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">365</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">303</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.encl">171</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.extratitle">283</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.extratitle">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.figureformat">138</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.flushbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnote">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnote">90</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotemark">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotemark">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotemark">90</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotetext">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotetext">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotetext">90</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footref">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footref">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footref">91</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachemptykomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachemptykomavar">\foreachemptykomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachemptykomavar">509</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachkomavar">\foreachkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachkomavar">509</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachkomavarifempty"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachkomavarifempty">\foreachkomavarifempty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachkomavarifempty">509</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.foreachnonemptykomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.foreachnonemptykomavar">\foreachnonemptykomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.foreachnonemptykomavar">509</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.frontispiece"></a><a href="#cmd.frontispiece">\frontispiece</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.frontispiece">283</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontispiece">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontmatter">94</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.headmark">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">404</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">405</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">362</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">335</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">336</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">336</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">335</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">335</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">335</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">335</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">336</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">336</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">335</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">157</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">508</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">508</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">336</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">250</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">249</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifthispageodd">210</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.ifthispageodd">286</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">80</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">373</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">250</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">249</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">84</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.item"></a><a href="#cmd.item">\item</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.item">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.item">220</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumi">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumi">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumii">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiii">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiv">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemi">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemi">220</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemii">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemii">220</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiii">220</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiv">220</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">416</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">414</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">248</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">246</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">431</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">437</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">431</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">437</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftmark">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">431</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">437</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">245</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">243</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">165</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">210</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listof/extension/name"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/extension/name">\listof/extension/name</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listof/extension/name">368</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">368</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoffigures">145</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoftables">145</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">368</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">368</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">248</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">246</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">245</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">243</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.lowertitleback">285</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.mainmatter">94</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.makenote*"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote*">\makenote*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote*">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">452</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.maketitle">283</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.maketitle">67</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">252</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.manualmark">427</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginline">146</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginline">224</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginline">294</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginpar">146</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginpar">224</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginpar">294</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">214</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markboth">430</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markboth">83</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markleft">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markright">214</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markright">430</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markright">83</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.minisec">107</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.mobilephonename"></a><a href="#cmd.mobilephonename">\mobilephonename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multfootsep">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multfootsep">289</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multfootsep">90</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">217</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">90</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.nameday"></a><a href="#cmd.nameday">\nameday</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.nameday">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">489</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">489</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname*">\newcaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname*">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newdaylanguage"></a><a href="#cmd.newdaylanguage">\newdaylanguage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.newdaylanguage">266</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">465</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">440</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.newplength">\newplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newplength">496</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.numberline">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">250</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">249</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">250</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">249</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening">166</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.pagemark">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">85</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagestyle">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph*">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmark">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.paragraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphtocdepth">\paragraphtocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphtocdepth">77</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">303</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformat">303</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">303</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parname">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parshortname">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part*">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">479</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">\partlineswithprefixformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat">480</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmark">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmarkformat">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">84</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.parttocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.parttocdepth">\parttocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.parttocdepth">77</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname*">\providecaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname*">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">440</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ps">167</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.publishers">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.publishers">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putC">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLL">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLR">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUL">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUR">415</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedbottom">57</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">108</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">464</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictum">292</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">292</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumtext">292</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedfootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedfootnote">\raggedfootnote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedfootnote">219</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggedfootnote">291</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedfootnote">94</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedpart">108</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection">108</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">224</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.recalctypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.recalctypearea">\recalctypearea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea">40</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ref">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClause">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refL">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refN">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refPar">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParL">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParN">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParS">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refS">305</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentence">306</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">306</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">306</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">306</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">248</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">246</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">245</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">243</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">365</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname*">\renewcaptionname*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname*">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">338</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">440</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">\renewpairofpagestyles</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">439</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">431</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">437</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">431</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">437</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">256</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightmark">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">431</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">437</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">248</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">246</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">245</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">243</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifluatex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifluatex">\scr@ifluatex</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifluatex">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">334</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">333</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">486</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">433</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">433</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">433</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">434</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section*">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">484</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">484</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmark">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectiontocdepth">\sectiontocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectiontocdepth">77</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencename">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sentencenumberformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencenumberformat">\sentencenumberformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencenumberformat">304</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">310</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">148</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">140</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">138</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">138</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent">138</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">140</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">140</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcaptionalignment"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaptionalignment">\setcaptionalignment</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaptionalignment">141</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">140</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">114</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule">219</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">93</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">151</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont">240</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setkomafont">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.setkomafont">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.setkomafont">446</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont">60</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">156</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">156</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">158</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">467</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">114</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setplength">\setplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength">496</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtodepth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtodepth">\setplengthtodepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtodepth">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtoheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtoheight">\setplengthtoheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtoheight">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtototalheight"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtototalheight">\setplengthtototalheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtototalheight">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setplengthtowidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setplengthtowidth">\setplengthtowidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplengthtowidth">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.settime"></a><a href="#cmd.settime">\settime</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.settime">268</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">371</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">459</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subject">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subject">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmark">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subparagraphtocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">\subparagraphtocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphtocdepth">77</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection*">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmark">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectiontocdepth">\subsectiontocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectiontocdepth">77</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">105</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection">101</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">109</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">258</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmark">430</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">257</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">429</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">\subsubsectiontocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectiontocdepth">77</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subtitle">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subtitle">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">453</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">455</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableformat">138</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">76</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsubscript">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsubscript">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsubscript">59</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsuperscript">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsuperscript">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">59</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thanks">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thanks">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumi">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumi">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumii">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiii">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiii">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiv">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiv">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thefootnotemark">218</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thefootnotemark">290</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">92</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thepar">303</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thesentence">304</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">165</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">81</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thistime*"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime*">\thistime*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime*">268</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.thistime"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime">\thistime</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime">268</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.title">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.title">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlehead">284</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead">68</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">84</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook">\tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook">\tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">388</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">388</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">387</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/">\tocbasic@listhead@/extension/</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/">389</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">388</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">366</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.todaysname"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysname">\todaysname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysname">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.todaysnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysnumber">\todaysnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysnumber">265</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.toplevelpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.toplevelpagestyle">\toplevelpagestyle</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.toplevelpagestyle">417</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.typearea"></a><a href="#cmd.typearea">\typearea</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.typearea">40</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">371</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.uppertitleback">285</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">71</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">447</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">447</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefontofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefontofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefontofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefontofkomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefontofkomafont">447</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomafont">175</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usekomafont">240</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usekomafont">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usekomafont">296</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usekomafont">446</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont">60</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">508</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">157</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">508</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usepackage">158</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usepackage">238</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usepackage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usepackage">295</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.usepackage">32</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.usepackage">398</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.usepackage">403</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usepackage">445</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usepackage">55</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">158</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">447</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">447</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">178</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">281</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">297</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">447</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">65</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">374</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.withoutparnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.withoutparnumber">\withoutparnumber</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.withoutparnumber">303</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">514</a></li>
+ <li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">514</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="environment">Environments</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.abstract">72</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin*">125</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin*">222</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin*">293</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin">125</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin">222</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin">293</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionbeside">134</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionofbeside">137</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.env.contract">299</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.description">120</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.description">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.enumerate">119</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.enumerate">221</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.itemize">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.itemize">220</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.labeling">121</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling">221</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.labeling">293</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.letter">163</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quotation">124</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quotation">222</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quote">124</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quote">222</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.titlepage">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.titlepage">66</a></li>
+ <li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.verse">122</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.verse">222</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="length">Lengths</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">239</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.footheight">426</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.length.footheight">46</a></li>
+ <li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">239</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.headheight">426</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="plength">Pseudolengths</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">502</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">507</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">500</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">501</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">501</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">505</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">504</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">503</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">506</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">505</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">499</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">498</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">501</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">501</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">502</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">501</a></li>
+ <li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">502</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="variable">Variables</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">169</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.date">199</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">171</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">207</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank">208</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">191</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname">182</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.location">198</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">214</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">214</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.place">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">201</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature">224</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject">204</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">204</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.title">203</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname">193</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">187</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref">200</a></li>
+ <li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">193</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="pagestyle">Page Styles</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.@everystyle@"></a><a href="#pagestyle.@everystyle@">@everystyle@</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.@everystyle@">421</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.empty"></a><a href="#pagestyle.empty">empty</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.empty">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.pagestyle.empty">421</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.headings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.headings">headings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.headings">213</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.letter"></a><a href="#pagestyle.letter">letter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.letter">213</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.myheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.myheadings">myheadings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.myheadings">213</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.plain"></a><a href="#pagestyle.plain">plain</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.pagestyle.plain">213</a></li>
+ <li><a name="pagestyle.scrheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.scrheadings">scrheadings</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings">242</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="counter">Counter</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.counter.letter">165</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.par">303</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth">113</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.sentence">304</a></li>
+ <li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.counter.tocdepth">374</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth">77</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <h2><a name="floatstyle">Styles for the float Package</a></h2>
+ <ul>
+ <li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">137</a></li>
+ <li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> &rarr;&nbsp;<a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">137</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ <p><a href="http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer"><img
src="http://www.w3.org/Icons/valid-html40"
-alt="Valid HTML 4.0 Strict" height="31" width="88"></a>
-</p>
-</body></html> \ No newline at end of file
+alt="Valid HTML 4.0 Strict" height="31" width="88"></a></p>
+</body>
+</html> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf
index 14dcaaff0c..425803a12c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf
index 26b59fc214..458ebc9c6a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdf
index 61d640eb25..57ba1f7808 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdf
index 1bece2a81e..1325378010 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/tocstyle.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide
index 453e0286d2..0956492f51 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/Makefile.guide
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# ======================================================================
# Makefile.guide
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
#
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
# This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Makefile.guide
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
# Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -290,7 +290,9 @@ $(PLENGTH_DTX_RESULT): $(PLENGTH_DTX)
$(PLENGTH_PDF): $(PLENGTH_DTX_RESULT)
$(MPOST) $(addsuffix .mp,$(basename $@))
$(MPTOPDF) $(addsuffix .mp,$(basename $@))
- $(MV) $(addsuffix .pdf,$(basename $@)-1) $@
+ @if [ -r $(addsuffix .pdf,$(basename $@)-1)];\
+ then $(MV) $(addsuffix .pdf,$(basename $@)-1) $@;\
+ fi
$(PDF_EPS): $(PDF_EPS_SRC)
$(EPSTOPDF) $(addsuffix .eps,$(basename $@))
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl
index da8837f895..a101681f5b 100755
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ eval 'exec perl -S $0 ${1+"$@"}'
# ======================================================================
# genhtmlidx.pl
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
#
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ eval 'exec perl -S $0 ${1+"$@"}'
# This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------
# genhtmlidx.pl
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
# Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -63,6 +63,7 @@ my @floatstyle;
my @fontelement;
my @file;
my @length;
+my @dohook;
my $baselink;
my $htmlhead;
@@ -122,6 +123,8 @@ while ( $auxfile=shift ) {
push @file,$entry;
} elsif ( "$2" eq "length" ) {
push @length,$entry;
+ } elsif ( "$2" eq "dohook" ) {
+ push @dohook,$entry;
} else {
print STDERR "Unknown type $2!\n";
}
@@ -143,8 +146,8 @@ sub process {
my $lastlink="";
my $pageprefix="";
if ( @entries > 0 ) {
- print "<h2><a name=\"$group\">$titles{$group}</a></h2>\n";
- print "<ul>\n";
+ print " <h2><a name=\"$group\">$titles{$group}</a></h2>\n";
+ print " <ul>\n";
map {
$_ =~ /^([^.]+)\.([^.]+)\.([^.]+)\.([^.]+)$/;
if ( $entry ne $1 ) {
@@ -153,7 +156,7 @@ sub process {
$lastpage="";
$lastlink="";
$pageprefix="";
- print "<li><a name=\"$4.$entry\"></a><a href=\"\#$4.$entry\">$prefix$entry</a> --&gt; ";
+ print " <li><a name=\"$4.$entry\"></a><a href=\"\#$4.$entry\">$prefix$entry</a> &rarr;&nbsp;";
}
if ( ( $lastlink ne "$3.$4.$1" ) || ( $lastpage ne "$2" ) ) {
print "$pageprefix<a href=\"$baselink\#desc:$3.$4.$1\">$2</a>";
@@ -163,25 +166,26 @@ sub process {
}
} @entries;
print "</li>\n" if ( $entry ne "" );
- print "</ul>\n";
+ print " </ul>\n";
}
}
print $htmlhead;
-print "<ul>\n";
-print "<li><a href=\"#option\">$titles{option}</a></li>" if ( @option );
-print "<li><a href=\"#macro\">$titles{macro}</a></li>" if ( @macro );
-print "<li><a href=\"#environment\">$titles{environment}</a></li>" if ( @environment );
-print "<li><a href=\"#length\">$titles{length}</a></li>" if ( @length );
-print "<li><a href=\"#plength\">$titles{plength}</a></li>" if ( @plength );
-print "<li><a href=\"#variable\">$titles{variable}</a></li>" if ( @variable );
-print "<li><a href=\"#pagestyle\">$titles{pagestyle}</a></li>" if ( @pagestyle );
-print "<li><a href=\"#counter\">$titles{counter}</a></li>" if ( @counter );
-print "<li><a href=\"#floatstyle\">$titles{floatstyle}</a></li>" if ( @floatstyle );
-#print "<li><a href=\"#fontelement\">$titles{fontelement}</a></li>" if ( @fontelement );
-#print "<li><a href=\"#file\">$titles{file}</a></li>" if ( @fontelement );
-print "</ul>\n";
+print " <ul>\n";
+print " <li><a href=\"#option\">$titles{option}</a></li>\n" if ( @option );
+print " <li><a href=\"#macro\">$titles{macro}</a></li>\n" if ( @macro );
+print " <li><a href=\"#environment\">$titles{environment}</a></li>\n" if ( @environment );
+print " <li><a href=\"#length\">$titles{length}</a></li>\n" if ( @length );
+print " <li><a href=\"#plength\">$titles{plength}</a></li>\n" if ( @plength );
+print " <li><a href=\"#variable\">$titles{variable}</a></li>\n" if ( @variable );
+print " <li><a href=\"#pagestyle\">$titles{pagestyle}</a></li>\n" if ( @pagestyle );
+print " <li><a href=\"#counter\">$titles{counter}</a></li>\n" if ( @counter );
+print " <li><a href=\"#floatstyle\">$titles{floatstyle}</a></li>\n" if ( @floatstyle );
+#print " <li><a href=\"#fontelement\">$titles{fontelement}</a></li>\n" if ( @fontelement );
+#print " <li><a href=\"#file\">$titles{file}</a></li>\n" if ( @file );
+#print " <li><a href=\"#dohook\">$titles{dohook}</a></li>\n" if ( @dohook );
+print " </ul>\n";
process "option","",\@option;
process "macro","\\",\@macro;
@@ -193,5 +197,9 @@ process "pagestyle","",\@pagestyle;
process "counter","",\@counter;
process "floatstyle","",\@floatstyle;
#process "fontelement","",\@fontelement;
+print STDERR "Ignoring index: $titles{fontelement}\n" if ( @fontelement );
#process "file","",\@file;
+print STDERR "Ignoring index: $titles{files}\n" if ( @file );
+#process "dohook","",\@dohook;
+print STDERR "Ignoring index: $titles{dohook}\n" if ( @dohook );
print $htmlend;
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex
index 75b9b8f392..deb207aa32 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/adrconvnote.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% adrconvnote.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% adrconvnote.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,13 +46,13 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{adrconvnote.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: adrconv)]
\translator{Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-29
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{Creating Address Files from an Address Database}%
\labelbase{addrconv}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex
index bed043d8d3..e1f7d4471c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-compatibility.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-compatibility.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-compatibility.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-compatibility.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-28 13:23:23 +0100 (Wed, 28 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-30
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of \KOMAScript}
\seclabel{compatibilityOptions}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex
index 5dff550ac7..682ca39163 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-dictum.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-dictum.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-dictum.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-dictum.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-29
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Dicta}
\seclabel{dictum}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex
index 383c9236c5..e693714e39 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-draftmode.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-draftmode.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-draftmode.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-draftmode.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-28 13:23:23 +0100 (Wed, 28 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-30
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Draft Mode}
\seclabel{draft}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex
index 843f9482f2..ed37da5934 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-fontsize.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-fontsize.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-fontsize.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-fontsize.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: fontsize)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2017-12-13
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\section{Choosing the Document Font Size}
\seclabel{fontOptions}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex
index c08b203b29..3eb44965c1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-footnotes.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-footnotes.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-footnotes.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-footnotes.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: Footnotes)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-29
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Footnotes}
\seclabel{footnotes}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex
index 8f9fcbb946..2e39697578 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-headfootheight.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-headfootheight.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-headfootheight.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-28 13:23:23 +0100 (Wed, 28 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Head and Foot Height)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert\and Jens H\"uhne\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-16
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Header and Footer Height}
\seclabel{height}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex
index 36f9fb4ae4..0f1fe6a0d6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-interleafpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-interleafpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-interleafpage.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: Interleaf Pages)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2017-12-07
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\section{Interleaf Pages}
\seclabel{emptypage}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex
index 79a0a697fd..9b18e0551e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-lists.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-lists.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-lists.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-lists.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-06
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Lists}
\seclabel{lists}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex
index 05e2bdd1f3..22669838cb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-marginpar.tex
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-marginpar.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:29:44 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-29
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Marginal Notes}
\seclabel{marginNotes}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex
index 04ff2b91ac..8617a74e52 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-oddorevenpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-oddorevenpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-oddorevenpage.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Detection of Odd and
Even Pages)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-30
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Detecting Odd and Even Pages}
\seclabel{oddOrEven}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex
index fff22502bb..b8c4d5fb70 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-options.tex
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-10-23
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\section{Early or Late Selection of Options}
\seclabel{options}
@@ -140,18 +140,14 @@ described in \cite{latex:usrguide} or any introduction to \LaTeX, for example
\par
}{}
-% Umbruchoptimierung!!!
-\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{Setting the options with
- \Macro{documentclass} has one\textnote{Attention!} major disadvantage: %
-}{%
- Note that \Macro{documentclass} has one drawback when using the option
- interface described bellow\textnote{Attention!}: %
-}%
-unlike the interface described below, the options in \Macro{documentclass} are
-not robust. So commands, lengths, counters, and such constructs may break
-inside the optional argument of this command. For example, with many
-non-\KOMAScript{} classes, using a \LaTeX{} length in the value of an option
-results in an error%
+% The alternative text for wrapping optimization was redundant and, as
+% it's not required for the English version, has been deleted.
+Setting the options with \Macro{documentclass} has one\textnote{Attention!}
+major disadvantage: unlike the interface described below, the options in
+\Macro{documentclass} are not robust. So commands, lengths, counters, and
+similar constructs may break inside the optional argument of this command.
+For example, with many non-\KOMAScript{} classes, using a \LaTeX{} length
+in the value of an option results in an error%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{ before the value is passed
to a \KOMAScript{} package and it can take control of the option
execution}{}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
index 3a3933167d..3814320ed6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
Setting up defined page styles)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date version of the translated file: 2018-02-05
+% Date version of the translated file: 2019-10-09
\section{Manipulating Page Styles}
\seclabel{pagestyle.content}
@@ -1031,7 +1031,6 @@
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex"
%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex
index 647d09dde3..4f6ca3c703 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-parmarkup.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-parmarkup.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-parmarkup.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Paragraph Markup)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-31
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Marking Paragraphs}
\seclabel{parmarkup}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex
index 49cbe456ed..61e26626b1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-textmarkup.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:29:44 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-07-20
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\section{Text Markup}
\seclabel{textmarkup}%
@@ -782,13 +782,13 @@ size and the baseline skip.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrjura}{%
\par%
However, the misuse of the font settings is strongly discouraged (see
- \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.fonts},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist})!%
}{%
\par%
However, you should not take these commands as legitimizing the insertion
of arbitrary commands in an element's font setting. To do so can lead
- quickly to errors (see \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ quickly to errors (see \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.fonts},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist}).%
}%
}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex
index e061743806..3baf017cb6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-titles.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-titles.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-titles.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,13 +46,13 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-titles.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-30
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Document Titles}
\seclabel{titlepage}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex
index 30b89d0331..587513ee0d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/common-typearea.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-typearea.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-typearea.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-typearea.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 09:37:06 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: typearea)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-01
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\section{Page Layout}
\seclabel{typearea}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex
index edebaee2b9..6e16884217 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/guide-english.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% guide-english.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% guide-english.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
% ======================================================================
%
\KOMAProvidesFile{guide-english.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-21 10:37:34 +0100 (Wed, 21 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-02-20 12:41:53 +0100 (Wed, 20 Feb 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide language dependencies]
%
% \section{Extra Packages}
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\GuideVariable}
% \begin{macro}{\GuideVariableIndexCategory}
% \begin{macro}{\GuideVariableIndexCategoryExpanded}
-% The termo ``variable''.
+% The term ``variable''.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\GuideVariable}{variable}
\newcommand*{\GuideVariableIndexCategory}{variables}
@@ -313,6 +313,19 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\GuideHook}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuideHookIndexCategory}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuideHookIndexCategoryEpanded}
+% The term ``hook''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\GuideHook}{hook}
+\newcommand*{\GuideHookIndexCategory}{hooks}
+\let\GuideHookIndexCategoryExpanded\GuideHookIndexCategory
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\GuideAnd}
% The ``and'' at a list of two.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -351,6 +364,8 @@
% \begin{macro}{\GuidefilIndexShort}
% \begin{macro}{\GuideoptIndex}
% \begin{macro}{\GuideoptIndexShort}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuidehokIndex}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuidehokIndexShort}
% The titles and short titles of each single index.
\newcommand*{\GuidegenIndex}{General Index}%
\newcommand*{\GuidecmdIndex}{Index of Commands, Environments, and Variables}%
@@ -364,6 +379,10 @@
\newcommand*{\GuidefilIndexShort}{Index of Files, etc.}%
\newcommand*{\GuideoptIndex}{Index of Class and Package Options}%
\newcommand*{\GuideoptIndexShort}{Index of Options}%
+\newcommand*{\GuidehokIndex}{Index of Do-Hooks}
+\let\GuidehokIndexShort\GuidehokIndex
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup
index 8c30c6ed56..7364ac8bce 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/htmlsetup
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# ======================================================================
# htmlsetup
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
#
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
# This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------
# htmlsetup
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
# Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -39,18 +39,17 @@ $baselink="scrguien.pdf";
$htmlhead="<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN\">
<html>
<head><title>Index</title>
-<meta http-equiv=\"content-type\" content=\"text/html; charset=utf-8\">
+ <meta http-equiv=\"content-type\" content=\"text/html; charset=utf-8\">
</head>
<body>
-<h1>Index of the KOMA-Script Guide</h1>
-<p>This is an index of the elements defined at KOMA-Script. This index is related to the <a href=\"scrguien.pdf\">KOMA-Script guide</a>. To improve the survey this index has serveral functional sections:</p>
+ <h1>Index of the KOMA-Script Guide</h1>
+ <p>This is an index of the elements defined at KOMA-Script. This index is related to the <a href=\"scrguien.pdf\">KOMA-Script guide</a>. To improve the survey this index has serveral functional sections:</p>
";
-$htmlend="<p>
-<a href=\"http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer\"><img
+$htmlend=" <p><a href=\"http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer\"><img
src=\"http://www.w3.org/Icons/valid-html40\"
-alt=\"Valid HTML 4.0 Strict\" height=\"31\" width=\"88\"></a>
-</p>
-</body></html>";
+alt=\"Valid HTML 4.0 Strict\" height=\"31\" width=\"88\"></a></p>
+</body>
+</html>";
%titles=( "option" => "Options",
"macro" => "Commands",
"environment" => "Environments",
@@ -60,6 +59,7 @@ alt=\"Valid HTML 4.0 Strict\" height=\"31\" width=\"88\"></a>
"pagestyle" => "Page Styles",
"counter" => "Counter",
"floatstyle" => "Styles for the float Package",
- "fontelement" => "Elements (Font May Be Changed)" );
+ "fontelement" => "Elements (Font May Be Changed)",
+ "dohook" => "Do-Hooks for Low-Level Manipulation" );
# end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex
index 9331720287..610cef80df 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/introduction.tex
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{introduction.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:39:58 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide introduction]
\translator{Kevin Pfeiffer\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and
Krickette Murabayashi\and Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-05
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{Introduction}
\labelbase{introduction}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex
index 6503afae06..0a7bdcb757 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/japanlco.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% japanlco.tex
-% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug and Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug and Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% japanlco.tex
-% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug und Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug und Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel ueber japanische Papierformate, Umschläge und Briefe
+% Kapitel ueber japanische Papierformate, Umschlaege und Briefe
% Verwaltet von Gernot Hassenplug (mit Unterstuetzung von Markus Kohm)
%
% ======================================================================
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
%
\KOMAProvidesFile{japanlco.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-21 10:37:34 +0100 (Wed, 21 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (appendix: japanlco)]
\appendix
@@ -596,6 +596,5 @@ fit the required envelope.
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex
index 873f303987..3c83ac1ff1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/preface.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% preface.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% preface.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -36,11 +36,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{preface.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-28 11:44:09 +0200 (Wed, 28 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
Preface to version 3.25]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-03-12
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\addchap{Preface to \KOMAScript~3.25}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex
index ac5ef90a5e..50543b2b4b 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scraddr.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scraddr.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scraddr.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scraddr.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-27 11:46:14 +0200 (Tue, 27 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scraddr)]
\translator{Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Karl
Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-05
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{Accessing Address Files with \Package{scraddr}}%
\labelbase{scraddr}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex
index 80ed5b2b03..2b7fadda1a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbase.tex
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrbase.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:29:44 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script package scrbase]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Melvin Hendrix\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-08-27
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\chapter{Basic Functions in the \Package{scrbase} Package}
\labelbase{scrbase}
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ The options provided by \Package{scrbase} also use \Package{keyval} syntax:
\PName{key}\texttt{=}\PName{value}.
-\section{Keys as Attributes of Families and their Members}
+\section{Keys as Attributes of Families and Their Members}
\seclabel{keyvalue}
As already mentioned in \autoref{sec:scrbase.loadit}, \Package{scrbase} uses
@@ -238,8 +238,8 @@ predefined states should be sufficient.
If the key is used later, one of the permitted values, or no value, must be
used. In the second case, the default \PName{true} value will be used.
- The definitions for the other packages are similar. Only ``\texttt{salami}''
- has to be replaced by the respective names.
+ The definitions for the other packages are nearly identical. Only the string
+ ``\texttt{salami}'' has to be replaced.
\end{Example}
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -373,9 +373,10 @@ If\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{scrbase}} you call \Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions}
with an unknown option inside the \PName{options list}, you will get an error.
An exception to this rule occurs when the \PName{member} has an option called
\Option{@else@}. In this case, the \Option{@else@} option will be used instead
-of the unknown option. \KOMAScript{} itself uses this feature, for example
-inside the definition of sectioning commands, to evaluate the style option
-before all other attributes.
+of the unknown one. The value passed to the \Option{@else@} option is the
+unknown option with the value specified in the call. \KOMAScript{} itself uses
+this feature, for example inside the definition of sectioning commands,
+to evaluate the style option before all other attributes.
You can also use this command inside the code executed when processing the
option.%
@@ -451,9 +452,17 @@ members returns an error through \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}.
ensures that its own \Option{coldcuts} option has already been redefined.
This avoids endless recursion.
\end{Example}
-%
+
+Like\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}}
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions}, \Macro{FamilyOptions} offers
+special handling for an option named
+\Option{@else@}\important{\Option{@else@}}. If a family member has such an
+option, it will be executed whenever an option in the \PName{option list} is
+unrecognized by the member. If the family itself defines an option
+\Option{@else@}, it will only be called if neither the family nor any of its
+members were able to fully process the given option by executing
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed}.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Umbruchkorrektur wegen Beispiel am Ende
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -499,7 +508,9 @@ described for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions}.
{ingredient}{onions,gherkins}
\end{lstcode}
\end{Example}
-%
+
+An\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} \Option{@else@} option is processed
+in the same manner as with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -615,8 +626,24 @@ message about an unknown value assignment is printed if necessary (see also
\Macro{ifx} at this point. Fully expanding tests like \Macro{ifstr} should
be avoided here. Depending on the current status and the comparison status,
they can lead to different error messages as well as incorrect results.
-\end{Example}
-%
+\end{Example}%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{FamilyInverseBoolKey}\OParameter{member}\Parameter{family}
+ \Parameter{key}\Parameter{switch name}
+ \Macro{FamilySetInverseBool}\Parameter{family}
+ \Parameter{key}\Parameter{switch name}
+ \Parameter{value}
+\end{Declaration}
+These\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} two commands differ from
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey} and
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool}, respectively, only in that the
+logic is inverted. This means that the values \PValue{true}, \PValue{yes}, and
+\PValue{on} set the boolean switch given by \PName{switch name} to
+\Macro{iffalse} and therefore deactivate it. The values \PValue{false},
+\PValue{no}, and \PValue{off} set the boolean switch to \Macro{iftrue} and
+therefore activate it.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -763,13 +790,13 @@ is called applies.%
\OParameter{default}\Parameter{macro}
\Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro}\Parameter{family}
\Parameter{key}\Parameter{macro}
- \Parameter{value}%
+ \Parameter{value}
\Macro{FamilyUseLengthMacroKey}\OParameter{member}\Parameter{family}
\Parameter{key}
\OParameter{default}\Parameter{macro}
\Macro{FamilySetUseLengthMacro}\Parameter{family}
\Parameter{key}\Parameter{macro}
- \Parameter{value}%
+ \Parameter{value}
\end{Declaration}
With\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{FamilyLengthKey}, you can
define a \PName{key} that represents a \PName{length}. It does not matter
@@ -1313,6 +1340,67 @@ corresponding internal command.%
\EndIndexGroup
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{IfActiveMkBoth}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}
+\end{Declaration}
+The\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} \LaTeX{} kernel uses
+\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth}\important{\Macro{@mkboth}}\IndexCmd{@mkboth} to
+distinguish between automatic and manual running heads. Usually, it sets both
+marks with automatic running heads. With manual running heads, it does not set
+any mark. To determine whether automatic running heads are active, many
+packages compare \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} with either
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} or \Macro{@gobbletwo}. But
+this does not account for all cases in which \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth}
+may be redefined. Therefore \Macro{IfActiveMkBoth} tests if
+\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} would actually set a mark, even when
+\Macro{marks} appears in the definition of \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth}. If
+such an active \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} is detected, the
+\PName{then code} is executed. In all other cases, the \PName{else code} is
+used.%
+\begin{Example}
+ For example, suppose you want to set the right mark if and only if
+ automatic running heads are used, e.\,g., the pagestyle
+ \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}. For a first attempt,
+ you might use:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \ifx\@mkboth\markboth \markright{running head}\fi
+\end{lstcode}
+ Later you discover that some package does not use the usual
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \let\@mkboth\markboth
+\end{lstcode}
+ but
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \renewcommand{\@mkboth}{\markboth}
+\end{lstcode}
+ to activate automatic running heads. Because of this, your comparison always
+ fails and never calls \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markright}. To solve this, you
+ try the following change:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \ifx\@mkboth\@gobbletwo\else \markright{running head}\fi
+\end{lstcode}
+ Unfortunately, now \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markright} is also called for
+ manual running heads, because someone has defined
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \renewcommand{\@mkboth}[2]{%
+ \typeout{DEBUG: ignoring running head setting}%
+ }
+\end{lstcode}
+ for this case.
+
+ Fortunately, both problems are easy to solve with \Package{scrbase}:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \IfActiveMKBoth{\markright{Kolumnentitel}}{}
+\end{lstcode}%
+\end{Example}
+By the way, an even simpler solution for the problem in the example
+would be to use \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkright} from package
+\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}} (see
+\autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyle.content},
+\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkright}).%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
\section{Defining Language-Dependent Terms}
\seclabel{languageSupport}
\BeginIndexGroup
@@ -1628,10 +1716,9 @@ correctly. Sometimes additional operators would be useful.
\Macro{XdivY}\Parameter{dividend}\Parameter{divisor}%
\Macro{XmodY}\Parameter{dividend}\Parameter{divisor}%
\end{Declaration}%
-The command\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrbase}}
-\Macro{XdivY} returns the value of the integer quotient, with command
-\Macro{XmodY} giving the value of the remainder. This type of of division is
-defined by the equation
+The\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{XdivY} command returns the
+value of the integer quotient, with the \Macro{XmodY} command giving the value
+of the remainder. This type of of division is defined by the equation
\[
\textit{dividend} = \textit{divisor} \cdot
\textit{integer quotient} + \textit{remainder}
@@ -1645,9 +1732,236 @@ using \Macro{numexpr}. To output the value as an Arabic number, you must
prefix it with \Macro{the}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\section[{General Mechanism for Multi-Level Hooks}]
+{General Mechanism for Multi-Level
+ Hooks\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}}}
+\seclabel{hooks}
+
+\BeginIndexGroup
+\BeginIndex{}{Hooks}
+The \LaTeX{} kernel provides a few \emph{hooks} in the processing of
+a document where additional code can be inserted. Class and package authors
+should be very familiar with \Macro{AtBeginDocument} and
+\Macro{AtEndDocument}. \KOMAScript{} offers similar features in some places,
+for example to hook code into the execution of
+\hyperref[sec:maincls.structure]{sectioning commands}. Over the years, there
+have been two problems:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item There are never enough hooks.
+ \item There is some code that should only be executed once, as if it almost
+ drops off the hook, as well as code that must be executed each time the
+ hook is encountered, thus remaining permanently on the hook.
+\end{itemize}
+Usually, to define a single hook you must define a command that collects the
+code for each hook. This code is then stored in another internal macro, which
+must be inserted at the point where the collected code is executed. The more
+hooks you insert, the more such commands there are. To allow for both
+single-use code and permanent code may even require two hooks, and therefore
+twice the number of commands to be defined.
+
+The example of sectioning commands shows that the first problem can sometimes
+be exacerbated by having only a single point for code execution. One package
+author may need only one way to execute the same code for all sectioning
+commands. Another package author would prefer to execute different code for
+certain sectioning commands only. Meeting both these demands would require a
+general hook as well as a hook for each sectioning command. These requirements
+are doubled again because of the second problem.
+
+\KOMAScript{} therefore offers a generalized hook mechanism in
+\Package{scrbase} that provides multi-level hooks for both single-use and
+persistent code. These hooks are named \emph{do-hooks} because of their
+implementation. From this also comes the names of the instructions by which
+they are controlled.
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{ExecuteDoHook}\Parameter{specifier}
+\end{Declaration}
+Hooks\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} are implemented with this
+command. The \PName{specifier} determines the name or names of the hook. The
+\PName{specifier} is always completely expanded for analysis.
+
+The \PName{specifier} generally consists of strings separated by forward
+slashes (``/''). Initially, \Macro{ExecuteDoHook} divides the string at the
+first slash. The first part is the name. The remainder (without the slash) is
+the argument. Then the code for the hook with this name is executed. Next the
+first part of the remaining string is divided again from the remainder,
+combined with a slash after the name to form a new name, and the code with
+this name is executed. This process continues until the code for the hook with
+the name \PName{specifier} has been executed and the argument is empty.
+
+In the simplest case, the \PName{specifier} consists of a single name. In this
+case, the persistent code is executed first, with an empty argument, for
+exactly one hook specified by this name.
+
+At each stage of execution, single-use code is also executed after the hook's
+persistent code, and then the single-use code is globally removed from the
+hook.
+
+\begin{Example}
+ By inserting \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook}%
+ \PParameter{heading/begingroup/\PName{name}} into the execution of each
+ sectioning command defined with
+ \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}, the \KOMAScript{}
+ classes ultimately have six hooks inserted at that code-point, executed in
+ this order:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \PValue{heading} with the argument \PValue{begingroup/}\PName{name}
+ for persistent code,
+ \item \PValue{heading} with the argument \PValue{begingroup/}\PName{name}
+ for single-use code,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup} with the argument \PName{name} for
+ persistent code,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup} with the argument \PName{name} for
+ single-use code,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup/}\PName{name} with an empty argument for
+ persistent code,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup/}\PName{name} with an empty argument for
+ single-use code.
+ \end{enumerate}
+ The \PName{name} is the name of section level specified in
+ \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand},
+ \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand} or
+ \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand}, or the sectioning
+ command specified by it, for example \PValue{chapter} or
+ \PValue{subparagraph}. Looking at the list above, and considering that there
+ are various sectioning commands, it becomes clear that the \PValue{heading}
+ and \PValue{heading/begingroup} hooks will be called multiple times for each
+ sectioning command.%
+\end{Example}%
%
\EndIndexGroup
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{AddtoDoHook}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{command}
+ \Macro{AddtoOneTimeDoHook}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{command}
+\end{Declaration}
+\Macro{AddtoDoHook}\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} appends
+persistent code to the hook named \PName{name}. The code to be added is the
+\PName{command}, to which the argument mentioned in the description of
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook} is appended as a parameter.
+\begin{Example}
+ Suppose you want to count how many times the \Macro{section} command is
+ executed. This would be simple, continuing the previous example:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcounter{sectionCounter}
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup/section}
+ {\stepcounter{sectionCounter}}
+\end{lstcode}
+ However, in reality, \Macro{stepcounter}\PParameter{sectionCounter}%
+ \PParameter{} would be executed. Remember that an argument is always appended
+ as a parameter. In the case of the hook named
+ \PValue{heading/begingroup/section}, this argument is empty. Since an empty
+ parameter becomes an empty group here, it is better to consume this empty
+ parameter:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcommand*{\stepcountergobble}[2]{%
+ \stepcounter{#1}%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup/section}
+ {\stepcountergobble{sectionCounter}}
+\end{lstcode}
+ Here, the appended, empty parameter of \Macro{stepcountergobble} is read but
+ not used.
+
+ If instead of \Macro{section}, you want to count all sectioning commands, you
+ only need to change the hook name:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup}
+ {\stepcountergobble{sectionCounter}}
+\end{lstcode}
+ By the way, the appended parameter is not empty in this case but contains the
+ name of the sectioning level or sectioning command. If you wanted to count
+ the sectioning commands individually, you could just use this:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcommand*{\stepCounter}[1]{%
+ \stepcounter{#1Counter}%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup}
+ {\stepCounter}
+\end{lstcode}
+ Of course, you must also define the counters \Counter{partCounter},
+ \Counter{chapterCounter} down to \Counter{subparagraphCounter}.
+\end{Example}
+
+The \Macro{AddtoOneTimeDoHook} command works similarly but adds the
+\PName{command} to the single-use code. This code will be globally removed
+after the first execution.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{ForDoHook}\Parameter{specification}\Parameter{command}
+\end{Declaration}
+While\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}}
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook} executes the commands previously stored
+with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoDoHook} or
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook} for the hook given by the
+\PName{specifier}, this macro executes the \PName{command} immediately. There
+are two parameters added to the \PName{command}. The first is the hook's name;
+the second, the hook's argument.
+
+This command is a byproduct of the implementation of
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook}. Normally, neither end users nor package
+authors should need this command.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{SplitDoHook}\Parameter{specifier}\Parameter{head macro}
+ \Parameter{remainder macro}
+\end{Declaration}
+As\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} can be seen from the preceding
+explanations, the parameter of a \PName{command} added with
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoDoHook} or
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook} can also be a multi-part
+\PName{specifier}. You can use \Macro{SplitDoHook} to divide a
+\PName{specifier} into the front element and the remainder. The
+\PName{head macro} will be set to the front element. The \PName{remainder
+macro} will be set to the rest. If there is no remainder left, the
+\PName{remainder macro} is set to empty. If the \PName{specifier} was already
+empty, a warning is issued and both the \PName{head macro} and the
+\PName{remainder macro} are set to empty.
+
+\begin{Example}
+ If you want to increase a counter at the start of a group in which a heading
+ is issued but decrease it at the end, you can do this with two hooks:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup}
+ {\stepCounter}
+ \newcommand*{\restepCounter}[1]{%
+ \addtocounter{#1Counter}{-1}%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/endgroup}
+ {\restepCounter}
+\end{lstcode}
+ But you could also use a single hook and split its parameters:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcommand*{\changeCounter}[1]{%
+ \SplitDoHook{#1}{\Group}{\Level}%
+ \ifstr{\Group}{begingroup}{%
+ \stepcounter{\Level Counter}%
+ }{%
+ \ifstr{\Group}{endgroup}{%
+ \addtocounter{\Level Counter}{-1}%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading}
+ {\changeCounter}
+\end{lstcode}
+ As you can see, the first solution is much simpler. In addition, it would
+ be easy to overlook including the empty group for the second false-case in
+ the second example. That would be fatal, however, as there make be other
+ hooks with named \PValue{heading} but with different arguments.
+\end{Example}
+
+Strictly speaking, this command is a byproduct of the implementation of
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ForDoHook}.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+%
+\EndIndexGroup
+\EndIndexGroup
+
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
index 1629f29923..247aaf6f02 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
@@ -48,13 +48,13 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:29:44 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 16:34:25 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl for
experts)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-10-14
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\chapter[{Additional Information about the Main Classes and
\Package{scrextend}}]{Additional Information about the Main Classes
@@ -62,7 +62,8 @@
\Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl} as well as the Package
\Package{scrextend}}
\labelbase{maincls-experts}
-\BeginIndexGroup
+
+\BeginIndexGroup%
\BeginIndex{Class}{scrartcl}%
\BeginIndex{Class}{scrbook}%
\BeginIndex{Class}{scrreprt}%
@@ -74,12 +75,14 @@ are also available in \Package{scrextend}. \iffree{Some parts of the chapter
should not be a problem because the}{The} average user, who only wants to
use the classes, will seldom need this information. Some of this information
is addressed to users with non-standard requirements or who want to write
-their own classes based on a \KOMAScript{} class. Other parts describe
-features that exist only for the sake of compatibility with the standard
-classes or earlier versions of \KOMAScript{}. Portions that describe features
-that exist only for reasons of compatibility with earlier versions of
-\KOMAScript{} are printed in sans serif font. You should not use them any
-longer.
+their own classes based on a \KOMAScript{} class. Because such descriptions
+are not addressed to beginners, they are condensed and require deeper
+knowledge of \LaTeX. Other parts describe features that exist only for the
+sake of compatibility with the standard classes or earlier versions of
+\KOMAScript{}.\iffree{}{
+ Portions that describe features that exist only for reasons of compatibility
+ with earlier versions of \KOMAScript{} are printed in sans serif font. You
+ should not use them any longer.}
\LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{0}
@@ -95,15 +98,14 @@ longer.
\LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{2}
-\section{Expert Commands}
-\seclabel{experts}
-
-This sections describes commands that are of little or no interest to the
-average user. These commands offer additional features for experts. Because
-the information is addressed to experts, it is condensed.
+\section{Detection of \KOMAScript{} Classes}
+\seclabel{identify}
-% \subsection{Identification}
-% \seclabel{identification}
+Package authors sometimes need to detect a \KOMAScript{} class. Mostly this is
+of little or no interest to the average user. To identify the version of
+\KOMAScript{} that is being used, refer to
+\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.identify},
+\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion}.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{KOMAClassName}%
@@ -122,8 +124,14 @@ the \KOMAScript{} label using this name.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Entries to the Table of Contents}
-% \seclabel{toc}
+\section{Entries to the Table of Contents}
+\seclabel{toc}
+
+\KOMAScript{} classes provide advanced methods for generating and
+manipulating entries in the table of contents. Some of these are based on
+the \Package{tocbasic} package (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} starting
+on \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}). Other are implemented directly in the
+classes.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{addtocentrydefault}\Parameter{level}\Parameter{number}%
@@ -236,9 +244,12 @@ rather than attempting to set the attribute for specific entry levels.%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Font Settings}
-% \seclabel{fonts}
+\section{Font Settings}
+\seclabel{fonts}
+\KOMAScript{} classes not only provide an extended selection of basic font
+sizes, but they also let you define, manipulate, and apply elements with
+their own font settings.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{@fontsizefilebase}%
@@ -387,8 +398,14 @@ undefined elements as well as for elements defined with
\PName{else code}.%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsubsection{Paragraph Indention or Gap}
-% \seclabel{parskip}
+\section{Paragraph Indention or Gap}
+\seclabel{parskip}
+
+Because the \KOMAScript{} classes offer extended features for setting the
+paragraph indention or gap, direct changes of the standard lengths
+\Length{parskip}\IndexLength{parskip}, \Length{parindent}\IndexLength{parskip}
+and \Length{parfillskip}\IndexLength{parskip} are not only unnecessary but
+mostly inadvisable.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{setparsizes}\Parameter{indent}\Parameter{distance}
@@ -428,13 +445,17 @@ disables this recalculation.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Counters}
-% \seclabel{counter}
+\section{Counters}
+\seclabel{counter}
\LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{3}
-% \subsubsection{Sections}
-% \seclabel{sections}
+\section{Sections}
+\seclabel{sections}
+
+The \KOMAScript{} classes provide a wide range of options for modifying
+sectioning levels and their corresponding headings. You can even define new
+levels.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name}%
@@ -526,9 +547,9 @@ its font settings using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} or
the value of \PName{counter name}, the value of the counter of this
heading is reset to 0. In addition, \Macro{the\PName{counter name}} is
prefixed with a dot when this counter is output.\\
+ \PValue{counterwithout}%
\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
- \PValue{counterwithout}
& \PName{counter name}
& Cancels a prior \PValue{counterwithin} setting. Therefore it makes sense
only if you redefine an existing sectioning command.\\
@@ -1128,8 +1149,21 @@ the \PName{list of names}. For all other sectioning command in the \PName{list
of names}, the values of \PValue{level} and \PValue{toclevel} are successively
increased by the value of \PValue{increaselevel}. If the
\PValue{increaselevel} attribute is used without assigning a value, 1 is
-assumed.
-%
+assumed.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{IfSectionCommandStyleIs}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{style}
+ \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}
+\end{Declaration}
+In\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
+rare cases, it is useful to be able to test whether a sectioning command
+belongs to a specific \PName{style}. If \KOMAScript{} has defined the
+sectioning command \Macro{\PName{name}} using the given \PName{style}, the
+\PName{then code} will be used. Otherwise the \PName{else code} will be
+executed. An error is reported if \Macro{\PName{name}} is undefined or if it
+is not a \KOMAScript{} sectioning command.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1533,6 +1567,87 @@ same style \PValue{section}.%
\begin{Declaration}
+\DoHook{heading/preinit/\PName{name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/postinit/\PName{name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/branch/star/\PName{name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/branch/nostar/\PName{name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/begingroup/\PName{name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/endgroup/\PName{name}}%
+\end{Declaration}
+\BeginIndex{}{hooks}%
+In\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} addition to all their attributes,
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand},
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand},
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand} and
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} provide several hooks in
+sectioning commands that can be manipulated using
+\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.AddtoDoHook}. For information about the functionality of
+these \emph{do-hooks} see \autoref{sec:scrbase.hooks},
+\autopageref{sec:scrbase.hooks}. The last element of the specifier is the
+\PName{name} of the sectioning command, as it is for the declaration commands
+mentioned above.
+
+It is important\important{Attention!} to avoid adding code to these hooks that
+would affect the page breaking or the position of the heading. Therefore only
+advanced users should use these hooks. In case of doubt, refer to the class's
+source code for information about exactly when a hook is executed. These hooks
+serve as a fallback before you indeed would need to resort to redefining
+a section command without using \KOMAScript{} features.
+
+The\textnote{\DoHHook{\dits/preinit/\dots}} hook
+\DoHook{heading/preinit/\PName{name}} is executed immediately before the
+sectioning command is initialised. At this point, no settings have been
+initialised. Even the paragraph that precedes the heading is not
+necessarily finished yet.
+
+The\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/postinit/\dots}} hook
+\DoHook{heading/postinit/\PName{name}} is executed somewhat later. At this
+point, some settings have been initialised and the previous paragraph has
+already ended.
+
+Only\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/branch/\dots}} one of the hooks
+\DoHook{heading/branch/nostar/\PName{name}} or
+\DoHook{heading/branch/star/\PName{name}} is executed, after determining
+whether the starred or normal variant of the section command is used. At this
+point, the vertical gap above the heading has already been inserted.
+
+The\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/begingroup/\dots}} hook
+\DoHook{heading/begingroup/\PName{name}} is executed at the beginning of
+the group used to process the heading. This is also the last opportunity to
+intervene before the heading is printed.
+
+Similarly\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/begingroup/\dots}}, the hook
+\DoHook{heading/begingroup/\PName{name}} will be executed at the end of the
+group used to process the heading. Currently this is the last hook inside
+a section command.
+
+Note\textnote{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.minisec}} that
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.minisec} is not a real sectioning command and therefore
+these hooks are not available for it.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{IfUseNumber}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}
+\end{Declaration}
+Strictly\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} speaking, this is an internal command. It is defined
+inside sectioning commands only between the \DoHook{\dots/begingroup/\dots}
+and \DoHook{\dots/endroup/\dots} hooks. In this case, the
+\Parameter{then code} is executed if the sectioning heading uses the non-star
+variant and should be numbered according to the value of
+\DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}. If the heading should not be numbered
+because the sectioning command uses the star variant or because of the value
+of \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}, the \PName{else code} is executed.
+Headings in the \PValue{chapter} style also take into account whether
+the headings appears in the main matter.
+
+If you use the command outside a sectioning command, the result is
+unspecified. In this case, it will usually result in an error message and
+execute neither the \PName{then code} nor the \PName{else code}.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{SecDef}\Parameter{star command}\Parameter{command}%
\Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{level}\Parameter{indent}%
\Parameter{beforeskip}\Parameter{afterskip}%
@@ -1544,65 +1659,77 @@ same style \PValue{section}.%
\Parameter{style commands}%
\PValue{*}\Parameter{heading}%
\labelsuffix%
- \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{code}%
- \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{code}%
- \Macro{Before@sect}\Parameter{code}
\end{Declaration}
As\ChangedAt[2014/09]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} already explained in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} in the
description of the sectioning commands beginning with
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}, \KOMAScript{} provides additional features
for the optional argument of those commands. To achieve this, it was necessary
-to replace some \LaTeX{} kernel commands, especially
-\Macro{secdef}\IndexCmd{secdef}\important{\Macro{secdef}} and
-\Macro{@startsection}\IndexCmd{@startsection}%
-\important{\Macro{@startsection}}. The meaning of the parameters of these
-commands can be found in the \LaTeX{} kernel manual \cite{latex:source2e}.
-
-However, these commands are often completely redefined by other packages in a
-way that clashes with the functionality of \KOMAScript. So \KOMAScript{} not
-only changes the definition of these commands but also defines the additional,
-alternative commands \Macro{SecDef} and \Macro{scr@startsection}. Package
-authors can use these commands as they would use the corresponding \LaTeX{}
-kernel commands and therefore gain access to the additional features of
-\KOMAScript. However, these commands should not be redefined, as they may
+to replace some \LaTeX{} kernel commands:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Instead of
+ \Macro{@startsection}\IndexCmd{@startsection}\important{\Macro{@startsection}}
+ \KOMAScript{} uses \Macro{scr@startsection}. However, the definition of
+ \Macro{@startsection} is checked. If the implementation differs from the
+ expected one, a warning is issued, several features of \KOMAScript{}
+ are deactivated, and \Macro{scr@startsection} uses a copy of
+ \Macro{@startsection} while \Macro{@startsection} is redefined to use
+ \Macro{scr@startsection}.
+\item Instead of \Macro{@dblarg}\IndexCmd{@dblarg}\important{\Macro{@dblarg}}
+ \KOMAScript{} uses an internal command to define sectioning commands.
+\item Instead of \Macro{secdef}\IndexCmd{secdef}\important{\Macro{secdef}},
+ \KOMAScript{} uses \Macro{SecDef} to change \Macro{@dblarg} as
+ mentioned above. If the implementation of \Macro{secdef} differs from the
+ expected one, a warning is issued.
+\item \Macro{@sect}\IndexCmd{@sect}\important{\Macro{@sect}} is redefined to
+ implement various extensions of \KOMAScript.
+\item \Macro{@ssect}\IndexCmd{@ssect}\important{\Macro{@ssect}} is redefined
+ to implement various extensions of \KOMAScript.
+\item \Macro{@xsect}\IndexCmd{@xsect}\important{\Macro{@xsect}} is redefined
+ to implement various extensions of \KOMAScript.
+\end{itemize}
+In future versions of \KOMAScript{}, consideration is being given to avoid
+changing the \LaTeX{} kernel commands mentioned above and to replace them
+completely with custom, internal commands. Loading truly incompatible
+sectioning packages would automatically disable \KOMAScript{} extensions
+and transfer the responsibility for the sectioning commands entirely
+to these packages. On the other hand, extra effort would be required
+to maintain compatibility with other packages.
+
+Package authors can use these commands as they would use the corresponding
+\LaTeX{} kernel commands and therefore gain access to the additional features
+of \KOMAScript. However, these commands should not be redefined, as they may
changed at any time, and then this redefinition could compromise
-\KOMAScript{}'s functionality.
-
-\KOMAScript{} itself uses \Macro{SecDef} and \Macro{scr@startsection} instead
-of \Macro{secdef} and \Macro{@startsection}, for example to define sectioning
-commands with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}. So later
-redefinitions of \Macro{secdef} or \Macro{@startsection} will not influence
-the sectioning commands of \KOMAScript.
-
-As an alternative to redefining such commands, \KOMAScript{} offers the
-possibility to add additional \PName{code} at several points in
-\KOMAScript{}'s own replacements. The \PName{code} of all calls to
-\Macro{At@startsection}\important{\Macro{At@startsection}\\
- \Macro{Before@sect}\\
- \Macro{Before@sect}}, \Macro{Before@sect} and \Macro{Before@sect} is
-collected separately for each command. There is no provision for removing
-\PName{code} once it has been inserted.
-
-The \PName{code} of the \Macro{At@startsection}%
- \important{\Macro{At@startsection}\\
- \Macro{scr@startsection}} macro is used in the \Macro{scr@startsection}
-command immediately after evaluating \PName{beforeskip} and calculating the
-resulting \Length{@tempskipa} but before adding the vertical skip itself. So
-you can still change the value of \Length{@tempskipa}.
-
-The \PName{code} of \Macro{Before@sect} or \Macro{Before@ssect} is executed
-within \Macro{scr@startsection} just before calling \Macro{@sect} or
-\Macro{@ssect}, respectively. At this point, the vertical skip of
-\Length{@tempskipa} has already been added using \Macro{addvspace}.
-
-These three commands, \Macro{At@startsection}, \Macro{Before@sect}, and
-\Macro{Before@ssect}, are designed as an interface for package authors and
-released for them to use.%
-%
+\KOMAScript{}'s functionality. The meaning of the parameters for these
+commands can be found in the \LaTeX{} kernel manual \cite{latex:source2e}.
+As\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} an alternative to redefining such commands, \KOMAScript{}
+offers the hooks described previously.%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Appendix}
+\begin{Explain}
+ \begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{code}
+ \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{code}
+ \Macro{Before@sect}\Parameter{code}
+ \end{Declaration}
+ Until\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} \KOMAScript~v3.26b, these commands were available as an
+ alternative to redefine \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scr@startsection} or
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SecDef}. Since\textnote{outdated \KOMAScript{}
+ command} \KOMAScript~v3.27, these commands are deprecated.
+
+ Internally \Macro{At@startsection} is now implemented with the
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.dohook.heading/postinit} hook. \Macro{Before@ssect} is
+ implemented with \DescRef{\LabelBase.dohook.heading/branch/star}, and
+ \Macro{Before@sect} uses
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.dohook.heading/branch/nostar}. The \PName{code} is added
+ using \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.AddtoDoHook}. There are no provisions to remove
+ this code once it has been added.%
+ \EndIndexGroup
+\end{Explain}
+
+% \section{Appendix}
% \seclabel{appendix}
@@ -1671,8 +1798,12 @@ realising it.
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Literaturverzeichnis}
-% \seclabel{bibliography}
+\section{Bibliography}
+\seclabel{bibliography}
+
+The information in this section is less important if you use packages like
+\Package{biblatex}. In that case, the extensive features of such packages
+will supersede the extensions of the \KOMAScript{} classes described here.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{newbibstyle}\OParameter{parent style}\Parameter{name}%^^A
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex
index b20b18726b..881f61b7a1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex
@@ -46,13 +46,13 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-14 14:29:39 +0100 (Mon, 14 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl)]
\translator{Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and
Krickette Murabayashi\and Jana Schubert\and Jens H\"uhne\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2019-01-14
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\chapter{The Main Classes: \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and
\Class{scrartcl}}
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ tables and figures, after the table of contents (see
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand},
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand}, and
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand} can also affect the
- table of contents. See \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ table of contents. See \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}.%
\else%
In addition to the options documented in this section, the
@@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ tables and figures, after the table of contents (see
\IndexCmd{DeclareNewSectionCommand} and
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand}%
\IndexCmd{RedeclareSectionCommand} documented in
- \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand} can also affect the
table of contents.%
\fi
@@ -1002,9 +1002,10 @@ You can redefine the page styles with the \Macro{renewcommand} macro.
example. Of course, you can also use a user-defined page style.
Suppose you have defined your own page style for initial chapter pages with
- the \hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}} (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer})
- or the \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}
- package (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts}). You have given this
+ the \hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}} (see
+ \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyles}) or the
+ \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} package (see
+ \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs}). You have given this
page style the fitting name of \PValue{chapter}. To actually use this style,
you must redefine \Macro{chapterpagestyle} in this way:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1414,7 +1415,7 @@ You can find additional settings for chapter headings in the explanation for
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} and the commands
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat} and
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat} in
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, \autoref{part:forExperts}.%
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections}, \autoref{part:forExperts}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1782,25 +1783,28 @@ extended interpretation of the optional argument \PName{short version}, which
is not active by default.
The \ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} extended interpretation of the optional argument
-checks to see if there is an equals sign in \PName{short version}. If so,
-the optional argument will be interpreted as an \PName{option list}.
+ \Class{scrartcl}} extended interpretation of the optional argument checks to
+see if there is an equals sign in \PName{short version}. If so, the optional
+argument will be interpreted as an \PName{option list}.
Three options\,---\,\OptionVName{head}{running head}\important{\Option{head}\\
\Option{tocentry}\\
- \Option{reference}}, \OptionVName{tocentry}{table of contents entry}, and
+ \Option{reference}\\
+ \Option{nonumber}}, \OptionVName{tocentry}{table of contents entry},
\OptionVName{reference}{reference title}%
-\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}%
-\,---\,are supported with this format. To use commas or equals signs
-within the values of those options, you must enclose them in braces.
+\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}},
+and \OptionVName{nonumber}{simple switch}\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}\,---\,are supported with this
+format. To use commas or equals signs within the values of those options, you
+must enclose them in braces.
Please\textnote{Attention!} note that this mechanism only works as long as
\KOMAScript{} controls the sectioning commands. If you use package that
redefines the \KOMAScript{}'s or the internal \LaTeX{} kernel's sectioning
commands, \KOMAScript{} can no longer provide this extended mechanism. This
-also applies to a \KOMAScript{} that is always active: sectioning commands
-with no heading text\textnote{empty headings} do not create entries in the
-table of contents. If you really want an entry with empty heading text, you
-can use an invisible entry like \lstinline|\mbox{}|.
+also applies to a \KOMAScript{} extension that is always active: sectioning
+commands with no heading text\textnote{empty headings} do not create entries
+in the table of contents. If you really want an entry with empty heading text,
+you can use an invisible entry like \lstinline|\mbox{}|.
\begin{Example}
Suppose you have a document with very long chapter headings. These headings
@@ -1888,6 +1892,18 @@ option, or setting the title of a table-of-contents entry with the
performance is poor compared to the other two, and it is not fully compatible
with \Package{hyperref}\IndexPackage{hyperref}\important{\Package{hyperref}}.
+You can deactivate the numbering using
+\OptionValue{nonumber}{true}\important{\Option{nonumber}}%
+\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
+in the extended optional argument. In contrast to the
+\hyperref[desc:maincls.cmd.part*]{starred versions of the sectioning commands}
+explained below, the titles will still be added to the table of contents and,
+if applicable, used for the running head. For \Macro{part}, \Macro{chapter},
+and \Macro{section}, using \OptionValue{nonumber}{true} this essentially
+corresponds to the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart},
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}, and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec}
+commands, which are explained on \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}.
+
The part-level title\important{\Macro{part}} (\Macro{part}) differs from other
sectioning levels by being numbered independently. This means that the chapter
level (in \Class{scrbook} or \Class{scrreprt}), or the section level (in
@@ -2160,7 +2176,10 @@ similar to the standard commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part}%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} and
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section} except that they are
unnumbered. They thus produce both a running head and an entry in the table of
-contents.
+contents which take into account the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}%
+\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}} option settings, especially
+the handling of the optional argument. However, enabling or disabling the
+\Option{nonumber} switch will have no effect.
The starred variants \Macro{addchap*} and \Macro{addsec*} are similar to the
standard commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*} and
@@ -2553,7 +2572,7 @@ as well as
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat}\IndexCmd{sectionlinesformat}
and its \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat}%
\IndexCmd{sectioncatchphraseformat} format in
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, starting from
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections}, starting from
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2837,7 +2856,7 @@ heading will not be moved down. You are therefore responsible for ensuring
that the \PName{preamble} is not too large and that the space above the
heading is sufficient. See also the \Option{beforeskip} setting for
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} in
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections},
\autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys},
\autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys}.
%
@@ -4355,7 +4374,7 @@ modern and open kind of bibliography. The name comes from the fact that the
bibliography entries appear more structured. They are less compact and seem
more relaxed or open. Information about defining new bibliography styles can
be found in the description of the \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}
-command in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+command in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.bibliography},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}.
In addition to the formatting style, you can select one more feature using
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex
index 7acd9f2bf7..e5cd194493 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrdatetime.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrdatetime.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrdatetime.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrdatetime.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 11:57:25 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrdate, scrtime)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-05
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{The Day of the Week with \Package{scrdate}}
\labelbase{scrdate}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex
index 5504ee4b0d..28ba228390 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrextend.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrextend.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrextend.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrextend.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-04-09 10:14:11 +0200 (Mon, 09 Apr 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script package scrextend]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-24
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter[{\KOMAScript{} Features for Other Classes with \Package{scrextend}}]
{Using Basic Features of the \KOMAScript{} Classes in Other Classes with the
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex
index a7dfac605c..5a7fc200a1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrhack.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrhack.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrhack.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,12 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrhack.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-27 11:46:14 +0200 (Tue, 27 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrhack)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-05
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
+
\chapter{Improving Third-Party Packages with \Package{scrhack}}
\labelbase{scrhack}
@@ -213,7 +214,7 @@ package also uses \Package{lscape}, so \Package{scrhack} affects the
functioning of this package too.%
-\section{Special Case \Package{nomencl}}
+\section{Special Case for \Package{nomencl}}
\label{sec:nomencl}
The\ChangedAt{v3.23}{\Package{scrhack}} hack for the
@@ -251,6 +252,47 @@ The\textnote{Achtung!} setting of the option when \Package{nomencl} is loaded
is crucial! Later changes to the option with
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}
have no influence and will lead to a corresponding warning.%
+
+
+\section{Special Case for Section Headings}
+\seclabel{sections}
+
+Various\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrhack}} packages assume that the
+sectioning commands are defined in a specific way, corresponding to the
+definitions in the standard classes. But for some classes this is not the
+case. For example, the \KOMAScript{} classes use a completely different
+implementation to provide many additional features. But this can cause
+problems for packages that depend on the definition of the standard classes.
+As of version~3.27, \Package{scrhack} offers the option to force the
+sectioning commands \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}\IndexCmd{paragraph}, and
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}\IndexCmd{subparagraph} to be compatible
+with those in the standard classes. When \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} is
+defined, the definitions are based on those in \Class{book}. When
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} is undefined, the definitions of
+\Class{article} are used.
+
+If you are using a \KOMAScript{} class, several features of these classes are
+also deactivated as side effect. For example, the commands to define or
+modify sectioning commands described in
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections} or option
+\DescRef{maincls.option.headings} are no longer available, and commands like
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.partformat} have different defaults.
+
+Because this hack has the potential to do more harm than good, it issues
+several warnings. Also it is not activated simply by loading the
+\Package{scrhack} package. If you want to use it, you must explicitly activate
+it with the \Option{standardsections}\IndexOption[indexmain]{standardsections}
+option when you load the package. Late activation or deactivation is not
+supported.
+
+Since there are often less invasive solutions to fix the problem of package
+incompatibilities, using this hack is not recommended. It is provided only as
+a last resort for emergencies.%
\EndIndexGroup
\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex
index fb782ca3dc..34d9d0d4a8 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrjura.tex
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrjura.tex}%
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:29:44 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:25:44 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrjura)]
\translator{Alexander Willand\and Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-07-20
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\chapter{Support for the Law Office with \Package{scrjura}}
\labelbase{scrjura}
@@ -84,6 +84,14 @@ has to be loaded after \Package{scrjura} as usual.
The headings of clauses can also be added automatically to the table of
contents, if desired.
+% TODO: Fix new translation
+Therefore\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrjura}} the package uses
+\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
+(see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
+\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}) to define an \PName{entry
+ level} named \PValue{cpar}.
+% :ODOT
+
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{juratotoc}{simple switch}%
@@ -94,9 +102,9 @@ Clauses\Index{clause} are shown in the table of contents only if their
\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} counter
(see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}). By
-default, the \PName{level number} is 10000, which is also used if the option
-is switched off with the \PName{simple
-switch}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{false}} (see
+default, the \PName{level number} is \Length{maxdimen}, which is also used if
+the option is switched off with the \PName{simple
+ switch}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{false}} (see
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}). Because the
\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} counter usually has a one-digit value,
clause entries are therefore not normally displayed in the table of contents.
@@ -105,7 +113,15 @@ If you switch on the option using the \PName{simple switch}%
\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{true}}, the \PName{level number} 2 is used
so that clauses are shown in the table of contents on the same level as
subsections. For the default setting of \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth},
-clauses are then shown in all \KOMAScript{} classes.%
+clauses are then shown in all \KOMAScript{} classes.
+
+% TODO: Fix new translation
+Internally\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrjura}} usage of this option results in
+a call of
+\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
+with the \PName{style} \PValue{default} and a corresponding value of
+\Option{level} in the \PName{option list}.%
+% :ODOT
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -116,7 +132,15 @@ clauses are then shown in all \KOMAScript{} classes.%
These two options can be used to determine the indentation for the clause
entries in the table of contents as well as the space reserved for the numbers
there. The defaults are the same as for subsection entries in
-\Class{scrartcl}.%
+\Class{scrartcl}.
+
+% TODO: Fix new translation
+Internally\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrjura}} usage of these options results
+in calls of
+\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
+with the \PName{style} \PValue{default} and \OptionVName{indent}{indent}
+respectively \OptionVName{numwidth}{number width} in the \PName{option list}.%
+% :ODOT
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -188,7 +212,7 @@ other environments declared with
\end{Declaration}
These are the most important commands inside of a contract. Without using any
additional \PName{options}, \Macro{Clause} creates the heading of a clause,
-which consists of the sign »\S«, followed by its number. In contrast,
+which consists of the sign ``\S'', followed by its number. In contrast,
\Macro{SubClause} creates the heading of a clause with the last number used by
\Macro{Clause} and adds a lower-case letter. \Macro{SubClause} is mainly
intended for cases where an act or a contract is amended and not only are
@@ -747,10 +771,10 @@ You can find examples of results of the basic commands in
\toprule
Command & Example output \\
\midrule
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}\Parameter{label} & § 1 paragraph 1 sentence 1 \\
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS}\Parameter{label} & § 1 par. 1 sent. 1 \\
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN}\Parameter{label} & § 1 I 1. \\
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClause}\Parameter{label} & § 1 \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}\Parameter{label} & \S{} 1 paragraph 1 sentence 1 \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS}\Parameter{label} & \S{} 1 par. 1 sent. 1 \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN}\Parameter{label} & \S{} 1 I 1. \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClause}\Parameter{label} & \S{} 1 \\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClauseN}\Parameter{label} & 1 \\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL}\Parameter{label} & paragraph 1 \\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParS}\Parameter{label} & par. 1 \\
@@ -817,7 +841,7 @@ supported \PName{options}.
\PName{commands} used as its default setting. If the element was
previously defined as an alias (see
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont} in
- \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.fonts},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont}), it will become an
independent element instead. If it has already been defined as an
independent element, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} is used to set
@@ -1158,7 +1182,6 @@ detailed user feedback.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB"
%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t
%%% TeX-master: "guide.tex"
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
index 47cc29a8aa..20651e4003 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Arndt Schubert\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-05
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\chapter{Note Columns with \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}}
\labelbase{scrlayer-notecolumn}
@@ -482,7 +482,29 @@ commands mentioned in the example above does not occur with the starred
variant\important{\Macro{makenote*}}. It uses \Macro{detokenize} to prevent
the expansion of commands. But this also means that you should not use
commands in the \PName{note} that change their definition within the
-document.%
+document.
+
+Unfortunately, both commands have two other known
+limitations\textnote{Attention!}. The first issue is related to colours using
+\Package{color}\IndexPackage{color} or \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}
+within the note columns. To make such colour changes possible each note column
+requires its own colour management using so-called \emph{colour stacks}.
+Because the package was designed only as a \emph{proof of concept} and because
+\XeTeX{} does not support multiple colour stacks, \XeTeX{} colour switching is
+restricted to the attributes of the font element
+\FontElement{notecolumn.\PName{note column name}}, a limitation which
+eliminates the time and effort required to implement custom colour management.
+
+The second issue is of a more conceptual nature. The content of the auxiliary
+file that contains the note-column information is read while processing the
+page header. This has consequences in particular if the read occurs while
+an environment like \Environment{verbatim} is active. In this case, the
+\Macro{catcode} settings of this environment would be active while reading the
+auxiliary file. This will inevitably lead to errors in processing and output.
+To attenuate this risk, the \Macro{catcodes} of the characters from
+\Macro{dospecials}\IndexCmd{dospecials} are stored during
+\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} and explicitly restored when reading from
+the auxiliary file.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -696,7 +718,6 @@ changed from blue to grey.}
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
index c9cdc98c8a..b5684a766e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -44,11 +44,11 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 11:57:25 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlayer-scrpage-experts)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date version of the translated file: 2018-01-31
+% Date version of the translated file: 2019-10-09
\chapter[{Additional Features of \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}]
{Additional Features\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} with
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
index d3c50bfef0..cffeeffd9b 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-scrpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-scrpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -44,11 +44,11 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 11:57:25 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlayer-scrpage)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert\and Jens H\"uhne\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date version of the translated file: 2018-02-13
+% Date version of the translated file: 2019-10-09
\chapter[{Headers and Footers with \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}]
{Headers\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} and
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex
index 5488fe2cb0..e56824c156 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlayer.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-12-15 15:01:34 +0100 (Sat, 15 Dec 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-12-15
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\chapter[{Defining Layers and Page Styles with \Package{scrlayer}}]
{Defining\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlayer}} Layers and Page Styles with
@@ -606,6 +606,16 @@ be changed. Applying either command to a previously undefined \PName{layer
\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{ModifyLayers}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer list}
+\end{Declaration}
+This\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Package{scrlayer}} command executes
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayer} with the given \PName{option list} for
+all layers of the comma-separated layer list. Therefore the option can be used
+to change attributes of several layers simultaneously.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{layerhalign}%
\Macro{layervalign}%
\Macro{layerxoffset}%
@@ -860,16 +870,14 @@ first time. Therefore, when defining an end-user interface, you may find it
useful to set the current page style to a default with an implicit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} statement.
-% Todo: New translation by Markus Kohm (please fix it!)
-For page-style aliases activated using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}
-\Macro{currentpagestyle} does not show the alternative name but the name of
+If \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} activates an alias page style,
+\Macro{currentpagestyle} shows not the alternative name but the name of
the real page style. You\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} can get the
alternative name using \Macro{toplevelpagestyle}. However, it is not
-recommended to define page styles, that have different results depending on
+recommended to define page styles that produce different results depending on
\Macro{toplevelpagestyle}, e.\,g., using \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.ifstr}. If you
-would activate such a page style using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} you
-could get the wrong result.%
-% End of new translation.
+were to activate such a page style using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}
+you could get the wrong result.%
\EndIndexGroup
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex
index a01a4a0035..1796a163c4 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlfile.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlfile.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 11:57:25 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlfile)]
\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-15
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{Controlling Package Dependencies with \Package{scrlfile}}
\labelbase{scrlfile}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex
index ffb397b6d2..722183a7bd 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex
@@ -46,14 +46,14 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2-experts.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:29:44 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2 for experts)]
\translator{Harald Bongartz\and Georg Grandke\and Raimund Kohl\and Jens-Uwe
Morawski\and Stephan Hennig\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-07-20
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\chapter{Additional Information about the \Class{scrlttr2} Class and the
\Package{scrletter} Package}
@@ -400,6 +400,22 @@ exists for package authors.%
\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{Ifplength}\Parameter{pseudo-length}%
+ \Parameter{then-code}\Parameter{else-code}
+\end{Declaration}
+This\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Class{scrletter}} command can be
+used to determine whether a \PName{pseudo-length} has been defined. The
+\PName{then-code} is executed if the \PName{pseudo-length} is defined and not
+\Macro{relax}. Otherwise the \PName{else-code} is executed.
+
+% Note: In the English manual this information is not \iffree{}{...}!
+\BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@plength}%
+For reasons of consistency only, the internal command \Macro{if@plength},
+with the identical meaning, exists for the use of package authors.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{setplength}%
\OParameter{factor}\Parameter{pseudo-length}\Parameter{value}%
\Macro{addtoplength}%
@@ -1280,6 +1296,36 @@ it is robust enough to be used as the argument of
example.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{foreachkomavar}\Parameter{list of variables}\Parameter{command}
+ \Macro{foreachnonemptykomavar}\Parameter{list of variables}\Parameter{command}
+ \Macro{foreachemptykomavar}\Parameter{list of variables}\Parameter{command}
+ \Macro{foreachkomavarifempty}\Parameter{list of variables}
+ \Parameter{then-code}\Parameter{else-code}
+\end{Declaration}
+The\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}
+\Macro{foreachkomavar} command executes the specified \PName{command} for each
+variable in the comma-separated \PName{list of variables}. The name of each
+variable is added as parameter to the \PName{command}.%
+
+The \Macro{foreachnonemptykomavar} command does the same but only for those
+variables that are not empty in sense of
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifkomavarempty}. Empty variables in the \PName{list of
+ variables} are ignored.
+
+By contrast, the \Macro{foreachemptykomavar} command executes the
+\PName{command} only for variables that are empty in sense of
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifkomavarempty}. Accordingly, non-empty variables are
+ignored.
+
+The \Macro{foreachkomavarifempty} command is a kind of combination of the two
+previously described commands. It executes the \PName{then-command} only for
+those variables in the \PName{list of variables} that are empty, and the
+\PName{else-command} for the non empty variables. As with \PName{command}, the
+name of each variable is added as a parameter in both cases.%
+\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex
index e63f59c2ab..81923f666c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrlttr2.tex
@@ -46,14 +46,14 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2.tex}%
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:39:58 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2)]
\translator{Harald Bongartz\and Georg Grandke\and Raimund Kohl\and Jens-Uwe
Morawski\and Stephan Hennig\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-04-26
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{Letters with the \Class{scrlttr2} Class or the \Package{scrletter}
Package}
@@ -483,9 +483,10 @@ printing. Since letters are not usually bound, each page of a letter will be
viewed on its own. This is also true even if both the letter is printed on
both sides of the paper. Vertical adjustment usually does not matter for
letters either. If you nevertheless need it, or want to understand what it is,
-please refer to the commands \Macro{raggedbottom} and \Macro{flushbottom}
-explained in \autoref{sec:maincls.typearea} on
-\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}.%
+please refer to the commands
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedbottom}\IndexCmd{raggedbottom} and
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom} explained in
+\autoref{sec:maincls.typearea} on \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -663,7 +664,12 @@ for the standard letter class.
description of the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} command on
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}.
\end{Example}
-%
+
+Letters\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} are always
+printed in single-column mode and without vertical adjustment. You can use
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}, explained in \autoref{sec:maincls.typearea}
+on \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom}, together with
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtBeginLetter} to force a vertical adjustment.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1300,7 +1306,7 @@ definitely set the variables for return address (see
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \OptionVName{symbolicnames}{simple switch}%
+ \OptionVName{symbolicnames}{value}%
\OptionVName{fromphone}{simple switch}%
\OptionVName{frommobilephone}{simple switch}%
\OptionVName{fromfax}{simple switch}%
@@ -1318,12 +1324,13 @@ definitely set the variables for return address (see
\Variable{urlseparator}%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{letterhead}%
-\BeginIndex{}{letter>header}
-You can use the five options \Option{fromphone}, \Option{frommobilephone}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, \Option{fromfax},
+\BeginIndex{}{letter>header}%
+You can use the five options \Option{fromphone},
+\Option{frommobilephone}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, \Option{fromfax},
\Option{fromemail}, and \Option{fromurl} to specify whether to include the
phone number\Index{telephone}\Index{phone},
mobile\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}} phone number\Index{mobile
-phone}\Index{cell phone}\Index{cellphone}, fax number\Index{fax}, e-mail
+ phone}\Index{cell phone}\Index{cellphone}, fax number\Index{fax}, e-mail
address\Index{e-mail}, or URL should be as part of the sender's
information. You can assign any standard value for simple switches from
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} to these
@@ -1338,18 +1345,24 @@ You can\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important{\Option{symbolicnames}}
change the defaults for describing the variables all at once with the
\Option{symbolicnames} option. This option understands the values for simple
switches found in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
-\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Activating the option replaces the
-descriptions from the language-dependant labels of
+\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}.
+Activating\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} the
+option corresponds to \PName{value} \PValue{marvosym} and replaces the
+descriptions from the language-dependent labels of
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname},
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname},
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename}, and
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename} with symbols from the
\Package{marvosym}\IndexPackage{marvosym} package. At the same time, the colon
is omitted when defining the separators. In this case, both the description
-and the content of the URL separator will be empty. Note\textnote{Attention!}
-that you have to load the \Package{marvosym} package on your own if you activate
-\Option{symbolicnames} for the first time after
-\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}.
+and the content of the URL separator will be empty. With
+\OptionValue{symbolicnames}{fontawesome} or
+\OptionValue{symbolicnames}{awesome}, symbols of package
+\Package{fontawesome}\IndexPackage{fontawesome} are used. In this case there
+is also a symbol for the URL. Note\textnote{Attention!} that you may need to
+load the \Package{marvosym} or \Package{fontawesome} package in your document
+preamble if you activate the option for the corresponding package for the
+first time after \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}.
\begin{table}
\centering
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex
index 78253e34e0..a2ae601c86 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/scrwfile.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrwfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrwfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,10 +46,10 @@
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrwfile.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-03-27 11:46:14 +0200 (Tue, 27 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrwfile)]
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-02-15
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert\and Karl Hagen}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex
index 36681ff609..bd34f48969 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/tocbasic.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% tocbasic.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% tocbasic.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,10 +46,10 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{tocbasic.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-08-31 09:11:20 +0200 (Fri, 31 Aug 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (package tocbasic)]
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-08-31
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-09
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Arndt Schubert\and Karl Hagen}
@@ -83,26 +83,26 @@ contents but also for the already mentioned lists of figures and tables.
\label{sec:tocbasic.basics}
The basic commands are primarily used to handle a list of all known file
-extensions\textnote{file extension, content lists} that
-represent a table or list of contents. We call these auxiliary
-files\Index{auxiliary file}\footnote{The term \emph{auxiliary file} here
- refers not to the main \File{aux} file but to the other internal files used
- indirectly via the \File{aux} file, e.\,g. the \File{toc} file, the
- \File{lof} file, or the \File{lot} file.} TOC files\textnote{TOC
- file}\Index[indexmain]{TOC file} regardless of the file extension that is
-actually used. Entries to such files are typically written using
+extensions\textnote{file extension, content lists} that represent a table or
+list of contents. We call these auxiliary files\Index{auxiliary
+ file}\footnote{The term \emph{auxiliary file} here refers not to the main
+ \File{aux} file but to the other internal files used indirectly via the
+ \File{aux} file, e.\,g. the \File{toc} file, the \File{lof} file, or the
+ \File{lot} file.} TOC files\textnote{TOC file}\Index[indexmain]{TOC file}
+regardless of the file extension that is actually used. Entries to such files
+are typically written using
\Macro{addtocontents}\important{\Macro{addtocontents},
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}}, or
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}}, or
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}. There are also commands to perform
actions on all of these file extensions. Additionally, there are commands to
set or unset features for the file associated with a given extension.
Typically an file extension also has an owner\textnote{file owner}. This owner
-may be a class or package, or an identifier that the author of the class or
-package using \Package{tocbasic} has chosen independently. For example,
-\KOMAScript{} uses the owner \texttt{float} for the \File{lof} and \File{lot}
-file extensions that are associated with the list of figures and list of
-tables, respectively. For the table of contents, \KOMAScript{} uses the file
-name of the class.
+may be a class or package, or an identifier of a category that the author of
+the class or package using \Package{tocbasic} has chosen independently. For
+example, \KOMAScript{} uses the category \texttt{float} as owner for the
+\File{lof} and \File{lot} file extensions that are associated with the list of
+figures and list of tables, respectively. For the table of contents,
+\KOMAScript{} uses the file name of the class.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{ifattoclist}\Parameter{extension}\Parameter{then code}%
@@ -198,8 +198,8 @@ brackets. An empty argument would also result in an empty owner.
\end{Example}
You can specify any \PName{owner} you want, but it must be unique. For
example, if you were the author of the \Package{float} package, you could
-specify ``\PValue{float}'' instead of ``\PValue{float.sty}'' as the
-\PName{owner}. In this case, the \KOMAScript{}
+specify the category ``\PValue{float}'' instead of ``\PValue{float.sty}'' as
+the \PName{owner}. In this case, the \KOMAScript{}
options\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}}%
\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{setting}} for the list of figures and the list of
tables would also affect your content lists because these lists are already
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ If so, it will be used for the entry, passing the \PName{section number} as an
optional argument and \PName{text} as a mandatory argument. You can find an
example of such a command provided by the \KOMAScript{} classes in
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry} (see
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.toc},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry}). If the corresponding
command is undefined, the internal command
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} is used instead. This takes
@@ -623,7 +623,12 @@ to define your own title for the content list with the given file
\PName{extension}. The \PName{definition} of the title can use a single
parameter, \PValue{\#1}. When the command is called inside
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc},
-that \PValue{\#1} will be replaced by the title of this content list.%
+that \PValue{\#1} will be replaced by the title of this content list.
+
+Obviously, the \PName{definition} is also responsible for the interpretation
+of additional features related to the title. This is especially true
+for the features \PValue{leveldown}, \PValue{numbered} and \PValue{totoc},
+that are be explained next.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -636,7 +641,7 @@ You can use these two commands to set and clear features for a TOC file
list} is a comma-separated list of features. The \Package{tocbasic} package
recognizes following features:
\begin{description}
-\item[\texttt{leveldown}] means that the content list's heading is created not
+\item[\PValue{leveldown}] means that the content list's heading is created not
with the highest sectioning level below
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\,---\,\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} if available,
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} otherwise\,---\,but with a heading of the next
@@ -648,7 +653,7 @@ recognizes following features:
important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{leveldown}}%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{leveldown}} option for all file extensions
with the owner \PValue{float}.
-\item[\texttt{nobabel}] prevents using the language-switching features of
+\item[\PValue{nobabel}] prevents using the language-switching features of
\Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} for the TOC file associated with the
this file \PName{extension}. This feature should be used only for content
lists that are created in a fixed language, which means that changes of the
@@ -660,14 +665,20 @@ recognizes following features:
Note\textnote{Attention!} that you must set this feature before you add a
file extension to the list of known extensions. Changing the feature
afterwards will have no effect.
-\item[\texttt{noparskipfake}] prevents\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{tocbasic}}
+\item[\PValue{noindent}]\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ causes all content-list entry styles provided by \KOMAScript{} to ignore
+ the \PValue{indent} attribute (see
+ \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes},
+ \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes.indent}) and instead to
+ deactivate the indentation.%
+\item[\PValue{noparskipfake}] prevents\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{tocbasic}}
the insertion of a final \Length{parskip} before switched off paragraph
spacing for content lists. In general, this will cause documents that use
spacing between paragraphs to have less vertical space between the list
heading and first entry than between normal headings and normal text.
Normally, therefore, you will obtain a more uniform formatting without this
feature.
-\item[\texttt{noprotrusion}] prevents\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Package{tocbasic}}
+\item[\PValue{noprotrusion}] prevents\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Package{tocbasic}}
character protrusion, which allows optical margin alignment, from being
disabled in the content lists. By default, character protrusion is disabled
when the \Package{microtype}\IndexPackage{microtype} package, or another
@@ -676,7 +687,7 @@ recognizes following features:
must set this feature. Note\textnote{Attention!}, however, that character
protrusion in content lists often results in incorrect results. This is a
known issue with character protrusion.
-\item[\texttt{numbered}] means that the heading for the content list should
+\item[\PValue{numbered}] means that the heading for the content list should
be numbered and included in the table of contents. This feature is evaluated
by the internal heading command. However, if a user-defined heading command
has been created with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}, the person
@@ -686,7 +697,7 @@ recognizes following features:
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numbered}}%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{numbered}} option for all file extensions
with the owner \PValue{float}.
-\item[\texttt{numberline}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+\item[\PValue{numberline}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
means that any entries made using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}
or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}, where the
optional argument for the number is missing or empty, will be provided with
@@ -714,7 +725,7 @@ recognizes following features:
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}}%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{nonumberline}}.
-\item[\texttt{onecolumn}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+\item[\PValue{onecolumn}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
means that this content list will automatically use \LaTeX's internal
one-column mode with \Macro{onecolumn}\IndexCmd{onecolumn}.
However\textnote{Attention!}, this applies only if this content list does
@@ -728,7 +739,7 @@ recognizes following features:
these classes. The multicolumn mode of the
\Package{multicol}\IndexPackage{multicol} package is expressly unaffected by
this option.
-\item[\texttt{totoc}] means that the title of content list should be included
+\item[\PValue{totoc}] means that the title of content list should be included
in the table of contents. This feature will be evaluated by the internal
heading command. However, if an user-defined heading command has been
created with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}, the person defining
@@ -740,7 +751,7 @@ recognizes following features:
\end{description}
The \KOMAScript{} classes recognize an additional feature:
\begin{description}
-\item[\texttt{chapteratlist}] ensures that an optional subdivision is added
+\item[\PValue{chapteratlist}] ensures that an optional subdivision is added
to the content list for each new chapter. By default, this subdivision is a
vertical space. See \DescRef{maincls.option.listof}%
\IndexOption{listof}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}} in
@@ -804,7 +815,7 @@ you define your own heading command using
\BeginIndex{}{table of contents>entry}%
\Index{list of contents|\see{table of contents}}
-Since\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} version~3.20, the
+Since\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} version~3.20, the
\Package{tocbasic} package has been able not only to configure the tables or
lists of contents and their auxiliary files but also to influence their
entries. To do so, you can define new styles or you can use and configure one
@@ -839,7 +850,7 @@ later in this section}) observe \Counter{tocdepth}.%
\Macro{numberline}\Parameter{entry number}%
\Macro{usetocbasicnumberline}\OParameter{code}
\end{Declaration}
-Although\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the \LaTeX{} kernel
+Although\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the \LaTeX{} kernel
already defines a \Macro{numberline} command, the definition is not sufficient
for \Package{tocbasic}. Therefore \Package{tocbasic} defines its own commands
and sets \Macro{numberline} as needed using \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} for
@@ -1016,18 +1027,19 @@ Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles:
\PValue{section} and \PValue{subsection} using this style, but add extra
\PName{initial code} to the clones to change their defaults.
- The style supports 16\important{\PValue{level}, \PValue{beforeskip},
+ The style supports 18\important{\PValue{level}, \PValue{beforeskip},
\PValue{breakafternumber}, \PValue{dynnumwidth}, \PValue{entryformat},
\PValue{entrynumberformat}, \PValue{indent}, \PValue{linefill},
\PValue{numsep}, \PValue{numwidth}, \PValue{onstarthigherlevel},
\PValue{onstartlowerlevel}, \PValue{onstartsamelevel},
\PValue{pagenumberbox}, \PValue{pagenumberformat},
- \PValue{raggedentrytext}, \PValue{raggedpagenumber}} additional attributes
- in addition to the default \PValue{level} attribute. The defaults of all
- these attributes depend on the name of the \PName{entry level} and
- correspond to the results of the standard classes. So after loading
- \Package{tocbasic}, you can change the style of the entries in the table of
- contents of the standard classes into \PValue{tocline} using
+ \PValue{pagenumberwidth}, \PValue{raggedentrytext},
+ \PValue{raggedpagenumber}, \PValue{rightindent}} additional attributes in
+ addition to the default \PValue{level} attribute. The defaults of all these
+ attributes depend on the name of the \PName{entry level} and correspond to
+ the results of the standard classes. So after loading \Package{tocbasic},
+ you can change the style of the entries in the table of contents of the
+ standard classes into \PValue{tocline} using
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle} without this leading directly
to major changes in their appearance. Thus you can precisely change only
those attributes that are necessary for the desired changes. The same
@@ -1190,6 +1202,20 @@ Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles:
\PValue{tocline} style}
\label{fig:tocbasic.tocline}
\end{figure}
+\item[\PValue{toctext}]\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ is a special feature. While all other styles produce one paragraph per
+ entry, this one produces one paragraph for all successive entries of this
+ style. With 13\important{\PValue{afterpar}, \PValue{entryformat},
+ \PValue{entrynumberformat}, \PValue{indent}, \PValue{numsep},
+ \PValue{onendentry}, \PValue{onendlastentry}, \PValue{onstartentry},
+ \PValue{onstartfirstentry}, \PValue{pagenumberformat},
+ \PValue{prepagenumber}, \PValue{raggedright}, \PValue{rightindent}}
+ attributes in addition to the default \PValue{level} attribute, there are
+ almost as many options as for \PValue{tocline}. However, this style
+ depends on the fact that an unfinished paragraph will be concluded at the
+ beginning of the entry for all other styles, as well as at the end of the
+ current content list. So it should never be combined with entries or content
+ lists that are generated outside of \Package{tocbasic}.
\item[\PValue{undottedtocline}] is similar to the style used by the standard
\Class{book} and \Class{report} classes for the \PValue{chapter} entry
level, or by \Class{article} for the \PValue{section} entry level in the
@@ -1246,11 +1272,27 @@ Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles:
\end{description}
You can find an explanation of the attributes of all styles that
\Package{tocbasic} defines in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}.
+In\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} addition to the usual assignment with
+\Option{\PName{key}=\PName{value}}, both commands understand an assignment in
+the form \Option{\PName{key}:=\PName{entry level}} for all options of the
+\KOMAScript{} styles. In this case, the current setting of \PName{key} for the
+\PName{entry level} will be copied. For example, you can copy the current
+indent of the \PValue{figure} level using \OptionValue{indent:}{figure}. For
+options that expect a length or integer value, you can also use
+\Option{\PName{key}+=\PName{value}} to add\PName{value} to the current setting
+of the \PName{key}. To subtract simply, you can use a negative \PName{value}.
+For example, with \OptionValue{indent+}{1cm} you can increase the indent by
+1\Unit{cm}.
+
If\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} you use these attributes as
options to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC} (see
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}), you must prefix the names of the
-attribute by \PValue{tocentry}, e\,g. \PValue{level} becomes
-\Option{tocentrylevel}. If\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} use
+attributes with \PValue{tocentry}, e\,g., \PValue{level} becomes
+\Option{tocentrylevel}. The copy operation with \Option{:=} described above is
+also available here. However, addition with \Option{+=} is not currently
+supported.
+
+If\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} you use
these attributes as options for
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}%
\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewSectionCommand}%
@@ -1258,6 +1300,8 @@ these attributes as options for
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}) and similar commands,
you must prefix the names of the attributes with \PValue{toc}, e\,g.
\PValue{level} becomes \Option{toclevel}.
+At this time, neither the copy operation with \Option{:=} nor the
+addition operation with \Option{+=} is supported.
Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
\Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}.
@@ -1269,6 +1313,13 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
}{%
Attributes of the TOC-entry styles (\emph{continued})%
}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{afterpar}{code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ The specified \PName{code} will be executed after the end of the paragraph
+ in which an entry with the \PValue{toctext} style is printed. If several
+ entries have such settings, their code will be executed in the order of
+ the entries.%
+ }%
\entry{\OptionVName{beforeskip}{length}}{%
The vertical distance inserted before an entry of this level in the
\PValue{tocline} style (see \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}). The distance
@@ -1342,12 +1393,19 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}} option, the unnumbered entries
will execute the \PName{command} as well.%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{indent}{length}}{%
- The horizontal distance of the entry from the left margin (see
+ \entry{%
+ \OptionVName{indent}{length}%
+ {\phantomsection\label{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes.indent}}%
+ }{%
+ For\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} the \PValue{toctext} style, the
+ \PName{length} is the horizontal distance of the paragraph from the left
+ margin. If different entries within the paragraph have different settings,
+ the last one is used. For the remaining styles, the \PName{length} is the
+ horizontal distance of the entry from the left margin (see
\autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} and \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}).
-
- For the \PValue{tocline} style, all entry levels whose names start with
- ``\texttt{sub}'' are initialised with the
+
+ For the styles \PValue{tocline} and \PValue{toctext}, all entry levels
+ whose names start with ``\texttt{sub}'' are initialised with the
\PValue{indent}+\PValue{numwidth} of the entry level of the same name
without this prefix. For the \PValue{dottedtocline},
\PValue{undottedtocline}, and \PValue{tocline} styles, the initial values
@@ -1355,7 +1413,11 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
\PValue{figure} and \PValue{table} are compatible with the standard
classes. All other levels do not have an initial value. Therefore you have
to set an explicit value for such levels when they are defined first
- time.%
+ time.
+
+ If the \PValue{noindent} attribute is set for a content list via
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, the entries of all styles provided by
+ \KOMAScript{} enforce the value 0\Unit{pt} to deactivate the indent.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{level}{integer}}{%
The numerical value of the \PName{entry level}. Only those entries whose
@@ -1367,15 +1429,15 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
This attribute is mandatory for all styles and will be defined
automatically when the style is declared.
- For the \PValue{tocline} style, all entry levels whose name starts with
- ``\texttt{sub}'' are initialised with the value of the entry level of the
- same name without this prefix plus one. For the \PValue{dottedtocline},
- \PValue{largetocline}, \PValue{tocline}, and \PValue{undottedtocline}
- styles, the entry levels from \PValue{part} to \PValue{subparagraph}, as
- well as \PValue{figure} and \PValue{table}, are initialised to be
- compatible with the standard classes. For all other levels, the
- initialisation is done with the value of \Macro{\PName{entry
- level}numdepth}, if this is defined.%
+ For the \PValue{tocline} and \PValue{toctext} styles, all entry levels
+ whose name starts with ``\texttt{sub}'' are initialised with the value of
+ the entry level of the same name without this prefix plus one. For the
+ \PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{largetocline}, \PValue{tocline},
+ \PValue{toctext}, and \PValue{undottedtocline} styles, the entry levels
+ from \PValue{part} to \PValue{subparagraph}, as well as \PValue{figure}
+ and \PValue{table}, are initialised to be compatible with the standard
+ classes. For all other levels, the initialisation is done with the value
+ of \Macro{\PName{entry level}numdepth}, if this is defined.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{linefill}{code}}{%
With the \PValue{tocline} style, you can change what is used to fill the
@@ -1395,9 +1457,14 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
\entry{\OptionVName{numsep}{length}}{%
The \PValue{tocline} style tries to ensure a minimum distance of
\PName{length} between the entry number and the entry text. If
- \PValue{dynnumwidth} is active, it will correct the number width to achieve
- this. Otherwise it simply throws a warning, if the condition is not met.
+ \PValue{dynnumwidth} is active, it will correct the number width to
+ achieve this. Otherwise it simply throws a warning if the condition is not
+ met.
+ The\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} \PValue{toctext} style, on the
+ other hand, always adds a horizontal space of width \PName{length} after
+ the number of the entry.
+
The initial \PName{length} is 0.4\Unit{em}.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{numwidth}{length}}{%
@@ -1419,6 +1486,37 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
you must set \PValue{numwidth} explicitly when the entry level is first
used.%
}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onendentry}{code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ The \PName{code} is executed immediately after an entry with the
+ \PValue{toctext} style, if this entry is not the last one of the
+ paragraph. The user must ensure that the \PName{code} does not result in
+ the paragraph ending.
+
+ Note: In reality the \PName{code} is not executed at the end of the entry
+ but before the next entry with style \PValue{toctext}.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onendlastentry}{code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ The \PName{code} is executed immediately before the end of the paragraph
+ with an entry in the \PValue{toctext} style, as long as this entry is the
+ last one in the paragraph. The user must ensure that the \PName{code} does
+ not result in the paragraph ending.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onstartentry}{code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ The \PName{code} is executed immediately before an entry with the
+ \PValue{toctext} style, unless it is the first one in the paragraph. The
+ user must ensure that the \PName{code} does not result in the paragraph
+ ending.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onstartfirstentry}{code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ The \PName{code} is executed immediately before an entry with the
+ \PValue{toctext} style if this entry is the first one of the paragraph. The
+ user must ensure that the \PName{code} does not result in the paragraph
+ ending.%
+ }%
\entry{\OptionVName{onstarthigherlevel}{code}}{%
The \PValue{tocline} style can execute \PName{code} at the start of an
entry, depending on whether the previous entry had numerical level greater
@@ -1482,6 +1580,23 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
all other levels prints the argument in
\Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}.%
}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberwidth}{length}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ You can use this attribute to locally change the width of the default box
+ for the page number of an entry with the style \PValue{tocline} from
+ \Macro{@pnumwidth} to the specified \PName{length}. Note that if you
+ change the default page number box with the \Option{pagenumberbox}
+ attribute, the specified \PName{length} will no longer be used
+ automatically.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{prepagenumber}{code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ The \PValue{toctext} style executes the \PName{code} between the text and
+ the page number of the entry. Usually this is used to add a horizontal
+ space or separator between text and page number.%
+
+ The default is a non-breaking space using \Macro{nonbreakspace}.%
+ }%
\entry{\OptionVName{raggedentrytext}{switch}}{%
The\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} \PName{switch} is one of the
values for simple switches from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
@@ -1508,16 +1623,26 @@ Finally, using \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} will define the internal command
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} for the \PValue{linefill}
attribute.%
}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{raggedright}{switch}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ The \PName{switch} is one of the values for simple switches from
+ \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If the
+ switch is active for any entry with the \PValue{toctext} style inside the
+ same paragraph, the whole paragraph is printed ragged right.
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{rightindent}{length}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ You can use this attribute to locally change the right indent for the text
+ of an entry with the \PValue{tocline} style from \Macro{@tocrmarg} to the
+ specified \PName{length}.%
+ }%
\end{desclist}
-% New translation by Markus Kohm (please fix it!):
-\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntries}\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Package{tocbasic}} uses
-\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} to define not only one \PName{entry level} but
-several entry levels. Each of the entry levels, given by the comma-separated
-\PName{entry level list}, is defined with the same \PName{style} and the
-settings of the given \PName{option list}.%
-% End of new translation.
-%
+While \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} defines only one \PName{entry level},
+\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntries}\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Package{tocbasic}} can define
+an entire list of \PName{entry level}s in one command. Each entry level in the
+comma-separated \PName{entry-level list} is defined with the same \PName{style}
+and settings of the given \PName{option list}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1558,7 +1683,7 @@ settings of the given \PName{option list}.%
\Parameter{description}%
%\OParameter{initial code}%
\end{Declaration}
-\Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} is
+\Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} is
one of the most complex commands in \KOMAScript. It is therefore explicitly
intended for \LaTeX{} developers and not for ordinary \LaTeX{} users. It lets
you define new a \PName{style} for content-list entries. Usually, entries to
@@ -1592,20 +1717,33 @@ automatically. The value of the \Option{level} can be queried within the
\important{\Macro{\PName{entry level}tocdepth}}, for example, to compare it
with the \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} counter.
-To define options for the attributes of the
-\PName{style} inside the \PName{initial code}, you can use the commands \Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption},
-\Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}, \Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption},
-\Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}, and \Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}.
-These commands each define an \PName{option} that, when called,
-defines a macro named \Macro{\PName{prefix}\PName{entry
- level}\PName{postfix}} set to the given value or to the
-\PName{default value} of the option. The
-\Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption} command is a somewhat special case. It defines \Macro{\PName{prefix}\PName{entry
- level}\PName{postfix}} as a command with two arguments. If the value passed to
-the option is one of the activation (true) values from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
-\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}, the command expands to the first
-argument. If the value to the option is a deactivation (false) value, the command
-expands to the second argument.
+To define options for the attributes of the \PName{style} inside the
+\PName{initial code}, you can use the commands
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}, \Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption},
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}, \Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}, and
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}. These commands each define an
+\PName{option} that, when called, defines a macro named
+\Macro{\PName{prefix}\PName{entry level}\PName{postfix}} set to the given
+value or to the \PName{default value} of the option. The
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption} command is a somewhat special case. It defines
+\Macro{\PName{prefix}\PName{entry level}\PName{postfix}} as a command with two
+arguments. If the value passed to the option is one of the activation (true)
+values from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+the command expands to the first argument. If the value to the option is a
+deactivation (false) value, the command expands to the second argument.
+
+In\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} addition to the usual options of the
+form \Option{\PName{key}=\PName{value}}, the five
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntry\dots Option} commands automatically define options of
+the form \Option{\PName{key}:=\PName{entry level}}. These copy the value of
+another \PName{entry level} if the value is stored in a macro with the same
+\PName{prefix} and \PName{postfix}. For the styles predefined by
+\Package{tocbasic}, this is the case for all options of the same name
+independent of the name of the style. The commands
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption} and \Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption} also
+define options of the form \Option{\PName{key}:=\PName{value}}, which are used
+to add the new \PName{value} to the value already stored in
+\Macro{\PName{prefix}\PName{entry level}\PName{postfix}}.
The \PName{description} should be a brief message that describes the sense
of the option with some keywords. The \Package{tocbasic} package uses this text
@@ -1662,7 +1800,7 @@ mentioned here only for the sake of completeness.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{CloneTOCEntryStyle}\Parameter{style}\Parameter{new style}%
\end{Declaration}
-With\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} this command you can clone
+With\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} this command you can clone
an existing \PName{style}. It defines a \PName{new style} with the same
attributes and settings as the existing \PName{style}. The package itself uses
\Macro{CloneTOCEntryStyle} to declare the \PValue{default} style as a clone of
@@ -1683,7 +1821,7 @@ of \PValue{section}, and \Class{scrartcl} declares it as a clone of
\Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}\Parameter{style}%
\Parameter{initial code}
\end{Declaration}
-Every\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} TOC-entry style has an
+Every\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} TOC-entry style has an
initialisation code. This is used whenever a \PName{style} is assigned to an
TOC entry using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle}. This
\PName{initial code} should not have global side effects, because it is also
@@ -1718,7 +1856,7 @@ to define \PValue{section} as a modified clone of \PValue{tocline}.%
\Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame}%
\Macro{LastTOCLevelWasLower}
\end{Declaration}
-At\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the beginning of entries
+At\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the beginning of entries
using the \PValue{tocline} style, \Package{tocbasic} executes one of these
three commands depending on \Macro{lastpenalty}. \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}
and \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame} used in vertical mode add
@@ -1736,7 +1874,7 @@ behaviour of single entry levels using the \PValue{onstartlowerlevel},
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill}\OParameter{leader}
\end{Declaration}
-This\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} command is intended to be
+This\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} command is intended to be
used as a value for the \Option{linefill} option of the \PName{tocline}
TOC-entry style. It creates a connection between the end of the entry text and
the entry's page number. You can specify the \PName{leader}, which is repeated
@@ -1925,7 +2063,7 @@ run.%
\Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}\Parameter{entry level}%
\Macro{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}\Parameter{entry level}
\end{Declaration}
-The\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} \PValue{tocline}
+The\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} \PValue{tocline}
content-list style (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}) sets a
\Macro{penalty} at the end of each entry via
\Macro{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel} so that no page break can occur after an
@@ -2126,15 +2264,15 @@ cannot be set using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions}!
You can find an overview of all available options in
\autoref{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options}.
-If\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the \Option{tocentrystyle}
+If\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the \Option{tocentrystyle}
option is not used, the \PValue{default} style will be used if required. For
information about this style, see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. If you do
not want to define a command for entries to the content list, you can use an
empty argument, i.\,e. \OptionValue{tocentrystyle}{} or
\OptionValue{tocentrystyle}{\PParameter{}}.
-Depending\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
-\ChangedAt[2016/06]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} on the style of the entries to
+Depending\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} on the style of the entries to
the content list, you can set all valid attributes of the selected style as
part of the \PName{options}. To do so, you must add the prefix
\PValue{tocentry} to the names of the attributes given in
@@ -2167,6 +2305,10 @@ the styles.%
The \PName{commands} will be executed at the end of the floating or
non-floating environment.%
}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{category}{string}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ This option can be used as a synonym for \OptionVName{owner}{string}.%
+ }%
\entry{\OptionVName{counterwithin}{\LaTeX{} counter}}{%
If you define a new floating or non-floating environment, a new counter
\Counter{\PName{type}} will be created as well (see option
@@ -2201,8 +2343,8 @@ the styles.%
before.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{hang}{length}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
This option has been deprecated since \KOMAScript~3.20. Instead, the
amount of the hanging indent of entries to the content list\index{content
list>entry} depends on attributes of the TOC-entry style given by the
@@ -2214,8 +2356,8 @@ the styles.%
example, use \OptionValue{tocentrynumwidth}{2.3em}.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{indent}{length}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
This option has been deprecated since \KOMAScript~3.20. Instead, the
amount that entries to the content list\index{content list>entry} are
indented depends on attributes of the TOC-entry style given by the
@@ -2227,8 +2369,8 @@ the styles.%
use \OptionValue{tocentrynumwidth}{1.5em}.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{level}{number}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
This option has been deprecated since \KOMAScript~3.20. Instead, the level
of the entries to the content list\index{content list>entry} depends on
attributes of the TOC-entry style given by the \Option{tocentrystyle}
@@ -2289,7 +2431,7 @@ the styles.%
\autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{tocentry\PName{style-option}}{value}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
Additional options depending on the \PName{TOC-entry style} given by
\Option{tocentrystyle}. See \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
\autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} for additional information about
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex
index da2679cc7d..b72bd75cc5 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea-experts.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% typearea-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% typearea-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,11 +46,11 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{typearea-experts.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-30 11:57:25 +0200 (Fri, 30 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-31
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{Additional Information about the \Package{typearea} package}
\labelbase{typearea-experts}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex
index 1985498be3..6ae976a096 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/english/typearea.tex
@@ -46,12 +46,12 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{typearea.tex}%
- [$Date: 2019-01-15 08:29:44 +0100 (Tue, 15 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea)]
\translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi\and
Karl Hagen}
-% Date of the translated German file: 2018-01-31
+% Date of the translated German file: 2019-10-10
\chapter{Calculating the Page Layout with \Package{typearea}}
\labelbase{typearea}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib
index 03e8e4eec4..966d945a4a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/guide.bib
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
language= {ngerman},
author = {Markus Kohm},
title = {Moderne Briefe mit {\KOMAScript}},
- journal = {Die {\TeX}nische Komödie},
+ journal = {Die {\TeX}nische Komödie},
volume = {2},
year = 2003,
pages = {32--51},
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
author = {Markus Kohm},
title = {{\KOMAScript} -- Eine Alternative zu den
Standardklassen?},
- journal = {Die {\TeX}nische Komödie},
+ journal = {Die {\TeX}nische Komödie},
year = 1996,
volume = {2},
pages = {14--33},
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
language= {ngerman},
author = {Markus Kohm},
title = {Satzspiegelkonstruktionen im Vergleich},
- journal = {Die {\TeX}nische Komödie},
+ journal = {Die {\TeX}nische Komödie},
volume = {4},
year = 2002,
pages = {28--48},
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@
language= {ngerman},
author = {Hans Peter Willberg and Friedrich Forssman},
title = {Erste Hilfe in Typografie},
- subtitle = {Ratgeber für Gestaltung mit Schrift},
+ subtitle = {Ratgeber für Gestaltung mit Schrift},
publisher = {Verlag Hermann Schmidt},
year = 2000,
address = {Mainz}
@@ -98,8 +98,8 @@
@Book{ JTsch87,
language= {ngerman},
author = {Jan Tschichold},
- title = {Ausgewählte Aufsätze über Fragen der Gestalt des Buches und der Typographie},
- publisher = {Birkhäuser Verlag},
+ title = {Ausgewählte Aufsätze über Fragen der Gestalt des Buches und der Typographie},
+ publisher = {Birkhäuser Verlag},
year = 1987,
address = {Basel},
edition = 2
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@
language= {ngerman},
author = {Kohm, Markus},
title = {{\KOMAScript}},
- subtitle= {Eine Sammlung von Klassen und Paketen für {\LaTeXe}},
+ subtitle= {Eine Sammlung von Klassen und Paketen für {\LaTeXe}},
year = 2018,
edition = 6,
publisher={Lehmanns Media},
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@
language= {ngerman},
author = {Kohm, Markus},
title = {{\KOMAScript}},
- subtitle= {Eine Sammlung von Klassen und Paketen für {\LaTeXe}},
+ subtitle= {Eine Sammlung von Klassen und Paketen für {\LaTeXe}},
year = 2018,
edition = 6,
publisher={Lehmanns Media},
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@
author = {Indra Kupferschmid},
editor = {},
title = {Buchstaben kommen selten allein: Ein typografisches Werkstattbuch},
- publisher = {Universitätsverlag Weimar},
+ publisher = {Universitätsverlag Weimar},
year = {2000},
note = {{ISBN} 3-86068-140-0}
}
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@
@InCollection{ JTschMass,
language= {ngerman},
author = {Jan Tschichold},
- title = {Willkürfreie Maßverhältnisse der Buchseite und des Satzspiegels},
+ title = {Willkürfreie Maßverhältnisse der Buchseite und des Satzspiegels},
booktitle = {Schriften 1925-1974},
year = 1992,
publisher = {Brinkmann \& Bose},
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@
@InCollection{ zeitung,
language = {ngerman},
- author = {Martin Z. Schröder},
+ author = {Martin Z. Schröder},
title = {Die Anmut des Unscheinbaren},
booktitle = {Berliner Zeitung},
year = 1998,
@@ -262,7 +262,7 @@
@Manual{ l2kurz,
language = {ngerman},
- author = {Marco Daniel and Patrick Gundlach and Walter Schmidt and Jörg Knappen and Hubert Partl and Irene Hyna},
+ author = {Marco Daniel and Patrick Gundlach and Walter Schmidt and Jörg Knappen and Hubert Partl and Irene Hyna},
title = {{\LaTeXe}-Kurzbeschreibung},
year = 2012,
month = jul,
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Schlegl},
@Manual{ latex:source2e,
language = {english},
- author = {Johannes Braams and David Carlisle and Alan Jeffrey and Leslie Lamport and Frank Mittelbach and Chris Rowley and Rainer Schöpf},
+ author = {Johannes Braams and David Carlisle and Alan Jeffrey and Leslie Lamport and Frank Mittelbach and Chris Rowley and Rainer Schöpf},
title = {The {\LaTeX2e} Source},
year = 2005,
month = 12
@@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Schlegl},
@Misc{ package:ragged2e,
language = {english},
- author = {Martin Schröder},
+ author = {Martin Schröder},
title = {The {\Package{Ragged2e}} package},
year = 2009,
month = jun,
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ Schlegl},
@Misc{ https://komascript.de/comment/5070,
language= {ngerman},
author= {Markus Kohm},
- title= {{\OptionValue{chapteratlists}{entry}} automatisch nur für Kapitel mit Einträgen},
+ title= {{\OptionValue{chapteratlists}{entry}} automatisch nur für Kapitel mit Einträgen},
year= 2015,
month= jul,
url= {https://komascript.de/comment/5070#comment-5070},
@@ -812,11 +812,11 @@ Schlegl},
@Misc{ www:blaettery,
language = {ngerman},
- author = {Jürgen F. Schopp},
+ author = {Jürgen F. Schopp},
address = {mailto: \url{jurgen.schapp@uta.fi}},
- title = {Blätter (und Tipps) zur Typografie},
- institution = {Institut für Sprach- und Translationswissenschaften},
- organization = {Universität Tampere, Finnland},
+ title = {Blätter (und Tipps) zur Typografie},
+ institution = {Institut für Sprach- und Translationswissenschaften},
+ organization = {Universität Tampere, Finnland},
year = 2002,
month = sep,
edition = {2},
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex
index 0f1720cfab..e545e6a5a1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/linkalias.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% linkalias.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% linkalias.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
%
\KOMAProvidesFile{linkalias.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-07-18 13:58:44 +0200 (Wed, 18 Jul 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 17:46:01 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
link aliases for the free version]
\makeatletter
@@ -83,9 +83,6 @@
\lalias[\Macro{rightmark}]
{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark}
{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}
-\lalias[\Macro{the}]
- {desc:maincls-experts.cmd.the}
- {sec:maincls-experts.experts}
\lalias[\Option{parskip}]
{desc:maincls-experts.option.parskip}
{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}
@@ -113,6 +110,12 @@
\lalias[\Macro{the\PName{Zähler}}]
{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.the/Zaehler/}
{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}
+\lalias[\Macro{the\PName{Zähler}}]
+ {desc:maincls-experts.cmd.the/Zähler/}
+ {sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}
+\lalias[\Macro{the\PName{Zähler}}]
+ {desc:maincls-experts.cmd.the/Z"ahler/}
+ {sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}
\lalias[\Macro{the\PName{Counter}}]
{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.the/Counter/}
{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex
index ddec394b53..7748638243 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% adrconvnote.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% adrconvnote.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über adrconv in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
-% Verwaltet von Jens-Uwe Morawski (mit Unterstützung von Markus Kohm)
+% Kapitel über adrconv in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Verwaltet von Jens-Uwe Morawski (mit Unterstützung von Markus Kohm)
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{adrconvnote.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-29 14:12:59 +0100 (Mon, 29 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: adrconv)]
\chapter{Adressdateien aus Adressdatenbanken}%
@@ -55,13 +55,13 @@
\index{Adressdatenbank}%
\IndexPackage{addrconv}
-In früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{} war das Paket
+In früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{} war das Paket
\Package{addrconv} ein fester Bestandteil des
\KOMAScript{}-Systems.
-Die hauptsächliche Verflechtung mit \KOMAScript{}
+Die hauptsächliche Verflechtung mit \KOMAScript{}
bestand darin, dass mit Hilfe dieses Pakets aus
Adressdatenbanken im \BibTeX-Format Adressdateien
-für die \KOMAScript-Briefklasse oder für das
+für die \KOMAScript-Briefklasse oder für das
\Package{scraddr}-Paket erstellt werden konnten.
\begin{lstlisting}[morekeywords={@address}]
@@ -78,23 +78,23 @@ für die \KOMAScript-Briefklasse oder für das
}
\end{lstlisting}
-Aus Einträgen wie dem oben stehenden können mit Hilfe
+Aus Einträgen wie dem oben stehenden können mit Hilfe
von \BibTeX{} und verschiedenen \BibTeX-Stilen die
Adressdateien erstellt werden.
-Weiterhin gibt es spezielle \LaTeX-Dateien, die es ermöglichen,
+Weiterhin gibt es spezielle \LaTeX-Dateien, die es ermöglichen,
aus den Adressdateien Telefon- und Adressverzeichnisse
zu erstellen.
-Das Paket \Package{addrconv} war aber eigentlich ein eigenständiger Teil, der
-auch noch über die Belange von \KOMAScript{} hinaus Möglichkeiten bietet.
+Das Paket \Package{addrconv} war aber eigentlich ein eigenständiger Teil, der
+auch noch über die Belange von \KOMAScript{} hinaus Möglichkeiten bietet.
Deshalb ist \Package{addrconv} bereits seit einiger Zeit nicht mehr in
-\KOMAScript{} enthalten. Das Paket \Package{adrconv}, nur ein »\Package{d}«,
-ersetzt \Package{addrconv} vollständig. Es muss, falls nicht bereits in Ihrer
+\KOMAScript{} enthalten. Das Paket \Package{adrconv}, nur ein »\Package{d}«,
+ersetzt \Package{addrconv} vollständig. Es muss, falls nicht bereits in Ihrer
\TeX-Distribution enthalten, von \cite{package:adrconv} separat bezogen und
installiert werden.
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex
index c0207de5f9..9313b9c145 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% authorpart.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% authorpart.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Erster Teil: KOMA-Script für Autoren
+% Erster Teil: KOMA-Script für Autoren
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
@@ -51,33 +51,33 @@
\vspace*{2\baselineskip}%
\setlength{\parindent}{1em}%
- \noindent In diesem Teil sind die Informationen für die Autoren von
- Artikeln, Berichten, Büchern und Briefen zu finden. Dabei wird davon
- ausgegangen, dass der normale Anwender sich weniger dafür interessiert, wie
+ \noindent In diesem Teil sind die Informationen für die Autoren von
+ Artikeln, Berichten, Büchern und Briefen zu finden. Dabei wird davon
+ ausgegangen, dass der normale Anwender sich weniger dafür interessiert, wie
in \KOMAScript{} die Dinge implementiert sind und wo die Schwierigkeiten
- dabei liegen. Auch ist es für den normalen Anwender wenig interessant,
+ dabei liegen. Auch ist es für den normalen Anwender wenig interessant,
welche obsoleten Optionen und Anweisungen noch enthalten sind. Er will
wissen, wie er aktuell etwas erreichen kann. Eventuell ist er noch an
typografischen Hintergrundinformationen interessiert.
- Die wenigen Passagen, die weiterführende Informationen und Begründungen
- enthalten und deshalb für ungeduldige Leser weniger von Interesse sind,
- wurden in diesem Teil in serifenloser Schrift gesetzt und können bei Bedarf
- übersprungen werden. Wer hingegen noch mehr Informationen zu Hintergründen
+ Die wenigen Passagen, die weiterführende Informationen und Begründungen
+ enthalten und deshalb für ungeduldige Leser weniger von Interesse sind,
+ wurden in diesem Teil in serifenloser Schrift gesetzt und können bei Bedarf
+ übersprungen werden. Wer hingegen noch mehr Informationen zu Hintergründen
der Implementierung, Nebenwirkungen bei Verwendung anderer Pakete und
zu obsoleten Optionen oder Anweisungen sucht, sei auf
\autoref{part:forExperts} ab \autopageref{part:forExperts}
- verwiesen. Darüber hinaus beschäftigt sich jener Teil von \KOMAScript{} auch
- mit all den Möglichkeiten, die speziell für Autoren von Paketen und Klassen
+ verwiesen. Darüber hinaus beschäftigt sich jener Teil von \KOMAScript{} auch
+ mit all den Möglichkeiten, die speziell für Autoren von Paketen und Klassen
geschaffen wurden.
}
-\part{\KOMAScript{} für Autoren\label{part:forAuthors}}
+\part{\KOMAScript{} für Autoren\label{part:forAuthors}}
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "guide.tex"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex
index f52b3e00e0..76920fa6d7 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-compatibility.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-compatibility.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,57 +40,57 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-compatibility.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-30 09:32:50 +0100 (Tue, 30 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
-\section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
+\section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
\seclabel{compatibilityOptions}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Kompatibilität}
+\BeginIndex{}{Kompatibilität}
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.compatibilityOptions} geschrieben
wurde.\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ Allerdings existiert diese
- Möglichkeit bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} bereits seit
- Version~2.9t, während \Package{scrletter} sie nicht bietet, sondern
+ Möglichkeit bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} bereits seit
+ Version~2.9t, während \Package{scrletter} sie nicht bietet, sondern
sozusagen immer von \OptionValue{version}{last} ausgeht.}{} Falls Sie also
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.compatibilityOptions} bereits gelesen
- und verstanden haben, können Sie in
+ und verstanden haben, können Sie in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions.next} auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions.next}
fortfahren.%
}
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{typearea,maincls,scrlttr2,scrextend}{%
- Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der Regel allergrößten
- Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer wieder exakt
- dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen führen aber Verbesserungen
+ Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der Regel allergrößten
+ Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer wieder exakt
+ dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen führen aber Verbesserungen
und Korrekturen \IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{an der
- Klasse}{am Paket} zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim
- Umbruch. Dies ist jedoch manchmal eher unerwünscht.%
+ Klasse}{am Paket} zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim
+ Umbruch. Dies ist jedoch manchmal eher unerwünscht.%
}{%
% \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
-% In einigen Fällen ist es so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen am Paket
-% zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch, führen. Dies ist
-% jedoch nicht immer erwünscht.%
+% In einigen Fällen ist es so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen am Paket
+% zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch, führen. Dies ist
+% jedoch nicht immer erwünscht.%
% Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der Regel
-% allergrößten Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer
-% wieder exakt dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen ist es aber
-% so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen an der Klasse zu Änderungen im
-% Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch, führen.%
+% allergrößten Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer
+% wieder exakt dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen ist es aber
+% so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen an der Klasse zu Änderungen im
+% Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch, führen.%
% }{%
\ThisCommonLabelBaseFailure
% \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
-% In einigen Fällen ist es so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen an der
-% Klasse zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch,
-% führen. Dies ist jedoch nicht immer erwünscht.%
+% In einigen Fällen ist es so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen an der
+% Klasse zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch,
+% führen. Dies ist jedoch nicht immer erwünscht.%
% }{}%
% }%
}%
@@ -116,12 +116,12 @@
}%
}%
}%
-die Wahl, ob eine Quelldatei, soweit irgend möglich, auch zukünftig bei einem
-\LaTeX{}-Lauf zu exakt demselben Ergebnis führen soll oder ob er jeweils
+die Wahl, ob eine Quelldatei, soweit irgend möglich, auch zukünftig bei einem
+\LaTeX{}-Lauf zu exakt demselben Ergebnis führen soll oder ob er jeweils
entsprechend der Anpassungen der neusten
Version\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{ der Klasse}{} zu setzen
-ist. Zu welcher Version Kompatibilität herzustellen ist, wird dabei über die
-Option \Option{version} festgelegt. Kompatibilität zur ältesten unterstützten
+ist. Zu welcher Version Kompatibilität herzustellen ist, wird dabei über die
+Option \Option{version} festgelegt. Kompatibilität zur ältesten unterstützten
\KOMAScript-Version kann mit
\OptionValue{version}{first}\important{\OptionValue{version}{first}} oder
\OptionValue{version}{2.9} oder \OptionValue{version}{2.9t} erreicht
@@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ Warnung ausgegeben und sicherheitshalber \OptionValue{version}{first}
angenommen.
Mit \OptionValue{version}{last}\important{\OptionValue{version}{last}}%
-\textnote{Voreinstellung} kann die jeweils neuste Version ausgewählt
-werden. In diesem Fall wird also auf rückwirkende Kompatibilität
+\textnote{Voreinstellung} kann die jeweils neuste Version ausgewählt
+werden. In diesem Fall wird also auf rückwirkende Kompatibilität
verzichtet. Wird die Option ohne Wertangabe verwendet, so wird ebenfalls
\PValue{last} angenommen. \ChangedAt{v3.01a}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}\and
@@ -143,32 +143,32 @@ obsolete Option verwendet wird.
Bei\textnote{Achtung!} der Verwendung einer obsoleten Option von
\KOMAScript~2 setzt \KOMAScript~3 automatisch
\OptionValue{version}{first}. In der dabei ausgegebenen Warnung wird
- erklärt, wie man diese Kompatibilitätsumschaltung verhindern
+ erklärt, wie man diese Kompatibilitätsumschaltung verhindern
kann. Alternativ kann man auch nach der obsoleten Option selbst eine
- abweichende Einstellung für Option \Option{version} wählen.%
+ abweichende Einstellung für Option \Option{version} wählen.%
}
-Die Frage der Kompatibilität betrifft in erster Linie Fragen des
-Umbruchs. Neue Möglichkeiten, die sich nicht auf den Umbruch auswirken, sind
-auch dann verfügbar, wenn man per Option die Kompatibilität zu einer älteren
-Version ausgewählt hat. Die Option hat keine Auswirkungen auf
-Umbruchänderungen, die bei Verwendung einer neueren Version durch Beseitigung
+Die Frage der Kompatibilität betrifft in erster Linie Fragen des
+Umbruchs. Neue Möglichkeiten, die sich nicht auf den Umbruch auswirken, sind
+auch dann verfügbar, wenn man per Option die Kompatibilität zu einer älteren
+Version ausgewählt hat. Die Option hat keine Auswirkungen auf
+Umbruchänderungen, die bei Verwendung einer neueren Version durch Beseitigung
eindeutiger Fehler entstehen. Wer\textnote{Tipp!} auch im Fehlerfall
-unbedingte Umbruchkompatibilität benötigt, sollte stattdessen mit dem Dokument
+unbedingte Umbruchkompatibilität benötigt, sollte stattdessen mit dem Dokument
auch die verwendete \KOMAScript-Version archivieren.
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\begin{Example}
- Die Beispielbriefe dieses Kapitels sollen alle Möglichkeiten nutzen, die in
- der neusten Version von \KOMAScript{} zur Verfügung stehen. Dazu muss beim
- Laden der Klasse die Kompatibilität entsprechend gesetzt werden:%
+ Die Beispielbriefe dieses Kapitels sollen alle Möglichkeiten nutzen, die in
+ der neusten Version von \KOMAScript{} zur Verfügung stehen. Dazu muss beim
+ Laden der Klasse die Kompatibilität entsprechend gesetzt werden:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em,lastline=1]{letter-0.tex}%
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrektur
Hier wurde einfach mit dem symbolischen Wert \PValue{last} die neuste
- Version gewählt.%
+ Version gewählt.%
\else%
Um nicht bei jeder neuen Version eine neue Versionsnummer angeben zu
- müssen, wurde hier die Möglichkeit des symbolischen Wertes \PValue{last}
- gewählt.%
+ müssen, wurde hier die Möglichkeit des symbolischen Wertes \PValue{last}
+ gewählt.%
\fi
\end{Example}}{}
@@ -179,11 +179,11 @@ dem Laden %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\Package{scrextend}}{%
\InternalCommonFileUsageError }%
}%
-} nicht mehr verändert werden kann. Das Setzen mit
+} nicht mehr verändert werden kann. Das Setzen mit
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} ist
% Umbruchkorrektur!!!!
-\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2,typearea}{für diese Option }{}%
+\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2,typearea}{für diese Option }{}%
daher nicht vorgesehen.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -196,6 +196,6 @@ daher nicht vorgesehen.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex
index 22299b0e5d..85915257c7 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-dictum.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-dictum.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-dictum.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-29 14:12:59 +0100 (Mon, 29 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Redewendung}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictum}
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictum}
geschrieben wurde. %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
Allerdings werden von \Package{scrextend} die Anweisungen
@@ -72,18 +72,18 @@
\fi%
}{}%
Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictum} bereits
- gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf
+ gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictum.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictum.next} fortfahren.%
}
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% Umbruchkorrekturvarianten
- Ein häufiger anzutreffendes Element ist eine Redewendung oder Zitat, das
- rechtsbündig unter oder über einer Überschrift gesetzt wird. Dabei werden
+ Ein häufiger anzutreffendes Element ist eine Redewendung oder Zitat, das
+ rechtsbündig unter oder über einer Überschrift gesetzt wird. Dabei werden
der Spruch selbst und der Quellennachweis in der Regel speziell formatiert.%
}{%
- Ein häufiger anzutreffendes Element sind Zitate oder eine Redewendungen, die
- mit Quellenangabe und eigener Formatierung unter oder über einer Überschrift
+ Ein häufiger anzutreffendes Element sind Zitate oder eine Redewendungen, die
+ mit Quellenangabe und eigener Formatierung unter oder über einer Überschrift
gesetzt werden.%
}
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@
\end{Declaration}%
Ein solcher Spruch kann mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{dictum} gesetzt werden.
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
- Bei\textnote{Tipp!} \KOMAScript-Klassen wird für Kapitel oder Teile
+ Bei\textnote{Tipp!} \KOMAScript-Klassen wird für Kapitel oder Teile
empfohlen, \Macro{dictum} als obligatorisches Argument der Anweisung
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} beziehungsweise
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble} (siehe
@@ -110,13 +110,13 @@ Der Spruch wird\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ hierzu}{} zusammen mit einem
optional anzugebenden \PName{Urheber} in einer \Macro{parbox}\IndexCmd{parbox}
(siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) der Breite
\Macro{dictumwidth}\important{\Macro{dictumwidth}} gesetzt. Dabei ist
-\Macro{dictumwidth} keine Länge, die mit \Macro{setlength} gesetzt wird. Es
+\Macro{dictumwidth} keine Länge, die mit \Macro{setlength} gesetzt wird. Es
handelt sich um ein Makro, das mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert werden
kann. Vordefiniert ist \PValue{0.3333\Length{textwidth}}, also ein Drittel der
jeweiligen Textbreite. Die Box selbst wird mit der Anweisung
\Macro{raggeddictum}\important{\Macro{raggeddictum}}
ausgerichtet. Voreingestellt ist dabei
-\Macro{raggedleft}\IndexCmd{raggedleft}, also rechtsbündig.
+\Macro{raggedleft}\IndexCmd{raggedleft}, also rechtsbündig.
\Macro{raggeddictum} kann mit
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% Umbruchoptimierung
}{Hilfe von }\Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert werden.
@@ -124,18 +124,18 @@ ausgerichtet. Voreingestellt ist dabei
Innerhalb der Box wird der \PName{Spruch} mit
\Macro{raggeddictumtext}\important{\Macro{raggeddictumtext}}
angeordnet. Voreingestellt ist hier \Macro{raggedright}\IndexCmd{raggedright},
-also linksbündig. Eine Umdefinierung ist auch hier mit \Macro{renewcommand}
-möglich. %
+also linksbündig. Eine Umdefinierung ist auch hier mit \Macro{renewcommand}
+möglich. %
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dictum}\LabelFontElement{dictum}%
\LabelFontElement{dictumtext}%
-Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der für Element
+Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der für Element
\FontElement{dictum}\important{\FontElement{dictum}} eingestellten
Schriftart, die mit den Anweisungen
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden kann. Die
+\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden kann. Die
Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictumfont}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{.%
@@ -145,10 +145,10 @@ Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des
+ [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des
Spruchs}]
{\label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictumfont}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Voreinstel\-lungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Spruchs}
+ Voreinstel\-lungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Spruchs}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
\toprule
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte
}%
\EndIndexGroup
-Ist ein \PName{Urheber} angegeben, so wird dieser mit einer Linie über die
+Ist ein \PName{Urheber} angegeben, so wird dieser mit einer Linie über die
gesamte Breite der \Macro{parbox} vom \PName{Spruch} abgetrennt. Diese%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ handelt sich dabei um ein vertikales Objekt, das mit
vordefiniert ist.
Mit \Macro{raggeddictumauthor}\important{\Macro{raggeddictumauthor}} wird die
-Ausrichtung für die Linie und den Urheber vorgenommen. Voreingestellt ist
+Ausrichtung für die Linie und den Urheber vorgenommen. Voreingestellt ist
\Macro{raggedleft}. Auch diese Anweisung kann mit \Macro{renewcommand}
umdefiniert werden. Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der Form, die mit
\Macro{dictumauthorformat}\important{\Macro{dictumauthorformat}} festgelegt
@@ -197,18 +197,18 @@ Voreinstellung ist \Macro{dictumauthorformat} mit
definiert. Der \PName{Urheber} wird also in runde Klammern gesetzt. %
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dictumauthor}\LabelFontElement{dictumauthor}%
-Für das Element
+Für das Element
\FontElement{dictumauthor}\important{\FontElement{dictumauthor}} kann dabei
eine Abweichung der Schrift von der des Elementes
\FontElement{dictum}%
\IndexFontElement{dictum}%
\important{\FontElement{dictum}} definiert
werden. Die Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte
-\autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}. Eine Änderung ist mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
+\autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}. Eine Änderung ist mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) möglich.%
+\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) möglich.%
\EndIndexGroup
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
@@ -220,31 +220,31 @@ werden. Die Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte
beachten:\textnote{Achtung!} Die horizontale Anordnung erfolgt immer mit
\Macro{raggeddictum}. Das optionale Argument zur horizontalen Anordnung, das
die beiden Anweisungen vorsehen, bleibt daher ohne
- Wirkung. \Length{textwidth} ist nicht die Breite des gesamten Textkörpers,
+ Wirkung. \Length{textwidth} ist nicht die Breite des gesamten Textkörpers,
sondern wie bei \Environment{minipage} die aktuelle Textbreite. Ist also die
Breite \Macro{dictumwidth} als \PValue{.5\Length{textwidth}} definiert und
bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} wird als optionales Argument
- für die Breite ebenfalls \PValue{.5\Length{textwidth}} angegeben, so erfolgt
+ für die Breite ebenfalls \PValue{.5\Length{textwidth}} angegeben, so erfolgt
die Ausgabe in einer Box, deren Breite ein Viertel der Breite des
- Textkörpers ist. Es wird empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!}, bei Verwendung von
+ Textkörpers ist. Es wird empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!}, bei Verwendung von
\Macro{dictum} auf die optionale Angabe einer Breite bei
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} oder
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble} zu verzichten.
- Sollen\textnote{Tipp!} mehrere schlaue Sprüche untereinander gesetzt werden,
- so sollten diese durch einen zusätzlichen Abstand vertikal voneinander
+ Sollen\textnote{Tipp!} mehrere schlaue Sprüche untereinander gesetzt werden,
+ so sollten diese durch einen zusätzlichen Abstand vertikal voneinander
abgesetzt werden. Ein solcher kann leicht mit der Anweisung
\Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} gesetzt werden.%
\iftrue%
}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}
\begin{Example}
- Sie schreiben ein Kapitel über die moderne Ehe. Dabei wollen Sie in der
- Präambel zur Kapitelüberschrift einen schlauen Spruch setzen. Dieser soll
- unter der Überschrift erscheinen. Also schreiben Sie:
+ Sie schreiben ein Kapitel über die moderne Ehe. Dabei wollen Sie in der
+ Präambel zur Kapitelüberschrift einen schlauen Spruch setzen. Dieser soll
+ unter der Ãœberschrift erscheinen. Also schreiben Sie:
\begin{lstcode}
\setchapterpreamble[u]{%
- \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe,
+ \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe,
wer sich ewig bindet \dots}}
\chapter{Die moderne Ehe}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -253,11 +253,11 @@ werden. Die Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte
{\usekomafont{disposition}\usekomafont{chapter}\Large
17\enskip Die moderne Ehe\raggedright\par}
\vspace{\baselineskip}
- \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe, wer sich ewig bindet~\dots}
+ \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe, wer sich ewig bindet~\dots}
\end{ShowOutput}
Wenn Sie wollen, dass nicht ein Drittel, sondern nur ein Viertel der
- verfügbaren Textbreite für den Spruch verwendet wird, so definieren Sie
+ verfügbaren Textbreite für den Spruch verwendet wird, so definieren Sie
\Macro{dictumwidth} wie folgt um:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\dictumwidth}{.25\textwidth}
@@ -279,6 +279,6 @@ werden. Die Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex
index 77287f36cf..88e5c9d2b2 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-draftmode.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-draftmode.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-draftmode.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-30 13:37:05 +0100 (Tue, 30 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: draft)]
\section{Entwurfsmodus}
@@ -55,23 +55,23 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Entwurf}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Für
- \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{Es} gilt sinngemäß, was in
+ \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Für
+ \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{Es} gilt sinngemäß, was in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.draft} geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie
also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.draft} bereits gelesen und
- verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf
+ verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.draft.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.draft.next}
fortfahren.\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ Das Paket \Package{scrletter}
- bietet selbst keinen Entwurfsmodus, sondern verlässt sich diesbezüglich
+ bietet selbst keinen Entwurfsmodus, sondern verlässt sich diesbezüglich
auf die verwendete Klasse.}{}%
}
Viele Klassen und viele Pakete kennen neben dem normalen Satzmodus auch
einen Entwurfsmodus. Die Unterschiede zwischen diesen beiden sind so
-vielfältig wie die Klassen und Pakete, die diese Unterscheidung anbieten.%
+vielfältig wie die Klassen und Pakete, die diese Unterscheidung anbieten.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- \ So führt der Entwurfsmodus einiger Pakete auch zu Änderungen der Ausgabe,
+ \ So führt der Entwurfsmodus einiger Pakete auch zu Änderungen der Ausgabe,
die sich auf den Umbruch des Dokuments auswirken. Das ist bei
\Package{scrextend} jedoch nicht der Fall.%
}{}
@@ -89,14 +89,14 @@ Mit Option \Option{draft}\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
}{}%
} wird zwischen Dokumenten im Entwurfsstadium und fertigen
Dokumenten\Index{Endfassung} unterschieden. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann
-einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
+einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet
werden. Bei Aktivierung der Option\important{\OptionValue{draft}{true}} werden
-im Falle überlanger Zeilen am Zeilenende kleine, schwarze Kästchen
-ausgegeben. Diese Kästchen erleichtern dem ungeübten Auge, Absätze ausfindig
-zu machen, die manueller Nachbearbeitung bedürfen. Demgegenüber erscheinen in
+im Falle überlanger Zeilen am Zeilenende kleine, schwarze Kästchen
+ausgegeben. Diese Kästchen erleichtern dem ungeübten Auge, Absätze ausfindig
+zu machen, die manueller Nachbearbeitung bedürfen. Demgegenüber erscheinen in
der Standardeinstellung \OptionValue{draft}{false} keine solchen
-Kästchen. Solche Zeilen verschwinden übrigens häufig durch Verwendung des
+Kästchen. Solche Zeilen verschwinden übrigens häufig durch Verwendung des
Pakets
\Package{microtype}\IndexPackage{microtype}\important{\Package{microtype}}
\cite{package:microtype}.
@@ -112,9 +112,9 @@ Da\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Package{scrextend}}%
}{}%
}%
-} Option \Option{draft} bei verschiedenen Paketen zu allerlei unerwünschten
-Effekten führen kann, bietet \KOMAScript{} die Möglichkeit, die Markierung für
-überlange Zeilen auch über Option
+} Option \Option{draft} bei verschiedenen Paketen zu allerlei unerwünschten
+Effekten führen kann, bietet \KOMAScript{} die Möglichkeit, die Markierung für
+überlange Zeilen auch über Option
\Option{overfullrule}\important{\OptionValue{overfullrule}{true}} zu
steuern. Auch hier gilt, dass bei aktivierter Option die Markierung angezeigt
wird.
@@ -125,6 +125,6 @@ wird.
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex
index 325e6c4f0e..9d07ef553d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex
@@ -40,139 +40,139 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-fontsize.tex}
- [$Date: 2017-12-13 10:05:13 +0100 (Wed, 13 Dec 2017) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: fontsize)]
-\section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
+\section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
\seclabel{fontOptions}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe}
+\BeginIndex{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe}
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{%
- Die Grundschrift und deren Größe sind zentrale Elemente der Gestaltung eines
- Dokuments. Wie in \autoref{cha:typearea} ausgeführt wurde, hängt die
- Auf"|teilung zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern wesentlich davon ab. Die
- Grundschrift ist dabei die Schrift, die für die Masse des Textes eines
+ Die Grundschrift und deren Größe sind zentrale Elemente der Gestaltung eines
+ Dokuments. Wie in \autoref{cha:typearea} ausgeführt wurde, hängt die
+ Auf"|teilung zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern wesentlich davon ab. Die
+ Grundschrift ist dabei die Schrift, die für die Masse des Textes eines
Dokuments verwendet wird. Alle davon abweichenden Einstellungen, sei es in
- der Form, der Dicke, der Neigung oder der Größe, stehen in einer Beziehung
+ der Form, der Dicke, der Neigung oder der Größe, stehen in einer Beziehung
zur Grundschrift.%
}{%
- \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Für \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{scrlttr2}}{Es}
- gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontOptions}
+ \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Für \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{scrlttr2}}{Es}
+ gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontOptions}
geschrieben wurde. \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Paket
- \Package{scrletter} bietet selbst hingegen keine Schriftgrößenauswahl,
- sondern verlässt sich diesbezüglich vollständig auf die verwendete
+ \Package{scrletter} bietet selbst hingegen keine Schriftgrößenauswahl,
+ sondern verlässt sich diesbezüglich vollständig auf die verwendete
Klasse.}{} Falls Sie also
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontOptions} bereits gelesen und
- verstanden haben, können Sie \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{beim Beispiel
+ verstanden haben, können Sie \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{beim Beispiel
am Ende dieses Abschnitts auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.end} fortfahren. Wenn
- Sie dagegen \Package{scrletter} verwenden, können Sie auch }{}%
+ Sie dagegen \Package{scrletter} verwenden, können Sie auch }{}%
direkt zu \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.next} auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.next} springen.%
}
\begin{Declaration}
- \OptionVName{fontsize}{Größe}
+ \OptionVName{fontsize}{Größe}
\end{Declaration}
-Während\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{%
+Während\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{%
\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}} von den Standardklassen und
-den meisten anderen Klassen nur eine sehr beschränkte Anzahl an Schriftgrößen
-unterstützt wird, bietet
+den meisten anderen Klassen nur eine sehr beschränkte Anzahl an Schriftgrößen
+unterstützt wird, bietet
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\Class{scrlttr2}}{\KOMAScript} die
-Möglichkeit, jede beliebige \PName{Größe} für die Grundschrift
-anzugeben. Dabei kann als Einheit für die \PName{Größe} auch jede bekannte
-\TeX-Einheit verwendet werden. Wird die \PName{Größe} ohne Einheit angegeben,
+Möglichkeit, jede beliebige \PName{Größe} für die Grundschrift
+anzugeben. Dabei kann als Einheit für die \PName{Größe} auch jede bekannte
+\TeX-Einheit verwendet werden. Wird die \PName{Größe} ohne Einheit angegeben,
so wird \PValue{pt} als Einheit angenommen. \iffree{}{Das genaue Verfahren,
- nach dem die Schriftgröße dann eingestellt wird, ist für Experten und
+ nach dem die Schriftgröße dann eingestellt wird, ist für Experten und
interessierte Anwender in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.fontsize} dokumentiert.}
Wird die Option innerhalb des Dokuments gesetzt, so werden ab diesem Punkt die
-Grundschriftgröße und die davon abhängigen Schriftgrößen der Befehle
+Grundschriftgröße und die davon abhängigen Schriftgrößen der Befehle
\Macro{tiny}, \Macro{scriptsize}, \Macro{footnotesize}, \Macro{small},
\Macro{normalsize}, \Macro{large}, \Macro{Large}, \Macro{LARGE}, \Macro{huge}
-und \Macro{Huge} geändert. Das kann beispielsweise dann nützlich sein, wenn %
+und \Macro{Huge} geändert. Das kann beispielsweise dann nützlich sein, wenn %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ein weiterer Brief }{der Anhang }%
-insgesamt in einer kleineren Schriftgröße gesetzt werden soll.
+insgesamt in einer kleineren Schriftgröße gesetzt werden soll.
Es wird darauf\textnote{Achtung!} hingewiesen, dass bei Verwendung nach
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{einem eventuellen Laden von
\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}\IndexPackage{typearea}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}}}{dem Laden der
- Klasse} die Auf"|teilung zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern nicht automatisch
+ Klasse} die Auf"|teilung zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern nicht automatisch
neu berechnet wird (siehe
\DescRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}\IndexCmd{recalctypearea},
\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea},
\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). Wird diese Neuberechnung jedoch
-vorgenommen, so erfolgt sie auf Basis der jeweils gültigen
-Grundschriftgröße. Die Auswirkungen des Wechsels der Grundschriftgröße auf
-zusätzlich geladene Pakete oder die verwendete Klasse sind von diesen Paketen
-und der Klasse abhängig. %
+vorgenommen, so erfolgt sie auf Basis der jeweils gültigen
+Grundschriftgröße. Die Auswirkungen des Wechsels der Grundschriftgröße auf
+zusätzlich geladene Pakete oder die verwendete Klasse sind von diesen Paketen
+und der Klasse abhängig. %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
- Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{}
+ Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{}
angesehen werden, und auch die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst passen nicht alle
- Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene Änderung der
- Grundschriftgröße an.%
+ Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene Änderung der
+ Grundschriftgröße an.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
- Dabei sind Fehler möglich, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{}
+ Dabei sind Fehler möglich, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{}
betrachtet werden, und auch die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} selbst passt nicht
- alle Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene Änderung der
- Grundschriftgröße an.%
+ alle Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene Änderung der
+ Grundschriftgröße an.%
}{%
- Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{}
+ Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{}
angesehen werden.%
}%
}%
-Diese\textnote{Achtung!} Option sollte keinesfalls als Ersatz für
+Diese\textnote{Achtung!} Option sollte keinesfalls als Ersatz für
\Macro{fontsize} (siehe \cite{latex:fntguide}) missverstanden werden. Sie
-sollte auch nicht anstelle einer der von der Grundschrift abhängigen
-Schriftgrößenanweisungen, \Macro{tiny} bis \Macro{Huge}, verwendet werden!
+sollte auch nicht anstelle einer der von der Grundschrift abhängigen
+Schriftgrößenanweisungen, \Macro{tiny} bis \Macro{Huge}, verwendet werden!
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
Bei \Class{scrlttr2} ist \OptionValue{fontsize}{12pt} voreingestellt.
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\label{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.end}%
Angenommen, bei dem Verein aus dem Beispielbrief handelt es sich um die
- \emph{»Freunde ungesunder Schriftgrößen«}, weshalb er in 14\Unit{pt} statt
- in 12\Unit{pt} gesetzt werden soll. Dies kann durch eine kleine Änderung
+ \emph{»Freunde ungesunder Schriftgrößen«}, weshalb er in 14\Unit{pt} statt
+ in 12\Unit{pt} gesetzt werden soll. Dies kann durch eine kleine Änderung
der ersten Zeile erreicht werden:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-6}%
- Alternativ könnte die Option auch als optionales Argument von
+ Alternativ könnte die Option auch als optionales Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} gesetzt werden:
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-5}%
- Da bei dieser späten Änderung der Schriftgröße der Satzspiegel nicht
- geändert wird, unterscheiden sich die beiden Ergebnisse in
+ Da bei dieser späten Änderung der Schriftgröße der Satzspiegel nicht
+ geändert wird, unterscheiden sich die beiden Ergebnisse in
\autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6}.
\begin{figure}
\centering
% \setcapindent{0pt}
% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text,
-% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer
+% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer
% Schrift}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text,
-% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer
-% Schrift (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für
-% DIN-Briefe); links wurde die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von
+% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer
+% Schrift (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für
+% DIN-Briefe); links wurde die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von
% \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} gesetzt, rechts als optionales Argument von
% \Macro{documentclass}}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-5}}\quad
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-6}}
% \end{captionbeside}
\caption[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund
- großer Schrift}]
+ Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund
+ großer Schrift}]
{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer
- Schrift (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für
- DIN-Briefe); links wurde die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von
+ Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer
+ Schrift (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für
+ DIN-Briefe); links wurde die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} gesetzt, rechts als optionales
Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}}
\label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6}
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Schriftgrößenanweisungen, \Macro{tiny} bis \Macro{Huge}, verwendet werden!
\phantomsection\label{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.end}%
Voreingestellt ist bei \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und
\Class{scrartcl} \OptionValue{fontsize}{11pt}.\textnote{\KOMAScript{}
- vs. Standardklassen} Demgegenüber ist übrigens bei den Standardklassen
+ vs. Standardklassen} Demgegenüber ist übrigens bei den Standardklassen
\Option{10pt} voreingestellt. Dies ist bei einem Wechsel von den
Standardklassen zu den \KOMAScript-Klassen\iffree{}{ oder bei Verwendung
von Option \DescRef{maincls-experts.option.emulatestandardclasses}%
@@ -197,6 +197,6 @@ Schriftgrößenanweisungen, \Macro{tiny} bis \Macro{Huge}, verwendet werden!
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex
index 0b0335d39c..4300665762 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-footnotes.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-footnotes.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,29 +40,29 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-footnotes.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-01-29 14:12:59 +0100 (Mon, 29 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
-\section{Fußnoten}
+\section{Fußnoten}
\seclabel{footnotes}%
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Fussnoten=Fußnoten}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Fussnoten=Fußnoten}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}
geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} bereits gelesen und
- verstanden haben, können Sie auf
+ verstanden haben, können Sie auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes.next} mit
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes.next} fortfahren.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ %
- Wird keine \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet, stützt sich
+ Wird keine \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet, stützt sich
\Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}} auf das Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrextend]{\Package{scrextend}}\IndexPackage{scrextend}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrextend]{\Package{scrextend}}}. Siehe daher bei
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
\ Beachten Sie insbesondere, dass in
diesem Fall einige \KOMAScript-typische Erweiterungen in der
Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} nicht aktiv sind. Stattdessen
- gelten in der Voreinstellung die Fußnotenmöglichkeiten der verwendeten
+ gelten in der Voreinstellung die Fußnotenmöglichkeiten der verwendeten
Klasse oder des \LaTeX-Kerns.%
\fi%
}{}%
@@ -81,39 +81,39 @@
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
Im\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} Unterschied zu den
- Standardklassen bietet \KOMAScript{} die Möglichkeit, die Form von Fußnoten
- in vielfältiger Weise zu konfigurieren.%
+ Standardklassen bietet \KOMAScript{} die Möglichkeit, die Form von Fußnoten
+ in vielfältiger Weise zu konfigurieren.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
- Die Anweisungen zum Setzen von Fußnoten sind in jeder \LaTeX-Einführung,
+ Die Anweisungen zum Setzen von Fußnoten sind in jeder \LaTeX-Einführung,
beispielsweise \cite{l2kurz}, zu
finden. \KOMAScript{}\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} bietet
- darüber hinaus aber auch noch die Möglichkeit, die Form der Fußnoten zu
- verändern. %
+ darüber hinaus aber auch noch die Möglichkeit, die Form der Fußnoten zu
+ verändern. %
\iffalse % Umbruchoptimierung
- Ob Fußnoten bei Briefen überhaupt zulässig sind, hängt sehr stark von
+ Ob Fußnoten bei Briefen überhaupt zulässig sind, hängt sehr stark von
der Art des Briefs und dessen Layout ab. So sind beispielsweise optische
- Kollisionen mit dem Fuß des Briefbogens oder Verwechslungen mit der
- Auf"|listung von Verteilern oder ähnlichen typischen Elementen von
+ Kollisionen mit dem Fuß des Briefbogens oder Verwechslungen mit der
+ Auf"|listung von Verteilern oder ähnlichen typischen Elementen von
Briefen zu vermeiden. Dies liegt in der Verantwortung des Anwenders.%
- Da Fußnoten in Briefen eher selten verwendet werden, wurde auf Beispiele
- in diesem Abschnitt verzichtet. Sollten Sie Beispiele benötigen, können
+ Da Fußnoten in Briefen eher selten verwendet werden, wurde auf Beispiele
+ in diesem Abschnitt verzichtet. Sollten Sie Beispiele benötigen, können
Sie solche in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} ab
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} finden.%
\fi%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
- Die Fußnoten-Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen werden von
+ Die Fußnoten-Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen werden von
\Package{scrextend} ebenfalls bereitgestellt. In der Voreinstellung wird
- die Formatierung der Fußnoten jedoch der verwendeten Klasse
- überlassen. Dies ändert sich, sobald die Anweisung
+ die Formatierung der Fußnoten jedoch der verwendeten Klasse
+ überlassen. Dies ändert sich, sobald die Anweisung
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote} verwendet wird, die auf
- \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote} näher erläutert
+ \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote} näher erläutert
wird.
- Die Einstellmöglichkeiten für die Trennlinie über den Fußnoten werden
+ Die Einstellmöglichkeiten für die Trennlinie über den Fußnoten werden
hingegen von \Package{scrextend} nicht bereitgestellt.%
}{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
}%
@@ -124,8 +124,8 @@
\OptionVName{footnotes}{Einstellung}
\Macro{multfootsep}
\end{Declaration}
-\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{Bei vielen Klassen werden Fußnoten }{%
- Fußnoten %
+\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{Bei vielen Klassen werden Fußnoten }{%
+ Fußnoten %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
@@ -139,13 +139,13 @@
im Text in der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} mit kleinen,
hochgestellten Ziffern markiert. Werden in der
Voreinstellung\important{\OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple}}
-\OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} zu einer Textstelle mehrere Fußnoten
+\OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} zu einer Textstelle mehrere Fußnoten
hintereinander gesetzt, so entsteht der Eindruck, dass es sich nicht um zwei
-einzelne Fußnoten, sondern um eine einzige Fußnote mit hoher Nummer handele.
+einzelne Fußnoten, sondern um eine einzige Fußnote mit hoher Nummer handele.
Mit\important{\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}}
\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}\IndexOption{footnotes=~multiple} werden
-Fußnoten, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen, stattdessen mit einem
+Fußnoten, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen, stattdessen mit einem
Trennzeichen aneinander gereiht. Das in
\Macro{multfootsep}\important{\Macro{multfootsep}} definierte Trennzeichen ist
als
@@ -158,36 +158,36 @@ werden.
Der gesamte Mechanismus ist kompatibel zu
\Package{footmisc}\IndexPackage{footmisc}\important{\Package{footmisc}},
Version~5.3d bis 5.5b (siehe \cite{package:footmisc}) implementiert. Er wirkt
-sich sowohl auf Fußnotenmarkierungen aus, die mit
+sich sowohl auf Fußnotenmarkierungen aus, die mit
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote}\IndexCmd{footnote} gesetzt wurden,
als auch auf solche, die direkt mit
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark}\IndexCmd{footnotemark}
ausgegeben werden.
-Es ist jederzeit möglich, mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}
+Es ist jederzeit möglich, mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}
oder \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} auf die Voreinstellung
-\OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} zurückzuschalten. Bei Problemen mit
-anderen Paketen, die Einfluss auf die Fußnoten nehmen, sollte die Option
+\OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} zurückzuschalten. Bei Problemen mit
+anderen Paketen, die Einfluss auf die Fußnoten nehmen, sollte die Option
jedoch nicht verwendet und die Einstellung auch nicht innerhalb des Dokuments
umgeschaltet werden.
-Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
+Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\Option{footnotes} bietet
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{%
.
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{footnotes}}]{Mögliche Werte für
- Option \Option{footnotes} zur Einstellung der Fußnoten}
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{footnotes}}]{Mögliche Werte für
+ Option \Option{footnotes} zur Einstellung der Fußnoten}
\label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes}
\begin{desctabular}
\pventry{multiple}{%
- Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden durch
+ Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden durch
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep}
voneinander getrennt ausgegeben.%
\IndexOption{footnotes~=\textKValue{multiple}}}%
\pventry{nomultiple}{%
- Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden auch
+ Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden auch
unmittelbar aufeinander folgend ausgegeben.%
\IndexOption{footnotes~=\textKValue{nomultiple}}}%
\end{desctabular}
@@ -205,13 +205,13 @@ Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\Macro{footnotetext}\OParameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}
\Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}
\end{Declaration}%
-Fußnoten werden bei {\KOMAScript} genau wie bei den Standardklassen mit der
+Fußnoten werden bei {\KOMAScript} genau wie bei den Standardklassen mit der
Anweisung \Macro{footnote} oder den paarweise zu verwendenden Anweisungen
\Macro{footnotemark} und \Macro{footnotetext} erzeugt. Genau wie bei den
-Standardklassen ist es möglich, dass innerhalb einer Fußnote ein
-Seiten"-umbruch erfolgt. Dies geschieht in der Regel dann, wenn die zugehörige
-Fußnotenmarkierung so weit unten auf der Seite gesetzt wird, dass keine andere
-Wahl bleibt, als die Fußnote auf die nächste Seite zu umbrechen. Im
+Standardklassen ist es möglich, dass innerhalb einer Fußnote ein
+Seiten"-umbruch erfolgt. Dies geschieht in der Regel dann, wenn die zugehörige
+Fußnotenmarkierung so weit unten auf der Seite gesetzt wird, dass keine andere
+Wahl bleibt, als die Fußnote auf die nächste Seite zu umbrechen. Im
Unterschied\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
@@ -221,62 +221,62 @@ Unterschied\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}%
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
}{}%
} %
-zu den Standardklassen bietet \KOMAScript{} aber zusätzlich die Möglichkeit,
-Fußnoten, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen, automatisch zu erkennen und
+zu den Standardklassen bietet \KOMAScript{} aber zusätzlich die Möglichkeit,
+Fußnoten, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen, automatisch zu erkennen und
durch ein Trennzeichen auseinander zu
-rücken. Siehe\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.footnotes}} hierzu
+rücken. Siehe\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.footnotes}} hierzu
die zuvor dokumentierte Option
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.footnotes}.
-Will man dieses Trennzeichen stattdessen von Hand setzen, so erhält man es
+Will man dieses Trennzeichen stattdessen von Hand setzen, so erhält man es
durch Aufruf von \Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}. Diese Anweisung sollten
Anwender jedoch nicht umdefinieren, da sie neben dem Trennzeichen auch die
-Formatierung des Trennzeichen, beispielsweise die Wahl der Schriftgröße und
-das Hochstellen, enthält. Das Trennzeichen selbst ist in der zuvor erklärten
+Formatierung des Trennzeichen, beispielsweise die Wahl der Schriftgröße und
+das Hochstellen, enthält. Das Trennzeichen selbst ist in der zuvor erklärten
Anweisung \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}%
\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}}%
\IndexCmd{multfootsep} gespeichert.
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{%
- Beispiele und ergänzende Hinweise sind
+ Beispiele und ergänzende Hinweise sind
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} ab
\PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.footnote} zu entnehmen.%
\csname iffalse\endcsname
}%
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.footnote}%
- Angenommen, Sie wollen zu einem Wort zwei Fußnoten setzen. Im ersten
- Ansatz schreiben Sie dafür
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen zu einem Wort zwei Fußnoten setzen. Im ersten
+ Ansatz schreiben Sie dafür
\begin{lstcode}
- Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}\footnote{Fußnote 2}.
+ Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}\footnote{Fußnote 2}.
\end{lstcode}
- Nehmen wir weiter an, dass die Fußnoten mit 1 und 2 nummeriert werden. Da
- die beiden Fußnotennummern direkt aufeinander folgen, entsteht jedoch der
- Eindruck, dass das Wort nur eine Fußnote mit der Nummer 12 besitzt. Sie
- könnten dies nun dadurch ändern, dass Sie mit
+ Nehmen wir weiter an, dass die Fußnoten mit 1 und 2 nummeriert werden. Da
+ die beiden Fußnotennummern direkt aufeinander folgen, entsteht jedoch der
+ Eindruck, dass das Wort nur eine Fußnote mit der Nummer 12 besitzt. Sie
+ könnten dies nun dadurch ändern, dass Sie mit
\begin{lstcode}
\KOMAoptions{footnotes=multiple}
\end{lstcode}
- die automatische Erkennung von Fußnotenhäufungen aktivieren. Stattdessen
- können Sie aber auch
+ die automatische Erkennung von Fußnotenhäufungen aktivieren. Stattdessen
+ können Sie aber auch
\begin{lstcode}
- Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}%
+ Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}%
\multiplefootnoteseparator
- \footnote{Fußnote 2}
+ \footnote{Fußnote 2}
\end{lstcode}
verwenden. Das sollte auch dann noch funktionieren, wenn die automatische
- Erkennung aus irgendwelchen Gründen versagt oder nicht verwendet werden
+ Erkennung aus irgendwelchen Gründen versagt oder nicht verwendet werden
kann.
- Nehmen wir nun an, Sie wollen außerdem, dass die Fußnotennummern
+ Nehmen wir nun an, Sie wollen außerdem, dass die Fußnotennummern
nicht nur durch ein Komma, sondern durch ein Komma, gefolgt von einem
Leerzeichen getrennt werden sollen. In diesem Fall schreiben Sie
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\multfootsep}{,\nobreakspace}
\end{lstcode}
- in Ihre Dokumentpräambel. \Macro{nobreakspace}\IndexCmd{nobreakspace} wurde
- hier anstelle eines normalen Leerzeichens gewählt, damit innerhalb der
- Reihung der Fußnotenzeichen kein Absatz- oder Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann.
+ in Ihre Dokumentpräambel. \Macro{nobreakspace}\IndexCmd{nobreakspace} wurde
+ hier anstelle eines normalen Leerzeichens gewählt, damit innerhalb der
+ Reihung der Fußnotenzeichen kein Absatz- oder Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann.
\end{Example}%
\fi%
%
@@ -295,24 +295,24 @@ Manchmal%
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
}{}%
} %
-hat man in einem Dokument eine Fußnote, zu der es im Text mehrere Verweise
-geben soll. Die ungünstige Lösung dafür wäre die Verwendung von
-\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark} unter Angabe der gewünschten
-Nummer. Ungünstig an dieser Lösung ist, dass man die Nummer kennen muss und
-sich diese jederzeit ändern kann. \KOMAScript{} bietet deshalb die
-Möglichkeit, den
-\Macro{label}-Mechanismus\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}} auch für
-Verweise auf Fußnoten zu verwenden. Man setzt dabei in der entsprechenden
-Fußnote eine \Macro{label}-Anweisung und kann dann mit \Macro{footref} alle
-weiteren Fußnotenmarken für diese Fußnote im Text setzen.
+hat man in einem Dokument eine Fußnote, zu der es im Text mehrere Verweise
+geben soll. Die ungünstige Lösung dafür wäre die Verwendung von
+\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark} unter Angabe der gewünschten
+Nummer. Ungünstig an dieser Lösung ist, dass man die Nummer kennen muss und
+sich diese jederzeit ändern kann. \KOMAScript{} bietet deshalb die
+Möglichkeit, den
+\Macro{label}-Mechanismus\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}} auch für
+Verweise auf Fußnoten zu verwenden. Man setzt dabei in der entsprechenden
+Fußnote eine \Macro{label}-Anweisung und kann dann mit \Macro{footref} alle
+weiteren Fußnotenmarken für diese Fußnote im Text setzen.
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}%
- % Umbruchkorrektur über diverse Varianten!!!
+ % Umbruchkorrektur über diverse Varianten!!!
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection
\xmpllabel{cmd.footref}%
Sie schreiben einen Text, in dem sie bei jedem Auf"|treten eines
- Markennamens eine Fußnote setzen müssen, die darauf hinweist, dass es sich
- um einen geschützten Markennamen handelt. Sie schreiben beispielsweise:%
+ Markennamens eine Fußnote setzen müssen, die darauf hinweist, dass es sich
+ um einen geschützten Markennamen handelt. Sie schreiben beispielsweise:%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}%
\begin{lstcode}
Die Firma SplischSplasch\footnote{Bei diesem
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ weiteren Fußnotenmarken für diese Fußnote im Text setzen.
auch noch die verbesserte Version
SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} her.
\end{lstcode}
- Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal mit
+ Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal mit
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote} direkt und zweimal mit
\Macro{footref}.
\else\iftrue
@@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ weiteren Fußnotenmarken für diese Fußnote im Text setzen.
auch noch die verbesserte Version
SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} her.
\end{lstcode}
- Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal
+ Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal
mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote} direkt und zweimal mit
\Macro{footref}.
\else
@@ -352,16 +352,16 @@ weiteren Fußnotenmarken für diese Fußnote im Text setzen.
beliebte
SplischSplaschPlumps\footref{refnote} her.
\end{lstcode}
- Es wird dann vier Mal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal
+ Es wird dann vier Mal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal
mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote} direkt und drei Mal
mit \Macro{footref}.
\fi%
\fi
\end{Example}
\fi
-Da die Fußnotenmarken mit Hilfe des \Macro{label}-Mechanismus gesetzt werden,
-werden nach Änderungen, die sich auf die Fußnotennummerierung auswirken,
-gegebenenfalls zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt, bis die mit \Macro{footref}
+Da die Fußnotenmarken mit Hilfe des \Macro{label}-Mechanismus gesetzt werden,
+werden nach Änderungen, die sich auf die Fußnotennummerierung auswirken,
+gegebenenfalls zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt, bis die mit \Macro{footref}
gesetzten Marken korrekt sind.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrlttr2,scrextend}{\par%
Ein Beispiel zur Verwendung von \Macro{footref} finden Sie in
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ gesetzten Marken korrekt sind.%
\par
Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die Anweisung genau wie
\Macro{ref}\IndexCmd{ref} oder \Macro{pageref}\IndexCmd{pageref} zerbrechlich
- ist und deshalb in beweglichen Argumenten wie Überschriften
+ ist und deshalb in beweglichen Argumenten wie Ãœberschriften
\Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect} davor gestellt werden sollte.%
}%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -386,18 +386,18 @@ gesetzten Marken korrekt sind.%
\end{Declaration}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen}{\KOMAScript{}
setzt}\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}
-Fußnoten etwas anders als die Standardklassen.
-Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text, also die Referenzierung der Fußnote, erfolgt
+Fußnoten etwas anders als die Standardklassen.
+Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text, also die Referenzierung der Fußnote, erfolgt
wie bei den Standardklassen durch kleine hochgestellte Zahlen. Genauso werden
-die Markierungen auch in der Fußnote selbst wiedergegeben. Sie werden dabei
-rechtsbündig in einem Feld der Breite \PName{Markenbreite} gesetzt. Die erste
-Zeile der Fußnote schließt direkt an das Feld der Markierung an.
+die Markierungen auch in der Fußnote selbst wiedergegeben. Sie werden dabei
+rechtsbündig in einem Feld der Breite \PName{Markenbreite} gesetzt. Die erste
+Zeile der Fußnote schließt direkt an das Feld der Markierung an.
Alle weiteren Zeilen werden um den Betrag von \PName{Einzug} eingezogen
ausgegeben. Wird der optionale Parameter \PName{Markenbreite} nicht angegeben,
-dann entspricht er dem Wert von \PName{Einzug}. Sollte die Fußnote aus
-mehreren Absätzen bestehen, dann wird die erste Zeile eines Absatzes
-zusätzlich mit dem Einzug der Größe \PName{Absatzeinzug} versehen.
+dann entspricht er dem Wert von \PName{Einzug}. Sollte die Fußnote aus
+mehreren Absätzen bestehen, dann wird die erste Zeile eines Absatzes
+zusätzlich mit dem Einzug der Größe \PName{Absatzeinzug} versehen.
\autoref{fig:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.deffootnote} %
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{auf
@@ -421,15 +421,15 @@ Definition: \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname
Dabei wird mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.textsuperscript}
sowohl die Hochstellung als auch die Wahl einer kleineren Schrift
erreicht. Die Anweisung \Macro{thefootnotemark} liefert die aktuelle
-Fußnotenmarke ohne jegliche Formatierung.%
+Fußnotenmarke ohne jegliche Formatierung.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ %
- Das Paket \Package{scrextend} überlässt hingegen in der Voreinstellung das
- Setzen der Fußnoten der verwendeten Klasse. Das Laden des Pakets allein
- sollte daher noch zu keinerlei Änderungen bei der Formatierung der Fußnoten
- oder der Fußnotenmarken führen. Zur Übernahme der Voreinstellungen der
+ Das Paket \Package{scrextend} überlässt hingegen in der Voreinstellung das
+ Setzen der Fußnoten der verwendeten Klasse. Das Laden des Pakets allein
+ sollte daher noch zu keinerlei Änderungen bei der Formatierung der Fußnoten
+ oder der Fußnotenmarken führen. Zur Übernahme der Voreinstellungen der
\KOMAScript-Klassen muss man vielmehr obige Einstellung selbst
- vornehmen. Dazu können obige Code-Zeilen beispielsweise unmittelbar nach dem
- Laden von \Package{scrextend} eingefügt werden.%
+ vornehmen. Dazu können obige Code-Zeilen beispielsweise unmittelbar nach dem
+ Laden von \Package{scrextend} eingefügt werden.%
}{}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
@@ -437,10 +437,10 @@ Fußnotenmarke ohne jegliche Formatierung.%
% \centering
\KOMAoption{captions}{bottombeside}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
- \begin{captionbeside}[{Parameter für die Darstellung der
- Fußnoten}]%
+ \begin{captionbeside}[{Parameter für die Darstellung der
+ Fußnoten}]%
{\label{fig:\ThisCommonLabelBase.deffootnote}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- \mbox{Parameter} für die Darstellung der Fußnoten}%
+ \mbox{Parameter} für die Darstellung der Fußnoten}%
[l]
\setlength{\unitlength}{1.02mm}
\begin{picture}(95,22)
@@ -461,9 +461,9 @@ Fußnotenmarke ohne jegliche Formatierung.%
\put(0,16.5){\framebox(14.5,4.5){\mbox{}}}
% description of paragraphs
\put(45,16){\makebox(0,0)[l]{%
- \small\textsf{erster Absatz einer Fußnote}}}
+ \small\textsf{erster Absatz einer Fußnote}}}
\put(45,5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{%
- \small\textsf{folgender Absatz einer Fußnote}}}
+ \small\textsf{folgender Absatz einer Fußnote}}}
% help lines
\thicklines
\multiput(0,0)(0,3){7}{\line(0,1){2}}
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ Auf%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
-}{} die Fußnote einschließlich der Markierung findet außerdem die für das
+}{} die Fußnote einschließlich der Markierung findet außerdem die für das
Element \FontElement{footnote}\important{\FontElement{footnote}} eingestellte
Schriftart Anwendung. Die % Umbruchkorrekturvarianten
%\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{davon abweichende }{}%
@@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Schriftart der Markierung kann %
mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
+\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
\FontElement{footnotelabel}\important{\FontElement{footnotelabel}} davon
abweichend eingestellt werden. Siehe hierzu auch
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontelements},
@@ -512,17 +512,17 @@ abweichend eingestellt werden. Siehe hierzu auch
jeweils keine Umschaltung der Schrift.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ %
Die Elemente finden bei scrextend jedoch nur dann Anwendung, wenn die
- Fußnoten mit diesem Paket gesetzt werden, also \Macro{deffootnote} verwendet
+ Fußnoten mit diesem Paket gesetzt werden, also \Macro{deffootnote} verwendet
wurde.%
-}{} Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} missbrauchen Sie das Element nicht für andere
-Zwecke, beispielsweise zur Verwendung von Flattersatz in den Fußnoten (siehe
+}{} Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} missbrauchen Sie das Element nicht für andere
+Zwecke, beispielsweise zur Verwendung von Flattersatz in den Fußnoten (siehe
dazu auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.raggedfootnote},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.raggedfootnote}).
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotereference}%
\LabelFontElement{footnotereference}%
-Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text wird getrennt von der Markierung vor der
-Fußnote definiert. Dies geschieht mit der Anweisung
+Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text wird getrennt von der Markierung vor der
+Fußnote definiert. Dies geschieht mit der Anweisung
\Macro{deffootnotemark}. Voreingestellt ist hier:
\begin{lstcode}
\deffootnotemark{\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}}
@@ -531,16 +531,16 @@ Dabei findet%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
-}{} die Schriftart für das Element
+}{} die Schriftart für das Element
\FontElement{footnotereference}\IndexFontElement{footnotereference}%
\important{\FontElement{footnotereference}} Anwendung (siehe %
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements},
\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}). Die Markierungen im Text
-und in der Fußnote selbst sind also identisch. Die Schriftart kann mit den
+und in der Fußnote selbst sind also identisch. Die Schriftart kann mit den
Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) jedoch geändert werden%
+\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) jedoch geändert werden%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{, sobald die Anweisung
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnotemark} verwendet wird}{}.
@@ -548,20 +548,20 @@ Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection
\xmpllabel{cmd.deffootnote}%
- Relativ\textnote{Tipp!} häufig wird gewünscht, dass die Markierung in der
- Fußnote selbst weder hochgestellt noch kleiner gesetzt wird. Dabei soll
- sie aber nicht direkt am Text kleben, sondern geringfügig davor
+ Relativ\textnote{Tipp!} häufig wird gewünscht, dass die Markierung in der
+ Fußnote selbst weder hochgestellt noch kleiner gesetzt wird. Dabei soll
+ sie aber nicht direkt am Text kleben, sondern geringfügig davor
stehen. Dies kann zum einen wie folgt erreicht werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\deffootnote{1em}{1em}{\thefootnotemark\ }
\end{lstcode}
- Die Fußnotenmarkierung und das folgende Leerzeichen wird also rechtsbündig
+ Die Fußnotenmarkierung und das folgende Leerzeichen wird also rechtsbündig
in eine Box der Breite 1\Unit{em} gesetzt. Die folgenden Zeilen der
- Fußnote werden gegenüber dem linken Rand ebenfalls um 1\Unit{em}
+ Fußnote werden gegenüber dem linken Rand ebenfalls um 1\Unit{em}
eingezogen.
- Eine\textnote{Tipp!} weitere, oft gefragte Formatierung sind linksbündige
- Fußnotenmarkierungen in der Fußnote. Diese können mit folgender Definition
+ Eine\textnote{Tipp!} weitere, oft gefragte Formatierung sind linksbündige
+ Fußnotenmarkierungen in der Fußnote. Diese können mit folgender Definition
erhalten werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\deffootnote{1.5em}{1em}{%
@@ -569,21 +569,21 @@ Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
}
\end{lstcode}
- Sollen jedoch die Fußnoten insgesamt lediglich in einer anderen
+ Sollen jedoch die Fußnoten insgesamt lediglich in einer anderen
Schriftart, beispielsweise serifenlos gesetzt werden, so ist dies ganz
einfach mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
- \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) zu lösen:
+ \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) zu lösen:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomafont{footnote}{\sffamily}
\end{lstcode}%
\end{Example}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{%
- Wie die Beispiele zeigen, ermöglicht {\KOMAScript} mit dieser einfachen
- Benutzerschnittstelle eine große Vielfalt unterschiedlicher
- Fußnotenformatierungen.%
+ Wie die Beispiele zeigen, ermöglicht {\KOMAScript} mit dieser einfachen
+ Benutzerschnittstelle eine große Vielfalt unterschiedlicher
+ Fußnotenformatierungen.%
}%
\fi%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
@@ -597,9 +597,9 @@ Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{setfootnoterule}\OParameter{Höhe}\Parameter{Länge}%
+ \Macro{setfootnoterule}\OParameter{Höhe}\Parameter{Länge}%
\end{Declaration}%
-Üblicherweise%
+Ãœblicherweise%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
@@ -612,15 +612,15 @@ Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
}{}%
}%
} %
-wird zwischen dem Textbereich und dem Fußnotenapparat eine Trennlinie gesetzt,
-die jedoch normalerweise nicht über die gesamte Breite des Satzspiegels
-geht. Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann die genaue Länge und die Höhe oder Dicke
-der Linie bestimmt werden. Dabei werden \PName{Höhe} und \PName{Länge} erst
-beim Setzen der Linie selbst abhängig von \Macro{normalsize} ausgewertet. Der
-optionale Parameter \PName{Höhe} kann komplett entfallen und wird dann nicht
-geändert. Ist das Argument \PName{Höhe} oder \PName{Länge} leer, so wird die
-jeweilige Größe ebenfalls nicht geändert. Es gibt sowohl beim Setzen als auch
-bei Verwendung der Größen für unplausible Werte eine Warnung.
+wird zwischen dem Textbereich und dem Fußnotenapparat eine Trennlinie gesetzt,
+die jedoch normalerweise nicht über die gesamte Breite des Satzspiegels
+geht. Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann die genaue Länge und die Höhe oder Dicke
+der Linie bestimmt werden. Dabei werden \PName{Höhe} und \PName{Länge} erst
+beim Setzen der Linie selbst abhängig von \Macro{normalsize} ausgewertet. Der
+optionale Parameter \PName{Höhe} kann komplett entfallen und wird dann nicht
+geändert. Ist das Argument \PName{Höhe} oder \PName{Länge} leer, so wird die
+jeweilige Größe ebenfalls nicht geändert. Es gibt sowohl beim Setzen als auch
+bei Verwendung der Größen für unplausible Werte eine Warnung.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnoterule}\LabelFontElement{footnoterule}%
@@ -637,14 +637,14 @@ Die Farbe%
}{}%
}%
} %
-der Linie kann über das Element
+der Linie kann über das Element
\FontElement{footnoterule}\important{\FontElement{footnoterule}} mit Hilfe der
Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) eingestellt
-werden. Voreingestellt ist hierbei keinerlei Änderung von Schrift oder
-Farbe. Um die Farbe ändern zu können, muss außerdem ein Farbpaket wie
+werden. Voreingestellt ist hierbei keinerlei Änderung von Schrift oder
+Farbe. Um die Farbe ändern zu können, muss außerdem ein Farbpaket wie
\Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}\important{\Package{xcolor}} geladen
sein.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -667,17 +667,17 @@ In%
}{}%
}%
} %
-der Voreinstellung werden die Fußnoten bei \KOMAScript{} genau wie bei den
+der Voreinstellung werden die Fußnoten bei \KOMAScript{} genau wie bei den
Standardklassen im Blocksatz gesetzt. Es\textnote{\KOMAScript{}
- vs. Standardklassen} ist aber auch möglich die Formatierung abweichend vom
-restlichen Dokument zu ändern. Dazu ist \Macro{raggedfootnote}
-umzudefinieren. Gültige Definitionen wären
+ vs. Standardklassen} ist aber auch möglich die Formatierung abweichend vom
+restlichen Dokument zu ändern. Dazu ist \Macro{raggedfootnote}
+umzudefinieren. Gültige Definitionen wären
\Macro{raggedright}\IndexCmd{raggedright},
\Macro{raggedleft}\IndexCmd{raggedleft},
\Macro{centering}\IndexCmd{centering}, \Macro{relax}\IndexCmd{relax} oder
entsprechend der Voreinstellung eine leere Definition. Auch die
Ausrichtungsbefehle des Pakets \Package{ragged2e}\IndexPackage{ragged2e} sind
-zulässig (siehe \cite{package:ragged2e}).
+zulässig (siehe \cite{package:ragged2e}).
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
Ein passendes Beispiel ist in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes},
@@ -686,13 +686,13 @@ zulässig (siehe \cite{package:ragged2e}).
}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}%
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.raggedfootnote}%
- Angenommen Sie verwenden Fußnoten ausschließlich, um Hinweise auf sehr lange
+ Angenommen Sie verwenden Fußnoten ausschließlich, um Hinweise auf sehr lange
Links anzugeben, deren Umbruch im Blocksatz zu schlechten Ergebnissen
- führen. Dann könnten Sie in der Dokumentpräambel mit
+ führen. Dann könnten Sie in der Dokumentpräambel mit
\begin{lstcode}
\let\raggedfootnote\raggedright
\end{lstcode}
- für die Fußnoten einfach auf linksbündigen Flattersatz umschalten.
+ für die Fußnoten einfach auf linksbündigen Flattersatz umschalten.
\end{Example}%
\fi
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -703,11 +703,11 @@ zulässig (siehe \cite{package:ragged2e}).
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Fußnotennummern Fußnotenmarkierung Satzspiegels
-% LocalWords: Standardklassen Fußnotenformatierungen Dokumentpräambel
-% LocalWords: Fußnotenmöglichkeiten
+% LocalWords: Fußnotennummern Fußnotenmarkierung Satzspiegels
+% LocalWords: Standardklassen Fußnotenformatierungen Dokumentpräambel
+% LocalWords: Fußnotenmöglichkeiten
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex
index 75c18a8250..0c51854945 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-headfootheight.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-headfootheight.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,56 +40,56 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-headfootheight.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-16 11:41:41 +0100 (Tue, 16 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Head and Foot Height)]
-\section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß}
+\section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß}
\seclabel{height}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}%
-\BeginIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\begin{Explain}%
- Vermutlich, weil der Fuß bei den Standardklassen kaum besetzt ist und
+ Vermutlich, weil der Fuß bei den Standardklassen kaum besetzt ist und
zudem als \Macro{mbox} immer einzeilig ist, gibt es bei \LaTeX{} keine
- definierte Höhe des Fußes. Zwar ist der Abstand von der letzten Grundlinie
- des Textblocks zur Grundlinie des Fußes mit
+ definierte Höhe des Fußes. Zwar ist der Abstand von der letzten Grundlinie
+ des Textblocks zur Grundlinie des Fußes mit
\Length{footskip}\IndexLength[indexmain]{footskip} durchaus
- definiert. Wenn allerdings der Fuß höher als eine Zeile wird, dann ist
- nicht hinreichend festgelegt, wie sich diese Höhe niederschlägt bzw. ob
+ definiert. Wenn allerdings der Fuß höher als eine Zeile wird, dann ist
+ nicht hinreichend festgelegt, wie sich diese Höhe niederschlägt bzw. ob
\Length{footskip} den Abstand zur obersten oder untersten Grundlinie des
- Fußes darstellt.
+ Fußes darstellt.
Obwohl auch der Kopf bei den Seitenstilen der Standardklassen in einer
horizontalen Box ausgegeben wird und damit immer einzeilig ist, hat
- \LaTeX{} für die Kopfhöhe tatsächlich selbst eine Länge zur Einstellung
- ihrer Höhe vorgesehen. Dies erklärt sich vermutlich daraus, dass diese
- Höhe zur Bestimmung des Anfangs des Textbereichs benötigt wird.%
+ \LaTeX{} für die Kopfhöhe tatsächlich selbst eine Länge zur Einstellung
+ ihrer Höhe vorgesehen. Dies erklärt sich vermutlich daraus, dass diese
+ Höhe zur Bestimmung des Anfangs des Textbereichs benötigt wird.%
\end{Explain}%
}{%
- \iffree{Der }{}Kopf und \iffree{der }{}Fuß einer Seite sind zentrale
+ \iffree{Der }{}Kopf und \iffree{der }{}Fuß einer Seite sind zentrale
Elemente nicht nur des Seitenstils. \iffree{Auch eine Ebene kann bei der
- Definition über entsprechende Optionen genau darauf beschränkt werden
+ Definition über entsprechende Optionen genau darauf beschränkt werden
(siehe \autoref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys} ab
- \autopageref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}). }{}Deshalb muss die Höhe beider
+ \autopageref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}). }{}Deshalb muss die Höhe beider
Elemente bekannt sein.%
}
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.height} geschrieben
wurde. Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.height}
- bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie auf
+ bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.height.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.height.next} fortfahren.%
}
@@ -102,57 +102,57 @@
\OptionVName{autoenlargeheadfoot}{Ein-Aus-Wert}%
}{}%
\end{Declaration}
-Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} führt als neue Länge \Length{footheight} analog
-zur Höhe \Length{headheight}\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{ des
+Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} führt als neue Länge \Length{footheight} analog
+zur Höhe \Length{headheight}\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{ des
\LaTeX-Kerns} ein. Gleichzeitig interpretiert
\Package{scrlayer\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{-scrpage}{}}
\Length{footskip} so, dass es den Abstand der letzten Grundlinie des
-Textbereichs von der ersten Standard-Grundlinie des Fußes darstellt. Das Paket
+Textbereichs von der ersten Standard-Grundlinie des Fußes darstellt. Das Paket
\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}\IndexPackage{typearea}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}} betrachtet dies in
-gleicher Weise, so dass die dortigen Optionen zum Setzen der Höhe des Fußes
+gleicher Weise, so dass die dortigen Optionen zum Setzen der Höhe des Fußes
(siehe die Optionen \DescRef{typearea.option.footheight} und
\DescRef{typearea.option.footlines} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea},
-\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footheight}) und zur Berücksichtigung des Fußes
+\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footheight}) und zur Berücksichtigung des Fußes
bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels (siehe Option
\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude} in demselben Abschnitt,
-\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footinclude}) sehr gut zum Setzen der Werte für
-\Package{scrlayer} verwendet werden können und auch das gewünschte Ergebnis
+\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footinclude}) sehr gut zum Setzen der Werte für
+\Package{scrlayer} verwendet werden können und auch das gewünschte Ergebnis
liefern.
Wird das Paket \hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}} nicht verwendet, so
-sollte man gegebenenfalls die Höhe von Kopf und Fuß über entsprechende Werte
-für die Längen einstellen. Zumindest für den Kopf bietet aber beispielsweise
-auch das Paket \Package{geometry} Einstellmöglichkeiten.%
+sollte man gegebenenfalls die Höhe von Kopf und Fuß über entsprechende Werte
+für die Längen einstellen. Zumindest für den Kopf bietet aber beispielsweise
+auch das Paket \Package{geometry} Einstellmöglichkeiten.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par%
- Wurde der Kopf oder der Fuß für den tatsächlich verwendeten Inhalt zu klein
- gewählt, so versucht \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in der
- Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} die Längen selbst entsprechend
+ Wurde der Kopf oder der Fuß für den tatsächlich verwendeten Inhalt zu klein
+ gewählt, so versucht \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in der
+ Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} die Längen selbst entsprechend
anzupassen. Gleichzeitig wird eine entsprechende Warnung ausgegeben, die
- auch Ratschläge für passende Einstellungen enthält. Die automatischen
- Änderungen haben dann ab dem Zeitpunkt, an dem ihre Notwendigkeit erkannt
- wurde, Gültigkeit und werden nicht automatisch aufgehoben, wenn
- beispielsweise der Inhalt von Kopf oder Fuß wieder kleiner wird. Über
+ auch Ratschläge für passende Einstellungen enthält. Die automatischen
+ Änderungen haben dann ab dem Zeitpunkt, an dem ihre Notwendigkeit erkannt
+ wurde, Gültigkeit und werden nicht automatisch aufgehoben, wenn
+ beispielsweise der Inhalt von Kopf oder Fuß wieder kleiner wird. Über
Option\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}
- \Option{autoenlargeheadfoot} kann dieses Verhalten jedoch geändert
- werden. Die Option versteht die Werte für einfache Schalter aus
+ \Option{autoenlargeheadfoot} kann dieses Verhalten jedoch geändert
+ werden. Die Option versteht die Werte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. In der
Voreinstellung ist die Option aktiviert. Wird sie deaktiviert, so werden
- Kopf und Fuß nicht mehr automatisch vergrößert, sondern nur noch eine
- Warnung mit Hinweisen für passende Einstellungen ausgegeben.%
+ Kopf und Fuß nicht mehr automatisch vergrößert, sondern nur noch eine
+ Warnung mit Hinweisen für passende Einstellungen ausgegeben.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{\par%
- Wurde der Kopf oder Fuß für den tatsächlich verwendeten Inhalt zu klein
- gewählt, so toleriert \Package{scrlayer} dies in der Regel ohne
+ Wurde der Kopf oder Fuß für den tatsächlich verwendeten Inhalt zu klein
+ gewählt, so toleriert \Package{scrlayer} dies in der Regel ohne
Fehlermeldung oder Warnung. Der Kopf dehnt sich dann entsprechend seiner
- Höhe in der Regel weiter nach oben, der Fuß entsprechend weiter nach unten
- aus. Informationen darüber erhält man jedoch nicht automatisch. Pakete wie
+ Höhe in der Regel weiter nach oben, der Fuß entsprechend weiter nach unten
+ aus. Informationen darüber erhält man jedoch nicht automatisch. Pakete wie
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}, die auf \Package{scrlayer} aufbauen,
enthalten dagegen gegebenenfalls eigene Tests, die auch zu eigenen
- Aktionen führen können (siehe \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight}
+ Aktionen führen können (siehe \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight}
und \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight} auf
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight}).%
}{}%
@@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ auch das Paket \Package{geometry} Einstellmöglichkeiten.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "scrguide.tex"
%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Seitenstilen Ebenenmodell scrpage headings myheadings plain
-% LocalWords: empty scrlayer Seitenstil Rückgriffe Gliederungsnummern
+% LocalWords: empty scrlayer Seitenstil Rückgriffe Gliederungsnummern
% LocalWords: Standardklassen Seitenstile konsistenteren Befehlssatzes
-% LocalWords: Einstellmöglichkeiten Seiteninhalts Gliederungsüberschrift
+% LocalWords: Einstellmöglichkeiten Seiteninhalts Gliederungsüberschrift
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex
index 4e4803e936..df1e03f172 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-interleafpage.tex}
- [$Date: 2017-12-07 11:43:47 +0100 (Thu, 07 Dec 2017) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\section{Vakatseiten}
@@ -56,34 +56,34 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.emptypage} geschrieben
wurde. Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.emptypage}
- bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie auf
+ bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.emptypage.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.emptypage.next} fortfahren.%
}
Vakatseiten sind Seiten, die beim Satz eines Dokuments absichtlich leer
bleiben. Bei \LaTeX{} werden sie jedoch in der Voreinstellung mit dem aktuell
-gültigen Seitenstil gesetzt. \KOMAScript{} bietet hier diverse Erweiterungen.
+gültigen Seitenstil gesetzt. \KOMAScript{} bietet hier diverse Erweiterungen.
-Vakatseiten findet man hauptsächlich in Büchern. Da es bei Büchern üblich ist,
+Vakatseiten findet man hauptsächlich in Büchern. Da es bei Büchern üblich ist,
dass Kapitel auf einer rechten Seite beginnen, muss in dem Fall, dass das
vorherige Kapitel ebenfalls auf einer rechten Seite endet, eine leere linke
-Seite eingefügt werden. Aus dieser Erklärung ergibt sich auch, dass
+Seite eingefügt werden. Aus dieser Erklärung ergibt sich auch, dass
Vakatseiten normalerweise nur im doppelseitigen Satz existieren.
%
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur
- Die leeren Rückseiten im einseitigen Druck werden eher nicht als Vakatseiten
- bezeichnet, obwohl sie auf Druckbögen im Ergebnis als solche erscheinen.%
+ Die leeren Rückseiten im einseitigen Druck werden eher nicht als Vakatseiten
+ bezeichnet, obwohl sie auf Druckbögen im Ergebnis als solche erscheinen.%
\fi%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
- Vakatseiten sind bei Briefen eher unüblich. Das liegt nicht zuletzt daran,
+ Vakatseiten sind bei Briefen eher unüblich. Das liegt nicht zuletzt daran,
dass wahrhaft doppelseitige Briefe recht selten sind, da Briefe
- normalerweise nicht gebunden werden. Trotzdem unterstützt \KOMAScript{} auch
- für den Fall von doppelseitigen Briefen Einstellungen für
+ normalerweise nicht gebunden werden. Trotzdem unterstützt \KOMAScript{} auch
+ für den Fall von doppelseitigen Briefen Einstellungen für
Vakatseiten. Da die hier vorgestellten Anweisungen aber in Briefen kaum
Verwendung finden, finden Sie hier keine Beispiele. Bei Bedarf orientieren
Sie sich bitte an den Beispielen in \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage} ab
@@ -106,15 +106,15 @@ Mit Hilfe dieser Option%
kann man den \PName{Seitenstil} der Vakatseite bestimmen, die bei Bedarf von
den Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage} eingefügt wird, um bis zur
-gewünschten Seite zu umbrechen. Als \PName{Seitenstil} sind dabei alle bereits
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage} eingefügt wird, um bis zur
+gewünschten Seite zu umbrechen. Als \PName{Seitenstil} sind dabei alle bereits
definierten Seitenstile (siehe \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.pagestyle} ab
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.pagestyle} und
\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} ab \autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage})
verwendbar. Daneben ist auch \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current}
-möglich. Dieser Fall entspricht der Voreinstellung von \KOMAScript{} bis
-Version~2.98c und führt dazu, dass die Vakatseite mit dem Seitenstil erzeugt
-wird, der beim Einfügen gerade aktuell ist. Ab Version~3.00%
+möglich. Dieser Fall entspricht der Voreinstellung von \KOMAScript{} bis
+Version~2.98c und führt dazu, dass die Vakatseite mit dem Seitenstil erzeugt
+wird, der beim Einfügen gerade aktuell ist. Ab Version~3.00%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ werden in der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} entsprechend der
typografischen Gepflogenheiten Vakatseiten mit dem Seitenstil
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.empty}}{%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.pagestyle.empty}}\IndexPagestyle{empty}
-erzeugt, wenn man nicht Kompatibilität zu früheren \KOMAScript-Versionen
+erzeugt, wenn man nicht Kompatibilität zu früheren \KOMAScript-Versionen
eingestellt hat (siehe Option \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.98c}},
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ eingestellt hat (siehe Option \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}%
\begin{lstcode}
\KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain}
\end{lstcode}
- Näheres zum Seitenstil \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
+ Näheres zum Seitenstil \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain}}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain}}
ist in
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ eingestellt hat (siehe Option \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}%
\end{Example}
\else
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
- Ein Beispiel für die Bestimmung des Seitenstils von Vakatseiten finden Sie
+ Ein Beispiel für die Bestimmung des Seitenstils von Vakatseiten finden Sie
in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.emptypage},
\PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.option.cleardoublepage}.%
\iffalse% Umbruchvariante ohne Beispiel
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ eingestellt hat (siehe Option \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}%
\begin{lstcode}
\KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain}
\end{lstcode}
- Näheres zum Seitenstil \DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain} ist in
+ Näheres zum Seitenstil \DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain} ist in
\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle},
\DescPageRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain}
zu finden.
@@ -197,9 +197,9 @@ eingestellt hat (siehe Option \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}%
\Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage}
\end{Declaration}%
Im\textnote{Standardklassen} \LaTeX-Kern existiert die Anweisung
-\Macro{clearpage}, die dafür sorgt, dass alle noch nicht ausgegebenen
-Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden und anschließend eine neue Seite begonnen
-wird. Außerdem existiert die Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage}, die wie
+\Macro{clearpage}, die dafür sorgt, dass alle noch nicht ausgegebenen
+Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden und anschließend eine neue Seite begonnen
+wird. Außerdem existiert die Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage}, die wie
\Macro{clearpage} arbeitet, durch die aber im doppelseitigen Layout (siehe
Option \DescRef{typearea.option.twoside} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea},
\DescPageRef{typearea.option.twoside}) eine neue rechte Seite begonnen
@@ -216,16 +216,16 @@ Bei {\KOMAScript}\textnote{\KOMAScript} arbeitet
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
}{}%
} %
-genau in der soeben für die Standardklassen beschriebenen Art und Weise. Die
+genau in der soeben für die Standardklassen beschriebenen Art und Weise. Die
Anweisung \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage}%
\important{\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain}}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain}}}
-ändert demgegenüber den Seitenstil der leeren linken Seite zusätzlich auf
+ändert demgegenüber den Seitenstil der leeren linken Seite zusätzlich auf
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain}}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain}}%
\IndexPagestyle{plain}, um den
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Seitenkopf}{Kolumnentitel} zu
-unterdrücken. Analog dazu wird bei der Anweisung
+unterdrücken. Analog dazu wird bei der Anweisung
\Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage}%
\important{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.empty}}{%
@@ -233,26 +233,26 @@ unterdrücken. Analog dazu wird bei der Anweisung
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.empty}}{%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}}\IndexPagestyle{empty} verwendet, um
sowohl \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Seitenkopf als auch
- Seitenfuß}{Kolumnentitel als auch Seitenzahl} auf der leeren linken Seite zu
-unterdrücken. Die Seite ist damit vollständig leer. Will man für die
+ Seitenfuß}{Kolumnentitel als auch Seitenzahl} auf der leeren linken Seite zu
+unterdrücken. Die Seite ist damit vollständig leer. Will man für die
Vakatseite einen eigenen \PName{Seitenstil} vorgeben, so ist dieser als
Argument von \Macro{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle} anzugeben. Dabei kann jeder
bereits definierte Seitenstil (siehe auch \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage})
verwendet werden.
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{}{%
- Manchmal\textnote{ungerade Vakatseiten} möchte man nicht, dass Kapitel mit
+ Manchmal\textnote{ungerade Vakatseiten} möchte man nicht, dass Kapitel mit
neuen rechten Seiten, sondern links auf einer Doppelseite beginnen. Dies
widerspricht zwar dem klassischen Buchdruck, kann jedoch seine Berechtigung
haben, wenn die Doppelseite am Kapitelanfang einen ganz speziellen Inhalt
hat. Bei \KOMAScript{} ist deshalb die Anweisung
- \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} als Äquivalent zur Anweisung
+ \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} als Äquivalent zur Anweisung
\Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage} definiert, jedoch mit dem Unterschied,
- dass die nächste Seite eine linke Seite ist. Entsprechendes gilt für die
+ dass die nächste Seite eine linke Seite ist. Entsprechendes gilt für die
Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage},
\Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% Umbruchoptimierungsalternative
- \ und für die ein Argument erwartende Anweisung}{,}
+ \ und für die ein Argument erwartende Anweisung}{,}
\Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}.%
}
@@ -261,11 +261,11 @@ Die Arbeitsweise der Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage},
Argument erwartenden Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle} %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
ist ebenso wie die Standard-Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage} von der in
- \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.open} erklärten
+ \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.open} erklärten
Option \DescRef{maincls.option.open}%
- \IndexOption{open}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.open}} abhängig und
- entspricht je nach Einstellung einer der in den vorherigen Absätzen
- erläuterten Anweisungen.
+ \IndexOption{open}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.open}} abhängig und
+ entspricht je nach Einstellung einer der in den vorherigen Absätzen
+ erläuterten Anweisungen.
}{%
entspricht \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{bei der Klasse
@@ -273,42 +273,42 @@ Argument erwartenden Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle} %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{beim Paket \Package{scrextend}}{%
\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
} ebenso wie die Standard-Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage} den
- entsprechenden, zuvor erklärten Anweisungen%
+ entsprechenden, zuvor erklärten Anweisungen%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{. %
- Die übrigen Anweisungen sind bei \Class{scrlttr2} nur aus Gründen der
- Vollständigkeit definiert. Näheres zu diesen ist bei Bedarf
+ Die übrigen Anweisungen sind bei \Class{scrlttr2} nur aus Gründen der
+ Vollständigkeit definiert. Näheres zu diesen ist bei Bedarf
\autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage}
zu entnehmen%
}{%
- \ für den Umbruch zur nächsten ungeraden Seite%
+ \ für den Umbruch zur nächsten ungeraden Seite%
}.%
}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrlttr2,scrextend}{\iffalse}{\csname
iftrue\endcsname}
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.cleardoublepage}%
- Angenommen, Sie wollen innerhalb eines Dokuments als nächstes eine
- Doppelseite setzen, bei der auf der linken Seite eine Abbildung in Größe
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen innerhalb eines Dokuments als nächstes eine
+ Doppelseite setzen, bei der auf der linken Seite eine Abbildung in Größe
des Satzspiegels platziert wird und rechts ein neues Kapitel
beginnt. Falls das vorherige Kapitel mit einer linken Seite endet, muss
- also eine Vakatseite eingefügt werden. Diese soll komplett leer
- sein. Ebenso soll die linke Bildseite weder Kopf noch Fußzeile
+ also eine Vakatseite eingefügt werden. Diese soll komplett leer
+ sein. Ebenso soll die linke Bildseite weder Kopf noch Fußzeile
besitzen.
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- Zunächst wird mit
+ Zunächst wird mit
\begin{lstcode}
\KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=empty}
\end{lstcode}
- dafür gesorgt, dass Vakatseiten mit dem Seitenstil
+ dafür gesorgt, dass Vakatseiten mit dem Seitenstil
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.empty}}{%
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}}, also ohne Kopf- und Fußzeile
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}}, also ohne Kopf- und Fußzeile
gesetzt
- werden. Diese Einstellung können Sie bereits in der Dokumentpräambel
- vornehmen. Die Optionen können alternativ auch als optionale Argumente von
+ werden. Diese Einstellung können Sie bereits in der Dokumentpräambel
+ vornehmen. Die Optionen können alternativ auch als optionale Argumente von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.documentclass} angegeben werden.
\fi
- An der gewünschten Stelle
+ An der gewünschten Stelle
% \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{im Dokument }% Umbruchoptimierung!!!
schreiben Sie daher:% mit dem Umbruchkorrekturtext oben statt daher nun:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -318,28 +318,28 @@ Argument erwartenden Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle} %
height=\textheight,%
keepaspectratio]%
{bild}
- \chapter{Kapitelüberschrift}
+ \chapter{Kapitelüberschrift}
\end{lstcode}
- Die erste Zeile wechselt auf die nächste linke Seite und fügt zu diesem
+ Die erste Zeile wechselt auf die nächste linke Seite und fügt zu diesem
Zweck bei Bedarf eine komplett leere rechte Seite ein. Die zweite Zeile
- sorgt dafür, dass diese linke Seite ebenfalls mit dem Seitenstil
+ sorgt dafür, dass diese linke Seite ebenfalls mit dem Seitenstil
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.empty}}{%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}} gesetzt wird. Die dritte bis
- sechste Zeile lädt die Bilddatei mit dem Namen \File{bild} und bringt sie
- auf die gewünschte Größe, ohne sie dabei zu verzerren. Hierfür wird das
- Paket \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} benötigt (siehe
- \cite{package:graphics}). Die letzte Zeile beginnt auf der nächsten --
+ sechste Zeile lädt die Bilddatei mit dem Namen \File{bild} und bringt sie
+ auf die gewünschte Größe, ohne sie dabei zu verzerren. Hierfür wird das
+ Paket \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} benötigt (siehe
+ \cite{package:graphics}). Die letzte Zeile beginnt auf der nächsten --
dann rechten -- Seite ein neues Kapitel.
\end{Example}%
\fi
-Im doppelseitigen Satz führt \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} immer zur nächsten
-linken Seite, \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage} zur nächsten
-rechten Seite. Eine gegebenenfalls einzufügenden Vakatseite wird mit dem
-über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.cleardoublepage} festgelegten
+Im doppelseitigen Satz führt \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} immer zur nächsten
+linken Seite, \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage} zur nächsten
+rechten Seite. Eine gegebenenfalls einzufügenden Vakatseite wird mit dem
+über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.cleardoublepage} festgelegten
Seitenstil ausgegeben.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\par%
- Ein Beispiel für die Verwendung von \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage} finden
+ Ein Beispiel für die Verwendung von \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage} finden
Sie in \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage},
\PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.%
}{}%
@@ -351,11 +351,11 @@ Seitenstil ausgegeben.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Gleitumgebungen Seitenkopf Kolumnentitel Seitenfuß Bilddatei
-% LocalWords: Satzspiegels Bildseite Dokumentpräambel Vakatseiten
+% LocalWords: Gleitumgebungen Seitenkopf Kolumnentitel Seitenfuß Bilddatei
+% LocalWords: Satzspiegels Bildseite Dokumentpräambel Vakatseiten
% LocalWords: Vakatseite
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex
index c907a664b7..723b115d24 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-lists.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-lists.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-lists.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-02-06 09:20:05 +0100 (Tue, 06 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\section{Listen}
@@ -55,16 +55,16 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Listen}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists}
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists}
geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} bereits gelesen und verstanden
- haben, können Sie auf \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.lists.next} mit
+ haben, können Sie auf \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.lists.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.lists.next} fortfahren.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrextend,scrlttr2}{ %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
Das Paket \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}} definiert
- selbst keine Listenumgebungen, sondern überlässt diese der verwendeten
- Klasse. Ist dies keine \KOMAScript-Klasse, so lädt es
+ selbst keine Listenumgebungen, sondern überlässt diese der verwendeten
+ Klasse. Ist dies keine \KOMAScript-Klasse, so lädt es
\hyperref[cha:scrextend]{\Package{scrextend}}\IndexPackage{scrextend}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrextend]{\Package{scrextend}}}.%
}{} %
@@ -73,28 +73,28 @@
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.addmargin} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.addmargin*} definiert. Alle anderen
Listenumgebungen bleiben der Verantwortung % und Kontrolle
- der verwendeten Klasse überlassen.%
+ der verwendeten Klasse überlassen.%
}{}%
}
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{%
{\LaTeX} und die Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}
- bieten verschiedene Umgebungen für Listen. All diese Umgebungen bietet
- {\KOMAScript} selbstverständlich auch, teilweise jedoch mit leichten
- Abwandlungen oder Erweiterungen. Grundsätzlich gilt, dass Listen -- auch
+ bieten verschiedene Umgebungen für Listen. All diese Umgebungen bietet
+ {\KOMAScript} selbstverständlich auch, teilweise jedoch mit leichten
+ Abwandlungen oder Erweiterungen. Grundsätzlich gilt, dass Listen -- auch
unterschiedlicher Art -- bis zu einer Tiefe von vier Listen geschachtelt
- werden können. Eine tiefere Schachtelung wäre auch aus typografischen
- Gründen kaum sinnvoll, da genau genommen schon mehr als drei Ebenen nicht
- mehr überblickt werden können. Ich empfehle\textnote{Tipp!} in solchen
- Fällen, die eine große Liste in mehrere kleinere Listen aufzuteilen.%
+ werden können. Eine tiefere Schachtelung wäre auch aus typografischen
+ Gründen kaum sinnvoll, da genau genommen schon mehr als drei Ebenen nicht
+ mehr überblickt werden können. Ich empfehle\textnote{Tipp!} in solchen
+ Fällen, die eine große Liste in mehrere kleinere Listen aufzuteilen.%
}
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Da Listen zu den Standardelementen von \LaTeX{} gehören, wurde in diesem
+ Da Listen zu den Standardelementen von \LaTeX{} gehören, wurde in diesem
Abschnitt auf Beispiele verzichtet. Sie finden solche in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} ab
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} oder in jeder
- \LaTeX-Einführung.%
+ \LaTeX-Einführung.%
}
@@ -116,21 +116,21 @@
\Environment{itemize}-Liste. %
\iffalse % Umbruchoptimierungstext
Die Benutzer einer unbeliebten Textverarbeitung nennen diese Form der Liste
- auch gerne \emph{Bulletpoints}. Vermutlich können sie sich nicht vorstellen,
+ auch gerne \emph{Bulletpoints}. Vermutlich können sie sich nicht vorstellen,
dass je nach Ebene auch ein anderes Zeichen als ein fetter Punkt zur
Einleitung eines Stichpunkts verwendet werden kann. %
\fi%
- Bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen werden je nach Ebene folgende Aufzählungszeichen
- zur Einleitung eines Listenelements verwendet: »{\labelitemi}«,
- »{\labelitemii}«, »{\labelitemiii}« und »{\labelitemiv}«. Die Definition der
- Zeichen für die einzelnen Ebenen sind in den Makros \Macro{labelitemi},
+ Bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen werden je nach Ebene folgende Aufzählungszeichen
+ zur Einleitung eines Listenelements verwendet: »{\labelitemi}«,
+ »{\labelitemii}«, »{\labelitemiii}« und »{\labelitemiv}«. Die Definition der
+ Zeichen für die einzelnen Ebenen sind in den Makros \Macro{labelitemi},
\Macro{labelitemii}, \Macro{labelitemiii} und \Macro{labelitemiv}
- abgelegt. Sie können diese leicht mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefinieren. Die
+ abgelegt. Sie können diese leicht mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefinieren. Die
einzelnen Stichpunkte werden mit \Macro{item} eingeleitet.%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.itemize}%
- Sie haben eine einfache Aufzählung, die in mehreren Ebenen geschachtelt
+ Sie haben eine einfache Aufzählung, die in mehreren Ebenen geschachtelt
ist. Sie schreiben beispielsweise:
\begin{lstcode}
\minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel}
@@ -142,29 +142,29 @@
\begin{itemize}
\item einmotorig
\begin{itemize}
- \item{düsengetrieben}
+ \item{düsengetrieben}
\item{propellergetrieben}
\end{itemize}
\item zweimotorig
\begin{itemize}
- \item{düsengetrieben}
+ \item{düsengetrieben}
\item{propellergetrieben}
\end{itemize}
\end{itemize}
- \item Drehflügler
+ \item Drehflügler
\end{itemize}
- \item Motorräder
+ \item Motorräder
\item Automobile
\begin{itemize}
\item Rennwagen
\item Personenwagen
\item Lastwagen
\end{itemize}
- \item Fahrräder
+ \item Fahrräder
\end{itemize}
\end{itemize}
\end{lstcode}
- Anschließend erhalten Sie:
+ Anschließend erhalten Sie:
\begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip]
\minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel}
\begin{itemize}
@@ -176,18 +176,18 @@
\begin{itemize}
\item einmotorig
\begin{itemize}
- \item{düsengetrieben}
+ \item{düsengetrieben}
\item{propellergetrieben}
\end{itemize}
\item zweimotorig
\begin{itemize}
- \item{düsengetrieben}
+ \item{düsengetrieben}
\item{propellergetrieben}
\end{itemize}
\end{itemize}
- \item Drehflügler
+ \item Drehflügler
\end{itemize}
- \item Motorräder
+ \item Motorräder
% \begin{itemize}
% \item historisch korrekt
% \item futurisch nicht real
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@
\item Personenwagen
\item Lastwagen
\end{itemize}
- \item Fahrräder
+ \item Fahrräder
\end{itemize}
\end{ShowOutput}
\end{Example}%
@@ -224,27 +224,27 @@
\Macro{labelenumiv}
\end{Declaration}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{}Die nummerierte
- Liste\textnote{nummerierte Liste} ist ebenfalls sehr häufig zu finden und
+ Liste\textnote{nummerierte Liste} ist ebenfalls sehr häufig zu finden und
bereits vom {\LaTeX}-Kern vorgesehen. Die Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung}
erfolgt je nach Ebene in unterschiedlicher Art: mit arabischen Zahlen, mit
- Kleinbuchstaben, mit kleinen römischen Zahlen und mit Großbuchstaben. Die
- Art der Nummerierung wird dabei über die Makros \Macro{theenumi} bis
+ Kleinbuchstaben, mit kleinen römischen Zahlen und mit Großbuchstaben. Die
+ Art der Nummerierung wird dabei über die Makros \Macro{theenumi} bis
\Macro{theenumiv} festgelegt. Das Format der Ausgabe wird von den Makros
\Macro{labelenumi} bis \Macro{labelenumiv} bestimmt. Dabei folgt auf den
Wert der zweiten Ebene, der in Kleinbuchstaben ausgegeben wird, eine runde
- Klammer, während die Werte aller anderen Ebenen von einem Punkt gefolgt
+ Klammer, während die Werte aller anderen Ebenen von einem Punkt gefolgt
werden. Die einzelnen Stichpunkte werden wieder mit \Macro{item}
eingeleitet.%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.enumerate}%
- Verkürzen wir das vorherige Beispiel und verwenden statt der
+ Verkürzen wir das vorherige Beispiel und verwenden statt der
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.itemize}- eine
\Environment{enumerate}-Umgebung:
- % Übernehmen wir das Beispiel der
+ % Ãœbernehmen wir das Beispiel der
% \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.itemize}-Umgebung,
% wobei wir jede \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.itemize}-Umgebung durch eine
- % \Environment{enumerate}-Umgebung ersetzen. Das Ergebnis wäre dann:
+ % \Environment{enumerate}-Umgebung ersetzen. Das Ergebnis wäre dann:
\begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip]
\minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel}
\begin{enumerate}
@@ -256,14 +256,14 @@
\begin{enumerate}
\item einmotorig
\begin{enumerate}
- \item{düsengetrieben}\label{xmp:maincls.jets}
+ \item{düsengetrieben}\label{xmp:maincls.jets}
\item{propellergetrieben}
\end{enumerate}
\item mehrmotorig
\end{enumerate}
- % \item Drehflügler
+ % \item Drehflügler
\end{enumerate}
- \item Motorräder
+ \item Motorräder
\begin{enumerate}
\item historisch korrekt
\item futurisch nicht real
@@ -274,14 +274,14 @@
% \item Personenwagen
% \item Lastwagen
% \end{enumerate}
- % \item Fahrräder
+ % \item Fahrräder
\end{enumerate}
\end{ShowOutput}
- Innerhalb der Aufzählung können ganz normal mit \Macro{label} Marken
+ Innerhalb der Aufzählung können ganz normal mit \Macro{label} Marken
gesetzt werden, auf die dann mit \Macro{ref} zugegriffen werden
- kann. So wurde oben hinter den düsengetriebenen, einmotorigen
- Flugzeugen mit »\Macro{label}\PParameter{bsp:duesen}« ein Label
- gesetzt. Der \Macro{ref}-Wert ist dann »\ref{xmp:maincls.jets}«.
+ kann. So wurde oben hinter den düsengetriebenen, einmotorigen
+ Flugzeugen mit »\Macro{label}\PParameter{bsp:duesen}« ein Label
+ gesetzt. Der \Macro{ref}-Wert ist dann »\ref{xmp:maincls.jets}«.
\end{Example}%
\fi
%
@@ -303,15 +303,15 @@
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{descriptionlabel}%
\LabelFontElement{descriptionlabel}%
Die Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art}\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}, die für die Hervorhebung des
- Stichworts verwendet wird, kann außerdem bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}, die für die Hervorhebung des
+ Stichworts verwendet wird, kann außerdem bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit
Hilfe der Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
- \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
+ \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
\FontElement{descriptionlabel}\important{\FontElement{descriptionlabel}}
(siehe \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements},
- \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) geändert werden. In der
+ \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) geändert werden. In der
Voreinstellung wird \Macro{sffamily}""\Macro{bfseries} verwendet.%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}
\begin{Example}
@@ -324,17 +324,17 @@
\end{lstcode}
definieren Sie daher die Schrift entsprechend um.
- Ein Beispiel für die Ausgabe einer Stichwortliste ist eine Aufzählung
+ Ein Beispiel für die Ausgabe einer Stichwortliste ist eine Aufzählung
der Seitenstile. Der Quelltext dazu lautet beispielsweise:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{description}
\item[empty] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf-
- und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben.
+ und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben.
\item[plain] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem
keinerlei Kolumnentitel verwendet wird.
- \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für
+ \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für
automatische Kolumnentitel.
- \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für
+ \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für
manuelle Kolumnentitel.
\end{description}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -342,12 +342,12 @@
\begin{ShowOutput}
\begin{description}
\item[empty] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und
- Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben.
+ Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben.
\item[plain] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem keinerlei
Kolumnentitel verwendet wird.
- \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für automatische
+ \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für automatische
Kolumnentitel.
- \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für manuelle
+ \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für manuelle
Kolumnentitel.
\end{description}
\end{ShowOutput}
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@
\begin{Declaration}
\begin{Environment}{labeling}\OParameter{Trennzeichen}
- \Parameter{längstes Schlüsselwort}
+ \Parameter{längstes Schlüsselwort}
\labelsuffix[labeling]
\begin{Body}
\Macro{item}\OParameter{Stichwort} \dots
@@ -384,8 +384,8 @@ vorhanden: die \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung. Im Unterschied
\DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.description}%
}{%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}%
-} kann bei \Environment{labeling} ein Muster angegeben werden, dessen Länge
-die Einrücktiefe bei allen Stichpunkten ergibt. Darüber hinaus kann zwischen
+} kann bei \Environment{labeling} ein Muster angegeben werden, dessen Länge
+die Einrücktiefe bei allen Stichpunkten ergibt. Darüber hinaus kann zwischen
Stichpunkt und Beschreibungstext ein optionales \PName{Trennzeichen}
festgelegt werden. %
\BeginIndexGroup
@@ -405,23 +405,23 @@ Die Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art}%
}{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
}%
}%
-, die für die Hervorhebung des Schlüsselworts verwendet wird, kann mit Hilfe
+, die für die Hervorhebung des Schlüsselworts verwendet wird, kann mit Hilfe
der Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
+\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
\FontElement{labelinglabel}\IndexFontElement{labelinglabel} (siehe
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements},
-\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) geändert werden. Für die
+\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) geändert werden. Für die
davon abweichende Schriftart der Trennzeichen ist das Element
\FontElement{labelingseparator}\IndexFontElement{labelingseparator} (siehe
ebenfalls \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements},
-\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) zuständig.
+\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) zuständig.
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\par\csname iffalse\endcsname}
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.labeling}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
- Eine einfache Liste könnte beispielsweise wie folgt definiert werden:%
+ Eine einfache Liste könnte beispielsweise wie folgt definiert werden:%
}{%
Wir schreiben das Beispiel der
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}-Umgebung etwas um:%
@@ -431,14 +431,14 @@ ebenfalls \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements},
\setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont}
\begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings}
\item[empty]
- Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß
+ Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß
\item[plain]
- Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne
+ Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne
Kolumnentitel
\item[headings]
- Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel
+ Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel
\item[myheadings]
- Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel
+ Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel
\end{labeling}
\end{lstcode}
Als Ergebnis erhalten wir dann:
@@ -447,28 +447,28 @@ ebenfalls \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements},
\setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont}
\begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings}
\item[empty]
- Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß
+ Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß
\item[plain]
- Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne
+ Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne
Kolumnentitel
\item[headings]
- Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel
+ Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel
\item[myheadings]
- Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel
+ Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel
\end{labeling}
\end{ShowOutput}
Wie in diesem Beispiel zu sehen ist, kann eine eventuell geforderte
Schriftumschaltung in bei \KOMAScript{} gewohnter Weise erreicht
- werden. Da sich die Schriftumschaltung für das Schlüsselwort aber auch auf
+ werden. Da sich die Schriftumschaltung für das Schlüsselwort aber auch auf
die Trennzeichen auswirkt, kann es eventuell erforderlich sein, die
- Schriftumschaltung dafür explizit aufzuheben.
+ Schriftumschaltung dafür explizit aufzuheben.
\end{Example}
\fi
\EndIndexGroup
-Gedacht war die Umgebung ursprünglich für Strukturen wie »Voraussetzung,
-Aussage, Beweis« oder »Gegeben, Gesucht, Lösung«, wie man sie in
-Vorlesungsskripten häufiger findet. Inzwischen findet die Umgebung aber ganz
-unterschiedliche Anwendungen. So wurde die Umgebung für Beispiele in dieser
+Gedacht war die Umgebung ursprünglich für Strukturen wie »Voraussetzung,
+Aussage, Beweis« oder »Gegeben, Gesucht, Lösung«, wie man sie in
+Vorlesungsskripten häufiger findet. Inzwischen findet die Umgebung aber ganz
+unterschiedliche Anwendungen. So wurde die Umgebung für Beispiele in dieser
Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -481,15 +481,15 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
\Environment{verse}-Umgebung\textnote{Versform} wird normalerweise nicht als
Listenumgebung wahrgenommen, da hier nicht mit \Macro{item} gearbeitet
wird. Stattdessen wird wie innerhalb der \Environment{flushleft}-Umgebung
- mit festen Zeilenumbrüchen gearbeitet. Intern handelt es sich jedoch sowohl
+ mit festen Zeilenumbrüchen gearbeitet. Intern handelt es sich jedoch sowohl
bei den Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} durchaus um eine
Listenumgebung.
- Die \Environment{verse}-Umgebung findet hauptsächlich für
+ Die \Environment{verse}-Umgebung findet hauptsächlich für
Gedichte\Index{Gedichte} Anwendung. Dabei werden die Zeilen links und rechts
eingezogen. Einzelne Verse werden mit einem festen Zeilenumbruch, also mit
\verb|\\|\IndexCmd{\textbackslash} beendet. Strophen werden ganz normal als
- Absatz gesetzt, also durch eine Leerzeile getrennt. Häufig findet
+ Absatz gesetzt, also durch eine Leerzeile getrennt. Häufig findet
stattdessen auch \Macro{medskip}\IndexCmd{medskip} oder
\Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} Verwendung. Will man verhindern, dass am
Ende eines Verses ein Seitenumbruch\textnote{Seitenumbruch} erfolgt, so
@@ -501,9 +501,9 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
Als Beispiel ein kurzes Gedicht von Wilhelm Busch:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{verse}
- Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\*
+ Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\*
Gekrochen ist auf einen Baum,\\*
- Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\*
+ Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\*
So irrt sich der.
\end{verse}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -511,9 +511,9 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
\begin{ShowOutput}
\iffree{}{\vskip-.8\baselineskip}% Umbruchkorrektur
\begin{verse}
- Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\*
+ Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\*
Gekrochen ist auf einen Baum,\\*
- Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\*
+ Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\*
So irrt sich der.
\end{verse}
\end{ShowOutput}
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer hat
immer Reparaturen.\\*
\bigskip
- Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen,
+ Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen,
dem traue nicht, mein Sohn.
\end{verse}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -533,49 +533,49 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
\begin{verse}
Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer hat immer Reparaturen.\\
\bigskip
- Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen, dem traue nicht, mein
+ Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen, dem traue nicht, mein
Sohn.
\end{verse}
\end{ShowOutput}
kann mit \verb|\\*| allerdings nicht verhindert werden, dass am
Zeilenumbruch auch ein Seitenumbruch erfolgt. Um dies zu erreichen,
- müsste innerhalb der ersten Zeile zusätzlich ein
- \Macro{nopagebreak}\IndexCmd{nopagebreak} eingefügt werden:
+ müsste innerhalb der ersten Zeile zusätzlich ein
+ \Macro{nopagebreak}\IndexCmd{nopagebreak} eingefügt werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{verse}
Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer\nopagebreak{}
hat immer Reparaturen.\\
\bigskip
- Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie\nopagebreak{}
+ Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie\nopagebreak{}
gelogen, dem traue nicht, mein Sohn.
\end{verse}
\end{lstcode}
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- Hier noch zwei Sprüche, die man immer bedenken sollte, wenn man mit
- scheinbar seltsamen Fragen zu {\LaTeX} oder den dazugehörigen Antworten
+ Hier noch zwei Sprüche, die man immer bedenken sollte, wenn man mit
+ scheinbar seltsamen Fragen zu {\LaTeX} oder den dazugehörigen Antworten
konfrontiert ist:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{verse}
- Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\*
- Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\
+ Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\*
+ Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\
\bigskip
Wie klein ist das, was einer ist,\\*
- Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst.
+ Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst.
\end{verse}
\end{lstcode}
\begin{ShowOutput}
\iffree{}{\vskip-.8\baselineskip}% Umbruchkorrektur
\begin{verse}
- Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\*
- Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\
+ Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\*
+ Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\
\bigskip
Wie klein ist das, was einer ist,\\*
- Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst.
+ Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst.
\end{verse}
\end{ShowOutput}
\fi
- In diesen Beispielen wurde übrigens jeweils \Macro{bigskip} verwendet,
- um zwei Sprüche voneinander zu trennen.
+ In diesen Beispielen wurde übrigens jeweils \Macro{bigskip} verwendet,
+ um zwei Sprüche voneinander zu trennen.
\end{Example}%
\fi
%
@@ -590,8 +590,8 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
intern ebenfalls eine Listenumgebung\textnote{Blockzitat mit
Absatzabstand} und sowohl bei den Standardklassen als auch bei
{\KOMAScript} zu finden. Der Inhalt der Umgebung wird im Blocksatz mit
- beidseitigem Einzug gesetzt. Die Umgebung wird häufig verwendet, um
- längere Zitate\Index{Zitat} abzusetzen. Dabei werden Absätze innerhalb der
+ beidseitigem Einzug gesetzt. Die Umgebung wird häufig verwendet, um
+ längere Zitate\Index{Zitat} abzusetzen. Dabei werden Absätze innerhalb der
Umgebung durch einen vertikalen Abstand gekennzeichnet.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -600,12 +600,12 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
\end{Declaration}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{}Diese
Umgebung\textnote{Blockzitat mit Absatzeinzug} ist mit
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} vergleichbar. Während bei
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} Absätze durch vertikalen Abstand
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} vergleichbar. Während bei
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} Absätze durch vertikalen Abstand
gekennzeichnet werden, wird bei \Environment{quotation} mit horizontalem
- Einzug der ersten Zeile eines Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den
+ Einzug der ersten Zeile eines Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den
ersten Absatz einer \Environment{quotation}-Umgebung. Wollen Sie dort den
- Einzug verhindern, müssen Sie die
+ Einzug verhindern, müssen Sie die
\Macro{noindent}-Anweisung\IndexCmd{noindent} voranstellen.%
\else
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -616,18 +616,18 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
Umgebungen\textnote{Blockzitate} sind intern ebenfalls Listenumgebungen
und sowohl bei den Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} zu finden.
Beide Umgebungen setzen Blocksatz, der rechts und links eingezogen
- ist. Verwendet werden die Umgebungen häufig, um längere
+ ist. Verwendet werden die Umgebungen häufig, um längere
Zitate\Index{Zitat} abzusetzen. Der Unterschied zwischen beiden liegt in
- der Art und Weise, wie Absätze abgesetzt werden. Während bei
- \Environment{quote} Absätze durch vertikalen Abstand gekennzeichnet
+ der Art und Weise, wie Absätze abgesetzt werden. Während bei
+ \Environment{quote} Absätze durch vertikalen Abstand gekennzeichnet
werden, wird bei \Environment{quotation} mit horizontalem Einzug der
- ersten Zeile eines Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den ersten
+ ersten Zeile eines Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den ersten
Absatz einer \Environment{quotation}-Umgebung% Umbruchkorrektur
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
- , außer es wird \Macro{noindent}\IndexCmd{noindent} vorangestellt.%
+ , außer es wird \Macro{noindent}\IndexCmd{noindent} vorangestellt.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
- . Wollen Sie dort den Einzug verhindern, müssen Sie die
+ . Wollen Sie dort den Einzug verhindern, müssen Sie die
\Macro{noindent}-Anweisung\IndexCmd{noindent} voranstellen.%
}{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
}%
@@ -640,53 +640,53 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[paper=a5,pagesize]{scrartcl}
\usepackage{selinput}
- \SelectInputMappings{adieresis={ä},germandbls={ß}}
+ \SelectInputMappings{adieresis={ä},germandbls={ß}}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\begin{document}
- Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich
+ Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich
einst in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll:
\begin{quotation}
- Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in
- Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht
- ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem
- Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze
+ Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in
+ Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht
+ ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem
+ Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze
in der Hand.
- "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem
+ "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem
Ton, doch bestem Hochdeutsch,
"`ich habe seit drei Tagen nichts mehr
gegessen."'
- Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und
- entgegnet im Brustton vollster Überzeugung:
+ Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und
+ entgegnet im Brustton vollster Ãœberzeugung:
"`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"'
\end{quotation}
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Das Ergebnis könnte dann so aussehen:
+ Das Ergebnis könnte dann so aussehen:
\begin{ShowOutput}
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst
+ Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst
in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll:
\fi
\begin{quotation}
- Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in
- Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein
- unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem
- Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in
+ Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in
+ Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein
+ unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem
+ Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in
der Hand.
- "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton,
+ "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton,
doch bestem Hochdeutsch,
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt,
+ während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt,
\fi
"`ich habe
seit drei Tagen nichts mehr gegessen."'
- Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet
- im Brustton vollster Überzeugung:
+ Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet
+ im Brustton vollster Ãœberzeugung:
"`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"'
\end{quotation}
@@ -696,23 +696,23 @@ Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.%
noch mit einer \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.quote}-Umgebung gezeigt:%
\begin{ShowOutput}
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst
+ Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst
in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll:
\fi
\begin{quote}\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}
- Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in Stuttgart. Als die
- Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich
- schäbigem Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in der Hand.
+ Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in Stuttgart. Als die
+ Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich
+ schäbigem Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in der Hand.
- "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton, doch bestem
+ "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton, doch bestem
Hochdeutsch,
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt,
+ während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt,
\fi
"`ich habe seit drei Tagen nichts mehr gegessen."'
- Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet im Brustton
- vollster Überzeugung:
+ Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet im Brustton
+ vollster Ãœberzeugung:
"`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"'
\end{quote}
@@ -741,11 +741,11 @@ Wie bei %
} %
handelt\textnote{allgemeine Einzugsumgebung} es sich bei
\Environment{addmargin} um eine Umgebung, die den Rand\Index{Rand}
-verändert. Im Unterschied zu den beiden erstgenannten Umgebungen kann der
-Anwender jedoch bei \Environment{addmargin} wählen, um welchen Wert der Rand
-verändert werden soll. Des Weiteren verändert die Umgebung den Absatzeinzug
-und den Absatzabstand nicht. Es wird auch kein zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand
-vor und nach der Umgebung eingefügt.
+verändert. Im Unterschied zu den beiden erstgenannten Umgebungen kann der
+Anwender jedoch bei \Environment{addmargin} wählen, um welchen Wert der Rand
+verändert werden soll. Des Weiteren verändert die Umgebung den Absatzeinzug
+und den Absatzabstand nicht. Es wird auch kein zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand
+vor und nach der Umgebung eingefügt.
Ist nur das obligatorische Argument \PName{Einzug} angegeben, so wird der
Inhalt der Umgebung rechts und links um diesen Wert eingezogen. Ist das
@@ -758,9 +758,9 @@ wobei der Unterschied auch nur dann auf"|tritt, wenn das optionale Argument
\PName{innerer Einzug} verwendet wird. Dabei wird dann der Wert von
\PName{innerer Einzug} zum inneren Randanteil der Seite addiert. Dies ist bei
rechten Seiten der linke Rand der Seite, bei linken Seiten jedoch der rechte
-Rand der Seite. \PName{Einzug} gilt dann für den jeweils anderen Rand.
+Rand der Seite. \PName{Einzug} gilt dann für den jeweils anderen Rand.
-Bei beiden Varianten der Umgebung sind für alle Parameter auch negative Werte
+Bei beiden Varianten der Umgebung sind für alle Parameter auch negative Werte
erlaubt. % Umbruchkorrektur
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
Die Umgebung ragt dann entsprechend in den Rand hinein.%
@@ -772,8 +772,8 @@ erlaubt. % Umbruchkorrektur
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.addmargin}%
Angenommen, Sie schreiben eine Anleitung mit kurzen
Quellcode-Beispielen. Um diese sehr stark hervorzuheben, sollen sie mit
- horizontalen Linien vom Text abgesetzt und leicht in den äußeren Rand
- verschoben werden. Sie definieren sich dafür zunächst eine Umgebung:
+ horizontalen Linien vom Text abgesetzt und leicht in den äußeren Rand
+ verschoben werden. Sie definieren sich dafür zunächst eine Umgebung:
\begin{lstcode}
\newenvironment{QuellcodeRahmen}{%
\begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}%
@@ -810,20 +810,20 @@ erlaubt. % Umbruchkorrektur
}
\end{lstcode}
\end{QuellcodeRahmen}
- Nicht zwingend schön, aber es zeigt den Nutzen.
+ Nicht zwingend schön, aber es zeigt den Nutzen.
\end{ShowOutput}
- Das optionale Argument der \Environment{addmargin*}-Umgebung sorgt dafür,
- dass der innere Rand um den Wert 1\Unit{em} vergrößert wird. Dafür wird
- der äußere Rand um den negativen Wert vergrößert, also in Wirklichkeit um
+ Das optionale Argument der \Environment{addmargin*}-Umgebung sorgt dafür,
+ dass der innere Rand um den Wert 1\Unit{em} vergrößert wird. Dafür wird
+ der äußere Rand um den negativen Wert vergrößert, also in Wirklichkeit um
1\Unit{em} verkleinert. Dies resultiert in einer Verschiebung um
- 1\Unit{em} nach außen. Selbstverständlich kann statt \PValue{1em} auch
- eine Länge, beispielsweise \PValue{2\Macro{parindent}}, verwendet werden.
+ 1\Unit{em} nach außen. Selbstverständlich kann statt \PValue{1em} auch
+ eine Länge, beispielsweise \PValue{2\Macro{parindent}}, verwendet werden.
\end{Example}
\fi%
-Ob eine Seite eine linke oder eine rechte Seite ist, kann übrigens beim ersten
-\LaTeX-Durchlauf nicht zuverlässig festgestellt werden. Siehe dazu die
-Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen
+Ob eine Seite eine linke oder eine rechte Seite ist, kann übrigens beim ersten
+\LaTeX-Durchlauf nicht zuverlässig festgestellt werden. Siehe dazu die
+Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispageodd}
(\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven},
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispageodd}) und
@@ -834,8 +834,8 @@ Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{}{%
\begin{Explain}
Im Zusammenspiel von % Umgebungen wie
- Listen mit Absätzen ergeben sich für
- Laien häufiger Fragen. Daher widmet sich die weiterführende Erklärung zu
+ Listen mit Absätzen ergeben sich für
+ Laien häufiger Fragen. Daher widmet sich die weiterführende Erklärung zu
Option \DescRef{maincls-experts.option.parskip} in
\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.parskip} auch diesem
@@ -851,6 +851,6 @@ Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex
index ee80633693..17d51db46b 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-marginpar.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-marginpar.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-marginpar.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-29 14:12:59 +0100 (Mon, 29 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
@@ -58,19 +58,19 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Randnotizen}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes} geschrieben wurde. Falls
Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes} bereits gelesen
- und verstanden haben, können Sie auf
+ und verstanden haben, können Sie auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.marginNotes.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.marginNotes.next} fortfahren.%
}
-Außer dem eigentlichen Textbereich, der normalerweise den Satzspiegel
-ausfüllt, existiert in Dokumenten noch die sogenannte Marginalienspalte. In
-dieser können Randnotizen gesetzt werden. %
+Außer dem eigentlichen Textbereich, der normalerweise den Satzspiegel
+ausfüllt, existiert in Dokumenten noch die sogenannte Marginalienspalte. In
+dieser können Randnotizen gesetzt werden. %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
- Bei Briefen sind Randnotizen allerdings eher unüblich und sollten äußerst
+ Bei Briefen sind Randnotizen allerdings eher unüblich und sollten äußerst
sparsam eingesetzt werden.%
}{%
In diesem \iffree{Dokument}{Buch} wird davon ebenfalls Gebrauch gemacht.%
@@ -81,20 +81,20 @@ dieser können Randnotizen gesetzt werden. %
\Macro{marginpar}\OParameter{Randnotiz links}\Parameter{Randnotiz}
\Macro{marginline}\Parameter{Randnotiz}
\end{Declaration}%
-Für Randnotizen\Index[indexmain]{Randnotizen} ist bei {\LaTeX} normalerweise
+Für Randnotizen\Index[indexmain]{Randnotizen} ist bei {\LaTeX} normalerweise
Anweisung \Macro{marginpar} vorgesehen. Die \PName{Randnotiz} wird dabei im
-äußeren Rand gesetzt. Bei einseitigen Dokumenten wird der rechte Rand
+äußeren Rand gesetzt. Bei einseitigen Dokumenten wird der rechte Rand
verwendet. Zwar kann bei \Macro{marginpar} optional eine abweichende Randnotiz
angegeben werden, falls die Randnotiz im linken Rand landet, jedoch werden
Randnotizen immer im Blocksatz ausgegeben. Die Erfahrung zeigt, dass bei
-Randnotizen statt des Blocksatzes oft je nach Rand linksbündiger oder
-rechtsbündiger Flattersatz zu bevorzugen ist. {\KOMAScript} bietet hierfür
+Randnotizen statt des Blocksatzes oft je nach Rand linksbündiger oder
+rechtsbündiger Flattersatz zu bevorzugen ist. {\KOMAScript} bietet hierfür
die Anweisung \Macro{marginline}.
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{%
\iftrue%
}{%
- Ein ausführliches Beispiel hierzu finden Sie in
+ Ein ausführliches Beispiel hierzu finden Sie in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes},
\PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.marginline}.%
\csname iffalse\endcsname%
@@ -109,27 +109,27 @@ die Anweisung \Macro{marginline}.
\end{lstcode}
erreicht werden.%
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrekturtext
- \footnote{Tatsächlich wurde nicht \Macro{texttt},
- sondern eine semantische Auszeichnung verwendet. Um nicht unnötig
+ \footnote{Tatsächlich wurde nicht \Macro{texttt},
+ sondern eine semantische Auszeichnung verwendet. Um nicht unnötig
zu verwirren, wurde diese im Beispiel ersetzt.}%
\fi
- Statt der Anweisung \Macro{marginline} wäre auch die Verwendung von
- \Macro{marginpar} möglich gewesen. Tatsächlich wird bei obiger Verwendung
+ Statt der Anweisung \Macro{marginline} wäre auch die Verwendung von
+ \Macro{marginpar} möglich gewesen. Tatsächlich wird bei obiger Verwendung
von \Macro{marginline} intern nichts anders gemacht als:
\begin{lstcode}
\marginpar[\raggedleft\texttt{scrartcl}]
{\raggedright\texttt{scrartcl}}
\end{lstcode}
- Damit ist \Macro{marginline} also nur eine abkürzende Schreibweise.%
+ Damit ist \Macro{marginline} also nur eine abkürzende Schreibweise.%
\end{Example}%
\fi
-Für\textnote{Achtung!} Experten sind in
+Für\textnote{Achtung!} Experten sind in
\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.marginpar} Probleme bei der Verwendung von
-\Macro{marginpar} dokumentiert. Diese gelten ebenso für \Macro{marginline}.
-Darüber hinaus wird in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-notecolumn} ein Paket
+\Macro{marginpar} dokumentiert. Diese gelten ebenso für \Macro{marginline}.
+Darüber hinaus wird in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-notecolumn} ein Paket
vorgestellt, mit dem sich auch Notizspalten mit eigenem Seitenumbruch
realisieren lassen.%
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrektur
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ realisieren lassen.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex
index 71dc74663e..702f5b9a36 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-oddorevenpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-oddorevenpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-oddorevenpage.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-30 09:32:50 +0100 (Tue, 30 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten}
@@ -56,10 +56,10 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>ungerade}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.oddOrEven} geschrieben
wurde. Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.oddOrEven}
- bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie in
+ bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven.next} auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven.next} fortfahren.%
}
@@ -76,17 +76,17 @@ rechte Seite immer eine ungerade Nummer. %
% Umbruchkorrekturtext
\iftrue%
Bei einseitigen Dokumenten existiert die Unterscheidung zwischen linken
- und rechten Seiten nicht. Dennoch gibt es natürlich auch bei einseitigen
+ und rechten Seiten nicht. Dennoch gibt es natürlich auch bei einseitigen
Dokumenten sowohl Seiten mit gerader als auch Seiten mit ungerader
Nummer.%
\fi%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
In der Regel werden Briefe einseitig gesetzt. Sollen Briefe mit
- einseitigem Layout jedoch auf Vorder- und Rückseite gedruckt oder
- ausnahmsweise tatsächlich doppelseitige Briefe erstellt werden, kann unter
- Umständen das Wissen, ob man sich auf einer Vorder- oder einer Rückseite
- befindet, nützlich sein.%
+ einseitigem Layout jedoch auf Vorder- und Rückseite gedruckt oder
+ ausnahmsweise tatsächlich doppelseitige Briefe erstellt werden, kann unter
+ Umständen das Wissen, ob man sich auf einer Vorder- oder einer Rückseite
+ befindet, nützlich sein.%
}{}%
}
@@ -96,12 +96,12 @@ rechte Seite immer eine ungerade Nummer. %
Will man bei \KOMAScript{} feststellen, ob ein Text auf einer geraden oder
einer ungeraden Seite ausgegeben wird, so verwendet man die Anweisung
\Macro{ifthispageodd}. Dabei wird das Argument \PName{Dann-Teil} nur dann
-ausgeführt, wenn man sich aktuell auf einer ungeraden Seite
+ausgeführt, wenn man sich aktuell auf einer ungeraden Seite
befindet. Anderenfalls kommt das Argument \PName{Sonst-Teil} zur Anwendung.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie wollen einfach nur ausgeben, ob ein Text auf einer geraden
- oder ungeraden Seite ausgegeben wird. Sie könnten dann beispielsweise mit
+ oder ungeraden Seite ausgegeben wird. Sie könnten dann beispielsweise mit
der Eingabe
\begin{lstcode}
Dies ist eine Seite mit
@@ -117,13 +117,13 @@ befindet. Anderenfalls kommt das Argument \PName{Sonst-Teil} zur Anwendung.
\end{Example}
Da die Anweisung \Macro{ifthispageodd} mit einem Mechanismus arbeitet, der
-einem Label und einer Referenz darauf sehr ähnlich ist, werden nach jeder
-Textänderung mindestens zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt. Erst dann ist die
-Entscheidung korrekt. Im ersten Durchlauf wird für die
+einem Label und einer Referenz darauf sehr ähnlich ist, werden nach jeder
+Textänderung mindestens zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt. Erst dann ist die
+Entscheidung korrekt. Im ersten Durchlauf wird für die
Entscheidung eine Heuristik verwendet.
-Näheres zur Problematik der Erkennung von linken und rechten Seiten oder
-geraden und ungeraden Seitennummern ist für Experten in
+Näheres zur Problematik der Erkennung von linken und rechten Seiten oder
+geraden und ungeraden Seitennummern ist für Experten in
\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd} zu finden.%
%
@@ -134,6 +134,6 @@ geraden und ungeraden Seitennummern ist für Experten in
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex
index 433dfb2e67..17a009d2f3 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-options.tex
@@ -40,16 +40,16 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-options.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-10-23 08:59:49 +0200 (Tue, 23 Oct 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
-\section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
\seclabel{options}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Optionen}%
@@ -83,22 +83,22 @@
% Umbruchvarianten:
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Im Sinne der Abgeschlossenheit der Kapitel
ist dieser Abschnitt nahezu identisch in mehreren Kapiteln zu finden,
- braucht aber beim Studium des gesamten von \KOMAScript{} natürlich nur in
+ braucht aber beim Studium des gesamten von \KOMAScript{} natürlich nur in
einem gelesen werden.%
}{Damit die Anwender alle Informationen zu einem Paket oder einer Klasse im
jeweiligen Kapitel finden, ist dieser Abschnitt nahezu gleichlautend in
mehreren Kapiteln zu finden. Anwender, die nicht nur an der Anleitung zu
einem Paket oder einer Klasse interessiert sind, sondern sich einen
- Gesamtüberblick über \KOMAScript{} verschaffen wollen, brauchen diesen
- Abschnitt nur in einem der Kapitel zu lesen und können ihn
+ Gesamtüberblick über \KOMAScript{} verschaffen wollen, brauchen diesen
+ Abschnitt nur in einem der Kapitel zu lesen und können ihn
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{bei den weiteren Kapitel
- überspringen.}{beim weiteren Studium der Anleitung dann überspringen.}%
+ überspringen.}{beim weiteren Studium der Anleitung dann überspringen.}%
}%
}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.options}
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.options}
geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.options} bereits gelesen und
- verstanden haben, können Sie auf
+ verstanden haben, können Sie auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options.next} fortfahren.%
}
@@ -112,40 +112,40 @@
\end{Declaration}
Bei \LaTeX{} ist vorgesehen, dass Anwender
Klassenoptionen\textnote{Klassenoptionen} in Form einer durch Komma getrennten
-Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von
-\Macro{documentclass} angeben. Außer an die Klasse werden diese Optionen auch
+Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von
+\Macro{documentclass} angeben. Außer an die Klasse werden diese Optionen auch
an alle Pakete\textnote{globale Optionen} weitergereicht, die diese Optionen
verstehen. Ebenso ist vorgesehen, dass Anwender
Paketoptionen\textnote{Paketoptionen} in Form einer durch Komma getrennten
-Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage}
+Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage}
angeben. \KOMAScript{} erweitert\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{typearea}} den
-Mechanismus der Optionen für
+Mechanismus der Optionen für
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrextend,scrjura}{}{die \KOMAScript-Klassen und
-}einige Pakete um weitere Möglichkeiten. So haben die meisten Optionen bei
-\KOMAScript{} zusätzlich einen Wert. Eine Option hat also nicht unbedingt nur
+}einige Pakete um weitere Möglichkeiten. So haben die meisten Optionen bei
+\KOMAScript{} zusätzlich einen Wert. Eine Option hat also nicht unbedingt nur
die Form \PName{Option}, sondern kann auch die Form
\PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}%
\important{\PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}} haben. Bis auf diesen
Unterschied arbeiten \Macro{documentclass} und \Macro{usepackage} bei
-\KOMAScript{} wie in \cite{latex:usrguide} oder jeder \LaTeX-Einführung,
+\KOMAScript{} wie in \cite{latex:usrguide} oder jeder \LaTeX-Einführung,
beispielsweise \cite{l2kurz}, beschrieben.%
%
\iffree{}{\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par
Das als veraltet zu betrachtende Paket
\Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}}
- besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Es versteht daher nur einfache
+ besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Es versteht daher nur einfache
Optionen ohne Wertzuweisung.\par}{}}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{%
scrjura,scrhack,scrlayer,scrlayer-scrpage,scrlayer-notecolumn,scrextend%
}{%
Bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse\textnote{Achtung!} sollten im
- Übrigen beim Laden des Pakets \Package{typearea} oder \Package{scrbase}
- keine Optionen angegeben werden. Das ist darin begründet, dass die Klasse
- diese Pakete bereits ohne Optionen lädt und \LaTeX{} das mehrmalige Laden
+ Ãœbrigen beim Laden des Pakets \Package{typearea} oder \Package{scrbase}
+ keine Optionen angegeben werden. Das ist darin begründet, dass die Klasse
+ diese Pakete bereits ohne Optionen lädt und \LaTeX{} das mehrmalige Laden
eines Pakets mit unterschiedlicher Angabe von Optionen verweigert.%
- \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ Überhaupt ist es bei Verwendung einer
+ \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ Ãœberhaupt ist es bei Verwendung einer
\KOMAScript-Klasse nicht notwendig, eines dieser Pakete auch noch explizit
zu laden.}{}%
\par
@@ -153,20 +153,20 @@ beispielsweise \cite{l2kurz}, beschrieben.%
% Umbruchoptimierung!!!
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{Das Setzen der Optionen mit
- \Macro{documentclass} hat übrigens einen\textnote{Achtung!} entscheidenden
+ \Macro{documentclass} hat übrigens einen\textnote{Achtung!} entscheidenden
Nachteil: %
}{%
- Gegenüber der nachfolgend vorgestellten Schnittstelle zu Einstellungen von
+ Gegenüber der nachfolgend vorgestellten Schnittstelle zu Einstellungen von
Optionen hat \Macro{documentclass} einen Nachteil, der unbedingt zu
beachten\textnote{Achtung!} ist: %
}%
-Anweisungen, Längen, Zähler und ähnliches können darin leicht zerbrechen. So
-führt die Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge im Wert einer Option bei dieser
+Anweisungen, Längen, Zähler und ähnliches können darin leicht zerbrechen. So
+führt die Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge im Wert einer Option bei dieser
Anweisung bei vielen Nicht-\KOMAScript-Klassen zu einer Fehlermeldung%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{, noch bevor der Wert an ein
- \KOMAScript-Paket übergeben wird, es also die Kontrolle darüber übernehmen
- könnte}{}%
-. Wertzuweisungen mit \LaTeX-Längen oder \LaTeX-Zählern sollten daher nie per
+ \KOMAScript-Paket übergeben wird, es also die Kontrolle darüber übernehmen
+ könnte}{}%
+. Wertzuweisungen mit \LaTeX-Längen oder \LaTeX-Zählern sollten daher nie per
\Macro{documentclass}, sondern mit den nachfolgend dokumentierten Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}
vorgenommen werden. \EndIndexGroup
@@ -179,22 +179,22 @@ vorgenommen werden. \EndIndexGroup
\KOMAScript{}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{typearea}} bietet bei den meisten
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrextend,scrjura}{}{Klassen- und }Paketoptionen
-auch die Möglichkeit, den Wert der Optionen noch nach dem Laden
+auch die Möglichkeit, den Wert der Optionen noch nach dem Laden
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrextend,scrjura}{}{der Klasse beziehungsweise
-}des Pakets zu ändern. Mit der Anweisung \Macro{KOMAoptions} kann man wie bei
+}des Pakets zu ändern. Mit der Anweisung \Macro{KOMAoptions} kann man wie bei
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.documentclass} oder
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usepackage} die Werte einer Reihe von
-Optionen ändern. Jede Option der \PName{Optionenliste} hat dabei die Form
+Optionen ändern. Jede Option der \PName{Optionenliste} hat dabei die Form
\PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}%
\important{\PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert},\dots}.
-Einige Optionen besitzen auch einen Säumniswert (engl. \emph{default
- value}). Versäumt man die Angabe eines Wertes, verwendet man die Option also
-einfach in der Form \PName{Option}, so wird automatisch dieser Säumniswert
+Einige Optionen besitzen auch einen Säumniswert (engl. \emph{default
+ value}). Versäumt man die Angabe eines Wertes, verwendet man die Option also
+einfach in der Form \PName{Option}, so wird automatisch dieser Säumniswert
angenommen.
-Manche Optionen können gleichzeitig mehrere Werte besitzen. Für solche
-Optionen besteht die Möglichkeit, mit \Macro{KOMAoption} der einen
+Manche Optionen können gleichzeitig mehrere Werte besitzen. Für solche
+Optionen besteht die Möglichkeit, mit \Macro{KOMAoption} der einen
\PName{Option} nacheinander eine Reihe von Werten zuzuweisen. Die einzelnen
Werte sind dabei in der
\PName{Werteliste}\important{\PName{Wert},\dots} durch Komma
@@ -204,11 +204,11 @@ Soll\textnote{Achtung!} ein \PName{Wert} ein Gleichheitszeichen oder ein Komma
enthalten, so ist der \PName{Wert} in geschweifte Klammern zu setzen.
\begin{Explain}
- \KOMAScript{} bedient sich für die Realisierung dieser Möglichkeit der
+ \KOMAScript{} bedient sich für die Realisierung dieser Möglichkeit der
Anweisungen \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions} und
- \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption} mit der Familie »\PValue{KOMA}«.
+ \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption} mit der Familie »\PValue{KOMA}«.
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{typearea}{% Umbruchkorrektur
- Näheres zu diesen Anweisungen finden fortgeschrittene Anwender in
+ Näheres zu diesen Anweisungen finden fortgeschrittene Anwender in
\autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue} ab \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions}.
}{%
Siehe dazu \autoref{part:forExperts}, \autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue},
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ enthalten, so ist der \PName{Wert} in geschweifte Klammern zu setzen.
Mit \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} gesetzte Optionen erreichen
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{sowohl die \KOMAScript-Klasse als }auch
alle bereits geladenen \KOMAScript-Pakete, die diese Optionen kennen. Ist eine
-Option oder ein Wert insgesamt unbekannt, so wird die Option einschließlich
+Option oder ein Wert insgesamt unbekannt, so wird die Option einschließlich
des Wertes von
\hyperref[cha:scrbase]{\Package{scrbase}}\IndexPackage{scrbase}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrbase]{\Package{scrbase}}} als fehlerhaft
@@ -229,8 +229,8 @@ gemeldet.%
\iffree{}{\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par
Das als veraltet zu betrachtende Paket
\Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}}
- besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Optionen können daher nur über
- die zuvor erklärte Möglichkeit während des Ladens des Pakets gesetzt
+ besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Optionen können daher nur über
+ die zuvor erklärte Möglichkeit während des Ladens des Pakets gesetzt
werden.}{}}%
\fi%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -243,6 +243,6 @@ gemeldet.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
index f4814b7283..f4ba72ed71 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-pagestylemanipulation.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-05 10:50:56 +0100 (Mon, 05 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph:
Setting up defined page styles)]
@@ -57,35 +57,35 @@
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
Obwohl \Package{scrlayer} selbst keine konkreten Seitenstile mit Inhalt
- definiert -- die erwähnten Seitenstile
+ definiert -- die erwähnten Seitenstile
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.@everystyle@} und \PageStyle{empty} werden ja
- zunächst ohne Ebenen, also leer definiert --, stellt es einige Optionen und
- Befehle zur Beeinflussung von Inhalten zur Verfügung.%
+ zunächst ohne Ebenen, also leer definiert --, stellt es einige Optionen und
+ Befehle zur Beeinflussung von Inhalten zur Verfügung.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
- In \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} wurde erklärt, wie
+ In \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} wurde erklärt, wie
die Seitenstile \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} grundlegend vordefiniert
- sind und wie diese Vorbelegung grundsätzlich geändert werden kann. Es
+ sind und wie diese Vorbelegung grundsätzlich geändert werden kann. Es
fehlen jedoch noch Informationen, wie beispielsweise die Kolumnentitel
- zustande kommen, wie man die Breite des Kopfes und Fußes verändern kann
- und wie man Linien über oder unter Kopf oder Fuß setzen kann. Obwohl dies
- eigentlich Fähigkeiten des Pakets
+ zustande kommen, wie man die Breite des Kopfes und Fußes verändern kann
+ und wie man Linien über oder unter Kopf oder Fuß setzen kann. Obwohl dies
+ eigentlich Fähigkeiten des Pakets
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}}
sind, werden sie nachfolgend
- erläutert, da diese grundlegenden Eigenschaften von
+ erläutert, da diese grundlegenden Eigenschaften von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}} einen wichtigen Teil der
- Möglichkeiten von \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
+ Möglichkeiten von \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
} ausmachen.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{%
- Dieser Abschnitt ist als Ergänzung zu
+ Dieser Abschnitt ist als Ergänzung zu
\autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyle.content} zu verstehen und beschreibt
- Dinge, die sich dem Anfänger nicht unbedingt sofort erschließen.%
+ Dinge, die sich dem Anfänger nicht unbedingt sofort erschließen.%
}{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
}%
}
@@ -101,37 +101,37 @@
\end{Declaration}
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\begin{Explain}
- Bei den Standardklassen und auch bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen fällt die
+ Bei den Standardklassen und auch bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen fällt die
Entscheidung, ob mit lebenden oder statischen
Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>lebend}\Index{Kolumnentitel>statisch}
- gearbeitet werden soll, über die Wahl des entsprechenden
- Seitenstils. Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} erklärt,
- erhält man bei Wahl von
+ gearbeitet werden soll, über die Wahl des entsprechenden
+ Seitenstils. Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} erklärt,
+ erhält man bei Wahl von
\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.headings}} lebende
Kolumnentitel. Unter lebenden Kolumnentiteln versteht man die
- Wiederholung eines für die Seite oder die \emph{Kolumne} markanten
- Textes meist im Kopf, seltener im Fuß der Seite.
+ Wiederholung eines für die Seite oder die \emph{Kolumne} markanten
+ Textes meist im Kopf, seltener im Fuß der Seite.
Bei den Artikel-Klassen\OnlyAt{\Class{article}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
- \Class{article} oder \hyperref[cha:maincls]{\Class{scrartcl}} wird für
+ \Class{article} oder \hyperref[cha:maincls]{\Class{scrartcl}} wird für
den lebenden Kolumnentitel\textnote{lebende Kolumnentitel} im
- einseitigen Modus die Abschnittsüberschrift, also das obligatorische
+ einseitigen Modus die Abschnittsüberschrift, also das obligatorische
oder das optionale Argument von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}
verwendet. Diese wird als \emph{rechte Marke} behandelt. Im
- doppelseitigen Satz wird dieselbe Überschrift als \emph{linke Marke}
- verwendet und gleichzeitig die Unterabschnittsüberschrift als
+ doppelseitigen Satz wird dieselbe Ãœberschrift als \emph{linke Marke}
+ verwendet und gleichzeitig die Unterabschnittsüberschrift als
\emph{rechte Marke}. Ausgegeben wird die linke Marke, wie der Name schon
- sagt, auf der linken Seite, während die rechte Marke auf rechten Seiten
+ sagt, auf der linken Seite, während die rechte Marke auf rechten Seiten
-- im einseitigen Modus also auf allen Seiten -- ausgegeben wird. Beim
- Setzen der linken Marke für den Abschnitt werden von den Klassen in der
- Voreinstellung außerdem auch immer die rechten Marken gelöscht.
+ Setzen der linken Marke für den Abschnitt werden von den Klassen in der
+ Voreinstellung außerdem auch immer die rechten Marken gelöscht.
Bei den Bericht- und Buch-Klassen\OnlyAt{\Class{report}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{book}\and \Class{scrbook}} wird eine Ebene
- höher begonnen. Im einseitigen Modus wird also die Kapitelüberschrift
+ höher begonnen. Im einseitigen Modus wird also die Kapitelüberschrift
als rechte Marke gesetzt. Im doppelseitigen Satz wird die
- Kapitelüberschrift als linke Marke und die Abschnittsüberschrift als
+ Kapitelüberschrift als linke Marke und die Abschnittsüberschrift als
rechte Marke gesetzt.
Verwendet man hingegen als Seitenstil
@@ -140,18 +140,18 @@
\textnote{manuelle Kolumnentitel}, so
existieren zwar die Marken im Kopf genauso und auch die Seitenzahlen
werden gleich platziert, allerdings werden die Marken nicht automatisch
- durch die Überschriften gesetzt. Man kann sie dann nur
+ durch die Ãœberschriften gesetzt. Man kann sie dann nur
manuell\important{%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markright}\\
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markboth}}
- über die später in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Anweisungen
+ über die später in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Anweisungen
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markright} und
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markboth} befüllen.
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markboth} befüllen.
\end{Explain}\par%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
Bei den meisten Klassen bestimmt die Wahl des Seitenstils, meist
- \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{myheadings}, darüber, ob die
+ \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{myheadings}, darüber, ob die
Kolumnentitel automatisch oder manuell erzeugt werden. %
}{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
}%
@@ -160,38 +160,38 @@
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}\IndexPackage{scrlayer}
aufgehoben. Statt die Unterscheidung zwischen
automatischen\textnote{lebende und manuelle Kolumnentitel} und manuellen
- Kolumnentiteln über den Seitenstil vorzunehmen, gibt es die beiden
+ Kolumnentiteln über den Seitenstil vorzunehmen, gibt es die beiden
Anweisungen \Macro{automark} und \Macro{manualmark}.
Mit \Macro{manualmark}\important{\Macro{manualmark}} wird dabei auf manuelle
Marken umgeschaltet. Es deaktiviert also das automatische Setzen der
- Marken. Demgegenüber kann mit \Macro{automark}\important{\Macro{automark}}
- und \Macro{automark*} festgelegt werden, welche Gliederungsebenen für das
+ Marken. Demgegenüber kann mit \Macro{automark}\important{\Macro{automark}}
+ und \Macro{automark*} festgelegt werden, welche Gliederungsebenen für das
automatische Setzen der Marke verwendet werden sollen. Das optionale
Argument gibt dabei die \PName{Gliederungsebene der rechten Marke} an,
- während das obligatorische Argument die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken
+ während das obligatorische Argument die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken
Marke} ist. Als Argument werden jeweils die Namen der Gliederungsebenen
angegeben, also \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section},
\PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph} oder
\PValue{subparagraph}.
- Normalerweise sollte die höhere Ebene die linke Marke setzen, während die
- tiefere Ebene für die rechte Marke zu verwenden ist. Diese übliche
+ Normalerweise sollte die höhere Ebene die linke Marke setzen, während die
+ tiefere Ebene für die rechte Marke zu verwenden ist. Diese übliche
Konvention ist jedoch keine Pflicht, sondern lediglich sinnvoll.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass nicht alle Klassen Kolumnentitel
- für alle Ebenen ermöglichen. So setzen die
+ für alle Ebenen ermöglichen. So setzen die
Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} beispielsweise
- nie Kolumnentitel für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen
- unterstützen hingegen alle Ebenen.
+ nie Kolumnentitel für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen
+ unterstützen hingegen alle Ebenen.
Der Unterschied zwischen \Macro{automark} und
\Macro{automark*}\important{\Macro{automark*}} liegt darin, dass
\Macro{automark} alle vorherigen Befehle zum automatischen Setzen der Marken
- aufhebt, während die Stern-Version \Macro{automark*} lediglich die Aktionen
- für die angegebenen Gliederungsebenen ändert.%
+ aufhebt, während die Stern-Version \Macro{automark*} lediglich die Aktionen
+ für die angegebenen Gliederungsebenen ändert.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{ Man kann so auch relativ
- komplexe Fälle abdecken.}% Umbruchoptimierung
+ komplexe Fälle abdecken.}% Umbruchoptimierung
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{\csname
iffalse\endcsname}%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
@@ -200,17 +200,17 @@
\Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}}
kennt sowohl \Macro{manualmark} als auch \Macro{automark}, jedoch nicht
\Macro{automark*}. Daher sind die nachfolgenden Beispielen nicht
- vollständig auf die Verwendung von \Package{scrpage2} übertragbar.%
+ vollständig auf die Verwendung von \Package{scrpage2} übertragbar.%
}%
\fi
%
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{mark}%
- Angenommen Sie wollen, dass wie üblich auf den linken Seiten eines
- Buches die Kapitelüberschriften als automatische Kolumnentitel verwendet
+ Angenommen Sie wollen, dass wie üblich auf den linken Seiten eines
+ Buches die Kapitelüberschriften als automatische Kolumnentitel verwendet
werden und auf den rechten Seiten die
- Abschnittsüberschriften. Allerdings soll auf rechte Seiten so lange
- ebenfalls die Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden, bis der erste
+ Abschnittsüberschriften. Allerdings soll auf rechte Seiten so lange
+ ebenfalls die Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden, bis der erste
Abschnitt auf"|taucht. Dazu wird zuerst
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}%
@@ -223,20 +223,20 @@
\usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage}
\pagestyle{scrheadings}
\end{lstcode}
- Als nächstes wird dafür gesorgt, dass die Kapitelüberschriften sowohl
+ Als nächstes wird dafür gesorgt, dass die Kapitelüberschriften sowohl
die linke als auch die rechte Marke setzen:
\begin{lstcode}
\automark[chapter]{chapter}
\end{lstcode}
- Dann sollen die Abschnittsüberschriften zusätzlich die rechten Marken
+ Dann sollen die Abschnittsüberschriften zusätzlich die rechten Marken
setzen:
\begin{lstcode}
\automark*[section]{}
\end{lstcode}
Hier findet die Stern-Version Anwendung, da die vorherige
- \Macro{automark}-Anweisung weiterhin wirksam bleiben soll. Außerdem
- bleibt das Argument für die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke}
- leer, weil diese Marke unverändert bleiben soll.
+ \Macro{automark}-Anweisung weiterhin wirksam bleiben soll. Außerdem
+ bleibt das Argument für die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke}
+ leer, weil diese Marke unverändert bleiben soll.
Alles, was jetzt noch fehlt, ist ein wenig Dokumentinhalt:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -249,19 +249,19 @@
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
Dabei ist das Paket \Package{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} mit seiner
- Anweisung \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} sehr nützlich.
+ Anweisung \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} sehr nützlich.
Wenn Sie dieses Beispiel einmal testen, werden Sie sehen, dass die
- Kapitelanfangsseite wie üblich ohne Kolumnentitel ist, da sie
+ Kapitelanfangsseite wie üblich ohne Kolumnentitel ist, da sie
automatisch im \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} gesetzt wird (siehe
dazu Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle} auf
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle}). Seite~2 bis 4 tragen als
- Kolumnentitel die Kapitelüberschrift. Nachdem auf Seite~4 eine
- Abschnittsüberschrift ausgegeben wurde, ändert sich der Kolumnentitel
- auf Seite~5 in die Abschnittsüberschrift. Ab dann werden die beiden
- Überschriften im Kopf wechselweise ausgegeben, auf linken Seiten die
- Kapitelüberschrift, auf rechten Seiten die Abschnittsüberschrift.%
+ Kolumnentitel die Kapitelüberschrift. Nachdem auf Seite~4 eine
+ Abschnittsüberschrift ausgegeben wurde, ändert sich der Kolumnentitel
+ auf Seite~5 in die Abschnittsüberschrift. Ab dann werden die beiden
+ Ãœberschriften im Kopf wechselweise ausgegeben, auf linken Seiten die
+ Kapitelüberschrift, auf rechten Seiten die Abschnittsüberschrift.%
\end{Example}
\fi
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@
\OptionVName{autooneside}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\Option{manualmark}
\end{Declaration}
- Außer mit den zuvor erklärten Befehlen kann auch direkt mit den beiden
+ Außer mit den zuvor erklärten Befehlen kann auch direkt mit den beiden
Optionen
\Option{manualmark}\important{\Option{manualmark}\\\Option{automark}} und
\Option{automark} zwischen automatischen und manuellen Kolumnentiteln hin-
@@ -293,17 +293,17 @@
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
Im einseitigen Modus\textnote{einseitiger Satz} will man in der Regel,
- dass nur die höheren Ebenen den Kolumnentitel vorgeben.%
+ dass nur die höheren Ebenen den Kolumnentitel vorgeben.%
}{%
Im einseitigen Modus\textnote{einseitiger Satz} will man in der Regel
nicht, dass die untergeordnete Ebene die rechte Marke
- beeinflusst. Stattdessen soll auch mit der Voreinstellung nur die höhere
+ beeinflusst. Stattdessen soll auch mit der Voreinstellung nur die höhere
Ebene, die beispielsweise im doppelseitigen Modus in der Voreinstellung
alleine die linke Marke beeinflusst, den Kolumnentitel aller Seiten
vorgeben.%
} Diese Voreinstellung entspricht einer aktiven Option
\Option{autooneside}\important{\Option{autooneside}}. Die Option versteht
- die Werte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf
+ die Werte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Wird die Option
deaktiviert, so wirken sich im einseitigen Satz sowohl das optionale als
auch das obligatorische Argument auf den Kolumnentitel aus.%
@@ -312,10 +312,10 @@
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{mark.oneside}%
Angenommen, Sie wollen im einseitigen Modus eines Berichts eine ganz
- ähnliche Verwendung des Kolumnentitels erreichen wie im vorherigen
- Beispiel. Konkret soll so lange die Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden,
+ ähnliche Verwendung des Kolumnentitels erreichen wie im vorherigen
+ Beispiel. Konkret soll so lange die Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden,
bis ein Abschnitt gesetzt wird. Ab dann soll nur noch die
- Abschnittsüberschrift verwendet werden. Dazu wird das Beispiel wie folgt
+ Abschnittsüberschrift verwendet werden. Dazu wird das Beispiel wie folgt
abgewandelt:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrreprt}
@@ -330,22 +330,22 @@
\lipsum[21-40]
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Wie zu sehen ist, wird in diesem Fall keine ergänzende
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.automark*}-Anweisung benötigt. Sie sollten zum
+ Wie zu sehen ist, wird in diesem Fall keine ergänzende
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.automark*}-Anweisung benötigt. Sie sollten zum
Vergleich die Option \Option{autooneside} auch einmal auf \PValue{true}
setzen oder sie entfernen. Ein Unterschied ist dann ab Seite~4 im
Kolumnentitel im Kopf der Seiten zu sehen.
\end{Example}
\fi
- Das\textnote{Achtung!} Laden des Pakets selbst hat übrigens noch keine
+ Das\textnote{Achtung!} Laden des Pakets selbst hat übrigens noch keine
Auswirkung darauf, ob mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird oder
nicht. Erst die explizite Verwendung einer der Optionen \Option{automark}
oder \Option{manualmark} oder einer der beiden Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.automark} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.manualmark}
- schafft hier klare Verhältnisse.%
+ schafft hier klare Verhältnisse.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par%
- Bei Bedarf finden Sie weitere Hintergründe und Beispiele zur Verwendung
+ Bei Bedarf finden Sie weitere Hintergründe und Beispiele zur Verwendung
dieser Befehle und Optionen mit dem auf \Package{scrlayer} basierenden
Paket \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}%
@@ -362,17 +362,17 @@
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{draft}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
- Die \KOMAScript-Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die
+ Die \KOMAScript-Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die
in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}
angegeben sind. Ist die Option aktiviert, so werden
- \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{für die Entwurfsphase}{\unskip} alle
- Elemente der Seitenstile zusätzlich mit
- Maßlinien\Index{Masslinien=Maßlinien}
- versehen. \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{\unskip}{Dies kann während der
- Entwurfsphase manchmal nützlich sein.}%
+ \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{für die Entwurfsphase}{\unskip} alle
+ Elemente der Seitenstile zusätzlich mit
+ Maßlinien\Index{Masslinien=Maßlinien}
+ versehen. \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{\unskip}{Dies kann während der
+ Entwurfsphase manchmal nützlich sein.}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{ %
- Falls diese Option global gesetzt wurde, die Maßlinien aber nicht
- gewünscht sind, kann die Option auch nur für das Paket deaktiviert werden,
+ Falls diese Option global gesetzt wurde, die Maßlinien aber nicht
+ gewünscht sind, kann die Option auch nur für das Paket deaktiviert werden,
indem man \OptionValue{draft}{false} als optionales Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} beim Laden des Pakets angibt.%
}{}%
@@ -383,19 +383,19 @@
\Macro{MakeMarkcase}\Parameter{Text}
\end{Declaration}
Die automatischen, nicht jedoch die manuellen Kolumnentitel verwenden
- \Macro{MakeMarkcase} für ihre Ausgabe. Ist die Anweisung beim Laden von
+ \Macro{MakeMarkcase} für ihre Ausgabe. Ist die Anweisung beim Laden von
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
} nicht\textnote{bedingte Voreinstellung} definiert, so wird sie in der
Voreinstellung derart definiert, dass sie ihr Argument \PName{Text}
- unverändert ausgibt. Diese Voreinstellung kann jedoch entweder durch
+ unverändert ausgibt. Diese Voreinstellung kann jedoch entweder durch
Umdefinierung von \Macro{MakeMarkcase} oder durch die nachfolgend
dokumentierte Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.markcase}%
\IndexOption{markcase}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.markcase}}
- geändert werden. Je nach Einstellung wird das Argument dann beispielsweise
- in Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben umgewandelt.
+ geändert werden. Je nach Einstellung wird das Argument dann beispielsweise
+ in Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben umgewandelt.
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -403,64 +403,64 @@
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{markcase}{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
- Wie bereits früher erläutert, kann man bei
+ Wie bereits früher erläutert, kann man bei
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- } zwischen manuellen und automatischen Kolumnentiteln wählen. Bei den
- automatischen Kolumnentiteln werden dabei die entsprechenden Marken über die
+ } zwischen manuellen und automatischen Kolumnentiteln wählen. Bei den
+ automatischen Kolumnentiteln werden dabei die entsprechenden Marken über die
Gliederungsbefehle gesetzt. In manchen Kulturkreisen ist es im Gegensatz zur
- Typografie des deutschsprachigen Raums üblich, die Kolumnentitel in
- Großbuchstaben zu setzen. Die Standardklassen machen genau dies in der
+ Typografie des deutschsprachigen Raums üblich, die Kolumnentitel in
+ Großbuchstaben zu setzen. Die Standardklassen machen genau dies in der
Voreinstellung. Das Paket \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- } unterstützt das optional ebenfalls. Hierzu gibt man als Option
+ } unterstützt das optional ebenfalls. Hierzu gibt man als Option
\OptionValue{markcase}{upper}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{upper}}%
- \IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper} an. Im Endeffekt führt das zu einer
+ \IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper} an. Im Endeffekt führt das zu einer
Umdefinierung von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase}%
\IndexCmd[indexmain]{MakeMarkcase}.
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
- Aufgrund der mangelnden typografischen Qualität der primitiven Umwandlung
- in Großbuchstaben (siehe die Erklärung zu
+ Aufgrund der mangelnden typografischen Qualität der primitiven Umwandlung
+ in Großbuchstaben (siehe die Erklärung zu
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase} in
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} auf
\autopageref{expl:scrlayer-scrpage.MakeUppercase}) empfiehlt der
\KOMAScript-Autor den Verzicht auf Versalsatz.%
}{%
Leider\phantomsection\label{expl:\ThisCommonLabelBase.MakeUppercase}
- führt die von \LaTeX{} für Versalsatz\Index{Versalsatz} vorgesehene
+ führt die von \LaTeX{} für Versalsatz\Index{Versalsatz} vorgesehene
Anweisung \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} zu keinem guten
Ergebnis, da weder gesperrt noch ausgeglichen wird. Dies liegt teilweise
- sicher daran, dass für typografisch korrekten Versalsatz eine
+ sicher daran, dass für typografisch korrekten Versalsatz eine
Glyphenanalyse notwendig ist, um die konkrete Form der Buchstaben\iffree{
- und ihrer Kombinationen}{} in den Ausgleich der Sperrung einfließen zu
- lassen. Der \KOMAScript-Autor empfiehlt daher, auf Versalsatz für die
+ und ihrer Kombinationen}{} in den Ausgleich der Sperrung einfließen zu
+ lassen. Der \KOMAScript-Autor empfiehlt daher, auf Versalsatz für die
Kolumnentitel zu verzichten.%
} Dies ist normalerweise mit
\OptionValue{markcase}{used}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{used}}%
- \IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used} möglich. Allerdings fügen einige
- Klassen selbst beispielsweise bei den Kolumnentitel für Verzeichnisse ein
+ \IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used} möglich. Allerdings fügen einige
+ Klassen selbst beispielsweise bei den Kolumnentitel für Verzeichnisse ein
\Macro{MakeUppercase} oder sogar die \TeX-Anweisung \Macro{uppercase}
- ein. Für diese Fälle gibt es auch noch die Einstellung
+ ein. Für diese Fälle gibt es auch noch die Einstellung
\OptionValue{markcase}{noupper}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{noupper}}%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}, mit deren Hilfe
- \Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{uppercase} für die Kolumnentitel lokal
- deaktiviert werden können.
+ \Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{uppercase} für die Kolumnentitel lokal
+ deaktiviert werden können.
- Alle für \Option{markcase} möglichen Werte sind noch einmal in
+ Alle für \Option{markcase} möglichen Werte sind noch einmal in
\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{,
\autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}} zusammengefasst.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\begin{table}
\centering
- \caption[Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{markcase}]{Mögliche Werte für
- Option \Option{markcase} zur Wahl von Groß-/Kleinschreibung in
+ \caption[Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{markcase}]{Mögliche Werte für
+ Option \Option{markcase} zur Wahl von Groß-/Kleinschreibung in
automatischen Kolumnentiteln}%
\label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.markcase}%
\begin{desctabular}
@@ -472,20 +472,20 @@
\pventry{upper}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper}%
definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um, dass
automatische Kolumnentitel mit Hilfe von \Macro{MakeUppercase} in
- Großbuchstaben gewandelt werden (Versalsatz).%
+ Großbuchstaben gewandelt werden (Versalsatz).%
}%
\pventry{used}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used}%
- definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um, dass für
- automatische Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung der
- Groß-/Kleinschreibung durchgeführt wird.%
+ definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um, dass für
+ automatische Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung der
+ Groß-/Kleinschreibung durchgeführt wird.%
}%
\entry{\PValue{ignoreuppercase}, \PValue{nouppercase},
\PValue{ignoreupper},
\PValue{noupper}}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}%
definiert nicht nur \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um,
- dass für automatische Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung
- der Groß-/Kleinschreibung durchgeführt wird, sondern deaktiviert
- zusätzlich lokal für alle Ebenen aller Seitenstile
+ dass für automatische Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung
+ der Groß-/Kleinschreibung durchgeführt wird, sondern deaktiviert
+ zusätzlich lokal für alle Ebenen aller Seitenstile
\Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{uppercase}.%
}%
\end{desctabular}
@@ -501,15 +501,15 @@
\Macro{pagemark}
\end{Declaration}
Will man von den vordefinierten Seitenstilen abweichen, so muss man in der
- Regel auch selbst entscheiden können, wo die Marken gesetzt werden
+ Regel auch selbst entscheiden können, wo die Marken gesetzt werden
sollen. Mit \Macro{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}} platziert man die
linke Marke. Diese wird dann bei der Ausgabe der Seite durch den
entsprechenden Inhalt ersetzt.
Dementsprechend kann man mit \Macro{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}}
die rechte Marke platzieren, die dann bei der Ausgabe der Seite durch den
- entsprechenden Inhalt ersetzt wird. Für einige Feinheiten dabei sei auch
- auf die weiterführenden Erklärungen zu
+ entsprechenden Inhalt ersetzt wird. Für einige Feinheiten dabei sei auch
+ auf die weiterführenden Erklärungen zu
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} in
\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} verwiesen.
@@ -527,11 +527,11 @@
genommen nichts mit den Marken von \TeX{} zu tun. Sie dient dazu, eine
formatierte Seitenzahl zu platzieren.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}%
- Bei ihrer Ausgabe wird dann auch die Schrifteinstellung für das Element
+ Bei ihrer Ausgabe wird dann auch die Schrifteinstellung für das Element
\FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}
verwendet. Diese kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont}
- verändert werden (siehe auch \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup},
+ verändert werden (siehe auch \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}).%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{%
@@ -555,7 +555,7 @@
Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass auch im einseitigen Modus der Kolumnentitel
immer am linken Rand und die Seitenzahl immer am rechten Rand
ausgerichtet wird. Beide sollen im Kopf platziert werden. Das folgende,
- vollständige Minimalbeispiel liefert genau dies:
+ vollständige Minimalbeispiel liefert genau dies:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrreprt}
\usepackage{blindtext}
@@ -570,43 +570,43 @@
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
Das Paket \Package{blindtext}\IndexPackage{blindtext} mit seiner
- Anweisung \Macro{blinddocument}\IndexCmd{blinddocument} wird hier für
+ Anweisung \Macro{blinddocument}\IndexCmd{blinddocument} wird hier für
die komfortable Erzeugung eines Beispieldokumentinhalts verwendet.
Mit den Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead}\IndexCmd{ihead}
und \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*}\IndexCmd{ohead*} werden die
- gewünschten Marken platziert. Dabei wird die
+ gewünschten Marken platziert. Dabei wird die
Seitenzahl\iffalse-Marke\fi{} durch die Sternform
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*} %
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
nicht nur auf den mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}
- gesetzten Seiten, sondern auch für den auf Kapitelanfangsseiten
+ gesetzten Seiten, sondern auch für den auf Kapitelanfangsseiten
automatisch verwendeten \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil %
\else%
- auch für den auf Kapitelanfangsseiten verwendeten Seitenstil %
+ auch für den auf Kapitelanfangsseiten verwendeten Seitenstil %
\fi%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}%
\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings} konfiguriert.%
Da die Seitenstile bereits mit Marken in der Mitte von Kopf oder
- Fuß vordefiniert sind, werden diese beiden Elemente mit
+ Fuß vordefiniert sind, werden diese beiden Elemente mit
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead} und
- \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot} gelöscht. Hierzu werden leere
- Argumente verwendet. Alternativ dazu hätte man auch
+ \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot} gelöscht. Hierzu werden leere
+ Argumente verwendet. Alternativ dazu hätte man auch
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles}
\IndexCmd{clearpairofpagestyles}
- \emph{vor} \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead} verwenden können. Diese
+ \emph{vor} \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead} verwenden können. Diese
Anweisung wird jedoch erst in
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs} auf
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles}
- erklärt werden.
+ erklärt werden.
\end{Example}%
Bitte beachten Sie, dass das leere optionale Argument bei
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot} im Beispiel nicht gleichbedeutend mit
dem Weglassen dieses optionalen Arguments ist. Sie sollten das einmal
- selbst ausprobieren und dabei den Fuß der ersten Seite beobachten.%
+ selbst ausprobieren und dabei den Fuß der ersten Seite beobachten.%
\fi
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% Umbruchvarianten
@@ -616,17 +616,17 @@
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.righttopmark}} weitere
Marken-Anweisungen.%
}{%
- Sollten die hier vorgestellten Möglichkeiten für Marken einmal nicht
- ausreichen, so sind für fortgeschrittene Anwender ab
+ Sollten die hier vorgestellten Möglichkeiten für Marken einmal nicht
+ ausreichen, so sind für fortgeschrittene Anwender ab
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark}}{%
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.righttopmark}} weitere Anweisungen
dokumentiert.%
}%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrektur
- \ Beispielsweise ist für lexikonartige Dokumente das dort erklärte
+ \ Beispielsweise ist für lexikonartige Dokumente das dort erklärte
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark} und
- \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark} recht nützlich.%
+ \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark} recht nützlich.%
\fi \EndIndexGroup
@@ -644,10 +644,10 @@
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- } intern üblicherweise verwendet, um die Gliederungsnummern der
+ } intern üblicherweise verwendet, um die Gliederungsnummern der
automatischen Kolumnentitel zu formatieren. Dabei wird auch der
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.autodot}-Mechanismus der \KOMAScript-Klassen
- unterstützt. Bei Bedarf können diese Anweisungen umdefiniert werden, um eine
+ unterstützt. Bei Bedarf können diese Anweisungen umdefiniert werden, um eine
andere Formatierung der Nummern zu erreichen.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{%
\ Siehe dazu gegebenenfalls das Beispiel in
@@ -661,7 +661,7 @@
Wollen Sie auf Abschnittsebene Kolumnentitel ohne Gliederungsnummer,
geht das beispielsweise so:
\else
- Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass Abschnittsüberschriften im Kolumnentitel
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass Abschnittsüberschriften im Kolumnentitel
ohne Gliederungsnummer gesetzt werden, \iffree{so}{dann} ist das ganz
einfach \iffree{mit:}{so zu erreichen:}
\fi
@@ -687,8 +687,8 @@
Diese Anweisungen werden intern von den meisten Klassen verwendet, um die
Marken entsprechend der Gliederungsbefehle zu setzen. Dabei wird als
Argument lediglich der Text, nicht jedoch die Nummer erwartet. Die Nummer
- wird stattdessen automatisch über den aktuellen Zählerstand ermittelt, falls
- mit nummerierten Überschriften gearbeitet wird.
+ wird stattdessen automatisch über den aktuellen Zählerstand ermittelt, falls
+ mit nummerierten Ãœberschriften gearbeitet wird.
Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!} verwenden nicht alle Klassen in allen
Gliederungsebenen eine solche Anweisung. %
@@ -698,15 +698,15 @@
}{%
So wird beispielsweise \Macro{partmark} von den
Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} nie
- aufgerufen, während die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbstverständlich auch
- \Macro{partmark} unterstützen.%
+ aufgerufen, während die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbstverständlich auch
+ \Macro{partmark} unterstützen.%
}
Falls diese Anweisungen vom Anwender umdefiniert werden, sollte
er\textnote{Achtung!} unbedingt darauf achten, vor dem Setzen der Nummer
- ebenfalls über \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} zu prüfen, ob die
+ ebenfalls über \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} zu prüfen, ob die
Nummern auszugeben sind. Dies gilt auch, wenn der Anwender
- \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} selbst nicht verändert, weil Pakete
+ \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} selbst nicht verändert, weil Pakete
und Klassen sich eventuell auf die Wirkung von
\DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} verlassen!
@@ -714,9 +714,9 @@
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- } definiert diese Anweisungen außerdem bei jedem Aufruf von
+ } definiert diese Anweisungen außerdem bei jedem Aufruf von
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark} oder \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.manualmark} oder
- den entsprechenden Optionen teilweise neu, um so die gewünschten
+ den entsprechenden Optionen teilweise neu, um so die gewünschten
automatischen oder manuellen Kolumnentitel zu erreichen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -726,16 +726,16 @@
\Macro{markright}\Parameter{rechte Marke}
\Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke}
\end{Declaration}
- Unabhängig davon, ob gerade mit manuellen oder automatischen Kolumnentiteln
+ Unabhängig davon, ob gerade mit manuellen oder automatischen Kolumnentiteln
gearbeitet wird, kann man jederzeit die \PName{linke Marke} oder
\PName{rechte Marke} mit einer dieser Anweisungen setzen. Dabei ist zu
beachten, dass die resultierende linke Marke in
\Macro{leftmark}\IndexCmd{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}} die letzte
- auf der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ist, während die resultierende
+ auf der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ist, während die resultierende
rechte Marke in
\Macro{rightmark}\IndexCmd{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}} die erste
- auf der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ausgibt. Näheres dazu ist den
- weiterführenden Erklärungen zu \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} in
+ auf der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ausgibt. Näheres dazu ist den
+ weiterführenden Erklärungen zu \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} in
\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} oder zu
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark}\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{}{ in
@@ -743,16 +743,16 @@
\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark} zu entnehmen.
Wird mit manuellen Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell} gearbeitet,
- so bleiben die Marken gültig, bis sie durch erneute Verwendung der
+ so bleiben die Marken gültig, bis sie durch erneute Verwendung der
entsprechenden Anweisung explizit ersetzt werden. Bei automatischen
- Kolumnentiteln können Marken hingegen je nach Konfigurierung des
- Automatismus ihre Gültigkeit mit einer der nächsten Gliederungsüberschriften
+ Kolumnentiteln können Marken hingegen je nach Konfigurierung des
+ Automatismus ihre Gültigkeit mit einer der nächsten Gliederungsüberschriften
verlieren.
- Auch im Zusammenhang mit den Sternvarianten der Gliederungsbefehle können
- diese Anweisungen nützlich sein.%
+ Auch im Zusammenhang mit den Sternvarianten der Gliederungsbefehle können
+ diese Anweisungen nützlich sein.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{%
- \ Ausführliche Beispiele für die Verwendung von \Macro{markboth} mit dem
+ \ Ausführliche Beispiele für die Verwendung von \Macro{markboth} mit dem
von \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
}{%
@@ -768,7 +768,7 @@
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.markboth}%
Angenommen, Sie schreiben noch vor dem Inhaltsverzeichnis ein Vorwort
- über mehrere Seiten, das jedoch im Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht auf"|tauchen
+ über mehrere Seiten, das jedoch im Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht auf"|tauchen
soll. Da Sie aber Trennlinien im Kopf verwenden, soll der Kolumnentitel
das Vorwort dennoch zeigen:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -784,10 +784,10 @@
\blinddocument
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Zunächst erscheint das Ergebnis wunschgemäß. Vielleicht erst beim
- zweiten Blick fällt aber auf, dass der Kolumnentitel »\texttt{Vorwort}«
- im Gegensatz zu den übrigen Kolumnentiteln nicht im Versalsatz
- erscheint. Das ist jedoch leicht zu ändern:
+ Zunächst erscheint das Ergebnis wunschgemäß. Vielleicht erst beim
+ zweiten Blick fällt aber auf, dass der Kolumnentitel »\texttt{Vorwort}«
+ im Gegensatz zu den übrigen Kolumnentiteln nicht im Versalsatz
+ erscheint. Das ist jedoch leicht zu ändern:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[headsepline]{book}
\usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -812,7 +812,7 @@
\Index{Inhaltsverzeichnis}\IndexCmd{tableofcontents}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents}} vor das Vorwort und
entfernen Sie die \Macro{markboth}-Anweisung. Sie werden entdecken, dass
- das Vorwort als Kolumnentitel nun »\texttt{CONTENTS}« trägt. Das liegt
+ das Vorwort als Kolumnentitel nun »\texttt{CONTENTS}« trägt. Das liegt
an einer Eigenart von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}%
\IndexCmd{chapter*}\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}} (siehe
auch in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} auf
@@ -846,28 +846,28 @@
Diese Anweisung wird in der Voreinstellung zur Formatierung aller
Gliederungsnummern in automatischen Kolumnentiteln unterhalb der
Unterabschnitte und bei Klassen ohne \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}
- zusätzlich auch für die Ebene der Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte verwendet,
+ zusätzlich auch für die Ebene der Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte verwendet,
soweit die entsprechenden Mark-Anweisungen nicht bereits anderweitig
definiert sind. Dabei verwendet die Anweisung in der Voreinstellung
\Macro{@seccntmarkformat}\IndexCmd{@seccntmarkformat}%
\important{\Macro{@seccntmarkformat}}, wenn eine solche interne Anweisung
wie bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen definiert ist. Anderenfalls wird mit
\Macro{@seccntformat}\IndexCmd{@seccntformat}\important{\Macro{@seccntformat}}
- eine Anweisung verwendet, die bereits vom \LaTeX-Kern für Klassen und Pakete
+ eine Anweisung verwendet, die bereits vom \LaTeX-Kern für Klassen und Pakete
bereitgestellt und von \KOMAScript{} etwas modifiziert wird. Als Argument
erwartet \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} den Namen der Gliederung, also
beispielsweise \PValue{chapter} oder \PValue{section} \emph{ohne}
- vorangestellten umgekehrten Schrägstrich (engl. \emph{backslash}).
+ vorangestellten umgekehrten Schrägstrich (engl. \emph{backslash}).
Durch Umdefinierung dieser Anweisung kann damit die Standardformatierung
- aller Gliederungsnummern im Kolumnentitel geändert werden, die darauf
- zurückgreifen. Ebenso kann eine Klasse darüber eine andere
- Standardformatierung vorgeben, ohne alle Befehle einzeln ändern zu müssen.%
+ aller Gliederungsnummern im Kolumnentitel geändert werden, die darauf
+ zurückgreifen. Ebenso kann eine Klasse darüber eine andere
+ Standardformatierung vorgeben, ohne alle Befehle einzeln ändern zu müssen.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{\iftrue}{%
\par %
- Ein ausführliches Beispiel für das Zusammenspiel der Anweisung
+ Ein ausführliches Beispiel für das Zusammenspiel der Anweisung
\Macro{GenericMarkFormat} mit den auf
- \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chaptermark} erklärten Anweisungen
+ \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chaptermark} erklärten Anweisungen
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.sectionmarkformat} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsectionmarkformat} beziehungsweise
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chaptermarkformat} bei Verwendung des
@@ -886,7 +886,7 @@
\phantomsection
\xmpllabel{cmd.GenericMarkFormat}%
Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass bei allen Gliederungsnummern im
- Kolumnentitel eines Artikels die Nummer als weiße Schrift auf einem
+ Kolumnentitel eines Artikels die Nummer als weiße Schrift auf einem
schwarzen Kasten ausgegeben wird. Da bei Artikeln mit \Class{article}
die Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}%
\IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}%
@@ -899,7 +899,7 @@
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
} mit Hilfe von
- \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} definiert werden, genügt dafür die
+ \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} definiert werden, genügt dafür die
entsprechende Umdefinierung dieser einen Anweisung:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox,textcolor}]
\documentclass{article}
@@ -919,29 +919,29 @@
\blinddocument
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Für die Farbumschaltungen werden Anweisungen des Pakets
- \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor} verwendet. Näheres dazu ist der
+ Für die Farbumschaltungen werden Anweisungen des Pakets
+ \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor} verwendet. Näheres dazu ist der
Anleitung zum Paket zu entnehmen (siehe \cite{package:xcolor}).
- Außerdem wird eine unsichtbare Stütze mit \Macro{strut} eingefügt. Diese
- Anweisung sollte in keiner ausführlichen \LaTeX-Einführung fehlen.
+ Außerdem wird eine unsichtbare Stütze mit \Macro{strut} eingefügt. Diese
+ Anweisung sollte in keiner ausführlichen \LaTeX-Einführung fehlen.
- Für den Kasten mit der Nummer wird eine eigene Hilfsanweisung
+ Für den Kasten mit der Nummer wird eine eigene Hilfsanweisung
\Macro{numberbox} definiert. Diese wird in der Umdefinierung von
\Macro{GenericMarkFormat} mit
\Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect}\important{\Macro{protect}} vor der
- Expansion geschützt. Dies ist notwendig, weil sonst durch das
+ Expansion geschützt. Dies ist notwendig, weil sonst durch das
\Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase}%
- \important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}} für den Versalsatz der Kolumnentitel
- nicht mehr die Farben »\texttt{black}« und »\texttt{white}«, sondern die
- Farben »\texttt{BLACK}« und »\texttt{WHITE}« verlangt würden, die gar
- nicht definiert sind. Alternativ könnte man \Macro{numberbox} auch mit
+ \important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}} für den Versalsatz der Kolumnentitel
+ nicht mehr die Farben »\texttt{black}« und »\texttt{white}«, sondern die
+ Farben »\texttt{BLACK}« und »\texttt{WHITE}« verlangt würden, die gar
+ nicht definiert sind. Alternativ könnte man \Macro{numberbox} auch mit
Hilfe von \Macro{DeclareRobustCommand*} statt mit \Macro{newcommand*}
definieren (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}).
Wollte man dasselbe mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse oder mit den
- Standardklassen \Class{book} oder \Class{report} erreichen, so müsste
- man übrigens zusätzlich
+ Standardklassen \Class{book} oder \Class{report} erreichen, so müsste
+ man übrigens zusätzlich
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}%
\IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}} und --
@@ -991,22 +991,22 @@
\Macro{leftbotmark}
\Macro{leftfirstmark}
\end{Declaration}
- \LaTeX\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} verwendet für die Seitenstile
+ \LaTeX\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} verwendet für die Seitenstile
normalerweise eine zweiteilige \TeX-Marke. Im Kolumnentitel kann auf den
linken Teil der Marke mit \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark}}\IndexCmd{leftmark} zugegriffen
- werden, während der rechte Teil der Marke über
+ werden, während der rechte Teil der Marke über
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark}%
- \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark}}\IndexCmd{rightmark} verfügbar
- ist. Tatsächlich ist es wohl auch so gedacht, dass
- \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark} für linke Seiten und
- \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} für rechte Seiten im doppelseitigen Druck
+ \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark}}\IndexCmd{rightmark} verfügbar
+ ist. Tatsächlich ist es wohl auch so gedacht, dass
+ \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark} für linke Seiten und
+ \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} für rechte Seiten im doppelseitigen Druck
verwendet wird. Im einseitigen Layout setzen die Gliederungsbefehle der
Standardklassen den linken Teil der Marke hingegen gar nicht erst.
- \TeX{} selbst kennt drei Möglichkeiten, auf eine Marke zuzugreifen. Die
+ \TeX{} selbst kennt drei Möglichkeiten, auf eine Marke zuzugreifen. Die
\Macro{botmark}\IndexCmd{botmark}\important{\Macro{botmark}} ist die auf der
- zuletzt zusammengestellten Seite zuletzt gültige Marke. Das entspricht der
+ zuletzt zusammengestellten Seite zuletzt gültige Marke. Das entspricht der
zuletzt gesetzten Marke der Seite. Wurde auf der Seite keine Marke gesetzt,
so entspricht es der zuletzt gesetzten Marke auf den bereits ausgegebenen
Seiten. Die \LaTeX-Anweisung \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark} verwendet genau
@@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- } die Möglichkeit mit \Macro{lefttopmark}\important{\Macro{lefttopmark}} auf
+ } die Möglichkeit mit \Macro{lefttopmark}\important{\Macro{lefttopmark}} auf
den linken Teil dieser Marke und mit
\Macro{righttopmark}\important{\Macro{righttopmark}} auf den rechten Teil
zuzugreifen.
@@ -1041,39 +1041,39 @@
Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass der linke und rechte Teil der
Marke immer nur gemeinsam gesetzt werden kann. Selbst wenn man mit
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} nur den rechten Teil
- verändert, wird der linke Teil (unverändert) mit gesetzt. Entsprechend
- setzen im doppelseitigen Layout die höheren Gliederungsebenen beim
+ verändert, wird der linke Teil (unverändert) mit gesetzt. Entsprechend
+ setzen im doppelseitigen Layout die höheren Gliederungsebenen beim
Seitenstil
\PageStyle{headings}\important{\PageStyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings}
immer beide Teile. Beispielsweise verwendet
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark} dann
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markboth} mit einem leeren rechten Argument. Das ist
auch der Grund, warum \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} beziehungsweise
- \Macro{rightfirstmark} auf der Seite einer Kapitelüberschrift immer einen
- leeren Wert zurück gibt, selbst wenn danach beispielsweise über
- \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark} oder indirekt über
+ \Macro{rightfirstmark} auf der Seite einer Kapitelüberschrift immer einen
+ leeren Wert zurück gibt, selbst wenn danach beispielsweise über
+ \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark} oder indirekt über
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} ein neuer rechter Teil
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{der Marke}{\unskip} gesetzt
wurde.
Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass die Verwendung einer der hier
- erklärten Anweisungen zur Ausgabe des linken oder rechten Teils der Marke
- innerhalb einer Seite zu unerwarteten Ergebnissen führen kann. Sie sind
- wirklich nur zur Verwendung im Kopf oder Fuß eines Seitenstils
+ erklärten Anweisungen zur Ausgabe des linken oder rechten Teils der Marke
+ innerhalb einer Seite zu unerwarteten Ergebnissen führen kann. Sie sind
+ wirklich nur zur Verwendung im Kopf oder Fuß eines Seitenstils
gedacht. Daher sollten sie bei \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
} immer Teil des Inhalts
einer Ebene sein. Dagegen spielt es keine Rolle, ob sie auf den Hintergrund
- oder den Vordergrund beschränkt werden, da alle Ebenen erst nach der
+ oder den Vordergrund beschränkt werden, da alle Ebenen erst nach der
Zusammenstellung der aktuellen Seite ausgegeben werden.
- Näheres zum Mark-Mechanismus \iffree{von \TeX{}}{\unskip} ist beispielsweise
+ Näheres zum Mark-Mechanismus \iffree{von \TeX{}}{\unskip} ist beispielsweise
\cite[Kapitel~23]{knuth:texbook} zu entnehmen. Das Thema ist dort als
absolutes Expertenwissen markiert.\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{
% Umbruchkorrektur
- Sollte Sie obige Erklärung also eher
+ Sollte Sie obige Erklärung also eher
verwirrt haben, machen Sie sich bitte nichts daraus.}{}%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1089,21 +1089,21 @@
\DescRef{scrlayer.option.automark} und Anweisung
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark} auf
\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark}) aktiviert sind. Bei
- den Standardklassen geht dies ausschließlich über \Macro{@mkboth}. Diese
+ den Standardklassen geht dies ausschließlich über \Macro{@mkboth}. Diese
Anweisung entspricht entweder \Macro{@gobbletwo}, einer Anweisung, die ihre
beiden Argumente vernichtet, oder \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markboth},
einer Anweisung, mit der sowohl eine \PName{linke Marke} als auch eine
- \PName{rechte Marke} gesetzt wird. Pakete wie \Package{babel} hängen sich
+ \PName{rechte Marke} gesetzt wird. Pakete wie \Package{babel} hängen sich
ebenfalls in \Macro{@mkboth} ein, um beispielsweise noch eine
Sprachumschaltung im Kolumnentitel vorzunehmen.
Will man nun jedoch nur eine \PName{linke Marke} oder nur eine \PName{rechte
- Marke} setzen, ohne die jeweils andere Marke zu verändern, so fehlen
+ Marke} setzen, ohne die jeweils andere Marke zu verändern, so fehlen
entsprechende Anweisungen. Das Paket \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
\Package{scrlayer}%
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- } selbst benötigt entsprechende Anweisungen beispielsweise im Rahmen der
+ } selbst benötigt entsprechende Anweisungen beispielsweise im Rahmen der
automatischen Kolumnentitel. Sind \Macro{@mkleft} zum Setzen nur der
\PName{linken Marke}, \Macro{@mkright} zum Setzen nur der \PName{rechten
Marke} oder \Macro{@mkdouble} zum Setzen sowohl der rechten als auch der
@@ -1113,18 +1113,18 @@
}{%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
} nicht definiert, so werden sie vom Paket selbst definiert. Dabei wird eine
- Definition gewählt, die am Zustand von \Macro{@mkboth} erkennt, ob mit
+ Definition gewählt, die am Zustand von \Macro{@mkboth} erkennt, ob mit
automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird. Nur in diesem Fall setzen die
Befehle auch eine entsprechende Marke.%
- Klassen- und Paketautoren können ebenfalls auf die passende der vier
- Anweisungen zurückgreifen, wenn sie linke oder rechte Marken setzen und
- dies auf den Fall beschränken wollen, dass mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln
+ Klassen- und Paketautoren können ebenfalls auf die passende der vier
+ Anweisungen zurückgreifen, wenn sie linke oder rechte Marken setzen und
+ dies auf den Fall beschränken wollen, dass mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln
gearbeitet wird.%
\EndIndexGroup \fi
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{%
- Zu weiteren Möglichkeiten zur Beeinflussung der Inhalte von Seitenstilen
+ Zu weiteren Möglichkeiten zur Beeinflussung der Inhalte von Seitenstilen
siehe auch \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
\autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}.%
}{}%
@@ -1133,19 +1133,19 @@
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "scrlayer-de.tex"
%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Seitenstilen Ebenenmodell scrpage headings myheadings plain
-% LocalWords: empty scrlayer Seitenstil Rückgriffe Gliederungsnummern
+% LocalWords: empty scrlayer Seitenstil Rückgriffe Gliederungsnummern
% LocalWords: Standardklassen Seitenstile konsistenteren Befehlssatzes
-% LocalWords: Einstellmöglichkeiten Seiteninhalts Gliederungsüberschrift
-% LocalWords: Maßlinien Entwurfsphase Unterabschnittsüberschrift Versalsatz
-% LocalWords: Abschnittsüberschrift Kapitelüberschrift Glyphenanalyse
+% LocalWords: Einstellmöglichkeiten Seiteninhalts Gliederungsüberschrift
+% LocalWords: Maßlinien Entwurfsphase Unterabschnittsüberschrift Versalsatz
+% LocalWords: Abschnittsüberschrift Kapitelüberschrift Glyphenanalyse
% LocalWords: Hilfsanweisung content Expertenwissen Gliederungsebenen
-% LocalWords: Gliederungsüberschriften Kapitelüberschriften Kolumnentitel
-% LocalWords: Abschnittsüberschriften Gliederungsnummer Kapitelanfangsseite
+% LocalWords: Gliederungsüberschriften Kapitelüberschriften Kolumnentitel
+% LocalWords: Abschnittsüberschriften Gliederungsnummer Kapitelanfangsseite
% LocalWords: Kolumnentiteln Abschnittsebene Paketautoren
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex
index 951953fb82..1a9aabce11 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-parmarkup.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-parmarkup.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-parmarkup.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-31 13:56:21 +0100 (Wed, 31 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\section{Absatzauszeichnung}
@@ -56,56 +56,56 @@
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
Die\textnote{Absatzeinzug vs. Absatzabstand} Standardklassen setzen
- Absätze\Index[indexmain]{Absatz} normalerweise mit Absatzeinzug und ohne
+ Absätze\Index[indexmain]{Absatz} normalerweise mit Absatzeinzug und ohne
Absatzabstand. Bei Verwendung eines normalen Satzspiegels, wie ihn
\Package{typearea} bietet, ist dies die vorteilhafteste
- Absatzauszeichnung. Würde man ohne Einzug und Abstand arbeiten, hätte der
- Leser als Anhaltspunkt nur die Länge der letzten Zeile. Im Extremfall kann
+ Absatzauszeichnung. Würde man ohne Einzug und Abstand arbeiten, hätte der
+ Leser als Anhaltspunkt nur die Länge der letzten Zeile. Im Extremfall kann
es sehr schwer sein zu erkennen, ob eine Zeile voll ist oder nicht. Des
Weiteren stellt der Typograf fest, dass die Auszeichnung des Absatzendes am
- Anfang der nächsten Zeile leicht vergessen ist. Demgegenüber ist eine
- Auszeichnung am Absatzanfang einprägsamer. Der Absatzabstand hat den
+ Anfang der nächsten Zeile leicht vergessen ist. Demgegenüber ist eine
+ Auszeichnung am Absatzanfang einprägsamer. Der Absatzabstand hat den
Nachteil, dass er in verschiedenem Zusammenhang leicht verloren geht. So
- wäre nach einer abgesetzten Formel nicht mehr festzustellen, ob der Absatz
- fortgesetzt wird oder ein neuer beginnt. Auch am Seitenanfang müsste
- zurückgeblättert werden, um feststellen zu können, ob mit der Seite auch ein
+ wäre nach einer abgesetzten Formel nicht mehr festzustellen, ob der Absatz
+ fortgesetzt wird oder ein neuer beginnt. Auch am Seitenanfang müsste
+ zurückgeblättert werden, um feststellen zu können, ob mit der Seite auch ein
neuer Absatz beginnt. All diese Probleme sind beim Absatzeinzug nicht
gegeben. Eine Kombination von Absatzeinzug und Absatzabstand ist wegen der
- übertriebenen Redundanz abzulehnen. Der Einzug\Index[indexmain]{Einzug}
+ übertriebenen Redundanz abzulehnen. Der Einzug\Index[indexmain]{Einzug}
alleine ist deutlich genug. Der einzige Nachteil des Absatzeinzugs liegt in
- der Verkürzung der Zeile. Damit gewinnt der
+ der Verkürzung der Zeile. Damit gewinnt der
Absatzabstand\Index{Absatz>Abstand} bei ohnehin kurzen Zeilen, etwa im
Zeitungssatz, seine Berechtigung.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
In der Einleitung zu \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} ab
\autopageref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} wird dargelegt, warum der Absatzeinzug
- gegenüber dem Absatzabstand vorzuziehen ist. Die Elemente, auf die sich
+ gegenüber dem Absatzabstand vorzuziehen ist. Die Elemente, auf die sich
diese Argumente beziehen, beispielsweise Abbildungen, Tabellen, Listen,
abgesetzte Formeln und auch neue Seiten, sind in Standardbriefen eher
- selten. Auch sind Briefe normalerweise nicht so umfänglich, dass ein nicht
+ selten. Auch sind Briefe normalerweise nicht so umfänglich, dass ein nicht
erkannter Absatz sich schwerwiegend auf die Lesbarkeit auswirkt. Die
- Argumente sind daher bei Standardbriefen eher schwach. Dies dürfte ein
- Grund dafür sein, dass der Absatzabstand bei Briefen eher gebräuchlich
- ist. Es bleiben damit für Standardbriefe im Wesentlichen zwei Vorteile des
+ Argumente sind daher bei Standardbriefen eher schwach. Dies dürfte ein
+ Grund dafür sein, dass der Absatzabstand bei Briefen eher gebräuchlich
+ ist. Es bleiben damit für Standardbriefe im Wesentlichen zwei Vorteile des
Absatzeinzugs. Zum einen hebt sich ein solcher Brief aus der Masse hervor
- und zum anderen durchbricht man damit nicht nur für Briefe das
+ und zum anderen durchbricht man damit nicht nur für Briefe das
einheitliche Erscheinungsbild aller Dokumente aus einer Quelle, die so
genannte \emph{Corporate Identity}.%
}{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
} %
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Über diese Überlegungen hinaus gilt sinngemäß, was in
+ Über diese Überlegungen hinaus gilt sinngemäß, was in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parmarkup} geschrieben wurde.
Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parmarkup} bereits
- gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf
+ gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.parmarkup.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.parmarkup.next} fortfahren.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ %
Dies gilt ebenso, wenn Sie nicht mit Klasse
\Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{scrlttr2}, sondern mit Paket \Package{scrletter}
- arbeiten. Das Paket bietet keine eigenen Einstellungen für die
- Absatzauszeichnung, sondern verlässt sich dabei ganz auf die verwendete
+ arbeiten. Das Paket bietet keine eigenen Einstellungen für die
+ Absatzauszeichnung, sondern verlässt sich dabei ganz auf die verwendete
Klasse.%
}{}%
}
@@ -121,19 +121,19 @@
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} %
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
- Bei Briefen findet man häufiger ein Layout mit Absatzabstand anstelle des
+ Bei Briefen findet man häufiger ein Layout mit Absatzabstand anstelle des
voreingestellten Absatzeinzugs. Die \KOMAScript-Klasse
\Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{scrlttr2}
bietet mit der Option \Option{parskip} %
}{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}%
}%
-eine Reihe von Möglichkeiten, um dies zu erreichen. Die \PName{Methode} setzt
+eine Reihe von Möglichkeiten, um dies zu erreichen. Die \PName{Methode} setzt
sich dabei aus zwei Teilen zusammen. Der erste Teil ist entweder
\PValue{full}\important{\OptionValue{parskip}{full}\\
- \OptionValue{parskip}{half}} oder \PValue{half}, wobei \PValue{full} für
-einen Absatzabstand von einer Zeile und \PValue{half} für einen Absatzabstand
+ \OptionValue{parskip}{half}} oder \PValue{half}, wobei \PValue{full} für
+einen Absatzabstand von einer Zeile und \PValue{half} für einen Absatzabstand
von einer halben Zeile steht. Der zweite Teil ist eines der Zeichen
-»\PValue{*}«, »\PValue{+}«, »\PValue{-}« und kann auch entfallen. Lässt man
+»\PValue{*}«, »\PValue{+}«, »\PValue{-}« und kann auch entfallen. Lässt man
das Zeichen\important{\OptionVName{parskip}{Abstand}} weg, so wird in der
letzten Zeile des Absatzes am Ende mindestens ein Geviert, das ist 1\Unit{em},
frei gelassen. Mit dem
@@ -142,10 +142,10 @@ Zeilenende mindestens ein Drittel und mit dem
Stern\important{\OptionValue{parskip}{\PName{Abstand}*}} mindestens ein
Viertel einer normalen Zeile frei gelassen. Mit der
Minus-Variante\important{\OptionValue{parskip}{\PName{Abstand}-}} werden keine
-Vorkehrungen für die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes getroffen.
+Vorkehrungen für die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes getroffen.
-Die Einstellung kann jederzeit geändert werden. Wird sie innerhalb des
-Dokuments geändert, so wird implizit die Anweisung
+Die Einstellung kann jederzeit geändert werden. Wird sie innerhalb des
+Dokuments geändert, so wird implizit die Anweisung
\Macro{selectfont}\IndexCmd{selectfont}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
@@ -157,20 +157,20 @@ Dokuments geändert, so wird implizit die Anweisung
\InternalComonFileUsageError%
}%
} %
-ausgeführt. Änderungen der Absatzauszeichnung innerhalb eines Absatzes
+ausgeführt. Änderungen der Absatzauszeichnung innerhalb eines Absatzes
werden erst am Ende des Absatzes sichtbar.
-Neben den sich so ergebenden acht Kombinationen ist es noch möglich, als
-\PName{Methode} die Werte für einfache Schalter aus
+Neben den sich so ergebenden acht Kombinationen ist es noch möglich, als
+\PName{Methode} die Werte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} zu
verwenden. Das Einschalten der
Option\important{\Option{parskip}\\\OptionValue{parskip}{true}} entspricht
-dabei \PValue{full} ohne angehängtes Zeichen für den Freiraum der letzten
+dabei \PValue{full} ohne angehängtes Zeichen für den Freiraum der letzten
Absatzzeile, also mit mindestens einem Geviert Freiraum am Ende des
Absatzes. Das Ausschalten\important{\OptionValue{parskip}{false}} der Option
schaltet hingegen wieder auf Absatzeinzug von einem Geviert um. Dabei darf die
-letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen Überblick
-über alle möglichen Werte für \PName{Methode} bietet
+letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen Ãœberblick
+über alle möglichen Werte für \PName{Methode} bietet
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{.%
\begin{desclist}
@@ -180,55 +180,55 @@ letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen Überblick
% \begin{table}
\desccaption
% \caption
- [{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip}}]{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip} zur Auswahl der Kennzeichnung
- von Absätzen\label{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}%
+ [{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip}}]{%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip} zur Auswahl der Kennzeichnung
+ von Absätzen\label{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}%
}%
{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
% \begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{off}, \PValue{no}%
\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{false}}}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen Einzug der ersten Zeilen von einem Geviert
+ Absätze werden durch einen Einzug der ersten Zeilen von einem Geviert
(1\Unit{em}) gekennzeichnet. Der erste Absatz eines Abschnitts wird nicht
eingezogen.}%
\entry{\PValue{full}, \PValue{true}, \PValue{on}, \PValue{yes}%
\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{full}}%
}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
+ Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
gekennzeichnet, Absatzenden durch einen Leerraum von mind. einem Geviert
(1\Unit{em}) der Grundschrift am Ende der letzten Zeile.}%
\pventry{full-}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
+ Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
gekennzeichnet. Absatzenden werden nicht
gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{full-}}}%
\pventry{full+}{%
- \looseness=-1 Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer
+ \looseness=-1 Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer
Zeile gekennzeichnet. Absatzenden werden durch einen Leerraum von
mind. einem Drittel einer normalen Zeile
gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{full+}}}%
\pventry{full*}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
+ Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
gekennzeichnet. Absatzenden werden durch einen Leerraum von mind. einem
Viertel einer normalen Zeile
gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{full*}}}%
\pventry{half}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer halben Zeile
+ Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer halben Zeile
gekennzeichnet. Absatzenden durch einen Leerraum von mind. einem Geviert
(1\Unit{em}) der normalen Schrift am Ende
gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{half}}}%
\pventry{half-}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer halben Zeile
+ Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer halben Zeile
gekennzeichnet. Absatzenden werden nicht
gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=half-}}%
\pventry{half+}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer halben Zeile
+ Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer halben Zeile
gekennzeichnet. Absatzenden werden durch einen Leerraum von mind. einem
Drittel einer normalen Zeile
gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{half+}}}%
\pventry{half*}{%
- Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
+ Absätze werden durch einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile
gekennzeichnet. Absatzenden werden durch einen Leerraum von mind. einem
Viertel einer normalen Zeile
gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{half*}}}%
@@ -240,9 +240,9 @@ letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen Überblick
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{}%
}%
- wird auch dann kein Abstand zwischen Absätzen eingefügt, wenn für den
+ wird auch dann kein Abstand zwischen Absätzen eingefügt, wenn für den
vertikalen Ausgleich der Einstellung
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom} zusätzlicher
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom} zusätzlicher
vertikaler Abstand verteilt werden
muss.\IndexOption{parskip~=\textKValue{never}}}%
% \end{desctabular}
@@ -250,14 +250,14 @@ letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen Überblick
\end{desclist}%
}{ auf \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}.}
-Wird\textnote{Achtung!} ein Absatzabstand verwendet, so verändert sich auch
+Wird\textnote{Achtung!} ein Absatzabstand verwendet, so verändert sich auch
der Abstand vor, nach und innerhalb von Listenumgebungen. Dadurch wird
-verhindert, dass diese Umgebungen oder Absätze innerhalb dieser Umgebungen
-stärker vom Text abgesetzt werden als die Absätze des normalen Textes
+verhindert, dass diese Umgebungen oder Absätze innerhalb dieser Umgebungen
+stärker vom Text abgesetzt werden als die Absätze des normalen Textes
voneinander.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{ %
Inhalts"~, Abbildungs"~ und Tabellenverzeichnis werden immer ohne
- zusätzlichen Absatzabstand gesetzt.%
+ zusätzlichen Absatzabstand gesetzt.%
}{%
\iffalse%
\ Verschiedene Elemente des Briefbogens werden immer ohne Absatzabstand
@@ -276,6 +276,6 @@ einen Absatzeinzug von 1\Unit{em}.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex
index 25d7649217..158b932b05 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-textmarkup.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-textmarkup.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-textmarkup.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-07-20 09:52:01 +0200 (Fri, 20 Jul 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
\section{Textauszeichnungen}
@@ -56,36 +56,36 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Schrift>Art}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup}
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup}
geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup} bereits gelesen und
- verstanden haben, können Sie
+ verstanden haben, können Sie
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrextend,scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{%
sich auf \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements},
- \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements} beschränken und
+ \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements} beschränken und
ansonsten }%
auf \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup.next} fortfahren.%
- \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\ Für diesen Fall sei jedoch darauf
- hingewiesen\textnote{Einschränkung} dass von \Package{scrextend} aus
+ \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\ Für diesen Fall sei jedoch darauf
+ hingewiesen\textnote{Einschränkung} dass von \Package{scrextend} aus
\autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}
- nur die Elemente für den Dokumenttitel, den schlauen Spruch, die Fußnoten
- und die \DescRef{maincls.env.labeling}-Umgebung unterstützt werden. Das
+ nur die Elemente für den Dokumenttitel, den schlauen Spruch, die Fußnoten
+ und die \DescRef{maincls.env.labeling}-Umgebung unterstützt werden. Das
Element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} ist zwar auch vorhanden,
- wird jedoch von \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls nur für den Dokumenttitel
+ wird jedoch von \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls nur für den Dokumenttitel
verwendet.%
}{}%
}
% Umbruchkorrektur
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{%
- \LaTeX{} verfügt über eine ganze Reihe von Anweisungen zur
+ \LaTeX{} verfügt über eine ganze Reihe von Anweisungen zur
Textauszeichnung. %
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrlttr2}{}{%
- Neben der Wahl der Schriftart gehören dazu auch Befehle zur Wahl einer
- Textgröße oder der Textausrichtung. %
+ Neben der Wahl der Schriftart gehören dazu auch Befehle zur Wahl einer
+ Textgröße oder der Textausrichtung. %
}%
-Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz},
+Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz},
\cite{latex:usrguide} und \cite{latex:fntguide} zu entnehmen.}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrlayer-scrpage,scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{%
@@ -98,20 +98,20 @@ Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz},
\end{Declaration}
Im \LaTeX-Kern ist bereits die Anweisung
\Macro{textsuperscript}\IndexCmd{textsuperscript} definiert, mit der
- \PName{Text} höher gestellt werden kann. Eine
+ \PName{Text} höher gestellt werden kann. Eine
entsprechende Anweisung, um Text tief\Index{Tiefstellung} statt
hoch\Index{Hochstellung} zu stellen, bietet
\LaTeX{}\textnote{\LaTeX~2015/01/01} erst seit Version
- 2015/01/01. Für ältere \LaTeX-Versionen definiert \KOMAScript{} daher
+ 2015/01/01. Für ältere \LaTeX-Versionen definiert \KOMAScript{} daher
\Macro{textsubscript}. %
\ifthiscommonfirst
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection
\xmpllabel{cmd.textsubscript}%
- Sie schreiben einen Text über den menschlichen Stoffwechsel. Darin
+ Sie schreiben einen Text über den menschlichen Stoffwechsel. Darin
kommen hin und wieder einfache chemische Summenformeln vor. Dabei sind
einzelne Ziffern tief zu stellen. Im Sinne des logischen Markups
- definieren Sie zunächst in der Dokumentpräambel oder einem eigenen
+ definieren Sie zunächst in der Dokumentpräambel oder einem eigenen
Paket:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}}
@@ -135,9 +135,9 @@ Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz},
den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus.
\end{ShowOutput}
- Etwas später entscheiden Sie, dass Summenformeln grundsätzlich
+ Etwas später entscheiden Sie, dass Summenformeln grundsätzlich
serifenlos geschrieben werden sollen. Nun zeigt sich, wie gut die
- Entscheidung für konsequentes logisches Markup war. Sie müssen nur die
+ Entscheidung für konsequentes logisches Markup war. Sie müssen nur die
\Macro{Molek}-Anweisung umdefinieren:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{%
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz},
}
\end{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\Molek}[2]{\textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}}%
- Schon ändert sich die Ausgabe im gesamten Dokument:
+ Schon ändert sich die Ausgabe im gesamten Dokument:
\begin{ShowOutput}
Die Zelle bezieht ihr Energie unter anderem aus der Reaktion von
\Molek C6\Molek H{12}\Molek O6 und \Molek O2 zu \Molek H2\Molek
@@ -153,8 +153,8 @@ Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz},
auf den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus.
\end{ShowOutput}
\end{Example}
- \iffalse % vielleicht in einer späteren Auf-lage
- Für Experten ist in \autoref{sec:experts.knowhow},
+ \iffalse % vielleicht in einer späteren Auf-lage
+ Für Experten ist in \autoref{sec:experts.knowhow},
\DescPageRef{experts.macroargs} dokumentiert, warum das Beispiel
funktioniert, obwohl teilweise die Argumente von \Macro{Molek} nicht in
geschweifte Klammern gesetzt wurden.%
@@ -178,36 +178,36 @@ Mit%
\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
}{} Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} ist es
-möglich, die \PName{Befehle} festzulegen, mit denen die Schrift eines
-bestimmten \PName{Element}s umgeschaltet wird. Theoretisch könnten als
-\PName{Befehle} alle möglichen Anweisungen einschließlich Textausgaben
+möglich, die \PName{Befehle} festzulegen, mit denen die Schrift eines
+bestimmten \PName{Element}s umgeschaltet wird. Theoretisch könnten als
+\PName{Befehle} alle möglichen Anweisungen einschließlich Textausgaben
verwendet werden. Sie\textnote{Achtung!} sollten sich jedoch unbedingt auf
-solche Anweisungen beschränken, mit denen wirklich nur Schriftattribute
+solche Anweisungen beschränken, mit denen wirklich nur Schriftattribute
umgeschaltet werden. In der Regel werden dies Befehle wie \Macro{rmfamily},
\Macro{sffamily}, \Macro{ttfamily}, \Macro{upshape}, \Macro{itshape},
\Macro{slshape}, \Macro{scshape}, \Macro{mdseries}, \Macro{bfseries},
\Macro{normalfont} oder einer der Befehle \Macro{Huge}, \Macro{huge},
\Macro{LARGE}, \Macro{Large}, \Macro{large}, \Macro{normalsize},
\Macro{small}, \Macro{footnotesize}, \Macro{scriptsize} und \Macro{tiny}
-sein. Die Erklärung zu diesen Befehlen entnehmen Sie bitte \cite{l2kurz},
+sein. Die Erklärung zu diesen Befehlen entnehmen Sie bitte \cite{l2kurz},
\cite{latex:usrguide} oder \cite{latex:fntguide}. Auch Farbumschaltungen wie
-\Macro{normalcolor} sind möglich (siehe \cite{package:graphics} und
+\Macro{normalcolor} sind möglich (siehe \cite{package:graphics} und
\cite{package:xcolor}).%
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext
\ Das Verhalten bei Verwendung anderer Anweisungen, inbesondere solcher, die
-zu Umdefinierungen führen oder Ausgaben tätigen, ist nicht
-definiert. Seltsames Verhalten ist möglich und stellt keinen Fehler dar.
+zu Umdefinierungen führen oder Ausgaben tätigen, ist nicht
+definiert. Seltsames Verhalten ist möglich und stellt keinen Fehler dar.
\else%
\ Die Verwendung anderer Anweisungen, inbesondere solcher, die Umdefinierungen
-vornehmen oder zu Ausgaben führen, ist nicht vorgesehen. Seltsames Verhalten
-ist in diesen Fällen möglich und stellt keinen Fehler dar.%
+vornehmen oder zu Ausgaben führen, ist nicht vorgesehen. Seltsames Verhalten
+ist in diesen Fällen möglich und stellt keinen Fehler dar.%
\fi
Mit \Macro{setkomafont} wird die Schriftumschaltung eines Elements mit einer
-völlig neuen Definition versehen. Demgegenüber wird mit \Macro{addtokomafont}
+völlig neuen Definition versehen. Demgegenüber wird mit \Macro{addtokomafont}
die existierende Definition lediglich erweitert. Es wird empfohlen, beide
-Anweisungen nicht innerhalb des Dokuments, sondern nur in der Dokumentpräambel
-zu verwenden. Beispiele für die Verwendung entnehmen Sie bitte den Abschnitten
+Anweisungen nicht innerhalb des Dokuments, sondern nur in der Dokumentpräambel
+zu verwenden. Beispiele für die Verwendung entnehmen Sie bitte den Abschnitten
zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{%
\ Namen und Bedeutung der einzelnen Elemente
@@ -221,11 +221,11 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
}%
aufgelistet.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ %
- Allerdings werden davon in \Package{scrextend} nur\textnote{Einschränkung}
- die Elemente für den Dokumenttitel, den schlauen Spruch, die Fußnoten und
+ Allerdings werden davon in \Package{scrextend} nur\textnote{Einschränkung}
+ die Elemente für den Dokumenttitel, den schlauen Spruch, die Fußnoten und
die \DescRef{maincls.env.labeling}-Umgebung behandelt. Das Element
- \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} ist zwar auch verfügbar, wird
- jedoch von \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls nur für den Dokumenttitel
+ \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} ist zwar auch verfügbar, wird
+ jedoch von \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls nur für den Dokumenttitel
verwendet.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{ %
@@ -244,18 +244,18 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrlttr2,scrextend}{% Umbruchvarianten
Mit der Anweisung \Macro{usekomafont} kann die aktuelle Schriftart auf die
- für das angegebene \PName{Element} umgeschaltet werden.%
+ für das angegebene \PName{Element} umgeschaltet werden.%
}{%
Mit der Anweisung \Macro{usekomafont} kann die aktuelle Schriftart auf
- diejenige umgeschaltet werden, die für das angegebene \PName{Element}
+ diejenige umgeschaltet werden, die für das angegebene \PName{Element}
definiert ist.%
}
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.setkomafont}%
- Angenommen, für das Element
+ Angenommen, für das Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.captionlabel} soll dieselbe
- Schriftart wie für
+ Schriftart wie für
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.descriptionlabel} verwendet
werden. Das erreichen Sie einfach mit:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -271,11 +271,11 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\desccaption{%
Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} oder
\Class{scrartcl} mit \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont}
- verändert werden kann%
+ verändert werden kann%
\label{tab:maincls.fontelements}%
\label{tab:scrextend.fontelements}%
}{%
- Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\feentry{author}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
@@ -285,15 +285,15 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.author} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.author})}%
\feentry{caption}{Text einer Abbildungs- oder Tabellenunter- oder
- "~überschrift (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.floats},
+ "~überschrift (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.floats},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.caption})}%
\feentry{captionlabel}{%
- Label einer Abbildungs- oder Tabellenunter- oder "~überschrift;
+ Label einer Abbildungs- oder Tabellenunter- oder "~überschrift;
Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.caption} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.caption})}%
\feentry{chapter}{%
- Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} (siehe
+ Ãœberschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter})}%
\feentry{chapterentry}{%
Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}%
\feentry{chapterentrydots}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
- Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene
+ Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} abweichend vom Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrypagenumber} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}%
@@ -343,29 +343,29 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.dictum})}%
\feentry{dictumtext}{%
- alternative Bezeichnung für
+ alternative Bezeichnung für
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum}}%
\feentry{disposition}{%
- alle Gliederungsüberschriften, also die Argumente von
+ alle Gliederungsüberschriften, also die Argumente von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} bis
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} und
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec} sowie die Überschrift der
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec} sowie die Ãœberschrift der
Zusammenfassung; die Anwendung erfolgt vor dem Element der jeweiligen
Gliederungsebene (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab
\autopageref{sec:maincls.structure})}%
\feentry{footnote}{%
- Marke und Text einer Fußnote (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes},
+ Marke und Text einer Fußnote (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}%
\feentry{footnotelabel}{%
- Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element
+ Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}%
\feentry{footnotereference}{%
- Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text (siehe
+ Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}%
\feentry{footnoterule}{%
Linie\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} über dem Fußnotenapparat (siehe
+ \Class{scrartcl}} über dem Fußnotenapparat (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule})}%
\feentry{labelinglabel}{%
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.labelinglabel} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.labeling})}%
\feentry{minisec}{%
- mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec} gesetzte Überschrift
+ mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec} gesetzte Ãœberschrift
(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.minisec})}%
\feentry{pagefoot}{%
@@ -391,24 +391,24 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
ist (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}%
\feentry{pagehead}{%
- alternative Bezeichnung für
+ alternative Bezeichnung für
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}}%
\feentry{pageheadfoot}{%
- Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten
+ Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten
Seitenstilen (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} ab
\autopageref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}%
\feentry{pagenumber}{%
- Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite (siehe
+ Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}%
\feentry{pagination}{%
- alternative Bezeichnung für
+ alternative Bezeichnung für
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber}}%
\feentry{paragraph}{%
- Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.paragraph}
+ Ãœberschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.paragraph}
(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph})}%
\feentry{part}{%
- Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part}, jedoch
+ Ãœberschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part}, jedoch
ohne die Zeile mit der Nummer des Teils (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part})}%
\feentry{partentry}{%
@@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.partentry} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}%
\feentry{partnumber}{%
- Zeile mit der Nummer des Teils in Überschrift der Ebene
+ Zeile mit der Nummer des Teils in Ãœberschrift der Ebene
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part})}%
\feentry{publishers}{%
@@ -432,28 +432,28 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.publishers} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.publishers})}%
\feentry{section}{%
- Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} (siehe
+ Ãœberschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.section})}%
\feentry{sectionentry}{%
Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} (nur bei \Class{scrartcl}
- verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
+ verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}%
\feentry{sectionentrydots}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene
+ Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} abweichend vom Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrypagenumber} (nur
- bei \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
+ bei \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}%
\feentry{sectionentrypagenumber}{%
Seitenzahl des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags der Ebene
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} abweichend vom Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.sectionentry} (nur bei
- \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
+ \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}%
\feentry{sectioning}{%
- alternative Bezeichnung für
+ alternative Bezeichnung für
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.disposition}}%
\feentry{subject}{%
Typisierung des Dokuments, also das Argument von
@@ -461,15 +461,15 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subject})}%
\feentry{subparagraph}{%
- Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subparagraph}
+ Ãœberschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subparagraph}
(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph})}%
\feentry{subsection}{%
- Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsection}
+ Ãœberschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsection}
(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subsection})}%
\feentry{subsubsection}{%
- Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsubsection}
+ Ãœberschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsubsection}
(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection})}%
\feentry{subtitle}{%
@@ -480,13 +480,13 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\feentry{title}{%
Haupttitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.title} bei Verwendung von
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (bezüglich der Größe des
- Haupttitels siehe die ergänzenden Bemerkungen im Text von
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (bezüglich der Größe des
+ Haupttitels siehe die ergänzenden Bemerkungen im Text von
\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} ab \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.title})}%
\feentry{titlehead}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}%
- Kopf über dem Haupttitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von
+ Kopf über dem Haupttitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlehead} mit
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlehead})}%
@@ -501,8 +501,8 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\color{red}%
}
\end{lstcode}
- Für die Anweisung \Macro{color}\PParameter{red} wird das Paket
- \Package{color} oder \Package{xcolor} benötigt. Die zusätzliche Angabe
+ Für die Anweisung \Macro{color}\PParameter{red} wird das Paket
+ \Package{color} oder \Package{xcolor} benötigt. Die zusätzliche Angabe
von \Macro{normalfont} ist in diesem Beispiel deshalb nicht notwendig,
weil diese Anweisung bereits in der Definition des Titels enthalten
ist. Das\textnote{Achtung!} Beispiel setzt voraus, dass
@@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\end{Example}
\else
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{%
- Ein allgemeines Beispiel für die Anwendung sowohl von
+ Ein allgemeines Beispiel für die Anwendung sowohl von
\Macro{setkomafont} als auch
\Macro{usekomafont} finden Sie in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup},
\PageRefxmpl{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}.
@@ -521,15 +521,15 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\desccaption{%
Elemente, deren Schrift bei der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} oder
dem Paket \Package{scrletter} mit \Macro{setkomafont} und
- \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
+ \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
kann\label{tab:scrlttr2.fontelements}%
}{%
- Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\feentry{addressee}{Name und Anschrift im Anschriftfenster
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield})}%
- \feentry{backaddress}{Rücksendeadresse für einen Fensterbriefumschlag
+ \feentry{backaddress}{Rücksendeadresse für einen Fensterbriefumschlag
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress})}%
\feentry{descriptionlabel}{Label, also das optionale Argument von
@@ -537,23 +537,23 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}-Umgebung
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.env.description})}%
- \feentry{foldmark}{Faltmarke auf dem Briefpapier; ermöglicht Änderung
+ \feentry{foldmark}{Faltmarke auf dem Briefpapier; ermöglicht Änderung
der Linienfarbe (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks})}%
\feentry{footnote}{%
- Marke und Text einer Fußnote (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes},
+ Marke und Text einer Fußnote (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}%
\feentry{footnotelabel}{%
- Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element
+ Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote}
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}%
\feentry{footnotereference}{%
- Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text
+ Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}%
\feentry{footnoterule}{%
- Linie\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}} über dem Fußnotenapparat
+ Linie\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}} über dem Fußnotenapparat
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule})}%
\feentry{fromaddress}{Absenderadresse im Briefkopf
@@ -562,8 +562,8 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\feentry{fromname}{Name des Absenders im Briefkopf abweichend von
\PValue{fromaddress} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.fromname})}%
- \feentry{fromrule}{Linie im Absender im Briefkopf; gedacht für
- Farbänderungen (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
+ \feentry{fromrule}{Linie im Absender im Briefkopf; gedacht für
+ Farbänderungen (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.fromrule})}%
\feentry{labelinglabel}{%
Label, also das optionale Argument der
@@ -582,37 +582,37 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\feentry{pagefoot}{%
wird nach dem Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}
- für den mit Variable
+ für den mit Variable
\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot}
- definierten Seitenfuß verwendet oder wenn das Paket
+ definierten Seitenfuß verwendet oder wenn das Paket
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen ist
(\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}%
\feentry{pagehead}{%
- alternative Bezeichnung für
+ alternative Bezeichnung für
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}}%
\feentry{pageheadfoot}{%
- Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten
+ Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten
Seitenstilen (\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle},
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot})}%
\feentry{pagenumber}{%
- Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite
+ Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite
(\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle},
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber})}%
\feentry{pagination}{%
- alternative Bezeichnung für
+ alternative Bezeichnung für
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber}}%
\feentry{placeanddate}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
- Ort und Datum, falls statt einer Geschäftszeile nur eine Datumszeile
+ Ort und Datum, falls statt einer Geschäftszeile nur eine Datumszeile
verwendet wird (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator})}%
\feentry{refname}{%
- Bezeichnung der Felder in der Geschäftszeile
+ Bezeichnung der Felder in der Geschäftszeile
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}%
\feentry{refvalue}{%
- Werte der Felder in der Geschäftszeile
+ Werte der Felder in der Geschäftszeile
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}%
\feentry{specialmail}{Versandart im Anschriftfenster
@@ -620,39 +620,39 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.specialmail})}%
\feentry{lettersubject}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}%
- Betreff in der Brieferöffnung (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
+ Betreff in der Brieferöffnung (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.subject})}%
\feentry{lettertitle}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}%
- Titel in der Brieferöffnung (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
+ Titel in der Brieferöffnung (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.title})}%
\feentry{toaddress}{Abweichung vom Element
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} für die
- Anschrift (ohne Name) des Empfängers im Anschriftfeld
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} für die
+ Anschrift (ohne Name) des Empfängers im Anschriftfeld
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.toaddress})}%
\feentry{toname}{Abweichung vom Element
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} für den Namen
- des Empfängers im Anschriftfeld (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} für den Namen
+ des Empfängers im Anschriftfeld (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.toname})}%
\end{desclist}
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{%
\begin{desclist}
\desccaption[{Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
- mit \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
- kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung}]%
+ mit \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
+ kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung}]%
{Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} mit
- \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
- kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung, falls die
+ \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
+ kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung, falls die
Elemente beim Laden von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} nicht bereits
definiert sind%
\label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}%
}%
- {Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann
+ {Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann
(\emph{Fortsetzung})}%
\feentry{footbotline}{%
- Linie unter dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
+ Linie unter dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
definierten Seitenstils (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footbotline}). Das
@@ -662,11 +662,11 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagefoot}%
\IndexFontElement{pagefoot} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen, dieses
- Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
+ Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
\mbox{Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}}%
}%
\feentry{footsepline}{%
- Linie über dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
+ Linie über dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
definierten Seitenstils (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footsepline}). Das
@@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagefoot}%
\IndexFontElement{pagefoot} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen, dieses
- Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
+ Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
\mbox{Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}}%
}%
\feentry{headsepline}{%
@@ -690,11 +690,11 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagehead}%
\IndexFontElement{pagehead} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen, dieses
- Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
+ Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
\mbox{Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}}%
}%
\feentry{headtopline}{%
- Linie über dem Kopf eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
+ Linie über dem Kopf eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
definierten Seitenstils (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.headtopline}). Das
@@ -704,11 +704,11 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagehead}%
\IndexFontElement{pagehead} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen, dieses
- Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
+ Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par
\mbox{Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}}%
}%
\feentry{pagefoot}{%
- Inhalt eines Fußes eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
+ Inhalt eines Fußes eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
definierten Seitenstils (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). Das Element
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\mbox{Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}}%
}%
\feentry{pageheadfoot}{%
- Inhalt eines Kopfes oder Fußes eines mit
+ Inhalt eines Kopfes oder Fußes eines mit
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten Seitenstils (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pageheadfoot}). Das
@@ -743,9 +743,9 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagenumber}). Bei einer
etwaigen Umdefinierung von
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.pagemark} ist dafür zu sorgen,
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.pagemark} ist dafür zu sorgen,
dass die Umdefinierung auch ein
- \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber} enthält!\par
+ \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber} enthält!\par
\mbox{Voreinstellung: \Macro{normalfont}}%
}%
\end{desclist}
@@ -753,20 +753,20 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrjura}{%
\begin{table}
\caption{Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Package{scrjura} mit
- \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
- kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung}%
+ \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden
+ kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung}%
\label{tab:scrjura.fontelements}%
\begin{desctabular}
\feentry{Clause}{%
- Alias für \FontElement{\PName{Umgebungsname}.Clause}
+ Alias für \FontElement{\PName{Umgebungsname}.Clause}
innerhalb einer Vertragsumgebung, beispielsweise
\FontElement{contract.Clause} innerhalb von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.contract}; ist kein
entsprechendes Element definiert, so wird auf
- \FontElement{contract.Clause} zurückgegriffen%
+ \FontElement{contract.Clause} zurückgegriffen%
}%
\feentry{contract.Clause}{%
- Überschrift eines Paragraphen innerhalb von
+ Ãœberschrift eines Paragraphen innerhalb von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.contract} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.contract},
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.contract.Clause});
@@ -776,12 +776,12 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
}%
\entry{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement./Name/.Clause}}{%
\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{\PName{Name}.Clause}%
- Überschrift eines Paragraphen innerhalb einer Umgebung
+ Ãœberschrift eines Paragraphen innerhalb einer Umgebung
\PName{Name}, die mit
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}
definiert wurde, soweit bei der Definition mit
\Option{ClauseFont} eine Einstellung vorgenommen wurde oder
- das Element nachträglich definiert wurde (siehe
+ das Element nachträglich definiert wurde (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.newenv},
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement./Name/.Clause});
\par
@@ -826,33 +826,33 @@ zu den jeweiligen Elementen.%
Manchmal\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} werden in der Schrifteinstellung
eines Elements auch Dinge vorgenommen, die mit der Schrift eigentlich gar
-nichts zu tun haben, obwohl dies ausdrücklich nicht empfohlen wird. Soll dann
-nur die Schrifteinstellung, aber keine dieser zusätzlichen Einstellungen
-ausgeführt werden, so kann statt
+nichts zu tun haben, obwohl dies ausdrücklich nicht empfohlen wird. Soll dann
+nur die Schrifteinstellung, aber keine dieser zusätzlichen Einstellungen
+ausgeführt werden, so kann statt
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont} die Anweisung
-\Macro{usefontofkomafont} verwendet werden. Diese Anweisung übernimmt nur die
-Schriftgröße und den Grundlinienabstand, die Codierung
-(engl. \emph{encoding}), die Familie (engl. \emph{family}), die Strichstärke
-oder Ausprägung (engl. \emph{font series}) und die Form oder Ausrichtung
+\Macro{usefontofkomafont} verwendet werden. Diese Anweisung übernimmt nur die
+Schriftgröße und den Grundlinienabstand, die Codierung
+(engl. \emph{encoding}), die Familie (engl. \emph{family}), die Strichstärke
+oder Ausprägung (engl. \emph{font series}) und die Form oder Ausrichtung
(engl. \emph{font shape}).
-Mit den übrigen Anweisungen können auch einzelne Schriftattribute
-übernommen werden. Dabei übernimmt \Macro{usesizeofkomafont} sowohl die
-Schriftgröße als auch den Grundlinienabstand.%
+Mit den übrigen Anweisungen können auch einzelne Schriftattribute
+übernommen werden. Dabei übernimmt \Macro{usesizeofkomafont} sowohl die
+Schriftgröße als auch den Grundlinienabstand.%
%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% Umbruchvariante!
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrjura}{%
\par%
Vor dem Missbrauch der Schrifteinstellungen wird dennoch dringend gewarnt
- (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.fonts},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist})!%
}{%
\par%
- Diese Befehle sollten jedoch nicht als Legitimation dafür verstanden
+ Diese Befehle sollten jedoch nicht als Legitimation dafür verstanden
werden, in die Schrifteinstellungen der Elemente beliebige Anweisungen
- einzufügen. Das kann nämlich sehr schnell zu Fehlern führen (siehe
- \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ einzufügen. Das kann nämlich sehr schnell zu Fehlern führen (siehe
+ \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.fonts},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist}).%
}%
}%
@@ -863,6 +863,6 @@ Schriftgröße als auch den Grundlinienabstand.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex
index 2086df85c4..af55da723d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-titles.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-titles.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-titles.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-30 13:37:05 +0100 (Tue, 30 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)]
@@ -59,22 +59,22 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Titel}%
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{%
- Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage}
+ Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage}
geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} bereits gelesen und
- verstanden haben, können Sie auf
+ verstanden haben, können Sie auf
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlepage.next} mit
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlepage.next} fortfahren.%
}%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}%
- \ Die\textnote{Achtung!} Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrextend} zum
- Dokumenttitel gehören jedoch zu den optionalen, erweiterten Möglichkeiten
- und stehen daher nur zur Verfügung, wenn beim Laden des Pakets
- \OptionValueRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{extendedfeature}{title} gewählt
+ \ Die\textnote{Achtung!} Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrextend} zum
+ Dokumenttitel gehören jedoch zu den optionalen, erweiterten Möglichkeiten
+ und stehen daher nur zur Verfügung, wenn beim Laden des Pakets
+ \OptionValueRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{extendedfeature}{title} gewählt
wurde (siehe \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.optionalFeatures},
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.extendedfeature}).
- Darüber hinaus kann \Package{scrextend} nicht mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse
+ Darüber hinaus kann \Package{scrextend} nicht mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse
zusammen verwendet werden. In allen Beispielen aus
\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} muss daher bei Verwendung von
\Package{scrextend}
@@ -90,11 +90,11 @@ durch
\fi
Bei Dokumenten wird zwischen zwei Arten von Titeln
-\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{für das gesamte Dokument
+\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{für das gesamte Dokument
}unterschieden. Zum einen gibt es die Titelseiten. Hierbei steht der
-Dokumenttitel zusammen mit einigen zusätzlichen Informationen wie dem Autor
+Dokumenttitel zusammen mit einigen zusätzlichen Informationen wie dem Autor
auf einer eigenen Seite. Neben der Haupttitelseite kann es weitere
-Titelseiten, etwa Schmutztitel, Verlagsinformationen, Widmung oder ähnliche,
+Titelseiten, etwa Schmutztitel, Verlagsinformationen, Widmung oder ähnliche,
geben. Zum anderen gibt es den Titelkopf. Dabei erscheint der Titel lediglich
am Anfang einer neuen \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{-- in der Regel der
ersten -- }Seite. Unterhalb dieser Titelzeilen\Index{Titel>Zeilen} wird
@@ -115,29 +115,29 @@ Mit dieser Option%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
-}{} wird ausgewählt, ob für die mit
+}{} wird ausgewählt, ob für die mit
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}) gesetzte Titelei eigene
Seiten\Index{Titel>Seite} verwendet werden oder stattdessen die Titelei von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} als Titelkopf\Index{Titel>Kopf}
-gesetzt wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für
+gesetzt wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für
einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden.
Mit \OptionValue{titlepage}{true}\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{true}}
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{oder \Option{titlepage} }wird die Titelei
-in Form von Titelseiten ausgewählt. Die Anweisung
+in Form von Titelseiten ausgewählt. Die Anweisung
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} verwendet
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{dabei
}{}\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage}-Umgebungen zum Setzen dieser
-Seiten, die somit normalerweise weder Seitenkopf noch Seitenfuß erhalten. Bei
-{\KOMAScript} wurde die Titelei gegenüber den Standardklassen stark
-erweitert. Die zusätzlichen Elemente finden sie auf den nachfolgenden Seiten.
+Seiten, die somit normalerweise weder Seitenkopf noch Seitenfuß erhalten. Bei
+{\KOMAScript} wurde die Titelei gegenüber den Standardklassen stark
+erweitert. Die zusätzlichen Elemente finden sie auf den nachfolgenden Seiten.
-Demgegenüber wird mit
+Demgegenüber wird mit
\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}}\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}
erreicht, dass ein Titelkopf (engl.: \emph{in-page title}) gesetzt wird. Das
-heißt, die Titelei wird lediglich speziell hervorgehoben. Auf der Seite mit
+heißt, die Titelei wird lediglich speziell hervorgehoben. Auf der Seite mit
dem Titel kann aber nachfolgend weiteres Material, beispielsweise eine
Zusammenfassung oder ein Abschnitt, gesetzt werden.
@@ -149,28 +149,28 @@ Mit%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrextend}}%
}{\InternalCommonFileUseError}%
-} der dritten Möglichkeit, \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}%
+} der dritten Möglichkeit, \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}%
\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}}, werden nicht nur
-Titelseiten aktiviert. Es wird auch dafür gesorgt, dass die erste von
+Titelseiten aktiviert. Es wird auch dafür gesorgt, dass die erste von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.maketitle}\IndexCmd{maketitle} ausgegebene Titelseite,
also entweder der Schmutztitel oder der Haupttitel, als
-Umschlagseite\Index{Umschlag} ausgegeben wird. Jede andere Einstellung für die
+Umschlagseite\Index{Umschlag} ausgegeben wird. Jede andere Einstellung für die
Option \Option{titlepage} hebt diese Einstellung wieder auf. Die
-Ränder\important{\Macro{coverpage\dots margin}} dieser Umschlagseite werden
-über \Macro{coverpagetopmargin} (oberer Rand), \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}
-(linker Rand), \Macro{coverpagerightmargin} (rechter Rand) und natürlich
+Ränder\important{\Macro{coverpage\dots margin}} dieser Umschlagseite werden
+über \Macro{coverpagetopmargin} (oberer Rand), \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}
+(linker Rand), \Macro{coverpagerightmargin} (rechter Rand) und natürlich
\Macro{coverpagebottommargin} (unterer Rand) bestimmt. Die Voreinstellungen
-sind von den Längen \Length{topmargin}\IndexLength{topmargin} und
-\Length{evensidemargin}\IndexLength{evensidemargin} abhängig und können mit
-\Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden.
+sind von den Längen \Length{topmargin}\IndexLength{topmargin} und
+\Length{evensidemargin}\IndexLength{evensidemargin} abhängig und können mit
+\Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden.
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
Bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} sind Titelseiten
- voreingestellt. Demgegenüber verwendet \Class{scrartcl} in der
+ voreingestellt. Demgegenüber verwendet \Class{scrartcl} in der
Voreinstellung einen Titelkopf.%
}{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
- Die Voreinstellung ist von der verwendeten Klasse abhängig und wird von
+ Die Voreinstellung ist von der verwendeten Klasse abhängig und wird von
\Package{scrextend} kompatibel zu den Standardklassen erkannt. Setzt eine
Klasse keine entsprechende Voreinstellung, so ist der Titelkopf
voreingestellt.%
@@ -184,21 +184,21 @@ sind von den Längen \Length{topmargin}\IndexLength{topmargin} und
\begin{Environment}{titlepage}\end{Environment}
\end{Declaration}%
\BeginIndex{Env}{titlepage}%
-Grundsätzlich werden bei den Standardklassen und bei {\KOMAScript} alle
+Grundsätzlich werden bei den Standardklassen und bei {\KOMAScript} alle
Titelseiten in einer speziellen Umgebung, der
\Environment{titlepage}-Umgebung, gesetzt. Diese Umgebung startet immer mit
einer neuen Seite -- im zweiseitigen Layout sogar mit einer neuen rechten
-Seite~-- im einspaltigen Modus. Für eine Seite wird der Seitenstil mit
+Seite~-- im einspaltigen Modus. Für eine Seite wird der Seitenstil mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}%
\PParameter{\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.empty}}
-geändert, so dass weder Seitenzahl noch Kolumnentitel ausgegeben werden. Am
+geändert, so dass weder Seitenzahl noch Kolumnentitel ausgegeben werden. Am
Ende der Umgebung wird die Seite automatisch beendet. Sollten Sie nicht das
automatische Layout der Titelei, wie es das nachfolgend beschriebene
-\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} bietet, verwenden können, ist zu
+\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} bietet, verwenden können, ist zu
empfehlen, eine eigene Titelei mit Hilfe dieser Umgebung zu entwerfen.
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{%
- Ein Beispiel für eine einfache Titelseite mit \Environment{titlepage} finden
+ Ein Beispiel für eine einfache Titelseite mit \Environment{titlepage} finden
Sie in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage},
\PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.titlepage}.%
\csname iffalse\endcsname%
@@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ empfehlen, eine eigene Titelei mit Hilfe dieser Umgebung zu entwerfen.
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.titlepage}%
Angenommen, Sie wollen eine Titelseite, auf der lediglich oben links
- möglichst groß und fett das Wort »Me« steht -- kein Autor, kein Datum,
- nichts weiter. Folgendes Dokument ermöglicht das:
+ möglichst groß und fett das Wort »Me« steht -- kein Autor, kein Datum,
+ nichts weiter. Folgendes Dokument ermöglicht das:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
\begin{document}
@@ -224,30 +224,30 @@ empfehlen, eine eigene Titelei mit Hilfe dieser Umgebung zu entwerfen.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{maketitle}\OParameter{Seitenzahl}
\end{Declaration}%
-Während\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} bei den Standardklassen
+Während\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} bei den Standardklassen
nur maximal eine Titelseite mit den \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{drei
-}Angaben Titel, Autor und Datum existiert, können bei {\KOMAScript} mit
+}Angaben Titel, Autor und Datum existiert, können bei {\KOMAScript} mit
\Macro{maketitle} bis zu sechs Titelseiten gesetzt werden. Im Gegensatz zu
-den Standardklassen kennt \Macro{maketitle} bei {\KOMAScript} außerdem noch
+den Standardklassen kennt \Macro{maketitle} bei {\KOMAScript} außerdem noch
ein optionales nummerisches Argument. Findet es Verwendung, so wird die
Nummer als Seitenzahl der ersten Titelseite benutzt. Diese Seitenzahl wird
-jedoch nicht ausgegeben, sondern beeinflusst lediglich die Zählung. Sie
-sollten hier unbedingt eine ungerade Zahl wählen, da sonst die gesamte Zählung
-durcheinander gerät. Meiner Auf"|fassung nach gibt es nur zwei sinnvolle
-Anwendungen für das optionale Argument. Zum einen könnte man dem
+jedoch nicht ausgegeben, sondern beeinflusst lediglich die Zählung. Sie
+sollten hier unbedingt eine ungerade Zahl wählen, da sonst die gesamte Zählung
+durcheinander gerät. Meiner Auf"|fassung nach gibt es nur zwei sinnvolle
+Anwendungen für das optionale Argument. Zum einen könnte man dem
Schmutztitel\Index[indexmain]{Schmutztitel} die logische Seitenzahl -1
-geben, um so die Seitenzählung erst ab der Haupttitelseite mit 1 zu
-beginnen. Zum anderen könnte man mit einer höheren Seitenzahl beginnen,
-beispielsweise 3, 5 oder 7, um so weitere Titelseiten zu berücksichtigen, die
-erst vom Verlag hinzugefügt werden. Wird ein Titelkopf verwendet, wird das
-optionale Argument ignoriert. Dafür kann der Seitenstil einer solchen Titelei
+geben, um so die Seitenzählung erst ab der Haupttitelseite mit 1 zu
+beginnen. Zum anderen könnte man mit einer höheren Seitenzahl beginnen,
+beispielsweise 3, 5 oder 7, um so weitere Titelseiten zu berücksichtigen, die
+erst vom Verlag hinzugefügt werden. Wird ein Titelkopf verwendet, wird das
+optionale Argument ignoriert. Dafür kann der Seitenstil einer solchen Titelei
durch Umdefinierung des Makros
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}%
\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle})
-verändert werden.
+verändert werden.
-Die folgenden Anweisungen führen nicht unmittelbar zum Setzen der Titelei. Das
+Die folgenden Anweisungen führen nicht unmittelbar zum Setzen der Titelei. Das
Setzen der Titelei erfolgt immer mit \Macro{maketitle}. Es sei an dieser
Stelle auch darauf hingewiesen, dass \Macro{maketitle} nicht innerhalb einer
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage}-Umgebung zu verwenden
@@ -255,11 +255,11 @@ ist. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} in den Beispielen angegeben, sollte man nur
entweder \Macro{maketitle} oder \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage}
verwenden.
-Mit den nachfolgend erklärten Anweisungen werden lediglich die Inhalte der
-Titelei festgelegt. Sie müssen daher auch unbedingt vor \Macro{maketitle}
+Mit den nachfolgend erklärten Anweisungen werden lediglich die Inhalte der
+Titelei festgelegt. Sie müssen daher auch unbedingt vor \Macro{maketitle}
verwendet werden. Es ist jedoch nicht notwendig und bei Verwendung des
\Package{babel}-Pakets\IndexPackage{babel} (siehe \cite{package:babel}) auch
-nicht empfehlenswert, diese Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel vor
+nicht empfehlenswert, diese Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel vor
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} zu verwenden. Beispieldokumente finden Sie
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{bei den weiteren Befehlen dieses Abschnitts}{in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} ab
@@ -271,19 +271,19 @@ nicht empfehlenswert, diese Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel vor
\Macro{frontispiece}\Parameter{Frontispiz}
\end{Declaration}%
\begin{Explain}%
- Früher war der Buchblock oftmals nicht durch einen Buchdeckel vor
- Verschmutzung geschützt. Diese Aufgabe übernahm dann die erste Seite des
+ Früher war der Buchblock oftmals nicht durch einen Buchdeckel vor
+ Verschmutzung geschützt. Diese Aufgabe übernahm dann die erste Seite des
Buches, die meist einen Kurztitel, eben den \emph{Schmutztitel}, trug. Auch
heute noch wird diese Extraseite vor dem eigentlichen Haupttitel gerne
- verwendet und enthält dann Verlagsangaben, Buchreihennummer und ähnliche
+ verwendet und enthält dann Verlagsangaben, Buchreihennummer und ähnliche
Angaben.
\end{Explain}
-Bei {\KOMAScript} ist es möglich, vor der eigentlichen Titelseite eine weitere
+Bei {\KOMAScript} ist es möglich, vor der eigentlichen Titelseite eine weitere
Seite zu setzen. Als \PName{Schmutztitel}\Index{Schmutztitel} kann dabei
-beliebiger Text -- auch mehrere Absätze -- gesetzt werden. Der Inhalt von
-\PName{Schmutztitel} wird von {\KOMAScript} ohne zusätzliche Beeinflussung der
-Formatierung ausgegeben. Dadurch ist dessen Gestaltung völlig dem Anwender
-überlassen. Die Rückseite%
+beliebiger Text -- auch mehrere Absätze -- gesetzt werden. Der Inhalt von
+\PName{Schmutztitel} wird von {\KOMAScript} ohne zusätzliche Beeinflussung der
+Formatierung ausgegeben. Dadurch ist dessen Gestaltung völlig dem Anwender
+überlassen. Die Rückseite%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}}%
}{%
@@ -292,20 +292,20 @@ Formatierung ausgegeben. Dadurch ist dessen Gestaltung völlig dem Anwender
}{\ThisCommonLabelBaseFailure}%
}
des Schmutztitels ist das \PName{Frontispiz}. Der Schmutztitel
-ergibt auch dann eine eigene Titelseite, wenn mit Titelköpfen gearbeitet
+ergibt auch dann eine eigene Titelseite, wenn mit Titelköpfen gearbeitet
wird. Die Ausgabe des mit \Macro{extratitle} definierten Schmutztitels erfolgt
als Bestandteil der Titelei mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}.
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{%
- Ein Beispiel für eine einfache Titelseite mit Schmutztitel und Haupttitel
+ Ein Beispiel für eine einfache Titelseite mit Schmutztitel und Haupttitel
finden Sie in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage},
\PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.extratitle}.%
\csname iffalse\endcsname%
}%
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.extratitle}%
- Kommen wir auf das Beispiel von oben zurück und gehen davon aus, dass das
- spartanische »Me« nur den Schmutztitel darstellt. Nach dem Schmutztitel
+ Kommen wir auf das Beispiel von oben zurück und gehen davon aus, dass das
+ spartanische »Me« nur den Schmutztitel darstellt. Nach dem Schmutztitel
soll noch der Haupttitel folgen. Dann kann wie folgt verfahren werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ als Bestandteil der Titelei mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}.
\maketitle
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Sie können den Schmutztitel aber auch horizontal zentriert und etwas
+ Sie können den Schmutztitel aber auch horizontal zentriert und etwas
tiefer setzen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
@@ -328,8 +328,8 @@ als Bestandteil der Titelei mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}.
\end{lstcode}
Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.title}
ist beim Setzen der Titelei mit Hilfe von
- \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} grundsätzlich notwendig,
- damit die Beispiele fehlerfrei sind. Sie wird nachfolgend erklärt.
+ \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} grundsätzlich notwendig,
+ damit die Beispiele fehlerfrei sind. Sie wird nachfolgend erklärt.
\end{Example}
\fi%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -344,20 +344,20 @@ als Bestandteil der Titelei mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}.
\Macro{date}\Parameter{Datum}
\Macro{publishers}\Parameter{Verlag}
\Macro{and}
- \Macro{thanks}\Parameter{Fußnote}
+ \Macro{thanks}\Parameter{Fußnote}
\end{Declaration}%
-Für den Inhalt der Haupttitelseite stehen sieben Elemente zur Verfügung. Die
+Für den Inhalt der Haupttitelseite stehen sieben Elemente zur Verfügung. Die
Ausgabe der Haupttitelseite erfolgt als Bestandteil der Titelei mit
-\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, während die hier aufgeführten
+\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, während die hier aufgeführten
Anweisungen lediglich der Definition der entsprechenden Elemente dienen.
\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{titlehead}%
\LabelFontElement{titlehead}%
Der\important{\Macro{titlehead}}
\PName{Kopf}\Index[indexmain]{Titel>Seitenkopf} des Haupttitels wird mit der
-Anweisung \Macro{titlehead} definiert. Er wird über die gesamte Textbreite in
+Anweisung \Macro{titlehead} definiert. Er wird über die gesamte Textbreite in
normalem Blocksatz am Anfang der Seite ausgegeben. Er kann vom Anwender frei
-gestaltet werden. Für die Ausgabe wird die
+gestaltet werden. Für die Ausgabe wird die
Schrift\important{\FontElement{titlehead}} des gleichnamigen Elements
verwendet (siehe \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle},
\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).%
@@ -365,18 +365,18 @@ verwendet (siehe \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle},
\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}\LabelFontElement{subject}%
Die\important{\Macro{subject}}
-\PName{Typisierung}\Index[indexmain]{Typisierung} wird unmittelbar über dem
+\PName{Typisierung}\Index[indexmain]{Typisierung} wird unmittelbar über dem
\PName{Titel} in der Schrift\important{\FontElement{subject}} des
gleichnamigen Elements ausgegeben.%
\EndIndexGroup
\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}\LabelFontElement{title}%
-Der\important{\Macro{title}} \PName{Titel} wird in einer sehr großen Schrift
+Der\important{\Macro{title}} \PName{Titel} wird in einer sehr großen Schrift
gesetzt. Dabei\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}}{} finden \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{abgesehen
- von der Größe }% Umbruchkorrektur
-Schriftumschaltungen für das Element
+ von der Größe }% Umbruchkorrektur
+Schriftumschaltungen für das Element
\FontElement{title}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{title}%
\important{\FontElement{title}} Anwendung (siehe
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle},
@@ -415,39 +415,39 @@ Elements (siehe \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle},
\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{publishers}%
\LabelFontElement{publishers}%
-Als\important{\Macro{publishers}} Letztes folgt schließlich der
-\PName{Verlag}\Index[indexmain]{Verlag}. Selbstverständlich kann diese
-Anweisung auch für andere Angaben geringer Wichtigkeit verwendet
-werden. Notfalls kann durch Verwendung einer \Macro{parbox} über die gesamte
+Als\important{\Macro{publishers}} Letztes folgt schließlich der
+\PName{Verlag}\Index[indexmain]{Verlag}. Selbstverständlich kann diese
+Anweisung auch für andere Angaben geringer Wichtigkeit verwendet
+werden. Notfalls kann durch Verwendung einer \Macro{parbox} über die gesamte
Seitenbreite auch erreicht werden, dass diese Angabe nicht zentriert, sondern
-im Blocksatz gesetzt wird. Sie ist dann als Äquivalent zum Kopf zu
+im Blocksatz gesetzt wird. Sie ist dann als Äquivalent zum Kopf zu
betrachten. Dabei ist jedoch zu beachten, dass sie oberhalb von eventuell
-vorhandenen Fußnoten ausgegeben wird. Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der
+vorhandenen Fußnoten ausgegeben wird. Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der
Schrift\important{\FontElement{publishers}} des gleichnamigen Elements (siehe
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle},
\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).%
\EndIndexGroup
-Fußnoten\important{\Macro{thanks}}\Index{Fussnoten=Fußnoten} werden auf der
+Fußnoten\important{\Macro{thanks}}\Index{Fussnoten=Fußnoten} werden auf der
Titelseite nicht mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote}, sondern mit
-der Anweisung \Macro{thanks} erzeugt. Sie dienen in der Regel für Anmerkungen
-bei den Autoren. Als Fußnotenzeichen werden dabei Symbole statt Zahlen
+der Anweisung \Macro{thanks} erzeugt. Sie dienen in der Regel für Anmerkungen
+bei den Autoren. Als Fußnotenzeichen werden dabei Symbole statt Zahlen
verwendet. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass \Macro{thanks}
-innerhalb des Arguments einer der übrigen Anweisungen, beispielsweise im
+innerhalb des Arguments einer der übrigen Anweisungen, beispielsweise im
Argument \PName{Autor} der Anweisung \Macro{author}, zu verwenden ist. %
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
- Damit die Schrifteinstellung für das Element
+ Damit die Schrifteinstellung für das Element
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote} beim Paket
\Package{scrextend} Beachtung findet muss allerdings nicht nur die
- Titelerweiterung aktiviert sein, es muss auch dafür gesorgt sein, dass die
- Fußnoten mit diesem Paket gesetzt werden (siehe Einleitung von
+ Titelerweiterung aktiviert sein, es muss auch dafür gesorgt sein, dass die
+ Fußnoten mit diesem Paket gesetzt werden (siehe Einleitung von
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes},
\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes}). Trifft dies nicht zu, so
- wird die Schrift verwendet, die von der Klasse oder anderen für die Fußnoten
+ wird die Schrift verwendet, die von der Klasse oder anderen für die Fußnoten
verwendeten Paketen vorgegeben ist.%
}{}%
-Für%
+Für%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
@@ -473,9 +473,9 @@ zu entnehmen.%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \addtokomafont{caption}{\raggedright}%
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Titels}]
+ [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Titels}]
{\label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlefonts}%
- \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}Voreinstellungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Titels}
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}Voreinstellungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Titels}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
\toprule
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ zu entnehmen.%
\end{table}%
}{}%
-Bis auf den \PName{Kopf} und eventuelle Fußnoten werden alle Ausgaben
+Bis auf den \PName{Kopf} und eventuelle Fußnoten werden alle Ausgaben
horizontal zentriert. %
\iffree{%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{Die Formatierungen der einzelnen
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ horizontal zentriert. %
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}[Der Haupttitel]{%
\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Schrift\-größe und
+ Schrift\-größe und
Ausrichtung der Elemente der Haupttitelseite bei Verwendung von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.maketitle}}
[l]
@@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ horizontal zentriert. %
}{}
\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{%
- Ein Beispiel mit allen von \KOMAScript{} angebotenen Elementen für die
+ Ein Beispiel mit allen von \KOMAScript{} angebotenen Elementen für die
Haupttitelseite finden Sie in
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} auf
\PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.maintitle}.%
@@ -562,11 +562,11 @@ horizontal zentriert. %
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{maintitle}%
Nehmen wir nun einmal an, Sie schreiben eine Diplomarbeit. Dabei sei
- vorgegeben, dass die Titelseite oben linksbündig das Institut
- einschließlich Adresse und rechtsbündig das Semester wiedergibt. Wie
- üblich ist ein Titel einschließlich Autor und Abgabedatum zu setzen.
- Außerdem soll der Betreuer angegeben und zu erkennen sein, dass es
- sich um eine Diplomarbeit handelt. Sie könnten das wie folgt
+ vorgegeben, dass die Titelseite oben linksbündig das Institut
+ einschließlich Adresse und rechtsbündig das Semester wiedergibt. Wie
+ üblich ist ein Titel einschließlich Autor und Abgabedatum zu setzen.
+ Außerdem soll der Betreuer angegeben und zu erkennen sein, dass es
+ sich um eine Diplomarbeit handelt. Sie könnten das wie folgt
erreichen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
@@ -592,30 +592,30 @@ horizontal zentriert. %
\fi
\begin{Explain}
- Ein häufiges Missverständnis betrifft die Bedeutung der
- Haupttitelseite. Irrtümlich wird oft angenommen, es handle sich dabei um den
+ Ein häufiges Missverständnis betrifft die Bedeutung der
+ Haupttitelseite. Irrtümlich wird oft angenommen, es handle sich dabei um den
Buchumschlag\textnote{Umschlag}\Index{Umschlag} oder Buchdeckel. Daher wird
- häufig erwartet, dass die Titelseite nicht den Randvorgaben für
- doppelseitige Satzspiegel gehorcht, sondern rechts und links gleich große
- Ränder besitzt. Nimmt man jedoch einmal ein Buch zur Hand und klappt es auf,
+ häufig erwartet, dass die Titelseite nicht den Randvorgaben für
+ doppelseitige Satzspiegel gehorcht, sondern rechts und links gleich große
+ Ränder besitzt. Nimmt man jedoch einmal ein Buch zur Hand und klappt es auf,
trifft man sehr schnell auf mindestens eine Titelseite\textnote{Titelseiten}
unter dem Buchdeckel innerhalb des sogenannten Buchblocks. Genau diese
Titelseiten werden mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} gesetzt.
Wie beim Schmutztitel handelt es sich also auch bei der Haupttitelseite um
eine Seite innerhalb des Buchblocks, die deshalb dem Satzspiegel des
- gesamten Dokuments gehorcht. Überhaupt ist ein Buchdeckel, das \emph{Cover},
- etwas, das man in einem getrennten Dokument erstellt. Schließlich hat er oft
- eine sehr individuelle Gestalt. Es spricht auch nichts dagegen, hierfür ein
+ gesamten Dokuments gehorcht. Ãœberhaupt ist ein Buchdeckel, das \emph{Cover},
+ etwas, das man in einem getrennten Dokument erstellt. Schließlich hat er oft
+ eine sehr individuelle Gestalt. Es spricht auch nichts dagegen, hierfür ein
Grafik- oder DTP-Programm zu Hilfe zu nehmen. Ein getrenntes Dokument sollte
- auch deshalb verwendet werden, weil es später auf ein anderes Druckmedium,
- etwa Karton, und möglicherweise mit einem anderen Drucker ausgegeben werden
+ auch deshalb verwendet werden, weil es später auf ein anderes Druckmedium,
+ etwa Karton, und möglicherweise mit einem anderen Drucker ausgegeben werden
soll.
Seit \KOMAScript~3.12 kann man die erste von
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} ausgegebene Titelseite
- alternativ aber auch als Umschlagseite formatieren lassen. Dabei ändern sich
- nur die für diese Seite verwendeten Ränder (siehe Option
+ alternativ aber auch als Umschlagseite formatieren lassen. Dabei ändern sich
+ nur die für diese Seite verwendeten Ränder (siehe Option
\OptionValueRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{titlepage}{firstiscover}%
\IndexOption{titlepage~=\textKValue{firstiscover}} auf
\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.titlepage}).
@@ -625,21 +625,21 @@ horizontal zentriert. %
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{uppertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenkopf}
- \Macro{lowertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenfuß}
+ \Macro{uppertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenkopf}
+ \Macro{lowertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenfuß}
\end{Declaration}%
Im\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} doppelseitigen Druck bleibt bei
-den Standardklassen die Rückseite des Blatts mit der Titelseite leer. Bei
-{\KOMAScript} lässt sich die Rückseite der Haupttitelseite hingegen für
+den Standardklassen die Rückseite des Blatts mit der Titelseite leer. Bei
+{\KOMAScript} lässt sich die Rückseite der Haupttitelseite hingegen für
weitere Angaben nutzen. Dabei wird zwischen genau zwei Elementen
unterschieden, die der Anwender frei gestalten kann: dem
-\PName{Titelrückseitenkopf}\Index{Titel>Rueckseite=Rückseite} und dem
-\PName{Titelrückseitenfuß}. Dabei kann der Kopf bis zum Fuß reichen und
+\PName{Titelrückseitenkopf}\Index{Titel>Rueckseite=Rückseite} und dem
+\PName{Titelrückseitenfuß}. Dabei kann der Kopf bis zum Fuß reichen und
umgekehrt. \iffree{Nimmt man diese Anleitung als Beispiel, so wurde der
Haftungsausschluss mit Hilfe von \Macro{uppertitleback}
- gesetzt.}{Beispielsweise hätte man die Verlagsinformationen zu diesem Buch
+ gesetzt.}{Beispielsweise hätte man die Verlagsinformationen zu diesem Buch
wahlweise mit \Macro{uppertitleback} oder \Macro{lowertitleback} setzen
- können.}%
+ können.}%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ umgekehrt. \iffree{Nimmt man diese Anleitung als Beispiel, so wurde der
\Macro{dedication}\Parameter{Widmung}
\end{Declaration}%
{\KOMAScript} bietet eine eigene Widmungsseite. Diese Widmung\Index{Widmung}
-wird zentriert und in der Voreinstellung mit etwas größerer
+wird zentriert und in der Voreinstellung mit etwas größerer
Schrift\textnote{Schrift} gesetzt.
\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dedication}%
\LabelFontElement{dedication}
@@ -660,17 +660,17 @@ Die%
\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrextend}}%
}{\InternalCommonFileUseError}%
-}\important{\FontElement{dedication}} genaue Schrifteinstellung für das
+}\important{\FontElement{dedication}} genaue Schrifteinstellung für das
Element \FontElement{dedication}, die
\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts},
\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts} zu entnehmen ist, kann
-über die Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
+über die Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.%
+\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
-Die Rückseite ist grundsätzlich leer. Die Widmungsseite wird zusammen mit der
+Die Rückseite ist grundsätzlich leer. Die Widmungsseite wird zusammen mit der
restlichen Titelei mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} ausgegeben
und muss daher vor dieser Anweisung definiert sein.
@@ -683,7 +683,7 @@ und muss daher vor dieser Anweisung definiert sein.
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\xmpllabel{fulltitle}
Nehmen wir dieses Mal an, dass Sie einen Gedichtband schreiben, den
- Sie Ihrer Partnerin oder Ihrem Partner widmen wollen. Das könnte wie folgt
+ Sie Ihrer Partnerin oder Ihrem Partner widmen wollen. Das könnte wie folgt
aussehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
@@ -718,6 +718,6 @@ und muss daher vor dieser Anweisung definiert sein.
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex
index 87b1c4e29e..b3fa31fc35 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% common-typearea.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% common-typearea.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
+% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{common-typearea.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-01 12:55:46 +0100 (Thu, 01 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: typearea)]
@@ -55,16 +55,16 @@
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Aufteilung=Auf\/teilung}
-Eine Dokumentseite besteht aus unterschiedlichen Teilen, wie den Rändern, dem
-Kopf, dem Fuß, dem Textbereich, einer Marginalienspalte und den Abständen
+Eine Dokumentseite besteht aus unterschiedlichen Teilen, wie den Rändern, dem
+Kopf, dem Fuß, dem Textbereich, einer Marginalienspalte und den Abständen
zwischen diesen Elementen. \KOMAScript{} unterscheidet dabei auch noch
zwischen der Gesamtseite oder dem Papier und der sichtbaren Seite. Ohne
-Zweifel gehört die Auf"|teilung der Seite in diese unterschiedlichen Teile zu
-den Grundfähigkeiten einer
+Zweifel gehört die Auf"|teilung der Seite in diese unterschiedlichen Teile zu
+den Grundfähigkeiten einer
Klasse\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\OnlyAt{scrlttr2}}{}. Bei \KOMAScript{}
wird diese Arbeit an das Paket \Package{typearea} delegiert. Dieses Paket kann
auch zusammen mit anderen Klassen verwendet werden. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen
-laden \Package{typearea} jedoch selbstständig. Es ist daher weder notwendig
+laden \Package{typearea} jedoch selbstständig. Es ist daher weder notwendig
noch sinnvoll, das Paket bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse auch noch
explizit per \Macro{usepackage} zu laden. Siehe hierzu auch
\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options}, ab
@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ Einige Einstellungen der \KOMAScript{}-Klassen haben Auswirkungen auf die
Seitenauf"|teilung und umgekehrt. Diese Auswirkungen werden bei den
entsprechenden Einstellungen dokumentiert.
-Für die weitere Erklärung zur Wahl des Papierformats, der Auf"|teilung der Seite
-in Ränder und Satzspiegel und die Wahl von ein- oder zweispaltigem Satz sei
+Für die weitere Erklärung zur Wahl des Papierformats, der Auf"|teilung der Seite
+in Ränder und Satzspiegel und die Wahl von ein- oder zweispaltigem Satz sei
auf die Anleitung des Pakets \Package{typearea} verwiesen. Diese ist in
\autoref{cha:typearea} ab \autopageref{cha:typearea} zu finden.
@@ -83,6 +83,6 @@ auf die Anleitung des Pakets \Package{typearea} verwiesen. Diese ist in
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex
index 30b3608c14..2492207cfc 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% expertpart.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% expertpart.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Erster Teil: KOMA-Script für Autoren
+% Erster Teil: KOMA-Script für Autoren
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
@@ -51,27 +51,27 @@
\vspace*{2\baselineskip}%
\setlength{\parindent}{1em}%
- \noindent In diesem Teil sind die Informationen für die Autoren von
+ \noindent In diesem Teil sind die Informationen für die Autoren von
\LaTeX-Paketen und "~Klassen zu finden. Dies betrifft nicht nur
- Anweisungen, die bei der Implementierung neuer Pakete und Klassen nützlich
+ Anweisungen, die bei der Implementierung neuer Pakete und Klassen nützlich
sind, sondern auch Schnittstellen, die weitere Eingriffe in \KOMAScript{}
- erlauben. Darüber hinaus sind in diesem Teil auch obsolete Optionen und
- Anweisungen ebenso wie Hintergründe zur Implementierung von \KOMAScript{} zu
+ erlauben. Darüber hinaus sind in diesem Teil auch obsolete Optionen und
+ Anweisungen ebenso wie Hintergründe zur Implementierung von \KOMAScript{} zu
finden.
- Dieser Teil ist als Ergänzung zu den Informationen für Autoren von
- Artikeln, Berichten, Büchern und Briefen in \autoref{part:forAuthors}
- gedacht. Nähere Informationen und Beispiele für diese Anwender sind
+ Dieser Teil ist als Ergänzung zu den Informationen für Autoren von
+ Artikeln, Berichten, Büchern und Briefen in \autoref{part:forAuthors}
+ gedacht. Nähere Informationen und Beispiele für diese Anwender sind
jenem Teil zu entnehmen.
}
-\part{\KOMAScript{} für fortgeschrittene Anwender
+\part{\KOMAScript{} für fortgeschrittene Anwender
und Experten\label{part:forExperts}}
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "guide.tex"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex
index 504ee20268..777b4f1686 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% guide-ngerman.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% guide-ngerman.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
% ======================================================================
%
\KOMAProvidesFile{guide-ngerman.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-04-13 07:41:27 +0200 (Fri, 13 Apr 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide language dependencies]
%
% \section{Title}
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
Umbruchs\par\medskip%
Diese Anleitung ist als Bestandteil von \KOMAScript{} frei im Sinne der
\LaTeX{} Project Public License Version 1.3c. Eine f\"ur \KOMAScript{} g\"ultige
- deutsche \"Ubersetzung liegt \KOMAScript{} in der Datei »\texttt{lppl-de.txt}«
+ deutsche \"Ubersetzung liegt \KOMAScript{} in der Datei »\texttt{lppl-de.txt}«
bei. Diese Anleitung --~auch in gedruckter Form~-- darf nur zusammen mit den
\"ubrigen Bestandteilen von \KOMAScript{} weitergegeben und verteilt werden.
Eine Verteilung der Anleitung unabh\"angig von den \"ubrigen Bestandteilen von
@@ -312,6 +312,19 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\GuideHook}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuideHookIndexCategory}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuideHookIndexCategoryEpanded}
+% The term ``hook''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\GuideHook}{Haken}
+\newcommand*{\GuideHookIndexCategory}{Haken}
+\let\GuideHookIndexCategoryExpanded\GuideHookIndexCategory
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\GuideAnd}
% The ``and'' at a list of two.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -350,6 +363,8 @@
% \begin{macro}{\GuidefilIndexShort}
% \begin{macro}{\GuideoptIndex}
% \begin{macro}{\GuideoptIndexShort}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuidehokIndex}
+% \begin{macro}{\GuidehokIndexShort}
% The titles and short titles of each single index.
\newcommand*{\GuidegenIndex}{Allgemeiner Index}
\newcommand*{\GuidecmdIndex}{Befehle, Umgebungen und
@@ -365,6 +380,10 @@
\newcommand*{\GuideoptIndex}{Klassen- und
Paketoptionen}
\newcommand*{\GuideoptIndexShort}{Index der Optionen}
+\newcommand*{\GuidehokIndex}{Haken (\emph{do-hooks})}
+\newcommand*{\GuidehokIndexShort}{Index der Haken}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -400,8 +419,8 @@
% \begin{macro}{\GuideIndexSeeAlsos}
% These are all see also index entries.
\newcommand*{\GuideIndexSeeAlsos}{%
- \Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften|seealso{Abschnitt, Gliederung, Kapitel}}%
- \Index{Gliederung|seealso{Abschnitt, Kapitel, Überschriften}}%
+ \Index{Ueberschriften=Ãœberschriften|seealso{Abschnitt, Gliederung, Kapitel}}%
+ \Index{Gliederung|seealso{Abschnitt, Kapitel, Ãœberschriften}}%
\Index{Bindeanteil|seealso{Bindekorrektur}}%
\Index{Bindung|seealso{Bindekorrektur}}%
}
@@ -522,9 +541,10 @@
Da-tei-na-me Da-tei-na-men Da-tei-na-mens
Da-tei-na-men-er-wei-te-rung Da-tei-na-men-er-wei-te-rung-en
Ein-trags-ebe-ne Ein-trags-ebe-nen
+ Farb-um-schal-tung Farb-um-schal-tung-en
Gleich-zei-tig
Hin-ter-grund-ebe-ne Hin-ter-grund-ebe-nen
- In-halts-ver-zeich-nis-ein-trag In-halts-ver-zeich-nis-ein-trä-ge
+ In-halts-ver-zeich-nis-ein-trag In-halts-ver-zeich-nis-ein-trä-ge
Ka-pi-tel-ebe-ne Ka-pi-tel-ebe-nen
Pa-ket-au-to-ren
Pa-pier-rand Pa-pier-ran-des
@@ -535,7 +555,7 @@
Stan-dard-ein-stel-lung Stan-dard-ein-stel-lun-gen
Text-ebe-ne Text-ebe-nen
Unix
- Zei-len-um-bruch Zei-len-um-bruchs Zei-len-um-brü-che Zei-len-um-brü-chen
+ Zei-len-um-bruch Zei-len-um-bruchs Zei-len-um-brü-che Zei-len-um-brü-chen
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -544,6 +564,6 @@
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup
index 92dd812ff4..64907a5e75 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/htmlsetup
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# ======================================================================
# htmlsetup
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
#
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
# This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------
# htmlsetup
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
# Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -39,18 +39,17 @@ $baselink="scrguide.pdf";
$htmlhead="<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC \"-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0//EN\">
<html>
<head><title>Index</title>
-<meta http-equiv=\"content-type\" content=\"text/html; charset=utf-8\">
+ <meta http-equiv=\"content-type\" content=\"text/html; charset=utf-8\">
</head>
<body>
-<h1>Index der KOMA-Script-Anleitung</h1>
-<p>Dies ist ein Index der in KOMA-Script definierten Elemente. Dieser Index bezieht sich auf die <a href=\"scrguide.pdf\">KOMA-Script-Anleitung</a>. Zur besseren Ãœbersicht ist der Index in mehrere Funktionsgruppen unterteilt:</p>
+ <h1>Index der KOMA-Script-Anleitung</h1>
+ <p>Dies ist ein Index der in KOMA-Script definierten Elemente. Dieser Index bezieht sich auf die <a href=\"scrguide.pdf\">KOMA-Script-Anleitung</a>. Zur besseren Ãœbersicht ist der Index in mehrere Funktionsgruppen unterteilt:</p>
";
-$htmlend="<p>
-<a href=\"http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer\"><img
+$htmlend=" <p><a href=\"http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer\"><img
src=\"http://www.w3.org/Icons/valid-html40\"
-alt=\"Valid HTML 4.0 Strict\" height=\"31\" width=\"88\"></a>
-</p>
-</body></html>";
+alt=\"Valid HTML 4.0 Strict\" height=\"31\" width=\"88\"></a></p>
+</body>
+</html>";
%titles=( "option" => "Optionen",
"macro" => "Anweisungen",
"environment" => "Umgebungen",
@@ -60,6 +59,7 @@ alt=\"Valid HTML 4.0 Strict\" height=\"31\" width=\"88\"></a>
"pagestyle" => "Seitenstile",
"counter" => "Zähler",
"floatstyle" => "Stile für das float-Paket",
- "fontelement" => "Elemente deren Schrift geändert werden kann" );
+ "fontelement" => "Elemente deren Schrift geändert werden kann",
+ "dohook" => "Do-Hooks für Manipulationen auf unterer Ebene" );
# end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex
index b5cd43b836..5c99194e26 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/introduction.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% introduction.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% introduction.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,84 +46,84 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{introduction.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-05 10:50:56 +0100 (Mon, 05 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide introduction]
\chapter{Einleitung}
\labelbase{introduction}
-Dieses Kapitel enthält \iffree{unter anderem }{}wichtige Informationen über
+Dieses Kapitel enthält \iffree{unter anderem }{}wichtige Informationen über
den Aufbau \iffree{der Anleitung}{des Buches} und die Geschichte von
-\KOMAScript, die Jahre vor der ersten Version beginnt. Darüber hinaus finden
-Sie Informationen für den Fall, dass Sie %
+\KOMAScript, die Jahre vor der ersten Version beginnt. Darüber hinaus finden
+Sie Informationen für den Fall, dass Sie %
\iffalse % Umbruchkorreturauslassung
\KOMAScript{} noch nicht installiert haben, oder %
\fi%
-auf Fehler stoßen.
+auf Fehler stoßen.
\iffree{%
\section{Vorwort}
\seclabel{preface}
{\KOMAScript} ist ein sehr komplexes Paket (engl. \emph{bundle}). Dies
-ist schon allein darin begründet, dass es nicht nur aus einer einzigen
+ist schon allein darin begründet, dass es nicht nur aus einer einzigen
Klasse (engl. \emph{class}) oder einem einzigen Paket (engl.
\emph{package}), sondern einer Vielzahl derer besteht. Zwar sind die
-Klassen als Gegenstücke zu den Standardklassen konzipiert (siehe
-\autoref{cha:maincls}), das heißt jedoch insbesondere nicht,
-dass sie nur über die Befehle, Umgebungen und Einstellmöglichkeiten
-der Standardklassen verfügen oder deren Aussehen als
-Standardeinstellung übernehmen.
-Die Fähigkeiten von {\KOMAScript} reichen
-teilweise weit über die Fähigkeiten der Standardklassen hinaus.
-Manche davon sind auch als Ergänzung zu den Grundfähigkeiten des
+Klassen als Gegenstücke zu den Standardklassen konzipiert (siehe
+\autoref{cha:maincls}), das heißt jedoch insbesondere nicht,
+dass sie nur über die Befehle, Umgebungen und Einstellmöglichkeiten
+der Standardklassen verfügen oder deren Aussehen als
+Standardeinstellung übernehmen.
+Die Fähigkeiten von {\KOMAScript} reichen
+teilweise weit über die Fähigkeiten der Standardklassen hinaus.
+Manche davon sind auch als Ergänzung zu den Grundfähigkeiten des
\LaTeX-Kerns zu betrachten.
-Allein aus dem Vorgenannten ergibt sich schon zwangsläufig, dass die
-Dokumentation zu {\KOMAScript} sehr umfangreich ausfällt. Hinzu kommt,
-dass {\KOMAScript} in der Regel nicht gelehrt wird. Das heißt, es gibt
-keinen Lehrer, der seine Schüler kennt und damit den Unterricht und
-das Unterrichtsmaterial entsprechend wählen und anpassen kann. Es wäre
-ein Leichtes, die Dokumentation für irgendeine Zielgruppe zu
-verfassen. Die Schwierigkeit, der sich der Autor gegenüber sieht,
-besteht jedoch darin, dass eine Anleitung für alle möglichen
-Zielgruppen benötigt wird. Ich habe mich bemüht, eine Anleitung zu
-erstellen, die für den Informatiker gleichermaßen geeignet ist wie für
-die Sekretärin des Fischhändlers. Ich habe mich bemüht, obwohl es sich
-dabei eigentlich um ein unmögliches Unterfangen handelt. Ergebnis sind
+Allein aus dem Vorgenannten ergibt sich schon zwangsläufig, dass die
+Dokumentation zu {\KOMAScript} sehr umfangreich ausfällt. Hinzu kommt,
+dass {\KOMAScript} in der Regel nicht gelehrt wird. Das heißt, es gibt
+keinen Lehrer, der seine Schüler kennt und damit den Unterricht und
+das Unterrichtsmaterial entsprechend wählen und anpassen kann. Es wäre
+ein Leichtes, die Dokumentation für irgendeine Zielgruppe zu
+verfassen. Die Schwierigkeit, der sich der Autor gegenüber sieht,
+besteht jedoch darin, dass eine Anleitung für alle möglichen
+Zielgruppen benötigt wird. Ich habe mich bemüht, eine Anleitung zu
+erstellen, die für den Informatiker gleichermaßen geeignet ist wie für
+die Sekretärin des Fischhändlers. Ich habe mich bemüht, obwohl es sich
+dabei eigentlich um ein unmögliches Unterfangen handelt. Ergebnis sind
zahlreiche Kompromisse. Ich bitte jedoch, die Problematik bei
-eventuellen Beschwerden zu berücksichtigen und bei der Verbesserung
-der derzeitigen Lösung zu helfen.
+eventuellen Beschwerden zu berücksichtigen und bei der Verbesserung
+der derzeitigen Lösung zu helfen.
-Trotz des Umfangs der Anleitung bitte ich außerdem darum, im Falle von
-Problemen zunächst die Dokumentation zu konsultieren. Als erste Anlaufstelle
+Trotz des Umfangs der Anleitung bitte ich außerdem darum, im Falle von
+Problemen zunächst die Dokumentation zu konsultieren. Als erste Anlaufstelle
sei auf den mehrteiligen Index am Ende des \iffree{Dokuments}{Buches}
-hingewiesen. \iffree{Zur Dokumentation gehören neben dieser Anleitung auch
+hingewiesen. \iffree{Zur Dokumentation gehören neben dieser Anleitung auch
alle Text-Dokumente, die Bestandteil des Pakets sind. Sie sind in
- \File{manifest.txt} vollständig aufgeführt}{}
+ \File{manifest.txt} vollständig aufgeführt}{}
}{}
\section{Dokumentaufbau}
\seclabel{structure}
-Diese Anleitung ist in mehrere Teile untergliedert. Es gibt einen Teil für
-Anwender, einen für fortgeschrittene Anwender und Experten und einen Anhang
-mit weiterführenden Informationen und Beispielen für diejenigen, die es ganz
+Diese Anleitung ist in mehrere Teile untergliedert. Es gibt einen Teil für
+Anwender, einen für fortgeschrittene Anwender und Experten und einen Anhang
+mit weiterführenden Informationen und Beispielen für diejenigen, die es ganz
genau wissen wollen.
\autoref{part:forAuthors} richtet sich dabei an alle \KOMAScript-Anwender. Das
-bedeutet, dass hier auch einige Informationen für \LaTeX-Neulinge zu finden
+bedeutet, dass hier auch einige Informationen für \LaTeX-Neulinge zu finden
sind. Insbesondere ist dieser Teil mit vielen Beispielen angereichert, die dem
-reinen Anwender zur Verdeutlichung der Erklärungen dienen sollen. Scheuen Sie
+reinen Anwender zur Verdeutlichung der Erklärungen dienen sollen. Scheuen Sie
sich nicht, diese Beispiele selbst auszuprobieren und durch Abwandlung
herauszufinden, wie \KOMAScript{} funktioniert. Trotz allem ist diese
-Anleitung jedoch keine Einführung in \LaTeX. \LaTeX-Neulingen seien daher
+Anleitung jedoch keine Einführung in \LaTeX. \LaTeX-Neulingen seien daher
Dokumente wie \cite{l2kurz} nahegelegt. Wiedereinsteigern aus der Zeit von
\LaTeX~2.09 sei zumindest \cite{latex:usrguide} empfohlen. Auch das Studium des
einen oder anderen Buches zu \LaTeX{} wird empfohlen. Literaturempfehlungen
finden sich beispielsweise in \cite{DANTE:FAQ}. Der Umfang von
\cite{DANTE:FAQ} ist ebenfalls erheblich. Dennoch wird darum gebeten, sich
-einen groben Überblick darüber zu verschaffen und es bei Problemen ebenso wie
+einen groben Überblick darüber zu verschaffen und es bei Problemen ebenso wie
\iffree{diese Anleitung}{dieses Buch} zu konsultieren.
\autoref{part:forExperts} richtet sich an fortgeschrittene
@@ -131,56 +131,56 @@ einen groben Überblick darüber zu verschaffen und es bei Problemen ebenso wie
auskennen oder schon einige Zeit mit \KOMAScript{} gearbeitet haben und jetzt
etwas besser verstehen wollen, wie \KOMAScript{} funktioniert, wie es mit
anderen Paketen interagiert und wie man speziellere Aufgaben mit \KOMAScript{}
-lösen kann. Dazu werden die Klassenbeschreibungen aus
-\autoref{part:forAuthors} in einigen Aspekten nochmals aufgegriffen und näher
-erläutert. Dazu kommt die Dokumentation von Anweisungen, die speziell für
-fortgeschrittene Anwender und Experten vorgesehen sind. Ergänzt wird dies
-durch die Dokumentation von Paketen, die für den Anwender normalerweise insofern
-verborgen sind, als sie unter der Oberfläche der Klassen und Anwenderpakete
-ihre Arbeit verrichten. Diese Pakete sind ausdrücklich auch für die Verwendung
+lösen kann. Dazu werden die Klassenbeschreibungen aus
+\autoref{part:forAuthors} in einigen Aspekten nochmals aufgegriffen und näher
+erläutert. Dazu kommt die Dokumentation von Anweisungen, die speziell für
+fortgeschrittene Anwender und Experten vorgesehen sind. Ergänzt wird dies
+durch die Dokumentation von Paketen, die für den Anwender normalerweise insofern
+verborgen sind, als sie unter der Oberfläche der Klassen und Anwenderpakete
+ihre Arbeit verrichten. Diese Pakete sind ausdrücklich auch für die Verwendung
durch andere Klassen- und Paketautoren vorgesehen.
Der Anhang\iffree{, der nur in der Buchfassung zu finden ist,}{} richtet sich
-an diejenigen, denen all diese Informationen nicht genügen. Es gibt dort zum
+an diejenigen, denen all diese Informationen nicht genügen. Es gibt dort zum
einen Hintergrundwissen zu Fragen der Typografie, mit denen dem
-fortgeschrittenen Anwender eine Grundlage für fundierte eigene Entscheidungen
-vermittelt werden soll. Darüber hinaus sind dort Beispiele für angehende
+fortgeschrittenen Anwender eine Grundlage für fundierte eigene Entscheidungen
+vermittelt werden soll. Darüber hinaus sind dort Beispiele für angehende
Paketautoren zu finden. Diese Beispiele sind weniger dazu gedacht, einfach
-übernommen zu werden. Vielmehr sollen sie Wissen um Planung und Durchführung
-von \LaTeX-Projekten sowie einige grundlegende \LaTeX-Anweisungen für
+übernommen zu werden. Vielmehr sollen sie Wissen um Planung und Durchführung
+von \LaTeX-Projekten sowie einige grundlegende \LaTeX-Anweisungen für
Paketautoren vermitteln.
Die Kapitel-Einteilung der Anleitung soll ebenfalls dabei
-helfen, nur die Teile lesen zu müssen, die tatsächlich von Interesse sind. Um
+helfen, nur die Teile lesen zu müssen, die tatsächlich von Interesse sind. Um
dies zu erreichen, sind die Informationen zu den einzelnen Klassen und Paketen
-nicht über das gesamte Dokument verteilt, sondern jeweils in einem Kapitel
+nicht über das gesamte Dokument verteilt, sondern jeweils in einem Kapitel
konzentriert. Querverweise in ein anderes Kapitel sind damit in der Regel auch
Verweise auf einen anderen Teil des Gesamtpakets. Da die drei Hauptklassen in
-weiten Teilen übereinstimmen, sind sie in einem gemeinsamen Kapitel
+weiten Teilen übereinstimmen, sind sie in einem gemeinsamen Kapitel
zusammengefasst. Die Unterschiede werden deutlich hervorgehoben, soweit
sinnvoll auch durch eine entsprechende Randnotiz. Dies geschieht
beispielsweise wie hier, wenn etwas nur die Klasse
\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} betrifft. Nachteil dieses Vorgehens
ist, dass diejenigen, die \KOMAScript{} insgesamt kennenlernen wollen, in
-einigen Kapiteln auf bereits Bekanntes stoßen werden. Vielleicht nutzen Sie
+einigen Kapiteln auf bereits Bekanntes stoßen werden. Vielleicht nutzen Sie
die Gelegenheit, um Ihr Wissen zu vertiefen.
Unterschiedliche Schriftarten werden auch zur Hervorhebung unterschiedlicher
Dinge verwendet. So werden die Namen von \Package{Paketen} und \Class{Klassen}
anders angezeigt als \File{Dateinamen}. \Option{Optionen}, \Macro{Anweisungen},
\Environment{Umgebungen}, \Variable{Variablen} und
-\PLength{Pseudolängen} werden einheitlich hervorgehoben. Der
-\PName{Platzhalter} für einen Parameter wird jedoch anders dargestellt als ein
+\PLength{Pseudolängen} werden einheitlich hervorgehoben. Der
+\PName{Platzhalter} für einen Parameter wird jedoch anders dargestellt als ein
konkreter \PValue{Wert} eines Parameters. So zeigt etwa
\Macro{begin}\Parameter{Umgebung}, wie eine Umgebung ganz allgemein
eingeleitet wird, wohingegen \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} angibt, wie die
konkrete Umgebung \Environment{document} beginnt. Dabei ist dann
-\PValue{document} ein konkreter Wert für den Parameter \PName{Umgebung}
+\PValue{document} ein konkreter Wert für den Parameter \PName{Umgebung}
der Anweisung \Macro{begin}.
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Damit sollten Sie nun alles wissen, um diese Anleitung lesen und verstehen zu
-können. Trotzdem könnte es sich lohnen, den Rest dieses Kapitels gelegentlich
+können. Trotzdem könnte es sich lohnen, den Rest dieses Kapitels gelegentlich
auch zu lesen.
\fi
@@ -193,47 +193,47 @@ auch zu lesen.
Vorlesungsskript zu setzen. Damals war noch \LaTeX~2.09 aktuell und
es gab keine Unterscheidung nach Klassen und Paketen, sondern alles
waren Stile (engl. \emph{styles}). Die Standarddokumentstile
- erschienen ihm für ein Vorlesungsskript nicht optimal und boten auch
- nicht alle Befehle und Umgebungen, die er benötigte.
+ erschienen ihm für ein Vorlesungsskript nicht optimal und boten auch
+ nicht alle Befehle und Umgebungen, die er benötigte.
- Zur selben Zeit beschäftigte sich Frank auch mit Fragen der
- Typografie, insbesondere mit \cite{JTsch87}. Damit stand für ihn
- fest, nicht nur irgendeinen Dokumentstil für Skripten zu erstellen,
- sondern allgemein eine Stilfamilie, die den Regeln der europäischen
+ Zur selben Zeit beschäftigte sich Frank auch mit Fragen der
+ Typografie, insbesondere mit \cite{JTsch87}. Damit stand für ihn
+ fest, nicht nur irgendeinen Dokumentstil für Skripten zu erstellen,
+ sondern allgemein eine Stilfamilie, die den Regeln der europäischen
Typografie folgt. {\Script} war geboren.
- Der \KOMAScript-Autor traf auf {\Script} ungefähr zum Jahreswechsel
- 1992/""1993. Im Gegensatz zu Frank Neukam hatte er häufig mit Dokumenten im
+ Der \KOMAScript-Autor traf auf {\Script} ungefähr zum Jahreswechsel
+ 1992/""1993. Im Gegensatz zu Frank Neukam hatte er häufig mit Dokumenten im
A5-Format zu tun. Zu jenem Zeitpunkt wurde A5 weder von den Standardstilen
- noch von {\Script} unterstützt. Daher dauerte es nicht lange, bis er erste
- Veränderungen an {\Script} vornahm. Diese fanden sich auch in {\ScriptII}
- wieder, das im Dezember~1993 von Frank veröffentlicht wurde.
+ noch von {\Script} unterstützt. Daher dauerte es nicht lange, bis er erste
+ Veränderungen an {\Script} vornahm. Diese fanden sich auch in {\ScriptII}
+ wieder, das im Dezember~1993 von Frank veröffentlicht wurde.
- Mitte 1994 erschien dann \LaTeXe. Die damit einhergehenden Änderungen waren
+ Mitte 1994 erschien dann \LaTeXe. Die damit einhergehenden Änderungen waren
tiefgreifend. Daher blieb dem Anwender von {\ScriptII} nur die Entscheidung,
- sich entweder auf den Kompatibilitätsmodus von \LaTeX{} zu beschränken oder
+ sich entweder auf den Kompatibilitätsmodus von \LaTeX{} zu beschränken oder
auf {\Script} zu verzichten. Wie viele andere wollte ich beides nicht. Also
- machte der \KOMAScript-Autor sich daran, einen \Script-Nachfolger für
+ machte der \KOMAScript-Autor sich daran, einen \Script-Nachfolger für
{\LaTeXe} zu entwickeln, der am 7.~Juli~1994 unter dem Namen {\KOMAScript}
- erschienen ist. Ich will hier nicht näher auf die Wirren eingehen, die es um
+ erschienen ist. Ich will hier nicht näher auf die Wirren eingehen, die es um
die offizielle Nachfolge von {\Script} gab und warum dieser neue Name
- gewählt wurde. Tatsache ist, dass auch aus Franks Sicht {\KOMAScript} der
- Nachfolger von {\ScriptII} ist. Zu erwähnen ist noch, dass {\KOMAScript}
- ursprünglich ohne Briefklasse erschienen war. Diese wurde im Dezember~1994
- von Axel Kielhorn beigesteuert. Noch etwas später erstellte Axel Sommerfeldt
+ gewählt wurde. Tatsache ist, dass auch aus Franks Sicht {\KOMAScript} der
+ Nachfolger von {\ScriptII} ist. Zu erwähnen ist noch, dass {\KOMAScript}
+ ursprünglich ohne Briefklasse erschienen war. Diese wurde im Dezember~1994
+ von Axel Kielhorn beigesteuert. Noch etwas später erstellte Axel Sommerfeldt
den ersten richtigen scrguide zu {\KOMAScript}.
- Seither ist einige Zeit vergangen. {\LaTeX} hat sich kaum verändert, die
+ Seither ist einige Zeit vergangen. {\LaTeX} hat sich kaum verändert, die
\LaTeX-Landschaft erheblich. {\KOMAScript} wurde weiterentwickelt. Es findet
nicht mehr allein im deutschsprachigen Raum Anwender, sondern in ganz
Europa, Nordamerika, Australien und Asien. Diese Anwender suchen bei
{\KOMAScript} nicht allein nach einem typografisch ansprechenden
Ergebnis. Zu beobachten ist vielmehr, dass bei {\KOMAScript} ein neuer
Schwerpunkt entstanden ist: Flexibilisierung durch Variabilisierung. Unter
- diesem Schlagwort verstehe ich die Möglichkeit, in das Erscheinungsbild an
- vielen Stellen eingreifen zu können. Dies führte zu vielen neuen Makros, die
- mehr schlecht als recht in die ursprüngliche Dokumentation integriert wurden.
- Irgendwann wurde es damit auch Zeit für eine komplett überarbeitete
+ diesem Schlagwort verstehe ich die Möglichkeit, in das Erscheinungsbild an
+ vielen Stellen eingreifen zu können. Dies führte zu vielen neuen Makros, die
+ mehr schlecht als recht in die ursprüngliche Dokumentation integriert wurden.
+ Irgendwann wurde es damit auch Zeit für eine komplett überarbeitete
Anleitung.
%\end{Explain}
@@ -242,16 +242,16 @@ auch zu lesen.
\section{Danksagung}
\seclabel{thanks}
-Mein persönlicher Dank gilt Frank Neukam, ohne dessen \Script-Familie es
-vermutlich {\KOMAScript} nie gegeben hätte. Mein Dank gilt denjenigen, die an
+Mein persönlicher Dank gilt Frank Neukam, ohne dessen \Script-Familie es
+vermutlich {\KOMAScript} nie gegeben hätte. Mein Dank gilt denjenigen, die an
der Entstehung von {\KOMAScript} und den Anleitungen mitgewirkt
-haben. Dieses Mal danke ich Elke, Jana, Ben und Edoardo stellvertretend für
+haben. Dieses Mal danke ich Elke, Jana, Ben und Edoardo stellvertretend für
Beta-Test und Kritik. Ich hoffe, ihr macht damit noch weiter.
-Ganz besonderen Dank bin ich den Gründern und den Mitgliedern von DANTE,
+Ganz besonderen Dank bin ich den Gründern und den Mitgliedern von DANTE,
Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX~e.V\kern-.18em., schuldig, durch die
letztlich die Verbreitung von \TeX{} und \LaTeX{} und allen Paketen
-einschließlich {\KOMAScript} an einer zentralen Stelle überhaupt ermöglicht
+einschließlich {\KOMAScript} an einer zentralen Stelle überhaupt ermöglicht
wird. In gleicher Weise bedanke ich mich bei den aktiven Helfern auf der
Mailingliste \texttt{\TeX-D-L} (siehe \cite{DANTE:FAQ})m in der Usenet-Gruppe
\texttt{de.comp.text.tex} und den vielen \LaTeX-Foren im Internet, die mir so
@@ -259,9 +259,9 @@ manche Antwort auf Fragen zu {\KOMAScript} abnehmen.
Mein Dank gilt aber auch allen, die mich immer wieder aufgemuntert haben,
weiter zu machen und dieses oder jenes noch besser, weniger fehlerhaft oder
-schlicht zusätzlich zu implementieren. Ganz besonders bedanke ich mich noch
-einmal bei dem äußerst großzügigen Spender, der mich mit dem bisher und
-vermutlich für alle Zeiten größten Einzelbetrag für die bisher geleistete
+schlicht zusätzlich zu implementieren. Ganz besonders bedanke ich mich noch
+einmal bei dem äußerst großzügigen Spender, der mich mit dem bisher und
+vermutlich für alle Zeiten größten Einzelbetrag für die bisher geleistete
Arbeit an \KOMAScript{} bedacht hat.
@@ -269,32 +269,32 @@ Arbeit an \KOMAScript{} bedacht hat.
\seclabel{legal}
{\KOMAScript} steht unter der {\LaTeX} Project Public Licence. Eine nicht
-offizielle deutsche Übersetzung ist Bestandteil des \KOMAScript-Pakets. In
-allen Zweifelsfällen gilt im deutschsprachigen Raum der Text
-\File{lppl-de.txt}, während in allen anderen Ländern der Text \File{lppl.txt}
+offizielle deutsche Ãœbersetzung ist Bestandteil des \KOMAScript-Pakets. In
+allen Zweifelsfällen gilt im deutschsprachigen Raum der Text
+\File{lppl-de.txt}, während in allen anderen Ländern der Text \File{lppl.txt}
anzuwenden ist.
-\iffree{Für die Korrektheit der Anleitung, Teile der Anleitung oder einer
- anderen in diesem Paket enthaltenen Dokumentation wird keine Gewähr
- übernommen.}%
+\iffree{Für die Korrektheit der Anleitung, Teile der Anleitung oder einer
+ anderen in diesem Paket enthaltenen Dokumentation wird keine Gewähr
+ übernommen.}%
{Diese gedruckte Ausgabe der Anleitung ist davon und von den in den Dateien
\File{lppl.txt} und \File{lppl-de.txt} des \KOMAScript-Pakets
- festgeschriebenden rechtlichen Bedingungen ausdrücklich ausgenommen.}
+ festgeschriebenden rechtlichen Bedingungen ausdrücklich ausgenommen.}
}{}
\section{Installation}
\seclabel{installation}
Die drei wichtigsten \TeX-Distributionen, Mac\TeX, MiK\TeX{} und \TeX~Live,
-stellen \KOMAScript{} über ihre jeweiligen Paketverwaltungen bereit. Es wird
-empfohlen, die Installation und Aktualisierung von \KOMAScript{} darüber
+stellen \KOMAScript{} über ihre jeweiligen Paketverwaltungen bereit. Es wird
+empfohlen, die Installation und Aktualisierung von \KOMAScript{} darüber
vorzunehmen. Die manuelle Installation von {\KOMAScript} ohne Verwendung der
jeweiligen Paketverwaltung wird in der Datei \File{INSTALLD.txt}, die
Bestandteil jeder \KOMAScript-Verteilung ist, beschrieben. Beachten Sie dazu
auch die jeweilige Dokumentation zur installierten \TeX-Distribution.
Daneben gibt es auf \cite{homepage} seit einiger Zeit Installationspakete von
-Zwischenversionen von \KOMAScript{} für die wichtigsten Distributionen. Für
+Zwischenversionen von \KOMAScript{} für die wichtigsten Distributionen. Für
deren Installation ist die dortige Anleitung zu beachten.
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ deren Installation ist die dortige Anleitung zu beachten.
Sollten Sie der Meinung sein, dass Sie einen Fehler in der Anleitung, einer
der \KOMAScript-Klassen, einem der \KOMAScript-Pakete oder einem anderen
Bestandteil von \KOMAScript{} gefunden haben, so sollten Sie wie folgt
- vorgehen. Prüfen Sie zunächst, ob inzwischen eine neue Version von
+ vorgehen. Prüfen Sie zunächst, ob inzwischen eine neue Version von
\KOMAScript{} erschienen ist. Installieren Sie diese neue Version und
kontrollieren Sie, ob der Fehler oder das Problem auch dann noch vorhanden
ist.
@@ -315,110 +315,110 @@ deren Installation ist die dortige Anleitung zu beachten.
Sie bitte, wie in \cite{DANTE:FAQ} angegeben, ein minimales Beispiel. Gehen
Sie dazu wie unten beschrieben vor.
% Ein solches Beispiel sollte nur einen minimalen Text und nur die Pakete
- % und Definitionen enthalten, die für die Verdeutlichung des Fehlers
- % unbedingt notwendig sind. Auf exotische Pakete sollte möglichst ganz
+ % und Definitionen enthalten, die für die Verdeutlichung des Fehlers
+ % unbedingt notwendig sind. Auf exotische Pakete sollte möglichst ganz
% verzichtet werden.
- Oft lässt sich ein Problem durch ein minimales Beispiel so weit eingrenzen,
+ Oft lässt sich ein Problem durch ein minimales Beispiel so weit eingrenzen,
dass bereits vom Anwender selbst festgestellt werden kann, ob es sich um
- einen Anwendungsfehler handelt oder nicht. Auch ist so sehr häufig zu
+ einen Anwendungsfehler handelt oder nicht. Auch ist so sehr häufig zu
erkennen, welche Pakete oder Klassen konkret das Problem verursachen und ob
- es sich überhaupt um ein \KOMAScript-Problem handelt. Dies können Sie
- gegebenenfalls zusätzlich überprüfen, indem Sie statt einer
+ es sich überhaupt um ein \KOMAScript-Problem handelt. Dies können Sie
+ gegebenenfalls zusätzlich überprüfen, indem Sie statt einer
\KOMAScript-Klasse einen Test mit der entsprechenden Standardklasse
vornehmen. Danach ist dann auch klar, ob der Fehlerbericht an den Autor von
\KOMAScript{} oder an den Autor eines anderen Pakets zu richten ist. Sie
- sollten spätestens jetzt noch einmal gründlich die Anleitungen der
+ sollten spätestens jetzt noch einmal gründlich die Anleitungen der
entsprechenden Paket, Klassen und \KOMAScript-Bestandteile studieren sowie
- \cite{DANTE:FAQ} konsultieren. Möglicherweise existiert ja bereits eine
- Lösung für Ihr Problem, so dass sich eine Fehlermeldung erübrigt.
+ \cite{DANTE:FAQ} konsultieren. Möglicherweise existiert ja bereits eine
+ Lösung für Ihr Problem, so dass sich eine Fehlermeldung erübrigt.
Wenn Sie denken, dass Sie einen noch unbekannten Fehler gefunden haben, oder
- es aus anderem Grund für sinnvoll oder notwendig erachten, den
+ es aus anderem Grund für sinnvoll oder notwendig erachten, den
\KOMAScript-Autor zu kontaktieren, so sollten Sie dabei folgende Angaben
keinesfalls vergessen:
\begin{itemize}
\item Tritt das Problem auch auf, wenn statt einer \KOMAScript-Klasse eine
- Standardklasse verwendet wird? In dem Fall liegt der Fehler höchst
+ Standardklasse verwendet wird? In dem Fall liegt der Fehler höchst
wahrscheinlich nicht bei \KOMAScript. Es ist dann sinnvoller, die Frage in
- einem öffentlichen Forum, einer Mailingliste oder im Usenet zu stellen.
+ einem öffentlichen Forum, einer Mailingliste oder im Usenet zu stellen.
\item Welche \KOMAScript-Version verwenden Sie? Entsprechende Informationen
finden Sie in der \File{log}-Datei des \LaTeX-Laufs jedes Dokuments, das
eine \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet.
\item Welches Betriebssystem und welche \TeX-Distribution wird verwendet?
- Diese Angaben erscheinen bei einem bestriebssystemunabhängigen Paket wie
- \KOMAScript{} oder \LaTeX{} eher überflüssig. Es zeigt sich aber immer
- wieder, dass sie durchaus eine Rolle spielen können.
+ Diese Angaben erscheinen bei einem bestriebssystemunabhängigen Paket wie
+ \KOMAScript{} oder \LaTeX{} eher überflüssig. Es zeigt sich aber immer
+ wieder, dass sie durchaus eine Rolle spielen können.
\item Was genau ist das Problem oder der Fehler? Beschreiben Sie das Problem
- oder den Fehler lieber zu ausführlich als zu knapp. Oftmals ist es
- sinnvoll auch die Hintergründe zu erläutern.
- \item Wie sieht ein vollständiges Minimalbeispiel aus? Ein solches
- vollständiges Minimalbeispiel kann jeder leicht selbst erstellen, indem
- Schritt für Schritt Inhalte und Pakete aus dem Problemdokument
+ oder den Fehler lieber zu ausführlich als zu knapp. Oftmals ist es
+ sinnvoll auch die Hintergründe zu erläutern.
+ \item Wie sieht ein vollständiges Minimalbeispiel aus? Ein solches
+ vollständiges Minimalbeispiel kann jeder leicht selbst erstellen, indem
+ Schritt für Schritt Inhalte und Pakete aus dem Problemdokument
auskommentiert werden. Am Ende bleibt ein Dokument, das nur die Pakete
- lädt und nur die Teile enthält, die für das Problem notwendig
- sind. Außerdem sollten alle geladenen Abbildungen durch
- \Macro{rule}-Anweisungen entsprechender Größe ersetzt werden. Vor dem
- Verschicken entfernt man nun die auskommentierten Teile, fügt als erste
- Zeile die Anweisung \Macro{listfiles} ein und führt einen weiteren
- \LaTeX-Lauf durch. Man erhält dann am Ende der \File{log}-Datei eine
- Übersicht über die verwendeten Pakete. Das vollständige Minimalbeispiel
- und die \File{log}-Datei fügen Sie ihrer Beschreibung hinzu.
+ lädt und nur die Teile enthält, die für das Problem notwendig
+ sind. Außerdem sollten alle geladenen Abbildungen durch
+ \Macro{rule}-Anweisungen entsprechender Größe ersetzt werden. Vor dem
+ Verschicken entfernt man nun die auskommentierten Teile, fügt als erste
+ Zeile die Anweisung \Macro{listfiles} ein und führt einen weiteren
+ \LaTeX-Lauf durch. Man erhält dann am Ende der \File{log}-Datei eine
+ Übersicht über die verwendeten Pakete. Das vollständige Minimalbeispiel
+ und die \File{log}-Datei fügen Sie ihrer Beschreibung hinzu.
\end{itemize}
Schicken Sie keine Pakete, PDF- oder PS- oder DVI-Dateien mit. Falls die
- gesamte Problem- oder Fehlerbeschreibung einschließlich Minimalbeispiel und
- \File{log}-Datei größer als ein paar Dutzend KByte ist, haben Sie mit
- größter Wahrscheinlichkeit etwas falsch gemacht. Anderenfalls schicken Sie
+ gesamte Problem- oder Fehlerbeschreibung einschließlich Minimalbeispiel und
+ \File{log}-Datei größer als ein paar Dutzend KByte ist, haben Sie mit
+ größter Wahrscheinlichkeit etwas falsch gemacht. Anderenfalls schicken Sie
Ihre Mitteilung an \href{mailto:komascript@gmx.info}{komascript@gmx.info}.
- Häufig werden Sie eine Frage zu \KOMAScript{} oder im Zusammenhang mit
- \KOMAScript{} lieber öffentlich, beispielsweise in \texttt{de.comp.text.tex}
+ Häufig werden Sie eine Frage zu \KOMAScript{} oder im Zusammenhang mit
+ \KOMAScript{} lieber öffentlich, beispielsweise in \texttt{de.comp.text.tex}
oder dem Forum auf \cite{homepage}, stellen wollen. Auch in diesem Fall
sollten Sie obige Punkte beachten, in der Regel jedoch auf die
- \File{log}-Datei verzichten. Fügen Sie stattdessen nur die Liste der Pakete
+ \File{log}-Datei verzichten. Fügen Sie stattdessen nur die Liste der Pakete
und Paketversionen aus der \File{log}-Datei an. Im Falle einer Fehlermeldung
zitieren Sie diese ebenfalls aus der \File{log}-Datei.%
}{%
- Der Autor hat sich große Mühe gegeben, Fehler in diesem Buch zu
+ Der Autor hat sich große Mühe gegeben, Fehler in diesem Buch zu
vermeiden. Die Beispiele, die in diesem Buch abgedruckt sind, wurden
- größtenteils während ihrer Entstehung getestet. Leider sind trotzdem weder
- orthografische noch inhaltliche Fehler komplett auszuschließen. Sollten Sie
- Fehler in diesem Buch finden, so melden Sie diese bitte über die
- \KOMAScript-Support-Adresse, \mbox{komascript@gmx.info}, oder über
+ größtenteils während ihrer Entstehung getestet. Leider sind trotzdem weder
+ orthografische noch inhaltliche Fehler komplett auszuschließen. Sollten Sie
+ Fehler in diesem Buch finden, so melden Sie diese bitte über die
+ \KOMAScript-Support-Adresse, \mbox{komascript@gmx.info}, oder über
\cite{homepage} an den Autor.
Bei Fehlern an \KOMAScript{} selbst beachten Sie bitte die Prozedur, die in
- der Einleitung der freien \KOMAScript-Anleitung erklärt ist. Nur so ist
+ der Einleitung der freien \KOMAScript-Anleitung erklärt ist. Nur so ist
sichergestellt, dass das Problem auch reproduziert werden kann. Dies ist
- für die Beseitigung eventueller Fehler eine Grundvoraussetzung.%
+ für die Beseitigung eventueller Fehler eine Grundvoraussetzung.%
}
Bitte beachten Sie, dass typografisch nicht optimale Voreinstellungen keine
-Fehler darstellen. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität werden Voreinstellungen nach
-Möglichkeit auch in neuen \KOMAScript-Versionen beibehalten. Darüber hinaus
+Fehler darstellen. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität werden Voreinstellungen nach
+Möglichkeit auch in neuen \KOMAScript-Versionen beibehalten. Darüber hinaus
ist Typografie auch eine Frage der Sprache und Kultur. Die Voreinstellungen
-von \KOMAScript{} stellen daher zwangsläufig einen Kompromiss dar.
+von \KOMAScript{} stellen daher zwangsläufig einen Kompromiss dar.
\iffree{%
\section{Weitere Informationen}
\seclabel{moreinfos}
-Sobald Sie im Umgang mit \KOMAScript{} geübt sind, werden Sie sich
-möglicherweise Beispiele zu schwierigeren Aufgaben wünschen. Solche Beispiele
-gehen über die Vermittlung von Grundwissen hinaus und sind daher\iffree{}{
- außer im Angang} nicht Bestandteil dieser Anleitung. Auf den Internetseiten
+Sobald Sie im Umgang mit \KOMAScript{} geübt sind, werden Sie sich
+möglicherweise Beispiele zu schwierigeren Aufgaben wünschen. Solche Beispiele
+gehen über die Vermittlung von Grundwissen hinaus und sind daher\iffree{}{
+ außer im Angang} nicht Bestandteil dieser Anleitung. Auf den Internetseiten
des \KOMAScript{} Documentation Projects \cite{homepage} finden Sie jedoch
-weiterführende Beispiele. Diese sind für fortgeschrittene \LaTeX-Anwender
-konzipiert. Für Anfänger sind sie wenig oder nicht geeignet.
+weiterführende Beispiele. Diese sind für fortgeschrittene \LaTeX-Anwender
+konzipiert. Für Anfänger sind sie wenig oder nicht geeignet.
}{}
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex"
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Installationspakete Zwischenversionen Wiedereinsteigern
-% LocalWords: Kompatibilitätsmodus
+% LocalWords: Kompatibilitätsmodus
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex
index 8143c645f8..a80375159c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/preface.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% preface.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% preface.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -36,89 +36,89 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{typearea.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-03-12 09:45:33 +0100 (Mon, 12 Mar 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
Vorwort zu Version 3.25]
\addchap{Vorwort zu \KOMAScript~3.25}
Die Anleitung zu \KOMAScript~3.25 profitiert wieder einmal davon, dass nahezu
-zeitgleich mit dieser Version auch eine überarbeitete Neuauflage der
+zeitgleich mit dieser Version auch eine überarbeitete Neuauflage der
Print-Ausgabe \cite{book:komascript} und der eBook-Ausgabe
-\cite{ebook:komascript} erscheinen wird. Das führte zu vielen Verbesserungen,
+\cite{ebook:komascript} erscheinen wird. Das führte zu vielen Verbesserungen,
die sich auch auf die freie Anleitung auswirken.
Eine dieser Verbesserungen ist die Verlinkung von Befehlen, Umgebungen,
-Optionen etc. jeweils auf die entsprechende Erklärung innerhalb dieser
-Anleitung. Um innerhalb der Erklärung selbst nicht dazu verleitet zu werden,
-erneut an den Anfang der Erklärung zu springen, und so quasi Leserekursionen
-zu vermeiden, wurde die Verlinkung allerdings nur dann durchgeführt, wenn sie
-tatsächlich von der aktuellen Stelle weg führt.
+Optionen etc. jeweils auf die entsprechende Erklärung innerhalb dieser
+Anleitung. Um innerhalb der Erklärung selbst nicht dazu verleitet zu werden,
+erneut an den Anfang der Erklärung zu springen, und so quasi Leserekursionen
+zu vermeiden, wurde die Verlinkung allerdings nur dann durchgeführt, wenn sie
+tatsächlich von der aktuellen Stelle weg führt.
-Viele der Verbesserungen gehen auch auf die fleißigen, freiwilligen
-Korrekturleser zurück. Ihnen sei an dieser Stelle ausdrücklich gedankt.
+Viele der Verbesserungen gehen auch auf die fleißigen, freiwilligen
+Korrekturleser zurück. Ihnen sei an dieser Stelle ausdrücklich gedankt.
-\iffree{Leser dieser freien Bildschirm-Version müssen allerdings weiterhin mit
- gewissen Einschränkungen leben. So sind einige Informationen --
- hauptsächliche solche für fortgeschrittene Anwender oder die dazu geeignet
+\iffree{Leser dieser freien Bildschirm-Version müssen allerdings weiterhin mit
+ gewissen Einschränkungen leben. So sind einige Informationen --
+ hauptsächliche solche für fortgeschrittene Anwender oder die dazu geeignet
sind, aus einem Anwender einen fortgeschrittenen Anwender zu machen -- der
- Buchfassung vorbehalten. Das führt auch dazu, dass weiterhin einige Links in
- dieser Anleitung lediglich zu einer Seite führen, auf der genau diese
- Tatsache erwähnt ist. Darüber hinaus ist die freie Version nur eingeschränkt
+ Buchfassung vorbehalten. Das führt auch dazu, dass weiterhin einige Links in
+ dieser Anleitung lediglich zu einer Seite führen, auf der genau diese
+ Tatsache erwähnt ist. Darüber hinaus ist die freie Version nur eingeschränkt
zum Ausdruck geeignet. Der Fokus liegt vielmehr auf der Verwendung am
Bildschirm parallel zur Arbeit an einem Dokument. Sie hat auch weiterhin
keinen optimierten Umbruch, sondern ist quasi ein erster Entwurf, bei dem
- sowohl der Absatz- als auch der Seitenumbruch in einigen Fällen durchaus
- dürftig ist. Entsprechende Optimierungen sind den Buchausgaben
+ sowohl der Absatz- als auch der Seitenumbruch in einigen Fällen durchaus
+ dürftig ist. Entsprechende Optimierungen sind den Buchausgaben
vorbehalten.}{}
Nicht nur zur Anleitung erfahre ich inzwischen eher wenig Kritik. Auch zu den
-Klassen und Paketen gibt es kaum noch Nachfragen nach neuen Möglichkeiten. Für
-mich selbst bedeutet das, dass das Wissen um die Wünsche der Anwender
-stagniert. Schon seit einigen Jahren habe ich daher hauptsächlich Dinge
-implementiert, von denen ich annahm, dass sie nützlich sein könnten. Die
-Rückmeldungen, die ich zu diesen neuen Möglichkeiten erhalten habe,
-beschränken sich aber überwiegend auf Kritik daran, dass uralte \emph{Hacks},
-die sich auf undokumentierte Eigenschaften von \KOMAScript{} stützen, in
-einigen Fällen nicht mehr funktionieren. Freude darüber, dass derart unsaubere
-Notlösungen nicht mehr notwendig sind, wurde hingegen kaum geäußert. Daher
+Klassen und Paketen gibt es kaum noch Nachfragen nach neuen Möglichkeiten. Für
+mich selbst bedeutet das, dass das Wissen um die Wünsche der Anwender
+stagniert. Schon seit einigen Jahren habe ich daher hauptsächlich Dinge
+implementiert, von denen ich annahm, dass sie nützlich sein könnten. Die
+Rückmeldungen, die ich zu diesen neuen Möglichkeiten erhalten habe,
+beschränken sich aber überwiegend auf Kritik daran, dass uralte \emph{Hacks},
+die sich auf undokumentierte Eigenschaften von \KOMAScript{} stützen, in
+einigen Fällen nicht mehr funktionieren. Freude darüber, dass derart unsaubere
+Notlösungen nicht mehr notwendig sind, wurde hingegen kaum geäußert. Daher
habe ich beschlossen, Erweiterungen und Verbesserungen an \KOMAScript{} mehr
-und mehr auf solche Dinge zu beschränken, die von Anwendern explizit
+und mehr auf solche Dinge zu beschränken, die von Anwendern explizit
nachgefragt werden. Oder sollte es gar sein, dass \KOMAScript{} nach bald
-25~Jahren schlicht einen Stand erreicht hat, in dem es alle Wünsche erfüllt?
+25~Jahren schlicht einen Stand erreicht hat, in dem es alle Wünsche erfüllt?
-Die rückläufige Entwicklung bei Fehlermeldungen ist leider ebenfalls nicht nur
-erfreulich. Inzwischen ist häufig zu beobachten, dass diejenigen, die ein
+Die rückläufige Entwicklung bei Fehlermeldungen ist leider ebenfalls nicht nur
+erfreulich. Inzwischen ist häufig zu beobachten, dass diejenigen, die ein
Problem entdecken, dieses nicht mehr unmittelbar an mich melden, sondern sich
-lediglich in irgendwelchen Internet-Foren darüber auslassen. Oftmals finden
-sich in diesen Foren dann mehr oder weniger geschickte Notlösungen. Das ist
-zwar grundsätzlich erfreulich, führt aber leider in der Regel dazu, dass das
+lediglich in irgendwelchen Internet-Foren darüber auslassen. Oftmals finden
+sich in diesen Foren dann mehr oder weniger geschickte Notlösungen. Das ist
+zwar grundsätzlich erfreulich, führt aber leider in der Regel dazu, dass das
Problem nie gemeldet und daher auch nie wirklich beseitigt wird. Dass solche
-Notlösungen irgendwann selbst zu einem Problem werden können, versteht sich
-von selbst und wurde bereits im vorherigen Absatz erwähnt.
+Notlösungen irgendwann selbst zu einem Problem werden können, versteht sich
+von selbst und wurde bereits im vorherigen Absatz erwähnt.
Vereinzelt finden sich dankenswerter Weise Dritte, die mich auf solche Themen
-hinweisen. Dies betrifft aber nur einzelne Beiträge in sehr wenigen Foren. Ein
+hinweisen. Dies betrifft aber nur einzelne Beiträge in sehr wenigen Foren. Ein
direkter Kontakt zu demjenigen, bei dem das Problem aufgetreten ist, ist dann
-meist nicht möglich, obwohl er teilweise wünschenswert wäre.
+meist nicht möglich, obwohl er teilweise wünschenswert wäre.
-Daher sei noch einmal ausdrücklich darum gebeten, mir vermeintliche Bugs
+Daher sei noch einmal ausdrücklich darum gebeten, mir vermeintliche Bugs
wahlweise in Deutsch oder Englisch unmittelbar zu melden. Dabei ist
sprachliche Perfektion weniger wichtig. Die Meldung sollte halbwegs
-verständlich und das Problem nachvollziehbar sein. Ein möglichst kurzes
-Code-Beispiel ist in der Regel unabhängig von der darin verwendeten Sprache zu
-verstehen. Im direkten Kontakt sind mir bei Bedarf auch Rückfragen
-möglich. Bitte verlassen Sie sich nicht darauf, dass irgendwer das Problem
+verständlich und das Problem nachvollziehbar sein. Ein möglichst kurzes
+Code-Beispiel ist in der Regel unabhängig von der darin verwendeten Sprache zu
+verstehen. Im direkten Kontakt sind mir bei Bedarf auch Rückfragen
+möglich. Bitte verlassen Sie sich nicht darauf, dass irgendwer das Problem
schon irgendwann melden wird. Gehen Sie davon aus, dass es nur behoben wird,
-wenn Sie es selbst melden. Näheres zu Fehlermeldungen ist im ersten Kapitel
+wenn Sie es selbst melden. Näheres zu Fehlermeldungen ist im ersten Kapitel
\iffree{der Anleitung}{des Buches} zu finden.
\bigskip\noindent
-Markus Kohm, Neckarhausen bei Regen im März 2018
+Markus Kohm, Neckarhausen bei Regen im März 2018
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex
index 9b74b665e6..82281a5697 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scraddr.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scraddr.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,16 +40,16 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scraddr in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
-% Verwaltet von Jens-Uwe Morawski (mit Unterstützung von Markus Kohm)
+% Kapitel über scraddr in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Verwaltet von Jens-Uwe Morawski (mit Unterstützung von Markus Kohm)
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scraddr.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-05 10:50:56 +0100 (Mon, 05 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scraddr)]
-\chapter{Adressdateien mit \Package{scraddr} erschließen}%
+\chapter{Adressdateien mit \Package{scraddr} erschließen}%
\labelbase{scraddr}%
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scraddr}
@@ -61,9 +61,9 @@ vereinfachen und ihre Anwendung flexibler zu gestalten.
\section{Befehle}
\seclabel{overview}
-Im Grunde stellt das Paket nur einen Lademechanismus für Adressdateien bereit,
+Im Grunde stellt das Paket nur einen Lademechanismus für Adressdateien bereit,
die aus \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}- und neueren
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträgen bestehen, wie sie in
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträgen bestehen, wie sie in
\autoref{cha:scrlttr2} ab \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} beschrieben
sind.
@@ -77,9 +77,9 @@ Er erwartet als obligatorisches Argument den
Namen der einzulesenden Adressdatei.\Index{Adressdatei}
Wird diese Datei nicht gefunden, wird ein Fehler ausgegeben.
-Für jeden Eintrag dieser Adressdatei wird eine Reihe von Makros generiert,
-die es ermöglichen, auf die Daten der Adressdatei zuzugreifen. Es soll an
-dieser Stelle nicht verschwiegen werden, dass dies bei großen Adressdateien
+Für jeden Eintrag dieser Adressdatei wird eine Reihe von Makros generiert,
+die es ermöglichen, auf die Daten der Adressdatei zuzugreifen. Es soll an
+dieser Stelle nicht verschwiegen werden, dass dies bei großen Adressdateien
sehr viel \TeX-Speicher kostet.
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -87,47 +87,47 @@ sehr viel \TeX-Speicher kostet.
\begin{Declaration}%
\Macro{adrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}
\Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}
- \Parameter{Kommentar}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Parameter{Kommentar}\Parameter{Kürzel}
\Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}
\Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}
\Parameter{F3}\Parameter{F4}
- \Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Parameter{Kürzel}
\Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben}
\Macro{addrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben}
\end{Declaration}%
-Der Aufbau der Adresseinträge in der Adressdatei wurde in
+Der Aufbau der Adresseinträge in der Adressdatei wurde in
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.addressFile} ab
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} ausführlich besprochen. Die
-ebenfalls dort erwähnte Unterteilung der Adressdatei mit Hilfe von
-\Macro{adrchar} oder \Macro{addrchar} hat für \Package{scraddr} keine
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} ausführlich besprochen. Die
+ebenfalls dort erwähnte Unterteilung der Adressdatei mit Hilfe von
+\Macro{adrchar} oder \Macro{addrchar} hat für \Package{scraddr} keine
Bedeutung und wird vom Paket ignoriert.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{Address}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{Telephone}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{FreeI}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{FreeII}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{Comment}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{FreeIII}\Parameter{Kürzel}
- \Macro{FreeIV}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{Address}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{Telephone}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{FreeI}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{FreeII}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{Comment}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{FreeIII}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Macro{FreeIV}\Parameter{Kürzel}
\end{Declaration}%
Die englischen Namen der Zugriffsbefehle folgen den Bezeichnungen der
Argumente von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}. Die Auswahl des Adresseintrags erfolgt
-anhand des Kürzels im letzten Argument eines Eintrags, das heißt Argument
-Nummer 8 für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträge beziehungsweise
-Argument Nummer 9 für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträge. Das
+anhand des Kürzels im letzten Argument eines Eintrags, das heißt Argument
+Nummer 8 für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträge beziehungsweise
+Argument Nummer 9 für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträge. Das
bedeutet auch, dass dieses Argument nicht leer sein darf. Um eine sichere
-Funktionsweise zu garantieren, empfiehlt es sich, das Kürzel nur als Folge von
-Buchstaben aufzubauen, wobei jedoch keine Umlaute benutzt werden dürfen.
+Funktionsweise zu garantieren, empfiehlt es sich, das Kürzel nur als Folge von
+Buchstaben aufzubauen, wobei jedoch keine Umlaute benutzt werden dürfen.
Weiterhin ist zu beachten, dass bei mehrmaligem Auf"|treten
-eines Kürzels in den Einträgen die Angaben beim
-letzten Auf"|treten die gültigen sind.%
+eines Kürzels in den Einträgen die Angaben beim
+letzten Auf"|treten die gültigen sind.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -137,28 +137,28 @@ letzten Auf"|treten die gültigen sind.%
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{addrentry}%
\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{adrentry}%
-Um das Paket benutzen zu können, ist eine gültige
+Um das Paket benutzen zu können, ist eine gültige
Adressdatei zu erstellen.
-Diese, hier \File{lotr.adr} genannt, könnte beispielsweise
-folgendermaßen aussehen:
+Diese, hier \File{lotr.adr} genannt, könnte beispielsweise
+folgendermaßen aussehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\addrentry{Beutlin}{Frodo}%
- {Der Bühl\\ Beutelsend/Hobbingen im Auenland}{}%
+ {Der Bühl\\ Beutelsend/Hobbingen im Auenland}{}%
{Bilbo Beutlin}{Rauchen von Pfeifenkraut}%
- {der Ringträger}{Bilbos Erbe}{FRODO}
+ {der Ringträger}{Bilbos Erbe}{FRODO}
\adrentry{Gamdschie}{Samweis}%
{Beutelhaldenweg 3\\Hobbingen im Auenland}{}%
{Rosie Kattun}{Knullen}%
- {des Ringträgers treuester Gefährte}{SAM}
+ {des Ringträgers treuester Gefährte}{SAM}
\adrentry{Bombadil}{Tom}%
{Im Alten Wald}{}%
- {Goldbeere}{trällern von Nonsensliedern}%
+ {Goldbeere}{trällern von Nonsensliedern}%
{Meister von Wald, Wasser und Berg}{TOM}
\end{lstcode}
Das vierte Argument, die Telefonnummer, wurde hier leer gelassen,
da es in Auenland keine Telefone gibt. Wie zu sehen ist, sind also auch leere
-Angaben möglich. Dagegen ist es nicht erlaubt, ein Argument einfach komplett
+Angaben möglich. Dagegen ist es nicht erlaubt, ein Argument einfach komplett
weg zu lassen.
\BeginIndexGroup
@@ -180,9 +180,9 @@ in unser Briefdokument ein:
\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{FreeIII}%
\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{FreeIV}%
\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{Comment}%
-Mit Hilfe der vorgestellten Makros können wir dann einen Brief
+Mit Hilfe der vorgestellten Makros können wir dann einen Brief
an den alten \textsc{Tom Bombadil} schreiben, in dem wir ihn
-fragen, ob er sich noch an zwei Gefährten aus alter Zeit
+fragen, ob er sich noch an zwei Gefährten aus alter Zeit
erinnern kann.
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{letter}{\Name{TOM}\\\Address{TOM}}
@@ -196,47 +196,47 @@ erinnern kann.
Begleitet wurde er von \Name{SAM}, \Comment{SAM}.
Beider Vorlieben waren sehr weltlich. Der
- \FirstName{FRODO} genoss das \FreeII{FRODO}, sein Gefährte
- schätzte eine gute Mahlzeit mit \FreeII{SAM}.
+ \FirstName{FRODO} genoss das \FreeII{FRODO}, sein Gefährte
+ schätzte eine gute Mahlzeit mit \FreeII{SAM}.
- Weißt du noch? Mithrandir hat Dir bestimmt viel von ihnen
- erzählt.
- \closing{"`O Frühling und Sommerzeit
- und danach wieder Frühling!\\
+ Weißt du noch? Mithrandir hat Dir bestimmt viel von ihnen
+ erzählt.
+ \closing{"`O Frühling und Sommerzeit
+ und danach wieder Frühling!\\
O Wind auf dem Wasserfall
und Lachen des Laubes!"'}
\end{letter}
\end{lstcode}
Die in diesem Beispiel in \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} verwendete
-Zusammensetzung aus \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel} und
-\Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel} kann auch direkt mittels
-\Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel} erhalten werden.
+Zusammensetzung aus \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel} und
+\Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel} kann auch direkt mittels
+\Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel} erhalten werden.
-Das fünf"|te und sechste Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} steht zur freien Verfügung. Mit den Makros
+Das fünf"|te und sechste Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} steht zur freien Verfügung. Mit den Makros
\Macro{FreeI} und \Macro{FreeII} kann auf diese Inhalte zugegriffen werden. Im
-vorliegenden Fall wurde das fünf"|te Argument für die Person benutzt, die der
-Person des Eintrags am nächsten steht. Das sechste Argument enthält im
+vorliegenden Fall wurde das fünf"|te Argument für die Person benutzt, die der
+Person des Eintrags am nächsten steht. Das sechste Argument enthält im
Beispiel die besondere Vorliebe der jeweiligen Person. Das siebente Argument
ist ebenfalls ein freier Eintrag. Der Zugriff erfolgt per \Macro{Comment} oder
\Macro{FreeIII}. Der Zugriff auf das vierte freie Argument mittels
-\Macro{FreeIV} ist nur für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträge gültig.
-Bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträgen ist seine Verwendung nicht
-zulässig. Näheres hierzu findet sich im nächsten Abschnitt.
+\Macro{FreeIV} ist nur für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträge gültig.
+Bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträgen ist seine Verwendung nicht
+zulässig. Näheres hierzu findet sich im nächsten Abschnitt.
%
\EndIndexGroup
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Paketoptionen für Warnungen}
+\section{Paketoptionen für Warnungen}
-Wie im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnt, ist die Benutzung des Zugriffsbefehls
-\Macro{FreeIV} bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträgen nicht
-zulässig. Wie \Package{scraddr} darauf reagiert, ist allerdings durch
+Wie im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnt, ist die Benutzung des Zugriffsbefehls
+\Macro{FreeIV} bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträgen nicht
+zulässig. Wie \Package{scraddr} darauf reagiert, ist allerdings durch
Paketoptionen konfigurierbar. Bitte beachten Sie\textnote{Achtung!}, dass
dieses Paket die erweiterte Optionenschnittstelle mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions} und \DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoption} nicht
-unterstützt. Die Optionen sind also entweder als globale Optionen bei
+unterstützt. Die Optionen sind also entweder als globale Optionen bei
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.documentclass} oder als lokale Optionen bei
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usepackage} anzugeben.
@@ -256,14 +256,14 @@ verwendet wird:
\item[\Option{adrFreeIVempty}]
Der Befehl \Macro{FreeIV} wird einfach ignoriert.
\item[\Option{adrFreeIVshow}]
- Es wird die Warnung: »(entry FreeIV undefined at \PName{Kürzel})«,
+ Es wird die Warnung: »(entry FreeIV undefined at \PName{Kürzel})«,
in den Text geschrieben.
\item[\Option{adrFreeIVwarn}]
In der Log-Datei erscheint eine Warnung.
\item[\Option{adrFreeIVstop}]
Der \LaTeX{}-Lauf wird mit einer Fehlermeldung unterbrochen.
\end{labeling}
-Wird für das Paket keine Option angegeben, so ist \Option{adrFreeIVshow}
+Wird für das Paket keine Option angegeben, so ist \Option{adrFreeIVshow}
voreingestellt.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ voreingestellt.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex
index f6fb67659e..b311b53be2 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrbase.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrbase.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Paket scrbase für Paket- und Klassenautoren
+% Paket scrbase für Paket- und Klassenautoren
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrbase.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-08-27 08:53:35 +0200 (Mon, 27 Aug 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script package scrbase]
\chapter{Grundlegende Funktionen im Paket \Package{scrbase}}
@@ -55,95 +55,95 @@
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrbase}%
Das Paket \Package{scrbase} stellt einige grundlegende Funktionen bereit, die
-sich an Autoren von Paketen und Klassen richten. Dabei kann es nicht nur für
+sich an Autoren von Paketen und Klassen richten. Dabei kann es nicht nur für
Wrapper-Klassen genutzt werden, die ihrerseits eine \KOMAScript-Klasse
laden. Auch Autoren von Klassen, die ansonsten nichts mit \KOMAScript{} zu tun
-haben, können von der Funktionalität von \Package{scrbase} profitieren.
+haben, können von der Funktionalität von \Package{scrbase} profitieren.
\section{Laden des Pakets}
\seclabel{loadit}
-Während Anwender ein Paket mit Hilfe von \Macro{usepackage} laden, verwenden
+Während Anwender ein Paket mit Hilfe von \Macro{usepackage} laden, verwenden
Paket- und Klassenautoren
\Macro{RequirePackage}\IndexCmd{RequirePackage}. Autoren von Wrapper-Paketen
nutzen auch
\Macro{RequirePackageWithOptions}\IndexCmd{RequirePackageWithOptions}. Bei
-Verwendung von \Macro{RequirePackage} können wie bei
+Verwendung von \Macro{RequirePackage} können wie bei
\Macro{usepackage}\IndexCmd{usepackage} Optionen angegeben
-werden. Demgegenüber erhält das Paket bei \Macro{RequirePackageWithOptions}
-alle Optionen, mit denen zuvor das Wrapper-Paket geladen wurde. Näheres zu
+werden. Demgegenüber erhält das Paket bei \Macro{RequirePackageWithOptions}
+alle Optionen, mit denen zuvor das Wrapper-Paket geladen wurde. Näheres zu
diesen Anweisungen ist \cite{latex:clsguide} zu entnehmen.
-Das Paket \Package{scrbase} benötigt intern die Funktionalität des Pakets
+Das Paket \Package{scrbase} benötigt intern die Funktionalität des Pakets
\Package{keyval}\IndexPackage{keyval}\important{\Package{keyval}}. Diese kann
-auch vom Paket \Package{xkeyval} zur Verfügung gestellt werden. Bei Bedarf
-lädt \Package{scrbase} selbst \Package{keyval}.
+auch vom Paket \Package{xkeyval} zur Verfügung gestellt werden. Bei Bedarf
+lädt \Package{scrbase} selbst \Package{keyval}.
-Das Paket \Package{keyval} erlaubt es, Schlüssel zu definieren und diesen
+Das Paket \Package{keyval} erlaubt es, Schlüssel zu definieren und diesen
Werten zuzuweisen. Auch die Optionen, die \Package{scrbase} bereitstellt,
-verwenden die \Package{keyval}-Syntax: \OptionVName{\PName{Schlüssel}}{Wert}%
-\important{\OptionVName{\PName{Schlüssel}}{Wert}}.
+verwenden die \Package{keyval}-Syntax: \OptionVName{\PName{Schlüssel}}{Wert}%
+\important{\OptionVName{\PName{Schlüssel}}{Wert}}.
-\section{Schlüssel als Eigenschaften von Familien und deren Mitgliedern}
+\section{Schlüssel als Eigenschaften von Familien und deren Mitgliedern}
\seclabel{keyvalue}
-Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:scrbase.loadit} erwähnt, setzt \Package{scrbase}
-bei Schlüsseln und deren Werten auf das Paket \Package{keyval}. Allerdings
-erweitert es dessen Funktionalität. Während bei \Package{keyval} ein Schlüssel
-einer Familie gehört, kennt \Package{scrbase} zu jeder Familie auch noch
-Familienmitglieder. Ein Schlüssel kann dann sowohl einer Familie als auch
-einem oder mehreren Familienmitgliedern gehören. Außerdem kann ein Wert einem
-Schlüssel eines Familienmitglieds, einem Schlüssel einer Familie oder einem
-Schlüssel aller Familienmitglieder zugewiesen werden.
+Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:scrbase.loadit} erwähnt, setzt \Package{scrbase}
+bei Schlüsseln und deren Werten auf das Paket \Package{keyval}. Allerdings
+erweitert es dessen Funktionalität. Während bei \Package{keyval} ein Schlüssel
+einer Familie gehört, kennt \Package{scrbase} zu jeder Familie auch noch
+Familienmitglieder. Ein Schlüssel kann dann sowohl einer Familie als auch
+einem oder mehreren Familienmitgliedern gehören. Außerdem kann ein Wert einem
+Schlüssel eines Familienmitglieds, einem Schlüssel einer Familie oder einem
+Schlüssel aller Familienmitglieder zugewiesen werden.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{DefineFamily}\Parameter{Familienname}
\Macro{DefineFamilyMember}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familienname}
\end{Declaration}
-\Package{scrbase} muss aus verschiedenen Gründen die Mitglieder einer Familie
-kennen. Daher ist es notwendig, eine neue Familie zunächst mit
+\Package{scrbase} muss aus verschiedenen Gründen die Mitglieder einer Familie
+kennen. Daher ist es notwendig, eine neue Familie zunächst mit
\Macro{DefineFamily} zu definieren und so eine leere Mitgliederliste zu
erzeugen. Ist die Familie bereits definiert, so geschieht schlicht nichts. Es
-wird also auch nicht eine bereits existierende Mitgliederliste überschrieben.
+wird also auch nicht eine bereits existierende Mitgliederliste überschrieben.
Ein neues Mitglied wird der Familie dann mit der Anweisung
\Macro{DefineFamilyMember} bekannt gegeben. Existiert die Familie nicht, so
-führt dies zu einer Fehlermeldung. Existiert das Mitglied bereits, so
+führt dies zu einer Fehlermeldung. Existiert das Mitglied bereits, so
geschieht nichts. Wird kein Mitglied angegeben, so bleibt das Mitglied nicht
etwa leer, sondern es wird
-»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« angenommen. Während
+»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« angenommen. Während
des Ladens einer Klasse oder eines Pakets sind \Macro{@currname} und
\Macro{@currext} zusammen der Dateiname.
-Theoretisch wäre es möglich, mit einem leeren optionalen Argument
-\PName{Mitglied} auch ein Mitglied ohne Name zu definieren. Dies würde jedoch
+Theoretisch wäre es möglich, mit einem leeren optionalen Argument
+\PName{Mitglied} auch ein Mitglied ohne Name zu definieren. Dies würde jedoch
der Familie selbst entsprechen. Es wird empfohlen, als \PName{Familienname} nur
Buchstaben und Ziffern zu verwenden und das \PName{Mitglied} immer mit einem
-anderen Zeichen, vorzugsweise einem Punkt, zu beginnen. Anderenfalls könnte
+anderen Zeichen, vorzugsweise einem Punkt, zu beginnen. Anderenfalls könnte
es passieren, dass sich Mitglieder einer Familie mit Mitgliedern anderer
-Familien überdecken.
+Familien überdecken.
-\Package{scrbase} definiert selbst bereits die Familie »\PValue{KOMA}« und
-fügt ihr das Mitglied »\PValue{.scrbase.sty}« hinzu. Grundsätzlich sind die
-Familien »\PValue{KOMA}« und »\PValue{KOMAarg}« \KOMAScript{} vorbehalten. Es
-wird empfohlen, für eigene Pakete den Namen des Gesamtpakets als Familie und
+\Package{scrbase} definiert selbst bereits die Familie »\PValue{KOMA}« und
+fügt ihr das Mitglied »\PValue{.scrbase.sty}« hinzu. Grundsätzlich sind die
+Familien »\PValue{KOMA}« und »\PValue{KOMAarg}« \KOMAScript{} vorbehalten. Es
+wird empfohlen, für eigene Pakete den Namen des Gesamtpakets als Familie und
den Namen einzelner Pakete im Gesamtpaket als Mitglied zu verwenden.
%
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie schreiben ein neues Gesamtpaket »Fleischermeister«. Darin
+ Angenommen, Sie schreiben ein neues Gesamtpaket »Fleischermeister«. Darin
befinden sich die Pakete \File{Salami.sty}, \File{Mettwurst.sty} und
- \File{Krakauer.sty}. Daher entscheiden Sie sich für den Familienname
- »\PValue{Fleischermeister}« und fügen in jedem der Pakete die Zeilen
+ \File{Krakauer.sty}. Daher entscheiden Sie sich für den Familienname
+ »\PValue{Fleischermeister}« und fügen in jedem der Pakete die Zeilen
% Umbruchoptimierung: listings
\begin{lstcode}[aboveskip=0pt plus \dp\strutbox]
\DefineFamily{Fleischermeister}
\DefineFamilyMember{Fleischermeister}
\end{lstcode}
ein. Dadurch wird beim Laden der drei genannten Pakete der Familie
- »\PValue{Fleischermeister}« je nach Paket eines der drei Mitglieder
- »\PValue{.Salami.sty}«, »\PValue{.Mettwurst.sty}« und
- »\PValue{.Krakauer.sty}« zugefügt. Am Ende sind dann alle drei Mitglieder
+ »\PValue{Fleischermeister}« je nach Paket eines der drei Mitglieder
+ »\PValue{.Salami.sty}«, »\PValue{.Mettwurst.sty}« und
+ »\PValue{.Krakauer.sty}« zugefügt. Am Ende sind dann alle drei Mitglieder
definiert.
\end{Example}
%
@@ -152,73 +152,73 @@ den Namen einzelner Pakete im Gesamtpaket als Mitglied zu verwenden.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{DefineFamilyKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}%
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Aktion}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Aktion}
\Macro{FamilyKeyState}
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit dieser Anweisung wird ein \PName{Schlüssel} definiert. Ist ein
-\PName{Mitglied} angegeben, so ist der \PName{Schlüssel} eine Eigenschaft
+Mit dieser Anweisung wird ein \PName{Schlüssel} definiert. Ist ein
+\PName{Mitglied} angegeben, so ist der \PName{Schlüssel} eine Eigenschaft
dieses Mitglieds der angegebenen \PName{Familie}. Ist\textnote{Hinweis}
\OParameter{Mitglied} nicht angegeben, so wird wieder das Mitglied
-»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« angenommen. Ist das
-\PName{Mitglied} hingegen leer, so wird ein Familienschlüssel anstelle eines
-Mitgliederschlüssels definiert.
+»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« angenommen. Ist das
+\PName{Mitglied} hingegen leer, so wird ein Familienschlüssel anstelle eines
+Mitgliederschlüssels definiert.
-Wird später dem \PName{Schlüssel} ein Wert zugewiesen, so wird \PName{Aktion}
-ausgeführt, wobei der Wert als Parameter übergeben wird. Innerhalb von
-\PName{Aktion} steht also »\lstinline{#1}« für den übergebenen Wert. Wurde
-kein Wert übergeben, so wird stattdessen der \PName{Säumniswert}
-eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert} angegeben wird, kann später der
-\PName{Schlüssel} nur mit Wertübergabe verwendet werden.
+Wird später dem \PName{Schlüssel} ein Wert zugewiesen, so wird \PName{Aktion}
+ausgeführt, wobei der Wert als Parameter übergeben wird. Innerhalb von
+\PName{Aktion} steht also »\lstinline{#1}« für den übergebenen Wert. Wurde
+kein Wert übergeben, so wird stattdessen der \PName{Säumniswert}
+eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert} angegeben wird, kann später der
+\PName{Schlüssel} nur mit Wertübergabe verwendet werden.
%\begin{Explain}
\phantomsection\label{explain:scrbase.macro.DefineFamilyKey}%
- Letztlich führt
-\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=»«]
- \DefineFamilyKey[»\PName{Mitglied}«]{»\PName{Familie}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«}
- [»\PName{Säumniswert}«]{»\PName{Aktion}«}
+ Letztlich führt
+\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=><]
+ \DefineFamilyKey[>\PName{Mitglied}<]{>\PName{Familie}<}{>\PName{Schlüssel}<}
+ [>\PName{Säumniswert}<]{>\PName{Aktion}<}
\end{lstcode}
zu dem Aufruf
-\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={define@key},escapeinside=»«]
- \define@key{»\PName{Familie\,Mitglied}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«}
- [»\PName{Säumniswert}«]{»\PName{erweiterte Aktion}«}
+\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={define@key},escapeinside=><]
+ \define@key{>\PName{Familie\,Mitglied}<}{>\PName{Schlüssel}<}
+ [>\PName{Säumniswert}<]{>\PName{erweiterte Aktion}<}
\end{lstcode}
wobei \Macro{define@key} im \Package{keyval}-Paket\IndexPackage{keyval}
definiert ist (siehe \cite{package:keyval}). Allerdings kommen zu dem Aufruf
- von \Macro{define@key} noch einige zusätzliche Vorkehrungen und auch die
- \PName{Aktion} wird um zusätzliche Vorkehrungen erweitert.
+ von \Macro{define@key} noch einige zusätzliche Vorkehrungen und auch die
+ \PName{Aktion} wird um zusätzliche Vorkehrungen erweitert.
%\end{Explain}
-Erfolg\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} oder Misserfolg der Ausführung der
-\PName{Aktion} werden über
+Erfolg\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} oder Misserfolg der Ausführung der
+\PName{Aktion} werden über
\Macro{FamilyKeyState} %\important{\Macro{FamilyKeyState}} % einige davon sind
% schlicht zu breit!
-an \Package{scrbase} zurückgemeldet, damit dieses je nach Bedarf und
-Verwendung des Schlüssels weitere Maßnahmen ergreifen kann. Dies kann
+an \Package{scrbase} zurückgemeldet, damit dieses je nach Bedarf und
+Verwendung des Schlüssels weitere Maßnahmen ergreifen kann. Dies kann
beispielsweise eine Fehlermeldung aber auch nur die Signalisierung einer
unbekannten Option sein.
Der Zustand \Macro{FamilyKeyState} ist in der Voreinstellung identisch mit dem
Zustand \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}. Das bedeutet, dass es nicht sicher ist,
-ob der Schlüssel korrekt verarbeitet werden konnte. Findet \Package{scrbase}
-nach Ausführung der \PName{Aktion} noch immer diesen Zustand vor, so wird ein
+ob der Schlüssel korrekt verarbeitet werden konnte. Findet \Package{scrbase}
+nach Ausführung der \PName{Aktion} noch immer diesen Zustand vor, so wird ein
Hinweis in die \File{log}-Datei geschrieben und im weiteren der Zustand
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} angenommen.
Der Zustand
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} %\important{\Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}
-signalisiert, dass der Schlüssel und die Wertzuweisung an den Schlüssel
-vollständig abgeschlossen wurde und alles in Ordnung ist. Auf den Zustand kann
+signalisiert, dass der Schlüssel und die Wertzuweisung an den Schlüssel
+vollständig abgeschlossen wurde und alles in Ordnung ist. Auf den Zustand kann
einfach durch Aufruf von \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} selbst umgeschaltet
werden.
Der Zustand
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} %\important{\Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}}
-signalisiert, dass der Schlüssel zwar verarbeitet wurde, ihm jedoch ein Wert
+signalisiert, dass der Schlüssel zwar verarbeitet wurde, ihm jedoch ein Wert
zugewiesen werden sollte, der nicht erlaubt ist. Diesen Zustand meldet
beispielsweise \hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}, wenn versucht
wird, an Option \DescRef{typearea.option.twoside} den Wert \PValue{unbekannt}
@@ -227,22 +227,22 @@ zuzuweisen. Die Umschaltung auf den Zustand erfolgt einfach durch Aufruf von
Der Zustand
\Macro{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue} %\important{\Macro{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue}}
-signalisiert, dass der Schlüssel nicht verarbeitet werden konnte, weil er
+signalisiert, dass der Schlüssel nicht verarbeitet werden konnte, weil er
zwingend einen Wert erwartet, er aber ohne Wertzuweisung aufgerufen
-wurde. Dieser Zustand wird automatisch gesetzt, wenn ein Schlüssel, der keinen
-\PName{Säumniswert} besitzt, ohne Wertzuweisung verwendet wird. Theoretisch
-wäre aber auch eine explizite Umschaltung darauf durch Aufruf von
-\Macro{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue} selbst möglich.
+wurde. Dieser Zustand wird automatisch gesetzt, wenn ein Schlüssel, der keinen
+\PName{Säumniswert} besitzt, ohne Wertzuweisung verwendet wird. Theoretisch
+wäre aber auch eine explizite Umschaltung darauf durch Aufruf von
+\Macro{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue} selbst möglich.
-Des Weiteren können zusätzliche Fehlerzustände definiert werden, indem man
+Des Weiteren können zusätzliche Fehlerzustände definiert werden, indem man
\Macro{FamilyKeyState} auf eine kurze Meldung umdefiniert. In der Regel
-sollten jedoch die vier vordefinierten Zustände verwendet werden.
+sollten jedoch die vier vordefinierten Zustände verwendet werden.
\begin{Example}
Nehmen wir an, jedes der drei Pakete aus dem letzten Beispiel soll einen
- Schlüssel \PValue{Aufschnitt} erhalten. Wird dieser aufgerufen, so soll in
+ Schlüssel \PValue{Aufschnitt} erhalten. Wird dieser aufgerufen, so soll in
jedem der Pakete entsprechend dem Aufrufwert ein Schalter gesetzt
- werden. Für das Paket \Package{Salami} könnte das beispielsweise so
+ werden. Für das Paket \Package{Salami} könnte das beispielsweise so
aussehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\newif\if@Salami@Aufschnitt
@@ -256,14 +256,14 @@ sollten jedoch die vier vordefinierten Zustände verwendet werden.
\end{lstcode}
Als Wert ist daher beim Aufruf \PValue{true} oder \PValue{false}
erlaubt. Ein Test auf unerlaubte Werte existiert in diesem Beispiel
- nicht. Stattdessen wird immer zurückgemeldet, dass der Schlüssel vollständig
- und korrekt verarbeitet wurde. Wird der Schlüssel später verwendet, so muss
+ nicht. Stattdessen wird immer zurückgemeldet, dass der Schlüssel vollständig
+ und korrekt verarbeitet wurde. Wird der Schlüssel später verwendet, so muss
entweder einer der erlaubten Werte zugewiesen oder ein Aufruf ohne
- Wertzuweisung verwendet werden. In letzterem Fall kommt der Säumniswert
+ Wertzuweisung verwendet werden. In letzterem Fall kommt der Säumniswert
\PName{true} zum Einsatz.
- Für die anderen beiden Pakete kann das fast identisch definiert
- werden. Lediglich die Zeichenfolge »\texttt{Salami}« ist jeweils zu
+ Für die anderen beiden Pakete kann das fast identisch definiert
+ werden. Lediglich die Zeichenfolge »\texttt{Salami}« ist jeweils zu
ersetzen.
\end{Example}
%
@@ -272,20 +272,20 @@ sollten jedoch die vier vordefinierten Zustände verwendet werden.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{RelaxFamilyKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
\end{Declaration}
-Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{Schlüssel} zuvor als
+Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{Schlüssel} zuvor als
\PName{Mitglied} der \PName{Familie} definiert, so wird diese Definition
-quasi aufgehoben. Der \PName{Schlüssel} ist dann für dieses \PName{Mitglied}
-der \PName{Familie} nicht mehr definiert. Die Verwendung für einen
-\PName{Schlüssel}, der für dieses \PName{Mitglied} der \PName{Familie} gar
-nicht definiert ist, ist ebenfalls zulässig.
+quasi aufgehoben. Der \PName{Schlüssel} ist dann für dieses \PName{Mitglied}
+der \PName{Familie} nicht mehr definiert. Die Verwendung für einen
+\PName{Schlüssel}, der für dieses \PName{Mitglied} der \PName{Familie} gar
+nicht definiert ist, ist ebenfalls zulässig.
Ist kein \PName{Mitglied} angegeben, so wird genau wie bei Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} wieder das Mitglied
-»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« angenommen. Allerdings
-wird \Macro{RelaxFamilyKey} selten während des Ladens eines Pakets,
-sondern häufiger zur Laufzeit verwendet. Daher ist \PName{Mitglied} in der
+»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« angenommen. Allerdings
+wird \Macro{RelaxFamilyKey} selten während des Ladens eines Pakets,
+sondern häufiger zur Laufzeit verwendet. Daher ist \PName{Mitglied} in der
Regel auch explizit anzugeben.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -293,52 +293,52 @@ Regel auch explizit anzugeben.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
\end{Declaration}
-Grundsätzlich ist die Erweiterung der Schlüssel von Familien auf Familien und
-Familienmitglieder dazu gedacht, dass Schlüssel beziehungsweise die
-Wertzuweisung an Schlüssel als ganz normale Klassen- oder Paketoptionen
-verwendet werden können. Diese Anweisung stellt daher eine Erweiterung von
+Grundsätzlich ist die Erweiterung der Schlüssel von Familien auf Familien und
+Familienmitglieder dazu gedacht, dass Schlüssel beziehungsweise die
+Wertzuweisung an Schlüssel als ganz normale Klassen- oder Paketoptionen
+verwendet werden können. Diese Anweisung stellt daher eine Erweiterung von
\Macro{ProcessOptions*}\IndexCmd{ProcessOptions*}%
\important{\Macro{ProcessOption*}} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern dar (siehe
\cite{latex:clsguide}). Dabei verarbeitet die Anweisung nicht nur Optionen,
die mit \Macro{DeclareOption}\IndexCmd{DeclareOption}%
\important{\Macro{DeclareOption}} definiert wurden. Es werden auch alle
-Schlüssel eines angegebenen Familienmitglieds abgearbeitet. Wird das optionale
+Schlüssel eines angegebenen Familienmitglieds abgearbeitet. Wird das optionale
Argument \PName{Mitglied} nicht angegeben, so wird wieder das Mitglied
-»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« verwendet.
+»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« verwendet.
-Eine Besonderheit sind Schlüssel, die nicht einem Familienmitglied, sondern
+Eine Besonderheit sind Schlüssel, die nicht einem Familienmitglied, sondern
der Familie selbst zugeordnet sind, bei der also das Mitglied leer geblieben
-ist. Diese werden ebenfalls gesetzt und zwar noch bevor der Schlüssel des
+ist. Diese werden ebenfalls gesetzt und zwar noch bevor der Schlüssel des
Mitglieds gesetzt wird.
\begin{Example}
- Wenn in den Paketen aus den zurückliegenden Beispielen nach der Definition
- der Schlüssel die Zeile
+ Wenn in den Paketen aus den zurückliegenden Beispielen nach der Definition
+ der Schlüssel die Zeile
\begin{lstcode}
\FamilyProcessOptions{Fleischermeister}
\end{lstcode}
- ergänzt wird, so kann der Anwender bereits beim Laden der Pakete mit
+ ergänzt wird, so kann der Anwender bereits beim Laden der Pakete mit
\Macro{usepackage} die Eigenschaft \Option{Aufschnitt} als Option
angeben. Wird die Option global, also bei \Macro{documentclass}, angegeben,
so wird die Eigenschaft automatisch bei allen drei Paketen gesetzt, wenn
alle drei Pakete einzeln geladen werden.
\end{Example}
Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass bei Paketen globale
-Optionen vor den lokal dem Paket zugewiesenen Optionen ausgeführt
-werden. Während bei der Abarbeitung der globalen Optionen unbekannte Werte für
-Optionen dazu führen, dass darüber lediglich in der \File{log}-Datei
-informiert und die Option ansonsten ignoriert wird, führt dies bei lokalen
+Optionen vor den lokal dem Paket zugewiesenen Optionen ausgeführt
+werden. Während bei der Abarbeitung der globalen Optionen unbekannte Werte für
+Optionen dazu führen, dass darüber lediglich in der \File{log}-Datei
+informiert und die Option ansonsten ignoriert wird, führt dies bei lokalen
Optionen zu einer Fehlermeldung.
Man kann \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} wahlweise als Erweiterung von
\Macro{ProcessOption*} oder als Erweiterung des
-\PName{Schlüssel=Wert}-Mechanismus von \Package{keyval} verstehen. Letztlich
+\PName{Schlüssel=Wert}-Mechanismus von \Package{keyval} verstehen. Letztlich
werden mit Hilfe von \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} aus
-\PName{Schlüssel=Wert}-Paaren Optionen.
+\PName{Schlüssel=Wert}-Paaren Optionen.
Wie\textnote{Achtung!} auch \Macro{ProcessOptions} darf
-\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} nicht während der Ausführung von Optionen
+\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} nicht während der Ausführung von Optionen
verwendet werden. Es ist also insbesondere auch nicht erlaubt, innerhalb der
-Ausführung von Optionen Pakete zu laden.%, die selbst
+Ausführung von Optionen Pakete zu laden.%, die selbst
%\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} verwenden.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -349,28 +349,28 @@ Ausführung von Optionen Pakete zu laden.%, die selbst
\Parameter{Code}%
\end{Declaration}
Insbesondere\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrbase}} Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen
-wünschen manchmal, in ein Paket oder eine Klasse noch vor der Verarbeitung der
-Optionen eines zukünftig geladenen Pakets oder einer zukünftig geladenen
+wünschen manchmal, in ein Paket oder eine Klasse noch vor der Verarbeitung der
+Optionen eines zukünftig geladenen Pakets oder einer zukünftig geladenen
Klasse mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} eingreifen zu
-können. Dies ist mit \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions} möglich. Das Paket
-\Package{scrbase} bietet dafür einen sogenannten Haken\Index{Haken}
+können. Dies ist mit \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions} möglich. Das Paket
+\Package{scrbase} bietet dafür einen sogenannten Haken\Index{Haken}
(engl. \emph{hook}). Diesem kann man mit \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}
-neuen \PName{Code} hinzufügen. Die Parameter \PName{Mitglied} und
+neuen \PName{Code} hinzufügen. Die Parameter \PName{Mitglied} und
\PName{Familie} entsprechen dabei denen von
\Macro{FammilyProcessOptions}. Allerdings kann man auch den Haken von
-Familien-Mitgliedern \PName{Code} hinzufügen, wenn bisher die \PName{Familie}
+Familien-Mitgliedern \PName{Code} hinzufügen, wenn bisher die \PName{Familie}
oder das \PName{Mitglied} noch gar nicht definiert ist.
-Der Haken eines Familien-Mitglieds wird übrigens nach dessen Ausführung
-automatisch gelöscht. Verwendet man hingegen ein leeres \PName{Mitglied}, so
-wird dieser Haken\Index{Haken} für alle Mitglieder der \PName{Familie}
-ausgeführt und bleibt auch über die Ausführung hinaus erhalten.
+Der Haken eines Familien-Mitglieds wird übrigens nach dessen Ausführung
+automatisch gelöscht. Verwendet man hingegen ein leeres \PName{Mitglied}, so
+wird dieser Haken\Index{Haken} für alle Mitglieder der \PName{Familie}
+ausgeführt und bleibt auch über die Ausführung hinaus erhalten.
\begin{Example}
Sie schreiben ein Paket \Package{Rauchwurst}, das selbst \Package{Mettwurst}
- lädt. Allerdings wollen Sie nicht, dass für dieses Paket die Option
+ lädt. Allerdings wollen Sie nicht, dass für dieses Paket die Option
\Option{Aufschnitt} gesetzt werden kann. Daher deaktivieren sie die Option
- vor dem Laden des Pakets über \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}.
+ vor dem Laden des Pakets über \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}.
\begin{lstcode}
\RequirePackage{scrbase}
\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions[.Mettwurst.sty]%
@@ -386,8 +386,8 @@ ausgeführt und bleibt auch über die Ausführung hinaus erhalten.
globale Option angegeben, so ignoriert Paket \Package{Mettwurst}
diese. Voreinstellungen innerhalb des Pakets \Package{Mettwurst}, die
beispielsweise mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions} noch vor
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} erfolgen könnten, wären
- allerdings davon unabhängig. Aber natürlich kann man eigene
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} erfolgen könnten, wären
+ allerdings davon unabhängig. Aber natürlich kann man eigene
Voreinstellungen von \Package{Rauchwurst} aus ebenfalls per
\Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions} in \Package{Mettwurst} einschleusen.%
\end{Example}
@@ -401,37 +401,38 @@ ausgeführt und bleibt auch über die Ausführung hinaus erhalten.
Diese Anweisung stellt eine Erweiterung von
\Macro{ExecuteOptions} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern dar (siehe
\cite{latex:clsguide}). Dabei verarbeitet die Anweisung nicht nur Optionen,
-die mit \Macro{DeclareOption} definiert wurden. Es werden auch alle Schlüssel
+die mit \Macro{DeclareOption} definiert wurden. Es werden auch alle Schlüssel
eines angegebenen Familienmitglieds abgearbeitet. Wird das optionale Argument
\PName{Mitglied} nicht angegeben, so wird wieder das Mitglied
-»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« verwendet.
+»\texttt{.}\Macro{@currname}\texttt{.}\Macro{@currext}« verwendet.
-Eine Besonderheit sind Schlüssel, die nicht einem Familienmitglied, sondern
+Eine Besonderheit sind Schlüssel, die nicht einem Familienmitglied, sondern
der Familie selbst zugeordnet sind, bei der also das Mitglied leer geblieben
-ist. Diese werden ebenfalls gesetzt, und zwar noch bevor der Schlüssel des
+ist. Diese werden ebenfalls gesetzt, und zwar noch bevor der Schlüssel des
Mitglieds gesetzt wird.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, die Option \Option{Aufschnitt} soll in den zurückliegenden
- Beispielen bereits als Voreinstellung gesetzt werden, so müssen die Pakete
+ Angenommen, die Option \Option{Aufschnitt} soll in den zurückliegenden
+ Beispielen bereits als Voreinstellung gesetzt werden, so müssen die Pakete
nur um den Aufruf
\begin{lstcode}
\FamilyExecuteOptions{Fleischermeister}
{Aufschnitt}
\end{lstcode}
- ergänzt werden.
+ ergänzt werden.
\end{Example}
Wird\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions} mit
einer nicht definierten Option in der \PName{Optionenliste} aufgerufen, so
wird normalerweise ein Fehler ausgegeben. Eine Ausnahme von dieser Regel ist,
-wenn für das \PName{Mitglied} eine Option namens
+wenn für das \PName{Mitglied} eine Option namens
\Option{@else@}\important{\Option{@else@}} definiert wurde. In diesem Fall
wird statt der unbekannten Option eben diese Option \Option{@else@}
-verwendet. Innerhalb von \KOMAScript{} wird das beispielsweise genutzt, um
-die Stil-Option bei der Definition von Gliederungsbefehlen vor allen anderen
-auszuwerten.
+verwendet. Der an \Option{@else@} übergebene Wert ist dabei die nicht
+definierte Option mit dem im Aufruf angegebenen Wert. Innerhalb von
+\KOMAScript{} wird das beispielsweise genutzt, um die Stil-Option bei der
+Definition von Gliederungsbefehlen vor allen anderen auszuwerten.
-Diese Anweisung darf auch innerhalb der Ausführung von Optionen verwendet
+Diese Anweisung darf auch innerhalb der Ausführung von Optionen verwendet
werden.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -441,30 +442,30 @@ werden.%
\Macro{FamilyOptions}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Optionenliste}%
\end{Declaration}
Im Gegensatz zu normalen Optionen, die mit \Macro{DeclareOption} definiert
-wurden, können die \PName{Schlüssel} auch noch nach dem Laden der Klasse oder
+wurden, können die \PName{Schlüssel} auch noch nach dem Laden der Klasse oder
des Pakets gesetzt werden. Dazu verwendet der Anwender
\Macro{FamilyOptions}. Die \PName{Optionenliste} hat dabei die Form:
%\begin{flushleft}\begin{tabular}{l}
- \PName{Schlüssel}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}\texttt{,}\linebreak[1]%
- \PName{Schlüssel}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert} \dots{}
+ \PName{Schlüssel}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}\texttt{,}\linebreak[1]%
+ \PName{Schlüssel}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert} \dots{}
%\end{tabular}\vskip\dp\strutbox\end{flushleft}
-wobei für \PName{Schlüssel}, für die ein Säumniswert definiert ist, die
-Wertzuweisung natürlich auch entfallen kann.
-
-Durch die Anweisung werden die \PName{Schlüssel} aller Mitglieder der
-angegebenen \PName{Familie} gesetzt. Existiert ein \PName{Schlüssel} auch als
-Eigenschaft der Familie selbst, so wird dieser Familien-Schlüssel zuerst
-gesetzt. Danach folgen die Mitglieder-Schlüssel in der Reihenfolge, in der die
-Mitglieder definiert wurden. Existiert ein angegebener \PName{Schlüssel} weder
-für die Familie noch für ein Mitglied der Familie, so wird von
+wobei für \PName{Schlüssel}, für die ein Säumniswert definiert ist, die
+Wertzuweisung natürlich auch entfallen kann.
+
+Durch die Anweisung werden die \PName{Schlüssel} aller Mitglieder der
+angegebenen \PName{Familie} gesetzt. Existiert ein \PName{Schlüssel} auch als
+Eigenschaft der Familie selbst, so wird dieser Familien-Schlüssel zuerst
+gesetzt. Danach folgen die Mitglieder-Schlüssel in der Reihenfolge, in der die
+Mitglieder definiert wurden. Existiert ein angegebener \PName{Schlüssel} weder
+für die Familie noch für ein Mitglied der Familie, so wird von
\Macro{FamilyOptions} ein Fehler ausgegeben. Dies geschieht ebenfalls, wenn
-zwar für einige Mitglieder ein Schlüssel existiert, jedoch jedes dieser
-Mitglieder über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} einen Fehler
-zurückmeldet.
+zwar für einige Mitglieder ein Schlüssel existiert, jedoch jedes dieser
+Mitglieder über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} einen Fehler
+zurückmeldet.
\begin{Example}
- Sie ergänzen das Fleischermeister-Projekt um ein weiteres Paket
+ Sie ergänzen das Fleischermeister-Projekt um ein weiteres Paket
\Package{Wurstsalat}. Wird dieses Paket verwendet, so sollen alle
- Wurstpakete zunächst einmal Aufschnitt produzieren:
+ Wurstpakete zunächst einmal Aufschnitt produzieren:
\begin{lstcode}
\ProvidesPackage{Wurstsalat}%
[2008/05/06 nonsense package]
@@ -474,17 +475,17 @@ zurückmeldet.
\FamilyProcessOptions{Fleischermeister}\relax
\FamilyOptions{Fleischermeister}{Aufschnitt}
\end{lstcode}
- Sollte noch kein Wurstpaket geladen sein, so würde nun eine Fehlermeldung
- wegen der nicht definierten Option »\Option{Aufschnitt}« ausgegeben. Das
- kann vermieden werden, indem vor der letzten Zeile für das Paket selbst
- ebenfalls ein entsprechender Schlüssel definiert wird:
+ Sollte noch kein Wurstpaket geladen sein, so würde nun eine Fehlermeldung
+ wegen der nicht definierten Option »\Option{Aufschnitt}« ausgegeben. Das
+ kann vermieden werden, indem vor der letzten Zeile für das Paket selbst
+ ebenfalls ein entsprechender Schlüssel definiert wird:
\begin{lstcode}
\DefineFamilyKey{Fleischermeister}%
{Aufschnitt}[true]{}%
\end{lstcode}
Allerdings produzieren so Wurstpakete, die nach Paket
\Package{Wurstsalat} geladen werden, keinen Aufschnitt. Dies kann man
- ebenfalls ändern:
+ ebenfalls ändern:
\begin{lstcode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\DefineFamilyKey[.Wurstsalat.sty]%
@@ -499,35 +500,43 @@ zurückmeldet.
}%
}%
\end{lstcode}
- Somit wird zunächst während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die Option so
- definiert, dass sie für das Paket \Package{Wurstsalat} keine Funktion mehr
- ausübt. Da nach dem Laden von \Package{Wurstsalat}, innerhalb von
+ Somit wird zunächst während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die Option so
+ definiert, dass sie für das Paket \Package{Wurstsalat} keine Funktion mehr
+ ausübt. Da nach dem Laden von \Package{Wurstsalat}, innerhalb von
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die beiden Anweisungen \Macro{@currname}
und \Macro{@currext} nicht mehr den Dateinamen des Pakets enthalten, muss
zwingend das optionale Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}
verwendet werden.
Bis zu dieser Umdefinierung der Option wird jedoch eine Definition
- verwendet, die während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die Option erneut
- für die Familie und all ihre Mitglieder ausführt und damit auch für andere
- Wurstpakete setzt. Die Verzögerung der Ausführung von \Macro{FamilyOptions}
- ist hier entscheidend. Zum einen werden nur so später geladene Wurstpakete
+ verwendet, die während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die Option erneut
+ für die Familie und all ihre Mitglieder ausführt und damit auch für andere
+ Wurstpakete setzt. Die Verzögerung der Ausführung von \Macro{FamilyOptions}
+ ist hier entscheidend. Zum einen werden nur so später geladene Wurstpakete
erfasst. Zum anderen wird dadurch sichergestellt, dass die eigene Option
\Option{Aufschnitt} bereits umdefiniert wurde. Dadurch wird eine endlose
Rekursion vermieden.%
\end{Example}%
-%
+
+Wie\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} schon bei
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions} gibt es auch bei
+\Macro{FamilyOptions} eine Sonderbehandlung für eine Option Namens
+\Option{@else@}\important{\Option{@else@}}. Ist eine solche für ein Mitglied
+definiert, so wird sie immer dann ausgeführt, wenn das Mitglied eine
+angegebene Option nicht kennt. Ist für die Familie selbst eine Option
+\Option{@else@} definiert, so wird sie nur aufgerufen, wenn weder die Familie
+noch eines ihrer Mitglieder eine angegebene Option vollständig verarbeiten
+konnte und mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed} quitiert hat.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Umbruchkorrektur wegen Beispiel am Ende
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyOption}\Parameter{Familie}%
\Parameter{Option}\Parameter{Werteliste}%
\end{Declaration}
-Neben Optionen, die sich gegenseitig ausschließende Werte besitzen, kann es
-auch Optionen geben, die gleichzeitig mehrere Werte annehmen können. Für diese
-wäre es bei Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions} notwendig,
+Neben Optionen, die sich gegenseitig ausschließende Werte besitzen, kann es
+auch Optionen geben, die gleichzeitig mehrere Werte annehmen können. Für diese
+wäre es bei Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions} notwendig,
der Option mehrfach einen Wert zuzuweisen und dabei die Option selbst mehrfach
anzugeben. Stattdessen kann man einfach mit \Macro{FamilyOption} einer
einzigen \PName{Option} eine ganze \PName{Werteliste} zuweisen. Die
@@ -536,12 +545,12 @@ einzigen \PName{Option} eine ganze \PName{Werteliste} zuweisen. Die
\PName{Wert}\texttt{,}\PName{Wert} \dots{}
%\end{tabular}\end{flushleft}
In diesem Zusammenhang sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die Verwendung eines
-Kommas in einem Wert möglich ist, wenn man den Wert in geschweifte Klammern
-setzt. Die weitere Funktionsweise ist der vorhergehenden Erklärung zu
+Kommas in einem Wert möglich ist, wenn man den Wert in geschweifte Klammern
+setzt. Die weitere Funktionsweise ist der vorhergehenden Erklärung zu
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions} zu entnehmen.
\begin{Example}
- Das Paket \Package{Wurstsalat} soll eine Option bekommen, über die man
- weitere Zutaten bestimmen kann. Für jede Zutat wird dabei wieder ein
+ Das Paket \Package{Wurstsalat} soll eine Option bekommen, über die man
+ weitere Zutaten bestimmen kann. Für jede Zutat wird dabei wieder ein
Schalter gesetzt.
\begin{lstcode}
\newif\if@salatmit@Zwiebeln
@@ -551,11 +560,11 @@ setzt. Die weitere Funktionsweise ist der vorhergehenden Erklärung zu
\csname @salatmit@#1true\endcsname
}
\end{lstcode}
- Es wurden hier die drei Zutaten »Zwiebeln«, »Gurken« und »Peperoni«
- definiert. Eine Fehlerbehandlung für den Fall, dass der Anwender unbekannte
+ Es wurden hier die drei Zutaten »Zwiebeln«, »Gurken« und »Peperoni«
+ definiert. Eine Fehlerbehandlung für den Fall, dass der Anwender unbekannte
Zutaten fordert, existiert nicht.
- Für einen Salat mit Zwiebeln und Gurken kann der Anwender
+ Für einen Salat mit Zwiebeln und Gurken kann der Anwender
\begin{lstcode}
\FamilyOptions{Fleischermeister}{%
SalatZusatz=Zwiebeln,SalatZusatz=Gurken}
@@ -567,7 +576,10 @@ setzt. Die weitere Funktionsweise ist der vorhergehenden Erklärung zu
\end{lstcode}
verwenden.
\end{Example}
-%
+
+Die\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} Verarbeitung einer Option
+\Option{@else@} findet in derselben Weise statt wie bei
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -576,7 +588,7 @@ setzt. Die weitere Funktionsweise ist der vorhergehenden Erklärung zu
\Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*}\Parameter{Aktion}%
\end{Declaration}
Manchmal\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} ist es vorteilhafter, wenn nicht
-jede Wertzuweisung an eine Option unmittelbar eine \PName{Aktion} auslöst,
+jede Wertzuweisung an eine Option unmittelbar eine \PName{Aktion} auslöst,
sondern dies erst geschieht, wenn alle Wertzuweisungen innerhalb eines Aufrufs
von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyProcessOptions}
@@ -585,67 +597,67 @@ oder
beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyOptions}
oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOption}\IndexCmd{FamilyOptions}
abgeschlossen sind. Genau das ist mit Hilfe von \Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}
-und dessen Sternvariante\ChangedAt{v3.23}{\Package{scrbase}} möglich. Die
-Rückmeldung von Fehlerzuständen ist über diese Anweisung jedoch ebenso wenig
-möglich wie die Verwendung dieser Anweisung außerhalb der Ausführung von
+und dessen Sternvariante\ChangedAt{v3.23}{\Package{scrbase}} möglich. Die
+Rückmeldung von Fehlerzuständen ist über diese Anweisung jedoch ebenso wenig
+möglich wie die Verwendung dieser Anweisung außerhalb der Ausführung von
Optionen.
Die beiden Variante unterscheiden sich im Falle von verschachtelt definierten
-Optionen, wenn also die Ausführung einer Option den Aufruf einer oder mehrerer
+Optionen, wenn also die Ausführung einer Option den Aufruf einer oder mehrerer
anderen Option bedingt. In diesem Fall werden alle per
-\Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} festgelegten Aktionen ausgeführt, sobald der
+\Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} festgelegten Aktionen ausgeführt, sobald der
innerste Optionenaufruf endet. Dagegen werden die per
\Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*} festgelegten Aktionen erst mit dem Ende des
-äußersten Optionenaufrufs ausgeführt. Die Reihenfolge\textnote{Achtung!} der
-Aktionen ist dabei jedoch ausdrücklich unbestimmt! Weder ist sichergestellt,
-dass zuerst angeforderte Aktionen auch zuerst ausgeführt werden, noch die
+äußersten Optionenaufrufs ausgeführt. Die Reihenfolge\textnote{Achtung!} der
+Aktionen ist dabei jedoch ausdrücklich unbestimmt! Weder ist sichergestellt,
+dass zuerst angeforderte Aktionen auch zuerst ausgeführt werden, noch die
umgekehrte Reihenfolge.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyBoolKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}
\Macro{FamilySetBool}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}
\Parameter{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
In den vorherigen Beispielen wurden schon mehrfach Schalter gesetzt. Im
Beispiel der Option \Option{Aufschnitt} war es dabei notwendig, dass der
Anwender als Wert \PValue{true} oder \PValue{false} angibt. Es existierte
keine Fehlerbehandlung, falls der Anwender einen falschen Wert verwendet. Da
-solche booleschen Schalter ein häufiger Anwendungsfall sind, kann man sie bei
+solche booleschen Schalter ein häufiger Anwendungsfall sind, kann man sie bei
\Package{scrbase} einfach mit \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} definieren. Dabei sind die
-Argumente \PName{Mitglied}, \PName{Familie} und \PName{Schlüssel} die gleichen
+Argumente \PName{Mitglied}, \PName{Familie} und \PName{Schlüssel} die gleichen
wie bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} (siehe
\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}). Das Argument \PName{Schaltername}
-ist der Name eines Schalter ohne den Präfix \Macro{if}. Existiert dieser
+ist der Name eines Schalter ohne den Präfix \Macro{if}. Existiert dieser
Schalter noch nicht, so wird er automatisch definiert und mit \PName{false}
voreingestellt. Intern verwendet \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} dann
-\Macro{FamilySetBool} als \PName{Aktion} für
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}. Der Säumniswert für eine solche
+\Macro{FamilySetBool} als \PName{Aktion} für
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}. Der Säumniswert für eine solche
Option ist immer \PValue{true}.
\Macro{FamilySetBool} wiederum versteht als \PName{Wert} neben \PValue{true}
auch die Werte \PValue{on} und \PValue{yes} zum Einschalten und neben
\PValue{false} auch die Werte \PValue{off} und \PValue{no} zum
-Ausschalten. Wird ein unbekannter Wert übergeben, so wird die Anweisung
+Ausschalten. Wird ein unbekannter Wert übergeben, so wird die Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} mit den Argumenten
-\PName{Familie}, \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} aufgerufen und so
+\PName{Familie}, \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} aufgerufen und so
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} entsprechend gesetzt. Dadurch wird
-dann gegebenenfalls eine Meldung über eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben
+dann gegebenenfalls eine Meldung über eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben
(siehe auch \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} und
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}).
\begin{Example}
- Der Schlüssel \Option{Aufschnitt} soll in den Wurstpaketen etwas robuster
- definiert werden. Außerdem sollen alle Wurstpakete denselben Schalter
+ Der Schlüssel \Option{Aufschnitt} soll in den Wurstpaketen etwas robuster
+ definiert werden. Außerdem sollen alle Wurstpakete denselben Schalter
verwenden, so dass entweder alle Wurstpakete Aufschnitt produzieren oder
keines.
\begin{lstcode}
\FamilyBoolKey{Fleischermeister}{Aufschnitt}%
{@Aufschnitt}
\end{lstcode}
- Ein Test, ob Aufschnitt produziert wird, sähe dann so aus:
+ Ein Test, ob Aufschnitt produziert wird, sähe dann so aus:
\begin{lstcode}
\if@Aufschnitt
...
@@ -653,8 +665,8 @@ dann gegebenenfalls eine Meldung über eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben
...
\fi
\end{lstcode}
- Dies wäre in allen drei Wurstpaketen identisch. Damit könnte man
- prinzipiell die Eigenschaft »Aufschnitt« auch als Eigenschaft der Familie
+ Dies wäre in allen drei Wurstpaketen identisch. Damit könnte man
+ prinzipiell die Eigenschaft »Aufschnitt« auch als Eigenschaft der Familie
definieren:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={define@key}]
\@ifundefined{if@Aufschnitt}{%
@@ -675,18 +687,18 @@ dann gegebenenfalls eine Meldung über eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben
{Aufschnitt}%
{@Aufschnitt}
\end{lstcode}
- unter Ausnutzung des Hinweises bezüglich leerer Mitglieder
+ unter Ausnutzung des Hinweises bezüglich leerer Mitglieder
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
im Gegensatz zum Weglassen des optionalen Arguments
\fi%
- auf \autopageref{explain:scrbase.macro.DefineFamilyKey}, der nicht nur für
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}, sondern entsprechend auch für
+ auf \autopageref{explain:scrbase.macro.DefineFamilyKey}, der nicht nur für
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}, sondern entsprechend auch für
\Macro{FamilyBoolKey} gilt.
Da \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} bereits von \Macro{FamilySetBool}
gesetzt wird, kann innerhalb der Definition der Option mit Hilfe von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} der Status gegebenenfalls auch
- abgefragt werden. So könnte man im ersten Fall beispielsweise nach
+ abgefragt werden. So könnte man im ersten Fall beispielsweise nach
\Macro{FamilySetBool} einen Test der Art:
\begin{lstcode}
\ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -695,34 +707,48 @@ dann gegebenenfalls eine Meldung über eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben
...
\fi
\end{lstcode}
- ergänzen, um zusätzliche Aktionen in Abhängigkeit davon, ob
+ ergänzen, um zusätzliche Aktionen in Abhängigkeit davon, ob
\Macro{FamilySetBool} erfolgreich war oder nicht,
- auszuführen. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass an dieser Stelle
+ auszuführen. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass an dieser Stelle
unbedingt ein Test mit Hilfe von \Macro{ifx} vorzunehmen ist. Expandierende
- Tests wie \Macro{ifstr} sind hier zu vermeiden. Sie können abhängig vom
+ Tests wie \Macro{ifstr} sind hier zu vermeiden. Sie können abhängig vom
aktuellen Status und dem Vergleichszustand zu unterschiedlichen
- Fehlermeldungen und auch zu falschen Ergebnissen führen.%
-\end{Example}
-%
+ Fehlermeldungen und auch zu falschen Ergebnissen führen.%
+\end{Example}%
\EndIndexGroup
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{FamilyInverseBoolKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}
+ \Macro{FamilySetInverseBool}\Parameter{Familie}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}
+ \Parameter{Wert}
+\end{Declaration}%
+Diese\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} beiden Anweisungen unterscheiden
+sich von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey} beziehungsweise
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} nur dadurch, dass die Logik invertiert
+wird. Das heißt, dass die Werte \PValue{true}, \PValue{yes} und \PValue{on}
+den durch \PName{Schaltername} angegebenen Schalter auf \Macro{iffalse} setzen
+und damit deaktivieren, während \PValue{false}, \PValue{no} und \PValue{off}
+ihn zu \Macro{iftrue} werden lassen, also aktivieren.%
+\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyNumericalKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makroname}%
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makroname}%
\Parameter{Werteliste}
- \Macro{FamilySetNumerical}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \Macro{FamilySetNumerical}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel}
\Parameter{Makroname}\Parameter{Werteliste}%
\Parameter{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-Während Schalter nur zwei Werte annehmen können, gibt es auch Schlüssel, die
+Während Schalter nur zwei Werte annehmen können, gibt es auch Schlüssel, die
mehrere Werte kennen. So kann beispielsweise eine Ausrichtung nicht nur
entweder links oder nicht links, sondern auch links, mittig oder rechts
sein. Intern unterscheidet man solche Einstellungen dann gerne mit Hilfe von
\Macro{ifcase}\IndexCmd{ifcase}. Diese \TeX-Anweisung erwartet wiederum einen
-nummerischen Wert. Daher heißt bei \Package{scrbase} die Anweisung, mit der
-man via \PName{Schlüssel} einem Makro eine Definition zuweisen kann,
+nummerischen Wert. Daher heißt bei \Package{scrbase} die Anweisung, mit der
+man via \PName{Schlüssel} einem Makro eine Definition zuweisen kann,
entsprechend \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey}.
Die \PName{Werteliste} hat dabei die Form:
@@ -730,17 +756,17 @@ Die \PName{Werteliste} hat dabei die Form:
\Parameter{Wert}\Parameter{Definition}\texttt{,}\linebreak[1]%
\Parameter{Wert}\Parameter{Definition}~\dots{}
%\end{tabular}\vskip\dp\strutbox\end{flushleft}
-Über diese \PName{Werteliste} werden so nicht nur die erlaubten Werte für den
-\PName{Schlüssel} angegeben. Für jeden erlaubten \PName{Wert} wird auch
+Über diese \PName{Werteliste} werden so nicht nur die erlaubten Werte für den
+\PName{Schlüssel} angegeben. Für jeden erlaubten \PName{Wert} wird auch
gleich angegeben, wie bei Verwendung desselben das Makro
-\Macro{\PName{Makroname}} definiert werden soll. Üblicherweise werden als
+\Macro{\PName{Makroname}} definiert werden soll. Ãœblicherweise werden als
\PName{Definition} schlicht Zahlenwerte angegeben. Es sind zwar auch andere
-Angaben möglich, derzeit gibt es aber die Einschränkung, dass
+Angaben möglich, derzeit gibt es aber die Einschränkung, dass
\PName{Definition} voll expandierbar sein muss und bei der Zuweisung auch
expandiert wird.
\begin{Example}
- Die Wurst für den Wurstsalat kann unterschiedlich geschnitten werden. So
- wäre es denkbar, dass der Aufschnitt einfach ungeschnitten bleibt oder in
+ Die Wurst für den Wurstsalat kann unterschiedlich geschnitten werden. So
+ wäre es denkbar, dass der Aufschnitt einfach ungeschnitten bleibt oder in
grobe oder feine Streifen geschnitten werden soll. Diese Information soll in
der Anweisung \Macro{Schnitt} gespeichert werden.
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -760,13 +786,13 @@ expandiert wird.
\begin{lstcode}
\FamilyOptions{Fleischermeister}{SalatSchnitt=Nein}
\end{lstcode}
- angegeben werden. In beiden Fällen würde \Macro{Schnitt} mit dem Inhalt
+ angegeben werden. In beiden Fällen würde \Macro{Schnitt} mit dem Inhalt
\PValue{Kein} definiert. Es kann durchaus sinnvoll sein, dem Anwender wie in
- diesem Beispiel mehrere Werte für denselben Zweck anzubieten.
+ diesem Beispiel mehrere Werte für denselben Zweck anzubieten.
Nun ist es sehr wahrscheinlich, dass die Schnittart nicht ausgegeben,
- sondern später ausgewertet werden soll. In diesem Fall sind die textuellen
- Definitionen aber eher unpraktisch. Definiert man den Schlüssel hingegen als
+ sondern später ausgewertet werden soll. In diesem Fall sind die textuellen
+ Definitionen aber eher unpraktisch. Definiert man den Schlüssel hingegen als
\begin{lstcode}
\FamilyNumericalKey{Fleischermeister}%
{SalatSchnitt}{Schnitt}{%
@@ -775,7 +801,7 @@ expandiert wird.
{Fein}{2}%
}
\end{lstcode}
- so kann später einfach in der Form
+ so kann später einfach in der Form
\begin{lstcode}
\ifcase\Schnitt
% ungeschnitten
@@ -790,10 +816,10 @@ expandiert wird.
Intern wird von \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey} dann
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} mit der Anweisung
-\Macro{FamilySetNumerical} verwendet. Wird an einen solchen Schlüssel ein
-unbekannter Wert übergeben, so wird von \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} Anweisung
+\Macro{FamilySetNumerical} verwendet. Wird an einen solchen Schlüssel ein
+unbekannter Wert übergeben, so wird von \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} mit den Argumenten
-\PName{Familie}, \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} aufgerufen. Dies führt zu
+\PName{Familie}, \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} aufgerufen. Dies führt zu
einer Fehlersignalisierung in \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} mit
Hilfe des Status \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} und
beispielsweise bei der Verwendung als lokale Option zu einer
@@ -806,30 +832,30 @@ Erfolg via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed} in
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyCounterKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler}
\Macro{FamilySetCounter}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler}
\Parameter{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-Während\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} bei
+Während\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} bei
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey} ein Makro aufgrund eines
symbolischen Wertes auf einen korrespondierenden nummerischen Wert
-gesetzt wurde, gibt es natürlich auch Fälle, in denen ein \PName{Schlüssel}
-direkt einen \PName{\LaTeX-Zähler} repräsentiert, dem unmittelbar ein
+gesetzt wurde, gibt es natürlich auch Fälle, in denen ein \PName{Schlüssel}
+direkt einen \PName{\LaTeX-Zähler} repräsentiert, dem unmittelbar ein
nummerischer \PName{Wert} zugewiesen werden soll. Dazu dient die Anweisung
\Macro{FamilyCounterKey}, von der intern dann \Macro{FamilySetCounter}
-aufgerufen wird. Dabei finden einige grundlegende Prüfungen des
-\PName{Wert}-Arguments statt um festzustellen, ob dieses Argument für eine
-Zuweisung an einen Zähler in Frage kommt. Die Zuweisung findet nur statt, wenn
-diese Prüfungen gelingen. Allerdings können hier nicht alle Fehler erkannt
+aufgerufen wird. Dabei finden einige grundlegende Prüfungen des
+\PName{Wert}-Arguments statt um festzustellen, ob dieses Argument für eine
+Zuweisung an einen Zähler in Frage kommt. Die Zuweisung findet nur statt, wenn
+diese Prüfungen gelingen. Allerdings können hier nicht alle Fehler erkannt
werden, so dass eine falsche Zuweisung auch zu einer Fehlermeldung von \TeX{}
-selbst führen kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen über
+selbst führen kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen über
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} signalisiert.
-Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} kein Wert übergeben, so wird
-stattdessen der \PName{Säumniswert} eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert}
-angegeben wird, kann später der \PName{Schlüssel} nur mit Wertübergabe
+Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} kein Wert übergeben, so wird
+stattdessen der \PName{Säumniswert} eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert}
+angegeben wird, kann später der \PName{Schlüssel} nur mit Wertübergabe
verwendet werden.%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
\ Anderenfalls wir mit
@@ -842,17 +868,17 @@ solcher gemeldet.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyCounterMacroKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
\Macro{FamilySetCounterMacro}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}
\Parameter{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
Diese\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} beiden Anweisungen unterscheiden
-sich von den zuvor erklärten \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey} und
+sich von den zuvor erklärten \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetCounter} nur dadurch, dass nicht ein
-\LaTeX-Zähler auf einen Wert gesetzt wird, sondern ein \PName{Makro} mit
-diesem Wert definiert wird. Auch dabei wird \PName{Wert} lokal einem Zähler
+\LaTeX-Zähler auf einen Wert gesetzt wird, sondern ein \PName{Makro} mit
+diesem Wert definiert wird. Auch dabei wird \PName{Wert} lokal einem Zähler
zugewiesen und dann dessen expandierter Wert verwendet. Es gilt daher der Wert
zum Zeitpunkt des Aufrufs der Option.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -860,46 +886,46 @@ zum Zeitpunkt des Aufrufs der Option.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyLengthKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Länge}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Länge}
\Macro{FamilySetLength}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Länge}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Länge}
\Parameter{Wert}
\Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
\Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}
\Parameter{Wert}
\Macro{FamilyUseLengthMacroKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
\Macro{FamilySetUseLengthMacro}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}
\Parameter{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-Über\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{FamilyLengthKey} kann ein
-\PName{Schlüssel} definiert werden, der eine \PName{Länge}
-repräsentiert. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob eine \LaTeX-Länge, ein
-\TeX-Abstand oder eine \TeX-Ausdehnung als \PName{Länge} verwendet
-wird. Intern wird die \PName{Länge} über \Macro{FamilySetLength} gesetzt.
-Dabei finden einige grundlegende Prüfungen des \PName{Wert}-Arguments statt um
-festzustellen, ob dieses Argument für eine Zuweisung an eine \PName{Länge} in
-Frage kommt. Die Zuweisung findet nur statt, wenn diese Prüfungen
-gelingen. Allerdings können hier nicht alle Fehler erkannt werden, so dass
-eine falsche Zuweisung auch zu einer Fehlermeldung von \TeX{} selbst führen
-kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen über
+Ãœber\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{FamilyLengthKey} kann ein
+\PName{Schlüssel} definiert werden, der eine \PName{Länge}
+repräsentiert. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob eine \LaTeX-Länge, ein
+\TeX-Abstand oder eine \TeX-Ausdehnung als \PName{Länge} verwendet
+wird. Intern wird die \PName{Länge} über \Macro{FamilySetLength} gesetzt.
+Dabei finden einige grundlegende Prüfungen des \PName{Wert}-Arguments statt um
+festzustellen, ob dieses Argument für eine Zuweisung an eine \PName{Länge} in
+Frage kommt. Die Zuweisung findet nur statt, wenn diese Prüfungen
+gelingen. Allerdings können hier nicht alle Fehler erkannt werden, so dass
+eine falsche Zuweisung auch zu einer Fehlermeldung von \TeX{} selbst führen
+kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen über
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} signalisiert.
-Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} kein Wert übergeben, so wird
-stattdessen der \PName{Säumniswert} eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert}
-angegeben wird, kann später der \PName{Schlüssel} nur mit Wertübergabe
+Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} kein Wert übergeben, so wird
+stattdessen der \PName{Säumniswert} eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert}
+angegeben wird, kann später der \PName{Schlüssel} nur mit Wertübergabe
verwendet werden.
Bei Verwendung der Anweisungen \Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey} und
\Macro{FamilyUseLengthMacroKey} beziehungsweise \Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro}
und \Macro{FamilySetUseLengthMacro} findet die Speicherung des Wertes nicht in
-einer \PName{Länge}, sondern in einem \PName{Makro} statt. Dabei wird bei
+einer \PName{Länge}, sondern in einem \PName{Makro} statt. Dabei wird bei
\Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey} und \Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro} vergleichbar zu
\Macro{setlength} der aktuelle \PName{Wert} zum Zeitpunkt des Aufrufs der
beiden Anweisungen in \PName{Makro} gespeichert. Dagegen wird bei
@@ -911,41 +937,41 @@ beiden Anweisungen in \PName{Makro} gespeichert. Dagegen wird bei
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyStringKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}
\Macro{FamilyCSKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}
- \Parameter{Schlüssel}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makronamen}
+ \Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makronamen}
\end{Declaration}
-Hier wird nun\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrbase}} ein Schlüssel definiert, der
+Hier wird nun\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrbase}} ein Schlüssel definiert, der
jeden beliebigen Wert annehmen kann. Der Wert wird in dem angegebenen
-\PName{Makro} gespeichert. Wird das optionale Argument für den
-\PName{Säumniswert} weggelassen, so entspricht \Macro{FamilyStringKey}:
-\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=»«]
- \DefineFamilyKey[»\PName{Mitglied}«]{»\PName{Familie}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«}
- {\def»\PName{Makro}«{#1}}
+\PName{Makro} gespeichert. Wird das optionale Argument für den
+\PName{Säumniswert} weggelassen, so entspricht \Macro{FamilyStringKey}:
+\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=><]
+ \DefineFamilyKey[>\PName{Mitglied}<]{>\PName{Familie}<}{>\PName{Schlüssel}<}
+ {\def>\PName{Makro}<{#1}}
\end{lstcode}
Existiert
-das optionale Argument für den \PName{Säumniswert} so entspricht die Anweisung:
-\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=»«]
- \DefineFamilyKey[»\PName{Mitglied}«]{»\PName{Familie}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«}
- [»\PName{Säumniswert}«]
- {\def»\PName{Makro}«{#1}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}
+das optionale Argument für den \PName{Säumniswert} so entspricht die Anweisung:
+\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=><]
+ \DefineFamilyKey[>\PName{Mitglied}<]{>\PName{Familie}<}{>\PName{Schlüssel}<}
+ [>\PName{Säumniswert}<]
+ {\def>\PName{Makro}<{#1}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}
\end{lstcode}
\begin{Example}
In der Voreinstellung sollen 250\,g Wurstsalat erzeugt werden. Die Menge
- soll jedoch einfach per Option geändert werden können. Dazu wird die zu
+ soll jedoch einfach per Option geändert werden können. Dazu wird die zu
erstellende Menge im Makro \Macro{Salatgewicht} gespeichert. Die Option,
- über die das Gewicht geändert werden kann, soll ebenfalls
- \PValue{Salatgewicht} heißen:
+ über die das Gewicht geändert werden kann, soll ebenfalls
+ \PValue{Salatgewicht} heißen:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\Salatgewicht}{250g}
\FamilyStringKey{Fleischermeister}%
{Salatgewicht}[250g]%
{\Salatgewicht}
\end{lstcode}
- Soll nach einer Änderung
+ Soll nach einer Änderung
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
wie
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -958,12 +984,12 @@ das optionale Argument für den \PName{Säumniswert} so entspricht die Anweisung:
\begin{lstcode}
\FamilyOptions{Fleischermeister}{Salatgewicht}
\end{lstcode}
- Das ist möglich, weil die Standardmenge bei der Definition auch als
- Säumniswert angegeben wurde.
+ Das ist möglich, weil die Standardmenge bei der Definition auch als
+ Säumniswert angegeben wurde.
\end{Example}
-In diesem Fall existieren keine unbekannten Werte, da alle Werte schlicht für
+In diesem Fall existieren keine unbekannten Werte, da alle Werte schlicht für
eine Makrodefinition verwendet werden. Es ist jedoch zu beachten, dass in der
-Wertzuweisung an den Schlüssel keine Absätze enthalten sein dürfen.
+Wertzuweisung an den Schlüssel keine Absätze enthalten sein dürfen.
Im\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Package{scrbase}} Unterschied zu \Macro{FamilyStringKey}
erwartet \Macro{FamilyCSKey} kein Makro als letztes Argument, sondern
@@ -974,10 +1000,10 @@ lediglich den Namen eines Makros, also beispielsweise nicht
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel}
+ \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel}
\Parameter{Wert}\Parameter{Werteliste}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisung signalisiert über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}
+Diese Anweisung signalisiert über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}
einen Fehler aufgrund eines unbekannten oder unerlaubten Wertes. Dabei wird
als \PName{Werteliste} eine durch Komma separierte Liste von erlaubten Werten
der Form:
@@ -988,7 +1014,7 @@ erwartet. Allerdings\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} wird die
\PName{Werteliste} derzeit nicht ausgewertet.
\begin{Example}
- Für den Aufschnitt soll nun zusätzlich wählbar sein, ob er grob oder
+ Für den Aufschnitt soll nun zusätzlich wählbar sein, ob er grob oder
fein geschnitten werden soll. Dabei ist grob die Voreinstellung, die auch
dann verwendet werden soll, wenn nicht angegeben wird, wie der Aufschnitt zu
schneiden ist.
@@ -1023,27 +1049,27 @@ erwartet. Allerdings\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} wird die
\fi
}%
\end{lstcode}
- Zunächst wird versucht, den booleschen Schalter für Aufschnitt über
+ Zunächst wird versucht, den booleschen Schalter für Aufschnitt über
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} zu setzen. Gelingt dies, wurde also
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} zu
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed} definiert, wird
- der Feinschnitt abgeschaltet. Anderenfalls wird überprüft, ob anstelle
- eines gültigen Wertes für einen booleschen Schalter %der Wert
- \PValue{fein} übergeben wurde. In diesem Fall wird sowohl der Feinschnitt,
+ der Feinschnitt abgeschaltet. Anderenfalls wird überprüft, ob anstelle
+ eines gültigen Wertes für einen booleschen Schalter %der Wert
+ \PValue{fein} übergeben wurde. In diesem Fall wird sowohl der Feinschnitt,
als auch Aufschnitt aktiviert und mit Hilfe von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed} der Erfolgs-Status
gesetzt. Ist auch das nicht der Fall, wird der von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} signalisierte Fehler-Zustand
neu auf \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} gesetzt. Die
- Liste der üblichen erlaubten Werte von
+ Liste der üblichen erlaubten Werte von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} wird dabei um \PValue{fein}
- ergänzt. Da diese Liste jedoch inzwischen nicht mehr verwendet wird, hätte
+ ergänzt. Da diese Liste jedoch inzwischen nicht mehr verwendet wird, hätte
man auf den Aufruf von \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue} im Beispiel auch
einfach verzichten und damit den Fehlerstatus von
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} übernehmen können.
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} übernehmen können.
Die bei den Tests verwendete Anweisung \Macro{ifstr}\IndexCmd{ifstr} ist auf
- \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifstr} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if} erklärt.
+ \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifstr} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if} erklärt.
\end{Example}
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1052,9 +1078,9 @@ erwartet. Allerdings\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} wird die
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{FamilyElseValues}
\end{Declaration}
-In\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} früheren\textnote{Veraltet!} Versionen
-von \Package{scrbase} konnte man über die Anweisung \Macro{FamilyElseValues}
-weitere erlaubte Werte für die Bearbeitung durch
+In\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} früheren\textnote{Veraltet!} Versionen
+von \Package{scrbase} konnte man über die Anweisung \Macro{FamilyElseValues}
+weitere erlaubte Werte für die Bearbeitung durch
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue}
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
in der Form
@@ -1066,8 +1092,8 @@ ablegen, die dann ebenfalls in einer Fehlermeldung mit ausgegeben wurden. Seit
Version~3.12 gibt \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} keine
Fehlermeldungen mehr aus, sondern setzt nur noch
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} entsprechend. Damit ist die Verwendung
-von \Macro{FamilyElseValue} ebenfalls überholt. Ihre Verwendung wird jedoch
-erkannt und führt dann zu einer Aufforderung, den Code entsprechend
+von \Macro{FamilyElseValue} ebenfalls überholt. Ihre Verwendung wird jedoch
+erkannt und führt dann zu einer Aufforderung, den Code entsprechend
anzupassen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1076,7 +1102,7 @@ anzupassen.%
\seclabel{if}
Das Paket \Package{scrbase} stellt eine ganze Reihe von
-Verzweigungsanweisungen zur Verfügung. Dabei wird nicht auf die \TeX-Syntax
+Verzweigungsanweisungen zur Verfügung. Dabei wird nicht auf die \TeX-Syntax
von Verzweigungen wie beispielsweise
\begin{lstcode}
\iftrue
@@ -1088,35 +1114,35 @@ von Verzweigungen wie beispielsweise
gebaut, sondern es wird die \LaTeX-Syntax mit Argumenten eingesetzt, wie man
sie auch von \LaTeX-Anweisungen wie \Macro{IfFileExists},
\Macro{@ifundefined}, \Macro{@ifpackageloaded} und vielen weiteren
-kennt. Einige Paketautoren ziehen es allerdings vor, die \TeX-Syntax auch für
+kennt. Einige Paketautoren ziehen es allerdings vor, die \TeX-Syntax auch für
Anwender in die \LaTeX-Ebene zu bringen. Da es sich bei den Verzweigungen von
-\Package{scrbase} um recht grundlegende Möglichkeiten handelt, ist die
+\Package{scrbase} um recht grundlegende Möglichkeiten handelt, ist die
Wahrscheinlichkeit gegeben, dass dabei gleichnamige Anwenderanweisungen
-verwendet würden. Dies könnte selbst bei eigentlich gleicher Semantik
+verwendet würden. Dies könnte selbst bei eigentlich gleicher Semantik
zu einem Problem aufgrund unterschiedlichen Syntax
-führen. \Package{scrbase} geht daher auf Nummer sicher.
+führen. \Package{scrbase} geht daher auf Nummer sicher.
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{internalonly}{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
Von \Package{scrbase} werden einige Verzweigungsanweisungen
-bereitgestellt. Dabei verwendet es primär die Bezeichnungen
+bereitgestellt. Dabei verwendet es primär die Bezeichnungen
\Macro{scr@\PName{Name}}\textnote{Paketautoren}. Es handelt sich somit
um interne Anweisungen. Diese werden auch intern von \KOMAScript{}
-verwendet. Paket- und Klassenautoren können diese Anweisungen ebenfalls
+verwendet. Paket- und Klassenautoren können diese Anweisungen ebenfalls
verwenden, sollten sie aber nicht umdefinieren. Da einige dieser Anweisungen
-auch für Benutzer nützlich sein können, werden die gleichen Anweisungen
+auch für Benutzer nützlich sein können, werden die gleichen Anweisungen
normalerweise auch als \Macro{\PName{Name}}\textnote{Anwender}
bereitgestellt. Da eventuell andere Pakete gleichnamige Anweisungen mit
-anderer Syntax bereitstellen könnten und es so zu Konflikten kommen könnte,
+anderer Syntax bereitstellen könnten und es so zu Konflikten kommen könnte,
kann der Anwender die Definition von \Macro{\PName{Name}} verhindern. Dazu
gibt er entweder die Option ohne Wertangabe an. In diesem Fall werden nur die
internen Verzweigungsanweisungen definiert. Oder er gibt genau die
Anweisungen, die nicht definiert werden sollen, als Wert an, wobei er
-»\Macro{}« durch »\texttt{/}« ersetzt.
+»\Macro{}« durch »\texttt{/}« ersetzt.
Paket- und Klassenautoren sollten diese Option normalerweise nicht verwenden.
-Anwender können sie mit oder ohne Wertangabe entweder als globale Option bei
+Anwender können sie mit oder ohne Wertangabe entweder als globale Option bei
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.documentclass} oder per
\Macro{PassOptionsToPackage}\IndexCmd{PassOptionsToPackage} angeben.
\begin{Example}
@@ -1129,14 +1155,14 @@ Anwender können sie mit oder ohne Wertangabe entweder als globale Option bei
internalonly=/ifVTeX/ifundefinedorrelax%
]{foo}
\end{lstcode}
- Der Klassenname \Class{foo} wird hier als Platzhalter für irgendeine Klasse
+ Der Klassenname \Class{foo} wird hier als Platzhalter für irgendeine Klasse
verwendet. Die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifVTeX}
und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} werden im weiteren Verlauf
- dieses Abschnittes erklärt.%
+ dieses Abschnittes erklärt.%
\end{Example}
Paket- und Klassenautoren sollten wie \KOMAScript{} selbst auch die internen
-Namen verwenden. Zur Vollständigkeit sind in den nachfolgenden Erklärungen
+Namen verwenden. Zur Vollständigkeit sind in den nachfolgenden Erklärungen
aber auch die Anwenderanweisungen angegeben.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1149,7 +1175,7 @@ aber auch die Anwenderanweisungen angegeben.%
\end{Declaration}
Diese Anweisung funktioniert prinzipiell wie \Macro{@ifundefined} aus dem
\LaTeX-Kern (siehe \cite{latex:source2e}). Es wird also der \PName{Dann-Teil}
-ausgeführt, wenn \PName{Name} der Name einer undefinierten Anweisung oder
+ausgeführt, wenn \PName{Name} der Name einer undefinierten Anweisung oder
\Macro{\PName{Name}} derzeit \Macro{relax} ist. Im Unterschied zu
\Macro{@ifundefined} wird %
\iftrue% Umbruchvarianten
@@ -1166,9 +1192,9 @@ zu \Macro{relax}, wenn \Macro{\PName{Name}} zuvor undefiniert war.%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Ist die Anweisung mit dem angegebenen Namen bereits definiert wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Da es bei
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Da es bei
\eTeX{} bereits ein Primitiv \Macro{ifdefined} gibt, musste leider diese
-etwas unhandliche Bezeichnung gewählt werden. %
+etwas unhandliche Bezeichnung gewählt werden. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
\else%
@@ -1182,13 +1208,13 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Wird\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{scrbase}} mit lua\TeX{} gearbeitet, wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}.
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}.
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Diese Unterscheidung ist nur sehr selten wirklich von Nutzen. %
\fi%
-In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung
+In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung
testen. Von\textnote{Achtung!} dieser Anweisung gibt es kein
-Benutzeräquivalent. Verwenden Sie stattdessen bei Bedarf das Paket
+Benutzeräquivalent. Verwenden Sie stattdessen bei Bedarf das Paket
\Package{ifluatex}\important{\Package{ifluatex}} (siehe
\cite{package:ifluatex}).%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1200,13 +1226,13 @@ Benutzeräquivalent. Verwenden Sie stattdessen bei Bedarf das Paket
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Bis lua\TeX~0.85 war es meist unerheblich, ob mit pdf\TeX{} oder lua\TeX{}
-gearbeitet wurde. Von daher stammt diese Anweisung, die in beiden Fällen den
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausführt. Wird weder mit pdf\TeX{} noch mit lua\TeX{}
-gearbeitet, so wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil} ausgeführt.
-Seit Version 0.85 wurde bei lua\TeX{} die Kompatibilität bei vielen der
-zusätzlichen Befehle jedoch aufgegeben. Daher ist diese Unterscheidung in der
+gearbeitet wurde. Von daher stammt diese Anweisung, die in beiden Fällen den
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausführt. Wird weder mit pdf\TeX{} noch mit lua\TeX{}
+gearbeitet, so wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil} ausgeführt.
+Seit Version 0.85 wurde bei lua\TeX{} die Kompatibilität bei vielen der
+zusätzlichen Befehle jedoch aufgegeben. Daher ist diese Unterscheidung in der
Praxis nicht mehr von Nutzen und wird von \KOMAScript{} selbst auch nicht mehr
-verwendet. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es auch kein Benutzeräquivalent.%
+verwendet. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es auch kein Benutzeräquivalent.%
\EndIndexGroup
\fi
@@ -1217,13 +1243,13 @@ verwendet. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es auch kein Benutzeräquivalent.%
\Macro{ifpdftex}
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Wird mit pdf\TeX{} gearbeitet, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
-anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Dabei ist es unerheblich, ob tatsächlich
+Wird mit pdf\TeX{} gearbeitet, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Dabei ist es unerheblich, ob tatsächlich
eine PDF-Datei ausgegeben werden soll oder nicht.
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Diese Unterscheidung ist nur sehr selten wirklich von Nutzen. %
\fi%
-In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen.%
+In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1233,12 +1259,12 @@ In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen.%
\Macro{ifVTeX}
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Wird mit V\TeX{} gearbeitet, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+Wird mit V\TeX{} gearbeitet, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}.
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Diese Unterscheidung ist nur sehr selten wirklich von Nutzen. %
\fi%
-In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen.%
+In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1248,7 +1274,7 @@ In der Regel sollte man besser auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen.%
\Macro{ifpdfoutput}
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Wird eine PDF-Datei erzeugt, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+Wird eine PDF-Datei erzeugt, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Dabei ist es unerheblich, ob die
PDF-Datei mit Hilfe von lua\TeX{}, pdf\TeX{}, V\TeX{} oder \XeTeX{} erzeugt
wird.%
@@ -1261,10 +1287,10 @@ wird.%
\Macro{ifpsoutput}
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Wird eine PostScript-Datei erzeugt, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+Wird eine PostScript-Datei erzeugt, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. V\TeX{} kann PostScript direkt erzeugen,
was hier erkannt wird. Wird hingegen kein V\TeX{} verwendet, ist aber ein
-Schalter \Macro{if@dvips} definiert, so wird die Entscheidung darüber
+Schalter \Macro{if@dvips} definiert, so wird die Entscheidung darüber
getroffen. \KOMAScript{} stellt \Macro{if@dvips} in
\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}\IndexPackage{typearea}%
\IndexCmd{if@dvips} bereit.%
@@ -1277,7 +1303,7 @@ getroffen. \KOMAScript{} stellt \Macro{if@dvips} in
\Macro{ifdvioutput}
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Wird eine DVI-Datei erzeugt, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+Wird eine DVI-Datei erzeugt, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es wird immer dann davon ausgegangen,
dass eine DVI-Datei erzeugt wird, wenn keine direkte Ausgabe einer PDF- oder
Postscript-Datei erkannt werden kann.%
@@ -1289,10 +1315,10 @@ Postscript-Datei erkannt werden kann.%
\textMacro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Teil} \textMacro{fi}
\end{Declaration}
Diese Verzweigung existiert ganz bewusst nur als interne Anweisung. Dabei
-entspricht \Macro{if@atdocument} in der Dokumentpräambel \Macro{iffalse}, nach
+entspricht \Macro{if@atdocument} in der Dokumentpräambel \Macro{iffalse}, nach
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} entspricht \Macro{if@atdocument} hingegen
-\Macro{iftrue}. Klassen und Paketautoren können dieses Anweisung manchmal
-sinnvoll nutzen, wenn sich Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel anders
+\Macro{iftrue}. Klassen und Paketautoren können dieses Anweisung manchmal
+sinnvoll nutzen, wenn sich Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel anders
verhalten sollen als innerhalb des Dokuments. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu
beachten, dass es sich bei dieser Anweisung um eine Verzweigung in \TeX-Syntax
und nicht in \LaTeX-Syntax handelt!
@@ -1305,7 +1331,7 @@ und nicht in \LaTeX-Syntax handelt!
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Die beiden Argumente \PName{Zeichenfolge} werden expandiert und dann
-verglichen. Sind sie dabei gleich, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+verglichen. Sind sie dabei gleich, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1322,7 +1348,7 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
Die\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} beiden Argumente \PName{Zeichenfolge}
werden expandiert und dann verglichen. Beginnt die erste Zeichenfolge, von
Leerzeichen abgesehen, mit der zweiten Zeichenfolge, so wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. %
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
\else%
@@ -1335,8 +1361,8 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Macro{ifisdimen}\Parameter{Code}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
-einem \Macro{dimen}, also einem \TeX-Längenregister, resultiert, wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die
+einem \Macro{dimen}, also einem \TeX-Längenregister, resultiert, wird der
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die
Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1351,10 +1377,10 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
-etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert einer Länge entspricht, wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu
+etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert einer Länge entspricht, wird der
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu
beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass derzeit unbekannte Einheiten zu einer
-Fehlermeldung führen. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
+Fehlermeldung führen. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
\else%
@@ -1367,8 +1393,8 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Macro{ifdimen}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird ausgeführt, wenn die einfache Expansion der
-\PName{Zeichenfolge} eine gültige Länge mit einer gültigen Längeneinheit
+Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird ausgeführt, wenn die einfache Expansion der
+\PName{Zeichenfolge} eine gültige Länge mit einer gültigen Längeneinheit
ist. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil} verwendet. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1384,10 +1410,10 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
-einer \Macro{dimexpr}\IndexCmd{dimexpr}, also einem \eTeX-Längenausdruck
-resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
+einer \Macro{dimexpr}\IndexCmd{dimexpr}, also einem \eTeX-Längenausdruck
+resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
\PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass fehlerhafte
-Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll
+Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll
expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1402,7 +1428,7 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
einem \Macro{skip}, also einem \TeX-Abstand, resultiert, wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die
Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1418,9 +1444,9 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert eines Abstandes entspricht, wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu
beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass derzeit unbekannte Einheiten zu einer
-Fehlermeldung führen. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
+Fehlermeldung führen. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
\iffalse% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
\else%
@@ -1436,9 +1462,9 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
einer \Macro{glueexpr}\IndexCmd{glueexpr}, also einem
\mbox{\eTeX}-Abstandsausdruck resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil}
-ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu
-beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass fehlerhafte Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen
-führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
+ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu
+beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass fehlerhafte Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen
+führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
\else%
@@ -1448,11 +1474,11 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{ifiscounter}\Parameter{Zähler}%
+ \Macro{ifiscounter}\Parameter{Zähler}%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{Zähler} ein definierter
-\LaTeX-Zähler ist, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
+Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{Zähler} ein definierter
+\LaTeX-Zähler ist, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
\PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1466,9 +1492,9 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Macro{ifiscount}\Parameter{Code}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
-einem \Macro{count}, also einem \TeX-Zähler, resultiert, wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die
-Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Für einen Test auf einen \LaTeX-Zähler
+einem \Macro{count}, also einem \TeX-Zähler, resultiert, wird der
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die
+Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Für einen Test auf einen \LaTeX-Zähler
siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifiscounter}. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1483,8 +1509,8 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
-etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert eines Zählers entspricht, also eine
-negative oder positive ganze Zahl ist, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert eines Zählers entspricht, also eine
+negative oder positive ganze Zahl ist, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll
expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
@@ -1499,8 +1525,8 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\Macro{ifnumber}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird ausgeführt, wenn die einfache Expansion der
-\PName{Zeichenfolge} nur aus Ziffern besteht. In allen anderen Fällen wird der
+Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird ausgeführt, wenn die einfache Expansion der
+\PName{Zeichenfolge} nur aus Ziffern besteht. In allen anderen Fällen wird der
\PName{Sonst-Teil} verwendet. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1516,9 +1542,9 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in
einer \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr}, also einem \eTeX-Zahlenausdruck
-resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
+resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
\PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass fehlerhafte
-Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll
+Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll
expandierbar. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvaritanten
Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.%
@@ -1528,50 +1554,115 @@ Es gibt keine interne Variante.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Definition sprachabhängiger Bezeichner}
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{IfActiveMkBoth}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
+\end{Declaration}
+Bei\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} der Umschaltung zwischen automatischen
+und manuellen Kolumnentiteln, verwendet der \LaTeX-Kern die Anweisung
+\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth}\important{\Macro{@mkboth}}\IndexCmd{@mkboth}.
+Im Falle automatischer Kolumnentitel setzt diese normalerweise sowohl den
+linken als auch rechten Markenanteil. Im Falle manueller Kolumnentiteln setzt
+sie keine Marke. Will man wissen, ob \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} Marken
+setzt oder nicht, so verwenden viele Pakete einen Vergleich entweder mit
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} oder
+\Macro{@gobbletwo}. Dies deckt aber nicht alle Fälle von möglichen
+Umdefinierungen von \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} ab. Daher testet
+\Macro{IfActiveMkBoth}, ob \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} tatsächlich zum
+Setzen einer Marke führen würde und deckt dabei sogar die Verwendung von
+\Macro{marks} für die Definition von \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} ab. Wird
+eine solches aktives \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth} entdeckt, so wird der
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt. In allen anderen Fällen wird der
+\PName{Sonst-Teil} ausgeführt.%
+\begin{Example}
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen in einem Paket im Fall der Verwendung automatischer
+ Kolumnentitel, beispielsweise durch den Seitenstil
+ \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} nur die rechte Marke setzen
+ und die linke unverändert lassen, wohingegen bei Verwendung manueller
+ Kolumentitel die Marken unverändert bleiben sollen. In einem ersten Ansatz
+ verwenden Sie dafür:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \ifx\@mkboth\markboth \markright{Kolumnentitel}\fi
+\end{lstcode}
+ Etwas später entdecken Sie, dass irgendein Paket nicht wie gewohnt
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \let\@mkboth\markboth
+\end{lstcode}
+ sondern
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \renewcommand{\@mkboth}{\markboth}
+\end{lstcode}
+ verwendet hat, um automatische Kolumnentitel zu aktivieren. Daher ruft Ihr
+ Vergleich niemals die \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markright}-Anweisung auf. Daher
+ ändern Sie den Vergleich oben zu
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \ifx\@mkboth\@gobbletwo\else \markright{Kolumnentitel}\fi
+\end{lstcode}
+ Leider wird nun \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markright} auch bei manuellen
+ Kolumentiteln aufgerufen, weil irgend jemand für diesen Fall
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \renewcommand{\@mkboth}[2]{%
+ \typeout{DEBUG: ignoring running head setting}%
+ }
+\end{lstcode}
+ definiert hat.
+
+ Beide Probleme sind jedoch mit Hilfe von \Package{scrbase} einfach zu lösen:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \IfActiveMKBoth{\markright{Kolumnentitel}}{}
+\end{lstcode}%
+\end{Example}
+Noch einfacher lässt sich das Problem aus dem Beispiel übrigens mit Hilfe von
+\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkright} aus Paket
+\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}} lösen (siehe
+\autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyle.content},
+\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.@mkright}).%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\section{Definition sprachabhängiger Bezeichner}
\seclabel{languageSupport}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Sprachdefinition}
\iftrue
-Anfänger haben häufig Probleme damit, sprachabhängige Begriffe wie
+Anfänger haben häufig Probleme damit, sprachabhängige Begriffe wie
\Macro{listfigurename}\IndexCmd{listfigurename}, in der Voreinstellung meist
-»List of Figures« beziehungsweise in Deutsch: »Abbildungsverzeichnis«, zu
-ändern. Werden diese beispielsweise einfach mit \Macro{renewcommand} in der
-Dokumentpräambel umdefiniert, so überleben sie eine spätere Umschaltung der
+»List of Figures« beziehungsweise in Deutsch: »Abbildungsverzeichnis«, zu
+ändern. Werden diese beispielsweise einfach mit \Macro{renewcommand} in der
+Dokumentpräambel umdefiniert, so überleben sie eine spätere Umschaltung der
Sprache nicht. Bei Verwendung von \Package{babel}\IndexCmd{babel} wird die
-Umdefinierung in der Dokumentpräambel bereits von
-\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} wieder überschrieben.
+Umdefinierung in der Dokumentpräambel bereits von
+\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} wieder überschrieben.
\fi
-Normalerweise muss man zur Definition oder zur Änderung sprachabhängiger
+Normalerweise muss man zur Definition oder zur Änderung sprachabhängiger
Begriffe Anweisungen wie \Macro{captionsngerman} so umdefinieren, dass
-zusätzlich zu den bisherigen Begriffen auch die neuen oder geänderten
+zusätzlich zu den bisherigen Begriffen auch die neuen oder geänderten
definiert werden. Erschwert wird dieses Vorhaben dadurch, dass beim Laden
eines Pakets wie \Package{german}\IndexPackage{german} oder
\Package{ngerman}\IndexPackage{ngerman} diese Anweisungen von den Paketen
erneut definiert werden. Bei den genannten Paketen geschieht dies leider in
-einer Form, die alle zuvor gemachten Änderungen zunichte macht. Aus diesem
-Grund ist es sinnvoll, die Änderungen mit Hilfe von \Macro{AtBeginDocument} bis
+einer Form, die alle zuvor gemachten Änderungen zunichte macht. Aus diesem
+Grund ist es sinnvoll, die Änderungen mit Hilfe von \Macro{AtBeginDocument} bis
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}, also bis nach dem Laden aller Pakete, zu
-verzögern.
+verzögern.
\iftrue
Auch der Anwender muss entweder von \Macro{AtBeginDocument}
-Gebrauch machen oder aber seine Änderungen nicht in die Dokumentpräambel,
-sondern hinter \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} einfügen.
+Gebrauch machen oder aber seine Änderungen nicht in die Dokumentpräambel,
+sondern hinter \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} einfügen.
\fi
-Darüber hinaus kommt erschwerend hinzu, dass einige Pakete zusätzliche,
-sprachabhängige Begriffe in \Macro{captions\PName{Sprache}} definieren,
-während andere dafür \Macro{extras\PName{Sprache}} verwenden. So muss der
+Darüber hinaus kommt erschwerend hinzu, dass einige Pakete zusätzliche,
+sprachabhängige Begriffe in \Macro{captions\PName{Sprache}} definieren,
+während andere dafür \Macro{extras\PName{Sprache}} verwenden. So muss der
Anwender sich schon sehr genau auskennen, um die richtige Anweisung auf die
-richtige Weise zu ergänzen.
+richtige Weise zu ergänzen.
-Das Paket \Package{scrbase} bietet dem Anwender daher für die Definition und
-Änderung selbst einige zusätzliche Anweisungen, die ihn von vielen dieser
-Überlegungen entlasten. Gleichzeitig erlauben diese Befehle, die
-sprachabhängigen Begriffe mehrerer Dialekte oder Ausprägungen einer Sprache
-gleichzeitig zu definieren oder zu ändern.
+Das Paket \Package{scrbase} bietet dem Anwender daher für die Definition und
+Änderung selbst einige zusätzliche Anweisungen, die ihn von vielen dieser
+Ãœberlegungen entlasten. Gleichzeitig erlauben diese Befehle, die
+sprachabhängigen Begriffe mehrerer Dialekte oder Ausprägungen einer Sprache
+gleichzeitig zu definieren oder zu ändern.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{defcaptionname}
@@ -1591,9 +1682,9 @@ gleichzeitig zu definieren oder zu ändern.
\Macro{renewcaptionname*}%
\Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit Hilfe dieser vier Anweisungen und ihrer Sternvarianten ist es möglich,
-einem \PName{Begriff} in Abhängigkeit der Sprache einen \PName{Inhalt}
-zuzuweisen. Mehrere Sprachen können durch Komma voneinander getrennt als
+Mit Hilfe dieser vier Anweisungen und ihrer Sternvarianten ist es möglich,
+einem \PName{Begriff} in Abhängigkeit der Sprache einen \PName{Inhalt}
+zuzuweisen. Mehrere Sprachen können durch Komma voneinander getrennt als
\PName{Sprachliste}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} angegeben werden.
Der \PName{Begriff} ist immer ein Makro. Die Arbeitsweise der Anweisungen
@@ -1601,9 +1692,9 @@ unterscheidet sich je nachdem, ob eine Sprache und ein \PName{Begriff}
innerhalb der Sprache zum Zeitpunkt des Aufrufs bereits definiert ist.
Ist eine Sprache nicht definiert, so tut \Macro{providecaptionname} nichts
-weiter, als dies in der \File{log}-Datei zu vermerken. Dabei wird für jede
+weiter, als dies in der \File{log}-Datei zu vermerken. Dabei wird für jede
Sprache nur einmal eine entsprechende Information in die \File{log}-Datei
-geschrieben. Ist die Sprache definiert, enthält aber bisher keinen
+geschrieben. Ist die Sprache definiert, enthält aber bisher keinen
entsprechenden \PName{Begriff}, so wird er mit dem angegebenen \PName{Inhalt}
definiert. Ist der \PName{Begriff} hingegen in der Sprache bereits definiert,
so wird er nicht umdefiniert, sondern ebenfalls ein entsprechender Hinweis in
@@ -1611,23 +1702,23 @@ die \File{log}-Datei geschrieben.
Ist dagegen bei \Macro{newcaptionname}
eine Sprache nicht definiert, dann wird diese neu definiert, indem eine
-entsprechende Anweisung definiert wird. Für die Sprache
-\PValue{ngerman} wäre das beispielsweise \Macro{captionsngerman}. Außerdem
-wird darüber auch in der \File{log}-Datei informiert. Ist die Sprache
+entsprechende Anweisung definiert wird. Für die Sprache
+\PValue{ngerman} wäre das beispielsweise \Macro{captionsngerman}. Außerdem
+wird darüber auch in der \File{log}-Datei informiert. Ist die Sprache
definiert, der \PName{Begriff} in dieser Sprache aber noch nicht
-vorhanden, so wird er mit dem gewünschten \PName{Inhalt} definiert. Ist der
+vorhanden, so wird er mit dem gewünschten \PName{Inhalt} definiert. Ist der
\PName{Begriff} in der Sprache bereits vorhanden, so wird eine
Fehlermeldung ausgegeben.
-Die Anweisung \Macro{renewcaptionname} verhält sich noch einmal anders. Ist
+Die Anweisung \Macro{renewcaptionname} verhält sich noch einmal anders. Ist
eine Sprache nicht definiert, so wird eine Fehlermeldung
ausgegeben. Ist die Sprache definiert, der \PName{Begriff} in dieser
Sprache jedoch nicht, so wird ebenfalls eine Fehlermeldung
ausgegeben. Ist der \PName{Begriff} in der Sprache definiert, so wird
-er auf den gewünschten \PName{Inhalt} umdefiniert.
+er auf den gewünschten \PName{Inhalt} umdefiniert.
Die\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} Anweisung \Macro{defcaptionname}
-definiert einen \PName{Begriff} immer, überschreibt also eventuell vorhandene
+definiert einen \PName{Begriff} immer, überschreibt also eventuell vorhandene
Definitionen. Wie bei \Macro{providecaptionname} braucht eine angegebene
Sprache nicht definiert zu sein.
@@ -1636,58 +1727,58 @@ Sprache nicht definiert zu sein.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname} zu definieren.
\begin{Example}
- Möchten Sie »Abb.« statt »Abbildung« in den Abbildungsunterschriften, so
+ Möchten Sie »Abb.« statt »Abbildung« in den Abbildungsunterschriften, so
erreichen Sie dies mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcaptionname{ngerman}{\figurename}{Abb.}
\end{lstcode}
- Soll dieselbe Änderung nicht nur für \PValue{ngerman}, sondern
- auch für die Sprachen \PValue{naustrian} und \PValue{nswissgerman}, also für
- Österreichisch und Schweizer Deutsch gelten, so ist
+ Soll dieselbe Änderung nicht nur für \PValue{ngerman}, sondern
+ auch für die Sprachen \PValue{naustrian} und \PValue{nswissgerman}, also für
+ Österreichisch und Schweizer Deutsch gelten, so ist
es nicht notwendig zwei weitere Anweisungen:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcaptionname{naustrian}{\figurename}{Abb.}
\renewcaptionname{nswissgerman}{\figurename}{Abb.}
\end{lstcode}
- hinzuzufügen. Stattdessen kann einfach, die \PName{Sprachliste} erweitert
+ hinzuzufügen. Stattdessen kann einfach, die \PName{Sprachliste} erweitert
werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcaptionname{ngerman,naustrian,nswissgerman}%
{\figurename}{Abb.}
\end{lstcode}
- In gleicher Weise können auch \PValue{german}, \PValue{austrian} und
- \PValue{swissgerman}, also Deutsch, Österreichisch und Schweizer Deutsch
- nach der veralteten Rechtschreibung, hinzugefügt werden.
+ In gleicher Weise können auch \PValue{german}, \PValue{austrian} und
+ \PValue{swissgerman}, also Deutsch, Österreichisch und Schweizer Deutsch
+ nach der veralteten Rechtschreibung, hinzugefügt werden.
\end{Example}
\begin{Explain}
- Die Sprachen \PValue{swissgerman} und \PValue{nswissgerman} werden übrigens
- von älteren Versionen von \Package{babel} noch nicht unterstützt. Sie sind
- erst seit Dezember~2013 Bestandteil des deutschen Sprachpakets für
- \Package{babel}. Für die Anweisungen \Macro{defcaptionname},
+ Die Sprachen \PValue{swissgerman} und \PValue{nswissgerman} werden übrigens
+ von älteren Versionen von \Package{babel} noch nicht unterstützt. Sie sind
+ erst seit Dezember~2013 Bestandteil des deutschen Sprachpakets für
+ \Package{babel}. Für die Anweisungen \Macro{defcaptionname},
\Macro{newcaptionname} und \Macro{providecaptionname} spielt dies kaum eine
- Rolle, da diese auch Begriffe für nicht existierende Sprachen definieren
- können. Da mit \Macro{renewcaptionname} jedoch nur existierende Begriffe von
- existierenden Sprachen umdefiniert werden können, resultiert die
- Umdefinierung für \Option{nswissgerman} und \Option{swissgerman} bei
- Verwendung einer älteren Version von \Package{babel} in einer entsprechenden
+ Rolle, da diese auch Begriffe für nicht existierende Sprachen definieren
+ können. Da mit \Macro{renewcaptionname} jedoch nur existierende Begriffe von
+ existierenden Sprachen umdefiniert werden können, resultiert die
+ Umdefinierung für \Option{nswissgerman} und \Option{swissgerman} bei
+ Verwendung einer älteren Version von \Package{babel} in einer entsprechenden
Fehlermeldung.
\end{Explain}
Seit \KOMAScript~3.12\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} ist es auch nicht
mehr erforderlich, die Definierung oder Umdefinierung mit Hilfe von
\Macro{AtBeginDocument} bis \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} zu
-verzögern. Stattdessen erledigt \Package{scrbase} dies selbst, falls die
-Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel aufgerufen werden. Außerdem prüft
+verzögern. Stattdessen erledigt \Package{scrbase} dies selbst, falls die
+Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel aufgerufen werden. Außerdem prüft
\Package{scrbase} nun auch, ob ein umzudefinierender Begriff statt in
\Macro{captions\PName{Sprache}} in \Macro{extras\PName{Sprache}} zu definieren
-ist. Die neuen Sternvarianten der Befehle verwenden grundsätzlich
+ist. Die neuen Sternvarianten der Befehle verwenden grundsätzlich
\Macro{extras\PName{Sprache}}, da dessen Definitionen in der Regel nach
\Macro{captions\PName{Sprache}} Anwendung finden. Damit funktioniert nun in
-der Regel auch das Umdefinieren von sprachabhängigen Bezeichnern von Paketen
-wie \Package{hyperref}, die dafür \Macro{extras\PName{Sprache}} verwenden.
+der Regel auch das Umdefinieren von sprachabhängigen Bezeichnern von Paketen
+wie \Package{hyperref}, die dafür \Macro{extras\PName{Sprache}} verwenden.
-In \autoref{tab:scrbase.commonNames} ist ein Überblick über die üblicherweise
+In \autoref{tab:scrbase.commonNames} ist ein Überblick über die üblicherweise
von Klassen und Sprachpaketen definierten Begriffe und deren Verwendung zu
finden.\iffree{}{ \KOMAScript{} selbst definiert noch einige weitere
Begriffe. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.languages} ab
@@ -1696,44 +1787,44 @@ finden.\iffree{}{ \KOMAScript{} selbst definiert noch einige weitere
\begin{desclist}
\renewcommand*{\abovecaptionskipcorrection}{-\normalbaselineskip}%
\desccaption[{%
- Überblick über übliche sprachabhängige Begriffe%
+ Überblick über übliche sprachabhängige Begriffe%
}]{%
- Überblick über sprachabhängige Begriffe in den üblichen
+ Überblick über sprachabhängige Begriffe in den üblichen
Sprachpaketen\label{tab:scrbase.commonNames}%
}{%
- Überblick über übliche sprachabhängige Begriffe
+ Überblick über übliche sprachabhängige Begriffe
(\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\entry{\Macro{abstractname}}{%
- Überschrift für die Zusammenfassung%
+ Überschrift für die Zusammenfassung%
\IndexCmd{abstractname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{alsoname}}{%
- »Siehe auch« bei ergänzenden Verweisen im Stichwortverzeichnis%
+ »Siehe auch« bei ergänzenden Verweisen im Stichwortverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{alsoname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{appendixname}}{%
- »Anhang« in der Kapitelüberschrift eines Anhangs%
+ »Anhang« in der Kapitelüberschrift eines Anhangs%
\IndexCmd{appendixname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{bibname}}{%
- Überschrift für das Literaturverzeichnis%
+ Überschrift für das Literaturverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{bibname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{ccname}}{%
- Spitzmarke für den Verteiler in Briefen%
+ Spitzmarke für den Verteiler in Briefen%
\IndexCmd{ccname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{chaptername}}{%
- »Kapitel« in der Kapitelüberschrift%
+ »Kapitel« in der Kapitelüberschrift%
\IndexCmd{chaptername}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{contentsname}}{%
- Überschrift für das Inhaltsverzeichnis%
+ Überschrift für das Inhaltsverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{contentsname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{enclname}}{%
- Spitzmarke für die Anlagen bei Briefen%
+ Spitzmarke für die Anlagen bei Briefen%
\IndexCmd{enclname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{figurename}}{%
@@ -1741,35 +1832,35 @@ finden.\iffree{}{ \KOMAScript{} selbst definiert noch einige weitere
\IndexCmd{figurename}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{glossaryname}}{%
- Überschrift für das Glossar%
+ Überschrift für das Glossar%
\IndexCmd{glossaryname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{headtoname}}{%
- »An« im Briefkopf%
+ »An« im Briefkopf%
\IndexCmd{headtoname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{indexname}}{%
- Überschrift für das Stichwortverzeichnis%
+ Überschrift für das Stichwortverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{indexname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{listfigurename}}{%
- Überschrift für das Abbildungsverzeichnis%
+ Überschrift für das Abbildungsverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{listfigurename}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{listtablename}}{%
- Überschrift für das Tabellenverzeichnis%
+ Überschrift für das Tabellenverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{listtablename}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{pagename}}{%
- »Seite« in der Seitennummer von Briefen%
+ »Seite« in der Seitennummer von Briefen%
\IndexCmd{pagename}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{partname}}{%
- »Teil« in der Teileüberschrift%
+ »Teil« in der Teileüberschrift%
\IndexCmd{partname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{prefacename}}{%
- Überschrift für das Vorwort%
+ Überschrift für das Vorwort%
\IndexCmd{prefacename}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{proofname}}{%
@@ -1777,15 +1868,15 @@ finden.\iffree{}{ \KOMAScript{} selbst definiert noch einige weitere
\IndexCmd{proofname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{refname}}{%
- Überschrift für das Quellenverzeichnis%
+ Überschrift für das Quellenverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{refname}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{seename}}{%
- »Siehe« bei Verweisen im Stichwortverzeichnis%
+ »Siehe« bei Verweisen im Stichwortverzeichnis%
\IndexCmd{seename}%
}%
\entry{\Macro{tablename}}{%
- Spitzmarke in der Tabellenunter- bzw. "~überschrift%
+ Spitzmarke in der Tabellenunter- bzw. "~überschrift%
\IndexCmd{tablename}%
}%
\end{desclist}
@@ -1798,9 +1889,9 @@ finden.\iffree{}{ \KOMAScript{} selbst definiert noch einige weitere
\section{Identifikation von \KOMAScript}
\seclabel{identify}
-Obwohl -- oder gerade weil -- \Package{scrbase} ganz allgemein als Paket für
-Klassen- und Paketautoren konzipiert ist, wird es natürlich von den
-\KOMAScript-Klassen und den meisten \KOMAScript-Paketen verwendet. Es enthält
+Obwohl -- oder gerade weil -- \Package{scrbase} ganz allgemein als Paket für
+Klassen- und Paketautoren konzipiert ist, wird es natürlich von den
+\KOMAScript-Klassen und den meisten \KOMAScript-Paketen verwendet. Es enthält
daher auch zwei Anweisungen, die in allen \KOMAScript-Klassen und allen
grundlegenden \KOMAScript-Paketen vorhanden sind.
@@ -1808,13 +1899,13 @@ grundlegenden \KOMAScript-Paketen vorhanden sind.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{KOMAScript}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisung setzt schlicht die Wortmarke »\KOMAScript« in serifenloser
+Diese Anweisung setzt schlicht die Wortmarke »\KOMAScript« in serifenloser
Schrift und mit leichter Sperrung des in Versalien gesetzten
-Teils. \Macro{KOMAScript} wird übrigens bei Bedarf von allen
+Teils. \Macro{KOMAScript} wird übrigens bei Bedarf von allen
\KOMAScript-Klassen und "~Paketen definiert. Die Definition erfolgt mit
\Macro{DeclareRobustCommand}. Da auch Pakete, die nicht zu \KOMAScript{}
-gehören, diese Wortmarke definieren können, sollte man die Anweisung jedoch
-nicht als Indiz für die Verwendung eines \KOMAScript-Pakets verstehen.%
+gehören, diese Wortmarke definieren können, sollte man die Anweisung jedoch
+nicht als Indiz für die Verwendung eines \KOMAScript-Pakets verstehen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1822,23 +1913,23 @@ nicht als Indiz für die Verwendung eines \KOMAScript-Pakets verstehen.%
\Macro{KOMAScriptVersion}
\end{Declaration}
Bei \KOMAScript{} ist in dieser Anweisung die Hauptversion von \KOMAScript{}
-in der Form »\PName{Datum} \PName{Version} \texttt{KOMA-Script}«
-abgelegt. Diese Hauptversion ist für alle \KOMAScript-Klassen und alle
+in der Form »\PName{Datum} \PName{Version} \texttt{KOMA-Script}«
+abgelegt. Diese Hauptversion ist für alle \KOMAScript-Klassen und alle
\KOMAScript-Pakete, die von den Klassen verwendet werden, gleich. Daher kann
sie auch nach dem Laden von \Package{scrbase} abgefragt werden. Diese
Anleitung wurde beispielsweise mit der \KOMAScript-Version
-»\KOMAScriptVersion« erstellt. Das Vorhandensein dieser Anweisung ist ein
-starkes Indiz dafür, dass zumindest ein \KOMAScript-Paket verwendet wird.%
+»\KOMAScriptVersion« erstellt. Das Vorhandensein dieser Anweisung ist ein
+starkes Indiz dafür, dass zumindest ein \KOMAScript-Paket verwendet wird.%
\EndIndexGroup
\section{Erweiterungen des \LaTeX-Kerns}
\seclabel{latexkernel}
-In einigen Fällen stellt der \LaTeX-Kern selbst Anweisungen zur Verfügung,
-lässt aber ganz ähnliche Anweisungen, die ebenfalls häufiger benötigt werden
+In einigen Fällen stellt der \LaTeX-Kern selbst Anweisungen zur Verfügung,
+lässt aber ganz ähnliche Anweisungen, die ebenfalls häufiger benötigt werden
oder eigentlich nahe liegen, vermissen. Einige wenige solcher Anweisungen
-für Klassen- und Paketautoren stellt \Package{scrbase} zur Verfügung.
+für Klassen- und Paketautoren stellt \Package{scrbase} zur Verfügung.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{ClassInfoNoLine}\Parameter{Klassenname}\Parameter{Information}
@@ -1863,28 +1954,28 @@ von \Package{scrbase} bereit gestellt.
\end{Declaration}%
Der \LaTeX-Kern bietet mit \Macro{g@addto@macro} eine interne Anweisung, um
die Definition eines Makro \PName{Anweisung} global um den Code
-\PName{Erweiterung} zu erweitern. Das funktioniert in dieser Form nur für
-Makros ohne Argumente. Dennoch könnte man diese Anweisung in einigen Fällen
-auch in einer Form benötigen, die lokal zur aktuellen Gruppe arbeitet. Diese
+\PName{Erweiterung} zu erweitern. Das funktioniert in dieser Form nur für
+Makros ohne Argumente. Dennoch könnte man diese Anweisung in einigen Fällen
+auch in einer Form benötigen, die lokal zur aktuellen Gruppe arbeitet. Diese
wird mit \Macro{l@addto@macro} von \Package{scrbase} bereit gestellt. Eine
Alternative stellt hier die Verwendung des Pakets
\Package{etoolbox}\IndexPackage{etoolbox} oder
\Package{xpatch}\IndexPackage{xpatch} dar, das eine ganze Reihe solcher
-Anweisungen für unterschiedliche Zwecke bietet (siehe
+Anweisungen für unterschiedliche Zwecke bietet (siehe
\cite{package:etoolbox} beziehungsweise \cite{package:xpatch}).
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Erweiterungen der mathematischen Fähigkeiten von \eTeX}
+\section{Erweiterungen der mathematischen Fähigkeiten von \eTeX}
\seclabel{etex}
-Das für \LaTeX{} inzwischen verwendete und von \KOMAScript{} vorausgesetzte
-\eTeX{} besitzt mit \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr} erweiterte Möglichkeiten
-zur Berechnung einfacher Ausdrücke mit \TeX-Zählern und ganzen Zahlen. Als
+Das für \LaTeX{} inzwischen verwendete und von \KOMAScript{} vorausgesetzte
+\eTeX{} besitzt mit \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr} erweiterte Möglichkeiten
+zur Berechnung einfacher Ausdrücke mit \TeX-Zählern und ganzen Zahlen. Als
Operationen werden dabei die vier Grundrechenarten und Klammern
-unterstützt. Bei der Division wird korrekt gerundet. Manchmal sind weitere
-Operationen nützlich.
+unterstützt. Bei der Division wird korrekt gerundet. Manchmal sind weitere
+Operationen nützlich.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{XdivY}\Parameter{Dividend}\Parameter{Divisor}
@@ -1901,29 +1992,269 @@ Rests der Division mit Rest. Diese Art der Division ist nach der Gleichung
\]
%
definiert, wobei \textit{Dividend}, \textit{Divisor} und \textit{Rest} ganze
-Zahlen und \textit{Rest} außerdem größer oder gleich 0 und kleiner als
-\textit{Divisor} ist. Der \textit{Divisor} ist eine natürliche Zahl (ohne die
+Zahlen und \textit{Rest} außerdem größer oder gleich 0 und kleiner als
+\textit{Divisor} ist. Der \textit{Divisor} ist eine natürliche Zahl (ohne die
0).
-Der Wert kann jeweils zur Zuweisung an einen Zähler oder direkt innerhalb
+Der Wert kann jeweils zur Zuweisung an einen Zähler oder direkt innerhalb
eines Ausdrucks mit \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr} verwendet werden. Zur
Ausgabe als arabische Zahl ist \Macro{the} voranzustellen.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\section[{Allgemeiner Mechanismus für mehrstufige Haken}]
+{Allgemeiner Mechanismus für mehrstufige
+ Haken\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}}}
+\seclabel{hooks}
+
+\BeginIndexGroup
+\BeginIndex{}{Haken}
+Der \LaTeX-Kern bietet selbst bereits einige wenige Stellen in der
+Verarbeitung eines Dokuments, an denen die Ausführung zusätzlichen Codes
+\emph{eingehakt} werden kann. Klassen- und Paketautoren dürften
+\Macro{AtBeginDocument} und \Macro{AtEndDocument} bestens bekannt
+sein. \KOMAScript{} bietet an einigen Stellen vergleichbares, beispielsweise
+um Code in die Ausführung von
+\hyperref[sec:maincls.structure]{Gliederungsbefehlen} einzuhaken. Ãœber die
+Jahre zeigten sich dabei zwei Probleme:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Es gibt nie genug Haken.
+\item Es gibt sowohl Code, der nur einmal ausgeführt werden soll, also quasi
+ bei seiner Ausführung wieder vom Haken fällt, als auch Code, der bei jedem
+ Durchlaufen des Hakens auszuführen ist, also dauerhaft auf dem Haken bleibt.
+\end{itemize}
+Ãœblicherweise muss man zur Definition eines einzelnen Hakens eine Anweisung
+definieren, mit der Code für den jeweiligen Haken aufgesammelt wird. Dieser
+Code wird dann in einem weiteren internen Makro abgelegt, das man an der
+Stelle einfügen muss, an der der aufgesammelte Code auszuführen ist. Je mehr
+Haken man einfügt, desto mehr solcher Anweisungen gibt es. Um sowohl
+Einmalcode als auch dauerhaften Code zu ermöglichen, benötigt es gegebenfalls
+sogar zwei Haken und damit die doppelte Anzahl an zu definierenden
+Anweisungen.
+
+Das Beispiel der Gliederungsbefehle zeigt, dass sich das erste Problem
+teilweise an einem einzigen Codeausführungspunkt noch verschärfen kann. Hier
+benötigt der eine Paketautor lediglich eine Möglichkeit für alle
+Gliederungsbefehle denselben Code auszuführen. Ein anderer Paketautor hätte
+lieber, dass er nur bei bestimmten Gliederungsbefehlen unterschiedlichen Code
+ausführen kann. Es würde also sowohl ein allgemeiner Haken als auch ein Haken
+je Gliederungsbefehl benötigt. Das ganze dann wieder wegen des zweiten
+Problems verdoppelt.
+
+\KOMAScript{} bietet in \Package{scrbase} daher einen verallgemeinerten
+Hakenmechanismus, der mehrstufige Haken sowohl für Einmalcode als auch für
+dauerhaften Code bereitstellt. Diese Haken haben aufgrund der Implementierung
+den Namen \emph{do-hook} erhalten. Davon leitet sich auch der Name der
+Anweisungen ab, mit denen sie gesteuert werden.
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{ExecuteDoHook}\Parameter{Spezifikator}
+\end{Declaration}
+Ãœber\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} diese Anweisung werden Haken
+implementiert. Dabei bestimmt der \PName{Spezifikator} den Namen des oder
+genauer der Haken. Der \PName{Spezifikator} wird zur Analyse immer vollständig
+expandiert.
+
+Der \PName{Spezifikator} besteht allgemein aus durch Querstrichen,
+»\texttt{/}«, voneinander getrennten Zeichenfolgen. Von \Macro{ExecuteDoHook}
+wird dann zunächst die Zeichenfolge vor dem ersten Querstrich
+abgetrennt. Diese ist der Name. Der verbleibende Rest (ohne den Querstrich)
+ist das Argument. Dann wird der Code für den Haken mit diesem Namen
+ausgeführt. Anschließend wird erneut die vordere Zeichenfolge vom Rest
+abgetrennt und mit einem Querstrich hinten an den Namen angefügt und der Code
+für den so neu gebildeten Namen ausgeführt. Das geht so lange, bis der Code
+für den Haken mit dem Namen \PName{Spezifikator} und leerem Argument
+ausgeführt wurde.
+
+Im einfachsten Fall besteht der \PName{Spezifikator} aus einem einzelnen
+Namen. In diesem Fall wird zunächst der dauerhafte Code für genau einen durch
+diesen Namen festgelegten Haken mit leerem Argument ausgeführt.
+
+In jeder Stufe der Ausführung wird nach dem dauerhaften Code für einen Haken
+zusätzlich Einmalcode ausgeführt, bevor der Einmalcode global vom Haken
+genommen wird.
+
+\begin{Example}
+ Durch Einfügen von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook}%
+ \PParameter{heading/begingroup/\PName{Name}} in die Ausführung eines jeden
+ mit \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand} definierten
+ Gliederungbefehls wurden in den \KOMAScript-Klassen letztlich sechs Haken an
+ diesem Codepunkt eingefügt, die in dieser Reihenfolge ausgeführt werden:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \PValue{heading} mit Argument \PValue{begingroup/}\PName{Name} für
+ dauerhaften Code,
+ \item \PValue{heading} mit Argument \PValue{begingroup/}\PName{Name} für
+ Einmalcode,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup} mit Argument \PName{Name} für
+ dauerhaften Code,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup} mit Argument \PName{Name} für
+ Einmalcode,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup/}\PName{Name} mit leerem Argument für
+ dauerhaften Code,
+ \item \PValue{heading/begingroup/}\PName{Name} mit leerem Argument für
+ Einmalcode.
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \PName{Name} ist dabei der bei
+ \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand},
+ \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand} oder
+ \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand} angegebene \PName{Name}
+ der Gliederungsebene beziehungsweise des dadurch bestimmten
+ Gliederungsbefehls, also beispielsweise \PValue{chapter} oder
+ \PValue{subparagraph}. Betrachtet man obige Auflistung unter
+ Berücksichtigung der Tatsache, dass es diverse Gliederungsbefehle gibt,
+ wird klar, dass die Haken \PValue{heading} und \PValue{heading/begingroup}
+ mehrfach, nämlich für jeden Gliederungsbefehl existieren.%
+\end{Example}%
%
\EndIndexGroup
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{AddtoDoHook}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Befehl}
+ \Macro{AddtoOneTimeDoHook}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Befehl}
+\end{Declaration}
+Mit\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{AddtoDoHook} wird an
+dem Haken mit dem Namen \PName{Name} dauerhafter Code aufgehängt. Als Code
+dient dabei der \PName{Befehl}, dem das in der Erklärung zu
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook} erwähnte Argument als Parameter
+angehängt wird.
+\begin{Example}
+ Angenommen, es soll innerhalb von \Macro{section} mitgezählt werden, wie oft
+ diese Anweisung ausgeführt wird. Dies wäre in Fortführung des obigen
+ Beispiels mit
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcounter{sectionZaehler}
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup/section}
+ {\stepcounter{sectionZaehler}}
+\end{lstcode}
+ sehr einfach möglich. Allerdings würde dann in Wirklichkeit
+ \Macro{stepcounter}\PParameter{sectionZaehler}\PParameter{} ausgeführt. Wir
+ erinnern uns daran, dass immer ein Argument als Parameter angehängt wird.
+ Im Falle des Hakens mit dem Namen \PValue{heading/begingroup/section} ist
+ dieses Argument leer. Da ein solcher leerer Parameter hier zur einer leeren
+ Gruppe wird, ist es besser, diesen leeren Parameter quasi aufzubrauchen:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcommand*{\stepcountergobble}[2]{%
+ \stepcounter{#1}%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup/section}
+ {\stepcountergobble{sectionZaehler}}
+\end{lstcode}
+ Hier wird der angehängte, leere Parameter von \Macro{stepcountergobble}
+ gelesen, aber nicht verwendet.
+
+ Sollen nun statt \Macro{section} alle Gliederungsbefehle gezählt werden, so
+ muss nur ein anderer Hakenname eingesetzt werden:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup}
+ {\stepcountergobble{sectionZaehler}}
+\end{lstcode}
+ Hier ist übrigens der angehängte Parameter nicht leer, sondern enthält den
+ Namen der Gliederungsebene oder des Gliederungsbefehls. Wollte man die
+ Gliederungsbefehle einzeln zählen, so könnte man genau dies ausnützen:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcommand*{\stepZaehler}[1]{%
+ \stepcounter{#1Zaehler}%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup}
+ {\stepZaehler}
+\end{lstcode}
+ Natürlich müssten dann auch die Zähler \Counter{partZaehler},
+ \Counter{chapterZaehler} bis hinunter zu \Counter{subparagraphZaehler}
+ definiert werden.
+\end{Example}
+
+Die Anweisung \Macro{AddtoOneTimeDoHook} arbeitet vergleichbar, fügt den
+\PName{Befehl} aber dem Einmalcode hinzu. Dieser Code wird dann nach der
+ersten Ausführung global vom Haken genommen.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{ForDoHook}\Parameter{Spezifikator}\Parameter{Befehl}
+\end{Declaration}
+Während\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}}
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook} dazu gedacht ist, die Befehle
+auszuführen, die zuvor mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoDoHook} oder
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook} für die durch den
+\PName{Spezifikator} bestimmten Haken gespeichert wurden, führt diese Anweisung
+den unmittelbar angegebenen \PName{Befehl} aus. Dabei werden an \PName{Befehl}
+sogar zwei Parameter angefügt. Der erste Parameter ist der Name des Haken, der
+zweite das Argument des Hakens.
+
+Diese Anweisung ist ein Abfallprodukt der Implementierung von
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook}. Normalerweise sollten weder Anwender
+noch Paketautoren diese Anweisung benötigen.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{SplitDoHook}\Parameter{Spezifikator}\Parameter{Kopf-Makro}
+ \Parameter{Rest-Makro}
+\end{Declaration}
+Wie\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Package{scrbase}} aus den vorangegangenen
+Erklärungen deutlich wird, kann der Parameter eines mit
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoDoHook} oder
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddtoOneTimeDoHook} hinzugefügten \PName{Befehls}
+ebenfalls ein mehrteiliger \PName{Spezifikator} sein. Mit \Macro{SplitDoHook}
+kann so ein \PName{Spezifikator} in das vordere Element und den Rest
+aufgeteilt werden. Das \PName{Kopf-Makro} wird dabei als das vordere Element
+definiert. Das \PName{Rest-Makro} wird als der Rest definiert. Im Falle, dass
+kein Rest bleibt, wird das \PName{Rest-Makro} leer definiert. Falls bereits der
+\PName{Spezifikator} leer war, wird eine Warnung ausgegeben und sowohl
+\PName{Kopf-Makro} als auch \PName{Rest-Makro} leer definiert.
+
+\begin{Example}
+ Wollte man am Anfang der Gruppe, in der die Ãœberschrift ausgegeben wird,
+ einen Zähler erhöhen, diesen am Ende aber wieder verringern, so könnte man
+ dies über zwei Haken tun:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/begingroup}
+ {\stepZaehler}
+ \newcommand*{\restepZaehler}[1]{%
+ \addtocounter{#1Zaehler}{-1}%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/endgroup}
+ {\restepcounter}
+\end{lstcode}
+ Man könnte aber auch mit einem einzigen Haken arbeiten und dessen Parameter
+ zerlegen:
+\begin{lstcode}
+ \newcommand*{\changeZaehler}[1]{%
+ \SplitDoHook{#1}{\Gruppe}{\Ebene}%
+ \ifstr{\Gruppe}{begingroup}{%
+ \stepcounter{\Ebene Zaehler}%
+ }{%
+ \ifstr{\Gruppe}{endgroup}{%
+ \addtocounter{\Ebene Zaehler}{-1}%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ }
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading}
+ {\changeZaehler}
+\end{lstcode}
+ Wie zu sehen ist, ist die erste Lösung um einiges einfacher. Dazu kommt,
+ dass man die zweite Fallunterscheidung in der zweiten Lösung gerne
+ vergisst. Das wäre allerdings fatal, da es weitere Haken mit Namen
+ \PValue{heading} aber abweichendem Argument geben kann.
+\end{Example}
+
+Genau genommen ist diese Anweisung ein Abfallprodukt aus der Implementierung
+von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ForDoHook}.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+%
+\EndIndexGroup
+\EndIndexGroup
+
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Paketoptionen Familienmitglieder Familienmitglieds Säumniswert
+% LocalWords: Paketoptionen Familienmitglieder Familienmitglieds Säumniswert
% LocalWords: Fleischermeister FamilyProcessOptions ProcessOption keyval Cmd
% LocalWords: documentclass ProcessOptions FamilyExecuteOptions currname
% LocalWords: Optionenliste ExecuteOptions DeclareOption currext Wurstsalat
@@ -1931,7 +2262,7 @@ Ausgabe als arabische Zahl ist \Macro{the} voranzustellen.%
% LocalWords: Wurstpaket FamilyOption salatmit SalatZusatz scrbase false
% LocalWords: AtEndOfFamilyOptions FamilyBoolKey FamilySetBool Schaltername
% LocalWords: FamilyLengthKey FamilySetLength FamilyLengthMacroKey
-% LocalWords: FamilySetLengthMacro Wertübergabe Gliederungsbefehlen
+% LocalWords: FamilySetLengthMacro Wertübergabe Gliederungsbefehlen
% LocalWords: Sternvariante Anwenderanweisungen Signalisierung Paketautoren
-% LocalWords: Familienschlüssel Mitgliederschlüssels Vergleichszustand
-% LocalWords: Benutzeräquivalent Dokumentpräambel voranzustellen
+% LocalWords: Familienschlüssel Mitgliederschlüssels Vergleichszustand
+% LocalWords: Benutzeräquivalent Dokumentpräambel voranzustellen
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
index 410c320f04..b947969971 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -41,44 +41,50 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrbook, scrreprt und scrartcl im Experten-Teil der
+% Kapitel über scrbook, scrreprt und scrartcl im Experten-Teil der
% KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-10-14 20:31:51 +0200 (Sun, 14 Oct 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 16:34:25 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl for
experts)]
-\chapter[{Zusätzliche Informationen zu den Hauptklassen und
- \Package{scrextend}}]{Zusätzliche
+\chapter[{Zusätzliche Informationen zu den Hauptklassen und
+ \Package{scrextend}}]{Zusätzliche
Informationen zu den Hauptklassen
\Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und
\Class{scrartcl} sowie dem
Paket \Package{scrextend}}
\labelbase{maincls-experts}
-\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Class}{scrartcl} \BeginIndex{Class}{scrbook}
-\BeginIndex{Class}{scrreprt} \BeginIndex{Package}{scrextend} In diesem Kapitel
-finden Sie zusätzliche Informationen zu den \KOMAScript-Klassen
-\Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} und einigen
-Anweisungen, die auch in \Package{scrextend} vorhanden sind. \iffree{Einige
- Teile des Kapitels sind dabei dem \KOMAScript-Buch \cite{book:komascript}
- vorbehalten. Dies sollte kein Problem sein, denn der}{Der} normale Anwender,
-der die Klassen einfach nur verwenden will, wird diese Informationen eher
-selten benötigen. Ein Teil der Informationen richtet sich an Anwender, die
-ausgefallene Aufgaben lösen oder eigene Klassen schreiben wollen, die auf
-einer \KOMAScript-Klasse basieren. Anderes existiert nur aus Gründen der
-Kompatibilität zu den Standardklassen\iffree{ oder früheren Versionen von
- \KOMAScript}{}.\iffree{}{ Teile, die nur aus Gründen der
- Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{} existieren, sind in
- serifenloser Schrift gesetzt und sollten nicht mehr verwendet werden.}
+\BeginIndexGroup%
+\BeginIndex{Class}{scrartcl}%
+\BeginIndex{Class}{scrbook}%
+\BeginIndex{Class}{scrreprt}%
+\BeginIndex{Package}{scrextend}%
+In diesem Kapitel finden Sie zusätzliche Informationen zu den
+\KOMAScript-Klassen \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} und
+einigen Anweisungen, die auch in \Package{scrextend} vorhanden sind.
+\iffree{Einige Teile des Kapitels sind dabei dem \KOMAScript-Buch
+ \cite{book:komascript} vorbehalten. Dies sollte kein Problem sein, denn
+ der}{Der} normale Anwender, der die Klassen einfach nur verwenden will, wird
+diese Informationen eher selten benötigen. Ein Teil der Informationen richtet
+sich an Anwender, die ausgefallene Aufgaben lösen oder eigene Klassen
+schreiben wollen, die auf einer \KOMAScript-Klasse basieren. Da sich die
+entsprechenden Erklärungen ausdrücklich nicht an \LaTeX-Anfänger richtet, sind
+sie teilweise deutlich kürzer gefasst und setzen ein vertieftes Wissen über
+\LaTeX{} voraus. Anderes existiert nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu den
+Standardklassen\iffree{ oder früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}{}.\iffree{}{
+ Teile, die nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von
+ \KOMAScript{} existieren, sind in serifenloser Schrift gesetzt und sollten
+ nicht mehr verwendet werden.}
\LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{0}
-\section{Ergänzungen zu Benutzeranweisungen}
+\section{Ergänzungen zu Benutzeranweisungen}
\seclabel{addInfos}
\LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{1}
@@ -90,17 +96,14 @@ Kompatibilität zu den Standardklassen\iffree{ oder früheren Versionen von
\LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{2}
-\section{Anweisungen für Experten}
-\seclabel{experts}
+\section{Erkennung von \KOMAScript-Klassen}
+\seclabel{identify}
-In diesem Abschnitt werden Anweisungen beschrieben, die für den normalen
-Anwender kaum oder gar nicht von Interesse sind. Experten bieten diese
-Anweisungen zusätzliche Möglichkeiten. Da die Beschreibungen für Experten
-gedacht sind, sind sie kürzer gefasst.
-
-
-% \subsection{Identifikation}
-% \seclabel{identification}
+Für Paketautoren besteht manchmal die Notwendigkeit, eine \KOMAScript-Klasse
+zu erkennen. Für Anwender besteht diese Notwendigkeit dagegen eher
+nicht. Bezüglich der verwendeten \KOMAScript-Version sei auf
+\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.identify},
+\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion} verwiesen.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{KOMAClassName}
@@ -109,50 +112,57 @@ gedacht sind, sind sie kürzer gefasst.
In \Macro{KOMAClassName} ist der Name der aktuell verwendeten
\KOMAScript-Klasse abgelegt. Will man also wissen, ob eine oder welche
\KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet wird, so kann man einfach auf diese Anweisung
-testen. Demgegenüber gibt \Macro{ClassName} Auskunft, welche Standardklasse
+testen. Demgegenüber gibt \Macro{ClassName} Auskunft, welche Standardklasse
durch diese \KOMAScript-Klasse ersetzt wird.
Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei in diesem Zusammenhang darauf hingewiesen, dass
dagegen die Existenz von
-\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript}\IndexCmd{KOMAScript} nicht als Indiz für die
+\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript}\IndexCmd{KOMAScript} nicht als Indiz für die
Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse dienen kann. Zum einen definieren alle
-\KOMAScript-Pakete diese Anweisung, zum anderen können auch andere Pakete es
-für sinnvoll erachten, das \KOMAScript-Piktogramm unter diesem Namen zu
+\KOMAScript-Pakete diese Anweisung, zum anderen können auch andere Pakete es
+für sinnvoll erachten, das \KOMAScript-Piktogramm unter diesem Namen zu
definieren.%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Einträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis}
-% \seclabel{toc}
+\section{Einträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis}
+\seclabel{toc}
+
+\KOMAScript-Klassen bieten erweiterte Möglichkeiten zur Erstellung und
+Manipulation von Einträgen in das Inhaltsverzeichnis. Einige davon basieren
+auf der Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic} (siehe
+\autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab
+\autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}). Andere sind direkt in den Klassen
+implementiert.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{addtocentrydefault}\Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Nummer}%
- \Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\end{Declaration}
Die\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} \KOMAScript-Klassen verwenden
\Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline}%
-\important{\Macro{addcontentsline}} nicht direkt, um Einträge ins
+\important{\Macro{addcontentsline}} nicht direkt, um Einträge ins
Inhaltsverzeichnis vorzunehmen. Stattdessen wird \Macro{addtocentrydefault}
-mit ganz ähnlichen Argumenten aufgerufen. Die Anweisung kann sowohl für
-nummerierte als auch für nicht nummerierte Einträge verwendet werden. Dabei
+mit ganz ähnlichen Argumenten aufgerufen. Die Anweisung kann sowohl für
+nummerierte als auch für nicht nummerierte Einträge verwendet werden. Dabei
gibt \PName{Ebene} die Gliederungsebene in Textform an, also \PValue{part},
\PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection},
\PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph} oder \PValue{subparagraph}. Die
-formatierte Gliederungsnummer wird über das zweite Argument \PName{Nummer}
-übergeben. Dieses Argument darf auch leer sein. Der Text des Eintrags wird mit
-\PName{Überschrift} angegeben. Zerbrechliche Befehle in
+formatierte Gliederungsnummer wird über das zweite Argument \PName{Nummer}
+übergeben. Dieses Argument darf auch leer sein. Der Text des Eintrags wird mit
+\PName{Ãœberschrift} angegeben. Zerbrechliche Befehle in
diesem Argument sind mit
-\Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect}\important{\Macro{protect}} zu schützen.
+\Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect}\important{\Macro{protect}} zu schützen.
-Für das Argument \PName{Nummer} gilt noch eine Besonderheit. Ist das Argument
+Für das Argument \PName{Nummer} gilt noch eine Besonderheit. Ist das Argument
leer, so signalisiert dies, dass ein nicht nummerierter Eintrag erzeugt werden
soll. In der Voreinstellung wird dies mit
\begin{quote}\small\raggedright
\Macro{addcontentsline}\PParameter{toc}\Parameter{Ebene}%
\PParameter{\%\\
\quad\Macro{protect}\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline}
- \PName{Überschrift}\%\\
+ \PName{Ãœberschrift}\%\\
}
\end{quote}
erreicht. Ist das Argument jedoch nicht leer, so soll ein nummerierter Eintrag
@@ -162,14 +172,14 @@ der Voreinstellung verwendet \KOMAScript{} dann:
\Macro{addcontentsline}\PParameter{toc}\Parameter{Ebene}%
\PParameter{\%\\
\quad\Macro{protect}\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.numberline}\Parameter{Nummer}%
- \PName{Überschrift}\%\\
+ \PName{Ãœberschrift}\%\\
}
\end{quote}
\iffalse zur Erzeugung dieses Eintrags.\fi
-Paketautoren und Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen können diese Anweisung
-umdefinieren, um Einfluss auf die Einträge zu nehmen. So\textnote{Beispiel}
-wäre beispielsweise denkbar, mit
+Paketautoren und Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen können diese Anweisung
+umdefinieren, um Einfluss auf die Einträge zu nehmen. So\textnote{Beispiel}
+wäre beispielsweise denkbar, mit
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand{\addtocentrydefault}[3]{%
\ifstr{#3}{}{%
@@ -182,30 +192,30 @@ wäre beispielsweise denkbar, mit
}%
}%
\end{lstcode}
-dafür\IndexCmd{ifstr} zu sorgen, dass Einträge mit leerer \PName{Überschrift}
-erst gar nicht vorgenommen werden. Eine solche Änderung ist in der Praxis
-jedoch nicht notwendig, da die Unterdrückung leerer Einträge bereits auf
+dafür\IndexCmd{ifstr} zu sorgen, dass Einträge mit leerer \PName{Überschrift}
+erst gar nicht vorgenommen werden. Eine solche Änderung ist in der Praxis
+jedoch nicht notwendig, da die Unterdrückung leerer Einträge bereits auf
andere Weise in die \KOMAScript-Klassen eingebaut ist. Siehe hierzu auch die
-Erklärung zu den Gliederungsbefehlen in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab
+Erklärung zu den Gliederungsbefehlen in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{addparttocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addchaptertocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addsubsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addsubparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \Macro{addparttocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addchaptertocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addsubsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addsubparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\end{Declaration}%
Auch \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} die oben dokumentierte Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault}\IndexCmd{addtocentrydefault}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault}} wird von den
-\KOMAScript-Klassen nur dann direkt aufgerufen, wenn für die angegebene
+\KOMAScript-Klassen nur dann direkt aufgerufen, wenn für die angegebene
\PName{Ebene} keine direkte Anweisung definiert oder diese
\Macro{relax}\IndexCmd{relax}\important{\Macro{relax}} ist. In der
Voreinstellung sind die angegebenen Anweisungen alle so definiert, dass sie
@@ -218,57 +228,62 @@ ihre \PName{Ebene} und die Argumente direkt an
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{raggedchapterentry}
\end{Declaration}
-Bei früheren\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Version
-von \KOMAScript{} gab es die Möglichkeit, das Makro \Macro{raggedchapterentry}
-als \Macro{raggedright} zu definieren, um den Text der Kapiteleinträge ins
-Inhaltsverzeichnis im linksbündigen Flattersatz zu setzen. Offiziell existiert
-diese Möglichkeit seit \KOMAScript-Version~3.21 nicht mehr.
+Bei früheren\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Version
+von \KOMAScript{} gab es die Möglichkeit, das Makro \Macro{raggedchapterentry}
+als \Macro{raggedright} zu definieren, um den Text der Kapiteleinträge ins
+Inhaltsverzeichnis im linksbündigen Flattersatz zu setzen. Offiziell existiert
+diese Möglichkeit seit \KOMAScript-Version~3.21 nicht mehr.
-Tatsächlich ist aber die Eigenschaft \PValue{raggedentrytext} für den
+Tatsächlich ist aber die Eigenschaft \PValue{raggedentrytext} für den
Eintrags-Stil \PValue{tocline} im Paket
\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}\IndexPackage{tocbasic} so
implementiert, dass sie das Makro \Macro{ragged\PName{Eintragsebene}entry}
entweder auf \Macro{relax} oder auf \Macro{raggedright} setzt. Bei der
Auswertung der Eigenschaft wird dann getestet, ob das entsprechende Makro
entweder \Macro{raggedright} ist oder als \Macro{raggedright} definiert
-ist. In beiden Fällen wird Flattersatz verwendet. In allen anderen Fällen wird
+ist. In beiden Fällen wird Flattersatz verwendet. In allen anderen Fällen wird
kein Flattersatz verwendet.
-Da schon früher dokumentiert war, dass \Macro{raggedchapterentry} nicht
+Da schon früher dokumentiert war, dass \Macro{raggedchapterentry} nicht
als etwas anderes als \Macro{raggedright} definiert werden sollte, ist damit
-Kompatibilität zum dokumentierten Verhalten früherer Versionen erreicht. Wie
-in früheren Versionen gewarnt, führen andere Definitionen von
+Kompatibilität zum dokumentierten Verhalten früherer Versionen erreicht. Wie
+in früheren Versionen gewarnt, führen andere Definitionen von
\Macro{raggedchapterentry} -- nun aber auch von \Macro{raggedsectionentry} und
-entsprechend für die anderen Eintragsebenen -- möglicherweise zu unerwarteten
+entsprechend für die anderen Eintragsebenen -- möglicherweise zu unerwarteten
Ergebnissen.
-Empfohlen wird, eventuell gewünschten Flattersatz für Verzeichniseinträge
-stattdessen über die genannte Eigenschaft des Verzeichniseintragsstils
-\PValue{tocline} zu wählen.%
+Empfohlen wird, eventuell gewünschten Flattersatz für Verzeichniseinträge
+stattdessen über die genannte Eigenschaft des Verzeichniseintragsstils
+\PValue{tocline} zu wählen.%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Schrifteinstellungen}
-% \seclabel{fonts}
+\section{Schrifteinstellungen}
+\seclabel{fonts}
+
+\KOMAScript-Klassen verfügen nicht nur über erweiterte Möglichkeiten zur
+Auswahl der Grundschriftgröße. Sie erlauben auch die Definition von Elementen
+mit eigenen Schrifteinstellungen, sowie deren Manipulation und dedizierter
+Anwendung.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{@fontsizefilebase}
- \Macro{changefontsizes}\Parameter{Schriftgröße}
+ \Macro{changefontsizes}\Parameter{Schriftgröße}
\end{Declaration}
Der\iffree{ in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}}{} auf
-\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.fontsize} für die Schriftgrößendateien
-angegebene Präfix \File{scrsize}, ist lediglich die Voreinstellung für das
+\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.fontsize} für die Schriftgrößendateien
+angegebene Präfix \File{scrsize}, ist lediglich die Voreinstellung für das
interne Makro \Macro{@fontsizefilebase}\IndexCmd{@fontsizefilebase}, die
verwendet wird, wenn das Makro beim Laden der Klasse oder des Pakets
\Package{scrextend} noch nicht definiert ist. Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen
-können dieses Makro abweichend definieren, um andere Schriftgrößendateien zu
-verwenden. Ebenso\textnote{Tipp!} können Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen die
-\emph{fallback}-Lösung der berechneten Schriftgrößen dadurch ändern oder
+können dieses Makro abweichend definieren, um andere Schriftgrößendateien zu
+verwenden. Ebenso\textnote{Tipp!} können Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen die
+\emph{fallback}-Lösung der berechneten Schriftgrößen dadurch ändern oder
abschalten, dass sie das Makro
\Macro{changefontsizes}\important{\Macro{changefontsizes}}, das als Argument
-die gewünschte \PName{Schriftgröße} erwartet, umdefinieren. Das
+die gewünschte \PName{Schriftgröße} erwartet, umdefinieren. Das
Makro\textnote{Achtung!} \Macro{changefontsizes} ist jedoch nicht als
-Anweisung für den Aufruf durch Anwender konzipiert.%
+Anweisung für den Aufruf durch Anwender konzipiert.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -277,37 +292,37 @@ Anweisung für den Aufruf durch Anwender konzipiert.%
\Parameter{Voreinstellung}
\Macro{aliaskomafont}\Parameter{Aliasname}\Parameter{Element}
\end{Declaration}
-Experten können mit \Macro{newkomafont} eine \PName{Voreinstellung} für die
-Schrift eines \PName{Element}s definieren. Anschließend kann diese
+Experten können mit \Macro{newkomafont} eine \PName{Voreinstellung} für die
+Schrift eines \PName{Element}s definieren. Anschließend kann diese
Voreinstellung mit den Anweisungen \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Natürlich wird diese
-Schrift damit noch lange nicht verwendet. Der Experte muss selbst Sorge dafür
+\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Natürlich wird diese
+Schrift damit noch lange nicht verwendet. Der Experte muss selbst Sorge dafür
tragen, dass er an den entsprechenden Stellen die Anweisung
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}}\IndexCmd{usekomafont} (siehe
-\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}) für dieses Element in seinen
-Definitionen einbaut. Der Aufruf von \Macro{newkomafont} für ein bereits
-existierendes Element führt zu Fehlermeldungen.
+\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}) für dieses Element in seinen
+Definitionen einbaut. Der Aufruf von \Macro{newkomafont} für ein bereits
+existierendes Element führt zu Fehlermeldungen.
Das optionale Argument \PName{Warnung} definiert eine Warnmeldung. Diese wird
bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen per \Macro{ClassWarning} oder beim Paket
\Package{scrextend} per \Macro{PackageWarning} immer dann ausgegeben, wenn die
-Voreinstellung für das Element verändert wird. Als Urheber der
+Voreinstellung für das Element verändert wird. Als Urheber der
Warnung wird das Paket
\Package{scrkbase}\IndexPackage{scrkbase}\important{\Package{scrkbase}}
angegeben.
-Mit \Macro{aliaskomafont} kann für ein bereits existierendes \PName{Element}
+Mit \Macro{aliaskomafont} kann für ein bereits existierendes \PName{Element}
ein \PName{Aliasname} definiert werden. \KOMAScript{} informiert den Benutzer
-in der \File{log}-Datei über den Namen des tatsächlichen Elements, wenn dieser
-den \PName{Aliasname} verwendet. \PName{Aliasname}n\textnote{Tipp!} können
-beispielsweise dann eingesetzt werden, wenn der Entwickler sich später einen
-besseren Namen für ein Element überlegt und der alte Name aus
-Kompatibilitätsgründen weiter verwendbar bleiben soll. Außerdem kann damit die
-Benutzerfreundlichkeit erhöht werden, indem einem Element all die Namen als
-Alias zugeordnet werden, die unterschiedliche Benutzer intuitiv wählen
-würden. \KOMAScript{} selbst macht von dieser Möglichkeit regen Gebrauch.
+in der \File{log}-Datei über den Namen des tatsächlichen Elements, wenn dieser
+den \PName{Aliasname} verwendet. \PName{Aliasname}n\textnote{Tipp!} können
+beispielsweise dann eingesetzt werden, wenn der Entwickler sich später einen
+besseren Namen für ein Element überlegt und der alte Name aus
+Kompatibilitätsgründen weiter verwendbar bleiben soll. Außerdem kann damit die
+Benutzerfreundlichkeit erhöht werden, indem einem Element all die Namen als
+Alias zugeordnet werden, die unterschiedliche Benutzer intuitiv wählen
+würden. \KOMAScript{} selbst macht von dieser Möglichkeit regen Gebrauch.
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -317,25 +332,25 @@ würden. \KOMAScript{} selbst macht von dieser Möglichkeit regen Gebrauch.
\Macro{addtokomafontonearglist}\Parameter{Makro}
\Macro{addtokomafontgobblelist}\Parameter{Makro}
\end{Declaration}
-Wie bereits in \autoref{part:forAuthors} der Anleitung erklärt, dürfen in den
-Schrifteinstellungen der Elemente nur Befehle zur Wahl der Größe, Familie,
-Codierung, Strichstärke, Form und Farbe enthalten sein. Dabei erfolgt schon
-die Änderung der Farbe bei \LaTeX{} nicht transparent und kann damit
-unerwünschte Effekte hervorrufen, wenn man \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}
-an ungünstiger Stelle verwendet.
+Wie bereits in \autoref{part:forAuthors} der Anleitung erklärt, dürfen in den
+Schrifteinstellungen der Elemente nur Befehle zur Wahl der Größe, Familie,
+Codierung, Strichstärke, Form und Farbe enthalten sein. Dabei erfolgt schon
+die Änderung der Farbe bei \LaTeX{} nicht transparent und kann damit
+unerwünschte Effekte hervorrufen, wenn man \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}
+an ungünstiger Stelle verwendet.
Nun neigen Anwender dazu, in die Schrifteinstellungen auch ganz andere,
teilweise sehr kritische Dinge zu packen, beispielsweise ein
\Macro{MakeUppercase} ganz am Ende der Einstellung. Bei der internen
-Verwendung der Schrifteinstellungen wurde daher möglichst so vorgegangen, dass
+Verwendung der Schrifteinstellungen wurde daher möglichst so vorgegangen, dass
viele dieser eigentlich verbotenen Einstellungen trotzdem keinen Schaden
anrichten und es meist sogar funktioniert, wenn der letzte Befehl in der
Schrifteinstellung ein Argument erwartet, also beispielsweise \Macro{textbf}
-anstelle von \Macro{bfseries} verwendet wird. Eine Garantie gibt es dafür
+anstelle von \Macro{bfseries} verwendet wird. Eine Garantie gibt es dafür
jedoch nicht.
-In Einzelfällen war es innerhalb von \KOMAScript{} notwendig, die Umschaltung
-wirklich auf Schrifteinstellungen zu beschränken. Dies erfolgt dann
+In Einzelfällen war es innerhalb von \KOMAScript{} notwendig, die Umschaltung
+wirklich auf Schrifteinstellungen zu beschränken. Dies erfolgt dann
beispielsweise mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont}\IndexCmd{usefontofkomafont}%
\IndexCmd{usesizeofkomafont}\IndexCmd{useencodingofkomafont}%
@@ -357,32 +372,32 @@ zu \Macro{relax} werden sollen. In der Voreinstellung ist das seit
Es ist zu beachten, dass das angegebene \PName{Makro} wirklich stur auf
\Macro{relax} gesetzt wird. Irgendwelche Argumente innerhalb der
-Schrifteinstellung werden also gegebenenfalls lokal ausgeführt. Daher dürfen
-Anweisungen wie \Macro{setlength} keinesfalls zu dieser Liste hinzugefügt
-werden. Für alle Fehler, die durch die Verwendung von
+Schrifteinstellung werden also gegebenenfalls lokal ausgeführt. Daher dürfen
+Anweisungen wie \Macro{setlength} keinesfalls zu dieser Liste hinzugefügt
+werden. Für alle Fehler, die durch die Verwendung von
\Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist} entstehen, ist der Anwender selbst
-verantwortlich. Außerdem sollte diese Möglichkeit nicht als Legitimation dafür
-missverstanden werden, den Schrifteinstellungen alle möglichen Anweisungen
-hinzuzufügen!
+verantwortlich. Außerdem sollte diese Möglichkeit nicht als Legitimation dafür
+missverstanden werden, den Schrifteinstellungen alle möglichen Anweisungen
+hinzuzufügen!
-Für\ChangedAt{v3.24}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} Befehle, deren erstes Argument noch ohne zusätzliche
-Gruppe ausgeführt werden soll, gibt es
+Für\ChangedAt{v3.24}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} Befehle, deren erstes Argument noch ohne zusätzliche
+Gruppe ausgeführt werden soll, gibt es
\Macro{addtokomafontonearglist}. Das angegebene \PName{Makro} wird dabei auf
-\Macro{@firstofone} gesetzt. In der Voreinstellung wird dies für
+\Macro{@firstofone} gesetzt. In der Voreinstellung wird dies für
\Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{MakeLowercase} verwendet.
Soll\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} hingegen ein \PName{Makro} innerhalb von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont} und ihren Geschwistern zusammen mit
seinem ersten Argument ignoriert werden, so ist stattdessen
-\Macro{addtokomafontgobblelist} zu verwenden. Ein Beispiel dafür ist die
-Anweisung \Macro{color}, die einschließlich des Namens der Farbe ignoriert
+\Macro{addtokomafontgobblelist} zu verwenden. Ein Beispiel dafür ist die
+Anweisung \Macro{color}, die einschließlich des Namens der Farbe ignoriert
werden muss und deshalb bereits in der Voreinstellung Teil dieser Liste ist.
Es ist zu beachten, dass sich die hier genannten Voreinstellungen in
-zukünftigen Versionen ändern können. Wenn Sie bestimmte Befehle in einer der
-Liste zwingend benötigen, sollte Sie diese also selbst explizit hinzufügen.%
+zukünftigen Versionen ändern können. Wenn Sie bestimmte Befehle in einer der
+Liste zwingend benötigen, sollte Sie diese also selbst explizit hinzufügen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -394,38 +409,44 @@ Liste zwingend benötigen, sollte Sie diese also selbst explizit hinzufügen.%
\end{Declaration}
Da\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} die Schrift mancher Elemente erst ab
-bestimmten Versionen von \KOMAScript{} geändert werden kann, ist es manchmal
-sinnvoll, vorher testen zu können, ob ein \PName{Element} mit dieser
-Möglichkeit überhaupt existiert. Die Anweisung \Macro{IfExistskomafont} führt
-den \PName{Dann-Code} genau dann aus, wenn das \PName{Element} über
+bestimmten Versionen von \KOMAScript{} geändert werden kann, ist es manchmal
+sinnvoll, vorher testen zu können, ob ein \PName{Element} mit dieser
+Möglichkeit überhaupt existiert. Die Anweisung \Macro{IfExistskomafont} führt
+den \PName{Dann-Code} genau dann aus, wenn das \PName{Element} über
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.newkomafont} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.aliaskomafont} definiert wurde und daher auch mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} oder \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont}
-geändert und mit den \Macro{use\dots komafont}-Anweisungen abgefragt werden
-kann. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt.
+geändert und mit den \Macro{use\dots komafont}-Anweisungen abgefragt werden
+kann. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt.
-Im Unterschied dazu führt
+Im Unterschied dazu führt
\Macro{IfIsAliaskomafont}\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} den
-\PName{Dann-Code} nur aus, wenn \PName{Element} über
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.aliaskomafont} als Alias für ein anderes Element
-definiert wurde. Sowohl für nicht definierte Elemente als auch für mit
+\PName{Dann-Code} nur aus, wenn \PName{Element} über
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.aliaskomafont} als Alias für ein anderes Element
+definiert wurde. Sowohl für nicht definierte Elemente als auch für mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.newkomafont} definierte Elemente wird hingegen der
-\PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt.%
+\PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt.%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Absatzmarkierung}
-% \seclabel{parskip}
+\section{Absatzmarkierung}
+\seclabel{parskip}
+
+Nicht nur aber insbesondere aufgrund der erweiterten Möglichkeiten der
+Absatzmarkierung bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen sollte auf die direkte Änderung
+der Standardlängen \Length{parskip}\IndexLength{parskip},
+\Length{parindent}\IndexLength{parskip} und
+\Length{parfillskip}\IndexLength{parskip} weitgehend verzichtet werden.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{setparsizes}\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand}
\Parameter{Endzeilenleerraum}
\end{Declaration}
-\KOMAScript{} bietet mit dieser Anweisung die Möglichkeit, sowohl den
+\KOMAScript{} bietet mit dieser Anweisung die Möglichkeit, sowohl den
Absatzeinzug als auch den Absatzabstand und den Freiraum am Ende der letzten
Zeile des Absatzes einzustellen. Diese Anweisung ist immer dann zu verwenden,
-wenn die Änderungen auch bei Einstellung
+wenn die Änderungen auch bei Einstellung
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{parskip}{relative} beachtet werden
sollen. \KOMAScript{}\textnote{Beispiel} selbst verwendet sie beispielsweise
in der Form
@@ -433,11 +454,11 @@ in der Form
\setparsizes{0pt}{0pt}{0pt plus 1fil}
\end{lstcode}
um sowohl den Einzug als auch den Abstand abzuschalten und am Ende des
-Absatzes beliebigen Freiraum zu erlauben. Eine solche Maßnahme ist sinnvoll,
+Absatzes beliebigen Freiraum zu erlauben. Eine solche Maßnahme ist sinnvoll,
wenn ein Absatz nur aus einer Box besteht, die ohne Abstand nach oben oder
unten gesetzt werden soll und die gesamte Spaltenbreite einnimmt. Soll
-demgegenüber die Box nur die gesamte Breite einnehmen, jedoch mit der
-aktuellen Einstellung bezüglich des Absatzabstandes gesetzt werden, so ist
+demgegenüber die Box nur die gesamte Breite einnehmen, jedoch mit der
+aktuellen Einstellung bezüglich des Absatzabstandes gesetzt werden, so ist
\begin{lstcode}
\setlength{\parfillskip}{0pt plus 1fil}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -445,12 +466,12 @@ vorzuziehen.
Eine\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} Neuberechnung\IndexCmd{activateareas} oder Reaktivierung
-der Einstellungen für den Satzspiegel und die Ränder (siehe
-\autoref{cha:typearea}) führt seit \KOMAScript~3.17 übrigens immer auch zu
+der Einstellungen für den Satzspiegel und die Ränder (siehe
+\autoref{cha:typearea}) führt seit \KOMAScript~3.17 übrigens immer auch zu
einer Neueinstellung der via \Macro{setparsizes} gesetzten Werte, falls die
-Werte nicht zwischenzeitlich geändert wurden. Dies sollte ein Grund mehr sein,
-nicht an \KOMAScript{} vorbei die Einstellungen zu ändern. Die Neuberechnung
-wird bei einer Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer früheren Version (siehe
+Werte nicht zwischenzeitlich geändert wurden. Dies sollte ein Grund mehr sein,
+nicht an \KOMAScript{} vorbei die Einstellungen zu ändern. Die Neuberechnung
+wird bei einer Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer früheren Version (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions},
\DescPageRef{maincls.option.version}, Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.version}%
@@ -459,13 +480,19 @@ deaktiviert.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Zähler}
-% \seclabel{counter}
+\section{Zähler}
+\seclabel{counter}
+% TODO: Die entsprechenden Erklärungen für die Buchfassung an die Verwendung
+% eines eigenen Abschnitts anpassen.
\LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{3}
-% \subsection{Gliederung}
-% \seclabel{sections}
+\section{Gliederung}
+\seclabel{sections}
+
+Die \KOMAScript-Klassen bieten weitreichende Möglichkeiten, um Einfluss auf
+die Gliederungsebenen und die zugehörigen Überschriften zu nehmen. Selbst die
+Definition neuer Ebenen ist damit möglich.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name}
@@ -476,231 +503,231 @@ deaktiviert.%
Diese\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} Anweisungen dienen dazu, einen neuen Gliederungsbefehl
\Macro{\PName{Name}} zu definieren beziehungsweise einen vorhandenen
-Gliederungsbefehl \Macro{\PName{Name}} zu verändern. Dazu werden über das
+Gliederungsbefehl \Macro{\PName{Name}} zu verändern. Dazu werden über das
optionale Argument \PName{Einstellungen} vorgenommen. Die
\PName{Einstellungen} sind dabei eine durch Komma separierte Liste von
-\PName{Schlüssel}=\PName{Wert}-Zuweisungen. Neben den vom Stil der Überschrift
-unabhängigen Eigenschaften, die
+\PName{Schlüssel}=\PName{Wert}-Zuweisungen. Neben den vom Stil der Überschrift
+unabhängigen Eigenschaften, die
\autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresection.keys},
\autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresection.keys} zu entnehmen sind, gibt
-es auch Eigenschaften, die vom jeweiligen Stil abhängig sind. Derzeit stehen
-die folgenden Stile zur Verfügung:
+es auch Eigenschaften, die vom jeweiligen Stil abhängig sind. Derzeit stehen
+die folgenden Stile zur Verfügung:
\begin{description}\setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{}
\item[\PValue{chapter}] \ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}}ist der Stil\textnote{Gliederungsstil
- \PValue{chapter}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{chapter}} für
- Kapitelüberschriften. Dieser Stil wird in der Voreinstellung für
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} und indirekt für
+ \PValue{chapter}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{chapter}} für
+ Kapitelüberschriften. Dieser Stil wird in der Voreinstellung für
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} und indirekt für
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} verwendet. Neue
- Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden, haben dann aber nicht
- automatisch auch eine \Macro{add\dots}-Variante. Für die Konfiguration der
- vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften aus
+ Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden, haben dann aber nicht
+ automatisch auch eine \Macro{add\dots}-Variante. Für die Konfiguration der
+ vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften aus
\autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys},
\autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys} zur
- Verfügung. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}
+ Verfügung. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}
wird ebenso wie die Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} umkonfiguriert und kann nicht unabhängig davon
- verändert werden. Es ist zu beachten, dass dieser Stil von
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} umkonfiguriert und kann nicht unabhängig davon
+ verändert werden. Es ist zu beachten, dass dieser Stil von
\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} nicht
bereitgestellt wird.
\item[\PValue{part}] \ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}ist der
Stil\textnote{Gliederungsstil
- \PValue{part}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{part}} für
- Teileüberschriften. Dieser Stil wird in der Voreinstellung für
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part} und indirekt für
+ \PValue{part}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{part}} für
+ Teileüberschriften. Dieser Stil wird in der Voreinstellung für
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part} und indirekt für
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart}\IndexCmd{addpart} verwendet. Neue
- Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden, haben dann aber nicht
- automatisch auch eine \Macro{add\dots}-Variante. Für die Konfiguration der
- vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften aus
+ Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden, haben dann aber nicht
+ automatisch auch eine \Macro{add\dots}-Variante. Für die Konfiguration der
+ vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften aus
\autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarepartstyle.keys},
\autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarepartstyle.keys} zur
- Verfügung. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart}
+ Verfügung. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart}
wird ebenso wie die Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} umkonfiguriert und kann nicht unabhängig davon
- verändert werden.
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} umkonfiguriert und kann nicht unabhängig davon
+ verändert werden.
\item[\PValue{section}] ist der Stil\textnote{Gliederungsstil
- \PValue{section}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{section}} für
- Abschnittsüberschriften und tieferer Ebenen. Dieser Stil wird derzeit sowohl
- für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section},
+ \PValue{section}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{section}} für
+ Abschnittsüberschriften und tieferer Ebenen. Dieser Stil wird derzeit sowohl
+ für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection} als auch
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}\IndexCmd{paragraph} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}\IndexCmd{subparagraph} verwendet. Neue
- Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden. Für die Konfiguration
- der vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften
+ Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden. Für die Konfiguration
+ der vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften
aus \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresectionstyle.keys},
\autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresectionstyle.keys} zur
- Verfügung. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.24}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} der Neudefinition sind die \PName{Schlüssel}
+ Verfügung. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.24}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} der Neudefinition sind die \PName{Schlüssel}
\PValue{style}, \PValue{afterskip}, \PValue{beforeskip} und \PValue{level}
- zwingend. Die \PName{Schlüssel}
+ zwingend. Die \PName{Schlüssel}
\PValue{afterindent}\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}, \PValue{font}, \PValue{indent} und
\PValue{runin} sind empfohlen. \PValue{tocindent} und \PValue{tocnumwidth}
- können abhängig vom Namen der Gliederungsebene ebenfalls zwingend sein. Das
+ können abhängig vom Namen der Gliederungsebene ebenfalls zwingend sein. Das
gilt auch, falls ein Befehl, der bisher kein Gliederungsbefehl war, mit
\Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand} zu einem Gliederungsbefehl umdefiniert
wird. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \Macro{addsec} wird ebenso wie die
Sternformen zusammen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} umkonfiguriert und
- kann nicht unabhängig davon verändert werden.
+ kann nicht unabhängig davon verändert werden.
\end{description}
Bei der Definition eines Gliederungsbefehls wird ein gleichnamiges Element
angelegt, falls es noch nicht existiert. Bei \PValue{chapter} und
-\PValue{part} werden ebenso Elemente für die Präfixzeile erzeugt. Die
+\PValue{part} werden ebenso Elemente für die Präfixzeile erzeugt. Die
Schrifteinstellung der Elemente kann mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden.
+\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden.
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Stil unabhängige Eigenschaften bei der Deklaration von
- Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Mögliche vom Stil der Überschrift unabhängige
- \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für die \PName{Eigenschaften} bei der
+ \caption[{Stil unabhängige Eigenschaften bei der Deklaration von
+ Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Mögliche vom Stil der Überschrift unabhängige
+ \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für die \PName{Eigenschaften} bei der
Deklaration von Gliederungsbefehlen}%
\label{tab:maincls-experts.declaresection.keys}%
\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{llX}
\toprule
- \PName{Schlüssel}
+ \PName{Schlüssel}
& \PName{Wert}
& Bedeutung \\
\midrule
\PValue{counterwithin}
- & \PName{Zählername}
- & Der zur Gliederungsebene gehörende Zähler soll vom als Wert angegebenen
- Zähler abhängig sein. Wird \PName{Zählername} über \Macro{stepcounter}
- oder \Macro{refstepcounter} erhöht, so wird der zur Gliederungsebene
- gehörende Zähler auf 0 zurückgesetzt. Darüber hinaus wird
- \Macro{the\PName{Zählername}}, gefolgt von einem Punkt in der Ausgabe
- des zur Gliederungsebene gehörenden Zählers vorangestellt.\\
+ & \PName{Zählername}
+ & Der zur Gliederungsebene gehörende Zähler soll vom als Wert angegebenen
+ Zähler abhängig sein. Wird \PName{Zählername} über \Macro{stepcounter}
+ oder \Macro{refstepcounter} erhöht, so wird der zur Gliederungsebene
+ gehörende Zähler auf 0 zurückgesetzt. Darüber hinaus wird
+ \Macro{the\PName{Zählername}}, gefolgt von einem Punkt in der Ausgabe
+ des zur Gliederungsebene gehörenden Zählers vorangestellt.\\
\PValue{counterwithout}%
\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
- & \PName{Zählername}
- & Hebt eine früher vorgenommene \PValue{counterwithin}-Einstellung auf und
- ist daher nur bei Änderung vorhandener Gliederungsbefehle sinnvoll.\\
+ & \PName{Zählername}
+ & Hebt eine früher vorgenommene \PValue{counterwithin}-Einstellung auf und
+ ist daher nur bei Änderung vorhandener Gliederungsbefehle sinnvoll.\\
\PValue{expandtopt}
& \PName{Schalter}
& Ist dieser Schalter aktiv, so werden alle in den \PName{Einstellungen}
- nachfolgend angegebenen Werte für Längen vollständig expandiert,
+ nachfolgend angegebenen Werte für Längen vollständig expandiert,
ausgewertet und in \texttt{pt} umgerechnet gespeichert. Ist der
Schalter nicht aktiv, so werden alle nachfolgend angegebenen
- Werte für Längen nur testweise expandiert und ausgewertet, aber
- lediglich expandiert gespeichert. Es werden die Werte für einfache
+ Werte für Längen nur testweise expandiert und ausgewertet, aber
+ lediglich expandiert gespeichert. Es werden die Werte für einfache
Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verstanden.\\
\PValue{level}
& \PName{Ganzzahl}
- & Nummerischer Wert der Gliederungsebene (siehe Zähler
+ & Nummerischer Wert der Gliederungsebene (siehe Zähler
\DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}, \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}); der Wert sollte eindeutig
- sein und ist für neue Ebenen zwingend.\\
+ sein und ist für neue Ebenen zwingend.\\
\PValue{style}
& \PName{Name}
- & Legt den Stil der Überschrift fest und ist für neue Ebenen zwingend.\\
+ & Legt den Stil der Überschrift fest und ist für neue Ebenen zwingend.\\
\PValue{tocstyle}%
\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
& \PName{Name}
- & Legt den Stil des zur Überschrift gehörenden Verzeichniseintrags fest.
- Es können alle bisher definierten Verzeichniseintragsstile (siehe
+ & Legt den Stil des zur Überschrift gehörenden Verzeichniseintrags fest.
+ Es können alle bisher definierten Verzeichniseintragsstile (siehe
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}) verwendet werden. Ein leerer
\PName{Name} verhindert die Umdefinierung des Befehls
- \Macro{l@\dots} für die Verzeichniseinträge.\\
+ \Macro{l@\dots} für die Verzeichniseinträge.\\
\PValue{toc\PName{Option}}%
\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
& \PName{Wert}
- & Weitere Optionen in Abhängigkeit vom via \Option{tocstyle} gewählten
+ & Weitere Optionen in Abhängigkeit vom via \Option{tocstyle} gewählten
Verzeichniseintragsstil. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab
- \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. Für die von
+ \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. Für die von
\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} vordefinierten
Verzeichniseintragsstile finden sich die als \PName{Option} verwendbaren
Attribute in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, ab
\autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}.\\
% \PValue{tocindent}
- % & \PName{Länge}
- % & Der horizontale Einzug des zum Gliederungsbefehls gehörenden
- % Eintrags ins Inhaltsverzeichnis, falls ein solcher abhängig von
+ % & \PName{Länge}
+ % & Der horizontale Einzug des zum Gliederungsbefehls gehörenden
+ % Eintrags ins Inhaltsverzeichnis, falls ein solcher abhängig von
% \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
% \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}) erzeugt wird.\\
% \PValue{toclevel}
% & \PName{Ganzzahl}
- % & Die Ebene des zum Gliederungsbefehl gehörenden Eintrags ins
+ % & Die Ebene des zum Gliederungsbefehl gehörenden Eintrags ins
% Inhaltsverzeichnis, falls diese von \PValue{level} abweichen soll
% (siehe auch \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} in
% \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}). \\
% PValue{tocnumwidth}
- % & \PName{Länge}
- % & Die Breite, die für die Gliederungsnummer im zum Gliederungsbefehl
- % gehörenden Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis reserviert wird.\\
+ % & \PName{Länge}
+ % & Die Breite, die für die Gliederungsnummer im zum Gliederungsbefehl
+ % gehörenden Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis reserviert wird.\\
\bottomrule
\end{tabularx}
\end{table}
\begin{table}
\caption[{Eigenschaften des Stils \PValue{section} bei der Deklaration von
- Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Zusätzliche \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für
+ Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Zusätzliche \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für
die \PName{Eigenschaften} bei der Deklaration von Gliederungsbefehlen des
Stils \PValue{section}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{section}}}%
\label{tab:maincls-experts.declaresectionstyle.keys}%
\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{llX}
\toprule
- \PName{Schlüssel} & \PName{Wert} & Bedeutung \\
+ \PName{Schlüssel} & \PName{Wert} & Bedeutung \\
\midrule
\PValue{afterindent}%
\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
& \PName{Schalter}
& Es wird bestimmt, ob auf die erste Zeile nach einer freistehenden
- Überschrift (siehe \PValue{runin}) der aktuelle Absatzeinzug angewendet
+ Ãœberschrift (siehe \PValue{runin}) der aktuelle Absatzeinzug angewendet
wird. Bei der Voreinstellung \PValue{bysign} bestimmt das Vorzeichen von
- \PValue{beforeskip} das Verhalten. Ein negativer Wert für
- \PValue{beforeskip} bewirkt dann, dass der Absatzeinzug entfällt. Mit
- den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+ \PValue{beforeskip} das Verhalten. Ein negativer Wert für
+ \PValue{beforeskip} bewirkt dann, dass der Absatzeinzug entfällt. Mit
+ den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}) kann die Anwendung des aktuellen
Absatzeinzugs explizit aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden.\\
\PValue{afterskip}
- & \PName{Länge}
+ & \PName{Länge}
& Im Fall einer Spitzmarke (siehe \PValue{runin}) ist der Betrag der
- \PName{Länge} der horizontale Abstand nach der Überschrift. Es
- wird in diesem Fall also immer ein positiver Abstand eingefügt. Im Fall
- einer freistehenden Überschrift ist \PName{Länge} der vertikale Abstand
- nach der Überschrift. Ist \OptionValue{runin}{bysign}, so
- führt ein positiver Wert zu einer freistehenden Überschrift, während
- ein negativer Wert oder Null zu einer Spitzmarke führt.\\
+ \PName{Länge} der horizontale Abstand nach der Überschrift. Es
+ wird in diesem Fall also immer ein positiver Abstand eingefügt. Im Fall
+ einer freistehenden Überschrift ist \PName{Länge} der vertikale Abstand
+ nach der Ãœberschrift. Ist \OptionValue{runin}{bysign}, so
+ führt ein positiver Wert zu einer freistehenden Überschrift, während
+ ein negativer Wert oder Null zu einer Spitzmarke führt.\\
\PValue{beforeskip}
- & \PName{Länge}
- & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Überschrift an. Ist
- \OptionValue{afterindent}{bysign}, so wird für den Abstand der Betrag
- von \PName{Länge} verwendet, es wird also trotzdem ein positiver
- Abstand eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten in diesem Fall, dass ein
- Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift entfällt.\\
+ & \PName{Länge}
+ & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Ãœberschrift an. Ist
+ \OptionValue{afterindent}{bysign}, so wird für den Abstand der Betrag
+ von \PName{Länge} verwendet, es wird also trotzdem ein positiver
+ Abstand eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten in diesem Fall, dass ein
+ Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift entfällt.\\
\PValue{font}
& \PName{Befehle}
- & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
+ & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
\DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} bei der Ausgabe der
- Überschrift verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle}
- erlaubt, die auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element des
+ Ãœberschrift verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle}
+ erlaubt, die auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element des
Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\
\PValue{indent}
- & \PName{Länge}
+ & \PName{Länge}
& Einzug vom linken Rand vor der Ausgabe der Nummer und des Textes
- der Überschrift.\\
+ der Ãœberschrift.\\
\PValue{runin}%
\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
& \PName{Schalter}
- & Es wird bestimmt, ob die Überschrift als Spitzmarke\iffree{ (am
+ & Es wird bestimmt, ob die Ãœberschrift als Spitzmarke\iffree{ (am
Zeilenanfang)}{} oder freistehend gesetzt wird. \iffree{}{Bei einer
- Spitzmarke schließt sich der nachfolgende Text direkt an die
- Überschrift an, während bei einer freistehenden Überschrift erst noch
+ Spitzmarke schließt sich der nachfolgende Text direkt an die
+ Überschrift an, während bei einer freistehenden Überschrift erst noch
ein Absatz und ein vertikaler Abstand (siehe \PValue{afterskip})
folgt. }%
Bei der Voreinstellung \PValue{bysign} bestimmt das Vorzeichen von
- \PValue{afterskip} das Verhalten. Ein positiver Wert für
- \PValue{afterskip} bewirkt dann eine freistehende Überschrift.
- Darüber hinaus kann mit den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe
+ \PValue{afterskip} das Verhalten. Ein positiver Wert für
+ \PValue{afterskip} bewirkt dann eine freistehende Ãœberschrift.
+ Darüber hinaus kann mit den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch})
eine Spitzmarke explizit aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden.\\
\bottomrule
@@ -709,62 +736,62 @@ Schrifteinstellung der Elemente kann mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
\begin{table}
\caption[{Eigenschaften des Stils \PValue{chapter} bei der Konfiguration von
- Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Zusätzliche \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für
+ Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Zusätzliche \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für
die \PName{Eigenschaften} bei der Konfiguration von Gliederungsbefehlen des
Stils \PValue{chapter}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{chapter}}}%
\label{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys}%
\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{llX}
\toprule
- \PName{Schlüssel} & \PName{Wert} & Bedeutung \\
+ \PName{Schlüssel} & \PName{Wert} & Bedeutung \\
\midrule
\PValue{afterindent}%
\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
& \PName{Schalter}
- & Es wird bestimmt, ob auf die erste Zeile nach der Überschrift der
+ & Es wird bestimmt, ob auf die erste Zeile nach der Ãœberschrift der
aktuelle Absatzeinzug angewendet wird. Bei der Voreinstellung
\PValue{bysign} bestimmt das Vorzeichen von \PValue{beforeskip} das
- Verhalten. Ein negativer Wert für \PValue{beforeskip} bewirkt dann, dass
- der Absatzeinzug entfällt. Mit den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe
+ Verhalten. Ein negativer Wert für \PValue{beforeskip} bewirkt dann, dass
+ der Absatzeinzug entfällt. Mit den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}) kann
die Anwendung des aktuellen Absatzeinzugs explizit aktiviert oder
deaktiviert werden.\\
\PValue{afterskip}%
\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
- & \PName{Länge}
- & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand nach der Überschrift an.\\
+ & \PName{Länge}
+ & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand nach der Ãœberschrift an.\\
\PValue{beforeskip}
- & \PName{Länge}
- & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Überschrift an. Ist
- \OptionValue{afterindent}{bysign}, so wird für den Abstand der Betrag
- von \PName{Länge} verwendet, es wird also trotzdem ein positiver
- Abstand eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten in diesem Fall, dass ein
- Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift entfällt.\\
+ & \PName{Länge}
+ & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Ãœberschrift an. Ist
+ \OptionValue{afterindent}{bysign}, so wird für den Abstand der Betrag
+ von \PName{Länge} verwendet, es wird also trotzdem ein positiver
+ Abstand eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten in diesem Fall, dass ein
+ Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift entfällt.\\
\PValue{font}
& \PName{Befehle}
- & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
+ & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
\DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} bei der Ausgabe der
- Überschrift verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle}
- erlaubt, die auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element des
+ Ãœberschrift verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle}
+ erlaubt, die auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element des
Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\
\PValue{innerskip}
- & \PName{Länge}
- & Der vertikale Abstand zwischen Präfixzeile und Text der
- Überschrift, falls eine Präfixzeile verwendet wird.\\
+ & \PName{Länge}
+ & Der vertikale Abstand zwischen Präfixzeile und Text der
+ Überschrift, falls eine Präfixzeile verwendet wird.\\
\PValue{pagestyle}
& \PName{Seitenstil}
- & Der Name des Seitenstils, der für die Seite mit der Überschrift
- verwendet werden soll. Es findet keine Überprüfung statt, ob der
- angegebene \PName{Seitenstil} gültig ist. Fehlerhafte Angaben führen
+ & Der Name des Seitenstils, der für die Seite mit der Überschrift
+ verwendet werden soll. Es findet keine Überprüfung statt, ob der
+ angegebene \PName{Seitenstil} gültig ist. Fehlerhafte Angaben führen
daher zu Fehlermeldungen bei Verwendung des Gliederungsbefehls.\\
\PValue{prefixfont}
& \PName{Befehle}
- & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
+ & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
\DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} und dem Element des
- Gliederungsbefehls bei der Ausgabe einer Präfixzeile in der Überschrift
+ Gliederungsbefehls bei der Ausgabe einer Präfixzeile in der Überschrift
verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle} erlaubt, die
- auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont}für das Element der Präfixzeile des
+ auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont}für das Element der Präfixzeile des
Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\
\bottomrule
\end{tabularx}
@@ -772,13 +799,13 @@ Schrifteinstellung der Elemente kann mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
\begin{table}
\caption[{Eigenschaften des Stils \PValue{part} bei der Konfiguration von
- Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Zusätzliche \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für
+ Gliederungsbefehlen}]{Zusätzliche \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Werte} für
die \PName{Eigenschaften} bei der Konfiguration von Gliederungsbefehlen des
Stils \PValue{part}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{part}}}%
\label{tab:maincls-experts.declarepartstyle.keys}%
\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{llX}
\toprule
- \PName{Schlüssel}
+ \PName{Schlüssel}
& \PName{Wert}
& Bedeutung \\
\midrule
@@ -787,55 +814,55 @@ Schrifteinstellung der Elemente kann mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
\Class{scrartcl}}%
& \PName{Schalter}
& Es wird bestimmt, ob auf die erste Zeile nach der
- Überschrift der aktuelle Absatzeinzug angewendet
+ Ãœberschrift der aktuelle Absatzeinzug angewendet
wird. Bei der Einstellung \PValue{bysign} bestimmt das Vorzeichen von
- \PValue{beforeskip} das Verhalten. Ein negativer Wert für
- \PValue{beforeskip} bewirkt dann, dass der Absatzeinzug entfällt. Mit
- den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+ \PValue{beforeskip} das Verhalten. Ein negativer Wert für
+ \PValue{beforeskip} bewirkt dann, dass der Absatzeinzug entfällt. Mit
+ den Werten für einfache Schalter (siehe \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}) kann die Anwendung des aktuellen
Absatzeinzugs explizit aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden. Aus
- Kompatibilitätsgründen ist die Voreinstellung
- für \Class{scrartcl} \PValue{false}, für \Class{scrbook} und
+ Kompatibilitätsgründen ist die Voreinstellung
+ für \Class{scrartcl} \PValue{false}, für \Class{scrbook} und
\Class{scrreprt} \PValue{true}.\\
\PValue{afterskip}
- & \PName{Länge}
- & Der Betrag gibt den vertikalen Abstand nach der Überschrift an.\\
+ & \PName{Länge}
+ & Der Betrag gibt den vertikalen Abstand nach der Ãœberschrift an.\\
\PValue{beforeskip}
- & \PName{Länge}
- & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Überschrift an. Ist
- \OptionValue{afterindent}{bysign}, so wird für den Abstand der Betrag
- von \PName{Länge} verwendet, es wird also trotzdem ein positiver
- Abstand eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten in diesem Fall, dass ein
- Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift entfällt.\\
+ & \PName{Länge}
+ & Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Ãœberschrift an. Ist
+ \OptionValue{afterindent}{bysign}, so wird für den Abstand der Betrag
+ von \PName{Länge} verwendet, es wird also trotzdem ein positiver
+ Abstand eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten in diesem Fall, dass ein
+ Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift entfällt.\\
\PValue{font}
& \PName{Befehle}
- & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
+ & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
\DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} bei der Ausgabe der
- Überschrift verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle}
- erlaubt, die auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element des
+ Ãœberschrift verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle}
+ erlaubt, die auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element des
Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\
\PValue{innerskip}
- & \PName{Länge}
+ & \PName{Länge}
& %\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
- Der vertikale Abstand zwischen Präfixzeile und Text der Überschrift bei
+ Der vertikale Abstand zwischen Präfixzeile und Text der Überschrift bei
\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}.\\
\PValue{pagestyle}
& \PName{Seitenstil}
& %\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
- Der Name des Seitenstils, der für die Seite mit der Überschrift
- verwendet werden soll. Es findet keine Überprüfung statt, ob der
- angegebene \PName{Seitenstil} gültig ist. Fehlerhafte Angaben führen
+ Der Name des Seitenstils, der für die Seite mit der Überschrift
+ verwendet werden soll. Es findet keine Überprüfung statt, ob der
+ angegebene \PName{Seitenstil} gültig ist. Fehlerhafte Angaben führen
daher zu Fehlermeldungen bei Verwendung des Gliederungsbefehls. Diese
- Möglichkeit existiert nur bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}. \\
+ Möglichkeit existiert nur bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}. \\
\PValue{prefixfont}
& \PName{Befehle}
- & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
+ & Die Schrifteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element
\DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} und dem Element des
- Gliederungsbefehls bei der Ausgabe einer Präfixzeile in der Überschrift
+ Gliederungsbefehls bei der Ausgabe einer Präfixzeile in der Überschrift
verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind alle \PName{Befehle} erlaubt, die
- auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element der Präfixzeile des
+ auch über \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} für das Element der Präfixzeile des
Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\
\bottomrule
\end{tabularx}
@@ -846,66 +873,66 @@ Gliederungsbefehls. Ist derselbe \PName{Name} von \TeX{} bereits anderweitig
belegt, so wird ein Fehler ausgegeben und es findet keine Umdefinierung
statt.
-\Macro{ProvideSectionSommand} verhält sich ähnlich, gibt aber keine
+\Macro{ProvideSectionSommand} verhält sich ähnlich, gibt aber keine
Fehlermeldung aus.
\Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand} kann hingegen nur verwendet werden, um eine
existierende Anweisung zu einem Gliederungsbefehl mit den angegebenen
-\PName{Eigenschaften} zu ändern. Dabei wird nicht überprüft, ob
+\PName{Eigenschaften} zu ändern. Dabei wird nicht überprüft, ob
\Macro{\PName{Name}} bereits zuvor ein Gliederungsbefehl war. Es muss nur ein
von \TeX{} bereits belegter \PName{Name} sein.
-Bei \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} findet keinerlei Überprüfung statt, ob
+Bei \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} findet keinerlei Überprüfung statt, ob
\PName{Name} von \TeX{} bereits anderweitig belegt ist. Stattdessen wird der
Gliederungsbefehl \Macro{\PName{Name}} unbedingt entsprechend der angegebenen
\PName{Eigenschaften} definiert.
-Zu jeder Gliederungsanweisung gehört außerdem ein Zähler: \PName{Name}, der
+Zu jeder Gliederungsanweisung gehört außerdem ein Zähler: \PName{Name}, der
bei Bedarf von allen vier Befehlen mit \Macro{newcounter} neu angelegt
-wird. Dasselbe gilt für die Ausgabe des Zählers: \Macro{the\PName{Name}}, die
-Formatierung des Zählers: \Macro{\PName{Name}format}, die Anweisung zur
+wird. Dasselbe gilt für die Ausgabe des Zählers: \Macro{the\PName{Name}}, die
+Formatierung des Zählers: \Macro{\PName{Name}format}, die Anweisung zur
Erstellung eines Kolumnentitels: \Macro{\PName{Name}mark}, die dabei
-verwendete Formatierung des Zählers: \Macro{\PName{Name}markformat}, die oben
-erwähnten Elemente: \FontElement{\PName{Name}} und gegebenenfalls
+verwendete Formatierung des Zählers: \Macro{\PName{Name}markformat}, die oben
+erwähnten Elemente: \FontElement{\PName{Name}} und gegebenenfalls
\FontElement{\PName{Name}prefix}, die nummerische Gliederungsebene:
\Macro{\PName{Name}numdepth}. Die Anweisung \Macro{\PName{Name}mark} wird
gegebenenfalls so vordefiniert, dass kein Kolumnentitel erzeugt wird. Die
-Ausgabe des Zählers, \Macro{\PName{the}mark}, wird als arabische Zahl
-vordefiniert. Wird über den \PName{Schlüssel} \PValue{counterwithin} der
-Zähler als von einem anderen Zähler abhängig definiert, so wird in der Ausgabe
-dieser andere Zähler mit einem Punkt getrennt vorangestellt.
+Ausgabe des Zählers, \Macro{\PName{the}mark}, wird als arabische Zahl
+vordefiniert. Wird über den \PName{Schlüssel} \PValue{counterwithin} der
+Zähler als von einem anderen Zähler abhängig definiert, so wird in der Ausgabe
+dieser andere Zähler mit einem Punkt getrennt vorangestellt.
Neben\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} dem Gliederungsbefehl selbst wird auch ein Befehl für
-einen Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis definiert. Dafür wird auf das Paket
+ \Class{scrartcl}} dem Gliederungsbefehl selbst wird auch ein Befehl für
+einen Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis definiert. Dafür wird auf das Paket
\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}}\IndexPackage{tocbasic}
-zurückgegriffen. Der Stil des Verzeichniseintrags wird über die Eigenschaft
+zurückgegriffen. Der Stil des Verzeichniseintrags wird über die Eigenschaft
\PValue{tocstyle} festgelegt. Wird hier mit \OptionValue{tocstyle}{} oder
\OptionValue{tocstyle}{\{\}} ein leerer \PName{Name} angegeben, so erfolgt
-keine Umdefinierung des Befehls für den Verzeichniseintrag. Das ist
-beispielsweise dann wichtig, wenn Sie ein zusätzliches Paket zur Modifikation
+keine Umdefinierung des Befehls für den Verzeichniseintrag. Das ist
+beispielsweise dann wichtig, wenn Sie ein zusätzliches Paket zur Modifikation
des Inhaltsverzeichnisses verwenden. Fehlt die Eigenschaft \PValue{tocstyle},
so wird bei der Umdefinierung der bisherige Stil erneut verwendet.
Unterschiedliche\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Stile für Verzeichniseinträge haben
-unterschiedliche zusätzliche Eigenschaften. Diese können, mit dem Präfix
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Stile für Verzeichniseinträge haben
+unterschiedliche zusätzliche Eigenschaften. Diese können, mit dem Präfix
\PValue{toc} versehen, direkt mit angegeben werden. So kann beispielsweise die
Ebene des Verzeichniseintrags, die bei allen von den \KOMAScript-Klassen und
\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} definierten Stilen als Eigenschaft
\PValue{level} bekannt ist, mit \PValue{toclevel} gesetzt werden, der Einzug
-des Eintrags, \PValue{indent}, über \PValue{tocindent} und die für die Nummer
-reservierte Breite, \PValue{numwidth}, mit \PValue{tocnumwidth}. Für weitere
-Eigenschaften der Verzeichniseinträge siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab
+des Eintrags, \PValue{indent}, über \PValue{tocindent} und die für die Nummer
+reservierte Breite, \PValue{numwidth}, mit \PValue{tocnumwidth}. Für weitere
+Eigenschaften der Verzeichniseinträge siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab
Seite \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}.
\begin{Example}
- Aus unerfindlichen Gründen sollen die Überschriften von
+ Aus unerfindlichen Gründen sollen die Überschriften von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} nicht mehr als Spitzmarken, sondern als
- Überschriften ähnlich \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection} umdefiniert
- werden. Dabei soll über der Überschrift ein kleiner Abstand von 10\,pt und
- unter der Überschrift kein zusätzlicher Abstand eingefügt werden. Das wäre
+ Überschriften ähnlich \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection} umdefiniert
+ werden. Dabei soll über der Überschrift ein kleiner Abstand von 10\,pt und
+ unter der Überschrift kein zusätzlicher Abstand eingefügt werden. Das wäre
bereits mit
\begin{lstcode}
\RedeclareSectionCommand[%
@@ -913,18 +940,18 @@ Seite \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}.
afterskip=1sp%
]{paragraph}
\end{lstcode}
- möglich. Durch den negativen Wert bei \PValue{beforeskip} wird der vertikale
- Abstand über der Überschrift erzeugt und gleichzeitig der Einzug des ersten
- Abschnitts nach der Überschrift abgeschaltet. Obwohl eigentlich nach der
- Überschrift kein vertikaler Abstand gewünscht wird, wurde als Wert hier
+ möglich. Durch den negativen Wert bei \PValue{beforeskip} wird der vertikale
+ Abstand über der Überschrift erzeugt und gleichzeitig der Einzug des ersten
+ Abschnitts nach der Ãœberschrift abgeschaltet. Obwohl eigentlich nach der
+ Überschrift kein vertikaler Abstand gewünscht wird, wurde als Wert hier
1\,sp angegeben. Der Grund ist einfach: Einen Wert von 0\,pt betrachtet
\LaTeX{} an dieser Stelle nicht als positiven Wert und erzeugt damit eine
- Überschrift in der Form einer Spitzmarke. Der kleinste positive Wert ist
+ Ãœberschrift in der Form einer Spitzmarke. Der kleinste positive Wert ist
1\,sp.
- In der Regel ist es für den vertikalen Ausgleich (siehe
+ In der Regel ist es für den vertikalen Ausgleich (siehe
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}, \autoref{sec:maincls.typearea},
- \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}) besser, wenn man die Abstände
+ \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}) besser, wenn man die Abstände
mit etwas Spielraum, dem sogenannten Leim, versieht:
\begin{lstcode}
\RedeclareSectionCommand[%
@@ -932,18 +959,18 @@ Seite \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}.
afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp%
]{paragraph}
\end{lstcode}
- Dabei ist zu beachten, dass natürlich auch der Leim bei der Anwendung als
+ Dabei ist zu beachten, dass natürlich auch der Leim bei der Anwendung als
vertikaler Abstand das Vorzeichen wechselt, also bei \PValue{beforeskip} im
Beispiel negativ angegeben wird. Gleichzeitig wurde die Gelegenheit genutzt,
- über den Leim bei \PValue{afterskip} dafür zu sorgen, dass der Abstand dort
- gegebenenfalls tatsächlich bis auf 0 schrumpft.
+ über den Leim bei \PValue{afterskip} dafür zu sorgen, dass der Abstand dort
+ gegebenenfalls tatsächlich bis auf 0 schrumpft.
\end{Example}
-Dass im Beispiel nur die Schlüssel \PValue{beforeskip} und \PValue{afterskip}
+Dass im Beispiel nur die Schlüssel \PValue{beforeskip} und \PValue{afterskip}
verwendet werden mussten, liegt daran, dass seit \KOMAScript{} 3.15
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} intern bereits mit
-\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert wird und daher die übrigen
-Einstellungen unverändert übernommen werden können. Die Originaldefinition von
+\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert wird und daher die übrigen
+Einstellungen unverändert übernommen werden können. Die Originaldefinition von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} entspricht bei \Class{scrartcl}:
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareSectionCommand[%
@@ -960,17 +987,17 @@ Einstellungen unverändert übernommen werden können. Die Originaldefinition von
Bei \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrbook} werden teilweise abweichende Werte
verwendet.
-Für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} sind einige Einstellungen für die
-Überschriften von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} (siehe
+Für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} sind einige Einstellungen für die
+Ãœberschriften von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.headings})
-abhängig. Diese abhängigen Einstellungen sind in
-\autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} zu finden. Eine Übersicht über alle
+abhängig. Diese abhängigen Einstellungen sind in
+\autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} zu finden. Eine Übersicht über alle
Voreinstellungen bietet \autoref{tab:maincls.section.defaults}. Es ist zu
beachten, dass dabei \PValue{1ex} und \Length{baselineskip} von der
-voreingestellten Größe der Überschrift beziehungsweise des
-Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags abhängig sind. Weitere
+voreingestellten Größe der Überschrift beziehungsweise des
+Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags abhängig sind. Weitere
Voreinstellungen\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} für die Stile der Verzeichniseinträge
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} für die Stile der Verzeichniseinträge
sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}} ab
\autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} zu entnehmen.
@@ -981,12 +1008,12 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Voreinstellungen für die Kapitelüberschriften von \Class{scrbook}
- und \Class{scrreprt} in Abhängigkeit von Option
+ [{Voreinstellungen für die Kapitelüberschriften von \Class{scrbook}
+ und \Class{scrreprt} in Abhängigkeit von Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.headings}}]
{\hskip 0pt plus .5em
- Voreinstellungen für die Kapitelüberschriften von \Class{scrbook}
- und \Class{scrreprt} in Abhängigkeit von Option
+ Voreinstellungen für die Kapitelüberschriften von \Class{scrbook}
+ und \Class{scrreprt} in Abhängigkeit von Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.headings}%
\label{tab:maincls.chapter.skips}}
[l]
@@ -1034,11 +1061,11 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}%
%begin{table}
% \centering
\begin{longtable}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \caption{Voreinstellungen für die Formatierung der Überschriften von
+ \caption{Voreinstellungen für die Formatierung der Überschriften von
\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}}%
\label{tab:maincls.section.defaults}\\
\endfirsthead
- \caption[]{Voreinstellungen für die Formatierung der Überschriften von
+ \caption[]{Voreinstellungen für die Formatierung der Überschriften von
\Class{scrbook} und
\Class{scrreprt} \emph{(Fortsetzung)}}\\
\addlinespace[-\normalbaselineskip] \endhead
@@ -1190,10 +1217,10 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}%
\end{tabularx}
\end{longtable}
%end{table}
-Das in den Einstellungen für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph} verwendete
-interne Makro \Macro{scr@parindent} ist übrigens, der per Option
+Das in den Einstellungen für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph} verwendete
+interne Makro \Macro{scr@parindent} ist übrigens, der per Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.parskip} oder Befehl
-\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes} eingestellte Absatzeinzug.
+\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes} eingestellte Absatzeinzug.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1208,31 +1235,46 @@ interne Makro \Macro{scr@parindent} ist übrigens, der per Option
\Parameter{Namensliste}
\end{Declaration}
Diese\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisungen können gleich eine ganze Reihe von
-Gliederungsbefehlen definieren oder ändern. Dabei ist \PName{Namensliste} eine
+ \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisungen können gleich eine ganze Reihe von
+Gliederungsbefehlen definieren oder ändern. Dabei ist \PName{Namensliste} eine
durch Komma separierte Liste von Namen der Gliederungsbefehle.
Diese Anweisungen unterscheiden sich in zwei weiteren Punkten von den zuvor
-erklärten Anweisungen zur Definition oder Änderung eines einzelnen
+erklärten Anweisungen zur Definition oder Änderung eines einzelnen
Gliederungsbefehls. Zum einen wird im Fehlerfall, also wenn eine Anweisung bei
\Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommands} bereits zuvor existierte oder bei
\Macro{RedeclareSectionCommands} noch nicht existierte, die Definition dennoch
-vorgenommen. Ein entsprechender Fehler wird natürlich trotzdem gemeldet.
+vorgenommen. Ein entsprechender Fehler wird natürlich trotzdem gemeldet.
Zum anderen gibt es eine weitere Einstellung,
\important{\PValue{increaselevel}}\OptionVName{increaselevel}{Ganzzahl}.
-Damit ändert sich die Bedeutung von \PValue{level} und \PValue{toclevel}
+Damit ändert sich die Bedeutung von \PValue{level} und \PValue{toclevel}
(siehe \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresection.keys},
\autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresection.keys}) dahingehend, dass deren
Werte lediglich als \PName{Einstellungen} des ersten Gliederungsbefehls aus
-der \PName{Namensliste} dienen. Für alle weiteren Gliederungsbefehle werden die
+der \PName{Namensliste} dienen. Für alle weiteren Gliederungsbefehle werden die
Werte von \PValue{level} und \PValue{toclevel} um den Wert von
-\PValue{increaselevel} erhöht. Wurde die Einstellung \PValue{increaselevel}
+\PValue{increaselevel} erhöht. Wurde die Einstellung \PValue{increaselevel}
ohne Wertzuweisung verwendet, so wird der Wert 1 angenommen.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{IfSectionCommandStyleIs}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Stil}
+ \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}
+\end{Declaration}
+In\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
+seltenen Fällen ist es nützlich, testen zu können, ob ein Gliederungsbefehl
+einem bestimmten \PName{Stil} angehört. Ist der mittels \PName{Name} bestimmte
+Gliederungsbefehl aus \KOMAScript-Sicht derzeit mit dem angebenen \PName{Stil}
+definiert, so wird der \PName{Dann-Code} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
+\PName{Sonst-Code}. Ist \Macro{\PName{Name}} nicht definiert oder kein mit
+\KOMAScript-Mitteln definierter Gliederungsbefehl, so wird dies als Fehler
+gemeldet.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}
\Macro{chapterheadmidvskip}
\Macro{chapterheadendvskip}
@@ -1249,8 +1291,8 @@ Diese\important[i]{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\\
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.part*}\\
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap*}\\
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart*}} Anweisungen werden innerhalb von
-Überschriften der zuvor erklärten Stile \PValue{chapter} und \PValue{part} und
-damit für die Definition der Überschriften
+Überschriften der zuvor erklärten Stile \PValue{chapter} und \PValue{part} und
+damit für die Definition der Überschriften
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap},
@@ -1259,34 +1301,34 @@ damit für die Definition der Überschriften
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.part*}\IndexCmd{part*},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap*}\IndexCmd{addchap*},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart*}\IndexCmd{addpart*} verwendet. Dabei ist
-\Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} eine Anweisung, die dafür vorgesehen ist, vor
-der Kapitelüberschrift einen vertikalen Abstand einzufügen. Entsprechend ist
-\Macro{chapterheadendvskip} eine Anweisung, die dafür vorgesehen ist, nach der
-Kapitelüberschrift einen vertikalen Abstand
-einzufügen. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}
-Kapitelüberschriften mit eigener Nummernzeile (siehe Option
+\Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} eine Anweisung, die dafür vorgesehen ist, vor
+der Kapitelüberschrift einen vertikalen Abstand einzufügen. Entsprechend ist
+\Macro{chapterheadendvskip} eine Anweisung, die dafür vorgesehen ist, nach der
+Kapitelüberschrift einen vertikalen Abstand
+einzufügen. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}
+Kapitelüberschriften mit eigener Nummernzeile (siehe Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}) wird zwischen der Nummernzeile und
-der eigentlichen Überschrift außerdem \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} ausgeführt.
+der eigentlichen Überschrift außerdem \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} ausgeführt.
-Für das Einfügen der vertikalen Abstände über und unter Teile-Überschriften
+Für das Einfügen der vertikalen Abstände über und unter Teile-Überschriften
sind die Anweisungen \Macro{partheadstartvskip} und \Macro{partheadendvskip}
vorgesehen. Dabei wird ein Seitenumbruch als Teil des vertikalen Abstandes
interpretiert. Ein solcher Seitenumbruch ist in der Voreinstellung sowohl bei
\Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} als auch
\Class{scrreprt} in der Definition von \Macro{partheadendvskip} enthalten. Die
-Anweisung \Macro{partheadmidvskip} ist für den Abstand zwischen der
-Teile-Nummer und dem Text der Teile-Überschrift vorgesehen. Die Anweisung
+Anweisung \Macro{partheadmidvskip} ist für den Abstand zwischen der
+Teile-Nummer und dem Text der Teile-Ãœberschrift vorgesehen. Die Anweisung
\Macro{partheademptypage}\ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}} wird bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
-gegebenenfalls für die leere Seite nach der Überschrift verwendet.
+gegebenenfalls für die leere Seite nach der Überschrift verwendet.
Die Voreinstellungen der sieben Anweisungen sind seit
\KOMAScript~3.15\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} von der Einstellung von Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.headings} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
-\DescPageRef{maincls.option.headings}) unabhängig. Die Original-Definitionen
-für die Kapitelüberschriften ab
+\DescPageRef{maincls.option.headings}) unabhängig. Die Original-Definitionen
+für die Kapitelüberschriften ab
\KOMAScript~3.17\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} entsprechen:\IndexLength{@tempskipa}
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1300,9 +1342,9 @@ Diese werden auch bei jeder Verwendung von Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{normal} oder
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{small} reaktiviert. Als Seiteneffekt haben
diese Optionen also gegebenenfalls nicht nur Auswirkungen auf
-Kapitelüberschriften, sondern auf alle Überschriften im Stil \PValue{chapter}.
+Kapitelüberschriften, sondern auf alle Überschriften im Stil \PValue{chapter}.
-Der Stil \PValue{chapter} setzt die interne Länge
+Der Stil \PValue{chapter} setzt die interne Länge
\Length{@tempskipa}\IndexLength{@tempskipa} vor Aufruf von
\Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} automatisch auf den Wert, der sich aus der
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}-Einstellung%
@@ -1313,9 +1355,9 @@ sich aus der Einstellung
mit dem Wert, der sich aus der Einstellung \PValue{innerskip}
ergibt.
-Da die Voreinstellungen für die Abstände von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} nicht
-von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} abhängen, werden auch die
-zugehörigen Anweisungen von dieser Option nicht neu
+Da die Voreinstellungen für die Abstände von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} nicht
+von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} abhängen, werden auch die
+zugehörigen Anweisungen von dieser Option nicht neu
definiert. Ihre\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} Original-Definitionen entsprechen bei \Class{scrbook} und
\Class{scrreprt}:
@@ -1343,27 +1385,27 @@ und bei \Class{scrartcl}:
\vskip\@tempskipa
}
\end{lstcode}
-Auch hier wird vom Stil \PValue{part} die interne Länge
+Auch hier wird vom Stil \PValue{part} die interne Länge
\Length{@tempskipa}\IndexLength{@tempskipa}\IndexLength{@tempskipa} vor der
Verwendung der Befehle entsprechend der Einstellungen von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand}
gesetzt.
-Wird eine der Anweisungen, die im Original \Length{@tempskipa} für den
-vertikalen Abstand verwendet, umdefiniert und sollen die Abstände weiterhin
+Wird eine der Anweisungen, die im Original \Length{@tempskipa} für den
+vertikalen Abstand verwendet, umdefiniert und sollen die Abstände weiterhin
beispielsweise mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand}
konfigurierbar sein, so sollte man in der neuen Definition ebenfalls
\Length{@tempskipa} verwenden. Da\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} die Abstände über, innerhalb und
-unter den Überschriften einfacher mit
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} eingestellt werden können,
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} die Abstände über, innerhalb und
+unter den Ãœberschriften einfacher mit
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} eingestellt werden können,
wird generell nicht empfohlen, zu diesem Zweck stattdessen die hier
-beschriebenen Anweisungen umzudefinieren. Sie sollten für tiefgreifendere
-Änderungen reserviert bleiben, die nicht über
+beschriebenen Anweisungen umzudefinieren. Sie sollten für tiefgreifendere
+Änderungen reserviert bleiben, die nicht über
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} zu erreichen sind.
Auf\textnote{Beispiel!} \cite{homepage} findet sich dazu ein Beispiel, bei
dem durch Umdefinierung von \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} und
-\Macro{chapterheadendvskip} Linien über und unter der Kapitelüberschrift
+\Macro{chapterheadendvskip} Linien über und unter der Kapitelüberschrift
gesetzt werden.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1374,14 +1416,14 @@ gesetzt werden.%
\Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}
\end{Declaration}
Diese\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisung wird von Überschriften des Stils
+ \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisung wird von Ãœberschriften des Stils
\PValue{part}\textnote{Gliederungsstil
\PValue{part}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{part}} verwendet. Die beiden
-Argumente \PName{Nummer} und \PName{Text} sind dabei einschließlich
-Einstellung der Fonts für sich bereits fertig formatiert. Letztlich regelt die
-Anweisung also die Anordnung der beiden Teile der Überschrift. Bei nicht
-nummerierten Überschriften ist \PName{Nummer} ein komplett leeres Argument,
-enthält also auch keine Formatierungsanweisungen.
+Argumente \PName{Nummer} und \PName{Text} sind dabei einschließlich
+Einstellung der Fonts für sich bereits fertig formatiert. Letztlich regelt die
+Anweisung also die Anordnung der beiden Teile der Ãœberschrift. Bei nicht
+nummerierten Ãœberschriften ist \PName{Nummer} ein komplett leeres Argument,
+enthält also auch keine Formatierungsanweisungen.
Vordefiniert ist die Anweisung mit:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1392,7 +1434,7 @@ Vordefiniert ist die Anweisung mit:
bisher eher spartanisch.
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen die Teile-Überschriften in eine hellblaue Box mit blauer
+ Sie wollen die Teile-Ãœberschriften in eine hellblaue Box mit blauer
Umrandung stellen, die nur etwa drei Viertel der Breite des Textbereichs
einnimmt. Hierzu verwenden Sie
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={fcolorbox}]
@@ -1407,19 +1449,19 @@ bisher eher spartanisch.
\part{Umrahmte Teile}
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Allerdings fällt Ihnen auf, dass die Überschrift dabei nicht wie sonst
- für Teile üblich zentriert wird -- weder die Box selbst noch der Text
+ Allerdings fällt Ihnen auf, dass die Überschrift dabei nicht wie sonst
+ für Teile üblich zentriert wird -- weder die Box selbst noch der Text
innerhalb der Box.
- Die Ursache für die fehlende Zentrierung der Box liegt
- darin, dass aufgrund der Änderung das in Argument 3 versteckte Absatzende
+ Die Ursache für die fehlende Zentrierung der Box liegt
+ darin, dass aufgrund der Änderung das in Argument 3 versteckte Absatzende
nur noch den Absatz innerhalb der Box beendet, aber nicht mehr den Absatz mit
- der \Macro{parbox}. Also ergänzen Sie ein \Macro{par} am Ende der Definition.
+ der \Macro{parbox}. Also ergänzen Sie ein \Macro{par} am Ende der Definition.
Die Ursache der fehlenden Zentrierung innerhalb der Box ist, dass in der
\Macro{parbox}-Anweisung die Ausrichtung von
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedpart} nicht automatisch gültig ist. Daher
- ergänzen Sie diese Anweisung innerhalb der Box.
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedpart} nicht automatisch gültig ist. Daher
+ ergänzen Sie diese Anweisung innerhalb der Box.
Mit
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={fcolorbox}]
@@ -1435,16 +1477,16 @@ bisher eher spartanisch.
\part{Umrahmte Teile}
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- erhalten Sie die gewünschte Formatierung.
+ erhalten Sie die gewünschte Formatierung.
\end{Example}
Wie im Beispiel gezeigt, ist der Anwender bei der Umdefinierung der Anweisung
-für einige Dinge selbst verantwortlich. Dazu gehört neben dem Erhalt der
-voreingestellten Ausrichtung auch, dass innerhalb der Überschrift kein
-Seitenumbruch, beispielsweise an zusätzlich eingefügten Absätzen oder
-Abständen, erfolgen kann. Das gezeigte Beispiel ist diesbezüglich
+für einige Dinge selbst verantwortlich. Dazu gehört neben dem Erhalt der
+voreingestellten Ausrichtung auch, dass innerhalb der Ãœberschrift kein
+Seitenumbruch, beispielsweise an zusätzlich eingefügten Absätzen oder
+Abständen, erfolgen kann. Das gezeigte Beispiel ist diesbezüglich
unproblematisch. Nicht nur, dass die beiden Boxen ohnehin keinen Seitenumbruch
-erlauben. \KOMAScript{} verändert außerdem \Macro{interlinepenalty} als Teil
+erlauben. \KOMAScript{} verändert außerdem \Macro{interlinepenalty} als Teil
von \PName{Text} so, dass darin kein Seitenumbruch stattfinden
darf. Gleichzeitig endet \PName{Text} immer mit einem internen Absatz,
\Macro{@@par}.
@@ -1453,7 +1495,7 @@ Das Argument \PName{Ebene} wird von
\Macro{partlineswithprefixformat} in der Voreinstellung nicht verwendet und
ist auch im Beispiel nicht erforderlich. Erst wenn der Anwender mehrere
Anweisungen im Stil \PValue{part} definiert und man innerhalb der Definition
-nach den Anweisungen unterscheiden will, kann dies über \PName{Ebene}
+nach den Anweisungen unterscheiden will, kann dies über \PName{Ebene}
erfolgen. Dabei ist \PName{Ebene} der vom Namen der Anweisung abgeleitete Name
der Gliederungsebene. Bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.part*}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart} und
@@ -1468,8 +1510,8 @@ der Gliederungsebene. Bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part},
\Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}
\end{Declaration}
Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Anweisungen
-werden von Überschriften des Stils \PValue{chapter}\textnote{Gliederungsstil
- \PValue{chapter}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{chapter}} in Abhängigkeit
+werden von Ãœberschriften des Stils \PValue{chapter}\textnote{Gliederungsstil
+ \PValue{chapter}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{chapter}} in Abhängigkeit
von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}\IndexOption{chapterprefix}%
\textnote{\DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix})
@@ -1478,10 +1520,10 @@ aktivierter Option vor. Bei deaktivierter Option
bestimmt dagegen \Macro{chapterlinesformat} die Ausgabe.
Die beiden Argumente \PName{Nummer} und \PName{Text} sind dabei
-einschließlich Einstellung der Fonts für sich bereits fertig
+einschließlich Einstellung der Fonts für sich bereits fertig
formatiert. Letztlich regeln die Anweisungen also die Anordnung der beiden
-Teile der Überschrift. Bei nicht nummerierten Überschriften ist \PName{Nummer}
-ein komplett leeres Argument, enthält also auch keine
+Teile der Ãœberschrift. Bei nicht nummerierten Ãœberschriften ist \PName{Nummer}
+ein komplett leeres Argument, enthält also auch keine
Formatierungsanweisungen.
Vordefiniert\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind die beiden Anweisungen mit:
@@ -1497,8 +1539,8 @@ Vordefiniert\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind die beiden Anweisungen mit:
%bisher eher spartanisch.
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen Überschriften im Kapitelstil gelb hinterlegen. Für
- Überschriften ohne Präfixzeile definieren Sie daher in der Präambel des
+ Sie wollen Überschriften im Kapitelstil gelb hinterlegen. Für
+ Überschriften ohne Präfixzeile definieren Sie daher in der Präambel des
Dokument:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox}]
\makeatletter
@@ -1512,7 +1554,7 @@ Vordefiniert\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind die beiden Anweisungen mit:
}
\makeatother
\end{lstcode}
- und für Überschriften mit Präfixzeile:
+ und für Überschriften mit Präfixzeile:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox}]
\renewcommand{\chapterlineswithprefixformat}[3]{%
\colorbox{yellow}{%
@@ -1523,9 +1565,9 @@ Vordefiniert\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind die beiden Anweisungen mit:
}%
}
\end{lstcode}
- Allerdings fällt Ihnen nach einiger Zeit auf, dass mit dieser Umdefinierung
- die Überschriften wieder im Blocksatz gesetzt werden. Das liegt daran, dass
- \Macro{parbox} sein Argument so setzt. Um dies zu korrigieren, fügen Sie die
+ Allerdings fällt Ihnen nach einiger Zeit auf, dass mit dieser Umdefinierung
+ die Ãœberschriften wieder im Blocksatz gesetzt werden. Das liegt daran, dass
+ \Macro{parbox} sein Argument so setzt. Um dies zu korrigieren, fügen Sie die
Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter}),
die automatisch bereits vor \Macro{chapterlinesformat} und
@@ -1554,28 +1596,28 @@ Vordefiniert\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind die beiden Anweisungen mit:
}
\end{lstcode}
Es sei daran erinnert, dass die Klammerung mit den Anweisungen
- \Macro{makeatletter} und \Macro{makeatother} nur in der Dokumentpräambel zu
+ \Macro{makeatletter} und \Macro{makeatother} nur in der Dokumentpräambel zu
verwenden ist. In einer eigenen Wrapper-Klasse oder einem Paket haben sie zu
entfallen. Sie werden auch nur wegen \Macro{@hangfrom} in der Definition von
- \Macro{chapterlinesformat} benötigt.%
+ \Macro{chapterlinesformat} benötigt.%
\end{Example}
Wie im Beispiel gezeigt, ist der Anwender bei der Umdefinierung der
-Anweisungen für einige Dinge selbst verantwortlich. Dazu gehört neben dem
-Erhalt der voreingestellten Ausrichtung auch, dass innerhalb der Überschrift
-kein Seitenumbruch, beispielsweise an zusätzlich eingefügten Absätzen oder
-Abständen, erfolgen kann. Das gezeigte Beispiel ist diesbezüglich
+Anweisungen für einige Dinge selbst verantwortlich. Dazu gehört neben dem
+Erhalt der voreingestellten Ausrichtung auch, dass innerhalb der Ãœberschrift
+kein Seitenumbruch, beispielsweise an zusätzlich eingefügten Absätzen oder
+Abständen, erfolgen kann. Das gezeigte Beispiel ist diesbezüglich
unproblematisch. Nicht nur, dass die beiden Boxen ohnehin keinen Seitenumbruch
-erlauben. \KOMAScript{} verändert außerdem \Macro{interlinepenalty} als Teil
+erlauben. \KOMAScript{} verändert außerdem \Macro{interlinepenalty} als Teil
von \PName{Text} so, dass darin kein Seitenumbruch stattfinden
darf. Gleichzeitig endet \PName{Text} immer mit einem internen Absatz,
\Macro{@@par}.
-Die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter} ist übrigens nicht
+Die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter} ist übrigens nicht
Bestandteil von \PName{Text}, weil anderenfalls beispielsweise die Verwendung
von \Macro{MakeUppercase} innerhalb der Umdefinierung der beiden Anweisungen
-erheblich erschwert wäre. Dennoch sei darauf hingewiesen, dass typografischen
-Regeln zufolge Versalsatz mit gängigen Fonts immer der Sperrung und des
+erheblich erschwert wäre. Dennoch sei darauf hingewiesen, dass typografischen
+Regeln zufolge Versalsatz mit gängigen Fonts immer der Sperrung und des
Ausgleichs bedarf. Die \LaTeX-Anweisung \Macro{MakeUppercase} leistet dies
jedoch nicht.
@@ -1583,7 +1625,7 @@ Das erste Argument, \PName{Ebene}, wird von den Anweisungen in der
Voreinstellung nicht verwendet und ist auch im Beispiel nicht
erforderlich. Erst wenn der Anwender mehrere Anweisungen im Stil
\PValue{chapter} definiert und man innerhalb der Definition nach den
-Anweisungen unterscheiden will, kann dies über \PName{Ebene} erfolgen. Dabei
+Anweisungen unterscheiden will, kann dies über \PName{Ebene} erfolgen. Dabei
ist \PName{Ebene} der vom Namen der Anweisung abgeleitete Name der
Gliederungsebene. Bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap} und
@@ -1599,24 +1641,24 @@ Gliederungsebene. Bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter},
\Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}
\end{Declaration}
Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisungen werden von Überschriften des Stils
+ \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisungen werden von Ãœberschriften des Stils
\PValue{section}\textnote{Gliederungsstil
- \PValue{section}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{section}} in Abhängigkeit
-davon verwendet, ob die jeweilige Überschrift eine Spitzmarke erzeugt oder
-eine frei stehende Überschrift. Frei stehende Überschriften werden dabei per
-\Macro{sectionlinesformat} ausgegeben, während
-\Macro{sectioncatchphraseformat} für Spitzmarken zuständig ist.
-
-In beiden Fällen gibt \PName{Einzug} den Wert eines horizontalen Einzugs
-der Überschrift gegenüber dem Textbereich an. Durch Angabe eines negativen
-Wertes soll es auch möglich sein, die Überschrift in den linken Rand zu
-rücken.
-
-Die beiden Argumente \PName{Nummer} und \PName{Text} sind einschließlich
-Einstellung der Fonts für sich bereits fertig formatiert. Letztlich regeln die
-Anweisungen also die Anordnung der beiden Teile der Überschrift. Bei nicht
-nummerierten Überschriften ist \PName{Nummer} ein komplett leeres Argument,
-enthält also auch keine Formatierungsanweisungen.
+ \PValue{section}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{section}} in Abhängigkeit
+davon verwendet, ob die jeweilige Ãœberschrift eine Spitzmarke erzeugt oder
+eine frei stehende Ãœberschrift. Frei stehende Ãœberschriften werden dabei per
+\Macro{sectionlinesformat} ausgegeben, während
+\Macro{sectioncatchphraseformat} für Spitzmarken zuständig ist.
+
+In beiden Fällen gibt \PName{Einzug} den Wert eines horizontalen Einzugs
+der Überschrift gegenüber dem Textbereich an. Durch Angabe eines negativen
+Wertes soll es auch möglich sein, die Überschrift in den linken Rand zu
+rücken.
+
+Die beiden Argumente \PName{Nummer} und \PName{Text} sind einschließlich
+Einstellung der Fonts für sich bereits fertig formatiert. Letztlich regeln die
+Anweisungen also die Anordnung der beiden Teile der Ãœberschrift. Bei nicht
+nummerierten Ãœberschriften ist \PName{Nummer} ein komplett leeres Argument,
+enthält also auch keine Formatierungsanweisungen.
Vordefiniert sind die beiden Anweisungen als:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1629,15 +1671,15 @@ Vordefiniert sind die beiden Anweisungen als:
\end{lstcode}
Bei Umdefinierung einer der beiden Anweisungen ist wiederum der Anwender
-selbst dafür verantwortlich, Seitenumbrüche innerhalb der Ausgabe zu
+selbst dafür verantwortlich, Seitenumbrüche innerhalb der Ausgabe zu
verhindern. \KOMAScript{} hilft hier lediglich mit entsprechend gesetztem
\Macro{interlinepenalty}.
\begin{Example}
- Wie schon im Beispiel der Kapitelüberschriften sollen nun die frei stehenden
- Überschriften der Ebenen \PValue{section} mit einer Farbe hinterlegt
- werden. Die frei stehenden Überschriften tieferer Ebenen sollen nicht
- verändert werden:
+ Wie schon im Beispiel der Kapitelüberschriften sollen nun die frei stehenden
+ Ãœberschriften der Ebenen \PValue{section} mit einer Farbe hinterlegt
+ werden. Die frei stehenden Ãœberschriften tieferer Ebenen sollen nicht
+ verändert werden:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox}]
\makeatletter
\renewcommand{\sectionlinesformat}[4]{%
@@ -1656,22 +1698,22 @@ verhindern. \KOMAScript{} hilft hier lediglich mit entsprechend gesetztem
}
\makeatother
\end{lstcode}
- Mit dem gezeigten Code wird im Falle eines Einzugs der Überschrift der
- Bereich des Einzugs nicht mit gefärbt. Wird hingegen die Überschrift in den
+ Mit dem gezeigten Code wird im Falle eines Einzugs der Ãœberschrift der
+ Bereich des Einzugs nicht mit gefärbt. Wird hingegen die Überschrift in den
linken Rand gestellt, so wird dieser Bereich des Randes ebenfalls farbig
hinterlegt. Durch Verschiebung der \Macro{hspace*}-Anweisung in die
- \Macro{colorbox} kann dieses Verhalten verändert werden.%
+ \Macro{colorbox} kann dieses Verhalten verändert werden.%
\iffalse Umbruchkorrekturtext
Erneut sei daran erinnert, dass \Macro{makeatletter} und \Macro{makeatother}
- nur in der Dokumentpräambel zu verwenden sind. In einer eigenen
+ nur in der Dokumentpräambel zu verwenden sind. In einer eigenen
Wrapper-Klasse oder einem Paket haben sie zu entfallen. Sie werden auch nur
wegen \Macro{@hangfrom} in der Definition von \Macro{sectionlinesformat}
- benötigt.%
+ benötigt.%
\else%
- \Macro{makeatletter} und \Macro{makeatother} werden in der Dokumentpräambel
- erneut wegen \Macro{@hangfrom} benötigt.%
+ \Macro{makeatletter} und \Macro{makeatother} werden in der Dokumentpräambel
+ erneut wegen \Macro{@hangfrom} benötigt.%
\fi%
\end{Example}
@@ -1683,89 +1725,185 @@ Stil \PValue{section} zu unterscheiden.%
\begin{Declaration}
+\DoHook{heading/preinit/\PName{Name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/postinit/\PName{Name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/branch/star/\PName{Name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/branch/nostar/\PName{Name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/begingroup/\PName{Name}}%
+\DoHook{heading/endgroup/\PName{Name}}%
+\end{Declaration}
+\BeginIndex{}{Haken}%
+Neben\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} den übrigen Einstellmöglichkeiten bieten sämtliche mit
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand},
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand} und
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand} definierten oder mit
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} umdefinierten
+Gliederungsanweisungen eine ganze Reihe an Haken, die per
+\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.AddtoDoHook} manipuliert werden können. Zur
+Funktionsweise dieser \emph{do-hook} genannten Haken sei auf
+\autoref{sec:scrbase.hooks} ab \autopageref{sec:scrbase.hooks}
+verwiesen. Der letzte Teil des Spezifikators ist dabei der \PName{Name} der
+Gliederungsanweisung, wie er auch bei den oben genannten Befehlen als letztes
+Argument anzugeben ist.
+
+Wichtig\important{Achtung!} ist, dass keiner dieser Haken für Anweisungen
+verwendet werden sollte, die Auswirkungen auf den Seitenumbruch oder die
+Positionierung der Ãœberschriften haben. Daher sollten nur wirklich erfahrene
+Anwender Gebrauch von diesen Haken machen. Im Zweifelsfall ist außerdem der
+Quellcode der Klasse bezüglich des genauen Ausführungszeitpunktes des
+jeweiligen Haken zu konsultieren. Diese Haken dienen als letzter Notanker vor
+einer tatsächlichen Umdefinierung von Gliederungsbefehlen außerhalb der von
+\KOMAScript{} gebotenen Mittel.
+
+Der\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/preinit/\dots}} Haken
+\DoHook{heading/preinit/\PName{Name}} wird unmittelbar vor der
+Initialisierung der Anweisungen ausgeführt. Zu diesem Zeitpunkt wurden noch
+keine Einstellungen vorgenommen. Selbst der Absatz, der einer Ãœberschrift
+voraus geht, ist noch nicht zwingend beendet.
+
+Der\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/postinit/\dots}} Haken
+\DoHook{heading/postinit/\PName{Name}} wird etwas später ausgeführt. Zu
+diesem Zeitpunkt wurden einige Einstellungen bereits vorgenommen und auch ein
+vorausgehender Absatz wurde bereits beendet.
+
+Von\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/branch/\dots}} den Haken
+\DoHook{heading/branch/nostar/\PName{Name}} oder
+\DoHook{heading/branch/star/\PName{Name}} wird jeweils nur einer ausgeführt,
+sobald feststeht, ob die Sternform oder die Normalform der
+Gliederungsanweisung ausgeführt wird. Zu diesem Zeitpunkt sind auch bereits
+vertikale Abstände über der jeweiligen Überschrift ausgeführt.
+
+Der\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/begingroup/\dots}} Haken
+\DoHook{heading/begingroup/\PName{Name}} wird am Anfang der Gruppe
+ausgeführt, in der schließlich die Überschrift gesetzt wird. Das ist also die
+letzte Eingriffsmöglichkeit vor der Ausgabe der Überschrift.
+
+Entsprechend\textnote{\DoHook{\dots/begingroup/\dots}} wird
+\DoHook{heading/endgroup/\PName{Name}} vor dem Ende der Gruppe ausgeführt, in
+der die Ãœberschrift gesetzt wurde. Derzeit ist das auch der letzte Haken
+innerhalb einer Gliederungsanweisung.
+
+Zu beachten\textnote{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.minisec}} ist, dass
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.minisec} keine echte Gliederungsanweisung ist und die
+genannten Haken daher auf diese Anweisung keine Anwendung finden.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{IfUseNumber}\Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}
+\end{Declaration}
+Streng\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} genommen handelt es sich hier um eine interne
+Anweisung. Sie ist nur innerhalb von Ãœberschriften von Haken
+\DoHook{\dots/begingroup/\dots} bis \DoHook{\dots/endgroup/\dots}
+spezifiziert. In diesem Fall wird der \PName{Dann-Code} ausgeführt, wenn die
+aktuelle Überschrift gemäß Einstellung von
+\DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} und Aufgrund der Nichtverwendung einer
+Sternform nummeriert werden soll. Soll die Ãœberschrift aufgrund der Verwenudng
+einer Sternform oder der Einstellung von \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}
+nicht nummeriert werden, so wird der \PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt. Bei
+Überschriften im Stil \PValue{chapter} wird für die Entscheidung außerdem
+berücksichtigt, ob die Überschrift im Hauptteil gesetzt wird.
+
+Wird die Anweisung außerhalb von
+Ãœberschriften verwendet, so ist ihr Ergebnis nicht spezifiziert. In der Regel
+gibt sie dann eine Fehlermeldung aus und führt weder den \PName{Dann-Code}
+noch den \PName{Sonst-Code} aus.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{SecDef}\Parameter{Sternanweisung}\Parameter{Normalanweisung}
\Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Ebene}%
\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand~davor}\Parameter{Abstand~danach}
\Parameter{Stilanweisungen}%
- \OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\labelsuffix[*]%
\Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Ebene}%
\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand~davor}
\Parameter{Abstand~danach}
\Parameter{Stilanweisungen}%
- \nobreak\texttt{*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \nobreak\texttt{*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\labelsuffix
- \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{Code}
- \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{Code}
- \Macro{Before@sect}\Parameter{Code}
\end{Declaration}
-Wie\ChangedAt[2014/09]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+Wie\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} bereits in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} bei der
Beschreibung zu den Gliederungsbefehlen ab
-\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} erklärt, verfügt \KOMAScript{}
-bezüglich des optionalen Arguments der Gliederungsbefehle über erweiterte
-Möglichkeiten. Um dies zu erreichen, war es notwendig, einige Anweisungen
-des \LaTeX-Kerns zu ersetzen. Dazu gehören auch die Anweisungen
-\Macro{secdef}\IndexCmd{secdef}\important{\Macro{secdef}} und
-\Macro{@startsection}\IndexCmd{@startsection}%
-\important{\Macro{@startsection}}. Die Bedeutung der Parameter dieser
-Anweisungen ist der Anleitung zum \LaTeX-Kern \cite{latex:source2e} zu
-entnehmen.
-
-Da diese Anweisungen jedoch auch häufig von Paketen komplett neu definiert
-werden und dadurch die Funktion von \KOMAScript{} teilweise stark
-beeinträchtigt werden kann, wurden die genannten \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen nicht
-einfach nur umdefiniert, sondern es wurden zusätzlich die alternativen
-Anweisungen \Macro{SecDef} und \Macro{scr@startsection} definiert. Diese
-können von Paketautoren genau wie die \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen verwendet
-werden, bieten dann aber automatisch die erweiterte Funktionalität von
-\KOMAScript{}. Die beiden Anweisungen sollten jedoch nicht umdefiniert werden,
-da sie sich jederzeit ändern können und dann die Funktionalität von
-\KOMAScript{} durch diese Umdefinierung erneut beeinträchtigt werden
-könnte.
-
-\KOMAScript{} selbst verwendet intern die Anweisungen
-\Macro{SecDef}\important{\Macro{SecDef}\\\Macro{scr@startsection}} und
-\Macro{scr@startsection} anstelle von \Macro{secdef} und \Macro{@startsection}
-beispielsweise bei den mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}
-definierten Gliederungsbefehlen. Eine nachträgliche Umdefinierung von
-\Macro{secdef} und \Macro{@startsection} hat daher keine Auswirkungen auf
-diese Gliederungsbefehle.
-
-Als Ersatz für die Umdefinierung der Anweisungen bietet \KOMAScript{} die
-Möglichkeit, zusätzlichen \PName{Code} in die Ausführung der
-\KOMAScript-eigenen Erweiterungen einzufügen. Der \PName{Code} aller Aufrufe
-der Anweisungen \Macro{At@startsection}\important{\Macro{At@startsection}\\
- \Macro{Before@sect}\\
- \Macro{Before@@sect}}, \Macro{Before@sect} und
-\Macro{Before@@sect} wird für die einzelnen Anweisungen getrennt aufgesammelt.
-Es ist nicht vorgesehen, einmal eingefügten Code wieder zu entfernen.
-
-Der \PName{Code} von Makro
-\Macro{At@startsection}\important{\Macro{At@startsection}\\
- \Macro{scr@startsection}} wird dabei in Anweisung \Macro{scr@startsection}
-unmittelbar nach der Auswertung von Parameter \PName{Abstand davor} und der
-zugehörigen Berechnung des resultierenden \Length{@tempskipa} aber noch vor
-Einfügen des Abstandes angewendet. Es ist damit also noch möglich, diesen
-Abstand über \Length{@tempskipa} zu verändern.
-
-Der \PName{Code} von \Macro{Before@sect}\important{\Macro{Before@sect}\\
- \Macro{@sect}} beziehungsweise
-\Macro{Before@ssect}\important{\Macro{Before@ssect}\\
- \Macro{@ssect}} wird unmittelbar vor dem Aufruf von \Macro{@sect} respektive
-\Macro{@ssect} innerhalb von
-\Macro{scr@startsection}\important{\Macro{scr@startsection}} ausgeführt. Zu
-diesem Zeitpunkt ist gegebenenfalls der vertikale Abstand vor der Überschrift
-bereits über \Macro{addvspace} eingefügt.
-
-Die drei Anweisungen \Macro{At@startsection}\important{\Macro{At@startsection}\\
- \Macro{Before@sect}\\
- \Macro{Before@ssect}}, \Macro{Before@sect} und \Macro{Before@ssect} sind als
-Schnittstelle für Paketautoren entworfen und für diese zur Verwendung
-freigegeben.%
+\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} erklärt, verfügt \KOMAScript{}
+bezüglich des optionalen Arguments der Gliederungsbefehle über erweiterte
+Möglichkeiten. Um dies zu erreichen, war es notwendig, einige Anweisungen
+des \LaTeX-Kerns zu ersetzen:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Statt
+ \Macro{@startsection}\IndexCmd{@startsection}\important{\Macro{@startsection}}
+ wird von \KOMAScript{} \Macro{scr@startsection} verwendet. Die Definition
+ von \Macro{@startsection} wird jedoch geprüft. Entspricht diese beim Laden
+ der Klasse nicht den Erwartungen, so wird eine Warnung ausgegeben, diverse
+ Möglichkeiten von \KOMAScript{} werden deaktiviert und
+ \Macro{scr@startsection} stützt sich auf eine Kopie von
+ \Macro{@startsection}, während \Macro{@startsection} selbst dann
+ \Macro{scr@startsection} aufruft.
+\item Statt \Macro{@dblarg}\IndexCmd{@dblarg}\important{\Macro{@dblarg}} wird
+ in \KOMAScript{} von den Gliederungsbefehlen eine eigene, interne Anweisung
+ verwendet.
+\item Statt \Macro{secdef}\IndexCmd{secdef}\important{\Macro{secdef}} wird
+ von \KOMAScript{} \Macro{SecDef} verwendet, um die erwähnte Änderung
+ bezüglich \Macro{@dblarg} zu erreichen. Sollte die Definition von
+ \Macro{secdef} nicht den Erwartungen entsprechen, wird eine Warnung
+ ausgegeben.
+\item \Macro{@sect}\IndexCmd{@sect}\important{\Macro{@sect}} wird umdefiniert,
+ um diverse Erweiterungen von \KOMAScript{} zu realisieren.
+\item \Macro{@ssect}\IndexCmd{@ssect}\important{\Macro{@ssect}} wird
+ umdefiniert, um diverse Erweiterungen von \KOMAScript{} zu realisieren.
+\item \Macro{@xsect}\IndexCmd{@xsect}\important{\Macro{@xsect}} wird
+ umdefiniert, um diverse Erweiterungen von \KOMAScript{} zu realisieren.
+\end{itemize}
+Es gibt Überlegungen, in künftigen Versionen von \KOMAScript{} die erwähnten
+Anweisungen aus dem \LaTeX-Kern nicht mehr anzutasten, sondern intern komplett
+durch Eigenentwicklungen zu ersetzen. Bei Verwendung eigentlich inkompatibler
+Pakete würden dadurch automatisch Erweiterungen von \KOMAScript{} deaktiviert
+und die Gliederungsbefehle in die Hände jener Pakete gelegt. Gleichzeitig
+müssten aber zum Erhalt der Kompatibilität mit anderen Paketen zusätzliche
+Maßnahmen ergriffen werden.
+
+Die erwähnten Ersatzanweisungen können von Paketautoren genau wie die
+\LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen verwendet werden, bieten dann aber automatisch die
+erweiterte Funktionalität von \KOMAScript{}. Jedoch sollten sie nicht
+umdefiniert werden, da sie sich jederzeit ändern können und dann die
+Funktionalität von \KOMAScript{} durch diese Umdefinierung erneut
+beeinträchtigt werden könnte. Die Bedeutung der Parameter ist der
+Anleitung zum \LaTeX-Kern \cite{latex:source2e} zu entnehmen.
+Als\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} Ersatz für die Umdefinierung von Anweisungen bietet
+\KOMAScript{} die zuvor dokumentierten Haken.%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Anhang}
+\begin{Explain}
+ \begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{Code}
+ \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{Code}
+ \Macro{Before@sect}\Parameter{Code}
+ \end{Declaration}
+ Bis\ChangedAt[2019/01]{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
+ \Class{scrartcl}} \KOMAScript{}~v3.26b dienten diese Anweisungen ebenfalls
+ als Ersatz für die Umdefinierung von
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scr@startsection} und
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SecDef}. Seit\textnote{veraltete
+ \KOMAScript-Anweisungen} \KOMAScript~v3.27 gelten sie jedoch als veraltet.
+
+ Intern wird \Macro{At@startsection} nun über den Haken
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.dohook.heading/postinit}
+ realisiert. \Macro{Before@ssect} ist mit Hilfe von
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.dohook.heading/branch/star} und \Macro{Before@sect} über
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.dohook.heading/branch/nostar} implementiert. Der
+ \PName{Code} wird den Haken per \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.AddtoDoHook}
+ hinzugefügt. Es ist nicht vorgesehen, einmal eingefügten Code wieder zu
+ entfernen.%
+ \EndIndexGroup
+\end{Explain}
+
+% \section{Anhang}
% \seclabel{appendix}
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -1775,30 +1913,30 @@ Bei den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen gibt es innerhalb der Anweisung
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix}%
\IndexCmd{appendix}\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix}} eine
Besonderheit. Ist \Macro{appendixmore} definiert, so wird diese Anweisung von
-\DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix} ebenfalls ausgeführt. Intern wird das von den
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix} ebenfalls ausgeführt. Intern wird das von den
{\KOMAScript}-Klassen \Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}} und \Class{scrreprt} für die Realisierung der Layoutoption
+ \Class{scrreprt}} und \Class{scrreprt} für die Realisierung der Layoutoption
\DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix} genutzt (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix}). Dies\textnote{Achtung!} sollten
Sie unbedingt beachten, falls Sie selbst das Makro \Macro{appendixmore}
definieren oder umdefinieren wollen. Ist diese Option bereits verwendet, so
erhalten Sie bei \verb|\newcommand{\appendixmore}{|\dots\verb|}| eine
-Fehlermeldung. Dadurch wird verhindert, dass Sie die Optionen außer
+Fehlermeldung. Dadurch wird verhindert, dass Sie die Optionen außer
Kraft setzen, ohne es zu merken.
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen nicht, dass bei Verwendung der Klasse \Class{scrbook} oder
- \Class{scrreprt} im Hauptteil die Kapitel mit einer Präfixzeile versehen
+ \Class{scrreprt} im Hauptteil die Kapitel mit einer Präfixzeile versehen
werden (siehe Layoutoption \DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}
in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}). Damit die Konsistenz
gewahrt bleibt, wollen Sie auch nicht, dass eine solche Zeile im Anhang
- verwendet wird. Stattdessen soll in den Anhängen direkt vor dem
- Kapitelbuchstaben das Wort »Anhang« in der jeweiligen Sprache stehen. Dies
- soll auch für die Kolumnentitel gelten. Also verwenden Sie nicht die
+ verwendet wird. Stattdessen soll in den Anhängen direkt vor dem
+ Kapitelbuchstaben das Wort »Anhang« in der jeweiligen Sprache stehen. Dies
+ soll auch für die Kolumnentitel gelten. Also verwenden Sie nicht die
Layoutoption \DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix}, sondern
- definieren in der Dokumentpräambel:
+ definieren in der Dokumentpräambel:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\appendixmore}{%
\renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{%
@@ -1811,11 +1949,11 @@ Kraft setzen, ohne es zu merken.
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.documentclass} setzen wollen, so erhalten Sie aufgrund
der dann bereits definierten Anweisung \Macro{appendixmore} eine
Fehlermeldung. Damit wird verhindert, dass obige Definition unbemerkt die
- Einstellungen überschreibt, die Sie per Option getroffen haben.
+ Einstellungen überschreibt, die Sie per Option getroffen haben.
- Wenn Sie ein vergleichbares Verhalten des Anhangs für die Klasse
- \Class{scrartcl} erreichen wollen, so ist dies ebenfalls möglich. Schreiben
- Sie dazu beispielsweise Folgendes in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
+ Wenn Sie ein vergleichbares Verhalten des Anhangs für die Klasse
+ \Class{scrartcl} erreichen wollen, so ist dies ebenfalls möglich. Schreiben
+ Sie dazu beispielsweise Folgendes in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={ifthenelse,equal}]
\newcommand*{\appendixmore}{%
\renewcommand*{\sectionformat}{%
@@ -1824,7 +1962,7 @@ Kraft setzen, ohne es zu merken.
\appendixname~\thesection\autodot\enskip}}
\end{lstcode}
- Die Erklärungen zu den in diesem Beispiel umdefinierten Anweisungen finden
+ Die Erklärungen zu den in diesem Beispiel umdefinierten Anweisungen finden
Sie in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapterformat} und
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}.
@@ -1832,8 +1970,13 @@ Kraft setzen, ohne es zu merken.
%
\EndIndexGroup
-% \subsection{Literaturverzeichnis}
-% \seclabel{bibliography}
+\section{Literaturverzeichnis}
+\seclabel{bibliography}
+
+Die Erklärungen in diesem Abschnitt verlieren mit der Verwendung von Paketen
+wie \Package{biblatex} zunehmend an Bedeutung. Die weitreichenden
+Möglichkeiten solcher Pakete ersetzen dann die hier beschriebenen
+Erweiterungen der \KOMAScript-Klassen.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{newbibstyle}\OParameter{Elternstil}\Parameter{Name}%
@@ -1844,49 +1987,49 @@ Kraft setzen, ohne es zu merken.
\Macro{bib@endhook}
\end{Declaration}
Schon die Standardklassen\textnote{Standardklassen} kennen zur Unterteilung
-der Einträge in das Literaturverzeichnis die Anweisung \Macro{newblock}. Was
-diese Anweisung genau macht, hängt dabei von den Klassenoptionen ab. Wird die
+der Einträge in das Literaturverzeichnis die Anweisung \Macro{newblock}. Was
+diese Anweisung genau macht, hängt dabei von den Klassenoptionen ab. Wird die
Option \Option{openbib}\important{\Option{openbib}} verwendet, so werden am
Ende der Standardklasse die Anweisungen \Macro{@openbib@code} und
\Macro{newblock} selbst umdefiniert. Von den Standardklassen wird die
-Anweisung \Macro{@openbib@code} beim Start der Liste für das
-Literaturverzeichnis --~genauer: bei der Festlegung der Parameter für diese
-Liste~-- ausgeführt. Es darf davon ausgegangen werden, dass auch viele Pakete,
+Anweisung \Macro{@openbib@code} beim Start der Liste für das
+Literaturverzeichnis --~genauer: bei der Festlegung der Parameter für diese
+Liste~-- ausgeführt. Es darf davon ausgegangen werden, dass auch viele Pakete,
die das Literaturverzeichnis umdefinieren, diese Anweisung entsprechend
abarbeiten.
Bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen\textnote{\KOMAScript} geschieht etwas
-ähnliches. Allerdings wird \Macro{@openbib@code} nicht am Ende der Klasse
+ähnliches. Allerdings wird \Macro{@openbib@code} nicht am Ende der Klasse
umdefiniert. Stattdessen wird mit \Macro{newbibstyle} der Stil
-\PValue{openstyle} für das Literaturverzeichnis definiert. Die
+\PValue{openstyle} für das Literaturverzeichnis definiert. Die
\PName{Anweisungen}, die dabei in der Implementierung angegeben wurden,
-beinhalten die gewünschten Umdefinierung von \Macro{@openbib@code} und von
+beinhalten die gewünschten Umdefinierung von \Macro{@openbib@code} und von
\Macro{newblock}. Wird nun mit Hilfe der Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{bibliography}{openstyle}%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{openstyle}}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{bibliography}{openstyle}} dieser
-Literaturverzeichnisstil gewählt, so werden die \PName{Anweisungen}
-unmittelbar ausgeführt, also \Macro{@openbib@code} und \Macro{newblock}
+Literaturverzeichnisstil gewählt, so werden die \PName{Anweisungen}
+unmittelbar ausgeführt, also \Macro{@openbib@code} und \Macro{newblock}
umdefiniert.
-Neben \Macro{@openbib@code} und \Macro{newblock} können in \PName{Anweisungen}
+Neben \Macro{@openbib@code} und \Macro{newblock} können in \PName{Anweisungen}
auch noch \Macro{bib@beginhook} und \Macro{bib@endhook} umdefiniert
werden. Die Anweisung \Macro{bib@beginhook} wird unmittelbar nach der
-Überschrift und der Präambel des Literaturverzeichnisses, aber noch vor der
-Liste mit den Literatureinträgen ausgeführt. Die Anweisung \Macro{bib@endhook}
+Überschrift und der Präambel des Literaturverzeichnisses, aber noch vor der
+Liste mit den Literatureinträgen ausgeführt. Die Anweisung \Macro{bib@endhook}
wird direkt nach dieser Liste am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses
-ausgeführt. Im Falle eines mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} (siehe
+ausgeführt. Im Falle eines mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.bibliography},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography}) unterbrochenen
-Literaturverzeichnisses werden diese Anweisungen außerdem am Anfang und Ende
+Literaturverzeichnisses werden diese Anweisungen außerdem am Anfang und Ende
jedes Teils, also unmittelbar vor und nach
-\DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} ausgeführt.
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} ausgeführt.
Die Anweisungen \Macro{newblock}, \Macro{@openbib@code},
\Macro{bib@beginhook} und \Macro{bib@endhook} werden bei der Verwendung eines
-neuen Literaturverzeichnisstils zunächst als leer definiert. Danach werden die
+neuen Literaturverzeichnisstils zunächst als leer definiert. Danach werden die
\PName{Anweisungen} des bei der Definition des Stils optional angegebenen
-Elternstils ausgeführt und dann erst die \PName{Anweisungen}, die bei
+Elternstils ausgeführt und dann erst die \PName{Anweisungen}, die bei
Definition des neuen Stils angegeben wurden. Daraus ergibt sich auch, dass
jede der vier Anweisungen innerhalb von \PName{Anweisung} bei Bedarf
keinesfalls mit \Macro{newcommand}, sondern mit
@@ -1895,20 +2038,20 @@ definiert werden sollte.
Setzt der Anwender mit den Anweisungen
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography}%\important[i]{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography}\\
-% \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}}% Passt blöder Weise nicht!
+% \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}}% Passt blöder Weise nicht!
\IndexCmd{AtEndBibliography} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}%
-\IndexCmd{AfterBibliographyPreamble} weitere \PName{Anweisungen} für die
-Ausführung nach der Präambel und am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses, so
+\IndexCmd{AfterBibliographyPreamble} weitere \PName{Anweisungen} für die
+Ausführung nach der Präambel und am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses, so
werden die mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble} festgelegten
\PName{Anweisungen} einmalig am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses nach
\Macro{bib@beginhook} und die mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography}
festgelegten \PName{Anweisungen} einmalig am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses
-vor \Macro{bib@endhook} ausgeführt.
+vor \Macro{bib@endhook} ausgeführt.
Mit\textnote{Beispiel!} Hilfe des Pakets
\Package{multicol}\IndexPackage{multicol}\important{\Package{multicol}} (siehe
-\cite{package:multicol}) könnte man beispielsweise einen Literaturstil für ein
+\cite{package:multicol}) könnte man beispielsweise einen Literaturstil für ein
zweispaltiges Literaturverzeichnis definieren:
% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1916,8 +2059,8 @@ zweispaltiges Literaturverzeichnis definieren:
\renewcommand*{\bib@beginhook}{\begin{multicols}{2}}%
\renewcommand*{\bib@endhook}{\end{multicols}}}%
\end{lstcode}
-Soll es außerdem eine \emph{open}-Variante davon geben, kann man hier die
-Möglichkeiten der Vererbung verwenden und bei der Definition einen Elternstil
+Soll es außerdem eine \emph{open}-Variante davon geben, kann man hier die
+Möglichkeiten der Vererbung verwenden und bei der Definition einen Elternstil
mit angeben:
% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1925,7 +2068,7 @@ mit angeben:
\renewcommand*{\bib@beginhook}{\begin{multicols}{2}}%
\renewcommand*{\bib@endhook}{\end{multicols}}}%
\end{lstcode}
-Die Auswahl eines dieser neuen Stile erfolgt dann einfach wieder über die
+Die Auswahl eines dieser neuen Stile erfolgt dann einfach wieder über die
Option \DescRef{maincls.option.bibliography}.
Wie\textnote{Achtung!} schon \DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} verlieren
@@ -1948,21 +2091,21 @@ umdefiniert wird.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "guide.tex"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Sternvarianten Kapitelüberschrift Standardklassen Paketautoren
+% LocalWords: Sternvarianten Kapitelüberschrift Standardklassen Paketautoren
% LocalWords: Klassenoptionen Gliederungsbefehlen Namensliste umzudefinieren
% LocalWords: Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags Abstandsanweisungen Sternformen
-% LocalWords: Teilüberschriften Benutzerfreundlichkeit Absatzmarkierung
-% LocalWords: umkonfiguriert Teileüberschrift Abschnittsüberschrift
-% LocalWords: Absolutwert Gliederungsbefehls Präfixzeile Schrifteinstellung
-% LocalWords: Zählername Spitzmarke Kolumnentitels Schrifteinstellungen
-% LocalWords: Strichstärke expandierbar expandierbaren expandierbares
+% LocalWords: Teilüberschriften Benutzerfreundlichkeit Absatzmarkierung
+% LocalWords: umkonfiguriert Teileüberschrift Abschnittsüberschrift
+% LocalWords: Absolutwert Gliederungsbefehls Präfixzeile Schrifteinstellung
+% LocalWords: Zählername Spitzmarke Kolumnentitels Schrifteinstellungen
+% LocalWords: Strichstärke expandierbar expandierbaren expandierbares
% LocalWords: spartanisch Kapitelstil Spitzmarken Formatierungsanweisungen
-% LocalWords: Kapitelüberschriften Gliederungsebenen Verzeichniseinträge
+% LocalWords: Kapitelüberschriften Gliederungsebenen Verzeichniseinträge
% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintragsstile Gliederungsbefehl Verzeichniseintrag
% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintrags Verzeichniseintragsstilen Gliederungsstil
-% LocalWords: Gliederungsebene Eintragsebenen Absatzeinzug Dokumentpräambel
+% LocalWords: Gliederungsebene Eintragsebenen Absatzeinzug Dokumentpräambel
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex
index 58b51a63fa..12b493c5f7 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrbook, scrreprt und scrartcl in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrbook, scrreprt und scrartcl in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle.tex}
- [$Date: 2019-01-14 14:29:39 +0100 (Mon, 14 Jan 2019) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 17:14:53 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl)]
\chapter{Die Hauptklassen \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, \Class{scrartcl}}
@@ -58,25 +58,25 @@
\AddSeeIndex{Anweisung}{gen}{\GuidecmdIndexShort}{cmd}%
\AddSeeIndex{Makro}{gen}{\GuidecmdIndexShort}{cmd}%
-Die Hauptklassen des \KOMAScript-Pakets sind als Äquivalent zu den
+Die Hauptklassen des \KOMAScript-Pakets sind als Äquivalent zu den
\LaTeX-Standard"-klassen angelegt. Das bedeutet, dass zu den drei
Standardklassen \Class{book}\IndexClass{book}, \Class{report}%
\IndexClass{report} und \Class{article}\IndexClass{article} im
-\KOMAScript-Paket Entsprechungen zu finden sind. Daneben ist auch für die
+\KOMAScript-Paket Entsprechungen zu finden sind. Daneben ist auch für die
Standardklasse \Class{letter}\IndexClass{letter} eine Entsprechung vorhanden.
Der Briefklasse in {\KOMAScript} ist jedoch ein eigenes Kapitel gewidmet, da
-sie sich von den drei Hauptklassen grundsätzlich unterscheidet (siehe
+sie sich von den drei Hauptklassen grundsätzlich unterscheidet (siehe
\autoref{cha:scrlttr2}).
-Die einfachste Möglichkeit, anstelle einer Standardklasse eine
+Die einfachste Möglichkeit, anstelle einer Standardklasse eine
\KOMAScript-Klasse zu verwenden, ist das Ersetzen des Klassennamens in der
Anweisung \verb|\documentclass| entsprechend
\autoref{tab:maincls.overview}. Man tauscht
also beispielsweise \Macro{documentclass}\PParameter{book} gegen
-\Macro{documentclass}\PParameter{scrbook}. Der anschließende \LaTeX-Lauf
-sollte lediglich einige Layoutänderungen mit sich bringen. Ein großer Teil der
-in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten beschriebenen vielfältigen Möglichkeiten und
-Optionen werden von den \KOMAScript-Klassen zusätzlich geboten.
+\Macro{documentclass}\PParameter{scrbook}. Der anschließende \LaTeX-Lauf
+sollte lediglich einige Layoutänderungen mit sich bringen. Ein großer Teil der
+in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten beschriebenen vielfältigen Möglichkeiten und
+Optionen werden von den \KOMAScript-Klassen zusätzlich geboten.
\begin{table}
% \centering
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Optionen werden von den \KOMAScript-Klassen zusätzlich geboten.
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}
- [Klassengegenüberstellung]{\label{tab:maincls.overview}Gegenüberstellung der
+ [Klassengegenüberstellung]{\label{tab:maincls.overview}Gegenüberstellung der
Standardklassen und der \KOMAScript-Klassen}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
@@ -100,28 +100,28 @@ Optionen werden von den \KOMAScript-Klassen zusätzlich geboten.
\end{captionbeside}
\end{table}
-Lassen Sie mich der Erläuterung der Klassen noch eine Bemerkung
+Lassen Sie mich der Erläuterung der Klassen noch eine Bemerkung
vorausschicken. Oft ist man sich am Anfang eines Dokuments unsicher, welche
-Einstellungen konkret zu wählen sind. Bei einigen Einstellungen, wie der
-Auswahl des Papierformats, mögen sie bereits vorab feststehen. Aber schon die
-Frage nach der Seitenauf"|teilung könnte im Voraus schwer zu beantworten sein.
-Andererseits sollten diese Angaben für die Haupttätigkeiten des Autors --
+Einstellungen konkret zu wählen sind. Bei einigen Einstellungen, wie der
+Auswahl des Papierformats, mögen sie bereits vorab feststehen. Aber schon die
+Frage nach der Seitenauf"|teilung könnte im Voraus schwer zu beantworten sein.
+Andererseits sollten diese Angaben für die Haupttätigkeiten des Autors --
Entwurf der Gliederung, Schreiben des Textes, Zusammenstellen von Abbildungen,
-Tabellen und Verzeichnissen -- zunächst auch unerheblich sein. Konzentrieren
-Sie sich als Autor erst einmal auf den Inhalt. Wenn der dann steht, können Sie
-sich um die Feinheiten der Form kümmern. Neben der Auswahl der Optionen
-gehören dazu dann auch Dinge wie die Korrektur der Trennung und möglicherweise
+Tabellen und Verzeichnissen -- zunächst auch unerheblich sein. Konzentrieren
+Sie sich als Autor erst einmal auf den Inhalt. Wenn der dann steht, können Sie
+sich um die Feinheiten der Form kümmern. Neben der Auswahl der Optionen
+gehören dazu dann auch Dinge wie die Korrektur der Trennung und möglicherweise
dezente Eingriffe in den Seitenumbruch oder die Verteilung von Abbildungen und
Tabellen.
% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
%\iffree{}{\clearpage}% Umbruchkorrektur!!!
-\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
+\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
\LoadCommonFile{draftmode} % \section{Entwurfsmodus}
@@ -132,46 +132,46 @@ Tabellen.
\Macro{raggedbottom}
\end{Declaration}
\begin{Explain}
- Insbesondere bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten ist es wünschenswert, wenn nicht
+ Insbesondere bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten ist es wünschenswert, wenn nicht
nur alle ersten Zeilen eines Satzspiegels mit ihrer Grundlinie auf der
- gleichen Höhe liegen, sondern auch die letzten Zeilen einer
- Doppelseite. Enthält eine Seite nur Text ohne Absätze und Überschriften, so
+ gleichen Höhe liegen, sondern auch die letzten Zeilen einer
+ Doppelseite. Enthält eine Seite nur Text ohne Absätze und Überschriften, so
hat man das automatisch, wenn bei der Konstruktion des Satzspiegels einige
- Grundregeln befolgt wurden. Aber bereits dann, wenn Absätze mit einem halben
- Grundlinienabstand markiert werden, genügt es, wenn die Anzahl der Absätze
+ Grundregeln befolgt wurden. Aber bereits dann, wenn Absätze mit einem halben
+ Grundlinienabstand markiert werden, genügt es, wenn die Anzahl der Absätze
auf der einen Seite um eine ungerade Zahl von der auf der anderen Seite
abweicht, damit dieses Ziel nicht mehr erreicht werden kann. Es ist dann
- notwendig, dass man zumindest einige der vertikalen Abstände etwas dehnt
+ notwendig, dass man zumindest einige der vertikalen Abstände etwas dehnt
oder staucht, um das Ziel wieder zu erreichen. \TeX{} kennt zu diesem Zweck
- dehn- und stauchbare Abstände und \LaTeX{} bietet die Möglichkeit,
+ dehn- und stauchbare Abstände und \LaTeX{} bietet die Möglichkeit,
diesen \emph{vertikalen Ausgleich}\Index{Ausgleich} automatisch
- durchzuführen.
+ durchzuführen.
\end{Explain}
-Wird über die Option
+Wird über die Option
\Option{twoside}\IndexOption{twoside}\important{\Option{twoside}} (siehe
\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \DescPageRef{typearea.option.twoside})
-doppelseitiger oder über Option
+doppelseitiger oder über Option
\Option{twocolumn}\IndexOption{twocolumn}\important{\Option{twocolumn}} (siehe
\DescPageRef{typearea.option.twocolumn}) zweispaltiger Satz angefordert, so
wird der vertikale Ausgleich ebenfalls
eingeschaltet. Das\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} gilt jedoch bei einer Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer
+ \Class{scrartcl}} gilt jedoch bei einer Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer
\KOMAScript-Version vor 3.17 (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}%
\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{3.17}})
-nicht, wenn die Option über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} geändert wird.
+nicht, wenn die Option über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} oder
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} geändert wird.
Man kann den vertikalen Ausgleich auch mit \Macro{flushbottom} jederzeit
-ab der aktuellen Seite explizit fordern. Umgekehrt ist es möglich, mit
+ab der aktuellen Seite explizit fordern. Umgekehrt ist es möglich, mit
\Macro{raggedbottom} den vertikalen Ausgleich ab der aktuellen Seite explizit
abzuschalten. Dies entspricht der Voreinstellung bei einseitigem Satz.
-{\KOMAScript} verwendet übrigens einen leicht modifizierten Verzicht auf den
-vertikalen Ausgleich. \iffree{}{Näheres dazu ist in
+{\KOMAScript} verwendet übrigens einen leicht modifizierten Verzicht auf den
+vertikalen Ausgleich. \iffree{}{Näheres dazu ist in
\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.footnoterule} zu erfahren.}%
%
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ vertikalen Ausgleich. \iffree{}{Näheres dazu ist in
\EndIndexGroup
-\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
+\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Textauszeichnungen}
@@ -204,23 +204,23 @@ Bei\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}%
\OnlyAt{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} den
Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} setzt die
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung noch den zentrierten Titel
-»\abstractname« vor die Zusammenfassung. Früher war dies durchaus
-üblich. Inzwischen sind wir durch das Zeitunglesen darin geübt, einen
+»\abstractname« vor die Zusammenfassung. Früher war dies durchaus
+üblich. Inzwischen sind wir durch das Zeitunglesen darin geübt, einen
entsprechend hervorgehobenen Text am Anfang eines Artikels oder Berichts als
Zusammenfassung zu erkennen. Dies gilt umso mehr, wenn dieser Text noch vor
dem Inhaltsverzeichnis steht. Zudem verwundert es, wenn ausgerechnet diese
-Überschrift klein und zentriert ist. {\KOMAScript} bietet mit der Option
-\Option{abstract} die Möglichkeit, die Überschrift über der Zusammenfassung
+Ãœberschrift klein und zentriert ist. {\KOMAScript} bietet mit der Option
+\Option{abstract} die Möglichkeit, die Überschrift über der Zusammenfassung
ein- oder auszuschalten. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der
-Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. Voreingestellt ist bei
\KOMAScript{} \PValue{false}.
-Bei Büchern wird in der Regel eine andere Art der Zusammenfassung
+Bei Büchern wird in der Regel eine andere Art der Zusammenfassung
verwendet. Dort setzt man ein entsprechendes Kapitel an den Anfang oder das
Ende des Werks. Oft wird diese Zusammenfassung entweder mit der Einleitung
-oder einem weiteren Ausblick verknüpft. Daher gibt es bei \Class{scrbook}
-überhaupt keine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung.
+oder einem weiteren Ausblick verknüpft. Daher gibt es bei \Class{scrbook}
+überhaupt keine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung.
Bei\textnote{Tipp!} Berichten im weiteren Sinne, etwa einer Studien- oder
Diplomarbeit, ist ebenfalls eine Zusammenfassung in dieser Form zu
empfehlen. Siehe dazu die in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, ab
@@ -235,19 +235,19 @@ empfehlen. Siehe dazu die in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, ab
\begin{Environment}{abstract}\end{Environment}
\end{Declaration}%
\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
-Einige \LaTeX-Klassen bieten eine spezielle Umgebung für die
+Einige \LaTeX-Klassen bieten eine spezielle Umgebung für die
Zusammenfassung: die \Environment{abstract}-Umgebung. Diese wird unmittelbar
ausgegeben, ist also nicht Bestandteil der mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.maketitle} gesetzten Titelei. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!}
beachten Sie unbedingt, dass es sich bei \Environment{abstract} um eine
Umgebung und nicht um eine Anweisung handelt. Ob die Zusammenfassung mit einer
-Überschrift versehen wird oder nicht, wird über die Option
+Überschrift versehen wird oder nicht, wird über die Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.abstract} gesteuert (siehe oben).
-Bei Büchern ist die Zusammenfassung häufig Bestandteil der Einleitung oder
+Bei Büchern ist die Zusammenfassung häufig Bestandteil der Einleitung oder
eines gesonderten Kapitels am Ende des Dokuments. Daher gibt es bei
\Class{scrbook} keine \Environment{abstract}-Umgebung. Bei Verwendung der
-Klasse \Class{scrreprt} ist es sicher eine Überlegung wert, ob man nicht
+Klasse \Class{scrreprt} ist es sicher eine Ãœberlegung wert, ob man nicht
genauso verfahren sollte. Siehe hierzu in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}
ab \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*}
die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*}\IndexCmd{chapter*} und
@@ -260,11 +260,11 @@ Wird ein Titelkopf\Index{Titel>Kopf} (siehe Option
Zusammenfassung intern mit Hilfe einer
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.quotation}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{quotation} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lists}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.quotation})
-gesetzt. Dabei werden Absatzanfänge normalerweise mit Einzug gesetzt. Soll der
+gesetzt. Dabei werden Absatzanfänge normalerweise mit Einzug gesetzt. Soll der
erste Absatz nicht eingezogen werden, so kann dieser Einzug mit
\Macro{noindent}\IndexCmd{noindent}\important{\Macro{noindent}}
\iffree{unmittelbar nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{abstract}}{am Anfang der
- Umgebung} unterdrückt werden.%
+ Umgebung} unterdrückt werden.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -277,32 +277,32 @@ erste Absatz nicht eingezogen werden, so kann dieser Einzug mit
\BeginIndex{}{Inhaltsverzeichnis}
Auf die Titelei und eine eventuell vorhandene Zusammenfassung folgt
-normalerweise das Inhaltsverzeichnis. Häufig findet
+normalerweise das Inhaltsverzeichnis. Häufig findet
man nach dem Inhaltsverzeichnis auch noch die Verzeichnisse der
Gleitumgebungen, beispielsweise von Tabellen und Abbildungen (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}).
\iffalse%
Es ist zu beachten, dass neben den in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten
-Möglichkeiten auch noch die Anweisungen
+Möglichkeiten auch noch die Anweisungen
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand},
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand},
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} und
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand} Auswirkungen auf das
-Inhaltsverzeichnis haben können. Siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+Inhaltsverzeichnis haben können. Siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}.%
\else%
-Neben den in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Möglichkeiten hat auch der mit
+Neben den in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Möglichkeiten hat auch der mit
\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}%
\important[O]{\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}
-gewählte und
+gewählte und
konfigurierte Eintragsstil des Pakets
\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}}%
\IndexPackage{tocbasic} (siehe
-\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}) maßgeblichen Einfluss auf die
-Darstellung des Inhaltsverzeichnisses. Entsprechend können sich auch die in
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts} ab
+\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}) maßgeblichen Einfluss auf die
+Darstellung des Inhaltsverzeichnisses. Entsprechend können sich auch die in
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections} ab
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand} dokumentierten
Befehle
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}%
@@ -320,52 +320,52 @@ Befehle
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{toc}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}
-Neuerdings ist es fast schon üblich geworden Tabellen- und
+Neuerdings ist es fast schon üblich geworden Tabellen- und
Abbildungsverzeichnis sowie das Literaturverzeichnis, seltener das
Stichwortverzeichnis, ins Inhaltsverzeichnis aufzunehmen. Dies hat sicher auch
mit der neuen Mode zu tun, Abbildungs- und Tabellenverzeichnis ans Buchende zu
stellen. Beide Verzeichnisse haben von Aufbau und Intention eine deutliche
-Ähnlichkeit mit dem Inhaltsverzeichnis. Daher betrachte ich die Entwicklung
+Ähnlichkeit mit dem Inhaltsverzeichnis. Daher betrachte ich die Entwicklung
skeptisch. Da\important{\OptionValue{toc}{listof}} es keinen Sinn hat, nur das
Tabellen- oder nur das Abbildungsverzeichnis ohne das jeweils andere ins
Inhaltsverzeichnis aufzunehmen, werden mit der
\PName{Einstellung}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} \PValue{listof}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{listof}} beide
Verzeichnisse gemeinsam ins Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen. Dabei werden auch
-Verzeichnisse berücksichtigt, die mit Hilfe des
+Verzeichnisse berücksichtigt, die mit Hilfe des
\Package{float}-Pakets\IndexPackage{float} ab Version~1.2e (siehe
\cite{package:float}) oder \Package{floatrow} (siehe \cite{package:floatrow})
erstellt werden. Als\important{\OptionValue{toc}{listofnumbered}}
-Verzeichnisse, die den Inhalt anderer Abschnitte des Werks auf"|führen,
+Verzeichnisse, die den Inhalt anderer Abschnitte des Werks auf"|führen,
erhalten Tabellen"~, Abbildungs- und die mit den genannten Paketen erzeugten
-Verzeichnisse grundsätzlich keine Kapitelnummer. Wer diesen Grundsatz
+Verzeichnisse grundsätzlich keine Kapitelnummer. Wer diesen Grundsatz
ignorieren will, bedient sich der \PName{Einstellung}
\PValue{listofnumbered}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{listofnumbered}}.
\leavevmode\LabelOptionValue{toc}{index}\nobreak
-Das\important{\OptionValue{toc}{index}} Stichwortverzeichnis erhält mit
+Das\important{\OptionValue{toc}{index}} Stichwortverzeichnis erhält mit
\OptionValue{toc}{index}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{index}} einen Eintrag im
Inhaltsverzeichnis. Da das Stichwortverzeichnis ebenfalls nur Verweise auf den
-Inhalt anderer Abschnitte enthält, wird auch dieser Eintrag grundsätzlich
+Inhalt anderer Abschnitte enthält, wird auch dieser Eintrag grundsätzlich
nicht nummeriert. Eine\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
Abweichung\important{\OptionValue{toc}{indexnumbered}} von diesem Grundsatz
wird von \KOMAScript{} trotz Bedenken des Autors mit
\OptionValue{toc}{indexnumbered}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{indexnumbered}}
-ebenfalls unterstützt.
+ebenfalls unterstützt.
\leavevmode\LabelOptionValue{toc}{bibliography}\nobreak Das
Literaturverzeichnis stellt eine etwas andere Art von Verzeichnis dar. Hier
wird nicht der Inhalt des vorliegenden Werks aufgelistet, sondern auf externe
Inhalte verwiesen. Mit\important{\OptionValue{toc}{bibliographynumbered}}
-dieser Begründung könnte man argumentieren, dass das Literaturverzeichnis ein
+dieser Begründung könnte man argumentieren, dass das Literaturverzeichnis ein
eigenes Kapitel bzw. einen eigenen Abschnitt darstelle und somit eine Nummer
verdiene. Die Option \OptionValue{toc}{bibliographynumbered}%
-\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{bibliographynumbered}} führt genau dazu,
-einschließlich des dann fälligen Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Ich selbst
+\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{bibliographynumbered}} führt genau dazu,
+einschließlich des dann fälligen Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Ich selbst
bin allerdings der Meinung, dass bei dieser Argumentation auch ein
klassisches, kommentiertes Quellenverzeichnis ein eigenes Kapitel
-wäre. Außerdem ist das Literaturverzeichnis letztlich nichts, was man selbst
+wäre. Außerdem ist das Literaturverzeichnis letztlich nichts, was man selbst
geschrieben hat. Deshalb\important{\OptionValue{toc}{bibliography}} erscheint
mir allenfalls ein nicht nummerierter Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis
angemessen, was mit der Einstellung
@@ -377,8 +377,8 @@ Normalerweise\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{%
\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}%
\important{\OptionValue{toc}{graduated}} wird das Inhaltsverzeichnis so
formatiert, dass die Gliederungsebenen unterschiedlich weit eingezogen
-werden. Dabei wird für die Gliederungsnummer jeder Ebene ein Raum fester
-Breite vorgesehen, in dem die Nummer linksbündig gesetzt wird. Dies entspricht
+werden. Dabei wird für die Gliederungsnummer jeder Ebene ein Raum fester
+Breite vorgesehen, in dem die Nummer linksbündig gesetzt wird. Dies entspricht
der Einstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}
\OptionValue{toc}{graduated}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{graduated}}.
@@ -386,58 +386,58 @@ der Einstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\leavevmode\LabelOptionValue{toc}{flat}\nobreak
Werden sehr viele Gliederungspunkte verwendet, so werden die
Gliederungsnummern sehr breit. Damit reicht der vorgesehene Platz nicht
-aus. In \cite{DANTE:FAQ} wird für solche Fälle vorgeschlagen, die Erzeugung
+aus. In \cite{DANTE:FAQ} wird für solche Fälle vorgeschlagen, die Erzeugung
des Inhaltsverzeichnisses
umzudefinieren. \KOMAScript{}\important{\OptionValue{toc}{flat}} bietet jedoch
eine alternative Formatierung an, bei der das Problem nicht auf"|tritt. Bei
Verwendung der Option \OptionValue{toc}{flat}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{flat}}
werden die unterschiedlichen Gliederungsebenen nicht unterschiedlich weit
-eingezogen. Stattdessen wird eine tabellenartige Form gewählt, in der alle
+eingezogen. Stattdessen wird eine tabellenartige Form gewählt, in der alle
Gliederungsnummern und alle Gliederungstexte jeweils in einer Spalte
-linksbündig untereinander stehen. Der für die Gliederungsnummern benötigte
+linksbündig untereinander stehen. Der für die Gliederungsnummern benötigte
Platz wird dabei automatisch ermittelt.
-Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
+Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\Option{toc} ist in \autoref{tab:maincls.toc} zu finden.
\begin{desclist}
- \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{toc}}]{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{toc} zur Einstellung von Form und Inhalt
+ \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{toc}}]{%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{toc} zur Einstellung von Form und Inhalt
des Inhaltsverzeichnisses\label{tab:maincls.toc}%
}{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{toc} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{toc} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\entry{\PValue{bibliography}, \PValue{bib}}{%
- Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis, ohne
+ Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis, ohne
dass es nummeriert wird.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{bibliography}}}%
\entry{\PValue{bibliographynumbered}, \PValue{bibnumbered},
\PValue{numberedbibliography}, \PValue{numberedbib}}{%
- Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
+ Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
wird nummeriert.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{bibliographynumbered}}}%
\entry{\PValue{chapterentrywithdots}, \PValue{chapterentrydotfill}}{%
\ChangedAt[2014/12]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
- Bei den Kapiteleinträgen der Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
+ Bei den Kapiteleinträgen der Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
werden Text und Seitenzahl ebenfalls durch eine punktierte Linie
miteinander verbunden.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{chapterentrywithdots}}}%
\entry{\PValue{chapterentrywithoutdots}, \PValue{chapterentryfill}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
- Bei den Kapiteleinträgen der Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
+ Bei den Kapiteleinträgen der Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
werden Text und Seitenzahl nicht durch eine punktierte Linie miteinander
verbunden. Dies entspricht der Voreinstellung.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{chapterentrywithoutdots}}}%
\entry{\PValue{flat}, \PValue{left}}{%
- Das Inhaltsverzeichnis erhält eine tabellarische Form. Die
- Gliederungsnummern sind dabei die erste Spalte, die Überschriften die
- zweite Spalte, die Seitenzahlen die dritte Spalte. Der Platz, der für die
- Gliederungsnummern reserviert wird, richtet sich nach dem benötigten Platz
+ Das Inhaltsverzeichnis erhält eine tabellarische Form. Die
+ Gliederungsnummern sind dabei die erste Spalte, die Ãœberschriften die
+ zweite Spalte, die Seitenzahlen die dritte Spalte. Der Platz, der für die
+ Gliederungsnummern reserviert wird, richtet sich nach dem benötigten Platz
des vorherigen \LaTeX-Laufs.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{flat}}}%
\entry{\PValue{graduated}, \PValue{indent}, \PValue{indented}}{%
- Das Inhaltsverzeichnis erhält eine hierarchische Form. Es steht nur ein
- begrenzter Platz für die Gliederungsnummern zur Verfügung. Dies entspricht
+ Das Inhaltsverzeichnis erhält eine hierarchische Form. Es steht nur ein
+ begrenzter Platz für die Gliederungsnummern zur Verfügung. Dies entspricht
der Voreinstellung.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{graduated}}}%
\entry{\PValue{indenttextentries}, \PValue{indentunnumbered},
@@ -445,18 +445,18 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
- \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis
- gesetzt. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit dem
- Text von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt.%
+ \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis
+ gesetzt. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit dem
+ Text von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}}}%
\entry{\PValue{index}, \PValue{idx}}{%
- Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis, ohne
+ Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis, ohne
dass es nummeriert wird.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{index}}}%
\entry{\PValue{indexnumbered}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
+ Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
wird nummeriert.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{index}}}%
\entry{\PValue{leftaligntextentries}, \PValue{leftalignunnumbered},
@@ -464,9 +464,9 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
- \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis
- gelöscht. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit der
- Nummer von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt. Dies entspricht
+ \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis
+ gelöscht. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit der
+ Nummer von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt. Dies entspricht
der Voreinstellung.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}}}%
\pventry{listof}{%
@@ -480,11 +480,11 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
werden nummeriert.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{listofnumbered}}}%
\entry{\PValue{nobibliography}, \PValue{nobib}}{%
- Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Dies
+ Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Dies
entspricht der Voreinstellung.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{nobibliography}}}%
\entry{\PValue{noindex}, \PValue{noidx}}{%
- Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Dies
+ Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Dies
entspricht der Voreinstellung.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{noindex}}}%
\pventry{nolistof}{%
@@ -494,12 +494,12 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{nolistof}}}%
\entry{\PValue{sectionentrywithdots}, \PValue{sectionentrydotfill}}{%
\ChangedAt[2014/12]{v3.15}{\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Bei den Abschnittseinträgen der Klasse \Class{scrartcl} werden Text und
+ Bei den Abschnittseinträgen der Klasse \Class{scrartcl} werden Text und
Seitenzahl ebenfalls durch eine punktierte Linie miteinander verbunden.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{sectionentrywithdots}}}%
\entry{\PValue{sectionentrywithoutdots}, \PValue{sectionentryfill}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Bei den Abschnittseinträgen der Klasse \Class{scrartcl} werden Text und
+ Bei den Abschnittseinträgen der Klasse \Class{scrartcl} werden Text und
Seitenzahl nicht durch eine punktierte Linie miteinander verbunden. Dies
entspricht der Voreinstellung.%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{sectionentrywithoutdots}}}%
@@ -514,23 +514,23 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\end{Declaration}
Diese\ChangedAt[2014/12]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Optionen
legen fest, ob im Inhaltsverzeichnis bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und
-\Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} für die
+\Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} für die
Kapitelebene beziehungsweise bei der Klasse
-\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} für die Abschnittsebene wie bei den
+\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} für die Abschnittsebene wie bei den
tieferen Ebenen auch eine punktierte Verbindungslinie zwischen dem Text des
-Eintrags und der zugehörigen Seitenzahl verwendet werden soll. Als
-\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
+Eintrags und der zugehörigen Seitenzahl verwendet werden soll. Als
+\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet
-werden. Voreingestellt ist für beide Optionen \PValue{false}, wodurch statt
+werden. Voreingestellt ist für beide Optionen \PValue{false}, wodurch statt
einer punktierten Linie lediglich ein Abstand verwendet wird.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentrydots}\LabelFontElement{chapterentrydots}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentrydots}\LabelFontElement{sectionentrydots}%
-Wird die punktierte Linie verwendet, so kann deren Schrift über die Elemente
+Wird die punktierte Linie verwendet, so kann deren Schrift über die Elemente
\FontElement{chapterentrydots}%
\important{\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\\
- \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} und \FontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber
-den Einstellungen für die Seitenzahlen in den Einträgen verändert werden
+ \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} und \FontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber
+den Einstellungen für die Seitenzahlen in den Einträgen verändert werden
(siehe auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}, \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, sowie
@@ -538,8 +538,8 @@ den Einstellungen für die Seitenzahlen in den Einträgen verändert werden
\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Die Voreinstellungen der Elemente
sind \autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements} auf
\autopageref{tab:maincls.tocelements} zu entnehmen. Es ist zu
-beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Pünktchen nur sauber untereinander
-stehen, wenn die Schrift aller Pünktchen identisch ist.%
+beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Pünktchen nur sauber untereinander
+stehen, wenn die Schrift aller Pünktchen identisch ist.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -548,22 +548,22 @@ stehen, wenn die Schrift aller Pünktchen identisch ist.%
\end{Declaration}%
Die Ausgabe des Inhaltsverzeichnisses wird mit \Macro{tableofcontents}
erreicht. Um ein korrektes Inhaltsverzeichnis zu erhalten, sind nach jeder
-Änderung mindestens zwei \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig. Mit der oben erläuterten
+Änderung mindestens zwei \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig. Mit der oben erläuterten
Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} kann der Umfang und die Form des
Inhaltsverzeichnisses beeinflusst werden. Nach einer Umschaltung der Option
-sind ebenfalls mindestens zwei weitere \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig.
+sind ebenfalls mindestens zwei weitere \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig.
-Der Eintrag für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} bei
+Der Eintrag für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} bei
\Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt}
beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section} bei
\Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl} sowie der Gliederungsebene
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part} wird nicht
-eingerückt. Gleichzeitig befinden sich zwischen dem Text der Gliederungsebene
-und der Seitenzahl in der Voreinstellung keine Pünktchen. Die typografischen
-Gründe dafür liegen in der normalerweise anderen Schriftart sowie der
-erwünschten Hervorhebung. Dies\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and
+eingerückt. Gleichzeitig befinden sich zwischen dem Text der Gliederungsebene
+und der Seitenzahl in der Voreinstellung keine Pünktchen. Die typografischen
+Gründe dafür liegen in der normalerweise anderen Schriftart sowie der
+erwünschten Hervorhebung. Dies\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} kann jedoch mit den zuvor
-dokumentierten Optionen geändert werden. Das Inhaltsverzeichnis \iffree{dieser
+dokumentierten Optionen geändert werden. Das Inhaltsverzeichnis \iffree{dieser
Anleitung}{dieses Buches} ist mit den Voreinstellungen gesetzt und dient als
Beispiel.
@@ -574,11 +574,11 @@ Die\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}\important{\FontElement{partentry}\\
\FontElement{chapterentry}\\
\FontElement{sectionentry}} Schrift der oberen
-Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ist über die Elemente
-\FontElement{partentry} und für \Class{scrbook}
-und \Class{scrreprt} über
+Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ist über die Elemente
+\FontElement{partentry} und für \Class{scrbook}
+und \Class{scrreprt} über
\FontElement{chapterentry} beziehungsweise
-\FontElement{sectionentry} für \Class{scrartcl}
+\FontElement{sectionentry} für \Class{scrartcl}
einstellbar.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{partentrypagenumber}%
\LabelFontElement{partentrypagenumber}%
@@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ einstellbar.
\LabelFontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentrypagenumber}%
\LabelFontElement{sectionentrypagenumber}%
-Die Schrift der Seitenzahlen kann jeweils davon abweichend über die Elemente
+Die Schrift der Seitenzahlen kann jeweils davon abweichend über die Elemente
\FontElement{partentrypagenumber}%
\important{\FontElement{partentrypagenumber}} und
\FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}%
@@ -599,22 +599,22 @@ eingestellt werden (siehe auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, sowie
\autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}).
Werden\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} je nach Klasse für die Kapitel- beziehungsweise
-Abschnittseinträge ebenfalls punktierte Verbindungslinien zu den Seitenzahlen
-über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}%
+ \Class{scrartcl}} je nach Klasse für die Kapitel- beziehungsweise
+Abschnittseinträge ebenfalls punktierte Verbindungslinien zu den Seitenzahlen
+über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{chapterentrywithdots}}%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{sectionentrywithdots}},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterentrydots}%
\IndexOption{chapterentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.sectionentrydots}%
\IndexOption{sectionentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} verwendet, so kann deren
-Schrift über die Elemente \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrydots}%
+Schrift über die Elemente \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrydots}%
\IndexFontElement{chapterentrydots}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrydots}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrydots}} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrydots}%
-\IndexFontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber den Einstellungen für die
-Seitenzahlen verändert werden. Die Voreinstellungen der Elemente sind
+\IndexFontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber den Einstellungen für die
+Seitenzahlen verändert werden. Die Voreinstellungen der Elemente sind
\autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements} zu entnehmen.
\begin{table}
% \centering
@@ -622,10 +622,10 @@ Seitenzahlen verändert werden. Die Voreinstellungen der Elemente sind
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}
- [Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente
+ [Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente
des Inhaltsverzeichnisses]
{\label{tab:maincls.tocelements}%
- \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}Vorein\-stel\-lung\-en der Schrift für die Elemente
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}Vorein\-stel\-lung\-en der Schrift für die Elemente
des In\-halts\-ver\-zeich\-nis\-ses}
[l]
\setlength{\tabcolsep}{.9\tabcolsep}% Umbruchoptimierung!
@@ -664,53 +664,53 @@ Gliederungsebenen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} bis
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection} und bei der Klasse \Class{scrartcl} die
Ebenen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} bis
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} in das Inhaltsverzeichnis
-aufgenommen. Dies wird über den Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} gesteuert. Dabei
-steht der Wert -1 für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, 0 für
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} und so weiter. Durch Setzen oder Erhöhen
-oder Verringern des Zählers kann bestimmt werden, bis zu welcher
-Gliederungsebene Einträge in das Inhaltsverzeichnis erfolgen sollen. Dies ist
-übrigens bei den Standardklassen ganz
+aufgenommen. Dies wird über den Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} gesteuert. Dabei
+steht der Wert -1 für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, 0 für
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} und so weiter. Durch Setzen oder Erhöhen
+oder Verringern des Zählers kann bestimmt werden, bis zu welcher
+Gliederungsebene Einträge in das Inhaltsverzeichnis erfolgen sollen. Dies ist
+übrigens bei den Standardklassen ganz
genauso. Im\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} Unterschied\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} zu
den Standardklassen muss sich bei \KOMAScript{} aber niemand diese Zuordnung
-merken. \KOMAScript{} definiert für jede Gliederungsebene eine Anweisung
-\Macro{\PName{Ebene}tocdepth} mit dem entsprechenden Wert, die für Zuweisungen
+merken. \KOMAScript{} definiert für jede Gliederungsebene eine Anweisung
+\Macro{\PName{Ebene}tocdepth} mit dem entsprechenden Wert, die für Zuweisungen
an \Counter{tocdepth} verwendet werden kann.
-Bitten beachten Sie\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Werte für \Counter{tocdepth}
+Bitten beachten Sie\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Werte für \Counter{tocdepth}
und \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth}\IndexCounter{secnumdepth} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth}) bei
-\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}
-nicht übereinstimmen. Dies wurde aus Gründen der Kompatibilität von der
-Standardklasse \Class{article} übernommen. Daher sollte beispielsweise die
+\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}
+nicht übereinstimmen. Dies wurde aus Gründen der Kompatibilität von der
+Standardklasse \Class{article} übernommen. Daher sollte beispielsweise die
Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partnumdepth}\IndexCmd{partnumdepth} auch
nicht zum Setzen von \Counter{tocdepth} verwendet werden.%
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie setzen einen Artikel, bei dem die Gliederungsebene
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} verwendet wird. Gehen wir weiter
davon aus, dass Sie diese Gliederungsebene aber nicht im Inhaltsverzeichnis
- haben wollen. Dann könnte die Präambel Ihres Dokuments wie folgt
+ haben wollen. Dann könnte die Präambel Ihres Dokuments wie folgt
aussehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrartcl}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{\subsectiontocdepth}
\end{lstcode}
- Sie setzen den Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} daher auf den in Anweisung
+ Sie setzen den Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} daher auf den in Anweisung
\Macro{subsectiontocdepth} gespeicherten Wert. Dass dies normalerweise der
- Wert 2 ist, müssen Sie sich also gar nicht merken.
+ Wert 2 ist, müssen Sie sich also gar nicht merken.
Wollen Sie stattdessen nur, dass eine Ebene weniger in das
- Inhaltsverzeichnis eingetragen wird als normalerweise, können Sie auch
- einfach vom voreingestellten Wert des Zählers \Counter{tocdepth} eins
+ Inhaltsverzeichnis eingetragen wird als normalerweise, können Sie auch
+ einfach vom voreingestellten Wert des Zählers \Counter{tocdepth} eins
abziehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrartcl}
\addtocounter{tocdepth}{-1}
\end{lstcode}
Den\textnote{Tipp!} Wert, den Sie zu \Counter{tocdepth} addieren oder davon
- subtrahieren müssen, können Sie nach mindestens zwei \LaTeX-Läufen einfach
- im Inhaltsverzeichnis abzählen.
+ subtrahieren müssen, können Sie nach mindestens zwei \LaTeX-Läufen einfach
+ im Inhaltsverzeichnis abzählen.
\end{Example}%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -722,14 +722,14 @@ nicht zum Setzen von \Counter{tocdepth} verwendet werden.%
\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage}% \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten}
-\section{Kopf und Fuß bei vordefinierten Seitenstilen}
+\section{Kopf und Fuß bei vordefinierten Seitenstilen}
\seclabel{pagestyle}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}%
Eine der allgemeinen Eigenschaften eines Dokuments ist der Seitenstil. Bei
{\LaTeX} versteht man unter dem Seitenstil in erster Linie den Inhalt der
-Kopf- und Fußzeilen.
+Kopf- und Fußzeilen.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -738,37 +738,37 @@ Kopf- und Fußzeilen.
\end{Declaration}%
Mit diesen Optionen kann eingestellt werden,
ob\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
-unter Kolumnentiteln oder über dem Fuß eine horizontale Linie\Index{Trennlinie}
-gewünscht wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann
-einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
+unter Kolumnentiteln oder über dem Fuß eine horizontale Linie\Index{Trennlinie}
+gewünscht wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann
+einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet
werden. Ein Aktivieren der Option \Option{headsepline} oder die Verwendung
-der Option ohne Wertübergabe schaltet die Linie unter den Kolumnentiteln
+der Option ohne Wertübergabe schaltet die Linie unter den Kolumnentiteln
ein. Ein Aktivieren der Option \Option{footsepline} oder die Verwendung der
-Option ohne Wertübergabe schaltet die Linie über der Fußzeile ein. Die
+Option ohne Wertübergabe schaltet die Linie über der Fußzeile ein. Die
Deaktivierung der Optionen schaltet die jeweilige Linie aus.
-Bei\textnote{Achtung!} den weiter unten erklärten Seitenstilen
+Bei\textnote{Achtung!} den weiter unten erklärten Seitenstilen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain}
-hat die Option \Option{headsepline} selbstverständlich keine Auswirkung, da
-hier auf einen Seitenkopf\Index{Seiten>Kopf} ausdrücklich verzichtet werden
+hat die Option \Option{headsepline} selbstverständlich keine Auswirkung, da
+hier auf einen Seitenkopf\Index{Seiten>Kopf} ausdrücklich verzichtet werden
soll. Typografisch betrachtet, hat eine solche Linie immer die Auswirkung,
-dass der Kopf optisch näher an den Text heranrückt. Dies bedeutet nun nicht,
-dass der Kopf räumlich weiter vom Textkörper\Index{Text>Bereich} weggerückt
-werden müsste. Stattdessen sollte der Kopf dann bei der Berechnung des
-Satzspiegels als zum Textkörper gehörend betrachtet werden. Dies wird bei
+dass der Kopf optisch näher an den Text heranrückt. Dies bedeutet nun nicht,
+dass der Kopf räumlich weiter vom Textkörper\Index{Text>Bereich} weggerückt
+werden müsste. Stattdessen sollte der Kopf dann bei der Berechnung des
+Satzspiegels als zum Textkörper gehörend betrachtet werden. Dies wird bei
\KOMAScript{} dadurch erreicht, dass Paket
\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}}\IndexPackage{typearea}
ebenfalls auf \Option{headsepline} reagiert und automatisch die Paketoption
\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}%
\IndexOption{headinclude}\important{\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}} mit
-gleichem Wert ausführt. Entsprechendes gilt auch für die Fußlinie. Im
+gleichem Wert ausführt. Entsprechendes gilt auch für die Fußlinie. Im
Gegensatz zu \Option{headsepline} wirkt sich die Option \Option{footsepline}
auch beim Seitenstil \PValue{plain} aus, da \PValue{plain} eine Seitenzahl im
-Fuß ausgibt.
+Fuß ausgibt.
-Die Optionen führen selbst keine automatische Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels
+Die Optionen führen selbst keine automatische Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels
aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option
\DescRef{typearea.option.DIV} mit den Werten
\hyperref[desc:typearea.option.DIV.last]{\PValue{last}} oder
@@ -780,8 +780,8 @@ aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option
Das Paket \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} (siehe
-\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) bietet weitere Einflussmöglichkeiten für
-Linien im Kopf und Fuß.%
+\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) bietet weitere Einflussmöglichkeiten für
+Linien im Kopf und Fuß.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -790,46 +790,46 @@ Linien im Kopf und Fuß.%
\Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}
\Macro{thispagestyle}\Parameter{lokaler Seitenstil}
\end{Declaration}%
-Üblicherweise wird zwischen vier verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden:
+Ãœblicherweise wird zwischen vier verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden:
\begin{description}
\item[{\PageStyle{empty}%
\BeginIndex[indexmain]{Pagestyle}{empty}\LabelPageStyle{empty}}] ist der
- Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. Dies ist
+ Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. Dies ist
bei {\KOMAScript} vollkommen identisch zu den Standardklassen.%
\item[{\PageStyle{headings}%
\BeginIndex[indexmain]{Pagestyle}{headings}\LabelPageStyle{headings}}] ist
- der Seitenstil für lebende Kolumnentitel. Das sind Kolumnentitel, bei denen
- Überschriften automatisch\Index[indexmain]{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} in den
- Seitenkopf übernommen werden. Im Internet oder in Beschreibungen zu
- \LaTeX-Paketen findet man auch häufig die englische Bezeichnung
- »\emph{running headline}«. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
+ der Seitenstil für lebende Kolumnentitel. Das sind Kolumnentitel, bei denen
+ Ãœberschriften automatisch\Index[indexmain]{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} in den
+ Seitenkopf übernommen werden. Im Internet oder in Beschreibungen zu
+ \LaTeX-Paketen findet man auch häufig die englische Bezeichnung
+ »\emph{running headline}«. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
Bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} und
\Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt} werden dabei im doppelseitigen Layout
- die Überschriften der Kapitel und der Abschnitte in der Kopfzeile wiederholt
+ die Ãœberschriften der Kapitel und der Abschnitte in der Kopfzeile wiederholt
-- bei {\KOMAScript}\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} jeweils
- außen, bei den Standardklassen innen. Die Seitenzahl wird bei {\KOMAScript}
- im Fuß außen, bei den Standardklassen im Kopf außen gesetzt. Im einseitigen
- Layout werden nur die Überschriften der Kapitel verwendet und bei
+ außen, bei den Standardklassen innen. Die Seitenzahl wird bei {\KOMAScript}
+ im Fuß außen, bei den Standardklassen im Kopf außen gesetzt. Im einseitigen
+ Layout werden nur die Ãœberschriften der Kapitel verwendet und bei
{\KOMAScript} zentriert im Kopf ausgegeben. Die Seitenzahlen werden bei
- {\KOMAScript} dann zentriert im Fuß gesetzt. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}}Bei
+ {\KOMAScript} dann zentriert im Fuß gesetzt. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}}Bei
\Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl} wird entsprechend verfahren, jedoch
eine Ebene tiefer bei Abschnitt und Unterabschnitt angesetzt, da die
Gliederungsebene Kapitel hier nicht existiert.
- Während die Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}
- automatische Kolumnentitel immer in Versalien -- also Großbuchstaben --
- setzen, verwendet {\KOMAScript} die Schreibweise, die in der Überschrift
- vorgefunden wurde. Dies hat verschiedene typografische Gründe. So sind
- Versalien als Auszeichnung eigentlich viel zu mächtig. Verwendet man sie
+ Während die Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}
+ automatische Kolumnentitel immer in Versalien -- also Großbuchstaben --
+ setzen, verwendet {\KOMAScript} die Schreibweise, die in der Ãœberschrift
+ vorgefunden wurde. Dies hat verschiedene typografische Gründe. So sind
+ Versalien als Auszeichnung eigentlich viel zu mächtig. Verwendet man sie
trotzdem, sollten sie um einen Punkt kleiner gesetzt und leicht gesperrt
werden (siehe hierzu beispielsweise \cite{JTschErfreulich}). All dies findet
bei den Standardklassen keine Beachtung.
- Darüber hinaus können bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit den Optionen
+ Darüber hinaus können bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit den Optionen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline} (siehe
- \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}) Linien unter dem Kopf und über
- dem Fuß gesetzt werden.%
+ \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}) Linien unter dem Kopf und über
+ dem Fuß gesetzt werden.%
\item[{\PageStyle{myheadings}%
\BeginIndex[indexmain]{Pagestyle}{myheadings}\LabelPageStyle{myheadings}}]
entspricht weitgehend dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{headings}, allerdings werden
@@ -845,9 +845,9 @@ Linien im Kopf und Fuß.%
ist der Seitenstil, bei dem keinerlei Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel}
verwendet, sondern nur eine Seitenzahl\Index{Seiten>Zahl}\Index{Paginierung}
ausgegeben wird. Bei\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} den
- Standardklassen wird diese Seitenzahl immer mittig im Fuß ausgegeben. Bei
+ Standardklassen wird diese Seitenzahl immer mittig im Fuß ausgegeben. Bei
{\KOMAScript} erfolgt die Ausgabe im doppelseitigen\Index{doppelseitig}
- Layout stattdessen außen im Fuß. Der einseitige Seitenstil entspricht bei
+ Layout stattdessen außen im Fuß. Der einseitige Seitenstil entspricht bei
{\KOMAScript} dem der Standardklassen.%
\end{description}
@@ -858,30 +858,30 @@ Der\important{\Macro{pagestyle}} Seitenstil kann jederzeit mit Hilfe der
Mit \Macro{pagestyle} kann der Seitenstil jederzeit %
\fi %
gesetzt werden. Verwendet\textnote{Tipp!} man \Macro{pagestyle} vor
-Anweisungen, die einen Seitenumbruch mit Einfügen einer
-Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite}\textnote{Vakatseite} herbeiführen können, und
-soll die Änderung erst ab der neuen Seite gelten, so ist ein
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} davor nützlich.
+Anweisungen, die einen Seitenumbruch mit Einfügen einer
+Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite}\textnote{Vakatseite} herbeiführen können, und
+soll die Änderung erst ab der neuen Seite gelten, so ist ein
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} davor nützlich.
%
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur
-Üblicherweise verwendet man \Macro{pagestyle} aber nur einmal zu
-Beginn des Dokuments oder in der Präambel.
+Ãœblicherweise verwendet man \Macro{pagestyle} aber nur einmal zu
+Beginn des Dokuments oder in der Präambel.
%
\fi
-Für\important{\Macro{thispagestyle}} eine Änderung des Seitenstils nur der
+Für\important{\Macro{thispagestyle}} eine Änderung des Seitenstils nur der
aktuellen Seite verwendet man stattdessen die Anweisung
\Macro{thispagestyle}. Dies geschieht auch an einigen Stellen im Dokument
automatisch. Beispielsweise wird bei allen Kapitelanfangsseiten implizit die
Anweisung
\Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle}}
-ausgeführt.
+ausgeführt.
Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass die Umschaltung zwischen
automatischen und manuellen Kolumnentiteln bei Verwendung von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} nicht
-mehr über den Seitenstil, sondern mit speziellen Anweisungen erfolgt. Die
+mehr über den Seitenstil, sondern mit speziellen Anweisungen erfolgt. Die
beiden Seitenstile \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{myheadings} sollten
nicht zusammen mit diesem Paket verwendet werden.
@@ -890,16 +890,16 @@ nicht zusammen mit diesem Paket verwendet werden.
\LabelFontElement{pagehead}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}%
-Um die Schriftarten von Kopf und Fuß der Seite oder der Seitenzahl zu
-ändern\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{%
+Um die Schriftarten von Kopf und Fuß der Seite oder der Seitenzahl zu
+ändern\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{%
\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}, %
verwenden Sie die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Für den Kopf und den Fuß ist dabei
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Für den Kopf und den Fuß ist dabei
das gleiche Element \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}%
-\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}} zuständig. Das Element für die
-Seitenzahl innerhalb des Kopfes oder Fußes heißt
+\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}} zuständig. Das Element für die
+Seitenzahl innerhalb des Kopfes oder Fußes heißt
\FontElement{pagenumber}\IndexFontElement{pagenumber}%
\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}. Das ebenfalls in den \KOMAScript-Klassen
bereitgestellte Element \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot}%
@@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ bereitgestellte Element \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot}%
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}) einen Seitenstil
-definiert, bei dem auch der Fuß Text enthält.
+definiert, bei dem auch der Fuß Text enthält.
Die Voreinstellungen sind in \autoref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot} zu
finden.
@@ -919,10 +919,10 @@ finden.
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \addtokomafont{caption}{\raggedright}%
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Seitenstils}]
+ [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Seitenstils}]
{\label{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot}%
\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Vorein\-stellungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Seitenstils}
+ Vorein\-stellungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Seitenstils}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
\toprule
@@ -941,17 +941,17 @@ finden.
%
\begin{Example}
\leavevmode\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.pagestyle}%
- Angenommen, Sie wollen Kopf und Fuß einen Schriftgrad kleiner und kursiv
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen Kopf und Fuß einen Schriftgrad kleiner und kursiv
setzen. Die Seitenzahl soll jedoch nicht kursiv, sondern fett gesetzt
- werden. Davon abgesehen, dass das Ergebnis grauenvoll aussehen wird, können
+ werden. Davon abgesehen, dass das Ergebnis grauenvoll aussehen wird, können
Sie dies wie folgt erreichen:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomafont{pageheadfoot}{%
\normalfont\normalcolor\itshape\small}
\setkomafont{pagenumber}{\normalfont\bfseries}
\end{lstcode}
- Wollen Sie hingegen lediglich, dass zusätzlich zur bereits voreingestellten
- schrägen Variante ebenfalls eine kleinere Schrift verwendet wird, so genügt:
+ Wollen Sie hingegen lediglich, dass zusätzlich zur bereits voreingestellten
+ schrägen Variante ebenfalls eine kleinere Schrift verwendet wird, so genügt:
\begin{lstcode}
\addtokomafont{pagehead}{\small}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -962,10 +962,10 @@ finden.
\autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}).
\end{Example}
-Es ist an dieser Stelle nicht möglich, Versalien für die automatischen
-Kolumnentitel zu erzwingen. Wenn Sie dies wünschen, müssen Sie beispielsweise
+Es ist an dieser Stelle nicht möglich, Versalien für die automatischen
+Kolumnentitel zu erzwingen. Wenn Sie dies wünschen, müssen Sie beispielsweise
\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd{MakeMarkcase} entsprechend
-umdefinieren. Es wird jedoch empfohlen, in solchen Fällen das Paket
+umdefinieren. Es wird jedoch empfohlen, in solchen Fällen das Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} zu verwenden
(siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase}).
@@ -974,20 +974,20 @@ Werden\textnote{Tipp!} eigene Seitenstile definiert, sind eventuell die
Befehle \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pageheadfoot},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber} sowie
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pagefoot}
-nützlich. Insbesondere falls Sie dafür nicht das \KOMAScript-Paket
+nützlich. Insbesondere falls Sie dafür nicht das \KOMAScript-Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} (siehe
\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}), sondern beispielsweise das Paket
\Package{fancyhdr}\IndexPackage{fancyhdr}\important{\Package{fancyhdr}} (siehe
-\cite{package:fancyhdr}) einsetzen, können Sie diese Befehle in Ihren
-Definitionen verwenden. Dadurch bleiben Sie zu \KOMAScript{} möglichst
+\cite{package:fancyhdr}) einsetzen, können Sie diese Befehle in Ihren
+Definitionen verwenden. Dadurch bleiben Sie zu \KOMAScript{} möglichst
kompatibel. Verwenden Sie diese Befehle in Ihren eigenen Definitionen nicht,
-so bleiben Schriftänderungen wie in den vorangehenden Beispielen
+so bleiben Schriftänderungen wie in den vorangehenden Beispielen
unbeachtet. Das Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
-\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} sorgt selbst für maximale
-Kompatibilität. Solange beispielsweise für die Seitenzahl nicht direkt
+\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} sorgt selbst für maximale
+Kompatibilität. Solange beispielsweise für die Seitenzahl nicht direkt
\DescRef{\LabelBase-experts.cmd.thepage}\IndexCmd{thepage}, sondern
-das dafür vorgesehene
+das dafür vorgesehene
\DescRef{\LabelBase-experts.cmd.pagemark}\IndexCmd{pagemark} verwendet
wird.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1009,14 +1009,14 @@ verwendet. Im einseitigen Satz existiert nur die rechte Marke. Bei Verwendung
des Pakets \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} steht
-außerdem die Anweisung \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}%
+außerdem die Anweisung \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}%
\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}} zur
-Verfügung.
+Verfügung.
-Die Anweisungen können auch zusammen mit anderen Seitenstilen verwendet
+Die Anweisungen können auch zusammen mit anderen Seitenstilen verwendet
werden. Bei Kombination mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln, etwa dem Seitenstil
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}, ist der
-Wirkungsbereich allerdings bis zum nächsten automatischen Setzen der
+Wirkungsbereich allerdings bis zum nächsten automatischen Setzen der
entsprechenden Marke begrenzt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1032,12 +1032,12 @@ entsprechenden Marke begrenzt.%
\Index{Kapitel>Seitenstil}%
\Index{Stichwortverzeichnis>Seitenstil}%
Auf einigen Seiten wird mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.thispagestyle}
-automatisch ein anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Welcher Seitenstil dies ist, wird
+automatisch ein anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Welcher Seitenstil dies ist, wird
diesen vier Makros entnommen, wobei \Macro{partpagestyle} und
\Macro{chapterpagestyle}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} nur bei
den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} nicht jedoch bei
\Class{scrartcl} existieren. In der Voreinstellung ist der Seitenstil in allen
-vier Fällen \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}. Die
+vier Fällen \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}. Die
Bedeutung der einzelnen Makros entnehmen Sie bitte
\autoref{tab:specialpagestyles}.
%
@@ -1047,7 +1047,7 @@ Bedeutung der einzelnen Makros entnehmen Sie bitte
\label{tab:specialpagestyles}
\begin{desctabular}
\mentry{titlepagestyle}{Seitenstil der Seite mit der Titelei bei
- Titelköpfen (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.titlepage})}%
+ Titelköpfen (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.titlepage})}%
\mentry{partpagestyle}{Seitenstil der Seiten mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}-Titeln
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure})}%
\mentry{chapterpagestyle}{Seitenstil auf Kapitelanfangsseiten (siehe
@@ -1057,28 +1057,29 @@ Bedeutung der einzelnen Makros entnehmen Sie bitte
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
%
-Die Seitenstile können mit Hilfe von \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert
+Die Seitenstile können mit Hilfe von \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert
werden.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie wollen nicht, dass die Seiten mit der
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}-Überschrift mit einer Nummer versehen
- werden. Dann setzen Sie folgende Anweisung beispielsweise in der Präambel
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}-Ãœberschrift mit einer Nummer versehen
+ werden. Dann setzen Sie folgende Anweisung beispielsweise in der Präambel
Ihres Dokuments:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\partpagestyle}{empty}
\end{lstcode}
Wie Sie auf \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty} erfahren haben, ist
der Seitenstil \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty}
- genau das, was in diesem Beispiel verlangt wird. Natürlich können Sie auch
+ genau das, was in diesem Beispiel verlangt wird. Natürlich können Sie auch
einen selbst definierten Seitenstil verwenden.
Angenommen, Sie haben mit dem Paket
- \hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer})
- oder Paket \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}
- (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) einen eigenen Seitenstil für
- Kapitelanfangsseiten\Index{Kapitel>Seitenstil}%
+ \hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}} (siehe
+ \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyles}) oder Paket
+ \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} (siehe
+ \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs}) einen eigenen
+ Seitenstil für Kapitelanfangsseiten\Index{Kapitel>Seitenstil}%
\textnote{Kapitel\-anfangs\-seiten} definiert. Diesem Seitenstil haben Sie
- den passenden Namen \PValue{chapter} gegeben. Um ihn auch tatsächlich zu
+ den passenden Namen \PValue{chapter} gegeben. Um ihn auch tatsächlich zu
verwenden, definieren Sie \Macro{chapterpagestyle} entsprechend um:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\chapterpagestyle}{chapter}
@@ -1099,10 +1100,10 @@ werden.
\pagestyle{headings}
\renewcommand*{\chapterpagestyle}{plain}
\end{lstcode}
- Sie können die Umdefinierung des Seitenstils für Kapitelanfangsseiten aber
- auch lokal halten. Das hat den Vorteil, dass Sie dann keine Annahmen über
- die vor der Änderung gültige Einstellung treffen müssen. Die Änderung
- des Seitenstils selbst können Sie gleichermaßen lokal halten:
+ Sie können die Umdefinierung des Seitenstils für Kapitelanfangsseiten aber
+ auch lokal halten. Das hat den Vorteil, dass Sie dann keine Annahmen über
+ die vor der Änderung gültige Einstellung treffen müssen. Die Änderung
+ des Seitenstils selbst können Sie gleichermaßen lokal halten:
\begin{lstcode}
\clearpage
\begingroup
@@ -1113,13 +1114,13 @@ werden.
\endgroup
\end{lstcode}
Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie jedoch, dass Sie niemals eine nummerierte
- Gliederungsüberschrift in eine Gruppe packen sollten. Anderenfalls können
+ Gliederungsüberschrift in eine Gruppe packen sollten. Anderenfalls können
Anweisungen wie \Macro{label} rasch zu unvorhergesehenen Ergebnissen
- führen.
+ führen.
Auf \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead} in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}
werden Sie die Anweisung \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead} kennenlernen,
- mit der eine Lösung noch einfacher ist:
+ mit der eine Lösung noch einfacher ist:
\begin{lstcode}
\AfterTOCHead[toc]{%
\thispagestyle{empty}%
@@ -1132,17 +1133,17 @@ werden.
\end{Example}
\begin{Explain}
- Wer nun glaubt, er könne auf Kapitelanfangsseiten ebenfalls mit
+ Wer nun glaubt, er könne auf Kapitelanfangsseiten ebenfalls mit
lebenden Kolumnentiteln arbeiten, indem er einfach
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\chapterpagestyle}{headings}
\end{lstcode}
verwendet, sollte in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos} auf
- \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} Näheres über die
- Hintergründe zu \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} nachlesen. Auch die
- Ausführungen zu \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark} ab
+ \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} Näheres über die
+ Hintergründe zu \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} nachlesen. Auch die
+ Ausführungen zu \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark} ab
Seite \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark} in
- \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts}, \autoref{part:forExperts} können
+ \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts}, \autoref{part:forExperts} können
hierzu wichtige Informationen liefern.%
\end{Explain}
%
@@ -1154,17 +1155,17 @@ werden.
\end{Declaration}
Diese Anweisung funktioniert bei \KOMAScript{} in der gleichen Weise wie
bei den Standardklassen. Genau genommen handelt es sich dabei weder um eine
-Fähigkeit der Standardklassen noch der \KOMAScript-Klassen, sondern um eine
+Fähigkeit der Standardklassen noch der \KOMAScript-Klassen, sondern um eine
Anweisung des \LaTeX-Kerns. Sie wird verwendet, um den
-\PName{Nummerierungsstil} für die Seitenzahlen umzuschalten.
+\PName{Nummerierungsstil} für die Seitenzahlen umzuschalten.
Die Umschaltung gilt ab sofort, also ab der Seite, auf der diese Anweisung
aufgerufen wird. Gegebenenfalls sollte also zuvor mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage} oder besser
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage}}%
-\IndexCmd{cleardoubleoddpage} diese Seite erst beendet werden. Mögliche
-Angaben für den \PName{Nummerierungsstil} sind \autoref{tab:numberKind} zu
+\IndexCmd{cleardoubleoddpage} diese Seite erst beendet werden. Mögliche
+Angaben für den \PName{Nummerierungsstil} sind \autoref{tab:numberKind} zu
entnehmen.
%
\begin{table}
@@ -1176,57 +1177,57 @@ entnehmen.
\begin{captionbeside}
{\label{tab:numberKind}%
\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Verfügbare Nummerierungsstile für Seitenzahlen}
+ Verfügbare Nummerierungsstile für Seitenzahlen}
\begin{tabular}[t]{lll}
\toprule
Nummerierungsstil & Beispiel & Bedeutung \\
\midrule
\PValue{arabic} & 8 & arabische Zahlen \\
- \PValue{roman} & viii & kleine römische Zahlen \\
- \PValue{Roman} & VIII & große römische Zahlen \\
+ \PValue{roman} & viii & kleine römische Zahlen \\
+ \PValue{Roman} & VIII & große römische Zahlen \\
\PValue{alph} & h & Kleinbuchstaben \\
- \PValue{Alph} & H & Großbuchstaben \\
+ \PValue{Alph} & H & Großbuchstaben \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{captionbeside}
\end{table}
Der\textnote{Achtung!} Aufruf von \Macro{pagenumbering} setzt immer die
-Seitenzahl\Index{Seiten>Zahl} zurück. Die aktuelle Seite bekommt also die
-Nummer 1 im gewählten \PName{Nummerierungsstil}. Damit bei doppelseitigen
+Seitenzahl\Index{Seiten>Zahl} zurück. Die aktuelle Seite bekommt also die
+Nummer 1 im gewählten \PName{Nummerierungsstil}. Damit bei doppelseitigen
Dokumenten diese neue Seite auch wirklich auf eine gerade Seite folgt, die
linke Seite also nicht etwa fehlt, sollte man daher vor \Macro{pagenumbering}
immer \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage}}%
-\IndexCmd{cleardoubleoddpage} einfügen. Näheres zu einer dabei gegebenenfalls
-eingefügten Vakatseite erfahren Sie im nächsten Abschnitt.
+\IndexCmd{cleardoubleoddpage} einfügen. Näheres zu einer dabei gegebenenfalls
+eingefügten Vakatseite erfahren Sie im nächsten Abschnitt.
\begin{Explain}
- Lassen Sie mich noch ein Wort zu einem häufigen Fehler verlieren, den man in
- diversen Vorlagen findet, die im Internet kursieren. Wenn Sie -- natürlich
+ Lassen Sie mich noch ein Wort zu einem häufigen Fehler verlieren, den man in
+ diversen Vorlagen findet, die im Internet kursieren. Wenn Sie -- natürlich
ohne den Eingangskommentar -- auf Zeilen wie:
\begin{lstcode}
- % Achtung dieses Beispiel enthält Fehler!
- % Beachten Sie bitte die Erklärungen im Text!
+ % Achtung dieses Beispiel enthält Fehler!
+ % Beachten Sie bitte die Erklärungen im Text!
\tableofcontents
\pagenumbering{arabic}
\setcounter{page}{1}
\end{lstcode}
- stoßen, so ist das ein untrügliches Zeichen dafür, dass der Ersteller dieser
- Vorlage obige Ausführungen nicht gelesen oder nicht verstanden hat. Da
+ stoßen, so ist das ein untrügliches Zeichen dafür, dass der Ersteller dieser
+ Vorlage obige Ausführungen nicht gelesen oder nicht verstanden hat. Da
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tableofcontents} das Inhaltsverzeichnis zwar
- ausgibt, aber die letzte Seite nicht automatisch beendet, wird bereits für
+ ausgibt, aber die letzte Seite nicht automatisch beendet, wird bereits für
diese letzte Seite des Inhaltsverzeichnisses die Seitennummerierung
- umgeschaltet. Sie erhält damit die arabische Seitenzahl 1. Es fehlt also
+ umgeschaltet. Sie erhält damit die arabische Seitenzahl 1. Es fehlt also
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} vor
\Macro{pagenumbering}. Ebenso ist die letzte Zeile mit dem Setzen der
- Seitennummerierung auf 1 überflüssig, da dies bereits von
+ Seitennummerierung auf 1 überflüssig, da dies bereits von
\Macro{pagenumbering} erledigt wird.
- Teilweise findet man -- natürlich ohne den Eingangskommentar -- auch:
+ Teilweise findet man -- natürlich ohne den Eingangskommentar -- auch:
\begin{lstcode}
- % Achtung dieses Beispiel enthält Fehler!
- % Beachten Sie bitte die Erklärungen im Text!
+ % Achtung dieses Beispiel enthält Fehler!
+ % Beachten Sie bitte die Erklärungen im Text!
\tableofcontents
\pagebreak
\pagenumbering{arabic}
@@ -1234,51 +1235,51 @@ eingefügten Vakatseite erfahren Sie im nächsten Abschnitt.
\end{lstcode}
Hier hat der Ersteller versucht, das Problem mit der letzten Seite des
Inhaltsverzeichnisses mit Hilfe von \Macro{pagebreak}\IndexCmd{pagebreak} zu
- lösen.
+ lösen.
- Diese Lösung ist aber leider auch nicht viel besser. Hier wird die letzte
- Seite des Inhaltsverzeichnisses auf die nächste Seite umbrochen. Damit
- werden bei einem doppelseitigen Dokument unter Umständen die Einträge auf
- der letzten Seite mit einem erhöhten vertikalen Abstand gesetzt (siehe
+ Diese Lösung ist aber leider auch nicht viel besser. Hier wird die letzte
+ Seite des Inhaltsverzeichnisses auf die nächste Seite umbrochen. Damit
+ werden bei einem doppelseitigen Dokument unter Umständen die Einträge auf
+ der letzten Seite mit einem erhöhten vertikalen Abstand gesetzt (siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.flushbottom} auf
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.flushbottom}). \Macro{pagebreak} ist hier
eindeutig die falsche Anweisung.
Aber auch \Macro{newpage}\IndexCmd{newpage} oder
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage} würden bei einem doppelseitigen Dokument
- nicht genügen. Hätte die letzte Seite des Inhaltsverzeichnisses
- beispielsweise die römische Nummer vii, so würde auf die römisch nummerierte
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage} würden bei einem doppelseitigen Dokument
+ nicht genügen. Hätte die letzte Seite des Inhaltsverzeichnisses
+ beispielsweise die römische Nummer vii, so würde auf die römisch nummerierte
rechte Seite nun unmittelbar die arabisch nummerierte rechte Seite 1
- folgen. Eine linke Seite zwischen diesen beiden Seiten würde im Dokument
- fehlen, was beim späteren Druck erhebliche Probleme bereiten könnte.
+ folgen. Eine linke Seite zwischen diesen beiden Seiten würde im Dokument
+ fehlen, was beim späteren Druck erhebliche Probleme bereiten könnte.
Mein Rat: Vermeiden Sie die Verwendung von Vorlagen, die bereits in solch
- einfachen Dingen Fehler enthalten. Korrekt wäre übrigens:
+ einfachen Dingen Fehler enthalten. Korrekt wäre übrigens:
\begin{lstcode}
\tableofcontents
\cleardoubleoddpage
\pagenumbering{arabic}
\end{lstcode}
Das gilt auch, wenn mit \Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} eine
- Klasse verwendet wird, bei der üblicherweise nach dem Inhaltsverzeichnis
+ Klasse verwendet wird, bei der üblicherweise nach dem Inhaltsverzeichnis
keine neue Seite begonnen wird. Schaltet man die Seitennummerierung um, so
muss eine neue rechte Seite begonnen werden. Wollen Sie eine solche
- Umschaltung nicht, so sollten Sie den Nummerierungsstil der Seiten über das
+ Umschaltung nicht, so sollten Sie den Nummerierungsstil der Seiten über das
gesamte Dokument konsequent durchhalten, ohne ihn zwischendurch zu
- ändern.
+ ändern.
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Bei Artikeln oder anderen kurzen Dokumenten ist das generell zu
empfehlen.
\fi
- Einfacher wird die Änderung des Nummerierungsstils bei Verwendung von
+ Einfacher wird die Änderung des Nummerierungsstils bei Verwendung von
\Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}}. Dort werden Sie durch
die beiden Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.frontmatter}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.frontmatter}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.mainmatter}}%
\IndexCmd{fontmatter} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.mainmatter}%
- \IndexCmd{mainmatter} bei der am häufigsten verwendeten Umschaltung
- unterstützt. Nähere Informationen entnehmen Sie bitte
+ \IndexCmd{mainmatter} bei der am häufigsten verwendeten Umschaltung
+ unterstützt. Nähere Informationen entnehmen Sie bitte
\autoref{sec:maincls.separation}, ab
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.mainmatter}.%
\end{Explain}%
@@ -1288,15 +1289,15 @@ eingefügten Vakatseite erfahren Sie im nächsten Abschnitt.
\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Vakatseiten}
-\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten}
+\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten}
\section[Abgrenzung]{Abgrenzung\protect\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}}}
\seclabel{separation}
-Bei Büchern gibt es teilweise die Grobauf"|teilung in
+Bei Büchern gibt es teilweise die Grobauf"|teilung in
\emph{Vorspann}\Index{Vorspann}, \emph{Hauptteil}\Index{Hauptteil} und
-\emph{Nachspann}\Index{Nachspann}. Auch \KOMAScript{} bietet für
-\Class{scrbook} diese Möglichkeit.
+\emph{Nachspann}\Index{Nachspann}. Auch \KOMAScript{} bietet für
+\Class{scrbook} diese Möglichkeit.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -1305,29 +1306,29 @@ Bei Büchern gibt es teilweise die Grobauf"|teilung in
\Macro{backmatter}
\end{Declaration}%
Mit \Macro{frontmatter}\important{\Macro{frontmatter}} wird der Vorspann
-eingeleitet. Im Vorspann werden die nummerierten Seiten mit römischen
-Seitenzahlen versehen. Kapitelüberschriften sind im Vorspann nicht
-nummeriert. Abschnittsüberschriften wären jedoch nummeriert, gingen von
-Kapitelnummer~0 aus und wären außerdem über Kapitelgrenzen hinweg durchgehend
-nummeriert. Dies spielt jedoch keine Rolle, da der Vorspann allenfalls für die
+eingeleitet. Im Vorspann werden die nummerierten Seiten mit römischen
+Seitenzahlen versehen. Kapitelüberschriften sind im Vorspann nicht
+nummeriert. Abschnittsüberschriften wären jedoch nummeriert, gingen von
+Kapitelnummer~0 aus und wären außerdem über Kapitelgrenzen hinweg durchgehend
+nummeriert. Dies spielt jedoch keine Rolle, da der Vorspann allenfalls für die
Titelei, das Inhalts-\Index{Inhaltsverzeichnis},
Abbildungs-\Index{Abbildungen>Verzeichnis} und
Tabellenverzeichnis\Index{Tabellen>Verzeichnis} und ein
Vorwort\Index{Vorwort} verwendet wird. Das Vorwort kann also als normales
Kapitel gesetzt werden. Ein Vorwort sollte niemals in Abschnitte unterteilt,
-sondern möglichst kurz gefasst werden. Im Vorwort wird also keine tiefere
-Gliederungsebene als Kapitel benötigt.
+sondern möglichst kurz gefasst werden. Im Vorwort wird also keine tiefere
+Gliederungsebene als Kapitel benötigt.
-Für den Fall, dass der Anwender dies anders sieht und nummerierte
+Für den Fall, dass der Anwender dies anders sieht und nummerierte
Abschnitte\Index{Abschnitt>Nummer} in den Kapiteln des Vorspanns haben will,
-enthält ab Version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}}%
+enthält ab Version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.97e}} die Nummerierung der
-Abschnitte keine Kapitelnummer. Diese Änderung gibt es nur, wenn eine
-Kompatibilität ab Version~2.97e eingestellt ist (siehe Option
+Abschnitte keine Kapitelnummer. Diese Änderung gibt es nur, wenn eine
+Kompatibilität ab Version~2.97e eingestellt ist (siehe Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version},
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). Es wird ausdrücklich darauf
-hingewiesen, dass dadurch bezüglich der Nummern eine Verwechslung mit
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). Es wird ausdrücklich darauf
+hingewiesen, dass dadurch bezüglich der Nummern eine Verwechslung mit
Kapitelnummern gegeben ist! Die Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} und \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec})
@@ -1335,26 +1336,26 @@ sind aus Sicht des Autors im Vorspann deshalb unbedingt vorzuziehen!
Ab Version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.97e}} enthalten auch die
-Nummern für Gleitumgebungen wie Tabellen\Index{Tabellen>Nummern} und
+Nummern für Gleitumgebungen wie Tabellen\Index{Tabellen>Nummern} und
Abbildungen\Index{Abbildungen>Nummern} und die
Gleichungsnummern\Index{Gleichungen>Nummern} im Vorspann keinen
Kapitelanteil. Auch dies erfordert eine entsprechende
-Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version},
+Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version},
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}).
Mit \Macro{mainmatter}\important{\Macro{mainmatter}} wird der Hauptteil
eingeleitet. Existiert kein Vorspann, so kann diese Anweisung auch
entfallen. Im Hauptteil sind arabische Seitenzahlen voreingestellt. Die
-Seitenzählung beginnt im Hauptteil neu mit der 1.
+Seitenzählung beginnt im Hauptteil neu mit der 1.
Mit \Macro{backmatter}\important{\Macro{backmatter}} wird der Nachspann
-eingeleitet. Was zum Nachspann gehört, ist unterschiedlich. Manchmal wird im
+eingeleitet. Was zum Nachspann gehört, ist unterschiedlich. Manchmal wird im
Nachspann nur das Literaturverzeichnis\Index{Literaturverzeichnis}, manchmal
nur das Stichwortverzeichnis\Index{Stichwortverzeichnis} gesetzt. Manchmal
-erscheint der gesamte Anhang im Nachspann. Der Nachspann gleicht bezüglich der
-Gliederungsüberschriften dem Vorspann. Eine getrennte Seitennummerierung ist
-jedoch nicht vorgesehen. Falls Sie dies ebenfalls benötigen, bedienen Sie sich
+erscheint der gesamte Anhang im Nachspann. Der Nachspann gleicht bezüglich der
+Gliederungsüberschriften dem Vorspann. Eine getrennte Seitennummerierung ist
+jedoch nicht vorgesehen. Falls Sie dies ebenfalls benötigen, bedienen Sie sich
bitte der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagenumbering}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagenumbering}} aus
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle},
@@ -1376,16 +1377,16 @@ Teile, Kapitel, Abschnitte und weitere Gliederungsebenen.
\OptionVName{open}{Methode}
\end{Declaration}%
Bei\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} den \KOMAScript-Klassen
-\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} kann gewählt werden, wo im doppelseitigen
+\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} kann gewählt werden, wo im doppelseitigen
Satz neue Kapitel beginnen. In der Voreinstellung beginnen bei
-\Class{scrreprt} neue Kapitel\Index{Kapitel>Anfang} auf der nächsten neuen
-Seite. Dies entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{any}. Demgegenüber beginnen
-bei \Class{scrbook} neue Kapitel auf der nächsten rechten Seite. Dies
-entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{right} und ist bei den meisten Büchern
-üblich. In einigen Fällen sollen neue Kapitel jedoch auf der linken Seite
+\Class{scrreprt} neue Kapitel\Index{Kapitel>Anfang} auf der nächsten neuen
+Seite. Dies entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{any}. Demgegenüber beginnen
+bei \Class{scrbook} neue Kapitel auf der nächsten rechten Seite. Dies
+entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{right} und ist bei den meisten Büchern
+üblich. In einigen Fällen sollen neue Kapitel jedoch auf der linken Seite
einer kompletten Doppelseite beginnen. Dies entspricht der \PName{Methode}
\PValue{left}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}.
-Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte findet sich in
+Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte findet sich in
\autoref{tab:maincls.open}. Dabei sind auch die Auswirkungen auf
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} sowie
% die vier \KOMAScript"=Anweisungen
@@ -1397,8 +1398,8 @@ Anweisungen, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}) angegeben.
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{open}}]{Mögliche Werte für
- Option \Option{open} zur Auswahl von Umbrüchen mit Vakatseiten bei
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{open}}]{Mögliche Werte für
+ Option \Option{open} zur Auswahl von Umbrüchen mit Vakatseiten bei
\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}}
\begin{desctabular}
\pventry{any}{%
@@ -1420,8 +1421,8 @@ Anweisungen, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, (siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch
- und fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im
- doppelseitigen Satz auf die nächste linke Seite zu gelangen.%
+ und fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im
+ doppelseitigen Satz auf die nächste linke Seite zu gelangen.%
\IndexOption{open~=\textKValue{left}}}%
\pventry{right}{%
Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden
@@ -1431,8 +1432,8 @@ Anweisungen, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, (siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch
- und fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite ein, um im doppelseitigen Satz
- auf die nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen.%
+ und fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite ein, um im doppelseitigen Satz
+ auf die nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen.%
\IndexOption{open~=\textKValue{right}}}%
\end{desctabular}
\label{tab:maincls.open}
@@ -1442,7 +1443,7 @@ Da im einseitigen Satz nicht zwischen linken und rechten Seiten unterschieden
wird, hat die Option dort keine Wirkung.
Bei der Klasse \Class{scrartcl} ist die oberste Gliederungsebene unter dem
-Teil der Abschnitt. Daher unterstützt \Class{scrartcl} diese Option nicht.%
+Teil der Abschnitt. Daher unterstützt \Class{scrartcl} diese Option nicht.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1453,41 +1454,41 @@ Teil der Abschnitt. Daher unterstützt \Class{scrartcl} diese Option nicht.%
\Macro{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}%
Bei\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} den Standardklassen
-\Class{book} und \Class{report} werden Kapitelüberschriften%
-\Index{Kapitel>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} in der Form ausgegeben, dass zunächst
-in einer Zeile »Kapitel«\iffree{\footnote{Bei Verwendung einer anderen Sprache
- als Deutsch wird »Kapitel« selbstverständlich in der jeweiligen Sprache
- gesetzt.}}{\footnote{Die Ausgabe erfolgt tatsächlich in der aktuell
+\Class{book} und \Class{report} werden Kapitelüberschriften%
+\Index{Kapitel>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} in der Form ausgegeben, dass zunächst
+in einer Zeile »Kapitel«\iffree{\footnote{Bei Verwendung einer anderen Sprache
+ als Deutsch wird »Kapitel« selbstverständlich in der jeweiligen Sprache
+ gesetzt.}}{\footnote{Die Ausgabe erfolgt tatsächlich in der aktuell
aktiven Sprache.}}, %
-gefolgt von der Kapitelnummer steht. Erst ab der nächsten Zeile wird dann die
-Überschrift in linksbündigem Flattersatz ausgegeben. Bei {\KOMAScript} kann
+gefolgt von der Kapitelnummer steht. Erst ab der nächsten Zeile wird dann die
+Überschrift in linksbündigem Flattersatz ausgegeben. Bei {\KOMAScript} kann
dieses Verhalten mit der Klassenoption \Option{chapterprefix} ebenfalls
-erreicht werden. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für
+erreicht werden. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für
einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden.
Voreingestellt\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} ist
-\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false}, während das
+\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false}, während das
Verhalten\important{\Option{chapterprefix}} der Standardklassen
\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} entspricht. Die Optionen wirken sich
-außerdem auf das Aussehen der automatischen Kolumnentitel für Kapitel aus
+außerdem auf das Aussehen der automatischen Kolumnentitel für Kapitel aus
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}).
-Zuweilen kommt es vor, dass man die Kapitelüberschriften im Hauptteil durchaus
+Zuweilen kommt es vor, dass man die Kapitelüberschriften im Hauptteil durchaus
in der einfachen Form von \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false} setzen
-möchte. Gleichzeitig\important{\Option{appendixprefix}} sollen die
-Überschriften im Anhang\Index{Anhang} jedoch davon abweichend mit einer
-Präfixzeile --~»Anhang«, gefolgt vom Buchstaben des Anhangs~-- versehen
+möchte. Gleichzeitig\important{\Option{appendixprefix}} sollen die
+Ãœberschriften im Anhang\Index{Anhang} jedoch davon abweichend mit einer
+Präfixzeile --~»Anhang«, gefolgt vom Buchstaben des Anhangs~-- versehen
werden. Dies ist mit der Einstellung \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true}
-möglich. Da sich jedoch dadurch ein inkonsistentes Layout ergibt, rate ich von
-der Verwendung ab. Letztlich führt die Option dazu, dass
-\Option{chapterprefix} zu Beginn des Anhangs automatisch geändert wird.
+möglich. Da sich jedoch dadurch ein inkonsistentes Layout ergibt, rate ich von
+der Verwendung ab. Letztlich führt die Option dazu, dass
+\Option{chapterprefix} zu Beginn des Anhangs automatisch geändert wird.
Mit der Anweisung
\Macro{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}} kann man Code in Abhängigkeit der aktuellen Einstellung
-für die Präfixzeile ausführen. Ist \Option{chapterprefix} aktiv, so wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}.
+ \Class{scrreprt}} kann man Code in Abhängigkeit der aktuellen Einstellung
+für die Präfixzeile ausführen. Ist \Option{chapterprefix} aktiv, so wird der
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterprefix}%
Die Schriftart der Kapitelnummernzeile bei \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true}
@@ -1495,109 +1496,110 @@ oder \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} kann mit den beiden Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-für das Element \FontElement{chapterprefix}%
-\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} geändert
+für das Element \FontElement{chapterprefix}%
+\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} geändert
werden. Voreingestellt ist die Verwendung des Elements
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, sowie
\autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont},
\autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}).
-Weitere Einstellmöglichkeiten für Kapitelüberschriften sind den Erklärungen
-zu \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} sowie den Anweisungen
+Weitere Einstellmöglichkeiten für Kapitelüberschriften sind den Erklärungen zu
+\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} sowie den Anweisungen
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat} und
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat} in
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, \autoref{part:forExperts} zu entnehmen.%
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections}, \autoref{part:forExperts} zu
+entnehmen.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{headings}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Überschriften\index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften} werden sowohl bei den
-Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} normalerweise recht groß
-gesetzt. Dies gefällt nicht jedem und wirkt insbesondere bei kleinen
-Papiergrößen oft störend. Daher stehen bei {\KOMAScript} neben den mit der
+Die Ãœberschriften\index{Ueberschriften=Ãœberschriften} werden sowohl bei den
+Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} normalerweise recht groß
+gesetzt. Dies gefällt nicht jedem und wirkt insbesondere bei kleinen
+Papiergrößen oft störend. Daher stehen bei {\KOMAScript} neben den mit der
Option \OptionValue{headings}{big}\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{big}}%
\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}%
\important{\OptionValue{headings}{big}\\
\OptionValue{headings}{normal}\\
- \OptionValue{headings}{small}} sehr groß voreingestellten Überschriften die
-beiden Möglichkeiten
+ \OptionValue{headings}{small}} sehr groß voreingestellten Überschriften die
+beiden Möglichkeiten
\OptionValue{headings}{normal}\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{normal}} und
\OptionValue{headings}{small}\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{small}} zur
-Verfügung, mit denen man insgesamt kleinere Überschriften erhält. Die aus den
-Optionen resultierenden Schriftgrößen sind für die Überschriften der Klassen
+Verfügung, mit denen man insgesamt kleinere Überschriften erhält. Die aus den
+Optionen resultierenden Schriftgrößen sind für die Überschriften der Klassen
\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
\autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont},
\autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} zu entnehmen. Konkret setzen
-alle drei Einstellungen die Schrift für die Elemente
+alle drei Einstellungen die Schrift für die Elemente
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.section}\IndexFontElement{section},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsection}\IndexFontElement{subsection},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsubsection}\IndexFontElement{subsubsection},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.paragraph}\IndexFontElement{paragraph} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subparagraph}\IndexFontElement{subparagraph}
-auf entsprechende Voreinstellungen zurück. Bei \Class{scrartcl} werden
-generell etwas kleinere Überschriften verwendet. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}}Die Abstände vor und nach Kapitelüberschriften werden von
+auf entsprechende Voreinstellungen zurück. Bei \Class{scrartcl} werden
+generell etwas kleinere Ãœberschriften verwendet. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and
+ \Class{scrreprt}}Die Abstände vor und nach Kapitelüberschriften werden von
diesen Optionen ebenfalls neu definiert.
\iffalse%
-Auf Kapitelüberschriften wirkt sich außerdem die Option \Option{headings} mit
+Auf Kapitelüberschriften wirkt sich außerdem die Option \Option{headings} mit
den Einstellungen \PValue{twolinechapter} oder \PValue{onelinechapter} aus,
-die den oben erklärten Optionen
+die den oben erklärten Optionen
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true} und
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} entsprechen. Im Anhang gibt
-es zusätzlich Auswirkungen durch die Einstellungen \PValue{onelineappendix}
-und \PValue{twolineappendix} für Option \Option{headings}, was dann
+es zusätzlich Auswirkungen durch die Einstellungen \PValue{onelineappendix}
+und \PValue{twolineappendix} für Option \Option{headings}, was dann
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{false} und
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{true} entspricht (siehe ebenfalls
oben). \else%
-Auf Kapitelüberschriften\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} wirken
+Auf Kapitelüberschriften\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} wirken
sich\important{%
\OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter}\\
\OptionValue{headings}{onelinechapter}\\
\OptionValue{headings}{twolineappendix}\\
\OptionValue{headings}{onelineappendix}%
-} außerdem die beiden Optionen \OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter} und
-\OptionValue{headings}{onelinechapter}, die den oben erklärten
+} außerdem die beiden Optionen \OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter} und
+\OptionValue{headings}{onelinechapter}, die den oben erklärten
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true} und
-\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} entsprechen, aus. Für den
+\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} entsprechen, aus. Für den
Anhang stehen als Alternativen zu
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{true} und
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{false} die Optionen
\OptionValue{headings}{twolineappendix} und
-\OptionValue{headings}{onelineappendix} zur Verfügung. \iffalse Für den
+\OptionValue{headings}{onelineappendix} zur Verfügung. \iffalse Für den
Anhang stehen \OptionValue{headings}{twolineappendix} und
-\OptionValue{headings}{onelineappendix} zur Verfügung, die den Optionen
+\OptionValue{headings}{onelineappendix} zur Verfügung, die den Optionen
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{true} und
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{false} entsprechen (siehe
-ebenfalls oben). \fi Diese existieren natürlich nicht bei \Class{scrartcl}%
+ebenfalls oben). \fi Diese existieren natürlich nicht bei \Class{scrartcl}%
\iffree{}{% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- , da diese Klasse nicht über Kapitel verfügt}%
+ , da diese Klasse nicht über Kapitel verfügt}%
.%
\fi
Option\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} \OptionValue{headings}{standardclasses}%
\important{\OptionValue{headings}{standardclasses}} passt zum Einen die
-Schriftgrößen der Überschriften an die der Standardklassen an. Des Weiteren
-wird die Schrift für Element
+Schriftgrößen der Überschriften an die der Standardklassen an. Des Weiteren
+wird die Schrift für Element
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} auf
-\Macro{bfseries} gesetzt. Es wird also für Überschriften nicht mehr auf einen
+\Macro{bfseries} gesetzt. Es wird also für Überschriften nicht mehr auf einen
serifenlosen Font umgeschaltet. Bei Verwendung von
\Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} oder
-\Class{scrreprt} wird außerdem \OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter} gesetzt
-und die Abstände bei den Kapitelüberschriften werden denen der Standardklassen
+\Class{scrreprt} wird außerdem \OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter} gesetzt
+und die Abstände bei den Kapitelüberschriften werden denen der Standardklassen
angepasst.
-Für\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Kapitel kann mit
+Für\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Kapitel kann mit
\OptionValue{headings}{openany}\important{%
\OptionValue{headings}{openany}\\
\OptionValue{headings}{openright}\\
\OptionValue{headings}{openleft}}, \OptionValue{headings}{openright} und
-\OptionValue{headings}{openleft} die Methode für Kapitelanfänge alternativ zur
+\OptionValue{headings}{openleft} die Methode für Kapitelanfänge alternativ zur
Verwendung der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.open} mit den Werten
\PValue{any}, \PValue{right} und \PValue{left} (siehe oben) gesetzt werden.
@@ -1617,46 +1619,46 @@ und \OptionValue{headings}{optiontoheadandtoc}%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{optiontoheadandtoc}}
beeinflusst werden.
-Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Einstellungen für Option \Option{headings}
+Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Einstellungen für Option \Option{headings}
finden Sie in \autoref{tab:maincls.headings}. Beispiele zur Verwendung einiger
-der möglichen Einstellungen sind in den nachfolgenden Beschreibungen
+der möglichen Einstellungen sind in den nachfolgenden Beschreibungen
der Gliederungsbefehle enthalten.
\begin{desclist}
- \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{headings}}]{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{headings} zur Einstellung der
- Überschriften%
+ \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{headings}}]{%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{headings} zur Einstellung der
+ Ãœberschriften%
\label{tab:maincls.headings}%
}{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{headings} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{headings} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\pventry{big}{%
- Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
- zurück und verwendet große Überschriften mit großen Abständen darüber und
+ Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
+ zurück und verwendet große Überschriften mit großen Abständen darüber und
darunter.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{big}}}%
\pventry{normal}{%
- Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
- zurück und verwendet mittelgroße Überschriften mit mittelgroßen Abständen
- darüber und darunter.%
+ Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
+ zurück und verwendet mittelgroße Überschriften mit mittelgroßen Abständen
+ darüber und darunter.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{normal}}}%
\entry{\PValue{onelineappendix}, \PValue{noappendixprefix},
\PValue{appendixwithoutprefix}, \PValue{appendixwithoutprefixline}%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{onelineappendix}}}{%
- Kapitelüberschriften im Anhang werden wie andere Überschriften auch
+ Kapitelüberschriften im Anhang werden wie andere Überschriften auch
gesetzt.}%
\entry{\PValue{onelinechapter}, \PValue{nochapterprefix},
\PValue{chapterwithoutprefix}, \PValue{chapterwithoutprefixline}%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{onelinechapter}}}{%
- Kapitelüberschriften werden wie andere Überschriften auch gesetzt.}%
+ Kapitelüberschriften werden wie andere Überschriften auch gesetzt.}%
\pventry{openany}{%
Die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch und
- fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im
+ fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im
doppelseitigen Satz wie bei \OptionValue{headings}{openright} auf die
- nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann
+ nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann
verwenden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage}, aber nicht
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{openany}}}%
@@ -1666,8 +1668,8 @@ der Gliederungsbefehle enthalten.
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch und
- fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im doppelseitigen
- Satz auf die nächste linke Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und
+ fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im doppelseitigen
+ Satz auf die nächste linke Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und
Nachspann verwenden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{openleft}}}%
\pventry{openright}{%
@@ -1676,15 +1678,15 @@ der Gliederungsbefehle enthalten.
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch und
- fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im doppelseitigen
- Satz auf die nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und
+ fügen gegebenenfalls eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im doppelseitigen
+ Satz auf die nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und
Nachspann verwenden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{openright}}}%
\pventry{optiontohead}{%
Die\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} erweiterte Funktion des optionalen Arguments der
Gliederungsbefehle wird aktiviert. In der Voreinstellung wird das
- optionale Argument ausschließlich für den Kolumnentitel verwendet.%
+ optionale Argument ausschließlich für den Kolumnentitel verwendet.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{optiontohead}}%
}%
\entry{\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc}, \PValue{optiontotocandhead}%
@@ -1692,40 +1694,40 @@ der Gliederungsbefehle enthalten.
Die\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} erweiterte Funktion des optionalen Arguments der
Gliederungsbefehle wird aktiviert. In der Voreinstellung wird das
- optionale Argument sowohl für den Kolumnentitel als auch den Eintrag ins
+ optionale Argument sowohl für den Kolumnentitel als auch den Eintrag ins
Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet.%
}%
\pventry{optiontotoc}{%
Die\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} erweiterte Funktion des optionalen Arguments der
Gliederungsbefehle wird aktiviert. In der Voreinstellung wird das
- optionale Argument ausschließlich für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
+ optionale Argument ausschließlich für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
verwendet.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{optiontohead}}%
}%
\pventry{small}{%
- Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
- zurück und verwendet kleine Überschriften mit kleinen Abständen darüber
+ Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
+ zurück und verwendet kleine Überschriften mit kleinen Abständen darüber
und darunter.%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{small}}}%
\pventry{standardclasses}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
- zurück und verwendet Überschriften in den Größen der Standardklassen. Für
- Kapitelüberschriften wird bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
+ Setzt die Schrifteinstellung für die einzelnen Standard-Gliederungsebenen
+ zurück und verwendet Überschriften in den Größen der Standardklassen. Für
+ Kapitelüberschriften wird bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
\OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter} gesetzt.%
}%
\entry{\PValue{twolineappendix}, \PValue{appendixprefix},
\PValue{appendixwithprefix}, \PValue{appendixwithprefixline}%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{twolineappendix}}}{%
- Kapitelüberschriften im Anhang werden mit einer Vorsatzzeile gesetzt,
+ Kapitelüberschriften im Anhang werden mit einer Vorsatzzeile gesetzt,
deren Inhalt von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat} bestimmt
wird.}%
\entry{\PValue{twolinechapter}, \PValue{chapterprefix},
\PValue{chapterwithprefix}, \PValue{chapterwithprefixline}%
\IndexOption{headings~=\textKValue{twolinechapter}}}{%
- Kapitelüberschriften werden mit einer Vorsatzzeile gesetzt, deren Inhalt
+ Kapitelüberschriften werden mit einer Vorsatzzeile gesetzt, deren Inhalt
von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat}
bestimmt wird.}%
\end{desclist}
@@ -1737,64 +1739,64 @@ der Gliederungsbefehle enthalten.
\OptionVName{numbers}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}%
Nach {\small DUDEN} steht in Gliederungen\Index{Gliederung}, in denen
-ausschließlich arabische Ziffern für die Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung}
-verwendet werden, am Ende der Gliederungsnummern kein abschließender Punkt
+ausschließlich arabische Ziffern für die Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung}
+verwendet werden, am Ende der Gliederungsnummern kein abschließender Punkt
(siehe \cite[R\,3]{DUDEN}). Wird hingegen innerhalb der Gliederung auch mit
-römischen Zahlen oder Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben gearbeitet, so steht am Ende
-aller Gliederungsnummern ein abschließender Punkt (siehe
+römischen Zahlen oder Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben gearbeitet, so steht am Ende
+aller Gliederungsnummern ein abschließender Punkt (siehe
\cite[R\,4]{DUDEN}). In {\KOMAScript} ist ein Automatismus eingebaut, der
-diese etwas komplexe Regel zu erfüllen versucht. Der Automatismus wirkt sich
+diese etwas komplexe Regel zu erfüllen versucht. Der Automatismus wirkt sich
so aus, dass normalerweise bei Verwendung des Gliederungsbefehls \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}
-oder eines Anhangs (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.appendix}) auf Gliederungsnummer mit abschließendem
+oder eines Anhangs (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.appendix}) auf Gliederungsnummer mit abschließendem
Punkt umgeschaltet wird. Diese Information wird in der \File{aux}-Datei
-gespeichert und wirkt sich dann beim nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf auf das gesamte
+gespeichert und wirkt sich dann beim nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf auf das gesamte
Dokument aus.
Manchmal versagt der mit \OptionValue{numbers}{autoendperiod}%
\IndexOption{numbers~=\textKValue{autoendperiod}} voreingestellte Automatismus zum
-Setzen oder Weglassen des abschließenden Punktes in der
+Setzen oder Weglassen des abschließenden Punktes in der
Gliederungsnummer. Teilweise sehen andere Sprachen auch andere Regeln
vor. Deshalb ist es beispielsweise mit der Einstellung
\OptionValue{numbers}{endperiod}\IndexOption{numbers~=\textKValue{endperiod}}%
\important{\OptionValue{numbers}{endperiod}\\
- \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod}} möglich, den Punkt manuell
+ \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod}} möglich, den Punkt manuell
vorzuschreiben oder mit \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod} zu verbieten.
-Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass der Automatismus immer erst für
-den nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf die Verwendung des abschließenden Punktes ein- oder
-ausschaltet. Bevor also versucht wird, die korrekte Darstellung über
-Verwendung einer der Optionen zu erzwingen, sollte grundsätzlich ein weiterer
-\LaTeX-Lauf ohne Dokumentänderung durchgeführt werden.
+Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass der Automatismus immer erst für
+den nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf die Verwendung des abschließenden Punktes ein- oder
+ausschaltet. Bevor also versucht wird, die korrekte Darstellung über
+Verwendung einer der Optionen zu erzwingen, sollte grundsätzlich ein weiterer
+\LaTeX-Lauf ohne Dokumentänderung durchgeführt werden.
-Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
+Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\PName{numbers} bietet \autoref{tab:maincls.numbers}. Im Unterschied zu den
-meisten anderen Einstellungen, kann diese Option nur in der Dokumentpräambel,
+meisten anderen Einstellungen, kann diese Option nur in der Dokumentpräambel,
also vor \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} vorgenommen werden.
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{numbers}}]{Mögliche Werte für
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{numbers}}]{Mögliche Werte für
Option \Option{numbers} zur Konfigurierung des Abschlusspunktes in
Gliederungsnummern}
\label{tab:maincls.numbers}
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PValue{autoendperiod}, \PValue{autoenddot}, \PValue{auto}}{%
\KOMAScript{} trifft die Entscheidung, ob am Ende von Gliederungsnummern
- und allen von Gliederungsnummern abhängigen Nummern ein Punkt gesetzt
- wird, selbst. Kommen in sämtlichen Gliederungsnummern nur arabische
+ und allen von Gliederungsnummern abhängigen Nummern ein Punkt gesetzt
+ wird, selbst. Kommen in sämtlichen Gliederungsnummern nur arabische
Ziffern vor, so wird kein Punkt gesetzt. Wird in einer Gliederungsnummer
- ein Buchstabe oder eine römische Zahl entdeckt, so wird der Punkt bei
+ ein Buchstabe oder eine römische Zahl entdeckt, so wird der Punkt bei
allen Nummern gesetzt. Referenzen auf diese Nummern werden jedoch ohne
- abschließenden Punkt gesetzt.%
+ abschließenden Punkt gesetzt.%
\IndexOption{numbers~=\textKValue{autoendperiod}}}%
\entry{\PValue{endperiod}, \PValue{withendperiod}, \PValue{periodatend},
\PValue{enddot}, \PValue{withenddot}, \PValue{dotatend}}{%
- Bei sämtlichen Gliederungsnummern und davon abhängigen Nummern wird am
- Ende ein Punkt gesetzt, der bei der Referenzierung entfällt.%
+ Bei sämtlichen Gliederungsnummern und davon abhängigen Nummern wird am
+ Ende ein Punkt gesetzt, der bei der Referenzierung entfällt.%
\IndexOption{numbers~=\textKValue{endperiod}}}%
\entry{\PValue{noendperiod}, \PValue{noperiodatend},
\PValue{noenddot}, \PValue{nodotatend}}{%
- Gliederungsnummern und davon abhängige Nummern werden ohne
- abschließenden Punkt gesetzt.%
+ Gliederungsnummern und davon abhängige Nummern werden ohne
+ abschließenden Punkt gesetzt.%
\IndexOption{numbers~=\textKValue{noendperiod}}}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
@@ -1808,19 +1810,19 @@ also vor \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} vorgenommen werden.
\end{Declaration}%
Wie\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} auch bei der Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} erwähnt wird, fügt
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} erwähnt wird, fügt
normalerweise\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} jeder
mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} erzeugte Kapiteleintrag einen vertikalen
Abstand in die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen ein. Seit
Version~2.96a\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.96a}} gilt dies
-auch für die Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}, wenn nicht eine
-Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer früheren Version gewählt wurde (siehe
+auch für die Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}, wenn nicht eine
+Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer früheren Version gewählt wurde (siehe
Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}).
-Außerdem kann mit der Option \Option{chapteratlists} der Abstand verändert
-werden. Dazu gibt man als \PName{Wert} den gewünschten Abstand an. Bei der
+Außerdem kann mit der Option \Option{chapteratlists} der Abstand verändert
+werden. Dazu gibt man als \PName{Wert} den gewünschten Abstand an. Bei der
Voreinstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{listof}{chaptergapsmall}%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{chaptergapsmall}} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof.chaptergapsmall}) sind dies
@@ -1832,32 +1834,32 @@ Mit der Einstellung \OptionValue{chapteratlists}{entry}%
\Option{chapteratlists} ohne Angabe eines Wertes wird statt des Abstandes der
Kapiteleintrag selbst in die Verzeichnisse eingetragen. Es wird darauf
hingewiesen, dass ein solcher Eintrag auch dann erfolgt, wenn das Kapitel
-keine Gleitumgebung enthält. Eine Lösung, bei der nur Kapitel mit
+keine Gleitumgebung enthält. Eine Lösung, bei der nur Kapitel mit
Gleitumgebungen im jeweiligen Verzeichnis angezeigt werden, finden Sie unter
\cite{https://komascript.de/comment/5070}.
-Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass sich eine Änderung der
-Einstellung je nach Art der Änderung erst nach zwei weiteren \LaTeX-Läufen im
+Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass sich eine Änderung der
+Einstellung je nach Art der Änderung erst nach zwei weiteren \LaTeX-Läufen im
Verzeichnis auswirkt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{part}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{chapter}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{section}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{subsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{subsubsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{paragraph}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{subparagraph}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \Macro{part}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{chapter}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{section}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{subsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{subsubsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{paragraph}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{subparagraph}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\end{Declaration}%
\Index[indexmain]{Teil}%
\Index[indexmain]{Kapitel}%
\Index[indexmain]{Abschnitt}%
Die Standardgliederungsbefehle funktionieren bei {\KOMAScript} im Grundsatz
-wie bei den Standardklassen. So kann in der Voreinstellung ganz normal über
-ein optionales Argument ein abweichender Text für den Kolumnentitel und das
+wie bei den Standardklassen. So kann in der Voreinstellung ganz normal über
+ein optionales Argument ein abweichender Text für den Kolumnentitel und das
Inhaltsverzeichnis vorgegeben werden.
Mit\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
@@ -1865,158 +1867,173 @@ Mit\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
Einstellung\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}}
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontohead}%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\textKValue{optiontohead}} wird das
-optionale Argument bei \KOMAScript{} hingegen nur noch für den Kolumnentitel
-verwendet. Ein konkreter Eintrag in den Kolumnentitel erfolgt natürlich nur,
-wenn ein Seitenstil\Index{Seiten>Stil} gewählt wird, bei dem die entsprechende
-Gliederungsebene überhaupt für den Kolumnentitel verwendet wird. Siehe hierzu
+optionale Argument bei \KOMAScript{} hingegen nur noch für den Kolumnentitel
+verwendet. Ein konkreter Eintrag in den Kolumnentitel erfolgt natürlich nur,
+wenn ein Seitenstil\Index{Seiten>Stil} gewählt wird, bei dem die entsprechende
+Gliederungsebene überhaupt für den Kolumnentitel verwendet wird. Siehe hierzu
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle} sowie \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}. Mit
der Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotoc}%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\textKValue{optiontotoc}} wird das optionale
-Argument hingegen ausschließlich für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
-verwendet. Auch dies selbstverständlich nur, wenn die Einstellung für den
-Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} (siehe
+Argument hingegen ausschließlich für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
+verwendet. Auch dies selbstverständlich nur, wenn die Einstellung für den
+Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}) einen
-Eintrag der entsprechenden Ebene überhaupt vorsieht. Mit der Einstellung
+Eintrag der entsprechenden Ebene überhaupt vorsieht. Mit der Einstellung
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontoheadandtoc}%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\textKValue{optiontoheadandtoc}} findet
-schließlich das optionale Argument wieder sowohl für den Kolumnentitel als
+schließlich das optionale Argument wieder sowohl für den Kolumnentitel als
auch den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis Verwendung. Allen drei Einstellungen
ist gemeinsam, dass sie im Gegensatz zur Voreinstellung die erweiterte
Interpretation des optionalen Arguments aktivieren.
Bei\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} der erweiterten Interpretation des optionalen Arguments
-wird geprüft, ob sich ein Gleichheitszeichen in \PName{Kurzform} befindet. Ist
+wird geprüft, ob sich ein Gleichheitszeichen in \PName{Kurzform} befindet. Ist
dies der Fall, so wird das optionale Argument der Gliederungsbefehle selbst
statt als \PName{Kurzform} als \PName{Optionenliste} interpretiert. Dabei
-werden die drei Optionen
+werden die vier Optionen
\OptionVName{head}{Kolumnentitel}\important{\Option{head}\\
\Option{tocentry}\\
- \Option{reference}}, \OptionVName{tocentry}{Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag} und
-\OptionVName{reference}{Querverweistitel}%
-\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
-akzeptiert. Um ein Gleichheitszeichen oder ein Komma in einem der beiden Werte
-dieser Optionen unterzubringen, muss dieses in zusätzliche geschweifte
-Klammern gesetzt werden.
+ \Option{reference}\\
+ \Option{nonumber}}, \OptionVName{tocentry}{Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag},
+\OptionVName{reference}{Querverweistitel}\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Class{scrbook}\and
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} und
+\OptionVName{nonumber}{Ein-Aus-Wert}\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} akzeptiert. Um ein Gleichheitszeichen
+oder ein Komma in einem der Werte der ersten drei Optionen unterzubringen,
+muss dieses in zusätzliche geschweifte Klammern gesetzt werden.
Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass dieser Mechanismus nur
-funktioniert, solange \KOMAScript{} die Kontrolle über die Gliederungsbefehle
+funktioniert, solange \KOMAScript{} die Kontrolle über die Gliederungsbefehle
besitzt. Wird hingegen ein Paket verwendet, dass die Gliederungsbefehle oder
-die internen \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen für Gliederungsbefehle umdefiniert, so
-kann \KOMAScript{} diese erweiterte Funktionalität nicht mehr zur Verfügung
-stellen. Dies gilt auch für die immer aktive Erweiterung, dass
-leere\textnote{leere Inhalts\-verzeichnis\-einträge}
-Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge nicht zu einem Eintrag ohne Text führen, sondern
-gänzlich unterbleiben. Soll tatsächlich einmal ein leerer Eintrag ins
+die internen \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen für Gliederungsbefehle umdefiniert, so
+kann \KOMAScript{} diese erweiterte Funktionalität nicht mehr zur Verfügung
+stellen. Dies gilt auch für die immer aktive Erweiterung, dass
+leere\textnote{leere Inhalts\-verzeichnis\-einträge}
+Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge nicht zu einem Eintrag ohne Text führen, sondern
+gänzlich unterbleiben. Soll tatsächlich einmal ein leerer Eintrag ins
Inhaltsverzeichnis erfolgen, so kann dies mit einem unsichtbaren Eintrag
wie \lstinline|\mbox{}| erreicht werden.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie haben ein Dokument mit teilweise sehr langen
- Kapitelüberschriften. Diese langen Kapitelüberschriften sollen auch im
+ Kapitelüberschriften. Diese langen Kapitelüberschriften sollen auch im
Inhaltsverzeichnis ausgegeben werden. Die Kolumnentitel wollen Sie jedoch
- auf einzeilige Kurztexte beschränken. Dazu stellen Sie mit
+ auf einzeilige Kurztexte beschränken. Dazu stellen Sie mit
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[headings=optiontohead]{scrbook}
\end{lstcode}
bereits beim Laden der Klasse ein, dass das optionale Argument der
- Gliederungsbefehle nur für die Kolumnentitel verwendet werden soll. Im
- Dokument nehmen Sie dann einen entsprechenden Eintrag über das optionale
+ Gliederungsbefehle nur für die Kolumnentitel verwendet werden soll. Im
+ Dokument nehmen Sie dann einen entsprechenden Eintrag über das optionale
Argument von \Macro{chapter} vor.
\begin{lstcode}
- \chapter[Kurzformen für Kapitel]
- {Der Gliederungsbefehl für
- Kapitelüberschriften erlaubt neben dem
- Text für die eigentliche
- Kapitelüberschrift auch eine Kurzform
+ \chapter[Kurzformen für Kapitel]
+ {Der Gliederungsbefehl für
+ Kapitelüberschriften erlaubt neben dem
+ Text für die eigentliche
+ Kapitelüberschrift auch eine Kurzform
mit steuerbarer Verwendung}
\end{lstcode}
- Etwas später wird Ihnen bewusst, dass diese lange Überschrift sehr ungünstig
- umbrochen wird. Sie wollen deshalb die Umbrüche für diese Überschrift selbst
+ Etwas später wird Ihnen bewusst, dass diese lange Überschrift sehr ungünstig
+ umbrochen wird. Sie wollen deshalb die Umbrüche für diese Überschrift selbst
bestimmen. Im Inhaltsverzeichnis soll allerdings weiterhin automatisch
umbrochen werden. Mit
\begin{lstcode}
- \chapter[head={Kurzformen für Kapitel},
- tocentry={Der Gliederungsbefehl für
- Kapitelüberschriften erlaubt neben
- dem Text für die eigentliche
- Kapitelüberschrift auch eine Kurzform
+ \chapter[head={Kurzformen für Kapitel},
+ tocentry={Der Gliederungsbefehl für
+ Kapitelüberschriften erlaubt neben
+ dem Text für die eigentliche
+ Kapitelüberschrift auch eine Kurzform
mit steuerbarer Verwendung}]
- {Der Gliederungsbefehl für
- Kapitelüberschriften\\
+ {Der Gliederungsbefehl für
+ Kapitelüberschriften\\
erlaubt neben dem\\
- Text für die eigentliche
- Kapitelüberschrift\\
+ Text für die eigentliche
+ Kapitelüberschrift\\
auch eine Kurzform\\
mit steuerbarer Verwendung}
\end{lstcode}
- setzen Sie daher die Einträge für den Kolumnentitel und das
- Inhaltsverzeichnis unabhängig voneinander und von der Überschrift selbst.
+ setzen Sie daher die Einträge für den Kolumnentitel und das
+ Inhaltsverzeichnis unabhängig voneinander und von der Überschrift selbst.
Die Argumente der beiden Optionen \Option{head} und \Option{tocentry} wurden
dabei in geschweifte Klammern gesetzt, damit der Inhalt der Argumente
beliebig sein kann.
- Die Notwendigkeit der geschweiften Klammern im vorherigen Beispiel lässt
+ Die Notwendigkeit der geschweiften Klammern im vorherigen Beispiel lässt
sich am besten an einem weiteren Beispiel verdeutlichen. Angenommen, Sie
- haben als Option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotoc} gewählt
- und setzen nun die Überschrift:
+ haben als Option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotoc} gewählt
+ und setzen nun die Ãœberschrift:
\begin{lstcode}
\section[head=\emph{Wert}]
{Die Option head=\emph{Wert}}
\end{lstcode}
- Dies führt dazu, dass im Inhaltsverzeichnis der Eintrag »Die Option
- head=\emph{Wert}« und im Kolumnentitel der Eintrag »\emph{Wert}« verwendet
+ Dies führt dazu, dass im Inhaltsverzeichnis der Eintrag »Die Option
+ head=\emph{Wert}« und im Kolumnentitel der Eintrag »\emph{Wert}« verwendet
wird. In Wirklichkeit wollten Sie aber, dass im Inhaltsverzeichnis der
- Eintrag »head=\emph{Wert}« lautet und im Kolumnentitel der Text der
- Überschrift übernommen wird. Dies ist dadurch zu erreichen, dass das
+ Eintrag »head=\emph{Wert}« lautet und im Kolumnentitel der Text der
+ Überschrift übernommen wird. Dies ist dadurch zu erreichen, dass das
Gleichheitszeichen in geschweifte Klammern gesetzt wird:
\begin{lstcode}
\section[head{=}\emph{Wert}]
{Die Option head=\emph{Wert}}
\end{lstcode}
- Ein ähnlicher Fall betrifft das Komma. Bei gleicher Voreinstellung der
- Optionen würde
+ Ein ähnlicher Fall betrifft das Komma. Bei gleicher Voreinstellung der
+ Optionen würde
\begin{lstcode}
\section[head=0, 1, 2, 3, \dots]
- {Die natürlichen Zahlen mit der Null}
+ {Die natürlichen Zahlen mit der Null}
\end{lstcode}
- zu einer Fehlermeldung führen, weil die Kommata als Trennzeichen zwischen
- den einzelnen Optionen der Optionenliste »\lstinline|head=0, 1, 2, 3, \dots|«
- interpretiert würden. Schreibt man hingegen
+ zu einer Fehlermeldung führen, weil die Kommata als Trennzeichen zwischen
+ den einzelnen Optionen der Optionenliste »\lstinline|head=0, 1, 2, 3, \dots|«
+ interpretiert würden. Schreibt man hingegen
\begin{lstcode}
\section[head={0, 1, 2, 3, \dots}]
- {Die natürlichen Zahlen mit der Null}
+ {Die natürlichen Zahlen mit der Null}
\end{lstcode}
- so ist »\lstinline|0, 1, 2, 3, \dots|« das Argument der Option
+ so ist »\lstinline|0, 1, 2, 3, \dots|« das Argument der Option
\Option{head}.
\end{Example}
So\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
-wie im Beispiel Option \Option{head} den Titel für den lebenden Kolumnentitel
-und Option \Option{tocentry} den Titel für den Verzeichniseintrag bestimmt,
-kann mit \Option{reference}\important{\Option{reference}} der Titel für einen
+wie im Beispiel Option \Option{head} den Titel für den lebenden Kolumnentitel
+und Option \Option{tocentry} den Titel für den Verzeichniseintrag bestimmt,
+kann mit \Option{reference}\important{\Option{reference}} der Titel für einen
Querverweise durch die Pakete
\Package{nameref}\IndexPackage{nameref}\important{\Package{nameref}\\
\Package{titleref}\\
\Package{zref-titleref}}, \Package{titleref}\IndexPackage{titleref} oder das
\Package{titleref}\IndexPackage{zref-titleref}-Modul von
\Package{zref}\IndexPackage{zref} explizit vorgegeben werden. Die
-Unterstützung für \Package{titleref} ist dabei eher rudimentär, da das Paket
-mit der Leistungsfähigkeit der anderen beiden nur schlecht mithalten kann und
+Unterstützung für \Package{titleref} ist dabei eher rudimentär, da das Paket
+mit der Leistungsfähigkeit der anderen beiden nur schlecht mithalten kann und
auch nicht mit
\Package{hyperref}\IndexPackage{hyperref}\important{\Package{hyperref}}
kompatibel ist.
-Die\important{\Macro{part}} Überschrift der Teile-Ebene (\Macro{part})
+Darüber hinaus kann mit Hilfe der Option
+\OptionValue{nonumber}{true}\important{\Option{nonumber}}%
+\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrbook}\and
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} im erweiterten optionalen Argument
+die Nummerierung der Ãœberschrift deaktiviert werden. Im Gegensatz zu den
+nachfolgend erklärten
+\hyperref[desc:maincls.cmd.part*]{Sternvarianten der Gliederungsbefehle} wird
+jedoch trotzdem ein Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag und gegebenenfalls ein
+Kolumnentitel erzeugt. Für \Macro{part}, \Macro{chapter} und \Macro{section}
+entspricht dies weitgehend den auf \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}
+erklärten Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart},
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec}.
+
+Die\important{\Macro{part}} Ãœberschrift der Teile-Ebene (\Macro{part})
unterscheidet sich von den anderen Gliederungsebenen dadurch, dass sie
-unabhängig von den übrigen Ebenen nummeriert wird. Das bedeutet, dass die
+unabhängig von den übrigen Ebenen nummeriert wird. Das bedeutet, dass die
Kapitel-Ebene (bei \Class{scrbook} oder \Class{scrreprt}) bzw. die
-Abschnitt-Ebene (bei \Class{scrartcl}) über alle Teile hinweg durchgehend
-nummeriert wird. Darüber hinaus steht bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und
-\Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} die Überschrift
-dieser Ebene zusammen mit ihrer Präambel (siehe Anweisung
+Abschnitt-Ebene (bei \Class{scrartcl}) über alle Teile hinweg durchgehend
+nummeriert wird. Darüber hinaus steht bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und
+\Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} die Ãœberschrift
+dieser Ebene zusammen mit ihrer Präambel (siehe Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setpartpreamble},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setpartpreamble}) alleine auf einer Seite.
@@ -2025,20 +2042,20 @@ dieser Ebene zusammen mit ihrer Präambel (siehe Anweisung
\Class{book}, \Class{scrbook}, \Class{report} und \Class{scrreprt}, nicht
jedoch bei den Artikelklassen \Class{article} und
\Class{scrartcl}. \Macro{chapter}\textnote{\KOMAScript{}
- vs. Standardklassen} unterscheidet sich bei {\KOMAScript} außerdem
+ vs. Standardklassen} unterscheidet sich bei {\KOMAScript} außerdem
gravierend von der Version der Standardklassen. Bei den Standardklassen wird
-die Kapitelnummer mit dem Präfix »Kapitel« beziehungsweise dem Kapitelnamen in
-der gewählten Sprache in einer Zeile vor dem eigentlichen Text der Überschrift
+die Kapitelnummer mit dem Präfix »Kapitel« beziehungsweise dem Kapitelnamen in
+der gewählten Sprache in einer Zeile vor dem eigentlichen Text der Überschrift
ausgegeben. Diese\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}\\
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix}} sehr mächtige Form
-wird bei {\KOMAScript} durch eine einfache Nummer vor dem Text abgelöst, lässt
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix}} sehr mächtige Form
+wird bei {\KOMAScript} durch eine einfache Nummer vor dem Text abgelöst, lässt
sich aber durch die Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} einstellen (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}).
Bitte beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie, dass \Macro{part} und \Macro{chapter}
bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}} den Seitenstil für eine Seite umschalten. Der jeweilige
+ \Class{scrreprt}} den Seitenstil für eine Seite umschalten. Der jeweilige
Seitenstil ist bei \KOMAScript{} in den Makros
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe
@@ -2046,7 +2063,7 @@ Seitenstil ist bei \KOMAScript{} in den Makros
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}%
-\BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe}%
+\BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{disposition}\LabelFontElement{disposition}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{part}\LabelFontElement{part}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{parnumber}\LabelFontElement{partnumber}%
@@ -2063,9 +2080,9 @@ sieben Gliederungsebenen kann mit den Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-bestimmt werden. Dabei wird zunächst generell das Element
+bestimmt werden. Dabei wird zunächst generell das Element
\FontElement{disposition}\important{\FontElement{disposition}} und
-anschließend zusätzlich je Gliederungsebene ein spezifisches
+anschließend zusätzlich je Gliederungsebene ein spezifisches
Element\important{%
\FontElement{part}\\
\FontElement{partnumber}\\
@@ -2076,16 +2093,16 @@ Element\important{%
\FontElement{paragraph}\\
\FontElement{subparagraph}} verwendet (siehe
\autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
-\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Für den Nummernteil der
-Teile-Überschrift wird zusätzlich das Element \FontElement{partnumber}
-verwendet, für die optionale Präfixzeile der Kapitelüberschriften das Element
-\FontElement{chapterprefix}. Die Schriftart für das Element
+\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Für den Nummernteil der
+Teile-Überschrift wird zusätzlich das Element \FontElement{partnumber}
+verwendet, für die optionale Präfixzeile der Kapitelüberschriften das Element
+\FontElement{chapterprefix}. Die Schriftart für das Element
\FontElement{disposition} ist als
\Macro{normalcolor}""\Macro{sffamily}""\Macro{bfseries} vordefiniert. Die
-Voreinstellungen für die spezifischen Elemente sind mit einer Schriftgröße
+Voreinstellungen für die spezifischen Elemente sind mit einer Schriftgröße
vorbelegt und daher von den Einstellungen \PValue{big}, \PValue{normal} und
-\PValue{small} für die Option
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}\IndexOption{headings} abhängig (siehe
+\PValue{small} für die Option
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}\IndexOption{headings} abhängig (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}). Sie finden die Voreinstellungen in
\autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}.
% Umbruchkorrektur: Tabelle verschoben
@@ -2094,11 +2111,11 @@ vorbelegt und daher von den Einstellungen \PValue{big}, \PValue{normal} und
% \caption
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
- \begin{captionbeside}[{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente der Gliederung
+ \begin{captionbeside}[{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente der Gliederung
bei\newline \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}}]{%
\label{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}%
\hspace{0pt plus .5em}Voreinstellungen der Schrift
- für die Elemente der Gliederung bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}}
+ für die Elemente der Gliederung bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{lll}
\toprule
@@ -2152,23 +2169,24 @@ vorbelegt und daher von den Einstellungen \PValue{big}, \PValue{normal} und
%
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie stellen bei Verwendung der Klassenoption
- \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{big} fest, dass die sehr großen
- Überschriften von Teildokumenten (\Macro{part} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}) zu fett
- wirken. Nun könnten Sie natürlich wie folgt %
+ \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{big} fest, dass die sehr großen
+ Ãœberschriften von Teildokumenten (\Macro{part} oder
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}) zu fett wirken. Nun könnten Sie natürlich
+ wie folgt %
\iftrue % Umbruchoptimierung!!!!
verfahren:%
\else %
- für Abhilfe sorgen:%
+ für Abhilfe sorgen:%
\fi
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomafont{disposition}{\normalcolor\sffamily}
\part{\appendixname}
\addtokomafont{disposition}{\bfseries}
\end{lstcode}
- Auf diese Weise würden Sie nur für die eine Überschrift »Anhang«
+ Auf diese Weise würden Sie nur für die eine Überschrift »Anhang«
das Schriftattribut \textbf{Fett} abschalten. Sehr viel komfortabler
- und eleganter ist es aber, stattdessen generell für
- \Macro{part}-Überschriften eine entsprechende Änderung vorzunehmen.
+ und eleganter ist es aber, stattdessen generell für
+ \Macro{part}-Überschriften eine entsprechende Änderung vorzunehmen.
Das ist wahlweise mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\addtokomafont{part}{\normalfont\sffamily}
@@ -2179,54 +2197,54 @@ vorbelegt und daher von den Einstellungen \PValue{big}, \PValue{normal} und
\addtokomafont{part}{\mdseries}
\addtokomafont{partnumber}{\mdseries}
\end{lstcode}
- möglich. Die Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} wäre zwar grundsätzlich
- möglich, müsste aber auch die Auswahl der Schriftgröße enthalten und würde
- damit die Größenänderung über die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings} verhindern.
+ möglich. Die Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} wäre zwar grundsätzlich
+ möglich, müsste aber auch die Auswahl der Schriftgröße enthalten und würde
+ damit die Größenänderung über die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings} verhindern.
Die zweite Version mit \Macro{mdseries} ist vorzuziehen, da diese auch dann
- noch zum gewünschten Ergebnis führt, wenn Sie später das Element
- \FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} wie folgt ändern:
+ noch zum gewünschten Ergebnis führt, wenn Sie später das Element
+ \FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} wie folgt ändern:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomafont{disposition}{\normalcolor\bfseries}
\end{lstcode}
- Mit dieser Änderung verzichten Sie darauf, für alle
+ Mit dieser Änderung verzichten Sie darauf, für alle
Gliederungsebenen serifenlose Schrift voreinzustellen.
\end{Example}
-Ich möchte eindringlich davon abraten, die Möglichkeit zur
-Schriftumschaltung zu missbrauchen, um wild Schriften, Schriftgrößen und
-Schriftattribute miteinander zu mischen. Die Auswahl der richtigen Schrift für
-die richtige Aufgabe ist eine Sache für Experten und hat sehr, sehr wenig mit
-dem persönlichem Geschmack eines Laien zu tun. Siehe hierzu auch das Zitat am
+Ich möchte eindringlich davon abraten, die Möglichkeit zur
+Schriftumschaltung zu missbrauchen, um wild Schriften, Schriftgrößen und
+Schriftattribute miteinander zu mischen. Die Auswahl der richtigen Schrift für
+die richtige Aufgabe ist eine Sache für Experten und hat sehr, sehr wenig mit
+dem persönlichem Geschmack eines Laien zu tun. Siehe hierzu auch das Zitat am
Ende von \autoref{sec:typearea.tips}, \autopageref{sec:typearea.tips.cite} und
-die folgende Erklärung.
+die folgende Erklärung.
\begin{Explain}
- Unterschiedliche Schriften für unterschiedliche Gliederungsebenen sind mit
- {\KOMAScript}-Mitteln möglich. Der Laie sollte sie aber meiden wie der
- Teufel das Weihwasser. Dies hat typografische Gründe.
-
- Eine Regel der Typografie besagt, dass man möglichst wenig Schriften
- miteinander mischen soll. Serifenlose für die Überschriften scheinen bereits
- ein Verstoß gegen diese Regel zu sein. Allerdings muss man wissen, dass
- fette, große, serifenbehaftete Buchstaben oft viel zu mächtig für eine
- Überschrift sind. Man müsste dann strenggenommen zumindest auf eine normale
+ Unterschiedliche Schriften für unterschiedliche Gliederungsebenen sind mit
+ {\KOMAScript}-Mitteln möglich. Der Laie sollte sie aber meiden wie der
+ Teufel das Weihwasser. Dies hat typografische Gründe.
+
+ Eine Regel der Typografie besagt, dass man möglichst wenig Schriften
+ miteinander mischen soll. Serifenlose für die Überschriften scheinen bereits
+ ein Verstoß gegen diese Regel zu sein. Allerdings muss man wissen, dass
+ fette, große, serifenbehaftete Buchstaben oft viel zu mächtig für eine
+ Überschrift sind. Man müsste dann strenggenommen zumindest auf eine normale
statt eine fette oder halbfette Schrift ausweichen. In tiefen
Gliederungsebenen kann das aber wieder zu schwach sein. Andererseits haben
- Serifenlose in Überschriften eine sehr angenehme Wirkung und fast nur für
- Überschriften eine Berechtigung. Daher wurde diese Voreinstellung für
- {\KOMAScript} mit gutem Grund gewählt.
+ Serifenlose in Überschriften eine sehr angenehme Wirkung und fast nur für
+ Überschriften eine Berechtigung. Daher wurde diese Voreinstellung für
+ {\KOMAScript} mit gutem Grund gewählt.
- Größere Vielfalt sollte aber vermieden werden. Schriftenmischung ist etwas
- für Profis. Aus den genannten Gründen sollten Sie bei Verwendung anderer als
+ Größere Vielfalt sollte aber vermieden werden. Schriftenmischung ist etwas
+ für Profis. Aus den genannten Gründen sollten Sie bei Verwendung anderer als
der Standard-\TeX-Fonts -- egal ob CM"~\Index{CM-Fonts},
- EC"~\Index{EC-Fonts} oder LM-Fonts\Index{LM-Fonts} -- bezüglich der
- Verträglichkeit der serifenlosen und serifenbehafteten Schrift einen
- Experten zu Rate ziehen oder die Schrift für das Element
+ EC"~\Index{EC-Fonts} oder LM-Fonts\Index{LM-Fonts} -- bezüglich der
+ Verträglichkeit der serifenlosen und serifenbehafteten Schrift einen
+ Experten zu Rate ziehen oder die Schrift für das Element
\FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} vorsichtshalber wie
- in obigem Beispiel umdefinieren. Die häufig anzutreffenden Kombinationen
+ in obigem Beispiel umdefinieren. Die häufig anzutreffenden Kombinationen
Times mit Helvetica oder Palatino mit Helvetica werden vom Autor als
- ungünstig betrachtet.
+ ungünstig betrachtet.
\end{Explain}
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -2234,29 +2252,29 @@ die folgende Erklärung.
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{part*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{chapter*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{section*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{subsection*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{subsubsection*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{paragraph*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{subparagraph*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \Macro{part*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{chapter*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{section*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{subsection*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{subsubsection*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{paragraph*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{subparagraph*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\end{Declaration}%
Bei den Sternvarianten der Gliederungsbefehle erfolgt keine
Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung}, wird kein
Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} gesetzt und kein Eintrag im
Inhaltsverzeichnis\Index{Inhaltsverzeichnis} vorgenommen. Der Verzicht auf
-den Kolumnentitel hat übrigens einen oftmals unerwünschten Effekt. Geht
-beispielsweise ein mit \Macro{chapter*} gesetztes Kapitel über mehrere Seiten,
-so taucht plötzlich der Kolumnentitel des letzten Kapitels wieder auf.
-{\KOMAScript} bietet dafür aber eine Lösung, die im Anschluss beschrieben
+den Kolumnentitel hat übrigens einen oftmals unerwünschten Effekt. Geht
+beispielsweise ein mit \Macro{chapter*} gesetztes Kapitel über mehrere Seiten,
+so taucht plötzlich der Kolumnentitel des letzten Kapitels wieder auf.
+{\KOMAScript} bietet dafür aber eine Lösung, die im Anschluss beschrieben
wird. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}\Macro{chapter*} existiert
-selbstverständlich nur bei Buch- und Berichtklassen, also bei \Class{book},
+selbstverständlich nur bei Buch- und Berichtklassen, also bei \Class{book},
\Class{scrbook}, \Class{report} und \Class{scrreprt}, nicht jedoch bei den
Artikelklassen \Class{article} und \Class{scrartcl}.
Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass \Macro{part*} und \Macro{chapter*}
-den Seitenstil für eine Seite umschalten. Während die
+den Seitenstil für eine Seite umschalten. Während die
Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} dabei den
Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} verwenden, ist bei \KOMAScript{} der zu
verwendende Seitenstil in den Makros \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle}
@@ -2264,9 +2282,9 @@ und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}).
-Bezüglich der Möglichkeiten der Schriftumschaltung\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{%
+Bezüglich der Möglichkeiten der Schriftumschaltung\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{%
\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} %
-gilt das Gleiche, wie zuvor in der Erklärung zu den sternlosen
+gilt das Gleiche, wie zuvor in der Erklärung zu den sternlosen
Varianten geschrieben. Die Elemente tragen die gleichen Namen, da sie
nicht Varianten, sondern Gliederungsebenen bezeichnen.%
%
@@ -2283,38 +2301,41 @@ bei denen ein automatischer Kolumnentitel erzeugt wird.
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{addpart}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addpart*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addchap}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addchap*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addsec}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}
- \Macro{addsec*}\Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \Macro{addpart}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addpart*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addchap}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addchap*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addsec}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
+ \Macro{addsec*}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\textnote[n]{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen}
\end{Declaration}%
-{\KOMAScript} bietet über die Gliederungsbefehle der Standardklassen hinaus
+{\KOMAScript} bietet über die Gliederungsbefehle der Standardklassen hinaus
die Anweisungen \Macro{addpart}, \Macro{addchap} und \Macro{addsec}. Diese
-ähneln bis auf die fehlende Nummerierung sehr den Standardanweisungen
+ähneln bis auf die fehlende Nummerierung sehr den Standardanweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section}. Sie erzeugen sowohl
-einen automatischen Kolumnentitel als auch einen Eintrag im
-Inhaltsverzeichnis, wobei auch die Einstellungen von Option
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}%
-\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}} beachtet werden,
-insbesondere auch die entsprechende Erweiterung des optionalen Arguments
-verfügbar ist.
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section}. Sie erzeugen sowohl einen
+automatischen Kolumnentitel als auch einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis,
+wobei auch die Einstellungen von Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}%
+\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}} beachtet werden, insbesondere
+auch die entsprechende Erweiterung des optionalen Arguments verfügbar ist. Das
+Aktivieren oder Deaktivieren des in der Erklärung zu
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part},
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} und
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section} dokumentierten Schalters
+\Option{nonumber} bleibt dabei jedoch wirkungslos.
Die Sternvarianten \Macro{addchap*} und \Macro{addsec*} gleichen hingegen den
Standardanweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} mit einem winzigen, aber wichtigen
-Unterschied: Die Kolumnentitel werden gelöscht. Dadurch wird der oben erwähnte
+Unterschied: Die Kolumnentitel werden gelöscht. Dadurch wird der oben erwähnte
Effekt veralteter Kolumnentitel ausgeschlossen. Stattdessen bleibt der
Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten leer. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}}\Macro{addchap} und \Macro{addchap*} existieren
\iffree{%
- selbstverständlich nur bei Buch- und Berichtklassen, also bei
+ selbstverständlich nur bei Buch- und Berichtklassen, also bei
\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}, nicht jedoch bei der Artikelklasse
\Class{scrartcl}.%
}{%
@@ -2325,13 +2346,13 @@ Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten leer. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and
Die Anweisung \Macro{addpart} erstellt entsprechend einen nicht nummerierten
Dokumentteil mit einem Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Da bereits
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*} den
-Kolumnentitel löschen, ergibt sich hier nicht das oben genannte Problem mit
+Kolumnentitel löschen, ergibt sich hier nicht das oben genannte Problem mit
veralteten Kolumnentiteln. Die Sternvariante \Macro{addpart*} ist daher
identisch mit der Sternvariante \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*} und wurde nur
-aus Konsistenzgründen definiert.
+aus Konsistenzgründen definiert.
Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass \Macro{addpart} und
-\Macro{addchap} und deren Sternvarianten den Seitenstil für eine Seite
+\Macro{addchap} und deren Sternvarianten den Seitenstil für eine Seite
umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe
@@ -2339,9 +2360,9 @@ umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}).
\iffree{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}% Umbruchkorrekturbeispiel
\begin{Example}
- Sie schreiben ein Buch mit einem ausladenden Nachwort über mehrere
+ Sie schreiben ein Buch mit einem ausladenden Nachwort über mehrere
Seiten. Dieses soll weder einen Kolumnentitel noch einen Eintrag ins
- Inhaltsverzeichnis erhalten. Daher verwenden Sie zunächst
+ Inhaltsverzeichnis erhalten. Daher verwenden Sie zunächst
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*}:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
@@ -2356,7 +2377,7 @@ umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros
\end{lstcode}
Allerdings entdecken Sie, dass auf der zweiten und dritten Seite des
Nachworts der Kolumnentitel des vorherigen Kapitels wieder auftaucht. Das
- wollen Sie natürlich nicht. Deshalb verwenden Sie nun \Macro{addchap*}:
+ wollen Sie natürlich nicht. Deshalb verwenden Sie nun \Macro{addchap*}:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
@@ -2368,9 +2389,9 @@ umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros
\Blindtext[10]
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Wunschgemäß ist das komplette Nachwort nun ohne Kolumnentitel. Doch auch das
- entspricht nicht ganz Ihren Vorstellungen. Ein Kolumnentitel wäre doch
- schön. Mit
+ Wunschgemäß ist das komplette Nachwort nun ohne Kolumnentitel. Doch auch das
+ entspricht nicht ganz Ihren Vorstellungen. Ein Kolumnentitel wäre doch
+ schön. Mit
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrbook}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
@@ -2382,13 +2403,13 @@ umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros
\Blindtext[10]
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- erhalten Sie nun sowohl »Nachwort« als Kolumnentitel der geraden Seiten, als
- auch einen Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag. Genau an diesem Eintrag stört sich
+ erhalten Sie nun sowohl »Nachwort« als Kolumnentitel der geraden Seiten, als
+ auch einen Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag. Genau an diesem Eintrag stört sich
dann aber der Verlag. Er besteht darauf, dass das Nachwort keinen Eintrag
ins Inhaltsverzeichnis zu erhalten hat. Auch wenn Ihnen das seltsam
erscheint, wollen Sie den Verlag zufriedenstellen. Also aktivieren Sie mit
- \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotocandhead} zunächst die
- erweiterte Funktion für das optionale Argument und setzen dann für das
+ \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotocandhead} zunächst die
+ erweiterte Funktion für das optionale Argument und setzen dann für das
Inhaltsverzeichnis explizit ein leeres Argument:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[headings=optiontotocandhead]
@@ -2402,15 +2423,15 @@ umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros
\Blindtext[10]
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Der Kolumnentitel wird von \OptionValue{tocentry}{\{\}} nicht verändert.
- Da \Class{scrbook} leere Einträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis automatisch
- unterdrückt, ist nun auch der Verlag zufriedengestellt.
+ Der Kolumnentitel wird von \OptionValue{tocentry}{\{\}} nicht verändert.
+ Da \Class{scrbook} leere Einträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis automatisch
+ unterdrückt, ist nun auch der Verlag zufriedengestellt.
\end{Example}%
\fi
-Bezüglich der Möglichkeiten der Schriftumschaltung\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{%
+Bezüglich der Möglichkeiten der Schriftumschaltung\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{%
\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} %
-gilt das Gleiche, wie zuvor in der Erklärung zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*},
+gilt das Gleiche, wie zuvor in der Erklärung zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*}
geschrieben. Die Elemente tragen die gleichen Namen, da sie nicht Varianten,
sondern Gliederungsebenen bezeichnen.%
@@ -2419,42 +2440,42 @@ sondern Gliederungsebenen bezeichnen.%
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{minisec}\Parameter{Überschrift}
+ \Macro{minisec}\Parameter{Ãœberschrift}
\end{Declaration}%
-Manchmal ist eine Art Überschrift\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften}
-wünschenswert, die zwar hervorgehoben wird, ansonsten aber eng mit dem
-nachfolgenden Text zusammenhängt. Eine solche Überschrift soll dann ohne große
-Abstände gesetzt werden.
+Manchmal ist eine Art Ãœberschrift\Index{Ueberschriften=Ãœberschriften}
+wünschenswert, die zwar hervorgehoben wird, ansonsten aber eng mit dem
+nachfolgenden Text zusammenhängt. Eine solche Überschrift soll dann ohne große
+Abstände gesetzt werden.
-Der Befehl \Macro{minisec} bewirkt genau eine derartige Überschrift. Diese
-Überschrift ist keiner Gliederungsebene\textnote{ohne Gliederungsebene}
+Der Befehl \Macro{minisec} bewirkt genau eine derartige Ãœberschrift. Diese
+Ãœberschrift ist keiner Gliederungsebene\textnote{ohne Gliederungsebene}
zugeordnet. Eine solche \emph{Mini-Section} wird nicht in das
-Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen und erhält auch keine Nummerierung.
+Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen und erhält auch keine Nummerierung.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{minisec}\LabelFontElement{minisec}%
-Die Schriftart des Gliederungsbefehls \Macro{minisec} kann über die Elemente
+Die Schriftart des Gliederungsbefehls \Macro{minisec} kann über die Elemente
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\\
\FontElement{minisec}} und \FontElement{minisec}\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{%
\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} beeinflusst
werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
-\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Die Voreinstellung für das Element
+\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Die Voreinstellung für das Element
\FontElement{minisec} ist leer, so dass in der Voreinstellung nur das Element
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition} wirkt.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Example}
- Sie haben einen Bausatz für eine Mausefalle entwickelt und wollen
- diesen getrennt nach den benötigten Materialien und der Anleitung für
- die Montage beschreiben. Das könnte so gemacht werden:
+ Sie haben einen Bausatz für eine Mausefalle entwickelt und wollen
+ diesen getrennt nach den benötigten Materialien und der Anleitung für
+ die Montage beschreiben. Das könnte so gemacht werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrartcl}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage{selinput}
\SelectInputMappings{
- adieresis={ä},
- germandbls={ß}
+ adieresis={ä},
+ germandbls={ß}
}
\begin{document}
@@ -2465,8 +2486,8 @@ werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
\maketitle
\section{Mausefalle}
- Das erste Projekt ist auch für Anfänger geeignet
- und benötigt lediglich einige wenige Bauteile,
+ Das erste Projekt ist auch für Anfänger geeignet
+ und benötigt lediglich einige wenige Bauteile,
die in jedem Haushalt zu finden sein sollten.
\minisec{Bauteile}
@@ -2475,7 +2496,7 @@ werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
1 Brett ($100\times 50 \times 12$)\\
1 Bierflaschenschnappverschluss\\
1 Kugelschreiberfeder\\
- 1 Reißzwecke\\
+ 1 Reißzwecke\\
2 Schrauben\\
1 Hammer\\
1 Messer
@@ -2483,24 +2504,24 @@ werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
\minisec{Montage}
- Zunächst suche man das Mauseloch. Dann lege man
- die Reißzwecke innen unmittelbar hinter das Loch,
+ Zunächst suche man das Mauseloch. Dann lege man
+ die Reißzwecke innen unmittelbar hinter das Loch,
damit bei den folgenden Aktionen die Maus nicht
- entschlüpfen kann.
- Anschließend klopfe man mit dem Hammer den
+ entschlüpfen kann.
+ Anschließend klopfe man mit dem Hammer den
Bierflaschenschnappverschluss in das Mauseloch.
- Sollte der Verschluss nicht groß genug sein, um
- das Loch vollständig und dauerhaft zu
- verschließen, nehme man stattdessen das Brett
+ Sollte der Verschluss nicht groß genug sein, um
+ das Loch vollständig und dauerhaft zu
+ verschließen, nehme man stattdessen das Brett
und schraube es unter Zuhilfenahme der beiden
Schrauben und des Messers vor das Loch. Statt
- des Messers kann selbstverständlich auch ein
+ des Messers kann selbstverständlich auch ein
Schraubendreher verwendet werden.
Die Kugelschreiberfeder ist dem Tierschutz zum
Opfer gefallen.
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Der wesentliche Teil ab der Überschrift »Bauteile« sieht anschließend wie
+ Der wesentliche Teil ab der Überschrift »Bauteile« sieht anschließend wie
folgt aus:
\begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip]\setlength{\parindent}{1em}
\minisec{Bauteile}
@@ -2509,7 +2530,7 @@ werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
1 Brett ($100\times 50 \times 12$)\\
1 Bierflaschenschnappverschluss\\
1 Kugelschreiberfeder\\
- 1 Reißzwecke\\
+ 1 Reißzwecke\\
2 Schrauben\\
1 Hammer\\
1 Messer
@@ -2517,26 +2538,26 @@ werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
\minisec{Montage}
- Zunächst suche man das Mauseloch. Dann lege man die
- Reißzwecke innen unmittelbar hinter das Loch, damit
+ Zunächst suche man das Mauseloch. Dann lege man die
+ Reißzwecke innen unmittelbar hinter das Loch, damit
bei den folgenden Aktionen die Maus nicht
- entschlüpfen kann.
- Anschließend klopfe man mit dem Hammer den
+ entschlüpfen kann.
+ Anschließend klopfe man mit dem Hammer den
Bierflaschenschnappverschluss in das Mauseloch.
- Sollte der Verschluss nicht groß genug sein, um das
- Loch vollständig und dauerhaft zu verschließen,
+ Sollte der Verschluss nicht groß genug sein, um das
+ Loch vollständig und dauerhaft zu verschließen,
nehme man stattdessen das Brett und schraube es
unter Zuhilfenahme der beiden Schrauben und des
Messers vor das Loch. Statt des Messers kann
- selbstverständlich auch ein Schraubendreher
+ selbstverständlich auch ein Schraubendreher
verwendet werden.
Die Kugelschreiberfeder ist dem Tierschutz zum
Opfer gefallen.
% Mit der Kugelschreiberfeder hat es eine besondere
% Bewandtnis. Sie stammt noch aus dem Selbstbauprojekt
-% »Mauseschnappfalle«, das dem Tierschutz zum Opfer gefallen ist.
+% »Mauseschnappfalle«, das dem Tierschutz zum Opfer gefallen ist.
\end{ShowOutput}
- Zum Verständnis der Verwendung des Pakets
+ Zum Verständnis der Verwendung des Pakets
\Package{selinput}\IndexPackage{selinput}\important{\Package{selinput}} und
%
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur
@@ -2557,44 +2578,44 @@ werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
\Macro{raggedpart}
\end{Declaration}%
Bei den Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} werden die
-Überschriften ganz normal im Blocksatz ausgegeben. Dadurch können in den
-Überschriften Trennungen auf"|treten und mehrzeilige Überschriften werden auf
+Überschriften ganz normal im Blocksatz ausgegeben. Dadurch können in den
+Ãœberschriften Trennungen auf"|treten und mehrzeilige Ãœberschriften werden auf
Textbreite gedehnt. Dieses Vorgehen ist in der Typografie eher
-unüblich. {\KOMAScript} setzt Überschriften von
+unüblich. {\KOMAScript} setzt Überschriften von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} bis \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraph}
-daher in linksbündigem Flattersatz mit hängendem Einzug. Verantwortlich ist
-dafür die Anweisung \Macro{raggedsection}, die vordefiniert ist als:
+daher in linksbündigem Flattersatz mit hängendem Einzug. Verantwortlich ist
+dafür die Anweisung \Macro{raggedsection}, die vordefiniert ist als:
\begin{lstcode}
\let\raggedsection\raggedright
\end{lstcode}
Die Anweisung \Macro{raggedsection} kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert
werden.
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen auch für Überschriften Blocksatz. Dazu schreiben Sie in
- die Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
+ Sie wollen auch für Überschriften Blocksatz. Dazu schreiben Sie in
+ die Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\raggedsection}{}
\end{lstcode}
- oder kürzer:
+ oder kürzer:
\begin{lstcode}
\let\raggedsection\relax
\end{lstcode}
- Sie erreichen somit eine ähnliche Formatierung der Überschriften wie
- bei den Standardklassen. Noch ähnlicher wird es, wenn Sie diese
- Änderung mit der oben vorgestellten Änderung für das Element
+ Sie erreichen somit eine ähnliche Formatierung der Überschriften wie
+ bei den Standardklassen. Noch ähnlicher wird es, wenn Sie diese
+ Änderung mit der oben vorgestellten Änderung für das Element
\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition}
kombinieren.
\end{Example}
-Da\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} manche Anwender für
-die Kapitelebene eine andere Ausrichtung wünschen als für alle anderen Ebenen,
-kann diese über \Macro{raggedchapter} auch getrennt verändert werden. In der
+Da\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} manche Anwender für
+die Kapitelebene eine andere Ausrichtung wünschen als für alle anderen Ebenen,
+kann diese über \Macro{raggedchapter} auch getrennt verändert werden. In der
Voreinstellung verwendet die Anweisung jedoch einfach \Macro{raggedsection},
-so dass eine Änderung von \Macro{raggedsection} sich indirekt auch auf
+so dass eine Änderung von \Macro{raggedsection} sich indirekt auch auf
\Macro{raggedchapter} auswirkt.
-Die Überschriften von Teilen (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}) werden in der Voreinstellung als
-einzige nicht in linksbündigem Flattersatz, sondern zentriert gesetzt. Dafür
+Die Ãœberschriften von Teilen (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}) werden in der Voreinstellung als
+einzige nicht in linksbündigem Flattersatz, sondern zentriert gesetzt. Dafür
ist die Anweisung \Macro{raggedpart} verantwortlich, die als:
\begin{lstcode}
\let\raggedpart\centering
@@ -2602,18 +2623,18 @@ ist die Anweisung \Macro{raggedpart} verantwortlich, die als:
vordefiniert ist. Auch diese Anweisung kann mit \Macro{renewcommand}
umdefiniert werden.
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen, dass Überschriften mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} in der
+ Sie wollen, dass Ãœberschriften mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} in der
gleichen Weise formatiert werden wie alle anderen Ebenen. Dazu schreiben
Sie
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\raggedpart}{\raggedsection}
\end{lstcode}
- in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments. An\textnote{Tipp!} dieser Stelle wurde im
+ in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments. An\textnote{Tipp!} dieser Stelle wurde im
Gegensatz zu oben absichtlich nicht \Macro{let} verwendet, da mit
\Macro{let} der Anweisung \Macro{raggedpart} die aktuelle Bedeutung von
- \Macro{raggedsection} zugewiesen würde. Spätere Änderungen von
+ \Macro{raggedsection} zugewiesen würde. Spätere Änderungen von
\Macro{raggedsection} blieben also bei \Macro{raggedpart}
- unberücksichtigt. Bei der Umdefinierung mit \Macro{renewcommand} erhält
+ unberücksichtigt. Bei der Umdefinierung mit \Macro{renewcommand} erhält
\Macro{raggedpart} dagegen nicht die Bedeutung von \Macro{raggedsection} zum
Zeitpunkt dieser Umdefinierung, sondern zum Zeitpunkt der Verwendung von
\Macro{raggedpart}.
@@ -2631,47 +2652,47 @@ umdefiniert werden.
\Macro{paragraphformat}
\Macro{subparagraphformat}
\Macro{othersectionlevelsformat}\Parameter{Gliederungsname}\Parameter{}
- \Parameter{Zählerausgabe}
+ \Parameter{Zählerausgabe}
\Macro{IfUsePrefixLine}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\Macro{autodot}
\end{Declaration}%
-\KOMAScript{} fügt der Ausgabe der Gliederungsnummern oberhalb von
-\Macro{the\PName{Gliederungsname}} (siehe \Macro{the\PName{Zähler}},
-\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.the/Zaehler/}) eine weitere logische Ebene
-hinzu. Die Zähler werden für die jeweilige Überschrift nicht einfach nur
+\KOMAScript{} fügt der Ausgabe der Gliederungsnummern oberhalb von
+\Macro{the\PName{Gliederungsname}} (siehe \Macro{the\PName{Zähler}},
+\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.the/Zähler/}) eine weitere logische Ebene
+hinzu. Die Zähler werden für die jeweilige Überschrift nicht einfach nur
ausgegeben. Sie werden mit Hilfe der parameterlosen Anweisungen
\Macro{partformat}, \Macro{chapterformat} bis
\Macro{subparagraphformat}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} formatiert.
\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}Die Anweisung
\Macro{chapterformat} existiert, wie bereits \Macro{thechapter},
-selbstverständlich nicht in der Klasse \Class{scrartcl}, sondern nur in den
+selbstverständlich nicht in der Klasse \Class{scrartcl}, sondern nur in den
Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}.
Wie bereits bei Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}} am Anfang dieses Abschnitts
-(siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}) erläutert wurde, müssen gemäß
+(siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}) erläutert wurde, müssen gemäß
\cite{DUDEN} die Gliederungsnummern je nach Gliederung mit einem nachfolgenden
Punkt versehen werden oder dieser hat zu entfallen. Die Anweisung
-\Macro{autodot} ist bei {\KOMAScript} für die Einhaltung dieser Regel
-verantwortlich. Auf den Punkt folgt bei allen Gliederungsebenen außer
+\Macro{autodot} ist bei {\KOMAScript} für die Einhaltung dieser Regel
+verantwortlich. Auf den Punkt folgt bei allen Gliederungsebenen außer
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} noch ein \Macro{enskip}. Dies entspricht einem
Leerraum von 0,5\Unit{em}, also einem Halbgeviert.
Die Anweisung
\Macro{othersectionlevelsformat}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} wird seit \KOMAScript~3.17 nur noch
-in Ausnahmefällen verwendet, wenn für eine Gliederungsebene keine
+in Ausnahmefällen verwendet, wenn für eine Gliederungsebene keine
Format-Anweisung definiert oder diese \Macro{relax} ist, was jedoch in der
-Voreinstellung für die Gliederungsebenen von KOMA-Script nicht zutrifft. Daher
+Voreinstellung für die Gliederungsebenen von KOMA-Script nicht zutrifft. Daher
wird sie auch nicht mehr offiziell dokumentiert. Bei einer
-Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu Versionen vor
+Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu Versionen vor
3.17\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{3.17}} (siehe Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version},
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}) haben hingegen die Anweisungen
\Macro{sectionformat} bis \Macro{subparagraphformat} keine interne
-Funktion. Stattdessen wird für diese Ebenen dann weiterhin
+Funktion. Stattdessen wird für diese Ebenen dann weiterhin
\Macro{othersectionlevelsformat} verwendet.
Mit Hilfe von \Macro{renewcommand} kann jede der
@@ -2697,35 +2718,35 @@ anzupassen. Nachfolgend finden Sie einige Definitionen, die denen aus den
Wegen\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} der Verwendung
von \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine} sollte die Anweisung \Macro{chapterformat} nicht
-außerhalb von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} verwendet
+außerhalb von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} verwendet
werden. \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine} ist nur innerhalb der Gliederungsbefehle von
\KOMAScript{} wohldefiniert. Dort wird dann im Falle der Verwendung einer
-Präfixzeile für die Nummer der Überschrift der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
-während im anderen Fall der \PName{Sonst-Teil} zur Ausführung kommt.
+Präfixzeile für die Nummer der Überschrift der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt,
+während im anderen Fall der \PName{Sonst-Teil} zur Ausführung kommt.
-Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie außerdem, dass bei der Umdefinierung
-selbstverständlich \Macro{newcommand} durch \Macro{renewcommand} zu ersetzen
+Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie außerdem, dass bei der Umdefinierung
+selbstverständlich \Macro{newcommand} durch \Macro{renewcommand} zu ersetzen
ist.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} das Wort
- »Teil« vor der Nummer nicht ausgegeben wird. Dann können Sie beispielsweise
- folgende Anweisung in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments schreiben:
+ »Teil« vor der Nummer nicht ausgegeben wird. Dann können Sie beispielsweise
+ folgende Anweisung in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments schreiben:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\partformat}{\thepart\autodot}
\end{lstcode}
- Genau genommen könnten Sie an dieser Stelle auch auf \Macro{autodot}
+ Genau genommen könnten Sie an dieser Stelle auch auf \Macro{autodot}
verzichten und stattdessen einen festen Punkt setzen. Da
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} mit römischen Zahlen nummeriert wird, muss der
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} mit römischen Zahlen nummeriert wird, muss der
Punkt laut \cite{DUDEN} folgen. Allerdings bringen Sie sich dann um die
- Möglichkeit, die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}%
+ Möglichkeit, die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}} einzusetzen und so von der
- Regel abzuweichen. Näheres zu der Option siehe
+ Regel abzuweichen. Näheres zu der Option siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}.
- Eine weitere Möglichkeit besteht darin, die Nummerierung der Abschnitte
- so in den Rand zu platzieren, dass der Überschriftentext
- links mit dem umgebenden Text abschließt. Dies erreicht man
+ Eine weitere Möglichkeit besteht darin, die Nummerierung der Abschnitte
+ so in den Rand zu platzieren, dass der Ãœberschriftentext
+ links mit dem umgebenden Text abschließt. Dies erreicht man
mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\sectionformat}{%
@@ -2742,18 +2763,18 @@ ist.
\thesubparagraph\autodot\enskip}}
\end{lstcode}
Die optionalen Argumente der \Macro{makebox}-Anweisungen fordern von
- \LaTeX{} dabei eine Box der Breite Null, deren Inhalt rechtsbündig
+ \LaTeX{} dabei eine Box der Breite Null, deren Inhalt rechtsbündig
angeordnet ist. Im Ergebnis wird der Inhalt der Box links von der aktuellen
Position ausgegeben.\iffree{}{ %Umbruchkorrekturtext
- Mit diesem beliebten Trick wird vermieden, dass zunächst die Breite von
+ Mit diesem beliebten Trick wird vermieden, dass zunächst die Breite von
Nummer und Abstand ausgemessen werden muss, um dann die aktuelle Position
- entsprechend mit \Macro{hspace} zu verändern.}
- Näheres zu den optionalen Argumenten von \Macro{makebox} ist
+ entsprechend mit \Macro{hspace} zu verändern.}
+ Näheres zu den optionalen Argumenten von \Macro{makebox} ist
\cite{latex:usrguide} zu entnehmen.
\end{Example}
-Für Formatierungsänderungen bei den Überschriften, die über die reine Ausgabe
-der Nummer hinaus gehen, sei ausdrücklich auf
+Für Formatierungsänderungen bei den Überschriften, die über die reine Ausgabe
+der Nummer hinaus gehen, sei ausdrücklich auf
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat}%
\IndexCmd{partlineswithprefixformat},
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat}%
@@ -2761,8 +2782,8 @@ der Nummer hinaus gehen, sei ausdrücklich auf
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat}\IndexCmd{chapterlinesformat}
sowie
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat}\IndexCmd{sectionlinesformat}
-und das zugehörige \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat}%
-\IndexCmd{sectioncatchphraseformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+und das zugehörige \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat}%
+\IndexCmd{sectioncatchphraseformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections},
ab \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat} verwiesen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2774,22 +2795,22 @@ ab \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.partlineswithprefixformat} verwiesen.%
Diese \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
\ChangedAt{v2.8o}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}%
beiden Anweisungen werden nicht nur intern von {\KOMAScript} verwendet,
-sondern stehen auch dem Anwender zur Verfügung. Nachfolgend werden sie
-beispielsweise für die Umdefinierung anderer Anweisungen verwendet.
+sondern stehen auch dem Anwender zur Verfügung. Nachfolgend werden sie
+beispielsweise für die Umdefinierung anderer Anweisungen verwendet.
Bei Verwendung von Option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}) setzt
\Macro{chapappifchapterprefix} im Hauptteil des Dokuments das Wort
-»Kapitel«\Index{Kapitel>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} in der aktuellen Sprache,
+»Kapitel«\Index{Kapitel>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} in der aktuellen Sprache,
gefolgt vom \PName{Zusatztext}. Im Anhang\Index{Anhang} wird stattdessen das
-Wort »Anhang« in der aktuellen Sprache, ebenfalls gefolgt vom
+Wort »Anhang« in der aktuellen Sprache, ebenfalls gefolgt vom
\PName{Zusatztext}, ausgegeben. Bei der Einstellung
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} wird hingegen nichts
ausgegeben.
-Die Anweisung \Macro{chapapp} setzt immer das Wort »Kapitel«
-beziehungsweise »Anhang«. Dabei spielt die Einstellung der Option
+Die Anweisung \Macro{chapapp} setzt immer das Wort »Kapitel«
+beziehungsweise »Anhang«. Dabei spielt die Einstellung der Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} keine Rolle.
Da es Kapitel nur bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}
@@ -2809,19 +2830,19 @@ gibt, existieren die beiden Anweisungen auch nur bei diesen Klassen.%
\Macro{subsectionmarkformat}
\end{Declaration}%
\begin{Explain}
- Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle} erwähnt, arbeitet der
+ Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle} erwähnt, arbeitet der
Seitenstil \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}} mit automatischen
Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}. Dazu werden die
Anweisungen \Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} beziehungsweise
\Macro{sectionmark} und \Macro{subsectionmark} entsprechend definiert.
Gliederungsbefehle (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter},
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}~\dots) führen automatisch eine
- entsprechende \Macro{\dots mark}-Anweisung aus. Der dabei übergebene
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}~\dots) führen automatisch eine
+ entsprechende \Macro{\dots mark}-Anweisung aus. Der dabei übergebene
Parameter beinhaltet den Text der
- Gliederungsüberschrift\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften}. Die zugehörige
+ Gliederungsüberschrift\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften}. Die zugehörige
Gliederungsnummer wird automatisch in der \Macro{\dots mark}-Anweisung
- hinzugefügt. Die Formatierung erfolgt je nach Gliederungsebene mit einer der
+ hinzugefügt. Die Formatierung erfolgt je nach Gliederungsebene mit einer der
drei Anweisungen \Macro{chaptermarkformat}, \Macro{sectionmarkformat} und
\Macro{subsectionmarkformat}.
@@ -2829,32 +2850,32 @@ gibt, existieren die beiden Anweisungen auch nur bei diesen Klassen.%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec}\IndexCmd{addsec} ebenfalls auf
\Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} basieren. Dabei wird aber lokal
- der Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth} auf einen Wert gesetzt,
+ der Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth} auf einen Wert gesetzt,
mit dem die Nummerierung von Kapiteln beziehungsweise Abschnitten
abgeschaltet wird. Dies sollte man beispielsweise bei der Umdefinierung von
- \Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} berücksichtigen (siehe
- \Macro{ifnumbered} auf \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifnumbered}). Für die
+ \Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} berücksichtigen (siehe
+ \Macro{ifnumbered} auf \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifnumbered}). Für die
Sternformen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} und
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec*} existieren außerdem die Anweisungen
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec*} existieren außerdem die Anweisungen
\Macro{addchapmark} und \Macro{addsecmark}, die in der Voreinstellung
ebenfalls in der genannten Weise definiert sind.
- Während\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} bei \Class{scrartcl}
+ Während\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} bei \Class{scrartcl}
weder \Macro{chaptermark} noch \Macro{addchapmark} oder
\Macro{chaptermarkformat} existieren, gibt es die beiden Anweisungen
\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}}\Macro{subsectionmark} und
\Macro{subsectionmarkformat} nur bei \Class{scrartcl}. Bei Verwendung des
Pakets \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
- \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} ändert sich dies jedoch (siehe
+ \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} ändert sich dies jedoch (siehe
\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}).
\end{Explain}
So wie mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partformat} bis
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraphformat} die Nummern der
-Gliederungsüberschriften formatiert ausgegeben werden, werden entsprechend mit
+Gliederungsüberschriften formatiert ausgegeben werden, werden entsprechend mit
\Macro{chaptermarkformat}, \Macro{sectionmarkformat} und
\Macro{subsectionmarkformat} die Nummern der Gliederungsebenen in den
automatischen Kolumnentiteln formatiert ausgegeben. Mit \Macro{renewcommand}
-können sie eigenen Anforderungen angepasst werden. Die Originaldefinitionen
+können sie eigenen Anforderungen angepasst werden. Die Originaldefinitionen
aus den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen sind:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{%
@@ -2866,8 +2887,8 @@ aus den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen sind:
\end{lstcode}
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass der Kapitelnummer in den Kolumnentiteln
- das Wort »Kapitel« vorangestellt wird. Dann setzen Sie
- beispielsweise diese Definition in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
+ das Wort »Kapitel« vorangestellt wird. Dann setzen Sie
+ beispielsweise diese Definition in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{%
\chapapp~\thechapter\autodot\enskip}
@@ -2876,7 +2897,7 @@ aus den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen sind:
Wie Sie sehen, finden hier die beiden Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapapp} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix} Verwendung, die weiter oben
-erklärt wurden.%
+erklärt wurden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2898,32 +2919,32 @@ Normalerweise werden bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection} und bei der Klasse
\Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl} die Ebenen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}
bis \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection}
-nummeriert. Gesteuert wird dies über den \LaTeX-Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth}.
+nummeriert. Gesteuert wird dies über den \LaTeX-Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth}.
Damit\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} sich der Anwender keine abstrakten Nummern merken muss, um
-einstellen zu können, bis zu welcher Gliederungsebene die Überschriften
+einstellen zu können, bis zu welcher Gliederungsebene die Überschriften
nummeriert werden sollen, gibt es die Anweisungen \Macro{partnumdepth} bis
\Macro{subparagraphnumdepth}. Diese liefern die entsprechende Nummer zur
jeweiligen Gliederungsebene.
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen, dass in einem Buchprojekt nur die Gliederungsebenen vom Teil
- (engl. \emph{part}) über das Kapitel (engl. \emph{chapter}) bis zum
- Abschnitt (engl. \emph{section}) nummeriert werden. Dazu müssen Sie
- in der Dokumentpräambel den Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth} auf den Wert
+ (engl. \emph{part}) über das Kapitel (engl. \emph{chapter}) bis zum
+ Abschnitt (engl. \emph{section}) nummeriert werden. Dazu müssen Sie
+ in der Dokumentpräambel den Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth} auf den Wert
setzen, den die Anweisung \Macro{sectionnumdepth} liefert:
\begin{lstcode}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{\sectionnumdepth}
\end{lstcode}
\end{Example}
-Eine Umdefinierung der Anweisungen ist nicht vorgesehen und wird ausdrücklich
+Eine Umdefinierung der Anweisungen ist nicht vorgesehen und wird ausdrücklich
nicht empfohlen, da dies zu unvorhergesehenen Ergebnissen sowohl mit
-\KOMAScript{} als auch bei Verwendung von Drittpaketen führen kann.
+\KOMAScript{} als auch bei Verwendung von Drittpaketen führen kann.
-Der\textnote{Achtung!} Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth} ist nicht zu verwechseln
-mit dem Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} (siehe
+Der\textnote{Achtung!} Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth} ist nicht zu verwechseln
+mit dem Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}). Auch
-sind die Werte je nach Klasse nicht eins zu eins übertragbar.%
+sind die Werte je nach Klasse nicht eins zu eins übertragbar.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2934,15 +2955,15 @@ sind die Werte je nach Klasse nicht eins zu eins übertragbar.%
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Else-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
Nachdem\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} zuvor erklärt wurde, wie man bestimmen kann, welche
+ \Class{scrartcl}} zuvor erklärt wurde, wie man bestimmen kann, welche
Gliederungsebenen nummeriert werden sollen, kann mit diesen Anweisungen nun
-Code abhängig davon, ob eine \PName{Gliederungsebene} nummeriert wird oder
-nicht, ausgeführt werden. Wird mit den aktuellen Einstellungen eine
-\PName{Gliederungsebene} nummeriert, so führt \Macro{ifnumbered} den
-\PName{Dann-Teil} aus, während \Macro{ifunnumbered} den \PName{Else-Teil}
-ausführt. Wird mit den aktuellen Einstellungen eine \PName{Gliederungsebene}
-nicht nummeriert, dann führt \Macro{ifnumbered} den \PName{Else-Teil} aus,
-wohingegen \Macro{ifunnumbered} den \PName{Dann-Teil} ausführt. Als
+Code abhängig davon, ob eine \PName{Gliederungsebene} nummeriert wird oder
+nicht, ausgeführt werden. Wird mit den aktuellen Einstellungen eine
+\PName{Gliederungsebene} nummeriert, so führt \Macro{ifnumbered} den
+\PName{Dann-Teil} aus, während \Macro{ifunnumbered} den \PName{Else-Teil}
+ausführt. Wird mit den aktuellen Einstellungen eine \PName{Gliederungsebene}
+nicht nummeriert, dann führt \Macro{ifnumbered} den \PName{Else-Teil} aus,
+wohingegen \Macro{ifunnumbered} den \PName{Dann-Teil} ausführt. Als
\PName{Gliederungsebene} wird der englische Name der Ebene angegeben, also
\PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection},
\PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph} oder \PValue{subparagraph}.
@@ -2950,7 +2971,7 @@ wohingegen \Macro{ifunnumbered} den \PName{Dann-Teil} ausführt. Als
\KOMAScript{} selbst verwendet diesen Test beispielsweise in der Definition
von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chaptermark}\IndexCmd{chaptermark} beim Seitenstil
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}. Dadurch wird
-indirekt auch sichergestellt, dass Überschriften mit
+indirekt auch sichergestellt, dass Ãœberschriften mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap} den Kolumnentitel nicht mit einer Nummer
versehen (siehe auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchapmark},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchapmark}).%
@@ -2959,43 +2980,43 @@ versehen (siehe auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchapmark},
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{setpartpreamble}%
- \OParameter{Position}\OParameter{Breite}\Parameter{Präambel}
+ \OParameter{Position}\OParameter{Breite}\Parameter{Präambel}
\Macro{setchapterpreamble}%
- \OParameter{Position}\OParameter{Breite}\Parameter{Präambel}
+ \OParameter{Position}\OParameter{Breite}\Parameter{Präambel}
\end{Declaration}%
\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}}Teile\Index{Teil>Praeambel=Präambel} und
-Kapitel\Index{Kapitel>Praeambel=Präambel} können bei {\KOMAScript} mit einer
-\PName{Präambel} versehen werden. Dies ist insbesondere im zweispaltigen
+ \Class{scrreprt}}Teile\Index{Teil>Praeambel=Präambel} und
+Kapitel\Index{Kapitel>Praeambel=Präambel} können bei {\KOMAScript} mit einer
+\PName{Präambel} versehen werden. Dies ist insbesondere im zweispaltigen
Layout mit der Klassenoption \Option{twocolumn}\IndexOption{twocolumn}
-nützlich, da die \PName{Präambel} zusammen mit der Überschrift einspaltig
-gesetzt wird. Die \PName{Präambel} kann auch mehrere Absätze beinhalten. Die
-Anweisung zum Setzen der \PName{Präambel} muss vor der jeweiligen
+nützlich, da die \PName{Präambel} zusammen mit der Überschrift einspaltig
+gesetzt wird. Die \PName{Präambel} kann auch mehrere Absätze beinhalten. Die
+Anweisung zum Setzen der \PName{Präambel} muss vor der jeweiligen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}- oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}-
bzw. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}- oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}-Anweisung stehen.
\begin{Example}
- Sie schreiben einen Bericht über den Zustand einer Firma. Dabei
+ Sie schreiben einen Bericht über den Zustand einer Firma. Dabei
organisieren Sie den Bericht so, dass jeder Abteilung ein eigener
- Teilbericht spendiert wird. Jedem dieser Teile soll außerdem eine
+ Teilbericht spendiert wird. Jedem dieser Teile soll außerdem eine
Zusammenfassung vorangestellt werden. Diese Zusammenfassung soll auf
- der Titelseite jedes Teils stehen. Das ist wie folgt möglich:
+ der Titelseite jedes Teils stehen. Das ist wie folgt möglich:
\begin{lstcode}
\setpartpreamble{%
\begin{abstract}
Dies ist ein Blindtext zur Demonstration.
\end{abstract}}
- \part{Abteilung Grünschnitt}
+ \part{Abteilung Grünschnitt}
\end{lstcode}
- Je nach Einstellung der Optionen für die
- Überschriftengröße\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften} (siehe
- \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}) und der Optionen für die Form
+ Je nach Einstellung der Optionen für die
+ Überschriftengröße\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften} (siehe
+ \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}) und der Optionen für die Form
der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{abstract} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.abstract}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.abstract}),
- sieht das Ergebnis ungefähr wie folgt aus:
+ sieht das Ergebnis ungefähr wie folgt aus:
\begin{ShowOutput}\centering
{\LARGE\usekomafont{disposition} Teil III.\par\vspace{14pt}}
- {\LARGE\usekomafont{disposition} Abteilung Grünschnitt\strut\par}
+ {\LARGE\usekomafont{disposition} Abteilung Grünschnitt\strut\par}
\begin{quote}\small
\vspace{4ex}
\begin{center}
@@ -3006,50 +3027,50 @@ bzw. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}- oder
\end{quote}
\end{ShowOutput}
\end{Example}
-Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass Sie für die Abstände der Präambel
-zur Teilüberschrift bzw. zum Kapiteltext selbst verantwortlich sind. Bitte
+Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass Sie für die Abstände der Präambel
+zur Teilüberschrift bzw. zum Kapiteltext selbst verantwortlich sind. Bitte
beachten Sie auch, dass die \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung bei der
Klasse \Class{scrbook} nicht existiert (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.abstract},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}).
Das\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} erste
-optionale Argument \PName{Position} bestimmt über ein bis zwei
-Buchstaben die Position, an der die Präambel ausgegeben wird. Für die
-vertikale Position existieren derzeit zwei Möglichkeiten:
+optionale Argument \PName{Position} bestimmt über ein bis zwei
+Buchstaben die Position, an der die Präambel ausgegeben wird. Für die
+vertikale Position existieren derzeit zwei Möglichkeiten:
%\iffree{}{\pagebreak}% Umbruchoptimierung
\begin{labeling}[~--]{\quad\PValue{o}}\itemsep=-\parsep
-\item [\quad\PValue{o}] über der Überschrift
-\item [\quad\PValue{u}] unter der Überschrift
+\item [\quad\PValue{o}] über der Überschrift
+\item [\quad\PValue{u}] unter der Ãœberschrift
\end{labeling}\pagebreak[3]% Umbruchkorrektur
-Es kann so jeweils eine Präambel unter und über der Überschrift gesetzt werden,
-mit drei Möglichkeiten für die horizontale Position:
+Es kann so jeweils eine Präambel unter und über der Überschrift gesetzt werden,
+mit drei Möglichkeiten für die horizontale Position:
\begin{labeling}[~--]{\quad\PValue{o}}\itemsep=-\parsep
-\item [\quad\PValue{l}] linksbündig
-\item [\quad\PValue{r}] rechtsbündig
+\item [\quad\PValue{l}] linksbündig
+\item [\quad\PValue{r}] rechtsbündig
\item [\quad\PValue{c}] zentriert
\end{labeling}
-Dabei wird allerdings nicht der Text der \PName{Präambel} entsprechend
+Dabei wird allerdings nicht der Text der \PName{Präambel} entsprechend
angeordnet, sondern eine Box, deren Breite durch das zweite optionale
Argument \PName{Breite} bestimmt wird. Wird auf das zweite optionale
Argument verzichtet, so wird stattdessen die gesamte Textbreite
verwendet. Damit bleibt die Option zur horizontalen Positionierung in
-diesem Fall wirkungslos. Es kann jeweils ein Buchstabe für die
-vertikale mit einem Buchstaben für die horizontale Anordnung
+diesem Fall wirkungslos. Es kann jeweils ein Buchstabe für die
+vertikale mit einem Buchstaben für die horizontale Anordnung
kombiniert werden.
-Eine häufigere Anwendung von \Macro{setchapterpreamble} dürfte ein Spruch oder
-Zitat zu einer Überschrift sein. Die dazu verwendbare Anweisung
+Eine häufigere Anwendung von \Macro{setchapterpreamble} dürfte ein Spruch oder
+Zitat zu einer Ãœberschrift sein. Die dazu verwendbare Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.dictum}\IndexCmd{dictum} ist im nachfolgenden
-Abschnitt erläutert. Dort findet sich auch ein entsprechendes Beispiel.
-
-Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass \PName{Präambel} bei der
-Platzierung über der Überschrift in den dort vorhandenen freien Platz gesetzt
-wird. Die Überschrift wird dabei nicht nach unten verschoben. Der Anwender ist
-also selbst dafür verantwortlich dass \PName{Präambel} nicht zu groß ist und
-der vorhandene freie Platz über der Überschrift genügt. Siehe dazu auch
-Einstellung \Option{beforeskip} für
+Abschnitt erläutert. Dort findet sich auch ein entsprechendes Beispiel.
+
+Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass \PName{Präambel} bei der
+Platzierung über der Überschrift in den dort vorhandenen freien Platz gesetzt
+wird. Die Ãœberschrift wird dabei nicht nach unten verschoben. Der Anwender ist
+also selbst dafür verantwortlich dass \PName{Präambel} nicht zu groß ist und
+der vorhandene freie Platz über der Überschrift genügt. Siehe dazu auch
+Einstellung \Option{beforeskip} für
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} in
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections},
\autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys},
\autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys}.
%
@@ -3070,10 +3091,10 @@ Einstellung \Option{beforeskip} für
\BeginIndex{}{Formeln}%
\BeginIndex{}{Gleichungen}%
-Die \KOMAScript-Klassen stellen keine eigenen Umgebungen für mathematische
-Formeln, Gleichungssysteme oder ähnliche Elemente der Mathematik
-bereit. Stattdessen stützt sich \KOMAScript{} im Bereich der Mathematik voll
-und ganz auf den \LaTeX-Kern. Dies gilt auch für die Realisierung der beiden
+Die \KOMAScript-Klassen stellen keine eigenen Umgebungen für mathematische
+Formeln, Gleichungssysteme oder ähnliche Elemente der Mathematik
+bereit. Stattdessen stützt sich \KOMAScript{} im Bereich der Mathematik voll
+und ganz auf den \LaTeX-Kern. Dies gilt auch für die Realisierung der beiden
Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.leqno} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fleqn}.
@@ -3081,7 +3102,7 @@ Auf eine Beschreibung der Mathematikumgebungen des \LaTeX-Kerns, also
\Environment{displaymath}\IndexEnv{displaymath},
\Environment{equation}\IndexEnv{equation} und
\Environment{eqnarray}\IndexEnv{eqnarray}, wird an dieser Stelle
-verzichtet. Wer diese verwenden möchte, sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen. Für
+verzichtet. Wer diese verwenden möchte, sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen. Für
mehr als nur einfachste mathematische Formeln und Gleichungen sei jedoch
die Verwendung von Paket \Package{amsmath}\textnote{Tipp!} empfohlen (siehe
\cite{package:amsmath}).%
@@ -3095,8 +3116,8 @@ Standardoptionsdatei \File{leqno.clo} geladen. Dadurch erfolgt die
Nummerierung von Gleichungen links. Diese Option ist als optionales
Argument\textnote{Achtung!} von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} zu
verwenden. Eine Einstellung per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird nicht unterstützt. Dies wäre auch
-deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird nicht unterstützt. Dies wäre auch
+deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket
\Package{amsmath} ebenfalls nur beim Laden, nicht aber zur Laufzeit auf diese
Option reagieren kann.%
%
@@ -3109,11 +3130,11 @@ Option reagieren kann.%
Gleichungen\Index{Gleichungen>Ausrichtung} werden normalerweise horizontal
zentriert ausgegeben. Mit Hilfe der Standardoption \Option{fleqn} wird die
Standardoptionsdatei \File{fleqn.clo} geladen. Dadurch erfolgt die Ausgabe von
-Gleichungen linksbündig. Diese Option ist als optionales
+Gleichungen linksbündig. Diese Option ist als optionales
Argument\textnote{Achtung!} von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} zu
verwenden. Eine Einstellung per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird nicht unterstützt. Dies wäre auch
-deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird nicht unterstützt. Dies wäre auch
+deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket
\Package{amsmath} ebenfalls nur beim Laden, nicht aber zur Laufzeit auf diese
Option reagieren kann.%
%
@@ -3122,46 +3143,46 @@ Option reagieren kann.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen}
+\section{Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen}
\seclabel{floats}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Gleitumgebungen}
\BeginIndex{}{Tabellen}
\BeginIndex{}{Abbildungen}
-{\LaTeX} bietet mit den Gleitumgebungen einen sehr leistungsfähigen und
-komfortablen Mechanismus für die automatische Anordnung von Abbildungen und
-Tabellen. Genau genommen sollte von »Tafeln«\Index{Tafeln} statt von
-»Tabellen« die Rede sein. Dies wäre auch zur Unterscheidung der Umgebungen
+{\LaTeX} bietet mit den Gleitumgebungen einen sehr leistungsfähigen und
+komfortablen Mechanismus für die automatische Anordnung von Abbildungen und
+Tabellen. Genau genommen sollte von »Tafeln«\Index{Tafeln} statt von
+»Tabellen« die Rede sein. Dies wäre auch zur Unterscheidung der Umgebungen
\Environment{table}\IndexEnv{table} und
\Environment{tabular}\IndexEnv{tabular} von Vorteil. Es hat sich im Deutschen
-aber für beides die Bezeichnung »Tabelle« eingebürgert. Das kommt vermutlich
-daher, dass man in \Environment{table}-Umgebungen üblicherweise
+aber für beides die Bezeichnung »Tabelle« eingebürgert. Das kommt vermutlich
+daher, dass man in \Environment{table}-Umgebungen üblicherweise
\Environment{tabular}-Umgebungen setzt, auch wenn dies keineswegs zwingend
ist.
-Häufig\textnote{Achtung!} werden die Gleitumgebungen von Anfängern nicht
+Häufig\textnote{Achtung!} werden die Gleitumgebungen von Anfängern nicht
richtig verstanden. So wird oft die Forderung aufgestellt, eine Tabelle oder
Abbildung genau an einer bestimmten Position im Text zu setzen. Dies ist
-jedoch nicht erforderlich, da auf Gleitumgebungen im Text über eine Referenz
+jedoch nicht erforderlich, da auf Gleitumgebungen im Text über eine Referenz
verwiesen wird. Es ist auch nicht sinnvoll, da ein solches Objekt an einer
-Stelle nur dann gesetzt werden kann, wenn auf der Seite noch genügend Platz
-für das Objekt vorhanden ist. Ist dies nicht der Fall, müsste das Objekt auf
-die nächste Seite umbrochen werden und auf der aktuellen Seite würde ein
-möglicherweise sehr großer leerer Raum bleiben.
+Stelle nur dann gesetzt werden kann, wenn auf der Seite noch genügend Platz
+für das Objekt vorhanden ist. Ist dies nicht der Fall, müsste das Objekt auf
+die nächste Seite umbrochen werden und auf der aktuellen Seite würde ein
+möglicherweise sehr großer leerer Raum bleiben.
-Häufig\textnote{Achtung!} findet sich in einem Dokument auch bei jedem
+Häufig\textnote{Achtung!} findet sich in einem Dokument auch bei jedem
Gleitobjekt das gleiche optionale Argument zur Platzierung des Objekts. Auch
-dies ist nicht sinnvoll. In solchen Fällen sollte man besser den Standardwert
-global ändern. Näheres dazu ist \cite{DANTE:FAQ} zu entnehmen.
+dies ist nicht sinnvoll. In solchen Fällen sollte man besser den Standardwert
+global ändern. Näheres dazu ist \cite{DANTE:FAQ} zu entnehmen.
\iffree{}{\pagebreak[3]}% Umbruchoptimierung!!!
Ein\textnote{Achtung!} wichtiger Hinweis sei diesem Abschnitt noch
-vorangestellt: Die meisten Mechanismen, die hier vorgestellt werden und über
-die Fähigkeiten der Standardklassen hinaus gehen, funktionieren nicht mehr,
+vorangestellt: Die meisten Mechanismen, die hier vorgestellt werden und über
+die Fähigkeiten der Standardklassen hinaus gehen, funktionieren nicht mehr,
wenn Sie ein Paket verwenden, das in die Generierung von Tabellen- und
-Abbildungstiteln eingreift und deren Aussehen verändert. Dies sollte
-selbstverständlich sein, wird aber leider häufig nicht bedacht.
+Abbildungstiteln eingreift und deren Aussehen verändert. Dies sollte
+selbstverständlich sein, wird aber leider häufig nicht bedacht.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -3169,125 +3190,125 @@ selbstverständlich sein, wird aber leider häufig nicht bedacht.
\end{Declaration}
Bei den Standardklassen werden die Titel von Gleitumgebungen, die mit der
Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}\IndexCmd{caption} (siehe unten)
-gesetzt werden, als Unterschrift formatiert. Darüber hinaus wird zwischen
+gesetzt werden, als Unterschrift formatiert. Darüber hinaus wird zwischen
ein"~ und mehrzeiligen Unterschriften unterschieden, wobei einzeilige
Unterschriften horizontal zentriert werden.
\leavevmode\LabelOptionValue{captions}{tableheading}\nobreak%
-Tabellen werden jedoch häufig mit
-Überschriften\important{\OptionValue{captions}{tableheading}} statt mit
+Tabellen werden jedoch häufig mit
+Ãœberschriften\important{\OptionValue{captions}{tableheading}} statt mit
Unterschriften versehen. Das liegt daran, dass es auch Tabellen geben kann,
-die sich über mehrere Seiten erstrecken. Bei solchen Tabellen möchte man
-natürlich bereits auf der ersten Seite wissen, worum es sich handelt. Darüber
+die sich über mehrere Seiten erstrecken. Bei solchen Tabellen möchte man
+natürlich bereits auf der ersten Seite wissen, worum es sich handelt. Darüber
hinaus werden Tabellen zeilenweise von oben nach unten gelesen. Damit gibt es
-mindestens zwei gute Gründe, in der Regel alle Tabellen mit Überschriften zu
+mindestens zwei gute Gründe, in der Regel alle Tabellen mit Überschriften zu
versehen. \KOMAScript{} bietet daher mit der Einstellung
\OptionValue{captions}{tableheading}%
-\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{tableheading}} die Möglichkeit, bei
-Tabellen die Formatierung auf Überschriften zu ändern.
+\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{tableheading}} die Möglichkeit, bei
+Tabellen die Formatierung auf Überschriften zu ändern.
Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei an dieser Stelle darauf hingewiesen, dass
-mehrseitige Tabellen nicht als Gleitumgebungen gesetzt werden können. Für den
-automatischen Seitenumbruch von Tabellen werden außerdem Zusatzpakete wie
+mehrseitige Tabellen nicht als Gleitumgebungen gesetzt werden können. Für den
+automatischen Seitenumbruch von Tabellen werden außerdem Zusatzpakete wie
\Package{longtable}\IndexPackage{longtable} (siehe \cite{package:longtable})
oder \Package{supertabular}\IndexPackage{supertabular} (siehe
-\cite{package:supertabular}) benötigt.
+\cite{package:supertabular}) benötigt.
Mit\important{\OptionValue{captions}{tablesignature}}
der Einstellung
\OptionValue{captions}{tablesignature}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{tablesignature}}
wird wieder die Voreinstellung der Formatierung als Tabellenunterschrift
-gewählt. Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei an dieser Stelle darauf hingewiesen, dass
-die beiden Werte lediglich die Formatierung ändern. Der Ort, an dem die Über"~
-oder Unterschrift gesetzt wird, hängt bei den Gleitumgebungen von
+gewählt. Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei an dieser Stelle darauf hingewiesen, dass
+die beiden Werte lediglich die Formatierung ändern. Der Ort, an dem die Über"~
+oder Unterschrift gesetzt wird, hängt bei den Gleitumgebungen von
\KOMAScript{} allein vom Ort ab, an dem die Anweisung
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} verwendet wird. Dies ändert sich jedoch bei
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} verwendet wird. Dies ändert sich jedoch bei
Verwendung des Pakets \Package{float}\IndexPackage{float} mit der Anweisung
\Macro{restylefloat}\IndexCmd{restylefloat}\important{\Macro{restylefloat}}
(siehe \cite{package:float}).
-Natürlich\important{\OptionValue{captions}{figureheading}\\
+Natürlich\important{\OptionValue{captions}{figureheading}\\
\OptionValue{captions}{figuresignature}}
existiert\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} mit den Optionen \OptionValue{captions}{figureheading}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{figureheading}} und
\OptionValue{captions}{figuresignature}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{figuresignature}} auch die entsprechende
-Funktion für Abbildungen. Allerdings werden Abbildungen in der Regel wie im
+Funktion für Abbildungen. Allerdings werden Abbildungen in der Regel wie im
Falle von Fotos eher als Ganzes und im Falle von Diagrammen oder Graphen eher
-von unten links her betrachtet. In den wenigsten Fällen dürfte es daher
+von unten links her betrachtet. In den wenigsten Fällen dürfte es daher
sinnvoll sein, nur bei Abbildungen die Formatierung von Unterschriften in
-Überschriften zu ändern.
+Überschriften zu ändern.
-Manchmal wird jedoch gewünscht, alle Gleitumgebungen mit Überschriften zu
+Manchmal wird jedoch gewünscht, alle Gleitumgebungen mit Überschriften zu
versehen. Daher gibt es bei \KOMAScript{} die Einstellungen\important{%
\OptionValue{captions}{heading}\\
\OptionValue{captions}{signature}} \OptionValue{captions}{heading}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{heading}} und
\OptionValue{captions}{signature}\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{signature}},
-mit der man die Formatierungen aller Gleitumgebungen entsprechend ändern
+mit der man die Formatierungen aller Gleitumgebungen entsprechend ändern
kann. Diese entfalten ihre Wirkung auch noch, wenn sie innerhalb einer
Gleitumgebung verwendet werden.
Bitte\textnote{Achtung!}\OnlyAt{\Package{float}}\IndexPackage{float} beachten
Sie, dass bei Verwendung des \Package{float}-Pakets die Einstellungen von
-Unterschriften oder Überschriften nicht mehr funktionieren, sobald Sie
-\Macro{restylefloat} auf Tabellen oder Abbildungen anwenden. Näheres zum
+Unterschriften oder Ãœberschriften nicht mehr funktionieren, sobald Sie
+\Macro{restylefloat} auf Tabellen oder Abbildungen anwenden. Näheres zum
\Package{float}-Paket und \Macro{restylefloat} entnehmen Sie bitte
-\cite{package:float}. Dies gilt ebenso für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}
+\cite{package:float}. Dies gilt ebenso für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}
innerhalb von neuen Gleitumgebungen, die mit \Package{float} definiert
-wurden. Zusätzliche Unterstützung, die \KOMAScript{} bei Verwendung des
-\Package{float}-Pakets bietet, finden Sie bei der Erklärung zu
+wurden. Zusätzliche Unterstützung, die \KOMAScript{} bei Verwendung des
+\Package{float}-Pakets bietet, finden Sie bei der Erklärung zu
\PValue{komaabove} (siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.floatstyle.komaabove}). Als
Alternative zu \Package{float} sei auch die Verwendung von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionof} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionof}) und
\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC} (siehe
-\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) erwähnt. Darüber hinaus sei bei
-Verwendung von \Package{float} ausdrücklich Paket
+\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) erwähnt. Darüber hinaus sei bei
+Verwendung von \Package{float} ausdrücklich Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}\IndexPackage{scrhack}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}} (siehe
\autoref{cha:scrhack} ab \autopageref{cha:scrhack} in
\autoref{part:forExperts}) empfohlen.
\leavevmode\LabelOptionValue{captions}{nooneline}\nobreak
-Bei\important{\OptionValue{captions}{nooneline}} \KOMAScript{} besteht darüber
-hinaus auch die Möglichkeit, mit der Einstellung
+Bei\important{\OptionValue{captions}{nooneline}} \KOMAScript{} besteht darüber
+hinaus auch die Möglichkeit, mit der Einstellung
\OptionValue{captions}{nooneline}\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{nooneline}}
-die Unterscheidung zwischen ein"~ und mehrzeiligen Über"~ bzw. Unterschriften
+die Unterscheidung zwischen ein"~ und mehrzeiligen Ãœber"~ bzw. Unterschriften
abzuschalten. Dies ist beispielsweise dann wichtig, wenn man keine Zentrierung
-wünscht. Die\important{\OptionValue{captions}{oneline}}%
+wünscht. Die\important{\OptionValue{captions}{oneline}}%
\LabelOptionValue{captions}{oneline}
-Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung}, bei der einzeilige Über"~ und
+Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung}, bei der einzeilige Ãœber"~ und
Unterschriften automatisch horizontal zentriert werden, entspricht der
Einstellung \OptionValue{captions}{oneline}.
Als Besonderheit bietet \KOMAScript{} innerhalb von Gleitumgebungen die
-Möglichkeit, den Titel statt als Über"~ oder Unterschrift neben den
+Möglichkeit, den Titel statt als Über"~ oder Unterschrift neben den
eigentlichen Inhalt zu
setzen. Die\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}} dazu notwendige
Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}\IndexEnv{captionbeside} ist ab
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} erklärt. Die Einstellungen für
-diese Umgebung können ebenfalls mit der Option \Option{captions} geändert
-werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} erklärt. Die Einstellungen für
+diese Umgebung können ebenfalls mit der Option \Option{captions} geändert
+werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
\autoref{tab:maincls.captions} zu entnehmen.
%
\iffree{}{% Umbruchoptimierung!!!!
\enlargethispage*{\dp\strutbox}}%
\begin{desclist}
- \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{captions}}]{M%
- ögliche Werte für Option \Option{captions} zur Einstellung der
- Formatierung von Über"~ und Unterschriften in
+ \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{captions}}]{M%
+ ögliche Werte für Option \Option{captions} zur Einstellung der
+ Formatierung von Ãœber"~ und Unterschriften in
Gleitumgebungen\label{tab:maincls.captions}%
}{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{captions} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{captions} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\entry{\PValue{bottombeside}, \PValue{besidebottom}}{%
Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden mit der untersten
- Grundlinie auf Höhe der untersten Grundlinie des Inhalts der Gleitumgebung
+ Grundlinie auf Höhe der untersten Grundlinie des Inhalts der Gleitumgebung
ausgerichtet.%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{bottombeside}}}%
\entry{\PValue{centeredbeside}, \PValue{besidecentered},
@@ -3303,8 +3324,8 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
Bei Abbildungen wird (gegebenenfalls abweichend von
- \OptionValue{captions}{signature}) die Formatierung als Überschrift
- gewählt.}%
+ \OptionValue{captions}{signature}) die Formatierung als Ãœberschrift
+ gewählt.}%
\entry{\PValue{figuresignature}, \PValue{figurebelow}, \PValue{belowfigure},
\PValue{bottomatfigure}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{figuresignature}}}{%
@@ -3312,12 +3333,12 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
\Class{scrartcl}}%
Bei Abbildungen wird (gegebenenfalls abweichend von
\OptionValue{captions}{heading}) die Formatierung als Unterschrift
- gewählt.}%
+ gewählt.}%
\entry{\PValue{heading}, \PValue{above}, \PValue{top}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{heading}}}{%
Gleitumgebungstitel\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} werden als Überschriften
- formatiert. Dies hat jedoch keinen Einfluss darauf, ob sie über oder unter
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} werden als Ãœberschriften
+ formatiert. Dies hat jedoch keinen Einfluss darauf, ob sie über oder unter
der Gleitumgebung platziert werden. Die Option impliziert auch
\OptionValue{captions}{tableheading} und
\OptionValue{captions}{figureheading}.}%
@@ -3336,11 +3357,11 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden in der Voreinstellung
links neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung gesetzt.}%
\pventry{nooneline}{%
- Einzeilige Über"~ und Unterschriften von Gleitumgebungen werden nicht
+ Einzeilige Ãœber"~ und Unterschriften von Gleitumgebungen werden nicht
gesondert, sondern genau wie mehrzeilige behandelt.%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{nooneline}}}%
\pventry{oneline}{%
- Einzeilige Über"~ und Unterschriften von Gleitumgebungen werden gesondert
+ Einzeilige Ãœber"~ und Unterschriften von Gleitumgebungen werden gesondert
behandelt, um sie horizontal zu zentrieren.%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{oneline}}}%
\entry{\PValue{outerbeside}, \PValue{besideouter}%
@@ -3348,7 +3369,7 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden bei doppelseitigem Satz
- in der Voreinstellung außen neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung
+ in der Voreinstellung außen neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung
gesetzt. Dies entspricht im einseitigen Satz
\OptionValue{captions}{rightbeside}.}%
\entry{\PValue{rightbeside}, \PValue{besideright}%
@@ -3362,26 +3383,26 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
Gleitumgebungstitel werden als Unterschriften formatiert. Dies hat jedoch
- keinen Einfluss darauf, ob sie über oder unter der Gleitumgebung platziert
+ keinen Einfluss darauf, ob sie über oder unter der Gleitumgebung platziert
werden. Die Option impliziert auch \OptionValue{captions}{tablesignature}
und \OptionValue{captions}{figuresignature}.}%
\entry{\PValue{tableheading}, \PValue{tableabove}, \PValue{abovetable},
\PValue{abovetabular}, \PValue{topattable}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{tableheading}}}{%
Bei Tabellen wird (gegebenenfalls abweichend von
- \OptionValue{captions}{signature}) die Formatierung als Überschrift
- gewählt.}%
+ \OptionValue{captions}{signature}) die Formatierung als Ãœberschrift
+ gewählt.}%
\entry{\PValue{tablesignature}, \PValue{belowtable}, \PValue{belowtabular},
\PValue{bottomattable}%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{tablesignature}}}{%
Bei Tabellen wird (gegebenenfalls abweichend von
\OptionValue{captions}{heading}) die Formatierung als Unterschrift
- gewählt.}%
+ gewählt.}%
\entry{\PValue{topbeside}, \PValue{besidetop}}{%
Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden mit der obersten
- Grundlinie auf Höhe der obersten Grundlinie des Inhalts der Gleitumgebung
+ Grundlinie auf Höhe der obersten Grundlinie des Inhalts der Gleitumgebung
ausgerichtet.%
\IndexOption{captions~=\textKValue{topbeside}}}%
\end{desclist}%
@@ -3397,30 +3418,30 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind
Tabellen und Abbildungen werden bei den Standardklassen mit Hilfe der
Anweisung \Macro{caption} mit einem \PName{Titel} in Form einer
Unterschrift\Index{Tabellen>Unterschrift} versehen. Bei Abbildungen ist dies
-grundsätzlich korrekt. Bei Tabellen wird gestritten, ob der \PName{Titel} als
-Überschrift über oder konsistent mit der
-Bildunterschrift\Index{Bildunterschrift} unter die Tabelle gehört. Daher
+grundsätzlich korrekt. Bei Tabellen wird gestritten, ob der \PName{Titel} als
+Überschrift über oder konsistent mit der
+Bildunterschrift\Index{Bildunterschrift} unter die Tabelle gehört. Daher
bietet \KOMAScript{}\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} im
-Gegensatz zu den Standardklassen die Anweisungen \Macro{captionbelow} für
-\PName{Titel} in Form von Unterschriften und \Macro{captionabove} für
-\PName{Titel} in Form von Überschriften.
+Gegensatz zu den Standardklassen die Anweisungen \Macro{captionbelow} für
+\PName{Titel} in Form von Unterschriften und \Macro{captionabove} für
+\PName{Titel} in Form von Ãœberschriften.
-Sowohl bei Tabellen als auch bei Abbildungen oder generell für alle
-Gleitumgebungen lässt sich das Verhalten von \Macro{caption} mit der Option
+Sowohl bei Tabellen als auch bei Abbildungen oder generell für alle
+Gleitumgebungen lässt sich das Verhalten von \Macro{caption} mit der Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions} steuern, die am
-Anfang dieses Abschnitts zu finden ist. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität ist
+Anfang dieses Abschnitts zu finden ist. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität ist
voreingestellt, dass sich \Macro{caption} bei allen Gleitumgebungen wie
-\Macro{captionbelow} verhält. Es wird jedoch empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!},
-Tabellenüberschriften zu verwenden und auf die Formatierung mit
+\Macro{captionbelow} verhält. Es wird jedoch empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!},
+Tabellenüberschriften zu verwenden und auf die Formatierung mit
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{tableheading} entsprechend umzustellen
-oder bei Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu greifen.
+oder bei Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu greifen.
%
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen mit
- Tabellenüberschriften\Index{Tabellen>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} statt mit
- Tabellenunterschriften arbeiten, weil Sie teilweise Tabellen haben, die über
+ Tabellenüberschriften\Index{Tabellen>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} statt mit
+ Tabellenunterschriften arbeiten, weil Sie teilweise Tabellen haben, die über
mehr als eine Seite gehen. Mit den Standardklassen bliebe Ihnen nur die
- Möglichkeit:
+ Möglichkeit:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{table}
\caption{Dies ist nur eine Beispieltabelle}
@@ -3431,7 +3452,7 @@ oder bei Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu greifen.
\end{tabular}
\end{table}
\end{lstcode}
- Damit hätten Sie das unschöne Ergebnis:
+ Damit hätten Sie das unschöne Ergebnis:
\begin{ShowOutput}\centering
{\usekomafont{caption}{\usekomafont{captionlabel}\tablename~30.2:}
Dies ist nur eine
@@ -3453,7 +3474,7 @@ oder bei Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu greifen.
\end{tabular}
\end{table}
\end{lstcode}
- Sie erhalten dann das gewünschte Ergebnis:
+ Sie erhalten dann das gewünschte Ergebnis:
\begin{ShowOutput}\centering
{\usekomafont{caption}{\usekomafont{captionlabel}\tablename~30.2:}
Dies ist nur eine
@@ -3464,10 +3485,10 @@ oder bei Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu greifen.
Inhalt & dieser & Tabelle & unbeachtet.
\end{tabular}
\end{ShowOutput}
- Da Sie konsequent nicht nur eine, sondern alle Tabellen mit Überschriften
- versehen, können Sie stattdessen auch die Option
+ Da Sie konsequent nicht nur eine, sondern alle Tabellen mit Ãœberschriften
+ versehen, können Sie stattdessen auch die Option
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{tableheading} setzen (siehe
- \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.tableheading}). Dann genügt es,
+ \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.tableheading}). Dann genügt es,
wenn Sie wie bei den Standardklassen \Macro{caption} verwenden. Sie
erhalten trotzdem das Ergebnis von \Macro{captionabove}.
\end{Example}
@@ -3476,17 +3497,17 @@ oder bei Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu greifen.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{caption}\LabelFontElement{caption}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{captionlabel}\LabelFontElement{captionlabel}%
Die Schriftart\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{%
- \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} für die
-Beschreibung und das Label~-- »Abbildung« oder »Tabelle«, gefolgt von der
-Nummer und einem Trennzeichen -- kann über die Anweisungen
+ \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} für die
+Beschreibung und das Label~-- »Abbildung« oder »Tabelle«, gefolgt von der
+Nummer und einem Trennzeichen -- kann über die Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-verändert werden. Zuständig sind hier die Elemente \FontElement{caption}%
+verändert werden. Zuständig sind hier die Elemente \FontElement{caption}%
\important[i]{\FontElement{caption}\\\FontElement{captionlabel}} und
\FontElement{captionlabel} (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements},
-\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Dabei wird die Schriftart für das
-Element \FontElement{caption} zunächst auch auf das Element
+\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Dabei wird die Schriftart für das
+Element \FontElement{caption} zunächst auch auf das Element
\FontElement{captionlabel} angewandt, bevor dessen spezifische Schriftart
Anwendung findet. Die Vorbelegungen sind \autoref{tab:maincls.captionFont} zu
entnehmen.
@@ -3497,12 +3518,12 @@ entnehmen.
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente der Tabellen-
+ [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente der Tabellen-
oder\newline Abbildungsunterschrift
- bzw. "~überschrift}]
+ bzw. "~überschrift}]
{\label{tab:maincls.captionFont}%
- Voreinstellungen der Schrift für die Elemente der Tabellen-
- oder Abbildungsunterschrift bzw. "~überschrift}
+ Voreinstellungen der Schrift für die Elemente der Tabellen-
+ oder Abbildungsunterschrift bzw. "~überschrift}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
\toprule
@@ -3518,17 +3539,17 @@ entnehmen.
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen, dass Tabellen- und Abbildungsbeschreibungen in einer
kleineren Schriftart gesetzt werden. Also setzen Sie
- beispielsweise in der Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
+ beispielsweise in der Präambel Ihres Dokuments:
\begin{lstcode}
\addtokomafont{caption}{\small}
\end{lstcode}
- Außerdem hätten Sie gerne, dass das Label serifenlos und fett
- gedruckt wird. Sie setzen also außerdem:
+ Außerdem hätten Sie gerne, dass das Label serifenlos und fett
+ gedruckt wird. Sie setzen also außerdem:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomafont{captionlabel}{\sffamily\bfseries}
\end{lstcode}
- Das Ergebnis wäre bei Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}
- in diesem Fall übrigens gleich.
+ Das Ergebnis wäre bei Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}
+ in diesem Fall übrigens gleich.
\end{Example}%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -3541,25 +3562,25 @@ entnehmen.
\Macro{captionbelowof}\Parameter{Objekttyp}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}
\Parameter{Titel}
\end{Declaration}
-Ähnlich wie die Pakete \Package{caption}\IndexPackage{caption} und
+Ähnlich wie die Pakete \Package{caption}\IndexPackage{caption} und
\Package{capt-of}\IndexPackage{capt-of} bietet auch \KOMAScript{} die
Anweisung \Macro{captionof}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} mit der man auch außerhalb einer
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} mit der man auch außerhalb einer
Gleitumgebung oder in einer fremden Gleitumgebung einen entsprechenden Titel
mit Eintrag in das jeweilige Verzeichnis setzen kann. Dabei muss im Gegensatz
-zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} die Art des Gleitobjekts als zusätzliches
+zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} die Art des Gleitobjekts als zusätzliches
erstes Argument angegeben werden.
-Darüber hinaus bietet \KOMAScript{} zusätzlich auch die Anweisungen
+Darüber hinaus bietet \KOMAScript{} zusätzlich auch die Anweisungen
\Macro{captionaboveof}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} und \Macro{captionbelowof}. Diese
-dienen als Gegenstücke zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} und
+dienen als Gegenstücke zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionbelow}.
-Selbstverständlich berücksichtigt\ChangedAt{v3.09a}{\Class{scrbook}\and
+Selbstverständlich berücksichtigt\ChangedAt{v3.09a}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \Macro{captionof} auch die
-Einstellungen von Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions} bezüglich der
-Formatierung des Titels als Über- oder Unterschrift. Diese Fähigkeit geht
+Einstellungen von Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions} bezüglich der
+Formatierung des Titels als Über- oder Unterschrift. Diese Fähigkeit geht
jedoch eventuell durch das Laden von Paketen wie
\Package{capt-of}\IndexPackage{capt-of} oder
\Package{caption}\IndexPackage{caption} verloren. Bei Verwendung von
@@ -3568,7 +3589,7 @@ jedoch eventuell durch das Laden von Paketen wie
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie wollen ein Gleitobjekt erstellen, bei dem eine Tabelle und
eine Abbildung nebeneinander stehen. Da es keine gemischten Gleitobjekte gibt,
- verwenden Sie primär eine \Environment{figure}-Umgebung:
+ verwenden Sie primär eine \Environment{figure}-Umgebung:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{figure}
\begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
@@ -3579,13 +3600,13 @@ jedoch eventuell durch das Laden von Paketen wie
\begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
\centering
\captionaboveof{table}
- [Maße des Rechtecks aus
+ [Maße des Rechtecks aus
Abbildung~\ref{fig:rechteck}]%
- {Rechtecksmaße}
+ {Rechtecksmaße}
\label{tab:rechteck}
\begin{tabular}{ll}
Breite: & 4\,cm\\
- Höhe: & 5\,cm
+ Höhe: & 5\,cm
\end{tabular}
\end{minipage}
\end{figure}
@@ -3593,22 +3614,22 @@ jedoch eventuell durch das Laden von Paketen wie
Um Abbildung und Tabelle nebeneinander zu setzen, wurden zwei
\Environment{minipage}-Umgebungen verwendet. Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} ist
hier das Prozentzeichen nach der ersten \Environment{minipage}, ohne das ein
- zusätzlicher Wortabstand zwischen die beiden
- \Environment{minipage}-Umgebungen gesetzt würde.
+ zusätzlicher Wortabstand zwischen die beiden
+ \Environment{minipage}-Umgebungen gesetzt würde.
Die Abbildungsunterschrift wurde mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}
- gesetzt. Für die Tabellenüberschrift wurde \Macro{captionaboveof}
- verwendet. Als erstes Argument wurde \PValue{table} angegeben. Dadurch weiß
+ gesetzt. Für die Tabellenüberschrift wurde \Macro{captionaboveof}
+ verwendet. Als erstes Argument wurde \PValue{table} angegeben. Dadurch weiß
\KOMAScript{}, dass es sich trotz \Environment{figure}-Umgebung um eine
- Tabellenüberschrift handelt.
+ Tabellenüberschrift handelt.
Das optionale Argument von \Macro{captionaboveof} setzt den Eintrag in das
- Tabellenverzeichnis. Ohne das optionale Argument würde der als letztes
+ Tabellenverzeichnis. Ohne das optionale Argument würde der als letztes
Argument angegebene Titel ebenfalls in das Tabellenverzeichnis
- geschrieben. Während dieser Titel im Gleitobjekt selbst völlig ausreichend
- ist, wäre er jedoch im Tabellenverzeichnis wenig aussagekräftig. Daher wird
- hier für das Verzeichnis ein abweichender Titel über das optionale Argument
- verwendet. Das Ergebnis der Bemühungen zeigt
+ geschrieben. Während dieser Titel im Gleitobjekt selbst völlig ausreichend
+ ist, wäre er jedoch im Tabellenverzeichnis wenig aussagekräftig. Daher wird
+ hier für das Verzeichnis ein abweichender Titel über das optionale Argument
+ verwendet. Das Ergebnis der Bemühungen zeigt
\autoref{fig:maincls.captionaboveof}.%
%
\begin{figure}
@@ -3631,12 +3652,12 @@ jedoch eventuell durch das Laden von Paketen wie
\end{minipage}%
\begin{minipage}{.5\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule\relax}
\centering
- \captionaboveof{table}[Beispiel: Maße des Rechtecks aus
- Abbildung~\ref{fig:maincls.rechteck}]{Rechteckmaße}
+ \captionaboveof{table}[Beispiel: Maße des Rechtecks aus
+ Abbildung~\ref{fig:maincls.rechteck}]{Rechteckmaße}
\label{tab:maincls.rechteck}
\begin{tabular}{ll}
Breite: & 4\,cm\\
- Höhe: & 5\,cm
+ Höhe: & 5\,cm
\end{tabular}
\end{minipage}}}%
\end{minipage}%
@@ -3644,12 +3665,12 @@ jedoch eventuell durch das Laden von Paketen wie
\end{figure}%
\end{Example}%
In gleicher Weise, wie in obigem Beispiel eine Tabelle innerhalb einer
-Abbildungsumgebung gesetzt und mit einem Titel versehen wird, könnte man auch
-eine nicht gleitende Tabelle außerhalb jeder Gleitumgebung setzen. Auch dabei
+Abbildungsumgebung gesetzt und mit einem Titel versehen wird, könnte man auch
+eine nicht gleitende Tabelle außerhalb jeder Gleitumgebung setzen. Auch dabei
sollte in der Regel eine \Environment{minipage} verwendet werden, um zu
-verhindern, dass zwischen Überschrift und Tabelle ein Seitenumbruch erfolgen
-kann. Zusätzlich sollte man die \Environment{minipage} dann noch in eine
-\Environment{flushleft}-Umgebung einbetten, um einerseits einen gefälligen
+verhindern, dass zwischen Ãœberschrift und Tabelle ein Seitenumbruch erfolgen
+kann. Zusätzlich sollte man die \Environment{minipage} dann noch in eine
+\Environment{flushleft}-Umgebung einbetten, um einerseits einen gefälligen
Abstand zum Text davor und dahinter zu erreichen und andererseits den
Absatzeinzug vor der \Environment{minipage} zu verhindern.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -3676,10 +3697,10 @@ Absatzeinzug vor der \Environment{minipage} zu verhindern.%
\end{Declaration}
Neben \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{%
\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}%
-den Unter- und Überschriften findet man insbesondere bei kleineren Abbildungen
-häufiger Beschreibungen, die neben der Abbildung gesetzt werden. Dabei
-schließt normalerweise die Unterkante der Beschreibung mit der Unterkante der
-Abbildung ab. Natürlich kann man mit etwas Geschick und beispielsweise zwei
+den Unter- und Ãœberschriften findet man insbesondere bei kleineren Abbildungen
+häufiger Beschreibungen, die neben der Abbildung gesetzt werden. Dabei
+schließt normalerweise die Unterkante der Beschreibung mit der Unterkante der
+Abbildung ab. Natürlich kann man mit etwas Geschick und beispielsweise zwei
\Macro{parbox}-Anweisungen dergleichen auch in den Standardklassen
erreichen. \KOMAScript{} bietet jedoch eine spezielle Umgebung. Diese Umgebung
kann innerhalb der Gleitumgebungen verwendet werden. Der erste optionale
@@ -3698,7 +3719,7 @@ werden. Es darf genau einer der folgenden Buchstaben angegeben werden:
\item[\quad\PValue{r}] rechts
\item[\quad\PValue{i}] innen: auf rechten Seiten links, auf
linken Seiten rechts
-\item[\quad\PValue{o}] außen: auf rechten Seiten rechts, auf
+\item[\quad\PValue{o}] außen: auf rechten Seiten rechts, auf
linken Seiten links
\end{labeling}
Voreingestellt ist rechts neben dem Inhalt der Umgebung. Diese
@@ -3712,33 +3733,33 @@ Voreinstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\PValue{outerbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\textKValue{outerbeside}}
und
\PValue{rightbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\textKValue{rightbeside}}
-verändert werden. Bei Verwendung der Anordnung außen oder innen werden unter
-Umständen zwei \LaTeX-Läufe benötigt, um die korrekte Anordnung zu erreichen.
+verändert werden. Bei Verwendung der Anordnung außen oder innen werden unter
+Umständen zwei \LaTeX-Läufe benötigt, um die korrekte Anordnung zu erreichen.
Normalerweise\important{\PName{Breite}} nehmen der Inhalt der Umgebung und der
-\PName{Titel} die gesamte verfügbare Breite ein. Es besteht jedoch die
-Möglichkeit, mit dem optionalen Parameter \PName{Breite} eine andere Breite
-anzugeben. Diese kann auch größer als die Breite des Textkörpers sein.
+\PName{Titel} die gesamte verfügbare Breite ein. Es besteht jedoch die
+Möglichkeit, mit dem optionalen Parameter \PName{Breite} eine andere Breite
+anzugeben. Diese kann auch größer als die Breite des Textkörpers sein.
Bei Angabe einer \PName{Breite}\important{\PName{Breite}\\\PName{Offset}} wird
-die genutzte Breite normalerweise bezüglich der Breite des Textkörpers
+die genutzte Breite normalerweise bezüglich der Breite des Textkörpers
zentriert. Mit dem optionalen Argument \PName{Offset} kann stattdessen eine
Verschiebung relativ zum linken Rand angegeben werden. Ein positiver Wert
entspricht einer Verschiebung nach rechts, ein negativer Wert einer
Verschiebung nach links. Mit einem \PName{Offset} von 0\Unit{pt} erfolgt die
-Ausgabe linksbündig.
+Ausgabe linksbündig.
Wird\important{\PValue{*}} hinter den optionalen Parameter \PName{Offset} noch
ein Stern gesetzt, so stellt der \PName{Offset} im doppelseitigen Druck auf
linken Seiten eine Verschiebung relativ zum rechten Rand dar. Ein positiver
-Wert entspricht dann einer Verschiebung nach außen, während ein negativer Wert
-für eine Verschiebung nach innen steht. Ein \PName{Offset} von 0\Unit{pt} wäre
-dann also bündig zum inneren Rand. Diese Variante benötigt unter Umständen
-zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe, um die korrekte Verschiebung zu erreichen.
+Wert entspricht dann einer Verschiebung nach außen, während ein negativer Wert
+für eine Verschiebung nach innen steht. Ein \PName{Offset} von 0\Unit{pt} wäre
+dann also bündig zum inneren Rand. Diese Variante benötigt unter Umständen
+zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe, um die korrekte Verschiebung zu erreichen.
Vertikal erfolgt die Ausrichtung in der Voreinstellung unten. Das bedeutet,
dass die untere Grundlinie des Inhalts des Gleitobjekts und die untere
-Grundlinie von \PName{Titel} auf einer Höhe liegen. Diese
+Grundlinie von \PName{Titel} auf einer Höhe liegen. Diese
Einstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} kann mit der Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions}%
@@ -3748,15 +3769,15 @@ Einstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\PValue{centeredbeside}%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\textKValue{centeredbeside}} und
\PValue{bottombeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\textKValue{bottombeside}}
-verändert werden. Bei der Einstellung \PValue{topbeside} werden die oberen
-Grundlinien von Gleitobjektinhalt und \PName{Titel} auf einer Höhe
-ausgerichtet, während bei \PValue{centeredbeside} eine Zentrierung
-stattfindet. In diesem Zusammenhang sei erwähnt, dass Abbildungen
+verändert werden. Bei der Einstellung \PValue{topbeside} werden die oberen
+Grundlinien von Gleitobjektinhalt und \PName{Titel} auf einer Höhe
+ausgerichtet, während bei \PValue{centeredbeside} eine Zentrierung
+stattfindet. In diesem Zusammenhang sei erwähnt, dass Abbildungen
normalerweise die Grundlinie unten haben. Dies kann beispielsweise mit der
-Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden.
+Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden.
\begin{Example}
- Ein Beispiel für die Verwendung der
+ Ein Beispiel für die Verwendung der
\Environment{captionbeside}-""Umgebung ist in
\autoref{fig:maincls.captionbeside} zu finden. Gesetzt wurde
diese Abbildung mit:
@@ -3764,7 +3785,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden.
\begin{figure}
\begin{captionbeside}%
[Beispiel: Bildbeschreibung daneben, unten]%
- {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter
+ {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter
der Abbildung, sondern unten daneben}%
[i][\linewidth][%
\dimexpr\marginparwidth+\marginparsep\relax]*
@@ -3781,19 +3802,19 @@ Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden.
\end{lstcode}
\begin{figure}
\begin{captionbeside}[Beispiel: Bildbeschreibung daneben, unten]%
- {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter der Abbildung,
+ {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter der Abbildung,
sondern unten daneben}[i][\linewidth]
\fbox{\parbox[b][5\baselineskip][c]{.25\textwidth}{%
\hspace*{\fill}\KOMAScript\hspace*{\fill}\par}}
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:maincls.captionbeside}
\end{figure}
- Die Gesamtbreite ist also die aktuell verfügbare Breite
+ Die Gesamtbreite ist also die aktuell verfügbare Breite
\PValue{\Macro{linewidth}}. Diese wird jedoch um $\Length{marginparwidth}
+ \Length{marginparsep}$ nach
- außen verschoben. Der Titel oder die Beschreibung steht innen neben
+ außen verschoben. Der Titel oder die Beschreibung steht innen neben
der Abbildung. Damit erscheint die Abbildung selbst bis in die
- Marginalienspalte in den Rand gerückt.
+ Marginalienspalte in den Rand gerückt.
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Mit \Macro{dimexpr} wird hier eine \eTeX-Anweisung verwendet, da
@@ -3807,16 +3828,16 @@ Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden.
\end{lstcode}
zeigt \autoref{fig:maincls.captionbesidecentered}. %
\iffalse % Umbruchalternativen
- Auch der typografisch weniger bewanderte Anfänger wird sofort
+ Auch der typografisch weniger bewanderte Anfänger wird sofort
erkennen, dass von dieser Ausrichtung normalerweise abzusehen ist.%
\else
- Das ist jedoch sicher keine empfehlswerte Lösung.%
+ Das ist jedoch sicher keine empfehlswerte Lösung.%
\fi
\begin{figure}
\KOMAoption{captions}{centeredbeside}
\begin{captionbeside}[Beispiel: Bildbeschreibung daneben, mittig]%
- {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter der Abbildung,
+ {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter der Abbildung,
sondern mittig daneben}[i][\linewidth]
\fbox{\parbox[b][5\baselineskip][c]{.25\textwidth}{%
\hspace*{\fill}\KOMAScript\hspace*{\fill}\par}}
@@ -3824,7 +3845,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden.
\label{fig:maincls.captionbesidecentered}
\end{figure}
- Demgegenüber kann die Ausrichtung oben, die bei
+ Demgegenüber kann die Ausrichtung oben, die bei
\autoref{fig:maincls.captionbesidetop} zu sehen ist, durchaus verwendet
werden. Zur Verdeutlichung, wie man \Macro{raisebox} zur Verschiebung der
Grundlinie nutzen kann, sei hier ein komplettes Beispiel angegeben. Eine
@@ -3858,7 +3879,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden.
\begin{figure}
\KOMAoption{captions}{topbeside}
\begin{captionbeside}[Beispiel: Bildbeschreibung daneben, oben]%
- {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter der Abbildung,
+ {Eine Bildbeschreibung weder über noch unter der Abbildung,
sondern oben daneben}[i][\linewidth]
\raisebox{\dimexpr\baselineskip-\totalheight}{%
\fbox{%
@@ -3902,7 +3923,7 @@ dieses Typs bestimmt wird, so gibt es passend zur Umgebung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} mit \Environment{captionofbeside} auch
eine entsprechende Umgebung. Im Unterschied zu
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} ist auch hier der \PName{Objekttyp} als
-zusätzliches, erstes Argument anzugeben.%
+zusätzliches, erstes Argument anzugeben.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -3913,17 +3934,17 @@ zusätzliches, erstes Argument anzugeben.%
Bei\OnlyAt{\Package{float}} Verwendung des
\Package{float}-Pakets\IndexPackage{float} wird das Aussehen der damit
definierten Gleitumgebungen allein vom \emph{float}-Stil bestimmt. Dies
-schließt auch die Frage ein, ob mit Überschriften oder Unterschriften
+schließt auch die Frage ein, ob mit Überschriften oder Unterschriften
gearbeitet wird. Im \Package{float}-Paket gibt es keinen vordefinierten Stil,
der im Aussehen dem von \KOMAScript{} entspricht und dieselben
-Einstellmöglichkeiten (siehe unten) bietet. \KOMAScript{} definiert deshalb
-zusätzlich die beiden Stile \PValue{komaabove} und \PValue{komabelow}. Diese
-können bei Verwendung des \Package{float}-Pakets wie die dort definierten
+Einstellmöglichkeiten (siehe unten) bietet. \KOMAScript{} definiert deshalb
+zusätzlich die beiden Stile \PValue{komaabove} und \PValue{komabelow}. Diese
+können bei Verwendung des \Package{float}-Pakets wie die dort definierten
Stile \PValue{plain}\IndexFloatstyle{plain},
\PValue{boxed}\IndexFloatstyle{boxed} oder
\PValue{ruled}\IndexFloatstyle{ruled} aktiviert werden. Siehe dazu
\cite{package:float}. Beim Stil \PValue{komaabove} werden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption},
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionbelow} als Überschrift, beim Stil
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionbelow} als Ãœberschrift, beim Stil
\PValue{komabelow} als Unterschrift gesetzt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -3932,27 +3953,27 @@ Stile \PValue{plain}\IndexFloatstyle{plain},
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{captionformat}
\end{Declaration}%
-Bei {\KOMAScript} gibt es verschiedene Eingriffsmöglichkeiten, um die
-Formatierung der Beschreibung zu ändern. Die Änderung der Schriftart
-wurde bereits erläutert. Das oder die Trennzeichen zwischen dem Label
+Bei {\KOMAScript} gibt es verschiedene Eingriffsmöglichkeiten, um die
+Formatierung der Beschreibung zu ändern. Die Änderung der Schriftart
+wurde bereits erläutert. Das oder die Trennzeichen zwischen dem Label
und dem eigentlichen Beschreibungstext sind im Makro
\Macro{captionformat} abgelegt. Abweichend von allen anderen
-\Macro{\dots}format-Anweisungen ist hier also nicht der Zähler,
-sondern nur die auf den Zähler folgenden Angaben enthalten. Die
+\Macro{\dots}format-Anweisungen ist hier also nicht der Zähler,
+sondern nur die auf den Zähler folgenden Angaben enthalten. Die
Originaldefinition lautet:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\captionformat}{:\ }
\end{lstcode}
-Auch diese kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden.
+Auch diese kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden.
\begin{Example}
- Aus mir unerfindlichen Gründen wollen Sie als Trennzeichen
+ Aus mir unerfindlichen Gründen wollen Sie als Trennzeichen
keinen Doppelpunkt, gefolgt von einem Leerzeichen, sondern einen
- Gedankenstrich einschließlich der notwendigen Leerzeichen.
+ Gedankenstrich einschließlich der notwendigen Leerzeichen.
Daher definieren Sie:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\captionformat}{~--~}
\end{lstcode}
- Diese Definition sollten Sie beispielsweise in die Präambel Ihres
+ Diese Definition sollten Sie beispielsweise in die Präambel Ihres
Dokuments stellen.
\end{Example}
%
@@ -3964,10 +3985,10 @@ Auch diese kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden.
\Macro{tableformat}
\end{Declaration}%
Es wurde schon darauf hingewiesen, dass \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionformat}
-keine Formatierung für das Label selbst enthält. Dieses sollte nun keineswegs
-über Umdefinierung der Anweisungen für die Zählerausgabe, \Macro{thefigure}
-oder \Macro{thetable}, verändert werden. Eine solche Umdefinierung hätte
-nämlich auch Auswirkungen auf die Ausgabe von \Macro{ref} oder der
+keine Formatierung für das Label selbst enthält. Dieses sollte nun keineswegs
+über Umdefinierung der Anweisungen für die Zählerausgabe, \Macro{thefigure}
+oder \Macro{thetable}, verändert werden. Eine solche Umdefinierung hätte
+nämlich auch Auswirkungen auf die Ausgabe von \Macro{ref} oder der
Verzeichnisse. Stattdessen bietet {\KOMAScript} auch hier zwei \Macro{\dots
format}-Anweisungen. Diese sind wie folgt vordefiniert:
% Umbruchkorrektur: listings
@@ -3975,19 +3996,19 @@ Verzeichnisse. Stattdessen bietet {\KOMAScript} auch hier zwei \Macro{\dots
\newcommand*{\figureformat}{\figurename~\thefigure\autodot}
\newcommand*{\tableformat}{\tablename~\thetable\autodot}
\end{lstcode}
-Sie können ebenfalls mit \Macro{renewcommand} eigenen Anforderungen
+Sie können ebenfalls mit \Macro{renewcommand} eigenen Anforderungen
angepasst werden.
\begin{Example}
- Hin und wieder wird gewünscht, dass die Beschreibungstexte ganz ohne
- Label und natürlich auch ohne Trennzeichen ausgegeben werden. Bei
- {\KOMAScript} genügen folgende Definitionen, um dies zu erreichen:
+ Hin und wieder wird gewünscht, dass die Beschreibungstexte ganz ohne
+ Label und natürlich auch ohne Trennzeichen ausgegeben werden. Bei
+ {\KOMAScript} genügen folgende Definitionen, um dies zu erreichen:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\figureformat}{}
\renewcommand*{\tableformat}{}
\renewcommand*{\captionformat}{}
\end{lstcode}
Dabei ist jedoch zu beachten, dass die Nummerierung damit zwar nicht
- ausgegeben, aber dennoch fortgezählt wird. Dies ist insbesondere dann
+ ausgegeben, aber dennoch fortgezählt wird. Dies ist insbesondere dann
von Bedeutung, wenn die Umdefinierungen nur auf einzelne
\Environment{figure}- oder \Environment{table}-Umgebungen angewendet
werden.
@@ -4001,32 +4022,32 @@ angepasst werden.
\Macro{setcapindent*}\Parameter{XEinzug}
\Macro{setcaphanging}
\end{Declaration}%
-Wie bereits erwähnt wurde, werden in den
+Wie bereits erwähnt wurde, werden in den
Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} die
-Beschreibungen nicht hängend gesetzt. Das heißt: In mehrzeiligen
+Beschreibungen nicht hängend gesetzt. Das heißt: In mehrzeiligen
Beschreibungen beginnt die zweite Zeile direkt unter dem Labeltext.
Es gibt bei den Standardklassen auch keinen Mechanismus, dies direkt
zu beeinflussen. Bei {\KOMAScript} werden hingegen alle Zeilen ab der
-zweiten so weit eingerückt, dass diese nicht mehr unter dem Label,
-»Abbildung~\dots:« oder »Tabelle~\dots:«, sondern unter dem
+zweiten so weit eingerückt, dass diese nicht mehr unter dem Label,
+»Abbildung~\dots:« oder »Tabelle~\dots:«, sondern unter dem
eigentlichen Text der ersten Zeile beginnen.
Dieses Verhalten, das der Verwendung von \Macro{setcaphanging}
entspricht, kann bei {\KOMAScript} jederzeit durch Verwendung der Anweisung
-\Macro{setcapindent} oder \Macro{setcapindent*} geändert werden. Dabei gibt
-der Parameter \PName{Einzug} an, wie weit ab der zweiten Zeile eingerückt
+\Macro{setcapindent} oder \Macro{setcapindent*} geändert werden. Dabei gibt
+der Parameter \PName{Einzug} an, wie weit ab der zweiten Zeile eingerückt
werden soll. Soll nach dem Label und vor dem Beschreibungstext noch ein
-Zeilenumbruch erfolgen, so definieren Sie die Einrücktiefe \PName{XEinzug} der
+Zeilenumbruch erfolgen, so definieren Sie die Einrücktiefe \PName{XEinzug} der
Beschreibung stattdessen mit der Sternvariante der Anweisung:
\Macro{setcapindent*}.
Mit einem negativen \PName{Einzug} erreicht man hingegen, dass vor der
Beschreibung ebenfalls ein Umbruch erfolgt und nur die erste Zeile der
Beschreibung, nicht jedoch die folgenden, um den Betrag von \PName{Einzug}
-eingerückt werden.
+eingerückt werden.
Ob einzeilige Beschreibungen wie mehrzeilige Beschreibungen gesetzt werden
-oder eine Sonderbehandlung erfahren, wird über die Option
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions} gewählt. Siehe hierzu die Erklärung zu
+oder eine Sonderbehandlung erfahren, wird über die Option
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions} gewählt. Siehe hierzu die Erklärung zu
den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.oneline}.
@@ -4034,7 +4055,7 @@ den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf
Die Abbildungen~\ref{fig:maincls.caption.first} bis
\ref{fig:maincls.caption.last} zeigen die Auswirkungen unterschiedlicher
Einstellungen. Dabei wird deutlich, dass bei geringer Spaltenbreite der
- komplett hängende Einzug unvorteilhaft ist. Der Quelltext der zweiten
+ komplett hängende Einzug unvorteilhaft ist. Der Quelltext der zweiten
Abbildung sei hier mit abgewandelter Unterschrift beispielhaft
wiedergegeben:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -4042,16 +4063,16 @@ den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf
\setcapindent{1em}
\fbox{\parbox{.95\linewidth}{%
\centering\KOMAScript}}
- \caption{Beispiel mit teilweise hängendem Einzug
+ \caption{Beispiel mit teilweise hängendem Einzug
ab der zweiten Zeile}
\end{figure}
\end{lstcode}
Wie zu sehen ist, kann die Formatierung also auch lokal innerhalb
- der \Environment{figure}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{figure} geändert werden. Die
- Änderung gilt dann nur für die eine Abbildung. Nachfolgende Abbildungen
+ der \Environment{figure}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{figure} geändert werden. Die
+ Änderung gilt dann nur für die eine Abbildung. Nachfolgende Abbildungen
werden wieder mit den Grundeinstellungen oder den globalen Einstellungen,
- die Sie beispielsweise in der Dokumentpräambel vorgenommen haben,
- gesetzt. Das gilt für Tabellen natürlich genauso.
+ die Sie beispielsweise in der Dokumentpräambel vorgenommen haben,
+ gesetzt. Das gilt für Tabellen natürlich genauso.
\begin{figure}
\typeout{^^J--- Ignore underfull and overfull \string\hbox:}
\addtokomafont{caption}{\small}
@@ -4069,8 +4090,8 @@ den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf
\begin{minipage}[t]{.48\linewidth}\sloppy
\setcapindent{1em}
\fbox{\parbox{.95\linewidth}{\centering{\KOMAScript}}}
- \caption[Beispiel: Bildunterschrift mit teilweise hängendem Einzug]%
- {Mit teilweise häng"-endem Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile durch
+ \caption[Beispiel: Bildunterschrift mit teilweise hängendem Einzug]%
+ {Mit teilweise häng"-endem Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile durch
Verwendung von \Macro{setcapindent}\PParameter{1em}}
\end{minipage}
\end{minipage}
@@ -4080,8 +4101,8 @@ den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf
\begin{minipage}[t]{.48\linewidth}\sloppy
\setcapindent*{1em}
\fbox{\parbox{.95\linewidth}{\centering{\KOMAScript}}}
- \caption[Beispiel: Bildunterschrift mit hängendem Einzug und Umbruch]%
- {Mit hängendem Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile und Umbruch vor
+ \caption[Beispiel: Bildunterschrift mit hängendem Einzug und Umbruch]%
+ {Mit hängendem Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile und Umbruch vor
der Beschreibung durch Verwendung von
\Macro{setcapindent*}\PParameter{1em}}
\end{minipage}
@@ -4113,29 +4134,29 @@ den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf
Mit \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} Hilfe dieser drei Befehle kann die Breite und Anordnung
der Beschreibung beeinflusst werden. Normalerweise steht die gesamte Text-
-oder Spaltenbreite für den Text der Beschreibung zur Verfügung.
+oder Spaltenbreite für den Text der Beschreibung zur Verfügung.
Mit\important{\Macro{setcapwidth}} der Anweisung \Macro{setcapwidth} kann
diese \PName{Breite} reduziert werden. Dabei gibt das obligatorische Argument
-die maximale für die Beschreibung verwendete \PName{Breite} an. Als optionales
-Argument kann genau ein Buchstabe übergeben werden, der die horizontale
-Ausrichtung der Beschreibung angibt. Die möglichen Ausrichtungen finden Sie in
+die maximale für die Beschreibung verwendete \PName{Breite} an. Als optionales
+Argument kann genau ein Buchstabe übergeben werden, der die horizontale
+Ausrichtung der Beschreibung angibt. Die möglichen Ausrichtungen finden Sie in
der folgenden Liste.
\begin{labeling}[~--]{\quad\PValue{o}}%
\itemsep=.5\topsep plus .5\topsep minus .5\topsep
\rightskip=1em
-\item[\quad\PValue{l}] linksbündig
+\item[\quad\PValue{l}] linksbündig
\item[\quad\PValue{c}] zentriert
-\item[\quad\PValue{r}] rechtsbündig
-\item[\quad\PValue{i}] innen: auf rechten Seiten linksbündig, auf
- linken Seiten rechtsbündig
-\item[\quad\PValue{o}] außen: auf rechten Seiten rechtsbündig, auf
- linken Seiten linksbündig
+\item[\quad\PValue{r}] rechtsbündig
+\item[\quad\PValue{i}] innen: auf rechten Seiten linksbündig, auf
+ linken Seiten rechtsbündig
+\item[\quad\PValue{o}] außen: auf rechten Seiten rechtsbündig, auf
+ linken Seiten linksbündig
\end{labeling}
-Die Ausrichtung innen und außen entspricht im einseitigen Satz linksbündig und
-rechtsbündig. Innerhalb\textnote{Achtung!} von
+Die Ausrichtung innen und außen entspricht im einseitigen Satz linksbündig und
+rechtsbündig. Innerhalb\textnote{Achtung!} von
\Package{longtable}\IndexPackage{longtable}-Tabellen%
-\important{\Package{longtable}} funktioniert die Ausrichtung innen und außen
+\important{\Package{longtable}} funktioniert die Ausrichtung innen und außen
nicht korrekt. Insbesondere werden Beschreibungen von Folgeseiten bei diesen
Tabellen immer nach den Beschreibungen der ersten Teiltabelle
ausgerichtet. Dies ist ein konzeptionelles Problem des Pakets
@@ -4143,18 +4164,18 @@ ausgerichtet. Dies ist ein konzeptionelles Problem des Pakets
Zu\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}\textnote{Achtung!} beachten ist, dass die an
-\Macro{setcapwidth} übergebene \PName{Breite} wie bei \Macro{setlength} zum
+\Macro{setcapwidth} übergebene \PName{Breite} wie bei \Macro{setlength} zum
Zeitpunkt der Zuweisung ausgewertet
wird. Will\important{\Macro{setcapdynwidth}} man hingegen, dass \PName{Breite}
erst bei der Verwendung ausgewertet wird, dann sollte man stattdessen
\Macro{setcapdynwidth} verwenden. Entscheidende Unterschiede gibt es
-beispielsweise, wenn Längen wie \Length{linewidth} oder andere Anweisungen als
+beispielsweise, wenn Längen wie \Length{linewidth} oder andere Anweisungen als
Argument verwendet werden.
Mit\important{\Macro{setcapmargin}} der Anweisung \Macro{setcapmargin} kann
statt der Breite der Beschreibung ein \PName{Rand} angegeben werden, der neben
-der Beschreibung zusätzlich zum normalen Textrand eingehalten werden soll.
-Sollen der Rand rechts und links nicht identisch gewählt werden, kann mit dem
+der Beschreibung zusätzlich zum normalen Textrand eingehalten werden soll.
+Sollen der Rand rechts und links nicht identisch gewählt werden, kann mit dem
optionalen Argument ein von \PName{Rand} abweichender \PName{Rand \kern-.25em
links} von der Beschreibung eingestellt
werden. Bei\important{\Macro{setcapmargin*}} der Sternvariante
@@ -4163,19 +4184,19 @@ doppelseitigen Satz \PName{Rand \kern-.25em innen} abweichend definiert.
Hier\textnote{Achtung!} ergibt sich bei
\Package{longtable}\IndexPackage{longtable}-Tabellen%
\important{\Package{longtable}} das gleiche Problem wie bei der Ausrichtung
-außen oder innen bei der Anweisung \Macro{setcapwidth}. Die Verwendung von
-\Macro{setcapmargin} oder \Macro{setcapmargin*} aktiviert außerdem
+außen oder innen bei der Anweisung \Macro{setcapwidth}. Die Verwendung von
+\Macro{setcapmargin} oder \Macro{setcapmargin*} aktiviert außerdem
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{nooneline} (siehe
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.nooneline}) für die Beschreibungen,
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.nooneline}) für die Beschreibungen,
die mit dieser Randeinstellung gesetzt werden.
-Man\textnote{Tipp!} kann übrigens auch negative Werte für \PName{Rand} und
-\PName{Rand \kern-.25em rechts} oder \PName{Rand \kern-.25em außen}
+Man\textnote{Tipp!} kann übrigens auch negative Werte für \PName{Rand} und
+\PName{Rand \kern-.25em rechts} oder \PName{Rand \kern-.25em außen}
angeben. Dadurch erreicht man, dass die Beschreibung in den entsprechenden
Rand hineinragt.%
\iffalse\par% Anhang wurde entfernt.
-Für\textnote{Tipp!} Experten und versierte Anwender ist eine etwas
-trickreiche Anwendung für \Macro{setcapwidth} in
+Für\textnote{Tipp!} Experten und versierte Anwender ist eine etwas
+trickreiche Anwendung für \Macro{setcapwidth} in
\iffree{\cite{book:komascript}}{\autoref{cha:floattricks},
\autopageref{cha:floattricks}} zu finden.%
\fi%
@@ -4189,9 +4210,9 @@ Normalerweise\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}} werden mehrzeilige\textnote{Ausrichtung mehrzeiliger
Beschreibungen} Beschreibungen im Blocksatz gesetzt. Dies entspricht
\Macro{setcaptionalignment}\PParameter{j}. Manchmal wird allerdings eine davon
-abweichende Ausrichtung gewünscht, beispielsweise linksbündiger
-Flattersatz. Eine entsprechende Änderung ist mit \Macro{setcaptionalignment}
-jederzeit möglich. Für \PName{Ausrichtung} kann dabei genau einer der
+abweichende Ausrichtung gewünscht, beispielsweise linksbündiger
+Flattersatz. Eine entsprechende Änderung ist mit \Macro{setcaptionalignment}
+jederzeit möglich. Für \PName{Ausrichtung} kann dabei genau einer der
Buchstaben aus \autoref{tab:maincls.captionalignment} angegeben werden. Wird
eine unbekannte \PName{Ausrichtung} angegeben, so resultiert dies in einer
Fehlermeldung.
@@ -4201,53 +4222,53 @@ Fehlermeldung.
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Ausrichtungen für mehrzeilige Beschreibungen von Gleitumgebungen}]
+ [{Ausrichtungen für mehrzeilige Beschreibungen von Gleitumgebungen}]
{\label{tab:maincls.captionalignment}%
- Ausrichtungen für mehrzeilige Beschreibungen von Gleitumgebungen}
+ Ausrichtungen für mehrzeilige Beschreibungen von Gleitumgebungen}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
\toprule
c & zentriert \\
j & Blocksatz \\
- l & linksbündig \\
- r & rechtsbündig \\
+ l & linksbündig \\
+ r & rechtsbündig \\
C & zentriert mit \Package{ragged2e} \\
J & Blocksatz mit \Package{ragged2e} \\
- L & linksbündig mit \Package{ragged2e} \\
- R & rechtsbündig mit \Package{ragged2e} \\
+ L & linksbündig mit \Package{ragged2e} \\
+ R & rechtsbündig mit \Package{ragged2e} \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{captionbeside}
\end{table}
-Die vier Möglichkeiten mit Paket
+Die vier Möglichkeiten mit Paket
\Package{ragged2e}\important{\Package{ragged2e}}\IndexPackage{ragged2e} stehen
-nur zur Verfügung, wenn das Paket vor Verwendung von
+nur zur Verfügung, wenn das Paket vor Verwendung von
\Macro{setcaptionalignment} geladen wurde. Anderenfalls werden sie auf die
-entsprechenden Möglichkeiten ohne \Package{ragged2e} abgebildet. Zur
+entsprechenden Möglichkeiten ohne \Package{ragged2e} abgebildet. Zur
Sicherheit wird in diesem Fall eine Warnung ausgegeben.
Verwendet man den Befehl ohne\textnote{kein optionaler Parameter} den
-optionalen Parameter, so hängt das Ergebnis davon ab, ob der Aufruf innerhalb
-oder außerhalb einer Gleitumgebung stattfindet. Innerhalb einer Gleitumgebung
-wird dann die Ausrichtung für diese Gleitumgebung gesetzt. Außerhalb wird
+optionalen Parameter, so hängt das Ergebnis davon ab, ob der Aufruf innerhalb
+oder außerhalb einer Gleitumgebung stattfindet. Innerhalb einer Gleitumgebung
+wird dann die Ausrichtung für diese Gleitumgebung gesetzt. Außerhalb wird
hingegen ein leerer optionaler Parameter angenommen.
Beim Aufruf mit einem leeren\textnote{leerer optionaler Parameter} optionalen
-Parameter oder außerhalb einer Gleitumgebung auch komplett ohne optionalen
+Parameter oder außerhalb einer Gleitumgebung auch komplett ohne optionalen
Parameter wird die allgemeine Ausrichtung festgelegt. Diese wird immer dann
-verwendet, wenn keine Ausrichtung für den aktuellen Gleitumgebungstyp
+verwendet, wenn keine Ausrichtung für den aktuellen Gleitumgebungstyp
definiert ist.
Will man nur die Ausrichtung eines bestimmen Typs\textnote{mit
\PName{Gleitumgebung}} von Gleitumgebungen festlegen, ohne
-\PName{Ausrichtung} auch für andere Arten von Gleitumgebungen zu verändern, so
+\PName{Ausrichtung} auch für andere Arten von Gleitumgebungen zu verändern, so
gibt man den Typ der Gleitumgebung, beispielsweise \PValue{figure} oder
\PValue{table}, als optionalen Parameter \PName{Gleitumgebung} an.
%
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen, dass Bildunterschriften auch dann vollständig zentriert unter
- den Bildern stehen, wenn sie mehrzeilig sind. Um das zunächst einmal nur für
+ Sie wollen, dass Bildunterschriften auch dann vollständig zentriert unter
+ den Bildern stehen, wenn sie mehrzeilig sind. Um das zunächst einmal nur für
eine einzige Abbildung zu testen, verwenden Sie\textnote{in der
Gleitumgebung}:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -4259,42 +4280,42 @@ gibt man den Typ der Gleitumgebung, beispielsweise \PValue{figure} oder
\end{figure}
\end{lstcode}
Da Sie mit dem Ergebnis zufrieden sind, verschieben Sie die
- Anweisung\textnote{in der Dokumentpräambel}
+ Anweisung\textnote{in der Dokumentpräambel}
\begin{lstcode}
\setcaptionalignment{c}
\end{lstcode}
- in die Dokumentpräambel. Daraufhin bemerken Sie allerdings, dass Ihnen
- diese Änderung für Tabellenüberschriften überhaupt nicht gefällt. Daher
- beschränken Sie mit\textnote{nur für Abbildungen}
+ in die Dokumentpräambel. Daraufhin bemerken Sie allerdings, dass Ihnen
+ diese Änderung für Tabellenüberschriften überhaupt nicht gefällt. Daher
+ beschränken Sie mit\textnote{nur für Abbildungen}
\begin{lstcode}
\setcaptionalignment[figure]{c}
\end{lstcode}
die Zentrierung auf Abbildungen.
- Etwas später stellen Sie fest, dass die Zentrierung doch nicht so günstig
- ist. Stattdessen wollen Sie nun lieber eine linksbündige Ausrichtung im
- Flattersatz haben. Also ändern Sie die Anweisung erneut zu:
+ Etwas später stellen Sie fest, dass die Zentrierung doch nicht so günstig
+ ist. Stattdessen wollen Sie nun lieber eine linksbündige Ausrichtung im
+ Flattersatz haben. Also ändern Sie die Anweisung erneut zu:
\begin{lstcode}
\setcaptionalignment[figure]{l}
\end{lstcode}
- Allerdings gefällt Ihnen nun nicht, dass die Zeilen sehr unterschiedlich
+ Allerdings gefällt Ihnen nun nicht, dass die Zeilen sehr unterschiedlich
lang werden. Als Ursache machen Sie die fehlende Trennung aus, wodurch lange
- Wörter komplett in die nächste Zeile rutschen und so große Lücken
- hinterlassen. Also wollen Sie zusätzlich Trennung nach Bedarf
- ermöglichen. Dies ist mit Hilfe des Pakets
+ Wörter komplett in die nächste Zeile rutschen und so große Lücken
+ hinterlassen. Also wollen Sie zusätzlich Trennung nach Bedarf
+ ermöglichen. Dies ist mit Hilfe des Pakets
\Package{ragged2e}\important{\Package{ragged2e}}\IndexPackage{ragged2e}
- leicht möglich. Dabei genügt es allerdings nicht, das Paket mit
+ leicht möglich. Dabei genügt es allerdings nicht, das Paket mit
\begin{lstcode}
\usepackage{ragged2e}
\end{lstcode}
zu laden. Auch Option \Option{newcommands} beim Laden des Pakets bringt
- keine Abhilfe. Stattdessen muss zusätzlich die \PName{Ausrichtung} geändert
+ keine Abhilfe. Stattdessen muss zusätzlich die \PName{Ausrichtung} geändert
werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\usepackage{ragged2e}
\setcaptionalignment[figure]{L}
\end{lstcode}
- Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie den Großbuchstabe für \PName{Ausrichtung}.
+ Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie den Großbuchstabe für \PName{Ausrichtung}.
\end{Example}
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -4303,13 +4324,13 @@ gibt man den Typ der Gleitumgebung, beispielsweise \PValue{figure} oder
\Option{origlongtable}
\end{Declaration}%
\BeginIndex{Package}{longtable}%
-Falls die Tabellenüberschriften des \Package{longtable}-Pakets (siehe
+Falls die Tabellenüberschriften des \Package{longtable}-Pakets (siehe
\cite{package:longtable}) von den \KOMAScript-Klassen nicht umdefiniert werden
sollen, kann die Option \Option{origlongtable} gesetzt werden. Diese
Option\textnote{Achtung!} ist als optionales Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} zu verwenden. Eine Einstellung per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}
-wird nicht unterstützt.
+wird nicht unterstützt.
%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -4324,7 +4345,7 @@ Normalerweise\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
Tabellen"~\Index{Tabellen>Verzeichnis} und das
Abbildungsverzeichnis\Index{Abbildungen>Verzeichnis}~-- nicht nummeriert oder
in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen. In \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc} wurde
-dies bereits näher ausgeführt. Alternativ zu den dort erwähnten Einstellungen
+dies bereits näher ausgeführt. Alternativ zu den dort erwähnten Einstellungen
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{nolistof}%
\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{nolistof}},
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{listof}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{listof}}
@@ -4334,22 +4355,22 @@ Sicht der Verzeichnisse selbst gesehen werden. Daher kann man die gleichen
Ergebnisse auch mit den Einstellungen \OptionValue{listof}{notoc},
\OptionValue{listof}{totoc} und \OptionValue{listof}{numbered} erreichen.
-Dabei werden in der Voreinstellung für die Überschriften der Verzeichnisse die
-oberste verfügbare Gliederungsebene unterhalb von
+Dabei werden in der Voreinstellung für die Überschriften der Verzeichnisse die
+oberste verfügbare Gliederungsebene unterhalb von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} verwendet. Bei \Class{scrbook} und
\Class{scrreprt} ist das die Kapitelebene, bei \Class{scrartcl} die
Abschnittsebene. Mit\important{\OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}}%
\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
-Hilfe der Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{leveldown} kann hingegen die nächst
+Hilfe der Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{leveldown} kann hingegen die nächst
tiefere Gliederungsebene verwendet
werden. \important{\OptionValue{listof}{standardlevel}}%
\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}%
-\OptionValue{listof}{standardlevel} schaltet bei Bedarf wieder zurück auf die
+\OptionValue{listof}{standardlevel} schaltet bei Bedarf wieder zurück auf die
voreingestellte Gliederungsebene.
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen in einem Buch das Abbildungs- und das Tabellenverzeichnis als
- Unterverzeichnisse eines gemeinsamen Verzeichnisses »Abbildungen und
- Tabellen« setzen. Dazu verwenden Sie einfach:
+ Unterverzeichnisse eines gemeinsamen Verzeichnisses »Abbildungen und
+ Tabellen« setzen. Dazu verwenden Sie einfach:
\begin{lstcode}
\KOMAoption{listof}{leveldown}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -4359,7 +4380,7 @@ voreingestellte Gliederungsebene.
\listoffigures
\listoftables
\end{lstcode}
- Näheres zur Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} ist
+ Näheres zur Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} ist
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} zu
entnehmen.
\end{Example}
@@ -4367,25 +4388,25 @@ voreingestellte Gliederungsebene.
Normalerweise\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{%
\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} werden die
Verzeichnisse\Index{Abbildungen>Verzeichnis}\Index{Tabellen>Verzeichnis}
-der Gleitumgebungen so formatiert, dass für die Nummer ein Raum fester Breite
-verwendet wird. Gleichzeitig werden alle Einträge leicht eingezogen. Dies
+der Gleitumgebungen so formatiert, dass für die Nummer ein Raum fester Breite
+verwendet wird. Gleichzeitig werden alle Einträge leicht eingezogen. Dies
entspricht der Verwendung der Einstellung
\OptionValue{listof}{graduated}\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{graduated}}.
Werden die Nummern sehr breit, weil beispielsweise sehr viele Tabellen
verwendet werden, so reicht der vorgesehene Platz irgendwann nicht mehr aus.
Vergleichbar\important{\OptionValue{listof}{flat}} zur Einstellung
-\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{flat}} für das
+\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat}\IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{flat}} für das
Inhaltsverzeichnis bietet \KOMAScript{} daher die Einstellung
-\OptionValue{listof}{flat}\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{flat}} für die
+\OptionValue{listof}{flat}\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{flat}} für die
Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen. Dabei wird die Breite der Nummern
-automatisch ermittelt und der Platz entsprechend angepasst. Bezüglich der
+automatisch ermittelt und der Platz entsprechend angepasst. Bezüglich der
Nebenwirkungen und Funktionsweise gilt, was in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.flat} für die Einstellung
-\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat} erklärt wurde. Es sei an dieser Stelle
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.flat} für die Einstellung
+\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat} erklärt wurde. Es sei an dieser Stelle
jedoch nochmals darauf hingewiesen, dass mit der Einstellung
-\OptionValue{listof}{flat} mehrere \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt werden, bis die
-Verzeichnisse ihre endgültige Form erhalten haben.
+\OptionValue{listof}{flat} mehrere \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt werden, bis die
+Verzeichnisse ihre endgültige Form erhalten haben.
Die Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{flat} wird automatisch aktiviert, falls
die Einstellung
@@ -4393,20 +4414,20 @@ die Einstellung
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} verwendet
wird. Normalerweise\important{\OptionValue{listof}{entryprefix}} ist es nicht
sinnvoll jeden Eintrag in eines der Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen mit
-einem Präfix wie »Abbildung« oder »Tabelle« zu versenden, da natürlich im
+einem Präfix wie »Abbildung« oder »Tabelle« zu versenden, da natürlich im
Abbildungsverzeichnis nur Abbildungen und im Tabellenverzeichnis nur Tabellen
-zu finden sind. Damit hat ein solcher Präfix keinen zusätzlichen
+zu finden sind. Damit hat ein solcher Präfix keinen zusätzlichen
Informationswert und wird in der Voreinstellung auch weggelassen. Mit der
-Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{entryprefix} wird ein solcher Präfix jedoch
-gesetzt. Dabei erhalten alle Einträge eines Verzeichnisses denselben
-Präfix. Dieser richtet sich nach dem Dateianhang der Hilfsdatei, die für das
-Verzeichnis verwendet wird. Für das Abbildungsverzeichnis, das den Dateianhang
-»\File{lof}« besitzt, wird beispielsweise \Macro{listoflofentryname} verwendet,
-während für das Tabellenverzeichnis, das den Dateianhang »\File{lot}« besitzt,
+Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{entryprefix} wird ein solcher Präfix jedoch
+gesetzt. Dabei erhalten alle Einträge eines Verzeichnisses denselben
+Präfix. Dieser richtet sich nach dem Dateianhang der Hilfsdatei, die für das
+Verzeichnis verwendet wird. Für das Abbildungsverzeichnis, das den Dateianhang
+»\File{lof}« besitzt, wird beispielsweise \Macro{listoflofentryname} verwendet,
+während für das Tabellenverzeichnis, das den Dateianhang »\File{lot}« besitzt,
\Macro{listoflotentryname} verwendet wird.
Bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und
-\Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} fügt
+\Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} fügt
\KOMAScript{} in der Voreinstellung bei jedem Kapitelanfang einen vertikalen
Abstand in die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen ein. Dieses Verhalten, das es
auch bei den Standardklassen gibt, dient dazu, diese Verzeichnisse nach
@@ -4427,73 +4448,73 @@ kann man den vertikalen Abstand komplett
abschalten. Eine\important{\OptionValue{listof}{chapterentry}} Besonderheit
stellt die Einstellung
\OptionValue{listof}{chapterentry}\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{chapterentry}}
-dar. Dabei wird statt des Abstandes der Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag für das
+dar. Dabei wird statt des Abstandes der Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag für das
Kapitel in das Verzeichnis der Gleitumgebungen
-eingefügt. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass ein solcher
-Eintrag auch dann erfolgt, wenn das Kapitel keine Gleitumgebung enthält. Eine
-Lösung, bei der nur Kapitel mit Gleitumgebungen im jeweiligen Verzeichnis
+eingefügt. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass ein solcher
+Eintrag auch dann erfolgt, wenn das Kapitel keine Gleitumgebung enthält. Eine
+Lösung, bei der nur Kapitel mit Gleitumgebungen im jeweiligen Verzeichnis
angezeigt werden, finden Sie unter
\cite{https://komascript.de/comment/5070}. Eine noch direktere Beeinflussung,
was in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen bei neuen Kapiteln geschehen
soll, ist mit der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapteratlists} zu
erreichen, die in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure} auf
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapteratlists} erläutert wird.
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapteratlists} erläutert wird.
-Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
+Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\Option{listof} ist in \autoref{tab:maincls.listof} zu finden.
\begin{desclist}
- \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{listof}}]{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{listof} zur Einstellung von Form und
+ \desccaption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{listof}}]{%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{listof} zur Einstellung von Form und
Inhalt der Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen\label{tab:maincls.listof}%
}{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{listof} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{listof} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\entry{\PValue{chapterentry}, \PValue{withchapterentry}}{%
- Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen durch
+ Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen durch
einen Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag des Kapitels markiert.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{chapterentry}}}%
\entry{\PValue{chaptergapline}, \PValue{onelinechaptergap}}{%
- Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen durch
+ Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen durch
einen Abstand von einer Zeile markiert.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{chaptergapline}}}%
\entry{\PValue{chaptergapsmall}, \PValue{smallchaptergap}}{%
- Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen durch
+ Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen durch
einen kleinen Abstand markiert.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{chaptergapsmall}}}%
\entry{\PValue{entryprefix}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Jeder Verzeichniseintrag wird mit einem vom Verzeichnis abhängenden Präfix
- vor der Nummer versehen. Der Präfix ist normalerweise sprachabhängig,
- beispielsweise bei deutschen Spracheinstellungen »Abbildung« für das
- Abbildungsverzeichnis und »Tabelle« für das Tabellenverzeichnis, jeweils
+ Jeder Verzeichniseintrag wird mit einem vom Verzeichnis abhängenden Präfix
+ vor der Nummer versehen. Der Präfix ist normalerweise sprachabhängig,
+ beispielsweise bei deutschen Spracheinstellungen »Abbildung« für das
+ Abbildungsverzeichnis und »Tabelle« für das Tabellenverzeichnis, jeweils
gefolgt von einem Leerzeichen.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{entryprefix}}}%
\entry{\PValue{flat}, \PValue{left}}{%
Die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen erhalten eine tabellarische
Form. Die Gleitumgebungsnummern sind dabei die erste Spalte, der Titel die
- zweite Spalte, die Seitenzahlen die dritte Spalte. Der Platz, der für die
- Gleitumgebungsnummern reserviert wird, richtet sich nach dem benötigten
+ zweite Spalte, die Seitenzahlen die dritte Spalte. Der Platz, der für die
+ Gleitumgebungsnummern reserviert wird, richtet sich nach dem benötigten
Platz des vorherigen \LaTeX-Laufs.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{flat}}}%
\entry{\PValue{graduated}, \PValue{indent}, \PValue{indented}}{%
Die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen erhalten eine hierarchische Form. Es
- steht nur ein begrenzter Platz für die Gleitumgebungsnummern zur
- Verfügung.%
+ steht nur ein begrenzter Platz für die Gleitumgebungsnummern zur
+ Verfügung.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{graduated}}}%
\entry{\PValue{indenttextentries}, \PValue{indentunnumbered},
\PValue{numberline}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
- \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der
+ \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der
Gleitumgebungen, beispielsweise das Abbildungs"~ und das
- Tabellenverzeichnis, gesetzt. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge
- linksbündig mit dem Text von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene
+ Tabellenverzeichnis, gesetzt. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge
+ linksbündig mit dem Text von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene
gesetzt. Allerdings bieten die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst keine nicht
- nummerierten Einträge in diese Verzeichnisse. Dies hat daher nur
- Auswirkungen auf entsprechende Einträge, die nicht von den Klassen selbst,
+ nummerierten Einträge in diese Verzeichnisse. Dies hat daher nur
+ Auswirkungen auf entsprechende Einträge, die nicht von den Klassen selbst,
aber dennoch mit Hilfe von \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline} (siehe
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline})
erzeugt werden.%
@@ -4503,13 +4524,13 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
- \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der
+ \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der
Gleitumgebungen, beispielsweise das Abbildungs"~ und das
- Tabellenverzeichnis, gelöscht. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge
- linksbündig mit der Nummer von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene
+ Tabellenverzeichnis, gelöscht. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge
+ linksbündig mit der Nummer von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene
gesetzt. Allerdings bieten die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst keine nicht
- nummerierten Einträge in diese Verzeichnisse. Dies hat daher nur
- Auswirkungen auf entsprechende Einträge, die nicht von den Klassen selbst,
+ nummerierten Einträge in diese Verzeichnisse. Dies hat daher nur
+ Auswirkungen auf entsprechende Einträge, die nicht von den Klassen selbst,
aber dennoch mit Hilfe von \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline} (siehe
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline})
erzeugt werden.%
@@ -4518,7 +4539,7 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
Die Verzeichnisse werden um eine Gliederungsebene nach unten verschoben.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{leveldown}}}%
\entry{\PValue{nochaptergap}, \PValue{ignorechapter}}{%
- Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen nicht
+ Kapitelanfänge werden in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen nicht
markiert.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{nochaptergap}}}%
\entry{\PValue{notoc}, \PValue{nottotoc}, \PValue{plainheading}}{%
@@ -4532,7 +4553,7 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
werden nummeriert.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{numbered}}}%
\entry{\PValue{standardlevel}}{%
- Die Verzeichnisse liegen auf der üblichen Gliederungsebene.%
+ Die Verzeichnisse liegen auf der üblichen Gliederungsebene.%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{standardlevel}}}%
\entry{\PValue{toc}, \PValue{totoc}, \PValue{notnumbered}}{%
Die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen, beispielsweise das Abbildungs"~ und
@@ -4549,16 +4570,16 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\Macro{listoffigures}
\end{Declaration}%
Mit diesen Anweisungen kann ein Verzeichnis der Tabellen beziehungsweise der
-Abbildungen ausgegeben werden. Änderungen, die Auswirkungen auf diese
-Verzeichnisse haben, werden erst nach zwei \LaTeX{}-Läufen sichtbar. Die Form
+Abbildungen ausgegeben werden. Änderungen, die Auswirkungen auf diese
+Verzeichnisse haben, werden erst nach zwei \LaTeX{}-Läufen sichtbar. Die Form
der Verzeichnisse kann durch die Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}}
mit den Werten \PValue{graduated} und \PValue{flat} beeinflusst werden (siehe
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}). Darüber hinaus wirken sich indirekt
-die Werte \PValue{listof} und \PValue{listofnumbered} für die Option
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}). Darüber hinaus wirken sich indirekt
+die Werte \PValue{listof} und \PValue{listofnumbered} für die Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}}
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}),
-sowie die Werte \PValue{totoc} und \PValue{numbered} der oben erläuterten
+sowie die Werte \PValue{totoc} und \PValue{numbered} der oben erläuterten
Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} auf die Verzeichnisse aus.
In\textnote{Tipp!} der Regel findet man die Verzeichnisse der
@@ -4582,9 +4603,9 @@ Inhaltsverzeichnis.%
Der Anhang eines Dokuments besteht im Wesentlichen aus den Anlagen zu einem
Dokument. Typische Teile eines Anhangs sind Literaturverzeichnis,
-Stichwortverzeichnis und Begriffsverzeichnis. Alleine für diese Teile würde
+Stichwortverzeichnis und Begriffsverzeichnis. Alleine für diese Teile würde
man jedoch keinen Anhang beginnen, da diese Teile normalerweise schon von sich
-aus eine Auszeichnung besitzen, die sie als Anhang erkennbar macht. Enthält
+aus eine Auszeichnung besitzen, die sie als Anhang erkennbar macht. Enthält
der Anhang aber weitere Teile wie beispielsweise zitierte Fremddokumente,
Endnoten oder Tafeln, so werden die zuvor genannten Teile ebenfalls im Anhang
gesetzt.
@@ -4595,17 +4616,17 @@ gesetzt.
\end{Declaration}%
Der Anhang wird in den Standardklassen und den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen mit der
Anweisung \Macro{appendix} eingeleitet. Diese Anweisung schaltet unter anderem
-die Kapitelnummerierung auf Großbuchstaben um und sorgt gleichzeitig dafür,
-dass die Regeln für die Nummerierung der Gliederungsebenen nach \cite{DUDEN}
+die Kapitelnummerierung auf Großbuchstaben um und sorgt gleichzeitig dafür,
+dass die Regeln für die Nummerierung der Gliederungsebenen nach \cite{DUDEN}
eingehalten werden. Diese Regeln sind in der Beschreibung der Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers} näher erläutert.
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers} näher erläutert.
-Die Form der Kapitelüberschriften\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}
+Die Form der Kapitelüberschriften\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}
im Anhang wird durch die Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix}} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} bestimmt. Näheres dazu ist
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} bestimmt. Näheres dazu ist
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} zu entnehmen.
@@ -4625,15 +4646,15 @@ des Anhangs werden ganz normal mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} und
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Literaturverzeichnis}
-Das Literaturverzeichnis erschließt externe Quellen. In der Regel wird das
+Das Literaturverzeichnis erschließt externe Quellen. In der Regel wird das
Literaturverzeichnis mit Hilfe des Programms \BibTeX{} aus einer Datei mit
-datenbankähnlicher Struktur erzeugt. Dabei kann über den \BibTeX-Stil sowohl
-die Form der Einträge als auch deren Sortierung verändert werden. Wird
-zusätzlich ein Literaturpaket, beispielsweise
+datenbankähnlicher Struktur erzeugt. Dabei kann über den \BibTeX-Stil sowohl
+die Form der Einträge als auch deren Sortierung verändert werden. Wird
+zusätzlich ein Literaturpaket, beispielsweise
\Package{natbib}\IndexPackage{natbib},
\Package{babelbib}\IndexPackage{babelbib} oder
\Package{biblatex}\IndexPackage{biblatex} verwendet, so schwindet der Einfluss
-von \KOMAScript{} auf das Literaturverzeichnis. In diesen Fällen ist unbedingt
+von \KOMAScript{} auf das Literaturverzeichnis. In diesen Fällen ist unbedingt
die Anleitung des verwendeten Pakets zu beachten! Zur generellen Verwendung
eines Literaturverzeichnisses sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen.
@@ -4642,47 +4663,47 @@ eines Literaturverzeichnisses sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen.
\OptionVName{bibliography}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}
Als \PName{Einstellung}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and
- \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} kann zunächst einmal jeder definierte
-Formatierungsstil gewählt werden. Vordefiniert sind bei \KOMAScript{} zwei
-solche Formatierungsstile für das Literaturverzeichnis. Diese sind jedoch
-nicht zu verwechseln mit den unterschiedlichen Stilen für
-\BibTeX\Index{BibTeX=\BibTeX}, die man mit \Macro{bibstyle} auswählt. Während
+ \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} kann zunächst einmal jeder definierte
+Formatierungsstil gewählt werden. Vordefiniert sind bei \KOMAScript{} zwei
+solche Formatierungsstile für das Literaturverzeichnis. Diese sind jedoch
+nicht zu verwechseln mit den unterschiedlichen Stilen für
+\BibTeX\Index{BibTeX=\BibTeX}, die man mit \Macro{bibstyle} auswählt. Während
\BibTeX{} sowohl die Art der Sortierung als auch den Inhalt des
-Literaturverzeichnisses bestimmt, können über die Einstellungen von
+Literaturverzeichnisses bestimmt, können über die Einstellungen von
\KOMAScript{} nur grundlegende Eigenschaften des Literaturverzeichnisses oder
-einige wenige Eigenschaften der Formatierung der Einträge beeinflusst werden.
+einige wenige Eigenschaften der Formatierung der Einträge beeinflusst werden.
Mit\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{oldstyle}}
\OptionValue{bibliography}{oldstyle}%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{oldstyle}} wird die kompakte Formatierung
-gewählt. Dabei führt die Anweisung
+gewählt. Dabei führt die Anweisung
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} in den einzelnen
-Einträgen lediglich zu einem dehnbaren horizontalen Abstand. Der Name kommt
-daher, dass dies die häufigste klassische Form eines Literaturverzeichnisses
-ist. Demgegenüber\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}} erreicht
+Einträgen lediglich zu einem dehnbaren horizontalen Abstand. Der Name kommt
+daher, dass dies die häufigste klassische Form eines Literaturverzeichnisses
+ist. Demgegenüber\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}} erreicht
man die etwas modernere, offene Form mit der Einstellung
\OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{openstyle}}. Der Name kommt daher, dass
hier die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock} einen Absatz
-einfügt. Die Einträge im Literaturverzeichnis werden so stärker
+einfügt. Die Einträge im Literaturverzeichnis werden so stärker
gegliedert. Sie sind weniger kompakt und deutlich aufgelockerter oder
-geöffnet. Bezüglich der Möglichkeit, neue Formatierungsstile zu definieren,
+geöffnet. Bezüglich der Möglichkeit, neue Formatierungsstile zu definieren,
sei auf \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle},
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.bibliography},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle} verwiesen.
-Neben dem Formatierungsstil gibt es eine weitere Eigenschaft, die über
-\PName{Einstellung} verändert werden kann. Das Literaturverzeichnis stellt
+Neben dem Formatierungsstil gibt es eine weitere Eigenschaft, die über
+\PName{Einstellung} verändert werden kann. Das Literaturverzeichnis stellt
eine Art von Verzeichnis dar, bei der nicht der Inhalt des vorliegenden Werks
-aufgelistet, sondern auf externe Inhalte verwiesen wird. Mit dieser Begründung
-könnte man argumentieren, dass das Literaturverzeichnis ein eigenes Kapitel
+aufgelistet, sondern auf externe Inhalte verwiesen wird. Mit dieser Begründung
+könnte man argumentieren, dass das Literaturverzeichnis ein eigenes Kapitel
bzw. einen eigenen Abschnitt darstellt und somit eine Nummer verdiene. Die
Einstellung \OptionValue{bibliography}{numbered}%
\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{numbered}}%
-\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{numbered}} führt genau dazu,
-einschließlich des dann fälligen Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Ich selbst
+\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{numbered}} führt genau dazu,
+einschließlich des dann fälligen Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Ich selbst
bin der Meinung, dass bei dieser Argumentation auch ein klassisches,
-kommentiertes Quellenverzeichnis ein eigenes Kapitel wäre. Außerdem ist das
+kommentiertes Quellenverzeichnis ein eigenes Kapitel wäre. Außerdem ist das
Literaturverzeichnis letztlich nichts, was man selbst geschrieben
hat. Deshalb\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{totoc}} verdient es
allenfalls einen nicht nummerierten Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis, was mit der
@@ -4698,26 +4719,26 @@ die Werte \PValue{bibliographynumbered}, \PValue{bibliography} und
\PValue{nobibliography} ab \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.bibliography}.
In\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
-einigen Fällen wird nicht das gesamte Dokument mit einem einzigen
+einigen Fällen wird nicht das gesamte Dokument mit einem einzigen
Literaturverzeichnis versehen, sondern jedes Kapitel eines mit \Class{scrbook}
-oder \Class{scrreprt} gesetzten Dokuments erhält sein eigenes
+oder \Class{scrreprt} gesetzten Dokuments erhält sein eigenes
Literaturverzeichnis. In diesem Fall ist es sinnvoll,
wenn\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{leveldown}} das Literaturverzeichnis
selbst nicht auf Kapitel, sondern etwas tiefer auf Abschnittsebene angesiedelt
wird. Dies ist mit Option \OptionValue{bibliography}{leveldown}%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{leveldown}} zu erreichen. Diese kann
beispielsweise auch verwendet werden, wenn das Literaturverzeichnis zusammen
-mit anderen Verzeichnissen unter einer gemeinsamen Überschrift erscheinen
-soll. Daher ist diese Option auch in \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar.
+mit anderen Verzeichnissen unter einer gemeinsamen Ãœberschrift erscheinen
+soll. Daher ist diese Option auch in \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar.
-Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für \PName{Einstellung} ist
+Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für \PName{Einstellung} ist
\autoref{tab:maincls.bibliography} zu entnehmen. Es ist jedoch zu beachten,
dass mit \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}\IndexCmd{newbibstyle}
-weitere Werte definiert werden können.
+weitere Werte definiert werden können.
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{bibliography}}]{Vordefinierte
- Werte für Option \Option{bibliography} zur Einstellung der Form des
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{bibliography}}]{Vordefinierte
+ Werte für Option \Option{bibliography} zur Einstellung der Form des
Literatur\-verzeichnisses}
\label{tab:maincls.bibliography}
\begin{desctabular}
@@ -4728,31 +4749,31 @@ weitere Werte definiert werden können.
verschoben.%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{leveldown}}}%
\entry{\PValue{notoc}, \PValue{nottotoc}, \PValue{plainheading}}{%
- Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
+ Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
wird auch nicht nummeriert.%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{nottotoc}}}%
\entry{\PValue{numbered}, \PValue{tocnumbered}, \PValue{totocnumbered},
\PValue{numberedtoc}, \PValue{numberedtotoc}}{%
- Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
+ Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
wird nummeriert.%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{numbered}}}%
\pventry{oldstyle}{%
- Es wird die klassische, kompakte Formatierung gewählt, bei der
+ Es wird die klassische, kompakte Formatierung gewählt, bei der
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} nur einen
dehnbaren horizontalen Abstand darstellt.%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{oldstyle}}}%
\pventry{openstyle}{%
- Es wird eine untergliederte, offene Formatierung gewählt, bei der
+ Es wird eine untergliederte, offene Formatierung gewählt, bei der
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} einen Absatz
darstellt.%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{openstyle}}}%
\pventry{standardlevel}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Das Literaturverzeichnis liegt auf der üblichen Gliederungsebene.%
+ Das Literaturverzeichnis liegt auf der üblichen Gliederungsebene.%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{standardlevel}}}%
\entry{\PValue{toc}, \PValue{totoc}, \PValue{notnumbered}}{%
- Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis,
+ Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis,
ohne dass es nummeriert wird.%
\IndexOption{bibliography~=\textKValue{totoc}}}%
\end{desctabular}
@@ -4762,10 +4783,10 @@ weitere Werte definiert werden können.
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{setbibpreamble}\Parameter{Präambel}
+ \Macro{setbibpreamble}\Parameter{Präambel}
\end{Declaration}%
-Mit der Anweisung \Macro{setbibpreamble} kann eine Präambel für das
-Literaturverzeichnis gesetzt werden. Bedingung dafür ist, dass die Präambel
+Mit der Anweisung \Macro{setbibpreamble} kann eine Präambel für das
+Literaturverzeichnis gesetzt werden. Bedingung dafür ist, dass die Präambel
vor der Anweisung zum Setzen des Literaturverzeichnisses gesetzt wird. Dies
muss nicht unmittelbar davor sein. Es kann also beispielsweise am Anfang des
Dokuments erfolgen. Ebenso\textnote{Achtung!} wie Option
@@ -4787,8 +4808,8 @@ funktioniert (siehe \cite{package:natbib}).
sortiert. Bei mehreren Autoren wird nach dem
ersten Autor sortiert.\par\bigskip}
\end{lstcode}
- Die Anweisung \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} sorgt dafür, dass
- zwischen der Präambel und der ersten Literaturangabe ein großer
+ Die Anweisung \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} sorgt dafür, dass
+ zwischen der Präambel und der ersten Literaturangabe ein großer
Zwischenraum gesetzt wird.%
\end{Example}
%
@@ -4801,15 +4822,15 @@ funktioniert (siehe \cite{package:natbib}).
Diese\textnote{Achtung!}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and
\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisung existiert nur, wenn
Umgebung \Environment{thebibliography} nicht durch ein Paket neu definiert
-wurde. In diesem Fall ist es möglich, mit dieser Anweisung das
+wurde. In diesem Fall ist es möglich, mit dieser Anweisung das
Literaturverzeichnis zu unterbrechen. Die \PName{Unterbrechung} wird dann
-innerhalb einer Gruppe ausgegeben. Eine solche \PName{Unterbrechung} könnte
-beispielsweise eine Überschrift mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.minisec}
-sein. Leider gibt es bisher keine Möglichkeit, diese Anweisung beispielsweise
+innerhalb einer Gruppe ausgegeben. Eine solche \PName{Unterbrechung} könnte
+beispielsweise eine Ãœberschrift mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.minisec}
+sein. Leider gibt es bisher keine Möglichkeit, diese Anweisung beispielsweise
mit Hilfe eines speziellen Eintrags in der Literaturdatenbank von \BibTeX{}
erzeugen zu lassen. Daher kann sie derzeit nur von Anwendern verwendet werden,
die das Literaturverzeichnis selbst editieren. Ihr Nutzen ist damit sehr
-beschränkt.%
+beschränkt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -4819,22 +4840,22 @@ beschränkt.%
\Macro{AtEndBibliography}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}
-einigen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man nach der Präambel des
+einigen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man nach der Präambel des
Literaturverzeichnisses oder unmittelbar vor dem Ende des
-Literaturverzeichnisses noch \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen kann. Dies ist mit
-Hilfe dieser beiden Anweisungen möglich.
+Literaturverzeichnisses noch \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen kann. Dies ist mit
+Hilfe dieser beiden Anweisungen möglich.
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen, dass das Literaturverzeichnis nicht im Blocksatz, sondern im
- linksbündigen Flattersatz ausgegeben wird. Dies ist einfach mit:
+ linksbündigen Flattersatz ausgegeben wird. Dies ist einfach mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\AfterBibliographyPreamble{\raggedright}
\end{lstcode}
- zu erreichen. Sie können diese Anweisung an beliebiger Stelle vor dem
+ zu erreichen. Sie können diese Anweisung an beliebiger Stelle vor dem
Literaturverzeichnis verwenden. Es wird jedoch empfohlen, sie in die
- Präambel des Dokuments oder ein eigenes Paket zu schreiben.
+ Präambel des Dokuments oder ein eigenes Paket zu schreiben.
\end{Example}
Die\textnote{Achtung!} Realisierung dieser Anweisung bedarf bei Verwendung
-eines Pakets, das die Umgebung für Literaturverzeichnisse umdefiniert, der
+eines Pakets, das die Umgebung für Literaturverzeichnisse umdefiniert, der
Zusammenarbeit mit dem entsprechenden Paket (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.coexistence},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}).%
@@ -4851,8 +4872,8 @@ Zusammenarbeit mit dem entsprechenden Paket (siehe
Das Stichwortverzeichnis ist auch unter den Bezeichnungen Index oder Register
bekannt. Zur generellen Verwendung eines Stichwortverzeichnisses sei auf
\cite{l2kurz} sowie auf \cite{makeindex} und \cite{xindy} verwiesen. Wird ein
-Paket verwendet, das selbst Anweisungen und Umgebungen für das
-Stichwortverzeichnis zur Verfügung stellt, so schwindet eventuell der
+Paket verwendet, das selbst Anweisungen und Umgebungen für das
+Stichwortverzeichnis zur Verfügung stellt, so schwindet eventuell der
Einfluss, den \KOMAScript{} auf dieses Verzeichnis hat. Dies gilt
beispielsweise bei Verwendung von \Package{index}\IndexPackage{index},
nicht jedoch bei Verwendung von
@@ -4868,9 +4889,9 @@ In der Voreinstellung
\OptionValue{index}{nottotoc}\IndexOption{index~=\textKValue{nottotoc}} ist das
Stichwortverzeichnis ein nicht nummeriertes Kapitel ohne Eintrag im
Inhaltsverzeichnis. Da\important{\OptionValue{index}{totoc}} das
-Stichwortverzeichnis normalerweise in einem Buch oder ähnlichen Dokument
-zuletzt steht, benötigt es eigentlich auch keinen
-Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag. Wird dieser dennoch gewünscht, beispielsweise weil
+Stichwortverzeichnis normalerweise in einem Buch oder ähnlichen Dokument
+zuletzt steht, benötigt es eigentlich auch keinen
+Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag. Wird dieser dennoch gewünscht, beispielsweise weil
wie in \iffree{dieser Anleitung}{diesem Buch} mit einem mehrgliedrigen
Stichwortverzeichnis gearbeitet wird, so kann dies mit der Einstellung
\OptionValue{index}{totoc}\IndexOption{index~=\textKValue{totoc}} erreicht
@@ -4884,24 +4905,24 @@ Option \OptionValue{index}{numbered}. Siehe hierzu auch Option
Werden beispielsweise mit Hilfe von \Package{splitidx}\IndexPackage{splitidx}
(siehe \cite{package:splitindex}) mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse erstellt, so
-kann es sinnvoll sein, diese unter einer gemeinsamen Überschrift zusammen zu
-fassen. Um dies zu ermöglichen, kann mit \OptionValue{index}{leveldown}%
+kann es sinnvoll sein, diese unter einer gemeinsamen Ãœberschrift zusammen zu
+fassen. Um dies zu ermöglichen, kann mit \OptionValue{index}{leveldown}%
\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}\important{\OptionValue{index}{leveldown}} das Verzeichnis
-eine Gliederungsebene tiefer als üblich angesiedelt werden. Bei
+eine Gliederungsebene tiefer als üblich angesiedelt werden. Bei
\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} ist es dann also kein Kapitel mehr,
sondern ein Abschnitt, bei \Class{scrartcl} entsprechend ein
Unterabschnitt. Option \OptionValue{index}{standardlevel}%
\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}\important{\OptionValue{index}{standardlevel}} ist das
-Gegenstück dazu und hebt ein eventuell zuvor verwendetes
+Gegenstück dazu und hebt ein eventuell zuvor verwendetes
\OptionValue{index}{leveldown} wieder auf.
-Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
+Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\Option{index} ist in \autoref{tab:maincls.index} zu finden.
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{index}}]{Mögliche Werte für
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{index}}]{Mögliche Werte für
Option \Option{index} zur Einstellung des Stich\-wort\-verzeichnisses}
\label{tab:maincls.index}
\begin{desctabular}
@@ -4912,23 +4933,23 @@ Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\IndexOption{index~=\textKValue{leveldown}}%
}%
\entry{\PValue{notoc}, \PValue{nottotoc}, \PValue{plainheading}}{%
- Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.%
+ Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.%
\IndexOption{index~=\textKValue{nottotoc}}}%
\entry{\PValue{numbered}, \PValue{tocnumbered}, \PValue{totocnumbered},
\PValue{numberedtoc}, \PValue{numberedtotoc}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
+ Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und
wird nummeriert.%
\IndexOption{index~=\textKValue{numbered}}}%
\pventry{standardlevel}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
\Class{scrartcl}}%
- Der Index liegt auf der üblichen Gliederungsebene.%
+ Der Index liegt auf der üblichen Gliederungsebene.%
\IndexOption{index~=\textKValue{standardlevel}}%
}%
\entry{\PValue{toc}, \PValue{totoc}, \PValue{notnumbered}}{%
- Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis,
+ Das Stichwortverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis,
ohne dass er nummeriert wird.%
\IndexOption{index~=\textKValue{totoc}}}%
\end{desctabular}
@@ -4938,48 +4959,48 @@ Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{setindexpreamble}\Parameter{Präambel}
+ \Macro{setindexpreamble}\Parameter{Präambel}
\end{Declaration}%
-Analog zur Präambel des Literaturverzeichnisses können Sie auch das
-Stichwortverzeichnis mit einer Präambel versehen. Dies findet häufig
+Analog zur Präambel des Literaturverzeichnisses können Sie auch das
+Stichwortverzeichnis mit einer Präambel versehen. Dies findet häufig
dann Anwendung, wenn es mehr als einen Index gibt oder im Index
unterschiedliche Arten der Referenzierung durch unterschiedliche
Hervorhebung der Seitenzahlen markiert werden.
\begin{Example}
Sie haben ein Dokument, in dem Begriffe sowohl definiert als auch
verwendet werden. Die Seitenzahlen der Begriffsdefinitionen sind
- fett dargestellt. Natürlich möchten Sie gerne auf diesen Umstand
- hinweisen. Also setzen Sie eine entsprechende Präambel für den
+ fett dargestellt. Natürlich möchten Sie gerne auf diesen Umstand
+ hinweisen. Also setzen Sie eine entsprechende Präambel für den
Index:
\begin{lstcode}
\setindexpreamble{Alle \textbf{fett} gedruckten
Seitenzahlen sind Referenzen auf die Definition
- des jeweiligen Begriffs. Demgegenüber geben
+ des jeweiligen Begriffs. Demgegenüber geben
normal gedruckte Seitenzahlen die Seiten der
Verwendung des jeweiligen Begriffs wieder.\par
\bigskip}
\end{lstcode}
\end{Example}
-Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass für die erste Seite des Index der
+Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass für die erste Seite des Index der
Seitenstil umgeschaltet wird. Welcher Seitenstil hierbei Verwendung findet,
ist im Makro \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.indexpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.indexpagestyle}).
-Für die Erstellung, Sortierung und Ausgabe des Stichwortverzeichnisses
-sind die üblichen Standard-\LaTeX-Pakete und Zusatzprogramme
-zuständig.%
+Für die Erstellung, Sortierung und Ausgabe des Stichwortverzeichnisses
+sind die üblichen Standard-\LaTeX-Pakete und Zusatzprogramme
+zuständig.%
\iftrue % Umbruchoptimierung
\iffree{}{ %
Besonders empfehlenswert ist beispielsweise das Paket
\Package{imakeidx}\IndexPackage{imakeidx} (siehe \cite{package:imakeidx}),
das unter anderem den Aufruf des Programms \File{makeindex} oder
- \File{xindy} automatisiert. Damit entfällt eine häufige Fehlerquelle
- insbesondere für \LaTeX-Anfänger.%
+ \File{xindy} automatisiert. Damit entfällt eine häufige Fehlerquelle
+ insbesondere für \LaTeX-Anfänger.%
}
Von {\KOMAScript} werden genau wie von den Standardklassen
- lediglich die grundlegenden Makros und Umgebungen dafür zur Verfügung
+ lediglich die grundlegenden Makros und Umgebungen dafür zur Verfügung
gestellt.%
\fi
%
@@ -4994,22 +5015,22 @@ zuständig.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex"
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Teildokumenten Klassenoption Tabellenunterschrift float
-% LocalWords: Satzspiegels Schrifteinstellung Abschnittseinträgen Nachspann
+% LocalWords: Satzspiegels Schrifteinstellung Abschnittseinträgen Nachspann
% LocalWords: Vakatseiten Kolumnentitel Sternformen Teiltabelle Seitenstil
-% LocalWords: Bildunterschriften Dokumentpräambel Tabellenüberschriften
-% LocalWords: Gleitumgebungstyp Kapitelüberschriften Standardklassen
-% LocalWords: serifenlosen Abschnittseinträge Gliederungsebenen Paketoption
+% LocalWords: Bildunterschriften Dokumentpräambel Tabellenüberschriften
+% LocalWords: Gleitumgebungstyp Kapitelüberschriften Standardklassen
+% LocalWords: serifenlosen Abschnittseinträge Gliederungsebenen Paketoption
% LocalWords: Nummerierungsstilen Seitenstilen Seitenankern Vakatseite
% LocalWords: Nummerierungsstil Eingangskommentar Nummerierungsstils
-% LocalWords: Standardanweisung Einstellmöglichkeiten Umbruchkorrekturtext
-% LocalWords: Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag Formatierungsänderungen Präfixzeile
+% LocalWords: Standardanweisung Einstellmöglichkeiten Umbruchkorrekturtext
+% LocalWords: Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag Formatierungsänderungen Präfixzeile
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex
index 0a39c2767b..ab623a7286 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrdatetime.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrdatetime.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrpage2 in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrpage2 in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrdatetime.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-05 09:57:42 +0100 (Mon, 05 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrdate, scrtime)]
\chapter{Der Wochentag mit \Package{scrdate}}
@@ -54,8 +54,8 @@
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrdate}
-Ursprünglich sollte das Paket \Package{scrdate} lediglich den Wochentag zum
-aktuellen Datum liefern. Inzwischen bietet es dies und etwas mehr für jedes
+Ursprünglich sollte das Paket \Package{scrdate} lediglich den Wochentag zum
+aktuellen Datum liefern. Inzwischen bietet es dies und etwas mehr für jedes
beliebige Datum im Gregorianischen Kalender.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ beliebige Datum im Gregorianischen Kalender.
\end{Declaration}%
Die\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} Anweisung \Macro{CenturyPart} ergibt
den Wert der Jahrhundert-Stellen eines Jahres. Die Anweisung
-\Macro{DecadePart} ergibt hingegen den Wert der übrigen Stellen, also der
+\Macro{DecadePart} ergibt hingegen den Wert der übrigen Stellen, also der
Einer und Zehner. Dabei darf die Jahreszahl beliebig viele Stellen aufweisen.
-Der Wert kann direkt zur Zuweisung an einen Zähler oder für Berechnungen mit
-Hilfe von \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr} verwendet werden. Für die
+Der Wert kann direkt zur Zuweisung an einen Zähler oder für Berechnungen mit
+Hilfe von \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr} verwendet werden. Für die
Ausgabe\textnote{Achtung!} als arabische Zahl ist \Macro{the}\IndexCmd{the}
voran zu stellen.
@@ -87,10 +87,10 @@ voran zu stellen.
\end{quote}
\end{Example}%
-Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass hier die Zählweise verwendet
+Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass hier die Zählweise verwendet
wird, bei der das Jahr 2000 das Jahr~0 -- also das erste Jahr -- des
-21.~Jahrhunderts ist. Bei Bedarf kann aber, wie im Beispiel für die
-Ordnungszahl gezeigt, mit \Macro{numexpr} eine Korrektur herbeigeführt
+21.~Jahrhunderts ist. Bei Bedarf kann aber, wie im Beispiel für die
+Ordnungszahl gezeigt, mit \Macro{numexpr} eine Korrektur herbeigeführt
werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -100,15 +100,15 @@ werden.%
\Macro{ISODayNumber}\Parameter{ISO-Datum}
\end{Declaration}%
Diese\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} beiden Anweisungen geben den Wert
-der Nummer des Wochentags\Index{Wochentag} zu einem Datum zurück. Sie
-unterscheiden sich nur in der Art der Angabe des Datums. Während bei
-\Macro{DayNumber} Jahr, Monat und Tag des gewünschten Datums eigene Parameter
+der Nummer des Wochentags\Index{Wochentag} zu einem Datum zurück. Sie
+unterscheiden sich nur in der Art der Angabe des Datums. Während bei
+\Macro{DayNumber} Jahr, Monat und Tag des gewünschten Datums eigene Parameter
sind, wird bei \Macro{ISODayNumber} das Datum in ISO-Schreibweise,
\PName{Jahr}\texttt{-}\PName{Monat}\texttt{-}\PName{Tag} angegeben. Dabei
spielt es keine Rolle, ob Monat und Tag ein- oder zweistellig angegeben
-werden. Der Wert kann direkt zur Zuweisung an einen Zähler oder für
+werden. Der Wert kann direkt zur Zuweisung an einen Zähler oder für
Berechnungen mit Hilfe von \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr} verwendet
-werden. Für die Ausgabe\textnote{Achtung!} als arabische Zahl ist
+werden. Für die Ausgabe\textnote{Achtung!} als arabische Zahl ist
\Macro{the}\IndexCmd{the} voran zu stellen.
\begin{Example}
@@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ werden. Für die Ausgabe\textnote{Achtung!} als arabische Zahl ist
\end{quote}
\end{Example}
-Als Besonderheit ist es sogar möglich, von einem vorgegebenen Datum eine
-gewünschte Anzahl an Tagen in die Zukunft oder Vergangenheit zu gehen.
+Als Besonderheit ist es sogar möglich, von einem vorgegebenen Datum eine
+gewünschte Anzahl an Tagen in die Zukunft oder Vergangenheit zu gehen.
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen die Nummer des Wochentags wissen, den wir in 12~Tagen haben und
den wir 24~Tage vor dem 24.~Dezember~2027 gehabt haben werden.
@@ -158,11 +158,11 @@ Samstag\,=\,6.%
\Macro{DayName}\Parameter{Jahr}\Parameter{Monat}\Parameter{Tag}
\Macro{ISODayName}\Parameter{ISO-Datum}
\end{Declaration}%
-Üblicherweise\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} ist man weniger an der
+Ãœblicherweise\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} ist man weniger an der
Nummer eines Wochentags als dem Namen des Wochentags interessiert. Daher
liefert die Anweisung \Macro{DayNameByNumber} den Namen des Wochentags zu
-einer Wochentagsnummer zurück, die man beispielsweise mit einer der beiden
-zuvor erklärten Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DayNumber} oder
+einer Wochentagsnummer zurück, die man beispielsweise mit einer der beiden
+zuvor erklärten Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DayNumber} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ISODayNumber} bestimmt hat. Die beiden Anweisungen
\Macro{DayName} und \Macro{ISODayName} liefern entsprechend den Wochentag zu
einem bestimmten Datum.
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ einem bestimmten Datum.
\end{quote}
\end{Example}
-Als Besonderheit ist es auch hier möglich, in gewissem Umfang Berechnungen
+Als Besonderheit ist es auch hier möglich, in gewissem Umfang Berechnungen
anzustellen:
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen den Wochentag wissen, den wir in 12~Tagen haben und
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ anzustellen:
In 12~Tagen haben wir einen
\DayName{\year}{\month}{\day+12} und
24~Tage vor dem 24.~Dezember~2027 ist ein
- \ISODayName{2027-12-24-24}, während zwei Wochen
+ \ISODayName{2027-12-24-24}, während zwei Wochen
und drei Tage nach einem Mittwoch ein
\DayNameByNumber{3+2*7+3} folgt.
\end{lstcode}
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ anzustellen:
In 12~Tagen haben wir einen
\DayName{\year}{\month}{\day+12} und
24~Tage vor dem 24.~Dezember~2027 ist ein
- \ISODayName{2027-12-24-24}, während
+ \ISODayName{2027-12-24-24}, während
zwei Wochen und drei Tage nach
einem Mittwoch ein \DayNameByNumber{3+2*7+3}
folgt.
@@ -216,20 +216,20 @@ anzustellen:
\Macro{todaysnumber}
\end{Declaration}%
In den bisherigen Beispielen dieses Abschnitts wurde das aktuelle Datum immer
-recht umständlich über die \TeX-Register \Macro{year}\IndexCmd{year},
+recht umständlich über die \TeX-Register \Macro{year}\IndexCmd{year},
\Macro{month}\IndexCmd{month}, \Macro{day}\IndexCmd{day} bestimmt. Die
Anweisungen \Macro{ISOToday}\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} und
\Macro{IsoToday} liefern direkt das aktuelle Datum in ISO-Schreibweise. Sie
unterscheiden sich lediglich darin, dass \Macro{ISOToday} Monat und Tag immer
-zweistellig ausgibt, während \Macro{IsoToday} Monat und Tag bei Werten kleiner
+zweistellig ausgibt, während \Macro{IsoToday} Monat und Tag bei Werten kleiner
10 einstellig ausgibt. Die Anweisung \Macro{todaysname} bietet direkt den
-aktuellen Wochentag, während \Macro{todaysnumber} den Wert des aktuellen
-Wochentags liefert. Näheres zur Verwendung dieses Wertes ist den obigen
-Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayNumber} und \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber} zu
+aktuellen Wochentag, während \Macro{todaysnumber} den Wert des aktuellen
+Wochentags liefert. Näheres zur Verwendung dieses Wertes ist den obigen
+Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayNumber} und \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber} zu
entnehmen.
\begin{Example}
- Ich will Ihnen zeigen, an was für einem Wochentag dieses Dokument gesetzt
+ Ich will Ihnen zeigen, an was für einem Wochentag dieses Dokument gesetzt
wurde. Dazu schreibe ich:
\begin{lstcode}
Dieses Dokument entstand an einem \todaysname.
@@ -241,18 +241,18 @@ entnehmen.
\end{Example}
\begin{Explain}
- Wenn\textnote{Tipp!} Sie den Namen des Tages in Kleinbuchstaben benötigen,
- weil das in der entsprechenden Sprache innerhalb des Satzes so üblich ist,
- können Sie das erreichen, obwohl die Namen der Wochentage in
- \Package{scrdate} alle groß geschrieben sind. Greifen Sie mit
+ Wenn\textnote{Tipp!} Sie den Namen des Tages in Kleinbuchstaben benötigen,
+ weil das in der entsprechenden Sprache innerhalb des Satzes so üblich ist,
+ können Sie das erreichen, obwohl die Namen der Wochentage in
+ \Package{scrdate} alle groß geschrieben sind. Greifen Sie mit
% Umbruchkorrektur: listings
\begin{lstcode}
\MakeLowercase{\todaysname}
\end{lstcode}
einfach auf die \LaTeX-Anweisung
\Macro{MakeLowercase}\IndexCmd{MakeLowercase}%
- \important{\Macro{MakeLowercase}} zurück. Diese wandelt ihr Argument
- komplett in Kleinbuchstaben. Natürlich funktioniert dieser Tipp auch für
+ \important{\Macro{MakeLowercase}} zurück. Diese wandelt ihr Argument
+ komplett in Kleinbuchstaben. Natürlich funktioniert dieser Tipp auch für
obige Anweisungen \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber}\IndexCmd{DayNameByNumber},
\DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayName}\IndexCmd{DayName} und
\DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISODayName}\IndexCmd{ISODayName}.%
@@ -264,11 +264,11 @@ entnehmen.
\Macro{nameday}\Parameter{Name}
\end{Declaration}%
So wie mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.date}\IndexCmd{date} die Ausgabe von
-\Macro{today} direkt geändert werden kann, setzt \Macro{nameday} die Ausgabe
+\Macro{today} direkt geändert werden kann, setzt \Macro{nameday} die Ausgabe
von \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.todaysname} auf den Wert \PName{Name}.
\begin{Example}
Sie setzen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.date} das aktuelle Datum auf einen
- festen Wert. Für die Ausgabe des zugehörigen Wochentags interessiert es nur,
+ festen Wert. Für die Ausgabe des zugehörigen Wochentags interessiert es nur,
dass dieser Tag ein Werktag war. Daher schreiben Sie
\begin{lstcode}
\nameday{Werktag}
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ von \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.todaysname} auf den Wert \PName{Name}.
Dieses Dokument entstand an einem {\todaysname}.
\end{quote}
\end{Example}
-Für \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISOToday}\IndexCmd{ISOToday} und
+Für \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISOToday}\IndexCmd{ISOToday} und
\DescRef{scrdate.cmd.IsoToday}\IndexCmd{IsoToday} existieren keine entsprechenden
Anweisungen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Anweisungen.%
\end{Declaration}
Das \Package{scrdate}-Paket beherrscht derzeit die folgenden Sprachen:
\begin{itemize}\raggedright\setlength{\itemsep}{.5\itemsep}
-\item Dänisch (\PValue{danish}),
+\item Dänisch (\PValue{danish}),
\item Deutsch (\PValue{austrian}\ChangedAt{v3.08b}{\Package{scrdate}},
\PValue{german}, \PValue{naustrian}, \PValue{ngerman}, \PValue{nswissgerman},
\PValue{swissgerman}\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Package{scrdate}}),
@@ -303,11 +303,11 @@ Das \Package{scrdate}-Paket beherrscht derzeit die folgenden Sprachen:
\PValue{newzealand}, \PValue{UKenglish}, \PValue{ukenglish},
\PValue{USenglish}, \PValue{usenglish}),
\item Finnisch (\PValue{finnish}),
-\item Französisch (\PValue{acadian}, \PValue{canadien},
+\item Französisch (\PValue{acadian}, \PValue{canadien},
\PValue{francais}\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Package{scrdate}}, \PValue{french}),
\item Italienisch (\PValue{italian}),
\item Kroatisch (\PValue{croatian}),
-\item Niederländisch (\PValue{dutch}),
+\item Niederländisch (\PValue{dutch}),
\item Norwegisch (\PValue{norsk}),
\item Polnisch (\PValue{polish}\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Package{scrdate}}),
\item Schwedisch (\PValue{swedish}),
@@ -315,25 +315,25 @@ Das \Package{scrdate}-Paket beherrscht derzeit die folgenden Sprachen:
\item Spanisch (\PValue{spanish}),
\item Tschechisch (\PValue{czech}\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Package{scrdate}}).
\end{itemize}
-Es kann aber auch für andere Sprachen konfiguriert werden. Dazu gibt man als
+Es kann aber auch für andere Sprachen konfiguriert werden. Dazu gibt man als
erstes Argument von \Macro{newdaylanguage} den Namen der Sprache an und als
weitere Parameter die Namen der entsprechenden Wochentage.
Bei der aktuellen Version ist es auch egal, ob \Package{scrdate} vor oder nach
\Package{ngerman}\IndexPackage{ngerman}, \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel}
-oder ähnlichen Paketen geladen wird, in jedem Falle wird die korrekte Sprache
-gewählt, vorausgesetzt diese wird unterstützt.
+oder ähnlichen Paketen geladen wird, in jedem Falle wird die korrekte Sprache
+gewählt, vorausgesetzt diese wird unterstützt.
\begin{Explain}
- Etwas genauer ausgedrückt: Solange die Sprachauswahl in einer zu
+ Etwas genauer ausgedrückt: Solange die Sprachauswahl in einer zu
\Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} kompatiblen Form erfolgt und die Sprache
- \Package{scrdate} bekannt ist, wird die Sprache korrekt gewählt. Ist dies
- nicht der Fall, werden (US-)englische Ausdrücke verwendet.
+ \Package{scrdate} bekannt ist, wird die Sprache korrekt gewählt. Ist dies
+ nicht der Fall, werden (US-)englische Ausdrücke verwendet.
\end{Explain}
-Natürlich ist es sinnvoll Definitionen für bisher nicht unterstützte Sprachen
+Natürlich ist es sinnvoll Definitionen für bisher nicht unterstützte Sprachen
an den \KOMAScript-Autor zu melden. In diesem Fall stehen die Chancen gut,
-dass künftige \KOMAScript-Versionen die Sprache ebenfalls unterstützen
+dass künftige \KOMAScript-Versionen die Sprache ebenfalls unterstützen
werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -346,9 +346,9 @@ werden.%
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrtime}
Mit Hilfe dieses Pakets kann die Frage nach der aktuellen Zeit beantwortet
-werden. Seit Version~3.05 unterstützt das Paket auch die von den
+werden. Seit Version~3.05 unterstützt das Paket auch die von den
\KOMAScript-Klassen und diversen anderen \KOMAScript-Paketen bekannten
-Möglichkeiten zur Angabe von Optionen. Siehe dazu beispielsweise
+Möglichkeiten zur Angabe von Optionen. Siehe dazu beispielsweise
\autoref{sec:typearea.options}.
\begin{Declaration}%
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Möglichkeiten zur Angabe von Optionen. Siehe dazu beispielsweise
\Macro{thistime} liefert die aktuelle Zeit\Index{Zeit} in Stunden und
Minuten. In der Ausgabe wird zwischen den Stunden und Minuten das optionale
Argument \PName{Trennung} gesetzt. Voreingestellt ist das Zeichen
-»\PValue{:}«.
+»\PValue{:}«.
\Macro{thistime*} funktioniert fast genau wie \Macro{thistime}. Der
einzige Unterschied besteht darin, dass im Gegensatz zu
@@ -379,18 +379,18 @@ erweitert wird.
Ihr Zug geht um 23:09 Uhr.
\end{quote}
\bigskip
- Demgegenüber liefert die Zeile
+ Demgegenüber liefert die Zeile
\begin{lstcode}
- Beim nächsten Ton ist es \thistime*[\ Uhr,\ ]
+ Beim nächsten Ton ist es \thistime*[\ Uhr,\ ]
Minuten und 42 Sekunden.
\end{lstcode}
- als mögliches Ergebnis etwas wie
+ als mögliches Ergebnis etwas wie
\begin{quote}
- Beim nächsten Ton ist es 8\ Uhr,\ 41 Minuten und 42 Sekunden.
+ Beim nächsten Ton ist es 8\ Uhr,\ 41 Minuten und 42 Sekunden.
\end{quote}
oder
\begin{quote}
- Beim nächsten Ton ist es 23\ Uhr,\ 9 Minuten und 42 Sekunden.
+ Beim nächsten Ton ist es 23\ Uhr,\ 9 Minuten und 42 Sekunden.
\end{quote}
\end{Example}
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ erweitert wird.
%\footnote{Allerdings darf man nicht erwarten, dass nun die Zeit
% stillsteht!}
. %
-Anschließend wird das optionale Argument von \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} bzw.
+Anschließend wird das optionale Argument von \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} bzw.
\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} ignoriert, da ja die komplette Zeichenkette, die
\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} bzw. \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} nun liefert, hiermit explizit
festgelegt wurde.%
@@ -415,10 +415,10 @@ festgelegt wurde.%
\OptionVName{12h}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}%
\BeginIndex{Option}{24h}%
-Mit der Option \Option{12h}\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrtime}} kann gewählt
+Mit der Option \Option{12h}\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrtime}} kann gewählt
werden, ob die Zeit bei \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} und \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} im 12-Stunden-
oder 24-Stunden-Format ausgegeben werden soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann
-dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
+dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet
werden. Wird die Option ohne Wert-Angabe verwendet, so wird der Wert
\PValue{true} angenommen, also auf das 12-Stunden-Format geschaltet.
@@ -434,14 +434,14 @@ Die Option kann wahlweise als Klassenoption bei
\DescRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoption} (siehe beispielsweise
\autoref{sec:typearea.options}, \DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions})
gesetzt werden. Sie verliert jedoch bei einem Aufruf von
-\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.settime} ihre Gültigkeit. Die Uhrzeit wird nach
+\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.settime} ihre Gültigkeit. Die Uhrzeit wird nach
Verwendung dieser Anweisung nur noch mit dem dort angegebenen Wert im dort
verwendeten Format ausgegeben.
-Rein\textnote{Achtung!} aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen
+Rein\textnote{Achtung!} aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen
von \Package{scrtime} wird bei \DescRef{typearea.cmd.documentclass} und
\DescRef{typearea.cmd.usepackage} auch noch die Option \Option{24h} zur
-Umschaltung auf das 24-Stunden-Format unterstützt. Deren Verwendung wird
+Umschaltung auf das 24-Stunden-Format unterstützt. Deren Verwendung wird
jedoch nicht mehr empfohlen.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -450,10 +450,10 @@ jedoch nicht mehr empfohlen.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "scrlayer-de.tex"
%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Gregorianischen Zählweise Ordnungszahl
+% LocalWords: Gregorianischen Zählweise Ordnungszahl
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex
index c124db974c..ae00fd978d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrextend.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrextend.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,55 +40,55 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Paket scrextend für Dokument-Autoren
+% Paket scrextend für Dokument-Autoren
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrextend.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-24 11:44:29 +0100 (Wed, 24 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script package scrextend]
-\chapter[tocentry={Grundlegende Fähigkeiten der
+\chapter[tocentry={Grundlegende Fähigkeiten der
\KOMAScript-Klassen\protect\linebreak
- mit Hilfe des Pakets \Package{scrextend} anderen Klassen erschließen},
- head={Fähigkeiten von \KOMAScript-Klassen mit \Package{scrextend}}]
-{Grundlegende Fähigkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen mit Hilfe des Pakets
- \Package{scrextend} anderen Klassen erschließen}
+ mit Hilfe des Pakets \Package{scrextend} anderen Klassen erschließen},
+ head={Fähigkeiten von \KOMAScript-Klassen mit \Package{scrextend}}]
+{Grundlegende Fähigkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen mit Hilfe des Pakets
+ \Package{scrextend} anderen Klassen erschließen}
\labelbase{scrextend}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrextend}%
-Es gibt einige Möglichkeiten, die allen \KOMAScript-Klassen gemeinsam
+Es gibt einige Möglichkeiten, die allen \KOMAScript-Klassen gemeinsam
sind. Dies betrifft in der Regel nicht nur die Klassen \Class{scrbook},
-\Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl}, die als Ersatz für die Standardklassen
-\Class{book}, \Class{report} und \Class{article} für Bücher, Berichte und
+\Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl}, die als Ersatz für die Standardklassen
+\Class{book}, \Class{report} und \Class{article} für Bücher, Berichte und
Artikel gedacht sind, sondern in weiten Teilen auch die \KOMAScript-Klasse
-\Class{scrlttr2}, die als Nachfolger von \Class{scrlettr} für Briefe gedacht
-ist. Diese grundlegenden Möglichkeiten, die in den genannten Klassen zu finden
+\Class{scrlttr2}, die als Nachfolger von \Class{scrlettr} für Briefe gedacht
+ist. Diese grundlegenden Möglichkeiten, die in den genannten Klassen zu finden
sind, werden von \KOMAScript{} ab Version~3.00 auch vom Paket
\Package{scrextend} bereitgestellt. Dieses Paket sollte
nicht\textnote{Achtung!} mit \KOMAScript-Klassen verwendet werden. Es ist
-ausschließlich zur Verwendung mit anderen Klassen gedacht. Der Versuch, das
+ausschließlich zur Verwendung mit anderen Klassen gedacht. Der Versuch, das
Paket mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse zu laden, wird von \Package{scrextend}
erkannt und mit einer Warnung abgelehnt.
Dass \hyperref[cha:scrlttr2]{\Package{scrletter}}\IndexPackage{scrletter}
nicht nur mit \KOMAScript-Klassen, sondern auch mit den Standardklassen
-verwendet werden kann, liegt übrigens teilweise an \Package{scrextend}. Stellt
-\hyperref[cha:scrlttr2]{\Package{scrletter}} nämlich fest, dass es nicht mit
-einer \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet wird, so lädt es automatisch
-\Package{scrextend}. Damit stehen dann alle unbedingt benötigten Möglichkeiten
-der \KOMAScript-Klassen zur Verfügung.
-
-Es gibt natürlich keine Garantie, dass \Package{scrextend} mit jeder
-beliebigen Klasse zusammenarbeitet. Es ist primär für die Erweiterung der
+verwendet werden kann, liegt übrigens teilweise an \Package{scrextend}. Stellt
+\hyperref[cha:scrlttr2]{\Package{scrletter}} nämlich fest, dass es nicht mit
+einer \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet wird, so lädt es automatisch
+\Package{scrextend}. Damit stehen dann alle unbedingt benötigten Möglichkeiten
+der \KOMAScript-Klassen zur Verfügung.
+
+Es gibt natürlich keine Garantie, dass \Package{scrextend} mit jeder
+beliebigen Klasse zusammenarbeitet. Es ist primär für die Erweiterung der
Standardklassen und davon abgeleiteten Klassen gedacht. In jedem Fall sollten
-Benutzer zunächst prüfen, ob die verwendete Klasse nicht selbst entsprechende
-Möglichkeiten bereitstellt.
+Benutzer zunächst prüfen, ob die verwendete Klasse nicht selbst entsprechende
+Möglichkeiten bereitstellt.
-Neben den in diesem Kapitel beschriebenen Möglichkeiten gibt es einige
-weitere, die jedoch hauptsächlich für Klassen- und Paketautoren gedacht
+Neben den in diesem Kapitel beschriebenen Möglichkeiten gibt es einige
+weitere, die jedoch hauptsächlich für Klassen- und Paketautoren gedacht
sind. Diese sind in \autoref{cha:scrbase}, ab \autopageref{cha:scrbase} zu
finden. Das dort dokumentierte Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrbase]{\Package{scrbase}}%
@@ -100,55 +100,55 @@ Auch das Paket \hyperref[cha:scrlfile]{\Package{scrlfile}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlfile]{\Package{scrlfile}}}\IndexPackage{scrlfile}
aus \autoref{cha:scrlfile} ab \autopageref{cha:scrlfile} wird von allen
\KOMAScript-Klassen und dem Paket \Package{scrextend} geladen. Daher stehen
-auch dessen Möglichkeiten bei Verwendung von \Package{scrextend} zur
-Verfügung.
+auch dessen Möglichkeiten bei Verwendung von \Package{scrextend} zur
+Verfügung.
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrekturtext
-Im Unterschied dazu wird das ebenfalls für Klassen- und Paketautoren gedachte
+Im Unterschied dazu wird das ebenfalls für Klassen- und Paketautoren gedachte
Paket \hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} (siehe
\autoref{cha:tocbasic} ab \autopageref{cha:tocbasic}) nur von den Klassen
\Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} geladen, so dass die
-dort definierten Möglichkeiten auch nur in diesen Klassen und nicht in
-\Package{scrextend} zu finden sind. Natürlich kann
+dort definierten Möglichkeiten auch nur in diesen Klassen und nicht in
+\Package{scrextend} zu finden sind. Natürlich kann
\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} aber auch zusammen mit
\Package{scrextend} verwendet werden.%
\fi
-\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl bei \KOMAScript}
+\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl bei \KOMAScript}
-\LoadCommonFile{compatibility}% \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
+\LoadCommonFile{compatibility}% \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
-\section{Optionale, erweiterte Möglichkeiten}
+\section{Optionale, erweiterte Möglichkeiten}
\seclabel{optionalFeatures}
-Das Paket \Package{scrextend} kennt optional verfügbare, erweiterte
-Möglichkeiten. Das sind Möglichkeiten, die in der Grundeinstellung nicht
-vorhanden sind, aber zusätzlich ausgewählt werden können. Diese
+Das Paket \Package{scrextend} kennt optional verfügbare, erweiterte
+Möglichkeiten. Das sind Möglichkeiten, die in der Grundeinstellung nicht
+vorhanden sind, aber zusätzlich ausgewählt werden können. Diese
sind beispielsweise deshalb optional, weil sie potentiell in Konflikt mit den
-Möglichkeiten der Standardklassen oder häufig benutzter Pakete stehen.
+Möglichkeiten der Standardklassen oder häufig benutzter Pakete stehen.
\begin{Declaration}
- \OptionVName{extendedfeature}{Möglichkeit}
+ \OptionVName{extendedfeature}{Möglichkeit}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit dieser Option kann eine optionale Möglichkeit von \Package{scrextend}
-ausgewählt werden. Diese Option steht nur während des Ladens von
-\Package{scrextend} zur Verfügung. Anwender geben diese Option daher als
+Mit dieser Option kann eine optionale Möglichkeit von \Package{scrextend}
+ausgewählt werden. Diese Option steht nur während des Ladens von
+\Package{scrextend} zur Verfügung. Anwender geben diese Option daher als
optionales Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}\PParameter{scrextend} an. %
\iffree{%
- Eine Übersicht über die verfügbaren optionalen Möglichkeiten bietet
+ Eine Übersicht über die verfügbaren optionalen Möglichkeiten bietet
\autoref{tab:scrextend.optionalFeatures}.
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Optional verfügbare, erweiterte Möglichkeiten
- von \Package{scrextend}}]{Übersicht über die optional verfügbaren,
- erweiterten Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrextend}}
+ \caption[{Optional verfügbare, erweiterte Möglichkeiten
+ von \Package{scrextend}}]{Übersicht über die optional verfügbaren,
+ erweiterten Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrextend}}
\label{tab:scrextend.optionalFeatures}
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PName{title}}{%
- die Titelseiten werden auf die Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen
- erweitert; dies betrifft neben den Anweisungen für die Titelseiten
+ die Titelseiten werden auf die Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen
+ erweitert; dies betrifft neben den Anweisungen für die Titelseiten
auch die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.titlepage} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrextend.titlepage}, ab
\autopageref{sec:scrextend.titlepage})%
@@ -157,10 +157,10 @@ optionales Argument von
\end{table}%
}{%
\par%
- Die derzeit einzige optionale Möglichkeit ist
+ Die derzeit einzige optionale Möglichkeit ist
\PValue{title}\IndexOption[indexmain]{extendedfeature~=\textKValue{title}}%
\important{\OptionValue{extendedfeature}{title}}.
- Damit werden die Titelseiten auf die Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen
+ Damit werden die Titelseiten auf die Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen
erweitert, wie sie in \autoref{sec:scrextend.titlepage} ab
\autopageref{sec:scrextend.titlepage} beschrieben sind.%
}%
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ optionales Argument von
\LoadCommonFile{draftmode}% \section{Entwurfsmodus}
-\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
+\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Textauszeichnungen}
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ optionales Argument von
Eine der allgemeinen Eigenschaften eines Dokuments ist der
Seitenstil\Index[indexmain]{Seiten>Stil}. Bei {\LaTeX} versteht man unter dem
-Seitenstil in erster Linie den Inhalt der Kopf- und Fußzeilen. Das Paket
+Seitenstil in erster Linie den Inhalt der Kopf- und Fußzeilen. Das Paket
\Package{scrextend} definiert selbst keine Seitenstile, nutzt aber
Seitenstile des \LaTeX-Kerns.
@@ -195,23 +195,23 @@ Seitenstile des \LaTeX-Kerns.
\BeginIndex{}{Titel>Seitenstil}%
Auf einigen Seiten wird mit Hilfe von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}\IndexCmd{thispagestyle} automatisch ein
-anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Bei \Package{scrextend} betrifft dies bisher nur
+anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Bei \Package{scrextend} betrifft dies bisher nur
die Titelseiten und auch dies nur, wenn mit
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{extendedfeature}{title} gearbeitet wird (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures},
\DescPageRef{scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). Welcher Seitenstil in diesem
-Fall für einen
+Fall für einen
Titelkopf\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{titlepage}{false}}%
\IndexOption{titlepage~=\textKValue{false}}\Index{Titel>Kopf} verwendet wird,
ist im Makro \Macro{titlepagestyle} festgelegt. In der Voreinstellung ist das
der Seitenstil \DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}. Dieser
Seitenstil wird bereits im \LaTeX-Kern vordefiniert und sollte daher immer
-verfügbar sein.%
+verfügbar sein.%
\EndIndexGroup
\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Vakatseiten}
-\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten}
+\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten}
\LoadCommonFile{dictum}% \section{Schlauer Spruch}
@@ -225,6 +225,6 @@ verfügbar sein.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "guide.tex"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex
index 9d9b3faed2..38f281f3b6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrhack.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrhack.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrhack in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrhack in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrhack.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-05 10:50:56 +0100 (Mon, 05 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrhack)]
\chapter{Fremdpakete verbessern mit \Package{scrhack}}
@@ -54,26 +54,26 @@
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrhack}
-Einige Pakete außerhalb von \KOMAScript{} arbeiten nicht sehr gut mit
-\KOMAScript{} zusammen. Für den \KOMAScript-Autor ist es dabei oftmals sehr
-mühsam, die Autoren der jeweiligen Pakete von einer Verbesserung zu
-überzeugen. Das betrifft auch Pakete, deren Entwicklung eingestellt
-wurde. Deshalb wurde das Paket \Package{scrhack} begonnen. Dieses Paket ändert
+Einige Pakete außerhalb von \KOMAScript{} arbeiten nicht sehr gut mit
+\KOMAScript{} zusammen. Für den \KOMAScript-Autor ist es dabei oftmals sehr
+mühsam, die Autoren der jeweiligen Pakete von einer Verbesserung zu
+überzeugen. Das betrifft auch Pakete, deren Entwicklung eingestellt
+wurde. Deshalb wurde das Paket \Package{scrhack} begonnen. Dieses Paket ändert
Anweisungen und Definitionen anderer Pakete, damit sie besser mit
-\KOMAScript{} zusammenarbeiten. Einige Änderungen sind auch bei
-Verwendung anderer Klassen nützlich.
+\KOMAScript{} zusammenarbeiten. Einige Änderungen sind auch bei
+Verwendung anderer Klassen nützlich.
\section{Entwicklungsstand}
\seclabel{draft}
-Obwohl das Paket bereits seit längerer Zeit Teil von \KOMAScript{} ist und
+Obwohl das Paket bereits seit längerer Zeit Teil von \KOMAScript{} ist und
von vielen Anwendern genutzt wird, hat es auch ein Problem: Bei
der Umdefinierung von Makros fremder Pakete ist es von der genauen Definition
-und Verwendung dieser Makros abhängig. Damit ist es gleichzeitig auch von
-bestimmten Versionen dieser Pakete abhängig. Wird eine unbekannte Version
+und Verwendung dieser Makros abhängig. Damit ist es gleichzeitig auch von
+bestimmten Versionen dieser Pakete abhängig. Wird eine unbekannte Version
eines der entsprechenden Pakete verwendet, kann \Package{scrhack} den
-notwendigen Patch eventuell nicht ausführen. Im Extremfall kann aber umgekehrt
-der Patch einer unbekannten Version auch zu einem Fehler führen.
+notwendigen Patch eventuell nicht ausführen. Im Extremfall kann aber umgekehrt
+der Patch einer unbekannten Version auch zu einem Fehler führen.
Da also \Package{scrhack} immer wieder an neue Versionen fremder Pakete
angepasst werden muss, kann es niemals als fertig angesehen werden. Daher
@@ -86,42 +86,42 @@ nicht dauerhaft garantiert werden.
\section{Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic}}
\seclabel{improvement}
-In den Anfängen von \KOMAScript{} gab es von Anwenderseite den Wunsch, dass
+In den Anfängen von \KOMAScript{} gab es von Anwenderseite den Wunsch, dass
Verzeichnisse von Gleitumgebungen, die mit dem Paket
\Package{float}\IndexPackage{float}\important{\Package{float}} erzeugt werden,
genauso behandelt werden wie das Abbildungsverzeichnis oder das
Tabellenverzeichnis, das von den \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst angelegt
wird. Damals setzte sich der \KOMAScript-Autor mit dem Autor von
-\Package{float} in Verbindung, um diesem eine Schnittstelle für entsprechende
+\Package{float} in Verbindung, um diesem eine Schnittstelle für entsprechende
Erweiterungen zu unterbreiten. In etwas abgewandelter Form wurde diese in
Gestalt der beiden Anweisungen
\Macro{float@listhead}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{float@listhead} und
\Macro{float@addtolists}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{float@addtolists} realisiert.
-Später zeigte sich, dass diese beiden Anweisungen nicht genug Flexibilität für
-eine umfangreiche Unterstützung aller \KOMAScript-Möglichkeiten boten. Leider
+Später zeigte sich, dass diese beiden Anweisungen nicht genug Flexibilität für
+eine umfangreiche Unterstützung aller \KOMAScript-Möglichkeiten boten. Leider
hatte der Autor von \Package{float} die Entwicklung aber bereits eingestellt,
-so dass hier keine Änderungen mehr zu erwarten sind.
+so dass hier keine Änderungen mehr zu erwarten sind.
-Andere Paketautoren haben die beiden Anweisungen ebenfalls übernommen. Dabei
+Andere Paketautoren haben die beiden Anweisungen ebenfalls übernommen. Dabei
zeigte sich, dass die Implementierung in einigen Paketen, darunter auch
-\Package{float}, dazu führt, dass all diese Pakete nur in einer bestimmten
-Reihenfolge geladen werden können, obwohl sie ansonsten in keinerlei Beziehung
+\Package{float}, dazu führt, dass all diese Pakete nur in einer bestimmten
+Reihenfolge geladen werden können, obwohl sie ansonsten in keinerlei Beziehung
zueinander stehen.
-Um all diese Nachteile und Probleme zu beseitigen, unterstützt \KOMAScript{}
+Um all diese Nachteile und Probleme zu beseitigen, unterstützt \KOMAScript{}
diese alte Schnittstelle offiziell nicht mehr. Stattdessen wird bei Verwendung
dieser Schnittstelle von \KOMAScript{} gewarnt. Gleichzeitig wurde in
\KOMAScript{} das Paket
\Package{tocbasic}\IndexPackage{tocbasic}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} (siehe
-\autoref{cha:tocbasic}) als zentrale Schnittstelle für die Verwaltung von
+\autoref{cha:tocbasic}) als zentrale Schnittstelle für die Verwaltung von
Verzeichnissen entworfen und realisiert. Die Verwendung dieses Pakets bietet
-weit mehr Vorteile und Möglichkeiten als die beiden alten Anweisungen.
+weit mehr Vorteile und Möglichkeiten als die beiden alten Anweisungen.
Obwohl der Aufwand zur Verwendung dieses Pakets sehr gering ist, haben bisher
die Autoren der Pakete, die auf die beiden alten Anweisungen gesetzt haben,
-keine Anpassung vorgenommen. Daher enthält \Package{scrhack} selbst
-entsprechende Anpassungen für die Pakete
+keine Anpassung vorgenommen. Daher enthält \Package{scrhack} selbst
+entsprechende Anpassungen für die Pakete
\Package{float}\IndexPackage{float}\important{\Package{float},
\Package{floatrow}, \Package{listings}},
\Package{floatrow}\IndexPackage{floatrow} und
@@ -130,44 +130,44 @@ entsprechende Anpassungen für die Pakete
von Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}},
sondern beachten auch Sprachumschaltungen durch das
-\Package{babel}-Paket\IndexPackage{babel}. Näheres zu den Möglichkeiten, die
-durch die Umstellung der Pakete auf \Package{tocbasic} nun zur Verfügung
+\Package{babel}-Paket\IndexPackage{babel}. Näheres zu den Möglichkeiten, die
+durch die Umstellung der Pakete auf \Package{tocbasic} nun zur Verfügung
stehen, ist \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc} zu entnehmen.
-Sollte diese Änderung für eines der Pakete nicht erwünscht sein oder zu
-Problemen führen, so kann sie selektiv mit den Einstellungen
+Sollte diese Änderung für eines der Pakete nicht erwünscht sein oder zu
+Problemen führen, so kann sie selektiv mit den Einstellungen
\OptionValue{float}{false}\IndexOption[indexmain]{float~=\textKValue{false}},
\OptionValue{floatrow}{false}\IndexOption[indexmain]{floatrow~=\textKValue{false}}
und
\OptionValue{listings}{false}\IndexOption[indexmain]{listings~=\textKValue{false}}
-abgeschaltet werden. Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} dabei ist, dass eine Änderung
-der Optionen nach dem Laden des zugehörigen Pakets keinen Einfluss mehr hat!
+abgeschaltet werden. Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} dabei ist, dass eine Änderung
+der Optionen nach dem Laden des zugehörigen Pakets keinen Einfluss mehr hat!
\section{Falsche Erwartungen an \Macro{@ptsize}}
\seclabel{ptsize}
-Einige Pakete gehen grundsätzlich davon aus, dass das klasseninterne Makro
+Einige Pakete gehen grundsätzlich davon aus, dass das klasseninterne Makro
\Macro{@ptsize}\IndexCmd{@ptsize} sowohl definiert ist als auch zu einer
-ganzen Zahl expandiert. Aus Kompatibilitätsgründen definiert \KOMAScript{}
-\Macro{@ptsize} auch bei anderen Grundschriftgrößen als 10\Unit{pt},
-11\Unit{pt} oder 12\Unit{pt}. Da \KOMAScript{} außerdem auch gebrochene
-Schriftgrößen erlaubt, kann dabei \Macro{@ptsize} natürlich auch zu einem
+ganzen Zahl expandiert. Aus Kompatibilitätsgründen definiert \KOMAScript{}
+\Macro{@ptsize} auch bei anderen Grundschriftgrößen als 10\Unit{pt},
+11\Unit{pt} oder 12\Unit{pt}. Da \KOMAScript{} außerdem auch gebrochene
+Schriftgrößen erlaubt, kann dabei \Macro{@ptsize} natürlich auch zu einem
Dezimalbruch expandieren.
Eines\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{scrhack}} der Pakete, die damit nicht zurecht
kommen, ist das Paket \Package{setspace}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{setspace}%
-\important{\Package{setspace}}. Darüber hinaus sind die von diesem Paket
-eingestellten Werte immer von der Grundschriftgröße abhängig, auch wenn die
-Einstellung im Kontext einer anderen Schriftgröße erfolgt. Paket
-\Package{scrhack} löst beide Probleme, indem es die Einstellungen von
+\important{\Package{setspace}}. Darüber hinaus sind die von diesem Paket
+eingestellten Werte immer von der Grundschriftgröße abhängig, auch wenn die
+Einstellung im Kontext einer anderen Schriftgröße erfolgt. Paket
+\Package{scrhack} löst beide Probleme, indem es die Einstellungen von
\Macro{onehalfspacing} und \Macro{doublespacing} immer relativ zur aktuellen,
-tatsächlichen Schriftgröße vornimmt.
+tatsächlichen Schriftgröße vornimmt.
-Sollte diese Änderung nicht erwünscht sein oder zu Problemen führen, so kann
+Sollte diese Änderung nicht erwünscht sein oder zu Problemen führen, so kann
sie selektiv mit der Einstellung
\OptionValue{setspace}{false}\IndexOption[indexmain]{setspace~=\textKValue{false}}
-abgeschaltet werden. Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} dabei ist, dass eine Änderung
+abgeschaltet werden. Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} dabei ist, dass eine Änderung
der Option nach dem Laden von \Package{setspace} keinen Einfluss mehr hat!
Ebenso muss \Package{scrhack} vor \Package{setspace} geladen werden, falls
\Package{setspace} mit einer der Optionen \Option{onehalfspacing} oder
@@ -178,16 +178,16 @@ auswirken soll.
\section{Sonderfall \Package{hyperref}}
\seclabel{hyperref}
-Ältere Versionen von
+Ältere Versionen von
\Package{hyperref}\IndexPackage{hyperref}\important{\Package{hyperref}} vor
6.79h haben bei den Sternformen der Gliederungsbefehle hinter statt vor oder
-auf die Gliederungsüberschriften verlinkt. Inzwischen ist dieses Problem auf
-Vorschlag des \KOMAScript-Autors beseitigt. Da die entsprechende Änderung aber
-über ein Jahr auf sich warten ließ, wurde in \Package{scrhack} ein
+auf die Gliederungsüberschriften verlinkt. Inzwischen ist dieses Problem auf
+Vorschlag des \KOMAScript-Autors beseitigt. Da die entsprechende Änderung aber
+über ein Jahr auf sich warten ließ, wurde in \Package{scrhack} ein
entsprechender Patch aufgenommen. Zwar kann dieser ebenfalls durch
\OptionValue{hyperref}{false} deaktiviert werden, empfohlen wird jedoch
stattdessen die aktuelle Version von \Package{hyperref} zu verwenden. In
-diesem Fall wird die Änderung durch \Package{scrhack} automatisch verhindert.
+diesem Fall wird die Änderung durch \Package{scrhack} automatisch verhindert.
\section{Inkonsistente Behandlung von \Length{textwidth} und \Length{textheight}}
@@ -197,31 +197,31 @@ Das\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrhack}} Paket
\Package{lscape}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{lscape}%
\important{\Package{lscape}} definiert eine Umgebung
\Environment{landscape}\IndexEnv{landscape}, um den Inhalt einer Seite aber
-nicht deren Kopf und Fuß quer zu setzen. Innerhalb dieser Umgebung wird
+nicht deren Kopf und Fuß quer zu setzen. Innerhalb dieser Umgebung wird
\Length{textheight}\IndexLength{textheight} auf den Wert von
\Length{textwidth} gesetzt. Umgekehrt wird jedoch \Length{textwidth} nicht auf
den vorherigen Wert von \Length{textheight} gesetzt. Das ist
inkonsistent. Meines Wissens wird \Length{textwidth} nicht entsprechend
-geändert, weil andere Pakete oder Anwenderanweisungen gestört werden
-könnten. Jedoch hat auch die Änderung von \Length{textwidth} dieses Potential
-und in der Tat beschädigt sie die Funktion beispielsweise der Pakete
+geändert, weil andere Pakete oder Anwenderanweisungen gestört werden
+könnten. Jedoch hat auch die Änderung von \Length{textwidth} dieses Potential
+und in der Tat beschädigt sie die Funktion beispielsweise der Pakete
\Package{showframe}\IndexPackage{showframe} und
-\Package{scrlayer}\IndexPackage{scrlayer}. Daher wäre es am besten, wenn
-\Length{textheight} ebenfalls unverändert bliebe. \Package{scrhack} verwendet
+\Package{scrlayer}\IndexPackage{scrlayer}. Daher wäre es am besten, wenn
+\Length{textheight} ebenfalls unverändert bliebe. \Package{scrhack} verwendet
Paket \Package{xpatch} (siehe \cite{package:xpatch}), um die Startanweisung
-\Macro{landscape} der gleichnamigen Umgebung entsprechend zu ändern.
+\Macro{landscape} der gleichnamigen Umgebung entsprechend zu ändern.
-Falls diese Änderung nicht gewünscht wird oder Probleme verursacht, kann sie
+Falls diese Änderung nicht gewünscht wird oder Probleme verursacht, kann sie
mit Option
\OptionValue{lscape}{false}\IndexOption[indexmain]{lscape~=\textKValue{false}}
deaktiviert werden. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass eine
-nachträgliche Zuweisung an Option \Option{lscape} mit
+nachträgliche Zuweisung an Option \Option{lscape} mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}\IndexCmd{KOMAoption} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions} nur eine Wirkung
-hat, wenn sie während des Ladens von \Package{lscape} nicht \PValue{false}
+hat, wenn sie während des Ladens von \Package{lscape} nicht \PValue{false}
war.
-Im übrigens wird \Package{lscape} auch von dem Paket
+Im übrigens wird \Package{lscape} auch von dem Paket
\Package{pdflscape}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{pdflscape}%
\important{\Package{pdflscape}} verwendet, so dass \Package{scrhack} sich auch
auf die Funktion dieses Pakets auswirkt.%
@@ -230,56 +230,96 @@ auf die Funktion dieses Pakets auswirkt.%
\section{Sonderfall \Package{nomencl}}
\seclabel{nomencl}
-Eine\ChangedAt{v3.23}{\Package{scrhack}} Besonderheit stellt der Hack für das
+Eine\ChangedAt{v3.23}{\Package{scrhack}} Besonderheit stellt der Hack für das
Paket
\Package{nomencl}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{nomencl}\important{\Package{nomencl}}
-dar. Dieser rüstet einerseits nach, dass der optionale
-Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag für die Nomenklatur Option
+dar. Dieser rüstet einerseits nach, dass der optionale
+Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag für die Nomenklatur Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{indentunnumbered} beachtet. Quasi nebenbei
-werden über das Paket \Package{tocbasic} auch gleich die Endungen \File{nlo}
-und \File{nls} für den Besitzer \PValue{nomencl} reserviert (siehe
+werden über das Paket \Package{tocbasic} auch gleich die Endungen \File{nlo}
+und \File{nls} für den Besitzer \PValue{nomencl} reserviert (siehe
\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist}, \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics},
\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist}).
-Außerdem wird die Umgebung
-\Environment{thenomenclature}\IndexEnv{thenomenclature} so geändert,
-dass \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead}\IndexCmd{tocbasic@listhead} für
-die Überschrift verwendet wird (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals},
-\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead}). Dadurch können mit dem Hack
-diverse Attribute für die Endung \File{nls} über
+Außerdem wird die Umgebung
+\Environment{thenomenclature}\IndexEnv{thenomenclature} so geändert,
+dass \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead}\IndexCmd{tocbasic@listhead} für
+die Ãœberschrift verwendet wird (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals},
+\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead}). Dadurch können mit dem Hack
+diverse Attribute für die Endung \File{nls} über
\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}\IndexCmd{setuptoc}%
\important{\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}} gesetzt werden. So ist es
-beispielsweise möglich, mit
+beispielsweise möglich, mit
\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}\PParameter{nls}\PParameter{numbered} die
Nomenklatur nicht nur ins Inhaltsverzeichnis einzutragen sondern auch gleich
-zu nummerieren. Näheres zu \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} und den damit
-möglichen Einstellungen ist in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, ab
+zu nummerieren. Näheres zu \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} und den damit
+möglichen Einstellungen ist in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, ab
\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} zu finden. Als kleiner aber wichtiger
-Nebeneffekt erhält die Nomenklatur mit diesem Patch außerdem einen passenden
+Nebeneffekt erhält die Nomenklatur mit diesem Patch außerdem einen passenden
Kolumnentitel, falls lebende Kolumnentitel beispielsweise durch Verwendung von
Seitenstil \DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.headings} aktiviert wurden.
-Dieser eher simple Patch ist damit ein Beispiel dafür, wie auch Pakete, die
+Dieser eher simple Patch ist damit ein Beispiel dafür, wie auch Pakete, die
keine Gleitumgebungen definieren, Nutzen aus der Verwendung von
-\Package{tocbasic} ziehen könnten. Falls diese Änderung jedoch nicht
-gewünscht wird oder Probleme verursacht, kann sie mit Option
+\Package{tocbasic} ziehen könnten. Falls diese Änderung jedoch nicht
+gewünscht wird oder Probleme verursacht, kann sie mit Option
\OptionValue{nomencl}{false}\IndexOption[indexmain]{nomencl~=\textKValue{false}}
deaktiviert werden. Entscheidend\textnote{Achtung!} ist dabei die Einstellung
-der Option zum Zeitpunkt, zu dem \Package{nomencl} geladen wird! Spätere
-Änderungen der Option mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} haben also keinen Einfluss und führen zu
+der Option zum Zeitpunkt, zu dem \Package{nomencl} geladen wird! Spätere
+Änderungen der Option mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} oder
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} haben also keinen Einfluss und führen zu
einer entsprechenen Warnung.%
-\EndIndexGroup
+\section{Sonderfall Ãœberschriften}
+\seclabel{sections}
+
+Diverse\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrhack}} Pakete gehen davon aus, dass
+Ãœberschriften auf eine ganz bestimmte Weise definiert sind, die weitgehend den
+Definitionen der Standardklassen entsprechen. Dies ist jedoch nicht bei allen
+Klassen der Fall. Beispielsweise sind bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen die
+Überschriften komplett anders definiert, um viele zusätzliche Möglichkeiten zu
+bieten. Das kann einige wenige Pakete aus dem Tritt bringen. Ab Version~3.27
+bietet \Package{scrhack} daher die Möglichkeit, zwangsweise die
+Ãœberschriftenbefehle \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection},
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}\IndexCmd{paragraph} und
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}\IndexCmd{subparagraph} kompatibel zu den
+Standardklassen zu definieren. Dabei werden im Fall, dass
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} definiert ist, die Definitionen von \Class{book}
+zugrunde gelegt. Ist \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} nicht definiert, so werden
+die Definitionen von \Class{article} herangezogen.
+
+Bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse werden als Seiteneffekt zusätzlich
+diverse Möglichkeiten dieser Klassen deaktviert. Beispielsweise stehen dann
+die Befehle zur Neudefinition oder Änderung der Gliederungsbefehle aus
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.sections} oder Option
+\DescRef{maincls.option.headings} nicht mehr zur Verfügung und Befehle wie
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.partformat} erhalten eine neue Voreinstellung.
+
+Da dieser Hack häufig mehr Schaden als Nutzen bringt, erzeugt er eine größere
+Anzahl an Warnungen. Außerdem ist er nicht bereits durch das Laden von Paket
+\Package{scrhack} aktiv, sondern muss beim Laden des Pakets mit Option
+\Option{standardsections}\IndexOption[indexmain]{standardsections} explizit
+aktiviert werden. Eine nachträgliche Aktivierung oder Deaktivierung ist nicht
+möglich.
+
+Da es für die eingangs erwähnten Probleme oft weniger invasive Lösungen gibt,
+wird die Verwendung des Hacks ausdrücklich nicht empfohlen, sondern lediglich
+als letzte Rettungschance für Notfälle angeboten.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Eindateiensystem Schreibdatei Zieldatei Zielendung Quellendung
-% LocalWords: Verzeichnisüberschrift Dateiendung Zielendungen Verzeichnisdatei
-% LocalWords: Benutzeranweisungen Dokumentpräambel Kapitelebene Sternformen
-% LocalWords: Sprachumschaltungen Gliederungsüberschriften Gliederungsbefehle
+% LocalWords: Verzeichnisüberschrift Dateiendung Zielendungen Verzeichnisdatei
+% LocalWords: Benutzeranweisungen Dokumentpräambel Kapitelebene Sternformen
+% LocalWords: Sprachumschaltungen Gliederungsüberschriften Gliederungsbefehle
% LocalWords: Paketautoren
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex
index 05503a86fe..d9727ff1f5 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrjura.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrjura.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -46,44 +46,49 @@
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrjura.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-07-20 09:52:01 +0200 (Fri, 20 Jul 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrjura)]
-\chapter{Unterstützung für die Anwaltspraxis durch \Package{scrjura}}
+\chapter{Unterstützung für die Anwaltspraxis durch \Package{scrjura}}
\labelbase{scrjura}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrjura}
-Will man einen Vertrag\Index{Vertraege=Verträge}, die Satzung einer
+Will man einen Vertrag\Index{Vertraege=Verträge}, die Satzung einer
Gesellschaft oder eines Vereins, ein Gesetz oder gleich einen
-Gesetzeskommentar schreiben, so übernimmt das Paket \Package{scrjura} den
-typografischen Teil der Unterstützung für diese Tätigkeit. Obwohl
-\Package{scrjura} als allgemeine Hilfe für anwaltliche Schriftstücke angedacht
+Gesetzeskommentar schreiben, so übernimmt das Paket \Package{scrjura} den
+typografischen Teil der Unterstützung für diese Tätigkeit. Obwohl
+\Package{scrjura} als allgemeine Hilfe für anwaltliche Schriftstücke angedacht
ist, hat sich gezeigt, dass der Vertrag dabei ein ganz zentrales Element
ist. Besonderes Augenmerk gilt hier dem
Paragraphen\Index{Paragraphen>juristische} mit Nummer, Titel, nummerierten
-Absätzen -- falls es mehrere davon in einem Paragraphen gibt --, bedarfsweise
-nummerierten Sätzen, Einträgen in das Inhaltsverzeichnis und Querverweisen in
+Absätzen -- falls es mehrere davon in einem Paragraphen gibt --, bedarfsweise
+nummerierten Sätzen, Einträgen in das Inhaltsverzeichnis und Querverweisen in
den deutschen Gepflogenheiten entsprechenden Formen.
Das Paket ist in Zusammenarbeit mit Rechtsanwalt Dr.\,Alexander Willand,
-Karlsruhe, entstanden. Viele der Möglichkeiten gehen außerdem auf konstruktive
-Nachfragen von Prof.\,Heiner Richter von der Hochschule Stalsund zurück.
+Karlsruhe, entstanden. Viele der Möglichkeiten gehen außerdem auf konstruktive
+Nachfragen von Prof.\,Heiner Richter von der Hochschule Stalsund zurück.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass das Paket mit
\Package{hyperref}\IndexPackage{hyperref} zusammenarbeitet. Es ist dabei
-jedoch wichtig, dass \Package{hyperref} wie üblich nach \Package{scrjura}
+jedoch wichtig, dass \Package{hyperref} wie üblich nach \Package{scrjura}
geladen wird!
-\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Textauszeichnungen}
\section{Verzeichnisse}
\label{sec:scrjura.toc}
-Die Überschriften juristischer Paragraphen können auf Wunsch auch automatisch
-ins Inhaltsverzeichnis eingetragen werden.
+Die Überschriften juristischer Paragraphen können auf Wunsch auch automatisch
+ins Inhaltsverzeichnis eingetragen
+werden. Dazu\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrjura}} definiert das Paket mit Hilfe
+von \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry} (siehe
+\autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab
+\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry})\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
+die Verzeichnisebene \PValue{cpar}.
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{juratotoc}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
@@ -91,27 +96,33 @@ ins Inhaltsverzeichnis eingetragen werden.
\end{Declaration}
Im Inhaltsverzeichnis angezeigt werden
Paragraphen\Index{Paragraphen>juristische} nur, wenn ihre \PName{Ebenennummer}
-kleiner oder gleich dem Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}%
+kleiner oder gleich dem Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} ist
(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc},
\DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}). Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung}
-ist für \PName{Ebenennummer} der Wert 10000, der auch verwendet wird, wenn die
-Option über einen
+ist für \PName{Ebenennummer} der Wert \Length{maxdimen}, der auch verwendet
+wird, wenn die Option über einen
\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{false}} (siehe
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch})
-ausgeschaltet wird. Da der Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}
-üblicherweise einen kleinen, einstelligen Wert besitzt, werden die
-Paragraphen-Einträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis daher normalerweise nicht
+ausgeschaltet wird. Da der Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}
+üblicherweise einen kleinen, einstelligen Wert besitzt, werden die
+Paragraphen-Einträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis daher normalerweise nicht
angezeigt.
-Wird die Option hingegen über einen
+Wird die Option hingegen über einen
\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{true}} eingeschaltet,
so wird als \PName{Ebenennummer} 2 voreingestellt. Damit werden sie in
Inhaltsverzeichnissen bei allen \KOMAScript-Klassen auf derselben Ebene wie
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}} eingeordnet. In der
Voreinstellung von \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} werden sie dann auch bei
-allen \KOMAScript-Klassen im Inhaltsverzeichnis angezeigt.%
+allen \KOMAScript-Klassen im Inhaltsverzeichnis angezeigt.
+
+Intern\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrjura}} führt die Verwendung der Option zu
+einem erneuten Aufruf von
+\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
+mit dem \PName{Stil} \PValue{default} und entsprechender Einstellung für
+\Option{level} in der \PName{Optionenlist}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -119,41 +130,47 @@ allen \KOMAScript-Klassen im Inhaltsverzeichnis angezeigt.%
\OptionVName{juratocindent}{Einzug}
\OptionVName{juratocnumberwidth}{Nummernbreite}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit diesen beiden Optionen kann für die Einträge der Paragraphen ins
-Inhaltsverzeichnis sowohl der Einzug als auch die Breite, die für Nummern
+Mit diesen beiden Optionen kann für die Einträge der Paragraphen ins
+Inhaltsverzeichnis sowohl der Einzug als auch die Breite, die für Nummern
reserviert wird, festgelegt werden. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung}
-sind dieselben Werte wie für
-\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}-Einträge\IndexCmd{subsection}%
+sind dieselben Werte wie für
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}-Einträge\IndexCmd{subsection}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}} bei \Class{scrartcl}.
-%
+
+Intern\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{scrjura}} führt die Verwendung der Optionen
+zu erneuten Aufrufen von
+\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} mit
+dem \PName{Stil} \PValue{default} und \OptionVName{indent}{Einzug}
+beziehungsweise \OptionVName{numwidth}{Nummernbreite} in der
+\PName{Optionenlist}.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Umgebung für Verträge}
+\section{Umgebung für Verträge}
\label{sec:scrjura.contract}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Vertraege=Verträge}
-Die wesentlichen Mechanismen von \Package{scrjura} stehen ausschließlich
-innerhalb von Verträgen der zugehörigen Umgebung zur Verfügung.
+\BeginIndex{}{Vertraege=Verträge}
+Die wesentlichen Mechanismen von \Package{scrjura} stehen ausschließlich
+innerhalb von Verträgen der zugehörigen Umgebung zur Verfügung.
\begin{Declaration}
\begin{Environment}{contract}\end{Environment}
\end{Declaration}
-Dies ist die erste und bisher einzige Umgebung für Juristen, die
+Dies ist die erste und bisher einzige Umgebung für Juristen, die
\Package{scrjura} bereitstellt. Durch ihre Verwendung wird die automatische
Absatznummerierung aktiviert und die Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} mit
-einer konkreten Form versehen, die später näher dokumentiert wird.
+einer konkreten Form versehen, die später näher dokumentiert wird.
Die\textnote{Achtung!} Umgebung \Environment{contract} darf nicht in sich
-selbst geschachtelt werden. Innerhalb eines Dokuments dürfen jedoch mehrere
+selbst geschachtelt werden. Innerhalb eines Dokuments dürfen jedoch mehrere
dieser Umgebungen verwendet werden. Dabei werden die Paragraphen innerhalb
-dieser Umgebungen so behandelt, als stünden sie innerhalb einer einzigen
+dieser Umgebungen so behandelt, als stünden sie innerhalb einer einzigen
Umgebung. Durch das Beenden der Umgebung wird diese also quasi
unterbrochen und durch den Beginn einer neuen Umgebung wird sozusagen die alte
Umgebung fortgesetzt. Dabei sind allerdings keine Unterbrechungen innerhalb
-eines Paragraphen möglich.%
+eines Paragraphen möglich.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -164,13 +181,13 @@ Bei Angabe dieser Option beim Laden des Pakets beispielsweise mit
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}} oder als globale Option bei
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}} wird das gesamte Dokument
-zu einem Vertrag. Das Dokument verhält sich dann also genauso, als würde es
+zu einem Vertrag. Das Dokument verhält sich dann also genauso, als würde es
genau eine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung enthalten.
Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass Option \Option{contract}
weder mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} noch
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} gesetzt werden kann! Damit ist es auch
-nicht möglich die Option wieder abzuschalten. Verwenden Sie in einem solchen
+nicht möglich die Option wieder abzuschalten. Verwenden Sie in einem solchen
Fall stattdessen direkt eine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung.
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -181,12 +198,12 @@ Fall stattdessen direkt eine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Paragraphen>juristische}
-Paragraphen\footnote{Obwohl der korrekte Begriff für juristische Paragraphen
- im Englischen »\emph{section}« wäre, sind die Bezeichnungen in
- \Package{scrjura} von »\emph{clause}« abgeleitet. Dadurch sollen
+Paragraphen\footnote{Obwohl der korrekte Begriff für juristische Paragraphen
+ im Englischen »\emph{section}« wäre, sind die Bezeichnungen in
+ \Package{scrjura} von »\emph{clause}« abgeleitet. Dadurch sollen
Verwechslungen sowohl mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} als auch mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} vermieden werden.} im juristischen Sinn
-sind bei \Package{scrjura} nur innerhalb von Verträgen, also innerhalb der
+sind bei \Package{scrjura} nur innerhalb von Verträgen, also innerhalb der
Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} oder weiteren mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.newenv},
@@ -200,31 +217,31 @@ definiert.
\Macro{SubClause}\Parameter{Einstellungen}
\end{Declaration}
Dies sind die wichtigsten Anweisungen innerhalb eines Vertrags. Ohne
-zusätzliche \PName{Einstellungen} erzeugt \Macro{Clause} eine
-Paragraphenüberschrift, die nur aus dem Paragraphenzeichen, gefolgt von einer
+zusätzliche \PName{Einstellungen} erzeugt \Macro{Clause} eine
+Paragraphenüberschrift, die nur aus dem Paragraphenzeichen, gefolgt von einer
fortlaufenden Nummer besteht. Dagegen erzeugt \Macro{SubClause} eine
-Paragraphenüberschrift, bei der an die zuletzt mit \Macro{Clause} gesetzte
-Nummer noch ein fortlaufender Kleinbuchstabe angehängt wird. Gedacht ist
-\Macro{SubClause} vor allem für den Fall, dass bei der Novellierung von
-Gesetzen oder Verträgen nicht nur Paragraphen umformuliert oder gestrichen
-werden, sondern zwischen existierenden Paragraphen neue eingefügt werden, ohne
+Paragraphenüberschrift, bei der an die zuletzt mit \Macro{Clause} gesetzte
+Nummer noch ein fortlaufender Kleinbuchstabe angehängt wird. Gedacht ist
+\Macro{SubClause} vor allem für den Fall, dass bei der Novellierung von
+Gesetzen oder Verträgen nicht nur Paragraphen umformuliert oder gestrichen
+werden, sondern zwischen existierenden Paragraphen neue eingefügt werden, ohne
dass eine komplett neue Nummerierung erfolgt.
Als \PName{Einstellungen} kann bei beiden Anweisungen eine durch Komma
-separierte Liste von Eigenschaften angegeben werden. Eine Übersicht über die
-möglichen Eigenschaften bietet \autoref{tab:scrjura.Clause.options}. Auf die
-wichtigsten soll noch näher eingegangen werden.
+separierte Liste von Eigenschaften angegeben werden. Eine Übersicht über die
+möglichen Eigenschaften bietet \autoref{tab:scrjura.Clause.options}. Auf die
+wichtigsten soll noch näher eingegangen werden.
\begin{table}
- \caption{Mögliche Eigenschaften für die optionalen Argumente der Anweisungen
+ \caption{Mögliche Eigenschaften für die optionalen Argumente der Anweisungen
\Macro{Clause} und \Macro{SubClause}}
\label{tab:scrjura.Clause.options}
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\Option{dummy}}{%
- Die Überschrift wird nicht gesetzt, aber gezählt.%
+ Die Überschrift wird nicht gesetzt, aber gezählt.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{head}{Kolumnentitel}}{%
- Sind Kolumnentitel aktiviert, wird unabhängig von einem Titel für den
+ Sind Kolumnentitel aktiviert, wird unabhängig von einem Titel für den
Paragraphen dieser Kolumnentitel verwendet.%
}%
\entry{\Option{nohead}}{%
@@ -234,33 +251,33 @@ wichtigsten soll noch näher eingegangen werden.
Es wird kein Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis vorgenommen.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{number}{Nummer}}{%
- Die Nummer für den Paragraphen wird direkt angegeben.%
+ Die Nummer für den Paragraphen wird direkt angegeben.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{preskip}{Abstand}}{%
- Neuer Abstand vor den Überschriften der Paragraphen.%
+ Neuer Abstand vor den Ãœberschriften der Paragraphen.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{postskip}{Abstand}}{%
- Neuer Abstand nach den Überschrift der Paragraphen.%
+ Neuer Abstand nach den Ãœberschrift der Paragraphen.%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{title}{Überschrift}}{%
- Der Paragraph wird zusätzlich zur Nummer mit einem Titel versehen. Dies
- ist gleichzeitig die Grundeinstellung für die Einträge in den
+ \entry{\OptionVName{title}{Ãœberschrift}}{%
+ Der Paragraph wird zusätzlich zur Nummer mit einem Titel versehen. Dies
+ ist gleichzeitig die Grundeinstellung für die Einträge in den
Kolumnentitel und das Inhaltsverzeichnis.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{tocentry}{Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag}}{%
- Unabhängig von einem Titel für den Paragraphen wird dieser Eintrag ins
+ Unabhängig von einem Titel für den Paragraphen wird dieser Eintrag ins
Inhaltsverzeichnis vorgenommen.%
}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
-In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} wird vor der Überschrift ein
-Abstand von zwei Zeilen und danach ein Abstand von einer Zeile eingefügt. Über
+In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} wird vor der Ãœberschrift ein
+Abstand von zwei Zeilen und danach ein Abstand von einer Zeile eingefügt. Über
die Eigenschaften \Option{preskip}\important[i]{\Option{preskip},
- \Option{postskip}} und \Option{postskip} kann dieser Abstand verändert
-werden. Die neue Einstellung gilt dann aber nicht nur für den aktuellen
+ \Option{postskip}} und \Option{postskip} kann dieser Abstand verändert
+werden. Die neue Einstellung gilt dann aber nicht nur für den aktuellen
Paragraphen, sondern ab dem aktuellen Paragraphen bis zum Ende der aktuellen
-Umgebung. Es ist auch möglich, die entsprechende Einstellung bereits vorab mit
+Umgebung. Es ist auch möglich, die entsprechende Einstellung bereits vorab mit
Hilfe von
\begin{flushleft}\quad\small
\textbf{\Macro{setkeys}}\PParameter{contract}%
@@ -268,18 +285,18 @@ Hilfe von
\normalsize\quad\small
\hspace{11.5em}postskip=\PName{Abstand}}
\end{flushleft}
-unabhängig von einem konkreten Paragraphen und auch außerhalb einer
+unabhängig von einem konkreten Paragraphen und auch außerhalb einer
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung vorzunehmen. Auch das Setzen
-innerhalb der Präambel nach dem Laden von \Package{scrjura} ist so
-möglich. Dagegen ist es nicht möglich, diese beiden Optionen bereits beim
+innerhalb der Präambel nach dem Laden von \Package{scrjura} ist so
+möglich. Dagegen ist es nicht möglich, diese beiden Optionen bereits beim
Laden des Pakets anzugeben oder sie per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}
oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} zu setzen.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{contract.Clause}\LabelFontElement{contract.Clause}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{Clause}\LabelFontElement{Clause}%
-In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} wird für die Überschrift des
+In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} wird für die Überschrift des
Paragraphen als Schrift \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}\Macro{large}
-verwendet. Über das Element
+verwendet. Ãœber das Element
\FontElement{contract.Clause}\important{\FontElement{contract.Clause}} kann
diese Schrift jederzeit mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}%
@@ -287,7 +304,7 @@ diese Schrift jederzeit mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-geändert werden. Innerhalb der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung kann
+geändert werden. Innerhalb der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung kann
statt \FontElement{contract.Clause} auch
\FontElement{Clause}\important{\FontElement{Clause}} verwendet werden.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{Clause}%
@@ -295,12 +312,12 @@ statt \FontElement{contract.Clause} auch
Mit Hilfe der Einstellungen \Option{title}\important[i]{\Option{title},
\Option{head}, \Option{tocentry}}, \Option{head} und \Option{tocentry}
-können Paragraphen zusätzlich zur Nummer mit einem Titel versehen
+können Paragraphen zusätzlich zur Nummer mit einem Titel versehen
werden. Dabei\textnote{Achtung!} wird empfohlen, den Wert der jeweiligen
-Eigenschaft in geschweifte Klammern zu setzen. Anderenfalls führen
+Eigenschaft in geschweifte Klammern zu setzen. Anderenfalls führen
beispielsweise Kommata zu Verwechslungen mit den Trennzeichen zwischen
-unterschiedlichen Eigenschaften. Leere Werte für \Option{head} und
-\Option{tocentry} führen zu leeren Einträgen. Will man hingegen keine Einträge
+unterschiedlichen Eigenschaften. Leere Werte für \Option{head} und
+\Option{tocentry} führen zu leeren Einträgen. Will man hingegen keine Einträge
vornehmen, so sind \Option{nohead}\important[i]{\Option{nohead},
\Option{notocentry}} und \Option{notocentry} zu verwenden.
@@ -309,31 +326,31 @@ Statt der fortlaufenden Nummer kann mit Hilfe der Eigenschaft
werden. Dies hat jedoch keinen Einfluss auf die Nummern der nachfolgenden
Paragraphen. Die Angabe einer leeren Nummer ist nicht
vorgesehen. Zerbrechliche Anweisungen in \PName{Nummer} sollten mit
-\Macro{protect} geschützt werden. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird empfohlen als
+\Macro{protect} geschützt werden. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird empfohlen als
\PName{Nummer} nur Ziffern und Buchstaben anzugeben.
Mit der Eigenschaft \Option{dummy}\important{\Option{dummy}} kann man die
-Ausgabe der kompletten Überschrift des Paragraphen unterdrücken. In der
-automatischen Zählung wird der Paragraph aber dennoch berücksichtigt. Auf
+Ausgabe der kompletten Überschrift des Paragraphen unterdrücken. In der
+automatischen Zählung wird der Paragraph aber dennoch berücksichtigt. Auf
diese Weise kann man beispielsweise\textnote{Beispiel} mit
\begin{lstcode}
\Clause{dummy}
\end{lstcode}
-einen Paragraphen in der automatischen Zählung überspringen, falls der
-entsprechende Paragraph in einer späteren Fassung eines Vertrags gestrichen
+einen Paragraphen in der automatischen Zählung überspringen, falls der
+entsprechende Paragraph in einer späteren Fassung eines Vertrags gestrichen
wurde.
Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass Eigenschaft \Option{dummy} als
Wert allenfalls \PValue{true} und \PValue{false} versteht. Alle anderen Werte
-werden normalerweise ignoriert, können im ungünstigsten Fall aber auch zu
-einer Fehlermeldung führen.%
+werden normalerweise ignoriert, können im ungünstigsten Fall aber auch zu
+einer Fehlermeldung führen.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{Clauseformat}\Parameter{Nummer}
\end{Declaration}
-Wie bereits in der vorausgehenden Erklärung erwähnt, werden juristische
+Wie bereits in der vorausgehenden Erklärung erwähnt, werden juristische
Paragraphen und Unterparagraphen normalerweise nummeriert. Die Formatierung
der Nummer erfolgt dabei mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{Clauseformat}, die als
einziges Argument die Nummer erwartet. Bei der
@@ -351,11 +368,11 @@ Expandierbarkeit zu achten!%
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{juratitlepagebreak}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}%
-Normalerweise sind Seitenumbrüche innerhalb von Überschriften aller Art
-verboten. Einige Juristen benötigen jedoch Seitenumbrüche innerhalb von
+Normalerweise sind Seitenumbrüche innerhalb von Überschriften aller Art
+verboten. Einige Juristen benötigen jedoch Seitenumbrüche innerhalb von
Paragraphentiteln. Daher kann ein solcher Umbruch mit
\Option{juratitlepagebreak}\important{\Option{juratitlepagebreak}} erlaubt
-werden. Die möglichen Einstellungen für \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} sind
+werden. Die möglichen Einstellungen für \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} sind
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} zu
entnehmen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -364,19 +381,19 @@ entnehmen.%
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{clausemark}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}%
-Da Paragraphen eine untergeordnete Gliederung mit unabhängiger Nummerierung
+Da Paragraphen eine untergeordnete Gliederung mit unabhängiger Nummerierung
sind, erzeugen sie in der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} keine
-Kolumnentitel. Über alternative Einstellungen können jedoch auch Kolumnentitel
-erzeugt werden. Die möglichen Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind
+Kolumnentitel. Über alternative Einstellungen können jedoch auch Kolumnentitel
+erzeugt werden. Die möglichen Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind
\autoref{tab:scrjura.clausemark} zu entnehmen.%
%
\begin{table}
- \caption{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{clausemark} zur Erzeugung von
+ \caption{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{clausemark} zur Erzeugung von
Kolumnentiteln durch Paragraphen}
\label{tab:scrjura.clausemark}%
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PValue{both}}{%
- Paragraphen erzeugen linke und rechte Marken für Kolumnentitel, wenn das
+ Paragraphen erzeugen linke und rechte Marken für Kolumnentitel, wenn das
Dokument die Verwendung von lebenden Kolumnentiteln vorsieht.%
\IndexOption{clausemark~=\textKValue{both}}%
}%
@@ -386,19 +403,19 @@ erzeugt werden. Die möglichen Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind
}%
\entry{\PValue{forceboth}}{%
Paragraphen erzeugen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markboth} linke und rechte
- Marken für Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument
- beispielsweise über den Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel
+ Marken für Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument
+ beispielsweise über den Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel
verwendet.%
\IndexOption{clausemark~=\textKValue{forceboth}}%
}%
\entry{\PValue{forceright}}{%
Paragraphen erzeugen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markright} rechte Marken
- für Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument beispielsweise über
- den Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel verwendet.%
+ für Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument beispielsweise über
+ den Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel verwendet.%
\IndexOption{clausemark~=\textKValue{forceright}}%
}%
\entry{\PValue{right}}{%
- Paragraphen erzeugen rechte Marken für Kolumnentitel, wenn das Dokument
+ Paragraphen erzeugen rechte Marken für Kolumnentitel, wenn das Dokument
die Verwendung von lebenden Kolumnentiteln vorsieht.%
\IndexOption{clausemark~=\textKValue{right}}%
}%
@@ -408,16 +425,16 @@ erzeugt werden. Die möglichen Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind
\EndIndexGroup
\EndIndexGroup
-\subsection{Absätze}
+\subsection{Absätze}
\label{sec:scrjura.par}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Absatz>Nummerierung}%
-Innerhalb von Paragraphen werden Absätze von \Package{scrjura} normalerweise
-automatisch nummeriert. Sie sind damit ein stark gliederndes Element, ähnlich
+Innerhalb von Paragraphen werden Absätze von \Package{scrjura} normalerweise
+automatisch nummeriert. Sie sind damit ein stark gliederndes Element, ähnlich
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} oder \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph} in
-normalen Texten. Innerhalb von Verträgen wird deshalb häufig auch gerne mit
-Abstand zwischen den Absätzen gearbeitet. Das Paket \Package{scrjura} bietet
-keinen eigenen Mechanismus hierfür. Stattdessen sei auf die Option
+normalen Texten. Innerhalb von Verträgen wird deshalb häufig auch gerne mit
+Abstand zwischen den Absätzen gearbeitet. Das Paket \Package{scrjura} bietet
+keinen eigenen Mechanismus hierfür. Stattdessen sei auf die Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.parskip}%
\IndexOption{parskip}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.parskip}} der
\KOMAScript-Klassen verwiesen (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup},
@@ -426,35 +443,35 @@ keinen eigenen Mechanismus hierfür. Stattdessen sei auf die Option
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{parnumber}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}
-Die automatische\textnote{Voreinstellung} Nummerierung der Absätze entspricht
+Die automatische\textnote{Voreinstellung} Nummerierung der Absätze entspricht
den beiden Einstellungen \OptionValue{parnumber}{auto} und
\OptionValue{parnumber}{true}. Manchmal ist es notwendig, die automatische
Nummerierung abzuschalten. Das ist mit \OptionValue{parnumber}{false}%
\important{\OptionValue{parnumber}{false}}%
-\IndexOption{parnumber~=\textKValue{false}} möglich. In diesem Fall wird nur die
-Satznummer automatisch zurück gesetzt.
+\IndexOption{parnumber~=\textKValue{false}} möglich. In diesem Fall wird nur die
+Satznummer automatisch zurück gesetzt.
Zur Realisierung dieser Option war es notwendig, in den Absatzmechanismus von
-\LaTeX{} einzugreifen. In einigen seltenen Fällen kann sich das negativ
-auswirken. Dann bleibt nur, diese Änderung mit
+\LaTeX{} einzugreifen. In einigen seltenen Fällen kann sich das negativ
+auswirken. Dann bleibt nur, diese Änderung mit
\OptionValue{parnumber}{manual}%
\important{\OptionValue{parnumber}{manual}}%
-\IndexOption{parnumber~=\textKValue{manual}} zurück zu nehmen. Umgekehrt hebt
-\LaTeX{} selbst den Eingriff manchmal auf. In diesem Fällen kann er mit
+\IndexOption{parnumber~=\textKValue{manual}} zurück zu nehmen. Umgekehrt hebt
+\LaTeX{} selbst den Eingriff manchmal auf. In diesem Fällen kann er mit
\OptionValue{parnumber}{auto}%
\important{\OptionValue{parnumber}{auto}}%
\IndexOption{parnumber~=\textKValue{auto}} erneut aktiviert werden.
Paragraphen, die nur aus einem einzigen Absatz bestehen, werden normalerweise
-nicht automatisch nummeriert. Damit dies funktioniert, dürfen sich keine zwei
+nicht automatisch nummeriert. Damit dies funktioniert, dürfen sich keine zwei
Paragraphen mit identischer Nummer in einem Dokument befinden. Sollten Sie
-dies dennoch einmal benötigen, weichen Sie bitte auf eine weitere
+dies dennoch einmal benötigen, weichen Sie bitte auf eine weitere
Vertragsumgebung aus (siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment},
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.newenv},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}). Da\textnote{Achtung!}
-die Information erst am Ende eines Paragraphen zur Verfügung steht, werden in
-der Regel zwei \LaTeX-Läufe benötigt, bis die automatische Absatznummerierung
+die Information erst am Ende eines Paragraphen zur Verfügung steht, werden in
+der Regel zwei \LaTeX-Läufe benötigt, bis die automatische Absatznummerierung
korrekt erfolgt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -464,7 +481,7 @@ korrekt erfolgt.%
\Macro{parformat}
\Macro{parformatseparation}
\end{Declaration}%
-Für die Nummerierung der Absätze wird der Zähler \Counter{par}
+Für die Nummerierung der Absätze wird der Zähler \Counter{par}
verwendet. Seine Darstellung, \Macro{thepar} ist mit
\Macro{arabic}\PParameter{par} als arabische Zahl
voreingestellt. Die\textnote{Voreinstellung} Ausgabe als automatische
@@ -477,20 +494,20 @@ zumindest ein nicht trennbares Leerzeichen mit
Bei\ChangedAt{v0.7}{\Package{scrjura}} der automatischen Nummerierung wird
\Macro{parformat} ebenfalls noch \Macro{parformatseparation} als Trennzeichen
-angehängt. Voreinstellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist derzeit mit
+angehängt. Voreinstellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist derzeit mit
\Macro{nobreakspace}\IndexCmd{nobreakspace} ein nicht umbrechbarer
Wortabstand.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{parnumber}\LabelFontElement{parnumber}%
Die Absatznummer wird normalerweise\textnote{Voreinstellung} in der
-aktuellen Schrift gesetzt. Diese Voreinstellung für das Element
+aktuellen Schrift gesetzt. Diese Voreinstellung für das Element
\FontElement{parnumber} kann jederzeit mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}%
\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-geändert werden.%
+geändert werden.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{parnumber}%
Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass \Package{scrjura} intern
@@ -504,9 +521,9 @@ diese Anweisung keinesfalls umdefiniert werden!%
\end{Declaration}
Wird keine Absatznummer ausgegeben, wird am Anfang des Absatzes ersatzweise
die Anweisung \Macro{withoutparnumber} lokal
-ausgeführt. Diese\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist in der Voreinstellung leer, tut
+ausgeführt. Diese\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist in der Voreinstellung leer, tut
also weiter nichts. Sie wurde auf speziellen Wunsch in \Package{scrjura}
-eingebaut, ist für den normalen Anwender aber ohne Belang.%
+eingebaut, ist für den normalen Anwender aber ohne Belang.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -515,30 +532,30 @@ eingebaut, ist für den normalen Anwender aber ohne Belang.%
\Macro{parellipsis}
\end{Declaration}
Manchmal\ChangedAt{v0.7}{\Package{scrjura}} -- insbesondere in vergleichenden
-Kommentaren -- ist es wünschenswert, wenn man Absätze in Gesetzen auslassen,
+Kommentaren -- ist es wünschenswert, wenn man Absätze in Gesetzen auslassen,
aber gleichzeitig die Auslassung\Index{Absatz>Auslassung} markieren kann. Die
-Absätze sollen dann auch in der Zählung der übrigen Absätze berücksichtigt
-werden. Das Paket \Package{scrjura} stellt dafür die Anweisung
+Absätze sollen dann auch in der Zählung der übrigen Absätze berücksichtigt
+werden. Das Paket \Package{scrjura} stellt dafür die Anweisung
\Macro{ellipsispar} bereit.
-In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} lässt \Macro{ellipsispar} genau
-einen Absatz aus. Über das optionale Argument \PName{Anzahl} können jedoch
-auch mehrere Absätze ausgelassen werden. In jedem Fall erscheint in der
+In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} lässt \Macro{ellipsispar} genau
+einen Absatz aus. Über das optionale Argument \PName{Anzahl} können jedoch
+auch mehrere Absätze ausgelassen werden. In jedem Fall erscheint in der
Ausgabe stattdessen genau ein nicht nummerierter Absatz, der nur die
-Auslassungszeichen \Macro{parellipsis} enthält. Bei der Entscheidung für eine
-automatische Nummerierung der übrigen Absätze eines juristischen Paragraphen
-werden die ausgelassenen Absätze jedoch mit gezählt. Dies gilt ebenso für die
-Nummern etwaiger nachfolgender Absätze.
+Auslassungszeichen \Macro{parellipsis} enthält. Bei der Entscheidung für eine
+automatische Nummerierung der übrigen Absätze eines juristischen Paragraphen
+werden die ausgelassenen Absätze jedoch mit gezählt. Dies gilt ebenso für die
+Nummern etwaiger nachfolgender Absätze.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie kommentieren das Strafgesetzbuch, wollen aber in \S~2 nur
- Absatz~3 kommentieren. Dennoch soll auf die übrigen Absätze indirekt
+ Absatz~3 kommentieren. Dennoch soll auf die übrigen Absätze indirekt
hingewiesen werden. Sie erreichen das beispielsweise mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[parskip=half]{scrartcl}
\usepackage{scrjura}
\usepackage{selinput}
\SelectInputMappings{
- adieresis={ä},germandbls={ß},
+ adieresis={ä},germandbls={ß},
}
\begin{document}
\begin{contract}
@@ -546,7 +563,7 @@ Nummern etwaiger nachfolgender Absätze.
\ellipsispar[2]
Wird das Gesetz, das bei Beendigung der Tat
- gilt, vor der Entscheidung geändert, so ist
+ gilt, vor der Entscheidung geändert, so ist
das mildeste Gesetz anzuwenden.
\ellipsispar[3]
@@ -560,19 +577,19 @@ Die Auslassungszeichen sind so vordefiniert\textnote{Voreinstellung}, dass
\Macro{textellipsis}\IndexCmd{textellipsis} verwendet wird, falls eine solche
Anweisung definiert ist. Anderenfalls wird \Macro{dots}\IndexCmd{dots}
verwendet. Eine Umdefinierung von \Macro{parellipsis} ist mit
-\Macro{renewcommand} jederzeit möglich.%
+\Macro{renewcommand} jederzeit möglich.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\subsection{Sätze}
+\subsection{Sätze}
\label{sec:scrjura.sentence}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Satz>Nummerierung}%
-Absätze in Verträgen bestehen aus einem oder mehreren Sätzen, die teilweise
+Absätze in Verträgen bestehen aus einem oder mehreren Sätzen, die teilweise
ebenfalls nummeriert werden. Da eine automatische Nummerierung jedoch
-problematisch und fehleranfällig ist, wurde eine solche bisher nicht
-implementiert. Eine halbautomatische Nummerierung wird jedoch unterstützt.
+problematisch und fehleranfällig ist, wurde eine solche bisher nicht
+implementiert. Eine halbautomatische Nummerierung wird jedoch unterstützt.
\begin{Declaration}
\Counter{sentence}
@@ -580,8 +597,8 @@ implementiert. Eine halbautomatische Nummerierung wird jedoch unterstützt.
\Macro{sentencenumberformat}
\Macro{Sentence}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Nummerierung von Sätzen erfolgt manuell mit der Anweisung
-\Macro{Sentence}. Dabei wird der Zähler \Counter{sentence} automatisch erhöht
+Die Nummerierung von Sätzen erfolgt manuell mit der Anweisung
+\Macro{Sentence}. Dabei wird der Zähler \Counter{sentence} automatisch erhöht
und in der Voreinstellung von
\Macro{sentencenumberformat}\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Package{scrjura}} die arabische
Zahl von \Macro{thesentence} hochgestellt ausgegeben.
@@ -589,18 +606,18 @@ Zahl von \Macro{thesentence} hochgestellt ausgegeben.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sentencenumber}\LabelFontElement{sentencenumber}%
Die\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Package{scrjura}} Satznummer wird
normalerweise\textnote{Voreinstellung} in der aktuellen Schrift gesetzt. Diese
-Voreinstellung für das Element \FontElement{sentencenumber} kann jederzeit mit
+Voreinstellung für das Element \FontElement{sentencenumber} kann jederzeit mit
Hilfe der Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}%
\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-geändert werden.%
+geändert werden.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{sentencenumber}
Bei\textnote{Tipp!} Verwendung von
\Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel}\important{\Package{babel}} ist es einfach
-möglich, eine Abkürzung für \Macro{Sentence} zu definieren:%
+möglich, eine Abkürzung für \Macro{Sentence} zu definieren:%
\phantomsection\label{sec:scrjura.shorthandexample}%
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}]
\useshorthands{'}
@@ -608,11 +625,11 @@ möglich, eine Abkürzung für \Macro{Sentence} zu definieren:%
\end{lstcode}
Dabei werden Leerzeichen nach
\lstinline|'S| ignoriert. Auch eine
-Abkürzung für einen Punkt, gefolgt von einer neuen Satznummer ist möglich:
+Abkürzung für einen Punkt, gefolgt von einer neuen Satznummer ist möglich:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}]
\defineshorthand{'.}{. \Sentence\ignorespaces}
\end{lstcode}
-Näheres zu \Macro{useshorthands}\IndexCmd{useshorthands} und
+Näheres zu \Macro{useshorthands}\IndexCmd{useshorthands} und
\Macro{defineshorthand}\IndexCmd{defineshorthands} ist der Anleitung zum Paket
\Package{babel} zu entnehmen (siehe \cite{package:babel}). Ein
Anwendungsbeispiel finden Sie in \autoref{sec:scrjura.example} ab
@@ -629,10 +646,10 @@ Anwendungsbeispiel finden Sie in \autoref{sec:scrjura.example} ab
\section{Querverweise}
\label{sec:scrjura.ref}
-Für Paragraphen, Absätze und Sätze reicht der normale Mechanismus für
+Für Paragraphen, Absätze und Sätze reicht der normale Mechanismus für
Querverweise mit \Macro{label}\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}},
\Macro{ref} und \Macro{pageref} nicht mehr aus. Daher wird dieser von
-\Package{scrjura} um weitere Anweisungen ergänzt.
+\Package{scrjura} um weitere Anweisungen ergänzt.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{ref}\Parameter{Label}
@@ -641,8 +658,8 @@ Querverweise mit \Macro{label}\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}},
\Macro{refN}\Parameter{Label}
\end{Declaration}
Die Anweisungen \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refS} und \Macro{refN}
-referenzieren Paragraph, Absatz und Satz immer vollständig. \Macro{refL}
-verwendet dabei eine textuelle Langform, während \Macro{refS} eine textuelle
+referenzieren Paragraph, Absatz und Satz immer vollständig. \Macro{refL}
+verwendet dabei eine textuelle Langform, während \Macro{refS} eine textuelle
Kurzform bietet. \Macro{refN} ist eine rein nummerische Kurzform. \Macro{ref}
entspricht in der Voreinstellung \Macro{refL}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -652,7 +669,7 @@ entspricht in der Voreinstellung \Macro{refL}.%
\Macro{refClause}\Parameter{Label}
\Macro{refClauseN}\Parameter{Label}
\end{Declaration}
-Für die Referenzierung von Paragraphen ohne Absatz und Satz, unterscheiden
+Für die Referenzierung von Paragraphen ohne Absatz und Satz, unterscheiden
sich \Macro{refClause} und \Macro{refClauseN} nur darin, dass ersteres
automatisch ein Paragraphenzeichen voran stellt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -666,12 +683,12 @@ automatisch ein Paragraphenzeichen voran stellt.%
\end{Declaration}
Nur den Absatz kann man mit \Macro{refParL}, \Macro{refParS} und
\Macro{refParN} referenzieren. Die Formen unterscheiden sich dabei wie bereits
-für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN} und
+für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS} angegeben. Eine Besonderheit stellt das
-optionale Argument von \Macro{refParN} dar. Normalerweise werden Absätze in
-rein nummerischer Form als römische Zahlen referenziert. Über das optionale
+optionale Argument von \Macro{refParN} dar. Normalerweise werden Absätze in
+rein nummerischer Form als römische Zahlen referenziert. Über das optionale
Argument kann jedoch auch ein anderes Format vorgegeben werden. Sinnvoll ist
-hier in erster Linie das \PValue{Zahlenformat} \PValue{arabic} für eine
+hier in erster Linie das \PValue{Zahlenformat} \PValue{arabic} für eine
arabische Absatznummer. \Macro{refPar} entspricht in der Voreinstellung
\Macro{refParL}.
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -696,26 +713,26 @@ nummerische Form. \Macro{refSentence} entspricht in der Voreinstellung
\end{Declaration}
Die Ergebnisse von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ref},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence} sind
-von der \PName{Einstellung} für Option \Option{ref} abhängig. In der
+von der \PName{Einstellung} für Option \Option{ref} abhängig. In der
Voreinstellung entsprechen diese \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceL}. Mögliche Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceL}. Mögliche Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind
\autoref{tab:scrjura.ref} zu entnehmen.%
%
\begin{table}
%\begin{desclist}
% \desccaption
\caption[{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} zur Einstellung der
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} zur Einstellung der
Referenzierungsformate%
}]{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} zur Einstellung des Formats von
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} zur Einstellung des Formats von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ref}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence}%
\label{tab:scrjura.ref}%
}%
% {%
-% Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} \emph{(Fortsetzung)}%
+% Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} \emph{(Fortsetzung)}%
% }%
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PValue{long}}{%
@@ -782,10 +799,10 @@ Voreinstellung entsprechen diese \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL},
\end{table}
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass auf Absätze immer in der Form »Absatz 1 in
- Paragraph 1« verwiesen wird. Da es hierfür keine vordefinierte Anweisung
- gibt, müssen Sie sich Ihre eigene Definition aus den vorhanden Möglichkeiten
- zusammenbauen. Dies können Sie mit%
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass auf Absätze immer in der Form »Absatz 1 in
+ Paragraph 1« verwiesen wird. Da es hierfür keine vordefinierte Anweisung
+ gibt, müssen Sie sich Ihre eigene Definition aus den vorhanden Möglichkeiten
+ zusammenbauen. Dies können Sie mit%
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\refParM}[1]{%
Absatz~\refParN[arabic]{#1}
@@ -796,22 +813,22 @@ Voreinstellung entsprechen diese \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL} zu verwenden.%
\end{Example}%
-Beispiele für die Ergebnisse der nicht konfigurierbaren, grundlegenden
+Beispiele für die Ergebnisse der nicht konfigurierbaren, grundlegenden
Anweisungen finden sich in \autoref{tab:scrjura.refexamples}.
%
\begin{table}
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}{Beispielausgaben der von Option \Option{ref}
- unabhängigen Anweisungen für Querverweise}[l]
+ unabhängigen Anweisungen für Querverweise}[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
\toprule
Anweisung & Beispielausgabe \\
\midrule
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Absatz 1 Satz 1 \\
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Abs. 1 S. 1 \\
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 I 1. \\
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClause}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Absatz 1 Satz 1 \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Abs. 1 S. 1 \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 I 1. \\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClause}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 \\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClauseN}\Parameter{Label} & 1 \\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL}\Parameter{Label} & Absatz 1 \\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParS}\Parameter{Label} & Abs. 1 \\
@@ -829,49 +846,49 @@ Anweisungen finden sich in \autoref{tab:scrjura.refexamples}.
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Zusätzliche Vertragsumgebungen}
+\section{Zusätzliche Vertragsumgebungen}
\label{sec:scrjura.newenv}
-Einige Anwender setzen mit \Package{scrjura} keine Verträge oder Kommentare
+Einige Anwender setzen mit \Package{scrjura} keine Verträge oder Kommentare
zu einzelnen Gesetzen, sondern Werke, in denen unterschiedliche Arten von
Gesetzen behandelt werden. Es ist daher erforderlich, dass ein Paragraph
-nicht immer mit demselben Präfix »\S« versehen wird, sondern beispielsweise
-als »Art.« oder »IAS« oder was auch immer bezeichnet wird. Darüber hinaus wird
-eine unabhängige Zählung der unterschiedlichen Paragraphen benötigt.
+nicht immer mit demselben Präfix »\S« versehen wird, sondern beispielsweise
+als »Art.« oder »IAS« oder was auch immer bezeichnet wird. Darüber hinaus wird
+eine unabhängige Zählung der unterschiedlichen Paragraphen benötigt.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}\Parameter{Name}\OParameter{Optionen}
\Parameter{Start-Anweisungen}
\Parameter{End-Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
-Über\ChangedAt{v0.9}{\Package{scrjura}} diese Anweisung können weitere,
-voneinander unabhängige Umgebungen für Vertrags- oder Gesetzestexte deklariert
+Über\ChangedAt{v0.9}{\Package{scrjura}} diese Anweisung können weitere,
+voneinander unabhängige Umgebungen für Vertrags- oder Gesetzestexte deklariert
werden. Das Argument \PName{Name} ist dabei der Name der neuen
Umgebung. \PName{Start-Anweisungen} sind Anweisungen, die immer am Anfang der
-Umgebung ausgeführt werden, ganz als ob man sie jedes Mal unmittelbar hinter
-\Macro{begin}\Parameter{Name} einfügen würde. Entsprechend werden
-\PName{End-Anweisungen} immer am Ende der Umgebung ausgeführt, ganz als ob man
-sie jedes Mal unmittelbar vor \Macro{end}\Parameter{Name} einfügen würde. Ohne
+Umgebung ausgeführt werden, ganz als ob man sie jedes Mal unmittelbar hinter
+\Macro{begin}\Parameter{Name} einfügen würde. Entsprechend werden
+\PName{End-Anweisungen} immer am Ende der Umgebung ausgeführt, ganz als ob man
+sie jedes Mal unmittelbar vor \Macro{end}\Parameter{Name} einfügen würde. Ohne
\PName{Optionen} entspricht die neue Umgebung \PName{Name} einer
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung mit eigenen Zählern. Es besteht
-jedoch die Möglichkeit über eine mit Komma separierte Liste an
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung mit eigenen Zählern. Es besteht
+jedoch die Möglichkeit über eine mit Komma separierte Liste an
\PName{Optionen} darauf Einfluss zu
-nehmen. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment} führt die derzeit
-unterstützen \PName{Optionen} auf.
+nehmen. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment} führt die derzeit
+unterstützen \PName{Optionen} auf.
\begin{desclist}
- \desccaption{Von \Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment} unterstützte Optionen zur
+ \desccaption{Von \Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment} unterstützte Optionen zur
Konfigurierung neuer
Vertragsumgebungen\label{tab:\LabelBase.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}}%
- {Optionen für \Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment} (\emph{Fortsetzung})}%
+ {Optionen für \Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment} (\emph{Fortsetzung})}%
\entry{\OptionVName{Clause}{Anweisung}}{%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause} wird innerhalb der neuen Umgebung auf
- \PName{Anweisung} abgebildet. Die \PName{Anweisung} sollte wie die für
+ \PName{Anweisung} abgebildet. Die \PName{Anweisung} sollte wie die für
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} dokumentierte Anweisung genau ein
- Argument erwarten. Für eine korrekte Anwendung dieser Option sind
- erweiterte Kenntnisse über die interne Funktion von \Package{scrjura}
- notwendig. Außerdem können sich die Anforderungen an die \PName{Anweisung}
- von Version zu Version noch ändern. Daher wird derzeit empfohlen, die
+ Argument erwarten. Für eine korrekte Anwendung dieser Option sind
+ erweiterte Kenntnisse über die interne Funktion von \Package{scrjura}
+ notwendig. Außerdem können sich die Anforderungen an die \PName{Anweisung}
+ von Version zu Version noch ändern. Daher wird derzeit empfohlen, die
Option nicht zu verwenden!%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{ClauseFont}{Anweisungen}}{%
@@ -880,40 +897,40 @@ unterstützen \PName{Optionen} auf.
Ist diese Option angegeben, so wird eine neues Element
\FontElement{\PName{Name}.Clause}\IndexFontElement{\PName{Name}.Clause}
mit \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont} definiert und
- \PName{Anweisungen} für dessen Voreinstellung verwendet. Sollte das
+ \PName{Anweisungen} für dessen Voreinstellung verwendet. Sollte das
Element bisher als Alias definiert gewesen sein (siehe
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont} in
- \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+ \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.fonts},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont}) so wird es stattdessen zu
- einem selbstständigen Element. Sollte das Element bereits definiert
+ einem selbstständigen Element. Sollte das Element bereits definiert
gewesen sein, so werden lediglich die \PName{Anweisungen} mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} als neue Einstellung gesetzt. Bitte
beachten Sie die in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup},
- \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} erklärten Einschränkungen
- bezüglich der erlaubten \PName{Anweisungen}!%
+ \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} erklärten Einschränkungen
+ bezüglich der erlaubten \PName{Anweisungen}!%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{\PName{Name}.Clause}%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{SubClause}{Anweisung}}{%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} wird innerhalb der Umgebung auf
- \PName{Anweisung} abgebildet. Die \PName{Anweisung} sollte wie die für
+ \PName{Anweisung} abgebildet. Die \PName{Anweisung} sollte wie die für
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} dokumentierte Anweisung genau ein
- Argument erwarten. Für eine korrekte Anwendung dieser Option sind
- erweiterte Kenntnisse über die interne Funktion von \Package{scrjura}
- notwendig. Außerdem können sich die Anforderungen an die \PName{Anweisung}
- von Version zu Version noch ändern. Daher wird derzeit empfohlen, die
+ Argument erwarten. Für eine korrekte Anwendung dieser Option sind
+ erweiterte Kenntnisse über die interne Funktion von \Package{scrjura}
+ notwendig. Außerdem können sich die Anforderungen an die \PName{Anweisung}
+ von Version zu Version noch ändern. Daher wird derzeit empfohlen, die
Option nicht zu verwenden!%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{Sentence}{Anweisung}}{%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Sentence} wird innerhalb der Umgebung auf
\PName{Anweisung} abgebildet. Die \Macro{Anweisung} sollte kein Argument
- besitzen. Normalerweise sollte sie den Zähler
+ besitzen. Normalerweise sollte sie den Zähler
\Counter{sentence}\IndexCounter{sentence} mit
- \Macro{refstepcounter}\IndexCmd{refstepcounter} erhöhen und dann in
+ \Macro{refstepcounter}\IndexCmd{refstepcounter} erhöhen und dann in
geeigneter Form ausgeben. Dabei ist besonders darauf zu achten, dass keine
- unerwünschten Leerzeichen eingebaut werden!%
+ unerwünschten Leerzeichen eingebaut werden!%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{ClauseNumberFormat}{Anweisung}}{%
- \PName{Anweisung} legt die Formatierung für Paragraphen-Nummern innerhalb
+ \PName{Anweisung} legt die Formatierung für Paragraphen-Nummern innerhalb
der Umgebung fest. Es wird eine \PName{Anweisung} mit genau einem Argument
erwartet, der Nummer des Paragraphen. Falls diese Nummer das letzte
Argument einer Kette von Anweisungen ist, so kann diese Kette an
@@ -921,8 +938,8 @@ unterstützen \PName{Optionen} auf.
}%
\end{desclist}
\begin{Example}
- Um beispielsweise die in der Einleitung zu diesem Abschnitt erwähnte
- Umgebung für Artikel zu definieren, genügt:
+ Um beispielsweise die in der Einleitung zu diesem Abschnitt erwähnte
+ Umgebung für Artikel zu definieren, genügt:
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment{Artikel}
[ClauseNumberFormat=Art.]{}{}
@@ -934,16 +951,16 @@ unterstützen \PName{Optionen} auf.
[ClauseNumberFormat=Art.~]
{\KOMAoptions{parskip}}{}
\end{lstcode}
- verwendet werden. Natürlich wird dann auch bei der Referenzierung
- automatisch »Art.« anstelle von »\S« vorangestellt.%
+ verwendet werden. Natürlich wird dann auch bei der Referenzierung
+ automatisch »Art.« anstelle von »\S« vorangestellt.%
Angewendet wird die neue Umgebung wie
\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{Artikel}
\Clause
- Die Würde des Menschen ist unantastbar. Sie zu
- achten und zu schützen ist Verpflichtung aller
+ Die Würde des Menschen ist unantastbar. Sie zu
+ achten und zu schützen ist Verpflichtung aller
staatlichen Gewalt.
\end{Artikel}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -951,23 +968,23 @@ unterstützen \PName{Optionen} auf.
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Unterstützung verschiedener Sprachen}
+\section{Unterstützung verschiedener Sprachen}
\label{sec:scrjura.babel}
-Das Paket \Package{scrjura} wurde in Zusammenarbeit mit einem Anwalt für
-Deutsches Recht entwickelt. Daher unterstützte es zunächst auch nur die Sprachen
+Das Paket \Package{scrjura} wurde in Zusammenarbeit mit einem Anwalt für
+Deutsches Recht entwickelt. Daher unterstützte es zunächst auch nur die Sprachen
\PValue{german}, \PValue{ngerman}, \PValue{austrian} und
-\PValue{naustrian}. Das Paket wurde aber so entworfen, dass es mit üblichen
+\PValue{naustrian}. Das Paket wurde aber so entworfen, dass es mit üblichen
Sprachpaketen wie
\Package{babel}\important{\Package{babel}}\IndexPackage{babel} zusammen
-arbeitet. Anwender können solche Anpassungen einfach mit
+arbeitet. Anwender können solche Anpassungen einfach mit
\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport},
-\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}) vornehmen. Sollten Sie über
-gesicherte Informationen zu den im juristischen Umfeld gebräuchlichen
-Begriffen in anderen Sprachen verfügen, würde sich der Autor über
-entsprechende Rückmeldungen freuen. Auf diesem Weg ist inzwischen auch
-Unterstützung für \PValue{english}, \PValue{american}, \PValue{british},
+\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}) vornehmen. Sollten Sie über
+gesicherte Informationen zu den im juristischen Umfeld gebräuchlichen
+Begriffen in anderen Sprachen verfügen, würde sich der Autor über
+entsprechende Rückmeldungen freuen. Auf diesem Weg ist inzwischen auch
+Unterstützung für \PValue{english}, \PValue{american}, \PValue{british},
\PValue{canadian}, \PValue{USenglish} und \PValue{UKenglish} hinzu gekommen.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -976,12 +993,12 @@ Unterstützung für \PValue{english}, \PValue{american}, \PValue{british},
\Macro{sentencename}
\Macro{sentenceshortname}
\end{Declaration}
-Dies sind die sprachabhängigen Bezeichnungen, die von \Package{scrjura}
+Dies sind die sprachabhängigen Bezeichnungen, die von \Package{scrjura}
verwendet werden. Die Bedeutung und die im Deutschen vordefinierten Werte sind
\autoref{tab:scrjura.captionnames} zu entnehmen. Dabei nimmt \Package{scrjura}
die entsprechenden Definitionen innerhalb von
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} nur vor, wenn nicht bereits andere Vorgaben
-getroffen wurden. Wird \Package{scrjura} mit einer nicht unterstützten Sprache
+getroffen wurden. Wird \Package{scrjura} mit einer nicht unterstützten Sprache
verwendet, so wird eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung ausgegeben.%
%
\begin{table}
@@ -989,9 +1006,9 @@ verwendet, so wird eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung ausgegeben.%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}
[{%
- Bedeutungen und Voreinstellungen sprachabhängiger Begriffe%
+ Bedeutungen und Voreinstellungen sprachabhängiger Begriffe%
}]{%
- Bedeutungen und Voreinstellungen für die sprachabhängigen Begriffe
+ Bedeutungen und Voreinstellungen für die sprachabhängigen Begriffe
soweit nicht bereits definiert%
}
[l]
@@ -999,10 +1016,10 @@ verwendet, so wird eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung ausgegeben.%
\toprule
Anweisung & Bedeutung & Voreinstellung \\
\midrule
- \Macro{parname} & Langform »Absatz« & Absatz \\
- \Macro{parshortname} & Kurzform »Absatz« & Abs. \\
- \Macro{sentencename} & Langform »Satz« & Satz \\
- \Macro{sentenceshortname} & Kurzform »Satz« & S. \\
+ \Macro{parname} & Langform »Absatz« & Absatz \\
+ \Macro{parshortname} & Kurzform »Absatz« & Abs. \\
+ \Macro{sentencename} & Langform »Satz« & Satz \\
+ \Macro{sentenceshortname} & Kurzform »Satz« & S. \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{captionbeside}
@@ -1012,19 +1029,19 @@ verwendet, so wird eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung ausgegeben.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Ein ausführliches Beispiel}
+\section{Ein ausführliches Beispiel}
\label{sec:scrjura.example}
Erinnern wir uns an den Brief aus \autoref{cha:scrlttr2}, in dem ein
-Vereinsmitglied die überfällige Mitgliederversammlung in Erinnerung bringen
-wollte. Damit so etwas möglich ist, muss es auch einen Verein mit einer
+Vereinsmitglied die überfällige Mitgliederversammlung in Erinnerung bringen
+wollte. Damit so etwas möglich ist, muss es auch einen Verein mit einer
Satzung geben, die das vorschreibt. Eine Vereinssatzung ist letztlich eine Art
Vertrag und kann mit \Package{scrjura} gesetzt werden.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=1-2}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Als Klasse wird \Class{scrartcl} verwendet. Da es bei Satzungen eher üblich
-ist, die Absätze mit einem Abstand zu setzen, wird Option
+Als Klasse wird \Class{scrartcl} verwendet. Da es bei Satzungen eher üblich
+ist, die Absätze mit einem Abstand zu setzen, wird Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{parskip}{half} verwendet (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.parskip}).
@@ -1035,44 +1052,44 @@ Die Satzung soll in Deutsch verfasst werden. Daher wird das Paket
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange={6-7,9-9}}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Es werden einige Standardeinstellungen für die Schrift vorgenommen. Dazu kommt
-das Paket \Package{textcomp}, das neben einem brauchbaren Euro-Zeichen für
+Es werden einige Standardeinstellungen für die Schrift vorgenommen. Dazu kommt
+das Paket \Package{textcomp}, das neben einem brauchbaren Euro-Zeichen für
einige Schriften auch ein verbessertes Paragraphenzeichen bereitstellt.
\lstinputcode[{moretexcs=SelectInputMappings,xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=11-15}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Damit Sonderzeichen und Umlaute direkt eingegeben werden können, wird die
-Eingabecodierung ermittelt. Alternativ könnte hier auch das Paket
+Damit Sonderzeichen und Umlaute direkt eingegeben werden können, wird die
+Eingabecodierung ermittelt. Alternativ könnte hier auch das Paket
\Package{inputenc} zum Einsatz kommen.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=17-17}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Später sollen Listen nicht mit arabischen Zahlen, sondern mit Kleinbuchstaben
+Später sollen Listen nicht mit arabischen Zahlen, sondern mit Kleinbuchstaben
nummeriert werden. Dies ist beispielsweise mit dem Paket \Package{enumerate}
-möglich.
+möglich.
\lstinputcode[{moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand},%
xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=19-27}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Nun ist es Zeit für \Package{scrjura}. Mit Option
-\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{clausemark}{forceboth} wird für Paragraphen das
-Setzen von linken und rechten Marken für Kolumnentitel erzwungen. Da
-andererseits nicht erwünscht ist, dass \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}
+Nun ist es Zeit für \Package{scrjura}. Mit Option
+\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{clausemark}{forceboth} wird für Paragraphen das
+Setzen von linken und rechten Marken für Kolumnentitel erzwungen. Da
+andererseits nicht erwünscht ist, dass \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}
Kolumnentitel erzeugen, wird Seitenstil \PageStyle{myheadings} verwendet, der
normalerweise keine lebenden Kolumnentitel aktiviert.
-Es soll später auch ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellt werden, in das die
+Es soll später auch ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellt werden, in das die
Paragraphen ebenfalls aufgenommen werden. Das wird mit
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.juratotoc} erreicht. Später werden wir feststellen,
-dass die voreingestellte Breite für die Paragraphennummern im
-Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht genügt. Daher wird mit
-\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{juratocnumberwidth}{2.5em} für etwas mehr Platz
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.juratotoc} erreicht. Später werden wir feststellen,
+dass die voreingestellte Breite für die Paragraphennummern im
+Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht genügt. Daher wird mit
+\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{juratocnumberwidth}{2.5em} für etwas mehr Platz
gesorgt.
-Die Definition der Abkürzungen wurde bereits in
-\autoref{sec:scrjura.shorthandexample} erklärt. Im Beispiel wurde sie
-übernommen, um später die Eingabe zu vereinfachen.
+Die Definition der Abkürzungen wurde bereits in
+\autoref{sec:scrjura.shorthandexample} erklärt. Im Beispiel wurde sie
+übernommen, um später die Eingabe zu vereinfachen.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=29-29}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
@@ -1086,18 +1103,18 @@ gewohnten \KOMAScript-Mitteln (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, ab
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=37-37}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Wie bereits erwähnt, soll ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellt werden.
+Wie bereits erwähnt, soll ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellt werden.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=39-43}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Präambeln sind in Satzungen nicht ungewöhnlich. Hier wird sie mit
+Präambeln sind in Satzungen nicht ungewöhnlich. Hier wird sie mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addsec} gesetzt, damit sie auch einen Eintrag ins
-Inhaltsverzeichnis erhält.
+Inhaltsverzeichnis erhält.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=45-45}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
Hier wird ein kleiner Trick angewendet. Die einzelnen Artikel der Satzung
-sollen nicht mit arabischen Zahlen, sondern mit Großbuchstaben nummeriert
+sollen nicht mit arabischen Zahlen, sondern mit Großbuchstaben nummeriert
werden -- genau wie dies auch im Anhang eines Artikels mit \Class{scrartcl}
der Fall ist.
@@ -1107,45 +1124,45 @@ Mit dem ersten Artikel beginnt auch der Vertrag.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=50-59}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Der erste Paragraph erhält neben der Nummer auch einen Titel. Dies wird auch
+Der erste Paragraph erhält neben der Nummer auch einen Titel. Dies wird auch
bei den nachfolgenden Paragraphen so sein.
-Der erste Absatz des Vertrags enthält nichts ungewöhnliches. Da es nicht der
+Der erste Absatz des Vertrags enthält nichts ungewöhnliches. Da es nicht der
einzige Absatz ist, werden bei der Ausgabe jedem Absatz automatisch
Absatznummern voran gestellt werden. Damit dies auch beim ersten Absatz
-geschieht, sind allerdings zwei \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig. Da dies für das
-Inhaltsverzeichnis ohnehin der Fall sein wird, stört das aber auch nicht
+geschieht, sind allerdings zwei \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig. Da dies für das
+Inhaltsverzeichnis ohnehin der Fall sein wird, stört das aber auch nicht
weiter.
-Im zweiten Absatz stehen zwei Sätze. Hier finden zum ersten Mal die
-Abkürzungen \texttt{'S} und
+Im zweiten Absatz stehen zwei Sätze. Hier finden zum ersten Mal die
+Abkürzungen \texttt{'S} und
\texttt{'.} Anwendung. Mit der ersten wird lediglich eine Satznummer
erzeugt. Mit der zweiten wird nicht nur ein Punkt, sondern nachfolgend
-auch eine Satznummer erzeugt. Beide Sätze des Absatzes sind somit nummeriert.
+auch eine Satznummer erzeugt. Beide Sätze des Absatzes sind somit nummeriert.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=60-75}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Der zweite Paragraph: Auch dieser enthält wieder mehrere Absätze, die
-teilweise auch mehrere Sätze umfassen. Im zweiten Absatz ist darüber hinaus
-eine Aufzählung zu finden. Beim letzten Absatz wurde ein Label gesetzt, da auf
-diesen später noch verwiesen werden soll.
+Der zweite Paragraph: Auch dieser enthält wieder mehrere Absätze, die
+teilweise auch mehrere Sätze umfassen. Im zweiten Absatz ist darüber hinaus
+eine Aufzählung zu finden. Beim letzten Absatz wurde ein Label gesetzt, da auf
+diesen später noch verwiesen werden soll.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=77-84}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Der dritte Paragraph enthält als Besonderheit einen Querverweis. In diesem
+Der dritte Paragraph enthält als Besonderheit einen Querverweis. In diesem
Fall wird in der Langform mit Paragraph, Absatz und Satz referenziert. Soll
-der Satz später doch entfallen, so kann dies global durch Setzen der Option
+der Satz später doch entfallen, so kann dies global durch Setzen der Option
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{ref}{nosentence} erreicht werden.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=86-87}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
Hier gibt es nun einen ersten Spezialfall eines Paragraphen. Dieser Paragraph
-war in einer früheren Fassung der Satzung noch enthalten, wurde dann aber
+war in einer früheren Fassung der Satzung noch enthalten, wurde dann aber
entfernt. Dabei sollen jedoch die nachfolgenden Paragraphen nicht neu
nummeriert werden, sondern ihre alte Nummer behalten. Deshalb wurde die
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause}-Anweisung nicht entfernt, sondern lediglich um
-die Eigenschaft \Option{dummy} erweitert. Außerdem kann so auch weiterhin ein
-Label für diesen Paragraphen gesetzt werden, obwohl der Paragraph selbst nicht
+die Eigenschaft \Option{dummy} erweitert. Außerdem kann so auch weiterhin ein
+Label für diesen Paragraphen gesetzt werden, obwohl der Paragraph selbst nicht
angezeigt wird.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
@@ -1156,7 +1173,7 @@ Absatznummerierung ausgeschlossen sind, wird dazu kurzzeitig die
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=93-93}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Auch der erste Paragraph im nächsten Artikel wurde gestrichen.
+Auch der erste Paragraph im nächsten Artikel wurde gestrichen.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=95-104}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
@@ -1167,15 +1184,15 @@ gesetzt.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=107-112}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
Hier haben wir den zweiten Spezialfall eines Paragraphen. In diesem Fall wurde
-kein Paragraph gestrichen, sondern ein neuer Paragraph eingefügt, ohne dass
+kein Paragraph gestrichen, sondern ein neuer Paragraph eingefügt, ohne dass
nachfolgend Paragraphen neu nummeriert werden. Dazu wurde
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} verwendet. Somit erhält dieser Paragraph
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} verwendet. Somit erhält dieser Paragraph
die Nummer des vorherigen Paragraphen, die zur Unterscheidung um ein kleines
-»a« erweitert wurde.
+»a« erweitert wurde.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
linerange=114-134}]{scrjuraexample.tex}%
-Die übrigen Paragraphen dieses Artikels enthalten nur bereits bekannte
+Die übrigen Paragraphen dieses Artikels enthalten nur bereits bekannte
Anweisungen und keine neuen Besonderheiten.
\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,%
@@ -1238,24 +1255,24 @@ Seit \KOMAScript~3.24 teilt \Package{scrjura} die Versionsnummer der Klassen
und anderer wichtiger Pakete. Dennoch sei auf einen wichtigen Punkt
hingewiesen: Bisher ist weder das Zusammenspiel mit vielen anderen Paketen
noch die Funktion der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung mit allen
-möglichen \LaTeX-Umgebungen und Einstellungen verschiedener Klassen und Pakete
+möglichen \LaTeX-Umgebungen und Einstellungen verschiedener Klassen und Pakete
getestet. Dies liegt nicht zuletzt daran, dass es sich bei \Package{scrjura}
-um ein sehr spezielles Paket handelt, das weit außerhalb der täglichen Praxis
-des Autors liegt. Damit ist der Autor diesbezüglich in hohem Maße auf
-ausführliche Rückmeldungen durch die Anwender angewiesen.%
+um ein sehr spezielles Paket handelt, das weit außerhalb der täglichen Praxis
+des Autors liegt. Damit ist der Autor diesbezüglich in hohem Maße auf
+ausführliche Rückmeldungen durch die Anwender angewiesen.%
\EndIndexGroup
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t
%%% TeX-master: "guide.tex"
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Seitenstil bedarfsweise Ebenennummer Absatznummerierung
-% LocalWords: Paragraphenüberschrift Präambeln renewcommand Gesetzestexte
+% LocalWords: Paragraphenüberschrift Präambeln renewcommand Gesetzestexte
% LocalWords: Grundgesetzartikel Absatzabstand umbrechbaren Wortabstand
% LocalWords: Beispielsatzung Paragraphensymbol Vordefinierung Absatznummer
% LocalWords: Expandierbarkeit umbrechbarer Satznummer Paragraphenzeichen
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex
index c144117cf6..27141726ee 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@
\usepackage{selinput}
\SelectInputMappings{
- adieresis={ä},
- germandbls={ß},
+ adieresis={ä},
+ germandbls={ß},
}
\usepackage{enumerate}
@@ -30,15 +30,15 @@
\subject{Satzung}
\title{VfVmai}
-\subtitle{Verein für Vereinsmaierei mit ai n.e.V.}
+\subtitle{Verein für Vereinsmaierei mit ai n.e.V.}
\date{11.\,11.\,2011}
\maketitle
\tableofcontents
-\addsec{Präambel}
+\addsec{Präambel}
-Die Vereinslandschaft in Deutschland ist vielfältig.
+Die Vereinslandschaft in Deutschland ist vielfältig.
Doch leider mussten wir feststellen, dass es dabei oft
am ernsthaften Umgang mit der Ernsthaftigkeit krankt.
@@ -49,13 +49,13 @@ am ernsthaften Umgang mit der Ernsthaftigkeit krankt.
\begin{contract}
\Clause{title={Name, Rechtsform, Sitz des Vereins}}
-Der Verein führt den Namen »Verein für Vereinsmaierei mit
-ai n.e.V.« und ist in keinem Vereinsregister eingetragen.
+Der Verein führt den Namen »Verein für Vereinsmaierei mit
+ai n.e.V.« und ist in keinem Vereinsregister eingetragen.
-'S Der Verein ist ein nichtwirtschaftlicher, unnützer
+'S Der Verein ist ein nichtwirtschaftlicher, unnützer
Verein'. Er hat keinen Sitz und muss daher stehen.
-Geschäftsjahr ist vom 31.~März bis zum 1.~April.
+Geschäftsjahr ist vom 31.~März bis zum 1.~April.
\Clause{title={Zweck des Vereins}}
@@ -66,22 +66,22 @@ Ernsthaftigkeit auf eine gesunde Basis stellen.
Zu diesem Zweck kann der Verein
\begin{enumerate}[\qquad a)]
\item in der Nase bohren,
-\item Nüsse knacken,
+\item Nüsse knacken,
\item am Daumen lutschen.
\end{enumerate}
-Der Verein ist selbstsüchtig und steht dazu.
+Der Verein ist selbstsüchtig und steht dazu.
-Der Verein verfügt über keinerlei Mittel.\label{a:mittel}
+Der Verein verfügt über keinerlei Mittel.\label{a:mittel}
-\Clause{title={Vereinsämter}}
+\Clause{title={Vereinsämter}}
-Die Vereinsämter sind Ehrenämter.
+Die Vereinsämter sind Ehrenämter.
-'S Würde der Verein über Mittel verfügen
-(siehe \ref{a:mittel}), so könnte er einen
-hauptamtlichen Geschäftsführer bestellen'. Ohne
-die notwendigen Mittel ist dies nicht möglich.
+'S Würde der Verein über Mittel verfügen
+(siehe \ref{a:mittel}), so könnte er einen
+hauptamtlichen Geschäftsführer bestellen'. Ohne
+die notwendigen Mittel ist dies nicht möglich.
\Clause{title={Vereinsmaier},dummy}
\label{p.maier}
@@ -99,17 +99,17 @@ Preis von einem der in \refClause{p.maier}
genannten Vereinsmaier erwerben.\label{a.preis}
'S Zum Erwerb der Mitgliedschaft ist ein formloser
-Antrag erforderlich'. Dieser Antrag ist in grüner
+Antrag erforderlich'. Dieser Antrag ist in grüner
Tinte auf rosa Papier einzureichen.
Die Mitgliedschaft kann nicht abgelehnt werden.
-\SubClause{title={Ergänzung zu vorstehendem
+\SubClause{title={Ergänzung zu vorstehendem
Paragraphen}}
'S Mit Abschaffung von \refClause{p.maier} verliert
\ref{a.preis} seine Umsetzbarkeit'. Mitgliedschaften
-können ersatzweise vererbt werden.
+können ersatzweise vererbt werden.
\Clause{title={Ende der Mitgliedschaft}}
@@ -118,22 +118,22 @@ lebenden Mitgliedern endet die Mitgliedschaft nicht.
\Clause{title={Mitgliederversammlung}}
-Zweimal jährlich findet eine Mitgliederversammlung statt.
+Zweimal jährlich findet eine Mitgliederversammlung statt.
Der Abstand zwischen zwei Mitgliederversammlungen
-beträgt höchstens 6~Monate, 1~Woche und 2~Tage.
+beträgt höchstens 6~Monate, 1~Woche und 2~Tage.
-Frühestens 6~Monate nach der letzten Mitgliederversammlung
-hat die Einladung zur nächsten Mitgliederversammlung zu
+Frühestens 6~Monate nach der letzten Mitgliederversammlung
+hat die Einladung zur nächsten Mitgliederversammlung zu
erfolgen.
-\SubClause{title={Ergänzung zur Mitgliederversammlung}}
+\SubClause{title={Ergänzung zur Mitgliederversammlung}}
-Die Mitgliederversammlung darf frühstens 2~Wochen nach
+Die Mitgliederversammlung darf frühstens 2~Wochen nach
letztem Eingang der Einladung abgehalten werden.
\end{contract}
-\section{Gültigkeit}
+\section{Gültigkeit}
\begin{contract}
\Clause{title={In Kraft treten}}
@@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ in Kraft.
'S Sollten irgendwelche Bestimmungen dieser Satzung im
Widerspruch zueinander stehen, tritt die Satzung am
11.\,11.\,2011 um 11:11~Uhr und 11~Sekunden wieder
-außer Kraft'. Der Verein ist in diesem Fall als
-aufgelöst zu betrachten.
+außer Kraft'. Der Verein ist in diesem Fall als
+aufgelöst zu betrachten.
\end{contract}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
index 36ecd1a7e3..46451d4706 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-notecolumn.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrlayer-notecolumn in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrlayer-notecolumn in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-notecolumn.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-05 10:50:56 +0100 (Mon, 05 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer-notecolumn)]
\chapter{Notizspalten mit \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}}
@@ -54,89 +54,89 @@
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-notecolumn}%
-Bis einschließlich Version~3.11b unterstützte \KOMAScript{} Notizspalten nur
+Bis einschließlich Version~3.11b unterstützte \KOMAScript{} Notizspalten nur
in Form der Marginalienspalte, die mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginline} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.marginline}) mit Inhalt versehen werden
-können. Jene Art der Randnotizen hat allerdings einige Nachteile:
+können. Jene Art der Randnotizen hat allerdings einige Nachteile:
\begin{itemize}
-\item Randnotizen können nur vollständig auf einer einzelnen Seite gesetzt
- werden. Seitenumbrüche\textnote{Seitenumbruch} innerhalb von Randnotizen
- sind nicht möglich. Dies führt teilweise dazu, dass die Randnotizen bis in
+\item Randnotizen können nur vollständig auf einer einzelnen Seite gesetzt
+ werden. Seitenumbrüche\textnote{Seitenumbruch} innerhalb von Randnotizen
+ sind nicht möglich. Dies führt teilweise dazu, dass die Randnotizen bis in
den unteren Rand hineinragen.
-\item Randnotizen in der Nähe des Seitenumbruchs können auf die nächste Seite
+\item Randnotizen in der Nähe des Seitenumbruchs können auf die nächste Seite
rutschen und dort im Falle des doppelseitigen Layouts mit alternierenden
Marginalienspalten im falschen Rand\textnote{Zuordnung zum richtigen Rand}
ausgegeben werden. Dieses Problem ist mit dem Zusatzpaket
\Package{mparhack}\IndexPackage{mparhack} oder durch Verwendung von
\Macro{marginnote} aus dem Paket
\Package{marginnote}\IndexPackage{marginnote} (siehe
- \cite{package:marginnote}) lösbar.
+ \cite{package:marginnote}) lösbar.
\item Randnotizen innerhalb von Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Gleitumgebungen} oder
- Fußnoten\textnote{Fußnoten} sind nicht möglich. Auch dieses Problem ist mit
- \Package{marginnote} lösbar.
+ Fußnoten\textnote{Fußnoten} sind nicht möglich. Auch dieses Problem ist mit
+ \Package{marginnote} lösbar.
\item Es gibt nur eine Marginalienspalte\textnote{mehrere Notizspalten} oder
allenfalls zwei, wenn mit \Macro{reversemarginpar} und
\Macro{normalmarginpar} gearbeitet wird, wobei \Macro{reversemarginpar} bei
doppelseitigen Dokumenten kaum zu gebrauchen ist.
\end{itemize}
-Die Verwendung von \Package{marginnote}\IndexPackage{marginnote} führt zu
-einem weiteren Problem. Da das Paket keine Kollisionserkennung besitzt, können
-sich Randnotizen, die in unmittelbarer Nähe veranlasst wurden, gegenseitig
-ganz oder teilweise überdecken. Darüber hinaus führt \Macro{marginnote} je
-nach den gewählten Einstellungen von \Package{marginnote} manchmal zu
-Veränderungen beim Zeilenabstand des normalen Textes.
+Die Verwendung von \Package{marginnote}\IndexPackage{marginnote} führt zu
+einem weiteren Problem. Da das Paket keine Kollisionserkennung besitzt, können
+sich Randnotizen, die in unmittelbarer Nähe veranlasst wurden, gegenseitig
+ganz oder teilweise überdecken. Darüber hinaus führt \Macro{marginnote} je
+nach den gewählten Einstellungen von \Package{marginnote} manchmal zu
+Veränderungen beim Zeilenabstand des normalen Textes.
Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} tritt an, all diese Probleme zu
-lösen. Dazu stützt es sich auf die Grundfunktionalität von
+lösen. Dazu stützt es sich auf die Grundfunktionalität von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}\IndexPackage{scrlayer}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}}. Damit einher geht
-jedoch auch ein Nachteil:\textnote{Achtung!} Notizen können nur auf den Seiten
+jedoch auch ein Nachteil:\textnote{Achtung!} Notizen können nur auf den Seiten
ausgegeben werden, die einen auf \hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}
-basierenden Seitenstil besitzen. Dieser Nachteil lässt sich mit Hilfe von
+basierenden Seitenstil besitzen. Dieser Nachteil lässt sich mit Hilfe von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} jedoch leicht
-auf"|lösen oder sogar in einen Vorteil verwandeln.
+auf"|lösen oder sogar in einen Vorteil verwandeln.
\section{Hinweise zum Entwicklungsstand}
\seclabel{draft}
-Das Paket wurde ursprünglich zur Demonstration des Potentials von
+Das Paket wurde ausschließlich zur Demonstration des Potentials von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}}
als sogenannter\textnote{Proof of Concept} \emph{Proof of Concept}
-entwickelt. Obwohl es sich derzeit noch in einem recht frühen
-Entwicklungsstadium befindet, ist die Stabilität von weiten Teilen weniger
+entwickelt. Obwohl es sich derzeit noch in einem recht frühen
+Entwicklungsstadium befindet, ist die Stabilität von weiten Teilen weniger
eine Frage von \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} als von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}. Dennoch ist davon auszugehen,
dass sich auch in \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} noch Fehler befinden. Es wird
darum gebeten, diese bei Auf"|finden zu melden. Einige
-\emph{Unzulänglichkeiten} des Pakets sind jedoch auch der Minimierung des
-Aufwands geschuldet. So können Notizspalten zwar über Seiten hinweg umbrochen
+\emph{Unzulänglichkeiten} des Pakets sind jedoch auch der Minimierung des
+Aufwands geschuldet. So können Notizspalten zwar über Seiten hinweg umbrochen
werden, allerdings findet dabei kein neuerlicher Absatzumbruch statt. Dies ist
bei \TeX{} schlicht nicht vorgesehen.
Da das Paket eher als experimentell\textnote{experimentell} gilt, findet sich
die Anleitung hier im zweiten Teil \iffree{der \KOMAScript-Anleitung}{dieses
Buches}. Dementsprechend richtet sie sich auch in erster Linie an erfahrene
-Anwender. Für Anfänger oder Anwender, die sich bereits deutlich auf dem Weg
-zum \LaTeX-Experten\textnote{für \LaTeX-Experten} befinden, mag daher einiges
-in den nachfolgenden Erklärungen unklar oder gar unverständlich
+Anwender. Für Anfänger oder Anwender, die sich bereits deutlich auf dem Weg
+zum \LaTeX-Experten\textnote{für \LaTeX-Experten} befinden, mag daher einiges
+in den nachfolgenden Erklärungen unklar oder gar unverständlich
sein. \iffree{Ich bitte um Nachsicht, dass ich bei experimentellen Paketen den
- Aufwand für die Anleitung halbwegs erträglich halten will.}{Sie sollten
- jedoch genügen, um einfache Aufgaben mit \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} lösen
- zu können. Gleichzeitig finden Entwickler hoffentlich nützliche Anregungen
- für eigene Ideen.}
+ Aufwand für die Anleitung halbwegs erträglich halten will.}{Sie sollten
+ jedoch genügen, um einfache Aufgaben mit \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} lösen
+ zu können. Gleichzeitig finden Entwickler hoffentlich nützliche Anregungen
+ für eigene Ideen.}
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
Es sei auch darauf\textnote{Achtung!} hingewiesen, dass der \KOMAScript-Autor
-nicht für die Weiterentwicklung des Pakets garantiert und nur eingeschränkten
-Support dafür bietet. Das liegt in der Natur eines Pakets, das nur zu
+nicht für die Weiterentwicklung des Pakets garantiert und nur eingeschränkten
+Support dafür bietet. Das liegt in der Natur eines Pakets, das nur zu
Demonstrationszwecken geschrieben wurde.%
\fi
-\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Textauszeichnungen}
@@ -148,17 +148,17 @@ Beim Laden des Pakets wird bereits automatisch eine Notizspalte namens
im Bereich der normalen Marginalienspalte von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar}
und \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginline}. Dabei werden auch die Einstellungen
\Macro{reversemarginpar} und \Macro{normalmarginpar} beachtet, allerdings
-nicht für die einzelnen Notizen, sondern nur für die gesamten Notizen einer
-Seite. Maßgeblich ist dabei die Einstellung, die am Ende der Seite, nämlich
+nicht für die einzelnen Notizen, sondern nur für die gesamten Notizen einer
+Seite. Maßgeblich ist dabei die Einstellung, die am Ende der Seite, nämlich
bei der Ausgabe der Notizspalte, gilt. Will man hingegen innerhalb einer Seite
sowohl Notizen links als auch rechts neben dem Haupttext haben, so sollte man
sich eine zweite Notizspalte definieren.
-Die Voreinstellungen für alle neu deklarierten Notizspalten entsprechen im
-Übrigen den erwähnten Einstellungen für die vordefinierte
+Die Voreinstellungen für alle neu deklarierten Notizspalten entsprechen im
+Übrigen den erwähnten Einstellungen für die vordefinierte
\PValue{marginpar}. %
\iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung
-Diese können bei der Deklaration jedoch leicht geändert werden.%
+Diese können bei der Deklaration jedoch leicht geändert werden.%
\fi
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass Notizspalten nur auf Seiten
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ ausgegeben werden, deren Seitenstil auf dem Paket
\Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} automatisch geladen und stellt in der
Voreinstellung lediglich den Seitenstil
\PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} bereit. Werden weitere Seitenstile
-benötigt, wird zusätzlich das Paket
+benötigt, wird zusätzlich das Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}
@@ -185,54 +185,54 @@ empfohlen.
\Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn}\OParameter{Liste~der~Einstellungen}
\Parameter{Name~der~Notizspalte}%
\end{Declaration}
-Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisungen können Notizspalten angelegt werden. Dabei
+Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisungen können Notizspalten angelegt werden. Dabei
erzeugt \Macro{DeclareNoteColumn} die Notizspalte ungeachtet der Tatsache, ob
-sie bereits existiert, während \Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn} einen
-Fehler ausgibt, falls der \PName{Name der Notizspalte} bereits für eine andere
+sie bereits existiert, während \Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn} einen
+Fehler ausgibt, falls der \PName{Name der Notizspalte} bereits für eine andere
Notizspalte vergeben ist und \Macro{ProvideNoteColumn} in eben diesem Fall
schlicht nichts tut. Mit \Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn} wiederum kann nur eine
bereits existierende Notiz-Spalte neu konfiguriert werden.
Bei der Neukonfigurierung bereits existierender Notizspalten mit
-\Macro{DeclareNoteColumn} oder \Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn} gehen im Übrigen
-die bereits erzeugten Notizen für diese Spalte nicht verloren, sondern bleiben
+\Macro{DeclareNoteColumn} oder \Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn} gehen im Ãœbrigen
+die bereits erzeugten Notizen für diese Spalte nicht verloren, sondern bleiben
erhalten.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.\PName{Name der Notizspalte}}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.marginpar}%
-Für neue Notizspalten wird immer ein Element zur Änderung der Schriftattribute
+Für neue Notizspalten wird immer ein Element zur Änderung der Schriftattribute
mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} angelegt,
-falls dieses noch nicht existiert. Als Name für das Element wird
+falls dieses noch nicht existiert. Als Name für das Element wird
\PValue{notecolumn.}\PName{Name der Notizspalte} verwendet. Dementsprechend
-existiert für die vordefinierte Notizspalte \PValue{marginpar} das
+existiert für die vordefinierte Notizspalte \PValue{marginpar} das
Element\textnote{Name des Elements} \PValue{notecolumn.marginpar}. Die
-Voreinstellung kann bei der Deklaration einer Notizspalte direkt über die
+Voreinstellung kann bei der Deklaration einer Notizspalte direkt über die
Option \Option{font} innerhalb der optionalen \PName{Liste der Einstellungen}
angegeben werden.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.marginpar}%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.\PName{Name der Notizspalte}}%
Die \PName{Liste der Einstellungen} ist eine durch Komma separierte Liste von
-Einstellungen oder Optionen. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind in
+Einstellungen oder Optionen. Die verfügbaren Optionen sind in
\autoref{tab:scrlayer-notecolumn.note.column.options},
\autopageref{tab:scrlayer-notecolumn.note.column.options} zu
finden. Als\textnote{Voreinstellung: Option \Option{marginpar}} Voreinstellung
ist \Option{marginpar} immer gesetzt, kann aber durch individuelle
-Einstellungen überschrieben werden.
+Einstellungen überschrieben werden.
Da die Notizspalten mit Hilfe von \hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}} definiert werden, wird
-auch für jede Notizspalte eine Ebene\Index{Ebenen} angelegt. Als
-Name\textnote{Name der Ebene} für diese Ebene wird ebenfalls
-\PValue{notecolumn.}\PName{Name der Notizspalte} verwendet. Näheres zu Ebenen
+auch für jede Notizspalte eine Ebene\Index{Ebenen} angelegt. Als
+Name\textnote{Name der Ebene} für diese Ebene wird ebenfalls
+\PValue{notecolumn.}\PName{Name der Notizspalte} verwendet. Näheres zu Ebenen
ist \autoref{sec:scrlayer.layers}, ab \autopageref{sec:scrlayer.layers} zu
entnehmen.
%
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie sind Professor für ulkiges Recht und wollen eine Abhandlung
- über das neue »Gesetz über die ausgelassene Verbreitung allgemeiner Späße«,
- kurz GüdaVaS, schreiben. Der Hauptaugenmerk soll dabei jeweils auf dem
- Kommentar zu einzelnen Paragraphen liegen. Sie entscheiden sich für ein
+ Angenommen, Sie sind Professor für ulkiges Recht und wollen eine Abhandlung
+ über das neue »Gesetz über die ausgelassene Verbreitung allgemeiner Späße«,
+ kurz GüdaVaS, schreiben. Der Hauptaugenmerk soll dabei jeweils auf dem
+ Kommentar zu einzelnen Paragraphen liegen. Sie entscheiden sich für ein
zweispaltiges Layout, wobei der Kommentar in der Hauptspalte enthalten sein
soll und die Paragraphen jeweils klein\iffree{ und in Farbe}{} in einer
schmaleren Notizspalte rechts daneben.
@@ -241,8 +241,8 @@ entnehmen.
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage{selinput}
\SelectInputMappings{
- adieresis={ä},
- germandbls={ß},
+ adieresis={ä},
+ germandbls={ß},
}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{lmodern}
@@ -277,11 +277,11 @@ entnehmen.
des \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel}-Pakets auf Deutsch (neue
Rechtschreibung) festgelegt. Die Eingabecodierung wird mit Hilfe von
\Package{selinput}\IndexPackage{selinput} automatisch bestimmt. Als Schrift
- wird Latin Modern in 8-Bit-Codierung verwendet.\iffree{ Für die
+ wird Latin Modern in 8-Bit-Codierung verwendet.\iffree{ Für die
Farbeinstellungen wird das Paket \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}
genutzt.}{}
- Bezüglich des Setzens von Gesetzestexten\textnote{Gesetz mit
+ Bezüglich des Setzens von Gesetzestexten\textnote{Gesetz mit
\hyperref[cha:scrjura]{\Package{scrjura}}} mit
\hyperref[cha:scrjura]{\Package{scrjura}}\IndexPackage{scrjura} sei auf
\iffree{dessen Anleitung}{\autoref{cha:scrjura}} verwiesen.
@@ -290,12 +290,12 @@ entnehmen.
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} mit
Seitenzahl verwendet werden soll, wird das Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
- \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen. Somit können Notizspalten auf allen
+ \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen. Somit können Notizspalten auf allen
Seiten ausgegeben werden.
Dann wird das Paket \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}\textnote{Notizspalte mit
- \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} für die Notizspalten geladen. Die
- gewünschte Breite der Notizspalte wird über
+ \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} für die Notizspalten geladen. Die
+ gewünschte Breite der Notizspalte wird über
\DescRef{typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea}%
\IndexPackage{typearea}%
\IndexCmd{AfterCalculatingTypearea} nach jeder etwaigen Neuberechnung des
@@ -310,64 +310,64 @@ entnehmen.
\fi
Mit dieser Information kann dann die neue Notizspalte definiert werden. Bei
- der Festlegung der Position wird ein einfacher Längenausdruck genutzt. Dabei
+ der Festlegung der Position wird ein einfacher Längenausdruck genutzt. Dabei
ist zu beachten, dass \Length{oddsidemargin} nicht der gesamte linke Rand
- ist, sondern aus historischen Gründen der linke Rand abzüglich
- 1\Unit{inch}. Daher muss dieser Wert noch hinzugezählt werden.
+ ist, sondern aus historischen Gründen der linke Rand abzüglich
+ 1\Unit{inch}. Daher muss dieser Wert noch hinzugezählt werden.
Damit ist die Deklaration abgeschlossen. Es ist zu beachten, dass die
- Notizspalte bisher im Textbereich ausgegeben wird. Die Notizspalte würde
- also den Text überschreiben.
+ Notizspalte bisher im Textbereich ausgegeben wird. Die Notizspalte würde
+ also den Text überschreiben.
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{document}
- \title{Kommentar zum GüdaVaS}
+ \title{Kommentar zum GüdaVaS}
\author{Professor R. O. Tenase}
\date{11.\,11.~2011}
\maketitle
\tableofcontents
\section{Vormerkung}
- Das GüdaVaS ist ohne jeden Zweifel das wichtigste
- Gesetz, das in Spaßmanien in den letzten eintausend
+ Das GüdaVaS ist ohne jeden Zweifel das wichtigste
+ Gesetz, das in Spaßmanien in den letzten eintausend
Jahren verabschiedet wurde. Die erste Lesung fand
- bereits am 11.\,11.~1111 im obersten spaßmanischen
- Kongress statt, wurde aber vom damaligen Spaßvesier
- abgelehnt. Erst nach Umwandlung der spaßmanischen,
- aberwitzigen Monarchie in eine repräsentative,
+ bereits am 11.\,11.~1111 im obersten spaßmanischen
+ Kongress statt, wurde aber vom damaligen Spaßvesier
+ abgelehnt. Erst nach Umwandlung der spaßmanischen,
+ aberwitzigen Monarchie in eine repräsentative,
witzige Monarchie durch W. Itzbold,
- den Urkomischen, am 9.\,9.~1999 war der Weg für
+ den Urkomischen, am 9.\,9.~1999 war der Weg für
dieses Gesetz endlich frei.
\end{lstcode}
Dadurch,\textnote{Achtung!} dass der Textbereich nicht verkleinert wurde, wird
-hier der ganze Vorspann über die Gesamtbreite ausgegeben. Um das Beispiel zu
-testen, können Sie vorübergehend
+hier der ganze Vorspann über die Gesamtbreite ausgegeben. Um das Beispiel zu
+testen, können Sie vorübergehend
\begin{lstcode}
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- ergänzen.
+ ergänzen.
\end{Example}
%
-Offen blieb in dem Beispiel die Frage, wie der Text für den Kommentar schmaler
+Offen blieb in dem Beispiel die Frage, wie der Text für den Kommentar schmaler
gesetzt werden kann. Dies werden Sie bei der Fortsetzung des Beispiels
erfahren.%
%
%\begin{table}% Umbruchoptimierung: Tabelle hinter das Beispiel verschoben
\begin{desclist}
\desccaption{%
-% \caption[Mögliche Einstellungen für die Deklaration von Notizspalten]{%
- Mögliche Einstellungen für die Deklaration von Notizspalten%
+% \caption[Mögliche Einstellungen für die Deklaration von Notizspalten]{%
+ Mögliche Einstellungen für die Deklaration von Notizspalten%
% }%
\label{tab:scrlayer-notecolumn.note.column.options}%
}{%
- Mögliche Einstellungen für die Deklaration von Notizspalten
+ Mögliche Einstellungen für die Deklaration von Notizspalten
(\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
% \begin{desctabular}
\entry{\OptionVName{font}{Schriftattribute}}{%
Einstellung der \PName{Schriftattribute} der Notizspalte mit Hilfe von
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}. Für erlaubte Werte sei auf
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}. Für erlaubte Werte sei auf
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} verwiesen.\par%
Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}%
@@ -390,12 +390,12 @@ erfahren.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{position}{Abstand}}{%
Die Notizspalte wird mit \PName{Abstand} vom linken Rand des Papiers
- gesetzt. Dabei sind für \PName{Abstand} auch komplexe Ausdrücke
+ gesetzt. Dabei sind für \PName{Abstand} auch komplexe Ausdrücke
gestattet, solange diese voll expandierbar sind und zum Zeitpunkt der
- Ausgabe der Notizspalte zu einer Länge oder zu einem Längenwert oder
- einem Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe
- \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für weitere Informationen zu
- Längenausdrücken.\par%
+ Ausgabe der Notizspalte zu einer Länge oder zu einem Längenwert oder
+ einem Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe
+ \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für weitere Informationen zu
+ Längenausdrücken.\par%
Voreinstellung: \emph{durch Option \Option{marginpar}}%
}%
\entry{\Option{reversemarginpar}}{%
@@ -406,12 +406,12 @@ erfahren.%
Voreinstellung: \emph{nein}%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{width}{Breite}}{%
- Die Notizspalte wird mit der angegebenen Breite gesetzt. Dabei sind für
- \PName{Breite} auch komplexe Ausdrücke gestattet, solange diese voll
+ Die Notizspalte wird mit der angegebenen Breite gesetzt. Dabei sind für
+ \PName{Breite} auch komplexe Ausdrücke gestattet, solange diese voll
expandierbar sind und zum Zeitpunkt der Ausgabe der Notizspalte zu einer
- Länge oder einem Längenwert oder einem Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe
- \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für weitere Informationen zu
- Längenausdrücken.\par%
+ Länge oder einem Längenwert oder einem Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe
+ \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für weitere Informationen zu
+ Längenausdrücken.\par%
Voreinstellung: \emph{durch Option \Option{marginpar}}%
}%
% \end{desctabular}
@@ -423,16 +423,16 @@ erfahren.%
\section{Erstellen einer Notiz}
\seclabel{makenote}
-Nachdem eine Notizspalte deklariert wurde, können Notizen für diese Spalte
+Nachdem eine Notizspalte deklariert wurde, können Notizen für diese Spalte
erstellt werden. Diese Notizen werden allerdings nicht unmittelbar ausgegeben,
-sondern zunächst nur in eine Hilfsdatei mit Endung »\File{.slnc}«
-geschrieben. Ganz genau werden die Notizen sogar zunächst in die
+sondern zunächst nur in eine Hilfsdatei mit Endung »\File{.slnc}«
+geschrieben. Ganz genau werden die Notizen sogar zunächst in die
\File{aux}-Datei geschrieben und erst beim Lesen der \File{aux}-Datei
innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} in die \File{slnc}-Datei
-übertragen. Dabei wird gegebenenfalls auch die Einstellung
-\Macro{nofiles}\IndexCmd{nofiles} beachtet. Beim nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf wird
-diese Hilfsdatei dann Stück für Stück je nach Fortschritt des Dokuments wieder
-eingelesen und am Ende der Seite werden die Notizen für die jeweilige Seite
+übertragen. Dabei wird gegebenenfalls auch die Einstellung
+\Macro{nofiles}\IndexCmd{nofiles} beachtet. Beim nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf wird
+diese Hilfsdatei dann Stück für Stück je nach Fortschritt des Dokuments wieder
+eingelesen und am Ende der Seite werden die Notizen für die jeweilige Seite
ausgegeben.
\iffree{}{\pagebreak}% Umbruchoptimierung
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ ausgegeben werden, deren Seitenstil auf dem Paket
\Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} automatisch geladen und stellt in der
Voreinstellung lediglich den Seitenstil
\PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} bereit. Werden weitere Seitenstile
-benötigt, wird zusätzlich das Paket
+benötigt, wird zusätzlich das Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}
@@ -456,30 +456,30 @@ empfohlen.
\Macro{makenote*}\OParameter{Name der Notizspalte}\Parameter{Notiz}
\end{Declaration}
Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisungen kann eine \PName{Notiz} erstellt werden. Dabei
-wird die aktuelle vertikale Position als vertikale Position für den Anfang der
-\PName{Notiz} verwendet. Die horizontale Position für die Notiz ergibt sich
-aus der definierten Position der Notizspalte. Für die korrekte Funktion ist
+wird die aktuelle vertikale Position als vertikale Position für den Anfang der
+\PName{Notiz} verwendet. Die horizontale Position für die Notiz ergibt sich
+aus der definierten Position der Notizspalte. Für die korrekte Funktion ist
das Paket dabei auf \Macro{pdfsavepos}\IndexCmd{pdfsavepos},
\Macro{pdflastypos}\IndexCmd{pdflastypos} und
\Macro{pdfpageheight}\IndexLength{pdfpageheight} beziehungsweise deren
Entsprechungen bei neueren Lua\TeX-Versionen angewiesen. Ohne diese Befehle
-funktioniert \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} nicht. Dabei wird außerdem davon
+funktioniert \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} nicht. Dabei wird außerdem davon
ausgegangen, dass die genannten Primitiven exakt die Ergebnisse von PDF\TeX{}
liefern.
Wird allerdings bei der Ausgabe der \PName{Notiz} eine
-Kollision\textnote{Kollisionsauf"|lösung} mit einer früheren Notiz in derselben
-Notizspalte erkannt, so wird die \PName{Notiz} bis unter diese frühere Notiz
+Kollision\textnote{Kollisionsauf"|lösung} mit einer früheren Notiz in derselben
+Notizspalte erkannt, so wird die \PName{Notiz} bis unter diese frühere Notiz
verschoben. Passt die \PName{Notiz} nicht mehr auf die
Seite\textnote{Seitenumbruch}\Index{Seiten>Umbruch}, so wird sie ganz oder
-teilweise auf die nächste Seite umbrochen.
+teilweise auf die nächste Seite umbrochen.
-Für welche Notizspalte die \PName{Notiz} erstellt werden soll, wird über das
+Für welche Notizspalte die \PName{Notiz} erstellt werden soll, wird über das
optionale Argument \PName{Name der Notizspalte} bestimmt. Ist kein optionales
Argument angegeben, so wird die vordefinierte Notizspalte \PValue{marginpar}
verwendet.%
\begin{Example}
- Fügen wir nun dem Beispiel aus dem vorherigen Abschnitt einen kommentierten
+ Fügen wir nun dem Beispiel aus dem vorherigen Abschnitt einen kommentierten
Paragraphen hinzu, wobei der Paragraph selbst in der neu definierten
Notizspalte gesetzt werden soll.
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -503,17 +503,17 @@ verwendet.%
dokumentierte Umgebung
\DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}\IndexEnv{addmargin}\textnote{Spaltenbreite
mit \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}} wird genutzt, um den
- Haupttext in der Breite um die Spalte für die Paragraphen zu
+ Haupttext in der Breite um die Spalte für die Paragraphen zu
vermindern.
Hier ist auch eines der wenigen Probleme bei Verwendung von \Macro{makenote}
zu erkennen. Da das obligatorische Argument in Dateien geschrieben wird,
- können Befehle\textnote{zerbrechliche Befehle} innerhalb des Arguments
+ können Befehle\textnote{zerbrechliche Befehle} innerhalb des Arguments
leider \emph{zerbrechen}. Um das zu verhindern, wird empfohlen, vor alle
Befehle ein \Macro{protect} zu setzen. Anderenfalls kann die Verwendung von
- Befehlen innerhalb dieses Arguments zu Fehlermeldungen führen.
+ Befehlen innerhalb dieses Arguments zu Fehlermeldungen führen.
- Prinzipiell könnten Sie das Beispiel nun bereits mit
+ Prinzipiell könnten Sie das Beispiel nun bereits mit
\begin{lstcode}
\end{addmargin}
\end{document}
@@ -522,18 +522,42 @@ verwendet.%
\end{Example}%
Beim Testen des Beispiels, werden Sie feststellen, dass die Gesetzes\-spalte
tiefer hinunter reicht als der Kommentartext. Wenn\textnote{Achtung!} Sie
-zwecks Übung einen weiteren Abschnitt mit einem weiteren Paragraphen
-hinzufügen, ergibt sich eventuell das Problem, dass der Kommentar nicht
+zwecks Ãœbung einen weiteren Abschnitt mit einem weiteren Paragraphen
+hinzufügen, ergibt sich eventuell das Problem, dass der Kommentar nicht
unterhalb des Gesetzestextes, sondern direkt im Anschluss an den bisherigen
-Kommentar fortgesetzt wird. Eine Lösung für dieses Problem, werden Sie gleich
+Kommentar fortgesetzt wird. Eine Lösung für dieses Problem, werden Sie gleich
kennenlernen.
-Das\ChangedAt{v0.1.2583}{\Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} im Beispiel erwähnte
+Das\ChangedAt{v0.1.2583}{\Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} im Beispiel erwähnte
Problem mit dem Zerbrechen von Befehlen tritt bei der
Sternvariante\important{\Macro{makenote*}} normalerweise nicht auf. Diese
verwendet \Macro{detokenize}, um die Expansion zu verhindern. Das bedeutet
aber auch, dass man in der \PName{Notiz} keine Befehle verwenden sollte, die
-ihre Bedeutung innerhalb des Dokuments verändern.%
+ihre Bedeutung innerhalb des Dokuments verändern.
+
+Allerdings treten bei beiden Formen zwei andere Probleme\textnote{Achtung!}
+auf. Das erste betrifft die Verwendung von Farbe mit Hilfe von
+\Package{color}\IndexPackage{color} oder \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}
+innerhalb der Notizspalten. Um Farbumschaltungen innerhalb der Notizspalten zu
+ermöglichen, wäre für jede Notizspalte eine eigene Farbverwaltung mit einem
+sogenannten \emph{Color Stack} notwendig. Da das Paket lediglich als
+Machbarkeitsstudie entworfen ist und \XeTeX{} nicht mehrere \emph{Color
+ Stacks} unterstützt, sind mit \XeTeX{} Farbumschaltungen nur eingeschränkt
+über die Schriftattribute des Elements \FontElement{notecolumn.\PName{Name der
+ Notizspalte}} möglich, wodurch der Aufwand für die Implementierung einer
+eigenen Farbverwaltung umgangen wurde.
+
+Das zweite, eher konzeptionelle Problem\textnote{Achtung!} ist, dass die
+Hilfsdatei mit den Informationen zum Inhalt der Notizspalte während der
+Verarbeitung der Kopfzeile einer Seite eingelesen wird. Das hat vor allem dann
+Auswirkungen, wenn dies geschieht, während eine Umgebung wie
+\Environment{verbatim} aktiv ist. In diesem Fall wären während des Einlesens
+der Hilfsdatei die \Macro{catcode}-Einstellungen dieser Umgebung aktiv. Dies
+würde zwangsläufig zu Fehlern in der Verarbeitung und Ausgabe führen. Um dies
+abzumildern, werden während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die
+\Macro{catcode}-Einstellungen der in \Macro{dospecials}\IndexCmd{dospecials}
+gespeicherten Zeichen gespeichert und während dem Einlesen der Hilfsdatei
+explizit wiederhergestellt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -551,25 +575,25 @@ Parallel zum Erstellen der Synchronisierungspunkte wird ermittelt, ob in
der Notizspalte und im Haupttext beim letzten \LaTeX-Lauf eine Marke angelegt
wurde. Falls das der Fall ist, werden deren Werte miteinander
verglichen. Liegt die Marke der Notizspalte tiefer auf der Seite oder auf
-einer späteren Seite, so wird im Haupttext bis zu der Stelle der Notizspalte
-vorgerückt.
+einer späteren Seite, so wird im Haupttext bis zu der Stelle der Notizspalte
+vorgerückt.
In der Regel sollten Synchronisierungspunkte\textnote{Hinweis!} nicht
innerhalb eines Absatzes des Haupttextes, sondern nur zwischen diesen gesetzt
werden. Wird \Macro{syncwithnotecolumn} dennoch innerhalb eines Absatzes
-verwendet, so wird der Synchronisierungspunkt im Haupttext tatsächlich erst
-nach der aktuellen Zeile eingefügt. In dieser Hinsicht ähnelt
+verwendet, so wird der Synchronisierungspunkt im Haupttext tatsächlich erst
+nach der aktuellen Zeile eingefügt. In dieser Hinsicht ähnelt
\Macro{syncwithnotecolumn} also beispielsweise
\Macro{vspace}\IndexCmd{vspace}.
-Dadurch, dass Synchronisierungspunkte in den Notizspalten erst beim nächsten
-\LaTeX-Lauf\textnote{mehrere \LaTeX-Läufe} erkannt werden, benötigt der
-Mechanismus mindestens drei \LaTeX-Läufe. Aus jeder neuen Synchronisierung
-können sich außerdem Verschiebungen für spätere Synchronisierungspunkte
-ergeben, was wiederum die Notwendigkeit weiterer \LaTeX-Läufe nach sich
+Dadurch, dass Synchronisierungspunkte in den Notizspalten erst beim nächsten
+\LaTeX-Lauf\textnote{mehrere \LaTeX-Läufe} erkannt werden, benötigt der
+Mechanismus mindestens drei \LaTeX-Läufe. Aus jeder neuen Synchronisierung
+können sich außerdem Verschiebungen für spätere Synchronisierungspunkte
+ergeben, was wiederum die Notwendigkeit weiterer \LaTeX-Läufe nach sich
zieht. Zu erkennen sind solche Verschiebungen in der Regel an der Meldung:
-»\LaTeX{} Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross-references
-right.« Aber auch Meldungen über undefinierte \emph{Labels} können auf die
+»\LaTeX{} Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross-references
+right.« Aber auch Meldungen über undefinierte \emph{Labels} können auf die
Notwendigkeit eines weiteren \LaTeX-Laufs hinweisen.
Wird das optionale Argument nicht angegeben, so wird an seiner Stelle
@@ -581,17 +605,17 @@ optionalen Arguments ist!
Es ist nicht\textnote{Achtung!} erlaubt, \Macro{syncwithnotecolumn} innerhalb
einer Notiz selbst, also im obligatorischen Argument von
\Macro{makenote}\IndexCmd{makenote} zu verwenden! Dieser Fehler kann derzeit
-nicht abgefangen werden und führt dazu, dass mit jedem \LaTeX-Lauf neue
-Verschiebungen auf"|treten, so dass nie ein endgültiger Zustand erreicht
+nicht abgefangen werden und führt dazu, dass mit jedem \LaTeX-Lauf neue
+Verschiebungen auf"|treten, so dass nie ein endgültiger Zustand erreicht
wird. Um zwei oder mehrere Notizspalten miteinander zu synchronisieren, sind
diese stattdessen mit dem Haupttext zu synchronisieren, da dabei auch die
Spalten miteinander synchronisiert werden. Die hierzu empfohlene Anweisung
wird nachfolgend beschrieben.%
%
\begin{Example}
- Führen wir nun das obige Beispiel fort, indem wir zunächst einen
+ Führen wir nun das obige Beispiel fort, indem wir zunächst einen
Synchronisationspunkt und dann einen weiteren Paragraphen
- mit Kommentar hinzufügen:
+ mit Kommentar hinzufügen:
\begin{lstcode}
\syncwithnotecolumn[paragraphs]\bigskip
\makenote[paragraphs]{%
@@ -599,7 +623,7 @@ wird nachfolgend beschrieben.%
\protect\Clause{title={Komik der Kultur}}
\setcounter{par}{0}%
Die Komik eines Witzes kann durch das
- kulturelle Umfeld, in dem er erzählt wird,
+ kulturelle Umfeld, in dem er erzählt wird,
bestimmt sein.
Die Komik eines Witzes kann durch das
@@ -608,7 +632,7 @@ wird nachfolgend beschrieben.%
\protect\end{contract}
}
Die kulturelle Komponente eines Witzes ist
- tatsächlich nicht zu vernachlässigen. Über die
+ tatsächlich nicht zu vernachlässigen. Über die
politische Korrektheit der Nutzung des
kulturellen Umfeldes kann zwar trefflich
gestritten werden, nichtsdestotrotz ist die
@@ -616,19 +640,19 @@ wird nachfolgend beschrieben.%
entsprechenden Umfeld frappierend. Auf der
anderen Seite kann ein vermeintlicher Witz im
falschen kulturellen Umfeld auch zu einer
- echten Gefahr für den Witzeerzähler werden.
+ echten Gefahr für den Witzeerzähler werden.
\end{lstcode}
- Außer dem Synchronisationspunkt wurde hier auch noch ein vertikaler
- Abstand mit \Macro{bigskip} eingefügt, um die einzelnen Paragraphen und ihre
+ Außer dem Synchronisationspunkt wurde hier auch noch ein vertikaler
+ Abstand mit \Macro{bigskip} eingefügt, um die einzelnen Paragraphen und ihre
Kommentare besser voneinander abzusetzen.
- Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} wird hier ein weiterer Punkt, der zu einem
+ Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} wird hier ein weiterer Punkt, der zu einem
Problem werden kann, sichtbar. Da die Notizspalten mit Boxen arbeiten, die
- zusammengebaut und zerlegt werden, kann es bei Zählern\textnote{Zähler in
+ zusammengebaut und zerlegt werden, kann es bei Zählern\textnote{Zähler in
Notizspalten} innerhalb der Notizspalten teilweise zu Verschiebungen
- kommen. Im Beispiel würde daher der erste Absatz nicht mit 1, sondern mit 2
- nummeriert. Dies kann jedoch mit einem beherzten Zurücksetzen des
- entsprechenden Zählers leicht korrigiert werden.
+ kommen. Im Beispiel würde daher der erste Absatz nicht mit 1, sondern mit 2
+ nummeriert. Dies kann jedoch mit einem beherzten Zurücksetzen des
+ entsprechenden Zählers leicht korrigiert werden.
Das Beispiel ist damit fast fertig, was noch fehlt, ist das Ende der
Umgebungen:
@@ -636,19 +660,19 @@ wird nachfolgend beschrieben.%
\end{addmargin}
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Tatsächlich wären natürlich auch noch die restlichen Paragraphen des
+ Tatsächlich wären natürlich auch noch die restlichen Paragraphen des
Gesetzes zu kommentieren. Dies sei mir hier jedoch erlassen.
\end{Example}%
-Doch halt! Was wäre, wenn in diesem Beispiel der Paragraph nicht mehr auf die
-Seiten passen würde? Würde er dann auf der nächsten Seite ausgegeben? Diese
-Frage wird im nächsten Abschnitt beantwortet werden.
+Doch halt! Was wäre, wenn in diesem Beispiel der Paragraph nicht mehr auf die
+Seiten passen würde? Würde er dann auf der nächsten Seite ausgegeben? Diese
+Frage wird im nächsten Abschnitt beantwortet werden.
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{syncwithnotecolumns}\OParameter{Liste von Notizspalte}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisung führt eine Synchronisierung des Haupttextes mit allen in der
+Diese Anweisung führt eine Synchronisierung des Haupttextes mit allen in der
mit Komma separierten \PName{Liste von Notizspalten} durch. Dabei wird der
Haupttext mit der Notizspalte synchronisiert, deren Marke am weitesten hinten
im Dokument steht. Somit werden als Nebeneffekt auch die Notizspalten
@@ -666,8 +690,8 @@ synchronisiert.%
Neben der normalen Ausgabe der Notizspalten, wie sie im vorherigen Abschnitt
beschrieben ist, ist es manchmal auch erforderlich, alle aufgesammelten
Notizen, die noch nicht ausgegeben wurden, auszugeben. Das ist insbesondere
-dann sinnvoll, wenn längere Notizen dazu führen, dass immer mehr Notizen nach
-unten und auf neue Seiten verschoben werden. Ein guter Zeitpunkt für eine
+dann sinnvoll, wenn längere Notizen dazu führen, dass immer mehr Notizen nach
+unten und auf neue Seiten verschoben werden. Ein guter Zeitpunkt für eine
solche erzwungene Ausgabe\Index{Ausgabe>erzwungene} ist beispielsweise das
Ende eines Kapitels oder das Ende des Dokuments.
@@ -675,35 +699,35 @@ Ende eines Kapitels oder das Ende des Dokuments.
\Macro{clearnotecolumn}\OParameter{Name der Notizspalte}
\end{Declaration}
Mit dieser Anweisung werden alle Notizen einer bestimmen Notizspalte
-ausgegeben, die\textnote{anhängige Notizen}\Index{Notiz>anhaengige=anhängige}
+ausgegeben, die\textnote{anhängige Notizen}\Index{Notiz>anhaengige=anhängige}
bis zum Ende der aktuellen Seite noch nicht ausgegeben sind, aber auf dieser
oder einer vorherigen Seite erstellt wurden. Zur Ausgabe dieser noch
-anhängigen Notizen werden nach Bedarf Leerseiten erstellt. Während der Ausgabe
-der anhängigen Notizen dieser Notizspalte werden gegebenenfalls auch anhängige
+anhängigen Notizen werden nach Bedarf Leerseiten erstellt. Während der Ausgabe
+der anhängigen Notizen dieser Notizspalte werden gegebenenfalls auch anhängige
Notizen anderer Notizspalten ausgegeben, jedoch nur so lange, wie dies zur
-Ausgabe der anhängigen Notizen der angegebenen Notizspalte notwendig ist.
+Ausgabe der anhängigen Notizen der angegebenen Notizspalte notwendig ist.
-Während der Ausgabe der anhängigen Notizen kann es auch geschehen, dass
-irrtümlich Notizen\textnote{irrtümliche
- Notizen}\Index{Notiz>irrtuemliche=irrtümliche} ausgegeben werden, die im
+Während der Ausgabe der anhängigen Notizen kann es auch geschehen, dass
+irrtümlich Notizen\textnote{irrtümliche
+ Notizen}\Index{Notiz>irrtuemliche=irrtümliche} ausgegeben werden, die im
vorherigen \LaTeX-Lauf auf den Seiten erstellt wurden, die nun durch die
-eingefügten Leerseiten ersetzt werden. Dies normalisiert sich in einem der
-nächsten \LaTeX-Läufe. Zu erkennen sind solche Verschiebungen in der Regel an
-der Meldung: »\LaTeX{} Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get
-cross-references right.«
+eingefügten Leerseiten ersetzt werden. Dies normalisiert sich in einem der
+nächsten \LaTeX-Läufe. Zu erkennen sind solche Verschiebungen in der Regel an
+der Meldung: »\LaTeX{} Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get
+cross-references right.«
-Die Notizspalte, deren anhängige Notizen ausgegeben werden soll, ist über das
+Die Notizspalte, deren anhängige Notizen ausgegeben werden soll, ist über das
optionale Argument, \PName{Name der Notizspalte}, angegeben. Ist kein solches
Argument angegeben, so wird die vordefinierte Notizspalte \PValue{marginpar}
verwendet.
Dem aufmerksamen Leser\textnote{erzwungene Ausgabe vs. Synchronisation} wird
nicht entgangen sein, dass die erzwungene Ausgabe einer Notizspalte der
-Synchronisierung nicht unähnlich ist. Allerdings befindet man sich nach der
-erzwungenen Ausgabe im Fall, dass tatsächlich eine Ausgabe stattfindet, am
+Synchronisierung nicht unähnlich ist. Allerdings befindet man sich nach der
+erzwungenen Ausgabe im Fall, dass tatsächlich eine Ausgabe stattfindet, am
Anfang der Seite nach der letzten Ausgabe und nicht unmittelbar unterhalb der
-letzten Ausgabe. Dafür terminiert die erzwungene Ausgabe in der Regel mit
-weniger \LaTeX-Läufen.%
+letzten Ausgabe. Dafür terminiert die erzwungene Ausgabe in der Regel mit
+weniger \LaTeX-Läufen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -714,51 +738,51 @@ Diese Anweisung arbeitet vergleichbar mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumn}. Allerdings kann hier als optionales
Argument nicht nur eine Notizspalte angegeben werden, sondern es ist eine
durch Komma getrennte Liste mehrerer Namen von Notizspalten erlaubt. Es werden
-dann die anhängigen Notizen all dieser Spalten ausgegeben.
+dann die anhängigen Notizen all dieser Spalten ausgegeben.
Wurde das optionale Argument nicht angegeben oder ist es leer, so werden die
-anhängigen Notizen aller Notizspalten ausgegeben.%
+anhängigen Notizen aller Notizspalten ausgegeben.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{autoclearnotecolumns}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-In der Regel wird man anhängige Notizen immer dann ausgeben lassen, wenn im
+In der Regel wird man anhängige Notizen immer dann ausgeben lassen, wenn im
Dokument explizit oder implizit -- beispielsweise in Folge von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} -- die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}
-ausgeführt wird. Dies ist auch am Ende eines Dokuments innerhalb von
-\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} der Fall. Über die Option
-\Option{autoclearnotecolumns} kann daher gesteuert werden, ob bei Ausführung
+ausgeführt wird. Dies ist auch am Ende eines Dokuments innerhalb von
+\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} der Fall. Ãœber die Option
+\Option{autoclearnotecolumns} kann daher gesteuert werden, ob bei Ausführung
von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} automatisch auch
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} ohne Argument ausgeführt werden
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} ohne Argument ausgeführt werden
soll.
-Da davon ausgegangen wird, dass dies in der Regel erwünscht ist, ist die
-Option in der Voreinstellung aktiv. Man kann sie jedoch über die
-entsprechenden Werte für einfache Schalter (siehe
+Da davon ausgegangen wird, dass dies in der Regel erwünscht ist, ist die
+Option in der Voreinstellung aktiv. Man kann sie jedoch über die
+entsprechenden Werte für einfache Schalter (siehe
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}) jederzeit
aus- und auch wieder einschalten.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass im Falle der Deaktivierung der
-automatischen Ausgabe anhängiger Notizen am Ende des Dokument Notizen ganz
-oder teilweise verloren gehen können. Daher sollte man in diesem Fall vor
+automatischen Ausgabe anhängiger Notizen am Ende des Dokument Notizen ganz
+oder teilweise verloren gehen können. Daher sollte man in diesem Fall vor
\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} sicherheitshalber ein
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} einfügen.
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} einfügen.
Damit ist nun auch die Frage nach dem Beispiel im letzten Abschnitt
-beantwortet, ob der Paragraph auch komplett ausgegeben würde, wenn er auf die
-nächste Seite umbrochen werden müsste. Dies ist in der Voreinstellung
-selbstverständlich der Fall. Da es jedoch nach dem Ende der
-\DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}-Umgebung geschehen würde, könnte es eventuell
-noch zu Überlappungen durch nachfolgenden Text kommen. Daher wäre es im
+beantwortet, ob der Paragraph auch komplett ausgegeben würde, wenn er auf die
+nächste Seite umbrochen werden müsste. Dies ist in der Voreinstellung
+selbstverständlich der Fall. Da es jedoch nach dem Ende der
+\DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}-Umgebung geschehen würde, könnte es eventuell
+noch zu Überlappungen durch nachfolgenden Text kommen. Daher wäre es im
Beispiel durchaus sinnvoll, nach der \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}-Umgebung
-einen weiteren Synchronisationspunkt einzufügen.
+einen weiteren Synchronisationspunkt einzufügen.
-Das Ergebnis des Beispiels ist übrigens in
+Das Ergebnis des Beispiels ist übrigens in
\autoref{fig:scrlayer-notecolumn.example} zu sehen.\iffree{}{ Dabei wurde
- lediglich die Farbeinstellung für die \PValue{paragraphs}-Spalte von Blau in
- Grau geändert.}
+ lediglich die Farbeinstellung für die \PValue{paragraphs}-Spalte von Blau in
+ Grau geändert.}
\begin{figure}
\KOMAoptions{captions=bottombeside}%
@@ -778,7 +802,7 @@ Das Ergebnis des Beispiels ist übrigens in
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "scrlayer-de.tex"
%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t
@@ -786,7 +810,7 @@ Das Ergebnis des Beispiels ist übrigens in
% LocalWords: Randnotizen Entwicklungsstadium Notizspalte Notizspalten
% LocalWords: Neukonfigurierung Synchronisierungspunkt marginpar marginline
-% LocalWords: Haupttext Demonstrationszwecken Längenausdruck Gesetzestexten
-% LocalWords: Längenausdrücken Satzspiegels typearea scrlayer notecolumn
+% LocalWords: Haupttext Demonstrationszwecken Längenausdruck Gesetzestexten
+% LocalWords: Längenausdrücken Satzspiegels typearea scrlayer notecolumn
% LocalWords: AfterCalculatingTypearea scrjura scrpage Farbeinstellung
% LocalWords: Sternvariante
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
index 1c01b4598e..6e8741f6f3 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -39,30 +39,30 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Expertenkapitel über scrlayer-scrpage in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Expertenkapitel über scrlayer-scrpage in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-01-31 09:21:42 +0100 (Wed, 31 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlayer-scrpage for experts)]
-\chapter[{Zusätzliche Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}]
-{Zusätzliche Möglichkeiten des
+\chapter[{Zusätzliche Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}]
+{Zusätzliche Möglichkeiten des
Pakets\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}
\labelbase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}
%
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}%
-Über die Erklärungen in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} von
+Über die Erklärungen in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} von
\autoref{part:forAuthors} diese\iffree{r Anleitung}{s Buches} hinaus bietet
-das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} viele weitere Möglichkeiten. Diese
+das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} viele weitere Möglichkeiten. Diese
stellen jedoch Erweiterungen dar, die der durchschnittliche Anwender
-nicht zwingend benötigt oder die nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu
+nicht zwingend benötigt oder die nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu
\Package{scrpage2} existieren. Ihre Dokumentation hier in
\autoref{part:forExperts} dient der Vertiefung und der Erweiterung des
-Wissens. Ihre Beherrschung geht über grundlegende Fähigkeiten hinaus.
+Wissens. Ihre Beherrschung geht über grundlegende Fähigkeiten hinaus.
\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation}% \section{Beeinflussung von definierten Seitenstilen}
@@ -72,23 +72,23 @@ Wissens. Ihre Beherrschung geht über grundlegende Fähigkeiten hinaus.
In \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} wurden die beiden
Seitenstile \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}
vorgestellt. Diese bilden quasi ein Paar, bei dem \PageStyle{scrheadings} als
-Haupt-Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel vorgesehen ist, während
+Haupt-Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel vorgesehen ist, während
\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} ein dazu passender \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil
-ohne Kolumnentitel aber üblicherweise mit Paginierung, also mit Seitenzahl
+ohne Kolumnentitel aber üblicherweise mit Paginierung, also mit Seitenzahl
ist. Neben der Konfiguration dieses vordefinierten Paares bietet
-\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch die Möglichkeit, zusätzliche Paare zu
+\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch die Möglichkeit, zusätzliche Paare zu
definieren. Der Name des Haupt-Seitenstils, beispielsweise
\PageStyle{scrheadings}, dient dabei quasi auch als Name des Seitenstil-Paares.
\iffree{Die allermeisten Anwender werden in der Regel mit dem einen
vordefinierten Seitenstil-Paar \PageStyle{scrheadings} auskommen. Die in
- diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Anweisungen sind daher eher Ergänzungen für
- besondere Fälle. Da mir während des Abfassens dieser Anleitung keine
+ diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Anweisungen sind daher eher Ergänzungen für
+ besondere Fälle. Da mir während des Abfassens dieser Anleitung keine
handlichen Anwendungsbeispiele eingefallen sind, gibt es auch keine
- ausführlichen Beispiele. Sollte mir im Support einmal eine besonders schöne
- Anwendung begegnen, werde ich solche aber in zukünftigen Fassungen gerne
- aufgreifen. Ich bin jedoch gleichzeitig sicher, dass sich all diese Fälle
- auch mit dem einen Paar \PageStyle{scrheadings} lösen lassen.}{}
+ ausführlichen Beispiele. Sollte mir im Support einmal eine besonders schöne
+ Anwendung begegnen, werde ich solche aber in zukünftigen Fassungen gerne
+ aufgreifen. Ich bin jedoch gleichzeitig sicher, dass sich all diese Fälle
+ auch mit dem einen Paar \PageStyle{scrheadings} lösen lassen.}{}
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{defpairofpagestyles}\OParameter{Eltern-Paar}
@@ -100,13 +100,13 @@ definieren. Der Name des Haupt-Seitenstils, beispielsweise
\Macro{providepairofpagestyles}\OParameter{Eltern-Paar}
\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit diesen Anweisungen können Paare von Seitenstilen vergleichbar zu
+Mit diesen Anweisungen können Paare von Seitenstilen vergleichbar zu
\PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} definiert
werden. Dabei ist \PName{Name} der Name des zu \PageStyle{scrheadings}
-vergleichbaren Hauptseitenstils, der für die Verwendung mit Kolumnentiteln
-ausgelegt ist. Für den Namen des zugehörigen \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil wird
+vergleichbaren Hauptseitenstils, der für die Verwendung mit Kolumnentiteln
+ausgelegt ist. Für den Namen des zugehörigen \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil wird
\PName{Name} automatisch \PValue{plain.} vorangestellt. \PName{Name} ist also
-gleichzeitig der Name des Paares und des Hauptseitenstils dieses Paares, während
+gleichzeitig der Name des Paares und des Hauptseitenstils dieses Paares, während
\PValue{plain.}\PName{Name} der Name des \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstils dieses
Paares ist.
@@ -116,10 +116,10 @@ werden soll. Das neue Paar erbt also quasi die Konfiguration des
\PName{Eltern-Paar}s.
{\setlength{\emergencystretch}{1em}%
-Während in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} der Eindruck
-entstanden sein mag, dass sich die dort erläuterten Anweisungen nur auf
+Während in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} der Eindruck
+entstanden sein mag, dass sich die dort erläuterten Anweisungen nur auf
\PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} beziehen, gilt das
-tatsächlich nur, solange diese beiden Seitenstile das einzige Seitenstil-Paar
+tatsächlich nur, solange diese beiden Seitenstile das einzige Seitenstil-Paar
darstellen. Sobald es mehrere Seitenstil-Paare gibt, beziehen sich
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead},
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead},
@@ -137,10 +137,10 @@ auf das zuletzt aktive Paar.\par}
dokumentierten Anweisungen
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles},
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles} und
- \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} für die
+ \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} für die
Verwendung im letzten Parameter, \PName{Definition}, gedacht. In diesem Fall
stellen sie eine Art Grundkonfiguration des Seitenstil-Paares dar, die immer
- dann ausgeführt wird, wenn das Seitenstil-Paar aktiviert wird. Ein
+ dann ausgeführt wird, wenn das Seitenstil-Paar aktiviert wird. Ein
Seitenstil-Paar wird aktiviert, indem einer der beiden Seitenstile des
Paares aktiviert wird. Dies geschieht in der Regel mit Hilfe von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}.\par}
@@ -148,16 +148,16 @@ auf das zuletzt aktive Paar.\par}
Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die Anweisungen aus
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} ab
\autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} ohnehin allgemeiner Natur
-sind und für alle mit \PageStyle{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten Seitenstile
+sind und für alle mit \PageStyle{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten Seitenstile
gelten.
-Während\textnote{Unterschiede} \Macro{defpairofpagestyles} das Seitenstil-Paar
-unabhängig davon, ob entsprechende Seitenstile bereits existieren, definiert,
+Während\textnote{Unterschiede} \Macro{defpairofpagestyles} das Seitenstil-Paar
+unabhängig davon, ob entsprechende Seitenstile bereits existieren, definiert,
tun \Macro{newpairofpagestyles} und \Macro{providepairofpagestyles} dies nur,
wenn die Seitenstile noch nicht definiert sind. Ist mindestens einer der
beiden Seitenstile des Paares bereits definiert, so wird die neuerliche
Definition bei \Macro{providepairofpagestyles} ignoriert, wohingegen sie bei
-\Macro{newpairofpagestyles} zu einem Fehler führt. Für die Umdefinierung
+\Macro{newpairofpagestyles} zu einem Fehler führt. Für die Umdefinierung
bereits existierender Paare kann \Macro{renewpairofpagestyles} verwendet
werden. Hier wird ein Fehler gemeldet, wenn einer der beiden Seitenstile oder
beide Seitenstile des Paares noch nicht existieren.%
@@ -173,18 +173,18 @@ Mit \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles} wird der Hauptseitenstil
des zuletzt aktivierten Seitenstil-Paares leer konfiguriert. Dagegen wird mit
der Anweisung \Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles} der
\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil des entsprechenden Seitenstil-Paares leer
-konfiguriert. Anweisung \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} konfiguriert schließlich
+konfiguriert. Anweisung \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} konfiguriert schließlich
beide Seitenstile des entsprechenden Paares als leer.
Es ist jedoch zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass keine dieser Anweisungen
die Definitionen aus dem Parameter \PName{Definition}, der bei der Definition
des Seitenstil-Paares angegeben wurde (siehe oben), entfernt. Bei der erneuten
Auswahl eines Seitenstils des Paares werden jene Einstellungen also erneut
-ausgeführt!
+ausgeführt!
-Die Anweisungen können ebenfalls innerhalb von \PName{Definition} bei der
-zuvor erklärten Definition eines Seitenstil-Paares verwendet werden. Sie
-können aber auch jederzeit außerhalb der Definition eines Seitenstil-Paares
+Die Anweisungen können ebenfalls innerhalb von \PName{Definition} bei der
+zuvor erklärten Definition eines Seitenstil-Paares verwendet werden. Sie
+können aber auch jederzeit außerhalb der Definition eines Seitenstil-Paares
verwendet werden. In diesem Fall beziehen sie sich auf das zuletzt aktivierte
Paar.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -195,50 +195,50 @@ Paar.%
Neben den vordefinierten Seitenstilen bietet \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch
noch eine eher grundlegende Schnittstelle zur Definition von Seitenstilen. Die
-bisher erläuterten Konzepte greifen bei der Implementierung ebenso wie die von
-\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle.triple} auf diese Möglichkeit
-zurück. Aufgrund ihrer hohen Komplexität wird sie jedoch nur erfahrenen
-Anwendern empfohlen. Weniger erfahrene Anwender können mit den vorgenannten
-Möglichkeiten bereits nahezu alles erreichen, was auch mit dieser
-grundlegenden Schnittstelle möglich ist.
+bisher erläuterten Konzepte greifen bei der Implementierung ebenso wie die von
+\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle.triple} auf diese Möglichkeit
+zurück. Aufgrund ihrer hohen Komplexität wird sie jedoch nur erfahrenen
+Anwendern empfohlen. Weniger erfahrene Anwender können mit den vorgenannten
+Möglichkeiten bereits nahezu alles erreichen, was auch mit dieser
+grundlegenden Schnittstelle möglich ist.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}
\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}
- \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
+ \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
\Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}
\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}
- \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
+ \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
\Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{Name}
\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}
- \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
+ \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
\Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}
\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}
- \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
+ \Parameter{Fußdefinition}
\end{Declaration}
Diese Anweisungen dienen der Definition eines einzelnen Seitenstils mit
-maximaler Flexibilität. Dabei ist \PName{Name} der Name des Seitenstils, der
+maximaler Flexibilität. Dabei ist \PName{Name} der Name des Seitenstils, der
definiert werden soll.
-Die beiden Parameter \PName{Kopfdefinition} und \PName{Fußdefinition} haben
+Die beiden Parameter \PName{Kopfdefinition} und \PName{Fußdefinition} haben
den identischen Aufbau:
\begin{flushleft}
\begin{addmargin}{1em}\raggedright\small
- \texttt{(\PName{Länge der oberen Linie},\PName{Dicke der oberen Linie})\%\\
- \Parameter{Definition für linke Seiten im doppelseitigen Layout}\%\\
- \Parameter{Definition für rechte Seiten im doppelseitigen Layout}\%\\
- \Parameter{Definition für Seiten im einseitigen Layout}\%\\
- (\PName{Länge der unteren Linie},\PName{Dicke der unteren Linie})%
+ \texttt{(\PName{Länge der oberen Linie},\PName{Dicke der oberen Linie})\%\\
+ \Parameter{Definition für linke Seiten im doppelseitigen Layout}\%\\
+ \Parameter{Definition für rechte Seiten im doppelseitigen Layout}\%\\
+ \Parameter{Definition für Seiten im einseitigen Layout}\%\\
+ (\PName{Länge der unteren Linie},\PName{Dicke der unteren Linie})%
}
\end{addmargin}
\end{flushleft}
-Dabei sind die Argumente in den runden Klammern optional, das heißt, sie
-können zusammen mit den Klammern weggelassen
+Dabei sind die Argumente in den runden Klammern optional, das heißt, sie
+können zusammen mit den Klammern weggelassen
werden. In\important[i]{\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}\\
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline}\\
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline}\\
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline}} diesem Fall richten sich die
-Längen und Dicken je nach Linie nach den Angaben der Optionen
+Längen und Dicken je nach Linie nach den Angaben der Optionen
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}\IndexOption{headtopline},
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline},
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline} und
@@ -248,30 +248,30 @@ Längen und Dicken je nach Linie nach den Angaben der Optionen
Die drei Argumente mit den Definitionen sind obligatorisch und werden je nach
Seite und Layouteinstellung verwendet. Der Inhalt der Definitionen ist frei
-wählbar. Für Seitenstile mit Kolumnentitel wird jedoch die Verwendung von
+wählbar. Für Seitenstile mit Kolumnentitel wird jedoch die Verwendung von
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark},
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark} oder
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark} innerhalb der Definitionen
empfohlen. Keinesfalls sollte man hier direkt eine Gliederungsnummer oder
-einen Überschriftentext als Kolumnentitel angeben. Aufgrund des asynchronen
+einen Ãœberschriftentext als Kolumnentitel angeben. Aufgrund des asynchronen
Seitenaufbaus von \LaTeX{} kann sonst die falsche Nummer oder der falsche Text
-im Seitenkopf oder Seitenfuß erscheinen.
+im Seitenkopf oder Seitenfuß erscheinen.
-Bei\textnote{Unterschiede} \Macro{defpagestyle} wird der Seitenstil unabhängig
-davon, ob er bereits existiert oder nicht, neu definiert. Demgegenüber meldet
+Bei\textnote{Unterschiede} \Macro{defpagestyle} wird der Seitenstil unabhängig
+davon, ob er bereits existiert oder nicht, neu definiert. Demgegenüber meldet
\Macro{newpagestyle} einen Fehler, wenn bereits ein Seitenstil gleichen Namens
existiert. Im Unterschied dazu wird die Definition bei
-\Macro{providepagestyle} ignoriert, falls der \PName{Name} bereits für einen
+\Macro{providepagestyle} ignoriert, falls der \PName{Name} bereits für einen
Seitenstil verwendet wurde. Umgekehrt kann mit \Macro{renewpagestyle} nur ein
-bereits vorhandener Seitenstil umdefiniert werden. Für einen neuen Namen
+bereits vorhandener Seitenstil umdefiniert werden. Für einen neuen Namen
meldet diese Anweisung dagegen einen Fehler.
Alle vier Anweisungen basieren auf
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers}%
\IndexCmd{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} des Pakets
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}\IndexPackage{scrlayer}. Die dabei
-für einen Seitenstil \PName{Name} definierten Ebenen sind in
-\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.layersperstyle} aufgeführt. Näheres zu
+für einen Seitenstil \PName{Name} definierten Ebenen sind in
+\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.layersperstyle} aufgeführt. Näheres zu
Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} ab
\autopageref{cha:scrlayer} zu entnehmen.%
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} ab
\toprule
Name der Ebene & Bedeutung der Ebene \\
\midrule
- \PName{Name}\PValue{.head.above.line} & die Linie über dem Kopf\\
+ \PName{Name}\PValue{.head.above.line} & die Linie über dem Kopf\\
\PName{Name}\PValue{.head.odd} & der Kopf von rechten Seiten im
doppelseitigen Layout\\
\PName{Name}\PValue{.head.even} & der Kopf von linken Seiten im
@@ -297,14 +297,14 @@ Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} ab
\PName{Name}\PValue{.head.oneside} & der Kopf von Seiten im
einseitigen Layout\\
\PName{Name}\PValue{.head.below.line} & die Linie unter dem Kopf\\
- \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.above.line} & die Linie über dem Fuß\\
- \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.odd} & der Fuß von rechten Seiten im
+ \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.above.line} & die Linie über dem Fuß\\
+ \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.odd} & der Fuß von rechten Seiten im
doppelseitigen Layout\\
- \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.even} & der Fuß von linken Seiten im
+ \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.even} & der Fuß von linken Seiten im
doppelseitigen Layout\\
- \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.oneside} & der Fuß von Seiten im
+ \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.oneside} & der Fuß von Seiten im
einseitigen Layout\\
- \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.below.line} & die Linie unter dem Fuß\\
+ \PName{Name}\PValue{.foot.below.line} & die Linie unter dem Fuß\\
\bottomrule
\end{tabular}
% \end{captionbeside}
@@ -317,8 +317,8 @@ Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} ab
wissen Sie, dass \PageStyle{scrheadings} ein Ebenen-Seitenstil
ist, der unter anderem aus den Ebenen \PValue{scrheadings.head.oneside},
\PValue{scrheadings.head.odd} und \PValue{scrheadings.head.even}
- besteht. Sie definieren nun drei weitere Ebenen für deren Hintergrund und
- fügen diese am Anfang des Seitenstils ein:
+ besteht. Sie definieren nun drei weitere Ebenen für deren Hintergrund und
+ fügen diese am Anfang des Seitenstils ein:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrartcl}
\usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -356,32 +356,32 @@ Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} ab
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
Wie Sie sehen, wurden in dem Beispiel drei Ebenen verwendet, damit Position
- und Größe der Hintergrund-Ebenen per Option
- \Option{clone}\important{\Option{clone}} einfach jeweils von der Ebene für
+ und Größe der Hintergrund-Ebenen per Option
+ \Option{clone}\important{\Option{clone}} einfach jeweils von der Ebene für
den Kopf kopiert werden konnten. Das ist einfacher, als nur eine
- Hintergrundebene zu verwenden und für diese die Position umständlich
+ Hintergrundebene zu verwenden und für diese die Position umständlich
dynamisch zu bestimmen.
Der farbige Hintergrund selbst wurde in diesem Beispiel mit einer
- \Macro{rule}-Anweisung gesetzt. Für die Größe wurde dabei mit
+ \Macro{rule}-Anweisung gesetzt. Für die Größe wurde dabei mit
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth}\IndexCmd{layerwidth}%
\important[i]{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth}\\
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerheight}} und
\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerheight}\IndexCmd{layerheight} die aktuelle Breite
- und Höhe der Ebene verwendet. Diese wurde per optionalem Argument um die
- Höhe der Unterlängen \Macro{dp}\Macro{strutbox} nach unten verschoben.
+ und Höhe der Ebene verwendet. Diese wurde per optionalem Argument um die
+ Höhe der Unterlängen \Macro{dp}\Macro{strutbox} nach unten verschoben.
\end{Example}
%
-Statt wie im Beispiel für die Hintergrundfarbe neue Ebenen hinzuzufügen, hätte
-man das Problem übrigens auch mit \Macro{colorbox} und
-\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead} lösen können. Es wird empfohlen, eine
-entsprechende Lösung als Übung zu erarbeiten. Ebenso
-hätte man die Hintergrundebenen auch einzeln und jeweils unmittelbar vor der
-entsprechenden Inhaltsebene einfügen können. Eine entsprechende Umsetzung
-bietet sich als weitere Übung an.%
+Statt wie im Beispiel für die Hintergrundfarbe neue Ebenen hinzuzufügen, hätte
+man das Problem übrigens auch mit \Macro{colorbox} und
+\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead} lösen können. Es wird empfohlen, eine
+entsprechende Lösung als Übung zu erarbeiten. Ebenso
+hätte man die Hintergrundebenen auch einzeln und jeweils unmittelbar vor der
+entsprechenden Inhaltsebene einfügen können. Eine entsprechende Umsetzung
+bietet sich als weitere Ãœbung an.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Definition einfacher Seitenstile mit dreigeteiltem Kopf und Fuß}
+\section{Definition einfacher Seitenstile mit dreigeteiltem Kopf und Fuß}
\seclabel{pagestyle.triple}
\LoadNonFree{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{1}
@@ -390,28 +390,28 @@ bietet sich als weitere Übung an.%
\seclabel{obsolete}
\begin{Explain}
- Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} enthält auch noch einige Altlasten, die
- von \Package{scrpage2} stammen und nur existieren, um möglichst kompatibel
- mit jenem Paket zu sein. Kenntnisse dazu benötigen Anwender nur, wenn sie
+ Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} enthält auch noch einige Altlasten, die
+ von \Package{scrpage2} stammen und nur existieren, um möglichst kompatibel
+ mit jenem Paket zu sein. Kenntnisse dazu benötigen Anwender nur, wenn sie
ein altes Dokument, das noch auf \Package{scrpage2} basiert, bearbeiten
- wollen. Für\textnote{Achtung!} neue Dokumente sollten die hier dokumentieren
+ wollen. Für\textnote{Achtung!} neue Dokumente sollten die hier dokumentieren
Dinge dagegen nicht verwendet werden!
\end{Explain}
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{hmode}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-Bei \Package{scrpage2} wurden die Köpfe und Füße der Seitenstile noch
-grundsätzlich im horizontalen Modus ausgegeben. Bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
+Bei \Package{scrpage2} wurden die Köpfe und Füße der Seitenstile noch
+grundsätzlich im horizontalen Modus ausgegeben. Bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
wird hingegen in der Voreinstellung erst durch entsprechende Ausgaben selbst
in den horizontalen Modus geschaltet. Aktiviert man jedoch Option
-\Option{hmode} verhält sich \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch in dieser Hinsicht
+\Option{hmode} verhält sich \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch in dieser Hinsicht
kompatibel mit \Package{scrpage2} und schaltet bereits vor der Ausgabe in den
horizontalen Modus. Dies kann Auswirkungen sowohl auf die Verarbeitung von
Leerzeichen am Anfang der Ausgabe als auch auf die vertikale Ausrichtung
haben.
-Die Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in
+Die Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben
sind. In der Voreinstellung ist der Schalter deaktiviert.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -423,11 +423,11 @@ sind. In der Voreinstellung ist der Schalter deaktiviert.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Hintergrundebene Seitenkopf Seitenstils Kopfelement Seitenfuß
+% LocalWords: Hintergrundebene Seitenkopf Seitenstils Kopfelement Seitenfuß
% LocalWords: Seitenstile Seitenstilen
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
index 2a2adf3ad8..dd968107e3 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-scrpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-scrpage.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -39,16 +39,16 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrlayer-scrpage in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrlayer-scrpage in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-02-13 09:46:41 +0100 (Tue, 13 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer-scrpage)]
-\chapter[{Kopf- und Fußzeilen mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}]
- {Kopf-\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} und Fußzeilen mit
+\chapter[{Kopf- und Fußzeilen mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}]
+ {Kopf-\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} und Fußzeilen mit
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}
\labelbase{scrlayer-scrpage}
%
@@ -58,11 +58,11 @@
Bis \KOMAScript~3.11b war das Paket
\Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{scrpage2}%
\important{\Package{scrpage2}} das Mittel der Wahl, wenn es darum ging, den
- Kopf und den Fuß der Seite über das hinaus zu verändern, was die
+ Kopf und den Fuß der Seite über das hinaus zu verändern, was die
\KOMAScript-Klassen mit den Seitenstilen \PageStyle{headings},
\PageStyle{myheadings}, \PageStyle{plain} und \PageStyle{empty} boten.
\iffalse%
- Bis 2001 gab es dafür auch noch das Paket
+ Bis 2001 gab es dafür auch noch das Paket
\Package{scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrpage}, das aber seit 2013 nicht mehr mit
\KOMAScript{} zusammen verteilt wird.\par
\fi%
@@ -70,14 +70,14 @@
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer} als neuer, grundlegender Baustein in \KOMAScript{}
enthalten. Dieses Paket bietet ein Ebenenmodell sowie ein darauf basierendes
- Seitenstil-Modell an. Für die direkte Verwendung durch den
+ Seitenstil-Modell an. Für die direkte Verwendung durch den
durchschnittlichen Anwender ist die Schnittstelle dieses Pakets jedoch fast
schon zu flexibel und damit einhergehend auch nicht leicht zu
- durchschauen. Näheres zu dieser Schnittstelle ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} in
- \autoref{part:forExperts} zu entnehmen. Einige wenige Möglichkeiten, die
- eigentlich zu \Package{scrlayer} gehören und deshalb in jenem Kapitel noch
+ durchschauen. Näheres zu dieser Schnittstelle ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} in
+ \autoref{part:forExperts} zu entnehmen. Einige wenige Möglichkeiten, die
+ eigentlich zu \Package{scrlayer} gehören und deshalb in jenem Kapitel noch
einmal aufgegriffen werden, sind jedoch auch in diesem Kapitel dokumentiert,
- da sie für die Verwendung von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} ebenfalls benötigt
+ da sie für die Verwendung von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} ebenfalls benötigt
werden.
Viele Anwender sind bereits mit den Anweisungen aus \Package{scrpage2}
@@ -85,29 +85,29 @@
das basierend auf \Package{scrlayer} eine mit \Package{scrpage2} weitgehend
kompatible und gleichzeitig stark erweiterte Anwender-Schnittstelle
bereitstellt. Wer bereits mit \Package{scrpage2} vertraut ist und dort keine
- unsauberen Rückgriffe auf interne Anweisungen getätigt hat, kann daher in
+ unsauberen Rückgriffe auf interne Anweisungen getätigt hat, kann daher in
der Regel \Package{scrpage2} recht einfach durch \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
- ersetzen. Das gilt mit der genannten Einschränkung auch für die meisten
- Beispiele in \LaTeX-Büchern oder im Internet.%
+ ersetzen. Das gilt mit der genannten Einschränkung auch für die meisten
+ Beispiele in \LaTeX-Büchern oder im Internet.%
\iffalse
-\iffree{}{\par Mit Erscheinen dieses Buches wird \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} für
- \KOMAScript{} das empfohlene Mittel der Wahl, wenn es um Änderungen der
+\iffree{}{\par Mit Erscheinen dieses Buches wird \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} für
+ \KOMAScript{} das empfohlene Mittel der Wahl, wenn es um Änderungen der
vordefinierten Seitenstile geht. Die Verwendung des als veraltet
anzusehenden Pakets \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{scrpage2}%
\important{\Package{scrpage2}} wird hingegen nicht mehr empfohlen. Daher ist
die Anleitung zu diesem veralteten Paket auch nicht mehr Bestandteil dieses
- Buches. Wenn Sie auf ältere Dokumente stoßen, die noch \Package{scrpage2}
+ Buches. Wenn Sie auf ältere Dokumente stoßen, die noch \Package{scrpage2}
verwenden, sollten Sie eine Umstellung auf \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
- erwägen. Für alle Fälle finden Sie in diesem Kapitel auch einige Hinweise
+ erwägen. Für alle Fälle finden Sie in diesem Kapitel auch einige Hinweise
zur Verwendung von \Package{scrpage2}.}
\fi
\end{Explain}
-Neben \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\iffree{ oder \Package{scrpage2}}{} wäre auch
-\Package{fancyhdr} (siehe \cite{package:fancyhdr}) grundsätzlich geeignet, um
-Kopf und Fuß der Seiten zu konfigurieren. Allerdings unterstützt dieses Paket
-diverse Möglichkeiten von \KOMAScript{}, angefangen von Änderungen der Schrift
-über das Elemente-Modell (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont},
+Neben \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\iffree{ oder \Package{scrpage2}}{} wäre auch
+\Package{fancyhdr} (siehe \cite{package:fancyhdr}) grundsätzlich geeignet, um
+Kopf und Fuß der Seiten zu konfigurieren. Allerdings unterstützt dieses Paket
+diverse Möglichkeiten von \KOMAScript{}, angefangen von Änderungen der Schrift
+über das Elemente-Modell (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont} in
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, ab
@@ -116,40 +116,40 @@ der Gliederungsnummern in Kolumnentiteln (siehe Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.numbers} und beispielsweise Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chaptermarkformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.option.numbers} und
-\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}), nicht. Daher wird für die
+\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}), nicht. Daher wird für die
Verwendung mit den \KOMAScript-Klassen das neue Paket
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} empfohlen. \iffree{Bei Problemen damit kann auch
- auf \Package{scrpage2} zurückgegriffen werden.}{\ignorespaces} Natürlich
+ auf \Package{scrpage2} zurückgegriffen werden.}{\ignorespaces} Natürlich
kann \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch mit anderen Klassen, beispielsweise den
Standardklassen verwendet werden.
-Über die in diesem Kapitel erklärten Möglichkeiten hinaus bietet das Paket
-\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} weiteres, das jedoch nur für einige, wenige
-Anwender von Interesse sein dürfte und daher in
+Über die in diesem Kapitel erklärten Möglichkeiten hinaus bietet das Paket
+\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} weiteres, das jedoch nur für einige, wenige
+Anwender von Interesse sein dürfte und daher in
\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts} von \autoref{part:forExperts} ab
-\autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts} ausgeführt wird. Dennoch: Falls die
-hier in \autoref{part:forAuthors} dokumentierten Möglichkeiten für Sie nicht
+\autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts} ausgeführt wird. Dennoch: Falls die
+hier in \autoref{part:forAuthors} dokumentierten Möglichkeiten für Sie nicht
ausreichen, sei Ihnen auch jenes Kapitel nahegelegt.
-\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
-\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight} % \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß}
+\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight} % \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß}
\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Textauszeichnung}
\section{Verwendung vordefinierter Seitenstile}
\seclabel{predefined.pagestyles}
-Die einfachste Möglichkeit, mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} zu seinem
-Wunschdesign für Kopf und Fuß der Seite zu gelangen, ist die Verwendung eines
+Die einfachste Möglichkeit, mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} zu seinem
+Wunschdesign für Kopf und Fuß der Seite zu gelangen, ist die Verwendung eines
vorgefertigten Seitenstils.
%
\iffalse % Umbruchoptimierung
In diesem Abschnitt werden die vom Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} bereits
- beim Laden definierten Seitenstile vorgestellt. Darüber hinaus werden
- diejenigen Befehle erklärt, mit denen grundlegende Einstellungen bei diesen
- Seitenstilen vorgenommen werden können. Weitere Optionen, Befehle und
- Hintergründe sind in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten, aber auch in
+ beim Laden definierten Seitenstile vorgestellt. Darüber hinaus werden
+ diejenigen Befehle erklärt, mit denen grundlegende Einstellungen bei diesen
+ Seitenstilen vorgenommen werden können. Weitere Optionen, Befehle und
+ Hintergründe sind in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten, aber auch in
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs} in
\autoref{part:forExperts} zu finden.%
\fi
@@ -158,28 +158,28 @@ vorgefertigten Seitenstils.
\PageStyle{scrheadings}
\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}
\end{Declaration}
-Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} stellt zwei Seitenstile zur Verfügung,
-die nach eigenen Wünschen umgestaltet werden können. Als erstes wäre der
+Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} stellt zwei Seitenstile zur Verfügung,
+die nach eigenen Wünschen umgestaltet werden können. Als erstes wäre der
Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}\important{\PageStyle{scrheadings}} zu
-nennen. Dieser ist als Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel vorgesehen. Er ähnelt in
+nennen. Dieser ist als Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel vorgesehen. Er ähnelt in
der Voreinstellung dem Seitenstil
\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} der Standard- oder der
-\KOMAScript-Klassen. Was genau im Kopf und Fuß ausgegeben wird, ist über die
+\KOMAScript-Klassen. Was genau im Kopf und Fuß ausgegeben wird, ist über die
nachfolgend beschriebenen Befehle und Optionen einstellbar.
Als zweites ist der Seitenstil
\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\important{\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}} zu
-nennen. Dieser ist als Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel vorgesehen. Er ähnelt in
+nennen. Dieser ist als Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel vorgesehen. Er ähnelt in
der Voreinstellung dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain} der
-Standard- oder der \KOMAScript-Klassen. Was genau im Kopf und Fuß ausgegeben
-wird, ist auch hier über die nachfolgend beschriebenen Befehle und Optionen
+Standard- oder der \KOMAScript-Klassen. Was genau im Kopf und Fuß ausgegeben
+wird, ist auch hier über die nachfolgend beschriebenen Befehle und Optionen
einstellbar.
-Natürlich kann auch \PageStyle{scrheadings} als Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel
+Natürlich kann auch \PageStyle{scrheadings} als Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel
und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} als Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel
-konfiguriert werden. Es ist jedoch zweckmäßig, sich an die vorgenannte
-Konvention zu halten. Die beiden Seitenstile beeinflussen sich nämlich in
-gewisser Weise gegenseitig. Sobald einer der Seitenstile einmal ausgewählt
+konfiguriert werden. Es ist jedoch zweckmäßig, sich an die vorgenannte
+Konvention zu halten. Die beiden Seitenstile beeinflussen sich nämlich in
+gewisser Weise gegenseitig. Sobald einer der Seitenstile einmal ausgewählt
wurde, ist \PageStyle{scrheadings} auch unter dem Namen
\PageStyle{headings}\important{\PageStyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings}
und der Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} auch unter dem Namen
@@ -189,8 +189,8 @@ aktivierbar. Das hat den Vorteil, dass bei Klassen, die automatisch zwischen
von \PageStyle{scrheadings} oder \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} nun zwischen
diesen beiden Stilen umgeschaltet wird. Direkte Anpassungen der entsprechenden
Klassen sind nicht erforderlich. Die beiden Seitenstile stellen also quasi ein
-Paar dar, das als Ersatz für \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{plain}
-verwendet werden kann. Sollten weitere solche Paare benötigt werden, so sei
+Paar dar, das als Ersatz für \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{plain}
+verwendet werden kann. Sollten weitere solche Paare benötigt werden, so sei
auf \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs} in
\autoref{part:forExperts} verwiesen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -222,57 +222,57 @@ geschrieben wird, ist mit Hilfe dieser Befehle einstellbar. Dabei setzt das
optionale Argument jeweils den Inhalt eines Elements in
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}%
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
-\iffree{}{ beziehungsweise \PageStyle{scrplain}} \fi , während das
+\iffree{}{ beziehungsweise \PageStyle{scrplain}} \fi , während das
obligatorische Argument jeweils einen Inhalt in
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} setzt.
-Die Inhalte für gerade, also linke Seiten\textnote{linke Seite} werden mit den
+Die Inhalte für gerade, also linke Seiten\textnote{linke Seite} werden mit den
Befehlen \Macro{lehead}, \Macro{cehead} und \Macro{rehead} gesetzt. Das
-»\texttt{e}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{even}«
-(engl. für »gerade«).
+»\texttt{e}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{even}«
+(engl. für »gerade«).
-Die Inhalte für ungerade, also rechte Seiten\textnote{rechte Seite} werden mit
+Die Inhalte für ungerade, also rechte Seiten\textnote{rechte Seite} werden mit
den Befehlen \Macro{lohead}, \Macro{cohead} und \Macro{rohead} gesetzt. Das
-»\texttt{o}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{odd}«
-(engl. für »ungerade«).
+»\texttt{o}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{odd}«
+(engl. für »ungerade«).
Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei an dieser Stelle noch einmal darauf hingewiesen,
dass im einseitigen Satz nur rechte Seiten existieren und diese von \LaTeX{}
-unabhängig von ihrer Nummer als ungerade Seiten bezeichnet werden.
+unabhängig von ihrer Nummer als ungerade Seiten bezeichnet werden.
-Jeder Kopf eines Seitenstils besitzt ein linksbündiges\textnote{linksbündig}
+Jeder Kopf eines Seitenstils besitzt ein linksbündiges\textnote{linksbündig}
Element, das mit \Macro{lehead} respektive \Macro{lohead} gesetzt werden
-kann. Das »\texttt{l}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{left
- aligned}« (engl. für »linksbündig«).
+kann. Das »\texttt{l}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{left
+ aligned}« (engl. für »linksbündig«).
Ebenso besitzt jeder Kopf eines Seitenstils ein zentriert\textnote{zentriert}
gesetztes Element, das mit \Macro{cehead} respektive \Macro{cohead} gesetzt
-werden kann. Das »\texttt{c}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für
-»\emph{centered}« (engl. für »zentriert«).
+werden kann. Das »\texttt{c}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für
+»\emph{centered}« (engl. für »zentriert«).
Entsprechend besitzt jeder Kopf eines Seitenstil auch ein
-rechtsbündiges\textnote{rechtsbündig} Element, das mit \Macro{rehead}
-respektive \Macro{rohead} gesetzt werden kann. Das »\texttt{r}« am Anfang des
-Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{right aligned}« (engl. für
-»rechtsbündig«).
+rechtsbündiges\textnote{rechtsbündig} Element, das mit \Macro{rehead}
+respektive \Macro{rohead} gesetzt werden kann. Das »\texttt{r}« am Anfang des
+Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{right aligned}« (engl. für
+»rechtsbündig«).
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}\LabelFontElement{pagehead}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}%
-Diese Elemente besitzen jedoch nicht jedes für sich eine Schriftzuordnung mit
+Diese Elemente besitzen jedoch nicht jedes für sich eine Schriftzuordnung mit
Hilfe der Befehle \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}), sondern alle zusammen
-über das Element \FontElement{pagehead}\important{\FontElement{pagehead}}. Vor
-diesem wird außerdem noch das Element
+über das Element \FontElement{pagehead}\important{\FontElement{pagehead}}. Vor
+diesem wird außerdem noch das Element
\FontElement{pageheadfoot}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}
-angewandt. Die Voreinstellungen für diese beiden Elemente sind
+angewandt. Die Voreinstellungen für diese beiden Elemente sind
\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements},
\autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} zu entnehmen.%
\EndIndexGroup
In \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} ist die Bedeutung der einzelnen Befehle
-für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.%
+für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.%
%
\begin{figure}[tp]
\centering
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.%
\multiput(-2em,\baselineskip)(-.25em,0){5}{\line(1,0){.125em}}%
\put(-2em,0){\makebox(4em,5mm)[c]{\Macro{cohead}}}%
}%
- % Befehle für beide Seiten
+ % Befehle für beide Seiten
\color{ImageBlue}%
\put(.5\textwidth,0){\makebox(0,\baselineskip)[c]{\Macro{ihead}}}%
\color{ImageGreen}%
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.%
\end{picture}
\caption[Befehle zum Setzen des Seitenkopfes]%
{Die Bedeutung der Befehle zum Setzen der Inhalte des Kopfes eines
- Seitenstils für die Seitenköpfe einer schematischen Doppelseite}
+ Seitenstils für die Seitenköpfe einer schematischen Doppelseite}
\label{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head}
\end{figure}
%
@@ -406,30 +406,30 @@ für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.%
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
Doch, was ist das? Auf der ersten Seite erscheint nur eine Seitenzahl im
- Fuß, der Kopf hingegen bleibt leer!
+ Fuß, der Kopf hingegen bleibt leer!
- Die Erklärung dafür ist einfach: Die Klasse \Class{scrartcl} schaltet wie
- auch die Standardklasse \Class{article} für die Seite mit dem Titelkopf in
+ Die Erklärung dafür ist einfach: Die Klasse \Class{scrartcl} schaltet wie
+ auch die Standardklasse \Class{article} für die Seite mit dem Titelkopf in
der Voreinstellung auf den Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain}. Nach der Anweisung
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} in der Präambel
- unseres Beispiels führt dies tatsächlich zur Verwendung des Seitenstils
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} für die Seite mit dem
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} in der Präambel
+ unseres Beispiels führt dies tatsächlich zur Verwendung des Seitenstils
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} für die Seite mit dem
Titelkopf. Dieser Seitenstil ist bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse mit
- leerem Kopf und Seitenzahl im Fuß vorkonfiguriert. Da im Beispiel das
+ leerem Kopf und Seitenzahl im Fuß vorkonfiguriert. Da im Beispiel das
optionale Argument von \Macro{lohead} und \Macro{rohead} gar nicht verwendet
wird, bleibt der Seitenstil \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}
- unverändert. Das Ergebnis ist für die erste Seite also tatsächlich korrekt.
+ unverändert. Das Ergebnis ist für die erste Seite also tatsächlich korrekt.
- Fügen Sie jetzt im Beispiel nach \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle} so viel
- Text ein, dass eine zweite Seite ausgegeben wird. Sie können dazu auch
+ Fügen Sie jetzt im Beispiel nach \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle} so viel
+ Text ein, dass eine zweite Seite ausgegeben wird. Sie können dazu auch
einfach \Macro{usepackage}\PParameter{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} in der
- Dokumentpräambel und \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} nach
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle} ergänzen. Wie Sie sehen werden, enthält der
- Kopf der zweiten Seite nun, genau wie gewünscht, den Namen des Autors und
+ Dokumentpräambel und \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} nach
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle} ergänzen. Wie Sie sehen werden, enthält der
+ Kopf der zweiten Seite nun, genau wie gewünscht, den Namen des Autors und
den Titel des Dokuments.
- Zum Vergleich sollten Sie zusätzlich das optionale Argument der Anweisungen
- \Macro{lohead} und \Macro{rohead} mit einem Inhalt versehen. Ändern Sie das
+ Zum Vergleich sollten Sie zusätzlich das optionale Argument der Anweisungen
+ \Macro{lohead} und \Macro{rohead} mit einem Inhalt versehen. Ändern Sie das
Beispiel dazu wie folgt ab:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrartcl}
@@ -448,17 +448,17 @@ für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.%
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
Jetzt haben Sie den Kopf auch auf der ersten Seite \iffree{direkt}{\unskip}
- über dem Titelkopf\iffree{ selbst}{}. Das kommt daher, dass Sie mit den
+ über dem Titelkopf\iffree{ selbst}{}. Das kommt daher, dass Sie mit den
beiden optionalen Argumenten \iffree{den Seitenstil}{\unskip}
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} nun ebenfalls
entsprechend konfiguriert haben. Wie Sie am Ergebnis vermutlich auch
- erkennen, ist es jedoch besser, diesen Seitenstil unverändert zu lassen, da
- der Kolumnentitel über dem Titelkopf doch eher störend ist.
+ erkennen, ist es jedoch besser, diesen Seitenstil unverändert zu lassen, da
+ der Kolumnentitel über dem Titelkopf doch eher störend ist.
Alternativ zur Konfigurierung von
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} hätte man bei Verwendung
- einer \KOMAScript-Klasse übrigens auch den Seitenstil für Seiten mit
- Titelkopf ändern können. Siehe dazu \DescRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}%
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} hätte man bei Verwendung
+ einer \KOMAScript-Klasse übrigens auch den Seitenstil für Seiten mit
+ Titelkopf ändern können. Siehe dazu \DescRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}}%
\IndexCmd{titlepagestyle} in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}.
@@ -468,19 +468,19 @@ für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.%
\leavevmode\textnote{Achtung!}%
\else Erlauben Sie mir einen wichtigen Hinweis:\textnote{Achtung!} %
\fi%
-Sie sollten niemals die Überschrift oder die Nummer einer
+Sie sollten niemals die Ãœberschrift oder die Nummer einer
Gliederungsebene mit Hilfe einer dieser Anweisungen als Kolumnentitel in den
-Kopf der Seite setzen. Aufgrund der Asynchronizität von Seitenaufbau und
+Kopf der Seite setzen. Aufgrund der Asynchronizität von Seitenaufbau und
Seitenausgabe kann %
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
es sonst leicht geschehen, dass die falsche Nummer oder die falsche
-Überschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird%
+Ãœberschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird%
\else%
-sonst die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Überschrift im Kolumnentitel
+sonst die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Ãœberschrift im Kolumnentitel
ausgegeben werden%
\fi%
. Stattdessen ist der Mark-Mechanismus, idealer Weise in Verbindung mit den
-Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
+Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -499,20 +499,20 @@ Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
\Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}
\end{Declaration}
Die Sternvarianten\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} der zuvor
-erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich von der Form ohne Stern lediglich bei
+erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich von der Form ohne Stern lediglich bei
Weglassen des optionalen Arguments \OParameter{Inhalt
- plain.scrheadings}. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt
-von \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird
+ plain.scrheadings}. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt
+von \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird
bei der Sternvariante dann das obligatorische Argument \PName{Inhalt
- scrheadings} auch für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}
+ scrheadings} auch für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}
verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich sein, so kann man einfach die
Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.%
%
\begin{Example}
Mit der Sternform von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead} und
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rohead} lässt sich das
- Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung etwas verkürzen:
- % Umbruchoptimierung durch Abstandsänderung
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rohead} lässt sich das
+ Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung etwas verkürzen:
+ % Umbruchoptimierung durch Abstandsänderung
\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=-\dp\strutbox]
\documentclass{scrartcl}
\usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -546,61 +546,61 @@ Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.%
\Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}
\end{Declaration}
Was bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} in den Fuß der Seite
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} in den Fuß der Seite
geschrieben wird, ist mit Hilfe dieser Befehle einstellbar. Dabei setzt das
optionale Argument jeweils den Inhalt eines Elements in
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}, während das obligatorische
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}, während das obligatorische
Argument jeweils einen Inhalt in \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings}
setzt.
-Die Inhalte für gerade, also linke Seiten\textnote{linke Seite} werden mit den
+Die Inhalte für gerade, also linke Seiten\textnote{linke Seite} werden mit den
Befehlen \Macro{lefoot}, \Macro{cefoot} und \Macro{refoot} gesetzt. Das
-»\texttt{e}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{even}«
-(engl. für »gerade«).
+»\texttt{e}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{even}«
+(engl. für »gerade«).
-Die Inhalte für ungerade, also rechte Seiten\textnote{rechte Seite} werden mit
+Die Inhalte für ungerade, also rechte Seiten\textnote{rechte Seite} werden mit
den Befehlen \Macro{lofoot}, \Macro{cofoot} und \Macro{rofoot} gesetzt. Das
-»\texttt{o}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{odd}«
-(engl. für »ungerade«).
+»\texttt{o}« an zweiter Stelle des Befehlsnamens steht dabei für »\emph{odd}«
+(engl. für »ungerade«).
Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei an dieser Stelle noch einmal darauf hingewiesen,
dass im einseitigen Satz nur rechte Seiten existieren und diese von \LaTeX{}
-unabhängig von ihrer Nummer als ungerade Seiten gezeichnet werden.
+unabhängig von ihrer Nummer als ungerade Seiten gezeichnet werden.
-Jeder Fuß eines Seitenstils besitzt ein linksbündiges\textnote{linksbündig}
+Jeder Fuß eines Seitenstils besitzt ein linksbündiges\textnote{linksbündig}
Element, das mit \Macro{lefoot} respektive \Macro{lofoot} gesetzt werden
-kann. Das »\texttt{l}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{left
- aligned}« (engl. für »linksbündig«).
+kann. Das »\texttt{l}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{left
+ aligned}« (engl. für »linksbündig«).
-Ebenso besitzt jeder Fuß eines Seitenstils ein zentriert\textnote{zentriert}
+Ebenso besitzt jeder Fuß eines Seitenstils ein zentriert\textnote{zentriert}
gesetztes Element, das mit \Macro{cefoot} respektive \Macro{cofoot} gesetzt
-werden kann. Das »\texttt{c}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für
-»\emph{centered}« (engl. für »zentriert«).
+werden kann. Das »\texttt{c}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für
+»\emph{centered}« (engl. für »zentriert«).
-Entsprechend besitzt jeder Fuß eines Seitenstil auch ein
-rechtsbündiges\textnote{rechtsbündig} Element, das mit \Macro{refoot}
-respektive \Macro{rofoot} gesetzt werden kann. Das »\texttt{r}« am Anfang des
-Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{right aligned}« (engl. für
-»rechtsbündig«).
+Entsprechend besitzt jeder Fuß eines Seitenstil auch ein
+rechtsbündiges\textnote{rechtsbündig} Element, das mit \Macro{refoot}
+respektive \Macro{rofoot} gesetzt werden kann. Das »\texttt{r}« am Anfang des
+Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{right aligned}« (engl. für
+»rechtsbündig«).
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement[.foot]{pageheadfoot}%
-Diese Elemente besitzen jedoch nicht jedes für sich eine Schriftzuordnung mit
+Diese Elemente besitzen jedoch nicht jedes für sich eine Schriftzuordnung mit
Hilfe der Befehle \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}), sondern alle zusammen über das
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}), sondern alle zusammen über das
Element \FontElement{pagefoot}\important{\FontElement{pagefoot}}. Vor diesem
-wird außerdem noch das Element
+wird außerdem noch das Element
\FontElement{pageheadfoot}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}
-angewandt. Die Voreinstellungen für diese beiden Elemente sind
+angewandt. Die Voreinstellungen für diese beiden Elemente sind
\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements},
\autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} zu entnehmen.%
\EndIndexGroup
In \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} ist die Bedeutung der einzelnen Befehle
-für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
+für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
%
\begin{figure}[bp]
\centering
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
\multiput(-2em,\baselineskip)(-.25em,0){5}{\line(1,0){.125em}}%
\put(-2em,0){\makebox(4em,5mm)[c]{\Macro{cofoot}}}%
}%
- % Befehle für beide Seiten
+ % Befehle für beide Seiten
\color{ImageBlue}%
\put(.5\textwidth,15mm){\makebox(0,\baselineskip)[c]{\Macro{ifoot}}}%
\color{ImageGreen}%
@@ -703,16 +703,16 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
\put(\dimexpr .45\textwidth-4em\relax,25mm){\vector(0,-1){15mm}}%
}%
\end{picture}
- \caption[Befehle zum Setzen des Seitenfußes]%
- {Die Bedeutung der Befehle zum Setzen der Inhalte des Fußes eines
- Seitenstils für die Seitenfüße einer schematischen Doppelseite.}
+ \caption[Befehle zum Setzen des Seitenfußes]%
+ {Die Bedeutung der Befehle zum Setzen der Inhalte des Fußes eines
+ Seitenstils für die Seitenfüße einer schematischen Doppelseite.}
\label{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot}
\end{figure}
%
\begin{Example}
- Kommen wir zu dem Beispiel des kurzen Artikels zurück. Angenommen Sie wollen
- nun links im Fuß \iffree{zusätzlich}{\unskip} den Verlag angegeben
- haben. Daher ergänzen Sie das Beispiel zu:
+ Kommen wir zu dem Beispiel des kurzen Artikels zurück. Angenommen Sie wollen
+ nun links im Fuß \iffree{zusätzlich}{\unskip} den Verlag angegeben
+ haben. Daher ergänzen Sie das Beispiel zu:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrartcl}
\usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -729,8 +729,8 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
Der Verlag wird Ihnen aber nicht auf der Seite mit dem
- Titelkopf ausgegeben. Die Begründung ist dieselbe wie beim Beispiel zu
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead}. Ebenso ist die Lösung, um den Verlag auch
+ Titelkopf ausgegeben. Die Begründung ist dieselbe wie beim Beispiel zu
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead}. Ebenso ist die Lösung, um den Verlag auch
auf diese Seite zu bekommen, entsprechend:
\begin{lstcode}
\lofoot[Verlag Naseblau, Irgendwo]
@@ -738,32 +738,32 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
\end{lstcode}
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
Nun entscheiden Sie noch, dass
- statt\textnote{Fontänderung}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}%
- \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} der schrägen Schrift in Kopf und Fuß eine
+ statt\textnote{Fontänderung}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}%
+ \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} der schrägen Schrift in Kopf und Fuß eine
aufrechte, aber kleinere Schrift verwendet werden soll%
\else%
Jetzt soll
- statt\textnote{Fontänderung}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}%
- \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} der schrägen Schrift in Kopf und Fuß eine
+ statt\textnote{Fontänderung}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}%
+ \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} der schrägen Schrift in Kopf und Fuß eine
aufrechte, aber kleinere Schrift verwendet werden%
\fi%
% Umbruchoptimierung:
\iffalse%
\iffree{}{. Dies erreichen
- Sie, indem Sie in der Dokumentpräambel die folgende Codezeile ergänzen}%
+ Sie, indem Sie in der Dokumentpräambel die folgende Codezeile ergänzen}%
\fi%
\iftrue%
- \iffree{}{. Dies erreichen Sie mit folgender Ergänzung:}%
+ \iffree{}{. Dies erreichen Sie mit folgender Ergänzung:}%
\fi
:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomafont{pageheadfoot}{\small}
\end{lstcode}
- Darüber hinaus, soll
+ Darüber hinaus, soll
\iftrue% Umbruchvarianten
der Kopf\important{\FontElement{pagehead}}\IndexFontElement{pagehead}, nicht
- jedoch der Fuß
+ jedoch der Fuß
\else%
nur der Kopf\important{\FontElement{pagehead}}\IndexFontElement{pagehead}
\fi%
@@ -775,36 +775,36 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
dem Laden von \Package{scrpage-scrlayer} erfolgt, weil davor
\FontElement{pagehead} und \FontElement{pageheadfoot}
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
- zwar vorhanden sind, aber dasselbe Element, nämlich
+ zwar vorhanden sind, aber dasselbe Element, nämlich
\FontElement{pageheadfoot}, %
\else%
dasselbe Element %
\fi
bezeichnen. Erst durch \iffree{Laden von }{}\Package{scrpage-scrlayer}
- werden daraus \iffree{zwei }{}unabhängige Elemente.
+ werden daraus \iffree{zwei }{}unabhängige Elemente.
- Ergänzen Sie nun das Beispiel einmal durch ein weiteres \Macro{lipsum} und
- fügen Sie gleichzeitig Option
+ Ergänzen Sie nun das Beispiel einmal durch ein weiteres \Macro{lipsum} und
+ fügen Sie gleichzeitig Option
\Option{twoside}\IndexOption{twoside}\important{\Option{twoside}} beim Laden
- von \Class{scrartcl} hinzu. Zum einen wandert die Seitenzahl im Fuß nun von
- der Mitte nach außen. Das liegt an der geänderten Voreinstellung für
+ von \Class{scrartcl} hinzu. Zum einen wandert die Seitenzahl im Fuß nun von
+ der Mitte nach außen. Das liegt an der geänderten Voreinstellung für
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} und
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} für doppelseitige Dokumente
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} für doppelseitige Dokumente
mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse.
Gleichzeitig verschwinden aber auch Autor, Dokumenttitel und Verlag von
Seite~2. Diese finden sich erst auf Seite~3 wieder. Das liegt daran, dass
- wir bisher nur Befehle für ungerade Seiten\textnote{rechte Seite}
- verwendet haben. Zu erkennen ist das am »\texttt{o}« für \emph{odd} an der
+ wir bisher nur Befehle für ungerade Seiten\textnote{rechte Seite}
+ verwendet haben. Zu erkennen ist das am »\texttt{o}« für \emph{odd} an der
zweiten Stelle der Befehlsnamen.
- Nun könnten wir die Befehle einfach kopieren und in der Kopie dieses
- »\texttt{o}« durch ein »\texttt{e}« für \emph{even}\textnote{linke Seite}
+ Nun könnten wir die Befehle einfach kopieren und in der Kopie dieses
+ »\texttt{o}« durch ein »\texttt{e}« für \emph{even}\textnote{linke Seite}
ersetzen. Allerdings ist es bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten meist sinnvoller,
wenn die Elemente spiegelverkehrt verwendet werden, dass also Elemente, die
auf linken Seiten links stehen, auf rechten Seiten rechts platziert werden
und umgekehrt. Daher vertauschen wir auch noch beim ersten Buchstaben
- »\texttt{l}« mit »\texttt{r}« und umgekehrt:
+ »\texttt{l}« mit »\texttt{r}« und umgekehrt:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[twoside]{scrartcl}
\usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -829,27 +829,27 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.
\end{lstcode}
\end{Example}%
-Da es etwas umständlich ist, die Angaben bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten wie im
-letzten Beispiel immer getrennt für linke und rechte Seiten zu machen, wird
-nachfolgend eine schönere Lösung für diesen Standardfall eingeführt.
+Da es etwas umständlich ist, die Angaben bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten wie im
+letzten Beispiel immer getrennt für linke und rechte Seiten zu machen, wird
+nachfolgend eine schönere Lösung für diesen Standardfall eingeführt.
\iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung
\leavevmode\textnote{Achtung!}%
\else Erlauben Sie mir erneut einen wichtigen Hinweis:\textnote{Achtung!} %
\fi%
-Sie sollten niemals die Überschrift oder die Nummer einer
+Sie sollten niemals die Ãœberschrift oder die Nummer einer
Gliederungsebene mit Hilfe einer dieser Anweisungen als Kolumnentitel in den
-Fuß der Seite setzen. Aufgrund der Asynchronizität von Seitenaufbau und
+Fuß der Seite setzen. Aufgrund der Asynchronizität von Seitenaufbau und
Seitenausgabe kann %
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
es sonst leicht geschehen, dass die falsche Nummer oder die falsche
-Überschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird%
+Ãœberschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird%
\else%
-sonst die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Überschrift im Kolumnentitel
+sonst die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Ãœberschrift im Kolumnentitel
ausgegeben werden%
\fi%
. Stattdessen ist der Mark-Mechanismus, idealer Weise in Verbindung mit den
-Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
+Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -868,20 +868,20 @@ Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
\Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}
\end{Declaration}
Die Sternvarianten\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} der zuvor
-erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich von der Form ohne Stern lediglich bei
+erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich von der Form ohne Stern lediglich bei
Weglassen des optionalen Arguments \OParameter{Inhalt
- plain.scrheadings}. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt
-von \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird
+ plain.scrheadings}. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt
+von \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird
bei der Sternvariante dann das obligatorische Argument \PName{Inhalt
- scrheadings} auch für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}
+ scrheadings} auch für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}
verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich sein, so kann man einfach die
Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.%
%
\begin{Example}
Mit der Sternform von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lofoot} und
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rofoot} lässt sich das
- Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung etwas verkürzen:
-% Umbruchoptimierung durch Abstandsänderung
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rofoot} lässt sich das
+ Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung etwas verkürzen:
+% Umbruchoptimierung durch Abstandsänderung
\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=-\dp\strutbox]
\documentclass[twoside]{scrartcl}
\usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -921,8 +921,8 @@ Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.%
\Macro{ifoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}
\Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}
\end{Declaration}
-Um Kopf und Fuß im doppelseitigen Layout zu konfigurieren, müsste man mit den
-zuvor erklärten Befehlen die linken und die rechten Seiten getrennt
+Um Kopf und Fuß im doppelseitigen Layout zu konfigurieren, müsste man mit den
+zuvor erklärten Befehlen die linken und die rechten Seiten getrennt
voneinander konfigurieren. Meist ist es jedoch so, dass linke und rechte Seite
mehr oder weniger symmetrisch zueinander sind. Ein Element das auf linken
Seiten links steht, steht auf rechten Seiten rechts%
@@ -935,14 +935,14 @@ angeordnet.%
\ und umgekehrt. Mittig bleibt mittig.%
\fi%
-Zur Vereinfachung der Einstellungen für diesen Standardfall gibt es bei
-\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} sozusagen Abkürzungen. Der Befehl \Macro{ohead}
+Zur Vereinfachung der Einstellungen für diesen Standardfall gibt es bei
+\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} sozusagen Abkürzungen. Der Befehl \Macro{ohead}
entspricht einem Aufruf sowohl von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lehead} als auch
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rohead}. Der Befehl \Macro{chead} entspricht sowohl
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cehead} als auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cohead}. Und
Befehl \Macro{ihead} entspricht \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rehead} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead}. Gleiches gilt für die Anweisungen des
-Fußes. In \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} auf
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead}. Gleiches gilt für die Anweisungen des
+Fußes. In \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} auf
\autopageref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} und
\autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} auf
\autopageref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} werden auch diese Beziehungen
@@ -950,9 +950,9 @@ skizziert.
%
\begin{Example}
\iftrue% Umbruchvarianten
- Das letzte Beispiel lässt sich so vereinfachen:
+ Das letzte Beispiel lässt sich so vereinfachen:
\else
- Mit Hilfe der neuen Befehle, lässt sich das letzte Beispiel wie folgt
+ Mit Hilfe der neuen Befehle, lässt sich das letzte Beispiel wie folgt
vereinfachen:
\fi
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -974,41 +974,41 @@ skizziert.
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- Wie zusehen ist, konnte die Hälfte der Befehle eingespart und trotzdem
+ Wie zusehen ist, konnte die Hälfte der Befehle eingespart und trotzdem
dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt werden.
\fi
\end{Example}%
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
Da im einseitigen Layout alle Seiten als ungerade oder rechte Seiten behandelt
-werden, können \iffree{im einseitigen Layout}{dann} diese Befehle auch als
-Synonyme für die entsprechenden Befehle für rechte Seiten verwendet werden.%
+werden, können \iffree{im einseitigen Layout}{dann} diese Befehle auch als
+Synonyme für die entsprechenden Befehle für rechte Seiten verwendet werden.%
\else%
-Im einseitigen Layout können diese Befehle auch als Synonym für die
-entsprechenden Befehle für rechte Seiten verwendet werden, da dann alle Seiten
+Im einseitigen Layout können diese Befehle auch als Synonym für die
+entsprechenden Befehle für rechte Seiten verwendet werden, da dann alle Seiten
rechte Seiten sind.%
\fi%
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
-In den meisten Fällen wird man daher eher diese sechs als die zwölf zuvor
+In den meisten Fällen wird man daher eher diese sechs als die zwölf zuvor
vorgestellten Befehle verwenden.
\fi
% Umbruchoptimierung
\iffree{Erlauben Sie mir noch einmal einen wichtigen
Hinweis:\textnote{Achtung!} }{\leavevmode\textnote{Achtung!}}%
-Sie sollten niemals die Überschrift oder die Nummer einer Gliederungsebene mit
-Hilfe einer dieser Anweisungen als Kolumnentitel in den Kopf oder Fuß der
-Seite setzen. Aufgrund der Asynchronizität von Seitenaufbau und Seitenausgabe
+Sie sollten niemals die Ãœberschrift oder die Nummer einer Gliederungsebene mit
+Hilfe einer dieser Anweisungen als Kolumnentitel in den Kopf oder Fuß der
+Seite setzen. Aufgrund der Asynchronizität von Seitenaufbau und Seitenausgabe
kann %
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
es sonst leicht geschehen, dass die falsche Nummer oder die falsche
-Überschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird%
+Ãœberschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird%
\else%
-sonst die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Überschrift im Kolumnentitel
+sonst die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Ãœberschrift im Kolumnentitel
ausgegeben werden%
\fi%
. Stattdessen ist der Mark-Mechanismus, idealer Weise in Verbindung mit den
-Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
+Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1027,18 +1027,18 @@ Automatismen aus dem nächsten Abschnitt, zu verwenden.%
\Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}
\end{Declaration}
Die Sternvarianten\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} der zuvor
-erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich von der Form ohne Stern lediglich bei
+erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich von der Form ohne Stern lediglich bei
Weglassen des optionalen Arguments \OParameter{Inhalt
- plain.scrheadings}. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt
-von \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird
+ plain.scrheadings}. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt
+von \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird
bei der Sternvariante dann das obligatorische Argument \PName{Inhalt
- scrheadings} auch für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}
+ scrheadings} auch für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}
verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich sein, so kann man einfach die
Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.%
%
\begin{Example}
- Mit der Sternform von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifoot} lässt sich das
- Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung weiter verkürzen:
+ Mit der Sternform von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifoot} lässt sich das
+ Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung weiter verkürzen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[twoside]{scrartcl}
\usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -1065,26 +1065,26 @@ Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=KOMA-Script}%
\BeginIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=standard}%
-In den zurückliegenden Beispielen wurde bereits mehrfach auf die
+In den zurückliegenden Beispielen wurde bereits mehrfach auf die
Voreinstellung der Seitenstile
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}%
-\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings} hingewiesen. Tatsächlich unterstützt
+\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings} hingewiesen. Tatsächlich unterstützt
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} derzeit zwei unterschiedliche
-Voreinstellungen. Diese sind von Hand über Option \Option{pagestyleset}
-auswählbar.
+Voreinstellungen. Diese sind von Hand über Option \Option{pagestyleset}
+auswählbar.
Mit der \PName{Einstellung}
\PValue{KOMA-Script}\important{\OptionValue{pagestyleset}{KOMA-Script}} wird
-die Voreinstellung gewählt, die auch automatisch eingestellt wird, falls die
+die Voreinstellung gewählt, die auch automatisch eingestellt wird, falls die
Option nicht angegeben ist und eine \KOMAScript-Klasse erkannt wurde. Dabei
-werden für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} im doppelseitigen Satz
-Kolumnentitel außen im Kopf und Seitenzahlen außen im Fuß gesetzt. Im
+werden für \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} im doppelseitigen Satz
+Kolumnentitel außen im Kopf und Seitenzahlen außen im Fuß gesetzt. Im
einseitigen Satz wird der Kolumnentitel stattdessen mittig im Kopf und die
-Seitenzahl mittig im Fuß platziert. Für die automatischen Kolumnentitel werden
-Groß- und Kleinbuchstaben wie vorgefunden verwendet. Dies entspricht Option
+Seitenzahl mittig im Fuß platziert. Für die automatischen Kolumnentitel werden
+Groß- und Kleinbuchstaben wie vorgefunden verwendet. Dies entspricht Option
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{used}\IndexOption{markcase~=used}%
-\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{used}}. Für
+\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{used}}. Für
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} entfallen die
Kolumnentitel. Die Seitenzahlen werden jedoch identisch platziert.
@@ -1096,34 +1096,34 @@ die Seitenstile jener Klasse angelehnt. Siehe dazu
Mit der \PName{Einstellung}
\PValue{standard}\important{\OptionValue{pagestyleset}{standard}} wird die
-Voreinstellung gewählt, die den Standard-Klassen entspricht. Diese wird auch
+Voreinstellung gewählt, die den Standard-Klassen entspricht. Diese wird auch
automatisch eingestellt, falls die Option nicht angegeben ist und keine
-\KOMAScript-Klasse erkannt wurde. Dabei wird für
+\KOMAScript-Klasse erkannt wurde. Dabei wird für
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} im doppelseitigen Satz der
-Kolumnentitel im Kopf innen und die Seitenzahl -- ebenfalls im Kopf -- außen
+Kolumnentitel im Kopf innen und die Seitenzahl -- ebenfalls im Kopf -- außen
ausgerichtet platziert. Im einseitigen Satz werden dieselben Einstellungen
verwendet. Da hierbei nur rechte Seiten existieren, steht der Kolumnentitel
-dann immer linksbündig im Kopf, die Seitenzahl entsprechend rechtsbündig. Die
+dann immer linksbündig im Kopf, die Seitenzahl entsprechend rechtsbündig. Die
automatischen Kolumnentitel werden -- trotz erheblicher typografischer
Bedenken -- entsprechend
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{upper}\IndexOption{markcase~=upper}%
-\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{upper}} in Großbuchstaben
+\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{upper}} in Großbuchstaben
umgewandelt. Von \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.scrheadings} deutlich
abweichend hat \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} die Seitenzahl
-im einseitigen Satz mittig im Fuß. Im Unterschied\textnote{\KOMAScript{}
+im einseitigen Satz mittig im Fuß. Im Unterschied\textnote{\KOMAScript{}
vs. Standardklassen} zum Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} der Standardklassen
-entfällt die Seitenzahl im doppelseitigen Modus. Die Standardklassen setzen
-die Seitenzahl stattdessen mittig im Fuß, was im doppelseitigen Satz nicht zum
-übrigen Stil der Seiten passt.
+entfällt die Seitenzahl im doppelseitigen Modus. Die Standardklassen setzen
+die Seitenzahl stattdessen mittig im Fuß, was im doppelseitigen Satz nicht zum
+übrigen Stil der Seiten passt.
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext
-Wer die Seitenzahl zurück haben will, kann dies
+Wer die Seitenzahl zurück haben will, kann dies
mit
\begin{lstcode}
\cfoot[\pagemark]{}
\end{lstcode}
erreichen. %
\fi%
-Der Kolumnentitel entfällt bei
+Der Kolumnentitel entfällt bei
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings}.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass mit der Verwendung dieser Option
@@ -1145,88 +1145,88 @@ Dies gilt auch, wenn die Option innerhalb eines Dokuments verwendet wird.%
\OptionVName{footwidth}{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset}
\end{Declaration}
In der Voreinstellung sind Kopf\Index{Kopf>Breite} und
-Fuß\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Breite} genauso breit wie der Satzspiegel. Mit Hilfe dieser
-beiden \KOMAScript-Optionen lässt sich das jedoch ändern. Die \PName{Breite}
-ist dabei die gewünschte Breite des Kopfes beziehungsweise Fußes. Der
-\PName{Offset} gibt an, wie weit der Kopf respektive Fuß in Richtung des
-äußeren Randes -- im einseitigen Satz entsprechend in Richtung des rechten
+Fuß\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Breite} genauso breit wie der Satzspiegel. Mit Hilfe dieser
+beiden \KOMAScript-Optionen lässt sich das jedoch ändern. Die \PName{Breite}
+ist dabei die gewünschte Breite des Kopfes beziehungsweise Fußes. Der
+\PName{Offset} gibt an, wie weit der Kopf respektive Fuß in Richtung des
+äußeren Randes -- im einseitigen Satz entsprechend in Richtung des rechten
Randes -- verschoben werden soll. Dabei sind alle
-drei\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} Werte optional, können also
+drei\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} Werte optional, können also
auch weggelassen werden. Falls ein Wert weggelassen wird, kann auch ein
-zugehöriger Doppelpunkt links davon entfallen. Ist nur ein \PName{Offset}
-angegeben, so wird dieser sowohl für linke als auch für rechte Seiten
-verwendet. Ansonsten wird im doppelseitigen Satz der erste \PName{Offset} für
-ungerade, also rechte Seiten und der zweite für gerade, also linke Seiten
+zugehöriger Doppelpunkt links davon entfallen. Ist nur ein \PName{Offset}
+angegeben, so wird dieser sowohl für linke als auch für rechte Seiten
+verwendet. Ansonsten wird im doppelseitigen Satz der erste \PName{Offset} für
+ungerade, also rechte Seiten und der zweite für gerade, also linke Seiten
verwendet. Ist insgesamt nur ein Wert und kein Doppelpunkt angegeben, so
handelt es sich um die \PName{Breite}.
-Sowohl für \PName{Breite} als auch für \PName{Offset} kann jeder gültige
-Längenwert aber auch jede \LaTeX-Länge oder \TeX-Länge oder \TeX-Abstand
-eingesetzt werden. Darüber hinaus sind für beides auch \eTeX-Längen\-ausdrücke
+Sowohl für \PName{Breite} als auch für \PName{Offset} kann jeder gültige
+Längenwert aber auch jede \LaTeX-Länge oder \TeX-Länge oder \TeX-Abstand
+eingesetzt werden. Darüber hinaus sind für beides auch \eTeX-Längen\-ausdrücke
mit den Grundrechenarten \texttt{+}, \texttt{-}, \texttt{*}, \texttt{/} und
-runden Klammern erlaubt. Näheres zu solchen Längenausdrücken ist
-\cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen. Für \PName{Breite} sind
-außerdem einige symbolische Werte zulässig. Diese sind
+runden Klammern erlaubt. Näheres zu solchen Längenausdrücken ist
+\cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen. Für \PName{Breite} sind
+außerdem einige symbolische Werte zulässig. Diese sind
\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.symbolic.values} zu entnehmen.
-Die Voreinstellung für \PName{Breite} ist die Breite des Textbereichs. Die
-Voreinstellung für \PName{Offset} hängt von der gewählten \PName{Breite}
-ab. In der Regel wird im einseitigen Satz die Hälfte des Unterschieds zwischen
+Die Voreinstellung für \PName{Breite} ist die Breite des Textbereichs. Die
+Voreinstellung für \PName{Offset} hängt von der gewählten \PName{Breite}
+ab. In der Regel wird im einseitigen Satz die Hälfte des Unterschieds zwischen
\PName{Breite} und der Breite des Textbereichs verwendet. Damit wird der Kopf
-über dem Textbereich zentriert. Im doppelseitigen Satz wird hingegen nur ein
+über dem Textbereich zentriert. Im doppelseitigen Satz wird hingegen nur ein
Drittel des Unterschieds zwischen \PName{Breite} und der Breite des
Textbereichs verwendet. Ist \PName{Breite} jedoch die Breite des Textbereichs
-zuzüglich der Marginalienspalte, so ist die Voreinstellung von \PName{Offset}
-immer Null. Falls Ihnen das zu kompliziert ist, sollten Sie den gewünschten
+zuzüglich der Marginalienspalte, so ist die Voreinstellung von \PName{Offset}
+immer Null. Falls Ihnen das zu kompliziert ist, sollten Sie den gewünschten
\PName{Offset} einfach selbst angeben.%
%
\begin{table}
\centering
- \caption[Symbolische Werte für Option \Option{headwidth} und
- \Option{footwidth}]{Erlaubte symbolische Werte für \PName{Breite} bei den
+ \caption[Symbolische Werte für Option \Option{headwidth} und
+ \Option{footwidth}]{Erlaubte symbolische Werte für \PName{Breite} bei den
Optionen \Option{headwidth} und \Option{footwidth}}
\label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.symbolic.values}
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PValue{foot}}{%
- die aktuelle Breite des Fußes%
+ die aktuelle Breite des Fußes%
}%
\entry{\PValue{footbotline}}{%
- die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie unterhalb des Fußes%
+ die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie unterhalb des Fußes%
}%
\entry{\PValue{footsepline}}{%
- die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie zwischen dem Textbereich und
- dem Fuß%
+ die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie zwischen dem Textbereich und
+ dem Fuß%
} \entry{\PValue{head}}{%
die aktuelle Breite des Kopfes%
}%
\entry{\PValue{headsepline}}{%
- die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie zwischen dem Kopf und dem
+ die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie zwischen dem Kopf und dem
Textbereich%
}%
\entry{\PValue{headtopline}}{%
- die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie über dem Kopf%
+ die aktuelle Länge der horizontalen Linie über dem Kopf%
}%
\entry{\PValue{marginpar}}{%
- die Breite der Marginalienspalte einschließlich des Abstandes zwischen
+ die Breite der Marginalienspalte einschließlich des Abstandes zwischen
dem Textbereich und der Marginalienspalte%
}%
\entry{\PValue{page}}{%
- die Breite der Seite unter Berücksichtigung einer eventuell mit Hilfe
+ die Breite der Seite unter Berücksichtigung einer eventuell mit Hilfe
des Pakets \Package{typearea} definierten Bindekorrektur (siehe Option
\DescRef{typearea.option.BCOR} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea},
\DescPageRef{typearea.option.BCOR})%
}%
\entry{\PValue{paper}}{%
- die Breite des Papiers ohne Berücksichtigung einer etwaigen
+ die Breite des Papiers ohne Berücksichtigung einer etwaigen
Bindekorrektur%
}%
\entry{\PValue{text}}{%
die Breite des Textbereichs%
}%
\entry{\PValue{textwithmarginpar}}{%
- die Breite des Textbereichs einschließlich der Marginalienspalte und
- natürlich des Abstandes zwischen den beiden (Achtung: Nur in diesem Fall
- ist die Voreinstellung für \PName{Offset} Null)%
+ die Breite des Textbereichs einschließlich der Marginalienspalte und
+ natürlich des Abstandes zwischen den beiden (Achtung: Nur in diesem Fall
+ ist die Voreinstellung für \PName{Offset} Null)%
}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
@@ -1235,59 +1235,59 @@ immer Null. Falls Ihnen das zu kompliziert ist, sollten Sie den gewünschten
\begin{Declaration}
- \OptionVName{headtopline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
- \OptionVName{headsepline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
- \OptionVName{footsepline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
- \OptionVName{footbotline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
+ \OptionVName{headtopline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
+ \OptionVName{headsepline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
+ \OptionVName{footsepline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
+ \OptionVName{footbotline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}
\end{Declaration}
-\BeginIndex{Option}{headtopline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
-\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
-\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
-\BeginIndex{Option}{footbotline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
-Während die \KOMAScript-Klassen nur eine Trennlinie unter dem Kopf und eine
-weitere über dem Fuß unterstützen und man diese nur wahlweise ein- und
+\BeginIndex{Option}{headtopline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
+\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
+\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
+\BeginIndex{Option}{footbotline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}%
+Während die \KOMAScript-Klassen nur eine Trennlinie unter dem Kopf und eine
+weitere über dem Fuß unterstützen und man diese nur wahlweise ein- und
ausschalten kann, erlaubt das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch noch eine
-Linie über dem Kopf und unter dem Fuß, und man kann bei diesen beiden sowohl
-die \PName{Länge} als auch die \PName{Dicke} konfigurieren.
+Linie über dem Kopf und unter dem Fuß, und man kann bei diesen beiden sowohl
+die \PName{Länge} als auch die \PName{Dicke} konfigurieren.
-Beide Werte sind optional. Lässt man die \PName{Dicke} weg, so wird
+Beide Werte sind optional. Lässt man die \PName{Dicke} weg, so wird
0,4\Unit{pt} angenommen, also eine Haarlinie produziert. Verzichtet man auf
-eine Angabe der \PName{Länge}, so wird die Breite des Kopfes respektive des
-Fußes als gewünschter Wert angenommen. Wird beides weggelassen, so kann auch
+eine Angabe der \PName{Länge}, so wird die Breite des Kopfes respektive des
+Fußes als gewünschter Wert angenommen. Wird beides weggelassen, so kann auch
der Doppelpunkt entfallen. Wird nur ein Wert ohne Doppelpunkt angegeben, so
ist dies die \PName{Dicke}.
-Natürlich darf die \PName{Länge} nicht nur kürzer als die aktuelle Breite des
-Kopfes respektive des Fußes sein. Sie darf auch länger sein. Siehe dazu auch
+Natürlich darf die \PName{Länge} nicht nur kürzer als die aktuelle Breite des
+Kopfes respektive des Fußes sein. Sie darf auch länger sein. Siehe dazu auch
die Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.ilines}\IndexOption{ilines}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.ilines},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.clines}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.olines}},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.clines}\IndexOption{clines} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.olines}\IndexOption{olines}, die später in diesem
-Abschnitt erklärt werden.
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.olines}\IndexOption{olines}, die später in diesem
+Abschnitt erklärt werden.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}\LabelFontElement{headtopline}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}\LabelFontElement{headsepline}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}\LabelFontElement{footsepline}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}\LabelFontElement{footbotline}%
-Neben der Dicke und der Länge kann man auch die Farben der Linien
-ändern. Zunächst richtet sich diese natürlich nach der Farbe, die für den Kopf
-und den Fuß eingestellt ist. Davon unabhängig werden aber auch noch die
-Einstellungen für die gleich benannten
+Neben der Dicke und der Länge kann man auch die Farben der Linien
+ändern. Zunächst richtet sich diese natürlich nach der Farbe, die für den Kopf
+und den Fuß eingestellt ist. Davon unabhängig werden aber auch noch die
+Einstellungen für die gleich benannten
\important[i]{\FontElement{headtopline}\\
\FontElement{headsepline}\\
\FontElement{footsepline}\\
\FontElement{footbotline}}Elemente \FontElement{headtopline},
\FontElement{headsepline}, \FontElement{footsepline} und
-\FontElement{footbotline} angewendet. Diese können mit den Anweisungen
+\FontElement{footbotline} angewendet. Diese können mit den Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} geändert werden (siehe
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} geändert werden (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, ab
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). In der Voreinstellung sind die
-Einstellungen für diese Elemente leer, so dass sie zu keiner Änderung der
-Schrift oder Farbe führen. Änderungen der Schrift sind im Gegensatz zu
-Farbänderungen an dieser Stelle ohnehin nicht sinnvoll und werden daher nicht
+Einstellungen für diese Elemente leer, so dass sie zu keiner Änderung der
+Schrift oder Farbe führen. Änderungen der Schrift sind im Gegensatz zu
+Farbänderungen an dieser Stelle ohnehin nicht sinnvoll und werden daher nicht
empfohlen.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -1300,12 +1300,12 @@ empfohlen.%
\OptionVName{plainfootsepline}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\OptionVName{plainfootbotline}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit diesen Optionen können die Einstellungen für die Linien auch für den
-\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil übernommen werden. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}
-stehen die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in
+Mit diesen Optionen können die Einstellungen für die Linien auch für den
+\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil übernommen werden. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}
+stehen die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben
-sind, zur Verfügung. Bei aktivierter Option werden die entsprechenden
-Linieneinstellungen übernommen. Bei deaktivierter Option wird die
+sind, zur Verfügung. Bei aktivierter Option werden die entsprechenden
+Linieneinstellungen übernommen. Bei deaktivierter Option wird die
entsprechende Linie im \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil hingegen nicht angezeigt.
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1316,16 +1316,16 @@ entsprechende Linie im \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil hingegen nicht angezeigt.
\Option{clines}
\Option{olines}
\end{Declaration}
-Wie bereits zuvor erklärt wurde, können Trennlinien für den Kopf oder Fuß
-konfiguriert werden, die länger oder kürzer als die Breite des Kopfes
-beziehungsweise des Fußes sind. Bisher blieb die Frage offen, wie diese Linien
+Wie bereits zuvor erklärt wurde, können Trennlinien für den Kopf oder Fuß
+konfiguriert werden, die länger oder kürzer als die Breite des Kopfes
+beziehungsweise des Fußes sind. Bisher blieb die Frage offen, wie diese Linien
dann ausgerichtet werden. In der Voreinstellung sind sie im einseitigen Satz
-linksbündig und im doppelseitigen Satz bündig mit dem Anfang des inneren
-Randes. Dies entspricht Option \Option{ilines}. Alternativ können sie jedoch
-mit Option \Option{clines} auch horizontal bezüglich der Breite des Kopfes
-beziehungsweise Fußes zentriert werden. Ebenso ist mit Hilfe von Option
-\Option{olines} eine Ausrichtung am äußeren beziehungsweise rechten Rand
-möglich.%
+linksbündig und im doppelseitigen Satz bündig mit dem Anfang des inneren
+Randes. Dies entspricht Option \Option{ilines}. Alternativ können sie jedoch
+mit Option \Option{clines} auch horizontal bezüglich der Breite des Kopfes
+beziehungsweise Fußes zentriert werden. Ebenso ist mit Hilfe von Option
+\Option{olines} eine Ausrichtung am äußeren beziehungsweise rechten Rand
+möglich.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1333,12 +1333,12 @@ möglich.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Paketoptionen Ebenenmodell Sternvariante Sternform Längenwert
+% LocalWords: Paketoptionen Ebenenmodell Sternvariante Sternform Längenwert
% LocalWords: Titelkopf Automatismen Bindekorrektur
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex
index 9b755255d6..18a1c91b59 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrlayer in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrlayer in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-12-15 15:01:34 +0100 (Sat, 15 Dec 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer)]
\chapter[{Definition von Ebenen und Seitenstilen mit \Package{scrlayer}}]
@@ -57,58 +57,58 @@
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen}%
-Anwender von Grafikprogrammen sind mit dem Modell der Ebenen für eine Seite
+Anwender von Grafikprogrammen sind mit dem Modell der Ebenen für eine Seite
bereits vertraut. \LaTeX{} selbst ist ein solches Modell jedoch eher
fremd. Dennoch gibt es bereits einige Pakete wie \Package{eso-pic} oder
\Package{textpos}, mit denen bereits eine Art Hintergrund- oder
-Vor\-der\-grund\-ebe\-ne in \LaTeX{} verfügbar gemacht wurden. Das Paket
+Vor\-der\-grund\-ebe\-ne in \LaTeX{} verfügbar gemacht wurden. Das Paket
\Package{scrlayer} ist ein weiteres Paket, das solche Hintergrund- und
-Vordergrundebenen zur Verfügung stellt. Im Unterschied zu den anderen
+Vordergrundebenen zur Verfügung stellt. Im Unterschied zu den anderen
genannten Paketen sind die Ebenen bei \Package{scrlayer} jedoch Teil des
Seitenstils. Dadurch ist eine einfache Umschaltung zwischen der Verwendung
-unterschiedlicher Ebenen durch die Umschaltung des Seitenstils möglich.
+unterschiedlicher Ebenen durch die Umschaltung des Seitenstils möglich.
-Um dies zu erreichen, stellt das Paket auf unterer Stufe zusätzlich eine
+Um dies zu erreichen, stellt das Paket auf unterer Stufe zusätzlich eine
Schnittstelle zur Definition von Seitenstilen, die auf einem Stapel oder einer
-Liste von Ebenen beruhen, zum Hinzufügen von Ebenen wahlweise am Anfang oder
+Liste von Ebenen beruhen, zum Hinzufügen von Ebenen wahlweise am Anfang oder
Ende einer solchen Liste von Ebenen oder unmittelbar vor oder hinter einer
-anderen Ebene in einer solchen Liste, zum Löschen einer Ebene aus einer
-solchen Liste und zum Löschen aller Dubletten einer Ebene aus einer solchen
-Liste bereit. Oder kurz und verständlich gesagt: Die Seitenstil-Schnittstelle
+anderen Ebene in einer solchen Liste, zum Löschen einer Ebene aus einer
+solchen Liste und zum Löschen aller Dubletten einer Ebene aus einer solchen
+Liste bereit. Oder kurz und verständlich gesagt: Die Seitenstil-Schnittstelle
von \Package{scrlayer} stellt Befehle bereit, um einen Seitenstil, der auf
einer Liste von Ebenen basiert, zu definieren und diese Ebenenliste zu
verwalten.
Nichtsdestoweniger wird die direkte Verwendung der Ebenen nur erfahrenen
-Anwendern empfohlen. Schnittstellen für Anfänger und durchschnittliche
-Anwender werden als zusätzliche Pakete angeboten, die dann ihrerseits
+Anwendern empfohlen. Schnittstellen für Anfänger und durchschnittliche
+Anwender werden als zusätzliche Pakete angeboten, die dann ihrerseits
\Package{scrlayer} laden. Siehe hierzu \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} in
\autoref{part:forAuthors} diese\iffree{r Anleitung}{s Buches}.
-\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
\section{Einige grundlegende Informationen}
\seclabel{generic.information}
-Das Paket benötigt einige grundlegende Informationen über die
-verwendete Klasse. Autoren von Klassen können \Package{scrlayer} helfen, indem
+Das Paket benötigt einige grundlegende Informationen über die
+verwendete Klasse. Autoren von Klassen können \Package{scrlayer} helfen, indem
sie entsprechende Angaben machen. Anderenfalls versucht das Paket diese
-Informationen selbst zu ermitteln. Das funktioniert beispielsweise für die
-Standardklassen oder für die \KOMAScript-Klassen. Mit anderen Klassen kann es
+Informationen selbst zu ermitteln. Das funktioniert beispielsweise für die
+Standardklassen oder für die \KOMAScript-Klassen. Mit anderen Klassen kann es
funktionieren oder auch ganz oder teilweise fehlschlagen.
Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt einige der Informationen, die Autoren von Klassen
-bereitstellen können. Anwender sollten sich im Normalfall nicht darum zu
-kümmern brauchen.
+bereitstellen können. Anwender sollten sich im Normalfall nicht darum zu
+kümmern brauchen.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{if@chapter}\ \PName{Dann-Code}\ %
\textMacro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Code}\ \textMacro{fi}
\end{Declaration}
Wenn \Macro{if@chapter} definiert ist und \Macro{iftrue}\IndexCmd{iftrue}
-entspricht, berücksichtigt \Package{scrlayer} bei seiner Arbeit die
+entspricht, berücksichtigt \Package{scrlayer} bei seiner Arbeit die
Kapitel-Ebene beispielsweise bei Verwendung von Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.automark}. Wenn es definiert ist, aber nicht
\Macro{iftrue} entspricht, behandelt \Package{scrlayer} nur die Ebenen der
@@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ Befehle \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section},
\Package{scrlayer} die Frage, ob auch die Kapitel-Ebene zu behandeln ist, an
der Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} fest. Ist diese Anweisung
definiert und entspricht sie nicht \Macro{relax}, dann definiert
-\Package{scrlayer} das Makro \Macro{if@chapter} selbst als Synonym für
-\Macro{iftrue}. Anderenfalls definiert es \Macro{if@chapter} als Synonym für
+\Package{scrlayer} das Makro \Macro{if@chapter} selbst als Synonym für
+\Macro{iftrue}. Anderenfalls definiert es \Macro{if@chapter} als Synonym für
\Macro{iffalse}\IndexCmd{iffalse}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -134,29 +134,29 @@ Klassen wie \Class{book} oder \Class{scrbook} bieten
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}\IndexCmd{frontmatter},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter}\IndexCmd{mainmatter} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter}\IndexCmd{backmatter}, um zwischen Vorderteil,
-Hauptteil und Endteil eines Buches umschalten zu können. In der Regel
+Hauptteil und Endteil eines Buches umschalten zu können. In der Regel
verwenden diese Klassen intern \Macro{if@mainmatter}, um entscheiden zu
-können, ob gerade im Hauptteil des Dokuments gearbeitet wird oder
+können, ob gerade im Hauptteil des Dokuments gearbeitet wird oder
nicht. Klassen wie \Class{report} oder \Class{article} haben kein
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter} oder
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} und deshalb auch kein
\Macro{if@mainmatter}. Stattdessen gehen sie davon aus, dass es nur einen
Hauptteil gibt.
-Für \Package{scrlayer} ist es aber einfacher, nicht ständig erneut die
+Für \Package{scrlayer} ist es aber einfacher, nicht ständig erneut die
Existenz und Verwendung der Umschaltanweisungen zu erkennen und damit zu
entscheiden, ob nun gerade im Hauptteil gearbeitet wird oder nicht, sondern
stattdessen auch bei Klassen wie \Class{report} oder \Class{article} mit
\Macro{if@mainmatter} zu arbeiten. Das sollte bei den genannten Klassen dann
schlicht \Macro{iftrue}\IndexCmd{iftrue} entsprechen. Wenn also
\Macro{if@mainmatter} nicht definiert ist, dann definiert \Package{scrlayer}
-es als Synonym für \Macro{iftrue}.
+es als Synonym für \Macro{iftrue}.
Einige Klassen definieren jedoch \DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter},
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter} oder \DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} und
trotzdem kein \Macro{if@mainmatter}. In diesem Fall definiert
-\Package{scrlayer} \Macro{if@mainmatter} ebenfalls als Synonym für
-\Macro{iftrue} und erweitert darüber hinaus die gefundenen Definitionen von
+\Package{scrlayer} \Macro{if@mainmatter} ebenfalls als Synonym für
+\Macro{iftrue} und erweitert darüber hinaus die gefundenen Definitionen von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} so, dass diese \Macro{if@mainmatter} passend
umdefinieren. Falls es jedoch weitere, vergleichbare Befehle zur Umschaltung
@@ -176,22 +176,22 @@ zugeordnet. Das ist notwendig, damit \LaTeX{} die Hierarchie der
Gliederungsebenen verwalten kann. Allerdings sind die Werte
nur der jeweiligen Klasse bekannt, in der die Gliederungsbefehle definiert
sind. Diese setzt dann in den entsprechenden \LaTeX-Befehlen selbst die
-zugehörigen Nummern ein.
+zugehörigen Nummern ein.
{\setlength{\emergencystretch}{1em}%
-Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} benötigt ebenfalls Informationen über die
+Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} benötigt ebenfalls Informationen über die
Hierarchie. Mit Hilfe von \Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth} kann
-\Package{scrlayer} zum Namen einer Gliederungsebene die zugehörige nummerische
-Tiefe bekannt gemacht werden. Für die Standardklassen wäre \PName{Name der
+\Package{scrlayer} zum Namen einer Gliederungsebene die zugehörige nummerische
+Tiefe bekannt gemacht werden. Für die Standardklassen wäre \PName{Name der
Gliederungsebene} beispielsweise \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter},
\PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection},
-\PValue{paragraph} oder \PValue{subparagraph} und die jeweils zugehörige
-\PName{Tiefe der Gliederungsebene} wäre -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 oder 5.\par}
+\PValue{paragraph} oder \PValue{subparagraph} und die jeweils zugehörige
+\PName{Tiefe der Gliederungsebene} wäre -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 oder 5.\par}
-Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} versucht, diese nummerischen Werte zunächst beim
-Laden des Pakets und noch einmal während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}
-selbst zu ermitteln. Aber für den Fall, dass dies einmal nicht zu einem
-korrekten Ergebnis führt, beispielsweise falls es vollkommen andere
+Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} versucht, diese nummerischen Werte zunächst beim
+Laden des Pakets und noch einmal während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}
+selbst zu ermitteln. Aber für den Fall, dass dies einmal nicht zu einem
+korrekten Ergebnis führt, beispielsweise falls es vollkommen andere
Gliederungsbefehle gibt, kann man die Zuordnung eben mit
\Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth} auch explizit vornehmen.%
%
@@ -201,46 +201,46 @@ Gliederungsbefehle gibt, kann man die Zuordnung eben mit
\section{Deklaration von Ebenen}
\seclabel{layers}
-Eine Ebene (engl. \emph{layer}) ist ein Denkmodell für eine Seite. Im
-Gegensatz zu echtem, physischem Papier ist diese Seite vollständig
-transparent. Üblicherweise werden mehrere Ebenen übereinander gestapelt und
-undurchsichtiges Material auf einer Ebene überdeckt Material auf den Ebenen
+Eine Ebene (engl. \emph{layer}) ist ein Denkmodell für eine Seite. Im
+Gegensatz zu echtem, physischem Papier ist diese Seite vollständig
+transparent. Üblicherweise werden mehrere Ebenen übereinander gestapelt und
+undurchsichtiges Material auf einer Ebene überdeckt Material auf den Ebenen
darunter. Ein solcher Stapel von Ebenen wird dann auf eine reale Seite Papier
-abgebildet. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} stellt zwei solche Stapel für jede
-Seite zur Verfügung: einen Hintergrundstapel und einen Vordergrundstapel. Der
+abgebildet. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} stellt zwei solche Stapel für jede
+Seite zur Verfügung: einen Hintergrundstapel und einen Vordergrundstapel. Der
Hintergrundstapel befindet sich unter oder hinter dem normalen Seiteninhalt,
-während der Vordergrundstapel über oder vor dem normalen Seiteninhalt
+während der Vordergrundstapel über oder vor dem normalen Seiteninhalt
ausgegeben wird. Der normale Seiteninhalt ist daher eine Art von Trennebene
zwischen den beiden Ebenenstapeln.
Eine Ebene hat mehrere Eigenschaften, die als Antworten auf grundlegende
-Fragen verstanden werden können:
+Fragen verstanden werden können:
\iffree{\begin{description}}{%
\begingroup
\RedeclareSectionCommand[beforeskip=.5\baselineskip plus .25\baselineskip
minus .1\baselineskip]{paragraph}%
\renewcommand*\item[4][]{\paragraph*{#3{#4}#1}}%
}%
-\item[Gehört die Ebene zum Vordergrund oder zum Hintergrund?]%
+\item[Gehört die Ebene zum Vordergrund oder zum Hintergrund?]%
\leavevmode\textnote{Vorder- oder Hintergrund}\hskip 0pt
Hintergrundebenen werden ausgegeben, bevor der normale Inhalt der Seite
gedruckt wird. Optisch erscheinen sie daher \emph{hinter} oder \emph{unter}
dem normalen Inhalt der Seite. Vordergrundebenen werden an den normalen
- Inhalt anschließend ausgegeben. Optisch erscheinen sie daher \emph{vor},
- \emph{auf} oder \emph{über} dem normalen Inhalt der Seite. In der
+ Inhalt anschließend ausgegeben. Optisch erscheinen sie daher \emph{vor},
+ \emph{auf} oder \emph{über} dem normalen Inhalt der Seite. In der
Voreinstellung ist eine Ebene sowohl eine Hintergrundebene als auch eine
Vordergrundebene und wird daher zweimal ausgegeben. Normalerweise ist es
- daher sinnvoll, dies explizit einzuschränken.
+ daher sinnvoll, dies explizit einzuschränken.
\item[An welcher Position soll die Ebene ausgegeben
werden?]%
\leavevmode\textnote{horizontale und vertikale Position}\hskip 0pt
Zur Beantwortung dieser Frage dienen Eigenschaften zur Festlegung der
horizontalen und der vertikalen Position.
-\item[Wie groß ist die Ebene?]%
- \leavevmode\textnote{horizontale und vertikale Größe}\hskip 0pt
- Ebenso wie für die Position gibt es auch für die horizontale und vertikale
+\item[Wie groß ist die Ebene?]%
+ \leavevmode\textnote{horizontale und vertikale Größe}\hskip 0pt
+ Ebenso wie für die Position gibt es auch für die horizontale und vertikale
Ausdehnung der Ebene Eigenschaften. Damit kann eine Ebene auch kleiner oder
- größer als das Papier sein und an unterschiedlichen Positionen auf dem
+ größer als das Papier sein und an unterschiedlichen Positionen auf dem
Papier liegen.
\item[Wie werden die horizontale und die vertikale Position
gemessen?]%
@@ -250,60 +250,60 @@ Fragen verstanden werden können:
oder zur rechten Kante der Ebene messen. Entsprechend kann man von der
oberen Kante des Papiers zur oberen Kante der Ebene, zur Mitte der Ebene
oder zur unteren Kante der Ebene messen.
-\item[Ist die Ebene für Textausgabe oder für Grafik vorgesehen?]%
+\item[Ist die Ebene für Textausgabe oder für Grafik vorgesehen?]%
\leavevmode\textnote{Text oder Grafik}\hskip 0pt
- Auch diese Frage ist eng mit der Position verknüpft. Während der Anwender
+ Auch diese Frage ist eng mit der Position verknüpft. Während der Anwender
bei der Grafikausgabe beispielsweise davon ausgeht, dass der Ursprung in der
- linken unteren Ecke der Ebene liegt, wäre dies bei der Textausgabe eher
- ungünstig. Daher liegt der Ursprung für Textebenen um die Höhe einer
+ linken unteren Ecke der Ebene liegt, wäre dies bei der Textausgabe eher
+ ungünstig. Daher liegt der Ursprung für Textebenen um die Höhe einer
Standardtextzeile unterhalb der oberen, linken Ecke der Ebene. Grafikebenen
wiederum spannen von sich aus bereits eine
- \Environment{picture}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{picture} auf, in der zusätzliche
- Befehle zur Positionierung zur Verfügung stehen.
+ \Environment{picture}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{picture} auf, in der zusätzliche
+ Befehle zur Positionierung zur Verfügung stehen.
\item[Soll die Ebene auf linken oder rechten Seiten eines Dokuments gedruckt
werden?]%
\leavevmode\textnote{linke oder rechte Seite}\hskip 0pt
In der Voreinstellung wird eine Ebene auf allen Seiten gedruckt. Es ist zu
beachten, dass \LaTeX{} Seiten mit geraden Seitenzahlen als linke Seiten und
Seiten mit ungeraden Seitenzahlen als rechte Seiten behandelt, dass es
- jedoch im einseitigen Modus unabhängig von der Nummer nur rechte Seiten
+ jedoch im einseitigen Modus unabhängig von der Nummer nur rechte Seiten
gibt. \LaTeX{} bezeichnet, den Gepflogenheiten in der englischen Sprache
entsprechend, linke Seiten auch als gerade Seiten und rechte Seiten als
ungerade Seiten.
\item[Soll die Ebene in einseitigen oder in doppelseitigen Dokumenten
verwendet werden?]%
\leavevmode\textnote{einseitig oder doppelseitig}\hskip 0pt
- In der Voreinstellung ist die Ebene diesbezüglich unbeschränkt, wird also
+ In der Voreinstellung ist die Ebene diesbezüglich unbeschränkt, wird also
sowohl im einseitigen als auch im doppelseitigen Modus
ausgegeben. Nichtsdestotrotz wird eine Ebene, die auf gerade Seiten
- beschränkt ist, im einseitigen Modus niemals ausgegeben werden und ist daher
+ beschränkt ist, im einseitigen Modus niemals ausgegeben werden und ist daher
auch keine einseitige Ebene.
\item[Soll die Ebene auf Gleitseiten oder auf Normalseiten ausgegeben
werden?]%
\leavevmode\textnote{Gleitseiten oder Normalseiten}\hskip 0pt
- \LaTeX{} erzeugt Gleitseiten für Objekte aus Umgebungen wie
+ \LaTeX{} erzeugt Gleitseiten für Objekte aus Umgebungen wie
\Environment{table} oder \Environment{figure}, wenn diesen erlaubt wurde,
auf eigenen Seiten ohne Teile des normalen Dokumentinhalts ausgegeben zu
- werden (siehe Option \PValue{p} für \Environment{table} oder
+ werden (siehe Option \PValue{p} für \Environment{table} oder
\Environment{figure}). In gewisser Weise ist es so der gesamten Seite
erlaubt, im Dokument zu gleiten. Normalseiten in diesem Sinne sind alle
- Seiten, die keine Gleitseiten sind. Normalseiten können ebenfalls
- Gleitumgebungen am Anfang, im Inneren oder am Ende enthalten. Sehr große
- Gleitumgebungen können auch den Eindruck einer Gleitseite erzeugen, obwohl
+ Seiten, die keine Gleitseiten sind. Normalseiten können ebenfalls
+ Gleitumgebungen am Anfang, im Inneren oder am Ende enthalten. Sehr große
+ Gleitumgebungen können auch den Eindruck einer Gleitseite erzeugen, obwohl
es sich bei ihnen in Wirklichkeit um oben auf einer Normalseite platzierte
Gleitumgebungen handelt.
\item[Welchen Inhalt hat die Ebene?]
\leavevmode\textnote{Inhalt}\hskip 0pt
- Die zugehörige Eigenschaft gibt schlicht an, was gedruckt werden soll, wann
+ Die zugehörige Eigenschaft gibt schlicht an, was gedruckt werden soll, wann
immer die Ebene ausgegeben wird.
\iffree{\end{description}}{%
\endgroup\par\bigskip\noindent\ignorespaces
}%
Damit haben wir derzeit acht Fragen an die Ebenen, aus denen sich unmittelbar
-eine Reihe von Eigenschaften ergeben. Später
+eine Reihe von Eigenschaften ergeben. Später
\iffree{in dieser Anleitung }{}% Umbruchkorrektur
-werden wir weitere Eigenschaften kennenlernen, die jedoch auf diese primären
-Eigenschaften abgebildet werden können.
+werden wir weitere Eigenschaften kennenlernen, die jedoch auf diese primären
+Eigenschaften abgebildet werden können.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{DeclareLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene}
@@ -312,102 +312,102 @@ Eigenschaften abgebildet werden können.
\Macro{RedeclareLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene}
\Macro{ModifyLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um Ebenen zu definieren. Der
+Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um Ebenen zu definieren. Der
\PName{Name der Ebene} muss voll expandierbar sein. Die Expansion sollte in
-ASCII-Buchstaben resultieren. Einige zusätzliche Zeichen werden ebenfalls
+ASCII-Buchstaben resultieren. Einige zusätzliche Zeichen werden ebenfalls
akzeptiert, ihre Verwendung wird jedoch nur erfahrenden Anwendern empfohlen.
Bei Verwendung von \Macro{DeclareLayer}\important{\Macro{DeclareLayer}} spielt
es keine Rolle, ob eine Ebene \PName{Name der Ebene} bereits existiert oder
-nicht. Sie wird in jedem Fall mit den über die \PName{Optionenliste}
+nicht. Sie wird in jedem Fall mit den über die \PName{Optionenliste}
angegebenen Eigenschaften definiert. Einzelne Optionen bestehen entweder nur
-aus einem Schlüssel oder aus einem Schlüssel, gefolgt von einem
+aus einem Schlüssel oder aus einem Schlüssel, gefolgt von einem
Gleichheitszeichen und einem Wert. Die Optionen sind durch Komma voneinander
getrennt. Um innerhalb der Werte einer Option ein Komma oder ein Leerzeichen
-verwenden zu können, muss der entsprechende Wert in geschweifte Klammern
-gesetzt werden. Eine Übersicht über die Optionen und die Eigenschaften, die
-sie repräsentieren, findet sich in \autoref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}.
+verwenden zu können, muss der entsprechende Wert in geschweifte Klammern
+gesetzt werden. Eine Übersicht über die Optionen und die Eigenschaften, die
+sie repräsentieren, findet sich in \autoref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}.
Im Unterschied zu \Macro{DeclareLayer} meldet
\Macro{DeclareNewLayer}\important{\Macro{DeclareNewLayer}} einen Fehler, falls
eine Ebene mit dem angegebenen Namen bereits existiert. Damit wird der
Anwender davor bewahrt, versehentlich mehrmals denselben Namen zu
-verwenden. Dies ist insbesondere auch dann nützlich, wenn Klassen oder Pakete
+verwenden. Dies ist insbesondere auch dann nützlich, wenn Klassen oder Pakete
intern ebenfalls Ebenen definieren.
Dagegen definiert \Macro{ProvideLayer}\important{\Macro{ProvideLayer}} die
Ebene nur, wenn nicht bereits eine Ebene mit dem angegebenen Namen
-existiert. Wird der Name hingegen bereits für eine andere Ebene verwendet, so
+existiert. Wird der Name hingegen bereits für eine andere Ebene verwendet, so
wird die neuerliche Definition ignoriert. Die Anweisung hat also die
Bedeutung: \emph{Definiere die Ebene, falls sie noch nicht existiert.}
Soll eine bereits existierende Ebene umdefiniert werden, so kann wahlweise
-\Macro{RedeclareLayer} oder \Macro{ModifyLayer} verwendet werden. Während mit
-\Macro{RedeclareLayer}\important{\Macro{RedeclareLayer}} die Ebene zunächst
-auf die Grundeinstellungen zurückgesetzt und damit über die angegebene
+\Macro{RedeclareLayer} oder \Macro{ModifyLayer} verwendet werden. Während mit
+\Macro{RedeclareLayer}\important{\Macro{RedeclareLayer}} die Ebene zunächst
+auf die Grundeinstellungen zurückgesetzt und damit über die angegebene
\PName{Optionenliste} komplett neu definiert wird, unterbleibt bei
-\Macro{ModifyLayer}\important{\Macro{ModifyLayer}} das Zurücksetzen. Es werden
-dann nur die Eigenschaften geändert, für die in der \PName{Optionenliste} auch
+\Macro{ModifyLayer}\important{\Macro{ModifyLayer}} das Zurücksetzen. Es werden
+dann nur die Eigenschaften geändert, für die in der \PName{Optionenliste} auch
Angaben vorhanden sind. Die Anwendung auf eine zuvor noch nicht definierte
Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar.
\begin{desclist}
\desccaption{%
- Optionen für die Definition von Seiten-Ebenen mit ihrer jeweiligen
+ Optionen für die Definition von Seiten-Ebenen mit ihrer jeweiligen
Bedeutung als Ebenen-Eigenschaft\label{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}%
}{%
- Optionen für die Definition von Ebenen (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Optionen für die Definition von Ebenen (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\entry{%
\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\OptionVName{addcontents}{Code}}{%
Der angegebene Wert wird an den aktuellen Wert des Attributs
- \Option{contents} angehängt. Es wird also ein zusätzlicher Inhalt
- generiert. Zu näheren Informationen über die Behandlung von \PName{Code}
+ \Option{contents} angehängt. Es wird also ein zusätzlicher Inhalt
+ generiert. Zu näheren Informationen über die Behandlung von \PName{Code}
siehe Option \Option{contents}.%
}%
\entry{%
\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- \OptionVName{addheight}{zusätzliche Höhe}}{%
+ \OptionVName{addheight}{zusätzliche Höhe}}{%
Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{height} wird um den Wert dieser
- Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
- \Option{height} möglich.%
+ Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
+ \Option{height} möglich.%
}%
\entry{%
\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- \OptionVName{addhoffset}{zusätzlicher horizontaler Abstand}}{%
+ \OptionVName{addhoffset}{zusätzlicher horizontaler Abstand}}{%
Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{hoffset} wird um den Wert dieser
- Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
- \Option{hoffset} möglich.%
+ Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
+ \Option{hoffset} möglich.%
}%
\entry{%
\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- \OptionVName{addvoffset}{zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand}}{%
+ \OptionVName{addvoffset}{zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand}}{%
Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{voffset} wird um den Wert dieser
- Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
- \Option{voffset} möglich.%
+ Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
+ \Option{voffset} möglich.%
}%
\entry{%
\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
- \OptionVName{addwidth}{zusätzliche Breite}}{%
+ \OptionVName{addwidth}{zusätzliche Breite}}{%
Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{width} wird um den Wert dieser
- Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
- \Option{width} möglich.%
+ Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei
+ \Option{width} möglich.%
}%
\nentry{\OptionVName{align}{Ausrichtungszeichen}}{%
- Über die \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} wird die gewünschte Ausrichtung der
- Ebene bestimmt. Dabei steht jedes einzelne \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} für
- eine mögliche Anwendung der Werte \PName{Abstand} der Optionen
+ Über die \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} wird die gewünschte Ausrichtung der
+ Ebene bestimmt. Dabei steht jedes einzelne \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} für
+ eine mögliche Anwendung der Werte \PName{Abstand} der Optionen
\Option{hoffset} oder \Option{voffset}. Mehrere
- \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} können ohne Leerzeichen oder Komma direkt
+ \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} können ohne Leerzeichen oder Komma direkt
hintereinander geschrieben werden und werden in der Reihenfolge ihres
Auf"|tretens ausgewertet. Makros sind im Wert der Option jedoch
- nicht zulässig. Zulässige \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} sind:
+ nicht zulässig. Zulässige \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} sind:
\begin{description}
\item[\PValue{b} --] der Wert der Option \Option{voffset} ist der Abstand
der Unterkante der Ebene von der Oberkante des Papiers.
\item[\PValue{c} --] die Werte der Optionen \Option{hoffset} und
- \Option{voffset} sind die Abstände des Zentrums der Ebene von der linken
+ \Option{voffset} sind die Abstände des Zentrums der Ebene von der linken
und der oberen Kante des Papiers.
\item[\PValue{l} --] der Wert der Option \Option{hoffset} ist der Abstand
der linken Kante der Ebene von der linken Kante des Papiers.
@@ -418,18 +418,18 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar.
\end{description}
}%
\entry{\KOption{area}\Parameter{horizontaler Abstand}\Parameter{vertikaler
- Abstand}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft resultiert in den primären Eigenschaften
+ Abstand}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe}}{%
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft resultiert in den primären Eigenschaften
\OptionVName{hoffset}{horizontaler Abstand},
\OptionVName{voffset}{vertikaler Abstand},
- \OptionVName{width}{Breite}, \KOption{height}{Höhe}.%
+ \OptionVName{width}{Breite}, \KOption{height}{Höhe}.%
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\Option{backandforeground}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Einschränkung der Ebene auf den Vorder- oder
- Hintergrund wieder aufgehoben und diesbezüglich die Grundeinstellung
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Einschränkung der Ebene auf den Vorder- oder
+ Hintergrund wieder aufgehoben und diesbezüglich die Grundeinstellung
wieder hergestellt. In der Regel ist dies wenig sinnvoll, daher existiert
- die Option nur aus Gründen der Vollständigkeit. Diese Option erwartet und
+ die Option nur aus Gründen der Vollständigkeit. Diese Option erwartet und
erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{background}}{%
@@ -439,34 +439,34 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar.
ausgegeben. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{bottommargin}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene horizontal von der linken Kante bis zur
rechten Kante des Papiers reicht und vertikal den gesamten Bereich unter
- dem Seitenfuß bis zur unteren Papierkante abdeckt. Diese Option erwartet
+ dem Seitenfuß bis zur unteren Papierkante abdeckt. Diese Option erwartet
und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{clone}{Name einer Ebene}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt alle primären Eigenschaften
- entsprechend der aktuellen, primären Eigenschaften der Ebene mit dem
- angegebenen \PName{Name einer Ebene}. Bezüglich \PName{Name
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt alle primären Eigenschaften
+ entsprechend der aktuellen, primären Eigenschaften der Ebene mit dem
+ angegebenen \PName{Name einer Ebene}. Bezüglich \PName{Name
einer Ebene} siehe die Hinweise zu \PName{Name der Ebene} am Anfang der
- Erklärung zu \Macro{DeclareLayer}. Darüber hinaus muss die zu klonende
+ Erklärung zu \Macro{DeclareLayer}. Darüber hinaus muss die zu klonende
Ebene bereits definiert sein.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{contents}{Code}}{%
- Der angegebene \PName{Code} wird immer dann expandiert und ausgeführt,
+ Der angegebene \PName{Code} wird immer dann expandiert und ausgeführt,
wenn die Ebene ausgegeben wird. Damit definiert \PName{Code} das, was auf
- der Ebene zu sehen ist. Es werden keine Tests durchgeführt, ob
- \PName{Code} gültig und korrekt ist. Fehler in \PName{Code} können daher
- zu verschiedenen Fehlermeldungen auf jeder Seite führen, auf der die Ebene
+ der Ebene zu sehen ist. Es werden keine Tests durchgeführt, ob
+ \PName{Code} gültig und korrekt ist. Fehler in \PName{Code} können daher
+ zu verschiedenen Fehlermeldungen auf jeder Seite führen, auf der die Ebene
ausgegeben wird.%
}%
\entry{\Option{evenpage}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für linke Seiten. Sie wird
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für linke Seiten. Sie wird
also im Gegensatz zur Grundeinstellung nicht mehr sowohl auf linken als
auch auf rechten Seiten ausgegeben. Da es linke Seiten nur im
- doppelseitigen Satz gibt, schließt diese Eigenschaft quasi
+ doppelseitigen Satz gibt, schließt diese Eigenschaft quasi
\Option{twoside} mit ein. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
@@ -477,38 +477,38 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar.
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\Option{everyside}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Einschränkung der Ebene auf den einseitigen
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Einschränkung der Ebene auf den einseitigen
oder den doppelseitigen Satz aufgehoben. Sie wird damit wie in der
Voreinstellung wieder sowohl im einseitigen als auch im doppelseitigen
Satz ausgegeben. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\Option{floatornonfloatpage}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Einschränkung der Ebene auf Gleitseiten oder
- Seiten, die keine Gleitseiten sind, aufgehoben und diesbezüglich die
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Einschränkung der Ebene auf Gleitseiten oder
+ Seiten, die keine Gleitseiten sind, aufgehoben und diesbezüglich die
Voreinstellung wieder hergestellt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt
keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{floatpage}}{%
Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Gleitseitenebene. Sie wird also
im Gegensatz zur Grundeinstellung nicht mehr auf allen Seiten, sondern nur
- noch auf Gleitseiten ausgegeben. Näheres zu Gleitseiten ist der Einleitung
+ noch auf Gleitseiten ausgegeben. Näheres zu Gleitseiten ist der Einleitung
zu diesem Abschnitt zu entnehmen. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen
Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{foot}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
- \Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den Seitenfuß in der Breite des
- Textbereichs überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
+ \Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den Seitenfuß in der Breite des
+ Textbereichs überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{footskip}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene vertikal den Bereich zwischen dem
- Textbereich und dem Seitenfuß in Breite des Textbereichs überdeckt. Es ist
- zu beachten, dass die Höhe dieses Bereichs zwar von der Länge
- \Length{footskip} abhängt, dieser jedoch nicht entspricht. Diese Option
+ Textbereich und dem Seitenfuß in Breite des Textbereichs überdeckt. Es ist
+ zu beachten, dass die Höhe dieses Bereichs zwar von der Länge
+ \Length{footskip} abhängt, dieser jedoch nicht entspricht. Diese Option
erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{foreground}}{%
@@ -518,57 +518,57 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar.
ausgegeben. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{head}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den Seitenkopf in der Breite des
- Textbereichs überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
+ Textbereichs überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{headsep}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den Abstand zwischen dem Seitenkopf und
- dem Textbereich in der Breite des Textbereichs überdeckt. Ihre Höhe
- entspricht damit der Länge \Length{headsep}. Diese Option erwartet und
+ dem Textbereich in der Breite des Textbereichs überdeckt. Ihre Höhe
+ entspricht damit der Länge \Length{headsep}. Diese Option erwartet und
erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{height}{Höhe}}{%
- Setzt die \PName{Höhe} der Ebene. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Höhe}
- wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert
- wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip}
- definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck
+ \entry{\OptionVName{height}{Höhe}}{%
+ Setzt die \PName{Höhe} der Ebene. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Höhe}
+ wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert
+ wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip}
+ definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck
unter Verwendung von +, -, /, *, (, und ). Die genaue Syntax eines
- Längenausdrucks ist \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.%
+ Längenausdrucks ist \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{hoffset}{Abstand}}{%
Setzt den \PName{Abstand} der Ebene von der linken Kante des Papiers. Wie
- der \PName{Abstand} gemessen wird, hängt von Eigenschaft \Option{align}
- ab. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Abstand} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein
- kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit
- \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip} definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie
- 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck unter Verwendung von +, -, /, *, (,
- und ). Die genaue Syntax eines Längenausdrucks ist
+ der \PName{Abstand} gemessen wird, hängt von Eigenschaft \Option{align}
+ ab. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Abstand} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein
+ kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit
+ \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip} definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie
+ 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck unter Verwendung von +, -, /, *, (,
+ und ). Die genaue Syntax eines Längenausdrucks ist
\cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.%
}%
\entry{\Option{innermargin}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den inneren Rand der Seite von der
- Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Der innere Rand
+ Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Der innere Rand
entspricht im einseitigen Satz dem linken Rand. Diese Option erwartet und
erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{leftmargin}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den linken Rand der Seite von der
- Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet
+ Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet
und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\OptionVName{mode}{Modus}}{%
- Diese primäre Eigenschaft bestimmt, in welchem \PName{Modus} der Inhalt der
+ Diese primäre Eigenschaft bestimmt, in welchem \PName{Modus} der Inhalt der
Ebene ausgegeben wird. Die Voreinstellung ist \PValue{text}. Dabei wird
- die oberste Grundlinie um die Höhe einer Standardtextzeile unterhalb der
+ die oberste Grundlinie um die Höhe einer Standardtextzeile unterhalb der
Oberkante der Ebene platziert. Damit ist Text normalerweise sauber am
oberen Rand der Ebene ausgerichtet. Im \PValue{picture}-\PName{Modus} wird
hingegen eine \Environment{picture}-Umgebung mit dem Ursprung in der
@@ -576,117 +576,126 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar.
\PName{Modus} \PValue{raw} entspricht in der Voreinstellung \PValue{text}.
Die %\textnote{Achtung!}
- Änderung des \PName{Modus} einer Ebene führt in der Regel zu einer
- Verschiebung des Inhalts. Außerdem stehen beispielsweise im \PName{Modus}
- \PValue{picture} zusätzliche Platzierungsbefehle zur Verfügung, die in
- einem anderen \PName{Modus} zu Fehlermeldungen führen. Daher ist es
- normalerweise nicht sinnvoll, den \PName{Modus} einer Ebene nachträglich
- zu ändern!%
+ Änderung des \PName{Modus} einer Ebene führt in der Regel zu einer
+ Verschiebung des Inhalts. Außerdem stehen beispielsweise im \PName{Modus}
+ \PValue{picture} zusätzliche Platzierungsbefehle zur Verfügung, die in
+ einem anderen \PName{Modus} zu Fehlermeldungen führen. Daher ist es
+ normalerweise nicht sinnvoll, den \PName{Modus} einer Ebene nachträglich
+ zu ändern!%
}%
\entry{\Option{nonfloatpage}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene auf Seiten beschränkt, die keine
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene auf Seiten beschränkt, die keine
Gleitseiten sind. Sie wird also im Gegensatz zur Grundeinstellung nicht
mehr auf allen Seiten, sondern nur noch auf Nichtgleitseiten
- ausgegeben. Näheres zu Gleitseiten und Nichtgleitseiten ist der Einleitung
+ ausgegeben. Näheres zu Gleitseiten und Nichtgleitseiten ist der Einleitung
zu diesem Abschnitt zu entnehmen. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen
Wert.%
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\Option{oddorevenpage}}{%
- Mit dieser Option werden Beschränkungen der Ebene auf rechte oder linke
+ Mit dieser Option werden Beschränkungen der Ebene auf rechte oder linke
Seiten aufgehoben. Damit wird die Ebene wie in der Voreinstellung sowohl
auf linken als auch rechten Seiten ausgegeben. Diese Option erwartet und
erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{oddpage}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für rechte Seiten. Sie
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für rechte Seiten. Sie
wird also im Gegensatz zur Grundeinstellung nicht mehr sowohl auf linken
als auch auf rechten Seiten ausgegeben. Es ist zu beachten, dass im
- einseitigen Satz alle Seiten unabhängig von der Seitenzahl rechte Seiten
+ einseitigen Satz alle Seiten unabhängig von der Seitenzahl rechte Seiten
sind. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{oneside}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für den einseitigen
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für den einseitigen
Satz. Sie wird also im Gegensatz zur Grundeinstellung nicht mehr sowohl im
einseitigen als auch im doppelseitigen Satz ausgegeben. Diese Option
erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{outermargin}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
- \Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den äußeren Rand der Seite von der
- Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Der äußere Rand
+ \Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den äußeren Rand der Seite von der
+ Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Der äußere Rand
entspricht im einseitigen Satz dem rechten Rand. Diese Option erwartet und
erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{page}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
- \Option{align} so, dass die Ebene die komplette Seite überdeckt. Diese
+ \Option{align} so, dass die Ebene die komplette Seite überdeckt. Diese
Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\OptionVName{pretocontents}{Code}}{%
Der angegebene Wert wird dem aktuellen Wert des Attributs
- \Option{contents} vorangestellt. Es wird also ein zusätzlicher Inhalt vor
- dem bisherigen Inhalt generiert. Zu näheren Informationen über die
+ \Option{contents} vorangestellt. Es wird also ein zusätzlicher Inhalt vor
+ dem bisherigen Inhalt generiert. Zu näheren Informationen über die
Behandlung von \PName{Code} siehe Option \Option{contents}.%
}%
\entry{\Option{rightmargin}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den rechten Rand der Seite von der
- Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet
+ Papieroberkante bis zur Papierunterkante überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet
und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{textarea}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den kompletten Textbereich
- überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
+ überdeckt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{topmargin}}{%
- Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
+ Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt die primären Eigenschaften
\Option{hoffset}, \Option{voffset}, \Option{width}, \Option{height} und
\Option{align} so, dass die Ebene den oberen Rand der Seite von der linken
- Kante des Papiers bis zu dessen rechter Kante überdeckt. Diese Option
+ Kante des Papiers bis zu dessen rechter Kante überdeckt. Diese Option
erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\Option{twoside}}{%
- Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für den doppelseitigen
+ Mit dieser Option wird die Ebene zu einer Ebene für den doppelseitigen
Satz. Sie wird also im Gegensatz zur Grundeinstellung nicht mehr sowohl im
einseitigen als auch im doppelseitigen Satz ausgegeben. Diese Option
erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.%
}%
\entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}%
\Option{unrestricted}}{%
- Hebt alle Ausgabebeschränkungen auf. Damit ist die Option eine Kombination
+ Hebt alle Ausgabebeschränkungen auf. Damit ist die Option eine Kombination
von \Option{backandforeground}, \Option{everyside} und
\Option{floatornonfloatpage}. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen
Wert.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{voffset}{Abstand}}{%
Setzt den \PName{Abstand} der Ebene von der Papieroberkante. Wie der
- \PName{Abstand} gemessen wird, hängt von Eigenschaft \Option{align}
- ab. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Abstand} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein
- kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit
- \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip} definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie
- 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck unter Verwendung von +, -, /, *, (,
- und ). Die genaue Syntax eines Längenausdrucks ist
+ \PName{Abstand} gemessen wird, hängt von Eigenschaft \Option{align}
+ ab. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Abstand} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein
+ kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit
+ \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip} definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie
+ 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck unter Verwendung von +, -, /, *, (,
+ und ). Die genaue Syntax eines Längenausdrucks ist
\cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{width}{Breite}}{%
Setzt die \PName{Breite} der Ebene. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Breite}
- wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert
- wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip}
- definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck
+ wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert
+ wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip}
+ definiert wurde, ein Längenwert wie 10\Unit{pt} oder ein Längenausdruck
unter Verwendung von +, -, /, *, (, und ). Die genaue Syntax eines
- Längenausdrucks ist \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.%
+ Längenausdrucks ist \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.%
}%
\end{desclist}
%
\EndIndexGroup
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{ModifyLayers}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}
+\end{Declaration}
+Diese\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Package{scrlayer}} Anweisung führt
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayer} mit der angebenen \PName{Optionenliste}
+für alle Ebenen aus, die in der durch Komma separierten \PName{Ebenenliste}
+angegeben sind. Sie dient also dazu, die Eigenschaften einer ganzen Reihe von
+Ebenen gleichzeitig zu ändern.%
+\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{layerhalign}
@@ -697,40 +706,40 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar.
\Macro{layerheight}
\end{Declaration}
Diese Anweisungen sind nur im mit \Option{contents}, \Option{addcontents} oder
-\Option{pretocontents} angegebenen \PName{Code} gültig. Sie enthalten die
-tatsächlich verwendete Ausrichtung, Position und Ausdehnung der Ebene während
-deren Ausgabe. Dies ist jedoch nicht zwangsläufig auch die tatsächliche
-Ausdehnung des Inhalts, falls dieser beispielsweise überbreit oder überhoch
-ist oder die Ebene nicht komplett ausfüllt.
+\Option{pretocontents} angegebenen \PName{Code} gültig. Sie enthalten die
+tatsächlich verwendete Ausrichtung, Position und Ausdehnung der Ebene während
+deren Ausgabe. Dies ist jedoch nicht zwangsläufig auch die tatsächliche
+Ausdehnung des Inhalts, falls dieser beispielsweise überbreit oder überhoch
+ist oder die Ebene nicht komplett ausfüllt.
-Die primäre Ebeneneigenschaft \PValue{align} wird auf
+Die primäre Ebeneneigenschaft \PValue{align} wird auf
\Macro{layerhalign}\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} und
\Macro{layervalign} abgebildet. Dabei werden die horizontalen Werte \PValue{l}
-und \PValue{r} nur in \Macro{layerhalign} übernommen, während die vertikalen
-Werte \PValue{t} und \PValue{b} nur in \Macro{layervalign} übernommen
+und \PValue{r} nur in \Macro{layerhalign} übernommen, während die vertikalen
+Werte \PValue{t} und \PValue{b} nur in \Macro{layervalign} übernommen
werden. \iffree{Der sowohl horizontale als auch vertikale }{}% Umbruchkorrektur
Wert \PValue{c} wird in
-beide Anweisungen übernommen. Sind bei \PValue{align} mehrere,
-widersprüchliche Angaben zu finden, so gewinnt die jeweils letzte. Damit ist
+beide Anweisungen übernommen. Sind bei \PValue{align} mehrere,
+widersprüchliche Angaben zu finden, so gewinnt die jeweils letzte. Damit ist
also \Macro{layerhalign} immer entweder \PValue{l}, \PValue{c} oder \PValue{r}
und \Macro{layervalign} immer entweder \PValue{t}, \PValue{c} oder \PValue{b}.
-Eine\textnote{Achtung!} Umdefinierung der Anweisungen und damit Änderung der in
-ihnen gespeicherten Werte ist nicht gestattet und führt zu unvorhersehbaren
+Eine\textnote{Achtung!} Umdefinierung der Anweisungen und damit Änderung der in
+ihnen gespeicherten Werte ist nicht gestattet und führt zu unvorhersehbaren
Ergebnissen.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{LenToUnit}\Parameter{Länge}
+ \Macro{LenToUnit}\Parameter{Länge}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} Anweisung stammt ursprünglich von
+Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} Anweisung stammt ursprünglich von
\Package{eso-pic}\IndexPackage{eso-pic}\iffree{ ab
Version~2.0f}{}%Umbruchkorrektur
-. Sie rechnet Längen-Werte in Vielfache von \Length{unitlength} um und kann
-daher anstelle von Koordinaten oder anderen von \Length{unitlength} abhängigen
+. Sie rechnet Längen-Werte in Vielfache von \Length{unitlength} um und kann
+daher anstelle von Koordinaten oder anderen von \Length{unitlength} abhängigen
Werten einer \Environment{picture}-Umgebung verwendet werden. Siehe dazu auch
-\cite{package:eso-pic} und die nachfolgende Erklärung zu \Macro{putUR},
+\cite{package:eso-pic} und die nachfolgende Erklärung zu \Macro{putUR},
\Macro{putLL} und \Macro{putLR}. Die Anweisung wird nur definiert, wenn sie
nicht bereits beispielsweise durch das Laden von \Package{eso-pic} definiert
ist.%
@@ -739,8 +748,8 @@ ist.%
Es sei an dieser Stelle darauf hingewiesen, dass man bei Verwendung von Paket
\Package{picture}\IndexPackage{picture}\textnote{\Package{picture}} (siehe
\cite{package:picture}) die Anweisung \Macro{LenToUnit} in der Regel nicht
-mehr benötigt. Das Paket erweitert die \Environment{picture}-Umgebung und
-deren Anweisung so, dass man für Koordinaten auch direkt \LaTeX-Längen
+mehr benötigt. Das Paket erweitert die \Environment{picture}-Umgebung und
+deren Anweisung so, dass man für Koordinaten auch direkt \LaTeX-Längen
verwenden kann.%
\fi
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -753,8 +762,8 @@ verwenden kann.%
\Macro{putLR}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\Macro{putC}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} Anweisungen können innerhalb der
-primären Ebeneneigenschaft \PValue{contents} verwendet werden, wenn die Ebene
+Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} Anweisungen können innerhalb der
+primären Ebeneneigenschaft \PValue{contents} verwendet werden, wenn die Ebene
mit \OptionValue{mode}{picture} erstellt wurde. In diesem Fall platziert
\Macro{putUL} den \PName{Inhalt} relativ zur oberen, linken Ecke der Ebene und
entspricht damit
@@ -773,8 +782,8 @@ damit
schlussendlich platziert \PName{Inhalt} relativ zur Mitte der Ebene.%
%
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen feststellen, wie genau die Höhe des Textbereichs bei
- \OptionValueRef{typearea}{DIV}{classic} tatsächlich der Breite der Seite
+ Sie wollen feststellen, wie genau die Höhe des Textbereichs bei
+ \OptionValueRef{typearea}{DIV}{classic} tatsächlich der Breite der Seite
entspricht, und erstellen dazu eine Ebene, die sowohl den Textbereich
umrandet als auch einen Kreis mit der Papierbreite als Durchmesser im
Zentrum des Textbereichs platziert:
@@ -801,8 +810,8 @@ schlussendlich platziert \PName{Inhalt} relativ zur Mitte der Ebene.%
Wie Sie sehen werden, passt die von \Package{typearea} vorgenommene
Abbildung auf einen ganzzahligen \PName{DIV}-Wert im Beispiel sehr gut.
\end{Example}
-Näheres zu dem im Beispiel skizzierten spätmittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon
-finden Sie übrigens in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction},
+Näheres zu dem im Beispiel skizzierten spätmittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon
+finden Sie übrigens in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction},
\autopageref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction}.
Die Anweisung
@@ -810,7 +819,7 @@ Die Anweisung
im Beispiel bereits verwendet wurde, dient der Definition eines Seitenstils,
der die neu definiert Ebene ausgibt. Sie wird in
\autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyles},
-\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} erklärt werden.%
+\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} erklärt werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -821,8 +830,8 @@ Mit\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} dieser Anweisung kann der aktuelle
Inhalt einer Ebene ermittelt werden. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist unbedingt zu
beachten, dass bei Verwendung dieser Anweisung im \PName{Code} der
Ebenen-Attribute \Option{contents}, \Option{addcontents} oder
-\Option{pretocontents} unendliche Rekursionen entstehen können, wenn dabei auf
-den Inhalt der aktuellen Ebene zugegriffen wird. Der Anwender ist selbst dafür
+\Option{pretocontents} unendliche Rekursionen entstehen können, wenn dabei auf
+den Inhalt der aktuellen Ebene zugegriffen wird. Der Anwender ist selbst dafür
verantwortlich, solche Situationen zu vermeiden!%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -831,21 +840,21 @@ verantwortlich, solche Situationen zu vermeiden!%
\Macro{IfLayerExists}\Parameter{Name~der~Ebene}
\Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisung kann dazu verwendet werden, Code in Abhängigkeit davon, ob
-eine Ebene existiert oder nicht, auszuführen. Wenn die Ebene \PName{Name der
- Ebene} existiert, so wird der \PName{Dann-Code} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
+Diese Anweisung kann dazu verwendet werden, Code in Abhängigkeit davon, ob
+eine Ebene existiert oder nicht, auszuführen. Wenn die Ebene \PName{Name der
+ Ebene} existiert, so wird der \PName{Dann-Code} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der
\PName{Sonst-Code}. Bitte beachten Sie, dass die Anweisung nicht wirklich
testen kann, ob eine Ebene existiert. Sie verwendet stattdessen Heuristiken,
-die niemals falsch-negativ sein können, jedoch im Extremfall falsch-positiv
-sein könnten. %
+die niemals falsch-negativ sein können, jedoch im Extremfall falsch-positiv
+sein könnten. %
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
-Nichtsdestotrotz: Falls der Test falsch-positiv ist, läuft etwas
-schief. Beispielsweise könnte dies ein Indikator für die Verwendung eines
-inkompatiblen Pakets oder dafür sein, dass der Anwender etwas tut, was er
+Nichtsdestotrotz: Falls der Test falsch-positiv ist, läuft etwas
+schief. Beispielsweise könnte dies ein Indikator für die Verwendung eines
+inkompatiblen Pakets oder dafür sein, dass der Anwender etwas tut, was er
besser nicht tun sollte.%
\else
Falsch-positive Entscheidungen weisen auf ein Problem, beispielsweise die
-Verwendung eines inkompatiblen Pakets oder ungünstige Wahl von internen
+Verwendung eines inkompatiblen Pakets oder ungünstige Wahl von internen
Makronamen durch den Anwender.%
\fi
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -855,20 +864,20 @@ Makronamen durch den Anwender.%
\Macro{DestroyLayer}\Parameter{Name~der~Ebene}
\end{Declaration}
Existiert eine Ebene \PName{Name der Ebene}, so werden alle zu dieser Ebene
-gehörenden Makros zu \Macro{relax}. Die Ebene kann nicht länger verwendet
+gehörenden Makros zu \Macro{relax}. Die Ebene kann nicht länger verwendet
werden. In bereits mit \Package{scrlayer} definierten Seitenstils werden
-derart zerstörte Ebenen ignoriert. Zerstörte Ebenen können mit
+derart zerstörte Ebenen ignoriert. Zerstörte Ebenen können mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewLayer} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ProvideLayer} neu definiert werden. Sie können jedoch
-vor einer neuerlichen Definition nicht länger mit
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ProvideLayer} neu definiert werden. Sie können jedoch
+vor einer neuerlichen Definition nicht länger mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareLayer} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayer} verändert werden.
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayer} verändert werden.
Die Anweisung ist dazu bestimmt, innerhalb des Arguments \PName{Code} von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer.enduserinterfaces},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}) verwendet zu
-werden. Damit können Ebenen, die unter Verwendung von entfernbaren Anweisungen
+werden. Damit können Ebenen, die unter Verwendung von entfernbaren Anweisungen
einer entfernbaren Benutzerschnittstelle definiert wurden, zusammen mit dieser
Benutzerschnittstelle entfernt werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -879,13 +888,13 @@ Benutzerschnittstelle entfernt werden.%
\end{Declaration}
Mit Hilfe der \KOMAScript-Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.draft}\IndexOption{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}
-kann für das Paket \Package{scrlayer} ein Entwurfsmodus aktiviert werden. In
-diesem Entwurfsmodus wird hinter jeder Ebene zunächst eine Bemaßung der Ebene
-ausgegeben. Diese Bemaßung erfolgt mit \Macro{layercontentsmeasure}. Diese
-Anweisung zeigt am oberen und linken Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zentimeter
-und am rechten und unteren Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zoll. Die Anweisung
-\Macro{layercontentsmeasure} kann statt über die Option auch schlicht als
-alleiniger \PName{Code} für die Eigenschaft \Option{contents} einer Ebene
+kann für das Paket \Package{scrlayer} ein Entwurfsmodus aktiviert werden. In
+diesem Entwurfsmodus wird hinter jeder Ebene zunächst eine Bemaßung der Ebene
+ausgegeben. Diese Bemaßung erfolgt mit \Macro{layercontentsmeasure}. Diese
+Anweisung zeigt am oberen und linken Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zentimeter
+und am rechten und unteren Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zoll. Die Anweisung
+\Macro{layercontentsmeasure} kann statt über die Option auch schlicht als
+alleiniger \PName{Code} für die Eigenschaft \Option{contents} einer Ebene
verwendet werden.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -898,37 +907,37 @@ verwendet werden.%
\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}%
Wir kennen nun Ebenen und wissen, wie diese definiert und verwaltet
werden. Aber bisher wissen wir noch nicht, wie sie verwendet werden. Die
-möglicherweise überraschende Antwort lautet: mit Hilfe von
-Seitenstilen. Üblicherweise werden Seitenstile in \LaTeX{} zur Definition von
-Kopf und Fuß der Seite verwendet.
+möglicherweise überraschende Antwort lautet: mit Hilfe von
+Seitenstilen. Ãœblicherweise werden Seitenstile in \LaTeX{} zur Definition von
+Kopf und Fuß der Seite verwendet.
-Kopf und Fuß für ungerade oder rechte Seiten\textnote{gerade oder ungerade
+Kopf und Fuß für ungerade oder rechte Seiten\textnote{gerade oder ungerade
Seite} werden im doppelseitigen Modus auf Seiten mit ungerader Seitenzahl
ausgegeben. Im einseitigen Modus werden sie auf allen Seiten verwendet. Das
ist unmittelbar mit den
Optionen\important[i]{\Option{evenpage}\\\Option{oddpage}} \Option{oddpage}
-und \Option{evenpage} für Ebenen vergleichbar.
+und \Option{evenpage} für Ebenen vergleichbar.
-Der Seitenkopf\textnote{Kopf oder Fuß} wird vor dem normalen Seiteninhalt
-ausgegeben. Der Seitenfuß wird entsprechend nach dem normalen Seiteninhalt
+Der Seitenkopf\textnote{Kopf oder Fuß} wird vor dem normalen Seiteninhalt
+ausgegeben. Der Seitenfuß wird entsprechend nach dem normalen Seiteninhalt
ausgegeben. Dies korrespondiert also unmittelbar mit den
Optionen\important[i]{\Option{background}\\\Option{foreground}}
-\Option{background} und \Option{foreground} für Ebenen.
+\Option{background} und \Option{foreground} für Ebenen.
Daher liegt es nahe, Seitenstile als Listen von Ebenen zu definieren. Aber
-statt nur die genannten vier Optionen können dabei alle Eigenschaften
+statt nur die genannten vier Optionen können dabei alle Eigenschaften
verwendet werden, die in \autoref{sec:scrlayer.layers},
\autoref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}, ab \autopageref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}
-erklärt wurden.
+erklärt wurden.
-Als Ergebnis dieser Überlegungen ist eine Form von Seitenstilen, die
+Als Ergebnis dieser Ãœberlegungen ist eine Form von Seitenstilen, die
\Package{scrlayer} bietet, der Ebenen-Seitenstil\textnote{Ebenen-Seitenstil}%
\Index{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}\Index{Ebenen>Seitenstil}\Index{Seiten>Stil}. Ein
-solcher Ebenen-Seitenstil besteht aus Ebenen und zusätzlich aus mehreren Haken
+solcher Ebenen-Seitenstil besteht aus Ebenen und zusätzlich aus mehreren Haken
(engl. \emph{hooks}). Die Ebenen wurden bereits in
\autoref{sec:scrlayer.layers} beschrieben. Die
Haken\Index[indexmain]{Haken}\textnote{Haken} sind Punkte in der Expansion
-oder Anwendung von Seitenstilen, zu denen zusätzlicher Code hinzugefügt werden
+oder Anwendung von Seitenstilen, zu denen zusätzlicher Code hinzugefügt werden
kann. Erfahrene Anwender kennen dieses Konzept bereits von beispielsweise
\Macro{AtBeginDocument} (siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) oder
\DescRef{scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux} (siehe
@@ -938,17 +947,17 @@ Eine zweite Form von Seitenstilen, die \Package{scrlayer} bietet, ist der
Alias-Seitenstil\textnote{Alias-Seitenstil}%
\Index{Seitenstil>Alias-}\Index{Alias>Seitenstil}\Index{Seiten>Stil} oder
Seitenstil-Alias. Ein Seitenstil-Alias besteht in Wirklichkeit aus einem
-anderen Seitenstil. Anders ausgedrückt ist der Name eines Seitenstil-Alias ein
-Alias-Name für einen anderen Seitenstil-Alias oder einen primären
-Seitenstil. Daher führt die Manipulation an einem Seitenstil-Alias zu einer
-Manipulation am originären Seitenstil. Ist der originäre Seitenstil selbst
-ebenfalls ein Seitenstil-Alias, so führt dessen Manipulation wiederum zu einer
-Manipulation dessen originären Seitenstils und immer so weiter, bis
-schließlich ein realer Seitenstil verändert wird. Der Ausdruck \emph{realer
+anderen Seitenstil. Anders ausgedrückt ist der Name eines Seitenstil-Alias ein
+Alias-Name für einen anderen Seitenstil-Alias oder einen primären
+Seitenstil. Daher führt die Manipulation an einem Seitenstil-Alias zu einer
+Manipulation am originären Seitenstil. Ist der originäre Seitenstil selbst
+ebenfalls ein Seitenstil-Alias, so führt dessen Manipulation wiederum zu einer
+Manipulation dessen originären Seitenstils und immer so weiter, bis
+schließlich ein realer Seitenstil verändert wird. Der Ausdruck \emph{realer
Seitenstil}\textnote{realer Seitenstil} wird zur Unterscheidung von einem
Seitenstil-Alias verwendet. Alle Seitenstile, die kein Seitenstil-Alias sind,
-sind reale Seitenstile. Seitenstil-Aliase können nicht nur für Seitenstile
-definiert werden, die mit \Package{scrlayer} definiert wurden, sondern für
+sind reale Seitenstile. Seitenstil-Aliase können nicht nur für Seitenstile
+definiert werden, die mit \Package{scrlayer} definiert wurden, sondern für
alle Seitenstile.
@@ -961,33 +970,33 @@ Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} erweitert die \LaTeX-Anweisung
\Macro{currentpagestyle} als den Namen des jeweils aktiven Seitenstils
definiert. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}\IndexCmd{thispagestyle} selbst
-\Macro{currentpagestyle} nicht verändert. Wird
+\Macro{currentpagestyle} nicht verändert. Wird
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} verwendet, so kann sich
\Macro{currentpagestyle} aber innerhalb der \LaTeX-Ausgabefunktion
-verändern. Dies hat jedoch nur dann Auswirkungen, wenn
-\Macro{currentpagestyle} bis in die \LaTeX-Ausgabefunktion geschützt verwendet
+verändern. Dies hat jedoch nur dann Auswirkungen, wenn
+\Macro{currentpagestyle} bis in die \LaTeX-Ausgabefunktion geschützt verwendet
wird.
-Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die später in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten
+Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die später in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten
Ebenen-Seitenstile nicht auf diese Erweiterung von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} angewiesen sind, da sie selbst auch
-\Macro{currentpagestyle} umdefinieren. Die Erweiterung wurde für die
+\Macro{currentpagestyle} umdefinieren. Die Erweiterung wurde für die
Verwendung von anderen Seitenstilen, die nicht auf \Package{scrlayer}
-basieren, vorgenommen. Es ist außerdem zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass
+basieren, vorgenommen. Es ist außerdem zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass
\Macro{currentpagestyle} vor der ersten Verwendung von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} nach dem Laden von \Package{scrlayer} leer
-ist. Bei der Definition einer Endanwender-Schnittstelle dürfte es daher
-nützlich sein, mit einer impliziten \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}-Anweisung
+ist. Bei der Definition einer Endanwender-Schnittstelle dürfte es daher
+nützlich sein, mit einer impliziten \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}-Anweisung
den aktuellen Seitenstil auf eine Voreinstellung zu setzen.%
Wird mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} ein Alias-Seitenstils aktiviert, so
liefert \Macro{currentpagestyle} nicht den Alias-Namen, sondern den des
-originären Seitenstils. Den\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} Alias-Namen
+originären Seitenstils. Den\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} Alias-Namen
kann man in diesem Fall mit \Macro{toplevelpagestyle} erhalten. Es wird davon
abgeraten, Seitenstile zu definieren, die beispielsweise per
-\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.ifstr} abhängig von \Macro{toplevelpagestyle}
+\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.ifstr} abhängig von \Macro{toplevelpagestyle}
unterschiedliche Ergebnisse liefern, da dies bei Aktivierung per
-\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} zu falschen Resultaten führen kann.%
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} zu falschen Resultaten führen kann.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -995,49 +1004,49 @@ unterschiedliche Ergebnisse liefern, da dies bei Aktivierung per
\Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{Code}
\Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{Code}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Anweisung \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle} fügt einem Haken\Index{Haken}
-(engl. \emph{hook}) \PName{Code} hinzu, der innerhalb der Ausführung von
+Die Anweisung \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle} fügt einem Haken\Index{Haken}
+(engl. \emph{hook}) \PName{Code} hinzu, der innerhalb der Ausführung von
Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}, unmittelbar
-vor der Auswahl des Seitenstils ausgeführt wird. Innerhalb von \PName{Code}
-kann \texttt{\#1} als Platzhalter für das Argument von
+vor der Auswahl des Seitenstils ausgeführt wird. Innerhalb von \PName{Code}
+kann \texttt{\#1} als Platzhalter für das Argument von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} verwendet werden.
-Die Anweisung \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle} arbeitet ähnlich. Allerdings
-wird hier \PName{Code} ausgeführt, nachdem der Seitenstil gewählt und
+Die Anweisung \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle} arbeitet ähnlich. Allerdings
+wird hier \PName{Code} ausgeführt, nachdem der Seitenstil gewählt und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.currentpagestyle} auf den Namen des realen Seitenstils
gesetzt wurde.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass \PName{Code} jeweils nur bei der
Wahl eines Seitenstils mit Hilfe von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}
-ausgeführt wird. Wird ein Seitenstil auf andere Art, beispielsweise mit Hilfe
-von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}, gewählt, so wird \PName{Code} nicht
-ausgeführt. Es ist außerdem zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass einmal
-hinzugefügter \PName{Code} nicht mehr entfernt werden kann. Allerdings wird
-der \PName{Code} lokal hinzugefügt. Sein Gültigkeitsbereich kann daher mit
-einer Gruppe beschränkt werden.%
+ausgeführt wird. Wird ein Seitenstil auf andere Art, beispielsweise mit Hilfe
+von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}, gewählt, so wird \PName{Code} nicht
+ausgeführt. Es ist außerdem zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass einmal
+hinzugefügter \PName{Code} nicht mehr entfernt werden kann. Allerdings wird
+der \PName{Code} lokal hinzugefügt. Sein Gültigkeitsbereich kann daher mit
+einer Gruppe beschränkt werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{DeclarePageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}
- \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
+ \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
\Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}
- \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
+ \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
\Macro{ProvidePageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}
- \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
+ \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
\Macro{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}
- \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
+ \Parameter{originärer~Seitenstil-Name}
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Alias-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Alias>Seitenstil}%
-Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um einen Seitenstil mit dem Namen
-\PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} zu definieren, der einfach nur ein Alias für
-einen bereits existierenden Seitenstil mit dem Namen \PName{originärer
+Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um einen Seitenstil mit dem Namen
+\PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} zu definieren, der einfach nur ein Alias für
+einen bereits existierenden Seitenstil mit dem Namen \PName{originärer
Seitenstil-Name} ist. Falls bereits ein Seitenstil mit dem Namen
\PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} existiert, wird dieser vor der Erzeugung des
Alias mit \Macro{DeclarePageStyleAlias} oder \Macro{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}
-zerstört.
+zerstört.
Die Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias} erzeugt eine Fehlermeldung,
falls zuvor bereits ein Seitenstil \PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}
@@ -1057,7 +1066,7 @@ eine Fehlermeldung.
\iffree{\csname @tempswafalse\endcsname}{\csname @tempswatrue\endcsname}%
\csname if@tempswa\endcsname% Umbruchkorrekturtext
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie schreiben eine Klasse und verwenden darin für
+ Angenommen, Sie schreiben eine Klasse und verwenden darin für
Kapitelanfangsseiten den Seitenstil \PageStyle{chapter}. In der
Voreinstellung soll dieser Seitenstil dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain}
entsprechen. Daher verwenden Sie das Paket \Package{scrlayer} und definieren
@@ -1065,8 +1074,8 @@ eine Fehlermeldung.
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias{chapter}{plain}
\end{lstcode}
- den Seitenstil \PageStyle{chapter} als Alias für den Seitenstil
- \PageStyle{plain}. Will hingegen der Anwender später, dass der Seitenstil
+ den Seitenstil \PageStyle{chapter} als Alias für den Seitenstil
+ \PageStyle{plain}. Will hingegen der Anwender später, dass der Seitenstil
\PageStyle{chapter} dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{empty} entspricht, so erreicht
er dies mit:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1083,8 +1092,8 @@ eine Fehlermeldung.
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Alias-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Alias>Seitenstil}%
Mit dieser Anweisung wird der Seitenstil-Alias mit dem angegebenen Namen
-\PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} für \LaTeX{} wieder undefiniert, wenn es
-tatsächlich einen Alias-Seitenstil dieses Namens gibt. Anschließend kann der
+\PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} für \LaTeX{} wieder undefiniert, wenn es
+tatsächlich einen Alias-Seitenstil dieses Namens gibt. Anschließend kann der
Seitenstil auch mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias} neu definiert werden.
@@ -1102,9 +1111,9 @@ wurden, beim automatischen Entfernen dieses Interfaces mit zu entfernen.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Alias-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Alias>Seitenstil}%
-Diese Anweisung sucht rekursiv nach dem tatsächlichen Namen eines
+Diese Anweisung sucht rekursiv nach dem tatsächlichen Namen eines
Seitenstils, wenn der angegebene \PName{Seitenstil-Name} zu einem
-Alias-Seitenstil gehört. Ist \PName{Seitenstil-Name} nicht der Name eines
+Alias-Seitenstil gehört. Ist \PName{Seitenstil-Name} nicht der Name eines
Alias-Seitenstils, so ist das Ergebnis \PName{Seitenstil-Name} selbst. Das
gilt auch, falls ein Seitenstil namens \PName{Seitenstil-Name} gar nicht
existiert. Die Anweisung ist voll expandierbar und kann damit beispielsweise
@@ -1132,132 +1141,132 @@ Diese Anweisungen deklarieren einen Seitenstil mit dem Namen
\PName{Seitenstil-Name}. Der Seitenstil besteht aus einer Anzahl von Ebenen,
die in der mit Komma separierten \PName{Ebenenliste} angegeben sind. Es ist zu
beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass sowohl \PName{Seitenstil-Name} als auch
-\PName{Ebenenliste} voll expandierbar sein müssen und die Expansion zu einer
-Reihe von Buchstaben führen sollte. Einige zusätzliche Zeichen werden
+\PName{Ebenenliste} voll expandierbar sein müssen und die Expansion zu einer
+Reihe von Buchstaben führen sollte. Einige zusätzliche Zeichen werden
ebenfalls akzeptiert, ihre Verwendung wird jedoch nur erfahrenden Anwendern
empfohlen.
Die \PName{Optionenliste} ist eine mit Komma separierte Liste von Optionen der
-Form \texttt{\PName{Schlüssel}=\PName{Code}}. Diese Optionen können verwendet
-werden, um zusätzliche Eigenschaften zu setzen und zusätzliche Möglichkeiten
+Form \texttt{\PName{Schlüssel}=\PName{Code}}. Diese Optionen können verwendet
+werden, um zusätzliche Eigenschaften zu setzen und zusätzliche Möglichkeiten
zu nutzen. Derzeit werden sie verwendet, um \mbox{Code} an bestimmten Stellen
-der Aktivierung oder Verwendung eines Seitenstils über Haken\Index{Haken}
-(engl. \emph{hooks}) auszuführen. Für allgemeine Informationen zu Haken sei
+der Aktivierung oder Verwendung eines Seitenstils über Haken\Index{Haken}
+(engl. \emph{hooks}) auszuführen. Für allgemeine Informationen zu Haken sei
auf die Einleitung zu diesem Abschnitt verwiesen. Details zu den Haken und
ihrer Bedeutung sind \autoref{tab:scrlayer.pagestyle.hooks} zu entnehmen.
\begin{desclist}
\desccaption{%
- Optionen und gleichnamige Haken für Ebenen-Seitenstile (in der Reihenfolge
+ Optionen und gleichnamige Haken für Ebenen-Seitenstile (in der Reihenfolge
ihrer Abarbeitung)\label{tab:scrlayer.pagestyle.hooks}%
}{%
- Optionen für die Haken von Ebenen-Seitenstilen (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Optionen für die Haken von Ebenen-Seitenstilen (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onselect}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
wenn der Seitenstil beispielsweise mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}
- ausgewählt wird. Es ist zu beachten, dass
+ ausgewählt wird. Es ist zu beachten, dass
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} selbst keinen Seitenstil unmittelbar
- auswählt, sondern der Seitenstil in diesem Fall erst innerhalb der
+ auswählt, sondern der Seitenstil in diesem Fall erst innerhalb der
Ausgaberoutine von \LaTeX{} aktiviert wird.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{oninit}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil initialisiert
- wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für
- Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für Vordergrund-Ebenen.%
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil initialisiert
+ wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für
+ Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für Vordergrund-Ebenen.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{ononeside}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn im einseitigen Modus die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil
- initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
- geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn im einseitigen Modus die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil
+ initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
+ geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
Vordergrund-Ebenen.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{ontwoside}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn im doppelseitigen Modus die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil
- initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
- geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn im doppelseitigen Modus die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil
+ initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
+ geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
Vordergrund-Ebenen.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onoddpage}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer rechten Seite
- initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
- geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
- Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass im einseitigen Modus alle
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer rechten Seite
+ initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
+ geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
+ Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass im einseitigen Modus alle
Seiten rechte Seiten sind.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onevenpage}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer linken Seite
- initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
- geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
- Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass im einseitigen Modus keine
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer linken Seite
+ initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal
+ geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
+ Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass im einseitigen Modus keine
linken Seiten existieren.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onfloatpage}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer
- Gleitumgebungsseite initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede
- Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
- Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass Gleitumgebungsseiten nur
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer
+ Gleitumgebungsseite initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede
+ Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für
+ Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass Gleitumgebungsseiten nur
diejenigen Seiten sind, auf denen eine oder mehrere p-platzierte
Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onnonfloatpage}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer Seite
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer Seite
initialisiert wird, die keine Gleitumgebungsseite ist. Beachten Sie, dass
- dies für jede Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und
- einmal für Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass
+ dies für jede Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und
+ einmal für Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass
Gleitumgebungsseiten nur diejenigen Seiten sind, auf denen eine oder
mehrere p-platzierte Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden, und auf anderen
- Seiten sehr wohl t-, b- oder h-platzierte Gleitumgebungen stehen können.%
+ Seiten sehr wohl t-, b- oder h-platzierte Gleitumgebungen stehen können.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onbackground}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Hintergrund einer Seite initialisiert
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Hintergrund einer Seite initialisiert
wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies auf jeder Seite genau einmal der Fall ist.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onforeground}{Code}}{%
- Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
- wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Vordergrund einer Seite initialisiert
+ Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens\Index{Haken} wird immer dann ausgeführt,
+ wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Vordergrund einer Seite initialisiert
wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies auf jeder Seite genau einmal der Fall ist.%
}%
\end{desclist}
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
-Während die Anweisung
+Während die Anweisung
\Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} %\important{\Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}}%
% Leider zu lang. Deshalb auch auf alle
% weiteren verzichtet.
den Seitenstil immer definiert, erzeugt \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}
eine Fehlermeldung, falls bereits ein Seitenstil gleichen Namens
existiert. Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie, dass die Deklaration eines
-Seitenstils, der bereits ein Alias für einen anderen Seitenstil ist (siehe
+Seitenstils, der bereits ein Alias für einen anderen Seitenstil ist (siehe
beispielsweise \Macro{DeclareAliasPageStyle} zuvor in diesem Abschnitt) nicht
zu der Umdefinierung des angegebenen Alias-Seitenstils, sondern des realen
Seitenstils (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.GetRealPageStyle} zuvor in diesem
-Abschnitt) führt.%
+Abschnitt) führt.%
\else%
Die Anweisung \Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} definiert den Seitenstil
-unabhängig davon, ob bereits ein Seitenstil des Namens \PName{Seitenstil-Name}
+unabhängig davon, ob bereits ein Seitenstil des Namens \PName{Seitenstil-Name}
existiert. Gegebenenfalls wird der existierende Seitenstil komplett neu
definiert. Falls bereits ein Alias-Seitenstil \PName{Seitenstil-Name}
existiert wird jedoch nicht der Alias-Seitenstil selbst neu definiert, sondern
-der zugehörige reale Seitenstil (siehe
+der zugehörige reale Seitenstil (siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.GetRealPageStyle} zuvor in diesem Abschnitt).
Die Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} unterscheidet sich in dem
-Fall, dass bereits ein gleichnamiger Seitenstil existiert. Unabhängig davon,
+Fall, dass bereits ein gleichnamiger Seitenstil existiert. Unabhängig davon,
ob es sich um einen realen Seitenstil oder einen Alias-Seitenstil handelt,
wird in diesem Fall ein Fehler gemeldet.%
\fi
Im Unterschied dazu wird bei \Macro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers} der Seitenstil
-unverändert erhalten, wenn bereits ein Seitenstil des Namens
+unverändert erhalten, wenn bereits ein Seitenstil des Namens
\PName{Seitenstil-Name} existiert. Existiert kein solcher Seitenstil, so wird
er wie bei \Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} definiert.
@@ -1286,28 +1295,28 @@ als Ziel eines Alias-Seitenstils verwendet werden. Stattdessen werden die
Ebenen und Haken\Index{Haken} dieses Seitenstils von allen anderen
Ebenen-Seitenstilen mit verwendet. Dabei werden die Haken von
\PageStyle{@everystyle@} jeweils vor den entsprechenden Haken und die Ebenen
-jeweils vor den entsprechenden Ebenen des aktiven Seitenstils ausgeführt.
+jeweils vor den entsprechenden Ebenen des aktiven Seitenstils ausgeführt.
-Damit ist das Hinzufügen einer Ebene zum Pseudo-Seitenstil
+Damit ist das Hinzufügen einer Ebene zum Pseudo-Seitenstil
\PageStyle{@everystyle@} oder von Code zu einem Haken dieses Seitenstils
-vergleichbar mit dem Hinzufügen einer Ebene beziehungsweise von Haken-Code zu
+vergleichbar mit dem Hinzufügen einer Ebene beziehungsweise von Haken-Code zu
allen Ebenen-Seitenstile. Der eine entscheidende Unterschied ist: Befehle, die
sich auf die Ebenen eines Seitenstils beziehen, das sind neben
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} beispielsweise auch die
Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}, lassen die Ebenen des
-Seitenstils \PageStyle{@everystyle@} unberücksichtigt, wenn sie auf einen
+Seitenstils \PageStyle{@everystyle@} unberücksichtigt, wenn sie auf einen
anderen Ebenen-Seitenstil angewendet werden.
Der zweite etwas andere Ebenen-Seitenstil ist
\PageStyle{empty}\important{\PageStyle{empty}}. Bereits vom \LaTeX-Kern wird
-ein Seitenstil dieses Namens definiert, der einen leeren Kopf und Fuß hat. Das
+ein Seitenstil dieses Namens definiert, der einen leeren Kopf und Fuß hat. Das
Paket \Package{scrlayer} definiert diesen Seitenstil als Ebenen-Seitenstil
ohne Ebenen um. Nichtsdestotrotz kann er wie jeder andere Ebenen-Seitenstil
-verwendet werden. Der Hauptvorteil dieses Ebenen-Seitenstils gegenüber dem
-ursprünglichen Seitenstil aus dem \LaTeX-Kern ist, dass er ebenfalls die
+verwendet werden. Der Hauptvorteil dieses Ebenen-Seitenstils gegenüber dem
+ursprünglichen Seitenstil aus dem \LaTeX-Kern ist, dass er ebenfalls die
Haken\Index{Haken} und Ebenen des Pseudo-Seitenstils \PageStyle{@everystyle@}
-ausführt.%
+ausführt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1325,21 +1334,21 @@ ausführt.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
-Für jeden der Haken\Index{Haken} aus \autoref{tab:scrlayer.pagestyle.hooks}
-existiert außerdem eine \KOMAScript-Option%
+Für jeden der Haken\Index{Haken} aus \autoref{tab:scrlayer.pagestyle.hooks}
+existiert außerdem eine \KOMAScript-Option%
\iftrue%
-. Die Namen der \KOMAScript-Optionen ähneln den Namen der Optionen für die
+. Die Namen der \KOMAScript-Optionen ähneln den Namen der Optionen für die
Befehle zur Deklaration von Ebenen-Seitenstilen. Es wird lediglich ein
-»\texttt{ps}« nach dem »\texttt{on}« am Anfang des Namens eingefügt%
+»\texttt{ps}« nach dem »\texttt{on}« am Anfang des Namens eingefügt%
\else%
-, in deren Namen lediglich ein \texttt{ps} eingefügt wurde%
+, in deren Namen lediglich ein \texttt{ps} eingefügt wurde%
\fi%
-. Die Werte dieser \KOMAScript-Optionen werden als Anfangswerte für die
+. Die Werte dieser \KOMAScript-Optionen werden als Anfangswerte für die
entsprechenden Haken verwendet. Dieser Anfangswert wird dann um alle Werte,
die dem entsprechenden Haken in der \PName{Optionenliste} der
Deklarationsbefehle zugewiesen werden, erweitert. Der Anfangswert kann mit
Hilfe der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}, die
-später in diesem Abschnitt erklärt wird, entfernt werden.%
+später in diesem Abschnitt erklärt wird, entfernt werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1349,14 +1358,14 @@ später in diesem Abschnitt erklärt wird, entfernt werden.%
Wird\ChangedAt{v3.24}{\Package{scrlayer}\and \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} ein
Dokument beispielsweise mit Hilfe von Paket
\Package{setspace}\IndexPackage{setspace}\important{\Package{setspace}} mit
-erhöhtem Zeilenabstand gesetzt, ist es oft dennoch nicht erwünscht, dass Kopf
-und Fuß der Seite ebenfalls mit diesem erhöhten Zeilenabstand gesetzt
-werden. Das gilt umso mehr, wenn Kopf und Fuß nur aus jeweils einer Zeile
+erhöhtem Zeilenabstand gesetzt, ist es oft dennoch nicht erwünscht, dass Kopf
+und Fuß der Seite ebenfalls mit diesem erhöhten Zeilenabstand gesetzt
+werden. Das gilt umso mehr, wenn Kopf und Fuß nur aus jeweils einer Zeile
bestehen. In diesem Fall kann man \KOMAScript-Option \Option{singlespacing}
setzen. In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist die Option jedoch
-nicht gesetzt! Die Option wirkt generell für alle Ebenen-Seitenstile. Will man
+nicht gesetzt! Die Option wirkt generell für alle Ebenen-Seitenstile. Will man
hingegen nur einige Ebenen-Seitenstil einzeilig gesetzt haben, so sollte man
-stattdessen für diese Seitenstile
+stattdessen für diese Seitenstile
\OptionValue{oninit}{\Macro{linespread}\PParameter{1}\Macro{selectfont}}
verwenden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1372,13 +1381,13 @@ verwenden.%
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
Solange \KOMAScript-Option \Option{deactivatepagestylelayers} nicht
-aktiviert ist, kann mit \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} für jede Ebene des
+aktiviert ist, kann mit \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} für jede Ebene des
Seitenstils mit dem Namen \PName{Seitenstil-Name} beliebiger \PName{Code}
-ausgeführt werden. Innerhalb von \PName{Code} dient dabei \PValue{\#1} als
-Platzhalter für den Namen der gerade abgearbeiteten Ebene.
+ausgeführt werden. Innerhalb von \PName{Code} dient dabei \PValue{\#1} als
+Platzhalter für den Namen der gerade abgearbeiteten Ebene.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie wollen die Namen aller Ebenen des Seitenstils
- \PValue{scrheadings} als Komma-separierte Liste, so können Sie dies mit
+ \PValue{scrheadings} als Komma-separierte Liste, so können Sie dies mit
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*\commaatlist{}
\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle{scrheadings}{%
@@ -1389,23 +1398,23 @@ Platzhalter für den Namen der gerade abgearbeiteten Ebene.
\end{Example}
Die Verwendung von \Macro{gdef} anstelle von \Macro{def} ist im Beispiel
notwendig\textnote{Achtung!}, weil \PName{Code} innerhalb einer Gruppe
-ausgeführt wird, um unerwünschte Seiteneffekte zu minimieren. Die Anweisung
+ausgeführt wird, um unerwünschte Seiteneffekte zu minimieren. Die Anweisung
\Macro{gdef} definiert \Macro{commaatlist} jedoch global um, so dass beim
-Aufruf des Codes für die nächste Ebene die Änderung Bestand hat.
+Aufruf des Codes für die nächste Ebene die Änderung Bestand hat.
-Alternativ\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}} hätte man auch zwar mit
-\Macro{def}, dafür aber mit der Sternvariante \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}
-arbeiten können. Diese Form verzichtet bei der Ausführung von \PName{Code} auf
+Alternativ\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}} hätte man auch zwar mit
+\Macro{def}, dafür aber mit der Sternvariante \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}
+arbeiten können. Diese Form verzichtet bei der Ausführung von \PName{Code} auf
eine Gruppe. Allerdings muss der Anwender dann selbst
-sicherstellen, dass \PName{Code} keine unerwünschten Seiteneffekte
-hat. Insbesondere würde die Deaktivierung der Ebenen mit
+sicherstellen, dass \PName{Code} keine unerwünschten Seiteneffekte
+hat. Insbesondere würde die Deaktivierung der Ebenen mit
\OptionValue{deactivatepagestylelayers}{true} innerhalb von \PName{Code} dann
-über den Aufruf von \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*} hinaus Bestand haben.
+über den Aufruf von \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*} hinaus Bestand haben.
Diverse Anweisungen von \Package{scrlayer} setzen intern selbst ebenfalls
-\Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} ein. Auch deren Funktion kann daher über die
-\KOMAScript-Option \Option{deactivatepagestylelayers} verändert werden. Diese
-Option kann also verwendet werden, um alle Ebenen aller Seitenstile temporär
+\Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} ein. Auch deren Funktion kann daher über die
+\KOMAScript-Option \Option{deactivatepagestylelayers} verändert werden. Diese
+Option kann also verwendet werden, um alle Ebenen aller Seitenstile temporär
zu deaktivieren und damit zu verstecken.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1422,23 +1431,23 @@ zu deaktivieren und damit zu verstecken.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
-Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um Ebenen zu einem Seitenstil
-hinzuzufügen oder davon zu entfernen. Der Seitenstil wird dabei über
+Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um Ebenen zu einem Seitenstil
+hinzuzufügen oder davon zu entfernen. Der Seitenstil wird dabei über
\PName{Seitenstil-Name} referenziert. Die Ebenen werden in einer durch Komma
separierten \PName{Ebenenliste} angegeben.
Sowohl die Anweisung \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyle} als auch die Anweisung
-\Macro{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}\textnote{hinzufügen am Ende} fügt die Ebenen
+\Macro{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}\textnote{hinzufügen am Ende} fügt die Ebenen
am Ende der Ebenenliste des Seitenstils ein. Logisch liegen die neu
-hinzugefügten Ebenen also über oder vor den bereits vorhandenen Ebenen, wobei
-Hintergrund-Ebenen natürlich weiterhin logisch hinter der Textebene und damit
+hinzugefügten Ebenen also über oder vor den bereits vorhandenen Ebenen, wobei
+Hintergrund-Ebenen natürlich weiterhin logisch hinter der Textebene und damit
auch hinter allen Vordergrund-Ebenen liegen.
-Die Anweisung \Macro{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}\textnote{hinzufügen am
- Anfang} fügt die Ebenen hingegen am Anfang der Ebenenliste des Seitenstils
-ein. Dabei werden die Ebenen in der Reihenfolge am Anfang eingefügt, in der
+Die Anweisung \Macro{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}\textnote{hinzufügen am
+ Anfang} fügt die Ebenen hingegen am Anfang der Ebenenliste des Seitenstils
+ein. Dabei werden die Ebenen in der Reihenfolge am Anfang eingefügt, in der
sie auch in der \PName{Ebenenliste} stehen. Damit wird die Ebene, die ganz am
-Ende von \PName{Ebenenliste} steht, nach dem Einfügen die erste und damit die
+Ende von \PName{Ebenenliste} steht, nach dem Einfügen die erste und damit die
unterste oder hinterste Ebene (jeweils entweder der Vordergrund- oder der
Hintergrundebenen) sein.
@@ -1452,9 +1461,9 @@ Seitenstil.%
Der Versuch, mit Hilfe von
\Macro{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}\textnote{entfernen} Ebenen von einem
Seitenstil zu entfernen, die gar nicht Teil des Seitenstils sind, wird
-ignoriert, führt also nicht zu einer Fehlermeldung. Dagegen ist der Versuch,
+ignoriert, führt also nicht zu einer Fehlermeldung. Dagegen ist der Versuch,
Ebenen zu einem Seitenstil, der kein Ebenen-Seitenstil ist und auch kein
-Alias-Seitenstil, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt, hinzuzufügen oder von
+Alias-Seitenstil, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt, hinzuzufügen oder von
einem solchen zu entfernen, ein Fehler und wird als solcher gemeldet.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1470,26 +1479,26 @@ einem solchen zu entfernen, ein Fehler und wird als solcher gemeldet.%
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
-Diese beiden Befehle ähneln den vorangegangenen. Allerdings wird hier
-zusätzlich ein \PName{Referenzebenen-Name} angegeben. Die Ebenen des über den
+Diese beiden Befehle ähneln den vorangegangenen. Allerdings wird hier
+zusätzlich ein \PName{Referenzebenen-Name} angegeben. Die Ebenen des über den
\PName{Seitenstil-Name} angegebenen Seitenstils werden nach dieser
Referenzebene durchsucht. %
\else%
-Die Befehle ähneln den vorherigen. Die existierenden Ebenen des Seitenstils
+Die Befehle ähneln den vorherigen. Die existierenden Ebenen des Seitenstils
werden jedoch nach \PName{Referenzebenen-Name} durchsucht. %
\fi%
Die Ebenen der \PName{Ebenenliste} werden dann
-vor\textnote{hinzufügen vor/nach Ebene}
+vor\textnote{hinzufügen vor/nach Ebene}
respektive nach jedem Auf"|treten der Referenzebene %
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
in die Ebenen des Seitenstils %
\fi%
-eingefügt. Dabei bleibt die Reihenfolge der Ebenen der
+eingefügt. Dabei bleibt die Reihenfolge der Ebenen der
\PName{Ebenenliste} erhalten.
Ist die Referenzebene nicht Bestandteil des Seitenstils, so wird auch nichts
-eingefügt. Ist der Seitenstil hingegen kein Ebenen-Seitenstil und auch kein
-Alias-Seitenstil, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt, so wird ein Fehler
+eingefügt. Ist der Seitenstil hingegen kein Ebenen-Seitenstil und auch kein
+Alias-Seitenstil, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt, so wird ein Fehler
gemeldet.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1499,19 +1508,19 @@ gemeldet.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
-Bei den Befehlen zur Definition eines Seitenstils oder zum Hinzufügen von
+Bei den Befehlen zur Definition eines Seitenstils oder zum Hinzufügen von
Ebenen zu einem Seitenstil wird nicht darauf geachtet, ob eine Ebene mehrfach
Bestandteil eines Seitenstils ist oder wird. Dies ist also durchaus
-zulässig. In den meisten Fällen hat es allerdings keinen Sinn, eine Ebene
+zulässig. In den meisten Fällen hat es allerdings keinen Sinn, eine Ebene
mehrfach als Bestandteil eines Seitenstils zu haben. Daher kann mit Hilfe von
-\Macro{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle} dafür gesorgt werden, dass alle
+\Macro{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle} dafür gesorgt werden, dass alle
Ebenen-Dubletten vom Seitenstil mit dem angegebenen \PName{Seitenstil-Name}
entfernt werden.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass sich dabei die Reihenfolge der
-Ebenen ändern kann. Wird also eine spezielle Reihenfolge gewünscht, sollten
-stattdessen alle Ebenen entfernt und die gewünschten Ebenen in der erwarteten
-Reihenfolge neu hinzugefügt werden. In einem solchen Fall ist
+Ebenen ändern kann. Wird also eine spezielle Reihenfolge gewünscht, sollten
+stattdessen alle Ebenen entfernt und die gewünschten Ebenen in der erwarteten
+Reihenfolge neu hinzugefügt werden. In einem solchen Fall ist
\Macro{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle} also nicht geeignet.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1524,23 +1533,23 @@ Reihenfolge neu hinzugefügt werden. In einem solchen Fall ist
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
-Mit diesen beiden Anweisungen können die Optionen und damit die
-Haken\Index{Haken} eines Ebenen-Seitenstils nachträglich verändert werden. Bei
-\Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}\textnote{Seitenstil-Optionen ändern}
+Mit diesen beiden Anweisungen können die Optionen und damit die
+Haken\Index{Haken} eines Ebenen-Seitenstils nachträglich verändert werden. Bei
+\Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}\textnote{Seitenstil-Optionen ändern}
werden dabei genau die Optionen, die in der durch Komma separierten
\PName{Optionenliste} angegeben sind, auf die dortigen neuen Werte
gesetzt. Die bisherigen Werte gehen dabei verloren. Es sind alle Optionen aus
\autoref{tab:scrlayer.pagestyle.hooks},
\autopageref{tab:scrlayer.pagestyle.hooks} erlaubt. Optionen
\iffree{beziehungsweise}{oder} Haken, die nicht in der \PName{Optionenliste}
-angegeben sind, bleiben hingegen unverändert. Diese Anweisung ist
+angegeben sind, bleiben hingegen unverändert. Diese Anweisung ist
\iffree{damit auch }{}% Umbruchkorrektur
-die einzige Möglichkeit, die globalen Voreinstellungen der
+die einzige Möglichkeit, die globalen Voreinstellungen der
\KOMAScript-Optionen von einem Seitenstil zu entfernen.
Die Anweisung \Macro{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}\textnote{Seitenstil-Optionen
- erweitern} dagegen überschreibt die bisher vorhandenen Werte nicht, sondern
-fügt die neuen zu den bisherigen hinzu oder -- genauer gesagt -- hängt die
+ erweitern} dagegen überschreibt die bisher vorhandenen Werte nicht, sondern
+fügt die neuen zu den bisherigen hinzu oder -- genauer gesagt -- hängt die
neuen Werte an die alten an.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1555,20 +1564,20 @@ neuen Werte an die alten an.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
-Mit den Anweisungen kann Code in Abhängigkeit davon ausgeführt werden, ob
-ein Seitenstil ein Ebenen-Seitenstil ist oder nicht. Dabei führt
+Mit den Anweisungen kann Code in Abhängigkeit davon ausgeführt werden, ob
+ein Seitenstil ein Ebenen-Seitenstil ist oder nicht. Dabei führt
\Macro{IfLayerPageStyleExists} den \PName{Dann-Code} nur dann aus, wenn
\PName{Seitenstil-Name} der Name eines Ebenen-Seitenstils oder der Name eines
-Alias-Seitenstils ist, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt. Anderenfalls
-führt die Anweisung den \PName{Sonst-Code} aus.
+Alias-Seitenstils ist, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt. Anderenfalls
+führt die Anweisung den \PName{Sonst-Code} aus.
\iffree{Die Anweisung }{}%Umbruchvarianten
-\Macro{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists} geht einen Schritt weiter und führt
+\Macro{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists} geht einen Schritt weiter und führt
\iffree{den }{}% Umbruchvarianten
-\PName{Dann-Code} nur dann aus, wenn der über \PName{Seitenstil-Name}
+\PName{Dann-Code} nur dann aus, wenn der über \PName{Seitenstil-Name}
angegebene Seitenstil selbst ein Ebenen-Seitenstil ist. Im Falle eines
-Alias-Seitenstils führt diese Anweisung also selbst dann \PName{Sonst-Code}
-aus, wenn dieser Alias-Seitenstil zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt.%
+Alias-Seitenstils führt diese Anweisung also selbst dann \PName{Sonst-Code}
+aus, wenn dieser Alias-Seitenstil zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1588,23 +1597,23 @@ aus, wenn dieser Alias-Seitenstil zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}%
\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}%
-Mit diesen Anweisungen kann überprüft werden, ob ein oder mehrere Ebenen
+Mit diesen Anweisungen kann überprüft werden, ob ein oder mehrere Ebenen
Bestandteil eines Seitenstils sind. \Macro{IfLayerAtPageStyle} erwartet dabei
nach dem \PName{Seitenstil-Name} im ersten Argument im zweiten Argument
genau\textnote{genau eine Ebene} einen \PName{Ebenen-Name}. Ist die
entsprechende Ebene Bestandteil des Seitenstils, so wird der \PName{Dann-Code}
-ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Code}.
+ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Code}.
Im Unterschied dazu erlauben \Macro{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle} und
\Macro{IfLayersAtPageStyle} im zweiten Argument eine durch Komma separierte
-\PName{Ebenenliste}. Dabei führt
+\PName{Ebenenliste}. Dabei führt
\Macro{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}\textnote{mindestens eine Ebene} den
\PName{Dann-Code} bereits aus, wenn \emph{mindestens eine} der Ebenen
-Bestandteil des Seitenstils ist. Dagegen führt
+Bestandteil des Seitenstils ist. Dagegen führt
\Macro{IfLayersAtPageStyle}\textnote{alle Ebenen} den \PName{Dann-Code} nur
aus, wenn \emph{alle} Ebenen Bestandteil des Seitenstils sind. \iffree{Ist die
- Bedingung nicht erfüllt, so}{Anderenfalls} wird jeweils \PName{Sonst-Code}
-ausgeführt.
+ Bedingung nicht erfüllt, so}{Anderenfalls} wird jeweils \PName{Sonst-Code}
+ausgeführt.
Durch geeignete Schachtelung sind auch komplexe Bedingungen abbildbar. Gibt
man statt einer \PName{Ebenenliste} jeweils nur einen \PName{Ebenen-Name} an,
@@ -1625,9 +1634,9 @@ ignoriert.%
\else%
Mit dieser Anweisung kann ein Ebenen-Seitenstil aus \LaTeX-Sicht wieder
undefiniert werden. Dies gilt jedoch nur, wenn es einen Ebenen-Seitenstil mit
-dem Namen \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} auch tatsächlich gibt. Handelt es sich
+dem Namen \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} auch tatsächlich gibt. Handelt es sich
stattdessen um einen Alias-Seitenstil -- auch wenn dieser zu einem
-Ebenen-Seitenstil führt -- oder um einen anderen Seitenstil oder ist gar kein
+Ebenen-Seitenstil führt -- oder um einen anderen Seitenstil oder ist gar kein
Seitenstil mit dem Namen \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} bekannt, so geschieht
nichts, die Anweisung wird ignoriert.%
\fi
@@ -1636,12 +1645,12 @@ Falls \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} der Name des aktuellen Seitenstils ist,
so wird dieser auf eine Art leeren Seitenstil gesetzt. Falls der mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} gesetzte Seitenstil
\PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} lautet, so wird dieser einfach nur
-zurückgesetzt. Die vorherige Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}
+zurückgesetzt. Die vorherige Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}
verliert damit ihre aktuelle Auswirkung.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Ebenen des Seitenstils nicht
automatisch mit vernichtet werden. Falls Sie die Ebenen ebenfalls vernichten
-möchten, so können Sie dies beispielsweise mit
+möchten, so können Sie dies beispielsweise mit
\begin{lstcode}
\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle{...}{\DestroyLayer{#1}}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -1656,30 +1665,30 @@ wurden, beim automatischen Entfernen dieses Interfaces mit zu entfernen.%
\EndIndexGroup
\EndIndexGroup
-\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight}% \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß}
+\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight}% \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß}
\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation}% \section{Beeinflussung der Inhalte von Seitenstilen}
-\section{Definition und Verwaltung von Schnittstellen für Endanwender}
+\section{Definition und Verwaltung von Schnittstellen für Endanwender}
\seclabel{enduserinterfaces}
Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} stellt eine experimentelle Benutzerschnittstelle
-zur Verfügung um (konkurrierende) Schnittstellen für Endanwender definieren
-und verwalten zu können. \iffree{% Umbruchvarianten
- Möglicherweise wird diese Schnittstelle langfristig wieder aus
+zur Verfügung um (konkurrierende) Schnittstellen für Endanwender definieren
+und verwalten zu können. \iffree{% Umbruchvarianten
+ Möglicherweise wird diese Schnittstelle langfristig wieder aus
\Package{scrlayer} verschwinden und dann stattdessen von \Package{scrbase}
- übernommen werden. }{}%
+ übernommen werden. }{}%
Derzeit ist die Schnittstelle aber noch hoch
experimentell\iffree{% Umbruchvariante
- und wird daher von eigenen Befehlen innerhalb von \Package{scrlayer} nur für
+ und wird daher von eigenen Befehlen innerhalb von \Package{scrlayer} nur für
Unterpakete von \Package{scrlayer} bereit gestellt}{}%
. Es empfiehlt sich beim aktuellen Entwicklungsstand nicht, sich darauf zu
verlassen, dass die automatische Entfernung einer konkurrierenden
Schnittstelle funktioniert. Stattdessen sollte die Verwendung konkurrierender
Schnittstellen vermieden werden.
-Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt lediglich die Schnittstellen"=Anweisungen für die
-Definition einer Endanwender-Schnittstelle. Für Endanwender selbst ist er
+Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt lediglich die Schnittstellen"=Anweisungen für die
+Definition einer Endanwender-Schnittstelle. Für Endanwender selbst ist er
damit von geringem Interesse. Vielmehr richtet sich dieser Teil der Anleitung
an Autoren von Paketen und Klassen, die auf \Package{scrlayer}
aufbauen. Endanwender finden Informationen zu konkreten
@@ -1697,11 +1706,11 @@ Schnittstelle gleichen Namens noch nicht registriert sein darf. Sollte dies
doch der Fall sein, so wird ein Fehler ausgegeben.
Diese Anweisung sollte immer ganz am Anfang einer Endanwender-Schnittstelle
-stehen. Daher wird sie hier auch zuerst erklärt. Wird das optionale Argument
--- einschließlich der eckigen Klammern -- weggelassen, so wird dafür
-\PValue{\Macro{@currname}.\Macro{@currext}} verwendet. Für Klassen und
+stehen. Daher wird sie hier auch zuerst erklärt. Wird das optionale Argument
+-- einschließlich der eckigen Klammern -- weggelassen, so wird dafür
+\PValue{\Macro{@currname}.\Macro{@currext}} verwendet. Für Klassen und
Pakete ist dies der Dateiname der Klasse respektive des Pakets. Aber
-selbstverständlich kann jede andere Zeichenfolge der Kategorie \emph{letter}
+selbstverständlich kann jede andere Zeichenfolge der Kategorie \emph{letter}
oder \emph{other} verwendet werden. Dies ist beispielsweise sinnvoll, wenn
eine Klasse oder ein Paket mehrere Endanwender-Schnittstellen definiert.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1722,47 +1731,47 @@ kann mit \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface} erfolgen. Das optionale Argument
\PName{Schnittstellen-Name} entspricht hier dem Namen, der mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface} zuvor registriert wurde.
-Werden\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisungen nicht nur während des Ladens einer
+Werden\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisungen nicht nur während des Ladens einer
Klasse oder eines Pakets, sondern auch zur Laufzeit definiert, so ist das
optionale Argument auch dann zu verwenden, wenn es dem Dateinamen der Klasse
beziehungsweise des Pakets entspricht, da die Werte von \Macro{@currname} und
-\Macro{@currext} nur während des Ladens Gültigkeit besitzen.
+\Macro{@currext} nur während des Ladens Gültigkeit besitzen.
Das erste obligatorische Argument ist der
\PName{Befehl}\footnote{\PName{Befehl} besteht aus einem umgekehrten
- Schrägstrich (engl. \emph{backslash}), gefolgt von einer
+ Schrägstrich (engl. \emph{backslash}), gefolgt von einer
\PName{Befehlssequenz}, die entweder aus Zeichen der Kategorie \emph{letter}
oder aus genau einem Zeichen der Kategorie \emph{other} besteht, oder aus
- einem Zeichen der Kategorie \emph{active} (ohne umgekehrten Schrägstrich
- davor).}, der zu der Endanwender-Schnittstelle hinzugefügt werden
-soll. Falls der Befehl definiert werden kann, erfolgt dies. Außerdem wird dann
+ einem Zeichen der Kategorie \emph{active} (ohne umgekehrten Schrägstrich
+ davor).}, der zu der Endanwender-Schnittstelle hinzugefügt werden
+soll. Falls der Befehl definiert werden kann, erfolgt dies. Außerdem wird dann
der Befehl auf \Macro{relax} gesetzt und \PName{Code} wird
-ausgeführt. Innerhalb von \PName{Code} kann der \PName{Befehl} dann
+ausgeführt. Innerhalb von \PName{Code} kann der \PName{Befehl} dann
beispielsweise mit Hilfe von \Macro{newcommand} definiert werden.
Wann aber kann ein \PName{Befehl}\textnote{definierbare Befehle} definiert
werden? Ist ein \PName{Befehl} undefiniert oder \Macro{relax}, so kann er
immer definiert werden. Wurde ein \PName{Befehl} bereits definiert \emph{und}
-für eine andere Endanwender-Schnittstelle registriert \emph{und} wurde auch die
+für eine andere Endanwender-Schnittstelle registriert \emph{und} wurde auch die
\KOMAScript-Option \Option{autoremoveinterfaces} aktiviert, so wird diese
andere Endanwender-Schnittstelle automatisch entfernt, der \PName{Befehl} auf
-\Macro{relax} gesetzt und für die angegebene neue Endanwender-Schnittstelle
+\Macro{relax} gesetzt und für die angegebene neue Endanwender-Schnittstelle
registriert. Damit ist \PName{Befehl} auch dann definierbar. Falls ein
\PName{Befehl} bereits definiert ist, \emph{aber nicht} Teil einer anderen
Endanwender-Schnittstelle ist, \emph{und} falls die \KOMAScript-Option
\Option{forceoverwrite} aktiviert wurde, wird \PName{Befehl} ebenfalls
-\Macro{relax} und für die angegebene Endanwender-Schnittstelle
+\Macro{relax} und für die angegebene Endanwender-Schnittstelle
registriert. Der \PName{Befehl} ist also auch in diesem Fall definierbar. In
-allen anderen Fällen ist er jedoch nicht definierbar, also insbesondere, falls
+allen anderen Fällen ist er jedoch nicht definierbar, also insbesondere, falls
er bereits definiert ist und die \KOMAScript-Optionen
\Option{autoremoveinterfaces} und \Option{forceoverwrite} deaktiviert sind.
-Die Anweisung \Macro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface} arbeitet ganz ähnlich der
+Die Anweisung \Macro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface} arbeitet ganz ähnlich der
vorgenannten Anweisung \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface}. Allerdings erwartet sie
als erstes Argument keinen \PName{Befehl}, sondern eine
\PName{Befehlssequenz}\footnote{Eine \PName{Befehlssequenz} muss voll
expandierbar sein und ihre Expansion muss zu Zeichen der Kategorie
- \emph{letter}, \emph{other} oder \emph{space} führen.}.%
+ \emph{letter}, \emph{other} oder \emph{space} führen.}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1771,16 +1780,16 @@ als erstes Argument keinen \PName{Befehl}, sondern eine
\Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}\OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name}
\Parameter{Code}
\end{Declaration}
-Für den Fall, dass die Endanwender-Schnittstelle mit dem angegebenen
+Für den Fall, dass die Endanwender-Schnittstelle mit dem angegebenen
\PName{Schnittstellen-Name} automatisch entfernt wird (siehe
\KOMAScript-Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.autoremoveinterfaces} zuvor in
-diesem Abschnitt) kann zusätzlich \PName{Code} ausgeführt werden. Dies kann
+diesem Abschnitt) kann zusätzlich \PName{Code} ausgeführt werden. Dies kann
beispielsweise verwendet werden, um Ebenen oder Seitenstile automatisch mit zu
vernichten (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyLayer},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias}, and
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}), die auf Befehlen der
-Endanwender-Schnittstelle beruhen. Bezüglich der Voreinstellung für das
-optionale Argument sei auf die Erklärung zu
+Endanwender-Schnittstelle beruhen. Bezüglich der Voreinstellung für das
+optionale Argument sei auf die Erklärung zu
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface} verwiesen.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -1790,7 +1799,7 @@ optionale Argument sei auf die Erklärung zu
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
@@ -1798,8 +1807,8 @@ optionale Argument sei auf die Erklärung zu
% LocalWords: Vordergrundebene Sternvariante Gleitseiten Hintergrundebenen
-% LocalWords: Ausgabebeschränkungen Grafikausgabe Textausgabe Textebenen
-% LocalWords: Standardgrundlinie Grafikebenen Standardtextzeile überhoch
+% LocalWords: Ausgabebeschränkungen Grafikausgabe Textausgabe Textebenen
+% LocalWords: Standardgrundlinie Grafikebenen Standardtextzeile überhoch
% LocalWords: Platzierungsbefehle Ebeneneigenschaft Satzspiegelkonstruktion
-% LocalWords: Kreisschlagen Buchseitenkanon spätmittelalterlichen
+% LocalWords: Kreisschlagen Buchseitenkanon spätmittelalterlichen
% LocalWords: Makronamen
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex
index 75c52600bf..3f1b293a7d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,94 +40,94 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrlfile in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrlfile in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlfile.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-02-16 04:42:17 +0100 (Fri, 16 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlfile)]
-\chapter{Paketabhängigkeiten mit \Package{scrlfile}
+\chapter{Paketabhängigkeiten mit \Package{scrlfile}
beherrschen}
\labelbase{scrlfile}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrlfile}
-Die Einführung von \LaTeXe{} brachte 1994 eine Menge Neuerungen im Umgang mit
+Die Einführung von \LaTeXe{} brachte 1994 eine Menge Neuerungen im Umgang mit
\LaTeX-Erweiterungen. So stehen dem Paketautor heute eine ganze Reihe von
-Befehlen zur Verfügung, um festzustellen, ob ein anderes Paket oder eine
+Befehlen zur Verfügung, um festzustellen, ob ein anderes Paket oder eine
bestimmte Klasse verwendet wird und ob dabei bestimmte Optionen zur Anwendung
kommen. Der Paketautor kann selbst andere Pakete laden oder diesen Optionen
-mit auf den Weg geben für den Fall, dass sie später noch geladen werden. Es
-bestand daher die Hoffnung, dass es künftig unerheblich wäre, in welcher
+mit auf den Weg geben für den Fall, dass sie später noch geladen werden. Es
+bestand daher die Hoffnung, dass es künftig unerheblich wäre, in welcher
Reihenfolge Pakete geladen werden. Diese Hoffnung hat sich leider nicht
-erfüllt.
+erfüllt.
-\section{Die Sache mit den Paketabhängigkeiten}
+\section{Die Sache mit den Paketabhängigkeiten}
\seclabel{dependency}
%\begin{Explain}
- Immer häufiger definieren unterschiedliche Pakete den gleichen
+ Immer häufiger definieren unterschiedliche Pakete den gleichen
Befehl neu oder um. Dabei ist es dann sehr entscheidend, in welcher
- Reihenfolge die Pakete geladen werden. Manchmal ist das für den
- Anwender kaum zu überschauen. Teilweise ist es auch
+ Reihenfolge die Pakete geladen werden. Manchmal ist das für den
+ Anwender kaum zu überschauen. Teilweise ist es auch
notwendig, in irgendeiner Form auf das Laden eines
anderen Pakets zu reagieren.
Nehmen wir als einfaches Beispiel das Laden des
\Package{longtable}-Pakets bei Verwendung von \KOMAScript{}. Das
\Package{longtable}-Paket definiert seine eigene Form von
- Tabellenüberschriften. Diese passen perfekt zu den
- Standardklassen. Sie passen aber überhaupt
- nicht zu den Voreinstellungen für die Tabellenüberschriften von
+ Tabellenüberschriften. Diese passen perfekt zu den
+ Standardklassen. Sie passen aber überhaupt
+ nicht zu den Voreinstellungen für die Tabellenüberschriften von
\KOMAScript{} und reagieren auch nicht auf die entsprechenden
- Möglichkeiten der Konfiguration. Um dieses Problem zu lösen, müssen
- die Befehle von \Package{longtable}, die für die
- Tabellenüberschriften zuständig sind, von \KOMAScript{} umdefiniert
+ Möglichkeiten der Konfiguration. Um dieses Problem zu lösen, müssen
+ die Befehle von \Package{longtable}, die für die
+ Tabellenüberschriften zuständig sind, von \KOMAScript{} umdefiniert
werden. Allerdings sind die \KOMAScript{}-Klassen bereits
abgearbeitet, wenn das Paket geladen wird.
- Bisher bestand die einzige Möglichkeit, dieses Problem zu lösen
+ Bisher bestand die einzige Möglichkeit, dieses Problem zu lösen
darin, die Umdefinierung mit Hilfe von \Macro{AtBeginDocument} auf
- einen späteren Zeitpunkt zu verschieben. Will der Anwender die
+ einen späteren Zeitpunkt zu verschieben. Will der Anwender die
entsprechende Anweisung jedoch selbst umdefinieren, so sollte er
- dies eigentlich ebenfalls in der Präambel tun. Das kann er jedoch
- nicht, weil \KOMAScript{} ihm dabei in die Quere kommt. Er müsste
+ dies eigentlich ebenfalls in der Präambel tun. Das kann er jedoch
+ nicht, weil \KOMAScript{} ihm dabei in die Quere kommt. Er müsste
die Umdefinierung also ebenfalls mit Hilfe von
- \Macro{AtBeginDocument} durchführen.
+ \Macro{AtBeginDocument} durchführen.
- Aber eigentlich müsste \KOMAScript{} die Abarbeitung gar nicht auf
+ Aber eigentlich müsste \KOMAScript{} die Abarbeitung gar nicht auf
den Zeitpunkt von \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} verschieben. Es
- würde genügen, wenn sie bis unmittelbar nach dem Laden von
- \Package{longtable} verzögert werden könnte. Leider fehlen
+ würde genügen, wenn sie bis unmittelbar nach dem Laden von
+ \Package{longtable} verzögert werden könnte. Leider fehlen
entsprechende Anweisungen im \LaTeX-Kern. Das Paket
\Package{scrlfile} bringt hier Abhilfe.
- Ebenso wäre es denkbar, dass man vor dem Laden eines bestimmten
+ Ebenso wäre es denkbar, dass man vor dem Laden eines bestimmten
Pakets gerne die Bedeutung eines Makros in einem Hilfsmakro retten
und nach dem Laden des Pakets wieder restaurieren will. Auch das
geht mit \Package{scrlfile}.
- Die Anwendung von \Package{scrlfile} ist nicht auf die Abhängigkeit
- von Paketen beschränkt. Auch Abhängigkeiten von anderen Dateien
- können berücksichtigt werden. So kann beispielsweise dafür gesorgt
+ Die Anwendung von \Package{scrlfile} ist nicht auf die Abhängigkeit
+ von Paketen beschränkt. Auch Abhängigkeiten von anderen Dateien
+ können berücksichtigt werden. So kann beispielsweise dafür gesorgt
werden, dass das nicht unkritische Laden einer Datei wie
- \File{french.ldf} automatisch zu einer Warnung führt.
+ \File{french.ldf} automatisch zu einer Warnung führt.
- Obwohl das Paket in erster Linie für andere Paketautoren interessant
- sein dürfte, gibt es durchaus auch Anwendungen für normale
- \LaTeX-Benutzer. Deshalb sind in diesem Kapitel auch für beide
- Gruppen Beispiele aufgeführt.
+ Obwohl das Paket in erster Linie für andere Paketautoren interessant
+ sein dürfte, gibt es durchaus auch Anwendungen für normale
+ \LaTeX-Benutzer. Deshalb sind in diesem Kapitel auch für beide
+ Gruppen Beispiele aufgeführt.
%\end{Explain}
\section{Aktionen vor und nach dem Laden}
\seclabel{macros}
-Mit \Package{scrlfile} können vor und nach dem Laden von Dateien Aktionen
-ausgelöst werden. Bei den dazu verwendeten Befehlen wird zwischen allgemeinen
+Mit \Package{scrlfile} können vor und nach dem Laden von Dateien Aktionen
+ausgelöst werden. Bei den dazu verwendeten Befehlen wird zwischen allgemeinen
Dateien, Klassen und Paketen unterschieden.
@@ -135,24 +135,24 @@ Dateien, Klassen und Paketen unterschieden.
\Macro{BeforeFile}\Parameter{Datei}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\Macro{AfterFile}\Parameter{Datei}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}%
-Mit Hilfe von \Macro{BeforeFile} kann dafür gesorgt werden, dass die
-\PName{Anweisungen} vor dem nächsten Laden einer bestimmten \PName{Datei}
-ausgeführt werden. Vergleichbar arbeitet \Macro{AfterFile}. Nur werden die
+Mit Hilfe von \Macro{BeforeFile} kann dafür gesorgt werden, dass die
+\PName{Anweisungen} vor dem nächsten Laden einer bestimmten \PName{Datei}
+ausgeführt werden. Vergleichbar arbeitet \Macro{AfterFile}. Nur werden die
\PName{Anweisungen} hier erst nach dem Laden der \PName{Datei}
-ausgeführt. Wird die Datei nie geladen, so werden die \PName{Anweisungen} in
-beiden Fällen natürlich auch nie ausgeführt. Bei \PName{Datei} sind etwaige
+ausgeführt. Wird die Datei nie geladen, so werden die \PName{Anweisungen} in
+beiden Fällen natürlich auch nie ausgeführt. Bei \PName{Datei} sind etwaige
Dateiendungen wie bei \Macro{input} als Teil des Dateinamens anzugeben.
-Um die Funktionalität bereitstellen zu können, bedient sich \Package{scrlfile}
+Um die Funktionalität bereitstellen zu können, bedient sich \Package{scrlfile}
der bekannten \LaTeX-Anweisung
\Macro{InputIfFileExists}. Diese\textnote{Achtung!} wird hierzu umdefiniert.
Falls die Anweisung nicht die erwartete Definition hat, gibt
-\Package{scrlfile} eine Warnung aus. Dies geschieht für den Fall, dass die
-Anweisung in späteren \LaTeX-Versionen geändert wird oder bereits von einem
+\Package{scrlfile} eine Warnung aus. Dies geschieht für den Fall, dass die
+Anweisung in späteren \LaTeX-Versionen geändert wird oder bereits von einem
anderen Paket umdefiniert wurde.
Die Anweisung \Macro{InputIfFileExists} wird von \LaTeX{} immer verwendet,
-wenn eine Datei geladen werden soll. Dies geschieht unabhängig davon, ob die
+wenn eine Datei geladen werden soll. Dies geschieht unabhängig davon, ob die
Datei mit \Macro{LoadClass}, \Macro{documentclass}, \Macro{usepackage},
\Macro{RequirePackage}, \Macro{include} oder vergleichbaren Anweisungen
geladen wird. Lediglich
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ geladen wird. Lediglich
\begin{lstcode}
\input foo
\end{lstcode}
-lädt die Datei \texttt{foo} ohne Verwendung von \Macro{InputIfFileExists}. Sie
+lädt die Datei \texttt{foo} ohne Verwendung von \Macro{InputIfFileExists}. Sie
sollten daher stattdessen immer
% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ verwenden. Beachten Sie die Klammern um den Dateinamen!%
Diese beiden Befehle arbeiten vergleichbar zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeFile} mit dem einen
Unterschied, dass die \PName{Klasse} beziehungsweise das \PName{Paket} mit
seinem Namen und nicht mit seinem Dateinamen angegeben wird. Die Endungen
-»\File{.cls}« und »\File{.sty}« entfallen hier also.%
+»\File{.cls}« und »\File{.sty}« entfallen hier also.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -199,43 +199,43 @@ Die Anweisungen \Macro{AfterClass} und \Macro{AfterPackage} arbeiten
weitgehend wie \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile}, mit dem winzigen
Unterschied, dass die \PName{Klasse} beziehungsweise das \PName{Paket} mit
seinem Namen und nicht mit seinem Dateinamen angegeben wird. Die Endungen
-»\File{.cls}« und »\File{.sty}« entfallen hier also.
+»\File{.cls}« und »\File{.sty}« entfallen hier also.
Bei\important[i]{\Macro{AfterClass*}\\\Macro{AfterPackage*}} den
-Sternvarianten gibt es eine zusätzliche Funktionalität. Wurde oder wird die
+Sternvarianten gibt es eine zusätzliche Funktionalität. Wurde oder wird die
entsprechende Klasse oder das entsprechende Paket bereits geladen, so werden
-die \PName{Anweisungen} nicht nach dem nächsten Laden, sondern unmittelbar
-ausgeführt.
+die \PName{Anweisungen} nicht nach dem nächsten Laden, sondern unmittelbar
+ausgeführt.
Bei\important[i]{\Macro{AfterClass+}\\\Macro{AfterPackage+}} der
Plusvariante\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{scrlfile}} werden die
-\PName{Anweisungen} sicher erst dann ausgeführt, wenn die Klasse oder das
-Paket vollständig geladen wurde. Der Unterschied zwischen der Stern- und der
-Plusvariante kommt nur zum Tragen, falls die Anweisung verwendet wird, während
+\PName{Anweisungen} sicher erst dann ausgeführt, wenn die Klasse oder das
+Paket vollständig geladen wurde. Der Unterschied zwischen der Stern- und der
+Plusvariante kommt nur zum Tragen, falls die Anweisung verwendet wird, während
das Laden der Klassen bzw. des Pakets zwar bereits begonnen hat, aber noch
nicht beendet wurde. Wenn das Laden der Klasse bzw. des Pakets noch nicht
-abgeschlossen wurde, werden die \PName{Anweisungen} in allen Fällen vor den in
+abgeschlossen wurde, werden die \PName{Anweisungen} in allen Fällen vor den in
der Klasse bzw. dem Paket mit \Macro{AtEndOfClass} oder \Macro{AtEndOfPackage}
-verzögerten Anweisungen ausgeführt.
+verzögerten Anweisungen ausgeführt.
-Um\important[i]{\Macro{AfterClass!}\\\Macro{AfterPackage!}} eine Ausführung
+Um\important[i]{\Macro{AfterClass!}\\\Macro{AfterPackage!}} eine Ausführung
nach den in der Klasse oder dem Paket selbst mit \Macro{AtEndOfClass} oder
-\Macro{AtEndOfPackage} verzögerten Anweisungen sicherzustellen, ist die
+\Macro{AtEndOfPackage} verzögerten Anweisungen sicherzustellen, ist die
Variante mit Ausrufezeichen\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{scrlfile}} zu
verwenden. Bei dieser Spielart werden die \PName{Anweisungen} nicht mehr im
-Kontext der angegebenen Klasse oder des angegebenen Pakets ausgeführt.
+Kontext der angegebenen Klasse oder des angegebenen Pakets ausgeführt.
Will\important[i]{\Macro{AfterAtEndOfClass}\\\Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}} man
-nur für den Fall, dass die Klasse bzw. das Paket noch nicht geladen wurde,
+nur für den Fall, dass die Klasse bzw. das Paket noch nicht geladen wurde,
erreichen, dass \PName{Anweisungen} nach der Klasse bzw. dem Paket und
-außerhalb des Kontextes der angegebenen Klasse bzw. des angegebenen Pakets
-ausgeführt werden, so verwendet man für Klassen die Anweisung
+außerhalb des Kontextes der angegebenen Klasse bzw. des angegebenen Pakets
+ausgeführt werden, so verwendet man für Klassen die Anweisung
\Macro{AfterAtEndOfClass}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{scrlfile}}
-und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.%
+und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.%
%
\begin{Example}
- Als Beispiel für Paket- oder Klassenautoren will ich zunächst
- erklären, wie \KOMAScript{} selbst Gebrauch von den neuen
+ Als Beispiel für Paket- oder Klassenautoren will ich zunächst
+ erklären, wie \KOMAScript{} selbst Gebrauch von den neuen
Anweisungen macht. Dazu findet sich beispielsweise in \Class{scrbook}
Folgendes:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -257,10 +257,10 @@ und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.%
\Class{scrbook} in einer Weise um, die mit neueren Versionen
von \KOMAScript{} nicht mehr funktioniert. Neuere Versionen von
\Package{hyperref} unterlassen dies, wenn sie eine neuere Version
- von \KOMAScript{} erkennen. Für den Fall, dass \Package{hyperref}
- zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt geladen wird, sorgt also \Class{scrbook}
- dafür, dass unmittelbar nach dem Laden des Pakets überprüft wird, ob
- es sich um eine verträgliche Version handelt. Falls dies nicht der
+ von \KOMAScript{} erkennen. Für den Fall, dass \Package{hyperref}
+ zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt geladen wird, sorgt also \Class{scrbook}
+ dafür, dass unmittelbar nach dem Laden des Pakets überprüft wird, ob
+ es sich um eine verträgliche Version handelt. Falls dies nicht der
Fall ist, wird eine Warnung ausgegeben.
An anderer Stelle findet sich in drei der \KOMAScript-Klassen Folgendes:
@@ -271,29 +271,29 @@ und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.%
Nach dem Laden von \Package{caption2} und nur falls das Paket
geladen wird, wird hier die \KOMAScript{} eigene Anweisung
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setcapindent} umdefiniert. Der Inhalt der Umdefinierung
- ist für dieses Beispiel unerheblich. Es sei nur erwähnt, dass
- \Package{caption2} die Kontrolle über die
- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}-Anweisung übernimmt und daher die normale
+ ist für dieses Beispiel unerheblich. Es sei nur erwähnt, dass
+ \Package{caption2} die Kontrolle über die
+ \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}-Anweisung übernimmt und daher die normale
Definition von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setcapindent} keinerlei Wirkung mehr
- hätte. Die Umdefinierung verbessert dann die Zusammenarbeit mit
+ hätte. Die Umdefinierung verbessert dann die Zusammenarbeit mit
\Package{caption2}.
- Es gibt aber auch Beispiele für den sinnvollen Einsatz der neuen
+ Es gibt aber auch Beispiele für den sinnvollen Einsatz der neuen
Anweisungen durch normale Anwender. Angenommen, Sie erstellen ein
Dokument, aus dem sowohl eine PS-Datei mit \LaTeX{} und dvips als auch
eine PDF-Datei mit \mbox{pdf\LaTeX} erstellt werden soll. Das Dokument soll
- außerdem Hyperlinks aufweisen. Im Tabellenverzeichnis haben Sie
- Einträge, die über mehrere Zeilen gehen. Nun gibt es zwar mit
+ außerdem Hyperlinks aufweisen. Im Tabellenverzeichnis haben Sie
+ Einträge, die über mehrere Zeilen gehen. Nun gibt es zwar mit
\mbox{pdf\LaTeX} bei der PDF-Ausgabe keine Probleme, da dort Links
- umbrochen werden können. Bei Verwendung des
- \Package{hyperref}-Treibers für dvips oder
+ umbrochen werden können. Bei Verwendung des
+ \Package{hyperref}-Treibers für dvips oder
\mbox{hyper\TeX} ist dies jedoch nicht
- möglich. In diesem Fall hätten Sie gerne, dass bei
+ möglich. In diesem Fall hätten Sie gerne, dass bei
\Package{hyperref} die Einstellung \Option{linktocpage} verwendet
wird. Die Entscheidung, welcher Treiber geladen wird, wird von
\Package{hyperref} automatisch getroffen.
- Alles weitere kann nun \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile} überlassen werden:
+ Alles weitere kann nun \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile} überlassen werden:
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={hypersetup}]
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.%
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
Egal, ob nun der \Package{hyperref}-Treiber \Option{hypertex} oder
- \Option{dvips} zu Anwendung kommt, wird die dann nützliche Einstellung
+ \Option{dvips} zu Anwendung kommt, wird die dann nützliche Einstellung
\Option{linktocpage} verwendet. Wenn Sie jedoch mit \mbox{pdf\LaTeX} eine
PDF-Datei erstellen, wird darauf verzichtet, da dann der
\Package{hyperref}-Treiber \File{hpdftex.def} verwendet wird. Das bedeutet,
@@ -322,16 +322,16 @@ und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.%
geladen wird.
\end{Example}
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext (der besser nicht mehr verwendet wird!)
-Übrigens\textnote{Tipp!} können Sie das Laden von \Package{scrlfile} und die
+Übrigens\textnote{Tipp!} können Sie das Laden von \Package{scrlfile} und die
obigen Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile} auch in Ihre private
-\File{hyperref.cfg} (siehe oben) einfügen. Verwenden Sie dabei jedoch zum
+\File{hyperref.cfg} (siehe oben) einfügen. Verwenden Sie dabei jedoch zum
Laden des Pakets besser \Macro{RequirePackage} anstelle von
-\Macro{usepackage} (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}). Die neuen Zeilen müssen in
+\Macro{usepackage} (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}). Die neuen Zeilen müssen in
obigem Beispiel unmittelbar nach der \Macro{ProvidesFile}-Zeile, also
-unbedingt vor der Ausführung der Optionen \Option{dvips} oder \Option{pdftex},
-eingefügt werden.%
+unbedingt vor der Ausführung der Optionen \Option{dvips} oder \Option{pdftex},
+eingefügt werden.%
\fi%
-Übrigens\textnote{Tipp!} kann \Package{scrlfile} auch bereits vor
+Ãœbrigens\textnote{Tipp!} kann \Package{scrlfile} auch bereits vor
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.documentclass}\IndexCmd{documentclass} geladen werden. In
diesem Fall ist allerdings \Macro{RequirePackage}\IndexCmd{RequirePackage}
anstelle von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usepackage} zu verwenden (siehe
@@ -343,12 +343,12 @@ anstelle von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usepackage} zu verwenden (siehe
\Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\Macro{AfterReadingMainAux}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisungen unterscheiden sich in einem Detail von den zuvor erklärten
-Anweisungen. Jene ermöglichen Aktionen vor und nach dem Laden von
-Dateien. Das ist hier nicht der Fall. Paketautoren haben des Öfteren das
+Diese Anweisungen unterscheiden sich in einem Detail von den zuvor erklärten
+Anweisungen. Jene ermöglichen Aktionen vor und nach dem Laden von
+Dateien. Das ist hier nicht der Fall. Paketautoren haben des Öfteren das
Problem, dass sie Anweisungen in die \File{aux}-Datei schreiben wollen,
nachdem die letzte Seite des Dokuments ausgegeben wurde. Dazu wird -- in
-Unkenntnis der dadurch verursachten Probleme -- häufig Code
+Unkenntnis der dadurch verursachten Probleme -- häufig Code
wie der folgende eingesetzt:
\begin{lstcode}[escapechar=\$]
\AtEndDocument{%$\textnote{Nicht nachmachen!}$
@@ -359,14 +359,14 @@ wie der folgende eingesetzt:
\fi
}
\end{lstcode}
-Dies ist jedoch keine wirkliche Lösung. Wurde die letzte
-Seite vor \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} bereits ausgegeben, so führt obiges
-zu keiner Ausgabe in die \File{aux}-Datei. Würde man zur Lösung dieses
-Problems nun ein \Macro{immediate} vor \Macro{write} setzen, so hätte man das
+Dies ist jedoch keine wirkliche Lösung. Wurde die letzte
+Seite vor \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} bereits ausgegeben, so führt obiges
+zu keiner Ausgabe in die \File{aux}-Datei. Würde man zur Lösung dieses
+Problems nun ein \Macro{immediate} vor \Macro{write} setzen, so hätte man das
umgekehrte Problem: wurde die letzte Seite bei
\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} noch nicht ausgegeben, so wird
-\Macro{writethistoaux} zu früh in die \File{aux}-Datei geschrieben. Man sieht
-daher häufig auch Lösungsversuche wie:
+\Macro{writethistoaux} zu früh in die \File{aux}-Datei geschrieben. Man sieht
+daher häufig auch Lösungsversuche wie:
\begin{lstcode}[escapechar=\$]
\AtEndDocument{%$\textnote{Nicht nachmachen!}$
\if@filesw
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ daher häufig auch Lösungsversuche wie:
\fi
}
\end{lstcode}
-Diese Lösung hat jedoch den Nachteil, dass damit die Ausgabe der letzten Seite
+Diese Lösung hat jedoch den Nachteil, dass damit die Ausgabe der letzten Seite
erzwungen wird. Eine Anweisung wie
\begin{lstcode}
\AtEndDocument{%
@@ -387,15 +387,15 @@ erzwungen wird. Eine Anweisung wie
\par
}
\end{lstcode}
-führt dann nicht mehr dazu, dass der Hinweis am Ende der letzten Seite des
-Dokuments ausgegeben wird, sie würde stattdessen am Ende der nächsten Seite
-ausgegeben. Gleichzeitig würde \Macro{writethistoaux} wieder eine Seite zu
-früh in die \File{aux}-Datei geschrieben.
+führt dann nicht mehr dazu, dass der Hinweis am Ende der letzten Seite des
+Dokuments ausgegeben wird, sie würde stattdessen am Ende der nächsten Seite
+ausgegeben. Gleichzeitig würde \Macro{writethistoaux} wieder eine Seite zu
+früh in die \File{aux}-Datei geschrieben.
-Die beste Lösung des Problems wäre nun, wenn man unmittelbar in die
-\File{aux}-Datei schreiben könnte, nachdem das finale
+Die beste Lösung des Problems wäre nun, wenn man unmittelbar in die
+\File{aux}-Datei schreiben könnte, nachdem das finale
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document}
-ausgeführt, aber bevor die \File{aux}-Datei geschlossen wird. Dies ist das
+ausgeführt, aber bevor die \File{aux}-Datei geschlossen wird. Dies ist das
Ziel von \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}:
\begin{lstcode}
\BeforeClosingMainAux{%
@@ -407,25 +407,25 @@ Ziel von \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}:
}
\end{lstcode}
Das ist auch dann erfolgreich, wenn das finale \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}
-innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} tatsächlich zu keiner Ausgabe
-einer Seite mehr führt oder wenn -- sei es korrekt verwendet oder in
-Unkenntnis der oben erläuterten Probleme -- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}
+innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} tatsächlich zu keiner Ausgabe
+einer Seite mehr führt oder wenn -- sei es korrekt verwendet oder in
+Unkenntnis der oben erläuterten Probleme -- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}
innerhalb einer \Macro{AtEndDocument}-Anweisung zum Einsatz kam.
-Es gibt jedoch für \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux} eine Einschränkung: Im
+Es gibt jedoch für \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux} eine Einschränkung: Im
Argument \PName{Anweisungen} sollte keine Satzanweisung verwendet
-werden. Es darf also mit \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux} kein zusätzliches
-Material gesetzt werden! Wird diese Einschränkung nicht beachtet, so ist das
+werden. Es darf also mit \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux} kein zusätzliches
+Material gesetzt werden! Wird diese Einschränkung nicht beachtet, so ist das
Ergebnis ebenso unvorhersehbarer wie bei den gezeigten Problemen mit
\Macro{AtEndDocument}.
Die Anweisung \Macro{AfterReadingMainAux}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Package{scrlfile}}
-führt sogar \PName{Anweisungen} nach dem Schließen und Einlesen der
+führt sogar \PName{Anweisungen} nach dem Schließen und Einlesen der
\File{aux}-Datei innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} aus. Dies ist
-nur in einigen wenigen, sehr seltenen Fällen sinnvoll, beispielsweise, wenn
+nur in einigen wenigen, sehr seltenen Fällen sinnvoll, beispielsweise, wenn
man statistische Informationen in die \File{log}-Datei schreiben will, die
-erst nach dem Einlesen der \File{aux}-Datei gültig sind, oder zur
-Implementierung zusätzlicher \emph{Rerun}-Aufforderungen. Satzanweisungen sind
+erst nach dem Einlesen der \File{aux}-Datei gültig sind, oder zur
+Implementierung zusätzlicher \emph{Rerun}-Aufforderungen. Satzanweisungen sind
an dieser Stelle noch kritischer zu betrachten als bei
\Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}.%
%
@@ -435,17 +435,17 @@ an dieser Stelle noch kritischer zu betrachten als bei
\section{Dateien beim Einlesen ersetzen}
\seclabel{replace}
-In den bisherigen Abschnitten wurden Anweisungen erklärt, mit denen es möglich
+In den bisherigen Abschnitten wurden Anweisungen erklärt, mit denen es möglich
ist, vor oder nach dem Einlesen einer bestimmten Datei, eines bestimmten
-Pakets oder einer Klasse Aktionen auszuführen. Es ist mit \Package{scrlfile}
-aber auch möglich, eine ganz andere Datei als die angeforderte einzulesen.
+Pakets oder einer Klasse Aktionen auszuführen. Es ist mit \Package{scrlfile}
+aber auch möglich, eine ganz andere Datei als die angeforderte einzulesen.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{ReplaceInput}\Parameter{Dateiname}\Parameter{Ersatzdatei}
\end{Declaration}
Mit\ChangedAt{v2.96}{\Package{scrlfile}} dieser Anweisung wird eine Ersetzung
der Datei mit dem als erstes angegebenen \PName{Dateiname} definiert. Wenn
-\LaTeX{} anschließend angewiesen wird, diese Datei zu laden, wird stattdessen
+\LaTeX{} anschließend angewiesen wird, diese Datei zu laden, wird stattdessen
\PName{Ersatzdatei} geladen. Die Definition der Ersatzdatei wirkt sich auf
alle Dateien aus, die vom Anwender oder intern von \LaTeX{} mit Hilfe von
\Macro{InputIfFileExists} geladen werden. Dazu ist es allerdings erforderlich,
@@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ dass \Package{scrlfile} diese Anweisung umdefiniert.
\begin{lstcode}
\ReplaceInput{\jobname.aux}{\jobname.xua}
\end{lstcode}
- Wenn Sie nun zusätzlich \File{\Macro{jobname}.xua} auch noch durch
+ Wenn Sie nun zusätzlich \File{\Macro{jobname}.xua} auch noch durch
\File{\Macro{jobname}.uxa} ersetzen:
\begin{lstcode}
\ReplaceInput{\jobname.xua}{\jobname.uxa}
@@ -471,14 +471,14 @@ dass \Package{scrlfile} diese Anweisung umdefiniert.
\ReplaceInput{\jobname.aux}{\jobname.xua}
\ReplaceInput{\jobname.xua}{\jobname.aux}
\end{lstcode}
- würde jedoch zu einem \emph{stack size error} führen. Es ist also nicht
- möglich, eine einmal ersetzte Datei wieder durch ihren Ursprung zu ersetzen.
+ würde jedoch zu einem \emph{stack size error} führen. Es ist also nicht
+ möglich, eine einmal ersetzte Datei wieder durch ihren Ursprung zu ersetzen.
\end{Example}
-Theoretisch wäre es auch möglich, auf diesem Wege ein Paket durch ein anderes
-oder eine Klasse durch eine andere zu ersetzen. Dabei würde \LaTeX{} aber
+Theoretisch wäre es auch möglich, auf diesem Wege ein Paket durch ein anderes
+oder eine Klasse durch eine andere zu ersetzen. Dabei würde \LaTeX{} aber
erkennen, dass die angeforderten Dateinamen nicht zum Namen des Pakets oder
-der Klasse passen. Eine Lösung dieses Problems finden Sie nachfolgend.
+der Klasse passen. Eine Lösung dieses Problems finden Sie nachfolgend.
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -488,10 +488,10 @@ der Klasse passen. Eine Lösung dieses Problems finden Sie nachfolgend.
\Macro{ReplacePackage}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Ersatzpaket}
\end{Declaration}
Eine\ChangedAt{v2.96}{\Package{scrlfile}}\textnote{Achtung!} Klasse oder ein
-Paket sollte niemals mit Hilfe der oben erklärten Anweisung
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplaceInput} ersetzt werden. In diesem Fall würde
-\LaTeX{} eine Warnung über nicht übereinstimmende Klassen- oder Paketnamen
-melden. Auch echte Fehler sind möglich, wenn eine Klasse oder ein Paket unter
+Paket sollte niemals mit Hilfe der oben erklärten Anweisung
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplaceInput} ersetzt werden. In diesem Fall würde
+\LaTeX{} eine Warnung über nicht übereinstimmende Klassen- oder Paketnamen
+melden. Auch echte Fehler sind möglich, wenn eine Klasse oder ein Paket unter
einem falschen Dateinamen geladen wird.
\begin{Example}
Sie ersetzen das Paket \Package{scrpage2} durch dessen offiziellen
@@ -505,28 +505,28 @@ einem falschen Dateinamen geladen wird.
but the package provides
`scrlayer-scrpage'.
\end{lstcode}
- führen. Für den Anwender wäre diese Warnung mehr als verwirrend, hat er doch
- gar nicht \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}, sondern tatsächlich \Package{scrpage2}
+ führen. Für den Anwender wäre diese Warnung mehr als verwirrend, hat er doch
+ gar nicht \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}, sondern tatsächlich \Package{scrpage2}
angefordert, das jedoch durch \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} ersetzt wurde.
\end{Example}
-Eine Lösung dieser Probleme besteht nun darin, statt
+Eine Lösung dieser Probleme besteht nun darin, statt
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplaceInput} eine der Anweisungen
\Macro{ReplaceClass} oder \Macro{ReplacePackage} zu verwenden. Es ist zu
beachten, dass wie bei \Macro{documentclass} und \Macro{usepackage} der Name
der Klasse oder des Pakets und nicht deren kompletter Dateiname anzugeben ist.
-Die Ersetzung funktioniert für Klassen, die mit
+Die Ersetzung funktioniert für Klassen, die mit
\Macro{documentclass}, \Macro{LoadClassWithOptions} oder \Macro{LoadClass}
-geladen werden. Für Pakete funktioniert die Ersetzung beim Laden mit
+geladen werden. Für Pakete funktioniert die Ersetzung beim Laden mit
\Macro{usepackage}, \Macro{RequirePackageWithOptions} und
\Macro{RequirePackage}.
Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass die \PName{Ersatzklasse} oder das
\PName{Ersatzpaket} mit denselben Optionen geladen wird, mit denen die
-ursprünglich geforderte Klasse oder das ursprünglich geforderte Paket geladen
-würden. Wird ein Paket oder eine Klasse durch ein Paket oder eine Klasse
-ersetzt, die eine geforderte Option nicht unterstützt, würde das zu den
-üblichen Warnungen und Fehlern führen. Es ist jedoch möglich, solche in der
+ursprünglich geforderte Klasse oder das ursprünglich geforderte Paket geladen
+würden. Wird ein Paket oder eine Klasse durch ein Paket oder eine Klasse
+ersetzt, die eine geforderte Option nicht unterstützt, würde das zu den
+üblichen Warnungen und Fehlern führen. Es ist jedoch möglich, solche in der
\PName{Ersatzklasse} oder dem \PName{Ersatzpaket} fehlenden Optionen per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeClass} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforePackage} neu zu definieren.
@@ -547,9 +547,9 @@ ersetzt, die eine geforderte Option nicht unterstützt, würde das zu den
}%
}%
\end{lstcode}
- wird diese Option nun für das Paket \Package{newfoo} nachdefiniert. Dadurch
- wird vermieden, dass beim Laden des Pakets \Package{oldfoo} ein Fehler über
- die im Paket \Package{newfoo} nicht unterstützte Option gemeldet wird.
+ wird diese Option nun für das Paket \Package{newfoo} nachdefiniert. Dadurch
+ wird vermieden, dass beim Laden des Pakets \Package{oldfoo} ein Fehler über
+ die im Paket \Package{newfoo} nicht unterstützte Option gemeldet wird.
Existiert hingegen eine Option \Option{newopt}, die anstelle der Option
\Option{oldopt} verwendet werden soll, so kann dies ebenfalls erreicht
@@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ ersetzt, die eine geforderte Option nicht unterstützt, würde das zu den
}%
}%
\end{lstcode}
- Es ist sogar möglich, festzulegen, dass beim Laden des neuen Pakets
+ Es ist sogar möglich, festzulegen, dass beim Laden des neuen Pakets
andere Voreinstellung gelten sollen:
\begin{lstcode}
\BeforePackage{newfoo}{%
@@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ ersetzt, die eine geforderte Option nicht unterstützt, würde das zu den
\Macro{BeforePackage} erfolgt.
\end{Example}
-Damit Klassen ersetzt werden können, ist es natürlich erforderlich
+Damit Klassen ersetzt werden können, ist es natürlich erforderlich
\Package{scrlfile} vor der Klasse zu laden. Dazu ist
\Macro{RequirePackage}\IndexCmd{RequirePackage} anstelle von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usepackage} zu verwenden (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}).%
@@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Eine\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} Ersetzung kann auch wieder
aufgehoben werden. Dabei sollten Ersetzungen von Dateien immer mit
\Macro{UnReplaceInput}, Ersetzungen von Paketen mit \Macro{UnReplacePackage}
und Ersetzungen von Klassen mit \Macro{UnReplaceClass} aufgehoben werden. Nach
-der Aufhebung der Ersetzung führen Ladebefehle für den entsprechenden
+der Aufhebung der Ersetzung führen Ladebefehle für den entsprechenden
\PName{Dateiname}, das entsprechende \PName{Paket} oder die entsprechende
\PName{Klasse} dann wieder dazu, dass die Datei, das Paket oder die Klasse
selbst anstelle der Ersatzdatei, des Ersatzpakets oder der Ersatzklasse
@@ -615,11 +615,11 @@ geladen wird.%
\seclabel{prevent}
Gerade\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrlfile}} in Klassen und Paketen, die
-innerhalb von Firmen oder Instituten verwendet werden, findet man häufig, dass
+innerhalb von Firmen oder Instituten verwendet werden, findet man häufig, dass
sehr viele Pakete nur deshalb geladen werden, weil die Anwender diese Pakete
oft verwenden. Wenn es dann mit einem dieser automatisch geladenen Paketen zu
einem Problem kommt, muss man irgendwie das Laden des problematischen Pakets
-verhindern. Auch hier bietet \Package{scrlfile} eine einfache Lösung.
+verhindern. Auch hier bietet \Package{scrlfile} eine einfache Lösung.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading}\OParameter{Stattdessencode}
@@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ der \PName{Paketliste} zu finden ist.
X\kern-.125em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\LaTeX{} oder Lua\LaTeX{}
setzen. Da beim hierbei empfohlenen Paket \Package{fontspec} ohnehin
Latin-Modern voreingestellt ist und das Laden von \Package{fontenc} eher
- störend wäre, wollen Sie das Laden beider Pakete verhindern. Sie laden die
+ störend wäre, wollen Sie das Laden beider Pakete verhindern. Sie laden die
Klasse deshalb nun in Ihrem eigenen Dokument wie folgt:
\begin{lstcode}
\RequirePackage{scrlfile}
@@ -662,17 +662,17 @@ Hilfe von \Macro{RequirePackage}\IndexCmd{RequirePackage} erfolgen, da
Wird eine leere \PName{Paketliste} angegeben oder wird ein Paket angegeben,
das bereits geladen ist, gibt \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading} eine
-Warnung aus, während
+Warnung aus, während
\Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading*}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}}
lediglich einen entsprechenden Hinweis in die Log-Datei schreibt.
Das optionale Argument\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} kann verwendet
werden, wenn anstelle des Ladens des Pakets etwas anderes getan werden
-soll. Innerhalb des \PName{Stattdessencode}s dürfen jedoch keine anderen
+soll. Innerhalb des \PName{Stattdessencode}s dürfen jedoch keine anderen
Pakete und keine Dateien geladen werden. Zum Laden eines anderen Pakets siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplacePackage} in \autoref{sec:scrlfile.replace} auf
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplacePackage}. Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie
-bitte auch, dass der \PName{Stattdessencode} mehrfach ausgeführt wird, falls
+bitte auch, dass der \PName{Stattdessencode} mehrfach ausgeführt wird, falls
Sie versuchen, das Paket mehrfach zu laden!%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -683,26 +683,26 @@ Sie versuchen, das Paket mehrfach zu laden!%
\end{Declaration}
\Macro{Anweisung} wird mit
\Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrlfile}}
-als die aktuelle Liste der Pakete definiert, für die das Laden verhindert
+als die aktuelle Liste der Pakete definiert, für die das Laden verhindert
werden soll. Dagegen setzt
\Macro{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading}\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrlfile}}
-die Liste der Pakete, für die das Laden verhindert werden soll, zurück. Danach
-können wieder alle Pakete geladen werden.
+die Liste der Pakete, für die das Laden verhindert werden soll, zurück. Danach
+können wieder alle Pakete geladen werden.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie sind innerhalb eines Pakets unbedingt auf das Laden eines
anderen Pakets angewiesen und wollen nicht, dass der Anwender das Laden
dieses Pakets mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading}%
\IndexCmd{PreventPackageFromLoading}
- verhindern kann. Also setzen Sie die Paketliste für die Ausnahmen zuvor
- zurück:
+ verhindern kann. Also setzen Sie die Paketliste für die Ausnahmen zuvor
+ zurück:
\begin{lstcode}
\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading
\RequirePackage{foo}
\end{lstcode}
Allerdings hat dies den Nachteil, dass ab diesem Zeitpunkt die komplette
Ausnahmeliste des Anwenders verloren ist. Also speichern Sie die Liste
- zunächst zwischen und reaktivieren sie später wieder:
+ zunächst zwischen und reaktivieren sie später wieder:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\Users@PreventList}{}%
\StorePreventPackageFromLoading\Users@PreventList
@@ -712,21 +712,21 @@ können wieder alle Pakete geladen werden.
\end{lstcode}
Es ist zu beachten, dass\textnote{Achtung!} \Macro{Users@PreventList} durch
die Anweisung \Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading} auch definiert
- werden würde, wenn diese bereits anderweitig definiert wäre. Eine vorhandene
- Definition würde also ohne Rücksicht überschrieben werden. In diesem
+ werden würde, wenn diese bereits anderweitig definiert wäre. Eine vorhandene
+ Definition würde also ohne Rücksicht überschrieben werden. In diesem
Beispiel wurde deshalb mit einem vorherigen \Macro{newcommand*}
sichergestellt, dass in dem Fall zur Sicherheit eine Fehlermeldung
ausgegeben wird.
\end{Example}
An dieser Stelle sei darauf hingewiesen, dass Sie bei Manipulationen an der mit
\Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading} zwischengespeicherten Liste selbst die
-Verantwortung für eine korrekte Wiederherstellbarkeit tragen. So muss die
+Verantwortung für eine korrekte Wiederherstellbarkeit tragen. So muss die
Liste unbedingt mit Komma separiert sein, sollte keine Leerzeichen oder
Gruppenklammern enthalten und muss voll expandierbar sein.%
Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie bitte, dass
-\Macro{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading} den \PName{Stattdessencode} für ein
-Paket nicht löscht, sondern nur vorübergehend dessen Ausführung nicht mehr
+\Macro{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading} den \PName{Stattdessencode} für ein
+Paket nicht löscht, sondern nur vorübergehend dessen Ausführung nicht mehr
erfolgt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -735,30 +735,30 @@ erfolgt.%
\Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{Paketliste}
\Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*}\Parameter{Paketliste}
\end{Declaration}
-Statt\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} die Liste der Pakete, für die das
-Laden verhindert werden soll, komplett zurück zu setzen, kann man auch
+Statt\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} die Liste der Pakete, für die das
+Laden verhindert werden soll, komplett zurück zu setzen, kann man auch
einzelne oder mehrere Pakete gezielt von dieser Liste entfernen. Die
-Sternvariante des Befehls löscht außerdem den \PName{Stattdessencode}, der für
+Sternvariante des Befehls löscht außerdem den \PName{Stattdessencode}, der für
das Paket gespeichert ist. Falls die Verhinderungsliste beispielsweise aus
einer gespeicherten Liste wiederhergestellt wird, wird dann der
-\PName{Stattdessencode} trotzdem nicht mehr ausgeführt.%
+\PName{Stattdessencode} trotzdem nicht mehr ausgeführt.%
%
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie wollen zwar verhindern, dass ein Paket \Package{foo}
geladen wird, wollen aber nicht, dass ein eventuell bereits gespeicherter
- \PName{Stattdessencode} ausgeführt wird. Stattdessen soll nur Ihr neuer
- \PName{Stattdessencode} ausgeführt werden. Dies ist wie folgt möglich:
+ \PName{Stattdessencode} ausgeführt wird. Stattdessen soll nur Ihr neuer
+ \PName{Stattdessencode} ausgeführt werden. Dies ist wie folgt möglich:
\begin{lstcode}
\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*{foo}
\PreventPackageFromLoading[%
\typeout{Stattdessencode}%
]{foo}
\end{lstcode}
- Für die Anweisung \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*} ist es unerheblich,
- ob das Paket zuvor überhaupt vom Laden ausgenommen war.
+ Für die Anweisung \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*} ist es unerheblich,
+ ob das Paket zuvor überhaupt vom Laden ausgenommen war.
- Natürlich können Sie die Anweisung indirekt auch nutzen, um den
- \PName{Stattdessencode} aller Pakete zu löschen:
+ Natürlich können Sie die Anweisung indirekt auch nutzen, um den
+ \PName{Stattdessencode} aller Pakete zu löschen:
\begin{lstcode}
\StorePreventPackageFromLoading\TheWholePreventList
\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*{\TheWholePreventList}
@@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ einer gespeicherten Liste wiederhergestellt wird, wird dann der
\end{lstcode}
Die Pakete werden dann zwar noch immer nicht geladen, ihr
\PName{Stattdessencode} existiert aber nicht mehr und wird nicht mehr
- ausgeführt.%
+ ausgeführt.%
\end{Example}%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -774,6 +774,6 @@ einer gespeicherten Liste wiederhergestellt wird, wird dann der
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex
index 45ea423af3..82f6060104 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlttr2-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,9 +18,9 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlttr2-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
-% Diese Datei ist Teil der KOMA-Script-Sammlung für LaTeX2e.
+% Diese Datei ist Teil der KOMA-Script-Sammlung für LaTeX2e.
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -42,113 +42,113 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrlttr2 im Experten-Teil der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrlttr2 im Experten-Teil der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2-experts.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-04-26 14:55:38 +0200 (Thu, 26 Apr 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2 for experts)]
-\chapter{Zusätzliche Informationen zur
+\chapter{Zusätzliche Informationen zur
Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} und Paket \Package{scrletter}}
\labelbase{scrlttr2-experts}
\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Class}{scrlttr2} In diesem Kapitel finden Sie
-zusätzliche Informationen zu der \KOMAScript-Klasse \Class{scrlttr2}. %
+zusätzliche Informationen zu der \KOMAScript-Klasse \Class{scrlttr2}. %
\iffree{Einige Teile des Kapitels sind dabei dem \KOMAScript-Buch
\cite{book:komascript} vorbehalten. Dies sollte kein Problem sein, denn
der}{Der} %
Anwender, der die Klasse einfach nur verwenden will, wird diese Informationen
-normalerweise nicht benötigen. Ein Teil der Informationen richtet sich an
-Anwender, denen die vordefinierten Möglichkeiten nicht mehr genügen. So
-befasst sich beispielsweise der erste Abschnitt ausführlich mit den
-Pseudolängen, die den Briefbogen bestimmen und die für Anpassungen an eigene
+normalerweise nicht benötigen. Ein Teil der Informationen richtet sich an
+Anwender, denen die vordefinierten Möglichkeiten nicht mehr genügen. So
+befasst sich beispielsweise der erste Abschnitt ausführlich mit den
+Pseudolängen, die den Briefbogen bestimmen und die für Anpassungen an eigene
Briefbogenlayouts abweichend zu setzen sind.%
\iffalse% Es wird Zeit das komplett rauszuwerfen!
-\ Darüber hinaus finden
- sich in diesem Kapitel auch Informationen über Möglichkeiten, die aus
- Gründen der Verbesserung der Kompatibilität zur obsoleten \KOMAScript-Klasse
- \Class{scrlettr} geschaffen wurden. Es wird auch ausführlich erklärt, wie
+\ Darüber hinaus finden
+ sich in diesem Kapitel auch Informationen über Möglichkeiten, die aus
+ Gründen der Verbesserung der Kompatibilität zur obsoleten \KOMAScript-Klasse
+ \Class{scrlettr} geschaffen wurden. Es wird auch ausführlich erklärt, wie
man einen Brief dieser veralteten Klasse auf die aktuelle Briefklasse
- übertragen kann.
+ übertragen kann.
\fi
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrletter}%
-Darüber hinaus gibt es seit
+Darüber hinaus gibt es seit
\KOMAScript~3.15\ChangedAt[2014/11]{v3.15}{\Package{scrletter}} das Paket
\Package{scrletter}, das zusammen mit einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen
\Class{scrartcl}, \Class{scrreprt} oder \Class{scrbook} verwendet werden
-kann. Es stellt nahezu die komplette Funktionalität von \Class{scrlttr2} für
-die drei genannten Klassen zur Verfügung. Einige wenige Unterschiede gibt es
+kann. Es stellt nahezu die komplette Funktionalität von \Class{scrlttr2} für
+die drei genannten Klassen zur Verfügung. Einige wenige Unterschiede gibt es
jedoch, die ebenfalls in diesem Kapitel genannt werden.%
-\section{Pseudolängen für fortgeschrittene Anwender}
+\section{Pseudolängen für fortgeschrittene Anwender}
\seclabel{pseudoLengths}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Pseudolängen}
+\BeginIndex{}{Pseudolängen}
-\TeX{} arbeitet mit einem festen Satz an Registern. Es gibt Register für
-Token, für Boxen, für Zähler, für Abstände (englisch: \emph{skip}) und für
-Größen (englisch: \emph{dimension}). Von all diesen Registern gibt es jeweils
-256~Stück. Für \LaTeX{}-Längen, die mit \Macro{newlength} angefordert werden,
+\TeX{} arbeitet mit einem festen Satz an Registern. Es gibt Register für
+Token, für Boxen, für Zähler, für Abstände (englisch: \emph{skip}) und für
+Größen (englisch: \emph{dimension}). Von all diesen Registern gibt es jeweils
+256~Stück. Für \LaTeX{}-Längen, die mit \Macro{newlength} angefordert werden,
werden Abstandsregister belegt. Sind alle diese Register verbraucht, kann man
-keine weiteren Längen definieren. Sowohl \Class{scrlttr2} als auch
-\Package{scrletter} würden normalerweise allein für die erste Seite mehr als
+keine weiteren Längen definieren. Sowohl \Class{scrlttr2} als auch
+\Package{scrletter} würden normalerweise allein für die erste Seite mehr als
20 solche Register verbrauchen. \LaTeX{} selbst belegt bereits 40 dieser
Register. Das \hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}%
-\IndexPackage{typearea}-Paket benötigt ebenfalls einige, so dass ein Viertel
-der kostbaren Register verbraucht wäre. Aus diesem Grund werden
-briefspezifische Längen bei \KOMAScript{} eben nicht in Längen, sondern in
-Makros abgelegt, den Pseudolängen. Der Nachteil dieses Vorgehens besteht
+\IndexPackage{typearea}-Paket benötigt ebenfalls einige, so dass ein Viertel
+der kostbaren Register verbraucht wäre. Aus diesem Grund werden
+briefspezifische Längen bei \KOMAScript{} eben nicht in Längen, sondern in
+Makros abgelegt, den Pseudolängen. Der Nachteil dieses Vorgehens besteht
darin, dass man mit diesen Makros nicht so einfach rechnen kann wie mit echten
-Längen.
+Längen.
-Bitte beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie unbedingt, dass die Pseudolängen zwar
+Bitte beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie unbedingt, dass die Pseudolängen zwar
intern als Makros implementiert sind, bei den Befehlen zur Nutzung der
-Pseudolängen jedoch nur die Namen anzugeben sind. Diese werden wie die Namen
-von \LaTeX-Zählern und im Gegensatz zu Makros oder echten Längen ohne
-umgekehrten Schrägstrich geschrieben!
+Pseudolängen jedoch nur die Namen anzugeben sind. Diese werden wie die Namen
+von \LaTeX-Zählern und im Gegensatz zu Makros oder echten Längen ohne
+umgekehrten Schrägstrich geschrieben!
-Wer nun einwenden will, dass \LaTeX{} in der empfohlenen und für \KOMAScript{}
-benötigten Installation mit \eTeX{} inzwischen das oben genannte
-Beschränkungsproblem nicht mehr besitzt, hat Recht. Allerdings kam diese
-Entscheidung für \Class{scrlttr2} ein wenig zu spät. Bei \Package{scrletter}
-wurde das Konzept der Pseudolängen aus Gründen der Kompatibilität übernommen.
+Wer nun einwenden will, dass \LaTeX{} in der empfohlenen und für \KOMAScript{}
+benötigten Installation mit \eTeX{} inzwischen das oben genannte
+Beschränkungsproblem nicht mehr besitzt, hat Recht. Allerdings kam diese
+Entscheidung für \Class{scrlttr2} ein wenig zu spät. Bei \Package{scrletter}
+wurde das Konzept der Pseudolängen aus Gründen der Kompatibilität übernommen.
Eine Auf"|listung aller von \KOMAScript{} definierten und verwendeten
-Pseudolängen ist \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths} zu
+Pseudolängen ist \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths} zu
entnehmen. Dabei ist auch angegeben, wo in den nachfolgenden Unterabschnitten
-nähere Erklärungen zu der jeweiligen Pseudolänge zu finden
+nähere Erklärungen zu der jeweiligen Pseudolänge zu finden
sind.%|
\autoref{fig:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths} auf
\autopageref{fig:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths} zeigt eine schematische
-Darstellung der wichtigsten Abstände auf dem Briefbogen. Dabei sind neben den
-Pseudolängen für die veränderbaren Abstände zusätzlich in heller Schrift auch
-die Längen angegeben, die für einige, wenige fest programmierte Abstände
-verwendet werden. Aus Gründen der Übersichtlichkeit wurde in der Darstellung
-auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
+Darstellung der wichtigsten Abstände auf dem Briefbogen. Dabei sind neben den
+Pseudolängen für die veränderbaren Abstände zusätzlich in heller Schrift auch
+die Längen angegeben, die für einige, wenige fest programmierte Abstände
+verwendet werden. Aus Gründen der Übersichtlichkeit wurde in der Darstellung
+auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
%
\iffree{}{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}% Umbruchkorrektur!!!
\begin{desclist}
\renewcommand{\abovecaptionskipcorrection}{-\normalbaselineskip}%
\desccaption{%
- Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} verwendete Pseudolängen%
+ Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} verwendete Pseudolängen%
\label{tab:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths}%
}{%
- Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} verwendete Pseudolängen
+ Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} verwendete Pseudolängen
(\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\pentry{backaddrheight}{%
- Höhe der Rücksendeadresse am oberen Rand des Anschriftfeldes
+ Höhe der Rücksendeadresse am oberen Rand des Anschriftfeldes
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight})%
}%
\pentry{bfoldmarklength}{%
- Länge der unteren horizontalen Faltmarke
+ Länge der unteren horizontalen Faltmarke
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})%
}%
@@ -159,24 +159,24 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})%
}%
\pentry{firstfoothpos}{%
- Abstand des Brief"|fußes von der linken Kante des Papiers; Werte
- größer der Breite oder kleiner der negativen Breite des Papiers werden
+ Abstand des Brief"|fußes von der linken Kante des Papiers; Werte
+ größer der Breite oder kleiner der negativen Breite des Papiers werden
gesondert behandelt (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos})%|
}%
\pentry{firstfootvpos}{%
- Abstand des Brief"|fußes von der oberen Kante des Papiers
+ Abstand des Brief"|fußes von der oberen Kante des Papiers
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos})%|
}%
\pentry{firstfootwidth}{%
- Breite des Brief"|fußes
+ Breite des Brief"|fußes
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth})%|
}%
\pentry{firstheadhpos}{%
Abstand des Briefkopfes von der linken Kante des Papiers; Werte
- größer der Breite oder kleiner der negativen Breite des Papiers werden
+ größer der Breite oder kleiner der negativen Breite des Papiers werden
gesondert behandelt (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos})%
}%\iffree{}{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}% Umbruchkorrektur!!!
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness})%
}%
\pentry{fromrulewidth}{%
- Länge einer optionalen
+ Länge einer optionalen
\iffalse horizontalen \fi% Umbruchkorrektur
Linie im Briefkopf
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead},
@@ -220,32 +220,32 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos})%
}%
\pentry{lfoldmarklength}{%
- Länge der vertikalen Faltmarke
+ Länge der vertikalen Faltmarke
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength})%
}%
\pentry{locheight}{%
- Höhe der Absenderergänzung, falls der Wert nicht 0 ist; bei 0 wird
+ Höhe der Absenderergänzung, falls der Wert nicht 0 ist; bei 0 wird
stattdessen \PLength{toaddrheight} verwendet
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight})%
}%
\pentry{lochpos}{%
- Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der rechten Papierkante, falls der Wert
- positiv ist, oder negativer Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der linken
+ Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der rechten Papierkante, falls der Wert
+ positiv ist, oder negativer Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der linken
Papierkante, falls der Wert negativ ist; bei 0 wird stattdessen der
negative Wert von \PLength{toaddrhpos} verwendet
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos})%
}%
\pentry{locvpos}{%
- Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der oberen Papierkante, falls der Wert
+ Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der oberen Papierkante, falls der Wert
nicht 0 ist; bei 0 wird stattdessen \PLength{toaddrvpos} verwendet
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos})%
}%
\pentry{locwidth}{%
- Breite des Feldes für die Absenderergänzung, wobei bei einem Wert von 0
+ Breite des Feldes für die Absenderergänzung, wobei bei einem Wert von 0
die Breite automatisch aufgrund der in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} beschriebenen Option
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} berechnet wird
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth})%
}\iffree{}{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}% Umbruchkorrektur!!!%
\pentry{mfoldmarklength}{%
- Länge der mittleren horizontalen Faltmarke
+ Länge der mittleren horizontalen Faltmarke
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength})%
}%
@@ -264,55 +264,55 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos})%
}%
\pentry{pfoldmarklength}{%
- Länge der Lochermarke
+ Länge der Lochermarke
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength})%
}%
\pentry{PPdatamatrixvskip}{%
- vertikaler Abstand zwischen Port-Payé-Kopf und Data-Matrix bei
+ vertikaler Abstand zwischen Port-Payé-Kopf und Data-Matrix bei
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip})%
}%
\pentry{PPheadheight}{%
- Höhe für den Port-Payé-Kopf
+ Höhe für den Port-Payé-Kopf
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight})%
}%
\pentry{PPheadwidth}{%
- Breite des linken Port-Payé-Feldes bei
+ Breite des linken Port-Payé-Feldes bei
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth})%
}%
\pentry{refaftervskip}{%
- vertikaler Abstand nach der Geschäftszeile
+ vertikaler Abstand nach der Geschäftszeile
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip})%
}%
\pentry{refhpos}{%
- Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der linken Papierkante, wobei bei einem
+ Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der linken Papierkante, wobei bei einem
Wert von 0 automatisch relativ zur Papierbreite zentriert wird
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos})%
}%
\pentry{refvpos}{%
- Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der oberen Kante des Papiers
+ Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der oberen Kante des Papiers
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos})%
}%
\pentry{refwidth}{%
- Breite der Geschäftszeile
+ Breite der Geschäftszeile
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth})%
}%
\pentry{sigbeforevskip}{%
- vertikaler Abstand zwischen Gruß und Signatur
+ vertikaler Abstand zwischen Gruß und Signatur
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip})%
}%
\pentry{sigindent}{%
- Einzug der Signatur gegenüber dem Textkörper
+ Einzug der Signatur gegenüber dem Textkörper
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent})%
}%
@@ -332,18 +332,18 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})%
}%
\pentry{subjectbeforevskip}{%
- zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand vor dem Betreff
+ zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand vor dem Betreff
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip})%
}%
\pentry{subjectvpos}{%
Abstand des Betreffs von der oberen Kante des Papiers, wobei ein Wert von
- 0 stattdessen den Betreff gemäß Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject} setzt
+ 0 stattdessen den Betreff gemäß Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject} setzt
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})%
}%
\pentry{tfoldmarklength}{%
- Länge der oberen horizontalen Faltmarke
+ Länge der oberen horizontalen Faltmarke
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength})%
}%
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos})%
}%
\pentry{toaddrheight}{%
- Höhe des Anschriftfeldes
+ Höhe des Anschriftfeldes
(\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight})%
}%
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\begin{figure}
\centering
\includegraphics{plenDIN}
- \caption{Schematische Darstellung der wichtigsten Pseudolängen für den
+ \caption{Schematische Darstellung der wichtigsten Pseudolängen für den
Briefbogen}
\label{fig:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths}
\end{figure}
@@ -394,8 +394,8 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet.
\Macro{newplength}\Parameter{Name}
\end{Declaration}
Mit\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} Hilfe dieser
-Anweisung wird eine neue Pseudolänge definiert. Die neue Pseudolänge ist dann
-über ihren \PName{Namen} eindeutig identifiziert. Jeder Name kann also nur
+Anweisung wird eine neue Pseudolänge definiert. Die neue Pseudolänge ist dann
+über ihren \PName{Namen} eindeutig identifiziert. Jeder Name kann also nur
einmal vergeben werden.
%
\iffalse % Umbruchoptimierungstext
@@ -403,77 +403,93 @@ Es wird sichergestellt, dass jeder \PName{Name} nur
einmal vergeben wird.%
\else
\iffalse
-Wird versucht, eine bereits vorhandene Pseudolänge erneut
+Wird versucht, eine bereits vorhandene Pseudolänge erneut
zu definieren, so wird dies mit einer Fehlermeldung quittiert.%
\fi
%
\fi
\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@newplength}%
-Da der Anwender selbst normalerweise keine eigenen Pseudolängen definieren
+Da der Anwender selbst normalerweise keine eigenen Pseudolängen definieren
muss, handelte es sich bei diesem Befehl bis \KOMAScript~3.25 um keine
Benutzeranweisung. Stattdessen existierte bis dahin nur \Macro{@newplength}
-mit derselben Funktionalität. Für Paketautoren existieren diese Anweisungen
+mit derselben Funktionalität. Für Paketautoren existieren diese Anweisungen
noch immer.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{Ifplength}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}%
+ \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}
+\end{Declaration}
+Mit\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Class{scrletter}} dieser Anweisung
+kann geprüft werden, ob eine \PName{Pseudolänge} definiert ist. Ist dies der
+Fall, so wird der \PName{Dann-Code} ausgeführt, anderenfalls wird der
+\PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt.%
+\iffree{}{\par%
+ \BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@plength}%
+ Ausschließlich aus Konsistenzgründen existiert für Paketautoren auch die
+ interne Anweisung \Macro{if@plength} mit identischer Bedeutung.%
+}%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{setplength}%
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Wert}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Wert}
\Macro{addtoplength}%
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Wert}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Wert}
\end{Declaration}
Mit\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} Hilfe von
-\Macro{setplength} kann einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache eines
+\Macro{setplength} kann einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache eines
\PName{Wertes} zugewiesen werden. Der \PName{Faktor} wird dabei als optionales
-Argument übergeben (siehe auch \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength},
+Argument übergeben (siehe auch \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength},
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength}).
-Mit \Macro{addtoplength} kann man zu einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache
+Mit \Macro{addtoplength} kann man zu einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache
eines \PName{Wertes} addieren. Auch dabei wird der \PName{Faktor} als
-optionales Argument übergeben.
+optionales Argument übergeben.
-Um einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache einer anderen Pseudolänge
+Um einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache einer anderen Pseudolänge
zuzuweisen oder zu ihr zu addieren, verwendet man innerhalb von
\PName{Wert} die Anweisung \Macro{useplength} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.useplength}). Um von einer \PName{Pseudolänge}
-den Wert einer anderen \PName{Pseudolänge} zu subtrahieren, verwendet man
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.useplength}). Um von einer \PName{Pseudolänge}
+den Wert einer anderen \PName{Pseudolänge} zu subtrahieren, verwendet man
gleichzeitig als \PName{Faktor} ein Minuszeichen oder \PValue{-1} oder einen
anderen negativen Faktor.
\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@setplength}%
\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@addtoplength}%
-Da der Anwender selbst normalerweise keine Pseudolängen ändern muss, handelte
+Da der Anwender selbst normalerweise keine Pseudolängen ändern muss, handelte
es sich bis \KOMAScript~3.25 bei diesen Befehlen um keine
Benutzeranweisungen. Stattdessen existierten bis dahin nur
\Macro{@setplength} und \Macro{@addtoplength} mit derselben
-Funktionalität. Für Paketautoren existieren diese Anweisungen noch immer.%
+Funktionalität. Für Paketautoren existieren diese Anweisungen noch immer.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{setplengthtowidth}
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\Macro{setplengthtoheight}
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\Macro{setplengthtodepth}
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\Macro{setplengthtototalheight}
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\end{Declaration}
Die\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} ersten drei
Anweisungen entsprechen im Wesentlichen \Macro{settowidth},
\Macro{settoheight} und \Macro{settodepth} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern, setzen aber
-keine Länge, sondern eine \PName{Pseudolänge}. Entsprechend
+keine Länge, sondern eine \PName{Pseudolänge}. Entsprechend
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setplength} sind sie ebenfalls um einen optionalen
-\PName{Faktor} erweitert. Sie setzen also eine \PName{Pseudolänge} auf die
-Breite, Höhe oder Tiefe von \PName{Inhalt} multipliziert mit dem optional
-angegebenen \PName{Faktor}. Die zusätzliche Anweisung
-\Macro{setplengthtototalheight} setzt die \PName{Pseudolänge} auf die Summe
-der Höhe und Tiefe von \PName{Inhalt} multipliziert mit dem optionalen
+\PName{Faktor} erweitert. Sie setzen also eine \PName{Pseudolänge} auf die
+Breite, Höhe oder Tiefe von \PName{Inhalt} multipliziert mit dem optional
+angegebenen \PName{Faktor}. Die zusätzliche Anweisung
+\Macro{setplengthtototalheight} setzt die \PName{Pseudolänge} auf die Summe
+der Höhe und Tiefe von \PName{Inhalt} multipliziert mit dem optionalen
\PName{Faktor}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -484,10 +500,10 @@ der Höhe und Tiefe von \PName{Inhalt} multipliziert mit dem optionalen
\BeginIndex{}{Faltmarke}%
Falt- oder Falzmarken sind kleine horizontale Striche am linken und kleine
-vertikale Striche am oberen Rand. \KOMAScript{} unterstützt für den Briefbogen
+vertikale Striche am oberen Rand. \KOMAScript{} unterstützt für den Briefbogen
derzeit drei konfigurierbare horizontale und eine konfigurierbare vertikale
Faltmarke. Dazu wird noch eine horizontale Loch- oder Seitenmittenmarke
-unterstützt, die nicht in der Vertikalen verschoben werden kann.
+unterstützt, die nicht in der Vertikalen verschoben werden kann.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -495,40 +511,40 @@ unterstützt, die nicht in der Vertikalen verschoben werden kann.
\PLength{mfoldmarkvpos}
\PLength{bfoldmarkvpos}
\end{Declaration}
-\KOMAScript{} kennt für Briefe \Class{scrlttr2} insgesamt drei in der vertikalen
+\KOMAScript{} kennt für Briefe \Class{scrlttr2} insgesamt drei in der vertikalen
Platzierung konfigurierbare Faltmarken. Die Position der oberen Faltmarke vom
-oberen Papierrand wird von der Pseudolänge \PLength{tfoldmarkvpos}
-bestimmt. Für die Position der mittleren Faltmarke ist Pseudolänge
-\PLength{mfoldmarkvpos}\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, für die unteren
-Faltmarke \PLength{bfoldmarkvpos} zuständig. Mit der
+oberen Papierrand wird von der Pseudolänge \PLength{tfoldmarkvpos}
+bestimmt. Für die Position der mittleren Faltmarke ist Pseudolänge
+\PLength{mfoldmarkvpos}\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, für die unteren
+Faltmarke \PLength{bfoldmarkvpos} zuständig. Mit der
Locher-\Index{Lochermarke} oder Seitenmittenmarke kommt noch eine weitere
horizontale Marke dazu. Diese wird jedoch immer in der vertikalen Seitenmitte
platziert.
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext!
Da ihre vertikale Position also nicht konfigurierbar ist, existiert
-auch keine Pseudolänge dafür.
+auch keine Pseudolänge dafür.
\fi
Die\important{Achtung!} obere und untere Faltmarke dienen nicht der exakten
Drittelung des Papiers beim Falten. Stattdessen soll das Papier mit ihrer
-Hilfe so geknickt werden können, dass das Feld für die Anschrift in einem
+Hilfe so geknickt werden können, dass das Feld für die Anschrift in einem
Fensterbriefumschlag zu sehen ist. Die Einstellungen sind daher in den
vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}%
-\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} unterschiedlich gewählt. Eine
+\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} unterschiedlich gewählt. Eine
Besonderheit\textnote{Achtung!} stellt \Option{DINmtext} dar. Hier wird
-zwingend von einem Briefumschlag im Format C6/5 (auch »C6 lang« genannt)
+zwingend von einem Briefumschlag im Format C6/5 (auch »C6 lang« genannt)
ausgegangen. Briefe, die mit dieser Option erstellt wurden, sind normalerweise
-weder für Umschläge im Format C5 noch für Umschläge im Format C4 geeignet.
+weder für Umschläge im Format C5 noch für Umschläge im Format C4 geeignet.
-Die mittlere Faltmarke wird für abendländische Briefe normalerweise nicht
-benötigt. Beispielsweise in Japan gibt es jedoch so unterschiedliche
-Briefumschläge, dass eine weitere Faltmarke benötigt wurde (siehe die
+Die mittlere Faltmarke wird für abendländische Briefe normalerweise nicht
+benötigt. Beispielsweise in Japan gibt es jedoch so unterschiedliche
+Briefumschläge, dass eine weitere Faltmarke benötigt wurde (siehe die
japanischen \File{lco}-Dateien). An dieser Stelle sei darauf hingewiesen, dass
-die Bezeichnungen »obere«, »mittlere« und »untere« Faltmarke lediglich eine
-Sprachkonvention darstellen. Tatsächlich ist nicht festgelegt, dass
+die Bezeichnungen »obere«, »mittlere« und »untere« Faltmarke lediglich eine
+Sprachkonvention darstellen. Tatsächlich ist nicht festgelegt, dass
\PLength{tfoldmarkvpos} kleiner als \PLength{mfoldmarkvpos} und dieses kleiner
als \PLength{bfoldmarkvpos} sein muss. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} eine der
-Pseudolängen hingegen Null, so wird die entsprechende Faltmarke auch dann
+Pseudolängen hingegen Null, so wird die entsprechende Faltmarke auch dann
nicht gesetzt, wenn sie per Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}%
\IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}} (siehe
@@ -544,13 +560,13 @@ explizit aktiviert wurde.%
\PLength{bfoldmarklength}
\PLength{pfoldmarklength}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} vier Pseudolängen bestimmen die
-Länge der vier horizontalen Marken. Dabei gilt eine
-Besonderheit. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} die Länge nämlich mit Null angegeben, so
-werden bei den Pseudolängen \PLength{tfoldmarklength},
-\PLength{mfoldmarklength} und \PLength{bfoldmarklength} für die drei in der
+Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} vier Pseudolängen bestimmen die
+Länge der vier horizontalen Marken. Dabei gilt eine
+Besonderheit. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} die Länge nämlich mit Null angegeben, so
+werden bei den Pseudolängen \PLength{tfoldmarklength},
+\PLength{mfoldmarklength} und \PLength{bfoldmarklength} für die drei in der
vertikalen Position konfigurierbaren Faltmarken stattdessen 2\Unit{mm} als
-Länge verwendet. Die Länge der Lochermarke, \PLength{pfoldmarklength}, wird
+Länge verwendet. Die Länge der Lochermarke, \PLength{pfoldmarklength}, wird
hingegen auf 4\Unit{mm} gesetzt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -558,11 +574,11 @@ hingegen auf 4\Unit{mm} gesetzt.%
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{foldmarkhpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand aller horizontalen Faltmarken vom linken
+Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand aller horizontalen Faltmarken vom linken
Papier\-rand an. Normalerweise sind das 3{,}5\Unit{mm}. Sie\textnote{Tipp!}
-können den Wert aber auch in Ihrer eigenen \File{lco}-Datei ändern, falls Sie
+können den Wert aber auch in Ihrer eigenen \File{lco}-Datei ändern, falls Sie
einen Drucker verwenden, der einen breiteren unbedruckbaren linken Rand
-hat. Ob die Faltmarken überhaupt gesetzt werden, hängt außerdem von der Option
+hat. Ob die Faltmarken überhaupt gesetzt werden, hängt außerdem von der Option
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}}%
\IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}} ab (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}).%
@@ -575,32 +591,32 @@ hat. Ob die Faltmarken überhaupt gesetzt werden, hängt außerdem von der Option
\end{Declaration}
Neben\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} den horizontalen Faltmarken gibt es
auch noch eine vertikale Faltmarke. Deren Abstand von der linken Papierkante
-wird über die Pseudolänge \PLength{lfoldmarkhpos} bestimmt. Diese Faltmarke
-wird beispielsweise bei Briefen für einige japanische Chou- oder You-Umschläge
-benötigt, wenn man diese für A4-Papier verwenden will. Auch für Umschläge im
-C6-Format kann sie nützlich sein.%
+wird über die Pseudolänge \PLength{lfoldmarkhpos} bestimmt. Diese Faltmarke
+wird beispielsweise bei Briefen für einige japanische Chou- oder You-Umschläge
+benötigt, wenn man diese für A4-Papier verwenden will. Auch für Umschläge im
+C6-Format kann sie nützlich sein.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{lfoldmarklength}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Pseudolänge \PLength{lfoldmarklength} bestimmt
-die\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Länge der vertikalen
+Die Pseudolänge \PLength{lfoldmarklength} bestimmt
+die\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Länge der vertikalen
Faltmarke. Auch\textnote{Achtung!} hier gibt es die Besonderheit, dass bei
-einer angegebenen Länge von Null stattdessen 4\Unit{mm} verwendet werden.%
+einer angegebenen Länge von Null stattdessen 4\Unit{mm} verwendet werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{foldmarkvpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Die\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand
+Die\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand
\iffree{aller}{der} vertikalen Faltmarke\iffree{n}{} vom oberen Papier\-rand
-an. Normalerweise sind das 3{,}5\Unit{mm}. Sie\textnote{Tipp!} können den
-Wert aber auch in Ihrer eigenen \File{lco}-Datei ändern, falls Sie einen
+an. Normalerweise sind das 3{,}5\Unit{mm}. Sie\textnote{Tipp!} können den
+Wert aber auch in Ihrer eigenen \File{lco}-Datei ändern, falls Sie einen
Drucker verwenden, der einen breiteren unbedruckbaren oberen Rand hat. Ob die
-Faltmarke\iffree{n}{} überhaupt gesetzt \iffree{werden}{wird}, hängt außerdem
+Faltmarke\iffree{n}{} überhaupt gesetzt \iffree{werden}{wird}, hängt außerdem
von der Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}}%
\IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}} ab (siehe
@@ -614,10 +630,10 @@ von der Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}%
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{foldmarkthickness}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Pseudolänge gibt die Dicke aller
-Faltmarken an. Voreingestellt sind 0,2\Unit{pt}, also eine sehr dünne
+Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Pseudolänge gibt die Dicke aller
+Faltmarken an. Voreingestellt sind 0,2\Unit{pt}, also eine sehr dünne
Haarlinie. Insbesondere\textnote{Tipp!}, wenn die Farbe der Faltmarken
-geändert wird, kann dies zu wenig sein!%
+geändert wird, kann dies zu wenig sein!%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -629,16 +645,16 @@ geändert wird, kann dies zu wenig sein!%
\BeginIndex{}{Briefkopf}%
Unter dem Briefkopf verstehen wir alle Angaben, die den Absender betreffen und
-die über der Anschrift stehen. Normalerweise würde man erwarten, dass diese
-über den Seitenstil gesetzt werden. Bei der alten Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr}
+die über der Anschrift stehen. Normalerweise würde man erwarten, dass diese
+über den Seitenstil gesetzt werden. Bei der alten Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr}
war dies auch so. Bei\textnote{Achtung!} \Class{scrlttr2} und
-\Package{scrletter} wird der Briefkopf jedoch unabhängig vom Seitenstil von
+\Package{scrletter} wird der Briefkopf jedoch unabhängig vom Seitenstil von
der Anweisung \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} ausgegeben.
% Fuellmaterial
\iftrue%
Dabei wird der Briefkopf absolut positioniert, ist also vom Satzspiegel
-unabhängig. Die erste Seite eines Briefes, also die Seite mit dem Briefkopf,
-wird tatsächlich mit dem Seitenstil
+unabhängig. Die erste Seite eines Briefes, also die Seite mit dem Briefkopf,
+wird tatsächlich mit dem Seitenstil
\DescRef{scrlttr2.pagestyle.empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} gesetzt.%
\fi
% Ende des Fuellmaterials
@@ -647,7 +663,7 @@ wird tatsächlich mit dem Seitenstil
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{firstheadvpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadvpos} gibt den Abstand des Briefkopfes von
+Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadvpos} gibt den Abstand des Briefkopfes von
der oberen Papierkante an. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
unterschiedlich gesetzt. Ein typischer Wert ist 8\Unit{mm}.%
@@ -657,30 +673,30 @@ unterschiedlich gesetzt. Ein typischer Wert ist 8\Unit{mm}.%
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{firstheadhpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadhpos}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
+Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadhpos}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
gibt bei einem positiven Wert den Abstand des Briefkopfes von der linken
-Papierkante an. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} der Wert sogar größer oder gleich der
+Papierkante an. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} der Wert sogar größer oder gleich der
Breite des Papiers,
\Length{paperwidth}\important{\Length{paperwidth}}\IndexLength{paperwidth}, so
wird der Briefkopf horizontal zentriert auf dem Briefbogen platziert. Ein
negativer Wert gibt den Abstand des Briefkopfes von der rechten Papierkante
an. Ist der Wert jedoch kleiner oder gleich der negativen Breite des Papiers,
-so wird der Briefkopf bündig zum linken Rand des Satzspiegels platziert.
+so wird der Briefkopf bündig zum linken Rand des Satzspiegels platziert.
Voreingestellt\textnote{Achtung!} ist typischerweise ein Wert von
-\Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, also der größtmögliche Wert für eine
-Länge. Die Folge ist eine horizontale Zentrierung.%
+\Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, also der größtmögliche Wert für eine
+Länge. Die Folge ist eine horizontale Zentrierung.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{firstheadwidth}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadwidth} gibt die Breite des Briefkopfes
+Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadwidth} gibt die Breite des Briefkopfes
an. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
-unterschiedlich gesetzt. Während er normalerweise von der Papierbreite und dem
-horizontalen Abstand der Empfängeradresse vom linken Papierrand abhängt,
+unterschiedlich gesetzt. Während er normalerweise von der Papierbreite und dem
+horizontalen Abstand der Empfängeradresse vom linken Papierrand abhängt,
entspricht er bei \Option{KOMAold} der Breite des Satzspiegels und ist bei
\Option{NF} fest auf 170\Unit{mm} eingestellt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -693,9 +709,9 @@ entspricht er bei \Option{KOMAold} der Breite des Satzspiegels und ist bei
Wie bereits bei Option
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.fromrule}\IndexOption{fromrule} in
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.fromrule}
-erwähnt wurde, kann in den vordefinierten Briefköpfen eine Linie im oder unter
-dem Absender gesetzt werden. Hat\textnote{Achtung!} die Pseudolänge
-\PLength{fromrulewidth} die Länge 0, so wird dabei die Länge dieser Linie
+erwähnt wurde, kann in den vordefinierten Briefköpfen eine Linie im oder unter
+dem Absender gesetzt werden. Hat\textnote{Achtung!} die Pseudolänge
+\PLength{fromrulewidth} die Länge 0, so wird dabei die Länge dieser Linie
automatisch bestimmt. Dies ist die Voreinstellung bei den vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien. %
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext
@@ -704,7 +720,7 @@ Der Wert kann mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setplength} (siehe
aber auch abweichend gesetzt werden. %
\fi%
Die voreingestellte Dicke\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}},
-\PLength{fromrulethickness}, der Linie beträgt 0,4\Unit{pt}.%
+\PLength{fromrulethickness}, der Linie beträgt 0,4\Unit{pt}.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -717,17 +733,17 @@ Die voreingestellte Dicke\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}},
% Verschiedene Umbruchvarianten
Unter der Anschrift versteht man normalerweise nur den Namen und die Adresse
-des Empfängers. %
+des Empfängers. %
\iffalse%
Als \iffree{erste }{}Erweiterung zur Anschrift kann die
Versandart betrachtet werden, die etwa bei \iffree{Einschreiben oder
-}{}Infobriefen zur Anwendung kommt. Bei Fensterbriefumschlägen wird auch die
-sogenannte Rücksendeadresse \iffree{zur Anschrift}{dazu} gezählt, da sie im
+}{}Infobriefen zur Anwendung kommt. Bei Fensterbriefumschlägen wird auch die
+sogenannte Rücksendeadresse \iffree{zur Anschrift}{dazu} gezählt, da sie im
Anschriftfenster zu sehen \iffree{sein wird}{ist}. Die Anschrift folgt
unmittelbar auf den Briefkopf.%
\else%
Aber auch die Versandart, beispielsweise bei Infobriefen, oder die
-Rücksendeadresse werden als Teil des Anschriftfeldes gesetzt.%
+Rücksendeadresse werden als Teil des Anschriftfeldes gesetzt.%
\fi
@@ -735,11 +751,11 @@ Rücksendeadresse werden als Teil des Anschriftfeldes gesetzt.%
\PLength{toaddrvpos}
\PLength{toaddrhpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolängen geben den Abstand des Anschriftfensters eines
+Diese Pseudolängen geben den Abstand des Anschriftfensters eines
Fensterbriefumschlags vom oberen und vom linken Rand des Papiers an. Sie
werden in den vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
-unterschiedlich eingestellt. Für \PLength{toaddrhpos} gilt außerdem eine
+unterschiedlich eingestellt. Für \PLength{toaddrhpos} gilt außerdem eine
Besonderheit. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} der Wert \iffree{}{wie bei \Option{SN}
oder \Option{NF} }negativ, so ist sein Betrag der Abstand des
Anschriftfeldes vom rechten Rand des Papiers. %
@@ -749,9 +765,9 @@ Anschriftfeldes vom rechten Rand des Papiers. %
\Option{DINmtext}. Hier kann es schnell passieren, dass der Briefkopf in das
Anschriftfenster ragt.%
}{%
- Große Briefköpfe\textnote{Achtung!} können bei kleinem \PLength{toaddrvpos},
+ Große Briefköpfe\textnote{Achtung!} können bei kleinem \PLength{toaddrvpos},
beispielsweise bei \Option{DINmtext}, bis in das Anschriftfeld ragen.%
-} Ob das Anschriftfenster überhaupt gesetzt wird, hängt von der Option
+} Ob das Anschriftfenster überhaupt gesetzt wird, hängt von der Option
\Option{addrfield} ab (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}).%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -760,9 +776,9 @@ Anschriftfeldes vom rechten Rand des Papiers. %
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{toaddrheight}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Höhe des Anschriftfeldes einschließlich der
-Versandart an. Ob Name und Adresse des Empfängers unter Berücksichtigung der
-Versandart im Anschriftfeld vertikal zentriert werden hängt von Option
+Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Höhe des Anschriftfeldes einschließlich der
+Versandart an. Ob Name und Adresse des Empfängers unter Berücksichtigung der
+Versandart im Anschriftfeld vertikal zentriert werden hängt von Option
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield} ab.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -770,7 +786,7 @@ Versandart im Anschriftfeld vertikal zentriert werden hängt von Option
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{toaddrwidth}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Breite des Anschriftfensters an. Diese wird in den
+Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Breite des Anschriftfensters an. Diese wird in den
vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
entsprechend der unterschiedlichen Normen unterschiedlich
@@ -780,7 +796,7 @@ eingestellt. Typische Werte liegen zwischen 70\Unit{mm} und 100\Unit{mm}.
Angenommen, Sie haben das Problem, dass Ihr Drucker einen \iffree{sehr
breiten }{}unbedruckbaren rechten \iffree{oder linken }{}Rand von
15\Unit{mm} besitzt. Dadurch kann bei Option \Option{SN} der Briefkopf, die
- Absenderergänzung und die Anschrift nicht komplett gedruckt werden. Sie
+ Absenderergänzung und die Anschrift nicht komplett gedruckt werden. Sie
erstellen daher eine neue \iffree{\File{lco}-Datei mit folgendem Inhalt}{Datei
\File{SNmmarg.lco}, die Sie anstelle von \Option{SN} verwenden}:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -794,10 +810,10 @@ eingestellt. Typische Werte liegen zwischen 70\Unit{mm} und 100\Unit{mm}.
\useplength{toaddrhpos}}
\endinput
\end{lstcode}%
- \iffree{ Bis Sie sich einen Drucker mit kleineren Rändern zugelegt haben,
+ \iffree{ Bis Sie sich einen Drucker mit kleineren Rändern zugelegt haben,
verwenden Sie \Option{SNmmarg} anstelle von
\Option{SN}.}{}% Umbruchoptimierung
-\end{Example}\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
+\end{Example}\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -807,8 +823,8 @@ eingestellt. Typische Werte liegen zwischen 70\Unit{mm} und 100\Unit{mm}.
\end{Declaration}
Manchmal will man, dass die Anschrift nicht am linken Rand des
Anschriftfensters beginnt und bis zum rechten Rand des Fensters reicht,
-sondern ein wenig eingezogen wird. Der Wert dieses Einzugs kann über die
-Pseudolänge \PLength{toaddrindent} festgelegt werden. Typischerweise ist
+sondern ein wenig eingezogen wird. Der Wert dieses Einzugs kann über die
+Pseudolänge \PLength{toaddrindent} festgelegt werden. Typischerweise ist
dieser Wert jedoch 0\Unit{pt}.
Bei\textnote{Achtung!} jeder der
@@ -824,10 +840,10 @@ Einstellungen\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
\IndexOption{addrfield~=\textKValue{backgroundimage}} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) wird beim Wert 0\Unit{pt}
-stattdessen ein Einzug von 8\Unit{mm} verwendet. Soll hier tatsächlich kein
-Einzug verwendet werden, so kann mit 1\Unit{sp} ein vernachlässigbar kleiner
+stattdessen ein Einzug von 8\Unit{mm} verwendet. Soll hier tatsächlich kein
+Einzug verwendet werden, so kann mit 1\Unit{sp} ein vernachlässigbar kleiner
Einzug gesetzt werden. Des Weiteren wird \PLength{toaddrindent} bei den
-genannten Einstellungen für \Option{addrfield} auch für den Abstand zum
+genannten Einstellungen für \Option{addrfield} auch für den Abstand zum
rechten Rand des Anschriftfensters verwendet.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -835,18 +851,18 @@ rechten Rand des Anschriftfensters verwendet.%
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{backaddrheight}
\end{Declaration}
-Bei Fensterbriefumschlägen wird der Absender häufig in einer kleinen Schrift
-einzeilig über der Empfängeradresse ausgegeben. Diese Absenderangabe nennt man
-Rücksendeadresse\textnote{Rücksendeadresse}%
-\Index{Ruecksendeadresse=Rücksendeadresse}, da sie \iffree{im Anschriftfenster
- sichtbar ist und }{}der Post bei unzustellbaren Briefen für die Rücksendung
+Bei Fensterbriefumschlägen wird der Absender häufig in einer kleinen Schrift
+einzeilig über der Empfängeradresse ausgegeben. Diese Absenderangabe nennt man
+Rücksendeadresse\textnote{Rücksendeadresse}%
+\Index{Ruecksendeadresse=Rücksendeadresse}, da sie \iffree{im Anschriftfenster
+ sichtbar ist und }{}der Post bei unzustellbaren Briefen für die Rücksendung
an den Absender dient. In dieser Adresse muss daher auch nur die Information
-enthalten sein, die zur Rücksendung notwendig ist.
+enthalten sein, die zur Rücksendung notwendig ist.
-Die Höhe, die innerhalb des Anschriftfensters für die Rücksendeadresse zur
-Verfügung steht, ist in der Pseudolänge \PLength{backaddrheight} abgelegt. Der
+Die Höhe, die innerhalb des Anschriftfensters für die Rücksendeadresse zur
+Verfügung steht, ist in der Pseudolänge \PLength{backaddrheight} abgelegt. Der
Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien typischerweise auf
-5\Unit{mm} eingestellt. Ob die Rücksendeadresse überhaupt gesetzt wird,
+5\Unit{mm} eingestellt. Ob die Rücksendeadresse überhaupt gesetzt wird,
bestimmt der Anwender mit den Optionen \Option{addrfield} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) und
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
@@ -858,14 +874,14 @@ bestimmt der Anwender mit den Optionen \Option{addrfield} (siehe
\PLength{specialmailindent}
\PLength{specialmailrightindent}
\end{Declaration}
-Zwischen Rücksendeadresse und Empfängeradresse kann noch eine optionale
+Zwischen Rücksendeadresse und Empfängeradresse kann noch eine optionale
Versandart\Index{Versandart} gesetzt werden\iffree{. Diese wird genau dann
gesetzt}{}, wenn die Variable \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.specialmail} einen
-Inhalt hat. Die Ausrichtung wird mit Hilfe der Pseudolängen
+Inhalt hat. Die Ausrichtung wird mit Hilfe der Pseudolängen
\PLength{specialmailindent} und \PLength{specialmailrightindent}
festgelegt. Diese geben den linken und rechten Einzug der Zeile an. In den
vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist \PLength{specialmailindent} auf den
-dehnbaren Wert \Macro{fill} gesetzt, während \PLength{specialmailrightindent}
+dehnbaren Wert \Macro{fill} gesetzt, während \PLength{specialmailrightindent}
auf 1\Unit{em} eingestellt ist. Damit wird die Versandart 1\Unit{em} vom
rechten Rand des Anschriftfensters gesetzt.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -875,26 +891,26 @@ rechten Rand des Anschriftfensters gesetzt.%
\PLength{PPheadheight}
\PLength{PPheadwidth}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Pseudolänge \PLength{PPheadheight} gibt bei den beiden
+Die Pseudolänge \PLength{PPheadheight} gibt bei den beiden
Einstellungen\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\important{%
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\\
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{backgroundimage}}%
\IndexOption{addrfield~=\textKValue{PP}} und
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{backgroundimage}%
-\IndexOption{addrfield~=\textKValue{backgroundimage}} die Höhe an, die am Anfang
-des Adressfeldes für den Port-Payé-Kopf reserviert wird. Die Pseudolänge
+\IndexOption{addrfield~=\textKValue{backgroundimage}} die Höhe an, die am Anfang
+des Adressfeldes für den Port-Payé-Kopf reserviert wird. Die Pseudolänge
\PLength{PPheadwidth} wird nur bei \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}
(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) verwendet und gibt die Breite des
-linken Feldes des Port-Payé-Kopf mit dem P.\,P.-Logo, der Postleitzahl und dem
-Ort an. Die Breite des rechten Feldes mit dem Code für den Absender und der
-Priorität ist durch die Restbreite bestimmt.
-
-Den\textnote{Achtung!} normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von 0\Unit{mm} für
-Pseudolänge \PLength{PPheadheight} ändert \KOMAScript{} selbstständig in
-20,74\Unit{pt}. Den normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von 0\Unit{mm} für
-\PLength{PPheadwidth} ändert \KOMAScript{} selbstständig in 42\Unit{mm}.%
+linken Feldes des Port-Payé-Kopf mit dem P.\,P.-Logo, der Postleitzahl und dem
+Ort an. Die Breite des rechten Feldes mit dem Code für den Absender und der
+Priorität ist durch die Restbreite bestimmt.
+
+Den\textnote{Achtung!} normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von 0\Unit{mm} für
+Pseudolänge \PLength{PPheadheight} ändert \KOMAScript{} selbstständig in
+20,74\Unit{pt}. Den normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von 0\Unit{mm} für
+\PLength{PPheadwidth} ändert \KOMAScript{} selbstständig in 42\Unit{mm}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -902,35 +918,35 @@ Pseudolänge \PLength{PPheadheight} ändert \KOMAScript{} selbstständig in
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{PPdatamatrixvskip}
\end{Declaration}
-Durch\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} diese Pseudolänge wird der vertikale
-Abstand zwischen dem Port-Payé-Kopf und der Data-Matrix bei
+Durch\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} diese Pseudolänge wird der vertikale
+Abstand zwischen dem Port-Payé-Kopf und der Data-Matrix bei
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}}%
\IndexOption{addrfield~=\textKValue{PP}} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield})
festgelegt. Den\textnote{Achtung!} normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von
-0\Unit{mm} ändert \KOMAScript{} selbstständig in 9\Unit{mm}. Die Data-Matrix
-wird rechtsbündig zum Port-Payé-Kopf gesetzt.%
+0\Unit{mm} ändert \KOMAScript{} selbstständig in 9\Unit{mm}. Die Data-Matrix
+wird rechtsbündig zum Port-Payé-Kopf gesetzt.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\subsection{Absenderergänzungen}
+\subsection{Absenderergänzungen}
\seclabel{locationField}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}%
\iffalse% Umbruchvarianten
-Insbesondere bei Geschäftsbriefen reicht der Platz im Briefkopf und im
-Seitenfuß oftmals nicht aus, um alle Angaben des Absenders unterzubringen. Für
-die zusätzlichen Informationen kann der Platz neben der Anschrift
-genutzt werden. In dieser Anleitung wird dieses Feld \emph{Absenderergänzung}
+Insbesondere bei Geschäftsbriefen reicht der Platz im Briefkopf und im
+Seitenfuß oftmals nicht aus, um alle Angaben des Absenders unterzubringen. Für
+die zusätzlichen Informationen kann der Platz neben der Anschrift
+genutzt werden. In dieser Anleitung wird dieses Feld \emph{Absenderergänzung}
genannt.%
\else%
-Reicht der Raum in Briefkopf und Seitenfuß nicht aus, um alle Angaben zum
+Reicht der Raum in Briefkopf und Seitenfuß nicht aus, um alle Angaben zum
Absender unterzubringen, kann der Platz neben der Anschrift als
-\emph{Absenderergänzung} genutzt werden.%
+\emph{Absenderergänzung} genutzt werden.%
\fi
@@ -940,10 +956,10 @@ Absender unterzubringen, kann der Platz neben der Anschrift als
\PLength{locvpos}
\PLength{locwidth}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Pseudolängen \PLength{locwidth} und
+Die Pseudolängen \PLength{locwidth} und
\PLength{locheight}\ChangedAt{v2.97d}{\Class{scrlttr2}} geben die Breite und
-Höhe der Absenderergänzung an. Die Pseudolängen \PLength{lochpos} und
-\PLength{locvpos} geben die Abstände von der rechten, oberen
+Höhe der Absenderergänzung an. Die Pseudolängen \PLength{lochpos} und
+\PLength{locvpos} geben die Abstände von der rechten, oberen
Papierkante an. Die Werte werden in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien
typischerweise auf 0\Unit{pt} gesetzt. Dieser\textnote{Achtung!} Wert nimmt
eine Sonderstellung ein. Er bedeutet, dass die Werte erst bei
@@ -953,7 +969,7 @@ Anschriftfensters von der linken, oberen Papierkante und
Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield})
gesetzt werden. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} bei \PLength{toaddrhpos} nehmen
-negative Werte für \PLength{lochpos} eine Sonderstellung ein. Es wird dann
+negative Werte für \PLength{lochpos} eine Sonderstellung ein. Es wird dann
statt des Abstandes vom rechten Papierrand der Betrag von \PLength{lochpos}
als Abstand vom linken Papierrand verwendet. Die Bedeutung ist also genau
umgekehrt zu der bei \PLength{toaddrhpos} (siehe
@@ -964,20 +980,20 @@ umgekehrt zu der bei \PLength{toaddrhpos} (siehe
\EndIndexGroup
-\subsection{Geschäftszeile}
+\subsection{Geschäftszeile}
\seclabel{refLine}%
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}%
-Die Geschäftszeile kann auch länger als eine Zeile sein. Sie wird nur gesetzt,
-wenn mindestens eine der Variablen für die Geschäftszeile nicht leer ist. Es
+Die Geschäftszeile kann auch länger als eine Zeile sein. Sie wird nur gesetzt,
+wenn mindestens eine der Variablen für die Geschäftszeile nicht leer ist. Es
werden nur nicht leere Felder gesetzt. Um\textnote{Tipp!} ein scheinbar leeres
Feld zu setzen, kann man einen scheinbar leeren Variableninhalt wie
-\Macro{mbox}\Parameter{} verwenden. Wird auf die Geschäftszeile verzichtet, so
+\Macro{mbox}\Parameter{} verwenden. Wird auf die Geschäftszeile verzichtet, so
werden an ihrer Stelle Bezeichnung und Inhalt der Variablen
\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.date} ausgegeben. %
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
-Informationen, wie Variablen zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt oder entfernt
+Informationen, wie Variablen zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt oder entfernt
werden, sind in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields} zu finden.%
\fi
@@ -986,7 +1002,7 @@ werden, sind in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables},
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{refvpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der Oberkante des
+Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der Oberkante des
Papiers an. Ihr Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
unterschiedlich eingestellt. %
\iffalse%
@@ -999,17 +1015,17 @@ Typische Werte liegen zwischen 80{,}5\Unit{mm} und 98{,}5\Unit{mm}.%
\PLength{refwidth}
\PLength{refhpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Pseudolänge \PLength{refwidth} gibt die Breite an, die für die
-Geschäftszeile zur Verfügung steht. Ihr Wert wird in den vordefinierten
+Die Pseudolänge \PLength{refwidth} gibt die Breite an, die für die
+Geschäftszeile zur Verfügung steht. Ihr Wert wird in den vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien typischerweise auf 0\Unit{pt}
gesetzt. Dieser\textnote{Achtung!} Wert hat eine besondere Bedeutung. %
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
-Es wird damit keineswegs festgelegt, dass für die Geschäftszeile keine Breite
-zur Verfügung steht. Vielmehr bedeutet der Wert%
+Es wird damit keineswegs festgelegt, dass für die Geschäftszeile keine Breite
+zur Verfügung steht. Vielmehr bedeutet der Wert%
\else%
Damit wird festgelegt%
\fi%
-, dass die verfügbare Breite erst innerhalb von
+, dass die verfügbare Breite erst innerhalb von
\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} ermittelt wird. Die%
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung
\ dort ermittelte %
@@ -1023,26 +1039,26 @@ Breite richtet sich \iffree{dann }{}nach der Einstellung der Option
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}). Gleichzeitig wird dann auch
\PLength{refhpos} entsprechend der Option gesetzt. Bei
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{wide}%
-\IndexOption{refline~=\textKValue{wide}} wird die Geschäftszeile zentriert,
+\IndexOption{refline~=\textKValue{wide}} wird die Geschäftszeile zentriert,
wohingegen sie bei \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{narrow}%
\IndexOption{refline~=\textKValue{narrow}} am Satzspiegel links ausgerichtet
wird.
Ist \PLength{refwidth} von Null verschieden, wird die Breite der
-Geschäftszeile also nicht von der Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}
-bestimmt, so gibt \PLength{refhpos} den Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der
+Geschäftszeile also nicht von der Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}
+bestimmt, so gibt \PLength{refhpos} den Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der
linken Papierkante an. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} dieser Abstand Null, so wird die
-Geschäftszeile so ausgerichtet, dass das Verhältnis zwischen ihrem Abstand von
+Geschäftszeile so ausgerichtet, dass das Verhältnis zwischen ihrem Abstand von
der linken Papierkante zu ihrem Abstand von der rechten Papierkante dem
-Verhältnis zwischen dem Abstand des Satzspiegels von der linken Papierkante zu
+Verhältnis zwischen dem Abstand des Satzspiegels von der linken Papierkante zu
seinem Abstand von der rechten Papierkante entspricht. Bei auf dem Papier
-horizontal zentriertem Satzspiegel wird also auch die Geschäftszeile
+horizontal zentriertem Satzspiegel wird also auch die Geschäftszeile
zentriert.
-In der Regel werden diese Sonderfälle für die häufigsten Anwendungen von
+In der Regel werden diese Sonderfälle für die häufigsten Anwendungen von
geringem Interesse sein. Die\textnote{Tipp!} einfachste Regel lautet hier:
Entweder wird \PLength{refwidth} auf Null belassen und die Breite und
-Ausrichtung der Geschäftszeile über die Option
+Ausrichtung der Geschäftszeile über die Option
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline} bestimmt oder sowohl \PLength{refwidth} als
auch \PLength{refhpos} werden vom Anwender vorgegeben.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1051,10 +1067,10 @@ auch \PLength{refhpos} werden vom Anwender vorgegeben.%
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{refaftervskip}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolänge gibt den vertikalen Abstand an, der nach der Geschäftszeile
-eingefügt werden soll. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten
+Diese Pseudolänge gibt den vertikalen Abstand an, der nach der Geschäftszeile
+eingefügt werden soll. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
-eingestellt. Er wirkt sich unmittelbar auf die Höhe des Textbereichs der
+eingestellt. Er wirkt sich unmittelbar auf die Höhe des Textbereichs der
ersten Seite aus. Der typische Wert liegt zwischen einer und zwei Zeilen.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -1066,30 +1082,30 @@ ersten Seite aus. Der typische Wert liegt zwischen einer und zwei Zeilen.%
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Betreff}
-Der Betreff eine Briefes wird in unterschiedlichen Ländern unterschiedlich
+Der Betreff eine Briefes wird in unterschiedlichen Ländern unterschiedlich
gesetzt. Die einen haben ihn gerne vor der Anrede, die anderen setzen ihn
-danach. Einige Berufsgruppen wollen ihn teilweise sogar vor der Geschäftszeile
+danach. Einige Berufsgruppen wollen ihn teilweise sogar vor der Geschäftszeile
haben.
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{subjectvpos}
\end{Declaration}
\ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
-Ist\textnote{Achtung!} der Wert dieser Pseudolänge 0\Unit{pt}, so bestimmt die
+Ist\textnote{Achtung!} der Wert dieser Pseudolänge 0\Unit{pt}, so bestimmt die
Option
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}}%
\IndexOption{subject~=\PName{Einstellung}} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}) die
-Position des Betreffs. Dabei spielen dann auch die nachfolgend erklärten
-Pseudolängen \PLength{subjectbeforevskip} und \PLength{subjectaftervskip} ihre
+Position des Betreffs. Dabei spielen dann auch die nachfolgend erklärten
+Pseudolängen \PLength{subjectbeforevskip} und \PLength{subjectaftervskip} ihre
Rolle. Bei allen anderen Werten wird der Betreff mit dem entsprechenden
Abstand von der oberen Papierkante platziert. Es\textnote{Tipp!} wird
-empfohlen in diesem Fall darauf zu achten, dass genügend Platz zur Verfügung
-steht, damit Überschneidungen mit anderen Elementen unwahrscheinlich sind.
+empfohlen in diesem Fall darauf zu achten, dass genügend Platz zur Verfügung
+steht, damit Ãœberschneidungen mit anderen Elementen unwahrscheinlich sind.
\begin{Example}
Einige wenige Berufsgruppen ziehen es vor, wenn der Betreff noch vor der
- Geschäftszeile steht. Hierzu kann man die Position wie folgt wählen, wobei
- auch die Position der Geschäftszeile angepasst wird:
+ Geschäftszeile steht. Hierzu kann man die Position wie folgt wählen, wobei
+ auch die Position der Geschäftszeile angepasst wird:
\begin{lstcode}
\ProvidesFile{lawsubj.lco}
[2008/11/03 lawyers lco file]
@@ -1097,8 +1113,8 @@ steht, damit Überschneidungen mit anderen Elementen unwahrscheinlich sind.
\addtoplength{refvpos}{3\baselineskip}
\endinput
\end{lstcode}
- Will man, dass zwischen Betreff und Geschäftszeile noch mindestens eine
- Zeile frei bleibt, hat man so Platz für maximal zwei Zeilen Betreff.
+ Will man, dass zwischen Betreff und Geschäftszeile noch mindestens eine
+ Zeile frei bleibt, hat man so Platz für maximal zwei Zeilen Betreff.
\end{Example}
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1109,67 +1125,67 @@ steht, damit Überschneidungen mit anderen Elementen unwahrscheinlich sind.
\end{Declaration}
\ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
Wird der Betreff nicht absolut platziert, sondern vor oder nach der Anrede, so
-kann vor und nach dem Betreff ein zusätzlicher Abstand eingefügt werden. Der
-Abstand vor dem Betreff trifft dabei gegebenenfalls mit anderen Abständen,
+kann vor und nach dem Betreff ein zusätzlicher Abstand eingefügt werden. Der
+Abstand vor dem Betreff trifft dabei gegebenenfalls mit anderen Abständen,
etwa dem automatischen Abstand von einer Zeile nach dem Titel, zusammen. In
der Voreinstellung wird daher in der Regel kein weiterer Abstand an dieser
-Stelle eingefügt. Der Abstand nach dem Betreff beträgt in der Voreinstellung
+Stelle eingefügt. Der Abstand nach dem Betreff beträgt in der Voreinstellung
von Klasse und Paket zwei Zeilen.%
\EndIndexGroup \EndIndexGroup
-\subsection{Schlussgruß}
+\subsection{Schlussgruß}
\seclabel{closing}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß}
+\BeginIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß}
-Der Schlussgruß\Index{Gruss=Gruß} eines Briefes besteht aus mehreren Teilen.
-Neben der Grußformel selbst gibt es noch die Unterschrift und die Signatur,
-eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift.
+Der Schlussgruß\Index{Gruss=Gruß} eines Briefes besteht aus mehreren Teilen.
+Neben der Grußformel selbst gibt es noch die Unterschrift und die Signatur,
+eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift.
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{sigindent}
\PLength{sigbeforevskip}
\end{Declaration}
-Grußfloskel\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Signatur} und Erläuterung der
+Grußfloskel\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Signatur} und Erläuterung der
Unterschrift\Index{Unterschrift} werden innerhalb einer Box gesetzt. Die
-Breite dieser Box wird durch die längste Zeile innerhalb von Grußfloskel und
-Erläuterung bestimmt.
+Breite dieser Box wird durch die längste Zeile innerhalb von Grußfloskel und
+Erläuterung bestimmt.
-Die Box wird mit dem durch die Pseudolänge \PLength{sigindent} bestimmten
+Die Box wird mit dem durch die Pseudolänge \PLength{sigindent} bestimmten
Einzug gesetzt. In den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist der Einzug auf
0\Unit{mm} gesetzt.
-Zwischen Grußfloskel und Erläuterung wird ein vertikaler Abstand eingefügt,
-der mit der Pseudolänge \PLength{sigbeforevskip} festgelegt ist. In den
+Zwischen Grußfloskel und Erläuterung wird ein vertikaler Abstand eingefügt,
+der mit der Pseudolänge \PLength{sigbeforevskip} festgelegt ist. In den
vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist der Wert auf zwei Zeilen eingestellt. In
-diese Lücke setzen Sie dann Ihre Unterschrift.%
+diese Lücke setzen Sie dann Ihre Unterschrift.%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
-\ Sollten\textnote{Tipp!} Sie sich dazu entschließen in die Variable
+\ Sollten\textnote{Tipp!} Sie sich dazu entschließen in die Variable
\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.signature}\IndexVariable{signature}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.signature}} mit Paket
\Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} ein Faksimile Ihrer Unterschrift
-einzufügen, wäre es also sinnvoll den Wert von \PLength{sigbeforevskip} und
-damit die Lücke zwischen Schlussgruß und Signatur zu verringern.%
+einzufügen, wäre es also sinnvoll den Wert von \PLength{sigbeforevskip} und
+damit die Lücke zwischen Schlussgruß und Signatur zu verringern.%
\fi%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\subsection{Briefbogenfuß}
+\subsection{Briefbogenfuß}
\seclabel{firstFoot}%
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}%
-Die erste Seite eines Briefes, der Briefbogen, enthält nicht nur einen eigenen
-Kopf, den Briefkopf. Diese Seite enthält auch einen eigenen
-Fuß\Index{Fuss=Fuß}, den Briefbogenfuß. %
+Die erste Seite eines Briefes, der Briefbogen, enthält nicht nur einen eigenen
+Kopf, den Briefkopf. Diese Seite enthält auch einen eigenen
+Fuß\Index{Fuss=Fuß}, den Briefbogenfuß. %
\iftrue% Umbruchvarianten
-Auch dieser wird nicht über den Seitenstil%
+Auch dieser wird nicht über den Seitenstil%
\else%
-Genau wie der Briefkopf wird der Briefbogenfuß nicht über den Seitenstil%
+Genau wie der Briefkopf wird der Briefbogenfuß nicht über den Seitenstil%
\fi%
, sondern unmittelbar von \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}} ausgegeben.
@@ -1178,37 +1194,37 @@ Genau wie der Briefkopf wird der Briefbogenfuß nicht über den Seitenstil%
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{firstfootvpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand des Fußes der ersten Briefseite von der
-Oberkante des Papiers an. Es wird außerdem dafür gesorgt, dass der Textbereich
-nicht in den Fuß hineinragt. Hierzu wird auf der ersten Seite gegebenenfalls
-die Höhe des Textbereichs mit Hilfe von
+Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand des Fußes der ersten Briefseite von der
+Oberkante des Papiers an. Es wird außerdem dafür gesorgt, dass der Textbereich
+nicht in den Fuß hineinragt. Hierzu wird auf der ersten Seite gegebenenfalls
+die Höhe des Textbereichs mit Hilfe von
\Macro{enlargethispage}\IndexCmd{enlargethispage}%
\important{\Macro{enlargethispage}} verkleinert. Mit Hilfe der Option
\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}) kann dafür gesorgt werden,
-dass die Höhe des Textbereichs umgekehrt gegebenenfalls auch vergrößert
-wird. Damit kann dann der Abstand zwischen Textbereich und Fuß der ersten
-Seite auf den Wert der Länge
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}) kann dafür gesorgt werden,
+dass die Höhe des Textbereichs umgekehrt gegebenenfalls auch vergrößert
+wird. Damit kann dann der Abstand zwischen Textbereich und Fuß der ersten
+Seite auf den Wert der Länge
\Length{footskip}\IndexLength{footskip}\important{\Length{footskip}}
verringert werden.
Bei\textnote{Achtung!}
-Kompatibilitätseinstellungen\ChangedAt{v2.9t}{\Class{scrlttr2}} bis
+Kompatibilitätseinstellungen\ChangedAt{v2.9t}{\Class{scrlttr2}} bis
Version~2.9t (siehe \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.version} in
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.compatibilityOptions},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.version}) wird außer bei \Option{KOMAold} und
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.version}) wird außer bei \Option{KOMAold} und
\Option{NF} in allen vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
-(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) der Fuß abhängig vom Satzspiegel
+(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) der Fuß abhängig vom Satzspiegel
gesetzt. Damit hat dann auch \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}} keine Wirkung. Ab
-Version 2.9u bekommt der Fuß eine Position am unteren Ende des Papiers. Damit
-ist dann die Höhe des Satzspiegels des Briefbogens eventuell auch von der
-Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage} abhängig.
+Version 2.9u bekommt der Fuß eine Position am unteren Ende des Papiers. Damit
+ist dann die Höhe des Satzspiegels des Briefbogens eventuell auch von der
+Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage} abhängig.
-Sollte der Briefbogenfuß mittels Option
+Sollte der Briefbogenfuß mittels Option
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{firstfoot}{false}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{firstfoot}{false}}%
\IndexOption{firstfoot~=\textKValue{false}}\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
@@ -1223,29 +1239,29 @@ ein minimaler unterer Rand von \Length{footskip}\IndexLength{footskip}.%
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{firstfoothpos}
\end{Declaration}
-Die\textnote{Achtung!} Pseudolänge
+Die\textnote{Achtung!} Pseudolänge
\PLength{firstfoothpos}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrlttr2}} gibt bei einem
-positiven Wert den Abstand des Briefbogenfußes von der linken Papierkante
-an. Ist der Wert sogar größer oder gleich der Breite des Papiers,
-\Length{paperwidth}\IndexLength{paperwidth}, so wird der Fuß horizontal
+positiven Wert den Abstand des Briefbogenfußes von der linken Papierkante
+an. Ist der Wert sogar größer oder gleich der Breite des Papiers,
+\Length{paperwidth}\IndexLength{paperwidth}, so wird der Fuß horizontal
zentriert auf dem Briefbogen platziert. Ein negativer Wert gibt den Abstand
-des Fußes von der rechten Papierkante an. Ist der Wert jedoch kleiner oder
-gleich der negativen Breite des Papiers, so wird der Fuß bündig zum linken
+des Fußes von der rechten Papierkante an. Ist der Wert jedoch kleiner oder
+gleich der negativen Breite des Papiers, so wird der Fuß bündig zum linken
Rand des Satzspiegels platziert.
Voreingestellt ist typischerweise ein Wert von
-\Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, also der größtmögliche Wert für eine
-Länge. Die Folge ist eine horizontale Zentrierung.%
+\Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, also der größtmögliche Wert für eine
+Länge. Die Folge ist eine horizontale Zentrierung.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\PLength{firstfootwidth}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Breite des Fußes der ersten Briefseite, also des
+Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Breite des Fußes der ersten Briefseite, also des
Briefbogens, an. Der Wert stimmt in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien mit
\PLength{firstheadwidth}\important{\PLength{firstheadwidth}}%
-\IndexPLength{firstheadwidth} überein.%
+\IndexPLength{firstheadwidth} überein.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -1254,14 +1270,14 @@ Briefbogens, an. Der Wert stimmt in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien mit
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Variablen für fortgeschrittene Anwender}
+\section{Variablen für fortgeschrittene Anwender}
\seclabel{variables}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Variablen}
-Neben der Möglichkeit, vordefinierte Variablen zu verwenden, bietet
+Neben der Möglichkeit, vordefinierte Variablen zu verwenden, bietet
\KOMAScript{} auch Anweisungen, um neue Variablen zu definieren oder deren
-automatische Verwendung innerhalb der Geschäftszeile zu beeinflussen.
+automatische Verwendung innerhalb der Geschäftszeile zu beeinflussen.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -1272,49 +1288,49 @@ automatische Verwendung innerhalb der Geschäftszeile zu beeinflussen.
\Macro{addtoreffields}\Parameter{Name}
\end{Declaration}
Mit \Macro{newkomavar} wird eine neue Variable definiert. Diese Variable wird
-über \PName{Name} angesprochen. Optional kann eine \PName{Bezeichnung} für die
+über \PName{Name} angesprochen. Optional kann eine \PName{Bezeichnung} für die
Variable \PName{Name} angegeben werden. Eine \PName{Bezeichnung} wird dabei im
Unterschied zum \PName{Name} nicht verwendet, um auf eine Variable
-zuzugreifen. Vielmehr ist die \PName{Bezeichnung} eine Ergänzung zum Inhalt
-einer Variable, die ähnlich ihrem Inhalt ausgegeben werden kann.
+zuzugreifen. Vielmehr ist die \PName{Bezeichnung} eine Ergänzung zum Inhalt
+einer Variable, die ähnlich ihrem Inhalt ausgegeben werden kann.
Mit der Anweisung \Macro{addtoreffields} kann die Variable \PName{Name} der
-Geschäftszeile\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}\textnote{Geschäftszeile}
+Geschäftszeile\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}\textnote{Geschäftszeile}
(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}) hinzugefügt werden. Dabei wird die
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}) hinzugefügt werden. Dabei wird die
\PName{Bezeichnung} und der Inhalt der Variablen an das Ende der
-Geschäftszeile angehängt, falls ihr Inhalt nicht leer ist. Die Sternvariante
-\Macro{newkomavar*} entspricht der Variante ohne Stern mit anschließendem
+Geschäftszeile angehängt, falls ihr Inhalt nicht leer ist. Die Sternvariante
+\Macro{newkomavar*} entspricht der Variante ohne Stern mit anschließendem
Aufruf der Anweisung \Macro{addtoreffields}. Bei der Sternvariante wird die
-Variable also automatisch zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt.
+Variable also automatisch zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie benötigen in der Geschäftszeile ein zusätzliches Feld
- für eine Durchwahl. Sie können das Feld dann wahlweise mit
+ Angenommen, Sie benötigen in der Geschäftszeile ein zusätzliches Feld
+ für eine Durchwahl. Sie können das Feld dann wahlweise mit
\begin{lstcode}
\newkomavar[Durchwahl]{myphone}
\addtoreffields{myphone}
\end{lstcode}
- oder kürzer mit
+ oder kürzer mit
\begin{lstcode}
\newkomavar*[Durchwahl]{myphone}
\end{lstcode}
definieren.
\end{Example}
-Im\textnote{Achtung!} Fall, dass eine Variable für die Geschäftszeile
-definiert wird, sollten Sie immer eine Bezeichnung dafür angeben.
+Im\textnote{Achtung!} Fall, dass eine Variable für die Geschäftszeile
+definiert wird, sollten Sie immer eine Bezeichnung dafür angeben.
-Mit der Anweisung \Macro{removereffields} können alle Variablen aus der
-Geschäftszeile entfernt werden. Dies betrifft auch die in der Klasse
-vordefinierten Variablen. Die Geschäftszeile ist dann leer. Sie können dies
+Mit der Anweisung \Macro{removereffields} können alle Variablen aus der
+Geschäftszeile entfernt werden. Dies betrifft auch die in der Klasse
+vordefinierten Variablen. Die Geschäftszeile ist dann leer. Sie können dies
beispielsweise nutzen, wenn Sie die Reihenfolge der Variablen in der
-Geschäftszeile ändern wollen.
+Geschäftszeile ändern wollen.
Zur Wiederherstellung der Reihenfolge der vordefinierten Variablen in der
-Geschäftszeile dient \Macro{defaultreffields}. Dabei werden auch alle
-selbst definierten Variablen aus der Geschäftszeile entfernt.
+Geschäftszeile dient \Macro{defaultreffields}. Dabei werden auch alle
+selbst definierten Variablen aus der Geschäftszeile entfernt.
-Das\textnote{Achtung!} Datum sollte der Geschäftszeile nicht über die
-Anweisung \Macro{addtoreffields} hinzugefügt werden. Stattdessen stellt man
+Das\textnote{Achtung!} Datum sollte der Geschäftszeile nicht über die
+Anweisung \Macro{addtoreffields} hinzugefügt werden. Stattdessen stellt man
mit Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{dateleft}\\
\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{dateright}\\
@@ -1322,9 +1338,9 @@ mit Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}%
\IndexOption{refline~=\textKValue{dateleft}}%
\IndexOption{refline~=\textKValue{dateright}}%
\IndexOption{refline~=\textKValue{nodate}} ein, ob das Datum links, rechts oder
-gar nicht in der Geschäftszeile erscheinen soll. Diese Einstellungen haben
-darüber hinaus auch einen Einfluss auf die Position des Datums, wenn gar keine
-Geschäftszeile verwendet wird.%
+gar nicht in der Geschäftszeile erscheinen soll. Diese Einstellungen haben
+darüber hinaus auch einen Einfluss auf die Position des Datums, wenn gar keine
+Geschäftszeile verwendet wird.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1338,22 +1354,22 @@ Die Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar} und
eine Sternvariante gibt oder die ein optionales Argument besitzen, nicht voll
expandierbar. Bei Verwendung innerhalb von
\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth},
-\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} oder ähnlichen
+\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} oder ähnlichen
Anweisungen muss dennoch kein \Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect} vorangestellt
-werden. Selbstverständlich gilt dies bei Verwendung von
+werden. Selbstverständlich gilt dies bei Verwendung von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
-\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} auch für
+\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} auch für
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}). Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!}
-können die Anweisungen nicht innerhalb von
+können die Anweisungen nicht innerhalb von
\Macro{MakeUppercase}\important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase}
-und ähnlichen Anweisungen verwendet werden, die direkten Einfluss auf ihr
-Argument haben. Diese Anweisungen können jedoch als optionales Argument
-angegeben werden. So erhält man beispielsweise den Inhalt einer Variable in
-Großbuchstaben mit:
-\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=»«]
- \usekomavar[\MakeUppercase]{»\PName{Name}«}
+und ähnlichen Anweisungen verwendet werden, die direkten Einfluss auf ihr
+Argument haben. Diese Anweisungen können jedoch als optionales Argument
+angegeben werden. So erhält man beispielsweise den Inhalt einer Variable in
+Großbuchstaben mit:
+\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=><]
+ \usekomavar[\MakeUppercase]{>\PName{Name}<}
\end{lstcode}
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1363,24 +1379,54 @@ Großbuchstaben mit:
\Macro{ifkomavarempty}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Wahr}\Parameter{Falsch}
\Macro{ifkomavarempty*}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Wahr}\Parameter{Falsch}
\end{Declaration}
-Für die exakte Funktion ist wichtig, dass der Inhalt der Variablen soweit
-expandiert wird, wie dies mit \Macro{edef} möglich ist. Bleiben dabei
-Leerzeichen oder unexpandierbare Makros wie \Macro{relax} übrig, so gilt der
+Für die exakte Funktion ist wichtig, dass der Inhalt der Variablen soweit
+expandiert wird, wie dies mit \Macro{edef} möglich ist. Bleiben dabei
+Leerzeichen oder unexpandierbare Makros wie \Macro{relax} übrig, so gilt der
Inhalt auch dann als nicht leer, wenn die Verwendung der Variablen zu keiner
-Ausgabe führen würde.
+Ausgabe führen würde.
Auch\textnote{Achtung!} diese Anweisung kann nicht innerhalb von
-\Macro{MakeUppercase} oder ähnlichen Anweisungen verwendet werden. Sie ist
+\Macro{MakeUppercase} oder ähnlichen Anweisungen verwendet werden. Sie ist
jedoch robust genug, um beispielsweise als Argument von
\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markboth} oder \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote} zu
-funktionieren.
-%
+funktionieren.%
+\EndIndexGroup
+
+
+\begin{Declaration}
+ \Macro{foreachkomavar}\Parameter{Variablenliste}\Parameter{Befehl}
+ \Macro{foreachnonemptykomavar}\Parameter{Variablenliste}\Parameter{Befehl}
+ \Macro{foreachemptykomavar}\Parameter{Variablenliste}\Parameter{Befehl}
+ \Macro{foreachkomavarifempty}\Parameter{Variablenliste}
+ \Parameter{Dann-Befehl}\Parameter{Sonst-Befehl}
+\end{Declaration}
+Mit\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} der Anweisung
+\Macro{foreachkomavar} wird der angegebene \PName{Befehl} für jede Variable
+aus der durch Komma separierten \PName{Variablenliste} ausgeführt. Dabei wird
+der Name der jeweiligen Variablen als Argument an den \PName{Befehl}
+angehängt.
+
+Die Anweisung \Macro{foreachnonemptykomavar} führt im Unterschied dazu
+\PName{Befehl} nur aus, wenn die Variable im Sinne von
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifkomavarempty} nicht leer ist. Leere Variablen in der
+\PName{Variablenliste} haben dagegen keine Auswirkungen.
+
+Dagegen führt \Macro{foreachemptykomavar} den \PName{Befehl} aus, wenn die
+Variable im Sinne von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifkomavarempty} leer ist. Nicht
+leere Variablen in der \PName{Variablenliste} haben entsprechend keine
+Auswirkungen.
+
+Die Anweisung \Macro{foreachkomavarifempty} ist quasi eine Verschmelzung
+beider vorgenannten. Sie führt \PName{Dann-Befehl} für alle leeren Variablen
+aus, während \PName{Sonst-Befehl} für die nicht leeren Variablen zur Anwendung
+kommt. Wie bei \PName{Befehl} wird in beiden Fällen der Name der jeweiligen
+Variable als Argument angehängt.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Ergänzende Informationen zu den Seitenstilen}
+\section{Ergänzende Informationen zu den Seitenstilen}
\seclabel{pagestyleatscrletter}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}
@@ -1397,18 +1443,18 @@ funktionieren.
\BeginIndex{}{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}
In\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrletter}} \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} wurde
-erklärt, dass man \File{lco}-Dateien direkt über \Macro{documentclass} laden
-kann. Für \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrlttr2}} wurde auf diese
-Möglichkeit verzichtet.
+erklärt, dass man \File{lco}-Dateien direkt über \Macro{documentclass} laden
+kann. Für \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrlttr2}} wurde auf diese
+Möglichkeit verzichtet.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{Name}
\Macro{LoadLetterOptions}\Parameter{Liste von Namen}
\end{Declaration}
-Während für \Class{scrlttr2} lediglich empfohlen wird, \File{lco}-Dateien über
+Während für \Class{scrlttr2} lediglich empfohlen wird, \File{lco}-Dateien über
\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOption} oder
-\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions} zu laden, ist dies für
-\Package{scrletter} zwingend. Natürlich können die \File{lco}-Dateien auch
+\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions} zu laden, ist dies für
+\Package{scrletter} zwingend. Natürlich können die \File{lco}-Dateien auch
erst nach \Package{scrletter} geladen werden.
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1418,7 +1464,7 @@ erst nach \Package{scrletter} geladen werden.
\fi
-\section{\File{lco}-Dateien für fortgeschrittene Anwender}
+\section{\File{lco}-Dateien für fortgeschrittene Anwender}
\seclabel{lcoFile}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{File}{lco}
@@ -1428,55 +1474,55 @@ erst nach \Package{scrletter} geladen werden.
\BeginIndex{}{Papier>Format}%
Obwohl jedes von \hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}%
\IndexPackage{typearea} einstellbare Format verwendbar ist, kann es bei der
-Ausgabe der ersten Briefseite mit manchen Formaten zu unerwünschten
+Ausgabe der ersten Briefseite mit manchen Formaten zu unerwünschten
Ergebnissen kommen. Leider gibt es
-keine allgemein gültigen Regeln, um die Position von Anschriftfeldern und
-Ähnlichem für beliebige Papierformate zu berechnen. Vielmehr werden für
-unterschiedliche Papierformate unterschiedliche Parameter benötigt.%
+keine allgemein gültigen Regeln, um die Position von Anschriftfeldern und
+Ähnlichem für beliebige Papierformate zu berechnen. Vielmehr werden für
+unterschiedliche Papierformate unterschiedliche Parameter benötigt.%
-%\subsection{Überwachung des Papierformats}
+%\subsection{Ãœberwachung des Papierformats}
%\seclabel{papersize}
-Derzeit existieren Parametersätze und \File{lco}-Dateien für A4-Papier und
+Derzeit existieren Parametersätze und \File{lco}-Dateien für A4-Papier und
letter-Papier. Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} versteht aber theoretisch sehr viel
-mehr Papierformate. Daher ist es notwendig zu überwachen, ob die korrekte
-Papiergröße eingestellt ist. Dies gilt umso mehr, wenn \Package{scrletter}
-verwendet wird, da die Einstellung der Papiergröße dann in erster Linie von
-der verwendeten Klasse abhängt.
+mehr Papierformate. Daher ist es notwendig zu überwachen, ob die korrekte
+Papiergröße eingestellt ist. Dies gilt umso mehr, wenn \Package{scrletter}
+verwendet wird, da die Einstellung der Papiergröße dann in erster Linie von
+der verwendeten Klasse abhängt.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}%
- \Parameter{Optionsname}\Parameter{Papiergröße}
+ \Parameter{Optionsname}\Parameter{Papiergröße}
\end{Declaration}
Damit man bei Verwendung einer in der \File{lco}-Datei nicht vorgesehenen
-\PName{Papiergröße} zumindest gewarnt wird, sind in den
+\PName{Papiergröße} zumindest gewarnt wird, sind in den
mit \KOMAScript{} ausgelieferten \File{lco}-Dateien
\Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}-Anweisungen zu finden. Als erstes Argument
-wird dabei der Name der \File{lco}-Datei ohne die Endung »\File{.lco}«
-übergeben. Als zweites Argument wird die Papiergröße übergeben, für die diese
+wird dabei der Name der \File{lco}-Datei ohne die Endung »\File{.lco}«
+übergeben. Als zweites Argument wird die Papiergröße übergeben, für die diese
\File{lco}-Datei gedacht ist.
Werden nacheinander mehrere \File{lco}-Dateien geladen, so kann jede dieser
\File{lco}-Dateien eine Anweisung \Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}
enthalten. Innerhalb von \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} wird
-jedoch nur auf die jeweils letzte angegebene \PName{Papiergröße} geprüft. Wie
-das nachfolgende Beispiel zeigt, ist es daher für den versierten Anwender
-leicht möglich, \File{lco}-Dateien mit Parametersätzen für andere
+jedoch nur auf die jeweils letzte angegebene \PName{Papiergröße} geprüft. Wie
+das nachfolgende Beispiel zeigt, ist es daher für den versierten Anwender
+leicht möglich, \File{lco}-Dateien mit Parametersätzen für andere
Papierformate zu schreiben. %
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung!!!
Wer allerdings nicht vor hat, selbst solche \File{lco}-Dateien zu schreiben,
-der kann die Erklärung zu dieser Anweisung gleich wieder vergessen und auch
-das Beispiel überspringen.%
+der kann die Erklärung zu dieser Anweisung gleich wieder vergessen und auch
+das Beispiel überspringen.%
\fi
\begin{Example}
Nehmen wir einmal an, dass Sie A5-Papier in normaler Ausrichtung, also
- hochkant oder portrait, für Ihre Briefe verwenden. Nehmen wir weiter an,
- dass Sie diese in normale Fensterbriefumschläge im Format C6 stecken. Damit
- wäre prinzipiell die Position des Adressfeldes die gleiche wie bei einem
+ hochkant oder portrait, für Ihre Briefe verwenden. Nehmen wir weiter an,
+ dass Sie diese in normale Fensterbriefumschläge im Format C6 stecken. Damit
+ wäre prinzipiell die Position des Adressfeldes die gleiche wie bei einem
normalen Brief in A4 nach DIN. Der Unterschied besteht im Wesentlichen
darin, dass das A5-Papier nur einmal gefaltet werden muss. Sie wollen
deshalb verhindern, dass die obere und die untere Faltmarke gesetzt
- wird. Dies erreichen Sie beispielsweise, indem Sie die Marken außerhalb des
+ wird. Dies erreichen Sie beispielsweise, indem Sie die Marken außerhalb des
Papiers platzieren.
\begin{lstcode}
\ProvidesFile{a5.lco}
@@ -1486,18 +1532,18 @@ das Beispiel überspringen.%
\setplength{bfoldmarkvpos}{\paperheight}
\endinput
\end{lstcode}
- Eleganter wäre es natürlich, die Marken mit Hilfe der Option
- \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks} abzuschalten. Außerdem muss auch noch
- die Position des Seitenfußes, also die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstfootvpos},
- angepasst werden. Ich überlasse es dem Leser, dafür einen geeigneten Wert zu
+ Eleganter wäre es natürlich, die Marken mit Hilfe der Option
+ \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks} abzuschalten. Außerdem muss auch noch
+ die Position des Seitenfußes, also die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstfootvpos},
+ angepasst werden. Ich überlasse es dem Leser, dafür einen geeigneten Wert zu
ermitteln. Mit einer solchen \File{lco}-Datei ist es lediglich wichtig, dass
andere \File{lco}-Dateioptionen wie \File{SN} vor dem Laden von
- »\File{a5.lco}«, angegeben werden.
+ »\File{a5.lco}«, angegeben werden.
\end{Example}
%
\EndIndexGroup%
\EndIndexGroup%
-\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
+\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
%\subsection{Positionen sichtbar machen}
@@ -1508,19 +1554,19 @@ das Beispiel überspringen.%
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{Option}{visualize}%
Wenn man selbst \File{lco}-Dateien entwickelt, beispielsweise um die
-Positionen von verschiedenen Feldern des Briefbogens an eigene Wünsche oder
+Positionen von verschiedenen Feldern des Briefbogens an eigene Wünsche oder
Notwendigkeiten anzupassen, ist es hilfreich, wenn zumindest einige Elemente
-direkt sichtbar gemacht werden können. Zu diesem Zweck existiert die
+direkt sichtbar gemacht werden können. Zu diesem Zweck existiert die
\File{lco}-Datei
\File{visualize.lco}\ChangedAt{v3.04}{\Class{scrlttr2}}. Diese kann wie jede
\File{lco}-Datei geladen werden. Allerdings ist das Laden dieser \emph{Letter
- Class Option} auf die Dokumentpräambel beschränkt und seine Auswirkungen
-können nicht wieder rückgängig gemacht werden. Die \File{lco}-Datei bedient
+ Class Option} auf die Dokumentpräambel beschränkt und seine Auswirkungen
+können nicht wieder rückgängig gemacht werden. Die \File{lco}-Datei bedient
sich der Pakete
\Package{eso-pic}\IndexPackage{eso-pic}%
\important[i]{\Package{eso-pic}\\\Package{graphicx}}
und \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx}, die nicht zu \KOMAScript{}
-gehören.
+gehören.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{showfields}\Parameter{Feldliste}
@@ -1528,27 +1574,27 @@ gehören.
Mit dieser Anweisung kann bei Verwendung von \File{visualize.lco} die
Visualisierung von Feldern des Briefbogens aktiviert werden. Das Argument
\PName{Feldliste} ist dabei eine durch Komma separierte Liste der Feldern, die
-visualisiert werden sollen. Folgende Felder werden derzeit unterstützt:
+visualisiert werden sollen. Folgende Felder werden derzeit unterstützt:
\begin{labeling}[~--]{\PValue{location}}
-\item[\PValue{test}] ist ein Testfeld der Größe 10\Unit{cm} auf 15\Unit{cm},
+\item[\PValue{test}] ist ein Testfeld der Größe 10\Unit{cm} auf 15\Unit{cm},
das jeweils 1\Unit{cm} vom oberen und linken Papierrand entfernt ist. Dieses
- Testfeld existiert zu Debuggingzwecken. Es dient als Vergleichsmaß für den
- Fall, dass im Dokumenterstellungsprozess die Maße verfälscht werden.
+ Testfeld existiert zu Debuggingzwecken. Es dient als Vergleichsmaß für den
+ Fall, dass im Dokumenterstellungsprozess die Maße verfälscht werden.
\item[\PValue{head}] ist der Kopfbereich des Briefbogens. Es handelt sich hier
um ein nach unten offenes Feld.
-\item[\PValue{foot}] ist der Fußbereich des Briefbogens. Es handelt sich hier
+\item[\PValue{foot}] ist der Fußbereich des Briefbogens. Es handelt sich hier
um ein nach unten offenes Feld.
\item[\PValue{address}] ist das Anschriftfenster.
-\item[\PValue{location}] ist das Feld der Absenderergänzung.
-\item[\PValue{refline}] ist die Geschäftszeile. Es handelt sich hier um ein
+\item[\PValue{location}] ist das Feld der Absenderergänzung.
+\item[\PValue{refline}] ist die Geschäftszeile. Es handelt sich hier um ein
nach unten offenes Feld.
\end{labeling}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{field}\LabelFontElement{field}%
Mit den Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
\FontElement{field}\important{\FontElement{field}} kann die Farbe der
-Visualisierung geändert werden. Voreingestellt ist \Macro{normalcolor}.%
+Visualisierung geändert werden. Voreingestellt ist \Macro{normalcolor}.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{field}%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1563,19 +1609,19 @@ durch Rahmen\important{\PValue{frame}} markiert. Dies entspricht dem
\PName{Stil} \PValue{frame}. Nach unten offene Felder werden dabei nicht
komplett umrahmt, sondern unten offen mit kleinen Pfeilen nach unten
dargestellt. Als Alternative\important{\PValue{rule}} hierzu steht auch der
-\PName{Stil} \PValue{rule} zur Verfügung. Dabei wird das Feld farbig
+\PName{Stil} \PValue{rule} zur Verfügung. Dabei wird das Feld farbig
hinterlegt. Hierbei kann nicht zwischen geschlossenen und nach unten offenen
Feldern unterschieden werden. Stattdessen werden nach unten offene Felder mit
-einer Mindesthöhe dargestellt. Der dritte\important{\PValue{edges}} verfügbare
+einer Mindesthöhe dargestellt. Der dritte\important{\PValue{edges}} verfügbare
\PName{Stil} ist \PValue{edges}. Dabei werden die Ecken der Felder
markiert. Bei nach unten offenen Feldern entfallen dabei die unteren
-Eckmarkierungen. Die Größe der Eckmarkierungen ist im Makro \Macro{edgesize}
+Eckmarkierungen. Die Größe der Eckmarkierungen ist im Makro \Macro{edgesize}
abgelegt und mit 1\Unit{ex} voreingestellt.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{showenvelope}\AParameter{Breite\textup{,}Höhe}
+ \Macro{showenvelope}\AParameter{Breite\textup{,}Höhe}
\AParameter{HOffset\textup{,}VOffset}
\OParameter{Zusatz}
\Macro{showISOenvelope}\Parameter{Format}\OParameter{Zusatz}
@@ -1585,57 +1631,57 @@ abgelegt und mit 1\Unit{ex} voreingestellt.%
\end{Declaration}
Diese Anweisungen dienen bei Verwendung von \File{visualize.lco} dazu, eine
Seite mit einer Zeichnung eines Umschlags auszugeben. Der Umschlag wird dabei
-immer um 90° gedreht auf einer eigenen Seite im Maßstab~1:1 ausgegeben. Das
-Anschriftfenster wird automatisch aus den aktuellen Daten für die
+immer um 90° gedreht auf einer eigenen Seite im Maßstab~1:1 ausgegeben. Das
+Anschriftfenster wird automatisch aus den aktuellen Daten für die
Anschriftposition auf dem Briefbogen: \PLength{toaddrvpos},
\PLength{toaddrheight}, \PLength{toaddrwidth} und \PLength{toaddrhpos},
-erzeugt. Hierfür ist es notwendig zu wissen, um welchen Wert der gefaltete
-Briefbogen auf jeder Seite kleiner als die \PName{Breite} und \PName{Höhe} des
+erzeugt. Hierfür ist es notwendig zu wissen, um welchen Wert der gefaltete
+Briefbogen auf jeder Seite kleiner als die \PName{Breite} und \PName{Höhe} des
Briefbogens ist. Sind diese beiden Werte, \PName{HOffset} und \PName{VOffset},
bei \Macro{showenvelope} nicht angegeben, so wird versucht, sie aus den
-Faltmarken und der Papiergröße selbst zu berechnen.
+Faltmarken und der Papiergröße selbst zu berechnen.
Die Anweisungen \Macro{showISOenvelope}, \Macro{showUScommercial} und
\Macro{showUScheck} basieren auf \Macro{showenvelope}. Mit
\Macro{showISOenvelope} kann ein ISO-Umschlag im \PName{Format} C4, C5, C5/6,
DL\iffree{ (auch bekannt als C5/6)}{} oder C6 erzeugt werden. Mit
\Macro{showUScommercial} wird hingegen ein US-Commercial-Umschlag im
-\PName{Format} 9 oder 10 ausgegeben. \Macro{showUScheck} schließlich ist für
-Umschläge im US-Check-Format zuständig.
+\PName{Format} 9 oder 10 ausgegeben. \Macro{showUScheck} schließlich ist für
+Umschläge im US-Check-Format zuständig.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{letter}\LabelFontElement{letter}%
Innerhalb des Umschlags wird die Lage des Briefbogens gestrichelt
angedeutet. Die dabei verwendete Farbe kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont}
(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
-\FontElement{letter}\important{\FontElement{letter}} verändert
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
+\FontElement{letter}\important{\FontElement{letter}} verändert
werden. Voreingestellt ist \Macro{normalcolor}.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{letter}
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{measure}\LabelFontElement{measure}%
-Die Umschlagzeichnung wird automatisch bemaßt. Die Farbe der Bemaßung und die
-Größe deren Beschriftung kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
+Die Umschlagzeichnung wird automatisch bemaßt. Die Farbe der Bemaßung und die
+Größe deren Beschriftung kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont}
(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
-\FontElement{measure}\important{\FontElement{measure}} verändert
-werden. Voreingestellt ist hier \Macro{normalcolor}. Die Bemaßung erfolgt in
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element
+\FontElement{measure}\important{\FontElement{measure}} verändert
+werden. Voreingestellt ist hier \Macro{normalcolor}. Die Bemaßung erfolgt in
Vielfachen von \Length{unitlength} mit einer maximalen Genauigkeit von
$1/\Macro{unitfactor}$, wobei die Genauigkeit der \TeX-Arithmetik die
-tatsächliche Grenze darstellt. Voreingestellt ist 1. Eine Umdefinierung ist
-mit \Macro{renewcommand} möglich.%
+tatsächliche Grenze darstellt. Voreingestellt ist 1. Eine Umdefinierung ist
+mit \Macro{renewcommand} möglich.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{measure}
\begin{Example}
- Es wird ein Beispielbrief im Format ISO~A4 erzeugt. Die unterstützten Felder
- sollen zwecks Überprüfung ihrer Position mit gelben Rahmenlinien markiert
+ Es wird ein Beispielbrief im Format ISO~A4 erzeugt. Die unterstützten Felder
+ sollen zwecks Überprüfung ihrer Position mit gelben Rahmenlinien markiert
werden. Des Weiteren soll die Position des Fensters in einem Umschlag der
- Größe~DL mit Hilfe einer Zeichnung überprüft werden. Die Maßlinien in dieser
- Zeichnung sollen rot und die Maßzahlen in kleinerer Schrift ausgegeben
- werden, wobei die Maßzahlen in cm mit einer Genauigkeit von 1\Unit{mm}
+ Größe~DL mit Hilfe einer Zeichnung überprüft werden. Die Maßlinien in dieser
+ Zeichnung sollen rot und die Maßzahlen in kleinerer Schrift ausgegeben
+ werden, wobei die Maßzahlen in cm mit einer Genauigkeit von 1\Unit{mm}
ausgegeben werden sollen. Der gestrichelte Briefbogen im Umschlag soll
- hingegen grün eingefärbt werden.
+ hingegen grün eingefärbt werden.
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[visualize]{scrlttr2}
\usepackage{xcolor}
@@ -1667,10 +1713,10 @@ mit \Macro{renewcommand} möglich.%
wird die Zeichnung des Umschlags ausgegeben.
\end{Example}
-Bezüglich der Bemaßung ist zu beachten, dass ungünstige Kombinationen von
+Bezüglich der Bemaßung ist zu beachten, dass ungünstige Kombinationen von
\Length{unitlength} und \Macro{unitfactor} sehr schnell einen \TeX-Fehler der
Art \emph{arithmetic overflow} provozieren. Ebenso kann es geschehen, dass
-ausgegebene Maßzahlen geringfügig vom tatsächlichen Wert abweichen. Beides
+ausgegebene Maßzahlen geringfügig vom tatsächlichen Wert abweichen. Beides
sind keine Fehler von \Option{visualize}, sondern lediglich
Implementierungsgrenzen.
%
@@ -1681,22 +1727,22 @@ Implementierungsgrenzen.
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Unterstützung verschiedener Sprachen}
+\section{Unterstützung verschiedener Sprachen}
\seclabel{languages}%
\BeginIndexGroup%
\BeginIndex{}{Sprachen}%
-Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} und das Paket \Package{scrletter} unterstützen
-viele Sprachen. Dazu zählen Deutsch (\PValue{german} für alte deutsche
-Rechtschreibung, \PValue{ngerman} für neue deutsche Rechtschreibung,
-\PValue{austrian} für Österreichisch mit alter deutscher Rechtschreibung und
-\PValue{naustrian}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}} für Österreichisch mit
+Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} und das Paket \Package{scrletter} unterstützen
+viele Sprachen. Dazu zählen Deutsch (\PValue{german} für alte deutsche
+Rechtschreibung, \PValue{ngerman} für neue deutsche Rechtschreibung,
+\PValue{austrian} für Österreichisch mit alter deutscher Rechtschreibung und
+\PValue{naustrian}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}} für Österreichisch mit
neuer deutscher Rechtschreibung),
-\PValue{nswissgerman}\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Class{scrlttr2}} für Schweizer Deutsch
-mit neuer Rechtschreibung und \PValue{swissgerman} für Schweizer Deutsch mit
+\PValue{nswissgerman}\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Class{scrlttr2}} für Schweizer Deutsch
+mit neuer Rechtschreibung und \PValue{swissgerman} für Schweizer Deutsch mit
alter Rechtschreibung, Englisch (unter anderem \PValue{english} ohne Angabe,
ob amerikanisches oder britisches Englisch, \PValue{american} und
-\PValue{USenglish} für Amerikanisch, \PValue{british} und \PValue{UKenglish}
-für Britisch), Französisch, Italienisch, Spanisch, Niederländisch, Kroatisch,
+\PValue{USenglish} für Amerikanisch, \PValue{british} und \PValue{UKenglish}
+für Britisch), Französisch, Italienisch, Spanisch, Niederländisch, Kroatisch,
Finnisch, Norwegisch\ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Class{scrlttr2}},
Schwedisch\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}},
Polnisch\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Class{scrlttr2}},
@@ -1710,7 +1756,7 @@ und \Package{ngerman}\IndexPackage{ngerman} (siehe \cite{package:ngerman})
besitzen diese Anweisung ebenfalls. In der Regel erfolgt eine
Sprachumschaltung jedoch bereits aufgrund des Ladens eines solchen Pakets.
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext!!!
-Näheres entnehmen Sie bitte der jeweiligen Anleitung.
+Näheres entnehmen Sie bitte der jeweiligen Anleitung.
\fi
Erlauben\textnote{Achtung!} Sie mir noch einen Hinweis zu den
@@ -1718,20 +1764,20 @@ Sprachumschaltpaketen. Das Paket
\Package{french}\IndexPackage{french}\important{\Package{french}} (siehe
\cite{package:french}) nimmt neben der Umdefinierung der Begriffe aus
\autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms},
-\autopageref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms} weitere Änderungen vor. So
+\autopageref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms} weitere Änderungen vor. So
definiert es etwa die Anweisung \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} um. Dabei geht
es einfach davon aus, dass \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} immer wie in der
Standardbriefklasse \Class{letter} definiert ist. Dies ist bei \KOMAScript{}
-jedoch nicht der Fall. Das Paket \Package{french} zerstört deshalb die
+jedoch nicht der Fall. Das Paket \Package{french} zerstört deshalb die
Definition und arbeitet nicht korrekt mir \KOMAScript{} zusammen. Ich
betrachte dies als Fehler des Pakets \Package{french}, der obwohl schon vor
Jahrzehnten gemeldet, leider nie beseitigt wurde.
-Wird das Paket \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} für die
-Umschaltung auf die Sprache verwendet, können vereinzelt ebenfalls
-Probleme auftreten. Bei \Package{babel} lassen sich problematisch Änderungen
+Wird das Paket \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} für die
+Umschaltung auf die Sprache verwendet, können vereinzelt ebenfalls
+Probleme auftreten. Bei \Package{babel} lassen sich problematisch Änderungen
einer Sprache jedoch meist gezielt abschalten.%
-\iffalse% Das ist eigentlich überholt!
+\iffalse% Das ist eigentlich überholt!
\ Ist das Paket \Package{french} nicht installiert, ergibt sich das Problem
mit \Package{babel} nicht. Ebenfalls existiert das Problem normalerweise
nicht, wenn man bei \Package{babel} anstelle der Sprache \PValue{french}
@@ -1739,7 +1785,7 @@ einer Sprache jedoch meist gezielt abschalten.%
verwendet.
\fi
-\iffalse% Das ist ebenfalls überholt!
+\iffalse% Das ist ebenfalls überholt!
Mit Babel ab Version 3.7j tritt dieses Problem jedoch nur noch auf, wenn per
Option explizit angegeben wird, dass \Package{babel} das
\Package{french}-Paket verwenden soll.
@@ -1753,10 +1799,10 @@ Option explizit angegeben wird, dass \Package{babel} das
\begin{lstcode}
\usepackage[...,francais,...]{babel}
\end{lstcode}
- französische Sprache auszuwählen.
+ französische Sprache auszuwählen.
\iffalse %
Gegebenenfalls ist dann aber trotzdem mit
- \Macro{selectlanguage}\PParameter{french} auf Französisch umzuschalten.%
+ \Macro{selectlanguage}\PParameter{french} auf Französisch umzuschalten.%
\fi%
\else %
\space bei \Package{babel} die Option \Option{frenchb}.%
@@ -1766,15 +1812,15 @@ Option explizit angegeben wird, dass \Package{babel} das
\iftrue
%\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}%
- Es ist nicht auszuschließen, dass mit anderen Sprachen und Paketen ähnliche
+ Es ist nicht auszuschließen, dass mit anderen Sprachen und Paketen ähnliche
Probleme auf"|treten.
% \iffalse
\iftrue
- Für Deutsch sind solche Probleme jedoch nicht bekannt und treten weder
+ Für Deutsch sind solche Probleme jedoch nicht bekannt und treten weder
mit den Paketen \Package{german}\IndexPackage{german} oder
\Package{ngerman}\IndexPackage{ngerman} noch mit \Package{babel} auf.
\else
- Für Deutsch treten solche Probleme mit den Paketen
+ Für Deutsch treten solche Probleme mit den Paketen
\Package{german}\IndexPackage{german},
\Package{ngerman}\IndexPackage{ngerman} oder \Package{babel} jedoch nicht
auf.
@@ -1804,19 +1850,19 @@ Option explizit angegeben wird, dass \Package{babel} das
\Macro{wwwname}
\Macro{bankname}
\end{Declaration}
-Die aufgeführten Anweisungen enthalten die jeweiligen sprachtypischen
+Die aufgeführten Anweisungen enthalten die jeweiligen sprachtypischen
Begriffe. Diese\important[i]{%
\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname}\\
\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname}\\
- \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}} können für die Realisierung einer
+ \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}} können für die Realisierung einer
weiteren Sprache oder aber auch zur eigenen freien Gestaltung wie in
-\autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport} erklärt angepasst werden. Von
-\KOMAScript{} werden die Begriffe erst nach der Präambel, also bei
+\autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport} erklärt angepasst werden. Von
+\KOMAScript{} werden die Begriffe erst nach der Präambel, also bei
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} gesetzt. Sie sind daher vorher nicht
-verfügbar und können vorher auch nicht geändert werden. In
+verfügbar und können vorher auch nicht geändert werden. In
\autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms},
\autopageref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms} sind die Voreinstellungen
-für \Option{english} und \Option{ngerman} zu finden.%
+für \Option{english} und \Option{ngerman} zu finden.%
\EndIndexGroup
%\iffree{}{\clearpage}% Siehe Kommentar zur Tabelle
@@ -1850,10 +1896,10 @@ für \Option{english} und \Option{ngerman} zu finden.%
\Macro{captionsUKenglish}
\Macro{captionsUSenglish}
\end{Declaration}
-Wird die Sprache eines Briefes gewechselt, so werden über diese
+Wird die Sprache eines Briefes gewechselt, so werden über diese
Anweisungen die Begriffe aus \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms},
\autopageref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms} umdefiniert. Sollte das
-verwendete Sprachumschaltpaket dies nicht unterstützen, so können obige
+verwendete Sprachumschaltpaket dies nicht unterstützen, so können obige
Anweisungen notfalls auch direkt verwendet werden.%
%
\begin{table}%
@@ -1863,10 +1909,10 @@ Anweisungen notfalls auch direkt verwendet werden.%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
%\caption
\begin{captionbeside}[{%
- Voreinstellungen für die sprachabhängigen Begriffe%
+ Voreinstellungen für die sprachabhängigen Begriffe%
}]{%
Voreinstellungen
- für die sprachabhängigen Begriffe bei \iffalse Verwendung der \else
+ für die sprachabhängigen Begriffe bei \iffalse Verwendung der \else
den \fi Sprachen
\Option{english} und \Option{ngerman} soweit nicht durch die Pakete
zur Sprachumschaltung bereits definiert%
@@ -1899,8 +1945,8 @@ Anweisungen notfalls auch direkt verwendet werden.%
\deffootnote{1em}{1em}{1\ }% brutal aber effektiv
\footnotetext[1000]{Diese Begriffe werden normalerweise bereits von
Sprachpaketen wie \Package{babel} definiert und dann von
- \KOMAScript{} nicht überschrieben. Abweichungen im Wortlaut sind
- daher möglich und der Anleitung des verwendeten Sprachpakets zu
+ \KOMAScript{} nicht überschrieben. Abweichungen im Wortlaut sind
+ daher möglich und der Anleitung des verwendeten Sprachpakets zu
entnehmen.}
\end{captionbeside}
\end{minipage}
@@ -1943,7 +1989,7 @@ Anweisungen notfalls auch direkt verwendet werden.%
Je nach verwendeter Sprache werden auch die Datumsangaben\Index{Datum} des
nummerischen Datums (siehe Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.numericaldate} in
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.numericaldate})
-in unterschiedlicher Form umgesetzt. Die genauen Angaben können
+in unterschiedlicher Form umgesetzt. Die genauen Angaben können
\autoref{tab:date}, \autopageref{tab:date} entnommen werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -1955,7 +2001,7 @@ in unterschiedlicher Form umgesetzt. Die genauen Angaben können
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
- \begin{captionbeside}{Sprachabhängige Ausgabeformate für das Datum}[l]
+ \begin{captionbeside}{Sprachabhängige Ausgabeformate für das Datum}[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
\toprule
Anweisung & Ausgabebeispiel \\
@@ -2008,17 +2054,17 @@ aktuellen \Class{scrlttr2}}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Class}{scrlettr}
-Die\textnote{Achtung!} alte Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr} wurde mit Einführung
+Die\textnote{Achtung!} alte Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr} wurde mit Einführung
von \Class{scrlttr2} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlttr2}) 2002
obsolet und ist auch nicht mehr Bestandteil von \KOMAScript{}. Wer die Klasse
-oder Informationen dazu dennoch benötigt, findet sie in
+oder Informationen dazu dennoch benötigt, findet sie in
\cite{package:koma-script-obsolete}.
Um den Umstieg von der alten auf die neue Klasse zu erleichtern, existiert mit
-\Option{KOMAold} eine Kompatibilitätseinstellung. Grundsätzlich ist in der
-neuen Klasse die gesamte alte Funktionalität enthalten. Ohne \Option{KOMAold}
+\Option{KOMAold} eine Kompatibilitätseinstellung. Grundsätzlich ist in der
+neuen Klasse die gesamte alte Funktionalität enthalten. Ohne \Option{KOMAold}
ist jedoch die Benutzerschnittstelle eine andere und auch die Voreinstellungen
-stimmen nicht überein. Näheres dazu ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile},
+stimmen nicht überein. Näheres dazu ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile},
\autoref{tab:lcoFiles} zu entnehmen.
\LoadNonFree{scrlttr2-experts}{2}
@@ -2033,16 +2079,16 @@ stimmen nicht überein. Näheres dazu ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile},
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "guide.tex"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Pseudolänge Pseudolängen Rücksendeadresse Faltmarke Briefseite
-% LocalWords: Sternvariante Geschäftszeile Testfeld Kopfbereich Vergleichsmaß
-% LocalWords: Dokumenterstellungsprozess Fußbereich Anschriftfenster Falt
-% LocalWords: Absenderergänzung Kundennummer Rechnungsnummer Falzmarken
+% LocalWords: Pseudolänge Pseudolängen Rücksendeadresse Faltmarke Briefseite
+% LocalWords: Sternvariante Geschäftszeile Testfeld Kopfbereich Vergleichsmaß
+% LocalWords: Dokumenterstellungsprozess Fußbereich Anschriftfenster Falt
+% LocalWords: Absenderergänzung Kundennummer Rechnungsnummer Falzmarken
% LocalWords: Sprachumschaltpaketen Standardbriefklasse Seitenstilen
-% LocalWords: Paginierung Paginierungen Papiergröße Anschriftfeldes
-% LocalWords: Versandart Anschriftfensters Anschriftfeld Briefköpfe
-% LocalWords: Variableninhalt Schlussgruß Briefbogenfuß
+% LocalWords: Paginierung Paginierungen Papiergröße Anschriftfeldes
+% LocalWords: Versandart Anschriftfensters Anschriftfeld Briefköpfe
+% LocalWords: Variableninhalt Schlussgruß Briefbogenfuß
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex
index aa710572be..0e558f33bb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrlttr2.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlttr2.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrlttr2 in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrlttr2 in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2.tex}%
- [$Date: 2018-04-26 14:55:38 +0200 (Thu, 26 Apr 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2)]
\chapter{Briefe mit Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} oder Paket \Package{scrletter}}
@@ -56,41 +56,41 @@
\BeginIndex{Class}{scrlttr2}\BeginIndex{Package}{scrletter}%
\BeginIndex{}{Briefe}%
Briefe sind in vielerlei Hinsicht etwas ganz anderes als Artikel, Berichte,
-Bücher oder Ähnliches. Schon allein deshalb gibt es für Briefe ein eigenes
-Kapitel. Aber auch aus weiteren Gründen ist ein eigenes Kapitel für
+Bücher oder Ähnliches. Schon allein deshalb gibt es für Briefe ein eigenes
+Kapitel. Aber auch aus weiteren Gründen ist ein eigenes Kapitel für
\Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} gerechtfertigt.
Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2}\important{\Class{scrlttr2}} wurde 2002 von Grund
auf neu entwickelt. Sie hat daher auch ein komplett anderes Bedienkonzept als
-alle übrigen mir bekannten Klassen. Die neue Art der Bedienung ist
-möglicherweise etwas ungewohnt, bietet jedoch nicht nur dem geübten Anwender
+alle übrigen mir bekannten Klassen. Die neue Art der Bedienung ist
+möglicherweise etwas ungewohnt, bietet jedoch nicht nur dem geübten Anwender
einige Vorteile.
Das Paket \Package{scrletter}\important{\Package{scrletter}}%
-\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrletter}} wiederum verstärkt \KOMAScript{} seit
-Version 3.15. Es stellt die gesamte auf Briefe ausgelegte Funktionalität von
-\Class{scrlttr2} auch für andere Klassen bereit. Empfohlen wird die Verwendung
+\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrletter}} wiederum verstärkt \KOMAScript{} seit
+Version 3.15. Es stellt die gesamte auf Briefe ausgelegte Funktionalität von
+\Class{scrlttr2} auch für andere Klassen bereit. Empfohlen wird die Verwendung
mit einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} oder
-\Class{scrartcl}, die im vorherigen Kapitel erklärt sind. Mit geringfügigen
-Einschränkungen funktioniert \Package{scrletter} aber auch mit den
+\Class{scrartcl}, die im vorherigen Kapitel erklärt sind. Mit geringfügigen
+Einschränkungen funktioniert \Package{scrletter} aber auch mit den
Standardklassen.
-Ausgangspunkt für die Entwicklung von \Package{scrletter} waren einerseits
+Ausgangspunkt für die Entwicklung von \Package{scrletter} waren einerseits
Nachfragen von Anwendern, die Elemente wie
-Gliederungsüberschriften,\textnote{Überschriften, Gleitumgebungen,
+Gliederungsüberschriften,\textnote{Überschriften, Gleitumgebungen,
Verzeichnisse} Gleitumgebungen oder ein Literaturverzeichnis auch in Briefen
-haben wollten. Umgekehrt gab es auch Wünsche nach der Verwendung der Variablen
-von \Class{scrlttr2} in den übrigen \KOMAScript-Klassen. Beides ist durch eine
-Kombination der gewünschten \KOMAScript-Klasse mit \Package{scrletter}
-möglich.
+haben wollten. Umgekehrt gab es auch Wünsche nach der Verwendung der Variablen
+von \Class{scrlttr2} in den übrigen \KOMAScript-Klassen. Beides ist durch eine
+Kombination der gewünschten \KOMAScript-Klasse mit \Package{scrletter}
+möglich.
-Gegenüber der Briefklasse hat das Briefpaket einige, kleine Änderungen, die
+Gegenüber der Briefklasse hat das Briefpaket einige, kleine Änderungen, die
notwendig waren, um Konflikte mit den anderen Klassen zu vermeiden. Diese
betreffen vor allem die Seitenstile und sind explizit dokumentiert (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, ab
\autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}). Wo \Package{scrletter} nicht explizit
-erwähnt ist, gilt dafür alles, was für \Class{scrlttr2} dokumentiert ist, ohne
-Änderung.
+erwähnt ist, gilt dafür alles, was für \Class{scrlttr2} dokumentiert ist, ohne
+Änderung.
\section{Variablen}
@@ -98,52 +98,52 @@ erwähnt ist, gilt dafür alles, was für \Class{scrlttr2} dokumentiert ist, ohne
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Variablen}%
-Neben Optionen, Anweisungen (oder Befehlen), Umgebungen, Zählern und Längen
-wurden in \autoref{cha:maincls} für \KOMAScript{} bereits zusätzlich Elemente
-eingeführt. Eine typische Eigenschaft eines Elements ist seine Schriftart und
-die Möglichkeit, diese zu ändern (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup},
+Neben Optionen, Anweisungen (oder Befehlen), Umgebungen, Zählern und Längen
+wurden in \autoref{cha:maincls} für \KOMAScript{} bereits zusätzlich Elemente
+eingeführt. Eine typische Eigenschaft eines Elements ist seine Schriftart und
+die Möglichkeit, diese zu ändern (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). An dieser Stelle werden nun
-zusätzlich Variablen eingeführt. Variablen haben einen
-Namen\Index{Variablen>Name}\textnote{Namen}, über den sie angesprochen werden,
+zusätzlich Variablen eingeführt. Variablen haben einen
+Namen\Index{Variablen>Name}\textnote{Namen}, über den sie angesprochen werden,
und einen Inhalt\Index{Variablen>Inhalt}\textnote{Inhalt}. Der Inhalt einer
-Variablen kann zeitlich bzw. räumlich getrennt von ihrer Verwendung gesetzt
-werden, so wie der Inhalt einer Anweisung getrennt von ihrer Ausführung
+Variablen kann zeitlich bzw. räumlich getrennt von ihrer Verwendung gesetzt
+werden, so wie der Inhalt einer Anweisung getrennt von ihrer Ausführung
definiert werden kann. Ein Hauptunterschied einer Variablen zu einer Anweisung
-besteht darin, dass eine Anweisung normalerweise eine Aktion auslöst, während
+besteht darin, dass eine Anweisung normalerweise eine Aktion auslöst, während
der Inhalt einer Variablen normalerweise aus einem Text besteht, der dann von
-einer Anweisung ausgegeben wird. Außerdem kann eine Variable zusätzlich eine
+einer Anweisung ausgegeben wird. Außerdem kann eine Variable zusätzlich eine
Bezeichnung\Index{Variablen>Bezeichnung}\textnote{Bezeichnung} besitzen, die
ebenfalls gesetzt und ausgegeben werden kann.
-Dieser Abschnitt beschränkt sich bewusst auf die Einführung des Begriffs der
+Dieser Abschnitt beschränkt sich bewusst auf die Einführung des Begriffs der
Variablen. Die zur Verdeutlichung verwendeten Beispiele sind ohne tiefere
-Bedeutung. Konkretere Anwendungsbeispiele gibt es bei der Erläuterung der in
+Bedeutung. Konkretere Anwendungsbeispiele gibt es bei der Erläuterung der in
der Klasse und Paket bereits definierten und von ihnen verwendeten Variablen in
den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
-Übersicht über alle definierten Variablen.
+Übersicht über alle definierten Variablen.
%
\begin{desclist}
- \desccaption{Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} unterstützte
+ \desccaption{Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} unterstützte
Variablen\label{tab:\LabelBase.variables}}%
- {Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} unterstützte Variablen
+ {Von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} unterstützte Variablen
(\emph{Fortsetzung})}%
\ventry{addresseeimage}{Anweisungen, die zum Setzen
- des Port-Payé-Kopfes bei der Einstellung
+ des Port-Payé-Kopfes bei der Einstellung
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{backgroundimage} oder der
- Port-Payé-Anschrift bei der Einstellung
+ Port-Payé-Anschrift bei der Einstellung
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{image}, verwendet werden
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.addresseeimage})}%
- \ventry{backaddress}{Rücksendeadresse für Fensterbriefumschläge
+ \ventry{backaddress}{Rücksendeadresse für Fensterbriefumschläge
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress})}%
- \ventry{backaddressseparator}{Trennzeichen innerhalb der Rücksendeadresse
+ \ventry{backaddressseparator}{Trennzeichen innerhalb der Rücksendeadresse
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddressseparator})}%
\ventry{ccseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Verteilertitel und Verteiler
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.ccseparator})}%
- \ventry{customer}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Kundennummer«
+ \ventry{customer}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Kundennummer«
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.customer})}%
\ventry{date}{Datum (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.faxseparator})}%
\ventry{firstfoot}{%
- Seitenfuß\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} des Briefbogens
+ Seitenfuß\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} des Briefbogens
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.firstfoot})}%
\ventry{firsthead}{%
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
Handynummer des Absenders (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.frommobilephone})}%
- \ventry{fromname}{vollständiger Absendername
+ \ventry{fromname}{vollständiger Absendername
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname})}%
\ventry{fromphone}{Telefonnummer des Absenders
@@ -192,11 +192,11 @@ den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromphone})}%
\ventry{fromurl}{eine URL des Absenders (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromurl})}%
- \ventry{fromzipcode}{Postleitzahl des Absenders für den Port-Payé-Kopf bei
+ \ventry{fromzipcode}{Postleitzahl des Absenders für den Port-Payé-Kopf bei
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP}
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromzipcode})}%
- \ventry{invoice}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Rechnungsnummer«
+ \ventry{invoice}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Rechnungsnummer«
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.invoice})}%
\ventry{location}{erweiterte Absenderangabe
@@ -205,10 +205,10 @@ den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
\ventry{mobilephoneseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Handybezeichner und
Handynummer (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.mobilephoneseparator})}%
- \ventry{myref}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Mein Zeichen«
+ \ventry{myref}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Mein Zeichen«
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.myref})}%
- \ventry{nextfoot}{Seitenfuß\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} im Seitenstil
+ \ventry{nextfoot}{Seitenfuß\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} im Seitenstil
\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} oder
\PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle},
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP}
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.PPcode})}%
- \ventry{signature}{Signatur unter Unterschrift und Grußformel
+ \ventry{signature}{Signatur unter Unterschrift und Grußformel
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature})}%
\ventry{specialmail}{Versandart (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
@@ -246,16 +246,16 @@ den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subjectseparator})}%
\ventry{title}{Brief"|titel (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.title})}%
- \ventry{toaddress}{Empfängeradresse ohne Empfängername
+ \ventry{toaddress}{Empfängeradresse ohne Empfängername
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.toaddress})}%
- \ventry{toname}{vollständiger Empfängername
+ \ventry{toname}{vollständiger Empfängername
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.toname})}%
- \ventry{yourmail}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Ihr Schreiben«
+ \ventry{yourmail}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Ihr Schreiben«
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.yourmail})}%
- \ventry{yourref}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Ihr Zeichen«
+ \ventry{yourref}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Ihr Zeichen«
(\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.yourref})}%
\ventry{zipcodeseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen der Bezeichnung und dem
@@ -272,20 +272,20 @@ den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine
\end{Declaration}
Mit der Anweisung \Macro{setkomavar} wird der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
\PName{Name} gesetzt. Dabei kann per optionalem Argument gleichzeitig auch die
-\PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen geändert werden. Demgegenüber kann mit der
+\PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen geändert werden. Demgegenüber kann mit der
Sternvariante \Macro{setkomavar*} auch nur die \PName{Bezeichnung} der
Variablen \PName{Name} gesetzt werden.
\begin{Example}
- In Briefen ist es üblich, den Absender im Briefkopf stehen zu haben. Dazu
- muss \KOMAScript{} den Absender aber erst einmal mit Namen kennen. Für
- »Peter Musterfrau« ginge das einfach mit:
+ In Briefen ist es üblich, den Absender im Briefkopf stehen zu haben. Dazu
+ muss \KOMAScript{} den Absender aber erst einmal mit Namen kennen. Für
+ »Peter Musterfrau« ginge das einfach mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar{fromname}{Peter Musterfrau}
\end{lstcode}
- Die voreingestellte Bezeichnung für den Namen des Absenders ist
- »Von«. Angenommen, Herr Musterfrau will aber an den Stellen, an denen
- \KOMAScript{} diese Bezeichnung verwendet, lieber »Absender« haben, so
- müsste er zusätzlich
+ Die voreingestellte Bezeichnung für den Namen des Absenders ist
+ »Von«. Angenommen, Herr Musterfrau will aber an den Stellen, an denen
+ \KOMAScript{} diese Bezeichnung verwendet, lieber »Absender« haben, so
+ müsste er zusätzlich
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar*{fromname}{Absender}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -293,25 +293,25 @@ Variablen \PName{Name} gesetzt werden.
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar{fromname}[Absender]{Peter Musterfrau}
\end{lstcode}
- Damit schlägt er sozusagen zwei Fliegen mit einer Klappe.
+ Damit schlägt er sozusagen zwei Fliegen mit einer Klappe.
\end{Example}
-Übrigens kann mit einem leeren obligatorischen Argument \PName{Inhalt}
-der Inhalt der Variable gelöscht werden. Selbstverständlich kann in
+Ãœbrigens kann mit einem leeren obligatorischen Argument \PName{Inhalt}
+der Inhalt der Variable gelöscht werden. Selbstverständlich kann in
gleicher Weise mit einem leeren Argument \PName{Bezeichnung} auch die
-Bezeichnung der Variablen gelöscht werden.
+Bezeichnung der Variablen gelöscht werden.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Herr Musterfrau will gar keine Bezeichnung für den Namen des
- Absenders haben. Dann könnte er diese entweder für sich mit:
+ Angenommen, Herr Musterfrau will gar keine Bezeichnung für den Namen des
+ Absenders haben. Dann könnte er diese entweder für sich mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar*{fromname}{}
\end{lstcode}
- löschen. Er könnte aber auch wieder zwei Fliegen mit einer Klappe
+ löschen. Er könnte aber auch wieder zwei Fliegen mit einer Klappe
schlagen und
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar{fromname}[]{Peter Musterfrau}
\end{lstcode}
verwenden. Dadurch wird gleichzeitig der Inhalt der Variablen gesetzt und
- ihre Bezeichnung gelöscht.
+ ihre Bezeichnung gelöscht.
\end{Example}
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -321,13 +321,13 @@ Bezeichnung der Variablen gelöscht werden.
\Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name}
\Macro{usekomavar*}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name}
\end{Declaration}
-In\ChangedAt{v2.9i}{\Class{scrlttr2}} manchen Fällen wird es notwendig sein,
+In\ChangedAt{v2.9i}{\Class{scrlttr2}} manchen Fällen wird es notwendig sein,
selbst auf den Inhalt oder die Bezeichnung einer Variablen zuzugreifen, dies
-also nicht allein der Klasse zu überlassen. Das gilt insbesondere dann, wenn
-Sie eigene Variablen definiert haben, die nicht zur Geschäftszeile
-hinzugefügt werden. Mit der Anweisung \Macro{usekomavar} können Sie auf den
-Inhalt der Variablen \PName{Name} zugreifen, während Sie mit der Sternvariante
-\Macro{usekomavar*} ihre Bezeichnung erhalten. Näheres zur Definition eigener
+also nicht allein der Klasse zu überlassen. Das gilt insbesondere dann, wenn
+Sie eigene Variablen definiert haben, die nicht zur Geschäftszeile
+hinzugefügt werden. Mit der Anweisung \Macro{usekomavar} können Sie auf den
+Inhalt der Variablen \PName{Name} zugreifen, während Sie mit der Sternvariante
+\Macro{usekomavar*} ihre Bezeichnung erhalten. Näheres zur Definition eigener
Variablen ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} zu entnehmen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -338,9 +338,9 @@ Variablen ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables},
\end{Declaration}
Mit\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} dieser Anweisung kann man feststellen,
ob eine Variable definiert ist. Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird nur dann
-ausgeführt, wenn die Variable existiert. Dabei wird der Inhalt der Variablen
+ausgeführt, wenn die Variable existiert. Dabei wird der Inhalt der Variablen
nicht getestet, kann also auch leer sein. Der \PName{Sonst-Teil} wird hingegen
-ausgeführt, wenn die Variable nicht existiert. Solche Tests können
+ausgeführt, wenn die Variable nicht existiert. Solche Tests können
beispielsweise dann sinnvoll sein, wenn eigene Variablen in einer
\File{lco}-Datei\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile})
@@ -357,61 +357,61 @@ verwendet werden soll, wenn sie existiert.
\end{Declaration}
Mit\ChangedAt{v2.9i}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Hilfe dieser Anweisungen kann man
feststellen, ob der Inhalt oder die Bezeichnung einer Variablen leer
-ist oder nicht. Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird nur dann ausgeführt,
+ist oder nicht. Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird nur dann ausgeführt,
wenn der expandierte Inhalt oder die expandierte Bezeichnung der
Variablen \PName{Name} leer ist. Anderenfalls wird der
-\PName{Sonst-Teil} ausgeführt. Die Sternvariante der Anweisung
-bezieht sich dabei auf die Bezeichnung der Variablen, während die
+\PName{Sonst-Teil} ausgeführt. Die Sternvariante der Anweisung
+bezieht sich dabei auf die Bezeichnung der Variablen, während die
normale Variante den Inhalt behandelt.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Pseudolängen}
+\section{Pseudolängen}
\seclabel{pseudoLength}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Pseudolängen}
+\BeginIndex{}{Pseudolängen}
-Längen werden bei \LaTeX{} mit den drei Anweisungen
+Längen werden bei \LaTeX{} mit den drei Anweisungen
\Macro{newlength}\IndexCmd{newlength}, \Macro{setlength}\IndexCmd{setlength}
und \Macro{addtolength}\IndexCmd{addtolength} verarbeitet. Sehr viele Pakete
-nutzen aber auch Makros, also Anweisungen, um Längen zu
-speichern. \KOMAScript{} erweitert dieses Verfahren um die Möglichkeit, solche
-in Makros gespeicherten Längen mit ähnlichen Anweisungen zu verarbeiten wie
-echte Längen. Diese eigentlich in Makros abgelegten Längen heißen bei
-\KOMAScript{} daher Pseudolängen.
+nutzen aber auch Makros, also Anweisungen, um Längen zu
+speichern. \KOMAScript{} erweitert dieses Verfahren um die Möglichkeit, solche
+in Makros gespeicherten Längen mit ähnlichen Anweisungen zu verarbeiten wie
+echte Längen. Diese eigentlich in Makros abgelegten Längen heißen bei
+\KOMAScript{} daher Pseudolängen.
-Eine Liste aller in \Class{scrlttr2} definierten Pseudolängen findet sich in
+Eine Liste aller in \Class{scrlttr2} definierten Pseudolängen findet sich in
\autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths},
\autopageref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths}. Eine grafische Darstellung
-der Bedeutungen der wichtigsten Pseudolängen des Briefbogens ist
+der Bedeutungen der wichtigsten Pseudolängen des Briefbogens ist
\autoref{fig:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths},
\autopageref{fig:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths} zu entnehmen. Die verwendeten
-Maße sind dabei an die Voreinstellungen von \Class{scrlttr2} angelehnt. Nähere
-Beschreibungen zu den einzelnen Pseudolängen finden sich in den einzelnen
+Maße sind dabei an die Voreinstellungen von \Class{scrlttr2} angelehnt. Nähere
+Beschreibungen zu den einzelnen Pseudolängen finden sich in den einzelnen
Abschnitten dieses Kapitels.
-Da der Anwender normalerweise keine eigenen Pseudolängen definieren muss, wird
+Da der Anwender normalerweise keine eigenen Pseudolängen definieren muss, wird
dieser Teil nicht hier, sondern im Expertenteil in
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newplength} behandelt. Ebenso ist das
-Setzen von Pseudolängen eher dem fortgeschrittenen Anwender vorbehalten. Also
-wird auch dies im Abschnitt für Experten ab
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength} erklärt.
+Setzen von Pseudolängen eher dem fortgeschrittenen Anwender vorbehalten. Also
+wird auch dies im Abschnitt für Experten ab
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength} erklärt.
-Bitte beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie unbedingt, dass die Pseudolängen zwar
+Bitte beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie unbedingt, dass die Pseudolängen zwar
intern als Makros implementiert sind, bei den Befehlen zur Nutzung der
-Pseudolängen jedoch nur die Namen anzugeben sind. Diese werden wie die Namen
-von \LaTeX-Zählern und im Gegensatz zu Makros oder echten Längen ohne
-umgekehrten Schrägstrich geschrieben!
+Pseudolängen jedoch nur die Namen anzugeben sind. Diese werden wie die Namen
+von \LaTeX-Zählern und im Gegensatz zu Makros oder echten Längen ohne
+umgekehrten Schrägstrich geschrieben!
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{useplength}\Parameter{Name}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung wird auf den Wert der Pseudolänge mit dem
+Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung wird auf den Wert der Pseudolänge mit dem
angegebenen \PName{Namen} zugegriffen. Dies ist eine der wenigen
-Benutzeranweisung rund um Pseudolängen. Natürlich kann diese Anweisung dennoch
+Benutzeranweisung rund um Pseudolängen. Natürlich kann diese Anweisung dennoch
auch innerhalb einer \File{lco}-Datei\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile})
verwendet werden.%
@@ -421,17 +421,17 @@ verwendet werden.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{setlengthtoplength}
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}
\Macro{addtolengthplength}
- \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}
+ \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}
\end{Declaration}
Mit der Anweisung
\Macro{setlengthtoplength}\important{\Macro{setlengthtoplength}} kann man
-einer echten \PName{Länge} das Vielfache einer \PName{Pseudolänge} zuweisen.
-Allerdings wird hier ein \PName{Faktor} nicht direkt der \PName{Pseudolänge}
-vorangestellt, sondern als optionales Argument übergeben. Man sollte diese
-Anweisung auch verwenden, wenn man einer \PName{Länge} den negativen Wert
-einer \PName{Pseudolänge} zuweisen will. %
+einer echten \PName{Länge} das Vielfache einer \PName{Pseudolänge} zuweisen.
+Allerdings wird hier ein \PName{Faktor} nicht direkt der \PName{Pseudolänge}
+vorangestellt, sondern als optionales Argument übergeben. Man sollte diese
+Anweisung auch verwenden, wenn man einer \PName{Länge} den negativen Wert
+einer \PName{Pseudolänge} zuweisen will. %
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur
Als \PName{Faktor} kann dann wahlweise ein Minuszeichen oder \PValue{-1}
verwendet werden.
@@ -442,16 +442,16 @@ einer \PName{Pseudolänge} zuweisen will. %
\fi
%
Die Anweisung\important{\Macro{addtolengthplength}} \Macro{addtolengthplength}
-arbeitet ähnlich. Nur wird die mit \PName{Faktor} multiplizierte
-\PName{Pseudolänge} zur \PName{Länge} addiert.%
+arbeitet ähnlich. Nur wird die mit \PName{Faktor} multiplizierte
+\PName{Pseudolänge} zur \PName{Länge} addiert.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
-\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
+\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
%\iffree{}{\vfill}% Umbruchoptimierung!
@@ -461,18 +461,18 @@ arbeitet ähnlich. Nur wird die mit \PName{Faktor} multiplizierte
Die Unterscheidung zwischen ein- und doppelseitigem Satz ist bei Briefen
jedoch in der Regel nicht sinnvoll. Da Briefe normalerweise nicht gebunden
-werden, betrachtet man bei Briefen jede Seite für sich. Das gilt auch dann,
-wenn ausnahmsweise Vorder- oder Rückseite bedruckt werden. Daher spielt bei
+werden, betrachtet man bei Briefen jede Seite für sich. Das gilt auch dann,
+wenn ausnahmsweise Vorder- oder Rückseite bedruckt werden. Daher spielt bei
Briefen normalerweise auch der vertikale Ausgleich keine Rolle. Sollten Sie
-diesen trotzdem benötigen
+diesen trotzdem benötigen
\iffalse%
% Umbruchkorrekturtext
oder wissen wollen, was das ist, %
\fi%
sei auf die in \autoref{sec:maincls.typearea},
-\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom} erklärten Anweisungen
-\DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedbottom} und \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}
-verwiesen.%
+\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom} erklärten Anweisungen
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedbottom}\IndexCmd{raggedbottom} und
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom} verwiesen.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -483,8 +483,8 @@ verwiesen.%
\BeginIndex{}{Briefe>Aufbau}
Der generelle Aufbau eines Briefdokuments weicht etwas vom Aufbau eines
-normalen Dokuments ab. Während ein Buchdokument normalerweise nur ein Buch
-enthält, kann ein einzelnes Briefdokument mehrere Briefe enthalten. Wie in
+normalen Dokuments ab. Während ein Buchdokument normalerweise nur ein Buch
+enthält, kann ein einzelnes Briefdokument mehrere Briefe enthalten. Wie in
\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.document} veranschaulicht wird, besteht ein
Briefdokument aus einem Vorspann, den einzelnen Briefen und dem Abschluss.
@@ -503,15 +503,15 @@ Briefdokument aus einem Vorspann, den einzelnen Briefen und dem Abschluss.
\fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright%
\Macro{documentclass}\OParameter{\dots}\PParameter{scrlttr2}\\
\dots\\
- {\centering\emph{Einstellungen für alle Briefe}\\}
+ {\centering\emph{Einstellungen für alle Briefe}\\}
\dots\\
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}\\
\dots\\
- {\centering\emph{Einstellungen für alle Briefe}\\}
+ {\centering\emph{Einstellungen für alle Briefe}\\}
\dots\\
}}\\
\fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright%
- \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}\Parameter{Empfänger}\\
+ \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}\Parameter{Empfänger}\\
\dots\\
{\centering\emph{Inhalt eines einzelnen Briefes}\\}
\dots\\
@@ -526,18 +526,18 @@ Briefdokument aus einem Vorspann, den einzelnen Briefen und dem Abschluss.
\end{figure}
Der Vorspann beinhaltet dabei alle Einstellungen, die generell alle Briefe
-betreffen. Diese können in den Einstellungen der einzelnen Briefe jedoch
-zumindest teilweise überschrieben werden. Die einzige Einstellung, die derzeit
-nicht innerhalb eines einzelnen Briefes überschrieben werden kann, ist die
-Version von \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}, zu der Kompatibilität
+betreffen. Diese können in den Einstellungen der einzelnen Briefe jedoch
+zumindest teilweise überschrieben werden. Die einzige Einstellung, die derzeit
+nicht innerhalb eines einzelnen Briefes überschrieben werden kann, ist die
+Version von \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}, zu der Kompatibilität
erreicht werden soll (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}).
-Bei Verwendung von \Package{scrletter}\important{scrletter} ändert sich
-lediglich, dass eine andere Klasse geladen und dafür zusätzlich
+Bei Verwendung von \Package{scrletter}\important{scrletter} ändert sich
+lediglich, dass eine andere Klasse geladen und dafür zusätzlich
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}\PParameter{scrletter} noch vor den
-Einstellungen für alle Briefe einzufügen ist. Für das Setzen von Optionen für
+Einstellungen für alle Briefe einzufügen ist. Für das Setzen von Optionen für
\Package{scrletter} sei auf \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.options}, ab
\autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.options} verwiesen.
@@ -547,12 +547,12 @@ vorzunehmen. Alle Einstellungen, die das Setzen einer Variablen oder sonstige
Textangaben beinhalten, sollten nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}
vorgenommen werden. Dies empfiehlt\textnote{Tipp!} sich umso mehr, wenn das
Babel-Paket\IndexPackage{babel} (siehe \cite{package:babel}) verwendet wird
-oder sprachabhängige Variablen von \Class{scrlttr2} oder \Package{scrletter}
-verändert werden sollen.
+oder sprachabhängige Variablen von \Class{scrlttr2} oder \Package{scrletter}
+verändert werden sollen.
Der Abschluss besteht in der Regel nur aus
-\Macro{end}\PParameter{document}. Natürlich können Sie dort aber auch
-zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen.
+\Macro{end}\PParameter{document}. Natürlich können Sie dort aber auch
+zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen.
\begin{figure}
\KOMAoptions{captions=bottombeside}%
@@ -567,9 +567,9 @@ zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen.
\addtolength{\linewidth}{-\dimexpr2\fboxrule+2\fboxsep\relax}%
\fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright%
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}%
- \OParameter{Optionen}\Parameter{Empfänger}\\
+ \OParameter{Optionen}\Parameter{Empfänger}\\
\dots\\[\dp\strutbox]
- {\centering\emph{Einstellungen für diesen Brief}\\}
+ {\centering\emph{Einstellungen für diesen Brief}\\}
\dots\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\Parameter{Anrede}\\
}}\\[1pt]
@@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen.
\dots\\
}}\\[1pt]
\fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright%
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\Parameter{Grußformel}\\
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\Parameter{Grußformel}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ps}\\
\dots\\[\dp\strutbox]
{\centering\emph{Postscriptum}\\}
@@ -595,57 +595,57 @@ zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen.
Wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter} verdeutlicht wird, bestehen die
einzelnen Briefe wiederum aus einer Einleitung, dem eigentlichen Brief"|text
und einem Schlussteil. In der Einleitung werden alle Einstellungen
-vorgenommen, die nur für diesen einen Brief gelten sollen. Entscheidend ist
+vorgenommen, die nur für diesen einen Brief gelten sollen. Entscheidend ist
hierbei, dass diese Einleitung immer mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} endet. Ebenso beginnt der
Schlussteil immer mit
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing}. Gegebenenfalls können die
-Argumente \PName{Anrede} und \PName{Grußformel} der beiden Anweisungen leer
-bleiben, die Anweisungen müssen jedoch gesetzt werden und haben immer ein
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing}. Gegebenenfalls können die
+Argumente \PName{Anrede} und \PName{Grußformel} der beiden Anweisungen leer
+bleiben, die Anweisungen müssen jedoch gesetzt werden und haben immer ein
Argument.
Es soll an dieser Stelle nicht verschwiegen werden, dass zwischen den
-einzelnen Briefen weitere Einstellungen getroffen werden können. Diese
-gelten dann für alle nachfolgenden Briefe. Um Briefdokumente
-übersichtlich und wartbar zu halten, sollte man sich jedoch gut
-überlegen, ob man zwischen die Briefe tatsächlich weitere generelle
-Einstellungen mit beschränkter Gültigkeit setzen will. Ich kann dies
+einzelnen Briefen weitere Einstellungen getroffen werden können. Diese
+gelten dann für alle nachfolgenden Briefe. Um Briefdokumente
+übersichtlich und wartbar zu halten, sollte man sich jedoch gut
+überlegen, ob man zwischen die Briefe tatsächlich weitere generelle
+Einstellungen mit beschränkter Gültigkeit setzen will. Ich kann dies
nicht empfehlen%
\iffalse
-% Umbruchergänzungstext
+% Umbruchergänzungstext
, da die Suche nach Einstellungen dadurch erschwert wird%
\fi
%
. Dagegen spricht bei Verwendung von \Package{scrletter2} nichts dagegen, vor,
-zwischen oder nach Briefen weitere Dokumentteile einzufügen, die nicht im
+zwischen oder nach Briefen weitere Dokumentteile einzufügen, die nicht im
Briefkontext stehen sollen. So kann man beispielsweise Anschreiben und
Lebenslauf in einem Dokument zusammenfassen.
\begin{Declaration}
- \begin{Environment}{letter}\OParameter{Optionen}\Parameter{Empfänger}
+ \begin{Environment}{letter}\OParameter{Optionen}\Parameter{Empfänger}
\end{Environment}
\end{Declaration}
\BeginIndex{}{Anschrift}%
Die Briefumgebung \Environment{letter} ist einer der zentralen Dreh- und
Angelpunkte der Briefklasse und des Briefpakets. Als
Besonderheit\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} kann man bei
-\Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} der Briefumgebung zusätzliche
+\Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} der Briefumgebung zusätzliche
\PName{Optionen} mit auf den Weg geben. Diese werden dann intern per
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}-Anweisung ausgeführt.
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}-Anweisung ausgeführt.
-Der \PName{Empfänger} wird als obligatorischer Parameter an die Umgebung
-übergeben. Dabei\textnote{Achtung!} dient der doppelte Backslash als
+Der \PName{Empfänger} wird als obligatorischer Parameter an die Umgebung
+übergeben. Dabei\textnote{Achtung!} dient der doppelte Backslash als
Trennzeichen zwischen einzelnen Teilen der Anschrift. Diese einzelnen Teile
werden im Anschriftfeld als einzelne Zeilen ausgegeben. Dennoch sollte der
doppelte Backslash hier nicht als fester Zeilenumbruch verstanden
-werden. Absätze, vertikaler Leerraum und Ähnliches sind in der Anschrift nicht
-erlaubt. Sie können zu unerwarteten Effekten und Fehlermeldungen führen. Dies
-ist übrigens bei der Standardbriefklasse genauso.
+werden. Absätze, vertikaler Leerraum und Ähnliches sind in der Anschrift nicht
+erlaubt. Sie können zu unerwarteten Effekten und Fehlermeldungen führen. Dies
+ist übrigens bei der Standardbriefklasse genauso.
\begin{Example}
\phantomsection\label{desc:\LabelBase.env.letter.example}%
Angenommen, jemand wollte einen Brief an Petra Mustermann schreiben.
- Ein minimalistisches Briefdokument dafür würde so aussehen:
+ Ein minimalistisches Briefdokument dafür würde so aussehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[version=last]{scrlttr2}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
@@ -656,12 +656,18 @@ ist übrigens bei der Standardbriefklasse genauso.
\end{letter}
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!} würde dabei noch keinerlei Ausgabe
- entstehen. Es würde noch nicht einmal die Anschrift auf dem Briefbogen
- ausgegeben. Warum das so ist, erfahren Sie bei der Erklärung zur Anweisung
+ Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!} würde dabei noch keinerlei Ausgabe
+ entstehen. Es würde noch nicht einmal die Anschrift auf dem Briefbogen
+ ausgegeben. Warum das so ist, erfahren Sie bei der Erklärung zur Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} auf \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}.
\end{Example}
-%
+
+Briefe\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} werden immer
+einspaltig und ohne vertikalen Ausgleich gesetzt. Letzteres kann man mit Hilfe
+von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtBeginLetter} und der in
+\autoref{sec:maincls.typearea}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}
+erklärten Anweisungen \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom}
+ändern.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -670,33 +676,33 @@ ist übrigens bei der Standardbriefklasse genauso.
\Macro{AtEndLetter}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
\iftrue% Umbruchvarianten
-Wie\textnote{Haken}\Index[indexmain]{Haken} in \cite{latex:clsguide} erwähnt,
-gibt es bei \LaTeX{} die Möglichkeit, zu bestimmten Gelegenheiten während des
-\LaTeX-Laufs eines Dokuments zusätzliche \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen zu
+Wie\textnote{Haken}\Index[indexmain]{Haken} in \cite{latex:clsguide} erwähnt,
+gibt es bei \LaTeX{} die Möglichkeit, zu bestimmten Gelegenheiten während des
+\LaTeX-Laufs eines Dokuments zusätzliche \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen zu
lassen. Zu diesem Zweck stellt der \LaTeX-Kern beispielsweise die Anweisungen
\Macro{AtEndOfClass}\IndexCmd{AtEndOfClass} und
-\Macro{AtBeginDocument}\IndexCmd{AtBeginDocument} zur Verfügung. Man nennt
+\Macro{AtBeginDocument}\IndexCmd{AtBeginDocument} zur Verfügung. Man nennt
solche Eingriffspunkte auch \emph{hooks}\Index{hook=\emph{hook}}, also
-Haken. Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} und das Paket \Package{scrletter} fügen
+Haken. Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} und das Paket \Package{scrletter} fügen
zwei weitere Haken hinzu, die mit \Macro{AtBeginLetter} und
\Macro{AtEndLetter}\ChangedAt{v2.95}{\Class{scrlttr2}} mit Inhalt versehen
-werden können. Wie man schon daran erkennt, dass die \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen
-für Haken nicht in \cite{latex:usrguide} sondern in \cite{latex:clsguide}
-dokumentiert sind, sind diese Anweisungen eigentlich eher für Paket- und
+werden können. Wie man schon daran erkennt, dass die \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen
+für Haken nicht in \cite{latex:usrguide} sondern in \cite{latex:clsguide}
+dokumentiert sind, sind diese Anweisungen eigentlich eher für Paket- und
Klassenautoren gedacht. Bei der Briefklasse und dem Briefpaket kann es jedoch
-sinnvolle Anwendungen für die beiden neuen Haken auch auf Benutzerebene
+sinnvolle Anwendungen für die beiden neuen Haken auch auf Benutzerebene
geben.\Index[indexmain]{Haken} Das folgende Beispiel zeigt dies.%
%
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie haben mehrere Briefe in einem Dokument. Sie verwenden
- außerdem eine eigene Anweisung, um in den Briefen einen Fragebogen
+ außerdem eine eigene Anweisung, um in den Briefen einen Fragebogen
zu setzen. Dabei werden die Fragen automatisch mit Hilfe eines
- Zählers nummeriert. Da \KOMAScript{} dieser Zähler nicht bekannt
- ist, würde er auch im Gegensatz etwa zur Seitenzahl am Anfang eines
- neuen Briefes nicht zurückgesetzt. Wenn jeder Brief zehn Fragen
- beinhaltet, hätte damit die erste Frage im fünften Brief die Nummer
- 41 statt der Nummer 1. Sie lösen das, indem Sie \KOMAScript{}
- mitteilen, dass am Anfang jedes Briefes der Zähler zurückgesetzt
+ Zählers nummeriert. Da \KOMAScript{} dieser Zähler nicht bekannt
+ ist, würde er auch im Gegensatz etwa zur Seitenzahl am Anfang eines
+ neuen Briefes nicht zurückgesetzt. Wenn jeder Brief zehn Fragen
+ beinhaltet, hätte damit die erste Frage im fünften Brief die Nummer
+ 41 statt der Nummer 1. Sie lösen das, indem Sie \KOMAScript{}
+ mitteilen, dass am Anfang jedes Briefes der Zähler zurückgesetzt
werden soll:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcounter{Frage}
@@ -711,35 +717,35 @@ geben.\Index[indexmain]{Haken} Das folgende Beispiel zeigt dies.%
\AtBeginLetter{\setcounter{Frage}{0}}
\end{lstcode}
Damit hat dann auch die erste Frage im 1001.~Brief wieder die Nummer
- Eins. Die hier angegebene Definition benötigt übrigens das
+ Eins. Die hier angegebene Definition benötigt übrigens das
\Package{tabularx}-Paket\IndexPackage{tabularx} (siehe
\cite{package:tabularx}).
\end{Example}
\else%
- Wie\Index[indexmain]{Haken} in \cite{latex:clsguide} erwähnt, gibt es bei
- \LaTeX{} die Möglichkeit, während des \LaTeX-Laufs eines Dokuments zusätzliche
- \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen zu lassen. Zu diesem Zweck stellt der
+ Wie\Index[indexmain]{Haken} in \cite{latex:clsguide} erwähnt, gibt es bei
+ \LaTeX{} die Möglichkeit, während des \LaTeX-Laufs eines Dokuments zusätzliche
+ \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen zu lassen. Zu diesem Zweck stellt der
\LaTeX-Kern die Anweisungen \Macro{AtEndOfClass}\IndexCmd{AtEndOfClass} und
- \Macro{AtBeginDocument}\IndexCmd{AtBeginDocument} zur Verfügung. Man nennt
+ \Macro{AtBeginDocument}\IndexCmd{AtBeginDocument} zur Verfügung. Man nennt
solche Eingriffspunkte auch \emph{hooks}\Index{hook=\emph{hook}}, also
- Haken. \KOMAScript{} fügt zwei weitere Haken hinzu, die mit
+ Haken. \KOMAScript{} fügt zwei weitere Haken hinzu, die mit
\Macro{AtBeginLetter} und
\Macro{AtEndLetter}\ChangedAt{v2.95}{\Class{scrlttr2}} mit Inhalt versehen
- werden können. Wie man schon daran erkennt, dass die \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen
- für Haken nicht in \cite{latex:usrguide} sondern in \cite{latex:clsguide}
- dokumentiert sind, sind diese Anweisungen eigentlich eher für Paket- und
- Klassenautoren gedacht. Bei Briefen kann es jedoch sinnvolle Anwendungen für
+ werden können. Wie man schon daran erkennt, dass die \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen
+ für Haken nicht in \cite{latex:usrguide} sondern in \cite{latex:clsguide}
+ dokumentiert sind, sind diese Anweisungen eigentlich eher für Paket- und
+ Klassenautoren gedacht. Bei Briefen kann es jedoch sinnvolle Anwendungen für
die beiden neuen Haken auch auf Benutzerebene geben.\Index[indexmain]{Haken}%
%
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie haben mehrere Briefe in einem Dokument und verwenden
eine eigene Anweisung, um in den Briefen einen Fragebogen
zu setzen. Die Fragen werden mit Hilfe eines
- Zählers nummeriert. Da \KOMAScript{} diesen Zähler nicht kennt,
- würde er auch im Gegensatz zur Seitenzahl am Anfang eines
- neuen Briefes nicht zurückgesetzt. Bei 10 Fragen je Brief, hätte damit die
- erste Frage im fünften Brief die Nummer 41 statt der Nummer 1. Sie lösen
- das, indem Sie am Anfang jedes Briefes den Zähler zurücksetzen lassen:
+ Zählers nummeriert. Da \KOMAScript{} diesen Zähler nicht kennt,
+ würde er auch im Gegensatz zur Seitenzahl am Anfang eines
+ neuen Briefes nicht zurückgesetzt. Bei 10 Fragen je Brief, hätte damit die
+ erste Frage im fünften Brief die Nummer 41 statt der Nummer 1. Sie lösen
+ das, indem Sie am Anfang jedes Briefes den Zähler zurücksetzen lassen:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcounter{Frage}
\newcommand{\Frage}[1]{%
@@ -751,7 +757,7 @@ geben.\Index[indexmain]{Haken} Das folgende Beispiel zeigt dies.%
\AtBeginLetter{\setcounter{Frage}{0}}
\end{lstcode}
Damit hat dann auch die erste Frage im 1001.~Brief wieder die Nummer
- Eins. Die hier angegebene Definition benötigt übrigens das
+ Eins. Die hier angegebene Definition benötigt übrigens das
\Package{tabularx}-Paket\IndexPackage{tabularx} (siehe
\cite{package:tabularx}).
\end{Example}%
@@ -765,16 +771,16 @@ geben.\Index[indexmain]{Haken} Das folgende Beispiel zeigt dies.%
\Macro{thisletter}
\Macro{letterlastpage}
\end{Declaration}
-Für\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} den Fall, dass
+Für\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} den Fall, dass
sich mehrere Briefe in einem Dokument befinden, werden die Briefe intern von
-\KOMAScript{} durchnummeriert. Hierfür ist seit Version~3.19 der Zähler
+\KOMAScript{} durchnummeriert. Hierfür ist seit Version~3.19 der Zähler
\Counter{letter} definiert, der mit jedem \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}
-referenzierbar um eins erhöht wird.
+referenzierbar um eins erhöht wird.
\begin{Example}
Kommen wir auf das Beispiel zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtBeginLetter}
- zurück. Statt den Zähler explizit innerhalb von
- \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} zurückzusetzen, kann dies auch implizit
- erfolgen, indem der Zähler \Counter{Frage} abhängig von \Counter{letter}
+ zurück. Statt den Zähler explizit innerhalb von
+ \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} zurückzusetzen, kann dies auch implizit
+ erfolgen, indem der Zähler \Counter{Frage} abhängig von \Counter{letter}
definiert wird:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcounter{Frage}[letter]
@@ -787,29 +793,29 @@ referenzierbar um eins erhöht wird.
\end{tabularx}%
}%
\end{lstcode}
- Damit wird der Zähler automatisch zu Beginn jedes Briefs wieder auf Null
- zurück gesetzt, so dass die erste Frage in jedem Brief wieder mit der Nummer
+ Damit wird der Zähler automatisch zu Beginn jedes Briefs wieder auf Null
+ zurück gesetzt, so dass die erste Frage in jedem Brief wieder mit der Nummer
Eins beginnt.
\end{Example}
Will man sich den aktuellen Wert von \Counter{letter} ausgeben lassen, so ist
-das wie gewohnt mit \Macro{theletter} möglich. Wie bereits erwähnt, ist der
-Zähler aber auch referenzierbar. Das bedeutet, man könnte am Anfang eines
+das wie gewohnt mit \Macro{theletter} möglich. Wie bereits erwähnt, ist der
+Zähler aber auch referenzierbar. Das bedeutet, man könnte am Anfang eines
Briefes mit \Macro{label}\Parameter{Labelname} ein Label
setzen und mit \Macro{ref}\Parameter{Labelname} dann an beliebiger Stelle im
-Dokument darauf verweisen. Innerhalb des Briefes selbst erhält man dasselbe
+Dokument darauf verweisen. Innerhalb des Briefes selbst erhält man dasselbe
Ergebnis auch ganz ohne Label mit \Macro{thisletter}.
-Für Label innerhalb von Serienbriefen ist es notwendig, diesen einen über alle
-Briefe hinweg eindeutigen Namen zu geben. Auch dafür kann \Macro{thisletter}
-verwendet werden. Intern arbeitet \KOMAScript{} für diesen Zweck ebenfalls mit
+Für Label innerhalb von Serienbriefen ist es notwendig, diesen einen über alle
+Briefe hinweg eindeutigen Namen zu geben. Auch dafür kann \Macro{thisletter}
+verwendet werden. Intern arbeitet \KOMAScript{} für diesen Zweck ebenfalls mit
\Macro{thisletter}, um auf der letzten Seite eines jeden Briefes ein Label zu
-setzen. Dadurch ist es möglich, mit
+setzen. Dadurch ist es möglich, mit
\Macro{letterlastpage}\IndexCmd{label}\IndexCmd{pageref} jederzeit innerhalb
des Briefes die Nummer der letzten Seite des Briefes auszugeben. Da
-\Macro{letterlastpage} über \Macro{label} und \Macro{pageref} arbeitet, ist
-die Ausgabe allerdings erst nach mehreren \LaTeX-Läufen -- meist zwei oder
-drei -- gültig. Achten Sie gegebenenfalls auf entsprechende
+\Macro{letterlastpage} über \Macro{label} und \Macro{pageref} arbeitet, ist
+die Ausgabe allerdings erst nach mehreren \LaTeX-Läufen -- meist zwei oder
+drei -- gültig. Achten Sie gegebenenfalls auf entsprechende
\emph{Rerun}-Meldungen in der Terminal-Ausgabe oder der \File{log}-Datei.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -817,22 +823,22 @@ drei -- gültig. Achten Sie gegebenenfalls auf entsprechende
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{opening}\Parameter{Anrede}
\end{Declaration}
-Dies ist eine der wichtigsten Anweisungen in Briefen. Vordergründig
-wird damit die \PName{Anrede}\Index{Anrede}, beispielsweise »Sehr
-geehrte Frau~\dots«, gesetzt. Tatsächlich\textnote{Achtung!} setzt diese
+Dies ist eine der wichtigsten Anweisungen in Briefen. Vordergründig
+wird damit die \PName{Anrede}\Index{Anrede}, beispielsweise »Sehr
+geehrte Frau~\dots«, gesetzt. Tatsächlich\textnote{Achtung!} setzt diese
Anweisung aber auch alle Elemente des Briefbogens wie die
Faltmarken\Index{Faltmarke}, den Briefkopf\Index{Briefkopf}, die
-Anschrift\Index{Anschrift}, die Absenderergänzung, die
-Geschäftszeile\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}, den Titel\Index{Titel},
+Anschrift\Index{Anschrift}, die Absenderergänzung, die
+Geschäftszeile\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}, den Titel\Index{Titel},
den Betreff\Index{Betreff} und den
-Seitenfuß\Index{Kopf}\Index{Fuss=Fuß}. Kurz\textnote{Ohne Anrede kein Brief!}
-gesagt: ohne Anrede kein Brief. Soll tatsächlich einmal ein Brief ohne Anrede
+Seitenfuß\Index{Kopf}\Index{Fuss=Fuß}. Kurz\textnote{Ohne Anrede kein Brief!}
+gesagt: ohne Anrede kein Brief. Soll tatsächlich einmal ein Brief ohne Anrede
gesetzt werden, so muss eben das Argument von \Macro{opening} leer bleiben.
\begin{Example}
Kommen wir auf das Beispiel von
- \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.letter.example} zurück. Wird dieses
- um eine Anrede ergänzt, dann ergibt sich aus
+ \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.letter.example} zurück. Wird dieses
+ um eine Anrede ergänzt, dann ergibt sich aus
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-0.tex}
der Briefbogen von \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-0}.
\begin{figure}
@@ -840,7 +846,7 @@ gesetzt werden, so muss eben das Argument von \Macro{opening} leer bleiben.
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit
Anschrift und Anrede}]{Ergebnis eines minimalistischen Briefes nur mit
Anschrift und Anrede (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den
- Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
+ Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-0}}
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-0}
@@ -848,39 +854,39 @@ gesetzt werden, so muss eben das Argument von \Macro{opening} leer bleiben.
\end{Example}
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext
\begin{Explain}
- Bei\textnote{Tipp!} maschinell erstellten Briefen wurde früher meist auf
- eine Anrede verzichtet, da individualisierte Serienbriefe kaum möglich
- waren. Heute sind persönliche Anreden auch bei Massensendungen üblich.%
+ Bei\textnote{Tipp!} maschinell erstellten Briefen wurde früher meist auf
+ eine Anrede verzichtet, da individualisierte Serienbriefe kaum möglich
+ waren. Heute sind persönliche Anreden auch bei Massensendungen üblich.%
\end{Explain}%
\fi
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{closing}\Parameter{Grußfloskel}
+ \Macro{closing}\Parameter{Grußfloskel}
\end{Declaration}
Mit der Anweisung \Macro{closing} wird in erster Linie die
-\PName{Grußfloskel}\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß}
+\PName{Grußfloskel}\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß}
gesetzt. Diese kann auch mehrzeilig sein. Die einzelnen Zeilen sollten dann
-mit doppeltem Backslash voneinander getrennt werden. Absätze innerhalb der
-\PName{Grußfloskel} sind jedoch nicht gestattet.
+mit doppeltem Backslash voneinander getrennt werden. Absätze innerhalb der
+\PName{Grußfloskel} sind jedoch nicht gestattet.
-Darüber hinaus setzt diese Anweisung aber auch noch gleich den Inhalt der
-Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature} als Signatur. Näheres zur
+Darüber hinaus setzt diese Anweisung aber auch noch gleich den Inhalt der
+Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature} als Signatur. Näheres zur
Signatur und deren Konfiguration ist \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} ab
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature} zu entnehmen.
\begin{Example}
- Erweitern wir unser Beispiel um einige Zeilen Brieftext und eine Grußfloskel
+ Erweitern wir unser Beispiel um einige Zeilen Brieftext und eine Grußfloskel
zu:
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-1.tex}
Damit sieht das Ergebnis wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-1} aus.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift,
- Anrede, Text und Grußfloskel}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen
- Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text und Grußfloskel (Datum und
- Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
+ Anrede, Text und Grußfloskel}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen
+ Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text und Grußfloskel (Datum und
+ Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-1}}
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-1}
@@ -896,10 +902,10 @@ Signatur und deren Konfiguration ist \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} ab
Diese Anweisung schaltet lediglich auf das
Postskriptum\Index{Postskriptum} um. Dazu wird ein neuer Absatz
begonnen und ein vertikaler Abstand -- in der Regel zur Signatur --
-eingefügt. Auf die Anweisung \Macro{ps} kann beliebiger Text folgen.
+eingefügt. Auf die Anweisung \Macro{ps} kann beliebiger Text folgen.
Dabei muss der Anwender auch selbst entscheiden, ob er den Nachsatz
-etwa mit der Abkürzung »PS:«, die übrigens ohne Punkt gesetzt wird,
-beginnen will. \KOMAScript{} setzt diese Abkürzung weder
+etwa mit der Abkürzung »PS:«, die übrigens ohne Punkt gesetzt wird,
+beginnen will. \KOMAScript{} setzt diese Abkürzung weder
automatisch noch optional.
\begin{Example}
@@ -909,9 +915,9 @@ automatisch noch optional.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel und Postskriptum}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen
- Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel und Postskriptum
- (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel und Postskriptum}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen
+ Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel und Postskriptum
+ (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für
DIN-Briefe)}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-2}}
\end{captionbeside}
@@ -921,17 +927,17 @@ automatisch noch optional.
\begin{Explain}%
Als Briefe noch von Hand geschrieben wurden, war das Postskriptum
- sehr beliebt. Es handelte sich bei diesen Nachsätzen ursprünglich um
+ sehr beliebt. Es handelte sich bei diesen Nachsätzen ursprünglich um
Angaben, die im eigentlichen Brief vergessen wurden. Bei Briefen,
- die mit \LaTeX{} geschrieben werden, ist es natürlich einfach,
- Vergessenes nachträglich in den Brief einzuarbeiten. %
+ die mit \LaTeX{} geschrieben werden, ist es natürlich einfach,
+ Vergessenes nachträglich in den Brief einzuarbeiten. %
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur
Trotzdem ist das Postskriptum noch immer sehr beliebt, kann man damit doch
- sehr schön noch einmal auf ganz andere äußerst wichtige oder eigentlich
+ sehr schön noch einmal auf ganz andere äußerst wichtige oder eigentlich
ganz unwichtige Dinge hinweisen.%
\fi
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur
- Heutzutage verwendet man das Postskriptum dagegen eher für
+ Heutzutage verwendet man das Postskriptum dagegen eher für
Hinweise, die mit dem eigentlichen Briefinhalt wenig zu tun haben.
\fi
\end{Explain}
@@ -945,11 +951,11 @@ automatisch noch optional.
\end{Declaration}
Ein \PName{Verteiler}\Index{Verteiler} kann mit der Anweisung \Macro{cc}
gesetzt werden. Der \PName{Verteiler} wird der Anweisung dabei als Argument
-übergeben. Wenn der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
+übergeben. Wenn der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
\Variable{ccseparator}\Index{Trennzeichen} nicht leer ist, wird dem
\PName{Verteiler} die \PName{Bezeichnung} und der \PName{Inhalt} dieser
Variablen vorangestellt. Der \PName{Verteiler} selbst wird dann um die
-entsprechende Breite eingerückt ausgegeben. Es empfiehlt\textnote{Tipp!}
+entsprechende Breite eingerückt ausgegeben. Es empfiehlt\textnote{Tipp!}
sich, den \PName{Verteiler} \Macro{raggedright}\IndexCmd{raggedright} zu
setzen und die einzelnen Angaben durch doppelten Backslash voneinander zu
trennen.
@@ -961,16 +967,16 @@ trennen.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum und Verteiler}]{Ergebnis eines
- kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum und Verteiler}]{Ergebnis eines
+ kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum
und Verteiler (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen
- für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
+ für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-3}}
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-3}
\end{figure}
\end{Example}
-Vor dem Verteiler wird automatisch ein Abstand eingefügt.%
+Vor dem Verteiler wird automatisch ein Abstand eingefügt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -985,17 +991,17 @@ hier von der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
\Variable{enclseparator}\Index{Trennzeichen} bestimmt wird.
\begin{Example}
Dem Beispielbrief wird nun als Anlage noch ein Auszug aus der Satzung
- beigefügt. Da es nur eine Anlage gibt, wird auch die voreingestellte
- Bezeichnung passend geändert:
+ beigefügt. Da es nur eine Anlage gibt, wird auch die voreingestellte
+ Bezeichnung passend geändert:
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-4.tex}
Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-4} zu sehen.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen und
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen und
Verteiler}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede,
- Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen und Verteiler (Datum und
- Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
+ Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen und Verteiler (Datum und
+ Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-4}}
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-4}
@@ -1007,7 +1013,7 @@ hier von der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
\EndIndexGroup
-\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
+\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument}
\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Textauszeichnungen}
@@ -1016,16 +1022,16 @@ hier von der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogen}
-Der Briefbogen ist die erste Seite und damit das Aushängeschild jedes
-Briefes. Im geschäftlichen Bereich handelt es sich dabei oft um einen
+Der Briefbogen ist die erste Seite und damit das Aushängeschild jedes
+Briefes. Im geschäftlichen Bereich handelt es sich dabei oft um einen
Vordruck, auf dem viele Elemente, wie ein Briefkopf mit Absenderinformationen
und Logo, bereits enthalten sind. Bei \KOMAScript{} sind diese Elemente frei
-positionierbar. Damit ist es nicht nur möglich, einen Briefbogen direkt
+positionierbar. Damit ist es nicht nur möglich, einen Briefbogen direkt
nachzubilden, sondern auch vorgesehene Felder, wie die Anschrift, unmittelbar
-auszufüllen. Die freie Positionierbarkeit wird über Pseudolängen (siehe
+auszufüllen. Die freie Positionierbarkeit wird über Pseudolängen (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pseudoLength} ab
\autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.pseudoLength}) erreicht. Eine schematische
-Darstellung des Briefbogens und der dafür verwendeten Variablen ist in
+Darstellung des Briefbogens und der dafür verwendeten Variablen ist in
\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.variables} zu finden. Dabei sind die Namen der
Variablen zur besseren Unterscheidung von Anweisungen und deren Argumenten
fett gedruckt.
@@ -1039,7 +1045,7 @@ Briefseiten abgesehen von der ersten.
\centering
\includegraphics[scale=0.99]{varDIN}
\caption{Schematische Darstellung des Briefbogens mit den wichtigsten
- Anweisungen und Variablen für die skizzierten Elemente}
+ Anweisungen und Variablen für die skizzierten Elemente}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.variables}
\end{figure}
@@ -1049,20 +1055,20 @@ Briefseiten abgesehen von der ersten.
\end{Declaration}
Falt- oder Falzmarken\Index{Faltmarken}\textnote{Faltmarken} sind kleine
horizontale Striche am linken und kleine vertikale Striche am oberen
-Rand. \KOMAScript{} unterstützt für den Briefbogen derzeit drei
+Rand. \KOMAScript{} unterstützt für den Briefbogen derzeit drei
konfigurierbare horizontale und eine konfigurierbare vertikale Faltmarke. Dazu
-wird noch eine horizontale Loch- oder Seitenmittenmarke unterstützt, die nicht
+wird noch eine horizontale Loch- oder Seitenmittenmarke unterstützt, die nicht
in der Vertikalen verschoben werden kann.
-Mit der Option \Option{foldmarks} können Faltmarken\Index{Faltmarke} für eine
+Mit der Option \Option{foldmarks} können Faltmarken\Index{Faltmarke} für eine
vertikale Zwei"~, Drei- oder Vierteilung und eine horizontale Zweiteilung
-aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden. Die einzelnen Teile müssen dabei nicht
-äquidistant sein. Die Positionen von drei der vier horizontalen und der
-vertikalen Marke sind über Pseudolängen konfigurierbar (siehe
+aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden. Die einzelnen Teile müssen dabei nicht
+äquidistant sein. Die Positionen von drei der vier horizontalen und der
+vertikalen Marke sind über Pseudolängen konfigurierbar (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks} ab
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos}).
-Über die Option \Option{foldmarks} können entweder mit den Standardwerten für
+Über die Option \Option{foldmarks} können entweder mit den Standardwerten für
einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind, alle konfigurierten
Faltmarken am linken und oberen Rand ein- und ausgeschaltet werden,
@@ -1074,7 +1080,7 @@ die Faltmarken nur dann angezeigt, wenn die Faltmarken nicht mit
wurden. Die genaue Position der Faltmarken ist von den Einstellungen des
Anwenders beziehungsweise der \File{lco}-Dateien (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile})
-abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und
+abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und
\PValue{TBMPL}.\textnote{Voreinstellung}
%
\begin{table}
@@ -1083,11 +1089,11 @@ abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}[{%
- Kombinierbare Werte für die Konfiguration der Faltmarken mit der
+ Kombinierbare Werte für die Konfiguration der Faltmarken mit der
Option \Option{foldmarks}%
}]{%
\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Kombinierbare Werte für die Konfiguration der Faltmarken mit der
+ Kombinierbare Werte für die Konfiguration der Faltmarken mit der
Option \Option{foldmarks}\label{tab:\LabelBase.foldmark}%
}[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
@@ -1111,36 +1117,36 @@ abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und
\end{captionbeside}
\end{table}
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie wollen alle Faltmarken außer der Lochermarke
- abschalten. Wenn die Voreinstellung zuvor noch nicht geändert wurde, können
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen alle Faltmarken außer der Lochermarke
+ abschalten. Wenn die Voreinstellung zuvor noch nicht geändert wurde, können
Sie das Abschalten wie folgt erreichen:
\begin{lstcode}
\KOMAoptions{foldmarks=blmt}
\end{lstcode}
- Besteht die Möglichkeit, dass die Voreinstellung bereits geändert wurde, so
+ Besteht die Möglichkeit, dass die Voreinstellung bereits geändert wurde, so
sollten Sie lieber auf Nummer Sicher gehen. Unser Beispiel ist dann
- entsprechend abzuändern.%
+ entsprechend abzuändern.%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-7}%
Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-7} zu sehen.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
Lochermarke}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede,
- Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke
- (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
+ Text, Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke
+ (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-7}}
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-7}
\end{figure}
\end{Example}
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{foldmark}\LabelFontElement{foldmark}%
-Über\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} das Element \FontElement{foldmark}
-kann die Farbe der Faltmarken geändert werden. Dazu werden die Anweisungen
+Ãœber\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} das Element \FontElement{foldmark}
+kann die Farbe der Faltmarken geändert werden. Dazu werden die Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verwendet. Voreingestellt ist
-keine Änderung.%
+keine Änderung.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1148,26 +1154,26 @@ keine Änderung.%
\OptionVName{enlargefirstpage}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
\begin{Explain}
- Die erste Seite eines Briefes fällt %
+ Die erste Seite eines Briefes fällt %
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur
aufgrund der vielen Konsultationselemente, wie dem Briefkopf oder der
Anschrift,
%
\fi %
immer aus dem normalen Satzspiegel. Von \Class{scrlttr2} werden Mechanismen
- bereitgestellt, um die Höhe und vertikale Ausrichtung von Kopf und Fuß der
- ersten Seite unabhängig von den Folgeseiten zu bestimmen. Würde dadurch der
- Fuß der ersten Seite in den Textbereich\Index{Text>Bereich} ragen, so wird
+ bereitgestellt, um die Höhe und vertikale Ausrichtung von Kopf und Fuß der
+ ersten Seite unabhängig von den Folgeseiten zu bestimmen. Würde dadurch der
+ Fuß der ersten Seite in den Textbereich\Index{Text>Bereich} ragen, so wird
der Textbereich der ersten Seite automatisch mit Hilfe von
\Macro{enlargethispage}\IndexCmd{enlargethispage} verkleinert.
\end{Explain}
-Soll der Textbereich auch automatisch mit \Macro{enlargethispage} vergrößert
-werden, falls der Fuß der ersten Seite dies erlaubt, so kann das mit dieser
+Soll der Textbereich auch automatisch mit \Macro{enlargethispage} vergrößert
+werden, falls der Fuß der ersten Seite dies erlaubt, so kann das mit dieser
Option erreicht werden. Es passt dann bestenfalls etwas mehr Text auf die
-erste Seite. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärung zur Pseudolänge
+erste Seite. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärung zur Pseudolänge
\PLength{firstfootvpos} auf
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}. Als
-\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter
+\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter
aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet
werden. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{false}.\textnote{Voreinstellung}%
%
@@ -1184,9 +1190,9 @@ normalerweise der Briefkopf. Bei
Bei\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
\fi%
\KOMAScript{} kann mit der Option
-\Option{firsthead} gewählt werden, ob der Briefkopf auf dem Briefbogen
-überhaupt gesetzt werden soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der
-Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+\Option{firsthead} gewählt werden, ob der Briefkopf auf dem Briefbogen
+überhaupt gesetzt werden soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der
+Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. In der Voreinstellung ist
der Briefkopf aktiviert.\textnote{Voreinstellung}%%
%
@@ -1200,22 +1206,22 @@ der Briefkopf aktiviert.\textnote{Voreinstellung}%%
Die\important{\Option{fromalign}} Option \Option{fromalign} bestimmt, wo der
Absender\Index{Absender} auf der ersten Seite platziert werden soll. Neben
verschiedenen Platzierungen im Briefkopf gibt es
-auch\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} die Möglichkeit, den Absender in der
-Absenderergänzung\Index{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}
+auch\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} die Möglichkeit, den Absender in der
+Absenderergänzung\Index{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}
unterzubringen. Gleichzeitig\textnote{Achtung!} dient diese Option als
-zentraler Schalter, um die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung überhaupt zu
+zentraler Schalter, um die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung überhaupt zu
aktivieren oder zu deaktivieren. Sind die Erweiterungen deaktiviert, so
-bleiben die übrigen nachfolgend angegebenen Optionen ohne Wirkung. Mögliche
-Werte für \Option{fromalign} sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromalign} zu
+bleiben die übrigen nachfolgend angegebenen Optionen ohne Wirkung. Mögliche
+Werte für \Option{fromalign} sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromalign} zu
entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist der Wert \PValue{left}.\textnote{Voreinstellung}%
%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{table}
\Index{Briefkopf}%
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option
\Option{fromalign} zur Platzierung des Absenders auf dem Briefbogen}]
- {Mögliche Werte für Option
+ {Mögliche Werte für Option
\Option{fromalign} zur Platzierung des Absenders auf dem Briefbogen}
\label{tab:\LabelBase.fromalign}
\begin{desctabular}
@@ -1224,26 +1230,26 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist der Wert \PValue{left}.\textnote{Voreinstellung}%
gegebenenfalls am Anfang der erweiterten Absenderangabe platziert; die
Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung werden aktiviert.}%
\entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{no}, \PValue{off}}{%
- Standardgestalt für den Absender wird verwendet; die Erweiterungen der
+ Standardgestalt für den Absender wird verwendet; die Erweiterungen der
Briefkopfgestaltung werden deaktiviert.}%
\entry{\PValue{left}}{%
- Absender steht linksbündig im Briefkopf; ein Logo wird gegebenenfalls
- rechtsbündig platziert; die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung werden
+ Absender steht linksbündig im Briefkopf; ein Logo wird gegebenenfalls
+ rechtsbündig platziert; die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung werden
aktiviert.}%
\entry{\PValue{locationleft}, \PValue{leftlocation}}{%
- Absender steht linksbündig in der Absenderergänzung; ein Logo wird
- gegebenenfalls darüber platziert; der Briefkopf wird automatisch
- deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead}
+ Absender steht linksbündig in der Absenderergänzung; ein Logo wird
+ gegebenenfalls darüber platziert; der Briefkopf wird automatisch
+ deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead}
wieder aktiviert werden.}%
\entry{\PValue{locationright}, \PValue{rightlocation},
\PValue{location}}{%
- Absender steht rechtsbündig in der Absenderergänzung; ein Logo wird
- gegebenenfalls darüber platziert; der Briefkopf wird automatisch
- deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead}
+ Absender steht rechtsbündig in der Absenderergänzung; ein Logo wird
+ gegebenenfalls darüber platziert; der Briefkopf wird automatisch
+ deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead}
wieder aktiviert werden.}%
\entry{\PValue{right}}{%
- Absender steht rechtsbündig im Briefkopf; ein Logo wird gegebenenfalls
- linksbündig platziert; die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung werden
+ Absender steht rechtsbündig im Briefkopf; ein Logo wird gegebenenfalls
+ linksbündig platziert; die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung werden
aktiviert.}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
@@ -1254,7 +1260,7 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist der Wert \PValue{left}.\textnote{Voreinstellung}%
\Variable{fromname}
\Variable{fromaddress}
\end{Declaration}
-Der\important{\Variable{fromname}} Name des Absenders wird über die Variable
+Der\important{\Variable{fromname}} Name des Absenders wird über die Variable
\Variable{fromname} bestimmt. Im Briefkopf wird dabei die \PName{Bezeichnung}
(siehe auch \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm},
\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}) nicht gesetzt.
@@ -1264,9 +1270,9 @@ Optional\important{\OptionValue{fromrule}{aftername}} kann mit Einstellung
horizontale Linie
folgen. Alternativ\important{\OptionValue{fromrule}{afteraddress}} kann die
Linie mit \OptionValue{fromrule}{afteraddress} auch unterhalb des kompletten
-Absenders gesetzt werden. Eine Übersicht über alle möglichen Einstellungen für
-die Linie bietet \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromrule}. Die Länge der Linie wird
-über die Pseudolänge \PLength{fromrulewidth}\IndexPLength{fromrulewidth}
+Absenders gesetzt werden. Eine Übersicht über alle möglichen Einstellungen für
+die Linie bietet \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromrule}. Die Länge der Linie wird
+über die Pseudolänge \PLength{fromrulewidth}\IndexPLength{fromrulewidth}
bestimmt.
\begin{table}
@@ -1275,11 +1281,11 @@ bestimmt.
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}
[{%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{fromrule} bei
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{fromrule} bei
\Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter}%
}]{%
\label{tab:\LabelBase.fromrule}%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{fromrule} zur
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{fromrule} zur
Platzierung einer horizontalen Linie im Absender des erweiterten
Briefkopfes von \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter}%
}%
@@ -1305,7 +1311,7 @@ Briefkopf nicht aktiviert. Im Standardbriefkopf wird die Linie immer nach dem
Namen gesetzt.
Unter\important{\Variable{fromaddress}} dem Namen folgt die Anschrift des
-Absenders. Diese wird über die Variable \Variable{fromaddress} bestimmt. Im
+Absenders. Diese wird über die Variable \Variable{fromaddress} bestimmt. Im
Briefkopf wird dabei die \PName{Bezeichnung} (siehe auch
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}) nicht
gesetzt.
@@ -1314,17 +1320,17 @@ gesetzt.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromaddress}\LabelFontElement{fromaddress}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromname}\LabelFontElement{fromname}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromrule}\LabelFontElement{fromrule}%
-Die Schrift, die für den kompletten Absender verwendet wird, kann über das
+Die Schrift, die für den kompletten Absender verwendet wird, kann über das
Element \FontElement{fromaddress}\IndexFontElement{fromaddress}%
\important{\FontElement{fromaddress}} eingestellt werden. Abweichungen davon
-können für den Absendernamen über das Element
+können für den Absendernamen über das Element
\FontElement{fromname}\IndexFontElement{fromname}%
-\important{\FontElement{fromname}} und für die mit \Option{fromrule} gesetzte
-Linie über das Element \FontElement{fromrule}\IndexFontElement{fromrule}%
+\important{\FontElement{fromname}} und für die mit \Option{fromrule} gesetzte
+Linie über das Element \FontElement{fromrule}\IndexFontElement{fromrule}%
\important{\FontElement{fromrule}} eingestellt werden. In der Voreinstellung
-erfolgt keinerlei Schriftumschaltung. Bei der Linie ist die Möglichkeit der
-Schriftumschaltung hauptsächlich dazu gedacht, die Farbe der Linie ändern zu
-können, um etwa Grau anstelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu
+erfolgt keinerlei Schriftumschaltung. Bei der Linie ist die Möglichkeit der
+Schriftumschaltung hauptsächlich dazu gedacht, die Farbe der Linie ändern zu
+können, um etwa Grau anstelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu
\cite{package:xcolor}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1341,36 +1347,36 @@ können, um etwa Grau anstelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-8}}\quad
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-9}}
\caption[{Beispiel: Brief mit Absender, Anschrift, Anrede,
- Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen und Verteiler}]
+ Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen und Verteiler}]
{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Absender, Anschrift, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen und Verteiler (Datum und
- Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe); links der
+ Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen und Verteiler (Datum und
+ Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe); links der
Standardbriefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false},
rechts der
erweiterte Briefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9}
\end{figure}
- Dabei wird zunächst einmal nicht der erweiterte Briefkopf, sondern nur der
+ Dabei wird zunächst einmal nicht der erweiterte Briefkopf, sondern nur der
Standardbriefkopf verwendet. Das Ergebnis ist in
\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9} links zu sehen. Im Vergleich dazu ist
rechts daneben das gleiche Beispiel, jedoch mit Option
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}, also mit den aktivierten
- Erweiterungen für den Briefkopf, abgebildet. Wie zu sehen ist, hat diese
- Variante zunächst einmal keine Linie.
+ Erweiterungen für den Briefkopf, abgebildet. Wie zu sehen ist, hat diese
+ Variante zunächst einmal keine Linie.
In \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9} taucht nun auch erstmals eine Signatur
- unter dem Gruß auf. Diese wird automatisch aus dem Absendername
+ unter dem Gruß auf. Diese wird automatisch aus dem Absendername
gewonnen. Wie sie konfiguriert werden kann, ist in
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} zu
finden.
- Nun soll der Brief mit aktivierter Erweiterung für den Briefkopf mit Hilfe
+ Nun soll der Brief mit aktivierter Erweiterung für den Briefkopf mit Hilfe
der Option \Option{fromrule} auch noch eine Linie unter dem Namen erhalten:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-11.tex}%
Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-10-11} rechts zu sehen. %
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur
Im Vergleich dazu ist links daneben das gleiche Beispiel noch einmal mit dem
- Standardbriefkopf und ohne Reaktion auf die zusätzliche Option.
+ Standardbriefkopf und ohne Reaktion auf die zusätzliche Option.
%
\else %
Links steht zum Vergleich ein Beispiel mit Standardbriefkopf.
@@ -1382,10 +1388,10 @@ können, um etwa Grau anstelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-10}}\quad
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-11}}
\caption[{Beispiel: Brief mit Absender, Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
Lochermarke}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Absender, Trennlinie,
- Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen,
- Verteiler und Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für
+ Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen,
+ Verteiler und Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für
DIN-Briefe); links der Standardbriefkopf mit
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, rechts der erweiterte
Briefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}}
@@ -1396,21 +1402,21 @@ können, um etwa Grau anstelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu
Ein\textnote{Achtung!} wichtiger Hinweis betrifft \iffree{noch}{\unskip} die
Absenderadresse: Innerhalb der Absenderadresse werden einzelne Teilangaben
durch doppelten Backslash voneinander getrennt. Solche Teilangaben sind
-beispielsweise Straße und Hausnummer, Postleitzahl und Ort oder eine
-Länderangabe. Dieser doppelte Backslash wird je nach Verwendung der
-Absenderadresse unterschiedlich interpretiert und ist nicht zwangsläufig als
-Zeilenumbruch zu verstehen. Absätze, vertikale Abstände und Ähnliches sind
+beispielsweise Straße und Hausnummer, Postleitzahl und Ort oder eine
+Länderangabe. Dieser doppelte Backslash wird je nach Verwendung der
+Absenderadresse unterschiedlich interpretiert und ist nicht zwangsläufig als
+Zeilenumbruch zu verstehen. Absätze, vertikale Abstände und Ähnliches sind
innerhalb der Absenderangaben normalerweise nicht gestattet%
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur
. Man muss \KOMAScript{} schon sehr genau kennen, um solche Mittel
-gegebenenfalls sinnvoll im Absender einsetzen zu können. Außerdem sollte man
-in dem Fall unbedingt die Variablen für Rücksendeadresse (siehe Variable
+gegebenenfalls sinnvoll im Absender einsetzen zu können. Außerdem sollte man
+in dem Fall unbedingt die Variablen für Rücksendeadresse (siehe Variable
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}) und Signatur (siehe Variable
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}) selbst setzen.%
\else %
-\ und hätten außerdem gegebenenfalls Auswirkungen auf die Rücksendeadresse
+\ und hätten außerdem gegebenenfalls Auswirkungen auf die Rücksendeadresse
(siehe Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}) und Signatur (siehe Variable
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature},
@@ -1421,7 +1427,7 @@ in dem Fall unbedingt die Variablen für Rücksendeadresse (siehe Variable
\begin{Declaration}
- \OptionVName{symbolicnames}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
+ \OptionVName{symbolicnames}{Wert}
\OptionVName{fromphone}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\OptionVName{frommobilephone}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\OptionVName{fromfax}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
@@ -1438,44 +1444,51 @@ in dem Fall unbedingt die Variablen für Rücksendeadresse (siehe Variable
\Variable{emailseparator}
\Variable{urlseparator}
\end{Declaration}%
-Mit Hilfe der fünf Optionen \Option{fromphone},
+Mit Hilfe der fünf Optionen \Option{fromphone},
\Option{frommobilephone}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, \Option{fromfax},
\Option{fromemail} und \Option{fromurl} kann bestimmt werden, ob die
Telefonnummer\Index{Telefon}, die
Mobiltelefonnummer\Index{Mobiltelefon}\Index{Handy}, die Faxnummer\Index{Fax},
die E-Mail-Adresse und die URL im Absender\Index{Absender} gesetzt werden
-soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache
+soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache
Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}
verwendet werden. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist jeweils
-\PValue{false}. Die Inhalte selbst werden über die gleichnamigen Variablen
-bestimmt. Die Voreinstellungen für die dabei verwendeten Bezeichnungen sind
+\PValue{false}. Die Inhalte selbst werden über die gleichnamigen Variablen
+bestimmt. Die Voreinstellungen für die dabei verwendeten Bezeichnungen sind
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm} zu entnehmen, die verwendeten Trennzeichen,
die zwischen der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} einer Variablen
-eingefügt werden, \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator}.
+eingefügt werden, \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator}.
Mit\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important{\Option{symbolicnames}}
Option \Option{symbolicnames} kann diese Voreinstellung auf einen Schlag
-geändert werden. Die Option versteht die \PName{Ein-Aus-Werte} für einfache
-Schalter, wie sie in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
-\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Durch Aktivierung der Option
-werden statt der sprachabhängigen Bezeichner
+geändert werden. Die Option versteht als \PName{Wert} die
+\PName{Ein-Aus-Werte} für einfache Schalter, wie sie in
+\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben
+sind. Die\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}
+Aktivierung der Option entspricht dabei dem \PName{Wert} \PValue{marvosym},
+wodurch statt der sprachabhängigen Bezeichner
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname},
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname},
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename} und
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename} Symbole aus dem
-\Package{marvosym}\IndexPackage{marvosym}-Paket verwendet. Gleichzeitig
-entfällt der Doppelpunkt bei der Definition der Trennzeichen. Für die URL
-entfallen in diesem Fall sowohl der sprachabhängige Bezeichner als auch das
-Trennzeichen. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass das Paket
-\Package{marvosym} gegebenenfalls selbst zu laden ist, falls die Option erst
-nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird.
+\Package{marvosym}\IndexPackage{marvosym}-Paket verwendet werden. Gleichzeitig
+entfällt der Doppelpunkt bei der Definition der Trennzeichen. Für die URL
+entfallen in diesem Fall sowohl der sprachabhängige Bezeichner als auch das
+Trennzeichen. Mit \OptionValue{symbolicnames}{fontawsome} oder
+\OptionValue{symbolicnames}{awesome} werden stattdessen Symbole von Paket
+\Package{fontawesome}\IndexPackage{fontawesome} verwendet. Dabei wird auch für
+die URL ein passendes Symbol aktiviert. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!},
+dass das Paket \Package{marvosym} oder \Package{fontawesome} gegebenenfalls
+selbst in der Dokumentpräambel zu laden ist, falls mit der Option erst nach
+\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die Verwendung eines dieser Pakete
+aktiviert wird.
\begin{table}
\centering
- \caption[{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen für die\newline
+ \caption[{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen für die\newline
Absenderangaben im Briefkopf}]{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen
- für die Absenderangaben im Briefkopf (die Bezeichnungen und Inhalte der
- verwendeten Variablen für Trennzeichen ist
+ für die Absenderangaben im Briefkopf (die Bezeichnungen und Inhalte der
+ verwendeten Variablen für Trennzeichen ist
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator} zu entnehmen)}
\begin{desctabular}[1.8em]
\ventry{fromemail}{%
@@ -1505,7 +1518,7 @@ nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird.
\caption
% \begin{captionbeside}
{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen und Inhalte der Trennzeichen
- für die Absenderangaben im Briefkopf ohne Option
+ für die Absenderangaben im Briefkopf ohne Option
\Option{symbolicnumbers}}
% [l]
\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{llX}
@@ -1526,13 +1539,13 @@ nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird.
\begin{Example}
Herr Musterfrau aus unserem Beispiel hat auch Telefon und eine
- E-Mail-Adresse. Diese möchte er ebenfalls im Briefkopf haben. Gleichzeitig
+ E-Mail-Adresse. Diese möchte er ebenfalls im Briefkopf haben. Gleichzeitig
soll die Trennlinie nun nach dem Briefkopf stehen. Also gibt er die
- entsprechenden Optionen an und setzt auch die zugehörigen Variablen:%
+ entsprechenden Optionen an und setzt auch die zugehörigen Variablen:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-12.tex}%
Das Ergebnis aus \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13} links ist jedoch
- ernüchternd. Die Optionen werden ignoriert. Das liegt daran, dass diese
- zusätzlichen Variablen und Optionen nur im erweiterten Briefkopf verwendet
+ ernüchternd. Die Optionen werden ignoriert. Das liegt daran, dass diese
+ zusätzlichen Variablen und Optionen nur im erweiterten Briefkopf verwendet
werden. Es muss also, wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13}, rechts die
Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fromalign} verwendet werden:
\begin{figure}
@@ -1540,11 +1553,11 @@ nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird.
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-12}}\quad
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-13}}
\caption[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Trennlinie, Anschrift,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler
und Lochermarke; Standard- vs. erweiterter Briefkopf}]{Ergebnis eines
kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender, Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede,
- Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
- Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe);
+ Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe);
links der Standardbriefkopf mit
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, rechts der erweiterte
Briefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}}
@@ -1552,8 +1565,8 @@ nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird.
\end{figure}
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-13.tex}
- Den Vergleich zweier weiterer Alternativen mit linksbündigem Absender durch
- Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{left} und rechtsbündigem
+ Den Vergleich zweier weiterer Alternativen mit linksbündigem Absender durch
+ Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{left} und rechtsbündigem
Absender durch Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{right} zeigt
\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-14-15}.
\begin{figure}
@@ -1561,14 +1574,14 @@ nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird.
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-14}}\quad
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-15}}
\caption[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Trennlinie, Anschrift,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler
- und Lochermarke; links- vs. rechtsbündiger Briefkopf}]{Ergebnis eines
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler
+ und Lochermarke; links- vs. rechtsbündiger Briefkopf}]{Ergebnis eines
kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender, Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede,
- Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
- Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe);
- links mit linksbündigem Kopf durch
+ Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe);
+ links mit linksbündigem Kopf durch
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{left}, rechts mit Option
- \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{right} und damit rechtsbündigem
+ \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{right} und damit rechtsbündigem
Kopf}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-14-15}
\end{figure}
@@ -1585,23 +1598,23 @@ nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird.
\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromlogo}%
Mit der Option \Option{fromlogo} kann bestimmt werden, ob ein Logo\Index{Logo}
im Briefkopf gesetzt werden soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer
-der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet
werden. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist \PValue{false}, also kein
-Logo. Das Logo selbst wird über die Variable \Variable{fromlogo}
-definiert. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} für das Logo ist in der Voreinstellung leer
+Logo. Das Logo selbst wird über die Variable \Variable{fromlogo}
+definiert. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} für das Logo ist in der Voreinstellung leer
und wird von \KOMAScript{} auch nicht verwendet (siehe auch
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}).%
\begin{Example}
Herr Musterfrau findet es besonders schick, wenn er seine Briefe mit einem
Logo versieht. Sein Logo hat er als Grafikdatei gespeichert, die er gerne
- mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{includegraphics} laden würde. Dazu bindet er
- zusätzlich das Paket \Package{graphics}\IndexPackage{graphics} (siehe
+ mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{includegraphics} laden würde. Dazu bindet er
+ zusätzlich das Paket \Package{graphics}\IndexPackage{graphics} (siehe
\cite{package:graphics}) ein.%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-16}%
Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18},
\autopageref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18} links oben zu sehen. Die beiden
- anderen Bilder in dieser Abbildung zeigen das Ergebnis bei rechtsbündigem
+ anderen Bilder in dieser Abbildung zeigen das Ergebnis bei rechtsbündigem
und bei zentriertem Absender.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
@@ -1609,14 +1622,14 @@ und wird von \KOMAScript{} auch nicht verwendet (siehe auch
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-16}}\quad
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-17}}\par\bigskip}
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo,
- Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur,
+ Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur,
Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke; Absender links
vs. rechts vs. zentriert}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit
erweitertem Absender, Logo, Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
- Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für
- DIN-Briefe); links, oben mit linksbündigem Absender, rechts daneben
- mit zentriertem Absender und rechts mit rechtsbündigem Absender}[l]
+ Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für
+ DIN-Briefe); links, oben mit linksbündigem Absender, rechts daneben
+ mit zentriertem Absender und rechts mit rechtsbündigem Absender}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-18}}\quad
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18}
@@ -1629,21 +1642,21 @@ und wird von \KOMAScript{} auch nicht verwendet (siehe auch
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{firsthead}
\end{Declaration}
-In vielen Fällen reichen die Möglichkeiten aus, die \Class{scrlttr2} über
-Optionen und obige Variablen für die Gestaltung des Briefkopfes bietet. In
-einigen Fällen will man jedoch den Briefkopf freier gestalten können. In
-diesen Fällen muss man auf die Möglichkeiten der vordefinierten Briefköpfe,
-die über die oben erwähnten Option ausgewählt werden können,
+In vielen Fällen reichen die Möglichkeiten aus, die \Class{scrlttr2} über
+Optionen und obige Variablen für die Gestaltung des Briefkopfes bietet. In
+einigen Fällen will man jedoch den Briefkopf freier gestalten können. In
+diesen Fällen muss man auf die Möglichkeiten der vordefinierten Briefköpfe,
+die über die oben erwähnten Option ausgewählt werden können,
verzichten. Stattdessen gestaltet man sich seinen Briefkopf frei. Dazu
-definiert man den gewünschten Aufbau über den \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
-\Variable{firsthead}. Dabei können beispielsweise mit Hilfe der
+definiert man den gewünschten Aufbau über den \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
+\Variable{firsthead}. Dabei können beispielsweise mit Hilfe der
\Macro{parbox}-Anweisung (siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) mehrere Boxen neben-
und untereinander gesetzt werden. Einem versierten Anwender sollte es so
-möglich sein, seinen eigenen Briefkopf zu gestalten. Natürlich kann und sollte
+möglich sein, seinen eigenen Briefkopf zu gestalten. Natürlich kann und sollte
man dabei auch Zugriffe auf andere Variablen mit Hilfe von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar} nehmen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der
Variablen \Variable{firsthead} wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht verwendet.
-\iffree{}{Ein ausführliches Beispiel für Definition eines Briefkopfes wird in
+\iffree{}{Ein ausführliches Beispiel für Definition eines Briefkopfes wird in
\autoref{cha:modernletters} behandelt.}%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1651,7 +1664,7 @@ Variablen \Variable{firsthead} wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht verwendet.
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{addrfield}{Modus}
\OptionVName{backaddress}{Wert}
- \OptionVName{priority}{Priorität}
+ \OptionVName{priority}{Priorität}
\Variable{toname}
\Variable{toaddress}
\Variable{backaddress}
@@ -1665,45 +1678,45 @@ Variablen \Variable{firsthead} wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht verwendet.
\Variable{addresseeimage}
\end{Declaration}%
\BeginIndex{}{Anschrift}%
-Mit der Option \Option{addrfield} kann gewählt werden, ob ein Anschriftfeld
+Mit der Option \Option{addrfield} kann gewählt werden, ob ein Anschriftfeld
gesetzt werden soll oder nicht. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist
mit \PValue{true} die Verwendung eines Anschriftfeldes. Die Option versteht
die in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
%, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield}
-angegebenen Werte für den \PName{Modus}. Bei den Werten \PValue{true},
+angegebenen Werte für den \PName{Modus}. Bei den Werten \PValue{true},
\PValue{topaligned}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and
\Package{scrletter}}, \PValue{PP} und \PValue{backgroundimage} werden Name
-und Adresse des Empfängers, die im Anschriftfeld gesetzt werden, über das
+und Adresse des Empfängers, die im Anschriftfeld gesetzt werden, über das
Argument der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.letter})
-bestimmt. Diese Angaben werden außerdem in die Variablen \Variable{toname} und
+bestimmt. Diese Angaben werden außerdem in die Variablen \Variable{toname} und
\Variable{toaddress} kopiert.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{addressee}\LabelFontElement{addressee}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toname}\LabelFontElement{toname}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toaddress}\LabelFontElement{toaddress}%
-Die voreingestellten Schriftarten können\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
-über die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
+Die voreingestellten Schriftarten können\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
+über die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, ab
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Dabei existieren
-drei Elemente. Zunächst gibt es das Element
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Dabei existieren
+drei Elemente. Zunächst gibt es das Element
\FontElement{addressee}\IndexFontElement{addressee}%
-\important{\FontElement{addressee}}, das generell für die Anschrift zuständig
+\important{\FontElement{addressee}}, das generell für die Anschrift zuständig
ist. Dazu gibt es die Elemente
\FontElement{toname}\IndexFontElement{toname}\important{\FontElement{toname}}
und \FontElement{toaddress}\IndexFontElement{toaddress}%
\important{\FontElement{toaddress}}, die sich nur auf den Namen bzw. die
-Adresse des Empfängers beziehen. Für \FontElement{toname} und
-\FontElement{toaddress} können also Abweichungen von der Einstellung für
+Adresse des Empfängers beziehen. Für \FontElement{toname} und
+\FontElement{toaddress} können also Abweichungen von der Einstellung für
\FontElement{addressee} definiert werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{addrfield} bei
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{addrfield} bei
\Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter}}]
- {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{addrfield} zur
+ {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{addrfield} zur
Auswahl der Art der Anschrift%
\label{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield}}%
\begin{desctabular}
@@ -1712,74 +1725,74 @@ Adresse des Empfängers beziehen. Für \FontElement{toname} und
\PValue{ppbackgroundimage}, \PValue{ppBackgroundImage},
\PValue{ppBackGroundImage}}{%
Es wird eine Anschrift mit einer in Variable \Variable{addresseeimage}
- abgelegten Hintergrundgrafik als Port-Payé-Kopf (P.\,P.-Kopf), aber ohne
- Rücksendeadresse und Versandart gesetzt.}%
+ abgelegten Hintergrundgrafik als Port-Payé-Kopf (P.\,P.-Kopf), aber ohne
+ Rücksendeadresse und Versandart gesetzt.}%
\entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{off}, \PValue{no}}{%
Es wird keine Anschrift gesetzt.}%
\entry{\PValue{image}, \PValue{Image}, \PValue{PPimage}, \PValue{PPImage},
\PValue{ppimage}, \PValue{ppImage}}{%
Eine in Variable \Variable{addresseeimage} abgelegte Abbildung wird als
- Anschrift mit Port-Payé gesetzt. Adressinformationen und Angaben für
- Rücksendeadresse, Versandart oder Priorität werden ignoriert.}%
+ Anschrift mit Port-Payé gesetzt. Adressinformationen und Angaben für
+ Rücksendeadresse, Versandart oder Priorität werden ignoriert.}%
\entry{\PValue{PP}, \PValue{pp}, \PValue{PPexplicite},
\PValue{PPExplicite}, \PValue{ppexplicite}, \PValue{ppExplicite}}{%
- Es wird eine Anschrift mit explizit über die Variablen
+ Es wird eine Anschrift mit explizit über die Variablen
\Variable{fromzipcode}, \Variable{place} und \Variable{PPcode}
- ausgefülltem Port-Payé-Kopf (P.\,P.-Kopf), gegebenenfalls mit Priorität
- und über Variable \Variable{PPdatamatrix} gesetzter Data-Matrix, aber
- ohne Rücksendeadresse und Versandart gesetzt.}%
+ ausgefülltem Port-Payé-Kopf (P.\,P.-Kopf), gegebenenfalls mit Priorität
+ und über Variable \Variable{PPdatamatrix} gesetzter Data-Matrix, aber
+ ohne Rücksendeadresse und Versandart gesetzt.}%
\entry{\PValue{topaligned}, \PValue{alignedtop}%
\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}}{%
- Es wird eine Anschrift mit Rücksendeadresse und Versandart oder
- Priorität gesetzt. Die Anschrift wird dabei unter der Versandart nicht
+ Es wird eine Anschrift mit Rücksendeadresse und Versandart oder
+ Priorität gesetzt. Die Anschrift wird dabei unter der Versandart nicht
vertikal zentriert.}%
\entry{\PValue{true}, \PValue{on}, \PValue{yes}}{%
- Es wird eine Anschrift mit Rücksendeadresse und Versandart oder
- Priorität gesetzt.}%
+ Es wird eine Anschrift mit Rücksendeadresse und Versandart oder
+ Priorität gesetzt.}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}%
Im Anschriftfeld wird in der Voreinstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{true}
-zusätzlich noch die unterstrichene Rücksendeadresse gesetzt. Mit Option
-\Option{backaddress} kann gewählt werden, ob und in welcher Form die
-Rücksendeadresse\Index{Ruecksendeadresse=Rücksendeadresse} für
-Fensterbriefumschläge im Anschriftfeld gesetzt werden soll. Die
+zusätzlich noch die unterstrichene Rücksendeadresse gesetzt. Mit Option
+\Option{backaddress} kann gewählt werden, ob und in welcher Form die
+Rücksendeadresse\Index{Ruecksendeadresse=Rücksendeadresse} für
+Fensterbriefumschläge im Anschriftfeld gesetzt werden soll. Die
Option\important{\OptionValue{backaddress}{false}} versteht dazu einerseits
-die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Dabei bleibt der Stil der
-Rücksendeadresse unverändert. Beim Einschalten der Rücksendeadresse kann
+Rücksendeadresse unverändert. Beim Einschalten der Rücksendeadresse kann
andererseits\ChangedAt{v2.96}{\Class{scrlttr2}} gleichzeitig auch der Stil der
-Rücksendeadresse gewählt werden. So aktiviert der Wert
+Rücksendeadresse gewählt werden. So aktiviert der Wert
\PValue{underlined}\important{\OptionValue{backaddress}{underlined}} die
-unterstrichene Rücksendeadresse, während
+unterstrichene Rücksendeadresse, während
\PValue{plain}\important{\OptionValue{backaddress}{plain}} den Stil ohne
-Unterstreichung auswählt. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist
-\PValue{underlined}, also das Setzen der unterstrichenen Rücksendeadresse.
+Unterstreichung auswählt. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist
+\PValue{underlined}, also das Setzen der unterstrichenen Rücksendeadresse.
-Die Rücksendeadresse selbst wird über den \PName{Inhalt} der Variable
-\Variable{backaddress} bestimmt. Voreingestellt ist hier der über
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname} angegebene Name und die über
+Die Rücksendeadresse selbst wird über den \PName{Inhalt} der Variable
+\Variable{backaddress} bestimmt. Voreingestellt ist hier der über
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname} angegebene Name und die über
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromaddress} angegebene Adresse, wobei der
Doppelbackslash in diesem Fall durch den Inhalt der Variablen
-\Variable{backaddressseparator} ersetzt wird. Für diese ist ein Komma, gefolgt
+\Variable{backaddressseparator} ersetzt wird. Für diese ist ein Komma, gefolgt
von einem nicht umbrechbaren Leerzeichen vordefiniert. Die \PName{Bezeichnung}
der Variablen \Variable{backaddress} wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt.
\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{backaddress}%
\LabelFontElement{backaddress}%
-Die Schriftart der Rücksendeadresse ist über das Element
+Die Schriftart der Rücksendeadresse ist über das Element
\FontElement{backaddress}\important{\FontElement{backaddress}}
konfigurierbar. Voreingestellt ist hierbei \Macro{sffamily} (siehe
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}). Vor der Anwendung der
-konfigurierten Schriftumschaltung wird noch \Macro{scriptsize} ausgeführt.%
+konfigurierten Schriftumschaltung wird noch \Macro{scriptsize} ausgeführt.%
\EndIndexGroup
-Während die Adresse in der Voreinstellung
+Während die Adresse in der Voreinstellung
\OptionValue{addrfield}{true}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and
- \Package{scrletter}} im für die Anschrift verfügbaren Platz vertikal
-zentriert wird, entfällt die Zentrierung mit
+ \Package{scrletter}} im für die Anschrift verfügbaren Platz vertikal
+zentriert wird, entfällt die Zentrierung mit
\OptionValue{addrfield}{topaligned}%
-\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{topaligned}}. Sie wird dann oben bündig im
-verfügbaren Platz gesetzt.
+\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{topaligned}}. Sie wird dann oben bündig im
+verfügbaren Platz gesetzt.
\begin{table}
% \centering
@@ -1787,10 +1800,10 @@ verfügbaren Platz gesetzt.
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}[{%
- Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Anschriftfensters%
+ Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Anschriftfensters%
}]{%
\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Voreinstellungen für die Schrift der Elemente des Anschriftfensters%
+ Voreinstellungen für die Schrift der Elemente des Anschriftfensters%
\label{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}%
}%
[l]
@@ -1830,23 +1843,23 @@ verfügbaren Platz gesetzt.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{specialmail}\LabelFontElement{specialmail}
-Zwischen Rücksendeadresse und Empfängeradresse kann bei \iffree{der
+Zwischen Rücksendeadresse und Empfängeradresse kann bei \iffree{der
}{}Standardeinstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{true} noch eine optionale
Versandart\Index{Versandart} gesetzt werden. Diese wird genau dann gesetzt,
wenn die Variable \Variable{specialmail} einen \PName{Inhalt} hat und
-\OptionValue{priority}{manual}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} gewählt
+\OptionValue{priority}{manual}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} gewählt
wird, was der Voreinstellung entspricht. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} von
\Variable{specialmail} wird durch \Class{scrlttr2} nicht genutzt. Die
-Ausrichtung wird mit Hilfe der Pseudolängen \PLength{specialmailindent} und
+Ausrichtung wird mit Hilfe der Pseudolängen \PLength{specialmailindent} und
\PLength{specialmailrightindent} (siehe
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent}) festgelegt. Die
voreingestellte Schriftart des Elements\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}}
\FontElement{specialmail}\important{\FontElement{specialmail}}, die Sie
-\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe
+\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe
der Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-verändert werden.%
+verändert werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
\BeginIndexGroup
@@ -1856,85 +1869,85 @@ Wird\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important{\normalcolor
\OptionValue{priority}{A}\\
\normalcolor\OptionValue{priority}{B}} hingegen mit
\OptionValue{priority}{A} oder \OptionValue{priority}{B} (siehe
-\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.priority}) eine internationale Priorität ausgewählt,
+\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.priority}) eine internationale Priorität ausgewählt,
so wird diese bei \OptionValue{addrfield}{true} als Versandart und bei
\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}} an
-entsprechender Stelle im Port-Payé-Kopf gesetzt. Dabei wird die
+entsprechender Stelle im Port-Payé-Kopf gesetzt. Dabei wird die
Grundschrift\important{\FontElement{priority}\\
- \FontElement{prioritykey}} über das Element \FontElement{priority} und die
-davon abweichende Schrift für den Prioritätsschlüssel, »A« oder »B«, über das
+ \FontElement{prioritykey}} über das Element \FontElement{priority} und die
+davon abweichende Schrift für den Prioritätsschlüssel, »A« oder »B«, über das
Element \FontElement{prioritykey} bestimmt. Die voreingestellten Schriftarten
der beiden Elemente, die Sie \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}
-entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
+entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-verändert werden.%
+verändert werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{priority} bei
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{priority} bei
\Class{scrlttr2} und \Class{scrletter}}]
- {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{priority} zur
- Auswahl einer internationalen Priorität im Adressfeld}
+ {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{priority} zur
+ Auswahl einer internationalen Priorität im Adressfeld}
\label{tab:\LabelBase.priority}
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{off}, \PValue{no}, \PValue{manual}}{%
- Es wird keine Priorität gesetzt.}%
+ Es wird keine Priorität gesetzt.}%
\entry{\PValue{B}, \PValue{b}, \PValue{economy}, \PValue{Economy},
\PValue{ECONOMY}, \PValue{B-ECONOMY}, \PValue{B-Economy},
\PValue{b-economy}}{%
- Es wird die internationale Priorität B-Economy gesetzt. Bei
+ Es wird die internationale Priorität B-Economy gesetzt. Bei
\OptionValue{addrfield}{true} erfolgt dies anstelle der Versandart.}%
\entry{\PValue{A}, \PValue{a}, \PValue{priority}, \PValue{Priority},
\PValue{PRIORITY}, \PValue{A-PRIORITY}, \PValue{A-Priority},
\PValue{a-priority}}{%
- Es wird die internationale Priorität A-Priority gesetzt. Bei
+ Es wird die internationale Priorität A-Priority gesetzt. Bei
\OptionValue{addrfield}{true} erfolgt dies anstelle der Versandart.}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
Bei\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}}
-\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} wird im Port-Payé-Kopf die Postleitzahl aus der
+\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} wird im Port-Payé-Kopf die Postleitzahl aus der
Variablen \Variable{fromzipcode} und der Ort aus der Variablen
\Variable{place} gesetzt. Dabei wird der Postleitzahl, also dem \PName{Inhalt}
von \Variable{fromzipcode}, die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen
\Variable{fromzipcode}, gefolgt vom \PName{Inhalt} von
-\Variable{zipcodeseparator} vorangestellt. Für diese \PName{Bezeichnung} hängt
+\Variable{zipcodeseparator} vorangestellt. Für diese \PName{Bezeichnung} hängt
die Voreinstellung von der verwendeten \File{lco}-Datei (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile})
-ab. Für den \PName{Inhalt} von \Variable{zipcodeseparator} ist hingegen
+ab. Für den \PName{Inhalt} von \Variable{zipcodeseparator} ist hingegen
\iffalse % Umbruchvarianten
ein kleiner Abstand, gefolgt von einem Streckenstrich, gefolgt von einem
kleinen Abstand (\Macro{,}\texttt{-{}-}\Macro{,}) %
\else%
-»\Macro{,}\texttt{-{}-}\Macro{,}« %
+»\Macro{,}\texttt{-{}-}\Macro{,}« %
\fi%
voreingestellt.
-Darüber\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} hinaus wird bei
+Darüber\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} hinaus wird bei
\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}} im
-Port-Payé-Kopf auch noch ein Code gesetzt, der den Absender eindeutig
+Port-Payé-Kopf auch noch ein Code gesetzt, der den Absender eindeutig
identifiziert. Dieser ist in Variable \Variable{PPcode} abgelegt. Rechts von
-der Anschrift kann zusätzlich eine Data-Matrix gesetzt werden, die in Variable
+der Anschrift kann zusätzlich eine Data-Matrix gesetzt werden, die in Variable
\Variable{PPdatamatrix} abgelegt ist.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{PPdata}\LabelFontElement{PPdata}
Postleitzahl\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, Ort und Code werden in der
-Voreinstellung mit einer Schrift der Größe 8\,pt gesetzt. Dabei wird die
+Voreinstellung mit einer Schrift der Größe 8\,pt gesetzt. Dabei wird die
Schrift des Elements \FontElement{PPdata}%
\important{\FontElement{PPdata}} verwendet. Dessen Voreinstellung ist
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} zu entnehmen und kann mit Hilfe der
Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-verändert werden.%
+verändert werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{PPlogo}\LabelFontElement{PPlogo}
-Für den Port-Payé-Schriftzug »P.P.« kommt dagegen die Schrift des Elements
+Für den Port-Payé-Schriftzug »P.P.« kommt dagegen die Schrift des Elements
\FontElement{PPlogo}\important{\FontElement{PPlogo}} zur Anwendung. Dessen
Voreinstellung ist ebenfalls Tabelle
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} zu entnehmen.%
@@ -1946,24 +1959,24 @@ Bei\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage}\\
und \OptionValue{addrfield}{image} wird eine Abbildung in das Adressfenster
gesetzt. Diese ist im \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen \Variable{addresseeimage}
abgelegt. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} dieser Variablen wird von \KOMAScript{}
-nicht genutzt. Während bei Einstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{image} außer der
+nicht genutzt. Während bei Einstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{image} außer der
Abbildung nichts gesetzt wird, wird bei
-\OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage} zusätzlich noch die Anschrift aus dem
+\OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage} zusätzlich noch die Anschrift aus dem
obligatorischen Argument der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter}-Umgebung
ausgegeben.
-Die Anordnung des Port-Payé-Kopfes wird ebenso wie die Anordnung der
-Port-Payé-Anschrift über die Pseudolängen \PLength{toaddrindent} (siehe
+Die Anordnung des Port-Payé-Kopfes wird ebenso wie die Anordnung der
+Port-Payé-Anschrift über die Pseudolängen \PLength{toaddrindent} (siehe
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent}) sowie
\PLength{PPheadwidth} und \PLength{PPheadheight} (siehe
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight}) bestimmt. Für die
-Anordnung der Data-Matrix ist die Pseudolänge \PLength{PPdatamatrixvskip}
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight}) bestimmt. Für die
+Anordnung der Data-Matrix ist die Pseudolänge \PLength{PPdatamatrixvskip}
(siehe \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip})
-zuständig.
+zuständig.
-Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird an dieser Stelle ausdrücklich darauf hingewiesen,
+Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird an dieser Stelle ausdrücklich darauf hingewiesen,
dass \KOMAScript{} selbst keine externen Abbildungen setzen kann, sollen also
-über die Variablen \Variable{addresseeimage} oder \Variable{PPdatamatrix}
+über die Variablen \Variable{addresseeimage} oder \Variable{PPdatamatrix}
externe Abbildungen gesetzt werden, so ist beispielsweise das Grafikpaket
\Package{graphics}\IndexPackage{graphics} oder
\Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} zu laden und in den Variablen dessen
@@ -1974,22 +1987,22 @@ Anweisung \Macro{includegraphics} zu verwenden.%
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{locfield}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}
-\BeginIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}%
Neben dem Anschriftfeld setzt \Class{scrlttr2} noch ein Feld mit erweiterter
-Absenderangabe. Der Inhalt ist frei wählbar. Je\important{%
+Absenderangabe. Der Inhalt ist frei wählbar. Je\important{%
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{locationleft}\\
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}\\
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{locationright}} nach Einstellung der
-oben erklärten Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fromalign} wird es außerdem
-für das Logo des Absenders oder den Absender selbst mitverwendet. Die Breite
+oben erklärten Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fromalign} wird es außerdem
+für das Logo des Absenders oder den Absender selbst mitverwendet. Die Breite
dieses Feldes kann beispielsweise in einer \File{lco}-Datei (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}) gesetzt werden. Wird dort die Breite 0
-gesetzt, so kann über die Option \Option{locfield} zwischen zwei
-unterschiedlichen Voreinstellungen für die Breite dieses Feldes gewählt
+gesetzt, so kann über die Option \Option{locfield} zwischen zwei
+unterschiedlichen Voreinstellungen für die Breite dieses Feldes gewählt
werden. Dies ist bei der Mehrzahl der \File{lco}-Dateien der Fall, die
-\KOMAScript{} beiliegen. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärungen zur Pseudolänge
+\KOMAScript{} beiliegen. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärungen zur Pseudolänge
\PLength{locwidth} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField},
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth}. Mögliche Werte für die Option
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth}. Mögliche Werte für die Option
sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.locfield} zu
entnehmen. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist \PValue{narrow}.
%
@@ -1998,16 +2011,16 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist \PValue{narrow}.
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}%
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{locfield} bei
+ [{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{locfield} bei
\Class{scrlttr2}}]
- {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{locfield} zur Wahl der Breite des
- Feldes für die Absenderergänzung bei \Class{scrlttr2}%
+ {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{locfield} zur Wahl der Breite des
+ Feldes für die Absenderergänzung bei \Class{scrlttr2}%
\label{tab:\LabelBase.locfield}}%
[l]
\begin{minipage}[t]{.55\linewidth}
\begin{desctabular}[t]
- \pventry{narrow}{schmales Feld für Absenderergänzungen}%
- \pventry{wide}{breites Feld für Absenderergänzungen}%
+ \pventry{narrow}{schmales Feld für Absenderergänzungen}%
+ \pventry{wide}{breites Feld für Absenderergänzungen}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{minipage}
\end{captionbeside}
@@ -2016,27 +2029,27 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist \PValue{narrow}.
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{location}
\end{Declaration}
-Der Inhalt der Absenderergänzung, soweit er nicht durch Logo oder den Absender
-selbst belegt ist, wird mit der Variablen \Variable{location} festgelegt. Für
-den \PName{Inhalt} dieser Variablen dürfen auch Formatierungsanweisungen, wie
+Der Inhalt der Absenderergänzung, soweit er nicht durch Logo oder den Absender
+selbst belegt ist, wird mit der Variablen \Variable{location} festgelegt. Für
+den \PName{Inhalt} dieser Variablen dürfen auch Formatierungsanweisungen, wie
\Macro{raggedright}, verwendet werden. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} dieser Variablen
wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt.
\begin{Example}
- Herr Musterfrau möchte ein paar zusätzliche Informationen zu seiner
- Mitgliedschaft angeben. Er wählt dazu die Absenderergänzung:%
+ Herr Musterfrau möchte ein paar zusätzliche Informationen zu seiner
+ Mitgliedschaft angeben. Er wählt dazu die Absenderergänzung:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-19.tex}%
Das entsprechende Feld neben der Anschrift wird dann wie in
\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-19} gesetzt.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo,
- Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel,
+ Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel,
Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke}]{Ergebnis
eines kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender, Logo,
- Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur,
+ Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur,
Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt
- den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
+ den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-19}}
\end{captionbeside}
\label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-19}
@@ -2050,16 +2063,16 @@ wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt.
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{numericaldate}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit dieser Option kann zwischen der sprachabhängigen Standarddarstellung des
-Datums\Index{Datum}\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile} und einem ebenfalls
-sprachabhängigen, kurzen, rein nummerischen Datum umgeschaltet werden. Die
+Mit dieser Option kann zwischen der sprachabhängigen Standarddarstellung des
+Datums\Index{Datum}\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile} und einem ebenfalls
+sprachabhängigen, kurzen, rein nummerischen Datum umgeschaltet werden. Die
Standarddarstellung wird nicht von \KOMAScript{} bereitgestellt. Sie kann
wahlweise von einem Paket wie \Package{ngerman}\IndexPackage{ngerman},
\Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} oder auch
\Package{isodate}\IndexPackage{isodate}
stammen. Das\important{\OptionValue{numericaldate}{true}} kurze nummerische
Datum wird hingegen von \Class{scrlttr2} selbst erzeugt. Die Option versteht
-die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben
sind. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist mit \PValue{false} die
Verwendung der Standarddarstellung.
@@ -2067,12 +2080,12 @@ Verwendung der Standarddarstellung.
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{date}
\end{Declaration}
-Das Datum in der gewählten Darstellung wird im \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
+Das Datum in der gewählten Darstellung wird im \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
\Variable{date} abgelegt. Die Einstellung von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate}} hat keine Auswirkung,
-wenn diese Variable überschrieben wird. Gesetzt wird das Datum normalerweise
-als Teil der Geschäftszeile. Wenn die Geschäftszeile ansonsten leer bleibt
+wenn diese Variable überschrieben wird. Gesetzt wird das Datum normalerweise
+als Teil der Geschäftszeile. Wenn die Geschäftszeile ansonsten leer bleibt
wird allerdings nur eine Datumszeile, bestehend aus dem Ort und dem Datum,
gesetzt. Trotzdem haben auch in diesem Fall die Einstellungen der nachfolgend
beschriebenen Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline} Auswirkungen auf
@@ -2088,41 +2101,41 @@ Beschreibung zur Variablen
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{refline}{Einstellung}
\end{Declaration}
-\BeginIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}%
-Insbesondere bei Geschäftsbriefen findet sich häufig eine Zeile mit Angaben
-wie Namenskürzeln\Index{Kuerzel=Kürzel}, Durchwahl\Index{Durchwahl},
+\BeginIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}%
+Insbesondere bei Geschäftsbriefen findet sich häufig eine Zeile mit Angaben
+wie Namenskürzeln\Index{Kuerzel=Kürzel}, Durchwahl\Index{Durchwahl},
Kunden-\Index{Kundennummer} und Rechnungsnummer\Index{Rechnungsnummer} oder
-zur Bezugnahme auf ein früheres Schreiben. Diese Zeile wird in dieser
-Anleitung \emph{Geschäftszeile}\textnote{Geschäftszeile} genannt.
+zur Bezugnahme auf ein früheres Schreiben. Diese Zeile wird in dieser
+Anleitung \emph{Geschäftszeile}\textnote{Geschäftszeile} genannt.
-Bei \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} können Kopf, Fuß, Anschrift und
-das Feld mit der Absenderergänzung links und rechts aus dem normalen
-Satzspiegel herausragen. Über
+Bei \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} können Kopf, Fuß, Anschrift und
+das Feld mit der Absenderergänzung links und rechts aus dem normalen
+Satzspiegel herausragen. Ãœber
\OptionValue{refline}{wide}\important{\OptionValue{refline}{wide}} kann
-gewählt werden, dass dies auch für die Geschäftszeile gelten soll. Die
-Geschäftszeile enthält normalerweise zumindest das Datum, kann aber auch
-weitere Angaben aufnehmen. Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind
+gewählt werden, dass dies auch für die Geschäftszeile gelten soll. Die
+Geschäftszeile enthält normalerweise zumindest das Datum, kann aber auch
+weitere Angaben aufnehmen. Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.refline} zu
entnehmen. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind \PValue{narrow} und
\PValue{dateright}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}.%
%
\begin{table}
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{refline} bei
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{refline} bei
\Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter}}]
- {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{refline} zur
- Konfiguration der Geschäftszeile}
+ {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{refline} zur
+ Konfiguration der Geschäftszeile}
\label{tab:\LabelBase.refline}
\begin{desctabular}
\pventry{dateleft}{\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
- Das Datum steht automatisch links in der Geschäftszeile.}%
+ Das Datum steht automatisch links in der Geschäftszeile.}%
\pventry{dateright}{\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
- Das Datum steht automatisch rechts in der Geschäftszeile.}%
- \pventry{narrow}{Die Breite der Geschäftszeile richtet sich nach dem
+ Das Datum steht automatisch rechts in der Geschäftszeile.}%
+ \pventry{narrow}{Die Breite der Geschäftszeile richtet sich nach dem
Satzspiegel.}%
\pventry{nodate}{\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}%
- Das Datum wird nicht automatisch in die Geschäftszeile gesetzt.}%
- \pventry{wide}{Die Breite der Geschäftszeile richtet sich nach Anschrift
- und Absenderergänzung.}%
+ Das Datum wird nicht automatisch in die Geschäftszeile gesetzt.}%
+ \pventry{wide}{Die Breite der Geschäftszeile richtet sich nach Anschrift
+ und Absenderergänzung.}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
@@ -2133,7 +2146,7 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind \PValue{narrow} und
\Variable{customer}
\Variable{invoice}
\end{Declaration}
-Typische Felder der Geschäftszeile werden über die fünf Variablen
+Typische Felder der Geschäftszeile werden über die fünf Variablen
\Variable{yourref}, \Variable{yourmail}, \Variable{myref}, \Variable{customer}
und \Variable{invoice} verwaltet. %
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur
@@ -2144,9 +2157,9 @@ Ihre Bedeutung %
ist \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.variables}
zu entnehmen. Jede dieser Variablen hat auch eine vordefinierte
\PName{Bezeichnung}, die in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.reflineTerm} zu finden
-ist. Wie weitere Variablen zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt werden können, ist
+ist. Wie weitere Variablen zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt werden können, ist
in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables} ab
-\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} erklärt.
+\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} erklärt.
\begin{table}
% \centering
@@ -2155,9 +2168,9 @@ in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables} ab
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}
[{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen der
- Geschäftszeile}]
+ Geschäftszeile}]
{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der typischen Variablen der
- Geschäftszeile unter Verwendung sprachabhängiger Anweisungen%
+ Geschäftszeile unter Verwendung sprachabhängiger Anweisungen%
\label{tab:\LabelBase.reflineTerm}%
}
[l]
@@ -2180,9 +2193,9 @@ in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables} ab
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refname}\LabelFontElement{refname}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refvalue}\LabelFontElement{refvalue}%
Schriftart und Farbe\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} der Feldbezeichnung
-und des Feldinhalts können über die beiden Elemente
+und des Feldinhalts können über die beiden Elemente
\FontElement{refname}\important{\FontElement{refname}, \FontElement{refvalue}}
-und \FontElement{refvalue} geändert werden. Dazu werden die Anweisungen
+und \FontElement{refvalue} geändert werden. Dazu werden die Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
@@ -2194,8 +2207,8 @@ verwendet. Die Voreinstellungen der \iffree{beiden }{}Elemente sind
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente der Geschäftszeile}]
- {Voreinstellungen für die Schrift der Elemente der Geschäftszeile%
+ [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente der Geschäftszeile}]
+ {Voreinstellungen für die Schrift der Elemente der Geschäftszeile%
\label{tab:\LabelBase.refnamerefvalue}}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
@@ -2217,24 +2230,24 @@ verwendet. Die Voreinstellungen der \iffree{beiden }{}Elemente sind
\end{Declaration}%
Sind bis auf \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date}}\IndexVariable{date} alle
-Variablen der Geschäftszeile leer, so wird keine eigentliche Geschäftszeile
+Variablen der Geschäftszeile leer, so wird keine eigentliche Geschäftszeile
gesetzt. Stattdessen werden dann nur Ort\Index{Ort} und Datum\Index{Datum}
ausgegeben. Dabei bestimmt der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.place} den Ort. Für das Trennzeichen, das in
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.place} den Ort. Für das Trennzeichen, das in
diesem Fall nach dem Ort gesetzt wird, ist der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
-\Variable{placeseparator} zuständig. Der
+\Variable{placeseparator} zuständig. Der
vordefinierte\textnote{Voreinstellung} \PName{Inhalt} des Trennzeichens ist
dabei ein Komma, gefolgt von einem nicht umbrechbaren Leerzeichen. Ist der Ort
leer, so wird auch das Trennzeichen nicht gesetzt. Der vordefinierte
\PName{Inhalt} der Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} ist
-\Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today}\important{\Macro{today}} und hängt von der
+\Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today}\important{\Macro{today}} und hängt von der
Einstellung der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate}}%
\IndexOption{numericaldate} ab (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate}).
Seit Version~3.09\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}} werden Ort und Datum
-nicht mehr zwingend rechtsbündig ausgegeben. Stattdessen findet auch im Falle
+nicht mehr zwingend rechtsbündig ausgegeben. Stattdessen findet auch im Falle
der Datumszeile die Datumseinstellung von Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}\IndexOption{refline}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}}, wie sie in
@@ -2242,7 +2255,7 @@ der Datumszeile die Datumseinstellung von Option
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{placeanddate}\LabelFontElement{placeanddate}%
-Falls\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}} statt der Geschäftszeile eine solche
+Falls\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}} statt der Geschäftszeile eine solche
Datumszeile mit Ort gesetzt wird, so findet nicht die Schrifteinstellung des
Elements \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.refvalue} Anwendung. Stattdessen wird
in diesem Fall das Element
@@ -2251,27 +2264,27 @@ dessen leere Voreinstellung wie gewohnt mit Hilfe der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})
-geändert werden kann.%
+geändert werden kann.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Example}
- Herr Musterfrau setzt nun auch die Variable für den Ort:
+ Herr Musterfrau setzt nun auch die Variable für den Ort:
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-20.tex}%
Damit erscheint vor dem Datum, wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-20},
\autopageref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-20} zu sehen, der Ort, gefolgt von den
automatischen Trennzeichen vor dem Datum. Dieses Datum wurde im Beispielcode
- über Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} ebenfalls explizit gesetzt,
- damit bei einem späteren \LaTeX-Durchlauf des Briefes das ursprüngliche
+ über Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} ebenfalls explizit gesetzt,
+ damit bei einem späteren \LaTeX-Durchlauf des Briefes das ursprüngliche
Datum erhalten bleibt und nicht etwa automatisch das Datum des \LaTeX-Laufs
verwendet wird.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo,
- Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Anrede, Text,
+ Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
Lochermarke}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender,
- Logo, Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Anrede,
- Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Logo, Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Anrede,
+ Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
Lochermarke}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-20}}
\end{captionbeside}
@@ -2287,29 +2300,29 @@ geändert werden kann.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{title}
\end{Declaration}
-Bei \KOMAScript{} kann ein Brief zusätzlich mit einem Titel\Index{Titel}
-versehen werden. Der Titel wird zentriert in der Schriftgröße \Macro{LARGE}
-unterhalb der Geschäftszeile ausgegeben.
+Bei \KOMAScript{} kann ein Brief zusätzlich mit einem Titel\Index{Titel}
+versehen werden. Der Titel wird zentriert in der Schriftgröße \Macro{LARGE}
+unterhalb der Geschäftszeile ausgegeben.
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettertitle}\LabelFontElement{lettertitle}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}\LabelFontElement{title}%
-Die Schriftart für das Element\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and
+Die Schriftart für das Element\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and
\Package{scrletter}} \FontElement{lettertitle}%
\important{\FontElement{lettertitle}} kann mit den Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup} ab
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden. Dabei sind auch
-Größenangaben erlaubt. Die Größe \Macro{LARGE} wird der Schriftauswahl
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden. Dabei sind auch
+Größenangaben erlaubt. Die Größe \Macro{LARGE} wird der Schriftauswahl
innerhalb von \KOMAScript{} immer vorangestellt und ist daher auch nicht
Teil\textnote{Voreinstellung} der Voreinstellung
\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}. Bei
-\Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} kann als Alias für
+\Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} kann als Alias für
\FontElement{lettertitle} auch
\FontElement{title}\important{\FontElement{title}} verwendet werden. Bei
Verwendung von \Package{scrletter} mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse ist das
-nicht\textnote{Achtung!} möglich, da bei diesen Klassen bereits ein Element
-\FontElement{title} mit abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel
+nicht\textnote{Achtung!} möglich, da bei diesen Klassen bereits ein Element
+\FontElement{title} mit abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel
existiert.%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{title}%
\EndIndex{FontElement}{lettertitle}%
@@ -2319,9 +2332,9 @@ existiert.%
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar{title}{Mahnung}
\end{lstcode}
- Damit sollte der Empfänger die Mahnung als solche erkennen.
+ Damit sollte der Empfänger die Mahnung als solche erkennen.
\end{Example}
-Während der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen, wie im Beispiel gezeigt, den Titel
+Während der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen, wie im Beispiel gezeigt, den Titel
definiert, wird die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen \Variable{title} von
\KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt.
%
@@ -2337,8 +2350,8 @@ definiert, wird die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen \Variable{title} von
Um einen Betreff zu setzen, legt man den \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen
\Variable{subject} entsprechend fest. Mit Option
\OptionValue{subject}{titled}\important{\OptionValue{subject}{titled}} kann
-dann zum einen gewählt werden, dass der Betreff mit einem Titel versehen
-werden soll oder nicht. Der Titel wird über die Bezeichnung der Variablen
+dann zum einen gewählt werden, dass der Betreff mit einem Titel versehen
+werden soll oder nicht. Der Titel wird über die Bezeichnung der Variablen
\Variable{subject} bestimmt (siehe \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.subjectTerm}).
Der\textnote{Voreinstellung} vordefinierte Inhalt des
Trennzeichens\Index{Trennzeichen} \Variable{subjectseparator} besteht aus
@@ -2350,9 +2363,9 @@ einem Doppelpunkt, gefolgt von einem Leerzeichen.
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen für den Betreff}]
+ [{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen für den Betreff}]
{\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen für den Betreff}
+ Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen für den Betreff}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{lll}
\toprule
@@ -2369,9 +2382,9 @@ einem Doppelpunkt, gefolgt von einem Leerzeichen.
\label{tab:\LabelBase.subjectTerm}
\end{table}
-Zum anderen kann über \OptionValue{subject}{afteropening}%
+Zum anderen kann über \OptionValue{subject}{afteropening}%
\important{\OptionValue{subject}{afteropening}\\
- \OptionValue{subject}{beforeopening}} gewählt werden, dass der Betreff
+ \OptionValue{subject}{beforeopening}} gewählt werden, dass der Betreff
abweichend von der Voreinstellung
\OptionValue{subject}{beforeopening} erst nach der Anrede gesetzt werden
soll. Eine andere Formatierung%
@@ -2380,9 +2393,9 @@ soll. Eine andere Formatierung%
\OptionValue{subject}{right}} kann mit \OptionValue{subject}{underlined} und
\OptionValue{subject}{centered} oder
\OptionValue{subject}{right}\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} eingestellt
-werden. Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} sind
+werden. Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} sind
\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.subject} zu entnehmen. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird
-ausdrücklich darauf hingewiesen, dass bei der Einstellung
+ausdrücklich darauf hingewiesen, dass bei der Einstellung
\OptionValue{subject}{underlined} der Betreff komplett in eine Zeile passen
muss! Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind
\OptionValue{subject}{left}, \OptionValue{subject}{beforeopening} und
@@ -2394,9 +2407,9 @@ muss! Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind
\setcapindent{0pt}%
% \caption
\begin{captionbeside}
- [{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} bei \Class{scrlttr2}}]
+ [{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} bei \Class{scrlttr2}}]
{\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} zur Platzierung und
+ Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} zur Platzierung und
Formatierung eines Betreffs bei \Class{scrlttr2}%
\label{tab:\LabelBase.subject}}
[l]
@@ -2405,8 +2418,8 @@ muss! Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind
\pventry{afteropening}{Betreff nach der Anrede setzen}%
\pventry{beforeopening}{Betreff vor der Anrede setzen}%
\pventry{centered}{Betreff zentrieren}%
- \pventry{left}{Betreff linksbündig setzen}%
- \pventry{right}{Betreff rechtsbündig setzen}%
+ \pventry{left}{Betreff linksbündig setzen}%
+ \pventry{right}{Betreff rechtsbündig setzen}%
\pventry{titled}{Betreff mit Titel versehen}%
\pventry{underlined}{Betreff unterstreichen (Hinweis im
Text beachten!)}%
@@ -2420,38 +2433,38 @@ muss! Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} sind
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettersubject}\LabelFontElement{lettersubject}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}\LabelFontElement{subject}%
Der Betreff wird in einer eigenen Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art} gesetzt. Um
-diese zu ändern, verwenden Sie die Anweisungen
+diese zu ändern, verwenden Sie die Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup} ab
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Für das
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Für das
Element\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}
\FontElement{lettersubject}\important{\FontElement{lettersubject}} ist als
Schrift \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries} voreingestellt. Bei Klasse
-\Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} kann als Alias für
+\Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} kann als Alias für
\FontElement{lettersubject} auch
\FontElement{subject}\important{\FontElement{subject}} verwendet werden. Bei
Verwendung von Paket \Package{scrletter} mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse ist das
-nicht\textnote{Achtung!} möglich, da bei diesen Klassen bereits ein Element
-\FontElement{subject} mit abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel
+nicht\textnote{Achtung!} möglich, da bei diesen Klassen bereits ein Element
+\FontElement{subject} mit abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel
existiert.
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Example}
Herr Musterfrau setzt nun auch den Betreff. Als eher traditioneller
- veranlagter Mensch möchte er außerdem, dass der Betreff mit einer
+ veranlagter Mensch möchte er außerdem, dass der Betreff mit einer
entsprechenden Spitzmarke versehen wird, und setzt deshalb auch die
- zugehörige Option:%
+ zugehörige Option:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-21.tex}%
Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-21} zu sehen.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo,
- Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede, Text,
+ Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
Lochermarke}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender,
- Logo, Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler
+ Logo, Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff,
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler
und Lochermarke}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-21}}
\end{captionbeside}
@@ -2465,21 +2478,21 @@ existiert.
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{firstfoot}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}%
Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Option bestimmt, ob der
-Briefbogenfuß überhaupt gesetzt wird. Das Abschalten mit
+Briefbogenfuß überhaupt gesetzt wird. Das Abschalten mit
\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}\important{\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}} hat
Auswirkungen wenn gleichzeitig Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.enlargefirstpage} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.enlargefirstpage}) verwendet wird, da sich
-dadurch die Seite logisch nach unten verlängert. Zwischen dem Ende des
+dadurch die Seite logisch nach unten verlängert. Zwischen dem Ende des
Satzspiegels und dem Seitenende bleibt dann nur der normale Abstand zwischen
-Satzspiegel und Seitenfuß.
+Satzspiegel und Seitenfuß.
-Die Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in
+Die Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben
sind. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist das Setzen des
-Briefbogenfußes.%
+Briefbogenfußes.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2487,9 +2500,9 @@ Briefbogenfußes.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{firstfoot}
\end{Declaration}%
-\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}%
-Der Fuß der ersten Seite ist in der Voreinstellung leer. Es besteht jedoch die
-Möglichkeit, über den \PName{Inhalt} der
+\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}%
+Der Fuß der ersten Seite ist in der Voreinstellung leer. Es besteht jedoch die
+Möglichkeit, über den \PName{Inhalt} der
Variablen\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} \Variable{firstfoot} einen
neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von
\KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt.
@@ -2497,7 +2510,7 @@ neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von
\BeginIndex{Variable}{frombank}%
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen den Inhalt der Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.frombank}, also die
- Bankverbindung im Fuß der ersten Seite ausgeben. Der doppelte
+ Bankverbindung im Fuß der ersten Seite ausgeben. Der doppelte
Backslash soll dabei durch ein Komma ersetzt werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar{firstfoot}{%
@@ -2506,10 +2519,10 @@ neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von
}%
}
\end{lstcode}
- Natürlich können Sie für das Trennzeichen auch eine eigene Variable
- definieren. Ich überlasse dem Leser dies als Übung.
+ Natürlich können Sie für das Trennzeichen auch eine eigene Variable
+ definieren. Ich überlasse dem Leser dies als Übung.
- Will man eine Art Brief"|fuß als Gegengewicht zum Briefkopf verwenden, so
+ Will man eine Art Brief"|fuß als Gegengewicht zum Briefkopf verwenden, so
kann dieser beispielsweise wie folgt definiert werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\setkomavar{firstfoot}{%
@@ -2517,11 +2530,11 @@ neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von
\begin{tabular}[t]{l@{}}%
\multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{Gesellschafter:}\\
Hugo Mayer\\
- Bernd Müller
+ Bernd Müller
\end{tabular}%
\hfill
\begin{tabular}[t]{l@{}}%
- \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{Geschäftsführung:}\\
+ \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{Geschäftsführung:}\\
Liselotte Mayer\\[1ex]
\multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{Gerichtsstand:}\\
Hinterdupfeldingen
@@ -2537,8 +2550,8 @@ neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von
}%
}
\end{lstcode}
- Das Beispiel stammt ursprünglich von Torsten Krüger. Es wird empfohlen, eine
- solche Definition für die mehrfache Verwendung in unterschiedlichen
+ Das Beispiel stammt ursprünglich von Torsten Krüger. Es wird empfohlen, eine
+ solche Definition für die mehrfache Verwendung in unterschiedlichen
Dokumenten in einer eigenen
\File{lco}-Datei\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} abzulegen. Mit
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -2547,23 +2560,23 @@ neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von
BIC GRMLDEHD000}
\end{lstcode}
kann die Bankverbindung dann im Dokument passend dazu gesetzt werden.%
-\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturmöglichkeit
- \ Abhängig\textnote{Achtung!} von den Voreinstellungen ist ein solch hoher
- Fuß jedoch eventuell nicht vorgesehen und wird deshalb möglicherweise zu
- tief platziert. In einem solchen Fall kann die vertikale Position über die
- Pseudolänge \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}%
+\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturmöglichkeit
+ \ Abhängig\textnote{Achtung!} von den Voreinstellungen ist ein solch hoher
+ Fuß jedoch eventuell nicht vorgesehen und wird deshalb möglicherweise zu
+ tief platziert. In einem solchen Fall kann die vertikale Position über die
+ Pseudolänge \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}%
\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}}%
\IndexPLength{firstfootvpos} angepasst werden (siehe
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}).%
\fi
\end{Example}
-Im\textnote{Achtung!} Beispiel wurde ein mehrzeiliger Fuß gesetzt. Bei einer
-Kompatibilitätseinstellung ab Version
+Im\textnote{Achtung!} Beispiel wurde ein mehrzeiliger Fuß gesetzt. Bei einer
+Kompatibilitätseinstellung ab Version
2.9u\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.9u}} (siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}) reicht der Platz dafür in der Regel
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}) reicht der Platz dafür in der Regel
nicht aus. Sie sollten dann \PLength{firstfootvpos} (siehe
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}) entsprechend
verringern.%
@@ -2572,12 +2585,12 @@ verringern.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{frombank}
\end{Declaration}%
-\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß} Die im vorherigen Beispiel
+\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß} Die im vorherigen Beispiel
verwendete Variable \Variable{frombank} nimmt derzeit eine Sonderstellung
ein. Sie wird intern bisher nicht verwendet. Sie kann jedoch vom Anwender
verwendet werden, um die Bankverbindung\Index{Bankverbindung} in das
-Absenderergänzungsfeld (siehe Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.location},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.location}) oder wie im Beispiel in den Fuß zu
+Absenderergänzungsfeld (siehe Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.location},
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.location}) oder wie im Beispiel in den Fuß zu
setzen.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2589,61 +2602,61 @@ setzen.%
\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage}% \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten}
-\section{Kopf und Fuß bei vordefinierten Seitenstilen}
+\section{Kopf und Fuß bei vordefinierten Seitenstilen}
\seclabel{pagestyle}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}
Eine der allgemeinen Eigenschaften eines Dokuments ist der Seitenstil. Bei
{\LaTeX} versteht man unter dem Seitenstil in erster Linie den Inhalt der
-Kopf- und Fußzeilen. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} bereits in
-\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage} erwähnt, werden Kopf und Fuß des Briefbogens
+Kopf- und Fußzeilen. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} bereits in
+\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage} erwähnt, werden Kopf und Fuß des Briefbogens
als Elemente des Briefbogens betrachtet und unterliegen damit nicht den
-Einstellungen für den Seitenstil. Es geht also hier im Wesentlichen um den
+Einstellungen für den Seitenstil. Es geht also hier im Wesentlichen um den
Seitenstil der weiteren Briefseiten nach dem Briefbogen. Bei einseitigen
Briefen ist das der Seitenstil des Zweitbogens. Bei doppelseitigen Briefen ist
-auch der Seitenstil aller Rückseiten betroffen.
+auch der Seitenstil aller Rückseiten betroffen.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{letterpagestyle}
\end{Declaration}
-Der\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} für Briefe
+Der\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} für Briefe
voreingestellte Seitenstil wird durch den Inhalt dieser Anweisung bestimmt. In
der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} von
\Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} ist die Anweisung leer
definiert. Das bedeutet, dass der Seitenstil von Briefen dem des restlichen
-Dokuments entspricht. Dies ist deshalb sinnvoll, weil \Class{scrlttr2} für
-reine Briefdokumente gedacht ist und es dafür einfacher ist, den Seitenstil
+Dokuments entspricht. Dies ist deshalb sinnvoll, weil \Class{scrlttr2} für
+reine Briefdokumente gedacht ist und es dafür einfacher ist, den Seitenstil
wie gewohnt mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} global einzustellen.
Da sowohl Seitenstil \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain} als auch der Stil
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings} anderer Klassen vom gewünschten
-Seitenstil für Briefe abweicht, ist für das Paket
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings} anderer Klassen vom gewünschten
+Seitenstil für Briefe abweicht, ist für das Paket
\Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}}\textnote{Voreinstellung} der
Seitenstil
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.letter}\IndexPagestyle{plain.letter}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.letter}} in der Anweisung
\Macro{letterpagestyle} gespeichert. Damit werden alle Briefe mit dem zum
Seitenstil \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.letter}\IndexPagestyle{letter}
-gehörenden
+gehörenden
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.letter]{\PageStyle{plain}}-Seitenstil
-gesetzt unabhängig davon, was für das restliche Dokument als Seitenstil
+gesetzt unabhängig davon, was für das restliche Dokument als Seitenstil
eingestellt ist.
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen auch bei Verwendung von Paket \Package{scrletter}, dass die
- Briefe in dem Seitenstil gesetzt werden, der für das Dokument selbst mit
+ Briefe in dem Seitenstil gesetzt werden, der für das Dokument selbst mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} eingestellt wurde. Dazu schreiben sie die
Anweisung
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\letterpagestyle}{}
\end{lstcode}
- in die Dokumentpräambel. Dabei ist übrigens der Stern bei
+ in die Dokumentpräambel. Dabei ist übrigens der Stern bei
\Macro{renewcommand*} wichtig!%
\end{Example}
-Natürlich haben die Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} und
+Natürlich haben die Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.thispagestyle} innerhalb eines Briefes Vorrang vor dem
-innerhalb von \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} über \Macro{letterpagestyle}
+innerhalb von \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} über \Macro{letterpagestyle}
eingestellten Seitenstil.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2654,40 +2667,40 @@ eingestellten Seitenstil.%
\end{Declaration}%
Mit diesen Optionen kann bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{scrlttr2} eingestellt
werden, ob eine Trennlinie\Index{Trennlinie}\Index{Linie} unter dem
-Kopf\Index{Seiten>Kopf} oder über dem Fuß\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} von
-Folgeseiten gewünscht wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der
-Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+Kopf\Index{Seiten>Kopf} oder über dem Fuß\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} von
+Folgeseiten gewünscht wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der
+Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet
werden. Ein\important{\OptionValue{headsepline}{true}} Aktivieren der Option
\Option{headsepline} schaltet die Linie unter dem Kopf
ein. Ein\important{\OptionValue{footsepline}{true}} Aktivieren der Option
-\Option{footsepline} schaltet die Linie über dem Fuß ein. Die Deaktivierung
+\Option{footsepline} schaltet die Linie über dem Fuß ein. Die Deaktivierung
der Optionen schaltet die jeweilige Linie aus.
Beim Seitenstil \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}%
-\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}} (siehe später in
+\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}} (siehe später in
diesem Abschnitt) haben die Optionen \Option{headsepline} und
-\Option{footsepline} selbstverständlich keine Auswirkung. Bei diesem
+\Option{footsepline} selbstverständlich keine Auswirkung. Bei diesem
Seitenstil soll ja auf Seitenkopf\Index{Seiten>Kopf} und
-Seitenfuß\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} ausdrücklich verzichtet werden.
+Seitenfuß\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} ausdrücklich verzichtet werden.
Typografisch\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.myheadings}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain}} betrachtet hat eine solche Linie immer
-die Auswirkung, dass der Kopf oder Fuß optisch näher an den Text heranrückt.
-Dies bedeutet nun nicht, dass Kopf oder Fuß räumlich weiter vom
-Textkörper\Index{Text>Bereich} weggerückt werden müssten. Stattdessen sollten
-sie dann bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels als zum Textkörper gehörend
+die Auswirkung, dass der Kopf oder Fuß optisch näher an den Text heranrückt.
+Dies bedeutet nun nicht, dass Kopf oder Fuß räumlich weiter vom
+Textkörper\Index{Text>Bereich} weggerückt werden müssten. Stattdessen sollten
+sie dann bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels als zum Textkörper gehörend
betrachtet werden. Dies wird bei \Class{scrlttr2} dadurch erreicht, dass bei
Verwendung der Klassenoption \Option{headsepline} automatisch die Paketoption
\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}%
\important{\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}} mit gleichem Wert an das
\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}-Paket weitergereicht
-wird. Entsprechendes gilt bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline} für
+wird. Entsprechendes gilt bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline} für
\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}%
\important{\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}}.
-Die Optionen führen selbst keine automatische Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels
+Die Optionen führen selbst keine automatische Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels
aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option
\DescRef{typearea.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder
\PValue{current} (siehe \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die
@@ -2697,8 +2710,8 @@ Anweisung \DescRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe
Das Paket \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} (siehe
-\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) bietet weitere Einflussmöglichkeiten für
-Linien im Kopf und Fuß und kann auch mit \Class{scrlttr2} kombiniert
+\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) bietet weitere Einflussmöglichkeiten für
+Linien im Kopf und Fuß und kann auch mit \Class{scrlttr2} kombiniert
werden. Das Paket \Package{scrletter} verwendet hingegen automatisch
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} zur
Definition der Seitenstile \DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.letter} und
@@ -2708,7 +2721,7 @@ Die von \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}} definierten Seitenstile
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.letter} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.letter} unterliegen den Regeln von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}. Dies betrifft
-insbesondere das Setzen der Linien in Kopf und Fuß des
+insbesondere das Setzen der Linien in Kopf und Fuß des
\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstils
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.letter}. Siehe dazu in
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
@@ -2716,7 +2729,7 @@ insbesondere das Setzen der Linien in Kopf und Fuß des
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline} die Optionen
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline} und
\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline}. Auch Einstellungen wie
-\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark} sind für den Seitenstil
+\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark} sind für den Seitenstil
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.letter} von einiger Bedeutung.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2736,7 +2749,7 @@ Seitenstile\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain} und bei
\Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}} auf
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.letter} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.letter} aus. Sie beeinflusst außerdem die
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.plain.letter} aus. Sie beeinflusst außerdem die
Voreinstellung der Seitenstile des Pakets
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}%
@@ -2744,29 +2757,29 @@ Voreinstellung der Seitenstile des Pakets
wird (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}). Es gibt Werte, die sich nur auf
die horizontale Position auswirken, Werte, die nur die vertikale Position
beeinflussen, und Werte, die zugleich die vertikale und die horizontale
-Position festlegen. Mögliche Werte sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.pagenumber} zu
+Position festlegen. Mögliche Werte sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.pagenumber} zu
entnehmen. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist \PValue{botcenter}.
\begin{table}[t!]% Umbruchkorrektur
- \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{pagenumber} bei \Class{scrlttr2}
- und \Package{scrletter}}]{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{pagenumber}
+ \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{pagenumber} bei \Class{scrlttr2}
+ und \Package{scrletter}}]{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{pagenumber}
zur Positionierung der Paginierung innerhalb der Seitenstile}
\label{tab:\LabelBase.pagenumber}
\begin{desctabular}
\entry{\PValue{bot}, \PValue{foot}}{%
- Seitenzahl im Fuß ohne Änderung der horizontalen Position}%
+ Seitenzahl im Fuß ohne Änderung der horizontalen Position}%
\entry{\PValue{botcenter}, \PValue{botcentered}, \PValue{botmittle},
\PValue{footcenter}, \PValue{footcentered}, \PValue{footmiddle}}{%
- Seitenzahl zentriert innerhalb des Fußes}%
+ Seitenzahl zentriert innerhalb des Fußes}%
\entry{\PValue{botleft}, \PValue{footleft}}{%
- Seitenzahl links im Fuß}%
- \entry{\PValue{botright}, \PValue{footright}}{ Seitenzahl rechts im Fuß}%
+ Seitenzahl links im Fuß}%
+ \entry{\PValue{botright}, \PValue{footright}}{ Seitenzahl rechts im Fuß}%
\entry{\PValue{center}, \PValue{centered}, \PValue{middle}}{%
- Seitenzahl zentriert ohne Änderung der vertikalen Position}%
+ Seitenzahl zentriert ohne Änderung der vertikalen Position}%
\entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{no}, \PValue{off}}{%
keine Seitenzahl}%
\entry{\PValue{head}, \PValue{top}}{%
- Seitenzahl im Kopf ohne Änderung der horizontalen Position}%
+ Seitenzahl im Kopf ohne Änderung der horizontalen Position}%
\entry{\PValue{headcenter}, \PValue{headcentered}, \PValue{headmiddle},
\PValue{topcenter}, \PValue{topcentered}, \PValue{topmiddle}}{%
Seitenzahl zentriert innerhalb des Kopfes}%
@@ -2775,9 +2788,9 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt\textnote{Voreinstellung} ist \PValue{botcenter}.
\entry{\PValue{headright}, \PValue{topright}}{%
Seitenzahl rechts im Kopf}%
\entry{\PValue{left}}{%
- Seitenzahl links ohne Änderung der vertikalen Position}%
+ Seitenzahl links ohne Änderung der vertikalen Position}%
\entry{\PValue{right}}{%
- Seitenzahl rechts ohne Änderung der vertikalen Position}%
+ Seitenzahl rechts ohne Änderung der vertikalen Position}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
%
@@ -2798,15 +2811,15 @@ verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. Dagegen definiert
\begin{description}\setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{}
\item[{\PageStyle{empty}}]
\LabelPageStyle{empty}%
- ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile von
- Folgeseiten vollständig leer bleiben. Dieser Seitenstil wird auch
- automatisch für die erste Briefseite verwendet, da auf dieser Seite Kopf und
- Fuß über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} (siehe
+ ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile von
+ Folgeseiten vollständig leer bleiben. Dieser Seitenstil wird auch
+ automatisch für die erste Briefseite verwendet, da auf dieser Seite Kopf und
+ Fuß über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} (siehe
\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening})
mit anderen Mitteln gesetzt werden.
\item[{\PageStyle{headings}}]
\LabelPageStyle{headings}%
- ist bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} der Seitenstil für
+ ist bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} der Seitenstil für
automatische Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten. Dabei werden als automatisch
gesetzte Marken der Absendername aus der Variablen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname}\IndexVariable{fromname} und der
@@ -2815,12 +2828,12 @@ verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. Dagegen definiert
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname} und
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subject}). Wo genau diese Marken und die
- Seitenangabe ausgegeben werden, hängt von der oben erklärten Option
+ Seitenangabe ausgegeben werden, hängt von der oben erklärten Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber} und dem Inhalt der Variablen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nexthead}\IndexVariable{nexthead} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} ab. Der Autor
kann die Marken aber auch noch nach \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} manuell
- beeinflussen. Hierzu stehen wie üblich die Anweisungen
+ beeinflussen. Hierzu stehen wie üblich die Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright},
bei Verwendung von
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
@@ -2828,13 +2841,13 @@ verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. Dagegen definiert
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}
auch \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
- \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}), zur Verfügung.
+ \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}), zur Verfügung.
Da \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{scrletter} intern
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} verwendet, wird
ein eventuell von der Klasse bereitgestellter Seitenstil
\DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.headings} als Alias von
- \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings} umdefiniert. Näheres zu
+ \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings} umdefiniert. Näheres zu
diesem Seitenstil ist in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} auf
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings} zu erfahren.
\item[{\PageStyle{letter}}]
@@ -2847,11 +2860,11 @@ verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. Dagegen definiert
\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, \autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}. Bei der
Einstellung \OptionValueRef{scrlayer-scrpage}{automark}{true}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlayer-scrpage}{automark}{true}}%
- \IndexOption{automark} übernimmt \PageStyle{letter} dann die Rolle, die bei
- \Class{scrlttr2} von \PageStyle{headings} ausgefüllt wird. Bei
+ \IndexOption{automark} übernimmt \PageStyle{letter} dann die Rolle, die bei
+ \Class{scrlttr2} von \PageStyle{headings} ausgefüllt wird. Bei
\OptionValueRef{scrlayer-scrpage}{automark}{false}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlayer-scrpage}{automark}{false}}%
- \IndexOption{automark} übernimmt \PageStyle{letter} dagegen die Rolle von
+ \IndexOption{automark} übernimmt \PageStyle{letter} dagegen die Rolle von
\PageStyle{myheadings}.
Durch\textnote{Achtung!} die Verwendung von
@@ -2862,15 +2875,15 @@ verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. Dagegen definiert
\Package{scrletter} verwendet werden.
\item[{\PageStyle{myheadings}}]
\LabelPageStyle{myheadings}%
- ist bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} der Seitenstil für
+ ist bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} der Seitenstil für
manuelle Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten. Im Unterschied zu \PValue{headings}
- müssen die Marken vom Anwender gesetzt werden. Er verwendet dazu die
+ müssen die Marken vom Anwender gesetzt werden. Er verwendet dazu die
Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright}. Bei Verwendung von
- \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} steht außerdem
- \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} zur Verfügung.
+ \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} steht außerdem
+ \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} zur Verfügung.
- Beim Paket \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}} übernimmt der
+ Beim Paket \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}} übernimmt der
Seitenstil \PageStyle{letter} ebenfalls die Rolle von
\PageStyle{myheadings}.
\item[{\PageStyle{plain}}]
@@ -2878,13 +2891,13 @@ verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. Dagegen definiert
ist bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}}
der voreingestellte Seitenstil, bei dem auf Folgeseiten keinerlei
Kolumnentitel verwendet, sondern nur eine Seitenangabe ausgegeben wird. Wo
- diese gesetzt wird, hängt von der oben erklärten Option
+ diese gesetzt wird, hängt von der oben erklärten Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber} ab.
Da \Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{scrletter} intern
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} verwendet, wird
der Seitenstil \DescRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain} als Alias von
- \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} umdefiniert. Näheres
+ \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.plain.scrheadings} umdefiniert. Näheres
zu diesem Seitenstil ist in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} auf
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings} zu erfahren.
\item[{\PageStyle{plain.letter}}]
@@ -2901,30 +2914,30 @@ verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. Dagegen definiert
\Package{scrletter} verwendet werden.
\end{description}
-Die Form der Seitenstile wird außerdem durch die oben erklärten
+Die Form der Seitenstile wird außerdem durch die oben erklärten
Optionen\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}\\
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline}}
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline}
beeinflusst. Der Seitenstil ab der aktuellen Seite wird mit \Macro{pagestyle}
-umgeschaltet. Demgegenüber verändert \Macro{thispagestyle} nur den Seitenstil
+umgeschaltet. Demgegenüber verändert \Macro{thispagestyle} nur den Seitenstil
der aktuellen Seite. \KOMAScript\textnote{Achtung!} verwendet
\Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{empty} selbst innerhalb von
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} für die erste Briefseite.
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} für die erste Briefseite.
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}%
-Um die Schriftart von Kopf und Fuß der Seite oder der Seitenangabe zu ändern,
+Um die Schriftart von Kopf und Fuß der Seite oder der Seitenangabe zu ändern,
verwenden Sie die Benutzerschnittstelle, die in
-\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup} beschrieben ist. Für den Kopf und den Fuß
-ist dabei das gleiche Element zuständig, das Sie wahlweise mit
+\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup} beschrieben ist. Für den Kopf und den Fuß
+ist dabei das gleiche Element zuständig, das Sie wahlweise mit
\FontElement{pageheadfoot}\important{\FontElement{pagehead}} oder
-\FontElement{pagehead} benennen können. Für den
-Fuß\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}} ist zusätzlich auch noch das Element
-\FontElement{pagefoot}\important{\FontElement{pagefoot}} zuständig, das nach
+\FontElement{pagehead} benennen können. Für den
+Fuß\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}} ist zusätzlich auch noch das Element
+\FontElement{pagefoot}\important{\FontElement{pagefoot}} zuständig, das nach
\FontElement{pageheadfoot} in mit Variable
\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} oder per Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
@@ -2932,8 +2945,8 @@ Fuß\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}} ist zusätzlich auch noch das Element
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} (siehe
\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}) definierten Seitenstilen
-zur Anwendung kommt. Das Element für die Seitenzahl innerhalb des Kopfes oder
-Fußes heißt \FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}. Die
+zur Anwendung kommt. Das Element für die Seitenzahl innerhalb des Kopfes oder
+Fußes heißt \FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}. Die
Voreinstellungen sind in \autoref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot},
\autopageref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot} zu finden. Beachten Sie dazu
auch das Beispiel aus \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle},
@@ -2948,36 +2961,36 @@ auch das Beispiel aus \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle},
\Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke}
\Macro{markright}\Parameter{rechte Marke}
\end{Declaration}
-In den meisten Fällen werden die Möglichkeiten, die \KOMAScript{} über
-Optionen und Variablen für die Gestaltung des Seitenkopfes\Index{Kopf} und
--fußes\Index{Fuss=Fuß} auf Folgeseiten\Index{Folgeseite} zur Verfügung stellt,
-vollkommen ausreichen. Dies gilt umso mehr, als man zusätzlich mit
-\Macro{markboth} und \Macro{markright} die Möglichkeit hat, die Angaben zu
-ändern, die \Class{scrlttr2} oder \Package{scrletter} in den Kopf setzt. Die
+In den meisten Fällen werden die Möglichkeiten, die \KOMAScript{} über
+Optionen und Variablen für die Gestaltung des Seitenkopfes\Index{Kopf} und
+-fußes\Index{Fuss=Fuß} auf Folgeseiten\Index{Folgeseite} zur Verfügung stellt,
+vollkommen ausreichen. Dies gilt umso mehr, als man zusätzlich mit
+\Macro{markboth} und \Macro{markright} die Möglichkeit hat, die Angaben zu
+ändern, die \Class{scrlttr2} oder \Package{scrletter} in den Kopf setzt. Die
Anweisungen \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und
-\Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} können insbesondere mit dem Seitenstil
+\Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} können insbesondere mit dem Seitenstil
\PageStyle{myheadings}%
\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}\important{\PageStyle{myheadings}} verwendet
werden. Bei Verwendung des Pakets
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}} gilt
-dies natürlich auch für den Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}%
+dies natürlich auch für den Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}%
\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}\important{\PageStyle{scrheadings}}. Dort steht
-außerdem die Anweisung \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}%
+außerdem die Anweisung \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}%
\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}} zur
-Verfügung (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
+Verfügung (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content},
\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}).
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{nexthead}
\Variable{nextfoot}
\end{Declaration}
-In einigen wenigen Fällen will man jedoch den Kopf oder Fuß der Folgeseiten
-ähnlich dem Briefbogen freier gestalten. In\textnote{Achtung!} diesen Fällen
-muss auf die vordefinierten Möglichkeiten, die per oben erklärter Option
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} auswählbar
-sind, verzichtet werden. Stattdessen gestaltet man sich den Kopf und Fuß der
+In einigen wenigen Fällen will man jedoch den Kopf oder Fuß der Folgeseiten
+ähnlich dem Briefbogen freier gestalten. In\textnote{Achtung!} diesen Fällen
+muss auf die vordefinierten Möglichkeiten, die per oben erklärter Option
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} auswählbar
+sind, verzichtet werden. Stattdessen gestaltet man sich den Kopf und Fuß der
Folgeseiten bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} im Seitenstil
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings},
@@ -2986,13 +2999,13 @@ Folgeseiten bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} im Seitenstil
\Package{scrletter}\OnlyAt{\Package{scrletter}} im Seitenstil
\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.letter}%
\IndexPagestyle{letter}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.letter}}
-frei. Dazu setzt man den gewünschten Aufbau als \PName{Inhalt} der
+frei. Dazu setzt man den gewünschten Aufbau als \PName{Inhalt} der
Variablen\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} \Variable{nexthead}
beziehungsweise \Variable{nextfoot}. Innerhalb des Inhalts von
-\Variable{nexthead} und \Variable{nextfoot} können beispielsweise mit Hilfe
+\Variable{nexthead} und \Variable{nextfoot} können beispielsweise mit Hilfe
der \Macro{parbox}-Anweisung (siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) mehrere Boxen
neben- und untereinander gesetzt werden. Einem versierten Anwender sollte es
-so möglich sein, eigene Seitenköpfe und "~füße zu gestalten. Natürlich kann
+so möglich sein, eigene Seitenköpfe und "~füße zu gestalten. Natürlich kann
und sollte im Wert mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar} auch auf
weitere Variablen zugegriffen werden. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} wird von
\KOMAScript{} bei beiden Variablen nicht genutzt.%
@@ -3004,7 +3017,7 @@ weitere Variablen zugegriffen werden. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} wird von
\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Vakatseiten}
-\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten}
+\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten}
\LoadCommonFile{lists}% \section{Listen}
@@ -3016,14 +3029,14 @@ weitere Variablen zugegriffen werden. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} wird von
\BeginIndex{}{Formeln}%
\BeginIndex{}{Gleichungen}%
-Die \KOMAScript-Klassen stellen keine eigenen Umgebungen für mathematische
-Formeln, Gleichungssysteme oder ähnliche Elemente der Mathematik
-bereit. Stattdessen stützt sich \KOMAScript{} im Bereich der Mathematik voll
+Die \KOMAScript-Klassen stellen keine eigenen Umgebungen für mathematische
+Formeln, Gleichungssysteme oder ähnliche Elemente der Mathematik
+bereit. Stattdessen stützt sich \KOMAScript{} im Bereich der Mathematik voll
und ganz auf den \LaTeX-Kern. Da\textnote{Achtung!} jedoch Mathematik in Form
-von nummerierten Gleichungen und Formeln in Briefen eher ungewöhnlich ist,
-unterstützt \KOMAScript{} dies nicht aktiv. Daher gibt es auch nicht die
+von nummerierten Gleichungen und Formeln in Briefen eher ungewöhnlich ist,
+unterstützt \KOMAScript{} dies nicht aktiv. Daher gibt es auch nicht die
Optionen \DescRef{maincls.option.leqno} und \DescRef{maincls.option.fleqn},
-die in \autoref{sec:maincls.math}, \autopageref{sec:maincls.math} für
+die in \autoref{sec:maincls.math}, \autopageref{sec:maincls.math} für
\Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} dokumentiert sind.%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
\par
@@ -3031,7 +3044,7 @@ die in \autoref{sec:maincls.math}, \autopageref{sec:maincls.math} für
\Environment{displaymath}\IndexEnv{displaymath},
\Environment{equation}\IndexEnv{equation} und
\Environment{eqnarray}\IndexEnv{eqnarray}, wird an dieser Stelle
- verzichtet. Wer diese verwenden möchte, sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen. Für
+ verzichtet. Wer diese verwenden möchte, sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen. Für
mehr als nur einfachste mathematische Formeln und Gleichungen sei jedoch die
Verwendung von \Package{amsmath}\IndexPackage{amsmath} empfohlen (siehe
\cite{package:amsmath}).%
@@ -3040,44 +3053,44 @@ die in \autoref{sec:maincls.math}, \autopageref{sec:maincls.math} für
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen}
+\section{Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen}
\seclabel{floats}
-Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen sind in Briefen normalerweise
+Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen sind in Briefen normalerweise
fehl am Platz. Daher\textnote{Achtung!} werden sie von \Class{scrlttr2} auch
-nicht unterstützt. Wenn solche dennoch benötigt werden, deutet dies häufig auf
-einen Missbrauch der Briefklasse hin. In solchen Fällen ist stattdessen zu
+nicht unterstützt. Wenn solche dennoch benötigt werden, deutet dies häufig auf
+einen Missbrauch der Briefklasse hin. In solchen Fällen ist stattdessen zu
raten, eine der \KOMAScript-Klassen aus \autoref{cha:maincls} mit dem Paket
\Package{scrletter}\important{\Package{scrletter}} zu kombinieren. In diesem
-Fall können Gleitumgebungen, wie für die Klasse dokumentiert, auch in Briefen
-verwendet werden. Die Möglichkeiten zur Definition eigener Gleitumgebungen mit
+Fall können Gleitumgebungen, wie für die Klasse dokumentiert, auch in Briefen
+verwendet werden. Die Möglichkeiten zur Definition eigener Gleitumgebungen mit
Hilfe von \hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}\IndexPackage{tocbasic}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}}, wie sie in
-\autoref{cha:tocbasic} dokumentiert sind, können ebenfalls genutzt werden.
+\autoref{cha:tocbasic} dokumentiert sind, können ebenfalls genutzt werden.
\LoadCommonFile{marginpar}% \section{Randnotizen}
-\section{Schlussgruß}
+\section{Schlussgruß}
\seclabel{closing}
\BeginIndexGroup
-\BeginIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß}
+\BeginIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß}
-Dass der Schlussgruß mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing}
+Dass der Schlussgruß mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing}
gesetzt wird, wurde bereits in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing} erklärt. Unter dem Schlussgruß wird häufig
-noch eine Signatur, eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift, gesetzt. Die
-Unterschrift wiederum findet Platz zwischen dem Schlussgruß und der Signatur.
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing} erklärt. Unter dem Schlussgruß wird häufig
+noch eine Signatur, eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift, gesetzt. Die
+Unterschrift wiederum findet Platz zwischen dem Schlussgruß und der Signatur.
\begin{Declaration}
\Variable{signature}
\end{Declaration}
-Die Variable \Variable{signature}\Index{Signatur} nimmt eine Art Erläuterung
+Die Variable \Variable{signature}\Index{Signatur} nimmt eine Art Erläuterung
zur Unterschrift\Index{Unterschrift} auf. Ihr \PName{Inhalt} ist mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{fromname} vordefiniert. Eine
-solche Erläuterung kann auch mehrzeilig sein. Die einzelnen Zeilen sollten
+solche Erläuterung kann auch mehrzeilig sein. Die einzelnen Zeilen sollten
dann mit doppeltem Backslash voneinander getrennt
-werden. Absätze\textnote{Achtung!} innerhalb der Erläuterung sind jedoch nicht
+werden. Absätze\textnote{Achtung!} innerhalb der Erläuterung sind jedoch nicht
gestattet.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -3086,21 +3099,21 @@ gestattet.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{raggedsignature}
\end{Declaration}
-Grußfloskel\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Signatur} und Erläuterung der
+Grußfloskel\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Signatur} und Erläuterung der
Unterschrift\Index{Unterschrift} werden innerhalb einer Box gesetzt. Die
-Breite dieser Box wird durch die längste Zeile innerhalb von Grußfloskel und
-Erläuterung bestimmt.
+Breite dieser Box wird durch die längste Zeile innerhalb von Grußfloskel und
+Erläuterung bestimmt.
-Wo genau diese Box platziert wird, ist durch die Pseudolängen
+Wo genau diese Box platziert wird, ist durch die Pseudolängen
\PLength{sigindent}\IndexPLength{sigindent} und
\PLength{sigbeforevskip}\IndexPLength{sigbeforevskip} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent}) bestimmt. Durch den Befehl
\Macro{raggedsignature} wird die Ausrichtung innerhalb der Box bestimmt. In
den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist die Anweisung entweder auf
-\Macro{centering} (alle außer \Option{KOMAold}) oder auf \Macro{raggedright}
+\Macro{centering} (alle außer \Option{KOMAold}) oder auf \Macro{raggedright}
(\Option{KOMAold}) gesetzt. Um innerhalb der Box beispielsweise eine
-linksbündige oder rechtsbündige Ausrichtung zu erhalten, kann der Befehl in
+linksbündige oder rechtsbündige Ausrichtung zu erhalten, kann der Befehl in
gleicher Weise umdefiniert werden wie \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection}
(siehe das entsprechende Beispiel in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure},
\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection}).
@@ -3108,20 +3121,20 @@ gleicher Weise umdefiniert werden wie \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection}
\begin{Example}
Herr Musterfrau will sich nun wirklich wichtig machen und deshalb in der
Signatur nochmals darauf hinweisen, dass er selbst auch mal
- Vereinsvorsitzender war. Deshalb ändert er die Variable
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}. Außerdem will er, dass die Signatur
- linksbündig unter dem Schlussgruß steht, und definiert daher auch noch
+ Vereinsvorsitzender war. Deshalb ändert er die Variable
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}. Außerdem will er, dass die Signatur
+ linksbündig unter dem Schlussgruß steht, und definiert daher auch noch
\Macro{raggedsignature} um:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-22}%
Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-22} zu sehen.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo,
- Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede, Text,
- Grußfloskel, geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
+ Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede, Text,
+ Grußfloskel, geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und
Lochermarke}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender,
- Logo, Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff,
- Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen,
+ Logo, Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff,
+ Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen,
Verteiler und Lochermarke}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-22}}
\end{captionbeside}
@@ -3130,7 +3143,7 @@ gleicher Weise umdefiniert werden wie \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection}
\end{Example}
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- Das vorausgehende Beispiel zeigt die wichtigsten, aber nicht alle möglichen
+ Das vorausgehende Beispiel zeigt die wichtigsten, aber nicht alle möglichen
Elemente eines Briefes. Es kann jedoch sehr gut als allgemeines Muster
dienen.%
\fi
@@ -3146,19 +3159,19 @@ gleicher Weise umdefiniert werden wie \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection}
\BeginIndex{}{Letter-Class-Option}%
Normalerweise wird man Einstellungen wie den Absender nicht in jedem Brief neu
-wählen, sondern diverse Parameter für bestimmte Gelegenheiten immer wieder
-verwenden. Ganz Ähnliches gilt für die verwendeten Briefköpfe und den
-Fußbereich der ersten Seite. Es ist deshalb sinnvoll, diese Einstellungen in
+wählen, sondern diverse Parameter für bestimmte Gelegenheiten immer wieder
+verwenden. Ganz Ähnliches gilt für die verwendeten Briefköpfe und den
+Fußbereich der ersten Seite. Es ist deshalb sinnvoll, diese Einstellungen in
einer eigenen Datei zu speichern. \KOMAScript{} bietet
-hierfür die \File{lco}-Dateien an. Die Endung \File{lco} steht
-für \emph{\emph{l}etter \emph{c}lass \emph{o}ption}, also
-Briefklassenoption. Dennoch finden diese Dateien für \Package{scrletter}
+hierfür die \File{lco}-Dateien an. Die Endung \File{lco} steht
+für \emph{\emph{l}etter \emph{c}lass \emph{o}ption}, also
+Briefklassenoption. Dennoch finden diese Dateien für \Package{scrletter}
ebenso Anwendung.
-In \File{lco}-Dateien können alle Anweisungen verwendet werden, die auch an
-der Stelle im Dokument verwendet werden könnten, an der %die \File{lco}-Datei
+In \File{lco}-Dateien können alle Anweisungen verwendet werden, die auch an
+der Stelle im Dokument verwendet werden könnten, an der %die \File{lco}-Datei
sie mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LoadLetterOption}
-geladen werden. Außerdem können interne Anweisungen verwendet werden, die für
+geladen werden. Außerdem können interne Anweisungen verwendet werden, die für
Paketautoren freigegeben sind. Bei \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter}
sind dies insbesondere die Anweisungen
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newplength}\IndexCmd{newplength},
@@ -3171,27 +3184,27 @@ sind dies insbesondere die Anweisungen
\File{UScommercial9}, \File{UScommercial9DW} und
\File{NF.lco}\ChangedAt{v3.04}{\Class{scrlttr2}} dienen dazu, \Class{scrlttr2}
und \Package{scrletter} an verschiedene Normen\Index{Norm} anzupassen. Sie
-können von angehenden Experten sehr gut als Vorlage für eigene Parametersätze
+können von angehenden Experten sehr gut als Vorlage für eigene Parametersätze
verwendet werden. Die Datei \File{KOMAold.lco} dient hingegen dazu, die
-Kompatibilität zu \Class{scrlettr}\IndexClass{scrlettr} zu verbessern. Diese
-Klasse wurde schon vor über 15~Jahren aus \KOMAScript{} entfernt. Es wird
-daher nicht mehr näher darauf eingegangen. Da hierbei auch auf Anweisungen
-zurückgegriffen wird, die nicht für Paketautoren freigegeben sind, sollte man
-sie nicht als Vorlage für eigene \File{lco}-Dateien verwenden. Eine Liste
+Kompatibilität zu \Class{scrlettr}\IndexClass{scrlettr} zu verbessern. Diese
+Klasse wurde schon vor über 15~Jahren aus \KOMAScript{} entfernt. Es wird
+daher nicht mehr näher darauf eingegangen. Da hierbei auch auf Anweisungen
+zurückgegriffen wird, die nicht für Paketautoren freigegeben sind, sollte man
+sie nicht als Vorlage für eigene \File{lco}-Dateien verwenden. Eine Liste
aller vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist in \autoref{tab:lcoFiles},
\autopageref{tab:lcoFiles} zu finden.
-Wenn Sie einen Parametersatz für eine Briefnorm, die bisher nicht von
-\KOMAScript{} unterstützt wird, erstellt haben, so sind Sie ausdrücklich
+Wenn Sie einen Parametersatz für eine Briefnorm, die bisher nicht von
+\KOMAScript{} unterstützt wird, erstellt haben, so sind Sie ausdrücklich
gebeten, diesen Parametersatz an die Supportadresse von \KOMAScript{} zu
schicken. Bitte geben Sie dabei auch die Erlaubnis zur Weiterverbreitung unter
den Lizenzbedingungen von \KOMAScript{} (siehe dazu die Datei
\href{http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/doc/lppl-de.txt}%
-{\File{lppl-de.txt}} im \KOMAScript-Paket). Wenn Sie zwar über die notwendigen
-Maße aus einer bisher nicht unterstützen Briefnorm verfügen, sich jedoch nicht
+{\File{lppl-de.txt}} im \KOMAScript-Paket). Wenn Sie zwar über die notwendigen
+Maße aus einer bisher nicht unterstützen Briefnorm verfügen, sich jedoch nicht
in der Lage sehen, selbst eine passende \File{lco}-Datei zu erstellen, so
-können Sie sich ebenfalls mit dem \KOMAScript-Autor in Verbindung
-setzen. Beispiele für teilweise sehr komplexe \File{lco}-Dateien finden sich
+können Sie sich ebenfalls mit dem \KOMAScript-Autor in Verbindung
+setzen. Beispiele für teilweise sehr komplexe \File{lco}-Dateien finden sich
unter anderem unter \cite{homepage} und in \cite{DANTE:TK0203:MJK}.
@@ -3199,24 +3212,24 @@ unter anderem unter \cite{homepage} und in \cite{DANTE:TK0203:MJK}.
\Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{Name}
\Macro{LoadLetterOptions}\Parameter{Liste von Namen}
\end{Declaration}
-Bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} können \File{lco}-Dateien direkt
-über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} geladen werden. Dazu gibt man den
+Bei \Class{scrlttr2}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrlttr2}} können \File{lco}-Dateien direkt
+über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} geladen werden. Dazu gibt man den
Namen der \File{lco}-Datei ohne die Endung als Option\Index{Optionen} an. Das
Laden der \File{lco}-Datei erfolgt dann direkt nach der Klasse. Das Paket
-\Package{scrletter}\textnote{Achtung!} bietet diese Möglichkeit nicht! Hier
-bleibt nur \File{lco}-Dateien über \Macro{LoadLetterOption}
+\Package{scrletter}\textnote{Achtung!} bietet diese Möglichkeit nicht! Hier
+bleibt nur \File{lco}-Dateien über \Macro{LoadLetterOption}
oder \Macro{LoadLetterOptions}\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Class{scrlttr2}} zu
-laden. Für\textnote{Empfehlung!} \Class{scrlttr2} wird dies ebenfalls
-ausdrücklich empfohlen!
+laden. Für\textnote{Empfehlung!} \Class{scrlttr2} wird dies ebenfalls
+ausdrücklich empfohlen!
-\Macro{LoadLetterOption} und \Macro{LoadLetterOptions} können auch zu einem
-späteren Zeitpunkt, selbst nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} und sogar
+\Macro{LoadLetterOption} und \Macro{LoadLetterOptions} können auch zu einem
+späteren Zeitpunkt, selbst nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} und sogar
innerhalb einer anderen \File{lco}-Datei verwendet werden. Der \PName{Name}
-der \File{lco}-Datei wird in diesen Fällen ebenfalls ohne Endung
-übergeben. Während als Argument von \Macro{LoadLetterOption} der \PName{Name}
+der \File{lco}-Datei wird in diesen Fällen ebenfalls ohne Endung
+übergeben. Während als Argument von \Macro{LoadLetterOption} der \PName{Name}
von genau einer \File{lco}-Datei erwartet wird, versteht
\Macro{LoadLetterOptions} eine durch Komma separierte \PName{Liste von
- Namen}. Die zu den Namen gehörenden \File{lco}-Dateien werden dann in der
+ Namen}. Die zu den Namen gehörenden \File{lco}-Dateien werden dann in der
Reihenfolge der Angabe in der Liste geladen.
\begin{Example}
Peter Musterfrau erstellt auch ein Dokument, in dem mehrere Briefe enthalten
@@ -3227,9 +3240,9 @@ Reihenfolge der Angabe in der Liste geladen.
\end{lstcode}
Allerdings soll bei einem Brief stattdessen die Variante
\File{DINmtext} verwendet werden. Bei dieser steht das Adressfeld
- weiter oben, damit mehr Text auf die erste Seite passt. Dafür ist
+ weiter oben, damit mehr Text auf die erste Seite passt. Dafür ist
die Faltung so angepasst, dass das Adressfeld bei
- DIN~C6/5-Umschlägen trotzdem in das Adressfenster passt. Sie
+ DIN~C6/5-Umschlägen trotzdem in das Adressfenster passt. Sie
erreichen das so:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{letter}{%
@@ -3240,36 +3253,36 @@ Reihenfolge der Angabe in der Liste geladen.
\opening{Hallo,}
\end{lstcode}
Da der Aufbau der ersten Seite erst mit
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} wirklich beginnt, genügt
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} wirklich beginnt, genügt
es, wenn die \File{lco}-Datei vor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} geladen
wird. Dies muss also nicht vor \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}
- erfolgen. Die Änderungen durch das Laden der \File{lco}-Datei sind dann auch
+ erfolgen. Die Änderungen durch das Laden der \File{lco}-Datei sind dann auch
lokal zu dem entsprechenden Brief.
\end{Example}
-Wird\ChangedAt{v2.97}{\Class{scrlttr2}} eine \File{lco}-Datei über
+Wird\ChangedAt{v2.97}{\Class{scrlttr2}} eine \File{lco}-Datei über
\Macro{documentclass} geladen, so darf sie nicht den Namen einer Option
haben.
\begin{Example}
- Da Herr Musterfrau regelmäßig Briefe mit immer gleichen Einstellungen
- schreibt, findet er es ziemlich lästig, diese Angaben immer wieder in jeden
- neuen Brief kopieren zu müssen. Zu seiner Erleichterung schreibt er deshalb
+ Da Herr Musterfrau regelmäßig Briefe mit immer gleichen Einstellungen
+ schreibt, findet er es ziemlich lästig, diese Angaben immer wieder in jeden
+ neuen Brief kopieren zu müssen. Zu seiner Erleichterung schreibt er deshalb
eine \File{lco}-Datei, die ihm die Arbeit erleichtert:%
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{ich.lco}%
Damit schrumpft sein Brief aus dem letzten Beispiel erheblich zusammen:
\lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-23.tex}%
- Das Ergebnis ändert sich jedoch nicht, wie \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-23}
+ Das Ergebnis ändert sich jedoch nicht, wie \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-23}
zeigt.
\begin{figure}
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo,
- Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede,
- Text, Grußfloskel, geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen,
+ Anschrift, Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede,
+ Text, Grußfloskel, geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen,
Verteiler und Lochermarke mit \File{lco}-Datei}]{Ergebnis eines
kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender, Logo, Anschrift,
- Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel,
- geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke
+ Absenderergänzung, Ort, Datum, Betreff, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel,
+ geänderter Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke
bei Verwendung einer \File{lco}-Datei}[l]
\frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-23}}
\end{captionbeside}
@@ -3278,39 +3291,39 @@ haben.
\end{Example}
Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass im Beispiel in der Bankverbindung
-der Datei \File{ich.lco} für »ß« die \TeX-Schreibweise »\Macro{ss}« verwendet
-wurde. Dies hat seinen Grund darin, dass während des Ladens der Klasse
-weder ein Paket für die Eingabecodierung, beispielsweise mit
-\Macro{usepackage}\POParameter{utf8}\PParameter{inputenc} für moderne
-Editoren, noch ein Paket zur Sprachumschaltung, beispielsweise für die neue,
-deutsche Rechtschreibung mit
-\Macro{usepackage}\POParameter{ngerman}\PParameter{babel}, geladen ist.
+der Datei \File{ich.lco} für »ß« die \TeX-Schreibweise »\Macro{ss}« verwendet
+wurde. Dies hat seinen Grund darin, dass während des Ladens der Klasse weder
+ein Paket zur Sprachumschaltung, beispielsweise für die neue, deutsche
+Rechtschreibung mit \Macro{usepackage}\POParameter{ngerman}\PParameter{babel},
+noch bei älteren \LaTeX-Versionen ein Paket für die Eingabecodierung,
+beispielsweise mit \Macro{usepackage}\POParameter{utf8}\PParameter{inputenc}
+für moderne Editoren, geladen ist.
In \autoref{tab:lcoFiles} finden Sie eine Liste aller vordefinierten
\File{lco}-Dateien. Falls\textnote{Achtung!} Sie einen Drucker verwenden, der
-einen sehr großen unbedruckbaren Rand links oder rechts besitzt, werden Sie
-mit der Option \Option{SN}\IndexOption{SN} möglicherweise Probleme
+einen sehr großen unbedruckbaren Rand links oder rechts besitzt, werden Sie
+mit der Option \Option{SN}\IndexOption{SN} möglicherweise Probleme
bekommen. Da die Schweizer Norm SN~101\,130 vorsieht, dass das Adressfeld
8\Unit{mm} vom rechten Papierrand gesetzt wird, werden bei Schweizer Briefen
-auch die Kopfzeile und die Absenderergänzung mit einem entsprechend geringen
-Abstand zum Papierrand gesetzt. Dies betrifft ebenfalls die Geschäftszeile bei
+auch die Kopfzeile und die Absenderergänzung mit einem entsprechend geringen
+Abstand zum Papierrand gesetzt. Dies betrifft ebenfalls die Geschäftszeile bei
der Einstellung
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{refline}{wide}%
\IndexOption{refline~=\textKValue{wide}}
(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}). Sollten\textnote{Tipp!} Sie damit
ein Problem haben, erstellen Sie sich eine eigene \File{lco}-Datei, die
-zunächst \Option{SN} lädt und in der
+zunächst \Option{SN} lädt und in der
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos}\IndexPLength{toaddrhpos} (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee},
\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos}) dann auf einen kleineren
-Wert gesetzt wird. Verringern Sie dann außerdem
+Wert gesetzt wird. Verringern Sie dann außerdem
\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth}\IndexPLength{toaddrwidth}
entsprechend.%
Die\textnote{Tipp!}\phantomsection\label{tipp:\LabelBase.DIN} \File{lco}-Datei
-\File{DIN}\important{\Option{DIN}} wird übrigens immer als erste
-\File{lco}-Datei automatisch geladen, damit alle Pseudolängen mehr oder
+\File{DIN}\important{\Option{DIN}} wird übrigens immer als erste
+\File{lco}-Datei automatisch geladen, damit alle Pseudolängen mehr oder
weniger sinnvoll vordefiniert sind. Es ist daher nicht notwendig diese
voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
@@ -3324,19 +3337,19 @@ voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
\oentry{DIN}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{DIN}\IndexFile[indexmain]{DIN.lco}%
- Parametersatz für Briefe im Format A4 nach DIN~676; geeignet für
- Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C4, C5, C6 und C6/5 (C6 lang)}%
+ Parametersatz für Briefe im Format A4 nach DIN~676; geeignet für
+ Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C4, C5, C6 und C6/5 (C6 lang)}%
\oentry{DINmtext}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{DINmtext}\IndexFile[indexmain]{DINmtext.lco}%
- Parametersatz für Briefe im Format A4 nach DIN~676, wobei die Alternative
- für mehr Text auf der ersten Briefseite verwendet wird; nur geeignet für
- Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C6 und C6/5 (C6 lang)}%
+ Parametersatz für Briefe im Format A4 nach DIN~676, wobei die Alternative
+ für mehr Text auf der ersten Briefseite verwendet wird; nur geeignet für
+ Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C6 und C6/5 (C6 lang)}%
\oentry{KakuLL}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{KakuLL}\IndexFile[indexmain]{KakuLL.lco}%
- Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
- Fensterbriefumschläge des Typs Kaku A4, bei denen das Fenster in etwa
+ Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
+ Fensterbriefumschläge des Typs Kaku A4, bei denen das Fenster in etwa
90\Unit{mm} breit, 45\Unit{mm} hoch, 25\Unit{mm} vom linken und
24\Unit{mm} vom oberen Rand entfernt ist (siehe dazu auch \iffree{den
Anhang der englischen \KOMAScript-Anleitung}{\autoref{cha:japanlco}})}%
@@ -3344,33 +3357,33 @@ voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{KOMAold}\IndexFile[indexmain]{KOMAold.lco}%
\iffalse
- existiert nur noch aus Kompatibilitätsgründen; die Verwendung wird nicht
+ existiert nur noch aus Kompatibilitätsgründen; die Verwendung wird nicht
mehr empfohlen%
\else
- Parametersatz für Briefe im Format A4 mit Annäherung an das Aussehen von
- Briefen der obsoleten Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr}; geeignet für
- Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C4, C5, C6 und C6/5 (C6 lang); es
- werden einige zusätzliche Anweisungen zur Verbesserung der Kompatibilität
+ Parametersatz für Briefe im Format A4 mit Annäherung an das Aussehen von
+ Briefen der obsoleten Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr}; geeignet für
+ Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C4, C5, C6 und C6/5 (C6 lang); es
+ werden einige zusätzliche Anweisungen zur Verbesserung der Kompatibilität
mit der obsoleten Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr}\IndexClass{scrlettr}
- definiert; \Class{scrlttr2} verhält sich mit dieser \File{lco}-Datei
- möglicherweise nicht genau wie bei Verwendung der übrigen
+ definiert; \Class{scrlttr2} verhält sich mit dieser \File{lco}-Datei
+ möglicherweise nicht genau wie bei Verwendung der übrigen
\File{lco}-Dateien%
\fi
}%
\oentry{NF}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{NF}\IndexFile[indexmain]{NF.lco}%
- Parametersatz für französische Briefe nach NF~Z~11-001; geeignet für
- Fensterbriefumschläge im Format DL (110\Unit{mm} auf 220\Unit{mm}) mit
- einem Fenster von 45\Unit{mm} Breite und 100\Unit{mm} Höhe ca. jeweils
+ Parametersatz für französische Briefe nach NF~Z~11-001; geeignet für
+ Fensterbriefumschläge im Format DL (110\Unit{mm} auf 220\Unit{mm}) mit
+ einem Fenster von 45\Unit{mm} Breite und 100\Unit{mm} Höhe ca. jeweils
20\Unit{mm} entfernt vom rechten unteren Rand; diese Datei wurde
- ursprünglich von Jean-Marie Pacquet entwickelt, der auf \cite{www:NF.lco}
+ ursprünglich von Jean-Marie Pacquet entwickelt, der auf \cite{www:NF.lco}
neben einer Erweiterung auch eine LyX-Einbindung bereitstellt.}%
\oentry{NipponEH}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{NipponEH}\IndexFile[indexmain]{NipponEH.lco}%
- Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
- Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
+ Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
+ Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
Fenster in etwa 90\Unit{mm} breit, 55\Unit{mm} hoch, 22\Unit{mm} vom
linken und 12\Unit{mm} vom oberen Rand entfernt ist (siehe dazu auch
\iffree{den Anhang der englischen
@@ -3378,8 +3391,8 @@ voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
\oentry{NipponEL}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{NipponEL}\IndexFile[indexmain]{NipponEL.lco}%
- Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
- Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
+ Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
+ Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
Fenster in etwa 90\Unit{mm} breit, 45\Unit{mm} hoch, 22\Unit{mm} vom
linken und 12\Unit{mm} vom oberen Rand entfernt ist (siehe dazu auch
\iffree{den Anhang der englischen
@@ -3387,8 +3400,8 @@ voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
\oentry{NipponLH}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{NipponLH}\IndexFile[indexmain]{NipponLH.lco}%
- Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
- Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
+ Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
+ Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
Fenster in etwa 90\Unit{mm} breit, 55\Unit{mm} hoch, 25\Unit{mm} vom
linken und 12\Unit{mm} vom oberen Rand entfernt ist (siehe dazu auch
\iffree{den Anhang der englischen
@@ -3396,8 +3409,8 @@ voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
\oentry{NipponLL}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{NipponLL}\IndexFile[indexmain]{NipponLL.lco}%
- Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
- Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
+ Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
+ Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
Fenster in etwa 90\Unit{mm} breit, 45\Unit{mm} hoch, 25\Unit{mm} vom
linken und 12\Unit{mm} vom oberen Rand entfernt ist (siehe dazu auch
\iffree{den Anhang der englischen
@@ -3405,8 +3418,8 @@ voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
\oentry{NipponRL}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{NipponRL}\IndexFile[indexmain]{NipponRL.lco}%
- Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
- Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
+ Parametersatz für japanische Briefe im Format A4; geeignet für japanische
+ Fensterbriefumschläge der Typen Chou oder You 3 oder 4, bei denen das
Fenster in etwa 90\Unit{mm} breit, 45\Unit{mm} hoch, 22\Unit{mm} vom
rechten und 28\Unit{mm} vom oberen Rand entfernt ist (siehe dazu auch
\iffree{den Anhang der englischen
@@ -3414,46 +3427,46 @@ voreingestellte Datei selbst zu laden.
\oentry{SN}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{SN}\IndexFile[indexmain]{SN.lco}%
- Parametersatz für Schweizer Briefe nach SN~010\,130 mit Anschrift rechts;
- geeignet für Schweizer Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C4, C5, C6
+ Parametersatz für Schweizer Briefe nach SN~010\,130 mit Anschrift rechts;
+ geeignet für Schweizer Fensterbriefumschläge in den Formaten C4, C5, C6
und C6/5 (C6 lang)}%
\oentry{SNleft}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{SNleft}\IndexFile[indexmain]{SNleft.lco}%
- Parametersatz für Schweizer Briefe mit Anschrift links; geeignet für
- Schweizer Fensterbriefumschläge mit dem Fenster links in den Formaten C4,
+ Parametersatz für Schweizer Briefe mit Anschrift links; geeignet für
+ Schweizer Fensterbriefumschläge mit dem Fenster links in den Formaten C4,
C5, C6 und C6/5 (C6 lang)}%
\oentry{UScommercial9}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{UScommercial9}%
\IndexFile[indexmain]{UScommercial9.lco}%
- Parametersatz für US-amerikanische Briefe im Format letter;
- geeignet für US-amerikanische Fensterbriefumschläge der Größe
+ Parametersatz für US-amerikanische Briefe im Format letter;
+ geeignet für US-amerikanische Fensterbriefumschläge der Größe
\emph{commercial~No.\,9} mit einem
- Anschriftfenster der Breite 4\,1/2\Unit{in} und Höhe 1\,1/8\Unit{in} an
+ Anschriftfenster der Breite 4\,1/2\Unit{in} und Höhe 1\,1/8\Unit{in} an
einer Position 7/8\Unit{in} von links und 1/2\Unit{in} von unten ohne
- Rücksendeadresse im Fenster; bei Faltung zunächst an der Mittelmarke und
+ Rücksendeadresse im Fenster; bei Faltung zunächst an der Mittelmarke und
dann an der oberen Faltmarke kann auch Papier im Format legal verwendet
- werden, führt dann jedoch zu einer Papiergrößen-Warnung}%
+ werden, führt dann jedoch zu einer Papiergrößen-Warnung}%
\oentry{UScommercial9DW}{%
\leavevmode%
\IndexOption[indexmain]{UScommercial9DW}%
\IndexFile[indexmain]{UScommercial9DW.lco}%
- Parametersatz für US-amerikanische Briefe im Format letter;
- geeignet für US-amerikanische Fensterbriefumschläge der Größe
+ Parametersatz für US-amerikanische Briefe im Format letter;
+ geeignet für US-amerikanische Fensterbriefumschläge der Größe
\emph{commercial~No.\,9} mit einem
- Anschriftfenster der Breite 3\,5/8\Unit{in} und Höhe 1\,1/8\Unit{in} an
+ Anschriftfenster der Breite 3\,5/8\Unit{in} und Höhe 1\,1/8\Unit{in} an
einer Position 3/4\Unit{in} von links und 1/2\Unit{in} von unten mit
- einem Absenderfenster der Breite 3\,1/2\Unit{in} und Höhe 7/8\Unit{in} an
+ einem Absenderfenster der Breite 3\,1/2\Unit{in} und Höhe 7/8\Unit{in} an
einer Position 5/16\Unit{in} von links und 2\,1/2\Unit{in} von unten,
- jedoch ohne Rücksendeadresse im Fenster; bei Faltung zunächst an der
+ jedoch ohne Rücksendeadresse im Fenster; bei Faltung zunächst an der
Mittelmarke und dann an der oberen Faltmarke kann auch Papier im Format
- legal verwendet werden, führt dann jedoch zu einer Papiergrößen-Warnung}%
+ legal verwendet werden, führt dann jedoch zu einer Papiergrößen-Warnung}%
\end{desclist}
-Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie bitte noch, dass es nicht möglich ist,
+Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie bitte noch, dass es nicht möglich ist,
innerhalb einer \File{lco}-Datei mittels \Macro{PassOptionsToPackage} Optionen
-an Pakete zu übergeben, die von der Klasse bereits geladen sind. Normalerweise
+an Pakete zu übergeben, die von der Klasse bereits geladen sind. Normalerweise
betrifft dies nur die Pakete
\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}\IndexPackage{typearea},
\hyperref[cha:scrlfile]{\Package{scrlfile}}\IndexPackage{scrlfile},
@@ -3470,28 +3483,28 @@ betrifft dies nur die Pakete
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Adressdatei}\BeginIndex{}{Serienbriefe}%
-Als besonders lästig wird bei Briefen immer das Eintippen der Adressen und das
+Als besonders lästig wird bei Briefen immer das Eintippen der Adressen und das
Erstellen von Serienbriefen betrachtet. \KOMAScript{} bietet
-hierfür%
+hierfür%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
, wie schon die obsolete Klasse \Class{scrlettr},%
\fi%
-\ eine minimalistische Unterstützung.%
+\ eine minimalistische Unterstützung.%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- \ Eine stark verbesserte Serienbrief"|funktion ist bereits seit längerem in
+ \ Eine stark verbesserte Serienbrief"|funktion ist bereits seit längerem in
Planung.%
\fi
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{adrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}
\Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}\Parameter{Kommentar}
- \Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Parameter{Kürzel}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} können
+Mit \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} können
Adressdateien\Index[indexmain]{Adressdatei} ausgewertet werden. Dies ist
-beispielsweise für Serienbriefe sehr nützlich. Eine Adressdatei muss
+beispielsweise für Serienbriefe sehr nützlich. Eine Adressdatei muss
die Endung \File{.adr} haben und besteht aus einer Reihe von
-\Macro{adrentry}-Einträgen. Ein solcher Eintrag besteht aus acht
+\Macro{adrentry}-Einträgen. Ein solcher Eintrag besteht aus acht
Elementen und kann beispielsweise wie folgt aussehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\adrentry{Maier}
@@ -3503,20 +3516,20 @@ Elementen und kann beispielsweise wie folgt aussehen:
{kauft alles}
{MAIER}
\end{lstcode}
-Die Elemente fünf und sechs, \PName{F1} und \PName{F2}, können frei
-bestimmt werden. Denkbar wären neben Hinweisen auf das Geschlecht oder
+Die Elemente fünf und sechs, \PName{F1} und \PName{F2}, können frei
+bestimmt werden. Denkbar wären neben Hinweisen auf das Geschlecht oder
akademische Grade auch der Geburtstag oder das Eintrittsdatum in einen
-Verein. Um das Überschreiben von \TeX- oder \LaTeX-Anweisungen zu
-vermeiden, ist es empfehlenswert, für \PName{Kürzel} ausschließlich
-Großbuchstaben zu verwenden.
+Verein. Um das Ãœberschreiben von \TeX- oder \LaTeX-Anweisungen zu
+vermeiden, ist es empfehlenswert, für \PName{Kürzel} ausschließlich
+Großbuchstaben zu verwenden.
\begin{Example}
- Herr Maier gehört zu Ihren engeren Geschäftspartnern. Da Sie eine
+ Herr Maier gehört zu Ihren engeren Geschäftspartnern. Da Sie eine
rege Korrespondenz mit ihm pflegen, ist es Ihnen auf Dauer zu
- mühsam, jedesmal alle Empfängerdaten aufs Neue einzugeben.
+ mühsam, jedesmal alle Empfängerdaten aufs Neue einzugeben.
\KOMAScript{} nimmt Ihnen diese Arbeit ab. Angenommen, Sie haben
Ihre Kundenkontakte in der Datei \File{partner.adr} gespeichert und
- Sie möchten Herrn Maier einen Brief schreiben, dann sparen Sie sich
+ Sie möchten Herrn Maier einen Brief schreiben, dann sparen Sie sich
viel Tipparbeit, wenn Sie Folgendes eingeben:
\begin{lstcode}
\input{partner.adr}
@@ -3532,21 +3545,21 @@ Großbuchstaben zu verwenden.
\end{Example}
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
+\vskip-\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}
\Parameter{Telefon}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}\Parameter{F3}
- \Parameter{F4}\Parameter{Kürzel}
+ \Parameter{F4}\Parameter{Kürzel}
\end{Declaration}
Bevor Klagen aufkommen, dass insgesamt nur zwei freie Felder zu wenig seien:
-\KOMAScript{} verfügt alternativ über die Anweisung \Macro{addrentry}. Mit dem
-zusätzlichen »\texttt{d}« im Namen sind hier auch zwei weitere freie Felder
-hinzugekommen, dafür ist jedoch der Kommentar entfallen. Ansonsten kann die
+\KOMAScript{} verfügt alternativ über die Anweisung \Macro{addrentry}. Mit dem
+zusätzlichen »\texttt{d}« im Namen sind hier auch zwei weitere freie Felder
+hinzugekommen, dafür ist jedoch der Kommentar entfallen. Ansonsten kann die
Anweisung genau wie \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} verwendet werden.
-In einer \File{adr}-Datei können die beiden Anweisungen
+In einer \File{adr}-Datei können die beiden Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und \Macro{addrentry} nebeneinander
verwendet werden. Ich\textnote{Achtung!} weise jedoch darauf hin, dass
Zusatzpakete wie das \Package{adrconv}-Paket\IndexPackage{adrconv} von Axel
@@ -3557,14 +3570,14 @@ Erweiterungen vornehmen.%
\EndIndexGroup
-Neben dem vereinfachten Zugriff auf Kundendaten können die
-\File{.adr}-Dateien auch für Serienbriefe\Index[indexmain]{Serienbriefe}
+Neben dem vereinfachten Zugriff auf Kundendaten können die
+\File{.adr}-Dateien auch für Serienbriefe\Index[indexmain]{Serienbriefe}
genutzt werden. So ist es ohne die komplizierte Anbindung an
-Datenbanksysteme möglich, solche Massenpostsendungen zu erstellen.
+Datenbanksysteme möglich, solche Massenpostsendungen zu erstellen.
%
\begin{Example}
Sie wollen einen Serienbrief an alle Mitglieder Ihres
- Anglervereins schicken, um zur nächsten Mitgliederversammlung
+ Anglervereins schicken, um zur nächsten Mitgliederversammlung
einzuladen.
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrlttr2}
@@ -3575,10 +3588,10 @@ Datenbanksysteme möglich, solche Massenpostsendungen zu erstellen.
\renewcommand*{\adrentry}[8]{%
\begin{letter}{#2 #1\\#3}
\opening{Liebe Vereinsmitglieder,}
- unsere nächste Mitgliederversammlung findet am
+ unsere nächste Mitgliederversammlung findet am
Montag, dem 12.~August 2002, statt.
- Folgende Punkte müssen besprochen werden...
+ Folgende Punkte müssen besprochen werden...
\closing{Petri Heil,}
\end{letter}
}
@@ -3588,44 +3601,44 @@ Datenbanksysteme möglich, solche Massenpostsendungen zu erstellen.
\end{lstcode}
Sind in Ihrer \File{adr}-Datei auch
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Anweisungen
- enthalten, müssen Sie dafür eine entsprechende Definition vor dem
- Einladen der Adressdatei ergänzen:
+ enthalten, müssen Sie dafür eine entsprechende Definition vor dem
+ Einladen der Adressdatei ergänzen:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\addrentry}[9]{%
\adrentry{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}{#7}{#9}%
}
\end{lstcode}
- Bei diesem Beispiel wird kein Gebrauch von dem zusätzlichen freien
+ Bei diesem Beispiel wird kein Gebrauch von dem zusätzlichen freien
Feld gemacht und deshalb \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} mit Hilfe von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} definiert.
\end{Example}
-Natürlich kann der Brief"|inhalt auch von den Adressatenmerkmalen
-abhängig gemacht werden. Als Bedingungsfelder können die frei
-bestimmbaren Elemente fünf oder sechs eines
+Natürlich kann der Brief"|inhalt auch von den Adressatenmerkmalen
+abhängig gemacht werden. Als Bedingungsfelder können die frei
+bestimmbaren Elemente fünf oder sechs eines
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Eintrages oder die frei bestimmbaren
-Elemente fünf bis acht eines \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Eintrags
+Elemente fünf bis acht eines \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Eintrags
genutzt werden.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie verwenden das Element fünf, um das Geschlecht eines
+ Angenommen, Sie verwenden das Element fünf, um das Geschlecht eines
Vereinsmitgliedes zu hinterlegen (\PValue{m/w}) und das sechste
- Element weist auf einen Rückstand der Mitgliedsbeiträge hin. Wollen
- Sie nun alle säumigen Mitglieder anschreiben und persönlich anreden,
+ Element weist auf einen Rückstand der Mitgliedsbeiträge hin. Wollen
+ Sie nun alle säumigen Mitglieder anschreiben und persönlich anreden,
so hilft Ihnen folgendes Beispiel weiter:
\begin{lstcode}
\renewcommand*{\adrentry}[8]{
\ifdim #6pt>0pt\relax
- % #6 ist ein Betrag (Gleitkommazahl) größer 0.
- % Es werden also die Säumigen erfasst.
+ % #6 ist ein Betrag (Gleitkommazahl) größer 0.
+ % Es werden also die Säumigen erfasst.
\begin{letter}{#2 #1\\#3}
\if #5m \opening{Lieber #2,} \fi
\if #5w \opening{Liebe #2,} \fi
Leider mussten wir feststellen, dass du mit
- der Zahlung deiner Mitgliedsbeiträge im
- Rückstand bist.
+ der Zahlung deiner Mitgliedsbeiträge im
+ Rückstand bist.
- Wir möchten Dich bitten, den offenen Betrag
+ Wir möchten Dich bitten, den offenen Betrag
von #6~EUR auf das Vereinskonto einzuzahlen.
\closing{Petri Heil,}
\end{letter}
@@ -3633,8 +3646,8 @@ genutzt werden.
}
\end{lstcode}
\end{Example}
-Es ist also möglich, den Brieftext auf bestimmte Empfängermerkmale
-gezielt abzustimmen und so den Eindruck eines persönlichen
+Es ist also möglich, den Brieftext auf bestimmte Empfängermerkmale
+gezielt abzustimmen und so den Eindruck eines persönlichen
Schreibens zu erwecken. Die Anwendungsbreite ist lediglich durch
die maximale Anzahl von zwei freien \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Elementen
beziehungsweise vier freien \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Elementen
@@ -3646,24 +3659,24 @@ begrenzt.
\Macro{addrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben}
\end{Declaration}
\Index[indexmain]{Adressverzeichnis}\Index[indexmain]{Telefonliste}%
-Es ist auch möglich, die Informationen einer \File{.adr}-Datei in
-Adressverzeichnisse oder Telefonlisten umzuwandeln. Sie benötigen dazu
-zusätzlich das \Package{adrconv}\IndexPackage{adrconv}-Paket von Axel Kielhorn
+Es ist auch möglich, die Informationen einer \File{.adr}-Datei in
+Adressverzeichnisse oder Telefonlisten umzuwandeln. Sie benötigen dazu
+zusätzlich das \Package{adrconv}\IndexPackage{adrconv}-Paket von Axel Kielhorn
(siehe \cite{package:adrconv}). In diesem Paket sind interaktive
\LaTeX-Dokumente enthalten, mit deren Hilfe sehr einfach entsprechende Listen
-erstellt werden können.
+erstellt werden können.
Damit die Listen alphabetisch sortiert ausgegeben werden, muss bereits die
Adressdatei sortiert gewesen sein. Es empfiehlt sich dabei, vor jedem neuen
Anfangsbuchstaben eine Anweisung \Macro{adrchar} mit diesem Buchstaben als
-Argument einzufügen. \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} selbst
+Argument einzufügen. \Class{scrlttr2} und \Package{scrletter} selbst
ignorieren diese Anweisung ebenso wie \Macro{addrchar}.
%
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen Sie haben folgende, eher winzige Adressdatei für die ein
+ Angenommen Sie haben folgende, eher winzige Adressdatei für die ein
Adressbuch erstellt werden soll:
% In der folgenden lstcode-Umgebung je nach Umbruchbedarf einzelne
-% Elemente löschen oder hinzufügen. MICHAEL und GABRIEL sollten jedoch
+% Elemente löschen oder hinzufügen. MICHAEL und GABRIEL sollten jedoch
% erhalten bleiben.
% Umbruchkorrektur: Dies kann noch dazu:
% \adrentry{Engel}{Raphael}
@@ -3696,11 +3709,11 @@ ignorieren diese Anweisung ebenso wie \Macro{addrchar}.
\end{lstcode}
Diese verarbeiten Sie nun unter Verwendung des Dokuments \File{adrdir.tex}
aus \cite{package:adrconv}. Ein Problem dabei ist, dass \File{adrdir.tex}
- bis einschließlich Version~1.3 sowohl das veraltete Paket \Package{scrpage}
+ bis einschließlich Version~1.3 sowohl das veraltete Paket \Package{scrpage}
als auch veraltete Schriftbefehle verwendet, die von \KOMAScript{} schon
- seit einiger Zeit nicht mehr unterstützt werden. Sollten Sie entsprechende
- Fehlermeldungen erhalten und keine neuere Version installieren können,
- finden Sie unter \cite{https://komascript.de/node/2154} eine Lösung für
+ seit einiger Zeit nicht mehr unterstützt werden. Sollten Sie entsprechende
+ Fehlermeldungen erhalten und keine neuere Version installieren können,
+ finden Sie unter \cite{https://komascript.de/node/2154} eine Lösung für
dieses Problem.
Eine Seite des Ergebnisses sieht dann etwa so aus:
@@ -3729,14 +3742,14 @@ ignorieren diese Anweisung ebenso wie \Macro{addrchar}.
\end{picture}
\end{center}
Dabei wird der Buchstabe in der Kopfzeile von \Macro{adrchar}
- erzeugt, wenn man die Frage »Namen in der Kopfzeile?« verneint. Siehe dazu
+ erzeugt, wenn man die Frage »Namen in der Kopfzeile?« verneint. Siehe dazu
die Definition in \File{adrdir.tex}.%
\end{Example}%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrektur
-Näheres zum \Package{adrconv}\IndexPackage{adrconv}-Paket ist der zugehörigen
-Anleitung zu entnehmen. Dort finden Sie auch Angaben darüber, ob die aktuelle
+Näheres zum \Package{adrconv}\IndexPackage{adrconv}-Paket ist der zugehörigen
+Anleitung zu entnehmen. Dort finden Sie auch Angaben darüber, ob die aktuelle
Version von \Package{adrconv} bereits mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}
-und \Macro{addrchar} umgehen kann. Frühere Versionen kannten nur
+und \Macro{addrchar} umgehen kann. Frühere Versionen kannten nur
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und \Macro{adrchar}.%
\fi
%
@@ -3751,18 +3764,18 @@ und \Macro{addrchar} umgehen kann. Frühere Versionen kannten nur
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex"
%%% End:
-% LocalWords: Paketoption Satzspiegels Briefklasse Seitenkopf Seitenfuß
+% LocalWords: Paketoption Satzspiegels Briefklasse Seitenkopf Seitenfuß
% LocalWords: Versandart Zentrierung Dokumenttitel Serienbriefen Seitenstil
-% LocalWords: Dokumentpräambel Grafikpaket Briefbogenfuß Briefbogenfußes
+% LocalWords: Dokumentpräambel Grafikpaket Briefbogenfuß Briefbogenfußes
% LocalWords: Standardklassen Briefpaket Dokumentteile Briefkontext Torsten
% LocalWords: Briefumgebung neckische Briefinhalt Absenderinformationen
-% LocalWords: Falzmarken Faltmarken Adressfeld Geschäftszeile Feldinhalts
+% LocalWords: Falzmarken Faltmarken Adressfeld Geschäftszeile Feldinhalts
% LocalWords: Feldbezeichnung Seitenstilen Paginierung Briefklassenoption
% LocalWords: Bedingungsfelder Schriftauswahl Spitzmarke
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex
index 4e27aa22eb..4dfd43f8a6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrwfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrwfile.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrwfile in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über scrwfile in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{scrwfile.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-02-16 04:42:17 +0100 (Fri, 16 Feb 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrwfile)]
\chapter{Dateien mit \Package{scrwfile} sparen und ersetzen}
@@ -54,10 +54,10 @@
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrwfile}
-Eines der Probleme, die auch durch die Einführung von \eTeX{} nicht gelöst
+Eines der Probleme, die auch durch die Einführung von \eTeX{} nicht gelöst
wurden, ist die Tatsache, dass \TeX{} nur 18 Dateien gleichzeitig zum Schreiben
-geöffnet haben kann. Diese Zahl erscheint zunächst recht groß. Allerdings ist
-zu berücksichtigen, dass bereits \LaTeX{} selbst einige dieser Dateien
+geöffnet haben kann. Diese Zahl erscheint zunächst recht groß. Allerdings ist
+zu berücksichtigen, dass bereits \LaTeX{} selbst einige dieser Dateien
belegt. Inhaltsverzeichnis, Tabellenverzeichnis, Abbildungsverzeichnis, Index,
Glossar und jedes weitere Verzeichnis, das von \LaTeX{} aus erzeugt wird,
belegt in der Regel eine weitere Datei. Dazu kommen Hilfsdateien von Paketen
@@ -69,54 +69,54 @@ Im Endeffekt kann es daher geschehen, dass irgendwann die Meldung
\ch@ck ...\else \errmessage {No room for a new #3}
\fi
\end{lstcode}
-erscheint. Seit einiger Zeit ist die einfachste Lösung dieses Problems die
+erscheint. Seit einiger Zeit ist die einfachste Lösung dieses Problems die
Verwendung von Lua\LaTeX{} anstelle von PDF\LaTeX{} oder \XeLaTeX. Damit
-entfällt die Beschränkung und die maximale Anzahl der gleichzeitig zum
-Schreiben geöffneten Dateien wird nur noch durch das Betriebssystem
-bestimmt. In der Realität braucht man sich darüber dann normalerweise keine
+entfällt die Beschränkung und die maximale Anzahl der gleichzeitig zum
+Schreiben geöffneten Dateien wird nur noch durch das Betriebssystem
+bestimmt. In der Realität braucht man sich darüber dann normalerweise keine
Gedanken mehr zu machen.
Dass \LaTeX{} bei Verzeichnissen wie dem Inhaltsverzeichnis, dem
Tabellenverzeichnis und dem Abbildungsverzeichnis immer sofort eine neue Datei
-zum Schreiben öffnet, hat aber auch noch einen weiteren Nachteil. Solche
-Verzeichnisse werden durch deren Befehle nicht nur direkt gesetzt, sie können
-auch kein weiteres Mal gesetzt werden, da die zugehörige Hilfsdatei nach dem
+zum Schreiben öffnet, hat aber auch noch einen weiteren Nachteil. Solche
+Verzeichnisse werden durch deren Befehle nicht nur direkt gesetzt, sie können
+auch kein weiteres Mal gesetzt werden, da die zugehörige Hilfsdatei nach dem
jeweiligen Befehl bis zum Ende des Dokuments leer ist.
-Das Paket \Package{scrwfile} bietet hier eine grundsätzliche Änderung im
-\LaTeX-Kern, durch die beide Probleme nicht nur für Lua\LaTeX{} sondern auch bei
-Verwendung von PDF\LaTeX{} oder \XeLaTeX{} gelöst werden können.
+Das Paket \Package{scrwfile} bietet hier eine grundsätzliche Änderung im
+\LaTeX-Kern, durch die beide Probleme nicht nur für Lua\LaTeX{} sondern auch bei
+Verwendung von PDF\LaTeX{} oder \XeLaTeX{} gelöst werden können.
-\section{Grundsätzliche Änderungen am \LaTeX-Kern}
+\section{Grundsätzliche Änderungen am \LaTeX-Kern}
\seclabel{kernelpatches}
-\LaTeX-Klassen verwenden zum Öffnen eines Verzeichnisses beispielsweise mit
+\LaTeX-Klassen verwenden zum Öffnen eines Verzeichnisses beispielsweise mit
\Macro{tableofcontents} oder \Macro{listoffigure} die \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisung
-\Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc}. \LaTeX{} selbst lädt bei dieser
-Anweisung nicht nur die zugehörige Hilfsdatei, sondern öffnet diese Hilfsdatei
-auch neu zum Schreiben. Werden anschließend mit \Macro{addtocontents} oder
-\Macro{addcontentsline} Einträge in dieses Verzeichnis vorgenommen, so wird
-jedoch nicht direkt in die geöffnete Hilfsdatei geschrieben. Stattdessen
+\Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc}. \LaTeX{} selbst lädt bei dieser
+Anweisung nicht nur die zugehörige Hilfsdatei, sondern öffnet diese Hilfsdatei
+auch neu zum Schreiben. Werden anschließend mit \Macro{addtocontents} oder
+\Macro{addcontentsline} Einträge in dieses Verzeichnis vorgenommen, so wird
+jedoch nicht direkt in die geöffnete Hilfsdatei geschrieben. Stattdessen
schreibt \LaTeX{} \Macro{@writefile}-Anweisungen\IndexCmd{@writefile} in die
\File{aux}-Datei. Erst beim Einlesen der \File{aux}-Dateien am Ende des
-Dokuments wird dann über diese \Macro{@writefile}-Anweisungen in die
-tatsächlichen Hilfsdateien geschrieben. Die Hilfsdateien werden von \LaTeX{}
-auch nicht explizit geschlossen. Stattdessen verlässt sich \LaTeX{} hier
-darauf, dass \TeX{} die Dateien am Ende ohnehin schließt.
-
-Dieses Vorgehen sorgt dafür, dass die Hilfsdateien zwar erst innerhalb von
-\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} tatsächlich beschrieben werden, aber trotzdem
-während des gesamten \LaTeX-Laufs gleichzeitig offen sind. \Package{scrwfile}
+Dokuments wird dann über diese \Macro{@writefile}-Anweisungen in die
+tatsächlichen Hilfsdateien geschrieben. Die Hilfsdateien werden von \LaTeX{}
+auch nicht explizit geschlossen. Stattdessen verlässt sich \LaTeX{} hier
+darauf, dass \TeX{} die Dateien am Ende ohnehin schließt.
+
+Dieses Vorgehen sorgt dafür, dass die Hilfsdateien zwar erst innerhalb von
+\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} tatsächlich beschrieben werden, aber trotzdem
+während des gesamten \LaTeX-Laufs gleichzeitig offen sind. \Package{scrwfile}
hat nun genau hier einen Ansatzpunkt: die Umdefinierung von \Macro{@starttoc}
und \Macro{@writefile}.
-Natürlich\textnote{Achtung!} besitzen Änderungen am \LaTeX-Kern immer das
-Potential, dass es zu Unverträglichkeiten mit anderen Paketen kommen
-kann. Betroffen können in erster Linie Pakete sein, die ebenfalls
-\Macro{@starttoc} oder \Macro{@writefile} umdefinieren. In einigen Fällen kann
-es helfen, die Reihenfolge der Pakete zu ändern. Wenn Sie auf
-ein solches Problem stoßen, sollten Sie sich an den \KOMAScript-Autor wenden.
+Natürlich\textnote{Achtung!} besitzen Änderungen am \LaTeX-Kern immer das
+Potential, dass es zu Unverträglichkeiten mit anderen Paketen kommen
+kann. Betroffen können in erster Linie Pakete sein, die ebenfalls
+\Macro{@starttoc} oder \Macro{@writefile} umdefinieren. In einigen Fällen kann
+es helfen, die Reihenfolge der Pakete zu ändern. Wenn Sie auf
+ein solches Problem stoßen, sollten Sie sich an den \KOMAScript-Autor wenden.
\section{Das Eindateiensystem}
@@ -129,45 +129,45 @@ Bereits beim Laden des Pakets mit
\end{lstcode}
wird \Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc} von \Package{scrwfile} so
umdefiniert, dass davon selbst keine Datei mehr zum Schreiben angefordert und
-geöffnet wird. Unmittelbar vor dem Schließen der \File{aux}-Datei in
+geöffnet wird. Unmittelbar vor dem Schließen der \File{aux}-Datei in
\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} wird dann \Macro{@writefile} so umdefiniert,
dass diese Anweisung statt in die eigentlichen Hilfsdateien in eine neue
Hilfsdatei mit der Endung \File{wrt} schreibt. Nach dem Einlesen der
-\File{aux}-Dateien wird schließlich die \File{wrt}-Datei abgearbeitet und zwar
-ein Mal für jede der Hilfsdateien, in die mit \Macro{@writefile} geschrieben
+\File{aux}-Dateien wird schließlich die \File{wrt}-Datei abgearbeitet und zwar
+ein Mal für jede der Hilfsdateien, in die mit \Macro{@writefile} geschrieben
wird. Dabei muss aber nicht jede dieser Hilfsdateien gleichzeitig
-geöffnet sein. Stattdessen ist immer nur eine zum Schreiben geöffnet und wird
+geöffnet sein. Stattdessen ist immer nur eine zum Schreiben geöffnet und wird
auch wieder explizit geschlossen. Da dabei eine interne Schreibdatei von
-\LaTeX{} wiederverwendet wird, benötigt \Package{scrwfile} keine einzige
-eigene Schreibdatei für diese Art von Verzeichnissen.
+\LaTeX{} wiederverwendet wird, benötigt \Package{scrwfile} keine einzige
+eigene Schreibdatei für diese Art von Verzeichnissen.
Selbst wenn bisher nur mit einem Inhaltsverzeichnis gearbeitet wird, steht
-nach dem Laden des Pakets bereits eine Schreibdatei mehr für
-Literaturverzeichnisse, Stichwortverzeichnisse, Glossare und ähnliche
+nach dem Laden des Pakets bereits eine Schreibdatei mehr für
+Literaturverzeichnisse, Stichwortverzeichnisse, Glossare und ähnliche
Verzeichnisse, die nicht mit \Macro{@starttoc} arbeiten, zur
-Verfügung. Darüber hinaus können beliebig viele Verzeichnisse, die mit
+Verfügung. Darüber hinaus können beliebig viele Verzeichnisse, die mit
\Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc} arbeiten, angelegt werden.%
%
-\section{Das Klonen von Dateieinträgen}
+\section{Das Klonen von Dateieinträgen}
\seclabel{clonefilefeature}
-Nachdem \Macro{@writefile}\IndexCmd{@writefile} für das Eindateiensystem aus
-dem vorherigen Abschnitt bereits so geändert wurde, dass es nicht direkt in
+Nachdem \Macro{@writefile}\IndexCmd{@writefile} für das Eindateiensystem aus
+dem vorherigen Abschnitt bereits so geändert wurde, dass es nicht direkt in
die entsprechende Hilfsdatei schreibt, lag eine weitere Idee nahe. Beim
-Kopieren der \Macro{@writefile}-Anweisungen in die \File{wrt}-Datei können
-diese auch für andere Zielendungen übernommen werden.
+Kopieren der \Macro{@writefile}-Anweisungen in die \File{wrt}-Datei können
+diese auch für andere Zielendungen übernommen werden.
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{TOCclone}\OParameter{Verzeichnisüberschrift}
+ \Macro{TOCclone}\OParameter{Verzeichnisüberschrift}
\Parameter{Quellendung}\Parameter{Zielendung}
\Macro{listof\PName{Zielendung}}
\end{Declaration}%
-Durch dieses Klonen von Dateieinträgen werden so ganze Verzeichnisse
+Durch dieses Klonen von Dateieinträgen werden so ganze Verzeichnisse
geklont. Dazu muss man nur die Endung der Hilfsdatei des Verzeichnisses
-kennen, dessen Einträge kopiert werden sollen. Zusätzlich muss man die Endung
-einer Zieldatei angeben. In diese werden die Einträge dann kopiert. Natürlich
-kann man in dieses geklonte Verzeichnis auch zusätzliche Einträge
+kennen, dessen Einträge kopiert werden sollen. Zusätzlich muss man die Endung
+einer Zieldatei angeben. In diese werden die Einträge dann kopiert. Natürlich
+kann man in dieses geklonte Verzeichnis auch zusätzliche Einträge
schreiben.
Die \PName{Zielendung} der Zieldatei wird mit Hilfe von
@@ -176,32 +176,32 @@ Die \PName{Zielendung} der Zieldatei wird mit Hilfe von
\autoref{cha:tocbasic}) verwaltet. Steht eine solche Datei bereits unter
Kontrolle von \hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} wird eine Warnung
ausgegeben. Anderenfalls wird mit Hilfe von
-\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} ein neues Verzeichnis für diese
-Endung angelegt. Die Überschrift dieses Verzeichnisses kann man über das
-optionale Argument \PName{Verzeichnisüberschrift} bestimmen.
+\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} ein neues Verzeichnis für diese
+Endung angelegt. Die Überschrift dieses Verzeichnisses kann man über das
+optionale Argument \PName{Verzeichnisüberschrift} bestimmen.
-Ausgeben kann man dieses neue Verzeichnis dann beispielsweise über die
+Ausgeben kann man dieses neue Verzeichnis dann beispielsweise über die
Anweisung \Macro{listof\PName{Zielendung}}. Die
Verzeichniseigenschaften\important{\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}}
\PValue{leveldown}, \PValue{numbered}, \PValue{onecolumn} und \PValue{totoc}
(siehe Anweisung \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} in
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) werden
-automatisch in das Zielverzeichnis übernommen, falls sie für das
+automatisch in das Zielverzeichnis übernommen, falls sie für das
Quellverzeichnis bereits gesetzt waren. Die Eigenschaft \PValue{nobabel} wird
-für geklonte Verzeichnisse immer gesetzt, da die entsprechenden
-\Package{babel}-Einträge in das Quellverzeichnis ohnehin bereits kopiert
+für geklonte Verzeichnisse immer gesetzt, da die entsprechenden
+\Package{babel}-Einträge in das Quellverzeichnis ohnehin bereits kopiert
werden.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie wollen zusätzlich zum normalen Inhaltsverzeichnis eine
- Gliederungsübersicht, in der nur die Kapitel angezeigt werden.
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen zusätzlich zum normalen Inhaltsverzeichnis eine
+ Gliederungsübersicht, in der nur die Kapitel angezeigt werden.
\begin{lstcode}
\usepackage{scrwfile}
- \TOCclone[Gliederungsübersicht]{toc}{stoc}
+ \TOCclone[Gliederungsübersicht]{toc}{stoc}
\end{lstcode}
- Hierdurch wird zunächst ein neues Verzeichnis mit der Überschrift
- »Gliederungsübersicht« angelegt. Das neue Verzeichnis verwendet die
- Dateiendung \File{stoc}. Alle Einträge in die Datei mit der Endung
+ Hierdurch wird zunächst ein neues Verzeichnis mit der Überschrift
+ »Gliederungsübersicht« angelegt. Das neue Verzeichnis verwendet die
+ Dateiendung \File{stoc}. Alle Einträge in die Datei mit der Endung
\File{toc} werden auch in dieses Verzeichnis kopiert.
Damit dieses neue Verzeichnis nun nur die Kapitelebene ausgibt, verwenden
@@ -209,14 +209,14 @@ werden.
\begin{lstcode}
\addtocontents{stoc}{\protect\value{tocdepth}=0}
\end{lstcode}
- Während\textnote{Achtung!} normalerweise erst ab
- \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} Einträge in ein Verzeichnis vorgenommen
- werden können, funktioniert dies nach Laden von \Package{scrwfile} bereits
- in der Dokumentpräambel. Durch die hier gezeigte unkonventionelle Art, den
- Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} innerhalb der Verzeichnisdatei zu
- ändern, bleibt diese Änderung nur für dieses Verzeichnis wirksam.
-
- Später im Dokument wird das Verzeichnis mit der Endung \File{stoc} dann
+ Während\textnote{Achtung!} normalerweise erst ab
+ \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} Einträge in ein Verzeichnis vorgenommen
+ werden können, funktioniert dies nach Laden von \Package{scrwfile} bereits
+ in der Dokumentpräambel. Durch die hier gezeigte unkonventionelle Art, den
+ Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} innerhalb der Verzeichnisdatei zu
+ ändern, bleibt diese Änderung nur für dieses Verzeichnis wirksam.
+
+ Später im Dokument wird das Verzeichnis mit der Endung \File{stoc} dann
durch
\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={listofstoc}]
\listofstoc
@@ -224,16 +224,16 @@ werden.
ausgegeben und zeigt nur die Teile und Kapitel des Dokuments.
Etwas schwieriger wird es, wenn das Inhaltsverzeichnis in der
- Gliederungsübersicht angezeigt werden soll. Dies wäre zwar mit
+ Gliederungsübersicht angezeigt werden soll. Dies wäre zwar mit
\begin{lstcode}
\addtocontents{toc}{%
\protect\addxcontentsline
{stoc}{chapter}{\protect\contentsname}%
}
\end{lstcode}
- möglich. Da jedoch alle Einträge in \File{toc} auch nach \File{stoc} kopiert
- werden, würde so von der Gliederungsübersicht dieser Eintrag ebenfalls
- übernommen. Also darf der Eintrag nicht aus der Verzeichnisdatei heraus
+ möglich. Da jedoch alle Einträge in \File{toc} auch nach \File{stoc} kopiert
+ werden, würde so von der Gliederungsübersicht dieser Eintrag ebenfalls
+ übernommen. Also darf der Eintrag nicht aus der Verzeichnisdatei heraus
erzeugt werden. Da das Paket \hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}}} zum Einsatz kommt,
kann aber%
@@ -243,16 +243,16 @@ werden.
\addxcontentsline{stoc}{chapter}
{\protect\contentsname}}
\end{lstcode}
- verwendet werden. Natürlich\textnote{Achtung!} setzt dies voraus, dass die
+ verwendet werden. Natürlich\textnote{Achtung!} setzt dies voraus, dass die
Datei mit Endung \File{toc} auch unter der Kontrolle von
\hyperref[cha:tocbasic]{\Package{tocbasic}} steht. Dies ist bei allen
- \KOMAScript-Klassen der Fall. Näheres zur Anweisung
+ \KOMAScript-Klassen der Fall. Näheres zur Anweisung
\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} ist in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}
auf \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} zu finden.%
\end{Example}%
%
Die in den Beispielen verwendete Anweisung
-\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline} ist übrigens ebenfalls in
+\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline} ist übrigens ebenfalls in
\autoref{cha:tocbasic}, \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline}
dokumentiert.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -263,31 +263,31 @@ dokumentiert.%
Obwohl das Paket bereits von mehreren Anwendern getestet wurde und vielfach im
Einsatz ist, ist seine Entwicklung noch nicht abgeschlossen. Deshalb ist es
-theoretisch möglich, dass insbesondere an der internen Funktionsweise des
-Pakets noch Änderungen vorgenommen werden. Sehr wahrscheinlich sind auch
-künftige Erweiterungen. Teilweise befindet sich bereits Code für solche
+theoretisch möglich, dass insbesondere an der internen Funktionsweise des
+Pakets noch Änderungen vorgenommen werden. Sehr wahrscheinlich sind auch
+künftige Erweiterungen. Teilweise befindet sich bereits Code für solche
Erweiterungen im Paket. Da jedoch noch keine Benutzeranweisungen existieren,
-mit denen diese Möglichkeiten genutzt werden könnten, wurde hier auf eine
+mit denen diese Möglichkeiten genutzt werden könnten, wurde hier auf eine
Dokumentation derselben verzichtet.
-\section{Bekannte Paketunverträglichkeiten}
+\section{Bekannte Paketunverträglichkeiten}
\seclabel{incompatible}
-Wie in \autoref{sec:scrwfile.kernelpatches} bereits erwähnt, muss
+Wie in \autoref{sec:scrwfile.kernelpatches} bereits erwähnt, muss
\Package{scrwfile} einige wenige Anweisungen des \LaTeX-Kerns
-umdefinieren. Dies geschieht nicht allein während des Ladens des Pakets,
-sondern vielmehr zu verschiedenen Zeitpunkten während der Abarbeitung eines
+umdefinieren. Dies geschieht nicht allein während des Ladens des Pakets,
+sondern vielmehr zu verschiedenen Zeitpunkten während der Abarbeitung eines
Dokuments, beispielsweise vor dem Einlesen der
-\File{aux}-Datei. Dies\textnote{Achtung!} führt dazu, dass \Package{scrwfile}
-sich nicht mit anderen Paketen verträgt, die diese Anweisungen ebenfalls zur
+\File{aux}-Datei. Dies\textnote{Achtung!} führt dazu, dass \Package{scrwfile}
+sich nicht mit anderen Paketen verträgt, die diese Anweisungen ebenfalls zur
Laufzeit umdefinieren.
-Ein Beispiel für eine solche Unverträglichkeit ist
+Ein Beispiel für eine solche Unverträglichkeit ist
\Package{titletoc}\important{\Package{titletoc}}\IndexPackage{titletoc}. Das
-Paket definiert unter gewissen Umständen \Macro{@writefile} zur Laufzeit
+Paket definiert unter gewissen Umständen \Macro{@writefile} zur Laufzeit
um. Werden \Package{scrwfile} und \Package{titletoc} zusammen verwendet, ist
-die Funktion beider Paket nicht mehr gewährleistet. Dies ist weder ein Fehler
+die Funktion beider Paket nicht mehr gewährleistet. Dies ist weder ein Fehler
in \Package{titletoc} noch in \Package{scrwfile}.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -295,13 +295,13 @@ in \Package{titletoc} noch in \Package{scrwfile}.%
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Eindateiensystem Schreibdatei Zieldatei Zielendung Quellendung
-% LocalWords: Verzeichnisüberschrift Dateiendung Zielendungen Verzeichnisdatei
-% LocalWords: Benutzeranweisungen Dokumentpräambel Kapitelebene
-% LocalWords: Paketunverträglichkeiten Verzeichniseigenschaften
+% LocalWords: Verzeichnisüberschrift Dateiendung Zielendungen Verzeichnisdatei
+% LocalWords: Benutzeranweisungen Dokumentpräambel Kapitelebene
+% LocalWords: Paketunverträglichkeiten Verzeichniseigenschaften
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex
index ebc8861e1f..da1b344524 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% tocbasic.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% tocbasic.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,13 +40,13 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Paket tocbasic für Paket- und Klassenautoren
+% Paket tocbasic für Paket- und Klassenautoren
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{tocbasic.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-08-31 09:11:20 +0200 (Fri, 31 Aug 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 (Wed, 09 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (package tocbasic)]
\chapter{Verzeichnisse verwalten mit Hilfe von \Package{tocbasic}}
@@ -58,60 +58,60 @@
\BeginIndex{}{Dateierweiterung}%
\index{Dateiendung|see{Dateierweiterung}}%|
Der Hauptzweck des Pakets \Package{tocbasic} besteht darin, Paket- und
-Klassenautoren die Möglichkeit zu geben, eigene Verzeichnisse vergleichbar mit
+Klassenautoren die Möglichkeit zu geben, eigene Verzeichnisse vergleichbar mit
dem Abbildungs- und Tabellenverzeichnis zu erstellen und dabei Klassen und
-anderen Paketen einen Teil der Kontrolle über diese Verzeichnisse zu
-erlauben. Dabei sorgt das Paket \Package{tocbasic} auch dafür, dass diese
+anderen Paketen einen Teil der Kontrolle über diese Verzeichnisse zu
+erlauben. Dabei sorgt das Paket \Package{tocbasic} auch dafür, dass diese
Verzeichnisse von \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} (siehe
-\cite{package:babel}) bei der Sprachumschaltung mit berücksichtigt
-werden. Durch Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic} soll dem Paketautor die Mühe
+\cite{package:babel}) bei der Sprachumschaltung mit berücksichtigt
+werden. Durch Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic} soll dem Paketautor die Mühe
genommen werden, selbst solche Anpassungen an andere Pakete oder an Klassen
-vornehmen zu müssen.
+vornehmen zu müssen.
Als kleiner Nebeneffekt kann das Paket auch verwendet werden, um neue
-Gleitumgebungen oder den Gleitumgebungen ähnliche nicht gleitende Umgebungen
-für Konsultationsobjekte zu definieren. Näheres dazu wird nach der Erklärung
+Gleitumgebungen oder den Gleitumgebungen ähnliche nicht gleitende Umgebungen
+für Konsultationsobjekte zu definieren. Näheres dazu wird nach der Erklärung
der grundlegenden Anweisungen in den folgenden vier Abschnitten durch ein
Beispiel in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.example} verdeutlicht, das in kompakter Form
noch einmal in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.declarenewtoc} aufgegriffen wird.
-\KOMAScript{} verwendet \Package{tocbasic} sowohl für das Inhaltsverzeichnis
-als auch für die bereits erwähnten Verzeichnisse für Abbildungen und Tabellen.
+\KOMAScript{} verwendet \Package{tocbasic} sowohl für das Inhaltsverzeichnis
+als auch für die bereits erwähnten Verzeichnisse für Abbildungen und Tabellen.
\section{Grundlegende Anweisungen}
\seclabel{basics}
Die grundlegenden Anweisungen dienen in erster Linie dazu, eine Liste aller
-bekannten Dateierweiterungen\textnote{Dateierweiterung, Verzeichnis}, die für
-Verzeichnisse stehen, zu verwalten. Einträge in Dateien mit solchen
+bekannten Dateierweiterungen\textnote{Dateierweiterung, Verzeichnis}, die für
+Verzeichnisse stehen, zu verwalten. Einträge in Dateien mit solchen
Dateierweiterungen werden typischerweise mit
\Macro{addtocontents}\important{\Macro{addtocontents},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} vorgenommen. Darüber hinaus gibt es
-Anweisungen, mit denen Aktionen für all diese Dateierweiterungen durchgeführt
-werden können. Außerdem gibt es Anweisungen, um Einstellungen für die Datei
-vorzunehmen, die zu einer gegebenen Dateierweiterung gehört. Typischerweise
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} vorgenommen. Darüber hinaus gibt es
+Anweisungen, mit denen Aktionen für all diese Dateierweiterungen durchgeführt
+werden können. Außerdem gibt es Anweisungen, um Einstellungen für die Datei
+vorzunehmen, die zu einer gegebenen Dateierweiterung gehört. Typischerweise
hat so eine Dateierweiterung auch einen
Besitzer\textnote{Dateibesitzer}. Dieser Besitzer kann eine Klasse oder ein
-Paket oder ein Bezeichner sein, den der Autor der Klasse oder des Pakets, das
-\Package{tocbasic} verwendet, frei gewählt hat. \KOMAScript{} selbst verwendet
-beispielsweise den Besitzer \PValue{float} für die Dateierweiterungen
-\File{lof} und \File{lot}, die für das Abbildungs- und das Tabellenverzeichnis
-stehen. Für das Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet \KOMAScript{} als Besitzer den
-Dateinamen der Klasse.
+Paket oder die Bezeichnung einer Kategorie sein, die der Autor der Klasse oder
+des Pakets, das \Package{tocbasic} verwendet, frei gewählt hat. \KOMAScript{}
+selbst verwendet beispielsweise die Kategorie \PValue{float} für die
+Dateierweiterungen \File{lof} und \File{lot}, die für das Abbildungs- und das
+Tabellenverzeichnis stehen. Für das Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet \KOMAScript{}
+als Besitzer den Dateinamen der Klasse.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{ifattoclist}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit dieser Anweisung wird überprüft, ob die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits
+Mit dieser Anweisung wird überprüft, ob die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits
in der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen vorhanden ist oder nicht. Ist
-die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits über diese Liste bekannt, so wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil}
-ausgeführt.
+die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits über diese Liste bekannt, so wird der
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil}
+ausgeführt.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie wollen wissen, ob die Dateierweiterung »\File{foo}« bereits
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen wissen, ob die Dateierweiterung »\File{foo}« bereits
verwendet wird, um in diesem Fall eine Fehlermeldung auszugeben, weil diese
damit nicht mehr verwendet werden kann:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -136,34 +136,34 @@ ausgeführt.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{addtotoclist}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisung fügt die \PName{Dateierweiterung} der Liste der bekannten
+Diese Anweisung fügt die \PName{Dateierweiterung} der Liste der bekannten
Dateierweiterungen hinzu. Ist die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits bekannt, so
wird hingegen ein Fehler gemeldet, um die doppelte Verwendung derselben
\PName{Dateierweiterung} zu verhindern.
Wenn das optionale Argument \OParameter{Besitzer} angegeben wurde, wird der
-angegebene \PName{Besitzer} für diese Dateierweiterung mit gespeichert. Wurde
+angegebene \PName{Besitzer} für diese Dateierweiterung mit gespeichert. Wurde
das optionale Argument weggelassen, dann versucht \Package{tocbasic} den
Dateinamen der aktuell abgearbeiteten Klasse oder des Pakets herauszufinden
und als \PName{Besitzer} zu speichern. Dies\textnote{Achtung!} funktioniert
-nur, wenn \Macro{addtotoclist} während des Ladens der Klasse oder des Pakets
-aufgerufen wird. Es funktioniert nicht, wenn \Macro{addtotoclist} erst später
+nur, wenn \Macro{addtotoclist} während des Ladens der Klasse oder des Pakets
+aufgerufen wird. Es funktioniert nicht, wenn \Macro{addtotoclist} erst später
aufgrund der Verwendung einer Anweisung durch den Benutzer aufgerufen wird. In
-diesem Fall wird als \PName{Besitzer} »\PValue{.}« eingetragen.
+diesem Fall wird als \PName{Besitzer} »\PValue{.}« eingetragen.
Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie, dass ein leeres Argument \PName{Besitzer}
nicht das Gleiche ist wie das Weglassen des kompletten optionalen Arguments
-einschließlich der eckigen Klammern. Ein leeres Argument würde auch einen
+einschließlich der eckigen Klammern. Ein leeres Argument würde auch einen
leeren \PName{Besitzer} ergeben.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie wollen die Dateierweiterung »\File{foo}« der Liste der
- bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzufügen, während Ihr Paket mit dem
- Dateinamen »\File{bar.sty}« geladen wird:
+ Angenommen, Sie wollen die Dateierweiterung »\File{foo}« der Liste der
+ bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzufügen, während Ihr Paket mit dem
+ Dateinamen »\File{bar.sty}« geladen wird:
\begin{lstcode}
\addtotoclist{foo}
\end{lstcode}
- Dies fügt die Dateierweiterung »\PValue{foo}« mit dem Besitzer
- »\PValue{bar.sty}« der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterung hinzu, wenn diese
+ Dies fügt die Dateierweiterung »\PValue{foo}« mit dem Besitzer
+ »\PValue{bar.sty}« der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterung hinzu, wenn diese
Erweiterung nicht bereits in der Liste ist. Wenn die verwendete
Klasse oder ein anderes Paket diese Dateierweiterung schon angemeldet hat,
erhalten Sie den Fehler:
@@ -173,8 +173,8 @@ leeren \PName{Besitzer} ergeben.
See the tocbasic package documentation for explanation.
Type H <return> for immediate help.
\end{lstoutput}
- Wenn Sie dann tatsächlich die Taste »\texttt{H}«, gefolgt von der
- Return-Taste drücken, erhalten Sie als Hilfe:
+ Wenn Sie dann tatsächlich die Taste »\texttt{H}«, gefolgt von der
+ Return-Taste drücken, erhalten Sie als Hilfe:
\begin{lstoutput}
File extension `foo' is already used by a toc-file, while bar.sty
tried to use it again for a toc-file.
@@ -190,75 +190,75 @@ leeren \PName{Besitzer} ergeben.
\newcommand*{\createnewlistofsomething}[1]{%
\addtotoclist[bar.sty]{#1}%
% Weitere Aktionen, um dieses Verzeichnis
- % verfügbar zu machen
+ % verfügbar zu machen
}
\end{lstcode}
Wenn jetzt der Anwender diese Anweisung aufruft, beispielsweise mit
\begin{lstcode}
\createnewlistofsomething{foo}
\end{lstcode}
- dann wird die Dateierweiterung »\PValue{foo}« ebenfalls mit dem Besitzer
- »\PValue{bar.sty}« zur Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt
+ dann wird die Dateierweiterung »\PValue{foo}« ebenfalls mit dem Besitzer
+ »\PValue{bar.sty}« zur Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt
oder aber ein Fehler gemeldet, wenn diese Dateierweiterung bereits verwendet
wird.
\end{Example}
-Sie können als \PName{Besitzer} angeben, was immer Sie wollen, aber es sollte
+Sie können als \PName{Besitzer} angeben, was immer Sie wollen, aber es sollte
eindeutig sein! Wenn Sie beispielsweise der Autor des Pakets \Package{float}
-wären, könnten Sie als \PName{Besitzer} auch »\PValue{float}« anstelle von
-»\PValue{float.sty}« angeben. In diesem Fall würden die
+wären, könnten Sie als \PName{Besitzer} auch die Kategorie »\PValue{float}«
+anstelle von »\PValue{float.sty}« angeben. In diesem Fall würden die
\KOMAScript-Optionen\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}}%
-\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}} für das Verzeichnis der Abbildungen
+\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}} für das Verzeichnis der Abbildungen
und das Verzeichnis der Tabellen auch Ihre Verzeichnisse betreffen, die zum
Zeitpunkt der Verwendung der jeweiligen Option bereits zur Liste der bekannten
-Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt sind. Das liegt daran, dass \KOMAScript{} die
-Dateierweiterungen »\PValue{lof}« für das Abbildungsverzeichnis und
-»\PValue{lot}« für das Tabellenverzeichnis mit dem Besitzer »\PValue{float}«
-anmeldet und die Optionen für diese Besitzer setzt.
+Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt sind. Das liegt daran, dass \KOMAScript{} die
+Dateierweiterungen »\PValue{lof}« für das Abbildungsverzeichnis und
+»\PValue{lot}« für das Tabellenverzeichnis mit der Kategorie »\PValue{float}«
+als \PName{Besitzer} anmeldet und die Optionen für diesen Besitzer setzt.
Das Paket \hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}\IndexPackage{scrhack}%
-\important{ \hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}} enthält übrigens
-Patches für mehrere Pakete wie \Package{float} oder \Package{listings}, die
+\important{ \hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}} enthält übrigens
+Patches für mehrere Pakete wie \Package{float} oder \Package{listings}, die
eigene Verzeichnisse bereitstellen. Bei Verwendung von
\hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}} wird dann unter anderem die
jeweilige Dateierweiterung der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen
-hinzugefügt. Dabei wird als \PName{Besitzer} ebenfalls »\PValue{float}«
-verwendet. Dies ist sozusagen der grundlegende Baustein, um die Möglichkeiten
-von \Package{tocbasic} und der \KOMAScript-Klassen auch für diese
-Verzeichnisse nutzen zu können.%
+hinzugefügt. Dabei wird als \PName{Besitzer} ebenfalls »\PValue{float}«
+verwendet. Dies ist sozusagen der grundlegende Baustein, um die Möglichkeiten
+von \Package{tocbasic} und der \KOMAScript-Klassen auch für diese
+Verzeichnisse nutzen zu können.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{AtAddToTocList}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
-Auf diese Weise können die \PName{Anweisungen} zu einer internen Liste von
-Anweisungen hinzugefügt werden, die immer dann auszuführen sind, wenn eine
+Auf diese Weise können die \PName{Anweisungen} zu einer internen Liste von
+Anweisungen hinzugefügt werden, die immer dann auszuführen sind, wenn eine
Dateierweiterung mit dem angegebenen \PName{Besitzer} zur Liste der bekannten
-Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt wird. Bezüglich des optionalen Arguments wird
-wie in der Erklärung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} beschrieben
+Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt wird. Bezüglich des optionalen Arguments wird
+wie in der Erklärung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} beschrieben
verfahren. Wird das optionale Argument leer gelassen, werden in diesem Fall
-die Aktionen unabhängig vom Besitzer immer ausgeführt, wenn die
-Dateierweiterung zu der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt
-wird. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist außerdem
+die Aktionen unabhängig vom Besitzer immer ausgeführt, wenn die
+Dateierweiterung zu der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt
+wird. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist außerdem
\Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} die
-Dateierweiterung, die gerade hinzugefügt wird.
+Dateierweiterung, die gerade hinzugefügt wird.
\begin{Example}
\Package{tocbasic} selbst verwendet
- % Umbruchkorrektur (schließende Klammer verschoben)
+ % Umbruchkorrektur (schließende Klammer verschoben)
\begin{lstcode}
\AtAddToTocList[]{%
\expandafter\tocbasic@extend@babel
\expandafter{\@currext}}
\end{lstcode}
um jede Dateierweiterung zu der in \Package{tocbasic} vorhandenen
- Erweiterung für das Paket \Package{babel} hinzuzufügen.
+ Erweiterung für das Paket \Package{babel} hinzuzufügen.
\end{Example}
Die\textnote{Achtung!} zweimalige Verwendung von \Macro{expandafter} ist im
Beispiel erforderlich, weil das Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} zwingend bereits expandiert
-sein muss. Siehe dazu auch die Erklärung zu
+sein muss. Siehe dazu auch die Erklärung zu
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} in
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel}.
@@ -271,28 +271,28 @@ sein muss. Siehe dazu auch die Erklärung zu
\end{Declaration}
Man kann eine \PName{Dateierweiterung} auch wieder aus der Liste der bekannten
Dateierweiterungen entfernen. Ist das optionale Argument \OParameter{Besitzer}
-angegeben, so wird die Dateierweiterung nur entfernt, wenn sie für den
+angegeben, so wird die Dateierweiterung nur entfernt, wenn sie für den
angegebenen \PName{Besitzer} angemeldet wurde. Wie der Besitzer beim Weglassen
-des optionalen Argument bestimmt wird, ist der Erklärung zu
+des optionalen Argument bestimmt wird, ist der Erklärung zu
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} zu entnehmen. Wird ein leerer
\PName{Besitzer} angegeben, findet kein Besitzertest statt, sondern die
-\PName{Dateierweiterung} wird unabhängig vom Besitzer entfernt.%
+\PName{Dateierweiterung} wird unabhängig vom Besitzer entfernt.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{doforeachtocfile}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
-Bisher haben Sie nur Anweisungen kennengelernt, die für Klassen- und
-Paketautoren zwar zusätzliche Sicherheit, aber auch eher zusätzlichen Aufwand
-bedeuten. Mit \Macro{doforeachtocfile} kann man die erste Ernte dafür
-einfahren. Diese Anweisung erlaubt es die angegebenen \PName{Anweisungen} für
-jede von dem \PName{Besitzer} angemeldete Dateierweiterung
-auszuführen. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist
+Bisher haben Sie nur Anweisungen kennengelernt, die für Klassen- und
+Paketautoren zwar zusätzliche Sicherheit, aber auch eher zusätzlichen Aufwand
+bedeuten. Mit \Macro{doforeachtocfile} kann man die erste Ernte dafür
+einfahren. Diese Anweisung erlaubt es die angegebenen \PName{Anweisungen} für
+jede mit dem \PName{Besitzer} angemeldete Dateierweiterung
+auszuführen. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist
\Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} die aktuell
verarbeitete Dateierweiterung. Wird das optionale Argument
\OParameter{Besitzer} weggelassen, so werden alle Dateierweiterungen
-unabhängig vom Besitzer abgearbeitet. Ein leeres optionales Argument würde
+unabhängig vom Besitzer abgearbeitet. Ein leeres optionales Argument würde
hingegen nur die Dateierweiterungen mit leerem Besitzer verarbeiten.
\begin{Example}
Wenn Sie die Liste aller bekannten Dateierweiterungen auf das Terminal und
@@ -300,16 +300,16 @@ hingegen nur die Dateierweiterungen mit leerem Besitzer verarbeiten.
\begin{lstcode}
\doforeachtocfile{\typeout{\@currext}}
\end{lstcode}
- möglich. Sollen hingegen nur die Dateierweiterungen des Besitzer
- »\PValue{foo}« ausgegeben werden, geht das einfach mit:
+ möglich. Sollen hingegen nur die Dateierweiterungen des Besitzer
+ »\PValue{foo}« ausgegeben werden, geht das einfach mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\doforeachtocfile[foo]{\typeout{\@currext}}
\end{lstcode}
\end{Example}
Die \KOMAScript-Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} verwenden die
-Anweisung, um für Verzeichnisse, für die Eigenschaft \PValue{chapteratlist}
-gesetzt ist, optional einen vertikalen Abstand oder die Kapitelüberschrift in
-das Verzeichnis einzutragen. Wie Sie diese Eigenschaft setzen können, ist
+Anweisung, um für Verzeichnisse, für die Eigenschaft \PValue{chapteratlist}
+gesetzt ist, optional einen vertikalen Abstand oder die Kapitelüberschrift in
+das Verzeichnis einzutragen. Wie Sie diese Eigenschaft setzen können, ist
in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc} ab \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} zu
finden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -318,22 +318,22 @@ finden.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{tocbasicautomode}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese Anweisung definiert das vom \LaTeX-Kern für Klassen- und Paketautoren
+Diese Anweisung definiert das vom \LaTeX-Kern für Klassen- und Paketautoren
bereitgestellte
\Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc}\important{\Macro{\@starttoc}} so um,
dass bei jedem Aufruf von \Macro{@starttoc} die dabei angegebene
-Dateierweiterung in die Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen eingefügt wird,
-soweit sie dort noch nicht vorhanden ist. Außerdem wird dann
+Dateierweiterung in die Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen eingefügt wird,
+soweit sie dort noch nicht vorhanden ist. Außerdem wird dann
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} anstelle von \Macro{@starttoc}
-verwendet. Näheres zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} und
+verwendet. Näheres zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} und
\Macro{@starttoc} ist \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} zu entnehmen.
Mit Hilfe von \Macro{tocbasicautomode} wird also jedes Verzeichnis, das mit
Hilfe von \Macro{@starttoc} erstellt wird, automatisch unter die Kontrolle von
-\Package{tocbasic} gestellt. Ob das zum gewünschten Ergebnis führt, hängt
+\Package{tocbasic} gestellt. Ob das zum gewünschten Ergebnis führt, hängt
jedoch sehr von den jeweiligen Verzeichnissen ab. Immerhin funktioniert damit
-schon einmal die Erweiterung für das \Package{babel}-Paket für alle
+schon einmal die Erweiterung für das \Package{babel}-Paket für alle
Verzeichnisse. Es ist jedoch vorzuziehen, wenn der Paketautor selbst
\Package{tocbasic} explizit verwendet. Er kann dann auch die weiteren Vorteile
nutzen, die ihm das Paket bietet und die in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten
@@ -346,10 +346,10 @@ beschrieben werden.%
Im vorherigen Abschnitt haben Sie erfahren, wie eine Liste bekannter
Dateierweiterungen verwaltet werden kann\iffree{ und wie automatisch Anweisungen
- beim Hinzufügen von Dateierweiterungen zu dieser Liste ausgeführt werden
- können}{}. Des Weiteren haben Sie eine Anweisung kennengelernt, mit der man
-für jede einzelne bekannte Dateierweiterung oder einen spezifischen Teil davon
-Anweisungen ausführen kann. In diesem Abschnitt werden Sie Anweisungen
+ beim Hinzufügen von Dateierweiterungen zu dieser Liste ausgeführt werden
+ können}{}. Des Weiteren haben Sie eine Anweisung kennengelernt, mit der man
+für jede einzelne bekannte Dateierweiterung oder einen spezifischen Teil davon
+Anweisungen ausführen kann. In diesem Abschnitt werden Sie Anweisungen
kennenlernen, die sich auf die Datei beziehen, die mit dieser Dateierweiterung
verbunden ist.
@@ -363,8 +363,8 @@ Die Anweisung \Macro{addtoeachtocfile} schreibt \PName{Inhalt} mit Hilfe von
\PName{Besitzer} in der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen \iffree{zu
finden ist}{steht}. Wird das optionale Argument weggelassen, wird in jede
Datei aus der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen geschrieben.\iffree{ Der
- konkrete Dateiname setzt sich dabei übrigens aus \Macro{jobname} und der
- Dateierweiterung zusammen.}{} Während des Schreibens von \PName{Inhalt} ist
+ konkrete Dateiname setzt sich dabei übrigens aus \Macro{jobname} und der
+ Dateierweiterung zusammen.}{} Während des Schreibens von \PName{Inhalt} ist
\Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} die
Dateierweiterung der Datei, in die aktuell geschrieben wird.
\begin{Example}
@@ -375,8 +375,8 @@ Dateierweiterung der Datei, in die aktuell geschrieben wird.
\protect\addvspace{\protect\baselineskip}%
}%
\end{lstcode}
- Wenn Sie das hingegen nur für die Dateien mit dem definierten Besitzer
- »\PValue{foo}« machen wollen, verwenden Sie:
+ Wenn Sie das hingegen nur für die Dateien mit dem definierten Besitzer
+ »\PValue{foo}« machen wollen, verwenden Sie:
\begin{lstcode}
\addtoeachtocfile[foo]{%
\protect\addvspace{\protect\baselineskip}%
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Dateierweiterung der Datei, in die aktuell geschrieben wird.
\end{Example}%
\iffree{Anweisungen, die nicht bereits beim Schreiben expandiert werden
sollen, sind wie bei \Macro{addtocontents} mit \Macro{protect} zu
- schützen.}{}%
+ schützen.}{}%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -393,38 +393,38 @@ Dateierweiterung der Datei, in die aktuell geschrieben wird.
\Macro{addxcontentsline}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Ebene}
\OParameter{Gliederungsnummer}\Parameter{Inhalt}
\end{Declaration}
-Diese\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} Anweisung ähnelt sehr der Anweisung
+Diese\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} Anweisung ähnelt sehr der Anweisung
\Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline} aus dem
-\LaTeX-Kern. Allerdings besitzt sie ein zusätzliches optionales Argument für
-die \PName{Gliederungsnummer} des Eintrags, während diese bei
+\LaTeX-Kern. Allerdings besitzt sie ein zusätzliches optionales Argument für
+die \PName{Gliederungsnummer} des Eintrags, während diese bei
\Macro{addcontentsline} im Argument \PName{Inhalt} mit angegeben wird. Sie
-wird verwendet, um nummerierte oder nicht nummerierte Einträge in das über die
+wird verwendet, um nummerierte oder nicht nummerierte Einträge in das über die
\PName{Dateierweiterung} spezifizierte Verzeichnis aufzunehmen. Dabei ist
\PName{Ebene} der symbolische Name der Gliederungsebene und \PName{Inhalt} der
entsprechende Eintrag. Die Seitenzahl wird automatisch bestimmt.
Im Unterschied zu \Macro{addcontentsline} testet \Macro{addxcontentsline}
-zunächst, ob Anweisung \Macro{add\PName{Ebene}\PName{Dateierweiterung}entry}
-definiert ist. In diesem Fall wird sie für den Eintrag verwendet, wobei
+zunächst, ob Anweisung \Macro{add\PName{Ebene}\PName{Dateierweiterung}entry}
+definiert ist. In diesem Fall wird sie für den Eintrag verwendet, wobei
\PName{Gliederungsnummer} als optionales Argument und \PName{Inhalt} als
-obligatorisches Argument übergeben wird. Ein Beispiel für eine solche
-Anweisung, die von den \KOMAScript-Klassen bereitgestellt wird, wäre
+obligatorisches Argument übergeben wird. Ein Beispiel für eine solche
+Anweisung, die von den \KOMAScript-Klassen bereitgestellt wird, wäre
\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry} (siehe
-\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts},
+\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.toc},
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry}). Ist die entsprechende
Anweisung nicht definiert, wird stattdessen die interne Anweisung
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} verwendet. Diese erhält
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} verwendet. Diese erhält
alle vier Argumente als obligatorische Argumente und verwendet dann
-seinerseits \Macro{addcontentsline}, um den gewünschten Eintrag
-vorzunehmen. Näheres zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} ist
+seinerseits \Macro{addcontentsline}, um den gewünschten Eintrag
+vorzunehmen. Näheres zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} ist
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} zu entnehmen.
-Ein Vorteil der Verwendung von \Macro{addxcontentsline} gegenüber
+Ein Vorteil der Verwendung von \Macro{addxcontentsline} gegenüber
\Macro{addcontentsline} ist zum einen, dass die Eigenschaft
\PValue{numberline} (siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}) beachtet
-wird. Zum anderen kann die Form der Einträge über die Definition
-entsprechender, für die \PName{Ebene} und \PName{Dateierweiterung}
+wird. Zum anderen kann die Form der Einträge über die Definition
+entsprechender, für die \PName{Ebene} und \PName{Dateierweiterung}
spezifischer Anweisungen konfiguriert werden.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ spezifischer Anweisungen konfiguriert werden.%
\Macro{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}\OParameter{Besitzer}
\Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Inhalt}%
\end{Declaration}
-Diese beiden Anweisungen stehen in direkter Beziehung zu dem oben erklärten
+Diese beiden Anweisungen stehen in direkter Beziehung zu dem oben erklärten
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}
beziehungsweise zum im \LaTeX-Kern definierten \Macro{addcontentsline}. Der
Unterschied besteht darin, dass diese Anweisungen \PName{Inhalt} nicht nur in
@@ -448,26 +448,26 @@ Dateien aus der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen schreibt.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie sind Klassen-Autor und wollen den Kapiteleintrag nicht nur in
das Inhaltsverzeichnis, sondern in alle Verzeichnisdateien schreiben. Nehmen
- wir weiter an, dass aktuell \PValue{\#1} den Titel enthält, der geschrieben
+ wir weiter an, dass aktuell \PValue{\#1} den Titel enthält, der geschrieben
werden soll.
\begin{lstcode}
\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile{chapter}%
[\thechapter]{#1}
\end{lstcode}
- In diesem Fall soll natürlich die aktuelle Kapitelnummer direkt beim
+ In diesem Fall soll natürlich die aktuelle Kapitelnummer direkt beim
Schreiben in die Verzeichnisdatei expandiert werden, weshalb sie nicht mit
- \Macro{protect} vor der Expansion geschützt wurde.
+ \Macro{protect} vor der Expansion geschützt wurde.
\end{Example}
-Während des Schreibens von \PName{Inhalt} ist auch hier, wie schon bei
+Während des Schreibens von \PName{Inhalt} ist auch hier, wie schon bei
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtoeachtocfile},
\Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} die
Dateierweiterung der Datei, in die aktuell geschrieben wird.%
Die Anweisung\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}
-\Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} ist wann immer möglich gegenüber
+\Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} ist wann immer möglich gegenüber
\Macro{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile} vorzuziehen, da die Erweiterungen von
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} nur damit Anwendung finden. Näheres
-zu diesen Erweiterungen und Vorteilen ist in der vorausgehenden Erklärung von
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} nur damit Anwendung finden. Näheres
+zu diesen Erweiterungen und Vorteilen ist in der vorausgehenden Erklärung von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} zu finden.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -481,12 +481,12 @@ zu diesen Erweiterungen und Vorteilen ist in der vorausgehenden Erklärung von
\end{Declaration}
Mit diesen Anweisungen werden die Verzeichnisse
ausgegeben. Die\important{\Macro{listoftoc*}} Sternvariante \Macro{listoftoc*}
-benötigt als einziges Argument die \PName{Dateierweiterung} der Datei mit den
-Daten zu dem Verzeichnis. Die Anweisung setzt zunächst die vertikalen und
-horizontalen Abstände, die innerhalb von Verzeichnissen gelten sollen, führt
-die Anweisungen aus, die vor dem Einlesen der Datei ausgeführt werden sollen,
-liest dann die Datei und führt zum Schluss die Anweisungen aus, die nach dem
-Einlesen der Datei ausgeführt werden sollen. Damit kann \Macro{listoftoc*} als
+benötigt als einziges Argument die \PName{Dateierweiterung} der Datei mit den
+Daten zu dem Verzeichnis. Die Anweisung setzt zunächst die vertikalen und
+horizontalen Abstände, die innerhalb von Verzeichnissen gelten sollen, führt
+die Anweisungen aus, die vor dem Einlesen der Datei ausgeführt werden sollen,
+liest dann die Datei und führt zum Schluss die Anweisungen aus, die nach dem
+Einlesen der Datei ausgeführt werden sollen. Damit kann \Macro{listoftoc*} als
direkter Ersatz der \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisung
\Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc}\important{\Macro{@starttoc}} verstanden
werden.
@@ -494,38 +494,38 @@ werden.
Die\important{\Macro{listoftoc}} Version von \Macro{listoftoc} ohne Stern
setzt das komplette Verzeichnis und veranlasst auch einen optionalen Eintrag
in das Inhaltsverzeichnis und den Kolumnentitel. Ist das optionale Argument
-\OParameter{Titel} gegeben, so wird diese Angabe sowohl als Überschrift als
+\OParameter{Titel} gegeben, so wird diese Angabe sowohl als Ãœberschrift als
auch als optionaler Eintrag in das Inhaltsverzeichnis und den Kolumnentitel
verwendet. Ist das Argument \PName{Titel} lediglich leer, so wird auch eine
leere Angabe verwendet. Wird\textnote{Achtung!} hingegen das komplette
-Argument einschließlich der eckigen Klammern weggelassen, so wird die
+Argument einschließlich der eckigen Klammern weggelassen, so wird die
Anweisung \Macro{listof\PName{Dateierweiterung}name} verwendet, wenn diese
definiert ist. Ist sie nicht definiert, wird ein Standard-Ersatzname verwendet
und eine Warnung ausgegeben.
Die\important{\Macro{listofeachtoc}} Anweisung \Macro{listofeachtoc} gibt alle
-Verzeichnisse des angegebenen Besitzers oder alle Verzeichnisse aller
+Verzeichnisse mit dem angegebenen Besitzer oder alle Verzeichnisse aller
bekannten Dateinamenerweiterungen aus. Dabei\textnote{Achtung!} sollte
\Macro{listof\PName{Dateierweiterung}name} definiert sein, damit der korrekte
Titel ausgegeben werden kann.
Da\textnote{Tipp!} eventuell auch der Anwender selbst
\Macro{listoftoc} ohne optionales Argument oder \Macro{listofeachtoc} verwenden
-könnte, wird empfohlen \Macro{listof\PName{Dateierweiterung}name} immer
+könnte, wird empfohlen \Macro{listof\PName{Dateierweiterung}name} immer
passend zu definieren.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie haben ein neues »Verzeichnis der Algorithmen« mit der
- Dateierweiterung »\PValue{loa}« und wollen dieses anzeigen lassen:
+ Angenommen, Sie haben ein neues »Verzeichnis der Algorithmen« mit der
+ Dateierweiterung »\PValue{loa}« und wollen dieses anzeigen lassen:
\begin{lstcode}
\listoftoc[Verzeichnis der Algorithmen]{loa}
\end{lstcode}
- erledigt das für Sie. Wollen Sie das Verzeichnis hingegen ohne Überschrift
- ausgegeben haben, dann genügt:
+ erledigt das für Sie. Wollen Sie das Verzeichnis hingegen ohne Überschrift
+ ausgegeben haben, dann genügt:
\begin{lstcode}
\listoftoc*{loa}
\end{lstcode}
- Im zweiten Fall würde natürlich auch ein optional aktivierter Eintrag in das
- Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht gesetzt. Näheres zur Eigenschaft des Eintrags in
+ Im zweiten Fall würde natürlich auch ein optional aktivierter Eintrag in das
+ Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht gesetzt. Näheres zur Eigenschaft des Eintrags in
das Inhaltsverzeichnis ist bei der Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} zu
finden.
@@ -536,12 +536,12 @@ passend zu definieren.
Verzeichnis der Algorithmen%
}
\end{lstcode}
- definiert haben, genügt auch:
+ definiert haben, genügt auch:
\begin{lstcode}
\listoftoc{loa}
\end{lstcode}
- um ein Verzeichnis mit der gewünschten Überschrift zu erzeugen. Für den
- Anwender ist es eventuell einprägsamer, wenn Sie dann außerdem noch
+ um ein Verzeichnis mit der gewünschten Überschrift zu erzeugen. Für den
+ Anwender ist es eventuell einprägsamer, wenn Sie dann außerdem noch
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\listofalgorithms}{\listoftoc{loa}}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -549,24 +549,24 @@ passend zu definieren.
\end{Example}
Da\textnote{Achtung!} \LaTeX{} bei der Ausgabe eines Verzeichnisses auch
-gleich eine neue Verzeichnisdatei zum Schreiben öffnet, kann der Aufruf jeder
+gleich eine neue Verzeichnisdatei zum Schreiben öffnet, kann der Aufruf jeder
dieser Anweisungen zu einer Fehlermeldung der Art
\begin{lstoutput}
! No room for a new \write .
\ch@ck ...\else \errmessage {No room for a new #3}
\fi
\end{lstoutput}
-führen, wenn keine Schreibdateien mehr zur Verfügung stehen. Abhilfe kann in
+führen, wenn keine Schreibdateien mehr zur Verfügung stehen. Abhilfe kann in
diesem Fall das Laden des in \autoref{cha:scrwfile} beschriebenen Pakets
\Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile}
bieten.
Das Paket \hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}\IndexPackage{scrhack}%
-\important{ \hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}} enthält übrigens
-Patches für mehrere Pakete wie \Package{float} oder \Package{listings}, damit
+\important{ \hyperref[cha:scrhack]{\Package{scrhack}}} enthält übrigens
+Patches für mehrere Pakete wie \Package{float} oder \Package{listings}, damit
deren Verzeichnisbefehle \Macro{listoftoc} verwenden. Dadurch stehen viele
-Möglichkeiten von \Package{tocbasic} und den \KOMAScript-Klassen auch für
-deren Verzeichnisse zur Verfügung.%
+Möglichkeiten von \Package{tocbasic} und den \KOMAScript-Klassen auch für
+deren Verzeichnisse zur Verfügung.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -575,15 +575,15 @@ deren Verzeichnisse zur Verfügung.%
\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\Macro{AfterStartingTOC}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
-Manchmal ist es nützlich, wenn unmittelbar vor dem Einlesen der Datei mit den
-Verzeichnisdaten \PName{Anweisungen} ausgeführt werden können. Mit Hilfe von
-\Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} können Sie eine solche Ausführung
-wahlweise für eine einzelne \PName{Dateierweiterung} oder alle Dateien, die
+Manchmal ist es nützlich, wenn unmittelbar vor dem Einlesen der Datei mit den
+Verzeichnisdaten \PName{Anweisungen} ausgeführt werden können. Mit Hilfe von
+\Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} können Sie eine solche Ausführung
+wahlweise für eine einzelne \PName{Dateierweiterung} oder alle Dateien, die
mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc}
-eingelesen werden, erreichen. Ebenso können Sie \PName{Anweisungen} nach dem
-Einlesen der Datei ausführen, wenn Sie diese mit \Macro{AfterStartingTOC}
-definieren. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist
+eingelesen werden, erreichen. Ebenso können Sie \PName{Anweisungen} nach dem
+Einlesen der Datei ausführen, wenn Sie diese mit \Macro{AfterStartingTOC}
+definieren. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist
\Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} die
Dateierweiterung der Datei, die eingelesen wird bzw. gerade eingelesen wurde.
@@ -598,35 +598,35 @@ ist in \autoref{sec:scrwfile.clonefilefeature} auf
\Macro{BeforeTOCHead}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\Macro{AfterTOCHead}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}
-Es können auch \PName{Anweisungen} definiert werden, die unmittelbar vor oder
-nach dem Setzen der Überschrift bei Verwendung von
+Es können auch \PName{Anweisungen} definiert werden, die unmittelbar vor oder
+nach dem Setzen der Ãœberschrift bei Verwendung von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc}
-ausgeführt werden. Bezüglich des optionalen Arguments und der Bedeutung von
+ausgeführt werden. Bezüglich des optionalen Arguments und der Bedeutung von
\Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} gilt, was
bereits bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} oben erklärt wurde.%
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} oben erklärt wurde.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{MakeMarkcase}
\end{Declaration}
-Wann immer \Package{tocbasic} eine Marke für einen Kolumnentitel setzt,
+Wann immer \Package{tocbasic} eine Marke für einen Kolumnentitel setzt,
erfolgt dies als Argument der Anweisung \Macro{MakeMarkcase}. Diese Anweisung
-ist dazu gedacht, bei Bedarf die Groß-/Kleinschreibung des Kolumnentitels zu
-ändern. In der Voreinstellung ist diese Anweisung bei Verwendung einer
+ist dazu gedacht, bei Bedarf die Groß-/Kleinschreibung des Kolumnentitels zu
+ändern. In der Voreinstellung ist diese Anweisung bei Verwendung einer
\KOMAScript-Klasse
\Macro{@firstofone}\IndexCmd{@firstofone}\important{\Macro{@firstofone}}, also
-das unveränderte Argument selbst. Bei Verwendung einer anderen Klasse ist
+das unveränderte Argument selbst. Bei Verwendung einer anderen Klasse ist
\Macro{MakeMarkcase} im Gegensatz dazu
\Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase}\important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}}.
Die Anweisung wird von \Package{tocbasic} jedoch nur definiert, wenn sie
-nicht bereits definiert ist. Sie kann also in einer Klasse in der gewünschten
+nicht bereits definiert ist. Sie kann also in einer Klasse in der gewünschten
Weise vorbelegt werden und wird dann von \Package{tocbasic} nicht umdefiniert,
sondern verwendet wie vorgefunden.
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen aus unerfindlichen Gründen, dass die Kolumnentitel in Ihrer
- Klasse in Kleinbuchstaben ausgegeben werden. Damit dies auch für die
+ Sie wollen aus unerfindlichen Gründen, dass die Kolumnentitel in Ihrer
+ Klasse in Kleinbuchstaben ausgegeben werden. Damit dies auch für die
Kolumnentitel gilt, die von \Package{tocbasic} gesetzt werden, definieren
Sie:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -636,20 +636,20 @@ sondern verwendet wie vorgefunden.
Erlauben\textnote{Tipp!} Sie mir einen Hinweis zu \Macro{MakeUppercase}. Diese
Anweisung ist zum einen nicht voll expandierbar. Das bedeutet, dass sie im
-Zusammenspiel mit anderen Anweisungen zu Problemen führen kann. Zum anderen
+Zusammenspiel mit anderen Anweisungen zu Problemen führen kann. Zum anderen
sind sich alle Typografen einig, dass beim Versalsatz, also beim Satz
-kompletter Wörter oder Passagen in Großbuchstaben, Sperrung unbedingt
+kompletter Wörter oder Passagen in Großbuchstaben, Sperrung unbedingt
notwendig ist. Dabei darf jedoch kein fester Abstand zwischen den Buchstaben
verwendet werden. Vielmehr muss zwischen unterschiedlichen Buchstaben auch ein
unterschiedlicher Abstand gesetzt werden, weil sich unterschiedliche
Buchstabenkombinationen unterschiedlich verhalten. Gleichzeitig bilden einige
-Buchstaben von sich aus bereits Löcher, was bei der Sperrung ebenfalls zu
-berücksichtigen ist. Pakete wie \Package{ulem} oder \Package{soul} können das
+Buchstaben von sich aus bereits Löcher, was bei der Sperrung ebenfalls zu
+berücksichtigen ist. Pakete wie \Package{ulem} oder \Package{soul} können das
ebenso wenig leisten wie der Befehl \Macro{MakeUppercase} selbst. Auch die
automatische Sperrung mit Hilfe des \Package{microtype}-Pakets ist
-diesbezüglich nur eine näherungsweise Notlösung, da die von der konkreten
-Schrift abhängige Form der Buchstaben auch hier nicht näher betrachtet
-wird. Da\textnote{Empfehlung} Versalsatz also eher etwas für absolute
+diesbezüglich nur eine näherungsweise Notlösung, da die von der konkreten
+Schrift abhängige Form der Buchstaben auch hier nicht näher betrachtet
+wird. Da\textnote{Empfehlung} Versalsatz also eher etwas für absolute
Experten ist und fast immer Handarbeit bedeutet, wird Laien empfohlen, darauf
zu verzichten oder ihn nur vorsichtig und nicht an so exponierter Stelle
wie dem Kolumnentitel zu verwenden.%
@@ -659,17 +659,22 @@ wie dem Kolumnentitel zu verwenden.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{deftocheading}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Definition}
\end{Declaration}
-Das Paket \Package{tocbasic} enthält eine Standarddefinition für das Setzen
-von Überschriften von Verzeichnissen. Diese Standarddefinition ist durch
+Das Paket \Package{tocbasic} enthält eine Standarddefinition für das Setzen
+von Ãœberschriften von Verzeichnissen. Diese Standarddefinition ist durch
verschiedene Eigenschaften, die bei der Anweisung
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} erläutert werden, konfigurierbar. Sollte
-diese Möglichkeit einmal nicht ausreichen, so besteht die Möglichkeit, mit
-\Macro{deftocheading} eine alternative Überschriftenanweisung für ein
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} erläutert werden, konfigurierbar. Sollte
+diese Möglichkeit einmal nicht ausreichen, so besteht die Möglichkeit, mit
+\Macro{deftocheading} eine alternative Überschriftenanweisung für ein
Verzeichnis mit einer bestimmten \PName{Dateierweiterung} zu definieren. Die
Definition kann als einzigen Parameter \PValue{\#1} enthalten. Beim Aufruf der
Anweisung innerhalb von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} wird für dieses Argument dann der Titel
-für das Verzeichnis übergeben.%
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} wird für dieses Argument dann der Titel
+für das Verzeichnis übergeben.
+
+Die \PName{Definition} ist dann selbstverständlich auch für die Auswertung
+weiterer Eigenschaften, die sich auf die Ãœberschrift beziehen,
+verantwortlich. Das gilt insbesondere für die nachfolgend erklärten
+Eigenschaften \PValue{leveldown}, \PValue{numbered} und \PValue{totoc}.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -679,77 +684,82 @@ für das Verzeichnis übergeben.%
\Macro{unsettoc}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}
\Parameter{Liste von Eigenschaften}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit diesen beiden Anweisungen können \PName{Eigenschaften} für eine
-\PName{Dateierweiterung} bzw. das Verzeichnis, das dazu gehört, gesetzt und
-gelöscht werden. Die \PName{Liste von Eigenschaften} ist dabei eine durch
+Mit diesen beiden Anweisungen können \PName{Eigenschaften} für eine
+\PName{Dateierweiterung} bzw. das Verzeichnis, das dazu gehört, gesetzt und
+gelöscht werden. Die \PName{Liste von Eigenschaften} ist dabei eine durch
Komma getrennte Folge von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket
\Package{tocbasic} wertet folgende Eigenschaften aus:
\begin{description}\setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{}%
\item[\PValue{leveldown}] bedeutet, dass das Verzeichnis nicht mit der
obersten Gliederungsebene unterhalb von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} -- wenn
vorhanden \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}, sonst \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}
- -- erstellt wird, sondern mit einer Überschrift der nächst tieferen
+ -- erstellt wird, sondern mit einer Überschrift der nächst tieferen
Gliederungsebene. Diese Eigenschaft wird von der internen
- Überschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird\textnote{Achtung!} hingegen eine
- eigene Überschriftenanweisung mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}
+ Ãœberschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird\textnote{Achtung!} hingegen eine
+ eigene Ãœberschriftenanweisung mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}
definiert, liegt die Auswertung der Eigenschaft in der Verantwortung dessen,
der die Definition vornimmt. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese
Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{leveldown}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{leveldown}}%
- \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{leveldown}} für alle Dateierweiterungen des
- Besitzers \PValue{float}.
+ \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{leveldown}} für alle Dateierweiterungen mit
+ dem Besitzer \PValue{float}.
\item[\PValue{nobabel}] bedeutet, dass die normalerweise automatisch
- verwendete Erweiterung für die Sprachumschaltung mit
- \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} für diese Dateierweiterung nicht
- verwendet wird. Diese Eigenschaft sollte nur für Verzeichnisse verwendet
+ verwendete Erweiterung für die Sprachumschaltung mit
+ \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} für diese Dateierweiterung nicht
+ verwendet wird. Diese Eigenschaft sollte nur für Verzeichnisse verwendet
werden, die nur in einer festen Sprache erstellt werden, in denen also
- Sprachumschaltungen im Dokument nicht zu berücksichtigen sind. Sie wird
- außerdem vom Paket
- \Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile} für
+ Sprachumschaltungen im Dokument nicht zu berücksichtigen sind. Sie wird
+ außerdem vom Paket
+ \Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile} für
Klonziele verwendet, da die Erweiterungen dort bereits durch das Klonen
- selbst aus der Klonquelle übernommen werden.
+ selbst aus der Klonquelle übernommen werden.
Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Eigenschaft bereits vor dem
- Hinzufügen der Dateierweiterung zu der Liste der bekannten
+ Hinzufügen der Dateierweiterung zu der Liste der bekannten
Dateierweiterungen gesetzt sein muss, damit sie eine Wirkung hat.
+\item[\PValue{noindent}]\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} veranlasst alle
+ von \KOMAScript{} bereitgestellten Verzeichniseintragsstile die Eigenschaft
+ \PValue{indent} (siehe \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes},
+ \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes.indent}) zu ignorieren und
+ stattdessen den Einzug zu deaktivieren.
\item[\PValue{noparskipfake}] verhindert\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{tocbasic}},
- dass vor dem Abschalten des Absatzabstandes für die Verzeichnisse ein
- letztes Mal ein expliziter Absatzabstand eingefügt wird. Dies führt in der
+ dass vor dem Abschalten des Absatzabstandes für die Verzeichnisse ein
+ letztes Mal ein expliziter Absatzabstand eingefügt wird. Dies führt in der
Regel dazu, dass bei Dokumenten mit Absatzabstand der Abstand zwischen
- Überschrift und ersten Verzeichniseintrag\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} kleiner
- wird als zwischen Überschriften und normalem Text. Normalerweise erhält man
+ Ãœberschrift und ersten Verzeichniseintrag\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} kleiner
+ wird als zwischen Überschriften und normalem Text. Normalerweise erhält man
daher ohne diese Eigenschaft eine einheitlichere Formatierung.
\item[\PValue{noprotrusion}] verhindert\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Package{tocbasic}}
das Abschalten des optischen Randausgleichs in den Verzeichnissen. Optischer
- Randausgleich wird standardmäßig abgeschaltet, wenn das Paket
+ Randausgleich wird standardmäßig abgeschaltet, wenn das Paket
\Package{microtype}\IndexPackage{microtype} oder ein anderes Paket, das die
Anweisung \Macro{microtypesetup}\IndexCmd{microtypesetup} bereitstellt,
geladen ist. Wenn also optischer Randausgleich in den Verzeichnissen
- gewünscht wird, dann muss diese Eigenschaft aktiviert
+ gewünscht wird, dann muss diese Eigenschaft aktiviert
werden. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist jedoch zu beachten, dass der optische
- Randausgleich in Verzeichnissen häufig zu einem falschen Ergebnis
- führt. Dies ist ein bekanntes Problem des optischen Randausgleichs.
+ Randausgleich in Verzeichnissen häufig zu einem falschen Ergebnis
+ führt. Dies ist ein bekanntes Problem des optischen Randausgleichs.
\item[\PValue{numbered}] bedeutet, dass das Verzeichnis nummeriert und damit
ebenfalls in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden soll. Diese
- Eigenschaft wird von der internen Überschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird
- hingegen eine eigene Überschriftenanweisung mit
+ Eigenschaft wird von der internen Ãœberschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird
+ hingegen eine eigene Ãœberschriftenanweisung mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading} definiert, liegt die Auswertung der
Eigenschaft in der Verantwortung dessen, der die Definition vornimmt. Die
\KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numbered}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numbered}}%
- \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{numbered}} für alle Dateierweiterungen des
- Besitzers \Package{float}.
+ \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{numbered}} für alle Dateierweiterungen mit
+ dem Besitzer \Package{float}.
\item[\PValue{numberline}] \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- bedeutet, dass all diejenigen Einträge, die mit Hilfe der Anweisung
+ bedeutet, dass all diejenigen Einträge, die mit Hilfe der Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} oder der Anweisung
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} vorgenommen werden, wobei das optionale Argument für die Nummer fehlt
- oder leer ist, mit einer leeren
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}-Anweisung versehen werden. Das führt in
- der Regel dazu, dass diese Einträge nicht linksbündig mit der Nummer,
- sondern mit dem Text der nummerierten Einträge gleicher Ebene gesetzt
- werden. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung des
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} vorgenommen werden,
+ wobei das optionale Argument für die Nummer fehlt oder leer ist, mit einer
+ leeren \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}-Anweisung versehen werden. Das
+ führt in der Regel dazu, dass diese Einträge nicht linksbündig mit der
+ Nummer, sondern mit dem Text der nummerierten Einträge gleicher Ebene
+ gesetzt werden. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung des
Verzeichniseintragsstils \PValue{tocline} kann die Eigenschaft weitere
Auswirkungen haben. Siehe dazu die Stil-Eigenschaften
\Option{breakafternumber} und \Option{entrynumberformat} in
@@ -759,20 +769,20 @@ Komma getrennte Folge von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket
Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numberline}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numberline}}%
- \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{numberline}} für die Dateierweiterungen des
- Besitzers \PValue{float} und bei Verwendung der Option
+ \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{numberline}} für die Dateierweiterungen mit
+ dem Besitzer \PValue{float} und bei Verwendung der Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}}%
- \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}} für die Dateierweiterung
+ \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}} für die Dateierweiterung
\PValue{toc}. Entsprechend wird die Eigenschaft bei Verwendung von Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{nonumberline}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{nonumberline}}%
\IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{nonumberline}} oder
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}}%
- \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{nonumberline}} wieder zurückgesetzt.
+ \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{nonumberline}} wieder zurückgesetzt.
\item[\PValue{onecolumn}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- bedeutet, dass für dieses Verzeichnis automatisch der \LaTeX-interne
+ bedeutet, dass für dieses Verzeichnis automatisch der \LaTeX-interne
Einspaltenmodus mit \Macro{onecolumn}\IndexCmd{onecolumn} verwendet
wird. Dies\textnote{Achtung!} gilt jedoch nur, falls dieses Verzeichnis
nicht mit der oben beschriebenen Eigenschaft
@@ -780,32 +790,32 @@ Komma getrennte Folge von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket
nach unten verschoben wurde. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen \Class{scrbook} und
\Class{scrreprt} setzen diese Eigenschaft per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtAddToTocList} (siehe
- \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtAddToTocList}) für alle Verzeichnisse mit dem
+ \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtAddToTocList}) für alle Verzeichnisse mit dem
Besitzer \PValue{float} oder mit sich selbst als Besitzer. Damit werden
beispielsweise das Inhaltsverzeichnis, das Abbildungsverzeichnis und das
Tabellenverzeichnis bei diesen beiden Klassen automatisch einspaltig
gesetzt. Der Mehrspaltenmodus des
\Package{multicol}-Pakets\IndexPackage{multicol} ist von der Eigenschaft
- ausdrücklich nicht betroffen.
+ ausdrücklich nicht betroffen.
\item[\PValue{totoc}] bedeutet, dass der Titel des Verzeichnisses in das
Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden soll. Diese Eigenschaft wird von der
- internen Überschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird\textnote{Achtung!} mit
+ internen Ãœberschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird\textnote{Achtung!} mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}}%
- \IndexCmd{deftocheading} hingegen eine eigene Überschriftenanweisung
+ \IndexCmd{deftocheading} hingegen eine eigene Ãœberschriftenanweisung
definiert, liegt die Auswertung der Eigenschaft in der Verantwortung dessen,
der die Definition vornimmt. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese
Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{totoc}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{totoc}}%
- \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{totoc}} für alle Dateierweiterungen des
- Besitzers \Package{float}.
+ \IndexOption{listof~=\textKValue{totoc}} für alle Dateierweiterungen mit dem
+ Besitzer \Package{float}.
\end{description}
Die \KOMAScript-Klassen kennen eine weitere Eigenschaft:
\begin{description}\setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{}
-\item[\PValue{chapteratlist}] sorgt dafür, dass in dieses Verzeichnis bei
- jedem neuen Kapitel eine optionale Gliederung eingefügt wird. In der
+\item[\PValue{chapteratlist}] sorgt dafür, dass in dieses Verzeichnis bei
+ jedem neuen Kapitel eine optionale Gliederung eingefügt wird. In der
Voreinstellung ist diese Untergliederung dann ein vertikaler
- Abstand. Näheres zu den Möglichkeiten ist Option
+ Abstand. Näheres zu den Möglichkeiten ist Option
\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}%
\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}}%
\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}} in
@@ -813,8 +823,8 @@ Die \KOMAScript-Klassen kennen eine weitere Eigenschaft:
entnehmen.
\end{description}
\begin{Example}
- Da \KOMAScript{} für das Abbildungs- und das Tabellenverzeichnis auf
- \Package{tocbasic} aufbaut, gibt es nun eine weitere Möglichkeit, jegliche
+ Da \KOMAScript{} für das Abbildungs- und das Tabellenverzeichnis auf
+ \Package{tocbasic} aufbaut, gibt es nun eine weitere Möglichkeit, jegliche
Kapiteluntergliederung dieser Verzeichnisse zu verhindern:
\begin{lstcode}
\unsettoc{lof}{chapteratlist}
@@ -822,14 +832,14 @@ Die \KOMAScript-Klassen kennen eine weitere Eigenschaft:
\end{lstcode}
Wollen Sie hingegen, dass das von Ihnen definierte Verzeichnis mit der
- Dateierweiterung »\PValue{loa}« ebenfalls von der Kapiteluntergliederung der
+ Dateierweiterung »\PValue{loa}« ebenfalls von der Kapiteluntergliederung der
\KOMAScript-Klassen betroffen ist, so verwenden Sie
\begin{lstcode}
\setuptoc{loa}{chapteratlist}
\end{lstcode}
-Wollen Sie außerdem, dass bei Klassen, die \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} als
+Wollen Sie außerdem, dass bei Klassen, die \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} als
oberste Gliederungsebene verwenden, das Verzeichnis automatisch einspaltig
-gesetzt wird, so verwenden Sie zusätzlich
+gesetzt wird, so verwenden Sie zusätzlich
\begin{lstcode}
\ifundefinedorrelax{chapter}{}{%
\setuptoc{loa}{onecolumn}%
@@ -843,12 +853,12 @@ gesetzt wird, so verwenden Sie zusätzlich
Sollte\textnote{Tipp!} Ihr Paket mit einer anderen Klasse verwendet werden,
so schadet es trotzdem nicht, dass Sie diese Eigenschaften setzen, im
Gegenteil: Wertet eine andere Klasse diese Eigenschaften ebenfalls aus, so
- nutzt Ihr Paket automatisch die Möglichkeiten jener Klasse.
+ nutzt Ihr Paket automatisch die Möglichkeiten jener Klasse.
\end{Example}
-Wie Sie hier sehen, unterstützt ein Paket, das \Package{tocbasic} verwendet,
-bereits ohne nennenswerten Aufwand diverse Möglichkeiten für die dadurch
+Wie Sie hier sehen, unterstützt ein Paket, das \Package{tocbasic} verwendet,
+bereits ohne nennenswerten Aufwand diverse Möglichkeiten für die dadurch
realisierten Verzeichnisse, die sonst einigen Implementierungsaufwand
-bedeuten würden und deshalb in vielen Paketen leider fehlen.%
+bedeuten würden und deshalb in vielen Paketen leider fehlen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -856,46 +866,46 @@ bedeuten würden und deshalb in vielen Paketen leider fehlen.%
\Macro{iftocfeature}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Eigenschaft}
\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}
\end{Declaration}
-Hiermit kann man für jede \PName{Eigenschaft} feststellen, ob sie für eine
+Hiermit kann man für jede \PName{Eigenschaft} feststellen, ob sie für eine
\PName{Dateierweiterung} gesetzt ist. Ist dies der Fall, wird der
-\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Das kann
-beispielsweise nützlich sein, wenn Sie eigene Überschriftenanweisungen mit
+\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Das kann
+beispielsweise nützlich sein, wenn Sie eigene Überschriftenanweisungen mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading} definieren, aber die oben beschriebenen
Eigenschaften \PValue{totoc}, \PValue{numbered} oder \PValue{leveldown}
-unterstützen wollen.
+unterstützen wollen.
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Konfiguration von Verzeichniseinträgen}
+\section{Konfiguration von Verzeichniseinträgen}
\seclabel{tocstyle}
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Verzeichnis>Eintrag}
-Neben\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} den eigentlichen
-Verzeichnissen und den zugehörigen Hilfsdateien kann man mit dem Paket
-\Package{tocbasic} ab Version~3.20 auch Einfluss auf die Verzeichniseinträge
-nehmen. Dazu können neue Stile definiert werden. Es stehen aber auch mehrere
-vordefinierte Stile zur Verfügung. Mittelfristig wird \Package{tocbasic} das
-nie offiziell gewordene \KOMAScript-Paket \Package{tocstyle} ablösen. Die
-\KOMAScript-Klassen selbst bauen seit Version~3.20 ebenfalls vollständig auf
-die von \Package{tocbasic} bereitgestellten Stile für Verzeichniseinträge.
+Neben\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} den eigentlichen
+Verzeichnissen und den zugehörigen Hilfsdateien kann man mit dem Paket
+\Package{tocbasic} ab Version~3.20 auch Einfluss auf die Verzeichniseinträge
+nehmen. Dazu können neue Stile definiert werden. Es stehen aber auch mehrere
+vordefinierte Stile zur Verfügung. Mittelfristig wird \Package{tocbasic} das
+nie offiziell gewordene \KOMAScript-Paket \Package{tocstyle} ablösen. Die
+\KOMAScript-Klassen selbst bauen seit Version~3.20 ebenfalls vollständig auf
+die von \Package{tocbasic} bereitgestellten Stile für Verzeichniseinträge.
\begin{Declaration}
\Counter{tocdepth}
\end{Declaration}
-Verzeichniseinträge sind normalerweise hierarchisch geordnet. Dazu wird jeder
-Eintragsebene ein nummerischer Wert zu geordnet. Je höher dieser Wert, desto
+Verzeichniseinträge sind normalerweise hierarchisch geordnet. Dazu wird jeder
+Eintragsebene ein nummerischer Wert zu geordnet. Je höher dieser Wert, desto
tiefer in der Hierarchie liegt die Ebene. Bei den Standardklassen hat die
-Ebene für Teile beispielsweise den Wert -1 und die Ebene für Kapitel den Wert
-0. Über den \LaTeX-Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} wird bestimmt, bis zu welcher
-Ebene Einträge im Verzeichnis ausgegeben werden.
+Ebene für Teile beispielsweise den Wert -1 und die Ebene für Kapitel den Wert
+0. Über den \LaTeX-Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} wird bestimmt, bis zu welcher
+Ebene Einträge im Verzeichnis ausgegeben werden.
Bei \Class{book} ist \Counter{tocdepth} beispielsweise mit 2 voreingestellt,
-es werden also die Einträge der Ebenen \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter},
+es werden also die Einträge der Ebenen \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter},
\PValue{section} und \PValue{subsection} ausgeben. Tiefere Ebenen wie
\PValue{subsubsection}, deren nummerischer Wert 3 ist, werden nicht
-ausgegeben. Trotzdem sind die Einträge in der Hilfsdatei für das
+ausgegeben. Trotzdem sind die Einträge in der Hilfsdatei für das
Inhaltsverzeichnis vorhanden.
Die von \Package{tocbasic} definierten Eintragsstile beachten, abgesehen von
@@ -909,27 +919,27 @@ Die von \Package{tocbasic} definierten Eintragsstile beachten, abgesehen von
\Macro{numberline}\Parameter{Gliederungsnummer}
\Macro{usetocbasicnumberline}\OParameter{Code}
\end{Declaration}
-Zwar\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} definiert bereits der
-\LaTeX-Kern eine Anweisung \Macro{numberline}, diese ist allerdings für die
+Zwar\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} definiert bereits der
+\LaTeX-Kern eine Anweisung \Macro{numberline}, diese ist allerdings für die
Anforderungen von \Package{tocbasic} nicht ausreichend. Deshalb definiert
\Package{tocbasic} eigene Anweisungen und setzt \Macro{numberline} bei Bedarf
-mit Hilfe von \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} für die einzelnen
-Verzeichniseinträge entsprechend. Eine Umdefinierung von \Macro{numberline}
-ist daher bei Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic} oftmals wirkungslos und führt
+mit Hilfe von \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} für die einzelnen
+Verzeichniseinträge entsprechend. Eine Umdefinierung von \Macro{numberline}
+ist daher bei Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic} oftmals wirkungslos und führt
teilweise auch zu Warnungen.
Man kann auch die Definition von \Package{tocbasic} generell nutzen, indem man
-bereits in der Dokumentpräambel \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} aufruft. Die
-Anweisung versucht zunächst zu ermitteln, ob in der aktuellen Definition
+bereits in der Dokumentpräambel \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} aufruft. Die
+Anweisung versucht zunächst zu ermitteln, ob in der aktuellen Definition
wichtige interne Anweisungen von \Package{tocbasic} verwendet werden. Ist dies
-nicht der Fall, wird \Macro{numberline} entsprechend umdefiniert und zusätzlich
-\PName{Code} ausgeführt. Ist kein optionales Arguments angegeben, wird
-stattdessen via \Macro{PackageInfo} eine Meldung über die erfolgte
-Umdefinierung ausgegeben. Diese Meldung kann man einfach unterdrücken, indem
+nicht der Fall, wird \Macro{numberline} entsprechend umdefiniert und zusätzlich
+\PName{Code} ausgeführt. Ist kein optionales Arguments angegeben, wird
+stattdessen via \Macro{PackageInfo} eine Meldung über die erfolgte
+Umdefinierung ausgegeben. Diese Meldung kann man einfach unterdrücken, indem
ein leeres optionales Argument angegeben wird.
Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} den
-internen Schalter \Macro{if@tempswa} global verändern kann!%
+internen Schalter \Macro{if@tempswa} global verändern kann!%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -939,16 +949,16 @@ internen Schalter \Macro{if@tempswa} global verändern kann!%
\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntries}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Stil}
\Parameter{Liste von Eintragsebenen}
\end{Declaration}
-Über\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} diese Anweisungen werden
-die Verzeichniseinträge für bestimmte \PName{Eintragsebenen} deklariert
+Ãœber\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} diese Anweisungen werden
+die Verzeichniseinträge für bestimmte \PName{Eintragsebenen} deklariert
oder konfiguriert. Dabei ist die \PName{Eintragsebene} der Name der jeweiligen
-Eintragsebene, beispielsweise \PValue{section} für einen zur gleichnamigen
-Gliederungsebene gehörenden Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis oder
-\PValue{figure} für den Eintrag einer Abbildung ins
+Eintragsebene, beispielsweise \PValue{section} für einen zur gleichnamigen
+Gliederungsebene gehörenden Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis oder
+\PValue{figure} für den Eintrag einer Abbildung ins
Abbildungsverzeichnis. Jeder \PName{Eintragsebene} wird ein bestimmter
\PName{Stil} zugeordnet, der zum Zeitpunkt der Deklaration bereits definiert
-sein muss. Über die \PName{Optionenliste} können die verschiedenen, meist vom
-\PName{Stil} abhängenden Eigenschaften des Eintrags festgelegt werden.
+sein muss. Über die \PName{Optionenliste} können die verschiedenen, meist vom
+\PName{Stil} abhängenden Eigenschaften des Eintrags festgelegt werden.
Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\begin{description}\setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{}
@@ -956,20 +966,20 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\PValue{dottedtocline}. Klassenautoren, die \Package{tocbasic} verwenden,
wird empfohlen, diesen Stil mit Hilfe von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle} auf den
- Standardverzeichniseintragsstil der Klasse zu ändern. Bei den
+ Standardverzeichniseintragsstil der Klasse zu ändern. Bei den
\KOMAScript-Klassen wird \PValue{default} beispielsweise zu einem Klon von
Stil \PValue{tocline}.
\item[\PValue{dottedtocline}] entspricht dem Stil, der von den Standardklassen
- \Class{book} und \Class{report} für die Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge der
+ \Class{book} und \Class{report} für die Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge der
Ebenen \PValue{section} bis \PValue{subparagraph} und bei allen
- Standardklassen für die Einträge in das Abbildungs- und das
+ Standardklassen für die Einträge in das Abbildungs- und das
Tabellenverzeichnis bekannt ist. Er kennt nur drei\important{\PValue{level},
- \PValue{indent}, \PValue{numwidth}} Eigenschaften. Die Einträge werden
+ \PValue{indent}, \PValue{numwidth}} Eigenschaften. Die Einträge werden
um \PValue{indent} von links eingezogen in der aktuellen Schrift
ausgegeben. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} wird nicht umdefiniert. Die
Breite der Nummer wird von \PValue{numwidth} bestimmt. Bei mehrzeiligen
- Einträgen wird der Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um \PValue{numwidth}
- erhöht. Die Seitenzahl wird mit \Macro{normalfont} ausgegeben. Eintragstext
+ Einträgen wird der Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um \PValue{numwidth}
+ erhöht. Die Seitenzahl wird mit \Macro{normalfont} ausgegeben. Eintragstext
und Seitenzahl werden durch eine punktierte Linie
verbunden. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} illustriert die
Eigenschaften des Stils.
@@ -987,7 +997,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\setlength{\parindent}{-3.2em}%
\addtolength{\parfillskip}{-2.55em}%
\makebox[3.2em][l]{1.1.10}%
- Überschrift im Verzeichniseintragsstil \PValue{dottedtocline} mit
+ Ãœberschrift im Verzeichniseintragsstil \PValue{dottedtocline} mit
mehr als einer Zeile%
\leaders\hbox{$\csname m@th\endcsname
\mkern 4.5mu\hbox{.}\mkern 4.5mu$}\hfill\nobreak
@@ -1020,39 +1030,39 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\PValue{dottedtocline}}
\label{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline}
\end{figure}
-\item[\PValue{gobble}] ist der denkbar einfachste Stil. Einträge in diesem
- Stil werden unabhängig von allen Einstellungen für
+\item[\PValue{gobble}] ist der denkbar einfachste Stil. Einträge in diesem
+ Stil werden unabhängig von allen Einstellungen für
\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}%
\IndexCounter{tocdepth}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}}
- nicht ausgegeben sondern sozusagen verschluckt. Dennoch verfügt er über die
+ nicht ausgegeben sondern sozusagen verschluckt. Dennoch verfügt er über die
Standardeigenschaft \PValue{level}, die jedoch nie ausgewertet wird.
\item[\PValue{largetocline}] entspricht dem Stil, der von den Standardklassen
- für die Ebene \PValue{part} bekannt ist. Er kennt
+ für die Ebene \PValue{part} bekannt ist. Er kennt
nur\important{\PValue{level}, \PValue{indent}} die Eigenschaften
\PName{level} und \PName{indent}. Letzteres ist gleichsam eine Abweichung
- von den Standardklassen, die selbst keinen Einzug der \PValue{part}-Einträge
- unterstützen.
+ von den Standardklassen, die selbst keinen Einzug der \PValue{part}-Einträge
+ unterstützen.
- Vor dem Eintrag wird ein Seitenumbruch erleichtert. Die Einträge werden um
+ Vor dem Eintrag wird ein Seitenumbruch erleichtert. Die Einträge werden um
\PValue{indent} von links eingezogen und mit den Schrifteinstellungen
\Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries} ausgegeben. Sollte
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} verwendet werden, so ist die
Nummernbreite fest auf 3\Unit{em}
eingestellt. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} wird nicht umdefiniert. Die
- Standardklassen verwenden für \PName{part}-Einträge kein
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}. Der Wert hat bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen
+ Standardklassen verwenden für \PName{part}-Einträge kein
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}. Der Wert hat bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen
auch keine Auswirkung auf den Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile.
\autoref{fig:tocbasic.largetocline} illustriert die
Eigenschaften
- des Stils. Dabei wird auch auf"|fällig, dass der Stil einige Ungereimtheiten
- der Standardklassen übernommen hat, beispielsweise der fehlende Einzug ab
- der zweiten Zeile bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen und zwei unterschiedliche Werte
- für \Macro{@pnumwidth}, die aus einer Abhängigkeit von der Schriftgröße
+ des Stils. Dabei wird auch auf"|fällig, dass der Stil einige Ungereimtheiten
+ der Standardklassen übernommen hat, beispielsweise der fehlende Einzug ab
+ der zweiten Zeile bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen und zwei unterschiedliche Werte
+ für \Macro{@pnumwidth}, die aus einer Abhängigkeit von der Schriftgröße
resultieren. Daraus resultiert auch der Umstand, dass im Extremfall der Text
- der Überschrift der Seitenzahl zu nahe kommen kann. Es ist zu beachten, dass
+ der Ãœberschrift der Seitenzahl zu nahe kommen kann. Es ist zu beachten, dass
die in der Abbildung gezeigte Breite der Gliederungsnummer nur dann
- Verwendung findet, wenn auch tatsächlich \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}
+ Verwendung findet, wenn auch tatsächlich \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}
verwendet wird. Die Standardklassen setzen hingegen einen festen Abstand von
1\Unit{em} nach der Nummer.
\begin{figure}
@@ -1066,7 +1076,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\parbox[t]{\dimexpr \linewidth-1.55em\relax}{%
\makebox[3em][l]{\large\bfseries I}%
\large\bfseries
- Überschrift im Verzeichniseintragsstil \PValue{largetocline} mit
+ Ãœberschrift im Verzeichniseintragsstil \PValue{largetocline} mit
mehr als einer Zeile\hfill
\makebox[0pt][l]{\normalsize\normalfont
\makebox[1.55em][r]{\large\bfseries 1}}%
@@ -1090,39 +1100,40 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\PValue{largetocline}}
\label{fig:tocbasic.largetocline}
\end{figure}
-\item[\PValue{tocline}] ist ein flexibler Stil, der in der Voreinstellung für
- alle Einträge der \KOMAScript-Klassen verwendet wird. Entsprechend
+\item[\PValue{tocline}] ist ein flexibler Stil, der in der Voreinstellung für
+ alle Einträge der \KOMAScript-Klassen verwendet wird. Entsprechend
definieren diese Klassen auch die Klone \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter} und
\PValue{section} beziehungsweise \PValue{section} und \PValue{subsection}
- mit Hilfe dieses Stils, ändern dann jedoch den \PName{Initialisierungscode}
+ mit Hilfe dieses Stils, ändern dann jedoch den \PName{Initialisierungscode}
der Klone so ab, dass sie unterschiedliche Voreinstellungen besitzen.
Der Stil kennt neben der Standardeigenschaft \PValue{level} noch
- 16\important{\PValue{level}, \PValue{beforeskip}, \PValue{breakafternumber},
+ 18\important{\PValue{level}, \PValue{beforeskip}, \PValue{breakafternumber},
\PValue{dynnumwidth}, \PValue{entryformat}, \PValue{entrynumberformat},
\PValue{indent}, \PValue{linefill}, \PValue{numsep}, \PValue{numwidth},
\PValue{onstarthigherlevel}, \PValue{onstartlowerlevel},
\PValue{onstartsamelevel}, \PValue{pagenumberbox},
- \PValue{pagenumberformat}, \PValue{raggedentrytext},
- \PValue{raggedpagenumber}} weitere Eigenschaften. Die Voreinstellungen all
- dieser Eigenschaften werden abhängig vom Namen der \PName{Eintragsebene}
- bestimmt und orientieren sich dann an den Ergebnissen der
- Standardklassen. Es ist daher möglich, nach Laden von \Package{tocbasic} den
- Stil der Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge der Standardklassen mit
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle} in \PValue{tocline} zu ändern,
- ohne dass dies unmittelbar zu größeren Veränderungen im Aussehen der
- Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge führt. So kann man gezielt nur die Eigenschaften
- ändern, die für erwünschte Änderungen notwendig sind. Dasselbe gilt für
- Abbildungs- und Tabellenverzeichnis der Standardklassen.%
-
- Aufgrund der hohen Flexibilität kann dieser Stil prinzipiell die Stile
+ \PValue{pagenumberformat}, \PValue{pagenumberwidth},
+ \PValue{raggedentrytext}, \PValue{raggedpagenumber}, \PValue{rightindent}}
+ weitere Eigenschaften. Die Voreinstellungen all dieser Eigenschaften werden
+ abhängig vom Namen der \PName{Eintragsebene} bestimmt und orientieren sich
+ dann an den Ergebnissen der Standardklassen. Es ist daher möglich, nach
+ Laden von \Package{tocbasic} den Stil der Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge der
+ Standardklassen mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle} in
+ \PValue{tocline} zu ändern, ohne dass dies unmittelbar zu größeren
+ Veränderungen im Aussehen der Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge führt. So kann man
+ gezielt nur die Eigenschaften ändern, die für erwünschte Änderungen
+ notwendig sind. Dasselbe gilt für Abbildungs- und Tabellenverzeichnis der
+ Standardklassen.%
+
+ Aufgrund der hohen Flexibilität kann dieser Stil prinzipiell die Stile
\PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{undottedtocline} und \PValue{largetocline}
- ersetzen, bedarf dann jedoch teilweise eines höheren Aufwands bei der
+ ersetzen, bedarf dann jedoch teilweise eines höheren Aufwands bei der
Konfiguration.
- \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline} illustriert einige Längen-Eigenschaften des
+ \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline} illustriert einige Längen-Eigenschaften des
Stils. Die weiteren sind in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, ab
- \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} erklärt.
+ \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} erklärt.
\begin{figure}
\centering
\resizebox{.8\linewidth}{!}{%
@@ -1148,7 +1159,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\setlength{\parindent}{-3em}%
\addtolength{\parfillskip}{-2.55em}%
\makebox[3em][l]{\large\bfseries I.}%
- \textbf{\large Überschrift eines Teil-Eintrags im Stil
+ \textbf{\large Ãœberschrift eines Teil-Eintrags im Stil
\PValue{tocline} zur Demonstration mit mehr als einer Zeile}%
\hfill
\makebox[1.55em][r]{\bfseries 12}\large
@@ -1179,7 +1190,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\setlength{\parindent}{-1.5em}%
\addtolength{\parfillskip}{-2.55em}%
\makebox[1.5em][l]{\bfseries 1.}%
- \textbf{Überschrift eines Kapiteleintrags im Stil
+ \textbf{Ãœberschrift eines Kapiteleintrags im Stil
\PValue{tocline} zur Demonstration mit mehr als einer Zeile}%
\hfill
\makebox[1.55em][r]{\bfseries 12}%
@@ -1216,7 +1227,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\setlength{\parindent}{-2.3em}%
\addtolength{\parfillskip}{-2.55em}%
\makebox[2.3em][l]{1.1.}%
- Überschrift eines Abschnitteintrags im Stil
+ Ãœberschrift eines Abschnitteintrags im Stil
\PValue{tocline} zur Demonstration mit mehr als einer Zeile%
\leaders\hbox{$\csname m@th\endcsname
\mkern 4.5mu\hbox{.}\mkern 4.5mu$}\hfill\nobreak
@@ -1230,7 +1241,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\setlength{\parindent}{-3.2em}%
\addtolength{\parfillskip}{-2.55em}%
\makebox[3.2em][l]{1.1.10.}%
- Überschrift eines Unterabschnitteintrags im Stil
+ Ãœberschrift eines Unterabschnitteintrags im Stil
\PValue{tocline} mit mehr als einer Zeile%
\leaders\hbox{$\csname m@th\endcsname
\mkern 4.5mu\hbox{.}\mkern 4.5mu$}\hfill\nobreak
@@ -1267,19 +1278,35 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\PValue{tocline}}
\label{fig:tocbasic.tocline}
\end{figure}
+\item[\PValue{toctext}]\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ stellt eine Besonderheit dar. Während alle anderen Stile je Eintrag einen
+ Absatz erzeugen, wird hier für alle aufeinanderfolgenden Einträge dieses
+ Stils nur ein einziger Absatz erzeugt. Für die Konfigurierung stehen neben
+ der Standardeigenschaft \PValue{level} mit 13\important{\PValue{afterpar},
+ \PValue{entryformat}, \PValue{entrynumberformat}, \PValue{indent},
+ \PValue{numsep}, \PValue{onendentry}, \PValue{onendlastentry},
+ \PValue{onstartentry}, \PValue{onstartfirstentry},
+ \PValue{pagenumberformat}, \PValue{prepagenumber}, \PValue{raggedright},
+ \PValue{rightindent}} weiteren Eigenschaften fast so viele Möglichkeiten
+ wie bei \PValue{tocline} zur Verfügung. Dieser Stil ist aber zwingend darauf
+ angewiesen, dass am Anfang aller anderen Stile und auch am Ende des
+ Verzeichnisses ein noch nicht beendeter Absatz tasächlich beendet
+ wird. Daher sollten Einträge dieses Stils nicht mit Einträgen oder
+ Verzeichnissen kombiniert werden, die an \Package{tocbasic} vorbei erzeugt
+ werden.
\item[\PValue{undottedtocline}] entspricht dem Stil, der von den
- Standardklassen \Class{book} und \Class{report} für die Ebene
- \PValue{chapter} und von \Class{article} für die Ebene \PValue{section}
+ Standardklassen \Class{book} und \Class{report} für die Ebene
+ \PValue{chapter} und von \Class{article} für die Ebene \PValue{section}
bekannt ist. Er kennt\important{\PValue{level}, \PValue{indent},
\PValue{numwidth}} nur drei Eigenschaften.
Vor dem Eintrag wird ein Seitenumbruch erleichtert und ein vertikaler
- Abstand eingefügt. Die Einträge werden um \PValue{indent} von links
+ Abstand eingefügt. Die Einträge werden um \PValue{indent} von links
eingezogen in \Macro{bfseries} ausgegeben. Dies ist gleichsam eine
- Abweichung von den Standardklassen, die selbst keinen Einzug für Einträge
+ Abweichung von den Standardklassen, die selbst keinen Einzug für Einträge
der genannten Ebenen bieten. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} wird nicht
umdefiniert. Die Breite der Nummer wird von \PValue{numwidth} bestimmt. Bei
- mehrzeiligen Einträgen wird der Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um
- \PValue{numwidth} erhöht. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline} illustriert
+ mehrzeiligen Einträgen wird der Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um
+ \PValue{numwidth} erhöht. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline} illustriert
die Eigenschaften des Stils.
\begin{figure}
\centering
@@ -1293,7 +1320,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\makebox[1.5em][l]{\bfseries 1}%
\parbox[t]{\dimexpr \linewidth-4.05em\relax}{%
\bfseries
- Überschrift im Verzeichniseintragsstil \PValue{undottedtocline} mit
+ Ãœberschrift im Verzeichniseintragsstil \PValue{undottedtocline} mit
mehr als einer Zeile%
}%
\raisebox{-\baselineskip}{\makebox[2.55em][r]{\bfseries 3}}%
@@ -1316,220 +1343,293 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert:
\end{tikzpicture}%
}
\caption{Illustration einiger Attribute des Verzeichniseintragsstils
- \PValue{undottedtocline} am Beispiel einer Kapitelüberschrift}
+ \PValue{undottedtocline} am Beispiel einer Kapitelüberschrift}
\label{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline}
\end{figure}
\end{description}
-Eine Erklärung zu den Eigenschaften der von \Package{tocbasic} definierten
+Eine Erklärung zu den Eigenschaften der von \Package{tocbasic} definierten
Stile findet sich in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}.
-Bei\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung der Eigenschaften
-als Optionen für
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewTOC} (siehe
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) sind die Namen der Eigenschaften
-mit dem Präfix \PValue{tocentry}, also beispielsweise \Option{tocentrylevel}
-anstelle von \PValue{level}, zu
-verwenden. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung als
-Optionen für \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}%
+Neben\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} der normalen Zuweisung eines Wertes
+in der Form \Option{\PName{Schlüssel}=\PName{Wert}} verstehen beide Befehle für
+die durch \KOMAScript{} definierten Stile für alle Optionen auch die
+Zuweisungen in der Form \Option{\PName{Schlüssel}:=\PName{Eintragsebene}}. In
+diesem Fall wird die aktuell gültige Einstellung für \PName{Eintragsebene}
+kopiert, soweit diese verfügbar ist. Es kann also beispielsweise mit
+\OptionValue{indent:}{figure} der Einzug für \PValue{figure}-Einträge kopiert
+werden. Für Optionen, die eine Länge oder einen Integer als \PName{Wert}
+erwarten, gibt es außerdem die Möglichkeit mit
+\Option{\PName{Schlüssel}+=\PName{Wert}} den \PName{Wert} zur aktuell gültigen
+Einstellung zu addieren. Für eine Substraktion kann ein negativer \PName{Wert}
+verwendet werden. Mit \OptionValue{indent+}{1cm} könnte so beispielsweise der
+Einzug um 1\Unit{cm} erhöht werden.
+
+Bei\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung der Eigenschaften als
+Optionen für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewTOC}
+(siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) sind die Namen der
+Eigenschaften mit dem Präfix \PValue{tocentry}, also beispielsweise
+\Option{tocentrylevel} anstelle von \PValue{level}, zu verwenden. Die zuvor
+beschriebene Kopiermöglichkeit mit \Option{:=} ist hierbei ebenfalls
+verfügbar. Die Addition mit Hilfe von \Option{+=} wird derzeit jedoch nicht
+unterstützt.
+
+Bei\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung als Optionen
+für \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}%
\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewSectionCommand}%
\IndexCmd{RedeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{ProvideSectionCommand} (siehe
\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}) und verwandten
-Anweisungen sind die Namen der Eigenschaften mit dem Präfix \PValue{toc} zu
+Anweisungen sind die Namen der Eigenschaften mit dem Präfix \PValue{toc} zu
versehen, also beispielsweise \Option{toclevel} anstelle von \PValue{level} zu
-verwenden.
+verwenden. Hierbei existiert derzeit weder die Kopiermöglichkeit mit
+\Option{:=} noch die Addition mit \Option{+=}.
-Letztlich führt der Aufruf von \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} zur Definition der
+Letztlich führt der Aufruf von \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} zur Definition der
Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}.
\begin{desclist}
\desccaption{%
- Attribute für die vordefinierten Verzeichniseintragsstile von
+ Attribute für die vordefinierten Verzeichniseintragsstile von
\Package{tocbasic}%
\label{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}%
}{%
Attribute der Verzeichniseintragsstile (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{beforeskip}{Länge}}{%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{afterpar}{Code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Der angegebene \PName{Code} wird nach dem Ende des Absatzes ausgeführt, in
+ dem ein Eintrag mit dem Stil \PValue{toctext} ausgegeben wird. Verfügen
+ mehrere Einträge über solche Einstellungen, so werden diese in der
+ Reihenfolge der Einträge ausgeführt.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{beforeskip}{Länge}}{%
Vertikaler Abstand, der vor einem Eintrag dieser Ebene im Stil
- \PValue{tocline} eingefügt wird (siehe \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}). Der
- Abstand wird je nach Ebene mit \Macro{vskip} oder \Macro{addvspace}
- eingefügt, so dass diesbezüglich möglichst Kompatibilität zu den
- Standardklassen und früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{} besteht.
+ \PValue{tocline} eingefügt wird (siehe
+ \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}). Der Abstand wird je nach Ebene mit
+ \Macro{vskip} oder \Macro{addvspace} eingefügt, so dass diesbezüglich
+ möglichst Kompatibilität zu den Standardklassen und früheren Versionen von
+ \KOMAScript{} besteht.
Bei der \PName{Eintragsebene} \PValue{part} wird das Attribut mit
\texttt{2.25em plus 1pt} initialisiert, bei \PValue{chapter} mit
\texttt{1em plus 1pt}. Ist noch keine \PName{Eintragsebene}
- \PValue{chapter} bekannt, wird stattdessen für \PValue{section}
+ \PValue{chapter} bekannt, wird stattdessen für \PValue{section}
\texttt{1em plus 1pt} verwendet. Ansonsten wird \PValue{section} wie alle
anderen Ebenen mit \texttt{0pt plus .2pt} initialisiert.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{breakafternumber}{Schalter}}{%
- \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
+ \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Ist der
Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, so wird nach der mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}\IndexCmd{numberline} gesetzten Nummer
- eine neue Zeile begonnen, die erneut linksbündig mit der Nummer beginnt.
+ eine neue Zeile begonnen, die erneut linksbündig mit der Nummer beginnt.
In der Voreinstellung ist die Eigenschaft im Stil \PValue{tocline} nicht
gesetzt.
Ist %\textnote{Achtung!}
- für ein Verzeichnis mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} die Eigenschaft
+ für ein Verzeichnis mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} die Eigenschaft
\Option{numberline} gesetzt (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}), wie dies bei den
\KOMAScript-Klassen und Verwendung deren Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}%
- \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}} der Fall ist, führt dies auch
- dazu, dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen dennoch die Zeile mit der dann
+ \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}} der Fall ist, führt dies auch
+ dazu, dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen dennoch die Zeile mit der dann
leeren Nummer in der Formatierung von \Option{entrynumberformat} gesetzt
wird.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{dynnumwidth}{Schalter}}{%
- \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
+ \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Ist der
Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, gibt die Eigenschaft
- \PValue{numwidth} nur noch einen Minimalwert an. Übertrifft die beim
+ \PValue{numwidth} nur noch einen Minimalwert an. Ãœbertrifft die beim
letzten \LaTeX-Lauf ermittelte maximale Breite der Eintragsnummern
- gleicher Ebene zuzüglich des Wertes von \PValue{numsep} diesen
+ gleicher Ebene zuzüglich des Wertes von \PValue{numsep} diesen
Minimalwert, so wird stattdessen der ermittelte Wert verwendet.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{entryformat}{Befehl}}{%
- Über diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung des gesamten Eintrags
- verändert werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau
+ Ãœber diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung des gesamten Eintrags
+ verändert werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau
ein Argument zu erwarten. Dieses Argument ist nicht zwingend voll
expandierbar. Befehle wie \Macro{MakeUppercase}, die ein voll
- expandierbares Argument erwarten, dürfen an dieser Stelle also nicht
- verwendet werden. Font-Änderungen über \Option{entryformat} erfolgen
+ expandierbares Argument erwarten, dürfen an dieser Stelle also nicht
+ verwendet werden. Font-Änderungen über \Option{entryformat} erfolgen
ausgehend von \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalsize}. Es wird darauf
hingewiesen, dass die Ausgabe von \Option{linefill} und der Seitenzahl
- unabhängig von \Option{entryformat} sind. Siehe dazu auch die Eigenschaft
+ unabhängig von \Option{entryformat} sind. Siehe dazu auch die Eigenschaft
\Option{pagenumberformat}.
- Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft für die \PName{Eintragsebene}
- \PValue{part} mit der Ausgabe des übergebenen Argument in
- \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries} und für \PValue{chapter} in
+ Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft für die \PName{Eintragsebene}
+ \PValue{part} mit der Ausgabe des übergebenen Argument in
+ \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries} und für \PValue{chapter} in
\Macro{bfseries}. Falls bei der Initialisierung von \PValue{section} noch
- keine Ebene \PValue{chapter} existiert, wird auch für diese Ebene
+ keine Ebene \PValue{chapter} existiert, wird auch für diese Ebene
\Macro{bfseries} verwendet. Bei allen anderen Ebenen wird das Argument
- unverändert ausgegeben.%
+ unverändert ausgegeben.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{entrynumberformat}{Befehl}}{%
- Über diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung der mit
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} gesetzten Eintragsnummer verändert
+ Ãœber diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung der mit
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} gesetzten Eintragsnummer verändert
werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau ein
- Argument zu erwarten. Font-Änderungen erfolgen ausgehend von der
+ Argument zu erwarten. Font-Änderungen erfolgen ausgehend von der
Eigenschaft \Option{entryformat}.
- Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit Ausgabe des übergebenen
- Arguments. Die Eintragsnummer wird also unverändert ausgegeben.
+ Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit Ausgabe des übergebenen
+ Arguments. Die Eintragsnummer wird also unverändert ausgegeben.
Ist %\textnote{Achtung!}
- für ein Verzeichnis mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} die Eigenschaft
+ für ein Verzeichnis mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} die Eigenschaft
\Option{numberline} gesetzt (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}), wie dies bei den
\KOMAScript-Klassen und Verwendung deren Option
\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}%
- \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}} der Fall ist, führt dies auch
- dazu, dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen \PName{Befehl} dennoch
- ausgeführt wird.%
+ \IndexOption{toc~=\textKValue{numberline}} der Fall ist, führt dies auch
+ dazu, dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen \PName{Befehl} dennoch
+ ausgeführt wird.%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{indent}{Länge}}{%
- Horizontaler Abstand des Eintrags vom linken Rand (siehe
- \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} und \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}).
-
- Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} wird für alle Eintragsebenen, deren Name mit
- »\texttt{sub}« beginnt, eine Initialisierung mit
- \PValue{indent}+\PValue{numwidth} der gleichnamigen Eintragsebene ohne
- diesen Präfix vorgenommen, falls eine solche Ebene mit entsprechenden
- Eigenschaften existiert. Bei den Stilen \PValue{dottedtocline},
- \PValue{undottedtocline} und \PValue{tocline} findet für die
- Eintragsebenen \PValue{part} bis \PValue{subparagraph} sowie
- \PValue{figure} und \PValue{table} eine Initialisierung mit Werten
+ \entry{%
+ \OptionVName{indent}{Länge}%
+ {\phantomsection\label{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes.indent}}%
+ }{%
+ Beim\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} Stil \PValue{toctext} ist
+ \PName{Länge} der horizontale Abstand des Absatzes vom linken Rand. Haben
+ die unterschiedlichen Einträge des Absatzes unterschiedliche
+ Einstellungen, so gewinnt der letzte Eintrag. Bei den übrigen Stilen ist
+ \PValue{Länge} entsprechend der horizontale Abstand des Eintrags vom
+ linken Rand (siehe \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} und
+ \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}).
+
+ Bei den Stilen \PValue{tocline} und \PValue{toctext} wird für alle
+ Eintragsebenen, deren Name mit »\texttt{sub}« beginnt, eine
+ Initialisierung mit \PValue{indent}+\PValue{numwidth} der gleichnamigen
+ Eintragsebene ohne diesen Präfix vorgenommen, falls eine solche Ebene mit
+ entsprechenden Eigenschaften existiert. Bei den Stilen
+ \PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{undottedtocline} und \PValue{tocline}
+ findet für die Eintragsebenen \PValue{part} bis \PValue{subparagraph}
+ sowie \PValue{figure} und \PValue{table} eine Initialisierung mit Werten
entsprechend der Standardklassen statt. Alle anderen Ebenen erhalten keine
- Initialisierung. Für sie ist eine explizite Angabe daher bei der ersten
- Verwendung zwingend.%
+ Initialisierung. Für sie ist eine explizite Angabe daher bei der ersten
+ Verwendung zwingend.
+
+ Ist für ein Verzeichnis die Eigenschaft \PValue{noindent} via
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} gesetzt, so ignorieren die Einträge bei
+ allen von \KOMAScript{} bereitgestellten Stilen diesen Wert und verwenden
+ stattdessen 0\Unit{pt}. Der Einzug wird also deaktiviert.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{level}{Integer}}{%
- Nummerischer Wert der \PName{Eintragsebene}. Tatsächlich angezeigt werden
- nur Einträge, deren nummerische Ebene nicht größer als Zähler
+ Nummerischer Wert der \PName{Eintragsebene}. Tatsächlich angezeigt werden
+ nur Einträge, deren nummerische Ebene nicht größer als Zähler
\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}%
%\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}}
\IndexCounter{tocdepth}
ist.
- Diese Eigenschaft ist für alle Stile zwingend und wird bei der
+ Diese Eigenschaft ist für alle Stile zwingend und wird bei der
Definition eines Stils automatisch definiert.
- Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} findet für alle Eintragsebenen, deren Name
- mit »\texttt{sub}« beginnt, eine Initialisierung entsprechend dem
- um eins erhöhten Wert einer gleichnamigen Eintragsebene ohne
- diesen Präfix statt, falls eine solche Ebene existiert. Bei den Stilen
- \PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{largetocline}, \PValue{tocline} und
- \PValue{undottedtocline} findet für die \PName{Eintragsebene}
- \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection},
- \PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph}, \PValue{subparagraph},
- \PValue{figure} und \PValue{table} automatisch eine Initialisierung
- aufgrund des Namens statt. Für andere Ebenen findet eine Initialisierung
- mit dem Wert der Gliederungsebene statt, falls kompatibel zu den
- \KOMAScript-Klassen \Macro{\PName{Eintragsebene}numdepth} definiert
- ist.%
+ Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} und \PValue{toctext} findet für alle
+ Eintragsebenen, deren Name mit »\texttt{sub}« beginnt, eine
+ Initialisierung entsprechend dem um eins erhöhten Wert einer gleichnamigen
+ Eintragsebene ohne diesen Präfix statt, falls eine solche Ebene
+ existiert. Bei den Stilen \PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{largetocline},
+ \PValue{tocline}, \PValue{toctext} und \PValue{undottedtocline} findet für
+ die \PName{Eintragsebene} \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter},
+ \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection},
+ \PValue{paragraph}, \PValue{subparagraph}, \PValue{figure} und
+ \PValue{table} automatisch eine Initialisierung aufgrund des Namens
+ statt. Für andere Ebenen findet eine Initialisierung mit dem Wert der
+ Gliederungsebene statt, falls kompatibel zu den \KOMAScript-Klassen
+ \Macro{\PName{Eintragsebene}numdepth} definiert ist.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{linefill}{Code}}{%
Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zwischen dem Ende des Eintragstextes und
- der Seitenzahl die Art der Füllung verändert werden. Die Eigenschaft
- \PName{linefill} erhält als Wert direkt den gewünschten \PName{Code}.
- Für \PName{Eintragsebene} \PValue{part} und \PValue{chapter} wird die
- Eigenschaft mit \Macro{hfill} initialisiert. Dadurch rückt die Seitenzahl
+ der Seitenzahl die Art der Füllung verändert werden. Die Eigenschaft
+ \PName{linefill} erhält als Wert direkt den gewünschten \PName{Code}. Für
+ \PName{Eintragsebene} \PValue{part} und \PValue{chapter} wird die
+ Eigenschaft mit \Macro{hfill} initialisiert. Dadurch rückt die Seitenzahl
an den rechten Rand. Ist bisher keine \PName{Eintragsebene}
- \PValue{chapter} definiert, so gilt dies auch für \PValue{section}. Alle
- anderen Ebenen werden mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} (siehe
- \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}) initialisiert.
+ \PValue{chapter} definiert, so gilt dies auch für \PValue{section}. Alle
+ anderen Ebenen werden mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}
+ (siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}) initialisiert.
- Wird \PName{Code} angegeben, der nicht automatisch zu einer Füllung des
- Abstandes führt, sollte übrigens auch die Eigenschaft
+ Wird \PName{Code} angegeben, der nicht automatisch zu einer Füllung des
+ Abstandes führt, sollte übrigens auch die Eigenschaft
\PValue{raggedpagenumber} gesetzt werden, damit es nicht zu
- »\texttt{underfull \Macro{hbox}}«-Meldungen kommt.%
+ »\texttt{underfull \Macro{hbox}}«-Meldungen kommt.%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{numsep}{Länge}}{%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{numsep}{Länge}}{%
Der Stil \PValue{tocline} versucht sicherzustellen, dass zwischen der
Nummer und dem Text eines Eintrags mindestens ein Abstand von
- \PName{Länge} eingehalten wird. Bei aktiviertem \PValue{dynnumwidth} kann
- die für die Nummer reservierte Breite \PValue{numwidth} entsprechend
+ \PName{Länge} eingehalten wird. Bei aktiviertem \PValue{dynnumwidth} kann
+ die für die Nummer reservierte Breite \PValue{numwidth} entsprechend
korrigiert werden. Bei nicht aktiviertem \PValue{dynnumwidth} wird
hingegen lediglich eine Warnung ausgegeben, wenn diese Bedingung nicht
eingehalten wird.
+ Der\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} Stil \PValue{toctext} fügt
+ dagegen immer einen Abstand dieser \PName{Länge} nach der Nummer des
+ Eintrags ein.
+
Die Eigenschaft wird mit einem Wert von 0,4\Unit{em} initialisiert.%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{numwidth}{Länge}}{%
- Für die Nummer eines Eintrags reservierte Breite (siehe
+ \entry{\OptionVName{numwidth}{Länge}}{%
+ Für die Nummer eines Eintrags reservierte Breite (siehe
\autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} bis
\autoref{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline}). Dieser Wert wird bei den
Stilen \PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{tocline} und
\PValue{undottedtocline} ab der zweiten Zeile eines Eintrags zum linken
Einzug hinzugerechnet.
- Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} wird für alle Eintragsebenen, deren Name mit
- »\texttt{sub}« beginnt, eine Initialisierung mit dem Wert der
- gleichnamigen Eintragsebene ohne diesen Präfix zuzüglich 0,9\Unit{em}
- vorgenommen, falls eine solche Ebene mit entsprechender
- Eigenschaften existiert. Bei den Stilen \PValue{dottedtocline},
- \PValue{undottedtocline} und \PValue{tocline} findet für die
- Eintragsebenen \PValue{part} bis \PValue{subparagraph} sowie
- \PValue{figure} und \PValue{table} eine Initialisierung mit Werten
- entsprechend der Standardklassen statt. Alle anderen Ebenen erhalten keine
- Initialisierung. Für sie ist eine explizite Angabe daher bei der
- ersten Verwendung zwingend.%
+ Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} wird für alle Eintragsebenen, deren Name mit
+ »\texttt{sub}« beginnt, eine Initialisierung mit dem Wert der
+ gleichnamigen Eintragsebene ohne diesen Präfix zuzüglich 0,9\Unit{em}
+ vorgenommen, falls eine solche Ebene mit entsprechender Eigenschaft
+ existiert. Bei den Stilen \PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{undottedtocline}
+ und \PValue{tocline} findet für die Eintragsebenen \PValue{part} bis
+ \PValue{subparagraph} sowie \PValue{figure} und \PValue{table} eine
+ Initialisierung mit Werten entsprechend der Standardklassen statt. Alle
+ anderen Ebenen erhalten keine Initialisierung. Für sie ist eine explizite
+ Angabe daher bei der ersten Verwendung zwingend.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onendentry}{Code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Führt den angegebenen \PName{Code} unmittelbar nach einem Eintrag im Stil
+ \PValue{toctext} aus, sofern es nicht der letzte Eintrag im Absatz
+ ist. Der Anwender muss unbedingt sicherstellen, dass \PName{Code} auf
+ keinen Fall zum Beenden des Absatzes führt.
+
+ Hinweis: Tatsächlich wird der \PName{Code} gar nicht am Ende des Eintrags,
+ sondern vor dem nächsten Eintrag im Stil \PValue{toctext} ausgeführt.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onendlastentry}{Code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Führt den angegebenen \PName{Code} unmittelbar vor dem Ende des Absatzes
+ mit dem Eintrag im Stil \PValue{toctext} aus, sofern es sich um den
+ letzten Eintrag im Absatz handelt. Der Anwender sollte sicherstellen, dass
+ \PName{Code} nicht zum Beenden des Absatzes führt.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onstartentry}{Code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Führt den angegebenen \PName{Code} unmittelbar vor dem Eintrag im Stil
+ \PValue{toctext} aus, sofern es sich nicht um den ersten Eintrag im Absatz
+ handelt. Der Anwender muss unbedingt sicherstellen, dass \PName{Code} auf
+ keinen Fall zum Beenden des Absatzes führt.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{onstartfirstentry}{Code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Führt den angegebenen \PName{Code} unmittelbar vor dem Eintrag im Stil
+ \PValue{toctext} aus, sofern es sich um den ersten Eintrag im Absatz
+ handelt. Der Anwender sollte sicherstellen, dass \PName{Code} den
+ Absatz nicht bereits beginnt.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onstarthigherlevel}{Code}}{%
Der Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zu Beginn eines Eintrags eine Aktion in
- Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen
- höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert
- hatte. Im Falle, dass der aktuelle Eintrag einen größeren
- \PName{level}-Wert besitzt, in der Hierarchie der Einträge also tiefer
- steht, wird der über diese Eigenschaft angegebene \PName{Code} ausgeführt.
+ Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen
+ höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert hatte. Im
+ Falle, dass der aktuelle Eintrag einen größeren \PName{level}-Wert
+ besitzt, in der Hierarchie der Einträge also tiefer steht, wird der über
+ diese Eigenschaft angegebene \PName{Code} ausgeführt.
- Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty}
- seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat.
+ Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty}
+ seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat.
Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower} (siehe
@@ -1537,90 +1637,123 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}.
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onstartlowerlevel}{Code}}{%
Der Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zu Beginn eines Eintrags eine Aktion in
- Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen
- höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert hatte. Im
+ Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen
+ höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert hatte. Im
Falle, dass der aktuelle Eintrag einen kleineren \PName{level}-Wert
- besitzt, in der Hierarchie der Einträge also höher steht, wird der über
- diese Eigenschaft angegebene \PName{Code} ausgeführt.
+ besitzt, in der Hierarchie der Einträge also höher steht, wird der über
+ diese Eigenschaft angegebene \PName{Code} ausgeführt.
- Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty}
- seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat.
+ Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty}
+ seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat.
Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher}), was normalerweise
- dazu führt, dass ein Umbruch vor dem Eintrag begünstigt wird.%
+ dazu führt, dass ein Umbruch vor dem Eintrag begünstigt wird.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{onstartsamelevel}{Code}}{%
Der Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zu Beginn eines Eintrags eine Aktion in
- Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen
- höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert hatte. Im
+ Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen
+ höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert hatte. Im
Falle, dass der aktuelle Eintrag denselben \PName{level}-Wert besitzt, in
- der Hierarchie der Einträge also gleich gestellt ist, wird der über diese
- Eigenschaft angegebene \PName{Code} ausgeführt.
+ der Hierarchie der Einträge also gleich gestellt ist, wird der über diese
+ Eigenschaft angegebene \PName{Code} ausgeführt.
- Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty}
- seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat.
+ Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty}
+ seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat.
Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame} (siehe
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame}), was normalerweise dazu
- führt, dass ein Umbruch vor dem Eintrag begünstigt wird.%
+ führt, dass ein Umbruch vor dem Eintrag begünstigt wird.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberbox}{Befehl}}{%
- Normalerweise wird die zu einem Eintrag gehörende Seitenzahl rechtsbündig
+ Normalerweise wird die zu einem Eintrag gehörende Seitenzahl rechtsbündig
in eine Box der Breite \Macro{@pnumwidth} gesetzt. Beim Stil
- \PValue{tocline} kann der Befehl, der dazu verwendet wird, über diese
+ \PValue{tocline} kann der Befehl, der dazu verwendet wird, über diese
Eigenschaft konfiguriert werden. Der dabei anzugebende \PName{Befehl} hat
genau ein Argument zu erwarten.
- Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit der bereits erwähnten Box.%
+ Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit der bereits erwähnten Box.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberformat}{Befehl}}{%
- Über diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung der Seitenzahl des Eintrags
- verändert werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau
- ein Argument zu erwarten. Font-Änderungen über \Option{entryformat}
+ Ãœber diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung der Seitenzahl des Eintrags
+ verändert werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau
+ ein Argument zu erwarten. Font-Änderungen über \Option{entryformat}
erfolgen ausgehend von \Option{entryformat}, gefolgt von
\Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalsize}.
- Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft für die \PName{Eintragsebene}
- \PValue{part} mit der Ausgabe des übergebenen Arguments in
- \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries}. Für alle anderen Ebenen erfolgt die Ausgabe
+ Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft für die \PName{Eintragsebene}
+ \PValue{part} mit der Ausgabe des übergebenen Arguments in
+ \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries}. Für alle anderen Ebenen erfolgt die Ausgabe
in \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}.%
}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberwidth}{Länge}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Mit dieser Eigenschaft kann die Breite der Standardbox für die Seitenzahl
+ eines Eintrags im Stil \PValue{tocline} von \Macro{@pnumwidth} in die
+ angegebene \PName{Länge} geändert werden. Es ist zu beachten, dass bei
+ Änderung des Befehls für die Box über die Eigenschaft
+ \Option{pagenumberbox} die angegebene \PName{Länge} nicht mehr automatisch
+ Anwendung findet.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{prepagenumber}{Code}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Im Stil \PValue{toctext} wird zwischen dem Eintragstext und der Seitenzahl
+ \PName{Code} ausgeführt. Dies dient in erster Linie dazu, Abstand oder
+ Trennzeichen zwischen Text und Seitenzahl einzufügen.%
+
+ Voreingestellt ist mit \Macro{nonbreakspace} ein nicht umbrechbares
+ Leerzeichen.%
+ }%
\entry{\OptionVName{raggedentrytext}{Schalter}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
+ \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}.
Ist der Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, so wird der Text
des Eintrags nicht im Blocksatz, sondern im Flattersatz gesetzt. Dabei
- werden nur noch Wörter getrennt, die länger als eine Zeile sind.
+ werden nur noch Wörter getrennt, die länger als eine Zeile sind.
In der Voreinstellung ist dieser Schalter nicht gesetzt.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{raggedpagenumber}{Schalter}}{%
- \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
+ \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}.
Ist der Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, so wird die
- Seitenzahl nicht zwingend rechtsbündig gesetzt.
+ Seitenzahl nicht zwingend rechtsbündig gesetzt.
Je nach Wert der Eigenschaft \PValue{linefill} kann sich das
Setzen dieses Schalters nur im Erscheinen oder Verschwinden einer Warnung
- oder auch konkret in der Formatierung der Einträge auswirken. Es ist also
+ oder auch konkret in der Formatierung der Einträge auswirken. Es ist also
wichtig, diese beiden Eigenschaften zueinander passend zu setzen.
In der Voreinstellung ist dieser Schalter nicht gesetzt und passt damit
zur Initialisierung von \PValue{linefill} sowohl mit \Macro{hfill} als
auch mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}.%
}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{raggedright}{Schalter}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus
+ \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}.
+ Ist der Schalter innerhalb eines Absatzes bei irgend einem Eintrag im Stil
+ \PValue{toctext} gesetzt, so wird der komplette Absatz in linksbündigem
+ Flattersatz gesetzt.%
+ }%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{rightindent}{Länge}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Mit dieser Eigenschaft kann der rechte Rand für den Text eines Eintrags im
+ Stil \PValue{tocline} von \Macro{@tocrmarg} in die angegebene
+ \PName{Länge} geändert werden. Beim Stil \PValue{toctext} wird
+ entsprechend der rechte Rand für den kompletten Absatz eingestellt.%
+ }%
\end{desclist}
-Während \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} nur genau eine \PName{Eintragsebene}
-definiert, kann über
+Während \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} nur genau eine \PName{Eintragsebene}
+definiert, kann über
\Macro{DeclareTOCStyeEntries}\ChangedAt{v3.26}{\Package{tocbasic}} auf einen
Schlag eine ganze \PName{Liste von Eintragsebenen} definiert werden. Die durch
Komma voneinander getrennt angegebenen Eintragsebenen der Liste werden dabei
-alle mit demselben \PName{Stil} und den über \PName{Optionenliste}
+alle mit demselben \PName{Stil} und den über \PName{Optionenliste}
angegebenen Einstellungen definiert.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1629,76 +1762,76 @@ angegebenen Einstellungen definiert.%
\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}
\Parameter{Befehlscode}
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption}\Parameter{Option}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}
\Parameter{Code}
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}\Parameter{Option}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}
- \Parameter{Präfix}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}
+ \Parameter{Präfix}
\Parameter{Postfix}
- \Parameter{Erklärung}
+ \Parameter{Erklärung}
%\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}\Parameter{Option}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}
- \Parameter{Präfix}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}
+ \Parameter{Präfix}
\Parameter{Postfix}
- \Parameter{Erklärung}
+ \Parameter{Erklärung}
%\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}\Parameter{Option}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}
- \Parameter{Präfix}%
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}
+ \Parameter{Präfix}%
\Parameter{Postfix}
- \Parameter{Erklärung}
+ \Parameter{Erklärung}
% \OParameter{Initialisierungscode}
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}\Parameter{Option}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}
- \Parameter{Präfix}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}
+ \Parameter{Präfix}
\Parameter{Postfix}
- \Parameter{Erklärung}
+ \Parameter{Erklärung}
% \OParameter{Initialisierungscode}
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}\Parameter{Option}
- \OParameter{Säumniswert}
- \Parameter{Präfix}
+ \OParameter{Säumniswert}
+ \Parameter{Präfix}
\Parameter{Postfix}
- \Parameter{Erklärung}
+ \Parameter{Erklärung}
% \OParameter{Initialisierungscode}
\end{Declaration}
-\Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} ist
+\Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} ist
eine der komplexesten Anweisungen in \KOMAScript. Sie richtet sich daher
-ausdrücklich an \LaTeX-Entwickler und nicht an \LaTeX-Anwender. Mit ihrer
-Hilfe ist es möglich, einen neuen \PName{Stil} für Verzeichniseinträge zu
-definieren. Üblicherweise werden Verzeichniseinträge mit
+ausdrücklich an \LaTeX-Entwickler und nicht an \LaTeX-Anwender. Mit ihrer
+Hilfe ist es möglich, einen neuen \PName{Stil} für Verzeichniseinträge zu
+definieren. Üblicherweise werden Verzeichniseinträge mit
\Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline} oder bei Verwendung von
\Package{tocbasic} vorzugsweise mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addxcontentsline} (siehe
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline})
-erzeugt. Dabei schreibt \LaTeX{} eine zugehörige Anweisung
+erzeugt. Dabei schreibt \LaTeX{} eine zugehörige Anweisung
\Macro{contentsline}\IndexCmd{contentsline} in die jeweilige Hilfsdatei. Bei
-Einlesen dieser Hilfsdatei führt \LaTeX{} dann für jedes \Macro{contentsline}
+Einlesen dieser Hilfsdatei führt \LaTeX{} dann für jedes \Macro{contentsline}
eine Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} aus.
-Wird später einer \PName{Eintragsebene} über
+Wird später einer \PName{Eintragsebene} über
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry} ein \PName{Stil} zugewiesen, so
-wird zunächst \PName{Initialisierungscode} ausgeführt falls angegeben und dann
-\PName{Befehlscode} für die Definition von \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}
+wird zunächst \PName{Initialisierungscode} ausgeführt falls angegeben und dann
+\PName{Befehlscode} für die Definition von \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}
verwendet. \PName{Befehlscode} ist also letztlich der Code, der bei
-\Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} ausgeführt wird. Dabei ist \texttt{\#1} der
-Name der Eintragsebene, während \texttt{\#\#1} und \texttt{\#\#2} Platzhalter
-für die beiden Argumente von \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} sind.
+\Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} ausgeführt wird. Dabei ist \texttt{\#1} der
+Name der Eintragsebene, während \texttt{\#\#1} und \texttt{\#\#2} Platzhalter
+für die beiden Argumente von \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} sind.
Der \PName{Initialisierungscode} dient einerseits dazu, die Einstellungen
eines Stils zu initialisieren. Entwickler\textnote{Empfehlung!} sollten darauf
achten, dass wirklich alle Einstellungen hier bereits einen Wert erhalten. Nur
dann funktioniert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry} auch ohne
-Angabe einer \PName{Optionenliste} fehlerfrei. Darüber hinaus hat der
+Angabe einer \PName{Optionenliste} fehlerfrei. Darüber hinaus hat der
\PName{Initialisierungscode} auch alle Optionen, die der jeweilige Stil
versteht, zu definieren. Zwingend vordefiniert wird lediglich
-\Option{level}. Der eingestellte Wert für \Option{level} kann in
+\Option{level}. Der eingestellte Wert für \Option{level} kann in
\PName{Befehlscode} mit \Macro{@nameuse}\PParameter{\#1tocdepth}%
\important{\Macro{\PName{Eintragsebene}tocdepth}} abgefragt werden, um ihn
-beispielsweise mit dem Wert des Zählers
+beispielsweise mit dem Wert des Zählers
\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} zu vergleichen.
-Zur Definition neuer Optionen für die Eigenschaften einer
+Zur Definition neuer Optionen für die Eigenschaften einer
Eintragsebene existieren nur innerhalb von \PName{Initialisierungscode} die
Anweisungen \iffree{\Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption},
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}, \Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption},
@@ -1706,17 +1839,31 @@ Anweisungen \iffree{\Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption},
\Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}}{\Macro{DefineTOCEntry\dots Option}}.
Diese Anweisungen definieren jeweils eine \PName{Option}, die bei ihrem
Aufruf eine Anweisung
-\Macro{\PName{Präfix}\PName{Eintragsebene}\PName{Postfix}} mit dem übergebenen
-Wert oder bei Fehlen einer Wertzuweisung mit dem \PName{Säumniswert}
+\Macro{\PName{Präfix}\PName{Eintragsebene}\PName{Postfix}} mit dem übergebenen
+Wert oder bei Fehlen einer Wertzuweisung mit dem \PName{Säumniswert}
definieren. Eine Besonderheit stellt \Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption} dar. Diese
-definiert \Macro{\PName{Präfix}\PName{Eintragsebene}\PName{Postfix}} immer als
-Anweisung mit zwei Argumenten. Ist der an die Option übergebene Wert einer der
+definiert \Macro{\PName{Präfix}\PName{Eintragsebene}\PName{Postfix}} immer als
+Anweisung mit zwei Argumenten. Ist der an die Option übergebene Wert einer der
Aktivierungswerte aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}, so expandiert die Anweisung zum ersten
-Argument. Ist der an die Option übergebene Wert hingegen ein
+Argument. Ist der an die Option übergebene Wert hingegen ein
Deaktivierungswert, so expandiert die Anweisung zum zweiten Argument.
-Die \PName{Erklärung} sollte ein möglichst kurzer Text sein, der den Sinn der
+Neben\ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}} den normalen Optionen der Form
+\Option{\PName{Schlüssel}=\PName{Wert}} werden von allen fünf
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntry\dots Option}-Anweisungen automatisch Optionen der Form
+\Option{\PName{Schlüssel}:=\PName{Eintragsebene}} definiert. Diese dienen
+dazu, den Wert einer anderen \PName{Eintragsebene} zu kopieren, sofern der
+Wert in einem Makro mit gleichem \PName{Präfix} und \PName{Postfix}
+gespeichert ist. Bei den von \Package{tocbasic} vordefinierten Stilen ist das
+für gleichnamige Optionen über Stilgrenzen hinweg der Fall. Von
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption} und \Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}
+werden außerdem Optionen der Form \Option{\PName{Schlüssel}+=\PName{Wert}} mit
+definiert, die dazu dienen, zu dem in
+\Macro{\PName{Präfix}\PName{Eintragsebene}\PName{Postfix}} bereits
+gespeicherten Wert den neuen \PName{Wert} zu addieren.
+
+Die \PName{Erklärung} sollte ein möglichst kurzer Text sein, der den Sinn der
Option mit wenigen Schlagworten beschreibt. Er wird von \Package{tocbasic} bei
Fehlermeldungen, Warnungen und Informationen auf dem Terminal und in der
\File{log}-Datei ausgegeben.
@@ -1725,11 +1872,11 @@ Der einfachste Stil von \Package{tocbasic}, \PValue{gobble}, wurde mit
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareTOCEntryStyle{gobble}{}%
\end{lstcode}
-definiert. Würde man nun mit
+definiert. Würde man nun mit
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=1]{gobble}{dummy}
\end{lstcode}
-eine Eintragsebene \PValue{dummy} in diesem Stil definieren, so würde das
+eine Eintragsebene \PValue{dummy} in diesem Stil definieren, so würde das
unter anderem
\begin{lstcode}
\def\dummytocdepth{1}
@@ -1744,7 +1891,7 @@ Innerhalb von Stil \PValue{tocline} wird beispielsweise
{filling between text and page number}%
\end{lstcode}
verwendet, um Option \Option{linefill} zu definieren. Durch die Angabe von
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} als \PName{Säumniswert} würde ein
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} als \PName{Säumniswert} würde ein
Aufruf wie
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[linefill]{tocline}{part}
@@ -1755,29 +1902,29 @@ unter anderem die Definition
\end{lstcode}
vornehmen.
-Wer\textnote{Tipp!} sich selbst einen Stil definieren möchte, dem sei
-empfohlen, zunächst die Definition des Stils \PValue{dottedtocline} zu
+Wer\textnote{Tipp!} sich selbst einen Stil definieren möchte, dem sei
+empfohlen, zunächst die Definition des Stils \PValue{dottedtocline} zu
studieren. Nachdem dessen Definition verstanden wurde, gibt dann die deutlich
komplexere Definition von Stil \PValue{tocline} viele Hinweise darauf, wie die
Anweisungen sinnvoll zu verwenden sind.
-In\textnote{Tipp!} vielen Fällen wird es jedoch auch ausreichen, einen der
+In\textnote{Tipp!} vielen Fällen wird es jedoch auch ausreichen, einen der
vorhandenen Stile mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle} zu klonen
und dann dessen Initialisierungscode mit Anweisung
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode} oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} abzuändern.
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} abzuändern.
-\Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption} dient eher der Definition der übrigen
+\Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption} dient eher der Definition der übrigen
Anweisungen und sollte in der Regel nicht direkt verwendet
-werden. Normalerweise besteht dafür auch keine Notwendigkeit. Sie sei hier
-nur der Vollständigkeit halber erwähnt.%
+werden. Normalerweise besteht dafür auch keine Notwendigkeit. Sie sei hier
+nur der Vollständigkeit halber erwähnt.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{CloneTOCEntryStyle}\Parameter{Stil}\Parameter{neuer Stil}%
\end{Declaration}
-Mit\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} dieser Anweisung kann ein
+Mit\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} dieser Anweisung kann ein
existierender \PName{Stil} geklont werden. Dabei wird ein \PName{neuer Stil}
mit denselben Eigenschaften und Voreinstellungen wie der existierende
\PName{Stil} deklariert. Das Paket selbst verwendet
@@ -1786,7 +1933,7 @@ mit denselben Eigenschaften und Voreinstellungen wie der existierende
Anweisung um die Stile \PValue{part}, \PValue{section} und \PValue{chapter}
oder \PValue{subsection} als Klon von \PValue{tocline} zu deklarieren und dann
mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} abzuändern. Der Stil
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} abzuändern. Der Stil
\PValue{default} wird von \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} neu als Klon
von \PValue{section} und von \Class{scrartcl} als Klon von \PValue{subsection}
deklariert.%
@@ -1799,26 +1946,26 @@ deklariert.%
\Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}\Parameter{Stil}%
\Parameter{Initialisierungscode}
\end{Declaration}
-Jeder\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verzeichniseintragsstil
-verfügt über einen Initialisierungscode. Dieser wird immer dann aufgerufen,
+Jeder\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verzeichniseintragsstil
+verfügt über einen Initialisierungscode. Dieser wird immer dann aufgerufen,
wenn einer Verzeichnisebene der entsprechende \PName{Stil} mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}
zugewiesen wird. Dieser\textnote{Achtung!} \PName{Initialisierungscode} sollte
-keine globalen Seiteneffekte aufweisen, da er auch für lokale
+keine globalen Seiteneffekte aufweisen, da er auch für lokale
Initialisierungen innerhalb anderer Anweisungen wie
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewTOC} verwendet
wird. Der \PName{Initialisierungscode} dient einerseits dazu, Eigenschaften
-für den jeweiligen \PName{Stil} zu definieren. Er setzt aber auch die
-Standardeinstellungen für diese Eigenschaften.
+für den jeweiligen \PName{Stil} zu definieren. Er setzt aber auch die
+Standardeinstellungen für diese Eigenschaften.
Mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} und
-\Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} kann der für einen \PName{Stil} bereits
+\Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} kann der für einen \PName{Stil} bereits
definierte Initialisierungscode um weiteren \PName{Initialisierungscode}
-erweitert werden. Dabei fügt \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} den neuen
-\PName{Intialisierungscode} vorn an, während \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} den
-\PName{Initialisierungscode} hinten an den vorhandenen Code anfügt. Dies wird
-beispielsweise von den \KOMAScript-Klassen verwendet, um für den von
-\PValue{tocline} geklonten Stil \PValue{part} Füllung, Schrift und vertikalen
+erweitert werden. Dabei fügt \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} den neuen
+\PName{Intialisierungscode} vorn an, während \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} den
+\PName{Initialisierungscode} hinten an den vorhandenen Code anfügt. Dies wird
+beispielsweise von den \KOMAScript-Klassen verwendet, um für den von
+\PValue{tocline} geklonten Stil \PValue{part} Füllung, Schrift und vertikalen
Abstand passend zu initialisieren. Die Klassen \Class{scrbook} und
\Class{scrreprt} verwenden beispielsweise
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1839,54 +1986,54 @@ definieren.%
\Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame}
\Macro{LastTOCLevelWasLower}
\end{Declaration}
-Bei\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Einträgen im Stil
-\PValue{tocline} wird am Anfang abhängig vom Wert von
+Bei\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Einträgen im Stil
+\PValue{tocline} wird am Anfang abhängig vom Wert von
\Macro{lastpenalty}\IndexCmd{lastpenalty} eine dieser drei Anweisungen
-ausgeführt. Dabei fügen \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher} und
+ausgeführt. Dabei fügen \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher} und
\Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame} im vertikalen Modus
-\Macro{addpenalty}\PParameter{\Macro{@lowpenalty}} ein und ermöglichen so
-einen Umbruch vor Einträgen gleicher oder übergeordneter
+\Macro{addpenalty}\PParameter{\Macro{@lowpenalty}} ein und ermöglichen so
+einen Umbruch vor Einträgen gleicher oder übergeordneter
Ebene. \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasLower} ist hingegen bisher leer definiert, so
dass zwischen einem Eintrag und seinem ersten Untereintrag normalerweise ein
Umbruch untersagt ist.
-Anwender sollten diese Anweisungen nicht umdefinieren. Stattdessen können und
-sollten Änderungen bei Zuweisung des Stils an eine Eintragsebene gezielt über
+Anwender sollten diese Anweisungen nicht umdefinieren. Stattdessen können und
+sollten Änderungen bei Zuweisung des Stils an eine Eintragsebene gezielt über
die Eigenschaften \PValue{onstartlowerlevel}, \PValue{onstartsamelevel} und
\PValue{onstarthigherlevel} vorgenommen werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill}\OParameter{Füllzeichen}
+ \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill}\OParameter{Füllzeichen}
\end{Declaration}
-Die\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Anweisung ist dazu gedacht
-als Wert für die Eigenschaft \Option{linefill} des Verzeichniseintragsstils
+Die\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Anweisung ist dazu gedacht
+als Wert für die Eigenschaft \Option{linefill} des Verzeichniseintragsstils
\PName{tocline} verwendet zu werden. Sie erzeugt dann eine Verbindung zwischen
-dem Ende des Textes eines Eintrags und der zugehörigen Seitenzahl. Das
-\PName{Füllzeichen}, das dazu in regelmäßigem Abstand wiederholt wird, kann
+dem Ende des Textes eines Eintrags und der zugehörigen Seitenzahl. Das
+\PName{Füllzeichen}, das dazu in regelmäßigem Abstand wiederholt wird, kann
als optionales Argument angegeben werden. Voreinstellung ist ein
Punkt.\textnote{Voreinstellung}
-Wie der Name schon vermuten lässt, werden die Füllzeichen mit Hilfe von
+Wie der Name schon vermuten lässt, werden die Füllzeichen mit Hilfe von
\Macro{leaders} gesetzt. Als Abstand wird wie bei der \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisung
-\Macro{@dottedtocline} vor und nach dem Füllzeichen
+\Macro{@dottedtocline} vor und nach dem Füllzeichen
\Macro{mkern}\Macro{@dotsep}\Unit{\texttt{mu}} verwendet.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Interne Anweisungen für Klassen- und Paketautoren}
+\section{Interne Anweisungen für Klassen- und Paketautoren}
\seclabel{internals}
Das Paket \Package{tocbasic} bietet einige interne Anweisungen, deren
Benutzung durch Klassen- und Paketautoren freigegeben ist. Diese Anweisungen
beginnen alle mit \Macro{tocbasic@}. Aber\textnote{Achtung!} auch Klassen- und
Paketautoren sollten diese Anweisungen nur verwenden und nicht etwa
-umdefinieren! Ihre interne Funktion kann jederzeit geändert oder erweitert
+umdefinieren! Ihre interne Funktion kann jederzeit geändert oder erweitert
werden, so dass jede Umdefinierung der Anweisungen die Funktion von
-\Package{tocbasic} erheblich beschädigen könnte!
+\Package{tocbasic} erheblich beschädigen könnte!
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -1897,35 +2044,35 @@ bzw. ein \LaTeX-Kern, der um die Sprachverwaltung von \Package{babel}
erweitert wurde, schreibt bei jeder Sprachumschaltung am Anfang oder innerhalb
eines Dokuments in die Dateien mit den Dateierweiterungen \File{toc},
\File{lof} und \File{lot} Anweisungen, um diese Sprachumschaltung in diesen
-Dateien mit zu führen. \Package{tocbasic} erweitert diesen Mechanismus so,
+Dateien mit zu führen. \Package{tocbasic} erweitert diesen Mechanismus so,
dass mit Hilfe von \Macro{tocbasic@extend@babel} auch andere
\PName{Dateierweiterungen} davon profitieren. Das Argument
-\PName{Dateierweiterung} sollte dabei vollständig expandiert sein!
+\PName{Dateierweiterung} sollte dabei vollständig expandiert sein!
Anderenfalls besteht die Gefahr, dass etwa die Bedeutung eines Makros zum
-Zeitpunkt der tatsächlichen Auswertung bereits geändert wurde.
+Zeitpunkt der tatsächlichen Auswertung bereits geändert wurde.
-In der Voreinstellung wird diese Anweisung normalerweise für alle
+In der Voreinstellung wird diese Anweisung normalerweise für alle
\PName{Dateierweiterungen}, die mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} zur
-Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt werden, aufgerufen. Über
+Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt werden, aufgerufen. Über
die Eigenschaft \PValue{nobabel}\important{\PValue{nobabel}} (siehe
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
-\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}) kann dies unterdrückt werden. Für die
-Dateinamenerweiterungen \File{toc}, \File{lof} und \File{lot} unterdrückt
+\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}) kann dies unterdrückt werden. Für die
+Dateinamenerweiterungen \File{toc}, \File{lof} und \File{lot} unterdrückt
\Package{tocbasic} dies bereits selbst, %
\iftrue% Umbruchvarianten
da \Package{babel} sie von sich aus vornimmt.%
\else%
-damit die Umschaltung nicht mehrfach in die zugehörigen Dateien
+damit die Umschaltung nicht mehrfach in die zugehörigen Dateien
eingetragen wird.%
\fi
Normalerweise gibt es keinen Grund, diese Anweisung selbst aufzurufen. Es sind
allerdings Verzeichnisse denkbar, die nicht unter der Kontrolle von
\Package{tocbasic} stehen, also nicht in der Liste der bekannten
-Dateierweiterungen geführt werden, aber trotzdem die Spracherweiterung für
-\Package{babel} nutzen sollen. Für derartige Verzeichnisse wäre die Anweisung
+Dateierweiterungen geführt werden, aber trotzdem die Spracherweiterung für
+\Package{babel} nutzen sollen. Für derartige Verzeichnisse wäre die Anweisung
explizit aufzurufen. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} achten Sie jedoch darauf, dass
-dies für jede Dateierweiterung nur einmal geschieht!%
+dies für jede Dateierweiterung nur einmal geschieht!%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1943,21 +2090,21 @@ Anweisung baut selbst auf \Macro{@starttoc} auf, setzt allerdings zuvor
\Length{parskip}\IndexLength{parskip}\important[i]{\Length{parskip},
\Length{parindent}, \Length{parfillskip}} und
\Length{parindent}\IndexLength{parindent} auf 0 und
-\Length{parfillskip}\IndexLength{parfillskip} auf 0 bis unendlich. Außerdem
+\Length{parfillskip}\IndexLength{parfillskip} auf 0 bis unendlich. Außerdem
wird \Macro{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}}\IndexCmd{@currext} auf die
-aktuelle Dateierweiterung gesetzt, damit diese in den nachfolgend ausgeführten
-Haken\Index{Haken} ausgewertet werden kann. Die Erklärungen der Haken finden
+aktuelle Dateierweiterung gesetzt, damit diese in den nachfolgend ausgeführten
+Haken\Index{Haken} ausgewertet werden kann. Die Erklärungen der Haken finden
Sie im Anschluss.
Da\textnote{Achtung!} \LaTeX{} bei der Ausgabe eines Verzeichnisses auch
-gleich eine neue Verzeichnisdatei zum Schreiben öffnet, kann der Aufruf dieser
+gleich eine neue Verzeichnisdatei zum Schreiben öffnet, kann der Aufruf dieser
Anweisung zu einer Fehlermeldung der Art
\begin{lstoutput}
! No room for a new \write .
\ch@ck ...\else \errmessage {No room for a new #3}
\fi
\end{lstoutput}
-führen, wenn keine Schreibdateien mehr zur Verfügung stehen. Abhilfe kann in
+führen, wenn keine Schreibdateien mehr zur Verfügung stehen. Abhilfe kann in
diesem Fall das Laden des in \autoref{cha:scrwfile} beschriebenen Pakets
\Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile}
oder die Verwendung von Lua\LaTeX{} bieten.%
@@ -1971,27 +2118,27 @@ oder die Verwendung von Lua\LaTeX{} bieten.%
Der Haken\Index{Haken} \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook} wird unmittelbar vor dem
Einlesen der Verzeichnisdatei, noch vor den mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} definierten Anweisungen
-ausgeführt. Es ist erlaubt, diesen Haken mit Hilfe von
+ausgeführt. Es ist erlaubt, diesen Haken mit Hilfe von
\Macro{g@addto@macro}\IndexCmd{g@addto@macro} zu erweitern.
Ebenso wird \Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} unmittelbar nach der
Verzeichnisdatei, aber noch vor den mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} definierten Anweisungen
-ausgeführt. Es ist erlaubt, diesen Haken mit Hilfe von
+ausgeführt. Es ist erlaubt, diesen Haken mit Hilfe von
\Macro{g@addto@macro}\IndexCmd{g@addto@macro} zu erweitern.
\KOMAScript{} nutzt diese Haken, um Verzeichnisse mit dynamischer Anpassung an
-die Breite der Gliederungsnummern zu ermöglichen. Ihre Verwendung ist Klassen
+die Breite der Gliederungsnummern zu ermöglichen. Ihre Verwendung ist Klassen
und Paketen vorbehalten. Anwender\textnote{Achtung!} sollten sich auf
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} beschränken. Paketautoren sollten
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} beschränken. Paketautoren sollten
ebenfalls vorzugsweise diese beiden Anwenderanweisungen verwenden! Ausgaben
innerhalb der beiden Haken sind nicht gestattet!
Wird keine\textnote{Achtung!} der Anweisungen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} für die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse
-verwendet, sollten die Anweisungen für die Haken\Index{Haken} trotzdem
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} für die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse
+verwendet, sollten die Anweisungen für die Haken\Index{Haken} trotzdem
aufgerufen werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2002,15 +2149,15 @@ aufgerufen werden.%
\end{Declaration}
Diese Anweisungen werden direkt nach
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook} bzw. vor
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook} für das jeweilige Verzeichnis
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook} für das jeweilige Verzeichnis
mit der entsprechenden \PName{Dateierweiterung}
-ausgeführt. Sie\textnote{Achtung!} dürfen keinesfalls von Klassen- und
-Paketautoren verändert werden. Werden für die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse die
+ausgeführt. Sie\textnote{Achtung!} dürfen keinesfalls von Klassen- und
+Paketautoren verändert werden. Werden für die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse die
Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc}
-nicht verwendet, sollten die beiden Anweisungen für die Haken\Index{Haken}
-trotzdem aufgerufen werden, soweit sie definiert sind. Die Anweisungen können
-auch undefiniert sein. Für einen entsprechenden Test siehe
+nicht verwendet, sollten die beiden Anweisungen für die Haken\Index{Haken}
+trotzdem aufgerufen werden, soweit sie definiert sind. Die Anweisungen können
+auch undefiniert sein. Für einen entsprechenden Test siehe
\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax}\IndexCmd{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}
in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if},
\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax}.%
@@ -2022,20 +2169,20 @@ in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if},
\end{Declaration}
Diese Anweisung wird von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} verwendet, um die Anweisung zum Setzen
-der Überschrift eines Verzeichnisses aufzurufen. Das kann entweder die
+der Ãœberschrift eines Verzeichnisses aufzurufen. Das kann entweder die
vordefinierte Anweisung des Pakets \Package{tocbasic} oder eine individuelle
-Anweisung sein. Wenn Sie Ihre eigene Anweisung für die Überschrift definieren,
-können Sie ebenfalls \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} verwenden. In diesem Fall
+Anweisung sein. Wenn Sie Ihre eigene Anweisung für die Überschrift definieren,
+können Sie ebenfalls \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} verwenden. In diesem Fall
sollte vor dem Aufruf von \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} die Anweisung
\Macro{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}}\IndexCmd{@currext} auf die
-Dateinamenerweiterung, die zu diesem Verzeichnis gehört, gesetzt werden.%
+Dateinamenerweiterung, die zu diesem Verzeichnis gehört, gesetzt werden.%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{tocbasic@listhead@\PName{Dateierweiterung}}\Parameter{Titel}
\end{Declaration}
-Ist diese individuelle Anweisung für das Setzen einer Verzeichnisüberschrift
+Ist diese individuelle Anweisung für das Setzen einer Verzeichnisüberschrift
definiert, so verwendet \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@listhead}
sie. Anderenfalls definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@listhead} diese
vor der Verwendung.%
@@ -2051,10 +2198,10 @@ vor der Verwendung.%
\end{Declaration}
Anweisung\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}
\Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline} nimmt einen \PName{Eintrag} der angegebenen
-\PName{Ebene} in das über die \PName{Dateierweiterung} spezifizierte
+\PName{Ebene} in das über die \PName{Dateierweiterung} spezifizierte
Verzeichnis vor. Ob der Eintrag nummeriert wird\iffree{ oder
nicht}{}% Umbruchvarianten
-, hängt davon ab, ob das Argument \PName{Gliederungsnummer} leer ist oder
+, hängt davon ab, ob das Argument \PName{Gliederungsnummer} leer ist oder
nicht. Im Falle eines leeren Argument wird dem \PName{Eintrag} ein
\Macro{nonumberline} ohne Argument vorangestellt. Anderenfalls wird wie
gewohnt \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} mit \PName{Gliederungsnummer} als
@@ -2065,7 +2212,7 @@ Die Anweisung \Macro{nonumberline} wird innerhalb
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}) entsprechend der Eigenschaft
\PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}) umdefiniert. Dadurch wirkt sich das
-Setzen oder Löschen dieser Eigenschaft \iffree{bereits beim nächsten
+Setzen oder Löschen dieser Eigenschaft \iffree{bereits beim nächsten
\LaTeX-Lauf}{unmittelbar} % Umbruchvarianten
aus.%
%
@@ -2076,34 +2223,34 @@ aus.%
\Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}\Parameter{Eintragsebene}
\Macro{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}\Parameter{Eintragsebene}
\end{Declaration}
-Der\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verzeichniseintragsstil
+Der\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verzeichniseintragsstil
\PValue{tocline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}) setzt am Ende jedes
-Eintrags über \Macro{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel} \Macro{penalty} so, dass
+Eintrags über \Macro{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel} \Macro{penalty} so, dass
nach einem Eintrag kein Seitenumbruch erfolgen darf. Der genaue Wert wird
-dabei abhängig von der \PName{Eintragsebene} gewählt.
+dabei abhängig von der \PName{Eintragsebene} gewählt.
% \begin{sloppypar}
\begingroup
\emergencystretch=2em
-Über \Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel} wird am Anfang eines
-Eintrags, abhängig von \Macro{lastpenalty} und der \PName{Eintragsebene} die
-über die Eigenschaft \Option{onstartlowerlevel} im internen Makro
-\Macro{scr@tso@\PName{Eintragsebene}@LastTOCLevelWasHigher}, über die
+Ãœber \Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel} wird am Anfang eines
+Eintrags, abhängig von \Macro{lastpenalty} und der \PName{Eintragsebene} die
+über die Eigenschaft \Option{onstartlowerlevel} im internen Makro
+\Macro{scr@tso@\PName{Eintragsebene}@LastTOCLevelWasHigher}, über die
\iffree{Eigenschaft}{Ei\-genschaft}
-\Option{onstartsamelevel} im zugehörigen, internen
+\Option{onstartsamelevel} im zugehörigen, internen
Makro\iffree{
}{\linebreak}\Macro{scr@tso@\PName{Eintragsebene}@LastTOCLevelWasSame} oder
-über die Eigenschaft \Option{onstarthigherlevel} im zugehörigen, internen
+über die Eigenschaft \Option{onstarthigherlevel} im zugehörigen, internen
Makro \Macro{scr@tso@\PName{Eintragsebene}@LastTOCLevelWasLower} gespeicherte
-Aktion ausgeführt. In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} erlauben die
-ersten beiden einen Umbruch, wenn sie im vertikalen Modus ausgeführt
+Aktion ausgeführt. In der Voreinstellung\textnote{Voreinstellung} erlauben die
+ersten beiden einen Umbruch, wenn sie im vertikalen Modus ausgeführt
werden.\par
\endgroup
%\end{sloppypar}
Entwicklern, die eigene Stile kompatibel mit \PValue{tocline} erstellen
-wollen, sei empfohlen, dieses Verhalten zu kopieren. Zu diesem Zweck dürfen
-sie auf diese eigentlich internen Makros zurückgreifen.%
+wollen, sei empfohlen, dieses Verhalten zu kopieren. Zu diesem Zweck dürfen
+sie auf diese eigentlich internen Makros zurückgreifen.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2111,23 +2258,23 @@ sie auf diese eigentlich internen Makros zurückgreifen.%
\seclabel{example}
In diesem Abschnitt finden Sie ein komplettes Beispiel, wie eine eigene
-Gleitumgebung einschließlich Verzeichnis und \KOMAScript-Integration mit Hilfe
+Gleitumgebung einschließlich Verzeichnis und \KOMAScript-Integration mit Hilfe
von \Package{tocbasic} definiert werden kann. In diesem Beispiel werden
-interne Anweisungen, also solche mit »\texttt{@}« im Namen
+interne Anweisungen, also solche mit »\texttt{@}« im Namen
verwendet. Das\textnote{Achtung!} bedeutet, dass die Anweisungen entweder in
einem eigenen Paket, einer Klasse oder zwischen
\Macro{makeatletter}\important[i]{\Macro{makeatletter}\\\Macro{makeatother}}%
\IndexCmd{makeatletter} und \Macro{makeatother}\IndexCmd{makeatother}
-verwendet werden müssen.
+verwendet werden müssen.
-Als\textnote{Umgebung} erstes wird eine Umgebung benötigt, die diese neue
+Als\textnote{Umgebung} erstes wird eine Umgebung benötigt, die diese neue
Gleitumgebung bereitstellt. Das geht ganz einfach mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\newenvironment{remarkbox}%
{\@float{remarkbox}}%
{\end@float}
\end{lstcode}
-Die neue Umgebung heißt also \Environment{remarkbox}.
+Die neue Umgebung heißt also \Environment{remarkbox}.
Jede\textnote{Platzierung} Gleitumgebung hat eine Standardplatzierung. Diese
setzt sich aus einer oder mehreren der bekannten Platzierungsoptionen
@@ -2136,20 +2283,20 @@ setzt sich aus einer oder mehreren der bekannten Platzierungsoptionen
\newcommand*{\fps@remarkbox}{tbp}
\end{lstcode}
Die neue Gleitumgebung soll also in der Voreinstellung nur oben, unten oder
-auf einer eigenen Seite platziert werden dürfen.
+auf einer eigenen Seite platziert werden dürfen.
-Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Gleittyp} haben außerdem einen nummerischen Gleittyp
+Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Gleittyp} haben außerdem einen nummerischen Gleittyp
zwischen 1 und 31. Umgebungen, bei denen das gleiche Bit
-im Gleittyp gesetzt ist, dürfen sich nicht gegenseitig überholen. Abbildungen
-und Tabellen haben normalerweise den Typ~1 und 2. Abbildungen dürfen also
-Tabellen überholen und umgekehrt.
+im Gleittyp gesetzt ist, dürfen sich nicht gegenseitig überholen. Abbildungen
+und Tabellen haben normalerweise den Typ~1 und 2. Abbildungen dürfen also
+Tabellen überholen und umgekehrt.
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\ftype@remarkbox}{4}
\end{lstcode}
-Die neue Umgebung hat den Typ~4, darf also Tabellen und Abbildungen überholen
-und von diesen überholt werden.
+Die neue Umgebung hat den Typ~4, darf also Tabellen und Abbildungen überholen
+und von diesen überholt werden.
-Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Nummer} haben außerdem eine Nummer.
+Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Nummer} haben außerdem eine Nummer.
\begin{lstcode}
\newcounter{remarkbox}
\newcommand*{\remarkboxformat}{%
@@ -2157,11 +2304,11 @@ Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Nummer} haben außerdem eine Nummer.
}
\newcommand*{\fnum@remarkbox}{\remarkboxformat}
\end{lstcode}
-Hier wird zunächst ein neuer Zähler definiert, der unabhängig von Kapiteln
-oder sonstigen Gliederungszählern ist. Dabei definiert \LaTeX{} auch gleich
+Hier wird zunächst ein neuer Zähler definiert, der unabhängig von Kapiteln
+oder sonstigen Gliederungszählern ist. Dabei definiert \LaTeX{} auch gleich
\Macro{theremarkbox} mit der Standardausgabe als arabische Zahl. Diese wird
dann in der Definition der formatierten Ausgabe verwendet. Die formatierte
-Ausgabe wird wiederum als Gleitumgebungsnummer für die Verwendung in
+Ausgabe wird wiederum als Gleitumgebungsnummer für die Verwendung in
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} definiert.
Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Dateierweiterung} haben Verzeichnisse und diese haben
@@ -2169,16 +2316,16 @@ eine Datei mit dem Namen \Macro{jobname} und einer Dateierweiterung.
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\ext@remarkbox}{lor}
\end{lstcode}
-Als Dateierweiterung verwenden wir also »\File{lor}«.
+Als Dateierweiterung verwenden wir also »\File{lor}«.
Die\important{\Package{tocbasic}} Umgebung selbst steht damit. Es fehlt
-allerdings das Verzeichnis. Damit wir dabei möglichst wenig selbst machen
-müssen, verwenden wir das Paket \Package{tocbasic}. Dieses wird in Dokumenten
+allerdings das Verzeichnis. Damit wir dabei möglichst wenig selbst machen
+müssen, verwenden wir das Paket \Package{tocbasic}. Dieses wird in Dokumenten
mit
\begin{lstcode}
\usepackage{tocbasic}
\end{lstcode}
-geladen. Ein Klassen- oder Paketautor würde hingegen
+geladen. Ein Klassen- oder Paketautor würde hingegen
\begin{lstcode}
\RequirePackage{tocbasic}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -2190,48 +2337,48 @@ Nun\textnote{Dateierweiterung} machen wir die neue Dateierweiterung dem Paket
\addtotoclist[float]{lor}
\end{lstcode}
Dabei verwenden wir als Besitzer \PValue{float}, damit sich alle
-anschließend aufgerufenen Optionen von \KOMAScript, die sich auf Verzeichnisse
+anschließend aufgerufenen Optionen von \KOMAScript, die sich auf Verzeichnisse
von Gleitumgebungen beziehen, auch auf das neue Verzeichnis beziehen.
-Jetzt\textnote{Verzeichnistitel} definieren wir noch einen Titel für dieses
+Jetzt\textnote{Verzeichnistitel} definieren wir noch einen Titel für dieses
Verzeichnis:
\begin{lstcode}
- \newcommand*{\listoflorname}{Verzeichnis der Merksätze}
+ \newcommand*{\listoflorname}{Verzeichnis der Merksätze}
\end{lstcode}
-Normalerweise würde man in einem Paket übrigens zunächst einen englischen
+Normalerweise würde man in einem Paket übrigens zunächst einen englischen
Titel definieren und dann beispielsweise mit Hilfe des Pakets
-\Package{scrbase} Titel für alle weiteren Sprachen, die man unterstützen
+\Package{scrbase} Titel für alle weiteren Sprachen, die man unterstützen
will. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}, ab
\autopageref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}.
-Jetzt\textnote{Verzeichniseintrag}\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} müssen wir nur
+Jetzt\textnote{Verzeichniseintrag}\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} müssen wir nur
noch definieren, wie ein einzelner Eintrag in dem Verzeichnis aussehen soll:
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\l@remarkbox}{\l@figure}
\end{lstcode}
-Weil das die einfachste Lösung ist, wurde hier festgelegt, dass Einträge in
-das Verzeichnis der Merksätze genau wie Einträge in das Abbildungsverzeichnis
-aussehen sollen. Man hätte auch eine explizite Festlegung wie
+Weil das die einfachste Lösung ist, wurde hier festgelegt, dass Einträge in
+das Verzeichnis der Merksätze genau wie Einträge in das Abbildungsverzeichnis
+aussehen sollen. Man hätte auch eine explizite Festlegung wie
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=1,indent=1em,numwidth=1.5em]%
{tocline}{remarkbox}
\end{lstcode}
-verwenden können.
+verwenden können.
-Außerdem\textnote{Kapiteleintrag} wollen Sie, dass sich Kapiteleinträge auf das
+Außerdem\textnote{Kapiteleintrag} wollen Sie, dass sich Kapiteleinträge auf das
Verzeichnis auswirken.
\begin{lstcode}
\setuptoc{lor}{chapteratlist}
\end{lstcode}
-Das Setzen dieser Eigenschaft ermöglicht dies bei Verwendung einer
+Das Setzen dieser Eigenschaft ermöglicht dies bei Verwendung einer
\KOMAScript-Klasse und jeder anderen Klasse, die diese Eigenschaft
-unterstützt. Leider gehören die Standardklassen nicht dazu.
+unterstützt. Leider gehören die Standardklassen nicht dazu.
-Das\textnote{Verzeichnis} genügt schon. Der Anwender kann nun bereits
+Das\textnote{Verzeichnis} genügt schon. Der Anwender kann nun bereits
wahlweise mit Hilfe der Optionen einer \KOMAScript-Klasse oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} verschiedene Formen der Überschrift (ohne
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} verschiedene Formen der Ãœberschrift (ohne
Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag, mit Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag, mit Nummerierung)
-wählen und das Verzeichnis mit
+wählen und das Verzeichnis mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}\PParameter{lor} ausgeben. Mit einem
schlichten
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -2239,36 +2386,36 @@ schlichten
\end{lstcode}
kann man die Anwendung noch etwas vereinfachen.
-Wie Sie gesehen haben, beziehen sich gerade einmal fünf einzeilige
+Wie Sie gesehen haben, beziehen sich gerade einmal fünf einzeilige
Anweisungen, von denen nur drei bis vier wirklich notwendig sind, auf das
Verzeichnis selbst. Trotzdem bietet dieses Verzeichnis bereits die
-Möglichkeit, es zu nummerieren oder auch nicht nummeriert in das
+Möglichkeit, es zu nummerieren oder auch nicht nummeriert in das
Inhaltsverzeichnis aufzunehmen. Es kann sogar per Eigenschaft bereits eine
-tiefere Gliederungsebene gewählt werden. Kolumnentitel werden für \KOMAScript,
+tiefere Gliederungsebene gewählt werden. Kolumnentitel werden für \KOMAScript,
die Standardklassen und alle Klassen, die \Package{tocbasic} explizit
-unterstützen, angepasst gesetzt. Unterstützende Klassen beachten das neue
+unterstützen, angepasst gesetzt. Unterstützende Klassen beachten das neue
Verzeichnis sogar beim Wechsel zu einem neuen Kapitel. Sprachumschaltungen
-durch \Package{babel} werden in dem Verzeichnis ebenfalls berücksichtigt.
+durch \Package{babel} werden in dem Verzeichnis ebenfalls berücksichtigt.
-Natürlich\textnote{Verzeichniseigenschaften} kann ein Paketautor weiteres
-hinzufügen. So könnte er explizit Optionen anbieten, um die Verwendung von
+Natürlich\textnote{Verzeichniseigenschaften} kann ein Paketautor weiteres
+hinzufügen. So könnte er explizit Optionen anbieten, um die Verwendung von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} vor dem Anwender zu verbergen. Andererseits
kann er auch auf diese Anleitung zu \Package{tocbasic} verweisen, wenn es
-darum geht, die entsprechenden Möglichkeiten zu erklären. Vorteil ist dann,
-dass der Anwender automatisch von etwaigen zukünftigen Erweiterungen von
+darum geht, die entsprechenden Möglichkeiten zu erklären. Vorteil ist dann,
+dass der Anwender automatisch von etwaigen zukünftigen Erweiterungen von
\Package{tocbasic} profitiert. Soll der Anwender aber nicht mit der Tatsache
-belastet werden, dass für die Merksätze die Dateierweiterung \File{lor}
-verwendet wird, so genügt
+belastet werden, dass für die Merksätze die Dateierweiterung \File{lor}
+verwendet wird, so genügt
\begin{lstcode}
\newcommand*{\setupremarkboxes}{\setuptoc{lor}}
\end{lstcode}
\iffalse%
-um eine als Argument an \Macro{setupremarkboxes} übergebene Liste von
+um eine als Argument an \Macro{setupremarkboxes} übergebene Liste von
Eigenschaften direkt als Liste von %
\else%
-um über \Macro{setupremarkboxes}
+um über \Macro{setupremarkboxes}
\fi
-Eigenschaften für \File{lor} zu setzen.
+Eigenschaften für \File{lor} zu setzen.
\section{Alles mit einer Anweisung}
@@ -2284,82 +2431,86 @@ noch einfacher gehen kann.
\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}
\end{Declaration}%
Mit\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Package{tocbasic}} dieser Anweisung wird in einem
-einzigen Schritt ein neues Verzeichnis, dessen Überschrift und die Bezeichnung
-für die Einträge unter Kontrolle von \Package{tocbasic} definiert. Optional
-können dabei gleichzeitig gleitende oder nicht gleitende Umgebungen definiert
+einzigen Schritt ein neues Verzeichnis, dessen Ãœberschrift und die Bezeichnung
+für die Einträge unter Kontrolle von \Package{tocbasic} definiert. Optional
+können dabei gleichzeitig gleitende oder nicht gleitende Umgebungen definiert
werden, innerhalb derer \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}%
-\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}}\IndexCmd{caption} Einträge für
+\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}}\IndexCmd{caption} Einträge für
dieses neue Verzeichnis erzeugt. Auch die Erweiterungen
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove}\important[i]{%
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove}\\
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionbelow}}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionbelow} und
\DescRef{maincls.env.captionbeside} aus den \KOMAScript-Klassen (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, ab \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove})
-können dann verwendet werden.
+können dann verwendet werden.
\PName{Dateierweiterung} definiert dabei die Dateiendung der Hilfsdatei, die
-das Verzeichnis repräsentiert, wie dies in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, ab
-\autopageref{sec:tocbasic.basics} bereits erläutert
+das Verzeichnis repräsentiert, wie dies in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, ab
+\autopageref{sec:tocbasic.basics} bereits erläutert
wurde. Dieser\textnote{Achtung!} Parameter muss angegeben werden und darf
nicht leer sein!
\PName{Optionenliste} ist eine durch Komma getrennte Liste, wie dies auch von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions} (siehe \autoref{sec:typearea.options},
\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions}) bekannt ist. Diese
-Optionen\textnote{Achtung!} können jedoch \emph{nicht} mit
+Optionen\textnote{Achtung!} können jedoch \emph{nicht} mit
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions} gesetzt werden! Eine
-Übersicht über die möglichen Optionen bietet
+Übersicht über die möglichen Optionen bietet
\autoref{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options}\iffalse ab
\autopageref{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options}\fi.
-Wird\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Option
+Wird\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Option
\Option{tocentrystyle} nicht gesetzt, so wird bei Bedarf der Stil
-\PValue{default} verwendet. Näheres zu diesem Stil ist
-\autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} zu entnehmen. Soll kein Befehl für
-Verzeichniseinträge definiert werden, so kann ein leeres Argument, also
+\PValue{default} verwendet. Näheres zu diesem Stil ist
+\autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} zu entnehmen. Soll kein Befehl für
+Verzeichniseinträge definiert werden, so kann ein leeres Argument, also
wahlweise \OptionValue{tocentrystyle}{}\iffree{}{\unskip} oder
\OptionValue{tocentrystyle}{\PParameter{}} verwendet werden.
-Abhängig\ChangedAt[2016/06]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} vom Stil der
-Verzeichniseinträge können auch alle für diesen Stil gültigen Eigenschaften
+Abhängig\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} vom Stil der
+Verzeichniseinträge können auch alle für diesen Stil gültigen Eigenschaften
gesetzt werden, indem die entsprechenden in
\autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} ab
-\autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} aufgeführten Namen, mit dem
-Präfix \PValue{tocentry} versehen, in der \PName{Optionenliste} angegeben
-werden. Nachträgliche Änderungen am Stil sind mit
+\autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} aufgeführten Namen, mit dem
+Präfix \PValue{tocentry} versehen, in der \PName{Optionenliste} angegeben
+werden. Nachträgliche Änderungen am Stil sind mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}%
\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}%
\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}} jederzeit
-möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
+möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}.
% Umbruchoptimierung: Tabelle verschoben.
\begin{desclist}
\renewcommand*{\abovecaptionskipcorrection}{-\normalbaselineskip}%
\desccaption[{%
- Optionen für die Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewTOC}%
+ Optionen für die Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewTOC}%
}]{%
- Optionen für die Anweisung
+ Optionen für die Anweisung
\Macro{DeclareNewTOC}\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
\label{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options}%
}{%
- Optionen für die Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
+ Optionen für die Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} (\emph{Fortsetzung})%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{atbegin}{Code}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{%
Falls eine neue Gleitumgebung oder nicht gleitende Umgebung definiert
- wird, so wird \PName{Code} jeweils am Anfang dieser Umgebung ausgeführt.%
+ wird, so wird \PName{Code} jeweils am Anfang dieser Umgebung ausgeführt.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{atend}{Code}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{%
Falls eine neue Gleitumgebung oder nicht gleitende Umgebung definiert
- wird, so wird \PName{Code} jeweils am Ende dieser Umgebung ausgeführt.%
+ wird, so wird \PName{Code} jeweils am Ende dieser Umgebung ausgeführt.%
}%
- \entry{\OptionVName{counterwithin}{\LaTeX-Zähler}}{%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{category}{Kategorie}}{%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.27}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Diese Option kann als Synonym für \OptionVName{owner}{Besitzer} verwendet
+ werden.}%
+ \entry{\OptionVName{counterwithin}{\LaTeX-Zähler}}{%
Falls eine neue Gleitumgebung oder eine nicht gleitende Umgebung definiert
- wird, so wird für diese auch ein neuer Zähler
+ wird, so wird für diese auch ein neuer Zähler
\Counter{\PName{Eintragstyp}} (siehe Option \Option{type})
- angelegt. Dieser Zähler kann in gleicher Weise wie beispielsweise der
- Zähler \Counter{figure} bei \Class{book}-Klassen von Zähler
- \Counter{chapter} abhängt, von einem \LaTeX-Zähler ahängig gemacht
+ angelegt. Dieser Zähler kann in gleicher Weise wie beispielsweise der
+ Zähler \Counter{figure} bei \Class{book}-Klassen von Zähler
+ \Counter{chapter} abhängt, von einem \LaTeX-Zähler ahängig gemacht
werden.}%
\entry{\Option{float}}{%
Es wird nicht nur ein neuer Verzeichnistyp definiert, sondern auch
@@ -2368,132 +2519,132 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
(vgl. \Environment{figure} und \Environment{figure*}).}%
\entry{\OptionVName{floatpos}{Gleitverhalten}}{%
Jede Gleitumgebung hat ein voreingestelltes \PName{Gleitverhalten}, das
- über das optionale Argument der Gleitumgebung geändert werden kann. Mit
- dieser Option wird das \PName{Gleitverhalten} für die optional erstellbare
+ über das optionale Argument der Gleitumgebung geändert werden kann. Mit
+ dieser Option wird das \PName{Gleitverhalten} für die optional erstellbare
Gleitumgebung (siehe Option \Option{float}) festgelegt. Die Syntax und
- Semantik ist dabei mit der des optionalen Arguments für die Gleitumgebung
+ Semantik ist dabei mit der des optionalen Arguments für die Gleitumgebung
identisch. Wird die Option nicht verwendet, so ist das voreingestellte
Gleitverhalten \texttt{tbp}, also \emph{top}, \emph{bottom},
\emph{page}.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{floattype}{Gleittyp}}{%
Jede Gleitumgebung hat einen nummerischen Typ. Gleitumgebungen, bei denen
- in diesem \PName{Gleittyp} nur unterschiedliche Bits gesetzt sind, können
- sich gegenseitig überholen. Die Gleitumgebungen \Environment{figure} und
- \Environment{table} haben normalerweise die Typen 1 und 2, können sich
- also gegenseitig überholen. Es sind Typen von 1 bis 31 (alle Bits gesetzt,
- kann also keinen anderen Typ überholen und von keinem anderen Typen
- überholt werden) zulässig. Wird kein Typ angegeben, so wird mit 16 der
- höchst mögliche Ein-Bit-Typ verwendet.}%
+ in diesem \PName{Gleittyp} nur unterschiedliche Bits gesetzt sind, können
+ sich gegenseitig überholen. Die Gleitumgebungen \Environment{figure} und
+ \Environment{table} haben normalerweise die Typen 1 und 2, können sich
+ also gegenseitig überholen. Es sind Typen von 1 bis 31 (alle Bits gesetzt,
+ kann also keinen anderen Typ überholen und von keinem anderen Typen
+ überholt werden) zulässig. Wird kein Typ angegeben, so wird mit 16 der
+ höchst mögliche Ein-Bit-Typ verwendet.}%
\entry{\Option{forcenames}}{%
Siehe Option \Option{name} und \Option{listname}.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{hang}{Einzug}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Die Breite der
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Die Breite der
Nummer des Verzeichniseintrags\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} ist nun
- stattdessen als Eigenschaft in Abhängigkeit des Verzeichniseintragsstils
+ stattdessen als Eigenschaft in Abhängigkeit des Verzeichniseintragsstils
von Option \Option{tocentrystyle} anzugeben. Bei den Stilen von
- \KOMAScript{} wäre das beispielsweise die Eigenschaft \PValue{numwidth}
+ \KOMAScript{} wäre das beispielsweise die Eigenschaft \PValue{numwidth}
und damit Option \Option{tocentrynumwidth}. Besitzt ein Stil diese
Eigenschaft, so wird sie von \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} mit 1,5\Unit{em}
voreingestellt. Diese Voreinstellung kann durch explizite Angabe von
\OptionVName{tocentrynumwidth}{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen
- \PName{Wert} überschrieben werden. Für Abbildungen verwenden die
+ \PName{Wert} überschrieben werden. Für Abbildungen verwenden die
\KOMAScript-Klassen beispielsweise den \PName{Wert} \PValue{2.3em}.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{indent}{Einzug}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Der Einzug des
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Der Einzug des
Verzeichniseintrags\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} von links ist nun
- stattdessen als Eigenschaft in Abhängigkeit des Verzeichniseintragsstils
+ stattdessen als Eigenschaft in Abhängigkeit des Verzeichniseintragsstils
von Option \Option{tocentrystyle} anzugeben. Bei den Stilen von
- \KOMAScript{} wäre das beispielsweise die Eigenschaft \PValue{indent} und
+ \KOMAScript{} wäre das beispielsweise die Eigenschaft \PValue{indent} und
damit Option \Option{tocentryindent}. Besitzt ein Stil diese Eigenschaft,
so wird sie von \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} mit 1\Unit{em} voreingestellt. Diese
Voreinstellung kann durch explizite Angabe von
\OptionVName{tocentryindent}{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen \PName{Wert}
- überschrieben werden. Für Abbildungen verwenden die \KOMAScript-Klassen
+ überschrieben werden. Für Abbildungen verwenden die \KOMAScript-Klassen
beispielsweise den \PName{Wert} \PValue{1.5em}.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{level}{Gliederungsebene}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Der nummerische Wert
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Der nummerische Wert
der Ebene des Verzeichniseintrags\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} ist nun
- stattdessen als Eigenschaft in Abhängigkeit des Verzeichniseintragsstils
+ stattdessen als Eigenschaft in Abhängigkeit des Verzeichniseintragsstils
von Option \Option{tocentrystyle} anzugeben. Nichts desto trotz haben alle
Stile die Eigenschaft \PValue{level} und damit Option
\Option{tocentrylevel}. Die Eigenschaft wird von \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} mit
1 voreingestellt. Diese Voreinstellung kann durch explizite Angabe von
\OptionVName{tocentrylevel}{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen \PName{Wert}
- überschrieben werden.}%
+ überschrieben werden.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{listname}{Verzeichnistitel}}{%
- Jedes Verzeichnis hat eine Überschrift, die durch diese Option bestimmt
+ Jedes Verzeichnis hat eine Ãœberschrift, die durch diese Option bestimmt
werden kann. Ist die Option nicht angegeben, so wird als Verzeichnistitel
- »\texttt{List of \PName{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps}}« (siehe Option
+ »\texttt{List of \PName{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps}}« (siehe Option
\Option{types}) verwendet, wobei das erste Zeichen der \PName{Mehrzahl des
- Eintragstyps} in einen Großbuchstaben gewandelt wird. Es wird auch ein
+ Eintragstyps} in einen Großbuchstaben gewandelt wird. Es wird auch ein
Makro \Macro{list\PName{Eintragstyp}name} mit diesem Wert definiert, der
- jederzeit geändert werden kann. Dieses Makro wird jedoch nur definiert,
- wenn es nicht bereits definiert ist oder zusätzlich Option
+ jederzeit geändert werden kann. Dieses Makro wird jedoch nur definiert,
+ wenn es nicht bereits definiert ist oder zusätzlich Option
\Option{forcenames} gesetzt ist.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{name}{Eintragsname}}{%
- Sowohl als optionaler Präfix für die Einträge im Verzeichnis als auch für
+ Sowohl als optionaler Präfix für die Einträge im Verzeichnis als auch für
die Beschriftung in einer Gleitumgebung (siehe Option \Option{float}) oder
einer nicht gleitenden Umgebung (siehe Option \Option{nonfloat}) wird ein
- Name für einen Eintrag in das Verzeichnis benötigt. Ohne diese Option wird
+ Name für einen Eintrag in das Verzeichnis benötigt. Ohne diese Option wird
als \PName{Eintragsname} der \PName{Eintragstyp} (siehe Option
\Option{type}) verwendet, bei dem das erste Zeichen in einen
- Großbuchstaben gewandelt wird. Es wird auch ein Makro
+ Großbuchstaben gewandelt wird. Es wird auch ein Makro
\Macro{\PName{Eintragstyp}name} mit diesem Wert definiert, der jederzeit
- geändert werden kann. Dieses Makro wird jedoch nur definiert, wenn es
- nicht bereits definiert ist oder zusätzlich Option \Option{forcenames}
+ geändert werden kann. Dieses Makro wird jedoch nur definiert, wenn es
+ nicht bereits definiert ist oder zusätzlich Option \Option{forcenames}
gesetzt ist.}%
\entry{\Option{nonfloat}}{%
Es wird nicht nur ein neuer Verzeichnistyp definiert, sondern auch eine
nicht gleitende Umgebungen \Environment{\PName{Eintragstyp}-} (siehe
- Option \Option{type}), die ähnlich wie eine Gleitumgebung verwendet werden
+ Option \Option{type}), die ähnlich wie eine Gleitumgebung verwendet werden
kann, jedoch nicht gleitet und auch nicht die Grenzen der Umgebung, in der
sie verwendet wird, durchbricht.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{owner}{Besitzer}}{%
Jedes neue Verzeichnis hat bei \Package{tocbasic} einen Besitzer (siehe
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}). Dieser kann hier angegeben werden. Ist
- kein Besitzer angegeben, so wird der Besitzer »\PValue{float}« verwendet,
- den auch die \KOMAScript-Klassen für das Abbildungs- und das
+ kein Besitzer angegeben, so wird der Besitzer »\PValue{float}« verwendet,
+ den auch die \KOMAScript-Klassen für das Abbildungs- und das
Tabellenverzeichnis verwenden.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{setup}{Liste von Eigenschaften}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
Die \PName{Liste von Eigenschaften} wird via
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} gesetzt. Es wird darauf hingewiesen,
- dass für die Angabe mehrerer durch Komma getrennter Eigenschaften die
+ dass für die Angabe mehrerer durch Komma getrennter Eigenschaften die
\PName{Liste von Eigenschaften} in geschweifte Klammern gesetzt werden
muss.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{tocentrystyle}{Eintragsstil}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- \PName{Eintragsstil} gibt den Stil an, den Einträge in das entsprechende
- Verzeichnis haben sollen. Der Name der Eintragsebene wird dabei über
- Option \Option{type} bestimmt. Zusätzlich zu den Optionen dieser Tabelle
- können auch alle Eigenschaften des Stils als Optionen angegeben werden,
- indem die Namen der Eigenschaften mit dem Präfix \PValue{toc} ergänzt
+ \PName{Eintragsstil} gibt den Stil an, den Einträge in das entsprechende
+ Verzeichnis haben sollen. Der Name der Eintragsebene wird dabei über
+ Option \Option{type} bestimmt. Zusätzlich zu den Optionen dieser Tabelle
+ können auch alle Eigenschaften des Stils als Optionen angegeben werden,
+ indem die Namen der Eigenschaften mit dem Präfix \PValue{toc} ergänzt
werden. So kann der nummerische Wert der Ebene beispielsweise als
- \Option{tocentrylevel} angegeben werden. Näheres zu den Stilen ist
+ \Option{tocentrylevel} angegeben werden. Näheres zu den Stilen ist
\autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} zu
entnehmen.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{tocentry\PName{Stiloption}}{Wert}}{%
- \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
- Weitere Optionen in Abhängigkeit vom via \Option{tocentrystyle} gewählten
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
+ Weitere Optionen in Abhängigkeit vom via \Option{tocentrystyle} gewählten
\PName{Eintragsstil}. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab
- \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. Für die von \Package{tocbasic}
+ \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. Für die von \Package{tocbasic}
vordefinierten Verzeichniseintragsstile finden sich die als
\PName{Stiloption} verwendbaren Attribute in
\autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, ab
\autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}.%
}%
\entry{\OptionVName{type}{Eintragstyp}}{%
- \PName{Eintragstyp} gibt den Typ der Einträge in das entsprechende
- Verzeichnis an. Der Typ wird auch als Basisname für verschiedene Makros
- und gegebenenfalls Umgebungen und Zähler verwendet. Er sollte daher nur
- aus Buchstaben bestehen. Wird diese Option nicht verwendet, so wird für
+ \PName{Eintragstyp} gibt den Typ der Einträge in das entsprechende
+ Verzeichnis an. Der Typ wird auch als Basisname für verschiedene Makros
+ und gegebenenfalls Umgebungen und Zähler verwendet. Er sollte daher nur
+ aus Buchstaben bestehen. Wird diese Option nicht verwendet, so wird für
\PName{Eintragstyp} die \PName{Dateierweiterung} aus dem obligatorischen
Argument verwendet.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{types}{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps}}{%
@@ -2501,12 +2652,12 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
verwendet, beispielsweise um eine Anweisung \Macro{listof\PName{Mehrzahl
des Eintragstyps}} zu definieren. Wird diese Option nicht verwendet,
so wird als \PName{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps} der Wert von
- \Option{type} mit angehängtem »s« verwendet.}%
+ \Option{type} mit angehängtem »s« verwendet.}%
\entry{\OptionVName{unset}{Liste von Eigenschaften}}{%
\ChangedAt{v3.25}{\Package{tocbasic}}%
Die \PName{Liste von Eigenschaften} wird via
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.unsettoc} aufgehoben. Es wird darauf hingewiesen,
- dass für die Angabe mehrerer durch Komma getrennter Eigenschaften die
+ dass für die Angabe mehrerer durch Komma getrennter Eigenschaften die
\PName{Liste von Eigenschaften} in geschweifte Klammern gesetzt werden
muss.%
}%
@@ -2514,7 +2665,7 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
\begin{Example}
Das Beispiel aus \autoref{sec:tocbasic.example} kann mit Hilfe der neuen
- Anweisung deutlich verkürzt werden:
+ Anweisung deutlich verkürzt werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\DeclareNewTOC[%
type=remarkbox,%
@@ -2527,24 +2678,24 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
\setuptoc{lor}{chapteratlist}
\end{lstcode}
Neben den Umgebungen \Environment{remarkbox} und \Environment{remarkbox*}
- sind damit auch der Zähler \Counter{remarkbox}, die zur Ausgabe gehörenden
+ sind damit auch der Zähler \Counter{remarkbox}, die zur Ausgabe gehörenden
Anweisungen \Macro{theremarkbox}, \Macro{remarkboxname} und
- \Macro{remarkboxformat}, die für das Verzeichnis benötigten
+ \Macro{remarkboxformat}, die für das Verzeichnis benötigten
\Macro{listremarkboxname} und \Macro{listofremarkboxes} sowie einige intern
verwendete Anweisungen mit Bezug auf die Dateiendung \File{lor}
- definiert. Soll der Gleitumgebungstyp dem Paket überlassen werden, so kann
- Option \Option{floattype} im Beispiel entfallen. Wird zusätzlich
- die Option \Option{nonfloat} angegeben, wird außerdem eine nicht gleitende
+ definiert. Soll der Gleitumgebungstyp dem Paket überlassen werden, so kann
+ Option \Option{floattype} im Beispiel entfallen. Wird zusätzlich
+ die Option \Option{nonfloat} angegeben, wird außerdem eine nicht gleitende
Umgebung \Environment{remarkbox-} definiert, in der ebenfalls
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\IndexCmd{caption} verwendet werden kann.
- Zum besseren Verständnis zeigt \autoref{tab:tocbasic.comparison} eine
- Gegenüberstellung der Anweisungen und Umgebungen für die neu erstellte
+ Zum besseren Verständnis zeigt \autoref{tab:tocbasic.comparison} eine
+ Gegenüberstellung der Anweisungen und Umgebungen für die neu erstellte
Beispielumgebung \Environment{remarkbox} mit den entsprechenden Befehlen und
- Umgebungen für Abbildungen.%
+ Umgebungen für Abbildungen.%
\begin{table}
\centering
- \caption{Gegenüberstellung von Beispielumgebung \Environment{remarkbox}
+ \caption{Gegenüberstellung von Beispielumgebung \Environment{remarkbox}
und Umgebung \Environment{figure}}
\label{tab:tocbasic.comparison}
\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{l@{\hskip\tabcolsep}l@{\hskip\tabcolsep}>{\raggedright}p{7em}@{\hskip\tabcolsep}X}
@@ -2564,16 +2715,16 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
& Gleitumgebung des jeweiligen Typs.\\[1ex]
\Environment{remarkbox*} & \Environment{figure*}
& \Option{type}, \Option{float}
- & spaltenübergreifende Gleitumgebung des jeweiligen Typs \\[1ex]
+ & spaltenübergreifende Gleitumgebung des jeweiligen Typs \\[1ex]
\Counter{remarkbox} & \Counter{figure}
& \Option{type}, \Option{float}
- & Zähler, der von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} verwendet wird \\[1ex]
+ & Zähler, der von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} verwendet wird \\[1ex]
\Macro{theremarkbox} & \Macro{thefigure}
& \Option{type}, \Option{float}
- & Anweisung zur Ausgabe des jeweiligen Zählers \\[1ex]
+ & Anweisung zur Ausgabe des jeweiligen Zählers \\[1ex]
\Macro{remarkboxformat} & \DescRef{maincls.cmd.figureformat}
& \Option{type}, \Option{float}
- & Anweisung zur Formatierung des jeweiligen Zählers in der Ausgabe von
+ & Anweisung zur Formatierung des jeweiligen Zählers in der Ausgabe von
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\\[1ex]
\Macro{remarkboxname} & \Macro{figurename}
& \Option{type}, \Option{float}, \Option{name}
@@ -2584,19 +2735,19 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
& Anweisung zur Ausgabe des jeweiligen Verzeichnisses \\[1ex]
\Macro{listremarkboxname} & \Macro{listfigurename}
& \Option{type}, \Option{float}, \Option{listname}
- & Überschrift des jeweiligen Verzeichnisses \\[1ex]
+ & Ãœberschrift des jeweiligen Verzeichnisses \\[1ex]
\Macro{fps@remarkbox} & \Macro{fps@figure}
& \Option{type}, \Option{float}, \Option{floattype}
& nummerischer Gleitumge\-bungstyp zwecks
Reihen\-fol\-gen\-erhalts\\[1ex]
\File{lor} & \File{lof}
&
- & Dateiendung der Hilfsdatei für das jeweilige Verzeichnis \\
+ & Dateiendung der Hilfsdatei für das jeweilige Verzeichnis \\
\bottomrule
\end{tabularx}
\end{table}
- Und hier nun eine mögliche Verwendung der Umgebung:
+ Und hier nun eine mögliche Verwendung der Umgebung:
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{remarkbox}
\centering
@@ -2606,7 +2757,7 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
\label{rem:typo1}
\end{remarkbox}
\end{lstcode}
- Ein Ausschnitt aus einer Beispielseite mit dieser Umgebung könnte dann so
+ Ein Ausschnitt aus einer Beispielseite mit dieser Umgebung könnte dann so
aussehen:
\begin{center}\footnotesize
\begin{tabular}
@@ -2629,11 +2780,11 @@ möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle},
Benutzer von
\Package{hyperref}\IndexPackage{hyperref}\important{\Package{hyperref}}
-sollten Option \Option{listname} übrigens immer angeben. Anderenfalls kommt es
+sollten Option \Option{listname} übrigens immer angeben. Anderenfalls kommt es
in der Regel zu einer Fehlermeldung, weil \Package{hyperref} nicht mit dem
\Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} im Namen des Verzeichnisses
-zurecht kommt, das benötigt wird, um den ersten Buchstaben des Wertes von
-\Option{types} in Großbuchstaben zu wandeln.%
+zurecht kommt, das benötigt wird, um den ersten Buchstaben des Wertes von
+\Option{types} in Großbuchstaben zu wandeln.%
\EndIndexGroup
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2643,21 +2794,21 @@ zurecht kommt, das benötigt wird, um den ersten Buchstaben des Wertes von
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE"
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
% LocalWords: Verzeichnisdatei Klonquelle Absatzabstandes Absatzabstand
-% LocalWords: Verzeichniseinträge Verzeichniseintrag Eintragsstile
-% LocalWords: Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge Standardklassen Nummernbreite
+% LocalWords: Verzeichniseinträge Verzeichniseintrag Eintragsstile
+% LocalWords: Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge Standardklassen Nummernbreite
% LocalWords: Standardeigenschaft Eintragsebene Optionenliste expandierbar
% LocalWords: Standardverzeichniseintragsstil Verzeichniseigenschaften
% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintragsstil Verzeichniseintragsstils Eintragsstil
-% LocalWords: Kapitelüberschrift Gliederungsebene expandierbares
+% LocalWords: Kapitelüberschrift Gliederungsebene expandierbares
% LocalWords: Eintragsnummer Initialisierungscode Aktivierungswerte
% LocalWords: Deaktivierungswert Verzeichnistitel Eintragstyp Eintragstyps
-% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintrags Säumniswert Überschriftenanweisung
+% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintrags Säumniswert Überschriftenanweisung
% LocalWords: Eintragstext Dateierweiterung Dateierweiterungen Paketautoren
% LocalWords: Verzeichnisbefehle Verzeichnisdaten Schrifteinstellungen
-% LocalWords: Eintragsebenen Platzierungsoptionen Kapiteleinträge
+% LocalWords: Eintragsebenen Platzierungsoptionen Kapiteleinträge
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex
index 9b071f0edd..abd6a81675 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% typearea-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% typearea-experts.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,138 +40,138 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über typearea in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung Teil II
+% Kapitel über typearea in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung Teil II
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{typearea-experts.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-31 09:49:41 +0100 (Wed, 31 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea for experts)]
-\chapter{Zusätzliche Informationen zum Paket \Package{typearea.sty}}
+\chapter{Zusätzliche Informationen zum Paket \Package{typearea.sty}}
\labelbase{typearea-experts}
\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{typearea} In diesem Kapitel finden Sie
-zusätzliche Informationen zum Paket
+zusätzliche Informationen zum Paket
\hyperref[cha:typearea]{\Package{typearea}}. \iffree{Einige Teile des Kapitels
sind dabei dem \KOMAScript-Buch \cite{book:komascript} vorbehalten. Dies
sollte kein Problem sein, denn der}{Der} normale Anwender, der das Paket
einfach nur verwenden will, wird diese Informationen eher selten
-benötigen. Ein Teil der Informationen richtet sich an Anwender, die
-ausgefallene Aufgaben lösen oder eigene Pakete schreiben wollen, die auf
+benötigen. Ein Teil der Informationen richtet sich an Anwender, die
+ausgefallene Aufgaben lösen oder eigene Pakete schreiben wollen, die auf
\Package{typearea} basieren. Ein weiterer Teil der Informationen behandelt
-Möglichkeiten von \Package{typearea}, die aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu
-den Standardklassen oder früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{} existieren. Die
-Teile, die nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von
+Möglichkeiten von \Package{typearea}, die aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu
+den Standardklassen oder früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{} existieren. Die
+Teile, die nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von
\KOMAScript{} existieren, sind in serifenloser Schrift gesetzt und sollten
nicht mehr verwendet werden.
-\section{Experimentelle Möglichkeiten}
+\section{Experimentelle Möglichkeiten}
\seclabel{experimental}
-In diesem Abschnitt werden experimentelle Möglichkeiten
+In diesem Abschnitt werden experimentelle Möglichkeiten
beschrieben. Experimentell bedeutet in diesem Zusammenhang, dass die Funktion
-nicht garantiert werden kann. Dafür kann es zwei Gründe geben. Zum einen
-steht die endgültige Funktion oder Implementierung eventuell noch nicht
-abschließend fest. Zum anderen hängen die Möglichkeiten teilweise von Interna
-anderer Pakete ab und können deshalb in ihrer Funktion nur so lange garantiert
-werden, wie diese anderen Pakete nicht geändert werden.
+nicht garantiert werden kann. Dafür kann es zwei Gründe geben. Zum einen
+steht die endgültige Funktion oder Implementierung eventuell noch nicht
+abschließend fest. Zum anderen hängen die Möglichkeiten teilweise von Interna
+anderer Pakete ab und können deshalb in ihrer Funktion nur so lange garantiert
+werden, wie diese anderen Pakete nicht geändert werden.
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{usegeometry}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
-Normalerweise kümmert sich \Package{typearea} wenig darum, ob es in irgend
+Normalerweise kümmert sich \Package{typearea} wenig darum, ob es in irgend
einer Konstellation zusammen mit dem Paket
\Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry} (siehe \cite{package:geometry})
verwendet wird. Das bedeutet insbesondere, dass \Package{geometry} nach wie
vor nichts davon mitbekommt, wenn man mit \Package{typearea} beispielsweise
-die Papiergröße ändert -- etwas, das \Package{geometry} selbst gar nicht
+die Papiergröße ändert -- etwas, das \Package{geometry} selbst gar nicht
bietet.
Sobald\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{typearea}} Option \Option{usegeometry}
-gesetzt wird, versucht \Package{typearea}, alle eigenen Optionen für
-\Package{geometry} in dessen Optionen zu übersetzen. Innerhalb des Dokuments
+gesetzt wird, versucht \Package{typearea}, alle eigenen Optionen für
+\Package{geometry} in dessen Optionen zu übersetzen. Innerhalb des Dokuments
wird sogar \Macro{newgeometry} aufgerufen, wenn neue Parameter aktiviert
werden (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.activateareas} im nachfolgenden
-Abschnitt). Da \Package{geometry} keine Änderung der Papiergröße oder
-Papierausrichtung via \Macro{newgeometry} bietet, wird diese bei Bedarf über
-interne Anweisungen und Längen von \Package{geometry} umgesetzt. Getestet ist
-dies für \Package{geometry}~5.3 bis 5.6.
+Abschnitt). Da \Package{geometry} keine Änderung der Papiergröße oder
+Papierausrichtung via \Macro{newgeometry} bietet, wird diese bei Bedarf über
+interne Anweisungen und Längen von \Package{geometry} umgesetzt. Getestet ist
+dies für \Package{geometry}~5.3 bis 5.6.
-Die Option bedeutet übrigens nicht, dass bei Verwendung von \Package{geometry}
-nach einer Papiergrößen- oder Papierausrichtungsänderung mit
+Die Option bedeutet übrigens nicht, dass bei Verwendung von \Package{geometry}
+nach einer Papiergrößen- oder Papierausrichtungsänderung mit
\Package{typearea} das neue Papier direkt optimal genutzt wird. Da
-\Package{geometry} aus Komfortgründen deutlich mehr Optionen für die
-Papiereinstellung bietet, als für die Bestimmung von Textbereich, Rändern,
-Kopf, Fuß etc. benötigt werden -- man spricht von \emph{Überbestimmung} -- und
+\Package{geometry} aus Komfortgründen deutlich mehr Optionen für die
+Papiereinstellung bietet, als für die Bestimmung von Textbereich, Rändern,
+Kopf, Fuß etc. benötigt werden -- man spricht von \emph{Überbestimmung} -- und
gleichzeitig bei neuen Aufrufen von \Macro{newgeometry} fehlende Angaben aus
bereits bekannten ableitet -- man spricht von \emph{Werterhalt} --,
-muss man gegebenenfalls durch vollständige Bestimmung neuer Werte
-bei einem eigenen Aufruf von \Macro{newgeometry} alle gewünschten
-Einstellungen explizit vornehmen. Nichts desto Trotz kann die Berücksichtigung
-von \Package{geometry} durch \Package{typearea} zusätzliche Möglichkeiten
-eröffnen.
+muss man gegebenenfalls durch vollständige Bestimmung neuer Werte
+bei einem eigenen Aufruf von \Macro{newgeometry} alle gewünschten
+Einstellungen explizit vornehmen. Nichts desto Trotz kann die Berücksichtigung
+von \Package{geometry} durch \Package{typearea} zusätzliche Möglichkeiten
+eröffnen.
{\setlength{\emergencystretch}{1em}%
-Von \Package{typearea} werden mit \Option{usegeometry} für \Package{geometry}
+Von \Package{typearea} werden mit \Option{usegeometry} für \Package{geometry}
derzeit die Optionen
\Option{bindingoffset}, \Option{footskip}, \Option{headheight},
\Option{headsep}, \Option{includefoot}, \Option{includehead},
\Option{includemp}, \Option{lmargin}, \Option{marginparsep},
\Option{marginparwidth}, \Option{textheight}, \Option{textwidth}, \Option{top}
-und in der Dokumentpräambel zusätzlich \Option{paperheight} und
+und in der Dokumentpräambel zusätzlich \Option{paperheight} und
\Option{paperwidth} gesetzt.\par}%
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{areasetadvanced}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
- \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe}
+ \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe}
\end{Declaration}
-Normalerweise berücksichtigt \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} Optionen zur
-Bestimmung der Höhe von Kopf und Fuß oder zur Festlegung, ob Randelemente Teil
+Normalerweise berücksichtigt \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} Optionen zur
+Bestimmung der Höhe von Kopf und Fuß oder zur Festlegung, ob Randelemente Teil
des Satzspiegels sein sollen, nicht in gleicher Weise wie
\DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}. Mit Option
\Option{areasetadvanced}\ChangedAt{v3.11}{\Package{typearea}} kann jedoch
-eingestellt werden, dass sich \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} diesbezüglich
+eingestellt werden, dass sich \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} diesbezüglich
mehr wie \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea} verhalten soll. Trotzdem
-unterscheiden sich Einstellungen, die zu gleich großen Textbereichen führen
+unterscheiden sich Einstellungen, die zu gleich großen Textbereichen führen
zwischen den beiden Befehlen weiterhin, da \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}
immer auf ganze Zeile rundet und dabei gegebenenfalls den unteren Rand um bis
-zu eine Zeile kleiner wählt, während \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} den oberen
-und unteren Rand immer im Verhältnis 1:2 einstellt. Die Textbereiche der
-unterschiedlichen Befehle können also bei gleicher Größe vertikal leicht
+zu eine Zeile kleiner wählt, während \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} den oberen
+und unteren Rand immer im Verhältnis 1:2 einstellt. Die Textbereiche der
+unterschiedlichen Befehle können also bei gleicher Größe vertikal leicht
verschoben sein.%
\EndIndexGroup
-\section{Anweisungen für Experten}
+\section{Anweisungen für Experten}
\seclabel{experts}
-In diesem Abschnitt werden Anweisungen beschrieben, die für den normalen
+In diesem Abschnitt werden Anweisungen beschrieben, die für den normalen
Anwender kaum oder gar nicht von Interesse sind. Experten bieten diese
-Anweisungen zusätzliche Möglichkeiten.\iffree{ Da die Beschreibungen für
- Experten gedacht sind, sind sie kürzer gefasst.}{}
+Anweisungen zusätzliche Möglichkeiten.\iffree{ Da die Beschreibungen für
+ Experten gedacht sind, sind sie kürzer gefasst.}{}
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{activateareas}
\end{Declaration}%
-Diese Anweisung wird von \Package{typearea} genutzt, um die Einstellungen für
-Satzspiegel und Ränder in die internen \LaTeX-Längen zu übertragen, wenn der
+Diese Anweisung wird von \Package{typearea} genutzt, um die Einstellungen für
+Satzspiegel und Ränder in die internen \LaTeX-Längen zu übertragen, wenn der
Satzspiegel innerhalb des Dokuments, also nach
\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} neu berechnet wurde. Wurde die Option
-\DescRef{typearea.option.pagesize} verwendet, so wird diese anschließend mit
+\DescRef{typearea.option.pagesize} verwendet, so wird diese anschließend mit
demselben Wert neu aufgerufen. Damit kann beispielsweise innerhalb von
-PDF-Dokumenten die Seitengröße tatsächlich variieren.
-
-Experten können diese Anweisung auch verwenden, wenn Sie aus irgendwelchen
-Gründen Längen wie \Length{textwidth} oder \Length{textheight} innerhalb des
-Dokuments manuell geändert haben. Der Experte ist dabei für eventuell
-notwendige Seitenumbrüche vor oder nach der Verwendung jedoch selbst
-verantwortlich! Darüber hinaus sind alle von \Macro{activateareas}
-durchgeführten Änderungen lokal!%
+PDF-Dokumenten die Seitengröße tatsächlich variieren.
+
+Experten können diese Anweisung auch verwenden, wenn Sie aus irgendwelchen
+Gründen Längen wie \Length{textwidth} oder \Length{textheight} innerhalb des
+Dokuments manuell geändert haben. Der Experte ist dabei für eventuell
+notwendige Seitenumbrüche vor oder nach der Verwendung jedoch selbst
+verantwortlich! Darüber hinaus sind alle von \Macro{activateareas}
+durchgeführten Änderungen lokal!%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -183,10 +183,10 @@ durchgeführten Änderungen lokal!%
\Macro{AfterRestoreareas}\Parameter{Code}
\Macro{AfterRestoreareas*}\Parameter{Code}
\end{Declaration}
-Mit Hilfe von \Macro{storeareas} wird eine \PName{Anweisung} definiert, über
+Mit Hilfe von \Macro{storeareas} wird eine \PName{Anweisung} definiert, über
die alle aktuellen Seitenspiegeleinstellungen wieder hergestellt werden
-können. So ist es möglich, die aktuellen Einstellungen zu speichern,
-anschließend die Einstellungen zu ändern und dann die gespeicherten
+können. So ist es möglich, die aktuellen Einstellungen zu speichern,
+anschließend die Einstellungen zu ändern und dann die gespeicherten
Einstellungen wieder zu reaktivieren.
\begin{Example}
@@ -210,14 +210,14 @@ Einstellungen wieder zu reaktivieren.
Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} ist dabei die Anweisung
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} vor dem Aufruf von
\Macro{meinegespeichertenWerte}, damit die Wiederherstellung erst auf der
- nächsten Seite erfolgt. Bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten sollte bei Änderungen
+ nächsten Seite erfolgt. Bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten sollte bei Änderungen
am Papierformat stattdessen sogar
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage}\IndexCmd{cleardoubleoddpage} oder
-- wenn keine \KOMAScript-Klasse zum Einsatz kommt --
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage}\IndexCmd{cleardoublepage} verwendet
werden.%
- \iffree{\par Außerdem wird \Macro{noindent} verwendet, um den normalen
- Absatzeinzug vor den schwarzen Kästen zu verhindern. Sie würden sonst kein
+ \iffree{\par Außerdem wird \Macro{noindent} verwendet, um den normalen
+ Absatzeinzug vor den schwarzen Kästen zu verhindern. Sie würden sonst kein
korrektes Bild des Seitenlayouts wiedergeben.}{}%
\end{Example}
@@ -229,17 +229,17 @@ nicht innerhalb einer Gruppe aufgerufen werden sollten. Die Definition der
erneuter Verwendung einer bereits definierten \PName{Anweisung} wird eine
entsprechende Fehlermeldung ausgegeben.
-Oftmals\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{typearea}} ist auch erwünscht, vor der
-Wiederherstellung der Einstelllungen per \PName{Anweisung} grundsätzlich
+Oftmals\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{typearea}} ist auch erwünscht, vor der
+Wiederherstellung der Einstelllungen per \PName{Anweisung} grundsätzlich
bestimmte Aktionen wie beispielsweise ein
-\DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} auszuführen. Dies kann man mit Hilfe
+\DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} auszuführen. Dies kann man mit Hilfe
von \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas} und \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*}
erreichen. Entsprechend kann man mit \Macro{AfterRestoreareas} und
\Macro{AfterRestoreareas*} \PName{Code} nach der Wiederherstellung der
-Einstellungen ausführen lassen. Die Formen mit und ohne Stern unterscheiden
-sich insoweit, als die Sternform nur für noch nicht per \Macro{storeareas}
-gespeicherte Einstellungen gilt, während sich die Variante ohne Stern auch auf
-die zukünftige Verwendung bereits früher gespeicherter Einstellungen
+Einstellungen ausführen lassen. Die Formen mit und ohne Stern unterscheiden
+sich insoweit, als die Sternform nur für noch nicht per \Macro{storeareas}
+gespeicherte Einstellungen gilt, während sich die Variante ohne Stern auch auf
+die zukünftige Verwendung bereits früher gespeicherter Einstellungen
auswirkt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -253,19 +253,19 @@ auswirkt.%
\end{Declaration}%
Diese Anweisungen dienen der Verwaltung zweier Haken\Index{Haken} (engl.
\emph{hooks}\Index{hook=\emph{hook}}). Die ersten beiden,
-\Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} und deren Sternform, ermöglichen es dem
+\Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} und deren Sternform, ermöglichen es dem
Experten jedes Mal, nachdem \Package{typearea} eine neue Auf"|teilung in
-Satzspiegel und Ränder berechnet hat, also nach jeder impliziten oder
-expliziten Ausführung von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}, \PName{Anweisungen}
-ausführen zu lassen. Entsprechendes leisten
+Satzspiegel und Ränder berechnet hat, also nach jeder impliziten oder
+expliziten Ausführung von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}, \PName{Anweisungen}
+ausführen zu lassen. Entsprechendes leisten
\Macro{AfterSettingArea}\ChangedAt{v3.11}{\Package{typearea}} und dessen
-Stern-Form für die Ausführung von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset}. Die
-Normalformen arbeiten dabei global, während die Änderungen durch die
+Stern-Form für die Ausführung von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset}. Die
+Normalformen arbeiten dabei global, während die Änderungen durch die
Sternformen nur lokal wirksam sind. Die \PName{Anweisungen} werden jeweils
-unmittelbar vor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.activateareas} ausgeführt.\iffree{}{
- In \autoref{cha:modernletters} wird für die \emph{Letter-Class-Option}
+unmittelbar vor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.activateareas} ausgeführt.\iffree{}{
+ In \autoref{cha:modernletters} wird für die \emph{Letter-Class-Option}
\File{asymTypB.lco} davon Gebrauch gemacht, um die Randverteilung zu
- ändern.}%
+ ändern.}%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ unmittelbar vor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.activateareas} ausgeführt.\iffree{}{
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex
index 0ff9dd4573..fd8019b904 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/ngerman/typearea.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% typearea.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% typearea.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -40,14 +40,14 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über typearea in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
+% Kapitel über typearea in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ======================================================================
\KOMAProvidesFile{typearea.tex}
- [$Date: 2018-01-31 13:01:01 +0100 (Wed, 31 Jan 2018) $
+ [$Date: 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea)]
\chapter{Satzspiegelberechnung mit \Package{typearea.sty}}
\labelbase{typearea}
@@ -55,23 +55,23 @@
\BeginIndexGroup%
\BeginIndex{Package}{typearea}%
Viele \LaTeX-Klassen\iffree{, darunter auch die Standardklassen,}{} bieten dem
-Anwender eine weitgehend feste Auf"|teilung von Rändern und Textbereich. Bei
+Anwender eine weitgehend feste Auf"|teilung von Rändern und Textbereich. Bei
den Standardklassen ist die konkrete Auf"|teilung in engen Grenzen von der
-gewählten Schriftgröße abhängig. Darüber hinaus gibt es Pakete wie
+gewählten Schriftgröße abhängig. Darüber hinaus gibt es Pakete wie
\Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry} (siehe \cite{package:geometry}), die
-dem Anwender die volle Kontrolle, aber auch die Verantwortung für die
-Einstellungen des Textbereichs und der Ränder überlassen.
+dem Anwender die volle Kontrolle, aber auch die Verantwortung für die
+Einstellungen des Textbereichs und der Ränder überlassen.
\KOMAScript{} geht mit dem Paket \Package{typearea} einen etwas anderen
Weg. Hier werden basierend auf einer in der Typografie etablierten
-Konstruktion Einstellmöglichkeiten und Automatismen geboten, die es dem
+Konstruktion Einstellmöglichkeiten und Automatismen geboten, die es dem
Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
\iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung!!!
Es wird darauf hingewiesen, dass sich \Package{typearea} des Pakets
\Package{scrbase} bedient. Letzteres Paket ist im Expertenteil
\iffree{dieser Anleitung}{dieses Buches} in \autoref{cha:scrbase} ab
- \autopageref{cha:scrbase} erklärt.
+ \autopageref{cha:scrbase} erklärt.
Die Mehrzahl der dort dokumentierten Anweisungen richtet sich jedoch nicht
an Anwender, sondern an Klassen- und Paketautoren.%
\fi
@@ -81,17 +81,17 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
\begin{Explain}
Betrachtet man eine einzelne Seite eines Buches oder eines anderen
- Druckwerkes, so besteht diese auf den ersten Blick aus den Rändern%
+ Druckwerkes, so besteht diese auf den ersten Blick aus den Rändern%
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
- \footnote{Der Autor und der Lektor haben an dieser Stelle überlegt, ob eine
- Seite nicht nur einen umlaufenden Rand hat und daher von »dem Rand« die
- Rede sein müsste. Da jedoch \LaTeX{} diesen einen Rand logisch in mehrere
- Ränder unterteilt, die getrennt bestimmt werden, ist hier auch von »den
- Rändern« die Rede.}%
+ \footnote{Der Autor und der Lektor haben an dieser Stelle überlegt, ob eine
+ Seite nicht nur einen umlaufenden Rand hat und daher von »dem Rand« die
+ Rede sein müsste. Da jedoch \LaTeX{} diesen einen Rand logisch in mehrere
+ Ränder unterteilt, die getrennt bestimmt werden, ist hier auch von »den
+ Rändern« die Rede.}%
\fi%
- , einem Kopfbereich, einem Textkörper und einem Fußbereich. Genauer
- betrachtet, kommt noch ein Abstand zwischen Kopfbereich und Textkörper sowie
- zwischen Textkörper und Fußbereich hinzu. Der Textkörper heißt in der
+ , einem Kopfbereich, einem Textkörper und einem Fußbereich. Genauer
+ betrachtet, kommt noch ein Abstand zwischen Kopfbereich und Textkörper sowie
+ zwischen Textkörper und Fußbereich hinzu. Der Textkörper heißt in der
Fachsprache der Typografen und Setzer \emph{Satzspiegel}. Die Auf"|teilung
dieser Bereiche sowie ihre Anordnung zueinander und auf dem Papier nennen
wir \emph{Satzspiegeldefinition} oder
@@ -99,31 +99,31 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
In der Literatur werden verschiedene Algorithmen und heuristische Verfahren
zur Konstruktion eines guten Satzspiegels vorgeschlagen und diskutiert%
- \iffree{ \cite{DANTE:TK0402:MJK}}{. Einen Überblick über einige Möglichkeiten
- und der dabei angenommenen Grundsätze gibt
+ \iffree{ \cite{DANTE:TK0402:MJK}}{. Einen Überblick über einige Möglichkeiten
+ und der dabei angenommenen Grundsätze gibt
\autoref{cha:typeareaconstruction}}%
- . Häufig findet man ein Verfahren, das mit verschiedenen Diagonalen
- und deren Schnittpunkten arbeitet. Das gewünschte Ergebnis ist, dass das
- Seitenverhältnis des Satzspiegels dem Seitenverhältnis \emph{der Seite}
- entspricht. Bei einem einseitigen\Index{einseitig} Dokument sollen außerdem
- der linke und der rechte Rand gleich breit sein, während der obere zum
- unteren Rand im Verhältnis 1:2 stehen sollte. Bei einem
+ . Häufig findet man ein Verfahren, das mit verschiedenen Diagonalen
+ und deren Schnittpunkten arbeitet. Das gewünschte Ergebnis ist, dass das
+ Seitenverhältnis des Satzspiegels dem Seitenverhältnis \emph{der Seite}
+ entspricht. Bei einem einseitigen\Index{einseitig} Dokument sollen außerdem
+ der linke und der rechte Rand gleich breit sein, während der obere zum
+ unteren Rand im Verhältnis 1:2 stehen sollte. Bei einem
doppelseitigen\Index{doppelseitig} Dokument, beispielsweise einem Buch, ist
- hingegen zu beachten, dass der gesamte innere Rand genauso groß sein sollte
- wie jeder der beiden äußeren Ränder. Eine einzelne Seite steuert dabei
- jeweils nur die Hälfte des inneren Randes bei.
+ hingegen zu beachten, dass der gesamte innere Rand genauso groß sein sollte
+ wie jeder der beiden äußeren Ränder. Eine einzelne Seite steuert dabei
+ jeweils nur die Hälfte des inneren Randes bei.
- Im vorherigen Absatz wurde \emph{die Seite} erwähnt und
- hervorgehoben. Irrtümlich wird oftmals angenommen, das Format der Seite wäre
+ Im vorherigen Absatz wurde \emph{die Seite} erwähnt und
+ hervorgehoben. Irrtümlich wird oftmals angenommen, das Format der Seite wäre
mit dem Format des Papiers gleichzusetzen.\Index[indexmain]{Seiten>Format}
\Index[indexmain]{Papier>Format} Betrachtet man jedoch ein gebundenes
Druckerzeugnis, so ist zu erkennen, dass ein Teil des Papiers in der
Bindung\Index[indexmain]{Bindung} verschwindet und nicht mehr als Seite zu
- sehen ist. Für den Satzspiegel ist jedoch nicht entscheidend, welches Format
- das Papier hat, sondern, was der Leser für einen Eindruck vom Format der
+ sehen ist. Für den Satzspiegel ist jedoch nicht entscheidend, welches Format
+ das Papier hat, sondern, was der Leser für einen Eindruck vom Format der
Seite bekommt. Damit ist klar, dass bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels der
Teil, der durch die Bindung versteckt wird, aus dem Papierformat
- herausgerechnet und dann zum inneren Rand hinzugefügt werden muss. Wir
+ herausgerechnet und dann zum inneren Rand hinzugefügt werden muss. Wir
nennen diesen Teil
\emph{Bindekorrektur}.\Index[indexmain]{Bindekorrektur}%
\textnote{Bindekorrektur}
@@ -131,68 +131,68 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
\emph{Bundstegs}\Index{Bundsteg}, nicht jedoch des sichtbaren
inneren Randes.
- Die Bindekorrektur ist vom jeweiligen Produktionsvorgang abhängig und kann
+ Die Bindekorrektur ist vom jeweiligen Produktionsvorgang abhängig und kann
nicht allgemein festgelegt werden. Es handelt sich dabei also um einen
- Parameter, der für jeden Produktionsvorgang neu festzulegen ist. Im
+ Parameter, der für jeden Produktionsvorgang neu festzulegen ist. Im
professionellen Bereich spielt dieser Wert nur eine geringe Rolle, da
- ohnehin auf größere Papierbögen gedruckt und entsprechend geschnitten
+ ohnehin auf größere Papierbögen gedruckt und entsprechend geschnitten
wird. Beim Schneiden wird dann wiederum sichergestellt, dass obige
- Verhältnisse für die sichtbare Doppelseite eingehalten sind.
+ Verhältnisse für die sichtbare Doppelseite eingehalten sind.
Wir wissen nun also, wie die einzelnen Teile zueinander stehen. Wir wissen
aber noch nicht, wie breit und hoch der Satzspiegel ist. Kennen wir eines
- dieser beiden Maße, so ergeben sich zusammen mit dem Papierformat und dem
- Seitenformat oder der Bindekorrektur alle anderen Maße durch Lösung mehrerer
+ dieser beiden Maße, so ergeben sich zusammen mit dem Papierformat und dem
+ Seitenformat oder der Bindekorrektur alle anderen Maße durch Lösung mehrerer
mathematischer Gleichungen:
% Umbruchoptiomierung!!!
\iffree{%
\begin{align*}
- \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe}\Index{Satzspiegel} : \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} &=
- \Var{Seitenhöhe}\Index{Seite} : \Var{Seitenbreite} \\
+ \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe}\Index{Satzspiegel} : \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} &=
+ \Var{Seitenhöhe}\Index{Seite} : \Var{Seitenbreite} \\
\Var{oberer~Rand}\Index{Rand} : \Var{unterer~Rand} &=
\text{1} : \text{2} \\
\Var{linker~Rand} : \Var{rechter~Rand} &= \text{1} : \text{1} \\
%
- \Var{innerer~Randanteil} : \Var{äußerer~Rand} &= \text{1} : \text{2} \\
+ \Var{innerer~Randanteil} : \Var{äußerer~Rand} &= \text{1} : \text{2} \\
%
\Var{Seitenbreite} &=
\Var{Papierbreite}\Index{Papier} -
\Var{Bindekorrektur}\Index{Bindekorrektur}\\
%
\Var{oberer~Rand} + \Var{unterer~Rand} &=
- \Var{Seitenhöhe} - \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe} \\
+ \Var{Seitenhöhe} - \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe} \\
%
\Var{linker~Rand} + \Var{rechter Rand} &=
\Var{Seitenbreite} - \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} \\
%
- \Var{innerer Randanteil} + \Var{äußerer Rand} &=
+ \Var{innerer Randanteil} + \Var{äußerer Rand} &=
\Var{Seitenbreite} - \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} \\
%
\Var{innerer~Randanteil} + \Var{Bindekorrektur} &=
\Var{Bundsteg}\index{Bundsteg}
\end{align*}
}{%
- % Umbruchkorrektur: Abstände verändert!
+ % Umbruchkorrektur: Abstände verändert!
\begin{prepareformargin}
\vskip -.5\baselineskip plus .25\baselineskip
\begin{align*}
- \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe}\Index{Satzspiegel} : \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} &=
- \Var{Seitenhöhe}\Index{Seite} : \Var{Seitenbreite} \\
+ \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe}\Index{Satzspiegel} : \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} &=
+ \Var{Seitenhöhe}\Index{Seite} : \Var{Seitenbreite} \\
\Var{oberer~Rand}\Index{Rand} : \Var{unterer~Rand} &=
\text{1} : \text{2} \\
\Var{linker~Rand} : \Var{rechter~Rand} &= \text{1} : \text{1} \\
- \Var{innerer~Randanteil} : \Var{äußerer~Rand} &=
+ \Var{innerer~Randanteil} : \Var{äußerer~Rand} &=
\text{1} : \text{2}\\
\Var{Seitenbreite} &=
\Var{Papierbreite}\Index{Papier} -
\Var{Bindekorrektur}\Index{Bindekorrektur} \\
\Var{oberer~Rand} + \Var{unterer~Rand} &=
- \Var{Seitenhöhe} - \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe} \\
+ \Var{Seitenhöhe} - \Var{Satzspiegelhöhe} \\
%
\Var{linker~Rand} + \Var{rechter Rand} &=
\Var{Seitenbreite} - \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} \\
%
- \Var{innerer Randanteil} + \Var{äußerer Rand} &=
+ \Var{innerer Randanteil} + \Var{äußerer Rand} &=
\Var{Seitenbreite} - \Var{Satzspiegelbreite} \\
%
% \end{align*}
@@ -207,98 +207,98 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
}%
\Index[indexmain]{Rand}%
Dabei gibt es \Var{linker~Rand} und \Var{rechter~Rand} nur im einseitigen
- Druck. Entsprechend gibt es \Var{innerer~Randanteil} und \Var{äußerer~Rand}
+ Druck. Entsprechend gibt es \Var{innerer~Randanteil} und \Var{äußerer~Rand}
nur im doppelseitigen Druck.
In den Gleichungen wird mit \Var{innerer~Randanteil} gearbeitet, weil der
- komplette innere Rand ein Element der vollständigen Doppelseite ist. Zu
- einer Seite gehört also nur die Hälfte des inneren Randes:
+ komplette innere Rand ein Element der vollständigen Doppelseite ist. Zu
+ einer Seite gehört also nur die Hälfte des inneren Randes:
\Var{innerer~Randanteil}.
Die Frage nach der Breite des Satzspiegels wird in der Literatur
ebenfalls diskutiert. Die optimale Satzspiegelbreite ist von
- verschiedenen Faktoren abhängig:
+ verschiedenen Faktoren abhängig:
\iffree{\begin{itemize}}{\begin{itemize}[% Umbuchkorrektur
topsep=.5\baselineskip plus .25\baselineskip minus .33\baselineskip,
partopsep=.5\baselineskip plus .25\baselineskip minus .33\baselineskip,
itemsep=.33\baselineskip plus .25\baselineskip minus .25\baselineskip,
parsep=0pt
]}
- \item Größe, Laufweite und Art der verwendeten Schrift,
+ \item Größe, Laufweite und Art der verwendeten Schrift,
\item verwendeter Durchschuss,
- \item Länge der Worte,
- \item verfügbarer Platz.
+ \item Länge der Worte,
+ \item verfügbarer Platz.
\end{itemize}
Der Einfluss der Schrift wird deutlich, wenn man sich bewusst macht,
wozu Serifen dienen. Serifen\Index[indexmain]{Serifen} sind kleine
Striche an den Linienenden der Buchstaben. Buchstaben, die mit
vertikalen Linien auf die Grundlinie der Textzeile treffen,
- lösen diese eher auf, als dass sie das Auge auf der Linie halten.
+ lösen diese eher auf, als dass sie das Auge auf der Linie halten.
Genau bei diesen Buchstaben liegen die Serifen horizontal auf
- der Grundlinie und verstärken damit die Zeilenwirkung der Schrift.
+ der Grundlinie und verstärken damit die Zeilenwirkung der Schrift.
Das Auge kann der Textzeile nicht nur beim Lesen der Worte, sondern
- insbesondere auch beim schnellen Zurückspringen an den Anfang der
- nächsten Zeile besser folgen. Damit darf die Zeile bei einer Schrift
- mit Serifen genau genommen länger sein als bei einer Schrift ohne Serifen.
+ insbesondere auch beim schnellen Zurückspringen an den Anfang der
+ nächsten Zeile besser folgen. Damit darf die Zeile bei einer Schrift
+ mit Serifen genau genommen länger sein als bei einer Schrift ohne Serifen.
Unter dem
Durchschuss\Index[indexmain]{Durchschuss}\textnote{Durchschuss}
versteht man den Abstand zwischen Textzeilen. Bei \LaTeX{} ist ein
- Durchschuss von etwa 20\,\% der Schriftgröße voreingestellt. Mit Befehlen
+ Durchschuss von etwa 20\,\% der Schriftgröße voreingestellt. Mit Befehlen
wie \Macro{linespread}\IndexCmd{linespread} oder besser mit Hilfe von
Paketen wie \Package{setspace}\IndexPackage{setspace} (siehe
- \cite{package:setspace}) kann der Durchschuss verändert werden. Ein großer
+ \cite{package:setspace}) kann der Durchschuss verändert werden. Ein großer
Durchschuss erleichtert dem Auge die Verfolgung einer Zeile. Bei sehr
- großem Durchschuss wird das Lesen aber dadurch gestört, dass das Auge
- zwischen den Zeilen weite Wege zurücklegen muss. Daneben wird sich der
+ großem Durchschuss wird das Lesen aber dadurch gestört, dass das Auge
+ zwischen den Zeilen weite Wege zurücklegen muss. Daneben wird sich der
Leser des entstehenden Streifeneffekts sehr deutlich und unangenehm
- bewusst. Der Graueindruck der Seite ist in diesem Fall gestört. Dennoch
- dürfen bei großem Durchschuss die Zeilen länger sein.
+ bewusst. Der Graueindruck der Seite ist in diesem Fall gestört. Dennoch
+ dürfen bei großem Durchschuss die Zeilen länger sein.
- Auf der Suche nach konkreten Werten für gute
- Zeilenlängen\Index[indexmain]{Zeilenlaenge=Zeilenlänge} findet man in der
+ Auf der Suche nach konkreten Werten für gute
+ Zeilenlängen\Index[indexmain]{Zeilenlaenge=Zeilenlänge} findet man in der
Literatur je nach Autor unterschiedliche Angaben. Teilweise ist dies auch in
- der Muttersprache des Autors begründet. Das Auge springt nämlich
- üblicherweise von Wort zu Wort, wobei kurze Wörter diese Aufgabe
- erleichtern. Über alle Sprachen und Schriftarten hinweg kann man sagen, dass
- eine Zeilenlänge von 60 bis 70 Zeichen, einschließlich Leer- und
- Satzzeichen, einen brauchbaren Kompromiss darstellt. Ein gut gewählter
+ der Muttersprache des Autors begründet. Das Auge springt nämlich
+ üblicherweise von Wort zu Wort, wobei kurze Wörter diese Aufgabe
+ erleichtern. Ãœber alle Sprachen und Schriftarten hinweg kann man sagen, dass
+ eine Zeilenlänge von 60 bis 70 Zeichen, einschließlich Leer- und
+ Satzzeichen, einen brauchbaren Kompromiss darstellt. Ein gut gewählter
Durchschuss wird dabei vorausgesetzt. Bei den Voreinstellungen von \LaTeX{}
- braucht man sich über Letzteres normalerweise keine Sorgen zu
- machen. Größere Zeilenlängen darf man nur Gewohnheitslesern zumuten, die
- täglich viele Stunden lesend zubringen. Aber auch dann sind Zeilenlängen
+ braucht man sich über Letzteres normalerweise keine Sorgen zu
+ machen. Größere Zeilenlängen darf man nur Gewohnheitslesern zumuten, die
+ täglich viele Stunden lesend zubringen. Aber auch dann sind Zeilenlängen
jenseits von 80 Zeichen unzumutbar. In jedem Fall ist dann der Durchschuss
- anzupassen. 5\,\% bis 10\,\% zusätzlich sind dabei als Faustregel
+ anzupassen. 5\,\% bis 10\,\% zusätzlich sind dabei als Faustregel
empfehlenswert. Bei Schriften wie Palatino, die bereits bei einer normalen
- Zeilenlänge nach 5\,\% mehr Durchschuss verlangt, können es auch mehr sein.
+ Zeilenlänge nach 5\,\% mehr Durchschuss verlangt, können es auch mehr sein.
Bevor wir uns an die konkrete Konstruktion machen, fehlen jetzt nur noch
Kleinigkeiten, die man wissen sollte. \LaTeX{} beginnt die erste Zeile des
Textbereichs einer Seite nicht am oberen Rand des Textbereichs, sondern
setzt die Grundlinie der Zeile mit einem definierten Mindestabstand zum
- oberen Rand des Textbereichs. Des Weiteren verfügt \LaTeX{} über die beiden
+ oberen Rand des Textbereichs. Des Weiteren verfügt \LaTeX{} über die beiden
Befehle \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedbottom}\IndexCmd{raggedbottom} und
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom}. Der erste dieser
Befehle legt fest, dass die letzte Zeile einer jeden Seite dort liegen soll,
- wo sie eben zu liegen kommt. Das kann dazu führen, dass sich die Position
- der letzten Zeile von Seite zu Seite vertikal um nahezu eine Zeile verändern
- kann -- bei Zusammentreffen des Seitenendes mit Überschriften, Abbildungen,
- Tabellen oder Ähnlichem auch mehr. Im doppelseitigen Druck ist das in der
- Regel unerwünscht. Mit dem zweiten Befehl,
+ wo sie eben zu liegen kommt. Das kann dazu führen, dass sich die Position
+ der letzten Zeile von Seite zu Seite vertikal um nahezu eine Zeile verändern
+ kann -- bei Zusammentreffen des Seitenendes mit Ãœberschriften, Abbildungen,
+ Tabellen oder Ähnlichem auch mehr. Im doppelseitigen Druck ist das in der
+ Regel unerwünscht. Mit dem zweiten Befehl,
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}, wird hingegen festgelegt, dass die letzte
Zeile immer am unteren Rand des Textbereichs zu liegen kommt. Um diesen
vertikalen Ausgleich zu erreichen, muss \LaTeX{} gegebenenfalls dehnbare
- vertikale Abstände über das erlaubte Maß hinaus strecken. Ein solcher
+ vertikale Abstände über das erlaubte Maß hinaus strecken. Ein solcher
Abstand ist beispielsweise der Absatzabstand. Dies gilt in der Regel auch,
wenn man gar keinen Absatzabstand verwendet. Um nicht bereits auf normalen
- Seiten, auf denen der Absatzabstand das einzige dehnbare vertikale Maß
- darstellt, eine Dehnung zu erzwingen, sollte die Höhe des Textbereichs ein
- Vielfaches der Textzeilenhöhe zuzüglich des Abstandes der ersten Zeile vom
+ Seiten, auf denen der Absatzabstand das einzige dehnbare vertikale Maß
+ darstellt, eine Dehnung zu erzwingen, sollte die Höhe des Textbereichs ein
+ Vielfaches der Textzeilenhöhe zuzüglich des Abstandes der ersten Zeile vom
oberen Rand des Textbereichs sein.
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrektur
Damit sind alle Grundlagen der Satzspiegelberechnung, die bei
- {\KOMAScript} eine Rolle spielen, erklärt.
+ {\KOMAScript} eine Rolle spielen, erklärt.
\else
Soweit die Grundlagen.
\fi
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
Es folgen die beiden von \KOMAScript{} angebotenen Konstruktionen.
\else
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrektur
- Wir können also mit den konkreten Konstruktionen beginnen.
+ Wir können also mit den konkreten Konstruktionen beginnen.
\else
In den folgenden beiden Abschnitten werden die von {\KOMAScript} angebotenen
Konstruktionen im Detail vorgestellt.
@@ -320,28 +320,28 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
\begin{Explain}
Der einfachste Weg, um zu erreichen, dass der Textbereich dasselbe
- Seitenverhältnis aufweist wie die Seite, ist folgender:%
+ Seitenverhältnis aufweist wie die Seite, ist folgender:%
\begin{itemize}
- \item Zunächst zieht man an der Innenseite des Papiers den Teil
- \Var{BCOR}\important{\Var{BCOR}}, der für die
- Bindekorrektur\Index{Bindekorrektur} benötigt wird, ab und teilt die
+ \item Zunächst zieht man an der Innenseite des Papiers den Teil
+ \Var{BCOR}\important{\Var{BCOR}}, der für die
+ Bindekorrektur\Index{Bindekorrektur} benötigt wird, ab und teilt die
restliche Seite vertikal in eine Anzahl \Var{DIV} gleich hoher Streifen.
\item Dann teilt man die Seite horizontal in die gleiche Anzahl
\Var{DIV}\important{\Var{DIV}} gleich breiter Streifen.
\item Nun verwendet man den obersten horizontalen Streifen als oberen und
die beiden untersten horizontalen Streifen als unteren Rand. Im
- doppelseitigen Druck verwendet man außerdem den innersten vertikalen
- Streifen als inneren und die beiden äußersten vertikalen Streifen als
- äußeren Rand.
+ doppelseitigen Druck verwendet man außerdem den innersten vertikalen
+ Streifen als inneren und die beiden äußersten vertikalen Streifen als
+ äußeren Rand.
\item Zum inneren Rand gibt man dann noch \Var{BCOR} hinzu.
\end{itemize}
- Was nun innerhalb der Seite noch übrig bleibt, ist der
- Textbereich.\Index{Text>Bereich} Die Breite bzw. Höhe der Ränder und des
+ Was nun innerhalb der Seite noch übrig bleibt, ist der
+ Textbereich.\Index{Text>Bereich} Die Breite bzw. Höhe der Ränder und des
Textbereichs resultiert damit automatisch aus der Anzahl \Var{DIV} der
- Streifen. Da für die Ränder insgesamt jeweils drei Streifen benötigt werden,
- muss \Var{DIV} zwingend größer als drei sein. Damit der Satzspiegel
+ Streifen. Da für die Ränder insgesamt jeweils drei Streifen benötigt werden,
+ muss \Var{DIV} zwingend größer als drei sein. Damit der Satzspiegel
horizontal und vertikal jeweils mindestens doppelt so viel Platz wie die
- Ränder einnimmt, sollte \Var{DIV} sogar mindestens 9 betragen. Mit diesem
+ Ränder einnimmt, sollte \Var{DIV} sogar mindestens 9 betragen. Mit diesem
Wert ist die Konstruktion auch als \emph{klassische Neunerteilung} bekannt
(siehe \autoref{fig:typearea.nineparts}).
@@ -351,12 +351,12 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
\setcapindent{0pt}%
\setlength{\columnsep}{.6em}%
\begin{captionbeside}[{%
- Doppelseite mit der Rasterkonstruktion für die klassische
+ Doppelseite mit der Rasterkonstruktion für die klassische
Neunerteilung nach Abzug einer Bindekorrektur%
}]{%
\label{fig:typearea.nineparts}%
\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
- Doppelseite mit der Rasterkonstruktion für die klassische
+ Doppelseite mit der Rasterkonstruktion für die klassische
Neunerteilung nach Abzug einer Bindekorrektur%
}
[l]
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
\rotatebox[origin=c]{-90}{Bindekorrektur}}}
\put(44,66){\color{white}\makebox(132,198)[c]{Satzspiegel links}}
\put(244,66){\color{white}\makebox(132,198)[c]{Satzspiegel rechts}}
- % Kästchennummern
+ % Kästchennummern
\makeatletter
\multiput(1,27)(0,33){9}{\footnotesize\makebox(0,0)[l]{\the\@multicnt}}
\multiput(177,291)(-22,0){9}{%
@@ -397,35 +397,35 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
\makeatother
\end{picture}
\end{captionbeside}
-% \caption{Doppelseite mit der Rasterkonstruktion für die klassische
+% \caption{Doppelseite mit der Rasterkonstruktion für die klassische
% Neunerteilung nach Abzug einer Bindekorrektur}
% \label{fig:typearea.nineparts}
\end{figure}
Bei {\KOMAScript} ist diese Art der Konstruktion im Paket \Package{typearea}
realisiert, wobei der untere Rand weniger als eine Textzeile kleiner
- ausfallen kann, um die im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnte Nebenbedingung für
- die Satzspiegelhöhe einzuhalten und damit die dort erwähnte Problematik in
- Bezug auf \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom} zu mindern. Dabei sind für
- A4-Papier je nach Schriftgröße unterschiedliche Werte für \Var{DIV}
+ ausfallen kann, um die im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnte Nebenbedingung für
+ die Satzspiegelhöhe einzuhalten und damit die dort erwähnte Problematik in
+ Bezug auf \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom} zu mindern. Dabei sind für
+ A4-Papier je nach Schriftgröße unterschiedliche Werte für \Var{DIV}
voreingestellt, die \autoref{tab:typearea.div},
\autopageref{tab:typearea.div} zu entnehmen sind. Bei Verzicht auf
Bindekorrektur, wenn also \Var{BCOR} = 0\Unit{pt} gilt, ergeben sich in etwa
- die Satzspiegelmaße aus \autoref{tab:typearea.typearea},
+ die Satzspiegelmaße aus \autoref{tab:typearea.typearea},
\autopageref{tab:typearea.typearea}.
Neben den voreingestellten Werten kann man \Var{BCOR} und \Var{DIV} direkt
beim Laden des Pakets als Option angeben (siehe
\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea} ab
- \autopageref{sec:typearea.typearea}). Zusätzlich existiert ein Befehl, mit
+ \autopageref{sec:typearea.typearea}). Zusätzlich existiert ein Befehl, mit
dem man einen Satzspiegel explizit berechnen kann und dem man die beiden
- Werte als Parameter übergibt (\iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung!!!!
+ Werte als Parameter übergibt (\iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung!!!!
siehe ebenfalls
\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \fi\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}).
- Das \Package{typearea}-Paket bietet außerdem die Möglichkeit, den optimalen
+ Das \Package{typearea}-Paket bietet außerdem die Möglichkeit, den optimalen
\Var{DIV}-Wert automatisch zu bestimmen. Dieser ist von der Schrift und dem
- Durchschuss abhängig, der zum Zeitpunkt der Satzspiegelberechnung
+ Durchschuss abhängig, der zum Zeitpunkt der Satzspiegelberechnung
eingestellt ist%
\iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung!!!!
. Siehe hierzu ebenfalls \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \else\
@@ -440,16 +440,16 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
Neben der zuvor beschriebenen Satzspiegelkonstruktion\Index{Satzspiegel}
gibt es in der Literatur noch eine eher klassische oder sogar
mittelalterliche Methode. Bei diesem Verfahren will man die gleichen Werte
- nicht nur in Form des Seitenverhältnisses wiederfinden; man geht außerdem
- davon aus, dass das Optimum dann erreicht wird, wenn die Höhe des
+ nicht nur in Form des Seitenverhältnisses wiederfinden; man geht außerdem
+ davon aus, dass das Optimum dann erreicht wird, wenn die Höhe des
Textbereichs der Breite der Seite entspricht. Das genaue Verfahren ist
beispielsweise in \cite{JTsch87} nachzulesen.
- Als Nachteil dieses spätmittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanons ergibt sich, dass
- die Breite des Textbereichs nicht mehr von der Schriftart abhängt. Es wird
- also nicht mehr der zur Schrift passende Textbereich gewählt, stattdessen
+ Als Nachteil dieses spätmittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanons ergibt sich, dass
+ die Breite des Textbereichs nicht mehr von der Schriftart abhängt. Es wird
+ also nicht mehr der zur Schrift passende Textbereich gewählt, stattdessen
muss der Autor oder Setzer unbedingt die zum Textbereich passende Schrift
- wählen.
+ wählen.
%
\iftrue
% Umbruchkorrekturtext
@@ -460,36 +460,36 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen.
dass durch Auswahl eines ausgezeichneten -- normalerweise unsinnigen --
\Var{DIV}-Wertes oder einer speziellen, symbolischen Angabe derjenige
\Var{DIV}-Wert ermittelt wird, bei dem der resultierende Satzspiegel dem
- spätmittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon am nächsten kommt. Es wird also
- wiederum auf die Satzspiegelkonstruktion durch Teilung zurückgegriffen.
+ spätmittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon am nächsten kommt. Es wird also
+ wiederum auf die Satzspiegelkonstruktion durch Teilung zurückgegriffen.
%
\iffalse
% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Bei Wahl einer guten Schrift stimmt dieses Ergebnis nicht selten mit der
- Suche nach dem optimalen \Var{DIV}-Wert überein. Siehe hierzu ebenfalls
+ Suche nach dem optimalen \Var{DIV}-Wert überein. Siehe hierzu ebenfalls
\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}.
%
\fi
\end{Explain}
-\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
+\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl}
-\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
+\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript}
\section{Einstellung des Satzspiegels und der \texorpdfstring{Seitenauf"|teilung}{Seitenaufteilung}}
\seclabel{typearea}
Das Paket \Package{typearea} bietet zwei unterschiedliche
Benutzerschnittstellen, um auf die Satzspiegelkonstruktion Einfluss zu
-nehmen. Die wichtigste Möglichkeit ist die Angabe von Optionen. Wie
-im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnt, können die Optionen dabei auf
+nehmen. Die wichtigste Möglichkeit ist die Angabe von Optionen. Wie
+im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnt, können die Optionen dabei auf
unterschiedlichen Wegen gesetzt werden.
In\textnote{Hinweis!} diesem Abschnitt wird die Klasse \Class{protokol}
verwendet werden. Es handelt sich dabei nicht um eine \KOMAScript-Klasse,
sondern um eine hypothetische Klasse. Diese\iffree{ Anleitung}{s Buch} geht
-von dem Idealfall aus, dass für jede Aufgabe eine dafür passende Klasse zur
-Verfügung steht.
+von dem Idealfall aus, dass für jede Aufgabe eine dafür passende Klasse zur
+Verfügung steht.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -501,22 +501,22 @@ den absoluten Wert der
Bindekorrektur\Index{Bindekorrektur}\textnote{Bindekorrektur} an, also die
Breite des Bereichs, der durch die Bindung von der Papierbreite verloren
geht. Dieser Wert wird in der Satzspiegelkonstruktion automatisch
-berücksichtigt und bei der Ausgabe wieder dem inneren beziehungsweise linken
-Rand zugeschlagen. Als \PName{Korrektur} können Sie jede von \TeX{}
-verstandene Maßeinheit angeben.
+berücksichtigt und bei der Ausgabe wieder dem inneren beziehungsweise linken
+Rand zugeschlagen. Als \PName{Korrektur} können Sie jede von \TeX{}
+verstandene Maßeinheit angeben.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, Sie erstellen einen Finanzbericht. Das Ganze soll
- einseitig in A4 gedruckt und anschließend in eine Klemmmappe
+ einseitig in A4 gedruckt und anschließend in eine Klemmmappe
geheftet werden. Die Klemme der Mappe verdeckt 7,5\Unit{mm}.
- Der Papierstapel ist sehr dünn, deshalb gehen beim Knicken und
- Blättern durchschnittlich höchstens weitere 0,75\Unit{mm}
+ Der Papierstapel ist sehr dünn, deshalb gehen beim Knicken und
+ Blättern durchschnittlich höchstens weitere 0,75\Unit{mm}
verloren. Sie schreiben dann also:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
\usepackage[BCOR=8.25mm]{typearea}
\end{lstcode}
- mit \OptionValue{BCOR}{8.25mm} als Option für \Package{typearea} oder
+ mit \OptionValue{BCOR}{8.25mm} als Option für \Package{typearea} oder
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[a4paper,BCOR=8.25mm]{report}
\usepackage{typearea}
@@ -531,14 +531,14 @@ verstandene Maßeinheit angeben.
Die Option \Option{a4paper} konnte bei \Class{scrreprt} entfallen, da diese
der Voreinstellung bei allen \KOMAScript-Klassen entspricht.
- Setzt man die Option erst später auf einen neuen Wert, verwendet man also
+ Setzt man die Option erst später auf einen neuen Wert, verwendet man also
beispielsweise
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{scrreprt}
\KOMAoptions{BCOR=8.25mm}
\end{lstcode}
so werden bereits beim Laden der Klasse \Class{scrreprt}
- Standardeinstellungen vorgenommen. Beim Ändern der Einstellung mit Hilfe
+ Standardeinstellungen vorgenommen. Beim Ändern der Einstellung mit Hilfe
einer der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird dann automatisch ein neuer
Satzspiegel mit neuen Randeinstellungen berechnet.
@@ -547,13 +547,13 @@ verstandene Maßeinheit angeben.
Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Option bei
Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen wie im Beispiel als Klassenoption
oder per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei Verwendung einer
\KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} geladen,
noch die Option dabei als optionales Argument angegeben
werden. Wird\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} die Option per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}
-nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel und Ränder
+nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel und Ränder
automatisch neu berechnet.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -567,20 +567,20 @@ Mit Hilfe der Option
festgelegt, in wie viele Streifen die Seite horizontal und vertikal bei der
Satzspiegelkonstruktion eingeteilt wird. Die genaue Konstruktion ist
\autoref{sec:typearea.divConstruction} zu entnehmen. Wichtig zu wissen ist,
-dass gilt: Je größer der \PName{Faktor}, desto größer wird der Textbereich und
-desto kleiner die Ränder. Als \PName{Faktor} kann jeder ganzzahlige Wert ab 4
-verwendet werden. Bitte beachten Sie jedoch, dass sehr große Werte dazu führen
-können, dass Randbedingungen der Satzspiegelkonstruktion, je nach Wahl der
+dass gilt: Je größer der \PName{Faktor}, desto größer wird der Textbereich und
+desto kleiner die Ränder. Als \PName{Faktor} kann jeder ganzzahlige Wert ab 4
+verwendet werden. Bitte beachten Sie jedoch, dass sehr große Werte dazu führen
+können, dass Randbedingungen der Satzspiegelkonstruktion, je nach Wahl der
weiteren Optionen, verletzt werden. So kann die Kopfzeile im Extremfall auch
-außerhalb der Seite liegen. Bei Verwendung der Option
-\OptionVName{DIV}{Faktor} sind Sie für die Einhaltung der Randbedingungen
-sowie eine nach typografischen Gesichtspunkten günstige Zeilenlänge selbst
+außerhalb der Seite liegen. Bei Verwendung der Option
+\OptionVName{DIV}{Faktor} sind Sie für die Einhaltung der Randbedingungen
+sowie eine nach typografischen Gesichtspunkten günstige Zeilenlänge selbst
verantwortlich.
-In \autoref{tab:typearea.typearea} finden Sie für das Seitenformat A4
+In \autoref{tab:typearea.typearea} finden Sie für das Seitenformat A4
ohne Bindekorrektur die aus einigen \Var{DIV}-Faktoren
-resultierenden Satzspiegelgrößen. Dabei werden die weiteren von der
-Schriftgröße abhängigen Nebenbedingungen nicht berücksichtigt.
+resultierenden Satzspiegelgrößen. Dabei werden die weiteren von der
+Schriftgröße abhängigen Nebenbedingungen nicht berücksichtigt.
\begin{table}
% \centering
@@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ Schriftgröße abhängigen Nebenbedingungen nicht berücksichtigt.
% \caption
[{Satzspiegelma"se in Abh"angigkeit von \Var{DIV} bei A4}]
{\label{tab:typearea.typearea}Satzspiegelma"se in Abh"angigkeit von \Var{DIV}
- bei A4 ohne Berücksichtigung von \Length{topskip} oder \Var{BCOR}}
+ bei A4 ohne Berücksichtigung von \Length{topskip} oder \Var{BCOR}}
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ccccc}
\toprule
@@ -612,22 +612,22 @@ Schriftgröße abhängigen Nebenbedingungen nicht berücksichtigt.
14 & 165,00 & 233,36 & 21,21 & 15,00 \\
15 & 168,00 & 237,60 & 19,80 & 14,00 \\
\bottomrule
- \multicolumn{5}{r}{\small (alle Längen in mm)}
+ \multicolumn{5}{r}{\small (alle Längen in mm)}
\end{tabular}
\end{captionbeside}
\end{table}
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, Sie schreiben ein Sitzungsprotokoll. Sie verwenden dafür die
+ Angenommen, Sie schreiben ein Sitzungsprotokoll. Sie verwenden dafür die
Klasse \Class{protokol}. Das Ganze soll doppelseitig werden. In Ihrer Firma
wird die Schriftart Bookman in 12\Unit{pt} verwendet. Diese Schriftart, die
- zu den Standard-PostScript-Schriften gehört, wird in {\LaTeX} mit der
+ zu den Standard-PostScript-Schriften gehört, wird in {\LaTeX} mit der
Anweisung \verb|\usepackage{bookman}| aktiviert. Die Schriftart Bookman
- läuft sehr weit, das heißt, die einzelnen Zeichen sind im Verhältnis zur
- Höhe relativ breit. Deshalb ist Ihnen die Voreinstellung für den
+ läuft sehr weit, das heißt, die einzelnen Zeichen sind im Verhältnis zur
+ Höhe relativ breit. Deshalb ist Ihnen die Voreinstellung für den
\Var{DIV}-Wert in \Package{typearea} zu gering. Statt einem Wert von 12 sind
- Sie nach gründlichem Studium dieses Kapitels einschließlich der
- weiterführenden Abschnitte überzeugt, dass der Wert 15 angebracht ist. Das
+ Sie nach gründlichem Studium dieses Kapitels einschließlich der
+ weiterführenden Abschnitte überzeugt, dass der Wert 15 angebracht ist. Das
Protokoll wird nicht gebunden, sondern gelocht und in einen Ordner
abgeheftet. Eine Bindekorrektur ist deshalb nicht notwendig. Sie schreiben
also:
@@ -640,17 +640,17 @@ Schriftgröße abhängigen Nebenbedingungen nicht berücksichtigt.
Protokolle neuerdings gesammelt und am Quartalsende alle zusammen
als Buch gebunden werden. Die Bindung erfolgt als
einfache Leimbindung, weil den Band ohnehin nie wieder jemand
- anschaut und er nur wegen ISO\,9000 angefertigt wird. Für die Bindung
- einschließlich Biegefalz werden durchschnittlich 12\Unit{mm}
- benötigt. Sie ändern die Optionen von \Package{typearea} also
- entsprechend ab und verwenden die Klasse für Protokolle nach
+ anschaut und er nur wegen ISO\,9000 angefertigt wird. Für die Bindung
+ einschließlich Biegefalz werden durchschnittlich 12\Unit{mm}
+ benötigt. Sie ändern die Optionen von \Package{typearea} also
+ entsprechend ab und verwenden die Klasse für Protokolle nach
ISO\,9000:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[a4paper,twoside]{iso9000p}
\usepackage{bookman}
\usepackage[DIV=15,BCOR=12mm]{typearea}
\end{lstcode}
- Natürlich können Sie auch hier wieder eine \KOMAScript-Klasse
+ Natürlich können Sie auch hier wieder eine \KOMAScript-Klasse
verwenden:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[twoside,DIV=15,BCOR=12mm]{scrartcl}
@@ -668,13 +668,13 @@ Schriftgröße abhängigen Nebenbedingungen nicht berücksichtigt.
Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Option \Option{DIV}
bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen wie im Beispiel als Klassenoption
oder per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei Verwendung einer
\KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} geladen,
noch die Option dabei als optionales Argument angegeben
werden. Wird\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} die Option per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}
-nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel und Ränder
+nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel und Ränder
automatisch neu berechnet.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -682,22 +682,22 @@ automatisch neu berechnet.
\OptionValue{DIV}{classic}
\end{Declaration}
Wie\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} bereits in
-\autoref{sec:typearea.divConstruction} erwähnt, gibt es nur für das
-Papierformat A4 feste Voreinstellungen für den \Var{DIV}-Wert. Diese sind
+\autoref{sec:typearea.divConstruction} erwähnt, gibt es nur für das
+Papierformat A4 feste Voreinstellungen für den \Var{DIV}-Wert. Diese sind
\autoref{tab:typearea.div} zu entnehmen. Solche festen Werte haben allerdings
den Nachteil\textnote{Achtung!}, dass sie die Laufweite der verwendeten
-Schrift nicht berücksichtigen. Das kann bei A4 und recht schmalen Schriften
-sehr rasch zu unangenehm hoher Zeichenzahl je Zeile führen. Siehe hierzu die
-Überlegungen in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics}. Wird ein anderes Papierformat
-gewählt, so berechnet \Package{typearea} selbst einen guten \Var{DIV}-Wert.
-Natürlich können Sie diese Berechnung auch für A4 wählen. Hierzu verwenden Sie
+Schrift nicht berücksichtigen. Das kann bei A4 und recht schmalen Schriften
+sehr rasch zu unangenehm hoher Zeichenzahl je Zeile führen. Siehe hierzu die
+Ãœberlegungen in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics}. Wird ein anderes Papierformat
+gewählt, so berechnet \Package{typearea} selbst einen guten \Var{DIV}-Wert.
+Natürlich können Sie diese Berechnung auch für A4 wählen. Hierzu verwenden Sie
\OptionValue{DIV}{calc}\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{calc}} anstelle von
-\OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{Faktor}. Selbstverständlich können Sie
+\OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{Faktor}. Selbstverständlich können Sie
diese Option auch explizit bei allen anderen Papierformaten angeben. Wenn Sie
-die automatische Berechnung wünschen, ist diese Angabe sogar sinnvoll, da die
-Möglichkeit besteht, in einer Konfigurationsdatei andere Voreinstellungen zu
+die automatische Berechnung wünschen, ist diese Angabe sogar sinnvoll, da die
+Möglichkeit besteht, in einer Konfigurationsdatei andere Voreinstellungen zu
setzen (siehe \autoref{sec:typearea-experts.cfg}). Eine explizit angegebene
-Option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} überschreibt diese Vorkonfiguration aber.
+Option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} überschreibt diese Vorkonfiguration aber.
\begin{table}
% \centering
@@ -717,20 +717,20 @@ Option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} überschreibt diese Vorkonfiguration aber.
\end{captionbeside}
\end{table}
-Die in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction} erwähnte klassische
-Konstruktion, der mittelalterliche Buchseitenkanon, ist ebenfalls auswählbar.
+Die in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction} erwähnte klassische
+Konstruktion, der mittelalterliche Buchseitenkanon, ist ebenfalls auswählbar.
Verwenden Sie in diesem Fall anstelle von
\OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{Faktor} oder \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} einfach
\OptionValue{DIV}{classic}\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{classic}}. Es wird dann
-ein \Var{DIV}-Wert ermittelt, der eine möglichst gute Näherung an den
+ein \Var{DIV}-Wert ermittelt, der eine möglichst gute Näherung an den
mittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon darstellt.
\begin{Example}
- In dem bei der Option \OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{Faktor} aufgeführten
+ In dem bei der Option \OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{Faktor} aufgeführten
Beispiel mit der Schriftart Bookman gab es ja genau das Problem, dass man
einen zur Schriftart besser passenden \Var{DIV}-Wert haben wollte. Man
- könnte also in Abwandlung des ersten Beispiels auch einfach die Ermittlung
- dieses Wertes \Package{typearea} überlassen:
+ könnte also in Abwandlung des ersten Beispiels auch einfach die Ermittlung
+ dieses Wertes \Package{typearea} überlassen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[a4paper,twoside]{protokol}
\usepackage{bookman}
@@ -743,13 +743,13 @@ mittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon darstellt.
\iftrue wie im Beispiel \fi%
als Klassenoption oder per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}
beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der
- Klasse übergeben werden muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei
+ Klasse übergeben werden muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei
Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} geladen, noch die Option dabei als
optionales Argument angegeben werden. Wird die Option per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so
- werden Satzspiegel und Ränder automatisch neu berechnet.%
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so
+ werden Satzspiegel und Ränder automatisch neu berechnet.%
}{%
\vskip-\dp\strutbox% Wegen Code im Beispiel am Ende
}%
@@ -762,77 +762,77 @@ mittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon darstellt.
\end{Declaration}
Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} Sie bis hier die Beispiele aufmerksam
verfolgt haben, wissen Sie eigentlich bereits, wie man die Berechnung eines
-\Var{DIV}-Wertes in Abhängigkeit von der gewählten Schrift erreicht, wenn eine
+\Var{DIV}-Wertes in Abhängigkeit von der gewählten Schrift erreicht, wenn eine
\KOMAScript-Klasse zusammen mit einem Schriftpaket verwendet wird.
\begin{Explain}
Das Problem dabei ist, dass die \KOMAScript-Klasse das Paket
- \Package{typearea} bereits selbst lädt. Die Übergabe der Optionen als
+ \Package{typearea} bereits selbst lädt. Die Übergabe der Optionen als
optionale Argumente von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} ist also nicht
- möglich. Es würde auch nichts nützen, die Option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} als
+ möglich. Es würde auch nichts nützen, die Option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} als
optionales Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}
- anzugeben. Diese Option würde direkt beim Laden des Pakets
- \Package{typearea} ausgewertet. Damit würden Satzspiegel und Ränder für die
- \LaTeX-Standardschrift und nicht für die später geladene Schrift berechnet.
+ anzugeben. Diese Option würde direkt beim Laden des Pakets
+ \Package{typearea} ausgewertet. Damit würden Satzspiegel und Ränder für die
+ \LaTeX-Standardschrift und nicht für die später geladene Schrift berechnet.
- Selbstverständlich ist es möglich, mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}%
+ Selbstverständlich ist es möglich, mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}%
\PParameter{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}%
\PParameter{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}\PParameter{calc} nach dem Laden
- des Schriftpakets Satzspiegel und Ränder neu berechnen zu lassen. Dabei wird
- dann über den Wert \PValue{calc} direkt ein \Var{DIV}-Wert für eine gute
- Zeilenlänge eingefordert.
+ des Schriftpakets Satzspiegel und Ränder neu berechnen zu lassen. Dabei wird
+ dann über den Wert \PValue{calc} direkt ein \Var{DIV}-Wert für eine gute
+ Zeilenlänge eingefordert.
- Da es aber häufig praktischer ist, die Einstellung für die Option
+ Da es aber häufig praktischer ist, die Einstellung für die Option
\Option{DIV} nicht erst nach dem Laden der Schrift vorzunehmen, sondern an
herausgehobener Stelle, beispielsweise beim Laden der Klasse, bietet
- \Package{typearea} zwei weitere symbolische Werte für diese Option.
+ \Package{typearea} zwei weitere symbolische Werte für diese Option.
\end{Explain}
Mit \OptionValue{DIV}{current}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}}%
\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{current}} wird eine Neuberechnung von Satzspiegel
-und Rändern angestoßen, wobei genau der \Var{DIV}-Wert verwendet wird, der
-aktuell eingestellt ist. Dies ist weniger für die Neuberechnung des
+und Rändern angestoßen, wobei genau der \Var{DIV}-Wert verwendet wird, der
+aktuell eingestellt ist. Dies ist weniger für die Neuberechnung des
Satzspiegels nach Wahl einer anderen Grundschrift von Interesse. Vielmehr ist
-das dann nützlich, wenn man etwa nach Änderung des Durchschusses bei
+das dann nützlich, wenn man etwa nach Änderung des Durchschusses bei
Beibehaltung des Teilers \Var{DIV} die Randbedingung sicherstellen will, dass
-\Length{textheight} abzüglich \Length{topskip} ein Vielfaches von
+\Length{textheight} abzüglich \Length{topskip} ein Vielfaches von
\Length{baselineskip} sein sollte.
Mit \OptionValue{DIV}{last}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}}%
\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{last}} wird eine Neuberechnung von Satzspiegel
-und Rändern angestoßen, wobei genau dieselbe Einstellung wie bei der letzten
+und Rändern angestoßen, wobei genau dieselbe Einstellung wie bei der letzten
Berechnung verwendet wird.
\begin{Example}
- Gehen wir wieder davon aus, dass für die Schriftart Bookman ein Satzspiegel
- mit guter Zeilenlänge berechnet werden soll. Gleichzeitig wird eine
+ Gehen wir wieder davon aus, dass für die Schriftart Bookman ein Satzspiegel
+ mit guter Zeilenlänge berechnet werden soll. Gleichzeitig wird eine
\KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet. Dies ist mit dem symbolischen Wert
\PValue{last} und der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} sehr
- einfach möglich:
+ einfach möglich:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[BCOR=12mm,DIV=calc,twoside]
{scrartcl}
\usepackage{bookman}
\KOMAoptions{DIV=last}
\end{lstcode}
- Wird später entschieden, dass ein anderer \Var{DIV}-Wert
+ Wird später entschieden, dass ein anderer \Var{DIV}-Wert
verwendet werden soll, so muss nur die Einstellung im optionalen Argument
- von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} geändert werden.
+ von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} geändert werden.
\end{Example}
-Eine Zusammenfassung aller möglichen symbolischen Werte für die Option
+Eine Zusammenfassung aller möglichen symbolischen Werte für die Option
\Option{DIV} finden Sie in \autoref{tab:symbolicDIV}. Es wird an dieser Stelle
darauf hingewiesen, dass auch die Verwendung des Pakets
-\Package{fontenc}\IndexPackage{fontenc} dazu führen kann, dass \LaTeX{} eine
-andere Schrift lädt.
+\Package{fontenc}\IndexPackage{fontenc} dazu führen kann, dass \LaTeX{} eine
+andere Schrift lädt.
\begin{table}
\caption[{%
- Symbolische Werte für Option \DescRef{typearea.option.DIV} und das
+ Symbolische Werte für Option \DescRef{typearea.option.DIV} und das
\PName{DIV}-Argument von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}%
}]{%
- Mögliche symbolische Werte für die Option \DescRef{typearea.option.DIV}
+ Mögliche symbolische Werte für die Option \DescRef{typearea.option.DIV}
oder das \PName{DIV}-Argument der Anweisung
\DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}%
}
@@ -840,39 +840,39 @@ andere Schrift lädt.
\begin{desctabular}
\pventry{areaset}{Satzspiegel neu
anordnen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{areaset}}}%
- \pventry{calc}{Satzspiegelberechnung einschließlich Ermittlung eines guten
+ \pventry{calc}{Satzspiegelberechnung einschließlich Ermittlung eines guten
\Var{DIV}-Wertes erneut
- durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{calc}}}%
+ durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{calc}}}%
\pventry{classic}{Satzspiegelberechnung nach dem mittelalterlichen
Buchseitenkanon (Kreisberechnung) erneut
- durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{classic}}}%
- \pventry{current}{Satzspiegelberechnung mit dem aktuell gültigen
+ durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{classic}}}%
+ \pventry{current}{Satzspiegelberechnung mit dem aktuell gültigen
\Var{DIV}-Wert erneut
- durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{current}}}%
- \pventry{default}{Satzspiegelberechnung mit dem Standardwert für das
- aktuelle Seitenformat und die aktuelle Schriftgröße erneut durchführen.
+ durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{current}}}%
+ \pventry{default}{Satzspiegelberechnung mit dem Standardwert für das
+ aktuelle Seitenformat und die aktuelle Schriftgröße erneut durchführen.
Falls kein Standardwert existiert, \PValue{calc}
anwenden.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{default}}}%
\pventry{last}{Satzspiegelberechnung mit demselben \PName{DIV}-Argument,
das beim letzten Aufruf angegeben wurde, erneut
- durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{last}}}%
+ durchführen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\textKValue{last}}}%
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
-Häufig\textnote{Achtung!} wird die Satzspiegelneuberechnung im Zusammenhang
-mit der Ver"-änderung des Zeilenabstandes
-(\emph{Durchschuss})\Index{Durchschuss} benötigt. Da der Satzspiegel unbedingt
+Häufig\textnote{Achtung!} wird die Satzspiegelneuberechnung im Zusammenhang
+mit der Ver"-änderung des Zeilenabstandes
+(\emph{Durchschuss})\Index{Durchschuss} benötigt. Da der Satzspiegel unbedingt
so berechnet werden sollte, dass eine ganze Anzahl an Zeilen in den
Textbereich passt, muss bei Verwendung eines anderen Durchschusses als des
-normalen der Satzspiegel für diesen Zeilenabstand neu berechnet werden.
+normalen der Satzspiegel für diesen Zeilenabstand neu berechnet werden.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, für eine Diplomarbeit wird die Schriftgröße
+ Angenommen, für eine Diplomarbeit wird die Schriftgröße
10\Unit{pt} bei eineinhalbzeiligem Satz zwingend gefordert. {\LaTeX}
setzt normalerweise bei 10\Unit{pt} mit 2\Unit{pt} Durchschuss,
- also 1,2-zeilig. Deshalb muss als zusätzlicher Dehnfaktor der Wert
- 1,25 verwendet werden. Gehen wir außerdem davon aus, dass eine
- Bindekorrektur von 12\Unit{mm} benötigt wird. Dann könnte die Lösung
+ also 1,2-zeilig. Deshalb muss als zusätzlicher Dehnfaktor der Wert
+ 1,25 verwendet werden. Gehen wir außerdem davon aus, dass eine
+ Bindekorrektur von 12\Unit{mm} benötigt wird. Dann könnte die Lösung
dieses Problems wie folgt aussehen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[10pt,twoside,BCOR=12mm,DIV=calc]
@@ -881,15 +881,15 @@ normalen der Satzspiegel für diesen Zeilenabstand neu berechnet werden.
\KOMAoptions{DIV=last}
\end{lstcode}\IndexCmd{linespread}
Da \Package{typearea} selbst immer die Anweisung \Macro{normalsize} bei
- Berechnung eines neuen Satzspiegels ausführt, ist es nicht zwingend
- notwendig, nach \Macro{linespread} den gewählten Durchschuss mit
+ Berechnung eines neuen Satzspiegels ausführt, ist es nicht zwingend
+ notwendig, nach \Macro{linespread} den gewählten Durchschuss mit
\Macro{selectfont} zu aktivieren, damit dieser %
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur
- auch tatsächlich
+ auch tatsächlich
\fi %
- für die Neuberechnung verwendet wird.
+ für die Neuberechnung verwendet wird.
- Das gleiche Beispiel sähe unter Verwendung des
+ Das gleiche Beispiel sähe unter Verwendung des
\Package{setspace}-Pakets\IndexPackage{setspace}%
\important{\Package{setspace}}
(siehe \cite{package:setspace}) wie folgt aus:
@@ -903,22 +903,22 @@ normalen der Satzspiegel für diesen Zeilenabstand neu berechnet werden.
Wie\textnote{Tipp!} man an dem Beispiel sieht, spart man sich mit dem
\Package{setspace}-Paket das Wissen um den korrekten Dehnungswert. Dies gilt
-allerdings nur für die Standardschriftgrößen 10\Unit{pt}, 11\Unit{pt} und
-12\Unit{pt}. Für alle anderen Schriftgrößen verwendet das Paket
+allerdings nur für die Standardschriftgrößen 10\Unit{pt}, 11\Unit{pt} und
+12\Unit{pt}. Für alle anderen Schriftgrößen verwendet das Paket
%
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur
-einen näherungsweise passenden Dehnungswert.
+einen näherungsweise passenden Dehnungswert.
%
\else %
-eine Näherung.
+eine Näherung.
\fi
An\textnote{Achtung!} dieser Stelle erscheint es mir angebracht, darauf
-hinzuweisen, dass der Zeilenabstand für die Titelseite wieder auf den normalen
-Wert zurückgesetzt werden sollte und außerdem auch die Verzeichnisse mit dem
+hinzuweisen, dass der Zeilenabstand für die Titelseite wieder auf den normalen
+Wert zurückgesetzt werden sollte und außerdem auch die Verzeichnisse mit dem
normalen Zeilenabstand gesetzt werden sollten.
\begin{Example}
- Ein\IndexPackage{setspace} vollständiges Beispiel wäre also:
+ Ein\IndexPackage{setspace} vollständiges Beispiel wäre also:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[10pt,twoside,BCOR=12mm,DIV=calc]
{scrreprt}
@@ -940,11 +940,11 @@ normalen Zeilenabstand gesetzt werden sollten.
\autoref{part:forExperts}, \autoref{cha:tocbasic} auf
\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead} vorgestellt.
\end{Example}
-Außerdem sei darauf hingewiesen, dass Änderungen am Zeilenabstand auch
-Auswirkungen auf Kopf und Fuß der Seite haben können. Dies kann sich
+Außerdem sei darauf hingewiesen, dass Änderungen am Zeilenabstand auch
+Auswirkungen auf Kopf und Fuß der Seite haben können. Dies kann sich
beispielsweise bei Verwendung von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auswirken und man
muss dann selbst entscheiden, ob man dort lieber den normalen Durchschuss oder
-den veränderten haben will. Siehe dazu auch Option
+den veränderten haben will. Siehe dazu auch Option
\DescRef{scrlayer.option.singlespacing} in \autoref{cha:scrlayer}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer]{\Package{scrlayer}}}%
\IndexPackage{scrlayer}\IndexOption{singlespacing} auf
@@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen auch zur
Verwendung mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des Pakets vorgesehen sind
und dann eine\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} automatische Neuberechnung
-von Satzspiegel und Rändern auslösen.%
+von Satzspiegel und Rändern auslösen.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -969,49 +969,49 @@ von Satzspiegel und Rändern auslösen.%
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} nach dem Laden des Pakets
\Package{typearea} gesetzt, so wird intern die Anweisung \Macro{typearea}
aufgerufen. Dabei wird beim Setzen der Option
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} für \PName{BCOR} intern der symbolische Wert
- \PValue{current} verwendet, der aus Gründen der Vollständigkeit auch in
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} für \PName{BCOR} intern der symbolische Wert
+ \PValue{current} verwendet, der aus Gründen der Vollständigkeit auch in
\autoref{tab:symbolicBCOR} zu finden ist. Beim Setzen der Option
- \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} wird für \PName{DIV} hingegen der
+ \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} wird für \PName{DIV} hingegen der
symbolische Wert \PValue{last} verwendet. Wollen Sie, dass Satzspiegel und
- Ränder stattdessen mit dem symbolischen Wert \PValue{current} für
- \PName{DIV} neu berechnet werden, so können Sie direkt
+ Ränder stattdessen mit dem symbolischen Wert \PValue{current} für
+ \PName{DIV} neu berechnet werden, so können Sie direkt
\Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{current} verwenden.
\end{Explain}
\begin{table}
\caption[{%
- Symbolische \PName{BCOR}-Argumente für \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}%
+ Symbolische \PName{BCOR}-Argumente für \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}%
}]{%
- Mögliche symbolische \PName{BCOR}-Argumente für
+ Mögliche symbolische \PName{BCOR}-Argumente für
\Macro{typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}%
}
\label{tab:symbolicBCOR}
\begin{desctabular}
- \pventry{current}{Satzspiegelberechnung mit dem aktuell gültigen
+ \pventry{current}{Satzspiegelberechnung mit dem aktuell gültigen
\Var{BCOR}-Wert erneut
- durchführen.\IndexOption{BCOR~=\textKValue{current}}}
+ durchführen.\IndexOption{BCOR~=\textKValue{current}}}
\end{desctabular}
\end{table}
-Sollen die Werte sowohl von \PName{BCOR} als auch \PName{DIV} geändert werden,
-so ist die Verwendung von \Macro{typearea} zu empfehlen, da hierbei die Ränder
+Sollen die Werte sowohl von \PName{BCOR} als auch \PName{DIV} geändert werden,
+so ist die Verwendung von \Macro{typearea} zu empfehlen, da hierbei die Ränder
und der Satzspiegel nur einmal neu berechnet werden. Bei
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}%
\PParameter{\OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{Faktor},%
- \OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{BCOR}{Korrektur}} werden hingegen Ränder und
-Satzspiegel zunächst in Folge von Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} und
-dann zusätzlich durch Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} neu berechnet.
+ \OptionVNameRef{\LabelBase}{BCOR}{Korrektur}} werden hingegen Ränder und
+Satzspiegel zunächst in Folge von Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} und
+dann zusätzlich durch Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} neu berechnet.
\begin{Explain}
- Der Befehl \Macro{typearea} ist derzeit so definiert, dass es auch möglich
+ Der Befehl \Macro{typearea} ist derzeit so definiert, dass es auch möglich
ist, mitten in einem Dokument den Satzspiegel zu wechseln. Dabei werden
- allerdings Annahmen über den Aufbau des \LaTeX-Kerns gemacht und interne
- Definitionen und Größen des \LaTeX-Kerns verändert. Da am \LaTeX-Kern nur
- noch zur Beseitigung von Fehlern notwendige Änderungen vorgenommen werden,
- ist die Wahrscheinlichkeit hoch, dass dies in zukünftigen Versionen von
- \LaTeXe{} noch funktionieren wird. Eine Garantie dafür gibt es jedoch
- nicht. Die Verwendung innerhalb des Dokuments führt außerdem immer zu einem
+ allerdings Annahmen über den Aufbau des \LaTeX-Kerns gemacht und interne
+ Definitionen und Größen des \LaTeX-Kerns verändert. Da am \LaTeX-Kern nur
+ noch zur Beseitigung von Fehlern notwendige Änderungen vorgenommen werden,
+ ist die Wahrscheinlichkeit hoch, dass dies in zukünftigen Versionen von
+ \LaTeXe{} noch funktionieren wird. Eine Garantie dafür gibt es jedoch
+ nicht. Die Verwendung innerhalb des Dokuments führt außerdem immer zu einem
Seitenumbruch.
\end{Explain}
@@ -1020,9 +1020,9 @@ Da\important{\Macro{recalctypearea}} \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}%
\PParameter{\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{last}} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}%
\PParameter{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{last}} beziehungsweise
-\Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{last} für die Neuberechnung
-des Satzspiegels und der Ränder recht häufig benötigt werden, gibt es dafür
-die abkürzende Anweisung
+\Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{last} für die Neuberechnung
+des Satzspiegels und der Ränder recht häufig benötigt werden, gibt es dafür
+die abkürzende Anweisung
\Macro{recalctypearea}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}}.
\begin{Example}
Wenn Ihnen die Schreibweisen
@@ -1033,8 +1033,8 @@ die abkürzende Anweisung
\begin{lstcode}
\typearea[current]{last}
\end{lstcode}
- für die Neuberechnung von Satzspiegel und Rändern aufgrund der vielen
- Sonderzeichen zu umständlich ist, können Sie einfach
+ für die Neuberechnung von Satzspiegel und Rändern aufgrund der vielen
+ Sonderzeichen zu umständlich ist, können Sie einfach
\begin{lstcode}
\recalctypearea
\end{lstcode}
@@ -1047,27 +1047,27 @@ die abkürzende Anweisung
\OptionVName{twoside}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\OptionValue{twoside}{semi}
\end{Declaration}%
-Wie in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} erklärt, hängt
+Wie in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} erklärt, hängt
die Randverteilung davon ab, ob ein Dokument ein- oder zweiseitig gesetzt
werden soll. Bei einseitigem Satz sind der linke und rechte Rand gleich
-breit, während bei doppelseitigem Satz der innere Randanteil einer Seite nur
-halb so groß ist wie der jeweilige äußere Rand. Um diese Unterscheidung
-vornehmen zu können, muss \Package{typearea} mit Option \Option{twoside}
+breit, während bei doppelseitigem Satz der innere Randanteil einer Seite nur
+halb so groß ist wie der jeweilige äußere Rand. Um diese Unterscheidung
+vornehmen zu können, muss \Package{typearea} mit Option \Option{twoside}
mitgeteilt werden, ob das Dokument doppelseitig gesetzt wird. Als
\iffree{\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}{\PName{Wert}} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte
-für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. Wird
+für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. Wird
die Option ohne Wert-Angabe verwendet, so wird der Wert
\PValue{true}\important{\OptionValue{twoside}{true}} angenommen, also
doppelseitiger Satz verwendet. Deaktivieren der
-Option\important{\OptionValue{twoside}{false}} führt zu einseitigem Satz.
+Option\important{\OptionValue{twoside}{false}} führt zu einseitigem Satz.
\begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption
\KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}\setcapindent{0pt}
\begin{captionbeside}%
- [{Standardwerte für einfache Schalter in \KOMAScript}]%
- {\label{tab:truefalseswitch}Standardwerte für alle einfachen Schalter in
+ [{Standardwerte für einfache Schalter in \KOMAScript}]%
+ {\label{tab:truefalseswitch}Standardwerte für alle einfachen Schalter in
\KOMAScript}%
[l]
\begin{tabular}[t]{ll}
@@ -1085,18 +1085,18 @@ Option\important{\OptionValue{twoside}{false}} führt zu einseitigem Satz.
\end{captionbeside}
\end{table}
-Außer den Werten aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} kann jedoch auch noch der
+Außer den Werten aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} kann jedoch auch noch der
Wert \PValue{semi}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}}%
\important{\OptionValue{twoside}{semi}} angegeben werden. Dieser Wert
-\PValue{semi} führt zu doppelseitigem Satz mit einseitigen Rändern und
+\PValue{semi} führt zu doppelseitigem Satz mit einseitigen Rändern und
einseitigen, also nicht alternierenden
Marginalien. Eine\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{typearea}} eventuelle
Bindekorrektur (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR},
\DescPageRef{typearea.option.BCOR}) wird jedoch ab \KOMAScript~Version 3.12
wie beim doppelseitigen Satz auf Seiten mit ungerader Nummer dem linken Rand
und auf Seiten mit gerader Nummer dem rechten Rand zugeschlagen. Wird auf
-Kompatibilität zu einer früheren
-Version\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{3.12}} zurückgeschaltet
+Kompatibilität zu einer früheren
+Version\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{3.12}} zurückgeschaltet
(siehe \autoref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions},
\autopageref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions}), so ist die Bindekorrektur
jedoch auch bei \OptionValue{twoside}{semi} immer Teil des linken Randes.
@@ -1108,11 +1108,11 @@ als Klassenoption bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}, als Paketoption
bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} oder auch nach dem Laden von
\Package{typearea} per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} gesetzt werden. Eine Verwendung dieser
-Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt\textnote{automatische
+Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt\textnote{automatische
Neuberechnung} automatisch zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels mit
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe
\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). War vor der Option
-doppelseitiger Satz aktiv, wird noch vor der Neuberechnung auf die nächste
+doppelseitiger Satz aktiv, wird noch vor der Neuberechnung auf die nächste
ungerade Seite umbrochen.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1121,28 +1121,28 @@ ungerade Seite umbrochen.%
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{twocolumn}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}%
-Für die Berechnung eines guten Satzspiegels mit Hilfe von
+Für die Berechnung eines guten Satzspiegels mit Hilfe von
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc} ist es erforderlich zu wissen, ob das
Dokument ein- oder zweispaltig gesetzt wird. Da die Betrachtungen zur
-Zeilenlänge aus \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} dann für jede einzelne Spalte
+Zeilenlänge aus \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} dann für jede einzelne Spalte
gelten, darf der Satzspiegel in doppelspaltigen Dokumenten bis zu doppelt so
breit sein wie in einspaltigen Dokumenten.
-Um diese Unterscheidung vornehmen zu können, muss \Package{typearea} mit
+Um diese Unterscheidung vornehmen zu können, muss \Package{typearea} mit
Option \Option{twocolumn} mitgeteilt werden, ob das Dokument doppelspaltig
-gesetzt wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für
+gesetzt wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für
einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. Wird die
Option ohne Wert-Angabe verwendet, so wird der Wert
\PValue{true}\important{\OptionValue{twocolumn}{true}} angenommen, also
doppelspaltiger Satz verwendet. Ein
-Deaktivieren der Option führt wieder zum voreingestellten
+Deaktivieren der Option führt wieder zum voreingestellten
einspaltigen Satz.
Die Option kann als Klassenoption bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass},
als Paketoption bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} oder auch nach dem
Laden von \Package{typearea} per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} gesetzt werden. Eine Verwendung dieser
-Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt\textnote{automatische
+Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt\textnote{automatische
Neuberechnung} automatisch zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels mittels
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe
\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).%
@@ -1155,104 +1155,104 @@ Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt\textnote{automatische
\OptionVName{footinclude}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}%
\begin{Explain}%
- Bisher wurde zwar erklärt, wie die
+ Bisher wurde zwar erklärt, wie die
Satzspiegelkonstruktion\Index{Satzspiegel} funktioniert und in welchem
- Verhältnis einerseits die Ränder\Index{Rand} zueinander stehen, andererseits
- der Textkörper zur Seite steht, aber eine entscheidende Frage blieb
+ Verhältnis einerseits die Ränder\Index{Rand} zueinander stehen, andererseits
+ der Textkörper zur Seite steht, aber eine entscheidende Frage blieb
ausgeklammert: Was genau ist \emph{der Rand}?
Auf den ersten Blick wirkt diese Frage trivial: Der Rand ist der Teil der
Seite, der oben, unten, links und rechts frei bleibt. Doch das ist nur die
- halbe Wahrheit. Der äußere Rand ist keineswegs immer leer. Teilweise findet
+ halbe Wahrheit. Der äußere Rand ist keineswegs immer leer. Teilweise findet
man darin noch gesetzte Randnotizen (siehe den Befehl
\DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} beispielsweise in \cite{l2kurz}
bzw. \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}).
Beim oberen und unteren Rand stellt sich die Frage, wie Kopf- und
- Fußzeile\Index{Seiten>Kopf}\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} zu behandeln sind.
- Gehören diese beiden zum Textkörper oder zum jeweiligen Rand? Die Frage ist
- nicht einfach zu beantworten. Eindeutig ist, dass ein leerer Fuß und ein
- leerer Kopf zum Rand zu rechnen sind. Schließlich können sie nicht vom
- restlichen Rand unterschieden werden. Ein Fuß, der nur die
+ Fußzeile\Index{Seiten>Kopf}\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} zu behandeln sind.
+ Gehören diese beiden zum Textkörper oder zum jeweiligen Rand? Die Frage ist
+ nicht einfach zu beantworten. Eindeutig ist, dass ein leerer Fuß und ein
+ leerer Kopf zum Rand zu rechnen sind. Schließlich können sie nicht vom
+ restlichen Rand unterschieden werden. Ein Fuß, der nur die
Paginierung\Index{Paginierung}\textnote{Paginierung}
- \iffalse % Beseitigung von Fußnoten
+ \iffalse % Beseitigung von Fußnoten
\unskip\footnote{Unter der Paginierung versteht man die Angabe der
- Seitenzahl, wahlweise innerhalb oder außerhalb des Satzspiegels, meist im
- Kopf oder Fuß der Seite.} %
- \fi enthält, wirkt optisch ebenfalls eher wie Rand und sollte deshalb zu
- diesem gerechnet werden. Für die optische Wirkung ist dabei unwesentlich, ob
- der Fuß beim Lesen oder Überfliegen leicht als Fuß erkannt werden kann oder
- nicht. Entscheidend ist, wie eine wohlgefüllte Seite bei \emph{unscharfer
+ Seitenzahl, wahlweise innerhalb oder außerhalb des Satzspiegels, meist im
+ Kopf oder Fuß der Seite.} %
+ \fi enthält, wirkt optisch ebenfalls eher wie Rand und sollte deshalb zu
+ diesem gerechnet werden. Für die optische Wirkung ist dabei unwesentlich, ob
+ der Fuß beim Lesen oder Überfliegen leicht als Fuß erkannt werden kann oder
+ nicht. Entscheidend ist, wie eine wohlgefüllte Seite bei \emph{unscharfer
Betrachtung} wirkt. Dazu bedient man sich beispielsweise seiner
- altersweitsichtigen Großeltern, denen man die Brille stibitzt und dann die
- Seite etwa einen halben Meter von der Nasenspitze entfernt hält. In
- Ermangelung erreichbarer Großeltern kann man sich auch damit behelfen, dass
+ altersweitsichtigen Großeltern, denen man die Brille stibitzt und dann die
+ Seite etwa einen halben Meter von der Nasenspitze entfernt hält. In
+ Ermangelung erreichbarer Großeltern kann man sich auch damit behelfen, dass
man die eigenen Augen auf Fernsicht stellt, die Seite aber nur mit
- ausgestreckten Armen hält. Brillenträger sind hier deutlich im Vorteil. Hat
- man eine Fußzeile, die neben der Paginierung weitere weitschweifige Angaben
- enthält, beispielsweise einen Copyright-Hinweis, so wirkt die Fußzeile eher
- wie ein etwas abgesetzter Teil des Textkörpers. Bei der Berechnung des
- Satzspiegels sollte das berücksichtigt werden.
+ ausgestreckten Armen hält. Brillenträger sind hier deutlich im Vorteil. Hat
+ man eine Fußzeile, die neben der Paginierung weitere weitschweifige Angaben
+ enthält, beispielsweise einen Copyright-Hinweis, so wirkt die Fußzeile eher
+ wie ein etwas abgesetzter Teil des Textkörpers. Bei der Berechnung des
+ Satzspiegels sollte das berücksichtigt werden.
Bei der Kopfzeile sieht es noch schwieriger aus. In der Kopfzeile wird
- häufig der Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel}\textnote{Kolumnentitel}
- \iffalse% Beseitigung von Fußnoten
+ häufig der Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel}\textnote{Kolumnentitel}
+ \iffalse% Beseitigung von Fußnoten
\unskip\footnote{Unter dem Kolumnentitel versteht man in der Regel die
- Wiederholung einer Überschrift mit Titelcharakter. Er steht häufig im
- Seitenkopf, seltener im Seitenfuß.} %
+ Wiederholung einer Überschrift mit Titelcharakter. Er steht häufig im
+ Seitenkopf, seltener im Seitenfuß.} %
\fi gesetzt. Arbeitet man mit einem lebenden Kolumnentitel, also der
Wiederholung der ersten bzw. zweiten Gliederungsebene in der Kopfzeile, und
- hat gleichzeitig sehr lange Überschriften, so erhält man automatisch sehr
+ hat gleichzeitig sehr lange Überschriften, so erhält man automatisch sehr
lange Kopfzeilen. In diesem Fall wirkt der Kopf wiederum wie ein abgesetzter
- Teil des Textkörpers und weniger wie leerer Rand. Verstärkt wird dieser
+ Teil des Textkörpers und weniger wie leerer Rand. Verstärkt wird dieser
Effekt noch, wenn neben dem Kolumnentitel auch die Paginierung im Kopf
- erfolgt. Dadurch erhält man einen links und rechts abgeschlossenen Bereich,
+ erfolgt. Dadurch erhält man einen links und rechts abgeschlossenen Bereich,
der kaum noch als leerer Rand wirkt. Schwieriger ist es bei Paginierung im
- Fuß und Überschriften, deren Länge sehr stark schwankt. Hier kann der Kopf
- der einen Seite wie Textkörper wirken, der Kopf der anderen Seite aber
+ Fuß und Überschriften, deren Länge sehr stark schwankt. Hier kann der Kopf
+ der einen Seite wie Textkörper wirken, der Kopf der anderen Seite aber
eher wie Rand. Keinesfalls sollte man die Seiten jedoch unterschiedlich
- behandeln. Das würde zu vertikal springenden Köpfen führen und ist nicht
- einmal für ein Daumenkino geeignet. Ich rate in diesem Fall dazu, den Kopf
- zum Textkörper zu rechnen.
-
- Ganz einfach fällt die Entscheidung, wenn Kopf oder Fuß durch
- eine Linie vom eigentlichen Textkörper abgetrennt sind. Dadurch
- erhält man eine geschlossene Wirkung und der Kopf bzw. Fuß sollte
- unbedingt zum Textkörper gerechnet werden. Wie gesagt: Die durch die
- Trennlinie verbesserte Erkennung des Kopfes oder Fußes ist hier
+ behandeln. Das würde zu vertikal springenden Köpfen führen und ist nicht
+ einmal für ein Daumenkino geeignet. Ich rate in diesem Fall dazu, den Kopf
+ zum Textkörper zu rechnen.
+
+ Ganz einfach fällt die Entscheidung, wenn Kopf oder Fuß durch
+ eine Linie vom eigentlichen Textkörper abgetrennt sind. Dadurch
+ erhält man eine geschlossene Wirkung und der Kopf bzw. Fuß sollte
+ unbedingt zum Textkörper gerechnet werden. Wie gesagt: Die durch die
+ Trennlinie verbesserte Erkennung des Kopfes oder Fußes ist hier
unerheblich. Entscheidend ist die unscharfe Betrachtung.\par
\end{Explain}
-Das \Package{typearea}-Paket trifft die Entscheidung, ob ein Kopf oder Fuß zum
-Textkörper gehört\important{\OptionValue{headinclude}{true}
+Das \Package{typearea}-Paket trifft die Entscheidung, ob ein Kopf oder Fuß zum
+Textkörper gehört\important{\OptionValue{headinclude}{true}
\OptionValue{headinclude}{false} \OptionValue{footinclude}{true}
\OptionValue{footinclude}{false}} oder davon getrennt zum Rand gerechnet
werden muss, nicht selbst. Stattdessen kann mit den Optionen
\Option{headinclude} und \Option{footinclude} eingestellt werden, ob der Kopf
-und der Fuß zum Textkörper gerechnet werden sollen. Die Optionen verstehen
+und der Fuß zum Textkörper gerechnet werden sollen. Die Optionen verstehen
dabei als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} die
-Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Man kann die Optionen auch
ohne Wertzuweisung verwenden. In diesem Fall wird \PValue{true} als
-\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} verwendet, also der Kopf oder Fuß zum Satzspiegel
+\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} verwendet, also der Kopf oder Fuß zum Satzspiegel
gerechnet.
Wenn Sie unsicher sind, was die richtige Einstellung ist, lesen Sie bitte
-obige Erläuterungen. Voreingestellt sind normalerweise
+obige Erläuterungen. Voreingestellt sind normalerweise
\OptionValue{headinclude}{false} und
\OptionValue{footinclude}{false}. Dies kann sich jedoch bei den
\KOMAScript-Klassen je nach Klassenoption oder bei Verwendung anderer
-\KOMAScript-Pakete generell ändern (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.options} und
+\KOMAScript-Pakete generell ändern (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.options} und
\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}).
Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen bei
Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoptionen oder per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
-müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea}
-führt dabei nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer
-automatischen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung
-erst bei der nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
+müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea}
+führt dabei nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer
+automatischen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung
+erst bei der nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung
des Satzspiegels siehe Option
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\Option{DIV}} mit den Werten
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\PValue{last}} oder
@@ -1268,22 +1268,22 @@ des Satzspiegels siehe Option
\OptionVName{mpinclude}{Ein-Aus-Wert}
\end{Declaration}
Neben\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and
- \Class{scrartcl}} Dokumenten, bei denen der Kopf und der Fuß der Seite eher
-zum Textbereich als zum Rand gehört, gibt es auch Dokumente, bei denen dies
-für Randnotizen zutrifft. Mit der Option \Option{mpinclude} kann genau dies
+ \Class{scrartcl}} Dokumenten, bei denen der Kopf und der Fuß der Seite eher
+zum Textbereich als zum Rand gehört, gibt es auch Dokumente, bei denen dies
+für Randnotizen zutrifft. Mit der Option \Option{mpinclude} kann genau dies
erreicht werden. Die Option versteht dabei als
\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} die Standardwerte
-für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
+für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch},
\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Man kann die Option auch
ohne Wertzuweisung verwenden. In diesem Fall wird \PValue{true} als
\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} verwendet.
Der Effekt von
\OptionValue{mpinclude}{true}\important{\OptionValue{mpinclude}{true}} ist,
-dass eine Breiteneinheit vom Textbereich weggenommen und als Bereich für die
+dass eine Breiteneinheit vom Textbereich weggenommen und als Bereich für die
Randnotizen verwendet wird. Mit
\OptionValue{mpinclude}{false}, was
-der Voreinstellung entspricht, wird hingegen ein Teil des Randes für
+der Voreinstellung entspricht, wird hingegen ein Teil des Randes für
Randnotizen verwendet. Dies ist, je nachdem ob einseitig oder doppelseitig
gearbeitet wird, ebenfalls eine Breiteneinheit oder auch eineinhalb
Breiteneinheiten. In der Regel ist die Verwendung von
@@ -1291,28 +1291,28 @@ Breiteneinheiten. In der Regel ist die Verwendung von
bleiben.
\begin{Explain}
- In den meisten Fällen, in denen die Option \Option{mpinclude} sinnvoll ist,
- werden außerdem breitere Randnotizen benötigt. In sehr vielen Fällen sollte
+ In den meisten Fällen, in denen die Option \Option{mpinclude} sinnvoll ist,
+ werden außerdem breitere Randnotizen benötigt. In sehr vielen Fällen sollte
dabei aber nicht die gesamte Breite, sondern nur ein Teil davon dem
Textbereich zugeordnet werden. Dies ist beispielsweise der Fall, wenn der
- Rand für Zitate verwendet wird. Solche Zitate werden üblicherweise im
- Flattersatz gesetzt, wobei die bündige Kante an den Textbereich
- anschließt. Da sich kein geschlossener optischer Eindruck ergibt, dürfen die
+ Rand für Zitate verwendet wird. Solche Zitate werden üblicherweise im
+ Flattersatz gesetzt, wobei die bündige Kante an den Textbereich
+ anschließt. Da sich kein geschlossener optischer Eindruck ergibt, dürfen die
flatternden Enden also durchaus teilweise in den Rand ragen. Man kann das
einfach erreichen, indem man zum einen die Option \Option{mpinclude}
- verwendet. Zum anderen vergrößert man die Länge \Length{marginparwidth} nach
+ verwendet. Zum anderen vergrößert man die Länge \Length{marginparwidth} nach
der Berechnung des Satzspiegels noch mit Hilfe der
- \Macro{addtolength}-Anweisung. Um welchen Wert man vergrößern sollte, hängt
- vom Einzelfall ab und erfordert einiges Fingerspitzengefühl. Auch deshalb
- ist die Option \Option{mpinclude} eher etwas für Experten. Natürlich kann
+ \Macro{addtolength}-Anweisung. Um welchen Wert man vergrößern sollte, hängt
+ vom Einzelfall ab und erfordert einiges Fingerspitzengefühl. Auch deshalb
+ ist die Option \Option{mpinclude} eher etwas für Experten. Natürlich kann
man auch festlegen, dass die Randnotizen beispielsweise zu einem Drittel in
den Rand hineinragen sollen, und das wie folgt erreichen:
\begin{lstcode}
\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1.5\marginparwidth}
\end{lstcode}
- Da es derzeit keine Option gibt, um mehr Platz für die Randnotizen innerhalb
- des Textbereichs vorzusehen, gibt es nur eine Möglichkeit, dies zu
+ Da es derzeit keine Option gibt, um mehr Platz für die Randnotizen innerhalb
+ des Textbereichs vorzusehen, gibt es nur eine Möglichkeit, dies zu
erreichen: %
\iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur
Die Anpassung von \Length{textwidth}\IndexLength{textwidth} und
@@ -1328,11 +1328,11 @@ bleiben.
\Option{mpinclude} auf \PValue{false}, verringert nach der
Satzspiegelberechnung die Breite des Textbereichs \Macro{textwidth} und
setzt die Breite des Bereichs der Randnotizen auf den Wert, um den man die
- Breite des Textbereichs verringert hat. Leider lässt sich dieses Vorgehen
+ Breite des Textbereichs verringert hat. Leider lässt sich dieses Vorgehen
nicht mit der automatischen Berechnung des \PName{DIV}-Wertes verbinden.
- Demgegenüber wird \Option{mpinclude} bei
+ Demgegenüber wird \Option{mpinclude} bei
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}\IndexOption{DIV=calc} (siehe
- \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}) berücksichtigt.
+ \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}) berücksichtigt.
%
\fi
\end{Explain}
@@ -1340,11 +1340,11 @@ bleiben.
Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Option bei
Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoption oder per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise oder
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
-muss. Eine Änderung dieser Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
+muss. Eine Änderung dieser Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt
nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen
-Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der
-nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des
+Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der
+nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des
Satzspiegels siehe Option
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\Option{DIV}} mit den Werten
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\PValue{last}} oder
@@ -1358,12 +1358,12 @@ Satzspiegels siehe Option
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{headlines}{Zeilenanzahl}
- \OptionVName{headheight}{Höhe}
+ \OptionVName{headheight}{Höhe}
\end{Declaration}%
-\BeginIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}%
+\BeginIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}%
Es ist nun also bekannt, wie man Satzspiegel mit dem \Package{typearea}-Paket
-berechnet und wie man dabei angibt, ob der Kopf oder Fuß zum Textkörper oder
-zum Rand gehört. Insbesondere für den Kopf fehlt aber noch die Angabe, wie
+berechnet und wie man dabei angibt, ob der Kopf oder Fuß zum Textkörper oder
+zum Rand gehört. Insbesondere für den Kopf fehlt aber noch die Angabe, wie
hoch er denn eigentlich sein soll. Hierzu dienen die Optionen
\Option{headlines} und
\Option{headheight}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}}.
@@ -1371,27 +1371,27 @@ hoch er denn eigentlich sein soll. Hierzu dienen die Optionen
Die Option \Option{headlines}\important{\Option{headlines}} setzt man dabei
auf die Anzahl der Kopfzeilen. Normalerweise arbeitet das
\Package{typearea}-Paket mit 1,25 Kopfzeilen. Dieser Wert stellt einen
-Kompromiss dar. Zum einen ist er groß genug, um auch für eine unterstrichene
+Kompromiss dar. Zum einen ist er groß genug, um auch für eine unterstrichene
Kopfzeile (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}) Platz zu bieten, zum anderen
-ist er klein genug, um das Randgewicht nicht zu stark zu verändern, wenn mit
+ist er klein genug, um das Randgewicht nicht zu stark zu verändern, wenn mit
einer einfachen, nicht unterstrichenen Kopfzeile gearbeitet wird. Damit ist
-der voreingestellte Wert in den meisten Standardfällen ein guter Wert. In
-einigen Fällen will oder muss man aber die Kopfhöhe genauer den tatsächlichen
+der voreingestellte Wert in den meisten Standardfällen ein guter Wert. In
+einigen Fällen will oder muss man aber die Kopfhöhe genauer den tatsächlichen
Erfordernissen anpassen.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, es soll ein Text mit einem zweizeiligen Kopf erstellt
- werden. Normalerweise würde dies dazu führen, dass auf jeder Seite
- eine Warnung »\texttt{overfull} \Macro{vbox}« von {\LaTeX}
- ausgegeben würde. Um dies zu verhindern, wird das
+ werden. Normalerweise würde dies dazu führen, dass auf jeder Seite
+ eine Warnung »\texttt{overfull} \Macro{vbox}« von {\LaTeX}
+ ausgegeben würde. Um dies zu verhindern, wird das
\Package{typearea}-Paket angewiesen, einen entsprechenden Satzspiegel
zu berechnen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
\usepackage[headlines=2.1]{typearea}
\end{lstcode}
- Es ist auch wieder möglich und bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse
- empfehlenswert, diese Option direkt an die Klasse zu übergeben:
+ Es ist auch wieder möglich und bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse
+ empfehlenswert, diese Option direkt an die Klasse zu übergeben:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[headlines=2.1]{scrartcl}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -1399,14 +1399,14 @@ Erfordernissen anpassen.
werden kann, sind in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} zu finden.
\end{Example}
-In einigen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man die Kopfhöhe nicht in Zeilen,
-sondern direkt als Längenwert angeben kann. Dies ist mit Hilfe der alternativ
+In einigen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man die Kopfhöhe nicht in Zeilen,
+sondern direkt als Längenwert angeben kann. Dies ist mit Hilfe der alternativ
verwendbaren Option \Option{headheight}\important{\Option{headheight}}
-möglich. Als \PName{Höhe} sind alle Längen und Größen verwendbar, die \LaTeX{}
-kennt. Es ist jedoch zu beachten, dass bei Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge wie
-\Length{baselineskip} nicht deren Größe zum Zeitpunkt des Setzens der Option,
-sondern zum Zeitpunkt der Berechnung des Satzspiegels und der Ränder
-entscheidend ist. Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} sollten \LaTeX-Längen wie
+möglich. Als \PName{Höhe} sind alle Längen und Größen verwendbar, die \LaTeX{}
+kennt. Es ist jedoch zu beachten, dass bei Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge wie
+\Length{baselineskip} nicht deren Größe zum Zeitpunkt des Setzens der Option,
+sondern zum Zeitpunkt der Berechnung des Satzspiegels und der Ränder
+entscheidend ist. Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} sollten \LaTeX-Längen wie
\Length{baselineskip} keinesfalls im optionalen Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} verwendet werden.
@@ -1414,11 +1414,11 @@ entscheidend ist. Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} sollten \LaTeX-Längen wie
Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen bei
Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoptionen oder per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
-müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea}
-führt nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen
-Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der
-nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
+müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea}
+führt nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen
+Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der
+nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des
Satzspiegels siehe Option
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\Option{DIV}} mit den Werten
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\PValue{last}} oder
@@ -1432,71 +1432,71 @@ Satzspiegels siehe Option
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionVName{footlines}{Zeilenanzahl}%
- \OptionVName{footheight}{Höhe}%
+ \OptionVName{footheight}{Höhe}%
\Length{footheight}%
\end{Declaration}%
-\BeginIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}%
-Wie schon für den Kopf fehlt aber noch die Angabe, wie hoch der Fuß sein
+\BeginIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}%
+Wie schon für den Kopf fehlt aber noch die Angabe, wie hoch der Fuß sein
soll. Hierzu dienen die Optionen \Option{footlines} und
\Option{footheight}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{typearea}}. Allerdings ist die
-Höhe des Fußes im Gegensatz zur Höhe des Kopfes keine Länge des \LaTeX-Kerns
-selbst. Daher definiert \Package{typearea} zur Einführung eine neue Länge
+Höhe des Fußes im Gegensatz zur Höhe des Kopfes keine Länge des \LaTeX-Kerns
+selbst. Daher definiert \Package{typearea} zur Einführung eine neue Länge
\Length{footheight}\IndexLength[indexmain]{footheight}, falls diese noch nicht
-existiert. Ob diese dann auch beispielsweise von Klassen und Paketen für die
-Gestaltung von Kopf und Fuß verwendet wird, hängt von den verwendeten Klassen
+existiert. Ob diese dann auch beispielsweise von Klassen und Paketen für die
+Gestaltung von Kopf und Fuß verwendet wird, hängt von den verwendeten Klassen
und Paketen ab. Das \KOMAScript-Paket
\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}%
-\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} berücksichtigt \Length{footheight} und
+\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} berücksichtigt \Length{footheight} und
arbeitet somit aktiv mit \Package{typearea} zusammen. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen
-berücksichtigen \Length{footheight} hingegen nicht, da sie ohne
-Paketunterstützung nur Seitenstile mit einzeiligen Seitenfüßen anbieten.
+berücksichtigen \Length{footheight} hingegen nicht, da sie ohne
+Paketunterstützung nur Seitenstile mit einzeiligen Seitenfüßen anbieten.
Die Option \Option{footlines}\important{\Option{footlines}} setzt man
vergleichbar zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headlines} auf die Anzahl der
-Fußzeilen. Normalerweise arbeitet das \Package{typearea}-Paket mit 1,25
-Fußzeilen. Dieser Wert stellt einen Kompromiss dar. Zum einen ist er groß
-genug, um auch für eine über- und unterstrichene Fußzeile (siehe
+Fußzeilen. Normalerweise arbeitet das \Package{typearea}-Paket mit 1,25
+Fußzeilen. Dieser Wert stellt einen Kompromiss dar. Zum einen ist er groß
+genug, um auch für eine über- und unterstrichene Fußzeile (siehe
\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}) Platz zu bieten, zum anderen ist er klein
-genug, um das Randgewicht nicht zu stark zu verändern, wenn mit einer
-einfachen Fußzeile ohne Trennlinien gearbeitet wird. Damit ist der
-voreingestellte Wert in den meisten Standardfällen ein guter Wert. In einigen
-Fällen will oder muss man aber die Fußhöhe genauer den tatsächlichen
+genug, um das Randgewicht nicht zu stark zu verändern, wenn mit einer
+einfachen Fußzeile ohne Trennlinien gearbeitet wird. Damit ist der
+voreingestellte Wert in den meisten Standardfällen ein guter Wert. In einigen
+Fällen will oder muss man aber die Fußhöhe genauer den tatsächlichen
Erfordernissen anpassen.
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, im Fuß soll eine zweizeilige Copyright-Angabe gesetzt
- werden. Zwar gibt es in \LaTeX{} selbst keinen Test, ob der für den Fuß
- vorgesehene Platz dafür genügend Raum bietet, die Überschreitung der
- vorgesehenen Höhe resultiert aber wahrscheinlich in einer unausgeglichenen
- Verteilung von Satzspiegeln und Rändern. Außerdem führt beispielsweise das
+ Angenommen, im Fuß soll eine zweizeilige Copyright-Angabe gesetzt
+ werden. Zwar gibt es in \LaTeX{} selbst keinen Test, ob der für den Fuß
+ vorgesehene Platz dafür genügend Raum bietet, die Überschreitung der
+ vorgesehenen Höhe resultiert aber wahrscheinlich in einer unausgeglichenen
+ Verteilung von Satzspiegeln und Rändern. Außerdem führt beispielsweise das
Paket \hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}%
\important{\hyperref[cha:scrlayer-scrpage]{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}}%
- \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}, mit dem ein solcher Fuß\-in\-halt gesetzt
- werden könnte, durchaus eine entsprechende Überprüfung durch und meldet
- gegebenenfalls auch Überschreitungen. Daher ist es sinnvoll, die benötigte
- größere Fußhöhe bereits bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels anzugeben:
+ \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}, mit dem ein solcher Fuß\-in\-halt gesetzt
+ werden könnte, durchaus eine entsprechende Überprüfung durch und meldet
+ gegebenenfalls auch Überschreitungen. Daher ist es sinnvoll, die benötigte
+ größere Fußhöhe bereits bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels anzugeben:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
\usepackage[footlines=2.1]{typearea}
\end{lstcode}
- Es ist auch wieder möglich und bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse
- empfehlenswert, diese Option direkt an die Klasse zu übergeben:
+ Es ist auch wieder möglich und bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse
+ empfehlenswert, diese Option direkt an die Klasse zu übergeben:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[footlines=2.1]{scrartcl}
\end{lstcode}
- Befehle, mit denen dann der Inhalt der zweizeiligen Fußzeile
+ Befehle, mit denen dann der Inhalt der zweizeiligen Fußzeile
definiert werden kann, sind in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} zu finden.
\end{Example}
-In einigen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man die Fußhöhe nicht in Zeilen,
-sondern direkt als Längenwert angeben kann. Dies ist mit Hilfe der alternativ
+In einigen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man die Fußhöhe nicht in Zeilen,
+sondern direkt als Längenwert angeben kann. Dies ist mit Hilfe der alternativ
verwendbaren Option \Option{footheight}\important{\Option{footheight}}
-möglich. Als \PName{Höhe} sind alle Längen und Größen verwendbar, die \LaTeX{}
-kennt. Es ist jedoch zu beachten, dass bei Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge wie
-\Length{baselineskip} nicht deren Größe zum Zeitpunkt des Setzens der Option,
-sondern zum Zeitpunkt der Berechnung des Satzspiegels und der Ränder
-entscheidend ist. Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} sollten \LaTeX-Längen wie
+möglich. Als \PName{Höhe} sind alle Längen und Größen verwendbar, die \LaTeX{}
+kennt. Es ist jedoch zu beachten, dass bei Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge wie
+\Length{baselineskip} nicht deren Größe zum Zeitpunkt des Setzens der Option,
+sondern zum Zeitpunkt der Berechnung des Satzspiegels und der Ränder
+entscheidend ist. Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} sollten \LaTeX-Längen wie
\Length{baselineskip} keinesfalls im optionalen Argument von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} oder
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} verwendet werden.
@@ -1504,11 +1504,11 @@ entscheidend ist. Außerdem\textnote{Achtung!} sollten \LaTeX-Längen wie
Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen bei
Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoptionen oder per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
-müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea}
-führt nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen
-Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der
-nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
+müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea}
+führt nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen
+Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der
+nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des
Satzspiegels siehe Option
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\Option{DIV}} mit den Werten
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\PValue{last}} oder
@@ -1520,32 +1520,32 @@ Satzspiegels siehe Option
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe}
+ \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe}
\end{Declaration}%
-Bis hier wurde nun eine Menge darüber erzählt, wie man einen guten
-Satzspiegel\Index{Satzspiegel} für Standardanwendungen erstellt und wie das
+Bis hier wurde nun eine Menge darüber erzählt, wie man einen guten
+Satzspiegel\Index{Satzspiegel} für Standardanwendungen erstellt und wie das
\Package{typearea}-Paket dem Anwender diese Arbeit erleichtert, ihm aber
-gleichzeitig Möglichkeiten der Einflussnahme bietet. Es gibt jedoch auch
-Fälle, in denen der Textkörper eine bestimmte Größe exakt einhalten soll, ohne
+gleichzeitig Möglichkeiten der Einflussnahme bietet. Es gibt jedoch auch
+Fälle, in denen der Textkörper eine bestimmte Größe exakt einhalten soll, ohne
dass dabei auf gute Satzspiegelkonstruktion oder auf weitere Nebenbedingungen
-zu achten ist. Trotzdem sollen die Ränder so gut wie möglich verteilt und
-dabei gegebenenfalls auch eine Bindekorrektur berücksichtigt werden. Das
-\Package{typearea}-Paket bietet hierfür den Befehl \Macro{areaset}, dem man
-neben der optionalen Bindekorrektur als Parameter die Breite und Höhe des
-Textbereichs übergibt. Die Ränder und deren Verteilung werden dann automatisch
+zu achten ist. Trotzdem sollen die Ränder so gut wie möglich verteilt und
+dabei gegebenenfalls auch eine Bindekorrektur berücksichtigt werden. Das
+\Package{typearea}-Paket bietet hierfür den Befehl \Macro{areaset}, dem man
+neben der optionalen Bindekorrektur als Parameter die Breite und Höhe des
+Textbereichs übergibt. Die Ränder und deren Verteilung werden dann automatisch
berechnet, wobei gegebenenfalls auch die Einstellungen der Paketoptionen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headinclude} und
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footinclude} berücksichtigt werden. Die Optionen
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footinclude} berücksichtigt werden. Die Optionen
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headlines}\IndexOption{headlines}\textnote{Achtung!},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headheight}\IndexOption{headheight},
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footlines}\IndexOption{footlines} und
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footheight}\IndexOption{footheight} bleiben in
-diesem Fall jedoch unberücksichtigt! Siehe dazu die weiterführenden
+diesem Fall jedoch unberücksichtigt! Siehe dazu die weiterführenden
Informationen zu \DescRef{typearea-experts.cmd.areaset} auf
\DescPageRef{typearea-experts.cmd.areaset} in
\autoref{sec:typearea-experts.experimental}.
-Die Voreinstellung für \PName{BCOR} ist 0\Unit{pt}. Soll hingegen die aktuelle,
+Die Voreinstellung für \PName{BCOR} ist 0\Unit{pt}. Soll hingegen die aktuelle,
beispielsweise per Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR}\IndexOption{BCOR}
eingestellte Bindekorrektur erhalten bleiben, sollte man den symbolischen Wert
\PValue{current} als optionales Argument verwenden.
@@ -1553,7 +1553,7 @@ eingestellte Bindekorrektur erhalten bleiben, sollte man den symbolischen Wert
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, ein Text auf A4-Papier soll genau die Breite von 60
Zeichen in der Typewriter-Schrift haben und exakt 30 Zeilen je Seite
- besitzen. Dann könnte mit folgender Präambel gearbeitet werden:
+ besitzen. Dann könnte mit folgender Präambel gearbeitet werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass[a4paper,11pt]{article}
\usepackage{typearea}
@@ -1565,23 +1565,23 @@ eingestellte Bindekorrektur erhalten bleiben, sollte man den symbolischen Wert
\addtolength{\LinesXXX}{29\baselineskip}
\areaset{\CharsLX}{\LinesXXX}
\end{lstcode}
- Der Faktor von 29 statt 30 ist damit begründet, dass die Grundlinie der
+ Der Faktor von 29 statt 30 ist damit begründet, dass die Grundlinie der
obersten Zeile bereits am obersten Rand des um \Macro{topskip} verringerten
- Satzspiegels liegt, solange die Höhe der obersten Zeile kleiner als
- \Macro{topskip} ist. Die oberste Zeile benötigt damit keine Höhe. Die
- Unterlängen der untersten Zeile ragen dafür unter den Satzspiegel.
+ Satzspiegels liegt, solange die Höhe der obersten Zeile kleiner als
+ \Macro{topskip} ist. Die oberste Zeile benötigt damit keine Höhe. Die
+ Unterlängen der untersten Zeile ragen dafür unter den Satzspiegel.
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext
Soll stattdessen ein Gedichtband gesetzt werden, bei dem es nur
darauf ankommt, dass der Textbereich genau quadratisch mit einer
- Seitenlänge von 15\Unit{cm} ist, wobei ein Binderand von
- 1\Unit{cm} zu berücksichtigen ist, so kann dies wie folgt
+ Seitenlänge von 15\Unit{cm} ist, wobei ein Binderand von
+ 1\Unit{cm} zu berücksichtigen ist, so kann dies wie folgt
erreicht werden:
%
\else %
Soll stattdessen ein Gedichtband mit quadratischem Textbereich der
- Seitenlänge 15\Unit{cm} und einem Binderand von 1\Unit{cm} gesetzt
- werden, so ist Folgendes möglich:
+ Seitenlänge 15\Unit{cm} und einem Binderand von 1\Unit{cm} gesetzt
+ werden, so ist Folgendes möglich:
%
\fi
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -1596,23 +1596,23 @@ eingestellte Bindekorrektur erhalten bleiben, sollte man den symbolischen Wert
\begin{Declaration}
\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}
\end{Declaration}%
-In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} seltenen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn
+In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} seltenen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn
man den aktuell eingestellten Satzspiegel neu ausrichten lassen kann. Dies ist
mit der Option
-\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}} möglich,
+\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}} möglich,
wobei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=areaset} der
Anweisung
\begin{lstcode}
\areaset[current]{\textwidth}{\textheight}
\end{lstcode}
-entspricht. Dasselbe Ergebnis erhält man auch, wenn
+entspricht. Dasselbe Ergebnis erhält man auch, wenn
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{last} verwendet wird und der Satzspiegel
zuletzt per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.areaset} eingestellt wurde.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext: Alternativen
-Wenn Sie konkrete Vorgaben bezüglich der Ränder zu erfüllen haben, ist
+Wenn Sie konkrete Vorgaben bezüglich der Ränder zu erfüllen haben, ist
\Package{typearea} nicht geeignet. In diesem Fall ist die Verwendung des
Pakets
\Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry}\important{\Package{geometry}} (siehe
@@ -1621,8 +1621,8 @@ Pakets
\fi
\iffalse
%
-Das Paket \Package{typearea} ist nicht dafür gedacht, bestimmte Randbreiten
-einzustellen. Dafür ist das Paket \Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry}
+Das Paket \Package{typearea} ist nicht dafür gedacht, bestimmte Randbreiten
+einzustellen. Dafür ist das Paket \Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry}
(siehe \cite{package:geometry}) empfehlenswert.
%
\fi
@@ -1633,14 +1633,14 @@ einzustellen. Dafür ist das Paket \Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry}
\BeginIndexGroup
Das Papierformat ist ein entscheidendes Grundmerkmal eines Dokuments. Wie
-bereits bei der Vorstellung der unterstützten Satzspiegelkonstruktionen (siehe
+bereits bei der Vorstellung der unterstützten Satzspiegelkonstruktionen (siehe
\autoref{sec:typearea.basics} bis \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction} ab
\autopageref{sec:typearea.basics})
-aufgezeigt, steht und fällt die Auf"|teilung der Seite und damit das gesamte
-Dokumentlayout mit der Wahl des Papierformats. Während die
-\LaTeX-Standardklassen auf einige wenige Formate festgelegt sind, unterstützt
+aufgezeigt, steht und fällt die Auf"|teilung der Seite und damit das gesamte
+Dokumentlayout mit der Wahl des Papierformats. Während die
+\LaTeX-Standardklassen auf einige wenige Formate festgelegt sind, unterstützt
\KOMAScript{} mit dem Paket \Package{typearea} selbst ausgefallene
-Seitengrößen.
+Seitengrößen.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -1657,9 +1657,9 @@ zentrale Element der Formatauswahl\important[i]{%
& \PValue{B0}, \PValue{B1}, \PValue{B2} \dots\\
& \PValue{C0}, \PValue{C1}, \PValue{C2} \dots\\
& \PValue{D0}, \PValue{D1}, \PValue{D2} \dots\end{tabular}} %
-bei \KOMAScript. Als \PName{Format} wird dabei zunächst das amerikanische
-\Option{letter}, \Option{legal} und \Option{executive} unterstützt. Darüber
-hinaus sind die ISO-Formate der Reihen A, B, C und D möglich, also
+bei \KOMAScript. Als \PName{Format} wird dabei zunächst das amerikanische
+\Option{letter}, \Option{legal} und \Option{executive} unterstützt. Darüber
+hinaus sind die ISO-Formate der Reihen A, B, C und D möglich, also
beispielsweise \PValue{A4} oder -- klein geschrieben -- \PValue{a4}.
Querformate\important{%
@@ -1667,12 +1667,12 @@ Querformate\important{%
\KOption{paper} & \PValue{landscape}, \\
& \PValue{seascape}
\end{tabular}%
-} werden dadurch unterstützt, dass man die Option ein weiteres Mal mit dem
+} werden dadurch unterstützt, dass man die Option ein weiteres Mal mit dem
Wert \PValue{landscape}\Index{Papier>Ausrichtung} oder
\PValue{seascape}\ChangedAt{v3.02c}{\Package{typearea}} angibt. Dabei
unterscheiden sich \PValue{landscape} und \PValue{seascape} nur darin, dass
das Programm \File{dvips} bei \PValue{landscape} um -90\Unit{\textdegree}
-dreht, während bei \PValue{seascape} um +90\Unit{\textdegree} gedreht
+dreht, während bei \PValue{seascape} um +90\Unit{\textdegree} gedreht
wird. Hilfreich ist \PValue{seascape} also vor allem dann, wenn ein
PostScript-Anzeigeprogramm die Seiten im Querformat auf dem Kopf stellt.
Damit der Unterschied eine Rolle spielt, darf auch die nachfolgend
@@ -1680,33 +1680,33 @@ beschriebene Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagesize}%
\IndexOption{pagesize}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagesize}} nicht
deaktiviert sein.
-Zusätzlich kann das \PName{Format} auch in der Form
-\PName{Breite}\texttt{:}\PName{Höhe}\ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}}%
-\important{\OptionVName{paper}{Breite\textup{:}Höhe}} beziehungsweise
-\PName{Höhe}\texttt{:}\PName{Breite}\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Package{typearea}}%
-\important{\OptionVName{paper}{Höhe\textup{:}Breite}} angegeben
-werden. Welcher Wert die \PName{Höhe} und welcher die \PName{Breite} ist,
+Zusätzlich kann das \PName{Format} auch in der Form
+\PName{Breite}\texttt{:}\PName{Höhe}\ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}}%
+\important{\OptionVName{paper}{Breite\textup{:}Höhe}} beziehungsweise
+\PName{Höhe}\texttt{:}\PName{Breite}\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Package{typearea}}%
+\important{\OptionVName{paper}{Höhe\textup{:}Breite}} angegeben
+werden. Welcher Wert die \PName{Höhe} und welcher die \PName{Breite} ist,
richtet sich nach der Ausrichtung des Papiers. Mit
\OptionValue{paper}{landscape} oder \OptionValue{paper}{seascape} ist der
-kleinere Wert die \PName{Höhe} und der größere Wert die \PName{Breite}. Mit
+kleinere Wert die \PName{Höhe} und der größere Wert die \PName{Breite}. Mit
\OptionValue{paper}{portrait}\important{\OptionValue{paper}{portrait}} ist
-dagegen der kleinere Wert die \PName{Breite} und der größere Wert die
-\PName{Höhe}.
+dagegen der kleinere Wert die \PName{Breite} und der größere Wert die
+\PName{Höhe}.
Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass bis Version~3.01a der
-erste Wert immer die \PName{Höhe} und der zweite Wert die \PName{Breite}
+erste Wert immer die \PName{Höhe} und der zweite Wert die \PName{Breite}
war. Dagegen war von Version~3.01b bis Version~3.21a der erste Wert immer die
-\PName{Breite} und der zweite Wert immer die \PName{Höhe}. Dies ist
+\PName{Breite} und der zweite Wert immer die \PName{Höhe}. Dies ist
insbesondere dann zu beachten, wenn mit einer entsprechenden
-Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}%
+Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}%
\IndexOption{version}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}},
\autoref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions},
\DescPageRef{typearea.option.version}) gearbeitet wird.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, es soll eine Karteikarte im Format ISO-A8 quer bedruckt
- werden. Dabei sollen die Ränder sehr klein gewählt werden. Außerdem
- wird auf eine Kopf- und eine Fußzeile verzichtet.
+ werden. Dabei sollen die Ränder sehr klein gewählt werden. Außerdem
+ wird auf eine Kopf- und eine Fußzeile verzichtet.
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[headinclude=false,footinclude=false,%
@@ -1719,7 +1719,7 @@ Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}%
b0, b1 \dots\ c0, c1 \dots\ d0, d1 \dots
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- Haben die Karteikarten das Sonderformat (Breite:Höhe)
+ Haben die Karteikarten das Sonderformat (Breite:Höhe)
5\Unit{cm}\,:\,3\Unit{cm}, so ist dies mit
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{article}
@@ -1733,7 +1733,7 @@ Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}%
b0, b1 \dots\ c0, c1 \dots\ d0, d1 \dots
\end{document}
\end{lstcode}
- möglich.
+ möglich.
\end{Example}
In der Voreinstellung wird bei \KOMAScript{} mit A4-Papier in der Ausrichtung
@@ -1744,12 +1744,12 @@ das amerikanische Format letter verwendet wird.
Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Option bei
Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoption oder per
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise
-\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
-muss. Eine Änderung des Papierformats oder der Papierausrichtung mit Hilfe
+\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden
+muss. Eine Änderung des Papierformats oder der Papierausrichtung mit Hilfe
der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\textnote{keine automatische
Neuberechnung} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden von
-\Package{typearea} führt nicht zu einer automatischen Neuberechnung des
-Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der nächsten
+\Package{typearea} führt nicht zu einer automatischen Neuberechnung des
+Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der nächsten
Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe
Option \hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\Option{DIV}} mit den Werten
\hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\PValue{last}} oder
@@ -1765,100 +1765,100 @@ Option \hyperref[desc:\LabelBase.option.DIV.last]{\Option{DIV}} mit den Werten
\end{Declaration}%
\begin{Explain}%
Die oben genannten Mechanismen zur Auswahl des Papierformats haben nur
- insofern einen Einfluss auf die Ausgabe, als interne {\LaTeX}-Maße gesetzt
+ insofern einen Einfluss auf die Ausgabe, als interne {\LaTeX}-Maße gesetzt
werden. Das Paket \Package{typearea} verwendet diese dann bei der
- Auf"|teilung der Seite in Ränder und Textbereich. Die Spezifikation des
+ Auf"|teilung der Seite in Ränder und Textbereich. Die Spezifikation des
DVI-Formats\Index{DVI} sieht aber an keiner Stelle Angaben zum Papierformat
vor. %
\iffree{%
Wird direkt aus dem DVI-Format in eine Low-Level-Druckersprache wie PCL%
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrektur
- \footnote{PCL ist eine Familie von Druckersprachen, die HP für seine
+ \footnote{PCL ist eine Familie von Druckersprachen, die HP für seine
Tinten- und Laserdrucker verwendet.}%
\fi \ oder ESC/P2%
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrektur
- \footnote{ESC/P2 ist die Druckersprache, die EPSON für seine 24-Nadel- und
- ältere Tinten- oder Laserdrucker benutzt.}%
+ \footnote{ESC/P2 ist die Druckersprache, die EPSON für seine 24-Nadel- und
+ ältere Tinten- oder Laserdrucker benutzt.}%
\fi \ beziehungsweise ESC/P-R%
\iftrue% Umbruchkorrektur
- \footnote{ESC/P-R ist die Druckersprache, die EPSON aktuell für Tinten-
+ \footnote{ESC/P-R ist die Druckersprache, die EPSON aktuell für Tinten-
und Laserdrucker benutzt.}%
\fi \ ausgegeben, spielt dies normalerweise keine Rolle%
}{%
- In früheren Zeiten, als DVI zum Ausruck noch direkt in
- Low-Level-Druckersprachen übertragen wurde, spielte dies keine Rolle%
+ In früheren Zeiten, als DVI zum Ausruck noch direkt in
+ Low-Level-Druckersprachen übertragen wurde, spielte dies keine Rolle%
}, da auch bei diesen Ausgaben der 0-Bezugspunkt wie bei DVI links oben
liegt. \iffree{Wird aber}{Heutzutage wird aber meist} in Sprachen wie
- PostScript\Index{PostScript} oder PDF\Index{PDF} übersetzt, bei denen der
- 0-Bezugspunkt an anderer Stelle liegt und außerdem das Papierformat in der
+ PostScript\Index{PostScript} oder PDF\Index{PDF} übersetzt, bei denen der
+ 0-Bezugspunkt an anderer Stelle liegt und außerdem das Papierformat in der
Ausgabedatei angegeben werden sollte\iffree{, so}{. Dabei} fehlt diese
- Information. Als Lösung des Problems verwendet der entsprechende Treiber
- eine voreingestellte Papiergröße, die der Anwender entweder per Option oder
- durch entsprechende Angabe in der {\TeX}-Quelldatei verändern kann. Bei
+ Information. Als Lösung des Problems verwendet der entsprechende Treiber
+ eine voreingestellte Papiergröße, die der Anwender entweder per Option oder
+ durch entsprechende Angabe in der {\TeX}-Quelldatei verändern kann. Bei
Verwendung des DVI-Treibers \File{dvips} oder \File{dvipdfm} kann diese
Angabe in Form einer \Macro{special}-Anweisung erfolgen. Bei Verwendung von
{pdf\TeX}, {lua\TeX}, {\XeTeX} oder {V\TeX} werden deren
- Papierformat-Längen entsprechend gesetzt.%
+ Papierformat-Längen entsprechend gesetzt.%
\end{Explain}
-Mit der Option \Option{pagesize} kann eingestellt werden, für welchen
-Ausgabetreiber die Papiergröße in das Ausgabedokument geschrieben wird. Die
-unterstützten Ausgabetreiber sind \autoref{tab:typearea.outputdriver} \iffalse
+Mit der Option \Option{pagesize} kann eingestellt werden, für welchen
+Ausgabetreiber die Papiergröße in das Ausgabedokument geschrieben wird. Die
+unterstützten Ausgabetreiber sind \autoref{tab:typearea.outputdriver} \iffalse
auf \autopageref{tab:typearea.outputdriver}\fi zu
entnehmen. Voreingestellt\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{typearea}} ist
\Option{pagesize}. Diese Verwendung der Option ohne Angabe eines Wertes
entspricht \OptionValue{pagesize}{auto}.
%
\begin{table}
- \caption{Ausgabetreiber für Option \OptionVName{pagesize}{Ausgabetreiber}}
+ \caption{Ausgabetreiber für Option \OptionVName{pagesize}{Ausgabetreiber}}
\begin{desctabular}
\pventry{auto}{Falls die pdf\TeX-spezifischen Register
\Macro{pdfpagewidth}\IndexLength{pdfpagewidth} und
\Macro{pdfpageheight}\IndexLength{pdfpageheight} oder die
lua\TeX-spezifischen Register \Macro{pagewidth}\IndexLength{pagewidth}
und \Macro{pageheight}\IndexLength{pageheight} vorhanden sind, wird
- der Ausgabetreiber \PValue{pdftex} aktiviert. Zusätzlich wird auch der
+ der Ausgabetreiber \PValue{pdftex} aktiviert. Zusätzlich wird auch der
Ausgabetreiber \PValue{dvips}
- verwendet. Diese Einstellung ist grundsätzlich auch für \XeTeX{}
+ verwendet. Diese Einstellung ist grundsätzlich auch für \XeTeX{}
geeignet.%
\IndexOption{pagesize~=\textKValue{auto}}}%
\pventry{automedia}{Dies entspricht dem Ausgabetreiber
- \PValue{auto}. Allerdings werden zusätzlich auch noch die
+ \PValue{auto}. Allerdings werden zusätzlich auch noch die
\mbox{V\TeX}-spezifischen Register
\Macro{mediawidth}\IndexLength{mediawidth} und
\Macro{mediaheight}\IndexLength{mediaheight} gesetzt, falls diese
definiert sind.%
\IndexOption{pagesize~=\textKValue{automedia}}}%
\entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{no}, \PValue{off}}{%
- Die Papiergröße wird nicht an den Ausgabetreiber
+ Die Papiergröße wird nicht an den Ausgabetreiber
gemeldet.%
\IndexOption{pagesize~=\textKValue{false}}}%
- \pventry{dvipdfmx}{\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{typearea}}Die Papiergröße
+ \pventry{dvipdfmx}{\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{typearea}}Die Papiergröße
wird als
- \Macro{special}\PParameter{pagesize=\PName{Breite},\PName{Höhe}} in die
+ \Macro{special}\PParameter{pagesize=\PName{Breite},\PName{Höhe}} in die
DVI-Datei geschrieben. Der Name des Ausgabetreibers kommt daher, dass
das Programm \File{dvipdfmx} eine Pa\-pier\-for\-mat\-um\-schal\-tung
- über diese Anweisung auch innerhalb des Dokuments erlaubt.%
+ über diese Anweisung auch innerhalb des Dokuments erlaubt.%
\IndexOption{pagesize~=\textKValue{dvipdfmx}}}%
- \pventry{dvips}{Bei Verwendung innerhalb der Dokumentpräambel wird die
- Papiergröße über
- \Macro{special}\PParameter{pagesize=\PName{Breite},\PName{Höhe}} in das
+ \pventry{dvips}{Bei Verwendung innerhalb der Dokumentpräambel wird die
+ Papiergröße über
+ \Macro{special}\PParameter{pagesize=\PName{Breite},\PName{Höhe}} in das
Dokument geschrieben. Da das Programm \File{dvips} keine
- Pa\-pier\-for\-mat\-um\-schal\-tung innerhalb des Dokuments unterstützt,
+ Pa\-pier\-for\-mat\-um\-schal\-tung innerhalb des Dokuments unterstützt,
wird bei Bedarf im Dokument ein recht unsauberer Hack verwendet, um die
- Umschaltung nach Möglichkeit dennoch zu
- erreichen. Pa\-pier\-for\-mat\-um\-schal\-tung nach der Dokumentprämbel
+ Umschaltung nach Möglichkeit dennoch zu
+ erreichen. Pa\-pier\-for\-mat\-um\-schal\-tung nach der Dokumentprämbel
bei gleichzeitiger Verwendung des Ausgabetreibers \PValue{dvips}
erfolgen daher auf eigene Gefahr!%
\IndexOption{pagesize~=\textKValue{dvips}}}%
\entry{\PValue{pdftex}, \PValue{luatex}}{%
- \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{typearea}}Die Papiergröße
- wird über die pdf\TeX-spezifischen Register
+ \ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{typearea}}Die Papiergröße
+ wird über die pdf\TeX-spezifischen Register
\Macro{pdfpagewidth}\IndexLength{pdfpagewidth} und
\Macro{pdfpageheight}\IndexLength{pdfpageheight} oder die
lua\TeX-spezifischen Register \Macro{pagewidth}\IndexLength{pagewidth}
und \Macro{pageheight}\IndexLength{pageheight} gesetzt. Dies ist
auch jederzeit innerhalb des Dokuments problemlos
- möglich.%
+ möglich.%
\IndexOption{pagesize~=\textKValue{pdftex}}%
\IndexOption{pagesize~=\textKValue{luatex}}}%
\end{desctabular}
@@ -1868,29 +1868,29 @@ entspricht \OptionValue{pagesize}{auto}.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, es soll ein Dokument sowohl als DVI-Datei verwendet
werden, als auch eine Online-Version im PDF-Format erstellt
- werden. Dann könnte die Präambel beispielsweise so beginnen:
+ werden. Dann könnte die Präambel beispielsweise so beginnen:
\begin{lstcode}[%
aboveskip=.5\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip minus .1\baselineskip,%
belowskip=.4\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip minus .1\baselineskip]
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[paper=A4,pagesize]{typearea}
\end{lstcode}
- Wird nun für die Bearbeitung {pdf\TeX} verwendet \emph{und} die
- PDF-Ausgabe aktiviert, so werden die beiden Spezialgrößen
+ Wird nun für die Bearbeitung {pdf\TeX} verwendet \emph{und} die
+ PDF-Ausgabe aktiviert, so werden die beiden Spezialgrößen
\Macro{pdfpagewidth} und \Macro{pdfpageheight} entsprechend gesetzt.
Wird jedoch eine DVI-Datei erzeugt -- egal ob mit {\LaTeX} oder
{pdf\LaTeX} --, so wird ein \Macro{special} an den Anfang dieser
Datei geschrieben.
\end{Example}%
-\iffree{% Die Empfehlung ist eigentlich überholt. Wer derart alte Versionen
+\iffree{% Die Empfehlung ist eigentlich überholt. Wer derart alte Versionen
% von typearea verwendet, ist selbst schuld.
Es wird empfohlen\textnote{Achtung!}, die Option \Option{pagesize} immer
-anzugeben, weil frühere Versionen von \Package{typearea} sie noch nicht als
+anzugeben, weil frühere Versionen von \Package{typearea} sie noch nicht als
Voreinstellung gesetzt haben. In der Regel ist dabei die Methode ohne
\PName{Ausgabetreiber} oder mit \PValue{auto} oder \PValue{automedia}
-günstig.%
+günstig.%
}{%
- \vskip-1\ht\strutbox plus .75\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
+ \vskip-1\ht\strutbox plus .75\ht\strutbox% Wegen Beispiel am Ende der Erklärung
}
\EndIndexGroup
%
@@ -1901,128 +1901,128 @@ günstig.%
\section{Tipps}
\seclabel{tips}
-Insbesondere für die Erstellung von schriftlichen Arbeiten während des
-Studiums findet man häufig Vorschriften\textnote{Satzvorschriften
+Insbesondere für die Erstellung von schriftlichen Arbeiten während des
+Studiums findet man häufig Vorschriften\textnote{Satzvorschriften
vs. gute~Typografie}, die einer typografischen Begutachtung nicht nur in
keiner Weise standhalten, sondern massiv gegen alle Regeln der Typografie
-verstoßen. Ursache für solche Regeln ist oft typografische Inkompetenz
+verstoßen. Ursache für solche Regeln ist oft typografische Inkompetenz
derjenigen, die sie herausgeben. Manchmal ist die Ursache auch im
-Ausgangspunkt begründet, nämlich der Schreibmaschine. Mit einer
+Ausgangspunkt begründet, nämlich der Schreibmaschine. Mit einer
Schreibmaschine oder einer Textverarbeitung von 1980 ist es
ohne
-erheblichen Aufwand kaum möglich, typografisch perfekte Ergebnisse zu
-erzielen. Also wurden einst Vorschriften erlassen, die leicht erfüllbar
-schienen und dem Korrektor trotzdem entgegenkommen. Dazu zählen dann
-Randeinstellungen, die für einseitigen Druck mit einer Schreibmaschine zu
-brauchbaren Zeilenlängen führen. Um nicht extrem kurze Zeilen zu erhalten, die
-durch Flattersatz zudem verschlimmert werden, werden die Ränder schmal
-gehalten und für Korrekturen stattdessen ein großer Durchschuss in Form von
+erheblichen Aufwand kaum möglich, typografisch perfekte Ergebnisse zu
+erzielen. Also wurden einst Vorschriften erlassen, die leicht erfüllbar
+schienen und dem Korrektor trotzdem entgegenkommen. Dazu zählen dann
+Randeinstellungen, die für einseitigen Druck mit einer Schreibmaschine zu
+brauchbaren Zeilenlängen führen. Um nicht extrem kurze Zeilen zu erhalten, die
+durch Flattersatz zudem verschlimmert werden, werden die Ränder schmal
+gehalten und für Korrekturen stattdessen ein großer Durchschuss in Form von
eineinhalbzeiligem Satz vorgeschrieben. Bevor moderne
-Textverarbeitungssysteme verfügbar wurden, wäre -- außer mit {\TeX} --
-einzeiliger Satz die einzige Alternative gewesen. Dabei wäre dann selbst das
+Textverarbeitungssysteme verfügbar wurden, wäre -- außer mit {\TeX} --
+einzeiliger Satz die einzige Alternative gewesen. Dabei wäre dann selbst das
Anbringen von Korrekturzeichen schwierig geworden. Als die Verwendung von
-Computern für die Erstellung schriftlicher Arbeiten üblicher wurde, hat sich
+Computern für die Erstellung schriftlicher Arbeiten üblicher wurde, hat sich
manches Mal auch der Spieltrieb des einen oder anderen Studenten gezeigt, der
durch Verwendung einer Schmuckschrift seine Arbeit aufpeppen und so eine
bessere Note mit weniger Einsatz herausschinden wollte. Nicht bedacht hat er
-dabei, dass solche Schriften schlechter zu lesen und deshalb für den Zweck
+dabei, dass solche Schriften schlechter zu lesen und deshalb für den Zweck
ungeeignet sind. Damit hielten zwei Brotschriften Einzug in die Vorschriften,
die weder zusammenpassen noch im Falle von Times wirklich gut geeignet
sind. Times ist eine relativ enge Schrift, die Anfang des 20.~Jahrhunderts
-speziell für schmale Spalten im englischen Zeitungssatz entworfen wurde. In
-modernen Schnitten ist dies etwas entschärft. Dennoch passt die häufig
+speziell für schmale Spalten im englischen Zeitungssatz entworfen wurde. In
+modernen Schnitten ist dies etwas entschärft. Dennoch passt die häufig
vorgeschriebene Times meist nicht zu den gleichzeitig gegebenen Randvorgaben.
{\LaTeX} setzt bereits von sich aus mit ausreichendem Durchschuss.
-Gleichzeitig sind die Ränder bei sinnvollen Zeilenlängen groß genug, um Platz
-für Korrekturen zu bieten. Dabei wirkt die Seite trotz einer Fülle von Text
-großzügig angelegt.
+Gleichzeitig sind die Ränder bei sinnvollen Zeilenlängen groß genug, um Platz
+für Korrekturen zu bieten. Dabei wirkt die Seite trotz einer Fülle von Text
+großzügig angelegt.
-Oft sind die typografisch mehr als fragwürdigen Satzvorschriften mit {\LaTeX}
-auch außerordentlich schwierig umzusetzen. So kann eine feste Anzahl von
-»Anschlägen« nur dann eingehalten werden, wenn keine proportionale Schrift
+Oft sind die typografisch mehr als fragwürdigen Satzvorschriften mit {\LaTeX}
+auch außerordentlich schwierig umzusetzen. So kann eine feste Anzahl von
+»Anschlägen« nur dann eingehalten werden, wenn keine proportionale Schrift
verwendet wird. Es gibt nur wenige gute nichtproportionale Schriften.
\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur
Kaum ein Text, der mit einer derartigen Schrift gesetzt ist, wirkt wirklich
-gut. So wird häufig %
+gut. So wird häufig %
\else
-Häufig wird %
+Häufig wird %
\fi %
versucht, durch ausladende Serifen beispielsweise beim kleinen
-»i« oder »l« die unterschiedliche Breite der Zeichen auszugleichen. Dies kann
+»i« oder »l« die unterschiedliche Breite der Zeichen auszugleichen. Dies kann
nicht funktionieren. Im Ergebnis wirkt der Text unruhig und
-zerrissen. Außerdem verträgt sich eine solche Schrift kaum mit dem im
-deutschen Sprachraum üblichen und allgemein vorzuziehenden Blocksatz. Gewisse
-Vorgaben können daher bei Verwendung von {\LaTeX} nur ignoriert oder großzügig
-ausgelegt werden, etwa indem man »60~Anschläge pro Zeile« nicht als feste,
+zerrissen. Außerdem verträgt sich eine solche Schrift kaum mit dem im
+deutschen Sprachraum üblichen und allgemein vorzuziehenden Blocksatz. Gewisse
+Vorgaben können daher bei Verwendung von {\LaTeX} nur ignoriert oder großzügig
+ausgelegt werden, etwa indem man »60~Anschläge pro Zeile« nicht als feste,
sondern als durchschnittliche oder maximale Angabe interpretiert.
-Wie ausgeführt, sind Satzvorschriften meist dazu gedacht, ein brauchbares
-Ergebnis zu erhalten, auch wenn der Ausführende selbst nicht weiß, was dabei
-zu beachten ist. Brauchbar bedeutet häufig: lesbar und korrigierbar. Nach
+Wie ausgeführt, sind Satzvorschriften meist dazu gedacht, ein brauchbares
+Ergebnis zu erhalten, auch wenn der Ausführende selbst nicht weiß, was dabei
+zu beachten ist. Brauchbar bedeutet häufig: lesbar und korrigierbar. Nach
meiner Auf"|fassung wird ein mit {\LaTeX} und dem \Package{typearea}-Paket
-gesetzter Text bezüglich des Satzspiegels diesen Anforderungen von vornherein
+gesetzter Text bezüglich des Satzspiegels diesen Anforderungen von vornherein
gerecht. Wenn Sie also mit Vorschriften konfrontiert sind, die offensichtlich
erheblich davon abweichen, so empfehle ich, dem Betreuer einen Textauszug
vorzulegen und nachzufragen, ob es gestattet ist, die Arbeit trotz der
-Abweichungen in dieser Form zu liefern. Gegebenenfalls kann durch Veränderung
+Abweichungen in dieser Form zu liefern. Gegebenenfalls kann durch Veränderung
der Option
\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}} der
Satzspiegel moderat angepasst werden. Von der Verwendung von
\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.areaset} zu diesem Zweck rate ich jedoch
-ab. Schlimmstenfalls verwenden Sie das nicht zu {\KOMAScript} gehörende
+ab. Schlimmstenfalls verwenden Sie das nicht zu {\KOMAScript} gehörende
\Package{geometry}-Paket\important{\Package{geometry}}\IndexPackage{geometry}
-(siehe \cite{package:geometry}) oder verändern Sie die Satzspiegelparameter
+(siehe \cite{package:geometry}) oder verändern Sie die Satzspiegelparameter
von {\LaTeX} selbst. Die von \Package{typearea} ermittelten Werte finden Sie
in der \File{log}-Datei Ihres Dokuments. Mit Hilfe von Option
\DescRef{typearea-experts.option.usegeometry}%
\important{\DescRef{typearea-experts.option.usegeometry}}, die Sie in
-\autoref{part:forExperts} finden, kann außerdem die Zusammenarbeit von
+\autoref{part:forExperts} finden, kann außerdem die Zusammenarbeit von
\Package{typearea} und \Package{geometry} verbessert werden. Damit sollten
-moderate Anpassungen möglich sein. Achten Sie jedoch unbedingt darauf, dass
-die Proportionen des Textbereichs mit denen der Seite unter Berücksichtigung
-der Bindekorrektur annähernd übereinstimmen.
+moderate Anpassungen möglich sein. Achten Sie jedoch unbedingt darauf, dass
+die Proportionen des Textbereichs mit denen der Seite unter Berücksichtigung
+der Bindekorrektur annähernd übereinstimmen.
Sollte es unbedingt erforderlich sein, den Text eineinhalbzeilig zu setzen, so
definieren Sie keinesfalls \Macro{baselinestretch} um. Dieses Vorgehen wird
-zwar allzu häufig empfohlen, ist aber seit der Einführung von {\LaTeXe} im
+zwar allzu häufig empfohlen, ist aber seit der Einführung von {\LaTeXe} im
Jahre 1994 obsolet. Verwenden Sie schlimmstenfalls den Befehl
\Macro{linespread}. Ich empfehle das Paket
\Package{setspace}\important{\Package{setspace}}\IndexPackage{setspace}, das
-nicht zu {\KOMAScript} gehört (siehe \cite{package:setspace}). Auch sollten
+nicht zu {\KOMAScript} gehört (siehe \cite{package:setspace}). Auch sollten
Sie \Package{typearea} nach der Umstellung des Zeilenabstandes den Satzspiegel
-für diesen Abstand berechnen lassen, jedoch für den Titel, besser auch für die
+für diesen Abstand berechnen lassen, jedoch für den Titel, besser auch für die
Verzeichnisse -- sowie das Literaturverzeichnis und den Index -- wieder auf
-normalen Satz umschalten. Näheres dazu finden Sie bei der Erklärung zu
+normalen Satz umschalten. Näheres dazu finden Sie bei der Erklärung zu
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{current}%
\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{current}}.
Das \Package{typearea}-Paket berechnet auch bei der Option
\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}%
-\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}} einen sehr großzügigen
+\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}} einen sehr großzügigen
Textbereich. Viele konservative Typografen werden feststellen, dass die
-resultierende Zeilenlänge noch zu groß ist. Der berechnete \Var{DIV}-Wert ist
+resultierende Zeilenlänge noch zu groß ist. Der berechnete \Var{DIV}-Wert ist
ebenfalls in der \File{log}-Datei zum jeweiligen Dokument zu finden. Sie
-können also leicht nach dem ersten \LaTeX-Lauf einen kleineren Wert wählen.
+können also leicht nach dem ersten \LaTeX-Lauf einen kleineren Wert wählen.
Nicht\textnote{Was ist besser?} selten wird mir die Frage gestellt, warum ich
-eigentlich kapitelweise auf einer Satzspiegelberechnung herumreite, während es
-sehr viel einfacher wäre, nur ein Paket zur Verfügung zu stellen, mit dem man
-die Ränder wie bei einer Textverarbeitung einstellen kann. Oft wird auch
-behauptet, ein solches Paket wäre ohnehin die bessere Lösung, da jeder selbst
-wisse, wie gute Ränder zu wählen seien, und die Ränder von {\KOMAScript} wären
+eigentlich kapitelweise auf einer Satzspiegelberechnung herumreite, während es
+sehr viel einfacher wäre, nur ein Paket zur Verfügung zu stellen, mit dem man
+die Ränder wie bei einer Textverarbeitung einstellen kann. Oft wird auch
+behauptet, ein solches Paket wäre ohnehin die bessere Lösung, da jeder selbst
+wisse, wie gute Ränder zu wählen seien, und die Ränder von {\KOMAScript} wären
ohnehin nicht gut. Ich erlaube mir zum Abschluss dieses Kapitels ein passendes
Zitat von Hans Peter Willberg und Friedrich Forssmann, zwei der angesehensten
Typografen der Gegenwart (siehe \cite{TYPO:ErsteHilfe}):
\begin{quote}
\phantomsection\label{sec:typearea.tips.cite}%
- \textit{Das\textnote{Zitat!} Selbermachen ist längst üblich, die Ergebnisse
- oft fragwürdig, weil Laien-Typografen nicht sehen, was nicht stimmt und
- nicht wissen können, worauf es ankommt. So gewöhnt man sich an falsche und
- schlechte Typografie.} [\dots] \textit{Jetzt könnte der Einwand kommen,
- Typografie sei doch Geschmackssache. Wenn es um Dekoration ginge, könnte
+ \textit{Das\textnote{Zitat!} Selbermachen ist längst üblich, die Ergebnisse
+ oft fragwürdig, weil Laien-Typografen nicht sehen, was nicht stimmt und
+ nicht wissen können, worauf es ankommt. So gewöhnt man sich an falsche und
+ schlechte Typografie.} [\dots] \textit{Jetzt könnte der Einwand kommen,
+ Typografie sei doch Geschmackssache. Wenn es um Dekoration ginge, könnte
man das Argument vielleicht gelten lassen, da es aber bei Typografie in
- erster Linie um Information geht, können Fehler nicht nur stören, sondern
+ erster Linie um Information geht, können Fehler nicht nur stören, sondern
sogar Schaden anrichten.}
\end{quote}
%
@@ -2030,6 +2030,6 @@ Typografen der Gegenwart (siehe \cite{TYPO:ErsteHilfe}):
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: "../guide"
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx
index f0006db25f..556f1ff463 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/plength.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse
% ======================================================================
% plength.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% plength.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2005-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -87,7 +87,6 @@
\ProvidesFile{plength.drv}[2014/02/28 plength MetaPost graphics]
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\begin{document}
\DocInput{plength.dtx}
\end{document}
@@ -95,7 +94,7 @@
%</driver>
% \fi
%
-% \title{MetaPost-Grafiken für das Briefkapitel}
+% \title{MetaPost-Grafiken für das Briefkapitel}
% \author{Stephan Hennig und Markus Kohm}
% \date{2010-02-09}
% \maketitle
@@ -106,14 +105,14 @@
% \begin{flushleft}
% \texttt{mpost --tex=latex} \meta{mp-file}
% \end{flushleft}
-% bearbeitet ergibt \texttt{1}-Dateien. Diese können als EPS-Dateien
+% bearbeitet ergibt \texttt{1}-Dateien. Diese können als EPS-Dateien
% geladen werden. Es kann aber auch mit
% \begin{flushleft}
% \texttt{mptopdf} \meta{1-Datei}
% \end{flushleft}
% eine PDF-Datei erzeugt werden.
%
-% Anpassungen werden ausschließlich in der \texttt{dtx}-Datei vorgenommen!
+% Anpassungen werden ausschließlich in der \texttt{dtx}-Datei vorgenommen!
% Wesentlich ist dabei der Abschnitt \texttt{main}.
%
%<*main>
@@ -124,12 +123,12 @@
% Hinweise zu den Variablen:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item \texttt{input pllcoDIN} oder \texttt{input pllcoSN}\hfill\\
-% legt fest, ob die Maße für Briefe nach DIN oder SN
-% geladen werden. Damit kann gewählt werden, welches Layout
-% verdeutlicht werden soll. Sollen die Längen eingezeichnet werden,
+% legt fest, ob die Maße für Briefe nach DIN oder SN
+% geladen werden. Damit kann gewählt werden, welches Layout
+% verdeutlicht werden soll. Sollen die Längen eingezeichnet werden,
% ist pllcoDIN zu verwenden.
% \item \texttt{grafikhoehe}\hfill\\
-% legt die Höhe der Ausgabedatei fest.
+% legt die Höhe der Ausgabedatei fest.
% \item \texttt{strichstaerke}\hfill\\
% bestimmt die Stiftbreite, die zum Zeichnen des
% Briefbogens, der Faltmarken und der From-Rule benutzt wird.
@@ -138,32 +137,32 @@
% Element-Rahmen (nicht der Hilfsrahmen).
% \item \texttt{hilfsstrichstaerke}\hfill\\
% bestimmt die Stiftbreite zum Zeichnen der
-% Bemaßung und der Hilfsrahmen.
+% Bemaßung und der Hilfsrahmen.
% \item \texttt{tickhoehe}\hfill\\
-% legt die Höhe der vertikalen Linien horizontaler
-% Bemaßung fest (Makro hmeasure). Die Maßlinie wird auf halber Höhe
-% von tickhoehe gezeichnet. Für die Makros vmeasure und dmeasure gilt
-% ähnliches. In dmeasure wird jedoch ein Vielfaches von tickhoehe
+% legt die Höhe der vertikalen Linien horizontaler
+% Bemaßung fest (Makro hmeasure). Die Maßlinie wird auf halber Höhe
+% von tickhoehe gezeichnet. Für die Makros vmeasure und dmeasure gilt
+% ähnliches. In dmeasure wird jedoch ein Vielfaches von tickhoehe
% verwendet.
% \item \texttt{framed} und \texttt{filled}\hfill\\
% legen fest, ob die Elemente mit einem Rahmen
-% versehen bzw. gefüllt werden sollen.
+% versehen bzw. gefüllt werden sollen.
% \item \texttt{drawcolor}\hfill\\
% legt die Farbe von Linien und Text fest.
% \item \texttt{fillcolor}\hfill\\
-% legt die Füllfarbe fest, falls filled=true ist.
+% legt die Füllfarbe fest, falls filled=true ist.
% \item \texttt{latexlengths}\hfill\\
-% legt fest, ob die unveränderlichen LaTeX-Längen
+% legt fest, ob die unveränderlichen LaTeX-Längen
% angezeigt werden sollen.
% \item \texttt{latexlengthcolor}\hfill\\
-% legt die Farbe fest, mit der LaTeX-Längen
+% legt die Farbe fest, mit der LaTeX-Längen
% gezeichnet werden.
% \item \texttt{language}\hfill\\
% legt die Sprache der Beschreibung fest.
% \item \texttt{ahlength}\hfill\\
-% Da foldmarkhpos sehr klein ist, können sich bei kleinen Grafiken
-% die Pfeilspitzen der Bemaßung berühren. Um das zu verhindern, kann
-% mit der MetaPost-internen Variablen ahlength die Pfeillänge
+% Da foldmarkhpos sehr klein ist, können sich bei kleinen Grafiken
+% die Pfeilspitzen der Bemaßung berühren. Um das zu verhindern, kann
+% mit der MetaPost-internen Variablen ahlength die Pfeillänge
% verringert werden.
% \end{itemize}
%
@@ -209,7 +208,7 @@ end
%<*tex>
% \section{Der Abschnitt \texttt{tex}}
%
-% Dieser Abschnitt enthält sozusagen den \TeX{}-Part der Grafiken.
+% Dieser Abschnitt enthält sozusagen den \TeX{}-Part der Grafiken.
% Hier werden beispielsweise die Fonts festgelegt.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -218,7 +217,6 @@ verbatimtex
%&latex
%LATEX
\documentclass[fontsize=8pt]{scrartcl}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\IfFileExists{scrnonfree.tex}{%
@@ -299,18 +297,18 @@ def defdescriptionde =
begingroup
%<*terms>
description[1]=btex \descr{}Briefkopf etex;
- description[2]=btex \descr{}Brief"|fuß{} etex;
- description[3]=btex \descr{}Rücksendeadresse etex;
+ description[2]=btex \descr{}Brief"|fuß{} etex;
+ description[3]=btex \descr{}Rücksendeadresse etex;
description[4]=btex \descr{}Versandart etex;
- description[5]=btex \descr{}Empfängeradresse etex;
- description[6]=btex \descr{}Geschäftszeile etex;
+ description[5]=btex \descr{}Empfängeradresse etex;
+ description[6]=btex \descr{}Geschäftszeile etex;
description[7]=btex \descr{}Titel etex;
description[8]=btex \descr{}Betreff etex;
description[9]=btex \descr{}Anrede etex;
description[10]=btex \descr{}Brieftext etex;
- description[11]=btex \descr{}Grußfloskel etex;
+ description[11]=btex \descr{}Grußfloskel etex;
description[12]=btex \descr{}Signatur etex;
- description[13]=btex \descr{}\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}Absender-\\ergänzung\end{tabular} etex;
+ description[13]=btex \descr{}\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}Absender-\\ergänzung\end{tabular} etex;
%</terms>
%<*!terms>
description[1]=btex \Multi{\Variable{firsthead}\\
@@ -393,11 +391,11 @@ enddef;
%
%<*values>
% \section{Der Abschnitt \texttt{values}}
-% In diesem Abschnitt finden sich Maße für die unterschiedlichen Briefe
+% In diesem Abschnitt finden sich Maße für die unterschiedlichen Briefe
% ausgehend von \texttt{11pt}, \texttt{a4paper}.
%
%<*DIN>
-% \section{Maße für DIN-Briefe}
+% \section{Maße für DIN-Briefe}
%
%\begin{macrocode}
numeric paperwidth;
@@ -542,7 +540,7 @@ sigheight = baselineskip;
%</DIN>
%
%<*SN>
-% \section{Maße für SN-Briefe}
+% \section{Maße für SN-Briefe}
% \begin{macrocode}
numeric paperwidth;
numeric paperheight;
@@ -690,18 +688,18 @@ sigheight = baselineskip;
%
%<*include>
% \section{Der Abschnitt \texttt{include}}
-% \changes{}{2005-08-30}{Korrektur der Stiftstärken}
+% \changes{}{2005-08-30}{Korrektur der Stiftstärken}
%
% Dieser Abschnitt erzeugt die Datei \texttt{plinc.mp} mit den wesentlichen
-% Definitionen für die Erzeugung eines Elements. Eine Element ist
-% beispielsweise eine Pseudolänge, eine Beschreibung (Variable), ein Feld,
+% Definitionen für die Erzeugung eines Elements. Eine Element ist
+% beispielsweise eine Pseudolänge, eine Beschreibung (Variable), ein Feld,
% \dots).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
def lengths =
toaddrindent := 0.7cm;
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Breite des \texttt{location}-Feldes wird später berechnet und deshalb
+% Die Breite des \texttt{location}-Feldes wird später berechnet und deshalb
% hier nicht mehr mit
% \begin{verbatim}
% locwidth := 3.7cm;
@@ -751,7 +749,7 @@ def drawframedelements =
pickup pencircle scaled framestrichstaerke;
drawoptions(withcolor drawcolor);
% \end{macrocode}
-% Kopf und Fuß
+% Kopf und Fuß
% \begin{macrocode}
draw unitsquare xscaled firstheadwidth yscaled firstheadheight
shifted (firstheadhpos, firstheadvpos) transformed T;
@@ -770,12 +768,12 @@ def drawframedelements =
shifted (istoaddrhpos+toaddrindent,
toaddrvpos+backaddrheight+specialmailheight) transformed T;
% \end{macrocode}
-% Absenderergänzung:
+% Absenderergänzung:
% \begin{macrocode}
draw unitsquare xscaled locwidth yscaled toaddrheight
shifted (lochpos, toaddrvpos) transformed T;
% \end{macrocode}
-% Geschäftszeile:
+% Geschäftszeile:
% \begin{macrocode}
draw unitsquare xscaled refwidth yscaled refheight
shifted (1in+oddsidemargin, refvpos) transformed T;
@@ -818,7 +816,7 @@ def drawfilledelements =
fi
drawoptions (withcolor fillcolor);
% \end{macrocode}
-% Kopf und Fuß:
+% Kopf und Fuß:
% \begin{macrocode}
fill unitsquare xscaled firstheadwidth yscaled firstheadheight
shifted (firstheadhpos, firstheadvpos) transformed T;
@@ -837,12 +835,12 @@ def drawfilledelements =
shifted (istoaddrhpos+toaddrindent,
toaddrvpos+backaddrheight+specialmailheight) transformed T;
% \end{macrocode}
-% Absenderergänzung:
+% Absenderergänzung:
% \begin{macrocode}
fill unitsquare xscaled locwidth yscaled toaddrheight
shifted (lochpos, toaddrvpos) transformed T;
% \end{macrocode}
-% Geschäftszeile:
+% Geschäftszeile:
% \begin{macrocode}
fill unitsquare xscaled refwidth yscaled refheight
shifted (refhpos, refvpos) transformed T;
@@ -1123,7 +1121,7 @@ begingroup
drawcolor := latexlengthcolor;
pickup pencircle scaled hilfsstrichstaerke;
% \end{macrocode}
-% \LaTeX-Längen:
+% \LaTeX-Längen:
% \begin{macrocode}
vmeasure((1in+oddsidemargin+openingwidth,subjectvpos-baselineskip),
baselineskip, latexlength[1], origin, rt);
@@ -1159,7 +1157,7 @@ begingroup
draw (p--p shifted (0,-tickhoehe)) shifted (breite,0) transformed T;
% \end{macrocode}
% Messlinie;
-% die Korrektur der Stiftstärke muss nach der Transformation
+% die Korrektur der Stiftstärke muss nach der Transformation
% in Zeichenkoordinaten erfolgen:
% \begin{macrocode}
pleft = p shifted (0,-0.5*tickhoehe)
@@ -1191,7 +1189,7 @@ begingroup
draw (p--p shifted (tickhoehe,0)) shifted (0,breite) transformed T;
% \end{macrocode}
% Messlinie;
-% die Korrektur der Stiftstärke muss nach der Transformation
+% die Korrektur der Stiftstärke muss nach der Transformation
% in Zeichenkoordinaten erfolgen:
% \begin{macrocode}
ptop = p shifted (0.5*tickhoehe,0)
@@ -1223,7 +1221,7 @@ begingroup
ptop = p shifted (0,-1.5*tickhoehe) shifted (tickhoehe,0)
transformed T;
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Korrektur der Stiftstärke muss nach der Transformation
+% Die Korrektur der Stiftstärke muss nach der Transformation
% in Zeichenkoordinaten erfolgen.
% \begin{macrocode}
pbottom = p shifted (tickhoehe,0)
@@ -1246,7 +1244,7 @@ def writedescription(expr lang) =
fi
drawoptions(withcolor drawcolor);
% \end{macrocode}
-% Kopf und Fuß:
+% Kopf und Fuß:
% \begin{macrocode}
label(description[1],
(firstheadhpos+0.5*firstheadwidth, firstheadvpos+0.5*firstheadheight)
@@ -1268,12 +1266,12 @@ def writedescription(expr lang) =
toaddrvpos+backaddrheight+specialmailheight+0.5*(toaddrheight-backaddrheight-specialmailheight))
transformed T);
% \end{macrocode}
-% Absenderergänzung:
+% Absenderergänzung:
% \begin{macrocode}
label(description[13], (lochpos+0.5*locwidth, toaddrvpos+0.5*toaddrheight)
transformed T);
% \end{macrocode}
-% Geschäftszeile:
+% Geschäftszeile:
% \begin{macrocode}
label(description[6], (1in+oddsidemargin+0.5*refwidth,
refvpos+0.5*refheight)
@@ -1319,7 +1317,7 @@ enddef;
\endinput
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
% \fi
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls
index cee1ba89c7..d4c2bbb23d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrguide.cls
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
% \section{Identification}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesClass{scrguide}[2019/02/01 v1.13d internal KOMA-Script guide class]
+\ProvidesClass{scrguide}[2019/10/10 v1.15 internal KOMA-Script guide class]
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
@@ -116,11 +116,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
-% NOTE: I use \texttt{latin1} instead of the prefered \texttt{utf8} because of
-% problems of early versions of package \textsf{listings}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\LoadClassWithOptions{scrbook}
-\RequirePackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\RequirePackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc}
\newcommand*{\strngerman}{ngerman}
\newcommand*{\strenglish}{english}
@@ -659,6 +656,8 @@
% \begin{macro}{\PageStyle}
% \begin{macro}{\Variable}
% \begin{macro}{\FontElement}
+% \begin{macro}{\DoHook}
+% \changes{v1.14}{2019/02/20}{neu}^^A
% \begin{macro}{\PName}
% \begin{macro}{\PValue}
% \begin{macro}{\Parameter}
@@ -1003,12 +1002,12 @@
\BeginIndex{PLength}{#1}%
\LabelPLength{#1}%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{%
- r@\label@desc@prefix scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}{%
- \textMacro{@setplength}%
+ r@\label@desc@prefix scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength}{%
+ \textMacro{setplength}%
}{%
\begingroup
\let\Macro\textMacro
- \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}%
+ \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setplength}%
\endgroup
}%
\PParameter{#1}\Parameter{\lengthname}%
@@ -1050,7 +1049,7 @@
\endgroup
}
\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\FontElement}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{%
- \par
+ \par
\leftskip\z@
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{#1}%
\LabelFontElement{#1}%
@@ -1071,6 +1070,45 @@
}%
\PParameter{#1}\OParameter{\fontsettingname}%
}
+\newcommand*{\LabelDoHook}[2][\label@suffix]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \renewcommand*{\PName}[1]{=##1=}%
+ \ForDoHook{#2}{\Label@DoHook{#1}}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+\newcommand*{\Label@DoHook}[3]{%
+ \IfArgIsEmpty{#3}{\@firstofone}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{dhr@\label@desc@prefix\label@base.dohook.#2#1}{%
+ \@firstofone
+ }{%
+ \@gobble
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\DoHook{#2}}%
+ \label@sanitize
+ \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.dohook.#2#1}%
+ \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}%
+ \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}%
+ \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.dohook.#2#1}%
+ \expandafter\gdef
+ \csname dhr@\label@desc@prefix\label@base.dohook.#2#1\endcsname{#3}%
+ }%
+}
+\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\DoHook}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{%
+ \par
+ \leftskip\z@
+ \BeginIndex{DoHook}{#1}%
+ \LabelDoHook{#1}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@scrbase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook}{%
+ \textMacro{ExecuteDoHook}%
+ }{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\Macro\textMacro
+ \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.ExecuteDoHook}%
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \PParameter{#1}%
+}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\PName}[1]{\texttt{\textit{#1}}}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\PValue}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Parameter}[1]{%
@@ -1314,6 +1352,7 @@
\scr@Desc@let\PLength
\scr@Desc@let\FontElement
\scr@Desc@let\FloatStyle
+ \scr@Desc@let\DoHook
% Todo: Replace the following by the correct definitions:
\let\XMacro\textMacro
\let\XEnvironment\textEnvironment
@@ -1881,7 +1920,17 @@
basicstyle=\ttfamily,%
columns=fullflexible,keepspaces,%
aboveskip=.4\baselineskip,%
- belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt minus .5pt%
+ belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt minus .5pt,%
+ literate=%
+ {Ö}{{\"O}}1
+ {Ä}{{\"A}}1
+ {Ü}{{\"U}}1
+ {ß}{{\ss}}1
+ {ü}{{\"u}}1
+ {ä}{{\"a}}1
+ {ö}{{\"o}}1
+ {»}{{\guillemetright}}1
+ {«}{{\guillemetleft}}1
}%
\lstdefinestyle{code}{%
language=[LaTeX]TeX,%
@@ -1920,10 +1969,12 @@
addtokomafont,addtolengthplength,addtoreffields,addtotoclist,
adrchar,adrentry,
AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle,AddLayersToPageStyle,
+ AddtoDoHook,AddtoOneTimeDoHook,
AfterBibliographyPreamble,AfterCalculatingTypearea,
AfterFile,AfterPackage,AfterStartingTOC,AfterTOCHead,
appendixmore,appendixname,areaset,autodot,automark,AtAddToTocList,
- AtBeginLetter,
+ AtBeginLetter,At@startsection,
+ Before@sect,Before@ssect,
BeforeFamilyProcessOptions,
BeforeClosingMainAux,BeforePackage,bib@beginhook,bib@endhook,
blinddocument,blindtext,Blinddocument,Blindtext,
@@ -1952,14 +2003,14 @@
DestroyLayer,defpagestyle,deftripstyle,
dictum,dictumauthorformat,dictumrule,dictumwidth,doforeachtocfile,
ellipsispar,
- encl,extratitle,FamilyBoolKey,FamilyExecuteOptions,
+ encl,ExecuteDoHook,extratitle,FamilyBoolKey,FamilyExecuteOptions,
FamilyKeyState,FamilyKeyStateUnknown,FamilyKeyStateProcessed,
FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue,FamilyKeyStateNeedValue,
FamilyNumericalKey,%
FamilyOption,FamilyOptions,FamilyProcessOptions,FamilySetBool,
FamilyStringKey,FamilyUnknownKeyValue,
figureformat,figurename,firstfoot,firsthead,FirstName,footfont,footref,
- ForEachLayerOfPageStyle,
+ ForDoHook,ForEachLayerOfPageStyle,
FreeI,FreeII,FreeIII,FreeIV,
GenericMarkFormat,
headfont,headmark,
@@ -2008,6 +2059,7 @@
setheadsepline,setheadtopline,setheadwidth,setindexpreamble,setkomafont,
setkomavar,setlengthtoplength,setparsizes,setpartpreamble,setuptoc,
showfields,showenvelope,showISOenvelope,showUScommercial,showUScheck,
+ SplitDoHook,
storeareas,StorePreventPackageFromLoading,
subject,SubClause,subsectionmarkformat,subtitle,syncwithnotecolumn,
tableformat,tablename,tableofcontents,textsubscript,thechapter,thefigure,
@@ -2331,6 +2383,9 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname
\printmultiindex[%
\CrossIndex{\GuideOption}{gen}{\GuideoptIndexShort}%
]{\GuideoptIndex}{opt}%
+ \printmultiindex[%
+ \CrossIndex{\GuideHook}{gen}{\GuidehokIndexShort}%
+ ]{\GuidehokIndex}{hok}
}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -2617,7 +2672,7 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname
% Now we have to define different kinds of index entries. We have entries that
% will be added to only one index. We have entries that will be added to one
% index with reference to that index at another index. And there are even
-% entries that will be added to one index with reference to to that index from
+% entries that will be added to one index with reference to that index from
% another index and from the main index.
% \begin{macro}{\DefineSingeIndex}
% This defines a single index entry, e.g. of commands. A macro will be
@@ -2732,6 +2787,7 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname
\DefineSingleIndex[\GuideVariable]{Variable}{cmd}{\Variable}
\DefineSingleIndex{FontElement}{elm}{\FontElement}
\DefineSingleIndex{PLength}{len}{\PLength}
+ \DefineSingleIndex{DoHook}{hok}{\DoHook}
\else
\DefineDoubleIndex[\GuideEnvironment]{Env}{cmd}{\Environment}
\DefineDoubleIndex{Option}{opt}{\Option}
@@ -2741,6 +2797,7 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname
\DefineDoubleIndex[\GuideVariable]{Variable}{cmd}{\Variable}
\DefineDoubleIndex{FontElement}{elm}{\FontElement}
\DefineDoubleIndex{PLength}{len}{\PLength}
+ \DefineDoubleIndex{DoHook}{hok}{\DoHook}
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex
index ce59a85ff3..fe7c62a504 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source-doc/scrpage2.tex
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
%
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
%
-% Kapitel über scrpage2
+% Kapitel über scrpage2
% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm
%
% ============================================================================
@@ -1558,39 +1558,39 @@ styles which many projects can share.
\addparttocentry{}{Deutsch}
\title{Das obsolete Paket \Package{scrpage2}}
-\subtitle{Auszug aus früheren Versionen der \KOMAScript-Anleitung}
+\subtitle{Auszug aus früheren Versionen der \KOMAScript-Anleitung}
\author{Markus Kohm\and Jens-Uwe-Morawski}
\date{2014-06-25}
\maketitle
-\chapter{Kopf- und Fußzeilen mit \Package{scrpage2}}
+\chapter{Kopf- und Fußzeilen mit \Package{scrpage2}}
\labelbase{scrpage-de}
%
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{Package}{scrpage2}%
\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil}
Mit \KOMAScript~3.12 wurde das komplett neu implementierte Paket
-\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} vorgestellt, das eine konsequente Weiterführung des
+\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} vorgestellt, das eine konsequente Weiterführung des
Designs von \Package{scrpage2} mit anderen Mitteln darstellt. Siehe dazu das
-entsprechende Kapitel der \KOMAScript-Anleitung. Während
+entsprechende Kapitel der \KOMAScript-Anleitung. Während
\Package{scrpage2} die erweiterte Optionen-Schnittstelle der
-\KOMAScript-Klassen nicht unterstützt, kommt diese in
-\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} selbstverständlich zum Einsatz. Da der Ansatz von
-\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} gegenüber \Package{scrpage2} als überlegen
+\KOMAScript-Klassen nicht unterstützt, kommt diese in
+\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} selbstverständlich zum Einsatz. Da der Ansatz von
+\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} gegenüber \Package{scrpage2} als überlegen
betrachtet wird, wird somit empfohlen, \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} an Stelle
von \Package{scrpage2} zu verwenden. Die aktuelle Version von
-\Package{scrpage2} ist daher auch als final zu betrachten. Sämtliche
-Entwicklungsresourcen im Bereich Kopf- und Fußzeilen werden zukünftig in
-\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} einfließen.
+\Package{scrpage2} ist daher auch als final zu betrachten. Sämtliche
+Entwicklungsresourcen im Bereich Kopf- und Fußzeilen werden zukünftig in
+\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} einfließen.
\begin{Explain}
An Stelle von \Package{scrpage2} oder \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} kann
- natürlich auch \Package{fancyhdr} verwendet
+ natürlich auch \Package{fancyhdr} verwendet
werden. \Package{scrpage2} und insbesondere \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
harmonieren jedoch mit den \KOMAScript-Klassen deutlich besser. Genau
- deshalb und weil der Vorläufer von \Package{fancyhdr} damals viele
- Möglichkeiten vermissen lies, ist \Package{scrpage2} entstanden. Natürlich
+ deshalb und weil der Vorläufer von \Package{fancyhdr} damals viele
+ Möglichkeiten vermissen lies, ist \Package{scrpage2} entstanden. Natürlich
ist das Paket \Package{scrpage2} ebenso wie das Paket
\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} nicht an eine \KOMAScript-Klasse gebunden,
sondern kann auch sehr gut mit anderen Klassen verwendet werden.
@@ -1601,28 +1601,28 @@ Entwicklungsresourcen im Bereich Kopf- und Fußzeilen werden zukünftig in
\begin{Explain}
Um die nachfolgende Beschreibung zu verstehen, muss noch einiges zu \LaTeX{}
gesagt werden. Im \LaTeX-Kern sind die Standardseitenstile
- \PageStyle{empty}, welcher eine völlig undekorierte Seite erzeugt, und
- \PageStyle{plain}, welcher meist nur die Seitenzahl enthält, definiert. In
+ \PageStyle{empty}, welcher eine völlig undekorierte Seite erzeugt, und
+ \PageStyle{plain}, welcher meist nur die Seitenzahl enthält, definiert. In
vielen Klassen ist der Stil \PageStyle{headings} zu finden, welcher eine
komplexe Seitendekoration mit automatischen
Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} erzeugt. Die Variante
\PageStyle{myheadings} gleicht \PageStyle{headings}. Die Kolumnentitel
- müssen dabei aber manuell\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell} gesetzt werden.
- Ausführlicher wird das im Abschnitt über Seitenstile der
- \KOMAScript-Anleitung beschrieben. Dort wird auch erläutert, dass auf
+ müssen dabei aber manuell\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell} gesetzt werden.
+ Ausführlicher wird das im Abschnitt über Seitenstile der
+ \KOMAScript-Anleitung beschrieben. Dort wird auch erläutert, dass auf
einigen Seiten der Seitenstil automatisch -- in der Regel zu
\PageStyle{plain} -- wechselt.
\end{Explain}
Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} unterscheidet nicht mehr zwischen Seitenstilen
mit automatischem und mit manuellem Kolumnentitel. Die Wahl des Seitenstils
-erfolgt unabhängig davon, ob mit automatischem oder manuellem Kolumnentitel
-gearbeitet wird. Näheres dazu finden Sie in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark}.
+erfolgt unabhängig davon, ob mit automatischem oder manuellem Kolumnentitel
+gearbeitet wird. Näheres dazu finden Sie in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark}.
\subsection{Vordefinierte Seitenstile}\label{sec:scrpage-de.basics.buildIn}
-Zu den grundlegenden Funktionen von \Package{scrpage2} gehören unter anderem
+Zu den grundlegenden Funktionen von \Package{scrpage2} gehören unter anderem
vordefinierte, konfigurierbare Seitenstile.
% \lehead ...
@@ -1633,15 +1633,15 @@ vordefinierte, konfigurierbare Seitenstile.
\PageStyle{scrheadings}%
\PageStyle{scrplain}
\end{Declaration}%
-Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} liefert für Seiten mit Kolumnentitel einen
+Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} liefert für Seiten mit Kolumnentitel einen
eigenen Seitenstil namens \PageStyle{scrheadings}. Dieser Seitenstil kann
mittels \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} aktiviert werden. Wird
dieser Seitenstil benutzt, dann wird gleichzeitig der plain-Stil durch den
dazu passenden Stil \PageStyle{scrplain} ersetzt. Passend bedeutet, dass auch
der plain-Stil auf in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format} vorgestellte
-Befehle, die beispielsweise die Kopfbreite ändern, reagiert und im Grundlayout
-übereinstimmt. Die Aktivierung des Seitenstils \PageStyle{scrheadings} oder
-des zugehörigen plain-Stils, \PageStyle{scrplain}, hat keine Auswirkung
+Befehle, die beispielsweise die Kopfbreite ändern, reagiert und im Grundlayout
+übereinstimmt. Die Aktivierung des Seitenstils \PageStyle{scrheadings} oder
+des zugehörigen plain-Stils, \PageStyle{scrplain}, hat keine Auswirkung
darauf, ob mit manuellen oder automatischen
Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell}
gearbeitet wird (siehe \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark}). Der Seitenstil
@@ -1678,16 +1678,16 @@ gearbeitet wird (siehe \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark}). Der Seitenstil
\Macro{chead}%
\OParameter{scrplain-zentriert}\Parameter{scrheadings-zentriert}%
\Macro{ohead}%
- \OParameter{scrplain-außen}\Parameter{scrheadings-außen}%
+ \OParameter{scrplain-außen}\Parameter{scrheadings-außen}%
\Macro{ifoot}%
\OParameter{scrplain-innen}\Parameter{scrheadings-innen}%
\Macro{cfoot}%
\OParameter{scrplain-zentriert}\Parameter{scrheadings-zentriert}%
\Macro{ofoot}%
- \OParameter{scrplain-außen}\Parameter{scrheadings-außen}
+ \OParameter{scrplain-außen}\Parameter{scrheadings-außen}
\end{Declaration}%
Die Seitenstile von \Package{scrpage2} sind so definiert, dass ihr Kopf und
-Fuß flexibel angepasst werden kann. Hierzu sind sowohl im Kopf als auch im Fuß
+Fuß flexibel angepasst werden kann. Hierzu sind sowohl im Kopf als auch im Fuß
drei Felder vorhanden, deren Inhalt modifiziert werden kann. Die Befehle
zur Modifikation sind in \autoref{fig:scrpage-de.leheadetall} verdeutlicht. Die
in der Mitte dargestellten Befehle modifizieren sowohl die Felder der linken
@@ -1705,7 +1705,7 @@ Feld im Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}.
{\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}%
Zuord\-nung der Befehle zur Manipulation der beiden Seiten\-stile
\PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{scrplain} zu den Feldern im
- Kopf und Fuß der Seiten}
+ Kopf und Fuß der Seiten}
[l]
\setlength{\unitlength}{.95mm}\begin{picture}(100,65)(0,8)\small
\put(0,12){\dashbox{2}(40,56){linke Seite}}
@@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@ Feld im Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}.
\put(76,13){\framebox(8,4){~}}
\put(91,13){\framebox(8,4){~}}
% die Befehle und Pfeile
- % für beidseitig
+ % für beidseitig
%
\put(50,65){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.ihead}}}
\put(44,65){\vector(-1,0){4}}\put(56,65){\vector(1,0){4}}
@@ -1746,7 +1746,7 @@ Feld im Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}.
\put(50,29){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.ofoot}}}
\put(44,29){\line(-1,0){40}}\put(56,29){\line(1,0){40}}
\put(4,29){\vector(0,-1){11}}\put(96,29){\vector(0,-1){11}}
- % Befehle für einseitig
+ % Befehle für einseitig
\put(5,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.lehead}}}
\put(20,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.cehead}}}
\put(35,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.rehead}}}
@@ -1772,56 +1772,56 @@ Feld im Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}.
\end{figure}
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, man möchte bei \PageStyle{scrheadings} zentriert im Seitenfuß
+ Angenommen, man möchte bei \PageStyle{scrheadings} zentriert im Seitenfuß
die Seitenzahl dargestellt haben, dann benutzt man einfach:
\begin{lstcode}
\cfoot{\pagemark}
\end{lstcode}
- Sollen die Seitenzahlen\Index{Paginierung} im Kopf außen und die
+ Sollen die Seitenzahlen\Index{Paginierung} im Kopf außen und die
Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel} innen stehen, dann erfolgt dies mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\ohead{\pagemark}
\ihead{\headmark}
\cfoot{}
\end{lstcode}
- Das \Macro{cfoot}\PParameter{} ist nur notwendig, um eine möglicherweise in
- der Mitte des Fußes vorhandene Seitenzahl zu entfernen.
+ Das \Macro{cfoot}\PParameter{} ist nur notwendig, um eine möglicherweise in
+ der Mitte des Fußes vorhandene Seitenzahl zu entfernen.
\end{Example}
-Die Befehle, die direkt nur einem Feld zugeordnet sind, können für
+Die Befehle, die direkt nur einem Feld zugeordnet sind, können für
anspruchsvollere Vorhaben genutzt werden.
\begin{Example}
Angenommen, man hat den Auf"|trag, einen Jahresbericht einer Firma zu
- erstellen, dann könnte das so angegangen werden:
+ erstellen, dann könnte das so angegangen werden:
\begin{lstcode}
\ohead{\pagemark}
\rehead{Jahresbericht 2001}
\lohead{\headmark}
- \cefoot{Firma WasWeißIch}
+ \cefoot{Firma WasWeißIch}
\cofoot{Abteilung Entwicklung}
\end{lstcode}
- Natürlich muss man hier dafür sorgen, dass mittels \Macro{cofoot} der Fuß
+ Natürlich muss man hier dafür sorgen, dass mittels \Macro{cofoot} der Fuß
der rechten Seite aktualisiert wird, wenn eine neue Abteilung im Bericht
besprochen wird.
\end{Example}
Wie oben dargestellt, gibt es einen zu \PageStyle{scrheadings}
-korrespondierenden plain-Seitenstil. Da es auch möglich sein soll, diesen
-Stil anzupassen, unterstüt"-zen die Befehle ein optionales Argument. Damit
+korrespondierenden plain-Seitenstil. Da es auch möglich sein soll, diesen
+Stil anzupassen, unterstüt"-zen die Befehle ein optionales Argument. Damit
kann der Inhalt des entsprechenden Feldes im plain-Seitenstil modifiziert
werden.
\begin{Example}
- Um für die Nutzung von \PageStyle{scrheadings} die Position der Seitenzahlen
+ Um für die Nutzung von \PageStyle{scrheadings} die Position der Seitenzahlen
festzulegen, kann man folgendes benutzen:
\begin{lstcode}
\cfoot[\pagemark]{}
\ohead[]{\pagemark}
\end{lstcode}
- Wird anschließend der Stil \PageStyle{plain} genutzt, beispielsweise weil
+ Wird anschließend der Stil \PageStyle{plain} genutzt, beispielsweise weil
\Macro{chapter} eine neue Seite beginnt und darauf umschaltet, dann steht
- die Seitenzahl zentriert im Seitenfuß.
+ die Seitenzahl zentriert im Seitenfuß.
\end{Example}
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1835,28 +1835,28 @@ werden.
\Macro{clearscrheadfoot}
\end{Declaration}%
Will man sowohl den Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} als auch den dazu
-gehörenden plain-Seitenstil von Grund auf neu definieren,
-muss man häufig zusätzlich einige der bereits belegten Seitenelemente
-löschen. Da man selten alle Elemente mit neuem Inhalt füllt, sind
-dazu in den meisten Fällen mehrere Befehle mit leeren Parametern
+gehörenden plain-Seitenstil von Grund auf neu definieren,
+muss man häufig zusätzlich einige der bereits belegten Seitenelemente
+löschen. Da man selten alle Elemente mit neuem Inhalt füllt, sind
+dazu in den meisten Fällen mehrere Befehle mit leeren Parametern
notwendig.
-Mit Hilfe dieser drei Befehle ist das Löschen schnell und
-gründlich möglich. Während \Macro{clearscrheadings} lediglich alle
+Mit Hilfe dieser drei Befehle ist das Löschen schnell und
+gründlich möglich. Während \Macro{clearscrheadings} lediglich alle
Felder des Seitenstils \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \Macro{clearscrplain}
-alle Felder des zugehörigen plain-Seitenstils löscht, werden
+alle Felder des zugehörigen plain-Seitenstils löscht, werden
von \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} alle Felder beider Seitenstile auf leere
Inhalte gesetzt.
\begin{Example}
- Sie wollen unabhängig davon, wie die Seitenstile derzeit aussehen,
+ Sie wollen unabhängig davon, wie die Seitenstile derzeit aussehen,
die Standardform der \KOMAScript-Klassen bei zweiseitigem Satz
- erreichen. Dies ist mit nur drei Befehlen möglich:
+ erreichen. Dies ist mit nur drei Befehlen möglich:
\begin{lstcode}
\clearscrheadfoot
\ohead{\headmark}
\ofoot[\pagemark]{\pagemark}
\end{lstcode}
Ohne die Befehle \Macro{clearscrheadings}, \Macro{clearscrplain} und
- \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} wären doppelt so viele Anweisungen und neun weitere
+ \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} wären doppelt so viele Anweisungen und neun weitere
leere Argumente notwendig:
\begin{lstcode}
\ihead[]{}
@@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@ Inhalte gesetzt.
\cfoot[]{}
\ofoot[\pagemark]{\pagemark}
\end{lstcode}
- Einige davon könnten natürlich entfallen, wenn man von einer
+ Einige davon könnten natürlich entfallen, wenn man von einer
konkreten Vorbelegung ausginge.
\end{Example}
%
@@ -1886,9 +1886,9 @@ gar nicht besprochen wurden. Das soll jetzt nachgeholt werden.
\Macro{rightmark}
\end{Declaration}%
Diese beiden Befehle erlauben es, auf die Kolumnentitel zuzugreifen, die
-normalerweise für die linke bzw. die rechte Seite gedacht sind. Diese beiden
+normalerweise für die linke bzw. die rechte Seite gedacht sind. Diese beiden
Befehle werden nicht von \Package{scrpage2}, sondern direkt vom \LaTeX-Kern
-zur Verfügung gestellt. Wenn in diesem Kapitel vom Kolumnentitel der linken
+zur Verfügung gestellt. Wenn in diesem Kapitel vom Kolumnentitel der linken
Seite oder vom Kolumnentitel der rechten Seite die Rede ist, dann ist damit
eigentlich der Inhalt von \Macro{leftmark} und \Macro{rightmark} gemeint.
%
@@ -1898,7 +1898,7 @@ eigentlich der Inhalt von \Macro{leftmark} und \Macro{rightmark} gemeint.
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{headmark}
\end{Declaration}%
-Dieser Befehl ermöglicht es, auf die Inhalte der Kolumnentitel zuzugreifen.
+Dieser Befehl ermöglicht es, auf die Inhalte der Kolumnentitel zuzugreifen.
Im Gegensatz zu den originalen \LaTeX{}-Befehlen \Macro{leftmark} und
\Macro{rightmark} braucht man nicht auf die richtige Zuordnung zur linken oder
rechten Seite zu achten.%
@@ -1909,10 +1909,10 @@ rechten Seite zu achten.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Macro{pagemark}
\end{Declaration}%
-Dieser Befehl ermöglicht den Zugriff auf die Seitenzahl. Im
+Dieser Befehl ermöglicht den Zugriff auf die Seitenzahl. Im
\autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format}, \DescPageRef{scrpage-de.cmd.pnumfont}
wird der Befehl \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.pnumfont} zur Formatierung der Seitenzahl vorgestellt,
-den \Macro{pagemark} automatisch berücksichtigt.%
+den \Macro{pagemark} automatisch berücksichtigt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1920,11 +1920,11 @@ den \Macro{pagemark} automatisch berücksichtigt.%
\begin{Declaration}
\PageStyle{useheadings}
\end{Declaration}%
-Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} ist in erster Linie dafür gedacht, dass die
+Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} ist in erster Linie dafür gedacht, dass die
bereitgestellten Stile benutzt oder eigene Stile definiert werden. Jedoch
-kann es notwendig sein, auch auf einen von der Dokumentklasse zur Verfügung
-gestellten Stil zurückzuschalten. Es wäre nahe liegend, dieses mit
-\Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{headings} vorzunehmen. Das hätte aber den
+kann es notwendig sein, auch auf einen von der Dokumentklasse zur Verfügung
+gestellten Stil zurückzuschalten. Es wäre nahe liegend, dieses mit
+\Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{headings} vorzunehmen. Das hätte aber den
Nachteil, dass die nachfolgend besprochenen Befehle \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} und
\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.manualmark} nicht wie erwartet funktionierten. Daher sollte mit
\Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{useheadings}\IndexCmd{pagestyle} auf die
@@ -1942,12 +1942,12 @@ gearbeitet wird.%
\BeginIndexGroup
\BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}%
\BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>manuell}%
-Gewöhnlich\textnote{Achtung!} gibt es zu einem \PageStyle{headings}-Stil eine
+Gewöhnlich\textnote{Achtung!} gibt es zu einem \PageStyle{headings}-Stil eine
\emph{my}-Variante. Ist ein solcher Stil aktiv, dann werden die Kolumnentitel
nicht mehr automatisch aktualisiert. Bei \Package{scrpage2} wird ein anderer
Weg beschritten. Ob die Kolumnentitel lebend sind oder nicht, bestimmen die
Befehle \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.manualmark}. Die Voreinstellung kann auch
-bereits beim Laden des Paketes über die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.automark} und
+bereits beim Laden des Paketes über die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.automark} und
\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.manualmark} beeinflusst werden (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options},
\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.option.automark}).
@@ -1957,12 +1957,12 @@ bereits beim Laden des Paketes über die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.auto
\Macro{manualmark}
\end{Declaration}%
Wie der Name bereits verdeutlicht, schaltet \Macro{manualmark} die
-Aktualisierung der Kolumnentitel aus. Es bleibt somit dem Nutzer überlassen,
-für eine Aktualisierung bzw. für den Inhalt der Kolumnentitel zu sorgen. Dazu
+Aktualisierung der Kolumnentitel aus. Es bleibt somit dem Nutzer überlassen,
+für eine Aktualisierung bzw. für den Inhalt der Kolumnentitel zu sorgen. Dazu
stehen die Befehle \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und
\Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern bereit. Diese
-Anweisungen sind im Abschnitt über Seitenstile in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung
-erklärt.%
+Anweisungen sind im Abschnitt über Seitenstile in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung
+erklärt.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -1972,24 +1972,24 @@ erklärt.%
\Macro{automark}\OParameter{rechte Seite}\Parameter{linke Seite}
\end{Declaration}%
Die Anweisung \Macro{automark} aktiviert die automatische Aktualisierung des
-Kolumnentitels. Für die beiden Parameter sind die Bezeichnungen der
+Kolumnentitels. Für die beiden Parameter sind die Bezeichnungen der
Gliederungsebenen\Index{Gliederungsebenen} einzusetzen, deren Titel an
-entsprechender Stelle erscheinen soll. Gültige Werte für die Parameter sind:
+entsprechender Stelle erscheinen soll. Gültige Werte für die Parameter sind:
\PValue{part}\ChangedAt{v2.2}{\Package{scrpage2}}, \PValue{chapter},
\PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection},
-\PValue{paragraph} und \PValue{subparagraph}. Der Wert \PValue{part} führt bei
-Verwendung der meisten Klassen nicht zu dem gewünschten Ergebnis. Bisher ist
+\PValue{paragraph} und \PValue{subparagraph}. Der Wert \PValue{part} führt bei
+Verwendung der meisten Klassen nicht zu dem gewünschten Ergebnis. Bisher ist
nur von den \KOMAScript-Klassen ab Version~2.9s bekannt, dass dieser Wert
-unterstützt wird. Das optionale Argument \PName{rechte Seite} ist
-ver\-ständlicherweise nur für zweiseitigen Satz gedacht. Im einseitigen Satz
+unterstützt wird. Das optionale Argument \PName{rechte Seite} ist
+ver\-ständlicherweise nur für zweiseitigen Satz gedacht. Im einseitigen Satz
sollten Sie normalerweise darauf verzichten. Mit Hilfe der Option
\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.autooneside}\IndexOption{autooneside}\important{\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.autooneside}}
-können Sie auch einstellen, dass das optionale Argument im
+können Sie auch einstellen, dass das optionale Argument im
einseitigen\Index{einseitig} Satz automatisch ignoriert wird (siehe
\autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options},
\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.option.autooneside}).
\begin{Example}
- Wird beispielsweise mit einer \emph{book}-Klasse gearbeitet, deren höch\-ste
+ Wird beispielsweise mit einer \emph{book}-Klasse gearbeitet, deren höch\-ste
Gliederungsebene \emph{chapter} ist, dann stellt nach einem vorhergehenden
\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.manualmark} der Befehl
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -2003,11 +2003,11 @@ einseitigen\Index{einseitig} Satz automatisch ignoriert wird (siehe
\end{Example}
\begin{Explain}
- Die Markierung der jeweils höheren Gliederungsebene wird mit Hilfe von
+ Die Markierung der jeweils höheren Gliederungsebene wird mit Hilfe von
\Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} gesetzt. Die Markierung der
tieferen Gliederungsebene wird mit \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright}
bzw. \Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} gesetzt. Der entsprechende Aufruf
- erfolgt indirekt über die Gliederungsbefehle. Die Anweisung \Macro{markleft}
+ erfolgt indirekt über die Gliederungsbefehle. Die Anweisung \Macro{markleft}
wird von \Package{scrpage2} bereitgestellt und ist vergleichbar zu
\Macro{markright} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern
definiert. Obwohl sie nicht als internes Makro definiert ist, wird von einem
@@ -2017,14 +2017,14 @@ einseitigen\Index{einseitig} Satz automatisch ignoriert wird (siehe
\EndIndexGroup
-\subsection{Formatierung der Kopf- und Fußzeilen}
+\subsection{Formatierung der Kopf- und Fußzeilen}
\label{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format}
% \headfont \pnumfont
% \setheadwidth \setfootwidth
% \set(head|foot)(top|sep|bot)line
-Im vorherigen Abschnitt ging es hauptsächlich um inhaltliche Dinge. Das
-genügt natürlich nicht, um die gestalterischen Ambitionen zu
-befriedigen. Deshalb soll es sich in diesem Abschnitt ausschließlich darum
+Im vorherigen Abschnitt ging es hauptsächlich um inhaltliche Dinge. Das
+genügt natürlich nicht, um die gestalterischen Ambitionen zu
+befriedigen. Deshalb soll es sich in diesem Abschnitt ausschließlich darum
drehen.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -2032,11 +2032,11 @@ drehen.
\Macro{footfont}%
\Macro{pnumfont}
\end{Declaration}%
-Die Schriftformatierung für den Seitenkopf und -fuß übernimmt der Befehl
-\Macro{headfont}, \Macro{footfont} die Abweichung davon für den Fuß und
-\Macro{pnumfont} wiederum die Abweichung davon für die Seitenzahl.
+Die Schriftformatierung für den Seitenkopf und -fuß übernimmt der Befehl
+\Macro{headfont}, \Macro{footfont} die Abweichung davon für den Fuß und
+\Macro{pnumfont} wiederum die Abweichung davon für die Seitenzahl.
\begin{Example}
- Um beispielsweise den Kopf in fetter, serifenloser Schrift und den Fuß in
+ Um beispielsweise den Kopf in fetter, serifenloser Schrift und den Fuß in
nicht fetter, serifenloser Schrift zu setzen und die Seitenzahl geneigt
mit Serifen erscheinen zu lassen, nutzt man folgende Definitionen:
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -2053,7 +2053,7 @@ Die Schriftformatierung für den Seitenkopf und -fuß übernimmt der Befehl
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}%
\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}%
-Ab Version 2.8p der \KOMAScript{}-Klassen wurde die Schnittstelle für
+Ab Version 2.8p der \KOMAScript{}-Klassen wurde die Schnittstelle für
Schriftattribute vereinheitlicht. Wird \Package{scrpage2} in Verbindung mit
einer dieser Klassen verwendet, dann sollte die Zuweisung in der Art erfolgen,
wie sie in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung beschrieben wird.
@@ -2078,15 +2078,15 @@ wie sie in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung beschrieben wird.
\Macro{setheadwidth}\OParameter{Verschiebung}\Parameter{Breite}%
\Macro{setfootwidth}\OParameter{Verschiebung}\Parameter{Breite}
\end{Declaration}%
-Normalerweise entsprechen die Breiten von Kopf- und Fußzeile der Breite des
-Textbereichs.\Index{Kopf>Breite}\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Breite} Die beiden Befehle
-\Macro{setheadwidth} und \Macro{setfootwidth} ermöglichen dem Anwender, auf
-einfache Weise die Breiten seinen Bedürfnissen anzupassen. Das obligatorische
-Argument \PName{Breite} nimmt den Wert der Breite des Kopfes bzw. des Fußes
-auf, \PName{Verschiebung} ist ein Längenmaß für die Verschiebung des
-entsprechenden Elements in Richtung des äußeren Seitenrandes.
-
-Für die möglichen Standardfälle akzeptiert das obligatorische Argument
+Normalerweise entsprechen die Breiten von Kopf- und Fußzeile der Breite des
+Textbereichs.\Index{Kopf>Breite}\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Breite} Die beiden Befehle
+\Macro{setheadwidth} und \Macro{setfootwidth} ermöglichen dem Anwender, auf
+einfache Weise die Breiten seinen Bedürfnissen anzupassen. Das obligatorische
+Argument \PName{Breite} nimmt den Wert der Breite des Kopfes bzw. des Fußes
+auf, \PName{Verschiebung} ist ein Längenmaß für die Verschiebung des
+entsprechenden Elements in Richtung des äußeren Seitenrandes.
+
+Für die möglichen Standardfälle akzeptiert das obligatorische Argument
\PName{Breite} auch folgende symbolische Werte:
\begin{labeling}[\ --]{\PValue{textwithmarginpar}}
\item[\PValue{paper}] die Breite des Papiers
@@ -2095,24 +2095,24 @@ Für die möglichen Standardfälle akzeptiert das obligatorische Argument
\item[\PValue{textwithmarginpar}] die Breite des Textbereichs inklusive
Seitenrand
\item[\PValue{head}] die aktuelle Breite des Seitenkopfes
-\item[\PValue{foot}] die aktuelle Breite des Seitenfußes
+\item[\PValue{foot}] die aktuelle Breite des Seitenfußes
\end{labeling}
Der Unterschied zwischen \PValue{paper} und \PValue{page} besteht darin, dass
-\PValue{page} die Breite des Papiers abzüglich der Bindekorrektur ist, falls
+\PValue{page} die Breite des Papiers abzüglich der Bindekorrektur ist, falls
das \Package{typearea}-Paket\IndexPackage{typearea} verwendet wird (siehe das
-Kapitel über \Package{typearea} in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung). Ohne Verwendung
+Kapitel über \Package{typearea} in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung). Ohne Verwendung
von \Package{typearea} sind \PValue{paper} und \PValue{page}
identisch.%mjk-2001-08-17
\begin{Example}
- Angenommen, man möchte ein Seitenlayout wie im
+ Angenommen, man möchte ein Seitenlayout wie im
\emph{\LaTeX-Begleiter}, bei dem die Kopfzeile in den Rand ragt,
dann geschieht das ganz einfach mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\setheadwidth[0pt]{textwithmarginpar}
\end{lstcode}
%
- und sieht dann auf einer rechten Seite folgendermaßen aus:
+ und sieht dann auf einer rechten Seite folgendermaßen aus:
%
\begin{XmpTopPage}
\XmpHeading{10,29}{85}
@@ -2121,23 +2121,23 @@ identisch.%mjk-2001-08-17
\XmpMarginNote{83,14}
\end{XmpTopPage}
%
- Soll der Seitenfuß die gleiche Breite und Ausrichtung haben, dann hat man
- jetzt zwei Wege. Der erste ist, man wiederholt das Gleiche für den
- Seitenfuß mit:
+ Soll der Seitenfuß die gleiche Breite und Ausrichtung haben, dann hat man
+ jetzt zwei Wege. Der erste ist, man wiederholt das Gleiche für den
+ Seitenfuß mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\setfootwidth[0pt]{textwithmarginpar}
\end{lstcode}
%
- oder man greift auf den anderen symbolischen Wert \PValue{head} zurück, da
- der Kopf bereits die gewünschte Breite hat.
+ oder man greift auf den anderen symbolischen Wert \PValue{head} zurück, da
+ der Kopf bereits die gewünschte Breite hat.
\begin{lstcode}
\setfootwidth[0pt]{head}
\end{lstcode}
\end{Example}
-Wird keine Verschiebung angegeben, das heißt auf das optionale Argument
-verzichtet, dann erscheint der Kopf bzw. der Fuß symmetrisch auf der Seite
-angeordnet. Es wird somit ein Wert für die Verschiebung automatisch ermittelt,
+Wird keine Verschiebung angegeben, das heißt auf das optionale Argument
+verzichtet, dann erscheint der Kopf bzw. der Fuß symmetrisch auf der Seite
+angeordnet. Es wird somit ein Wert für die Verschiebung automatisch ermittelt,
der der aktuellen Seitengestalt entspricht.
\begin{Example}
@@ -2147,7 +2147,7 @@ der der aktuellen Seitengestalt entspricht.
\setheadwidth{textwithmarginpar}
\end{lstcode}
%
- und sieht dann auf einer rechten Seite folgendermaßen aus:
+ und sieht dann auf einer rechten Seite folgendermaßen aus:
%
\begin{XmpTopPage}
\XmpHeading{5,29}{85}
@@ -2158,58 +2158,58 @@ der der aktuellen Seitengestalt entspricht.
\end{Example}
Wie zu sehen, ist der Kopf jetzt nach innen verschoben, wobei die Kopfbreite
-sich nicht geändert hat. Die Verschiebung ist so berechnet, dass die
+sich nicht geändert hat. Die Verschiebung ist so berechnet, dass die
Seitenproportionen auch hier sichtbar werden.
\EndIndexGroup
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
+ \Macro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
\OParameter{Anweisungen}%
- \Macro{setheadsepline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
+ \Macro{setheadsepline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
\OParameter{Anweisungen}%
- \Macro{setfootsepline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
+ \Macro{setfootsepline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
\OParameter{Anweisungen}%
- \Macro{setfootbotline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
+ \Macro{setfootbotline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}%
\OParameter{Anweisungen}
\end{Declaration}%
-Entsprechend den Größenparametern für die Kopf- und Fußzeile gibt es auch
-Befehle, die die Dimensionen der Linien im Kopf und Fuß modifizieren
-können. Dazu sollten diese Linien aber zunächst erst einmal eingeschaltet
+Entsprechend den Größenparametern für die Kopf- und Fußzeile gibt es auch
+Befehle, die die Dimensionen der Linien im Kopf und Fuß modifizieren
+können. Dazu sollten diese Linien aber zunächst erst einmal eingeschaltet
werden. Siehe hierzu die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headtopline}, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline},
\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footsepline}, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footbotline} in
\autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options},
\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline}.
\begin{labeling}[\ --]{\Macro{setfootsepline}}
-\item[\Macro{setheadtopline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
-über dem Seitenkopf
-\item[\Macro{setheadsepline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
-zwischen Kopf und Textkörper
-\item[\Macro{setfootsepline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
-zwischen Text und Fuß
-\item[\Macro{setfootbotline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
-unter dem Seitenfuß
+\item[\Macro{setheadtopline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
+über dem Seitenkopf
+\item[\Macro{setheadsepline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
+zwischen Kopf und Textkörper
+\item[\Macro{setfootsepline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
+zwischen Text und Fuß
+\item[\Macro{setfootbotline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie
+unter dem Seitenfuß
\end{labeling}
Das obligatorische Argument \PName{Dicke} bestimmt, wie stark die Linie
-gezeichnet wird. Das optionale Argument \PName{Länge} akzeptiert die gleichen
+gezeichnet wird. Das optionale Argument \PName{Länge} akzeptiert die gleichen
symbolischen Werte wie \PName{Breite} bei \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.setheadwidth}, also auch einen
-normalen Längenausdruck. Solange im Dokument dem optionalen Argument
-\PName{Länge} kein Wert zugewiesen wurde, passt sich die entsprechende
-Linienlänge automatisch der Breite des Kopfes bzw. des Fußes an.
+normalen Längenausdruck. Solange im Dokument dem optionalen Argument
+\PName{Länge} kein Wert zugewiesen wurde, passt sich die entsprechende
+Linienlänge automatisch der Breite des Kopfes bzw. des Fußes an.
-Möchte man diesen Automatismus für die Länge einer Linie wieder restaurieren,
-dann nutzt man im Längenargument den Wert \PValue{auto}.
+Möchte man diesen Automatismus für die Länge einer Linie wieder restaurieren,
+dann nutzt man im Längenargument den Wert \PValue{auto}.
Mit\ChangedAt{v2.2}{\Package{scrpage2}} dem optionalen Argument
-\PName{Anweisungen} können zusätzliche Anweisungen definiert werden, die vor
-dem Zeichnen der jeweiligen Linie auszuführen sind. Das können beispielsweise
+\PName{Anweisungen} können zusätzliche Anweisungen definiert werden, die vor
+dem Zeichnen der jeweiligen Linie auszuführen sind. Das können beispielsweise
Anweisungen sein, um die
-Farbe\Index{Kopf>Farbe}\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Farbe}\Index{Farbe>im
- Kopf}\Index{Farbe>im Fuss=im Fuß} der Linie zu ändern. Bei Verwendung einer
-\KOMAScript-Klasse können diese Anweisungen auch über
-\Macro{setkomafont}\IndexCmd{setkomafont} für eines der Elemente
+Farbe\Index{Kopf>Farbe}\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Farbe}\Index{Farbe>im
+ Kopf}\Index{Farbe>im Fuss=im Fuß} der Linie zu ändern. Bei Verwendung einer
+\KOMAScript-Klasse können diese Anweisungen auch über
+\Macro{setkomafont}\IndexCmd{setkomafont} für eines der Elemente
\FontElement{headtopline}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{headtopline}%
\important[i]{\FontElement{headtopline}\\
\FontElement{headsepline}\\
@@ -2221,7 +2221,7 @@ Farbe\Index{Kopf>Farbe}\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Farbe}\Index{Farbe>im
auch \FontElement{footbotline}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{footbotline}
gesetzt und mit \Macro{addtokomafont}\IndexCmd{addtokomafont} erweitert
werden. Die beiden Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont}
-sind in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung näher beschrieben.
+sind in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung näher beschrieben.
\begin{Declaration}
@@ -2234,29 +2234,29 @@ sind in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung näher beschrieben.
\Macro{setheadtopline}\POParameter{auto}\Parameter{}\OParameter{}
\end{Declaration}%
Die hier am Befehl \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.setheadtopline} illustrierten Argumente
-sind natürlich auch für die anderen drei Längenbefehle gültig.
+sind natürlich auch für die anderen drei Längenbefehle gültig.
-Enthält das obligatorische Argument den Wert \PValue{current} oder wird
-leer gelassen, dann wird die Dicke der Linie nicht verändert. Das kann
-genutzt werden, wenn die Länge der Linie, aber nicht die Dicke modifiziert
+Enthält das obligatorische Argument den Wert \PValue{current} oder wird
+leer gelassen, dann wird die Dicke der Linie nicht verändert. Das kann
+genutzt werden, wenn die Länge der Linie, aber nicht die Dicke modifiziert
werden soll.
Wird das optionale Argument \PName{Anweisungen} weggelassen, so bleiben
eventuell zuvor gesetzte Anweisungen erhalten. Wird hingegen ein leeres
Argument \PName{Anweisungen} gesetzt, so werden eventuell zuvor gesetzte
-Anweisungen wieder gelöscht.
+Anweisungen wieder gelöscht.
\begin{Example}
- Soll beispielsweise der Kopf mit einer kräftigen Linie von 2\,pt darüber und
+ Soll beispielsweise der Kopf mit einer kräftigen Linie von 2\,pt darüber und
einer normalen von 0,4\,pt zwischen Kopf und Text abgesetzt werden, dann
erfolgt das mit:
\begin{lstcode}
\setheadtopline{2pt}
\setheadsepline{.4pt}
\end{lstcode}
-Zusätzlich\textnote{Achtung!} sind unbedingt die Optionen
+Zusätzlich\textnote{Achtung!} sind unbedingt die Optionen
\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headtopline} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline} vorzugsweise global im
-optionalen Argument von \Macro{documentclass} zu setzen. Das Ergebnis könnte
+optionalen Argument von \Macro{documentclass} zu setzen. Das Ergebnis könnte
dann wie folgt aussehen.
%
\begin{XmpTopPage}
@@ -2267,17 +2267,17 @@ dann wie folgt aussehen.
\XmpMarginNote{83,14}
\end{XmpTopPage}
- Sollen diese Linien zusätzlich in roter Farbe gesetzt werden, dann sind die
- Anweisungen beispielsweise wie folgt zu ändern:
+ Sollen diese Linien zusätzlich in roter Farbe gesetzt werden, dann sind die
+ Anweisungen beispielsweise wie folgt zu ändern:
\begin{lstcode}
\setheadtopline{2pt}[\color{red}]
\setheadsepline{.4pt}[\color{red}]
\end{lstcode}
- In diesem und auch dem folgenden Beispiel wurde für die Aktivierung der
+ In diesem und auch dem folgenden Beispiel wurde für die Aktivierung der
Farbe die Syntax des \Package{color}\IndexPackage{color}-Pakets verwendet,
- das dann natürlich auch geladen werden muss. \Package{scrpage2} selbst
- bietet keine direkte Farbunterstützung. Damit ist jedes beliebige
- Farbunterstützungspaket verwendbar.
+ das dann natürlich auch geladen werden muss. \Package{scrpage2} selbst
+ bietet keine direkte Farbunterstützung. Damit ist jedes beliebige
+ Farbunterstützungspaket verwendbar.
Mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse kann alternativ
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -2288,8 +2288,8 @@ dann wie folgt aussehen.
\end{lstcode}
verwendet werden.
- Die automatische Anpassung an die Kopf- und Fußbreiten illustriert folgendes
- Beispiel, für das die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footbotline} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footsepline}
+ Die automatische Anpassung an die Kopf- und Fußbreiten illustriert folgendes
+ Beispiel, für das die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footbotline} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footsepline}
gesetzt sein sollten:
\begin{lstcode}
\setfootbotline{2pt}
@@ -2297,7 +2297,7 @@ dann wie folgt aussehen.
\setfootwidth[0pt]{textwithmarginpar}
\end{lstcode}
-%\phantomsection für hyperref-\pageref-Link jum-2001/11/24
+%\phantomsection für hyperref-\pageref-Link jum-2001/11/24
\phantomsection\label{page:scrpage-de.autoLineLength}%
\begin{XmpBotPage}
\XmpHeading{10,18}{85}
@@ -2308,9 +2308,9 @@ dann wie folgt aussehen.
\end{XmpBotPage}
\end{Example}
%
-Nun mag nicht jedem die Ausrichtung der Linie über der Fußzeile gefallen,
+Nun mag nicht jedem die Ausrichtung der Linie über der Fußzeile gefallen,
sondern es wird in einem solchen Fall erwartet, dass sie wie der Kolumnentitel
-linksbündig zum Text ist. Diese Einstellung kann nur global in Form einer
+linksbündig zum Text ist. Diese Einstellung kann nur global in Form einer
Paketoption erfolgen und wird im folgenden
\autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options} mit anderen Optionen beschrieben.%
%
@@ -2321,10 +2321,10 @@ Paketoption erfolgen und wird im folgenden
\subsection{Optionen beim Laden des Paketes}
\label{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options}
-Während bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen die Mehrzahl der Optionen auch noch nach
-dem Laden der Klasse mit \Macro{KOMAoptions} und \Macro{KOMAoption} geändert
-werden kann, trifft dies für das Paket \Package{scrpage2} \iffree{derzeit noch
-}{}nicht zu. Alle Optionen für dieses Paket müssen als globale Optionen, also
+Während bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen die Mehrzahl der Optionen auch noch nach
+dem Laden der Klasse mit \Macro{KOMAoptions} und \Macro{KOMAoption} geändert
+werden kann, trifft dies für das Paket \Package{scrpage2} \iffree{derzeit noch
+}{}nicht zu. Alle Optionen für dieses Paket müssen als globale Optionen, also
im optionalen Argument von \Macro{documentclass}, oder als Paketoptionen, also
im optionalen Argument von \Macro{usepackage}, angegeben werden.
@@ -2342,8 +2342,8 @@ im optionalen Argument von \Macro{usepackage}, angegeben werden.
Diese\textnote{Achtung!} Optionen sollten bei Verwendung von
\KOMAScript~3\ChangedAt{v2.3}{\Package{scrpage2}} nicht mehr beispielsweise
per optionalem Argument von \Macro{usepackage} oder per
-\Macro{PassOptionsToPackage} direkt an \Package{scrpage2} übergeben
-werden. Lediglich aus Gründen der Kompatibilität sind sie noch in
+\Macro{PassOptionsToPackage} direkt an \Package{scrpage2} übergeben
+werden. Lediglich aus Gründen der Kompatibilität sind sie noch in
\Package{scrpage2} deklariert und werden von diesem als \Option{headinclude},
\OptionValue{headinclude}{false}, \Option{footinclude} und
\OptionValue{footinclude}{false} an das Paket \Package{typearea}
@@ -2361,10 +2361,10 @@ weitergereicht.
\Option{footbotline}%
\Option{plainfootbotline}
\end{Declaration}%
-Eine Grundeinstellung für die Linien unter und über den Kopf- und Fußzeilen
+Eine Grundeinstellung für die Linien unter und über den Kopf- und Fußzeilen
kann mit diesen Optionen vorgenommen werden. Diese Einstellungen gelten dann
-als Standard für alle mit \Package{scrpage2} definierten Seitenstile. Wird
-eine von diesen Optionen verwendet, dann wird eine Linienstärke von 0,4\,pt
+als Standard für alle mit \Package{scrpage2} definierten Seitenstile. Wird
+eine von diesen Optionen verwendet, dann wird eine Linienstärke von 0,4\,pt
eingesetzt. Da es zum Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} einen entsprechenden
plain-Stil gibt, kann mit den \Option{plain\dots}-Optionen auch die
entsprechende Linie des plain-Stils konfiguriert werden. Diese
@@ -2373,18 +2373,18 @@ Option ohne \Option{plain} aktiviert wurde. Somit zeigt die Option
\Option{plainheadtopline} ohne \Option{headtopline} keine Wirkung.
Bei diesen Optionen ist zu beachten, dass der entsprechende Seitenteil in den
-Textbereich des Satzspiegels mit übernommen wird, wenn eine Linie aktiviert
+Textbereich des Satzspiegels mit übernommen wird, wenn eine Linie aktiviert
wurde. Wird also mittels \Option{headsepline} die Trennlinie zwischen Kopf
und Text aktiviert, dann wird automatisch mittels \Package{typearea} der
Satzspiegel so berechnet, dass der Seitenkopf Teil des Textblocks ist.
-Die\textnote{Achtung!} Bedingungen für die Optionen des vorhergehenden
-Abschnitts gelten auch für diesen Automatismus. Das bedeutet, dass das Paket
+Die\textnote{Achtung!} Bedingungen für die Optionen des vorhergehenden
+Abschnitts gelten auch für diesen Automatismus. Das bedeutet, dass das Paket
\Package{typearea} nach \Package{scrpage2} geladen werden muss,
beziehungsweise, dass bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript{}-Klasse die Optionen
\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headinclude} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footinclude} explizit bei
-\Macro{documentclass} gesetzt werden müssen, um Kopf- bzw. Fußzeile in den
-Textblock zu übernehmen.%
+\Macro{documentclass} gesetzt werden müssen, um Kopf- bzw. Fußzeile in den
+Textblock zu übernehmen.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2395,14 +2395,14 @@ Textblock zu übernehmen.%
\Option{olines}
\end{Declaration}%
\Index{Linienausrichtung}%
-Bei der Festlegung der Linienlängen kann es vorkommen, dass die Linie zwar die
-gewünschte Länge, aber nicht die erwünschte Ausrichtung hat, da sie im Kopf-
-bzw. Fußbereich zentriert wird. Mit den hier vorgestellten Paketoptionen kann
-global für alle mit \Package{scrpage2} definierten Seitenstile diese Vorgabe
+Bei der Festlegung der Linienlängen kann es vorkommen, dass die Linie zwar die
+gewünschte Länge, aber nicht die erwünschte Ausrichtung hat, da sie im Kopf-
+bzw. Fußbereich zentriert wird. Mit den hier vorgestellten Paketoptionen kann
+global für alle mit \Package{scrpage2} definierten Seitenstile diese Vorgabe
modifiziert werden. Dabei setzt \Option{ilines} die Ausrichtung so, dass die
Linien an den inneren Rand verschoben werden. Die Option \Option{clines}
-verhält sich wie die Standardeinstellung und \Option{olines} richtet am
-äußeren Rand aus.
+verhält sich wie die Standardeinstellung und \Option{olines} richtet am
+äußeren Rand aus.
\begin{Example}
Hier gilt es, das Beispiel zu \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.setfootsepline} auf
@@ -2418,8 +2418,8 @@ verhält sich wie die Standardeinstellung und \Option{olines} richtet am
% Der folgende Text wurde erg"anzt um den Seitenumbruch zu verbessern,
% mjk-2001-10-05:
% \enlargethispage*{2\baselineskip}
- Allein die Verwendung der Option \Option{ilines} führt dabei zu der
- geänderten Ausgabe, die nachfolgend veranschaulicht wird:
+ Allein die Verwendung der Option \Option{ilines} führt dabei zu der
+ geänderten Ausgabe, die nachfolgend veranschaulicht wird:
%
\begin{XmpBotPage}
\XmpHeading{10,18}{85}
@@ -2428,13 +2428,13 @@ verhält sich wie die Standardeinstellung und \Option{olines} richtet am
\XmpSetText[\XmpBotText]{10,36}
\XmpMarginNote{83,26}
\end{XmpBotPage}
- Die Trennlinie zwischen Text und Fuß wird bündig innen im Fußteil
+ Die Trennlinie zwischen Text und Fuß wird bündig innen im Fußteil
gesetzt und nicht wie bei der Standardeinstellung zentriert.
\end{Example}
\EndIndexGroup
-% \phantomsection für hyperref-\pageref-Link jum-2001/11/24
+% \phantomsection für hyperref-\pageref-Link jum-2001/11/24
\begin{Declaration}
\Option{automark}%
\Option{manualmark}
@@ -2449,7 +2449,7 @@ sie.
% bzw. falschen Bug-Reports im Support kamen.
% mjk-2001-09-21:
Ohne Verwendung einer der beiden Optionen bleibt die Einstellung
-erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war.
+erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war.
\begin{Example}
Sie laden das Paket \Package{scrpage2} unmittelbar nach der Klasse
\Class{scrreprt} und ohne weitere Optionen. Dazu schreiben Sie:
@@ -2458,9 +2458,9 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war.
\usepackage{scrpage2}
\end{lstcode}
Da bei \Class{scrreprt} der Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} voreingestellt
- ist, ist dies auch jetzt noch der Fall. Außerdem entspricht die
+ ist, ist dies auch jetzt noch der Fall. Außerdem entspricht die
Voreinstellung \PageStyle{plain} manuellen Kolumnentiteln. Wenn Sie
- also anschließend mit
+ also anschließend mit
\begin{lstcode}
\pagestyle{scrheadings}
\end{lstcode}
@@ -2474,7 +2474,7 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war.
\usepackage{scrpage2}
\end{lstcode}
der Seitenstil \PageStyle{headings} mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln
- aktiviert. Bei anschließender Umschaltung auf den Seitenstil
+ aktiviert. Bei anschließender Umschaltung auf den Seitenstil
\PageStyle{scrheadings} bleiben automatische Kolumnentitel
eingeschaltet. Dabei werden dann weiterhin die Markierungsmakros von
\Class{scrbook} verwendet.
@@ -2483,10 +2483,10 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war.
\begin{lstcode}
\usepackage[automark]{scrpage2}
\end{lstcode}
- so wird unabhängig von der verwendeten Klasse auf automatische
+ so wird unabhängig von der verwendeten Klasse auf automatische
Kolumnentitel umgeschaltet, wobei die Markierungsmakros von
\Package{scrpage2} genutzt werden.
- Natürlich wirkt sich dies auf den Seitenstil
+ Natürlich wirkt sich dies auf den Seitenstil
\PageStyle{plain} von \Class{scrreprt} nicht aus. Die Kolumnentitel
werden erst sichtbar, wenn auf den Seitenstil
\PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} oder
@@ -2496,7 +2496,7 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war.
\EndIndexGroup
-% Folgende Deklaration und Erklaerung wurde eingefügt von
+% Folgende Deklaration und Erklaerung wurde eingefügt von
% mjk 2001-08-17:
\begin{Declaration}
\Option{autooneside}
@@ -2505,7 +2505,7 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war.
\BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>manuell}%
Mit dieser Option wird das optionale Argument von
\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark}\IndexCmd{automark}\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} im
-einseitigen Satz automatisch ignoriert. Siehe hierzu auch die Erläuterung
+einseitigen Satz automatisch ignoriert. Siehe hierzu auch die Erläuterung
zum Befehl \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark},
\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark}.%
%
@@ -2521,12 +2521,12 @@ Diese Optionen bestimmen, wie die beiden vordefinierten Seitenstile
Bei \Option{komastyle} wird eine Definition vorgenommen, wie
sie den \KOMAScript{}-Klassen entspricht.
Bei den \KOMAScript{}-Klassen ist dies die Voreinstellung und
-kann somit auch für andere Klassen gesetzt werden.
+kann somit auch für andere Klassen gesetzt werden.
Die Option \Option{standardstyle} definiert die beiden Seitenstile
wie es von den Standardklassen erwartet wird.
-Außerdem wird hier automatisch \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markuppercase} aktiviert,
-es sei denn, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markusedcase} wird ebenfalls als Option übergeben.%
+Außerdem wird hier automatisch \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markuppercase} aktiviert,
+es sei denn, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markusedcase} wird ebenfalls als Option übergeben.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2534,19 +2534,19 @@ es sei denn, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markusedcase} wird ebenfalls als Option
\Option{markuppercase}%
\Option{markusedcase}
\end{Declaration}%
-Für die Funktionalität von \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} modifiziert
+Für die Funktionalität von \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} modifiziert
\Package{scrpage2} interne Befehle, die die Gliederungsbefehle
benutzen, um die lebenden Kolumnentitel zu setzen.
Da einige Klassen, im Gegensatz
-zu den \KOMAScript{}-Klassen, die Kolumnentitel in Großbuchstaben
+zu den \KOMAScript{}-Klassen, die Kolumnentitel in Großbuchstaben
schreiben, muss \Package{scrpage2} wissen, wie die genutzte
Dokumentklasse die lebenden Kolumnentitel darstellt.
Die Option \Option{markuppercase} zeigt \Package{scrpage2}, dass die benutzte
-Klasse die Großschreibweise benutzt. Die Option \Option{markusedcase} sollte
-angegeben werden, wenn die benutzte Dokumentklasse keine Großschreibweise
+Klasse die Großschreibweise benutzt. Die Option \Option{markusedcase} sollte
+angegeben werden, wenn die benutzte Dokumentklasse keine Großschreibweise
verwendet. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Optionen sind nicht geeignet, eine
-entsprechende Darstellung zu erzwingen. Es kann somit zu unerwünschten
+entsprechende Darstellung zu erzwingen. Es kann somit zu unerwünschten
Effekten kommen, wenn die Angabe nicht dem Verhalten der Dokumentklasse
entspricht.%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2557,28 +2557,28 @@ entspricht.%
\begin{Declaration}
\Option{nouppercase}
\end{Declaration}%
-Wie in obiger Erklärung zu \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markuppercase} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markusedcase}
-bereits ausgeführt wurde, gibt es Klassen und auch Pakete, die beim Setzen der
+Wie in obiger Erklärung zu \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markuppercase} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markusedcase}
+bereits ausgeführt wurde, gibt es Klassen und auch Pakete, die beim Setzen der
lebenden Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} mit Hilfe einer der
Anweisungen \Macro{uppercase}\IndexCmd{uppercase}\important{\Macro{uppercase}}
oder
\Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase}\important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}}
-den gesamten Eintrag in Großbuchstaben wandeln. Mit der Option
-\Option{nouppercase} können diese beiden Anweisungen im Kopf und im Fuß außer
-Kraft gesetzt werden. Das gilt aber nur für Seitenstile, die mit Hilfe von
-\Package{scrpage2} definiert werden. Dazu zählen auch \PageStyle{scrheadings}
-und der zugehörige plain-Seitenstil.
-
-Die verwendete Methode ist äußerst brutal und kann dazu führen, dass
-auch erwünschte Änderungen von Klein- in
-Großbuchstaben\Index{Grossbuchstaben=Großbuchstaben} unterbleiben. Da
-diese Fälle nicht sehr häufig sind, stellt \Option{nouppercase} aber
-meist eine brauchbare Lösung dar.
+den gesamten Eintrag in Großbuchstaben wandeln. Mit der Option
+\Option{nouppercase} können diese beiden Anweisungen im Kopf und im Fuß außer
+Kraft gesetzt werden. Das gilt aber nur für Seitenstile, die mit Hilfe von
+\Package{scrpage2} definiert werden. Dazu zählen auch \PageStyle{scrheadings}
+und der zugehörige plain-Seitenstil.
+
+Die verwendete Methode ist äußerst brutal und kann dazu führen, dass
+auch erwünschte Änderungen von Klein- in
+Großbuchstaben\Index{Grossbuchstaben=Großbuchstaben} unterbleiben. Da
+diese Fälle nicht sehr häufig sind, stellt \Option{nouppercase} aber
+meist eine brauchbare Lösung dar.
\begin{Example}
Sie verwenden die Standardklasse \Class{book}\IndexClass{book},
wollen aber, dass die lebenden Kolumnentitel nicht in
- Großbuchstaben, sondern in normaler gemischter Schreibweise gesetzt
- werden. Die Präambel Ihres Dokuments könnte dann wie folgt beginnen:
+ Großbuchstaben, sondern in normaler gemischter Schreibweise gesetzt
+ werden. Die Präambel Ihres Dokuments könnte dann wie folgt beginnen:
\begin{lstcode}
\documentclass{book}
\usepackage[nouppercase]{scrpage2}
@@ -2589,10 +2589,10 @@ meist eine brauchbare Lösung dar.
wird, der von der Option \Option{nouppercase} nicht behandelt wird.
\end{Example}
-In einigen Fällen setzen nicht nur Klassen, sondern auch Pakete
-lebende Kolumnentitel in Großbuchstaben. Auch in diesen Fällen hilft
+In einigen Fällen setzen nicht nur Klassen, sondern auch Pakete
+lebende Kolumnentitel in Großbuchstaben. Auch in diesen Fällen hilft
\Option{nouppercase} meist, um zu gemischter Schreibweise
-zurückzuschalten.%
+zurückzuschalten.%
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2603,8 +2603,8 @@ zurückzuschalten.%
\subsection{Die Anwenderschnittstelle}\label{sec:scrpage-de.UI.user}
% \deftripstyle
-Nun möchte man ja nicht immer an die vorgegebenen Seitenstile gebunden sein,
-sondern auch seiner Kreativität freien Lauf lassen.
+Nun möchte man ja nicht immer an die vorgegebenen Seitenstile gebunden sein,
+sondern auch seiner Kreativität freien Lauf lassen.
Manchmal ist man auch dazu gezwungen, weil eine bestimmte
\emph{Corporate Identity} einer Firma es verlangt.
Der einfachste Weg damit umzugehen ist
@@ -2619,42 +2619,42 @@ Die einzelnen Felder haben folgende Bedeutung:
\item[\PName{Name}] die Bezeichnung des Seitenstils, die dann bei der
Aktivierung mit \Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{Name} oder
\Macro{thispagestyle}\Parameter{Name} verwendet wird
-\item[\PName{LA}] die Dicke der äußeren Linien, d.\,h. der Linien über der
- Kopfzeile und unter der Fußzeile (optional)
+\item[\PName{LA}] die Dicke der äußeren Linien, d.\,h. der Linien über der
+ Kopfzeile und unter der Fußzeile (optional)
\item[\PName{LI}] die Dicke der inneren Linie, d.\,h. der Linien die Kopf und
- Fuß vom Textkörper trennen (optional)
+ Fuß vom Textkörper trennen (optional)
\item[\PName{KI}] Inhalt des Feldes im Kopf innenseitig oder bei einseitigem
Layout links
\item[\PName{KM}] Inhalt des Feldes im Kopf zentriert
-\item[\PName{KA}] Inhalt des Feldes im Kopf außenseitig oder bei einseitigem
+\item[\PName{KA}] Inhalt des Feldes im Kopf außenseitig oder bei einseitigem
Layout rechts
-\item[\PName{FI}] Inhalt des Feldes im Fuß innenseitig oder bei einseitigem
+\item[\PName{FI}] Inhalt des Feldes im Fuß innenseitig oder bei einseitigem
Layout links
-\item[\PName{FM}] Inhalt des Feldes im Fuß zentriert
-\item[\PName{FA}] Inhalt des Feldes im Fuß außenseitig oder bei einseitigem
+\item[\PName{FM}] Inhalt des Feldes im Fuß zentriert
+\item[\PName{FA}] Inhalt des Feldes im Fuß außenseitig oder bei einseitigem
Layout rechts
\end{labeling}
Der Befehl \Macro{deftripstyle} stellt sicherlich die einfachste
-Möglichkeit dar, Seitenstile zu definieren.
-Leider sind damit auch Einschränkungen verbunden,
+Möglichkeit dar, Seitenstile zu definieren.
+Leider sind damit auch Einschränkungen verbunden,
da in einem Seitenbereich mit einem durch \Macro{deftripstyle} deklarierten
-Seitenstil keine Änderung der Kopf- und Fußlinien erfolgen kann.
+Seitenstil keine Änderung der Kopf- und Fußlinien erfolgen kann.
\begin{Example}
Vorgegeben sei ein doppelseitiges Layout, bei dem die Kolumnentitel innen
erscheinen sollen. Weiterhin soll der Dokumenttitel, in diesem Fall kurz
- \glqq Bericht\grqq, an den Außenrand in den Kopf, die Seitenzahl soll
- zentriert in den Fuß.
+ \glqq Bericht\grqq, an den Außenrand in den Kopf, die Seitenzahl soll
+ zentriert in den Fuß.
\begin{lstcode}
\deftripstyle{DerBericht}%
{\headmark}{}{Bericht}%
{}{\pagemark}{}
\end{lstcode}
- Sollen weiterhin die Linien über dem Kopf und unter dem Fuß
- mit 2\,pt erscheinen und der ganze Textkörper mit dünnen Linien
- von 0,4\,pt von Kopf und Fuß abgesetzt werden, dann erweitert
+ Sollen weiterhin die Linien über dem Kopf und unter dem Fuß
+ mit 2\,pt erscheinen und der ganze Textkörper mit dünnen Linien
+ von 0,4\,pt von Kopf und Fuß abgesetzt werden, dann erweitert
man vorherige Definition.
\begin{lstcode}
\deftripstyle{DerBericht}[2pt][.4pt]%
@@ -2670,9 +2670,9 @@ Seitenstil keine Änderung der Kopf- und Fußlinien erfolgen kann.
[{%
Beispiel eines selbst definierten, von Linien dominierten Seitenstils%
}]{%
- Beispiel für einen selbst definierten, von Linien dominierten Seitenstil
+ Beispiel für einen selbst definierten, von Linien dominierten Seitenstil
mit einem statischen und einem lebenden Kolumnentitel im Kopf und der
- Seitenzahl in der Mitte des Fußes.%
+ Seitenzahl in der Mitte des Fußes.%
\label{fig:scrpage-de2.tomuchlines}%
}
[l]
@@ -2717,24 +2717,24 @@ Seitenstil keine Änderung der Kopf- und Fußlinien erfolgen kann.
\subsection{Die Expertenschnittstelle}\label{sec:scrpage-de.UI.expert}
% \defpagestyle \newpagestyle \providepagestyle \renewpagestyle
Einfache Seitenstile, wie sie mit \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.deftripstyle} deklariert
-werden können, sind erfahrungsgemäß selten.
+werden können, sind erfahrungsgemäß selten.
Entweder verlangt ein Professor, dass die Diplomarbeit so aussieht
wie seine eigene -- und wer will ihm da \emph{ernsthaft} widersprechen --
-oder eine Firma möchte, dass die halbe Finanzbuchhaltung im
-Seitenfuß auf"|taucht. Alles kein Problem, denn es gibt noch:
+oder eine Firma möchte, dass die halbe Finanzbuchhaltung im
+Seitenfuß auf"|taucht. Alles kein Problem, denn es gibt noch:
\begin{Declaration}
- \Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}%
- \Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}%
- \Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}%
- \Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}
+ \Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}%
+ \Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}%
+ \Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}%
+ \Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}
\end{Declaration}%
-Dies sind die Befehle, die die volle Kontrolle über die Gestaltung
-eines Seitenstils ermöglichen. Der Aufbau ist bei allen vier
+Dies sind die Befehle, die die volle Kontrolle über die Gestaltung
+eines Seitenstils ermöglichen. Der Aufbau ist bei allen vier
Definitionen gleich, sie unterscheiden sich nur hinsichtlich
der Wirkungsweise.
\begin{labeling}[\ --]{\Macro{providepagestyle}}
\item[\Macro{defpagestyle}] definiert einen neuen Seitenstil. Existiert
- bereits einer mit diesem Namen, wird dieser überschrieben.
+ bereits einer mit diesem Namen, wird dieser überschrieben.
\item[\Macro{newpagestyle}] definiert einen neuen Seitenstil. Wenn schon einer
mit diesem Namen existiert, wird ein Fehler ausgegeben.
\item[\Macro{renewpagestyle}] definiert einen bestehenden Seitenstil um. Wenn
@@ -2744,30 +2744,30 @@ der Wirkungsweise.
\end{labeling}
Am Beispiel von \Macro{defpagestyle} soll die Syntax der Definitionen
-im Folgenden erläutert werden.
+im Folgenden erläutert werden.
\begin{labeling}[~--]{\PName{Kopfdefinition}\,}
\item[\PName{Name}] die Bezeichnung des Seitenstils
\item[\PName{Kopfdefinition}] die Deklaration des Seitenkopfes bestehend aus
- fünf Teilen, wobei die in runden Klammern stehenden Angaben optional
+ fünf Teilen, wobei die in runden Klammern stehenden Angaben optional
sind:\hfill\\
\hspace*{1em}\AParameter{OLL,OLD}%
\Parameter{GS}\Parameter{US}\Parameter{ES}\AParameter{ULL,ULD}
-\item[\PName{Fußdefinition}] die Deklaration des Seitenfußes bestehend aus
- fünf Teilen, wobei die in runden Klammern stehenden Angaben optional
+\item[\PName{Fußdefinition}] die Deklaration des Seitenfußes bestehend aus
+ fünf Teilen, wobei die in runden Klammern stehenden Angaben optional
sind:\hfill\\
\hspace*{1em}\AParameter{OLL,OLD}%
\Parameter{GS}\Parameter{US}\Parameter{ES}\AParameter{ULL,ULD}
\end{labeling}
-Wie zu sehen ist, haben Kopf- und Fußdefinition identischen Aufbau. Die
+Wie zu sehen ist, haben Kopf- und Fußdefinition identischen Aufbau. Die
einzelnen Parameter haben folgende Bedeutung:
\begin{labeling}[\ --]{\PName{OLD}}
-\item[\PName{OLL}] obere Linienlänge: Kopf = außen, Fuß = Trennlinie
+\item[\PName{OLL}] obere Linienlänge: Kopf = außen, Fuß = Trennlinie
\item[\PName{OLD}] obere Liniendicke
-\item[\PName{GS}] Definition für die \emph{gerade} Seite
-\item[\PName{US}] Definition für die \emph{ungerade} Seite
-\item[\PName{ES}] Definition für \emph{einseitiges} Layout
-\item[\PName{ULL}] untere Linienlänge Kopf = Trennlinie, Fuß = außen
+\item[\PName{GS}] Definition für die \emph{gerade} Seite
+\item[\PName{US}] Definition für die \emph{ungerade} Seite
+\item[\PName{ES}] Definition für \emph{einseitiges} Layout
+\item[\PName{ULL}] untere Linienlänge Kopf = Trennlinie, Fuß = außen
\item[\PName{ULD}] untere Liniendicke
\end{labeling}
@@ -2777,8 +2777,8 @@ weiterhin durch die in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format},
konfigurierbar.
Die drei Felder \PName{GS}, \PName{US} und \PName{ES} entsprechen Boxen, die
-die Breite des Kopf- bzw. Fußteils haben.
-Die entsprechenden Definitionen erscheinen in diesen Boxen linksbündig.
+die Breite des Kopf- bzw. Fußteils haben.
+Die entsprechenden Definitionen erscheinen in diesen Boxen linksbündig.
Um somit etwas links- \emph{und} rechtsseitig in den Boxen zu platzieren,
kann der Zwischenraum mit \Macro{hfill} gestreckt werden:
%
@@ -2786,10 +2786,10 @@ kann der Zwischenraum mit \Macro{hfill} gestreckt werden:
{\headmark\hfill\pagemark}
\end{lstcode}
-Um zusätzlich etwas zentriert erscheinen zu lassen, ist eine erweiterte
+Um zusätzlich etwas zentriert erscheinen zu lassen, ist eine erweiterte
Definition notwendig.
-Die Befehle \Macro{rlap} und \Macro{llap} setzen die übergebenen Argumente.
-Für \LaTeX{} erscheint es aber so, dass diese Texte eine Breite von Null
+Die Befehle \Macro{rlap} und \Macro{llap} setzen die übergebenen Argumente.
+Für \LaTeX{} erscheint es aber so, dass diese Texte eine Breite von Null
haben. Nur so erscheint der mittlere Text auch wirklich zentriert.
%
\begin{lstcode}
@@ -2798,12 +2798,12 @@ haben. Nur so erscheint der mittlere Text auch wirklich zentriert.
\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext
Dies und die Verwendung der Expertenschnittstelle in Zusammenhang mit
-anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel.
+anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel.
\fi
\begin{Example}
Angenommen es wird die Dokumentklasse \Class{scrbook} genutzt. Damit
- liegt ein zweiseitiges Layout vor. Für das Paket \Package{scrpage2} wird
+ liegt ein zweiseitiges Layout vor. Für das Paket \Package{scrpage2} wird
festgelegt, dass mit automatisch aktualisierten Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet
wird und dass im Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} eine Trennlinie zwischen
Kopf und Text gezogen wird.
@@ -2814,7 +2814,7 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel.
\end{lstcode}
Mit Hilfe der Expertenschnittstelle werden zwei Seitenstile definiert. Der
- erste legt keine Linienargumente fest, im zweiten wird die Linie über dem
+ erste legt keine Linienargumente fest, im zweiten wird die Linie über dem
Kopf mit einer Dicke von 1\,pt und die Linie unter dem Kopf mit 0\,pt
festgelegt.
@@ -2847,28 +2847,28 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel.
Gleich zu Beginn wird der Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} aktiviert. Mit
\Macro{chapter} wird ein neues Kapitel begonnen. Weiterhin wird automatisch
- durch \Macro{chapter} der Seitenstil für diese Seite auf \PageStyle{plain}
+ durch \Macro{chapter} der Seitenstil für diese Seite auf \PageStyle{plain}
gesetzt. Das folgende \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.chead} zeigt, wie durch Modifikation des
- plain-Stils ein Kolumnentitel erzeugt werden kann. Grundsätzlich sollte
+ plain-Stils ein Kolumnentitel erzeugt werden kann. Grundsätzlich sollte
jedoch davon Abstand genommen werden, da sonst der Markierungscharakter der
plain-Seite verloren geht. Es ist wichtiger anzuzeigen, dass hier ein neues
Kapitel beginnt, als dass ein Abschnitt dieser Seite einen bestimmten Titel
- trägt.
+ trägt.
\begin{lstcode}
\begin{document}
\pagestyle{scrheadings}
\chapter{Thermodynamik}
\chead[\leftmark]{}
- \section{Hauptsätze}
- Jedes System besitzt eine extensive Zustandsgröße
+ \section{Hauptsätze}
+ Jedes System besitzt eine extensive Zustandsgröße
Energie. Sie ist in einem abgeschlossenen System
konstant.
\end{lstcode}%
\begin{XmpTopPage}
\XmpHeading[\hfill\textsl{1 Thermodynamik}\hfill]{10,27}{70}
\put(10,17){\normalsize\textbf{\sffamily 1 Thermodynamik}}
- \put(10,12){\textbf{\sffamily 1.1 Hauptsätze}}
+ \put(10,12){\textbf{\sffamily 1.1 Hauptsätze}}
\XmpSetText[%
Jedes System besitzt eine extensive Zustands\char\defaulthyphenchar
\linebreak]{10,9}
@@ -2877,18 +2877,18 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel.
Nach dem Seitenwechsel ist der Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}
aktiv, und somit auch die Trennlinie aus den Paketoptionen sichtbar.
\begin{lstcode}
- Es existiert eine Zustandsgröße, genannt die
- Entropie eines Systems, deren zeitliche Änderung
- sich aus Entropieströmung und Entropieerzeugung
+ Es existiert eine Zustandsgröße, genannt die
+ Entropie eines Systems, deren zeitliche Änderung
+ sich aus Entropieströmung und Entropieerzeugung
zusammensetzt.
\end{lstcode}
\begin{XmpTopPage}
\XmpHeading[\textsl{1 Thermodynamik}\hfill]{20,27}{70}
\thinlines\XmpRule{20,25}{70}
\XmpSetText[%
- Es existiert eine Zustandsgröße, genannt die En"-tropie
- eines Systems, deren zeitliche Änderung sich aus
- Entropieströmung und Entropie\char\defaulthyphenchar\kern-1pt
+ Es existiert eine Zustandsgröße, genannt die En"-tropie
+ eines Systems, deren zeitliche Änderung sich aus
+ Entropieströmung und Entropie\char\defaulthyphenchar\kern-1pt
\linebreak]{20,21}
\end{XmpTopPage}
@@ -2896,7 +2896,7 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel.
und der Seitenstil \PValue{ohneLinien} aktiviert. Da keine Linienargumente
bei der Definition dieses Stils genutzt wurden, wird die
Standard-Linien\-konfiguration verwendet. Diese zeichnet hier eine Linie
- zwischen Kopf und Text, da \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline} als Argument für
+ zwischen Kopf und Text, da \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline} als Argument für
\Package{scrpage2} angegeben wurde.%
\begin{lstcode}
\manualmark
@@ -2942,14 +2942,14 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel.
\subsection{Seitenstile verwalten}\label{sec:scrpage-de.UI.cfgFile}
% scrpage.cfg
\BeginIndex{File}{scrpage.cfg}
-Bei längerer Arbeit mit verschiedenen Seitenstilen wird sich, je nach
+Bei längerer Arbeit mit verschiedenen Seitenstilen wird sich, je nach
Geschmack und Aufgabenstellung, ein fester Satz an benutzten Stilen
etablieren.
-Um nicht bei jedem neuen Projekt eine große Kopieraktion von den Daten
-eines Projekts zum neuen Projekt starten zu müssen, liest \Package{scrpage2}
+Um nicht bei jedem neuen Projekt eine große Kopieraktion von den Daten
+eines Projekts zum neuen Projekt starten zu müssen, liest \Package{scrpage2}
am Ende seiner Initialisierungsphase die Datei \File{scrpage.cfg} ein.
-In dieser Datei können dann Seitenstile definiert sein, die viele
-Projekte gemeinsam nutzen können.
+In dieser Datei können dann Seitenstile definiert sein, die viele
+Projekte gemeinsam nutzen können.
\EndIndex{File}{scrpage.cfg}
%
\EndIndexGroup
@@ -2958,6 +2958,6 @@ Projekte gemeinsam nutzen können.
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: latex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog
index 216994af24..d83939b491 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,1073 @@
+r3264 2019-10-12 16:50:27 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * releaselist.txt: release 2019/10/12 v3.27
+
+r3263 2019-10-12 16:50:03 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-version.dtx: prepared for 3.27
+
+r3262 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-version.dtx, scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx,
+ scrkernel-compatibility.dtx, scrkernel-title.dtx,
+ scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx,
+ scrkernel-floats.dtx, scrkernel-language.dtx, scrsource.tex,
+ scrkernel-variables.dtx, scrkernel-footnotes.dtx,
+ scrkernel-index.dtx, scrkernel-circularletters.dtx,
+ scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
+ scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx,
+ scrjura.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx,
+ scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrhack.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx,
+ scraddr.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/plength.dtx,
+ doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrlttr2.tex: \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} removed, so
+ LaTeX >= 2018-04-1 required
+
+r3261 2019-10-10 10:04:30 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex,
+ doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/english/common-dictum.tex, doc/english/common-footnotes.tex,
+ doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/common-lists.tex,
+ doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/typearea-experts.tex,
+ doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/common-titles.tex,
+ doc/english/common-compatibility.tex,
+ doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex,
+ doc/english/preface.tex, doc/english/scrwfile.tex,
+ doc/english/scraddr.tex: Copyright date of German files changed
+
+r3260 2019-10-10 09:50:23 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex,
+ doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex,
+ doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex,
+ doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex,
+ doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-options.tex,
+ doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex,
+ doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex,
+ doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex,
+ doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex,
+ doc/english/scrhack.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex,
+ doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/common-titles.tex,
+ doc/english/common-compatibility.tex,
+ doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex,
+ doc/english/preface.tex, doc/english/scrwfile.tex,
+ doc/english/scraddr.tex: fix of reference date
+
+r3259 2019-10-10 09:26:54 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex: fixed coding
+ information
+
+r3258 2019-10-10 09:25:44 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex,
+ doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/scrjura.tex,
+ doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: all English manual files
+ in us-ascii
+
+r3257 2019-10-10 09:10:04 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls: do not longer load inputenc but expect LaTeX
+ >= 2018-04-01
+
+r3256 2019-10-10 09:06:49 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrpage.dtx, japanlco.dtx, scrtime.dtx, tocbasic.dtx:
+ \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} removed, because it was wrong and
+ current LaTeX does not need \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+
+r3255 2019-10-09 17:57:37 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide: one again the if
+
+r3254 2019-10-09 17:46:01 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/linkalias.tex: one alias removed two added
+
+r3253 2019-10-09 17:45:42 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide: usage if $(if …) replaced
+
+r3252 2019-10-09 17:14:53 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex: LaTeX
+ labels with UTF-8 characters
+
+r3251 2019-10-09 16:34:25 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex,
+ doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: ophan
+ backslash removed
+
+r3250 2019-10-09 15:19:04 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-version.dtx, scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx,
+ scrkernel-compatibility.dtx, scrkernel-title.dtx,
+ scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx,
+ scrkernel-floats.dtx, scrkernel-language.dtx, scrsource.tex,
+ scrkernel-variables.dtx, scrkernel-footnotes.dtx,
+ scrkernel-index.dtx, scrkernel-circularletters.dtx,
+ scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
+ scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx,
+ scrjura.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx,
+ scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrhack.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx,
+ scraddr.dtx, tocbasic.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/guide.bib,
+ doc/scrguide.cls, doc/scrpage2.tex, doc/plength.dtx, doc/ngerman/,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrjuraexample.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/japanlco.tex,
+ doc/english/scrjura.tex: everything converted von ISO-8859-1 to UTF-8
+
+r3249 2019-10-09 13:35:26 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * tocstyle.dtx: fixed one LaTeX compatibility issue and changed
+ several notes about
+ the package status
+
+r3248 2019-10-09 12:49:59 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide: replaced usage of ifneq by $(if …)
+
+r3247 2019-10-09 12:32:11 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide: fix usage of ifneq
+
+r3246 2019-10-09 12:17:08 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrjura.dtx: fix for LaTeX 2019-10-01 has broken \p@sentence
+
+r3245 2019-10-09 12:13:55 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide: mptopdf does not longer add "-1" to the
+ basename
+
+r3244 2019-10-09 08:34:34 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/scrhack.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlayer.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: several translation
+ improvements by Karl Hagen
+
+r3243 2019-10-07 15:32:53 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlfile.dtx: missing space added and \renewcommand <-> \def
+
+r3242 2019-10-07 10:16:42 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex: missing change log entries added
+
+r3241 2019-10-07 10:07:37 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/tocbasic.tex: removed dates from
+ \ChangedAt
+
+r3240 2019-10-07 10:00:14 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/tocbasic.tex: one additional removed
+
+r3239 2019-10-07 09:59:21 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/tocbasic.tex: missing "you" added
+
+r3238 2019-10-07 09:49:14 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex: typofixes by Elke
+
+r3237 2019-10-07 09:05:14 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: text of some fixme notes
+ changed
+
+r3236 2019-10-07 08:44:20 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex: docu of := and += in \DeclareTOCStyleEntry
+ and \DeclareTOCEntryStyle
+
+r3235 2019-10-06 14:49:59 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/,
+ doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/tocbasic.tex: docu
+ of ToC style toctext extended and improved
+
+r3234 2019-10-06 13:31:09 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex: typofix for onendlastentry
+
+r3233 2019-10-06 13:30:33 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx: typofix for \scr@dte@toctext@parend
+
+r3232 2019-10-06 13:01:16 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlfile.dtx: \InputIfFileExists is robust since LaTeX 2019/10/01
+
+r3231 2019-10-04 13:18:26 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, TODO: several
+ scrletter changes have been deactivated by docstrip switch "willbe"
+
+r3230 2019-10-03 12:38:22 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx: \DeclareTOCStyleEntry provides += for length
+ and number options
+
+r3229 2019-10-03 11:16:42 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-sections.dtx: orphan `l' (added by last update) removed
+
+r3228 2019-10-02 17:12:06 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: improved error messages
+
+r3227 2019-10-02 16:55:32 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, tocbasic.dtx: copied copy options of \DeclareTOCStyleEntry
+ also for \DeclareNewTOC
+
+r3226 2019-10-02 13:19:59 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, TODO: new copy options for the ToC style
+ entries
+
+r3225 2019-10-02 12:10:26 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx: don't use \scr@tso@#1@pagenumberwidth in
+ definitionn of \scr@tso@#1@pagenumberbox
+
+r3224 2019-10-02 11:47:13 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx: prefix for the style
+ storage of a ToC entry style changed
+
+r3223 2019-10-02 09:46:35 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex,
+ doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: docu of
+ \foreachkomavar, \foreachkomavarifempty, \foreachemptykomavar,
+ \foreachnonemptykomavar
+
+r3222 2019-10-02 09:13:59 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex,
+ doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: docu of \Ifplength
+
+r3221 2019-10-02 08:53:18 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrlttr2.tex: docu of options symbolicnames=marvosym,
+ symbolicnames=awesome/fontawesome
+
+r3220 2019-10-02 08:17:56 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex: docu of ToC feature noindent
+
+r3219 2019-10-02 07:30:59 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex: Korrekturen von Elke
+
+r3218 2019-10-01 11:40:11 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex: docu of ToC entry style toctext added
+
+r3217 2019-10-01 09:04:08 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/tocbasic.tex: translation reference
+ date
+
+r3216 2019-10-01 09:02:54 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex: note about "category" synonym of "owner"
+
+r3215 2019-09-26 17:12:12 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex:
+ Korrekturen von Elke
+
+r3214 2019-09-26 10:05:43 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrhack.tex: docu of new standardsections hack
+
+r3213 2019-09-26 09:09:25 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrhack.dtx: typofix in implementation docu
+
+r3212 2019-09-26 09:08:04 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: cleanup
+
+r3211 2019-09-26 09:05:56 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: cleanup
+
+r3210 2019-09-26 09:04:37 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: need for translation fix added
+
+r3209 2019-09-26 09:02:41 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: nonumber docu issue removed
+
+r3208 2019-09-26 09:01:16 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: docu of extended
+ optional argument of the sectioning commands extended by new option
+ "nonumber"
+
+r3207 2019-09-26 08:07:09 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-variables.dtx: typofix in implementation docu
+
+r3206 2019-09-19 18:33:20 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrlayer.tex: docu of \ModifyLayers
+
+r3203 2019-08-26 12:57:42 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * manifest.txt: new file
+
+r3202 2019-08-26 12:44:58 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: \ifnumber{}{…}{…} (with empty first
+ argument) fixed
+
+r3201 2019-08-26 12:27:41 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlfile.dtx: checksum fixed
+
+r3200 2019-08-26 12:26:59 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlfile.dtx: usage of \AfterClass or \AfterPackage inside class or
+ package fixed
+
+r3199 2019-08-26 12:04:56 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * komamarks.dtx: keyword replacement activated
+
+r3198 2019-08-26 11:45:23 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * Makefile, komamarks.dtx, README.in/: new package komamarks
+
+r3197 2019-08-26 11:31:28 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrstrip.inc: may → can
+
+r3196 2019-08-26 11:20:16 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer.dtx: activation of flyspell mode changed
+
+r3195 2019-08-26 11:13:13 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * README.in/: state changed from unstable to experimantal and
+ deprecated
+
+r3194 2019-08-07 11:19:00 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: docu of
+ \IfSectionCommandStyle
+
+r3193 2019-07-29 07:38:43 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: \IfUseNumber docu added
+
+r3192 2019-07-26 10:35:55 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: need for docu item removed
+
+r3191 2019-07-26 10:34:49 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbase.tex: docu of \IfActiveMkBoth
+
+r3190 2019-07-26 09:35:34 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: \IfActiveMkBoth recognizes \marks
+
+r3189 2019-07-26 09:10:41 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbase.tex: docu of @else@ option handling in
+ \FamilyOptions and \FamilyOption
+
+r3188 2019-07-26 08:27:20 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbase.tex: docu of \FamilyInverseBoolKey and
+ \FamilySetInverseBool
+
+r3187 2019-07-25 08:40:31 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer.dtx: workaround for a babel issue with \@empty instead of
+ {}
+
+r3186 2019-07-24 15:05:32 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlfile.dtx: spurious blank removed
+
+r3185 2019-07-24 13:27:01 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx: message improved
+
+r3184 2019-07-24 13:23:07 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx: messages improved
+
+r3183 2019-07-24 13:19:03 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx: information about sectsty issue
+
+r3182 2019-07-24 13:00:55 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-sections.dtx: unified two warning messages
+
+r3181 2019-07-24 12:37:42 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-sections.dtx: fix of \@ssect check
+
+r3180 2019-07-24 12:27:03 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrhack.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx: more changes for and to
+ standardsections.hak
+
+r3179 2019-07-24 11:27:49 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrhack.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx: standardsections.hak respects
+ hyperref
+
+r3178 2019-07-24 10:35:45 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrhack.dtx: standardsections.hak extended
+
+r3177 2019-07-24 09:21:26 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrhack.dtx: typofix [Elke]
+
+r3176 2019-07-24 08:10:57 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrhack.dtx: only cosmetic change of source generation
+
+r3175 2019-07-23 15:48:15 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * Makefile: standardsections.hak added
+
+r3174 2019-07-23 13:22:56 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-sections.dtx: some trace information removed
+
+r3173 2019-07-23 12:29:07 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrhack.dtx, TODO, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx: titlesec hack
+ removed from the classes, but standardsections hack added to scrhack
+
+r3172 2019-07-23 10:08:37 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx: removed titlesec hack
+
+r3171 2019-07-20 12:54:40 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: fix of not @else@ option case in
+ \FamilyOptions
+
+r3170 2019-07-19 12:18:03 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, scrkernel-basics.dtx: @else@ options handling for
+ \FamilyOptions and \FamilyOption; fixed family option handling with
+ empty members in \FamilyOptions and \DefineFamilyKey
+
+r3169 2019-07-10 13:09:32 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-language.dtx: avoid incompatiblities by the last change
+
+r3168 2019-07-10 13:00:03 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-language.dtx: define terms/names in preamble immediately
+
+r3167 2019-07-10 09:53:02 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: new option "afterpar" for tocbasic style "toctext"
+
+r3166 2019-07-10 09:51:50 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx: new option "afterpar" for style "toctext"
+
+r3165 2019-07-10 09:50:56 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex: information about features to \deftocheading
+ added
+
+r3164 2019-07-08 14:15:06 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, scrkernel-sections.dtx: new option "nonumber" for all section
+ command (extended version only)
+
+r3163 2019-07-08 14:13:47 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: new \FamilyInverseBoolKey and
+ \FamilySetInverseBool
+
+r3162 2019-07-08 11:46:14 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, TODO, tocbasic.dtx: new TOC entry style
+ "toctext"
+
+r3161 2019-06-27 08:41:04 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx: two orphan spaces removed
+
+r3160 2019-06-26 10:52:55 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-floats.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx: make usage of \thechapter more expandable
+
+r3159 2019-06-26 09:30:24 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-sections.dtx: try to load bookmark with suitable default
+ driver depending on loaded
+ hyperref driver
+
+r3158 2019-06-09 12:31:58 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-language.dtx: keyword replacement fixed
+
+r3157 2019-06-09 12:05:12 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-language.dtx: fix \dateaustralien → \dateaustralian
+
+r3156 2019-05-27 23:06:15 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-language.dtx: workaround for a biblatex issue added
+
+r3155 2019-05-27 22:56:48 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-listsof.dtx: language list fixed
+
+r3154 2019-05-24 19:15:45 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: several \color@begingroup and
+ \color@endgroup added
+
+r3153 2019-05-24 09:50:33 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, TODO: new TOC entry options
+ "pagenumberwidth" and "rightindent" for style "tocline"
+
+r3152 2019-05-23 07:52:41 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: some docu added
+
+r3151 2019-05-22 09:00:33 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: fix of recipience address in scrlttr2
+
+r3150 2019-05-12 12:04:47 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, TODO: new toc feature noindent
+
+r3149 2019-05-12 11:34:55 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * tocbasic.dtx: "category" is a synonym for "owner"
+
+r3148 2019-05-12 11:26:00 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * tocbasic.dtx: only spaces in documentation
+
+r3147 2019-05-11 13:03:41 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrmain.ins,
+ tocbasic.dtx: code reorganisation
+
+r3146 2019-05-11 13:02:59 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: \if@dynlist issue
+
+r3145 2019-05-04 21:07:35 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: glossary error fixed
+
+r3144 2019-05-03 12:36:20 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: reference line by page style notepaper, new
+ pseudo length refheight,
+ new option refline=false
+
+r3143 2019-04-16 10:52:03 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx: moved code from
+ scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx to scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
+
+r3142 2019-04-16 10:50:54 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: new \scr@ForEachTrimmedListElement
+
+r3141 2019-04-05 09:52:27 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-scrpage.dtx: made several commands long
+
+r3140 2019-04-05 08:56:22 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-scrpage.dtx: replaced usage of \centering, \raggedleft and
+ \raggedright by
+
+ \LaTeXcentering, \LaTeXraggedleft and \LaTeXraggedright and added definition
+ of these commands if not yet defined
+
+r3138 2019-04-04 08:24:53 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx, scrkernel-version.dtx,
+ scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-compatibility.dtx,
+ scrkernel-title.dtx, scrkernel-notepaper.dtx,
+ scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx, scrkernel-floats.dtx,
+ scrkernel-language.dtx, scrkernel-variables.dtx,
+ scrkernel-footnotes.dtx, scrkernel-index.dtx, scrlayer.dtx,
+ scrkernel-circularletters.dtx, scrkernel-bibliography.dtx,
+ scrkernel-typearea.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx,
+ scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrjura.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, tocstyle.dtx,
+ scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrhack.dtx, scrpage.dtx,
+ scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx, scrlayer-scrpage.dtx,
+ scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, tocbasic.dtx,
+ scrkernel-basics.dtx: workaround for doctex ^^A-comment brace check
+ failure
+
+r3137 2019-04-04 08:07:07 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-version.dtx, scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx,
+ scrkernel-compatibility.dtx, scrkernel-title.dtx,
+ scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx,
+ scrkernel-floats.dtx, scrkernel-language.dtx,
+ scrkernel-variables.dtx, scrkernel-footnotes.dtx,
+ scrkernel-index.dtx, scrlayer.dtx, scrkernel-circularletters.dtx,
+ scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
+ scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx,
+ scrjura.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx,
+ tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrhack.dtx, scrpage.dtx,
+ scrwfile.dtx, scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx, scrlayer-scrpage.dtx,
+ scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
+ tocbasic.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx: indent of \changes changed
+
+r3136 2019-04-02 18:22:40 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: Warning message fixed (reported by Elke)
+
+r3135 2019-04-02 10:39:15 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx: defect
+ hook removed
+
+r3134 2019-04-01 08:04:47 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: \ForDoHook does not redefine \reserved@a and
+ cascaded \ExecuteDoHook
+ are ignored
+
+r3133 2019-03-31 11:02:20 +0200 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: \@gen@firsthead moved (but this is only
+ temporary)
+
+r3132 2019-03-29 19:41:06 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbase.tex: fix of \AddtoDoHook description [Elke]
+
+r3131 2019-03-29 19:18:54 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx: checksum fixed
+
+r3130 2019-03-29 09:45:51 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, TODO: scrletter
+ uses layer foldmarks for foldmarks
+
+r3129 2019-03-29 09:27:46 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx: typofix
+
+r3128 2019-03-29 08:42:39 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx: new \Ifplength/\if@plength
+
+r3127 2019-03-28 13:16:30 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrlfile.dtx: fix for \InputIfFileExists change of upcomming LaTeX
+
+r3126 2019-03-27 14:46:09 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx: scrletter uses
+ page style "notepaper" and layer "notepaper" for the first page
+
+r3125 2019-03-25 09:57:11 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-version.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx: scrletter.cls is
+ scrartcl.cls + scrletter.sty instead of scrlttr2.cls
+
+r3124 2019-03-25 09:20:06 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: only spacing in source code changed
+
+r3123 2019-03-22 09:16:05 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: code indention
+
+r3122 2019-03-22 08:25:51 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl: improved html
+ index file generation
+
+r3121 2019-03-22 07:50:24 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrmain.ins: do not generate compatibility information for
+ scrletter.sty
+
+r3120 2019-03-21 09:51:38 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, TODO: new values for option symbolicnames
+
+r3119 2019-03-18 09:37:04 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-title.dtx, TODO: \thanks issue with in-page titles and
+ titlepages fixed
+
+r3118 2019-03-18 07:49:05 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: new issue related to in-page titles
+
+r3117 2019-03-13 15:14:17 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-title.dtx: options abstracton and abstractoff are not
+ standard but deprecated
+
+r3116 2019-03-13 12:11:23 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-variables.dtx, TODO: new commands \foreachkomavar,
+ \foreachkomavarifempty, \foreachemptykomavar,
+ \foreachnonemptykomavar
+
+r3115 2019-03-11 16:01:54 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: \IfArgIsEmpty is long
+
+r3114 2019-03-10 16:14:43 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: fix: spurious space by missing percent
+
+r3113 2019-03-09 18:38:13 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx: same beta handling as for scrlayer-notecolumn
+
+r3112 2019-03-09 18:33:31 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx: made a true part of KOMA-Script
+
+r3111 2019-03-05 12:10:42 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, scrkernel-typearea.dtx, doc/,
+ doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrlttr2.tex: letter environment uses \raggedbottom
+
+r3110 2019-03-05 11:44:36 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: fix of \flushbottom and twocolumn
+
+r3109 2019-03-02 15:22:10 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex,
+ doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex: changed docu about
+ verbatim problem
+
+r3108 2019-03-02 14:35:24 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx: more robust against page breaks within
+ special catcode settings,
+ e.g., verbatim environments
+
+r3107 2019-02-25 10:51:26 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrjura.tex: note about usage of \DeclareTOCStyleEntry
+ added
+
+r3106 2019-02-25 10:06:55 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, scrkernel-sections.dtx: \bprot@dottedtocline is deprecated
+
+r3105 2019-02-25 09:37:34 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrstrip.inc: copyright end date changed to 2019
+
+r3104 2019-02-25 09:35:38 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrjura.dtx: copyright year
+
+r3103 2019-02-25 09:26:15 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrjura.dtx, TODO: scrjura uses tocbasic for the optional ToC
+ entries
+
+r3102 2019-02-21 13:10:29 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: kind of translation of
+ changed or new parts of the German manual
+
+r3101 2019-02-21 11:00:57 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex:
+ typofixes
+
+r3100 2019-02-21 10:53:23 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex:
+ \ChangedAt korrigiert
+
+r3099 2019-02-21 10:46:58 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex:
+ changed description of \scr@startsection, \SecDef, \At@startsection,
+ \Before@sect, \Before@ssect
+
+r3098 2019-02-21 10:45:09 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex:
+ fix names of hooks
+
+r3097 2019-02-21 10:44:13 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls: recursive hook labels
+
+r3096 2019-02-21 10:42:29 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-sections.dtx: docu change: note about redefining kernel
+ macros issue
+
+r3095 2019-02-20 15:56:13 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex: Korrekturen von Elke
+
+r3094 2019-02-20 12:41:53 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/,
+ doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/guide-english.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: do-hooks der Klassen
+
+r3093 2019-02-20 10:35:02 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex,
+ doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrjura.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: splitted
+ maincls-experts.experts in several sections
+
+r3092 2019-02-20 10:26:22 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbase.tex: double declaration
+ removed
+
+r3091 2019-02-16 14:31:54 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-version.dtx, Makefile, scrmain.ins, README.in/,
+ README.in/README.scrreport.cls, README.in/README.scrarticle.cls,
+ README.in/README.scrletter.cls: new wrapper classes for the 8.3
+ classes
+
+r3090 2019-02-16 14:26:52 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * README.in/: missing README added
+
+r3089 2019-02-14 19:08:39 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx: \set@color does not have an argument
+
+r3088 2019-02-14 18:59:29 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx: redefine \set@color instead of \color
+
+r3087 2019-02-14 17:42:30 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex: improvement
+ by Karl
+
+r3086 2019-02-14 14:25:25 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex,
+ doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex: with pdftex and
+ luatex scrlayer-notecolumn does (experimentally) support colors
+ inside note columns
+
+r3085 2019-02-14 13:50:13 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx: colour support for scrlayer-notecolumn
+ added
+
+r3084 2019-02-14 10:08:22 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-typearea.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx:
+ \begin{macro} needs a macro as an argument
+
+r3083 2019-02-14 10:00:31 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO: serveral new scrlayer-notecolumn nice-to-haves
+
+r3082 2019-02-14 09:49:13 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbase.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, doc/english/common-options.tex,
+ doc/english/tocbasic.tex,
+ doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: translation by Karl
+
+r3081 2019-02-14 09:48:41 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: more useful links
+
+r3080 2019-02-14 09:39:28 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Link ins
+ Expertenkapitel von scrlayer-scrpage, weil nur dort neue Seitenstile
+ behandelt werden
+
+r3079 2019-02-13 10:33:28 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex: known issues of scrlayer-scrpage
+
+r3078 2019-02-10 13:25:25 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * Makefile: added DIN5008A.lco and DIN5008B.lco to installation files
+
+r3077 2019-02-10 13:24:05 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx: workaround patch for amsthm added to avoid
+ missing vertical spaces
+ before theorem environments
+
+r3076 2019-02-07 19:00:00 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex: Korrekturen von Elke
+
+r3075 2019-02-07 08:29:34 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-sections.dtx: \DeclareSectionCommand does not allow level
+ <= -\maxdimen
+
+r3074 2019-02-05 11:12:39 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex: BETA-Doku der do-hooks
+
+r3073 2019-02-05 09:58:21 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: \ForDoHook interface changed, \ExecuteDoHook
+ uses changed \ForDoHook interface
+
+r3072 2019-02-04 12:22:50 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: fix of \SplitDoHook
+
+r3071 2019-02-04 11:32:01 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, scrkernel-sections.dtx: mapped deprecated old hooks to new
+ do-hooks
+
+r3070 2019-02-04 09:05:44 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: do-hook mechanism extended by \SplitDoHook and
+ \ForDoHook
+
+r3069 2019-02-02 21:57:08 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-basics.dtx: docu: replaced one \section by \subsection
+
+r3068 2019-02-02 20:41:35 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * TODO, scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx: new do-hook
+ mechanism, currently used for "heading/begingroup/…" and
+ "heading/endgroup/…" hooks
+
+r3067 2019-02-02 20:40:31 +0100 kohm:
+
+ * scrkernel-version.dtx, scrkernel-compatibility.dtx: prepared for
+ 3.27 BETA
+
r3066 2019-02-01 08:58:57 +0100 kohm:
* releaselist.txt: release 2019/02/01 v3.26b
@@ -7890,8 +8960,8 @@ r1563 2013-12-19 10:29:59 +0100 mjk:
r1562 2013-12-19 08:51:16 +0100 mjk:
- * Makefile, scrstrip.inc, scrjura.dtx, tocstyle.dtx, scrwfile.dtx,
- scrcounter.dtx: prepared for 3.12
+ * Makefile, scrstrip.inc, scrjura.dtx, tocstyle.dtx, scrwfile.dtx:
+ prepared for 3.12
r1560 2013-12-19 08:13:30 +0100 mjk:
@@ -8883,11 +9953,10 @@ r1378 2013-09-30 17:42:35 +0200 mjk:
scrkernel-typearea.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx,
scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx, scrjura.dtx,
scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx,
- scrkxflo.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, missing.dtx, scrhack.dtx,
- scrcounter.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
- scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx,
- scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx: svn keyword
- substitution activated
+ scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, missing.dtx, scrhack.dtx,
+ scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx,
+ scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
+ scrkernel-basics.dtx: svn keyword substitution activated
r1377 2013-09-25 09:17:02 +0200 mjk:
@@ -9677,11 +10746,6 @@ r1217 2012-05-15 09:25:59 +0200 mjk:
doc/english/common-typearea.tex: Several improvements by Krickette
Murabayashi
-r1216 2012-05-11 10:08:07 +0200 mjk:
-
- * scrcounter.dtx: first design and implementation of new package
- scrcounter
-
r1215 2012-04-24 14:38:51 +0200 mjk:
* scrkernel-sections.dtx: \addpart fixed [reported by Ulrike Fischer]
@@ -10196,25 +11260,24 @@ r1121 2012-01-10 09:37:54 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
scrjura.dtx, manifest.txt, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
- scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx,
- Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
- scrhack.dtx, scrpage.dtx, scrwfile.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
- japanlco.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx,
- scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
- tocbasic.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist,
- doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex,
- doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
- doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/,
- doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex,
- doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex,
- doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex,
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules,
+ tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrhack.dtx, scrpage.dtx,
+ scrwfile.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
+ scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, tocbasic.dtx,
+ scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/guide.bib,
+ doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.gst,
+ doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
+ doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex,
doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex,
doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/,
doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex,
@@ -10671,25 +11734,24 @@ r1033 2011-01-20 11:37:25 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-index.dtx, scrkernel-circularletters.dtx, scrstrop.inc,
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
- scrjura.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx,
- Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
- scrhack.dtx, scrpage.dtx, scrwfile.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
- japanlco.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
- scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, tocbasic.dtx,
- scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile,
- doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
- doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/,
- doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex,
- doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex,
- doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex,
- doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
+ scrjura.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules,
+ tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrhack.dtx, scrpage.dtx,
+ scrwfile.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx,
+ scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, tocbasic.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/,
+ doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex,
+ doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
+ doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/Makefile,
+ doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx,
+ doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex,
doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex,
doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex,
@@ -11217,17 +12279,16 @@ r926 2010-02-09 10:38:52 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx, scrjura.dtx,
scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins,
- scrkxflo.dtx, Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx,
- scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrpage.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
- japanlco.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx,
- scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
- tocbasic.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/koma-script.html,
- doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex,
- doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
- doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex,
- doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
- doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex,
+ Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
+ scrpage.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
+ scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, tocbasic.dtx, doc/,
+ doc/scrguide.ist, doc/koma-script.html, doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile,
+ doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
+ doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/Makefile,
+ doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex,
doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex,
doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex,
doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex,
@@ -11643,23 +12704,22 @@ r843 2009-03-19 11:01:11 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
scrjura.dtx, manifest.txt, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
- scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx,
- Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
- scrhack.dtx, lppl-de.txt, scrpage.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
- japanlco.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx,
- scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
- tocbasic.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist,
- doc/koma-script.html, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex,
- doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
- doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/,
- doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex,
- doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex,
- doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/htmlsetup,
- doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules,
+ tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrhack.dtx, lppl-de.txt,
+ scrpage.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
+ scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, tocbasic.dtx,
+ scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/koma-script.html,
+ doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.gst,
+ doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
+ doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/Makefile,
+ doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex,
doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex,
doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex,
@@ -11893,29 +12953,29 @@ r796 2009-01-02 09:41:42 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrdoc.dtx, scrjura.dtx, manifest.txt,
scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins,
- scrkxflo.dtx, Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx,
- scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrpage.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
- scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx,
- scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, tocbasic.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/,
- doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex,
- doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
- doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/,
- doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex,
- doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex,
- doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex,
- doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex,
- doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx,
- doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex,
- doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex,
- doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex,
- doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex,
- doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex,
- doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/guide-english.tex,
- doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex,
- doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup,
- doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex,
- doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex,
- obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: prepared for 2009
+ Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
+ scrpage.dtx, japanlco.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx,
+ scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrextend.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
+ tocbasic.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist,
+ doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.gst,
+ doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
+ doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/Makefile,
+ doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/htmlsetup,
+ doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex,
+ doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/,
+ doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile,
+ doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/japanlco.tex,
+ doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex,
+ doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex,
+ doc/english/scraddr.tex, obsolete/scrlettr.ins,
+ obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: prepared for 2009
r795 2009-01-02 08:59:35 +0100 mjk:
@@ -12840,15 +13900,14 @@ r600 2008-01-11 11:21:50 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
manifest.txt, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
- scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx,
- Makefile.baserules, tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
- README, scrpage.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx,
- scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
- scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/,
- doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst,
- doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
- doc/Makefile.latexinit, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx:
- prepared for 2008/01/11 2.98a
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules,
+ tocstyle.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, README, scrpage.dtx,
+ scrkernel-sections.dtx, japanlco.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx,
+ scrtime.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
+ scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile,
+ doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
+ doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, obsolete/scrlettr.ins,
+ obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: prepared for 2008/01/11 2.98a
r598 2008-01-11 09:14:15 +0100 mjk:
@@ -14008,20 +15067,20 @@ r341 2007-01-09 19:07:25 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
manifest.txt, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
- scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx,
- Makefile.baserules, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrpage.dtx,
- scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx,
- scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx,
- doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex,
- doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
- doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/english/,
- doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile,
- doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex,
- doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex,
- doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex,
- doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex,
- doc/english/scraddr.tex, obsolete/scrlettr.ins,
- obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: copyright end date changed to 2007
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules,
+ scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrpage.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrtime.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
+ scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/,
+ doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst,
+ doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
+ doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup,
+ doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex,
+ doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex,
+ obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: copyright end date
+ changed to 2007
r340 2007-01-09 11:41:16 +0100 mjk:
@@ -14763,20 +15822,19 @@ r159 2006-03-29 10:26:53 +0200 mjk:
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
manifest.txt, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
- scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx,
- Makefile.baserules, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrpage.dtx,
- scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx,
- scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx,
- doc/, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst,
- doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/english/,
- doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile,
- doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex,
- doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex,
- doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex,
- doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex,
- doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl,
- doc/bin/genindex.pl, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: fix
- of initial comment
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules,
+ scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrpage.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx,
+ scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/Makefile,
+ doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx,
+ doc/Makefile.guide, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex,
+ doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex,
+ doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex,
+ doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup,
+ doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex,
+ doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/,
+ doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl, doc/bin/genindex.pl, obsolete/scrlettr.ins,
+ obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: fix of initial comment
r158 2006-03-29 10:12:51 +0200 mjk:
@@ -14801,10 +15859,10 @@ r153 2006-03-28 09:30:06 +0200 mjk:
scrkernel-circularletters.dtx, scrkernel-bibliography.dtx,
scrkernel-typearea.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx,
scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
- scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrkxflo.dtx,
- scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
- scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx,
- scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx: character table test activated
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
+ scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx,
+ scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx:
+ character table test activated
r152 2006-03-28 09:13:39 +0200 mjk:
@@ -14837,10 +15895,10 @@ r147 2006-03-25 10:32:59 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-circularletters.dtx, scrkernel-bibliography.dtx,
scrkernel-typearea.dtx, scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx,
scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrkernel-listsof.dtx,
- scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrkxflo.dtx,
- scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
- scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrlfile.dtx,
- scrkernel-basics.dtx: Version number set to 2.95
+ scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx, scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx,
+ scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx,
+ scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx: Version
+ number set to 2.95
r146 2006-03-25 08:49:38 +0100 mjk:
@@ -14965,7 +16023,7 @@ r115 2006-03-22 09:27:23 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-footnotes.dtx, scrkernel-index.dtx,
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx,
- scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkxflo.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
+ scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
scrkernel-basics.dtx: german --> ngerman
@@ -15115,7 +16173,7 @@ r72 2006-03-08 10:59:49 +0100 mjk:
scrkernel-footnotes.dtx, scrkernel-index.dtx, scrstrop.inc,
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
- scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx, Makefile.baserules,
+ scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules,
scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx,
scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/,
doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls,
@@ -15396,16 +16454,16 @@ r1 2005-07-25 12:19:51 +0200 mjk:
scrkernel-footnotes.dtx, scrkernel-index.dtx, scrstrop.inc,
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx, scrstrip.inc, scrkernel-typearea.dtx,
scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx, scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx, scrdoc.dtx,
- scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrmain.ins, scrkxflo.dtx, Makefile.baserules,
- missing.dtx, README, ChangeLog.cvs, scrkernel-sections.dtx,
- ChangeLog.2, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx,
- .ignore, Makefile.cfg, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/,
- doc/scrguide.ist, doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex,
- doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide,
- doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genindex.pl: Initial
- subversion import of KOMA-Script 3; see ChangeLog for version
- information prior to 2005-07-25 12:14 and ChangeLog.2 for version
- information of KOMA-Script < 2.91
+ scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrmain.ins, Makefile.baserules, missing.dtx,
+ README, ChangeLog.cvs, scrkernel-sections.dtx, ChangeLog.2,
+ scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, .ignore,
+ scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist,
+ doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.cls,
+ doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit,
+ doc/bin/, doc/bin/genindex.pl: Initial subversion import of
+ KOMA-Script 3; see ChangeLog for version information prior to
+ 2005-07-25 12:14 and ChangeLog.2 for version information of
+ KOMA-Script < 2.91
------- Switch from CVS to subversion ----------------------------------------
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile
index 294f336b40..37475eab30 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/Makefile
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
# ======================================================================
# Makefile
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
#
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
# This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Makefile
-# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
#
# Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
# Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -86,6 +86,9 @@ CLS_MAIN = scrbook.cls \
scrreprt.cls \
scrartcl.cls \
scrlttr2.cls \
+ scrreport.cls \
+ scrarticle.cls \
+ scrletter.cls \
scrletter.sty \
typearea.sty \
scrsize10pt.clo \
@@ -111,10 +114,13 @@ CLS_MAIN = scrbook.cls \
nomencl.hak \
setspace.hak \
lscape.hak \
+ standardsections.hak \
scrfontsizes.sty \
visualize.lco \
DIN.lco \
DINmtext.lco \
+ DIN5008A.lco \
+ DIN5008B.lco \
SN.lco \
SNleft.lco \
KOMAold.lco \
@@ -130,7 +136,8 @@ CLS_MAIN = scrbook.cls \
scrlayer.sty \
scrlayer-scrpage.sty \
scrlayer-notecolumn.sty \
- scrlayer-fancyhdr.sty
+ scrlayer-fancyhdr.sty \
+ komamarks.sty
CLS_MAIN_DTX = scrkernel-basics.dtx \
scrkernel-bibliography.dtx \
@@ -170,7 +177,8 @@ CLS_MAIN_DTX = scrkernel-basics.dtx \
scrlayer.dtx \
scrlayer-scrpage.dtx \
scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx \
- scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
+ scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx \
+ komamarks.dtx
STATIC_DOC = README \
INSTALL.txt \
@@ -186,9 +194,9 @@ CLS_MAIN_INS = scrmain.ins
CLS_MAIN_SUBINS = scrstrip.inc scrstrop.inc scrdocstrip.tex
-ALPHA_INS = tocstyle.dtx scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
+ALPHA_INS = tocstyle.dtx scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx komamarks.dtx
-ALPHA_DOC = tocstyle.pdf scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf
+ALPHA_DOC = tocstyle.pdf scrlayer-fancyhdr.pdf komamarks.pdf
ALPHA_DTX = $(subst .pdf,.dtx,$(ALPHA_DOC))
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx
index 2d46fe6328..1703f901da 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/japanlco.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% japanlco.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% japanlco.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: japanlco.dtx 2976 2018-04-17 05:31:42Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: japanlco.dtx 3256 2019-10-10 07:06:49Z kohm $
%<Ni&EARLY&LOW&head>%%% (run: Ni,EARLY,LOW,head)
%<Ni&EARLY&LOW&body>%%% (run: Ni,EARLY,LOW,body)
%<Ni&EARLY&HIGH&head>%%% (run: Ni,EARLY,HIGH,head)
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-04-17 07:31:42 +0200 (Tue, 17 Apr 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 09:06:49 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1962 $
\endgroup
@@ -82,7 +82,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage{graphicx}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
@@ -152,30 +151,30 @@
%\iftrue
% \newcommand\japanenvelope[7]{%
% \begingroup
-% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}^^A
+% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}%^^A
% \rotatebox{90}{\begin{picture}(#1,#2)
% \thinlines
% \put(0,0){^^A
-% \framebox(#1,#2){}^^A
-% }^^A
-% \put(5,5){\texttt{#7}: #1\,mm$\times$#2\,mm (B$\times$H)}^^A
+% \framebox(#1,#2){}%^^A
+% }%^^A
+% \put(5,5){\texttt{#7}: #1\,mm$\times$#2\,mm (B$\times$H)}%^^A
% \csname @tempcnta\endcsname #2
% \advance\csname @tempcnta\endcsname -#4
-% \put(0,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){\vector(1,0){#3}}^^A
-% \put(#3,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){\vector(-1,0){#3}}^^A
+% \put(0,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){\vector(1,0){#3}}%^^A
+% \put(#3,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){\vector(-1,0){#3}}%^^A
% \put(0,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){^^A
-% \makebox(#3,\baselineskip\csname @gobble\endcsname){#3\,mm}}^^A
-% \put(#3,#2){\vector(0,-1){#4}}^^A
-% \put(#3,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){\vector(0,1){#4}}^^A
+% \makebox(#3,\baselineskip\csname @gobble\endcsname){#3\,mm}}%^^A
+% \put(#3,#2){\vector(0,-1){#4}}%^^A
+% \put(#3,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){\vector(0,1){#4}}%^^A
% \put(#3,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){^^A
% \makebox(0,#4)[l]{~#4\,mm}}
% \advance\csname @tempcnta\endcsname -#6
% \put(#3,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){^^A
-% \framebox(#5,#6){}^^A
-% }^^A
+% \framebox(#5,#6){}%^^A
+% }%^^A
% \put(#3,\csname @tempcnta\endcsname){^^A
-% \makebox(0,5)[l]{~#5\,mm$\times$#6\,mm (B$\times$H)}^^A
-% }^^A
+% \makebox(0,5)[l]{~#5\,mm$\times$#6\,mm (B$\times$H)}%^^A
+% }%^^A
% \end{picture}}
% \endgroup
% }
@@ -254,7 +253,7 @@
%
% Check the class.
% \changes{v3.25a}{2018/04/17}{check not only for \textsf{scrlttr2} but also
-% for \textsf{scrletter}}^^A
+% for \textsf{scrletter}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{scr@fromname@var}{%
\LCOWarningNoLine{%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/komamarks.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/komamarks.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..864746210e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/komamarks.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,588 @@
+% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
+% ======================================================================
+% komamarks.dtx
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2019
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2005/12/01 and of this work.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%
+% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm.
+%
+% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
+% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
+% komamarks.dtx
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2019
+%
+% Diese Datei ist Teil der LaTeX2e KOMA-Script-Sammlung.
+%
+% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
+% Version 1.3c.
+% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX
+% Version 2005/12/01 und dieses Werks.
+%
+% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained"
+% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet).
+%
+% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm.
+%
+% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien.
+% ======================================================================
+% \fi^^A meta-comment
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
+%%% From File: $Id: komamarks.dtx 3199 2019-08-26 10:04:56Z kohm $
+%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
+%<init>%%% (run: init)
+%<options>%%% (run: options)
+%<processoptions>%%% (run: processoptions)
+%<body>%%% (run: body)
+%<final>%%% (run: final)
+%<*dtx>
+\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
+\begingroup
+ \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-08-26 12:04:56 +0200 (Mon, 26 Aug 2019) $
+ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{#2}}
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3199 $
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\endgroup
+ \noexpand\ProvidesFile{komamarks.dtx}%
+ [\filedate\space\filerevision\space
+ KOMA-Script package source
+ }%
+\reserved@a
+%</dtx>
+%<*identify|doc>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{komamarks}[%
+%<doc>\ProvidesFile{komamarks.tex}[%
+% In a future time following will be replaced by !KOMASCRIPTVERSION:
+%!KOMAMARKSVERSION
+%<package> package
+%</identify|doc>
+%<*dtx|identify|doc>
+ (providing extra marks)]
+%</dtx|identify|doc>
+%<*dtx>
+\ifx\documentclass\undefined
+ \input scrdocstrip.tex
+ \@@input scrkernel-version.dtx
+ \@@input scrstrip.inc
+ \KOMAdefVariable{COPYRIGHTFROM}{2012}
+ \KOMAdefVariable{KOMAMARKSVERSION}{%
+ \space\space\filedate\space v0.\filerevision\space KOMA-Script
+ }
+ \generate{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+ \file{komamarks.sty}{%
+ \from{komamarks.dtx}{package,trace,identify}%
+ \from{komamarks.dtx}{package,trace,init}%
+ \from{komamarks.dtx}{package,trace,options}%
+ \from{komamarks.dtx}{package,trace,processoptions}%
+ \from{komamarks.dtx}{package,trace,body}%
+ \from{komamarks.dtx}{package,trace,final}%
+ \from{scrlogo.dtx}{logo}%
+ }%
+ }
+
+ \@@input scrstrop.inc
+\else
+ \let\endbatchfile\relax
+\fi
+\endbatchfile
+ \documentclass{scrdoc}
+ \addtolength{\textwidth}{-1em}
+ \addtolength{\marginparwidth}{2em}
+ \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{2em}
+ \usepackage[ngerman,english]{babel}
+ \usepackage{url,babelbib}\bibliographystyle{babalpha-fl}
+ \usepackage{listings}
+ \usepackage{scrhack}
+ \usepackage{xpatch}
+ \xpretocmd\DescribeMacro{\ifhmode\else\bigskip\noindent\fi}{}{}
+ \xpretocmd\DescribeEnv{\ifhmode\else\bigskip\noindent\fi}{}{}
+ \xpretocmd\DescribeOption{\ifhmode\else\bigskip\noindent\fi}{}{}
+
+ \CodelineIndex
+ \RecordChanges
+ \GetFileInfo{komamarks.dtx}
+ \title{The \KOMAScript{} package \texttt{komamarks}%
+ \footnote{This is revision \fileversion\ of file \texttt{\filename}.}}
+ \date{\filedate}
+ \author{Markus Kohm}
+
+ \newenvironment{Explain}{\par}{\par}
+ \newcommand*{\length}{}
+ \let\length\Length
+ \let\endlength\endLength
+ \let\Macro\cs
+ \let\Length\Macro
+ \let\Package\textsf
+ \let\Class\Package
+ \let\File\texttt
+ \let\Option\texttt
+ \newcommand*{\KOption}[1]{\Option{#1}\texttt{=}}
+ \newcommand*{\OptionValue}[2]{\Option{#1}\texttt{=}\PValue{#2}}
+ \let\Counter\texttt
+ \let\Environment\texttt
+ \let\ShowOutput\quote
+ \let\endShowOutput\endquote
+ \let\Pagestyle\texttt
+ \newcommand*{\Parameter}[1]{\texttt{\marg{#1}}\linebreak[1]}
+ \newcommand*{\OParameter}[1]{\texttt{\oarg{#1}}\linebreak[1]}
+ \newcommand*{\MParameter}[2]{\texttt{(\meta{#1},\meta{#2})}\linebreak[1]}
+ \providecommand\PParameter[1]{\mbox{\texttt{\{#1\}}}\linebreak[1]}
+ \let\PName\meta
+ \let\PValue\texttt
+ \providecommand*{\autoref}[1]{\expandafter\AUTOREF#1:}
+ \providecommand*{\AUTOREF}{}
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\AUTOREF#1:#2:{%
+ \edef\@tempa{#1}%
+ \edef\@tempb{tab}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb table~\fi
+ \edef\@tempb{sec}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb section~\fi
+ \ref{#1:#2}%
+ }
+ \providecommand*{\IndexCmd}[2][]{}
+ \providecommand*{\textnote}[2][]{}
+ \providecommand*\eTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX}
+ \providecommand*\NTS{%
+ \leavevmode\hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}%
+ \kern-0.2emS$}}
+
+ \lstnewenvironment{lstcode}{\lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}}{}
+ \makeatother
+ \sloppy% YOU SHOULD NOT DO THIS!!!
+
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+ \bibliography{guide}
+ \PrintChanges
+ \PrintIndex
+ \end{document}
+%</dtx>
+% \fi^^A meta-comment
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+%
+% \changes{v0.0}{2019/08/08}{Start of new package}%^^A
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+% \section{User Manual}
+% This is an experimental beta version without user manual.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \section{Implementation of \Package{komamarks}}
+%
+% This section is for developers only.
+%
+%\iffalse%^^A meta-comment
+%<*package>
+%\fi%^^A meta-comment
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Options}
+% \label{sec:kommarks.options}
+%
+% This package currently does not provide any options. Nevertheless
+% processing the options is recommended:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*processoptions>
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+%</processoptions>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Handling for new marks similar to \LaTeX}
+% \label{sec:komamarks.newmarks}
+%
+% \LaTeX{} provides \cs{markright}, \cs{markboth}, \cs{leftmark} and
+% \cs{rightmark} using \TeX's \cs{mark}, \cs{firstmark} and
+% \cs{botmark}. Let's do the same for \eTeX's \cs{marks}, \cs{firstmarks},
+% \cs{botmarks} and add some new features like \Package{scrlayer} does.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marksboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\marksright}
+% \begin{macro}{\@marksright}
+% These are similar to \cs{markboth} and \cs{markright} but uses \cs{marks}
+% instead of \cs{mark} and therefore has one new mandator argument: the marks
+% register. We can not use \LaTeX's \cs{@markright}, but a local version of
+% it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\marksboth}[3]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \ExecuteDoHook{marks/relax}%
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{{#2}{#3}}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\@themark
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \marks#1{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+}
+\def\unrestored@protected@edef{%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \edef
+}
+\newcommand*{\marksright}[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \ExecuteDoHook{marks/relax}%
+ \@ifundefined{@themarks\the#1}{%
+ \def\@themark{{}{}}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\@themark\csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname
+ }%
+ \expandafter\@marksright\@themark {#2}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\@themark
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \marks#1{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+}
+\newcommand*{\@marksright}[3]{%
+ \@temptokena {#1}%
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{{\the\@temptokena}{#3}}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Note, we can use \cs{ExecuteDoHook} to make it easy to extend relaxing some
+% commands only, if we habe \Package{scrbase} loaded. So do it while
+% initialization:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*init>
+\RequirePackage{scrbase}
+%</init>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftfirstmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\lefttopmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftbotmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftfirstmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\lefttopmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftbotmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarks}
+% These are similar to \cs{leftmark} resp. \cs{rightmark} but using
+% \cs{firstmarks}, \cs{topmarks} or \cs{botmarks} and therefore need one
+% argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\leftfirstmarks}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\@leftmark\firstmarks#1\@empty\@empty
+}
+\newcommand*{\lefttopmarks}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\@leftmark\topmarks#1\@empty\@empty
+}
+\newcommand*{\leftbotmarks}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\@leftmark\botmarks#1\@empty\@empty
+}
+\newcommand*{\leftmarks}{\leftbotmarks}
+\newcommand*{\rightfirstmarks}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\@rightmark\firstmarks#1\@empty\@empty
+}
+\newcommand*{\righttopmarks}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\@rightmark\topmarks#1\@empty\@empty
+}
+\newcommand*{\rightbotmarks}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\@rightmark\botmarks#1\@empty\@empty
+}
+\newcommand*{\rightmarks}{\rightfirstmarks}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Handling Marks inside \Package{multicol}'s \texttt{multicols}
+% Environment}
+% \label{sec:komamarks.multicols}
+%
+% Package \Package{multicol} needs special treatment for marks and we have to
+% patch it to do the same for the \eTeX{} marks.
+%
+% Not yet implemented.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*init>
+\RequirePackage{scrlfile}
+%</init>
+%<*body>
+\AfterPackage*{multicol}{%
+ \PackageWarning{komamarks}{%
+ komamarks does not yet support multicols
+ }%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Multimarks}
+% \label{sec:komamarks.multimarks}
+%
+% Usually \LaTeX's marks consist of a left and a right mark. But what about
+% having marks als sequence of items? In this case we need to setup the
+% n-th mark item in such a sequence and to get the n-th mark item in such a
+% sequence. Here it would be nice to have \Package{expl3}, i.\,e.,
+% \File{l3seq} instead of only \LaTeXe's \cs{@tfor}.
+%
+% Not yet implemented completely and therefore currently not usable.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marksall}
+% Like \cs{marksboth} but instead of two mark argument (for the left and the
+% right mark) it has only one mark argument, which is a token list with a
+% token for each mark.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\marksall}[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \ExecuteDoHook{marks/relax}%
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{#2}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\@themark
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \marks#1{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marksnth}
+% Like \cs{marksright} but instead of changing the right (second) mark it
+% changes the n-th mark.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\marksnth}[3]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \ExecuteDoHook{marks/relax}%
+ \@tempcnta=\z@
+ \let\@themark\@empty
+ \@ifundefined{@themarks\the#1}{}{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@tfor
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter:%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter=%
+ \csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\do {%
+ \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+ \ifnum \number #2=\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{#3}}%
+ \else
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{\reserved@a}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@whilenum \number #2>\@tempcnta\do {%
+ \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+ \ifnum \number #2=\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{#3}}%
+ \else
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\@themark
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \marks#1{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marksnthplus}
+% Like \cs{marksnth} but with one more argument, that is used till the end of
+% the mark sequence.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\marksnthplus}[4]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \ExecuteDoHook{marks/relax}%
+ \@tempcnta=\z@
+ \let\@themark\@empty
+ \@ifundefined{@themarks\the#1}{}{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@tfor
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter:%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter=%
+ \csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\do {%
+ \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+ \ifnum \number #2=\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{#3}}%
+ \else
+ \ifnum \number #2>\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{\reserved@a}}%
+ \else
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{#4}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@whilenum \number #2>\@tempcnta\do {%
+ \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+ \ifnum \number #2=\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{#3}}%
+ \else
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\@themark
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \marks#1{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marksnthcleartail}
+% Like \cs{marksnth} but removes all items above the n-th.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\marksnthcleartail}[3]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \ExecuteDoHook{marks/relax}%
+ \@tempcnta=\z@
+ \let\@themark\@empty
+ \@ifundefined{@themarks\the#1}{}{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@tfor
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter:%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter=%
+ \csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\do {%
+ \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+ \ifnum \number #2=\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{#3}}%
+ \else
+ \ifnum \number #2>\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{\reserved@a}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@whilenum \number #2>\@tempcnta\do {%
+ \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+ \ifnum \number #2=\@tempcnta
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{#3}}%
+ \else
+ \unrestored@protected@edef\@themark{\@themark{}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname @themarks\the#1\endcsname\@themark
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \marks#1{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nthmarknotdefined}
+% This macro usually expands to nothing, if the n-th mark is not yet
+% defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\nthmarknotdefined}{}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nthtopmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\nthfirstmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\nthbotmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nthofm}
+% Like \cs{leftfirstmarks} or \cs{rightfirstmarks} etc. but not using
+% \cs{@leftmark} or \cs{@rightmark} that is \cs{@firstoftwo} or
+% \cs{@secondoftwo} but \cs{@nthofm}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\nthtopmarks}[2]{%
+ \expandafter\@nthofm\expandafter{\topmarks#1}{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\nthfirstmarks}[2]{%
+ \expandafter\@nthofm\expandafter{\firstmarks#1}{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\nthbotmarks}[2]{%
+ \expandafter\@nthofm\expandafter{\botmarks#1}{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand{\@nthofm}[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempcnta=\z@
+ \let\reserved@a\nthmarknotdefined
+ \@tfor\reserved@b:=#1\do{%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \ifnum \number #2=\@tempcnta
+ \let\reserved@a\reserved@b
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\reserved@a\expandafter{\expandafter\endgroup
+ \reserved@a}%
+ \reserved@a
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%\iffalse%^^A meta-comment
+%</package>
+%\fi%^^A meta-comment
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
+%
+% end of file `komamarks.dtx'
+
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: doctex
+%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB"
+%%% flyspell-mode: t
+%%% TeX-master: t
+%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx
index b1deb16d47..e1c03e46d8 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scraddr.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scraddr.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2013
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scraddr.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2013
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scraddr.dtx 1380 2013-10-01 15:31:55Z mjk $
+%%% From File: $Id: scraddr.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<*dtx>
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\ProvidesFile{scraddr.dtx}
@@ -91,12 +91,11 @@
%<*driver>
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scraddr.dtx}
\title{Das scraddr\thanks{Diese Datei hat die Versionsnummer
- \fileversion, letzte Änderung vom \filedate.}-Paket zur
+ \fileversion, letzte Änderung vom \filedate.}-Paket zur
Auswertung von Adressdateien}
\author{Markus Kohm \and Jens-Uwe Morawski}
\date{\filedate}
@@ -110,12 +109,12 @@
% \fi
%
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Erste Version, die von \texttt{scrlettr}
-% losgelöst ist.}
+% losgelöst ist.}
%
% \section{Anleitung}
%
% \subsection{Rechtliches}
-% Es wird keinerlei Haftung übernommen für irgendwelche Schäden,
+% Es wird keinerlei Haftung übernommen für irgendwelche Schäden,
% die aus der Benutzung der Programme und Dateien des hier
% beschriebenen Paketes folgen.
%
@@ -124,9 +123,9 @@
% Das gesamte \textsf{KOMA-Script} Paket besteht aus mehreren Teilen.
% Der Teil |scrclass.dtx| beinhaltet die Haupt-classes |scrartcl.cls|,
% |scrreprt.cls| und |scrbook.cls| und |scrlttr2.cls| sowie das von
-% diesen benötigte package |typearea.sty|.
+% diesen benötigte package |typearea.sty|.
%
-% Das ursprünglich in |scrlettr.dtx| enthaltene
+% Das ursprünglich in |scrlettr.dtx| enthaltene
% \texttt{scraddr}-Paket liegt nun hier als |scraddr.dtx| separat
% vor. Dies wurde erforderlich, das ansonsten in |scrlettr.dtx| nur
% noch obsolete Teile enthalten sind.
@@ -158,32 +157,32 @@
%<*scraddr>
% \end{macrocode}
% Dieses Paket liest beliebige - auch mehrere - Adressdateien im oben
-% beschriebenen Format ein und legt für jeden Eintrag eine Reihe von
-% Markos an. Bedingung dafür ist, dass das achte Element jedes
-% |\adrentry|-Eintrags - der Kürzeleintrag - nichtleer ist.
-% Dies gilt in gleicher Weise auch für das neunte Element neuerer
-% |\addrentry|-Einträge.
+% beschriebenen Format ein und legt für jeden Eintrag eine Reihe von
+% Markos an. Bedingung dafür ist, dass das achte Element jedes
+% |\adrentry|-Eintrags - der Kürzeleintrag - nichtleer ist.
+% Dies gilt in gleicher Weise auch für das neunte Element neuerer
+% |\addrentry|-Einträge.
% Im Falle von
-% identischen Kürzeleinträgen überschreiben spätere Einträge
-% frühere. Die Inhalte können dann über spezielle Befehle ermittelt
+% identischen Kürzeleinträgen überschreiben spätere Einträge
+% frühere. Die Inhalte können dann über spezielle Befehle ermittelt
% werden.
%
% \subsection{Optionen}
%
% \begin{option}{adrFreeIVempty}
-% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
% \begin{option}{adrFreeIVshow}
-% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
% \begin{option}{adrFreeIVwarn}
-% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
% \begin{option}{adrFreeIVstop}
-% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue Option}
% \begin{macro}{\@adrFIVerror}
-% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue (intern)}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/05/19}{Neue (intern)}
% Die neuen Optionen dienen der Wahl, ob die Verwendung von
-% \verb|\FreeIV| für einen Eintrag, der mit \verb|\adrentry|
+% \verb|\FreeIV| für einen Eintrag, der mit \verb|\adrentry|
% definiert wurde, ignoriert wird, durch eine Ausgabe im Text
-% angezeigt wird, zu einer Warnung oder einem Fehler führt. Im Makro
+% angezeigt wird, zu einer Warnung oder einem Fehler führt. Im Makro
% wird die Einstellung gespeichert. Voreingestellt ist
% \texttt{adrFreeIVshow}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -211,12 +210,12 @@
% \begin{macro}{\InputAdressFile}
% Mit Hilfe des Befehls |\InputAddressFile| wird die angegebene
% Adressdatei eingelesen und in Adressmakros gewandelt, die dann beliebig
-% verwendet werden können. Die Adressmakros werden global generiert.
+% verwendet werden können. Die Adressmakros werden global generiert.
% Andere Makros insbesondere die Definitionen von |\adrentry| und
% |\addrentry| bleiben erhalten.
-% \changes{v1.1}{2002/05/18}{Erweitert auf \cs{addrentry}
-% Einträge}
-% \changes{v1.1b}{2002/06/02}{Falls erforderlich werden auch
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/05/18}{Erweitert auf \cs{addrentry}
+% Einträge}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2002/06/02}{Falls erforderlich werden auch
% \cs{addrchar} und \cs{adrchar} definiert}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\InputAddressFile}[1]{\begingroup
@@ -271,11 +270,11 @@
%
% \subsection{Zugriff auf die Elemente der eingelesenen Adressdatei}
%
-% Da keine Vorschriften existieren, wie genau das Kürzel aufgebaut sein
-% muss, können innerhalb des Kürzels theoretisch auch solche Zeichen
-% enthalten sein, die für Makronamen normalerweise ungeeignet sind.
-% Deshalb existiert ein Satz von Befehlen, über den auf die zu einem
-% Kürzel gehörenden Elemente zugegriffen werden kann. Dabei wird davon
+% Da keine Vorschriften existieren, wie genau das Kürzel aufgebaut sein
+% muss, können innerhalb des Kürzels theoretisch auch solche Zeichen
+% enthalten sein, die für Makronamen normalerweise ungeeignet sind.
+% Deshalb existiert ein Satz von Befehlen, über den auf die zu einem
+% Kürzel gehörenden Elemente zugegriffen werden kann. Dabei wird davon
% ausgegangen, dass die Adressdatei dem zuvor vorgeschlagenen Aufbau
% entspricht.
%
@@ -288,25 +287,25 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\FirstName}
-% Der Vorname (Firstname) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.FN| codiert.
+% Der Vorname (Firstname) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.FN| codiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\FirstName}[1]{\csname #1.FN\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\LastName}
-% Der Nachname (Lastname) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.LN| codiert.
+% Der Nachname (Lastname) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.LN| codiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\LastName}[1]{\csname #1.LN\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\Address}
-% Die Adresse (Address) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.A| codiert.
+% Die Adresse (Address) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.A| codiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Address}[1]{\csname #1.A\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\Telephone}
-% Die Telephonnummer (Telephone/Phone) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.P|
+% Die Telephonnummer (Telephone/Phone) ist mit \emph{Kürzel}|.P|
% codiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Telephone}[1]{\csname #1.P\endcsname}
@@ -314,8 +313,8 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\FreeI}
% \begin{macro}{\FreeII}
-% Es existieren zwei freie Einträge, die mit \emph{Kürzel}|.FI| und
-% \emph{Kürzel}.|FII| codiert sind.
+% Es existieren zwei freie Einträge, die mit \emph{Kürzel}|.FI| und
+% \emph{Kürzel}.|FII| codiert sind.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\FreeI}[1]{\csname #1.FI\endcsname}
\newcommand*{\FreeII}[1]{\csname #1.FII\endcsname}
@@ -324,14 +323,14 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\Comment}
% \begin{macro}{\FreeIII}
-% Das dritte freie Element ist über zwei Makros erreichbar.
-% Das Makro |\Comment| dient zur Kompatibilität mit älteren
-% |\adrentry|-Einträgen, da hier der vorletzte Parameter als
+% Das dritte freie Element ist über zwei Makros erreichbar.
+% Das Makro |\Comment| dient zur Kompatibilität mit älteren
+% |\adrentry|-Einträgen, da hier der vorletzte Parameter als
% Kommentar gekennzeichnet war.
% Das Makro |\FreeIII| ist passend zur Definition des Makros
% |\addrentry| benannt.
-% Die Daten sind im Makro mit \emph{Kürzel}|.FIII| kodiert.
-% \changes{v1.1}{2002/05/18}{Erweitert auf addrentry Einträge}
+% Die Daten sind im Makro mit \emph{Kürzel}|.FIII| kodiert.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/05/18}{Erweitert auf addrentry Einträge}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Comment}{}
\newcommand*{\FreeIII}[1]{\csname #1.FIII\endcsname}
@@ -341,10 +340,10 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\FreeIV}
% Das letzte Makro gibt ebenfalls Zugriff auf ein freies Element, das mit
-% \emph{Kürzel}|.FIV| codiert ist. Dies wurde ebenfalls für
-% neue |\addrentry| Einträgen eingeführt. Bei älteren |\adrentry|
-% Einträgen, führt die Benutzung dieses Macros zu einer Warnung im Text.
-% \changes{v1.1}{2002/05/18}{Erweitert auf addrentry Einträge}
+% \emph{Kürzel}|.FIV| codiert ist. Dies wurde ebenfalls für
+% neue |\addrentry| Einträgen eingeführt. Bei älteren |\adrentry|
+% Einträgen, führt die Benutzung dieses Macros zu einer Warnung im Text.
+% \changes{v1.1}{2002/05/18}{Erweitert auf addrentry Einträge}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\FreeIV}[1]{\csname #1.FIV\endcsname}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -366,12 +365,12 @@
% entsprechende Eintrag verwendet ist.
% \vspace{1em}\noindent}
%
-% \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{Änderungsverzeichnis}
-% \markboth{Änderungsverzeichnis}{Änderungsverzeichnis}
-% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Änderungsverzeichnis}
+% \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{Änderungsverzeichnis}
+% \markboth{Änderungsverzeichnis}{Änderungsverzeichnis}
+% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Änderungsverzeichnis}
% Die erste Version des \textsf{KOMA-Script} Pakets
% stammt vom 7.\,Juli~1994. Es werden nur die
-% Änderungen ab diesem Zeitpunkt dokumentiert.\par%
+% Änderungen ab diesem Zeitpunkt dokumentiert.\par%
% \vspace{1em}\noindent}
%
% \Finale
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx
index c76f048bd7..009e922244 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrextend.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrextend.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrextend.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrextend.dtx 2640 2017-05-08 09:36:55Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrextend.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<preidentify>%%% (run: preidentify)
%<prepare>%%% (run: prepare)
%<option>%%% (run: option)
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-05-08 11:36:55 +0200 (Mon, 08 May 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1962 $
\endgroup
@@ -72,7 +72,6 @@
(extend other classes)]
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrextend.dtx}
@@ -94,10 +93,10 @@
%
% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/01}{neues Paket}
%
-% \section{Erweiterungen für andere Klassen}
+% \section{Erweiterungen für andere Klassen}
%
-% Dieses Paket dient dazu, einige Möglichkeiten von \KOMAScript{} auch anderen
-% Klassen zur Verfügung zustellen. Dafür darf dieses Paket nicht mit einer
+% Dieses Paket dient dazu, einige Möglichkeiten von \KOMAScript{} auch anderen
+% Klassen zur Verfügung zustellen. Dafür darf dieses Paket nicht mit einer
% \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet werden.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -106,7 +105,7 @@
%
% Die Vorbereitung ist einfach. Es wird nur getestet, ob bereits eine
% \KOMAScript-Klasse geladen ist. Falls dem so ist, wird eine Warnung
-% ausgegeben und dafür gesorgt, dass das Paket nicht weiter abgearbeitet wird.
+% ausgegeben und dafür gesorgt, dass das Paket nicht weiter abgearbeitet wird.
%
% \iffalse
%<*preidentify>
@@ -153,12 +152,12 @@
% \begin{sloppypar}
% Einige Dinge werden nur dann definiert, wenn dies gefordert ist. Dazu werden
% die entsprechenden Definitionen in das zweite Argument von
-% \cs{scr@ext@activateable}\marg{Kürzel} gepackt, wodurch sie als
-% \cs{scr@ext@activate@}\meta{Kürzel} definiert werden, und anschließend
-% \cs{csname}~\texttt{scr@ext@immediate@}\meta{Kürzel}\cs{endcsname}
-% ausgeführt. Um das dann zu aktivieren wird
-% \cs{scr@ext@activate}\marg{Kürzel} aufgerufen (beispielsweise innerhalb
-% einer Option). Mit \cs{scr@ext@addto@activateable} können Aktivierungen
+% \cs{scr@ext@activateable}\marg{Kürzel} gepackt, wodurch sie als
+% \cs{scr@ext@activate@}\meta{Kürzel} definiert werden, und anschließend
+% \cs{csname}~\texttt{scr@ext@immediate@}\meta{Kürzel}\cs{endcsname}
+% ausgeführt. Um das dann zu aktivieren wird
+% \cs{scr@ext@activate}\marg{Kürzel} aufgerufen (beispielsweise innerhalb
+% einer Option). Mit \cs{scr@ext@addto@activateable} können Aktivierungen
% entsprechend um weitere Definitionen erweitert werden.
% \end{sloppypar}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -195,15 +194,15 @@
%
% \subsection{Optionen}
%
-% Das Paket kennt eine universelle Option, um aktivierbare Möglichkeiten zu
-% aktivieren. Diese Option steht aber nur während dem Laden des Pakets zur
-% Verfügung!
+% Das Paket kennt eine universelle Option, um aktivierbare Möglichkeiten zu
+% aktivieren. Diese Option steht aber nur während dem Laden des Pakets zur
+% Verfügung!
%
% \begin{option}{extendedfeature}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Speicherung des Werts in der internen
-% Liste}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Speicherung des Werts in der internen
+% Liste}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@key{extendedfeature}{%
\scr@ext@activate{#1}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx
index 7c89acf9ce..ab3d507d52 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrhack.dtx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% \CheckSum{941}
+% \CheckSum{1855}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrhack.dtx
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license.
% The latest version of this license is in
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% and version 1.<3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work.
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrhack.dtx 3063 2019-02-01 07:39:11Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrhack.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<package&identify>%%% using: package,identify
%<package&option>%%% using: package,option
%<package&body>%%% using: package,body
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2019-02-01 08:39:11 +0100 (Fri, 01 Feb 2019) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1962 $
\endgroup
@@ -85,17 +85,18 @@
%<setspace&identify>\ProvidesFile{setspace.hak}[%
%<lscape&identify>\ProvidesFile{lscape.hak}[%
%<nomencl&identify>\ProvidesFile{nomencl.hak}[%
+%<standardsections&identify>\ProvidesFile{standardsections.hak}[%
%<*dtx|identify>
%!KOMAScriptVersion
- package
%<*dtx>
- source
+ source of
%</dtx>
-%<*!identify>
- (hacking other packages)%
-%</!identify>
-%</dtx|identify>
-%<hack&identify> (hacking package
+%<*dtx|package>
+ package (hacking other packages)%
+%</dtx|package>
+%<*hack>
+%<hack> scrhack part
+%<!standardsections> (hacking package
%<hyperref&identify> hyperref)%
%<float&identify> float)%
%<floatrow&identify> floatrow)%
@@ -103,7 +104,8 @@
%<setspace&identify> setspace)%
%<lscape&identify> lscape)%
%<nomencl&identify> nomencl)%
-%<*dtx|identify>
+%<standardsections&identify> (defining standard LaTeX class section headings)%
+%</hack>
]
%</dtx|identify>
%<*dtx>
@@ -156,6 +158,11 @@
\from{scrhack.dtx}{hack,nomencl,identify}%
\from{scrhack.dtx}{hack,nomencl,body}%
}%
+ \file{standardsections.hak}{%
+ \from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{file,standardsections.hak}%
+ \from{scrhack.dtx}{hack,standardsections,identify}%
+ \from{scrhack.dtx}{hack,standardsections,body}%
+ }%
}
\@@input scrstrop.inc
\else
@@ -163,7 +170,6 @@
\fi
\endbatchfile
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{lmodern}
@@ -207,13 +213,13 @@
%
% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/12}{erste Version des Pakets}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/12}{erste Version des Pakets}%^^A
%
% \section{Implementation of \Package{scrhack}}
%
% \changes{v3.04b}{2009/08/05}{Die Reihenfolge von Anweisungen und Optionen
-% grundlegend geändert, um das Paket \textsf{scrhack} unabhängiger von der
-% Reihenfolge beim Laden von Paketen zu machen.}^^A
+% grundlegend geändert, um das Paket \textsf{scrhack} unabhängiger von der
+% Reihenfolge beim Laden von Paketen zu machen.}%^^A
%
% \subsection{Optionen}
%
@@ -222,12 +228,12 @@
% \fi
%
% Das Paket bedient sich \cs{KOMAoptions} etc. aus \textsf{scrkbase} (dieses
-% wird übrigens direkt per \texttt{scrkbase.dtx} geladen).
+% wird übrigens direkt per \texttt{scrkbase.dtx} geladen).
%
-% Per Option kann gewählt werden, welche Manipulationen geladen werden
-% sollen. Alle diese Optionen können jedoch nur bis zum Laden des
+% Per Option kann gewählt werden, welche Manipulationen geladen werden
+% sollen. Alle diese Optionen können jedoch nur bis zum Laden des
% entsprechenden Pakets oder dem Laden von \textsf{scrhack} gesetzt
-% werden (es zählt, was später kommt). Anschließend sind sie wirkungslos.
+% werden (es zählt, was später kommt). Anschließend sind sie wirkungslos.
%
% \subsection{Verwendete Anweisungen}
%
@@ -237,9 +243,9 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifexpected}
-% Wenn die im ersten Argument angegebene Anweisung nach Ausführung der im
-% zweiten Argument angegebenen Anweisungen unverändert ist, dann soll das
-% dritte Argument ausgeführt werden, sonst das vierte.
+% Wenn die im ersten Argument angegebene Anweisung nach Ausführung der im
+% zweiten Argument angegebenen Anweisungen unverändert ist, dann soll das
+% dritte Argument ausgeführt werden, sonst das vierte.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\scr@ifexpected}[2]{%
\begingroup
@@ -258,7 +264,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\scr@hack@load}
% Wenn die Datei mit dem Namen des zweiten Arguments und der Endung des ersten
% Arguments so geladen wurde, dass \LaTeX{} eine Versionsinfo dazu gespeichert
-% hat, dann soll zusätzlich der entsprechende Hack geladen werden.
+% hat, dann soll zusätzlich der entsprechende Hack geladen werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@hack@load}[2]{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#2.#1\endcsname\relax
@@ -292,17 +298,17 @@
%
% \subsection{Der \textsf{hyperref}-Hack}
%
-% \textsf{hyperref} setzt den Anker zu der Stern-Variante einer Überschrift
-% hinter die Überschrift, während es bei der nicht Stern-Variante den Anker
-% auch dann vor die Überschrift setzt, wenn die Überschrift aufgrund von
+% \textsf{hyperref} setzt den Anker zu der Stern-Variante einer Ãœberschrift
+% hinter die Überschrift, während es bei der nicht Stern-Variante den Anker
+% auch dann vor die Ãœberschrift setzt, wenn die Ãœberschrift aufgrund von
% \texttt{secnumdepth} nicht nummeriert wird. Der Hack setzt den Anker
-% einheitlich vor die Überschrift.
+% einheitlich vor die Ãœberschrift.
%
% \begin{option}{hyperref}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
-% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
+% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\KOMA@ifkey{hyperref}{@scrhack@hyperref}%
@@ -310,20 +316,20 @@
%</package&option>
%<*package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2009/11/09}{\textsf{hyperref}-Hack wird früher geladen}^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2009/11/09}{\textsf{hyperref}-Hack wird früher geladen}%^^A
% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Neuere \textsf{hyperref}-Version deaktiviert
-% ggf. Option \texttt{hyperref}}^^A
+% ggf. Option \texttt{hyperref}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Neuere \KOMAScript-Versionen deaktivieren
-% ggf. Option \texttt{hyperref}}^^A
+% ggf. Option \texttt{hyperref}}%^^A
% Hier muss ein wenig trickreicher gearbeitet werden, weil \textsf{hyperref}
-% die Treiberdatei per \cs{AtEndOfPackage} lädt und der Hack erst danach
-% installiert werden darf. Mit \cs{AfterPackage*} alleine, würde der Hack aber
-% vor dem Laden der Treiberdatei installiert. Dafür können wir aber sicher
+% die Treiberdatei per \cs{AtEndOfPackage} lädt und der Hack erst danach
+% installiert werden darf. Mit \cs{AfterPackage*} alleine, würde der Hack aber
+% vor dem Laden der Treiberdatei installiert. Dafür können wir aber sicher
% sein, dass ein innerhalb von \cs{AfterPackage*} aufgerufenes
-% \cs{AtEndOfPackage} garantiert nach dem Laden der Treiberdatei ausgeführt
+% \cs{AtEndOfPackage} garantiert nach dem Laden der Treiberdatei ausgeführt
% wird. Das funktioniert auch noch, wenn \textsf{hyperref} bereits geladen
% wurde. In dem Fall wird der Code einfach nach dem Ende von \textsf{scrhack}
-% statt nach dem Ende von \textsf{hyperref} ausgeführt.
+% statt nach dem Ende von \textsf{hyperref} ausgeführt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\BeforePackage{hyperref}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}{}{%
@@ -359,10 +365,10 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% Eigentlich wird hier gar nicht \texttt{hyperref.sty} verändert, sondern
+% Eigentlich wird hier gar nicht \texttt{hyperref.sty} verändert, sondern
% diverse Treiberdateien. Sobald das Paket \textsf{hyperref} geladen ist, ist
-% auch die passende Treiberdatei geladen und außerdem sind alle
-% Treiberdateien, die entsprechende Definitionen vornehmen, gleichermaßen
+% auch die passende Treiberdatei geladen und außerdem sind alle
+% Treiberdateien, die entsprechende Definitionen vornehmen, gleichermaßen
% betroffen. Also kann der entsprechende Patch einfach erfolgen, wenn hyperref
% geladen ist (was bereits von \cs{scr@hack@load} getestet wurde). Es muss
% also nur noch sichergestellt werden, dass die umzudefinierenden Macros
@@ -413,7 +419,6 @@
Maybe you are using a unsupported hyperref version}%
}%
}
-
\scr@ifexpected\@spart{%
\def\@spart#1{%
\H@old@spart{#1}%
@@ -449,7 +454,6 @@
Maybe you are using a unsupported hyperref version}%
}%
}
-
\scr@ifexpected\@ssect{%
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
\H@old@ssect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
@@ -481,19 +485,19 @@
% \subsection{Der \textsf{float}-Hack}
%
% Das \textsf{float}-Paket verwendet das Makro \cs{float@listhead} zum
-% Setzen der Überschriften. Dies wird seit \KOMAScript~3 nicht mehr empfohlen
-% und fliegt demnächst komplett aus der Unterstützung. Stattdessen wird
-% empfohlen, dass Pakete \textsf{tocbasic} unterstützen. Der Aufwand dafür ist
-% sehr gering und wird mit vielen neuen Möglichkeiten belohnt.
+% Setzen der Ãœberschriften. Dies wird seit \KOMAScript~3 nicht mehr empfohlen
+% und fliegt demnächst komplett aus der Unterstützung. Stattdessen wird
+% empfohlen, dass Pakete \textsf{tocbasic} unterstützen. Der Aufwand dafür ist
+% sehr gering und wird mit vielen neuen Möglichkeiten belohnt.
%
-% Dieser Hack rüstet die \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für \textsf{float}
+% Dieser Hack rüstet die \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für \textsf{float}
% nach.
%
% \begin{option}{float}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
-% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
+% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\KOMA@ifkey{float}{@scrhack@float}%
@@ -513,16 +517,16 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfloat}
-% Über die Anweisung \cs{newfloat} wird eine neue Gleitumgebung
+% Ãœber die Anweisung \cs{newfloat} wird eine neue Gleitumgebung
% definiert. Hier muss die neue Erweiterung aus dem dritten Argument
% \textsf{tocbasic} bekannt gemacht werden.
% \begin{macro}{\listof}
-% Über die Anweisung \cs{listof} wird ein Verzeichnis für Gleitumgebungen
+% Über die Anweisung \cs{listof} wird ein Verzeichnis für Gleitumgebungen
% ausgegeben. Hier muss schlicht die entsprechende Anweisung von
% \textsf{tocbasic} verwendet werden.
% \begin{macro}{\float@addtolists}
-% Diese Anweisung wird nicht länger benötigt und daher auf die ursprüngliche
-% Definition zurückgesetzt.
+% Diese Anweisung wird nicht länger benötigt und daher auf die ursprüngliche
+% Definition zurückgesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*float&body>
\scr@ifexpected{\newfloat}{%
@@ -587,14 +591,14 @@
\@ifundefined{l@#1}{\expandafter\let\csname l@#1\endcsname\l@figure
\@ifundefined{l@#1}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/16}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}^^A
-% Bis Version 3.24 wurde hier nun wie üblich |\l@#1| unter Verwendung von
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/16}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}%^^A
+% Bis Version 3.24 wurde hier nun wie üblich |\l@#1| unter Verwendung von
% \cs{@dottedtocline} definiert:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \@namedef{l@#1}{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}%
% \end{verbatim}
-% Da aber \Package{tocbasic} inzwischen diese schöne Schnittstelle für die
-% Verzeichniseinträge bietet, verwenden wir die hier nun auch:
+% Da aber \Package{tocbasic} inzwischen diese schöne Schnittstelle für die
+% Verzeichniseinträge bietet, verwenden wir die hier nun auch:
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=1,numwidth=2.3em,indent=1.5em]
{default}{#1}%
@@ -634,19 +638,19 @@
% \subsection{Der \textsf{floatrow}-Hack}
%
% Das \textsf{floatrow}-Paket verwendet das Makro \cs{float@listhead} zum
-% Setzen der Überschriften. Dies wird seit \KOMAScript~3 nicht mehr empfohlen
-% und fliegt demnächst komplett aus der Unterstützung. Stattdessen wird
-% empfohlen, dass Pakete \textsf{tocbasic} unterstützen. Der Aufwand dafür ist
-% sehr gering und wird mit vielen neuen Möglichkeiten belohnt.
+% Setzen der Ãœberschriften. Dies wird seit \KOMAScript~3 nicht mehr empfohlen
+% und fliegt demnächst komplett aus der Unterstützung. Stattdessen wird
+% empfohlen, dass Pakete \textsf{tocbasic} unterstützen. Der Aufwand dafür ist
+% sehr gering und wird mit vielen neuen Möglichkeiten belohnt.
%
-% Dieser Hack rüstet die \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für \textsf{floatrow}
+% Dieser Hack rüstet die \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für \textsf{floatrow}
% nach.
%
% \begin{option}{floatrow}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
-% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
+% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\KOMA@ifkey{floatrow}{@scrhack@floatrow}
@@ -666,16 +670,16 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewFloatType}
-% Über die Anweisung \cs{DeclareNewFloatType} wird eine neue Gleitumgebung
+% Ãœber die Anweisung \cs{DeclareNewFloatType} wird eine neue Gleitumgebung
% definiert. Hier muss die neue Erweiterung aus dem dritten Argument
% \textsf{tocbasic} bekannt gemacht werden.
% \begin{macro}{\listof}
-% Über die Anweisung \cs{listof} wird ein Verzeichnis für Gleitumgebungen
+% Über die Anweisung \cs{listof} wird ein Verzeichnis für Gleitumgebungen
% ausgegeben. Hier muss schlicht die entsprechende Anweisung von
% \textsf{tocbasic} verwendet werden.
% \begin{macro}{\float@addtolists}
-% Diese Anweisung wird nicht länger benötigt und daher auf die ursprüngliche
-% Definition zurückgesetzt.
+% Diese Anweisung wird nicht länger benötigt und daher auf die ursprüngliche
+% Definition zurückgesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*floatrow&body>
\scr@ifexpected{\DeclareNewFloatType}{%
@@ -705,9 +709,9 @@
\RequirePackage{tocbasic}%
\PackageInfo{scrhack}{redefining \string\DeclareNewFloatType}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Eigentlich wäre es besser, wie im \textsf{float}-Hack einen Test
-% vorzuschalten, ob die Dateiendung bereits in Gebrauch ist. Aber das würde
-% voraussetzen, dass die Reihenfolge der Anweisungen geändert wird. Dazu
+% Eigentlich wäre es besser, wie im \textsf{float}-Hack einen Test
+% vorzuschalten, ob die Dateiendung bereits in Gebrauch ist. Aber das würde
+% voraussetzen, dass die Reihenfolge der Anweisungen geändert wird. Dazu
% stecke ich aber im Code von \textsf{floatrow} zu wenig
% drin. (\emph{\foreignlanguage{english}{Note: It would be better to first
% test, if the new extension is already in use like done at the
@@ -723,14 +727,14 @@
\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname}%
\@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}\flnew@ext{lo#1}\@namedef{fps@#1}{tbp}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/16}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}^^A
-% Bis Version 3.24 wurde hier nun wie üblich |\l@#1| unter Verwendung von
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/16}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}%^^A
+% Bis Version 3.24 wurde hier nun wie üblich |\l@#1| unter Verwendung von
% \cs{@dottedtocline} definiert:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \@namedef{l@#1}{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}%
% \end{verbatim}
-% Da aber \Package{tocbasic} inzwischen diese schöne Schnittstelle für die
-% Verzeichniseinträge bietet, verwenden wir die hier nun auch:
+% Da aber \Package{tocbasic} inzwischen diese schöne Schnittstelle für die
+% Verzeichniseinträge bietet, verwenden wir die hier nun auch:
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=1,numwidth=2.3em,indent=1.5em]{default}{#1}%
\caption@setkeys[floatrow]{newfloat}{#2}\let\FR@tmp=\relax
@@ -787,19 +791,19 @@
% \subsection{Der \textsf{listings}-Hack}
%
% Das \textsf{listings}-Paket verwendet das Makro \cs{float@listhead} zum
-% Setzen der Überschriften. Dies wird seit \KOMAScript~3 nicht mehr empfohlen
-% und fliegt demnächst komplett aus der Unterstützung. Stattdessen wird
-% empfohlen, dass Pakete \textsf{tocbasic} unterstützen. Der Aufwand dafür ist
-% sehr gering und wird mit vielen neuen Möglichkeiten belohnt.
+% Setzen der Ãœberschriften. Dies wird seit \KOMAScript~3 nicht mehr empfohlen
+% und fliegt demnächst komplett aus der Unterstützung. Stattdessen wird
+% empfohlen, dass Pakete \textsf{tocbasic} unterstützen. Der Aufwand dafür ist
+% sehr gering und wird mit vielen neuen Möglichkeiten belohnt.
%
-% Dieser Hack rüstet die \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für \textsf{listings}
+% Dieser Hack rüstet die \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für \textsf{listings}
% nach.
%
% \begin{option}{listings}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
-% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{Defaulteinstellung mit
+% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\KOMA@ifkey{listings}{@scrhack@listings}
@@ -820,12 +824,12 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@do@hack@listings}
% \begin{macro}{\lstlistoflistings}
-% Über dieses Macro wird das Verzeichnis der Listings gesetzt. Die gesamte
-% Funktionalität dafür kann \Package{tocbasic} überlassen werden.
+% Ãœber dieses Macro wird das Verzeichnis der Listings gesetzt. Die gesamte
+% Funktionalität dafür kann \Package{tocbasic} überlassen werden.
% \begin{macro}{\float@addtolists}
-% Diese Anweisung wird nicht länger benötigt und daher auf die ursprüngliche
-% Definition zurückgesetzt. Da \Package{listings} ihre Definition mit
-% \Macro{AtBeginDocument} verzögert, muss dies hier ebenfalls geschehen.
+% Diese Anweisung wird nicht länger benötigt und daher auf die ursprüngliche
+% Definition zurückgesetzt. Da \Package{listings} ihre Definition mit
+% \Macro{AtBeginDocument} verzögert, muss dies hier ebenfalls geschehen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*listings&body>
\newcommand*{\scr@do@hack@listings}{%
@@ -902,15 +906,15 @@
% \subsection{Der \textsf{nomencl}-Hack}
%
% Das \textsf{nomencl}-Paket harmoniert eigentlich nur in einer Kleinigkeit
-% bezüglich des Eintrags in das Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht sehr gut mit
+% bezüglich des Eintrags in das Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht sehr gut mit
% \KOMAScript-Klassen bzw. Paket \textsf{tocbasic}. Allerdings kann es von den
% Vorteilen von \textsf{tocbasic} auch in weiterer Hinsicht profitieren.
%
-% Dieser Hack rüstet weitgehende \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für
-% \textsf{nomencl} nach. Dafür wird Paket \textsf{xpatch} verwendet.
+% Dieser Hack rüstet weitgehende \textsf{tocbasic}-Unterstützung für
+% \textsf{nomencl} nach. Dafür wird Paket \textsf{xpatch} verwendet.
%
% \begin{option}{nomencl}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/31}{neue Option für neuen Hack}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/31}{neue Option für neuen Hack}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\RequirePackage{xpatch}%
@@ -927,11 +931,11 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A nomencl
+% \end{option}%^^A nomencl
%
% \begin{macro}{\thenomenclature}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/31}{Umgebung \texttt{thenomenclature} wird
-% gepatcht}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/31}{Umgebung \texttt{thenomenclature} wird
+% gepatcht}%^^A
% Statt die Fallunterscheidung aus der Originaldefinition direkt hier
% nachzubilden, patchen wir diese komplett heraus und ersetzen sie durch eine
% neue Anweisung.
@@ -966,7 +970,7 @@
\PackageInfo{scrhack}{\string\thenomenclature\space successfully patched}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/23}{new \textsf{nomencl} 5.0}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/23}{new \textsf{nomencl} 5.0}%^^A
% From \textsf{nomencl} 5.0 another code is used if the nomenclature is a
% chapter. So we need another patch:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -987,7 +991,7 @@
\PackageInfo{scrhack}{\string\thenomenclature\space successfully patched}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/23}{prepared for hoply comming \textsf{nomencl}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/23}{prepared for hoply comming \textsf{nomencl}}%^^A
% But this code is also wrong, because it breaks manual running heads, e.g.,
% of page style \texttt{myheadings}. So I hope, there will be another code,
% that needs a somehow different patch:
@@ -1009,7 +1013,7 @@
\PackageInfo{scrhack}{\string\thenomenclature\space successfully patched}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2019/01/23}{emergency patch added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2019/01/23}{emergency patch added}%^^A
% If this also does not work, we try an emergency patch, that could break
% things.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1039,12 +1043,12 @@
}
%</nomencl&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \thenomenclature
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thenomenclature
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@hack@nomencl@head}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/31}{Überschrift für \texttt{thenomenclature} unter
-% Verwendung von \textsf{tocbasic}}^^A
-% Im Gegensatz zu Gleitumgebungen benötigen wir hier keine Gruppe, weil
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/31}{Überschrift für \texttt{thenomenclature} unter
+% Verwendung von \textsf{tocbasic}}%^^A
+% Im Gegensatz zu Gleitumgebungen benötigen wir hier keine Gruppe, weil
% \texttt{thenomenclature} bereits die Gruppe bereitstellt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*nomencl&body>
@@ -1057,19 +1061,19 @@
%</nomencl&body>
% \end{macrocode}
% Es ist ggf. noch zu beachten, dass von den ganzen Haken, die
-% \textsf{tocbasic} bereitstellt, für dieses Verzeichnis natürlich nur die
-% Überschriftenhaken zum Einsatz kommen. Verzeichnishaken können zwar
+% \textsf{tocbasic} bereitstellt, für dieses Verzeichnis natürlich nur die
+% Überschriftenhaken zum Einsatz kommen. Verzeichnishaken können zwar
% definiert werden, kommen aber nie zur Anwendung.
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@hack@nomencl@head
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@hack@nomencl@head
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@intoc}
-% \changes{3.23}{2017/03/31}{Reaktion auf \cs{if@intoc}}
-% Natürlich muss jetzt noch auf \textsf{nomencl}'s Option \texttt{intoc}
+% \changes{3.23}{2017/03/31}{Reaktion auf \cs{if@intoc}}
+% Natürlich muss jetzt noch auf \textsf{nomencl}'s Option \texttt{intoc}
% reagiert werden, also entsprechend der Option das \textsf{tocbasic}
-% Feature \texttt{totoc} passend gesetzt werden. Etwaige Änderungen des
+% Feature \texttt{totoc} passend gesetzt werden. Etwaige Änderungen des
% Features sind also erst nach dem Laden von \textsf{nomencl} und
-% \textsf{scrhack} möglich. Spätere Änderungen von \cs{if@intoc} werden
-% außerdem nicht berücksichtigt.
+% \textsf{scrhack} möglich. Spätere Änderungen von \cs{if@intoc} werden
+% außerdem nicht berücksichtigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*nomencl&body>
\if@intoc
@@ -1082,17 +1086,17 @@
%
% \subsection{Der \textsf{setspace}-Hack}
%
-% Das \textsf{setspace}-Paket verwendet \cs{@ptsize} auf ungünstige Art, indem
-% es davon ausgeht, dass es immer eine ganze Zahl enthält. Das ist aber bei
-% \KOMAScript{} keineswegs zwingend. Außerdem ist der Wert für \texttt{11pt}
-% falsch, weil \LaTeX{} in diesem Fall tatsächlich eine 10,95\,pt-Schrift mit
-% einem Zeilenabstand von 13,6\,pt einstellt. Damit wäre der korrekte Wert für
+% Das \textsf{setspace}-Paket verwendet \cs{@ptsize} auf ungünstige Art, indem
+% es davon ausgeht, dass es immer eine ganze Zahl enthält. Das ist aber bei
+% \KOMAScript{} keineswegs zwingend. Außerdem ist der Wert für \texttt{11pt}
+% falsch, weil \LaTeX{} in diesem Fall tatsächlich eine 10,95\,pt-Schrift mit
+% einem Zeilenabstand von 13,6\,pt einstellt. Damit wäre der korrekte Wert für
% \cs{onehalfspacing} beispielsweise:
% \[ 10{,}95\,\mathrm{pt} \dot 1{,5} / 13{,}6\,\mathrm{pt} \equiv 1{,}208 \]
-% Tatsächlich stellt \textsf{setspace} aber einen Wert von 1,213 ein, was
-% einer effektiven Schriftgröße von 11\,pt entsprechen würde. Ebenso stellt es
+% Tatsächlich stellt \textsf{setspace} aber einen Wert von 1,213 ein, was
+% einer effektiven Schriftgröße von 11\,pt entsprechen würde. Ebenso stellt es
% den aktuellen Abstand bei \cs{onehalfspacing} nicht relativ zur aktuellen
-% Schriftgröße ein, sondern zur Grundschriftgröße. Damit erhält man bei
+% Schriftgröße ein, sondern zur Grundschriftgröße. Damit erhält man bei
% \begin{verbatim}
% \documentclass[10pt]{article}
% \usepackage{setspace}
@@ -1114,15 +1118,15 @@
% baselineskip: \the\baselineskip
% \end{document}
% \end{verbatim}
-% obwohl beide Male dieselbe Schriftgröße verwendet wird. Streng genommen
-% müsste also bei jeder Änderung der Schriftgröße der Wert Abstand angepasst
-% werden. So weit geht dieser Hack nicht. Stattdessen wird der Wert abhängig
-% von der tatsächlichen Schriftgröße und dem tatsächlichen Basisabstand beim
+% obwohl beide Male dieselbe Schriftgröße verwendet wird. Streng genommen
+% müsste also bei jeder Änderung der Schriftgröße der Wert Abstand angepasst
+% werden. So weit geht dieser Hack nicht. Stattdessen wird der Wert abhängig
+% von der tatsächlichen Schriftgröße und dem tatsächlichen Basisabstand beim
% Aufruf der Anweisungen eingestellt. Das ergibt immerhin in den obigen
% Beispielen gleiche Ergebnisse.
%
% \begin{option}{setspace}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\KOMA@ifkey{setspace}{@scrhack@setspace}
@@ -1142,8 +1146,8 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\onehalfspacing}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/16}{Neu}^^A
-% Über diese Anweisung wird der eineinhalbzeilige Satz eingestellt. Ein auf
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/16}{Neu}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Anweisung wird der eineinhalbzeilige Satz eingestellt. Ein auf
% drei Nachkommastellen genauer Wert erscheint mir ausreichend genau.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*setspace&body>
@@ -1172,8 +1176,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\doublespacing}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/16}{Neu}^^A
-% Über diese Anweisung wird der zweizeilige Satz eingestellt. Ein auf
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/16}{Neu}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Anweisung wird der zweizeilige Satz eingestellt. Ein auf
% drei Nachkommastellen genauer Wert erscheint mir ausreichend genau.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifexpected{\doublespacing}{%
@@ -1204,24 +1208,24 @@
%
%
% \subsection{Der \textsf{lscape}-Hack}
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{Neuer \textsf{lscape}-Hack}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{Neuer \textsf{lscape}-Hack}%^^A
%
% Das \textsf{lscape}-Paket setzt innerhalb der
-% \texttt{landscape}-Umgebung die Länge \cs{textheight} auf den Wert
+% \texttt{landscape}-Umgebung die Länge \cs{textheight} auf den Wert
% von \cs{textwidth} obwohl es auf der anderen Seite \cs{textwidth}
% nicht auf den Wert von \cs{textheight} setzt. Das ist inkonsequent. Da
-% David~Carlisle außerdem angibt, dass \cs{textwidth} nicht verändert wird,
-% weil das zu Problemen führen konnte, ist es unverständlich, dass
-% \cs{textheight} verändert wird, obwohl das ebenfalls zu Problemen führen
-% kann, beispielsweise für \textsf{showframe} oder \textsf{scrpage}. Daher
-% verändere ich die Definition so, dass auch \cs{textheight} unverändert
-% bleibt. Dabei muss allerdings auch \textsf{pdflscape} berücksichtigt
+% David~Carlisle außerdem angibt, dass \cs{textwidth} nicht verändert wird,
+% weil das zu Problemen führen konnte, ist es unverständlich, dass
+% \cs{textheight} verändert wird, obwohl das ebenfalls zu Problemen führen
+% kann, beispielsweise für \textsf{showframe} oder \textsf{scrpage}. Daher
+% verändere ich die Definition so, dass auch \cs{textheight} unverändert
+% bleibt. Dabei muss allerdings auch \textsf{pdflscape} berücksichtigt
% werden. Das ist am einfachsten mit \textsf{xpatch}.
%
% \begin{option}{lscape}
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{Neue Option für neuen Hack}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/05/07}{\textsf{xpatch} wird bereits im Optionenteil
-% geladen}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{Neue Option für neuen Hack}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/05/07}{\textsf{xpatch} wird bereits im Optionenteil
+% geladen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\RequirePackage{xpatch}%
@@ -1242,22 +1246,22 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{macro}{\landscape}
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/05/07}{\textsf{xpatch} wird bereits im Optionenteil
-% geladen}^^A
-% Über diese Anweisung wird die \texttt{landscape}-Umgebung von
-% \textsf{lscape} gestartet. Genau diese muss gepatcht werden. Dafür wird das
-% Paket \textsf{xpatch} benötigt. Da der Patch nur geladen wird, wenn die
-% Option dafür gesetzt ist, kann die Option daher nur ein- und ausgeschaltet
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/05/07}{\textsf{xpatch} wird bereits im Optionenteil
+% geladen}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Anweisung wird die \texttt{landscape}-Umgebung von
+% \textsf{lscape} gestartet. Genau diese muss gepatcht werden. Dafür wird das
+% Paket \textsf{xpatch} benötigt. Da der Patch nur geladen wird, wenn die
+% Option dafür gesetzt ist, kann die Option daher nur ein- und ausgeschaltet
% werden, wenn sie bis zum Laden des Pakets aktiviert wurde.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*lscape&body>
\xpatchcmd{\landscape}{\textheight=\vsize}{%
\if@scrhack@lscape
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/08/11}{Patchen von \cs{@outputpage}}^^A
-% Es gibt allerdings in der Tat eine Stelle, an der ein verändertet Wert von
-% \cs{textheight} benötigt wird. Das ist wenn innerhalb von \cs{@outputpage}
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/08/11}{Patchen von \cs{@outputpage}}%^^A
+% Es gibt allerdings in der Tat eine Stelle, an der ein verändertet Wert von
+% \cs{textheight} benötigt wird. Das ist wenn innerhalb von \cs{@outputpage}
% der Wert von \cs{@colht} reinitialisiert wird. Also wird das entsprechend
% auch noch hinein gepatcht.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1277,20 +1281,747 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{Length}{\scrh@LT@textheight}
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/08/11}{neue Länge (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/08/11}{neue Länge (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\scrh@LT@textheight}
%</lscape&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{Length}^^A \scrh@LT@textheight
-% \end{macro}^^A \landscape
+% \end{Length}%^^A \scrh@LT@textheight
+% \end{macro}%^^A \landscape
+%
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+% \subsection{The standard classes sections hack}
+% \label{sec:standardsections}
+% The \emph{standard classes sections hack} differs from each other
+% hack. First of all it does not patch a specific package but the class
+% definitions of section commands from \cs{part} till
+% \cs{subparagraph}. Additionally it resets several internal \LaTeX{} macros
+% which are changed by \KOMAScript{} classes to their original
+% definition. Last but not least it is not activated by default, but the user
+% has to activate it, if he needs it. The hack has more potential to break
+% things than to make things better. Because of this, there is not any support
+% for using this hack and the hack shows several warning messages.
+%
+% \begin{option}{standardsections}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&option>
+\KOMA@ifkey{standardsections}{@scrhack@standardsections}
+\KOMAExecuteOptions{standardsections=false}
+%</package&option>
+%<*package&body>
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \if@scrhack@standardsections
+ \PackageInfo{scrhack}{loading standard classes sections hack}%
+ \input{standardsections.hak}%
+ \fi
+}
+%</package&body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}%^^A standardsections
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% The hack redefines all these commands to a definition copied from the
+% standard \LaTeX{} classes version v1.4i. Copyright of this code is by the
+% \LaTeX3{} Project. The complete, unmodified code can be found on
+% \url{https://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*standardsections&body>
+\PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ You are loosing every kind of support because of\MessageBreak
+ using the dangerous standard classes sections hack!\MessageBreak
+ This hack can break several classes and packages.\MessageBreak
+ However, sometimes it is needed to make a\MessageBreak
+ package work%
+}%
+\PackageInfo{scrhack}{%
+ Using code from the standard LaTeX classes.\MessageBreak
+ For more information about this code and the\MessageBreak
+ license of this code, please see:\MessageBreak
+ https://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx
+}%
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrhack}{this hack should not be loaded after `hyperref'}%
+}{}
+\@ifpackageloaded{titlesec}{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrhack}{this hack should not be loaded after `titlesec'}%
+}{}
+\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrhack}{this hack should not be loaded after `sectsty'}%
+}{}
+\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrhack}{this hack should not be loaded after `sectsty'}%
+}{}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{chapter}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It seems to be an article class, so we use the code from \textsf{article}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@part}{\newcounter{part}}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@section}{\newcounter{section}}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@subsection}{\newcounter{subsection}[section]}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@subsubsection}{%
+ \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@paragraph}{%
+ \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@subparagraph}{%
+ \newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]}{}%
+ \renewcommand\thepart {\@Roman\c@part}%
+ \renewcommand\thesection {\@arabic\c@section}%
+ \renewcommand\thesubsection {\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}%
+ \renewcommand\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection}%
+ \renewcommand\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}%
+ \renewcommand\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph}%
+ \def\part{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \addvspace{4ex}%
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@part\@spart}%
+ \def\@part[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \Large\bfseries \partname\nobreakspace\thepart
+ \par\nobreak
+ \fi
+ \huge \bfseries #2%
+ \markboth{}{}\par}%
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip 3ex
+ \@afterheading}%
+ \def\@spart#1{%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \huge \bfseries #1\par}%
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip 3ex
+ \@afterheading}%
+ \def\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex \@plus.2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}{\parindent}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It seems to be either a book or report class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@part}{\newcounter{part}}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@chapter}{\newcounter{chapter}}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@section}{\newcounter{section}[chapter]}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@subsection}{\newcounter{subsection}[section]}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@subsubsection}{%
+ \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@paragraph}{%
+ \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]}{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{c@subparagraph}{%
+ \newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]}{}%
+ \def\@chapapp{\chaptername}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{frontmatter}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It seems not to be a book class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\part{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \onecolumn
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \null\vfil
+ \secdef\@part\@spart}
+
+ \def\@part[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\centering
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \huge\bfseries \partname\nobreakspace\thepart
+ \par
+ \vskip 20\p@
+ \fi
+ \Huge \bfseries #2\par}%
+ \@endpart}
+ \def\@spart#1{%
+ {\centering
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par}%
+ \@endpart}
+ \def\@endpart{\vfil\newpage
+ \if@twoside
+ \if@openright
+ \null
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \twocolumn
+ \fi}
+ \def\chapter{\if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \global\@topnum\z@
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+ \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
+ {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \chaptermark{#1}%
+ \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+ \else
+ \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+ \def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{50\p@}%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \huge\bfseries \@chapapp\space \thechapter
+ \par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+ \fi
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 40\p@
+ }}
+ \def\@schapter#1{\if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+ \else
+ \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+ \def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{50\p@}%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+ \normalfont
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 40\p@
+ }}
+ \def\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex \@plus.2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}{\parindent}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It seems to be a book class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{if@mainmatter}{%
+ \expandafter\newif\csname if@mainmatter\endcsname
+ }{}%
+ \def\frontmatter{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+ \pagenumbering{roman}}%
+ \def\mainmatter{%
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \@mainmattertrue
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}}%
+ \def\backmatter{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse}%
+ \def\part{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \onecolumn
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+ \null\vfil
+ \secdef\@part\@spart}%
+
+ \def\@part[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\centering
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \huge\bfseries \partname\nobreakspace\thepart
+ \par
+ \vskip 20\p@
+ \fi
+ \Huge \bfseries #2\par}%
+ \@endpart}%
+ \def\@spart#1{%
+ {\centering
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par}%
+ \@endpart}%
+ \def\@endpart{\vfil\newpage
+ \if@twoside
+ \if@openright
+ \null
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \twocolumn
+ \fi}%
+ \def\chapter{\if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \global\@topnum\z@
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}%
+ \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \if@mainmatter
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
+ {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \chaptermark{#1}%
+ \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+ \else
+ \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}%
+ \def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{50\p@}%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \if@mainmatter
+ \huge\bfseries \@chapapp\space \thechapter
+ \par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 40\p@
+ }}%
+ \def\@schapter#1{\if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+ \else
+ \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}%
+ \def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{50\p@}%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+ \normalfont
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 40\p@
+ }}%
+ \def\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex \@plus.2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ \def\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}{\parindent}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+ }%
+}% End of the derived code.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
+% \KOMAScript{} classes redefine this internal \LaTeX{} kernel macro. In this
+% case \cs{scr@saved@startsection} is defined, differs from
+% \cs{@startsection} and has the definition found before redefining the
+% original macro. We do nothing else but resetting \cs{@startsection} to this
+% saved definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@saved@startsection}{}{%
+ \ifx\@startsection\scr@saved@startsection\else
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Resetting \string\@startsection,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \let\@startsection\scr@saved@startsection
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@startsection
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}
+% All these should be resetted to their original definitions stored in
+% \cs{scr@latex@\dots}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@latex@sect}{}{%
+ \ifx\@sect\scr@latex@sect\else
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Resetting \string\@sect,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \let\@sect\scr@latex@sect
+ \fi
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@latex@ssect}{}{%
+ \ifx\@ssect\scr@latex@ssect\else
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Resetting \string\@ssect,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \let\@sect\scr@latex@ssect
+ \fi
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@latex@xsect}{}{%
+ \ifx\@xsect\scr@latex@xsect\else
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Resetting \string\@xsect,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \let\@sect\scr@latex@sect
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@xsect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ssect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@sect
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\RedeclareSectionCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewSectionCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideSectionCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommands}
+% \begin{macro}{\RedeclareSectionCommands}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewSectionCommands}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideSectionCommands}
+% These \KOMAScript{} commands do not make sense any longer after forced
+% redefinition of \cs{part} \dots{} \cs{subparagraph}. They even would not
+% work correctly after resetting, e.g., \cs{@startsection}. So best reaction
+% is to \emph{undefine} them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{DeclareSectionCommand}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ \string\DeclareSectionCommand\space
+ and all derivates deactivated,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \let\DeclareSectionCommand\undefined
+ \let\DeclareSectionCommands\undefined
+ \let\RedeclareSectionCommand\undefined
+ \let\RedeclareSectionCommands\undefined
+ \let\DeclareNewSectionCommand\undefined
+ \let\DeclareNewSectionCommands\undefined
+ \let\ProvideSectionCommand\undefined
+ \let\ProvideSectionCommands\undefined
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch}
+% Now, definitions without respecting \textsf{hyperref} are used, so
+% \textsf{hyperref} should again be able to patch them. So the hack should
+% deactivate the patch deactivation of the \KOMAScript{} classes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch\relax
+\let\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommand
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@osectarg}
+% The \KOMAScript{} classes use this macro to store how to use the optional
+% argument of section commands. But with the standard class definition the
+% only possibility is to use it as running head and write it into the table of
+% contents without any extended handling. So the only value, that makes sense
+% is 0.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@osectarg}{}{%
+ \def\reserved@a{0}%
+ \ifx\scr@osectarg\reserved@a\else
+ \let\scr@osectarg\reserved@a
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Extended option handling for section commands deactivated,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@activate@xsection}
+% Further changing of the value has to be deactivated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@activate@xsection}{}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\scr@activate@xsection}[1]{%
+ \edef\scr@osectarg{#1}\def\reserved@a{0}%
+ \ifx\scr@osectarg\reserved@a
+ \else
+ \let\scr@osectarg\reserved@a
+ \PackageWarning{scrhack}{%
+ Because of loading the standard classes\MessageBreak
+ sections hack, the extended option handling\MessageBreak
+ of section commands failed%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@activate@xsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@osectarg
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterformat}
+% Most \cs{\dots format} macros of \KOMAScript{} are still used, because of
+% the redefinition of \cs{@seccntformat}. But \cs{part} and \cs{chapter} are
+% defined without using them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{partformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Usage of \string\partformat\space
+ deactivated,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{chapterformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Usage of \string\chapterformat\space
+ deactivated,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partformat
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsectionformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraphformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphformat}
+% All these commands have to be resetted to not use the automatic dot and to
+% add a \cs{quad} instead of an \cs{enskip}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{sectionformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ \string\sectionformat\space set to
+ `\string\thesection\string\quad',\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\sectionformat}{\thesection\quad}%
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{subsectionformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ \string\subsectionformat\space set to
+ `\string\thesubsection\string\quad'\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\subsectionformat}{\thesubsection\quad}%
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{subsubsectionformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ \string\subsubsectionformat\space set to
+ `\string\thesubsubsection\string\quad'\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\subsubsectionformat}{\thesubsubsection\quad}%
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{paragraphformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ \string\paragraphformat\space set to
+ `\string\theparagraph\string\quad'\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\paragraphformat}{\theparagraph\quad}%
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{subparagraphformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ \string\subparagraphformat\space set to
+ `\string\thesubparagraph\string\quad'\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \renewcommand*{\subparagraphformat}{\thesubparagraph\quad}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\partlineswithprefixformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterlineswithprefixformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterlinesformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionlinesformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectioncatchphraseformat}
+% These \KOMAScript{} commands are not used any longer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{partlineswithprefixformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Usage of \string\partlineswithprefixformat\space deactivated,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading the standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{chapterlineswithprefixformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Usage of \string\chapterlineswithprefixformat\space and\MessageBreak
+ \string\chapterlinesformat\space deactivated,\MessageBreak
+ because of using standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{sectionlinesformat}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ Usage of \string\sectionlinesformat\space and\MessageBreak
+ \string\sectioncatchphraseformat\space deactivated,\MessageBreak
+ because of using standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectioncatchphraseformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectionlinesformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterlinesformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterlineswithprefixformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partlineswithprefixformat
+%
+% \begin{option}{headings}
+% The \KOMAScript{} option does not make sense any longer. So it is
+% deactivated and usage will throw an error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KOMAClassName}{}{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrhack}{%
+ KOMA-Script option `headings' removed,\MessageBreak
+ because of loading standard classes sections hack%
+ }%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.\KOMAClassFileName]{KOMA}{headings}%
+ \KOMA@kav@removekey{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{option}%^^A headings
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@class@titlesec@warning}
+% The warning about loading \textsf{titlesec} has to be changes, because we do
+% not expect errors any longer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scr@class@titlesec@warning{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrhack}{%
+ Usage of `titlesec' should work, because of\MessageBreak
+ loading the standard classes sections hack.\MessageBreak
+ However, you should know, there is not any\MessageBreak
+ support for this combination by the\MessageBreak
+ KOMA-Script author%
+ }%
+}
+%</standardsections&body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@class@titlesec@warning
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
-% \subsection{Optionen ausführen}
+% \subsection{Optionen ausführen}
%
-% Zum Schluss noch die Optionen ausführen. Im Paket wird diese Anweisung
+% Zum Schluss noch die Optionen ausführen. Im Paket wird diese Anweisung
% allerdings vor den Anweisungen der Hacks und den Anweisungen aus dem
-% Abschnitt »Verwendete Anweisungen« stehen.
+% Abschnitt »Verwendete Anweisungen« stehen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&option>
\KOMAProcessOptions\relax
@@ -1306,7 +2037,7 @@
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
%%% mode: flyspell
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB"
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx
index aa061b8791..5e13a801b1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrjura.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{1943}
+% \CheckSum{1932}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrjura.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
% `scrlogo.dtx'.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrjura.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -59,12 +59,18 @@
% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
-% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrjura.dtx 3033 2018-09-21 07:36:59Z kohm $
+% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
+%%% From File: $Id: scrjura.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
+%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
+%<init>%%% (run: init)
+%<options>%%% (run: options)
+%<postoptions>%%% (run: postoptions)
+%<body>%%% (run: body)
+%<final>%%% (run: final)
%<*dtx>
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-09-21 09:36:59 +0200 (Fri, 21 Sep 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1962 $
\endgroup
@@ -72,9 +78,9 @@
\ifx\fmtname\LaTeXformat\def\MainBodyWork{%
\ProvidesFile{scrjura.dtx}[\filedate\space\filerevision\space
%</dtx>
-%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01]
-%<package>\ProvidesPackage{scrjura}[%
-%<*dtx|package>
+%<package&identify>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01]
+%<package&identify>\ProvidesPackage{scrjura}[%
+%<*dtx|(package&identify)>
%!KOMAScriptVersion
package
%<*dtx>
@@ -82,7 +88,7 @@
%</dtx>
(for jurists)
]
-%</dtx|package>
+%</dtx|(package&identify)>
%<*dtx>
\IfFileExists{scrdoc.cls}{%
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
@@ -91,7 +97,6 @@
}
\providecommand*{\DescribeOption}{\DescribeMacro}
\providecommand*{\DescribeCounter}{\DescribeMacro}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{lmodern}
@@ -125,7 +130,12 @@
\from{scrjura.dtx}{ins}%
}%
\file{scrjura.sty}{%
- \from{scrjura.dtx}{package}%
+ \from{scrjura.dtx}{package,identify}%
+ \from{scrjura.dtx}{package,init}%
+ \from{scrjura.dtx}{package,options}%
+ \from{scrjura.dtx}{package,postoptions}%
+ \from{scrjura.dtx}{package,body}%
+ \from{scrjura.dtx}{package,final}%
\from{scrlogo.dtx}{logo}%
}%
}%
@@ -150,8 +160,8 @@
% \begin{document}
% \maketitle
% \begin{abstract}
-% Das scrjura-Paket ist für die Kautelarjurisprudenz gedacht. Es soll für
-% Anwälte und Notare eine flexible Hilfe bei der Abfassung von Verträgen,
+% Das scrjura-Paket ist für die Kautelarjurisprudenz gedacht. Es soll für
+% Anwälte und Notare eine flexible Hilfe bei der Abfassung von Verträgen,
% Satzungen und juristischen Kommentaren bieten. Es ist in Zusammenarbeit
% mit Dr.\,Alexander Willand entstanden, bzw. noch immer in Entstehung
% begriffen.
@@ -167,9 +177,10 @@
% \fi
%
% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/11}{Generelle Umbenennung von "`Paragraph"' in
-% "`Clause"' für alle Befehle, Zähler und Optionen}^^A
+% "`Clause"' für alle Befehle, Zähler und Optionen}%^^A
%
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*init>
\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
\PackageError{scrjura}{Package hyperref already loaded}{%
If you want to use package scrjura with package hyperref, you have to
@@ -179,66 +190,70 @@
hyperref\MessageBreak
behind the loading of package scrjura.}%
}
+%</init>
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Es wird das Paket \textsf{scrkbase} benötigt, weil alles weitere darauf
+% Es wird das Paket \textsf{scrkbase} benötigt, weil alles weitere darauf
% aufbaut.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*init>
\RequirePackage{scrkbase}[2013/03/26]
+%</init>
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Außerdem wird \textsf{tocbasic} benötigt, weil einige wenige Befehle davon
+% Außerdem wird \textsf{tocbasic} benötigt, weil einige wenige Befehle davon
% verwendet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*init>
\RequirePackage{tocbasic}
+%</init>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{option}{contract}
% Mit der Option |contract| wird das gesamte Dokument zu einem Vertrag. Man
% darf dann keine der von diesem Paket bereit gestellten Umgebungen mehr
% innerhalb des Dokuments verwenden! Realisiert wird dies, indem ganz am
-% Ende von |\begin{document}| noch |\contract| ausgeführt wird.
+% Ende von |\begin{document}| noch |\contract| ausgeführt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
\DeclareOption{contract}{%
\g@addto@macro\document\contract%
}
+%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{juratotoc}
-% Mit dieser Option wird der Zähler \Counter{juratoclevel} auf einen
-% gewünschten Wert oder 2 oder 10000 gesetzt.
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}^^A
+% Mit dieser Option wird die Verzeichnisebene für Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge
+% auf einen gewünschten Wert oder 2 oder 10000 gesetzt.
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@juratotoc}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{Schalter durch Zähler überflüssig}
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{Schalter durch Zähler überflüssig}
% \begin{Counter}{juratoclevel}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{Zählerdefinition verschoben}
-% Mit dem Zähler wiederum wird erreicht, dass Paragraphen in das
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden.
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{Zählerdefinition verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{Zähler entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@cpar}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/06/09}{neue für \textsf{hyperref}}
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/06/09}{neue für \textsf{hyperref}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{wird von \textsf{tocbasic} erledigt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{juratoclevel}\setcounter{juratoclevel}{\@M}
+%<*options>
\KOMA@key{juratotoc}[true]{%
- \begingroup
- \KOMA@set@ifkey{juratoclevel}{@tempswa}{#1}%
- \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
- \if@tempswa
- \setcounter{juratoclevel}{2}%
- \else
- \setcounter{juratoclevel}{\@M}%
- \fi
+ \KOMA@set@ifkey{juratotoc}{@tempswa}{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \if@tempswa
+ \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=2]{default}{cpar}%
\else
- \setcounter{juratoclevel}{#1}%
+ \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=\maxdimen]{default}{cpar}%
\fi
- \endgroup
- \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
- \KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.scrjura.sty}{juratotoc}{\value{juratoclevel}}%
+ \else
+ \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=#1]{default}{cpar}%
+ \fi
+ \KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.scrjura.sty}{juratotoc}{\cpartocdepth}%
}
-\KOMA@kav@xadd{.scrjura.sty}{juratotoc}{\value{juratoclevel}}%
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@cpar}{\arabic{juratoclevel}}
+\KOMA@kav@xadd{.scrjura.sty}{juratotoc}{\cpartocdepth}%
+%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{Counter}
@@ -246,38 +261,40 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{juratocnumberwidth}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}%^^A
% \begin{option}{juratocindent}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cpar@numberwidth}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{ersetzt durch Verwendung von
+% \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cpar@indent}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu (intern)}
-% Der Einzug und die Breite der Nummer für Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge kann
-% über diese beiden Optionen bzw. Makros bestimmt werden.
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{ersetzt durch Verwendung von
+% \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}%^^A
+% Der Einzug und die Breite der Nummer für Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge kann
+% über diese beiden Optionen bestimmt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\cpar@numberwidth}{2em}
-\newcommand*{\cpar@indent}{1.5em}
+%<*options>
\KOMA@key{juratocnumberwidth}{%
- \begingroup\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}\endgroup
- \renewcommand*{\cpar@numberwidth}{#1}%
+ \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[numwidth=#1]{default}{cpar}%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
- \KOMA@kav@replacevalue{.scrjura.sty}{juratocnumberwidth}{\cpar@numberwidth}%
+ \KOMA@kav@replacevalue{.scrjura.sty}{juratocnumberwidth}{#1}%
}
-\KOMA@kav@add{.scrjura.sty}{juratocnumberwidth}{\cpar@numberwidth}
+\KOMA@kav@add{.scrjura.sty}{juratocnumberwidth}{2em}
\KOMA@key{juratocindent}{%
- \begingroup\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}\endgroup
- \renewcommand*{\cpar@indent}{#1}%
+ \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[indent=#1]{default}{cpar}%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
- \KOMA@kav@replacevalue{.scrjura.sty}{juratocindent}{\cpar@indent}%
+ \KOMA@kav@replacevalue{.scrjura.sty}{juratocindent}{#1}%
}
-\KOMA@kav@add{.scrjura.sty}{juratocindent}{\cpar@indent}%
+\KOMA@kav@add{.scrjura.sty}{juratocindent}{1.5em}%
+%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -285,27 +302,30 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{juratitlepagebreak}
-% \changes{v0.5b}{2010/04/05}{neue Option}
+% \changes{v0.5b}{2010/04/05}{neue Option}
% Mit dieser Option wird der Schalter |\if@juratitlepagebreak| auf |\iftrue|
% gesetzt.
% \begin{macro}{\if@juratitlepagebreak}
-% Mit diesem Schalter wiederum wird erreicht, dass in den Überschriften von
+% Mit diesem Schalter wiederum wird erreicht, dass in den Ãœberschriften von
% Paragraphen ein Seitenumbruch erlaubt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
\KOMA@ifkey{juratitlepagebreak}{@juratitlepagebreak}
+%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{parnumber}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neue Option}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.6a}{2012/10/15}{Meldung bei falschen Werten korrigiert}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.6a}{2012/10/15}{Meldung bei falschen Werten korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}^^A
-% Die (automatische) Absatznummerierung lässt sich nun auch per Option ein-
+% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}%^^A
+% Die (automatische) Absatznummerierung lässt sich nun auch per Option ein-
% und ausschalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
\newif\ifparnumber
\KOMA@key{parnumber}[true]{%
\ifstr{#1}{auto}{%
@@ -329,25 +349,27 @@
}
\KOMA@kav@add{.scrjura.sty}{parnumber}{true}
\KOMA@kav@add{.scrjura.sty}{parnumber}{auto}
+%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{clausemark}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/11}{\texttt{paragraphmark} umbenannt in
-% \texttt{clausemark}}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/11}{\texttt{paragraphmark} umbenannt in
+% \texttt{clausemark}}%^^A
% \begin{option}{paragraphmark}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}%^^A
% \begin{option}{markright}
% \begin{option}{markboth}
% \begin{macro}{\Clausemark}
-% \changes{v0.5e}{2011/08/31}{Beachtung von \cs{MakeMarkcase}}
+% \changes{v0.5e}{2011/08/31}{Beachtung von \cs{MakeMarkcase}}
% Mit diesen Optionen wird |\Clausemark| so umdefiniert, dass es entweder
-% ein |\markright| oder ein |\markboth| ausführt. Im Gegensatz zu
+% ein |\markright| oder ein |\markboth| ausführt. Im Gegensatz zu
% |\chaptermark| etc. erwartet |\Clausemark| neben dem Titel auch noch
-% die zu verwendende Nummer (das könnte bei Bedarf noch geändert werden!)
+% die zu verwendende Nummer (das könnte bei Bedarf noch geändert werden!)
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
\newcommand*{\Clausemark}[1]{}
\KOMA@key{clausemark}{%
\begingroup
@@ -406,6 +428,7 @@
}%
\KOMAExecuteOptions[.scrjura.sty]{clausemark=#1}%
}
+%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{option}
@@ -414,28 +437,29 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{ref}
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/06/07}{neue Einstellungen \texttt{nopar},
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/06/07}{neue Einstellungen \texttt{nopar},
% \texttt{nosentence}, \texttt{OnlyParagraph}}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/11/04}{Verwendung der renovierten Schnittstelle mit
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9a}{2015/03/09}{Wert wird in der internen Liste erfasst}%^^A
% \begin{option}{parcitename}
% \begin{option}{sentencecitename}
-% Die Form, in der Absätze und Sätze referenziert werden. Es gibt eine lange,
-% eine abgekürzte und eine nummerische Form.
+% Die Form, in der Absätze und Sätze referenziert werden. Es gibt eine lange,
+% eine abgekürzte und eine nummerische Form.
%
% \begin{macro}{\parcite@fromat}
% \begin{macro}{\sentencecite@fromat}
% In der Voreinstellung wird das lange Format verwendet. Es gilt:
% 0 = lang, 1 = kurz, 2 = numerisch, -1 = gar nicht
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
\newcommand*{\parcite@format}{0}
\newcommand*{\sentencecite@format}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Per Option kann die Voreinstellung verändert werden.
+% Per Option kann die Voreinstellung verändert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@key{ref}{%
\begingroup
@@ -520,34 +544,38 @@
\KOMA@kav@add{.scrjura.sty}{ref}{sentencelong}%
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption[scrjura]{parcitename}{ref=parlong}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption[scrjura]{sentencecitename}{ref=sentencelong}
+%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
% \end{option}
% \end{option}
%
-% Optionen ausführen.
+% Optionen ausführen.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*postoptions>
\KOMAProcessOptions\relax
+%</postoptions>
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Paragraph}
-% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
-% melden}^^A
+% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
+% melden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\SubParagraph}
-% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
-% melden}^^A
+% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
+% melden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\refParagraph}
-% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
-% melden}^^A
+% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
+% melden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\refParagraphN}
-% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
-% melden}^^A
+% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
+% melden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\DeprecatedParagraph}
-% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
-% melden}^^A
+% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen einen Fehler
+% melden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ParagraphCompatibilityHacks}
-% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen verbleiben}^^A
+% \changes{1.0}{2014/11/22}{wird noch ein paar Versionen verbleiben}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\providecommand*{\DeprecatedParagraph}{%
\PackageError{scrjura}{modification of old document needed}{%
It seem that this document was made for scrjura up to version
@@ -595,34 +623,38 @@
\providecommand*{\SubParagraph}{\DeprecatedParagraph\SubParagraph}
\providecommand*{\refParagraph}{\DeprecatedParagraph\refParagraph}
\providecommand*{\refParagraphN}{\DeprecatedParagraph\refParagraphN}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ParagraphCompatibilityHacks
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeprecatedParagraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \refParagraphN
-% \end{macro}^^A \refParagraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \SubParagraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \Paragraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ParagraphCompatibilityHacks
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeprecatedParagraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \refParagraphN
+% \end{macro}%^^A \refParagraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \SubParagraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \Paragraph
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@env@type}
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@env@type} umbenannt}^^A
-% Dieses Makro wird in Abhängigkeit der gerade aktiven
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@env@type} umbenannt}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro wird in Abhängigkeit der gerade aktiven
% \textsf{scrjura}-Umgebung definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\scrjura@env@type}{}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ellipsispar}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/02}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{thecontractAbsoluteClause}
-% flexibilisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/02}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{thecontractAbsoluteClause}
+% flexibilisiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\parellipsis}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/02}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9g}{2016/03/25}{in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur bei
-% \cs{if@filesw} schreiben}^^A
-% Paragraphen auslassen aber mit zählen.
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/02}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9g}{2016/03/25}{in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur bei
+% \cs{if@filesw} schreiben}%^^A
+% Paragraphen auslassen aber mit zählen.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\ellipsispar}[1][1]{%
\begingroup
\KOMAoptions{parnumber=manual}\parellipsis\par
@@ -642,38 +674,40 @@
\newcommand*{\parellipsis}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{textellipsis}{\dots}{\textellipsis}%
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{contract}
% \begin{macro}{\contract}
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{fehlende Fehlermeldung ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{Umgebung definiert sich nicht mehr selbst
-% um}^^A
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{\cs{jura@env@type} wird gesetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{fehlende Fehlermeldung ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{Umgebung definiert sich nicht mehr selbst
+% um}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{\cs{jura@env@type} wird gesetzt}%^^A
% \begin{Counter}{contractClause}
% \begin{macro}{\thecontractClause}
-% \changes{v0.9b}{2015/05/01}{muss unbedingt den Zähler \texttt{Clause}
-% statt \texttt{contractClause} verwenden}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9b}{2015/05/01}{muss unbedingt den Zähler \texttt{Clause}
+% statt \texttt{contractClause} verwenden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\contract@Clauseformat}
% \begin{macro}{\Clauseformat}
-% \changes{v0.6b}{2013/04/16}{\cs{paragraphformat} umdefiniert}^^A
+% \changes{v0.6b}{2013/04/16}{\cs{paragraphformat} umdefiniert}%^^A
% \begin{Counter}{contractSubClause}
-% \changes{v0.9b}{2015/05/01}{muss unbedingt den Zähler \texttt{SubClause}
-% statt \texttt{contractSubClause} verwenden}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9b}{2015/05/01}{muss unbedingt den Zähler \texttt{SubClause}
+% statt \texttt{contractSubClause} verwenden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\thecontractSubClause}
% \begin{Counter}{contractAbsoluteClause}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{neuer (interner) Zähler über alle Paragraphen,
-% um ggf. die Zählung neu beginnen zu können}^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{neuer (interner) Zähler über alle Paragraphen,
+% um ggf. die Zählung neu beginnen zu können}%^^A
% Die Umgebung \texttt{contract} wird als Anweisung \cs{contract}
% definiert. Nichts desto trotz handelt es sich dabei um eine Umgebung und
% sollte sie immer als Umgebung verwendet werden!
% Die Umgebung kann nicht geschachtelt werden. Sie darf aber enden und dann
-% erneut verwendet werden. Die Paragraphen werden jedoch über alle Verträge
+% erneut verwendet werden. Die Paragraphen werden jedoch über alle Verträge
% hinweg nummeriert. Das Ende eines Vertrags ist also genau genommen nur eine
% Unterbrechung.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\contract}{%
\ifx\scrjura@env@type\@empty
\let\@doendpe\scrjura@doendpe
@@ -706,6 +740,7 @@
\renewcommand*{\thecontractSubClause}{%
{\theClause\alph{SubClause}}}
\newcounter{contractAbsoluteClause}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{Counter}
% \end{macro}
@@ -718,12 +753,13 @@
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/11/12}{Neue Anweisung}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/11/12}{Neue Anweisung}
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% Verwendet \cs{@defjuraenvironment} um eine neue juristische Umgebung zu
% definieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{#1}{\expandafter\let\csname #1\expandafter\endcsname
\csname end#1\endcsname}{}%
@@ -744,13 +780,13 @@
\@onlypreamble\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@defjuraenvironment}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/11/04}{Neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{neue Option \texttt{ClauseFont}}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/11/04}{Neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{neue Option \texttt{ClauseFont}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{\cs{reserved@defjuraenvironment} wird wieder
-% \cs{relax}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Umstellung von globalen auf lokale Optionen}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung dient dazu, weitere Umgebungen einfach definieren zu können.
-% Dabei werden optional diverse Optionen unterstützt. Näheres ist der
+% \cs{relax}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Umstellung von globalen auf lokale Optionen}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung dient dazu, weitere Umgebungen einfach definieren zu können.
+% Dabei werden optional diverse Optionen unterstützt. Näheres ist der
% Anleitung zu entnehmen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamily{KOMAarg}
@@ -759,7 +795,7 @@
\long\def\@defjuraenvironment#1[#2]#3#4{%
\let\reserved@defjuraenvironment\relax
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Zähler definieren:
+% Die Zähler definieren:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{#1Clause}%
\newcounter{#1AbsoluteClause}%
@@ -795,9 +831,9 @@
\csname #1@Clauseformat\endcsname[1]{\Clauseformat{##1}}%
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v0.9c}{2015/05/13}{\cs{the\dots Clause} definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/24}{\cs{protect}\cs{\@nameuse} statt
-% \cs{csname}\dots\cs{endcsname}}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9c}{2015/05/13}{\cs{the\dots Clause} definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/24}{\cs{protect}\cs{\@nameuse} statt
+% \cs{csname}\dots\cs{endcsname}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\renewcommand\expandafter*\csname the#1Clause\endcsname{%
\protect\@nameuse{#1@Clauseformat}{\arabic{#1Clause}}}%
@@ -838,10 +874,10 @@
\contract@everypar
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt wird noch ein Font-Alias für \texttt{Clause} gesetzt. Ist kein Font
-% und kein Alias-Font für die neue Umgebung definiert, so wird
+% Jetzt wird noch ein Font-Alias für \texttt{Clause} gesetzt. Ist kein Font
+% und kein Alias-Font für die neue Umgebung definiert, so wird
% \texttt{contract.Clause} verwendet.
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Fontalias korrigiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Fontalias korrigiert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\IfExistskomafont{#1.Clause}{%
\IfIsAliaskomafont{#1.Clause}{%
@@ -864,31 +900,33 @@
\par
}%
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@dewjuraenvironment
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareNewJuraEnvironment
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@dewjuraenvironment
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareNewJuraEnvironment
%
% \begin{macro}{\contract@paragraph}
-% Das ist das Macro, das in Verträgen |\Clause| zur Verfügung stellt.
+% Das ist das Macro, das in Verträgen |\Clause| zur Verfügung stellt.
% Ein Vertrag besteht aus mehreren Paragraphen. Jeder Paragraph hat einige
-% optionale Elemente, die (auf dem Umweg über scrkbase) über das
+% optionale Elemente, die (auf dem Umweg über scrkbase) über das
% keyval-Paket geregelt werden.
% \begin{option}{title}
% \begin{option}{head}
% \begin{option}{entry}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{Option veraltet}
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{Option veraltet}
% \begin{option}{tocentry}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{neue Option}
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{neue Option}
% \begin{option}{nohead}
% \begin{option}{noentry}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{Option veraltet}
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{Option veraltet}
% \begin{option}{notocentry}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{neue Option}
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{neue Option}
% Der Titel, der Kolumnentitel und der Verzeichniseintrag des
-% Paragraphen. Der Titel setzt dabei zunächst auch die anderen beiden. Man
+% Paragraphen. Der Titel setzt dabei zunächst auch die anderen beiden. Man
% kann die beiden aber auf leer setzen. Insbesondere aber kann man sie mit
% den |no|-Optionen auch abschalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\define@key{contract}{title}{%
\def\contract@title{#1}%
\ifx\contract@entry\relax\def\contract@entry{\contract@title}\fi
@@ -930,9 +968,9 @@
% \begin{macro}{\contract@postskip}
% \begin{option}{preskip}
% \begin{option}{postskip}
-% Über diese beiden Optionen kann der Abstand vor und nach einem Pragraphen
+% Ãœber diese beiden Optionen kann der Abstand vor und nach einem Pragraphen
% gesetzt werden. Wird nichts angegeben, so wird die globale Voreinstellung
-% verwendet, die übrigens mit |\setkeys{contract}{...}| gesetzt werden
+% verwendet, die übrigens mit |\setkeys{contract}{...}| gesetzt werden
% kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\contract@preskip}{2\baselineskip}
@@ -945,12 +983,12 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{option}{dummy}
-% Über dies Option wird der Schalter |\ifcontract@dummy| auf |\iftrue|
+% Ãœber dies Option wird der Schalter |\ifcontract@dummy| auf |\iftrue|
% gesetzt.
% \begin{macro}{\ifcontract@dummy}
% Ist der Schalter |\iftrue|, dann wird der Paragraph nicht gesetzt. Es ist
-% jedoch darauf zu achten, dass Absätze und Sätze des Paragraphen auf diese
-% Weise nicht entfernt werden können. Werden jedoch Paragraphen gelöscht, so
+% jedoch darauf zu achten, dass Absätze und Sätze des Paragraphen auf diese
+% Weise nicht entfernt werden können. Werden jedoch Paragraphen gelöscht, so
% kann man damit das Loch in der Nummerierung erzeugen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifcontract@dummy
@@ -960,10 +998,10 @@
% \end{option}
% \begin{macro}{\contract@paragraph@font}
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Es wird Element \texttt{Clause} statt
-% \texttt{contract.Clause} verwendet}^^A
-% Eigentlich müsste die Anweisung \cs{contract@paragraph@format} heißen. Da
-% sie jedoch für irgendwelche Tricks verwendet wurde. will ich das ungern
-% ändern. Ebenso müsste die Anweisung eigentlich je nach Vertragsumgebung
+% \texttt{contract.Clause} verwendet}%^^A
+% Eigentlich müsste die Anweisung \cs{contract@paragraph@format} heißen. Da
+% sie jedoch für irgendwelche Tricks verwendet wurde. will ich das ungern
+% ändern. Ebenso müsste die Anweisung eigentlich je nach Vertragsumgebung
% neu definiert und dann jene Defintion verwendet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{contract.Clause}{\sffamily\bfseries\large}
@@ -986,14 +1024,14 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{Counter}
-% Zunächst wird vorübergehend auf manuelle Absatznummern umgeschaltet, weil
-% natürlich innerhalb der Überschrift keine Nummer gesetzt werden
+% Zunächst wird vorübergehend auf manuelle Absatznummern umgeschaltet, weil
+% natürlich innerhalb der Überschrift keine Nummer gesetzt werden
% soll. Trotzdem werden generell die Absatznummern eingeschaltet. Dann werden
-% die Optionen initialisiert und ausgeführt.
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{Zähler \texttt{contractAbsoluteClause} wird
-% erhöht}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\texttt{contractAbsoluteClause}
-% flexibilisiert}^^A
+% die Optionen initialisiert und ausgeführt.
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{Zähler \texttt{contractAbsoluteClause} wird
+% erhöht}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\texttt{contractAbsoluteClause}
+% flexibilisiert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\contract@paragraph}[1]{%
\stepcounter{\scrjura@env@type AbsoluteClause}%
@@ -1005,9 +1043,9 @@
\contract@dummyfalse
\ifx\relax#1\relax\else\setkeys{contract}{#1}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn es kein Blindparagraph ist, werden Vorbereitung für nach der
-% Überschrift getroffen und der vertikale Abstand eingefügt.
-% \changes{v0.6a}{2012/10/08}{fehlendes \cs{par} ergänzt}
+% Wenn es kein Blindparagraph ist, werden Vorbereitung für nach der
+% Überschrift getroffen und der vertikale Abstand eingefügt.
+% \changes{v0.6a}{2012/10/08}{fehlendes \cs{par} ergänzt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcontract@dummy\else
\par
@@ -1015,13 +1053,13 @@
\addvspace{\contract@preskip}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn die Nummer nicht manuell gesetzt wurde, wird die nächste Nummer
-% verwendet. Im anderen Fall muss die Nummer gesetzt und auch dafür gesorgt
+% Wenn die Nummer nicht manuell gesetzt wurde, wird die nächste Nummer
+% verwendet. Im anderen Fall muss die Nummer gesetzt und auch dafür gesorgt
% werden, dass sowohl ein Label als auch hyperref diese Nummer verwenden.
-% \changes{v0.6b}{2013/04/16}{Verwendung von \cs{contract@Clauseformat}
-% auch bei manueller Nummerierung der Paragraphen.}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9c}{2015/05/13}{\cs{thecontractClause} durch
-% umgebungsabhängiges Macro ersetzt.}^^A
+% \changes{v0.6b}{2013/04/16}{Verwendung von \cs{contract@Clauseformat}
+% auch bei manueller Nummerierung der Paragraphen.}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9c}{2015/05/13}{\cs{thecontractClause} durch
+% umgebungsabhängiges Macro ersetzt.}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\contract@number\relax
\let\p@Clause\@empty
@@ -1034,8 +1072,8 @@
\cl@Clause
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/24}{\cs{protect}\cs{\@nameuse} statt
-% \cs{csname}\dots\cs{endcsname}}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/24}{\cs{protect}\cs{\@nameuse} statt
+% \cs{csname}\dots\cs{endcsname}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\theClause{%
\protect\@nameuse{\scrjura@env@type @Clauseformat}{\contract@number}%
@@ -1054,15 +1092,15 @@
\typeout{absolute Nummer: \the@AbsClause^^JLabel: `\@currentHref'}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zwecks Vereinfachung wird ab hier so getan, als wäre es ein Unterabschnitt.
+% Zwecks Vereinfachung wird ab hier so getan, als wäre es ein Unterabschnitt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\theSubClause\theClause
% \end{macrocode}
-% Außer für Blindparagraphen wird dann die Überschrift gesetzt, die
-% Verzeichniseinträge vorgenommen und der Kolumnentitel angepasst.
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/28}{Abstand nach der Nummer als Bestandteil der
-% Nummer setzen}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9i}{2017/02/23}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@toc}}^^A
+% Außer für Blindparagraphen wird dann die Überschrift gesetzt, die
+% Verzeichniseinträge vorgenommen und der Kolumnentitel angepasst.
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/28}{Abstand nach der Nummer als Bestandteil der
+% Nummer setzen}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9i}{2017/02/23}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@toc}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcontract@dummy\else
\begingroup
@@ -1082,25 +1120,27 @@
\par
\endgroup\nobreak\vskip\contract@postskip
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zum Schluss wird noch dafür gesorgt, dass auch die Absätze korrekt
-% nummeriert werden können etc.
+% Zum Schluss wird noch dafür gesorgt, dass auch die Absätze korrekt
+% nummeriert werden können etc.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrjura@afterheading
\fi
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contract@subparagraph}
-% \changes{v0.6a}{2012/10/08}{fehlendes \cs{par} ergänzt}%^^A
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{Zähler \texttt{contractAbsoluteClause} wird
-% erhöht}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/28}{Abstand nach der Nummer als Bestandteil der
-% Nummer setzen}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9i}{2017/02/23}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@toc}}^^A
+% \changes{v0.6a}{2012/10/08}{fehlendes \cs{par} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{Zähler \texttt{contractAbsoluteClause} wird
+% erhöht}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/28}{Abstand nach der Nummer als Bestandteil der
+% Nummer setzen}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9i}{2017/02/23}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@toc}}%^^A
% Das entspricht bis auf wenige Kleinigkeiten, die Unterparagraphen betreffen,
% |\contract@paragraph|
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\contract@subparagraph}[1]{%
\stepcounter{\scrjura@env@type AbsoluteClause}%
\ManualPar\parnumbertrue
@@ -1159,13 +1199,15 @@
\scrjura@afterheading
\fi
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AutoPar}
% \begin{macro}{\ManualPar}
-% Automatische oder manuelle Absatznummern für alle Umgebungen aktivieren.
+% Automatische oder manuelle Absatznummern für alle Umgebungen aktivieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\AutoPar}{%
\expandafter\let\expandafter\scrjura@everypar
\csname \scrjura@env@type @everypar\endcsname
@@ -1173,16 +1215,33 @@
\newcommand*{\ManualPar}{%
\let\scrjura@everypar\relax
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@afterheading}
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@afterheading} umbenannt}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{benötigt kein Argument mehr}^^A
-% Entspricht |\afterheading| mit Erweiterungen für automatischen
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@afterheading} umbenannt}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{benötigt kein Argument mehr}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{\cs{CheckCommand} für \cs{@afterheading}}%^^A
+% Entspricht |\afterheading| mit Erweiterungen für automatischen
% Absatznummern.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\CheckCommand*{\@afterheading}{%
+ \@nobreaktrue
+ \everypar{%
+ \if@nobreak
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \clubpenalty \@M
+ \if@afterindent \else
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+ \everypar{}%
+ \fi}%
+}
\newcommand*{\scrjura@afterheading}{%
\@nobreaktrue
\everypar{%
@@ -1204,31 +1263,31 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@everypar}
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@everypar} umbenannt}^^A
-% Die Anweisung, die am Anfang von jedem Absatz auszuführen ist, um die
-% Nummer zu setzen. Außerhalb der Umgebungen ist das nichts.
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@everypar} umbenannt}%^^A
+% Die Anweisung, die am Anfang von jedem Absatz auszuführen ist, um die
+% Nummer zu setzen. Außerhalb der Umgebungen ist das nichts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scrjura@everypar}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@doendpe}
% Diese Anweisung wird von \LaTeX{} verwendet, um am Ende von Umgebungen die
-% kurz-, mittel- und langwirkenden Absatzaktionen zurückzusetzen. Damit hier
+% kurz-, mittel- und langwirkenden Absatzaktionen zurückzusetzen. Damit hier
% nicht die automatische Absatznummerierung abgeschaltet wird, wird sie neu
-% eingefügt.
+% eingefügt.
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@doendpe}
% \begin{macro}{\IncludeInRelease}
-% \changes{v0.9e}{2015/11/03}{wird temporär benötigt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9e}{2015/11/03}{wird temporär benötigt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@gobble@IncludeInRelease}
-% \changes{v0.9e}{2015/11/03}{wird temporär benötigt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9e}{2015/11/03}{wird temporär benötigt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\EndIncludeInRelease}
-% \changes{v0.9e}{2015/11/03}{wird temporär benötigt}^^A
-% Seit \LaTeX{} 2015/01/01 ist \cs{@doendpe} abhängig von
+% \changes{v0.9e}{2015/11/03}{wird temporär benötigt}%^^A
+% Seit \LaTeX{} 2015/01/01 ist \cs{@doendpe} abhängig von
% \textsf{latexrelease} etwas anders definiert. Das wird hier
-% berücksichtigt. Damit das auch noch mit älteren Versionen von \LaTeX{}
+% berücksichtigt. Damit das auch noch mit älteren Versionen von \LaTeX{}
% funktioniert, ohne dass man extra \textsf{latexrelease} nachinstalliert,
-% wird hier ein wenig getrickst. Die Änderungen werden aber so temporär wie
-% möglich gehalten.
+% wird hier ein wenig getrickst. Die Änderungen werden aber so temporär wie
+% möglich gehalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\IncludeInRelease}[3]{%
\PackageInfo{scrjura}{temporary definition of \string\IncludeInRelease}%
@@ -1288,80 +1347,90 @@
}%
}
\EndIncludeInRelease
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \EndIncludeInRelease
-% \end{macro}^^A \@gobble@IncludeInRelease
-% \end{macro}^^A \IncludeInRelease
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrjura@doendpe
-% \end{macro}^^A \doendpe
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrjura@everypar
+% \end{macro}%^^A \EndIncludeInRelease
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@gobble@IncludeInRelease
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IncludeInRelease
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrjura@doendpe
+% \end{macro}%^^A \doendpe
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrjura@everypar
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@cpar}
-% Verzeichnis-Eintrag für einen Vertrags-Paragraphen.
+% Verzeichnis-Eintrag für einen Vertrags-Paragraphen.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{Verwendung von \textsf{tocbasic}}%^^A
+% Da der Zähler \texttt{juratoclevel} bisher nicht dokumentiert war und auch
+% bisher syntaktisch falsche Werte zu Fehlermeldungen geführt haben, können
+% wir uns voll auf \textsf{tocbasic} stützen.
+% Die Definition muss in den init-Teil, damit die Optionen die Einstellungen
+% ändern können:
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\l@cpar}[2]{%
- \ifnum\value{juratoclevel}>\value{tocdepth}\else
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{bprot@dottedtocline}{%
- \@dottedtocline
- }{%
- \bprot@dottedtocline
- }{\value{juratoclevel}}{\cpar@indent}{\cpar@numberwidth}{#1}{#2}%
- \fi
-}
+%<*init>
+\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[%
+ indent=1.5em,
+ numwidth=2em,
+ level=\maxdimen
+]{default}{cpar}
+%</init>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@separator}
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@separator} umbenannt}^^A
-% Wird verwendet, damit Leerzeichen am Anfang oder Ende entfernt werden können.
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@separator} umbenannt}%^^A
+% Wird verwendet, damit Leerzeichen am Anfang oder Ende entfernt werden können.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\scrjura@separator}[1]{#1}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@usetype}
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@usetype} umbenannt}^^A
-% In der Voreinstellung macht das erst einmal gar nichts, außer dass es robust
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@usetype} umbenannt}%^^A
+% In der Voreinstellung macht das erst einmal gar nichts, außer dass es robust
% ist und \cs{jura@@usetype} aufruft.
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@@usetype}
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@@usetype} umbenannt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\cs{jura@@usetype} umbenannt}%^^A
% Das wiederum ist nicht robust und kann dadurch einfacher umdefiniert
-% werden. In der Voreinstellung macht das dann wirklich nichts, außer das
+% werden. In der Voreinstellung macht das dann wirklich nichts, außer das
% Argument zu fressen.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\scrjura@usetype}[1]{\scrjura@@usetype{#1}}
\newcommand*{\scrjura@@usetype}[1]{}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contract@everypar}
-% |\scrjura@everpar| für Verträge.
+% |\scrjura@everpar| für Verträge.
% \begin{macro}{\ifparnumber}
% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/29}{Definition des Schalters in die Definition der
-% Option verschoben}^^A
+% Option verschoben}%^^A
% \begin{Counter}{par}
% \begin{macro}{\thepar}
% \begin{macro}{\theHpar}
% \begin{macro}{\parformat}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/06/07}{neues Font-Element \texttt{parnumber}}^^A
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/06/07}{neues Font-Element \texttt{parnumber}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\parformatseparation}
-% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/06}{neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/06}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\p@par}
% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{\cs{jura@usetype} mit Argument
-% \cs{jura@env@type} eingefügt}^^A
+% \cs{jura@env@type} eingefügt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\withoutparnumber}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/19}{neu}^^A
-% Der Schalter gibt an, ob überhaupt mit Absatznummern gearbeitet werden
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/19}{neu}%^^A
+% Der Schalter gibt an, ob überhaupt mit Absatznummern gearbeitet werden
% soll. Sind Absatznummern deaktiviert, werden auch keine manuellen
-% Absatznummern gesetzt. Die Absätze werden dann auch nicht gezählt. Ansonsten
-% werden die Absätze mit |\thepar| nummeriert. Wichtig ist, dass der
-% Absatzzähler mit den Paragraphen und den Unterparagraphen zurückgesetzt
-% wird. Außerdem muss beim Zitieren als Elternobjekt der Paragraph mit
+% Absatznummern gesetzt. Die Absätze werden dann auch nicht gezählt. Ansonsten
+% werden die Absätze mit |\thepar| nummeriert. Wichtig ist, dass der
+% Absatzzähler mit den Paragraphen und den Unterparagraphen zurückgesetzt
+% wird. Außerdem muss beim Zitieren als Elternobjekt der Paragraph mit
% ausgegeben werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcounter{par}
\renewcommand*{\thepar}{\arabic{par}}
\newcommand*{\theHpar}{\theH@AbsClause-\Roman{par}}
@@ -1372,6 +1441,7 @@
\@addtoreset{par}{Clause}
\@addtoreset{par}{SubClause}
\newcommand*{\withoutparnumber}{}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1381,26 +1451,27 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{Counter}
% \end{macro}
-% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{erstes Argument von \cs{newmaxpar} und zweites
+% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{erstes Argument von \cs{newmaxpar} und zweites
% Argument von \cs{getmaxpar} ist \texttt{contract} nicht
% \texttt{contractpars}}
-% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{\cs{contract@Clauseformat} expandiert beim
+% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{\cs{contract@Clauseformat} expandiert beim
% Schreiben zu seinem Argument}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{Zähler \texttt{contractAbsoluteClause} wird
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/04/18}{Zähler \texttt{contractAbsoluteClause} wird
% verwendet}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{Satznummer bei manuell nummerierten Absätzen
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{Satznummer bei manuell nummerierten Absätzen
% auf 0 statt 1 initialisiert, weil \cs{Sentence} die Nummer als erstes
-% hochzählt.}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{Absatznummer von \cs{thisparnumber} beachtet}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/06/06}{Im Fall von nicht rein nummerischen
-% Absatznummern die Absätze auf jeden Fall nummerieren}
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\texttt{contractAbsoluteClause}
-% flexibilisiert}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/06}{\cs{nobreakspace} durch
-% \cs{parformatseparation} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9g}{2016/03/25}{in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur bei
-% \cs{if@filesw} schreiben}^^A
-% \begin{macrocode}
+% hochzählt.}
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{Absatznummer von \cs{thisparnumber} beachtet}
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/06/06}{Im Fall von nicht rein nummerischen
+% Absatznummern die Absätze auf jeden Fall nummerieren}
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/03}{\texttt{contractAbsoluteClause}
+% flexibilisiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9f}{2016/02/06}{\cs{nobreakspace} durch
+% \cs{parformatseparation} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9g}{2016/03/25}{in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur bei
+% \cs{if@filesw} schreiben}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\contract@everypar}{%
\ifparnumber
\ifx\scrjura@special@par\relax
@@ -1451,18 +1522,20 @@
\setcounter{sentence}{-1}\refstepcounter{sentence}%
\fi
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thisparnumber}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{neue Anweisung}
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{neue Anweisung}
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@special@par}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@special@reset@par}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
% Mit dieser Anweisung kann man eine Absatznummer manuell vergeben. Allerdings
% muss die Nummer voll expandierbar sein!
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\thisparnumber}[1]{%
\def\scrjura@special@par{#1}%
}
@@ -1470,18 +1543,20 @@
\let\scrjura@special@par\relax
\newcommand*{\scrjura@special@reset@par}{}
\let\scrjura@special@reset@par\relax
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrjura@special@reset@par
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrjura@special@par
-% \end{macro}^^A\thisparnumber
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrjura@special@reset@par
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrjura@special@par
+% \end{macro}%^^A\thisparnumber
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\refL}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@L}
% Das gleiche wie |\ref| aber zwingend mit der Langform.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\refL}{\kernel@ifstar {\ref@L*}{\ref@L{}}}
\newcommand*{\ref@L}[2]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1495,8 +1570,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refS}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@S}
% Das gleiche wie |\ref| aber zwingend mit der Kurzform.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1513,8 +1588,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refN}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@N}
% Das gleiche wie |\ref| aber zwingend mit der numerischen Form.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1531,11 +1606,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refClause}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@Clause}
% Zitiert nur den Paragraphen eines Paragraphen, eines Absatzes oder eines
-% Satzes. Für mehr Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine
+% Satzes. Für mehr Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine
% Sternform. Ohne hyperref produziert diese nur Unsinn.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\refClause}{%
@@ -1581,11 +1656,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refClauseN}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@ClauseN}
% Zitiert nur den Paragraphen eines Paragraphen, eines Absatzes oder eines
-% Satzes. Für mehr Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine
+% Satzes. Für mehr Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine
% Sternform. Ohne hyperref produziert diese nur Unsinn.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\refClauseN}{%
@@ -1602,11 +1677,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refPar}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@Par}
-% Zitiert nur den Absatz eines Absatzes oder eines Satzes. Für mehr
-% Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine Sternform. Ohne
+% Zitiert nur den Absatz eines Absatzes oder eines Satzes. Für mehr
+% Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine Sternform. Ohne
% hyperref produziert diese nur Unsinn.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\refPar}{%
@@ -1658,8 +1733,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refParL}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@ParX}
% \begin{macrocode}
% Das Gleiche zwingend lang.
@@ -1678,8 +1753,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refParS}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Das Gleiche zwingend kurz.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\refParS}{%
@@ -1690,10 +1765,10 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\refParN}
% \begin{macro}{\ref@ParN}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@@ParN}
% Das Gleiche zwingend nummerisch.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1720,11 +1795,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refSentence}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@Sentence}
-% Zitiert nur den Satz eines Satzes. Für mehr
-% Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine Sternform. Ohne
+% Zitiert nur den Satz eines Satzes. Für mehr
+% Kompatibilität mit hyperref gibt es mit hyperref auch eine Sternform. Ohne
% hyperref produziert diese nur Unsinn.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\refSentence}{%
@@ -1776,8 +1851,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refSentenceL}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ref@SentenceX}
% \begin{macrocode}
% Das Gleiche zwingend lang.
@@ -1796,8 +1871,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refSentenceS}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Das Gleiche zwingend kurz.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\refSentenceS}{%
@@ -1807,45 +1882,61 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refSentenceN}
-% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Das Gleiche zwingend nummerisch.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\refSentenceN}{%
\kernel@ifstar {\ref@SentenceX2*}{\ref@SentenceX2{}}
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contract@sentence}
-% \changes{v0.7a}{2014/01/28}{auf \cs{textsuperscript} umgestellt}^^A
-% \changes{v0.7a}{2014/01/28}{\cs{nobreak}\cs{hskip}\cs{z@} eingefügt, um
-% die Trennung des ersten Worts nach der Satzmarkierung zu ermöglichen}^^A
-% Sätze nummerieren.
+% \changes{v0.7a}{2014/01/28}{auf \cs{textsuperscript} umgestellt}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.7a}{2014/01/28}{\cs{nobreak}\cs{hskip}\cs{z@} eingefügt, um
+% die Trennung des ersten Worts nach der Satzmarkierung zu ermöglichen}%^^A
+% Sätze nummerieren.
% \begin{Counter}{sentence}
% \begin{macro}{\thesentence}
% \begin{macro}{\theHsentence}
% \begin{macro}{\p@sentence}
-% Der Zähler wird für die Nummerierung der Sätze verwendet. Dabei ist wichtig,
-% dass beim Zitieren der Sätze als Elternobjekt der Absatz mit ausgegeben wird.
-% \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/09}{Anpassung an \LaTeX{} 2019-10-01}%^^A
+% Der Zähler wird für die Nummerierung der Sätze verwendet. Dabei ist wichtig,
+% dass beim Zitieren der Sätze als Elternobjekt der Absatz mit ausgegeben
+% wird. Die Methode, mit der ursprünglich dafür gesorgt wurde, dass
+% \cs{thesentence} als Argument von \cs{p@sentence} verwendet werden konnte,
+% funktioniert leider seit \LaTeX{} 2019-10-01 nicht mehr und führt seither zu
+% einer Fehlermeldung. Daher musste der Code an der Stelle an die
+% Neudefinition von \cs{refstepcounter} in \LaTeX{} 2019-10-01 angepasst
+% werden und verwendet ab dieser \LaTeX-Version \cs{labelformat}. Wie ich dazu
+% stehe, dass neuerdings \LaTeX{} kein Problem damit hat, existierende Pakete
+% zu beschädigen, lassen wir dabei besser unausgeprochen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcounter{sentence}[par]
\renewcommand*{\thesentence}{\arabic{sentence}}
\newcommand*{\theHsentence}{\theHpar-\arabic{sentence}}
-\renewcommand*{\p@sentence}{\expandafter\p@@sentence}
-\newcommand*{\p@@sentence}[1]{\p@par{{\par@cite{\thepar}}%
- \scrjura@separator{\nobreakspace}}{\sentence@cite{#1}}}
+\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{labelformat}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\p@sentence}{\expandafter\p@@sentence}
+ \newcommand*{\p@@sentence}[1]{\p@par{{\par@cite{\thepar}}%
+ \scrjura@separator{\nobreakspace}}{\sentence@cite{#1}}}%
+}{%
+ \labelformat{sentence}{\p@par{{\par@cite{\thepar}}%
+ \scrjura@separator{\nobreakspace}}{\sentence@cite{#1}}}%
+}
\newcommand*{\contract@sentence}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v0.9e}{2015/11/04}{erst den Absatz beginnen, dann die Nummer
-% setzen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/20}{neues Element \texttt{sentencenumber}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/20}{neue Formatierung \cs{sentencenumberformat}}^^A
+% setzen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/20}{neues Element \texttt{sentencenumber}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/20}{neue Formatierung \cs{sentencenumberformat}}%^^A
% Bei der Nummerierung ist wichtig, dass am Anfang des Absatzes die
-% Satznummer nicht erhöht wird, weil das der Absatz bereits erledigt. Damit
+% Satznummer nicht erhöht wird, weil das der Absatz bereits erledigt. Damit
% das funktioniert muss aber vor der Ausgabe erst einmal der Absatz begonnen
% werden. Befinden wir uns allerdings unmittelbar hinter einer
-% \texttt{minipage}, einer Liste oder einer \cs{parbox} tun wir so, als wären
+% \texttt{minipage}, einer Liste oder einer \cs{parbox} tun wir so, als wären
% wir nicht am Anfang des Absatzes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifvmode
@@ -1862,13 +1953,14 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\sentencenumberformat}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/20}{neu}^^A
-% Formatierung und Schrift können über \cs{sentencenumberformat} und Element
-% \texttt{sentencenumber} geändert werden. Voreinstellung für
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/20}{neu}%^^A
+% Formatierung und Schrift können über \cs{sentencenumberformat} und Element
+% \texttt{sentencenumber} geändert werden. Voreinstellung für
% \cs{sentenceformat} ist \cs{textsuperscript}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{sentencenumber}{}
\newcommand*{\sentencenumberformat}{\textsuperscript{\thesentence}}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1878,9 +1970,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parciteformat}
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{Argument verschoben}
-% Zitierstil für Absätze.
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{Argument verschoben}
+% Zitierstil für Absätze.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\par@cite}[1]{\parciteformat{#1}}
\newcommand*{\parciteformat}[1]{%
\ifcase \parcite@format
@@ -1898,8 +1991,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sentenceciteformat}
-% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{Argument verschoben}
-% Zitierstil für Sätze. In der Voreinstellung ist das |\@arabic|.
+% \changes{v0.5d}{2010/04/28}{Argument verschoben}
+% Zitierstil für Sätze. In der Voreinstellung ist das |\@arabic|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\sentence@cite}[1]{\sentenceciteformat{#1}}
\newcommand*{\sentenceciteformat}[1]{%
@@ -1931,6 +2024,7 @@
\newcommand*{\sentencelongformat}[1]{\sentencename~#1}
\newcommand*{\sentenceshortformat}[1]{\sentenceshortname~#1}
\newcommand*{\sentencenumericformat}[1]{\@arabic{\number #1\relax}.}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1944,14 +2038,15 @@
% \begin{macro}{\sentencename}
% \begin{macro}{\sentenceshortname}
% \begin{macro}{\scrjura@lang@error}
-% \changes{v0.7}{2013/09/19}{Verwendung von \cs{PackageError} an Stelle von
-% \cs{PackageErrorNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{Anpassung an Sprachänderung
+% \changes{v0.7}{2013/09/19}{Verwendung von \cs{PackageError} an Stelle von
+% \cs{PackageErrorNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{Anpassung an Sprachänderung
% (\texttt{usenglish} und \texttt{ukenglish} statt \texttt{USenglish} und
-% \texttt{UKenglish}) in \textsf{babel}~3.10}^^A
+% \texttt{UKenglish}) in \textsf{babel}~3.10}%^^A
% Der Name eines Absatzes und eines Satzes. Die englischen Namen wurden von
-% »m.eik« beigesteuert.
+% »m.eik« beigesteuert.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\parname}{Paragraph}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\providecaptionname{german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian}\parname{Absatz}%
@@ -1988,6 +2083,7 @@
}%
\textbf{??}%
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1996,18 +2092,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newmaxpar}
-% \changes{v0.6b}{2013/04/16}{\cs{\#1@Clauseformat} expandiert zu seinem
-% Argument}^^A
+% \changes{v0.6b}{2013/04/16}{\cs{\#1@Clauseformat} expandiert zu seinem
+% Argument}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\getmaxpar}
-% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{Argument 3 muss mit \cs{protected@edef}
-% expandiert werden}^^A
-% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{\cs{protected@edef} durch \cs{edef}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{\cs{\#2@Clauseformat} expandiert zu seinem
-% Argument}^^A
-% Noch zwei Hilfsmakros, um Zähler in der aux-Datei zwischenzuspeichern und
+% \changes{v0.6}{2011/09/30}{Argument 3 muss mit \cs{protected@edef}
+% expandiert werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{\cs{protected@edef} durch \cs{edef}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.5c}{2010/04/26}{\cs{\#2@Clauseformat} expandiert zu seinem
+% Argument}%^^A
+% Noch zwei Hilfsmakros, um Zähler in der aux-Datei zwischenzuspeichern und
% auch dann Werte zu holen, wenn sie nicht in der aux-Datei stehen.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\newmaxpar}[3]{%
\begingroup
\expandafter\let\csname #1@Clauseformat\endcsname\@firstofone
@@ -2029,11 +2126,11 @@
\@tempa
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/10}{Notfallcode in die \texttt{aux}-Datei}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9g}{2015/03/25}{in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur bei
-% \cs{if@filesw} schreiben}^^A
+% \changes{v0.7b}{2014/11/10}{Notfallcode in die \texttt{aux}-Datei}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9g}{2015/03/25}{in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur bei
+% \cs{if@filesw} schreiben}%^^A
% Da manche Anwender \texttt{scrjura} aus einem Dokument entfernen, ohne die
-% \texttt{aux}-Dateien zu löschen, sehen wir eine Notlösung vor, um
+% \texttt{aux}-Dateien zu löschen, sehen wir eine Notlösung vor, um
% Fehlermeldungen wegen nicht definiertem \cs{newmaxpar} zu vermeiden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
@@ -2043,6 +2140,7 @@
}%
\fi
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -2058,6 +2156,6 @@
% end of file `scrjura.dtx'
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx
index c347177f85..b1bf79fe8a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-basics.dtx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% \CheckSum{3893}
+% \CheckSum{4201}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-basics.dtx
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-basics.dtx 3063 2019-02-01 07:39:11Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-basics.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<prepare>%%% (run: prepare)
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\def\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2019-02-01 08:39:11 +0100 (Fri, 01 Feb 2019) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\def\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1638 $
\xdef\fileinfo{\filedate\space\filerevision\space}
@@ -116,7 +116,6 @@
\endbatchfile
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-basics.dtx}
@@ -136,7 +135,7 @@
%
% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
%
-% \changes{v1.0}{2002/07/06}{Beginn der ersten Version}^^A
+% \changes{v1.0}{2002/07/06}{Beginn der ersten Version}%^^A
% \changes{v3.12}{203/03/05}{Verwendung von \cs{@tempa}, \cs{@tempb},
% \cs{@tempc} eliminiert}
%
@@ -145,18 +144,18 @@
% Neue Versionen von \KOMAScript{} machen zunehmend Gebrauch vom
% \textsf{keyval}-Paket. Das \textsf{keyval}-Paket ist Bestandteil des
% \textsf{graphics}-Pakets und muss als solches auf allen
-% \TeX-Systemen mit \LaTeX{} enthalten sein. Es genügt jedoch in
+% \TeX-Systemen mit \LaTeX{} enthalten sein. Es genügt jedoch in
% einigen Punkten nicht den Anforderungen von \KOMAScript{}. Deshalb
% werden hier Erweiterungen vorgenommen, die von \KOMAScript-Klassen
-% und \KOMAScript-Paketen verwendet werden können.
+% und \KOMAScript-Paketen verwendet werden können.
%
-% Darüber hinaus werden immer mehr Teile von \KOMAScript{} von mehr als einem
+% Darüber hinaus werden immer mehr Teile von \KOMAScript{} von mehr als einem
% Paket oder von Paketen und Klassen verwendet. Diese grundlegenden Dinge
-% wurden daher in zwei Pakete, \textsf{scrbase} (für Dinge, die auch von
-% anderen Klassen und Paketen genutzt werden können) und \textsf{scrkbase}
-% (für Dinge, die \KOMAScript vorbehalten bleiben), ausgegliedert. Dadurch
-% werden die Pakete und Klassen selbst kleiner und die können trotzdem
-% unabhängig voneinander verwendet werden. Selbstverständlich kann man dieses
+% wurden daher in zwei Pakete, \textsf{scrbase} (für Dinge, die auch von
+% anderen Klassen und Paketen genutzt werden können) und \textsf{scrkbase}
+% (für Dinge, die \KOMAScript vorbehalten bleiben), ausgegliedert. Dadurch
+% werden die Pakete und Klassen selbst kleiner und die können trotzdem
+% unabhängig voneinander verwendet werden. Selbstverständlich kann man dieses
% Paket auch ohne den Rest von \KOMAScript{} zum Einsatz bringen.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -166,7 +165,7 @@
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Laden des Pakets}
-% Wer das Paket lädt, tut das allerdings in der Regel sogar bereits
+% Wer das Paket lädt, tut das allerdings in der Regel sogar bereits
% vor der Definition der Optionen mit:
% \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{scrkbase}[\KOMAScriptVersion]
@@ -211,7 +210,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
-% \subsection{Der abhängige Teil lädt den unabhängigen Teil}
+% \subsection{Der abhängige Teil lädt den unabhängigen Teil}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<koma>\RequirePackage{scrbase}[\KOMAScriptVersion]
@@ -229,30 +228,30 @@
% \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen durch
% andere Pakete}
% Einige Pakete wie \textsf{amsgen} definieren \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisungen so um,
-% dass sie nicht mehr korrekt funktionieren. Ich muss dann leider dafür
+% dass sie nicht mehr korrekt funktionieren. Ich muss dann leider dafür
% sorgen, dass \KOMAScript{} damit keine Probleme hat. Die Klassen sind dabei
-% in der günstigen Situation, dass sie ggf. einfach die vorhandene Definition
-% testen und übernehmen können. Die Pakete müssen hingegen dummer Weise selbst
-% dafür sorgen, dass es irgendwie funktioniert.
+% in der günstigen Situation, dass sie ggf. einfach die vorhandene Definition
+% testen und übernehmen können. Die Pakete müssen hingegen dummer Weise selbst
+% dafür sorgen, dass es irgendwie funktioniert.
%
% \begin{macro}{\kernel@ifstar}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{neu (intern)}
-% Ich hoffe ja, dass der \LaTeX-Kern zukünftig diese Anweisung definiert und
-% das dann auch funktioniert. Damit es aber auch mit älteren \LaTeX-Versionen
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{neu (intern)}
+% Ich hoffe ja, dass der \LaTeX-Kern zukünftig diese Anweisung definiert und
+% das dann auch funktioniert. Damit es aber auch mit älteren \LaTeX-Versionen
% geht, sorge ich hier vor.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<base>\providecommand*\kernel@ifstar[1]{\kernel@ifnextchar*{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \kernel@ifstar
+% \end{macro}%^^A \kernel@ifstar
%
% \subsection{Test von Anweisungen}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifundefinedorrelax}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97b}{2007/03/08}{vermurkste Logik korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{vermurkste Funktion korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{von \cs{scr@ifundefined} umbenannt}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/19}{Sonderbehandlung für nicht \eTeX entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97b}{2007/03/08}{vermurkste Logik korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{vermurkste Funktion korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{von \cs{scr@ifundefined} umbenannt}
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/19}{Sonderbehandlung für nicht \eTeX entfernt}%^^A
% Dieses Makro arbeitet wie \cs{@ifundefined}, definiert dabei aber
% ein undefiniertes Makro nicht als \cs{relax}. Es muss bereits hier definiert
% werden, weil es gleich verwendet wird.
@@ -271,15 +270,15 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifundefinedorrelax
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifundefinedorrelax
%
%
% \subsection{Erweiterung von Meldungen}
%
% \begin{macro}{\PackageErrorNoLine}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/19}{neu}^^A
-% Dieses Makro wird zwar bereits seit langem für einige wenige Fehlermeldungen
-% verwendet, existierte bisher aber nicht. Es wird für Fehlermeldungen
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/19}{neu}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro wird zwar bereits seit langem für einige wenige Fehlermeldungen
+% verwendet, existierte bisher aber nicht. Es wird für Fehlermeldungen
% verwendet, denen keine eindeutige Zeilennummer zugeordnet werden kann. In
% der Regel ist dies zu vermeiden und besser \cs{PackageError} zu verwenden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -292,34 +291,35 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Definition von KOMA-\textsf{keyval}-Schlüsseln (Basis)}
+% \subsection{Definition von KOMA-\textsf{keyval}-Schlüsseln (Basis)}
%
-% Üblicherweise verwendet \KOMAScript{} für alle
-% \textsf{keyval}-Schlüssel die gleiche Bereichskennung
-% "`\texttt{KOMA}"'. Dadurch ist es möglich, dass Pakete die Schlüssel
+% Üblicherweise verwendet \KOMAScript{} für alle
+% \textsf{keyval}-Schlüssel die gleiche Bereichskennung
+% "`\texttt{KOMA}"'. Dadurch ist es möglich, dass Pakete die Schlüssel
% der Klassen umdefinieren und dass jeder Teil von \KOMAScript{} die
-% Schlüssel jedes anderen Teils ausführen kann -- sobald sie definiert
+% Schlüssel jedes anderen Teils ausführen kann -- sobald sie definiert
% sind.
%
% \begin{macro}{\DefineFamily}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\DefineFamilyMember}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\DefineFamilyKey}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Setzen von \cs{FamilyKeyState}}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Setzen von \cs{FamilyKeyState}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@if@family}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@if@familymember}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/19}{das leere Mitglied existiert immer}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@define@family@key}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@define@family@key@nodefault}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{fehlendes \% ergänzt}^^A
-% Familie, Familienmitglied und \textsf{keyval}-Schlüssel für ein
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{fehlendes \% ergänzt}%^^A
+% Familie, Familienmitglied und \textsf{keyval}-Schlüssel für ein
% Familienmitglied definieren. Dabei wird als Familienmitglied per Default der
% (Datei-)Name des aktuellen Pakets bzw. der aktuellen Klasse verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -353,21 +353,25 @@
}
\newcommand*{\scr@if@familymember}[3]{%
\scr@if@family{#2}{#3}{%
- \edef\reserved@a{%
- \noexpand\in@{#2#1,}{\csname #2@key@familylist\endcsname}}%
- \reserved@a
- \ifin@
- \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else
- \PackageError{scrbase}{%
- unknown member `#1' at family `#2'%
- }{%
- You've tried to #3 for member `#1' of family `#2'.\MessageBreak
- This my be done only for previous defined family members.\MessageBreak
- You should call `\string\DefineFamilyMember[{#1}]{#2}' first.%
- }%
- \expandafter\@gobble
- \fi
+ \IfArgIsEmpty{#1}{%
+ \@firstofone
+ }{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\in@{#2#1,}{\csname #2@key@familylist\endcsname}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \PackageError{scrbase}{%
+ unknown member `#1' at family `#2'%
+ }{%
+ You've tried to #3 for member `#1' of family `#2'.\MessageBreak
+ This my be done only for previous defined family members.\MessageBreak
+ You should call `\string\DefineFamilyMember[{#1}]{#2}' first.%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \fi
+ }%
}%
}
\newcommand*{\DefineFamilyKey}[3][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -409,18 +413,18 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@define@family@key@nodefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@define@family@key
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@if@familymember
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@if@family
-% \end{macro}^^A \DefineFamilyKey
-% \end{macro}^^A \DefineFamilyMember
-% \end{macro}^^A \DefineFamily
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@define@family@key@nodefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@define@family@key
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@if@familymember
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@if@family
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DefineFamilyKey
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DefineFamilyMember
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DefineFamily
%
% \begin{macro}{\RelaxFamilyKey}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Undefiniert einen Schlüssel. Irgendwelche Hilfsmakros werden dabei nicht
-% angetastet. Stattdessen wird nur der Schlüssel selbst und ggf. ein
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Undefiniert einen Schlüssel. Irgendwelche Hilfsmakros werden dabei nicht
+% angetastet. Stattdessen wird nur der Schlüssel selbst und ggf. ein
% Defaultwert als \cs{relax} definiert, so dass er nicht mehr verwendet werden
% kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -438,25 +442,25 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyKeyState}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknown}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState} gibt den Status der Verarbeitung eines Schlüssels
-% an. In der Voreinstellung wird der Status beim Aufruf des Schlüssels auf
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState} gibt den Status der Verarbeitung eines Schlüssels
+% an. In der Voreinstellung wird der Status beim Aufruf des Schlüssels auf
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateUnknown} gesetzt, was anzeigt, dass der Zustand
-% unbekannnt ist, der Schlüssel aber möglicherweise verarbeitet
+% unbekannnt ist, der Schlüssel aber möglicherweise verarbeitet
% wurde. Daneben gibt es den Zustand \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}, der
-% anzeigt, dass der Schlüssel komplett verarbeitet wurde. Alternativ kann
+% anzeigt, dass der Schlüssel komplett verarbeitet wurde. Alternativ kann
% das Makro einen Text enthalten, der ggf. Teil einer Fehlermeldung, einer
-% Warnung oder einer Information über Probleme bei der Verarbeitung wird. Es
+% Warnung oder einer Information über Probleme bei der Verarbeitung wird. Es
% ist zu beachten, dass \cs{FamilyKeyState} nur unmittelbar nach der
-% Verarbeitung gültig ist.
+% Verarbeitung gültig ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyKeyState}{}
@@ -475,35 +479,35 @@
\let\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateUnknown
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyKeyStateNeedValue
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyKeyStateUnknown
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyKeyState
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyKeyStateNeedValue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyKeyStateUnknown
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyKeyState
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyOfKey}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyMemberOfKey}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Geben innerhalb der Verarbeitung eines Schlüssels dessen Familie bzw. das
-% zugehörige Familienmitglied an.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Geben innerhalb der Verarbeitung eines Schlüssels dessen Familie bzw. das
+% zugehörige Familienmitglied an.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyOfKey}{}
\newcommand*{\FamilyMemberOfKey}{}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyMemberOfKey
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyOfKey
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyMemberOfKey
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyOfKey
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@key}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{neues optionales Argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{rudimentäre Funktionalität zur Speicherung von
-% Optionen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{neues optionales Argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{rudimentäre Funktionalität zur Speicherung von
+% Optionen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@key@familylist}
-% \textsf{keyval}-Schlüssel für \KOMAScript{} werden mit \cs{KOMAkey}
+% \textsf{keyval}-Schlüssel für \KOMAScript{} werden mit \cs{KOMAkey}
% definiert, damit auch die Familie korrekt gesetzt und ggf. der Liste der
-% Familien (\cs{KOMA@key@familylist}) hinzugefügt wird.
+% Familien (\cs{KOMA@key@familylist}) hinzugefügt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@key}[1][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -517,9 +521,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@add}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
% Dieses Makro speichert ein \texttt{key=value}-Paar in der internen Liste.
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@add}[3]{%
@@ -534,10 +538,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@xadd}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
% Dieses Makro speichert ein zuvor expandiertes \texttt{key=value}-Paar in der
% internen Liste.
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@xadd}[3]{%
@@ -554,10 +558,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@remove}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
% Dieses Makro entfernt ein ganz bestimmtes \texttt{key=value}-Paar aus der
% internen Liste.
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@remove}[3]{%
@@ -586,10 +590,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@removekey}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
% Dieses Makro entfernt alle \texttt{key=value}-Paar mit einem gegebenen
% \texttt{key} aus der internen Liste.
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@removekey}[2]{%
@@ -620,12 +624,12 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@replacevalue}
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
-% Diese Makros dienen dazu, den Wert Schlüssels in der internen Liste
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
+% Diese Makros dienen dazu, den Wert Schlüssels in der internen Liste
% auszutauschen. Das erste (optionale) Argument ist das Mitglied, das zweite
-% ist der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der neue Wert. Es setzt den Status
+% ist der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der neue Wert. Es setzt den Status
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} voraus. Anderenfalls tut es nichts!
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@replacevalue}[3]{%
@@ -654,12 +658,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@replacebool}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro dient dazu, den Wert eines if-Schlüssels in der internen Liste
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro dient dazu, den Wert eines if-Schlüssels in der internen Liste
% auszutauschen. Das erste (optionale) Argument ist das Mitglied, das zweite
-% ist der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der Name des Schalters. Es setzt den
+% ist der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der Name des Schalters. Es setzt den
% Status \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} voraus. Anderenfalls tut es nichts!
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@replacebool}[3]{%
@@ -683,11 +687,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@defall}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
% Dieses Makro liefert eine \texttt{key=value}-Liste aller gespeicherten Paare.
% Das erste Argument ist die zu definierende Anweisung, das zweite ist das
% Mitglied.
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@defall}[2]{%
@@ -716,13 +720,13 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@kav@defone}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro liefert alle aktuellen Werte eine Schlüssels aus der
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro liefert alle aktuellen Werte eine Schlüssels aus der
% \texttt{key=value}-Liste aller gespeicherten Paare. Falls es mehr als einen
-% Wert gibt, so werden diese \cs{KOMAoption}-tauglich verknüpft. Das erste
+% Wert gibt, so werden diese \cs{KOMAoption}-tauglich verknüpft. Das erste
% Argument ist die zu definierende Anweisung, das zweite ist das Mitglied
-% und das dritte der Schlüssel.
-% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
+% und das dritte der Schlüssel.
+% Es ist ausschließlich für den \KOMAScript-internen Gebrauch bestimmt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@kav@defone}[3]{%
@@ -753,8 +757,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@internal@error}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}^^A
-% Einfach nur eine Meldung über einen internen Fehler mit der Bitte um einen
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/24}{neu (\KOMAScript intern)}%^^A
+% Einfach nur eine Meldung über einen internen Fehler mit der Bitte um einen
% entsprechenden Bug-Report.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
@@ -778,25 +782,25 @@
%
% Ab Version 2.97c sollen sowohl globale KOMA-Optionen als auch die
% KOMA-Optionen der jeweiligen Datei als auch die normalen Optionen in der
-% Reihenfolge ausgeführt werden, in der sie angegeben wurden -- zuerst die
+% Reihenfolge ausgeführt werden, in der sie angegeben wurden -- zuerst die
% globalen Optionen, dann die lokalen. Dabei werden nur die Optionen
-% verwendet, die auch für das jeweilige Paket bzw. die jeweilige Klasse
+% verwendet, die auch für das jeweilige Paket bzw. die jeweilige Klasse
% definiert wurden.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@globaloptionslist}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{Klassenoptionen durchsuchen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/06}{Entscheidung später treffen}^^A
-% Die Liste der globalen Optionen wird teilweise benötigt. Weil
-% \textsl{xkeyval} dämlicherweise glaubt, es müsse alle Optionen mit
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{Klassenoptionen durchsuchen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/06}{Entscheidung später treffen}%^^A
+% Die Liste der globalen Optionen wird teilweise benötigt. Weil
+% \textsl{xkeyval} dämlicherweise glaubt, es müsse alle Optionen mit
% Gleichheitszeichen aus der Liste der Klassenoptionen entfernen
% (seltsamerweise aber nicht die (x)keyval-Optionen, die ohne Wert aufgerufen
% werden, weil ihr Defaultwert verwendet werden soll), wird hier ein eigenes
% Makro definiert. Bis \KOMAScript{} 3.19a wurde auch genau hier die Zuweisung
-% durchgeführt. Wenn aber \textsf{scrbase} noch vor \cs{documentclass} geladen
-% wird, dann ist \cs{@classoptionslist} natürlich noch nicht gültig. Deshalb
+% durchgeführt. Wenn aber \textsf{scrbase} noch vor \cs{documentclass} geladen
+% wird, dann ist \cs{@classoptionslist} natürlich noch nicht gültig. Deshalb
% wird die Zuweisung, seit \KOMAScript{} 3.20 in \cs{FamilyProcessOptions}
-% durchgeführt.
+% durchgeführt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\@globaloptionslist}{}
@@ -805,30 +809,30 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyProcessOptions}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%
-% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/06/11}{Klassen melden falsche Werte nicht
-% selbst als Fehler, sondern informieren nur darüber}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Fehlerbehandlung}^^A
-% Es ist zu beachten, dass falsche Werte für Optionen grundsätzlich nicht in
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%
+% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/06/11}{Klassen melden falsche Werte nicht
+% selbst als Fehler, sondern informieren nur darüber}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Fehlerbehandlung}%^^A
+% Es ist zu beachten, dass falsche Werte für Optionen grundsätzlich nicht in
% der Verarbeitung der Optionen per Info, Warnung oder Fehler gemeldet werden
-% sollten, sondern über setzen von \cs{FamilyKeyState}. Erst, wenn auch andere
-% Familienmitglieder den Wert nicht verarbeiten können, ergibt sich daraus
+% sollten, sondern über setzen von \cs{FamilyKeyState}. Erst, wenn auch andere
+% Familienmitglieder den Wert nicht verarbeiten können, ergibt sich daraus
% ggf. eine Meldung, die dann von der Verarbeitung hier erzeugt wird.
% Es wird darauf hingewiesen, dass diese Anweisung nicht reentrant ist. Das
-% bedeutet, dass man es innerhalb der eigenen Ausführung nicht erneut aufrufen
+% bedeutet, dass man es innerhalb der eigenen Ausführung nicht erneut aufrufen
% darf.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@removeunused}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/12}{neu (intern)}%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@removeunused
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/12}{neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@removeunused
% \begin{macro}{\scr@optiontest}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{neu (intern)}%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@pti@ntest}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{neu (intern)}%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@pti@ntest
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@optiontest
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@pti@ntest
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@optiontest
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyProcessOptions}[2][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -844,10 +848,10 @@
}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{new hooks before processing the options}^^A
-% Ab Version~3.18 werden hier außerdem zwei Haken ausgeführt. Der erste gilt
-% dabei für alle Klassen und Pakete einer Familie und löscht sich nicht
-% selbst. Der zweite dagegen gilt nur ein einziges Mal für dieses eine
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{new hooks before processing the options}%^^A
+% Ab Version~3.18 werden hier außerdem zwei Haken ausgeführt. Der erste gilt
+% dabei für alle Klassen und Pakete einer Familie und löscht sich nicht
+% selbst. Der zweite dagegen gilt nur ein einziges Mal für dieses eine
% Mitglied.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@before@process@options@#2@hook}{}{%
@@ -859,14 +863,14 @@
\relax
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Korrektur: Haken danach verwendet die Familie
-% statt des Mitglieds}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Korrektur: Haken danach verwendet die Familie
+% statt des Mitglieds}%^^A
% Jetzt \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} samt Haken initialisieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@after@options@#2@hook}{%
\@namedef{scr@after@options@#2@hook}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die erste Aktion im Haken wird sein, den Haken selbst zu löschen.
+% Die erste Aktion im Haken wird sein, den Haken selbst zu löschen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{scr@after@options@#2@hook}{}%
}%
@@ -883,34 +887,34 @@
}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{neuer Haken für \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{neuer Haken für \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*}}%^^A
% Seit Version 3.23 wird hier auch der neuen Haken vor
-% \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*} initialisiert und ausgeführt. Erkannt wird die
+% \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*} initialisiert und ausgeführt. Erkannt wird die
% oberste Ebene hier einfach an der Definition von \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions},
-% weil das schneller geht als die Erkennung über die Definition des Hakens
+% weil das schneller geht als die Erkennung über die Definition des Hakens
% selbst (wie sie in \cs{FamilyOptions} verwendet werden muss).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\AtEndOfFamilyOptions\scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions@immediate
\@namedef{scr@after@options@#2@hook@topmost}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Auch dieser Haken wird so definiert, dass er sich bei seiner Ausführung als
-% erstes selbst löscht. Das ist auch für rekursive Aufrufe wichtig, um tiefere
-% Ebenen eindeutig von der höchsten Ebene unterscheiden zu können.
+% Auch dieser Haken wird so definiert, dass er sich bei seiner Ausführung als
+% erstes selbst löscht. Das ist auch für rekursive Aufrufe wichtig, um tiefere
+% Ebenen eindeutig von der höchsten Ebene unterscheiden zu können.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{scr@after@options@#2@hook@topmost}{}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Der Top-Haken wird außerdem zusammen mit dem Zurücksetzen der Definition von
+% Der Top-Haken wird außerdem zusammen mit dem Zurücksetzen der Definition von
% \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} in den Haken der (obersten) Ebene
-% eingefügt.
+% eingefügt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\l@addto@macro\csname scr@after@options@#2@hook\endcsname{%
\let\AtEndOfFamilyOptions\scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions@immediate
\@nameuse{scr@after@options@#2@hook@topmost}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Natürlich darf nicht vergessen werden, den Befehl für das Befüllen der
-% beiden Haken nun von der direkten Ausführung eben auf das Befüllen der Haken
+% Natürlich darf nicht vergessen werden, den Befehl für das Befüllen der
+% beiden Haken nun von der direkten Ausführung eben auf das Befüllen der Haken
% umzustellen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\AtEndOfFamilyOptions\scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions
@@ -923,12 +927,12 @@
\ifx\@currext\@clsextension\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Bei Klassen ist die aktuelle Optionenliste gleichzeitig die globale
-% Optionenliste. Daher dürften Klassen nicht auch noch die globale Optionliste
+% Optionenliste. Daher dürften Klassen nicht auch noch die globale Optionliste
% verarbeiten. Paket verarbeiten jedoch auch die globale Optionenliste, geben
% dazu jedoch keine Fehler oder Warnungen aus.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{Behandlung von undefiniertem
-% \cs{@globaloptionslist}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/06}{\cs{@globaloptionslist} immer neu zuweisen}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{Behandlung von undefiniertem
+% \cs{@globaloptionslist}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/06}{\cs{@globaloptionslist} immer neu zuweisen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@globaloptionslist\@classoptionslist
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{XKV@classoptionslist}{%
@@ -957,10 +961,10 @@
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Wenn die Option keine \LaTeX-Option ist, kann sie noch immer eine
-% \textsf{keyval}-Option sein. In diesem Fall wird geprüft, ob das
+% \textsf{keyval}-Option sein. In diesem Fall wird geprüft, ob das
% Mitglied (\#1) eine Option in der Familie (\#2) hat. Wenn das der Fall ist,
-% wird die Option unmittelbar ausgeführt und zwar einmal ohne Mitglied (also
-% Optionen, die global der Familie gehören) und dann mit Mitglied. Im Fall
+% wird die Option unmittelbar ausgeführt und zwar einmal ohne Mitglied (also
+% Optionen, die global der Familie gehören) und dann mit Mitglied. Im Fall
% einer unbekannnten Option oder eines unbekannten Wertes, geschieht hier gar
% nichts.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -974,22 +978,22 @@
}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Sowohl für Klassen als auch für Pakete werden nun die aktuellen Optionen
+% Sowohl für Klassen als auch für Pakete werden nun die aktuellen Optionen
% abgearbeitet. In diesem Fall ist zu beachten, dass nicht definierte Optionen
-% oder unbekannte Werte für Optionen unmittelbar zu einem Fehler führen, wenn
+% oder unbekannte Werte für Optionen unmittelbar zu einem Fehler führen, wenn
% es sich um ein Paket handelt. Bei Klassen landet die Option hingegen in der
% Liste der nicht benutzten globalen Optionen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\CurrentOption:=\@curroptions\do{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/22}{Optionen werden für Tests etc. nicht mehr
-% vollständig expandiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/22}{\cs{@use@ption} wird für key-value-Optionen
-% nicht mehr aufgerufen}^^A
-% Ab \KOMAScript~3.26 wird für den Test, ob eine Option als normale Option
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/22}{Optionen werden für Tests etc. nicht mehr
+% vollständig expandiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/22}{\cs{@use@ption} wird für key-value-Optionen
+% nicht mehr aufgerufen}%^^A
+% Ab \KOMAScript~3.26 wird für den Test, ob eine Option als normale Option
% existiert, die Option nicht mehr komplett expandiert. Da die wirklich
% notwendige Expansion bereits erfolgt ist, verhindert das Fehler wegen
-% angeblich fehlendem \cs{endcsname}. Gleichzeitig wird für key-value-Optionen
+% angeblich fehlendem \cs{endcsname}. Gleichzeitig wird für key-value-Optionen
% \cs{@use@ption} nicht mehr aufgerufen, da das darin enthaltene
% |\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname| dasselbe Problem hat. Stattdessen wird
% die Option nur noch aus der Liste der nicht verwendeten Optionen entfernt.
@@ -1002,8 +1006,8 @@
}\@use@ption
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Fast zum Schluss wird wir im \LaTeX-Kern der Optionencode für alle
-% deklarierten \LaTeX-Optionen gelöscht und dafür gesorgt, dass nach dem Paket
+% Fast zum Schluss wird wir im \LaTeX-Kern der Optionencode für alle
+% deklarierten \LaTeX-Optionen gelöscht und dafür gesorgt, dass nach dem Paket
% keine unverarbeiteten Optionen mehr vorhanden sind.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\CurrentOption:=\@declaredoptions\do{%
@@ -1012,20 +1016,20 @@
\let\@fileswith@pti@ns\@@fileswith@pti@ns
\AtEndOfPackage{\let\@unprocessedoptions\relax}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt muss noch der Hook ausgeführt und wieder gelöscht werden.
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Korrektur: Haken danach verwendet die Familie
-% statt des Mitglieds}^^A
+% Jetzt muss noch der Hook ausgeführt und wieder gelöscht werden.
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Korrektur: Haken danach verwendet die Familie
+% statt des Mitglieds}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@nameuse{scr@after@options@#2@hook}%
}
\@onlypreamble\FamilyProcessOptions
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{neu}
-% Über diese Anweisung kann man Code unmittelbar vor Ausführung von
-% \cs{FamilyProcessOptions} ausgeführt werden. Dabei muss zur Verwendung
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{neu}
+% Über diese Anweisung kann man Code unmittelbar vor Ausführung von
+% \cs{FamilyProcessOptions} ausgeführt werden. Dabei muss zur Verwendung
% des Hakens weder das Mitglied noch die Familie existieren. Man kann dies
-% also beispielsweise auch verwenden, um unmittelbar vor der Ausführung der
+% also beispielsweise auch verwenden, um unmittelbar vor der Ausführung der
% Optionen eines Pakets oder einer Klasse einzugreifen noch bevor das Paket
% oder die Klasse geladen ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1038,23 +1042,23 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \BeforeFamilyProcessOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \BeforeFamilyProcessOptions
% \begin{macro}{\AtEndOfFamilyOptions}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Sternvariante}^^A
-% Mit dieser Option kann innerhalb der Ausführung einer Option Material auf
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Sternvariante}%^^A
+% Mit dieser Option kann innerhalb der Ausführung einer Option Material auf
% das Ende der aktuellen \cs{FamilyProcessOptions}, \cs{FamilyExecuteOptions},
-% \cs{FamilyOptions} oder \cs{FamilyOption} verzögert werden. Als einziges
-% Argument wird der zu verzögernde Code erwartet, der an \cs{l@addto@macro}
-% delegiert wird. Die Normalvariante verzögert bei verschachtelten
+% \cs{FamilyOptions} oder \cs{FamilyOption} verzögert werden. Als einziges
+% Argument wird der zu verzögernde Code erwartet, der an \cs{l@addto@macro}
+% delegiert wird. Die Normalvariante verzögert bei verschachtelten
% \cs{FamilyOptions} bis zum Ende der aktuellen Schachtet, die Sternvariante
-% bis zum Ende der äußeren Schachtel.
+% bis zum Ende der äußeren Schachtel.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@AtEndOfFamilyOptions}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions@immediate}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions}{%
\kernel@ifstar {\scr@@AtEndOfFamilyOptions{@topmost}}%
@@ -1070,32 +1074,32 @@
\newcommand*{\AtEndOfFamilyOptions}{}
\let\AtEndOfFamilyOptions\scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions@immediate
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions@immediate
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@AtEndOfFamilyOptions
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions
-% \end{macro}^^A \AtEndOfFamilyOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions@immediate
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@AtEndOfFamilyOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@AtEndOfFamilyOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AtEndOfFamilyOptions
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifprocess@curroption}
% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/04}{\cs{CurrentOption} innerhalb von \cs{setkeys}
-% in Klammern gesetzt}^^A
-% Dieses Makro führt eine aktuelle \textsf{keyval}-Option für das angegebene
+% in Klammern gesetzt}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro führt eine aktuelle \textsf{keyval}-Option für das angegebene
% Mitglied (\#1) der angegebenen Familie (\#2) aus. Falls die Option keinen
-% entsprechenden Wert hat, wird das vierte Argument ausgeführt, anderenfalls
+% entsprechenden Wert hat, wird das vierte Argument ausgeführt, anderenfalls
% nicht. Es ist zu beachten, dass vor der Option des Mitglieds die
-% Familien-Option auszuführen ist. Ggf. benötigt das Mitglied dann keine
+% Familien-Option auszuführen ist. Ggf. benötigt das Mitglied dann keine
% entsprechende Option.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@ifprocess@curroption[2]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/22}{\cs{scr@sp@def} statt \cs{def} für das Abtrennen
-% des Schlüssels}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/22}{\cs{scr@sp@def} statt \cs{def} für das Abtrennen
+% des Schlüssels}%^^A
% Da am 21. Oktober 2018 eine Diskussion begann, die darauf hindeutet, dass
-% das Entfernen der Leerzeichen in der Optionenliste sich jederzeit ändern
-% könnte, wird hier (und an einer weiteren Stelle) nun \cs{scr@sp@def}
-% verwendet, um den Schlüssel zu erhalten. Allerdings genügt dies nicht, falls
-% irgendwann tatsächlich gar keine Leerzeichen mehr entfernt werden. Dann
-% müsste nämlich der komplette Parser umgeschrieben werden. Ich bin alles
+% das Entfernen der Leerzeichen in der Optionenliste sich jederzeit ändern
+% könnte, wird hier (und an einer weiteren Stelle) nun \cs{scr@sp@def}
+% verwendet, um den Schlüssel zu erhalten. Allerdings genügt dies nicht, falls
+% irgendwann tatsächlich gar keine Leerzeichen mehr entfernt werden. Dann
+% müsste nämlich der komplette Parser umgeschrieben werden. Ich bin alles
% andere als begeistert von der Tatsache, dass hier im \LaTeX-Kern Jahrzehnte
-% altes Verhalten ohne Rücksicht auf Verluste zur Disposition gestellt wird.
+% altes Verhalten ohne Rücksicht auf Verluste zur Disposition gestellt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\reserved@a##1=##2\@nil{\scr@sp@def\reserved@a{##1}}%
\expandafter\reserved@a\CurrentOption=\@nil
@@ -1165,23 +1169,23 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@sp@def}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{von \texttt{tocbasic.dtx} nach
-% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@sp@d}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{von \texttt{tocbasic.dtx} nach
-% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}^^A
+% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@sp@b}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{von \texttt{tocbasic.dtx} nach
-% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@sp@c}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{von \texttt{tocbasic.dtx} nach
-% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben und umbenannt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% Die Hilfsanweisung \cs{scr@sp@def} definiert eine Anweisung (erstes
% Argument) mit einer Tokenliste (zweites Argument) und entfernt dabei
-% führende und abschließende Leerzeichen. Die Anweisung stammt ursprünglich
-% aus \textsf{keyval}. Der Rest sind Hilfsanweisungen für die Implementierung
+% führende und abschließende Leerzeichen. Die Anweisung stammt ursprünglich
+% aus \textsf{keyval}. Der Rest sind Hilfsanweisungen für die Implementierung
% der Hilfsanweisung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@tempa#1{%
@@ -1199,24 +1203,24 @@
\long\def\scr@sp@c#1\@nil#2\relax#3{\@temptokena{#1}\edef#3{\the\@temptokena}}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sp@c
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sp@b
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sp@d
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sp@def
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@process@curroption
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyProcessOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@sp@c
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@sp@b
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@sp@d
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@sp@def
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@process@curroption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyProcessOptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAProcessOptions}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{neu}%
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{kein optionales Argument mehr}%
-% Diese Anweisung führt alle Optionen, sowohl normal deklarierte als auch
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{neu}%
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{kein optionales Argument mehr}%
+% Diese Anweisung führt alle Optionen, sowohl normal deklarierte als auch
% keyval-Optionen eines Pakets bzw. einer Klasse in der Reihenfolge, in der
% sie verwendet wurden aus -- zuerst globale Optionen, dann lokale
% Optionen. Das entspricht der Verwendung von \cs{ProcessOptions*} mit dem
% Unterschied, dass eben auch die keyval-Optionen abgearbeitet
% werden. keyval-Optionen, die keiner einzelnen Klasse und keinem einzelnen
% Paket zugeordnet werden, werden dabei vor gleichnamigen eigenen
-% keyval-Optionen ausgeführt.
+% keyval-Optionen ausgeführt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMAProcessOptions}{\FamilyProcessOptions{KOMA}}
@@ -1231,12 +1235,12 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{option}{internalonly}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{geht auch ohne Argument}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{geht auch ohne Argument}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\dont@let@as@internal@defined}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Anweisungen, die mit einem internen und einem Anwendername vorhanden sind,
-% können vor dem Anwender optional verborgen werden. Wird kein Argument
+% können vor dem Anwender optional verborgen werden. Wird kein Argument
% angegeben, so werden alle Anweisungen verborgen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -1261,8 +1265,8 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{Optionen werden abgearbeitet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{Optionen werden mit \cs{KOMAProcessOptions}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{Optionen werden abgearbeitet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/18}{Optionen werden mit \cs{KOMAProcessOptions}%^^A
% abgearbeitet}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<koma>\KOMAProcessOptions\relax
@@ -1274,11 +1278,11 @@
%<*body>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Ein wenig zusätzliche Mathematik für \eTeX}
+% \subsection{Ein wenig zusätzliche Mathematik für \eTeX}
%
% \begin{macro}{\XdivY}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Neu}^^A
-% Ergebnis ist erster Argument durch zweites abgerundet auf die nächst
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Neu}%^^A
+% Ergebnis ist erster Argument durch zweites abgerundet auf die nächst
% kleinere ganze Zahl.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -1290,7 +1294,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\XmodY}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Neu}%^^A
% Ergebnis ist erstes Argument modulo zweites Argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -1301,17 +1305,44 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsection{Häufig benötigte Befehle}
+% \subsection{Häufig benötigte Befehle}
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@ForEachTrimmedListElement}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/16}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% Executes \cs{\#2\{\meta{element}\}} for each \meta{element} of the comma
+% separated list \#1. Spaces before for after \meta{element} are eliminated
+% and empty elements are ignored.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*base>
+\newcommand{\scr@ForEachTrimmedListElement}[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\reserved@a{\endgroup}%
+ \@for \reserved@b:=#1 \do {%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@b
+ \ifx\reserved@b\@empty\else
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\reserved@a#2}%
+ {\unexpanded\expandafter{\reserved@b}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \reserved@a
+}
+%</base>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ForEachTrimmedListElement
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@trim@spaces}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{von \texttt{scrkernel-language.dtx} nach
-% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben}^^A
-% Diese Hilfsanweisung entfernt führende und abschließende
+% \texttt{scrkernel-basics.dtx} verschoben}%^^A
+% Diese Hilfsanweisung entfernt führende und abschließende
% Leerzeichen. Argument ist die Anweisung, deren Inhalt von den Leerzeichen
-% befreit werden soll. Gedacht ist das ganze für die Listenverarbeitung mit
-% Hilfe von \cs{@for}. Als Argument wird ein Makro übergeben, in dessen
-% Definition führende und abschließende space-Tokens entfernt werden sollen.
+% befreit werden soll. Gedacht ist das ganze für die Listenverarbeitung mit
+% Hilfe von \cs{@for}. Als Argument wird ein Makro übergeben, in dessen
+% Definition führende und abschließende space-Tokens entfernt werden sollen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand\scr@trim@spaces[1]{%
@@ -1319,15 +1350,15 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@trim@space
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@trim@space
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@atdocument}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{neuer Schalter}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@atdocumenttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@atdocumentfalse}
% Dieser Schalter wird bei \cs{begin}\texttt{\{document\}} wahr. Er
-% wird von \KOMAScript{} für Befehle verwendet, die sich
-% unterschiedlich verhalten, je nachdem, ob sie in der Präambel oder
+% wird von \KOMAScript{} für Befehle verwendet, die sich
+% unterschiedlich verhalten, je nachdem, ob sie in der Präambel oder
% danach aufgerufen werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -1342,21 +1373,21 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\let@as@internal@defined}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{Warnung bei Umdefinierung}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{Herausreichen von internen Makros als
-% Benutzermakros kann verhindert werden}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{Herausreichen von internen Makros kann
-% generell verhindert werden}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2010/10/26}{\cs{ignorespaces} beim \cs{document}-Patch
-% ergänzt}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/13}{potentielle Leerzeichen durch Zeilenumbruch
-% beseitigt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{Warnung bei Umdefinierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/11/26}{Herausreichen von internen Makros als
+% Benutzermakros kann verhindert werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{Herausreichen von internen Makros kann
+% generell verhindert werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2010/10/26}{\cs{ignorespaces} beim \cs{document}-Patch
+% ergänzt}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/13}{potentielle Leerzeichen durch Zeilenumbruch
+% beseitigt}%^^A
% Dieses Makro wird intern verwendet, um dokumentierte Makros mit der
% Definition von internen Makros zu versehen, falls sie nicht bereits
% definiert oder als nicht zu definieren markiert sind. Der Name des
-% dokumentierten Makros wird als Parameter übergeben. Dies wird gleich
-% benötigt.
+% dokumentierten Makros wird als Parameter übergeben. Dies wird gleich
+% benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\let@as@internal@defined}[1]{%
@@ -1422,9 +1453,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifundefinedorrelax}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{über interne Anweisung definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{umbenannt von \cs{ifundefined}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{über interne Anweisung definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{umbenannt von \cs{ifundefined}}
% Dieses Makro arbeitet wie \cs{@ifundefined}, definiert dabei aber
% ein undefiniertes Makro nicht als \cs{relax}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1435,11 +1466,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnotundefined}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{nutzt \eTeX{} wenn möglich}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/19}{\eTeX{} ist zwingend}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/12}{nutzt \eTeX{} wenn möglich}
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/19}{\eTeX{} ist zwingend}
% Dieses Makro arbeitet genau umgekehrt zu \cs{ifundefined}. Manchmal
-% ist es ganz nützlich, auch das zu haben. Dieses Makro heißt nicht
+% ist es ganz nützlich, auch das zu haben. Dieses Makro heißt nicht
% \cs{ifdefined}, weil \eTeX\ bereits ein solches Primitiv bietet.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -1455,10 +1486,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstr}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{if- und then-Teil werden nicht gefressen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/29}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{protected@edef} ersetzt}
-% Dieses Makro vergleicht zwei Tokenfolgen. Eigentlich müsste es also
-% eher \cs{ifequal} oder ähnlich heißen.
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{if- und then-Teil werden nicht gefressen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/29}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{protected@edef} ersetzt}
+% Dieses Makro vergleicht zwei Tokenfolgen. Eigentlich müsste es also
+% eher \cs{ifequal} oder ähnlich heißen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand\ifstr[2]{%
@@ -1474,9 +1505,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstrstart}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
% Falls die Expansion des ersten Arguments mit der Expansion des zweiten
-% Arguments beginnt, wird das dritte Argument ausgeführt, sonst das vierte.
+% Arguments beginnt, wird das dritte Argument ausgeführt, sonst das vierte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifstrstart}[2]{%
@@ -1487,8 +1518,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@ifstrstart}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmakro, damit die Argumente vollständig expandiert werden können.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmakro, damit die Argumente vollständig expandiert werden können.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@ifstrstart}[2]{%
\def\reserved@a ##1#2##2\@nil{%
@@ -1502,16 +1533,20 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ifstrstart
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifstrstart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ifstrstart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifstrstart
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfArgIsEmpty}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/29}{neu}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument tatsächlich leer ist, wird das zweite Argument
-% ausgeführt sonst das dritte.
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/29}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/11}{\cs{long}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/19}{wird bereits vor den Optionen benötigt}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument tatsächlich leer ist, wird das zweite Argument
+% ausgeführt sonst das dritte.
+%</body>
+%<*prepare>
%<*base>
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\IfArgIsEmpty}[1]{%
+\newcommand{\IfArgIsEmpty}[1]{%
\if\relax\detokenize{#1}\relax
\expandafter\@firstoftwo
\else
@@ -1520,14 +1555,16 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
%</base>
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfArgIsEmpty
+%</prepare>
+%<*body>
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfArgIsEmpty
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifislengthprimitive}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem Primitiv
-% expandiert, das als Länge verwendet werden kann, wird das erste Argument
-% ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem Primitiv
+% expandiert, das als Länge verwendet werden kann, wird das erste Argument
+% ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifislengthprimitive}[1]{%
@@ -1535,8 +1572,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifislengthprimitive}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf diverse Primitive prüft.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf diverse Primitive prüft.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifislengthprimitive}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1560,16 +1597,16 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifislengthprimitive
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifislengthprimitive
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifislengthprimitive
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifislengthprimitive
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisdimen}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem
% \cs{dimen}-Register (und zu nichts weiterem!) expandiert, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifisdimen}[1]{%
@@ -1577,8 +1614,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisdimen}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf ein \cs{dimen}-Register prüft
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf ein \cs{dimen}-Register prüft
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisdimen}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1595,12 +1632,12 @@
#1%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisdimen
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisdimen
% \begin{macro}{\scr@TestDimenAssignTillNil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
-% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
% zugewiesen. Wird dabei das Argument komplett aufgebraucht, so wird das
-% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
+% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
% Argument wird in jedem Fall komplett aufgebraucht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@TestDimenAssignTillNil{}
@@ -1611,12 +1648,12 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@IfAfterEndgroupArgIsRelaxTillNnil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@IfArgIsRelaxAfterRelaxTillNnil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
% Die Hilfsmakros lesen ein durch \cs{@nnil} begrenztes Argument. Falls dieses
% Argument nur aus einer Folge von \cs{relax} besteht, wird das erste Argument
-% nach \cs{@nnil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% nach \cs{@nnil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@AfterEndGroupIfArgIsRelaxTillNnil{}
\def\scr@AfterEndGroupIfArgIsRelaxTillNnil#1\@nnil{%
@@ -1636,38 +1673,38 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxAfterRelaxTillNnil
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxTillNnil
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@TestSkipAssignTillNil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxAfterRelaxTillNnil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxTillNnil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@TestSkipAssignTillNil
% \begin{macro}{\scr@secondoftwoAfterNil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
-% Das Hilfsmakro liest ein durch \cs{@nil} begrenztes Argument und führt dann
-% das zweite Argument nach \cs{@nil} aus. Dabei wird auch Sorge dafür getrage,
-% dass das Argument eventuell leer sein könnte, was normalerweise dazu führen
-% würde, dass \cs{@nil} zum Argument selbst wird.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% Das Hilfsmakro liest ein durch \cs{@nil} begrenztes Argument und führt dann
+% das zweite Argument nach \cs{@nil} aus. Dabei wird auch Sorge dafür getrage,
+% dass das Argument eventuell leer sein könnte, was normalerweise dazu führen
+% würde, dass \cs{@nil} zum Argument selbst wird.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@secondoftwoAfterNil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
-% Zu diesem Zweck wird ein zweites Hilfsmakro benötigt.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% Zu diesem Zweck wird ein zweites Hilfsmakro benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@secondoftwoAfterNil}{\scr@@secondoftwoAfterNil\@empty}
\newcommand*{\scr@@secondoftwoAfterNil}{}
\def\scr@@secondoftwoAfterNil#1\@nil{\@secondoftwo}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@secondoftwoAfterNil
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@secondoftwoAfterNil
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisdimen
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@secondoftwoAfterNil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@secondoftwoAfterNil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisdimen
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisskip}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{\cs{baselineskip} und \cs{parskip} werden als
-% skips akzeptiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{\cs{baselineskip} und \cs{parskip} sind keine
-% skips}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/07}{\cs{baselineskip} und \cs{parskip} werden als
+% skips akzeptiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{\cs{baselineskip} und \cs{parskip} sind keine
+% skips}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem
% \cs{skip}-Register (und zu nichts weiterem!) expandiert, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifisskip}[1]{%
@@ -1675,8 +1712,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisskip}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf ein \cs{skip}-Register prüft
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf ein \cs{skip}-Register prüft
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisskip}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1693,12 +1730,12 @@
#1%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisskip
% \begin{macro}{\scr@TestSkipAssignTillNil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
-% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
% zugewiesen. Wird dabei das Argument komplett aufgebraucht, so wird das
-% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
+% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
% Argument wird in jedem Fall komplett aufgebraucht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@TestSkipAssignTillNil{}
@@ -1709,15 +1746,15 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@TestSkipAssignTillNil
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifiskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@TestSkipAssignTillNil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifiskip
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifiscount}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem
% \cs{count}-Register (und zu nichts weiterem!) expandiert, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifiscount}[1]{%
@@ -1725,8 +1762,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifiscount}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf ein \cs{count}-Register prüft
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf ein \cs{count}-Register prüft
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifiscount}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1743,12 +1780,12 @@
#1%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifiscount
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifiscount
% \begin{macro}{\scr@TestSkipCountTillNil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
-% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
% zugewiesen. Wird dabei das Argument komplett aufgebraucht, so wird das
-% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
+% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
% Argument wird in jedem Fall komplett aufgebraucht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@TestCountAssignTillNil{}
@@ -1759,19 +1796,19 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@TestCountAssignTillNil
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifiscount
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@TestCountAssignTillNil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifiscount
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisdimexpr}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einer
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einer
% \cs{dimexpr} (und zu nichts weiterem!) expandiert, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
% wichtigen Punkt von \cs{ifisdimen}: Sollte das ganze zwar als \cs{dimexpr}
% beginnen, aber syntaktisch nicht korrekt sein, so wird dies nicht erkannt,
-% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
+% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifisdimexpr}[1]{%
@@ -1779,8 +1816,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisdimexpr}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{dimexpr} prüft
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{dimexpr} prüft
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisdimexpr}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1798,19 +1835,19 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisdimexpr
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisdimexpr
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisdimexpr
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisdimexpr
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisglueexpr}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einer
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einer
% \cs{glueexpr} (und zu nichts weiterem!) expandiert, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
% wichtigen Punkt von \cs{ifisskip}: Sollte das ganze zwar als \cs{glueexpr}
% beginnen, aber syntaktisch nicht korrekt sein, so wird dies nicht erkannt,
-% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
+% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifisglueexpr}[1]{%
@@ -1818,8 +1855,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisglueexpr}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{glueexpr} prüft
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{glueexpr} prüft
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisglueexpr}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1837,19 +1874,19 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisglueexpr
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisglueexpr
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisglueexpr
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisglueexpr
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisnumexpr}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einer
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einer
% \cs{numexpr} (und zu nichts weiterem!) expandiert, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
% wichtigen Punkt von \cs{ifiscount}: Sollte das ganze zwar als \cs{numexpr}
% beginnen, aber syntaktisch nicht korrekt sein, so wird dies nicht erkannt,
-% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
+% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifisnumexpr}[1]{%
@@ -1857,8 +1894,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisnumexpr}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{numexpr} prüft
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{numexpr} prüft
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisnumexpr}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1876,18 +1913,18 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisnumexpr
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisnumexpr
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisnumexpr
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisnumexpr
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisdefchar}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu}^^A
-% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem mit
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu}%^^A
+% Falls das erste Argument ggf. über mehrere Stufen hinweg zu einem mit
% \cs{chardef} definierten Wert (und zu nichts weiterem!) expandiert, wird das
-% erste Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
+% erste Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Dies unterscheidet sich in einem
% wichtigen Punkt von \cs{ifiscount}: Sollte das ganze zwar wie ein \cs{char}
% beginnen, aber syntaktisch nicht korrekt sein, so wird dies nicht erkannt,
-% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
+% sondern führt tatsächlich zu einer Fehlermeldung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifisdefchar}[1]{%
@@ -1895,8 +1932,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisdefchar}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{char} prüft
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf eine \cs{char} prüft
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisdefchar}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1914,14 +1951,14 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisdefchar
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisdefchar
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisdefchar
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisdefchar
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifiscounter}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% Falls die Expansion des ersten Arguments ein \LaTeX-Zähler ist, wird das
-% zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das dritte.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% Falls die Expansion des ersten Arguments ein \LaTeX-Zähler ist, wird das
+% zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das dritte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifiscounter}[1]{%
@@ -1935,15 +1972,15 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifiscounter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifiscounter
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisinteger}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
% Falls die Expansion des ersten Arguments eine (positive oder negative) ganze
-% Zahl ist, wird das zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das dritte.
+% Zahl ist, wird das zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das dritte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\ifisinteger}[1]{%
@@ -1951,9 +1988,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisinteger}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Hilfsmacro, das ggf. rekusiv auf ein Vorzeichen oder eine positive Zahl
-% prüft.
+% prüft.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\scr@ifisinteger#1{%
\begingroup
@@ -2022,15 +2059,15 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisinteger
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisinteger
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisinteger
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisinteger
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifrelax@to@nnil}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Hilfsmakro, zur Verwendung beispielsweise nach Zuweissungen. Falls alles bis
% zum ersten \cs{@nnil} aus genau einem \cs{relax} besteht, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\scr@ifrelax@to@nnil}{}
@@ -2049,11 +2086,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisdimension}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/20}{Reimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/20}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
% Falls die stufenweise Expansion des ersten Arguments eine (positive oder
-% negative) Länge ist, wird das zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das
+% negative) Länge ist, wird das zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das
% dritte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2062,14 +2099,14 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisdimension}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/20}{neu (intern)}
-% Eigentlich wäre dieses Hilfsmakro extrem aufwändig, da eine Dimension recht
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/20}{neu (intern)}
+% Eigentlich wäre dieses Hilfsmakro extrem aufwändig, da eine Dimension recht
% komplex aufgebaut sein darf. Ich habe aber beschlossen, hier mit einer
% Heuristik zu Werke zu gehen: Wenn das Argument mit einer beliebigen Anzahl
% Vorzeichen, gefolgt von max. einem Punkt, Komma oder einer Ziffer oder
-% gefolgt einem der für Längen zulässigen Primitiv beginnt, dann probieren wir
+% gefolgt einem der für Längen zulässigen Primitiv beginnt, dann probieren wir
% eine Zuweisung. Ist diese syntaktisch nicht korrekt, kann ein Fehler die
-% Folge sein. Das mag unschön sein, vereinfacht den Test aber erheblich!
+% Folge sein. Das mag unschön sein, vereinfacht den Test aber erheblich!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisdimension}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -2151,10 +2188,10 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@TestDimenionAssignTillNil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
-% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
% zugewiesen. Wird dabei das Argument komplett aufgebraucht, so wird das
-% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
+% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
% Argument wird in jedem Fall komplett aufgebraucht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@TestDimensionAssignTillNil{}
@@ -2165,12 +2202,12 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@IfAfterEndgroupArgIsRelaxTillptNnil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@IfArgIsRelaxAfterRelaxTillptNnil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/19}{neu (intern)}
% Die Hilfsmakros lesen ein durch \cs{@nnil} begrenztes Argument. Falls dieses
% Argument nur aus einer Folge von \cs{relax} besteht, wird das erste Argument
-% nach \cs{@nnil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% nach \cs{@nnil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@AfterEndGroupIfArgIsRelaxTillptNnil{}
\def\scr@AfterEndGroupIfArgIsRelaxTillptNnil#1\@nnil{%
@@ -2191,19 +2228,19 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxAfterRelaxTillptNnil
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxTillptNnil
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@DimensionSkipAssignTillNil
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisdimension
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisdimension
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxAfterRelaxTillptNnil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@IfArgIsRelaxTillptNnil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@DimensionSkipAssignTillNil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisdimension
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisdimension
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifisglue}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/21}{Reimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/21}{Reimplementierung}%^^A
% Falls die stufenweise Expansion des ersten Arguments eine (positive oder
-% negative) Länge mit Leim ist, wird das zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das
+% negative) Länge mit Leim ist, wird das zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das
% dritte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2212,14 +2249,14 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifisglue}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/21}{neu (intern)}
-% Eigentlich wäre dieses Hilfsmakro extrem aufwändig, da Leim recht
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/21}{neu (intern)}
+% Eigentlich wäre dieses Hilfsmakro extrem aufwändig, da Leim recht
% komplex aufgebaut sein darf. Ich habe aber beschlossen, hier mit einer
% Heuristik zu Werke zu gehen: Wenn das Argument mit einer beliebigen Anzahl
% Vorzeichen, gefolgt von max. einem Punkt, Komma oder einer Ziffer oder
-% gefolgt einem der für Leim zulässigen Primitiv beginnt, dann probieren wir
+% gefolgt einem der für Leim zulässigen Primitiv beginnt, dann probieren wir
% eine Zuweisung. Ist diese syntaktisch nicht korrekt, kann ein Fehler die
-% Folge sein. Das mag unschön sein, vereinfacht den Test aber erheblich!
+% Folge sein. Das mag unschön sein, vereinfacht den Test aber erheblich!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ifisglue}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -2301,10 +2338,10 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@TestGlueAssignTillNil}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/21}{neu (intern)}
-% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/21}{neu (intern)}
+% Das durch \cs{@nil} begrenzte Argument wird einer temporären Länge
% zugewiesen. Wird dabei das Argument komplett aufgebraucht, so wird das
-% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
+% erste Argument nach \cs{@nil} ausgeführt, sonst das zweite. Das begrenzte
% Argument wird in jedem Fall komplett aufgebraucht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@TestGlueAssignTillNil{}
@@ -2315,23 +2352,24 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@TestGlueAssignTillNil
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ifisglue
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifisglue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@TestGlueAssignTillNil
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifisglue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifisglue
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnumber}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/30}{using \cs{aftergroup} instead of
-% \cs{endgroup}\cs{expandafter}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}^^A
-% Dieses Makro testet, ob ein übergebener Parameter eine positive,
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/30}{using \cs{aftergroup} instead of
+% \cs{endgroup}\cs{expandafter}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/24}{Leerzeichenfehler korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/08/26}{leere Argumente werden korrekt behandelt}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro testet, ob ein übergebener Parameter eine positive,
% ganze Zahl ist. Ist dies der Fall, wird der zweite Parameter
-% ausgeführt, sonst der dritte.
+% ausgeführt, sonst der dritte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand\ifnumber[1]{%
\begingroup\@tempswafalse\let\scr@next\test@number
- \expandafter\scr@next#1\scr@next
+ \IfArgIsEmpty{#1}{}{\expandafter\scr@next#1\scr@next}%
\if@tempswa
\aftergroup\@firstoftwo
\else
@@ -2341,7 +2379,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\test@number}
-% Für den eigentlichen Test wird der erste Parameter Token für Token
+% Für den eigentlichen Test wird der erste Parameter Token für Token
% gescannt und beurteilt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\test@number}[1]{%
@@ -2349,8 +2387,8 @@
\let\scr@next\relax
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dabei wird für einen schnelleren Vergleich die Tatsache genutzt, dass
-% Ziffernzeichen immer im selben durchgängigen Bereich liegen
+% Dabei wird für einen schnelleren Vergleich die Tatsache genutzt, dass
+% Ziffernzeichen immer im selben durchgängigen Bereich liegen
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempcnta=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\number
\expandafter`#1\relax
@@ -2360,7 +2398,7 @@
\else\@tempswafalse\fi
\else\@tempswafalse\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Das zeichenweise Scannen und Parsen kann natürlich nicht einfach
+% Das zeichenweise Scannen und Parsen kann natürlich nicht einfach
% abgebrochen werden. Stattdessen ist der Parameterrest noch zu
% entfernen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2381,9 +2419,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifintnumber}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/30}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/30}{neu}%^^A
% Ist das erste Argument eine positive oder negative ganze Zahl, to wird das
-% zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das dritte. Wie bei \TeX{} auch sind
+% zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das dritte. Wie bei \TeX{} auch sind
% beliebig viele Vorzeichen erlaubt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2399,7 +2437,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@test@sign}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@test@sign}[1]{%
\ifx \scr@next#1
@@ -2421,8 +2459,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifdimen}
-% Dieses Makro testet, ob ein übergebener Parameter eine Dimension
-% ist und führt in Abhängigkeit davon den zweiten oder dritten
+% Dieses Makro testet, ob ein übergebener Parameter eine Dimension
+% ist und führt in Abhängigkeit davon den zweiten oder dritten
% Parameter aus.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2448,8 +2486,8 @@
% \begin{macro}{\test@posdimen}
% Dann muss getestet werden, ob es sich beim Rest um eine Dimension
% handelt. Dabei werden der Einfachheit halber mehrere Dezimalkomma
-% und -punkte erlaubt. Natürlich könnte man es auch wirklich richtig
-% machen, aber das wäre nochmal etwas aufwendiger. Ist das wirklich
+% und -punkte erlaubt. Natürlich könnte man es auch wirklich richtig
+% machen, aber das wäre nochmal etwas aufwendiger. Ist das wirklich
% notwendig?
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\test@posdimen}[1]{%
@@ -2470,9 +2508,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\test@dimunt}
% \begin{macro}{\test@trueunt}
-% Außer einer Gleitkomma- bzw. Gleitpunktzahl muss auch noch die Einheit
+% Außer einer Gleitkomma- bzw. Gleitpunktzahl muss auch noch die Einheit
% behandelt werden. Dabei sind sowohl die neun Standardeinheiten als auch
-% deren "`true"'-Variante zu berücksichtigen. Deshalb wird zuerst ein
+% deren "`true"'-Variante zu berücksichtigen. Deshalb wird zuerst ein
% eventuelles "`\texttt{true}"' weggeworfen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\test@dimunt}{}
@@ -2486,9 +2524,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\test@@ifdimunt}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{elf bis zwölf Einheiten nicht neun}
-% Anschließend wird dann getestet, ob es sich um eine der elf bis zwölf
-% üblichen Einheiten handelt.
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{elf bis zwölf Einheiten nicht neun}
+% Anschließend wird dann getestet, ob es sich um eine der elf bis zwölf
+% üblichen Einheiten handelt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\test@@ifdimunt[1]{%
\@tempswafalse
@@ -2529,9 +2567,9 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpdftex}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifpdftex}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um zu testen, ob pdf\TeX{} verwendet wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2545,7 +2583,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifluatex}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% If-the-else-Konstrukt, um zu testen, ob lua\TeX{} verwendet wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2555,7 +2593,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifpdforluatex}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um zu testen, ob pdf\TeX{} oder lua\TeX{} verwendet
% wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2568,11 +2606,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifVTeX}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{umdefiniert von \cs{ifvtex}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{umdefiniert von \cs{ifvtex}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifVTeX}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{umdefiniert von \cs{scr@ifvtex}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/19}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{umdefiniert von \cs{scr@ifvtex}}
% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um zu testen, ob V\TeX{} verwendet wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2584,20 +2622,20 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpdfoutput}
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{\cs{pdfoutput} wird nicht mehr zu
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{\cs{pdfoutput} wird nicht mehr zu
% \cs{relax}, wenn zuvor undefiniert}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{darf bereits definiert sein}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@ifpdfoutput}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{darf bereits definiert sein}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@ifpdfoutput}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifpdfoutput}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{funktioniert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{berücksichtigt V\TeX}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{Expandierbarkeit verbessert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{lua\TeX{} nach 0.85 berücksichtigt}^^A
-% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um abhängig davon, ob als \texttt{pdf}
-% ausgegeben wird oder nicht, Befehle auszuführen. Dieses Makro wird
-% für die Deklaration der Option \texttt{pagesize} benötigt.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{funktioniert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{berücksichtigt V\TeX}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{Expandierbarkeit verbessert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/27}{lua\TeX{} nach 0.85 berücksichtigt}%^^A
+% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um abhängig davon, ob als \texttt{pdf}
+% ausgegeben wird oder nicht, Befehle auszuführen. Dieses Makro wird
+% für die Deklaration der Option \texttt{pagesize} benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand{\scr@ifpdfoutput}{%
@@ -2634,12 +2672,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpsoutput}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifpsoutput}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{Expandierbarkeit verbessert}^^A
-% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um abhängig davon, ob früher oder später
-% \texttt{ps} ausgegeben wird oder nicht, Befehle auszuführen.
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{Expandierbarkeit verbessert}%^^A
+% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um abhängig davon, ob früher oder später
+% \texttt{ps} ausgegeben wird oder nicht, Befehle auszuführen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\scr@ifpsoutput}{%
@@ -2668,13 +2706,13 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifdvioutput}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifdvioutput}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{Expandierbarkeit verbessert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/14}{lua\TeX{} nach 0.85 berücksichtigt}^^A
-% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um abhängig davon, ob \texttt{dvi}
-% ausgegeben wird oder nicht, Befehle auszuführen.
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{Expandierbarkeit verbessert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/14}{lua\TeX{} nach 0.85 berücksichtigt}%^^A
+% If-then-else-Konstrukt, um abhängig davon, ob \texttt{dvi}
+% ausgegeben wird oder nicht, Befehle auszuführen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\scr@ifdvioutput}{%
@@ -2711,10 +2749,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@smashdp}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/17}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02a}{2009/01/23}{\cs{smash} nicht direkt verwenden, weil
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/17}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02a}{2009/01/23}{\cs{smash} nicht direkt verwenden, weil
% \textsf{amsmath} das inkompatibel umdefiniert}
-% Gibt Material aus, erzeugt dabei aber nur Höhe und Breite, jedoch keine
+% Gibt Material aus, erzeugt dabei aber nur Höhe und Breite, jedoch keine
% Tiefe.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2734,10 +2772,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfRTL}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{neu}
% Die Anweisung testet, ob wir uns gerade im Von-Rechts-Nach-Links-Modus von
% Paketen wie \textsf{bidi} befinden. Ist das der Fall, wird das erste
-% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\IfRTL}{%
@@ -2752,12 +2790,12 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfRTL
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfRTL
% \begin{macro}{\IfLTR}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{neu}
% Die Anweisung testet, ob wir uns gerade nicht im
% Von-Rechts-Nach-Links-Modus von Paketen wie \textsf{bidi} befinden. Ist
-% das der Fall, wird das erste Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
+% das der Fall, wird das erste Argument ausgeführt, sonst das zweite.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\IfLTR}{%
@@ -2772,10 +2810,10 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfLTR
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfLTR
%
% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfoNoLine}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{neu}%^^A
% Arbeitet wie \cs{PackageInfo} aber ohne Ausgabe der Zeilennummer.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2787,7 +2825,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ClassInfoNoLine}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{neu}%^^A
% Arbeitet wie \cs{ClassInfo} aber ohne Ausgabe der Zeilennummer.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2799,10 +2837,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@removefromreset}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung, kompatibel mit
-% \textsf{remreset} und \textsf{chngcntr}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung, kompatibel mit
+% \textsf{remreset} und \textsf{chngcntr}}%^^A
% Dieser alte Bekannte aus dem Paket \textsf{remreset} wird auch von
-% \KOMAScript{} benötigt. Es ist einfacher, ihn selbst zu definieren, als sich
+% \KOMAScript{} benötigt. Es ist einfacher, ihn selbst zu definieren, als sich
% auf andere Pakete zu verlassen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2822,9 +2860,10 @@
%
% \selectlanguage{english}%
% \begin{macro}{\IfActiveMkBoth}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/03}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/03}{new}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@scrActiveMkBoth}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/03}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/03}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/26}{handling for \cs{marks}}%^^A
% This command test, whether or not \cs{@mkboth} does change a mark or not.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -2838,7 +2877,8 @@
\def\markleft##1{\scr@ActiveMkBothtrue}%
\def\markboth##1{\scr@ActiveMkBothtrue}%
\def\markdouble##1{\scr@ActiveMkBothtrue}%
- \def\mark##1{\scr@ActiveMkBothtrue}
+ \def\mark##1{\scr@ActiveMkBothtrue}%
+ \def\marks##1##2{\scr@ActiveMkBothtrue}%
\scr@ActiveMkBothfalse
\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\@mkboth{}{}}%
\endgroup
@@ -2850,26 +2890,27 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A\if@scrActiveMkBoth
-% \end{macro}^^A\IfActiveMkBoth
+% \end{macro}%^^A\if@scrActiveMkBoth
+% \end{macro}%^^A\IfActiveMkBoth
% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%
%
-% \subsection{Definition von KOMA-\textsf{keyval}-Schlüsseln (Hauptteil)}
+% \subsection{Definition von KOMA-\textsf{keyval}-Schlüsseln (Hauptteil)}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyExecuteOptions}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/29}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{protected@edef} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/02/02}{\cs{scr@key@atlist} und \cs{scr@key@name}^^A
-% vor Überschreiben in \cs{setkeys} geschützt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{neue Implementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{darf auch noch nach der Präambel verwendet
-% werden}^^A
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{das dritte Argument wird \cs{long}^^A
-% verarbeitet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/29}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{protected@edef} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/02/02}{\cs{scr@key@atlist} und \cs{scr@key@name}%^^A
+% vor Überschreiben in \cs{setkeys} geschützt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{neue Implementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{darf auch noch nach der Präambel verwendet
+% werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{das dritte Argument wird \cs{long}%^^A
+% verarbeitet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@FamilyExecuteOptions}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{Neue streng interne Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Korrektur: Haken danach verwendet die Familie
-% statt des Mitglieds}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{Neue streng interne Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{Korrektur: Haken danach verwendet die Familie
+% statt des Mitglieds}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{Fehlermeldungen verbessert}%^^A
% Entspriche \cs{ExecuteOptions} jedoch \textsf{keyval}-Optionen. Insbesondere
% ist die Anweisung reentrant! Es ist jedoch zu beachten, dass der hook lokal
% zum jeweiligen Aufruf ist.
@@ -2898,11 +2939,11 @@
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@#2@\scr@key@name}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@#2#1@\scr@key@name}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Besondere Behandlung der
-% \texttt{@else@}-Option}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Besondere Behandlung der
+% \texttt{@else@}-Option}%^^A
% Es existiert zwar weder eine Familienoption noch eine Mitgliedsoption, aber
% vielleicht existiert ja die Spezialoption \texttt{@else@}, die in einem
-% solchen Fall die eigentliche Option als Wert erhält.
+% solchen Fall die eigentliche Option als Wert erhält.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@#2#1@@else@}{%
\PackageError{scrbase}{%
@@ -2922,12 +2963,15 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Im Gegensatz zu anderen Optionen bedeuten bei der \texttt{@else@}-Option
% alle von \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} abweichenden Ergebnisse, dass die
-% Option nicht korrekt verarbeitet werden konnte und deshalb die ursprüngliche
+% Option nicht korrekt verarbeitet werden konnte und deshalb die ursprüngliche
% Option als Fehler zu melden ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed\else
\PackageError{scrbase}{%
unknown option
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ value at
+ \fi
`\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
}{%
Member `#1' of family `#2'\MessageBreak
@@ -2947,12 +2991,12 @@
\scr@execute@option{#2}%
\ifstr{#1}{}{}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Memberoptionstest nach Familyoptionsausführung
-% korrigiert}^^A
-% Auch wenn eine Familienoption ausgeführt wurde, muss eine existierende
-% Mitgliederoption ggf. noch ausgeführt werden. Existiert sie nicht, wird
-% ebenfalls eine existierende \texttt{@else@}-Option ausgeführt. Allerdings
-% führen in diesem Fall von \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} abweichende
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Memberoptionstest nach Familyoptionsausführung
+% korrigiert}%^^A
+% Auch wenn eine Familienoption ausgeführt wurde, muss eine existierende
+% Mitgliederoption ggf. noch ausgeführt werden. Existiert sie nicht, wird
+% ebenfalls eine existierende \texttt{@else@}-Option ausgeführt. Allerdings
+% führen in diesem Fall von \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} abweichende
% Ergebnisse nicht zu einer Fehlermeldung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@#2#1@\scr@key@name}{%
@@ -2978,21 +3022,25 @@
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@show@key@state@error}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}%
-% Zeige abhängig von \cs{FamilyKeyState} eine Fehlermeldung. Alle
-% Informationen zu dem Fehler müssen in \cs{FamilyMemberOfKey}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{Fehlermeldungen verbessert}%^^A
+% Zeige abhängig von \cs{FamilyKeyState} eine Fehlermeldung. Alle
+% Informationen zu dem Fehler müssen in \cs{FamilyMemberOfKey}
% (Familienmitglied oder \cs{@empty}), \cs{FamilyOfKey} (Familie oder
% \cs{@empty}), \cs{scr@key@atlist} (Option, wie sie in der Liste stand),
% \cs{scr@key@name} (Name der Option) und \cs{scr@key@value} (Wert der
% Option) stehen. Es ist zu beachten, dass \cs{scr@key@atlist} und
-% \cs{scr@key@value} ebenfalls Macros enthalten können. Deshalb werden diese
-% Werte ggf. über \cs{detokenize} ausgegeben.
+% \cs{scr@key@value} ebenfalls Macros enthalten können. Deshalb werden diese
+% Werte ggf. über \cs{detokenize} ausgegeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\scr@show@key@state@error}{%
\ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed\else
\PackageError{scrbase}{%
unknown option
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ value at
+ \fi
`\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
}{%
Option
@@ -3020,16 +3068,16 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@show@key@state@error
-% \end{macro}^^A \@FamilyExecuteOptions
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyExecuteOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@show@key@state@error
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@FamilyExecuteOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyExecuteOptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAExecuteOptions}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Kein optionales Argument mehr}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{darf auch noch nach der Präambel verwendet
-% werden}^^A
-% Liste von Optionen für ein Mitglied der Familie \texttt{KOMA} ausführen.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Kein optionales Argument mehr}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{darf auch noch nach der Präambel verwendet
+% werden}%^^A
+% Liste von Optionen für ein Mitglied der Familie \texttt{KOMA} ausführen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMAExecuteOptions}[1][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -3040,21 +3088,22 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyOptions}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/02}{Neue Implementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/02}{\cs{scr@after@options@\#1@hook}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{zweites Argument wird \cs{long} behandelt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/02}{Neue Implementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/02}{\cs{scr@after@options@\#1@hook}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{zweites Argument wird \cs{long} behandelt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@FamilyOptions}
-% \changes{v3.14}[2014/10/17]{Neue streng interne Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}[2014/10/17]{Neue streng interne Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{Fehlermeldungen verbessert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@Options}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neues Makro (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyOptions
-% Es werden Schlüssel einer Familie verwendet. Existiert ein Schlüssel nicht,
-% oder ist der Wert für alle Schlüssel unbekannt, so wird ein Fehler
-% ausgegeben. Diese Anweisung selbst ist reentrant, das heißt sie kann auch
-% innerhalb der Ausführung von Optionen aufgerufen werden. Es sei jedoch
-% erwähnt, dass der hook dabei nur die jeweilige Anweisung umfasst.
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neues Makro (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyOptions
+% Es werden Schlüssel einer Familie verwendet. Existiert ein Schlüssel nicht,
+% oder ist der Wert für alle Schlüssel unbekannt, so wird ein Fehler
+% ausgegeben. Diese Anweisung selbst ist reentrant, das heißt sie kann auch
+% innerhalb der Ausführung von Optionen aufgerufen werden. Es sei jedoch
+% erwähnt, dass der hook dabei nur die jeweilige Anweisung umfasst.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand{\FamilyOptions}[1]{\@FamilyOptions{#1}}
@@ -3072,23 +3121,23 @@
}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{neuer Haken für \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{neuer Haken für \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*}}%^^A
% Seit Version 3.23 wird hier auch der neuen Haken vor
-% \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*} initialisiert. Zunächst findet eine Art
+% \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions*} initialisiert. Zunächst findet eine Art
% Vorinitialisierung statt, bei der der Haken lediglich leer definiert wird,
-% falls er noch nicht existiert. Falls er nämlich existiert, kann an einem
+% falls er noch nicht existiert. Falls er nämlich existiert, kann an einem
% leeren Haken die oberste Ebene erkannt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@after@options@#1@hook@topmost}{%
\@namedef{scr@after@options@#1@hook@topmost}{}%
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann wird an einem leeren Haken die oberste Ausführungsebene erkennt. In
-% diesem Fall wird zum einen die Ausführung des Hakens in den normalen
+% Dann wird an einem leeren Haken die oberste Ausführungsebene erkennt. In
+% diesem Fall wird zum einen die Ausführung des Hakens in den normalen
% Ebenen-Haken (das ist dann automatische der oberste Ebenen-Haken)
-% eingehängt und zum anderen der Haken selbst so initialisiert, dass er sich
-% bei seiner Ausführung als erstes selbst löscht. Gleichzeitig ist der Haken
-% selbst dadurch nicht mehr leer, so dass sich tiefere Ebenen von der höchsten
+% eingehängt und zum anderen der Haken selbst so initialisiert, dass er sich
+% bei seiner Ausführung als erstes selbst löscht. Gleichzeitig ist der Haken
+% selbst dadurch nicht mehr leer, so dass sich tiefere Ebenen von der höchsten
% eindeutig unterscheiden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifx\csname scr@after@options@#1@hook@topmost\endcsname\@empty
@@ -3103,54 +3152,83 @@
% \begin{description}
% \item[Anmerkung:] Es wird nicht auf \textsf{xkeyval} und den dortigen Befehl
% \cs{setkeys+} gesetzt, weil dieser die Optionen nicht in der Reihenfolge
-% der Optionen, sondern in der Reihenfolge der Familien ausführt. Das passt
+% der Optionen, sondern in der Reihenfolge der Familien ausführt. Das passt
% mir aber hier gar nicht.
% \end{description}
-% In einer Schleife über alle Optionen werden die Optionen zunächst in Option
+% In einer Schleife über alle Optionen werden die Optionen zunächst in Option
% und Wert aufgespaltet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\scr@key@atlist:=#2\do{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{leere Argumente in der Optionenliste}%
-% Auf vielfachen Wunsch und entgegen meiner Überzeugung, sind auch leere
-% Argumente in der Optionenliste erlaubt. Die erste Form wäre, wenn zwei
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{leere Argumente in der Optionenliste}%
+% Auf vielfachen Wunsch und entgegen meiner Ãœberzeugung, sind auch leere
+% Argumente in der Optionenliste erlaubt. Die erste Form wäre, wenn zwei
% Kommas diret aufeinander folgen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\scr@key@atlist\@empty\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die zweite Möglichkeit wäre, dass noch Leerzeichen zwischen den Komma
-% übrig bleiben:
+% Die zweite Möglichkeit wäre, dass noch Leerzeichen zwischen den Komma
+% übrig bleiben:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\scr@key@atlist\space\else
\expandafter\scr@key@split@name@value\scr@key@atlist==\@nil
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die dritte Möglichkeit, dass auch noch ein Gleichheitszeichen übrig
-% gelassen wurde, werde ich aber nicht abfangen. Irgendwann müssen die
+% Die dritte Möglichkeit, dass auch noch ein Gleichheitszeichen übrig
+% gelassen wurde, werde ich aber nicht abfangen. Irgendwann müssen die
% Anwender auch mal ihre Fehler einsehen und korrigieren!
%
-% Wir haben jetzt also eine Option und diese aufgespaltet in Schlüssel und
+% Wir haben jetzt also eine Option und diese aufgespaltet in Schlüssel und
% Wert.
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{der Gesamtstatus wird gespeichert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{der Gesamtstatus wird gespeichert}%^^A
% Jetzt speichern wir den Gesamtstatus einfach, indem der Fehlerspeicher
-% gelöscht wird. Bei \cs{relax} wird er nicht weiter benötigt und es liegt
+% gelöscht wird. Bei \cs{relax} wird er nicht weiter benötigt und es liegt
% ebenso wie bei \cs{@empty} kein auszugebender Fehler vor. Bei anderen
-% Werten, enthält er Fehler, die zu melden sind.
+% Werten, enthält er Fehler, die zu melden sind.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\scr@key@run@errors\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/29}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{protected@edef} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/06/07}{weniger Expansion durch sinnvollen Gebrauch
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/29}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{protected@edef} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/06/07}{weniger Expansion durch sinnvollen Gebrauch
% von \cs{unexpanded}}
-% Dann wird in einer Schleife über alle Familien festgestellt, ob die Option
-% in einer Familie bekannt ist und ggf. ausgeführt. Hier ist wichtig, dass
-% keines der internen Macros vom Aufruf verändert wird. Außerdem muss der
-% Status und die daraus resultierenden Meldungen aufgesammelt werden.
+% Dann wird in einer Schleife über alle Familienmitglieder festgestellt, ob
+% die Option bei einem Mitglied bekannt ist und ggf. ausgeführt. Hier ist
+% wichtig, dass keines der internen Macros vom Aufruf verändert wird. Außerdem
+% muss der Status und die daraus resultierenden Meldungen aufgesammelt
+% werden. Hilfreich ist, dass \cs{\meta{Familie}@key@familylist} eine Liste
+% aus Familie + Mitglied ist und nicht nur aus dem Namen der Mitglieder.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/19}{Fix: Familienoptionen werden zuerst
+% ausgeführt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@key@found@false
- \edef\reserved@a{\csname #1@key@familylist\endcsname}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{#1,\csname #1@key@familylist\endcsname}%
\@for\reserved@a:=\reserved@a\do{%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@\reserved@a @\scr@key@name}{}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@\reserved@a @\scr@key@name}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/19}{Behandlung für \texttt{@else@}-Optionen}%^^A
+% Wenn das Familiemitglied keine entsprechende Option besitzt, kann es noch
+% immer eine \texttt{@else@}-Option besitzen. In diesem Fall wird selbige
+% ausgeführt. Die Ausführung hat aber nur dann Einfluss auf den
+% Fehlerspeicher, wenn sie erfolgreich war. In diesem Fall wird der
+% Fehlerspeicher gelöscht. Ausnahme ist, wenn das aktuelle Mitglied die
+% Familie selbst ist. In diesem Fall wird die \texttt{@else@}-Option nicht
+% hier ausgeführt. Das erledigen wir später und nur in dem Fall, dass
+% tatsächlich kein Mitglied eine solche Option oder eine
+% \texttt{@else@}-Option hatte.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifstr{\reserved@a}{#1}{}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@\reserved@a @@else@}{}{%
+ \expandafter\scr@execute@elseoption\expandafter{\reserved@a}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \scr@key@found@true
+ \let\scr@key@run@errors\relax
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Wurde hingegen eine Option für ein Familienmitglied gefunden, so wird sie
+% ausgeführt und bei Bedarf der Fehlerspeicher angepasst.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\scr@execute@option\expandafter{\reserved@a}%
\scr@key@found@true
\ifx\scr@key@run@errors\relax\else
@@ -3161,21 +3239,21 @@
\edef\scr@key@run@errors{%
\unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@key@run@errors}%
\noexpand\MessageBreak
- \FamilyMemberOfKey: unkown value
- `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'.%
+ \space\space- `\FamilyMemberOfKey': unkown value
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'%
}%
\else
\ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue
\edef\scr@key@run@errors{%
\unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@key@run@errors}%
\noexpand\MessageBreak
- \FamilyMemberOfKey: value expected.
+ \space\space- `\FamilyMemberOfKey': value expected
}%
\else
\edef\scr@key@run@errors{%
\unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@key@run@errors}%
\noexpand\MessageBreak
- \FamilyMemberOfKey: \FamilyKeyState.
+ \space\space- `\FamilyMemberOfKey': \FamilyKeyState
}%
\fi
\fi
@@ -3186,35 +3264,93 @@
\ifscr@key@found@
\ifx\scr@key@run@errors\relax\else
\ifx\scr@key@run@errors\@empty\else
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@#1@@else@}{%
+ \PackageError{scrbase}{%
+ unknown option
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
+ }{%
+ The members of family `#1' cannot set option
+ `\scr@key@name'
+ \ifx\scr@key@value\@empty\else
+ \MessageBreak
+ to value
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'%
+ \fi.\MessageBreak
+ Here's what each member says:
+ \scr@key@run@errors\MessageBreak
+ o\expandafter\@gobble
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \scr@execute@elseoption{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \PackageInfo{scrbase}{%
+ option
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
+ \MessageBreak
+ processed by `@else@' option of family\MessageBreak
+ `#1', after the members said:
+ \scr@key@run@errors\MessageBreak
+ o\expandafter\@gobble
+ }%
+ \let\scr@key@run@errors\relax
+ \else
+ \PackageError{scrbase}{%
+ unknown option
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ value at
+ \fi
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
+ }{%
+ The members of family `#1' cannot set option
+ `\scr@key@name'
+ \ifx\scr@key@value\@empty\else
+ \MessageBreak
+ to value
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'%
+ \fi.\MessageBreak
+ Here's what each member says:
+ \scr@key@run@errors\MessageBreak
+ o\expandafter\@gobble
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@#1@@else@}{%
+ \PackageError{scrbase}{%
+ unknown option
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
+ }{%
+ No one of the members of family `#1'\MessageBreak
+ can handle option `\scr@key@name'.\MessageBreak
+ So it cannot be set%
+ \ifx\scr@key@value\@empty\else
+ \space to value
+ `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'%
+ \fi.%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \scr@execute@elseoption{#1}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \else
\PackageError{scrbase}{%
unknown option
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ value at
+ \fi
`\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
}{%
- The members of family `#1' cannot set option
- `\scr@key@name'
+ No one of the members of family `#1'\MessageBreak
+ can handle option `\scr@key@name'.\MessageBreak
+ So it cannot be set%
\ifx\scr@key@value\@empty\else
- \MessageBreak
- to value
+ \space to value
`\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'%
- \fi.\MessageBreak
- Here's what each member says:
- \scr@key@run@errors
+ \fi.%
}%
\fi
- \fi
- \else
- \PackageError{scrbase}{%
- unknown option
- `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@atlist}'%
- }{%
- No one of the members of family `#1'\MessageBreak
- can handle option `\scr@key@name'.\MessageBreak
- So it cannot be set%
- \ifx\scr@key@value\@empty\else
- \space to value
- `\expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\scr@key@value}'%
- \fi.%
- }%
+ }%
\fi
\fi
\fi
@@ -3223,15 +3359,15 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@execute@option}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/30}{fehlendes \cs{expandafter} in \cs{PackageInfo}
-% ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/13}{Leerzeichen durch fehlendes Prozentzeichen
-% beseitigt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{den \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} Haken hier zu
-% sichern nützt nichts}^^A
-% Es wird die bereits gesplittete Option ausgeführt, ohne dass die dabei
-% wesentlichen Macros (aber nicht \cs{reserved@a}!) verändert werden. Das
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/30}{fehlendes \cs{expandafter} in \cs{PackageInfo}
+% ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/13}{Leerzeichen durch fehlendes Prozentzeichen
+% beseitigt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{den \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} Haken hier zu
+% sichern nützt nichts}%^^A
+% Es wird die bereits gesplittete Option ausgeführt, ohne dass die dabei
+% wesentlichen Macros (aber nicht \cs{reserved@a}!) verändert werden. Das
% erste Argument ist bereits der Besitzer in \textsf{keyval}-Syntax.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@execute@option}[1]{%
@@ -3275,7 +3411,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@KV@err}
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2013/03/04}{missing internal command added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2013/03/04}{missing internal command added}%^^A
% We just have to signal, that the option needs a value, that is missing.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@KV@err}[1]{%
@@ -3284,33 +3420,34 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@key@run@errors}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Wird innerhalb von \cs{FamilyOptions} benötigt, um die Fehlermeldungen
-% aufzusammeln, aber erst auszugeben, wenn tatsächlich kein Mitglied die
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Wird innerhalb von \cs{FamilyOptions} benötigt, um die Fehlermeldungen
+% aufzusammeln, aber erst auszugeben, wenn tatsächlich kein Mitglied die
% Option verarbeiten konnte. Wir definieren das hier, damit oben die
% Wiederherstellung korrekt funktioniert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@key@run@errors}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@key@run@errors}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@execute@option
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@key@run@errors}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@execute@option
% \begin{macro}{\scr@execute@elseoption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/16}{Gruppe eingefügt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/16}{Gruppe eingefügt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/16}{\cs{scr@key@name@else} und
-% \cs{scr@key@value@else} neu}^^A
+% \cs{scr@key@value@else} neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/10}{missing percent added to avoid spaces}%^^A
% Ist eine Spezialoption mit dem Namen \texttt{@else@} definiert, so wird
-% diese von \cs{FamilyExecuteOptions} genau dann ausgeführt, wenn keine
-% passende Option gefunden wurde. Dafür dient dieses Makro, dessen Argumente
+% diese von \cs{FamilyExecuteOptions} genau dann ausgeführt, wenn keine
+% passende Option gefunden wurde. Dafür dient dieses Makro, dessen Argumente
% und Aufrufstatus genau \cs{scr@execute@option} entspricht. Es soll auch
-% genau dasselbe tun, außer dass es nicht die Option selbst aufruft, sondern
-% die Option als Wert an die \texttt{@else@}-Option übergibt. Es muss also
-% temporär \cs{scr@key@atlist}, \cs{scr@key@name} und \cs{scr@key@value}
-% geändert werden, bevor \cs{scr@execute@option} ausgeführt wird. Da
+% genau dasselbe tun, außer dass es nicht die Option selbst aufruft, sondern
+% die Option als Wert an die \texttt{@else@}-Option übergibt. Es muss also
+% temporär \cs{scr@key@atlist}, \cs{scr@key@name} und \cs{scr@key@value}
+% geändert werden, bevor \cs{scr@execute@option} ausgeführt wird. Da
% allerdings die Originalwerte ggf. von der \texttt{@else@}-Option ausgewertet
% werden sollen, wird das originale \cs{scr@key@atlist} zum Wert der
% \texttt{@else@}-Option. Damit diese nicht erneut aufgespaltet werden muss,
-% werden die originalen \cs{scr@key@name} und \cs{scr@key@value} zusätzlich in
+% werden die originalen \cs{scr@key@name} und \cs{scr@key@value} zusätzlich in
% \cs{scr@key@name@else} und \cs{scr@key@value@else} gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@execute@elseoption}[1]{%
@@ -3339,7 +3476,7 @@
\noexpand\def\noexpand\scr@key@name@else{%
\unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@key@name@else}%
}%
- }
+ }%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@key@value@else}{%
\unexpanded{\let\scr@key@value@else\relax}%
}{%
@@ -3350,27 +3487,27 @@
}\reserved@a
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@execute@elseoption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@execute@elseoption
% \begin{macro}{\ifscr@key@found@}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{ifKOMA@key@found}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{ifKOMA@key@found}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@key@atlist}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@atlist}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@atlist}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@key@name}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@name}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@name}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@key@value}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@value}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@value}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@key@split@name@value}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{verwendet \cs{KV@@sp@def} zur Entsorgung von
-% Leerzeichen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@split@name@value}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/10/17}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% Leerzeichen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{umbenannt von \cs{KOMA@key@split@name@value}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/10/17}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@sp@def} statt
-% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}^^A
+% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifscr@key@found@
\newcommand*{\scr@key@atlist}{}
@@ -3383,30 +3520,30 @@
}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@key@split@name@value
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@key@value
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@key@name
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@key@atlist
-% \end{macro}^^A \@FamilyOptions
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@key@split@name@value
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@key@value
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@key@name
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@key@atlist
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@FamilyOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyOptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyOption}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/09}{Tyischen Fehler abgefangen}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/09}{Tyischen Fehler abgefangen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@FamilyOptions}
-% \changes{v3.14}[2014/10/17]{Neue streng interne Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}[2014/10/17]{Neue streng interne Anweisung}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@sp@def} statt
-% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}^^A
+% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@Option}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/29}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{protected@edef} ersetzt}
% Im Gegensatz zu \cs{FamilyOptions} kann man mit dieser Anweisung nur eine
-% einzige Option setzen. Dafür kann man gleich mehrere durch Komma getrennte
-% Argumente für diese Option setzen. Das erste obligatorische Argument ist
+% einzige Option setzen. Dafür kann man gleich mehrere durch Komma getrennte
+% Argumente für diese Option setzen. Das erste obligatorische Argument ist
% wieder die Familie, das zweite obligatorische Argument ist die Option, das
-% dritte, obligatorische Argument ist die Liste der Werte für diese Option.
+% dritte, obligatorische Argument ist die Liste der Werte für diese Option.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyOption}[2]{%
@@ -3458,18 +3595,18 @@
\expandafter\scr@sp@def\expandafter\scr@key@name\expandafter{#2}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Der einfachste Weg ist nun schlicht, die Liste der Werte durchzugehen und so
-% nach und nach eine Liste von Werten für \cs{FamilyOptions} zu erzeugen.
+% nach und nach eine Liste von Werten für \cs{FamilyOptions} zu erzeugen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\reserved@a\@empty
\@for\reserved@b:=#3\do{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{leere Argumente in der Werteliste}^^A
-% Auf vielfachen Wunsch und entgegen meiner Überzeugung, sind auch leere
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{leere Argumente in der Werteliste}%^^A
+% Auf vielfachen Wunsch und entgegen meiner Ãœberzeugung, sind auch leere
% Argumente in der Werteliste erlaubt, werden jedoch ignoriert:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\reserved@b\@empty\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/03/04}{auch Leerzeichenargumente werden ignoriert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/03/04}{auch Leerzeichenargumente werden ignoriert}%^^A
% Auch Argumente, die nur aus einem Leerzeichen bestehen, werden ignoriert:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\reserved@b\space\else
@@ -3488,30 +3625,30 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAoptions}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{Neuer Hook nach den Optionen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Optionen aller KOMA-Familien abarbeiten}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Hook-Mechanismus von \cs{FamilyOptions}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{Neuer Hook nach den Optionen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Optionen aller KOMA-Familien abarbeiten}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Hook-Mechanismus von \cs{FamilyOptions}%^^A
% verwendent}
-% Simple kleine Abkürzung.
+% Simple kleine Abkürzung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMAoptions}{\FamilyOptions{KOMA}}
%</koma>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@options}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@options
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMAoptions
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Neues Makro (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@options
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMAoptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAoptionsOf}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Mit dieser Anweisung können die aktuell gesetzten \KOMAScript-Optionen
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Mit dieser Anweisung können die aktuell gesetzten \KOMAScript-Optionen
% eines Pakets oder einer Klasse abgefragt werden, sobald ein Paket oder eine
-% Klasse das unterstützt. Das erste (optionale) Argument gibt dabei eine
-% Anweisung an, die für die Optionenliste ausgeführt werden soll. Das zweite
+% Klasse das unterstützt. Das erste (optionale) Argument gibt dabei eine
+% Anweisung an, die für die Optionenliste ausgeführt werden soll. Das zweite
% (nicht optionale Argument) ist der Name eines KOMA-Script-Pakets oder einer
-% KOMA-Script-Klasse einschließlich Dateiendung.
+% KOMA-Script-Klasse einschließlich Dateiendung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMAoptionsOf}[2][\@firstofone]{%
@@ -3529,16 +3666,16 @@
}
%</koma>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMAoptionsOf
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMAoptionsOf
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAoptionOf}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/26}{neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/26}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
% Mit dieser Anweisung kann eine aktuell gesetzte \KOMAScript-Option
% eines Pakets oder einer Klasse abgefragt werden, sobald ein Paket oder eine
-% Klasse das unterstützt. Das erste (optionale) Argument gibt dabei eine
-% Anweisung an, die für die Optionenliste ausgeführt werden soll. Das zweite
+% Klasse das unterstützt. Das erste (optionale) Argument gibt dabei eine
+% Anweisung an, die für die Optionenliste ausgeführt werden soll. Das zweite
% (nicht optionale Argument) ist der Name eines KOMA-Script-Pakets oder einer
-% KOMA-Script-Klasse einschließlich Dateiendung, das dritte (nicht optionale
+% KOMA-Script-Klasse einschließlich Dateiendung, das dritte (nicht optionale
% Argument) ist der Name der Option, die abgefragt werden soll.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
@@ -3565,30 +3702,30 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\post@kopt@hook}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \post@kopt@hook
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \post@kopt@hook
% \begin{macro}{\AfterKOMAoptions}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Verwendung von \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{kein \cs{let}}^^A
-% Eine Option kann dafür sorgen, dass nach den Optionen noch etwas passiert.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Verwendung von \cs{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{kein \cs{let}}%^^A
+% Eine Option kann dafür sorgen, dass nach den Optionen noch etwas passiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\AfterKOMAoptions}{\AtEndOfFamilyOptions}
%</koma>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \AfterKOMAoptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AfterKOMAoptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@addto@macro}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{neu (intern)}
-% Damit \cs{AfterKOMAoptions} lokal möglich ist, wird eine lokal arbeitende
-% Variante von \cs{g@addto@macro} benötigt, wie sie hier vorgestellt wird.
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/06/02}{korrigiert, damit es sich bezüglich
-% Erweiterung um Makrodefinitonen mit Argumenten wie \cs{g@addto@macro}^^A
-% verhält}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/04/20}{veraltete \eTeX-freie Version entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/04/20}{Warnung, falls eine inkompatible Definition
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{neu (intern)}
+% Damit \cs{AfterKOMAoptions} lokal möglich ist, wird eine lokal arbeitende
+% Variante von \cs{g@addto@macro} benötigt, wie sie hier vorgestellt wird.
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/06/02}{korrigiert, damit es sich bezüglich
+% Erweiterung um Makrodefinitonen mit Argumenten wie \cs{g@addto@macro}%^^A
+% verhält}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/04/20}{veraltete \eTeX-freie Version entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/04/20}{Warnung, falls eine inkompatible Definition
% von \cs{l@addto@macro} entdeckt wird}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{in den Optionen-Teil verschoben}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/16}{in den Optionen-Teil verschoben}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%</body>
%<*base&prepare>
@@ -3623,13 +3760,13 @@
%</base&prepare>
%<*body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@addto@macro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@addto@macro
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@addto@macro@a}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neu (intern)}
-% So eine ähnliche Anweisung benötige ich außerdem für den Fall, dass eine
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neu (intern)}
+% So eine ähnliche Anweisung benötige ich außerdem für den Fall, dass eine
% Anweisung erweitert werden soll, die genau ein obligatorisches Argument
-% benötigt. Achtung! Diese Anweisung funktioniert deutlich weniger allgemein
+% benötigt. Achtung! Diese Anweisung funktioniert deutlich weniger allgemein
% als \cs{l@addto@macro} und wird deshalb nie offiziell dokumentiert!
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -3665,12 +3802,12 @@
\endgroup
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@addto@macro@a
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@addto@macro@a
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@preto@macro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% In gewisser Weise das gleiche wie \cs{l@appto@macro}, allerdings wird vorn
-% statt hinten angefügt.
+% statt hinten angefügt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand\l@preto@macro[2]{%
@@ -3678,13 +3815,13 @@
}%
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@preto@macro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@preto@macro
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@preto@macro@a}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu (intern)}
-% So eine ähnliche Anweisung benötige ich außerdem für den Fall, dass eine
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu (intern)}
+% So eine ähnliche Anweisung benötige ich außerdem für den Fall, dass eine
% Anweisung erweitert werden soll, die genau ein obligatorisches Argument
-% benötigt. Achtung! Diese Anweisung funktioniert deutlich weniger allgemein
+% benötigt. Achtung! Diese Anweisung funktioniert deutlich weniger allgemein
% als \cs{l@preto@macro} und wird deshalb nie offiziell dokumentiert!
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -3720,11 +3857,11 @@
\endgroup
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@preto@macro@a
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@preto@macro@a
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAoption}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/12}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Einfacher Aufruf von \cs{FamilyOption}}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/12}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Einfacher Aufruf von \cs{FamilyOption}}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMAoption}{\FamilyOption{KOMA}}
@@ -3733,13 +3870,13 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyUnknownKeyValue}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/12}{no error while processing global options}^^A
-% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/05/28}{prevent remove from list of unused global
-% options globally}^^A
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{\cs{long}}^^A
-% Dieses Makro berichtet über Fehler wegen unbekannter Wertübergabe an einen
-% Schlüssel. Das erste Argument ist die Familie, das zweite der Schlüssel,
-% das dritte der Wert und das vierte die Liste der möglichen Werte.
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/12}{no error while processing global options}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/05/28}{prevent remove from list of unused global
+% options globally}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/17}{\cs{long}}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro berichtet über Fehler wegen unbekannter Wertübergabe an einen
+% Schlüssel. Das erste Argument ist die Familie, das zweite der Schlüssel,
+% das dritte der Wert und das vierte die Liste der möglichen Werte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand{\FamilyUnknownKeyValue}[4]{%
@@ -3757,9 +3894,9 @@
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyElseValues}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{wird intern nicht mehr verwendet}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung konnte ursprünglich vor dem Setzen eines Wertes definiert
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{wird intern nicht mehr verwendet}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung konnte ursprünglich vor dem Setzen eines Wertes definiert
% werden, um bei einer etwaigen Fehlermeldung weitere Werte als erlaubt
% auszugeben. Am Ende von \cs{FamilySetBool} und \cs{FamilySetNumerical}
% wird die Anweisung automatisch zu \cs{@empty}. Seit Version~3.12 wird
@@ -3769,15 +3906,15 @@
\newcommand*{\FamilyElseValues}{}
%</base>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyUnknownKeyValue
-% \end{macro}^^A \FamilyElseValue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyUnknownKeyValue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyElseValue
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyBoolKey}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel für eine Familie. Dieser Schlüssel
-% ist ein Schalter, der über diverse Werte geschaltet werden kann.
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel für eine Familie. Dieser Schlüssel
+% ist ein Schalter, der über diverse Werte geschaltet werden kann.
% Das erste, optionale Argument ist das Familienmitglied, das zweite,
-% obligatorische Argument ist die Familie, das dritte der Name des Schlüssels,
+% obligatorische Argument ist die Familie, das dritte der Name des Schlüssels,
% das vierte der Schalter.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -3789,21 +3926,24 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetBool}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/05/25}{Argument in Fehlermeldung korrigiert}^^A
-% Über diese Anweisung wird der Wert dann gesetzt. Dabei ist das erste
-% Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der
-% Schalter und das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/05/25}{Argument in Fehlermeldung korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{Leeres Argument ist \texttt{true}}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Anweisung wird der Wert dann gesetzt. Dabei ist das erste
+% Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der
+% Schalter und das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\FamilySetBool}[4]{%
- \ifstr{#4}{true}{\@nameuse{#3true}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
- \ifstr{#4}{on}{\@nameuse{#3true}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
- \ifstr{#4}{yes}{\@nameuse{#3true}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
- \ifstr{#4}{false}{\@nameuse{#3false}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
- \ifstr{#4}{off}{\@nameuse{#3false}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
- \ifstr{#4}{no}{\@nameuse{#3false}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
- \FamilyUnknownKeyValue{#1}{#2}{#4}{%
- `true', `on', `yes', `false', `off', `no'%
+ \ifstr{#4}{}{\@nameuse{#3true}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
+ \ifstr{#4}{true}{\@nameuse{#3true}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
+ \ifstr{#4}{on}{\@nameuse{#3true}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
+ \ifstr{#4}{yes}{\@nameuse{#3true}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
+ \ifstr{#4}{false}{\@nameuse{#3false}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
+ \ifstr{#4}{off}{\@nameuse{#3false}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
+ \ifstr{#4}{no}{\@nameuse{#3false}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}{%
+ \FamilyUnknownKeyValue{#1}{#2}{#4}{%
+ `true', `on', `yes', `false', `off', `no'%
+ }%
}%
}%
}%
@@ -3817,11 +3957,42 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+% \begin{macro}{\FamilyInverseBoolKey}
+% \changes{3.27}{2019/07/08}{new}
+% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetInverseBool}
+% \changes{3.27}{2019/07/08}{new}
+% These are similar to \cs{FamilyBoolKey} and \cs{FamilySetBoolKey} but use
+% inverse logic (true sets false and false sets true).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*base>
+\newcommand*{\FamilyInverseBoolKey}[4][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
+ \@ifundefined{if#4}{%
+ \expandafter\newif\csname if#4\endcsname
+ \@nameuse{#4true}%
+ }{}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[{#1}]{#2}{#3}[true]{\FamilySetInverseBool{#2}{#3}{#4}{##1}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\FamilySetInverseBool}[4]{%
+ \FamilySetBool{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname if#3\expandafter\endcsname\csname iftrue\endcsname
+ \@nameuse{#3false}%
+ \else
+ \@nameuse{#3true}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%</base>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilySetInverseBool
+% \end{macro}%^^A \FamilyInverseBoolKey
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@unknown@keyval}
-% Dieses Makro berichtet über Fehler wegen unbekannter Wertübergabe an
-% einen Schlüssel. Das erste Argument ist der Schlüssel, das zweite
-% der Wert und das dritte die Liste der möglichen Werte.
+% Dieses Makro berichtet über Fehler wegen unbekannter Wertübergabe an
+% einen Schlüssel. Das erste Argument ist der Schlüssel, das zweite
+% der Wert und das dritte die Liste der möglichen Werte.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@unknown@keyval}{\FamilyUnknownKeyValue{KOMA}}
@@ -3830,15 +4001,15 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@ifkey}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/04}{definiert ebenfalls das Familienmitglied}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/02}{ersetzt den gespeicherten Wert}^^A
-% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der einen Schalter an Hand des
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/04}{definiert ebenfalls das Familienmitglied}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/02}{ersetzt den gespeicherten Wert}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der einen Schalter an Hand des
% Wertes setzt. Als Werte sind "`\texttt{true}"', "`\texttt{false}"',
% "`\texttt{on}"', "`\texttt{off}"', "`\texttt{yes}"' und
-% "`\texttt{no}"' erlaubt. Der Default-Wert für den Schalter ist
-% grundsätzlich "`false"', so dass der Default-Wert für die Verwendung
-% des Schküssels grundsätzlich "`true"' ist. Das erste Argument ist
-% der Name des Schlüssels, der zweite ist der Name des Schalters.
+% "`\texttt{no}"' erlaubt. Der Default-Wert für den Schalter ist
+% grundsätzlich "`false"', so dass der Default-Wert für die Verwendung
+% des Schküssels grundsätzlich "`true"' ist. Das erste Argument ist
+% der Name des Schlüssels, der zweite ist der Name des Schalters.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@ifkey}[2][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -3863,8 +4034,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@set@ifkey}
% Die eigentliche Arbeit bei der ganzen Sache wird von diesem internen
-% Makro erledigt. Dabei wird der Name des Schlüssels zu Argument 1, der
-% Name des Schalters zu Argument 2 und der Wert des Schlüssels wird
+% Makro erledigt. Dabei wird der Name des Schlüssels zu Argument 1, der
+% Name des Schalters zu Argument 2 und der Wert des Schlüssels wird
% Argument 3.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
@@ -3875,20 +4046,20 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyCounterKey}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
-% unterstützt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der einen \LaTeX-Zähler an Hand
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
+% unterstützt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der einen \LaTeX-Zähler an Hand
% des Wertes setzt. Das erste, optionale Argument ist das Familienmitglied,
% das zweite, obligatorische Argument ist die Familie, das dritte der Name
-% des Schlüssels, das vierte, optionale ist der Säumniswert, das fünfte der
-% Name des \LaTeX-Zählers. Erlaubt sind alle Integer-Werte.
+% des Schlüssels, das vierte, optionale ist der Säumniswert, das fünfte der
+% Name des \LaTeX-Zählers. Erlaubt sind alle Integer-Werte.
% \begin{macro}{\Family@@Counter@@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@Counter@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyCounterKey}[3][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -3907,13 +4078,13 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetCounter}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{Leerzeichen durch \cs{relax} ersetzt}^^A
-% Über diese Anweisung wird der Wert dann gesetzt. Dabei ist das erste
-% Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der
-% Name des \LaTeX-Zählers, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{Leerzeichen durch \cs{relax} ersetzt}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Anweisung wird der Wert dann gesetzt. Dabei ist das erste
+% Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der
+% Name des \LaTeX-Zählers, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\FamilySetCounter}[4]{%
\begingroup
@@ -3952,30 +4123,30 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyCounterMacroKey}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
-% unterstützt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
+% unterstützt}%^^A
% Diese Anweisung arbeitet fast wie \cs{FamilyCounterKey}, allerdings wird
-% dabei nicht ein Zähler, sondern ein Marko auf einen Wert definiert. Dabei
+% dabei nicht ein Zähler, sondern ein Marko auf einen Wert definiert. Dabei
% ist das erste (optionale) Argument das Mitglied, das zweite die Familie, das
-% dritte der Schlüssel, das vierte (optionale) der Säumniswert, das fünfte das
+% dritte der Schlüssel, das vierte (optionale) der Säumniswert, das fünfte das
% Makro.
% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetCounterMacro}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/17}{\cs{aftergroup} vor
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/17}{\cs{aftergroup} vor
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% Diese Anweisung arbeitet fast wie \cs{FamilySetCounter}, allerdings wird
-% nicht ein Zähler gesetzt, sondern ein Makro auf einen Wert definiert. Dabei
-% ist das erste Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das
-% dritte das Makro, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
+% nicht ein Zähler gesetzt, sondern ein Makro auf einen Wert definiert. Dabei
+% ist das erste Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das
+% dritte das Makro, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
% \begin{macro}{\Family@@Counter@@Macro@@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@Counter@Macro@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyCounterMacroKey}[3][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -3995,8 +4166,8 @@
\newcommand*{\FamilySetCounterMacro}[4]{%
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
-% An dieser Stelle wird nun der immer definierte Zähler page als lokaler
-% Zähler verwendet. Das ist nur möglich, weil \cs{FamilySetCounter} nicht
+% An dieser Stelle wird nun der immer definierte Zähler page als lokaler
+% Zähler verwendet. Das ist nur möglich, weil \cs{FamilySetCounter} nicht
% global mit \cs{setcounter} arbeitet, sondern lokal mit einer Zuweisung an
% \cs{value}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4025,19 +4196,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyLengthKey}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
-% unterstützt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der eine \LaTeX-Länge an Hand
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
+% unterstützt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der eine \LaTeX-Länge an Hand
% des Wertes setzt. Das erste, optionale Argument ist das Familienmitglied,
% das zweite, obligatorische Argument ist die Familie, das dritte der Name
-% des Schlüssels, das vierte der name der \LaTeX-Länge.
+% des Schlüssels, das vierte der name der \LaTeX-Länge.
% \begin{macro}{\Family@@Length@@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@Length@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyLengthKey}[3][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -4056,14 +4227,14 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetLength}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2015/01/02}{\cs{ifglueexpr} hinzugefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{Expansion vor dem Test}^^A
-% Über diese Anweisung wird der Wert dann gesetzt. Dabei ist das erste
-% Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der
-% Name der \LaTeX-Länge, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2015/01/02}{\cs{ifglueexpr} hinzugefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{Expansion vor dem Test}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Anweisung wird der Wert dann gesetzt. Dabei ist das erste
+% Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte der
+% Name der \LaTeX-Länge, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\FamilySetLength}[4]{%
\begingroup
@@ -4112,29 +4283,29 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyLengthMacroKey}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
-% unterstützt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{er wird ein (optionaler) Säumniswert
+% unterstützt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetLengthMacro}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.14a}{2014/11/24}{fix: \cs{@tempskipa} statt \cs{@temskipa}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/17}{\cs{aftergroup} vor
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2015/01/02}{\cs{ifglueexpr} hinzugefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} ersetzt durch
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{interne Verwendung von \cs{FamilySetLength}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.14a}{2014/11/24}{fix: \cs{@tempskipa} statt \cs{@temskipa}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/17}{\cs{aftergroup} vor
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2015/01/02}{\cs{ifglueexpr} hinzugefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/06}{korrekte Verwendung von
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} ersetzt durch
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{interne Verwendung von \cs{FamilySetLength}}%^^A
% Diese Anweisungen arbeitet fast wie \cs{FamilyLengthKey} und
-% \cs{FamilySetLengt}, allerdings wird nicht eine Länge gesetzt, sondern
+% \cs{FamilySetLengt}, allerdings wird nicht eine Länge gesetzt, sondern
% ein Makro auf einen Wert definiert. Dabei ist das erste Argument die
-% Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte das Makro, das
-% vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
+% Familie, das zweite der Name des Schlüssels, das dritte das Makro, das
+% vierte schließlich der gewünschte Wert.
% \begin{macro}{\Family@@Length@@Macro@@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@Length@Macro@Key}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyLengthMacroKey}[3][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -4179,20 +4350,20 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyUseLengthMacroKey}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetUseLengthMacro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu}%^^A
% Diese Anweisungen arbeitet fast wie \cs{FamilyLengthKey} und
% \cs{FamilySetLengt}, allerdings wird das Makro nicht als den Wert des Werts,
% sondern als den Wert selbst definiert. Eine Expansion des Werts findet nur
-% für die Prüfung statt. Änderungen am Wert wirken sich also ggf. weiterhin
+% für die Prüfung statt. Änderungen am Wert wirken sich also ggf. weiterhin
% aus. Dabei ist das erste Argument die Familie, das zweite der Name des
-% Schlüssels, das dritte das Makro, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte
+% Schlüssels, das dritte das Makro, das vierte schließlich der gewünschte
% Wert.
% \begin{macro}{\Family@@UseLength@@Macro@@Key}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@USeLength@Macro@Key}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/27}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
\newcommand*{\FamilyUseLengthMacroKey}[3][.\@currname.\@currext]{%
@@ -4238,25 +4409,25 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyNumericalKey}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/04/30}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@Numerical@Key}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/28}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/03/31}{fehlendes Argument bei \cs{ifundefined}}
-% Ein ähnliches Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der ein nummerisches Makro
-% auf einen bestimmten Wert setzt. Dabei können auch verschiedene symbolische
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/28}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/03/31}{fehlendes Argument bei \cs{ifundefined}}
+% Ein ähnliches Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der ein nummerisches Makro
+% auf einen bestimmten Wert setzt. Dabei können auch verschiedene symbolische
% Werte auf denselben nummerischen Wert abgebildet werden. Das erste,
% optionale Argument ist das Familienmitglied, das zweite, obligatorische
% Argument ist die Familie, das dritte, obligatorische Argument ist der Name
-% der Option, das vierte, optionale Artument ist der Defaultwert für den
-% Schlüssel, das fünfte, obligatorische Argument ist der Name des Makros, das
+% der Option, das vierte, optionale Artument ist der Defaultwert für den
+% Schlüssel, das fünfte, obligatorische Argument ist der Name des Makros, das
% (in der Voreinstellung als 0) definiert werden soll, das sechste,
% obligatorische Argument ist die Liste der symbolischen und nummerischen
% Werte. Die Liste hat die Form:
% \{\emph{Symbol}\}\{\emph{Wert}\},\{\emph{Symbol}\}\{\emph{Wert}\}\dots
-% Das interne Makro wird benötigt, um das vierte, optionale Argument zu
-% ermöglichen. Dabei ist dann das erste Argument nicht mehr optional, sondern
+% Das interne Makro wird benötigt, um das vierte, optionale Argument zu
+% ermöglichen. Dabei ist dann das erste Argument nicht mehr optional, sondern
% obligatorisch.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -4277,11 +4448,11 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\FamilySetNumerical}
% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/05/28}{call of \cs{FamilyUnknownKeyValue} outside of
-% local group}^^A
+% local group}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/04}{komplett leere Listenelemente werden
-% ignoriert}^^A
+% ignoriert}%^^A
% Die eigentliche Arbeit dabei wird von diesem Makro erledigt. Dabei
-% wird die Familie zu Argument 1, der Name des Schlüssels zu Argument 2, der
+% wird die Familie zu Argument 1, der Name des Schlüssels zu Argument 2, der
% Name des Makros, das definiert werden soll zu Argument 3, die Liste zu
% Argument 4 und der Wert, auf den gesetzt werden soll, zu Argument 5.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4324,21 +4495,21 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@ncmdkey}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/04}{definiert ebenfalls das Familienmitglied}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{neu implementiert mit Speicherung der
-% Werte und optionalem erstem Argument}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/04}{definiert ebenfalls das Familienmitglied}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{neu implementiert mit Speicherung der
+% Werte und optionalem erstem Argument}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@ncmdkey}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@@ncmdkey}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Wie \cs{FamilyNumericalKey} mit zwei entscheidenden Unterschieden:
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Die Familien ist immer \texttt{KOMA} und entfällt daher als zweites
+% \item Die Familien ist immer \texttt{KOMA} und entfällt daher als zweites
% Argument.
-% \item Der gespeicherte Wert wird ausgetauscht. Daher kann es nicht nur für
+% \item Der gespeicherte Wert wird ausgetauscht. Daher kann es nicht nur für
% Optionen verwendet werden, bei denen die Werte exklusiv sind.
% \end{itemize}
-% Wichtig: Die Voreinstellung muss anschließend noch in jedem Fall mit
+% Wichtig: Die Voreinstellung muss anschließend noch in jedem Fall mit
% \cs{KOMA@kav@add} gesetzt werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
@@ -4369,7 +4540,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@set@ncmdkey}
% Die eigentliche Arbeit dabei wird wahlweise von diesem Makro erledigt. Dabei
-% wird der Name des Schlüssels zu Argument 1, der Name des Makros,
+% wird der Name des Schlüssels zu Argument 1, der Name des Makros,
% das definiert werden soll zu Argument 2, die Liste zu Argument 3 und
% der Wert, auf den gesetzt werden soll, zu Argument 4. Dabei wird allerdings
% kein gespeicherter Wert ersetzt!
@@ -4385,23 +4556,23 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyStringKey}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/03/31}{\cs{Family@String@Key} und
-% \cs{Family@@String@@Key} vertauscht}^^A
+% \cs{Family@@String@@Key} vertauscht}%^^A
% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@String@Key}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@@String@@Key}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Ein ähnliches Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der ein Makro auf einen
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/05}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Ein ähnliches Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der ein Makro auf einen
% beliegigen Wert setzt. Das erste, optionale Argument ist das
% Familienmitglied, das zweite, obligatorische Argument ist die Familie, das
% dritte, obligatorische Argument ist der Name der Option, das vierte,
-% optionale Artument ist der Defaultwert für den Schlüssel, das fünfte,
+% optionale Artument ist der Defaultwert für den Schlüssel, das fünfte,
% obligatorische Argument ist das Makros, das (in der Voreinstellung
-% als leer) definiert werden soll. Die internen Makro werden benötigt, um das
-% vierte, optionale Argument zu ermöglichen. Dabei ist dann das erste Argument
+% als leer) definiert werden soll. Die internen Makro werden benötigt, um das
+% vierte, optionale Argument zu ermöglichen. Dabei ist dann das erste Argument
% nicht mehr optional, sondern obligatorisch.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -4424,21 +4595,21 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\FamilyCSKey}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@CS@Key}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\Family@@CS@@Key}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/11/06}{Es wird wirklich diese Anweisung (statt erneut
-% \cs{Family@@String@@Key}) definiert}^^A
-% Ein ähnliches Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der eine Befehlssequenz auf
+% \cs{Family@@String@@Key}) definiert}%^^A
+% Ein ähnliches Makro definiert einen Schlüssel, der eine Befehlssequenz auf
% einen beliegigen Wert setzt. Das erste, optionale Argument ist das
% Familienmitglied, das zweite, obligatorische Argument ist die Familie, das
% dritte, obligatorische Argument ist der Name der Option, das vierte,
-% optionale Artument ist der Defaultwert für den Schlüssel, das fünfte,
+% optionale Artument ist der Defaultwert für den Schlüssel, das fünfte,
% obligatorische Argument ist der Name des Makros, das (in der Voreinstellung
-% als leer) definiert werden soll. Die internen Makro werden benötigt, um das
-% vierte, optionale Argument zu ermöglichen. Dabei ist dann das erste Argument
+% als leer) definiert werden soll. Die internen Makro werden benötigt, um das
+% vierte, optionale Argument zu ermöglichen. Dabei ist dann das erste Argument
% nicht mehr optional, sondern obligatorisch.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*base>
@@ -4461,19 +4632,19 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@DeclareDeprecatedOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@@DeclareDeprecatedOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Mit Hilfe dieses Makros kann eine Option definiert werden, die
-% eigentlich obsolete ist. Statt dieser Option wird dann ein Schlüssel
+% eigentlich obsolete ist. Statt dieser Option wird dann ein Schlüssel
% verwendet. Das erste Argument ist optional und muss dann der Paketname
% sein. Ist es nicht gesetzt, so wird stattdessen die Klasse
% \cs{KOMAClassName} angenommen. Das zweite Argument ist der Name der
-% Option. Das vierte Argument ist das Setzen des gewünschten Schlüssels.
+% Option. Das vierte Argument ist das Setzen des gewünschten Schlüssels.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption}{%
@@ -4489,13 +4660,13 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@UseDeprecatedOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Test für \texttt{version!=first}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/22}{vertauschte Logic für
-% \texttt{version!=first} korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{diverse \cs{detokenize} eingefügt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Test für \texttt{version!=first}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/22}{vertauschte Logic für
+% \texttt{version!=first} korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{diverse \cs{detokenize} eingefügt}%^^A
% Die eigentliche Arbeit wird von diesem Makro erledigt. Die Argumente sind
-% 1. Meldungsbefehl, 2. obsolete Option, 3. Setzen des Schlüssels.
+% 1. Meldungsbefehl, 2. obsolete Option, 3. Setzen des Schlüssels.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\KOMA@UseDeprecatedOption}[3]{%
\begingroup
@@ -4532,26 +4703,26 @@
}
%</koma>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@UseDeprecatedOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@@@DeclareDeprecatedOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@@DeclareDeprecatedOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@UseDeprecatedOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@@@DeclareDeprecatedOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@@DeclareDeprecatedOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@DeclareStandardOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@DeclareStandardOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@@DeclareStandardOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Mit Hilfe dieses Makros kann eine Option definiert werden, die
-% eigentlich obsolete ist. Statt dieser Option wird dann ein Schlüssel
+% eigentlich obsolete ist. Statt dieser Option wird dann ein Schlüssel
% verwendet. Das erste Argument ist optional und muss dann der Paketname
% sein. Ist es nicht gesetzt, so wird stattdessen die Klasse
% \cs{KOMAClassName} angenommen. Das zweite Argument ist der Name der
-% Option. Das vierte Argument ist das Setzen des gewünschten Schlüssels.
+% Option. Das vierte Argument ist das Setzen des gewünschten Schlüssels.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*koma>
\newcommand*{\KOMA@DeclareStandardOption}{%
@@ -4567,9 +4738,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@UseStandardOption}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Die eigentliche Arbeit wird von diesem Makro erledigt. Die Argumente sind
-% 1. Meldungsbefehl, 2. obsolete Option, 3. Setzen des Schlüssels.
+% 1. Meldungsbefehl, 2. obsolete Option, 3. Setzen des Schlüssels.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\KOMA@UseStandardOption}[3]{%
\begingroup
@@ -4591,46 +4762,46 @@
%</koma>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@sr@co}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/22}{beseitigt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sr@co
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@UseStandardOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@@@DeclareStandardOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@@DeclareStandardOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@DeclareStandardOption
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/22}{beseitigt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@sr@co
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@UseStandardOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@@@DeclareStandardOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@@DeclareStandardOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@DeclareStandardOption
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@DeclareObsoleteOption}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{\cs{CurrentOption wir geschützt}}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/20}{\cs{CurrentOption wir geschützt}}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@DeclareObsoleteOption}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@@@DeclareObsoleteOption}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@iv@DeclareObsoleteOption}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@UseObsoleteOption}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@UseObsoleteOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@iv@DeclareObsoleteOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@iii@DeclareObsoleteOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@ii@DeclareObsoleteOption
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@i@DeclareObsoleteOption
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{entfernt weil unbenutzt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@UseObsoleteOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@iv@DeclareObsoleteOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@iii@DeclareObsoleteOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@ii@DeclareObsoleteOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@i@DeclareObsoleteOption
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@newdeprecatedcommand}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{renamed \cs{KOMA@newobsoletecommand} into
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{renamed \cs{KOMA@newobsoletecommand} into
% \cs{KOMA@newdeprecatedcommand}}
% Mit Hilfe dieses Makros kann ein Makro definiert werden, das
% eigentlich obsolete ist. Das Makro verwendet dann schlicht einen
-% Schlüssel. Das erste Argument ist optional und muss dann entweder
+% Schlüssel. Das erste Argument ist optional und muss dann entweder
% \cs{PackageInfo}, \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}, \cs{PackageWarning} oder
% \cs{PackageWarningNoLine} sein. Das zweite Argument ist das Makro.
-% Das dritte Argument ist das Setzen des gewünschten Schlüssels. Das
+% Das dritte Argument ist das Setzen des gewünschten Schlüssels. Das
% definierte Makro selbst hat Schaltercharakter, ist also nicht
% \cs{long} und versteht auch keine Argumente.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4640,8 +4811,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\KOMA@UseDeprecatedCommand}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{renamed \cs{KOMA@UseObsoleteCommand} into
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{renamed \cs{KOMA@UseObsoleteCommand} into
% \cs{KOMA@UseDeprecatedCommand}}
% Die eigentliche Arbeit wird von diesem Makro erledigt. Die Argumente sind
% dieselben.
@@ -4658,9 +4829,211 @@
}
%</koma>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@UseDeprecatedCommand
-% \end{macro}^^A \KOMA@newdeprecatedcommand
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@UseDeprecatedCommand
+% \end{macro}%^^A \KOMA@newdeprecatedcommand
+%
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+% \subsection{Do Hook Mechanism}
+% \label{sec:dohook}
+%
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{Do hook mechanism added}%^^A
+% From \KOMAScript~v3.27 there is a new general hook mechanism called ``do
+% hook mechanism''. This mechanism is mentioned to provide extended hooks for
+% package authors. All hooks newly implemented in \KOMAScript{} \emph{should}
+% use this new mechanism.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ForDoHook}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/05}{New}%^^A
+% Arguments:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{specificator}:]
+% \meta{string} or \meta{string}\texttt{/}\meta{specificator}
+% \item[\meta{code}:] \LaTeX{} code
+% \end{description}
+% Executes \meta{code} for earch level of a do-hook. This is a helper command
+% normally not interesting for users or package authors. However, I define it
+% in the user context to be consistent with the other do-hook commands. Note,
+% there will be two arguments appended to the \meta{code}. The first one is
+% the name of the hook, the second one the hook argument.
+% See \cs{ExecuteDoHook} as an example.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*base>
+\newcommand*{\ForDoHook}[2]{%
+ \ifstr{#1}{}{%
+ \PackageError{scrbase}{empty do-hook specificator}{%
+ You've tried to use an empty do-hook specificator,\MessageBreak
+ but do-hook specificators must not be empty.%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \let\scr@hookname\relax
+ \edef\scr@hookargument{#1}%
+ \loop
+ \scr@hooksplit@specificator\scr@hookname\scr@hookargument
+ \scr@hookargument
+ \begingroup\edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{\endgroup #2}{\scr@hookname}{\scr@hookargument}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ \ifx\scr@hookargument\@empty\else
+ \repeat
+ \let\scr@hookname\relax
+ \let\scr@hookargument\relax
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\SplitDoHook}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{New}%^^A
+% Arguments:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{specificator}:]
+% \meta{string} or \meta{string}\texttt{/}\meta{specificator}
+% \item[\meta{prefix command}:] \LaTeX{} macro
+% \item[\meta{postfix command}:] \LaTeX{} macro
+% \end{description}
+% Splits of the \emph{last} element of the \meta{specificator}. The
+% \meta{postfix command} is defined to be that last element, the \meta{prefix
+% command} is defined to be the rest.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\SplitDoHook}[3]{%
+ \ifstr{#1}{}{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrbase}{empty do-hook specificator}%
+ \let#2\@empty\let#3\@empty
+ }{%
+ \let#2\relax
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded{\scr@hooksplit@specificator{#2}{#3}}{#1}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@hooksplit@specificator}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{New internal}%^^A
+% Split of the first string of the specificator argument, append it to
+% \cs{scr@hookname} and store the rest in \cs{scr@hookargument}. The argument
+% must not be empty!
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@hooksplit@specificator}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{New internal}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@hooksplit@specificator}[3]{%
+ \expandafter\scr@@hooksplit@specificator\expandafter#1\expandafter#2#3/\@nil
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@@hooksplit@specificator}{}
+\def\scr@@hooksplit@specificator#1#2#3/#4\@nil{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@hookname}{\def#1{#3}}{%
+ \edef#1{#1/#3}%
+ }%
+ \def#2{#4}%
+ \ifx#2\@empty\else \scr@@hookargument#2#4\@nil\fi
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@@hookargument}{}
+\def\scr@@hookargument#1#2/\@nil{\def#1{#2}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteDoHook}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{New}%^^A
+% Arguments:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{specificator}:]
+% \meta{string} or \meta{string}\texttt{/}\meta{specificator}
+% \end{description}
+% Each string of the \meta{specificator} defines a hook subgroup. The
+% execution is done in a loop, first all hook elements of the first
+% \meta{string} of the \meta{specificator} are executed with the rest of the
+% \meta{specificator} as an argument. Then the hook elements of the
+% composition of the first and the second \meta{string} are executed again
+% with the rest of the \meta{specificator} as an agument and so on until the
+% hook elements of the whole \meta{specificator} has been executed with an
+% empty argument. So every hook element has to expect an argument that is
+% itself a \meta{specificator}. At each loop level the one-time hooks
+% are executed after the permanent hooks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ExecuteDoHook}[1]{%
+ \@ifundefined{scr@execute@dohook}{%
+ \def\scr@execute@dohook##1##2{%
+ \def\scr@hook@do####1{####1{##2}}%
+ \@nameuse{scr@dohook@##1}%
+ \@nameuse{scr@otdohook@##1}%
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let
+ \csname scr@otdohook@##1\endcsname\@empty
+ \let\scr@hook@do\relax
+ }%
+ \ForDoHook{#1}{\scr@execute@dohook}%
+ \let\scr@execute@dohook\relax
+ }{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrbase}{cascaded do-hook detected.\MessageBreak
+ It seems, that the do-hook `\detokenize{#1}'\MessageBreak
+ is be executed, while another do-hook is active.\MessageBreak
+ This is not allowed and therefore ignored%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\AddtoDoHook}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{New}%^^A
+% Arguments:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{specificator}:]
+% \meta{string} or \meta{string}\texttt{/}\meta{specificator}
+% \item[\meta{element}:]
+% a \LaTeX command, that expects exactly one argument.
+% \end{description}
+% For the \meta{specificator} see \cs{ExecuteDoHook}. Here you can add an
+% \meta{element} to a hook defined by the \meta{specificator}. Adding a hook
+% is local to the current group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\AddtoDoHook}[2]{%
+ \ifstr{#1}{}{%
+ \PackageError{scrbase}{empty hook specificator}{%
+ As hook specificators can never be empty, the first argument\MessageBreak
+ of \string\AddtoDoHook\space must expand to an not empty string.%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dohook@#1}{\@namedef{scr@dohook@#1}{}}{}%
+ \expandafter\l@addto@macro\csname scr@dohook@#1\endcsname{%
+ \scr@hook@do{#2}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AddtoOneTimeDoHook}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{New}%^^A
+% Arguments:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{specificator}:]
+% \meta{string} or \meta{string}\texttt{/}\meta{specificator}
+% \item[\meta{element}:]
+% a \LaTeX command, that expects exactly one argument.
+% \end{description}
+% This is almost the same as \cs{AddtoDoHook} but a hook added by this command
+% is executed only once.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\AddtoOneTimeDoHook}[2]{%
+ \ifstr{#1}{}{%
+ \PackageError{scrbase}{empty hook specificator}{%
+ As hook specificators can never be empty, the first argument\MessageBreak
+ of \string\AddtoDoHook\space must expand to an not empty string.%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@otdohook@#1}{\@namedef{scr@otdohook@#1}{}}{}%
+ \expandafter\l@addto@macro\csname scr@otdohook@#1\endcsname{%
+ \scr@hook@do{#2}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+%</base>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
%
% \iffalse
%</body>
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
index 0963bc4d7a..48950683bc 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-bibliography.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-bibliography.dtx 3016 2018-09-03 11:40:59Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-bibliography.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-09-03 13:40:59 +0200 (Mon, 03 Sep 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1872 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-bibliography.dtx}
@@ -115,24 +114,24 @@
% \iffalse
%<*option>
% \fi
-% \subsection{Anweisungen, die für die Optionen benötigt werden}
+% \subsection{Anweisungen, die für die Optionen benötigt werden}
%
-% Einige Anweisungen werden über Optionen verändert. Dazu müssen sie aber
+% Einige Anweisungen werden über Optionen verändert. Dazu müssen sie aber
% bereits vor der Abarbeitung der Optionen definiert sein.
%
% \subsubsection{Literaturverzeichnisstile}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newbibstyle}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung des Werts für Option
-% \texttt{bibliography}}^^A
-% Neue Literaturverzeichnisstile müssen mit dieser Anweisung definiert werden,
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung des Werts für Option
+% \texttt{bibliography}}%^^A
+% Neue Literaturverzeichnisstile müssen mit dieser Anweisung definiert werden,
% wenn sie von der Fehlermeldung korrekt angezeigt werden sollen. Das erste,
% optionale Argument ist der Name eines Elternstils. Das zweite
-% Argument ist der Name des Stils. Das dritte Argument ist Code für den
-% Stil. Darin sollten normalerweise Umdefinierungen für \cs{@openbib@code},
+% Argument ist der Name des Stils. Das dritte Argument ist Code für den
+% Stil. Darin sollten normalerweise Umdefinierungen für \cs{@openbib@code},
% \cs{newblock}, \cs{bib@beginhook}, \cs{bib@endhook} enthalten sein. Die
-% genannten Makros werden am Anfang des Stils zurückgesetzt. Danach wird der
+% genannten Makros werden am Anfang des Stils zurückgesetzt. Danach wird der
% Elternstil geladen und dann die eigenen Definitionen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newbibstyle}[3][]{%
@@ -155,10 +154,10 @@
\let\bib@endhook\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@current@bibstyle}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Das Makro \cs{scr@current@bibstyle} wird benötigt, um den aktuellen Wert von
-% Option \texttt{bibliography} korrigieren zu können. Es wird direkt vom Stil
-% definiert, der auch die Korrektur des Optionenwerts durchführt.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Das Makro \cs{scr@current@bibstyle} wird benötigt, um den aktuellen Wert von
+% Option \texttt{bibliography} korrigieren zu können. Es wird direkt vom Stil
+% definiert, der auch die Korrektur des Optionenwerts durchführt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{scr@current@bibstyle}{}{%
\ifstr{\scr@current@bibstyle}{}{}{%
@@ -189,16 +188,16 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@bibstyle@}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
% Nur ein Dummy, wenn kein Elternstil existiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@bibstyle@}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\bib@beginhook}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
% \begin{macro}{\bib@endhook}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
% Die beiden Haken, wie sie durch den Literaturverzeichnisstil vorgegeben
% werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -208,18 +207,18 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@bibstylelist}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
% Liste der mit \cs{newbibstyle} definierten und daher bekannten
% Literaturverzeichnisstile.
% \begin{macro}{\@openbib@code}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{wird nun früher definiert}^^A
-% Code, der am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses ausgeführt wird und
-% normalerweise ursprünglich für die \texttt{openbib}-Funktionalität verwendet
-% wurde. Inzwischen wird er für die komplette Stilauswahl verwendet.
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{wird nun früher definiert}%^^A
+% Code, der am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses ausgeführt wird und
+% normalerweise ursprünglich für die \texttt{openbib}-Funktionalität verwendet
+% wurde. Inzwischen wird er für die komplette Stilauswahl verwendet.
% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Grundeinstellung geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{wird nun früher definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Grundeinstellung geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{wird nun früher definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@bibstylelist}{\@gobble}
\newcommand*{\@openbib@code}{}
@@ -229,13 +228,13 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@bibstyle@openstyle}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%
% Vordefiniert sind zwei Stile. Mit dem Bibliographystil \texttt{openstyle}
-% kann eine alternative Darstellung der Literatureinträge aktiviert
-% werden. Dabei fügt \cs{newblock} keinen horizontalen Abstand mehr ein,
+% kann eine alternative Darstellung der Literatureinträge aktiviert
+% werden. Dabei fügt \cs{newblock} keinen horizontalen Abstand mehr ein,
% sondern beginnt einen neuen Absatz (in Form einer neuen Zeile).
% \begin{macro}{\scr@bibstyle@oldstyle}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% Der Stil \texttt{oldstyle} entspricht hingegen der Voreinstellung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newbibstyle{openstyle}{%
@@ -257,26 +256,26 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Überschrift des Literaturverzeichnisses}
+% \subsubsection{Ãœberschrift des Literaturverzeichnisses}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bib@heading}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{die Präambel wird gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{\cs{setchapterpreamble} wird verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/06/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
-% \texttt{thebibliography}-Umgebung verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{wird nun früher definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/02/06}{\cs{ifbib@leveldown} wird beachtet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13b}{2014/10/10}{running head with \texttt{leveldown}^^A
-% fixed}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{use always \cs{@mkright} and \cs{@mkdouble}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{using \cs{bibliography@heading}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{die Präambel wird gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{\cs{setchapterpreamble} wird verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/06/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
+% \texttt{thebibliography}-Umgebung verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{wird nun früher definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/02/06}{\cs{ifbib@leveldown} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13b}{2014/10/10}{running head with \texttt{leveldown}%^^A
+% fixed}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{use always \cs{@mkright} and \cs{@mkdouble}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{using \cs{bibliography@heading}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\bibliography@heading}
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{neu (intern)}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/03}{Verwendung von \cs{addsecmark}
-% oder \cs{subsectionmark} statt \cs{@mkright}}^^A
-% Befehl zum Setzen der Überschrift des Literaturverzeichnisses.
+% oder \cs{subsectionmark} statt \cs{@mkright}}%^^A
+% Befehl zum Setzen der Ãœberschrift des Literaturverzeichnisses.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bib@heading}{%
%<article> \bibliography@heading{\refname}%
@@ -304,32 +303,32 @@
% \end{macro}%
%
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für das Literaturverzeichnis}
+% \subsection{Optionen für das Literaturverzeichnis}
%
% \begin{option}{bibliography}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/06}{neuer Wert \texttt{leveldown}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/06}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardlevel}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{an die Änderungen in \textsf{scrbase}^^A
-% angepasst}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/28}{Verwendung von \cs{addxcontentsline} statt
-% \cs{addcontentsline}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/28}{Es werden keine Kapiteleinträge in andere
-% Verzeichnisse geschrieben.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{use always \cs{@mkright} and
-% \cs{@mkdouble}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{redefines \cs{bibliography@heading} instead of
-% \cs{bib@heading}}^^A
-% Dies ist der Generalschlüssel für alle Optionen, die das
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/06}{neuer Wert \texttt{leveldown}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/06}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardlevel}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{an die Änderungen in \textsf{scrbase}%^^A
+% angepasst}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/28}{Verwendung von \cs{addxcontentsline} statt
+% \cs{addcontentsline}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/28}{Es werden keine Kapiteleinträge in andere
+% Verzeichnisse geschrieben.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{use always \cs{@mkright} and
+% \cs{@mkdouble}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{redefines \cs{bibliography@heading} instead of
+% \cs{bib@heading}}%^^A
+% Dies ist der Generalschlüssel für alle Optionen, die das
% Literaturverzeichnis betreffen. Neu ist, dass verschiedene Stile definiert
-% werden können. Desweiteren kann man \texttt{totoc} und
+% werden können. Desweiteren kann man \texttt{totoc} und
% \texttt{totocnumbered} wieder mit \texttt{nottotoc} aufgeben.
% \begin{macro}{\ifbib@leveldown}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/06}{neuer Schalter (intern)}^^A
-% Für den ab Version~3.12 neuen Wert \texttt{leveldown} und dessen
-% Gegenstück \texttt{standardlevel} wird außerdem ein Schalter benötigt.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/06}{neuer Schalter (intern)}%^^A
+% Für den ab Version~3.12 neuen Wert \texttt{leveldown} und dessen
+% Gegenstück \texttt{standardlevel} wird außerdem ein Schalter benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbib@leveldown
\KOMA@key{bibliography}{%
@@ -375,9 +374,9 @@
%<*article>
\ifbib@leveldown
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@toc}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@toc}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{Verwendung von \cs{addsubsectiontocentry} statt
-% \cs{addxcontentsline}}^^A
+% \cs{addxcontentsline}}%^^A
% Ab Version 3.23 wird das von \textsf{tocbasic} bereitgestellte
% \cs{ext@toc} statt dem hart codierten \texttt{toc} verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -460,14 +459,14 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{openbib}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{if@openbib} (\cs{@openbibtrue},
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{if@openbib} (\cs{@openbibtrue},
% \cs{@openbibfalse}) entfernt}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Definition der openbib Option neu
-% implementiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{obsolete}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Definition der openbib Option neu
+% implementiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{obsolete}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}%^^A
% Mit dieser Option kann eine alternative Darstellung der
-% Literatureinträge aktiviert werden. Dabei fügt \cs{newblock} keinen
+% Literatureinträge aktiviert werden. Dabei fügt \cs{newblock} keinen
% horizontalen Abstand mehr ein, sondern beginnt einen neuen Absatz
% (in Form einer neuen Zeile).
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -476,31 +475,31 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{bibtotoc}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6b}{2000/05/26}{\cs{@mkboth} eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{\cs{bibpreamble} eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.7}{2001/01/03}{Klammerung korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/06/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
-% thebibliography-Umgebung verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{obsolete}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6b}{2000/05/26}{\cs{@mkboth} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{\cs{bibpreamble} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.7}{2001/01/03}{Klammerung korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/06/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
+% thebibliography-Umgebung verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{obsolete}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{bibtotocnumbered}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6b}{2000/05/26}{\cs{@mkboth} eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{\cs{bibpreamble} eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.7}{2001/01/03}{Klammerung korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{\cs{setchapterpreamble} wird
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6b}{2000/05/26}{\cs{@mkboth} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{\cs{bibpreamble} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.7}{2001/01/03}{Klammerung korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{\cs{setchapterpreamble} wird
% verwendet}
-% \changes{v2.7i}{2001/05/17}{\cs{chapter} statt \cs{addchap}}
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/06/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
-% thebibliography-Umgebung verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/07/07}{Nummerierung im Kolumnentitel}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{obsolete}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
-% Die Option \texttt{bibtotoc} sorgt dafür, dass das
-% Literaturverzeichnis im Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgeführt wird.
-% Demgegenüber erweitert die Option \texttt{bibtotocnumbered} zu einem
-% normalen Kapitel einschließlich Nummerierung.
+% \changes{v2.7i}{2001/05/17}{\cs{chapter} statt \cs{addchap}}
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/06/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
+% thebibliography-Umgebung verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/07/07}{Nummerierung im Kolumnentitel}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{obsolete}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Die Option \texttt{bibtotoc} sorgt dafür, dass das
+% Literaturverzeichnis im Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgeführt wird.
+% Demgegenüber erweitert die Option \texttt{bibtotocnumbered} zu einem
+% normalen Kapitel einschließlich Nummerierung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{bibtotoc}{bibliography=totoc}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{bibtotocnumbered}{bibliography=totocnumbered}
@@ -528,29 +527,29 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für das Literaturverzeichnis}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für das Literaturverzeichnis}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setbibpreamble}
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{\cs{renewcommand} durch \cs{def}
-% ersetzt zur Erhöhung der \textsf{natbib}-Kompatibilität}
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{\cs{renewcommand} durch \cs{def}
+% ersetzt zur Erhöhung der \textsf{natbib}-Kompatibilität}
% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neue (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6d}{2000/07/20}{Makro funktioniert nachdem \cs{let}^^A
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neue (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6d}{2000/07/20}{Makro funktioniert nachdem \cs{let}%^^A
% durch \cs{newcommand*} ersetzt wurde}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/10}{wieder \cs{let}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/10}{wieder \cs{let}}
% \cs{bibpreamble} kann vom Benutzer mit \cs{setbibpreamble} auf
-% einen Text gesetzt werden, der nach der Überschrift eingefügt
+% einen Text gesetzt werden, der nach der Überschrift eingefügt
% wird. Dasselbe Makro wird von \textsf{natbib} als \cs{relax}
-% definiert; aus Kompatibilitätsgründen wird hier vergleichbar
+% definiert; aus Kompatibilitätsgründen wird hier vergleichbar
% verfahren und \cs{let} bzw. \cs{def} statt \cs{renewcommand}
% verwendet.
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
% \texttt{thebibliography}-Umgebung verschoben}
-% Außerdem wird ab Version 2.7j die Präambel nicht mehr in
+% Außerdem wird ab Version 2.7j die Präambel nicht mehr in
% \cs{bib@heading} gesetzt, sondern in der
% \texttt{thebibliography}-Umgebung. Dies dient ebenfalls der
-% Kompatibilität mit natbib. Trotz aller Kompatibilität ist
+% Kompatibilität mit natbib. Trotz aller Kompatibilität ist
% \cs{bibpreamble} als internes Makro zu betrachten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bibpreamble}{\relax}
@@ -561,7 +560,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{Length}{bibindent}
-% Der Einzug der Einträge bei \texttt{openbib}. Voreingestellt sind
+% Der Einzug der Einträge bei \texttt{openbib}. Voreingestellt sind
% 1,5\,em.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\bibindent
@@ -570,17 +569,17 @@
% \end{Length}
%
% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/01}{in \textsf{scrartcl} \cs{bibname}
-% vollständig durch \cs{refname} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{bib@heading}}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/10}{Erkennung und gesonderte Behandlung
-% leerer Präambeln}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/03/06}{Vergleich \cs{bibpreamble} mit \cs{@empty}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/01}{in \textsf{scrartcl} \cs{bibname}
+% vollständig durch \cs{refname} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{bib@heading}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/10}{Erkennung und gesonderte Behandlung
+% leerer Präambeln}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/03/06}{Vergleich \cs{bibpreamble} mit \cs{@empty}
% korrigiert}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neue Haken \cs{bib@before@hook} und
-% \cs{bib@after@hook} eingefügt}
-% Nun werden noch die Umgebung für das Literaturverzeichnis und der
-% Befehl für die einzelnen Einträge definiert.
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neue Haken \cs{bib@before@hook} und
+% \cs{bib@after@hook} eingefügt}
+% Nun werden noch die Umgebung für das Literaturverzeichnis und der
+% Befehl für die einzelnen Einträge definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
\if@bib@break@
@@ -602,7 +601,7 @@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\BreakBibliography}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}%^^A
% An dieser Stelle wird \cs{BreakBibliography} passend umdefiniert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\BreakBibliography}[1]{%
@@ -663,11 +662,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\if@bib@break@}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\no@bib@break}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@bib@break}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% Dieser Hilfsschalter arbeitet immer global!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@bib@break@
@@ -678,9 +677,9 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\bib@before@hook}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\bib@after@hook}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bib@before@hook}{}
\newcommand*{\bib@after@hook}{}
@@ -690,9 +689,9 @@
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\BreakBibliography}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung unterbricht normalerweise das Literaturverzeichnis für ein
-% paar eigene Anweisungen (z. B. Unterüberschriften). Wenn jedoch nicht das
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung unterbricht normalerweise das Literaturverzeichnis für ein
+% paar eigene Anweisungen (z. B. Unterüberschriften). Wenn jedoch nicht das
% \KOMAScript-Literaturverzeichnis verwendet wird, dann gibt es eine Warnung
% aus.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -708,12 +707,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AfterBibliographyPreamble}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AtEndBibliography}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/15}{Neu}%^^A
% Zwei neue Anweisungen, um am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses, nach
-% Überschrift und Präambel, und am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses, nach
-% Abschluss der Liste, Code einschleusen zu können. Das funktioniert natürlich
+% Überschrift und Präambel, und am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses, nach
+% Abschluss der Liste, Code einschleusen zu können. Das funktioniert natürlich
% nur so lange, wie keine Paket verwendet wird, das die Umgebung umdefiniert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\AfterBibliographyPreamble}{\g@addto@macro\bib@before@hook}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
index af2f1319d4..c05abcdb07 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-circularletters.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-circularletters.dtx 2640 2017-05-08 09:36:55Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-circularletters.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-05-08 11:36:55 +0200 (Mon, 08 May 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1872 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-circularletters.dtx}
@@ -101,8 +100,8 @@
%
% \section{Serienbriefe und Adressdateien}
%
-% Die \KOMAScript-Brief-Klasse unterstützt die Verwendung von Adressdateien
-% beispielsweise für Serienbriefe.
+% Die \KOMAScript-Brief-Klasse unterstützt die Verwendung von Adressdateien
+% beispielsweise für Serienbriefe.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
%
@@ -112,7 +111,7 @@
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Option}
-% Die Implementierung ist von Optionen unabhängig.
+% Die Implementierung ist von Optionen unabhängig.
%
%
% \iffalse
@@ -120,17 +119,17 @@
%<*body>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Makos für Serienbriefe und Adressdateien}
+% \subsection{Makos für Serienbriefe und Adressdateien}
%
% \begin{macro}{\adrentry}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/05/19}{\cs{adrentry} verwendet das neue
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/05/19}{\cs{adrentry} verwendet das neue
% \cs{addrentry}}
% \begin{macro}{\adrchar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/05/19}{\cs{adrchar} verwendet das neue \cs{addrchar}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/05/19}{\cs{adrchar} verwendet das neue \cs{addrchar}}
% Serienbriefe werden mit Hilfe der Funktionen |\adrentry| und |\adrchar| und
-% einer Adressdatei realisiert. Darüber hinaus werden mit diesen Befehlen
-% Abkürzungen für Adressen definiert. Durch die Definition mit Hilfe von
-% \cs{addrentry} bzw. \cs{addrchar} müssen vom Anwender für neue Anwendungen
+% einer Adressdatei realisiert. Darüber hinaus werden mit diesen Befehlen
+% Abkürzungen für Adressen definiert. Durch die Definition mit Hilfe von
+% \cs{addrentry} bzw. \cs{addrchar} müssen vom Anwender für neue Anwendungen
% nur die neuen Befehle umdefiniert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\adrentry}[7]{%
@@ -141,10 +140,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addrentry}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/06}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\addrchar}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Diese Makros ermöglichen ab Version 2.8n die Verwendung von bis zu 9
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Diese Makros ermöglichen ab Version 2.8n die Verwendung von bis zu 9
% Argumenten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addrentry}[9]{\def\@tempa{#1}\ifx \@tempa\@empty \else
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx
index 191a302d6d..417376acfd 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% \CheckSum{218}
+% \CheckSum{219}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-compatibility.dtx
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-compatibility.dtx 3063 2019-02-01 07:39:11Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-compatibility.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<init>%%% (run: init)
%<option>%%% (run: option)
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\def\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2019-02-01 08:39:11 +0100 (Fri, 01 Feb 2019) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\def\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1638 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -79,7 +79,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-compatibility.dtx}
@@ -102,44 +101,44 @@
% erste Version aus der Aufteilung von \textsf{scrclass.dtx}}
%
%
-% \section{Kompatibilität mit den Standardklassen oder
-% zu früheren Versionen}
+% \section{Kompatibilität mit den Standardklassen oder
+% zu früheren Versionen}
%
-% \KOMAScript{} ist bezüglich der Anwenderschnittstelle von vornherein
-% aufwärtskompatibel mit den Standardklassen. Allerdings unterscheiden sich
+% \KOMAScript{} ist bezüglich der Anwenderschnittstelle von vornherein
+% aufwärtskompatibel mit den Standardklassen. Allerdings unterscheiden sich
% diverse Voreinstellungen doch sehr erheblich von denen der
% Standardklassen. In Zukunft soll man beim Laden der Klassen (nicht jedoch
-% später!) mit Option \texttt{emulatestandardclasses} die Voreinstellungen
-% anpassen können. Dabei wird jedoch nicht komplette Umbruchkompatibilität mit
+% später!) mit Option \texttt{emulatestandardclasses} die Voreinstellungen
+% anpassen können. Dabei wird jedoch nicht komplette Umbruchkompatibilität mit
% den Standardklassen erreicht, sondern nur einige Einstellungen werden
% angepasst.
%
%
% Manchmal ist es sinnvoll, dass sich eine neue Version von \KOMAScript{}
-% etwas anders verhält als frühere Versionen. Gleichzeitig ist es aber für den
+% etwas anders verhält als frühere Versionen. Gleichzeitig ist es aber für den
% Anwender manchmal auch notwendig, dass sich neue Versionen ganz genau so
-% verhalten wie frühere. Daher wird eine Option geboten, mit der man die
-% Kompatibilität selbst steuern kann. Voreingestellt ist jeweils maximale
-% Kompatibilität.
+% verhalten wie frühere. Daher wird eine Option geboten, mit der man die
+% Kompatibilität selbst steuern kann. Voreingestellt ist jeweils maximale
+% Kompatibilität.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
%
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für die Kompatibilität mit den Standardklassen}
+% \subsection{Optionen für die Kompatibilität mit den Standardklassen}
% Hier gibt es derzeit nur eine Option, die nur beim Laden aber nicht zur
% Laufzeit verwendet werden kann:
%
% \begin{option}{emulatestandardclasses}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/16}{\texttt{headings!=standardclasses} auch für
-% \textsf{scrartcl}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/16}{\texttt{headings!=standardclasses} auch für
+% \textsf{scrartcl}}%^^A
% Diese Option muss sich auf diverse andere Einstellungen auswirken und
-% sollte deshalb so früh wie möglich verwendet werden. Vieles ändert sie
-% sofort, manches aber auch erst später.
+% sollte deshalb so früh wie möglich verwendet werden. Vieles ändert sie
+% sofort, manches aber auch erst später.
% \begin{macro}{\if@scr@emulatestandardclasses}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}^^A
-% Für die späteren Änderungen wird ein Schalter benötigt, der jedoch nicht
-% wie gewohnt geändert werden kann.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}%^^A
+% Für die späteren Änderungen wird ein Schalter benötigt, der jedoch nicht
+% wie gewohnt geändert werden kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option&class&!letter>
\newif\if@scr@emulatestandardclasses
@@ -173,30 +172,30 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsection{Option für die Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen}
-% Die gesamte Kompatibilitätssteuerung erfolgt mit einer einzigen Option, bei
-% der man angibt, zu welcher Version Kompatibilität hergestellt werden
-% soll. Dies bedeutet ggf. dann auch, dass einzelne neuere Möglichkeiten nicht
-% zur Verfügung stehen.
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{Kompatibilitätseinstellungen werden in Paketen
-% nur definiert, wenn sie noch nicht vorhanden sind}^^A
+% \subsection{Option für die Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen}
+% Die gesamte Kompatibilitätssteuerung erfolgt mit einer einzigen Option, bei
+% der man angibt, zu welcher Version Kompatibilität hergestellt werden
+% soll. Dies bedeutet ggf. dann auch, dass einzelne neuere Möglichkeiten nicht
+% zur Verfügung stehen.
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{Kompatibilitätseinstellungen werden in Paketen
+% nur definiert, wenn sie noch nicht vorhanden sind}%^^A
%
% \begin{option}{version}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/16}{Option kann nur beim Laden der Klasse gesetzt
-% werden}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/16}{Option kann nur beim Laden der Klasse gesetzt
+% werden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@compatibility}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{Voreinstellung auf \textit{last} geändert}
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{Voreinstellung auf \textit{last} geändert}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ta@compatibility}
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{Neues Macro}^^A
-% In einigen Fällen sind Verbesserungen nicht kompatibel mit früheren
-% Versionen. Deshalb sind solche Verbesserungen nur verfügbar, wenn mit diesem
-% Schalter die neue Version ausgewählt wird. Aber es gilt: Entweder kompatibel
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{Neues Macro}%^^A
+% In einigen Fällen sind Verbesserungen nicht kompatibel mit früheren
+% Versionen. Deshalb sind solche Verbesserungen nur verfügbar, wenn mit diesem
+% Schalter die neue Version ausgewählt wird. Aber es gilt: Entweder kompatibel
% oder in allen Dingen neu. Mischmasch machen wir nicht. Die aktuell
-% eingestellte Kompatibilität wird in \cs{scr@compatibility} als Zahl
+% eingestellte Kompatibilität wird in \cs{scr@compatibility} als Zahl
% gespeichert. In den Makros \cs{scr@v@\emph{Version}} werden die
-% zugehörigen Nummern gespeichert.
+% zugehörigen Nummern gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*init>
%<class>\newcommand*
@@ -251,7 +250,7 @@
}
%<class>\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{version}{last}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Eine zusätzliche Bedingung gibt es noch: Die Kompatibilität kann nur beim
+% Eine zusätzliche Bedingung gibt es noch: Die Kompatibilität kann nur beim
% Laden gesetzt werden. Danach geht es nicht mehr. Ausnahmsweise wird hier
% auch nicht mit \cs{FamilyKeyState} signalisiert, sondern direkt ein Fehler
% ausgegeben.
@@ -284,147 +283,149 @@
%<*init>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@first}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.9}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.9t}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.95}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.95a}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.95b}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.96}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.96a}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/27}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.97}
-% \changes{v2.97}{2007/03/02}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97}{2007/03/02}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.97a}
-% \changes{v2.97a}{2007/03/07}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97a}{2007/03/07}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.97b}
-% \changes{v2.97b}{2007/03/25}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97b}{2007/03/25}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.97c}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/12}{Neues Macro}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/09}{Wert geändert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/12}{Neues Macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/09}{Wert geändert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.97d}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{Neues Macro}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/09}{Wert geändert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{Neues Macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/09}{Wert geändert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.97e}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/27}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/27}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.98}
-% \changes{v2.98}{2007/12/24}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98}{2007/12/24}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.98a}
-% \changes{v2.98a}{2008/01/08}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98a}{2008/01/08}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.98b}
-% \changes{v2.98b}{2008/01/30}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98b}{2008/01/30}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@2.98c}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.00}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/11/04}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/11/04}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.01}
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/14}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/14}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.01a}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.01b}
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/11/24}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/11/24}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.01c}
-% \changes{v3.01c}{2008/12/09}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01c}{2008/12/09}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.02}
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.02b}
-% \changes{v3.02b}{2009/01/24}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02b}{2009/01/24}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.02c}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/01/28}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/01/28}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.03}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/04/01}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/04/01}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.03a}
-% \changes{v3.03a}{2009/04/02}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03a}{2009/04/02}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.03b}
-% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/04/12}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/04/12}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.04}
-% \changes{v3.04}{2009/07/07}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.04}{2009/07/07}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.05}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/07/08}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/07/08}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.04a}
-% \changes{v3.04a}{2009/07/24}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.04a}{2009/07/24}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.05a}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.06}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/17}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/17}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.07}
-% \changes{v3.07}{2010/09/14}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.07}{2010/09/14}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.08}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.08a}
-% \changes{v3.08a}{2011/01/25}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08a}{2011/01/25}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.08b}
-% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.09}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/04/02}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/04/02}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.09a}
-% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/04/12}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/04/12}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.10}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.10a}
-% \changes{v3.10a}{2012/03/08}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10a}{2012/03/08}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.10b}
-% \changes{v3.10b}{2012/03/13}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10b}{2012/03/13}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.11}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/05/15}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/05/15}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.11a}
-% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/05/25}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/05/25}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.11b}
-% \changes{v3.11b}{2012/07/29}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11b}{2012/07/29}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.12}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.13}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.13a}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/07}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/07}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.14}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/28}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/28}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.15}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.16}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/02/08}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/02/08}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.17}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/08}{Neues Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/08}{Neues Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.17a}
-% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/05/06}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/05/06}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.17c}
-% \changes{v3.17c}{2015/05/13}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.17c}{2015/05/13}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.18}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.18a}
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.19}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/26}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/26}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.19a}
-% \changes{v3.19a}{2015/10/03}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.19a}{2015/10/03}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.20}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.21}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.22}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.23}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/04}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/04}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.23}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/22}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/22}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.25}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.26}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/03/31}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/03/31}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.26a}
-% \changes{v3.26a}{2018/12/30}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.26a}{2018/12/30}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.26b}
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2018/12/30}{Neues Macro}
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2018/12/30}{Neues Macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.27}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{Neues Macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@last}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}^^A
-% Nun die unterschiedlichen möglichen Werte (|\scr@v@last| ist jeweils die
-% höchste vorhandene Nummer):
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}%^^A
+% Nun die unterschiedlichen möglichen Werte (|\scr@v@last| ist jeweils die
+% höchste vorhandene Nummer):
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{scr@v@first}{0}
\@namedef{scr@v@2.9}{0}
@@ -495,6 +496,7 @@
\@namedef{scr@v@3.26}{17}
\@namedef{scr@v@3.26a}{17}
\@namedef{scr@v@3.26b}{17}
+\@namedef{scr@v@3.27}{17}
\@namedef{scr@v@last}{17}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -553,6 +555,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -574,8 +577,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@is@lt}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option&(class|extend)>
\newcommand*{\scr@v@is@lt}[1]{%
@@ -584,8 +587,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@is@gt}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@v@is@gt}[1]{%
\scr@compatibility>\@nameuse{scr@v@#1}
@@ -593,8 +596,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@is@le}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als oder die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als oder die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@v@is@le}[1]{%
\numexpr\scr@compatibility-\@ne\relax<\@nameuse{scr@v@#1}
@@ -602,8 +605,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@is@ge}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als oder die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als oder die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@v@is@ge}[1]{%
\numexpr\scr@compatibility+\@ne\relax>\@nameuse{scr@v@#1}
@@ -613,8 +616,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ta@v@is@lt}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option&package&typearea>
\newcommand*{\scr@ta@v@is@lt}[1]{%
@@ -623,8 +626,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ta@v@is@gt}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ta@v@is@gt}[1]{%
\scr@ta@compatibility>\@nameuse{scr@v@#1}
@@ -632,8 +635,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ta@v@is@le}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als oder die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version jünger als oder die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ta@v@is@le}[1]{%
\numexpr\scr@ta@compatibility-\@ne <\@nameuse{scr@v@#1}
@@ -641,8 +644,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ta@v@is@ge}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als oder die angegebene ist.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Bedingung, dass die eingestellte Version älter als oder die angegebene ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@ta@v@is@ge}[1]{%
\numexpr\scr@ta@compatibility+\@ne >\@nameuse{scr@v@#1}
@@ -652,19 +655,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Kompatibilität mit früheren Versionen von \textsf{scrlttr2}}
-% In früheren Versionen von \textsf{scrlttr2} gab es weitere Befehle, die
+% \subsection{Kompatibilität mit früheren Versionen von \textsf{scrlttr2}}
+% In früheren Versionen von \textsf{scrlttr2} gab es weitere Befehle, die
% eventuell von \texttt{lco}-Dateien oder Paketen verwendet werden.
-% Gemeldete Inkompatibitlitäten sind nach Möglichkeit zu lösen.
+% Gemeldete Inkompatibitlitäten sind nach Möglichkeit zu lösen.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setif}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/08}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/31}{Nur vor Version 2.95}^^A
-% Dies war ein Makro, mit dem man einen Schalter über die symbolischen
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/08}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/31}{Nur vor Version 2.95}%^^A
+% Dies war ein Makro, mit dem man einen Schalter über die symbolischen
% Werte \texttt{true}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{on} und \texttt{off} setzen
-% kann. Das erste, optionale Argument war der Name des Schalters ohne Präfix
+% kann. Das erste, optionale Argument war der Name des Schalters ohne Präfix
% "`\texttt{if}"'. Das zweite Argument war der Name der Option und das dritte
-% der gewünschte Wert. War das optionale Argument nicht gesetzt oder leer, so
+% der gewünschte Wert. War das optionale Argument nicht gesetzt oder leer, so
% wurde der Optionenname mit einem vorangestellten "`\texttt{@}"' als Name des
% Schalters verwendet. Dieses Makro wird nun mit Hilfe von \cs{KOMA@set@ifkey}
% nachgebildet. Dadurch ist es nicht absolut fehlerkompatibel, das es nun mehr
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx
index ab752b1b0c..9e792a501a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-floats.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{1692}
+% \CheckSum{1690}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-floats.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-floats.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-floats.dtx 2701 2017-11-15 14:02:01Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-floats.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-11-15 15:02:01 +0100 (Wed, 15 Nov 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1962 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-floats.dtx}
@@ -101,15 +100,15 @@
%
% \section{Gleitumgebungen}
%
-% \KOMAScript{} verfügt bezüglich der Gleitumgebungen über einige
-% Features, die über das, was die Standardklassen bieten, hinaus
+% \KOMAScript{} verfügt bezüglich der Gleitumgebungen über einige
+% Features, die über das, was die Standardklassen bieten, hinaus
% geht. \marginline{Geplant!} Allerdings ist das hier verwendete Interface
% gnadenlos veraltet und wird deshalb irgendwann ersetzt. Dabei wird
-% höchstwahrscheinlich grundsätzlich auf das \textsf{caption}-Paket aufgebaut
-% werden. Man betrachte dieses Modul daher als grundsätzlich zur Disposition
+% höchstwahrscheinlich grundsätzlich auf das \textsf{caption}-Paket aufgebaut
+% werden. Man betrachte dieses Modul daher als grundsätzlich zur Disposition
% stehend.
%
-% Die einzige Gleitumgebung, über die Briefe derzeit verfügen sind
+% Die einzige Gleitumgebung, über die Briefe derzeit verfügen sind
% Randnotizen.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -123,17 +122,17 @@
%<*!letter>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen für die Optionen}
+% \subsection{Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen für die Optionen}
%
-% Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen werden bereits benötigt, bevor die
+% Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen werden bereits benötigt, bevor die
% Optionen abgearbeitet werden.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@captionabove}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{Initialisierung vor den Optionen}^^A
-% Ob es sich bei \cs{caption} um eine Unter- oder Überschrift handelt und also
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{Initialisierung vor den Optionen}%^^A
+% Ob es sich bei \cs{caption} um eine Unter- oder Ãœberschrift handelt und also
% \cs{abovecaptionskip} davor und \cs{belowcaptionskip} danach steht
-% oder umgekehrt, wird über diesen Schalter gesteuert. Voreingestellt
+% oder umgekehrt, wird über diesen Schalter gesteuert. Voreingestellt
% sind Unterschriften.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@captionabove\@captionabovefalse
@@ -141,13 +140,13 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@tablecaptionabove}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{aus \texttt{typearea} in die Klassen
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{aus \texttt{typearea} in die Klassen
% verschoben}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@tablecaptionabovetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@tablecaptionabovefalse}
-% Die Einstellung, ob es Tabellenüber- oder -unterschriften sind, wird in
+% Die Einstellung, ob es Tabellenüber- oder -unterschriften sind, wird in
% einem Schalter gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@tablecaptionabove\@tablecaptionabovefalse
@@ -157,12 +156,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@figurecaptionabove}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{neu Option}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{neu Option}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@figurecaptionabovetrue}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@figurecaptionabovefalse}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Die Einstellung, ob es Abbildungsüber- oder -unterschriften sind, wird in
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/23}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Die Einstellung, ob es Abbildungsüber- oder -unterschriften sind, wird in
% einem Schalter gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@figurecaptionabove\@figurecaptionabovefalse
@@ -172,12 +171,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonelinecaptions}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neuer Schalter}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\onelinecaptionstrue}
% \begin{macro}{\onelinecaptionsfalse}
-% Die Entscheidung, ob die Sonderbehandlung für einzeilige caption-Texte
-% durchgeführt werden soll, wird in einem Schalter gespeichert. In der
+% Die Entscheidung, ob die Sonderbehandlung für einzeilige caption-Texte
+% durchgeführt werden soll, wird in einem Schalter gespeichert. In der
% Hoffnung, beim Laden von \textsf{caption2} Speicher zu sparen, wird
% der gleiche Name verwendet, den auch \textsf{caption2}
% verwendet. Trotzdem sollte man diesen Schalter als internen Schalter
@@ -190,11 +189,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scap@pos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}%^^A
% Hier wird gespeichert, ob die Beschreibung bei |captionbeside| links oder
% rechts vom Rest stehen soll. Voreingestellt ist rechts davon
-% (\emph{\textbf{r}ight}). Andere Möglichkeiten sind \emph{\textbf{l}eft},
+% (\emph{\textbf{r}ight}). Andere Möglichkeiten sind \emph{\textbf{l}eft},
% \emph{\textbf{o}uter}, \emph{\textbf{i}nner}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scap@pos}{r}
@@ -202,8 +201,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scap@valign}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{Definition erfolgt etwas früher}%^^A
% Hier wird gespeichert, ob bei |captionbeside| die beiden Boxen (siehe
% Definition der Umgebung) \emph{\textbf{t}op}, \emph{\textbf{b}ottem} oder
% \emph{\textbf{c}enter} ausgerichtet werden sollen. Andere Buchstaben
@@ -213,24 +212,24 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für Titel von Gleitumgebungen}
+% \subsection{Optionen für Titel von Gleitumgebungen}
%
% \begin{option}{captions}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{Neuer Zentralschalter für caption}^^A
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/04/02}{Neue Werte (\texttt{heading},
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{Neuer Zentralschalter für caption}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/04/02}{Neue Werte (\texttt{heading},
% \texttt{signature}, \texttt{figureheading},
-% \texttt{figuresignature})}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/11}{Beachtung der Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/11}{Verwendung der internen Werteliste}^^A
-% Dies ist nun die zentrale Option für Einstellungen zu \cs{caption}. Als
+% \texttt{figuresignature})}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/11}{Beachtung der Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/11}{Verwendung der internen Werteliste}%^^A
+% Dies ist nun die zentrale Option für Einstellungen zu \cs{caption}. Als
% besondere Schwierigkeit ergibt sich dabei jedoch, dass das Paket
-% \textsf{caption} einige Sonderbehandlungen für \KOMAScript{} enthält, die
+% \textsf{caption} einige Sonderbehandlungen für \KOMAScript{} enthält, die
% darauf angewiesen sind, dass die alte Optionenschnittstelle verwendet
-% wird. Erfreulicherweise funktioniert das aber ab Version~3.1g über eine
+% wird. Erfreulicherweise funktioniert das aber ab Version~3.1g über eine
% Erweiterung der Schalter-Umschaltbefehle (|\@tablecaptionabovetrue|,
% |\@tablecaptionabovefalse|, |\onelinecaptionstrue|,
-% |\onelinecaptionsfalse|), so dass lediglich dafür georgt werden muss,
+% |\onelinecaptionsfalse|), so dass lediglich dafür georgt werden muss,
% dass diese weiterhin verwendet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@key{captions}{%
@@ -358,20 +357,20 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{tablecaptionabove}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{aus \texttt{typearea} in die Klassen
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{aus \texttt{typearea} in die Klassen
% verschoben}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{obsolete}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{tablecaptionbelow}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{aus \texttt{typearea} in die Klassen
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{aus \texttt{typearea} in die Klassen
% verschoben}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{obsolete}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
-% Es besteht nun die Wahl, ob \cs{caption} bei Tabellen für Unter-
-% oder Überschriften voreingestellt ist. Die Defaulteinstellung ist
-% aus Kompatibilitätsgründen die Tabellenunterschrift.
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/18}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Es besteht nun die Wahl, ob \cs{caption} bei Tabellen für Unter-
+% oder Ãœberschriften voreingestellt ist. Die Defaulteinstellung ist
+% aus Kompatibilitätsgründen die Tabellenunterschrift.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{tablecaptionabove}{captions=tableheading}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{tablecaptionbelow}{captions=tablesignature}
@@ -380,14 +379,14 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{origlongtable}
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}%^^A
% Wenn das \textsf{longtable}-Paket geladen ist, werden die
-% Tabellentitel dafür normalerweise von den Klassen umdefiniert. Dies
+% Tabellentitel dafür normalerweise von den Klassen umdefiniert. Dies
% geschieht automatisch nicht, wenn das \textsf{caption2}-Paket
% geladen ist. Es geschieht ausserdem nicht, wenn diese Option gesetzt
% ist.
% \begin{macro}{\if@komalongtable}
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@komalongtabletrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@komalongtablefalse}
% Die Einstellung wird in einem Schalter gespeichert.
@@ -401,23 +400,23 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{onelinecaption}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{obsolete}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{keine Sonderbehandlung für \textsf{caption2}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{keine Sonderbehandlung für \textsf{caption2}%^^A
% mehr}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{noonelinecaption}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{obsolete}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{keine Sonderbehandlung für \textsf{caption2}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{obsolete}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{keine Sonderbehandlung für \textsf{caption2}%^^A
% mehr}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
-% Da für diese Option nicht der gleiche Name verwendet wird, wie bei
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Da für diese Option nicht der gleiche Name verwendet wird, wie bei
% \textsf{caption2}, wurde von den Optionen bis Version~2.98b nicht nur der
% Schalter entsprechend gesetzt, sondern auch die korrespondierende Option an
% \textsf{caption2} weitergeleitet. Der gleiche Name konnte schlecht
% verwendet werden, weil er bei einer Klasse auch nicht ansatzweise
-% als selbsterklärend bezeichnet werden kann. Ab Version~2.98c entfällt die
+% als selbsterklärend bezeichnet werden kann. Ab Version~2.98c entfällt die
% Sonderbehandlung von \textsf{caption2}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{onelinecaption}{captions=oneline}
@@ -439,12 +438,12 @@
% Randnotizen sind ebenfalls eine Art von Gleitumgebung.
%
% \begin{macro}{\marginline}
-% \KOMAScript{} stellt zusätzlich ein Randzeilenmakro zur Verfügung,
+% \KOMAScript{} stellt zusätzlich ein Randzeilenmakro zur Verfügung,
% das je nach gerader oder ungerader Seite in doppelseitigen Layout
-% rechts- oder linksbündig gesetzt werden muss.
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{Definition mit Hilfe des optionalen
+% rechts- oder linksbündig gesetzt werden muss.
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{Definition mit Hilfe des optionalen
% Parameters von \cs{marginpar} deutlich vereinfacht}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{fehlende Klammern ergänzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{fehlende Klammern ergänzt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\marginline[1]{%
\marginpar[\raggedleft{#1}]{\raggedright #1}%
@@ -457,15 +456,15 @@
%<*!letter>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für Titel von Gleitumgebungen}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für Titel von Gleitumgebungen}
%
% \begin{macro}{\caption}
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Fließtitel auf CJK umgestellt}^^A
-% Es ist möglich, die Fließumgebungen mit einem Titel und einer
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Fließtitel auf CJK umgestellt}%^^A
+% Es ist möglich, die Fließumgebungen mit einem Titel und einer
% Beschreibung zu versehen. Diese wird vom ggf. etwas abgesetzt.
% \begin{Length}{abovecaptionskip}
% \begin{Length}{belowcaptionskip}
-% Um wieviel ist in zwei Längenregistern gespeichert:
+% Um wieviel ist in zwei Längenregistern gespeichert:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\abovecaptionskip}
\newlength{\belowcaptionskip}
@@ -475,29 +474,29 @@
% \end{Length}
% \end{Length}
% \begin{macro}{\captionformat}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neu}%^^A
% Trennung von Label und Text:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\captionformat}{:\ }
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@caption}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionabove}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionbelow}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}^^A
-% Damit überhaupt zwischen Unter- und Überschriften unterschieden
-% werden kann, muss zunächst das Originalmakro gesichert werden. Dies
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}%^^A
+% Damit überhaupt zwischen Unter- und Überschriften unterschieden
+% werden kann, muss zunächst das Originalmakro gesichert werden. Dies
% geschieht erst zu Beginn des Dokuments, damit Pakete ggf. noch ihre
-% eigenen Definitionen von \cs{caption} vornehmen können. Das
+% eigenen Definitionen von \cs{caption} vornehmen können. Das
% \textsf{hyperref}-Paket ist so ein Kandidat.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\scr@caption}{}
\AtBeginDocument{\let\scr@caption\caption}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% Jetzt ist es möglich durch einfaches Umlegen des Schalters für die
+% Jetzt ist es möglich durch einfaches Umlegen des Schalters für die
% korrekte Darstellung zu sorgen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionabove}{\@captionabovetrue\scr@caption}
@@ -508,36 +507,36 @@
%
%
% \begin{environment}{captionbeside}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu}^^A
-% Um einiges komplizierter als die Beschreibung unter oder über die
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu}%^^A
+% Um einiges komplizierter als die Beschreibung unter oder über die
% Tabelle oder Abbildung zu setzen, ist der Versuch, sie daneben zu
-% setzen. Dies funktioniert frundsätzlich auch nicht mit
+% setzen. Dies funktioniert frundsätzlich auch nicht mit
% \texttt{longtable}-Tabellen.
%
% \begin{macro}{\scap@caption}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Die Beschreibung, die der Umgebung als Parameter übergeben wird,
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Die Beschreibung, die der Umgebung als Parameter übergeben wird,
% muss zwischengespeichert werden. Hier wird lediglich das Makro
-% dafür reserviert.
+% dafür reserviert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scap@caption}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scap@width}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Die Breite, die Tabelle bzw. Abbildung einschließlich Beschreibung
-% und insgesamt haben dürften. Voreingestellt ist die gesamte
-% verfügbare Breite.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Die Breite, die Tabelle bzw. Abbildung einschließlich Beschreibung
+% und insgesamt haben dürften. Voreingestellt ist die gesamte
+% verfügbare Breite.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scap@width}{\linewidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scap@move}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Der Wert, um den die Tabelle bzw. Abbildung einschließlich
-% Beschreibung nach rechts bzw. außen verschoben werden.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Der Wert, um den die Tabelle bzw. Abbildung einschließlich
+% Beschreibung nach rechts bzw. außen verschoben werden.
% Voreingestellt ist keine Verschiebung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scap@move}{\z@}
@@ -545,11 +544,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scap@currentlabel}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/24}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/24}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Da \cs{caption} innerhalb einer Umgebung (\cs{parbox} und
-% \texttt{captionbeside}) aufgerufen wird, würde ein \cs{label}, das
+% \texttt{captionbeside}) aufgerufen wird, würde ein \cs{label}, das
% zwar innerhalb der Gleitumgebung aber nach der
-% \texttt{captionbeside}-Umgebung eingefügt wird, nicht die
+% \texttt{captionbeside}-Umgebung eingefügt wird, nicht die
% Gleitumgebung, sondern die umgebende Referenzebene
% referenzieren. Damit das nicht geschieht, wird in der
% \texttt{captionbeside}-Umgebung in der \cs{parbox} die aktuelle
@@ -558,7 +557,7 @@
% \texttt{captionbeside}-Umgebung mit Hilfe von \cs{aftergroup} nach
% dem Ende der Umgebung wiederhergestellt. Da die
% \texttt{captionbeside}-Umgebung ohnehin nicht geschachtelt werden
-% kann, funktioniert das problemlos. Für diese Aktion wird hier ein
+% kann, funktioniert das problemlos. Für diese Aktion wird hier ein
% globales Makro reserviert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scap@currentlabel}{}
@@ -566,7 +565,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifscap@alt}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neuer Schalter}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scap@alttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\scap@altfalse}
% Der Schalter, der angibt, ob die Verschiebung \cs{scap@move} im
@@ -580,36 +579,36 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@captionbeside}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@captionbeside}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@captionbeside}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@@captionbeside}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Die Umgebung soll einmal folgende Parameter besitzen:
% \begin{description}
% \item[(optional)] Verzeichniseintrag
% \item[(obligatorisch)] Beschreibung
-% \item[(optional)] lokaler Wert für \cs{scap@pos}
-% \item[(optional)] lokaler Wert für \cs{scap@width}
-% \item[(optional)] lokaler Wert für \cs{scap@move}
-% \item[(*)] lokaler Wert für \cs{ifscap@alt} (Stern gesetzt
+% \item[(optional)] lokaler Wert für \cs{scap@pos}
+% \item[(optional)] lokaler Wert für \cs{scap@width}
+% \item[(optional)] lokaler Wert für \cs{scap@move}
+% \item[(*)] lokaler Wert für \cs{ifscap@alt} (Stern gesetzt
% entspricht \cs{scap@alttrue}
% \end{description}
% Wie man sieht, sollte man bei Angabe aller optionalen Parameter auch
% bewusst den Stern setzen oder darauf verzichten.
%
-% Damit alle Parameter ausgewertet werden können, werden einige
-% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% Damit alle Parameter ausgewertet werden können, werden einige
+% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@captionbeside}{}
\long\def\@captionbeside[#1]#2{%
@@ -649,19 +648,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@pti@nb@sid@b@x}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Es wird noch eines der kostbaren Boxregister benötigt.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Es wird noch eines der kostbaren Boxregister benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newbox\c@pti@nb@sid@b@x
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@pti@nb@sid@}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/11}{vertikale Ausrichtung korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.07a}{2010/11/04}{vertikale Ausrichtung im t- und b-Fall erneut
-% korrigiert}^^A
-% Hier wird nun die Umgebung eigentlich geöffnet, während zuvor nur
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/11}{vertikale Ausrichtung korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.07a}{2010/11/04}{vertikale Ausrichtung im t- und b-Fall erneut
+% korrigiert}%^^A
+% Hier wird nun die Umgebung eigentlich geöffnet, während zuvor nur
% die Parameter ausgewertet wurden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\c@pti@nb@sid@}{}
@@ -684,17 +683,17 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Jetzt endlich können wir uns auf die Umgebung stürzen. Die
+% Jetzt endlich können wir uns auf die Umgebung stürzen. Die
% Umgebung zu starten ist einfach. Es wird ein Doppelargumentmakro
-% ausgeführt.
+% ausgeführt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment*{captionbeside}{%
\@dblarg\@captionbeside%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Komplizierter ist die Beendigung der Umgebung. Hier fällt der
+% Komplizierter ist die Beendigung der Umgebung. Hier fällt der
% gesamte Satzaufwand an.
-% \changes{v2.9a}{2002/06/27}{\cs{ifthispageodd} statt
+% \changes{v2.9a}{2002/06/27}{\cs{ifthispageodd} statt
% \cs{if@thispageodd}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\end{lrbox}%
@@ -728,7 +727,7 @@
\fi
\hspace*{\@tempdimc}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/12/10}{\cs{@temdima} replaced by
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/12/10}{\cs{@temdima} replaced by
% \cs{wd}\cs{c@pti@nb@sid@b@x}, because \cs{@temdima} would be changed}
% \begin{macrocode}
\if l\@tempa
@@ -755,12 +754,12 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\capfont}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
% Die Schriftart der Titel kann eingestellt werden. Dazu dient dieses
% Makro, das als internes Makro zu verstehen ist,
% \begin{macro}{\caplabelfont}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
-% Davon unabhängig kann auch die Schriftart der Titel-Titel
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
+% Davon unabhängig kann auch die Schriftart der Titel-Titel
% ("`Abbildung X:"') eingestellt werden. Auch dieses Makro ist als
% internes Makro zu verstehen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -771,10 +770,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@caption}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{caption}}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{caption}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@captionlabel}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{captionlabel}}
-% Die eigentliche Änderung der Schriftart erfolgt über das Element
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{captionlabel}}
+% Die eigentliche Änderung der Schriftart erfolgt über das Element
% \texttt{caption} bzw. \texttt{captionlabel}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@caption}{\capfont}
@@ -784,15 +783,15 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{setbox}\cs{tempboxa}\cs{hbox}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{setbox}\cs{tempboxa}\cs{hbox}
% durch \cs{sbox}\cs{@tempboxa} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Minipage-Flag zurückgesetzt (ist das
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Minipage-Flag zurückgesetzt (ist das
% ok?)}
-% \changes{v2.3f}{1995/12/09}{Fontumschaltung einheitlich für lange
-% und kurze Unter-/Überschriften}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{neben den komplett hängenden
-% Titeln sind nun auch nicht hängende oder teilweise hängende
-% möglich}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3f}{1995/12/09}{Fontumschaltung einheitlich für lange
+% und kurze Unter-/Ãœberschriften}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{neben den komplett hängenden
+% Titeln sind nun auch nicht hängende oder teilweise hängende
+% möglich}%^^A
% Bis Version 2.5f sah die Definition wie folgt aus.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
@@ -808,7 +807,7 @@
% \end{verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\ifdofullc@p}
% Nun jedoch wird das ganze etwas komplizierter. Als erstes wird ein
-% Schalter benötigt, der angibt, ob auf die volle Länge des "`Labels"'
+% Schalter benötigt, der angibt, ob auf die volle Länge des "`Labels"'
% eingezogen werden soll, oder nicht:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifdofullc@p
@@ -820,34 +819,34 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\if@capbreak}
-% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu}^^A
-% Außerdem gibt es einen Schalter, der angibt, ob nach dem Label ein
+% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu}%^^A
+% Außerdem gibt es einen Schalter, der angibt, ob nach dem Label ein
% Umbruch erfolgen soll. Dies ist normalerweise nicht der Fall.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@capbreak\@capbreakfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setcapindent}
-% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{\cs{if@capbreak} wird verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/17}{\cs{edef}\cs{cap@indent} statt
-% \cs{def}\cs{cap@indent}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{wird nach dem Laden von
-% \textsf{caption2} umdefiniert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Dann wird weiter ein Befehl benötigt, mit dem der Benutzer die
-% Weite des Einzugs selbst einstellen kann. Da intern für die Weite
+% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{\cs{if@capbreak} wird verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/17}{\cs{edef}\cs{cap@indent} statt
+% \cs{def}\cs{cap@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{wird nach dem Laden von
+% \textsf{caption2} umdefiniert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Dann wird weiter ein Befehl benötigt, mit dem der Benutzer die
+% Weite des Einzugs selbst einstellen kann. Da intern für die Weite
% ein Makro verwendet werden soll, findet hier sicherheitshalber eine
% Zuweisung an eine Dimension statt. So sollten Fehlermeldungen hier
-% und nicht erst bei Verwendung auftauchen. Natürlich muss hier auch
+% und nicht erst bei Verwendung auftauchen. Natürlich muss hier auch
% der automatische Einzug abgeschaltet werden. In der Sternform wird
-% außerdem dafür gesorgt, dass zwischen "`Label"' und Beschreibung
-% ein Umbruch erfolgt. In der normalen Version wird stattdessen für
-% Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen gesorgt.
+% außerdem dafür gesorgt, dass zwischen "`Label"' und Beschreibung
+% ein Umbruch erfolgt. In der normalen Version wird stattdessen für
+% Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen gesorgt.
% \begin{macro}{\@setcapindent}
% \begin{macro}{\@@setcaptindent}
-% Für die Implementierung der Sternform werden zwei interne Makros
-% benötigt.
+% Für die Implementierung der Sternform werden zwei interne Makros
+% benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setcapindent}{\kernel@ifstar{\@@setcapindent}{\@setcapindent}}
\newcommand*{\@setcapindent}[1]{%
@@ -884,10 +883,10 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setcaphanging}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{wird nach dem Laden von
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{wird nach dem Laden von
% \textsf{caption2} umdefiniert}
-% Andererseits soll es auch möglich sein, nachträglich wieder den
-% automatischen Einzug einzuschalten. Dafür gibt es ein weiteres
+% Andererseits soll es auch möglich sein, nachträglich wieder den
+% automatischen Einzug einzuschalten. Dafür gibt es ein weiteres
% Makro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setcaphanging}{\dofullc@ptrue\@capbreakfalse}
@@ -905,18 +904,18 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Nun aber zur neuen Definition der Titel. Zunächst geht alles wie
+% Nun aber zur neuen Definition der Titel. Zunächst geht alles wie
% gehabt.
-% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{\cs{@makecaption} per \cs{newcommand}
+% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{\cs{@makecaption} per \cs{newcommand}
% definiert statt mit \cs{long}\cs{def}}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{Unterscheidung zwischen Über- und
-% Unterschriften}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{\cs{@makecaption} verwendet
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{Unterscheidung zwischen Ãœber- und
+% Unterschriften}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{\cs{@makecaption} verwendet
% \cs{@@makecaption}}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{die Sonderbehandlung für einzeilige
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{die Sonderbehandlung für einzeilige
% \emph{caption}s ist abschaltbar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{Titel können in ihrer Breite
-% beschränkt werden}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{Titel können in ihrer Breite
+% beschränkt werden}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@makecaption}[2]{%
\if@captionabove
@@ -933,19 +932,19 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@@makecaption}
-% Tatsächlich gesetzt wird der Titel mit diesem Makro. Dabei muss der
+% Tatsächlich gesetzt wird der Titel mit diesem Makro. Dabei muss der
% erste Parameter entweder \cs{@gobble} oder \cs{@firstofone} sein.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cap@width}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cap@left}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cap@right}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Die Breite der mehrzeiligen bzw. die maximale Breite der einzeiligen
% \emph{caption}s sowie das Makro das links und rechts von der Box mit
% der mehrzeiligen \emph{caption} aufgerufen wird. In der
-% Voreinstellung wird für Zentrierung gesorgt.
+% Voreinstellung wird für Zentrierung gesorgt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cap@width}{\hsize}
\newcommand*{\cap@left}{\hfill}
@@ -955,10 +954,10 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setcapwidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9a}{2002/06/27}{\cs{ifthispageodd} statt
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9a}{2002/06/27}{\cs{ifthispageodd} statt
% \cs{if@thispageodd}}
-% \changes{v2.97}{2007/02/27}{Mindestbreite für captions ist 0\,pt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97}{2007/02/27}{Mindestbreite für captions ist 0\,pt}%^^A
% Hier wird \cs{cap@width} gesetzt. Dabei werden optional auch
% \cs{cap@left} und \cs{cap@right} angepasst.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1029,7 +1028,7 @@
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Falls \textsf{caption2} geladen wird, ändert sich die Funktion. Das
+% Falls \textsf{caption2} geladen wird, ändert sich die Funktion. Das
% optionale Argument wird dann ignorriert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AfterPackage{caption2}{%
@@ -1045,12 +1044,12 @@
}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \setcapwidth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setcapwidth
% \begin{macro}{\setcapdynwidth}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/31}{neu}
-% Ulrike findet es blöd, dass \cs{setcapwidth} wie \cs{setlength} arbeitet und
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/31}{neu}
+% Ulrike findet es blöd, dass \cs{setcapwidth} wie \cs{setlength} arbeitet und
% ist der Meinung, dass das Argument erst zur Laufzeit ausgewertet werden
-% sollte. Also ein neuer Befehl genau dafür. Es sei allerdings darauf
+% sollte. Also ein neuer Befehl genau dafür. Es sei allerdings darauf
% hingewiesen, dass Fehler im Argument dann ggf. erst bei jeder
% \cs{caption}-Anweisung und nicht bereits hier ausgegeben werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1149,13 +1148,13 @@
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \setcapdynwidth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setcapdynwidth
% \begin{macro}{\cap@margin}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro beinhaltet nicht den Wert der Ränder, sondern das
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro beinhaltet nicht den Wert der Ränder, sondern das
% Makro, mit dem innerhalb von \cs{@@makecaption} die Makros
% \cs{cap@left} und \cs{cap@right} neu definiert werden. Dies
-% geschieht nur, wenn die Ränder mit \cs{setcapmargin} gesetzt
+% geschieht nur, wenn die Ränder mit \cs{setcapmargin} gesetzt
% werden. Vordefiniert ist also keinerlei Aktion.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cap@margin}{}
@@ -1163,18 +1162,18 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setcapmargin}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@setcapmargin}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9a}{2002/06/27}{\cs{ifthispageodd} statt
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9a}{2002/06/27}{\cs{ifthispageodd} statt
% \cs{if@thispageodd}}
% \begin{macro}{\@@setcapmargin}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Statt die Breite der \emph{caption} zu setzen, können auch die
-% Ränder gesetzt werden. In der Sternvariante werden im zweiseitigen
-% Modus die Ränder auf linken Seiten vertauscht.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Statt die Breite der \emph{caption} zu setzen, können auch die
+% Ränder gesetzt werden. In der Sternvariante werden im zweiseitigen
+% Modus die Ränder auf linken Seiten vertauscht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setcapmargin}{\kernel@ifstar{\@setcapmargin}{\@@setcapmargin}}
\newcommand*{\@setcapmargin}[2][\@tempdimb]{%
@@ -1222,7 +1221,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn \textsf{caption2} geladen ist, ändert sich die Bedeutung.
+% Wenn \textsf{caption2} geladen ist, ändert sich die Bedeutung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\AfterPackage{caption2}{%
\renewcommand*{\@setcapmargin}[2][\@tempdimb]{%
@@ -1248,16 +1247,16 @@
% Jetzt aber zum Eigentlichen. Die Breite der \emph{caption} muss nur
% bestimmte werden, wenn Option \texttt{onelinecaption} verwendet
% wird. Das bedeutet auch, dass bei \texttt{noonelinecaption} das
-% Problem mit dem Hochzählen der Fußnoten nicht auftritt.
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/05/17}{Problem mit doppelten Fußnoten behoben}%
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/01/30}{Korrekturen für vertikalen Abstand und
+% Problem mit dem Hochzählen der Fußnoten nicht auftritt.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/05/17}{Problem mit doppelten Fußnoten behoben}%
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/01/30}{Korrekturen für vertikalen Abstand und
% \textsl{float}-Paket}%
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/13}{diverse Korrekturen für den vertikalen
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/13}{diverse Korrekturen für den vertikalen
% Abstand u.\,a. bei Verwendung des \textsl{color}-Pakets}%
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/06}{\cs{unskip}\cs{strut} eingefügt, um die
-% vertikale Ausrichtung im \emph{above}-Fall in eingen Fällen zu
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/06}{\cs{unskip}\cs{strut} eingefügt, um die
+% vertikale Ausrichtung im \emph{above}-Fall in eingen Fällen zu
% verbessern}%
-% \changes{v3.02a}{2009/01/24}{diverse Gruppen- bzw. Argumentklammern ergänzt}%
+% \changes{v3.02a}{2009/01/24}{diverse Gruppen- bzw. Argumentklammern ergänzt}%
% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/06/12}{\cs{capfont} durch
% \cs{usekomafont{caption}}ersetzt}%
% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/06/12}{\cs{caplabelfont} durch
@@ -1268,15 +1267,15 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@makecaption}[3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als erstes werden die Makros für den linken und rechten Rand generiert.
+% Als erstes werden die Makros für den linken und rechten Rand generiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cap@margin
% \end{macrocode}
% Danach wird der Test vorgenommen, ob der Text einzeilig oder
% mehrzeilig zu setzen ist und entsprechend gehandelt:
% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/01}{Umdefinierung von \cs{stepcounter} und
-% \cs{refstepcounter} auf lokale Erhöhung des Zählers geändert, um Probleme
-% mit \textsf{isodate} zu umgehen}^^A
+% \cs{refstepcounter} auf lokale Erhöhung des Zählers geändert, um Probleme
+% mit \textsf{isodate} zu umgehen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\ifonelinecaptions
@@ -1286,9 +1285,9 @@
\let\@footnotetext=\@gobble
\let\hypertarget\@gobbletwo
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/01}{Sonderbehandlung für \string\\ u.\,ä. im Text}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/01}{Sonderbehandlung für \string\\ u.\,ä. im Text}
% Falls im Text ein \texttt{\string\\} oder \cs{newline} enthalten ist,
-% wird ein Infotext ausgegeben und dafür gesorgt, dass mehrzeilig gearbeitet
+% wird ein Infotext ausgegeben und dafür gesorgt, dass mehrzeilig gearbeitet
% wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\@xnewline{%
@@ -1323,12 +1322,12 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@makesinglelinecaption}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/31}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/31}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@makesinglelinecaption}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/31}{neu (intern)}
-% Diesen Anweisungen übernehmen die komplette Ausgabe von einzeiligen Texten.
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/31}{neu (intern)}
+% Diesen Anweisungen übernehmen die komplette Ausgabe von einzeiligen Texten.
% Das erste Argumen hat \cs{@gobble} oder \cs{@firstofone} zu sein und
-% bestimmt darüber ob das Label ausgegeben wird oder nicht. Der Text wird
+% bestimmt darüber ob das Label ausgegeben wird oder nicht. Der Text wird
% dagegen immer ausgegeben! Das vierte Argument im internen Makro ist entweder
% \cs{par} oder leer.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1349,10 +1348,10 @@
\ignorespaces #3\unskip}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@makesinglelinecaption
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@makesinglelinecaption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@makesinglelinecaption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@makesinglelinecaption
% \begin{macro}{\scr@makemultilinecaption}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/31}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/31}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\scr@makemultilinecaption}[3]{%
{%
@@ -1361,11 +1360,11 @@
\cap@left
\vbox{\hsize\cap@width\linewidth\hsize
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{caption Ausrichtung hinzugefügt}^^A
-% Bevor wir irgend etwas anderes machen, führen wir an der Stelle die
-% Ausrichtung für die gesamte \emph{caption} einschließlich Label aus. Dabei
-% hat eine vorhandene spezielle Ausrichtung für den Gleitungebungstyp Vorrang
-% vor der allgemeinen Ausrichtung für alle Gleitumgebungen:
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{caption Ausrichtung hinzugefügt}%^^A
+% Bevor wir irgend etwas anderes machen, führen wir an der Stelle die
+% Ausrichtung für die gesamte \emph{caption} einschließlich Label aus. Dabei
+% hat eine vorhandene spezielle Ausrichtung für den Gleitungebungstyp Vorrang
+% vor der allgemeinen Ausrichtung für alle Gleitumgebungen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{@captype}{%
\ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -1384,10 +1383,10 @@
\@nameuse{ragged\@captype caption}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn der Schalter \cs{ifdofullc@p} gesetzt ist, wird der Text bezüglich des
-% Labels vollständig hängend gesetzt:
+% Wenn der Schalter \cs{ifdofullc@p} gesetzt ist, wird der Text bezüglich des
+% Labels vollständig hängend gesetzt:
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@endstrut} statt
-% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}^^A
+% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdofullc@p
\@hangfrom{%
@@ -1447,7 +1446,7 @@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Eigentlich fehlt hier nur die einfachste, gar nicht hängende Form:
+% Eigentlich fehlt hier nur die einfachste, gar nicht hängende Form:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*neverusethis>
% #1{{\usekomafont{captionlabel}{#2\captionformat}}}%
@@ -1464,14 +1463,14 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\setcaptionalignment}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu}^^A
-% Da es etwas lästig und fehleranfällig ist, die ganzen \cs{raggedcaption}
-% und \cs{ragged\dots caption} von Hand zu definieren, gibt es dafür einen
-% Befehl. Das erste, optionale Argument ist dabei die Gleitungebung für die
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu}%^^A
+% Da es etwas lästig und fehleranfällig ist, die ganzen \cs{raggedcaption}
+% und \cs{ragged\dots caption} von Hand zu definieren, gibt es dafür einen
+% Befehl. Das erste, optionale Argument ist dabei die Gleitungebung für die
% die Definition erfolgen soll. Ist das Argument nicht leer, wird bei
% definiertem \cs{@captype} dieses als Gleitumgebung angenommen. Ist das
% Argument leer wird stattdessen die allgemeine Ausrichtung festgelegt. Das
-% zweite Argument ist ein einzelner Buchstaben, der für die Ausrichtung steht.
+% zweite Argument ist ein einzelner Buchstaben, der für die Ausrichtung steht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\setcaptionalignment{%
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
@@ -1511,10 +1510,10 @@
% \end{description}
% Ist das Paket \textsf{ragged2e} geladen, werden stattdessen die Befehle
% \cs{LaTeXraggedright}, \cs{LaTeXraggedleft} und \cs{LaTeXcentering}
-% verwendet. Außerdem führen dann die entsprechenden Großbuchstaben zu
+% verwendet. Außerdem führen dann die entsprechenden Großbuchstaben zu
% \cs{justifying}, \cs{RaggedRight}, \cs{RaggedLeft} und
-% \cs{Centering}. Anderenfalls werden die Großbuchstaben wie die
-% Kleinbuchstaben behandelt und geben zusätzlich eine Warnung aus.
+% \cs{Centering}. Anderenfalls werden die Großbuchstaben wie die
+% Kleinbuchstaben behandelt und geben zusätzlich eine Warnung aus.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\reserved@a{#2}%
\ifstr{\reserved@a}{j}{%
@@ -1607,8 +1606,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@caption@raggede@warning}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Das ist die oben erwähnte Warnung.
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Das ist die oben erwähnte Warnung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@caption@raggede@warning}[2]{%
\begingroup
@@ -1623,38 +1622,38 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\raggedcaption}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu}^^A
-% Und natürlich wird eine Standardausrichtung benötigt. Ich bevorzuge hier die
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu}%^^A
+% Und natürlich wird eine Standardausrichtung benötigt. Ich bevorzuge hier die
% leere Ausrichtung, weil \LaTeX{} \cs{relax} nicht als definiert erkennt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\raggedcaption{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@caption@raggede@warning
-% \end{macro}^^A \setcaptionalignment
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@makemultilinecaption
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@makecaption
-% \end{macro}^^A \@makecaption
-% \end{macro}^^A \caption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@caption@raggede@warning
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setcaptionalignment
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@makemultilinecaption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@makecaption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@makecaption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \caption
%
% \begin{macro}{\LT@makecaption}
-% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{keine Umdefinierung, wenn das
+% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8k}{2001/08/15}{keine Umdefinierung, wenn das
% \textsf{caption2}-Paket erkannt oder die Option
% \texttt{origlongtable} gesetzt wurde}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{Breite und Anordnung wird über
-% \KOMAScript-Makros bestimmt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{Verwendung von \cs{AfterPackage}}
-% \changes{v2.9s}{2004/08/24}{vertikale Abstände durch verschieben von
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{Breite und Anordnung wird über
+% \KOMAScript-Makros bestimmt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{Verwendung von \cs{AfterPackage}}
+% \changes{v2.9s}{2004/08/24}{vertikale Abstände durch verschieben von
% \cs{vskip} korrigiert}
% \begin{macro}{\LT@array}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\LT@caption}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@caption@before@longtable@warning}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Ab Version 2.8j wird auf vielfachen Wunsch das
-% \textsf{longtable}-Paket berücksichtigt. Da Pakete aber nach
+% \textsf{longtable}-Paket berücksichtigt. Da Pakete aber nach
% Klassen geladen werden, kann dies erst nach dem Laden des Pakets
% aktiviert werden. Die Definition entspricht der obigen. Wird das
% \textsf{caption2}-Paket nach \textsf{longtable} geladen, so wird
@@ -1691,7 +1690,7 @@
\LT@mcol\LT@cols c{%
\hbox to\z@{\hss\parbox[t]\linewidth{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{\cs{@captype} auf \texttt{table} gesetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{\cs{@captype} auf \texttt{table} gesetzt}%^^A
% Damit \cs{raggedtablecaption} ggf. verwendet wird, wird hier \cs{@captype}
% explizit auf \texttt{table} gesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1735,16 +1734,16 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fs@komaabove}
-% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\fs@komabelow}
-% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\floatc@komascript}
-% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Ab Version 2.8j werden für das \textsf{float}-Paket zwei float-Stile
+% \changes{v2.8j}{2001/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Ab Version 2.8j werden für das \textsf{float}-Paket zwei float-Stile
% Namens \texttt{komaabove} und \texttt{komabelow} definiert. Da
-% möglicherweise auch andere Pakete darauf zurückgreifen, wird das
-% unabhängig von der Existenz von \textsf{float} getan. Verwendet wird
-% dies innerhalb von \KOMAScript{} jedoch nicht. Es werden außerdem
+% möglicherweise auch andere Pakete darauf zurückgreifen, wird das
+% unabhängig von der Existenz von \textsf{float} getan. Verwendet wird
+% dies innerhalb von \KOMAScript{} jedoch nicht. Es werden außerdem
% interne Makros von \textsf{float} verwendet!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\fs@komaabove}{%
@@ -1778,8 +1777,8 @@
% \begin{Counter}{dbltopnumber}
% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
-% Für die Fließumgebungen müssen verschiedene Konstanten definiert
-% werden, die Aufteilung zwischen Text und Fließumgebung und Ähnliches
+% Für die Fließumgebungen müssen verschiedene Konstanten definiert
+% werden, die Aufteilung zwischen Text und Fließumgebung und Ähnliches
% regeln.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
@@ -1808,23 +1807,23 @@
% \subsection{Titel ohne Gleitumgebung}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionof}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/07/08}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/21}{Verwendung des internen \cs{scr@caption}}
-% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/04/13}{Berücksichtigung von
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/07/08}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/21}{Verwendung des internen \cs{scr@caption}}
+% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/04/13}{Berücksichtigung von
% \texttt{captions=tableheading} und \texttt{captions=figureheading}}
% \begin{macro}{\captionaboveof}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/21}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/21}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionbelowof}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/21}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/21}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% Obwohl es inzwischen mehrere Pakete gibt, die diese Anweisung bereit
% stellen, kommt es doch immer wieder zu Fehlern, weil einige Anwender diese
% Pakete nicht nutzen. Also habe ich beschlossen, das selbst zu
-% implementieren. Um die Kompatibilität mit \textsf{capt-of} nicht zu stören,
-% wird die Definition vor dme Laden jenes Pakets zurück genommen. Mit dem
+% implementieren. Um die Kompatibilität mit \textsf{capt-of} nicht zu stören,
+% wird die Definition vor dme Laden jenes Pakets zurück genommen. Mit dem
% Paket \textsf{caption} gibt es solche Probleme nicht, da dieses
-% \cs{captionof} ohnehin per \cs{def} definiert. Allerdings berücksichtigt das
+% \cs{captionof} ohnehin per \cs{def} definiert. Allerdings berücksichtigt das
% \cs{captionof} von \textsf{caption} und \textsf{capt-of} eventuell die
-% Einstellungen für darüber oder darunter nicht in gleicher Weise.
+% Einstellungen für darüber oder darunter nicht in gleicher Weise.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\captionof}[1]{\def\@captype{#1}%
\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
@@ -1841,7 +1840,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{captionofbeside}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/02}{Neue Umgebung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/02}{Neue Umgebung}%^^A
% Analog zu \texttt{captionbeside} hier eine Umgebung mit Angabe des
% Gleitumgebungstyps als erstes Argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1859,7 +1858,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
-% So heißen die Dinger:
+% So heißen die Dinger:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\figurename{Figure}
\newcommand*\tablename{Table}
@@ -1871,14 +1870,14 @@
% \subsection{Abbildungsumgebung}
%
% \begin{environment}{figure}
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Abbildungsausgabe auf CJK umgestellt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{\cs{caption} wird explizit zu
-% \cs{captionbelow}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Reimplementierung mit \textsf{tocbasic}}^^A
-% Zunächst werden \texttt{figure}s, also Abbildungen behandelt.
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Abbildungsausgabe auf CJK umgestellt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{\cs{caption} wird explizit zu
+% \cs{captionbelow}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Reimplementierung mit \textsf{tocbasic}}%^^A
+% Zunächst werden \texttt{figure}s, also Abbildungen behandelt.
% \begin{Counter}{figure}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Der Zähler wird implizit von
-% \cs{DeclareNewTOC} definiert.}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Der Zähler wird implizit von
+% \cs{DeclareNewTOC} definiert.}%^^A
% \end{Counter}
% Der ganze Rest kann mit \cs{DeclareNewTOC} erledigt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1888,21 +1887,21 @@
%<book|report> counterwithin=chapter,
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\fps@figure}
-% Die Standardplatzierung für Abbildungen ist \emph{t}op,
+% Die Standardplatzierung für Abbildungen ist \emph{t}op,
% \emph{b}ottom, \emph{p}age.
% \begin{macrocode}
floatpos=tbp,
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ftype@figure}
-% Um die verschiedenen \emph{float}-Typen unterscheiden zu können,
-% benötigen sie eine Nummer. Abbildungen bekommen hier willkürlich
+% Um die verschiedenen \emph{float}-Typen unterscheiden zu können,
+% benötigen sie eine Nummer. Abbildungen bekommen hier willkürlich
% die Nummer 1.
% \begin{macrocode}
floattype=1,
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/03/01}{fix: one \cs{caption} change removed}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/07}{Interne Umdefinierung von \cs{caption}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/03/01}{fix: one \cs{caption} change removed}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/07}{Interne Umdefinierung von \cs{caption}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
tocentryindent=1.5em,
tocentrynumwidth=2.3em,
@@ -1912,18 +1911,19 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ext@figure}
-% Die Extension der Datei für das Abbildungsverzeichnis.
+% Die Extension der Datei für das Abbildungsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
]{lof}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\thefigure}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/26}{\cs{relax} replaced by percent}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
\renewcommand*\thefigure{%
%<*book>
- \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}\relax
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}%
\if@mainmatter\thechapter.\fi
\else
%</book>
@@ -1936,7 +1936,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\fnum@figure}
% \begin{macro}{\figureformat}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neu}%^^A
% Die Ausgabe der Abbildungsnummer wird implizit von \cs{DeclareNewTOC} als
% \iffalse
%<*ignore>
@@ -1960,15 +1960,15 @@
% \subsection{Tabellengleitumgebung}
%
% \begin{environment}{table}
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Tabellenausgabe auf CJK umgestellt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{bei Tabellen kann der Default für
-% \cs{caption} von Unter- auf Überschriften geändert werden}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Reimplementierung mit \textsf{tocbasic}}^^A
-% Auch verschiebbare Tabellen sind möglich. Das Prinzip ist das
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Tabellenausgabe auf CJK umgestellt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{bei Tabellen kann der Default für
+% \cs{caption} von Unter- auf Überschriften geändert werden}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Reimplementierung mit \textsf{tocbasic}}%^^A
+% Auch verschiebbare Tabellen sind möglich. Das Prinzip ist das
% gleiche wie bei den Abbildungen.
% \begin{Counter}{table}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Der Zähler wird implizit von
-% \cs{DeclareNewTOC} definiert.}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Der Zähler wird implizit von
+% \cs{DeclareNewTOC} definiert.}%^^A
% \end{Counter}
% Der ganze Rest kann mit \cs{DeclareNewTOC} erledigt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1978,20 +1978,20 @@
%<book|report> counterwithin=chapter,
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\fps@table}
-% Die Standardplatzierung für Tabellen ist \emph{t}op,
+% Die Standardplatzierung für Tabellen ist \emph{t}op,
% \emph{b}ottom, \emph{p}age.
% \begin{macrocode}
floatpos=tbp,
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ftype@table}
-% Um die verschiedenen \emph{float}-Typen unterscheiden zu können,
-% benötigen sie eine Nummer. Tabellen bekommen hier willkürlich
+% Um die verschiedenen \emph{float}-Typen unterscheiden zu können,
+% benötigen sie eine Nummer. Tabellen bekommen hier willkürlich
% die Nummer 2.
% \begin{macrocode}
floattype=2,
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/07}{Interne Umdefinierung von \cs{caption}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/07}{Interne Umdefinierung von \cs{caption}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
tocentryindent=1.5em,
tocentrynumwidth=2.3em,
@@ -2001,18 +2001,19 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ext@table}
-% Die Extension der Datei für das Abbildungsverzeichnis.
+% Die Extension der Datei für das Abbildungsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
]{lot}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\thetable}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/26}{\cs{relax} replaced by percent}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
%<book|report>\renewcommand*\thetable{%
%<*book>
- \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}\relax
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}%
\if@mainmatter\thechapter.\fi
\else
%</book>
@@ -2025,7 +2026,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\fnum@table}
% \begin{macro}{\tableformat}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neu}%^^A
% Die Ausgabe der Abbildungsnummer wird implizit von \cs{DeclareNewTOC} als
% \iffalse
%<*ignore>
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx
index a5bc0c9828..296a625bed 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-fonts.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-fonts.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-fonts.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-fonts.dtx 3047 2018-12-22 15:51:54Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-fonts.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-12-22 16:51:54 +0100 (Sat, 22 Dec 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1827 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -87,7 +87,6 @@
%<*dtx>
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-fonts.dtx}
@@ -112,7 +111,7 @@
% \section{Schriftauswahl}
%
% Dieser Bereich befasst sich mit allem, was zur Schriftauswahl
-% gehört. Die einzelnen Elemente, für die eine Schriftauswahl möglich
+% gehört. Die einzelnen Elemente, für die eine Schriftauswahl möglich
% ist, sind jedoch in den Dateien definiert, in denen diese Elemente
% auftreten.
%
@@ -122,15 +121,15 @@
%<*option>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Der Generator für Schriftgrößendateien}
+% \subsection{Der Generator für Schriftgrößendateien}
%
% \iffalse
%<*generator>
% \fi
-% Ab Version 3.09 gibt es einen Generator für neue
-% Schriftgrößendateien. Dieser richtet sich vor allem an Klassenautoren und
-% bietet die Möglichkeit, eine eigene berechnete Schriftgrößendatei als
-% Grundlage für eine spezifisch angepasste Schriftgrößendateie zu erstellen.
+% Ab Version 3.09 gibt es einen Generator für neue
+% Schriftgrößendateien. Dieser richtet sich vor allem an Klassenautoren und
+% bietet die Möglichkeit, eine eigene berechnete Schriftgrößendatei als
+% Grundlage für eine spezifisch angepasste Schriftgrößendateie zu erstellen.
% Optionen besitzt dieser jedoch nicht. Daher reduziert sich der Optionenteil
% auf ein einfaches
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -140,7 +139,7 @@
%</generator>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Option zur Auswahl der Größe der Grundschrift}
+% \subsection{Option zur Auswahl der Größe der Grundschrift}
%
% \iffalse
%<*class|extend>
@@ -149,19 +148,20 @@
% \begin{option}{11pt}
% \begin{option}{12pt}
% Diese Optionen existieren nicht mehr als explizite Optionen, sondern
-% werden in \texttt{scrtarea.dtx} über \cs{DeclareOption*}
+% werden in \texttt{scrtarea.dtx} über \cs{DeclareOption*}
% ausgewertet.
% \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{\cs{@ptsize} hat temporär eine andere
-% Bedeutung}
-% Wir definieren \cs{@ptsize} als Grundschriftgrößee minus 10\,pt.
-% Hier wird die Standardeinstellung 11\,pt für alle Klassen außer der
-% Briefklasse gewählt. Bis zum Einstellen tatsächlichen Einstellen der
-% Schriftgröße wird in \cs{@ptsize} allerdings die tatsächliche Größe
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{\cs{@ptsize} hat temporär eine andere
+% Bedeutung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/25}{\cs{providecommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}%^^A
+% Wir definieren \cs{@ptsize} als Grundschriftgrößee minus 10\,pt.
+% Hier wird die Standardeinstellung 11\,pt für alle Klassen außer der
+% Briefklasse gewählt. Bis zum Einstellen tatsächlichen Einstellen der
+% Schriftgröße wird in \cs{@ptsize} allerdings die tatsächliche Größe
% angegeben, damit sich Rundungsfehler nicht so leicht summieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!extend>
-\newcommand*\@ptsize{%
+\providecommand*\@ptsize{%
%<!letter> 11%
%<letter> 12%
}
@@ -173,18 +173,18 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pt@scan}
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@pt@@scan}
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/12}{\cs{KOMA@UseObsolete} durch
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/12}{\cs{KOMA@UseObsolete} durch
% \cs{KOMA@UseObsoleteOption} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/22}{Verwendung von \cs{KOMA@UseObsoleteOption}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/22}{Verwendung von \cs{KOMA@UseObsoleteOption}%^^A
% korrigiert}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch
% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Alle Schriftgrößen-Optionen außer
-% \texttt{10pt}, \texttt{11pt} und \texttt{12pt} sind überholt.}
-% Das Macro \cs{@pt@scan} wird benötigt, um die Schriftgröße nach der alten
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Alle Schriftgrößen-Optionen außer
+% \texttt{10pt}, \texttt{11pt} und \texttt{12pt} sind überholt.}
+% Das Macro \cs{@pt@scan} wird benötigt, um die Schriftgröße nach der alten
% Methode zu erkennen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!extend>
@@ -221,28 +221,28 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fontsizefilebase}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/01}{Definition für \textsf{scrextend} vorgezogen}
-% Dieses Makro speichert den Präfix der primären
-% Schriftgrößenoptionsdateien. Es wird nur definiert, wenn es nicht bereits
-% definiert ist. Damit können Wrapperklassen komplett andere Größen vorgeben,
-% ohne mit \cs{ReplaceInput} arbeiten zu müssen.
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/01}{Definition für \textsf{scrextend} vorgezogen}
+% Dieses Makro speichert den Präfix der primären
+% Schriftgrößenoptionsdateien. Es wird nur definiert, wenn es nicht bereits
+% definiert ist. Damit können Wrapperklassen komplett andere Größen vorgeben,
+% ohne mit \cs{ReplaceInput} arbeiten zu müssen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\@fontsizefilebase}{scrsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{die Schriftgröße wird in der internen
-% Optionenliste gespeichert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{die Schriftgröße wird in der internen
+% Optionenliste gespeichert}%^^A
% \begin{option}{fontsize}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{Funktion komplett geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{lädt nach Möglichkeit die zugehörige
-% Schriftgrößendatei}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Status wird mit \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{Funktion komplett geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{lädt nach Möglichkeit die zugehörige
+% Schriftgrößendatei}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Status wird mit \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%^^A
% gesetzt.}
-% Hier nun die Option, die tatsächlich verwendet wird. Es sei darauf
-% hingewiesen, dass damit auch Schriftgrößen wie \texttt{10.3pt} denkbar
-% wären.
+% Hier nun die Option, die tatsächlich verwendet wird. Es sei darauf
+% hingewiesen, dass damit auch Schriftgrößen wie \texttt{10.3pt} denkbar
+% wären.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@key{fontsize}{%
%<*!extend>
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@
% \iffalse
%<*generator>
% \fi
-% Der Generator benötigt die Anweisung \cs{changefontsizes}, die entweder von
+% Der Generator benötigt die Anweisung \cs{changefontsizes}, die entweder von
% einer \KOMAScript-Klasse oder vom Paket \texttt{scrextend} bereitgestellt
% wird:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -314,10 +314,10 @@
%</generator>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Einlesen der Schriftgrößendatei}
+% \subsection{Einlesen der Schriftgrößendatei}
%
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{Einlesen der Schriftgrößen-Options-Datei
-% funktioniert nun mit diversen Größen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{Einlesen der Schriftgrößen-Options-Datei
+% funktioniert nun mit diversen Größen}%^^A
% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{Eigene \texttt{scrsize}-Dateien definiert}
%
% \iffalse
@@ -325,9 +325,9 @@
%<*10pt|11pt|12pt>
% \fi
%
-% Es werden min. drei Schriftgrößendateien benötigt. Ab Version 2.98c
+% Es werden min. drei Schriftgrößendateien benötigt. Ab Version 2.98c
% verwendet \KOMAScript{} vorzugsweise eigene Dateien, die auch noch zu einem
-% späteren Zeitpunkt geladen werden können. Ansonsten sind diese Dateien
+% späteren Zeitpunkt geladen werden können. Ansonsten sind diese Dateien
% weitestgehend dem Quellcode der Standardklassen \texttt{classes.dtx}
% entnommen.
%
@@ -344,25 +344,25 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\small}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\scriptsize}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\tiny}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\large}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\Large}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\LARGE}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\huge}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\Huge}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% Siehe \texttt{classes.dtx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalsize{%
@@ -483,33 +483,33 @@
\normalsize
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{Length}{\footnotesep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\footins}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\floatsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\textfloatsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\intextsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\dblfloatsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\sbltextfloatsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\@fptop}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\@fpsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\@fpbot}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\@dblfptop}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\@dblfpsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\@dblfpbot}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{Length}{\partopsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% Siehe \texttt{classes.dtx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*10pt>
@@ -562,17 +562,17 @@
%</12pt>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{in eigener \texttt{scrsize}-Datei definiert}
% Siehe \texttt{classes.dtx}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
@@ -637,20 +637,20 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\changefontsizes}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{neue Anweisung (benötigt \eTeX)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{drei falsche \cs{def} durch \cs{edef}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/23}{wird nur definiert, wenn nicht vorhanden}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{neue Anweisung (benötigt \eTeX)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{drei falsche \cs{def} durch \cs{edef}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/23}{wird nur definiert, wenn nicht vorhanden}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\simple@changefontsizes}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/23}{auf speziellen Wunsch von Falk}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{par@updaterelative} hinzugefügt}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung bietet berechnete Schriftgrößen als Fallbacklösung an. Das
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/23}{auf speziellen Wunsch von Falk}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{par@updaterelative} hinzugefügt}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung bietet berechnete Schriftgrößen als Fallbacklösung an. Das
% optionale erste Argument ist dabei der Grundlinienabstand. Das zweite
-% Argument ist die gewünschte Grundschriftgröße.
+% Argument ist die gewünschte Grundschriftgröße.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@setlength}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/08}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Setzt die Länge in |#1| auf den Wert |#2| plus |#3| minus |#4|, wobei
-% allerdings für |#2|, |#3| und |#4| Mindestwerte von 1\,pt verwendet werden.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/08}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Setzt die Länge in |#1| auf den Wert |#2| plus |#3| minus |#4|, wobei
+% allerdings für |#2|, |#3| und |#4| Mindestwerte von 1\,pt verwendet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@setlength[4]{%
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
@@ -689,7 +689,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{e-\TeX-Warnung entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{e-\TeX-Warnung entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\simple@changefontsizes}[2][1.2\@tempdima]{%
\KOMA@kav@removekey{.%
@@ -707,15 +707,15 @@
\def\@tempa##1##2##3##4##5\@nnil{\def##1{##2.##3##4}}%
\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter\@tempb\@tempb\@nnil%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ab hier ist \cs{@tempdimc} die gewünschte Grundschriftgröße in pt und
-% \cs{@tempb} der Faktor für den Grundlinienabstand auf 2 Stellen hinter dem
-% Komma. Zunächst ist auch \cs{@tempdima} noch die geforderte
-% Grundschriftgröße und \cs{@tempdimb} der geforderte
-% Grundlinienabstand. Allerdings verändern sich \cs{@tempdima} und
-% \cs{@tempdimb} im Laufe der nachfolgenden Definitionen abhängig von der zu
-% definierenden Schriftgröße.
+% Ab hier ist \cs{@tempdimc} die gewünschte Grundschriftgröße in pt und
+% \cs{@tempb} der Faktor für den Grundlinienabstand auf 2 Stellen hinter dem
+% Komma. Zunächst ist auch \cs{@tempdima} noch die geforderte
+% Grundschriftgröße und \cs{@tempdimb} der geforderte
+% Grundlinienabstand. Allerdings verändern sich \cs{@tempdima} und
+% \cs{@tempdimb} im Laufe der nachfolgenden Definitionen abhängig von der zu
+% definierenden Schriftgröße.
%
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{normalsize}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{normalsize}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{%
@@ -741,7 +741,7 @@
\let\noexpand\@listi\noexpand\@listI
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{small}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{small}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{0.9125\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -769,7 +769,7 @@
\let\noexpand\@listi\noexpand\@listi@small
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{footnotesize}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{footnotesize}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{.83334\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -797,7 +797,7 @@
\let\noexpand\@listi\noexpand\@listi@footnotesize
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{scriptsize}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{scriptsize}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{.66667\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -806,7 +806,7 @@
{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{tiny}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{tiny}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{.5\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -815,7 +815,7 @@
{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{large}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{large}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{1.2\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -824,7 +824,7 @@
{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{Large}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{Large}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{1.44\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@
{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{LARGE}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{LARGE}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{1.728\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -842,7 +842,7 @@
{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{huge}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{huge}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{2.074\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -851,7 +851,7 @@
{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{Huge}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{Huge}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdima}{2.488\@tempdimc}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -860,15 +860,15 @@
{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wechsel zu \cs{normalsize} und Berechnung weiterer schriftabhängigen
-% Abstände für diese Schriftgröße.
+% Wechsel zu \cs{normalsize} und Berechnung weiterer schriftabhängigen
+% Abstände für diese Schriftgröße.
% \begin{macrocode}
\normalsize
%<!extend> \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.17}\@nameuse{par@updaterelative}\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ab hier kann nun \cs{f@size} für die Schriftgröße und \cs{f@baselineskip}
-% für den normalen Grundlinienabstand (ohne \cs{baselinestretch}) verwendet
-% werden. Allerdings ist das keine Länge!
+% Ab hier kann nun \cs{f@size} für die Schriftgröße und \cs{f@baselineskip}
+% für den normalen Grundlinienabstand (ohne \cs{baselinestretch}) verwendet
+% werden. Allerdings ist das keine Länge!
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\footnotesep}{.7\@tempdimc}%
@@ -891,7 +891,7 @@
\setlength{\@dblfpbot}{\@fptop}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listi} und \cs{@listI}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listi} und \cs{@listI}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\topsep}{.8333\@tempdimc \@plus .3333\@tempdimc \@minus
@@ -917,7 +917,7 @@
}%
\let\@listI\@listi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listi@small}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listi@small}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\topsep}{.75\@tempdimc \@plus .25\@tempdimc \@minus
@@ -941,7 +941,7 @@
\if@tempswa\noexpand\@list@extra\fi
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listi@footnotesize}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listi@footnotesize}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\topsep}{.5\@tempdimc \@plus .16667\@tempdimc \@minus
@@ -965,7 +965,7 @@
\if@tempswa\noexpand\@list@extra\fi
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listii}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listii}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\topsep}{.4167\@tempdimc \@plus .2083\@tempdimc \@minus \p@}%
@@ -989,7 +989,7 @@
\if@tempswa\noexpand\@list@extra\fi
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listiii}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listiii}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\topsep}{.2083\@tempdimc \@plus \p@ \@minus \p@}%
@@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@
\if@tempswa\noexpand\@list@extra\fi
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listiv}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listiv}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempswafalse
\begingroup
@@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@
\if@tempswa\noexpand\@list@extra\fi
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listv}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listv}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempswafalse
\begingroup
@@ -1036,7 +1036,7 @@
\if@tempswa\noexpand\@list@extra\fi
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listvi}:
+% Berechnungen für und Definition von \cs{@listvi}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempswafalse
\begingroup
@@ -1049,13 +1049,13 @@
}%
\@listi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Einige Platzierungsabstände sind ebenfalls schriftgrößenabhängig. ^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{\cs{intextsep} setzen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{\cs{dblfloatsep} setzen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{\cs{partopsep} setzen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/08}{Berechnung einiger Größen verändert}^^A
-% Ab Version~3.12 wird deren Berechnung korrigiert. Viele der Größen sind nun
-% nicht mehr von der Schriftgröße, sondern dem Grundlinienabstand abhängig.
+% Einige Platzierungsabstände sind ebenfalls schriftgrößenabhängig. ^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{\cs{intextsep} setzen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{\cs{dblfloatsep} setzen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{\cs{partopsep} setzen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/08}{Berechnung einiger Größen verändert}%^^A
+% Ab Version~3.12 wird deren Berechnung korrigiert. Viele der Größen sind nun
+% nicht mehr von der Schriftgröße, sondern dem Grundlinienabstand abhängig.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.12}\relax
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\@tempb\@tempdima}%
@@ -1099,19 +1099,19 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \simple@changefontsizes
-% \end{macro}^^A \changefontsizes
+% \end{macro}%^^A \simple@changefontsizes
+% \end{macro}%^^A \changefontsizes
% \iffalse
%</class|extend>
%<*generator>
% \fi
% \begin{macro}{\generatefontfile}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/26}{\cs{par@updaterelative} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/26}{\cs{par@updaterelative} added}%^^A
% Dies ist die zentrale Anweisung des neuen Generators. Es wird eine neue
-% Schriftgrößendatei ausgegeben. Der Name dieser Datei setzt sich aus dem
-% ersten obligaorischen Argument gefolgt von der Schriftgröße und der
-% Erweiterung \texttt{.clo} zusammen. Da Schriftgrößendateien, die mit
+% Schriftgrößendatei ausgegeben. Der Name dieser Datei setzt sich aus dem
+% ersten obligaorischen Argument gefolgt von der Schriftgröße und der
+% Erweiterung \texttt{.clo} zusammen. Da Schriftgrößendateien, die mit
% "`\texttt{scrsize}"' beginnen, \KOMAScript{} vorbehalten sind wird dieses
% erste Argument verweigert.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1132,24 +1132,24 @@
\@@@generatefontfile
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% Das zweite Argument ist optional. Ist es angegeben, so gibt es den
-% gewünschten Zeilenabstand an. Ist es nicht angegeben, so wird der
-% Zeilenabstand |\changefontsized| überlassen. Das dritte Argument ist
-% schließlich die gewünschte Schriftgröße.
+% gewünschten Zeilenabstand an. Ist es nicht angegeben, so wird der
+% Zeilenabstand |\changefontsized| überlassen. Das dritte Argument ist
+% schließlich die gewünschte Schriftgröße.
% \begin{macrocode}
\kernel@ifnextchar [{\@generatefontfile{#1}}{\@@generatefontfile{#1}}%
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@generatefontfile}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@generatefontfile}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Diese beiden Hilfsmakros werden benötigt, um Aufrufe von |\generatefontfile|
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Diese beiden Hilfsmakros werden benötigt, um Aufrufe von |\generatefontfile|
% mit oder ohne optionales, zweites Argument zu behandeln. In jedem Fall wird
-% die gewünschte Schriftgröße innerhalb einer Gruppe mit Hilfe von
+% die gewünschte Schriftgröße innerhalb einer Gruppe mit Hilfe von
% |\changefontsizes| bestimmt und dann eine Datei mit den dabei ermittelten
% Einstellungen ausgegeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1174,33 +1174,33 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@@@generatorfontfile}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% Dieses Hilfsmakro wird hingegen im Fehlerfall aufgerufen, um die Ausgabe
-% einer Schriftgrößendatei zu verhindern.
+% einer Schriftgrößendatei zu verhindern.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@@@generatefontfile}[2][]{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@fontfile}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Da später die Verwendung von |\generatefontfile| noch auf die Präambel
-% beschränkt werden wird, ist es kein Problem hier |\@mainaux| für die Ausgabe
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Da später die Verwendung von |\generatefontfile| noch auf die Präambel
+% beschränkt werden wird, ist es kein Problem hier |\@mainaux| für die Ausgabe
% zu missbrauchen. Das funktioniert aber nur, weil |\@mainaux| erst innerhalb
-% von |\begin{document}| tatsächlich geöffnet wird. Die Dateisparsamkeit an
+% von |\begin{document}| tatsächlich geöffnet wird. Die Dateisparsamkeit an
% dieser Stelle ist also eigentlich ein ziemlich unsauberer Hack!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@fontfile}{}
\let\@fontfile\@mainaux
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\generate@fontfile}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.16a}{2015/02/11}{\cs{footnotesize} korrigiert}
-% Es wird nun eine Schriftgrößendatei ausgegeben. Dabei werden die aktuellen
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/02/23}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.16a}{2015/02/11}{\cs{footnotesize} korrigiert}
+% Es wird nun eine Schriftgrößendatei ausgegeben. Dabei werden die aktuellen
% Einstellungen verwendet. Dabei wird die Tatsache ausgenutzt, dass diese
% Anweisung immer innerhalb einer Gruppe aufgerufen wird. Das erste Argument
-% ist der Dateinamenpräfix (also so etwas wie "`\texttt{scrsize}"', das zweite
-% Argument die gewünschte Schriftgröße. Es ist zu beachten, dass alle Werte in
-% der Datei in pt angegeben werden, auch wenn die gewünschte Schriftgröße eine
+% ist der Dateinamenpräfix (also so etwas wie "`\texttt{scrsize}"', das zweite
+% Argument die gewünschte Schriftgröße. Es ist zu beachten, dass alle Werte in
+% der Datei in pt angegeben werden, auch wenn die gewünschte Schriftgröße eine
% ganz andere Einheit besitzt. Das macht schlicht die Arbeit etwas einfacher.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\generate@fontfile}[2]{%
@@ -1488,11 +1488,11 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Zunächst wird die gewünschte Größe, die in \cs{@ptsize} abgelegt ist, als
-% Länge ermittelt. In \cs{@tempa} wird die ursprünglich gewünschte Größe
+% Zunächst wird die gewünschte Größe, die in \cs{@ptsize} abgelegt ist, als
+% Länge ermittelt. In \cs{@tempa} wird die ursprünglich gewünschte Größe
% abgelegt, damit zwischen \texttt{10pt}, \texttt{10} und \texttt{10dd}
-% unterschieden werden kann. In \cs{@tempb} wird hingegen die Größe in pt
-% abgelegt, damit die Standard-Dateien verwendet werden können. Dann wird
+% unterschieden werden kann. In \cs{@tempb} wird hingegen die Größe in pt
+% abgelegt, damit die Standard-Dateien verwendet werden können. Dann wird
% \cs{@ptsize} schon einmal richtig eingestellt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!extend>
@@ -1503,10 +1503,10 @@
\addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-10\p@}%
\edef\@ptsize{\strip@pt\@tempdimb}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt wird zunächst versucht, ob eine Datei
+% Jetzt wird zunächst versucht, ob eine Datei
% "`\texttt{\cs{fontsizefilebase}\cs{@tempa}.clo}"' vorhanden ist, also eine,
-% bei der die ursprünliche Einheit im Namen angegeben ist. Wenn das der Fall
-% ist, wird diese verwendet. Wenn nicht wird das Ganze für \cs{@tempb} um die
+% bei der die ursprünliche Einheit im Namen angegeben ist. Wenn das der Fall
+% ist, wird diese verwendet. Wenn nicht wird das Ganze für \cs{@tempb} um die
% Einheit pt erweitert wiederholt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\InputIfFileExists{\@fontsizefilebase\@tempa.clo}{%
@@ -1524,7 +1524,7 @@
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Wurde bis hier noch keine Datei geladen, wird nun versucht, die
-% Größendateien der Standardklassen zu verwenden.
+% Größendateien der Standardklassen zu verwenden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book>
\InputIfFileExists{bk\@tempb.clo}{%
@@ -1542,7 +1542,7 @@
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Sind auch diese Dateien nicht vorhanden, so wird als Fallback eine
-% Berechnung der Schriftgrößen verwendet. Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass
+% Berechnung der Schriftgrößen verwendet. Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass
% dabei auch \cs{@tempa}, \cs{@tempb} und \cs{@ptsize} neu gesetzt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\@tempa{%
@@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@
\noexpand\KOMA@kav@xadd{.\KOMAClassFileName}{fontsize}{\@tempa}%
}\@tempa
% \end{macrocode}
-% Damit sollten nun die Schriftgrößen eingestellt sein.
+% Damit sollten nun die Schriftgrößen eingestellt sein.
% \begin{macrocode}
}%
%<book> }%
@@ -1565,18 +1565,18 @@
% \subsection{"`Alte"' Font-Auswahlbefehle}
%
% \begin{option}{enabledeprecatedfontcommands}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{neue (veraltete) Option}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{neue (veraltete) Option}%^^A
% Diese Option ist bereits bei ihrer Definition veraltet. Sie stellt quasi die
-% nächste Eskalation für die veralteten Font-Auswahlbefehle dar. Man kann mit
-% ihrer Hilfe notfalls noch einmal die alten Befehle zurück holen. Dabei wird
+% nächste Eskalation für die veralteten Font-Auswahlbefehle dar. Man kann mit
+% ihrer Hilfe notfalls noch einmal die alten Befehle zurück holen. Dabei wird
% in der Voreinstellung weiterhin eine Warnung ausgegeben.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@defineobsoletefonts}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{neue (veraltete) Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Über diese Anweisung wird eingestellt, ob die veralteten Befehle mit
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{neue (veraltete) Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Anweisung wird eingestellt, ob die veralteten Befehle mit
% Fehlermeldung, Warnung, Info oder gar nicht gemeldet werden.
% Negative Werte bedeuten, dass die Befehle nicht definiert werden. Null steht
-% für interne Fehlermeldung. Eins ist eine Warnung. Zwei ist eine Info und
-% darüber hinaus werden die Befehle einfach definiert. Voreingestellt ist
+% für interne Fehlermeldung. Eins ist eine Warnung. Zwei ist eine Info und
+% darüber hinaus werden die Befehle einfach definiert. Voreingestellt ist
% derzeit noch Null. In naher Zukunft wird das aber -1 werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option>
@@ -1602,14 +1602,14 @@
%</class>
%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@degineobsoletefonts
-% \end{option}^^A enabledeprecatedfontscommands
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@degineobsoletefonts
+% \end{option}%^^A enabledeprecatedfontscommands
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@DeclareOldFontCommand}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/31}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{veraltet eskaliert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/31}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{veraltet eskaliert}%^^A
% Diese Anweisung arbeitet prinzipiell wie die \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisung
-% \cs{DeclareOldFontCommand}, wirft aber zusätzlich mit Warnungen um sich, um
+% \cs{DeclareOldFontCommand}, wirft aber zusätzlich mit Warnungen um sich, um
% dem Anwender die Verwendung der alten Befehle zu versauern.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -1630,8 +1630,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ErrorWarningInfo}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/28}{message fixed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/28}{message fixed}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\scr@ErrorWarningInfo}[2]{%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1709,35 +1709,35 @@
}
%</!extend>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@OldFontErrorWarningInfo
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@DeclareOldFontCommand
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@OldFontErrorWarningInfo
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@DeclareOldFontCommand
%
% \begin{macro}{\rm}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sf}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\tt}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\bf}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\it}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sl}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sc}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sfb}
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{nicht mehr mathematisch}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{keine Unterscheidung mehr für den
-% Kompatibilitätsmodus}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{nicht mehr mathematisch}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{keine Unterscheidung mehr für den
+% Kompatibilitätsmodus}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/13}{Anweisung ist veraltet}%^^A
% Um die Umstellung von \LaTeX\ auf \LaTeXe\ zu erleichtern, gibt es
% die alten Font-Auswahlbefehle \cs{rm}, \cs{sf}, \cs{tt}, \cs{bf},
% \cs{it}, \cs{sl} und \cs{sc} auch in den Klassen. Es ist zu
% beachten, dass diese Befehle hier nach dem alten
% Fontauswahlverfahren arbeiten. Es werden also immer alle Parameter
-% zugleich geändert. Somit ist zu empfehlen, dass statt dieser Befehle
-% zukünftig in der Regel die neuen \cs{text\dots}-Befehle verwendet
+% zugleich geändert. Somit ist zu empfehlen, dass statt dieser Befehle
+% zukünftig in der Regel die neuen \cs{text\dots}-Befehle verwendet
% werden.
%
% Der aus der \textsf{Script 2.0}-Familie bekannte Befehl \cs{sfb} ist
@@ -1765,20 +1765,20 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cal}
-% \changes{v2.3}{1995/06/25}{hier statt im \LaTeX-Kern}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3}{1995/06/25}{hier statt im \LaTeX-Kern}%^^A
% Der Befehl ist in \LaTeX{} nicht mehr definiert. Deshalb wird er nun
-% neu und gleich robust deklariert. Dafür fällt \cs{pcal} weg.
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{überflüssige Klammerpaare entfernt}^^A
+% neu und gleich robust deklariert. Dafür fällt \cs{pcal} weg.
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{überflüssige Klammerpaare entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\mit}
-% \changes{v2.3}{1995/06/25}{hier statt im \LaTeX-Kern}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3}{1995/06/25}{hier statt im \LaTeX-Kern}%^^A
% Der Befehl ist in \LaTeX{} nicht mehr definiert. Deshalb wird er nun
-% neu und gleich robust deklariert. Dafür fällt \cs{pmit} weg.
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{überflüssige Klammerpaare entfernt}^^A
+% neu und gleich robust deklariert. Dafür fällt \cs{pmit} weg.
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{überflüssige Klammerpaare entfernt}%^^A
%
% Die beiden Befehle \cs{cal} und \cs{mit} war bis zur \LaTeX-Version
% vom 1.12.1994 patch level 3 noch im Kernal definiert. Jetzt sind die
-% beiden den Klassen überlassen. Hier ist die Definition aus den
-% Standard-classes übernommen.
+% beiden den Klassen überlassen. Hier ist die Definition aus den
+% Standard-classes übernommen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!extend>
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\cal}{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
@@ -1799,8 +1799,8 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfExistskomafont}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Führe das zweite Argument aus, wenn ein Fontelement existiert, sonst das
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Führe das zweite Argument aus, wenn ein Fontelement existiert, sonst das
% dritte.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\IfExistskomafont}[1]{%
@@ -1814,8 +1814,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfIsAliaskomafont}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Führe das zweite Argument aus, wenn ein Fontelement ein Alias is, sonst das
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Führe das zweite Argument aus, wenn ein Fontelement ein Alias is, sonst das
% dritte.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\IfIsAliaskomafont}[1]{%
@@ -1829,8 +1829,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setkomafont}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}
% Mit Hilfe dieses Makros kann die Schriftart von
% \KOMAScript-Elementen gesetzt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1866,9 +1866,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\addtokomafont}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}
-% Dieses Makro funktioniert fast wie obiges, allerdings fügt es der
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}
+% Dieses Makro funktioniert fast wie obiges, allerdings fügt es der
% vorhandenen Definition etwas an. Dazu wird \cs{l@addto@macro} aus
% \textsf{scrkbase} verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1907,9 +1907,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\usekomafont}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/28}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/18}{Benutzung eines Fontalias korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/28}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/18}{Benutzung eines Fontalias korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}
% Mit Hilfe dieses Makros kann auf die Schriftart von
% \KOMAScript-Elementen umgeschaltet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1944,33 +1944,33 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\usesizeofkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{robustere Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{robustere Neuimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{robustere Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{robustere Neuimplementierung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\usefamilyofkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\useseriesofkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\useshapeofkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.16a}{2015/02/20}{Makroname korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.16a}{2015/02/20}{Makroname korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\useencodingofkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{basiert auf robusterer Neuimplementierung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\usefontofkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{robustere Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{robustere Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% Manchmal wollen die Leute tatsächlich gar nicht den kompletten Font eines
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{robustere Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{robustere Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% Manchmal wollen die Leute tatsächlich gar nicht den kompletten Font eines
% Elements, sondern nur einen Teilaspekt davon. Aber Version~3.12 wird das mit
-% Hilfe neuer Anweisungen unterstützt.
+% Hilfe neuer Anweisungen unterstützt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\usesizeofkomafont}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -2016,10 +2016,10 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\use@ofkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{robustere Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{robustere Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% Kleines Hilfsmakro für all diese Anweisungen bis auf die erste und die letzte.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{robustere Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{robustere Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% Kleines Hilfsmakro für all diese Anweisungen bis auf die erste und die letzte.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\use@ofkomafont}[2]{%
\begingroup
@@ -2038,23 +2038,23 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@usefont}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{entfernt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@usefont
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{entfernt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@usefont
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@f@encoding}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@f@family}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@f@series}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@f@shape}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@f@size}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@f@baselineskip}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\g@scr@f@linespread}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\g@scr@f@encoding}{}\let\g@scr@f@encoding\f@encoding
\newcommand*{\g@scr@f@family}{}\let\g@scr@f@family\f@family
@@ -2064,18 +2064,18 @@
\newcommand*{\g@scr@f@baselineskip}{}\let\g@scr@f@baselineskip\f@baselineskip
\newcommand*{\g@scr@f@linespread}{}\let\g@scr@f@linespread\f@linespread
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@f@linespread
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@f@family
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@f@series
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@f@shape
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@f@size
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@f@baselineskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \g@scr@f@linespread
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@f@linespread
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@f@family
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@f@series
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@f@shape
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@f@size
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@f@baselineskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \g@scr@f@linespread
% \begin{macro}{\scr@komafontrelaxlist}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{\cs{uppercase} und \cs{lowercase} entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{\cs{MakeUppercase} und \cs{MakeLowercase} nach
-% \cs{scr@komafontonearglist} verschoben}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{\cs{uppercase} und \cs{lowercase} entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{\cs{MakeUppercase} und \cs{MakeLowercase} nach
+% \cs{scr@komafontonearglist} verschoben}%^^A
% Hilfsmakro mit einer |\do|-Liste aller Makros, die in obigen Font-Makros vor
% der Anwendung des Fonts |\relax| verwenden sollen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2083,9 +2083,9 @@
\do\normalcolor
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@komafontrelaxlist
-% \begin{macro}{scr@komafontgobblelist}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/20}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@komafontrelaxlist
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@komafontgobblelist}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/20}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Wie \cs{scr@komafontrelaxlist} nur dass |\@gobble| statt |\relax| verwendet
% wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2093,9 +2093,9 @@
\do\color
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@komafontgobblelist
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@komafontgobblelist
% \begin{macro}{\scr@komafontonearglist}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Hilfsmakro mit einer |\do|-Liste aller Makros, die in obige Font-Makros
% vor der Anwendung des Fonts |\@firstofone| verwenden sollen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2105,10 +2105,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@prepareforkomafont}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/20}{abarbeiten von \cs{scr@komafontgobblelist}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{abarbeiten von \cs{scr@komafontonearglist}}^^A
-% Hilfsmakro, das die Vorbereitungen für die obigen Font-Makros trifft. In der
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/20}{abarbeiten von \cs{scr@komafontgobblelist}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{abarbeiten von \cs{scr@komafontonearglist}}%^^A
+% Hilfsmakro, das die Vorbereitungen für die obigen Font-Makros trifft. In der
% Voreinstellung ist das lediglich die Anwendung der |\do|-Liste, so dass die
% dort angegebenen Makros alle |\relax| bzw. |\@gobble| werden. Da die
% Anweisung dazu |\do| umdefiniert, sollte die Anweisung immer in einer Gruppe
@@ -2120,37 +2120,37 @@
\long\def\do##1{\let##1\@firstofone}\scr@komafontonearglist
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@prepareforkomafont
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@prepareforkomafont
% \begin{macro}{\addtokomafontrelaxlist}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{Neu}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{Neu}
% Diese Anweisung erlaubt es genau ein Makro der obigen |\do|-Liste
-% hinzuzufügen.
+% hinzuzufügen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addtokomafontrelaxlist}[1]{%
\l@addto@macro\scr@komafontrelaxlist{\do#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addtokomafontrelaxlist
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addtokomafontrelaxlist
% \begin{macro}{\addtokomafontgobblelist}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/20}{Neu}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/20}{Neu}
% Diese Anweisung erlaubt es genau ein Makro der obigen |\do|-Liste
-% hinzuzufügen.
+% hinzuzufügen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addtokomafontgobblelist}[1]{%
\l@addto@macro\scr@komafontgobblelist{\do#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addtokomafontgobblelist
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addtokomafontgobblelist
% \begin{macro}{\addtokomafontonearglist}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{Neu}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/05}{Neu}
% Diese Anweisung erlaubt es genau ein Makro der obigen |\do|-Liste
-% hinzuzufügen
+% hinzuzufügen
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addtokomafontonearglist}[1]{%
\l@addto@macro\scr@komafontonearglist{\do#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addtokonafontonearglist
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addtokonafontonearglist
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -2159,15 +2159,15 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Um dann ein Element zu definieren, definiert man zunächst ein
-% Makro, das die Schriftart enthält. Dann definiert man
+% Um dann ein Element zu definieren, definiert man zunächst ein
+% Makro, das die Schriftart enthält. Dann definiert man
% \cs{scr@fnt@\emph{Elementname}}. Wobei der Inhalt dieses Makros das
% Makro ist, das die Schriftart speichert. Damit ist das Element
% definiert. Soll ein Element durch ein anderes Element gesteuert
% werden, so definiert man stattdessen
% \cs{scr@fnt@instead@\emph{Elementname}}, wobei der Inhalt des Makros
-% dann der Name jenes anderen Elements ist. Soll beim Ändern der
-% Schrift eines Elements eine zusätzliche Warnung ausgegeben werden,
+% dann der Name jenes anderen Elements ist. Soll beim Ändern der
+% Schrift eines Elements eine zusätzliche Warnung ausgegeben werden,
% so kann der Text dieser Warnung in
% \cs{scr@fnt@wrn@\emph{Elementname}} abgelegt werden. Die Warnung wird dann
% als Befehl mit einem Argument definiert. Also alles
@@ -2175,15 +2175,15 @@
% Hilfsmakros:
%
% \begin{macro}{\newkomafont}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{neu}%^^A
% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/18}{die Warnung hat ein Argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Warnung, wenn bereits als Alias definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/18}{die Warnung hat ein Argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Warnung, wenn bereits als Alias definiert}%^^A
% Mit \cs{newkomafont} wird ein neues Element definiert. Das erste optionale
% Argument ist dabei die optionale Warnung. Ist dieses nicht gesetzt oder
% \cs{relax}, so wird keine Warnung definiert. Das erste obligatorische
-% Argument ist der Name des Elements. Als letztes folgt die Voreinstellung für
-% die Schrift dieses Elements. Als Fontmakro wird übrigens
+% Argument ist der Name des Elements. Als letztes folgt die Voreinstellung für
+% die Schrift dieses Elements. Als Fontmakro wird übrigens
% \cs{@\emph{Elementname}font} definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newkomafont}[3][\relax]{%
@@ -2206,9 +2206,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\aliaskomafont}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Warnung, wenn bereits als Font definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/24}{nach \textsf{scrkbase} verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/08}{Warnung, wenn bereits als Font definiert}%^^A
% Mit \cs{aliaskomafont} wird hingegen einfach ein Alias definiert. Dieser
% Befehl kennt zwei Argumente: der Name des Elements und der Names des
% Elements, das stattdessen verwendet werden soll.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
index 8c06f3c78b..f03547ebc4 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-footnotes.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-footnotes.dtx 2979 2018-04-17 06:01:18Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-footnotes.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-04-17 08:01:18 +0200 (Tue, 17 Apr 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1962 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-footnotes.dtx}
@@ -100,9 +99,9 @@
% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/01}{%
% erste Version aus der Aufteilung von \texttt{scrclass.dtx}}
%
-% \section{Fußnoten}
+% \section{Fußnoten}
%
-% Die Fußnotengestaltung in \KOMAScript{} basiert auf einem Hinweis
+% Die Fußnotengestaltung in \KOMAScript{} basiert auf einem Hinweis
% aus dem dokumentierten \LaTeX-Kern.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -114,17 +113,17 @@
% \subsection{Option}
%
% \begin{option}{footnotes}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neue Option für Mehrfachfußnoten}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{\cs{let} durch \cs{def} ersetzt, damit die
-% Option auch als Klassenoption funktioniert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/11}{interne Wert-Speicherung}^^A
-% Mehrfachfußnoten gibt es dann, wenn zu einer Textstelle mehrere Fußnoten
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neue Option für Mehrfachfußnoten}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{\cs{let} durch \cs{def} ersetzt, damit die
+% Option auch als Klassenoption funktioniert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/11}{interne Wert-Speicherung}%^^A
+% Mehrfachfußnoten gibt es dann, wenn zu einer Textstelle mehrere Fußnoten
% hintereinander gesetzt werden. Normalerweise werden die einfach ohne
-% Abstand hintereinander geklatscht. Man kann dann aber die beiden Fußnoten
-% 1 und 2 beispielsweise nicht von der Fußnote 12 unterscheiden. Besser ist
-% es, wenn mehrere Fußnoten automatisch durch ein Trennzeichen getrennt
+% Abstand hintereinander geklatscht. Man kann dann aber die beiden Fußnoten
+% 1 und 2 beispielsweise nicht von der Fußnote 12 unterscheiden. Besser ist
+% es, wenn mehrere Fußnoten automatisch durch ein Trennzeichen getrennt
% werden. Die Funktion ist \textsf{footmisc} entnommen und sollte inklusive
% Ein- und Ausschalten auch zusammen mit diesem Paket funktionieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -189,8 +188,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@footmisc@options}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neuer (intern)}^^A
-% Für etwas mehr Kompatibilität mit \textsf{footmisc}, wird die aktuelle
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neuer (intern)}%^^A
+% Für etwas mehr Kompatibilität mit \textsf{footmisc}, wird die aktuelle
% Einstellung der \texttt{multifootnotes} an das Paket weitergereicht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@footmisc@options}{}
@@ -198,9 +197,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@footnotemark}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@footnotemark}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@saved@footnotemark}{%
\leavevmode
@@ -228,22 +227,22 @@
%<*body>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für Fußnoten}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für Fußnoten}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{@width} verwendet}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/06}{\cs{raggedbottom}-Verbesserung
-% eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/01/07}{\texttt{.05fil} statt
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{@width} verwendet}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/06}{\cs{raggedbottom}-Verbesserung
+% eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/01/07}{\texttt{.05fil} statt
% \texttt{.005fil}}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{die neuen Längenmakros werden genutzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.07}{2010/09/14}{neues Font-Element \texttt{footnoterule} wird
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{die neuen Längenmakros werden genutzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.07}{2010/09/14}{neues Font-Element \texttt{footnoterule} wird
% verwendet}
-% Im Fall, dass \cs{raggedbottom} verwendet wird, die Fußnotenlinie
-% nach unten gedrückt. Dies funktioniert nur dann nicht, wenn
+% Im Fall, dass \cs{raggedbottom} verwendet wird, die Fußnotenlinie
+% nach unten gedrückt. Dies funktioniert nur dann nicht, wenn
% Abbildungen oder Tabellen mit der Option "`\texttt{b}"' an das Ende
% der Seite gesetzt werden. \cs{raggedbottom} wird daran erkannt, dass
-% \cs{@textbottom} nicht \cs{relax} ist. Das kann natürlich auch
+% \cs{@textbottom} nicht \cs{relax} ist. Das kann natürlich auch
% einmal schief gehen, ist dann aber auch nicht ganz so tragisch.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -256,10 +255,10 @@
\kern 2.6\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ftn@rule@test@values}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}^^A
-% Test, ob die Einstellungen für die Längen der Fußnotenlinie halbwegs
-% vernünftig sind.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}%^^A
+% Test, ob die Einstellungen für die Längen der Fußnotenlinie halbwegs
+% vernünftig sind.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ftn@rule@test@values}{%
\ifdim\ftn@rule@height <\z@
@@ -296,36 +295,36 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{footnoterule}
-% \changes{v3.07}{2010/09/14}{\texttt{footnoterule} ist ein eneues
+% \changes{v3.07}{2010/09/14}{\texttt{footnoterule} ist ein eneues
% Fontelement}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}^^A
-% Damit man die Farbe der Fußnotentrennlinie ändern kann, gibt es nun ein
-% eigenes Element dafür. Die Voreinstellung ist jedoch leer.
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}%^^A
+% Damit man die Farbe der Fußnotentrennlinie ändern kann, gibt es nun ein
+% eigenes Element dafür. Die Voreinstellung ist jedoch leer.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{footnoterule}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
% \begin{macro}{\ftn@rule@width}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}^^A
-% Die Länge der Fußnotentrennlinie.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}%^^A
+% Die Länge der Fußnotentrennlinie.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ftn@rule@width}{.4\columnwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ftn@rule@height}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}^^A
-% Die Höhe der Fußnotentrennlinie (die Tiefe ist immer 0).
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}%^^A
+% Die Höhe der Fußnotentrennlinie (die Tiefe ist immer 0).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ftn@rule@height}{.4\p@}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setfootnoterule}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}^^A
-% Das erste, optionale Argument ist die Höhe der Linie, das zweite nicht
-% optionale die Länge.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/04/03}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{nicht in \textsf{scrextend}}%^^A
+% Das erste, optionale Argument ist die Höhe der Linie, das zweite nicht
+% optionale die Länge.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setfootnoterule}[2][]{%
\ifstr{#1}{}{}{%
@@ -342,7 +341,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{Counter}{footnote}
-% Der Fußnotenzähler wird mit \cs{chapter} zurückgesetzt, die Fußnoten
+% Der Fußnotenzähler wird mit \cs{chapter} zurückgesetzt, die Fußnoten
% werden also kapitelweise nummeriert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<book|report>\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
@@ -350,24 +349,24 @@
% \end{Counter}
%
% \begin{macro}{\deffootnote}
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/09}{Absatzeinzug korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{\cs{edef}\cs{@tempa} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/01/31}{\cs{ftn@font} erlaubt aus Gr"unden der
-% Kompatibilität mit dem \textsl{footnote} Paket kein Argument mehr}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2017/01/03}{Neuimplementierung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/27}{neues \cs{raggedfootnote} eingefügt}^^A
-% Dieses Makro zur Definition der Gestalt von Fußnoten erlaubt einen
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/09}{Absatzeinzug korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{\cs{edef}\cs{@tempa} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/01/31}{\cs{ftn@font} erlaubt aus Gr"unden der
+% Kompatibilität mit dem \textsl{footnote} Paket kein Argument mehr}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2017/01/03}{Neuimplementierung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/27}{neues \cs{raggedfootnote} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro zur Definition der Gestalt von Fußnoten erlaubt einen
% optionalen und erwartet drei weitere Parameter. Der erste, optionale
-% gibt den Einzug der ersten Zeile des Fußnotentextes vom linken Rand
-% an. Die Fußnotenmarkierungen werden rechtsbündig in diesen Einzug
+% gibt den Einzug der ersten Zeile des Fußnotentextes vom linken Rand
+% an. Die Fußnotenmarkierungen werden rechtsbündig in diesen Einzug
% gesetzt. Der zweite, also erste nicht optionale Parameter gibt den
-% Einzug jeder weiteren Zeile des Fußnotentextes vom linken Rand
+% Einzug jeder weiteren Zeile des Fußnotentextes vom linken Rand
% an. Fehlt der optionale Parameter so ist er gleich diesem. Der
-% dritte, also zweite nicht optionale Parameter gibt den zusätzlichen
-% Einzug jedes weiteren Absatzes einer Fußnote an. Der letzte
-% Parameter schließlich bestimmt die Ausgabe der Fußnotenmarkierung in
-% der Fußnote. Diese wird zusätzlich in eine \cs{hbox} gesetzt.
+% dritte, also zweite nicht optionale Parameter gibt den zusätzlichen
+% Einzug jedes weiteren Absatzes einer Fußnote an. Der letzte
+% Parameter schließlich bestimmt die Ausgabe der Fußnotenmarkierung in
+% der Fußnote. Diese wird zusätzlich in eine \cs{hbox} gesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\deffootnote[4][]{%
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.22}\relax
@@ -414,8 +413,8 @@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@@makefnmark}
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}^^A
-% Makro zum Setzen der Fußnotenmarkierung in der Fußnote:
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}%^^A
+% Makro zum Setzen der Fußnotenmarkierung in der Fußnote:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@makefnmark{\hbox{\ftnm@font{#4}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -423,35 +422,35 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@makefnmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@makefnmark
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedfootnote}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/27}{neue Anweisung}
-% Auf Wunsch von Falk kann man die Ausrichtrung des Fußnotentextes damit
-% beeinflussen. Die Voreinstellung ist leer also keine Änderung der
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/27}{neue Anweisung}
+% Auf Wunsch von Falk kann man die Ausrichtrung des Fußnotentextes damit
+% beeinflussen. Die Voreinstellung ist leer also keine Änderung der
% Ausrichtung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\raggedfootnote}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \raggedfootnote
+% \end{macro}%^^A \raggedfootnote
%
% \begin{macro}{\ftn@font}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@footnote}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element \texttt{footnote}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element \texttt{footnote}}
% \begin{macro}{\ftnm@font}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@footnotenumber}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element
% \texttt{footnotenumber}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@footnotenlabel}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element \texttt{footnotelabel}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element \texttt{footnotelabel}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@instead@footnotetext}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neuer Ersatz für Element
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neuer Ersatz für Element
% \texttt{footnotetext}}
-% Das erste Element gibt die Schrift an, in der die Fußnote gesetzt
+% Das erste Element gibt die Schrift an, in der die Fußnote gesetzt
% wird. Davon abweichend kann mit dem zweiten Element die Schriftart
-% für die Fußnotennummer getrennt angegeben werden. Aufgrund der
+% für die Fußnotennummer getrennt angegeben werden. Aufgrund der
% Definition kann bei letzteren auch ein Makro verwendet werden, das ein
% Argument erwartet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -470,8 +469,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\deffootnotemark}
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}^^A
-% Makro zur Definition der Fußnotenmarkierung im Text:
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}%^^A
+% Makro zur Definition der Fußnotenmarkierung im Text:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\deffootnotemark[1]{%
\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\ftntm@font{#1}}}%
@@ -479,13 +478,13 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ftntm@font}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@footnotereference}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element
% \texttt{footnotereference}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@footnoteref}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element \texttt{footnoteref}}
-% Dies ist die Schriftart der Fußnotenreferenz im Text. Auch hier kann
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/16}{neues Element \texttt{footnoteref}}
+% Dies ist die Schriftart der Fußnotenreferenz im Text. Auch hier kann
% ggf. ein Makro verwendet werden, das ein Argument erwartet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ftntm@font}{}
@@ -498,8 +497,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FN@mf@check}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dafür sorgen, dass hier ggf. der Trenner eingefügt wird.
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dafür sorgen, dass hier ggf. der Trenner eingefügt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\providecommand*{\FN@mf@check}{%
%<class>\newcommand*{\FN@mf@check}{%
@@ -513,7 +512,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@mf@prepare}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% Damit |\FN@mf@check| informiert ist, dass es etwas zu tun hat.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@mf@prepare}{%
@@ -522,9 +521,9 @@
}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\F@mf@prepare}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25a}{2018/04/17}{Definition wird explizit vorgenommen}^^A
-% Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität mit \textsf{footmisc} wird das dann
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25a}{2018/04/17}{Definition wird explizit vorgenommen}%^^A
+% Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität mit \textsf{footmisc} wird das dann
% vorsoglich auch noch definiert (und zwar als \cs{relax}, wenn es bisher noch
% nicht definiert ist).
\@ifundefined{FN@mf@prepare}{\let\FN@mf@prepare\relax}{}
@@ -532,11 +531,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/22}{long}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/22}{long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@footnotetext}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/22}{long}^^A
-% Auch hier muss dafür gesorgt werden, dass die Markierung erfolgt.
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/22}{long}%^^A
+% Auch hier muss dafür gesorgt werden, dass die Markierung erfolgt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\scr@saved@footnotetext}{}
\let\scr@saved@footnotetext\@footnotetext
@@ -546,7 +545,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Es muss auch dafür gesorgt werden, dass \textsf{footmisc} nicht unnötig
+% Es muss auch dafür gesorgt werden, dass \textsf{footmisc} nicht unnötig
% mit Warnung um sich wirft.
% \begin{macrocode}
\BeforePackage{footmisc}{%
@@ -557,11 +556,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/12}{Workaround für die zerstörerische Wirkung von
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/12}{Workaround für die zerstörerische Wirkung von
% \textsf{setspace}}%
-% Außerdem zerstört das Paket \textsf{setspace} die Erweiterung von
+% Außerdem zerstört das Paket \textsf{setspace} die Erweiterung von
% \cs{@footnotetext}. Deshalb schalten wir sie vor dem Paket lieber gleich ab
-% und reaktivieren sie anschließend wieder:
+% und reaktivieren sie anschließend wieder:
% \begin{macrocode}
\BeforePackage{setspace}{%
\let\@footnotetext\scr@saved@footnotetext
@@ -578,7 +577,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multiplefootnoteseparator}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu}%^^A
% Das ist der formatierte Separator!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\multiplefootnoteseparator}{%
@@ -588,7 +587,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multfootsep}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu}%^^A
% Und hier \textsf{footmisc}-kompatibel unformatiert
% \begin{macrocode}
%<class>\newcommand*{\multfootsep}{,}
@@ -597,8 +596,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\multiplefootnotemarker}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{im Paket mit \cs{providecommand} definieren}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/24}{im Paket mit \cs{providecommand} definieren}%^^A
% Das Markierungskerning wieder \textsf{footmisc}-kompatibel.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<class>\newcommand*{\multiplefootnotemarker}{3sp}
@@ -607,19 +606,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thefootnotemark}
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}^^A
-% Makro, damit \cs{@thefnmark} auf Anwenderebene verfügbar wird:
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}%^^A
+% Makro, damit \cs{@thefnmark} auf Anwenderebene verfügbar wird:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<class>\newcommand*{\thefootnotemark}{\@thefnmark}
%<package>\providecommand*{\thefootnotemark}{\@thefnmark}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{Verwendung der neuen Makros zur
-% Fußnotengestaltgebung}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{Verwendung der neuen Makros zur
+% Fußnotengestaltgebung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/27}{\textsf{scrextend} redefines \cs{@makefnmark}
-% to use \cs{thefootnotemark}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/27}{\textsf{scrextend} redefines \cs{@makefnmark}
+% to use \cs{thefootnotemark}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em}{\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}}
@@ -658,15 +657,15 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsection{Fußnotenreferenz}
+% \subsection{Fußnotenreferenz}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footref}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/01}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
% Damit man nicht nur zu diesem Zweck das Paket \textsf{footmisc} laden muss,
-% kann man jetzt auch mit \KOMAScript{} alleine Fußnoten setzen, die
-% Referenzen auf andere Fußnoten sind. Der Code stammt einerseits aus footmisc
+% kann man jetzt auch mit \KOMAScript{} alleine Fußnoten setzen, die
+% Referenzen auf andere Fußnoten sind. Der Code stammt einerseits aus footmisc
% andererseits auf der Usenet-Gruppe comp.text.tex. Wer den zuerst hatte, ist
-% für mich nicht mehr reproduzierbar. Jedenfalls steht er in footmisc unter
+% für mich nicht mehr reproduzierbar. Jedenfalls steht er in footmisc unter
% LPPL und \KOMAScript{} steht ebenfalls unter LPPL. Das sollte also im
% Zweifelsfall nicht das Problem sein.
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx
index d3e9cdd4c0..a58dcf853d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-index.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-index.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-index.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-index.dtx 3016 2018-09-03 11:40:59Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-index.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-09-03 13:40:59 +0200 (Mon, 03 Sep 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1872 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-index.dtx}
@@ -117,16 +116,16 @@
%<*option>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Anweisungen und Einstellungen für die Optionen}
+% \subsection{Anweisungen und Einstellungen für die Optionen}
%
-% Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen werden bereits benötigt, bevor die
+% Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen werden bereits benötigt, bevor die
% Optionen abgearbeitet werden.
%
% \begin{macro}{\idx@@heading}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{Beachtung von \texttt{leveldown}}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung wird verwendet, um nur die Überschrift zu setzen (nichts
-% weiter!). Sie hat genau ein Argument, nämlich den Text der Überschrift und
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{Beachtung von \texttt{leveldown}}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung wird verwendet, um nur die Ãœberschrift zu setzen (nichts
+% weiter!). Sie hat genau ein Argument, nämlich den Text der Überschrift und
% wird innerhalb von |\idx@heading| verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\idx@@heading}{%
@@ -142,43 +141,43 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für den Index}
+% \subsection{Optionen für den Index}
%
% \begin{option}{index}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{numbered}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{leveldown}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardlevel}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{numbered}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{leveldown}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardlevel}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\idx@@heading}
-% Die Option sorgt dafür, dass der Index auch im Inhaltsverzeichnis
-% erscheint. Dazu wird das interne Makro \cs{idx@@heading} umdefiniert, über
-% das die Überschrift gesetzt und der Kolumnentitel angepasst wird.
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1996/04/04}{Kolumnentitel werden nun korrekt
-% behandelt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{Index auch bei \textsf{scrartcl}^^A
+% Die Option sorgt dafür, dass der Index auch im Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% erscheint. Dazu wird das interne Makro \cs{idx@@heading} umdefiniert, über
+% das die Ãœberschrift gesetzt und der Kolumnentitel angepasst wird.
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1996/04/04}{Kolumnentitel werden nun korrekt
+% behandelt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{Index auch bei \textsf{scrartcl}%^^A
% wieder zweispaltig}
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{im Index kann nach der Überschrift
-% eine Präambel gesetzt werden}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7a}{2001/01/04}{für \textsf{scrbook} und
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{im Index kann nach der Ãœberschrift
+% eine Präambel gesetzt werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7a}{2001/01/04}{für \textsf{scrbook} und
% \textsf{scrreprt} die Link-Erzeugung mit \texttt{hyperref}
% verbessert}
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
% \texttt{theindex}-Umgebung verschoben}
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/19}{\cs{if@twoside} durch
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/19}{\cs{if@twoside} durch
% \cs{if@openright} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{statt \cs{idx@heading} wird nun
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{statt \cs{idx@heading} wird nun
% \cs{idx@@heading} umdefiniert}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{Beachtung von \texttt{leveldown}}^^A
-% An dieser Stelle muss dafür gesorgt werden, dass im Falle von
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{Beachtung von \texttt{leveldown}}%^^A
+% An dieser Stelle muss dafür gesorgt werden, dass im Falle von
% \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} das Makro \cs{@schapter}
-% verwendet wird. Damit dies hier möglich ist mussten tiefreifendere
-% Änderungen am \LaTeX-Kernel bzw. am Gliederungsbefehl \cs{chapter}
+% verwendet wird. Damit dies hier möglich ist mussten tiefreifendere
+% Änderungen am \LaTeX-Kernel bzw. am Gliederungsbefehl \cs{chapter}
% vorgenommen werden.
% \begin{macro}{\ifidx@leveldown}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Schalter (intern)}^^A
-% Für den ab Version~3.18neuen Wert \texttt{leveldown} und dessen
-% Gegenstück \texttt{standardlevel} wird außerdem ein Schalter benötigt.
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Schalter (intern)}%^^A
+% Für den ab Version~3.18neuen Wert \texttt{leveldown} und dessen
+% Gegenstück \texttt{standardlevel} wird außerdem ein Schalter benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifidx@leveldown
\KOMA@key{index}{%
@@ -267,9 +266,9 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{idxtotoc}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{obsolete}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{obsolete}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{idxtotoc}{index=totoc}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -281,19 +280,19 @@
%<*body>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für den Index}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für den Index}
%
% \begin{macro}{\index@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\setindexpreamble}
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6d}{2000/07/20}{Befehl funktioniert nachdem \cs{let}^^A
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6d}{2000/07/20}{Befehl funktioniert nachdem \cs{let}%^^A
% durch \cs{newcommand*} ersetzt wurde}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/01}{\cs{let} und \cs{def}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/01}{\cs{let} und \cs{def}}
% Analog zu \cs{bibpreamble} kann \cs{index@preamble} vom Benutzer mit
% \cs{setindexpreamble} auf einen Text gesetzt werden, der nach der
-% Indexüberschrift eingefügt wird. Hier wird ein echtes internes Makro
-% verwendet, da nicht auf Kompatibilität geachtet werden muss.
+% Indexüberschrift eingefügt wird. Hier wird ein echtes internes Makro
+% verwendet, da nicht auf Kompatibilität geachtet werden muss.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\index@preamble}{}
\let\index@preamble=\relax
@@ -303,23 +302,23 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\idx@heading}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1995/04/04}{Kolumnentitel werden nun korrekt behandelt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1995/04/04}{Kolumnentitel werden nun korrekt behandelt}%^^A
% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{Index auch bei \texttt{scrartcl} wieder
-% zweispaltig}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{Verwendung von \cs{index@preamble} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
-% \texttt{theindex}-Umgebung verschoben}^^A
+% zweispaltig}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{Verwendung von \cs{index@preamble} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
+% \texttt{theindex}-Umgebung verschoben}%^^A
% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/19}{\cs{if@twoside} durch \cs{if@openright}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{Verwendung von \cs{idx@@heading}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10a}{2012/03/08}{Falsche Klammerung der letzten Änderung
-% behoben}^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{Verwendung von \cs{idx@@heading}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10a}{2012/03/08}{Falsche Klammerung der letzten Änderung
+% behoben}%^^A
% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Index wird nie in andere Verzeichnisse
-% eingetragen (außer Inhaltsverzeichnis)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{\cs{@mkright} und \cs{@mkdouble} verwenden}^^A
-% Befehl zum Setzen der Überschrift des Indexes. Bis Version 2.7a sah diese
+% eingetragen (außer Inhaltsverzeichnis)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{\cs{@mkright} und \cs{@mkdouble} verwenden}%^^A
+% Befehl zum Setzen der Ãœberschrift des Indexes. Bis Version 2.7a sah diese
% Definition so aus:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand*{\idx@heading}{%
@@ -331,17 +330,17 @@
% {\indexname}\index@preamble]
% }
% \end{verbatim}\vspace{-\baselineskip}
-% Dagegen ist grundsätzlich nichts zu sagen. Allerdings gibt es seit
-% Version 2.7b die neue Methode der Kapitel-Präambel, die extra
-% eingeführt wurde, um die \textsf{hyperref}-Links -- insbesondere
+% Dagegen ist grundsätzlich nichts zu sagen. Allerdings gibt es seit
+% Version 2.7b die neue Methode der Kapitel-Präambel, die extra
+% eingeführt wurde, um die \textsf{hyperref}-Links -- insbesondere
% den des Index -- zumindest bei Verwendung von \texttt{hpdftex.def}
% zu verbessern. Deshalb wurde die Implementierung entsprechend
-% abgeändert. Außerdem wurde das Setzen der Präambel aus
-% Konsistenzgründen in Version 2.7j übereinstimmten mit der
+% abgeändert. Außerdem wurde das Setzen der Präambel aus
+% Konsistenzgründen in Version 2.7j übereinstimmten mit der
% \texttt{thebibliography}-Umgebung in die \texttt{theindex}-Umgebung
% verschoben.
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/03}{usage of \cs{addsecmark} or \cs{subsectionmark}
-% instead of \cs{@mkright}}^^A
+% instead of \cs{@mkright}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\idx@heading}{%
%<report|book> \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi%
@@ -364,13 +363,13 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{theindex}
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{indexpagestyle} statt
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{indexpagestyle} statt
% \texttt{plain}}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{idx@heading}}
-% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{idx@heading}}
+% \changes{v2.7j}{2001/05/27}{Setzen der Präambel in die
% \texttt{theindex}-Umgebung verschoben}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn nicht leer}^^A
-% Der Index ist wie üblich definiert.
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn nicht leer}%^^A
+% Der Index ist wie üblich definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{theindex}{%
\if@twocolumn
@@ -395,13 +394,13 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@idxitem}
% Hier haben wird den Anfang eines Eintrags in den Index
% \begin{macro}{\subitem}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{@idxitem} spart
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{@idxitem} spart
% Speicher}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubitem}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{@idxitem} spart
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{@idxitem} spart
% Speicher}
% \begin{macro}{\indexspace}
-% und ebenso Unter- und Unteruntereinträge sowie ein vertikaler
+% und ebenso Unter- und Unteruntereinträge sowie ein vertikaler
% Abstand.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx
index 6181653de8..e2c8669c80 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-language.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{2080}
+% \CheckSum{2225}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-language.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-language.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-language.dtx 3011 2018-08-29 07:35:17Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-language.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,9 +63,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-08-29 09:35:17 +0200 (Wed, 29 Aug 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 1638 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3262 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-language.dtx}
@@ -76,7 +76,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-language.dtx}
@@ -99,10 +98,10 @@
% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/01}{%
% erste Version aus der Aufteilung von \texttt{scrclass.dtx}}
%
-% \section{Sprachabhängigkeiten}
+% \section{Sprachabhängigkeiten}
%
-% Aus verschiedenen Gründen ist es nicht so einfach, neue,
-% sprachabhängige Begriffe zu definieren oder vorhandene
+% Aus verschiedenen Gründen ist es nicht so einfach, neue,
+% sprachabhängige Begriffe zu definieren oder vorhandene
% umzudefinieren. Mit \KOMAScript{} geht das etwas einfacher.
%
%
@@ -113,7 +112,7 @@
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Option}
-% Für Briefe gibt es die Möglichkeit, zwischen symbolischem und numerischem
+% Für Briefe gibt es die Möglichkeit, zwischen symbolischem und numerischem
% Datum umzuschalten.
%
% \iffalse
@@ -121,14 +120,14 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{option}{numericaldate}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/07}{Neue Option (an Stelle von
-% \texttt{scrdate} und \texttt{orgdate})}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Speicherung des aktuellen Werts}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/07}{Neue Option (an Stelle von
+% \texttt{scrdate} und \texttt{orgdate})}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Speicherung des aktuellen Werts}%^^A
% Es kann zwischen dem Originaldatum, das beispielsweise von
% \texttt{german.sty} definiert wird, und dem \texttt{scrlttr2}-Datum
-% gewählt werden. Natürlich gibt es diese Optionen nur bei Briefen.
+% gewählt werden. Natürlich gibt es diese Optionen nur bei Briefen.
% \begin{macro}{\if@orgdate}
% \begin{macro}{\@orgdatetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@orgdatefalse}
@@ -158,9 +157,9 @@
}{orgdate}{true}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{option}{scrdate}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{orgdate}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{scrdate}{numericaldate=true}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{orgdate}{numericaldate=false}
@@ -179,7 +178,7 @@
%<*body>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für sprachabhängige Bezeichner}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für sprachabhängige Bezeichner}
%
% Dieser Teil ist so grundlegend, dass er ab Version~3.00 in das Paket
% \textsf{scrbase} ausgelagert wird.
@@ -189,36 +188,39 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\defcaptionname}
-% \changes{3.12}{2013/07/29}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Für eine Reihe von Sprachen (durch Komma separierte Liste in \#1)
+% \changes{3.12}{2013/07/29}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Für eine Reihe von Sprachen (durch Komma separierte Liste in \#1)
% wird ein Makro (\#2) auf einen bestimmten Inhalt (\#3) definiert. Die
-% Sternversion verwendet dabei zwingend \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während
-% die Normalversion \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} verwendet, außer wenn der
+% Sternversion verwendet dabei zwingend \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während
+% die Normalversion \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} verwendet, außer wenn der
% Begriff bereits in \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}} definiert ist. Falls der
-% Befehl in der Dokumentpräambel aufgerufen wird, wird er verzögert.
+% Befehl in der Dokumentpräambel aufgerufen wird, wird er verzögert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\defcaptionname}{%
\kernel@ifstar\scr@def@scaptionname\scr@def@captionname
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@def@scaptionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Die Sternvariante von \cs{defcaptionname}. Die Argumente sind dieselben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@def@scaptionname}[3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als erstes findet die Verzögerung bis \cs{begin{document}} statt.
+% Als erstes findet die Verzögerung bis \cs{begin{document}} statt.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\def#2{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Dann arbeiten wir in einer lokalen Schleife alle Sprachen aus Argument \#1
% ab und \dots
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let\reserved@b\endgroup
@@ -226,7 +228,7 @@
\@onelevel@sanitize\scr@reserved@a
\@for\scr@reserved@a:=\scr@reserved@a\do{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \dots\ fügen dabei \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}} die Definition \#3 für \#2
+% \dots\ fügen dabei \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}} die Definition \#3 für \#2
% hinzu.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@trim@spaces\scr@reserved@a
@@ -242,7 +244,7 @@
\def#2{#3}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn etwas hinzugefügt wurde, muss außerdem \cs{reserved@b} so umdefiniert
+% Wenn etwas hinzugefügt wurde, muss außerdem \cs{reserved@b} so umdefiniert
% werden, dass dies ggf. auch unmittelbar Geltung bekommt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@def@activateactivelanguageaftergroup{#2}{#3}%
@@ -253,7 +255,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@def@activateactivelanguageaftergroup}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% Wenn die Sprache in \cs{reserved@a} die aktuelle Sprache \cs{languagename}
% ist oder die Sprachnummer zur Sprache \cs{reserved@a} die aktuelle
% Sprachnummer \cs{language} ist, dann wird \cs{reserved@b} so umdefiniert,
@@ -267,13 +271,13 @@
\@tempswatrue
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/05}{Sonderbehandlung für \textsf{polyglossia}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/05}{Sonderbehandlung für \textsf{polyglossia}}%^^A
% Bei Verwendung von \textsf{polyglossia} gibt es die Besonderheit, dass alle
% Deutschen Sprachen als \texttt{german} definiert sind. Die Unterscheidung
-% zwischen Deutsch, Österreichisch und Schweizerisch geschieht über zwei
-% boolsche Schalter. Für die Unterscheidung alte oder neue Rechtschreibung
+% zwischen Deutsch, Österreichisch und Schweizerisch geschieht über zwei
+% boolsche Schalter. Für die Unterscheidung alte oder neue Rechtschreibung
% existiert ein weiterer Schalter. Mit ein paar trickreichen Vergleichen kann
-% man das zusätzlich behandeln. Natürlich muss es so gemacht werden, dass es
+% man das zusätzlich behandeln. Natürlich muss es so gemacht werden, dass es
% mit babel trotzdem noch funktioniert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\edef\scr@reserved@b{\detokenize{german}}%
@@ -306,24 +310,76 @@
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@def@activateactivelanguageaftergroup
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@def@scaptionname
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{neu (intern)}
+% Ist die aktuelle Sprache eine aus der Liste im ersten Argument, so wird das
+% zweite Argument ausgeführt, sonst das ersten.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof}[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\languagename
+ \edef\reserved@a{#1}%
+ \@for \reserved@a:=\reserved@a\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\reserved@a
+ \ifx\languagename\reserved@a
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \edef\reserved@b{\detokenize{german}}%
+ \ifx\languagename\reserved@b
+ \edef\reserved@b{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname if@german@oldspelling\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iffalse\endcsname n\fi
+ \expandafter\ifx \csname if@austrian@locale\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iftrue\endcsname austrian\else
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname if@swiss@locale\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iftrue\endcsname swiss\else german\fi\fi
+ }%
+ \@onelevel@sanitize\reserved@b
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b \@tempswatrue\fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa\else
+ \ifcsname l@\reserved@a\endcsname
+ \expandafter\ifnum \csname l@\reserved@a\endcsname=\language
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \aftergroup\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \aftergroup\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@def@activateactivelanguageaftergroup
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@def@scaptionname
% \begin{macro}{\scr@def@captionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% Die Normalvariante von \cs{defcaptionname}, mit denselben Argumenten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@def@captionname}[3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als erstes findet die Verzögerung bis \cs{begin{document}} statt.
+% Als erstes findet die Verzögerung bis \cs{begin{document}} statt.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\def#2{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Dann arbeiten wir in einer lokalen Schleife alle Sprachen aus Argument \#1
% ab und \dots
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let\reserved@b\endgroup
@@ -343,6 +399,21 @@
\@tempswafalse
\ifcsname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\let#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/27}{\textsf{biblatex} workaround}%^^A
+% Unfortunately, \textsf{biblatex} adds \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} to
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} if only \meta{language} is an redundant language
+% (see \cs{DeclareRedundantLanguages} in the \textsf{biblatex} manual) and
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} is defined. But in this case
+% \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is not defined. So calling
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} would result in an error. As a workaround for
+% this issue, make sure, that \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is defined here
+% locally.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname abx@extras@\scr@reserved@a\endcsname{}%
\csname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\ifx #2\relax \else \aftergroup\@tempswatrue \fi
\fi
@@ -371,7 +442,7 @@
}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn etwas hinzugefügt wurde, muss außerdem \cs{reserved@b} so umdefiniert
+% Wenn etwas hinzugefügt wurde, muss außerdem \cs{reserved@b} so umdefiniert
% werden, dass dies ggf. auch unmittelbar Geltung bekommt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@def@activateactivelanguageaftergroup{#2}{#3}%
@@ -381,18 +452,18 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@def@captionname
-% \end{macro}^^A \defcaptionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@def@captionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \defcaptionname
%
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/05}{Neue Sonderbehandlung für
-% \texttt{polyglossia}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/05}{Neue Sonderbehandlung für
+% \texttt{polyglossia}}%^^A
% Bei Verwendung von \textsf{polyglossia} haben wir nun bei den Sprachen
% \texttt{austrian}, \texttt{swiss}, \texttt{ngerman}, \texttt{naustrian} und
% \texttt{nswiss} das Problem, dass diese dort alle in \cs{captionsgerman}
-% vermischt sind. Es werden also also beim Umschalten eventuell gar nicht die
-% richtigen Befehle ausgeführt. Das lässt sich beispielsweise beheben, indem
-% in \cs{init@extra@german} dafür gesorgt wid, dass eben diese doch noch
-% ausgeführt werden:
+% vermischt sind. Es werden also beim Umschalten eventuell gar nicht die
+% richtigen Befehle ausgeführt. Das lässt sich beispielsweise beheben, indem
+% in \cs{init@extra@german} dafür gesorgt wid, dass eben diese doch noch
+% ausgeführt werden:
% \begin{macrocode}
\AfterPackage*{polyglossia}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{init@extras@german}{%
@@ -420,26 +491,26 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ich bin mir natürlich bewusst, dass dieser Code auch nur wieder ein Hack
+% Ich bin mir natürlich bewusst, dass dieser Code auch nur wieder ein Hack
% ist. Ideal ist das so nicht. Aber sehr viel sauberer geht es mit
-% \textsf{polyglossia} unter Beibehaltung der Kompatibilität auch nicht mehr.
+% \textsf{polyglossia} unter Beibehaltung der Kompatibilität auch nicht mehr.
%
% \begin{macro}{\providecaptionname}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/08}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{Wenn die aktuelle Sprache, die geänderte
-% ist, wird die Anderung sofort aktiviert.}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/10}{Ermittlung der aktuellen Sprache funktioniert
-% auch, wenn \cs{languagename} mit seltsamen catcodes erstellt wurde.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{nach \textsf{scrbase} verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/07}{missing make undefined}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/17}{undefined test improved}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{Neuimplementierung nach dem Muster von
-% \cs{defcaptionname}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/08}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{Wenn die aktuelle Sprache, die geänderte
+% ist, wird die Anderung sofort aktiviert.}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/10}{Ermittlung der aktuellen Sprache funktioniert
+% auch, wenn \cs{languagename} mit seltsamen catcodes erstellt wurde.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{nach \textsf{scrbase} verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/07}{missing make undefined}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/17}{undefined test improved}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{Neuimplementierung nach dem Muster von
+% \cs{defcaptionname}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Wie \cs{defcaptionname}, allerdings wird nur definiert, wenn die Sprache \#1
% bereits existiert, aber der Begriff \#2 nicht existiert. Unter dieser
-% Einschränkung verwendet die Sternvariante \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während
+% Einschränkung verwendet die Sternvariante \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während
% die Normalvariante \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\providecaptionname}{%
@@ -447,12 +518,17 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@provide@scaptionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@provide@scaptionname}[3]{%
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\providecommand*{#2}{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
\begingroup
@@ -467,11 +543,26 @@
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Im Unterschied zu \cs{defcaptionname} wird hier nur etwas zu
-% \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}} hinzugefügt, wenn das bereits definiert ist,
+% \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}} hinzugefügt, wenn das bereits definiert ist,
% aber \#2 selbst noch nicht definiert ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/27}{\textsf{biblatex} workaround}%^^A
+% Unfortunately, \textsf{biblatex} adds \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} to
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} if only \meta{language} is an redundant language
+% (see \cs{DeclareRedundantLanguages} in the \textsf{biblatex} manual) and
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} is defined. But in this case
+% \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is not defined. So calling
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} would result in an error. As a workaround for
+% this issue, make sure, that \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is defined here
+% locally.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname abx@extras@\scr@reserved@a\endcsname{}%
\csname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\csname captions\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\ifx #2\relax \aftergroup\@firstofone
@@ -506,15 +597,20 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@provide@scaptionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@provide@scaptionname
% \begin{macro}{\scr@provide@captionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% Die Normalvariante von \cs{providecaptionname}, mit denselben Argumenten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@provide@captionname}[3]{%
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\providecommand*{#2}{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
\begingroup
@@ -529,12 +625,27 @@
\else
% \end{macrocode}
% Im Unterschied zu \cs{defcaptionname} wird hier nur etwas zu
-% \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} hinzugefügt, wenn das bereits definiert ist,
+% \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} hinzugefügt, wenn das bereits definiert ist,
% aber \#2 selbst weder in \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}} noch in
% \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} definiert ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/27}{\textsf{biblatex} workaround}%^^A
+% Unfortunately, \textsf{biblatex} adds \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} to
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} if only \meta{language} is an redundant language
+% (see \cs{DeclareRedundantLanguages} in the \textsf{biblatex} manual) and
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} is defined. But in this case
+% \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is not defined. So calling
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} would result in an error. As a workaround for
+% this issue, make sure, that \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is defined here
+% locally.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname abx@extras@\scr@reserved@a\endcsname{}%
\csname captions\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\csname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\ifx #2\relax \aftergroup\@firstofone
@@ -569,27 +680,27 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@provide@captionname
-% \end{macro}^^A \providecaptionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@provide@captionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \providecaptionname
%
% \begin{macro}{\newcaptionname}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/08}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{Wenn die aktuelle Sprache, die geänderte
-% ist, wird die Anderung sofort aktiviert.}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/10}{Ermittlung der aktuellen Sprache funktioniert
-% auch, wenn \cs{languagename} mit seltsamen catcodes erstellt wurde.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{nach \textsf{scrbase} verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/07}{missing make undefined}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/17}{undefined test improved}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{Neuimplementierung nach dem Muster von
-% \cs{defcaptionname}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Wie \cs{defcaptionname} mit folgender Änderung: Existiert die
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/08}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{Wenn die aktuelle Sprache, die geänderte
+% ist, wird die Anderung sofort aktiviert.}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/10}{Ermittlung der aktuellen Sprache funktioniert
+% auch, wenn \cs{languagename} mit seltsamen catcodes erstellt wurde.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{nach \textsf{scrbase} verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/07}{missing make undefined}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/17}{undefined test improved}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{Neuimplementierung nach dem Muster von
+% \cs{defcaptionname}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Wie \cs{defcaptionname} mit folgender Änderung: Existiert die
% Sprache und der Begriff, so wird ein Fehler ausgegeben. Existiert die
% Sprache aber nicht der Begriff, so wird er definiert. Existiert die Sprache
-% nicht, so wird sie definiert. Unter dieser Prämisse verwendet die
-% Sternversion \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während die Normalversion
+% nicht, so wird sie definiert. Unter dieser Prämisse verwendet die
+% Sternversion \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während die Normalversion
% \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newcaptionname}{%
@@ -597,13 +708,18 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@new@scaptionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% Die Sternvariante von \cs{newcaptionname}. Die Argumente sind dieselben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@new@scaptionname}[3]{%
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\providecommand*{#2}{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
\begingroup
@@ -621,6 +737,21 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/27}{\textsf{biblatex} workaround}%^^A
+% Unfortunately, \textsf{biblatex} adds \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} to
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} if only \meta{language} is an redundant language
+% (see \cs{DeclareRedundantLanguages} in the \textsf{biblatex} manual) and
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} is defined. But in this case
+% \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is not defined. So calling
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} would result in an error. As a workaround for
+% this issue, make sure, that \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is defined here
+% locally.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname abx@extras@\scr@reserved@a\endcsname{}%
\csname captions\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\csname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\ifx #2\relax
@@ -651,15 +782,20 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@new@scaptionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@new@scaptionname
% \begin{macro}{\scr@new@captionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% Die Normalvariante von \cs{newcaptionname}, mit denselben Argumenten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@new@captionname}[3]{%
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\providecommand*{#2}{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
\begingroup
@@ -677,6 +813,21 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/27}{\textsf{biblatex} workaround}%^^A
+% Unfortunately, \textsf{biblatex} adds \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} to
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} if only \meta{language} is an redundant language
+% (see \cs{DeclareRedundantLanguages} in the \textsf{biblatex} manual) and
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} is defined. But in this case
+% \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is not defined. So calling
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} would result in an error. As a workaround for
+% this issue, make sure, that \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is defined here
+% locally.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname abx@extras@\scr@reserved@a\endcsname{}%
\csname captions\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\csname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\ifx #2\relax
@@ -707,28 +858,28 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@new@captionname
-% \end{macro}^^A \newcaptionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@new@captionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \newcaptionname
%
% \begin{macro}{\renewcaptionname}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/08}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{Wenn die aktuelle Sprache, die geänderte
-% ist, wird die Anderung sofort aktiviert.}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/10}{Ermittlung der aktuellen Sprache funktioniert
-% auch, wenn \cs{languagename} mit seltsamen catcodes erstellt wurde.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{nach \textsf{scrbase} verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/07}{missing make undefined}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/17}{undefined test improved}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{Neuimplementierung nach dem Muster von
-% \cs{defcaptionname}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Wie \cs{defcaptionname} mit folgender Änderung: Existiert die
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/08}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{Wenn die aktuelle Sprache, die geänderte
+% ist, wird die Anderung sofort aktiviert.}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/10}{Ermittlung der aktuellen Sprache funktioniert
+% auch, wenn \cs{languagename} mit seltsamen catcodes erstellt wurde.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/05/02}{nach \textsf{scrbase} verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/07}{missing make undefined}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/17}{undefined test improved}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{Neuimplementierung nach dem Muster von
+% \cs{defcaptionname}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Wie \cs{defcaptionname} mit folgender Änderung: Existiert die
% Sprache nicht, so ist dies ein Fehler. Existiert die Sprache nicht aber der
% Begriff, so ist dies ebenfalls ein Fehler. Existieren Sprache und Begriff,
-% so wird dieser umdefiniert. Unter dieser Voraussetzung ändert die
-% Sternvariante immer \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während die Normalvariante
-% \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} ändert, falls der Begriff nicht i
+% so wird dieser umdefiniert. Unter dieser Voraussetzung ändert die
+% Sternvariante immer \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}, während die Normalvariante
+% \cs{captions\meta{Sprache}} ändert, falls der Begriff nicht i
% \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}} definiert war, und sonst \cs{extras\meta{Sprache}}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\renewcaptionname}{%
@@ -736,13 +887,18 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@renew@scaptionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% Die Sternvariante von \cs{renewcaptionname}. Die Argumente sind dieselben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@renew@scaptionname}[3]{%
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\renewcommand*{#2}{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
\begingroup
@@ -760,6 +916,21 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/27}{\textsf{biblatex} workaround}%^^A
+% Unfortunately, \textsf{biblatex} adds \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} to
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} if only \meta{language} is an redundant language
+% (see \cs{DeclareRedundantLanguages} in the \textsf{biblatex} manual) and
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} is defined. But in this case
+% \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is not defined. So calling
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} would result in an error. As a workaround for
+% this issue, make sure, that \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is defined here
+% locally.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname abx@extras@\scr@reserved@a\endcsname{}%
\csname captions\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\csname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\ifx #2\relax
@@ -789,15 +960,20 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@renew@scaptionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@renew@scaptionname
% \begin{macro}{\scr@renew@captionname}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{diverse \cs{expandafter} eingespart}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/10}{unmittelbare Aktivierung auch in der
+% Dokumentpräambel}%^^A
% Die Normalvariante von \cs{renewcaptionname}, mit denselben Argumenten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@renew@captionname}[3]{%
- \if@atdocument \expandafter\@firstofone
- \else \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \if@atdocument
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \scr@ifactivelanguageisoneof{#1}{\renewcommand*{#2}{#3}}{}%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
\fi
{%
\begingroup
@@ -815,6 +991,21 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\let#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/27}{\textsf{biblatex} workaround}%^^A
+% Unfortunately, \textsf{biblatex} adds \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} to
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} if only \meta{language} is an redundant language
+% (see \cs{DeclareRedundantLanguages} in the \textsf{biblatex} manual) and
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} is defined. But in this case
+% \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is not defined. So calling
+% \cs{extras\meta{language}} would result in an error. As a workaround for
+% this issue, make sure, that \cs{abx@extras@\meta{language}} is defined here
+% locally.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
+ \csname abx@extras@\scr@reserved@a\endcsname{}%
\csname extras\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
\ifx #2\relax
\csname captions\scr@reserved@a\endcsname
@@ -852,15 +1043,15 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@renew@captionname
-% \end{macro}^^A \renewcaptionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@renew@captionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \renewcaptionname
%
% \iffalse
%</package&base>
% \fi
%
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für ein nummerisches Datum}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für ein nummerisches Datum}
% Bei Briefen kann ein nummerisches oder ein symbolisches Datum verwendet
% werden.
%
@@ -870,7 +1061,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\g@addnumerical@date}
% Dazu ist es notwendig, ggf. das bereits definierte symbolische Datum durch
-% ein nummerisches zu ergänzen.
+% ein nummerisches zu ergänzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\g@addnumerical@date}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{date#1}{%
@@ -896,112 +1087,125 @@
% \fi
%
%
-% \subsection{Festlegungen für einzelne Sprachen}
+% \subsection{Festlegungen für einzelne Sprachen}
%
-% Es folgen nun für einzelne Sprachen konkrete Festlegungen, die für Briefe
-% benötigt werden.
+% Es folgen nun für einzelne Sprachen konkrete Festlegungen, die für Briefe
+% benötigt werden.
%
% \iffalse
%<*letter>
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionsenglish}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{diverse neue Dialekte}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{diverse neue Dialekte}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\dateenglish}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsUSenglish}
% \begin{macro}{\dateUSenglish}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsamerican}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{american identisch mit USenglish definiert}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{american identisch mit USenglish definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\dateamerican}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{american identisch mit USenglish definiert}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{american identisch mit USenglish definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsbritish}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{british identisch mit english definiert}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{british identisch mit english definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\datebritish}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{british identisch mit english definiert}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{british identisch mit english definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsUKenglish}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{UKenglish identisch mit english definiert}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{UKenglish identisch mit english definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\dateUKenglish}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{UKenglish identisch mit english definiert}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{UKenglish identisch mit english definiert}
+% \begin{macro}{\captionsaustralian}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{australian identisch mit english definiert}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\dateaustralian}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{australian identisch mit english definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/09}{fixed}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\captionsnewzealand}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{newzealand identisch mit english definiert}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\datenewzealand}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{newzealand identisch mit english definiert}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\captionscanadian}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{canadian identisch mit english definiert}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\datecanadian}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/19}{canadian identisch mit english definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsukenglish}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{ukenglish identisch mit UKenglish definiert}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{ukenglish identisch mit UKenglish definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\dateukenglish}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{ukenglish identisch mit UKenglish definiert}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{ukenglish identisch mit UKenglish definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsusenglish}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{usenglish identisch mit USenglish definiert}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{usenglish identisch mit USenglish definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\dateusenglish}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{usenglish identisch mit USenglish definiert}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{usenglish identisch mit USenglish definiert}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsgerman}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{neue Dialekte}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{neue Dialekte}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\dategerman}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsngerman}
-% \changes{v2.5}{1999/09/08}{ngerman neu und identisch mit german}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/08}{außer \texttt{german} verwenden alle
-% deutschen Sprachen »Telefon«}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5}{1999/09/08}{ngerman neu und identisch mit german}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/08}{außer \texttt{german} verwenden alle
+% deutschen Sprachen »Telefon«}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datengerman}
-% \changes{v2.5}{1999/09/08}{ngerman neu und identisch mit german}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5}{1999/09/08}{ngerman neu und identisch mit german}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsaustrian}
% \begin{macro}{\dateaustrian}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsnaustrian}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/10}{naustrian neu und identisch mit austrian}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/10}{naustrian neu und identisch mit austrian}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datenaustrian}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/10}{naustrian neu und identisch mit austrian}^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/10}{naustrian neu und identisch mit austrian}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsfrench}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{diverse neue Dialekte}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{diverse neue Dialekte}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datefrench}
% \begin{macro}{\captionsitalian}
% \begin{macro}{\dateitalian}
-% \changes{v2.3e}{1996/05/31}{Ich hoffe, dass das stimmt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3e}{1996/05/31}{Ich hoffe, dass das stimmt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsspanish}
% \begin{macro}{\datespanish}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{Ich hoffe, dass das stimmt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{Datumsumschaltung nicht mehr zwingend}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{Ich hoffe, dass das stimmt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{Datumsumschaltung nicht mehr zwingend}
% \begin{macro}{\captionscroation}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/05/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/05/10}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datecroatian}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/05/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/05/10}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsdutch}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/01}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/01}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datedutch}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/01}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/01}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsfinnish}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/02/07}{Unterstützung für Finnisch (Dank Hannu
-% Väisänen)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/02/07}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/02/07}{Unterstützung für Finnisch (Dank Hannu
+% Väisänen)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/02/07}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datefinnish}
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/02/07}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01c}{2008/12/29}{Aktivierung korrigiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/02/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01c}{2008/12/29}{Aktivierung korrigiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsnorsk}
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datenorsk}
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsnorsk}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/20}{Neu (Dank Benjamin Hell)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/20}{Neu (Dank Benjamin Hell)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datenorsk}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/20}{Neu (Dank Benjamin Hell)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/20}{Neu (Dank Benjamin Hell)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionspolish}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/01}{Neu (Dank Blandyna Bogdol)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/01}{Neu (Dank Blandyna Bogdol)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\datepolish}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/01}{Neu (Dank Blandyna Bogdol)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/01}{Neu (Dank Blandyna Bogdol)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\captionsczech}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/10}{Neu (Dank Elke Schubert)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/10}{Neu (Dank Elke Schubert)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\dateczech}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/10}{Neu (Dank Elke Schubert)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/10}{Neu (Dank Elke Schubert)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\dateslovak}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/28}{Neu (Dank Elke Schubert)}^^A
-% Weil es in früheren Versionen zu Problemen damit gekommen ist,
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/28}{Neu (Dank Elke Schubert)}%^^A
+% Weil es in früheren Versionen zu Problemen damit gekommen ist,
% werden diese jedoch erst bei |\begin{document}| definiert. Dabei
% wird |\providecaptionname| verwendet, so dass sie auch schon vor
% |\begin{document}| mit |\newcaptionname| anderslautend definiert
-% werden können.
+% werden können.
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
% Sprache & Spender \\\hline\\[-1.6ex]
% Deutsch & Frank Neukam, Markus Kohm \\
% English & Frank Neukam, Michael Dewey, Markus Kohm \\
-% Finnisch & Hannu Väisänen \\
-% Französisch & Frank Neukam, Henk Jongbloets \\
-% Holländisch & Henk Jongbloets \\
+% Finnisch & Hannu Väisänen \\
+% Französisch & Frank Neukam, Henk Jongbloets \\
+% Holländisch & Henk Jongbloets \\
% Italienisch & Simone Naldi \\
% Kroatisch & Branka Lon\v{c}arevi\'{c} \\
% Norwegisch & Sveinung Heggen \\
@@ -1011,7 +1215,7 @@
% Tschechisch & Elke Schubert\\
% Slovakisch & Elke Schubert\\
% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Liste der unterstützten Sprachen und der
+% \caption{Liste der unterstützten Sprachen und der
% \emph{Sprachspender}}
% \end{table}
% Eine Besonderheit stellt die englische Sprache dar. Es wird
@@ -1093,7 +1297,7 @@
english,newzealand,%
UKenglish,ukenglish,USenglish,usenglish}\bankname{Bank account}%
\g@addnumerical@date{american}{\number\month/\number\day/\number\year}%
- \g@addnumerical@date{australien}{\number\day/\number\month/\number\year}%
+ \g@addnumerical@date{australian}{\number\day/\number\month/\number\year}%
\g@addnumerical@date{british}{\number\day/\number\month/\number\year}%
\g@addnumerical@date{canadian}{\number\year/\number\month/\number\day}%
\g@addnumerical@date{english}{\number\day/\number\month/\number\year}%
@@ -1329,9 +1533,9 @@
\providecaptionname{swedish}\emailname{E-post}%
\providecaptionname{swedish}\wwwname{Hemsida}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für \cs{bankname} gibt es zwei verschiedene Ausdrücke, je nachdem um
+% Für \cs{bankname} gibt es zwei verschiedene Ausdrücke, je nachdem um
% welche Kontoform es sich handelt: "`Bankgiro"' und "`PlusGiro"'. Beide
-% sind etwa gleich verbreitet, evtl. mit einem leichten Vorteil für
+% sind etwa gleich verbreitet, evtl. mit einem leichten Vorteil für
% Bankgiro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecaptionname{swedish}\bankname{Bankgiro}% PlusGiro
@@ -1400,32 +1604,32 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Zum Schluss findet noch die eigentliche Auswahl statt. Diese orientiert
% sich nun an der Auswahl nach german.sty~2.5b und verwendet keine festen
-% Sprachzuordnungen mehr. Dafür sind nun keine Erweiterungen für andere
-% Sprachen mehr möglich.
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/03/20}{Im Sprachenvergleich fehlten die "`="'
+% Sprachzuordnungen mehr. Dafür sind nun keine Erweiterungen für andere
+% Sprachen mehr möglich.
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/03/20}{Im Sprachenvergleich fehlten die "`="'
% hinter \cs{language}}
-% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{Sprachauswahl um american, british,
-% UKenglish und spanish erweitert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5}{1999/09/08}{Sprachauswahl um ngermen erweitert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5b}{2000/01/20}{Reaktivierung der Sprache geschieht
-% nun via \cs{languagename}, soweit dies möglich ist}
-% \changes{v2.5e}{2000/07/14}{Workaround für Sprache nohyphenation
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1997/11/25}{Sprachauswahl um american, british,
+% UKenglish und spanish erweitert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5}{1999/09/08}{Sprachauswahl um ngermen erweitert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5b}{2000/01/20}{Reaktivierung der Sprache geschieht
+% nun via \cs{languagename}, soweit dies möglich ist}
+% \changes{v2.5e}{2000/07/14}{Workaround für Sprache nohyphenation
% durch Format mit Babel-Erweiterung aber kein Babel package
-% geladen}^^A
+% geladen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\captionsenglish
\dateenglish
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{Workaround für den
+% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{Workaround für den
% \texttt{hyphen.cfg}-Bug von Babel}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/08/10}{Text einer Warnung geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{\cs{extras\dots} werden auch ausgeführt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{sprachabhhängige Befehle mit \cs{@nameuse}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/08/10}{Text einer Warnung geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{\cs{extras\dots} werden auch ausgeführt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/03}{sprachabhhängige Befehle mit \cs{@nameuse}}%^^A
% Wird die \texttt{hyphen.cfg} von Babel verwendet, wird aber das
-% \textsl{babel}-Paket nicht geladen, so ist \cs{languagename} häufig
+% \textsl{babel}-Paket nicht geladen, so ist \cs{languagename} häufig
% nicht korrekt, so dass dann \cs{selectlanguage} mit
% \cs{languagename} als Argument schief geht. Daher hier ein
-% Workaround für das Problem.
+% Workaround für das Problem.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
\expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax
@@ -1617,8 +1821,8 @@
of language `\languagename'%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/12/28}{Workaround für babels geänderte hyphen.cfg}^^A
-% Irgendwann wurde in babel die hyphen.cfg geändert, so dass das früher sehr
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/12/28}{Workaround für babels geänderte hyphen.cfg}%^^A
+% Irgendwann wurde in babel die hyphen.cfg geändert, so dass das früher sehr
% gut funktionierende |\expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\languagename}|
% damit leider nicht mehr funktioniert, wenn babel nicht mehr geladen
% ist. Deshalb wird nun etwas direkter vorgegangen. Das kann mit einzelnen
@@ -1688,6 +1892,12 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \iffalse
%</letter>
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
index 7f0881cef0..6b2e1f9793 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{1748}
+% \CheckSum{1755}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx 3011 2018-08-29 07:35:17Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<head>%%% (run: head)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
@@ -64,9 +64,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-08-29 09:35:17 +0200 (Wed, 29 Aug 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 3011 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3262 $
\endgroup
\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx}
[\filedate\space \filerevision\space
@@ -74,7 +74,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-letterclassoptions.dtx}
@@ -96,12 +95,12 @@
% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{%
% erste Version aus der Aufteilung von \textsf{scrclass.dtx}}
%
-% \section{Optionendateien für Briefe}
+% \section{Optionendateien für Briefe}
%
% Bei der Briefklasse tritt eine Besonderheit ein. Hier ist es
-% möglich, spezielle \texttt{lco}-Dateien zu definieren, die über
-% Optionen geladen werden können. Die unterschiedlichen Brieftypen
-% sind ein Fall für solche \emph{\textbf{l}etter \textbf{c}lass
+% möglich, spezielle \texttt{lco}-Dateien zu definieren, die über
+% Optionen geladen werden können. Die unterschiedlichen Brieftypen
+% sind ein Fall für solche \emph{\textbf{l}etter \textbf{c}lass
% \textbf{o}ption} Dateien.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -114,12 +113,12 @@
%<*option>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für Letter-Class-Options}
+% \subsection{Optionen für Letter-Class-Options}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lco@test}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/12}{an neue Optionenabarbeitung angepasst}^^A
-% Letter-Class-Optionen können auch für jede per |\documentclass| angegebene
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/12}{an neue Optionenabarbeitung angepasst}%^^A
+% Letter-Class-Optionen können auch für jede per |\documentclass| angegebene
% keyval-Option oder sonstige scan-Option (das sind Optionen, die nicht per
% |\DeclareOption| definiert wurden) geladen werden. Dabei wird die
% Abarbeitung der Option nicht unterbrochen. Dazu wird dieses Makro in den
@@ -156,23 +155,23 @@
%<*body>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Makros für Letter-Class-Options}
+% \subsection{Makros für Letter-Class-Options}
%
% \begin{macro}{\LoadLetterOption}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/08}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/04}{Leerzeichen werden ignoriert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/08}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/04}{Leerzeichen werden ignoriert}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@sp@def} statt
-% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}^^A
+% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}%^^A
% Bei der neuen Briefklasse existiert eine Anweisung, mit der eine
% \emph{\textbf{l}etter-\texttt{c}lass-\texttt{o}ption}-Datei geladen
% werden kann. Das Laden wird mit entsprechender Information in der
% \texttt{log}-Datei vermerkt. Damit in der Datei interne Makros
-% verwendet werden können, muss der catcode von "`@"' entsprechend
-% gesetzt sein. Damit der Befehl sowohl in der Präambel als auch in
+% verwendet werden können, muss der catcode von "`@"' entsprechend
+% gesetzt sein. Damit der Befehl sowohl in der Präambel als auch in
% weiteren Optionen-Dateien oder in der Klasse selbst verwendet werden
% kann, muss der catcode am Ende wieder restauriert werden. Dabei muss
-% etwas trickreich gearbeitet werden, damit tatsächlich eine
-% Schachtelung möglich ist. So erfolgt die Umschaltung des catcodes
+% etwas trickreich gearbeitet werden, damit tatsächlich eine
+% Schachtelung möglich ist. So erfolgt die Umschaltung des catcodes
% immer nur beim ersten Aufruf innerhalb einer Schachtel.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\LoadLetterOption}[1]{%
@@ -215,8 +214,8 @@
}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{manage \cs{RequirePackage} and \cs{usepackage}
-% inside \texttt{lco}-files after \cs{begin\{document\}}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{manage \cs{RequirePackage} and \cs{usepackage}
+% inside \texttt{lco}-files after \cs{begin\{document\}}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@atdocument
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -250,13 +249,13 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\lco@RequirePackage}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@trim@spaces} statt
-% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}^^A
+% \cs{KV@@sp@def}}%^^A
% Da \texttt{lco}-Dateien auch noch nach \cs{begin\{document\}} geladen werden
-% können, wird hier sinnvoll auf die Anforderung von Paketen in diesem Fall
+% können, wird hier sinnvoll auf die Anforderung von Paketen in diesem Fall
% reagiert. In der ersten Ausbaustufe wird eine sinnvolle Fehlermeldung
-% ausgegeben. Irgend wann einmal später könnte man sich eventuell noch etwas
+% ausgegeben. Irgend wann einmal später könnte man sich eventuell noch etwas
% besseres einfallen lassen.
% Das erste, optionale Argument sind ggf. Optionen. Diese werden jedoch an
% dieser Stelle einfach ignoriert. Das zweitem, obligatorische Argument ist
@@ -284,16 +283,16 @@
\scr@gobbleopt
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \lco@RequirePackage
-% \end{macro}^^A \LoadLetterOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \lco@RequirePackage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \LoadLetterOption
% \begin{macro}{\LoadLetterOptions}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/04}{Neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt und damit
-% Leerzeichen zwischen den Einträgen erlaubt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Behandlung für (nicht mehr mögliche)
-% Leerzeicheneinträge entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/04}{Neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt und damit
+% Leerzeichen zwischen den Einträgen erlaubt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Behandlung für (nicht mehr mögliche)
+% Leerzeicheneinträge entfernt}%^^A
% Funktioniert prinzipiell wie \cs{LoadLetterOption}, aber es werden mehrere,
-% durch Komma getrennte Optionen unterstützt.
+% durch Komma getrennte Optionen unterstützt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\LoadLetterOptions}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -308,26 +307,26 @@
\reserved@a
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \LoadLetterOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \LoadLetterOptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/17}{Neu}^^A
-% Es besteht die Möglichkeit, in \texttt{lco}-Dateien eine bestimmte
-% Papiergröße zu fordern. Dazu wird der Name der \texttt{lco}-Datei
-% und die geforderte Papiergröse als Parameter übergeben. Stimmt die
-% Papiergröße nicht überein, so wird bei \cs{opening} eine Warnung
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/17}{Neu}%^^A
+% Es besteht die Möglichkeit, in \texttt{lco}-Dateien eine bestimmte
+% Papiergröße zu fordern. Dazu wird der Name der \texttt{lco}-Datei
+% und die geforderte Papiergröse als Parameter übergeben. Stimmt die
+% Papiergröße nicht überein, so wird bei \cs{opening} eine Warnung
% ausgegeben.
% \begin{macro}{\@PapersizeWarning}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{Abweichung von 1\,mm nach unten und oben
-% erlaubt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{Verwendung des neuen \cs{PaperNameToSize}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/05}{Abweichung von 1\,mm nach unten und oben
+% erlaubt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{Verwendung des neuen \cs{PaperNameToSize}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@PapersizeWarning}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\LOPNP@size}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\LOPNP@option}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% Zur einfacheren Realisierung wird mit vier internen Hilfsmakros
% gearbeitet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -423,10 +422,10 @@
%
% \subsection{Die Letter-Class-Optionen}
%
-% Die Letter-Class-Optionen selbst werden wie bereits erwähnt über Dateien
-% realisiert. In den vorgefertigen Dateien für unterschiedliche Arten von
-% Briefen werden in erster Linie Pseudo-Längen passend gesetzt. In einigen
-% Fällen werden aber auch zusätzlich Befehle umdefiniert.
+% Die Letter-Class-Optionen selbst werden wie bereits erwähnt über Dateien
+% realisiert. In den vorgefertigen Dateien für unterschiedliche Arten von
+% Briefen werden in erster Linie Pseudo-Längen passend gesetzt. In einigen
+% Fällen werden aber auch zusätzlich Befehle umdefiniert.
%
% \iffalse
%<*lco>
@@ -438,22 +437,22 @@
%<*head>
% \fi
%
-% Im Kopf ist natürlich die Datei zu deklarieren:
+% Im Kopf ist natürlich die Datei zu deklarieren:
% \changes{v3.04}{2009/04/21}{neue LCO \texttt{NF} von Jean-Marie Pacquet
-% übernommen und ergänzt}^^A
+% übernommen und ergänzt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.04}{2009/06/26}{neue LCO \texttt{USletter2w} in Zusammenarbeit
-% mit Engelbert Buxbaum und Richard Ar\`es geschaffen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.04}{2009/06/29}{neue LCO \texttt{UScommercial9DW} für Papier im
-% Format letter oder legal in Umschlägen im Format commercial No.\,9 mit
-% zwei Fenstern}^^A
-% \changes{v3.04}{2009/06/30}{neue LCO \texttt{UScommercial9} für Papier im
-% Format letter oder legal in Umschlägen im Format commercial No.\,9 mit
+% mit Engelbert Buxbaum und Richard Ar\`es geschaffen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.04}{2009/06/29}{neue LCO \texttt{UScommercial9DW} für Papier im
+% Format letter oder legal in Umschlägen im Format commercial No.\,9 mit
+% zwei Fenstern}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.04}{2009/06/30}{neue LCO \texttt{UScommercial9} für Papier im
+% Format letter oder legal in Umschlägen im Format commercial No.\,9 mit
% einem Fenster auf Basis von
-% \texttt{http://www.envelopesuperstore.com/}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.04}{2009/06/26}{seit langem existierende LCO \texttt{visualize}^^A
-% zur Visualisierung einiger Pseudolängen aufgenommen}^^A
+% \texttt{http://www.envelopesuperstore.com/}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.04}{2009/06/26}{seit langem existierende LCO \texttt{visualize}%^^A
+% zur Visualisierung einiger Pseudolängen aufgenommen}%^^A
% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/17}{neue LCOs \texttt{DIN5008A} und
-% \texttt{DIN5008B}}^^A
+% \texttt{DIN5008B}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesFile{%
%<visualize> visualize%
@@ -484,10 +483,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\LCOWarningNoLine}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/24}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/24}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\LCOWarning}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/24}{Neu}^^A
-% Außerdem wird ein Makro benötigt, das analog zu |\ClassWarningNoLine| oder
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/24}{Neu}%^^A
+% Außerdem wird ein Makro benötigt, das analog zu |\ClassWarningNoLine| oder
% |\PackageWarningNoLine| funktioniert.
%<*!5008>
\providecommand*\LCOWarningNoLine[2]{%
@@ -512,7 +511,7 @@
%
% \subsubsection{Der Hauptteil}
%
-% Die Maße für einige Optionen wurden nicht von mir selbst recherchiert:
+% Die Maße für einige Optionen wurden nicht von mir selbst recherchiert:
% \begin{center}
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
% \texttt{lco}-Datei & Recherchiert von \\\hline\\[-1.6ex]
@@ -530,7 +529,7 @@
% \end{tabular}{ll}
% \end{center}
%
-% Zunächst wird geprüft, ob überhaupt die richtige Klasse geladen ist.
+% Zunächst wird geprüft, ob überhaupt die richtige Klasse geladen ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!5008>
\@ifundefined{scr@fromname@var}{%
@@ -555,7 +554,7 @@
}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Dann wird geprüft, ob das richtige Papierformat vorhanden ist.
+% Dann wird geprüft, ob das richtige Papierformat vorhanden ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\LetterOptionNeedsPapersize{%
%<DIN> DIN%
@@ -579,7 +578,7 @@
% Dann werden die Werte gesetzt.
% \begin{description}
% \item[ZIP-Code]
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Bezeichner der Variablen \texttt{fromzipcode}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Bezeichner der Variablen \texttt{fromzipcode}%^^A
% wird gesetzt}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<!KOMAold>\setkomavar*{fromzipcode}{%
@@ -589,7 +588,7 @@
%<USletter2w|UScommercial9|UScommercial9DW> US}
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[Faltmarken]
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/20}{Die neuen Faltmarken werden berücksichtigt.}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/20}{Die neuen Faltmarken werden berücksichtigt.}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@setplength{foldmarkhpos}{3.5mm}
\@setplength{tfoldmarkvpos}{%
@@ -636,8 +635,8 @@
%<UScommercial9> 4.5in}
%<UScommercial9DW> 3.625in}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/06/25}{Anschriftfeld enthält laut Doku die
-% Rücksendeadresse, also machen wir das jetzt auch so}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/06/25}{Anschriftfeld enthält laut Doku die
+% Rücksendeadresse, also machen wir das jetzt auch so}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@setplength{toaddrheight}{%
%<DIN|DINmoretext|SN|SwissLeft|KOMAold|NF> 45mm}
@@ -665,7 +664,7 @@
\@setplength{specialmailrightindent}{\z@}
%</5008>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \item[Absenderergänzung]
+% \item[Absenderergänzung]
% \begin{macrocode}
\@setplength{locwidth}{%
%<DIN|DINmoretext|SN|SwissLeft|KOMAold|NF|USletter2w|UScommercial9|UScommercial9DW> \z@}
@@ -707,9 +706,9 @@
\@addtoplength[-]{firstheadwidth}{.25in}
%</UScommercial9DW>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \item[Fuß]
-% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Der Fuß hat optional eine feste Position 16\,mm
-% über der unteren Papierkante.}^^A
+% \item[Fuß]
+% \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Der Fuß hat optional eine feste Position 16\,mm
+% über der unteren Papierkante.}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<!5008>\@setplength{firstfootwidth}{\useplength{firstheadwidth}}
%<*5008>
@@ -733,7 +732,7 @@
%<!KOMAold&!NF>\fi
%<NF>\@setplength{firstfootvpos}{266.679mm}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \item[Geschäftszeile]
+% \item[Geschäftszeile]
% \begin{macrocode}
%<!(5008&B)>\@setplength{refvpos}{%
%<DIN|SN> 98.5mm}
@@ -750,8 +749,8 @@
%<5008> 8.46mm}
%<*!5008>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Bei der Breite der Geschäftszeile brauchen wir wieder eine Sonderlösung,
-% damit die Option "`wide"' auch später noch gesetzt werden kann. Also
+% Bei der Breite der Geschäftszeile brauchen wir wieder eine Sonderlösung,
+% damit die Option "`wide"' auch später noch gesetzt werden kann. Also
% verwenden wir hier den Wert 0 als mit der Bedeutung "`ist bei \cs{opening}
% zu berechnen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -765,16 +764,30 @@
%<KOMAold|NF|USletter2w|UScommercial9|UScommercial9DW>\let\raggedsignature=\raggedright
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{description}
-% Es folgen ggf. noch zusätzliche Änderungen.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@default@firsthead@fromaddress@hook}
+% Einst folgte hier die Definition eines Hooks in der Form
% \changes{v3.13b}{2014/10/04}{\cs{@firsthead} existiert nicht mehr, daher nun
-% mit einem neu geschaffenen \emph{hook}}^^A
+% mit einem neu geschaffenen \emph{hook}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/02}{\emph{hook} entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*DINmoretext>
+%<*DINmoretext&ignorethis>
\def\scr@default@firsthead@fromaddress@hook{\def\\{,\ \@gobble}}
-%</DINmoretext>
+%</DINmoretext&ignorethis>
% \end{macrocode}
+% Da diese Definition fehlerhaft ist, korrekt wäre etwas wie:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*DINmoretext&ignorethis>
+\def\scr@default@firsthead@fromaddress@hook{%
+ \renewcommand*\\[1][]{,\ \ignorespaces}%
+}
+%</DINmoretext&ignorethis>
+% und das in 15 Jahren niemandem aufgefallen ist, wird davon ausgegangen, dass
+% davon nie jemand Gebrauch gemacht hat und wir deshalb einfach darauf
+% verzichten können.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
-% Außerdem gibt es noch die Kompatibilitätseinstellungen, die ebenfalls von
+% Außerdem gibt es noch die Kompatibilitätseinstellungen, die ebenfalls von
% \texttt{KOMAold} aktiviert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*KOMAold>
@@ -853,7 +866,7 @@
%</KOMAold>
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Und für \texttt{DIN5008} braucht es dann noch einige zusätzliche
+% Und für \texttt{DIN5008} braucht es dann noch einige zusätzliche
% Einstellungen:
% \begin{macrocode}
%</!5008>
@@ -907,8 +920,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\backaddr@format}
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@endstrut} statt
-% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}^^A
-% Nicht unterstrichene, mehrzeilig oben ausgerichtete Rücksendeadresse.
+% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}%^^A
+% Nicht unterstrichene, mehrzeilig oben ausgerichtete Rücksendeadresse.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\backaddr@format}[1]{\hspace*{\useplength{toaddrindent}}%
\parbox[t][\useplength{backaddrheight}][t]%
@@ -919,7 +932,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\specialmail@format}
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@endstrut} statt
-% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}^^A
+% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}%^^A
% Mehrzeilig oben ausgerichtete Versandart.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\specialmail@format}[1]{%
@@ -953,21 +966,21 @@
% Diese Makros werden nur von \texttt{visualize.lco} verwendet und stellen den
% Hauptteil dieser LCO dar.
%
-% Das Paket benötigt \textsf{eso-pic}.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{lade \textsf{eso-pic} unbedingt}^^A
+% Das Paket benötigt \textsf{eso-pic}.
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{lade \textsf{eso-pic} unbedingt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{eso-pic}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\showfields}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}%^^A
% Diese Anweisung erlaubt es, eine Reihe von Felder zu visualisieren. Dazu
-% gibt man die gewünschten Felder als Komma separierte Liste im ersten und
+% gibt man die gewünschten Felder als Komma separierte Liste im ersten und
% einzigen Argument der Anweisung an. Gibt man ein unbekanntes Feld an, so
% wird nicht etwa ein Fehler, sondern nur eine Warnung ausgegeben. Die
% Visualisierung erfolgt im Hintergrund. Dies wird mit Hilfe des Pakets
% \textsf{eso-pic} erreicht. Wichtig ist noch, dass die Anweisung nicht
-% zurückgenommen werden kann.
+% zurückgenommen werden kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfields}[1]{%
\AtBeginLetter{%
@@ -994,7 +1007,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{field}
-% Die Visualisierung erfolgt dabei in einer wählbaren Farbe, die über das
+% Die Visualisierung erfolgt dabei in einer wählbaren Farbe, die über das
% Element \cs{field} definiert ist. Voreingestellt ist dabei
% \cs{normalcolor}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1004,22 +1017,22 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\showfield}
-% Die Visualisierung der einzelnen Felder erfolgt über eigene Anweisungen des
+% Die Visualisierung der einzelnen Felder erfolgt über eigene Anweisungen des
% Aufbaus \cs{showfield@\emph{Feldname}}. In der Regel sind die Felder
-% rechteckig. Zur Visualisierung solcher Felder können daher einheitliche
+% rechteckig. Zur Visualisierung solcher Felder können daher einheitliche
% Anweisungen verwendet werden. Diese besitzen vier Argumente:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item Abstand vom linken Rand (x-Koordinate des Rahmens)
% \item Abstand vom oberen Rand (y-Koordinate des Rahmens)
% \item Breite des Feldes
-% \item Höhe des Feldes; ist dieser Wert negativ gibt es keine feste Höhe,
-% sondern nur eine Art unbestimmte Ausdehnung mit einer Mindesthöhe
+% \item Höhe des Feldes; ist dieser Wert negativ gibt es keine feste Höhe,
+% sondern nur eine Art unbestimmte Ausdehnung mit einer Mindesthöhe
% \end{enumerate}
%
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@by@frame}
% Diese Anweisung visualisiert ein rechteckiges Feld durch Rahmen. Bei einer
-% negativen Höhe wird ein unten offener Rahmen gezeichnet, bei dem die
-% vertikalen Linien als Pfeile nach unten ausgeführt werden.
+% negativen Höhe wird ein unten offener Rahmen gezeichnet, bei dem die
+% vertikalen Linien als Pfeile nach unten ausgeführt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@by@frame}[4]{%
\thinlines
@@ -1047,7 +1060,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@by@edges}
% Diese Anweisung visualisert ein rechteckiges Feld, indem es die Ecken des
-% Feldes durch kleine Striche markiert. Bei negativer Höhe entfallen die
+% Feldes durch kleine Striche markiert. Bei negativer Höhe entfallen die
% unteren Eckmarkierungen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@by@edges}[4]{%
@@ -1067,7 +1080,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\edgesize}
-% Die Länge der Ecklinien wird über dieses Makro bestimmt. Voreingestellt ist
+% Die Länge der Ecklinien wird über dieses Makro bestimmt. Voreingestellt ist
% 1\,ex.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\edgesize}{1ex}
@@ -1077,7 +1090,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@by@rule}
% Diese Anweisung visualisiert ein rechteckiges Feld, indem es das komplette
-% Feld einfärbt. Es wird hier nicht zwischen unten offenen und geschlossenen
+% Feld einfärbt. Es wird hier nicht zwischen unten offenen und geschlossenen
% Feldern unterschieden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@by@rule}[4]{%
@@ -1090,7 +1103,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Die Voreinstellung für die Visualsierung ist mit Rahmen:
+% Die Voreinstellung für die Visualsierung ist mit Rahmen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield}{}
\let\showfield\showfield@by@frame
@@ -1116,7 +1129,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Die folgenden Felder werden derzeit unterstützt:
+% Die folgenden Felder werden derzeit unterstützt:
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@test}
% ein Testfeld \texttt{test} mit den Koordinaten:
% $(1\,\mathrm{cm},1\,\mathrm{cm})\times(10\,\mathrm{cm},15\,\mathrm{cm})$
@@ -1127,9 +1140,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@head}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstheadhpos}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstheadhpos}%^^A
% beachtet}
-% das Feld \texttt{head} für den Kopfbereich des Briefbogens:
+% das Feld \texttt{head} für den Kopfbereich des Briefbogens:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@head}{%
\ifdim\useplength{firstheadhpos}<\paperwidth
@@ -1157,9 +1170,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@foot}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstfoothpos}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstfoothpos}%^^A
% beachtet}
-% das Feld \texttt{foot} für den Fußbereich des Briefbogens:
+% das Feld \texttt{foot} für den Fußbereich des Briefbogens:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@foot}{%
\ifdim\useplength{firstfoothpos}<\paperwidth
@@ -1187,9 +1200,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@address}
-% \changes{v3.07a}{2011/01/10}{Implementierung der Höhe an die Änderung in
+% \changes{v3.07a}{2011/01/10}{Implementierung der Höhe an die Änderung in
% \textsf{scrlttr}~3.03b angepasst.}
-% das Feld \texttt{address} für das Feld mit der Anschrift:
+% das Feld \texttt{address} für das Feld mit der Anschrift:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@address}{%
\setlengthtoplength{\@tempskipa}{toaddrhpos}%
@@ -1204,9 +1217,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@location}
-% \changes{v3.07a}{2011/01/10}{Implementierung der Höhe an die Änderung in
+% \changes{v3.07a}{2011/01/10}{Implementierung der Höhe an die Änderung in
% \textsf{scrlttr}~3.03b angepasst.}
-% das Feld \texttt{location} mit der Absenderergänzung:
+% das Feld \texttt{location} mit der Absenderergänzung:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@location}{%
\begingroup
@@ -1247,7 +1260,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\showfield@refline}
-% das Feld mit der Geschäftszeile:
+% das Feld mit der Geschäftszeile:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showfield@refline}{%
\begingroup
@@ -1292,17 +1305,17 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\showenvelope}
% \begin{macro}{\@showenvelope}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@showenvelope}
% \begin{macro}{\@@@showenvelope}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% Es kann auch ein Briefumschlag angezeigt werden. Dazu müssen verschiedene
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% Es kann auch ein Briefumschlag angezeigt werden. Dazu müssen verschiedene
% Parameter des Umschlags bekannt sein. Der Umschlag wird immer hochkant auf
-% der aktuellen Seite angezeigt. Hierfür wird das Paket \textsf{graphicx}
-% benötigt.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{lade \textsf{graphicx} unbedingt}^^A
+% der aktuellen Seite angezeigt. Hierfür wird das Paket \textsf{graphicx}
+% benötigt.
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/03}{lade \textsf{graphicx} unbedingt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{graphicx}
\newcommand*{\showenvelope}{}
@@ -1361,7 +1374,7 @@
% Die Argumente sind:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item Breite des Umschlags,
-% \item Höhe des Umschlags,
+% \item Höhe des Umschlags,
% \item Abstand des Briefbogens vom linken und rechten Rand des Umschlags,
% \item Abstand des Briefbogens vom oberen und unteren Rand des Umschlags,
% \item optionale weitere Anweisungen, zum Setzen von Elementen.
@@ -1479,7 +1492,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
% \begin{macro}{\unmeasuredFrame}
-% Ein Rahmen ohne Maßlinien.
+% Ein Rahmen ohne Maßlinien.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\unmeasuredFrame}{}
\def\unmeasuredFrame(#1,#2){%
@@ -1494,7 +1507,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\measuredFrameLT}
% \begin{macro}{\measuredFrameRB}
% \begin{macro}{\measuredFrameRT}
-% Die Maßlinien für ein Rechteck.
+% Die Maßlinien für ein Rechteck.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\measuredFrameLB}{}
\def\measuredFrameLB(#1,#2){%
@@ -1529,7 +1542,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\measureLineV}
-% Vertikale Maßlinie ohne Beschriftung:
+% Vertikale Maßlinie ohne Beschriftung:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\measureLineV}[1]{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
@@ -1543,7 +1556,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\measureLineVL}
% \begin{macro}{\measureLineVR}
-% Vertikale Maßlinie mit Beschriftung links bzw. rechts.
+% Vertikale Maßlinie mit Beschriftung links bzw. rechts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\measureLineVL}[1]{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
@@ -1562,7 +1575,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ValPerUnit}
% \begin{macro}{\unitfactor}
-% Zeige die Längen in \cs{unitlength} mit einer Genauigkeit von
+% Zeige die Längen in \cs{unitlength} mit einer Genauigkeit von
% 1/\cs{unitfactor} an.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ValPerUnit}[1]{%
@@ -1580,7 +1593,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\measureLineH}
-% Horizontale Maßlinie ohne Beschriftung:
+% Horizontale Maßlinie ohne Beschriftung:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\measureLineH}[1]{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
@@ -1593,7 +1606,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\measureLineHB}
% \begin{macro}{\measureLineHT}
-% Horizontale Maßlinie mit Beschriftung darunter bzw. oben.
+% Horizontale Maßlinie mit Beschriftung darunter bzw. oben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\measureLineHB}[1]{%
\begin{picture}(0,0)
@@ -1615,7 +1628,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{measure}
-% Farbe der Maßlinien.
+% Farbe der Maßlinien.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{measure}{\normalcolor}
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
index 92f1399a45..8c500e82bc 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx 2640 2017-05-08 09:36:55Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-05-08 11:36:55 +0200 (Mon, 08 May 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1872 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx}
@@ -102,7 +101,7 @@
%
% \section{Listen und Tabellen}
%
-% \KOMAScript{} verfügt über einige zusätzliche Listenumgebungen. Ein
+% \KOMAScript{} verfügt über einige zusätzliche Listenumgebungen. Ein
% Teil dieser Listenumgebungen ist nicht sofort auf den ersten Blick
% als solche zu erkennen, so wie dies schon bei den Standardklassen
% beispielsweise mit \texttt{quote} und \texttt{quotation} der Fall
@@ -125,7 +124,7 @@
% \fi
%
%
-% \subsection{Ränder in Listen}
+% \subsection{Ränder in Listen}
%
% \begin{Length}{leftmargini}
% \begin{Length}{leftmarginii}
@@ -136,7 +135,7 @@
% \begin{Length}{leftmargin}
% \begin{Length}{labelsep}
% \begin{Length}{labelwidth}
-% Für die Listenumgebungen in verschiedenen Stufen müssen Ränder
+% Für die Listenumgebungen in verschiedenen Stufen müssen Ränder
% definiert werden. Hinzu kommen noch die Breite eines Labels und der
% Abstand nach einem Label.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -174,7 +173,7 @@
% \end{Length}
% \end{Length}
%
-% Weil die Gelegenheit so günstig ist, setzen wir hier auch gleich
+% Weil die Gelegenheit so günstig ist, setzen wir hier auch gleich
% noch ein paar \emph{penalties} (Erlaubsnispunkte).
% \begin{macrocode}
\@beginparpenalty=-\@lowpenalty
@@ -183,7 +182,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
-% \subsection{Verschiedene Längen für Tabellen, Arrays und Tabulatoren}
+% \subsection{Verschiedene Längen für Tabellen, Arrays und Tabulatoren}
%
% Vorbemerkung: Arrays sind im Prinzip Tabellen zur Verwendung im
% mathemathischen Modus.
@@ -193,7 +192,7 @@
% \begin{Length}{arrayrulewidth}
% \begin{Length}{doublerulewidth}
% \begin{Length}{tabbingsep}
-% Bei diesen Längen handelt es sich um die Abstände der Spalten in
+% Bei diesen Längen handelt es sich um die Abstände der Spalten in
% \texttt{array}- und \texttt{tabular}-Umgebungen, sowie um die Breite
% und den Abstand der Trennlinien. Hinzu kommt noch der \cs{'} Abstand
% in \texttt{tabbing}-Umgebungen.
@@ -219,23 +218,23 @@
% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
-% \changes{v2.4m}{1997/02/28}{öffnende Klammer entsprechend Doku
-% entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4m}{1997/02/28}{öffnende Klammer entsprechend Doku
+% entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
-% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{Mathemodus eliminiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{Mathemodus eliminiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
-% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{\cs{textendash} verwendet}
+% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{\cs{textendash} verwendet}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
-% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{Mathemodus eliminiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{Mathemodus eliminiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiv}
-% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{Mathemodus eliminiert}^^A
-% Für die numerierten Listenumgebungen müssen Marken bzw. Numerierungen
-% festgelegt werden. Dazu wird eine Darstellung der Zähler, ihr Prefix
+% \changes{v2.5g}{1999/10/09}{Mathemodus eliminiert}%^^A
+% Für die numerierten Listenumgebungen müssen Marken bzw. Numerierungen
+% festgelegt werden. Dazu wird eine Darstellung der Zähler, ihr Prefix
% und ihre Labeldarstellung neu definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*\theenumi{\@arabic\c@enumi}
@@ -293,19 +292,19 @@
%
% \begin{environment}{labeling}
% \begin{macro}{\labelinglabel}
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neue Elemente \texttt{labelinglabel} und
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Neue Elemente \texttt{labelinglabel} und
% \texttt{labelingseparator} werden verwendet}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/01/28}{\texttt{labelinglabel} und
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/01/28}{\texttt{labelinglabel} und
% \texttt{labelingseparator} werden nun auch zur Berechnung der Breite
% verwendet}
-% \changes{v3.03a}{2009/04/02}{Argumente in der Berechnung der Label-Breite
-% korrigiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03a}{2009/04/02}{Argumente in der Berechnung der Label-Breite
+% korrigiert}%^^A
% Die \cs{labeling}-Umgebung ist eine Erweiterung des \textsf{Script}
% Pakets. Sie erwartet ein optionales und ein normales Argument. Das
% optionale Argument beschreibt einen speziellen Trenntext zwischen
% \cs{item}-Marke und \cs{item}-Beschreibung. Das eigentliche Argument
-% wird für die Ermittlung der Einrückung des Beschreibungstextes
-% bzw. des Trenntextes benötigt.
+% wird für die Ermittlung der Einrückung des Beschreibungstextes
+% bzw. des Trenntextes benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
\newenvironment{labeling}[2][]{%
@@ -330,9 +329,9 @@
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{verse}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
% mehr verarbeiten}
-% Die Verse-Umgebung ist für Zitate in Gedichtform und ähnliches
+% Die Verse-Umgebung ist für Zitate in Gedichtform und ähnliches
% gedacht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{verse}{%
@@ -351,14 +350,14 @@
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{quotation}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
% mehr verarbeiten}
% \begin{environment}{quote}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
% mehr verarbeiten}
% Die \texttt{quotation}- und die \texttt{quote}-Umgebung erlauben
-% rechts und links eingerückte Passagen. Absätze werden entweder in
-% der ersten Zeile zusätzlich eingerückt oder durch vertikalen Abstand
+% rechts und links eingerückte Passagen. Absätze werden entweder in
+% der ersten Zeile zusätzlich eingerückt oder durch vertikalen Abstand
% markiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quotation}{%
@@ -382,41 +381,41 @@
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{addmargin}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/29}{neue Umgebung}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006-07-20}{\cs{@listdepth} korrigiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/29}{neue Umgebung}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006-07-20}{\cs{@listdepth} korrigiert}%^^A
% \begin{environment}{addmargin*}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/29}{neue Umgebung}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006-07-20}{\cs{@listdepth} korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{robuster gegen Umbrüche am Anfang}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/02}{Umbruchtest nur für doppelseitige
-% Dokumente}^^A
-% Diese beiden Umgebungen ähneln \texttt{quote} und
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/29}{neue Umgebung}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006-07-20}{\cs{@listdepth} korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{robuster gegen Umbrüche am Anfang}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/02}{Umbruchtest nur für doppelseitige
+% Dokumente}%^^A
+% Diese beiden Umgebungen ähneln \texttt{quote} und
% \texttt{quotation}. Dabei werden Absatzeinzug und Absatzabstand
-% nicht verändert. Die einzige Veränderung besteht in den Rändern. Wie
-% stark die Ränder verändert werden, hängt dabei von den Parametern
+% nicht verändert. Die einzige Veränderung besteht in den Rändern. Wie
+% stark die Ränder verändert werden, hängt dabei von den Parametern
% ab. Ist nur der obligatorische Parameter angegeben, werden die
-% Ränder auf beiden Seiten um diesen Wert vergrößert. Ist ein
+% Ränder auf beiden Seiten um diesen Wert vergrößert. Ist ein
% optionaler Parameter angegeben, so ist dies bei \texttt{addmargin}
% der linke und bei \texttt{addmargin*} der innere Rand. Der
% obligatorische Parameter ist dann der andere Rand. Diese
% Entscheidung ist das einzige, was die Umgebungen selbst erledigen
-% müssen.
+% müssen.
% \begin{macro}{\@addmargin}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/29}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/01}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
-% mehr verarbeiten}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9q}{2003/03/24}{\cs{labelsep} bleibt unverändert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/20}{\cs{@tmpcnta} bleibt unverändert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.05b}{2010/04/29}{\cs{partopsep} muss auf 0 statt \cs{parskip}
-% gesetzt werden, weil es zu \cs{topsep} addiert wird}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{robuster gegen Umbrüche am Anfang}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/29}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/01}{\cs{item} muss keine "`[]"'-Klammern
+% mehr verarbeiten}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9q}{2003/03/24}{\cs{labelsep} bleibt unverändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/20}{\cs{@tmpcnta} bleibt unverändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05b}{2010/04/29}{\cs{partopsep} muss auf 0 statt \cs{parskip}
+% gesetzt werden, weil es zu \cs{topsep} addiert wird}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{robuster gegen Umbrüche am Anfang}%^^A
% Der Rest wird von diesem Makro erledigt.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@addmargin@startpage}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/26}{neu (intern, lokal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/26}{Test auf Seitenumbruch in
-% \texttt{addmargin*}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/10/21}{\cs{topsep} und \cs{partopsep} werden
-% erhalten}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/26}{neu (intern, lokal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/26}{Test auf Seitenumbruch in
+% \texttt{addmargin*}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/10/21}{\cs{topsep} und \cs{partopsep} werden
+% erhalten}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
\newenvironment{addmargin}{%
@@ -487,12 +486,12 @@
% \end{environment}
%
%
-% \subsection{Schriftarten für Listen}
+% \subsection{Schriftarten für Listen}
%
% \begin{macro}{\descfont}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{\cs{sffamily} durch \cs{@gr@gsffamily}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Dies ist die Schriftart, in der das Label der Einträge in eine
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{\cs{sffamily} durch \cs{@gr@gsffamily}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Dies ist die Schriftart, in der das Label der Einträge in eine
% \texttt{description}-Umgebung gesetzt wird. Das Makro ist als intern
% zu betrachten. Anwender habe stattdessen das entsprechende Element
% zu verwenden.
@@ -502,7 +501,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@descriptionlabel}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{descriptionlabel}}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{descriptionlabel}}
% Das Element auf das \cs{descfont} angewandt wird:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@descriptionlabel}{\descfont}
@@ -510,12 +509,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{labelinglabel}
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{neues Element}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{neues Element}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{labelingseparator}
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{neues Element}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{neues Element}%^^A
% Das Label einer \texttt{labeling}-Umgebung wird in eigener Schrift
% gesetzt. Innerhalb des Labels wird dann das Trennzeichen ebenfalls mit
-% eigener Schrift gesetzt. Voreingestellt ist in beiden Fällen keine Änderung.
+% eigener Schrift gesetzt. Voreingestellt ist in beiden Fällen keine Änderung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
\newkomafont{labelinglabel}{}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx
index 40c492a99e..9964fe81ce 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-listsof.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{649}
+% \CheckSum{673}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-listsof.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-listsof.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,8 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-listsof.dtx 2864 2018-01-16 07:55:20Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-listsof.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
+%<prepare>%%% (run: prepare)
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,9 +64,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-01-16 08:55:20 +0100 (Tue, 16 Jan 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 2864 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3262 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}%
@@ -77,7 +78,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}
@@ -105,10 +105,10 @@
% dieses Abschnitts sind die Verzeichnisse der
% Gleitumgebungen und das Inhaltsverzeichnis. \KOMAScript{} bietet
% selbst das Verzeichnis der Gleittabellen und der Abbildungen. Es
-% unterstützt außerdem die Verzeichnisse der mit dem \textsf{float}
+% unterstützt außerdem die Verzeichnisse der mit dem \textsf{float}
% Paket angelegten Gleitumgebungen.
%
-% Briefe verfügen über keine Verzeichnisse.
+% Briefe verfügen über keine Verzeichnisse.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
%
@@ -116,41 +116,240 @@
%<*!letter>
% \fi
%
-% \iffalse
-%<*option>
-% \fi
+% \subsection{Gemeinsamer Code von Inhaltsverzeichnis und Verzeichnissen der
+% Gleitumgebungen}
%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% Before doing anything with the tocs we need package \Package{tocbasic}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\RequirePackage{tocbasic}[%
+%!KOMAScriptVersion
+]
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für das Inhaltsverzeichnis}
+% \begin{macro}{\numberline@numberpostfix}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{\cs{autodot} wird darüber eingefügt}
+% Auch in den Verzeichnissen soll ggf. \cs{autodot} quasi als Bestandteil der
+% Nummer ausgegeben werden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\g@addto@macro{\numberline@numberpostfix}{\autodot}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline@numberpostfix
%
-% Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen werden bereits für die Optionen
-% benötigt und deshalb vorab definiert.
+% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{Definition von \textsf{tocbasic} verwenden}
+% Unabhängig vom Stil soll immer die Definition von \textsf{tocbasic}
+% verwendet werden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\usetocbasicnumberline[%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{Redefining `\string\numberline'}%
+]
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline
+%
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/02}{einschalten des \texttt{tocbasic}-Features
+% \texttt{chapteratlist} in die Datei \texttt{scrkernel-listsof.dtx} verschoben}
+% Bei Büchern wird für jedes Verzeichnis des Besitzers \texttt{float} das
+% Feature \texttt{chapteratlist} gesetzt. Das gilt auch für solche
+% Verzeichnisse, die noch gar nicht definiert sind.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body&(book|report)>
+\doforeachtocfile[float]{%
+ \setuptoc{\@currext}{chapteratlist}%
+}
+\AtAddToTocList[float]{%
+ \setuptoc{\@currext}{chapteratlist}%
+}
+%</body&(book|report)>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\before@starttoc}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro führt im Falle von \texttt{tocleft} oder
+% \texttt{listsleft} am Anfang eines Verzeichnisses alle notwendigen
+% Änderungen durch, um das Verzeichnis entsprechend zu handhaben.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dottedtocline}
+% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/03}{auch das dritte Argument wird ge"andert}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@numberline}
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{nicht länger benötigt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\last@l@number}
+% Dafür werden ein paar Hilfsmakros benötigt, die vorsichtshalber
+% global vordefiniert werden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\scr@dottedtocline}{}
+\newcommand*{\last@l@number}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@l@number}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% In diesem Makro wird während der Erstellung eines Verzeichnisses
+% Inhaltsverzeichnisses die aktuelle Breite der Nummer gespeichert.
+% \begin{macro}{\set@l@number}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro ist dafür verantwortlich, dass zum einen \cs{@tempdima}
+% für den Aufruf von \cs{numberline@box} auf den richtigen Wert gesetzt
+% wird, zum anderen wird die aktuelle größte Breite der Nummer hier
+% angepasst.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@l@number}{}
+\newcommand*{\set@l@number}[1]{%
+ \settowidth{\@tempdima}{#1\enskip}%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima >\@l@number
+ \xdef\@l@number{\the\@tempdima}%
+ \fi%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima >\last@l@number \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\last@l@number}%
+ \fi%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% Kommen wir endlich zu \cs{before@starttoc}:
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/12}{Initialisierung im \cs{@empty}-Fall}
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{statt \cs{numberline} wird \cs{numberline@box}
+% umdefiniert}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\before@starttoc}[1]{%
+ \let\scr@dottedtocline=\@dottedtocline
+ \renewcommand*{\@dottedtocline}[3]{%
+ \scr@dottedtocline{##1}{\z@}{\last@l@number}}%
+ \renewcommand*{\numberline@box}[1]{%
+ \set@l@number{##1}\hb@xt@\@tempdima{##1}}%
+ \gdef\@l@number{\z@}%
+ \@ifundefined{#1@l@number}{%
+ \def\last@l@number{2em}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1@l@number\endcsname\@empty
+ \let\last@l@number\z@
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\last@l@number
+ \expandafter=\csname#1@l@number\endcsname
+ \fi
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{Vorbereitungen für Verzeichniseintragsstile
+% via \texttt{scrkernel-tocstyle}}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\do@endgroup{\endgroup}%
+ \def\do##1{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@##1@numwidth}{}{%
+%<*trace>
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Setting numwidth of `##1' to \last@l@number}%
+%</trace>
+ \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@##1@numwidth}{\last@l@number}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@##1@indent}{}{%
+%<*trace>
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Setting indent of `##1' to \string\z@}%
+%</trace>
+ \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@##1@indent}{\z@}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@nameuse{scr@dte@donumwidth}%
+ \do@endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\after@starttoc}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro schreibt am Ende den entsprechenden Eintrag in die
+% \texttt{aux}-Datei.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\after@starttoc}[1]{%
+ \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
+ \string\gdef\expandafter\string\csname#1@l@number\endcsname{%
+ \@l@number}}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Dafür sorgen, dass die Verzeichnisse von \textsf{tocbasic} so gesetzt
+% werden, wie wir das gerne hätten (wird über einen Trick auch für das
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\g@addto@macro\tocbasic@@before@hook{%
+ \if@dynlist\expandafter\before@starttoc\expandafter{\@currext}\fi
+}
+\g@addto@macro\tocbasic@@after@hook{%
+ \if@dynlist\expandafter\after@starttoc\expandafter{\@currext}\fi
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Das Inhaltsverzeichnis}
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{init code moved from \texttt{tocbasic.dtx}}%^^A
+% \changes{v1.00}{auto-activation of feature \texttt{onecolumn}}
+% Set feature \texttt{onecolumn} for every ToC file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare&(book|report)>
+\AtAddToTocList[\@currname.\@currext]{\setuptoc{\@currext}{onecolumn}}%
+\AtAddToTocList[ToC]{\setuptoc{\@currext}{onecolumn}}%
+%</prepare&(book|report)>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Tell the package, what files are used:
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{use owner \texttt{ToC} for the table of
+% contents}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare>
+\addtotoclist[ToC]{toc}
+\ifstr{\ext@toc}{toc}{}{%
+ \expandafter\addtotoclist
+ \expandafter[\expandafter T\expandafter o\expandafter C\expandafter ]%
+ \expandafter{\ext@toc}%
+}
+%</prepare>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@tocleft}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neuer Schalter}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{wird früher definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{wird früher definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@toclefttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@tocleftfalse}
-% Die Wahl der Darstellungsart für das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird in einem
+% Die Wahl der Darstellungsart für das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird in einem
% Schalter gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\newif\if@tocleft
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{option}{toc}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch
-% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/17}{\cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} durch
-% \cs{KOMAoptions} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{indexnumbered}}^^A
-% Dies ist die zentrale Option für Einstellungen des Inhaltsverzeichnisses.
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/04}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch
+% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/17}{\cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} durch
+% \cs{KOMAoptions} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/15}{neuer Wert \texttt{indexnumbered}}%^^A
+% Dies ist die zentrale Option für Einstellungen des Inhaltsverzeichnisses.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\KOMA@key{toc}{%
\KOMA@set@ncmdkey{toc}{@tempa}{%
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -169,27 +368,27 @@
{bibliographynumbered}{8},{bibnumbered}{8},{numberedbibliography}{8},%
{numberedbib}{8},%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann gibt es Optionen für die Darstellungsarten des
+% Dann gibt es Optionen für die Darstellungsarten des
% Inhaltsverzeichnisses. Die Variante \texttt{graduated} ist die altbekannte
% Variante. Bei \texttt{flat} hingegen wird eine tabellenartige Form
% verwendet, bei der die Nummern, Texte und Seitenzahlen jeweils untereinander
-% stehen. Der für die Nummern benötigte Platz wird dabei automatisch
+% stehen. Der für die Nummern benötigte Platz wird dabei automatisch
% ermittelt.
% \begin{macrocode}
{flat}{9},{left}{9},%
{graduated}{10},{indent}{10},{indented}{10},%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2014/09/24}{neue Werte \texttt{numberline} und
-% \texttt{nonumberline}}^^A
-% Außerdem können die nicht nummerierten Einträge ggf. ebenfalls mit
-% \cs{numberline} eingerückt werden. Das geht über ein Feature von
+% \changes{v3.12}{2014/09/24}{neue Werte \texttt{numberline} und
+% \texttt{nonumberline}}%^^A
+% Außerdem können die nicht nummerierten Einträge ggf. ebenfalls mit
+% \cs{numberline} eingerückt werden. Das geht über ein Feature von
% \textsf{tocbasic}.
% \begin{macrocode}
{indenttextentries}{11},{indentunnumbered}{11},{numberline}{11},%
{leftaligntextentries}{12},{leftalignunnumbered}{12},{nonumberline}{12},%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Mit Version~3.15 kommt neu die Möglichkeit hinzu, Kapiteleinträge mit
-% Pünktchen zu versehen.
+% Mit Version~3.15 kommt neu die Möglichkeit hinzu, Kapiteleinträge mit
+% Pünktchen zu versehen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<book|report> {chapterentrywithdots}{13},{chapterentrydotfill}{13},
%<book|report> {chapterentrywithoutdots}{14},{chapterentryfill}{14}%
@@ -244,73 +443,217 @@
\fi
\fi
}
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{tocleft}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{tocindent}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{tocleft}{toc=flat}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{tocindent}{toc=graduated}
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
% \end{option}
%
+% \subsection{Definitionen für das Inhaltsverzeichnis}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftocname}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{auch als sprachabhängiger Bezeichner}%^^A
+% Der Name des Verzeichnisses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*\contentsname{Contents}
+\newcommand*\listoftocname{\contentsname}
+\providecaptionname{american,australian,british,canadian,english,newzealand,%
+ UKenglish,ukenglish,USenglish,usenglish}\contentsname{Contents}%
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{Counter}{tocdepth}
+% Der Zähler gibt an, bis zu welcher Gliederungebene Einträge in das
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden. Da \textsf{scrartcl} eine
+% Ebene tiefer beginnt, wird auch eine Ebene tiefer eingetragen. Damit
+% finden sich -- abgesehen von \cs{part} -- immer drei Ebenen im
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+%<book|report>\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+%<article>\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{Counter}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@heading}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/28}{auch für \textsf{scrreprt} und
+% \textsf{scrbook}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \cs{toc@heading} ist nicht
+% länger empfohlen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%
+% Befehl, zum Setzen der Ãœberschrift des Inhaltsverzeichnisses. Eigentlich
+% ist das überflüssig, weil es nur einmal verwendet wird. Aus Gründen der
+% Konsistenz mit den anderen Verzeichnissen machen wir das hier aber
+% genauso.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*\toc@heading{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ usage of deprecated \string\toc@heading!\MessageBreak
+ You should use the features of package `tocbasic'\MessageBreak
+ instead of \string\toc@heading.\MessageBreak
+ Definition of \string\toc@heading\space may be removed from\MessageBreak
+ KOMA-Script soon, so it should not be used
+ }%
+%<article> \section*{\contentsname}%
+%<book|report> \chapter*{\contentsname}%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeMarkcase{\contentsname}}{\MakeMarkcase{\contentsname}}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toc@l@number}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro wird innerhalb von \cs{tableofcontents} über
+% \cs{before@starttoc} und \cs{after@starttoc} in der
+% \texttt{aux}-Datei global definiert. Aus Sicherheitsgründen wird es
+% hier global vordefiniert.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\toc@l@number}{}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für die Gleitumgebungen}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{toc@heading}}
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{Gruppe eingefügt und \cs{parskip} auf
+% 0 gesetzt}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}%
+% \cs{@parskip@indent}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{\cs{if@tocleft} bearbeiten}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/28}{\textsf{article} beachtet ebenfalls
+% \texttt{tocleft}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
+% ersetzt}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{auf \textsf{tocbasic} umgestellt}
+% Die Ausgabe des Inhaltsverzeichnisses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\tableofcontents}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\if@dynlist\if@tocleft
+ \expandafter\listoftoc\expandafter{\ext@toc}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocentrydefault}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Verwendung der neuen
+% \texttt{tocbasic}-Anweisung \cs{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}}
+% Seit Version~3.08 werden Einträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis in der
+% Voreinstellung über diese Anweisung vorgenommen. Das erste Argument ist
+% dabei die Gliederungsebene. Das zweite Argument ist die (formatierte)
+% Gliederungsnummer oder leer, falls die Ãœberschrift nicht nummeriert
+% wird. Das dritte Argument ist der Ãœberschriftentext, der in das
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis soll.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand{\addtocentrydefault}[3]{%
+ \expandafter\tocbasic@addxcontentsline\expandafter{\ext@toc}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen}
%
-% Einige Anweisungen und Einstellungen werden bereits für die Optionen
-% benötigt und deshalb vorab definiert.
+% Die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen ähneln dem Inhaltsverzeichnis, stellen
+% jedoch eine eigene Klasse dar und werden daher auch über eigene Optionen
+% gesteuert.
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{extension \texttt{lof} not added explicitely}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{extension \texttt{lot} not added explicitely}%^^A
+% Note: We must not add extensions \texttt{lof} and \texttt{lot} explicitely,
+% because these files will be prepared using \cs{DeclareNewTOC} that also
+% registers the extension.
+%
+% \changes{v1.00}{auto-activation of feature \texttt{onecolumn}}
+% Set feature \texttt{onecolumn} for every float list file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*prepare&(book|report)>
+\AtAddToTocList[float]{\setuptoc{\@currext}{onecolumn}}%
+%</prepare&(book|report)>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
% \begin{macro}{\float@@listhead}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Setzt nur die Überschrift und sonst nichts. Dabei wird die Überschrift als
-% einziges Argument übergeben.
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/14}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Setzt nur die Ãœberschrift und sonst nichts. Dabei wird die Ãœberschrift als
+% einziges Argument übergeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\newcommand*{\float@@listhead}{%
%<article> \section*
%<report|book> \chapter*
}
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@dynlist}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neuer Schalter}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@dynlisttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@dynlistfalse}
% Die Wahl der Darstellungsart wird in einem Schalter gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\newif\if@dynlist
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{option}{listof}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/02}{Alle über \textsf{tocbasic} realisierten
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/02}{Alle über \textsf{tocbasic} realisierten
% Einstellungen wirken sich auch auf Verzeichnisse des Besitzers
-% \texttt{float} aus, die erst später unter Kontrolle von
-% \textsf{tocbasic} gestellt werden.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/06/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch
-% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/17}{\cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} durch
-% \cs{KOMAoptions} ersetzt}^^A
-% Dies ist die zentrale Option für die Gleitumgebungsverzeichnisse.
+% \texttt{float} aus, die erst später unter Kontrolle von
+% \textsf{tocbasic} gestellt werden.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/06/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch
+% \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/17}{\cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} durch
+% \cs{KOMAoptions} ersetzt}%^^A
+% Dies ist die zentrale Option für die Gleitumgebungsverzeichnisse.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\KOMA@key{listof}{%
\KOMA@set@ncmdkey{listof}{@tempa}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Es gibt Werte, die dafür sorgen, dass die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen
-% im Inhalsverzeichnis aufgeführt werden. Dazu muss nur \cs{float@@listhead}
+% Es gibt Werte, die dafür sorgen, dass die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen
+% im Inhalsverzeichnis aufgeführt werden. Dazu muss nur \cs{float@@listhead}
% umdefiniert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
{notoc}{0},{nottotoc}{0},{plainheading}{0},%
@@ -318,41 +661,41 @@
{numbered}{2},{totocnumbered}{2},{tocnumbered}{2},{numberedtotoc}{2},%
{numberedtoc}{2},%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann gibt es Optionen für die Darstellungsarten des
+% Dann gibt es Optionen für die Darstellungsarten des
% Inhaltsverzeichnisses. Die Variante \texttt{graduated} ist die altbekannte
% Variante. Bei \texttt{flat} hingegen wird eine tabellenartige Form
% verwendet, bei der die Nummern, Texte und Seitenzahlen jeweils untereinander
-% stehen. Der für die Nummern benötigte Platz wird dabei automatisch
+% stehen. Der für die Nummern benötigte Platz wird dabei automatisch
% ermittelt.
% \begin{macrocode}
{flat}{3},{left}{3},%
{graduated}{4},{indent}{4},{indented}{4},%
% \end{macrocode}
% Dann gibt es eine Option, mit der die Gliederungsebene der Verzeichnisse
-% verändert werden kann.
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/04}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardlevel}}^^A
+% verändert werden kann.
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/12/04}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardlevel}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
{leveldown}{5},
{standardlevel}{6},
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neuer Wert \texttt{entryprefix}}
-% Dann gibt es eine Option, mit der die Einträge in die Verzeichnisse mit
-% einem Prefix versehen werden können, soweit ein solcher Prefix
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neuer Wert \texttt{entryprefix}}
+% Dann gibt es eine Option, mit der die Einträge in die Verzeichnisse mit
+% einem Prefix versehen werden können, soweit ein solcher Prefix
% existiert. Dieser Wert beinhaltet gleichzeitig auch den Wert \texttt{flat}.
% \begin{macrocode}
{entryprefix}{7},
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2014/09/24}{neue Werte \texttt{numberline} und
-% \texttt{nonumberline}}^^A
-% Außerdem können die nicht nummerierten Einträge ggf. ebenfalls mit
-% \cs{numberline} eingerückt werden. Das geht über ein Feature von
+% \changes{v3.12}{2014/09/24}{neue Werte \texttt{numberline} und
+% \texttt{nonumberline}}%^^A
+% Außerdem können die nicht nummerierten Einträge ggf. ebenfalls mit
+% \cs{numberline} eingerückt werden. Das geht über ein Feature von
% \textsf{tocbasic}.
% \begin{macrocode}
{indenttextentries}{8},{indentunnumbered}{8},{numberline}{8},%
{leftaligntextentries}{9},{leftalignunnumbered}{9},{nonumberline}{9}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann gibt es Optionen, für die Unterteilung auf Kapitelebene. Allerdings nur
-% für \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt}.
+% Dann gibt es Optionen, für die Unterteilung auf Kapitelebene. Allerdings nur
+% für \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
,{chapterentry}{10},{withchapterentry}{10},%
@@ -511,69 +854,76 @@
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{listof}{notoc}
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{listof}{graduated}
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{listof}{leftaligntextentries}
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{liststotoc}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8b}{2001/06/26}{Verwendung von \cs{float@headings}}
-% \changes{v2.4a}{1996/03/13}{\cs{listtabelname} durch
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8b}{2001/06/26}{Verwendung von \cs{float@headings}}
+% \changes{v2.4a}{1996/03/13}{\cs{listtabelname} durch
% \cs{listtablename} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{\cs{float@headings} umbenannt in
+% \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{\cs{float@headings} umbenannt in
% \cs{float@listhead}}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{liststotoc}{listof=totoc}
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{liststotocnumbered}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/04/08}{dem langjährigen Druck nachgegeben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/07/07}{Nummerierung im Kolumnentitel}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/04/08}{dem langjährigen Druck nachgegeben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/07/07}{Nummerierung im Kolumnentitel}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{liststotocnumbered}{listof=numbered}
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
%
%
% \begin{option}{listsleft}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{listsindent}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*option>
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{listsleft}{listof=flat}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{listsindent}{listof=graduated}
+%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{option}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{chapteratlists}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{nicht mehr bei \textsf{scrartcl}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/17}{fehlendes \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}^^A
-% ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{nicht mehr bei \textsf{scrartcl}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/17}{fehlendes \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%^^A
+% ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@chaptertolists}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neuer Schalter}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Verzeichnisse werden nicht in Verzeichnisse
-% eingetragen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Verzeichnisse werden nicht in Verzeichnisse
+% eingetragen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@chapterlistsgap}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neues Macro (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neues Macro (intern)}%^^A
% Option, um einzugstellen, ob Kapitel in den Verzeichnissen der
-% Gleitumgebungen Spuren hinterlassen. Man kann wahlweise Lücken einstellen
-% (Voreinstellung mit 10\,pt) oder die Kapitelüberschrift eintragen lassen.
-% Der Schalter gibt dabei an, ob die Kapitelüberschrift eingetragen werden
-% soll. Das interne Hilfsmakro \cs{@chapterlistsgap} enthält den gewünschten
+% Gleitumgebungen Spuren hinterlassen. Man kann wahlweise Lücken einstellen
+% (Voreinstellung mit 10\,pt) oder die Kapitelüberschrift eintragen lassen.
+% Der Schalter gibt dabei an, ob die Kapitelüberschrift eingetragen werden
+% soll. Das interne Hilfsmakro \cs{@chapterlistsgap} enthält den gewünschten
% Abstand.
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*book|report>
+%<*option&(book|report)>
\newcommand*{\@chapterlistsgap}{10\p@}
\newif\if@chaptertolists\@chaptertolistsfalse
\KOMA@key{chapteratlists}[entry]{%
@@ -609,333 +959,39 @@
\BeforeTOCHead{\@chaptertolistsfalse}
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{chapteratlists}{10\p@}%
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{listof}{chaptergapsmall}%
-%</book|report>
+%</option&(book|report)>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{option}
%
-% \iffalse
-%</option>
-%<*body>
-% \fi
-%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für alle Verzeichnisse}
-%
-% Einige Definitionen werden von unterschiedlichen Verzeichnissen
-% verwendet. Diese sind hier zu finden.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\numberline@numberpostfix}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{\cs{autodot} wird darüber eingefügt}
-% Auch in den Verzeichnissen soll ggf. \cs{autodot} quasi als Bestandteil der
-% Nummer ausgegeben werden.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\g@addto@macro{\numberline@numberpostfix}{\autodot}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline@numberpostfix
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{Definition von \textsf{tocbasic} verwenden}
-% Unabhängig vom Stil soll immer die Definition von \textsf{tocbasic}
-% verwendet werden.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usetocbasicnumberline[%
- \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{Redefining `\string\numberline'}%
-]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline
-%
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/02}{einschalten des \texttt{tocbasic}-Features
-% \texttt{chapteratlist} in die Datei \texttt{scrkernel-listsof.dtx} verschoben}
-% Bei Büchern wird für jedes Verzeichnis des Besitzers \texttt{float} das
-% Feature \texttt{chapteratlist} gesetzt. Das gilt auch für solche
-% Verzeichnisse, die noch gar nicht definiert sind.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*book|report>
-\doforeachtocfile[float]{%
- \setuptoc{\@currext}{chapteratlist}%
-}
-\AtAddToTocList[float]{%
- \setuptoc{\@currext}{chapteratlist}%
-}
-%</book|report>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
-% Einige Makros für die Formatierung der Verzeichniseinträge:
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[\cs{@pnumwidth}] ist der Platz für die Seitenzahl.
-% \item[\cs{@tocrmarg}] ist der rechte Rand bei mehrzeiligen
-% Verzeichniseinträgen. Dieser wird hier größer als \cs{@pnumwidth}
-% gewählt.
-% \item[\cs{\@dotsep}] ist der Abstand zwischen den einzelnen
-% Punkten.
-% \end{description}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
-\newcommand*\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
-\newcommand*\@dotsep{4.5}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\before@starttoc}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro führt im Falle von \texttt{tocleft} oder
-% \texttt{listsleft} am Anfang eines Verzeichnisses alle notwendigen
-% Änderungen durch, um das Verzeichnis entsprechend zu handhaben.
-% \begin{macro}{\scr@dottedtocline}
-% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/03}{auch das dritte Argument wird ge"andert}^^A
-% \begin{macro}{\scr@numberline}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{nicht länger benötigt}^^A
-% \begin{macro}{\last@l@number}
-% Dafür werden ein paar Hilfsmakros benötigt, die vorsichtshalber
-% global vordefiniert werden.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\scr@dottedtocline}{}
-\newcommand*{\last@l@number}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@l@number}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% In diesem Makro wird während der Erstellung eines Verzeichnisses
-% Inhaltsverzeichnisses die aktuelle Breite der Nummer gespeichert.
-% \begin{macro}{\set@l@number}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro ist dafür verantwortlich, dass zum einen \cs{@tempdima}
-% für den Aufruf von \cs{numberline@box} auf den richtigen Wert gesetzt
-% wird, zum anderen wird die aktuelle größte Breite der Nummer hier
-% angepasst.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@l@number}{}
-\newcommand*{\set@l@number}[1]{%
- \settowidth{\@tempdima}{#1\enskip}%
- \ifdim\@tempdima >\@l@number
- \xdef\@l@number{\the\@tempdima}%
- \fi%
- \ifdim\@tempdima >\last@l@number \else
- \setlength{\@tempdima}{\last@l@number}%
- \fi%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% Kommen wir endlich zu \cs{before@starttoc}:
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/12}{Initialisierung im \cs{@empty}-Fall}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{statt \cs{numberline} wird \cs{numberline@box}
-% umdefiniert}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\before@starttoc}[1]{%
- \let\scr@dottedtocline=\@dottedtocline
- \renewcommand*{\@dottedtocline}[3]{%
- \scr@dottedtocline{##1}{\z@}{\last@l@number}}%
- \renewcommand*{\numberline@box}[1]{%
- \set@l@number{##1}\hb@xt@\@tempdima{##1}}%
- \gdef\@l@number{\z@}%
- \@ifundefined{#1@l@number}{%
- \def\last@l@number{2em}%
- }{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1@l@number\endcsname\@empty
- \let\last@l@number\z@
- \else
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\last@l@number
- \expandafter=\csname#1@l@number\endcsname
- \fi
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{Vorbereitungen für Verzeichniseintragsstile
-% via \texttt{scrkernel-tocstyle}}^^A
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begingroup
- \def\do@endgroup{\endgroup}%
- \def\do##1{%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@##1@numwidth}{}{%
-%<*trace>
- \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
- Setting numwidth of `##1' to \last@l@number}%
-%</trace>
- \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
- \@namedef{scr@tso@##1@numwidth}{\last@l@number}%
- }%
- }%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@##1@indent}{}{%
-%<*trace>
- \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
- Setting indent of `##1' to \string\z@}%
-%</trace>
- \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
- \@namedef{scr@tso@##1@indent}{\z@}%
- }%
- }%
- }%
- \@nameuse{scr@dte@donumwidth}%
- \do@endgroup
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\after@starttoc}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro schreibt am Ende den entsprechenden Eintrag in die
-% \texttt{aux}-Datei.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\after@starttoc}[1]{%
- \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
- \string\gdef\expandafter\string\csname#1@l@number\endcsname{%
- \@l@number}}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Dafür sorgen, dass die Verzeichnisse von \textsf{tocbasic} so gesetzt
-% werden, wie wir das gerne hätten (wird über einen Trick auch für das
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet):
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\g@addto@macro\tocbasic@@before@hook{%
- \if@dynlist\expandafter\before@starttoc\expandafter{\@currext}\fi
-}
-\g@addto@macro\tocbasic@@after@hook{%
- \if@dynlist\expandafter\after@starttoc\expandafter{\@currext}\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für das Inhaltsverzeichnis}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftocname}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
-% Der Name des Verzeichnisses.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*\contentsname{Contents}
-\newcommand*\listoftocname{\contentsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{Counter}{tocdepth}
-% Der Zähler gibt an, bis zu welcher Gliederungebene Einträge in das
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden. Da \textsf{scrartcl} eine
-% Ebene tiefer beginnt, wird auch eine Ebene tiefer eingetragen. Damit
-% finden sich -- abgesehen von \cs{part} -- immer drei Ebenen im
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<book|report>\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
-%<article>\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{Counter}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\toc@heading}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/28}{auch für \textsf{scrreprt} und
-% \textsf{scrbook}}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \cs{toc@heading} ist nicht
-% länger empfohlen}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%
-% Befehl, zum Setzen der Überschrift des Inhaltsverzeichnisses. Eigentlich
-% ist das überflüssig, weil es nur einmal verwendet wird. Aus Gründen der
-% Konsistenz mit den anderen Verzeichnissen machen wir das hier aber
-% genauso.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*\toc@heading{%
- \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
- usage of deprecated \string\toc@heading!\MessageBreak
- You should use the features of package `tocbasic'\MessageBreak
- instead of \string\toc@heading.\MessageBreak
- Definition of \string\toc@heading\space may be removed from\MessageBreak
- KOMA-Script soon, so it should not be used
- }%
-%<article> \section*{\contentsname}%
-%<book|report> \chapter*{\contentsname}%
- \@mkboth{\MakeMarkcase{\contentsname}}{\MakeMarkcase{\contentsname}}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\toc@l@number}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{neu}^^A
-% Dieses Makro wird innerhalb von \cs{tableofcontents} über
-% \cs{before@starttoc} und \cs{after@starttoc} in der
-% \texttt{aux}-Datei global definiert. Aus Sicherheitsgründen wird es
-% hier global vordefiniert.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\toc@l@number}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{toc@heading}}
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{Gruppe eingefügt und \cs{parskip} auf
-% 0 gesetzt}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}%
-% \cs{@parskip@indent}}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{\cs{if@tocleft} bearbeiten}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/28}{\textsf{article} beachtet ebenfalls
-% \texttt{tocleft}}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
-% ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{auf \textsf{tocbasic} umgestellt}
-% Die Ausgabe des Inhaltsverzeichnisses.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\tableofcontents}{%
- \begingroup
- \let\if@dynlist\if@tocleft
- \expandafter\listoftoc\expandafter{\ext@toc}%
- \endgroup
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocentrydefault}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Verwendung der neuen
-% \texttt{tocbasic}-Anweisung \cs{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}}
-% Seit Version~3.08 werden Einträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis in der
-% Voreinstellung über diese Anweisung vorgenommen. Das erste Argument ist
-% dabei die Gliederungsebene. Das zweite Argument ist die (formatierte)
-% Gliederungsnummer oder leer, falls die Überschrift nicht nummeriert
-% wird. Das dritte Argument ist der Überschriftentext, der in das
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis soll.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\addtocentrydefault}[3]{%
- \expandafter\tocbasic@addxcontentsline\expandafter{\ext@toc}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für die Verzeichnisse der
-% Gleitumgebungen}
%
% \begin{macro}{\float@listhead}
-% \changes{v2.8b}{2001/06/26}{neu (für alle Paketautoren)}%
-% \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{\cs{float@headings} umbenannt in
-% \cs{float@listhead}}%
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{\cs{float@@listhead} wird verwendet}%
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \cs{float@listhead} ist nicht
-% länger empfohlen}%
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%
-% In Absprache mit Anselm Lingnau, dem Autor des Pakets \textsf{float}, wird
-% ab Version 2.8b \cs{float@headings} zum Setzen des Kolumnentitels bei den
-% Verzeichnissen verwendet, die \textsf{float} für neu definierte floats zur
-% Verfügung stellt. Dabei definiert \textsf{float} die Anweisung nur, wenn
-% sie nicht bereits existiert. Die Zusammenarbeit wird dadurch
-% verbessert. Da Anselm sich in letzter Minute entschlossen hat, das Makro
+% \changes{v2.8b}{2001/06/26}{neu (für alle Paketautoren)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{\cs{float@headings} umbenannt in
+% \cs{float@listhead}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{\cs{float@@listhead} wird verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \cs{float@listhead} ist nicht
+% länger empfohlen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% In Absprache mit Anselm Lingnau, dem Autor des Pakets \textsf{float}, wird
+% ab Version 2.8b \cs{float@headings} zum Setzen des Kolumnentitels bei den
+% Verzeichnissen verwendet, die \textsf{float} für neu definierte floats zur
+% Verfügung stellt. Dabei definiert \textsf{float} die Anweisung nur, wenn
+% sie nicht bereits existiert. Die Zusammenarbeit wird dadurch
+% verbessert. Da Anselm sich in letzter Minute entschlossen hat, das Makro
% \cs{float@listhead} zu nennen, wurde dies in Version 2.8g angepasst.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\newcommand*{\float@listhead}[1]{%
\scr@float@listhead@warning
\float@@listhead{#1}%
\@mkboth{\MakeMarkcase{#1}}{\MakeMarkcase{#1}}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{dynamische Anpassung an die Nummer}^^A
-% Dies ist der passende Ort, um die Breite, die für die Nummer des
-% Gleitobjekts benötigt wird zu ermitteln und anzupassen, falls dies
-% geünscht wird. Dazu findet eine lokale Umdefinierung von
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/14}{dynamische Anpassung an die Nummer}%^^A
+% Dies ist der passende Ort, um die Breite, die für die Nummer des
+% Gleitobjekts benötigt wird zu ermitteln und anzupassen, falls dies
+% geünscht wird. Dazu findet eine lokale Umdefinierung von
% \cs{@starttoc} statt. Die Umdefinierung ist deshalb lokal, weil alle
% mir bekannten Verzeichnisse von Gleitobjekten innerhalb einer Gruppe
% ausgegeben werden.
@@ -950,10 +1006,10 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@float@listhead@warning}
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/25}{Text geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/05}{Text korrigiert}^^A
-% Die Warnung für die Verwendung von \cs{float@listhead}, dessen Definition
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/25}{Text geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/05}{Text korrigiert}%^^A
+% Die Warnung für die Verwendung von \cs{float@listhead}, dessen Definition
% irgendwann aus den Klassen verschwinden wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@float@listhead@warning}{%
@@ -974,11 +1030,11 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@float@addtolists@warning}
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/25}{Text geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/05}{Text korrigiert}^^A
-% Die Warnung für die Verwendung von \cs{float@addtolists}, dessen
-% Unterstützung irgendwann aus den Klassen verschwinden wird.
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/25}{Text geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/05}{Text korrigiert}%^^A
+% Die Warnung für die Verwendung von \cs{float@addtolists}, dessen
+% Unterstützung irgendwann aus den Klassen verschwinden wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@float@addtolists@warning}{%
\ClassWarningNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -998,34 +1054,43 @@
}%
\global\let\scr@float@addtolists@warning\relax
}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listfigurename}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{auch als sprachabhängiger Bezeichner}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\listtablename}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{auch als sprachabhängiger Bezeichner}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\listoflofname}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\listoflotname}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\listoflofentryname}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\listoflotentryname}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}^^A
-% Die Namen der Verzeichnisse auch für das Paket \textsf{tocbasic}.
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/03}{neu für Paket \textsf{tocbasic}}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{\cs{renewcommand} statt \cs{newcommand}}%^^A
+% Die Namen der Verzeichnisse auch für das Paket \textsf{tocbasic}.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
\renewcommand*\listfigurename{List of Figures}
+\providecaptionname{american,australian,british,canadian,english,newzealand,%
+ UKenglish,ukenglish,USenglish,usenglish}\listfigurename{List of Figures}
\renewcommand*\listoflofname{\listfigurename}
\renewcommand*\listoflofentryname{\figurename}
\renewcommand*\listtablename{List of Tables}
+\providecaptionname{american,australian,british,canadian,english,newzealand,%
+ UKenglish,ukenglish,USenglish,usenglish}\listtablename{List of Tables}
\renewcommand*\listoflotname{\listtablename}
\renewcommand*\listoflotentryname{\tablename}
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -1035,57 +1100,53 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{lof@heading}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{lof@heading}}%^^A
% \changes{v2.4k}{1996/12/13}{\cs{lof@heading} nicht nur bei
-% \textsf{scrartcl}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{Gruppe eingefügt und \cs{parskip} auf
-% 0 gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}^^A
+% \textsf{scrartcl}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{Gruppe eingefügt und \cs{parskip} auf
+% 0 gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \textsf{tocbasic}}^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \textsf{tocbasic}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/24}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@figure} statt
-% \texttt{lof}}^^A
+% \texttt{lof}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Wird bereits implizit von \cs{DeclareNewTOC}
-% definiert}^^A
+% definiert}%^^A
% Die Ausgabe des Abbildungsverzeichnisses.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@figure}
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Wird bereits implizit von \cs{DeclareNewTOC}
-% im \texttt{default}-Stil definiert}^^A
+% im \texttt{default}-Stil definiert}%^^A
% Befehl zur Formatierung eines Verzeichniseintrags.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{lot@heading}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4k}{1996/12/13}{\cs{lot@heading} nicht nur bei
-% \textsf{scrartcl}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{Gruppe eingefügt und \cs{parskip} auf
-% 0 gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}%
-% \cs{@parskip@indent}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \textsf{tocbasic}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/24}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@table} statt
-% \texttt{lot}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{Verwendung von \cs{lot@heading}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4k}{1996/12/13}{\cs{lot@heading} nicht nur bei
+% \textsf{scrartcl}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{Gruppe eingefügt und \cs{parskip} auf
+% 0 gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}%
+% \cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/04}{Verwendung von \textsf{tocbasic}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/24}{Verwendung von \cs{ext@table} statt
+% \texttt{lot}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Wird bereits implizit von \cs{DeclareNewTOC}
-% definiert}^^A
+% definiert}%^^A
% Die Ausgabe des Tabellenverzeichnisses.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@table}
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{Wird bereits implizit von \cs{DeclareNewTOC}
-% im \texttt{default}-Stil definiert}^^A
+% im \texttt{default}-Stil definiert}%^^A
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \iffalse
-%</body>
-% \fi
-%
-% \iffalse
%</!letter>
% \fi
%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
index 32004b4d36..d6a04c6554 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{722}
+% \CheckSum{769}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx 2995 2018-07-18 06:46:34Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<init>%%% (run: init)
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<execoption>%%% (run: execoption)
@@ -65,9 +65,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-07-18 08:46:34 +0200 (Wed, 18 Jul 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 2995 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3262 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx}%
@@ -79,7 +79,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx}
@@ -104,47 +103,47 @@
%
% \section{Verschiedenes}
%
-% Es gibt eine ganze Menge für das sich einzeln keine eigene Datei
+% Es gibt eine ganze Menge für das sich einzeln keine eigene Datei
% lohnt oder eine Einordnunge schwierig ist. All das nennen wird
% "`Verschiedenes"'.
%
% \subsection{Erweiterung der Internationalisierung}
%
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Anpassung an CJK von Werner Lemberg.}^^A
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Anpassung an CJK von Werner Lemberg.}%^^A
%
% Die Standardnamen wie \cs{figurename} etc. sind nicht immer
-% ausreichend, da manche Sprachen Zählwörter vor oder nach dem
-% jeweiligen Zähler einfügen müssen (man denke da sogar im
+% ausreichend, da manche Sprachen Zählwörter vor oder nach dem
+% jeweiligen Zähler einfügen müssen (man denke da sogar im
% Deutschen an "`Abbildung~1"' und "`Erste Abbildung"'). Desweiteren
-% werden bei manchen Sprachen die Zwischenräume anders gesetzt
-% bzw. sogar ganz unterdrückt.
+% werden bei manchen Sprachen die Zwischenräume anders gesetzt
+% bzw. sogar ganz unterdrückt.
%
% Es gibt drei Ebenen, die man modifizieren kann, um verschiedenste
% Sprachen zu implementieren: Ebene~1 besteht aus den hinl"anglich
% bekannten Makros wie \cs{figurename} und alle weiteren Makros, die
-% z.\,B. \textsf{german} modifiziert. Desweiteren können die Makros
-% \cs{sectfont} etc. etwaige zusätzliche Fonts aktivieren. Ebene~2 ist
-% die zusätzliche Adaptierung von den Zählern selbst (\cs{thesection}
-% könnte z.\,B. chinesische Schriftzeichen ansprechen anstelle von
+% z.\,B. \textsf{german} modifiziert. Desweiteren können die Makros
+% \cs{sectfont} etc. etwaige zusätzliche Fonts aktivieren. Ebene~2 ist
+% die zusätzliche Adaptierung von den Zählern selbst (\cs{thesection}
+% könnte z.\,B. chinesische Schriftzeichen ansprechen anstelle von
% arabischen Ziffern). Die allgemeinste Form der dritten Ebene
% besteht aus den Makros \cs{chaptermarkformat},
-% \cs{sectionmarkformat} etc. welche die Änderung der Reihenfolge von
-% Zähler und Titel sowie die genaue Kontrolle der Zwischenräume
-% etc. ermöglichen.
+% \cs{sectionmarkformat} etc. welche die Änderung der Reihenfolge von
+% Zähler und Titel sowie die genaue Kontrolle der Zwischenräume
+% etc. ermöglichen.
%
-% Für die gängigen Sprachen können alle Makros für die dritte
+% Für die gängigen Sprachen können alle Makros für die dritte
% Ebene identisch definiert werden. Bei Verwendung von "`exotischen"'
-% Sprachen, aber auch speziellen Darstellungen in den gängigen
-% Sprachen können diese Makros umdefiniert werden.
+% Sprachen, aber auch speziellen Darstellungen in den gängigen
+% Sprachen können diese Makros umdefiniert werden.
%
-% Das Konzept für der Internationalisierung mit der dritten Ebene
-% wurde ursprünglich von Werner Lemberg\footnote{Werner Lemberg ist im
+% Das Konzept für der Internationalisierung mit der dritten Ebene
+% wurde ursprünglich von Werner Lemberg\footnote{Werner Lemberg ist im
% InterNet unter \texttt{a7621gac@awiuni11.bitnet} zu erreichen.}
% entwickelt. Die "`caption files"' seines CJK-Pakets
% (\textbf{C}hinesisch, \textbf{J}apanisch, \textbf{K}oreanisch) bauen
-% auf diesem Konzept auf. Damit ist \KOMAScript{} für alle möglichen
-% Sprachanpassungen bestens gerüstet. In der dritten Ebene wird
-% übrigens auch die Einhaltung der DUDEN-Regeln für die
+% auf diesem Konzept auf. Damit ist \KOMAScript{} für alle möglichen
+% Sprachanpassungen bestens gerüstet. In der dritten Ebene wird
+% übrigens auch die Einhaltung der DUDEN-Regeln für die
% Gliederungsnummern realisiert.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -154,8 +153,8 @@
% \fi
% \subsection{Test auf die eine \KOMAScript-Klasse}
%
-% Hier haben wir zunächst ein paar Definitionen speziell für das Paket
-% \textsf{scrletter}, die genau dann benötigt werden, wenn das Paket nicht mit
+% Hier haben wir zunächst ein paar Definitionen speziell für das Paket
+% \textsf{scrletter}, die genau dann benötigt werden, wenn das Paket nicht mit
% einer \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet wird.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -178,9 +177,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setparsizes}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{wird notfalls vereinfacht definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{wird notfalls vereinfacht definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\par@updaterelative}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{wird notfalls vereinfacht definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{wird notfalls vereinfacht definiert}%^^A
% Diese beiden Befehle werden normalerweise von den \KOMAScript-Klassen
% definiert. Wird das Paket mit einer anderen Klasse verwendet, existieren
% sie nicht. Es wird dann eine vereinfachte Definition verwendet.
@@ -192,28 +191,28 @@
}
\providecommand*{\par@updaterelative}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \par@updaterelative
-% \end{macro}^^A \setparsizes
+% \end{macro}%^^A \par@updaterelative
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setparsizes
% \begin{macrocode}
}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@renewforletter}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}^^A
-% Wird wie \cs{renewcommand} verwendet, verzögert die Umdefinierung aber bis
+% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}%^^A
+% Wird wie \cs{renewcommand} verwendet, verzögert die Umdefinierung aber bis
% zu einem optionalen Zeitpunkt. Dazu wird intern
% \cs{scrletter@extra@\meta{macro}} definiert.
% \begin{macro}{\@renewforletter}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\do@renewforletter@list}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}^^A
-% Die do-Liste der später umzudefinierenden Anweisungen.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}%^^A
+% Die do-Liste der später umzudefinierenden Anweisungen.
% \begin{macro}{\do@renewforletter}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2014/04/10}{neu Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{als unbenutzt entfernt}%^^A
% Definiert die in der do-Liste gespeicherten Anweisungen um.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</package&letter>
@@ -228,23 +227,23 @@
%<*option>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für Entwürfe}
+% \subsection{Optionen für Entwürfe}
%
% \begin{option}{draft}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{mit \textsl{keyval} reimplementiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{Beachtung von Option \texttt{overfullrule}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{mit \textsl{keyval} reimplementiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/12}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{Beachtung von Option \texttt{overfullrule}}%^^A
% \begin{option}{final}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{obsolete Option}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{obsolete Option}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
% ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}%^^A
% \changes{v3.02c}{2008/02/17}{optionales Argument im Fall von
% \textsf{scrextend} gesetzt}
% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%
-% Der einzige Unterschied zwischen Entwürfen und Endversionen ist aus
-% Sicht der Klassen, ob Zeilenüberhänge mit einem schwarzen Balken
+% Der einzige Unterschied zwischen Entwürfen und Endversionen ist aus
+% Sicht der Klassen, ob Zeilenüberhänge mit einem schwarzen Balken
% angezeigt werden sollen oder nicht.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class|extend>
@@ -286,8 +285,8 @@
%</class|extend>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{option}{overfullrule}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{new option}^^A
-% \selectlanguage{english}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{new option}%^^A
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
% Because option \texttt{draft} can result in unwanted effects I've added a
% new option to explicite only change the overfull rule setting. However for
% \textsf{scrextend} and the \KOMAScript{} classes the result is the same.
@@ -327,13 +326,13 @@
%</package&extend>
%</class|extend>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \selectlanguage{ngerman}^^A
-% \end{option}^^A overfullrule
-% \end{option}^^A final
-% \end{option}^^A draft
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \end{option}%^^A overfullrule
+% \end{option}%^^A final
+% \end{option}%^^A draft
%
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für Gleichungen}
+% \subsection{Optionen für Gleichungen}
%
% Briefe haben derzeit keine Gleichungen.
% \iffalse
@@ -342,7 +341,7 @@
%
% \begin{option}{leqno}
% \begin{option}{fleqno}
-% Es können Gleichungsnummern links oder linksbündige Gleichungen
+% Es können Gleichungsnummern links oder linksbündige Gleichungen
% eingestellt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!extend>
@@ -357,22 +356,22 @@
%</!letter>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für \texttt{egreg}}
+% \subsection{Optionen für \texttt{egreg}}
%
% \texttt{egreg} hat in einem Kommentar zu
% \url{https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/289853} verlauten lassen, dass
% er \KOMAScript{} u.\,a. deshalb nicht verwendet, weil \KOMAScript{}
-% serifenlose Fonts für Überschriften voreingestellt hat. Er hätte lieber die
-% hässlichen, fetten Antiqua-Fonts. Außerdem reicht es ihm nicht, dass man das
-% einfach per \cs{setkomafont} ändern kann. Er will eine Option dafür. Nun,
+% serifenlose Fonts für Überschriften voreingestellt hat. Er hätte lieber die
+% hässlichen, fetten Antiqua-Fonts. Außerdem reicht es ihm nicht, dass man das
+% einfach per \cs{setkomafont} ändern kann. Er will eine Option dafür. Nun,
% die soll er haben:
%
% \begin{option}{egegdoesnotlikesansseriftitles}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{neu (speziell)}
-% \changes{v3.20a}{2016/05/19}{auch in der Briefklasse}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{neu (speziell)}
+% \changes{v3.20a}{2016/05/19}{auch in der Briefklasse}
% \begin{macro}{\@gr@gsffamily}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{neu (intern)}
-% \changes{v3.20a}{2016/05/19}{auch in der Briefklasse}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20a}{2016/05/19}{auch in der Briefklasse}
% Schaltet je nach Einstellung von Option
% \texttt{egegdoesnotlikesansseriftitles} entweder auf \cs{sffamily} um oder
% eben nicht.
@@ -384,8 +383,8 @@
}
%</!(package&letter)>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@gr@gsffamily
-% \end{option}^^A egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@gr@gsffamily
+% \end{option}%^^A egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles
%
% \iffalse
%</option>
@@ -393,24 +392,24 @@
% \fi
%
%
-% \subsection{Standardeinstellungen für die Optionen}
+% \subsection{Standardeinstellungen für die Optionen}
%
-% Am Ende aller Optionen wird zunächst die Standardeinstellungen der
-% Optionen vorgenommen und dann alle Optionen ausgeführt. Dies
-% geschieht zwischen den Optionen und dem Körper dieser Datei.
+% Am Ende aller Optionen wird zunächst die Standardeinstellungen der
+% Optionen vorgenommen und dann alle Optionen ausgeführt. Dies
+% geschieht zwischen den Optionen und dem Körper dieser Datei.
%
-% Es müssen die Standardoptionen festgelegt und alle Optionen
-% ausgewählt werden.
+% Es müssen die Standardoptionen festgelegt und alle Optionen
+% ausgewählt werden.
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Verwendung von \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} an
% Stelle von \cs{KOMAoptions} und \cs{KOMAProcessOptions} an Stelle von
% \cs{ProcessOptions}}
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Optionen, die der Voreinstellung ohnehin
-% entsprechen, werden nicht explizit gesetzt}^^A
+% entsprechen, werden nicht explizit gesetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/18}{Option \texttt{twoside} bei den
% Voreinstellungen rausgenommen}
% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{Option \texttt{headings!=big} zu den
-% Voreinstellungen hinzugefügt}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/03/04}{Option \texttt{headings!=big} nicht für die
+% Voreinstellungen hinzugefügt}
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/03/04}{Option \texttt{headings!=big} nicht für die
% Briefklasse}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -429,10 +428,10 @@
% \fi
%
%
-% \subsection{Temporäre Umschaltung zwischen ein- und zweispaltigem
+% \subsection{Temporäre Umschaltung zwischen ein- und zweispaltigem
% Satz}
%
-% Briefe sind immer einspaltig, benötigen also den Schalter nicht.
+% Briefe sind immer einspaltig, benötigen also den Schalter nicht.
% \iffalse
%<*!letter>
% \fi
@@ -441,11 +440,11 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@restonecoltrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@restonecolfalse}
% Damit innerhalb einer Umgebung lokal auf ein- oder zweispaltigen
-% Satz umgeschaltet werden kann, wird ein Schalter benötigt. Dieser
-% wird dann dafür verwendet, sich zu merken, dass eine Umschaltung
+% Satz umgeschaltet werden kann, wird ein Schalter benötigt. Dieser
+% wird dann dafür verwendet, sich zu merken, dass eine Umschaltung
% stattgefunden hat und am Ende der Umgebung wieder aufzuheben
% ist. Der Schalter wird nicht in Umgebungen verwendet, die
-% geschachtelt werden. Verwendung findet er beispielsweise für
+% geschachtelt werden. Verwendung findet er beispielsweise für
% Titelseiten und das Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!extend>
@@ -466,7 +465,7 @@
%</!letter>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für den schlauen Spruch}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für den schlauen Spruch}
%
% Den schlauen Spruch gibt es nicht bei Briefen.
% \iffalse
@@ -474,34 +473,34 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\dictum}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{def} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/04/19}{zur Vermeidung von Problemen durch
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{\cs{edef} durch \cs{def} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/04/19}{zur Vermeidung von Problemen durch
% \cs{raggeddictum} Gruppe eingef"ugt}
% \begin{macro}{\dictumwidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\raggeddictum}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\raggeddictumtext}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\raggeddictumauthor}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{dictum}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neues Element}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{\cs{sffamily} durch \cs{@gr@gsffamily}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neues Element}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{\cs{sffamily} durch \cs{@gr@gsffamily}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{dictumtext}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neues Element}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neues Element}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{dictumauthor}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neues Element}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neues Element}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\dictumauthorformat}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/20/04}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\dictumrule}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/02}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/02}{neu}%^^A
% Ein \emph{dictum} ist ein Spruch. Er besteht aus dem Spruch selbst
-% und verfügt optional über einen Autor, der dann mit einer Linie
+% und verfügt optional über einen Autor, der dann mit einer Linie
% abgetrennt wird. Gibt es keinen Autor, gibt es auch keine Linie. Die
-% Schriften für Autor und Spruch können getrennt voneinander
+% Schriften für Autor und Spruch können getrennt voneinander
% eingestellt werden. Die Anordnung des Spruchs wird durch
% \cs{raggeddictumtext} gesetzt. Die des Autors durch
% \cs{raggeddictumauthor}. Die Formatierung selbst geschieht mit dem
@@ -548,7 +547,7 @@
%</!letter>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Längen für Minipages und Rahmen}
+% \subsection{Längen für Minipages und Rahmen}
%
% \begin{Length}{@mpfootins}
% \begin{Length}{fboxsep}
@@ -577,14 +576,15 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/26}{\cs{relax} replaced by percent}%^^A
% Darstellung der Gleichungsnummer:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!extend>
%<book|report>\@addtoreset{equation}{chapter}
\renewcommand*\theequation{%
%<*book>
- \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}\relax
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}%
\if@mainmatter\thechapter.\fi
\else
%</book>
@@ -604,21 +604,21 @@
% Seiten}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifthispageodd}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu}^^A
-% Häufig wird mit \cs{ifodd}\cs{value\{page\}} getestet, ob man sich
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu}%^^A
+% Häufig wird mit \cs{ifodd}\cs{value\{page\}} getestet, ob man sich
% gerade auf einer rechten oder einer linken Seite
% befindet. Dummerweise funktioniert das aber genaugenommen nur
-% zufällig manchmal. Ob man sich auf einer linken oder einer rechten
-% Seite befindet, ergibt sich nämlich erst bei der Ausgabe. Deshalb
-% wird hier ein Makro definiert, das über eine Art Label-Mechanismus
+% zufällig manchmal. Ob man sich auf einer linken oder einer rechten
+% Seite befindet, ergibt sich nämlich erst bei der Ausgabe. Deshalb
+% wird hier ein Makro definiert, das über eine Art Label-Mechanismus
% arbeitet. Es werden bewusst keine echten \cs{label} und \cs{pageref}
% verwendet, weil diese Befehle von verschiedenen Paketen manipuliert
% werden.
%
% \begin{macro}{\new@tpo@label}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/28}{verwendet jetzt \cs{@newl@bel}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/25}{use after definition in \texttt{aux}-file}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/28}{verwendet jetzt \cs{@newl@bel}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/25}{use after definition in \texttt{aux}-file}%^^A
% Definition eines neuen \emph{true}-\emph{page}-\emph{odd} Labels.
% Wird in der \texttt{aux}-Datei verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -635,8 +635,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@tpo}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Es wird ein Zähler benötigt, der die aktuelle Nummer der Anfrage
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Es wird ein Zähler benötigt, der die aktuelle Nummer der Anfrage
% beinhaltet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@tpo}{0}
@@ -644,22 +644,22 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\is@thispageodd}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{renamed \cs{if@thispageodd}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/28}{basiert nun auf \cs{@newl@bel}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{in zwei Anweisungen ausgeteilt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{renamed \cs{if@thispageodd}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/28}{basiert nun auf \cs{@newl@bel}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{in zwei Anweisungen ausgeteilt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\is@thispageodd@setlabel}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/25}{schreibe in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur
-% \cs{if@filesw}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{Macro leert sich nach Benutzung selbst}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/25}{schreibe in die \texttt{aux}-Datei nur
+% \cs{if@filesw}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{Macro leert sich nach Benutzung selbst}%^^A
% Diese Makros machen die eigentliche Arbeit. Sie funktionieren nicht wie
% ein normales \cs{iffalse} oder \cs{iftrue}, denn es kann nicht
% geschachtelt innerhalb anderer \cs{if\dots} \dots \cs{fi}
-% Klammerungen verwendet werden. Es sollte daher niemals außerhalb von
-% \cs{ifthispageodd} verwendet werden. Da über die \texttt{aux}-Datei
+% Klammerungen verwendet werden. Es sollte daher niemals außerhalb von
+% \cs{ifthispageodd} verwendet werden. Da über die \texttt{aux}-Datei
% gearbeitet wird, funktioniert das Ganze nur, wenn die Datei auch
-% geschrieben wird und min. zwei \LaTeX-Läufe erfolgen.
+% geschrieben wird und min. zwei \LaTeX-Läufe erfolgen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\is@thispageodd}[1][\is@thispageodd@setlabel]{%
\@bsphack
@@ -700,7 +700,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifthispagewasodd}
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/20}{neuer Schalter}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/20}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\thispagewasoddtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\thispagewasoddfalse}
% Dieser Schalter speichert auf Rolf Niepraschks speziellen Wunsch die
@@ -730,20 +730,20 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für tiefer gestellten Text}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für tiefer gestellten Text}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textsubscript}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@textsubscript}
-% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8h}{2001/07/19}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/05}{\cs{providecommand} statt \cs{newcommand},
% damit das auch noch funktioniert, wenn \textsf{scrextend} nach
-% \textsf{fixltx2e} geladen wird}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{wird nur noch definiert, wenn nicht vorhanden}^^A
+% \textsf{fixltx2e} geladen wird}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{wird nur noch definiert, wenn nicht vorhanden}%^^A
% Im \LaTeX-Kern wird zwar ein Makro \cs{textsuperscript} definiert,
-% um Texte hochstellen zu können, die entsprechende Anweisung zum
+% um Texte hochstellen zu können, die entsprechende Anweisung zum
% Tiefstellen fehlt jedoch. Das wird hier nachgeholt, wobei nahezu
-% unverändert auf die Definition aus dem \LaTeX-Kern zurückgegriffen
+% unverändert auf die Definition aus dem \LaTeX-Kern zurückgegriffen
% wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class|extend>
@@ -767,18 +767,18 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Unsichtbare Stütze}
+% \subsection{Unsichtbare Stütze}
% \label{sec:strut}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@endstrut}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Wird am Ende eines vermutlich horizontalen Materials eine unsichtbare Stütze
-% der Art \cs{strut} eingebaut, werden Leerzeichen, die davor stehen plötzlich
-% zu Leerzeichen in der Ausgabe, auch wenn das gar nicht erwünscht wird. Das
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Wird am Ende eines vermutlich horizontalen Materials eine unsichtbare Stütze
+% der Art \cs{strut} eingebaut, werden Leerzeichen, die davor stehen plötzlich
+% zu Leerzeichen in der Ausgabe, auch wenn das gar nicht erwünscht wird. Das
% kann man verhindern, indem man \cs{unskip} davor setzt. Dummer Weise hat
-% eine solche Stütze dann aber das Problem, dass das letzte Wort davor nicht
-% mehr getrennt wird. Verrückter Weise kann man das wiederum mit \cs{nobreak}
-% lösen. Das sollte dann auch nur im horizontalen Modus gemacht werden.
+% eine solche Stütze dann aber das Problem, dass das letzte Wort davor nicht
+% mehr getrennt wird. Verrückter Weise kann man das wiederum mit \cs{nobreak}
+% lösen. Das sollte dann auch nur im horizontalen Modus gemacht werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class|letter|extend>
\providecommand*{\scr@endstrut}{\unskip\ifhmode\nobreak\strut\fi}
@@ -791,26 +791,26 @@
% \subsection{Warnung vor Paketen}
% \label{sec:packagewarning}
%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/08}{neue Warnungen vor bestimmten Paketen}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/08}{neue Warnungen vor bestimmten Paketen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@package@not@recommended}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/08}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/08}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Beim Laden verschiedener Pakete wird nun eine Warnung ausgegeben. In der
% Regel mit einer Alternativempfehlung.
% \begin{macro}{\class@shoulddisablepackagewarning@list}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/06/25}{neu (nur für Klassenautoren)}^^A
-% Ab \KOMAScript~3.24 ist für Klassenautoren und nur für diese dokumentiert,
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/06/25}{neu (nur für Klassenautoren)}%^^A
+% Ab \KOMAScript~3.24 ist für Klassenautoren und nur für diese dokumentiert,
% dass bei Vorhandensein des Makros
-% \cs{class@shoulddisablepackagewarning@list} während dem Laden der
-% \KOMAScript-Klasse für nicht empfohlene Pakete ein
+% \cs{class@shoulddisablepackagewarning@list} während dem Laden der
+% \KOMAScript-Klasse für nicht empfohlene Pakete ein
% \cs{in@}-Vergleich gegen genau den Inhalt dieses Makros stattfindet. Wird
% der Paketname dabei gefunden, so unterbleibt das Absetzen der Warnung. Zur
-% korrekten Syntax des zweiten Arguments von \cs{in@} sei ausdrücklich auf den
+% korrekten Syntax des zweiten Arguments von \cs{in@} sei ausdrücklich auf den
% Kernel hingewiesen. Ebenso sind Klassenautoren verantwortlich, eine bereits
-% vorhandene Liste nicht einfach zu überschreiben, sondern korrekt zu
-% ergänzen! Eine Definition von \cs{class@shoulddisablepackagewarning@list}
+% vorhandene Liste nicht einfach zu überschreiben, sondern korrekt zu
+% ergänzen! Eine Definition von \cs{class@shoulddisablepackagewarning@list}
% nach dem Laden der \KOMAScript-Klasse ist wirkungslos. Da diese
% Schnittstelle Klassenautoren vorbehalten bleiben soll, die wissen, was sie
-% tun, gibt es keine weitergehende Dokumentation dazu und natürlich auch kein
+% tun, gibt es keine weitergehende Dokumentation dazu und natürlich auch kein
% Beispiel.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -837,13 +837,13 @@
}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \class@shoulddisablepackagewarning@list
+% \end{macro}%^^A \class@shoulddisablepackagewarning@list
%
-% \textsf{emptypage} wird nicht benötigt, weil es bereits entsprechende
-% Einstellungen in \KOMAScript{} gibt. Darüber hinaus verwendet es
+% \textsf{emptypage} wird nicht benötigt, weil es bereits entsprechende
+% Einstellungen in \KOMAScript{} gibt. Darüber hinaus verwendet es
% \cs{thispagestyle} an Stelle von \cs{pagestyle} in einer Gruppe, was
-% dazu führen kann, dass nach einem \cs{cleardoublepage}, das keine leere
-% Seite erzeugt, die nächste Seite den entsprechenden Seitenstil bekommt.
+% dazu führen kann, dass nach einem \cs{cleardoublepage}, das keine leere
+% Seite erzeugt, die nächste Seite den entsprechenden Seitenstil bekommt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@package@not@recommended{emptypage}{%
option\MessageBreak
@@ -854,7 +854,7 @@
% \textsf{fancyhdr} verwendet veraltete Font-Befehle und beachtet die
% Font-Einstellungen und diverse andere Befehle und Optionen von \KOMAScript{}
% nicht.
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/06/25}{improved \textsf{fancyhdr} warning}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/06/25}{improved \textsf{fancyhdr} warning}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@package@not@recommended{fancyhdr}{%
\MessageBreak
@@ -867,18 +867,18 @@
explicite user intervention to work}
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/04}{Verwendung von \textsf{minitoc} kann nicht
-% empfohlen werden}^^A
-% \textsf{minitoc} definiert u.\,a. \cs{@sect} hart um und zerstört so diverse
-% Erweiterungen von \KOMAScript. Es ist nicht abschließend untersucht, was das
-% Paket noch alles zerstört. Derzeit gibt es nur einen Workaround für das
+% empfohlen werden}%^^A
+% \textsf{minitoc} definiert u.\,a. \cs{@sect} hart um und zerstört so diverse
+% Erweiterungen von \KOMAScript. Es ist nicht abschließend untersucht, was das
+% Paket noch alles zerstört. Derzeit gibt es nur einen Workaround für das
% genannte Problem mit \cs{@sect} (siehe:
% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:packageworkarounds}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@package@not@recommended{minitoc}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \selectlanguage{english}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/18}{\textsf{multitoc} not recommended}^^A
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/18}{\textsf{multitoc} not recommended}%^^A
% \textsf{multitoc} not recommended, because up to version 2.01 it breaks all
% additional list-ofs and even table of contents, list of figures and list of
% tables, if option \texttt{toc}, \texttt{lof} or \texttt{lot} has not been
@@ -905,10 +905,10 @@
}
%</!letter>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \selectlanguage{ngerman}^^A
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
-% \textsf{parskip} ist nur ein Notfallpaket für Klassen, die selbst keinen
-% Absatzabstand unterstützen.
+% \textsf{parskip} ist nur ein Notfallpaket für Klassen, die selbst keinen
+% Absatzabstand unterstützen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@package@not@recommended{parskip}{%
option\MessageBreak
@@ -916,7 +916,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/21}{Verwendung von \textsf{titleps} kann nicht
-% empfohlen werden}^^A
+% empfohlen werden}%^^A
% \textsf{titleps} beachtet die Font-Einstellungen und diverse andere Befehle
% und Optionen von \KOMAScript{} nicht.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -924,22 +924,55 @@
package `scrlayer-scrpage'}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \textsf{titlesec} beschädigt diverse \KOMAScript{} Erweiterungen und
-% benötigt eigene Workarounds (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:packageworkarounds}),
+% \textsf{titlesec} beschädigt diverse \KOMAScript{} Erweiterungen und
+% benötigt eigene Workarounds (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:packageworkarounds}),
% so dass es einfach nicht gut mit \KOMAScript{} harmoniert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*!letter>
+%<*ignorethis>
\scr@package@not@recommended{titlesec}{%
the package only\MessageBreak
if you really need it, because it breaks several\MessageBreak
KOMA-Script features, i.e., option `headings' and\MessageBreak
the extended optional argument of the section\MessageBreak
commands}
+%</ignorethis>
%</!letter>
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \selectlanguage{english}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{Usage of \textsf{tocbibind} not recommended}^^A
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{\textsf{sectsty} up to v2.0.2 is
+% incompatible}%^^A
+% \textsf{sectsty} up to version 2.0.2 uses internal commands of
+% \KOMAScript{}, that has been removed already 2001 in \KOMAScript{} 2.8e. So
+% it was never compatible with \KOMAScript~3.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!letter>
+\AfterPackage*{sectsty}{%
+ \@ifpackagelater{sectsty}{2002/02/26}{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{Unknown `sectsty' release.\MessageBreak
+ Cross your fingers, that is compatible%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Incompatible package `sectsty' loaded!\MessageBreak
+ Package `sectsty' up to version 2.0.2 is incompatible\MessageBreak
+ with KOMA-Script from version 2.8e released in 2001.\MessageBreak
+ You should avoid that package and configure the\MessageBreak
+ section titles of your document using the KOMA-Script\MessageBreak
+ user interface, e.g., \string\chapterlinesformat,\MessageBreak
+ \string\RedeclareSectionCommand\space etc. or you should ask\MessageBreak
+ the `sectsty' maintainer for a more compatible release.\MessageBreak
+ Ignoring this warning could result in several error\MessageBreak
+ messages and formatting issues after loading package\MessageBreak
+ `sectsty'%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+%</!letter>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{Usage of \textsf{tocbibind} not recommended}%^^A
% \textsf{tocbibind} does several things, that break \KOMAScript, i.e.:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item usage of \cs{MakeUppercase} within running heads,
@@ -964,7 +997,7 @@
%</!letter>
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/18}{Usage of \textsf{tocloft} not recommended}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/18}{Usage of \textsf{tocloft} not recommended}%^^A
% \textsf{tocloft} does redefine \cs{tableofcontents}, \cs{listoffigures},
% \cs{listoftables}, \cs{l@part} \dots{} \cs{l@subparagraph} and breaks
% \KOMAScript, i.e.:
@@ -1005,18 +1038,18 @@
%</!letter>
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \selectlanguage{ngerman}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@package@not@recommended
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@package@not@recommended
%
-% \subsection{Workarounds für fremde Pakete}
+% \subsection{Workarounds für fremde Pakete}
% \label{sec:packageworkarounds}
%
% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/04}{\textsf{minitoc} verursacht ein schwerwiegendes
-% Problem}^^A
+% Problem}%^^A
% Das Paket \textsf{minitoc} verursacht ein schwerwiegendes Problem indem es
% \cs{@sect} hart umdefiniert, ohne zuvor zu testen, ob die Definition den
% Erwartungen entspricht. Ich werde hier einmal versuchen, mich darum herum zu
-% lavieren. Eine wirklich gute Lösung ist das sicher nicht. Man sollte das
+% lavieren. Eine wirklich gute Lösung ist das sicher nicht. Man sollte das
% Paket schlicht besser nicht mit \KOMAScript{} zusammen verwenden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -1118,15 +1151,16 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/10/09}{\textsf{titlesec} hat ein schwerwiegendes
-% Problem}^^A
+% Problem}%^^A
% Das Paket \textsf{titlesec} hat ein schwerwiegendes Problem, wenn
-% Überschriften nicht per \cs{@startsection} definiert sind. Ich werde hier
-% einmal versuchen, mich darum herum zu lavieren. Eine wirklich gute Lösung
+% Ãœberschriften nicht per \cs{@startsection} definiert sind. Ich werde hier
+% einmal versuchen, mich darum herum zu lavieren. Eine wirklich gute Lösung
% ist das sicher nicht. Man sollte das Paket schlicht besser nicht mit
% \KOMAScript{} zusammen verwenden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%<*!letter>
+%<*ignorethis>
\BeforePackage{titlesec}{%
\let\scr@ttl@saved@section\section
\let\scr@ttl@saved@subsection\subsection
@@ -1134,15 +1168,31 @@
\let\scr@ttl@saved@paragraph\paragraph
\let\scr@ttl@saved@subparagraph\subparagraph
}
+%</ignorethis>
\AfterPackage{titlesec}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Hack getestet mit \textsf{titlesec} 2011/12/15 v2.10.0 bis 2016/03/21
% v2.10.2. Daher bis zu diesem Datum freigeschaltet.
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/22}{\textsf{titlesec}-Hack auch für Version
-% 2016/03/15}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/24}{\textsf{titlesec}-Hack auch für Version
-% 2016/03/21}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/22}{\textsf{titlesec}-Hack auch für Version
+% 2016/03/15}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/24}{\textsf{titlesec}-Hack auch für Version
+% 2016/03/21}%^^A
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/23}{\textsf{titlesec} does not support KOMA-Script
+% classes}%^^A
+% After several years \textsf{titlesec} still does not really support
+% \KOMAScript{} classes and \KOMAScript{} would still need an ugly hack using
+% internal \texttt{titlesec} macros and deactivating several features of
+% \KOMAScript{} to make the package work. So IMO the better solution is to
+% remove such hacks from the \KOMAScript{} classes. Maybe the
+% \textsf{titlesec} author will support the \KOMAScript{} classes in some
+% future, maybe not. Maybe \textsf{scrhack} will provide an ugly workaround to
+% make \texttt{titlesec} work in any kind with \KOMAScript{} classes. But the
+% classes are the wrong place to provide such hacks. However, if you need such
+% a hack, see the following code, that is not longer used or supported or copy
+% the section commands code from a standard class.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ignorethis>
\@ifpackagelater{titlesec}{2016/03/22}{%
\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
Deactivating the `titlesec' workaround,\MessageBreak
@@ -1202,7 +1252,35 @@
\let\scr@ttl@saved@subparagraph\relax
\let\scr@ttl@@extract\relax
}%
+%</ignorethis>
+ \@ifpackagelater{titlesec}{2019/07/17}{%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{Unknown `titesec' release.\MessageBreak
+ Cross your fingers, that is compatible%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \scr@class@titlesec@warning
+ }%
}
+\providecommand*{\scr@class@titlesec@warning}{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of this version of package `titlesec'\MessageBreak
+ with KOMA-Script class `\KOMAClassName' is\MessageBreak
+ not recommended, because the package does not\MessageBreak
+ support KOMA-Script classes, but break them.\MessageBreak
+ If you want to use `titlesec' with KOMA-Script\MessageBreak
+ classes instead of using the KOMA-Script's\MessageBreak
+ user interface to configure the headings of\MessageBreak
+ parts,
+%<!article> chapters, sections
+%<article> sections, subsections
+ ... subparagraphs,\MessageBreak
+ please ask the author of `titlesec' for support.\MessageBreak
+ Expect errors like:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- ``Illegal unit of measure (pt inserted).''\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- ``Missing number, treated as zero''\MessageBreak
+ after loading `titlesec'%
+ }%
+}
%</!letter>
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
index 208e4563a8..1ff0726448 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,7 @@
-% \CheckSum{3388}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +19,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-notepaper.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +54,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-notepaper.dtx 3044 2018-11-16 19:00:32Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-notepaper.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +62,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-11-16 20:00:32 +0100 (Fri, 16 Nov 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1767 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +76,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-notepaper.dtx}
@@ -103,8 +101,8 @@
%
% Bei Briefen kommt dem Briefbogen, also dem ersten Blatt des Briefes eine
% besondere Bedeutung zu. Dieser ist bei \texttt{scrlttr2} durch diverse
-% Optionen, Variablen, Pseudo-Längen und Anweisungen bestimmt. Die weiteren
-% Briefseiten werden hier verinfacht als das Briefpapier bezeichnet. Natürlich
+% Optionen, Variablen, Pseudo-Längen und Anweisungen bestimmt. Die weiteren
+% Briefseiten werden hier verinfacht als das Briefpapier bezeichnet. Natürlich
% ist genau genommen auch der Briefbogen Briefpapier, aber eben ein besonderes.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -117,25 +115,25 @@
%<*letter>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Option für den Briefbogen}
+% \subsection{Option für den Briefbogen}
%
% Gerade der Briefbogen ist durch eine ganze Anzahl von Optionen
% konfigurierbar. Daher wird hier weiter thematisch untergliedert.
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Briefkopf}
+% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Briefkopf}
%
% Die Gestaltung des Briefkopfes war bei der alten \texttt{scrlettr}
-% Klasse eng begrenzt. Deshalb hatte ich für mich selbst das
+% Klasse eng begrenzt. Deshalb hatte ich für mich selbst das
% \texttt{briefkopf} Paket geschrieben und ohne Support
-% veröffentlicht. Die Funktionalität ist nun direkt verfügbar. Dazu
-% werden verschiedene Optionen benötigt.
+% veröffentlicht. Die Funktionalität ist nun direkt verfügbar. Dazu
+% werden verschiedene Optionen benötigt.
%
% \begin{option}{firsthead}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/22}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/22}{Neu}%^^A
% Der Briefkopf kann auch einfach abgeschaltet werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@firsthead}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
% Voreingestellt ist die Verwendung des Briefkopfes.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -146,26 +144,26 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{fromalign}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% Diese Option legt fest, ob der Absender linksbündig, mittig oder
-% rechtsbündig gesetzt werden soll.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% Diese Option legt fest, ob der Absender linksbündig, mittig oder
+% rechtsbündig gesetzt werden soll.
% \begin{macro}{\@alignfrom}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/13}{neue Werte für Verwendung der
-% Absenderergänzung}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/13}{neue Werte für Verwendung der
+% Absenderergänzung}%^^A
% Die Einstellung wird in einem nummerisch auszuwertenden Makro
% gespeichert. Dabei gelten folgende Werte:
% \begin{center}
% \begin{tabular}{rl}
% Wert & Ausrichtung \\\hline
-% 0 & linksbündig \\
+% 0 & linksbündig \\
% 1 & zentriert \\
-% 2 & rechtsbündig \\
-% 3 & linksbündig in der Absenderergänzung ohne Kopf \\
-% 4 & rechtbündig in der Absenderergänzung ohne Kopf \\
+% 2 & rechtsbündig \\
+% 3 & linksbündig in der Absenderergänzung ohne Kopf \\
+% 4 & rechtbündig in der Absenderergänzung ohne Kopf \\
% 10000 & nicht antasten \\
% \end{tabular}
% \end{center}
@@ -198,12 +196,12 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{fromrule}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% Es kann gewählt werden, ob im Absender nach dem Namen oder nach dem
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% Es kann gewählt werden, ob im Absender nach dem Namen oder nach dem
% gesamten Absender eine Linie gesetzt werden soll.
% \begin{macro}{\@rulefrom}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Die Einstellung wird in einem nummerisch auszuwertenden Makro
% gespeichert. Dabei gelten folgende Werte:
% \begin{center}
@@ -229,15 +227,15 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{fromphone}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Ob die Telefonnummer im Absender gesetzt werden soll oder nicht,
% kann hier angegeben werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@phone}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@phonetrue}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@phonefalse}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
% Voreingestellt ist keine Telefonnummer im Absender.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -249,15 +247,15 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{frommobilephone}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}%^^A
% Ob die Handynummer im Absender gesetzt werden soll oder nicht,
% kann hier angegeben werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@mobilephone}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@mobilephonetrue}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@mobilephonefalse}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
% Voreingestellt ist keine Handynummer im Absender.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -269,15 +267,15 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{fromfax}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Ob die Faxnummer im Absender gesetzt werden soll oder nicht,
% kann hier angegeben werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@fax}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@faxtrue}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@faxfalse}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
% Voreingestellt ist keine Faxnummer im Absender.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -289,15 +287,15 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{fromemail}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Ob die E-Mail-Adresse im Absender gesetzt werden soll oder nicht,
% kann hier angegeben werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@email}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@emailtrue}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@emailfalse}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
% Voreingestellt ist keine E-Mail-Adresse im Absender.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -309,15 +307,15 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{fromurl}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Ob die URL auf eine Homepage im Absender gesetzt werden soll oder
% nicht, kann hier angegeben werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@www}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@wwwtrue}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@wwwfalse}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
% Voreingestellt ist keine URL im Absender.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -329,15 +327,15 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{fromlogo}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Ob ein Logo in den Briefkopf gesetzt werden soll oder
% nicht, kann hier angegeben werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@logo}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@logotrue}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@logofalse}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
% Voreingestellt ist kein Logo im Briefkopf.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -349,23 +347,23 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Optionen für Anschrift und Absenderergänzung}
+% \subsubsection{Optionen für Anschrift und Absenderergänzung}
%
% \begin{option}{addrfield}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neue Werte}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% Das Adressfeld für Fensterumschläge kann mit \texttt{addrfield} ein- und
-% ausgeschaltet werden. Darüber hinaus kann die Art des Adressfeldes gewählt
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neue Werte}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% Das Adressfeld für Fensterumschläge kann mit \texttt{addrfield} ein- und
+% ausgeschaltet werden. Darüber hinaus kann die Art des Adressfeldes gewählt
% werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@afield}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{ersetzt durch \cs{@afieldmode}}
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{ersetzt durch \cs{@afieldmode}}
% \begin{macro}{\@afieldtrue}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{ersetzt durch \cs{@afieldmode}}
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{ersetzt durch \cs{@afieldmode}}
% \begin{macro}{\@afieldfalse}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{ersetzt durch \cs{@afieldmode}}
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{ersetzt durch \cs{@afieldmode}}
% \begin{macro}{\@afieldmode}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Die Speicherung erfolgt wiederum in einem Makro.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -427,13 +425,13 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{priority}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% Im internationalen Briefverkehr sind zwei Prioritätseinstellungen
-% bekannt. Dafür gibt es dann so etwas wie eine Versandart nicht mehr.
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% Im internationalen Briefverkehr sind zwei Prioritätseinstellungen
+% bekannt. Dafür gibt es dann so etwas wie eine Versandart nicht mehr.
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@priority}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Abgelegt wird die Art der Priorität in einem Macro.
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Abgelegt wird die Art der Priorität in einem Macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@ncmdkey{priority}[A]{ltr@priority}{%
{no}{0},{off}{0},{false}{0},{manual}{1},%
@@ -453,20 +451,20 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{backaddress}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/22}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{3015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% Im Adressfeld kann die Rücksendeadresse gesetzt werden. Dies geschieht nun
-% nicht mehr allein durch Definition einer Rücksendeadresse, sondern auch
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/22}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{3015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% Im Adressfeld kann die Rücksendeadresse gesetzt werden. Dies geschieht nun
+% nicht mehr allein durch Definition einer Rücksendeadresse, sondern auch
% durch eine Option.
% \begin{macro}{\if@baddr}
% \begin{macro}{\@baddrtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@baddrfalse}
% \begin{macro}{\backaddr@format}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/31}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/31}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Dieses Makro hat genau ein Argument und bestimmt die Form der
-% Rücksendeadresse. Voreingestellt ist Unterstreichung. Dies entspricht der
+% Rücksendeadresse. Voreingestellt ist Unterstreichung. Dies entspricht der
% vor Version~2.96 festen Voreinstellung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\backaddr@format}[1]{}
@@ -540,13 +538,13 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{locfield}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/03/30}{vertauschte Bedeutung korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/03/30}{vertauschte Bedeutung korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
% Mit Hilfe der Optione \texttt{locfield} kann der Platz neben dem Adressfeld
-% groß oder klein gewählt werden.
+% groß oder klein gewählt werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@bigloc}
% \begin{macro}{\@bigloctrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@biglocfalse}
@@ -588,9 +586,9 @@
}{locfield}{narrow}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{option}{wlocfield}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{slocfield}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{wlocfield}{locfield=wide}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{slocfield}{locfield=narrow}
@@ -600,16 +598,16 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Optionen für Faltmarken}
+% \subsubsection{Optionen für Faltmarken}
%
% \begin{option}{foldmarks}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/10}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/06/06}{es muss \cs{FamilyUnkownKeyVal} statt
-% \cs{KOMA@unkown@keyval} lokal umdefiniert werden}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% Die Faltmarken können mit \texttt{foldmarks} aktiviert und deaktiviert
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/10}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/06/06}{es muss \cs{FamilyUnkownKeyVal} statt
+% \cs{KOMA@unkown@keyval} lokal umdefiniert werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% Die Faltmarken können mit \texttt{foldmarks} aktiviert und deaktiviert
% werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@fold}
% \begin{macro}{\@foldtrue}
@@ -621,7 +619,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@usefolds}
% Welche Faltmarken gesetzt werden sollen, wird in einem Makro gespeichert.
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@usefolds}{TMBPL}
\KOMA@key{foldmarks}[true]{%
@@ -696,7 +694,7 @@
}{foldmarks}{true}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@removechar}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@removechar}[2]{%
\def\in@@##1#2##2##3\in@@{%
@@ -715,32 +713,42 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Optionen für die Geschäftszeile}
+% \subsubsection{Optionen für die Geschäftszeile}
%
% \begin{option}{refline}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/07}{vertauschte Bedeutung korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
-% Kopf und Fuß der ersten Seite sind normalweise so breit, dass sie
-% zur Adresse des Empfängers passen. Für die Geschäftszeile gibt es
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/07}{vertauschte Bedeutung korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
+% Kopf und Fuß der ersten Seite sind normalweise so breit, dass sie
+% zur Adresse des Empfängers passen. Für die Geschäftszeile gibt es
% zwei Alternativen, eine breite und eine, deren Breite der Textbreite
% entspricht. Voreingestellt ist die Textbreite.
% \begin{macro}{\if@refwide}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neuer Schalter}^^A
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/07}{Neue Werte: \texttt{dateleft},
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neuer Schalter}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/07}{Neue Werte: \texttt{dateleft},
% \texttt{dateright}, \texttt{nodate}}
% \begin{macro}{\@refwidetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@refwidefalse}
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem Schalter.
% \begin{macro}{\@datepos}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/07}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Das Datum kann links oder rechts oder gar nicht gesetzt werden.
-% Wo die Speicherung erfolgt wird in einem nummerischen Makro
-% abglegt. Voreingestellt ist rechts.
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/07}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Das Datum kann links oder rechts oder gar nicht gesetzt werden.
+% Wo die Speicherung erfolgt wird in einem nummerischen Makro
+% abglegt. Voreingestellt ist rechts.
+% \begin{macro}{\if@refline}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/03}{new (internal) boolean}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/03}{new option \texttt{refline!=false}}%^^A
+% This boolean is used to switch of the whole reference
+% line. \texttt{refline=false} is a tri-state switch to
+% \texttt{refline=narrow} and \texttt{refline=wide}. But this is available
+% only for the package.%
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@refwide
+%<package>\newif\if@refline\@reflinetrue
\newcommand*{\@datepos}{1}
\KOMA@key{refline}[wide]{%
\begingroup
@@ -748,12 +756,17 @@
{dateleft}{2},{leftdate}{2},%
{dateright}{3},{rightdate}{3},%
{nodate}{4}%
+%<package> ,{no}{5},{off}{5},{false}{5}%
}{#1}%
\ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
\aftergroup\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
- \ifcase\@tempa
+ \ifcase\@tempa% wide
\endgroup
\@refwidetrue
+%<*package>
+ \@reflinetrue
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.scrletter.\scr@pkgextension}{refline}{false}%
+%</package>
\KOMA@kav@remove{.%
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
@@ -766,9 +779,13 @@
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
}{refline}{wide}%
- \or
+ \or% narrow
\endgroup
\@refwidefalse
+%<*package>
+ \@reflinetrue
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.scrletter.\scr@pkgextension}{refline}{false}%
+%</package>
\KOMA@kav@remove{.%
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
@@ -781,7 +798,7 @@
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
}{refline}{narrow}%
- \or
+ \or% dateleft
\endgroup
\def\@datepos{2}%
\KOMA@kav@remove{.%
@@ -800,7 +817,7 @@
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
}{refline}{dateleft}%
- \or
+ \or% dateright
\endgroup
\def\@datepos{1}%
\KOMA@kav@remove{.%
@@ -819,7 +836,7 @@
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
}{refline}{dateright}%
- \or
+ \or% nodate
\endgroup
\def\@datepos{0}%
\KOMA@kav@remove{.%
@@ -838,6 +855,14 @@
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
}{refline}{nodate}%
+%<*package>
+ \or% false
+ \endgroup
+ \@reflinefalse
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.scrletter.\scr@pkgextension}{refline}{wide}%
+ \KOMA@kav@remove{.scrletter.\scr@pkgextension}{reline}{narrow}%
+ \KOMA@kav@add{.scrletter.\scr@pkgextension}{refline}{false}%
+%</package>
\fi
\else
\endgroup
@@ -857,32 +882,33 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Betreff}
+% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Betreff}
%
% \begin{option}{subject}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
% Ein Betreff-Titel kann mit \texttt{subject} ein- und abgeschaltet
-% werden. In England und Frankreich scheint es teilweise üblich zu
-% sein, den Betreff erst nach der Anrede und dafür zentriert zu
-% setzen\footnote{Ich kann mir nur mühsahm eine Bemerkung dazu
+% werden. In England und Frankreich scheint es teilweise üblich zu
+% sein, den Betreff erst nach der Anrede und dafür zentriert zu
+% setzen\footnote{Ich kann mir nur mühsahm eine Bemerkung dazu
% verkneifen.}.
% Deshalb kann alternativ zum Einschalten des Betreff-Titels hier auch
% dies aktiviert werden.
% \begin{macro}{\subject@format}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Das Format des Betreffs kann geändert werden.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Das Format des Betreffs kann geändert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subject@format}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\raggedsubject}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\raggedsubject}{}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -987,20 +1013,20 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Satzspiegel}
+% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Satzspiegel}
%
% \begin{option}{enlargefirstpage}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/18}{Neue Option}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/18}{Neue Option}%^^A
% Normalerweise wird der Text des Briefboges entsprechend dem
-% normalen Satzspiegel gesetzt. Ist allerdings der Fuß der ersten
+% normalen Satzspiegel gesetzt. Ist allerdings der Fuß der ersten
% Seite zu hoch, dann wird der Satzspiegel vertikal entsprechend
-% verkürzt. Mit der Option \texttt{firstpageenlarge} kann erzwungen
+% verkürzt. Mit der Option \texttt{firstpageenlarge} kann erzwungen
% werden, dass im umgekehrten Fall, der Satzspiegel vertikal
-% verlängert wird.
+% verlängert wird.
% \begin{macro}{\if@enlargefp}
% \begin{macro}{\@enlargefptrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@enlargefpfalse}
-% Gespeichert wird die Information über die Optionen in einem
+% Gespeichert wird die Information über die Optionen in einem
% Schalter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@ifkey{enlargefirstpage}{@enlargefp}
@@ -1011,15 +1037,15 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Briefbogenfuß}
+% \subsubsection{Optionen für den Briefbogenfuß}
%
% \begin{option}{firstfoot}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/22}{Neu}^^A
-% Der Fuß des Briefbogens kann auch einfach abgeschaltet werden.
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/22}{Neu}%^^A
+% Der Fuß des Briefbogens kann auch einfach abgeschaltet werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@firstfoot}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/25}{Neuer Schalter (intern)}%^^A
% Gespeichert wird die Information in einem einfachen Schalter.
-% Voreingestellt ist die Verwendung des Fußes.
+% Voreingestellt ist die Verwendung des Fußes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@ifkey{firstfoot}{@firstfoot}\@firstfoottrue
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1027,32 +1053,32 @@
% \end{option}
%
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für den Kopf des weiteren Briefpapiers}
+% \subsection{Optionen für den Kopf des weiteren Briefpapiers}
%
% Diese Optionen haben zwar nichts mit dem eigentlichen Briefbogen zu tun. Das
-% Briefpapier schließt sich aber an, weshalb die Optionen hier zu finden sind.
+% Briefpapier schließt sich aber an, weshalb die Optionen hier zu finden sind.
%
% \begin{option}{pagenumber}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}
-% Bei Briefen kann gewählt werden, ob auf Folgeseiten die Seitenzahl
-% im Kopf oder im Fuß stehen soll. Dabei kann zwischen Seitenzahl
-% rechts, links oder zentriert gewählt werden. Voreingestellt ist der
-% Fuß und mittig.
+% Bei Briefen kann gewählt werden, ob auf Folgeseiten die Seitenzahl
+% im Kopf oder im Fuß stehen soll. Dabei kann zwischen Seitenzahl
+% rechts, links oder zentriert gewählt werden. Voreingestellt ist der
+% Fuß und mittig.
% \begin{macro}{\@pageat}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{Neu}%^^A
% In dieser nummerisch auswertbaren Variablen wird gespeichert, wo die
% Seitenzahl stehen soll. Dabei gilt:
% \begin{center}\begin{tabular}{rl}
-% Wert & Bedeutung für die Seitenzahl\\\hline
+% Wert & Bedeutung für die Seitenzahl\\\hline
% -1 & keine \\
% 0 & im Kopf links \\
% 1 & im Kopf mittig \\
% 2 & im Kopf rechts \\
-% 3 & im Fuß links \\
-% 4 & im Fuß mittig \\
-% 5 & im Fuß rechts \\
+% 3 & im Fuß links \\
+% 4 & im Fuß mittig \\
+% 5 & im Fuß rechts \\
% \end{tabular}\end{center}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@pageat}{4}
@@ -1138,35 +1164,40 @@
%<*letter>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Anweisungen für den Briefbogen}
+% \subsection{Anweisungen für den Briefbogen}
%
-% Auch bei den Anweisungen zunächst alles, was mit dem Briefbogen zu tun hat.
+% Auch bei den Anweisungen zunächst alles, was mit dem Briefbogen zu tun hat.
%
% \subsubsection{Der Kopf des Briefbogens}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firsthead}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{\cs{@alignfrom} auf 10000 gesetzt}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf des Briefbogens wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{\cs{@alignfrom} auf 10000 gesetzt}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf des Briefbogens wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@firsthead}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf des Briefbogens wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf des Briefbogens wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@gen@firsthead}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Dicke der Linie konfigurierbar}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Schrift (Farbe) der Linie konfigurierbar}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/07/29}{Verwendung des Font-Elements
-% \texttt{fromrule} eingefügt}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf des Briefbogens wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Dicke der Linie konfigurierbar}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Schrift (Farbe) der Linie konfigurierbar}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/07/29}{Verwendung des Font-Elements
+% \texttt{fromrule} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf des Briefbogens wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{firsthead}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13b}{2014/10/04}{neuer \emph{hook} nur für
-% \texttt{DINmtext.lco}}^^A
-% Bei \texttt{scrlttr2} gibt es die üblichen Seitenstile, allerdings
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13b}{2014/10/04}{neuer \emph{hook} nur für
+% \texttt{DINmtext.lco}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/02}{\emph{hook} entfernt}%^^A
+% Bei \texttt{scrlttr2} gibt es die üblichen Seitenstile, allerdings
% ist deren Verhalten etwas anders als gewohnt. Dies ist in den
-% Besonderheiten für Briefen begründet. Zunächst die Voreinstellung für
-% Briefbögen.
+% Besonderheiten für Briefen begründet. Zunächst die Voreinstellung für
+% Briefbögen.
+%
+% TODO: Diese ganze Prozedur gehört (für \textsf{scrletter}) komplett
+% überabeitet, so dass \cs{@gen@firsthead} überflüssig wird und das Setzen von
+% \texttt{fromalign} auch gleich \texttt{firsthead} umdefiniert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\newcommand*{\@firsthead}{%
@@ -1188,7 +1219,6 @@
{\usekomafont{fromrule}{\rule{\useplength{firstheadwidth}}{.4pt}}}\\
}%
\ifkomavarempty{fromaddress}{}{%
- \csname scr@default@firsthead@fromaddress@hook\endcsname
\ignorespaces\usekomavar{fromaddress}%
}%
}%
@@ -1197,10 +1227,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAvar}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@firsthead@postsetvar}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{internes Setzen von Option
-% \texttt{fromalign!=no}}^^A
-% Über dieses Makro wird jeweils nach dem Setzen der Variable die Ausrichtung
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{internes Setzen von Option
+% \texttt{fromalign!=no}}%^^A
+% Ãœber dieses Makro wird jeweils nach dem Setzen der Variable die Ausrichtung
% auf manuell umgeschaltet. Das darf deshalb auch erst nach dem erstmaligen
% Setzen definiert werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1215,33 +1245,33 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gen@firsthead}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Damit wird ggf. die Kopfzeile der ersten Seite umdefiniert, nämlich dann,
+% Damit wird ggf. die Kopfzeile der ersten Seite umdefiniert, nämlich dann,
% wenn dies per Option aktiviert wurde.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\@alignfrom
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wir befinden uns nun in dem Bereich für \verb|\@alignfrom|=0.
+% Wir befinden uns nun in dem Bereich für \verb|\@alignfrom|=0.
% Entsprechend unserer Festlegung wird daher als Erstes der
-% linksbündige Absender definiert. Wir verwenden dafür eine
-% \emph{parbox}, in der der Text linksbündig angeordnet wird. Diese
-% Box soll über die gesamte Breite gehen dürfen:
+% linksbündige Absender definiert. Wir verwenden dafür eine
+% \emph{parbox}, in der der Text linksbündig angeordnet wird. Diese
+% Box soll über die gesamte Breite gehen dürfen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setkomavar{firsthead}{%
\parbox[b]{\textwidth}{\raggedright
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zuerst wird der Name gesetzt. Dabei soll eine eigene Schriftart für
+% Zuerst wird der Name gesetzt. Dabei soll eine eigene Schriftart für
% den Namen verwendet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\usekomafont{fromname}\strut\ignorespaces
\usekomavar{fromname}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Hat \verb|\@rulefrom| den nummerischen Wert 1, so soll direkt auf den
-% Absender eine Linie folgen. Die Länge dieser Linie kann vom Anwender
-% bestimmt oder automatisch gewählt werden. Es werden dabei die
-% Pseudo-Längen \texttt{fromrulewidth} und \texttt{fromrulethickness}
+% Absender eine Linie folgen. Die Länge dieser Linie kann vom Anwender
+% bestimmt oder automatisch gewählt werden. Es werden dabei die
+% Pseudo-Längen \texttt{fromrulewidth} und \texttt{fromrulethickness}
% verwendet. Ist \texttt{fromrulewidth} negativ, so wird sie automatisch
-% bestimmt. Bei der automatischen Längenbestimmung wird dafür gesorgt, dass
-% die Linie nicht bis in das Logo ragt, das eventuell rechtsbündig neben dem
+% bestimmt. Bei der automatischen Längenbestimmung wird dafür gesorgt, dass
+% die Linie nicht bis in das Logo ragt, das eventuell rechtsbündig neben dem
% Absender steht:
% \begin{macrocode}
{%
@@ -1262,13 +1292,13 @@
\\
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als Nächstes wird die Absenderadresse einschließlich aller
+% Als Nächstes wird die Absenderadresse einschließlich aller
% optionalen Felder gesetzt. Dabei werden optionale Felder nur
% gesetzt, wenn der entsprechende Schalter \emph{true} ist. Die
% Adresse wird ebenfalls innerhalb einer Gruppe in einer eigenen
% Schriftart gesetzt.%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
-% berücksichtigt}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
+% berücksichtigt}%
% \begin{macrocode}
{\usekomafont{fromaddress}\strut\ignorespaces
\usekomavar{fromaddress}%
@@ -1280,9 +1310,9 @@
\if@email\\\usekomavar*{fromemail}\usekomavar{fromemail}\fi%
\if@www\\\usekomavar*{fromurl}\usekomavar{fromurl}\fi%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wie weiter oben erwähnt, kann auch an dieser Stelle eine Linie
+% Wie weiter oben erwähnt, kann auch an dieser Stelle eine Linie
% gesetzt werden. Wir gehen davon aus, dass die Linie automatisch
-% nicht in das Logo ragt, da es in diesem Fall über der Linie zu
+% nicht in das Logo ragt, da es in diesem Fall über der Linie zu
% stehen hat. Die entsprechende Berechnung kann also entfallen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@rulefrom=2\\[-.5\baselineskip]%
@@ -1308,13 +1338,13 @@
}%
\renewcommand*{\@alignfrom}{0}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Damit ist die Definition des linksbündigen Absenders abgeschlossen.
+% Damit ist die Definition des linksbündigen Absenders abgeschlossen.
% Es geht weiter mit dem zentrierten Absender. Dieser hat als
% Besonderheit, dass das Logo nicht in den Briefkopf, sondern in den
-% Bereich rechts neben dem Empfänger gesetzt wird. Dort ist bereits
+% Bereich rechts neben dem Empfänger gesetzt wird. Dort ist bereits
% das location-Feld, daher wird dieser Fall auch dort behandelt.%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
-% berücksichtigt}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
+% berücksichtigt}%
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\setkomavar{firsthead}{%
@@ -1359,10 +1389,10 @@
\renewcommand*{\@alignfrom}{1}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Damit ist die Definition des zentrierten Absenders abgeschlossen. Es
-% geht weiter mit dem rechtsbündigen Absender. Das ganze wird einfach
-% beim linksbündigen Absender abgeschaut.%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
-% berücksichtigt}%
+% geht weiter mit dem rechtsbündigen Absender. Das ganze wird einfach
+% beim linksbündigen Absender abgeschaut.%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
+% berücksichtigt}%
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\setkomavar{firsthead}{%
@@ -1413,8 +1443,8 @@
}%
\renewcommand*{\@alignfrom}{2}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Damit ist die Umdefinierung beendet. In allen anderen Fällen wird
-% der Kopf nicht verändert.
+% Damit ist die Umdefinierung beendet. In allen anderen Fällen wird
+% der Kopf nicht verändert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi
}
@@ -1422,7 +1452,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Der Benutzer kann die Voreinstellung mit einer einfachen Anweisung ändern:
+% Der Benutzer kann die Voreinstellung mit einer einfachen Anweisung ändern:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\newcommand{\firsthead}{%
@@ -1437,10 +1467,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \subsubsection{Schrifteinstellungen für den Briefbogen}
+% \subsubsection{Schrifteinstellungen für den Briefbogen}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{foldmark}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neu}%^^A
% Die Schrift (hier ist die Farbe der entscheidende Faktor) der Faltmarken.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{foldmark}{}
@@ -1448,7 +1478,7 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{fromname}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}
% Der Absendername im Briefkopf.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{fromname}{}
@@ -1456,7 +1486,7 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{fromaddress}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}
% Die Absenderadresse im Briefkopf.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{fromaddress}{}
@@ -1464,7 +1494,7 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{fromrule}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neu}%^^A
% Die Schrift (hier ist die Farbe der entscheidende Faktor) der Linie im
% Absender.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1473,17 +1503,17 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{backaddress}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{beachtet Option
-% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles}}^^A
-% Die Rücksendeadresse.
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{beachtet Option
+% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles}}%^^A
+% Die Rücksendeadresse.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{backaddress}{\@gr@gsffamily}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{specialmail}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
% Die Versandart.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{specialmail}{}
@@ -1491,8 +1521,8 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{priority}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Grundschrift für die Priorität des Briefs, falls diese A oder B ist. Es wird
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Grundschrift für die Priorität des Briefs, falls diese A oder B ist. Es wird
% ohne Durchschuss gearbeitet. An dieser Stelle ist Serifenlos quasi
% vorgeschrieben, so dass wir hier Option
% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles} ignorieren.
@@ -1502,10 +1532,10 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{prioritykey}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift für den Buchstaben der Priorität des Briefs, falls diese A oder B
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift für den Buchstaben der Priorität des Briefs, falls diese A oder B
% ist. Wird nach \texttt{priority} angewandt. Eigentlich sollten hier 9\,mm
-% verwendet werden. Dafür wird aber eine frei skalierbare Schrift benötig. Mit
+% verwendet werden. Dafür wird aber eine frei skalierbare Schrift benötig. Mit
% 24,88\,pt sind wir nur 0,25\,mm kleiner. Das sollte kein Problem
% darstellen. Es wird auch hier ohne Durchschuss gearbeitet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1514,8 +1544,8 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{PPlogo}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift für das Logo \texttt{P.P.}, das im Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP}
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift für das Logo \texttt{P.P.}, das im Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP}
% gesetzt wird. An dieser Stelle ist serifenlos quasi vorgeschrieben, so dass
% wir hier Option \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles} ignorieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1524,8 +1554,8 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{PPdata}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift, die innerhalb des PP-Kopfes für die Daten verwendet wird.
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift, die innerhalb des PP-Kopfes für die Daten verwendet wird.
% gesetzt wird. And dieser Stelle ist serifenlos quasi vorgeschrieben, so dass
% wir hier Option \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles} ignorieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1534,7 +1564,7 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{addressee}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
% Die komplette Anschrift.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{addressee}{}
@@ -1542,35 +1572,35 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{toname}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Der Name des Empfängers in der Anschrift.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Der Name des Empfängers in der Anschrift.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{toname}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{toaddress}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Die Adresse des Empfängers in der Anschrift.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Die Adresse des Empfängers in der Anschrift.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{toaddress}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{refname}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{beachtet Option
-% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles}}^^A
-% Die Feldnamen in der Geschäftszeile.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{beachtet Option
+% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles}}%^^A
+% Die Feldnamen in der Geschäftszeile.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{refname}{\@gr@gsffamily\scriptsize}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{refvalue}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/09}{Voreinstellung korrigiert}^^A
-% Die Feldwerte in der Geschäftszeile. Hier gibt es keinen Bedarf, Option
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/09}{Voreinstellung korrigiert}%^^A
+% Die Feldwerte in der Geschäftszeile. Hier gibt es keinen Bedarf, Option
% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles} zu beachten, da diese in
% Version~2.97 noch nicht existierte.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1585,8 +1615,8 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{placeanddate}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/31}{Neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Wird an Stelle einer Geschäftszeile nur Ort und Datum gesetzt, so findet
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/31}{Neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Wird an Stelle einer Geschäftszeile nur Ort und Datum gesetzt, so findet
% dieses Element Anwendung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{placeanddate}{}
@@ -1594,17 +1624,17 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{lettertitle}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{neu als Ersatz für \texttt{letter}}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{beachtet Option
-% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{neu als Ersatz für \texttt{letter}}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{beachtet Option
+% \texttt{egregdoesnotlikesansseriftitles}}%^^A
% Der Brieftitel.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{lettertitle}{\normalcolor\@gr@gsffamily\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{title}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{nur noch ein Alias}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/04/26}{Alias korrigiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{nur noch ein Alias}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/04/26}{Alias korrigiert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@fnt@title}{%
\aliaskomafont{title}{lettertitle}%
@@ -1614,15 +1644,15 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{lettersubject}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{neu als Ersatz für \texttt{subject}}
-% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/04/26}{Alias korrigiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{neu als Ersatz für \texttt{subject}}
+% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/04/26}{Alias korrigiert}%^^A
% Der Betreff im Brief.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{lettersubject}{\normalfont\bfseries}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{subject}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{nur noch ein Alias}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{jetzt mit \cs{newkomafont}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/21}{nur noch ein Alias}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<package>\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@fnt@subject}{%
\aliaskomafont{subject}{lettersubject}%
@@ -1631,28 +1661,28 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
-% \subsubsection{Längen für den Briefbogen}
+% \subsubsection{Längen für den Briefbogen}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@foldmarkhpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand der horizontalen Faltmarken von der linken Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{foldmarkhpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@foldmarkvpos}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand der vertikalen Faltmarken von der oberen Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{foldmarkvpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@tfoldmarkvpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@mfoldmarkvpos}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@bfoldmarkvpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand der oberen, mittleren und unteren Faltmarken von der oberen
% Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1664,23 +1694,23 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@lfoldmarkhpos}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand linken Faltmarken von der linken Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{lfoldmarkhpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@pfoldmarklength}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/19}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/19}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@hfoldmarklength}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@mfoldmarklength}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@bfoldmarklength}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2001/11/10}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2001/11/10}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@lfoldmarklength}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2001/11/10}{Neu}^^A
-% Länge der Lochmarke und der oberen, mittleren und unteren horizontalen und
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2001/11/10}{Neu}%^^A
+% Länge der Lochmarke und der oberen, mittleren und unteren horizontalen und
% der (linken) vertikalen Faltmarke.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{pfoldmarklength}
@@ -1695,7 +1725,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@foldmarkthickness}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neu}%^^A
% Dicke der Faltmarken.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{foldmarkthickness}
@@ -1703,21 +1733,21 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@toaddrvpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand des Adressfensters von der oberen Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{toaddrvpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@backaddrheight}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Höhe der Rücksendeadresse.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Höhe der Rücksendeadresse.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{backaddrheight}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@toaddrhpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand des Adressfeldes von der linken Papierkante bzw. wenn negativ von
% der rechten Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1725,46 +1755,46 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@specialmailindent}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand der Versandtart vom linken Rand des Adressfensters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{specialmailindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@specialmailrightindent}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand der Versandtart vom rechten Rand des Adressfensters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{specialmailrightindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@toaddrindent}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand der Adresse vom linken Rand des Adressfensters. 0 bedeutet im
-% Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP} 8\,mm, ansonsten wirklich 0\,mm. Außerdem wird im
-% Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP} die Pseudolänge auch für den Abstand vom rechten
+% Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP} 8\,mm, ansonsten wirklich 0\,mm. Außerdem wird im
+% Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP} die Pseudolänge auch für den Abstand vom rechten
% Rand des Adressfensters verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{toaddrindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@PPheadheight}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%
-% Höhe des PP-Kopfes in den Anschriftmodi \texttt{PP},
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%
+% Höhe des PP-Kopfes in den Anschriftmodi \texttt{PP},
% \texttt{backgroundimage} und \texttt{image}. 0 bedeutet hier 20,74\,pt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{PPheadheight}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@PPheadwidth}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%
% Breite des PP-Kopfes im Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP}. 0 bedeutet hier 42\,mm.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{PPheadwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@PPdatamatrixvskip}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%
% Abstand zwischen PP-Kopf und DataMatrix im Anschriftmodus \texttt{PP}. 0
% bedeutet hier 9\,mm.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1772,107 +1802,118 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@toaddrwidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Breite des Adressfensters
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{toaddrwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@toaddrheight}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/25}{Implementierung an Doku angepasst}^^A
-% Höhe des Adressfensters mit Rücksendeadresse
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/25}{Implementierung an Doku angepasst}%^^A
+% Höhe des Adressfensters mit Rücksendeadresse
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{toaddrheight}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@locvpos}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/07}{Neu}^^A
-% Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der oberen Papierkante.
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der oberen Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{locvpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@locwidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Breite des Feldes neben dem Adressfenster
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{locwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@lochpos}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/07}{Neu}^^A
-% Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der linken Papierkante bzw. wenn negativ
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der linken Papierkante bzw. wenn negativ
% von der rechten Papierkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{lochpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@locheight}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/07}{Neu}^^A
-% Höhe der Absenderergänzung.
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% Höhe der Absenderergänzung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{locheight}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@refvpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der Papieroberkante.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der Papieroberkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{refvpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@refheight}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/03}{new}%^^A
+% Height of the reference line (if used).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+\@newplength{refheight}
+%</package&willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@refwidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Breite der Geschäftszeile.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Breite der Geschäftszeile.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{refwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@refhpos}
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{Neu}^^A
-% Horizontale Position der Geschäftszeile.
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
+% Horizontale Position der Geschäftszeile.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{refhpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@refaftervskip}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}^^A
-% Abstand nach der Geschäftszeile.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}%^^A
+% Abstand nach der Geschäftszeile.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{refaftervskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@sigbeforevskip}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}^^A
-% Raum für die Unterschrift.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Neu}%^^A
+% Raum für die Unterschrift.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{sigbeforevskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@sigindent}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Horizontaler Einzug des Schlussgrußes und der Signatur.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Horizontaler Einzug des Schlussgrußes und der Signatur.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{sigindent}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@@firstfootvpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Abstand des Fußes der ersten Seite von der Papieroberkante.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Abstand des Fußes der ersten Seite von der Papieroberkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{firstfootvpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@firstfootwidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Breite des Fußes der ersten Seite.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Breite des Fußes der ersten Seite.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{firstfootwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@firstfoothpos}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand des Kopfes vom linken Rand der Seite.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{firstfoothpos}
@@ -1880,21 +1921,21 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@firstheadvspos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand des Kopfes der ersten Seite von der Papieroberkante.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{firstheadvpos}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@firstheadwidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Breite des Kopfes der ersten Seite.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{firstheadwidth}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@firstheadhpos}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{Neu}%^^A
% Abstand des Kopfes vom linken Rand der Seite.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{firstheadhpos}
@@ -1902,16 +1943,16 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@fromrulewidth}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}^^A
-% Die Länge einer eventuell gesetzten Linie im Absender. Negative
-% Werte bedeuten, dass die Länge automtaisch bestimmt wird.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
+% Die Länge einer eventuell gesetzten Linie im Absender. Negative
+% Werte bedeuten, dass die Länge automtaisch bestimmt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{fromrulewidth}
\@setplength{fromrulewidth}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@fromrulethickness}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{fromrulewidth}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{fromrulewidth}}
% Die Dicke einer eventuell gesetzte Linie im Absender.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{fromrulethickness}
@@ -1920,18 +1961,18 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Fuß des Briefbogens}
+% \subsubsection{Fuß des Briefbogens}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firstfoot}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß des Briefbogens wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß des Briefbogens wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@firstfoot}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß des Briefbogens wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß des Briefbogens wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{firstfoot}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
-% Der Fuß des Briefbogens ist in der Voreinstellung leer.
+% Der Fuß des Briefbogens ist in der Voreinstellung leer.
\newkomavar{firstfoot}
%<*class>
\newcommand*{\@firstfoot}{%
@@ -1943,7 +1984,7 @@
\usekomavar{firstfoot}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dies kann jedoch über eine einfache Benutzeranweisung geändert werden:
+% Dies kann jedoch über eine einfache Benutzeranweisung geändert werden:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firstfoot}{%
\ClassWarning{scrlttr2}{%
@@ -1962,12 +2003,865 @@
%
% \subsubsection{Ausgabe des Briefbogens}
%
-% Die Ausgabe selbst erfolgt derzeit über die |\opening|-Anweisung, die in
-% einem späteren Abschnitt implementiert ist.
+% Die Ausgabe selbst erfolgt bei \textsf{scrlttr2} über die
+% |\opening|-Anweisung, die in einem späteren Abschnitt implementiert ist. Bei
+% \textsf{scrletter} erfolgt sie dagegen ab Version 3.27 über den Seitenstil
+% \texttt{notepaper} (siehe \texttt{scrkernel-pagestyle.dtx}).
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@printallelements}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/16}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% This is used by page style \texttt{notepaper} to print all elements.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@printelementsoflist}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/16}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% And this is used to print a given list of elements.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@printelement}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/16}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% Last but not least this prints one given element.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&body&willbe>
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@printallelements}{%
+ \scr@notepaper@printelementsoflist\scr@notepaper@elements
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@printelementsoflist}[1]{%
+ \expandafter\scr@ForEachTrimmedListElement\expandafter{#1}{%
+ \scr@notepaper@printelement
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@printelement}[1]{%
+ \@ifundefined{scr@notepaper@element@#1}{%
+ \PackageWarning{scrletter}{%
+ Unknown note paper element `#1'\MessageBreak
+ will be ignored%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@nameuse{scr@notepaper@element@#1}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@printelement
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@printelementsoflist
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@printallelements
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@foldmarks@printallelements}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/16}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% This is used by the page style \texttt{notepaper} to print all foldmarks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@foldmarks@printallelements}{%
+ \if@fold
+ \ifdim \useplength{pfoldmarklength}=\z@
+ \@setplength{pfoldmarklength}{4mm}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{tfoldmarklength}=\z@
+ \@setplength{tfoldmarklength}{2mm}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{mfoldmarklength}=\z@
+ \@setplength{mfoldmarklength}{2mm}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{bfoldmarklength}=\z@
+ \@setplength{bfoldmarklength}{2mm}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{lfoldmarklength}=\z@
+ \@setplength{lfoldmarklength}{4mm}%
+ \fi
+ \@hfoldmark{P}%
+ \@hfoldmark{T}%
+ \@hfoldmark{M}%
+ \@hfoldmark{B}%
+ \@vfoldmark{L}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@elements}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% This is a comma-separated list of elements (aka blocks) to be printed on the
+% notepaper. It is used by the page style layer \texttt{notepaper} to set all
+% elements (see \texttt{scrkernel-pagestyle.dtx}). There are exactly four
+% defaults (but you can add more):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@elements}{%
+ firsthead,addressee,location,firstfoot,refline%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@element@firsthead}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% How to print the notepaper element \texttt{firsthead}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@element@firsthead}{%
+ \if@firsthead
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The calculation of the real horizontal position could be done as part of the
+% layer contents or while selection of the layer or while initialization of
+% the layer. The in-contents code is used, so the layer can be used with
+% different page styles. The position depends on \texttt{firstheadhpos} this
+% way:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item If \texttt{firstheadhpos} is positive but less than the paper width,
+% \texttt{firstheadhpos} is the distance if the head from the left edge.
+% \item If \texttt{firstheadhpos} is negative but the absolute value is less
+% then the paper width, the absolute value of \texttt{firstheadhpos} is the
+% distance from the right edge.
+% \item If \texttt{firstheadhpos} is greater than the paper width, the head
+% will be centered.
+% \item If \texttt{firstheadhpos} is less than the negative paper width, the
+% head will be left aligned to the text area.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\useplength{firstheadhpos}<\paperwidth
+ \ifdim \useplength{firstheadhpos}>-\paperwidth
+ \ifdim \useplength{firstheadhpos}<\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr
+ \paperwidth + \useplength{firstheadhpos}
+ - \useplength{firstheadwidth}
+ \relax}%
+ \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{firstheadhpos}}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr\oddsidemargin + 1in\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr
+ (\paperwidth-\useplength{firstheadwidth})/2
+ \relax}%
+ \fi
+ \put@notepaper@element
+ (\@tempdima,\useplength{firstheadvpos})%
+ (\useplength{firstheadwidth},%
+ \useplength{toaddrvpos}-\useplength{firstheadvpos})%
+ {Element `firsthead'}{\usekomavar{firsthead}}\relax
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@element@firsthead
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@element@firstfoot}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% Element \texttt{firstfoot} is very similar to \texttt{firsthead}. The
+% differences are using of pseudo lengths for the foot instead the head and
+% the calculation of the available height.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@element@firstfoot}{%
+ \if@firstfoot
+ \ifdim\useplength{firstfoothpos}<\paperwidth
+ \ifdim \useplength{firstfoothpos}>-\paperwidth
+ \ifdim \useplength{firstfoothpos}<\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr
+ \paperwidth + \useplength{firstfoothpos}
+ - \useplength{firstfootwidth}%
+ \relax}%
+ \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{firstfoothpos}}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr\oddsidemargin + 1in\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr
+ (\paperwidth-\useplength{firstfootwidth})/2
+ \relax}%
+ \fi
+ \put@notepaper@element
+ (\@tempdima,\useplength{firstfootvpos})%
+ (\useplength{firstfootwidth},
+ \paperheight-\useplength{firstfootvpos})%
+ {Element `firstfoot'}{\usekomavar{firstfoot}}\relax
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@element@firstfoot
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@element@addressee}
+% Element \texttt{addressee} is very complex and therefore split into several
+% different sub-elements.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@element@addressee}{%
+ \setlengthtoplength{\@tempdima}{toaddrhpos}%
+ \ifdim \@tempdima<\z@
+ \addtolength{\@tempdima}{%
+ \dimexpr \paperwidth-\useplength{toaddrwidth}\relax
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \put@notepaper@element(\@tempdima,\useplength{toaddrvpos})%
+ (\useplength{toaddrwidth},\useplength{toaddrheight})%
+ {address field}{%
+ \setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@ plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
+ \ifcase \@afieldmode\relax
+ \or
+ \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@default
+ \or
+ \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PP
+ \or
+ \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PPbackgroundimage
+ \or
+ \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@image
+ \else
+ \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@default
+ \fi
+ }\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@default}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The field with the recipience address. This should be used only on the first
+% page of a letter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@default}{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox {%
+ \hsize=\useplength{toaddrwidth}\linewidth=\hsize
+ \color@begingroup
+ \if@baddr
+ \ifkomavarempty{backaddress}{}{%
+ \def\\{\usekomavar{backaddressseparator}\@ogobble}%
+ \backaddr@format{\scriptsize\usekomafont{backaddress}%
+ \usekomavar{backaddress}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \color@endgroup
+ }%
+ \ifdim \dimexpr\ht\@tempboxa+\dp\@tempboxa>\useplength{backaddrheight}\relax
+ \PackageWarning{scrletter}{Element `backaddress' to high.\MessageBreak
+ The content of `backaddress' could exceed\MessageBreak
+ the address field%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \vbox to \useplength{backaddrheight}{\vss\usebox\@tempboxa}%
+ \ifcase \ltr@priority
+ \or
+ \setkomavar{specialmail}{%
+ {\usekomafont{priority}{%
+ {\usekomafont{prioritykey}{B}}%
+ -ECONOMY}}%
+ }%
+ \or
+ \setkomavar{specialmail}{%
+ {\usekomafont{priority}{%
+ {\usekomafont{prioritykey}{A}}%
+ -PRIORITY}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \ifkomavarempty{specialmail}{%
+ \@tempdima=\z@
+ }{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\hsize\useplength{toaddrwidth}%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \noindent\hspace*{\useplength{specialmailindent}}%
+ \specialmail@format{%
+ \usekomafont{specialmail}\usekomavar{specialmail}}%
+ \hspace*{\useplength{specialmailrightindent}}%
+ \color@endgroup
+ }%
+ \copy\@tempboxa
+ \@tempdima=\dimexpr\ht\@tempboxa+\dp\@tempboxa\relax
+ }%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{%
+ \hsize\dimexpr \useplength{toaddrwidth}-2\useplength{toaddrindent}\relax
+ \color@begingroup
+ \raggedright
+ \usekomafont{addressee}{%
+%<*package>
+ \usekomavar{addressee}\par%
+%</package>
+%<class> {\usekomafont{toname}{\usekomavar{toname}\\}}%
+%<class> {\usekomafont{toaddress}{\usekomavar{toaddress}\par}}%
+ }%
+ \color@endgroup
+ }%
+ \ifnum\@afieldmode=\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In opposite to the class, the package rounds the distance to lines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \vskip \dimexpr ((\useplength{toaddrheight}-\useplength{backaddrheight}
+ -\@tempdima -\ht\@tempboxa -\dp\@tempboxa
+ -\ht\strutbox)/(2*\baselineskip))
+ *\baselineskip\relax
+ \fi
+ \hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}%
+ \usebox\@tempboxa
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@default
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PP}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PP}{%
+ \ifdim \useplength{toaddrindent}=\z@
+ \setplength{toaddrindent}{8mm}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{PPheadheight}=\z@
+ \setplength{PPheadheight}{20.74pt}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{PPheadwidth}=\z@
+ \setplength{PPheadwidth}{42mm}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{PPdatamatrixvskip}=\z@
+ \setplength{PPdatamatrixvskip}{3mm}%
+ \fi
+ \vskip 2pt\relax
+ \hskip \useplength{toaddrindent}\relax
+ \fbox{%
+ \vbox to \dimexpr \useplength{PPheadheight}-2\fboxsep\relax{%
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
+ \hsize \dimexpr \useplength{PPheadwidth}-2\fboxsep\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/17}{\cs{setbox} durch \cs{sbox} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@endstrut} statt
+% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{%
+ {\fontsize{20.74pt}{20.74pt}\selectfont
+ \usekomafont{PPlogo}{P.P.}}\hskip 2mm%
+ }%
+ \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\hsize}%
+ \addtolength{\@tempdima}{-\wd\@tempboxa}%
+ \hbox{\box\@tempboxa
+ \vbox to \dimexpr
+ \useplength{PPheadheight}-2\fboxsep\relax{%
+ \vss\hsize\@tempdima
+ \raggedright
+ \fontsize{8pt}{9pt}\selectfont\usekomafont{PPdata}%
+ \usekomavar*{fromzipcode}\usekomavar{zipcodeseparator}%
+ \usekomavar{fromzipcode}\scr@endstrut\\
+ \usekomavar{place}\scr@endstrut
+ \hfill
+ }%
+ }%
+ \vss
+ }%
+ }%
+ \hskip 1mm
+ \mbox{%
+ \vbox to \useplength{PPheadheight}{%
+ \addtolengthplength[-]{\hsize}{PPheadwidth}%
+ \addtolength{\hsize}{-1mm}%
+ \addtolengthplength[-2]{\hsize}{toaddrindent}%
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
+ \fontsize{8pt}{9pt}\selectfont\usekomafont{PPdata}%
+ \hfill\usekomavar{PPcode}
+ \vss
+ \ifcase \ltr@priority
+ \or
+ \usekomafont{priority}{%
+ {\usekomafont{prioritykey}{B}}%
+ -ECONOMY\hss\vskip-\dp\strutbox
+ }%
+ \or
+ \usekomafont{priority}{%
+ {\usekomafont{prioritykey}{A}}%
+ -PRIORITY\hss\vskip-\dp\strutbox
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \vss
+ }%
+ }%
+ \vskip 1mm
+ \vskip-\ht\strutbox
+ \noindent\hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}%
+ \hrulefill%
+ \hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}%
+ \vbox to\z@{\hsize\z@
+ \vskip \useplength{PPdatamatrixvskip}\relax
+ \llap{\usekomavar{PPdatamatrix}\hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}}%
+ \vss
+ }%
+ \vskip 3mm
+ \noindent\hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}%
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{toaddrwidth}}%
+ \addtolengthplength[-2]{\@tempdima}{toaddrindent}%
+ \vbox{\hsize\@tempdima
+ \ifkomavarempty{PPdatamatrix}{}{%
+ \addtolength{\hsize}{-2mm}%
+ \settowidth\@tempdima{\usekomavar{PPdatamatrix}}%
+ \addtolength{\hsize}{-\@tempdima}%
+ }%
+ \raggedright
+ \usekomafont{addressee}{%
+%<*package>
+ \usekomavar{addressee}\par%
+%</package>
+%<class> {\usekomafont{toname}{\usekomavar{toname}\\}}%
+%<class> {\usekomafont{toaddress}{\usekomavar{toaddress}\par}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PP
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PPimage}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% TODO: Need to be tested!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PPimage}{%
+ \ifdim \useplength{toaddrindent}=\z@
+ \setplength{toaddrindent}{8mm}%
+ \fi
+ \vskip 1mm
+ \noindent\expandafter\hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}%
+ \vbox to \useplength{PPheadheight}{%
+ \addtolengthplength[-2]{\hsize}{toaddrindent}%
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
+ \usekomavar{addresseeimage}%
+ \vss
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@PPimage
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@backgroundimage}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% TODO: Need to be tested!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@backgroundimage}{%
+ \vskip 1mm
+ \noindent\expandafter\hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}%
+ \vbox to \useplength{PPheadheight}{%
+ \addtolengthplength[-2]{\hsize}{toaddrindent}%
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
+ \usekomavar{addresseeimage}%
+ \vss
+ }%
+ \vskip 1mm
+ \vskip\dp\strutbox
+ \vfil%
+ \noindent\hskip\useplength{toaddrindent}%
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{toaddrwidth}}%
+ \addtolengthplength[-2]{\@tempdima}{toaddrindent}%
+ \vbox{\hsize\@tempdima
+ \ifkomavarempty{PPdatamatrix}{}{%
+ \addtolength{\hsize}{-2mm}%
+ \settowidth\@tempdima{\usekomavar{PPdatamatrix}}%
+ \addtolength{\hsize}{-\@tempdima}%
+ }%
+ \raggedright
+ \usekomafont{addressee}{%
+%<*package>
+ \usekomavar{addressee}\par%
+%</package>
+%<class> {\usekomafont{toname}{\usekomavar{toname}\\}}%
+%<class> {\usekomafont{toaddress}{\usekomavar{toaddress}\par}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@subelement@addressee@backgroundimage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@element@addressee
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@element@location}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@element@location}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/13}{Der Absender kann nun ebenfalls in der
+% Absenderergänzung stehen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98b}{2008/01/30}{Absenderergänzung immer setzen, wenn
+% verwendet}%^^A
+% Je nach Absenderanordnung muss hier nun ebenfalls etwas getan werden.
+% Der Fall 0, also linksbündiger Absender im Kopf spielt hier keine Rolle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifcase\@alignfrom
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Im Fall 1, also zentrierter Absender im Kopf wird jedoch das Logo hier
+% platziert, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+ \if@logo
+ \ifkomavarempty{location}{\setkomavar{location}{\null}}{}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Im Fall 2, also rechtsbündiger Absender im Kopf, ist auch nichts zu tun.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
+% eine Menge ausgegeben, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+ \ifkomavarempty{location}{\setkomavar{location}{\null}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
+% eine Menge ausgegeben, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+ \ifkomavarempty{location}{\setkomavar{location}{\null}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Alle anderen Fälle sind wie hier ebenfalls ohne Bedeutung.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% Everything else only, if the field is not empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifkomavarempty{location}{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Calculation of height and vertical possition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \useplength{locheight}=\z@%
+ \setplength{locheight}{\useplength{toaddrheight}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{locvpos}=\z@%
+ \setplength{locvpos}{\useplength{toaddrvpos}}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Calculation of width and horizontal possition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \useplength{locwidth}=\z@%
+ \setplength{locwidth}{\paperwidth}%
+ \ifdim \useplength{toaddrhpos}>\z@
+ \addtoplength[-2]{locwidth}{\useplength{toaddrhpos}}%
+ \else
+ \addtoplength[2]{locwidth}{\useplength{toaddrhpos}}%
+ \fi
+ \addtoplength[-1]{locwidth}{\useplength{toaddrwidth}}%
+ \if@bigloc
+ \setplength[.66667]{locwidth}{\useplength{locwidth}}%
+ \else
+ \setplength[.5]{locwidth}{\useplength{locwidth}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{lochpos}=\z@%
+ \setplength{lochpos}{\useplength{toaddrhpos}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \useplength{lochpos}<\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{-\useplength{lochpos}}%
+ \else
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr
+ \paperwidth-\useplength{lochpos}-\useplength{locwidth}
+ \relax}%
+ \fi
+ \put@notepaper@element(\@tempdima,\useplength{locvpos})%
+ (\useplength{locwidth},\useplength{locheight})%
+ {Element `location'}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% In einigen Fällen der Absenderanordnung muss hier nun eine ganze Menge getan
+% werden. In anderen ist hingegen nur wenig zu tun. Im Fall 0, also
+% linksbündiger Absender im Kopf wird nur die Absenderergänzung ausgegeben
+% (das erfolgt nach der Fallunterscheidung).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifcase\@alignfrom
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Im Fall 1, also zentrierter Absender im Kopf wird jedoch das Logo hier
+% platziert, die Absenderergänzung wird ggf. danach ausgegeben (das erfolgt
+% nach der Fallunterscheidung).%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98a}{2008/01/10}{bei zentriertem Absender wird die
+% Absenderergänzung ggf. unter dem Logo ausgegeben}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+ \if@logo
+ \ifkomavarempty{fromlogo}{\null}{%
+ {\raggedleft\noindent\usekomavar{fromlogo}\\
+ \vskip\parskip}\noindent}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Im Fall 2, also rechtsbündiger Absender im Kopf, wird auch nur die
+% Absenderergänzung ausgegeben (das erfolgt nach der Fallunterscheidung).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
+% sozusagen der linksbündige Kopf nachgebaut. Das Logo steht dabei
+% ggf. rechtsbündig oben.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+ \if@logo
+ \ifkomavarempty{fromlogo}{}{%
+ \raggedleft\usekomavar{fromlogo}\par}%
+ \fi
+ \raggedright
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Zuerst wird der Name gesetzt. Dabei soll eine eigene Schriftart für den
+% Namen verwendet werden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\usekomafont{fromname}\strut\ignorespaces
+ \usekomavar{fromname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Hat \verb|\@rulefrom| den nummerischen Wert 1, so soll direkt auf den
+% Absender eine Linie folgen. Die Länge dieser Linie kann vom Anwender
+% bestimmt oder automatisch gewählt werden. Es werden dabei die Pseudo-Längen
+% \texttt{fromrulewidth} und \texttt{fromrulethickness} verwendet. Ist
+% \texttt{fromrulewidth} 0, so wird sie automatisch bestimmt. Bei der
+% automatischen Längenbestimmung wird einfach eine Linie über die Gesamtbreite
+% der Absenderergänzung gesetzt.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \ifnum\@rulefrom=1\\[-.5\baselineskip]%
+ \usekomafont{fromrule}{%
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{fromrulewidth}}%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{locwidth}}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\rule\expandafter{\the\@tempdima}{%
+ \useplength{fromrulethickness}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \\
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Als Nächstes wird die Absenderadresse einschließlich aller optionalen Felder
+% gesetzt. Dabei werden optionale Felder nur gesetzt, wenn der entsprechende
+% Schalter \emph{true} ist. Die Adresse wird ebenfalls innerhalb einer Gruppe
+% in einer eigenen Schriftart gesetzt.%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
+% berücksichtigt}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\usekomafont{fromaddress}\strut\ignorespaces
+ \usekomavar{fromaddress}%
+ \if@phone\\\usekomavar*{fromphone}\usekomavar{fromphone}\fi%
+ \if@mobilephone
+ \\\usekomavar*{frommobilephone}\usekomavar{frommobilephone}%
+ \fi%
+ \if@fax\\\usekomavar*{fromfax}\usekomavar{fromfax}\fi%
+ \if@email\\\usekomavar*{fromemail}\usekomavar{fromemail}\fi%
+ \if@www\\\usekomavar*{fromurl}\usekomavar{fromurl}\fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Wie weiter oben erwähnt, kann auch an dieser Stelle eine Linie gesetzt
+% werden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\@rulefrom=2\\[-.5\baselineskip]%
+ \usekomafont{fromrule}{%
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{fromrulewidth}}%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{locwidth}}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\rule\expandafter{\the\@tempdima}{%
+ \useplength{fromrulethickness}}}%
+ \fi
+ \\
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Damit ist die Definition des linksbündigen Absenders in der
+% Absenderergänzung abgeschlossen. Im Fall 4, also rechtsbündiger Absender in
+% der Absenderergänzung wird hier exakt wie für Fall 3 verfahren. Nur ist
+% jetzt alles rechtsbündig.^^A%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
+% berücksichtigt}%^^A%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \or
+ \raggedleft
+ \if@logo
+ \ifkomavarempty{fromlogo}{}{\usekomavar{fromlogo}\par}%
+ \fi
+ {\usekomafont{fromname}\strut\ignorespaces
+ \usekomavar{fromname}%
+ {%
+ \ifnum\@rulefrom=1\\[-.5\baselineskip]%
+ \usekomafont{fromrule}{%
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{fromrulewidth}}%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{locwidth}}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\rule\expandafter{\the\@tempdima}{%
+ \useplength{fromrulethickness}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \\
+ }%
+ {\usekomafont{fromaddress}\strut\ignorespaces
+ \usekomavar{fromaddress}%
+ \if@phone\\\usekomavar*{fromphone}\usekomavar{fromphone}\fi%
+ \if@mobilephone%
+ \\\usekomavar*{frommobilephone}\usekomavar{frommobilephone}%
+ \fi%
+ \if@fax\\\usekomavar*{fromfax}\usekomavar{fromfax}\fi%
+ \if@email\\\usekomavar*{fromemail}\usekomavar{fromemail}\fi%
+ \if@www\\\usekomavar*{fromurl}\usekomavar{fromurl}\fi%
+ \ifnum\@rulefrom=2\\[-.5\baselineskip]%
+ \usekomafont{fromrule}{%
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{fromrulewidth}}%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\useplength{locwidth}}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\rule\expandafter{\the\@tempdima}{%
+ \useplength{fromrulethickness}}}%
+ \fi
+ \\
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In allen anderen Fällen wird ebenfalls die Absenderergänzung gesetzt.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fi
+ \usekomavar{location}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% That's it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }\relax
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@element@location
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@notepaper@element@refline}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/03}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% This notepaper element replaces the \cs{@datefield} of
+% \textsf{scrlttr2}. In opposite to \textsf{scrlttr2} this element has a
+% dedicated height \texttt{reflineheight}.
+% TODO: Still missing!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@notepaper@element@refline}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First of all test, whether or not their has to be set anything.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \if@refline
+ \let\do@set@reffield\@test@reffield
+%<trace> \let\@tempa\@empty
+ \@set@reffields
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Maybe we have to add the date:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifcase \@datepos
+ \or
+ \if@tempswa\addtoreffields{date}\fi
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@refline\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname if@tempswa\endcsname
+ \@test@reffield{date}%
+ \or
+ \if@tempswa
+ \edef\expandafter\@set@reffields{%
+ \unexpanded{\do@set@reffield{date}}%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\@set@reffields}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\let\csname if@refline\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname if@tempswa\endcsname
+ \@test@reffield{date}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have to print something, so let's calculate the position and height.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\useplength{refwidth}=\z@
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: refwidth by option}%
+ \if@refwide
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: refline=wide}%
+ \ifdim \useplength{toaddrhpos}>\z@
+ \setplength{refhpos}{\useplength{toaddrhpos}}%
+ \else
+ \setplength[-]{refhpos}{\useplength{toaddrhpos}}%
+ \fi
+ \setplength{refwidth}{\paperwidth -2\useplength{refhpos}}%
+ \else
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: refline=narrow}%
+ \setplength{refwidth}{\textwidth}%
+ \setplength{refhpos}{\oddsidemargin+1in}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: refwidth by pseudo-length}%
+ \ifdim\useplength{refhpos}=\z@
+ \setlength{\@tempdima}{\dimexpr
+ \textwidth-\useplength{refwidth}
+ \relax}%
+ \setlength{\@tempdimb}{\dimexpr \oddsidemarin+1in\relax}%
+ \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\dimexpr \paperwidth-\textwidth\relax}%
+ \divide\@tempdimb by 32768\relax
+ \divide\@tempdimc by 32768\relax
+ \ifdim\@tempdimc=\z@\else
+ \multiply\@tempdima by\@tempdimb
+ \divide\@tempdima by\@tempdimc
+ \fi
+ \setplength{refhpos}{\@tempdima}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \typeout{TRACE: Reference line with \@tempa^^J
+ \space\space\space\space\space\space
+ at refhpos=\the\useplength{refhpos},^^J
+ \space\space\space\space\space\space\space\space\space
+ refvpos=\the\useplength{refvpos},^^J
+ \space\space\space\space\space\space\space\space\space
+ refwidth=\the\useplength{refwidth},^^J
+ \space\space\space\space\space\space\space\space\space
+ refheight=\the\useplength{refheight}}%
+%</trace>
+ \put@notepaper@element
+ (\useplength{refhpos},\useplength{refvpos})%
+ (\useplength{refwidth},\useplength{refheight})%
+ {Element `refline'}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Last but not least print it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@refline
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Print a reference line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\do@set@reffield\@set@reffield\@tempswafalse\@set@reffields
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Print only place and date.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \@datepos=1 \hspace*{\fill}\fi
+ {%
+ \usekomafont{placeanddate}{%
+ \ifkomavarempty{place}{}{%
+ \usekomavar{place}\usekomavar{placeseparator}%
+ }%
+ \usekomavar{date}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@element@refline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@notepaper@elements
+% \begin{macro}{\put@notepager@element}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\put@@notepager@@element}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/03}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% A helper macro to output one element at a specific
+% position. \texttt{(\#1,\#2)} is the position, \texttt{(\#3,\#4)} the allowed
+% width and height, \texttt{\#5} is the name of the element (used for warning
+% messages only), \texttt{\#6} is the element content. The content is first
+% put into a temporary box of type \texttt{vtop}. Optional code can be
+% executed immediately before testing the total height of this box
+% \cs{@tempboxa} and before using it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\put@notepaper@element}{}
+\long\def\put@notepaper@element(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5#6{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar [%]
+ {\put@@notepaper@@element({#1},{#2})({#3},{#4}){#5}{#6}}%
+ {\put@@notepaper@@element({#1},{#2})({#3},{#4}){#5}{#6}[]}%
+}
+\newcommand{\put@@notepaper@@element}{}
+\long\def\put@@notepaper@@element(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5#6[#7]{%
+ \put(\LenToUnit{\dimexpr #1\relax},\LenToUnit{-\dimexpr #2\relax}){%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vtop{%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \vskip \z@
+ \hsize=\dimexpr #3\relax
+ \linewidth=\hsize
+ \columnwidth=\linewidth
+ \textwidth=\columnwidth
+ \parfillskip=\z@ \@plus 1fil\relax
+ #6
+ \color@endgroup
+ }%
+ #7%
+ \ifdim \dimexpr\ht\@tempboxa+\dp\@tempboxa\relax > \dimexpr #4\relax
+ \PackageWarning{scrletter}{#5
+ \the\dimexpr \ht\@tempboxa+\dp\@tempboxa-(#4)\relax\space
+ to high.\MessageBreak
+ The content could collide with other page contents\MessageBreak
+ or break the page edges. You should reduce the\MessageBreak
+ size before usage%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \usebox\@tempboxa
+ }%
+}
+%</package&body&willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \put@@notepaper@@element
+% \end{macro}%^^A \put@notepaper@element
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
% \begin{macro}{\move@topt}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}^^A
-% Für die folgenden Aktionen wird ein Makro benötigt, mit dem man vertikal von
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% Für die folgenden Aktionen wird ein Makro benötigt, mit dem man vertikal von
% der relativen Seitenposition zur relativen Papierposition gelangen kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\move@topt}{%
@@ -1978,9 +2872,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\move@frompt}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}^^A
-% Natürlich wird auch ein Makro benötigt, um vertikal von einer relativen
-% Papierposition wieder auf die relative Seitenposition zurück zu gelangen.
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% Natürlich wird auch ein Makro benötigt, um vertikal von einer relativen
+% Papierposition wieder auf die relative Seitenposition zurück zu gelangen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\move@frompt}{%
\vskip 1in\vskip \topmargin%
@@ -1994,8 +2888,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\move@topl}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}^^A
-% Für die folgenden Aktionen wird außerdem ein Makro benötigt, mit dem man
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% Für die folgenden Aktionen wird außerdem ein Makro benötigt, mit dem man
% horizontal von der relativen Seitenposition zur relativen Papierposition
% gelangen kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2006,9 +2900,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\move@frompl}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}^^A
-% Natürlich wird auch ein Makro benötigt, um horizontal von einer relativen
-% Papierposition wieder auf die relative Seitenposition zurück zu gelangen.
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% Natürlich wird auch ein Makro benötigt, um horizontal von einer relativen
+% Papierposition wieder auf die relative Seitenposition zurück zu gelangen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\move@frompl}{%
\hskip 1in%
@@ -2021,13 +2915,13 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\vb@t@z}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Absatzformatierung mit \cs{setparsizes}}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/20}{\cs{long}}
-% Ausserdem wird ein vertikales Äquivalent zu |\rlap| benötigt.
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Absatzformatierung mit \cs{setparsizes}}
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/20}{\cs{long}}
+% Ausserdem wird ein vertikales Äquivalent zu |\rlap| benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\vb@t@z}[1]{{%
- \setbox\z@\vbox to\z@{#1\vss}%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox to\z@{\color@begingroup #1\color@endgroup\vss}%
\setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@ plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
\setlength{\baselineskip}{\z@}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{\ht0}\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\dp0}%
@@ -2038,25 +2932,27 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@foldmarks}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{\texttt{mfoldmarkvpos} wird verwendet}
-% Für die Faltmarken müssen nicht nur Abstände definiert werden, es wird auch
-% ein Befehl benötigt, um die Faltmarken zu setzen.
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{\texttt{mfoldmarkvpos} wird verwendet}%^^A
+% Für die Faltmarken müssen nicht nur Abstände definiert werden, es wird auch
+% ein Befehl benötigt, um die Faltmarken zu setzen.
% \begin{macro}{\@hfoldmark}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dabei werden nur die horizontalen Faltmarken gesetzt, die tatsächlich
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/08}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dabei werden nur die horizontalen Faltmarken gesetzt, die tatsächlich
% existieren.
% \begin{macro}{\@foldmark}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/06/06}{\cs{vskip} in \cs{vb@t@z} verschoben, damit es
-% vom Satzspiegel unabhängig wird}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Dicke konfigurierbar}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Schrift (Farbe) konfigurierbar}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/06/06}{\cs{vskip} in \cs{vb@t@z} verschoben, damit es
+% vom Satzspiegel unabhängig wird}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Dicke konfigurierbar}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/08}{Schrift (Farbe) konfigurierbar}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/29}{different versions for package and class}%^^A
% Das geht am einfachsten, wenn wir auch einen Befehl haben, mit dem man eine
% einzelne Faltmarke relativ zur aktuellen Position setzen kann. Dies
-% geschieht mit Hilfe von |\rlap|, damit die horizontale Position unverändert
+% geschieht mit Hilfe von |\rlap|, damit die horizontale Position unverändert
% bleibt. Als Parameter werden der vertikale Abstand zur aktuellen Position
-% und die Länder der Marke übergeben.
+% und die Länder der Marke übergeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|!willbe>
\newcommand*{\@foldmark}[2]{%
\vb@t@z{\setlength{\@tempdima}{#1}%
\addtolengthplength[-.5]{\@tempdima}{foldmarkthickness}%
@@ -2066,12 +2962,29 @@
\rule{#2}{\useplength{foldmarkthickness}}}}}%
\ignorespaces
}
+%</class|!willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% The package version uses \cs{put} to set the marks. It has a possition, a
+% direction and a length, so it can handle the horizontal and the vertical
+% foldmarks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+\newcommand*{\@foldmark}{}
+\def\@foldmark(#1,#2)(#3,#4)#5{%
+ \put(\LenToUnit{#1},-\LenToUnit{#2}){%
+ \linethickness{\useplength{foldmarkthickness}}%
+ \line(#3,-#4){\LenToUnit{#5}}%
+ }%
+}
+%</package&willbe>
\newcommand*{\@hfoldmark}[1]{%
\begingroup
\@expandtwoargs\in@{#1}{\@usefolds}%
\ifin@
\lowercase{%
\edef\@tempa{%
+%<*class|!willbe>
\noexpand\ifdim \noexpand\useplength{#1foldmarkvpos}=\noexpand\z@
\noexpand\else
\noexpand\@foldmark{%
@@ -2080,6 +2993,34 @@
\noexpand\useplength{#1foldmarklength}%
}%
\noexpand\fi
+%</class|!willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/29}{different handling of the package version}%^^A
+% The package version of \cs{@foldmark} has a new direction argument, because
+% it handles horizontal and vertical foldmarks. And if there is not a
+% pseudo-length for the vertical possition of the horizontal fold-mark the
+% possition is half of the paper height. This is for the ``P''-mark.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+ \Ifplength{#1foldmarkvpos}{%
+ \ifdim \useplength{#1foldmarkvpos}=\z@\else
+ \noexpand\@foldmark(\noexpand\useplength{foldmarkhpos},%
+ \noexpand\useplength{#1foldmarkvpos})%
+ (1,0)%
+ {%
+ \noexpand\useplength{#1foldmarklength}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }{%
+ \noexpand\@foldmark(\noexpand\useplength{foldmarkhpos},%
+ .5\noexpand\paperheight)%
+ (1,0)%
+ {%
+ \noexpand\useplength{#1foldmarklength}%
+ }%
+ }%
+%</package&willbe>
}%
}%
\@tempa
@@ -2088,17 +3029,23 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@vfoldmark}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Für die vertikale(n) Faltmarke(n) gilt prinzipiell das gleiche. Dabei ist
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/10}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Für die vertikale(n) Faltmarke(n) gilt prinzipiell das gleiche. Dabei ist
% lediglich zu beachten, dass die Linie hier komplett oberhalb der Grundlinie
-% gesetzt wird, also die vertikale Position um die Länge nach unten zu
+% gesetzt wird, also die vertikale Position um die Länge nach unten zu
% verschieben ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@vfoldmark}[1]{%
\begingroup
- \@expandtwoargs\in@{#1}{\@usefolds}%
- \ifin@
- \ifdim \useplength{lfoldmarkhpos}=\z@\else
+ \ifdim \useplength{lfoldmarkhpos}=\z@\else
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{#1}{\@usefolds}%
+ \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/29}{package version uses \cs{@foldmark}}%^^A
+% The class version does still work using \cs{rule}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|willbe>
\vb@t@z{%
\ifdim \useplength{foldmarkvpos}<\z@
\nobreak\vskip \paperheight\nobreak
@@ -2116,10 +3063,24 @@
}%
}%
\ignorespaces
+%</class|willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% But the package version uses \cs{@foldmark}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+ \@foldmark(\useplength{lfoldmarkhpos},\useplength{foldmarkvpos})%
+ (0,1)%
+ {\useplength{lfoldmarklength}}%
+%</package&willbe>
\fi
\fi
\endgroup
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The main foldmark command is only needed by the class.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|!willbe>
\newcommand*{\@foldmarks}{%
\if@fold%
\typeout{Foldmarks: yes}%
@@ -2154,6 +3115,7 @@
\typeout{Foldmarks: no}%
\fi%
}
+%</class|!willbe>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -2161,29 +3123,29 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@savevbox}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{zusätzlich ein optionales Argument}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/07}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{zusätzlich ein optionales Argument}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@savevbox@warning}
% \begin{macro}{\@savevbox@warningtrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@savevbox@warningfalse}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{Neu}%^^A
% Wenn eine der vertikalen Boxen in \cs{opening} zu einer \texttt{overbox
-% \string\vbox\space} Meldung führt, weiss letztlich niemand, welche Box dafür
+% \string\vbox\space} Meldung führt, weiss letztlich niemand, welche Box dafür
% verantwortlich war. Deshalb definieren wir hier ein Makro, das ggf. eine
-% Meldung ausgibt, die erklärt, welches Element die Ursache war und was man
-% tun kann. Das erste Argument ist dabei die Sollhöhe der Box, das zweite
+% Meldung ausgibt, die erklärt, welches Element die Ursache war und was man
+% tun kann. Das erste Argument ist dabei die Sollhöhe der Box, das zweite
% Argument ist der Boxinhalt, das dritte Argument is der Name des Elements,
-% das zu hoch ist, das vierte der Name der Elementhöhe und das fünfte
-% schließlich der Befehl, mit dem das Element vom Anwender definiert werden
+% das zu hoch ist, das vierte der Name der Elementhöhe und das fünfte
+% schließlich der Befehl, mit dem das Element vom Anwender definiert werden
% kann. Das optionale Argument wird nur bei der Ausgabe mit ausgegeben, findet
-% jedoch bei der Berechnung keine Berücksichtigung.
+% jedoch bei der Berechnung keine Berücksichtigung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@savevbox@warning\@savevbox@warningtrue
\newcommand{\@savevbox}[6][]{%
\begingroup%
\vbox to #2{#1#3}%
\if@savevbox@warning\@savevbox@warningfalse%
- \setbox\z@\vbox{#3}%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\color@begingroup #3\color@endgroup}%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{#2}%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{\ht0}\addtolength{\@tempdimb}{\dp0}%
\ifdim \@tempdimb>\@tempdima%
@@ -2208,23 +3170,29 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@firstheadfootfield}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{\cs{parfillskip} lokal auf 0 gesetzt}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{Fuß explizit in eine Box gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/23}{Positionierung verbessert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/22}{Optionen \texttt{firsthead} und
-% \texttt{firstfoot} beachten}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstheadhpos}^^A
-% beachtet}
-% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstfoothpos}^^A
-% beachtet}
-% Ab Version 2.8n werden Kopf und Fuß der ersten Seite nicht mehr per
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{\cs{parfillskip} lokal auf 0 gesetzt}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/30}{Fuß explizit in eine Box gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/23}{Positionierung verbessert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/22}{Optionen \texttt{firsthead} und
+% \texttt{firstfoot} beachten}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstheadhpos}
+% beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2009/11/09}{neue Pseudo-Länge \texttt{firstfoothpos}
+% beachtet}%^^A
+% Ab Version 2.8n werden Kopf und Fuß der ersten Seite nicht mehr per
% Seitenstil \texttt{firstpage} gesetzt, sondern mit einem speziellen
% Feld. Dabei wird auch beachtet, dass dieses Feld im Kopf eine bestimmte aber
-% beschränkte Höhe hat. Diese Höhe ist unabhängig von der normalen Kopfhöhe
+% beschränkte Höhe hat. Diese Höhe ist unabhängig von der normalen Kopfhöhe
% und richtet sich stattdessen nach der Position des Adressfeldes.
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{package only enlarges page}%^^A
+% From \KOMAScript~3.27 the \textsf{scrlayer} package does not print the page
+% head or foot here. It only enlarges or shrinks the first page.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@firstheadfootfield}{%
+%<*class|!willbe>
\if@firsthead
\typeout{Head of first page}%
\move@topt\vskip\useplength{firstheadvpos}%
@@ -2233,9 +3201,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Wenn \texttt{firstheadhpos} positiv und kleiner als die Seitenbreite ist,
% dann ist es der Abstand des Kopfes vom linken Rand.
-% Wenn \texttt{firstheadhpos} negativ und betragsmäßig kleiner als die
+% Wenn \texttt{firstheadhpos} negativ und betragsmäßig kleiner als die
% Seitenbreite ist, dann ist es der Abstand des Kopfes vom rechten Rand.
-% Wenn \texttt{firstheadhpos} größer als die Seitenbreite ist, dann wird der
+% Wenn \texttt{firstheadhpos} größer als die Seitenbreite ist, dann wird der
% Kopf zentriert.
% Wenn \texttt{firstheadhpos} kleiner als die negative Seitenbreite ist, dann
% wird der Kopf am linken Rand des Satzspiegels ausgerichtet.
@@ -2264,9 +3232,9 @@
\addtolength{\@tempskipa}{-\baselineskip}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Da sich einige -- beispielsweise |briefkopf.sty| -- darauf verlassen, dass
-% |\textwidth| die Breite des Briefkopfes ist, wird diese Länge lokal
-% entsprechend gesetzt. Außerdem wird dafür gesorgt, dass |\parfillskip| hier
-% nicht berücksichtigt wird.
+% |\textwidth| die Breite des Briefkopfes ist, wird diese Länge lokal
+% entsprechend gesetzt. Außerdem wird dafür gesorgt, dass |\parfillskip| hier
+% nicht berücksichtigt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\textwidth}{\useplength{firstheadwidth}}%
\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ \@plus 1fil}%
@@ -2288,9 +3256,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Wenn \texttt{firstfoothpos} positiv und kleiner als die Seitenbreite ist,
% dann ist es der Abstand des Kopfes vom linken Rand.
-% Wenn \texttt{firstfoothpos} negativ und betragsmäßig kleiner als die
+% Wenn \texttt{firstfoothpos} negativ und betragsmäßig kleiner als die
% Seitenbreite ist, dann ist es der Abstand des Kopfes vom rechten Rand.
-% Wenn \texttt{firstfoothpos} größer als die Seitenbreite ist, dann wird der
+% Wenn \texttt{firstfoothpos} größer als die Seitenbreite ist, dann wird der
% Kopf zentriert.
% Wenn \texttt{firstfoothpos} kleiner als die negative Seitenbreite ist, dann
% wird der Kopf am linken Rand des Satzspiegels ausgerichtet.
@@ -2317,9 +3285,9 @@
\vskip\useplength{firstfootvpos}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Da sich einige -- beispielsweise |briefkopf.sty| -- darauf verlassen, dass
-% |\textwidth| die Breite des Brieffußes ist, wird diese Länge lokal
-% entsprechend gesetzt. Außerdem wird dafür gesorgt, dass |\parfillskip| hier
-% nicht berücksichtigt wird.
+% |\textwidth| die Breite des Brieffußes ist, wird diese Länge lokal
+% entsprechend gesetzt. Außerdem wird dafür gesorgt, dass |\parfillskip| hier
+% nicht berücksichtigt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\textwidth}{\useplength{firstfootwidth}}%
\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ \@plus 1fil}%
@@ -2332,6 +3300,7 @@
\typeout{No foot at first page}%
\fi
\move@frompt%
+%</class|!willbe>
{%
\setlength{\@tempdima}{1in}\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\topmargin}%
\addtolength{\@tempdima}{\headheight}%
@@ -2351,25 +3320,27 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@addrfield}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/04/01}{\cs{parfillskip} lokal geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/06/03}{Sonderbehandlung für Adressfeld rechts}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/02/20}{\cs{noindent} eingefügt bei
-% \texttt{specialmail}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/31}{Benutzung von \cs{backaddr@format}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Priorität kann Versandart ersetzen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/04/01}{\cs{parfillskip} lokal geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/06/03}{Sonderbehandlung für Adressfeld rechts}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/02/20}{\cs{noindent} eingefügt bei
+% \texttt{specialmail}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/31}{Benutzung von \cs{backaddr@format}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Priorität kann Versandart ersetzen}%^^A
% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neue Anschriftmodi \texttt{PP},
-% \texttt{backgroundimage}, \texttt{addresseeimage}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/30}{Schreibfehler bei »addressee« korrigiert}^^A
+% \texttt{backgroundimage}, \texttt{addresseeimage}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/30}{Schreibfehler bei »addressee« korrigiert}%^^A
% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/07/29}{Absatzparameter werden passend
-% eingestellt}^^A
+% eingestellt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{zweimal fehlende Klammern bei \texttt{toname}
-% ergänzt}^^A
+% ergänzt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{zweimal fehlende Klammern und \cs{endgraf} bei
-% \texttt{toaddress} ergänzt}^^A
-% Dasselbe gilt auch für das Adressfeld für Fensterumschläge. Die
-% Rücksendeadresse und die Briefart werden dabei mit eigenen
+% \texttt{toaddress} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/27}{only at \textsf{scrlttr2}}%^^A
+% Dasselbe gilt auch für das Adressfeld für Fensterumschläge. Die
+% Rücksendeadresse und die Briefart werden dabei mit eigenen
% Formatieranweisungen gesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|!willbe>
\newcommand*{\@addrfield}{%
\ifcase \ifnum\@afieldmode=5 \@ne\else\@afieldmode\fi\relax
\typeout{Address: No}%
@@ -2455,7 +3426,7 @@
\begingroup%
% \end{macrocode}
% In den Modi \texttt{PP}, \texttt{backgroundimage} oder \texttt{addresseeimage}
-% gibt es weder Rücksendeadresse noch Versandart aber ebenfalls eine Priorität.
+% gibt es weder Rücksendeadresse noch Versandart aber ebenfalls eine Priorität.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@baddr
\let\@tempa\@empty\let\@tempb\@empty
@@ -2517,9 +3488,9 @@
\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
\hsize \dimexpr \useplength{PPheadwidth}-2\fboxsep\relax
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/17}{\cs{setbox} durch \cs{sbox} ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/17}{\cs{setbox} durch \cs{sbox} ersetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@endstrut} statt
-% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}^^A
+% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\sbox\@tempboxa{%
{\fontsize{20.74pt}{20.74pt}\selectfont
@@ -2616,10 +3587,11 @@
\vskip-\useplength{toaddrvpos}\move@frompt
\fi
}
+%</class|!willbe>
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\specialmail@format}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Die Anweisung, die für das Aussehen der Versandart zuständig ist.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Die Anweisung, die für das Aussehen der Versandart zuständig ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\specialmail@format}[1]{}
\let\specialmail@format\underline
@@ -2627,7 +3599,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ogobble}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/22}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/22}{Neu}%^^A
% In obiger Definition wird das Makro \cs{@ogobble} verwendet, um
% einen optionalen Parameter zu vernichten, falls dieser existiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2637,12 +3609,14 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@locfield}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/17}{\cs{noindent} eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/07}{\cs{noindent} nach dem Logo}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/07/23}{Berechnung der Breite hierher verschoben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/06/03}{Sonderbehandlung für Adressfeld rechts}^^A
-% Das "`locfield"' wird unabhängig von der Adresse gesetzt.
-% \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/17}{\cs{noindent} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/07}{\cs{noindent} nach dem Logo}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/07/23}{Berechnung der Breite hierher verschoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/06/03}{Sonderbehandlung für Adressfeld rechts}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/27}{only at \textsf{scrlttr2}}%^^A
+% Das "`locfield"' wird unabhängig von der Adresse gesetzt.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|!willbe>
\newcommand*{\@locfield}{%
\ifdim \useplength{locwidth}=\z@%
\@setplength{locwidth}{\paperwidth}%
@@ -2659,45 +3633,45 @@
\fi%
\fi%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/13}{Der Absender kann nun ebenfalls in der
-% Absenderergänzung stehen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98b}{2008/01/30}{Absenderergänzung immer setzen, wenn
-% verwendet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/13}{Der Absender kann nun ebenfalls in der
+% Absenderergänzung stehen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98b}{2008/01/30}{Absenderergänzung immer setzen, wenn
+% verwendet}%^^A
% Je nach Absenderanordnung muss hier nun ebenfalls etwas getan werden.
-% Der Fall 0, also linksbündiger Absender im Kopf spielt hier keine Rolle.
+% Der Fall 0, also linksbündiger Absender im Kopf spielt hier keine Rolle.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\@alignfrom
% \end{macrocode}
% Im Fall 1, also zentrierter Absender im Kopf wird jedoch das Logo hier
-% platziert, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
+% platziert, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\if@logo
\ifkomavarempty{location}{\setkomavar{location}{\null}}{}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Im Fall 2, also rechtsbündiger Absender im Kopf, ist auch nichts zu tun.
+% Im Fall 2, also rechtsbündiger Absender im Kopf, ist auch nichts zu tun.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
-% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
-% eine Menge ausgegeben, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
+% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
+% eine Menge ausgegeben, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\ifkomavarempty{location}{\setkomavar{location}{\null}}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
-% eine Menge ausgegeben, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
+% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
+% eine Menge ausgegeben, also darf die Absenderergänzung nicht leer sein.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\ifkomavarempty{location}{\setkomavar{location}{\null}}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Alle anderen Fälle sind wie hier ebenfalls ohne Bedeutung.
+% Alle anderen Fälle sind wie hier ebenfalls ohne Bedeutung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi
\ifkomavarempty{location}{%
\typeout{Location field: empty}%
- }{%
+ }{%
\typeout{Location field: yes}%
\ifdim \useplength{lochpos}=\z@%
\@setplength{lochpos}{\useplength{toaddrhpos}}%
@@ -2722,18 +3696,18 @@
\@savevbox{\useplength{locheight}}{%
\noindent\hsize\useplength{locwidth}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% In einigen Fällen der Absenderanordnung muss hier nun eine ganze Menge getan
+% In einigen Fällen der Absenderanordnung muss hier nun eine ganze Menge getan
% werden. In anderen ist hingegen nur wenig zu tun.
-% Im Fall 0, also linksbündiger Absender im Kopf wird nur die
-% Absenderergänzung ausgegeben (das erfolgt nach der Fallunterscheidung).
+% Im Fall 0, also linksbündiger Absender im Kopf wird nur die
+% Absenderergänzung ausgegeben (das erfolgt nach der Fallunterscheidung).
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\@alignfrom
% \end{macrocode}
% Im Fall 1, also zentrierter Absender im Kopf wird jedoch das Logo hier
-% platziert, die Absenderergänzung wird ggf. danach ausgegeben (das erfolgt
+% platziert, die Absenderergänzung wird ggf. danach ausgegeben (das erfolgt
% nach der Fallunterscheidung).
% \changes{v2.98a}{2008/01/10}{bei zentriertem Absender wird die
-% Absenderergänzung ggf. unter dem Logo ausgegeben}^^A
+% Absenderergänzung ggf. unter dem Logo ausgegeben}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\if@logo
@@ -2742,14 +3716,14 @@
\vskip\parskip}\noindent}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Im Fall 2, also rechtsbündiger Absender im Kopf, wird auch nur die
-% Absenderergänzung ausgegeben (das erfolgt nach der Fallunterscheidung).
+% Im Fall 2, also rechtsbündiger Absender im Kopf, wird auch nur die
+% Absenderergänzung ausgegeben (das erfolgt nach der Fallunterscheidung).
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
% \end{macrocode}
-% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
-% sozusagen der linksbündige Kopf nachgebaut. Das Logo steht dabei
-% ggf. rechtsbündig oben.
+% Im Fall 3, also linksbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
+% sozusagen der linksbündige Kopf nachgebaut. Das Logo steht dabei
+% ggf. rechtsbündig oben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\if@logo
@@ -2758,19 +3732,19 @@
\fi
\raggedright
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zuerst wird der Name gesetzt. Dabei soll eine eigene Schriftart für
+% Zuerst wird der Name gesetzt. Dabei soll eine eigene Schriftart für
% den Namen verwendet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
{\usekomafont{fromname}\strut\ignorespaces
\usekomavar{fromname}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Hat \verb|\@rulefrom| den nummerischen Wert 1, so soll direkt auf den
-% Absender eine Linie folgen. Die Länge dieser Linie kann vom Anwender
-% bestimmt oder automatisch gewählt werden. Es werden dabei die
-% Pseudo-Längen \texttt{fromrulewidth} und \texttt{fromrulethickness}
+% Absender eine Linie folgen. Die Länge dieser Linie kann vom Anwender
+% bestimmt oder automatisch gewählt werden. Es werden dabei die
+% Pseudo-Längen \texttt{fromrulewidth} und \texttt{fromrulethickness}
% verwendet. Ist \texttt{fromrulewidth} 0, so wird sie automatisch
-% bestimmt. Bei der automatischen Längenbestimmung wird einfach eine Linie
-% über die Gesamtbreite der Absenderergänzung gesetzt.
+% bestimmt. Bei der automatischen Längenbestimmung wird einfach eine Linie
+% über die Gesamtbreite der Absenderergänzung gesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
{%
\ifnum\@rulefrom=1\\[-.5\baselineskip]%
@@ -2787,13 +3761,13 @@
\\
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als Nächstes wird die Absenderadresse einschließlich aller
+% Als Nächstes wird die Absenderadresse einschließlich aller
% optionalen Felder gesetzt. Dabei werden optionale Felder nur
% gesetzt, wenn der entsprechende Schalter \emph{true} ist. Die
% Adresse wird ebenfalls innerhalb einer Gruppe in einer eigenen
% Schriftart gesetzt.%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
-% berücksichtigt}%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
+% berücksichtigt}%
% \begin{macrocode}
{\usekomafont{fromaddress}\strut\ignorespaces
\usekomavar{fromaddress}%
@@ -2805,7 +3779,7 @@
\if@email\\\usekomavar*{fromemail}\usekomavar{fromemail}\fi%
\if@www\\\usekomavar*{fromurl}\usekomavar{fromurl}\fi%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wie weiter oben erwähnt, kann auch an dieser Stelle eine Linie
+% Wie weiter oben erwähnt, kann auch an dieser Stelle eine Linie
% gesetzt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@rulefrom=2\\[-.5\baselineskip]%
@@ -2820,12 +3794,12 @@
\\
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Damit ist die Definition des linksbündigen Absenders in der
-% Absenderergänzung abgeschlossen.
-% Im Fall 4, also rechtsbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
-% exakt wie für Fall 3 verfahren. Nur ist jetzt alles rechtsbündig.%
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
-% berücksichtigt}%
+% Damit ist die Definition des linksbündigen Absenders in der
+% Absenderergänzung abgeschlossen.
+% Im Fall 4, also rechtsbündiger Absender in der Absenderergänzung wird hier
+% exakt wie für Fall 3 verfahren. Nur ist jetzt alles rechtsbündig.%
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Variable \texttt{frommobilephone} wird
+% berücksichtigt}%
% \begin{macrocode}
\or
\raggedleft
@@ -2869,7 +3843,7 @@
\\
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% In allen anderen Fällen wird ebenfalls die Absenderergänzung gesetzt.
+% In allen anderen Fällen wird ebenfalls die Absenderergänzung gesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\fi
\usekomavar{location}%
@@ -2884,27 +3858,28 @@
\vskip-\useplength{locvpos}\move@frompt
}%
}
+%</class|!willbe>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@datefield}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Schalter \cs{if@tempwa} wird bereits hier auf
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Schalter \cs{if@tempwa} wird bereits hier auf
% \texttt{true} gesetzt}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neue Fontelemente}^^A
-% Je nachdem, welche Felder definiert sind, muss eine geschäftsmäßiger
-% Standardbrief oder ein eher persönliches Aussehen gewählt werden.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neue Fontelemente}%^^A
+% Je nachdem, welche Felder definiert sind, muss eine geschäftsmäßiger
+% Standardbrief oder ein eher persönliches Aussehen gewählt werden.
% \begin{macro}{\do@set@reffield}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Das ist ein \cs{do} für die Felder und bekommt innerhalb von
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Das ist ein \cs{do} für die Felder und bekommt innerhalb von
% \cs{@datefield} unterschiedliche Bedeutungen. An dieser Stelle wird es daher
% nur reserviert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\do@set@reffield}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@set@reffield}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/17}{\cs{setbox} durch \cs{sbox} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/17}{\cs{setbox} durch \cs{sbox} ersetzt}
% Einzelne Felder werden mit Hilfe dieses Makros gesetzt. Als Parameter wird
-% der Name des Feldes übergeben. Es wird dann davon ausgegangen, dass der
+% der Name des Feldes übergeben. Es wird dann davon ausgegangen, dass der
% Name des Feldes in der jeweiligen Sprache im Makro
% \verb|\|\texttt{\emph{\#1}}\verb|name| und der Wert des Feldes in
% \verb|\var|\texttt{\emph{\#1}} zu finden ist.
@@ -2923,8 +3898,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@test@reffield}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro testet, ob ein Feld tatsächlich zu setzen ist und setzt
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro testet, ob ein Feld tatsächlich zu setzen ist und setzt
% ggf. \cs{@tempswa}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@test@reffield}[1]{%
@@ -2937,15 +3912,15 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@set@reffields}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% Dieses Makro enthält alle Aufrufe von \cs{@set@reffield}, die durchzuführen
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro enthält alle Aufrufe von \cs{@set@reffield}, die durchzuführen
% sind. Das Makro kann mit Hilfe von \cs{addtoreffields} erweitert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@set@reffields}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\addtoreffields}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{Verwendung von \cs{do@set@reffield} an Stelle
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{Verwendung von \cs{do@set@reffield} an Stelle
% von \cs{@set@reffield}}
% Dieses Makro erwartet als obligatorisches Argument den Namen einer
% KOMA-Script Variable. Der Befehl arbeitet lokal zur aktuellen Umgebung.
@@ -2957,8 +3932,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\removereffields}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% Es gibt auch einen Befehl, um alle Felder aus der Geschäftszeile zu
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% Es gibt auch einen Befehl, um alle Felder aus der Geschäftszeile zu
% entfernen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\removereffields}{%
@@ -2968,8 +3943,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\defaultreffields}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% Ebenso ein Befehl, um die üblichen Felder zu setzen.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% Ebenso ein Befehl, um die üblichen Felder zu setzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\defaultreffields}{%
\removereffields
@@ -2986,22 +3961,23 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \changes{v2.3e}{1996/05/31}{Abstand zwischen Ort und Datum eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/18}{für den Brieftyp \texttt{KOMAold} anschließend
-% einen zusätzlichen vertikalen Abstand eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{rlap} eingefügt}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Leertests entfernt, da in \cs{@set@reffield}^^A
-% bereits enthalten}
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{Berechnung von \texttt{refwidth} an die
-% Dokumentation angepasst}
-% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{Berechnung von \texttt{refhpos} hinzugefügt}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Absatzeinzug mit \cs{setparsizes} abschalten}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neue Font-Elemente}^^A
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{\cs{do@set@reffield} muss initialisiert
-% werden}
+% \changes{v2.3e}{1996/05/31}{Abstand zwischen Ort und Datum eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/18}{für den Brieftyp \texttt{KOMAold} anschließend
+% einen zusätzlichen vertikalen Abstand eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{rlap} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Leertests entfernt, da in \cs{@set@reffield}
+% bereits enthalten}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{Berechnung von \texttt{refwidth} an die
+% Dokumentation angepasst}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{Berechnung von \texttt{refhpos} hinzugefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Absatzeinzug mit \cs{setparsizes} abschalten}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/14}{Neue Font-Elemente}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/06}{\cs{do@set@reffield} muss initialisiert
+% werden}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@datefield}{{%
+\newcommand*{\@datefield}{%
+ {%
\setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@ plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
\ifdim\useplength{refwidth}=\z@
\if@refwide
@@ -3021,26 +3997,26 @@
\ifdim\useplength{refhpos}=\z@
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wir bestimmen zunächst, um wieviel die Geschäftszeile schmaler ist als der
+% Wir bestimmen zunächst, um wieviel die Geschäftszeile schmaler ist als der
% Textbereich.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\@tempdima{\textwidth}%
\addtolengthplength[-]{\@tempdima}{refwidth}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann wird bestimmt, wie groß der linke Rand tatsächlich ist.
+% Dann wird bestimmt, wie groß der linke Rand tatsächlich ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\@tempdimb{\oddsidemargin}%
\addtolength\@tempdimb{1in}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ebenso wird bestimmt, wie groß der linke und rechte Rand zusammen sind.
+% Ebenso wird bestimmt, wie groß der linke und rechte Rand zusammen sind.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdimc}{\paperwidth}%
\addtolength{\@tempdimc}{-\textwidth}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt wird aus dem Gesamtrand der Geschäftszeile der linke Rand der
-% Geschäftszeile so bestimmt, dass das Randverhältnis dabei unverändert
+% Jetzt wird aus dem Gesamtrand der Geschäftszeile der linke Rand der
+% Geschäftszeile so bestimmt, dass das Randverhältnis dabei unverändert
% bleibt. Dabei erlauben wir uns eine gewisse Rechenungenauigkeit beim
-% Verhältnis.
+% Verhältnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
\divide\@tempdimb by 32768\relax
\divide\@tempdimc by 32768\relax
@@ -3055,7 +4031,7 @@
\@tempswafalse
\move@topt\vskip\useplength{refvpos}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt kontrollieren wir, ob überhaupt etwas auszugeben ist:
+% Jetzt kontrollieren wir, ob überhaupt etwas auszugeben ist:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempswafalse
\let\do@set@reffield\@test@reffield
@@ -3084,9 +4060,9 @@
\if@tempswa
\ifnum \@datepos=1 \@set@reffield{date}\fi%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Seit Version~2.97c wird hier auch noch getestet, ob die Geschäftszeile
-% möglicherweise mit zu großer Schrift gesetzt wird.
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/17}{\cs{setbox} durch \cs{sbox} ersetzt}
+% Seit Version~2.97c wird hier auch noch getestet, ob die Geschäftszeile
+% möglicherweise mit zu großer Schrift gesetzt wird.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/17}{\cs{setbox} durch \cs{sbox} ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\sbox\z@{\usekomafont{refname}\strutbox}%
\ifdim\ht\z@>\ht\strutbox
@@ -3104,10 +4080,10 @@
\fi
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% Hier landen wir schließlich, wenn gar keine Felder ausgegeben wurden, also
+% Hier landen wir schließlich, wenn gar keine Felder ausgegeben wurden, also
% nur Ort und Datum zu setzen sind.
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/31}{neues Element \texttt{placeanddate} wird
-% verwendet}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/07/31}{neues Element \texttt{placeanddate} wird
+% verwendet}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase \@datepos\else
\ifnum \@datepos=1 \enskip\hfill\fi
@@ -3128,30 +4104,30 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
-% \changes{v2.3b}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{sectfont} für den
-% \cs{title}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{titlefont} an Stelle von \cs{sectfont}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9t}{2004/09/16}{\cs{par} in Größe und Schrift des Titels}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{\cs{usekomafont} and Stelle von
-% \cs{titlefont}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/26}{umbenannt in \cs{@makelettertitle}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3b}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{sectfont} für den
+% \cs{title}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{titlefont} an Stelle von \cs{sectfont}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9t}{2004/09/16}{\cs{par} in Größe und Schrift des Titels}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{\cs{usekomafont} and Stelle von
+% \cs{titlefont}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/26}{umbenannt in \cs{@makelettertitle}}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@makelettertitle}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/26}{neu (ehemals \cs{@maketitle}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2015/02/21}{\texttt{title} durch \texttt{lettertitle}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/26}{neu (ehemals \cs{@maketitle}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2015/02/21}{\texttt{title} durch \texttt{lettertitle}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@subjfield}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{\cs{centerline} durch \cs{centering}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{wird mit hängendem Einzug gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Absatzeinzug mit cs{setparsizes}^^A
-% einstellen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Verwendung der neuen Pseudolängen
-% \texttt{subjectbeforevskip} und \texttt{subjectaftervskip}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2015/02/21}{\texttt{subject} durch \texttt{lettersubject}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/19}{\cs{centerline} durch \cs{centering}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{wird mit hängendem Einzug gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/23}{Absatzeinzug mit cs{setparsizes}%^^A
+% einstellen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Verwendung der neuen Pseudolängen
+% \texttt{subjectbeforevskip} und \texttt{subjectaftervskip}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2015/02/21}{\texttt{subject} durch \texttt{lettersubject}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Der eigentliche Titel wir mit |\@maketitle| gesetzt. Dies sollte jedoch
% ebenso wie beim Betreff (|\@subjfield|) \emph{nicht} manuell geschehen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3207,18 +4183,18 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@subjectvpos}
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{subjectvpos}}
-% Manchmal ist es günstiger, wenn man den Betreff absolut positionieren
-% kann. Das geschieht über diese Pseudolänge, wenn sie \emph{nicht} 0 ist.
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{subjectvpos}}
+% Manchmal ist es günstiger, wenn man den Betreff absolut positionieren
+% kann. Das geschieht über diese Pseudolänge, wenn sie \emph{nicht} 0 ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{subjectvpos}
\@setplength{subjectvpos}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@subjectaftervskip}
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{subjectaftervskip}}
-% Abstand nach dem Betreff. Dieser Abstand wird aus Gründen der
-% Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen mit 2\cs{baselineskip}
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{subjectaftervskip}}
+% Abstand nach dem Betreff. Dieser Abstand wird aus Gründen der
+% Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen mit 2\cs{baselineskip}
% voreingestellt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@newplength{subjectaftervskip}
@@ -3226,9 +4202,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ltr@len@subjectbeforevskip}
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{subjectbeforevskip}}
-% Abstand zusätzlich vor dem Betreff. Dieser Abstand wird aus Gründen der
-% Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen mit \cs{baselineskip}
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/03}{Neue Pseudolänge \texttt{subjectbeforevskip}}
+% Abstand zusätzlich vor dem Betreff. Dieser Abstand wird aus Gründen der
+% Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen mit \cs{baselineskip}
% voreingestellt. Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass hier bereits ein Abstand
% beispielsweise vom Titel existieren kann!
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3240,26 +4216,26 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Anweisungen für das Briefpapier}
+% \subsection{Anweisungen für das Briefpapier}
%
-% Für das Briefpapier gibt es etwas weniger Anweisungen. Teilweise werden hier
-% auch die Anweisungen für den Briefbogen mit verwendet.
+% Für das Briefpapier gibt es etwas weniger Anweisungen. Teilweise werden hier
+% auch die Anweisungen für den Briefbogen mit verwendet.
%
% \subsubsection{Kopf des Briefpapiers}
%
-% Der Kopf des Briefpapiers wird wieder ganz normal über den Seitenstil
+% Der Kopf des Briefpapiers wird wieder ganz normal über den Seitenstil
% festgelegt. Allerdings kann er entsprechende dem Briefbogen manuell
% definiert werden.
%
% \begin{macro}{\nexthead}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf der Folgeseiten wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf der Folgeseiten wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@nexthead}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf der Folgeseiten wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Kopf der Folgeseiten wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{nexthead}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}^^A
-% Die Voreinstellung ist ebenfalls von Optionen abhängig.
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}%^^A
+% Die Voreinstellung ist ebenfalls von Optionen abhängig.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\newcommand*{\@nexthead}{%
@@ -3299,7 +4275,7 @@
% \end{KOMAvar}
% \end{macro}
% Die Voreinstellung ist wiederum mit einer einfachen Benutzeranweisung
-% änderbar.
+% änderbar.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\newcommand{\nexthead}{%
@@ -3315,18 +4291,18 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{Fuß des Briefpapiers}
+% \subsubsection{Fuß des Briefpapiers}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nextfoot}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß der Folgeseiten wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß der Folgeseiten wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@nextfoot}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß der Folgeseiten wird über eine
-% Variable realisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{der Fuß der Folgeseiten wird über eine
+% Variable realisiert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{nextfoot}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{Neu}%^^A
% Je nach Optioneneinstellung kann sich die Seitenmarke in der Voreinstellung
-% auch im Fuß befinden.
+% auch im Fuß befinden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\newcommand*{\@nextfoot}{%
@@ -3350,7 +4326,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAvar}
% \end{macro}
-% Auch diese Einstellung ist per Benutzeranweisung leicht zu ändern.
+% Auch diese Einstellung ist per Benutzeranweisung leicht zu ändern.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\newcommand{\nextfoot}{%
@@ -3369,119 +4345,296 @@
% \subsection{Die Brief-Umgebung}
%
% \begin{environment}{letter}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{optionales Argument hinzugefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Fußnotenzähler wird zurückgesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9d}{2002/08/12}{Fußnotenzähler wird korrekt zurückgesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/20}{Ersatz von \cs{pagemark}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{\cs{letterpagestyle} wird verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{Briefe werden referenzierbar nummeriert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{optionales Argument hinzugefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Fußnotenzähler wird zurückgesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9d}{2002/08/12}{Fußnotenzähler wird korrekt zurückgesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/20}{Ersatz von \cs{pagemark}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{\cs{letterpagestyle} wird verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{Briefe werden referenzierbar nummeriert}%^^A
% Diese Umgebung ist etwas anders definiert, als normalerweise von
-% \LaTeX gewohnt. Mit ihr können innerhalb eines Dokuments beliebig
+% \LaTeX gewohnt. Mit ihr können innerhalb eines Dokuments beliebig
% viele Briefe erzeugt werden. Eine der Abweichungen von der
% Standardklasse besteht darin, dass als optionales Argument Optionen
-% gesetzt werden können.
+% gesetzt werden können.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{letter}[2][]{%
% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/05}{zweipaltige Briefe werden nicht unterstützt}%^^A
+% Falls wir uns im zweispaltigen Modus befinden, ist es jetzt höchste Zeit,
+% eine Warnung auszugeben und auf einspaltig umzuschalten. Zwar wäre es
+% theoretisch noch möglich, alles innerhalb von \cs{opening} in das optionale
+% Argument von \cs{twocolumn} zu packen, aber spätestens beim Schlussgruß
+% scheitert das dann. Also besser gleich gar nicht unterstützen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twocolumn
+%<class> \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+%<package> \PackageWarning{scrletter}{%
+ twocolumn mode not supported.\MessageBreak
+ If you really want a twocolumned letter, you should\MessageBreak
+ use package `multicol' and add a `multicols'\MessageBreak
+ environment inside your letter.\MessageBreak
+ Switching back to oneside%
+ }%
+ \letter@restonecoltrue
+ \expandafter\onecolumn
+ \else
+ \letter@restonecolfalse
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
% Als erstes wird eine neue Seite begonnen. Dies kann ggf. auch eine neue
% rechte Seite sein. Dabei wird auch auf den korrekten Seitenstil
-% geachtet. Danach werden alle relevanten Zähler und Strafpunkte
-% zurückgesetzt und der obligatorische Parameter ausgewertet.
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{wegen des Pakets
-% \cs{cleardoubleoddemptypage}}^^A
+% geachtet. Danach werden alle relevanten Zähler und Strafpunkte
+% zurückgesetzt und der obligatorische Parameter ausgewertet.
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{wegen des Pakets
+% \cs{cleardoubleoddemptypage}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/05}{Briefe verwenden \cs{raggedbottom}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\cleardoubleoddemptypage
+ \raggedbottom
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{letterpagestyle}{}{%
\ifx\letterpagestyle\@empty\else
\pagestyle{\letterpagestyle}%
\fi
}%
-%<package>\let\pagemark\letterpagemark
+%<package> \let\pagemark\letterpagemark
\refstepcounter{letter}%
\let\thisletter\@currentlabel
\setcounter{page}{\@ne}%
\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
\interlinepenalty=200\@processto{#2}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann werden ggf. die übergebenen Optionen ausgeführt.
+% Dann werden ggf. die übergebenen Optionen ausgeführt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMAoptions{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/31}{first-page head generation moved}%^^A
+% From \KOMAScript~3.27 \textsf{scrletter} generates the first-page head in
+% the \texttt{letter}-environment instead of the command \cs{opening}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package&willbe> \@gen@firsthead
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{\textsf{scrletter} sets the page style}%^^A
+% From \KOMAScript~3.27 \textsf{scrletter} sets page style
+% \texttt{notepaper} for the first page before executing the begin hook.
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package&willbe> \thispagestyle{notepaper}%
+% \end{macrocode}
% Zum Schluss werden die per \cs{AtBeginLetter} angegeben Anweisungen
-% ausgeführt und noch danach ein Label gesetzt.
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{ein Label wird gesetzt}^^A
+% ausgeführt.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+ \ifdim\useplength{refheight}>\z@
+ \else
+ \begingroup
+ \newkomavar[\strut]{@internal@testvar@}%
+ \setkomavar{@internal@testvar@}{\strut}%
+ \setplengthtototalheight{refheight}{\@set@reffield{@internal@testvar@}}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\endgroup
+ \noexpand\setplength{refheight}{\useplength{refheight}}%
+ }%
+ \reserved@a
+ \fi
+%</package&willbe>
\@beginletterhook
+%<package&willbe>\initial@letter@vskip
}{%
\stopletter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Danach wird noch ein Label gesetzt.
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{ein Label wird gesetzt}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
\let\@currentlabel\thisletter
\label{\thisletter.lastpage}%
\@@par\pagebreak\@@par%
+ \ifletter@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/31}{cleanup running head}%^^A
+% The package also cleans up the running head after the end of the letter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package&willbe> \@mkdouble\@empty
}
% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\initial@letter@vskip}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/03}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% Go to the start posistion of the letter. Usually to jump below the reference
+% line inside the \texttt{letter} environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+\newcommand*{\initial@letter@vskip}{%
+ \move@topt
+ \vskip \dimexpr \useplength{refvpos}
+ \if@refline +\useplength{refheight}\fi
+ +\useplength{refaftervskip}\relax
+}
+%</package&willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifletter@restonecol}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/05}{neu intern}
+% Dieser Schalter bestimmt, ob am Ende der \texttt{letter}-Umgebung auf
+% zweispaltig zurückgeschaltet werden muss.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifletter@restonecol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\thisletter}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Gibt den Wert des aktuellen Labels wieder. Man benötigt dies beispielsweise,
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Gibt den Wert des aktuellen Labels wieder. Man benötigt dies beispielsweise,
% um per |\ref{\thisletter.lastpage}| auf die letzte Seite zugreifen zu
-% können.
+% können.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\thisletter}{outside.letter.undefined}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \thisletter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thisletter
% \begin{macro}{\letterlastpage}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\letterlastpage}{\pageref{\thisletter.lastpage}}
-% \end{macrocode}^^A \letterlastpage
+% \end{macrocode}%^^A \letterlastpage
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\stopletter}
% Damit man Material am Ende des Briefes einschleusen kann.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\stopletter}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \stopletter
% \begin{macro}{\@processto}
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{robust gegen leeren Empfänger}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/06/16}{robust gegen leeren Empfänger}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/24}{extended setting of variables}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@xproc}
-% Die Adresse, die als Argument der Briefumgebung übergeben wird, muss in Name
+% Die Adresse, die als Argument der Briefumgebung übergeben wird, muss in Name
% und Adresse zerlegt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\stopletter}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@processto}[1]{%
- \ifx\relax#1\relax\else
- \expandafter\@xproc#1\\\@nil\ifkomavarempty{toaddress}{}{%
- \expandafter\@xproc#1\@nil}%
- \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{@processto} argument (\texttt{letter} mandatory argument) is empty:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \IfArgIsEmpty{#1}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% try to build it from \texttt{toname} and \texttt{toaddress}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+ \ifkomavarempty{toname}{%
+ \ifkomavarempty{tofamilyname}{}{%
+ \ifkomavarempty{togivenname}{%
+ \usekomavar[\setkomavar{toname}]{tofamilyname}%
+ }{%
+ \usekomavar[\protected@edef\reserved@a]{togivenname}%
+ \usekomavar[\protected@edef\reserved@b]{tofamilyname}%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\setkomavar{toname}{\reserved@a\ \reserved@b}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \ifkomavarempty{toaddress}{%
+ \usekomavar[\protected@edef\reserved@a]{toname}%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\usekomafont{toname}{\reserved@a}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ }{%
+ \ifkomavarempty{toname}{%
+ \usekomavar[\protected@edef\reserved@a]{toaddress}%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\usekomafont{toaddress}{\reserved@a}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ }{%
+ \usekomavar[\protected@edef\scr@local@toname]{toname}%
+ \usekomavar[\protected@edef\reserved@b]{toaddress}%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\setkomavar{addressee}{%
+ {\noexpand\usekomafont{toname}{\scr@local@toname}}\\
+ \noexpand\usekomafont{toaddress}{\reserved@b}%
+ }%
+ }\reserved@a
+ }%
+ }%
+%</package&willbe>
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Split into part before first \cmd\\ and it:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@xproc#1\\\@nil
+ \ifx\reserved@b\@empty\else\expandafter\@xproc#1\@nil\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the package set variable \texttt{addressee}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+ \protected@edef\reserved@c{%
+ \noexpand\setkomavar{addressee}{%
+ {\noexpand\usekomafont{toname}{\reserved@a}}%
+ \ifx\reserved@b\@empty\else
+ \\\noexpand\usekomafont{toaddress}{\reserved@b}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \texttt{toname} is empty, set it:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifkomavarempty{toname}{%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\reserved@c{\noexpand\setkomavar{toname}{\reserved@a}}}%
+ }{\let\reserved@a\reserved@c}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If \texttt{toaddress} is empty, set it:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifkomavarempty{toaddress}{%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@b{\noexpand\reserved@a
+ \noexpand\setkomavar{toaddress}{\reserved@b}}%
+ \reserved@b
+ }{\reserved@a}%
+%</package&willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the class simply set \texttt{toname} und \texttt{toaddress}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|!willbe>
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\setkomavar{toname}{\reserved@a}%
+ \noexpand\setkomavar{toaddress}{\reserved@b}%
+ }\reserved@a
+%</class|!willbe>
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@xproc}{}
\long\def\@xproc#1\\#2\@nil{%
- \setkomavar{toname}{#1}\setkomavar{toaddress}{#2}}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@xproc
-% \end{macro}^^A \@processto
-% \end{macro}^^A \stopletter
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/24}{do not directly set variables but
+% \cs{reserved@a} and \cs{reserved@b}}%^^A
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@a{#1}\def\reserved@b{#2}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@xproc
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@processto
% \begin{macro}{\flushbottom}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/17}{neue Erweiterung}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/05/17}{neue Erweiterung}%^^A
% Das Verhalten muss auf der letzten Briefseite wieder \cs{raggedbottom}
-% ähneln. Das wird über \cs{stopletter} erreicht.
+% ähneln. Das wird über \cs{stopletter} erreicht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\g@addto@macro\flushbottom{%
\g@addto@macro\stopletter{\vskip \z@\@plus.0001fil\relax}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \flushbottom
+% \end{macro}%^^A \flushbottom
% \begin{Counter}{letter}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neuer Zähler}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neuer Zähler}%^^A
% Die Briefe werden durchnummeriert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{letter}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{Counter}
-% \end{environment}^^A letter
+% \end{environment}%^^A letter
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\letterpagestyle}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/15}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
% Analog zu \cs{titlepagestyle}, \cs{indexpagestyle} etc. gibt es jetzt auch
% ein \cs{letterpagestyle}. In der Voreinstellung ist dieser bei der Klasse
% leer. Dagegen wird beim Paket \texttt{plain.letter} verwendet. Durch den
-% Unterschied wird faktisch die Kompatibilität mit des Pakets mit der Klasse
+% Unterschied wird faktisch die Kompatibilität des Pakets mit der Klasse
% jedoch verbessert!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\letterpagestyle}{%
@@ -3492,12 +4645,12 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginLetter}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@beginletterhook}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Neu}%^^A
% Wie oben zu sehen, wurde in den Anfang der Briefumgebung ein Haken
-% eingefügt. Dieser wird auch tatsächlich intern genutzt. Er funktioniert
-% prinzipiell wie der |\AtBeginDocument|-Haken. Zunächst macht der Haken rein
+% eingefügt. Dieser wird auch tatsächlich intern genutzt. Er funktioniert
+% prinzipiell wie der |\AtBeginDocument|-Haken. Zunächst macht der Haken rein
% gar nichts.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\AtBeginLetter}{\g@addto@macro\@beginletterhook}
@@ -3507,7 +4660,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AtEndLetter}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{Neu}%^^A
% Analog zu |\AtBeginLetter| gibt es auch ein |\AtEndLetter|. Als Haken wird
% hierbei |\stopletter| verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3518,12 +4671,12 @@
% \begin{macro}{\stopbreaks}
% \begin{macro}{\startbreaks}
% \begin{macro}{\@nobreakvspace}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@nobreakvspacex}
% \begin{macro}{\@nobreakcr}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Innerhalb von Briefen wird der Umbruch etwas anders gehandhabt.
% Dadurch soll der Brieftext besser positioniert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3546,22 +4699,29 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\opening}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett überarbeitet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{\cs{@PapersizeWarning}}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2003/03/23}{Absatzformatierung mit \cs{setparsizes}^^A
-% einstellen}
-% Denn beim Eröffnungsgruß mit |\opening| wird neben sämtlichen Feldern auch
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett überarbeitet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{\cs{@PapersizeWarning}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2003/03/23}{Absatzformatierung mit \cs{setparsizes}
+% einstellen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/27}{Only \textsf{scrlttr2} uses \cs{@addrfield},
+% \cs{@locfield} and \cs{@foldmarks}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/27}{Only \textsf{scrlttr2} sets pagestyle}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/31}{Only \textsf{scrlttr2} generates the first-page
+% head here}%^^A
+% Denn beim Eröffnungsgruß mit |\opening| wird neben sämtlichen Feldern auch
% der Titel und der Betreff gesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\opening}[1]{%
\@PapersizeWarning
- \@gen@firsthead
+%<class|!willbe> \@gen@firsthead
\@mkboth{\scr@fromname@var}{\scr@subject@var}%
- \thispagestyle{empty}\noindent
- \@foldmarks\@firstheadfootfield\@addrfield\@locfield
+%<class|!willbe> \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \noindent
+%<class|!willbe> \@foldmarks\@firstheadfootfield
+%<class|!willbe> \@addrfield\@locfield
\ifdim\useplength{subjectvpos}=\z@\else\@subjfield\fi
- \@datefield
+%<class|!willbe> \@datefield
\@makelettertitle
\ifdim\useplength{subjectvpos}=\z@\if@subjafter\else\@subjfield\fi\fi
{\setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@ plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative#1\par}%
@@ -3576,35 +4736,35 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\closing}
-% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/02/16}{{\cmd\fromsig} wird nicht mehr auf \cs{empty}
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/02/16}{{\cmd\fromsig} wird nicht mehr auf \cs{empty}
% getestet sondern direkt eingesetzt}
-% \changes{v2.3b}{1996/01/14}{Abstand zwischen Schlussgruß und Signatur
-% erhöht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5d}{2000/06/10}{Abstand zwischen Schlussgruß und Signatur
-% variabel}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{nicht mehr \cs{long}}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{darf \texttt{\cmd{\\}[\dots]} enthalten}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2003/03/23}{Absatzformatierung mit \cs{setparsizes}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3b}{1996/01/14}{Abstand zwischen Schlussgruß und Signatur
+% erhöht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5d}{2000/06/10}{Abstand zwischen Schlussgruß und Signatur
+% variabel}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{nicht mehr \cs{long}}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{darf \texttt{\cmd{\\}[\dots]} enthalten}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2003/03/23}{Absatzformatierung mit \cs{setparsizes}%^^A
% einstellen}
-% Außer dem Eröffnungsgruß mit |\opening| gibt es natürlich auch einen
-% Schlussgruß mit |\closing|, bei dem außerdem die Unterschrift u.\,ä. gesetzt
+% Außer dem Eröffnungsgruß mit |\opening| gibt es natürlich auch einen
+% Schlussgruß mit |\closing|, bei dem außerdem die Unterschrift u.\,ä. gesetzt
% wird.
% \begin{macro}{\presig@skip}
-% \changes{v2.5d}{2000/06/10}{Neues Makro, das den Abstand zwischen
-% Schlussgruß und Signatur beinhaltet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Ersetzt durch Pseudo-Länge sigbeforevskip}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5d}{2000/06/10}{Neues Makro, das den Abstand zwischen
+% Schlussgruß und Signatur beinhaltet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Ersetzt durch Pseudo-Länge sigbeforevskip}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setpresigskip}
-% \changes{v2.5d}{2000/06/10}{Neues Makro, das den Abstand zwischen
-% Schlussgruß und Signatur setzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Mit Hilfe der neuen Pseudo-Längen definiert}^^A
-% Das Makro |\presig@skip| beinhaltet dabei den Abstand zwischen Schlussgruß
-% und Signatur. Da der Wert über ein Benutzerinterface per |\setpresigskip|
-% gesetzt wird, muss hier kein kostbares Längenregister (skip oder dim)
+% \changes{v2.5d}{2000/06/10}{Neues Makro, das den Abstand zwischen
+% Schlussgruß und Signatur setzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/09}{Mit Hilfe der neuen Pseudo-Längen definiert}%^^A
+% Das Makro |\presig@skip| beinhaltet dabei den Abstand zwischen Schlussgruß
+% und Signatur. Da der Wert über ein Benutzerinterface per |\setpresigskip|
+% gesetzt wird, muss hier kein kostbares Längenregister (skip oder dim)
% verschwendet werden, sondern ein Makro reicht aus. In |\setpresigskip| wird
% allerdings noch sichergestellt, dass die Fehlermeldung bei falschem
-% Parameter möglichst nicht erst bei Verwendung auftritt.
+% Parameter möglichst nicht erst bei Verwendung auftritt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</letter>
%<lco&KOMAold>\def\setpresigskip{\@setplength{sigbeforevskip}}
@@ -3612,31 +4772,31 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@xtrimtempa}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2014/02/19}{entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2014/02/19}{entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@xtrimtempa}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2014/02/19}{entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2014/02/19}{entfernt}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@tempdimaismaxwidthof}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2014/02/19}{entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/05}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2014/02/19}{entfernt}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% Jetzt endlich zum eigentlichen Befehl.
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/01/28}{Längenbegrenzung auf \cs{hsize}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/01/28}{das Argument darf leer sein}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/19}{aus Rücksicht auf Leute, die ohne Rücksicht
-% auf die Anleitung einfach machen, was ihnen gerade einfällt, neu
-% implementiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/01/28}{Längenbegrenzung auf \cs{hsize}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/01/28}{das Argument darf leer sein}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/19}{aus Rücksicht auf Leute, die ohne Rücksicht
+% auf die Anleitung einfach machen, was ihnen gerade einfällt, neu
+% implementiert}%^^A
% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/20}{Weil manche Leute es unbedingt auf die Spitze
-% treiben wollen, \cs{}\cs{} durch \cs{tabularnewline} ersetzt.}^^A
+% treiben wollen, \cs{}\cs{} durch \cs{tabularnewline} ersetzt.}%^^A
% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/20}{Weil manche Leute es unbedingt auf die Spitze
-% treiben wollen, mehr \cs{strut} eingefügt.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/08}{Umbruch nach dem Gruß nur, wenn wir uns im
-% horizontalen Modus befinden}^^A
+% treiben wollen, mehr \cs{strut} eingefügt.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/08}{Umbruch nach dem Gruß nur, wenn wir uns im
+% horizontalen Modus befinden}%^^A
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/15}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@endstrut} statt
-% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}^^A
+% \cs{unskip}\cs{strut}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\closing}[1]{{%
\setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@ plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative\nobreak\par
@@ -3663,8 +4823,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett überarbeitet}^^A
-% Ebenfalls möglich ist ein Postscriptum. Dieser Befehl erwartet das
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett überarbeitet}%^^A
+% Ebenfalls möglich ist ein Postscriptum. Dieser Befehl erwartet das
% Postscriptum nicht als Argument, sondern schaltet zum Nachtext um.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\ps{\par%
@@ -3676,16 +4836,16 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cc}
-% Darüber hinaus gibt es noch einen Verteiler. Dieser wird sauber formatiert.
-% \changes{v2.6}{2001/01/03}{\cs{def} durch \cs{newcommand*} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett "uberarbeitet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/04/22}{\cs{parfillskip} angepasst}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/04/26}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{1em plus 1fil}
-% geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/05/25}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
-% 1fil} geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/15}{fehlender Stern bei \cs{ifkomavaremptry}
-% ergänzt}^^A
+% Darüber hinaus gibt es noch einen Verteiler. Dieser wird sauber formatiert.
+% \changes{v2.6}{2001/01/03}{\cs{def} durch \cs{newcommand*} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett "uberarbeitet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/04/22}{\cs{parfillskip} angepasst}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/04/26}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{1em plus 1fil}
+% geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/05/25}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
+% 1fil} geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/15}{fehlender Stern bei \cs{ifkomavaremptry}
+% ergänzt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\cc}[1]{\par%
\ifdim\parskip=\z@%
@@ -3706,16 +4866,16 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\encl}
% Auch Anlagen werden ordentlich gesetzt.
-% \changes{v2.4a}{1997/06/06}{der Doppelpunkt bei den Anlagen wird nur noch
+% \changes{v2.4a}{1997/06/06}{der Doppelpunkt bei den Anlagen wird nur noch
% gesetzt, wenn \cs{enclname} nicht leer ist}
-% \changes{v2.6}{2001/01/03}{\cs{def} durch \cs{newcommand*} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett überarbeiten}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{Fehlendes \% ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/04/22}{\cs{parfillskip} angepasst}
-% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/04/26}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{1em plus 1fil}
-% geändert}
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/05/25}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
-% 1fil} geändert}
+% \changes{v2.6}{2001/01/03}{\cs{def} durch \cs{newcommand*} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett überarbeiten}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/31}{Fehlendes \% ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/04/22}{\cs{parfillskip} angepasst}
+% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/04/26}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{1em plus 1fil}
+% geändert}
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/05/25}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
+% 1fil} geändert}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\encl}[1]{\par%
\ifdim\parskip=\z@%
@@ -3738,34 +4898,34 @@
% \subsection{Briefspezifische Feld-Variablen}
%
% \begin{KOMAvar}{signature}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{place}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{location}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{backaddress}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{specialmail}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{title}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromlogo}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromzipcode}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{PPcode}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{PPdatamatrix}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{addresseeimage}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/30}{Schreibfehler korrigiert}^^A
-% Zunächst besitzt die Briefklasse einige Variablen, die von Haus aus nicht
-% über einen Ausgabenamen verfügen, weil sie üblicherweise ohne Ausgabe einer
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/30}{Schreibfehler korrigiert}%^^A
+% Zunächst besitzt die Briefklasse einige Variablen, die von Haus aus nicht
+% über einen Ausgabenamen verfügen, weil sie üblicherweise ohne Ausgabe einer
% Bezeichung verwendet werden. Diese Variablen haben teilweise auch keinen
% vordefinierten Inhalt. Der Inhalt muss erst vom Anwender gesetzt
% werden. Teilweise gibt es aber auch einen vordefinierten Inhalt, der von
-% anderen Variablen abhängt.
+% anderen Variablen abhängt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomavar{signature}
\setkomavar{signature}{\usekomavar{fromname}}
@@ -3786,6 +4946,8 @@
\newkomavar{PPcode}
\newkomavar{PPdatamatrix}
\newkomavar{addresseeimage}
+%</letter>
+%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAvar}
% \end{KOMAvar}
@@ -3800,82 +4962,112 @@
% \end{KOMAvar}
%
% \begin{option}{symbolicnames}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/16}{interne Speicherung der Werte}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@scrsymbols}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@scrsymbolstrue}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@scrsymbolsfalse}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Über diese Option kann eingestellt werden, dass an Stelle von
-% sprachabhängigen Bezeichnern für einige Variablen Symbole verwendet
-% werden. Dazu wird das Paket \textsf{macrosym} benötigt.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/13}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{neue Werte}%^^A
+% Ãœber diese Option kann eingestellt werden, dass an Stelle von
+% sprachabhängigen Bezeichnern für einige Variablen Symbole verwendet
+% werden. Statt nur boolsche Werte, sind ab \KOMAScript~3.27 auch die Werte
+% \texttt{marvosym} oder \texttt{fontawesome} möglich. \texttt{marvosym}
+% entspricht dabei dem bisherigen \texttt{true}.
% \begin{macrocode}
-%</letter>
-%</body>
%<*option&letter>
\newif\if@scrsymbols
\KOMA@key{symbolicnames}[true]{%
\KOMA@set@ifkey{symbolicnames}{@scrsymbols}{#1}%
- \KOMA@kav@replacebool{.%
-%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
-%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
- }{symbolicnames}{@scrsymbols}%
- \if@scrsymbols
- \if@atdocument
- \begingroup
- \@tempswafalse
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{Telefon}{\@tempswatrue}{%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{FAX}{\@tempswatrue}{%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{Email}{\@tempswatrue}{%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{Mobilefone}{\@tempswatrue}{%
- }%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \def\scr@symbols@font{marvosym}%
+ \else
+ \KOMA@set@ncmdkey{symbolicnames}{reserved@a}{%
+ {marvosym}{0},%
+ {fontawesome}{1},{awesome}{1},%
+ }{#1}%
+ \ifx \FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \@scrsymbolstrue
+ \ifcase \number\reserved@a
+ \def\scr@symbols@font{marvosym}%
+ \else
+ \def\scr@symbols@font{fontawesome}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx \FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.%
+%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
+%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
+ }{symbolicnames}{#1}%
+ \if@scrsymbols
+ \ifstr{\scr@symbols@font}{marvosym}{%
+ \def\scr@symbol@phone{\Telefon}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@fax{\FAX}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@email{\Email}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@mobilephone{\Mobilefone}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@www{\@empty}%
+ }{%
+ \def\scr@symbol@phone{\faPhone}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@fax{\faFax}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@email{\faEnvelopeO}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@mobilephone{\faMobilePhone}%
+ \def\scr@symbol@www{\faGlobe}%
+ }%
+ \if@atdocument
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \expandafter\ifdefined\scr@symbol@phone\else\@tempswatrue\fi
+ \expandafter\ifdefined\scr@symbol@fax\else\@tempswatrue\fi
+ \expandafter\ifdefined\scr@symbol@email\else\@tempswatrue\fi
+ \expandafter\ifdefined\scr@symbol@mobilephone\else\@tempswatrue\fi
+ \expandafter\ifdefined\scr@symbol@www\else\@tempswatrue\fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \aftergroup\@scrsymbolsfalse
+%<class> \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+%<package> \PackageWarning{scrletter}{%
+ Option `symbolicnames=#1'
+ ignorred.\MessageBreak
+ You've tried to set option `symbolicnames'\MessageBreak
+ after \string\begin{document}, but without\MessageBreak
+ loading package `\scr@symbols@font' before.\MessageBreak
+ You should either switch on option\MessageBreak
+ `symbolicnames' before \string\begin{document}\MessageBreak
+ or load package `\scr@letter@symbols@font' in the
+ document\MessageBreak
+ preamble to avoid this warning%
}%
- }%
- }%
- \if@tempswa
- \aftergroup\@scrsymbolsfalse
-%<class> \ClassWarning{scrlttr2}{%
-%<package> \PackageWarning{scrletter}{%
- Option `symbolicnames'
- ignorred.\MessageBreak
- You've tried to set option `symbolicnames'\MessageBreak
- after \string\begin{document}, but without\MessageBreak
- loading package `marvosym' before.\MessageBreak
- You should either switch on option\MessageBreak
- `symbolicnames' before \string\begin{document}\MessageBreak
- or load package `marvosym' in the document\MessageBreak
- preamble to avoid this warning%
- }%
- \fi
- \endgroup
- \else
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \else
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/01}{Name der Klasse oder des Pakets ist für die
-% Ladeverzögerung von \textsf{marvosym} egal}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/01}{Ladeverzögerung für das Paket
-% \textsf{marvosym} nur, wenn erforderlich und möglich}^^A
-% In der Dokumentpräambel kann das Paket \textsf{marvosym} selbst geladen
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/01}{Name der Klasse oder des Pakets ist für die
+% Ladeverzögerung von \textsf{marvosym} egal}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/01}{Ladeverzögerung für das Font-Paket
+% nur, wenn erforderlich und möglich}%^^A
+% In der Dokumentpräambel kann das Paket \textsf{marvosym} selbst geladen
% werden. Allerdings funktioniert das nicht, solange wir im Optionen-Abschnitt
-% sind. Also muss es ggf. verzögert werden. Wie lange es zu verzögern ist,
-% hängt davon ab, ob wir uns in einer Klasse, einem Paket oder sonst einer
+% sind. Also muss es ggf. verzögert werden. Wie lange es zu verzögern ist,
+% hängt davon ab, ob wir uns in einer Klasse, einem Paket oder sonst einer
% Datei mit Optionen-Abschnitt befinden.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\@fileswith@pti@ns\@badrequireerror
- \ifstr{\@currext}{\@clsextension}{%
- \expandafter\AtEndOfClass
- }{%
- \ifstr{\@currext}{\@pksextension}{%
- \expandafter\AtEndOfPackage
+ \ifx\@fileswith@pti@ns\@badrequireerror
+ \ifstr{\@currext}{\@clsextension}{%
+ \expandafter\AtEndOfClass
}{%
- \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \ifstr{\@currext}{\@pkgextension}{%
+ \expandafter\AtEndOfPackage
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ }%
}%
- }%
- \else
- \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \fi
+ {\RequirePackage{\scr@symbols@font}}%
\fi
- {\RequirePackage{marvosym}}%
\fi
\fi
}
@@ -3883,45 +5075,85 @@
%<class> \KOMAClassFileName
%<package> scrletter.\scr@pkgextension
}{symbolicnames}{false}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@symbols@font}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The name of the font packages used for the symbols if symbols instead of
+% names are activated.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@symbol@phone}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The phone symbole.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@symbol@fax}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The fax symbole.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@symbol@email}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The e-mail symbol.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@symbol@mobilephone}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The mobile-phone symbol.
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@symbol@www}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The world-wide-web symbol.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@symbols@font}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@symbol@phone}{\undefined}
+\newcommand*{\scr@symbol@fax}{\undefined}
+\newcommand*{\scr@symbol@email}{\undefined}
+\newcommand*{\scr@symbol@mobilephone}{\undefined}
+\newcommand*{\scr@symbol@www}{\undefined}
%</option&letter>
-%<*body>
-%<*letter>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{KOMAvar}{placeseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{subjectseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{ccseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{enclseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{backaddressseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/22}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/22}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{phoneseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{Symbole sind indirekt gespeichert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{faxseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{Symbole sind indirekt gespeichert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{emailseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{Symbole sind indirekt gespeichert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{urlseparator}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/25}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Option \texttt{symbolicnames} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{Symbole sind indirekt gespeichert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{mobilephoneseparator}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/21}{Symbole sind indirekt gespeichert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{zipcodeseparator}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%^^A
% Daneben gibt es einige Trennzeichen. Diese haben ggf. als Ausgabenamen das
-% Feld, für das sie als Trennzeichen dienen. Die Trennzeichen sind
+% Feld, für das sie als Trennzeichen dienen. Die Trennzeichen sind
% vordefiniert.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+%<*letter>
\newkomavar[\usekomavar{place}]{placeseparator}
\setkomavar{placeseparator}{,\nobreakspace}
\newkomavar[\subjectname]{subjectseparator}
@@ -3932,17 +5164,17 @@
\setkomavar{enclseparator}{: }
\newkomavar{backaddressseparator}
\setkomavar{backaddressseparator}{,\nobreakspace}
-\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\Telefon\else\phonename\fi]{phoneseparator}
+\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\scr@symbol@phone\else\phonename\fi]{phoneseparator}
\setkomavar{phoneseparator}{\if@scrsymbols\else:\fi\nobreakspace}
\newkomavar[%
- \if@scrsymbols\Mobilefone\else\mobilephonename\fi
+ \if@scrsymbols\scr@symbol@mobilephone\else\mobilephonename\fi
]{mobilephoneseparator}
\setkomavar{mobilephoneseparator}{\usekomavar{phoneseparator}}
-\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\FAX\else\faxname\fi]{faxseparator}
+\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\scr@symbol@fax\else\faxname\fi]{faxseparator}
\setkomavar{faxseparator}{\if@scrsymbols\else:\fi\nobreakspace}
-\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\Email\else\emailname\fi]{emailseparator}
+\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\scr@symbol@email\else\emailname\fi]{emailseparator}
\setkomavar{emailseparator}{\if@scrsymbols\else:\fi\nobreakspace}
-\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\else\wwwname\fi]{urlseparator}
+\newkomavar[\if@scrsymbols\scr@symbol@www\else\wwwname\fi]{urlseparator}
\setkomavar{urlseparator}{\if@scrsymbols\else:\nobreakspace\fi}
\newkomavar{zipcodeseparator}
\setkomavar{zipcodeseparator}{\,--\,}
@@ -3959,53 +5191,75 @@
% \end{KOMAvar}
% \end{KOMAvar}
%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \begin{KOMAvar}{addressee}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/24}{new variable}%^^A
+% The package needs a variable for the addressee (used for the address field).
+% \begin{KOMAvar}{togivenname}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/24}{new variable}%^^A
+% \begin{KOMAvar}{tofamilyname}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/24}{new variable}%^^A
+% The package allows to build \texttt{toname} by \texttt{togivenname} and
+% \texttt{tofamilyname}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&willbe>
+\newkomavar{addressee}
+\newkomavar{togivenname}
+\newkomavar{tofamilyname}
+%</package&willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{KOMAvar}%^^A tofamilyname
+% \end{KOMAvar}%^^A togivenname
+% \end{KOMAvar}%^^A addressee
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+%
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromname}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromaddress}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromemail}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromurl}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{frombank}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{toname}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{toaddress}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromphone}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{frommobilephone}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{fromfax}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/28}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{yourmail}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{yourref}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{myref}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{customer}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{invoice}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{subject}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAvar}{date}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\date}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/05}{das Makro gibt eine Warnung aus}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/05}{das Makro gibt eine Warnung aus}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@date}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/05}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/05}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% Desweiteren gibt es einige Variable, die auch einen Ausgabenamen haben, weil
-% dieser üblicherweise vorangestellt wird. Eine Besonderheit stellt dabei
-% \texttt{subject} dar. Der Ausgabename beinhaltet dabei nämlich auch die
-% Trennzeichen, die hinter dem Namen üblicherweise stehen. Diese sind wiederum
+% dieser üblicherweise vorangestellt wird. Eine Besonderheit stellt dabei
+% \texttt{subject} dar. Der Ausgabename beinhaltet dabei nämlich auch die
+% Trennzeichen, die hinter dem Namen üblicherweise stehen. Diese sind wiederum
% ein Variable, deren Name der Ausgabename des Feldes ist. Will man also nur
-% den Namen aber nicht die Trennzeichen ändern, so ändert man statt dem Namen
+% den Namen aber nicht die Trennzeichen ändern, so ändert man statt dem Namen
% von \texttt{subject} den Namen von \texttt{subjectseparator}.
%
-% Ähnlich ist es mit \texttt{toaddress} und \texttt{fromaddress}. Dort ist der
+% Ähnlich ist es mit \texttt{toaddress} und \texttt{fromaddress}. Dort ist der
% Wert von \texttt{toname} bzw. \texttt{fromname} der Ausgabename. Bei
% \texttt{toaddress} und \texttt{fromaddress} wird davon jedoch intern kein
% Gebrauch gemacht. Die Variable \texttt{date} wird bereits so vordefiniert,
@@ -4052,8 +5306,8 @@
\scr@saved@date{#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@saved@date
-% \end{macro}^^A \date
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@saved@date
+% \end{macro}%^^A \date
% \end{KOMAvar}
% \end{KOMAvar}
% \end{KOMAvar}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
index 6d32dd6925..5546b8a3ca 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{678}
+% \CheckSum{683}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx 2640 2017-05-08 09:36:55Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,9 +63,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-05-08 11:36:55 +0200 (Mon, 08 May 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 2640 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3262 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx}%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-pagestyles.dtx}
@@ -103,13 +102,13 @@
%
% Neben den Definitionen zum Seitenstil in dieser Datei gibt es auch
% noch das Paket \textsf{scrpage2} (siehe \texttt{scrpage.dtx}).
-% Es\marginline{Geplant!} ist deshalb davon auszugehen, dass zukünftig die
+% Es\marginline{Geplant!} ist deshalb davon auszugehen, dass zukünftig die
% Definitionen hier komplett durch \textsf{scrpage2} ersetzt werden und
% \textsf{scrpage2} von den \KOMAScript-Klassen direkt geladen wird.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für die Trennlinien in Kopf und Fuß}
+% \subsection{Optionen für die Trennlinien in Kopf und Fuß}
%
% \iffalse
%<*option>
@@ -120,25 +119,25 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{option}{headsepline}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/11}{BugFix: Argument bei
-% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} vertauscht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Option \texttt{headinclude} wird nicht
-% mehr an \textsf{typearea} geschickt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{Option \texttt{headinclude} wird gesetzt,
-% wobei kein Fehler ausgegeben wird, wenn sie nicht existiert.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{wenn \textsf{typearea} noch gar nicht geladen
-% ist, Option an dieses Paket schicken}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/08}{BugFix: Argument bei
-% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} erneut vertauscht}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{Optionenweiterleitung an \textsf{typearea}
-% entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/11}{BugFix: Argument bei
+% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} vertauscht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Option \texttt{headinclude} wird nicht
+% mehr an \textsf{typearea} geschickt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{Option \texttt{headinclude} wird gesetzt,
+% wobei kein Fehler ausgegeben wird, wenn sie nicht existiert.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{wenn \textsf{typearea} noch gar nicht geladen
+% ist, Option an dieses Paket schicken}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/08}{BugFix: Argument bei
+% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} erneut vertauscht}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{Optionenweiterleitung an \textsf{typearea}
+% entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{option}{headnosepline}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% Der Kopfteil kann mit einer Linie vom Textbereich getrennt werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@hsl}
% \begin{macro}{\@hsltrue}
@@ -157,33 +156,33 @@
%
%
% \begin{option}{footsepline}
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/14}{bei \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} fehlte
-% die Paket-Angabe}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/11}{BugFix: Argument bei
-% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} vertauscht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Option \texttt{footinclude} wird nicht
-% mehr an \textsf{typearea} geschickt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{Option \texttt{footinclude} wird gesetzt,
-% wobei kein Fehler ausgegeben wird, wenn sie nicht existiert.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{wenn \textsf{typearea} noch gar nicht geladen
-% ist, Option an dieses Paket schicken}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch
-% \cs{KOMAoptions} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{ggf. Satzspiegel neu berechnen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/07/07}{Satzspiegel wird nicht neu berechnet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/07/07}{\texttt{headinclude}-Fehler beseitigt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/08}{BugFix: Argument bei
-% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} erneut vertauscht}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{Optionenweiterleitung an \textsf{typearea}
-% entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/14}{bei \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} fehlte
+% die Paket-Angabe}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/11}{BugFix: Argument bei
+% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} vertauscht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Option \texttt{footinclude} wird nicht
+% mehr an \textsf{typearea} geschickt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{Option \texttt{footinclude} wird gesetzt,
+% wobei kein Fehler ausgegeben wird, wenn sie nicht existiert.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{wenn \textsf{typearea} noch gar nicht geladen
+% ist, Option an dieses Paket schicken}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch
+% \cs{KOMAoptions} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{ggf. Satzspiegel neu berechnen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/07/07}{Satzspiegel wird nicht neu berechnet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/07/07}{\texttt{headinclude}-Fehler beseitigt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18a}{2015/07/08}{BugFix: Argument bei
+% \cs{PassOptionsToPackage} erneut vertauscht}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{Optionenweiterleitung an \textsf{typearea}
+% entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{option}{footnosepline}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
% ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
-% Der Fußteil kann mit einer Linie vom Textbereich getrennt werden.
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Der Fußteil kann mit einer Linie vom Textbereich getrennt werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@fsl}
% \begin{macro}{\@fsltrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@fslfalse}
@@ -199,7 +198,7 @@
% \end{option}
% \end{option}
%
-% In früheren Versionen wurde noch die Option \texttt{mpinclude} von
+% In früheren Versionen wurde noch die Option \texttt{mpinclude} von
% den Klassen ausgewertet. Dies geschieht jetzt nur noch in
% \textsf{typearea}. Von den Klassen wird dann ggf. auf den dort
% definierten Schalter zugegriffen. Dieses Vorgehen ist deshalb
@@ -207,7 +206,7 @@
% laden.
%
%
-% \subsection{Optionen und Anweisungen für leere Seiten}
+% \subsection{Optionen und Anweisungen für leere Seiten}
%
% \iffalse
%</class>
@@ -215,77 +214,77 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{option}{cleardoublepage}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/08/24}{neuer Schalter}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2007/01/03}{Wert \texttt{current} sollte nun
-% funktionieren}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{verwendet \cs{def} statt \cs{let}, damit die
-% Option \texttt{open} funktioniert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/08/24}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2007/01/03}{Wert \texttt{current} sollte nun
+% funktionieren}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{verwendet \cs{def} statt \cs{let}, damit die
+% Option \texttt{open} funktioniert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}%^^A
% \begin{option}{cleardoubleempty}
-% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
% ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{cleardoubleplain}
-% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
% ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{cleardoublestandard}
-% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/06}{\cs{cleardoublestandardpage} statt
+% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/06}{\cs{cleardoublestandardpage} statt
% \cs{cleardoublestandard}}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
% ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublestandardpage}
-% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2007/01/02}{korrekter Ersatzwert gesetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2007/01/02}{korrekter Ersatzwert gesetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleusingstyle}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/08/24}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/17}{\cs{thispagestyle} durch \cs{pagestyle}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/08/24}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/17}{\cs{thispagestyle} durch \cs{pagestyle}
% ersetzt}
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleemptypage}
-% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleplainpage}
-% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8a}{2001/06/18}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleoddpage}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleoddstandardpage}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleoddusingstyle}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/17}{\cs{thispagestyle} durch \cs{pagestyle}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/17}{\cs{thispagestyle} durch \cs{pagestyle}
% ersetzt}
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleoddemptypage}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleoddplainpage}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2001/06/18}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2001/06/18}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleevenpage}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleevenstandardpage}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleevenusingstyle}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/17}{\cs{thispagestyle} durch \cs{pagestyle}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/17}{\cs{thispagestyle} durch \cs{pagestyle}
% ersetzt}
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleevenemptypage}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoubleevenplainpage}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2001/06/18}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2001/06/18}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2001/06/18}{wird immer neu definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/11}{neue Voreinstellung für Versionen nach 2.98c}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2001/06/18}{wird immer neu definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/11}{neue Voreinstellung für Versionen nach 2.98c}%^^A
% Bei Verwendung von \texttt{twoside} und \texttt{openright} bei den
% Klassen \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} wird bei \cs{chapter}
-% implizit \cs{cleardoublepage} ausgeführt. Das führt ggf.
+% implizit \cs{cleardoublepage} ausgeführt. Das führt ggf.
% normalerweise zu einer linken Seite, auf der noch der Kolumnentitel
-% des vorherigen Kapitels und eine Seitenzahl steht. Häufig wird
-% stattdessen nur eine Seitenzahl oder auch gar nichts gewünscht. Es
+% des vorherigen Kapitels und eine Seitenzahl steht. Häufig wird
+% stattdessen nur eine Seitenzahl oder auch gar nichts gewünscht. Es
% soll also der Seitenstil \texttt{plain} oder \texttt{empty}
-% verwendet werden. Dies wird mit den Optionen ermöglicht. Dazu
+% verwendet werden. Dies wird mit den Optionen ermöglicht. Dazu
% werden auch gleich neue Makros definiert:
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@key{cleardoublepage}{%
@@ -321,7 +320,7 @@
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.13}{2014/03/01}{allow page style headings as value for class
-% option}^^A
+% option}%^^A
% At class loading time page style \texttt{headings} is still undefined, but
% should be allowed as value for option \texttt{cleardoublepage}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -376,10 +375,10 @@
\expandafter\ifnum \scr@v@is@gt{2.98c}empty\else current\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Es ist zwar nicht unbedingt notwendig aber eventuell schöner, wenn der zuvor
-% hinzugefügte, bedingte Wert am Ende noch expandiert wird. Der Umstand ist
-% notwendig, weil während der Definition der Optionen die Kompatibilität noch
-% nicht bekannt ist. Diese ergibt sich erst während \cs{KOMAProcessOptions}.
+% Es ist zwar nicht unbedingt notwendig aber eventuell schöner, wenn der zuvor
+% hinzugefügte, bedingte Wert am Ende noch expandiert wird. Der Umstand ist
+% notwendig, weil während der Definition der Optionen die Kompatibilität noch
+% nicht bekannt ist. Diese ergibt sich erst während \cs{KOMAProcessOptions}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<package&extend>\AtEndOfPackage{%
%<class>\AtEndOfClass{%
@@ -438,27 +437,27 @@
% \fi
%
%
-% \subsection{Befehle für den Kompatibilitätsmodus}
+% \subsection{Befehle für den Kompatibilitätsmodus}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headincludeon}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\headincludeoff}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\headseplineon}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\headseplineoff}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\footincludeon}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\footincludeoff}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\footseplineon}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\footseplineoff}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}^^A
-% Da die \KOMAScript-Klassen ohnehin nicht mehr auf Kompatibilität zu
-% \textsf{Script~2.0} überprüft werden, wurde der Kompatibilitätsmodus
-% ersatzlos gestrichen. Dazu gehören nach über zehn Jahren nun auch diese
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/21}{ersatzlos gestrichen}%^^A
+% Da die \KOMAScript-Klassen ohnehin nicht mehr auf Kompatibilität zu
+% \textsf{Script~2.0} überprüft werden, wurde der Kompatibilitätsmodus
+% ersatzlos gestrichen. Dazu gehören nach über zehn Jahren nun auch diese
% Anweisungen. Ehemals waren sie wie folgt definiert:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \if@compatibility
@@ -493,30 +492,30 @@
% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
-% Es wird das Aussehen der Kopf- und Fußzeilen für die
+% Es wird das Aussehen der Kopf- und Fußzeilen für die
% Standardseitenstile \texttt{empty}, \texttt{plain},
% \texttt{headings} und \texttt{myheadings} festgelegt. Diese sind
-% außerdem abhängig davon, ob es sich um einseitiges oder beidseitiges
+% außerdem abhängig davon, ob es sich um einseitiges oder beidseitiges
% Layout handelt.
%
% Im Gegensatz zu den Seitenstilen der Standardklassen steht die
-% Seitennummer beim \KOMAScript{} Paket immer in der Fußzeile.
-% Außerdem sind Trennlinien zwischen Kopf- und Textbereich sowie
-% zwischen Text- und Fußbereich möglich.
+% Seitennummer beim \KOMAScript{} Paket immer in der Fußzeile.
+% Außerdem sind Trennlinien zwischen Kopf- und Textbereich sowie
+% zwischen Text- und Fußbereich möglich.
%
-% Die Kopfzeile wird auch nicht mehr in Großbuchstaben gewandelt.
+% Die Kopfzeile wird auch nicht mehr in Großbuchstaben gewandelt.
%
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/07}{bei \textsf{scrbook} und
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/07}{bei \textsf{scrbook} und
% \textsf{scrreprt} Punkt hinter der section-Nummer entfernt}
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Punkt hinter der Kapitelnummer in der
-% Kopfzeile entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Nummern in der Kopfzeile auf CJK
-% umgestellt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4f}{1996/10/08}{\cs{strut} in der Kopfzeile
-% eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Punkt hinter der Kapitelnummer in der
+% Kopfzeile entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Nummern in der Kopfzeile auf CJK
+% umgestellt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4f}{1996/10/08}{\cs{strut} in der Kopfzeile
+% eingefügt}
% \begin{macro}{\set@tempdima@hw}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Um nicht ständig das Gleiche schreiben zu müssen wird hier ein
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Um nicht ständig das Gleiche schreiben zu müssen wird hier ein
% internes Makro verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\set@tempdima@hw}{%
@@ -530,12 +529,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pnumfont}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
% \begin{macro}{\headfont}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}
% \begin{macro}{\footfont}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neu}^^A
-% Kopf- und Fußzeile sowie die Seitennummer werden in einer speziellen
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% Kopf- und Fußzeile sowie die Seitennummer werden in einer speziellen
% Schriftart gesetzt. Die drei Makros hier sind jedoch als interne
% Makros zu betrachten.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -547,26 +546,26 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{pagenumber}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{pagenumber}}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{pagenumber}}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{pagination}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Alias-Element}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Alias-Element}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{pageheadfoot}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{neues Element}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{neues Element}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{pagehead}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{pagehead}}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{neuer Alias}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{pagehead}}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{neuer Alias}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@wrn@pagehead}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neue Warnung für Element \texttt{pagehead}}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/25}{Warnung geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Warnung geändert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neue Warnung für Element \texttt{pagehead}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/25}{Warnung geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Warnung geändert}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{pagefoot}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{pagefoot}}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{nicht länger ein Alias}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{pagefoot}}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{nicht länger ein Alias}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@wrn@pagefoot}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/13}{es wird \textsf{scrlayer-scrpage} an Stelle
-% von \textsf{scrpage2} empfohlen}^^A
-% Hier werden die Elemente definiert, deren Schriftart dann geändert
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/02/14}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/13}{es wird \textsf{scrlayer-scrpage} an Stelle
+% von \textsf{scrpage2} empfohlen}%^^A
+% Hier werden die Elemente definiert, deren Schriftart dann geändert
% werden kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@pagenumber}{\pnumfont}
@@ -599,13 +598,13 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagemark}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/15}{nun für alle Klassen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.05}{2010/02/05}{eine zusätzliche Gruppe eingefügt}^^A
-% Das ist die Seitenmarke, die nun für alle Klassen verwendet wird. Damit
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/15}{nun für alle Klassen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05}{2010/02/05}{eine zusätzliche Gruppe eingefügt}%^^A
+% Das ist die Seitenmarke, die nun für alle Klassen verwendet wird. Damit
% wird es leichter, \textsf{fancyhdr} statt \textsf{scrpage2} zu verwenden.
% \begin{macro}{\letterpagemark}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/20}{Neu (nur Paket \textsl{scrletter})}^^A
-% Für das Paket wird eine abweichende Definition verwendet, die innerhalb von
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/20}{Neu (nur Paket \textsl{scrletter})}%^^A
+% Für das Paket wird eine abweichende Definition verwendet, die innerhalb von
% \cs{begin{letter}} aktiviert wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
@@ -620,23 +619,23 @@
%</class|letter>
%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \letterpagemark
-% \end{macro}^^A \pagemark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \letterpagemark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \pagemark
%
-% Zurück zur Definition der Seitenstile. Hier gibt es erhebliche
+% Zurück zur Definition der Seitenstile. Hier gibt es erhebliche
% Unterschiede zwischen der Briefklasse und den anderen Klassen. Das beginnt
-% schon damit, dass es spezielle Stile für doppelseitige Briefe nicht gibt.
-% \changes{v2.1b}{1994/12/31}{im einseitigen Seitenstil \cs{markboth} durch
+% schon damit, dass es spezielle Stile für doppelseitige Briefe nicht gibt.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1994/12/31}{im einseitigen Seitenstil \cs{markboth} durch
% \cs{markright} ersetzt}%
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/07}{im einseitigen Seitenstil bei
-% \textsf{scrartcl} und \texttt{oneside} \cs{subsectionmark} eingefügt}%
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/07}{im einseitigen Seitenstil bei
-% \textsf{scrreprt} und \texttt{oneside} \cs{sectionmark} eingefügt}%
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/17}{im einseitigen Seitenstil \cs{markboth} durch
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/07}{im einseitigen Seitenstil bei
+% \textsf{scrartcl} und \texttt{oneside} \cs{subsectionmark} eingefügt}%
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/02/07}{im einseitigen Seitenstil bei
+% \textsf{scrreprt} und \texttt{oneside} \cs{sectionmark} eingefügt}%
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/17}{im einseitigen Seitenstil \cs{markboth} durch
% \cs{markright} ersetzt}%
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/18}{Unterscheidung auf \texttt{twoside} so spät
-% wie möglich}%
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/18}{Unterscheidung auf \texttt{twoside} so spät
+% wie möglich}%
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/31}{\cs{MakeMarkcase} wird beachtet}%
% Hinweis: Die \emph{even}-Varianten werden im einseitigen Satz vom
% \LaTeX-Kern selbst nicht verwendet. Es schadet also nicht, sie trotzdem
% identisch zum doppelseitigen Satz zu definieren.
@@ -804,7 +803,7 @@
%</letter>
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Das Briefpaket verwendet \textsf{scrlayer-scrpage} für die Seitenstile:
+% Das Briefpaket verwendet \textsf{scrlayer-scrpage} für die Seitenstile:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&letter>
\RequirePackage{scrlayer-scrpage}
@@ -832,35 +831,79 @@
{}%
}
%</package&letter>
-%<*class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@headings
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@myheadings
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@plain
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@headings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@myheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@plain
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@notepaper}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new layer page style\texttt{notepaper}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/22}{new layer \texttt{notepaper}}%^^A
+% From \KOMAScript~3.27 the \textsf{scrletter} package uses the layer
+% \texttt{notepaper} to define the note-paper. With this layer it is possible
+% to add several separated information blocks everywhere on the first
+% page. A \texttt{picture} mode layer is used, because this makes the
+% placement easier. It's a background layer, so the page contents are printed
+% above. We could also use an odd-side layer, but who knows \dots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package&letter&body&willbe>
+\DeclareNewLayer[%
+ background,
+ mode=picture,
+ page,
+ align=b,
+ contents=\scr@notepaper@printallelements
+]{notepaper}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \cs{scr@notepaper@elements} see \texttt{scrkernel-notepaper}.
+%
+% A second layer is used for the foldmarks. Again it is a picture layer. But
+% this time it is an odd-sides-only layer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareNewLayer[%
+ background,
+ mode=picture,
+ page,
+ align=b,
+ contents=\scr@foldmarks@printallelements
+]{foldmarks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \cs{@hfoldmark} and \cs{@vfoldmark} see
+% \texttt{scrkernel-notepaper.dtx}.
+%
+% Last but not least the page style. The foldmarks are below the notepaper.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers{notepaper}{foldmarks,notepaper}
+%</package&letter&body&willbe>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@notepaper
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
%
% \subsection{Festlegung des Seitenstils auf besonderen Seiten}
%
-% So etwas gibt es derzeit nicht für Briefe.
+% So etwas gibt es derzeit nicht für Briefe.
% \iffalse
+%<*class>
%<*!letter>
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\titlepagestyle}
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\partpagestyle}
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/08/05}{nicht mehr in \textsf{scrartcl} definiert}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/10}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/08/05}{nicht mehr in \textsf{scrartcl} definiert}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/10}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chapterpagestyle}
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\indexpagestyle}
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{neu}%^^A
% Auf verschiedenen Seiten wird automatisch mit \cs{thispagestyle} auf
% einen anderen Seitenstil umgeschaltet. Welcher das ist, ist in
-% diesem Makros abgelegt und kann bei Bedarf geändert werden.
-% Voreingestellt ist der in früheren Versionen fest verdrahtete
+% diesem Makros abgelegt und kann bei Bedarf geändert werden.
+% Voreingestellt ist der in früheren Versionen fest verdrahtete
% Seitenstil \texttt{plain}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\titlepagestyle}{plain}
@@ -877,7 +920,7 @@
%
% \subsection{Standardeinstellungen}
%
-% Der voreingestellte Seitenstil hängt von der verwendeten Klasse ab:
+% Der voreingestellte Seitenstil hängt von der verwendeten Klasse ab:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<report|article|letter>\pagestyle{plain}
%<book>\pagestyle{headings}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx
index 8263190419..fa4079ac05 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% \CheckSum{704}
+% \CheckSum{721}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx 3064 2019-02-01 07:40:28Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2019-02-01 08:40:28 +0100 (Fri, 01 Feb 2019) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1872 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx}
@@ -101,7 +100,7 @@
%
% \section{Absatzformatierung und -umbruch}
%
-% In diesen Bereich gehört alles, was die Absatzformatierung selbst
+% In diesen Bereich gehört alles, was die Absatzformatierung selbst
% betrifft. Dazu kommen dann noch einige Kleinigkeiten aus dem
% Seitenumbruch.
%
@@ -113,22 +112,22 @@
%<*option>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Optionen für das Absatzlayout}
+% \subsection{Optionen für das Absatzlayout}
%
-% Ab Version 2.8i können wir auch mit Absatzlayouts umgehen, die einen
+% Ab Version 2.8i können wir auch mit Absatzlayouts umgehen, die einen
% Absatzabstand statt einem Absatzeinzug verlangen. Gesteuert wird
-% dies über Optionen und Schalter.
+% dies über Optionen und Schalter.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setparsizes}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues Macro}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{löscht diverse \texttt{parskip}-Einstellungen
-% aus der internen Liste}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/29}{\cs{par@update} darf erst nach
-% \cs{begin{document}} wieder \cs{default@par@update} werden}^^A
-% Über dieses Makro wird die Änderung der Absatzparameter |\parskip|,
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues Macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{löscht diverse \texttt{parskip}-Einstellungen
+% aus der internen Liste}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/29}{\cs{par@update} darf erst nach
+% \cs{begin{document}} wieder \cs{default@par@update} werden}%^^A
+% Über dieses Makro wird die Änderung der Absatzparameter |\parskip|,
% |\parindent|, |\parfillskip| gesetzt. Das erste Argument ist der Einzug, das
-% zweite der Abstand und das dritte die Füllung. Aktiviert werden die
-% Änderungen wie bei |\fontsize| über |\selectfont|. Obwohl in der
+% zweite der Abstand und das dritte die Füllung. Aktiviert werden die
+% Änderungen wie bei |\fontsize| über |\selectfont|. Obwohl in der
% Voreinstellung absolut gearbeitet wird, wird hier intern
% |\par@updaterelative| verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -156,19 +155,19 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\f@parindent}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Eingestellter Absatzeinzug.
% \begin{macro}{\f@parskip}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}%^^A
% Eingestellter Absatzabstand.
% \begin{macro}{\f@parfillskip}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}^^A
-% Eingestellte Absatzfüllung.
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}%^^A
+% Eingestellte Absatzfüllung.
%
% Diese drei Werte werden automatisch bei der Font-Initialisierung eingestellt
-% und sind vorher ungültig!
+% und sind vorher ungültig!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\f@parindent}{\the\parindent}
\newcommand*{\f@parskip}{\the\parskip}
@@ -185,14 +184,14 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\par@update}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/22}{wird möglichst früh \cs{AtBeginDocument}
-% ausgeführt}^^A
-% Dieses Makro wird später in |\selectfont| die Änderung vornehmen.
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/22}{wird möglichst früh \cs{AtBeginDocument}
+% ausgeführt}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro wird später in |\selectfont| die Änderung vornehmen.
% \begin{macro}{\default@par@update}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
-% In der Voreinstellung findet keine Änderung statt. Dies wird jedoch durch
-% die Auswahl einer entsprechenden Option geändert.
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
+% In der Voreinstellung findet keine Änderung statt. Dies wird jedoch durch
+% die Auswahl einer entsprechenden Option geändert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\par@update}{}
\let\par@update\relax
@@ -204,82 +203,82 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{option}{parskip}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{primäre \textsf{keyval}-Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/12/14}{neuer Wert \texttt{never}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/02/01}{\cs{baselineskip} durch 1\cs{baselineskip}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{primäre \textsf{keyval}-Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/12/14}{neuer Wert \texttt{never}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Nutzung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{Wert wird gespeichert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/02/01}{\cs{baselineskip} durch 1\cs{baselineskip}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{option}{parskip-}
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{parskip+}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{parskip*}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{halfparskip}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{halfparskip-}
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/16}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{halfparskip+}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{halfparskip*}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{parindent}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/11}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} durch \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% Diese neun Optionen steuern die Umschaltung zwischen den Modi. Dabei
% schalten alle \texttt{parskip}-Optionen einen Absatzabstand ein,
% wohingegen die \texttt{parindent}-Option den Absatzeinzug
-% einschaltet. Die \texttt{+}-Variante sorgt außerdem dafür, dass
-% die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes maximal zu zwei Dritteln gefüllt
-% wird. Entsprechend sorgt die \texttt{*}-Variante für eine maximale
-% Füllung von drei Vierteln. Die normale Variante sorgt lediglich
-% für einen freien Raum von 1\,em. Die \texttt{-}-Variante sorgt für
-% überhaupt nichts.
+% einschaltet. Die \texttt{+}-Variante sorgt außerdem dafür, dass
+% die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes maximal zu zwei Dritteln gefüllt
+% wird. Entsprechend sorgt die \texttt{*}-Variante für eine maximale
+% Füllung von drei Vierteln. Die normale Variante sorgt lediglich
+% für einen freien Raum von 1\,em. Die \texttt{-}-Variante sorgt für
+% überhaupt nichts.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@parindent}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Der einzustellende Absatzeinzug.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@parskip}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}%^^A
% Der einzustellende Absatzabstand.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@parfillskip}
-% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}^^A
-% Die einzustellende Absatzfüllung.
+% \changes{v2.8i}{2001/07/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{Bedeutung geändert}%^^A
+% Die einzustellende Absatzfüllung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@parindent}{1em}
\newcommand*{\scr@parskip}{\z@}
@@ -289,9 +288,9 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% Neu bei \KOMAScript-3 ist, dass die Optionen wie bei \textsf{scrlttr2} über
-% eine eingzige \textsf{keyval} gesetzt werden können.
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/27}{typo fix in \cs{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}}
+% Neu bei \KOMAScript-3 ist, dass die Optionen wie bei \textsf{scrlttr2} über
+% eine eingzige \textsf{keyval} gesetzt werden können.
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/27}{typo fix in \cs{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@key{parskip}[true]{%
\begingroup
@@ -430,8 +429,8 @@
% \end{option}
% \end{option}
%
-% Hierfür\marginline{Geplant!} sollte eine keyval-Option mit Werten definiert
-% werden. Dazu dann neue Werte für absolutes oder relatives Verhalten.
+% Hierfür\marginline{Geplant!} sollte eine keyval-Option mit Werten definiert
+% werden. Dazu dann neue Werte für absolutes oder relatives Verhalten.
%
% \iffalse
%</option>
@@ -466,22 +465,22 @@
% \end{Length}
%
% \begin{macro}{\selectfont}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neue Änderung}^^A
-% Spätestens ab Version~3.0 soll die Möglichkeit bestehen, |\parskip|,
-% |\parindent| und |\parfillskip| mit der Schriftgröße automatisch
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neue Änderung}%^^A
+% Spätestens ab Version~3.0 soll die Möglichkeit bestehen, |\parskip|,
+% |\parindent| und |\parfillskip| mit der Schriftgröße automatisch
% anzupassen. Dazu muss |\selectfont| entsprechend erweitert werden.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@selectfont}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/04/14}{neue Erweiterung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{everysel}-Behandlung korrigiert}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{tracefnt}-Behandlung hinzugefügt}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/04/14}{neue Erweiterung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{everysel}-Behandlung korrigiert}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{tracefnt}-Behandlung hinzugefügt}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@new@selectfont}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/04/14}{neue Erweiterung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{everysel}-Behandlung korrigiert}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{tracefnt}-Behandlung hinzugefügt}
-% \changes{v3.10b}{2011/03/13}{\textsf{everysel} kann jetzt auch während
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/04/14}{neue Erweiterung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{everysel}-Behandlung korrigiert}
+% \changes{v3.10}{2010/09/28}{\textsf{tracefnt}-Behandlung hinzugefügt}
+% \changes{v3.10b}{2011/03/13}{\textsf{everysel} kann jetzt auch während
% \cs{begin}\marg{document} geladen werden}
% Damit das auch bei Verwendung des \textsf{everysel}-Pakets funktioniert,
-% wird hier zusätzliche Vorsorge getroffen.
+% wird hier zusätzliche Vorsorge getroffen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@selectfont}{}
\expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@selectfont\csname selectfont \endcsname
@@ -496,9 +495,9 @@
\AfterPackage{everysel}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{@EverySelectfont@Init}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt gibt es zwei Möglichkeiten: Entweder wurde ein \textsf{everysel}
-% verwendet, bei dem alles anders funktioniert, oder es wurde während
-% \cs{begin}\marg{document} geladen. In beiden Fällen versuchen wir einen
+% Jetzt gibt es zwei Möglichkeiten: Entweder wurde ein \textsf{everysel}
+% verwendet, bei dem alles anders funktioniert, oder es wurde während
+% \cs{begin}\marg{document} geladen. In beiden Fällen versuchen wir einen
% direkten Patch:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifx\csname selectfont \endcsname\scr@new@selectfont
@@ -532,8 +531,8 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\par@updaterelative}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
-% Die eigentliche Änderung verbirgt sich in |\par@updaterelative|. Ggf. wird
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
+% Die eigentliche Änderung verbirgt sich in |\par@updaterelative|. Ggf. wird
% |\par@update| zu |\par@updaterelative|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\par@updaterelative}{%
@@ -568,11 +567,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\parindent@update}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\parskip@update}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\parfillskip@update}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
% Ein paar Hilfsmakros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\parindent@update}{%
@@ -611,24 +610,24 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@defaultunits}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/22}{\cs{setlength} wegen \textsf{tikz}
-% eliminiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/22}{\cs{setlength} wegen \textsf{tikz}
+% eliminiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@defaultunits}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@@defaultunits}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/22}{\cs{setlength} und \cs{addtolength} wegen
-% \textsf{tikz} eliminiert}^^A
-% Damit |\par@updaterelative| überhaupt funktionieren kann, wird
-% |\scr@defaultunits| benötigt. Dieses Makro arbeitet prinzipiell wie
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{neues internes Macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/22}{\cs{setlength} und \cs{addtolength} wegen
+% \textsf{tikz} eliminiert}%^^A
+% Damit |\par@updaterelative| überhaupt funktionieren kann, wird
+% |\scr@defaultunits| benötigt. Dieses Makro arbeitet prinzipiell wie
% |\@defaultunits| bekommt aber Dimension bzw. Skip als erstes und den Wert
-% als zweites Argument. Als Besonderheit dürften im Wert auch andere
+% als zweites Argument. Als Besonderheit dürften im Wert auch andere
% Dimensions bzw. Skips vor und nach \texttt{plus} und \texttt{minus}
% verwendet werden. Es sind also auch Angaben der Art "`\texttt{12 plus 1
% minus 2}"' sowie
% "`\texttt{\string\baselineskip\string\@plus.1\string\baselineskip}"'
-% gültig.
+% gültig.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@defaultunits}[2]{%
\begingroup
@@ -670,13 +669,13 @@
%
% Absatzabstand und Absatzeinzug:
% \begin{macro}{\@list@extra}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/06}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/03}{\cs{parsep} fixed}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/06}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/03}{\cs{parsep} fixed}
% \begin{macro}{\add@extra@listi}
-% \changes{v2.9h}{2002/09/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Ab Version 2.8i wird hier optionsabhängig gearbeitet. Dabei müssen
-% auch die Befehle bei der Umschaltung der Schriftgröße für \cs{small}
-% und \cs{footnotesize} geändert werden.
+% \changes{v2.9h}{2002/09/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Ab Version 2.8i wird hier optionsabhängig gearbeitet. Dabei müssen
+% auch die Befehle bei der Umschaltung der Schriftgröße für \cs{small}
+% und \cs{footnotesize} geändert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@list@extra}{%
\ifdim\parskip>\z@\topsep\z@\parsep\parskip\itemsep\z@\fi
@@ -688,32 +687,59 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+% \begin{macro}{\deferred@thm@head}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/10}{new patch of \textsf{amsthm}}%^^A
+% Unfortunatly \Package{amsthm} has a problem if a class handles \cs{topsep}
+% this way, because it is only prepared for the case, that \cs{parskip} and
+% \cs{parsep} are changed manually without influence to \cs{topsep}. So the
+% initial distance is missing. To avoid this problem, we need to patch the
+% package's internal command \cs{deferred@thm@head}. This is not nice, but
+% unfortunaltly needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AfterPackage{amsthm}{%
+ \RequirePackage{xpatch}%
+ \xpatchcmd{\deferred@thm@head}{\addvspace{-\parskip}}{}{%
+ \ClassInfoNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ amsthm's \string\deferred@thm@head\space patched}%
+ }{%
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ cannot patch amsthm's \string\deferred@thm@head.\MessageBreak
+ This could result in wrong spacing before theorem\MessageBreak
+ environments defined by package `amsthm'%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
% \iffalse
%</body>
%</class>
%<*class|clo>
%<*body|10pt|11pt|12pt>
% \fi
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{Umstellung für die pt-Dateien}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Aktualisierung der Absatzeinstellungen}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/26}{Umstellung für die pt-Dateien}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Aktualisierung der Absatzeinstellungen}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
% ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{\cs{@listi} wird auf jeden Fall ausgeführt}
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{\cs{@listi} wird auf jeden Fall ausgeführt}
% \begin{macro}{\@listI}
% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
% ersetzt}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
% ersetzt}
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
-% \changes{v2.9h}{2002/09/03}{etwas robuster}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
+% \changes{v2.9h}{2002/09/03}{etwas robuster}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
% ersetzt}
% \begin{macro}{\small}
-% \changes{v2.9h}{2002/09/03}{etwas robuster}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
+% \changes{v2.9h}{2002/09/03}{etwas robuster}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/27}{\cs{g@addto@macro} durch \cs{l@addto@macro}
% ersetzt}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<10pt|11pt|12pt>\@ifundefined{@list@extra}{}{%
@@ -743,11 +769,11 @@
%
% \subsection{Umbruchsteuerung}
%
-% Für die Umbruchsteuerung sind einige Penalties zuständig. Diese sind
+% Für die Umbruchsteuerung sind einige Penalties zuständig. Diese sind
% im \LaTeX-Kern definiert. Leider sind \cs{@lowpenalty},
% \cs{@medpenalty} und \cs{@highpenalty} aber nicht mit
% Voreinstellungen versehen, besitzen einheitlich die Voreinstellung
-% 0. Hier werden deshalb die Werte aus den Standardklassen übernommen:
+% 0. Hier werden deshalb die Werte aus den Standardklassen übernommen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\@lowpenalty = 51
\@medpenalty =151
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
index 228fa2258a..b3d2f623cf 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{212}
+% \CheckSum{223}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2006-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx 2980 2018-04-26 12:06:09Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-04-26 14:06:09 +0200 (Thu, 26 Apr 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1872 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-pseudolengths.dtx}
@@ -99,13 +98,13 @@
% \changes{v2.95}{2006/03/22}{%
% erste Version aus der Aufteilung von \textsf{scrclass.dtx}}
%
-% \section{Pseudo-Längen für Briefe}
+% \section{Pseudo-Längen für Briefe}
%
-% Pseudo-Längen wurden für \textsf{scrlttr2} eingeführt, um Längenregister zu
-% sparen. Tatsächlich hat das \LaTeX-Team kurz darauf entschieden, dass
-% künftig \eTeX{} die empfohlene Maschine für \LaTeX{} sein soll, wodurch die
-% Einführung von Pseudo-Längen nachträglich überflüssig wurde. Es gibt sie nun
-% aber einmal und aus Gründen der Kompatiblität wird es sie für Briefe auch
+% Pseudo-Längen wurden für \textsf{scrlttr2} eingeführt, um Längenregister zu
+% sparen. Tatsächlich hat das \LaTeX-Team kurz darauf entschieden, dass
+% künftig \eTeX{} die empfohlene Maschine für \LaTeX{} sein soll, wodurch die
+% Einführung von Pseudo-Längen nachträglich überflüssig wurde. Es gibt sie nun
+% aber einmal und aus Gründen der Kompatiblität wird es sie für Briefe auch
% weiterhin geben.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -119,7 +118,7 @@
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Option}
-% Das Prinzip der Pseudo-Längen wird nicht durch Optionen beeinflusst.
+% Das Prinzip der Pseudo-Längen wird nicht durch Optionen beeinflusst.
%
%
% \iffalse
@@ -127,18 +126,39 @@
%<*body>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Anweisungen für Pseudo-Längen}
+% \subsection{Anweisungen für Pseudo-Längen}
%
% Zu Berechnung der Feldpositionen werden verschiedene Dimensions-Variablen
-% benötigt. Um jedoch nicht unnötig viele Längenregister zu verbrauchen, wird
-% hier mit einer Pseudo-Längen-Arithmetik gearbeitet.
+% benötigt. Um jedoch nicht unnötig viele Längenregister zu verbrauchen, wird
+% hier mit einer Pseudo-Längen-Arithmetik gearbeitet.
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\Ifplength}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/29}{new}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\if@plength}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/29}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% Test whether or not a given pseudo-length (\texttt{\#1}) already exists. If
+% so execute the second argument, otherwise the third. It's somehow
+% inconsistent to use \cs{Ifplength} instead of \cs{ifplength}, but as it does
+% not act as a \TeX{} switch but a \LaTeX{} command it is better not to use
+% \cs{if\dots}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\if@plength}[1]{%
+ \@ifundefined{ltr@len@#1}{\@secondoftwo}{\@firstoftwo}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\Ifplength}{\if@plength}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A\Ifplength
+% \end{macro}%^^A\if@plength
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
%
% \begin{macro}{\@newplength}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Kompatibilität zu \texttt{scrlettr.cls}^^A
-% aufgegeben}
-% Dieses Makro definiert eine neue Pseude-Länge und setzt sie auf den
-% Wert 0. Eine Pseudo-Länge ist ein Makro, das eine Länge enthält.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Kompatibilität zu \texttt{scrlettr.cls}%^^A
+% aufgegeben}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/29}{Fehlermeldung angepasst}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro definiert eine neue Pseude-Länge und setzt sie auf den
+% Wert 0. Eine Pseudo-Länge ist ein Makro, das eine Länge enthält.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@newplength}[1]{%
\@ifundefined{ltr@len@#1}{%
@@ -150,11 +170,10 @@
pseudo-length \expandafter\string\csname ltr@len@#1\endcsname
already defined%
}{%
- You tried to define a new pseudo-length using
- \string\@newplength\MessageBreak
- which is already defined. Try another name or
- better\MessageBreak
- Don't use this KOMA-Script internal macro}%
+ You've tried to define a new pseudo-length using\MessageBreak
+ \string\@newplength\space
+ or \string\newplength.\MessageBreak
+ Please, try another name}%
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -162,22 +181,22 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\newplength}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/04/26}{Neu}
-% Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar.
+% Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newplength}{\@newplength}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\useplength}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/17}{\cs{dimexpr} statt \cs{number} verwendet,
% wenn \eTeX{} verwendet wird}
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/29}{\eTeX{} ist zwingend}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/29}{\cs{dimexpr} durch \cs{glueexpr} ersetzt}^^A
-% Natürlich muss auf eine solche Pseudo-Länge auch wieder lesend
-% zugeriffen werden können. Wir definieren dies hier so, dass es
-% außerdem möglich ist, ein Vorzeichen oder einen Faktor zu verwenden. Dafür
-% wird allerdings \eTeX{} benötigt.
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/29}{\cs{dimexpr} durch \cs{glueexpr} ersetzt}%^^A
+% Natürlich muss auf eine solche Pseudo-Länge auch wieder lesend
+% zugeriffen werden können. Wir definieren dies hier so, dass es
+% außerdem möglich ist, ein Vorzeichen oder einen Faktor zu verwenden. Dafür
+% wird allerdings \eTeX{} benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\useplength}[1]{%
\glueexpr \csname ltr@len@#1\endcsname\relax}%
@@ -185,11 +204,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setlengthtoplength}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% Eine echte Länge soll auf das Vielfache einer Pseudo-Länge gesetzt
-% werden. Dabei wird der Faktor als optionaler Parameter übergeben.
-% Der erste obligatorische Parameter ist die Länge, der zweite
-% obligatorische Parameter ist die Pseudo-Länge.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% Eine echte Länge soll auf das Vielfache einer Pseudo-Länge gesetzt
+% werden. Dabei wird der Faktor als optionaler Parameter übergeben.
+% Der erste obligatorische Parameter ist die Länge, der zweite
+% obligatorische Parameter ist die Pseudo-Länge.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setlengthtoplength}[3][]{%
\setlength{#2}{\useplength{#3}}%
@@ -198,12 +217,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setplength}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/29}{\cs{glueexpr} eingefügt}^^A
-% Natürlich wird ebenfalls eine Möglichkeit benötigt, einer
-% Pseudo-Länge einen Wert zuzuweisen. Dies geschieht unter lokaler
-% Anwendung einer Länge, damit sichergestellt ist, dass eine
-% Längenangabe übergeben wird. Dabei wird das zuvor definierte Makro
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/29}{\cs{glueexpr} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Natürlich wird ebenfalls eine Möglichkeit benötigt, einer
+% Pseudo-Länge einen Wert zuzuweisen. Dies geschieht unter lokaler
+% Anwendung einer Länge, damit sichergestellt ist, dass eine
+% Längenangabe übergeben wird. Dabei wird das zuvor definierte Makro
% \cs{setlengthtoplength} verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@setplength}[3][]{%
@@ -220,8 +239,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setplength}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/04/26}{Neu}^^A
-% Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar.
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/04/26}{Neu}%^^A
+% Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setplength}{\@setplength}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -235,8 +254,8 @@
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/04/26}{Neu}
% \begin{macro}{\setplengthtototalheight}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/04/26}{Neu}
-% Man kann auch die Breite, Höhe, Tiefe oder Höhe + Tiefe eines Inhalts
-% verwenden, um eine Pseudolänge zu definieren.
+% Man kann auch die Breite, Höhe, Tiefe oder Höhe + Tiefe eines Inhalts
+% verwenden, um eine Pseudolänge zu definieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setplengthtowidth}[3][]{%
\begingroup
@@ -287,10 +306,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtolengthplength}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
% Wenn wir schon dabei sind, soll statt dem Setzen auch das Addieren
-% funktionieren. Hier ist die Erschwernis, dass der Faktor nur für
-% die Pseudo-Länge und nicht für das Endergebnis gelten soll.
+% funktionieren. Hier ist die Erschwernis, dass der Faktor nur für
+% die Pseudo-Länge und nicht für das Endergebnis gelten soll.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addtolengthplength}[3][]{%
\begingroup%
@@ -302,9 +321,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@addtoplength}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/29}{\cs{glueexpr} eingefügt}^^A
-% Ebenso wird ein Makro benötigt, mit dem zu einer Pseudo-Länge das
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/10/06}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/29}{\cs{glueexpr} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Ebenso wird ein Makro benötigt, mit dem zu einer Pseudo-Länge das
% Vielfache eines Wertes addiert werden kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@addtoplength}[3][]{%
@@ -324,7 +343,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtoplength}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/04/26}{Neu}
-% Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar.
+% Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addtoplength}{\@addtoplength}
% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx
index ab6314b290..3ad243bb9e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-sections.dtx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% \CheckSum{4526}
+% \CheckSum{4824}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-sections.dtx
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-sections.dtx 3063 2019-02-01 07:39:11Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-sections.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
% The runs of run-time file generation:
%<preidentify>%%% (run: preidentify)
% - everything that is needed before selfidentification of resulting files
@@ -78,9 +78,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2019-02-01 08:39:11 +0100 (Fri, 01 Feb 2019) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 3063 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3262 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-sections.dtx}%
@@ -91,7 +91,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-sections.dtx}
@@ -111,21 +110,21 @@
%
% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
%
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Größenbefehle in den Überschriften
-% variabilisiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Größenbefehle in den Überschriften
+% variabilisiert}%^^A
% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/26}{erste Version aus der Aufteilung von
-% \texttt{scrclass.dtx}}^^A
+% \texttt{scrclass.dtx}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{Code in Datei \texttt{scrkernel-section} komplett
-% umsortiert}^^A
+% umsortiert}%^^A
%
% \section{Gliederung}
%
-% Zur Gliederung gehören neben den üblichen Gliederungsbefehlen
+% Zur Gliederung gehören neben den üblichen Gliederungsbefehlen
% \cs{chapter} \dots \cs{subparagraph} auch alle Optionen und Befehle,
-% die diese Gliederung beeinflussen. Eingeschränkt gehören auch die
-% Befehle dazu, die Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge zu den
+% die diese Gliederung beeinflussen. Eingeschränkt gehören auch die
+% Befehle dazu, die Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge zu den
% Gliederungsbefehlen erzeugen oder unmittelbar formatieren. Diese
-% Entscheidung wurde getroffen, weil die Zusammengehörigkeit eher hier
+% Entscheidung wurde getroffen, weil die Zusammengehörigkeit eher hier
% gesehen wird, als bei den Verzeichnissen selbst.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -133,7 +132,7 @@
% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@maybeasf} entfernt}
%
% Die Briefklasse hat keine derartige Gliederung. Beim Briefpaket wird die
-% Gliederung über die verwendete Klasse bestimmt.
+% Gliederung über die verwendete Klasse bestimmt.
% \iffalse
%<*!letter>
% \fi
@@ -144,13 +143,13 @@
% ggf. Vakatseiten.
%
% \begin{option}{open}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/06}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}%^^A
% Bei \textsf{scrreprt} und \textsf{scrbook} kann per Option eingestellt
% werden, ob beispielsweise Kapitel nur auf linken oder rechten Seiten
-% beginnen dürfen oder auf jeder Seite.
+% beginnen dürfen oder auf jeder Seite.
% \begin{macro}{\if@openright}
% \begin{macro}{\@openrighttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@openrightfalse}
@@ -199,8 +198,8 @@
}
%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{indirekte Initialisierung}
-% Die Initialisierung erfolgt indirekt über Option \texttt{headings}.
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{indirekte Initialisierung}
+% Die Initialisierung erfolgt indirekt über Option \texttt{headings}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*execoption>
%<book>\KOMAExecuteOptions{headings=openright}
@@ -210,12 +209,12 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{openright}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}%^^A
% \begin{option}{openany}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}^^A
-% Zusätzlich gibt es einige Standardoptionen, die natürlich auch mit
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/05}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}%^^A
+% Zusätzlich gibt es einige Standardoptionen, die natürlich auch mit
% \KOMAScript{} funktionieren sollen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option>
@@ -231,23 +230,23 @@
%
% \subsection{Behandlung von Gliederungsnummern}
%
-% Die Möglichkeit der Nummerierung ist allen Ebenen bis auf \cs{minisec}
+% Die Möglichkeit der Nummerierung ist allen Ebenen bis auf \cs{minisec}
% gemeinsam.
%
% \begin{option}{numbers}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}%^^A
% Dies ist die zentrale Option zur Konfiguration der Nummerierung. Dabei geht
-% es primär um die Gliederungsnummern, es sind jedoch auch davon abgeleitete
+% es primär um die Gliederungsnummern, es sind jedoch auch davon abgeleitete
% Nummern betroffen.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dotchangeatdocument}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% Da die Umschaltung zwischen automatischem Endpunkt, immer Endpunkt und kein
% Endpunkt unbedingt \emph{vor} \cs{begin{document}} erfolgen muss, wird eine
-% Fehlermeldung ausgegeben, falls das jemand zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt
-% probiert. Umschaltmöglichkeiten sind auf die Klassen beschränkt.
+% Fehlermeldung ausgegeben, falls das jemand zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt
+% probiert. Umschaltmöglichkeiten sind auf die Klassen beschränkt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%<*prepare>
@@ -264,10 +263,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Normalerweise wird automatisch entschieden, ob Nummern mit einem
-% Punkt enden müssen oder nicht. Um dies abzuschalten, muss nur der
-% gewünschte Zustand eingeschaltet und die Umschaltmöglichkeit
+% Punkt enden müssen oder nicht. Um dies abzuschalten, muss nur der
+% gewünschte Zustand eingeschaltet und die Umschaltmöglichkeit
% entfernt werden. Die Umschaltung kann jedoch nicht direkt erfolgen, sondern
-% erfolgt zeitverzögert in \cs{begin{document}}. Hier wird nur das Makro
+% erfolgt zeitverzögert in \cs{begin{document}}. Hier wird nur das Makro
% umgeschaltet, das dort verwendet wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option>
@@ -302,21 +301,21 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{pointednumbers}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/19}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so,
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/19}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so,
% bei \texttt{pointednumber} wird explizit ein Fehler gemeldet}
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\cs{@altsecnumformatfalse} wird
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\cs{@altsecnumformatfalse} wird
% direkt auf \cs{@altsecnumformattrue} gesetzt}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{pointlessnumbers}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/19}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so,
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/19}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so,
% bei \texttt{pointlessnumber} wird explizit ein Fehler gemeldet}
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\cs{@altsecnumformattrue} wird direkt
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\cs{@altsecnumformattrue} wird direkt
% auf \cs{@altsecnumformatfalse} gesetzt}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% Diese Optionens sind nun wirklich veraltet und sollten nicht mehr verwendet
% werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -325,13 +324,13 @@
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{pointlessnumbers}{numbers=noenddot}
%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Übrigens weiß ich, wie blödsinnig die Namen der Optionen sind. Aber
-% das ist nun nicht mehr zu ändern.
+% Übrigens weiß ich, wie blödsinnig die Namen der Optionen sind. Aber
+% das ist nun nicht mehr zu ändern.
% \end{option}
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{Counter}{secnumdepth}
-% Dieser Zähler gibt an, bis zu welcher Ebene die Gliederungsüberschriften
+% Dieser Zähler gibt an, bis zu welcher Ebene die Gliederungsüberschriften
% nummeriert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -343,35 +342,31 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnumbered}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new command}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new command}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ifunnumbered}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new command}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new command}%^^A
% Test, ob eine Gliederungsebene (\texttt{\#1}) nummeriert wird. Falls das der
% Fall ist, wird das zweite Argument verwendet, sonst das dritte. Bei
% \cs{ifunnumbered} ist die Logik genau vertauscht.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\ifnumbered}[1]{%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1numdepth}{%
- \@secondoftwo
- }{%
- \expandafter\ifnum \@nameuse{#1numdepth}>\c@secnumdepth
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1numdepth}{%
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \fi
- }%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum \@nameuse{#1numdepth}>\c@secnumdepth
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
}
\newcommand*{\ifunnumbered}[1]{%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1numdepth}{%
- \@firstoftwo
- }{%
- \expandafter\ifnum \@nameuse{#1numdepth}>\c@secnumdepth
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
- }%
+ \ifnumbered{#1}{\@secondoftwo}{\@firstoftwo}%
}
%</body>
%</class>
@@ -383,21 +378,21 @@
% \subsection{\KOMAScript-eigene Befehle zur Definition von
% Gliederungsbefehlen}
%
-% Die Funktionalität des \LaTeX-Kerns genügt \KOMAScript{} bei der Definition
+% Die Funktionalität des \LaTeX-Kerns genügt \KOMAScript{} bei der Definition
% von Gliederungsebenen nicht.
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@activate@xsection}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hiermit wird die Erweiterung für das optionale Argument der
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hiermit wird die Erweiterung für das optionale Argument der
% Gliederungsbefehle eingeschaltet.
-% \begin{macro}{\scr@osectarg}^^A
-% Für die nicht per \cs{@startsection} implementierten Befehle geht das
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@osectarg}%^^A
+% Für die nicht per \cs{@startsection} implementierten Befehle geht das
% einfach durch Umschaltung von \cs{scr@osectarg}. Bei 0 ist die Aktivierung
% nicht aktiv. Bei 1 landet das optionale Argument hingegen im Kopf, bei 2
% im Inhaltsverzeichnis und bei 3 in beiden. Die Voreinstellung ist deshalb
% ebenfalls 0.
%
-% Da Option \texttt{headings} darauf zurückgreift, müssen die beiden Makros
+% Da Option \texttt{headings} darauf zurückgreift, müssen die beiden Makros
% bereits vorab definiert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -414,25 +409,25 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@altsecnumformat}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neuer Schalter}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@altsecnumformattrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@altsecnumformatfalse}
-% Dieses Schalter wird für die Umschaltung auf Duden-Regel~6 bei der
-% Numerierung benötigt.
+% Dieses Schalter wird für die Umschaltung auf Duden-Regel~6 bei der
+% Numerierung benötigt.
% \begin{macro}{\if@autodot}
-% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{neuer Schalter}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{neuer Schalter}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@autodottrue}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{arbeitet nun gobal}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{arbeitet nun gobal}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@autodotfalse}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{arbeitet nun gobal}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{arbeitet nun gobal}%^^A
% Nach Duden 20.~Auflage, Regel~5 wird in der Gliederung kein Punkt gesetzt,
% wenn diese rein mit arabischen Zahlen erfolgt. Nach Regel~6 folgt jedoch ein
-% Punkt, wenn die Gliederung auch römische Zahlen oder Großbuchstaben
-% enthält. Aus Konsistenzgründen muss der Punkt in diesem Fall immer gesetzt
-% werden. \KOMAScript{} bietet dafür einen Automatismus.
+% Punkt, wenn die Gliederung auch römische Zahlen oder Großbuchstaben
+% enthält. Aus Konsistenzgründen muss der Punkt in diesem Fall immer gesetzt
+% werden. \KOMAScript{} bietet dafür einen Automatismus.
%
-% Damit die Umschaltung auch wieder zurück auf Regel~5 automatisch erfolgen
-% kann, wird ein zweiter Schalter benötigt.
+% Damit die Umschaltung auch wieder zurück auf Regel~5 automatisch erfolgen
+% kann, wird ein zweiter Schalter benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%<*prepare>
@@ -446,12 +441,12 @@
% Dabei soll die Umstellung des Punktes beim zweiten TeX-Lauf bereits am
% Anfang aktiv sein. Deshalb wird die Information am Ende in die aux-Datei
% geschrieben.
-% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/12}{es wird direkt in \cs{@mainaux} geschrieben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/01/15}{es wird erst unmittelbar vor dem Schließen
-% der Haupt-aux-Datei in diese geschrieben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/07}{es wird \cs{immediate} geschrieben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/25}{es wird \cs{csname}\dots\cs{endcsname}
-% verwendet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/12}{es wird direkt in \cs{@mainaux} geschrieben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/01/15}{es wird erst unmittelbar vor dem Schließen
+% der Haupt-aux-Datei in diese geschrieben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/07}{es wird \cs{immediate} geschrieben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/25}{es wird \cs{csname}\dots\cs{endcsname}
+% verwendet}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\BeforeClosingMainAux{%
@@ -460,24 +455,24 @@
\fi\fi}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@autodotfalse
-% \end{macro}^^A \@autodottrue
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@autodot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@altsecnumformatfalse
-% \end{macro}^^A \@altsecnumformattrue
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@altsecnumformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@autodotfalse
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@autodottrue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@autodot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@altsecnumformatfalse
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@altsecnumformattrue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@altsecnumformat
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@altsecnumhook}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@altsecnumhooktrue}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@altsecnumhookfalse}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% Es werden drei Hilfsmakros benötigt. Das erste davon wird bei
-% \cs{begin{document}} ausgeführt (nachdem die \texttt{aux}-Datei gelesen
-% wurde!) und schaltet den gewünschten Zustand ein. Dazu wird es per Option
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/07}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Es werden drei Hilfsmakros benötigt. Das erste davon wird bei
+% \cs{begin{document}} ausgeführt (nachdem die \texttt{aux}-Datei gelesen
+% wurde!) und schaltet den gewünschten Zustand ein. Dazu wird es per Option
% ggf. auf die eine oder andere Bedeutung umgeschaltet. Im Auto-Fall ist es
-% übrigens \cs{@empty}.
+% übrigens \cs{@empty}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*prepare>
\newcommand*{\scr@altsecnumhook}{}
@@ -490,15 +485,15 @@
}
%</prepare>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@altsecnumhooktrue
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@altsecnumhookfalse
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@altsecnumhook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@altsecnumhooktrue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@altsecnumhookfalse
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@altsecnumhook
%
% \begin{macro}{\@maybeautodot}
-% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Ob der automatische Punkt aktiviert werden muss, wird aufgrund der
-% Darstellung eines Zählers entschieden. Diese wird dem Makro als Argument
-% übergeben (\cs{thepart}, \cs{thechapter} etc.). Durch Verwendung einer
+% Darstellung eines Zählers entschieden. Diese wird dem Makro als Argument
+% übergeben (\cs{thepart}, \cs{thechapter} etc.). Durch Verwendung einer
% Gruppe, werden alle Definitionen lokal gehalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -507,11 +502,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@@maybeautodot}
-% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{neuerdings überflüssige \cs{aftergroup}^^A
-% entfernt}^^A
-% Die expandierte Darstellung wird dann auf Darstellungsbefehle für
-% Zähler gescannt.
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/07}{neuerdings überflüssige \cs{aftergroup}%^^A
+% entfernt}%^^A
+% Die expandierte Darstellung wird dann auf Darstellungsbefehle für
+% Zähler gescannt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@@maybeautodot}[1]{%
\ifx #1\@stop\let\@@maybeautodot\relax
@@ -530,11 +525,11 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@maybeautodot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@maybeautodot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@maybeautodot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@maybeautodot
%
% \begin{macro}{\autodot}
-% \changes{v2.7}{2001/01/03}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7}{2001/01/03}{neu}%^^A
% Dieses Makro setzt dann den Punkt nach Bedarf.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -545,61 +540,67 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Optimierung
-% der Erweiterung für das optionale Argument}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Optimierung
+% der Erweiterung für das optionale Argument}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@startsection}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{verwende \cs{numexpr} für Argument 2}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{verwende \cs{glueexpr} für Argument 3--5}
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{verwende \cs{numexpr} für Argument 2}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{verwende \cs{glueexpr} für Argument 3--5}
% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{\texttt{afterindent}-Einstellung wird
-% beachtet}^^A
+% beachtet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@startsection}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}%^^A
% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{Tests funktionieren jetzt auch mit
-% \textsf{amsgen}}^^A
-% \KOMAScript{} benötigt ein eigenes \cs{@startsection}, weil die
-% Funktionalität des \cs{@startsection} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern nicht
-% genügt. Bevor allerdings die eigene Definition in Angriff genommen wird,
+% \textsf{amsgen}}%^^A
+% \KOMAScript{} benötigt ein eigenes \cs{@startsection}, weil die
+% Funktionalität des \cs{@startsection} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern nicht
+% genügt. Bevor allerdings die eigene Definition in Angriff genommen wird,
% muss kontrolliert werden, ob die aufgefundene Definition noch den
-% Erwartungen entspricht. Alles andere wäre ein deutlicher Hinweis, dass
-% eventuell in \KOMAScript{} ebenfalls eine Anpassung vorzunehmen wäre.
+% Erwartungen entspricht. Alles andere wäre ein deutlicher Hinweis, dass
+% eventuell in \KOMAScript{} ebenfalls eine Anpassung vorzunehmen wäre.
% Da es offenbar Leute gibt, die bei der Umdefinierung von \cs{section}
% etc. mit Hilfe von \cs{@startsection} Leerzeichen zwischen die Argumente
-% packen und gleichzeitig \textsf{amsgen} verwenden, sorgen wir hier dafür,
+% packen und gleichzeitig \textsf{amsgen} verwenden, sorgen wir hier dafür,
% dass dann trotzdem noch die Warnungen funktionieren und nebenbei der Code
-% mit etwas Glück sogar ebenfalls. Dazu ist es notwendig, dass die Version von
+% mit etwas Glück sogar ebenfalls. Dazu ist es notwendig, dass die Version von
% \cs{@startsection} gespeichert wird, die \cs{kernel@ifstar} verwendet.
% \begin{macro}{\startsection@sectionname}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\startsection@secnumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\startsection@indent}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\startsection@beforeskip}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\startsection@afterskip}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@startsection@runin}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\startsection@afterindent}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
-% Ab dem Zeitpunkt des Aufrufs des Hooks \cs{scr@startsection@hook} sind die
-% Makros \cs{startsection@sectionname}, \cs{startsection@secnumdepth},
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
+% Ab dem Zeitpunkt des Aufrufs des Do-Hooks
+% \texttt{heading/postinit} sind die Makros
+% \cs{startsection@sectionname}, \cs{startsection@secnumdepth},
% \cs{startsection@indent}, \cs{startsection@beforeskip},
% \cs{if@startsection@indentafter}, \cs{startsection@afterskip},
-% \cs{if@startsection@runin} und \cs{startsection@afterindent} gültig. Die
+% \cs{if@startsection@runin} und \cs{startsection@afterindent} gültig. Die
% \cs{\dots indent}- und \cs{\dots skip}-Makros sind dabei skips (oder
-% \cs{glueexpr}) und somit wie Längen verwendbar. Bei den beiden \cs{\dots
-% skip}-Makros handelt es sich bereits um effektive Abstände, es wurden also
-% etwaige Fallunterscheidungen bezüglich des Vorzeichens des Arguments für
-% \cs{scr@startsection} bereits aufgelöst. Das \cs{if\dots}-Makro ist entweder
+% \cs{glueexpr}) und somit wie Längen verwendbar. Bei den beiden \cs{\dots
+% skip}-Makros handelt es sich bereits um effektive Abstände, es wurden also
+% etwaige Fallunterscheidungen bezüglich des Vorzeichens des Arguments für
+% \cs{scr@startsection} bereits aufgelöst. Das \cs{if\dots}-Makro ist entweder
% \cs{iftrue} oder \cs{iffalse}. Ein \cs{if@startsection@afterindent}
-% existiert nicht, weil \cs{if@afterindent} zu dem Zeitpunkt bereits gültig
-% ist. Außerhalb von \cs{scr@startsection} ist die Verwendung dieser Macros
-% unzulässig, bzw. das Ergebnis unspezifiziert. Ebenso sind diese Macros als
+% existiert nicht, weil \cs{if@afterindent} zu dem Zeitpunkt bereits gültig
+% ist. Außerhalb von \cs{scr@startsection} ist die Verwendung dieser Macros
+% unzulässig, bzw. das Ergebnis unspezifiziert. Ebenso sind diese Macros als
% \emph{read-only} zu betrachten!
+%^^A TODO: Der ganze Test hier ist eigentlich Unfug. Beim Laden
+%^^A der Klasse sollte die Kern-Anweisung noch unverändert sein, da Pakete
+%^^A normalerweise erst danach zum Zuge kommen und sie umdefinieren
+%^^A können. Also müsste eigentlich \cs{AtBeginDocument} getestet werden. Ich
+%^^A werde mir das gelegentlich noch einmal vornehmen müssen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\scr@saved@startsection}[6]{%
@@ -643,6 +644,7 @@
\fi
\fi
\newcommand*{\scr@startsection}[6]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
\if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
\par
\@tempskipa \glueexpr #4\relax
@@ -687,18 +689,18 @@
\csname iffalse\endcsname
\fi
}%
- \csname scr@startsection@hook\endcsname
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/postinit/#1}%
\if@nobreak
\everypar{}%
\else
\addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
\fi
\kernel@ifstar {%
- \csname scr@preto@ssect@hook\endcsname
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/star/#1}%
\def\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@{#1}%
\@ssect{\glueexpr #3\relax}{\glueexpr #4\relax}{\glueexpr #5\relax}{#6}%
}{%
- \csname scr@preto@sect@hook\endcsname
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/nostar/#1}%
\scr@section@dblarg{%
\@sect{#1}{\numexpr #2\relax}{\glueexpr #3\relax}{\glueexpr #4\relax}%
{\glueexpr #5\relax}{#6}%
@@ -708,7 +710,7 @@
\else
\ClassWarningNoLine{\KOMAClassName}{`\string\@startsection' has been
changed.\MessageBreak
- \KOMAClassName\space needs it's own Definition of
+ \KOMAClassName\space needs it's own definition of
`\string\@startsection'\MessageBreak
to provide extended features for the optional argument\MessageBreak
of `\string\section` etc.\MessageBreak
@@ -719,14 +721,16 @@
KOMA-Script that fixes the problem, please\MessageBreak
send a report to the KOMA-Script author.\MessageBreak
Note, that this alternative approach does not\MessageBreak
- execute `\string\scr@startsection@hook',\MessageBreak
- `\string\scr@preto@ssect@hook', or
- `\string\scr@preto@sect@hook'\MessageBreak
+ execute the elements of do-hooks:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- `heading/postinit`,\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- `heading/branch/star`,\MessageBreak
+ \space\space- `heading/branch/nostar`,\MessageBreak
and does always use `runin=bysign' and\MessageBreak
`afterindent=bysign'%
}%
\let\scr@saved@startsection\@startsection
\newcommand*{\scr@startsection}[6]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
\kernel@ifstar {%
\scr@saved@startsection{#1}{\numexpr #2\relax}{\glueexpr #3\relax}%
{\glueexpr #4\relax}{\glueexpr #5\relax}{#6}*%
@@ -741,21 +745,21 @@
% \begin{macro}{\scr@sect@runin}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neu (intern)}
% Diese Hilfsanweisung nimmt die Fallunterscheidung vor, ob eine Spitzmarke
-% oder eine freistehende Überschrift oder abhängig vom Vorzeichen des
-% Abstandes danach eine Spitzmarke oder eine freistehende Überschrift gesetzt
+% oder eine freistehende Überschrift oder abhängig vom Vorzeichen des
+% Abstandes danach eine Spitzmarke oder eine freistehende Ãœberschrift gesetzt
% werden soll. Die Voreinstellung ist sicherheitshalber letzteres. Diese
% Voreinstellung wird auch bei jedem Aufruf von \cs{@xsect} erneut
% erzwungen. Auch in \cs{scr@startsection} wird die Anweisung angepasst.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@sect@runin}[3]{#3}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sect@runin
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@sect@runin
% \begin{macro}{\scr@startsection@ulm@error}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{Neue interne Anweisung}
% Ich bin mir bewusst, dass die Fehlerausgabe, die hier definiert wird,
% vermutlich nie aufgerufen wird, da ein Paketautor hierzu eines der Makros
% bereits vor dem ersten \cs{scr@startsection}-Befehl verwenden
-% müsste. Trotzdem verwende ich es quasi zwecks Initialisierung.
+% müsste. Trotzdem verwende ich es quasi zwecks Initialisierung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@startsection@ulm@error}[1]{%
\ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -783,56 +787,86 @@
\newcommand*\startsection@afterindent{%
\scr@startsection@ulm@error\startsection@afterindent}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startsection@ulm@error
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startsection@afterindent
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@startsection@runin
-% \end{macro}^^A \startsection@afterskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \startsection@beforeskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \startsection@indent
-% \end{macro}^^A \startsection@secnumdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \startsection@sectionname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@startsection@ulm@error
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@startsection@afterindent
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@startsection@runin
+% \end{macro}%^^A \startsection@afterskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \startsection@beforeskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \startsection@indent
+% \end{macro}%^^A \startsection@secnumdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \startsection@sectionname
% \begin{macro}{\At@startsection}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
-% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann Code in die Ausführung von \KOMAScript's
-% eigenem \cs{scr@startsection} an der Stelle eingefügt werden, an der
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{Umgestellt auf \cs{AddtoDoHook}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann Code in die Ausführung von \KOMAScript's
+% eigenem \cs{scr@startsection} an der Stelle eingefügt werden, an der
% \cs{if@afterindent} und \cs{@tempskipa} bereits korrekt eingestellt sind,
% aber noch bevor \emph{pentaly} und Abstand gesetzt wurden bzw. \cs{everypar}
-% gelöscht wurde.
+% gelöscht wurde.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\At@startsection}[1]{%
- \@ifundefined{scr@startsection@hook}{\let\scr@startsection@hook\@empty}{}%
- \l@addto@macro{\scr@startsection@hook}{#1}%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of deprecated command `\string\At@startsection'
+ mapped to\MessageBreak
+ `\string\AddtoDoHook{heading/postinit}
+ {...\string\@gobble}'%
+ }%
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/postinit}{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis{#1}{section}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{neu (intern)}
+% Hilfsmakro für \cs{At@startsection}, \cs{Before@sect} und \cs{Before@@sect}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@doonlyifstyleofargis}[3]{%
+ \IfSectionCommandStyleIs{#3}{#2}{#1}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \At@startsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@doonlyifstyleofargis
+% \end{macro}%^^A \At@startsection
% \begin{macro}{\Before@ssect}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
-% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann Code in die Ausführung von \KOMAScript's
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{Umgestellt auf \cs{AddtoDoHook}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann Code in die Ausführung von \KOMAScript's
% eigenem \cs{scr@startsection} unmittelbar vor dem Aufruf von \cs{@ssect}
-% eingefügt werden.
+% eingefügt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Before@ssect}[1]{%
- \@ifundefined{scr@preto@ssect@hook}{\let\scr@preto@ssect@hook\@empty}{}%
- \l@addto@macro{\scr@preto@ssect@hook}{#1}%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of deprecated command `\string\Before@ssect'
+ mapped to\MessageBreak
+ `\string\AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/star}%
+ {...\string\@gobble}'%
+ }%
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/star}{\scr@onlyifstyleofargis{#1}{section}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \Before@ssect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \Before@ssect
% \begin{macro}{\Before@sect}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}^^A
-% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann Code in die Ausführung von \KOMAScript's
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/11}{Neue Anweisung für Paketautoren}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{Umgestellt auf \cs{AddtoDoHook}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann Code in die Ausführung von \KOMAScript's
% eigenem \cs{scr@startsection} unmittelbar vor dem Aufruf von \cs{@sect}
-% eingefügt werden.
+% eingefügt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Before@sect}[1]{%
- \@ifundefined{scr@preto@sect@hook}{\let\scr@preto@sect@hook\@empty}{}%
- \l@addto@macro{\scr@preto@sect@hook}{#1}%
+ \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ Usage of deprecated command `\string\Before@sect'
+ mapped to\MessageBreak
+ `\string\AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/nostar}%
+ {...\string\@gobble}'%
+ }%
+ \AddtoDoHook{heading/branch/nostar}{\scr@onlyifstyleofargis{#1}{section}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \Before@sect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \Before@sect
% \begin{macro}{\scr@section@dblarg}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@section@xdblarg}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Neue interne Anweisung}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\scr@section@dblarg}[1]{%
\kernel@ifnextchar[%]
@@ -863,14 +897,39 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}%^^A \@startsection
%
+% \begin{macro}{\UseNumberUsageError}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{Neu}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfUseNumber}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{Explizite Fehlermeldung bei Verwendung außerhalb
+% von Ãœberschriften}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung ist nur innerhalb von Ãœberschriften definiert. Wird sie
+% außerhalb verwendet, so gibt sie einen entsprechenden Fehler aus.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\UseNumberUsageError}[2]{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \string\IfUseNumber\space not allowed%
+ }{%
+ You cannot use \string\IfUseNumber\space outside a heading.\MessageBreak
+ If you'd continue, I'll ignore both arguments, because I do not
+ know\MessageBreak
+ whether to use the first or the second argument.%
+ }%
+}
+\newcommand*{\IfUseNumber}[2]{}%
+\let\IfUseNumber\UseNumberUsageError
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\SecDef}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\secdef}
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Optimierung
-% der Erweiterung für das optionale Argument}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Optimierung
+% der Erweiterung für das optionale Argument}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\SecDef}[2]{\kernel@ifstar{#2}{\scr@section@dblarg{#1}}}
@@ -881,27 +940,31 @@
% \end{macro}%^^A \secdef
% \end{macro}%^^A \SecDef
% \begin{macro}{\scr@sect}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{entfällt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{entfällt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@sect
% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Realisierung
-% der Erweiterung für das optionale Argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Verwendung von
-% \cs{csname}\texttt{add\#1tocentry}\cs{endcsname}
-% bzw. \cs{addtocentrydefault}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{definiert \cs{IfUsePrefixLine} intern}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Verwendung von \cs{numexpr} für Argument 2}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Verwendung von \cs{gluexpr} für Argument
-% 3--5}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{Verwendung von \cs{sectionlinesformat} und
-% \cs{sectioncatchphraseformat}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Realisierung
+% der Erweiterung für das optionale Argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Verwendung von
+% \cs{csname}\texttt{add\#1tocentry}\cs{endcsname}
+% bzw. \cs{addtocentrydefault}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{definiert \cs{IfUsePrefixLine} intern}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Verwendung von \cs{numexpr} für Argument 2}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Verwendung von \cs{gluexpr} für Argument
+% 3--5}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{Verwendung von \cs{sectionlinesformat} und
+% \cs{sectioncatchphraseformat}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{neue Option \texttt{nonumber}}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@latex@sect}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{Neu (intern für \textsf{scrhack})}%^^A
% Damit auch alle mit \cs{@startsection} definierten Gliederungsebenen
-% bei der Entscheidung berücksichtigt werden, muss ein internes Makro
-% des \LaTeX-Kerns erweitert werden. Für die Ebenen \cs{part} und
+% bei der Entscheidung berücksichtigt werden, muss ein internes Makro
+% des \LaTeX-Kerns erweitert werden. Für die Ebenen \cs{part} und
% \cs{chapter} wird der Test direkt in der Definition der Befehle
% erledigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
-\def\@tempa#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+\def\scr@latex@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
\let\@svsec\@empty
\else
@@ -933,7 +996,8 @@
#7}}%
\fi
\@xsect{#5}}
-\ifx\@sect\@tempa\else
+\ifx\@sect\scr@latex@sect\else
+ \let\scr@latex@sect\@sect
\ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
Unexpected definition of \string\@sect!\MessageBreak
Please send information about this to\MessageBreak
@@ -941,6 +1005,9 @@
Maybe LaTeX will be broken by the redefinition\MessageBreak
of \string\@sect\space}%
\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@latex@sect
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<trace>\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{redefining LaTeX kernel macro \string\@sect}
\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
\ifnum \scr@osectarg=\z@
@@ -948,6 +1015,7 @@
\else
\scr@istest#7=\@nil
\fi
+ \@currentusenumbertrue
\if@scr@tempswa
\setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#8},head={#8},reference={#8},#7}%
\else
@@ -962,9 +1030,9 @@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/04}{support for \textsf{minitoc}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/24}{usage of \cs{ext@figure} and \cs{ext@table}
-% instead of \texttt{lof} and \texttt{lot}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/04}{support for \textsf{minitoc}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/24}{usage of \cs{ext@figure} and \cs{ext@table}
+% instead of \texttt{lof} and \texttt{lot}}%^^A
% Add the \texttt{xsect} entries to \texttt{lof} and \texttt{lot}. Note, that
% the original \cs{starsection} tests of \textsf{minitoc} has a bug and so
% does not work. And the original code of \textsf{minitoc} has hard coded
@@ -982,7 +1050,12 @@
\fi
}%
\let\IfUsePrefixLine\@secondoftwo
- \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth
+ \ifcase
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth \z@\else \@ne\fi
+ \else
+ \z@
+ \fi
\let\@svsec\@empty
\else
\refstepcounter{#1}%
@@ -990,22 +1063,31 @@
\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{\cs{scr@sect@runin} beachten}^^A
-% Falls \cs{scr@sect@runin} nicht definiert ist, wird es jetzt höchste Zeit
-% dafür. Und natürlich nutzen wir es dann für die Entscheidung Spitzmarke oder
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{\cs{scr@sect@runin} beachten}%^^A
+% Falls \cs{scr@sect@runin} nicht definiert ist, wird es jetzt höchste Zeit
+% dafür. Und natürlich nutzen wir es dann für die Entscheidung Spitzmarke oder
% nicht.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{IfUseNumber} lokal definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim
\scr@sect@runin{\z@}{\p@}{\glueexpr #5\relax}>\z@
\begingroup
+ \ifx\@svsec\@empty
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}^^A
-% Das Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}%^^A
+% Das Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
% \cs{penalty}-Werte wieder aufheben, verbiete ich hier einen Umbruch nach
-% der Fontänderung.
+% der Fontänderung.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{scr@do@at} hinzugefügt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
#6{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M
\sectionlinesformat{#1}{\glueexpr #3\relax}\@svsec{#8}\@@par}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
\endgroup
%<*trace>
\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -1021,7 +1103,12 @@
\addtocentrydefault{#1}{##1}{##2}%
}%
}{}%
- \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth
+ \ifcase
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth \z@\else \@ne\fi
+ \else
+ \z@
+ \fi
\csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\@currenttocentry}%
\else
\csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{\csname the#1\endcsname}{%
@@ -1030,12 +1117,19 @@
\fi
\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}^^A
-% Da Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{ExecuteDoHook} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Da Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
% \cs{penalty}-Werte wieder aufheben, verbiete ich hier einen Umbruch nach
-% der Fontänderung.
+% der Fontänderung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@svsechd{%
+ \ifx\@svsec\@empty
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
#6{\nobreak\sectioncatchphraseformat{#1}{\glueexpr #3\relax}\@svsec{#8}}%
%<*trace>
\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -1052,13 +1146,19 @@
\addtocentrydefault{#1}{####1}{####2}%
}%
}{}%
- \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth
+ \ifcase
+ \if@currentusenumber
+ \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth \z@\else \@ne\fi
+ \else
+ \z@
+ \fi
\csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\@currenttocentry}%
\else
\csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{\csname the#1\endcsname}{%
\@currenttocentry}%
\fi
\fi
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
}%
\fi
\let\IfUsePrefixLine\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning
@@ -1066,23 +1166,25 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ds@tocentry}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@currenttocentry}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@tocentry} (semi-intern)
-% umbenannt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@tocentry} (semi-intern)
+% umbenannt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@ds@head}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@currentheadentry}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@head} (semi-intern)
-% umbenannt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@head} (semi-intern)
+% umbenannt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@currentlabelname}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{neu (semi-intern)}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{neu (semi-intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\if@scr@tempswa}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\if@currentusenumber}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{neu (semi-intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@istest}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Für die Realisierung werden noch ein paar Key-Value-Definitionen und ein
-% paar Hilfsmakros benötigt:
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Für die Realisierung werden noch ein paar Key-Value-Definitionen und ein
+% paar Hilfsmakros benötigt:
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamily{KOMAarg}
\DefineFamilyMember[.section]{KOMAarg}
@@ -1110,23 +1212,25 @@
}%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
+\FamilyInverseBoolKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{nonumber}{@currentusenumber}
\newcommand*{\scr@istest}{}
\def\scr@istest#1=#2\@nil{%
\ifx\relax#2\relax\@scr@tempswafalse\else\@scr@tempswatrue\fi
}
\newif\if@scr@tempswa
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@istest
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@scr@tempswa
-% \end{macro}^^A \@currentlabelname
-% \end{macro}^^A \@currentheadentry
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ds@head
-% \end{macro}^^A \@currenttocentry
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@ds@tocentry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@istest
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@currentusenumber
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@scr@tempswa
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@currentlabelname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@currentheadentry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ds@head
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@currenttocentry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@ds@tocentry
% \begin{macro}{\sectionlinesformat}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Überschriften im Stil
-% \texttt{section}, wenn mit Überschriftenzeilen gearbeitet
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Ãœberschriften im Stil
+% \texttt{section}, wenn mit Ãœberschriftenzeilen gearbeitet
% wird. Fonteinstellungen sind zu diesem Zeitpunkt bereits erfolgt. Die
% Argumente sind:
% \begin{description}
@@ -1135,21 +1239,21 @@
% Einzug.
% \item[\meta{Gliederungsnummer} --] die bereits fertig formatierte
% Gliederungsnummer oder leer, falls keine Gliederungsnummer auszugeben ist.
-% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Überschrift.
+% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Ãœberschrift.
% \end{description}
-% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Überschrift kein
-% Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. Nach der Überschrift wird jedoch zwangsweise
-% ein \cs{@@par} ausgeführt, so dass sichergestellt ist, dass mit einem
+% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Ãœberschrift kein
+% Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. Nach der Ãœberschrift wird jedoch zwangsweise
+% ein \cs{@@par} ausgeführt, so dass sichergestellt ist, dass mit einem
% internen Absatz abgeschlossen wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sectionlinesformat}[4]{%
\@hangfrom{\hskip #2#3}{#4}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sectionlinesformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectionlinesformat
% \begin{macro}{\sectioncatchphraseformat}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Überschriften im
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Ãœberschriften im
% Stil \texttt{section}, wenn mit Spitzmarken gearbeitet
% wird. Fonteinstellungen sind zu diesem Zeitpunkt bereits erfolgt. Die
% Argumente sind:
@@ -1160,26 +1264,27 @@
% \item[\meta{Gliederungsnummer} --] die bereits fertig formatierte
% Gliederungsnummer oder leer, falls keine Gliederungsnummer auszugeben
% ist.
-% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Überschrift.
+% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Ãœberschrift.
% \end{description}
-% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Überschrift kein
+% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Ãœberschrift kein
% Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sectioncatchphraseformat}[4]{%
\hskip #2#3#4%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sectioncatchphraseformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \@sect
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@sect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectioncatchphraseformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@sect
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Realisierung
-% der Erweiterung für die Formatieurng der Überschrift}^^A
-% Das wird für Überschriften ohne Nummer verwendet. Im Prinzip machen wir hier
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{Vollständige Neudefinition zur Realisierung
+% der Erweiterung für die Formatieurng der Überschrift}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@latex@ssect}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{Neu (intern für \textsf{scrhack})}%^^A
+% Das wird für Überschriften ohne Nummer verwendet. Im Prinzip machen wir hier
% dasselbe wie zuvor.
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@tempa#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\def\scr@latex@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
\@tempskipa #3\relax
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
\begingroup
@@ -1191,7 +1296,9 @@
\def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5}}%
\fi
\@xsect{#3}}
-\ifx\@ssect\@tempa\else
+\ifx\@ssect\scr@latex@ssect
+\else
+ \let\scr@latex@ssect\@ssect
\ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
Unexpected definition of \string\@ssect!\MessageBreak
Please send information about this to\MessageBreak
@@ -1199,11 +1306,14 @@
Maybe LaTeX will be broken by the redefinition\MessageBreak
of \string\@ssect\space}%
\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@latex@ssect
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<trace>\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{redefining LaTeX kernel macro
%<trace> \string\@ssect}
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}{%
- \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{incompatible usage of
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{Incompatible usage of
\string\@ssect\space detected.\MessageBreak
You've used the KOMA-Script implementation of
\string\@ssect\MessageBreak
@@ -1213,37 +1323,49 @@
\def\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@{\string\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{\cs{scr@sect@runin} beachten}^^A
-% Falls \cs{scr@sect@runin} nicht definiert ist, wird es jetzt höchste Zeit
-% dafür. Und natürlich nutzen wir es dann für die Entscheidung Spitzmarke oder
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{\cs{scr@sect@runin} beachten}%^^A
+% Falls \cs{scr@sect@runin} nicht definiert ist, wird es jetzt höchste Zeit
+% dafür. Und natürlich nutzen wir es dann für die Entscheidung Spitzmarke oder
% nicht.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{IfUseNumber} lokal definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim
\scr@sect@runin{\z@}{\p@}{\glueexpr #3\relax}>\z@
\begingroup
+ \let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}^^A
-% Das Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{ExecuteDoHook} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Das Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
% \cs{penalty}-Werte wieder aufheben, verbiete ich hier einen Umbruch nach
-% der Fontänderung.
+% der Fontänderung.
% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ }\reserved@a
#4{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M
\expandafter\sectionlinesformat\expandafter{\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
{\glueexpr #1\relax}\@empty{#5}\@@par}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
+ }\reserved@a
\endgroup
\else
\edef\@svsechd{%
+ \unexpanded{\let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo}%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
\unexpanded{#4}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}^^A
-% Das Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}%^^A
+% Das Farbänderungen im Schriftargument erlaubt sein sollen und diese aktuelle
% \cs{penalty}-Werte wieder aufheben, verbiete ich hier einen Umbruch nach
-% der Fontänderung.
+% der Fontänderung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\noexpand\nobreak
\noexpand\sectioncatchphraseformat{\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
\unexpanded{{\glueexpr #1\relax}\@empty{#5}}%
}%
+ \noexpand\ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@}%
}%
\fi
\let\scr@s@ct@@nn@m@\relax
@@ -1251,15 +1373,17 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ssect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ssect
% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{wird umdefiniert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{wird umdefiniert}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@latex@xsect}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{Neu (intern für \textsf{scrhack})}%^^A
% Wir brauchen zum Einen in \cs{@xsect} einen Fallunterscheidung nach
% \cs{scr@sect@runin} und zum Anderen muss diese Fallunterscheidung am Ende
-% wieder zurückgesetzt werden.
+% wieder zurückgesetzt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
-\def\@tempa#1{%
+\def\scr@latex@xsect#1{%
\@tempskipa #1\relax
\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
\par \nobreak
@@ -1284,7 +1408,8 @@
\fi
\ignorespaces
}
-\ifx\@xsect\@tempa\else
+\ifx\@xsect\scr@latex@xsect\else
+ \let\scr@latex@xsect\@xsect
\ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
Unexpected definition of \string\@xsect!\MessageBreak
Please send information about this to\MessageBreak
@@ -1292,6 +1417,9 @@
Maybe LaTeX will be broken by the redefinition\MessageBreak
of \string\@xsect\space}%
\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@latex@xsect
+% \begin{macrocode}
%<trace>\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{redefining LaTeX kernel macro
%<trace> \string\@xsect}
\def\@xsect#1{%
@@ -1329,25 +1457,25 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@xsect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@xsect
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfUsePrefixLine}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{außerhalb von Gliederungsbefehlsstilen
-% definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{außerhalb von Gliederungsbefehlsstilen
+% definiert}%^^A
% Eigentlich ist diese Anweisung nur innerhalb von Gliederungsbefehlen
% sinnvoll und wurde bis \KOMAScript{} 3.17c auch nur dort definiert. Dann gab
% es aber Leute, die \cs{chapterformat} missbraucht haben und gleich meldete
% sich jemand, die nicht verstehen konnte, warum die Anweisung dann einen
% Fehler produzieren muss. Wenn man den Code nicht verstanden hat, dann ist
-% das nämlich so. Deshalb gebe ich jetzt eine Warnung aus, dass die Verwendung
-% nicht unbedingt zu dem Resultat führt, das erwartet wird.
+% das nämlich so. Deshalb gebe ich jetzt eine Warnung aus, dass die Verwendung
+% nicht unbedingt zu dem Resultat führt, das erwartet wird.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning}[2]{%
\ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
- usage of \string\IfUsePrefixLine\space outside
+ Usage of \string\IfUsePrefixLine\space outside
section command\MessageBreak
style makes no sense, because the behaviour not only\MessageBreak
depends on class options but also on the run-time\MessageBreak
@@ -1364,51 +1492,51 @@
\let\IfUsePrefixLine\scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfUsePrefixLine
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@IfUsePrefixLineWarning
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfUsePrefixLine
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedsection}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Überschriften werden \cs{raggedsection}^^A
-% gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{\cs{raggedsection} ist als \cs{raggedright}
-% voreingestellt}^^A
-% Dieses Makro gibt an, wie die Überschriften formatiert
-% werden. Voreingestellt ist linksbündig. Da dies nicht nur die Formatierung
-% von \cs{section} (und darunter), sondern auch die Voreinstellung für die
-% höheren Ebenen ist, wird die Definition hier vorgezogen.
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Ãœberschriften werden \cs{raggedsection}%^^A
+% gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{\cs{raggedsection} ist als \cs{raggedright}
+% voreingestellt}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro gibt an, wie die Ãœberschriften formatiert
+% werden. Voreingestellt ist linksbündig. Da dies nicht nur die Formatierung
+% von \cs{section} (und darunter), sondern auch die Voreinstellung für die
+% höheren Ebenen ist, wird die Definition hier vorgezogen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\raggedsection}{}
\let\raggedsection\raggedright
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \raggedsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \raggedsection
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommand}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{Komplettumbau, um stilabhängige Optionen zu
-% ermöglichen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{\cs{scr@dsc@def@style@\dots @command}
-% definiert alle Stil abhängigen Anweisungen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/03}{\cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
-% definiert die Verzeichnisstil abhängigen Anweisungen}^^A
-% Definition neuer oder Umdefinition existierender Gliederungsbefehle, die auf
-% \cs{scr@startsection} basieren. Ebenso wird ein Verzeichniseintrag erzeugt,
-% falls ein solcher noch nicht existiert. Die Deklaration geschieht über
-% diverse Optionen (Achtung: Unbedingt daran denken, diese in
-% \cs{ProvideSectionCommands} ebenfalls zu definieren!!!):
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{Komplettumbau, um stilabhängige Optionen zu
+% ermöglichen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{\cs{scr@dsc@def@style@\dots @command}
+% definiert alle Stil abhängigen Anweisungen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/03}{\cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
+% definiert die Verzeichnisstil abhängigen Anweisungen}%^^A
+% Definition neuer oder Umdefinition existierender Gliederungsbefehle. Ebenso
+% wird ein Verzeichniseintrag erzeugt, falls ein solcher noch nicht
+% existiert. Die Deklaration geschieht über diverse Optionen:
+%^^A (Achtung: Unbedingt daran denken, die Optionen in
+%^^A \cs{ProvideSectionCommands} ebenfalls zu definieren!!!)
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\DefineFamily{KOMAarg}
\DefineFamilyMember[.dsc]{KOMAarg}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Definiert eine neue Option für einen Stil eines Gliederungsbefehls. Das
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Definiert eine neue Option für einen Stil eines Gliederungsbefehls. Das
% erste Argument ist der Stil, das zweite der Name der Option, das dritte ist
-% die Definition. Sollte innerhalb der Definition eine Familie benötigt
+% die Definition. Sollte innerhalb der Definition eine Familie benötigt
% werden, so ist \texttt{KOMAarg} zu verwenden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption}[3]{%
@@ -1419,17 +1547,17 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommandDummyOption}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{wird nicht mehr benötigt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandDummyOption
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{wird nicht mehr benötigt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommandDummyOption
% \begin{macro}{\AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu}
% \begin{macro}{\@AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@doopts}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu (intern)}
% Registriert eine neue Gliederungsbefehlsoption, indem sie der internen Liste
-% der Gliederungsbefehlsoptionen hinzugefügt wird.
+% der Gliederungsbefehlsoptionen hinzugefügt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList}[1]{%
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
@@ -1442,12 +1570,12 @@
}%
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@doopts}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@dooptions
-% \end{macro}^^A \@AddToSectionCommandOptionsListWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@dooptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@AddToSectionCommandOptionsListWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AddToSectionCommandOptionsDoList
% \begin{macro}{\RelaxSectionCommandOptions}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu}
-% Diese Option macht alle Gliederungsbefehlsoptionen ungültig.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{neu}
+% Diese Option macht alle Gliederungsbefehlsoptionen ungültig.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\RelaxSectionCommandOptions}{%
\begingroup
@@ -1464,13 +1592,13 @@
\do@endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \RelaxSectionCommandOptions
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \RelaxSectionCommandOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/25}{Argument wird ggf. expandiert}^^A
-% Definiert eine für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
-% Längenoption und speichert das Ergebnis in einem Makro, das sich aus
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/25}{Argument wird ggf. expandiert}%^^A
+% Definiert eine für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
+% Längenoption und speichert das Ergebnis in einem Makro, das sich aus
% Argument 3 gefolgt von der aktuellen Ebene gefolgt von Argument 4 ergibt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption}[4]{%
@@ -1489,11 +1617,11 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleNumberOption}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/25}{Argument wird expandiert}^^A
-% Definiert eine für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/25}{Argument wird expandiert}%^^A
+% Definiert eine für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
% Zahlenoption und speichert das Ergebnis in einem Makro, das sich aus
% Argument 3 gefolgt von der aktuellen Ebene gefolgt von Argument 4 ergibt.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1508,10 +1636,10 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleNumberOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleNumberOption
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Definiert für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Definiert für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
% Schrift und speichert das Ergebnis in einem Element, das sich aus
% Argument 3 gefolgt von der aktuellen Ebene gefolgt von Argument 4 ergibt.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1526,15 +1654,15 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Definiert für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
-% Fuzzy-Auswahl. Eine Fuzzy-Auswahl akzeptiert neben den Werten für
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Definiert für die aktuelle Ebene \cs{scr@dsc@current} eine neue
+% Fuzzy-Auswahl. Eine Fuzzy-Auswahl akzeptiert neben den Werten für
% boolsche-Schalter noch einen weiteren Wert. Es wird davon eine Anweisung
-% mit drei Argumenten definiert. Abhängig vom Wert wird das erste
+% mit drei Argumenten definiert. Abhängig vom Wert wird das erste
% (\texttt{true}), zweite (\texttt{false}) oder dritte (\emph{sonst}) Argument
-% ausgeführt. Der erlaubte weitere Wert wird als 5. Argument angegeben.
+% ausgeführt. Der erlaubte weitere Wert wird als 5. Argument angegeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption}[5]{%
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleOption{#1}{#2}{%
@@ -1557,16 +1685,16 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@section@options}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Dann für die Optionen des Stils \texttt{section}:
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Dann für die Optionen des Stils \texttt{section}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@section@options}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{indent}]
-% Linker Einzug der Überschrift
+% Linker Einzug der Ãœberschrift
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{section}
@@ -1574,12 +1702,12 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{afterindent}]
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{afterindent}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{afterindent}}%^^A
% Fuzzy-Logik. Ein boolcher Wert gibt an, ob die erste Zeile nach der
-% Überschrift eingezogen werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign}
-% möglich. Dann hängt die Entscheidung für den Einzug vom Vorzeichen von
+% Ãœberschrift eingezogen werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign}
+% möglich. Dann hängt die Entscheidung für den Einzug vom Vorzeichen von
% \texttt{beforeskip} ab. Ein negativer Wert bedeutet dann, dass der
-% Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift unterdrückt werden soll.
+% Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift unterdrückt werden soll.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption{section}
@@ -1587,7 +1715,7 @@
{bysign}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{beforeskip}]
-% Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Übeschrift an. Im Fall von
+% Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Ãœbeschrift an. Im Fall von
% \texttt{afterindent=bysign} wird der Absolutwert verwendet.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1595,10 +1723,10 @@
{beforeskip}{scr@}{@beforeskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{runin}]
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{runin}}^^A
-% Fuzzy-Logik. Ein boolscher Wert gibt an, dass die Überschrift als
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{runin}}%^^A
+% Fuzzy-Logik. Ein boolscher Wert gibt an, dass die Ãœberschrift als
% Spitzmarke (\texttt{true}) oder als eigene Zeile (\texttt{false}) gesetzt
-% werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign} möglich. Dann hängt
+% werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign} möglich. Dann hängt
% Spitzmarke oder nicht vom Vorzeichen von \texttt{afterskip} ab. Spitzmarke
% gibt es dann bei einem negativen Wert von \texttt{afterskip}.
% \end{description}
@@ -1608,26 +1736,26 @@
{bysign}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{afterskip}] Im Fall einer Spitzmarke (siehe
-% \texttt{runin}) der horizontale Abstand nach der Überschrift. Im Fall einer
-% freistehenden Überschrift der vertikale Abstand nach der Überschrift. Falls
-% die Spitzmarke über das Vorzeichen aktiviert wird, wird immer der Betrag des
+% \texttt{runin}) der horizontale Abstand nach der Ãœberschrift. Im Fall einer
+% freistehenden Ãœberschrift der vertikale Abstand nach der Ãœberschrift. Falls
+% die Spitzmarke über das Vorzeichen aktiviert wird, wird immer der Betrag des
% Wertes verwendet!
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{section}
{afterskip}{scr@}{@afterskip}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für das
+% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für das
% Element.\end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{section}{font}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@section@options
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@style@section@options
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@def@style@section@command}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/19}{korrekte Spitzmarkenprüfung für
-% \cs{parfillskip}-Änderung}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung left fest, wie ein Gliederungsbefehl für den Stil
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/19}{korrekte Spitzmarkenprüfung für
+% \cs{parfillskip}-Änderung}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung left fest, wie ein Gliederungsbefehl für den Stil
% \texttt{section} zu definieren ist. Das einzige Argument ist dabei der
% \meta{Name} der Gliederungsebene, beispielsweise \texttt{section},
% \texttt{subsection} etc. Hier ist es recht einfach, da lediglich
@@ -1652,17 +1780,17 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@section@command
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@section@command
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@options}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Dann für die Optionen des Stils \texttt{chapter}:
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Dann für die Optionen des Stils \texttt{chapter}:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@options}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\texttt{pagestyle}] Seitenstil für die Anfangsseite der
+% \item[\texttt{pagestyle}] Seitenstil für die Anfangsseite der
% Gliederungsebene.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1673,12 +1801,12 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{afterindent}]
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{afterindent}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{afterindent}}%^^A
% Fuzzy-Logik. Ein boolcher Wert gibt an, ob die erste Zeile nach der
-% Überschrift eingezogen werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign}
-% möglich. Dann hängt die Entscheidung für den Einzug vom Vorzeichen von
+% Ãœberschrift eingezogen werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign}
+% möglich. Dann hängt die Entscheidung für den Einzug vom Vorzeichen von
% \texttt{beforeskip} ab. Ein negativer Wert bedeutet dann, dass der
-% Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift unterdrückt werden soll.
+% Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift unterdrückt werden soll.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption{chapter}
@@ -1686,7 +1814,7 @@
{bysign}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{beforeskip}]
-% Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Übeschrift an. Im Fall von
+% Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Ãœbeschrift an. Im Fall von
% \texttt{afterindent=bysign} wird der Absolutwert verwendet.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1695,7 +1823,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{innerskip}] Der Absolutwert gibt den vertikalen Abstand
-% innerhalb der Überschrift zwischen Präfix-Zeile und Text an.
+% innerhalb der Überschrift zwischen Präfix-Zeile und Text an.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{chapter}
@@ -1703,29 +1831,29 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{afterskip}] Der Absolutwert gibt den vertikalen Abstand nach
-% der Überschrift an.
+% der Ãœberschrift an.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{chapter}
{afterskip}{scr@}{@afterskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für das Element.
+% \item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für das Element.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{chapter}{font}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\texttt{prefixfont}] Schrifteinstellungen für die Präfixzeile des
+% \item[\texttt{prefixfont}] Schrifteinstellungen für die Präfixzeile des
% Elements.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{chapter}{prefixfont}{}{prefix}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@chapter@options
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@style@chapter@options
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung left fest, wie ein Gliederungsbefehl für den Stil
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% Diese Anweisung left fest, wie ein Gliederungsbefehl für den Stil
% \texttt{chapter} zu definieren ist. Das einzige Argument ist dabei der
% \meta{Name} der Gliederungsebene, normalerweise \texttt{chapter}.
% Das ist etwas komplizierter als bei \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@section@command},
@@ -1744,16 +1872,16 @@
}
%</book|report>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@part@options}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Dann für die Optionen des Stils \texttt{part}:
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Dann für die Optionen des Stils \texttt{part}:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@part@options}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\texttt{pagestyle}] Seitenstil für die Anfangsseite der
+% \item[\texttt{pagestyle}] Seitenstil für die Anfangsseite der
% Gliederungsebene.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1766,12 +1894,12 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{afterindent}]
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{afterindent}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{neue Option \texttt{afterindent}}%^^A
% Fuzzy-Logik. Ein boolcher Wert gibt an, ob die erste Zeile nach der
-% Überschrift eingezogen werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign}
-% möglich. Dann hängt die Entscheidung für den Einzug vom Vorzeichen von
+% Ãœberschrift eingezogen werden soll. Als dritter Wert ist \texttt{bysign}
+% möglich. Dann hängt die Entscheidung für den Einzug vom Vorzeichen von
% \texttt{beforeskip} ab. Ein negativer Wert bedeutet dann, dass der
-% Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift unterdrückt werden soll.
+% Absatzeinzug nach der Überschrift unterdrückt werden soll.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFuzzyOption{part}
@@ -1779,7 +1907,7 @@
{bysign}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{beforeskip}]
-% Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Übeschrift an. Im Fall von
+% Gibt den vertikalen Abstand vor der Ãœbeschrift an. Im Fall von
% \texttt{afterindent=bysign} wird der Absolutwert verwendet.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1788,7 +1916,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{innerskip}] Der Absolutwert gibt den vertikalen Abstand
-% innerhalb der Überschrift zwischen Präfix-Zeile und Text an.
+% innerhalb der Überschrift zwischen Präfix-Zeile und Text an.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
@@ -1798,31 +1926,31 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{afterskip}] Der Absolutwert gibt den vertikalen Abstand nach
-% der Überschrift an.
+% der Ãœberschrift an.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleLengthOption{part}
{afterskip}{scr@}{@afterskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für das Element.
+% \item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für das Element.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{part}{font}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für die Präfixzeile des Elements.
+% \item[\texttt{font}] Schrifteinstellungen für die Präfixzeile des Elements.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareSectionCommandStyleFontOption{part}{prefixfont}{}{prefix}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@part@options
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@style@part@options
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@def@style@part@command}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung legt fest, wie ein Gliederungsbefehl für den Stil
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% Diese Anweisung legt fest, wie ein Gliederungsbefehl für den Stil
% \texttt{part} zu definieren ist. Das einzige Argument ist dabei der
% \meta{Name} der Gliederungsebene, normalerweise \texttt{part}.
-% Das ist ganz ähnlich wie bei \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}.
+% Das ist ganz ähnlich wie bei \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@def@style@part@command}[1]{%
\@namedef{#1}{\scr@startpart{#1}}%
@@ -1832,18 +1960,18 @@
%<book|report> \@namedef{set#1preamble}{\set@preamble{#1}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@part@command
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@def@style@part@command
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@section@neededoptionstest}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{Voreinstellungen für \texttt{indent} und
-% \texttt{font}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{Voreinstellungen für \texttt{indent} und
+% \texttt{font}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{\texttt{runin} und \texttt{afterindent}
-% beachten}^^A
-% Dieses Anweisung überprüft, ob alle notwendigen Eigenschaften für die
+% beachten}%^^A
+% Dieses Anweisung überprüft, ob alle notwendigen Eigenschaften für die
% Definition der spezifischen Gliederungsebene im section-Stil bekannt
% sind. Sollte das nicht der Fall sein, meldet sie einen Fehler und sorgt sie
-% mit \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} dafür, dass die Definition unterbleibt.
+% mit \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} dafür, dass die Definition unterbleibt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@section@neededoptionstest}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@\scr@dsc@current @sectionindent}{%
@@ -1884,16 +2012,16 @@
}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@section@neededoptionstest
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@style@section@neededoptionstest
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@neededoptionstest}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{Voreinstellungen für alle außer auf Ebene
-% \texttt{chapter}}^^A
-% Dieses Anweisung überprüft, ob alle notwendigen Eigenschaften für die
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{Voreinstellungen für alle außer auf Ebene
+% \texttt{chapter}}%^^A
+% Dieses Anweisung überprüft, ob alle notwendigen Eigenschaften für die
% Definition der spezifischen Gliederungsebene im chapter-Stil bekannt
% sind. Sollte das nicht der Fall sein, meldet sie einen Fehler und sorgt sie
-% mit \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} dafür, dass die Definition unterbleibt.
+% mit \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} dafür, dass die Definition unterbleibt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@chapter@neededoptionstest}{%
@@ -1974,16 +2102,16 @@
}
%</book|report>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@chapter@neededoptionstest
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@style@chapter@neededoptionstest
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dsc@style@part@neededoptionstest}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{Neu (intern)}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{Voreinstellungen für alle außer auf Ebene
-% \texttt{part}}^^A
-% Dieses Anweisung überprüft, ob alle notwendigen Eigenschaften für die
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{Neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{Voreinstellungen für alle außer auf Ebene
+% \texttt{part}}%^^A
+% Dieses Anweisung überprüft, ob alle notwendigen Eigenschaften für die
% Definition der spezifischen Gliederungsebene im part-Stil bekannt
% sind. Sollte das nicht der Fall sein, meldet sie einen Fehler und sorgt sie
-% mit \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} dafür, dass die Definition unterbleibt.
+% mit \cs{aftergroup}\cs{@gobbletwo} dafür, dass die Definition unterbleibt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@dsc@style@part@neededoptionstest}{%
%<*book|report>
@@ -2067,19 +2195,19 @@
}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dsc@style@part@neededoptionstest
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dsc@style@part@neededoptionstest
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifscr@dsc@parametersonly}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{es gibt keine Dummy-Optionen mehr}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{es gibt keine Dummy-Optionen mehr}%^^A
% Dieser Schalter wird verwendet, um die Einstellungen entsprechend dem
-% aktuell gültigen Stil zu ändern, die zugehörige Anweisung selbst aber nicht
+% aktuell gültigen Stil zu ändern, die zugehörige Anweisung selbst aber nicht
% neu zu definieren. Er wird von einem leeren \texttt{style}-Wert lokal
% gesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifscr@dsc@parametersonly
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscr@dsc@parametersonly
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscr@dsc@parametersonly
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommand}[2][]{%
@@ -2107,15 +2235,24 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{tocstyle}]
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{Option \texttt{tocstyle} frühzeitig
-% auswerten}^^A
-% Verzeichnis-Eintrags-Stil, damit auch für diesen anschließend die Optionen
-% definiert bzw. aktiviert werden können.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{Option \texttt{tocstyle} frühzeitig
+% auswerten}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{Präfix für die Speicherung des
+% Verzeichnisstils geändert}%^^A
+% Verzeichnis-Eintrags-Stil, damit auch für diesen anschließend die Optionen
+% definiert bzw. aktiviert werden können. Zu beachten ist hier, dass ab
+% \textsf{tocbasic} 3.27 der Stil korrekter Weise in \cs{scr@tso@\meta{level
+% name}@style} statt in \cs{scr@dte@\meta{level name}@style} gespeichert
+% wird. Zur Sicherheit werden hier beide Makros behandelt.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocstyle}{%
\IfArgIsEmpty{##1}{%
- \expandafter\let\csname scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style\endcsname
+ \@ifundefined{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}{}{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style\endcsname
+ \relax
+ }%
+ \expandafter\let\csname scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style\endcsname
\relax
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}{%
@@ -2127,6 +2264,7 @@
}{%
%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: style defined}%
\@namedef{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}{##1}%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{##1}%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}%
}%
@@ -2134,9 +2272,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{@else@}]
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Option \texttt{tocstyle} frühzeitig
-% auswerten}^^A
-% Damit keine anderen Optionen ausgewertet werden müssen aber auch nicht als
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Option \texttt{tocstyle} frühzeitig
+% auswerten}%^^A
+% Damit keine anderen Optionen ausgewertet werden müssen aber auch nicht als
% unbekannte Optionen einen Fehler erzeugen, wird diese Spezialoption
% definiert, die einfach nur \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} setzt.
% \end{description}
@@ -2155,9 +2293,9 @@
}%
\FamilyExecuteOptions[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Rüchnahme der Optionen nach dem ersten
-% Durchgang}^^A
-% Nach dem ersten Druchgang müssen alle Optionen wieder zurückgenommen
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/18}{Rüchnahme der Optionen nach dem ersten
+% Durchgang}%^^A
+% Nach dem ersten Druchgang müssen alle Optionen wieder zurückgenommen
% werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}%
@@ -2171,41 +2309,46 @@
\endgroup
\@firstofone{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{keine Dummy-Optionen für den echten Lauf}^^A
-% Nachdem nun der Stil für den Gliederungsbefehl bekannt ist, können wir
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{keine Dummy-Optionen für den echten Lauf}%^^A
+% Nachdem nun der Stil für den Gliederungsbefehl bekannt ist, können wir
% dessen Optionen aktivieren:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: style=\@nameuse{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}}%
\@nameuse{scr@dsc@style@\@nameuse{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}@options}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Außerdem muss der Verzeichniseintrags-Stils initialisiert werden:
+% Außerdem muss der Verzeichniseintrags-Stils initialisiert werden:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<trace> \typeout{TRACE: tocstyle=%
-%<trace> \@nameuse{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}}%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}{%
+%<trace> \@nameuse{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{l@\scr@dsc@current}{%
- \@namedef{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}{default}%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{default}%
}{}%
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{erlaube auch \texttt{tocentry} an Stelle von
-% \texttt{toc} als Präfix}^^A
-% An dieser Stelle müssen die Optionen des Verzeichniseintrags auf Optionen
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{erlaube auch \texttt{tocentry} an Stelle von
+% \texttt{toc} als Präfix}%^^A
+% An dieser Stelle müssen die Optionen des Verzeichniseintrags auf Optionen
% der Gliederungsebene abgebildet werden. Dazu erhalten sie in der
-% Gliederungebene den Präfix \texttt{toc}. Das bedeutet gleichzeitig, dass es
+% Gliederungebene den Präfix \texttt{toc}. Das bedeutet gleichzeitig, dass es
% keine Verzeichniseintragsoption Namens \texttt{style} geben kann und dass
-% Gliederungsoptionen nicht mit \texttt{toc} beginnen dürfen.
+% Gliederungsoptionen nicht mit \texttt{toc} beginnen dürfen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options\@empty
\let\scr@dsc@extra@relax@opts\@empty
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}{}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style\endcsname
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}{}{%
\begingroup
\def\scr@dte@current{#2}%
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\@ExecuteTOCEntryStyleInitCode{%
- \@nameuse{scr@dte@\scr@dsc@current @style}%
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@\scr@dsc@current @style}%
}{\scr@dsc@current}%
}\reserved@a
\def\do@endgroup{\endgroup}%
@@ -2248,24 +2391,24 @@
\do@endgroup
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Optionen für die Stile von Verzeichniseintrag und Gliederungsebene
-% werden nicht erneut benötigt, müssten aber natürlich erneut verarbeitet
+% Die Optionen für die Stile von Verzeichniseintrag und Gliederungsebene
+% werden nicht erneut benötigt, müssten aber natürlich erneut verarbeitet
% werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{style}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
\DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{tocstyle}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Dazu kommen einige Optionen, die es schlicht immer gibt:
-% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{expandtopt}] Schalter, um die Längen zur
+% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{expandtopt}] Schalter, um die Längen zur
% Definitionszeit statt zur Anwendungszeit komplett zu expandieren. Das
-% bedingt dann aber auch, dass die Längen nicht mehr abhängig von der
-% aktuellen Schriftgröße sind.\end{description}
+% bedingt dann aber auch, dass die Längen nicht mehr abhängig von der
+% aktuellen Schriftgröße sind.\end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyBoolKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{expandtopt}{scr@dsc@expandtopt}%
\scr@dsc@expandtoptfalse
% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{increaselevel}] Automatische Erhöhung des
-% Wertes von Option \texttt{level} mit Säumniswert 1. Diese Option wird nur
+% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{increaselevel}] Automatische Erhöhung des
+% Wertes von Option \texttt{level} mit Säumniswert 1. Diese Option wird nur
% definiert, wenn \cs{DeclareSectionCommands} verwendet wurde, was an
% \cs{scr@local@levelincrease} erkannt wird.\end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2300,16 +2443,16 @@
}\reserved@a
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/09/09}{neue Eigenschaft \texttt{counterwithout}}
-% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{counterwithout}] Der Zähler dieser Ebene
-% soll nicht länger abhängen vom angegebenen Zähler.
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/09/09}{neue Eigenschaft \texttt{counterwithout}}
+% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{counterwithout}] Der Zähler dieser Ebene
+% soll nicht länger abhängen vom angegebenen Zähler.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyStringKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{counterwithout}{\scr@local@counterwithout}%
\let\scr@local@counterwithout\relax
% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{counterwithin}] Der Zähler dieser Ebene
-% soll abhängen vom angegebenen Zähler.
+% \begin{description}\item[\texttt{counterwithin}] Der Zähler dieser Ebene
+% soll abhängen vom angegebenen Zähler.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyStringKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{counterwithin}{\scr@local@counterwithin}%
@@ -2317,9 +2460,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{toclevel}] Ebene im Inhaltsverzeichnis (Voreinstellung ist
-% derselbe Wert wie für level); diese Option gibt es nur, wenn der
-% Verzeichnisstil sie unterstützt (was jeder Verzeichnisstil
-% sollte); wenn allerdings ein Offset dafür definiert ist, dann wird die
+% derselbe Wert wie für level); diese Option gibt es nur, wenn der
+% Verzeichnisstil sie unterstützt (was jeder Verzeichnisstil
+% sollte); wenn allerdings ein Offset dafür definiert ist, dann wird die
% Option nicht einfach an den Stil weitergereicht, muss also noch einmal
% umdefiniert werden.
% \end{description}
@@ -2341,8 +2484,8 @@
}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{Optionen werden nur temporär definiert}^^A
-% Optionen ausführen und anschließend wieder freigeben.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{Optionen werden nur temporär definiert}%^^A
+% Optionen ausführen und anschließend wieder freigeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyExecuteOptions[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
\scr@dsc@extra@relax@opts
@@ -2357,27 +2500,46 @@
\RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{level}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{counterwithin}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Testen, ob alle benötigten Optionen für die (Um-)Definierung des
-% Gliederungsbefehls gesetzt sind:
+% Testen, ob alle benötigten Optionen für die (Um-)Definierung des
+% Gliederungsbefehls gesetzt sind,
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/07}{\texttt{level} darf nicht -\cs{maxdimen}
+% sein}%^^A
+% wobei \texttt{level} nicht -\cs{maxdimen} ist:
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\def\local@endgroup{\endgroup}%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{\scr@dsc@current numdepth}{%
\scr@declaresectioncommanderror{\scr@dsc@current}{section level}{level}%
- }{}%
- \@nameuse{scr@dsc@style@%
- \@nameuse{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}%
- @neededoptionstest}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\ifnum \csname #2numdepth\endcsname>-\maxdimen
+ \@nameuse{scr@dsc@style@%
+ \@nameuse{scr@\scr@dsc@current @style}%
+ @neededoptionstest}%
+ \else
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ `level' must be > -\the\numexpr\maxdimen\relax
+ }{%
+ KOMA-Script internally sets `secnumdepth' to
+ -\the\numexpr\maxdimen\relax\space
+ to locally switch of\MessageBreak
+ the numbering, i.e., inside running heads.\MessageBreak
+ Because of this, you can define section commands with\MessageBreak
+ `level' greater than -\the\numexpr\maxdimen\relax\space only.%
+ }%
+ \let\local@endgroup\endgroup
+ \aftergroup\@gobbletwo
+ \fi
+ }%
\local@endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn alle Informationen für die (Um-)Definierung des Gliederungsbefehls
+% Wenn alle Informationen für die (Um-)Definierung des Gliederungsbefehls
% zusammen sind \dots
% \begin{macrocode}
\@firstofone{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zunächst sicherstellen, dass der Zähler existiert und ggf. dessen
+% Zunächst sicherstellen, dass der Zähler existiert und ggf. dessen
% Ausgabe anpassen:
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/15}{fehlendes \cs{expandafter} ergänzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/15}{fehlendes \cs{expandafter} ergänzt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}%
\ifx\scr@local@counterwithout\relax
@@ -2424,11 +2586,11 @@
}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zu jedem Gliederungsbefehl gehört auch ein Befehl für den Kolumnentitel, der
-% bei \KOMAScript{} außerdem eine Formatierung des Zählers benötigt. Falls
-% \textsf{scrlayer} geladen ist, wird das über dessen Befehl
+% Zu jedem Gliederungsbefehl gehört auch ein Befehl für den Kolumnentitel, der
+% bei \KOMAScript{} außerdem eine Formatierung des Zählers benötigt. Falls
+% \textsf{scrlayer} geladen ist, wird das über dessen Befehl
% |\DeclareSectionNumberDepth| erledigt, sonst direkt:
-% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/01/21}{fix: \cs{endskip} statt \cs{enskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/01/21}{fix: \cs{endskip} statt \cs{enskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}{%
\@ifundefined{#2markformat}{%
@@ -2441,17 +2603,21 @@
\DeclareSectionNumberDepth{#2}{\csname #2numdepth\endcsname}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Und es gehören Befehle dazu, um einen Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis zu
+% Und es gehören Befehle dazu, um einen Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis zu
% schreiben und den Eintrag auch darzustellen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
\csname add#2tocentry\endcsname[2]{%
\addtocentrydefault{#2}{##1}{##2}%
}%
- \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dte@#2@style}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@#2@style}{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname scr@tso@#2@style\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname scr@dte@#2@style\endcsname
+ }{}%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@#2@style}{%
}{%
\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[\scr@dsc@tocstyle@options]{%
- \@nameuse{scr@dte@#2@style}%
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#2@style}%
}{#2}%
}%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{l@#2}{%
@@ -2459,11 +2625,11 @@
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.20}{2015/0/07}{\textsf{hyperref} bei den Ebenen der
-% Verzeichniseinträge berücksichtigen}^^A
+% Verzeichniseinträge berücksichtigen}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{Einstellungen von \textsl{hyperref}
-% überschreiben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{Notfallbehandlung für Lücken in den
-% Bookmark-Ebenen}^^A
+% überschreiben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{Notfallbehandlung für Lücken in den
+% Bookmark-Ebenen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@atdocument
\let\reserved@a\@firstofone
@@ -2540,12 +2706,12 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@declaresectioncommanderror}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
% Gibt einen Fehler aus, falls \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} zu wenige Optionen
-% übergeben wurde. Das erste Argument ist der Name des zu deklarierenden
+% übergeben wurde. Das erste Argument ist der Name des zu deklarierenden
% Befehls, das zweite ist eine textuelle Beschreibung der fehlenden Option und
% das dritte ist der Name der fehlenden Option. Als Seiteneffekt sorgt der
-% Befehl dafür, dass die Deklaration nicht stattfindet.
+% Befehl dafür, dass die Deklaration nicht stattfindet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@declaresectioncommanderror}[3]{%
\ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -2558,16 +2724,16 @@
\aftergroup\@gobbletwo
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@declaresectioncommanderror
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@declaresectioncommanderror
% \begin{macro}{\scr@declaresectioncommandwarning}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% In einigen Fällen genügt es hingegen eine Warnung oder Info für fehlende
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/04/25}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% In einigen Fällen genügt es hingegen eine Warnung oder Info für fehlende
% Optionen auszugeben und einen Defaultwert zu verwenden. Das erste Argument
% ist auch hier der Name des zu deklarierenden Befehls, das zweite eine
% textuelle Beschreibung der fehlenden Option und das dritte der Name der
% fehlenden Option. Das vierte ist der Defaultwert, der ersatzweise verwendet
% wird. Der Befehl hat wie \cs{scr@declaresectioncommanderror} einen
-% Seiteneffekt. In diesem Fall wird \cs{local@endgroup} um das fünfte Argument
+% Seiteneffekt. In diesem Fall wird \cs{local@endgroup} um das fünfte Argument
% erweitert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@declaresectioncommandwarning}[5]{%
@@ -2580,17 +2746,17 @@
\l@addto@macro\local@endgroup{#5}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommand
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@declaresectioncommandwarning
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommand
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewSectionCommand}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/10}{zusätzliche Tests und Fehlermeldungen bei
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/10}{zusätzliche Tests und Fehlermeldungen bei
% \cs{the\dots}, \cs{\dots mark}, \cs{\dots format},
-% \cs{\dots markformat}}^^A
+% \cs{\dots markformat}}%^^A
% Basierend auf |\DeclareSectionCommand| wird eine Gliederungsanweisung
% definiert, die zuvor noch nicht existierte. Wichtig zu bemerken ist, dass
-% die ganzen Hilfsanweisungen bereits existieren dürfen.
+% die ganzen Hilfsanweisungen bereits existieren dürfen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareNewSectionCommand}[2][]{%
\@ifundefined{#2}{%
@@ -2636,10 +2802,10 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareNewSectionCommand
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareNewSectionCommand
%
% \begin{macro}{\RedeclareSectionCommand}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
% Basierend auf |\DeclareSectionCommand| wird eine Gliederungsanweisung
% umdefiniert, die zuvor bereits existierte. Wichtig zu bemerken ist, dass
% die ganzen Hilfsanweisungen nicht zu exisieren brauchen.
@@ -2662,13 +2828,13 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \RedeclareSectionCommand
+% \end{macro}%^^A \RedeclareSectionCommand
%
% \begin{macro}{\ProvideSectionCommand}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/21}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
% Basierend auf |\DeclareSectionCommand| wird eine Gliederungsanweisung
% definiert, wenn sie zuvor noch nicht existierte. Wichtig zu bemerken ist,
-% dass die ganzen Hilfsanweisungen bereits existieren dürfen.
+% dass die ganzen Hilfsanweisungen bereits existieren dürfen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ProvideSectionCommand}[2][]{%
\@ifundefined{#2}{%
@@ -2680,16 +2846,16 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ProvideSectionCommand
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ProvideSectionCommand
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionCommands}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}^^A
-% Basierend auf \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} können gleich mehrere
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Basierend auf \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} können gleich mehrere
% Gliederungsanweisungen definiert werden. Dabei sorgt Option
-% \texttt{increaselevel} dafür, dass die Werte von \texttt{level} und
+% \texttt{increaselevel} dafür, dass die Werte von \texttt{level} und
% \texttt{toclevel} automatisch von Befehl zu Befehl um den angegebenen Wert
-% (Default ist 1) erhöht werden.
+% (Default ist 1) erhöht werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareSectionCommands}[2][]{%
\edef\reserved@a{#2}%
@@ -2708,16 +2874,16 @@
\let\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareSectionCommands
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareSectionCommands
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewSectionCommands}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}^^A
-% Im Unterschied zu \cs{DeclareNewSectionCommand} führt diese Anweisung die
-% Änderung auch dann aus, wenn die Anweisung bereits deklariert war. Eine
-% Fehlermeldung wird aber natürlich trotzdem ausgegeben. Dieser Unterschied
-% ist jedoch notwendig, weil sonst Option \texttt{increaselevel} für
-% nachfolgende Befehle nicht mehr korrekt arbeiten würde.
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Im Unterschied zu \cs{DeclareNewSectionCommand} führt diese Anweisung die
+% Änderung auch dann aus, wenn die Anweisung bereits deklariert war. Eine
+% Fehlermeldung wird aber natürlich trotzdem ausgegeben. Dieser Unterschied
+% ist jedoch notwendig, weil sonst Option \texttt{increaselevel} für
+% nachfolgende Befehle nicht mehr korrekt arbeiten würde.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareNewSectionCommands}[2][]{%
\edef\reserved@a{#2}%
@@ -2751,16 +2917,16 @@
\let\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareNewSectionCommands
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareNewSectionCommands
%
% \begin{macro}{\RedeclareSectionCommands}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}^^A
-% Im Unterschied zu \cs{RedeclareNewSectionCommands} führt diese Anweisung die
-% Änderung auch dann aus, wenn die Anweisung noch nicht deklariert war. Eine
-% Fehlermeldung wird aber natürlich trotzdem ausgegeben. Dieser Unterschied
-% ist jedoch notwendig, weil sonst Option \texttt{increaselevel} für
-% nachfolgende Befehle nicht mehr korrekt arbeiten würde.
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Im Unterschied zu \cs{RedeclareNewSectionCommands} führt diese Anweisung die
+% Änderung auch dann aus, wenn die Anweisung noch nicht deklariert war. Eine
+% Fehlermeldung wird aber natürlich trotzdem ausgegeben. Dieser Unterschied
+% ist jedoch notwendig, weil sonst Option \texttt{increaselevel} für
+% nachfolgende Befehle nicht mehr korrekt arbeiten würde.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\RedeclareSectionCommands}[2][]{%
\edef\reserved@a{#2}%
@@ -2792,16 +2958,16 @@
\let\scr@local@tocleveloffset\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \RedeclareSectionCommands
+% \end{macro}%^^A \RedeclareSectionCommands
%
% \begin{macro}{\ProvideSectionCommands}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{Umbau, um stilabhängige Optionen zu
-% ermöglichen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}^^A
-% Hier wird es nun wirklich schwierig, weil wir irgendwie dafür sorgen müssen,
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/03}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{Umbau, um stilabhängige Optionen zu
+% ermöglichen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} eingefügt}%^^A
+% Hier wird es nun wirklich schwierig, weil wir irgendwie dafür sorgen müssen,
% dass Option \texttt{increaselevel} funktioniert, auch wenn gar nichts
-% definiert werden darf. Das macht die Geschichte ein wenig auswändig.
+% definiert werden darf. Das macht die Geschichte ein wenig auswändig.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ProvideSectionCommands}[2][]{%
\edef\reserved@a{#2}%
@@ -2817,9 +2983,9 @@
\reserved@a
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Wenn die Anweisung bereits definiert ist, dann müssen wir trotzdem die
+% Wenn die Anweisung bereits definiert ist, dann müssen wir trotzdem die
% Optionen auswerten, wobei allerdings nur die Option \texttt{level} und
-% \texttt{increaselevel} eine Wirkung haben dürfen. Der Rest wird per
+% \texttt{increaselevel} eine Wirkung haben dürfen. Der Rest wird per
% \texttt{@else}-Optionen erledigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.dsc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
@@ -2850,11 +3016,46 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ProvideSectionCommands
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ProvideSectionCommands
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IfSectionCommandStyleIs}
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/04}{new}%^^A
+% Test whether ot not the section command of argument 1 has the style of
+% argument 2. If so: use argument 3, of not: use argument 4.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\newcommand*{\IfSectionCommandStyleIs}[2]{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname\space not defined}{%
+ You cannot compare the section command style of an undefined command.}%
+ }{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@#1@style}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ \expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname\space not a valid section
+ command%
+ }{%
+ You cannot detect the section command style of a command, that
+ has\MessageBreak
+ never been defined as a section command by KOMA-Script.%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dsc@def@style@#2@command}{%
+ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ unknown section command style `#2'%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \ifstr{\@nameuse{scr@#1@style}}{#2}%
+}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{option}{bookmarkpackage}
-% \selectlanguage{english}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{new option}^^A
+% \selectlanguage{english}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{new option}%^^A
% Package \textsf{hyperref} has problems with bookmark level gaps. So if
% either the users omits a heading level or defines a heading with a level
% that distinguish more than one from the previous or following level, there
@@ -2873,6 +3074,46 @@
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{bookmark}{}{%
\if@scr@autoloadbookmarkpackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/26}{try to translate \textsf{hyperref} driver to
+% \textsf{bookmark} driver option}%^^A
+% The name of the \textsf{hyperref} driver is in \cs{Hy@driver}. But
+% \textsf{bookmark} does not provide the same drivers, so we try to translate
+% the curreny known \textsf{hyperref} drivers to \textsf{bookmark}
+% drivers. Also we do not load \textsf{bookmark} with a driver option but
+% define \textsf{bookmark}'s \cs{BookmarkDriverDefault}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{Hy@driver}{%
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ `hyperref' loaded but `\string\Hy@driver' undefined.\MessageBreak
+ This should not happen!\MessageBreak
+ Maybe `hyperref' not loaded or unknown version?%
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note: \texttt{hpdftex}, \texttt{hluatex}, \texttt{hxetex} and \texttt{hvtex}
+% do not need to be translated, because they are autodetected by
+% \textsf{bookmark} as well. \texttt{hypertex}, \texttt{hdviwindo},
+% \texttt{htex4ht} and \texttt{latex2html} are not known by \textsf{bookmark},
+% so we stay with the default (usually \texttt{dvips}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifstr{\Hy@driver}{hdvips}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{dvips}%
+ }{%
+ \ifstr{\Hy@driver}{hdvipdfm}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{dvipdfm}%
+ }{%
+ \ifstr{\Hy@driver}{hdvipson}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{dvipsone}%
+ }{%
+ \ifstr{\Hy@driver}{htexture}{%
+ \providecommand*{\BookmarkDriverDefault}{textures}%
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{%
loading recommended package `bookmark'.\MessageBreak
Using `bookmark' together with `hyperref' is
@@ -2882,13 +3123,16 @@
option\MessageBreak
`bookmarkpackage=false' before \string\begin{document}
and\MessageBreak
- you can avoid this message with
- `\string\usepackage{bookmark}'\MessageBreak
+ you can avoid this message adding:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\string\usepackage
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{BookmarkDriverDefault}{}{%
+ [\BookmarkDriverDefault]%
+ }{bookmark}\MessageBreak
before \string\begin{document}%
}%
\RequirePackage{bookmark}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{workaround for \cs{@beginmainauxhook} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26b}{2019/01/17}{workaround for \cs{@beginmainauxhook} added}%^^A
% Sometimes \textsf{auxhook} is not able to recognize that it cannot use a
% patch of \cs{document} to execute \cs{@beginmainauxhook} if it is loaded via
% \cs{AtBeginDocument}. In this case we do it here.
@@ -2897,15 +3141,18 @@
\else
\if@filesw
\ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
- seems someone has broken package auxhook.\MessageBreak
- Usually this happens, if auxhook is loaded or used\MessageBreak
+ seems someone has broken package `auxhook'.\MessageBreak
+ Usually this happens, if `auxhook' is loaded or used\MessageBreak
implicitly or explicitly by patching
- `\string\document'%
+ \string\document%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{AtEndPreamble}{}{%
\MessageBreak
- or via etoolbox command \string\AtEndPreamble
+ or via etoolbox command \string\AtEndPreamble%
}.\MessageBreak
- Trying an emergency workaround%
+ Trying an emergency workaround.\MessageBreak
+ You can avoid this warning adding:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space\string\usepackage{auxhook}\MessageBreak
+ before \string\begin{document}%
}%
\@beginmainauxhook
\fi
@@ -2917,24 +3164,24 @@
%</option>
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \selectlanguage{ngerman}^^A
-% \end{option}^^A bookmarkpackage
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}%^^A
+% \end{option}%^^A bookmarkpackage
%
%
-% \subsection{Definitionen für Präambeln}
+% \subsection{Definitionen für Präambeln}
%
% Bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt}
-% können \cs{part} und \cs{chapter} mit Präambeln versehen werden. Es
-% wird gleichzeitig eine Präambel über und unter der jeweiligen
-% Überschrift unterstützt.
+% können \cs{part} und \cs{chapter} mit Präambeln versehen werden. Es
+% wird gleichzeitig eine Präambel über und unter der jeweiligen
+% Überschrift unterstützt.
%
% \begin{macro}{\use@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro dient allgemein zum Setzen einer Präambel (für
-% Gliederungsüberschriften), wenn eine solche definiert ist. Als
-% Argument wird der Name der Präambel übergeben, an den automatisch
-% \texttt{@preamble} angehängt wird. Zum Schluss wird die gespeicherte
-% Präambel gelöscht.
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro dient allgemein zum Setzen einer Präambel (für
+% Gliederungsüberschriften), wenn eine solche definiert ist. Als
+% Argument wird der Name der Präambel übergeben, an den automatisch
+% \texttt{@preamble} angehängt wird. Zum Schluss wird die gespeicherte
+% Präambel gelöscht.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%<*book|report>
@@ -2948,34 +3195,34 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\set@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% Das Makro \cs{set@preamble} dient allgemein der Defintion einer
-% Präambel (für Gliederungsüberschriften). Als Argument wird der
-% Name der Gliederungsebene übergeben. Danach folgt ein optionales
-% Argument, das die Position der Präambel angibt. Darauf folgt ein
-% weiteres optionales Argument, das die Breite der Präambel
+% Präambel (für Gliederungsüberschriften). Als Argument wird der
+% Name der Gliederungsebene übergeben. Danach folgt ein optionales
+% Argument, das die Position der Präambel angibt. Darauf folgt ein
+% weiteres optionales Argument, das die Breite der Präambel
% angibt. Ist nur ein optionales Argument angegeben, so ist es die
% Position. Es folgt ein obligatorisches Argument mit dem Inhalt der
-% Präambel. Die Definition der Präambel erfolgt global.
+% Präambel. Die Definition der Präambel erfolgt global.
% \begin{macro}{\set@@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\set@@@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\set@@@@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{fehlende Klammern ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/10/16}{b mit derselben Funktion wie u erlaubt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{b korrigiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{fehlende Klammern ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/10/16}{b mit derselben Funktion wie u erlaubt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{b korrigiert}%^^A
% Da mehrere optionale Argumente nach einem obligatorischen Argument
-% auszuwerten sind, werden diverse Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% auszuwerten sind, werden diverse Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\set@preamble}[1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zunächst wird das erste optionale Argument gesucht.
+% Zunächst wird das erste optionale Argument gesucht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
{\set@@preamble{#1}}{\set@@@preamble{#1}[][\hsize]}%
@@ -2993,10 +3240,10 @@
\long\def\set@@@preamble#1[#2][#3]#4{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Dies ist das Hauptmakro, das die eigentliche Arbeit macht. Es muss
-% \cs{long} definiert werden, da die Präambel auch aus mehreren
-% Absätzen bestehen kann.
+% \cs{long} definiert werden, da die Präambel auch aus mehreren
+% Absätzen bestehen kann.
%
-% Zunächst wird das Positionsargument ausgewertet. Dies geschieht mit
+% Zunächst wird das Positionsargument ausgewertet. Dies geschieht mit
% lokalen Hilfsmakros und einer Schleife. Zur Funktion der Schleife
% siehe im dokumentierten \LaTeX-Kern.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3029,17 +3276,17 @@
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Wurde keine horizontale oder vertikale Ausrichtung definiert, so
-% wird nun der Standardwert dafür eingesetzt.
+% wird nun der Standardwert dafür eingesetzt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{prmbl@hpos}{\def\prmbl@hpos{0}}{}%
\@ifundefined{prmbl@vpos}{\def\prmbl@vpos{0}}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Nun sind die Positionen ermittelt und es werden abhängig davon
-% entsprechende Päambelmakros definiert.
+% Nun sind die Positionen ermittelt und es werden abhängig davon
+% entsprechende Päambelmakros definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\prmbl@hpos
% \end{macrocode}
-% Zunächst links unten und oben:
+% Zunächst links unten und oben:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\prmbl@vpos
\set@@@@preamble{#1@u}{t}{#3}{}{\hfil}{#4}%
@@ -3068,12 +3315,12 @@
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Es folgt das Makro, mit dem die Definition tatsächlich
-% stattfindet. Das erste Argument ist der Name der Präambel, das
-% zweite die Positionsoption für die verwendete \cs{parbox}, das
+% Es folgt das Makro, mit dem die Definition tatsächlich
+% stattfindet. Das erste Argument ist der Name der Präambel, das
+% zweite die Positionsoption für die verwendete \cs{parbox}, das
% dritte ist die Breite der \cs{parbox}, dann zwei Argumente mit der
% horizontalen Ausrichtung vor und nach der \cs{parbox} und das
-% sechste Agument ist schließlich der Inhalt der \cs{parbox}.
+% sechste Agument ist schließlich der Inhalt der \cs{parbox}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\set@@@@preamble}[6]{%
\expandafter\gdef\csname #1@preamble\endcsname{%
@@ -3083,10 +3330,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\set@preamble@hpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Eines der Hilfsmakros dient dazu, die horizontale Position der
-% Präambel einzustellen, falls dies nicht bereits erfolgt ist. Ist es
-% bereits nicht über"-einstimmend erfolgt, wird ein Fehler
+% Präambel einzustellen, falls dies nicht bereits erfolgt ist. Ist es
+% bereits nicht über"-einstimmend erfolgt, wird ein Fehler
% ausgegeben. Dieses Makro ist extrem intern und funktioniert nur im
% Kontext vor \cs{set@preamble}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3109,10 +3356,10 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \set@preamble@hpos
+% \end{macro}%^^A \set@preamble@hpos
% \begin{macro}{\set@preamble@vpos}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Das Hilfsmakro für die vertikale Position funktioniert in gleicher
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Das Hilfsmakro für die vertikale Position funktioniert in gleicher
% Weise.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\set@preamble@vpos}[2]{%
@@ -3144,20 +3391,36 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsubsection{\KOMAScript-eigene Befehle für Verzeichniseinträge}
-% Wie schon bei den Gliederungsbefehlen genügt \KOMAScript{} nicht, was der
-% \LaTeX-Kern für Verzeichniseinträge zu bieten hat.
+% \subsubsection{\KOMAScript-eigene Befehle für Verzeichniseinträge}
+% Wie schon bei den Gliederungsbefehlen genügt \KOMAScript{} nicht, was der
+% \LaTeX-Kern für Verzeichniseinträge zu bieten hat.
%
% \begin{macro}{\bprot@dottedtocline}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Makro wird benötigt, um die Ebenen unterhalb von \cs{chapter}
-% bzw. \cs{section} im Inhaltsverzeichnis ebenfalls vor unerwünschten
-% Umbrüchen zwischen Eintrag und Unterebene zu schützen.
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/25}{veraltet}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro wird benötigt, um die Ebenen unterhalb von \cs{chapter}
+% bzw. \cs{section} im Inhaltsverzeichnis ebenfalls vor unerwünschten
+% Umbrüchen zwischen Eintrag und Unterebene zu schützen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\bprot@dottedtocline}[5]{%
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.96}\relax
+ \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
+ usage of `\string\bprot@dottedtocline' is deprecated.\MessageBreak
+ Maybe an old auxiliary file has been used.\MessageBreak
+ Note, this command will be removed from\MessageBreak
+ KOMA-Script soon. So if this warning message\MessageBreak
+ persists after one more LaTeX run, you should\MessageBreak
+ redeclare the corresponding ToC entries using\MessageBreak
+ \string\DeclareTOCStyleEntry[\MessageBreak
+ \space\space level=\detokenize{#1},\MessageBreak
+ \space\space indent=\detokenize{#2},\MessageBreak
+ \space\space numwidth=\detokenize{#3}]{default}{...},\MessageBreak
+ where `...' is the name of the ToC level.\MessageBreak
+ Note, in future usage of `\string\bprot@dottedtocline'\MessageBreak
+ could result in an error%
+ }%
\ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
\ifnum \lastpenalty<\numexpr 20010-#1\relax
\addpenalty{\@lowpenalty}%
@@ -3175,17 +3438,17 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Grobeinteilung von Büchern}
+% \subsection{Grobeinteilung von Büchern}
%
-% Bei Büchern gibt es teilweise eine Einteilung in Vorderteil, Hauptteil und
+% Bei Büchern gibt es teilweise eine Einteilung in Vorderteil, Hauptteil und
% Endteil, die nicht wirklich eine Gliederung darstellt, sondern auf
% Gliederung, Seitennummerierung etc. Einfluss nimmt.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
% \begin{macro}{\@mainmattertrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@mainmatterfalse}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{if@mainmatter} Anforderung verschoben}^^A
-% Über diesen Schalter wird bei Buchklassen festgelegt, ob wir uns im
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{if@mainmatter} Anforderung verschoben}%^^A
+% Ãœber diesen Schalter wird bei Buchklassen festgelegt, ob wir uns im
% Hauptteil des Dokuments befinden oder nicht. Die eigentliche
% Umschaltung geschieht mit Hilfe der Befehle \cs{frontmatter},
% \cs{mainmatter}, \cs{backmatter}. Ohne Umschaltung befinden wir uns
@@ -3196,17 +3459,17 @@
%<*body>
\newif\if@mainmatter\@mainmattertrue
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@mainmatterfalse
-% \end{macro}^^A \@mainmattertrue
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@mainmatter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@mainmatterfalse
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@mainmattertrue
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@mainmatter
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter}
-% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{Option \texttt{openany} beachten}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{Option \texttt{twoside} beachten}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoubleoddpage} statt
-% \cs{cleardoublepage}}^^A
-% Der Vorspann enthält bei Büchern oftmals Inhaltsverzeichnis, Vorwort
-% und dergleichen und wird mit kleinen römischen Seitenzahlen
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{Option \texttt{openany} beachten}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{Option \texttt{twoside} beachten}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoubleoddpage} statt
+% \cs{cleardoublepage}}%^^A
+% Der Vorspann enthält bei Büchern oftmals Inhaltsverzeichnis, Vorwort
+% und dergleichen und wird mit kleinen römischen Seitenzahlen
% versehen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\frontmatter{%
@@ -3214,23 +3477,23 @@
\@mainmatterfalse\pagenumbering{roman}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \frontmatter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \frontmatter
% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter}
-% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{Option \texttt{openany} beachten}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{Option \texttt{twoside} beachten}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoubleoddpage} statt
-% \cs{cleardoublepage}}^^A
-% Der Hauptteil ist das Fleisch der Bücher.
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{Option \texttt{openany} beachten}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{Option \texttt{twoside} beachten}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoubleoddpage} statt
+% \cs{cleardoublepage}}%^^A
+% Der Hauptteil ist das Fleisch der Bücher.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\mainmatter{%
\if@twoside\cleardoubleoddpage\else\clearpage\fi
\@mainmattertrue\pagenumbering{arabic}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \mainmatter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \mainmatter
% \begin{macro}{\backmatter}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoubleoddpage} statt
-% \cs{cleardoublepage}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/09/27}{\cs{cleardoubleoddpage} statt
+% \cs{cleardoublepage}}%^^A
% Auch wenn nicht ganz einzusehen ist, warum das anders sein soll,
% wird hier nicht nach der Option \texttt{twoside}, sondern nach
% \texttt{openright} unterschieden.
@@ -3247,26 +3510,26 @@
%
% \subsection{Anhang}
%
-% Teile gibt es tatsächlich bei allen drei Hauptklassen.
+% Teile gibt es tatsächlich bei allen drei Hauptklassen.
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% Wird der Anhang aktiviert, so werden Kapitel bzw. Abschnitte zukünftig mit
+% Wird der Anhang aktiviert, so werden Kapitel bzw. Abschnitte zukünftig mit
% Buchstaben nummeriert.
-% \changes{v2.2d}{1995/05/28}{\textsf{scrartcl} benötigt keinen Zähler für
-% \cs{chapter}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{alternative Nummerierung bei Verwendung eines
-% Anhangs}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{appendixmore} wird beachtet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@altsecnumformattrue} wird nicht länger
-% ausgeführt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{par} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{\cs{newcommand*} durch \cs{gdef} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{Ausführung von \cs{appendixmore}^^A
-% vereinfacht}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/12/05}{neue eindeutige Warnung}
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1995/05/28}{\textsf{scrartcl} benötigt keinen Zähler für
+% \cs{chapter}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{alternative Nummerierung bei Verwendung eines
+% Anhangs}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{appendixmore} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@altsecnumformattrue} wird nicht länger
+% ausgeführt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{par} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{\cs{newcommand*} durch \cs{gdef} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{Ausführung von \cs{appendixmore}%^^A
+% vereinfacht}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/12/05}{neue eindeutige Warnung}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixmore}
% \cs{appendixmore} kann als \emph{hook} verwendet werden. Derzeit wird dieser
-% allerdings noch recht stiefmütterlich behandelt und lediglich von Option
+% allerdings noch recht stiefmütterlich behandelt und lediglich von Option
% \texttt{appendixprefix} definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -3318,15 +3581,15 @@
% Teile sind bei den unterschiedlichen Klassen unterschiedlich definiert.
%
% \begin{macro}{\size@part}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{letztes Element darf ein Argument erwarten,
-% wenn es keine Auswirkung auf den Zeilen abstand hat}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{letztes Element darf ein Argument erwarten,
+% wenn es keine Auswirkung auf den Zeilen abstand hat}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\size@partnumber}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{letztes Element darf ein Argument erwarten,
-% wenn es keine Auswirkung auf den Zeilen abstand hat}^^A
-% Hier werden diese Befehle nur vordefiniert. Ihre tatsächliche Einstellung
-% erfolgt über die (Vor-)Auswahl von Option \texttt{headings}.
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{letztes Element darf ein Argument erwarten,
+% wenn es keine Auswirkung auf den Zeilen abstand hat}%^^A
+% Hier werden diese Befehle nur vordefiniert. Ihre tatsächliche Einstellung
+% erfolgt über die (Vor-)Auswahl von Option \texttt{headings}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%<*prepare>
@@ -3334,60 +3597,60 @@
\newcommand*{\size@partnumber}{}
%</prepare>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \size@partnumber
-% \end{macro}^^A \size@part
+% \end{macro}%^^A \size@partnumber
+% \end{macro}%^^A \size@part
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\partheadstartvskip}
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfiguratonsmöglichkeit}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\textsf{scrartcl} definiert und verwendet
-% \cs{scr@part@beforeskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfiguratonsmöglichkeit}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\textsf{scrartcl} definiert und verwendet
+% \cs{scr@part@beforeskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\partheadmidvskip}
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfiguratonsmöglichkeit}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfiguratonsmöglichkeit}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\partheadendvskip}
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfiguratonsmöglichkeit}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\textsf{scrartcl} definiert und verwendet
-% \cs{scr@part@afterskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfiguratonsmöglichkeit}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\textsf{scrartcl} definiert und verwendet
+% \cs{scr@part@afterskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\parheademptypage}
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{neue Konfigurationsmöglichkeit}^^A
-% Diese vier Makros werden verwendet, um den Abstand über in und unter der
-% Überschrift eines Teils und die leere Rückseite zu definieren. Prinzipiell
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{neue Konfigurationsmöglichkeit}%^^A
+% Diese vier Makros werden verwendet, um den Abstand über in und unter der
+% Überschrift eines Teils und die leere Rückseite zu definieren. Prinzipiell
% kann damit auch der Umbruch zwischen Nummer und Text entfernt werden.
-% Da die Größe nicht über Option \texttt{headings} beeinflusst werden kann,
-% müssen diese Hilfsmakros nicht bereits vor den Optionen definiert werden.
+% Da die Größe nicht über Option \texttt{headings} beeinflusst werden kann,
+% müssen diese Hilfsmakros nicht bereits vor den Optionen definiert werden.
%
-% Zur Erhöhung der Kompatibilität mit \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} werden
-% zunächst einige Hilfsanweisung definiert und verwendet.
+% Zur Erhöhung der Kompatibilität mit \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} werden
+% zunächst einige Hilfsanweisung definiert und verwendet.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@sectionbeforeskip}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in \cs{scr@part@beforeskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in \cs{scr@part@beforeskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@sectionafterskip}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in \cs{scr@part@afterskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in \cs{scr@part@afterskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@sectionindent}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung (unbenutzt)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{entfernt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@sectionindent
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@sectionafterskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@sectionbeforeskip
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung (unbenutzt)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{entfernt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@sectionindent
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@sectionafterskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@sectionbeforeskip
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@beforeskip}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
-% \cs{scr@part@ectionbeforeskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
+% \cs{scr@part@ectionbeforeskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@innerskip}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/24}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@afterskip}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
-% \cs{scr@part@ectionbeforeskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
+% \cs{scr@part@ectionbeforeskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@style}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
% Es wird der leere Stil verwendet, mit dem Neudefinitionen von \cs{part}
-% über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} verhindert werden.
+% über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} verhindert werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*prepare>
\newcommand*{\scr@part@beforeskip}{%
%<article> 4ex
% \end{macrocode}
-% Hinweis: Das |+\baselineskip| wird benötigt, um Kompatibilitätsprobleme mit
+% Hinweis: Das |+\baselineskip| wird benötigt, um Kompatibilitätsprobleme mit
% der Umdefinierung von |\chapterheadstartvskip| zu vermeiden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<report|book> \z@ \@plus 1fil + \baselineskip
@@ -3399,10 +3662,10 @@
}
\newcommand*{\scr@part@style}{part}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@style
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@afterskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@innerskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@beforeskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@style
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@afterskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@innerskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@beforeskip
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\partheadstartvskip}{%
%<article> \addvspace{\@tempskipa}%
@@ -3427,32 +3690,33 @@
%</report|book>
%</prepare>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \partheademptypage
-% \end{macro}^^A \partheadendvskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \partheadmidvskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \partheadstartvskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partheademptypage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partheadendvskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partheadmidvskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partheadstartvskip
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@startpart}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{part}
-% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{partpagestyle} statt \texttt{plain}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{Präambel über der Überschrift hinzugefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn definiert und nicht
-% leer}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/14}{Option \texttt{afterindent} wird beachtet}^^A
-% Die Anweisung definiert den Gliederungsüberschriften-Stil
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{part}
+% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{partpagestyle} statt \texttt{plain}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{Präambel über der Überschrift hinzugefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn definiert und nicht
+% leer}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/14}{Option \texttt{afterindent} wird beachtet}%^^A
+% Die Anweisung definiert den Gliederungsüberschriften-Stil
% \texttt{part}. Dazu bekommt sie als einziges explizites Argument den
-% \meta{Namen} der Gliederungsüberschrift. Weitere Argumente wie ein
-% optionaler Stern oder ein optionales Argument für Inhaltsverzeichnis und
-% Kolumnentitel sowie ein obligatorisches Argument für den Text der
-% Überschrift sind implizit, das heißt, sie werden erst im weiteren Verlauf
+% \meta{Namen} der Gliederungsüberschrift. Weitere Argumente wie ein
+% optionaler Stern oder ein optionales Argument für Inhaltsverzeichnis und
+% Kolumnentitel sowie ein obligatorisches Argument für den Text der
+% Überschrift sind implizit, das heißt, sie werden erst im weiteren Verlauf
% von Unter-Macros eingelesen und verarbeitet.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\scr@startpart}[1]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
%<article> \par
%<*book|report>
\if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
@@ -3479,6 +3743,7 @@
\fi
}%
}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/postinit/#1}%
\partheadstartvskip
%<*book|report>
\vbox to\z@{\vss\use@preamble{#1@o}\strut\par}%
@@ -3489,27 +3754,29 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startpart}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{@part}
-% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/13}{\cs{centering} und \cs{@parskipfalse}%
-% \cs{@parskip@indent} vertauscht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Die Anweisung macht die eigentliche Arbeit für den Fall einer
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{@part}
+% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/13}{\cs{centering} und \cs{@parskipfalse}%
+% \cs{@parskip@indent} vertauscht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{neue Option \texttt{nonumber}}%^^A
+% Die Anweisung macht die eigentliche Arbeit für den Fall einer
% Gliederungsanweisung ohne Stern. Das erste obligatorische Argument ist der
% \meta{Name} der Gliederungsanweisung. Das zweite eigentlich optionale
-% Argument, das hier jedoch zwingend ist, ist der \meta{Spezial-Text} für
+% Argument, das hier jedoch zwingend ist, ist der \meta{Spezial-Text} für
% Kolumnentitel und Inhaltsverzeichnis. Das dritte obligatorische Argument
-% ist der \meta{Text} für die Überschrift.
+% ist der \meta{Text} für die Überschrift.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\scr@@startpart}{}
\long\def\scr@@startpart#1[#2]#3{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/nostar/#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
-% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}^^A
-% Für das erweitere optionale Argument muss hier eine key-value-Auswertung
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
+% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}%^^A
+% Für das erweitere optionale Argument muss hier eine key-value-Auswertung
% erfolgen, falls das erweitere optionale Argument aktiviert ist:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \scr@osectarg=\z@
@@ -3517,6 +3784,7 @@
\else
\scr@istest#2=\@nil
\fi
+ \@currentusenumbertrue
\if@scr@tempswa
\setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},reference={#3},#2}%
\else
@@ -3531,13 +3799,13 @@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als nächstes muss für nummerierte Überschriften dieser Ebene sowohl der
-% Zähler erhöht also auch ein nummerierter Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% Als nächstes muss für nummerierte Überschriften dieser Ebene sowohl der
+% Zähler erhöht also auch ein nummerierter Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
% erstellt werden.
-% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@maybeautodot} wird aufgerufen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addparttocentry}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung von \cs{add\meta{Name}tocentry} in
-% \cs{typeout}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@maybeautodot} wird aufgerufen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addparttocentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung von \cs{add\meta{Name}tocentry} in
+% \cs{typeout}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnumbered{#1}{%
\refstepcounter{#1}%
@@ -3553,10 +3821,10 @@
\fi
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{Resetliste auch bei nicht nummerierten
-% Überschriften abarbeiten}^^A
-% Für alle nicht nummerieten Überschriften dieser Ebene trotzdem die
-% Resetliste des Zählers ausführen und ggf. einen Verzeichniseintrag
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{Resetliste auch bei nicht nummerierten
+% Ãœberschriften abarbeiten}%^^A
+% Für alle nicht nummerieten Überschriften dieser Ebene trotzdem die
+% Resetliste des Zählers ausführen und ggf. einen Verzeichniseintrag
% erstellen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@lt{3.18}\relax\else
@@ -3568,10 +3836,10 @@
\typeout{#1 without number}%
\ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% An dieser Stelle muss ggf. der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook für nicht nummerierte
-% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ausgeführt werden.
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addparttocentry}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{\cs{addparttocentry} verallgemeinert}^^A
+% An dieser Stelle muss ggf. der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook für nicht nummerierte
+% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ausgeführt werden.
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addparttocentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{\cs{addparttocentry} verallgemeinert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
@@ -3582,31 +3850,32 @@
\fi
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Es folgt das eigentliche Setzen der Überschrift. Übrigens ist der ganze Code
+% Es folgt das eigentliche Setzen der Ãœberschrift. Ãœbrigens ist der ganze Code
% oben bei \cs{scr@@startchapter} praktisch identisch. Lediglich das
% Abarbeiten der Resetliste gibt es dort bereits seit Version~3.15. In
% \cs{scr@@startchapter} wird an dieser Stelle dann \cs{@make\dots head}
-% ausgeführt. Das könnte man eigentlich irgendwann hier genauso machen.
-% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Part-Ausgabe auf CJK umgestellt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4b}{1996/03/29}{\cs{size@partnumer} durch
-% \cs{size@partnumber} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} wird nun vor \cs{size@part} und
-% \cs{size@partnumber} aufgerufen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont} behebt einen
-% Bug im color Paket}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{\cs{size@\dots} durch \cs{usekomafont}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{IfUseNumber} definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{sectfont} durch \cs{usekomafont}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{Umstellung auf
-% \cs{partlineswithprefixformat}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2018/02/12}{Verwendung des korrekten Font-Elements}^^A
+% ausgeführt. Das könnte man eigentlich irgendwann hier genauso machen.
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1995/05/25}{Part-Ausgabe auf CJK umgestellt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4b}{1996/03/29}{\cs{size@partnumer} durch
+% \cs{size@partnumber} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} wird nun vor \cs{size@part} und
+% \cs{size@partnumber} aufgerufen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont} behebt einen
+% Bug im color Paket}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{\cs{size@\dots} durch \cs{usekomafont}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{IfUseNumber} definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{sectfont} durch \cs{usekomafont}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{Umstellung auf
+% \cs{partlineswithprefixformat}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/02/12}{Verwendung des korrekten Font-Elements}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
- \setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@\@plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
\def\IfUseNumber{\ifnumbered{#1}}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ \setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@\@plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
\raggedpart
\normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{\nobreak
\IfUseNumber{%
@@ -3623,8 +3892,8 @@
}
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Wenn \cs{partmark} \cs{@gobble} ist, wird
-% stattdessen \cs{@mkboth}{}{} aufgerufen.}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Wenn \cs{partmark} \cs{@gobble} ist, wird
+% stattdessen \cs{@mkboth}{}{} aufgerufen.}%^^A
% Und noch den Kolumnentitel setzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1mark\endcsname\@gobble
@@ -3633,9 +3902,10 @@
\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}%
\fi
}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ganz zum Schluss muss noch einmal ein Abstand eingefügt werden.
+% Ganz zum Schluss muss noch einmal ein Abstand eingefügt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*article>
\nobreak
@@ -3645,41 +3915,42 @@
%</article>
%<book|report> \@nameuse{@end#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/14}{Verwendung von \@cs{@afterheading} für
-% \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt}}^^A
-% Ab \KOMAScript{} 3.26 wird hier \cs{@afterheading} für alle Klassen
-% aufgerufen. Damit kann der Einzug nach der Überschrift eingestellt werden.
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/10/14}{Verwendung von \@cs{@afterheading} für
+% \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt}}%^^A
+% Ab \KOMAScript{} 3.26 wird hier \cs{@afterheading} für alle Klassen
+% aufgerufen. Damit kann der Einzug nach der Ãœberschrift eingestellt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@afterheading
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startpart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@startpart
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startspart}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{@spart}
-% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
-% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{in der Sternvariante \cs{chaptermark}^^A
-% bzw. \cs{sectionmark} eingefügt, um die Kolumnentitel zu
-% löschen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6a}{2000/01/20}{zum Löschen der Kolumnentitel wird
-% nun \cs{@mkboth} verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/13}{\cs{centering} und
-% \cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent} vertauscht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Die Anweisung macht die eigentliche Arbeit für den Fall einer
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{@spart}
+% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
+% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{in der Sternvariante \cs{chaptermark}%^^A
+% bzw. \cs{sectionmark} eingefügt, um die Kolumnentitel zu
+% löschen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6a}{2000/01/20}{zum Löschen der Kolumnentitel wird
+% nun \cs{@mkboth} verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/13}{\cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/13}{\cs{centering} und
+% \cs{@parskipfalse}\cs{@parskip@indent} vertauscht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/05}{\cs{@parskipfalse} und \cs{@parskip@indent}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Die Anweisung macht die eigentliche Arbeit für den Fall einer
% Gliederungsanweisung mit Stern. Das erste obligatorische Argument ist der
% \meta{Name} der Gliederungsanweisung. Das zweite obligatorische Argument
-% ist der \meta{Text} für die Überschrift.
+% ist der \meta{Text} für die Überschrift.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\scr@@startspart}[2]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/star/#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für Leute, die unbedingt nach der Sternversion noch ein \cs{addcontentsline}
-% anfügen wollen, muss hier ebenfalls der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook ausgeführt
+% Für Leute, die unbedingt nach der Sternversion noch ein \cs{addcontentsline}
+% anfügen wollen, muss hier ebenfalls der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook ausgeführt
% werden. Allerdings passiert das hier entsprechend dem Vorgehen von
-% \textsf{hyperref} selbst in einer Gruppe, in der zusätzlich \cs{@mkboth} zu
+% \textsf{hyperref} selbst in einer Gruppe, in der zusätzlich \cs{@mkboth} zu
% \cs{@gobbletwo} gemacht wird, auch wenn ich absolut nicht versehe, was das
% soll.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -3688,17 +3959,18 @@
\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
-% Erst dann erfolgt die tatsächliche Ausgabe der Überschrift.
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{IfUseNumber} definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{sectfont} durch \cs{usekomafont}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{Umstellung auf
-% \cs{partlineswithprefixformat}}^^A
+% Erst dann erfolgt die tatsächliche Ausgabe der Überschrift.
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{IfUseNumber} definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{sectfont} durch \cs{usekomafont}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{Umstellung auf
+% \cs{partlineswithprefixformat}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
- \setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@\@plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
\let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
+ \setparsizes{\z@}{\z@}{\z@\@plus 1fil}\par@updaterelative
\raggedpart
\normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{%
\nobreak
@@ -3707,6 +3979,7 @@
}%
\@mkboth{}{}%
}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
\endgroup
%<*article>
\nobreak
@@ -3718,49 +3991,49 @@
%<book|report> \@nameuse{@end#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startspart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@startspart
%
% \begin{macro}{\partlineswithprefixformat}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{neu}
-% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Überschriften im Stil
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{neu}
+% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Ãœberschriften im Stil
% \texttt{part}. Fonteinstellungen sind zu diesem Zeitpunkt bereits erfolgt
% order Teil der Argumente. Die Argumente sind:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{Befehlsname} --] der Name der Gliederungsebene, normalerweise
% \texttt{chapter}.
% \item[\meta{Gliederungsnummer} --] die bereits fertig formatierte
-% Gliederungsnummer einschließlich des nachfolgenden vertikalen Abstands
+% Gliederungsnummer einschließlich des nachfolgenden vertikalen Abstands
% oder leer, falls keine Gliederungsnummer auszugeben ist.
-% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Überschrift.
+% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Ãœberschrift.
% \end{description}
-% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Überschrift kein
-% Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. Nach der Überschrift wird jedoch zwangsweise
-% ein \cs{@@par} ausgeführt, so dass sichergestellt ist, dass mit einem
+% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Ãœberschrift kein
+% Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. Nach der Ãœberschrift wird jedoch zwangsweise
+% ein \cs{@@par} ausgeführt, so dass sichergestellt ist, dass mit einem
% internen Absatz abgeschlossen wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partlineswithprefixformat}[3]{%
#2#3%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \partlineswithprefixformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partlineswithprefixformat
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@endpart}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{@spart}
-% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{@endpart} wird für
-% \textsf{scrartcl} nicht mehr definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{Option \texttt{openany} beachten}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{\cs{@endpart} fügt nur noch in
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung ist von der ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{@spart}
+% abgeleitet und erbt deren ChangeLog-Einträge.
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{@endpart} wird für
+% \textsf{scrartcl} nicht mehr definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1996/07/02}{Option \texttt{openany} beachten}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6c}{2000/06/10}{\cs{@endpart} fügt nur noch in
% beidseitigen Dokumenten bei Verwendung von \texttt{openright} eine
-% Leerseite ein}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{\cs{vbox} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{\cs{use@preamble} ersetzt
-% \cs{@part@preamble}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Verwendung des neuen
-% \cs{partheademptypage}}^^A
+% Leerseite ein}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{\cs{vbox} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{\cs{use@preamble} ersetzt
+% \cs{@part@preamble}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02}{2009/01/01}{Verwendung des neuen
+% \cs{partheademptypage}}%^^A
% Die Anweisung wird bei \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{screprt} verwendet, um
-% die Überschrift abzuschließen. \textsf{scrartcl} hat keine solche Anweisung.
+% die Überschrift abzuschließen. \textsf{scrartcl} hat keine solche Anweisung.
% Da einzige Argument ist der \meta{Name} der Gliederungsanweisung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
@@ -3776,130 +4049,138 @@
}
%</book|report>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@endpart
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startpart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@endpart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@startpart
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neu (intern und \textsf{hyperref})}
-% Normalerweise führt \textsf{hyperref} via \cs{refstepcounter}
-% Initialisierungen für ein nachfolgendes \cs{addcontentsline} durch. Wenn
-% allerdings eine nicht nummerierte Überschrift ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neu (intern und \textsf{hyperref})}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{neu (intern für \textsf{scrhack})}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/24}{neu (intern für \textsf{scrhack})}%^^A
+% Normalerweise führt \textsf{hyperref} via \cs{refstepcounter}
+% Initialisierungen für ein nachfolgendes \cs{addcontentsline} durch. Wenn
+% allerdings eine nicht nummerierte Ãœberschrift ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
% eingetragen wird, dann fehlt das vorherige \cs{refstepcounter}. Statt
% \cs{@chapter}, \cs{@schapter}, \cs{@part}, \cs{@spart} etc. direkt zu
-% patchen, erscheint es mir sinnvoller einen Hook dafür zu definieren, der
+% patchen, erscheint es mir sinnvoller einen Hook dafür zu definieren, der
% dann von \textsf{hyperref} entsprechend definiert werden kann. Solange
% \textsf{hyperref} das nicht macht, versuche ich mich selbst daran und kann
% nur hoffen, dass es funktioniert. Dabei verwende ich im Gegensatz zu
-% \textsf{hyperref} für \cs{Hy@MakeCurrentHrefAuto} kein \cs{Hy@chapapp}, weil
-% ja \cs{autoref} für nicht nummerierte Überschriften ohnehin sinnlos
+% \textsf{hyperref} für \cs{Hy@MakeCurrentHrefAuto} kein \cs{Hy@chapapp}, weil
+% ja \cs{autoref} für nicht nummerierte Überschriften ohnehin sinnlos
% ist. Stattdessen verwende ich den Gliederungsbefehl.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}[1]{}
\let\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter\@gobble
-\BeforePackage{hyperref}{%
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch}{%
\let\scr@orig@chapter\@chapter
\let\scr@orig@schapter\@schapter
\let\scr@orig@addchap\@addchap
}
-\AfterPackage!{hyperref}{%
+\BeforePackage{hyperref}{\scr@chapter@before@hyperref@patch}
+\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch}{%
\let\@chapter\scr@orig@chapter
\let\@schapter\scr@orig@schapter
\let\@addchap\scr@orig@addchap
\ifx\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter\@gobble
\renewcommand*{\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter}[1]{%
- \Hy@MakeCurrentHrefAuto{#1*}%
+ \Hy@MakeCurrentHrefAuto{##1*}%
\Hy@raisedlink{%
\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend
}%
}%
\fi
}
+\AfterPackage!{hyperref}{\scr@chapter@after@hyperref@patch}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@after@hyperref@patch
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@before@hyperref@patch
+% \end{macro}%^^A \hy@insteadofrefstepcounter
%
% \begin{macro}{\addparttocentry}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Neu}%^^A
% Seit Version~3.08 wird der Eintrag nicht direkt innerhalb von \cs{part}
-% per \cs{addcontentsline} erzeugt, sondern indirekt über diese Anweisung. Das
+% per \cs{addcontentsline} erzeugt, sondern indirekt über diese Anweisung. Das
% erste Argument ist dabei die (formatierte) Nummer bzw. bei nicht
-% nummerierten Teilen leer. Das zweite Argument ist der Überschriftstext für
+% nummerierten Teilen leer. Das zweite Argument ist der Überschriftstext für
% das Verzeichnis. Durch diesen indirekten Weg, kann die Anweisung einfach
-% umdefiniert werden. Verwendet wird hier die Standardanweisung für
-% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge, die in \texttt{scrkliof.dtx} definiert ist:
+% umdefiniert werden. Verwendet wird hier die Standardanweisung für
+% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge, die in \texttt{scrkliof.dtx} definiert ist:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addparttocentry}[2]{%
\addtocentrydefault{part}{#1}{#2}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addparttocentry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addparttocentry
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
-% \cs{scr@startpart}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
+% \cs{scr@startpart}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
-% \cs{scr@@startpart}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
+% \cs{scr@@startpart}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
-% \cs{scr@@startspart}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
+% \cs{scr@@startspart}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@endpart}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
-% \cs{scr@@endpart}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
+% \cs{scr@@endpart}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\setpartpreamble}
-% \changes{v2.8f}{2001/07/12}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{Verwendung von \cs{use@preamble}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
-% \cs{scr@@endpart}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8f}{2001/07/12}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{Verwendung von \cs{use@preamble}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
+% \cs{scr@@endpart}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\part@u@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{Ersatz für \cs{part@preamble}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{flaschen (\cs{part@preamble@u}) Namen
-% korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
-% \cs{scr@@endpart}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{Ersatz für \cs{part@preamble}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{flaschen (\cs{part@preamble@u}) Namen
+% korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
+% \cs{scr@@endpart}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\part@o@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{flaschen Namen (\cs{part@preamble@o})
-% korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
-% \cs{scr@@endpart}}^^A
-% Diese Anweisungen werden indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} und
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/27}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/02/14}{flaschen Namen (\cs{part@preamble@o})
+% korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/23}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} und
+% \cs{scr@@endpart}}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisungen werden indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} und
% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@part@command} bzw. \cs{setpartpreamble} definiert.
-% \end{macro}^^A \setpartpreamble
-% \end{macro}^^A \part@u@preamble
-% \end{macro}^^A \part@o@preamble
-% \end{macro}^^A \@endpart
-% \end{macro}^^A \@spart
-% \end{macro}^^A \@part
-% \end{macro}^^A \part
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setpartpreamble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \part@u@preamble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \part@o@preamble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@endpart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@spart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@part
+% \end{macro}%^^A \part
%
% \begin{macro}{\addpart}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{partpagestyle} statt \texttt{plain}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{support of preamble added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.11b}{2012/07/29}{missing negativ \cs{vskip} added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/01/22}{Anpassung an geänderte Abstandsbehandlung bei
-% \cs{part} und \cs{@spart}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Komplett neu definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{partpagestyle} statt \texttt{plain}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{support of preamble added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11b}{2012/07/29}{missing negativ \cs{vskip} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/01/22}{Anpassung an geänderte Abstandsbehandlung bei
+% \cs{part} und \cs{@spart}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Komplett neu definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@addpart}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/17}{erst eintragen, dann ausgeben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{kann Kolumnentitel erzeugen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/01}{Notlösung für \textsf{hyperref} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/02}{Verwendung von \cs{addparttocentry}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
-% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Wenn \cs{partmark} \cs{@gobble} ist, wird
-% \cs{@mkboth}{}{} aufgerufen.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{Es wird \cs{addpartmark} verwendet und auch
-% nie \cs{@mkboth}{}{} aufgerufen.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Komplett neu definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8l}{2001/08/17}{erst eintragen, dann ausgeben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/07/20}{kann Kolumnentitel erzeugen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/01}{Notlösung für \textsf{hyperref} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/02}{Verwendung von \cs{addparttocentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
+% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Wenn \cs{partmark} \cs{@gobble} ist, wird
+% \cs{@mkboth}{}{} aufgerufen.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{Es wird \cs{addpartmark} verwendet und auch
+% nie \cs{@mkboth}{}{} aufgerufen.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Komplett neu definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@saddpart}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Komplett neu definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Komplett neu definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\addpart{%
\SecDef\@addpart\@saddpart
@@ -3920,56 +4201,56 @@
\addpartmark{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@saddpart
-% \end{macro}^^A \@addpart
-% \end{macro}^^A \addpart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@saddpart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@addpart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addpart
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont}\cs{large} durch Verwendung von
-% Element \texttt{partentry} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{Element \texttt{partentrypagenumber} wird
-% verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/23}{Verwendung von \cs{parttocdepth} und
-% \cs{scr@part@numwidth}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{Überführung in Verzeichnisstil}^^A
-% Der Eintrag für \cs{part}. Es werden einige Hilfsmakros passend zu
-% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert. Dadurch können diverse Einstellungen
-% darüber geändert werden. Es kann jedoch derzeit kein neuer Stil zugewiesen
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont}\cs{large} durch Verwendung von
+% Element \texttt{partentry} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{Element \texttt{partentrypagenumber} wird
+% verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/23}{Verwendung von \cs{parttocdepth} und
+% \cs{scr@part@numwidth}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{Überführung in Verzeichnisstil}%^^A
+% Der Eintrag für \cs{part}. Es werden einige Hilfsmakros passend zu
+% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert. Dadurch können diverse Einstellungen
+% darüber geändert werden. Es kann jedoch derzeit kein neuer Stil zugewiesen
% werden.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@tocindent}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/06}{wird nun auch verwendet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/06}{wird nun auch verwendet}%^^A
% Der Einzug des Eintrags noch vor der Nummer.
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@part@tocindent
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@part@tocindent
% \begin{macro}{\scr@part@tocnumwidth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
-% Die definierte Breite der Nummer für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
+% Die definierte Breite der Nummer für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@part
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@part
%
%
% \begin{Counter}{part}
% \begin{macro}{\thepart}
% \begin{macro}{\partformat}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5f}{1999/02/14}{überflüssiges Leerzeichen am Ende
-% entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7h}{2001/04/22}{verlorenen Backslash in \cs{autodot}^^A
-% wieder eingefügt}^^A
-% Jede Gliederungsebene benötigt einen Zähler für die Gliederungsnummer und
-% eine Darstellung des Zählers (\cs{the\dots}). Desweiteren wird eine
-% Formatierung des Zählers in den Gliederungsüberschriften
-% (\texttt{\bslash\dots format}) benötigt.
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5f}{1999/02/14}{überflüssiges Leerzeichen am Ende
+% entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7h}{2001/04/22}{verlorenen Backslash in \cs{autodot}%^^A
+% wieder eingefügt}%^^A
+% Jede Gliederungsebene benötigt einen Zähler für die Gliederungsnummer und
+% eine Darstellung des Zählers (\cs{the\dots}). Desweiteren wird eine
+% Formatierung des Zählers in den Gliederungsüberschriften
+% (\texttt{\bslash\dots format}) benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{part}
\renewcommand*{\thepart}{\@Roman\c@part}
\newcommand*{\partformat}{\partname~\thepart\autodot}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \partformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \thepart
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thepart
% \end{Counter}{part}
%
%
@@ -3978,22 +4259,22 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\partname{Part}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \partname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partname
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\partmark}
-% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/07/20}{neu (für \textsf{scrpage2})}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{Voreinstellung von \cs{@gobble} zu
-% \cs{@mkboth{}{}} geändert}
+% \changes{v2.9r}{2004/07/20}{neu (für \textsf{scrpage2})}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{Voreinstellung von \cs{@gobble} zu
+% \cs{@mkboth{}{}} geändert}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\partmark}[1]{\@mkboth{}{}}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \partmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partmark
%
% \begin{macro}{\addpartmark}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{abhängig von \cs{partnumdepth}}^^A
-% Analog zu \cs{addchapmark} für \cs{addpart}. Auch dabei gilt, dass
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{abhängig von \cs{partnumdepth}}%^^A
+% Analog zu \cs{addchapmark} für \cs{addpart}. Auch dabei gilt, dass
% \cs{if@mainmatter} hier auch von \textsf{scrreprt} definiert wird. Das ist
% Absicht und vereinfacht dem einen oder anderen Paket oder Benutzer
% vielleicht die Arbeit.
@@ -4007,14 +4288,14 @@
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addpartmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addpartmark
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedpart}
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfigurationsmöglichkeit}^^A
-% Die Ausrichtung der Überschrift von \cs{part} kann davon abweichend über
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/10}{neue Konfigurationsmöglichkeit}%^^A
+% Die Ausrichtung der Überschrift von \cs{part} kann davon abweichend über
% \cs{raggedpart} konfiguriert werden. Die Voreinstellung ist von der
-% Klasse abhängig.
+% Klasse abhängig.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\raggedpart}{}
%<article>\let\raggedpart\raggedsection
@@ -4023,15 +4304,15 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{part}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{part}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{part}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@part}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{part}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{part}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{partnumber}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{partnumber}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{partnumber}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@partnumber}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{partnumber}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/23}{neues Element \texttt{partnumber}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{partprefix}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/10}{neues Alias-Element \texttt{partprefix}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/10}{neues Alias-Element \texttt{partprefix}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@part}{\size@part}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@partnumber}{\size@partnumber}
@@ -4044,18 +4325,18 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{partentry}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{Verwendung von \texttt{sectioning} durch
-% \texttt{disposition} ersetzt}^^A
-% Schrift für den \cs{part}-Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{Verwendung von \texttt{sectioning} durch
+% \texttt{disposition} ersetzt}%^^A
+% Schrift für den \cs{part}-Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{partentry}{\usekomafont{disposition}\large}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{partentrypagenumber}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift für die Seitenzahl des \cs{part}-Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift für die Seitenzahl des \cs{part}-Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis
% abweichend von \texttt{partentry}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{partentrypagenumber}{}
@@ -4068,36 +4349,36 @@
% \subsection{Kapitel}
%
% Bei den Klassen \texttt{scrbook} und \texttt{scrreprt} gibt es im
-% Unterschied zu \texttt{scrartcl} auch noch die Kapitelebene. Für die
+% Unterschied zu \texttt{scrartcl} auch noch die Kapitelebene. Für die
% Definition des Kapitelstils mittels \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} werden neben
% den Optionen und \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command} noch diverse
-% Anweisungen benötigt. Diese sind allesamt von der ursprünglichen Definition
-% für Kapitel abgeleitet. Eine Besonderheit ist dabei, dass \textsf{hyperref}
+% Anweisungen benötigt. Diese sind allesamt von der ursprünglichen Definition
+% für Kapitel abgeleitet. Eine Besonderheit ist dabei, dass \textsf{hyperref}
% dem neuen Code durch (inkompatible) Umdefinierung von \cs{@schapter} und
-% \cs{@chapter} in die Quere kommt. Das gilt es also zusätzlich zu verhindern
-% und dennoch \cs{hyperref} zu berücksichtigen. Dies gelingt am einfachsten
-% durch einen neuen Hook, den \cs{hyperref} zukünftig gerne selbst passend
+% \cs{@chapter} in die Quere kommt. Das gilt es also zusätzlich zu verhindern
+% und dennoch \cs{hyperref} zu berücksichtigen. Dies gelingt am einfachsten
+% durch einen neuen Hook, den \cs{hyperref} zukünftig gerne selbst passend
% umdefinieren kann. Wer sonst noch an \cs{@chapter} und \cs{@schaper}
% herumdoktert und dabei \KOMAScript{} aus dem Tritt bringt, ist selbst
% schuld.
%
% \begin{option}{chapterprefix}
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{als \textsf{keyval}-Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{die Option bezieht sich allgemein auf den
-% Gliederungsstil}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{als \textsf{keyval}-Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{die Option bezieht sich allgemein auf den
+% Gliederungsstil}%^^A
% \begin{option}{nochapterprefix}
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{obsolete Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{obsolete Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% Normalerweise verwenden \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} nicht
-% die enorm großen Überschriften von \textsf{book} und
+% die enorm großen Überschriften von \textsf{book} und
% \textsf{report}, die mit einem Absatz "`Kapitel \emph{Nummer}"'
% beginnen. Mit der Option \texttt{chapterprefix} kann dies jetzt
-% wieder aktiviert werden. Die Option, zur Deaktivierung heißt
+% wieder aktiviert werden. Die Option, zur Deaktivierung heißt
% entsprechend \textsf{nochapterprefix}.
-% Um für Spezialanwendungen auch innerhalb des Dokuments eine
-% Umschaltung zu ermöglichen bzw. für die Optionen
+% Um für Spezialanwendungen auch innerhalb des Dokuments eine
+% Umschaltung zu ermöglichen bzw. für die Optionen
% \texttt{appendixprefix} und \texttt{noappendixprefix} erfolgt die
% Umschaltung durch einen Schalter.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4128,19 +4409,19 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{appendixprefix}
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{als \textsf{keyval}-Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{als \textsf{keyval}-Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}%^^A
% \begin{option}{noappendixprefix}
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{obsolete Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
-% Will man abweichend von der Option \texttt{chapterprefix} die großen
-% Überschriften für den Anhang aktivieren oder deaktivieren, so kann man das
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{obsolete Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
+% Will man abweichend von der Option \texttt{chapterprefix} die großen
+% Überschriften für den Anhang aktivieren oder deaktivieren, so kann man das
% mit dieser Option erreichen. Allerdings setzt diese keinen Schalter, sondern
-% ein Zusatzmakro, das auch für andere Zwecke genutzt werden kann. Übrigens
+% ein Zusatzmakro, das auch für andere Zwecke genutzt werden kann. Übrigens
% ist keine der beiden Einstellungen die Voreinstellung!
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option>
@@ -4170,18 +4451,18 @@
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{noappendixprefix}{appendixprefix=false}
%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A noappendixprefix
-% \end{option}^^A appendixprefix
+% \end{option}%^^A noappendixprefix
+% \end{option}%^^A appendixprefix
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\size@chapter}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{letztes Element darf ein Argument erwarten,
-% wenn es keine Auswirkung auf den Zeilen abstand hat}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{letztes Element darf ein Argument erwarten,
+% wenn es keine Auswirkung auf den Zeilen abstand hat}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\size@chapterprefix}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hier werden diese Befehle nur vordefiniert. Ihre tatsächliche Einstellung
-% erfolgt über die (Vor-)Auswahl von Option \texttt{headings}.
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hier werden diese Befehle nur vordefiniert. Ihre tatsächliche Einstellung
+% erfolgt über die (Vor-)Auswahl von Option \texttt{headings}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*prepare>
\newcommand*{\size@chapter}{}
@@ -4193,58 +4474,58 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterheadstartvskip}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip} wird
-% definiert und verwendet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip} wird
+% definiert und verwendet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chapterheadendvskip}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/13}{\cs{chapterheadstartvskip} und
-% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} haben in \textsf{scrartcl} nichts verloren}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{scr@chapter@afterskip} wird
-% definiert und verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{\cs{vspace} durch \cs{vskip} ersetzt, damit
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/13}{\cs{chapterheadstartvskip} und
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} haben in \textsf{scrartcl} nichts verloren}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{scr@chapter@afterskip} wird
+% definiert und verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{\cs{vspace} durch \cs{vskip} ersetzt, damit
% \cs{lastskip} korrekt gesetzt ist}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterheadmidvskip}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{scr@chapter@innerskip} wird
-% definiert und verwendet}^^A
-% Mit diesen Anweisungen wird üblicherweise der Abstand zwischen
-% oberem Rand des Textbereichs und der Überschrift bzw. der Abstand
-% zwischen der Überschrift und dem Text des Kapitels gesetzt. Man kann
-% die Anweisungen aber zusätzlich auch für andere Zwecke
-% missbrauchen. Das ist der Grund warum diese Makros keine Längen,
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{\cs{scr@chapter@innerskip} wird
+% definiert und verwendet}%^^A
+% Mit diesen Anweisungen wird üblicherweise der Abstand zwischen
+% oberem Rand des Textbereichs und der Ãœberschrift bzw. der Abstand
+% zwischen der Ãœberschrift und dem Text des Kapitels gesetzt. Man kann
+% die Anweisungen aber zusätzlich auch für andere Zwecke
+% missbrauchen. Das ist der Grund warum diese Makros keine Längen,
% sondern komplette Anweisungen enthalten. In der Voreinstellung
-% enthalten sie jedoch gar nichts. Die tatsächlichen Werte werden
+% enthalten sie jedoch gar nichts. Die tatsächlichen Werte werden
% durch die Optionen festgelegt. Dabei wird \cs{chapterheadmidvskip} nur
% verwendet, wenn Option \texttt{chapterprefix} aktiv ist.
%
-% Zur Erhöhung der Kompatibilität mit \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} werden
-% zunächst einige Hilfsanweisung definiert und verwendet.
+% Zur Erhöhung der Kompatibilität mit \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} werden
+% zunächst einige Hilfsanweisung definiert und verwendet.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in
-% \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in
+% \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@afterskip}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in
-% \cs{scr@chapter@afterskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{umbenannt in
+% \cs{scr@chapter@afterskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@sectionindent}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung (unbenutzt)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/24}{entfernt}^^A
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@sectionindent
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@afterskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@beforeskip
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung (unbenutzt)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/24}{entfernt}%^^A
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@sectionindent
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@afterskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@beforeskip
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
-% \cs{scr@chapter@sectionbeforeskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
+% \cs{scr@chapter@sectionbeforeskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@innerskip}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@afterskip}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
-% \cs{scr@chapter@sectionafterskip}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{Neu (intern) aus Umdefinierung von
+% \cs{scr@chapter@sectionafterskip}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@style}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
% Dabei wird der leere Stil verwendet, mit dem Neudefinitionen von \cs{part}
-% über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} verhindert werden. Gleichzeitig können
-% jedoch Einstellungen einiger Werte darüber erfolgen.
+% über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} verhindert werden. Gleichzeitig können
+% jedoch Einstellungen einiger Werte darüber erfolgen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*prepare>
\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@beforeskip}{\z@}
@@ -4255,36 +4536,37 @@
\let\scr@chapter@innerskip\z@
\newcommand*{\scr@chapter@style}{chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@style
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@innerskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@beforeskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@afterskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@style
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@innerskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@beforeskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@afterskip
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\chapterheadstartvskip}{\vspace{\@tempskipa}}
\newcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{\vskip\@tempskipa}
\newcommand*{\chapterheadmidvskip}{\par\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipa}
%</prepare>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapterheadmidvskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapterheadendvskip
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapterheadstartvskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterheadmidvskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterheadendvskip
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterheadstartvskip
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@startchapter}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (für Paketautoren)}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn definiert und nicht
-% leer}^^A
-% Diese Anweisung legt fest, wie der konkrete Aufruf für Überschriften des
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (für Paketautoren)}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn definiert und nicht
+% leer}%^^A
+% Diese Anweisung legt fest, wie der konkrete Aufruf für Überschriften des
% Stils \texttt{chapter} lautet. Einziges Argument ist dabei der Name der
-% Gliederungsebene, beispielsweise \texttt{chapter}. Alle anderen benötigten
-% Werte ergeben sich aus den Einstellungen für die Gliederungsebene. Beim
-% tatsächlichen Aufruf wird dann daran wie üblich noch optional noch entweder
-% ein Stern oder ein Argument für Kolumnentitel und Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag
-% und der Text der Überschrift angehängt. Diese Anweisung wurde von der
-% ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{chapter} abgeleitet.
+% Gliederungsebene, beispielsweise \texttt{chapter}. Alle anderen benötigten
+% Werte ergeben sich aus den Einstellungen für die Gliederungsebene. Beim
+% tatsächlichen Aufruf wird dann daran wie üblich noch optional noch entweder
+% ein Stern oder ein Argument für Kolumnentitel und Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag
+% und der Text der Überschrift angehängt. Diese Anweisung wurde von der
+% ursprünglichen Definition von \cs{chapter} abgeleitet.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\scr@startchapter}[1]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/preinit/#1}%
\if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1pagestyle}{}{%
\ifstr{#1pagestyle}{}{}{%
@@ -4303,22 +4585,25 @@
}%
}%
}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/postinit/#1}%
\expandafter\SecDef\csname @#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname @s#1\endcsname
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startchapter}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@chapter} ein und
-% erbst damit auch die ganzen noch relevanten ChangeLog-Einträge dieser
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@chapter} ein und
+% erbst damit auch die ganzen noch relevanten ChangeLog-Einträge dieser
% Anweisung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@@startchapter}{}
\def\scr@@startchapter#1[#2]#3{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/nostar/#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
-% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}^^A
-% Für das erweitere optionale Argument muss hier eine key-value-Auswertung
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
+% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{neue Option \texttt{nonumber}}%^^A
+% Für das erweitere optionale Argument muss hier eine key-value-Auswertung
% erfolgen, falls das erweitere optionale Argument aktiviert ist:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum \scr@osectarg=\z@
@@ -4326,6 +4611,7 @@
\else
\scr@istest#2=\@nil
\fi
+ \@currentusenumbertrue
\if@scr@tempswa
\setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},reference={#3},#2}%
\else
@@ -4340,14 +4626,14 @@
\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als nächstes muss für nummerierte Überschriften dieser Ebene sowohl der
-% Zähler erhöht also auch ein nummerierter Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% Als nächstes muss für nummerierte Überschriften dieser Ebene sowohl der
+% Zähler erhöht also auch ein nummerierter Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
% erstellt werden.
-% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@maybeautodot} wird aufgerufen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addchaptertocentry}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung von \cs{add\meta{Name}tocentry}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Verwendung von \meta{Name} statt \cs{@chapapp}
-% in \cs{typeout}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8e}{2001/07/10}{\cs{@maybeautodot} wird aufgerufen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addchaptertocentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung von \cs{add\meta{Name}tocentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Verwendung von \meta{Name} statt \cs{@chapapp}
+% in \cs{typeout}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnumbered{#1}{%
%<book> \if@mainmatter
@@ -4366,8 +4652,8 @@
}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{\@currenttocentry}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für alle nicht nummerieten Überschriften dieser Ebene trotzdem die
-% Resetliste des Zählers ausführen und ggf. einen Verzeichniseintrag
+% Für alle nicht nummerieten Überschriften dieser Ebene trotzdem die
+% Resetliste des Zählers ausführen und ggf. einen Verzeichniseintrag
% erstellen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
@@ -4380,8 +4666,8 @@
\typeout{#1 without number}%
\ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else
% \end{macrocode}
-% An dieser Stelle muss ggf. der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook für nicht nummerierte
-% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ausgeführt werden.
+% An dieser Stelle muss ggf. der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook für nicht nummerierte
+% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ausgeführt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{%
@@ -4396,12 +4682,12 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Und die Abstände in die andere Verzeichnisse.
-% \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{per \cs{float@addtolists} wird nun
+% Und die Abstände in die andere Verzeichnisse.
+% \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{per \cs{float@addtolists} wird nun
% auch ein vertikaler Abstand in Listen des \texttt{float}-Pakets
-% eingebaut}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/01}{jetzt auch Kapiteleinträge in andere
-% float-Verzeichnisse mit hyperref}^^A
+% eingebaut}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/01}{jetzt auch Kapiteleinträge in andere
+% float-Verzeichnisse mit hyperref}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim \@chapterlistsgap>\z@
\doforeachtocfile{%
@@ -4415,11 +4701,11 @@
}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt kommt die eigentliche Überschrift. An dieser Stelle wird ab
+% Jetzt kommt die eigentliche Ãœberschrift. An dieser Stelle wird ab
% Version~3.18 nicht mehr stur \cs{@makecshapterhead} verwendet, sondern eine
-% Anweisung, die vom Namen der Gliederungsüberschrift abhängig ist.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{\cs{@makechapterhead} durch
-% \cs{@make\meta{Name}head} ersetzt}^^A
+% Anweisung, die vom Namen der Gliederungsüberschrift abhängig ist.
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{\cs{@makechapterhead} durch
+% \cs{@make\meta{Name}head} ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\if@at@twocolumn
@@ -4431,25 +4717,26 @@
\@nameuse{@make#1head}{#3}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Und das Ganze endet schließlich mit:
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{\cs{@afterheading} in jedem Fall}^^A
+% Und das Ganze endet schließlich mit:
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{\cs{@afterheading} in jedem Fall}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@afterheading
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startchapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@startchapter
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@startschapter}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@schapter} ein sie ist
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@schapter} ein sie ist
% sehr viel einfacher gestrickt als \cs{scr@@startchapter}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@@startschapter}[2]{%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/branch/star/#1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für Leute, die unbedingt nach der Sternversion noch ein \cs{addcontentsline}
-% anfügen wollen, muss hier ebenfalls der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook ausgeführt
+% Für Leute, die unbedingt nach der Sternversion noch ein \cs{addcontentsline}
+% anfügen wollen, muss hier ebenfalls der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook ausgeführt
% werden. Allerdings passiert das hier entsprechend dem Vorgehen von
-% \textsf{hyperref} selbst in einer Gruppe, in der zusätzlich \cs{@mkboth} zu
+% \textsf{hyperref} selbst in einer Gruppe, in der zusätzlich \cs{@mkboth} zu
% \cs{@gobbletwo} gemacht wird, auch wenn ich absolut nicht versehe, was das
% soll.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4458,7 +4745,7 @@
\hy@insteadofrefstepcounter{#1}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann wird die eigentliche Überschrift ausgegeben.
+% Dann wird die eigentliche Ãœberschrift ausgegeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\if@at@twocolumn
@@ -4470,37 +4757,37 @@
\@nameuse{@makes#1head}{#2}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Und das Ganze endet schließlich mit:
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{\cs{@afterheading} in jedem Fall}^^A
+% Und das Ganze endet schließlich mit:
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/21}{\cs{@afterheading} in jedem Fall}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@afterheading
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@startschapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@startschapter
%
%% \begin{macro}{\if@at@twocolumn}
-% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@topnewpage}
-% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{fehlende Klammern ergänzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/27}{fehlende Klammern ergänzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
-% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu (\LaTeX{} intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{vergessenes \cs{long} ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Verwendung von
-% \cs{scr@float@addtolists@warning} (aus \texttt{scrkliof.dtx})}^^A
-% Interessant ist dabei die Erweiterung, daß jedes Kapitel mit einer
-% Präambel versehen werden kann. Diese wird im zweispaltigen Satz wie
-% die Überschrift selbst einspaltig gesetzt. Intern wird dies für
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu (\LaTeX{} intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{vergessenes \cs{long} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Verwendung von
+% \cs{scr@float@addtolists@warning} (aus \texttt{scrkliof.dtx})}%^^A
+% Interessant ist dabei die Erweiterung, daß jedes Kapitel mit einer
+% Präambel versehen werden kann. Diese wird im zweispaltigen Satz wie
+% die Überschrift selbst einspaltig gesetzt. Intern wird dies für
% die Preambel des Index und der Bibliography verwendet. Dabei
% entsteht aber wiederum das Problem, dass der Indexkopf innerhalb von
% \cs{twocolumn} ausgegeben wird andererseits aber innerhalb von
-% \cs{chapter} das Makro \cs{@topnewpage} verwendet wird. Damit würde
+% \cs{chapter} das Makro \cs{@topnewpage} verwendet wird. Damit würde
% dann also \cs{@topnewpage} innerhalb von \cs{@topnewpage}
% aufgerufen. Das ist jedoch nicht erlaubt. Als muss der Aufruf von
% \cs{@topnewpage} in \cs{@chapter} und \cs{@schapter} verhindert
% werden, wenn wir uns bereits in \cs{@topnewpage} befinden. Eine
-% Möglichkeit dafür wäre, einen Schalter in den Index-Kopf
-% einzubauen. Ich wähle hingegen die Methode, \cs{@topnewpage}
+% Möglichkeit dafür wäre, einen Schalter in den Index-Kopf
+% einzubauen. Ich wähle hingegen die Methode, \cs{@topnewpage}
% entsprechend umzudefinieren. Damit kann dann auch der Anwender
% \cs{@chapter} innerhalb des optionalen Arguments von \cs{twocolumn}
% verwenden. Ein Schalter wird allerdings trotzdem gebraucht.
@@ -4512,20 +4799,20 @@
\@at@twocolumntrue\scr@topnewpage[{#1}]\@at@twocolumnfalse
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@topnewpage
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@topnewpage
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@at@twocolumn
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@topnewpage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@topnewpage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@at@twocolumn
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@makechapterhead}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@makechapterhead}
-% ein. Mit dem neuen Mechanismus könnte man auf diesen zusätzlichen Schritt
-% verzichten. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität wurde er aber übernommen. Daher
-% übernimmt sie auch die ChangeLog-Einträge der alten Anweisung.
-% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{Kapitel können grundsätzlich mit einer
-% Präambel versehen werden}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{es gibt verschiedene Arten von Präambeln}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{\cs{nobreak} am Ende entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@makechapterhead}
+% ein. Mit dem neuen Mechanismus könnte man auf diesen zusätzlichen Schritt
+% verzichten. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität wurde er aber übernommen. Daher
+% übernimmt sie auch die ChangeLog-Einträge der alten Anweisung.
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{Kapitel können grundsätzlich mit einer
+% Präambel versehen werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{es gibt verschiedene Arten von Präambeln}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{\cs{nobreak} am Ende entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@makechapterhead}[2]{%
\use@chapter@o@preamble{#1}%
@@ -4533,14 +4820,14 @@
\use@preamble{#1@u}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@makechapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@makechapterhead
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@makeschapterhead}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@makeschapterhead}
-% ein. Mit dem neuen Mechanismus könnte man auf diesen zusätzlichen Schritt
-% verzichten. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität wurde er aber übernommen. Daher
-% übernimmt sie auch die ChangeLog-Einträge der alten Anweisung.
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@makeschapterhead}
+% ein. Mit dem neuen Mechanismus könnte man auf diesen zusätzlichen Schritt
+% verzichten. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität wurde er aber übernommen. Daher
+% übernimmt sie auch die ChangeLog-Einträge der alten Anweisung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@makeschapterhead}[2]{%
\use@chapter@o@preamble{#1}%
@@ -4548,31 +4835,31 @@
\use@preamble{#1@u}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@makeschapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@makeschapterhead
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@makechapterhead}
% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@@makechapterhead}
-% ein. Daher übernimmt sie auch die ChangeLog-Einträge der alten Anweisung.
+% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@@makechapterhead}
+% ein. Daher übernimmt sie auch die ChangeLog-Einträge der alten Anweisung.
% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/04/18}{\cs{raggedsection} wird bei Option
-% \texttt{chapterprefix} auch auf den Präfix angewendet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/06/28}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \cs{fill} gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{Abstand nach der Präfixzeile nur, wenn eines
-% Präfixzeile ausgegeben wurde}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97b}{2007/03/09}{\cs{endgraf} korrigiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{Generalumbau}^^A
+% \texttt{chapterprefix} auch auf den Präfix angewendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/06/28}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \cs{fill} gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{Abstand nach der Präfixzeile nur, wenn eines
+% Präfixzeile ausgegeben wurde}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97b}{2007/03/09}{\cs{endgraf} korrigiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/20}{Generalumbau}%^^A
% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{\cs{raggedchapter} ersetzt
-% \cs{raggedsection}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{Verwendung von \cs{usefontofkomafont} für die
-% initiale Fontumstellung}^^A
+% \cs{raggedsection}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/03}{Verwendung von \cs{usefontofkomafont} für die
+% initiale Fontumstellung}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@@makechapterhead}[2]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Der Absolutwert des Abstandes davor wird eingefügt.
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{\cs{@afterindentrue} wird bei positivem
-% \texttt{beforeskip} gesetzt}^^A
+% Der Absolutwert des Abstandes davor wird eingefügt.
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{\cs{@afterindentrue} wird bei positivem
+% \texttt{beforeskip} gesetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{Beachtung von Einstellung
-% \texttt{afterindent}}^^A
+% \texttt{afterindent}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax
\csname scr@#1@afterindent\endcsname
@@ -4583,34 +4870,38 @@
}%
\chapterheadstartvskip
% \end{macrocode}
-% Dann die eigentliche Überschrift innerhalb einer Gruppe.
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/23}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
-% 1fil} gesetzt}^^A
+% Dann die eigentliche Ãœberschrift innerhalb einer Gruppe.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/23}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
+% 1fil} gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{Setzen von \cs{parindent} und \cs{parfillskip}
+% verschoben}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
{%
- \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{Verwendung von \cs{chapterlinesformat} und
-% \cs{chapterlineswithprefixformat}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{Verwendung von Element \texttt{disposition} an
-% Stelle von Befehl \cs{sectfont}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19a}{2015/10/03}{Bug durch vergessene Definition von
-% \cs{IfUseNumber} behoben}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{Verwendung von \cs{chapterlinesformat} und
+% \cs{chapterlineswithprefixformat}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{Verwendung von Element \texttt{disposition} an
+% Stelle von Befehl \cs{sectfont}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19a}{2015/10/03}{Bug durch vergessene Definition von
+% \cs{IfUseNumber} behoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/02}{\cs{ExecuteDoHook} eingefügt}%^^A
% Ab Version~3.19 wurde der Code weitgehend umgebaut, um die Befehle
-% \cs{chapterlinesformat} für die hängende Version und
-% \cs{chapterlinesandprefixformat} für die Version mit Präfixzeile zu
-% verwenden. Dadurch entfällt dann auch die Verwendung von
+% \cs{chapterlinesformat} für die hängende Version und
+% \cs{chapterlinesandprefixformat} für die Version mit Präfixzeile zu
+% verwenden. Dadurch entfällt dann auch die Verwendung von
% \cs{usefontofkomafont}. Ich bin mir bewusst, dass dadurch diverse Hacks
-% bezüglich der Kapitelüberschriften nicht mehr funktionieren. Dafür kann man
-% diese Hacks nun durch saubere Lösungen ersetzen.
+% bezüglich der Kapitelüberschriften nicht mehr funktionieren. Dafür kann man
+% diese Hacks nun durch saubere Lösungen ersetzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\IfUseNumber{\ifnumbered{#1}}%
%<book> \if@mainmatter\else\let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo\fi
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
\if@chapterprefix
\let\IfUsePrefixLine\@firstoftwo
\else
\let\IfUsePrefixLine\@secondoftwo
\fi
+ \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}%
\normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{%
\usekomafont{#1}{%
\settoheight{\@tempskipa}{%
@@ -4643,39 +4934,40 @@
}%
}%
}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
}%
\nobreak\par\nobreak
% \end{macrocode}
% Zum Schluss der Absolutwert des Abstandes dahinter.
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/20}{Betragsbildung entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/20}{Betragsbildung entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname\relax\relax
\chapterheadendvskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@makechapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@makechapterhead
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@makeschapterhead}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
-% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@@makechapterhead}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{neue Anweisung (intern)}
+% Diese Anweisung nimmt die Rolle des ursprüngliche \cs{@@makechapterhead}
% ein. Sie ist um einiges einfacher als \cs{scr@@makechapterhead} orientiert
% sich aber prinzipiell daran.
-% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/06/28}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \cs{fill} gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/03/24}{Klammerung an \cs{@@makechapterhead}^^A
-% angepasst}^^A
-%\changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{\cs{raggedchapter} ersetzt
-% \cs{raggedsection}}^^A
-%\changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{an die Änderungen bei \cs{scr@@makechapterhead}
-% angepasst}^^A
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2003/06/28}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \cs{fill} gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9q}{2004/03/24}{Klammerung an \cs{@@makechapterhead}%^^A
+% angepasst}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{\cs{raggedchapter} ersetzt
+% \cs{raggedsection}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{an die Änderungen bei \cs{scr@@makechapterhead}
+% angepasst}%^^A
% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/23}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus
-% 1fil} gesetzt}^^A
+% 1fil} gesetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{\cs{@afterindentrue} wird bei positivem
-% \texttt{beforeskip} gesetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{IfUseNumber} korrigiert}^^A
+% \texttt{beforeskip} gesetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/07}{\cs{IfUseNumber} korrigiert}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/18}{Beachtung von Einstellung
-% \texttt{afterindent}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/20}{Betragsbildung für \texttt{afterskip}
-% entfernt}^^A
+% \texttt{afterindent}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/20}{Betragsbildung für \texttt{afterskip}
+% entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@@makeschapterhead}[2]{%
\@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax
@@ -4687,13 +4979,14 @@
}%
\chapterheadstartvskip
{%
- \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}%
\let\IfUseNumber\@secondoftwo
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/begingroup/#1}%
\if@chapterprefix
\let\IfUsePrefixLine\@firstoftwo
\else
\let\IfUsePrefixLine\@secondoftwo
\fi
+ \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}%
\normalfont\usekomafont{disposition}{%
\usekomafont{#1}{%
\raggedchapter
@@ -4708,34 +5001,35 @@
}%
}%
}%
+ \ExecuteDoHook{heading/endgroup/#1}%
}%
\nobreak\par\nobreak
\@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@afterskip\endcsname\relax\relax
\chapterheadendvskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@makeschapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@makeschapterhead
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterlinesformat}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{neue Anweisung}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{neue Anweisung}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterlineswithprefixformat}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{neue Anweisung}
-% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Überschriften im Stil
-% \texttt{chapter}, wenn mit Überschriftenzeilen gearbeitet
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/02}{neue Anweisung}
+% Diese Anweisung definiert das Format der eigentlichen Ãœberschriften im Stil
+% \texttt{chapter}, wenn mit Ãœberschriftenzeilen gearbeitet
% wird. Fonteinstellungen sind zu diesem Zeitpunkt bereits erfolgt. Die
% Argumente sind:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\meta{Befehlsname} --] der Name der Gliederungsebene, normalerweise
% \texttt{chapter}.
% \item[\meta{Gliederungsnummer} --] die bereits fertig formatierte
-% Gliederungsnummer (bei \cs{chapterlineswithprefixformat} einschließlich
+% Gliederungsnummer (bei \cs{chapterlineswithprefixformat} einschließlich
% des nachfolgenden vertikalen Abstands) oder leer, falls keine
% Gliederungsnummer auszugeben ist.
-% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Überschrift.
+% \item[\meta{Text} --] der Text der Ãœberschrift.
% \end{description}
-% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Überschrift kein
-% Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. Nach der Überschrift wird jedoch zwangsweise
-% ein \cs{@@par} ausgeführt, so dass sichergestellt ist, dass mit einem
+% Der Anwender ist selbst verantwortlich, dass innerhalb der Ãœberschrift kein
+% Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. Nach der Ãœberschrift wird jedoch zwangsweise
+% ein \cs{@@par} ausgeführt, so dass sichergestellt ist, dass mit einem
% internen Absatz abgeschlossen wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterlinesformat}[3]{%
@@ -4745,18 +5039,18 @@
#2#3%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapterlineswithprefixformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapterlinesformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterlineswithprefixformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterlinesformat
%
% \begin{macro}{\use@chapter@o@preamble}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/08}{Anpassung an geänderte Abstandsbehandlung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/02/02}{Korrektur, zur Verhinderung falscher
-% \texttt{overfull \cs{vbox}} Meldungen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung befehlsabhängiger Abstände und
-% Warnungen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Bekommt ein Argument und setzt die Prämabel
-% der Anweisung nicht des Stils}^^A
-% Das Makro wird benötigt, weil das Setzen der oberen Präambel etwas
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/08}{Anpassung an geänderte Abstandsbehandlung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15a}{2015/02/02}{Korrektur, zur Verhinderung falscher
+% \texttt{overfull \cs{vbox}} Meldungen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung befehlsabhängiger Abstände und
+% Warnungen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Bekommt ein Argument und setzt die Prämabel
+% der Anweisung nicht des Stils}%^^A
+% Das Makro wird benötigt, weil das Setzen der oberen Präambel etwas
% mehr Aufwand bedeutet. Die Anweisung spart Platz, da sie zweimal
% verwendet wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4812,20 +5106,20 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \use@chapter@o@preamble
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@startchapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \use@chapter@o@preamble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@startchapter
%
% \begin{macro}{\addchaptertocentry}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Behandlung von \cs{if@chaptertolists} hier}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Verwendung von \cs{addxcontentsline}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Behandlung von \cs{if@chaptertolists} hier}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Verwendung von \cs{addxcontentsline}}%^^A
% Seit Version~3.08 wird der Eintrag nicht direkt innerhalb von \cs{chapter}
-% per \cs{addcontentsline} erzeugt, sondern indirekt über diese Anweisung. Das
+% per \cs{addcontentsline} erzeugt, sondern indirekt über diese Anweisung. Das
% erste Argument ist dabei die (formatierte) Nummer bzw. bei nicht
-% nummerierten Kapiteln leer. Das zweite Argument ist der Überschriftstext für
+% nummerierten Kapiteln leer. Das zweite Argument ist der Überschriftstext für
% das Verzeichnis. Durch diesen indirekten Weg, kann die Anweisung einfach
-% umdefiniert werden. Verwendet wird hier die Standardanweisung für
-% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge, die in \texttt{scrkliof.dtx} definiert ist:
+% umdefiniert werden. Verwendet wird hier die Standardanweisung für
+% Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge, die in \texttt{scrkliof.dtx} definiert ist:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addchaptertocentry}[2]{%
\addtocentrydefault{chapter}{#1}{#2}%
@@ -4839,78 +5133,78 @@
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addchaptertocentry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addchaptertocentry
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
-% und \cs{scr@@startchapter}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
+% und \cs{scr@@startchapter}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
-% und \cs{scr@makechapterhead}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
+% und \cs{scr@makechapterhead}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@makechapterhead}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
-% und \cs{scr@@makechapterhead}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
+% und \cs{scr@@makechapterhead}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
-% und \cs{scr@@startschapter}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
+% und \cs{scr@@startschapter}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@makeschapterhead}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
-% und \cs{scr@makeschapterhead}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
+% und \cs{scr@makeschapterhead}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@makeschapterhead}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
-% und \cs{scr@@makeschapterhead}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}
+% und \cs{scr@@makeschapterhead}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\setchapterpreamble}
-% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7b}{2001/01/05}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chapter@u@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chapter@o@preamble}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}}^^A
-% All diese Anweisungen wurden in früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{}
-% explizit definiert. Nun werden sie nur noch indirekt über
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{siehe \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command}}%^^A
+% All diese Anweisungen wurden in früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{}
+% explizit definiert. Nun werden sie nur noch indirekt über
% \cs{scr@dsc@def@style@chapter@command} definiert und verwenden dabei andere
-% interne Anweisungen als früher. Deshalb funktionieren ggf. das Patchen mit
-% \textsf{etoolbox}, \textsf{xpatch} und ähnlichen Paketen nicht mehr. Das ist
-% der Preis für die neuen Möglichkeiten.
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapter@o@preamble
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapter@u@preamble
-% \end{macro}^^A \setchapterpreamble
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@makeschapterhead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@makeschapterhead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@schapter
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@makechapterhead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@makechapterhead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@chapter
+% interne Anweisungen als früher. Deshalb funktionieren ggf. das Patchen mit
+% \textsf{etoolbox}, \textsf{xpatch} und ähnlichen Paketen nicht mehr. Das ist
+% der Preis für die neuen Möglichkeiten.
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapter@o@preamble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapter@u@preamble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setchapterpreamble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@makeschapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@makeschapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@schapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@makechapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@makechapterhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@chapter
%
% \begin{macro}{\addchap}
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{sectdef} durch \cs{secdef} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{addcontensline} durch
-% \cs{addcontentsline} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{@makechapterhead} durch
-% \cs{@makeschapterhead} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{afterheadings} durch
-% \cs{@afterheading} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/10/29}{Argument von \cs{chaptermark}^^A
-% entfernt bei \textsf{scrbook}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/12}{mehrfach \cs{markboth} durch
-% \cs{sectionmark} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/03/20}{\cs{chaptermark} durch \cs{@mkboth}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{chapterpagestyle} statt
-% \texttt{plain}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/01}{jetzt auch Kapiteleinträge in andere
-% float-Verzeichnisse mit hyperref}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Verwendung von
-% \cs{scr@float@addtolists@warning} (aus \texttt{scrkliof.dtx})}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addchaptertocentry}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
-% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Komplett neu definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{sectdef} durch \cs{secdef} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{addcontensline} durch
+% \cs{addcontentsline} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{@makechapterhead} durch
+% \cs{@makeschapterhead} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/08/10}{\cs{afterheadings} durch
+% \cs{@afterheading} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/10/29}{Argument von \cs{chaptermark}%^^A
+% entfernt bei \textsf{scrbook}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/12}{mehrfach \cs{markboth} durch
+% \cs{sectionmark} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/03/20}{\cs{chaptermark} durch \cs{@mkboth}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{chapterpagestyle} statt
+% \texttt{plain}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/01}{jetzt auch Kapiteleinträge in andere
+% float-Verzeichnisse mit hyperref}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01}{2008/11/13}{Verwendung von
+% \cs{scr@float@addtolists@warning} (aus \texttt{scrkliof.dtx})}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/01}{Verwendung von \cs{addchaptertocentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
+% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Komplett neu definiert}%^^A
% \KOMAScript{} bietet in \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} den
-% zusätzlichen Gliederungsbefehl \cs{addchap}. Es handelt sich dabei
+% zusätzlichen Gliederungsbefehl \cs{addchap}. Es handelt sich dabei
% um einen mit \cs{chapter*} vergleichbaren Befehl, bei dem jedoch der
% Kolumnentitel korrigiert wird und ein Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
% erfolgt (nicht in der Stern-Variante).
@@ -4941,7 +5235,7 @@
% \@afterheading
% \fi}
% \end{verbatim}\vspace{-\baselineskip}
-% Dies führte jedoch zu Problemen im Zusammenhang mit
+% Dies führte jedoch zu Problemen im Zusammenhang mit
% \textsf{hyperref}, da hierbei keine korrekten Links erzeugt
% werden. Mit dem \texttt{hypertex}-Treiber von \textsf{hyperref}
% bis Version 6.71a werden auch in der neuen Implementierung keine
@@ -4952,17 +5246,17 @@
% \texttt{hpdftex.def} das interne Makro \cs{@schapter} so umdefiniert
% wird, dass ein korrekter Link erzeugt wird.
% \begin{macro}{\@addchap}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addchapmark}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{\cs{scr@ds@head} in \cs{addchapmark}
-% expandieren}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Komplett neu definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addchapmark}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{\cs{scr@ds@head} in \cs{addchapmark}
+% expandieren}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Komplett neu definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@saddchap}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addchapmark}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Komplett neu definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addchapmark}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{Komplett neu definiert}%^^A
% Seit \KOMAScript~3.18 wurden die Definitionen noch einmal deutlich
-% vereinfacht. Deshalb wird nun auch nur noch für \cs{addchap*} die neue
-% Anweisung \cs{addchapmark} benötigt. Bei \cs{addchap} geht es hingegen
-% einfach über \cs{chaptermark} innerhalb von \cs{chapter}.
+% vereinfacht. Deshalb wird nun auch nur noch für \cs{addchap*} die neue
+% Anweisung \cs{addchapmark} benötigt. Bei \cs{addchap} geht es hingegen
+% einfach über \cs{chaptermark} innerhalb von \cs{chapter}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\addchap{%
\SecDef\@addchap\@saddchap
@@ -4987,14 +5281,14 @@
% verschiedenen \texttt{def}-Dateien wird dort das \emph{interne}
% \KOMAScript-Makro \cs{@addchap} umdefiniert, ohne sicherzustellen,
% dass das Makro auch noch so aussieht, wie man das erwartet hat. Die
-% sauberste Lösung wäre sicher gewesen dort \cs{@addchap} nur zu
-% ergänzen, so wie man das auch bei \cs{@schapter} gemacht hatte. Ab
+% sauberste Lösung wäre sicher gewesen dort \cs{@addchap} nur zu
+% ergänzen, so wie man das auch bei \cs{@schapter} gemacht hatte. Ab
% Version 6.71b ist dieser Bug behoben. Damit ich nicht eines Fehlers
-% verdächtigt werde, wird ggf. eine entsprechende Meldung ausgegeben.
-% \changes{v2.7e}{2001/04/16}{fehlende, schließende Klammer
-% ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7f}{2001/04/17}{fehlendes Klammerpaar ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{\cs{AfterPackage} zur Überprüfung der
+% verdächtigt werde, wird ggf. eine entsprechende Meldung ausgegeben.
+% \changes{v2.7e}{2001/04/16}{fehlende, schließende Klammer
+% ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7f}{2001/04/17}{fehlendes Klammerpaar ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/17}{\cs{AfterPackage} zur Überprüfung der
% \textsf{hyperref}-Version verwendet}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book>
@@ -5009,103 +5303,103 @@
%</book>
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@saddchap
-% \end{macro}^^A \@addchap
-% \end{macro}^^A \addchap
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@saddchap
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@addchap
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addchap
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
-% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/02}{Anpassung an Option \texttt{tocleft}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{chapter}-Eintrag im
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis und übergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{chapter}-Eintrag im
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis und untergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont} durch Verwendung von
-% Element \texttt{chapterentry} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{Element \texttt{chapterentrypagenumber} wird
-% verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{weitgehend umgeschrieben, um linksbündige
-% Einträge zu ermöglichen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/22}{Verwendung von \cs{chaptertocdepth} und
-% \cs{scr@chapter@tocnumwidth}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{Verwendung von \cs{addvspace} statt \cs{vskip}
-% für den Abstand am Anfang}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{überführt in Verzeichnisstil}^^A
-% Für die Definition des Kapiteleintrags ins Inhaltsverzeichnis werden einige
+% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/02}{Anpassung an Option \texttt{tocleft}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{chapter}-Eintrag im
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis und übergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{chapter}-Eintrag im
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis und untergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont} durch Verwendung von
+% Element \texttt{chapterentry} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{Element \texttt{chapterentrypagenumber} wird
+% verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{weitgehend umgeschrieben, um linksbündige
+% Einträge zu ermöglichen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/22}{Verwendung von \cs{chaptertocdepth} und
+% \cs{scr@chapter@tocnumwidth}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{Verwendung von \cs{addvspace} statt \cs{vskip}
+% für den Abstand am Anfang}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{überführt in Verzeichnisstil}%^^A
+% Für die Definition des Kapiteleintrags ins Inhaltsverzeichnis werden einige
% Parameter von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert und teilweise
-% verwendet. Damit kann man dann zumindest einige Änderungen mit
+% verwendet. Damit kann man dann zumindest einige Änderungen mit
% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} vornehmen, allerdings noch keine komplette
% Neugestaltung des Eintrags erreichen.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@tocindent}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/06}{wird nun auch verwendet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/06}{wird nun auch verwendet}%^^A
% Der Einzug des Eintrags noch vor der Nummer.
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@chapter@tocindent
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@chapter@tocindent
% \begin{macro}{\scr@chapter@tocnumwidth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
-% Die Breite der Nummer des Eintrags wird tatsächlich verwendet.
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/02}{neue (interne) Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
+% Die Breite der Nummer des Eintrags wird tatsächlich verwendet.
% \end{macro}
% \begin{option}{chapterentrydots}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{Neu}^^A
-% Seit Version~3.15 kann man mit dieser Option Pünktchen zwischen Text und
-% Seitenzahl in den Kapiteleinträgen einschalten.
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{Neu}%^^A
+% Seit Version~3.15 kann man mit dieser Option Pünktchen zwischen Text und
+% Seitenzahl in den Kapiteleinträgen einschalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*option>
\KOMA@ifkey{chapterentrydots}{@chapterentrywithdots}
%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A chapterentrydots
+% \end{option}%^^A chapterentrydots
% \begin{macro}{\raggedchapterentry}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/23}{wird nicht mehr verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/06}{siehe \texttt{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx},
-% Stil \texttt{tocline}, Eigenschaft \texttt{raggedentrytext}}^^A
-% Ausrichtung des Textes der Kapiteleinträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/23}{wird nicht mehr verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/06}{siehe \texttt{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx},
+% Stil \texttt{tocline}, Eigenschaft \texttt{raggedentrytext}}%^^A
+% Ausrichtung des Textes der Kapiteleinträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\raggedchapterentry}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \raggedchapterentry
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@chapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \raggedchapterentry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@chapter
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapteratlist}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neues Macro}^^A
-% Dieses Makro wird ggf. für die Kapiteleinträge in den Listen der
-% Gleitumgebungen verwendet. Zunächst einmal wird hier dasselbe verwendet, wie
-% für die Kapiteleinträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{neues Macro}%^^A
+% Dieses Makro wird ggf. für die Kapiteleinträge in den Listen der
+% Gleitumgebungen verwendet. Zunächst einmal wird hier dasselbe verwendet, wie
+% für die Kapiteleinträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@chapteratlist}{\l@chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@chapteratlist
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@chapteratlist
%
% \begin{Counter}{chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\thechapter}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterformat}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{einfaches Leerzeichen durch \cs{enskip}^^A
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{chapappifprefix} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{chapappifchapterprefix} statt
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{einfaches Leerzeichen durch \cs{enskip}%^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{chapappifprefix} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{chapappifchapterprefix} statt
% \cs{chapappifprefix}} ^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{\cs{mbox} eingefügt, um \cs{caps} zu
-% ermöglichen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/08}{\cs{enskip} not in prefix line mode}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{\cs{mbox} eingefügt, um \cs{caps} zu
+% ermöglichen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/08}{\cs{enskip} not in prefix line mode}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chaptermarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Leerraum nach der Kapitelnummer erhöht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{chapappifprefix} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{chapappifchapterprefix} statt
-% \cs{chapappifprefix}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03a}{2009/04/03}{Tilde durch \cs{nobreakspace} ersetzt, um die
-% Kompatibilität mit Spanisch zu verbessern}^^A
-% Jede Gliederungsebene benötigt einen Zähler für die
-% Gliederungsnummer und eine Darstellung des Zählers
-% (\cs{the\dots}). Desweiteren wird eine Formatierung des Zählers in
-% den Gliederungsüberschriften (\texttt{\bslash\dots format}) und eine
-% Formatierung des Zählers in der Kopfzeile
-% (\texttt{\bslash\dots markformat}) benötigt.
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Leerraum nach der Kapitelnummer erhöht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{\cs{chapappifprefix} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{\cs{chapappifchapterprefix} statt
+% \cs{chapappifprefix}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03a}{2009/04/03}{Tilde durch \cs{nobreakspace} ersetzt, um die
+% Kompatibilität mit Spanisch zu verbessern}%^^A
+% Jede Gliederungsebene benötigt einen Zähler für die
+% Gliederungsnummer und eine Darstellung des Zählers
+% (\cs{the\dots}). Desweiteren wird eine Formatierung des Zählers in
+% den Gliederungsüberschriften (\texttt{\bslash\dots format}) und eine
+% Formatierung des Zählers in der Kopfzeile
+% (\texttt{\bslash\dots markformat}) benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{chapter}
\renewcommand*{\thechapter}{\@arabic\c@chapter}
@@ -5116,10 +5410,10 @@
\newcommand*\chaptermarkformat{\chapappifchapterprefix{\ }%
\thechapter\autodot\enskip}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \chaptermarkformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapterformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \thechapter
-% \end{Counter}^^A chapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chaptermarkformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapterformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thechapter
+% \end{Counter}%^^A chapter
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chaptername}
@@ -5127,7 +5421,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\chaptername{Chapter}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \chaptername
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chaptername
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
@@ -5135,30 +5429,30 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\appendixname{Appendix}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \appendixname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \appendixname
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapappifprefix}
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{obsolet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{obsolet}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chapappifchapterprefix}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{Argument ist nicht optional}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{verwendet \cs{IfChapterUsePrefixLine}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/19}{Argument ist nicht optional}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{verwendet \cs{IfChapterUsePrefixLine}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\chapapp}
-% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8}{2001/06/15}{neu}%^^A
% Das in \cs{chapterformat} verwendete Makro
-% \cs{chapappifchapterprefix} setzt abhängig von \cs{if@chapterprefix}
+% \cs{chapappifchapterprefix} setzt abhängig von \cs{if@chapterprefix}
% noch das Makro \cs{chapapp} gefolgt vom obliatorischen Argument.
-% \cs{chapapp} macht \cs{@chapapp} auf Anwenderebene verfügbar. Der
-% Vorteil des neuen \cs{chapappifchapterprefix} gegenüber dem alten
+% \cs{chapapp} macht \cs{@chapapp} auf Anwenderebene verfügbar. Der
+% Vorteil des neuen \cs{chapappifchapterprefix} gegenüber dem alten
% \cs{chapappifprefix} ist, dass nun beim Umdefinieren von
% \cs{chapterformat} und \cs{chaptermarkformat} wieder
% \cs{renewcommand} verwendet werden kann und beim Umschalten in den
% Anhang die Kopfzeile korrekt ist, weil das Makro nun nicht mehr
-% geschützt ist, sondern direkt expandiert.
+% geschützt ist, sondern direkt expandiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\chapappifprefix}[1][]{%
\ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -5180,22 +5474,22 @@
\newcommand*{\chapapp}{\@chapapp}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@chapapp}
-% Dieses Makro enthält den Kapitelname (\cs{chaptername}), der sich im
-% Anhang üblicherweise ändert (\cs{appendixname}).
+% Dieses Makro enthält den Kapitelname (\cs{chaptername}), der sich im
+% Anhang üblicherweise ändert (\cs{appendixname}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\@chapapp{\chaptername}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@chapapp
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapapp
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfChapterUsePrefixLine
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapappifchapterprefix
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapappifprefix
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@chapapp
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapapp
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfChapterUsePrefixLine
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapappifchapterprefix
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapappifprefix
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
% Da \cs{chapter} nicht mit Hilfe von \cs{@startsection} definiert
% wird, wird auch \cs{chaptermark} nicht automatisch definiert. Es
-% wird aber in den Seitenstilen benötigt bzw. umdefiniert. Also hier
+% wird aber in den Seitenstilen benötigt bzw. umdefiniert. Also hier
% vorsorglich eine Dummy-Definition:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\chaptermark[1]{}
@@ -5203,9 +5497,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addchapmark}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% Für \cs{addchapmark} gilt dies hingegen nicht. Das wird nicht von den Stilen
-% definiert, sondern direkt mit der gewünschten Definition
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% Für \cs{addchapmark} gilt dies hingegen nicht. Das wird nicht von den Stilen
+% definiert, sondern direkt mit der gewünschten Definition
% initialisiert. Bitte nicht davon verwirren lassen, dass \cs{if@mainmatter}
% hier auch von \textsf{scrreprt} definiert wird. Das ist Absicht und
% vereinfacht dem einen oder anderen Paket oder Benutzer vielleicht die
@@ -5220,14 +5514,14 @@
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addchapmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addchapmark
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedchapter}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{neu}^^A
-% Da das doch recht häufig gewünscht wird, kann man die Ausrichtung der
-% Kapitelüberschrift auch getrennt von der Ausrichtung der übrigen
-% Überschriften einstellen.
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{neu}%^^A
+% Da das doch recht häufig gewünscht wird, kann man die Ausrichtung der
+% Kapitelüberschrift auch getrennt von der Ausrichtung der übrigen
+% Ãœberschriften einstellen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\raggedchapter}{\raggedsection}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -5235,35 +5529,35 @@
%
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{chapter}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{chapter}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{chapter}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@chapter}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{chapter}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{chapter}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{chapterprefix}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{neues Element \texttt{chapterprefix}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{neues Element \texttt{chapterprefix}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@chapterprefix}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{neues Element \texttt{chapterprefix}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/02}{neues Element \texttt{chapterprefix}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@chapter}{\size@chapter}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@chapterprefix}{\size@chapterprefix}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@chapterprefix
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@chapterprefix
% \end{KOMAfont} chapterprefix
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@chapter
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A chapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@chapter
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A chapter
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{chapterentry}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{Verwendung von \texttt{sectioning} durch
-% \texttt{disposition} ersetzt}^^A
-% Schrift für den \cs{chapter}-Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{Verwendung von \texttt{sectioning} durch
+% \texttt{disposition} ersetzt}%^^A
+% Schrift für den \cs{chapter}-Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{chapterentry}{\usekomafont{disposition}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{chapterentrypagenumber}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift für die Seitenzahl des \cs{chapter}-Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift für die Seitenzahl des \cs{chapter}-Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis
% abweichend von \texttt{chapterentry}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{chapterentrypagenumber}{}
@@ -5271,8 +5565,8 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{chapterentrydots}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift für die optionalen Pünktchen des \cs{chapter}-Eintrags im
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift für die optionalen Pünktchen des \cs{chapter}-Eintrags im
% Inhaltsverzeichnis abweichend von \texttt{chapterentrypagenumber}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{chapterentrydots}{\normalfont}
@@ -5285,22 +5579,22 @@
%
% \subsection{Abschnitte und Untergliederungen}
%
-% Alle Ebenen ab \cs{section} ähneln sich so sehr, dass sie gemeinsam
-% behandelt werden. Lediglich bei \textsf{scrartl} gibt es für \cs{section}
+% Alle Ebenen ab \cs{section} ähneln sich so sehr, dass sie gemeinsam
+% behandelt werden. Lediglich bei \textsf{scrartl} gibt es für \cs{section}
% selbst noch ein paar Besonderheiten.
%
% \begin{macro}{\size@section}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\size@subsection}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\size@subsubsection}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\size@paragraph}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\size@subparagraph}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Hier werden diese Befehle nur vordefiniert. Ihre tatsächliche Einstellung
-% erfolgt über die (Vor-)Auswahl von Option \texttt{headings}.
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Hier werden diese Befehle nur vordefiniert. Ihre tatsächliche Einstellung
+% erfolgt über die (Vor-)Auswahl von Option \texttt{headings}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%<*prepare>
@@ -5311,92 +5605,92 @@
\newcommand*{\size@subparagraph}{}
%</prepare>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \size@subparagraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \size@paragraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \size@subsubsection
-% \end{macro}^^A \size@subsection
-% \end{macro}^^A \size@section
+% \end{macro}%^^A \size@subparagraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \size@paragraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \size@subsubsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \size@subsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \size@section
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
-% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/02}{Anpassung an Option \texttt{tocleft}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{section}-Eintrag im
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis und übergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{section}-Eintrag im
-% Inhaltsverzeichnis und untergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont} durch Verwendung von
-% Element \texttt{sectionentry} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{Element \texttt{sectionentrypagenumber} wird
-% verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{weitgehend umgeschrieben, um linksbündige
-% Einträge zu ermöglichen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{sectiontocdepth},
+% \changes{v2.9k}{2003/01/02}{Anpassung an Option \texttt{tocleft}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{section}-Eintrag im
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis und übergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96b}{2006/11/30}{Umbruch zwischen \cs{section}-Eintrag im
+% Inhaltsverzeichnis und untergeordneten Einträgen verhindern}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{\cs{sectfont} durch Verwendung von
+% Element \texttt{sectionentry} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{Element \texttt{sectionentrypagenumber} wird
+% verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{weitgehend umgeschrieben, um linksbündige
+% Einträge zu ermöglichen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{sectiontocdepth},
% \cs{scr@section@tocindent} und \cs{scr@section@tocnumwidth} werden
-% verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{Überführung in Verzeichnisstil}^^A
-% Bei der Artikel-Klasse folgt die Formatierung für
-% \cs{section}-Einträge, an Stelle der Einträge für \cs{chapter}
+% verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{Überführung in Verzeichnisstil}%^^A
+% Bei der Artikel-Klasse folgt die Formatierung für
+% \cs{section}-Einträge, an Stelle der Einträge für \cs{chapter}
% der Buch- oder der Bericht-Klasse. Bei diesen handelt es sich hier
% stattdessen um eine normale Ebene.
% \begin{option}{sectionentrydots}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{Neu}^^A
-% Seit Version~3.15 kann man mit dieser Option Pünktchen zwischen Text und
-% Seitenzahl in den Kapiteleinträgen einschalten.
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{Neu}%^^A
+% Seit Version~3.15 kann man mit dieser Option Pünktchen zwischen Text und
+% Seitenzahl in den Kapiteleinträgen einschalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*article>
%<*option>
\KOMA@ifkey{sectionentrydots}{@sectionentrywithdots}
%</option>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A sectionentrydots
+% \end{option}%^^A sectionentrydots
% \begin{macro}{\raggedsectionentry}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/23}{nicht mehr verwendet}^^A
-% Ausrichtung des Textes der Abschnittseinträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/23}{nicht mehr verwendet}%^^A
+% Ausrichtung des Textes der Abschnittseinträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\raggedsectionentry}{}
%</body>
%</article>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \raggedsectionentry
-% \end{macro}^^A \l@section
+% \end{macro}%^^A \raggedsectionentry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \l@section
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\addsec}
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/12}{mehrfach \cs{markboth} durch
-% \cs{sectionmark} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/03/20}{\cs{sectionmark} durch \cs{@mkboth}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{jetzt auch bei \textsf{scrbook} und
-% \textsf{scrreprt}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\cs{section*} vorgezogen, damit
-% dadurch provozierte Seitenumbrüche im Inhaltsverzeichnis
-% berücksichtigt werden}^^A
-% \changes{v2.5d}{1998/01/03}{\cs{@mkboth} bedingt durch
-% \cs{markright} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7a}{2001/01/04}{\cs{addsec} für eine bessere
-% Unterstützung von \textsf{hyperref} geändert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/12}{mehrfach \cs{markboth} durch
+% \cs{sectionmark} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/03/20}{\cs{sectionmark} durch \cs{@mkboth}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/21}{jetzt auch bei \textsf{scrbook} und
+% \textsf{scrreprt}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\cs{section*} vorgezogen, damit
+% dadurch provozierte Seitenumbrüche im Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% berücksichtigt werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.5d}{1998/01/03}{\cs{@mkboth} bedingt durch
+% \cs{markright} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7a}{2001/01/04}{\cs{addsec} für eine bessere
+% Unterstützung von \textsf{hyperref} geändert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{SecDef}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@addsec}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Verwendung von \cs{addsectiontocentry}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
-% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addsecmark}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{komplett neu definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Verwendung von \cs{addsectiontocentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
+% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addsecmark}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/22}{komplett neu definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@saddsec}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addsecmark}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{\cs{scr@ds@head} in \cs{addsecmark}
-% expandieren}^^A
-% \KOMAScript{} bietet in allen drei Hauptklassen den zusätzlichen
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/02/26}{Verwendung von \cs{addsecmark}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/04/20}{\cs{scr@ds@head} in \cs{addsecmark}
+% expandieren}%^^A
+% \KOMAScript{} bietet in allen drei Hauptklassen den zusätzlichen
% Gliederungsbefehl \cs{addsec}. Es handelt sich dabei um einen mit
% \cs{section*} vergleichbaren Befehl, bei dem jedoch der
% Kolumnentitel korrigiert wird und ein Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis
% erfolgt (nicht in der Stern-Variante).
%
% Mit Version~3.18 wurde \cs{addsec} deutlich vereinfacht. Seither verwendet
-% nur noch \cs{@saddsec} die Anweiung \cs{addsecmark}, während \cs{@addsec}
-% direkt über das \cs{sectionmark} von \cs{section} arbeitet.
+% nur noch \cs{@saddsec} die Anweiung \cs{addsecmark}, während \cs{@addsec}
+% direkt über das \cs{sectionmark} von \cs{section} arbeitet.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand\addsec{\SecDef\@addsec\@saddsec}
@@ -5415,29 +5709,29 @@
\section*{#1}\addsecmark{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@saddsec
-% \end{macro}^^A \@addsec
-% \end{macro}^^A \addsec
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@saddsec
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@addsec
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addsec
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\minisec}
% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont}
-% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}^^A
+% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}%^^A
% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/01/31}{\cs{nobreak} nach dem Gruppenende
-% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
-% von Option \texttt{version})}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak}^^A
-% entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/07}{Absicherung der Abstände bei
-% aufeinanderfolgenden Überschriften entsprechend \cs{@startsection}}^^A
+% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
+% von Option \texttt{version})}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak}%^^A
+% entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/08/07}{Absicherung der Abstände bei
+% aufeinanderfolgenden Ãœberschriften entsprechend \cs{@startsection}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/05/14}{fehlendes \cs{interlinepenalty}\cs{@M}
-% ergänzt}^^A
+% ergänzt}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{minisec}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{\texttt{minisec} ist ein eigenes
-% Fontelement}^^A
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}^^A
-% In \KOMAScript{} gibt es diese zusätzliche Gliederungsebene, die
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{\texttt{minisec} ist ein eigenes
+% Fontelement}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/12}{fehlendes \cs{nobreak} ergänzt}%^^A
+% In \KOMAScript{} gibt es diese zusätzliche Gliederungsebene, die
% immer ohne Nummer und ohne Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis erfolgt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{minisec}{}
@@ -5468,7 +5762,7 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\addsectiontocentry}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}%^^A
% Entsprechend \cs{addparttocentry} und \cs{addchaptertocentry}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addsectiontocentry}[2]{%
@@ -5478,7 +5772,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addsubsectiontocentry}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}%^^A
% Entsprechend \cs{addparttocentry} usw.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addsubsectiontocentry}[2]{%
@@ -5488,7 +5782,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addparagraphtocentry}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}%^^A
% Entsprechend \cs{addparttocentry} usw.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addparagraphtocentry}[2]{%
@@ -5498,7 +5792,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addsubparagraphtocentry}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Neu}%^^A
% Entsprechend \cs{addparttocentry} usw.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addsubparagraphtocentry}[2]{%
@@ -5510,40 +5804,40 @@
%
% \begin{Counter}{section}
% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/09}{\cs{relax} im Kompatibilitätstest durch ein
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{Kapitelnummer nur im Hauptteil}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/09}{\cs{relax} im Kompatibilitätstest durch ein
% Leerzeichen ersetzt, obwohl das die Wartbarkeit verschlechtert, aber
-% \textsf{hyperref} hat mit dem \cs{relax} ein nicht dokumentieres Problem}
+% \textsf{hyperref} hat mit dem \cs{relax} ein nicht dokumentieres
+% Problem}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/06/26}{Umstellung auf \cs{scr@v@is@gt}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sectionmarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Leerraum nach der Kapitelnummer
-% erhöht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Leerraum nach der Kapitelnummer
+% erhöht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}%^^A
% \begin{Counter}{subsection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Leerraum nach der Kapitelnummer
-% erhöht}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Leerraum nach der Kapitelnummer
+% erhöht}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{Duden Regel 6}%^^A
% \begin{Counter}{subsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
% \begin{Counter}{paragraph}
% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
% \begin{Counter}{subparagraph}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubparagraph}
-% Jede Gliederungsebene benötigt einen Zähler für die
-% Gliederungsnummer und eine Darstellung des Zählers
-% (\cs{the\dots}). Desweiteren wird eine Formatierung des Zählers in
-% den Gliederungsüberschriften (\texttt{\bslash\dots format}) und eine
-% Formatierung des Zählers in der Kopfzeile
-% (\texttt{\bslash\dots markformat}) benötigt.
+% Jede Gliederungsebene benötigt einen Zähler für die
+% Gliederungsnummer und eine Darstellung des Zählers
+% (\cs{the\dots}). Desweiteren wird eine Formatierung des Zählers in
+% den Gliederungsüberschriften (\texttt{\bslash\dots format}) und eine
+% Formatierung des Zählers in der Kopfzeile
+% (\texttt{\bslash\dots markformat}) benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
\newcounter{section}[chapter]
\renewcommand*\thesection{%
%<*book>
- \ifnum \scr@compatibility>\@nameuse{scr@v@2.97d} % the space before this
- % comment should be \relax but hyperref has a
- % not documented problem with \relax
+ \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@gt{2.97d}%
\if@mainmatter\thechapter.\fi
\else
%</book>
@@ -5574,32 +5868,32 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@seccntformat}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{CJK erweitert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9p}{2004/01/07}{\cs{protect} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97}{2007/01/24}{Workaround für das blöde \cs{protect}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/23}{verwendet \cs{\dots format}, wenn es
-% existiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/31}{verwendet \cs{protect} für \cs{\dots
-% format}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{CJK erweitert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9p}{2004/01/07}{\cs{protect} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97}{2007/01/24}{Workaround für das blöde \cs{protect}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/23}{verwendet \cs{\dots format}, wenn es
+% existiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/31}{verwendet \cs{protect} für \cs{\dots
+% format}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\othersectionlevelsformat}
-% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{\cs{quad} durch \cs{enskip} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7i}{2001/05/17}{\cs{let} durch \cs{def} ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97}{2007/01/24}{statt einem Argument jetzt drei}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7}{2000/01/03}{\cs{quad} durch \cs{enskip} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7i}{2001/05/17}{\cs{let} durch \cs{def} ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97}{2007/01/24}{statt einem Argument jetzt drei}%^^A
% Bei den Ebenen ab \cs{section} erfolgt die Formatierung der
-% Gliederungnummer in der Überschrift mit einer gemeinsamen
+% Gliederungnummer in der Ãœberschrift mit einer gemeinsamen
% Anweisung. Die interne Anweisung \cs{@seccntformat} wird dabei von
% \LaTeX-Kern verwendet und muss umdefiniert werden, um eine
-% entsprechende Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar zu haben.
+% entsprechende Anweisung auf Anwenderebene verfügbar zu haben.
% Ab Version 2.9p wurde in \cs{@seccntformat} ein \cs{protect} vor
-% \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} eingefügt. Damit wurde es für den Benutzer
+% \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} eingefügt. Damit wurde es für den Benutzer
% deutlich einfacher, die Anweisung \cs{othersectionlevelsformat}
-% umzudefinieren. Dafür war dadurch aber \cs{the\dots} nicht mehr
-% expandiert. Das wiederum gab Probleme, wenn \cs{@seccntformat} für den
+% umzudefinieren. Dafür war dadurch aber \cs{the\dots} nicht mehr
+% expandiert. Das wiederum gab Probleme, wenn \cs{@seccntformat} für den
% \cs{mark}-Mechanismus genutzt wurde. Deshalb hat
% \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} ab Version 2.97 drei Argumente statt nur
% eines. Das zweite Argument sollte vom Anwender ignoriert werden, es
-% existiert nur, um die Kompatibitlität Umdefinitionen zu erhalten, bei denen
+% existiert nur, um die Kompatibitlität Umdefinitionen zu erhalten, bei denen
% \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} nur ein Argument besitzt. Das dritte Argument
% ist die \cs{the\dots}-Anweisung. Das zweite Argument funktioniert so, das es
% das dritte Argument frisst, falls \cs{othersectionlevelsformat} nur ein
@@ -5618,26 +5912,26 @@
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \othersectonlevelsformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \@seccntformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \thesubparagraph
-% \end{Counter}^^A subparagraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \theparagraph
-% \end{Counter}^^A paragraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \thesubsubsection
-% \end{Counter}^^A subsubsection
-% \end{macro}^^A \subsectionformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \thesubsection
-% \end{Counter}^^A subsection
-% \end{macro}^^A \sectionformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \thesection
-% \end{Counter}^^A section
+% \end{macro}%^^A \othersectonlevelsformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@seccntformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thesubparagraph
+% \end{Counter}%^^A subparagraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \theparagraph
+% \end{Counter}%^^A paragraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thesubsubsection
+% \end{Counter}%^^A subsubsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subsectionformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thesubsection
+% \end{Counter}%^^A subsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectionformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \thesection
+% \end{Counter}%^^A section
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\addsecmark}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{neue Anweisung}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
% \cs{addsecmark} wird nicht von den Seitenstilen definiert, sondern direkt
-% mit der gewünschten Definition initialisiert.
+% mit der gewünschten Definition initialisiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\addsecmark[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -5646,34 +5940,34 @@
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \addsecmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \addsecmark
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{section}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{section}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{section}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@section}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{section}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{section}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{subsection}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsection}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsection}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@subsection}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsection}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsection}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{subsubsection}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsubsection}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsubsection}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@subsubsection}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsubsection}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subsubsection}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{paragraph}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{paragraph}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{paragraph}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@paragraph}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{paragraph}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{paragraph}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{subparagraph}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subparagraph}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subparagraph}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@subparagraph}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subparagraph}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{subparagraph}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{minisec}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neuer Ersatz für das Element
-% \texttt{minisec}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2007/01/08}{Alias für das Element \texttt{minisec}^^A
-% entfernt, da es nun ein eigenes Element ist}^^A
-% Definition der Elemente der Gliederung, deren Schrift geändert
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neuer Ersatz für das Element
+% \texttt{minisec}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2007/01/08}{Alias für das Element \texttt{minisec}%^^A
+% entfernt, da es nun ein eigenes Element ist}%^^A
+% Definition der Elemente der Gliederung, deren Schrift geändert
% werden kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@section}{\size@section}
@@ -5682,7 +5976,7 @@
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@paragraph}{\size@paragraph}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@subparagraph}{\size@subparagraph}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A minisec
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A minisec
% \end{macro}
% \end{KOMAfont}
% \end{macro}
@@ -5695,10 +5989,10 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{sectionentry}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{Verwendung von \texttt{sectioning} durch
-% \texttt{disposition} ersetzt}^^A
-% Schrift für den \cs{section}-Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{Verwendung von \texttt{sectioning} durch
+% \texttt{disposition} ersetzt}%^^A
+% Schrift für den \cs{section}-Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*article>
\newkomafont{sectionentry}{\usekomafont{disposition}}
@@ -5706,8 +6000,8 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{sectionentrypagenumber}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift für die Seitenzahl des \cs{section}-Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/21}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift für die Seitenzahl des \cs{section}-Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis
% abweichend von \texttt{sectionentry}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{sectionentrypagenumber}{}
@@ -5715,8 +6009,8 @@
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{sectionentrydots}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{neues Font-Element}^^A
-% Schrift für die optionalen Pünktchen des \cs{section}-Eintrags im
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{neues Font-Element}%^^A
+% Schrift für die optionalen Pünktchen des \cs{section}-Eintrags im
% Inhaltsverzeichnis abweichend von \texttt{sectionentrypagenumber}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{sectionentrydots}{\normalfont}
@@ -5726,110 +6020,110 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\partnumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/24}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chapternumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sectionnumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subsectionnumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionnumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphnumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphnumdepth}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
-% Diese dürfen nur gelesen, sollten aber nie umdefiniert werden und geben die
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/16}{new read only command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
+% Diese dürfen nur gelesen, sollten aber nie umdefiniert werden und geben die
% Nummerierungsebene der Gliederungsanweisungen an (nicht zu verwechseln mit
% der Verzeichnisebene der Gliederungsanweisungen).
% \begin{macro}{\parttocdepth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/22}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/22}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chaptertocdepth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/22}{neue Anweisung}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/22}{neue Anweisung}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sectiontocdepth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subsectiontocdepth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectiontocdepth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphtocdepth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphtocdepth}
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
-% Diese dürfen nur gelesen, sollten aber nie umdefiniert werden und geben die
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/09}{indirekt über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
+% Diese dürfen nur gelesen, sollten aber nie umdefiniert werden und geben die
% Verzeichnisebene der Gliederungsanweisungen an.
% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/25}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/27}{Definition nach \cs{section} verschoben (wegen
-% bookmark level fix)}^^A
+% bookmark level fix)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{chapterpagestyle} statt
-% \texttt{plain}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
-% Als Besonderheit werden für \cs{chapter} nur diejenigen Werte gesetzt, die
-% nicht über Optionen eingestellt werden können und daher vorab deklariert
-% werden müssen. Bei den Anweisungen der unteren Ebenen werden hingegen alle
-% Einstellungen über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} vorgenommen.
+% \texttt{plain}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
+% Als Besonderheit werden für \cs{chapter} nur diejenigen Werte gesetzt, die
+% nicht über Optionen eingestellt werden können und daher vorab deklariert
+% werden müssen. Bei den Anweisungen der unteren Ebenen werden hingegen alle
+% Einstellungen über \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} vorgenommen.
% \begin{macro}{\section}
% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} wird nun vor
-% \cs{size@section} aufgerufen}^^A
+% \cs{size@section} aufgerufen}%^^A
% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont}
-% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
-% von Option \texttt{version})}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
+% von Option \texttt{version})}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} wird nun vor
-% \cs{size@subsection} aufgerufen}^^A
+% \cs{size@subsection} aufgerufen}%^^A
% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont}
-% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
-% von Option \texttt{version})}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
+% von Option \texttt{version})}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
% \changes{v2.3d}{1995/08/19}{wird bei \texttt{scrartcl} nun
-% ebenfalls numeriert und ins Inhaltsverzeichnis geschrieben}^^A
+% ebenfalls numeriert und ins Inhaltsverzeichnis geschrieben}%^^A
% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} wird nun vor
-% \cs{size@subsubsection} aufgerufen}^^A
+% \cs{size@subsubsection} aufgerufen}%^^A
% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont}
-% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
-% von Option \texttt{version})}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/30}{Standardwert für \cs{parfillskip} (abhängig
+% von Option \texttt{version})}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} wird nun vor
-% \cs{size@paragraph} aufgerufen}^^A
+% \cs{size@paragraph} aufgerufen}%^^A
% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont}
-% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{sectfont} wird nun vor
-% \cs{size@subparagraph} aufgerufen}^^A
+% \cs{size@subparagraph} aufgerufen}%^^A
% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/02/28}{\cs{nobreak} nach \cs{sectfont}
-% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}^^A
+% behebt einen Bug im color Paket}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/12/03}{alle nicht benötigten \cs{nobreak} entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/09/11}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@startsection}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{Verwendung von \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{parindent} durch \cs{scr@parindent}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Die Standardgliederungsbefehle \cs{section} bis \cs{subparagraph}
-% sind seit \KOMAScript{} v3.15 über die von \KOMAScript{} bereitgestellte
+% sind seit \KOMAScript{} v3.15 über die von \KOMAScript{} bereitgestellte
% Schnittstelle \cs{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
@@ -5924,47 +6218,47 @@
%</body>
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \subparagraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \paragraph
-% \end{macro}^^A \subsubsection
-% \end{macro}^^A \subsection
-% \end{macro}^^A \section
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapter
-% \end{macro}^^A \part
-% \end{macro}^^A \subparargraphtocdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \paragraphtocdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \subsubsectiontocdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \subsectiontocdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \sectiontocdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \chaptertocdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \parttocdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \subparargraphnumdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \paragraphnumdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \subsubsectionnumdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \subsectionnumdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \sectionnumdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \chapternumdepth
-% \end{macro}^^A \partnumdepth
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Font und Größeneinstellungen}
-%
-% Die Einstellungen für die einzelnen Ebenen werden bei den Definitonen der
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subparagraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \paragraph
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subsubsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \section
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \part
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subparargraphtocdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \paragraphtocdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subsubsectiontocdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subsectiontocdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectiontocdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chaptertocdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \parttocdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subparargraphnumdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \paragraphnumdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subsubsectionnumdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \subsectionnumdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectionnumdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chapternumdepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partnumdepth
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Font und Größeneinstellungen}
+%
+% Die Einstellungen für die einzelnen Ebenen werden bei den Definitonen der
% Ebenen vorgenommen. Hier gibt es nur Einstellungen, die nicht einer
% einzelnen Ebene zugeordnet sind.
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{disposition}
-% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/30}{neues Element \texttt{disposition}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/30}{neues Element \texttt{disposition}}%^^A
% \begin{KOMAfont}{sectioning}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@disposition}
-% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/30}{neues Element \texttt{disposition}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95b}{2006/07/30}{neues Element \texttt{disposition}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sectfont}
-% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{wird wegen Option
-% \texttt{headings!=standardclasses} früher definiert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{\cs{sffamily} durch \cs{@gr@gsffamily}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Dies Schriftart nicht nur für die Gliederungsbefehle. Dieses Makro
+% \changes{v2.8c}{2001/06/29}{\cs{normalcolor} eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{wird wegen Option
+% \texttt{headings!=standardclasses} früher definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/29}{\cs{sffamily} durch \cs{@gr@gsffamily}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Dies Schriftart nicht nur für die Gliederungsbefehle. Dieses Makro
% ist als intern zu betrachten. Der Anwender sollte stattdessen das
% entsprtechende Fontelement verwenden.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -5976,39 +6270,39 @@
\aliaskomafont{sectioning}{disposition}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sectfont
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@disposition
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A sectioning
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A disposition
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectfont
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@disposition
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A sectioning
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A disposition
%
%
% \begin{option}{headings}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Größe von \cs{chapter} um eine Stufe
-% verringert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Verwendung von \cs{chapterheadstartvskip} und
-% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} an Stelle von festen vertikalen Abständen am
-% Anfang und am Ende eines Kapitels}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7c}{2000/01/19}{vertikale Abstände nach der Kapitelüberschrift
-% geringfügig verändert und mit Leim versehen, um mit \cs{flushbottom} zu
-% besseren Ergebnissen zu gelangen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{Neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
-% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
-% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch \cs{KOMAoptions}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardclasses}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip} und
-% \cs{scr@chapter@afterskip} werden verwendet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Werte für \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip}
-% negiert}^^A
-% Dies ist eine neue zentrale Option für Überschriften. Dabei ergibt sich
-% nun auch das Problem, dass die Gesamtmenge der Überschriften mal
-% \emph{headings} (Überschriften), mal \emph{sectioning}
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Größe von \cs{chapter} um eine Stufe
+% verringert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{Verwendung von \cs{chapterheadstartvskip} und
+% \cs{chapterheadendvskip} an Stelle von festen vertikalen Abständen am
+% Anfang und am Ende eines Kapitels}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7c}{2000/01/19}{vertikale Abstände nach der Kapitelüberschrift
+% geringfügig verändert und mit Leim versehen, um mit \cs{flushbottom} zu
+% besseren Ergebnissen zu gelangen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{Neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{Integration der Erweiterung für das optionale
+% Argument der Gliederungsbefehle}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit
+% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/08/26}{\cs{KOMA@options} durch \cs{KOMAoptions}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{neuer Wert \texttt{standardclasses}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/11/24}{\cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip} und
+% \cs{scr@chapter@afterskip} werden verwendet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/09}{interne Speicherung des Wert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Werte für \cs{scr@chapter@beforeskip}
+% negiert}%^^A
+% Dies ist eine neue zentrale Option für Überschriften. Dabei ergibt sich
+% nun auch das Problem, dass die Gesamtmenge der Ãœberschriften mal
+% \emph{headings} (Ãœberschriften), mal \emph{sectioning}
% (Abschnittseinteilung) und mal \emph{disposition} (Gliederung) genannt
-% wird. Es wäre gut gewesen, sich bei Zeiten Gedanken darüber zu machen, wie
+% wird. Es wäre gut gewesen, sich bei Zeiten Gedanken darüber zu machen, wie
% man das am besten einheitlich nennt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
@@ -6044,16 +6338,16 @@
\KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{standardclasses}%
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Als erstes kümmern wir uns um die drei Größenabstufungen für die
-% Überschriften, die \KOMAScript{} bietet, und zwar in der Reihenfolge
+% Als erstes kümmern wir uns um die drei Größenabstufungen für die
+% Ãœberschriften, die \KOMAScript{} bietet, und zwar in der Reihenfolge
% \texttt{big}, \texttt{normal}, \texttt{small}. Es sei darauf hingewiesen,
-% dass die Verwendung dieser Option alle Änderungen an
+% dass die Verwendung dieser Option alle Änderungen an
% \cs{chapterheadstartvskip} oder \cs{chapterheadendvskip} oder den
-% Font-Elementen für die einzelnen Überschriften aufhebt macht!
+% Font-Elementen für die einzelnen Überschriften aufhebt macht!
%
-% Hinweis: Es wurde |+\baselineskip+\parskip| hinzugefügt, um
-% Kompatibilitätsprobleme zu vermeiden. Die entsprechenden Werte werden in der
-% Präambel aber wieder abgezogen, um Überschriften wirklich mit
+% Hinweis: Es wurde |+\baselineskip+\parskip| hinzugefügt, um
+% Kompatibilitätsprobleme zu vermeiden. Die entsprechenden Werte werden in der
+% Präambel aber wieder abgezogen, um Überschriften wirklich mit
% |beforeskip=0pt| an den oberen Rand zu bekommen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*book|report>
@@ -6146,8 +6440,8 @@
\renewcommand*{\size@paragraph}{\normalsize}%
\renewcommand*{\size@subparagraph}{\normalsize}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} gibt es dann noch die
-% Möglichkeit, auch hierüber die Optionen \texttt{open=any},
+% Für \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} gibt es dann noch die
+% Möglichkeit, auch hierüber die Optionen \texttt{open=any},
% \texttt{open=right} und \texttt{open=left} zu setzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or % openany
@@ -6163,8 +6457,8 @@
\KOMAoptions{open=left}%
%</book|report>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} gibt es dann noch die
-% Möglichkeit, auch hierüber die Optionen \texttt{chapterprefix} und
+% Für \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} gibt es dann noch die
+% Möglichkeit, auch hierüber die Optionen \texttt{chapterprefix} und
% \texttt{appendixprefix} zu setzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or % twolinechapter
@@ -6184,8 +6478,8 @@
\KOMAoptions{appendixprefix=false}%
%</book|report>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ab Version~3.10 wird über diese Option auch noch die Erweiterung für das
-% optionale Argument der Gliederungsüberschriften aktiviert und gesteuert.
+% Ab Version~3.10 wird über diese Option auch noch die Erweiterung für das
+% optionale Argument der Gliederungsüberschriften aktiviert und gesteuert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or % optiontotocandhead
\KOMA@kav@remove{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontotocandhead}%
@@ -6206,7 +6500,7 @@
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{optiontohead}%
\scr@activate@xsection{1}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ab Version~3.12 gibt es noch die Möglichkeit, die Überschriftengrößen der
+% Ab Version~3.12 gibt es noch die Möglichkeit, die Überschriftengrößen der
% Standardklassen zu emulieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
\or % standardclasses
@@ -6244,35 +6538,35 @@
\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{big}
%<book|report>\KOMA@kav@add{.\KOMAClassFileName}{headings}{onelinechapter}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A headings
+% \end{option}%^^A headings
%
% \begin{option}{bigheadings}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so; bei
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so; bei
% Verwendung des alten, falschen Namens wird ein Fehler
-% ausgegeben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% ausgegeben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@bigheadings}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{option}{normalheadings}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so; bei
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so; bei
% Verwendung des alten, falschen Namens wird ein Fehler
-% ausgegeben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% ausgegeben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@normalheadings}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{option}{smallheadings}
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so; bei
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1996/01/20}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{die Option heißt nun wirklich so; bei
% Verwendung des alten, falschen Namens wird ein Fehler
-% ausgegeben}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}^^A
+% ausgegeben}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@smallheadings}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/03/10}{entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{bigheadings}{headings=big}
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{normalheadings}{headings=normal}
@@ -6280,12 +6574,12 @@
%</option>
%</class>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@smallheadings
-% \end{option}^^A smallheadings
-% \end{macro}^^A \@normalheadings
-% \end{option}^^A normalheadings
-% \end{macro}^^A \@bigheadings
-% \end{option}^^A bigheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@smallheadings
+% \end{option}%^^A smallheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@normalheadings
+% \end{option}%^^A normalheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@bigheadings
+% \end{option}%^^A bigheadings
%
%
% \iffalse
@@ -6299,6 +6593,6 @@
% end of file `scrkernel-sections.dtx'
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx
index 4aa076b934..717390ec83 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-title.dtx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% \CheckSum{974}
+% \CheckSum{981}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-title.dtx
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-title.dtx 3052 2019-01-01 12:47:38Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-title.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2019-01-01 13:47:38 +0100 (Tue, 01 Jan 2019) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1638 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -76,7 +76,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-title.dtx}
@@ -101,7 +100,7 @@
%
% \section{Die Titelei}
%
-% Die Titelei ist gegenüber den Standardklassen erheblich
+% Die Titelei ist gegenüber den Standardklassen erheblich
% erweitert. Trotzdem kann ein Titel einer Standardklasse unmittelbar
% mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse gesetzt werden. Briefe besitzen allerdings
% keine Titelei im eigentlichen Sinne.
@@ -120,22 +119,22 @@
% \subsection{Optionen der Titelei}
%
% \begin{option}{titlepage}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{als \textsf{keyval}-Option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neuer Wert \texttt{firstiscover}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{interne Speicherung des Werts}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{als \textsf{keyval}-Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neuer Wert \texttt{firstiscover}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{interne Speicherung des Werts}%^^A
% \begin{option}{notitlepage}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Option ist obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}^^A
-% Es werden zei Arten von Titeln unterstützt. Da sind zum einen eigene
-% Titelseiten, zum anderen sogenannte Titelköpfe, also Titel, die nicht eine
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Option ist obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}%^^A
+% Es werden zei Arten von Titeln unterstützt. Da sind zum einen eigene
+% Titelseiten, zum anderen sogenannte Titelköpfe, also Titel, die nicht eine
% eigene Seite erhalten, sondern am Anfang einer Seite stehen. Zwischen den
-% beiden Arten wird mit einer Option umgeschaltet. Ab Version~3.12 unterstützt
-% \KOMAScript{} außerdem die Einstellung \texttt{titlepage=firstiscover} bei
+% beiden Arten wird mit einer Option umgeschaltet. Ab Version~3.12 unterstützt
+% \KOMAScript{} außerdem die Einstellung \texttt{titlepage=firstiscover} bei
% der die erste Titelseite als Umschlagseite gesetzt wird.
% \begin{macro}{\if@titlepage}
% \begin{macro}{\@titlepagetrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@titlepagefalse}
-% Die gewählte Einstellung wird in einem Schalter gespeichert.
+% Die gewählte Einstellung wird in einem Schalter gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\newif\if@titlepage
@@ -196,7 +195,7 @@
}{titlepage}{\if@titlepage true\else false\fi}
%<*extend>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Diese Erweiterung soll dann auch tatsächlich sofort aktiviert werden:
+% Diese Erweiterung soll dann auch tatsächlich sofort aktiviert werden:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\scr@ext@immediate@title{%
\scr@ext@activate{title}%
@@ -213,33 +212,35 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{abstract}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{neue \textsf{keyval}-Option}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{neue \textsf{keyval}-Option}%^^A
% \begin{option}{abstracton}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Option ist obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Option ist obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/13}{deprecated statt standard}%^^A
% \begin{option}{abstractoff}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Option ist obsolet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Option ist obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard statt obsolet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/13}{deprecated statt standard}%^^A
% Obwohl die Zusammenfassung nicht unbedingt auf einer Titelseite steht,
-% gehört sie doch zur Titelei und wird daher hier mit behandelt. Die
-% Zusammenfassung kann mit einem standardmäßigen Titel versehen werden. Der
-% Titel kann aber auch unterdrückt werden.
+% gehört sie doch zur Titelei und wird daher hier mit behandelt. Die
+% Zusammenfassung kann mit einem standardmäßigen Titel versehen werden. Der
+% Titel kann aber auch unterdrückt werden.
% \iffalse
%<*class>
%<*article|report>
% \fi
-% Bei Büchern gibt es keine Zusammenfassung als gesonderte Umgebung. Als
-% Ersatz kann bei Büchern auf \cs{addchap*} zurückgegriffen werden.
+% Bei Büchern gibt es keine Zusammenfassung als gesonderte Umgebung. Als
+% Ersatz kann bei Büchern auf \cs{addchap*} zurückgegriffen werden.
% \begin{macro}{\if@abstrt}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{wird von \cs{KOMA@ifkey} definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/10}{wird von \cs{KOMA@ifkey} definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@abstrttrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@abstrtfalse}
% Die Enscheidung, ob der Titel der Zusammenfassung gesetzt werden soll, wird
% in einem Schalter gespeichert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\KOMA@ifkey{abstract}{@abstrt}
-\KOMA@DeclareStandardOption{abstracton}{abstract=true}
-\KOMA@DeclareStandardOption{abstractoff}{abstract=false}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{abstracton}{abstract=true}
+\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption{abstractoff}{abstract=false}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
@@ -272,9 +273,9 @@
% \begin{macro}{\subject}
% \begin{macro}{\@subject}
% \begin{macro}{\subtitle}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{neue Möglichkeit}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{neue Möglichkeit}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@subtitle}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\publishers}
% \begin{macro}{\@publishers}
% \begin{macro}{\uppertitleback}
@@ -284,11 +285,11 @@
% \begin{macro}{\dedication}
% \begin{macro}{\@dedication}
% Da der Titel im \KOMAScript{} Paket wesentlich mehr Angaben erlaubt
-% als bei den Standardklassen, gibt es natürlich auch einige Befehle,
-% mit denen diese gesetzt werden können. Alle zusätzlichen Angaben
-% sind optional und können auch weggelassen werden. In diesem Fall
+% als bei den Standardklassen, gibt es natürlich auch einige Befehle,
+% mit denen diese gesetzt werden können. Alle zusätzlichen Angaben
+% sind optional und können auch weggelassen werden. In diesem Fall
% werden Leerfelder verwendet. Bis auf \cs{subject} sind alle
-% Zusatzbefehle \cs{long} deklariert, können also ganze Absätze
+% Zusatzbefehle \cs{long} deklariert, können also ganze Absätze
% enthalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<package&extend>\scr@ext@addto@activateable{title}{%
@@ -358,17 +359,17 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\next@tpage}
-% \changes{v2.3b}{1995/07/24}{\cs{null} entfernt.}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{newpage} durch \cs{clearpage} ersetzt}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{Fußnoten der letzten Titelseite ausgeben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{Fußnoten für die nächste Titelseite
-% initialisieren}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{\cs{setparsizes} bzw. entsprechende Angaben
-% für die Längen eingefügt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3b}{1995/07/24}{\cs{null} entfernt.}
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{newpage} durch \cs{clearpage} ersetzt}
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{Fußnoten der letzten Titelseite ausgeben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{Fußnoten für die nächste Titelseite
+% initialisieren}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{\cs{setparsizes} bzw. entsprechende Angaben
+% für die Längen eingefügt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\next@tdpage}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{\cs{titlepage@restore} hinzugefügt}
-% Innerhalb eines Titels auf die nächste Seite bzw. nächste rechte Seite
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{\cs{titlepage@restore} hinzugefügt}
+% Innerhalb eines Titels auf die nächste Seite bzw. nächste rechte Seite
% umschalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\next@tpage}{%
@@ -389,53 +390,53 @@
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{Schmutztitel bei Titelkopf in eigene
-% Anweisung verlagert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{Verwendung von \cs{next@tdpage}}^^A
+% Anweisung verlagert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{Verwendung von \cs{next@tdpage}}%^^A
% Mit dieser Anweisung wird der Titel generiert, dessen Inhalt zuvor
% gesetzt wurde. Es muss unterschieden werden, ob der Titel auf einer
% eigenen Titelseite oder als Seitenkopf erstellt werden soll. Der
-% \KOMAScript-Titel ist u.\,U. sehr groß. Im Fall dass diverse
+% \KOMAScript-Titel ist u.\,U. sehr groß. Im Fall dass diverse
% Zusatzelemente verwendet werden, sollte eigentlich immer eine
% Titelseite verwendet werden.%
% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/10/29}{das Hilfskonstrukt \cs{@maketitle}
-% wurde aus der Unterscheidung herausgenommen (für den Fall, dass
-% \cs{maketitle} von einem Paket überladen wird)}^^A
+% wurde aus der Unterscheidung herausgenommen (für den Fall, dass
+% \cs{maketitle} von einem Paket überladen wird)}%^^A
% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\texttt{plus} durch \cs{@plus}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\texttt{fill} durch \cs{fill}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v2.3d}{1995/08/19}{\cs{fill} durch \texttt{fill}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{vfil} durch \cs{vfill} ersetzt}^^A
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{vfil} durch \cs{vfill} ersetzt}%^^A
% \changes{v2.3b}{1995/07/24}{Umbruch bei \cs{@extratitle} in der
-% beidseitigen Titelseite korrigiert}^^A
+% beidseitigen Titelseite korrigiert}%^^A
% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{footnote} funktioniert nun auch
-% im Titel}^^A
+% im Titel}%^^A
% \changes{v2.4}{1996/02/25}{\cs{footnote} funktioniert nun
-% wirklich im Titel}^^A
+% wirklich im Titel}%^^A
% \changes{v2.4h}{1996/11/09}{egal ob der Titel auf eine Extraseite
% kommt oder nicht, \cs{@title} wird mit \cs{sectfont} gesetzt,
-% wobei die Größe neuerdings danach eingestellt wird}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{symbolische Fußnoten und
-% Fußnotensymbolbreiten von 0\,pt zur besseren Zentrierung des
-% Autors sind auch bei Titelseiten angebracht}^^A
+% wobei die Größe neuerdings danach eingestellt wird}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{symbolische Fußnoten und
+% Fußnotensymbolbreiten von 0\,pt zur besseren Zentrierung des
+% Autors sind auch bei Titelseiten angebracht}%^^A
% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{\cs{titlefont} an Stelle von
-% \cs{sectfont}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Absatzgrundeinstellungen}^^A
+% \cs{sectfont}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Absatzgrundeinstellungen}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/08/31}{Vakatseiten in der Titelei immer im
-% Seitenstil \texttt{empty}}^^A
+% Seitenstil \texttt{empty}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.04a}{2009/07/14}{die Unterscheidung, ob Titelseite oder
% Titelkopf sollte erst in \cs{maketitle} und nicht schon bei dessen
-% Definition erfolgen}^^A
+% Definition erfolgen}%^^A
% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{Verwendung neuer Font-Elemente
% \texttt{titlehead}, \texttt{author}, \texttt{date}, \texttt{publishers},
-% \texttt{dedication}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{Verwendung von \cs{@frontispiece}}^^A
+% \texttt{dedication}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{Verwendung von \cs{@frontispiece}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<package&extend>\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
\newcommand*\maketitle[1][1]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Da ab Version~3.12 auch mehrere \cs{maketitle} möglich sind, muss ggf. für
+% Da ab Version~3.12 auch mehrere \cs{maketitle} möglich sind, muss ggf. für
% eine korrekte Definition von \cs{and} gesorgt werden:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum \csname scr@v@3.12\endcsname>\scr@compatibility\relax
@@ -447,7 +448,7 @@
}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% Es folgt die eigentliche Definition, die davon abhängt, ob wir uns im
+% Es folgt die eigentliche Definition, die davon abhängt, ob wir uns im
% doppelseitigen Modus befinden oder nicht.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@titlepage
@@ -457,12 +458,14 @@
%<!extend> #1%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{Berücksichtigung von
-% \texttt{titlepage!=firstiscover}}^^A
-% Ab Version~3.12 gibt es hier eine Sonderbehandlung für die erste Titelseite,
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{Berücksichtigung von
+% \texttt{titlepage!=firstiscover}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/18}{immer \cs{global} beim Löschen von
+% \cs{@thanks}}%^^A
+% Ab Version~3.12 gibt es hier eine Sonderbehandlung für die erste Titelseite,
% falls es sich dabei um eine Umschlagsseite handeln soll. In diesem Fall
-% werden die Maße der Seite verändert, was später per \cs{titlepage@restore}
-% ggf. wieder zurückgenommen wird.
+% werden die Maße der Seite verändert, was später per \cs{titlepage@restore}
+% ggf. wieder zurückgenommen wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@titlepageiscoverpage
\edef\titlepage@restore{%
@@ -545,13 +548,13 @@
{\usekomafont{publishers}{\@publishers \par}}%
\vskip 3em
\end{center}\par
- \@thanks\let\@thanks\@empty
+ \@thanks\global\let\@thanks\@empty
\vfill\null
\if@twoside
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{Rückseite wird nur bei Bedarf ausgegeben.}^^A
-% Ab Version~3.12 wird die Rückseite der Titelseite nur noch bei Bedarf
-% ausgegeben. Das gilt aber nur, wenn keine Kompatibilität mit früheren
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{Rückseite wird nur bei Bedarf ausgegeben.}%^^A
+% Ab Version~3.12 wird die Rückseite der Titelseite nur noch bei Bedarf
+% ausgegeben. Das gilt aber nur, wenn keine Kompatibilität mit früheren
% Versionen verlangt ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempswatrue
@@ -570,11 +573,11 @@
\begin{minipage}[b]{\textwidth}
\@lowertitleback
\end{minipage}\par
- \@thanks\let\@thanks\@empty
+ \@thanks\global\let\@thanks\@empty
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.27}{2019/01/01}{Warnung für nicht leere Titelrückseite bei
-% einseitigen Dokumenten}^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/01/01}{Warnung für nicht leere Titelrückseite bei
+% einseitigen Dokumenten}%^^A
% Bei einseitigen Dokumenten werden eventuell gesetzte Inhalte von
% \cs{uppertitleback} oder \cs{lowertitleback} nicht ausgegeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -601,10 +604,10 @@
\next@tdpage\null\vfill
{\centering\usekomafont{dedication}{\@dedication \par}}%
\vskip \z@ \@plus3fill
- \@thanks\let\@thanks\@empty
+ \@thanks\global\let\@thanks\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/31}{Nach der Widmung kein \cs{next@tdpage},
-% sondern nur \cs{cleardoubleemptypage}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/31}{Nach der Widmung kein \cs{next@tdpage},
+% sondern nur \cs{cleardoubleemptypage}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\cleardoubleemptypage
\fi
@@ -615,25 +618,25 @@
\ifx\titlepage@restore\relax\else\clearpage\titlepage@restore\fi
\end{titlepage}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Verwendung von \cs{@makefnmark} in
-% \cs{@makefntext}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Definition von \cs{@makefnmark} und
-% \cs{@makefntext} unabhängig von math}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3e}{1995/08/30}{optionales Argument bei der
-% einseitigen Version erlauben und ignorieren}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{mehrfach \cs{null} bei
-% \cs{next@tpage} ergänzt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{es ist nicht mehr notwendig
-% \cs{\@makefntext} umzudefinieren, stattdessen wird nur
-% \cs{\@makefnmark} umdefiniert}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{titlepagestyle} statt
-% \texttt{plain}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{Leerzeichenfehler behoben}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{Schmutztitel wird nur ausgegeben, wenn er
-% nicht leer ist}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{\cs{next@tdpage} aus \cs{@maketitle} und
-% \cs{@makeextrattitle} entfernt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn nicht leer}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Verwendung von \cs{@makefnmark} in
+% \cs{@makefntext}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{Definition von \cs{@makefnmark} und
+% \cs{@makefntext} unabhängig von math}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3e}{1995/08/30}{optionales Argument bei der
+% einseitigen Version erlauben und ignorieren}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{mehrfach \cs{null} bei
+% \cs{next@tpage} ergänzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{es ist nicht mehr notwendig \cs{\@makefntext}
+% umzudefinieren, stattdessen wird nur \cs{\@makefnmark} umdefiniert}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8d}{2001/07/05}{\cs{titlepagestyle} statt
+% \texttt{plain}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{Leerzeichenfehler behoben}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{Schmutztitel wird nur ausgegeben, wenn er
+% nicht leer ist}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{\cs{next@tdpage} aus \cs{@maketitle} und
+% \cs{@makeextrattitle} entfernt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/08/25}{Seitenstil nur ändern wenn nicht leer}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/18}{\cs{@thanks} nach Benutzung löschen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\else
\par
@@ -715,23 +718,23 @@
\@maketitle
\fi
\ifx\titlepagestyle\@empty\else\thispagestyle{\titlepagestyle}\fi
- \@thanks
+ \@thanks\global\let\@thanks\@empty
\endgroup
\fi
\setcounter{footnote}{0}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{die Titelei wird nur noch bei Kompatibilität
-% zu früheren Versionen zerstört}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{die Titelei wird nur noch bei Kompatibilität
+% zu früheren Versionen zerstört}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum \csname scr@v@3.12\endcsname>\scr@compatibility\relax
\let\thanks\relax
\let\maketitle\relax
\let\@maketitle\relax
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{global}\cs{let}
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{Verwendung von \cs{global}\cs{let}
% statt \cs{gdef}, um Speicher zu sparen}
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{@date} und \cs{title}
-% u.\,ä. ebenfalls löschen, um Speicher zu sparen}
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{@date} und \cs{title}
+% u.\,ä. ebenfalls löschen, um Speicher zu sparen}
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\let\@thanks\@empty
\global\let\@author\@empty
@@ -761,17 +764,17 @@
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
-% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Absatzgrundeinstellungen}^^A
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2012/02/14}{Schmutztitel in eigene Anweisung verlagert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{\cs{next@tdpage} aus \cs{@maketitle}
-% entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95c}{2006/08/21}{Absatzgrundeinstellungen}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2012/02/14}{Schmutztitel in eigene Anweisung verlagert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{\cs{next@tdpage} aus \cs{@maketitle}
+% entfernt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@makeextratitle}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{neue Anweisung (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{\cs{next@tdpage} aus \cs{@makeextrattitle}
-% entfernt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/14}{neue Anweisung (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/03/03}{\cs{next@tdpage} aus \cs{@makeextrattitle}
+% entfernt}%^^A
% Damit wird im Fall des Titelkopfes die eigentliche Arbeit geleistet.
% \begin{macro}{\@makefrontispiece}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@makeextratitle}{%
\ifx\@extratitle\@empty \else
@@ -830,8 +833,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\coverpagetopmargin}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}^^A
-% Oberer Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}%^^A
+% Oberer Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\coverpagetopmargin}{%
\dimexpr \topmargin+1in\relax
@@ -840,8 +843,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\coverpagebottommargin}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}^^A
-% Unterer Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}%^^A
+% Unterer Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\coverpagebottommargin}{%
2\dimexpr\coverpagetopmargin\relax
@@ -850,8 +853,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\coverpageleftmargin}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}^^A
-% Linker Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}%^^A
+% Linker Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\coverpageleftmargin}{%
\dimexpr \evensidemargin+1in\relax
@@ -860,15 +863,15 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\coverpagerightmargin}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}^^A
-% Oberer Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/21}{neu}%^^A
+% Oberer Rand für Umschlagsseiten.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\coverpagerightmargin}{\coverpageleftmargin}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Umgebung für die Titelseite}
+% \subsection{Umgebung für die Titelseite}
%
% \begin{environment}{titlepage}
% Die Titelseite bedarf ebenfalls einer gesonderter Umgebung. Beim
@@ -894,25 +897,25 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
-% Im Fall von \textsf{scrextend} muss jetzt das Kürzel \emph{title} beendet
+% Im Fall von \textsf{scrextend} muss jetzt das Kürzel \emph{title} beendet
% werden:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<package&extend>}\csname scr@ext@immediate@title\endcsname
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \subsection{Fonts für den Titel}
+% \subsection{Fonts für den Titel}
%
% \begin{macro}{\titlefont}
-% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8p}{2001/09/22}{neu}%^^A
% Wie oben zu sehen ist, wird in der Titelei ein eigenes Schriftmakro
% verwendet. Dieses ist als internes Makro zu verstehen. Der Anwender
% sollte stattdessen auf das entsprechende Element zugreifen (siehe
% unten).
% \begin{macro}{\subject@font}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/26}{jetzt auch bei \textsf{scrbook},
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/26}{jetzt auch bei \textsf{scrbook},
% \textsf{scrreprt} und \textsf{scrartcl}}
-% Ebenso verhält es sich mit den \emph{Subject} im Titel. Hier ist
+% Ebenso verhält es sich mit den \emph{Subject} im Titel. Hier ist
% aber von vornherein ein internes Makro definiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\titlefont{\sectfont}%
@@ -922,54 +925,54 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{subtitle}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/06/20}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{subtitle}{\usekomafont{title}\large}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{titlehead}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{titlehead}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{author}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{author}{\Large}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{date}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{date}{\Large}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{publishers}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{publishers}{\Large}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{KOMAfont}{dedication}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/29}{neu}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newkomafont{dedication}{\Large}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{KOMAfont}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@title}
-% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{title}}
+% \changes{v2.8o}{2001/09/14}{neues Element \texttt{title}}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@subject}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{neues Element \texttt{subject}}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/26}{jetzt auch bei \textsf{scrbook},
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{neues Element \texttt{subject}}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/26}{jetzt auch bei \textsf{scrbook},
% \textsf{scrreprt} und \textsf{scrartcl}}
-% Die beiden Elemente, deren Schrift geändert werden kann.
+% Die beiden Elemente, deren Schrift geändert werden kann.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@title}{\titlefont}%
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@subject}{\subject@font}%
@@ -978,30 +981,30 @@
% \end{macro}
%
%
-% \subsection{Umgebung für die Zusammenfassung}
+% \subsection{Umgebung für die Zusammenfassung}
%
% \begin{environment}{abstract}
-% \textsf{scrartcl} und \textsf{scrreprt} bieten die Möglichkeit einer
+% \textsf{scrartcl} und \textsf{scrreprt} bieten die Möglichkeit einer
% Zusammenfassung, eines sogenannten \emph{Abstracts}. Wenn eine
% Titelseite verlangt wurde, wird auch die Zusammenfassung auf eine
% eigene Seite gesetzt. \textsf{scrbook} kennt keine Zusammenfassung
-% dieser Art. In Büchern werden Zusammenfassungen üblicherweise mit
+% dieser Art. In Büchern werden Zusammenfassungen üblicherweise mit
% Kapitelcharakter gesetzt.
% \iffalse
%<*class>
%<*article|report>
% \fi
-% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{@endparpenalty} zur Verhinderung
-% eines Seitenumbruchs nach dem Abstract-Kopf eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{@beginparpenalty} zur
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1995/07/08}{\cs{@endparpenalty} zur Verhinderung
+% eines Seitenumbruchs nach dem Abstract-Kopf eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1996/01/14}{\cs{@beginparpenalty} zur
% Verhinderung eines Seitenumbruchs vor dem Abstract-Kopf
-% eingefügt}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7a}{2001/01/04}{statt \cs{section*} wird nun
+% eingefügt}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7a}{2001/01/04}{statt \cs{section*} wird nun
% \cs{addsec*} verwendet, damit die Kolumnentitel korrekt
-% behandelt werden}^^A
-% \changes{v3.04a}{2009/07/14}{die Unterscheidung, ob Titelseite oder
+% behandelt werden}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.04a}{2009/07/14}{die Unterscheidung, ob Titelseite oder
% Titelkopf sollte erst in der Umgebung und nicht schon bei deren
-% Definition erfolgen}^^A
+% Definition erfolgen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{abstract}{%
\if@titlepage
@@ -1037,14 +1040,14 @@
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}^^A abstract
+% \end{environment}%^^A abstract
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
% Name der Zusammenfassung.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\abstractname{Abstract}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \abstractname
+% \end{macro}%^^A \abstractname
%
% \iffalse
%</article|report>
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
index 04dec8e47f..b0eba60c05 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{1380}
+% \CheckSum{1934}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2015-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2015-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2015-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2015-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx 3011 2018-08-29 07:35:17Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
% The runs of run-time file generation:
%<preidentify>%%% (run: preidentify)
% - everything that is needed before selfidentification of resulting files
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-08-29 09:35:17 +0200 (Wed, 29 Aug 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 2254 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -93,7 +93,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}
@@ -116,9 +115,9 @@
% \section{Verzeichnisstile}
%
% Verzeichnisstile werden derzeit nur in Kooperation mit Gliederungsstilen
-% untersützt. In Zukunft soll das aber mal anders werden. Dann sollen
-% Verzeichnisstile Teil der Grundfunktionalität für Verzeichnisse (Paket
-% \textsf{tocbasic}) werden und auch unabhängig von Gliederungsstilen
+% untersützt. In Zukunft soll das aber mal anders werden. Dann sollen
+% Verzeichnisstile Teil der Grundfunktionalität für Verzeichnisse (Paket
+% \textsf{tocbasic}) werden und auch unabhängig von Gliederungsstilen
% einsetzbar sein.
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
@@ -126,11 +125,11 @@
% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/13}{neu und nur bei Vorhandensein verwendet}
%
%
-% \subsection{Einstellungen unabhängig von Verzeichnisstilen und doch
-% Grundlage für diese}
+% \subsection{Einstellungen unabhängig von Verzeichnisstilen und doch
+% Grundlage für diese}
%
% Bis \KOMAScript~3.20 waren die Befehle, die hier definiert werden, Teil der
-% KOMA-Script-Klassen. Allerdings zeigt sich, dass es für die Definition von
+% KOMA-Script-Klassen. Allerdings zeigt sich, dass es für die Definition von
% Verzeichnisstilen von Vorteil ist, wenn diese Definitionen im Paket
% vorhanden sind.
%
@@ -139,14 +138,14 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/10}{\cs{numberline} wird indirekt über
-% \cs{scr@numberline} definiert}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/10}{\cs{numberline} wird indirekt über
+% \cs{scr@numberline} definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@numberline}
-% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{\cs{numberline} umdefiniert}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{Verwendung von \cs{numberline@prefix} und
-% \cs{numberline@postfix}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{use \cs{numberline@numberformat} only, if the
-% argument expands to a non-empty string}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1995/08/06}{\cs{numberline} umdefiniert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{Verwendung von \cs{numberline@prefix} und
+% \cs{numberline@postfix}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{use \cs{numberline@numberformat} only, if the
+% argument expands to a non-empty string}%^^A
% Dieses Makro wird indirekt im Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet und muss
% umdefiniert werden, um Duden, 20.~Auflage, Regel~5 und Regel~6 zu
% implementieren.
@@ -163,11 +162,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\usetocbasicnumberline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{neu}%^^A
% Dieses Makro testet, ob \cs{numberline} auf \cs{scr@numberline}
-% basiert. Falls das nicht der Fall ist, führt es das optionale Argument aus
-% und führt dann eine entsprechende Umdefinierung statt. Falls es jedoch der
-% Fall ist, lässt es alles unverändert.
+% basiert. Falls das nicht der Fall ist, führt es das optionale Argument aus
+% und führt dann eine entsprechende Umdefinierung statt. Falls es jedoch der
+% Fall ist, lässt es alles unverändert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\usetocbasicnumberline}[1][%
\PackageInfo{tocbasic}{Using my definition of `\string\numberline'}%
@@ -176,9 +175,9 @@
\begingroup
\def\scr@numberline##1{\global\@tempswafalse}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \cs{@tempdima} ist üblicherweise bei \cs{numberline} die Breite der Nummer.
-% Damit zu kleine Werte nicht zu einem Problem werden können, nehme ich hier
-% gleich mal einen richtig großen Wert.
+% \cs{@tempdima} ist üblicherweise bei \cs{numberline} die Breite der Nummer.
+% Damit zu kleine Werte nicht zu einem Problem werden können, nehme ich hier
+% gleich mal einen richtig großen Wert.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempdima\maxdimen
\sbox\@tempboxa{\numberline{0}}%
@@ -186,27 +185,27 @@
\if@tempswa #1\renewcommand*{\numberline}[1]{\scr@numberline{##1}}\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \usetocbasicnumberline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \usetocbasicnumberline
% \begin{macro}{\numberline@prefix}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Das ist in der Voreinstellung einfach leer. Es könnte verwendet werden, um
-% etwas vor die Nummer zu setzen oder die Nummer rechtsbündig zu setzen.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Das ist in der Voreinstellung einfach leer. Es könnte verwendet werden, um
+% etwas vor die Nummer zu setzen oder die Nummer rechtsbündig zu setzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numberline@prefix}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline@prefix
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline@prefix
% \begin{macro}{\numberline@postfix}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}
% Das ist in der Voreinstellung einfach \cs{hfil} und dient dazu die Nummer
-% linksbündig zu platzieren.
+% linksbündig zu platzieren.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numberline@postfix}{\hfil}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline@postfix
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline@postfix
% \begin{macro}{\numberline@numberformat}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{don't output anything, if argument expands to
-% an empty string}^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{don't output anything, if argument expands to
+% an empty string}%^^A
% Das dient in der Voreinstellung dazu, Regel~5 und 6 aus der 20.~Auflage des
% DUDENs umzusetzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -215,36 +214,36 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\numberline@numberprefix}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{neu (intern)}
% Wird verwendet, um innerhalb von \cs{numberline@numberformat} der Nummer
-% einen Präfix voran zu stellen. Im Gegensatz zu \cs{numberline@prefix} wird
+% einen Präfix voran zu stellen. Im Gegensatz zu \cs{numberline@prefix} wird
% dieser nur ausgegeben, wenn das Argument von \cs{numberline@numberformat},
% also auch das Argument von \cs{numberline} nicht leer ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numberline@numberprefix}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline@numberprefix
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline@numberprefix
% \begin{macro}{\numberline@numberpostfix}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/15}{neu (intern)}
% Wird verwendet, um innerhalb von \cs{numberline@numberformat} der Nummer
-% einen Postfix anzuhängen. Im Gegensatz zu \cs{numberline@prefix} wird
+% einen Postfix anzuhängen. Im Gegensatz zu \cs{numberline@prefix} wird
% dieser nur ausgegeben, wenn das Argument von \cs{numberline@numberformat},
% also auch das Argument von \cs{numberline} nicht leer ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numberline@numberpostfix}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline@numberpostfix
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline@numberformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline@numberpostfix
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline@numberformat
% \begin{macro}{\numberline@box}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/18}{neu (intern)}
% Das dient in der Voreinstellung dazu, die Gliederungsnummer in eine Box zu
% setzen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\numberline@box}[1]{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{#1}}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline@box
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@numberline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline@box
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@numberline
%
% \iffalse
%</package>
@@ -256,18 +255,18 @@
\let\numberline\scr@numberline
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \numberline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \numberline
%
% \iffalse
%</class>
% \fi
%
-% \subsection{Grundlagen für Verzeichniseintragsstile}
+% \subsection{Grundlagen für Verzeichniseintragsstile}
%
% Ab \KOMAScript~3.20 halten Stile Einzug in die Verzeichnisse. Der erste
-% Schritt dabei sind die Stile der Verzeichniseinträge. Jeder Stil besteht aus
+% Schritt dabei sind die Stile der Verzeichniseinträge. Jeder Stil besteht aus
% einer Anweisung, mit der ein Verzeichnisbefehl definiert wird und
-% zugehörigen Optionen. Die Optionen dienen dazu, Einstellungen für die
+% zugehörigen Optionen. Die Optionen dienen dazu, Einstellungen für die
% einzelnen Verzeichnisbefehle vorzunehmen.
%
% \iffalse
@@ -275,7 +274,7 @@
% \fi
%
% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/17}{Verzeichnisstile bekommen das
-% \texttt{KOMAarg}-Mitglied \texttt{.dte}}^^A
+% \texttt{KOMAarg}-Mitglied \texttt{.dte}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\DefineFamily{KOMAarg}
@@ -284,28 +283,28 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryOption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/04/10}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/04/10}{neu (intern)}
% Die Definition der Optionen geschieht mit einer einheitlichen
-% Schnittstelle. Wichtig dabei ist, dass hier nicht tatsächlich die Optionen
+% Schnittstelle. Wichtig dabei ist, dass hier nicht tatsächlich die Optionen
% definiert werden, sondern eine Anweisung, die ihrerseits die Optionen bei
% Bedarf definiert. Ein solcher Bedarf besteht beispielsweise bei der
% Definition des Eintragsbefehls selbst. Er besteht aber auch innerhalb von
% \cs{DeclareSectionCommand}, weil diese Anweisung ebenfalls indirekt
-% Verzeichniseinträge definiert und deshalb die Optionen auswerten können
+% Verzeichniseinträge definiert und deshalb die Optionen auswerten können
% soll. Es gibt folgende Parameter:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Stil}: \meta{String},] Name des Eintragsstils
% \item[\marg{Option}: \meta{String},] Name der Option
-% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option abhängig von der
+% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option abhängig von der
% \meta{Definition}
% \item[\marg{Definition}: \meta{Code},] Definition der Option
% \end{description}
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryOptionWithoutDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryOptionWithDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}
% Da mit einem optionalen Argument an Position 3 gearbeitet wird, werden zwei
-% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryOption}[2]{%
@@ -326,20 +325,22 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryOptionWithoutDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryOptionWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryOptionWithoutDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryOptionWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryOption
%
% \begin{macro}{\@RelaxTOCEntryOptions}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/04/10}{neu (intern)}
-% Setzt alle Optionen der aktuellen Do-Liste zurück auf \cs{relax}.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/04/10}{neu (intern)}
+% Setzt alle Optionen der aktuellen Do-Liste zurück auf \cs{relax}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@RelaxTOCEntryOptions}{%
\begingroup
\def\do@endgroup{\endgroup}%
\def\do##1{%
- \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{\RelaxFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{##1}}%
+ \l@addto@macro\do@endgroup{%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{##1}%
+ }%
\scr@dte@gobbleopt
}%
\scr@dte@doopts
@@ -348,31 +349,46 @@
\newcommand{\scr@dte@gobbleopt}[1][]{}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@RelaxTOCEntryOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@RelaxTOCEntryOptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Verwendet \cs{DefineTOCEntryOption}, um eine Option zu definieren, die ein
-% Längenmacro definiert. Es gibt folgende Parameter:
+% Längenmacro definiert. Es gibt folgende Parameter:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Stil}: \meta{String},] Name des Eintragsstils
% \item[\marg{Option}: \meta{String},] Name der Option
-% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
-% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
+% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
+% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
% \item[\marg{Postfix}: \meta{String},] Postfix des zu definierenden Makros
-% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
+% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
% \item[\oarg{Init}: \meta{Code},] Initialisierung der Option
% \end{description}
-% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
-% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt.
+% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
+% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt. Gleichzeitig wird auch noch eine
+% Kopieroption definiert, die sich von der eigentlichen Option dadurch
+% unterscheidet, dass dem Gleichheitszeichen ein Doppelpunkt voran gestellt
+% ist. Der Wert der Kopieroption ist der Name eines anderen Eintrags, dessen
+% Einstellung dann kopiert wird, sofern dieser Eintrag eine entsprechende
+% Einstellung hat.
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithoutDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/03}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Addieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/03}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Addieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionMacro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/10}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryAddLengthOptionMacro}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Da mit einem optionalen Argument an Position 3 gearbeitet wird, werden drei
-% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}[2]{%
@@ -385,6 +401,21 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}{%
\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionMacro{#2}{#3}{#4}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#3##1#4}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #3\scr@dte@current#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #3##1#4\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2+}{%
+ \@DefineTOCEntryAddLengthOptionMacro{#2+}{#3}{#4}{##1}%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}%
+ \noexpand\do{#2:}\noexpand\do{#2+}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithDefault}{}
\def\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithDefault#1#2[#3]#4#5#6{%
@@ -392,6 +423,21 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[{#3}]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionMacro{#2}{#4}{#5}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#4##1#5}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #4\scr@dte@current#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #4##1#5\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2+}{%
+ \@DefineTOCEntryAddLengthOptionMacro{#2+}{#4}{#5}{##1}%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}%
+ \noexpand\do{#2:}\noexpand\do{#2+}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionMacro}[4]{%
\protected@edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -406,36 +452,72 @@
\fi
\fi
}
+\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryAddLengthOptionMacro}[4]{%
+ \@ifundefined{#2\scr@dte@current#3}{%
+ \FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ }{%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\FamilySetLength{KOMAarg}{#1}{\noexpand\@tempskipa}{#4}%
+ }\reserved@a
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \ifscr@dte@expandtopt
+ \expandafter\edef\csname #2\scr@dte@current#3\endcsname{%
+ \the\glueexpr\@tempskipa
+ +\csname #2\scr@dte@current#3\endcsname\relax}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\protected@edef\csname #2\scr@dte@current#3\endcsname{%
+ \the\glueexpr #4%
+ +\csname #2\scr@dte@current#3\endcsname\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionMacro
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithoutDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryAddLengthOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOptionWithoutDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryLengthOption
%
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
% Verwendet \cs{DefineTOCEntryOption}, um eine Option zu definieren, die ein
% Nummernmacro definiert. Es gibt folgende Parameter:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Stil}: \meta{String},] Name des Eintragsstils
% \item[\marg{Option}: \meta{String},] Name der Option
-% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
-% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
+% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
+% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
% \item[\marg{Postfix}: \meta{String},] Postfix des zu definierenden Makros
-% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
+% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
% \item[\oarg{Init}: \meta{Code},] Initialisierung der Option
% \end{description}
-% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
-% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt.
+% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
+% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt. Gleichzeitig wird auch noch eine
+% Kopieroption definiert, die sich von der eigentlichen Option dadurch
+% unterscheidet, dass dem Gleichheitszeichen ein Doppelpunkt voran gestellt
+% ist. Der Wert der Kopieroption ist der Name eines anderen Eintrags, dessen
+% Einstellung dann kopiert wird, sofern dieser Eintrag eine entsprechende
+% Einstellung hat.
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithoutDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/03}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Addieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/03}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Addieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionMacro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryAddNumberOptionMacro}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/03}{neu (intern)}
% Da mit einem optionalen Argument an Position 3 gearbeitet wird, werden drei
-% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}[2]{%
@@ -448,6 +530,21 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}{%
\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionMacro{#2}{#3}{#4}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#3##1#4}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #3\scr@dte@current#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #3##1#4\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2+}{%
+ \@DefineTOCEntryAddNumberOptionMacro{#2+}{#3}{#4}{##1}%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}%
+ \noexpand\do{#2:}\noexpand\do{#2+}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithDefault}{}
\def\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithDefault#1#2[#3]#4#5#6{%
@@ -455,6 +552,21 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[{#3}]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionMacro{#2}{#4}{#5}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#4##1#5}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #4\scr@dte@current#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #4##1#5\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2+}{%
+ \@DefineTOCEntryAddNumberOptionMacro{#2+}{#4}{#5}{##1}%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}%
+ \noexpand\do{#2:}\noexpand\do{#2+}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionMacro}[4]{%
\protected@edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -463,36 +575,60 @@
}{#4}%
}\reserved@a
}
+\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryAddNumberOptionMacro}[4]{%
+ \@ifundefined{#2\scr@dte@current#3}{%
+ \FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue
+ }{%
+ \FamilySetCounterMacro{KOMAarg}{#1}{%
+ \reserved@a
+ }{#4}%
+ \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ \expandafter\edef\csname #2\scr@dte@current#3\endcsname{%
+ \the\numexpr \reserved@a+\csname #2\scr@dte@current#3\endcsname\relax
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionMacro
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithoutDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryAddNumberOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOptionWithoutDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryNumberOption
%
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
% Verwendet \cs{DefineTOCEntryOption}, um eine Option zu definieren, die einen
% Schalter definiert. Es gibt folgende Parameter:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Stil}: \meta{String},] Name des Eintragsstils
% \item[\marg{Option}: \meta{String},] Name der Option
-% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
-% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
+% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
+% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
% \item[\marg{Postfix}: \meta{String},] Postfix des zu definierenden Makros
-% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
+% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
% \item[\oarg{Init}: \meta{Code},] Initialisierung der Option
% \end{description}
-% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
-% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt.
+% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
+% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt. Gleichzeitig wird auch noch eine
+% Kopieroption definiert, die sich von der eigentlichen Option dadurch
+% unterscheidet, dass dem Gleichheitszeichen ein Doppelpunkt voran gestellt
+% ist. Der Wert der Kopieroption ist der Name eines anderen Eintrags, dessen
+% Einstellung dann kopiert wird, sofern dieser Eintrag eine entsprechende
+% Einstellung hat.
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithoutDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionMacro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
% Da mit einem optionalen Argument an Position 3 gearbeitet wird, werden drei
-% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}[2]{%
@@ -507,6 +643,17 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[true]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionMacro{#2}{#3}{#4}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{if#3##1#4}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname if#3\scr@dte@current#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname if#3##1#4\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithDefault}{}
\def\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithDefault#1#2[#3]#4#5#6{%
@@ -516,6 +663,17 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[{#3}]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionMacro{#2}{#4}{#5}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{if#4##1#5}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname if#4\scr@dte@current#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname if#4##1#5\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionMacro}[4]{%
\@ifundefined{if#2\scr@dte@current#3}{%
@@ -525,34 +683,43 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionMacro
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithoutDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBoolOptionWithoutDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption
%
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryIfOption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/06}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/06}{neu (intern)}
% Verwendet \cs{DefineTOCEntryOption}, um eine Option zu definieren, die eine
% If-Anweisung definiert. Die Option selbst ist dabei eine Schalter-Option. Es
% gibt folgende Parameter:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Stil}: \meta{String},] Name des Eintragsstils
% \item[\marg{Option}: \meta{String},] Name der Option
-% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
-% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
+% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
+% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
% \item[\marg{Postfix}: \meta{String},] Postfix des zu definierenden Makros
-% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
+% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
% \end{description}
-% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
-% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt.
+% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
+% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt. Gleichzeitig wird auch noch eine
+% Kopieroption definiert, die sich von der eigentlichen Option dadurch
+% unterscheidet, dass dem Gleichheitszeichen ein Doppelpunkt voran gestellt
+% ist. Der Wert der Kopieroption ist der Name eines anderen Eintrags, dessen
+% Einstellung dann kopiert wird, sofern dieser Eintrag eine entsprechende
+% Einstellung hat.
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithoutDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionMacro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
% Da mit einem optionalen Argument an Position 3 gearbeitet wird, werden drei
-% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryIfOption}[2]{%
@@ -565,6 +732,17 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[true]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionMacro{#2}{#3}{#4}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{If#3##1#4}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname If#3\scr@dte@current#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname If#3##1#4\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithDefault}{}
\def\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithDefault#1#2[#3]#4#5#6{%
@@ -572,6 +750,17 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[{#3}]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionMacro{#2}{#4}{#5}{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{If#4##1#5}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname If#4\scr@dte@current#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname If#4##1#5\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
}
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionMacro}[4]{%
\FamilySetBool{KOMAarg}{#1}{@tempswa}{#4}%
@@ -585,41 +774,50 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionMacro
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithoutDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOptionWithoutDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryIfOption
%
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/17}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/17}{neu}
% Verwendet \cs{DefineTOCEntryOption}, um eine Option zu definieren, die ein
% Macro definiert. Es gibt folgende Parameter:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Stil}: \meta{String},] Name des Eintragsstils
% \item[\marg{Option}: \meta{String},] Name der Option
-% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
-% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
+% \item[\oarg{Wert}:] der Säumniswert der Option
+% \item[\marg{Prefix}: \meta{String},] Präfix des zu definierenden Makros
% \item[\marg{Postfix}: \meta{String},] Postfix des zu definierenden Makros
% \item[\oarg{Argumentzahl}: \meta{Nummer},] Anzahl der Argumente des Makros
-% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
+% \item[\marg{Erklärung}: \meta{String},] Erklärung der Option
% \item[\oarg{Init}: \meta{Code},] Initialisierung der Option
% \end{description}
-% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
-% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt.
+% Zwischen Prefix und Postfix wird bei der späteren, tatsächlichen Definition
+% automatisch \cs{scr@dte@current} eingefügt. Gleichzeitig wird auch noch eine
+% Kopieroption definiert, die sich von der eigentlichen Option dadurch
+% unterscheidet, dass dem Gleichheitszeichen ein Doppelpunkt voran gestellt
+% ist. Der Wert der Kopieroption ist der Name eines anderen Eintrags, dessen
+% Einstellung dann kopiert wird, sofern dieser Eintrag eine entsprechende
+% Einstellung hat.
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithoutDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithoutDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithDefault}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{es wird gleichzeitig eine Kopieroption
+% definiert}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/12}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/26}{neu (intern)}
% Da mit einem optionalen Argument an Position 3 gearbeitet wird, werden drei
-% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
+% Hilfsmakros benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}[2]{%
@@ -637,10 +835,32 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}{%
\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro{#2}{#3}{#4}[#5]{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#3##1#4}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #3\scr@dte@current#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #3##1#4\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
\or
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}{%
\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro{#2}{#3}{#4}[#5]{##1{####1}}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#3##1#4}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #3\scr@dte@current#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #3##1#4\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
\else
%<class> \ClassError{\KOMAClassName
%<package> \PackageError{tocbasic%
@@ -660,14 +880,47 @@
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[{#3}]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro{#2}{#4}{#5}[#6]{##1}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#4##1#5}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #4\scr@dte@current#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #4##1#5\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
\or
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[{#3}]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro{#2}{#4}{#5}[#6]{##1{####1}}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#4##1#5}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #4\scr@dte@current#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #4##1#5\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
\or
\@DefineTOCEntryOption{#1}{#2}[{#3}]{%
\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro{#2}{#4}{#5}[#6]{##1{####1}{####2}}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.dte]{KOMAarg}{#2:}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#4##1#5}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname #4\scr@dte@current#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname #4##1#5\endcsname
+ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed
+ }%
+ }%
+ \edef\scr@dte@doopts{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\scr@dte@doopts}\noexpand\do{#2:}%
+ }%
\else
%<class> \ClassError{\KOMAClassName
%<package> \PackageError{tocbasic%
@@ -688,27 +941,27 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithoutDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithoutDefault
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionMacro
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithoutDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOptionWithoutDefault
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DefineTOCEntryCommandOption
%
% \begin{macro}{\@AddToDeclareTOCStyleEntryPreCheckNeeds}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/06}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/06}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\@PreToDeclareTOCStyleEntryPreCheckNeeds}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/06}{neu (intern)}
-% Noch bevor die benötigten Befehle getestet werden, wird in
-% \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} ein Hook ausgeführt. Für das Hinzufügen von Code
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/06}{neu (intern)}
+% Noch bevor die benötigten Befehle getestet werden, wird in
+% \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} ein Hook ausgeführt. Für das Hinzufügen von Code
% zu diesem Hook gibt es folgende Parameter:
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\marg{Code}: \meta{Code},] Code, der ausgeführt werden soll.
+% \item[\marg{Code}: \meta{Code},] Code, der ausgeführt werden soll.
% \end{description}
% Bitte beachten, dass diese Anweisung im Init-Code von Stilen verwendet wird,
-% also innerhalb von \cs{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}, während der Hook innerhalb
-% von \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} ausgeführt wird. Der Code des Hooks hat ein
+% also innerhalb von \cs{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}, während der Hook innerhalb
+% von \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} ausgeführt wird. Der Code des Hooks hat ein
% Argument: Den Namen der Gliederungsebene.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -722,22 +975,22 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@PreToDeclareTOCStyleEntryPreCheckNeeds
-% \end{macro}^^A \@AddToDeclareTOCStyleEntryPreCheckNeeds
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@PreToDeclareTOCStyleEntryPreCheckNeeds
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@AddToDeclareTOCStyleEntryPreCheckNeeds
%
% \begin{macro}{\@TOCEntryStyleNeedsCommandByOption}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
-% Fügt einen oder mehrere Befehle der Liste der benötigten Befehle hinzu.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
+% Fügt einen oder mehrere Befehle der Liste der benötigten Befehle hinzu.
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\marg{Stil}:] Der Stil \meta{string}, der die Befehle benötigt.
-% \item[\marg{Präfix}:] Präfix \meta{string} des benötigten Befehls.
-% \item[\marg{Postfix}:] Postfix \meta{string} des benötigten Befehls.
-% \item[\marg{Option}:] Die Option \meta{string}, über die dieser Befehl
+% \item[\marg{Stil}:] Der Stil \meta{string}, der die Befehle benötigt.
+% \item[\marg{Präfix}:] Präfix \meta{string} des benötigten Befehls.
+% \item[\marg{Postfix}:] Postfix \meta{string} des benötigten Befehls.
+% \item[\marg{Option}:] Die Option \meta{string}, über die dieser Befehl
% definiert wird.
-% \item[\marg{Erklärung}:] Bedeutung \meta{string} des Befehls.
+% \item[\marg{Erklärung}:] Bedeutung \meta{string} des Befehls.
% \end{description}
-% Zwischen Präfix und Postfix wird dann automatisch der Name der
-% Gliederungsebene eingefügt.
+% Zwischen Präfix und Postfix wird dann automatisch der Name der
+% Gliederungsebene eingefügt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\@TOCEntryStyleNeedsCommandByOption}[5]{%
@@ -748,19 +1001,19 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@TOCEntryStyleNeedsCommandByOption
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@TOCEntryStyleNeedsCommandByOption
%
% \begin{macro}{\TOCEntryStyleInitCode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/19}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/19}{neu}
% \begin{macro}{\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu}
-% Führt Befehle aus, bevor ein Verzeichnisbefehl in diesem Stil definiert wird
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu}
+% Führt Befehle aus, bevor ein Verzeichnisbefehl in diesem Stil definiert wird
% und noch bevor die \emph{needs}-Liste abgearbeitet wird.
% Argumente sind:
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\marg{Stil}:] Der Stil \meta{string} für den die Initialisierung
+% \item[\marg{Stil}:] Der Stil \meta{string} für den die Initialisierung
% erfolgen soll.
-% \item[\marg{Code}:] Wird zwecks Initialisierung ausgeführt. Innerhalb dieses
+% \item[\marg{Code}:] Wird zwecks Initialisierung ausgeführt. Innerhalb dieses
% Codes ist \texttt{\#1} der Name der Verzeichnisebene.
% \end{description}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -782,16 +1035,31 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode
-% \end{macro}^^A \TOCEntryStyleInitCode
+% \end{macro}%^^A \TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode
+% \end{macro}%^^A \TOCEntryStyleInitCode
% \begin{macro}{\@ExecuteTOCEntryStyleInitCode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
-% Führt den Init-Code eines Stils aus. Das erste Argument ist der Name des
-% Stils, das zweite der Name der Verzeichnisebene. Diesen erhält die
-% Init-Anweisung außerdem als Argument.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/04}{neu (intern)}
+% Führt den Init-Code eines Stils aus. Das erste Argument ist der Name des
+% Stils, das zweite der Name der Verzeichnisebene. Diesen erhält die
+% Init-Anweisung außerdem als Argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@ExecuteTOCEntryStyleInitCode}[2]{%
\let\scr@dte@doopts\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{Initialisierung von
+% \cs{scr@dte@\meta{Stil}@init}}%^^A
+% Weil die Festlegung, welche Optionen bzw. welche Makros für einen Stil
+% benötigt werden über die Deklaration der Optionen stattfindet und diese
+% Deklaration nicht etwa bei der Festlegung des Stils sondern bei der
+% Zuweisung des Stils an einen Eintrag erfolgt, muss hier auch die do-Liste
+% dieser Information gelöscht werden. Anderenfalls würde sie über alle
+% Einträge desselben Stils ständig anwachsen und damit diverse Einträge
+% mehrfach enthalten. Vermutlich wäre es besser, hier tatsächlich eine Liste
+% je Eintrag statt eine je Stil zu erzeugen, aber so ist es eben nicht. Also
+% wird hier immer wieder die gleiche Liste neu aufgebaut und muss deshalb zu
+% Beginn zurückgesetzt werden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\csname scr@dte@#1@needs\endcsname\relax
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@dte@#1@init}{}{%
\def\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption{\@DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption{#1}}%
\def\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{\@DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{#1}}%
@@ -819,24 +1087,24 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ExecuteTOCEntryStyleInitCode
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ExecuteTOCEntryStyleInitCode
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTOCStyleEntry}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/13}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/13}{neu}
% Diese Anweisung definiert einen Verzeichniseintragsbefehl. Dabei wird auch
-% geprüft, ob all benötigten Befehle definiert sind. Falls das nicht der Fall
+% geprüft, ob all benötigten Befehle definiert sind. Falls das nicht der Fall
% ist, wird der Verzeichniseintragsbefehl nicht definiert, sondern ein Fehler
-% gemeldet. Für die Definition werden folgende Argumente verwendet.
+% gemeldet. Für die Definition werden folgende Argumente verwendet.
% \begin{description}
-% \item[\oarg{Optionen}:] Komma separierte Liste von Optionen für die
+% \item[\oarg{Optionen}:] Komma separierte Liste von Optionen für die
% Definition des Eintrags.
% \item[\marg{Stil}:] Der Stil \meta{string}, in dem der Verzeichniseintrag
% sein soll.
% \item[\marg{Gliederungsebene}:] Der Name \meta{string} der Gliederungsebene
-% für die ein Verzeichniseintrag definiert werden soll.
+% für die ein Verzeichniseintrag definiert werden soll.
% \end{description}
-% Es wird außerdem eine Anweisung \cs{scr@dte@def@l@\meta{Stil}} benötigt,
-% über die dann die eigentliche Definition der Eintragsanweisung
+% Es wird außerdem eine Anweisung \cs{scr@dte@def@l@\meta{Stil}} benötigt,
+% über die dann die eigentliche Definition der Eintragsanweisung
% erfolgt. Diese hat genau ein Argument: \meta{Gliederungsebene}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -893,14 +1161,26 @@
\endgroup
\if@tempswa
\@nameuse{scr@dte@def@l@#2}{#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{macro name prefix for style information
+% changed}%^^A
+% Note: Before \KOMAScript~3.27 the style name of an entry was stored in
+% \cs{scr@dte@\meta{level name}@style}. But this war wrong, because the prefix
+% \texttt{scr@dte} is used for attributes of the style (while declaring an
+% entry), but the style is an attribute of the entry. So usage of the prefix
+% \texttt{scr@tso} would be much better. This means usage of
+% \cs{scr@dte@\meta{level name}@style} is deprecated and should be replaced by
+% \cs{scr@tso@\meta{level name}@style}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\edef\csname scr@dte@#3@style\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname scr@tso@#3@style\endcsname{#2}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/09}{\cs{toclevel@\emph{ebene}} wird für
-% \textsf{hyperref} neu gesetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/09}{\cs{toclevel@\emph{ebene}} wird für
+% \textsf{hyperref} neu gesetzt}%^^A
% Da verschiedene Pakete davon ausgehen, dass die Ebene
% \textsf{hyperref}-kompatibel gespeichert ist, setzen wir die hier
-% zusätzlich. Das \textsf{hyperref} die Einstellungen ggf. überschreibt,
-% machen wir das in der Dokumentpräambel auch mehrfach.
+% zusätzlich. Das \textsf{hyperref} die Einstellungen ggf. überschreibt,
+% machen wir das in der Dokumentpräambel auch mehrfach.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\csname toclevel@#3\expandafter\endcsname
\csname #3tocdepth\endcsname
@@ -920,10 +1200,10 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareTOCStyleEntry
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareTOCStyleEntry
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTOCStyleEntries}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/27}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/27}{new}%^^A
% Use \cs{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} to define a list of entries, all with the same
% options and style.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -946,26 +1226,26 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareTOCStyleEntries
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareTOCStyleEntries
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTOCEntryStyle}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/17}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/17}{neu}
% \begin{macro}{\@DeclareTOCEntryStyle}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/17}{neu (intern)}
-% Über diese Anweisung wir ein neuer Stil für TOC-Einträge definiert. Ein Stil
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/17}{neu (intern)}
+% Über diese Anweisung wir ein neuer Stil für TOC-Einträge definiert. Ein Stil
% besteht aus:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Stil}:] Der Stil \meta{string}, der definiert werden soll.
% \item[\oarg{Initialisierungscode}:] Dieser Code wird bei der Definition
-% eines Verzeichnisbefehls ausgeführt und enthält beispielsweise
+% eines Verzeichnisbefehls ausgeführt und enthält beispielsweise
% Optionendeklarationen. Es ist zu beachten, dass dieser Code ggf. auch
-% mehrfach ausgeführt werden kann!
-% \item[\marg{Code}:] Der Code, der ausgeführt wird, wenn ein
+% mehrfach ausgeführt werden kann!
+% \item[\marg{Code}:] Der Code, der ausgeführt wird, wenn ein
% Verzeichniseintrag ausgegeben werden soll.
% \end{description}
-% Unabhängig davon, ob eine \meta{Optionendeklaration} angegeben ist oder
-% nicht, wird immer eine Option \texttt{level} definiert, über die die
-% Verzeichnisebene einen nummerischen Wert erhält.
+% Unabhängig davon, ob eine \meta{Optionendeklaration} angegeben ist oder
+% nicht, wird immer eine Option \texttt{level} definiert, über die die
+% Verzeichnisebene einen nummerischen Wert erhält.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\DeclareTOCEntryStyle}[1]{%
@@ -989,50 +1269,50 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DeclareTOCEntryStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareTOCEntryStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DeclareTOCEntryStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareTOCEntryStyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\TOC@EntryStartHook}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/12}{neu (intern)}
-% Bei jedem Eintrag, der über einen Eintragsstil von \KOMAScript{} definiert
-% ist, kann vor dem jeweiligen Eintrag über einen Haken eine Reihe
-% von Anweisungen ausgeführt werden. Innerhalb dieser Anweisungen ist
-% \texttt{\#1} der Name der Gliederungsebene. In der Regel dürfen diese
-% Anweisungen keinerlei Ausgaben tätigen und weder \cs{lastpenalty} noch
-% \cs{lastskip} verändern. Der Anwender ist dafür selbst verantwortlich! Weil
-% diese Einschränkung jedoch etwas kritisch ist und der Aufruf ohnehin ein
-% \cs{makeatletter} benötigt, wird nur der Haken definiert aber keine
-% Anweisung, um diesen zu ändern oder zu erweitern.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/12}{neu (intern)}
+% Bei jedem Eintrag, der über einen Eintragsstil von \KOMAScript{} definiert
+% ist, kann vor dem jeweiligen Eintrag über einen Haken eine Reihe
+% von Anweisungen ausgeführt werden. Innerhalb dieser Anweisungen ist
+% \texttt{\#1} der Name der Gliederungsebene. In der Regel dürfen diese
+% Anweisungen keinerlei Ausgaben tätigen und weder \cs{lastpenalty} noch
+% \cs{lastskip} verändern. Der Anwender ist dafür selbst verantwortlich! Weil
+% diese Einschränkung jedoch etwas kritisch ist und der Aufruf ohnehin ein
+% \cs{makeatletter} benötigt, wird nur der Haken definiert aber keine
+% Anweisung, um diesen zu ändern oder zu erweitern.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\TOC@EntryStartHook}[1]{}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \TOC@EntryStartHook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \TOC@EntryStartHook
%
% \begin{macro}{\TOC@EntryEndHook}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/12}{neu (intern)}
-% Bei jedem Eintrag, der über einen Eintragsstil von \KOMAScript{} definiert
-% ist, kann nach dem jeweiligen Eintrag über einen Haken eine Reihe
-% von Anweisungen ausgeführt werden. Innerhalb dieser Anweisungen ist
-% \texttt{\#1} der Name der Gliederungsebene. In der Regel dürfen diese
-% Anweisungen keinerlei Ausgaben tätigen und weder \cs{lastpenalty} noch
-% \cs{lastskip} verändern. Der Anwender ist dafür selbst verantwortlich! Weil
-% diese Einschränkung jedoch etwas kritisch ist und der Aufruf ohnehin ein
-% \cs{makeatletter} benötigt, wird nur der Haken definiert aber keine
-% Anweisung, um diesen zu ändern oder zu erweitern.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/12}{neu (intern)}
+% Bei jedem Eintrag, der über einen Eintragsstil von \KOMAScript{} definiert
+% ist, kann nach dem jeweiligen Eintrag über einen Haken eine Reihe
+% von Anweisungen ausgeführt werden. Innerhalb dieser Anweisungen ist
+% \texttt{\#1} der Name der Gliederungsebene. In der Regel dürfen diese
+% Anweisungen keinerlei Ausgaben tätigen und weder \cs{lastpenalty} noch
+% \cs{lastskip} verändern. Der Anwender ist dafür selbst verantwortlich! Weil
+% diese Einschränkung jedoch etwas kritisch ist und der Aufruf ohnehin ein
+% \cs{makeatletter} benötigt, wird nur der Haken definiert aber keine
+% Anweisung, um diesen zu ändern oder zu erweitern.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\TOC@EntryEndHook}[1]{}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \TOC@EntryEndHook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \TOC@EntryEndHook
%
% \begin{macro}{\CloneTOCEntryStyle}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neu}
% Diese Anweisung dupliziert einen Stil samt seiner Optionen und
-% Befehle. Anschließend kann man ihn beispielsweise verändern. Das erste
-% Argument ist der Name des ursprünglichen Stils, das zweite der neue Name.
+% Befehle. Anschließend kann man ihn beispielsweise verändern. Das erste
+% Argument ist der Name des ursprünglichen Stils, das zweite der neue Name.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\CloneTOCEntryStyle}[2]{%
@@ -1057,19 +1337,46 @@
%
% Hier wird quasi an Beispielen gezeigt, wie man Verzeichniseintragsstile
% definieren kann. Einige dieser Stile sind sehr grundlegend. Andere sind
-% stellen Erweiterungen der grundlegenden Stile dar. Die Stile können über
-% mehrere \texttt{docstrip}-Durchgänge einzeln in den Quelltext gelangen.
+% stellen Erweiterungen der grundlegenden Stile dar. Die Stile können über
+% mehrere \texttt{docstrip}-Durchgänge einzeln in den Quelltext gelangen.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{aus den Klassen in das Paket verschoben}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{aus den Klassen in das Paket verschoben}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/11}{aus den Klassen in das Paket verschoben}%^^A
+% Einige Makros für die Formatierung der Verzeichniseinträge:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{@pnumwidth}] ist der Platz für die Seitenzahl.
+% \item[\cs{@tocrmarg}] ist der rechte Rand bei mehrzeiligen
+% Verzeichniseinträgen. Dieser wird hier größer als \cs{@pnumwidth}
+% gewählt.
+% \item[\cs{\@dotsep}] ist der Abstand zwischen den einzelnen
+% Punkten.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\providecommand*\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\providecommand*\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\providecommand*\@dotsep {4.5}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
%
% \iffalse
%<*style>
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@gobble}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
-% \texttt{gobble}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
+% \texttt{gobble}}%^^A
% Der aller einfachste Verzeichniseintragsstil ist \texttt{gobble}. Er nimmt
-% die beiden Argumente für den Verzeichniseintrag und die Seitenzahl und
-% vergisst sie unabhängig von der Ebene des Eintrags einfach. Daher benötigt
+% die beiden Argumente für den Verzeichniseintrag und die Seitenzahl und
+% vergisst sie unabhängig von der Ebene des Eintrags einfach. Daher benötigt
% dieser Stil auch keinerlei Optionen oder Initialisierung.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*gobble>
@@ -1077,42 +1384,51 @@
\DeclareTOCEntryStyle{gobble}{}%
%</gobble>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@gobble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@gobble
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@dottedtocline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
-% \texttt{dottedtocline}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
+% \texttt{dottedtocline}}%^^A
% Der einfachste echte Verzeichniseintragsstil ist
% \texttt{dottedtocline}. Dieser verwendet einfach nur die
-% \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisung \cs{dottedtocline}. Für \KOMAScript{} selbst sollte
+% \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisung \cs{dottedtocline}. Für \KOMAScript{} selbst sollte
% man dieses Stil nicht verwenden. Man kann ihn aber beispielsweise mit den
-% Standardklassen verwenden, wenn man kompatibel bleiben will. Dieser benötigt
-% jedoch bereits Angaben bezüglich der Nummernbreite und des
+% Standardklassen verwenden, wenn man kompatibel bleiben will. Dieser benötigt
+% jedoch bereits Angaben bezüglich der Nummernbreite und des
% Eintragseinzugs. Der ohnehin immer definierte Level wird ebenfalls
% ausgewertet.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@undottedtocline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
-% \texttt{undottedtocline}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
+% \texttt{undottedtocline}}%^^A
% Im Unterschied dazu entspricht der Verzeichniseintragsstil
% \texttt{undottedtocline} dem der \texttt{chapter}-Ebene der
% Standardklassen. Im Unterschied zu diesen wird jedoch ein Eintragseinzug
-% unterstützt.
+% unterstützt.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@largetocline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
-% \texttt{largetocline}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/20}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
+% \texttt{largetocline}}%^^A
% Im Unterschied dazu entspricht der Verzeichniseintragsstil
% \texttt{largetocline} dem der \texttt{part}-Ebene der Standardklassen. Im
-% Unterschied zu diesen wird jedoch ein Eintragseinzug unterstützt. Eine
-% Nummernbreite gibt es hingegen nicht. Stattdessen werden die Einträge nicht
-% hängend gesetzt.
+% Unterschied zu diesen wird jedoch ein Eintragseinzug unterstützt. Eine
+% Nummernbreite gibt es hingegen nicht. Stattdessen werden die Einträge nicht
+% hängend gesetzt.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@tocline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/22}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
-% \texttt{tocline}}^^A
-% Das hingegen wird der hochflexible Stil für Verzeichniseinträge, die aus
-% einer oder mehreren Zeilen bestehen. Dieser wird später über diverse
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/22}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
+% \texttt{tocline}}%^^A
+% Das hingegen wird der hochflexible Stil für Verzeichniseinträge, die aus
+% einer oder mehreren Zeilen bestehen. Dieser wird später über diverse
% Hilfsmakros definiert.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*dottedtocline|undottedtocline|largetocline|tocline>
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@toctext}
+% \changes{3.27}{2019/07/08}{neuer Verzeichniseintragsstil
+% \texttt{toctext}}%^^A
+% Während alle bisherigen Stile Zeilen oder eigentlich Absätze im Verzeichnis
+% erstellen, soll dieser Stil lediglich Text innerhalb eines Absatzes
+% erzeugen. Die einzelnen Einträge werden also hintereinander
+% ausgegeben. Dabei können auch Zeilenumbrüche innerhalb eines Eintrags
+% vorkommen. Dieser Stil teilt einige, wenige Optionen mit dem Stil
+% \texttt{tocline}. Die Stile haben aber auch eigene Optionen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*dottedtocline|undottedtocline|largetocline|tocline|toctext>
%<*dottedtocline>
%%% (run: style,dottedtocline)
\DeclareTOCEntryStyle{dottedtocline}[{%
@@ -1125,6 +1441,10 @@
%%% (run: style, largetocline)
\DeclareTOCEntryStyle{largetocline}[{%
%</largetocline>
+%<*toctext>
+%%% (run: style,toctext)
+\DeclareTOCEntryStyle{toctext}[{%
+%</toctext>
%<*tocline>
%%% (run: style,tocline)
\DeclareTOCEntryStyle{tocline}[{%
@@ -1134,30 +1454,75 @@
{scr@tso@}{@breakafternumber}{line break after number flag}%
\DefineTOCEntryIfOption{dynnumwidth}%
{scr@tso@}{@dynnumwidth}{dynamic number width flag}%
+%</tocline>
+%<*tocline|toctext>
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{entryformat}%
{scr@tso@}{@entryformat}[1]{entry format}%
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{entrynumberformat}%
{scr@tso@}{@numberformat}[1]{entry number format}%
+%</tocline|toctext>
+%<*tocline>
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{linefill}[\TOCLineLeaderFill]%
{scr@tso@}{@linefill}{filling between text and page number}%
+%</tocline>
+%<*toctext>
+ \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{prepagenumber}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@prepagenumber}{separator between text and page number}%
+%</toctext>
+%<*tocline|toctext>
\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption{numsep}%
{scr@tso@}{@numsep}{entry number separation}%
+%</tocline|toctext>
+%<*tocline>
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{onstarthigherlevel}%
{scr@tso@}{@LastTOCLevelWasLower}{start higher level entry hook}%
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{onstartlowerlevel}%
{scr@tso@}{@LastTOCLevelWasHigher}{start lower level entry hook}%
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{onstartsamelevel}%
{scr@tso@}{@LastTOCLevelWasSame}{start same level entry hook}%
+%</tocline>
+%<*toctext>
+ \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{onstartfirstentry}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@onstartfirstentry}{output at start of paragraph}%
+ \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{onstartentry}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@onstartentry}{output at start of all entries but the first}%
+ \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{onendlastentry}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@onendlastentry}{output at end of paragraph}%
+ \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{afterpar}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@afterpar}{settings after end of paragraph}%
+ \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{onendentry}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@onendentry}{output at end of all entries but the last}%
+%</toctext>
+%<*tocline>
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{pagenumberbox}%
{scr@tso@}{@pagenumberbox}[1]{page number box}%
+%</tocline>
+%<*tocline|toctext>
\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{pagenumberformat}%
{scr@tso@}{@pagenumberformat}[1]{page number format}%
+%</tocline|toctext>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/06}{neue Option \texttt{raggedentrytext}}^^A
-% Die Option \texttt{raggedentrytext} muss leider etwas umständlich definiert
-% werden, damit sie mit der früheren Definition eines Makros
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/24}{neue Option \texttt{pagenumberwidth}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/24}{neue Option \texttt{rightindent}}%^^A
+% Die Optionen \texttt{pagenumberwidth} und \texttt{rightindent} ersetzen
+% innerhalb des Stils \texttt{tocline} die Makros \cs{@pnumwidth} und
+% \cs{@tocrmarg}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tocline>
+ \DefineTOCEntryLengthOption{pagenumberwidth}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@pagenumberwidth}{width of page number box}%
+%</tocline>
+%<*tocline|toctext>
+ \DefineTOCEntryLengthOption{rightindent}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@rightindent}{entry's text right indent}%
+%</tocline|toctext>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/06}{neue Option \texttt{raggedentrytext}}%^^A
+% Die Option \texttt{raggedentrytext} muss leider etwas umständlich definiert
+% werden, damit sie mit der früheren Definition eines Makros
% \cs{raggedchapterentry} halbwegs kompatibel ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tocline>
\DefineTOCEntryOption{raggedentrytext}[true]{%
\FamilySetBool{KOMAarg}{raggedentrytext}{@tempswa}{##1}%
\ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1173,6 +1538,10 @@
\DefineTOCEntryIfOption{raggedpagenumber}%
{scr@tso@}{@raggedpage}{page number ragged flag}%
%</tocline>
+%<*toctext>
+ \DefineTOCEntryIfOption{raggedright}%
+ {scr@tso@}{@raggedright}{use raggedright for the whole paragraph}%
+%</toctext>
\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption{indent}%
{scr@tso@}{@indent}{entry indent}%
%<*dottedtocline|undottedtocline|tocline>
@@ -1181,11 +1550,11 @@
%</dottedtocline|undottedtocline|tocline>
% \end{macrocode}
% Die Ebene, \texttt{level} bzw. \cs{\dots tocdepth}, kann auf zweierlei Arten
-% automatisch bestimmt werden. Zum einen wird für Sub-Ebenen die Elternebene
-% um eins erhöht verwendet, falls die Elternebene bereits definiert ist.
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/09}{\cs{the} eingefügt}^^A
+% automatisch bestimmt werden. Zum einen wird für Sub-Ebenen die Elternebene
+% um eins erhöht verwendet, falls die Elternebene bereits definiert ist.
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/09}{\cs{the} eingefügt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*tocline>
+%<*tocline|toctext>
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{#1tocdepth}{%
\ifstrstart{#1}{sub}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{\scr@dte@nosub{#1}tocdepth}{}{%
@@ -1195,9 +1564,9 @@
}%
}{}%
}{}%
-%</tocline>
+%</tocline|toctext>
% \end{macrocode}
-% War der Weg über Elternebenen nicht erfolgreich oder wurde er nicht
+% War der Weg über Elternebenen nicht erfolgreich oder wurde er nicht
% verwendet, so werden Standardwerte angenommen, wie sie bei den
% Standardklassen und bei \KOMAScript{} zutreffen.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1212,8 +1581,8 @@
\ifstr{#1}{figure}{\@namedef{#1tocdepth}{1}}{%
\ifstr{#1}{table}{\@namedef{#1tocdepth}{1}}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für unbekannte Anweisungen wird stattdessen eine eventuell vorhandene
-% Gliederungsebene auch als Verzeichnisebene übernommen:
+% Für unbekannte Anweisungen wird stattdessen eine eventuell vorhandene
+% Gliederungsebene auch als Verzeichnisebene übernommen:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\let\csname #1tocdepth\expandafter\endcsname
\csname #1numdepth\endcsname
@@ -1230,7 +1599,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Der Einzug kann wie der Level aus der Elternebene gebildet werden
% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*tocline>
+%<*tocline|toctext>
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@#1@indent}{%
\@ifundefined{scr@#1@tocindent}{%
\ifstrstart{#1}{sub}{%
@@ -1258,15 +1627,50 @@
}{}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Kompatibilität mit älteren \KOMAScript-Klassen.
+% Kompatibilität mit älteren \KOMAScript-Klassen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@indent}{\@nameuse{scr@#1@tocindent}}%
}%
}{}%
+%</tocline|toctext>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Die Breite der Seitenzahlbox und der rechte Einzug können ebenfalls aus den
+% Elternelementen gebildet werden, allerdings muss hier nur der Wert
+% übernommen werden.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tocline>
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@#1@pagenumberwidth}{%
+ \ifstrstart{#1}{sub}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dte@nosub{#1}@pagenumberwidth}{%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@#1@pagenumberwidth}{\@pnumwidth}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@pagenumberwidth\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname scr@tso@\scr@dte@nosub{#1}@pagenumberwidth\endcsname
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@#1@pagenumberwidth}{\@pnumwidth}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
%</tocline>
+%<*tocline|toctext>
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@#1@rightindent}{%
+ \ifstrstart{#1}{sub}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@tso@\scr@dte@nosub{#1}@rightindent}{%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@#1@rightindent}{\@tocrmarg}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@rightindent\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname scr@tso@\scr@dte@nosub{#1}@rightindent\endcsname
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@namedef{scr@tso@#1@rightindent}{\@tocrmarg}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+%</tocline|toctext>
% \end{macrocode}
% War das nicht erfolgreich oder wird es nicht genutzt, so werden
-% Standardwerte verwendet, die sowohl für die Standardklasse als auch die
+% Standardwerte verwendet, die sowohl für die Standardklasse als auch die
% \KOMAScript-Klassen zutreffend sind.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{scr@tso@#1@indent}{%
@@ -1278,7 +1682,7 @@
\ifstr{#1}{part}{\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@indent}{0em}}{%
\ifstr{#1}{chapter}{\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@indent}{0em}}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ab hier hängt es nun davon ab, ob es eine Kapitel-Ebene gibt oder
+% Ab hier hängt es nun davon ab, ob es eine Kapitel-Ebene gibt oder
% nicht. Dazu sollte die Kapitelebene bereits definiert sein!
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{l@chapter}{%
@@ -1294,7 +1698,7 @@
\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@indent}{10em}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
+% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
}%
}%
@@ -1314,7 +1718,7 @@
\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@indent}{12em}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
+% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
}%
}%
@@ -1329,14 +1733,14 @@
%<*dottedtocline|undottedtocline|largetocline>
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Kompatibilität mit älteren \KOMAScript-Klassen.
+% Kompatibilität mit älteren \KOMAScript-Klassen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@indent}{\@nameuse{scr@#1@tocindent}}%
}%
%</dottedtocline|undottedtocline|largetocline>
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für die Nummernbreite gibt es ebenfalls beide Wege.
+% Für die Nummernbreite gibt es ebenfalls beide Wege.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*dottedtocline|undottedtocline|tocline>
%<*tocline>
@@ -1364,7 +1768,7 @@
\ifstr{#1}{table}{\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}{2.3em}}{%
\ifstr{#1}{chapter}{\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}{1.5em}}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Ab hier hängt es nun davon ab, ob es eine Kapitel-Ebene gibt oder
+% Ab hier hängt es nun davon ab, ob es eine Kapitel-Ebene gibt oder
% nicht. Dazu sollte die Kapitelebene bereits definiert sein!
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{chapter}{%
@@ -1380,7 +1784,7 @@
\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}{5m}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
+% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
}%
}%
@@ -1400,7 +1804,7 @@
\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}{6em}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
+% Für unbekannte Ebenen muss der Wert selbst per Option gesetzt werden!
% \begin{macrocode}
}%
}%
@@ -1414,7 +1818,7 @@
%<*dottedtocline|undottedtocline>
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Kompatibilität mit älteren \KOMAScript-Klassen.
+% Kompatibilität mit älteren \KOMAScript-Klassen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@namedef{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}{\@nameuse{scr@#1@tocnumwidth}}%
}%
@@ -1423,8 +1827,8 @@
%</dottedtocline|undottedtocline|tocline>
%<*tocline>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Standardeinstellungen für die drei Penalty-Hooks sind einfach die
-% Standardanweisungen dafür. Dabei ist das so definiert, dass Änderungen an
+% Die Standardeinstellungen für die drei Penalty-Hooks sind einfach die
+% Standardanweisungen dafür. Dabei ist das so definiert, dass Änderungen an
% den Standardanweisungen direkte Auswirkungen haben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\providecommand%
@@ -1434,9 +1838,9 @@
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@LastTOCLevelWasHigher\endcsname{\LastTOCLevelWasHigher}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Voreinstellung für den vertikalen Abstand ist Null mit ein klein wenig
-% Leim, um den Seitenumbruch zu optimieren. Das genügt bei einer normalen
-% A4-Seite aber gerade mal für den Ausgleich einer Zeile. Bei den höheren
+% Die Voreinstellung für den vertikalen Abstand ist Null mit ein klein wenig
+% Leim, um den Seitenumbruch zu optimieren. Das genügt bei einer normalen
+% A4-Seite aber gerade mal für den Ausgleich einer Zeile. Bei den höheren
% Ebenen werden stattdessen die Voreinstellungen der Standardklassen
% verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1459,7 +1863,7 @@
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Es ist gut zu wissen, wie breit die breiteste Nummer ist, damit wir
-% ggf. prüfen können, ob entsprechende Bedingungen eingehalten werden.
+% ggf. prüfen können, ob entsprechende Bedingungen eingehalten werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{scr@dte@#1@maxnumwidth}{%
\expandafter\newlength\csname scr@dte@#1@maxnumwidth\endcsname
@@ -1467,20 +1871,42 @@
}{}%
\providecommand*{\scr@dte@donumwidth}{}%
\g@addto@macro{\scr@dte@donumwidth}{\do{#1}}%
+%</tocline>
% \end{macrocode}
% Eine dieser Bedingungen ist, dass ein Mindestabstand zwischen Nummer und
% Text eingehalten wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tocline|toctext>
\expandafter\providecommand\expandafter*%
\csname scr@tso@#1@numsep\endcsname{.4em}%
+%</tocline|toctext>
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jede Ebene kann ihre eigene Formatierungsanweisung für die Nummer haben.
-% Jede Ebene kann auch ihre eigene Formatierungsanweisung für Nummer und Text
-% haben. Für \texttt{part} wird hier die Voreinstellung der Standardklassen
+% Beim Absatzstil gibt es die Möglichkeit, am Anfang des Absatzes, zwischen
+% den Einträgen und am Ende der Einträge und nach dem letzten Eintrag einen
+% speziellen Text ausgeben zu lassen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*toctext>
+ \expandafter\providecommand%
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@onstartfirstentry\endcsname{}%
+ \expandafter\providecommand%
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@onstartentry\endcsname{}%
+ \expandafter\providecommand%
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@onendlastentry\endcsname{}%
+ \expandafter\providecommand%
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@onendentry\endcsname{\quad}%
+ \expandafter\providecommand%
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@afterpar\endcsname{}%
+%</toctext>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Jede Ebene kann ihre eigene Formatierungsanweisung für die Nummer haben.
+% Jede Ebene kann auch ihre eigene Formatierungsanweisung für Nummer und Text
+% haben. Für \texttt{part} wird hier die Voreinstellung der Standardklassen
% verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tocline|toctext>
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@numberformat\endcsname[1]{##1}%
+%<*tocline>
\ifstr{#1}{part}{%
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@entryformat\endcsname[1]{\large\bfseries ##1}%
@@ -1495,22 +1921,27 @@
\csname scr@tso@#1@entryformat\endcsname[1]{\bfseries ##1}%
}{}%
}{}%
+%</tocline>
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@entryformat\endcsname[1]{##1}%
+%<*tocline>
}%
}%
+%</tocline>
+%</tocline|toctext>
% \end{macrocode}
% Nach der Nummer kann wahlweise ein Zeilenumbruch erfolgen, wobei in diesem
-% Fall der Text wieder auf Höhe der Nummer und nicht erst danach
-% erfolgt. Gesteuert wird das über einen Schalter. In der Voreinstellung
+% Fall der Text wieder auf Höhe der Nummer und nicht erst danach
+% erfolgt. Gesteuert wird das über einen Schalter. In der Voreinstellung
% machen wird das nicht.
% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tocline>
\expandafter\providecommand
\csname Ifscr@tso@#1@breakafternumber\endcsname[2]{##2}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Die Verbindung zwischen Ende des Eintrags und den Seitenzahlen erfolgt
-% normalerweise mit Pünktchen. Das wird auch genau die Voreinstellung für die
-% Option werden. In der Voreinstellung wird mit \cs{hfill} gefüllt.
+% normalerweise mit Pünktchen. Das wird auch genau die Voreinstellung für die
+% Option werden. In der Voreinstellung wird mit \cs{hfill} gefüllt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{scr@tso@#1@linefill}{%
\ifstr{#1}{part}{%
@@ -1535,19 +1966,19 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\providecommand\csname Ifscr@tso@#1@raggedpage\endcsname[2]{##2}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Auch die Seitenzahl kann speziell formatiert werden, wenn das gewünscht ist.
+% Auch die Seitenzahl kann speziell formatiert werden, wenn das gewünscht ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifstr{#1}{part}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Für \texttt{part} normalerweise groß und fett:
+% Für \texttt{part} normalerweise groß und fett:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@pagenumberformat\endcsname[1]{\large\bfseries ##1}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/23}{Seitenzahlen für \texttt{chapter}-Einräge in der
-% Voreinstellung fett}^^A
-% Für \texttt{chapter} nur fett:
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/23}{Seitenzahlen für \texttt{chapter}-Einräge in der
+% Voreinstellung fett}%^^A
+% Für \texttt{chapter} nur fett:
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifstr{#1}{chapter}{%
\expandafter\providecommand%
@@ -1556,9 +1987,9 @@
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{l@chapter}{%
\ifstr{#1}{section}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/23}{Seitenzahlen für \texttt{section}-Einräge in der
-% Voreinstellung unter Umständen fett}^^A
-% Für \texttt{section} ggf. auch fett:
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/23}{Seitenzahlen für \texttt{section}-Einräge in der
+% Voreinstellung unter Umständen fett}%^^A
+% Für \texttt{section} ggf. auch fett:
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@pagenumberformat\endcsname[1]{\bfseries ##1}%
@@ -1574,21 +2005,43 @@
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% Wobei die Seitenzahl normaleweise in eine Box fester Breite gesetzt wird.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{Breite der Seitenzahlbox verallgemeinert}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@pagenumberbox\endcsname[1]{%
- \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil ##1}}%
+ \hb@xt@\@nameuse{scr@dte@pagenumberwidth}{\hfil ##1}}%
\expandafter\providecommand\csname Ifscr@tso@#1@dynnumwidth\endcsname[2]{##2}%
%</tocline>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{Initialisierung von \texttt{raggedentry}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{Initialisierung von \texttt{prepagenumber}}%^^A
+% Im Stil \texttt{toctext} muss außerdem initialisiert werden, ob der Eintrag
+% im Flattersatz oder im Blocksatz gesetzt werden soll und was unmittelbar vor
+% der Seitenzahl auszugeben ist (\texttt{linefill} wäre dafür eine unpassende
+% Bezeichnung).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*toctext>
+ \expandafter\providecommand%
+ \csname Ifscr@tso@#1@raggedright\endcsname[2]{##2}%
+ \expandafter\providecommand%
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@prepagenumber\endcsname{\nobreakspace}%
+%</toctext>
}]{%
% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/12}{Berücksichtigung von Verzeichniseigenschaft
+% \texttt{noindent}}%^^A
% Damit ist die Initialisierung abgeschlossen und wir kommen zur
% Eintragsanweisung selbst:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*dottedtocline>
- \@dottedtocline{\@nameuse{#1tocdepth}}{\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}}%
- {\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}}{##1}{##2}%
-%</dottedtocline>
+ \iftocfeature{\@currext}{noindent}{%
+ \@dottedtocline{\@nameuse{#1tocdepth}}{\z@}%
+ {\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}}{##1}{##2}%
+ }{%
+ \@dottedtocline{\@nameuse{#1tocdepth}}{\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}}%
+ {\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}}{##1}{##2}%
+ }%
+%</dottedtocline>
%<*undottedtocline|largetocline>
\ifnum \c@tocdepth >\numexpr \@nameuse{#1tocdepth}-\@ne\relax
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1616,20 +2069,20 @@
\begingroup
% \end{macrocode}
% Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass hier eigentlich zweimal \cs{@tocrmarg}
-% statt \cs{@pnumwidth} verwendet werden müsste. Allerdings habe ich
+% statt \cs{@pnumwidth} verwendet werden müsste. Allerdings habe ich
% beschlossen, diesen schon vor Jahren gemeldeten Fehler aus
-% Kompatibilitätsgründen vorerst von den Standardklassen zu übernehmen.
+% Kompatibilitätsgründen vorerst von den Standardklassen zu übernehmen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
\parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Standardklassen fügen an dieser Stelle noch eine Gruppe ein, die dann
-% leider vor dem abschließenden \cs{par} bereits beendet wird. Das führt
-% natürlich zu falschen Zeilenabständen bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen. Ich habe
-% lange überlegt, aber schließlich beschlossen, diesen Fehler nicht aus den
-% Standardklassen zu übernehmen. Das war mir dann doch zu krass! Schlimmer
-% noch, würde man den Fehler übernehmen, müsste man das Setzen von
-% \cs{leftskip} abändern, weil natürlich auch das erst am Absatzende
+% Die Standardklassen fügen an dieser Stelle noch eine Gruppe ein, die dann
+% leider vor dem abschließenden \cs{par} bereits beendet wird. Das führt
+% natürlich zu falschen Zeilenabständen bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen. Ich habe
+% lange überlegt, aber schließlich beschlossen, diesen Fehler nicht aus den
+% Standardklassen zu übernehmen. Das war mir dann doch zu krass! Schlimmer
+% noch, würde man den Fehler übernehmen, müsste man das Setzen von
+% \cs{leftskip} abändern, weil natürlich auch das erst am Absatzende
% wirklich zur Geltung kommt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\leavevmode
@@ -1637,25 +2090,29 @@
\bfseries
% \end{macrocode}
% Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass hier eigentlich auch bei
-% \texttt{largetocline} \cs{@tempdima} mit berücksichtigt werden
-% müsste. Das geht nur deshalb nicht, weil bei den Standardklassen \cs{part}
-% kein \cs{numberline} verwendet. Deshalb werden mehrzeilige Einträge auch
-% nicht korrekt eingerückt. Auch das habe ich aus Kompatibilitätsgründen
+% \texttt{largetocline} \cs{@tempdima} mit berücksichtigt werden
+% müsste. Das geht nur deshalb nicht, weil bei den Standardklassen \cs{part}
+% kein \cs{numberline} verwendet. Deshalb werden mehrzeilige Einträge auch
+% nicht korrekt eingerückt. Auch das habe ich aus Kompatibilitätsgründen
% beibehalten.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<undottedtocline> \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
- \advance\leftskip\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}%
+ \iftocfeature{\@currext}{noindent}{%
+%<undottedtocline> \hskip -\leftskip
+ }{%
+ \advance\leftskip\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}%
%<*undottedtocline>
- \hskip -\dimexpr \leftskip-\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}\relax
+ \hskip -\dimexpr \leftskip-\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}\relax
%</undottedtocline>
+ }%
##1%
%<undottedtocline> \nobreak
% \end{macrocode}
-% Hier schließlich ist \cs{@pnumwidth} aufgrund des vorherigen
-% \cs{large} nicht mehr derselbe absolute Wert wie bei Einträgen ohne
-% \cs{large}. Deshalb müsste eigentlich noch vor dem \cs{large} der Wert
-% beispielsweise in eine Länge wie \cs{@tempdimb} übertragen und dann hier
-% verwendet werden. Auch das habe ich aus Kompatibilitätsgründen übernommen.
+% Hier schließlich ist \cs{@pnumwidth} aufgrund des vorherigen
+% \cs{large} nicht mehr derselbe absolute Wert wie bei Einträgen ohne
+% \cs{large}. Deshalb müsste eigentlich noch vor dem \cs{large} der Wert
+% beispielsweise in eine Länge wie \cs{@tempdimb} übertragen und dann hier
+% verwendet werden. Auch das habe ich aus Kompatibilitätsgründen übernommen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss ##2}%
\par
@@ -1674,16 +2131,20 @@
%<*tocline>
\scr@dte@tocline{#1}{##1}{##2}%
%</tocline>
+%<*toctext>
+ \scr@dte@toctext{#1}{##1}{##2}%
+%</toctext>
}
-%</dottedtocline|undottedtocline|largetocline|tocline>
+%</dottedtocline|undottedtocline|largetocline|tocline|toctext>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@tocline
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@largetocline
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@undottedtocline
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@dottedtocline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@toctext
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@tocline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@largetocline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@undottedtocline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@dottedtocline
%
-% Für den Stil \texttt{tocline} werden diverse weitere Einstellungen und
-% Befehle benötigt:
+% Für den Stil \texttt{tocline} werden diverse weitere Einstellungen und
+% Befehle benötigt:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*tocline>
\AtBeginDocument{%
@@ -1709,10 +2170,10 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@nosub}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macro}{\@scr@dte@nosub}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu (intern)}
-% Über diese Hilfsmacros werden die Buchstaben \texttt{sub} am Anfang des
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu (intern)}
+% Ãœber diese Hilfsmacros werden die Buchstaben \texttt{sub} am Anfang des
% Arguments entfernt. Stehen diese gar nicht am Anfang, so wird ein Fehler
% wegen falscher Verwendung von \cs{@scr@de@nosub} gemeldet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1720,22 +2181,24 @@
\newcommand*{\@scr@dte@nosub}{}
\def\@scr@dte@nosub sub#1\relax{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@scr@dte@nosub
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@nosub
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@scr@dte@nosub
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@nosub
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@tocline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/22}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/22}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/12}{Berücksichtigun von Verzeichniseigenschaft
+% \texttt{noindent}}%^^A
% In gewisser Weise entspricht diese Anweisung der \LaTeX-Kern-Anweisung
-% \cs{dottedtocline}. Allerdings werden hier vielfältige
-% Eingriffsmöglichkeiten untersützt, die jeweils durch Optionen gesteuert
-% werden können. Daher hat der Befehl auch nur drei Argumente:
+% \cs{dottedtocline}. Allerdings werden hier vielfältige
+% Eingriffsmöglichkeiten untersützt, die jeweils durch Optionen gesteuert
+% werden können. Daher hat der Befehl auch nur drei Argumente:
% \begin{description}
% \item[\marg{Ebene}:] Der Name \meta{string} der Verzeichnisebene.
% \item[\marg{Eintrag}:] Der Verzeichniseintrag \meta{string}.
% \item[\marg{Seite}:] Die Seitenzahl \meta{string} des Verzeichniseintrags.
% \end{description}
% \begin{Length}{\scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/15}{neu (intern)}
-% Für alle, die es interessiert, gibt diese Länge die tatsächliche Breite der
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/01/15}{neu (intern)}
+% Für alle, die es interessiert, gibt diese Länge die tatsächliche Breite der
% formatierten Nummer an.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth
@@ -1745,18 +2208,26 @@
\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel{#1}%
\addvspace{\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@beforeskip}}\relax
{%
- \leftskip \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}\relax
- \rightskip \@tocrmarg
+ \iftocfeature{\@currext}{noindent}{%
+ \leftskip \z@
+ }{%
+ \leftskip \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}\relax
+ }%
+ \rightskip \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@rightindent}\relax
\parfillskip -\rightskip
\@nameuse{Ifscr@tso@#1@raggedpage}{%
\addtolength{\parfillskip}{\z@ \@plus 1fil}%
}{}%
- \parindent \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}\relax
+ \iftocfeature{\@currext}{noindent}{%
+ \parindent \z@
+ }{%
+ \parindent \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}\relax
+ }%
\@afterindenttrue
\interlinepenalty\@M
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/06}{\cs{ragged\dots entry} wird (wieder)
-% ausgewertet}^^A
+% \changes{v3.21}{2016/06/06}{\cs{ragged\dots entry} wird (wieder)
+% ausgewertet}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifx\csname ragged#1entry\endcsname\raggedright
\addtolength\rightskip\@flushglue
@@ -1785,7 +2256,7 @@
{%
% \end{macrocode}
% An dieser Stelle wenden wir einen Trick an, um die Breite einer eventuell
-% vorhandenen Nummer während deren Ausgabe auszumessen. Dazu ist es eine
+% vorhandenen Nummer während deren Ausgabe auszumessen. Dazu ist es eine
% schlichte Notwendigkeit, dass \cs{numberline} die interne Definition
% verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1794,14 +2265,14 @@
\def\numberline@box##1{%
\sbox\scr@dte@tocline@numbox{\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numberformat}{##1}}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Die Zuweisung an die aktuelle Länge der Nummer muss global erfolgen, weil
+% Die Zuweisung an die aktuelle Länge der Nummer muss global erfolgen, weil
% wir hier in einer Gruppe sind.
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/02}{fehlendes zweites \cs{relax} ergänzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/02}{fehlendes zweites \cs{relax} ergänzt}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\global\scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth
\dimexpr\wd\scr@dte@tocline@numbox+\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numsep}\relax
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/02}{fehlendes zweites \cs{relax} ergänzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/02}{fehlendes zweites \cs{relax} ergänzt}%^^A
% Achtung: Hier braucht es ein zweites \cs{relax}, weil das erste von
% \cs{dimexpr} aufgezehrt wird.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1840,6 +2311,16 @@
{%
\normalfont\normalsize\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@linefill}%
\nobreak
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{\cs{scr@dte@pagenumberwidth} wird definiert}%
+% Damit hier keine Abhängigkeit eine Eintragsvariablen von einer
+% Eintragsvariablen existiert wird lokal \cs{scr@dte@pagenumberwidth} zu
+% \cs{scr@tso@\meta{Eintragsname}@pagenumberwidth}, so dass in der Definition
+% von \cs{scr@tso@\meta{Eintragsname}@pagenumberbox} dieses lokale Makro
+% verwendet werden kann.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@dte@pagenumberwidth
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@pagenumberwidth\endcsname
\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@pagenumberbox}{%
\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@pagenumberformat}{#3}%
}%
@@ -1852,40 +2333,40 @@
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{Length}^^A \scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth
+% \end{Length}%^^A \scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@tocline@numbox}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neue Box (intern)}
-% Wird benötigt, um die Breite der Nummer auszumessen und die Nummer später
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/25}{neue Box (intern)}
+% Wird benötigt, um die Breite der Nummer auszumessen und die Nummer später
% wieder zu verwenden.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newsavebox\scr@dte@tocline@numbox
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@tocline@numbox
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@tocline@numbox
% \begin{macro}{\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/12}{Anpassung an \textsf{tocbasic}-Syntax für
-% Befehle für Paketautoren}^^A
-% Führt eine gespeicherte Aktion in Abhängigkeit davon aus, ob der aktuelle
-% Penalty-Wert darauf schließen lässt, dass zuvor ein Eintrag mit einem
-% höheren, demselben oder einem tieferen Wert für die Ebene erfolgte.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/12}{Anpassung an \textsf{tocbasic}-Syntax für
+% Befehle für Paketautoren}%^^A
+% Führt eine gespeicherte Aktion in Abhängigkeit davon aus, ob der aktuelle
+% Penalty-Wert darauf schließen lässt, dass zuvor ein Eintrag mit einem
+% höheren, demselben oder einem tieferen Wert für die Ebene erfolgte.
% \begin{macro}{\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/12}{Anpassung an \textsf{tocbasic}-Syntax für
-% Befehle für Paketautoren}^^A
-% Setze die Strafpunkte für einen Umbruch entsprechend der aktuellen
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/03/12}{Anpassung an \textsf{tocbasic}-Syntax für
+% Befehle für Paketautoren}%^^A
+% Setze die Strafpunkte für einen Umbruch entsprechend der aktuellen
% Verzeichnisebene.
% \begin{macro}{\LastTOCLevelWasHigher}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
-% Standardaktion, falls der vorherige Level einen größeren Wert hatte: Umbruch
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
+% Standardaktion, falls der vorherige Level einen größeren Wert hatte: Umbruch
% erlauben.
% \begin{macro}{\LastTOCLevelWasSame}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
% Standardaktion, falls der vorherige Level denselben Wert hatte: Umbruch
% erlauben.
% \begin{macro}{\LastTOCLevelWasLower}
% Standardaktion, falls der vorherige Level einen kleineren Wert hatte:
% Penalty beibehalten und damit den Umbruch verbieten.
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/23}{neu}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}[1]{%
\ifnum \lastpenalty<\numexpr 20009-\@nameuse{#1tocdepth}\relax
@@ -1904,15 +2385,15 @@
\newcommand*{\LastTOCLevelWasSame}{\ifvmode\addpenalty{\@lowpenalty}\fi}
\newcommand*{\LastTOCLevelWasLower}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel
-% \end{macro}^^A \tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel
-% \end{macro}^^A \LastTOCLevelWasLower
-% \end{macro}^^A \LastTOCLevelWasSame
-% \end{macro}^^A \LastTOCLevelWasHigher
+% \end{macro}%^^A \tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel
+% \end{macro}%^^A \tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel
+% \end{macro}%^^A \LastTOCLevelWasLower
+% \end{macro}%^^A \LastTOCLevelWasSame
+% \end{macro}%^^A \LastTOCLevelWasHigher
% \begin{macro}{\TOCLineLeaderFill}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/14}{neu}
-% Füllt den Abstand zwischen Text und Seitenzahl komplett. Hat als einziges
-% optionales Argument das Füllzeichen.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/14}{neu}
+% Füllt den Abstand zwischen Text und Seitenzahl komplett. Hat als einziges
+% optionales Argument das Füllzeichen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\TOCLineLeaderFill}[1][.]{%
\leaders\hbox{$\m@th
@@ -1921,14 +2402,132 @@
}
%</tocline>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \TOCLineLeaderFill
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@tocline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \TOCLineLeaderFill
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@tocline
+%
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@toctext}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% This is the command to format entries that will be accumalted into a single
+% paragraph. This is somehow special, because the settings of one entrie can
+% influence another one. The three arguments are:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\marg{level}:] The name \meta{string} of the entry level.
+% \item[\marg{entry}:] The ToC entry \meta{string}.
+% \item[\marg{pagenumber}:] The page number \meta{string} of the ToC entry.
+% \end{description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*toctext>
+\newcommand*{\scr@dte@toctext}[3]{%
+ \ifnum \@nameuse{#1tocdepth}>\c@tocdepth
+ \else
+ \ifhmode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In h-mode their is already output of a previous text entry. So the end code
+% of that previous text entry has to be output before the initial output of
+% the new text entry has to be done.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scr@dte@toctext@lastend
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@onstartentry}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In v-mode it is a new text entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \leavevmode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The paragraph end has to be prepared to eventually change the right
+% skip, to do the final output, and after all destroy these commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\par{%
+ \scr@dte@toctext@raggedright
+ \scr@dte@toctext@parend
+ \@par
+ \scr@dte@toctext@afterpar
+ \global\let\scr@dte@toctext@afterpar\relax
+ \global\let\scr@dte@toctext@parend\relax
+ \global\let\scr@dte@toctext@raggedright\relax
+ }%
+ \global\let\scr@dte@toctext@afterpar\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Also the left skip and the right skip has to be setup (these are the
+% margins) and if any of the text entries has to be printed ragged right, all
+% of them should be ragged right.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \iftocfeature{\@currext}{noindent}{%
+ \leftskip \z@
+ }{%
+ \leftskip \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@indent}\relax
+ }%
+ \rightskip \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@rightindent}\relax
+ \parfillskip \z@ \@plus 1fill\relax
+ \edef\@noitemerr{\unexpanded{\par\def\@noitemerr}%
+ {\unexpanded\expandafter{\@noitemerr}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally the init code of the first entry has to be used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@onstartfirstentry}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Also some settings are independend from beeing the first entry in the
+% paragraph or not.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@nameuse{Ifscr@tso@#1@raggedright}{%
+ \let\\\@centercr
+ \gdef\scr@dte@toctext@raggedright{%
+ \@rightskip\@flushglue
+ \addtolength\rightskip\@rightskip
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \l@addto@macro\scr@dte@toctext@afterpar{\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@afterpar}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The end codes have to be changed. These are used either at the start of the
+% next entry with this style or at the end of the paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@dte@toctext@lastend
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@onendentry\endcsname
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\scr@dte@toctext@parend
+ \csname scr@tso@#1@onendlastentry\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Last but not least, the output has to be done.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \usetocbasicnumberline
+ \def\numberline@box##1{%
+ \mbox{%
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numberformat}{\ignorespaces ##1\unskip}%
+ \hskip\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numsep}\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@entryformat}{%
+ \ignorespaces#2\unskip
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@prepagenumber}%
+ \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@pagenumberformat}{\ignorespaces #3\unskip}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@toctext@raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@toctext@parend}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@toctext@lastend}
+% Helper macros to store some information for later usage.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dte@toctext@raggedright}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dte@toctext@parend}{}
+\newcommand*{\scr@dte@toctext@lastend}{}
+%</toctext>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@toctext@lastend
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@toctext@parend
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@toctext@raggedright
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@toctext
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@default}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{neu im Paket}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{neu im Paket}%^^A
% Bereits im Paket gibt es einen Standardstil. Anderen Paketen ist es nicht
% gestattet diesen umzudefinieren. Klassen ist das hingegen gestattet, damit
-% sie einen Dokument weiten Standardstil festlegen können.
+% sie einen Dokument weiten Standardstil festlegen können.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*default>
%%% (run: style,dottedtocline)
@@ -1953,10 +2552,10 @@
% geschrieben wird:
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@part}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{part}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{part}}%^^A
% Dieser Verzeichnisstil existiert bei \textsf{scrbook}, \textsf{scrreprt} und
% \textsf{scrartcl}. Das Format des Eintrags und der Seitenzahl wird dabei
-% über die Elemente \texttt{partentry} und \texttt{partentrypagenumber}
+% über die Elemente \texttt{partentry} und \texttt{partentrypagenumber}
% realisiert.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*part>
@@ -1975,10 +2574,10 @@
}
%</part>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@part
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@part
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@chapter}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{chapter}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{chapter}}%^^A
% Dieser Verzeichnisstil existier bei \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*chapter>
@@ -2003,13 +2602,13 @@
}
%</chapter>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@chapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@chapter
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@section}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{section}}^^A
-% Bei den Klassen \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} ist das der Stil für
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{section}}%^^A
+% Bei den Klassen \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} ist das der Stil für
% die \emph{kleinen} Verzeichnisebenen. Bei \textsf{scrartcl} ist es dagegen
-% der Stil für die obere Verzeichnisebene und entspricht damit obigem Stil
+% der Stil für die obere Verzeichnisebene und entspricht damit obigem Stil
% \texttt{chapter}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*section>
@@ -2031,7 +2630,7 @@
\hfill
\fi
}%
- % Für die Einträge die Schrift von Element sectionentry verwenden.
+ % Für die Einträge die Schrift von Element sectionentry verwenden.
\expandafter\providecommand%
\csname scr@tso@#1@entryformat\endcsname{\usekomafont{sectionentry}}%
\expandafter\providecommand%
@@ -2042,10 +2641,10 @@
%</article>
%</section>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@section
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@section
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@subsection}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{subsection}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{subsection}}%^^A
% Dieser Stil existiert nur bei \textsf{scrartcl} und entspricht dann dem Stil
% \texttt{section} bei \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2058,10 +2657,10 @@
}
%</subsection&article>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@dte@def@l@subsection
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@dte@def@l@subsection
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@dte@def@l@default}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{default}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/07}{neuer Verzeichnisstil \texttt{default}}%^^A
% Dieser Stil entspricht bei \textsf{scrbook} und \textsf{scrreprt} dem Stil
% \texttt{section} und bei \textsf{scrartcl} dem Stil \textsf{subsection}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2085,6 +2684,6 @@
% end of file `scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx'
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx
index d1b0b2d59c..dc38a63bf6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-typearea.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-typearea.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-typearea.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse meta-comment
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-typearea.dtx 2993 2018-07-16 07:33:22Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-typearea.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<init>%%% (run: init)
%<options>%%% (run: options)
@@ -66,9 +66,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-07-16 09:33:22 +0200 (Mon, 16 Jul 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 2993 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3262 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-typearea.dtx}[%
@@ -115,7 +115,6 @@
%^^A The documentation driver (needed only for checksum calculation):
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[main=english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-typearea.dtx}
@@ -134,10 +133,10 @@
%^^A The documentation part:
%
% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/20}{first version after splitting
-% \texttt{scrclass.dtx}}^^A
+% \texttt{scrclass.dtx}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{reorganization of code into semantic
-% portions}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{start of English translation}^^A
+% portions}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{start of English translation}%^^A
%
% \section{Typing Area Macros}
%
@@ -174,7 +173,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we can load \Package{typearea}:
% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/22}{Use \cs{KOMAScriptVersion} while loading
-% \Package{typearea}}^^A
+% \Package{typearea}}%^^A
% We use \cs{KOMAScriptVersion} to verify the identical versions of
% \KOMAScript{} and the package. See \File{scrkernel-version.dtx} for more
% information about this verification.
@@ -190,7 +189,7 @@
% this code, because it needs the paper size, too.
%
% \begin{macro}{\PaperNameToSize}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new}%^^A
% This command sets \cs{paperheight} and \cs{paperwidth} depending on
% the name of a paper size. It currently supports the ISO formats of the
% series A, B, C and D and the American formats letter, legal and
@@ -226,7 +225,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ISO@PaperNameToSize}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}%^^A
% For ISO paper sizes a sub-macro is used. It has to split the series and the
% root.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -292,7 +291,7 @@
}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ProvideUnknownPaperSizeError}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new}%^^A
% Define a new error class for unknown paper formats. The argument is the new
% error class. Each error class is represented by a command
% \Macro{scr@UnknownPaperSize@}\meta{errorclass}. That command also has
@@ -304,13 +303,13 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@UnkownPaperSize@error}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@UnkownPaperSize@warning}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@UnkownPaperSize@info}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@UnkownPaperSize@ignore}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{new (internal)}
% Error handling (error classes) for \Macro{PaperNameToSize}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ProvideUnknownPaperSizeError{error}{%
@@ -345,46 +344,46 @@
%</typearea>
%</package&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@error
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@warning
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@info
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@ignore
-% \end{macro}^^A \ProvideUnknownPaperSizeError
-% \end{macro}^^A \ISO@PaperNameToSize
-% \end{macro}^^A \PaperNameToSize
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@error
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@warning
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@info
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@ignore
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ProvideUnknownPaperSizeError
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ISO@PaperNameToSize
+% \end{macro}%^^A \PaperNameToSize
%
% \begin{option}{a4paper}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{a5paper}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{b5paper}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{letterpaper}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{legalpaper}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{executivepaper}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{landscape}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{portrait}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{the option is standard but not deprecated}%^^A
% The paper sizes of the standard classes are a special case. For
% compatibility they are declared explicitly. Note: There is still a pattern
% matching implementation for other paper size options, but the usage of those
@@ -411,11 +410,11 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{paper}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{new implementation}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{height and width swapped}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new \Option{paper!=seascape}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{paper orientation depends on format name}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{new implementation}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{height and width swapped}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new \Option{paper!=seascape}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{paper orientation depends on format name}%^^A
% Normally, the paper size should be set using this option. It provides the
% ISO series A, B, C, D, value pairs
% \Option{(\meta{width},\meta{height})} and the orientations
@@ -572,11 +571,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\if@seascape}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@seascapetrue}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@seascapefalse}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{new}%^^A
% This switch stores only whether or not the landscape orientation should be
% up-side-down. Currently this makes sense only using \File{dvips}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -596,8 +595,8 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\maybe@pair}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/26}{works really}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/26}{works really}%^^A
% Test whether the following parameter is of kind \texttt{\meta{first
% argument}:\meta{second argument}}. If so \cs{@tempa} will become \meta{first
% argument} and \cs{@tempb} will become \meta{second argument} and
@@ -619,7 +618,7 @@
% \subsection{Special handling of \Package{geometry}}
%
% \begin{option}{usegeometry}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/07}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/07}{new}%^^A
% \Package{typearea} optionally can pass several settings to package
% \Package{geometry}. The user decides whether or not to use this.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -639,14 +638,14 @@
% origin. Setting up a page size depends on the output driver or back-end.
%
% \begin{option}{pagesize}
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new implementation}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/14}{new \Option{pagesize!=false}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/18}{new \Option{pagesize!=dvipdfmx}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/05/03}{logic redesigned}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/07/10}{\File{luatex} as a synonym of
-% \File{pdftex}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new implementation}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/14}{new \Option{pagesize!=false}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/18}{new \Option{pagesize!=dvipdfmx}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17a}{2015/05/03}{logic redesigned}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/07/10}{\File{luatex} as a synonym of
+% \File{pdftex}}%^^A
% This option is the main element for telling pdf\TeX, \File{dvips} or V\TeX{}
% which paper size to use. It is also used by some deprecated options. Here
% are the values and their meanings:
@@ -718,28 +717,28 @@
\AtBeginDocument{%
\KOMAExecuteOptions[.typearea.\scr@pkgextension]{pagesize=\@pagesizelast}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@pagesizelast
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@pagesizelast
%
% \begin{macro}{\set@pdftexpagesize}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/07/10}{if \cs{pdfpage\dots} does not exist
-% \cs{page\dots} will be tried (needed for lua\TeX{}~0.80.1)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/07/10}{if \cs{pdfpage\dots} does not exist
+% \cs{page\dots} will be tried (needed for lua\TeX{}~0.80.1)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\set@dvipspagesize}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/13}{respecting \Option{seascape}}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/14}{can be used inside the document}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/02/06}{not expanded
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/13}{respecting \Option{seascape}}
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/14}{can be used inside the document}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/02/06}{not expanded
% \cs{let}\cs{if@tempswa}\cs{if@dvips} does even work is the later is not
% yet defined}
% \begin{macro}{\setnot@dvipspagesize}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\set@dvipdfmxpagesize}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/18}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/18}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\set@vtexpagesize}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@updatedvipspagesize}
-% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/14}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/10}{deactivated, if \cs{XeTeXversion} exists}^^A
+% \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/14}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/10}{deactivated, if \cs{XeTeXversion} exists}%^^A
% Option \Option{pagesize} needs some internal macros.
% \begin{description}
% \item{Attention:} The definition of these macros may change at usage of
@@ -750,10 +749,10 @@
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@ta@v@is@gt{3.02b}\relax
\renewcommand*{\set@dvipspagesize}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/11/23}{use paper size update only for DVI and PS}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/02/06}{not expanded
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/11/23}{use paper size update only for DVI and PS}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/02/06}{not expanded
% \cs{let}\cs{if@tempswa}\cs{if@dvips} does even work is the later is not
-% yet defined}^^A
+% yet defined}%^^A
% Test whether unspecified \textsc{DVI} output or specified \textsc{PS} output
% is used. Only in that cases the \textsc{PS} code for paper size updates will
% be used.
@@ -859,7 +858,7 @@
}{}%
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/04}{\textsf{preview} workaround}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/04}{\textsf{preview} workaround}%^^A
% If package \Package{preview} has been loaded with option \Option{tightpage},
% which can be recognized by a defined macro \cs{pr@nextbb}, and if the
% package is active, we do not add \textsc{DVI} specials, because it would
@@ -937,11 +936,11 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{dvips}
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new implementation}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/09}{replacement changed}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/09}{info instead of warning}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{it's a standard option not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new implementation}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/09}{replacement changed}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/09}{info instead of warning}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{it's a standard option not deprecated}%^^A
% This option is a kind of obsolete. It is now implemented using
% \Option{pagesize}. But because this is a standard option using several other
% packages we only show a standard option information instead of a deprecated
@@ -957,11 +956,11 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{pdftex}
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new implementation}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{it's a standard option not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/27}{new implementation}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{it's a standard option not deprecated}%^^A
% This option is a kind of obsolete. It is now implemented using
% \Option{pagesize}. But because this is a standard option using several other
% packages we only show a standard option information instead of a deprecated
@@ -982,26 +981,26 @@
% bottom margin. They are also very important for the document classes.
%
% \begin{option}{oneside}
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{pass option from class to
-% \Package{typearea}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{it's a standard option not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{pass option from class to
+% \Package{typearea}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{it's a standard option not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{twoside}
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{pass option from class to
-% \Package{typearea}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new option \Option{twoside!=semi}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/04/09}{the class also uses status signaling with
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{automatic usage of \cs{flushbottom} and
-% \cs{raggedbottom}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{early setting of default}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/18}{use \cs{cleardoubleoddpage} if available}^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{pass option from class to
+% \Package{typearea}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new option \Option{twoside!=semi}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/04/09}{the class also uses status signaling with
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{automatic usage of \cs{flushbottom} and
+% \cs{raggedbottom}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{early setting of default}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/18}{use \cs{cleardoubleoddpage} if available}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@semitwoside}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new boolean switch (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new boolean switch (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@twoside}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{switch also sets \cs{if@semitwoside}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{switch also sets \cs{if@semitwoside}}%^^A
% Do we have a single sided or double sided layout?
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&typearea&options>
@@ -1033,8 +1032,10 @@
\def\FamilyElseValue{, `semi'}%
\KOMA@set@ifkey{twoside}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/02}{not existing order dependency of
-% \Option{twocolumn} and \Option{twoside} fixed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/11/02}{not existing order dependency of
+% \Option{twocolumn} and \Option{twoside} fixed}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/05}{no \emph{Extrawurst} for letters}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/05}{mising \cs{sloppy} in twocolumn mode added}%^^A
% From v3.17 until 3.19a the classes used a local switch
% \Macro{if@tempswa}. As a result of this option \Option{twocolumn} was not
% able to recognize double sided layout. Because of this it was essential to
@@ -1050,11 +1051,10 @@
\ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
%<*class>
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.17}%
-%<*!letter>
\if@twoside\flushbottom
- \else\if@twocolumn\flushbottom\else\raggedbottom\fi\fi
-%</!letter>
-%<letter> \raggedbottom
+ \else
+ \if@twocolumn\sloppy\flushbottom\else\raggedbottom\fi
+ \fi
\fi
%</class>
\KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue{.%
@@ -1089,26 +1089,27 @@
{oneside}{twoside=false}
%</(class|(package&typearea))&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A twoside
-% \end{option}^^A oneside
+% \end{option}%^^A twoside
+% \end{option}%^^A oneside
%
% \begin{option}{onecolumn}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{option moved to package \Package{typearea}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{the classes pass the option to
-% \Package{typearea}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard option but not deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{option moved to package \Package{typearea}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{the classes pass the option to
+% \Package{typearea}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{standard option but not deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{twocolumn}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{option moved to package \Package{typearea}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{the classes pass the option to
-% \Package{typearea}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.98a}{2007/01/08}{passing the correct option}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/04/09}{the class also uses status signaling with
-% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/16}{\cs{sloppy}, \cs{raggedbottom} and
-% \cs{flushbottom} delayed}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{option moved to package \Package{typearea}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/11/23}{the classes pass the option to
+% \Package{typearea}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.98a}{2007/01/08}{passing the correct option}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13a}{2014/04/09}{the class also uses status signaling with
+% \cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/02/16}{\cs{sloppy}, \cs{raggedbottom} and
+% \cs{flushbottom} delayed}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/05}{no \emph{Extrawurst} for letters}%^^A
% Do we have a single column or two columns layout?
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*(class|(package&typearea))&options>
@@ -1130,7 +1131,12 @@
{\expandafter\AtEndOfClass}\fi
{\expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.17}%
\if@twocolumn\twocolumn\sloppy\flushbottom
- \else\onecolumn\if@twoside\flushbottom\else\raggedbottom\fi\fi
+ \else
+ \onecolumn
+ \if@twoside\flushbottom\else
+ \raggedbottom
+ \fi
+ \fi
\fi}%
%</class>
\fi
@@ -1157,8 +1163,8 @@
{onecolumn}{twocolumn=false}
%</(class|(package&typearea))&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A twocolumn
-% \end{option}^^A onecolumn
+% \end{option}%^^A twocolumn
+% \end{option}%^^A onecolumn
%
%
% \subsection{Influencing size of head and foot and margins}
@@ -1169,10 +1175,10 @@
% area or not.
%
% \begin{option}{headlines}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/06}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/06}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
% \begin{option}{footlines}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{new}%^^A
% These are two of the recommended options to set the height of the page head
% and footer. Here we set the height by the number of base lines. The number
% is a factor to \cs{baselineskip} and therefore a real number.
@@ -1202,10 +1208,10 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{headheight}
-% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/06}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.98c}{2008/04/06}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
% \begin{option}{footheight}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{new}%^^A
% Instead of setting the height of the page head or footer by the number of
% base lines, we can set it also using a length or length value. Note, via
% \Macro{documenclass} or \Macro{usepackage} only length values are supported
@@ -1236,18 +1242,18 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{headinclude}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
% This options determines whether or not the head is part of the typing
% area.
% \begin{option}{headexclude}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\if@hincl}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{direct initialization via \cs{if@hsl},
-% if already defined}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{direct initialization via \cs{if@hsl},
+% if already defined}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@hincltrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@hinclfalse}
% We use a boolean switch to store the decision.
@@ -1265,8 +1271,8 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{headsepline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{\Package{typearea} itself reacts on
-% \Option{headsepline}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{\Package{typearea} itself reacts on
+% \Option{headsepline}}%^^A
% Until \KOMAScript{} v3.20 \Package{typearea} was not able to handle
% sequences of options \Option{headsepline} and \Option{headinclude} to get
% always a correct result. Until v3.18a \Option{headinclude} was prioritized
@@ -1293,21 +1299,21 @@
}
%</package&typearea&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A headsepline
+% \end{option}%^^A headsepline
%
% \begin{option}{footinclude}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
% \begin{option}{footexclude}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}%^^A
% This options determines whether or not the page footer is part of the typing
% area.
% \begin{macro}{\if@fincl}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{direct initialization via \cs{if@fsl},
-% if already defined}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{direct initialization via \cs{if@fsl},
+% if already defined}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@fincltrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@finclfalse}
% We use a boolean switch to store the decision.
@@ -1325,10 +1331,10 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{footsepline}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/03}{has to set \cs{if@fincl} instead of
-% \cs{if@hincl}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{\Package{typearea} itself reacts on
-% \Option{footsepline}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/03/03}{has to set \cs{if@fincl} instead of
+% \cs{if@hincl}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/12}{\Package{typearea} itself reacts on
+% \Option{footsepline}}%^^A
% Until \KOMAScript{} v3.20 \Package{typearea} was not able to handle
% sequences of options \Option{footsepline} and \Option{footinclude} to get
% always a correct result. Until v3.18a \Option{footinclude} was prioritized
@@ -1355,22 +1361,22 @@
}
%</package&typearea&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A footsepline
+% \end{option}%^^A footsepline
%
% \begin{option}{mpinclude}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
% \begin{option}{mpexclude}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}%^^A
% Some documents have a lot of large margin notes. Optical these margin notes
% are more part of the typing area than the margin. This options determines
% whether or not margin notes should be part of the typing area.
% \begin{macro}{\if@mincl}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/07/08}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@mincltrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@minclfalse}
% We use a boolean switch to store the decision. Note, if the margin notes are
@@ -1443,11 +1449,11 @@
% still implemented.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ta@divlist}
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/28}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{the list provides values from font size
-% 1\,pt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/28}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{the list provides values from font size
+% 1\,pt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ta@divlistelse}
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu (internal)}%^^A
% We need a default settings for 10\,pt, 11\,pt and 12\,pt. But we define it
% only if they has not been defined before. So classes could define other
% defaults before loading \Package{typearea}.
@@ -1469,10 +1475,10 @@
% depending on the font size given by the real number argument. The real
% number will be rounded to the nearest integer.
% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{usage of the default value list}
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{usage of the extended list}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{respect option \Option{mpinclude}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{font size does not need to be an integer}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/05}{paper size test added}^^A
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{usage of the extended list}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{respect option \Option{mpinclude}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/11}{font size does not need to be an integer}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/03/05}{paper size test added}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&typearea&body>
\newcommand*{\ta@divfor}[1]{%
@@ -1552,13 +1558,13 @@
% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
%
% \begin{macro}{\SetDIVList}
-% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/10/28}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{\cs{ta@divlist} enthält Werte für
-% Schriftgrößen ab 1pt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{deprecated command}^^A
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/10/28}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{\cs{ta@divlist} enthält Werte für
+% Schriftgrößen ab 1pt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{deprecated command}%^^A
% Der Befehl \cs{SetDIVList} tut nichts weiter als die innere Variable
-% für die schriftgrößenabhängige \emph{DIV}-Liste \cs{ta@divlist} neu
-% zu definieren. Dabei können \emph{DIV}-Werte für Größen ab 10\,pt
+% für die schriftgrößenabhängige \emph{DIV}-Liste \cs{ta@divlist} neu
+% zu definieren. Dabei können \emph{DIV}-Werte für Größen ab 10\,pt
% gesetzt werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&typearea&body>
@@ -1575,11 +1581,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\SetXDIVList}
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{deprecated command}^^A
-% Da mit \cs{SetDIVList} aus Kompatibilitätsgründen nur Werte für
-% Größen ab 10\,pt gesetzt werden können, wird für Werte ab 1\,pt
-% ein neuer Befehl benötigt.
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{deprecated command}%^^A
+% Da mit \cs{SetDIVList} aus Kompatibilitätsgründen nur Werte für
+% Größen ab 10\,pt gesetzt werden können, wird für Werte ab 1\,pt
+% ein neuer Befehl benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\SetXDIVList[1]{%
\PackageWarning{typearea}{\string\SetXDIVList\space is
@@ -1606,10 +1612,10 @@
% processed.
%
% \begin{Length}{\ta@bcor}
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{definition of the dimension before option
-% \Option{BCOR}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{definition using \cs{newlength} instead of
-% \cs{newdimen}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{definition of the dimension before option
+% \Option{BCOR}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{definition using \cs{newlength} instead of
+% \cs{newdimen}}%^^A
% We need a length to store the binding correction. It is initializes to 0\,pt
% implicitly by \Macro{newlength}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1619,8 +1625,8 @@
% \end{Length}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ta@div}
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{definition of the dimension before option
-% \Option{BCOR}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{definition of the dimension before option
+% \Option{BCOR}}%^^A
% We need a counter for the divisor (aka \emph{DIV}). It is initializes to
% 0\,pt implicitly by \Macro{newcount}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1653,9 +1659,9 @@
% \end{Length}
%
% \begin{option}{BCOR}
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
% The value is written into the length \cs{ta@bcor}. Several symbolic values
% are supported that have to be converted into a length. Note, while loading
% the package symbolic values are nonsense.
@@ -1671,8 +1677,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% After loading the package we have to do a little bit more, because we need
% to recalculate the areas.
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/30}{\cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{\cs{KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/30}{\cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{\cs{KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue} added}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndOfPackage{%
\KOMA@key{BCOR}{%
@@ -1686,9 +1692,9 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{DIV}
-% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{neue Option}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/01/25}{neue Option}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{new implementation using \textsf{keyval}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{status signaling using \cs{FamilyKeyState}}%^^A
% The value is written into the counter \cs{ta@div}. Several symbolic values
% are supported and have to be converted into a counter. Note, while loading
% the package symbolic values are nonsense.
@@ -1712,8 +1718,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% After loading the package we have to do a little bit more, because we need
% to recalculate the areas.
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/30}{\cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{\cs{KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/06/30}{\cs{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/07/23}{\cs{KOMA@kav@xreplacevalue} added}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndOfPackage{%
\KOMA@key{DIV}{%
@@ -1731,8 +1737,8 @@
% margins providing an optional binding correction and depending on a
% divisor.
% \begin{macro}{\@typearea}
-% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{moved main calculation into \cs{@typearea}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/20}{\cs{selectfont} added}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{moved main calculation into \cs{@typearea}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/08/20}{\cs{selectfont} added}%^^A
% The calculation itself is done in \cs{@typearea}. This command does not need
% any parameters because it uses \cs{ta@div} and \cs{ta@bcor}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1753,8 +1759,8 @@
% The with of the margin note column depends in the horizontal block size,
% whether or not is should be part of the typing area and whether of not we
% have a double sided document.
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{\cs{marginparwidth} depends on
-% \Option{mpinclude}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{\cs{marginparwidth} depends on
+% \Option{mpinclude}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@mincl
\marginparwidth=\ta@hblk
@@ -1874,8 +1880,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Last but not least we have take care that the typing area consists of an
% integer number of text lines.
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/09/12}{setting \cs{topskip}}
-% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{setting \cs{maxdepth}}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/09/12}{setting \cs{topskip}}
+% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/04}{setting \cs{maxdepth}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{@ptsize}{%
\topskip=\f@size\p@
@@ -1889,7 +1895,7 @@
\do{\advance\textheight by\baselineskip}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@typearea
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@typearea
%
% \begin{macro}{\ta@modiv}
% Needed by \cs{typearea}. The first parameter will be divided by the second
@@ -1911,7 +1917,7 @@
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}%
\divide\@tempdimb by\ta@div
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/06/22}{\cs{ifdim} instead of \cs{ifnum}}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/06/22}{\cs{ifdim} instead of \cs{ifnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim \@tempdima<\@tempdimb
\advance\ta@div by\m@ne
@@ -1928,10 +1934,10 @@
% case letters (minors) and three upper case letters (majors). Normally the
% weight of a letter depends on the language but we use same weight for each
% letter.
-% \changes{v2.7i}{2001/05/17}{avoid overflows if a very large font is
-% used}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/06}{\cs{normalfont} \cs{normalsize} added}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/20}{fix of large font calculation}^^A
+% \changes{v2.7i}{2001/05/17}{avoid overflows if a very large font is
+% used}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/06}{\cs{normalfont} \cs{normalsize} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/20}{fix of large font calculation}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\ta@temp@goodwidth{%
\settowidth{\ta@temp}{\normalfont\normalsize
@@ -1955,9 +1961,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AfterCalculatingTypearea}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/29}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifstar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/29}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifstar}}%^^A
% Users can influence the behaviour of \cs{typearea} by a hook. The star
% variation adds the code locally the non-star variation globally.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1966,7 +1972,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@typearea@end}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/29}{defined again but completely different}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/29}{defined again but completely different}%^^A
% Macro \cs{@typearea@end} is a hook that is executed at the end of
% \cs{typearea} but before the activation of the new settings. So you can
% change the result of \cs{typearea}.
@@ -1977,8 +1983,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\activateareas}
-% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/29}{new name for old macro}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/07}{respect option \texttt{usegeometry}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96a}{2006/11/29}{new name for old macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/07}{respect option \texttt{usegeometry}}%^^A
% This macro is used to activate the new typing area and margin settings
% inside the document body. It is a hack, because is uses internal \LaTeX{}
% kernel code.
@@ -1990,8 +1996,8 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@atdocument
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/04/03}{info instead of warning if used inside the
-% document body}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/04/03}{info instead of warning if used inside the
+% document body}%^^A
% But if, we show an info, because it is a hack. It depends in the \LaTeX{}
% release. Nevertheless, it seems to be stable from the very first \LaTeXe{}
% release. So we use an info only. Before v3.23 we have used a warning.
@@ -2020,7 +2026,7 @@
\KOMAoptions{pagesize=\@pagesizelast}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/18}{adapt the \Option{parskip} settings}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/18}{adapt the \Option{parskip} settings}%^^A
% From v3.17 changes of the typing area can immediately change some of the
% \Option{parskip} settings. Before |\begin{document}| the change will be done
% automatically at |\begin{document}| and therefore adding it here is correct.
@@ -2089,8 +2095,8 @@
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{scr@geometryargs}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/02/07}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@geometryargs}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/02/07}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% The initialization of the \Package{geometry} options is empty. It will be
% filled automatically by \cs{activateareas}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2099,14 +2105,14 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{waste comments removed}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new symbolic values \texttt{current},
-% \texttt{default}, \texttt{calc}, \texttt{classic}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/06}{new symbolic value \texttt{last}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/21}{warn if \cs{typearea} is used inside a
-% group}^^A
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{using \cs{scr@grouplevel@test}}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{page footer height configurable}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{waste comments removed}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{new symbolic values \texttt{current},
+% \texttt{default}, \texttt{calc}, \texttt{classic}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/06}{new symbolic value \texttt{last}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/21}{warn if \cs{typearea} is used inside a
+% group}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{using \cs{scr@grouplevel@test}}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{page footer height configurable}%^^A
%
% The symbolic values of the obligatory argument of \cs{typearea}:
% \begin{center}\begin{tabular}{lll}
@@ -2150,7 +2156,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Before we do the calculation we need to start a new page if we are inside
% the document's body. And we need to select the document font size.
-% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/20}{select document font size}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95a}{2006/07/20}{select document font size}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@atdocument\newpage\fi
\normalsize
@@ -2159,8 +2165,8 @@
% it. If we need to calculate it we use 1.25 of the base lines distance. This
% gives enough room for optional separation lines (which are set outside if
% use \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}).
-% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{page head height depends on base line
-% distance}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{page head height depends on base line
+% distance}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{ta@hh}{%
\headheight=1.25\baselineskip
@@ -2195,13 +2201,13 @@
\marginparsep=1cc
\marginparpush=0.45\baselineskip
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\textit{DIV}=0 tries to use a value from the
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{\textit{DIV}=0 tries to use a value from the
% default list}
% Before we do the calculation we test, whether the resulting divisor is
% 0. Values from 0 up to 3 are not possible because we use three parts for the
% margins. So we can use 0 to get a value from the default value list if
% available.
-% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{warning message changed}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/12/29}{warning message changed}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\ta@div=\z@
\@ifundefined{@ptsize}{%
@@ -2220,8 +2226,8 @@
\ta@divfor{\@ptsize}%
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{optional \emph{klassischer
-% Buchseitenkanon}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{optional \emph{klassischer
+% Buchseitenkanon}}%^^A
% Another special case is if the divisor is 3. In this case we calculate a
% divisor near to the \emph{klassischer Buchseitenkanon}. This means we try to
% have the height of the typing area is as near as possible the width of the
@@ -2245,7 +2251,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Sometimes we need more vertical space than available. In this case we use
% another calculation. This will be defined later.
-% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/06/22}{\cs{ifdim} instead of \cs{ifnum}}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/06/22}{\cs{ifdim} instead of \cs{ifnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifdim \ta@temp >\paperheight
\PackageWarningNoLine{typearea}{%
@@ -2278,7 +2284,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% If we did not found a good value until this point, we try to calculate the
% optimal divisor.
-% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{improved optimal divisor calculation}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{improved optimal divisor calculation}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\ta@div <4
\typeout{DIV calculation for typearea with good linewidth.}%
@@ -2295,8 +2301,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% In two column mode each text line has two such columns plus the column
% separation width.
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/12/13}{\texttt{DIVcalc} uses wider columns in two
-% column mode}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/12/13}{\texttt{DIVcalc} uses wider columns in two
+% column mode}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
\addtolength{\ta@temp}{\ta@temp}%
@@ -2324,8 +2330,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% The width of block and the width of the paper can be used to calculate the
% divisor.
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{respect \Option{mpinclude} at the calculation
-% of the best divisor}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{respect \Option{mpinclude} at the calculation
+% of the best divisor}%^^A
% If option \Option{mpinclude} is active, we have to multiply the divisor with
% $\frac{3}{3+m}$. $m$ is the number of blocks used for the margin notes. If
% $m=1$ we have an factor of $\frac{3}{4}=0.75$. More difficult would be not
@@ -2347,7 +2353,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Now, we test the vertical sizes. Again a minimum block size is of 5\,mm will
% be used. But we have to take care the 1\,in of \TeX!
-% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/06/22}{\cs{ifdim} instead of \cs{ifnum}}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/06/22}{\cs{ifdim} instead of \cs{ifnum}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\ta@temp}{-1in}%
\addtolength{\ta@temp}{5mm}%
@@ -2356,9 +2362,9 @@
% This would be the minimum top margin. If the margin is less, we need another
% divisor. In this case we also have to recognize whether the page head and
% footer are part of the margins or the typing area.
-% \changes{v2.5b}{1997/06/29}{take care for \Option{headinclude} and
+% \changes{v2.5b}{1997/06/29}{take care for \Option{headinclude} and
% \Option{footinclude} while calculating the divisor for minimum top
-% margin}^^A
+% margin}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\ta@temp}{15mm}%
\if@hincl\else
@@ -2380,21 +2386,21 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\@typearea
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/28}{write layout values to the \File{log} file}^^A
-% \changes{v2.4i}{1996/11/11}{write to the \File{log} file later}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/28}{write layout values to the \File{log} file}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.4i}{1996/11/11}{write to the \File{log} file later}%^^A
% \changes{v2.4i}{1996/11/11}{execute \cs{@typearea@end} at the end of
-% \cs{typearea}}^^A
+% \cs{typearea}}%^^A
% \changes{v2.4j}{1996/12/04}{\File{log} output with only one
-% \cs{textheight} but additional \cs{baselineskip}}^^A
+% \cs{textheight} but additional \cs{baselineskip}}%^^A
% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{"`arithmetic overflow"' with \Option{landscape}
-% fixed}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/01/30}{warning in two column mode fixed}^^A
+% fixed}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/01/30}{warning in two column mode fixed}%^^A
% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/08}{use \cs{ta@layoutinfo} to write the layout
-% values into the \File{log} file}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{warning for sub-optimal settings changed}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/16}{warning about long lines changed}^^A
+% values into the \File{log} file}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{warning for sub-optimal settings changed}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/16}{warning about long lines changed}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/16}{warning about small lines changed and
-% replaced by an info}^^A
+% replaced by an info}%^^A
% Last but not least we write some layout values into the \File{log} file. For
% some of the information we need additional calculations, e.g., of a good
% line width.
@@ -2479,7 +2485,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ta@layoutinfo}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/08}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/08}{new (internal)}%^^A
% Write several layout information into the \File{log} file. The first
% argument is the current divisor and the second the discrepancy from the
% optimal divisor or empty or \cs{relax}.
@@ -2524,7 +2530,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\recalctypearea}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{new}%^^A
% This command can be used to recalculate the typing area and the margins with
% the divisor and the binding correction that has been used last. The command
% is available only after loading the package. So it is an indicator if we
@@ -2540,7 +2546,7 @@
% list. So the final initialization of the typing area and margins is very
% easy.
% \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/06}{initialization using symbolic values
-% \texttt{current}}^^A
+% \texttt{current}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&typearea&final>
\typearea[current]{current}
@@ -2550,13 +2556,13 @@
% \subsection{Storage and reactivation of typing area and margin settings}
%
% \begin{macro}{\storeareas}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Hooks at the beginning and end of the defined
-% macro}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{Hooks at the beginning and end of the defined
+% macro}%^^A
% You can store the current settings of the typing area and the margins in a
% macro. If you use the macro later the stored settings will be restored.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@grouplevel@test}
-% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/13}{new (internal)}%^^A
% Warn if restoring the settings is used inside a group.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&typearea&body>
@@ -2622,23 +2628,23 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeRestoreareas}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifstar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifstar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AfterRestoreareas}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifstar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifstar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@storeareashook}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@storeareas@before@hook}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@storeareas@before@current@hook}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@storeareas@after@hook}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@storeareas@after@current@hook}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/20}{new (internal)}%^^A
% Adds code to one of the hooks of the macros defined by \cs{storeareas}.
% The star variants adds code only to not yet defined macros. The non-star
% variant also changes already defined macros.
@@ -2660,15 +2666,15 @@
\newcommand*{\scr@storeareas@after@current@hook}{}
%</package&typearea&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@storeareas@after@current@hook
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@storeareas@after@hook
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@storeareas@before@current@hook
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@storeareas@before@hook
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@storeareashook
-% \end{macro}^^A \AfterRestoreareas
-% \end{macro}^^A \BeforeRestoreareas
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@grouplevel@test
-% \end{macro}^^A \storeareas
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@storeareas@after@current@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@storeareas@after@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@storeareas@before@current@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@storeareas@before@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@storeareashook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AfterRestoreareas
+% \end{macro}%^^A \BeforeRestoreareas
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@grouplevel@test
+% \end{macro}%^^A \storeareas
%
% \subsection{Calculation of margins for a given typing area}
%
@@ -2677,7 +2683,7 @@
% typing area.
%
% \begin{option}{areasetadvanced}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{new}%^^A
% Switch to advanced version of \cs{areaset}. This does calculate margins
% more like \cs{typearea}. Nevertheless, there's still a difference at the top
% margin, because \cs{typerea} doesn't balance differences in calculated
@@ -2691,13 +2697,13 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{macro}{\areaset}
-% \changes{v2.1b}{1994/12/31}{\cs{headheight} depends on \cs{@ptsize}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{\cs{headheight} depends on \cs{f@size} instead
-% of \cs{@ptsize}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{symbolic value \texttt{current} for the
-% optional argument}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{execute \cs{@typearea@end} at the end of
-% \cs{areaset}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1994/12/31}{\cs{headheight} depends on \cs{@ptsize}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.6}{2000/01/04}{\cs{headheight} depends on \cs{f@size} instead
+% of \cs{@ptsize}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{symbolic value \texttt{current} for the
+% optional argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/05}{execute \cs{@typearea@end} at the end of
+% \cs{areaset}}%^^A
% If we have given width and height of the typing area we still can calculate
% the margins. Again we want to use this not only in the document preamble but
% also in the document body.
@@ -2713,9 +2719,9 @@
\if@atdocument\newpage\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we do the calculation.
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/09/12}{set \cs{topskip}}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/08}{use \cs{ta@layoutinfo} to write layout
-% information into the \File{log} file}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/09/12}{set \cs{topskip}}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/10/08}{use \cs{ta@layoutinfo} to write layout
+% information into the \File{log} file}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\textwidth}{#2}%
\setlength{\textheight}{#3}%
@@ -2728,7 +2734,7 @@
\advance\ta@hblk by-\ta@bcor
\advance\ta@hblk by-\textwidth
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{advanced version with different margin widths}%
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{advanced version with different margin widths}%
% With v3.11 we will have an advanced version of \cs{areaset}. This
% version takes care to option \texttt{mpinclude}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2776,7 +2782,7 @@
\advance\topskip by 10\p@
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{advanced version with different margin widths}%
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{advanced version with different margin widths}%
% With v3.11 we will have an advanced version of \cs{areaset}. This
% version uses the head height algorithm of \cs{typearea}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2794,7 +2800,7 @@
\fi
\headsep=1.5\baselineskip
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{changes for height of foot}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/26}{changes for height of foot}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{footheight}{\newlength\footheight}{}
\if@areasetadvanced
@@ -2836,7 +2842,7 @@
\fi
\marginparsep=1cc
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{advanced version with different
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{advanced version with different
% \cs{marginparwidth} and unchanged \cs{marginparsep}}%
% With version 3.11 we will have an advanced version of \cs{areaset}. This
% version supports \texttt{mpinclude} option like \cs{typearea}.
@@ -2853,9 +2859,9 @@
\marginparpush=0.45\baselineskip
\ta@layoutinfo{areaset}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{using \cs{@areaset@end}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.16a}{2015/02/11}{using \cs{footheight} for calculation of
-% page usage}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{using \cs{@areaset@end}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.16a}{2015/02/11}{using \cs{footheight} for calculation of
+% page usage}%^^A
% Since v3.11 we also support \cs{AfterSettingArea} analogous to
% \cs{AfterCalculatingTypearea}:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2878,9 +2884,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AfterSettingArea}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% The user may influence the result of \cs{areaset}. The star version works
% local while the non-star version is global.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2889,7 +2895,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@areaset@end}
-% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.11}{2012/04/17}{new}%^^A
% Macro \cs{@areaset@end} is a hook to make it possible to add some
% instructions to the end of the \cs{areaset} command. This will be executed
% before the activation of the settings inside a document.
@@ -2907,17 +2913,17 @@
% matching options.
%
% \begin{option}{DIVcalc}
-% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{implemented using option \Option{DIV}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/11/04}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{implemented using option \Option{DIV}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}%^^A
% \begin{option}{DIVclassic}
-% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{implemented using option \Option{DIV}}^^A
-% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
-% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}^^A
+% \changes{v2.4n}{1997/05/28}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/04}{implemented using option \Option{DIV}}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.97d}{2007/10/03}{\cs{PackageInfo} replaced by
+% \cs{PackageInfoNoLine}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/21}{deprecated}%^^A
% The former form of \Option{DIV=}\Option{calc} and
% \Option{DIV=}\Option{classic}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -2926,8 +2932,8 @@
\KOMA@DeclareDeprecatedOption[typearea]{DIVclassic}{DIV=classic}
%</package&typearea&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A DIVclassic
-% \end{option}^^A DIVcalc
+% \end{option}%^^A DIVclassic
+% \end{option}%^^A DIVcalc
%
% \begin{option}{a\meta{integer}paper}
% \begin{option}{b\meta{integer}paper}
@@ -2946,24 +2952,24 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\x@paper}
% \begin{macro}{\x@@paper}
-% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{neue Mustererkennung für die
-% Papiergröße}^^A
-% Diese Makros werden ebenfalls später benötigt, wenn die Papiergröße
+% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{neue Mustererkennung für die
+% Papiergröße}%^^A
+% Diese Makros werden ebenfalls später benötigt, wenn die Papiergröße
% festgelegt wird.
% \begin{macro}{\isopaper}
-% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{es sind auch Großbuchstaben erlaubt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{verwendet \cs{ISO@PaperNameToSize}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{es sind auch Großbuchstaben erlaubt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{verwendet \cs{ISO@PaperNameToSize}}%^^A
% Da das Makro \cs{isopaper} zur Berechnung unterschiedlicher
-% ISO/DIN-Papierformate in der Mustererkennung für die Papiergröße
-% benötigt wird, wurde dieses Makro ebenfalls vorgezogen.
+% ISO/DIN-Papierformate in der Mustererkennung für die Papiergröße
+% benötigt wird, wurde dieses Makro ebenfalls vorgezogen.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&typearea&options>
\newcommand\isopaper[2][a]{%
% \end{macrocode}
% Das Makro kennt zwei Parameter, von denen der erste und optionale
-% die Grundgröße angibt. Die Angabe erfolgt über einen
-% Buchstaben. Möglich sind
+% die Grundgröße angibt. Die Angabe erfolgt über einen
+% Buchstaben. Möglich sind
% \begin{description}
% \item[a] -- ISO/DIN-A-Format
% \item[b] -- ISO/DIN-B-Format
@@ -2974,11 +2980,11 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\ISO@PaperNameToSize[typearea]#1#2\@nil
% \end{macrocode}
-% Jetzt noch die gewünschte Ausrichtung beachten.
-% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/10/23}{gewünschte Papierausrichtung wird
-% beachtet}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{Papierausrichtung entsprechend dem
-% tatsächlichen Format}^^A
+% Jetzt noch die gewünschte Ausrichtung beachten.
+% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/10/23}{gewünschte Papierausrichtung wird
+% beachtet}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{Papierausrichtung entsprechend dem
+% tatsächlichen Format}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifnum\scr@ta@v@is@ge{3.22}\relax
\scr@setpaperorientation
@@ -2989,7 +2995,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \textsf{typearea} verwendet eine eigene Fehlerausgabe.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@UnknownPaperSize@typearea}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/22}{neu (intern)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\ProvideUnknownPaperSizeError{typearea}{%
\PackageError{typearea}{%
@@ -3004,10 +3010,10 @@
\setlength{\paperheight}{1189sp}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@typearea
-% \end{macro}^^A \isopaper
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@UnknownPaperSize@typearea
+% \end{macro}%^^A \isopaper
% \begin{macro}{\scr@setpaperorientation}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{neu (intern)}
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{neu (intern)}
% Stellt die Papierausrichtung entsprechend \cs{if@landscape} ein.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@setpaperorientation{%
@@ -3019,22 +3025,22 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@switchpapersizes}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{neu (intern)}
-% Vertauscht zwei Längen.
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{neu (intern)}
+% Vertauscht zwei Längen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\scr@switchpapersizes{%
\@tempdima\paperwidth\paperwidth\paperheight\paperheight\@tempdima
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@switchlength
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@setpaperorientation
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@switchlength
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@setpaperorientation
% \begin{macro}{\iso@paper}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Ein ganz ähnlicher interner Befehl erhält den gesamten Namen des
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Ein ganz ähnlicher interner Befehl erhält den gesamten Namen des
% ISO-Papierformats als einziges Argument.
% \begin{macro}{\iso@@paper}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A
-% Dieses Argument wird dann über einen weiteren internen Befehl per
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{neu (intern)}%^^A
+% Dieses Argument wird dann über einen weiteren internen Befehl per
% Mustererkennung in den Kennbuchstaben und eine Zahl zerlegt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\iso@paper}[1]{\expandafter\iso@@paper#1\@nil}
@@ -3056,8 +3062,8 @@
}
%</package&typearea&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \iso@@paper
-% \end{macro}^^A \iso@paper
+% \end{macro}%^^A \iso@@paper
+% \end{macro}%^^A \iso@paper
% \selectlanguage{english}
%
% \begin{option}{DIV\meta{integer}}
@@ -3075,10 +3081,10 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@BCOR}
% \begin{macro}{\@@BCOR}
-% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{Einzelzeichenscanner durch
-% Mustererkennung ersetzt}^^A
-% Das Makro \cs{@BCOR} wird später benötigt, um die Option
-% \texttt{BCOR\emph{BCOR}} zu erkennen. Die Option wird über ihr
+% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{Einzelzeichenscanner durch
+% Mustererkennung ersetzt}%^^A
+% Das Makro \cs{@BCOR} wird später benötigt, um die Option
+% \texttt{BCOR\emph{BCOR}} zu erkennen. Die Option wird über ihr
% Muster erkannt.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*(class|(package&typearea))&options>
@@ -3091,14 +3097,14 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifstr{#1}{}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Außerdem ist der dritte Parameter dann \texttt{BCOR}.
+% Außerdem ist der dritte Parameter dann \texttt{BCOR}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifstr{#3}{BCOR}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Der zweite Parameter sollte dann die Größe enthalten. Ist dies
+% Der zweite Parameter sollte dann die Größe enthalten. Ist dies
% nicht der Fall, wird ein Fehler gemeldet (Fehlerzeile ist dann
% \cs{ProcessOptions}).
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{missing deprecated option warning added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{missing deprecated option warning added}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<class> \PassOptionsToPackage{BCOR#2}{typearea}%
%<*package>
@@ -3108,8 +3114,8 @@
}{\scr@pti@nerr@r}%
%</package>
% \end{macrocode}
-% In allen anderen Fällen ist es nicht diese Option, dann wird ein
-% Fehler ausgegeben. Stattdessen könnte hier auch auf weitere Optionen
+% In allen anderen Fällen ist es nicht diese Option, dann wird ein
+% Fehler ausgegeben. Stattdessen könnte hier auch auf weitere Optionen
% getestet werden.
% \begin{macrocode}
}{\scr@pti@nerr@r}%
@@ -3121,10 +3127,10 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\@DIV}
% \begin{macro}{\@@DIV}
-% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{Einzelzeichenscanner durch
-% Mustererkennung ersetzt}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{missing deprecated option warning added}^^A
-% Die grundsätzliche Funktion ist die gleiche wie bei \cs{@BCOR},
+% \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{Einzelzeichenscanner durch
+% Mustererkennung ersetzt}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{missing deprecated option warning added}%^^A
+% Die grundsätzliche Funktion ist die gleiche wie bei \cs{@BCOR},
% \cs{@@BCOR}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@DIV}{\expandafter\@@DIV\CurrentOption DIVDIV\@@DIV}
@@ -3148,15 +3154,15 @@
\else\@BCOR\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@DIV
-% \end{macro}^^A \@DIV
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@DIV
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@DIV
%
% \begin{option}{headlines\meta{integer}}
% \begin{macro}{\@headlines}
% \begin{macro}{\@@headlines}
-% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{neue Mustererkennung für die Anzahl
-% der Kopfzeilen}^^A
-% Das Macro \cs{@headlines} wird benötigt, um die Option
+% \changes{v2.7g}{2001/04/17}{neue Mustererkennung für die Anzahl
+% der Kopfzeilen}%^^A
+% Das Macro \cs{@headlines} wird benötigt, um die Option
% \texttt{headlines} zu erkennen.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@headlines}{%
@@ -3172,8 +3178,8 @@
}
%</(class|(package&typearea))&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@headlines
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@headlines
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@headlines
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@headlines
%
% \selectlanguage{english}
% Starting point for all the deprecated pattern matching options is
@@ -3183,10 +3189,10 @@
%
% The documentation of the deprecated part of the feature is still in German.
% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
-% Zurück zur Mustererkennung. Diese ist tatsächlich etwas einfacher
-% als die in den beiden Fällen zuvor.
+% Zurück zur Mustererkennung. Diese ist tatsächlich etwas einfacher
+% als die in den beiden Fällen zuvor.
% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/10/23}{Optionen werden nach der neuen Syntax an
-% typearea weitergeleitet}^^A
+% typearea weitergeleitet}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*(class|(package&typearea))&options>
\newcommand*{\x@paper}{%
@@ -3224,10 +3230,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@pti@nerr@r}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/20}{\cs{OptionNotUsed} statt
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/20}{\cs{OptionNotUsed} statt
% \cs{PackageError}}
-% Falls die zuätzliche Option nicht \texttt{BCOR}, \texttt{DIV},
-% \texttt{headlines} oder eine bekannte Papiergröße ist, ist die
+% Falls die zuätzliche Option nicht \texttt{BCOR}, \texttt{DIV},
+% \texttt{headlines} oder eine bekannte Papiergröße ist, ist die
% Option nicht verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@pti@nerr@r}{
@@ -3238,22 +3244,22 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/09/12}{\cs{lco@test} bei den geparsten Optionen
-% eingefügt}
+% eingefügt}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption*{%
%<letter> \lco@test
\x@paper}
%</(class|(package&typearea))&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A headline...
-% \end{option}^^A DIV...
-% \end{option}^^A BCOR...
-% \end{macro}^^A \x@paper
-% \end{macro}^^A \x@@paper
-% \end{option}^^A d...paper
-% \end{option}^^A c...paper
-% \end{option}^^A b...paper
-% \end{option}^^A a...paper
+% \end{option}%^^A headline...
+% \end{option}%^^A DIV...
+% \end{option}%^^A BCOR...
+% \end{macro}%^^A \x@paper
+% \end{macro}%^^A \x@@paper
+% \end{option}%^^A d...paper
+% \end{option}%^^A c...paper
+% \end{option}%^^A b...paper
+% \end{option}%^^A a...paper
%
% \selectlanguage{english}
%
@@ -3266,7 +3272,7 @@
% not use it any longer. If you need additional options use
% |\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions[.typearea.sty]{KOMA}{...}|.
%
-% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/28}{configuration file \File{typearea.cfg}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/10/28}{configuration file \File{typearea.cfg}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&typearea&options>
\InputIfFileExists{typearea.cfg}{%
@@ -3286,22 +3292,22 @@
% if nothing else was defined by a class. Execution of option \Option{twoside}
% depends already on the setting of \cs{if@twoside} and
% \cs{if@semitwoside}. This may be surprising but nevertheless is correct.
-% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/19}{\cs{relax} after \cs{ProcessOptions} added}^^A
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1995/01/19}{\cs{relax} after \cs{ProcessOptions} added}%^^A
% \changes{v2.96}{2006/08/18}{processing options in order of usage instead of
-% order of declaration}^^A
+% order of declaration}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Usage of \cs{KOMAExecuteOptions} instead of
-% \cs{KOMAoptions}}^^A
+% \cs{KOMAoptions}}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{Usage of \cs{KOMAProcessOptions} instead of
-% \cs{ProcessOptions}}^^A
+% \cs{ProcessOptions}}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/04/19}{set only options that are not an implicit
-% default}^^A
+% default}%^^A
% \changes{v2.97c}{2007/07/18}{explicit setting of a valid value to
-% \texttt{twoside}}^^A
+% \texttt{twoside}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{the default paper size is given by
-% \cs{defaultpagesize}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/02}{\Option{pagesize} is default}^^A
+% \cs{defaultpagesize}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/02}{\Option{pagesize} is default}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\defaultpapersize}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/11}{new}%^^A
% The default paper size. Defined using \cs{providecommand} so it can be
% changed by a class or wrapper package or \File{typearea.cfg} or somewhere
% else before loading \Package{typearea}.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx
index 909be6f30c..b7e98fc70e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-variables.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{160}
+% \CheckSum{243}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-variables.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrkernel-variables.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-variables.dtx 2640 2017-05-08 09:36:55Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-variables.dtx 3262 2019-10-10 08:25:29Z kohm $
%<option>%%% (run: option)
%<body>%%% (run: body)
%<*dtx>
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\def\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-05-08 11:36:55 +0200 (Mon, 08 May 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 10:25:29 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\def\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1638 $
\xdef\fileinfo{\filedate\space\filerevision\space}
@@ -77,7 +77,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-variables.dtx}
@@ -103,7 +102,7 @@
%
% Bei Briefen gibt es eine ganze Reihe von speziellen Variablen. An dieser
% Stelle sei als Beispiel nur das Feld "`Ihr Zeichen"' genannt. Es ist nahezu
-% unmöglich alle diese Felder vorherzusehen. Daher wurde in der neuen
+% unmöglich alle diese Felder vorherzusehen. Daher wurde in der neuen
% Briefklasse ein neuer Mechanismus zur Definition solcher Felder geschaffen.
%
% \iffalse
@@ -117,7 +116,7 @@
% \fi
%
% \subsection{Option}
-% Der Mechanismus ist unabhängig von Optionen.
+% Der Mechanismus ist unabhängig von Optionen.
%
%
% \iffalse
@@ -128,24 +127,24 @@
% \subsection{Anweisungen zum Anlegen und Verwenden von Variablen}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newkomavar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Es wird zwischen zwei Arten von Feldern unterschieden:
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Felder für die Geschäftszeile
-% \item Felder für sonstige Verwendung
+% \item Felder für die Geschäftszeile
+% \item Felder für sonstige Verwendung
% \end{itemize}
-% Felder können aber auch nachträglich zur Geschäftszeile
-% hinzugefügt werden. Die Sternvariante von \cs{newkomavar} führt
+% Felder können aber auch nachträglich zur Geschäftszeile
+% hinzugefügt werden. Die Sternvariante von \cs{newkomavar} führt
% dies jedoch automatisch durch.
% \begin{macro}{\@newkomavar}
% Da mit einer Sternvariante gearbeitet wird, wird ein Hilfsmakro
-% benötigt. Das Makro erhält ein optionales und
+% benötigt. Das Makro erhält ein optionales und
% ein obligatorisches Argument. Das optionale Argument ist dabei die
-% Voreinstellung für den \emph{Ausgabenamen} des Feldes, der
+% Voreinstellung für den \emph{Ausgabenamen} des Feldes, der
% ggf. ausgegeben werden soll. Das obligatorische Argument ist
-% \emph{Name} des Feldes, über den das Feld angesprochen wird.
+% \emph{Name} des Feldes, über den das Feld angesprochen wird.
% Das Makro definiert zwei weitere Makros: \cs{\emph{scr@Name}@var} und
% \cs{scr@\emph{Name}@name}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -188,33 +187,32 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setkomavar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{\cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetname}
-% und \cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetvar}}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Natürlich wird auch ein Befehl benötigt, um die Feldvariablen
-% zu setzen und ihnen ggf. einen neuen Namen für die Ausgabe zu
-% geben. Der \emph{Name} der Feldvariable wird als obligatorisches
-% erstes Argument übergeben. Zusätzlich zum Setzen von Ausgabename oder Wert
-% werden ggf. auch die Hooks \cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetname}
-% bzw. \cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetvar} ausgeführt.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/10/28}{\cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetname} und
+% \cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetvar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Natürlich wird auch ein Befehl benötigt, um die Feldvariable zu setzen und
+% ihnen ggf. einen neuen Namen für die Ausgabe zu geben. Der \emph{Name} der
+% Feldvariable wird als obligatorisches erstes Argument übergeben. Zusätzlich
+% zum Setzen von Ausgabename oder Wert werden ggf. auch die Hooks
+% \cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetname} bzw. \cs{scr@\emph{Name}@postsetvar}
+% ausgeführt.
% \begin{macro}{\@setkomavar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% Da dann zwischen einer Sternvariante und einer normalen
-% unterschieden werden soll wird ein Hilfsmakro benötigt.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% Da dann zwischen einer Sternvariante und einer normalen unterschieden werden
+% soll wird ein Hilfsmakro benötigt.
% \begin{macro}{\@setkomaname}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
% Die Sternvariante definiert nur den Ausgabename neu.
% \begin{macro}{\@@setkomavar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% Da in der normalen Variante nach dem Stern ein optionales Argument
-% folgen kann, wird mit einem weiteren Hilfsmakro gearbeitet. Der
-% \emph{Ausgabename} wird dabei als optionales, zweites Argument
-% übergeben. Der \emph{Inhalt} wird als obligatorisches, drittes
-% Argument übergeben.
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% Da in der normalen Variante nach dem Stern ein optionales Argument folgen
+% kann, wird mit einem weiteren Hilfsmakro gearbeitet. Der \emph{Ausgabename}
+% wird dabei als optionales, zweites Argument übergeben. Der \emph{Inhalt}
+% wird als obligatorisches, drittes Argument übergeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setkomavar}{%
\kernel@ifstar {\@setkomaname}{\@setkomavar}}
@@ -251,7 +249,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@komavar@err}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
% Dieses Makro wird intern in den Makros \cs{setkomavar} und
% \cs{usekomavar} verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -272,26 +270,26 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\usekomavar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{robust}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
-% Selbstverständlich wird auch ein Makro benötigt, um auf den
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{robust}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
+% Selbstverständlich wird auch ein Makro benötigt, um auf den
% Inhalt oder den Ausgabename einer Variablen zugreifen zu
-% können. Mit der normalen Variante wird dabei der Inhalt, mit der
+% können. Mit der normalen Variante wird dabei der Inhalt, mit der
% Sternvariante der Name ausgegeben.
% \begin{macro}{\@usekomavar}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{optionales Argument}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9j}{2002/09/18}{\cs{@firstofone} als Defaultargument
-% eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{optionales Argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9j}{2002/09/18}{\cs{@firstofone} als Defaultargument
+% eingefügt}
% \begin{macro}{\@usekomaname}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{optionales Argument}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9j}{2002/09/18}{\cs{@firstofone} als Defaultargument
-% eingefügt}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{optionales Argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9j}{2002/09/18}{\cs{@firstofone} als Defaultargument
+% eingefügt}
% Da mir einer Sternvariante gearbeitet wird, werden zwei Hilfsmakros
-% benötigt.
+% benötigt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\usekomavar}{%
\kernel@ifstar {\@usekomaname}{\@usekomavar}}
@@ -315,8 +313,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifkomavar}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}^^A
-% Feststellen, ob eine \KOMAScript-Variable überhaupt definiert ist.
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neu}%^^A
+% Feststellen, ob eine \KOMAScript-Variable überhaupt definiert ist.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\ifkomavar}[1]{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{scr@#1@var}{%
@@ -329,19 +327,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifkomavarempty}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{Leerzeichen rausgeworfen}^^A
-% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{robust}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{Leerzeichen rausgeworfen}%^^A
+% \changes{v2.9i}{2002/09/04}{robust}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% Es gibt auch noch ein Makro, um zu testen, ob eine \KOMAScript{}
-% Variable oder deren Name leer ist. Die Sternvariante ist wieder für
-% den Namen zuständig.
+% Variable oder deren Name leer ist. Die Sternvariante ist wieder für
+% den Namen zuständig.
% \begin{macro}{\if@komavarempty}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}^^A
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{die neue Anweisung \cs{ifkomavar} wird
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/01/14}{Neu}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{die neue Anweisung \cs{ifkomavar} wird
% verwendet}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{die Argumente werden nicht mehr direkt gelesen}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{die Argumente werden nicht mehr direkt gelesen}%^^A
% Da mit einer Sternvariante gearbeitet wird, wird wieder ein
% Hilfsmakro verwendet.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -379,6 +377,80 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \selectlanguage{english}
+% \begin{macro}{\foreachkomavar}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/13}{new}%^^A
+% Executes \texttt{\#2} for each variable in the comma separated list
+% \texttt{\#1}. An argument is appended to \texttt{\#2} which is the current
+% variable to be processed. This command is short. So if you want so execute
+% long code you should define a command for it. Sideeffect: \cs{reserved@a} is
+% changed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\foreachkomavar}[2]{%
+ \@for \reserved@a:=#1\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty\else
+ \edef\reserved@a{\unexpanded{#2}{\reserved@a}}\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\foreachkomavarifempty}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/13}{new}%^^A
+% Same like \cs{foreachkomavar} but \texttt{\#2} is called only for empty
+% variables and \texttt{\#3} is called for non empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\foreachkomavarifempty}[3]{%
+ \@for \reserved@a:=#1\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty\else
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\ifkomavarempty{\reserved@a}%
+ {\unexpanded{#2}{\reserved@a}}%
+ {\unexpanded{#3}{\reserved@a}}%
+ }\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\foreachemptykomavar}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/13}{new}%^^A
+% Similar to \cs{foreachemptykomavar} with \texttt{\#3}=\cs{@gobble}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\foreachemptykomavar}[2]{%
+ \@for \reserved@a:=#1\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty\else
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\ifkomavarempty{\reserved@a}{\unexpanded{#2}{\reserved@a}}{}%
+ }\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\foreachnonemptykomavar}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/13}{new}%^^A
+% Similar to \cs{foreachemptykomavar} with \texttt{\#2}=\cs{@gobble}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\foreachnonemptykomavar}[2]{%
+ \@for \reserved@a:=#1\do{%
+ \scr@trim@spaces\reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty\else
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\ifkomavarempty{\reserved@a}{}{\unexpanded{#2}{\reserved@a}}%
+ }\expandafter\reserved@a
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
%
% \iffalse
%</body>
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx
index 19762fed84..51995e3a51 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrkernel-version.dtx
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-% \CheckSum{73}
+% \CheckSum{105}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrkernel-version.dtx
@@ -55,13 +55,13 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-version.dtx 3063 2019-02-01 07:39:11Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-version.dtx 3263 2019-10-12 14:50:03Z kohm $
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
% Nicht verwirren lassen! In dieser Datei steht die Dokumentation und
% der Code vor dem Treiber. Das ist notwendig, weil der Code bereits
-% am Anfang des Treibers selbst benötigt wird.
+% am Anfang des Treibers selbst benötigt wird.
% \fi
%
% \selectlanguage{ngerman}
@@ -74,19 +74,19 @@
% \section{Version des \KOMAScript-Kerns}
%
% Dies ist die erste Datei in allen Dateien, Klassen und Paketen, die
-% zum \KOMAScript-Kern gehören (Ausnahme: \texttt{scrlfile}).
+% zum \KOMAScript-Kern gehören (Ausnahme: \texttt{scrlfile}).
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
%
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAScriptVersion}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/25}{neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/25}{neu}%^^A
% Dieses Makro gibt an, zu welcher \KOMAScript-Version die Datei
-% gehört. Die Klassen und Pakete des \KOMAScript-Kerns verwenden
-% dieses Makro außerdem als eigene Versionsangabe.
+% gehört. Die Klassen und Pakete des \KOMAScript-Kerns verwenden
+% dieses Makro außerdem als eigene Versionsangabe.
% \begin{macro}{\@CheckKOMAScriptVersion}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/25}{neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/25}{neu (intern)}%^^A
% Je nachdem, ob \cs{KOMAScriptVersion} bereits definiert ist nicht,
-% wird die Definition überprüft oder eine globale Definition
+% wird die Definition überprüft oder eine globale Definition
% vorgenommen. Da das ganze auch bei der Erstellung der Doku
% geschieht, wird mit \cs{makeatletter} innerhalb einer Gruppe
% gearbeitet.
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
\fi
%</ignorethis>
\fi
- \@CheckKOMAScriptVersion{2019/02/01 v3.26b KOMA-Script}%
+ \@CheckKOMAScriptVersion{2019/10/12 v3.27 KOMA-Script}%
\endgroup
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
@@ -136,7 +136,6 @@
% \iffalse
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrkernel-version.dtx}
@@ -153,10 +152,10 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@pkgextension}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{Neu (intern)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@clsextension}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{Neu (intern)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{fixed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/17}{Neu (intern)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{fixed}%^^A
% Die beiden sind prinzipiell das gleiche wie \cs{@pkgextension} und
% \cs{@clsextension} aber auch noch nach \cs{begin{document}}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -176,37 +175,60 @@
%<*class>
% \fi
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAClassFileName}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2014/03/12}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2014/03/12}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\KOMAClassName}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/04}{Neu}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/04}{Neu}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\KOMALongClassFileName}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/16}{Neu}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\KOMALongClassName}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/02/16}{Neu}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ClassName}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/04}{Neu}^^A
-% Für \KOMAScript-Klassen wird hier einmalig der Name der Klasse definiert und
+% \changes{v2.95}{2004/11/04}{Neu}%^^A
+% Für \KOMAScript-Klassen wird hier einmalig der Name der Klasse definiert und
% und die Klasse der Klasse angegeben.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\KOMAClassName}{%
-%<article> scrartcl%
+%<article|(letter&long)> scrartcl%
%<report> scrreprt%
%<book> scrbook%
-%<letter> scrlttr2%
+%<letter&!long> scrlttr2%
}
+%<*!long>
+\newcommand*{\KOMAClassFileName}{\KOMAClassName.\@clsextension}
+\edef\KOMAClassFileName{\KOMAClassFileName}
+%</!long>
\newcommand*{\ClassName}{%
-%<article> article%
+%<article|(letter&long)> article%
%<report> report%
%<book> book%
-%<letter> letter%
+%<letter&!long> letter%
}
-\newcommand*{\KOMAClassFileName}{\KOMAClassName.\@clsextension}
-\edef\KOMAClassFileName{\KOMAClassFileName}
+%<*long>
+\newcommand*{\KOMALongClassName}{}
+%<!letter>\edef\KOMALongClassName{scr\ClassName}
+%<letter>\def\KOMALongClassName{scrletter}
+\newcommand*{\KOMALongClassFileName}{\KOMALongClassName.\@clsextension}
+\edef\KOMALongClassFileName{\KOMALongClassFileName}
+%</long>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesClass{\KOMAClassName}[%
+%<!long>\ProvidesClass{\KOMAClassName}[%
+%<long>\ProvidesClass{\KOMALongClassName}[%
%!KOMAScriptVersion
document class (\ClassName)%
]
+%<*long>
+\let\ClassName\relax
+%<letter>\providecommand*{\@ptsize}{12}
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\KOMAClassName\expandafter\relax
+\expandafter\LoadClassWithOptions\expandafter{\KOMAClassName}
+%<letter>\RequirePackage{scrletter}
+%</long>
% \end{macrocode}
% \iffalse
%</class>
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
index 7e2d0be1f9..830d9f2052 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% `scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx'.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil der LaTeX2e KOMA-Script-Sammlung.
%
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
-%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx ALPHA (see date below) kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx 3138 2019-04-04 06:24:53Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<init>%%% (run: init)
%<options>%%% (run: options)
@@ -66,16 +66,14 @@
%<*dtx>
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
-% TODO: Replace \thisfiledate and \thisfilerevision by \filedate and
-% \filerevision
- \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\thisfiledate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-09-10 08:00:00 $
- \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\thisfilerevision{r#2 ALPHA}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 0 $
+ \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-04-04 08:24:53 +0200 (Thu, 04 Apr 2019) $
+ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{v0.1.#2 ALPHA}}
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3138 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx}%
- [\thisfiledate\space\thisfilerevision\space
+ [\filedate\space\filerevision\space
KOMA-Script package source
}%
\reserved@a
@@ -97,8 +95,12 @@
\@@input scrstrip.inc
\KOMAdefVariable{COPYRIGHTFROM}{2018}
\KOMAdefVariable{SCRLAYERFANCYHDRVERSION}{%
- \space\space\thisfiledate\space\thisfilerevision\space KOMA-Script
+ \space\space\filedate\space\filerevision\space KOMA-Script
}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname ifbetawas\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname ifbeta\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname ifbeta\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname iftrue\endcsname
\generate{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
\file{scrlayer-fancyhdr.sty}{%
\from{scrlayer-fancyhdr.dtx}{interface,trace,fancyhdr,identify}%
@@ -111,6 +113,8 @@
\from{scrlogo.dtx}{logo}%
}%
}
+ \expandafter\let\csname ifbeta\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname ifbetawas\endcsname
\@@input scrstrop.inc
\else
\let\endbatchfile\relax
@@ -507,8 +511,8 @@
% features of \Package{scrlayer} with features of \Package{fancyhdr} and you
% can, e.g., use \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} with
% \Package{scrlayer-fancyhdr}.
-% \end{macro}^^A \@mkboth
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@@fancy
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@mkboth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@@fancy
%
% A future release of \Package{scrlayer-fancyhdr} may even provide the font
% features of the \KOMAScript{} classes and a working
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
index 324a5e8330..8a0c160a23 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{1747}
+% \CheckSum{1866}
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil der LaTeX2e KOMA-Script-Sammlung.
%
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
-%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 3011 2018-08-29 07:35:17Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 3161 2019-06-27 06:41:04Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<init>%%% (run: init)
%<options>%%% (run: options)
@@ -67,9 +67,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-08-29 09:35:17 +0200 (Wed, 29 Aug 2018) $
- \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{v0.1.#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 3011 $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-06-27 08:41:04 +0200 (Thu, 27 Jun 2019) $
+ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{v0.3.#2}}
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3161 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx}%
@@ -229,8 +229,8 @@
%
% Here we test the used pdf\TeX{} primitives.
% \changes{v0.1}{2015/10/07}{ready for renaming \cs{pdfsavepos} and
-% \cs{pdflastypos} in luaTeX}^^A
-% \changes{v0.1.2483}{2016/06/28}{grouping fixed}^^A
+% \cs{pdflastypos} in luaTeX}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.1.2483}{2016/06/28}{grouping fixed}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@tempswatrue
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdfsavepos}{%
@@ -328,6 +328,29 @@
}%
}{}%
% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{3.27}{2019/02/14}{initialization of one colour stack per note
+% column}%^^A
+% For colour support we also need one colour stack per note column. A colour
+% stack is a feature only available for pdf\TeX{} and lua\TeX{}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{slnc@#2@colorstack}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdfcolorstackinit}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdffeedback}{}{%
+ \expandafter\chardef\csname slnc@#2@colorstack\endcsname=
+ \pdffeedback colorstackinit direct {\slnc@initial@black}%
+ \scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface[scrlayer-notecolumn.sty]{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname slnc@#2@colorstack\endcsname\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\chardef\csname slnc@#2@colorstack\endcsname=
+ \pdfcolorstackinit direct {\slnc@initial@black}%
+ \scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface[scrlayer-notecolumn.sty]{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname slnc@#2@colorstack\endcsname\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
% If there isn't a font element for the (new) note column, we define a new one
% and add it to the auto-remove code:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -398,6 +421,27 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\slnc@initial@black}
+% \changes{v0.2.3085}{2019/02/14}{new internal}%^^A
+% The initial black is the colour used to initialize the colour stacks. As long
+% as only pdf\TeX{} and lua\TeX{} provide colour stacks, we can initialize it
+% with \texttt{0 g 0 G}. However it may be better to use the initial
+% \cs{current@color} of the used colour package. Using \cs{default@color} would
+% be even better, but this is not available until \cs{begin\{document\}}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scrlayerAddToInterface\slnc@initial@black{%
+ \newcommand*{\slnc@initial@black}{0 g 0 G}%
+ \AfterPackage*{color}{%
+ \let\slnc@initial@black\current@color
+ \AtBeginDocument{\let\slnc@initial@black\default@color}%
+ }%
+ \AfterPackage*{xcolor}{%
+ \let\slnc@initial@black\current@color
+ \AtBeginDocument{\let\slnc@initial@black\default@color}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@initial@black
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@processnotecolumns}
% This is a list of all declared note columns in \LaTeX{} syntax (using
% \Macro{@cons} and \Macro{@elt} etc.).
@@ -406,7 +450,7 @@
\newcommand*{\slnc@processnotecolumns}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@processnotecolumns
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@processnotecolumns
% \begin{macrocode}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -687,11 +731,11 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\tf@slnc}
% \changes{v0.1.2395}{2016/03/25}{write to \texttt{aux}-file with
-% \cs{if@filesw}}^^A
+% \cs{if@filesw}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@initwrite}
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@openwrite}
% \changes{v0.1.2928}{2018/02/02}{use \cs{closein} instead of \cs{closeout}
-% to close \cs{slnc@file}}^^A
+% to close \cs{slnc@file}}%^^A
% First of all we need a file to write the notes to. We use the
% \File{aux}-file to write into the file, because we need to read the file
% while the document will be typeset and the same time we need to write into
@@ -727,9 +771,9 @@
% calculate the md5 checksum of the \File{slnc}-file. If it has been changed
% we set |\if@tempswa| to |\iftrue| to provocate a rerun message.
% \changes{v0.1.2872}{2018/01/17}{usage of Lua function
-% \texttt{slncmdfivesum}}^^A
+% \texttt{slncmdfivesum}}%^^A
% \changes{v0.1.2972}{2018/04/01}{usage of not yet documented Xe\TeX{}
-% primitive \cs{mdfivesum}}^^A
+% primitive \cs{mdfivesum}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\AfterReadingMainAux{%
\immediate\closeout\tf@slnc
@@ -781,9 +825,9 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@openwrite
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@initwrite
-% \end{macro}^^A \tf@slnc
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@openwrite
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@initwrite
+% \end{macro}%^^A \tf@slnc
%
% \begin{macro}{\makenote}
% \begin{description}
@@ -798,9 +842,9 @@
% There is a star variant with the same parameters, that writes the
% \meta{code} un-expanded. To do so, we need some internal commands.
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@unexpanded}
-% \changes{0.1.2583}{2017/02/08}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{0.1.2583}{2017/02/08}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@makenote}
-% \changes{0.1.2583}{2017/02/08}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{0.1.2583}{2017/02/08}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\scrlayerAddToInterface\slnc@unexpanded{%
@@ -840,10 +884,10 @@
}{}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-%^^A \end{counter}^^A slncpage
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@unexpanded
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@makenote
-% \end{macro}^^A \makenote
+%^^A \end{counter}%^^A slncpage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@unexpanded
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@makenote
+% \end{macro}%^^A \makenote
%
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@processnotes}
% \begin{description}
@@ -902,11 +946,15 @@
\expandafter\setbox\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname\vbox{%
\expandafter\hsize\csname slnc@#1@width\endcsname
\normalfont\normalsize
- {%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Question: Why is it not allowed to set a colour here?
+% \changes{v0.2.3085}{2019/02/14}{using colour stack if available}%^^A
+% If a color stack is available we switch to it before changing the font. So a
+% color definition inside the font would overwrite every color change inside
+% the column! But if we don't have a color stack, color switching is not
+% permitted!
% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\color\@gobble
+ \slnc@switchcolorstack{#1}%
+ {%
\usekomafont{notecolumn.#1}{%
\slnc@notesyncfonttest{#1}%
\expandafter\ifvoid\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname
@@ -916,7 +964,7 @@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v0.1}{2015/10/07}{ready for renaming \cs{pdfpageheight} in
-% luaTeX}^^A
+% luaTeX}%^^A
% From lua\TeX~0.80.1 \cs{pdfpageheight} will be renamed into
% \cs{pageheight}. So we have to do an extra test for the new primitive.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -972,7 +1020,7 @@
\ifdim\@tempdima>\z@ \kern\@tempdima\fi
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v0.1.2582}{2017/02/08}{restore several commands}^^A
+% \changes{v0.1.2582}{2017/02/08}{restore several commands}%^^A
% Some commands have to be restored when processing the note.
% \begin{macrocode}
\slnc@restoreinnote
@@ -1019,6 +1067,7 @@
\splitmaxdepth\baselineskip
% \end{macrocode}
% Bring back the colours:
+% \changes{v0.2.3085}{2019/02/14}{\cs{slnc@switchcolorstack} added}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\usekomafont{notecolumn.#1}{%
\expandafter\vsplit\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname to
@@ -1027,7 +1076,8 @@
\expandafter\ifvoid\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname
\else
\expandafter\setbox\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname\vbox{%
- \expandafter\unvbox\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname
+ \slnc@switchcolorstack{#1}%
+ \expandafter\unvbox\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname
}%
\fi
\else
@@ -1036,8 +1086,10 @@
%</trace>
% \end{macrocode}
% Bring back the colours:
+% \changes{v0.2.3085}{2019/02/14}{\cs{slnc@switchcolorstack} added}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\usekomafont{notecolumn.#1}{%
+ \slnc@switchcolorstack{#1}%
\expandafter\box\csname slnc@#1@box\endcsname%
}%
\fi
@@ -1049,10 +1101,61 @@
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\slnc@switchcolorstack}
+% \changes{v0.2.3085}{2019/02/14}{new internal}%^^A
+% This either redefines \cs{set@color} or switches to the colour stack of the
+% note column given by the argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scrlayerAddToInterface{\slnc@switchcolorstack}{%
+ \newcommand*{\slnc@switchcolorstack}[1]{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{slnc@#1@colorstack}{%
+ \def\set@color{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{scrlayer-notecolumn}{%
+ unsupported change of colour!\MessageBreak
+ It seems you are using a TeX engine,\MessageBreak
+ that does not support switching the\MessageBreak
+ colour stack like pdfTeX or luaTeX do.\MessageBreak
+ Because of this, usage of \string\color,\MessageBreak
+ \string\textcolor\space etc. inside a note
+ column\MessageBreak
+ is not supported%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{@pdfcolorstack}{%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\@pdfcolorstack
+ \csname slnc@#1@colorstack\endcsname
+ }%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdfcolorstack}{%
+ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdfextension}{%
+ \PackageError{scrlayer-notecolumm}{%
+ colour stack defined but not usable%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\string
+ \csname slnc@#1@colorstack\endcsname\space defined
+ \MessageBreak
+ but neither \string\pdfcolorstack\space nor
+ \string\pdfextension.\MessageBreak
+ This should never happen!%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \pdfextension colorstack
+ \csname slnc@#1@colorstack\endcsname current\relax
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \pdfcolorstack
+ \csname slnc@#1@colorstack\endcsname current\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@switchcolorstack
% \begin{macro}{\restoreinnote}
-% \changes{0.1.2582}{2017/02/08}{new command}^^A
+% \changes{0.1.2582}{2017/02/08}{new command}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@restoreinnote}
-% \changes{0.1.2582}{2017/02/08}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{0.1.2582}{2017/02/08}{new (internal)}%^^A
% Some commands have to be restored while processing the notes. By default
% these are \cs{label}, \cs{index}, \cs{glossary}. More can be added using
% \cs{restoreinnote}. The storage is \cs{slnc@restoreinnote}.
@@ -1077,12 +1180,34 @@
\restoreinnote\glossary
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@restoreinnote
-% \end{macro}^^A \restoreinnote
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@restoreinnote
+% \end{macro}%^^A \restoreinnote
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@readnotes}
% Read as long notes from the notes file until the number at \#2 of
% \Macro{slnc@note} or \Macro{slnc@sync} in the file is greater than
% \Counter{slncpage}. Put all these to the corresponding unprocessed list.
+% \begin{macro}{\slnc@catcodes}
+% \changes{v0.3}{2019/03/02}{new internal}%^^A
+% We need a helper macro \cs{slnc@catcodes} to restore (some of) the catcodes
+% before reading from file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\scrlayerAddToInterface\slnc@catcodes{%
+ \newcommand*{\slnc@catcodes}{}%
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\do#1{%
+ \protected@xdef\slnc@catcodes{\slnc@catcodes
+ \catcode`\protect#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ \dospecials
+ \let\protect\noexpand
+ \xdef\slnc@catcodes{\slnc@catcodes\catcode`\protect\@=11\relax}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@catcodes
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\slnc@readnotes{%
\newcommand*\slnc@readnotes[1]{%
@@ -1093,13 +1218,16 @@
\@tempswatrue
\fi
\@whilesw\if@tempswa\fi{%
- \edef\reserved@a{%
- \noexpand\makeatletter
+ \begingroup
+ \slnc@catcodes
\endlinechar\m@ne
- \read\noexpand\slnc@file to\noexpand\reserved@a
- \endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
- \catcode`\noexpand\@=\the\catcode`\@\relax
- }%
+ \read\slnc@file to\reserved@a
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \endgroup
+ \noexpand\def\noexpand\reserved@a{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter{\reserved@a}%
+ }%
+ }%
\reserved@a
\expandafter\slnc@iofv\expandafter\reserved@b\reserved@a
\@empty\@empty\@empty\@empty\@empty
@@ -1155,7 +1283,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@readnotes
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@readnotes
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@iofv}
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@iiofv}
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@iiiofv}
@@ -1170,9 +1298,9 @@
\newcommand\slnc@iiiofv[6]{\def#1{#4}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@iiiofv
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@iiofv
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@iofv
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@iiiofv
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@iiofv
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@iofv
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@unprocessed}
% The \#2 of the last read note column from notes file.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1184,12 +1312,12 @@
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@file}
% The input file with the unprocessed notes.
% \changes{v0.1.2928}{2018/02/02}{use \cs{closein} instead of \cs{closeout}
-% to close \cs{slnc@file}}^^A
+% to close \cs{slnc@file}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@mdfivesum}
% \changes{v0.1.2872}{2018/01/17}{definition and usage of Lua function
-% \texttt{slncmdfivesum}}^^A
+% \texttt{slncmdfivesum}}%^^A
% \changes{v0.1.2972}{2018/04/01}{usage of not yet documented Xe\TeX{}
-% primitive \cs{mdfivesum}}^^A
+% primitive \cs{mdfivesum}}%^^A
% The MD5 sum of the file before opening it for reading.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -1231,10 +1359,10 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@mdfivesum
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@file
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@unprocessed
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@processnotes
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@mdfivesum
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@file
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@unprocessed
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@processnotes
%
% \begin{option}{autoclearnotecolumns}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1393,8 +1521,8 @@
\def\slnc@secondof#1#2#3\@nil{#2}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@firstof
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@secondof
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@firstof
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@secondof
% \begin{macro}{\slnc@voidtest}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of a note column (must be fully
@@ -1410,12 +1538,12 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@voidtest
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearnotecolumn
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@voidtest
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearnotecolumn
%
% \begin{macro}{\clearnotecolumns}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{removed spurious \cs{expandafter}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{removed spurious \cs{expandafter}}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\OParameter{string list}:] comma separated list of note column names
% (must be fully expandable and each element must expand to a string only,
@@ -1565,7 +1693,7 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearnotecolumns
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearnotecolumns
%
%
% \section{Syncronisation of Text and Note}
@@ -1578,8 +1706,8 @@
% synchronisation of the text with the note.
%
% \begin{macro}{\syncwithnotecolumn}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{removed spurious \cs{expandafter}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{removed spurious \cs{expandafter}}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\OParameter{string}:] the name of the note column to sync with (this
% must be fully expandable and expand to the name of a note column). By
@@ -1707,7 +1835,7 @@
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v0.1}{2015/10/07}{ready for renaming \cs{pdfpageheight} in
-% luaTeX}^^A
+% luaTeX}%^^A
% From lua\TeX~0.80.1 \cs{pdfpageheight} will be renamed into
% \cs{pageheight}. So we have to do an extra test for the new primitive.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1765,8 +1893,8 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \slnc@vadjust
-% \end{macro}^^A \syncwithnotecolumn
+% \end{macro}%^^A \slnc@vadjust
+% \end{macro}%^^A \syncwithnotecolumn
%
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
index 3868af7741..5be2ae2021 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{2591}
+% \CheckSum{2604}
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer-scrpage.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil der LaTeX2e KOMA-Script-Sammlung.
%
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
-%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-scrpage.dtx 3017 2018-09-05 06:27:27Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-scrpage.dtx 3141 2019-04-05 07:52:27Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<init>%%% (run: init)
%<options>%%% (run: options)
@@ -66,9 +66,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-09-05 08:27:27 +0200 (Wed, 05 Sep 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-04-05 09:52:27 +0200 (Fri, 05 Apr 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 3017 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3141 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage.dtx}%
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@
%
% \section{Width of Header and Footer}
%
-% \Package{scrpage2} provides to set the width of the page head or footer
+% \Package{scrpage2} provided to set the width of the page head or footer
% different from the width of the text area of the page using
% \Macro{setheadwidth} and \Macro{setfootwidth}. Optionally those commands
% allow to setup an horizontal offset for the head or footer. This interface
@@ -264,13 +264,13 @@
% with \KOMAScript{} options. Those options will become the primary interface.
%
% \begin{option}{headwidth}
-% \changes{v0.9.1757}{2014/04/09}{new: two offsets available}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9.1757}{2014/04/09}{new: two offsets available}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{option}{footwidth}
-% \changes{v0.9.1757}{2014/04/09}{new: two offsets available}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/28}{fix: missing colon in call of
-% \cs{sls@split@at@iicolons}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9.1757}{2014/04/09}{new: two offsets available}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/28}{fix: missing colon in call of
+% \cs{sls@split@at@iicolons}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{=\meta{special dimensional expression}:\meta{special
% dimensional expression}}:] see \Macro{sls@settowidthof} for information
@@ -350,9 +350,9 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@split@at@iicolons
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@split@at@iicolons
% \begin{macro}{\sls@set@hf@width}
-% \changes{v0.9.1757}{2014/04/09}{new: two offsets available}
+% \changes{v0.9.1757}{2014/04/09}{new: two offsets available}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{head} or \Parameter{foot}:] to complete the macro names
% for page head or footer.
@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@set@hf@width
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@set@hf@width
% \begin{macro}{\sls@headwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@oddheadshift}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@evenheadshift}
@@ -453,12 +453,12 @@
\scrlayerAddToInterface\sls@oddfootshift{\newcommand*{\sls@oddfootshift}{0pt}}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\sls@evenfootshift{\newcommand*{\sls@evenfootshift}{0pt}}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@headwidth
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@oddheadshift
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@evenheadshift
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@footwidth
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@oddfootshift
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@evenfootshift
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@headwidth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@oddheadshift
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@evenheadshift
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@footwidth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@oddfootshift
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@evenfootshift
%
% \begin{macro}{\sls@settowidthof}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@deftowidthof}
@@ -542,10 +542,10 @@
}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@deftowidthof
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@settowidthof
-% \end{option}^^A footwidth
-% \end{option}^^A footheight
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@deftowidthof
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@settowidthof
+% \end{option}%^^A footwidth
+% \end{option}%^^A footheight
%
% \begin{macro}{\setheadwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\setfootwidth}
@@ -564,8 +564,8 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \setheadwidth
-% \end{macro}^^A \setfootwidth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setheadwidth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setfootwidth
%
%
% \section{Lines in Page Head and Footer}
@@ -581,13 +581,13 @@
% values.
%
% \begin{option}{headtopline}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{option}{headsepline}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{option}{footsepline}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{option}{footbotline}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[{\texttt{=\meta{dimensional expression}:\meta{dimensional
% expression}}:}]
@@ -698,7 +698,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@set@values
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@set@values
% \begin{macro}{\sls@split@at@colon}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{\meta{balanced}:^^A
@@ -726,7 +726,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@split@at@colon
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@split@at@colon
% \begin{macro}{\sls@headabove@linelength}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@headabove@linethickness}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@headbelow@linelength}
@@ -777,18 +777,18 @@
\expandafter\noexpand\sls@footbelow@linelength}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@footbelow@linethickness
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@footbelow@linelength
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@footabove@linethickness
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@footabove@linelength
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@headbelow@linethickness
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@headbelow@linelength
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@headabove@linethickness
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@headabove@linelength
-% \end{option}^^A footbotline
-% \end{option}^^A footsepline
-% \end{option}^^A headsepline
-% \end{option}^^A headtopline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@footbelow@linethickness
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@footbelow@linelength
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@footabove@linethickness
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@footabove@linelength
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@headbelow@linethickness
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@headbelow@linelength
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@headabove@linethickness
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@headabove@linelength
+% \end{option}%^^A footbotline
+% \end{option}%^^A footsepline
+% \end{option}%^^A headsepline
+% \end{option}%^^A headtopline
%
% \begin{option}{plainheadtopline}
% \begin{macro}{\ifsls@plain@head@above@line}
@@ -838,21 +838,21 @@
}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifsls@plain@foot@below@line
-% \end{option}^^A plainfootbotline
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifsls@plain@foot@above@line
-% \end{option}^^A plainfootsepline
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifsls@plain@head@below@line
-% \end{option}^^A plainheadsepline
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifsls@plain@head@above@line
-% \end{option}^^A plainheadtopline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifsls@plain@foot@below@line
+% \end{option}%^^A plainfootbotline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifsls@plain@foot@above@line
+% \end{option}%^^A plainfootsepline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifsls@plain@head@below@line
+% \end{option}%^^A plainheadsepline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifsls@plain@head@above@line
+% \end{option}%^^A plainheadtopline
%
% \begin{option}{ilines}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{option}{clines}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{option}{olines}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@hfline@adjust}
% Maybe it would be more useful to be able to adjust each line on its own or
% at most to define an offset. But \Package{scrpage2} supports only these
@@ -909,10 +909,10 @@
\KOMA@kav@add{.scrlayer-scrpage.sty}{ilines}{}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@hfline@adjust
-% \end{option}^^A olines
-% \end{option}^^A clines
-% \end{option}^^A ilines
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@hfline@adjust
+% \end{option}%^^A olines
+% \end{option}%^^A clines
+% \end{option}%^^A ilines
%
% \begin{macro}{\setheadtopline}
% \begin{macro}{\setheadsepline}
@@ -943,15 +943,15 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@setline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@setline}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@@setline}
-% \changes{v3.17}[2015/02/27]{internal use of the corresponding options}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}[2015/02/27]{internal use of the corresponding options}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@@@setline}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{explicit reuse of the current length}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/17}{explicit reuse of the current length}%^^A
% Helper to set up the line attributes processing the parameters of the
% commands above.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1028,10 +1028,10 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@setline
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@setline
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@@setline
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@@@setline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@setline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@setline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@@setline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@@@setline
% \begin{KOMAfont}{headtopline}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{headsepline}
% \begin{KOMAfont}{footsepline}
@@ -1070,22 +1070,22 @@
}{}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A footbotline
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A footsepline
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A headsepline
-% \end{KOMAfont}^^A headtopline
-% \end{macro}^^A \setfootbotline
-% \end{macro}^^A \setfootsepline
-% \end{macro}^^A \setheadsepline
-% \end{macro}^^A \setheadtopline
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A footbotline
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A footsepline
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A headsepline
+% \end{KOMAfont}%^^A headtopline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setfootbotline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setfootsepline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setheadsepline
+% \end{macro}%^^A \setheadtopline
%
% \begin{length}{\headheight}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/22}{warning depends on option
-% \texttt{singlespacing}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/22}{warning depends on option
+% \texttt{singlespacing}}%^^A
% Some classes set \Length{headheight} to a very, very small value. We'll
% warn about that.
% \begin{length}{\footheight}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/23}{also warn for low \cs{footheight}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/23}{also warn for low \cs{footheight}}%^^A
% If the \Length{headheight} is OK, we also test for \Length{footheight}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -1150,9 +1150,50 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{length}^^A \footheight
-% \end{length}^^A \headheight
-%
+% \end{length}%^^A \footheight
+% \end{length}%^^A \headheight
+%
+%
+% \section{Usual \LaTeX{} Kernel Commands}
+%
+% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} some usual \LaTeX{} kernel commands, that should
+% really behave like the original \LaTeX{} kernel commands do. But some
+% packages redefine them without restoring them in the output routine before
+% the page head and foot is build. Such a redefinition could break
+% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} or even provoke errors. Here we try to make sure,
+% that \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} uses the correct definitions. Note: This
+% should not be needed, if other packages would be more careful.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXcentering}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{added}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{added}%^^A
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedleft}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{added}%^^A
+% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} needs \cs{centering} to center, \cs{raggedright}
+% to left align and \cs{raggedleft} to right align the three elements of
+% three-part header and footer. \Package{ragged2e} optionally redefines
+% them. This is not perfect but does not break \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}
+% completely. But \Package{tabu} also redefines them an that breaks
+% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in a way, that even error messages can occur. So
+% from version 3.27 \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} does not longer use
+% \cs{centering}, \cs{raggedright} or \cs{raggedleft} but \cs{LaTeXcentering},
+% \cs{LaTeXraggedright} and \cs{LaTeXraggedleft}. With \Package{ragged2e} and
+% its option \texttt{newcommands}/\texttt{NewCommands} this would be already
+% defined and contain the original definition. On all other circumstances the
+% commands have to be defined. But these commands should not be defined as
+% part of the interface or removing the interface could break other packages
+% like \Package{ragged2e}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*body>
+\@ifundefined{LaTeXcentering}{\let\LaTeXcentering\centering}{}
+\@ifundefined{LaTeXraggedleft}{\let\LaTeXraggedleft\raggedleft}{}
+\@ifundefined{LaTeXraggedright}{\let\LaTeXraggedright\raggedright}{}
+%</body>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Style of Running Heads}
%
@@ -1176,7 +1217,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@auto@pagestyleset}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/01/22}{new (internal) macro}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/01/22}{new (internal) macro}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\sls@auto@pagestyleset}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KOMAClassName}{%
@@ -1193,7 +1234,7 @@
%</init>
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@auto@pagestyleset
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/02/25}{new: store the values}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*options>
\KOMA@key{pagestyleset}{%
@@ -1239,7 +1280,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% We are using \Class{scrlttr2}, so we have to initialise the page style
% different:
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/24}{missing \cs{lofoot} and \cs{rofoot} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/24}{missing \cs{lofoot} and \cs{rofoot} added}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\clearpairofpagestyles
\lehead[\ifnum\@pageat=\z@\pagemark\fi]
@@ -1271,9 +1312,9 @@
}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@ps@style@KOMA-Script
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@ps@style@standard
-% \end{option}^^A pagestyleset
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@ps@style@KOMA-Script
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@ps@style@standard
+% \end{option}%^^A pagestyleset
%
% \begin{option}{komastyle}
% \begin{option}{standardstyle}
@@ -1287,8 +1328,8 @@
pagestyleset=standard}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A standardstyle
-% \end{option}^^A komastyle
+% \end{option}%^^A standardstyle
+% \end{option}%^^A komastyle
%
%
% \section{Extended Mark Mechanisms}
@@ -1310,9 +1351,9 @@
}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A nouppercase
-% \end{option}^^A markusedcase
-% \end{option}^^A markuppercase
+% \end{option}%^^A nouppercase
+% \end{option}%^^A markusedcase
+% \end{option}%^^A markuppercase
%
%
% \section{Expert Page Style Definition Interface}
@@ -1394,13 +1435,13 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@defhead}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@defhead}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@@defhead}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/18}{fix names of layers \texttt{\dots head.odd} and
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/18}{fix names of layers \texttt{\dots head.odd} and
% \texttt{\dots head.even}}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\MParameter{dimensional expression}{dimensional expression}:] length
@@ -1502,13 +1543,13 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@deffoot}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@deffoot}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@@deffoot}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/18}{fix names of layers \texttt{\dots foot.odd} and
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/18}{fix names of layers \texttt{\dots foot.odd} and
% \texttt{\dots foot.even}}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\MParameter{dimensional expression}{dimensional expression}:] length
@@ -1701,9 +1742,9 @@
\scrlayer@AddCsToInterface{sls@leavevmode@linefalse}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A hmode
+% \end{option}%^^A hmode
% \begin{option}{autoenlargeheadfoot}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2018/01/14}{new option}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2018/01/14}{new option}%^^A
% Automaticly enlarge vertical size of head or foot if the contents is to
% large. This is the default.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1717,22 +1758,22 @@
\scrlayer@AddCsToInterface{sls@autoenlargefalse}
%</options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A autoenlargeheadfoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@secure@box
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@@deffoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@deffoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@deffoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@@defhead
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@defhead
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@defhead
+% \end{option}%^^A autoenlargeheadfoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@secure@box
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@@deffoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@deffoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@deffoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@@defhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@defhead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@defhead
% \begin{macro}{\headfont}
% The low level page head font command. It is deprecated to redefine or use
% this and it may already be defined.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@pagehead}
% \changes{v3.25}{2018/02/05}{don't use \cs{newkomafont} to avoid
-% warning}^^A
+% warning}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@wrn@pagehead}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/01/13}{warning always deactivated}^^A
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/01/13}{warning always deactivated}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@pageheadfoot}
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
@@ -1765,17 +1806,17 @@
\let\scr@fnt@wrn@pagehead\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@pageheadfoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@wrn@pagehead
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@pagehead
-% \end{macro}^^A \headfont
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@pageheadfoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@wrn@pagehead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@pagehead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \headfont
%
% \begin{macro}{\footfont}
% The low level page footer font command. It is deprecated to redefine or use
% this and it may already be defined.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@pagefoot}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@wrn@pagefoot}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/01/13}{warning always deactivated}
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/01/13}{warning always deactivated}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{scr@fnt@pagefoot}{%
\scrlayer@AddCsToInterface{scr@fnt@pagefoot}%
@@ -1792,9 +1833,9 @@
\let\scr@fnt@wrn@pagefoot\relax
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@wrn@pagefoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@pagefoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \footfont
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@wrn@pagefoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@pagefoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \footfont
%
% \begin{macro}{\sls@hf@rule}
% \begin{description}
@@ -1832,7 +1873,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@hf@rule
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@hf@rule
% \begin{macro}{\sls@topmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@leftmargin}
% Two simple helper macros:
@@ -1857,9 +1898,9 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@leftmargin
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@topmargin
-% \end{macro}^^A \defpagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@leftmargin
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@topmargin
+% \end{macro}%^^A \defpagestyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\newpagestyle}
% For the parameters see \Macro{defpagestyle}.
@@ -1882,7 +1923,7 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \newpagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \newpagestyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\renewpagestyle}
% For the parameters see \Macro{defpagestyle}.
@@ -1907,7 +1948,7 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \renewpagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \renewpagestyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\providepagestyle}
% For the parameters see \Macro{defpagestyle}.
@@ -1930,7 +1971,7 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \providepagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \providepagestyle
%
%
% \section{User Page Style Definition Interface}
@@ -2002,11 +2043,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@triplestyle}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@@triplestyle}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@@@triplestyle}
% Helpers, that do the real work. Parameters are same, but \cs{reserved@a} has
% to be one of \Macro{defpagestyle}, \Macro{newpagestyle},
@@ -2064,9 +2105,9 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@@@triplestyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@@triplestyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@triplestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@@@triplestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@@triplestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@triplestyle
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface{\deftripstyle}{%
\newcommand*{\deftripstyle}{%
@@ -2081,11 +2122,11 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \deftripstyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \providetriplepagestyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \renewtriplepagestyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \newtriplepagestyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \deftriplepagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \deftripstyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \providetriplepagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \renewtriplepagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \newtriplepagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \deftriplepagestyle
%
%
% \section{Pre-defined Page Styles Interface}
@@ -2184,7 +2225,7 @@
onselect={%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.15}{2015/01/08}{usage of \cs{DeclarePageStyleAlias} instead of
-% \cs{let}}^^A fixme: Is this correct?
+% \cs{let}}%^^A fixme: Is this correct?
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclarePageStyleAlias{plain}{plain.#2}%
\DeclarePageStyleAlias{headings}{#2}%
@@ -2198,7 +2239,7 @@
onselect={%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.15}{2015/01/08}{usage of \cs{DeclarePageStyleAlias} instead of
-% \cs{let}}^^A fixme: Is this correct?
+% \cs{let}}%^^A fixme: Is this correct?
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclarePageStyleAlias{plain}{plain.#2}%
\DeclarePageStyleAlias{headings}{#2}%
@@ -2249,11 +2290,11 @@
\newcommand*\sls@currentplain{plain.scrheadings}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@currentplain
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@currentheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@currentplain
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@currentheadings
% \begin{macro}{\sls@init@pair@page@style}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@init@@pair@page@style}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of the page style, that should be
@@ -2312,7 +2353,7 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@init@@pair@page@style
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@init@@pair@page@style
% \begin{macro}{\sls@let@pair@page@style}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{command}:] a single command used to initialise the
@@ -2340,10 +2381,16 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@let@pair@page@style
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@init@pair@page@style
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@let@pair@page@style
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@init@pair@page@style
% \begin{macro}{\sls@def@pair@page@style@member}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{improved \textsf{bidi} compatibility}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{improved \textsf{bidi} compatibility}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{\cs{centering} replaced by
+% \cs{LaTeXcentering}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{\cs{raggedright} replaced by
+% \cs{LaTeXraggedright}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{\cs{raggedleft} replaced by
+% \cs{LaTeXraggedleft}}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] name of the page style to be defined.
% \end{description}
@@ -2353,48 +2400,48 @@
\newcommand*{\sls@def@pair@page@style@member}[1]{%
\defpagestyle{#1}{%
{%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\raggedright
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXraggedright
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@even@left@head}\strut}}%
- \parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\centering
+ \parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXcentering
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@even@middle@head}\strut}%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\raggedleft
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXraggedleft
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@even@right@head}\strut}}%
}{%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\raggedright
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXraggedright
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@left@head}\strut}}%
- \parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\centering
+ \parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXcentering
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@middle@head}\strut}%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\raggedleft
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXraggedleft
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@right@head}\strut}}%
}{%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\raggedright
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXraggedright
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@left@head}\strut}}%
- \parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\centering
+ \parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXcentering
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@middle@head}\strut}%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\raggedleft
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@headwidth}{\LaTeXraggedleft
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@right@head}\strut}}%
}%
}{%
{%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\raggedright
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXraggedright
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@even@left@foot}\strut}}%
- \parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\centering
+ \parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXcentering
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@even@middle@foot}\strut}%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\raggedleft
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXraggedleft
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@even@right@foot}\strut}}%
}{%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\raggedright
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXraggedright
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@left@foot}\strut}}%
- \parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\centering
+ \parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXcentering
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@middle@foot}\strut}%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\raggedleft
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXraggedleft
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@right@foot}\strut}}%
}{%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\raggedright
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{r}{l}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXraggedright
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@left@foot}\strut}}%
- \parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\centering
+ \parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXcentering
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@middle@foot}\strut}%
- \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\raggedleft
+ \makebox[0pt][\IfRTL{l}{r}]{\parbox{\sls@footwidth}{\LaTeXraggedleft
\strut\@nameuse{sls@ps@#1@odd@right@foot}\strut}}%
}%
}%
@@ -2402,8 +2449,8 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@def@pair@page@style@member
-% \end{macro}^^A \defpairofpagestyles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@def@pair@page@style@member
+% \end{macro}%^^A \defpairofpagestyles
%
% \begin{macro}{\newpairofpagestyles}
% \begin{macro}{\renewpairofpagestyles}
@@ -2490,9 +2537,9 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \providepairofpagestyles
-% \end{macro}^^A \renewpairofpagestyles
-% \end{macro}^^A \newpairofpagestyles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \providepairofpagestyles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \renewpairofpagestyles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \newpairofpagestyles
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@scrheadings}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain.scrheadings}
@@ -2510,83 +2557,83 @@
\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface{\DestroyPageStyleAlias{scrplain}}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@scrplain
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@plain.scrheadings
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@scrheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@scrplain
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@plain.scrheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@scrheadings
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ihead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ohead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lehead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lohead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\rehead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\rohead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cehead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cohead}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ifoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ofoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cfoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lefoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lofoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\refoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\rofoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cefoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cofoot}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/09/19}{new star version double the argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% We also need macros to define the contents of the three part head
% and foot. Each macro defines one of the part of head or foot of the
% headings page style member and optional of the plain page style
@@ -2598,75 +2645,81 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@ihead}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@ihead}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@ihead}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% Two helpers for the previous one to double the command and it's arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@ihead{%
\newcommand*{\@ihead}{\kernel@ifnextchar[{\@@@ihead}{\@@ihead}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@ihead{%
- \newcommand*{\@@ihead}[1]{\rehead{#1}\lohead{#1}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@ihead}[1]{\rehead{#1}\lohead{#1}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@@ihead{%
- \newcommand*{\@@@ihead}[2][]{\rehead[{#1}]{#2}\lohead[{#1}]{#2}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@@ihead}[2][]{\rehead[{#1}]{#2}\lohead[{#1}]{#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@@ihead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@ihead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ihead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@@ihead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@ihead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ihead
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\ohead{%
\newcommand*{\ohead}{\kernel@ifstar {\@dblarg\@@@ohead}{\@ohead}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@ohead}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@ohead}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@ohead}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% Two helpers for the previous one to double the command and it's arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@ohead{%
\newcommand*{\@ohead}{\kernel@ifnextchar[{\@@@ohead}{\@@ohead}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@ohead{%
- \newcommand*{\@@ohead}[1]{\lehead{#1}\rohead{#1}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@ohead}[1]{\lehead{#1}\rohead{#1}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@@ohead{%
- \newcommand*{\@@@ohead}[2][]{\lehead[{#1}]{#2}\rohead[{#1}]{#2}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@@ohead}[2][]{\lehead[{#1}]{#2}\rohead[{#1}]{#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@@ohead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@ohead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ohead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@@ohead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@ohead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ohead
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\chead{%
\newcommand*{\chead}{\kernel@ifstar {\@dblarg\@@@chead}{\@chead}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@chead}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@chead}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@chead}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% Two helpers for the previous one to double the command and it's arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@chead{%
\newcommand*{\@chead}{\kernel@ifnextchar[{\@@@chead}{\@@chead}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@chead{%
- \newcommand*{\@@chead}[1]{\cehead{#1}\cohead{#1}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@chead}[1]{\cehead{#1}\cohead{#1}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@@chead{%
- \newcommand*{\@@@chead}[2][]{\cehead[{#1}]{#2}\cohead[{#1}]{#2}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@@chead}[2][]{\cehead[{#1}]{#2}\cohead[{#1}]{#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@@chead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@chead
-% \end{macro}^^A \@chead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@@chead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@chead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@chead
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\lehead{%
\newcommand*{\lehead}{\sls@renewelement{even}{left}{head}}%
@@ -2693,75 +2746,81 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@ifoot}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@ifoot}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@ifoot}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% Two helpers for the previous one to double the command and it's arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@ifoot{%
\newcommand*{\@ifoot}{\kernel@ifnextchar[{\@@@ifoot}{\@@ifoot}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@ifoot{%
- \newcommand*{\@@ifoot}[1]{\refoot{#1}\lofoot{#1}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@ifoot}[1]{\refoot{#1}\lofoot{#1}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@@ifoot{%
- \newcommand*{\@@@ifoot}[2][]{\refoot[{#1}]{#2}\lofoot[{#1}]{#2}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@@ifoot}[2][]{\refoot[{#1}]{#2}\lofoot[{#1}]{#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@@ifoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@ifoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ifoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@@ifoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@ifoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ifoot
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\ofoot{%
\newcommand*{\ofoot}{\kernel@ifstar {\@dblarg\@@@ofoot}{\@ofoot}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@ofoot}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@ofoot}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@ofoot}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% Two helpers for the previous one to double the command and it's arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@ofoot{%
\newcommand*{\@ofoot}{\kernel@ifnextchar[{\@@@ofoot}{\@@ofoot}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@ofoot{%
- \newcommand*{\@@ofoot}[1]{\lefoot{#1}\rofoot{#1}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@ofoot}[1]{\lefoot{#1}\rofoot{#1}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@@ofoot{%
- \newcommand*{\@@@ofoot}[2][]{\lefoot[{#1}]{#2}\rofoot[{#1}]{#2}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@@ofoot}[2][]{\lefoot[{#1}]{#2}\rofoot[{#1}]{#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@@ofoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@ofoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ofoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@@ofoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@ofoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ofoot
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\cfoot{%
\newcommand*{\cfoot}{\kernel@ifstar {\@dblarg\@@@cfoot}{\@cfoot}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@cfoot}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@cfoot}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@cfoot}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% Two helpers for the previous one to double the command and it's arguments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@cfoot{%
\newcommand*{\@cfoot}{\kernel@ifnextchar[{\@@@cfoot}{\@@cfoot}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@cfoot{%
- \newcommand*{\@@cfoot}[1]{\cefoot{#1}\cofoot{#1}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@cfoot}[1]{\cefoot{#1}\cofoot{#1}}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\@@@cfoot{%
- \newcommand*{\@@@cfoot}[2][]{\cefoot[{#1}]{#2}\cofoot[{#1}]{#2}}%
+ \newcommand{\@@@cfoot}[2][]{\cefoot[{#1}]{#2}\cofoot[{#1}]{#2}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@@cfoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@@cfoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \@cfoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@@cfoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@@cfoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@cfoot
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\lefoot{%
\newcommand*{\lefoot}{\sls@renewelement{even}{left}{foot}}%
@@ -2784,13 +2843,16 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@renewelement}
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@renewelement}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@@renewelement}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@@@renewelement}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\sls@@renewplainelement}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/04/05}{made long}%^^A
% Little helper for several of the above commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\sls@renewelement{%
@@ -2807,7 +2869,7 @@
}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\sls@@@renewelement{%
- \newcommand*{\sls@@@renewelement}[4]{%
+ \newcommand{\sls@@@renewelement}[4]{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{sls@ps@\sls@currentheadings @#1@#2@#3}{%
\@namedef{sls@ps@scrheadings@#1@#2@#3}{#4}%
}{%
@@ -2816,13 +2878,13 @@
}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\sls@@@@renewelement{%
- \def\sls@@@@renewelement#1#2#3[#4]#5{%
+ \long\def\sls@@@@renewelement#1#2#3[#4]#5{%
\sls@@renewplainelement{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
\sls@@@renewelement{#1}{#2}{#3}{#5}%
}%
}
\scrlayerAddToInterface\sls@@renewplainelement{%
- \newcommand*{\sls@@renewplainelement}[4]{%
+ \newcommand{\sls@@renewplainelement}[4]{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{sls@ps@\sls@currentplain @#1@#2@#3}{%
\@namedef{sls@ps@plain.scrheadings@#1@#2@#3}{#4}%
}{%
@@ -2832,29 +2894,29 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@renewplainelement
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@@@renewelement
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@@renewelement
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@@renewelement
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@renewelement
-% \end{macro}^^A \cofoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \cefoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \rofoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \refoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \lofoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \lefoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \cfoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \ofoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \cohead
-% \end{macro}^^A \cehead
-% \end{macro}^^A \rohead
-% \end{macro}^^A \rehead
-% \end{macro}^^A \lohead
-% \end{macro}^^A \lehead
-% \end{macro}^^A \chead
-% \end{macro}^^A \ohead
-% \end{macro}^^A \ihead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@renewplainelement
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@@@renewelement
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@@renewelement
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@@renewelement
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@renewelement
+% \end{macro}%^^A \cofoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \cefoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \rofoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \refoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \lofoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \lefoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \cfoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ofoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \cohead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \cehead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \rohead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \rehead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \lohead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \lehead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ohead
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ihead
%
% \begin{macro}{\clearmainofpairofpagestyles}
% \begin{macro}{\clearscrheadings}
@@ -2873,8 +2935,8 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearscrheadings
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearmainofpairofpagestyles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearscrheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearmainofpairofpagestyles
% \begin{macro}{\clearplainofpairofpagestyles}
% \begin{macro}{\clearscrplain}
% Now, we use the not recommended feature to set up a plain style:
@@ -2901,8 +2963,8 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearscrplain
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearplainofpairofpagestyles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearscrplain
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearplainofpairofpagestyles
% \begin{macro}{\clearpairofpagestyles}
% \begin{macro}{\clearscrheadfoot}
% Last but not least we clean up both, the main and the plain:
@@ -2918,8 +2980,8 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearscrheadfoot
-% \end{macro}^^A \clearpairofpagestyles
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearscrheadfoot
+% \end{macro}%^^A \clearpairofpagestyles
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@useheadings}
% Not longer supported:
@@ -2945,7 +3007,7 @@
}
%</body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ps@useheadings
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ps@useheadings
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
%</interface>
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx
index 0fc52a4e68..6376ff1e71 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlayer.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{4042}
+% \CheckSum{4041}
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrlayer.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlayer.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2012-2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil der LaTeX2e KOMA-Script-Sammlung.
%
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
-%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 3015 2018-09-03 10:51:32Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 3196 2019-08-26 09:20:16Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<init>%%% (run: init)
%<options>%%% (run: options)
@@ -67,9 +67,9 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-09-03 12:51:32 +0200 (Mon, 03 Sep 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-08-26 11:20:16 +0200 (Mon, 26 Aug 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 3015 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3196 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
\noexpand\endgroup
\noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrlayer.dtx}%
@@ -190,8 +190,8 @@
%
% \selectlanguage{english}
%
-% \changes{v0.0}{2012/01/01}{Start of new package}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/07/25}{User documentation removed}
+% \changes{v0.0}{2012/01/01}{Start of new package}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/07/25}{User documentation removed}%^^A
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@
}
\let\scrlayer@AtEndOfPackage\AtEndOfPackage
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \sls@AtEndOfPackage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sls@AtEndOfPackage
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@testunexpectedarg}
% We'll have several \KOMAScript{} options, that didn't expect an
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@
}
%</package>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@testunexpectedarg
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@testunexpectedarg
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@chapter}
% We need this later. But it is something general. So we initialise it as
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{chapter}{\@chapterfalse}{\@chaptertrue}%
}{}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@chapter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@chapter
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
% Some classes define \Macro{frontmatter} or \Macro{mainmatter}, but do not
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@
}{}
%</package>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \if@mainmatter
+% \end{macro}%^^A \if@mainmatter
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
%</init>
@@ -431,17 +431,17 @@
\newif\ifscrlayer@forceignoreuppercase
%</package&options>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscrlayer@forceignoreuppercase
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@ignoreuppercase
-% \end{macro}^^A \MakeMarkcase
-% \end{option}^^A markcase
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscrlayer@forceignoreuppercase
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@ignoreuppercase
+% \end{macro}%^^A \MakeMarkcase
+% \end{option}%^^A markcase
%
% \begin{macro}{\rightfirstmark}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\rightbotmark}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\righttopmark}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}%^^A
% \Macro{rightfirstmark} is simply the same like the \Macro{rightmark} of the
% \LaTeX{} kernel. \Macro{rightbotmark} uses \Macro{botmark} instead of
% \Macro{firstmark} and \Macro{righttopmark} uses \Macro{topmark}.
@@ -451,16 +451,16 @@
\newcommand*{\rightbotmark}{\expandafter\@rightmark\botmark\@empty\@empty}
\newcommand*{\righttopmark}{\expandafter\@rightmark\topmark\@empty\@empty}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \righttopmark
-% \end{macro}^^A \rightbotmark
-% \end{macro}^^A \rightfirstmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \righttopmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \rightbotmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \rightfirstmark
%
% \begin{macro}{\leftfirstmark}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\leftbotmark}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lefttopmark}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/14}{new}%^^A
% \Macro{leftbotmark} is simply the same like the \Macro{leftmark} of the
% \LaTeX{} kernel. \Macro{leftfirstmark} uses \Macro{firstmark} instead of
% \Macro{botmark} and \Macro{lefttopmark} uses \Macro{topmark}.
@@ -470,9 +470,9 @@
\newcommand*{\lefttopmark}{\expandafter\@leftmark\topmark\@empty\@empty}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \lefttopmark
-% \end{macro}^^A \leftbotmark
-% \end{macro}^^A \leftfirstmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \lefttopmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \leftbotmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \leftfirstmark
%
% \begin{macro}{\headmark}
% Inside a page style, this macro is either \Macro{rightmark} or
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \headmark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \headmark
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagemark}
% The page number together with its font setting. It's robust and will never
@@ -520,9 +520,9 @@
}{}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@fnt@pagenumber
-% \end{macro}^^A \pnumfont
-% \end{macro}^^A \pagemark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@fnt@pagenumber
+% \end{macro}%^^A \pnumfont
+% \end{macro}%^^A \pagemark
%
% \begin{macro}{\partmarkformat}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptermarkformat}
@@ -554,17 +554,17 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Note, that the other \Macro{\dots markformat} will be defined by
% \Macro{scrlayer@level@init}.
-% \end{macro}^^A \GenericMarkFormat
-% \end{macro}^^A \sectionmarkformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \chaptermarkformat
-% \end{macro}^^A \partmarkformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \GenericMarkFormat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \sectionmarkformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \chaptermarkformat
+% \end{macro}%^^A \partmarkformat
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mkleft}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{added to the \KOMAScript{} classes}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{added to the \KOMAScript{} classes}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@mkright}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{added to the \KOMAScript{} classes}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{added to the \KOMAScript{} classes}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@mkdouble}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{added to the \KOMAScript{} classes}
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/13}{added to the \KOMAScript{} classes}%^^A
% These are new in \Package{scrlayer}. They may be updated, whenever
% \Macro{@mkboth} will be updated. Otherwise they get a working default
% definition. These commands will not become part of the interface and other
@@ -582,9 +582,9 @@
}
%</(package|class)&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@mkdouble
-% \end{macro}^^A \@mkright
-% \end{macro}^^A \@mkleft
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@mkdouble
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@mkright
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@mkleft
%
% \begin{macro}{\markleft}
% \begin{macro}{\@markleft}
@@ -607,8 +607,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@markleft
-% \end{macro}^^A \markleft
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@markleft
+% \end{macro}%^^A \markleft
%
%
% \begin{option}{autooneside}
@@ -633,8 +633,8 @@
\csname KV@KOMA.\@currname.\@currext @autooneside\endcsname\relax
%</interface&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscrlayer@autooneside
-% \end{option}^^A autooneside
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscrlayer@autooneside
+% \end{option}%^^A autooneside
%
%
% \begin{option}{automark}
@@ -647,8 +647,8 @@
% ToDo: Maybe \Option{manualmark} should become deprecated and
% \Option{automark} should have simple values or a new option, that also
% handles \Option{autooneside}?
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/07}{prepared for classes without \cs{section} or
-% \cs{subsection}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/07}{prepared for classes without \cs{section} or
+% \cs{subsection}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*options>
\KOMA@key{automark}[]{%
@@ -699,8 +699,8 @@
\csname KV@KOMA.\@currname.\@currext @manualmark@default\endcsname\relax
%</interface&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{option}^^A manualmark
-% \end{option}^^A automark
+% \end{option}%^^A manualmark
+% \end{option}%^^A automark
%
% \begin{macro}{\manualmark}
% Switch to manual marks. This resets \Macro{@mkleft}, \Macro{@mkright},
@@ -726,8 +726,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\automark}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@automark}
% This is the brain knot of the game! I'll try to explain, what I'm doing:
% First of all the new starred version of \Macro{automark} doesn't reset the
@@ -785,7 +785,7 @@
\def\@mkdouble##1{\@mkboth{##1}{##1}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \automark@basics
+% \end{macro}%^^A \automark@basics
% \begin{macro}{\automark@righthigh}
% Set up the right mark of a higher level, but in single-side layout only if
% \Option{autooneside} hasn't been used. Note, that with this definition no
@@ -813,7 +813,7 @@
}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \automark@righthigh
+% \end{macro}%^^A \automark@righthigh
% \begin{macro}{\automark@leftlow}
% Set up the left mark of a low level, but in single-side layout the right
% mark has to be used.
@@ -833,6 +833,8 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% In single-side mode there's no left high mark without a right low mark. So
% instead of only a left high mark, we set up both marks.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/25}{replaced \cs{@empty} by \texttt{\{\}} to avoid
+% \textsf{babel} issue}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@mkdouble
\fi
@@ -842,12 +844,12 @@
\else\if@mainmatter \csname #1markformat\endcsname\fi\fi
##1%
}%
- }\@empty
+ }{}%
}%
}{}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \automark@leftlow
+% \end{macro}%^^A \automark@leftlow
% \begin{macro}{\automark@both}
% Set up both marks, but in single-side layout depending on
% \Option{autooneside}.
@@ -940,10 +942,10 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscrlayer@level@prepared
-% \end{macro}^^A \automark@both
-% \end{macro}^^A \@automark
-% \end{macro}^^A \automark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscrlayer@level@prepared
+% \end{macro}%^^A \automark@both
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@automark
+% \end{macro}%^^A \automark
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSectionNumberDepth}
% \begin{description}
@@ -1031,9 +1033,9 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@level@init
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@level@list
-% \end{macro}^^A DeclareSectionNumberDepth
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@level@init
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@level@list
+% \end{macro}%^^A DeclareSectionNumberDepth
%
%
% \subsection{Providing Layers}
@@ -1075,7 +1077,7 @@
\@namedef{scr@l@\scr@current@layer @h}{#4}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \def@scr@l@pos
+% \end{macro}%^^A \def@scr@l@pos
%
% There are basic, primitive attributes and compounding attributes. The basic
% attributes are:
@@ -1083,7 +1085,7 @@
% \item[\texttt{mode=\meta{command sequence}}:] the mode that should be used
% to output the \texttt{contents}. A command \cs{layer\meta{command
% sequence}mode} with one argument need to be defined.
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new layer attribute \texttt{mode}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new layer attribute \texttt{mode}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{mode}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{layer#1mode}{\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}{%
@@ -1150,7 +1152,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[\texttt{contents=\meta{output}}:] whatever should be printed by the
% layer.
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\texttt{contents} is \cs{long}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\texttt{contents} is \cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{contents}{%
\long\@namedef{scr@l@\scr@current@layer @contents}{#1}%
@@ -1181,7 +1183,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[\texttt{backandforeground}:] not really useful, but the counterpart of
% the restrictions above.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{backandforeground}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{backandforeground}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{backandforeground}[\relax]{%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1216,7 +1218,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[\texttt{oddorevenpage}:] do not restrict the layer to odd or even
% pages.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{oddorevenpage}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{oddorevenpage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{oddorevenpage}[\relax]{%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1270,7 +1272,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[\Option{floatornonfloatpage}:] don't restrict the layer to float or
% non-float pages.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{floatornonfloatpage}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{floatornonfloatpage}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{floatornonfloatpage}[\relax]{%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1305,9 +1307,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[\Option{everypage}:] remove all odd-, even-, float-, and
% nonfloat-restrictions.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{everypage}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{foreground and background condition
-% removed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{everypage}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{foreground and background condition
+% removed}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{everypage}[\relax]{%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1339,7 +1341,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[\Option{everyside}:] remove all one- or two-side restrictions.
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{everyside}}
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{everyside}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{everyside}[\relax]{%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1349,10 +1351,10 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \item[\Option{unrestricted}:] remove all restrictions
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{unrestricted}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{missing background and foreground
-% condition}^^A
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{nonfloatpage condition fixed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{unrestricted}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{missing background and foreground
+% condition}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{nonfloatpage condition fixed}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{unrestricted}[\relax]{%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1367,7 +1369,7 @@
\csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @onesidetrue\endcsname
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{beforecontents}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{beforecontents}}%^^A
% \item[\Option{beforecontents}:] code to be executed immediately before
% setting the contents. See also modification attribute
% \texttt{addbeforecontents}.
@@ -1375,7 +1377,7 @@
\FamilyCSKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{beforecontents}
{scr@l@\scr@current@layer @precontents@hook}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{aftercontents}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{aftercontents}}%^^A
% \item[\Option{aftercontents}:] code to be executed immediately before
% setting the contents. See also modification attribute
% \texttt{addaftercontents}.
@@ -1383,7 +1385,7 @@
\FamilyCSKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{aftercontents}
{scr@l@\scr@current@layer @postcontents@hook}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{artifact}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{artifact}}%^^A
% \item[\Option{artifact}:] reserved for tagging packages. The artifact can
% either be a boolean or a general value. Boolean false will unset the
% attribute. Boolean true is the same like empty. All other values will be
@@ -1410,7 +1412,7 @@
% Attribute modifications are attributes, that modify existing basic
% attributes:
% \begin{description}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addhoffset}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addhoffset}}%^^A
% \item[\texttt{addhoffset=\meta{dimension expression}}:] add to offset from
% the left edge of the paper.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1421,7 +1423,7 @@
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addvoffset}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addvoffset}}%^^A
% \item[\texttt{addvoffset=\meta{dimension expression}}:] add to offset from
% the top edge of the paper.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1432,7 +1434,7 @@
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addwidth}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addwidth}}%^^A
% \item[\texttt{addwidth=\meta{dimension expression}}:] add to width of the
% layer.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1443,7 +1445,7 @@
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addheight}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addheight}}%^^A
% \item[\texttt{addheight=\meta{dimension expression}}:] add to height of the
% layer.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1454,10 +1456,10 @@
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addcontents}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{addcontents}}%^^A
% \item[\texttt{addcontents=\meta{output}}:] append to whatever should be
% printed by the layer.
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\texttt{contents} is \cs{long}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\texttt{contents} is \cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{addcontents}{%
\expandafter\edef\csname scr@l@\scr@current@layer @contents\endcsname{%
@@ -1466,10 +1468,10 @@
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{pretocontents}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new layer attribute \texttt{pretocontents}}%^^A
% \item[\texttt{pretocontents=\meta{output}}:] prefix whatever should be
% printed by the layer.
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\texttt{contents} is \cs{long}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\texttt{contents} is \cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{pretocontents}{%
\expandafter\edef\csname scr@l@\scr@current@layer @contents\endcsname{%
@@ -1478,7 +1480,7 @@
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{addbeforecontents}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{addbeforecontents}}%^^A
% \item[\Option{addbeforecontents}:] code to be executed immediately before
% setting the contents. The new code will be added before the old code.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1497,7 +1499,7 @@
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{addaftercontents}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new attribute \texttt{addaftercontents}}%^^A
% \item[\Option{addaftercontents}:] code to be executed immediately before
% setting the contents. The new code will be added after the old code.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1751,7 +1753,7 @@
\@namedef{scr@l@\scr@current@layer @align}{tl}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \item[\texttt{area=\{\meta{hoffset}\}\{\meta{voffset}\}^^A
+% \item[\texttt{area=\{\meta{hoffset}\}\{\meta{voffset}\}%^^A
% \{\meta{width}\}\{\meta{height}\}}:] set up
% \texttt{hoffset}, \texttt{voffset}, \texttt{width}, and \texttt{height} to
% the given values.
@@ -1762,7 +1764,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{clone code for \texttt{precontents@hook},
-% \texttt{postcontents@hook} and \texttt{artifact} added}^^A
+% \texttt{postcontents@hook} and \texttt{artifact} added}%^^A
% \item[\texttt{clone=\meta{layer}}:] set up the new layer by the settings
% of the given \meta{layer}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1810,13 +1812,13 @@
\csname if@scr@l@#2@#3\expandafter\endcsname
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@clone@switch
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@clone@attribute
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@clone@switch
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@clone@attribute
% \end{description}
%
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/31}{missing reset of \cs{scr@current@layer}
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/31}{missing reset of \cs{scr@current@layer}
% added}%^^A
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\DeclareLayer}[2][]{%
\def\scr@current@layer{#2}%
@@ -1854,8 +1856,8 @@
\newcommand*{\scr@current@layer}{}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@current@layer
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@current@layer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareLayer
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfLayerExists}
% \begin{description}
@@ -1880,14 +1882,14 @@
% \end{macro}%^^A \IfLayerExists
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewLayer}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ProvideLayer}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\RedeclareLayer}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ModifyLayer}
-% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}^^A
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/31}{missing definition and reset of
+% \changes{v3.14}{2014/10/20}{\cs{long}}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/08/31}{missing definition and reset of
% \cs{scr@current@layer} added}%^^A
% There are also two commands for declaration of layers, that haven't been
% declared before, with or without error message for already declared layers,
@@ -1953,14 +1955,14 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ModifyLayer
-% \end{macro}^^A \RedeclareLayer
-% \end{macro}^^A \ProvideLayer
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareNewLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ModifyLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \RedeclareLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ProvideLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareNewLayer
%
% \begin{macro}{\ModifyLayers}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% Like \cs{ModifyLayer} but allows a list of layers instead of only one layer.
% For the commands \cs{DeclareLayer}, \cs{ProvideLayer} and
% \cs{RedeclareLayer} this does not make any sense, so there are not similar
@@ -1982,10 +1984,10 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ModifyLayers
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ModifyLayers
%
% \begin{macro}{\GetLayerContents}
-% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new}
+% \changes{v3.16}{2015/01/26}{new}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of the layer
% \end{description}
@@ -2005,7 +2007,7 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\DestroyLayer}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{destroy pre-contents hook, post-contents hook
-% and artifact}^^A
+% and artifact}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of the layer, that should be
% destroyed
@@ -2067,11 +2069,11 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DestroyLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DestroyLayer
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\layercontentsmeasure}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/27}{\cs{@gobble} eliminated}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/27}{\cs{@gobble} eliminated}%^^A
% This may used by used as the only value of the layer option
% \texttt{contents} to show measure lines around the layer. The left and the
% top measure line will be in centimeter, the right and the bottom measure
@@ -2165,7 +2167,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\LenToUnit}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/27}{new}
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/27}{new}
% Due to an incompatibility of package \textsf{curve2e} I've eliminated
% \cs{@gobble} in the definition of \cs{layercontentsmeasure} and replaced it
% sometimes by \cs{LenToUnit} with the (not long) definition suggested by
@@ -2174,8 +2176,8 @@
\providecommand*{\LenToUnit}[1]{\strip@pt\dimexpr#1*\p@/\unitlength}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \LenToUnit
-% \end{macro}^^A \layercontentsmeasure
+% \end{macro}%^^A \LenToUnit
+% \end{macro}%^^A \layercontentsmeasure
%
%
% \subsection{Providing Page Styles}
@@ -2247,7 +2249,7 @@
}
%</package&init>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{length}^^A \footheight
+% \end{length}%^^A \footheight
%
%
% Several of the following commands use \meta{key}=\meta{value} arguments. So
@@ -2318,8 +2320,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@initialhook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsselect
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@initialhook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsselect
% \begin{option}{onpsinit}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@hook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2353,8 +2355,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@hook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsinit
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@hook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsinit
% \begin{option}{onpsoneside}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@onesidehook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2389,8 +2391,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@onesidehook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsoneside
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@onesidehook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsoneside
% \begin{option}{onpstwoside}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@twosidehook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2425,8 +2427,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@twosidehook
-% \end{option}^^A onpstwoside
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@twosidehook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpstwoside
% \begin{option}{onpsoddpage}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@oddpagehook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2461,8 +2463,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@oddpagehook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsoddpage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@oddpagehook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsoddpage
% \begin{option}{onpsevenpage}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@evenpagehook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2497,8 +2499,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@evenpagehook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsevenpage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@evenpagehook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsevenpage
% \begin{option}{onpsfloatpage}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@floatpagehook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2531,8 +2533,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@floatpagehook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsfloatpage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@floatpagehook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsfloatpage
% \begin{option}{onpsnonfloatpage}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@nonfloatpagehook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2565,8 +2567,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@nonfloatpagehook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsnonfloatpage
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@nonfloatpagehook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsnonfloatpage
% \begin{option}{onpsbackground}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@backgroundhook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2601,8 +2603,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@ps@backgroundhook
-% \end{option}^^A onbackground
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@ps@backgroundhook
+% \end{option}%^^A onbackground
% \begin{option}{onpsforeground}
% \begin{macro}{\@ps@foregroundhook}
% \begin{description}
@@ -2637,10 +2639,10 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@psforegroundhook
-% \end{option}^^A onpsforeground
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@psforegroundhook
+% \end{option}%^^A onpsforeground
% \begin{option}{singlespacing}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/22}{new option added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/22}{new option added}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\texttt{=\meta{simple switch}}:] if activated, all page styles will be
% set with line spread 1. This switch is global. If you want it for some
@@ -2664,12 +2666,12 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@declare@ps@by@layers}
% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/28}{fix: \cs{linewidth} replaced by
-% \cs{textwidth}}^^A
+% \cs{textwidth}}%^^A
% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/09}{usage of \cs{parbox[b]} instead of
% \cs{parbox[t]} because of strange effect with package
-% \textsf{multicol}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/22}{test for \cs{if@ps@singlespacing} added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \textsf{multicol}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/22}{test for \cs{if@ps@singlespacing} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% Needed, because of page style aliases. Same arguments like
% \cs{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} but, \#1 is the name of the page style, \#2 is
% the list of options and \#3 is still the list of layers.
@@ -2834,12 +2836,12 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@declare@ps@by@layers
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@declare@ps@by@layers
%
% \begin{macro}{\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{star version of the command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{star version of the command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] a valid page style (must be fully expandable
% and expand to the name of a existing page style); note, that currently
@@ -2911,12 +2913,12 @@
\relax
%</interface&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscrlayer@deactivate@layers
-% \end{option}^^A deactivatepagestylelayers
-% \end{macro}^^A \ForEachLayerOfPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscrlayer@deactivate@layers
+% \end{option}%^^A deactivatepagestylelayers
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ForEachLayerOfPageStyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@do@page@style@element@layer}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{added hooks and artifact code}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{added hooks and artifact code}%^^A
% Helper macro to show one layer. First argument is either ``background'' or
% ``foreground'', second argument is either ``odd'' or ``even'', and third
% argument is the name of the layer. Note, that in draft mode for every layer
@@ -2983,13 +2985,13 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@predraftmeasure@hook}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (internal)}%^^A
% The hooks that will be executed before setting the draft measuring.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scrlayer@predraftmeasure@hook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeDraftMeasuringLayer}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new}%^^A
% New code will be added in front of the hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\BeforeDraftMeasuringLayer}[1]{%
@@ -2998,16 +3000,16 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \BeforeDraftMeasuringLayer
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@predraftmeasure@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \BeforeDraftMeasuringLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@predraftmeasure@hook
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@postdraftmeasure@hook}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (internal)}%^^A
% The hook that will be executed after setting the draft measuring.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scrlayer@postdraftmeasure@hook}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\AfterDraftMeasuringLayer}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new}%^^A
% New code will be added at the end of the hook.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\AfterDraftMeasuringLayer}[1]{%
@@ -3016,16 +3018,16 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \AfterDraftMeasuringLayer
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@postdraftmeasure@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AfterDraftMeasuringLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@postdraftmeasure@hook
% \begin{macro}{\scr@layerbox}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scr@@layerbox}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{\cs{edef} replaced by \cs{protected@edef}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{\cs{dimexpr} added to \cs{layer\dots}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{\cs{dimexpr} removed from usage of
-% \cs{layer\dots}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{\cs{edef} replaced by \cs{protected@edef}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{\cs{dimexpr} added to \cs{layer\dots}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{\cs{dimexpr} removed from usage of
+% \cs{layer\dots}}%^^A
% The layer box is used to output a layer in \cs{@oddhead}, \cs{@evenhead},
% \cs{@oddfoot}, or \cs{@evenfoot}. Is has two pairs of arguments: ($x,y$)
% and ($w,h$), where $x$ is the distance from left paper edge, $y$ is the
@@ -3080,8 +3082,8 @@
\if b\layervalign\vskip-\layerheight\fi
\if c\layervalign\vskip-.5\layerheight\fi
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{3.23a}{2017/04/22}{\textsf{bidi} code added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{usage of \textsf{scrbase}'s \cs{IfRTL}}^^A
+% \changes{3.23a}{2017/04/22}{\textsf{bidi} code added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/04}{usage of \textsf{scrbase}'s \cs{IfRTL}}%^^A
% If we are in right-to-left mode of package \textsf{bidi} or
% \textsf{xepersian} the horizontal output is in the opposite direction. So we
% need the \cs{makebox} to the right instead of the left and to move the
@@ -3108,13 +3110,13 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@@layerbox
-% \end{macro}^^A \scr@layerbox
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@@layerbox
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scr@layerbox
%
% \begin{macro}{\layerrawmode}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new command}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new command}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\layertextmode}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new command}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new command}%^^A
% This is the command to output layers in raw mode. This is very simple:
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*package&body>
@@ -3122,12 +3124,12 @@
\newcommand{\layertextmode}[1]{#1}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \layertextmode
-% \end{macro}^^A \layerrawmode
+% \end{macro}%^^A \layertextmode
+% \end{macro}%^^A \layerrawmode
%
% \begin{macro}{\layerpicturemode}
-% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{redundant \cs{dimexpr} removed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/30}{new command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/08}{redundant \cs{dimexpr} removed}%^^A
% This is a bit more complicated. It is the layer output for \texttt{picture}
% layers. In this case we use a picture environment and internally define some
% additional commands.
@@ -3154,7 +3156,7 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \layerpicturemode
+% \end{macro}%^^A \layerpicturemode
%
% \begin{option}{draft}
% \begin{macro}{\ifscrlayer@draft}
@@ -3183,10 +3185,10 @@
\csname KV@KOMA.\@currname.\@currext @draft@default\endcsname\relax
%</interface&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscrlayer@draft
-% \end{option}^^A draft
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@do@page@style@element@layer
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclarePageStyleByLayers
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscrlayer@draft
+% \end{option}%^^A draft
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@do@page@style@element@layer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclarePageStyleByLayers
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}
@@ -3259,9 +3261,9 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \RedeclarePageStyleByLayers
-% \end{macro}^^A \ProvidePageStyleByLayers
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers
+% \end{macro}%^^A \RedeclarePageStyleByLayers
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ProvidePageStyleByLayers
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers
%
% We also declare page style \Pagestyle{@everystyle@} by default. You should
% not use this page style as an real page style (even not as the empty
@@ -3275,11 +3277,11 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AddLayersToPageStyle}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}
% \begin{macro}{\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}
% \begin{macro}{\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of the page style to be modified (must
% be expandable and result in a string).
@@ -3334,7 +3336,7 @@
\begingroup\let\@elt\relax\xdef#1{\@elt #2#1}\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \@snoc
+% \end{macro}%^^A \@snoc
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}[2]{%
\edef\reserved@b{\GetRealPageStyle{#1}}%
@@ -3352,7 +3354,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\remove@layer@from@page@style}
-% \changes{v0.9}{2014/07/25}{cleaning of layer list must be global}
+% \changes{v0.9}{2014/07/25}{cleaning of layer list must be global}
% Helper macro to remove exactly one layer (arg 1) from a page style (arg 2).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\remove@layer@from@page@style}[2]{%
@@ -3367,7 +3369,7 @@
\endgroup
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \remoce@layer@from@page@style
+% \end{macro}%^^A \remoce@layer@from@page@style
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@lpm@error}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of the page style to be modified (must
@@ -3395,16 +3397,16 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@lpm@error
-% \end{macro}^^A \RemoveLayersFromPageStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \AddLayersToPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@lpm@error
+% \end{macro}%^^A \RemoveLayersFromPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AddLayersToPageStyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of the page style to be modified (must
% be expandable and result in a string).
@@ -3476,8 +3478,8 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer
-% \end{macro}^^A \AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle}
@@ -3509,7 +3511,7 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \UnifyLayersAtPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \UnifyLayersAtPageStyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}
% \begin{macro}{\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}
@@ -3580,7 +3582,7 @@
\reserved@a
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@modify@layer@ps@options
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@modify@layer@ps@options
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}[2]{%
\IfLayerPageStyleExists{#1}{%
@@ -3592,13 +3594,13 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \AddToLayerPageStyleOptions
-% \end{macro}^^A \ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AddToLayerPageStyleOptions
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@beginartifact}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (semi internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (semi internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@endartifact}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (semi internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/07/14}{new (semi internal)}%^^A
% These macros are reserved for tagging packages. The first one is executed
% after the initial contents hook, the last one is executed after the final
% contents hook. Both executions are done only, if the \texttt{artifact}
@@ -3641,8 +3643,8 @@
\providecommand*{\scrlayer@endartifact}[1]{}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@endartifact
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@beginartifact
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@endartifact
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@beginartifact
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclarePageStyleAlias}
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}
@@ -3725,10 +3727,10 @@
\DeclarePageStyleAlias{#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \RedeclarePageStyleAlias
-% \end{macro}^^A \ProvidePageStyleAlias
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclareNewPageStyleAlias
-% \end{macro}^^A \DeclarePageStyleAlias
+% \end{macro}%^^A \RedeclarePageStyleAlias
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ProvidePageStyleAlias
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclareNewPageStyleAlias
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DeclarePageStyleAlias
%
% \begin{macro}{\DestroyPageStyleAlias}
% \begin{description}
@@ -3804,13 +3806,13 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfRealLayerPageStyleExists
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfLayerPageStyleExists
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfRealLayerPageStyleExists
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfLayerPageStyleExists
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfLayerAtPageStyle}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{\cs{scr@trim@spaces} added}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\IfLayersAtPageStyle}
% \begin{description}
% \item[\Parameter{string}:] the name of the page style to be tested (must
@@ -3903,9 +3905,9 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfLayersAtPageStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \IfLayerAtPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfLayersAtPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \IfLayerAtPageStyle
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}
@@ -3956,7 +3958,7 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \DestroyRealLayerPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \DestroyRealLayerPageStyle
%
%
% \subsection{Kernel Patches}
@@ -4017,7 +4019,7 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \currentpagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \currentpagestyle
%
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayer@exec@before@pagestyle@hook}
@@ -4046,11 +4048,11 @@
\newcommand*{\scrlayer@exec@after@pagestyle@hook}[1]{}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@exec@after@pagestyle@hook
-% \end{macro}^^A \AfterSelectAnyPageStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@exec@before@pagestyle@hook
-% \end{macro}^^A \BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle
-% \end{macro}^^A \pagestyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@exec@after@pagestyle@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \AfterSelectAnyPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@exec@before@pagestyle@hook
+% \end{macro}%^^A \BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle
+% \end{macro}%^^A \pagestyle
%
%
% \subsection{Declaration of End User Interfaces}
@@ -4210,8 +4212,8 @@
\csname KV@KOMA.\@currname.\@currext @forceoverwrite@default\endcsname\relax
%</interface&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscrlayer@forceoverwrite
-% \end{option}^^A forceoverwrite
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscrlayer@forceoverwrite
+% \end{option}%^^A forceoverwrite
%
% \begin{option}{autoremoveinterfaces}
% \begin{macro}{\ifscrlayer@autoremoveinterfaces}
@@ -4240,11 +4242,11 @@
\relax
%</interface&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \ifscrlayer@autoremoveinterfaces
-% \end{option}^^A autoremoveinterfaces
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayer@AddCsToInterface
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayerAddCsToInterface
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayerAddToInterface
+% \end{macro}%^^A \ifscrlayer@autoremoveinterfaces
+% \end{option}%^^A autoremoveinterfaces
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayer@AddCsToInterface
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayerAddCsToInterface
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayerAddToInterface
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayerInitInterface}
% \begin{description}
@@ -4279,7 +4281,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
%<interface&init>\scrlayerInitInterface
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayerInitInterface
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayerInitInterface
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}
% \begin{description}
@@ -4297,7 +4299,7 @@
}
%</package&body>
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface
+% \end{macro}%^^A \scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface
%
%
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
@@ -4313,7 +4315,7 @@
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
-%%% mode: flyspell
%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB"
+%%% flyspell-mode: t
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx
index a56dbe6266..b52fe0b59e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrlfile.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{772}
+% \CheckSum{820}
% \iffalse^^A meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrlfile.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the work `scrlfile' which is part of the LaTeX2e
% KOMA-Script bundle.
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrlfile.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil des Werks `scrlfile', das wiederum Teil des
% LaTeX2e KOMA-Script Pakets ist.
@@ -59,12 +59,12 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrlfile.dtx 3011 2018-08-29 07:35:17Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrlfile.dtx 3243 2019-10-07 13:32:53Z kohm $
%<*dtx>
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-08-29 09:35:17 +0200 (Wed, 29 Aug 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-07 15:32:53 +0200 (Mon, 07 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 2631 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -127,8 +127,8 @@
%
% \selectlanguage{english}
%
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/11}{First version split from hugh scrclass.dtx}^^A
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{standalone manual removed}^^A
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/06/11}{First version split from hugh scrclass.dtx}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{standalone manual removed}%^^A
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}
%
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@
%
% \subsection{Preamble}
%
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{Preamble sub-section removed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/06}{Preamble sub-section removed}%^^A
% Since \KOMAScript~3.24 we do not longer output version information into the
% \texttt{log}-file.
%
@@ -155,8 +155,8 @@
%
% \subsection{The macros}
%
-% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{replacement code added}
+% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{replacement code added}%^^A
% \LaTeX{} uses this macro for loading files with
% \cs{input}\marg{filename}, \cs{include}, \cs{LoadClass},
% \cs{LoadClassWithOptions}, \cs{documentclass}, \cs{documentstyle},
@@ -169,14 +169,30 @@
% macros\,---\,one before loading the file and one after loading the
% file. But before we redefine the macro, we test, if the macro was
% defined like we expected. \LaTeX{} will warn, if not.
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/06}{\LaTeX{} 2019-10-01 changed the definition}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
-\CheckCommand{\InputIfFileExists}[2]{%
+\long\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
\IfFileExists{#1}%
- {#2\@addtofilelist{#1}\@@input \@filef@und}}
+ {#2\@addtofilelist{#1}\@@input \@filef@und}}%
+\ifx\reserved@a\InputIfFileExists\else
+ \expandafter\CheckCommand\expandafter*\expandafter\InputIfFileExists
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\protect\csname InputIfFileExists \endcsname
+ }%
+ \expandafter\CheckCommand \csname InputIfFileExists \endcsname[2]{%
+ \IfFileExists {#1}{%
+ \expandafter \@swaptwoargs \expandafter {\@filef@und }%
+ {#2\@addtofilelist {#1}\@@input }%
+ }%
+ }%
+\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% Now we can redefine the macro like described above:
% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand{\InputIfFileExists}[2]{%
+\expandafter\renewcommand\expandafter*\expandafter\InputIfFileExists
+\expandafter{\expandafter
+ \protect\csname InputIfFileExists \endcsname}%
+\expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname InputIfFileExists \endcsname#1#2{%
\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1-@alias\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
@@ -189,21 +205,31 @@
#1-@alias\endcsname}{#2}%
}%
{\IfFileExists{#1}{%
- \scr@load@hook{before}{#1}%
- #2\@addtofilelist{#1}%
- \@@input \@filef@und
- \scr@load@hook{after}{#1}%
+ \expandafter\scr@input@withhook\expandafter{\@filef@und}{#1}{#2}%
}}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@input@withhook}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/03/28}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% We need a new internal, because of expanding \cs{@file@und} before inputting
+% the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\scr@input@withhook}[3]{%
+ \scr@load@hook{before}{#2}%
+ #3\@addtofilelist{#2}%
+ \@@input #1%
+ \scr@load@hook{after}{#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}{\@loadwithoptions}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new redefinition}
-% \begin{macro}{\scr@loadwithoptions}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\scr@@loadwithoptions}
-% \changes{v2.97a}{2007/03/07}{new helper macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@loadwithoptions}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new redefinition}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@loadwithoptions}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@loadwithoptions}
+% \changes{v2.97a}{2007/03/07}{new helper macro}
% \LaTeX{} uses this macro for loading classes and packages using
% \cs{LoadClassWithOptions} or \cs{RequirePackageWithOptions}. We simply say
% now: if the class or package should be replaced by another, try it again
@@ -227,16 +253,16 @@
\scr@@loadwithoptions
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
-% \begin{macro}{\@onefilewithoption}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new redefinition}
-% \begin{macro}{\scr@onefilewithoption}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\scr@@onefilewithoption}
-% \changes{v2.98}{2007/12/18}{new helper macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@onefilewithoption}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new redefinition}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@onefilewithoption}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@@onefilewithoption}
+% \changes{v2.98}{2007/12/18}{new helper macro}
% \LaTeX{} uses this macro for loading classes and packages using
% \cs{LoadClass}, \cs{documentclass}, \cs{RequirePackage}, and
% \cs{usepackage}. We simply say now: if the class or package should be
@@ -266,13 +292,13 @@
\scr@load@hook{lateafter}{#1.#4}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ReplaceInput}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{implemented}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{implemented}
% Defining the replacement by definition of \cs{\#1-@alias}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ReplaceInput}[2]{%
@@ -280,8 +306,8 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ReplaceFile}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{throw error}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{throw error}
% Sorry, but I've implemented the wrong command some time ago.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ReplaceFile}{%
@@ -302,7 +328,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\UnReplaceInput}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new command}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new command}
% Do not longer replace a file.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\UnReplaceInput}[1]{%
@@ -314,11 +340,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ReplacePackage}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
% \begin{macro}{\ReplaceClass}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new command}
% \begin{macro}{\@replacefilewithext}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper command}^^A
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper command}%^^A
% Note that replacing a package or class will not replace the input of the
% file of the package or class but only the input of package or class.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -337,11 +363,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\UnReplacePackage}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new command}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new command}
% \begin{macro}{\UnReplaceClass}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new command}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new command}
% \begin{macro}{\@unreplacefilewithext}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new helper command}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/15}{new helper command}%^^A
% Do not nolonger replace a class or package.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@unreplacefilewithext}[2]{%
@@ -362,8 +388,8 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@replacefile@msg}
-% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper command}
-% \changes{v2.98}{2007/12/18}{spellfix}
+% \changes{v2.96}{2006/07/19}{new helper command}
+% \changes{v2.98}{2007/12/18}{spellfix}
% Last but not least \textsf{scrlfile} will write a message to the log file at
% every replacement.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -405,29 +431,31 @@
% \begin{macro}{\AfterFile}
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeClass}
% \begin{macro}{\AfterClass}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AfterAtEndOfClass}
% \begin{macro}{\@AfterClass}
% \begin{macro}{\@@AfterClass}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/08}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/08}{new (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\@@@AfterClass}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/09}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/09}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/08/26}{using inside class fixed}
% \begin{macro}{\@sAfterClass}
% \begin{macro}{\BeforePackage}
% \begin{macro}{\AfterPackage}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AfterAtEndOfPackage}
% \begin{macro}{\@AfterPackage}
% \begin{macro}{\@@AfterPackage}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/08}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/08}{new (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\@@@AfterPackage}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/09}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/09}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/08/26}{using inside package fixed}
% \begin{macro}{\@sAfterPackage}
% These macros add stuff to a load-file-hook of a file, class or
% package. First argument is the name of the file (with extension),
@@ -450,11 +478,12 @@
}%
}
\newcommand*{\@@@AfterClass}[2]{%
- \begingroup\ifx\csname #2.\@clsextension-h@@k\endcsname\relax
- \aftergroup\@sAfterClass
- \else
- \aftergroup\AfterAtEndOfClass
- \fi
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #2.\@clsextension-h@@k\endcsname\relax
+ \aftergroup\@sAfterClass
+ \else
+ \aftergroup\AfterAtEndOfClass
+ \fi
\endgroup{#2}%
}
\newcommand*{\AfterAtEndOfClass}[1]{%
@@ -490,11 +519,12 @@
}%
}
\newcommand*{\@@@AfterPackage}[2]{%
- \begingroup\ifx\csname #2.\@pkgextension-h@@k\endcsname\relax
- \aftergroup\@sAfterPackage
- \else
- \aftergroup\AfterAtEndOfPackage
- \fi
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #2.\@pkgextension-h@@k\endcsname\relax
+ \aftergroup\@sAfterPackage
+ \else
+ \aftergroup\AfterAtEndOfPackage
+ \fi
\endgroup{#2}%
}
\newcommand*{\AfterAtEndOfPackage}[1]{%
@@ -539,24 +569,24 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\PreventPackageFromLoading}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New}
-% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/06/13}{write fault error in \cs{MessageBreak} fixed}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/06/15}{new star version allowes empty argument with
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New}
+% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/06/13}{write fault error in \cs{MessageBreak} fixed}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/06/15}{new star version allowes empty argument with
% info instead of warning}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@PreventPackageFromLoading}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2012/06/15}{New (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2012/06/15}{New (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@PreventPackageFromLoading}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{New (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{\cs{usepackage} before \cs{documentclass}
-% fixed}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{New (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{\cs{usepackage} before \cs{documentclass}
+% fixed}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scrlfile@excludedpackages}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\scrlfile@saved@RequirePackage}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scrlfile@excludedpackages}{}
\let\scrlfile@excludedpackages\@empty
@@ -611,8 +641,8 @@
% packages will be added to the exclusion list. Empty arguments will be
% ignored.
% \changes{v3.11a}{2012/06/11}{missing \cs{scrlfile@excludedpackages} at
-% redefinition of \cs{scrlfile@excludedpackages} added}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{spurious \cs{expandafter} removed}^^A
+% redefinition of \cs{scrlfile@excludedpackages} added}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{spurious \cs{expandafter} removed}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@for\reserved@a:=\reserved@b\do {%
\ifx\reserved@a\@empty
@@ -657,9 +687,9 @@
\@onlypreamble\PreventPackageFromLoading
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\StorePreventPackageFromLoading}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New}
% These two are very simple
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading}{%
@@ -678,11 +708,11 @@
\@onlypreamble\StorePreventPackageFromLoading
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\UnPreventPackageFromLoading}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{New}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{New}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@UnPreventPackageFromLoading}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{New (internal)}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{New (internal)}%^^A
% This removes packages from the prevent exclude list. The star variant also
% undefines the instead code.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -726,9 +756,9 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scrlfile@RequirePackage}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{tolerate spaces}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{execute the optional argument of
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{tolerate spaces}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/11/22}{execute the optional argument of
% \cs{PreventPackageFromLoading}}
% This macro will replace \cs{RequirePackage} whenever the exlude list is not
% empty
@@ -781,8 +811,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@gobbleopt}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.08a}{2011/02/11}{\cs{@gobbleopt} renamed due to compaibility
+% \changes{v3.08}{2010/11/04}{New (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.08a}{2011/02/11}{\cs{@gobbleopt} renamed due to compaibility
% problems with \texttt{ntheorem}}
% Eat the optional argument if it exists.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -791,19 +821,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\kernel@ifstar}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{New (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{New (internal)}
% I hope, the \LaTeX{} kernel will define this command in future. But
% nevertheless, there are \LaTeX{} kernels in real live without this
% command. So I do it again if needed:
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*\kernel@ifstar[1]{\kernel@ifnextchar*{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}^^A \kernel@ifstar
+% \end{macro}%^^A \kernel@ifstar
%
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeClosingMainAux}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/09/03}{new}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/09/03}{new}
% \begin{macro}{\AfterReadingMainAux}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/25}{new}
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/25}{new}
% These are completly different. First we have to establish a new hook
% at \cs{end\{document\}}, just after closing the group and after the
% final \cs{clearpage}.
@@ -830,9 +860,9 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@checkend}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/09/03}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/09/03}{new (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@dofilelist}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/25}{new}
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/25}{new}
% You may see above, that we need save-to macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@saved@checkend}{}
@@ -841,12 +871,12 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@redefine@newpage}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new (internal)}
% Some classes (e.g. \textsf{letter}) write output to the aux file.
% Because of this, redefinition of \cs{newpage} will only be done, if
% \cs{BeforeClosingMainAux} is used.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@saved@newpage}
-% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.00}{2008/07/09}{new (internal)}
% And \cs{newpage} will be restored after the hook.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@restore@newpage}
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -887,9 +917,9 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@hook@bcma}
-% \changes{v2.95}{2002/09/03}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v2.95}{2002/09/03}{new (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@hook@acma}
-% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/25}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/25}{new (internal)}
% We also need macros, that saves the commands at the hooks and are
% extendable using \cs{g@addto@macro}.
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins
index a7ae3b1dbb..17f8852f99 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrmain.ins
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrmain.ins
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrmain.ins
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -35,6 +35,8 @@
% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien.
% ======================================================================
+% $Id: scrmain.ins 3147 2019-05-11 11:03:41Z kohm $
+
% ---------- KOMA-Script default docstrip declarations -----------------
\input scrdocstrip.tex
@@ -88,10 +90,25 @@
}
\generate{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+% \file{scrbook.cls}{%
+% \from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{class,book,long}%
+% }%
+ \file{scrreport.cls}{%
+ \from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{class,report,long}%
+ }%
+ \file{scrarticle.cls}{%
+ \from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{class,article,long}%
+ }%
+ \file{scrletter.cls}{%
+ \from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{class,letter,long}%
+ }%
+}
+
+\generate{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
\file{scrbook.cls}{%
\from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{class,book}%
\from{scrkernel-basics.dtx}{load}%
- \from{tocbasic.dtx}{class,load,chapter}%
+ \from{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}{class,book,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{class,book,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-sections.dtx}{class,book,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-compatibility.dtx}{class,book,init}%
@@ -140,7 +157,7 @@
\file{scrreprt.cls}{%
\from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{class,report}%
\from{scrkernel-basics.dtx}{load}%
- \from{tocbasic.dtx}{class,load,chapter}%
+ \from{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}{class,book,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{class,report,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-sections.dtx}{class,report,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-compatibility.dtx}{class,report,init}%
@@ -189,7 +206,7 @@
\file{scrartcl.cls}{%
\from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{class,article}%
\from{scrkernel-basics.dtx}{load}%
- \from{tocbasic.dtx}{class,load}%
+ \from{scrkernel-listsof.dtx}{class,book,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{class,article,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-sections.dtx}{class,article,prepare}%
\from{scrkernel-compatibility.dtx}{class,article,init}%
@@ -311,7 +328,7 @@
\from{scrkernel-version.dtx}{package,letter}%
\from{scrkernel-basics.dtx}{load}%
\from{scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx}{package,letter,init}%
- \from{scrkernel-compatibility.dtx}{package,letter,init}%
+% \from{scrkernel-compatibility.dtx}{package,letter,init}%
\from{scrkernel-typearea.dtx}{package,letter,init}%
% \from{scrkernel-compatibility.dtx}{package,letter,option}%
\from{scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx}{package,letter,option}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx
index 5d500bc36f..a7457540a6 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrpage.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse
% ======================================================================
% scrpage.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrpage.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,13 +55,13 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrpage.dtx 2640 2017-05-08 09:36:55Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrpage.dtx 3256 2019-10-10 07:06:49Z kohm $
%<scrpage>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01]
%<*dtx>
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-05-08 11:36:55 +0200 (Mon, 08 May 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 09:06:49 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 2631 $
\edef\reserved@a{%
@@ -97,7 +97,6 @@
\endbatchfile
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[ngerman,english]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrpage.dtx}
@@ -143,13 +142,13 @@
%
% \subsection{Options}
% \begin{option}{headinclude}
-% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
+% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
% \begin{option}{headexclude}
-% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
+% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
% \begin{option}{footinclude}
-% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
+% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
% \begin{option}{footexclude}
-% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
+% \changes{v2.3}{2008/12/08}{obsolete}%
% \texttt{scrpage} has known some options. They are similar to the
% old \KOMAScript{} classes. To work with and without the \KOMAScript{}
% classes their definitions are not quite simple.
@@ -194,9 +193,9 @@
%
% We have additional options designed for the additional interface.
% \begin{option}{mpinclude}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{New option}
% \begin{option}{mpexclude}
-% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.8q}{2002/03/28}{New option}
% There are documents where the head and foot should span not only the
% text but also the marginpar. We have an option to do this at
% initialization. This option corresponds with the option of package
@@ -204,7 +203,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\if@mincl}
% \begin{macro}{\@mincltrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@minclfalse}
-% \changes{v2.2g}{2008/11/19}{Test fixed}
+% \changes{v2.2g}{2008/11/19}{Test fixed}
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{@mincltrue}{\newif\if@mincl}{}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -220,13 +219,13 @@
%
% Other new options redefine macros, so we have to define them first.
% \begin{macro}{\scr@headabove@linethickness}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@headbelow@linethickness}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/03/30}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@footabove@linethickness}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@footbelow@linethickness}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% These macros define the thickness of the line above and below the head
% and the foot.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -236,21 +235,21 @@
\newcommand*{\scr@footbelow@linethickness}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@headabove@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@headbelow@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@footabove@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@footbelow@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@headabove@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@headbelow@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@footabove@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@footbelow@linelength}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% Because we want to have the ``line definitions'' at one place, we
% also define the length of the lines here. We have own length at to
% be used at pagestyle \texttt{scrplain}.
@@ -270,21 +269,21 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{option}{headtopline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% \begin{option}{headsepline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% \begin{option}{footsepline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% \begin{option}{footbotline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% \begin{option}{plainheadtopline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% \begin{option}{plainheadsepline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% \begin{option}{plainfootsepline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% \begin{option}{plainfootbotline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New option}
% The thickness can be set by four simple options:
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{headtopline}{%
@@ -330,13 +329,13 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hfline@adjust}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
% \begin{option}{ilines}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
% \begin{option}{clines}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
% \begin{option}{olines}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{New}
% At Version 2 lines may be inner adjusted (0), centered (1) or outer
% adjusted (2):
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -351,12 +350,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{option}{automark}
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use \cs{AtEndOfPackage} to run not yet
+% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use \cs{AtEndOfPackage} to run not yet
% defined macro}
% \begin{option}{manualmark}
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use \cs{AtEndOfPackage} to run not yet
+% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use \cs{AtEndOfPackage} to run not yet
% defined macro}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{don't ignore oneside any longer}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{don't ignore oneside any longer}
% At version 2 we want to distinguish between running headline and
% static headline not only using different pagestyles. We do this with
% options and commands. But here only the options are defined.
@@ -374,9 +373,9 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{autoonesize}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\if@autooneside}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
% If the optional argument of \cs{automark} should be irgnored at
% onside mode, use this option:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -387,9 +386,9 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{option}{markuppercase}
-% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{New}
% \begin{option}{markusedcase}
-% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{New}
% For use of running headlines there are also options to say ``class
% uses upper case at the automatic marks'' or ``class use same case at
% the automatic marks like used writing the heading''.
@@ -401,9 +400,9 @@
% \end{option}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scr@nouppercase}
-% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
% \begin{option}{nouppercase}
-% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
% Sometimes scrpage may be used with a class, which uses
% \cs{uppercase} or \cs{MakeUppercase} at \cs{markboth} or
% \cs{markright}. But the author does not want upper case at the
@@ -458,7 +457,7 @@
% book-classes we define some more switches.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@chapter}
-% \changes{v2.1b}{2003/05/31}{more save test}
+% \changes{v2.1b}{2003/05/31}{more save test}
% First distinguish between article and others.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@chapter
@@ -472,10 +471,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
-% \changes{v1.2}{1995/07/08}{Definition changed}
-% \changes{v2.1b}{2003/05/31}{more save test}
-% \changes{v2.2d}{2007/03/13}{additional \cs{if@mainmatter} test}
-% \changes{v2.2g}{2008/11/19}{usage of \cs{if@mainmatter} at message
+% \changes{v1.2}{1995/07/08}{Definition changed}
+% \changes{v2.1b}{2003/05/31}{more save test}
+% \changes{v2.2d}{2007/03/13}{additional \cs{if@mainmatter} test}
+% \changes{v2.2g}{2008/11/19}{usage of \cs{if@mainmatter} at message
% removed}
% Next distinguish between matter- and nomatter-classes.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -525,7 +524,7 @@
% later use it to define the pagestyle-definition-interface for users.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@automark}
-% \changes{v2.1}{2002/10/30}{New switch}
+% \changes{v2.1}{2002/10/30}{New switch}
% \begin{macro}{\@automarktrue}
% \begin{macro}{\@automarkfalse}
% We need this switch to decide to switch on or off \cs{@mkboth} at the
@@ -553,17 +552,17 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@defpagestyle}
% Now the we can define the head and the foot.
-% \changes{v1.0b}{1995/05/25}{Dot deleted after number at
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1995/05/25}{Dot deleted after number at
% chapter- and sectionmark}
-% \changes{v1.0b}{1995/05/25}{Use CJK at \cs{chaptermark},
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1995/05/25}{Use CJK at \cs{chaptermark},
% \cs{sectionmark} and \cs{subsectionmark}}
-% \changes{v1.3e}{2008/02/29}{usage of \cs{if@mainmatter} fixed}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{Version 2 uses \cs{automark} and
+% \changes{v1.3e}{2008/02/29}{usage of \cs{if@mainmatter} fixed}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{Version 2 uses \cs{automark} and
% \cs{manualmark}, so star and non-star version are same}
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Use \cs{if@automark}}
-% \changes{v2.2d}{2007/06/14}{Support of article-classes with
+% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Use \cs{if@automark}}
+% \changes{v2.2d}{2007/06/14}{Support of article-classes with
% \cs{if@mainmatter}}
-% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{moved \cs{if@twoside} inside of definition}
+% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{moved \cs{if@twoside} inside of definition}
% Before version 2.5 we have distinguished one- and two-side definitions while
% loading the package and have had all the definitions of \cs{@mkboth},
% \cs{chaptermark}, \cs{sectionmark}, and \cs{subsectionmark} at the
@@ -583,16 +582,16 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\def@head}
-% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\def@@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{Thickness and length of the lines are
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{Thickness and length of the lines are
% optional}
-% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{Use of \cs{scr@nouppercase}}
-% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{Use of \cs{scr@nouppercase}}
+% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% This was real simple, but we already have to do the real definition
% of the heads and foots. First the head:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -637,21 +636,21 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\def@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{Thickness and length of the lines are
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{Thickness and length of the lines are
% optional}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{Use of \cmd\@footwidth instead of
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{Use of \cmd\@footwidth instead of
% \cs{textwidth}}
-% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\def@@foot}
-% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\def@@@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{Use of \cs{scr@nouppercase}}
-% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{Use of \cs{footfont}}
-% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{Use of \cs{scr@nouppercase}}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{Use of \cs{footfont}}
+% \changes{v2.5}{2010/04/22}{new (internal)}
% And last twosided and onesided foot:
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\def@foot{%
@@ -709,14 +708,14 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\hf@rule}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New, third parameter ``boxwidth''}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{Rule can be adjusted at inner margine,
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New, third parameter ``boxwidth''}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{Rule can be adjusted at inner margine,
% centered or adjusted at outer margine}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{Last parameter of the rule tells, if it is a
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{Last parameter of the rule tells, if it is a
% headabove, headbelow, footabove or footbelow rule}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2005/07/05}{Precommands before the rules are allowed}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2005/07/05}{Macro is not longer long}
-% \changes{v2.2b}{2005/08/31}{No even alignment at oneside}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2005/07/05}{Precommands before the rules are allowed}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2005/07/05}{Macro is not longer long}
+% \changes{v2.2b}{2005/08/31}{No even alignment at oneside}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hf@rule}[4]{%
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{#1}
@@ -749,23 +748,23 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@pre@headabove@line}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@headtopline}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@pre@headbelow@line}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@headsepline}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@pre@footabove@line}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@footsepline}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@pre@footbelow@line}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@footbottomrule}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@instead@footbotline}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New KOMA-Script font command}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\scr@pre@headabove@line}{}
\newcommand*{\scr@fnt@headtopline}{\scr@pre@headabove@line}
@@ -837,7 +836,7 @@
{\@renewpagestyle[+]}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@renewpagestyle}
-% \changes{v1.2a}{1996/12/07}{Avoid to define pagestyle as \cs{relax}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1996/12/07}{Avoid to define pagestyle as \cs{relax}
% if it wasn't defined (Thanks to Bernd).}
% There we have to distinguish, whether the pagestyle is already
% defined or not.
@@ -911,8 +910,8 @@
% \end{macro}
% Next we check, if there is an optional argument:
% \begin{macro}{\@deftripstyle}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@deftripstyle[#1]#2{%
\kernel@ifnextchar[%]
@@ -925,8 +924,8 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@deftripstyle[#1]#2[#3]{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% Ok, now we have the problem, that there can be only 9 arguments. So we
% have to distinguish the star-versions by a macro:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -974,23 +973,23 @@
% \subsection{Automark or not}
% This is new since version 2.
% \begin{macro}{\automark}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{Use of \cs{MakeMarkcase}}
-% \changes{v2.0g}{2001/06/25}{Use of \cs{manualmark}}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{Warning, if arguments are mixed up}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{\cs{markboth} behavior fixed}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{Use of \cs{if@autooneside}}
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Switch on \cs{if@automark}}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{Use of \cs{MakeMarkcase}}
+% \changes{v2.0g}{2001/06/25}{Use of \cs{manualmark}}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{Warning, if arguments are mixed up}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{\cs{markboth} behavior fixed}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{Use of \cs{if@autooneside}}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Switch on \cs{if@automark}}
% This macro activates automatic mark. Is has two arguments. The
% first, optional argument is the sectioning level name of the mark at
% left pages, the second, not optional argument is the same at right
% pages. At oneside mode all pages are right.
% \begin{macro}{\@iflevelok}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\markleft}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\@markleft}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{New}
% To define \cs{automark} we also need these three makros. The first
% one decides, if level of second parameter is less than level of
% first parameter and does then third or fourth parameter.
@@ -1021,7 +1020,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
-% \changes{v2.2a}{2004/09/05}{all changes of helper macros and switches are
+% \changes{v2.2a}{2004/09/05}{all changes of helper macros and switches are
% local to fix e.g.\ twocolumn problem with \cs{part}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\automark}[2][\@empty]{%
@@ -1108,9 +1107,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\manualmark}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0g}{2001/06/25}{also deactivating \cs{...mark}}
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Switch off \cs{if@automark}}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0g}{2001/06/25}{also deactivating \cs{...mark}}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Switch off \cs{if@automark}}
% This macro switchs to the manual set of marks (using \cs{markboth}
% and \cs{markright}. This is very simple, we only have to deaktivate
% the mark macros.
@@ -1129,20 +1128,20 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partlevel}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New}
-% \changes{v2.4}{2009/11/11}{part level is always -1}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New}
+% \changes{v2.4}{2009/11/11}{part level is always -1}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterlevel}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionlevel}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\subsectionlevel}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionlevel}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphlevel}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphlevel}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% At \cs{automark} we use some macros to get the numeric level of a
% sectioning name. We simply define these:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1163,7 +1162,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeMarkcase}
-% \changes{v2.0m}{2002/02/05}{\texttt{scrlttr2} is a known class}
+% \changes{v2.0m}{2002/02/05}{\texttt{scrlttr2} is a known class}
% At \cs{automark} we use a new macro to enable usability of
% \cs{MakeUppercase} at the head-marks. We set this macro to
% \cs{MakeUppercase} if one of the standard-classes was loaded:
@@ -1186,8 +1185,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@style}
-% \changes{v2.0g}{2001/06/25}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0m}{2002/02/05}{Take care of class \texttt{scrlttr2}}
+% \changes{v2.0g}{2001/06/25}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0m}{2002/02/05}{Take care of class \texttt{scrlttr2}}
% This macro defines, which style for scrheadings should be used. If
% it is not defined, we have to define it in a propper way.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1203,26 +1202,26 @@
%
% \subsection{Width of head and foot}
% \begin{macro}{\setheadwidth}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\setfootwidth}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\set@hf@width}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
-% \changes{v1.3a}{2001/05/31}{symbolic values ``paper'', ``text'',
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2001/05/31}{symbolic values ``paper'', ``text'',
% ``textwidthmarginpar''}
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{symbolic values ``paper'', ``text'',
+% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{symbolic values ``paper'', ``text'',
% ``textwidthmarginpar''}
-% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{error fix at warning}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{2001/06/07}{error fix at warning}
% \begin{macro}{\settowidthof}
-% \changes{v2.0e}{2001/06/22}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{2001/06/22}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\deftowidthof}
-% \changes{v2.0e}{2001/06/22}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic values ``autohead'' and
+% \changes{v2.0e}{2001/06/22}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic values ``autohead'' and
% ``autofoot''}
-% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{new symbolic value ``page''}
-% \changes{v2.0k}{2001/09/28}{\cs{pagewidth} korrigiert}
-% \changes{v2.1b}{2003/05/31}{more save existance test}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{value ``foot'' fixed}
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2001/08/17}{new symbolic value ``page''}
+% \changes{v2.0k}{2001/09/28}{\cs{pagewidth} korrigiert}
+% \changes{v2.1b}{2003/05/31}{more save existance test}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{value ``foot'' fixed}
% Until version 1.3, head and foot of a page had same width like the
% text block. Since version 1.3 this was changed. Now the head and
% foot have their own width and an optional shift relative to the text
@@ -1345,19 +1344,19 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@headwidth}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
-% \changes{v2.1}{2002/03/28}{use of option \texttt{mpinclude}}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v2.1}{2002/03/28}{use of option \texttt{mpinclude}}
% \begin{macro}{\@footwidth}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
-% \changes{v2.1}{2002/03/28}{use of option \texttt{mpinclude}}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v2.1}{2002/03/28}{use of option \texttt{mpinclude}}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddheadshift}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\@evenheadshift}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddfootshift}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\@evenfootshift}
-% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2001/03/30}{New}
% The values of width and shift of head and foot are saved at internal
% macros.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1415,11 +1414,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footfont}
-% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{New}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@pagefoot}
-% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{New (internal)}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{New (internal)}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@fnt@wrn@pagefoot}
-% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{deactivated}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{2008/02/14}{deactivated}
% There is also a macro used by |\@evenfoot|, |\@oddfoot| after |\headfont|:
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\footfont}{\normalfont}
@@ -1433,25 +1432,25 @@
%
% \subsection{Length and thickness of lines at head and foot}
% \begin{macro}{\setheadtopline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{headtop} changed into
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{headtop} changed into
% \texttt{headabove}}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
% \begin{macro}{\setheadsepline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{headbot} changed into
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{headbot} changed into
% \texttt{headbelow}}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
% \begin{macro}{\setfootsepline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{foottop} changed into
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{foottop} changed into
% \texttt{footabove}}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
% \begin{macro}{\setfootbotline}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{footbot} changed into
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{\texttt{footbot} changed into
% \texttt{footbelow}}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{new symbolic value ``auto''}
% Since version 2 there are new macros to set the length and
% thickness of the lines at head and foot. Wie use macros not
% dimensions, because the amount of dimensions is very small at \TeX.
@@ -1462,16 +1461,16 @@
\newcommand*{\setfootbotline}{\scr@setline{foot}{below}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\scr@setline}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@scr@setline}
-% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{symbolic values implemented}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/19}{symbolic values implemented}
% \begin{macro}{\@@scr@setline}
-% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/18}{macro name fixed}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0d}{2001/06/18}{macro name fixed}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@scr@set@pre@line}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New internal}
% The real change of the lines is done with the macros
% \cs{scr@setline}, \cs{@scr@setline} and \cs{@@scr@setline}:
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1513,23 +1512,23 @@
%
% \subsection{Extended multilanguage formats}
% \begin{macro}{\partmarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New}
+% \changes{v2.2}{2004/07/05}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptermarkformat}
-% \changes{v1.1}{1995/06/27}{Space after chapternumber increased.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1995/06/27}{Space after chapternumber increased.}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionmarkformat}
-% \changes{v1.1}{1995/06/27}{Space after sectionnumber increased.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1995/06/27}{Space after sectionnumber increased.}
% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmarkformat}
-% \changes{v1.1}{1995/06/27}{Space after subsectionnumber increased.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1995/06/27}{Space after subsectionnumber increased.}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionmarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphmarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphmarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\@seccntmarkformat}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\@seccntformat}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% There are some macros to handle languages like Chinese, Japanese or Korean.
% These macros were defined first by Werner Lemberg at his CJK-bundle. See
% |scrclass.dtx| for further information.
@@ -1562,8 +1561,8 @@
% \subsection{Definition of default pagestyles}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@save@plain}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use this instead of
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use this instead of
% \cs{ps@standardplain}}
% We define two default pagestyles, which can be used instead of the
% standard pagestyles. The two pagestyles are something like a
@@ -1581,17 +1580,17 @@
\let\ps@plain\ps@use@plain
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@save@headings}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use this instead of
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use this instead of
% \cs{ps@standardheadings}}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@save@myheadings}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use this instead of
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{use this instead of
% \cs{ps@standardmyheadings}}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% If standard pagestyle \texttt{headings} or \texttt{myheadings} is
% used, also standard pagestyle \texttt{use@plain} should be
% used. So we also define new names for the other old pagestyles and
@@ -1628,10 +1627,10 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@useheadings}
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0m}{2002/02/05}{Fatal bug (\cs{mkboth} instead of
+% \changes{v2.0b}{2001/05/31}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0m}{2002/02/05}{Fatal bug (\cs{mkboth} instead of
% \cs{@mkboth}) fixed}
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Use of switch \cs{if@automark}}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{2002/10/30}{Use of switch \cs{if@automark}}
% This is the pagestyle, you should use instead of \texttt{headings}
% or \texttt{myheadings}. If you are using manual marks, this behaves
% like pagestyle \texttt{myheadings}. If you are using automatic
@@ -1663,34 +1662,34 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@scrplain}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0a}{2001/04/24}{\cs{strut} inserted}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{\cs{strut} inserted}
-% \changes{v2.1c}{2004/02/07}{thickness of footbelow line fixed}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0a}{2001/04/24}{\cs{strut} inserted}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{\cs{strut} inserted}
+% \changes{v2.1c}{2004/02/07}{thickness of footbelow line fixed}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@even@left@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@even@middle@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@even@right@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@odd@left@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@odd@middle@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@odd@right@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@even@left@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@even@middle@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@even@right@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@odd@left@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@odd@middle@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrplain@odd@right@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% After this, we can define the new pagestyles, first a new plain
% one. It sould be variable and so we use macros to define the parts.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1784,33 +1783,33 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@scrheadings}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v2.0a}{2001/04/24}{\cs{strut} inserted}
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{\cs{strut} inserted}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0a}{2001/04/24}{\cs{strut} inserted}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{2001/06/23}{\cs{strut} inserted}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@even@left@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@even@middle@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@even@right@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@odd@left@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@odd@middle@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@odd@right@head}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@even@left@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@even@middle@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@even@right@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@odd@left@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@odd@middle@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\scrheadings@odd@right@foot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
% We also define define a new headings one. It sould be variable and
% so we use macros to define the parts. But we need an \emph{also
% action}, so we first define a inner pagestyle and then use this at a
@@ -1905,77 +1904,77 @@
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ihead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ohead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\chead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lehead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lohead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\rehead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\rohead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cehead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cohead}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ifoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\ofoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cfoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lefoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\lofoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\refoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\rofoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cefoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\cofoot}
-% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v2.0}{2001/04/20}{New}
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% We also need macros to define the contents of the three part head
% and foot. Each macro defines one of the part of head or foot of the
% scrheadings pagestyle and optional of the scrplain pagestyle.
@@ -2079,11 +2078,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\clearscrheadings}
-% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\clearscrheadfoot}
-% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
% \begin{macro}{\clearscrpain}
-% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2001/08/18}{New}
% Maybe you want to clear the currently defined head and foot. First
% let's clear only scrheadings pagestyle but not scrplain pagestyle.
% We do this simply using the already known command:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex
index f7cbbbda1e..b68831469b 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrsource.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrsource.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrsource.tex
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -54,13 +54,12 @@
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{lmodern}
\usepackage[english,ngerman]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\newcommand*{\Environment}[1]{\texttt{\mbox{#1}}}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges\setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1}
-\title{\KOMAScript{} -- The Source\footnote{Ich weiß natürlich, dass ein
+\title{\KOMAScript{} -- The Source\footnote{Ich weiß natürlich, dass ein
Englischer Titel eines vorwiegend deutschsprachigen Dokuments ein
- wenig eigentümlich ist, aber "`\KOMAScript{} -- Der
+ wenig eigentümlich ist, aber "`\KOMAScript{} -- Der
Quelltext"' wollte mir einfach nicht gefallen.}%
}
\date{\filedate\\[1ex] Version \fileversion}
@@ -81,15 +80,15 @@
\addsec{Vorwort}
Sie finden im Folgenden die Dokumentation der Implementierung von
- \KOMAScript. Diese kann für Paketautoren von Interesse sein. Bevor
+ \KOMAScript. Diese kann für Paketautoren von Interesse sein. Bevor
ein Paketautor ein Makro umdefiniert oder ein internes Makro
- verwendet, sollte er jedoch Rücksprache mit dem Autor von
- \KOMAScript{} halten, damit so weit wie möglich sichergestellt ist,
- dass bei zukünftigen Versionen von \KOMAScript{} die notwendige
- Kompatibilität erhalten bleibt oder der Paketautor über notwendige
- Änderungen an den entsprechenden Makros informiert wird.
+ verwendet, sollte er jedoch Rücksprache mit dem Autor von
+ \KOMAScript{} halten, damit so weit wie möglich sichergestellt ist,
+ dass bei zukünftigen Versionen von \KOMAScript{} die notwendige
+ Kompatibilität erhalten bleibt oder der Paketautor über notwendige
+ Änderungen an den entsprechenden Makros informiert wird.
- Teile der Dokumentation sind in Englisch. Der größte Teil ist jedoch
+ Teile der Dokumentation sind in Englisch. Der größte Teil ist jedoch
in Deutsch.
Der Quelltext ist in logische Gruppen eingeteilt und in dieser Form
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc
index 01cbfbcfb8..ad78264508 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrstrip.inc
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% ======================================================================
% scrstrip.inc
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrstrip.inc
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil des LaTeX2e-KOMA-Script-Pakets.
%
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
\KOMAdefVariable{AUTHOR}{Markus Kohm}
\KOMAdefVariable{EMAIL}{[komascript at gmx info]}
\KOMAdefVariable{COPYRIGHTFROM}{1994}
-\KOMAdefVariable{COPYRIGHTTILL}{2017}
+\KOMAdefVariable{COPYRIGHTTILL}{2019}
\let\ifbeta=\iffalse % with = will be replaced by release process
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ See `README'.
The KOMA-Script bundle (but maybe not this file) was based upon the
LaTeX 2.09 Script family created by Frank Neukam 1993 and the LaTeX2e
-standard classes created by The LaTeX3 Project 1994-1996. You may
+standard classes created by The LaTeX3 Project 1994-1996. You can
find a complete unmodified copy of LaTeX2e at
<http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/>.
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx
index a301769a38..9829fe01ce 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrtime.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse
% ======================================================================
% scrtime.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrtime.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 1995-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,15 +55,15 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrtime.dtx 2649 2017-05-29 09:39:43Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrtime.dtx 3256 2019-10-10 07:06:49Z kohm $
%<package&identify>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01]
%<*driver>
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2017-05-29 11:39:43 +0200 (Mon, 29 May 2017) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 09:06:49 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
- \filerevision$Revision: 2649 $
+ \filerevision$Revision: 3256 $
\endgroup
\ProvidesFile{scrtime.dtx}[\filedate\space\filerevision\space
%</driver>
@@ -113,7 +113,6 @@
%<*driver>
\documentclass{scrdoc}
\usepackage[german,english]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{scrtime.dtx}
@@ -163,13 +162,13 @@
% \fi
%
% \begin{option}{12h}
-% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{Option \texttt{12h} added.}
-% \changes{v1.2}{2010/03/10}{Option uses \textsf{scrkbase}.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{Option \texttt{12h} added.}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2010/03/10}{Option uses \textsf{scrkbase}.}
% \begin{option}{24h}
-% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{Option \texttt{24h} added.}
-% \changes{v1.2}{2010/03/10}{Option is deprecated.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{Option \texttt{24h} added.}
+% \changes{v1.2}{2010/03/10}{Option is deprecated.}
% \begin{macro}{\if@Hxii}
-% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{new switch}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{new switch}
% There are two the two Options |24h| and |12h|. We need a switch to
% distinguish.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -210,10 +209,10 @@
% a very good idea.
%
% \begin{macro}{\thistime}
-% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{{\cmd\thistime*} added.}^^A
-% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{{\cmd\thistime} works.}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{{\cmd\thistime*} added.}%^^A
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/02/15}{{\cmd\thistime} works.}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% First we have to decide, is it a star-version ore not.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\thistime{%
@@ -273,7 +272,7 @@
% functionality.
%
% \begin{macro}{\CenturyPart}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% This is the century part of a year number and so only a shortcut to
% |\XdivY{...}{100}|, that is defined at \textsf{scrbase}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -282,7 +281,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DecadePart}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% This is the year number withoud the century part and therefrso only a
% shortcut to |\XmodY{...}{100}|, that is defined at \textsf{scrbase}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -291,7 +290,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@GaussYear}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New (internal)}
% At the Gauss calculation of the day of the week January and February relates
% to the year before. This macro does the correction for any date.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -312,7 +311,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DayNumber}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% Returns the numerical value of the day of week. Note, that Sunday is 0,
% Monday is 1, \dots, Saturday is 6. We use the Gauss calculation of the day
% of the week. First argument is the year, second the month and last the day
@@ -341,13 +340,13 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ISODayNumber}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% Das gleiche wie \cs{DayNumber} aber mit einem ISO-Datum als Argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ISODayNumber}[1]{\expandafter\@IsoDayNumber#1\@nil}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@IsoDayNumber}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New (internal)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@IsoDayNumber}{}
\def\@IsoDayNumber#1-#2-#3\@nil{\DayNumber{#1}{#2}{#3}}
@@ -356,14 +355,14 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DayName}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% Returns the name of the day of the week. Arguments like \cs{DayNumber}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DayName}[3]{\@dayname{\DayNumber{#1}{#2}{#3}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ISODayName}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% Das gleiche wie \cs{DayName} aber mit einem ISO-Datum als Argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ISODayName}[1]{\@dayname{\ISODayNumber{#1}}}
@@ -371,7 +370,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DayNameByNumber}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% Returns the name of the day of the week. The argument is a number that will
% be transposed to the range 0..6.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -382,7 +381,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ISOToday}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% Returns the ISO date.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ISOToday}{%
@@ -392,7 +391,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\IsoToday}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{New}
% Returns the ISO date.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\IsoToday}{%
@@ -402,7 +401,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\todaysname}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Rewritten}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Rewritten}
% Using \cs{DayName} this is very, very simple.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\todaysname}{\DayName{\year}{\month}{\day}}
@@ -410,7 +409,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\todaysnumber}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/11}{New}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/11}{New}
% Using \cs{DayNumber} this is very, very simple.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\todaysnumber}{\DayNumber{\year}{\month}{\day}}
@@ -418,7 +417,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nameday}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Not longer \cs{long}}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Not longer \cs{long}}
% We simply have to redefine |\todaysname|
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\nameday[1]{\renewcommand*{\todaysname}{#1}}
@@ -426,7 +425,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newdaylanguage}
-% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Sunday is 0}
+% \changes{v3.05a}{2010/03/10}{Sunday is 0}
% We write a macro to define the name of the days.
% \begin{macro}{\scrdate@languagenamewarning}
% But before this, we have to define a once only warning.
@@ -530,35 +529,35 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@ngerman}
-% \changes{v1.1i}{1999/10/09}{new language ``ngerman''.}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1999/10/09}{new language ``ngerman''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{ngerman}{Montag}{Dienstag}{Mittwoch}
{Donnerstag}{Freitag}{Samstag}{Sonntag}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@naustrian}
-% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{new language ``naustrian''.}
+% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{new language ``naustrian''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{naustrian}{Montag}{Dienstag}{Mittwoch}
{Donnerstag}{Freitag}{Samstag}{Sonntag}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@austrian}
-% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{new language ``austrian''.}
+% \changes{v3.08b}{2011/02/22}{new language ``austrian''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{austrian}{Montag}{Dienstag}{Mittwoch}
{Donnerstag}{Freitag}{Samstag}{Sonntag}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@swissgerman}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``swissgerman''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``swissgerman''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{swissgerman}{Montag}{Dienstag}{Mittwoch}
{Donnerstag}{Freitag}{Samstag}{Sonntag}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@nswissgerman}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``nswissgerman''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``nswissgerman''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{nswissgerman}{Montag}{Dienstag}{Mittwoch}
{Donnerstag}{Freitag}{Samstag}{Sonntag}
@@ -566,70 +565,70 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@american}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``american''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``american''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{american}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@australian}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``australian''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``australian''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{australian}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@british}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``british''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``british''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{british}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@canadian}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``canadian''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``canadian''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{canadian}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@english}
-% \changes{v1.1g}{1997/06/21}{correct name is ``tuesday''.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1997/06/21}{correct name is ``tuesday''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{english}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@newzealand}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``newzealand''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``newzealand''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{newzealand}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@UKenglish}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``UKenglish''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``UKenglish''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{UKenglish}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@ukenglish}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{new language ``ukenglish''.}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{new language ``ukenglish''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{ukenglish}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@USenglish}
-% \changes{v1.1g}{1997/06/21}{correct name is ``tuesday''.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1997/06/21}{correct name is ``tuesday''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{USenglish}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@usenglish}
-% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{new language ``usenglish''.}
+% \changes{v3.24}{2017/05/29}{new language ``usenglish''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{usenglish}{Monday}{Tuesday}{Wednesday}
{Thursday}{Friday}{Saturday}{Sunday}
@@ -637,21 +636,21 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@acadian}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``acadian''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``acadian''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{acadian}{Lundi}{Mardi}{Mercredi}
{Jeudi}{Vendredi}{Samedi}{Dimanche}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@canadien}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``canadien''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``canadien''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{canadien}{Lundi}{Mardi}{Mercredi}
{Jeudi}{Vendredi}{Samedi}{Dimanche}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@francais}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``francais''.}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{new language ``francais''.}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{francais}{Lundi}{Mardi}{Mercredi}
{Jeudi}{Vendredi}{Samedi}{Dimanche}
@@ -664,29 +663,29 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@italian}
-% \changes{v1.1f}{1997/06/06}{New (thanks to Lorenzo M.\ Catucci)}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1997/06/06}{New (thanks to Lorenzo M.\ Catucci)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{italian}{Luned\`\i}{Marted\`\i}{Mercoled\`\i}
{Gioved\`\i}{Venerd\`\i}{Sabato}{Domenica}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@spanish}
-% \changes{v1.1h}{1997/07/26}{New (thanks to Ralph J.\ Hangleiter)}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1997/07/26}{New (thanks to Ralph J.\ Hangleiter)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{spanish}{Lunes}{Martes}{Mi\'ercoles}
{Jueves}{Viernes}{S\'abado}{Domingo}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@croatian}
-% \changes{v1.1l}{2001/10/05}{New (thanks to Branka Lon\v{c}arevi\'{c})}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{2001/10/05}{New (thanks to Branka Lon\v{c}arevi\'{c})}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{croatian}{Ponedjeljak}{Utorak}{Srijeda}
{\v{C}etvrtak}{Petak}{Subota}{Nedjelja}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@dutch}
-% \changes{v1.1m}{2002/02/02}{New (thanks to Henk Jongbloets)}
-% \changes{v1.1p}{2009/01/01}{fixed to upper case}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{2002/02/02}{New (thanks to Henk Jongbloets)}
+% \changes{v1.1p}{2009/01/01}{fixed to upper case}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{dutch}{Maandag}{Dinsdag}{Woensdag}
{Donderdag}{Vrijdag}{Zaterdag}{Zondag}
@@ -694,7 +693,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@finnish}
-% \changes{v1.1n}{2005/02/07}{New (thanks to Hannu V\"ais\"anen)}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{2005/02/07}{New (thanks to Hannu V\"ais\"anen)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{finnish}{Maanantai}{Tiistai}{Keskiviikko}
{Torstai}{Perjantai}{Lauantai}{Sunnuntai}
@@ -702,7 +701,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@norsk}
-% \changes{v1.1p}{2009/01/01}{New (thank to Sveinung Heggen)}
+% \changes{v1.1p}{2009/01/01}{New (thank to Sveinung Heggen)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{norsk}{Mandag}{Tirsdag}{Onsdag}
{Torsdag}{Fredag}{L\o{}rdag}{S\o{}ndag}
@@ -710,7 +709,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@danish}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/18}{New (thanks to Benjamin Hell)}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/18}{New (thanks to Benjamin Hell)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{danish}{Mandag}{Tirsdag}{Onsdag}
{Torsdag}{Fredag}{L\o{}rdag}{S\o{}ndag}
@@ -718,7 +717,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@swedish}
-% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/18}{New (thanks to Benjamin Hell)}
+% \changes{v3.08}{2011/01/18}{New (thanks to Benjamin Hell)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{swedish}{M\aa{}ndag}{Tisdag}{Onsdag}
{Torsdag}{Fredag}{L\"ordag}{S\"ondag}
@@ -726,8 +725,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@polish}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{New (thanks to Blandyna Bogdol)}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{Fixed (thanks to Elke Schubert)}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/07}{New (thanks to Blandyna Bogdol)}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{Fixed (thanks to Elke Schubert)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{polish}{Poniedzia\l{}ek}{Wtorek}{\'Sroda}
{Czwartek}{Pi\aob{}tek}{Sobota}{Niedziela}
@@ -735,7 +734,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@czech}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{New (thanks to Elke Schubert)}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/01/23}{New (thanks to Elke Schubert)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{czech}{Pond\v{e}l\'\i}{\'Uter\'y}{St\v{r}eda}
{\v{C}tvrtek}{P\'atek}{Sobota}{Ned\v{e}le}
@@ -743,7 +742,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dayname@slovak}
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/26}{New (thanks to Elke Schubert)}
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/02/26}{New (thanks to Elke Schubert)}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdaylanguage{slovak}{Pondelok}{Utorok}{Streda}
{\v{S}tvrtok}{Piatok}{Sobota}{Nede\v{l}a}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx
index 453d708d8e..054d051da8 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/scrwfile.dtx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% scrwfile.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2014
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
% at least three times.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% scrwfile.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2014
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil des LaTeX2e KOMA-Script-Pakets.
%
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: scrwfile.dtx 1805 2014-10-13 08:55:20Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: scrwfile.dtx 3137 2019-04-04 06:07:07Z kohm $
%<*dtx>
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\ProvidesFile{scrwfile.dtx}
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@
% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc}
% We have to add the single handle feature to this.
% \begin{macro}{\scrwfile@saved@starttoc}
-% \changes{v0.1e}{2013/07/24}{take care for unfriendly \textsl{hyperref}}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{2013/07/24}{take care for unfriendly \textsl{hyperref}}
% This is the original definition, that will be used, if the file is not under
% \texttt{scrwfile}'s control. Because of package \textsl{hyperref}, that does
% a hard redefinition without any care for changed definitions, we have to
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx
index aa133bb834..fd90f4e8c5 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocbasic.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{1592}
+% \CheckSum{1617}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% tocbasic.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% tocbasic.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2018
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2019
%
% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz,
% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: tocbasic.dtx 3050 2018-12-30 14:36:55Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: tocbasic.dtx 3256 2019-10-10 07:06:49Z kohm $
%<identify>%%% (run: identify)
%<prepare>%%% (run: prepare)
%<option>%%% (run: option)
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi
\begingroup
\def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}}
- \filedate$Date: 2018-12-30 15:36:55 +0100 (Sun, 30 Dec 2018) $
+ \filedate$Date: 2019-10-10 09:06:49 +0200 (Thu, 10 Oct 2019) $
\def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}}
\filerevision$Revision: 1962 $
\endgroup
@@ -108,6 +108,7 @@
\from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{package,style,undottedtocline}%
\from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{package,style,largetocline}%
\from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{package,style,tocline}%
+ \from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{package,style,toctext}%
\from{scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx}{package,style,default}%
\from{tocbasic.dtx}{package,exit}%
\from{scrlogo.dtx}{logo}%
@@ -119,7 +120,6 @@
\fi
\endbatchfile
\documentclass[parskip=half-]{scrdoc}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[english]{babel}
\usepackage{array}
\usepackage{listings}
@@ -266,15 +266,15 @@
% the toc-file, so this information will be stored additionally.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tb@listoftocs}
-% This is the list of toc-files. The list will be:
-% \begin{quote}
+% This is the list of toc-files. The list will be:
+% \begin{quote}
% \cs{do}\marg{extension}\marg{class or
% package}\cs{do}\marg{extension}\marg{class or package}\dots
-% \end{quote}
-% With this, adding and processing the list will be very fast but removing
-% an element will be very slow.
+% \end{quote}
+% With this, adding and processing the list will be very fast but removing
+% an element will be very slow.
%
-% The initial state of the list will be \emph{empty}.
+% The initial state of the list will be \emph{empty}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\tb@listoftocs}{}
@@ -282,11 +282,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifattoclist}
-% This command tests, if an extension is already at the list of
-% toc-files. The extension has to be the first argument. The second argument
-% will be done, if the extension is already at the list of toc-files. The
-% third argument will be done, if the extension is at the list of toc-files
-% not yet.
+% This command tests, if an extension is already at the list of
+% toc-files. The extension has to be the first argument. The second argument
+% will be done, if the extension is already at the list of toc-files. The
+% third argument will be done, if the extension is at the list of toc-files
+% not yet.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ifattoclist}[1]{%
\begingroup
@@ -302,22 +302,22 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtotoclist}
-% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/11}{internal \cs{@addtotoclist} renamed to
-% \cs{scr@addtotoclist} because of package \textsf{floatfram}}.^^A
-% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/11}{internal \cs{@@addtotoclist} renamed to
-% \cs{scr@@addtotoclist} because of package \textsf{floatfram}}.^^A
-% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/14}{expand the arguments while adding them to the
-% internal list}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% This command adds an extension to the list of toc-files. The first,
-% optional argument is the class or package name with the corresponding
-% extension of class or package files. If this argument was omitted
-% \textsf{tocbasic} tries to get it automatically. This should be
-% successfull while loading a class or package but not while processing any
-% command of a class or package after loading the class or package. The
-% second, mandatory argument is the extension of the toc-file. NOTE: An
-% empty first argument is not the same like omitting the first argument!
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/11}{internal \cs{@addtotoclist} renamed to
+% \cs{scr@addtotoclist} because of package \textsf{floatfram}}.^^A
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/11}{internal \cs{@@addtotoclist} renamed to
+% \cs{scr@@addtotoclist} because of package \textsf{floatfram}}.^^A
+% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/09/14}{expand the arguments while adding them to the
+% internal list}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% This command adds an extension to the list of toc-files. The first,
+% optional argument is the class or package name with the corresponding
+% extension of class or package files. If this argument was omitted
+% \textsf{tocbasic} tries to get it automatically. This should be
+% successfull while loading a class or package but not while processing any
+% command of a class or package after loading the class or package. The
+% second, mandatory argument is the extension of the toc-file. NOTE: An
+% empty first argument is not the same like omitting the first argument!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addtotoclist}{%
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
@@ -369,9 +369,9 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\owneroftoc}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/09}{new}
-% Returns the owner of a TOC or uses the owner of a TOC as argument of the
-% optional argument, if it exists.
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/09}{new}%^^A
+% Returns the owner of a TOC or uses the owner of a TOC as argument of the
+% optional argument, if it exists.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\owneroftoc}[2][\@firstofone]{%
\begingroup
@@ -382,23 +382,30 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\categoryoftoc}
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/12}{new}%^^A
+% Synonym for \cs{owneroftoc}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\categoryoftoc}{\owneroftoc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\AtAddToTocList}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% Action to be done, when adding a toc-file of a known owner. The first
-% optional argument is the owner. The second, mandatory argument is the
-% action. While doing the action \cs{@currext} will be the extension of the
-% added toc-file. If the first argument was omitted \textsf{tocbasic} tries
-% to get it automatically. This should be successfull while loading a class
-% or package but not while processing any command of a class or package
-% after loading the class or package. The second, mandatory argument is the
-% extension of the toc-file. NOTE: An empty first argument is not the same
-% like omitting the first argument, but set's up the general hook. The
-% general hook will be done for every adding after the individual hook (this
-% means, you may dactivate features at the individual hook before processing
-% the general hook). But the individual hook will not be processed for
-% toc-files without any owner!
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% Action to be done, when adding a toc-file of a known owner. The first
+% optional argument is the owner. The second, mandatory argument is the
+% action. While doing the action \cs{@currext} will be the extension of the
+% added toc-file. If the first argument was omitted \textsf{tocbasic} tries
+% to get it automatically. This should be successfull while loading a class
+% or package but not while processing any command of a class or package
+% after loading the class or package. The second, mandatory argument is the
+% extension of the toc-file. NOTE: An empty first argument is not the same
+% like omitting the first argument, but set's up the general hook. The
+% general hook will be done for every adding after the individual hook (this
+% means, you may dactivate features at the individual hook before processing
+% the general hook). But the individual hook will not be processed for
+% toc-files without any owner!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\AtAddToTocList}{%
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
@@ -420,8 +427,8 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocbasic@extend@babel}
-% NOTE: To extend the original \cs{bbl@set@language} the argument of
-% \cs{tocbasic@extend@babel} must not be a local macro (like \cs{@currext})
+% NOTE: To extend the original \cs{bbl@set@language} the argument of
+% \cs{tocbasic@extend@babel} must not be a local macro (like \cs{@currext})
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tocbasic@extend@babel}[1]{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{bbl@set@language}{%
@@ -434,7 +441,7 @@
for `#1'}%
}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{using \cs{BabelContentsFiles} if available}^^A
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{using \cs{BabelContentsFiles} if available}%^^A
% Since version 3.9a provides adding extensions to the language switch
% preparation. So it is used if it is available.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -461,24 +468,24 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% This feature should be used for all toc-files (unless feature
-% \texttt{nobabel} was set for the toc-file.
+% This feature should be used for all toc-files (unless feature
+% \texttt{nobabel} was set for the toc-file).
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtAddToTocList[]{\expandafter\tocbasic@extend@babel\expandafter{\@currext}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\removefromtoclist}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@removefromtoclist}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/06}{missing \cs{global} added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/06}{missing \cs{global} added}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@removefromtoclist}
-% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/06}{missing \cs{global} added}^^A
-% This command will remove an extension from the list of toc-files. If the
-% first, optional argument is given, the extension will only be removed, if
-% it was added by the given owner. NOTE: An empty first argument is not the
-% same like omitting the first argument!
+% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/06}{missing \cs{global} added}%^^A
+% This command will remove an extension from the list of toc-files. If the
+% first, optional argument is given, the extension will only be removed, if
+% it was added by the given owner. NOTE: An empty first argument is not the
+% same like omitting the first argument!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\removefromtoclist}{%
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
@@ -526,21 +533,21 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\doforeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{\cs{@currext} defined using \cs{edef} instead
-% of \cs{def}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% This command does the second, mandatory argument for each toc-file at the
-% list of toc-files. If the first, optional argument was given this will be
-% done only for the toc-files of that owner. NOTE: An empty first argument
-% is not the same like omitting the first argument!
-%
-% While processing the second argument \cs{@currext} is the extension of
-% the toc-file. The second argument will be processed with increased group
-% level!
-%
-% See \cs{addtoeachtocfile} for an example of usage of
-% \cs{doforeachtocfile}.
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{\cs{@currext} defined using \cs{edef} instead
+% of \cs{def}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% This command does the second, mandatory argument for each toc-file at the
+% list of toc-files. If the first, optional argument was given this will be
+% done only for the toc-files of that owner. NOTE: An empty first argument
+% is not the same like omitting the first argument!
+%
+% While processing the second argument \cs{@currext} is the extension of
+% the toc-file. The second argument will be processed with increased group
+% level!
+%
+% See \cs{addtoeachtocfile} for an example of usage of
+% \cs{doforeachtocfile}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\doforeachtocfile}{%
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
@@ -574,15 +581,15 @@
% \begin{macro}{\addtoeachtocfile}
% \begin{macro}{\@addtoeachtocfile}
% \begin{macro}{\@@addtoeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/08}{typo fix at usage of \cs{doforeachtocfile}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% This command calls \cs{addtocontents} with the section, mandatory
-% argument for each toc-file at the list of toc-files. If the first,
-% optional argument was given this will be done only for the toc-files of
-% that owener. NOTE: An empty first argument is not the same like omitting
-% the first argument! And don't forget to protect the commands, that should
-% not be expanded, at the mandatory argument.
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/08}{typo fix at usage of \cs{doforeachtocfile}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% This command calls \cs{addtocontents} with the section, mandatory
+% argument for each toc-file at the list of toc-files. If the first,
+% optional argument was given this will be done only for the toc-files of
+% that owner. NOTE: An empty first argument is not the same like omitting
+% the first argument! And don't forget to protect the commands, that should
+% not be expanded, at the mandatory argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\addtoeachtocfile}{%
\kernel@ifnextchar [%]
@@ -606,10 +613,10 @@
% once. And we have some special commands for the table of contents.
%
% \begin{macro}{\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% Something like a combination of \cs{addtoeachtocfile} and
-% \cs{addcontentsline}.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% Something like a combination of \cs{addtoeachtocfile} and
+% \cs{addcontentsline}.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand{\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}{%
@@ -626,12 +633,12 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addxcontentsline}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Take care of new feature \texttt{numberline}}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{Take care of new feature \texttt{numberline}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@addxcontentsline}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}%^^A
% This will be used instead of \cs{addcontentsline} to generate numbered or
% not numbered entries to a toc-file. First argument is the toc-file, second
% the entry type, e.g., \texttt{chapter}, the third is the entry number or
@@ -652,7 +659,7 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\nonumberline}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new}%^^A
% Either \cs{relax} or \cs{numberline} depending on the feature
% \texttt{numberline}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -678,21 +685,21 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@@@@addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{new (internal)}%^^A
% Similar to \cs{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile} using
% \cs{addxcontentsline} instead of \cs{addcontentsline}.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -734,11 +741,12 @@
% too. Here are basics and high level commands for this.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocbasic@starttoc}
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{usage of feature \texttt{noparskipfake}}^^A
-% Some basics are done like setting up \cs{parskip}, \cs{parindent} and
-% \cs{parfillskip}, a general hook will be called, an individual hook will
-% be called, the toc will be started, an individual hook will be called, an
-% general hook wil be called, that's it.
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{usage of feature \texttt{noparskipfake}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/07/08}{hack to add \cs{par} at end of (main) file}%^^A
+% Some basics are done like setting up \cs{parskip}, \cs{parindent} and
+% \cs{parfillskip}, a general hook will be called, an individual hook will
+% be called, the toc will be started, an individual hook will be called, an
+% general hook wil be called, that's it.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\tocbasic@starttoc}[1]{%
@@ -757,6 +765,10 @@
\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@\@plus 1fil}%
\csname tocbasic@@before@hook\endcsname
\csname tb@#1@before@hook\endcsname
+ \let\tocbasic@saved@input\@input
+ \def\@input##1{%
+ \let\@input\tocbasic@saved@input\@input{##1}\par
+ }%
\@starttoc{#1}%
\csname tb@#1@after@hook\endcsname
\csname tocbasic@@after@hook\endcsname
@@ -765,9 +777,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\tocbasic@@before@hook}
% \begin{macro}{\tocbasic@@after@hook}
-% These are the general hooks. They may be used by classes and packages for
-% commands, that should be used for all lists of not only the own lists of,
-% e.\,g., \KOMAScript{} may use it to handle option \texttt{tocleft}.
+% These are the general hooks. They may be used by classes and packages for
+% commands, that should be used for all lists of not only the own lists of,
+% e.\,g., \KOMAScript{} may use it to handle option \texttt{tocleft}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tocbasic@@before@hook}{}
\newcommand*{\tocbasic@@after@hook}{}
@@ -775,15 +787,15 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeStartingTOC}
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix: define the hook if not already defined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix: define the hook if not already defined}%^^A
% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{fix: using \cs{@ifundefined} instead of
-% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}^^A
+% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AfterStartingTOC}
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix:define the hook if not already defined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix:define the hook if not already defined}%^^A
% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{fix: using \cs{@ifundefined} instead of
-% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}^^A
+% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}%^^A
% These are the commands to add code to the general or individual hooks. If
% the first, optional argument was given, the second, mandatory argument
% will be added to the individual hook, otherwise the general hook will be
@@ -819,17 +831,17 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoftoc}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
-% ersetzt}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifstar} durch \cs{kernel@ifstar}
+% ersetzt}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\@listoftoc}
-% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/12}{\cs{twocolumn} fixed}^^A
-% \changes{v1.01}{2008/11/13}{new feature \texttt{onecolumn}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{\cs{@currext} defined using \cs{edef} instead
-% of \cs{def}}^^A
-% Command to handle the hole list of something. There are additional hooks
-% for this. The first optional argument is the title for this list. If the
-% optional argument was omitted \cs{listof\#2name} will be used. The star
-% version does not set up a heading or switch the column number!
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/12}{\cs{twocolumn} fixed}%^^A
+% \changes{v1.01}{2008/11/13}{new feature \texttt{onecolumn}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{\cs{@currext} defined using \cs{edef} instead
+% of \cs{def}}%^^A
+% Command to handle the hole list of something. There are additional hooks
+% for this. The first optional argument is the title for this list. If the
+% optional argument was omitted \cs{listof\#2name} will be used. The star
+% version does not set up a heading or switch the column number!
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\listoftoc}{%
\kernel@ifstar \tocbasic@starttoc\@listoftoc
@@ -874,7 +886,7 @@
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{\textsf{tocbibind} warning added}^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/21}{\textsf{tocbibind} warning added}%^^A
% Using \textsf{tocbibind} and \textsf{tocbasic} together can break features
% either of \textsf{tocbibind} or \textsf{tocbasic}. Here we add at least a
% warning:
@@ -917,9 +929,9 @@
% \begin{macro}{\listofeachtoc}
% \begin{macro}{\@listofeachtoc}
% \begin{macro}{\@@listofeachtoc}
-% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/08}{typo fix at usage of \cs{doforeachtocfile}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/08}{typo fix at usage of \cs{doforeachtocfile}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
% Another example of using \cs{doforeachtocfile}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\listofeachtoc}{%
@@ -938,11 +950,11 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@toc}
-% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{use indirect extension for toc}^^A
-% We do not longer hard code extension \texttt{toc} for the table of
-% contents. This allowes users to change it. Classes or other packages may
-% also define it. So it seems to be better to \cs{providecommand} instead of
-% \cs{newcommand} here.
+% \changes{v3.23}{2017/02/23}{use indirect extension for toc}%^^A
+% We do not longer hard code extension \texttt{toc} for the table of
+% contents. This allowes users to change it. Classes or other packages may
+% also define it. So it seems to be better to \cs{providecommand} instead of
+% \cs{newcommand} here.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\ext@toc}{toc}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -953,16 +965,16 @@
% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/04/12}{again no explicite marks if ``numbered''}%
% \changes{v3.12}{2013/09/24}{usage of new
% \cs{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}}%
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{moved \cs{@mkboth} inside \cs{chapter*}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{usage of \cs{addsec} if available}^^A
-% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{usage of \cs{@mkright} if available}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/08}{moved \cs{@mkboth} outside \cs{chapter*}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/08}{usage of \cs{@mkdouble} if available}^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{moved \cs{@mkboth} inside \cs{chapter*}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{usage of \cs{addsec} if available}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.15}{2014/12/10}{usage of \cs{@mkright} if available}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/08}{moved \cs{@mkboth} outside \cs{chapter*}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/08}{usage of \cs{@mkdouble} if available}%^^A
% \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/25}{penalty and skip reconstruction after
-% \cs{@mkright}, \cs{@mkboth}, or \cs{@mkdouble}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/22}{removed spurious group}^^A
+% \cs{@mkright}, \cs{@mkboth}, or \cs{@mkdouble}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/22}{removed spurious group}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/09/03}{usage of \cs{addsecmark} or \cs{sectionmark}
-% instead of \cs{@mkright} or \cs{markright}}^^A
+% instead of \cs{@mkright} or \cs{markright}}%^^A
% Setting the headings of a list of something. The heading is the only
% argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1075,15 +1087,15 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\BeforeTOCHead}
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix: define the hook if not already defined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix: define the hook if not already defined}%^^A
% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{fix: using \cs{@ifundefined} instead of
-% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}^^A
+% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\AfterTOCHead}
-% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix: define the hook if not already defined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.04b}{2010/01/05}{fix: define the hook if not already defined}%^^A
% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/09}{fix: using \cs{@ifundefined} instead of
-% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}^^A
+% undefined \cs{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/10}{message moved to \texttt{trace}}%^^A
% These are the commands to add code to the general or individual hooks. If
% the first, optional argument was given, the second, mandatory argument
% will be added to the individual hook, otherwise the general hook will be
@@ -1112,7 +1124,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeMarkcase}
-% Use upper-case or not?
+% Use upper-case or not?
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*exit>
\AtBeginDocument{%
@@ -1129,7 +1141,7 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\deftocheading}
-% Define a toc headings command with one argument (the title).
+% Define a toc headings command with one argument (the title).
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\newcommand*{\deftocheading}[1]{%
@@ -1139,33 +1151,33 @@
%
% \begin{macro}{\setuptoc}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@trim@spaces} statt
-% \cs{tb@@sp@def}}^^A
+% \cs{tb@@sp@def}}%^^A
% \begin{macro}{\unsettoc}
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/08/29}{Verwendung von \cs{scr@trim@spaces} statt
-% \cs{tb@@sp@def}}^^A
-% Known features are:
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[\texttt{totoc}] writes the title of the list of to the table of
-% contents
-% \item[\texttt{numberline}] redefines \cs{nonumberline} to use
-% \cs{numberline}
-% \item[\texttt{numbered}] uses a numbered headings for the list of
-% \item[\texttt{leveldown}] uses not the top level heading (e.\,g.,
-% \cs{chapter} with book) but the first sub level (e.\,g., \cs{section} with
-% book).
-% \item[\texttt{nobabel}] prevents the extension to be added to the babel
-% handling of toc-files. To make this work, you have to set the feature
-% before adding the extension to the list of known extension.
-% \item[[\texttt{noprotrusion}]] prevents disabling character protrusion at
-% the toc.
-% \end{description}
-% Other features may be package dependent. You may test the feature using:
-% \begin{quote}
+% \cs{tb@@sp@def}}%^^A
+% Known features are:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\texttt{totoc}] writes the title of the list of to the table of
+% contents
+% \item[\texttt{numberline}] redefines \cs{nonumberline} to use
+% \cs{numberline}
+% \item[\texttt{numbered}] uses a numbered headings for the list of
+% \item[\texttt{leveldown}] uses not the top level heading (e.\,g.,
+% \cs{chapter} with book) but the first sub level (e.\,g., \cs{section} with
+% book).
+% \item[\texttt{nobabel}] prevents the extension to be added to the babel
+% handling of toc-files. To make this work, you have to set the feature
+% before adding the extension to the list of known extension.
+% \item[[\texttt{noprotrusion}]] prevents disabling character protrusion at
+% the toc.
+% \end{description}
+% Other features may be package dependent. You may test the feature using:
+% \begin{quote}
% \cs{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{tocbasic@\meta{toc}@feature@\meta{feature}\}}\\
% \phantom{\cs{@ifundefined}}\marg{do if feature not set}\\
% \phantom{\cs{@ifundefined}}\marg{do if feature set}
-% \end{quote}
-% See \cs{tocbasic@listhead} for an example of this.
+% \end{quote}
+% See \cs{tocbasic@listhead} for an example of this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setuptoc}[2]{%
\@for\@tempa:=#2\do{%
@@ -1180,14 +1192,14 @@
}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
-% Do not add the files, that babel handles by default.
+% Do not add the files, that babel handles by default.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setuptoc{toc}{nobabel}
\setuptoc{lof}{nobabel}
\setuptoc{lot}{nobabel}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\iftocfeature}
-% We need a test for the features
+% We need a test for the features
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\iftocfeature}[2]{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{tocbasic@#1@feature@#2}{%
@@ -1203,9 +1215,10 @@
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocbasicautomode}
-% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/11}{use of \cs{addtotoclist} instead of internal}%
-% \changes{v3.07a}{2010/11/25}{fix: added missing
-% \cs{let}\cs{@starttoc}\cs{tocbasic@starttoc}}%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2008/11/11}{use of \cs{addtotoclist} instead of
+% internal}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.07a}{2010/11/25}{fix: added missing
+% \cs{let}\cs{@starttoc}\cs{tocbasic@starttoc}}%^^A
% \textsf{tocbasic} can overtake \cs{@starttoc} to automaticly add all
% used extensions to the list of known extensions and use
% \cs{tocbasic@starttoc} instead of \cs{@starttoc} from \LaTeX{}
@@ -1235,18 +1248,18 @@
% \label{sec:newfloats}
%
% \begin{macro}{\DeclareNewTOC}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new high level command}^^A
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/20}{\cs{tb@nt@types} and \cs{tb@nt@listname} are
-% initialised \cs{relax}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26a}{2018/12/30}{fixed usage of \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
-% This command defines only a new TOC and a new caption command for this
-% TOC. It does not define a new foat unless option float was set! It does
-% not define a new nonfloat unless option nonfloat was set! The optional
-% argument is used to set up several settings using \textsf{keyval}. The
-% mandatory argument is the shortcut. The default type is the shortcut.
-% The extension is the shortcut. The default owner is ``\texttt{float}''.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new high level command}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/20}{\cs{tb@nt@types} and \cs{tb@nt@listname} are
+% initialised \cs{relax}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26a}{2018/12/30}{fixed usage of \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
+% This command defines only a new TOC and a new caption command for this
+% TOC. It does not define a new foat unless option float was set! It does
+% not define a new nonfloat unless option nonfloat was set! The optional
+% argument is used to set up several settings using \textsf{keyval}. The
+% mandatory argument is the shortcut. The default type is the shortcut.
+% The extension is the shortcut. The default owner is ``\texttt{float}''.
% \begin{macrocode}
%<*body>
\DefineFamily{KOMAarg}
@@ -1268,8 +1281,8 @@
\let\tb@nt@atend\@empty
\def\tb@nt@tocentrystyle{default}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/29}{need more initialization for empty optional
-% argument}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/29}{need more initialization for empty optional
+% argument}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\tb@nt@tocstyle@options{level=1}%
\IfArgIsEmpty{#1}{%
@@ -1304,13 +1317,13 @@
}{%
\let\tb@nt@extra@relax@opts\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
-% After initialisation of the local values we need to know the style of the
-% toc entry, to define style dependend options.
+% After initialisation of the local values we need to know the style of the
+% toc entry, to define style dependend options.
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@type}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% The type of list is used for environment and counter names and as part of
-% several internal and user macros. It is needed before defining the style
-% dependend options. So we use a first run to set it up.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% The type of list is used for environment and counter names and as part of
+% several internal and user macros. It is needed before defining the style
+% dependend options. So we use a first run to set it up.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{type}{%
\tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\edef\tb@nt@type{##1}}%
@@ -1318,9 +1331,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@tocentrystyle}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{neu (intern)}
-% The style of the toc entry. It is needed before defining the style
-% dependend options. So we use a first run to set it up.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{neu (intern)}
+% The style of the toc entry. It is needed before defining the style
+% dependend options. So we use a first run to set it up.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{tocentrystyle}[default]{%
\IfArgIsEmpty{##1}{%
@@ -1338,10 +1351,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@ext}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/20}{moved to pass 1}^^A
-% Don't tell the user, that the mandatory argument of the command may be
-% overloaded by this option. This was only done to simplify the definition.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/20}{moved to pass 1}%^^A
+% Don't tell the user, that the mandatory argument of the command may be
+% overloaded by this option. This was only done to simplify the definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{extension}{%
\tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\edef\tb@nt@ext{##1}}%
@@ -1349,23 +1362,28 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@owner}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/09}{moved to pass 1}^^A
-% The owner of the new list extension.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/09}{moved to pass 1}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/05/12}{\texttt{category} is a synonym for
+% \texttt{owner}}%^^A
+% The owner of the new list extension.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{owner}{%
\tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\edef\tb@nt@owner{##1}}%
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{category}{%
+ \tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\edef\tb@nt@owner{##1}}%
+ }%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% After this we define pseudo option \texttt{@else@} to ignore all currently
-% not needed options. After this we do the first option execution run.
+% After this we define pseudo option \texttt{@else@} to ignore all currently
+% not needed options. After this we do the first option execution run.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
\FamilyExecuteOptions[.toc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{@else@}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/09}{add extension already after first pass}^^A
+% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/09}{add extension already after first pass}%^^A
% First of all, every TOC needs an extension, that should be added to the
% list of known extensions. This has to be done also, if no options has been
% given!
@@ -1376,19 +1394,20 @@
\addtotoclist[\tb@nt@owner]{\csname ext@\tb@nt@type\endcsname}%
\IfArgIsEmpty{#1}{}{%
% \end{macrocode}
-% For the second option pass we do not need to set up these options
-% again. So define it as no-opt.
+% For the second option pass we do not need to set up these options
+% again. So define it as no-opt.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{type}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{tocentrystyle}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{extension}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
- \DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{owner}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{category}{\FamilyKeyStateProcessed}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{defining toc style depending options}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/06/12}{using prefix \texttt{tocentry} instead of
-% \texttt{toc}}^^A
-% If the toc style is empty we won't define any \cs{l@\dots}. Otherwise we
-% need to define additional options.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{defining toc style depending options}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/06/12}{using prefix \texttt{tocentry} instead of
+% \texttt{toc}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.27}{2019/10/02}{additional \texttt{:}-options}%^^A
+% If the toc style is empty we won't define any \cs{l@\dots}. Otherwise we
+% need to define additional options.
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifstr{\tb@nt@tocentrystyle}{}{}{%
\begingroup
@@ -1400,6 +1419,7 @@
\l@addto@macro\tb@nt@extra@relax@opts{%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{toc##1}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{tocentry##1}%
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{tocentry##1:}%
}%
}%
\kernel@ifnextchar[%]
@@ -1419,6 +1439,9 @@
\l@addto@macro{\tb@nt@tocstyle@options}{,##1={####1}}%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{tocentry##1:}{%
+ \l@addto@macro{\tb@nt@tocstyle@options}{,##1:={####1}}%
+ }%
}%
}%
\def\@dodefault##1[##2]{%
@@ -1434,37 +1457,40 @@
\l@addto@macro{\tb@nt@tocstyle@options}{,##1={####1}}%
\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
}%
+ \DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{tocentry##1:}{%
+ \l@addto@macro{\tb@nt@tocstyle@options}{,##1:={####1}}%
+ }%
}%
}%
\scr@dte@doopts
\do@endgroup
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% After this, we need to define all the other options and do the real option
-% execution.
+% After this, we need to define all the other options and do the real option
+% execution.
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@atbegin}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{new optional identifier \texttt{atbegin}}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/01}{\texttt{atbegin} argument may be empty}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Additional code executed at the begin of a new defined environment.
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{new optional identifier \texttt{atbegin}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/01}{\texttt{atbegin} argument may be empty}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Additional code executed at the begin of a new defined environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyStringKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{atbegin}{\tb@nt@atbegin}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@atend}
-% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{new optional identifier \texttt{atbend}}
-% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/01}{\texttt{atend} argument may be empty}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Additional code executed at the end of a new defined environment.
+% \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{new optional identifier \texttt{atbend}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.11c}{2013/02/01}{\texttt{atend} argument may be empty}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Additional code executed at the end of a new defined environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyStringKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{atend}{\tb@nt@atend}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@counterwithin}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% If a counter will be defined, this counter may depend on another counter
-% (like figure counter depends on chapter counter at book classes). If the
-% value is empty, the counter does not depend on any other counter.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% If a counter will be defined, this counter may depend on another counter
+% (like figure counter depends on chapter counter at book classes). If the
+% value is empty, the counter does not depend on any other counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{counterwithin}{%
\edef\tb@nt@counterwithin{##1}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed
@@ -1472,16 +1498,16 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\iftb@nt@float}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new internal}
-% This boolean indicates, that float environments should also be defined.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new internal}%^^A
+% This boolean indicates, that float environments should also be defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyBoolKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{float}{tb@nt@float}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@floatpos}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Simply the value for the |\fps@...| macro.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Simply the value for the |\fps@...| macro.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{floatpos}{%
\tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\edef\tb@nt@floatpos{##1}}%
@@ -1489,9 +1515,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@floattype}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Simply the value for the |\ftype@...| macro. It has to be
-% $1<=\textrm{value}<=31$.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Simply the value for the |\ftype@...| macro. It has to be
+% $1<=\textrm{value}<=31$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{floattype}{%
\FamilySetCounterMacro{KOMAarg}{floattype}{\reserved@d}{##1}%
@@ -1507,21 +1533,21 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\iftb@nt@forcenames}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new internal}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% The |\...name| commands will only be defined, if they are not already
-% defined. But some users may want to define their own names even if there
-% are already definitions. So this boolean option may switch to force the
-% definition.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new internal}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% The |\...name| commands will only be defined, if they are not already
+% defined. But some users may want to define their own names even if there
+% are already definitions. So this boolean option may switch to force the
+% definition.
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyBoolKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{forcenames}{tb@nt@forcenames}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@hang}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Earch entry of a TOC/list of is idented on the left side. This is the
-% amount of the indention of the text of the entry.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Earch entry of a TOC/list of is idented on the left side. This is the
+% amount of the indention of the text of the entry.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{hang}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@KOMAarg.toc@tocnumwidth}{%
@@ -1546,10 +1572,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@indent}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Earch entry of a TOC/list of is idented on the left side. This is the
-% amount of the indention of the number part.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Earch entry of a TOC/list of is idented on the left side. This is the
+% amount of the indention of the number part.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{indent}{%
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@KOMAarg.toc@tocindent}{%
@@ -1575,10 +1601,10 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@level}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Each entry to a TOC/list of has a numeric level. You may set up your own
-% level.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Each entry to a TOC/list of has a numeric level. You may set up your own
+% level.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{level}{%
\PackageWarning{tocbasic}{%
@@ -1592,9 +1618,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@listname}
-% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/20}{using \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% The list itself has a heading. A |\list<type>name| will also be defined.
+% \changes{v3.18}{2015/06/20}{using \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% The list itself has a heading. A |\list<type>name| will also be defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{listname}{%
\tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\def\tb@nt@listname{##1}}%
@@ -1602,9 +1628,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@name}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% We need a name/term for the entries of the new list. This may e.\,g. be used
-% for |caption| output. A |\<type>name| will also be defined.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% We need a name/term for the entries of the new list. This may e.\,g. be used
+% for |caption| output. A |\<type>name| will also be defined.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{name}{%
\tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\edef\tb@nt@name{##1}}%
@@ -1612,47 +1638,47 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\iftb@nt@nonfloat}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% This boolean indicates, that non-float environment should also be
-% defined. The environment has the postfix ``-''.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% This boolean indicates, that non-float environment should also be
+% defined. The environment has the postfix ``-''.
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyBoolKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{nonfloat}{tb@nt@nonfloat}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@types}
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}^^A
-% Sometimes the plural of the type is needed and may be defined by a
-% seperate option.
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{local valid only}%^^A
+% Sometimes the plural of the type is needed and may be defined by a
+% seperate option.
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{types}{%
\tb@ifvalueisnotempty{##1}{\edef\tb@nt@types{##1}}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/20}{new (internal)}
-% The new option \texttt{setup} allowes to setup ToC features provided by
-% \cs{setuptoc}. Note, currently there is no test whether or not a feature
-% does exist!
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/20}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The new option \texttt{setup} allowes to setup ToC features provided by
+% \cs{setuptoc}. Note, currently there is no test whether or not a feature
+% does exist!
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{setup}{%
\setuptoc\tb@nt@ext{##1}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/20}{new (internal)}
-% The new option \texttt{unset} allowes to unset ToC features provided
-% by \cs{unsettoc}. Note, currently there is no test whether or not a
-% feature does exist!
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/11/20}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% The new option \texttt{unset} allowes to unset ToC features provided
+% by \cs{unsettoc}. Note, currently there is no test whether or not a
+% feature does exist!
% \begin{macrocode}
\DefineFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{unset}{%
\unsettoc\tb@nt@ext{##1}%
}%
% \end{macrocode}
-% Last but not least we have to execute the options and reset the option
-% definitions.
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/27}{\texttt{nonfloat} fixed}^^A
+% Last but not least we have to execute the options and reset the option
+% definitions.
+% \changes{v3.25}{2017/09/27}{\texttt{nonfloat} fixed}%^^A
% \changes{v3.26}{2018/06/09}{added missing reset of \texttt{unset} and
-% \texttt{setup}}^^A
+% \texttt{setup}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\FamilyExecuteOptions[.toc]{KOMAarg}{#1}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{unset}%
@@ -1671,6 +1697,7 @@
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{atend}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{atbegin}%
\tb@nt@extra@relax@opts
+ \RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{category}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{owner}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{extension}%
\RelaxFamilyKey[.toc]{KOMAarg}{tocentrystyle}%
@@ -1684,7 +1711,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% Then we need the TOC itself with a name:
% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{use \cs{ext@\dots} instead of the extension
-% itself in definition of \cs{listof\dots}}^^A
+% itself in definition of \cs{listof\dots}}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{tb@nt@types}{%
\edef\tb@nt@types{\tb@nt@type s}%
@@ -1717,7 +1744,7 @@
}\@tempa
% \end{macrocode}
% The list entry:
-% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/05}{warning if \cs{l@\dots} is undefined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/05}{warning if \cs{l@\dots} is undefined}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\ifstr{\tb@nt@tocentrystyle}{}{%
\@ifundefined{l@\tb@nt@type}{%
@@ -1739,7 +1766,7 @@
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v3.12}{2013/05/03}{fixed: definition of
-% \cs{listof\meta{type}entryname} added as explained in the manual}
+% \cs{listof\meta{type}entryname} added as explained in the manual}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{listof\tb@nt@ext entryname}{%
\expandafter\let\csname listof\tb@nt@ext entryname\endcsname\tb@nt@name
@@ -1755,8 +1782,8 @@
\@tempswafalse
% \end{macrocode}
% The float environments:
-% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/05/30}{fixed: floats may have an optional argument}
-% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/10}{fixed: usage of default placement}
+% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/05/30}{fixed: floats may have an optional argument}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.12}{2013/12/10}{fixed: usage of default placement}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\iftb@nt@float
\expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*\csname fps@\tb@nt@type\expandafter
@@ -1816,10 +1843,10 @@
\fi
% \end{macrocode}
% The counter and hooks of float and nonfloat environments:
-% \changes{v3.10b}{2012/04/04}{\cs{noexpand} added to fix problems using
-% \cs{autodot}}^^A
-% \changes{v3.13}{2014/07/31}{add \cs{autodot} only to hierachical
-% counters}^^A
+% \changes{v3.10b}{2012/04/04}{\cs{noexpand} added to fix problems using
+% \cs{autodot}}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.13}{2014/07/31}{add \cs{autodot} only to hierachical
+% counters}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\if@tempswa
\@ifundefined{c@\tb@nt@type}{%
@@ -1864,11 +1891,11 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@atbegin@after}
-% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/05/30}{new internal}%
-% Processes command \#1 with argument \#2 and optional argument \#3 and than
-% \verb|\csname #2@atbegin\endcsname|. This is used to add
-% \verb|csname #2@atbegin\endcsname| at begin part of a float (but after
-% optional argument of the float).
+% \changes{v3.09a}{2011/05/30}{new internal}%^^A
+% Processes command \#1 with argument \#2 and optional argument \#3 and than
+% \verb|\csname #2@atbegin\endcsname|. This is used to add
+% \verb|csname #2@atbegin\endcsname| at begin part of a float (but after
+% optional argument of the float).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tb@atbegin@after}[3]{}
\def\tb@atbegin@after#1#2[#3]{%
@@ -1878,9 +1905,9 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@ifvalueisnotempty}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new internal}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{simpler definition}^^A
-% This is only a helper for defining some of the keys.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new internal}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{simpler definition}%^^A
+% This is only a helper for defining some of the keys.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tb@ifvalueisnotempty}[1]{%
\ifstr{#1}{}{%
@@ -1894,20 +1921,20 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@boolkey}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@dimkey}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new (internal)}^^A
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new (internal)}%^^A
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@numkey}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new internal}%
-% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}^^A
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/05/21}{new internal}%
+% \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/16}{undefined}%^^A
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tb@nt@autofloattype}
-% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new internal}
-% This macro saves the float type for auto generated float types.
+% \changes{v3.06}{2010/06/01}{new internal}%^^A
+% This macro saves the float type for auto generated float types.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tb@nt@autofloattype}{16}
%</body>
@@ -1925,27 +1952,6 @@
%!KOMAScriptVersion
]
% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%<*class>
-% \KOMAScript{} classes need some additional initialization.
-%
-% \changes{v1.00}{auto-activation of feature \texttt{onecolumn}}
-% Set feature \texttt{onecolumn} for every toc file if feature
-% \texttt{leveldown} was not used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*chapter>
-\AtAddToTocList[\@currname.\@currext]{\setuptoc{\@currext}{onecolumn}}%
-\AtAddToTocList[float]{\setuptoc{\@currext}{onecolumn}}%
-%</chapter>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Tell the package, what files are used:
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{extension \texttt{lof} not added explicitely}^^A
-% \changes{v3.25}{2017/10/10}{extension \texttt{lot} not added explicitely}^^A
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addtotoclist{toc}
-\ifstr{\ext@toc}{toc}{}{\expandafter\addtotoclist\expandafter{\ext@toc}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%</class>
%</load>
% \fi
%
@@ -1956,6 +1962,6 @@
% end of file `tocbasic.dtx'
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: doctex
-%%% coding: iso-latin-1
+%%% coding: utf-8
%%% TeX-master: t
%%% End:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx
index eda5188828..94c77591ff 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/source/tocstyle.dtx
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-% \CheckSum{1867}
+% \CheckSum{1933}
% \iffalse meta-comment
% ======================================================================
% tocstyle.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2019
%
% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle.
%
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
% at least three times.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------
% tocstyle.dtx
-% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2017
+% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2007-2019
%
% Diese Datei ist Teil des LaTeX2e KOMA-Script-Pakets.
%
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
% \iffalse
-%%% From File: $Id: tocstyle.dtx 2600 2017-02-23 12:07:58Z kohm $
+%%% From File: $Id: tocstyle.dtx 3249 2019-10-09 11:35:26Z kohm $
%<*dtx>
% \fi
\def\LaTeXformat{LaTeX2e}
@@ -90,12 +90,7 @@
\ifToplevel{%
\Msg{**********************************************************************}
\Msg{*}
- \Msg{* KOMA-Script presents tocstyle}
- \Msg{* a package to define, configure and several different styles for}
- \Msg{* table of contents, list of floats and comparables.}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{* This is `\batchfile', a batchfile to unpack the package tocstyle,}
- \Msg{* the documentation of the package, and an archive of all these files.}
+ \Msg{* This is `\batchfile', a batchfile to unpack the package tocstyle.}
\Msg{*}
\Msg{**********************************************************************}
\keepsilent
@@ -104,7 +99,7 @@
\preamble
-Copyright (c) 2007-2017 by Markus Kohm <komascript(at)gmx.info>
+Copyright (c) 2007-2019 by Markus Kohm <komascript(at)gmx.info>
This file was generated from file(s) of the KOMA-Script bundle.
---------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -124,22 +119,9 @@ This file may only be distributed together with the file
`tocstyle.dtx' and `scrlogo.dtx'. You may however distribute the files
`tocstyle.dtx' and `scrlogo.dtx' without this file.
-If this file is a beta version, you are not allowed to distribute it.
-
-English and German manuals are part of KOMA-Script bundle.
-----------------------------------------------------------
-
The english manual is in `tocstyle.dtx', too.
-The KOMA-Script bundle (but not this file) was based upon the LaTeX2.09
-Script family created by Frank Neukam 1993 and the LaTeX2e standard
-classes created by The LaTeX3 Project 1994-1996.
-
-THIS IS AN ALPHA VERSION!
-USAGE OF THIS VERSION IS ON YOUR OWN RISK!
-EVERYTHING MAY HAPPEN!
-EVERYTHING MAY CHANGE IN FUTURE!
-THERE IS NO SUPPORT, IF YOU USE THIS PACKAGE!
+THIS IS AN OBSOLETE PACKAGE! YOU SHOULD NOT USE IT!
\endpreamble
@@ -158,33 +140,12 @@ THERE IS NO SUPPORT, IF YOU USE THIS PACKAGE!
\file{tocstyle.tex}{%
\from{tocstyle.dtx}{doc}%
}%
- \file{tocstyle.drv}{%
- \from{tocstyle.dtx}{driver}%
- }%
+% \file{tocstyle.drv}{%
+% \from{tocstyle.dtx}{driver}%
+% }%
}%
}
-\ifToplevel{%
- \Msg{**********************************************************************}
- \Msg{*}
- \ifbeta
- \Msg{* THIS IS A BETA VERSION. YOU SHOULD NOT INSTALL OR USE IT!}
- \Msg{* THERE MAY BE A LOT OF BUGS AT THIS VERSION!}
- \Msg{* PLEASE INSTALL THE RELEASE YOU MAY FIND AT CTAN!}
- \else
- \Msg{* To finish the installation you have to copy the file `tocstyle.sty'}
- \Msg{* to folder `tex/latex/tocstyle/' of one of your TEXMF trees.}
- \Msg{* You should also produce the documentation using}
- \Msg{*\space\space pdflatex tocstyle.dtx}
- \Msg{* and copy it to folder `doc/latex/tocstyle/' of one of your}
- \Msg{* TEXMF trees.}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{* See the manual of your TeX distribution for more informations about}
- \Msg{* package installation.}
- \fi
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{**********************************************************************}
-}
% \iffalse
%</insfile>
%<*dtx>
@@ -199,7 +160,7 @@ THERE IS NO SUPPORT, IF YOU USE THIS PACKAGE!
%<driver>\ProvidesFile{tocstyle.drv}
%<doc>\ProvidesFile{tocstyle.tex}
%<*dtx|package|driver|doc>
- [2017/02/23 v0.2i-alpha KOMA-Script package (versatile toc styles)]
+ [2019/10/09 v0.2j-alpha deprecated package (versatile toc styles)]
%</dtx|package|driver|doc>
%<*driver>
\documentclass{scrdoc}
@@ -214,7 +175,7 @@ THERE IS NO SUPPORT, IF YOU USE THIS PACKAGE!
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\GetFileInfo{tocstyle.dtx}
-\title{The \KOMAScript{} package \texttt{tocstyle}%
+\title{The obsolete package \texttt{tocstyle}%
\footnote{This is version \fileversion\ of file \texttt{\filename}.}}
\date{\filedate}
\author{Markus Kohm}
@@ -265,9 +226,9 @@ THERE IS NO SUPPORT, IF YOU USE THIS PACKAGE!
%
% \selectlanguage{english}
%
-% \changes{v0.1}{2007/06/23}{start of new package}^^A
+% \changes{v0.1}{2007/06/23}{start of new package}%^^A
% \changes{v0.2h}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by
-% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A
+% \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}%^^A
%
%\iffalse
%<doc>\chapter{Other Styles for Table of Contents and Lists of Floats}
@@ -316,12 +277,9 @@ status of the package would be for more than eight years.
With \KOMAScript~3.20 several features of \Package{tocstyle} can be found also
in \Package{tocbasic}. I recommend to use that official and essential part of
-\KOMAScript{} instead of \Package{tocstyle} whenever possible. Nevertheless, I
-plan to ensure the compatibility of \Package{tocstyle} with new releases of
-\KOMAScript{} for at least already existing, unchanged documents as long as it
-is possible. But expect that \Package{tocstyle} will move from
-\KOMAScript{} bundle to another package, e.\,g., \KOMAScript-obsolete or a
-stand-alone package.
+\KOMAScript{} instead of \Package{tocstyle} whenever possible. Expect that
+\Package{tocstyle} will move from \KOMAScript{} bundle to another package,
+e.\,g., \KOMAScript-obsolete or a stand-alone package soon.
\section{How It Works}
\label{sec:tocstyle.howitworks}
@@ -1018,10 +976,11 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\PackageWarningNoLine{tocstyle}{%
- THIS IS AN ALPHA VERSION!\MessageBreak
+ THIS IS A DEPRECATED ALPHA VERSION!\MessageBreak
USAGE OF THIS VERSION IS ON YOUR OWN RISK!\MessageBreak
EVERYTHING MAY HAPPEN!\MessageBreak
- EVERYTHING MAY CHANGE IN FUTURE!\MessageBreak
+ THE PACKAGE IS FROZEN WITH ALL IT'S BUGS!\MessageBreak
+ IT WILL BE REMOVED FROM KOMA-SCRIPT SOON!\MessageBreak
THERE IS NO SUPPORT, IF YOU USE THIS PACKAGE!\MessageBreak
Maybe it would be better, not to load this package%
}
@@ -1212,6 +1171,7 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tocstyle@dottedtocline}
+% \changes{v0.2j}{2019/10/09}{newer \LaTeX{} uses two \cs{kern}}%^^A
% Implement new definition and redefine:
%^^A ------ Help me to find the \renecommand*{\@dottedtocline} ----------------
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1356,9 +1316,11 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
\fi
\nobreak
\ifx\tocstyle@feature@pagenumberbox\relax
- \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\tocstyle@feature@pagenumberhook #5}%
+ \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\tocstyle@feature@pagenumberhook #5%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}%
\else
- \tocstyle@feature@pagenumberbox{\tocstyle@feature@pagenumberhook #5}%
+ \tocstyle@feature@pagenumberbox{\tocstyle@feature@pagenumberhook #5%
+ \kern-\p@\kern\p@}%
\fi
\par
}%
@@ -1433,7 +1395,7 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
% \subsubsection{Redefining Class Macros}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
-% \changes{v0.2d}{2009/11/11}{part level is always -1}
+% \changes{v0.2d}{2009/11/11}{part level is always -1}
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
@@ -1443,13 +1405,13 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
% \begin{macro}{\l@table}
% \begin{macro}{\l@figure}
% Try to redefine the toc commands at startup.
-% \changes{v0.2f}{2016/03/22}{recognize all subs of part, chapter,
-% section and paragraph}^^A
-% \changes{v0.2g}{2016/03/23}{warning for usage of not recommended package
-% combinations}^^A
-% \changes{v0.2h}{2016/04/24}{lokal \cs{normalcolor} auf \cs{relax}
-% setzen}^^A
-% \changes{v0.2h}{2016/04/24}{lokal \cs{color} auf \cs{@gobble} setzen}^^A
+% \changes{v0.2f}{2016/03/22}{recognize all subs of part, chapter,
+% section and paragraph}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.2g}{2016/03/23}{warning for usage of not recommended package
+% combinations}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.2h}{2016/04/24}{lokal \cs{normalcolor} auf \cs{relax}
+% setzen}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.2h}{2016/04/24}{lokal \cs{color} auf \cs{@gobble} setzen}%^^A
% \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\@ifpackageloaded{tocbasic}{%
@@ -1586,6 +1548,7 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \changes{v0.2j}{2019/10/09}{newer \LaTeX{} uses two \cs{kern}}%^^A
% This will be used even for undotted toc lines. First check the definition,
% then redefine.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -1607,7 +1570,26 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
\par}%
\fi}%
\ifx\@dottedtocline\@tempa\else
- \tocstyle@macrochangewarning\@dottedtocline
+ \def\@tempa#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+ \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+ {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+ \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \leavevmode
+ \@tempdima #3\relax
+ \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+ {#4}\nobreak
+ \leaders\hbox{$\m@th
+ \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep
+ mu$}\hfill
+ \nobreak
+ \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil \normalfont \normalcolor #5\kern-\p@\kern\p@}%
+ \par}%
+ \fi}%
+ \ifx\@dottedtocline\@tempa\else
+ \tocstyle@macrochangewarning\@dottedtocline
+ \fi
\fi
\let\tocstyle@saved@dottedtocline\@dottedtocline
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -1811,8 +1793,8 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocstyle@set@width}
-% \changes{v0.2d}{2009/11/11}{improve handling of standard classes}^^A
-% \changes{v0.2h}{2016/03/25}{use after definition in \texttt{aux}-file}^^A
+% \changes{v0.2d}{2009/11/11}{improve handling of standard classes}%^^A
+% \changes{v0.2h}{2016/03/25}{use after definition in \texttt{aux}-file}%^^A
% Some classes do not use \cs{numberline}. This may result in negativ widths
% (esp. negativ skips). Following special handling of negativ values improves
% the toc handling of the standard classes. Nevertheless indentation of not
@@ -2052,7 +2034,7 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
%
% \begin{macro}{\usetocstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@usetocstyle}
-% \changes{v0.2a}{2008/02/14}{extended for deprecated TOC styles}
+% \changes{v0.2a}{2008/02/14}{extended for deprecated TOC styles}
% Use the predefined TOC style. You may define
% |\tocstyle@deprecated@style@foo| to mark TOC style |foo| to be
% deprecated. If |\tocstyle@deprecated@style@foo| is |\@empty| TOC style
@@ -2197,7 +2179,7 @@ usefull to define your own toc styles.
% at \texttt{KOMAlike}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@toc}
-% \changes{v0.2i}{2017/02/23}{use indirect extensions}
+% \changes{v0.2i}{2017/02/23}{use indirect extensions}
% From version 0.2i the indirect extension for the auxiliary file of the
% table of contents is used like the KOMA-Script classes do.
% \begin{macrocode}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md
index 056f0d84a4..62c2d06089 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/README.md
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
# Readme for the package nicematrix
-Author : F. Pantigny (`fpantigny@wanadoo.fr`).
+Author: F. Pantigny (`fpantigny@wanadoo.fr`).
-CTAN page : `https://ctan.org/pkg/nicematrix`
+CTAN page: `https://ctan.org/pkg/nicematrix`
## License
The LaTeX extension `nicematrix` is distributed under the LPPL 1.3 license.
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ The LaTeX extension `nicematrix` is distributed under the LPPL 1.3 license.
The LaTeX package `nicematrix` provides new environments similar to the classical environments
`{array}` and `{matrix}` but with some additional features. Among these features are the
possibilities to fix the width of the columns, to draw continuous ellipsis dots between the cells
-of the array and to add exterior rows and columns (so called 'border matrices').
+of the array and to add exterior rows and columns (so called *border matrices*).
## Installation
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf
index c288f665cc..e2607f0c9b 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex
index fa07724b59..49d8fc98ff 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
\documentclass[dvipsnames]{article}% dvipsnames is for xcolor (loaded by Tikz, loaded by nicematrix)
\usepackage{xltxtra}
\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\frenchsetup{og = « , fg = »}
\usepackage{geometry}
\geometry{left=2.8cm,right=2.8cm,top=2.5cm,bottom=2.5cm,papersize={21cm,29.7cm}}
@@ -501,11 +502,11 @@ même rangée que |\Hdotsfor|).
\subsection{Comment créer les lignes en pointillés de manière transparente}
L'extension \pkg{nicematrix} fournit une option appelée |transparent| qui permet d'utiliser du code existant de
-manière transparente dans les environnements de l'\pkg{amsmath} : |{matrix}|, |{pmatrix}|, |{bmatrix}|, etc. En
-fait, cette option est un alias pour la conjonction de deux options : |renew-dots| et
-|renew-matrix|.\footnote{Comme toutes les autres options, les options |renew-dots|, |renew-matrix| et |transparent|
- peuvent être fixées avec la commande |\NiceMatrixOptions|, mais elles peuvent aussi être passées en options du
- |\usepackage| (ce sont les trois seules).}
+manière transparente dans les environnements de l'\pkg{amsmath} : |{matrix}|, |{pmatrix}|, etc. En fait, cette
+option est un alias pour la conjonction de deux options : |renew-dots| et |renew-matrix|.\footnote{Comme toutes les
+ autres options, les options |renew-dots|, |renew-matrix| et |transparent| peuvent être fixées avec la commande
+ |\NiceMatrixOptions|, mais elles peuvent aussi être passées en options du |\usepackage| (ce sont les trois
+ seules).}
\smallskip
@@ -854,8 +855,8 @@ Les environnements de \pkg{nicematrix} permettent de composer des rangées et de
\label{exterior}
Si elle est présente, la première rangée est numérotée par $0$ (et non $1$). Il en est de même pour la première
-colonne. Dans le cas général, on doit spécifier le numéro de la dernière rangée et de la dernière colonne (si elles
-sont présentes).
+colonne. Dans le cas général, on doit spécifier le numéro de la dernière rangée et de la dernière colonne comme
+valeurs des options |last-row| and |last-col| (si elles sont présentes).
\begin{Verbatim}
$\begin{pNiceMatrix}[~emphase#first-row,last-row=5,first-col,last-col=5@]
@@ -882,12 +883,13 @@ Il y a plusieurs remarques à formuler.
%
\begin{itemize}
\item Si on utilise un environnement avec préambule explicite (c'est-à-dire |{NiceArray}| ou l'une de ses
-variantes), on ne doit pas mettre de spécification de colonne pour les éventuelles première et dernière colonne :
-la première colonne sera automatiquement (et nécessairement) de type |R| et la dernière de type |L|).
+variantes), on ne doit pas mettre dans ce préambule de spécification de colonne pour les éventuelles première et
+dernière colonne : la première colonne sera automatiquement (et nécessairement) de type |R| et la dernière de type
+|L|.
\item Si on utilise un environnement avec préambule explicite et une dernière colonne, on doit utiliser l'option
|last-col| \emph{sans} valeur. En effet le numéro de la dernière colonne est, dans ce cas, déduit du préambule (qui
-contient nécessairement l'information du nombre de colonnes non extérieures).
+contient nécessairement implicitement l'information du nombre de colonnes non extérieures).
\item Pour une dernière rangée, l'option |last-row| peut en fait être utilisée sans préciser de valeur. Dans ce
cas, \pkg{nicematrix} détermine, lors de la première compilation, le nombre de rangées rencontrées dans le tableau
@@ -1099,13 +1101,13 @@ $\begin{pNiceMatrix}[columns-width = 1cm]
\medskip
Noter que l'espace inséré entre deux colonnes (égal à 2 |\arraycolsep|) n'est pas supprimé (il est évidemment
-possible de le supprimer en mettant |\arraycolsep| à~$0$).
+possible de le supprimer en mettant |\arraycolsep| à~$0$ avant).
\bigskip
-Il est possible de donner la valeur |auto| à l'option |columns-width| : toutes les colonnes du tableau
+Il est possible de donner la valeur spéciale |auto| à l'option |columns-width|: toutes les colonnes du tableau
auront alors une largeur égale à la largeur de la case la plus large du tableau.\footnote{Le résultat est atteint
-dès la première compilation (mais Tikz écrivant des informations dans le fichier |.aux|, un message demandant une
-deuxième compilation apparaîtra).}\par\nobreak
+ dès la première compilation (mais Tikz écrivant des informations dans le fichier |.aux|, un message demandant une
+ deuxième compilation apparaîtra).}\par\nobreak
\medskip
\begin{BVerbatim}[baseline=c,boxwidth=10cm]
@@ -1122,8 +1124,8 @@ $\begin{pNiceMatrix}[columns-width = auto]
\end{pNiceMatrix}$
\bigskip
-Il est possible de fixer la largeur de toutes les colonnes de toutes les matrices dans une certaine portion de
-document avec la commande |\NiceMatrixOptions|.\par\nobreak
+Sans surprise, il est possible de fixer la largeur de toutes les colonnes de toutes les matrices dans une certaine
+portion de document avec la commande |\NiceMatrixOptions|.\par\nobreak
\medskip
\begin{BVerbatim}[baseline=c,boxwidth=8.5cm]
@@ -1489,20 +1491,18 @@ colonnes sans interférer avec le tracé des lignes en pointillés par \pkg{nice
L'environnement |{array}| insère un espace horizontal égal à |\arraycolsep| avant et après chaque colonne. En
particulier, il y a un espace égal à |\arraycolsep| avant et après le tableau. Cette caractéristique de
-l'environnement |{array}| n'était probablement pas une bonne idée.\footnote{Dans la documentation de |{amsmath}|,
- on peut lire : {\itshape The extra space of |\arraycolsep| that \pkg{array} adds on each side is a waste so we
+l'environnement |{array}| n'était probablement pas une bonne idée\footnote{Dans la documentation de |{amsmath}|, on
+ peut lire : {\itshape The extra space of |\arraycolsep| that \pkg{array} adds on each side is a waste so we
remove it [in |{matrix}|] (perhaps we should instead remove it from array in general, but that's a harder
task).} Il est possible de supprimer les espaces pour un environnement |{array}| donné par une construction du
- type |\begin{array}{@{}ccccc@{}}|.} % \end{array}
-
-L'environnement |{matrix}| et ses variantes (|{pmatrix}|, |{vmatrix}|, etc.) de \pkg{amsmath} prefèrent supprimer
-ces espaces avec des instructions explicites |\hskip -\arraycolsep| et |{NiceArray}| agit de même.
-
-Néanmoins, l'utilisateur peut changer ce comportement avec l'option |exterior-arraycolsep| de la commande
-|\NiceMatrixOptions|. Avec cette option, |{NiceArray}| va insérer le même espacement horizontal que |{array}|.
-
-Cette option est seulement pour la «compatibilité» puisque l'extension \pkg{nicematrix} fournit un contrôle plus
-précis avec les options |left-margin|, |extra-left-margin|, etc.
+ type |\begin{array}{@{}ccccc@{}}...\end{array}|.}. L'environnement |{matrix}| et ses variantes (|{pmatrix}|,
+|{vmatrix}|, etc.) de \pkg{amsmath} prefèrent supprimer ces espaces avec des instructions explicites
+|\hskip -\arraycolsep|. L'extension \pkg{nicematrix} fait de même dans \emph{tous} ses environnements y compris
+l'environnement |{NiceArray}|. Néanmoins, si l'utilisateur souhaite que l'environnement |{NiceArray}| se comporte
+par défaut comme l'environnement |{array}| de \pkg{array} (par exemple pour faciliter l'adaptation d'un document
+existant), il peut contrôler ce comportement avec l'option |exterior-arraycolsep| accessible via la commande
+|\NiceMatrixOptions|. Avec cette option, des espaces extérieurs de longueur |\arraycolsep| seront insérés dans les
+environnements |{NiceArray}| (les autres environnements de l'extension \pkg{nicematrix} ne sont pas affectés).
\subsection{L'option de classe draft}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx
index 831a7fca85..47271a5452 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx
@@ -15,8 +15,8 @@
%
% \fi
% \iffalse
-\def\myfileversion{3.4}
-\def\myfiledate{2019/10/05}
+\def\myfileversion{3.5}
+\def\myfiledate{2019/10/13}
%
%
%<*batchfile>
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ version 2005/12/01 or later.
%</batchfile>
%
%<*driver>
-\documentclass[dvipsnames]{l3doc}% dvipsnames is for xcolor (loaded by Tikz, loaded by nicematrix)
+\documentclass[dvipsnames]{l3doc}% dvipsnames is for xcolor (loaded by Tikz)
\VerbatimFootnotes
\usepackage{xltxtra}
\usepackage[xetex]{geometry}
@@ -114,10 +114,10 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% This package can be used with |xelatex|, |lualatex|, |pdflatex| but also by
% the classical workflow |latex|-|dvips|-|ps2pdf| (or Adobe Distiller). Two or
-% three compilations may be necessary. This package requires and \textbf{loads} the
-% packages \pkg{expl3}, \pkg{l3keys2e}, \pkg{xparse}, \pkg{array}, \pkg{amsmath}
-% and \pkg{tikz}. It also loads the Tikz library \pkg{fit}. The final user only
-% has to load the extension with |\usepackage{nicematrix}|.
+% three compilations may be necessary. This package requires and \textbf{loads}
+% the packages \pkg{expl3}, \pkg{l3keys2e}, \pkg{xparse}, \pkg{array},
+% \pkg{amsmath} and \pkg{tikz}. It also loads the Tikz library \pkg{fit}. The
+% final user only has to load the extension with |\usepackage{nicematrix}|.
%
%
% \medskip
@@ -227,10 +227,10 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% instead of |l|, |c| and |r|. It's possible to use the constructions
% |w{...}{...}|, |W{...}{...}|\footnote{However, for the columns of type |w| and
% |W|, the cells are composed in math mode (in the environments of
-% \pkg{nicematrix}) whereas in |{array}| of \pkg{array}, they are composed in text mode.}, "|",
-% |>{...}|, |<{...}|, |@{...}|, |!{...}| and |*{n}{...}| but the letters |p|,
-% |m| and |b| should not be used. See p.~\pageref{NiceArray} the section
-% relating to |{NiceArray}|.
+% \pkg{nicematrix}) whereas in |{array}| of \pkg{array}, they are composed in
+% text mode.}, "|", |>{...}|, |<{...}|, |@{...}|, |!{...}| and |*{n}{...}| but
+% the letters |p|, |m| and |b| should not be used. See p.~\pageref{NiceArray}
+% the section relating to |{NiceArray}|.
%
%
% \section{The continuous dotted lines}
@@ -550,10 +550,10 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \item The option |renew-dots|\par\nobreak
%
% With this option, the commands |\ldots|, |\cdots|, |\vdots|, |\ddots|,
-% |\iddots|\footnotemark[\thefniddots] and |\hdotsfor| are redefined within the environments
-% provided by \pkg{nicematrix} and behave like |\Ldots|, |\Cdots|, |\Vdots|,
-% |\Ddots|, |\Iddots| and |\Hdotsfor|; the command |\dots| (``automatic dots''
-% of |amsmath|) is also redefined to behave like |\Ldots|.
+% |\iddots|\footnotemark[\thefniddots] and |\hdotsfor| are redefined within the
+% environments provided by \pkg{nicematrix} and behave like |\Ldots|, |\Cdots|,
+% |\Vdots|, |\Ddots|, |\Iddots| and |\Hdotsfor|; the command |\dots|
+% (``automatic dots'' of |amsmath|) is also redefined to behave like |\Ldots|.
%
% \item The option |renew-matrix|\par\nobreak
%
@@ -701,9 +701,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% we have used the options |left-margin| and |right-margin|.\footnote{The
% options |left-margin| and |right-margin| take dimensions as values but, if no
% value is given, the default value is used, which is |\arraycolsep| (by
-% default: 5~pt). There is
-% also an option |margin| to fix both |left-margin| and |right-margin| to the
-% same value.}
+% default: 5~pt). There is also an option |margin| to fix both |left-margin| and
+% |right-margin| to the same value.}
% \[\begin{pNiceMatrix}[
% create-extra-nodes,left-margin,right-margin,
% code-after = {\begin{tikzpicture}
@@ -756,7 +755,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% In this case, if we want a control over the height of the rows, we can add a
% |\strut| in each row of the array.
% \[\begin{pNiceMatrix}[
-% create-extra-nodes,left-margin,right-margin,extra-right-margin=3pt,extra-left-margin=3pt,
+% create-extra-nodes,left-margin,right-margin,extra-right-margin=3pt,
+% extra-left-margin=3pt,
% code-after = {\begin{tikzpicture}
% [every node/.style = {blend mode = multiply,
% inner sep = -\pgflinewidth/2},
@@ -777,7 +777,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{pNiceMatrix}\]
%
% \bigskip
-% We explain below how to fill the nodes created by \pkg{nicematrix} (cf. p. \pageref{highlight}).
+% We explain below how to fill the nodes created by \pkg{nicematrix} (cf. p.
+% \pageref{highlight}).
%
% \section{The code-after}
%
@@ -899,7 +900,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \bigskip
% \section{The exterior row and columns}
% The options |first-row|, |last-row|, |first-col| and |last-col| allow the
-% composition of exterior rows and columns in the environments of \pkg{nicematrix}.
+% composition of exterior rows and columns in the environments of
+% \pkg{nicematrix}.
% \label{exterior}
%
% A potential first row has the number $0$ (and not $1$). Idem for the potential
@@ -930,10 +932,10 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% We have several remarks to do.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item For the environments with an explicit preamble (i.e. |{NiceArray}| and
-% its variants), no letter must be given in the preamble for the potential first
-% column and the potential last column: the first column will be automatically
-% (and necessarily) of type |R| and the last column will be automatically of
-% type |L|).
+% its variants), no letter must be given in that preamble for the potential
+% first column and the potential last column: the first column will be
+% automatically (and necessarily) of type |R| and the last column will be
+% automatically of % type |L|.
% \item In an environment with an explicit preamble, the option |last-col| must
% be used \emph{without} value: the number of columns will be automatically
% computed from the preamble of the array.
@@ -957,7 +959,7 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% ~emphase#code-for-first-col@ = \color{blue},
% ~emphase#code-for-last-row@ = \color{green},
% ~emphase#code-for-last-col@ = \color{magenta}}
-% $\begin{pNiceArray}{CC|CC}[first-row,last-row=5,first-col,last-col]
+% $\begin{pNiceArray}{CC|CC}[first-row,last-row,first-col,last-col]
% & C_1 & C_2 & C_3 & C_4 & \\
% L_1 & a_{11} & a_{12} & a_{13} & a_{14} & L_1 \\
% L_2 & a_{21} & a_{22} & a_{23} & a_{24} & L_2 \\
@@ -973,7 +975,7 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% code-for-first-col = \color{blue},
% code-for-last-row = \color{green},
% code-for-last-col = \color{magenta}}
-% \[\begin{pNiceArray}{CC|CC}[first-row,last-row=5,first-col,last-col]
+% \[\begin{pNiceArray}{CC|CC}[first-row,last-row,first-col,last-col]
% & C_1 & \multicolumn1C{C_2} & C_3 & C_4 & \\
% L_1 & a_{11} & a_{12} & a_{13} & a_{14} & L_1 \\
% L_2 & a_{21} & a_{22} & a_{23} & a_{24} & L_2 \\
@@ -997,10 +999,10 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% the first and in the last row, he should use |!{\vline}| instead of \verb+|+
% in the preamble of the array.}
% \item Logically, the potential option |columns-width| (described
-% p.~\pageref{width}) doesn't apply to the ``first column'' and ``last column''.
-% \item For technical reasons, it's not possible to use the option of the command |\\|
-% after the ``first row'' or before the ``last row'' (the placement of the
-% delimiters would be wrong).
+% p.~\pageref{width}) doesn't apply to the ``first column'' and ``last column''.
+% \item For technical reasons, it's not possible to use the option of the
+% command |\\| after the ``first row'' or before the ``last row'' (the placement
+% of the delimiters would be wrong).
% \end{itemize}
%
%
@@ -1051,8 +1053,10 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{NiceArray}\right)$
%
%
-% \bigskip
-% These dotted lines do \emph{not} extend in the potential exterior rows and columns.
+% \bigskip
+% These dotted lines do \emph{not} extend in the potential exterior rows and
+% columns.
+%
%
% \medskip
% \begin{BVerbatim}[baseline=c,boxwidth=9.5cm]
@@ -1152,9 +1156,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% |\arraycolsep| equal to $0$~pt).
%
% \bigskip
-% It's possible to give the value |auto| to the option |columns-width|: all the
-% columns of the array will have a width equal to the widest cell of the
-% array.\footnote{The result is achieved with only one compilation (but Tikz
+% It's possible to give the special value |auto| to the option |columns-width|:
+% all the columns of the array will have a width equal to the widest cell of
+% the array.\footnote{The result is achieved with only one compilation (but Tikz
% will have written informations in the |.aux| file and a message requiring a
% second compilation will appear).}\par\nobreak
%
@@ -1173,8 +1177,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{pNiceMatrix}$
%
% \bigskip
-% It's possible to fix the width of the columns of all the matrices of a current
-% scope with the command |\NiceMatrixOptions|.\par\nobreak
+% Without surprise, it's possible to fix the width of the columns of all the
+% matrices of a current scope with the command |\NiceMatrixOptions|.\par\nobreak
%
% \medskip
% \begin{BVerbatim}[baseline=c,boxwidth=8.5cm]
@@ -1243,7 +1247,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% The command |\Block| must be used in the upper leftmost cell of the array with
% two arguments. The first argument is the size of the block with the syntax
% $i$\verb|-|$j$ where $i$ is the number of rows of the block and $j$ its number
-% of columns. The second argument is the content of the block (composed in math mode).
+% of columns. The second argument is the content of the block (composed in math
+% mode).
+%
%
%
% \medskip
@@ -1328,7 +1334,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{Verbatim}
% %
% \[\begin{bNiceArray}{CCCC|C}[small, last-col,
-% code-for-last-col = \scriptscriptstyle, columns-width=3mm]
+% code-for-last-col = \scriptscriptstyle,
+% columns-width=3mm]
% 1 & -2 & 3 & 4 & 5 \\
% 0 & 3 & 2 & 1 & 2 & L_2 \gets 2 L_1 - L_2 \\
% 0 & 1 & 1 & 2 & 3 & L_3 \gets L_1 + L_3 \\
@@ -1338,8 +1345,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \bigskip
% One should note that the environment |{NiceMatrix}| with the option |small| is
-% not composed \emph{exactly} as the environment |{smallmatrix}|. Indeed, all the
-% environments of \pkg{nicematrix} are constructed upon |{array}| (of the
+% not composed \emph{exactly} as the environment |{smallmatrix}|. Indeed, all
+% the environments of \pkg{nicematrix} are constructed upon |{array}| (of the
% extension \pkg{array}) whereas the environment |{smallmatrix}| is constructed
% directly with an |\halign| of TeX.
%
@@ -1516,8 +1523,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \label{empty-cells}
% An instruction like |\Ldots|, |\Cdots|, etc. tries to determine the first
-% non-empty cells on both sides. However, an empty cell is not necessarily a cell
-% with no TeX content (that is to say a cell with no token between the two
+% non-empty cells on both sides. However, an empty cell is not necessarily a
+% cell with no TeX content (that is to say a cell with no token between the two
% ampersands~|&|). Indeed, a cell with contents |\hspace*{1cm}| may be
% considered as empty.
%
@@ -1558,25 +1565,24 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% The environment |{array}| inserts an horizontal space equal to |\arraycolsep|
% before and after each column. In particular, there is a space equal to
% |\arraycolsep| before and after the array. This feature of the environment
-% |{array}| was probably not a good idea.\footnote{In the documentation of
+% |{array}| was probably not a good idea\footnote{In the documentation of
% |{amsmath}|, we can read: {\itshape The extra space of |\arraycolsep| that
% \pkg{array} adds on each side is a waste so we remove it [in |{matrix}|]
% (perhaps we should instead remove it from array in general, but that's a
% harder task).} It's possible to suppress these spaces for a given environment
-% |{array}| with a construction like |\begin{array}{@{}ccccc@{}}|.}
-%
-% The environment |{matrix}| and its variants (|{pmatrix}|, |{vmatrix}|, etc.)
-% of \pkg{amsmath} prefer to delete these spaces with explicit instructions
-% |\hskip -\arraycolsep| and |{NiceArray}| does likewise.
-%
-% However, the user can change this behaviour with the boolean option
-% |exterior-arraycolsep| of the command |\NiceMatrixOptions|. With this option,
-% |{NiceArray}| will insert the same horizontal spaces as the environment
-% |{array}|.
-%
-% This option is only for ``compatibility'' since the package \pkg{nicematrix}
-% provides a more precise control with the options |left-margin|,
-% |right-margin|, |extra-left-margin| and |extra-right-margin|.
+% |{array}| with a construction like
+% |\begin{array}{@{}ccccc@{}}...\end{array}|.}.
+% The environment |{matrix}| of \pkg{amsmath} and its variants (|{pmatrix}|,
+% |{vmatrix}|, etc.) of \pkg{amsmath} prefer to delete these spaces with
+% explicit instructions |\hskip -\arraycolsep|. The extension \pkg{nicematrix}
+% does the same in all its environments, |{NiceArray}| included. However, if the
+% user wants the environment |{NiceArray}| behaving by default like the
+% environment |{array}| of \pkg{array} (for example, when adapting an existing
+% document) it's possible to control this behaviour with the option
+% |exterior-arraycolsep|, set by the command |\NiceMatrixOptions|. With this
+% option, exterior spaces of length |\arraycolsep| will be inserted in the
+% environments |{NiceArray}| (the other environments of \pkg{nicematrix} are not
+% affected).
%
%
% \subsection{The class option draft}
@@ -1591,7 +1597,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% That's why, when the class option |draft| is used, the dotted lines are not
% drawn, for a faster compilation.
%
-% \subsection{A technical problem with the argument of \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+% \subsection{A technical problem with the argument of
+% \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+%
%
% For technical, reasons, if you use the optional argument of the command |\\|,
% the vertical space added will also be added to the ``normal'' node
@@ -1847,7 +1855,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{Verbatim}
%
% \arrayrulecolor{cyan}
-% \[\begin{pNiceArray}{*6C|C}[nullify-dots,last-col,code-for-last-col={\scriptstyle}]
+% \[\begin{pNiceArray}{*6C|C}[nullify-dots,last-col,
+% code-for-last-col={\scriptstyle}]
% 1 & 1 & 1 &\Cdots & & 1 & 0 & \\
% 0 & 1 & 0 &\Cdots & & 0 & & L_2 \gets L_2-L_1 \\
% 0 & 0 & 1 &\Ddots & & \Vdots & & L_3 \gets L_3-L_1 \\
@@ -1862,8 +1871,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
%
% \medskip
-% In the following example, we use |{NiceMatrixBlock}| with the option |auto-columns-width| because
-% we want the same automatic width for all the columns of the matrices.
+% In the following example, we use |{NiceMatrixBlock}| with the option
+% |auto-columns-width| because we want the same automatic width for all the
+% columns of the matrices.
%
% \bigskip
% \begin{BVerbatim}
@@ -1952,7 +1962,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% of the matrix (with the Tikz key ``|name suffix|'', it's easy to use the
% ``large nodes'').
%
-% In order to have the continuity of the lines, we have to set |inner sep = -\pgflinewidth/2|.
+% In order to have the continuity of the lines, we have to set
+% |inner sep = -\pgflinewidth/2|.
%
% \begin{Verbatim}
% $\begin{pNiceArray}{>{\strut}CCCC}%
@@ -2032,8 +2043,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
%
% \bigskip
-% This code fails with |latex|-|dvips|-|ps2pdf| because Tikz for |dvips|, as for now, doesn't support blend modes. However, the
-% following code, in the preamble, should activate blend modes in this way of compilation.
+% This code fails with |latex|-|dvips|-|ps2pdf| because Tikz for |dvips|, as for
+% now, doesn't support blend modes. However, the following code, in the
+% preamble, should activate blend modes in this way of compilation.
%
%
% \begin{scope} \small
@@ -2071,7 +2083,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{pNiceArray}\]
%
% \bigskip
-% If we want to highlight each row of this matrix, we can use the previous technique three times.
+% If we want to highlight each row of this matrix, we can use the previous
+% technique three times.
%
% \begin{Verbatim}
% \tikzset{myoptions/.style={remember picture,
@@ -2117,7 +2130,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{pNiceArray}\]
%
% \medskip
-% The result may seem disappointing. We can improve it by using the ``medium nodes'' instead of the ``normal nodes''.
+% The result may seem disappointing. We can improve it by using the ``medium
+% nodes'' instead of the ``normal nodes''.
%
% \begin{Verbatim}
% \begin{tikzpicture}[myoptions, ~emphase#name suffix = -medium@]
@@ -2149,7 +2163,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \vspace{1cm}
%
-% In the following example, we use the ``large nodes'' to highlight a zone of the matrix.\par\nobreak
+% In the following example, we use the ``large nodes'' to highlight a zone of
+% the matrix.\par\nobreak
% \begin{Verbatim}
% \begin{pNiceArray}{>{\strut}CCCC}%
% [create-extra-nodes,margin,extra-margin=2pt,
@@ -2189,7 +2204,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \subsection{Direct utilisation of the Tikz nodes}
%
-% In the following example, we illustrate the mathematical product of two matrices.
+% In the following example, we illustrate the mathematical product of two
+% matrices.
%
% \medskip
% The utilisation of |{NiceMatrixBlock}| with the option |auto-columns-width|
@@ -2210,7 +2226,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% &
% \end{Verbatim}
%
-% The matrix $B$ has a ``first row'' (for $C_j$) and that's why we use the key |first-row|.
+% The matrix $B$ has a ``first row'' (for $C_j$) and that's why we use the key
+% |first-row|.
% \begin{Verbatim}
% \begin{bNiceArray}{C>{\strut}CCCC}[name=B,first-row]
% & & C_j \\
@@ -2315,7 +2332,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% Of course, the package \pkg{nicematrix} uses the features of the package
% \pkg{array}. It tries to be independant of its implementation. Unfortunately,
% it was not possible to be strictly independant: the package \pkg{nicematrix}
-% relies upon the fact that the package |{array}| uses |\ialign| to begin the |\halign|.
+% relies upon the fact that the package |{array}| uses |\ialign| to begin the
+% |\halign|.
%
% \smallskip
% The desire to do no modification to existing code leads to complications in
@@ -2323,9 +2341,10 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \subsection{Declaration of the package and extensions loaded}
%
-% First, \pkg{tikz} and the Tikz library |fit| are loaded before the |\ProvidesExplPackage|.
-% They are loaded this way because |\usetikzlibrary| in |expl3| code fails.\footnote{cf.
-% |tex.stackexchange.com/questions/57424/using-of-usetikzlibrary-in-an-expl3-package-fails|}
+% First, \pkg{tikz} and the Tikz library |fit| are loaded before the
+% |\ProvidesExplPackage|. They are loaded this way because |\usetikzlibrary| in
+% |expl3| code fails.\footnote{cf.
+% |tex.stackexchange.com/questions/57424/using-of-usetikzlibrary-in-an-expl3-package-fails|}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
%<@@=nm>
@@ -2374,8 +2393,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \bigskip
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_error:n { \msg_error:nn { nicematrix } }
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_error:nn { \msg_error:nn { nicematrix } }
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_error:nnn { \msg_error:nnn { nicematrix } }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_error:nn { \msg_error:nnn { nicematrix } }
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_error:nnn { \msg_error:nnnn { nicematrix } }
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_fatal:n { \msg_fatal:nn { nicematrix } }
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_fatal:nn { \msg_fatal:nn { nicematrix } }
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_msg_new:nn { \msg_new:nnn { nicematrix } }
@@ -2546,7 +2565,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
\dim_set:Nn \l_@@_inter_dots_dim { 0.45 em }
% \end{macrocode}
% The length |\l_@@_radius_dim| is the radius of the dots for the dotted lines.
-% The default value is 0.34~pt but it will changed if the option |small| is used.
+% The default value is 0.34~pt but it will changed if the option |small| is
+% used.
% \begin{macrocode}
\dim_new:N \l_@@_radius_dim
\dim_set:Nn \l_@@_radius_dim { 0.53 pt }
@@ -2699,20 +2719,21 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% (|\group_begin:|--|\group_end:|) and we extract the two command names which
% are in the toks |\@temptokena|. However, this extraction can be done only
% when \pkg{siunitx} is loaded (and it may be loaded after \pkg{nicematrix})
-% and, in fact, after the beginning of the document --- because some instructions of
-% \pkg{siunitx} are executed in a |\AtBeginDocument|). That's why this
-% extraction will be done only at the first utilisation of an environment of
-% \pkg{nicematrix} with the command |\@@_adapt_S_column:|.
+% and, in fact, after the beginning of the document --- because some
+% instructions of \pkg{siunitx} are executed in a |\AtBeginDocument|). That's
+% why this extraction will be done only at the first utilisation of an
+% environment of \pkg{nicematrix} with the command |\@@_adapt_S_column:|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_set_protected:Npn \@@_adapt_S_column:
{
% \end{macrocode}
% In the preamble of the LaTeX document, the boolean |\c_@@_siunitx_loaded_bool|
-% won't be known. That's why we test the existence of |\c_@@_siunitx_loaded_bool|
-% and not its value.\footnote{Indeed, \pkg{nicematrix} may be used
-% in the preamble of the LaTeX document. For example, in this document, we compose a
-% matrix in the box |\ExampleOne| before loading \pkg{arydshln} (because
-% \pkg{arydshln} is not totally compatible with \pkg{nicematrix}).}
+% won't be known. That's why we test the existence of
+% |\c_@@_siunitx_loaded_bool| and not its value.\footnote{Indeed,
+% \pkg{nicematrix} may be used in the preamble of the LaTeX document. For
+% example, in this document, we compose a matrix in the box |\ExampleOne| before
+% loading \pkg{arydshln} (because \pkg{arydshln} is not totally compatible with
+% \pkg{nicematrix}).}
% \begin{macrocode}
\bool_if:NT \c_@@_siunitx_loaded_bool
{
@@ -2736,8 +2757,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
\tl_new:N \c_@@_table_print_tl
\tl_gset:Nx \c_@@_table_print_tl { \tl_item:Nn \g_tmpa_tl { -1 } }
% \end{macrocode}
-% The token lists |\c_@@_table_collect_begin_tl| and |\c_@@_table_print_tl| contain
-% now the two commands of \pkg{siunitx}.
+% The token lists |\c_@@_table_collect_begin_tl| and |\c_@@_table_print_tl|
+% contain now the two commands of \pkg{siunitx}.
%
% \smallskip
% If the adaptation has been done, the command |\@@_adapt_S_column:| becomes
@@ -3466,7 +3487,6 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_pre_array:
{
- \tl_clear:N \g_@@_code_after_tl
% \end{macrocode}
% If the option |small| is used, we have to do some tuning. In particular, we
% change the value of |\arraystretch| (this parameter is used in the
@@ -3494,7 +3514,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \bigskip
% The environment |{array}| uses internally the command |\ialign|. We change the
% definition of |\ialign| for several reasons. In particular, |\ialign| sets
-% |\everycr| to |{ }| and we \emph{need} to have to change the value of |\everycr|.
+% |\everycr| to |{ }| and we \emph{need} to have to change the value of
+% |\everycr|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_set:Npn \ialign
{
@@ -3536,9 +3557,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{macrocode}
% After its first utilisation, the definition of |\ialign| will revert
% automatically to its default definition. With this programmation, we will
-% have, in the cells of the array, a clean version of |\ialign|.\footnote{The user will
-% probably not employ directly |\ialign| in the array... but more likely
-% environments that utilize |\ialign| internally (e.g.: |{substack}|).}
+% have, in the cells of the array, a clean version of |\ialign|.\footnote{The
+% user will probably not employ directly |\ialign| in the array... but more
+% likely environments that utilize |\ialign| internally (e.g.: |{substack}|).}
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_set:Npn \ialign
{
@@ -3622,7 +3643,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{macrocode}
% We nullify the definitions of the column types |w| and |W| before their
% redefinition because we want to avoid a warning in the log file for a
-% redefinition of a column type. We must put |\relax| and not |\prg_do_nothing:|.
+% redefinition of a column type. We must put |\relax| and not
+% |\prg_do_nothing:|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_set_eq:NN \NC@find@w \relax
\cs_set_eq:NN \NC@find@W \relax
@@ -3676,8 +3698,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
\int_gset_eq:NN \g_@@_last_vdotted_col_int \g_@@_col_int
\tl_gput_right:Nx \g_@@_code_after_tl
% \end{macrocode}
-% The command |\@@_vdottedline:n| is protected, and, therefore, won't be expanded
-% before writing on |\g_@@_code_after_tl|.
+% The command |\@@_vdottedline:n| is protected, and, therefore, won't be
+% expanded before writing on |\g_@@_code_after_tl|.
% \begin{macrocode}
{ \@@_vdottedline:n { \int_use:N \g_@@_col_int } }
}
@@ -3785,7 +3807,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% The code in |\@@_pre_array:| is common to |{NiceArrayWithDelims}| and |{NiceMatrix}|.
+% The code in |\@@_pre_array:| is common to |{NiceArrayWithDelims}| and
+% |{NiceMatrix}|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_pre_array:
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -3825,8 +3848,7 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \medskip
% The array will be composed in a box (named |\l_@@_the_array_box|) because we
-% have to do manipulations concerning the potential exterior rows (such
-% construction in a box is not possible for |{NiceMatrix}|).
+% have to do manipulations concerning the potential exterior rows.
% \begin{macrocode}
\box_clear_new:N \l_@@_the_array_box
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -3855,8 +3877,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Here is the beginning of the box which will contain the array. The
-% |\hbox_set_end:| corresponding to this |\hbox_set:Nw| will be in the second part of
-% the environment (and the closing |\c_math_toggle_token| also).
+% |\hbox_set_end:| corresponding to this |\hbox_set:Nw| will be in the second
+% part of the environment (and the closing |\c_math_toggle_token| also).
% \begin{macrocode}
\hbox_set:Nw \l_@@_the_array_box
\skip_horizontal:n \l_@@_left_margin_dim
@@ -3875,9 +3897,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% the columns must have the same width (if the user has used the option
% |columns-width| or the option |auto-column-width| of the environment
% |{NiceMatrixBlock}|), we add a row in the array to fix the width of the
-% columns and construct the ``|col|'' nodes |nm-|\textsl{a}|-col-|\textsl{j} (these
-% nodes will be used by the horizontal open dotted lines and by the potential
-% commands |\@@_vdottedline:n|).
+% columns and construct the ``|col|'' nodes |nm-|\textsl{a}|-col-|\textsl{j}
+% (these nodes will be used by the horizontal open dotted lines and by the
+% potential commands |\@@_vdottedline:n|).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
{
@@ -3929,7 +3951,7 @@ c & c & b & a & e
{
&
\omit
-% \end{marocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
% The incrementation of the counter |\g_tmpa_int| must be done after the |\omit|
% of the cell.
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -4006,8 +4028,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \bigskip
% Now, we begin the real construction in the output flow of TeX. First, we take
% into account a potential ``first column'' (we remind that this ``first
-% column'' has been constructed in an overlapping position and that we have computed
-% its width in |\g_@@_width_first_col_dim|: see p.~\pageref{overlap-left}).
+% column'' has been constructed in an overlapping position and that we have
+% computed its width in |\g_@@_width_first_col_dim|: see
+% p.~\pageref{overlap-left}).
% \begin{macrocode}
\int_compare:nNnT \l_@@_first_col_int = \c_zero_int
{
@@ -4028,7 +4051,7 @@ c & c & b & a & e
\str_if_eq:VnTF \l_@@_pos_env_str { t }
{
\box_move_up:nn
- { \l_tmpa_dim - \g_@@_ht_row_zero_dim + \g_@@_ht_row_one_dim }
+ { \l_tmpa_dim - \g_@@_ht_row_zero_dim + \g_@@_ht_row_one_dim }
}
}
{
@@ -4098,7 +4121,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
%
% \interitem
-% Here is the preamble for the ``first column'' (if the user uses the key |first-col|)
+% Here is the preamble for the ``first column'' (if the user uses the key
+% |first-col|)
% \begin{macrocode}
\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_preamble_first_col_tl
{
@@ -4173,7 +4197,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{macrocode}
%
%
-% Here is the preamble for the ``last column'' (if the user uses the key |last-col|).
+% Here is the preamble for the ``last column'' (if the user uses the key
+% |last-col|).
% \begin{macrocode}
\tl_const:Nn \c_@@_preamble_last_col_tl
{
@@ -4258,7 +4283,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \interitem
% The environment |{NiceArray}| is constructed upon the environment
% |{NiceArrayWithDelims}| but, in fact, there is a flag |\l_@@_NiceArray_bool|.
-% In |{NiceArrayWithDelims}|, some special code will be executed if this flag is raised.
+% In |{NiceArrayWithDelims}|, some special code will be executed if this flag is
+% raised.
% \begin{macrocode}
\NewDocumentEnvironment { NiceArray } { }
{
@@ -4377,9 +4403,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \bigskip
% \subsection{How to know whether a cell is ``empty''}
%
-% The conditionnal |\@@_if_not_empty_cell:nnT| tests whether a cell is empty. The
-% first two arguments must be LaTeX3 counters for the row and the column of the
-% considered cell.
+% The conditionnal |\@@_if_not_empty_cell:nnT| tests whether a cell is empty.
+% The first two arguments must be LaTeX3 counters for the row and the column of
+% the considered cell.
% \begin{macrocode}
\prg_set_conditional:Npnn \@@_if_not_empty_cell:nn #1 #2 { T , TF }
{
@@ -4387,11 +4413,12 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% First, we want to test whether the cell is in the virtual sequence of
% ``non-empty'' cells. There are several important remarks:
% \begin{itemize}
-% \item we don't use a |expl3| sequence for efficiency ;
+% \item we don't use a |expl3| sequence for efficiency;
% \item the ``non-empty'' cells in this sequence are not, in fact, all the
% non-empty cells of the array: on the contrary they are only cells declared
% as non-empty for a special reason (as of now, there are only cells which are
-% on a dotted line which is already drawn or which will be drawn ``just after'') ;
+% on a dotted line which is already drawn or which will be drawn ``just
+% after'');
% \item the flag |\l_tmpa_bool| will be raised when the cell is actually on
% this virtual sequence.
% \end{itemize}
@@ -4673,8 +4700,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% coordinates of one extremity of the line;
% \item |\l_@@_final_i_int| and |\l_@@_final_j_int| which are the coordinates of
% the other extremity of the line;
-% \item |\l_@@_initial_open_bool| and |\l_@@_final_open_bool| to indicate whether
-% the extremities are open or not.
+% \item |\l_@@_initial_open_bool| and |\l_@@_final_open_bool| to indicate
+% whether the extremities are open or not.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -5219,10 +5246,12 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \bigskip
% \subsection{The actual instructions for drawing the dotted line with Tikz}
%
-% The command |\@@_draw_tikz_line:| draws the line using four implicit arguments:
+% The command |\@@_draw_tikz_line:| draws the line using four implicit
+% arguments:
%
-% \quad |\g_@@_x_initial_dim|, |\g_@@_y_initial_dim|, |\g_@@_x_final_dim| and |\g_@@_y_final_dim|.
-% These variables are global for technical reasons: their first affectation was in an instruction |\tikz|.
+% \quad |\g_@@_x_initial_dim|, |\g_@@_y_initial_dim|, |\g_@@_x_final_dim| and
+% |\g_@@_y_final_dim|. These variables are global for technical reasons: their
+% first affectation was in an instruction |\tikz|.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Nn \@@_draw_tikz_line:
@@ -5578,21 +5607,30 @@ c & c & b & a & e
\dim_zero_new:N \g_@@_y_final_dim
\bool_set_false:N \l_@@_initial_open_bool
\bool_set_false:N \l_@@_final_open_bool
- \begin { tikzpicture }
- \path~(#1)~--~(#2)~node[at~start]~(i)~{}~node[at~end]~(f)~{} ;
- \tikz@parse@node \pgfutil@firstofone ( i )
- \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_x_initial_dim \pgf@x
- \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_y_initial_dim \pgf@y
- \tikz@parse@node \pgfutil@firstofone ( f )
- \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_x_final_dim \pgf@x
- \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_y_final_dim \pgf@y
- \end { tikzpicture }
- \@@_draw_tikz_line:
+ \bool_if:nTF
+ {
+ \cs_if_exist_p:c { pgf@sh@ns@nm - \int_use:N \g_@@_env_int - #1 }
+ &&
+ \cs_if_exist_p:c { pgf@sh@ns@nm - \int_use:N \g_@@_env_int - #2 }
+ }
+ {
+ \begin { tikzpicture }
+ \path~(#1)~--~(#2)~node[at~start]~(i)~{}~node[at~end]~(f)~{} ;
+ \tikz@parse@node \pgfutil@firstofone ( i )
+ \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_x_initial_dim \pgf@x
+ \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_y_initial_dim \pgf@y
+ \tikz@parse@node \pgfutil@firstofone ( f )
+ \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_x_final_dim \pgf@x
+ \dim_gset:Nn \g_@@_y_final_dim \pgf@y
+ \end { tikzpicture }
+ \@@_draw_tikz_line:
+ }
+ { \@@_error:nnn { unknown~cell~for~line~in~code-after } { #1 } { #2 } }
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The commands |\Ldots|, |\Cdots|, |\Vdots|, |\Ddots|, and |\Iddots| don't use
-% this command because they have to do other settings (for example, the diagonal
+% this command because they have to do other settings (for example, the diagonal
% lines must be parallelized).
%
% \bigskip
@@ -5608,20 +5646,16 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% We want the horizontal lines at the same position\footnote{In fact, almost the
% same position because of the width of the line: the width of a dotted line is
% not the same as the width of a line created by |\hline|.} as the line created
-% by |\hline| (or |\hdashline| of \pkg{arydshln}). To this end, we construct a
-% ``false row'' and, in this row, we create a Tikz node (|\coordinate|) that
-% will be used to have the $y$-value of the line.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\cs_generate_variant:Nn \dim_set:Nn { N v }
-% \end{macrocode}
+% by |\hline| (or |\hdashline| of \pkg{arydshln}). That's why we use a
+% |\noalign| to insert a box with a |\dotfill|.
%
%
+%
% \medskip
-% Some extensions, like the extension \pkg{doc}, do a redefinition of the command
-% |\dotfill| of LaTeX. That's why we define a command |\@@_dotfill:| as we wish.
-% We test whether we are in draft mode because, in this case, we don't draw the
-% dotted lines.
+% Some extensions, like the extension \pkg{doc}, do a redefinition of the
+% command |\dotfill| of LaTeX. That's why we define a command |\@@_dotfill:| as
+% we wish. We test whether we are in draft mode because, in this case, we don't
+% draw the dotted lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\bool_if:NTF \c_@@_draft_bool
{ \cs_set_eq:NN \@@_dotfill: \prg_do_nothing: }
@@ -5646,7 +5680,6 @@ c & c & b & a & e
\c_math_toggle_token
}
\hfill
- \skip_horizontal:n \c_zero_dim
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -5659,10 +5692,19 @@ c & c & b & a & e
{
\bool_gset_true:N \g_@@_extra_nodes_bool
\cs_if_exist:cTF { @@_width_ \int_use:N \g_@@_env_int }
- { \dim_set:Nv \l_tmpa_dim { @@_width_ \int_use:N \g_@@_env_int } }
+ { \dim_set_eq:Nc \l_tmpa_dim { @@_width_ \int_use:N \g_@@_env_int } }
{ \dim_set:Nn \l_tmpa_dim { 5 mm } }
\hbox_overlap_right:n
- {
+ {
+ \bool_if:nT
+ {
+ \l_@@_NiceArray_bool
+ &&
+ ! \l_@@_exterior_arraycolsep_bool
+ &&
+ \int_compare_p:nNn \l_@@_first_col_int > \c_zero_int
+ }
+ { \skip_horizontal:n { - \arraycolsep } }
\hbox_to_wd:nn
{
\l_tmpa_dim + 2 \arraycolsep
@@ -5695,7 +5737,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
\bool_set_true:N \l_@@_initial_open_bool
\bool_set_true:N \l_@@_final_open_bool
% \end{macrocode}
-% In order to have the coordinates of the line to draw, we use the ``large nodes''.
+% In order to have the coordinates of the line to draw, we use the ``large
+% nodes''.
% \begin{macrocode}
\begin { tikzpicture } [ remember~picture ]
\tikz@parse@node\pgfutil@firstofone
@@ -5769,8 +5812,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% preamble.
%
% Here is the definition of |\@@_vline:|. This definition \emph{must} be
-% protected because you don't want that macro expanded during the construction of
-% the preamble (the tests must be effective in each row and not once when the
+% protected because you don't want that macro expanded during the construction
+% of the preamble (the tests must be effective in each row and not once when the
% preamble is constructed).
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_vline:
@@ -5999,8 +6042,9 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \bigskip
% For ``large nodes'', the exterior rows and columns don't interfer.
-% That's why the loop over the rows will start at 1 and the loop over the columns
-% will stop at $|\g_@@_col_int|$ (and not |\g_@@_col_total_int|). Idem for the rows.
+% That's why the loop over the rows will start at 1 and the loop over the
+% columns will stop at $|\g_@@_col_int|$ (and not |\g_@@_col_total_int|). Idem
+% for the rows.
% \begin{macrocode}
\int_set:Nn \l_@@_first_row_int 1
\int_set:Nn \l_@@_first_col_int 1
@@ -6189,11 +6233,11 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% has no direct link with the environment |{NiceMatrixBlock}|.
%
% The following command will be linked to |\Block| in the environments of
-% \pkg{nicematrix}. We define it with |\NewExpandableDocumentCommand| of \pkg{xparse}
-% because it has an optionnal argument between |<| and |>| (for TeX instructions
-% put before the math mode of the label) and because it must be expandable since
-% it reduces (in the case of a block of only one row) to a command
-% |\multicolumn|.
+% \pkg{nicematrix}. We define it with |\NewExpandableDocumentCommand| of
+% \pkg{xparse} because it has an optionnal argument between |<| and |>| (for TeX
+% instructions put before the math mode of the label) and because it must be
+% expandable since it reduces (in the case of a block of only one row) to a
+% command |\multicolumn|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\NewExpandableDocumentCommand \@@_Block: { m D < > { } m }
{
@@ -6202,8 +6246,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \medskip
-% The first argument of |\@@_Block:| (which is required) has a special syntax. It
-% must be of the form $i$|-|$j$ where $i$ and $j$ are the size (in rows and
+% The first argument of |\@@_Block:| (which is required) has a special syntax.
+% It must be of the form $i$|-|$j$ where $i$ and $j$ are the size (in rows and
% columns) of the block.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new:Npn \@@_Block_i #1-#2 \q_stop
@@ -6238,7 +6282,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \medskip
-% The command |\@@_Block_iii:nnnn| is for the case of a block of $n$~rows with $n>1$.
+% The command |\@@_Block_iii:nnnn| is for the case of a block of $n$~rows with
+% $n>1$.
% \begin{macrocode}
\cs_new_protected:Npn \@@_Block_iii:nnnn #1 #2 #3 #4
{
@@ -6264,8 +6309,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \medskip
% The command |\@@_gobble_ampersands:n| will gobble $n$ ampersands (and also the
-% spaces) where $n$ is the argument of the command. This command is fully expandable
-% and we need this feature.
+% spaces) where $n$ is the argument of the command. This command is fully
+% expandable and we need this feature.
% \begin{macrocode}
\group_begin:
\char_set_catcode_letter:N \&
@@ -6362,6 +6407,17 @@ c & c & b & a & e
%
% \subsection{Error messages of the package}
%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@@_msg_new:nn { unknown~cell~for~line~in~code-after }
+ {
+ Your~command~\token_to_str:N\line\{#1\}\{#2\}~in~the~'code-after'~
+ can't~be~executed~because~a~Tikz~node~doesn't~exist.\\
+ If~you~go~on~this~command~will~be~ignored.
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_msg_new:nn { last-col~non~empty~for~NiceArray }
{
@@ -6420,8 +6476,7 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% \begin{macrocode}
\@@_msg_new:nn { Yet~in~env }
{
- Environments~\{NiceArray\}~(or~\{NiceMatrix\},~etc.)~can't~be~
- nested.\\
+ Environments~\{NiceArray\}~(or~\{NiceMatrix\},~etc.)~can't~be~nested.\\
This~error~is~fatal.
}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -6902,7 +6957,8 @@ c & c & b & a & e
% Following a discussion on TeX StackExchange\footnote{cf.
% |tex.stackexchange.com/questions/510841/nicematrix-and-tikz-external-optimize|},
% optimization of Tikz externalization is disabled in the environments of
-% \pkg{nicematrix} when the class \cls{standalone} or the package \pkg{standalone} is used.
+% \pkg{nicematrix} when the class \cls{standalone} or the package
+% \pkg{standalone} is used.
%
%
%
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf
index 74ad63b6d3..1fd19c09cc 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README
index 5c33f5ca6c..5cdaaaffdb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/README
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-XSIM 2019/10/06 v0.13
+XSIM 2019/10/13 v0.14
eXercise Sheets IMproved
@@ -85,6 +85,7 @@ The xsim package consists of the example files:
xsim.texsx-395273.tex, xsim.texsx-395273.pdf
xsim.texwelt-6698.tex, xsim.texwelt-6698.pdf
xsim.texwelt-15093.tex, xsim.texwelt-15093.pdf
+ xsim.texwelt-23968.tex, xsim.texwelt-23968.pdf
xsim.golatex-16824.tex, xsim.golatex-16824.pdf
xsim.golatex-18844.tex, xsim.golatex-18844.pdf
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex
index 02fb1444f7..2a7add33de 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.definitions.code.tex
@@ -42,6 +42,11 @@
\DeclareExerciseParameter* {solution-counter}
\DeclareExerciseParameter* {number}
+% these are additional - but are used in the `default' environment
+% template:
+\DeclareExerciseParameter {exercise-heading}
+\DeclareExerciseParameter {solution-heading}
+
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
% not exactly a user choice, must be present at various places:
@@ -63,7 +68,9 @@
\DeclareExerciseProperty {sectioning}
% those are additional and wouldn't *need* to be present except for
-% pre-defined templates which make use of them:
+% pre-defined templates which make use of them (the page and page-value
+% property actually needs to be defined for xsim to be able to save the
+% corresponding values):
\DeclareExerciseProperty {subtitle}
\DeclareExerciseProperty {points}
\DeclareExerciseProperty {bonus-points}
@@ -166,23 +173,25 @@
solution-name = \XSIMtranslate {solution} ,
solutions-name = \XSIMtranslate {solutions} ,
exercise-template = default ,
- solution-template = default
+ solution-template = default ,
+ exercise-heading = \subsection* ,
+ solution-heading = \subsection*
}
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
\DeclareExerciseEnvironmentTemplate {default}
{
- \subsection*
- {
- \XSIMmixedcase { \GetExerciseName } \nobreakspace
- \GetExerciseProperty {counter}
- \IfInsideSolutionF
- {
- \IfExercisePropertySetT {subtitle}
- { ~ { \normalfont \itshape \GetExerciseProperty {subtitle} } }
- }
- }
+ \GetExerciseHeadingF { \subsection* }
+ {
+ \XSIMmixedcase { \GetExerciseName } \nobreakspace
+ \GetExerciseProperty {counter}
+ \IfInsideSolutionF
+ {
+ \IfExercisePropertySetT {subtitle}
+ { ~ { \normalfont \itshape \GetExerciseProperty {subtitle} } }
+ }
+ }
\GetExercisePropertyT {points}
{
\marginpar
@@ -195,7 +204,7 @@
}
}
}
- {}
+ { \par }
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex
index b9235ba555..2aacf63f51 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.environments.code.tex
@@ -350,9 +350,9 @@
\xsim_step_exercise_counter:nn {#1} {#2}
\xsim_set_properties:nnx {#1} {#2}
{
- page-value = \arabic{page} ,
+ page-value = \the\value{page} ,
page = \thepage ,
- section-value = \arabic{section} ,
+ section-value = \the\value{section} ,
section = \thesection
}
}
@@ -360,7 +360,7 @@
{
\xsim_set_properties:nnx {#1} {#2}
{
- chapter-value = \arabic{chapter} ,
+ chapter-value = \the\value{chapter} ,
chapter = \thechapter
}
}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex
index 98cebe3eb3..0de63e0460 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.exercises.code.tex
@@ -364,7 +364,11 @@
\xsim_get_parameter:nn {#1} {exercise-env} / name
.code:n = \xsim_set_parameter:nnn {#1} {exercise-name} {####1} ,
\xsim_get_parameter:nn {#1} {solution-env} / name
- .code:n = \xsim_set_parameter:nnn {#1} {solution-name} {####1}
+ .code:n = \xsim_set_parameter:nnn {#1} {solution-name} {####1} ,
+ \xsim_get_parameter:nn {#1} {exercise-env} / heading
+ .code:n = \xsim_set_parameter:nnn {#1} {exercise-heading} {####1} ,
+ \xsim_get_parameter:nn {#1} {solution-env} / heading
+ .code:n = \xsim_set_parameter:nnn {#1} {solution-heading} {####1}
}
\xsim_new_environment:nn {#1} {exercise}
\xsim_new_environment:nn {#1} {solution}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex
index b8798e9c47..3331f6278a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.interface.code.tex
@@ -256,6 +256,21 @@
{ \GetExerciseParameter {exercise-name} }
}
+\NewExpandableDocumentCommand \GetExerciseHeadingF {m}
+ {
+ \IfInsideSolutionTF
+ {
+ \IfExerciseParameterSetTF {solution-heading}
+ { \GetExerciseParameter {solution-heading} }
+ {#1}
+ }
+ {
+ \IfExerciseParameterSetTF {exercise-heading}
+ { \GetExerciseParameter {exercise-heading} }
+ {#1}
+ }
+ }
+
\NewDocumentCommand \GetExerciseBody {m}
{ \xsim_input:oon { \ExerciseType } { \ExerciseID } {#1} }
@@ -632,7 +647,7 @@
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-\NewDocumentCommand \xsimsetup {m}
+\NewDocumentCommand \xsimsetup {+m}
{ \xsim_setup:n {#1} }
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex
index 3d94ca4b61..3b874dbad0 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.modules.code.tex
@@ -204,11 +204,17 @@
\IfBooleanT {#1} { \ExplSyntaxOn }
}
-\cs_new_protected:Npn \xsim_style_options:nn #1#2
- { \keys_define:nn {xsim/#1} {#2} }
+% \cs_new_protected:Npn \xsim_style_options:nn #1#2
+% { \keys_define:nn {xsim/#1} {#2} }
-\NewDocumentCommand \loadxsimstyle {m}
+\cs_new_protected:Npn \xsim_load_style:n #1
{ \clist_map_inline:nn {#1} { \xsim_load_module:n {style.##1} } }
+\keys_define:nn {xsim}
+ { load-style .code:n = \xsim_load_style:n {#1} }
+
+\NewDocumentCommand \loadxsimstyle {m}
+ { \xsim_load_style:n {#1} }
+
% --------------------------------------------------------------------------
\file_input_stop:
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty
index 01dcbd96b3..59992c37d8 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.sty
@@ -29,9 +29,9 @@
\ExplSyntaxOn
-\tl_const:Nn \c_xsim_date_tl {2019/10/06}
+\tl_const:Nn \c_xsim_date_tl {2019/10/13}
\tl_const:Nn \c_xsim_version_major_number_tl {0}
-\tl_const:Nn \c_xsim_version_minor_number_tl {13}
+\tl_const:Nn \c_xsim_version_minor_number_tl {14}
\tl_const:Nn \c_xsim_version_subrelease_tl {}
\tl_const:Nx \c_xsim_version_number_tl
{
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex
index 304316eed0..756a61e838 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/code/xsim.style.layouts.code.tex
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
% If you have any ideas, questions, suggestions or bugs to report, please
% feel free to contact me.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-\xsimstyle{layouts}[2017/09/14]
+\xsimstyle{layouts}[2019/10/12]
\RequirePackage{needspace}
@@ -73,5 +73,20 @@
}
{\endtrivlist}
+\DeclareExerciseEnvironmentTemplate{minimal}
+ {%
+ \textbf{\GetExerciseProperty{counter}}%
+ \IfInsideSolutionF{%
+ \GetExercisePropertyT{points}{ % <<< notice the space
+ (\printgoal{\PropertyValue}%
+ \GetExercisePropertyT{bonus-points}{+\printgoal{\PropertyValue}}%
+ \,\IfExerciseGoalSingularTF{points}
+ {\XSIMtranslate{point}}
+ {\XSIMtranslate{points}})%
+ }%
+ } % <<< notice the space
+ }
+ {}
+
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..726cbcddb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e967f7f826
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+% http://texwelt.de/wissen/fragen/23968/
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{xsim}
+
+% new property:
+\DeclareExerciseProperty{shortsolution}
+
+% new environment:
+\NewDocumentEnvironment{shortsolution}{+b}
+ {\SetExerciseProperty{shortsolution}{#1}}
+ {}
+
+% we'll use a description list for the list of short solutions:
+\newcommand\printshortsolutions{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \ForEachUsedExerciseByType{%
+ \def\ExerciseType{##1}%
+ \def\ExerciseID{##2}%
+ \GetExercisePropertyT{shortsolution}
+ {%
+ \item[Short Solution ##3]
+ ####1%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \end{description}
+}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section{Problems}
+% set shortsolution through option:
+\begin{exercise}[subtitle=Pythagoras]
+ This is the first problem.
+\end{exercise}
+\begin{shortsolution}
+ This is a shortsolution to the first problem.
+\end{shortsolution}
+\begin{solution}
+ This is the solution to the first problem.
+\end{solution}
+
+\begin{exercise}[subtitle=Another Problem]
+ This is the second problem.
+\end{exercise}
+\begin{solution}
+ This is the solution to the second problem.
+\end{solution}
+
+% set shortsolution with custom command:
+\begin{exercise}[subtitle=Yet Another Problem]
+ This is the third problem.
+\end{exercise}
+\begin{shortsolution}
+ This is a shortsolution to the third problem.
+\end{shortsolution}
+\begin{solution}
+ This is the solution to the third problem.
+\end{solution}
+
+\section{Shortsolutions}
+\printshortsolutions
+
+\section{Solutions}
+\printsolutions[headings=false]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls
index 8d28945262..a36d869869 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim-manual.cls
@@ -80,6 +80,9 @@
ExerciseGoalValuePrint ,
ExerciseID ,
ExerciseParameterGet ,
+ ExerciseParameterIfSetF ,
+ ExerciseParameterIfSetT ,
+ ExerciseParameterIfSetTF ,
ExercisePropertyGet ,
ExercisePropertyGetAlias ,
ExercisePropertyGlobalSave ,
@@ -87,6 +90,8 @@
ExercisePropertyIfSetT ,
ExercisePropertyIfSetTF ,
ExercisePropertySave ,
+ ExerciseSetExpandedProperty ,
+ ExerciseSetProperty ,
ExerciseTableType ,
ExerciseTableCode ,
ExerciseType ,
@@ -97,6 +102,7 @@
ForEachUsedExerciseByType ,
ForEachUsedExerciseByID ,
GetExerciseAliasProperty ,
+ GetExerciseHeadingF ,
GetExerciseName ,
GetExerciseParameter ,
GetExerciseProperty ,
@@ -153,6 +159,8 @@
SaveExerciseProperty ,
SetExerciseParameter ,
SetExerciseParameters ,
+ SetExerciseProperty ,
+ SetExpandedExerciseProperty ,
theexercise ,
TotalExerciseGoal ,
TotalExerciseGoals ,
@@ -693,7 +701,7 @@
\cs_new_protected:Npn \xsim@example@links #1 {
\href { \xsim@example@texfile@path {#1} } { \color{white} [\TeX] } ~
- \href { \xsim@example@pdffile@path {#1} } { \color{white} [PDF] }
+ \href { \xsim@example@pdffile@path.#1.pdf } { \color{white} [PDF] }
\tl_if_in:nnT {#1} {texsx}
{
\tl_set:Nx \l_tmpa_tl { \__xsim_get_texsx_number:w #1 \q_stop: }
@@ -765,6 +773,32 @@
\dolistloop\xsim@examplefiles
}
+% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\newcommand*\listlayouts{%
+ \def\do##1{%
+ \begin{cnltxcode}[{title=Layout \enquote{\texttt{##1}}}]
+ \ifcsdef{xsim@layout@extra@##1}
+ {\csuse{xsim@layout@extra@##1}}
+ {}%
+ \xsimsetup{exercise/template={##1}}
+ \let\marginpar\marginnote
+ \XSIMexpandcode{%
+ \printexercise{exercise}{\GetExerciseIdForProperty{ID}{showlayout}}
+ }%
+ \end{cnltxcode}
+ }%
+ \dolistloop\xsim@layouts
+}
+
+\NewDocumentCommand\xsim@add@layout{mo}{%
+ \listadd\xsim@layouts{#1}%
+ \IfNoValueF{#2}{\csdef{xsim@layout@extra@#1}{#2}}%
+}
+
+% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% examples:
+
\xsim@add@example{blanks}{Create blank lines}
\xsim@add@example{boxed-headings}{Put headings in a box}
\xsim@add@example{code-and-output}{Create code examples}
@@ -798,35 +832,20 @@
\xsim@add@example{texsx-395273}{Different aspects of exercises. Highlighted solutions}
\xsim@add@example{texwelt-6698}{Custom list of exercises}
\xsim@add@example{texwelt-15093}{Indicate difficulty level}
+\xsim@add@example{texwelt-23968}{Long and short solutions}
\xsim@add@example{golatex-80640}{Different versions for students and teachers}
\xsim@add@example{golatex-91339}{Another custom layout with rules}
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-\newcommand*\listlayouts{%
- \def\do##1{%
- \begin{cnltxcode}[{title=Layout \enquote{\texttt{##1}}}]
- \ifcsdef{xsim@layout@extra@##1}
- {\csuse{xsim@layout@extra@##1}}
- {}%
- \xsimsetup{exercise/template={##1}}
- \let\marginpar\marginnote
- \XSIMexpandcode{%
- \printexercise{exercise}{\GetExerciseIdForProperty{ID}{showlayout}}
- }%
- \end{cnltxcode}
- }%
- \dolistloop\xsim@layouts
-}
-
-\NewDocumentCommand\xsim@add@layout{mo}{%
- \listadd\xsim@layouts{#1}%
- \IfNoValueF{#2}{\csdef{xsim@layout@extra@#1}{#2}}%
-}
+% layouts:
\xsim@add@layout{default}
\xsim@add@layout{runin}[\renewcommand*\theexercise{\arabic{exercise}.}]
\xsim@add@layout{margin}[\renewcommand*\theexercise{\arabic{exercise}.}]
+\xsim@add@layout{minimal}[\renewcommand*\theexercise{\arabic{exercise}.}]
+
+% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% versions:
\xsim@add@version{0.8} {2017-05-18}
\xsim@add@version{0.8a} {2017-05-19}
@@ -837,6 +856,7 @@
\xsim@add@version{0.11} {2018-02-12}
\xsim@add@version{0.12} {2019-09-26}
\xsim@add@version{0.13} {2019-10-06}
+\xsim@add@version{0.14} {2019-10-13}
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history
index c16a4ef7ec..8be4a79e36 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.history
@@ -115,3 +115,15 @@ HISTORY:
and solution names
- bug fixes (issues 37, 39, 43, 47)
v0.13 2019/10/06 - experimental package option `no-files'
+ v0.14 2019/10/13 - new exercise parameters `exercise-heading' and
+ `solution-heading'
+ - new options `exercise/heading' and `solution/heading' as
+ interface for setting the new parameters
+ - new command \GetExerciseHeadingF for using the new
+ parameters in environment templates
+ - change the environment template `default' to use the new
+ \GetExerciseHeadingF and output a \par at the end
+ - make argument of \xsimsetup long
+ - new template `minimal'
+ - new option `load-style'
+ - new example `texwelt-23968' (long and short solutions)
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas
index 7a7810f84d..cdc4b7d2ba 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim.ideas
@@ -26,7 +26,4 @@ IDEAS:
- a document class `xsim-exam' for creating exams
- a mechanism for providing variants of an exam
-- provide a switch: either write the environments to an external file
- or save it to an auxiliary file ? (not really sure about this one --
- probably not)
- some kind of `subexercise' mechanism
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf
index b6fb1d329c..96ec4408f9 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex
index 9bf643e1ca..33ec88e4a7 100644
--- a/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/xsim/doc/xsim_manual.tex
@@ -144,14 +144,15 @@ or as global option
\begin{sourcecode}
\documentclass[verbose]{article}
\end{sourcecode}
-or via the setup command:
+or via the setup\changedversion{0.13} command as options belonging to the
+\module{package}:
\begin{commands}
\command{xsimsetup}[\marg{options}]
Set up \xsim's package options and all other options described at
other places in the manual.
\end{commands}
-\subsection{Setting Options}
+\subsection{Setting Options}\label{sec:setting-options}
Apart from the package options already described in
section~\vref{sec:package-options} \xsim\ has further options. Those can be
\enquote{toplevel} options or options belonging to a module.
@@ -373,7 +374,8 @@ Declaring a new exercise type will also define a new command:
There are \numberofexercises~exercises and \numberofproblems~problem in this
manual.
\end{example}
-\xsim's pre-defined environment pair has been defined as follows:
+\xsim's pre-defined environment pair\changedversion{0.14} has been defined as
+follows:
\begin{sourcecode}
\DeclareExerciseType{exercise}{
exercise-env = exercise ,
@@ -383,7 +385,9 @@ Declaring a new exercise type will also define a new command:
solution-name = \XSIMtranslate{solution} ,
solutions-name = \XSIMtranslate{solutions} ,
exercise-template = default ,
- solution-template = default
+ solution-template = default ,
+ exercise-heading = \subsection* ,
+ solution-heading = \subsection*
}
\end{sourcecode}
@@ -439,13 +443,26 @@ must) be set. Here is the complete list:
An internal parameter that is used to keep track of the number of
exercises of a type. This parameter cannot be set or changed by the
user.
+ \paraval{exercise-heading}{exercise heading command}
+ The\sinceversion{0.14} command used for typesetting of the heading of
+ exercises of type \meta{type} -- used for typesetting with the command
+ \cs{GetExerciseHeadingF}.
+ \paraval{solution-heading}{solution heading command}
+ The\sinceversion{0.14} command used for typesetting of the heading of
+ solutions of type \meta{type} -- used for typesetting with the command
+ \cs{GetExerciseHeadingF}.
\end{parameters}
It is possible to change some of the parameters after an exercise type has
been defined. Those include \parameter{exercise-name},
\parameter{solution-name}, \parameter{exercise-template}, and
-\parameter{solution-template}:
+\parameter{solution-template}. It is also possible to define new parameters.
\begin{commands}
+ \command{DeclareExerciseParameter}[\sarg\marg{parameter}]
+ Declares the new parameter \meta{parameter}. The optional star declares a
+ fixed parameter which cannot be changed once it is set. \emph{You
+ probably will never need this command. Most tasks can be solved using
+ properties (see section~\vref{sec:exercise-properties}) instead.}
\command{SetExerciseParameter}[\marg{type}\marg{parameter}\marg{value}]
Usable to set a single parameter to a new value.
\command{SetExerciseParameters}[\marg{type}\marg{parameters}]
@@ -483,7 +500,7 @@ Exercise like the \env{exercise} environment and possibly others defined with
user}.
\propval{counter-value}{integer}
Holds the counter value of an exercise (\ie, what you usually know as
- \cs*{arabic}\marg{counter}). \emph{Cannot be set by the user}.
+ \cs*{the}\cs*{value}\marg{counter}). \emph{Cannot be set by the user}.
\propval{subtitle}{text}
Holds the subtitle of an exercise.
\propval{points}{number}
@@ -513,25 +530,32 @@ Exercise like the \env{exercise} environment and possibly others defined with
usually know as \cs*{thepage}).
\propval{page-value}{integer}
Holds the page counter value of an exercise (\ie, what you usually know as
- \cs*{arabic}\Marg{page}).
+ \cs*{the}\cs*{value}\Marg{page}).
\propval{section}{text}
Holds the section counter value representation of an exercise (\ie, what
you usually know as \cs*{thesection}).
\propval{section-value}{integer}
Holds the section counter value of an exercise (\ie, what you usually know
- as \cs*{arabic}\Marg{section}).
+ as \cs*{the}\cs*{value}\Marg{section}).
\propval{chapter}{text}
Holds the chapter counter value representation of an exercise (\ie, what
you usually know as \cs*{thechapter}). \emph{Only if a command
\cs*{chapter} \emph{and} a counter \code{chapter} exist.}
\propval{chapter-value}{integer}
Holds the chapter counter value of an exercise (\ie, what you usually know
- as \cs*{arabic}\Marg{chapter}). \emph{Only if a command \cs*{chapter}
+ as \cs*{the}\cs*{value}\Marg{chapter}). \emph{Only if a command \cs*{chapter}
\emph{and} a counter \code{chapter} exist.}
\propval{sectioning}{section numbers}
Holds five brace groups which in turn hold the section numbers (integers)
of the exercise in the order
\marg{chapter}\marg{section}\marg{subsection}\marg{subsubsection}\marg{paragraph}.
+ \propval{exercise-body}{\TeX code}
+ When\sinceversion{0.13} the package option \option{no-files} is set this
+ property is defined and holds the environment body of an exercise.
+ \propval{solution-body}{\TeX code}
+ When\sinceversion{0.13} the package option \option{no-files} is set this
+ property is defined and holds the environment body of the corresponding
+ solution.
\end{properties}
Some of these \acsp*{prop} are fixed and cannot be set by the user. Those
@@ -851,6 +875,12 @@ the environments' names are the module names for the options (here using the
\keyval{name}{name}\Module{solution}
An interface for \cs{SetExerciseParameter}\Marg{exercise}%
\Marg{solution-name}\marg{name}.
+ \keyval{heading}{heading command}\Module{exercise}
+ An\sinceversion{0.14} interface for \cs{SetExerciseParameter}%
+ \Marg{exercise}\Marg{exercise-heading}\marg{heading command}.
+ \keyval{heading}{heading command}\Module{solution}
+ An\sinceversion{0.14} interface for \cs{SetExerciseParameter}%
+ \Marg{exercise}\Marg{solution-heading}\marg{heading command}.
\keyval{pre-hook}{code}\Module{exercise}\Default
The code for the \emph{pre exercise hook} for exercises of the type
\enquote{exercise}.
@@ -1258,6 +1288,10 @@ yourself in order to achieve certain layouts\footnote{I plan to incorporate
\pkg{exsheets}, see section~\ref{sec:margin-template}. Available through
the style file \code{layouts} (see section~\vref{sec:style-files} for more
information on style files\index{style file}).
+ \item[\code{minimal}] A\sinceversion{0.13a} minimalistic layout, see
+ section~\ref{sec:minimal-template}. Available through the style file
+ \code{layouts} (see section~\vref{sec:style-files} for more information on
+ style files\index{style file}).
\end{description}
\collectexercises{layouts}
@@ -1388,6 +1422,11 @@ yourself in order to achieve certain layouts\footnote{I plan to incorporate
Retrieves the value of the parameter \parameter{exercise-name} for the
current exercise or of the parameter \parameter{solution-name} for the
current solution.
+ \expandable\command{GetExerciseHeadingF}[\marg{false}]
+ \sinceversion{0.14}Retrieves the value of the parameter
+ \parameter{exercise-heading} for the current exercise or of the parameter
+ \parameter{solution-heading} for the current solution. Inserts
+ \meta{false} if the corresponding parameter has not been set.
\expandable\command{ExerciseParameterGet}[\marg{type}\marg{parameter}]
Retrieves the value of the parameter \meta{parameter} for the exercise of type
\meta{type} with id \meta{id}.
@@ -1585,21 +1624,21 @@ section~\vref{sec:example-files}.
\subsubsection{The \code{default} Exercise Template}\label{sec:exercise-templ-default}
-Below the definition of the \code{default} exercise template provided by
-\xsim\ is shown:
+Below the definition\changedversion{0.14} of the \code{default} exercise
+template provided by \xsim\ is shown:
\begin{sourcecode}
\DeclareExerciseEnvironmentTemplate{default}{%
- \subsection*
- {%
- \XSIMmixedcase{\GetExerciseName}\nobreakspace
- \GetExerciseProperty{counter}%
- \IfInsideSolutionF
- {%
- \GetExercisePropertyT{subtitle}
- { {\normalfont\itshape\PropertyValue}}%
- }%
- }
+ \GetExerciseHeadingF{\subsection*}%
+ {%
+ \XSIMmixedcase{\GetExerciseName}\nobreakspace
+ \GetExerciseProperty{counter}%
+ \IfInsideSolutionF
+ {%
+ \GetExercisePropertyT{subtitle}
+ { {\normalfont\itshape\PropertyValue}}%
+ }%
+ }
\GetExercisePropertyT{points}
{%
\marginpar
@@ -1611,7 +1650,7 @@ Below the definition of the \code{default} exercise template provided by
}%
}%
}
- {}
+ {\par}
\end{sourcecode}
\subsubsection{A New Exercise Type Using \pkg*{tcolorbox}}
@@ -1731,6 +1770,26 @@ The following example shows how you could mimick \pkg*{exsheets}'
{\endtrivlist}
\end{sourcecode}
+\subsubsection{A \code{minimal} Template}
+\label{sec:minimal-template}
+
+This shows the implementation of the \code{minimal} template:
+\begin{sourcecode}
+ \DeclareExerciseEnvironmentTemplate{minimal}
+ {%
+ \textbf{\GetExerciseProperty{counter}}%
+ \IfInsideSolutionF{%
+ \GetExercisePropertyT{points}{%
+ \GetExercisePropertyT{bonus-points}{+\printgoal{\PropertyValue}}%
+ \,\IfExerciseGoalSingularTF{points}
+ {\XSIMtranslate{point}}
+ {\XSIMtranslate{points}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }
+ {}
+\end{sourcecode}
+
\subsubsection{The Headings Templates}\label{sec:headings-templates}
\xsim\ defines four heading templates which only differ by which text they
output:
@@ -2134,7 +2193,8 @@ called:
\end{center}
The first command in the file should be \cs{xsimstyle}\Marg{math-exam}. This
file can now be loaded into your document using
-\cs{loadxsimstyle}\Marg{math-exam}:
+\cs{loadxsimstyle}\Marg{math-exam} or by using
+\cs{xsimsetup}\Marg{load-style=math-exam}:
\begin{sourcecode}
\documentclass[DIV=18,parskip=half]{scrartcl}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
@@ -2168,6 +2228,11 @@ The formal description of the commands:
\command{loadxsimstyle}[\marg{csv list of style names}]
Load one or more styles into the document.
\end{commands}
+\begin{options}
+ \keyval{load-style}{csv list of style names}
+ Another\sinceversion{0.14} interface for \cs{loadxsimstyle}\marg{csv list
+ of style names}.
+\end{options}
\begin{bewareofthedog}
At the moment this mechanism offers no advantages over creating a custom
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md
index 64197c3b89..868efe52c2 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/README.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
The amsmath bundle for LaTeX
============================
-Release 2019-10-01
+Release 2019-10-01 patch level 1
Overview
--------
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
index 625df5c960..b436223e2f 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsbsy.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdf
index 5f60be945f..69e05ee5c7 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amscd.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
index bc21594a36..12312f4193 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsgen.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
index fadd3687a2..a221839b30 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath-2018-12-01.sty b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath-2018-12-01.sty
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f684834649
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath-2018-12-01.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,2848 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `amsmath.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% amsmath.dtx
+%%
+%% Copyright 1995, 1999, 2000, 2013 American Mathematical Society.
+%% Copyright 2016 LaTeX3 Project and American Mathematical Society.
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the LaTeX3 project.
+%%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1994/12/01]% LaTeX date must be December 1994 or later
+\ProvidesPackage{amsmath}[2018/12/01 v2.17b AMS math features]
+\edef\@temp{\catcode 96=\number\catcode 96 }
+\catcode\string `\`=12
+\def\do#1{\catcode\number`#1=\number\catcode`#1}
+\edef\@temp{%
+ \noexpand\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \@temp
+ \do\"\do\'\do\(\do\)\do\*\do\+\do\,\do\-\do\.%
+ \do\/\do\<\do\=\do\>\do\[\do\]\do\^\do\_\relax
+ }%
+}
+\@temp
+\def\do#1{\catcode\number`#1=12 }
+\do\"\do\'\do\(\do\)\do\*\do\+\do\,\do\-\do\.
+\do\/\do\<\do\=\do\>\do\[\do\]
+\catcode`\^=7 \catcode`\_=8
+\DeclareOption{intlimits}{\let\ilimits@\displaylimits}
+\DeclareOption{nointlimits}{\let\ilimits@\nolimits}
+\DeclareOption{sumlimits}{\let\slimits@\displaylimits}
+\DeclareOption{nosumlimits}{\let\slimits@\nolimits}
+\DeclareOption{namelimits}{\PassOptionsToPackage{namelimits}{amsopn}}
+\DeclareOption{nonamelimits}{%
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{nonamelimits}{amsopn}}
+\newif\ifctagsplit@
+\newif\iftagsleft@
+\DeclareOption{leqno}{\tagsleft@true}
+\DeclareOption{reqno}{\tagsleft@false}
+\DeclareOption{centertags}{\ctagsplit@true}
+\DeclareOption{tbtags}{\ctagsplit@false}
+\DeclareOption{cmex10}{%
+ \ifnum\cmex@opt=\@ne \def\cmex@opt{0}%
+ \else \def\cmex@opt{10}\fi
+}
+\@ifundefined{cmex@opt}{\def\cmex@opt{7}}{}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newif\if@fleqn
+\newskip\@mathmargin
+\@mathmargin\@centering
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{%
+ \@fleqntrue
+ \@mathmargin = -1sp
+ \let\mathindent=\@mathmargin
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifdim\@mathmargin= -1sp
+ \@mathmargin\leftmargini minus\leftmargini
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\DeclareOption{alignedleftspaceyes}{\def\alignedspace@left{\null\,}}
+\DeclareOption{alignedleftspaceno}{\def\alignedspace@left{\null}}
+\DeclareOption{alignedleftspaceyesifneg}{%
+\def\alignedspace@left{%
+ \edef\@tempa{\expandafter\@car\the\lastskip\@nil}%
+ \if-\@tempa\null\,%
+ \else
+ \edef\@tempa{\expandafter\@car\the\lastkern\@nil}%
+ \if-\@tempa\null\,%
+ \else\null
+ \fi
+ \fi}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{?}{}
+\ExecuteOptions{%
+ nointlimits,sumlimits,namelimits,centertags,alignedleftspaceyesifneg}
+\ProcessOptions\par
+\@ifpackagewith{amsmath}{?}{%
+ \typeout{^^J%
+Documentation for the amsmath package is found in amsldoc.dvi^^J%
+(or .pdf or .tex).^^J%
+^^J%
+See also https://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html.^^J%
+^^J%
+Note: Using the first edition of The LaTeX Companion (1994) without^^J%
+errata as a guide for amsmath use is not recommended.^^J%
+ }%
+}{%
+ \typeout{%
+For additional information on amsmath, use the \lq ?\rq\space option.%
+ }%
+}
+\ifnum\cmex@opt=7 \relax
+ \DeclareFontShape{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}{%
+ <-8>cmex7<8>cmex8<9>cmex9%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmex10%
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname OMX/cmex/m/n/10\endcsname\relax
+\else
+ \ifnum\cmex@opt=\z@ % need to override cmex7 fontdef from amsfonts
+ \begingroup
+ \fontencoding{OMX}\fontfamily{cmex}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname OMX+cmex\endcsname\relax
+ \try@load@fontshape
+ \endgroup
+ \expandafter\let\csname OMX/cmex/m/n/10\endcsname\relax
+ \def\cmex@opt{10}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\RequirePackage{amstext}[1995/01/25]
+\RequirePackage{amsbsy}[1995/01/20]
+\RequirePackage{amsopn}[1995/01/20]
+\@ifpackageloaded{stix}{%
+ \let\ams@newcommand\providecommand
+ \let\ams@renewcommand\providecommand
+ \let\ams@def\providecommand
+ \let\ams@DeclareRobustCommand\providecommand
+}{%
+ \let\ams@newcommand\newcommand
+ \let\ams@renewcommand\renewcommand
+ \let\ams@def\def
+ \let\ams@DeclareRobustCommand\DeclareRobustCommand
+}
+\def\@amsmath@err{\PackageError{amsmath}}
+\providecommand{\AmS}{{\protect\AmSfont
+ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}}
+\newcommand{\AmSfont}{%
+ \usefont{OMS}{cmsy}{\if\@xp\@car\f@series\@nil bb\else m\fi}{n}}
+\ifx\leavevmode@ifvmode\@undefined % kernel is < 2018/12
+\def\@mathmeasure#1#2#3{\setbox#1\hbox{\frozen@everymath\@emptytoks
+ \m@th$#2#3$}}
+\else
+\def\@mathmeasure#1#2#3{\setbox#1\hbox{%
+ \m@th$#2#3$}}
+\fi
+\@ifundefined{inf@bad}{%
+ \newcount\inf@bad \inf@bad=1000000 \relax
+}{}
+\ifx\leavevmode@ifvmode\@undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\tmspace}[3]{%
+ \ifmmode\mskip#1#2\else\kern#1#3\fi\relax}
+\else
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\tmspace}[3]{%
+ \ifmmode\mskip#1#2\else\leavevmode@ifvmode\kern#1#3\fi\relax}
+\fi
+\renewcommand{\,}{\tmspace+\thinmuskip{.1667em}}
+\let\thinspace\,
+\renewcommand{\!}{\tmspace-\thinmuskip{.1667em}}
+\let\negthinspace\!
+\renewcommand{\:}{\tmspace+\medmuskip{.2222em}}
+\let\medspace\:
+\newcommand{\negmedspace}{\tmspace-\medmuskip{.2222em}}
+\renewcommand{\;}{\tmspace+\thickmuskip{.2777em}}
+\let\thickspace\;
+\newcommand{\negthickspace}{\tmspace-\thickmuskip{.2777em}}
+\newcommand{\mspace}[1]{\mskip#1\relax}
+\def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\delimiter#1\@tempcnta#2\relax\else\@tempcnta\z@\fi
+}
+\@xp\@tempa\vert\@empty\@nil
+\ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
+ \advance\@tempcnta "4000000
+ \xdef\lvert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+ \advance\@tempcnta "1000000
+ \xdef\rvert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+\else
+ \ifx\@@undefined\lvert
+ % Fall back to cmex encoding since we don't know what else to do.
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\lvert}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"6A}{largesymbols}{"0C}
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\rvert}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"6A}{largesymbols}{"0C}
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@xp\@tempa\Vert\@empty\@nil
+\ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
+ \advance\@tempcnta "4000000
+ \xdef\lVert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+ \advance\@tempcnta "1000000
+ \xdef\rVert{\delimiter\number\@tempcnta\space }
+\else
+ \ifx\@@undefined\lVert
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\lVert}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"6B}{largesymbols}{"0D}
+ \DeclareMathDelimiter{\rVert}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"6B}{largesymbols}{"0D}
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@saveprimitive\over\@@over
+\@saveprimitive\atop\@@atop
+\@saveprimitive\above\@@above
+\@saveprimitive\overwithdelims\@@overwithdelims
+\@saveprimitive\atopwithdelims\@@atopwithdelims
+\@saveprimitive\abovewithdelims\@@abovewithdelims
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\primfrac}[1]{%
+ \PackageWarning{amsmath}{%
+Foreign command \@backslashchar#1;\MessageBreak
+\protect\frac\space or \protect\genfrac\space should be used instead%
+\MessageBreak
+ }
+ \global\@xp\let\csname#1\@xp\endcsname\csname @@#1\endcsname
+ \csname#1\endcsname
+}
+\renewcommand{\over}{\primfrac{over}}
+\renewcommand{\atop}{\primfrac{atop}}
+\renewcommand{\above}{\primfrac{above}}
+\renewcommand{\overwithdelims}{\primfrac{overwithdelims}}
+\renewcommand{\atopwithdelims}{\primfrac{atopwithdelims}}
+\renewcommand{\abovewithdelims}{\primfrac{abovewithdelims}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\frac}[2]{{\begingroup#1\endgroup\@@over#2}}
+\newcommand{\dfrac}{\genfrac{}{}{}0}
+\newcommand{\tfrac}{\genfrac{}{}{}1}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\binom}{\genfrac()\z@{}}
+\newcommand{\dbinom}{\genfrac(){0pt}0}
+\newcommand{\tbinom}{\genfrac(){0pt}1}
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+\ifx\XeTeXcharclass\@undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\genfrac}[4]{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1#2}%
+ \edef\@tempb{\@nx\@genfrac\@mathstyle{#4}%
+ \csname @@\ifx @#3@over\else above\fi
+ \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else withdelims\fi\endcsname}
+ \@tempb{#1#2#3}}
+\else
+\def\genfrac@rule#1#2#3#4{%
+\hbox{$\left#1\vcenter{\hrule \@width\z@
+ \@height
+ \ifdim\fontdimen#2#3\tw@=\z@
+ #4\fontdimen6#3\tw@
+ \else
+ \fontdimen#2#3\tw@
+ \fi
+ }\right.$}}
+\def\genfrac@choice#1#2{%
+\ifx @#2@\else
+\ifx c#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+{\delimitershortfall\z@\delimiterfactor\@m
+ \mathsurround\z@\nulldelimiterspace\z@
+\mathchoice
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}{20}\textfont{2.39}}%
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}{21}\textfont{1}}%
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}{21}\scriptfont{1.45}}%
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}{21}\scriptscriptfont{1.35}}%
+}%
+\ifx o#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+\fi
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\genfrac}[6]{{%
+\@mathstyle{#4}%
+\genfrac@choice o{#1}%
+{\begingroup#5\endgroup\ifx @#3@\@@over\else\@@above\fi#3\relax#6}%
+\genfrac@choice c{#2}%
+}}
+\fi
+\else
+\def\genfrac@rule#1#2#3{%
+\hbox{$\left#1\vcenter{\hrule \@width\z@
+ \@height
+ \ifdim\Umathfractiondelsize#2=\z@
+ #3\fontdimen6#3\tw@
+ \else
+ \Umathfractiondelsize#2%
+ \fi
+ }\right.$}}
+\def\genfrac@choice#1#2{%
+\ifx @#2@\else
+\ifx c#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+{\delimitershortfall\z@\delimiterfactor\@m
+ \mathsurround\z@\nulldelimiterspace\z@
+\mathchoice
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}\displaystyle{2.39}}%
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}\textstyle{1}}%
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}\scriptstyle{1.45}}%
+{\genfrac@rule{#2}\scriptscriptstyle{1.35}}%
+}%
+\ifx o#1\kern-\nulldelimiterspace\fi
+\fi
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\genfrac}[6]{{%
+\@mathstyle{#4}%
+\genfrac@choice o{#1}%
+{\begingroup#5\endgroup\ifx @#3@\@@over\else\@@above\fi#3\relax#6}%
+\genfrac@choice c{#2}%
+}}
+\fi
+\def\@genfrac#1#2#3#4#5{{#1{\begingroup#4\endgroup#2#3\relax#5}}}
+\def\@mathstyle#1{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1\@empty\relax
+ \else\ifcase#1\displaystyle % case 0
+ \or\textstyle\or\scriptstyle\else\scriptscriptstyle\fi\fi}
+\begingroup
+\edef\@tempa{\string\mathchar"}
+\edef\@tempd{\string\Umathchar"}
+\def\@tempb#1"#2\@nil{#1"}
+\edef\@tempc{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning\coprod "\@nil}
+\ifx\@tempc\@tempd\let\@tempc\@tempa\fi
+\ifx\@tempa\@tempc
+ \global\let\coprod@\coprod
+ \gdef\coprod{\DOTSB\coprod@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigvee@\bigvee
+ \gdef\bigvee{\DOTSB\bigvee@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigwedge@\bigwedge
+ \gdef\bigwedge{\DOTSB\bigwedge@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\biguplus@\biguplus
+ \gdef\biguplus{\DOTSB\biguplus@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigcap@\bigcap
+ \gdef\bigcap{\DOTSB\bigcap@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigcup@\bigcup
+ \gdef\bigcup{\DOTSB\bigcup@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\prod@\prod
+ \gdef\prod{\DOTSB\prod@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\sum@\sum
+ \gdef\sum{\DOTSB\sum@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigotimes@\bigotimes
+ \gdef\bigotimes{\DOTSB\bigotimes@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigoplus@\bigoplus
+ \gdef\bigoplus{\DOTSB\bigoplus@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigodot@\bigodot
+ \gdef\bigodot{\DOTSB\bigodot@\slimits@}
+ \global\let\bigsqcup@\bigsqcup
+ \gdef\bigsqcup{\DOTSB\bigsqcup@\slimits@}
+\fi
+\endgroup
+\newcommand{\leftroot}{\@amsmath@err{\Invalid@@\leftroot}\@eha}
+\newcommand{\uproot}{\@amsmath@err{\Invalid@@\uproot}\@eha}
+\newcount\uproot@
+\newcount\leftroot@
+\renewcommand{\root}{\relaxnext@
+ \DN@{\ifx\@let@token\uproot\let\next@\nextii@\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\leftroot\let\next@\nextiii@\else
+ \let\next@\plainroot@\fi\fi\next@}%
+ \def\nextii@\uproot##1{\uproot@##1\relax\FN@\nextiv@}%
+ \def\nextiv@{\ifx\@let@token\@sptoken\DN@. {\FN@\nextv@}\else
+ \DN@.{\FN@\nextv@}\fi\next@.}%
+ \def\nextv@{\ifx\@let@token\leftroot\let\next@\nextvi@\else
+ \let\next@\plainroot@\fi\next@}%
+ \def\nextvi@\leftroot##1{\leftroot@##1\relax\plainroot@}%
+ \def\nextiii@\leftroot##1{\leftroot@##1\relax\FN@\nextvii@}%
+ \def\nextvii@{\ifx\@let@token\@sptoken
+ \DN@. {\FN@\nextviii@}\else
+ \DN@.{\FN@\nextviii@}\fi\next@.}%
+ \def\nextviii@{\ifx\@let@token\uproot\let\next@\nextix@\else
+ \let\next@\plainroot@\fi\next@}%
+ \def\nextix@\uproot##1{\uproot@##1\relax\plainroot@}%
+ \bgroup\uproot@\z@\leftroot@\z@\FN@\next@}
+\def\plainroot@#1\of#2{\setbox\rootbox\hbox{%
+ $\m@th\scriptscriptstyle{#1}$}%
+ \mathchoice{\r@@t\displaystyle{#2}}{\r@@t\textstyle{#2}}
+ {\r@@t\scriptstyle{#2}}{\r@@t\scriptscriptstyle{#2}}\egroup}
+
+\@ifundefined{sqrtsign}{\let\sqrtsign\@@sqrt}{}
+\def\r@@t#1#2{\setboxz@h{$\m@th#1\sqrtsign{#2}$}%
+ \dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@-\dp\z@
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m@th#1\mskip\uproot@ mu$}%
+ \advance\dimen@ by1.667\wd\@ne
+ \mkern-\leftroot@ mu\mkern5mu\raise.6\dimen@\copy\rootbox
+ \mkern-10mu\mkern\leftroot@ mu\boxz@}
+\@ifundefined{varGamma}{%
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varGamma}{\mathord}{letters}{"00}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varDelta}{\mathord}{letters}{"01}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varTheta}{\mathord}{letters}{"02}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varLambda}{\mathord}{letters}{"03}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varXi}{\mathord}{letters}{"04}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varPi}{\mathord}{letters}{"05}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varSigma}{\mathord}{letters}{"06}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varUpsilon}{\mathord}{letters}{"07}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varPhi}{\mathord}{letters}{"08}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varPsi}{\mathord}{letters}{"09}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol{\varOmega}{\mathord}{letters}{"0A}
+}{}
+\@saveprimitive\overline\@@overline
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\overline}[1]{\@@overline{#1}}
+\newcommand{\boxed}[1]{\fbox{\m@th$\displaystyle#1$}}
+\newcommand{\implies}{\DOTSB\;\Longrightarrow\;}
+\newcommand{\impliedby}{\DOTSB\;\Longleftarrow\;}
+\def\And{\DOTSB\;\mathchar"3026 \;}
+\newcommand{\nobreakdash}{\leavevmode
+ \toks@\@emptytoks \def\@tempa##1{\toks@\@xp{\the\toks@-}\FN@\next@}%
+ \DN@{\ifx\@let@token-\@xp\@tempa
+ \else\setboxz@h{\the\toks@\nobreak}\unhbox\z@\fi}%
+ \FN@\next@
+}
+\renewcommand{\colon}{\nobreak\mskip2mu\mathpunct{}\nonscript
+ \mkern-\thinmuskip{:}\mskip6muplus1mu\relax}
+\let\ifgtest@\iffalse % initial value
+\def\gtest@true{\global\let\ifgtest@\iftrue}
+\def\gtest@false{\global\let\ifgtest@\iffalse}
+\let\DOTSI\relax
+\let\DOTSB\relax
+\let\DOTSX\relax
+{\uccode`7=`\\ \uccode`8=`m \uccode`9=`a \uccode`0=`t \uccode`!=`h
+ \uppercase{%
+ \gdef\math@#1#2#3#4#5#6\math@{\gtest@false\ifx 7#1\ifx 8#2%
+ \ifx 9#3\ifx 0#4\ifx !#5\xdef\meaning@{#6}\gtest@true
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}}
+{\uccode`7=`c \uccode`8=`h \uccode`9=`\"
+ \uppercase{\gdef\mathch@#1#2#3#4#5#6\mathch@{\gtest@false
+ \ifx 7#1\ifx 8#2\ifx 9#5\gtest@true\xdef\meaning@{9#6}\fi\fi\fi}}}
+{\uccode`(=`U \uccode`)=`m
+ \uppercase{\gdef\Umathch@#1#2#3#4"#5"#6\Umathch@{\gtest@false
+ \ifx(#2\ifx)#3\gtest@true
+ \ifcase"#5 \or\or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\fi
+ \fi\fi
+ }}}
+\ifx\Umathcharnumdef\@undefined
+\gdef\thecharacter@#1\thecharacter@{}
+\else
+{\uccode`(=`t \uccode`)=`c
+ \uppercase{\gdef\thecharacter@#1#2#3#4#5\thecharacter@{%
+ \ifx(#1\ifx)#4%
+ \@xp\getmathcode@\meaning@\getmathcode@
+ \fi\fi
+}}}
+\def\getmathcode@#1 #2 #3#4\getmathcode@{%
+ \Umathcharnumdef\@tempa\Umathcodenum`#3\relax
+ \edef\meaning@{\meaning\@tempa}%
+ \@xp\Umathch@\meaning@\Umathch@
+}
+\fi
+\newcount\classnum@
+\def\getmathch@#1.#2\getmathch@{\classnum@#1 \divide\classnum@4096
+ \ifcase\number\classnum@\or\or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\or
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}\fi}
+{\uccode`4=`b \uccode`5=`i \uccode`6=`n
+ \uppercase{\gdef\mathbin@#1#2#3{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\mathbin@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let@token\gtest@true\fi}%
+ \gtest@false\DN@##1\mathbin@{}%
+ \ifx 4#1\ifx 5#2\ifx 6#3\DN@{\FN@\nextii@}\fi\fi\fi\next@}}}
+{\uccode`4=`r \uccode`5=`e \uccode`6=`l
+ \uppercase{\gdef\mathrel@#1#2#3{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\mathrel@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let@token\gtest@true\fi}%
+ \gtest@false\DN@##1\mathrel@{}%
+ \ifx 4#1\ifx 5#2\ifx 6#3\DN@{\FN@\nextii@}\fi\fi\fi\next@}}}
+{\uccode`5=`m \uccode`6=`a \uccode`7=`c
+ \uppercase{\gdef\macro@#1#2#3#4\macro@{\gtest@false
+ \ifx 5#1\ifx 6#2\ifx 7#3\gtest@true
+ \xdef\meaning@{\macro@@#4\macro@@}\fi\fi\fi}}}
+\def\macro@@#1->#2\macro@@{#2}
+\newcount\DOTSCASE@
+{\uccode`6=`\\ \uccode`7=`D \uccode`8=`O \uccode`9=`T \uccode`0=`S
+ \uppercase{\gdef\DOTS@#1#2#3#4#5{\gtest@false\DN@##1\DOTS@{}%
+ \ifx 6#1\ifx 7#2\ifx 8#3\ifx 9#4\ifx 0#5\let\next@\DOTS@@
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \next@}}}
+{\uccode`3=`B \uccode`4=`I \uccode`5=`X
+ \uppercase{\gdef\DOTS@@#1{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\DOTS@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let@token\gtest@true\fi}%
+ \DN@{\FN@\nextii@}%
+ \ifx 3#1\global\DOTSCASE@\z@\else
+ \ifx 4#1\global\DOTSCASE@\@ne\else
+ \ifx 5#1\global\DOTSCASE@\tw@\else\DN@##1\DOTS@{}%
+ \fi\fi\fi\next@}}}
+{\uccode`5=`\\ \uccode`6=`n \uccode`7=`o \uccode`8=`t
+ \uppercase{\gdef\not@#1#2#3#4{\relaxnext@
+ \def\nextii@##1\not@{\ifx\@sptoken\@let@token\gtest@true\fi}%
+ \gtest@false\DN@##1\not@{}%
+ \ifx 5#1\ifx 6#2\ifx 7#3\ifx 8#4\DN@{\FN@\nextii@}\fi\fi\fi
+ \fi\next@}}}
+{\uccode`9=`\l %
+ \uppercase{\gdef\striplong@#1#2#3\relax{%
+ \ifx9#2 \@xp\@xp\@xp\zap@to@space\fi}}}
+\def\zap@to@space#1 {}
+\def\keybin@{\gtest@true
+ \ifx\@let@token+\else\ifx\@let@token=\else
+ \ifx\@let@token<\else\ifx\@let@token>\else
+ \ifx\@let@token-\else\ifx\@let@token*\else\ifx\@let@token:\else
+ \gtest@false\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+\@ifundefined{@ldots}{\def\@ldots{\mathellipsis}}{}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\ldots}{%
+ \ifmmode \mathellipsis \else \textellipsis \fi
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dots}{%
+ \ifmmode \@xp\mdots@\else \@xp\textellipsis \fi
+}
+\def\tdots@{\leavevmode\unskip\relaxnext@
+ \DN@{$\m@th\@ldots\,
+ \ifx\@let@token,\,$\else\ifx\@let@token.\,$\else
+ \ifx\@let@token;\,$\else\ifx\@let@token:\,$\else
+ \ifx\@let@token?\,$\else\ifx\@let@token!\,$\else
+ $ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}%
+ \ \FN@\next@}
+\def\mdots@{\FN@\mdots@@}
+\def\mdots@@{\gdef\thedots@{\dotso@}%
+ \ifx\@let@token\boldsymbol
+ \gdef\thedots@\boldsymbol{\boldsymboldots@}%
+ \else
+ \ifx,\@let@token \gdef\thedots@{\dotsc}%
+ \else
+ \ifx\not\@let@token
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else
+ \keybin@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \keybin@ test
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else
+ \xdef\meaning@{\meaning\@let@token. .........}%
+ \xdef\meaning@@{\@xp\striplong@\meaning@\relax\meaning@}%
+ \@xp\math@\meaning@\math@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \mathxxx test
+ \@xp\mathch@\meaning@\mathch@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \mathchar
+ \@xp\getmathch@\meaning@\getmathch@
+ \fi % end if \mathchar
+ \else % \not \mathxxx
+ \@xp\Umathch@\meaning@"0"\Umathch@
+ \ifgtest@ % if \Umathchar
+ \else % else not \Umathcar
+ \@xp\macro@\meaning@@\macro@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro test
+ \@xp\not@\meaning@\not@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro starts \not test
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else% else not \not
+ \@xp\DOTS@\meaning@\DOTS@
+ \ifgtest@ % \if DOTS
+ \ifcase\number\DOTSCASE@ %ifcase dots
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \or\gdef\thedots@{\dotsi}\else
+ \fi % endifcase dots
+ \else % not macro starts \DOTS
+ \@xp\math@\meaning@\math@
+ \ifgtest@ % \if macro starts \mathxxxx
+ \@xp\mathbin@\meaning@\mathbin@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro starts \mathbin
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \else % not macro starting \mathbin
+ \@xp\mathrel@\meaning@\mathrel@
+ \ifgtest@ % if macro starts \mathrel
+ \gdef\thedots@{\dotsb@}%
+ \fi % endif macro starts \mathrel (no else)
+ \fi % endif macro starts \mathbin
+ \fi % endif macro starts with \mathxxx (no else)
+ \fi % endif macro starts \DOTS else
+ \fi % end macro starting \not \ifgtest@ test (no else)
+ \else
+ \@xp\thecharacter@\meaning@\thecharacter@
+ \fi % end macro \ifgtest@ test (no else)
+ \fi % end if \Umathchar test
+ \fi % end \math@ \ifgtest@
+ \fi % end \keybin@ \ifgtest@ test (no else)
+ \fi % end if \not (no else)
+ \fi % end if comma (no else)
+ \fi % end if boldsymbol (no else)
+ \thedots@}
+\def\boldsymboldots@#1{%
+ \bold@true\let\@let@token=#1\let\delayed@=#1\mdots@@
+ \boldsymbol#1\bold@false}
+\ams@def\@cdots{\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}}
+\newcommand{\dotsi}{\!\@cdots}
+\let\dotsb@\@cdots
+\def\rightdelim@{\gtest@true
+ \ifx\@let@token)\else
+ \ifx\@let@token]\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\rbrack\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\}\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\rbrace\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\rangle\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\rceil\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\rfloor\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\rgroup\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\rmoustache\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\right\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\bigr\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\biggr\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\Bigr\else
+ \ifx\@let@token\Biggr\else\gtest@false
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\extra@{%
+ \rightdelim@\ifgtest@
+ \else\ifx\@let@token$\gtest@true
+ \else\xdef\meaning@{\meaning\@let@token..........}%
+ \@xp\macro@\meaning@\macro@\ifgtest@
+ \@xp\DOTS@\meaning@\DOTS@
+ \ifgtest@
+ \ifnum\DOTSCASE@=\tw@\gtest@true\else\gtest@false
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+\newif\ifbold@
+\def\dotso@{\relaxnext@
+ \ifbold@
+ \let\@let@token\delayed@
+ \def\nextii@{\extra@\@ldots\ifgtest@\,\fi}%
+ \else
+ \def\nextii@{\DN@{\extra@\@ldots\ifgtest@\,\fi}\FN@\next@}%
+ \fi
+ \nextii@}
+\def\extrap@#1{%
+ \DN@{#1\,}%
+ \ifx\@let@token,\else
+ \ifx\@let@token;\else
+ \ifx\@let@token.\else\extra@
+ \ifgtest@\else
+ \let\next@#1\fi\fi\fi\fi\next@}
+\ams@DeclareRobustCommand{\cdots}{\DN@{\extrap@\@cdots}\FN@\next@}
+\let\dotsb\cdots
+\let\dotsm\cdots
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dotso}{\relax
+ \ifmmode \DN@{\extrap@\@ldots}%
+ \else \let\next@\tdots@\fi
+ \FN@\next@}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dotsc}{%
+ \DN@{\ifx\@let@token;\@ldots\,%
+ \else \ifx\@let@token.\@ldots\,%
+ \else \extra@\@ldots \ifgtest@\,\fi
+ \fi\fi}%
+ \FN@\next@}
+\renewcommand{\longrightarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\protect\relbar\protect\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\Longrightarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\protect\Relbar\protect\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\longleftarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\leftarrow\protect\joinrel\protect\relbar}
+\renewcommand{\Longleftarrow}{%
+ \DOTSB\Leftarrow\protect\joinrel\protect\Relbar}
+\renewcommand{\longleftrightarrow}{\DOTSB\leftarrow\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\Longleftrightarrow}{\DOTSB\Leftarrow\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\mapsto}{\DOTSB\mapstochar\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\longmapsto}{\DOTSB\mapstochar\longrightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\hookrightarrow}{\DOTSB\lhook\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\renewcommand{\hookleftarrow}{\DOTSB\leftarrow\joinrel\rhook}
+\renewcommand{\iff}{\DOTSB\;\Longleftrightarrow\;}
+\renewcommand{\doteq}{%
+ \DOTSB\mathrel{\mathop{\kern0pt =}\limits^{\textstyle.}}}
+\newif\if@display
+\everydisplay\@xp{\the\everydisplay \@displaytrue}
+\renewcommand{\int}{\DOTSI\intop\ilimits@}
+\renewcommand{\oint}{\DOTSI\ointop\ilimits@}
+\def\intkern@{\mkern-6mu\mathchoice{\mkern-3mu}{}{}{}}
+\def\intdots@{\mathchoice{\@cdots}%
+ {{\cdotp}\mkern1.5mu{\cdotp}\mkern1.5mu{\cdotp}}%
+ {{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}}%
+ {{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}\mkern1mu{\cdotp}}}
+\ams@newcommand{\iint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{2}}
+\ams@newcommand{\iiint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{3}}
+\ams@newcommand{\iiiint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{4}}
+\newcommand{\idotsint}{\DOTSI\protect\MultiIntegral{0}}
+\newcommand{\MultiIntegral}[1]{%
+ \edef\ints@c{\noexpand\intop
+ \ifnum#1=\z@\noexpand\intdots@\else\noexpand\intkern@\fi
+ \ifnum#1>\tw@\noexpand\intop\noexpand\intkern@\fi
+ \ifnum#1>\thr@@\noexpand\intop\noexpand\intkern@\fi
+ \noexpand\intop
+ \noexpand\ilimits@
+ }%
+ \futurelet\@let@token\ints@a
+}
+\def\ints@a{%
+ \ifx\limits\@let@token \ints@b
+ \else \ifx\displaylimits\@let@token \ints@b
+ \else\ifx\ilimits@\displaylimits \ints@b
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ \ints@c
+}
+\def\ints@b{%
+ \mkern-7mu\mathchoice{\mkern-2mu}{}{}{}%
+ \mathop\bgroup
+ \mkern7mu\mathchoice{\mkern2mu}{}{}{}%
+ \let\ilimits@\egroup
+}%
+\newbox\Mathstrutbox@
+\setbox\Mathstrutbox@=\hbox{}
+\def\Mathstrut@{\copy\Mathstrutbox@}
+\ifx\Umathcharnumdef\@undefined
+\def\resetMathstrut@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+ \mathchardef\@tempa\mathcode`\(\relax
+ \def\@tempb##1"##2##3{\the\textfont"##3\char"}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\meaning\@tempa \relax
+ }%
+ \edef\@tempa{%
+ \ht\Mathstrutbox@\the\ht\z@\relax
+ \dp\Mathstrutbox@\the\dp\z@\relax}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup\@tempa
+}
+\else
+\def\resetMathstrut@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \Umathcharnumdef\@tempa\Umathcodenum`\(\relax
+ \def\@tempb##1"##2"##3"##4\relax{%
+ \endgroup
+ \ht\Mathstrutbox@=\fontcharht\textfont"##3 "##4\relax
+ \dp\Mathstrutbox@=\fontchardp\textfont"##3 "##4\relax}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\meaning\@tempa \relax
+}
+\fi
+\addto@hook\every@math@size{\resetMathstrut@}
+\newbox\strutbox@
+\def\strut@{\copy\strutbox@}
+\def\reset@strutbox@{%
+ \global\setbox\strutbox@\hbox{%
+ \lower.5\normallineskiplimit
+ \vbox{\kern-\normallineskiplimit\copy\strutbox}}}
+\addto@hook\every@math@size{\reset@strutbox@}
+\AtBeginDocument{\reset@strutbox@}
+\renewcommand{\big}{\bBigg@\@ne}
+\renewcommand{\Big}{\bBigg@{1.5}}
+\renewcommand{\bigg}{\bBigg@\tw@}
+\renewcommand{\Bigg}{\bBigg@{2.5}}
+\ifx\leavevmode@ifvmode\@undefined
+\def\bBigg@#1#2{%
+ {\@mathmeasure\z@{\nulldelimiterspace\z@}%
+ {\left#2\vcenter to#1\big@size{}\right.}%
+ \box\z@}}
+\else
+\def\bBigg@#1#2{\leavevmode@ifvmode
+ {\@mathmeasure\z@{\nulldelimiterspace\z@}%
+ {\left#2\vcenter to#1\big@size{}\right.}%
+ \box\z@}}
+\fi
+\addto@hook\every@math@size{%
+ \global\big@size 1.2\ht\Mathstrutbox@
+ \global\advance\big@size 1.2\dp\Mathstrutbox@ }
+\newdimen\big@size
+\def\accentclass@{7}
+\def\noaccents@{\def\accentclass@{0}}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OML}{}{\noaccents@}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OMS}{}{\noaccents@}
+\ams@newcommand{\dddot}[1]{%
+ {\mathop{#1}\limits^{\vbox to-1.4\ex@{\kern-\tw@\ex@
+ \hbox{\normalfont ...}\vss}}}}
+\ams@newcommand{\ddddot}[1]{%
+ {\mathop{#1}\limits^{\vbox to-1.4\ex@{\kern-\tw@\ex@
+ \hbox{\normalfont....}\vss}}}}
+\def\set@mathaccent#1#2#3#4{%
+ \xdef#2{\@nx\protect\@nx\mathaccentV
+ {\@xp\@gobble\string#2}\hexnumber@#1#4}%
+}
+\def\@tempa#1{\@xp\@tempb\meaning#1\@nil#1}
+\def\@tempb#1>#2#3 #4\@nil#5{%
+ \@xp\ifx\csname#3\endcsname\mathaccent
+ \@tempc#4?"7777\@nil#5%
+ \else
+ \@xp\ifx\csname#3\endcsname\Umathaccent
+ \@tempd#4\@nil#5%
+ \else
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{amsmath}{%
+ Unable to redefine math accent \string#5}%
+ \fi\fi}
+\def\@tempc#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{%
+ \chardef\@tempd="#3\relax\set@mathaccent\@tempd{#7}{#2}{#4#5}}
+\def\@tempd#1\@nil#2{%
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{amsmath}{%
+ Unable to redefine \string\Umathaccent\space\string#2}%
+}
+\@tempa{\hat}
+\@tempa{\check}
+\@tempa{\tilde}
+\@tempa{\acute}
+\@tempa{\grave}
+\@tempa{\dot}
+\@tempa{\ddot}
+\@tempa{\breve}
+\@tempa{\bar}
+\@tempa{\vec}
+\@ifundefined{mathring}{%
+ \DeclareMathAccent{\mathring}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"17}
+}{%
+ \@tempa{\mathring}
+}
+%%\@tempa\widetilde
+%%\@tempa\widehat
+\newcommand{\acc@check}{}
+\newcommand{\acc@error}{}
+\def\acc@check{\@ifnextchar\@empty\relax\acc@error}
+\def\acc@error{%
+ \@amsmath@err{%
+ Improper argument for math accent:\MessageBreak
+ Extra braces must be added to prevent wrong output%
+ }\@ehc
+}
+\newcount\macc@depth
+\long\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{}
+\def\mathaccentV#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \gdef\macc@tmp{\macc@depth\@ne}%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{%
+ \let\mathaccentV\macc@test
+ \let\use@mathgroup\@gobbletwo \let\select@group\@gobblethree
+ \frozen@everymath{}$#5$%
+ }%
+ \macc@tmp
+ \ifnum\macc@depth=\@ne
+ \global\let\macc@nucleus\@empty
+ \mathaccent"\accentclass@
+ \else
+ \@xp\macc@nested
+ \fi
+ #2#3#4{#5}%
+ \macc@nucleus
+ \else
+ \@xp\nonmatherr@\csname#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+\def\macc@test#1#2#3#4{\xdef\macc@tmp{\macc@tmp\advance\macc@depth\@ne}}
+\def\macc@group{-1}
+\def\macc@nested#1#2#3#4{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\math@bgroup\@empty \let\math@egroup\macc@set@skewchar
+ \mathsurround\z@ \frozen@everymath{\mathgroup\macc@group\relax}%
+ \macc@set@skewchar\relax
+ \let\mathaccentV\macc@nested@a
+ \macc@nested@a\relax#1#2#3{#4}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+\let\macc@palette\mathpalette
+\def\macc@nested@a#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifnum\macc@group=\mathgroup
+ \else \macc@set@skewchar\relax \edef\macc@group{\the\mathgroup}%
+ \fi
+ \mathchardef\macc@code "\accentclass@ #2#3#4\relax
+ \macc@palette\macc@a{#5}%
+}
+\def\macc@set@skewchar#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne \let\@tempa\@ne
+ \else
+ \ifnum\skewchar\textfont\mathgroup=\m@ne \let\@tempa\@ne
+ \else \let\@tempa\mathgroup
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \count@=\skewchar\textfont\@tempa
+ \advance\count@"7100
+ \edef\@tempa{\endgroup
+ \mathchardef\noexpand\macc@skewchar=\number\count@\relax}%
+ \@tempa
+ #1%
+}
+\def\macc@a#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\macc@style#1\relax
+ \def\macc@palette##1{##1\macc@style}%
+ \advance\macc@depth\m@ne
+ \ifnum\macc@depth=\z@
+ \gdef\macc@nucleus{#2}%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{$#1#2\@empty{}\macc@skewchar$}%
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox{$#1#2\@empty\macc@skewchar$}%
+ \dimen@\tw@\wd\tw@ \advance\dimen@-\tw@\wd\z@
+ \xdef\macc@kerna{\the\dimen@\relax}%
+ \setbox4\hbox{$#1#2\acc@check\@empty$}%
+ \global\setbox\@ne\hbox to\wd4{}%
+ \ht\@ne\ht4 \dp\@ne\dp4
+ \xdef\macc@kernb{\the\wd4\relax}%
+ \mathaccent\macc@code{\box\@ne\kern\macc@kerna}%
+ \else
+ \mathaccent\macc@code{\let\macc@adjust\@empty #1#2\@empty}%
+ \macc@adjust
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+\def\macc@adjust{%
+ \dimen@\macc@kerna\advance\dimen@\macc@kernb
+ \kern-\dimen@
+}
+\def\Hat{\hat}
+\def\Check{\check}
+\def\Tilde{\tilde}
+\def\Acute{\acute}
+\def\Grave{\grave}
+\def\Dot{\dot}
+\def\Ddot{\ddot}
+\def\Breve{\breve}
+\def\Bar{\bar}
+\def\Vec{\vec}
+\def\nonmatherr@#1{\@amsmath@err{\protect
+ #1 allowed only in math mode}\@ehd}
+\renewcommand{\bmod}{\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu\mathbin
+ {\operator@font mod}\penalty900
+ \mkern5mu\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}
+\newcommand{\pod}[1]{\allowbreak
+ \if@display\mkern18mu\else\mkern8mu\fi(#1)}
+\renewcommand{\pmod}[1]{\pod{{\operator@font mod}\mkern6mu#1}}
+\newcommand{\mod}[1]{\allowbreak\if@display\mkern18mu
+ \else\mkern12mu\fi{\operator@font mod}\,\,#1}
+\newcommand{\cfrac}[3][c]{{\displaystyle\frac{%
+ \strut\ifx r#1\hfill\fi#2\ifx l#1\hfill\fi}{#3}}%
+ \kern-\nulldelimiterspace}
+\newcommand{\overset}[2]{\binrel@{#2}%
+ \binrel@@{\mathop{\kern\z@#2}\limits^{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\underset}[2]{\binrel@{#2}%
+ \binrel@@{\mathop{\kern\z@#2}\limits_{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\sideset}[3]{%
+ \@mathmeasure\z@\displaystyle{#3}%
+ \global\setbox\@ne\vbox to\ht\z@{}\dp\@ne\dp\z@
+ \setbox\tw@\box\@ne
+ \@mathmeasure4\displaystyle{\copy\tw@#1}%
+ \@mathmeasure6\displaystyle{#3\nolimits#2}%
+ \dimen@-\wd6 \advance\dimen@\wd4 \advance\dimen@\wd\z@
+ \hbox to\dimen@{}\mathop{\kern-\dimen@\box4\box6}%
+}
+\ifx\leavevmode@ifvmode\@undefined
+\renewcommand{\smash}[1][tb]{%
+ \def\mb@t{\ht}\def\mb@b{\dp}\def\mb@tb{\ht\z@\z@\dp}%
+ \edef\finsm@sh{\csname mb@#1\endcsname\z@\z@\box\z@}%
+ \ifmmode \@xp\mathpalette\@xp\mathsm@sh
+ \else \@xp\makesm@sh
+ \fi
+}
+\else
+\renewcommand{\smash}[1][tb]{%
+ \def\mb@t{\ht}\def\mb@b{\dp}\def\mb@tb{\ht\z@\z@\dp}%
+ \edef\finsm@sh{\csname mb@#1\endcsname\z@\z@ \leavevmode@ifvmode\box\z@}%
+ \ifmmode \@xp\mathpalette\@xp\mathsm@sh
+ \else \@xp\makesm@sh
+ \fi
+}
+\fi
+\mathchardef\std@minus\mathcode`\-\relax
+\mathchardef\std@equal\mathcode`\=\relax
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \mathchardef\std@minus\mathcode`\-\relax
+ \mathchardef\std@equal\mathcode`\=\relax
+}
+\ams@def\relbar{\mathrel{\mathpalette\mathsm@sh\std@minus}}
+\ams@def\Relbar{\mathrel\std@equal}
+\def\arrowfill@#1#2#3#4{%
+ $\m@th\thickmuskip0mu\medmuskip\thickmuskip\thinmuskip\thickmuskip
+ \relax#4#1\mkern-7mu%
+ \cleaders\hbox{$#4\mkern-2mu#2\mkern-2mu$}\hfill
+ \mkern-7mu#3$%
+}
+\def\leftarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\leftarrow\relbar\relbar}
+\def\rightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\relbar\relbar\rightarrow}
+\def\leftrightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\leftarrow\relbar\rightarrow}
+\def\Leftarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\Leftarrow\Relbar\Relbar}
+\def\Rightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\Relbar\Relbar\Rightarrow}
+\def\Leftrightarrowfill@{\arrowfill@\Leftarrow\Relbar\Rightarrow}
+\def\overarrow@#1#2#3{\vbox{\ialign{##\crcr#1#2\crcr
+ \noalign{\nointerlineskip}$\m@th\hfil#2#3\hfil$\crcr}}}
+\ams@renewcommand{\overrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\overarrow@\rightarrowfill@}}
+\ams@renewcommand{\overleftarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\overarrow@\leftarrowfill@}}
+\ams@newcommand{\overleftrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\overarrow@\leftrightarrowfill@}}
+\def\underarrow@#1#2#3{%
+ \vtop{\ialign{##\crcr$\m@th\hfil#2#3\hfil$\crcr
+ \noalign{\nointerlineskip\kern1.3\ex@}#1#2\crcr}}}
+\ams@newcommand{\underrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\underarrow@\rightarrowfill@}}
+\ams@newcommand{\underleftarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\underarrow@\leftarrowfill@}}
+\ams@newcommand{\underleftrightarrow}{%
+ \mathpalette{\underarrow@\leftrightarrowfill@}}
+\def\ext@arrow#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+ \mathrel{\mathop{%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{#5\displaystyle}%
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\m@th
+ \hbox{$\scriptstyle\mkern#3mu{#6}\mkern#4mu$}%
+ \hbox{$\scriptstyle\mkern#3mu{#7}\mkern#4mu$}%
+ \copy\z@
+ }%
+ \hbox to\wd\tw@{\unhbox\z@}}%
+ \limits
+ \@ifnotempty{#7}{^{\if0#1\else\mkern#1mu\fi
+ #7\if0#2\else\mkern#2mu\fi}}%
+ \@ifnotempty{#6}{_{\if0#1\else\mkern#1mu\fi
+ #6\if0#2\else\mkern#2mu\fi}}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\xrightarrow}[2][]{\ext@arrow 0359\rightarrowfill@{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\xleftarrow}[2][]{\ext@arrow 3095\leftarrowfill@{#1}{#2}}
+\newenvironment{subarray}[1]{%
+ \vcenter\bgroup
+ \Let@ \restore@math@cr \default@tag
+ \baselineskip\fontdimen10 \scriptfont\tw@
+ \advance\baselineskip\fontdimen12 \scriptfont\tw@
+ \lineskip\thr@@\fontdimen8 \scriptfont\thr@@
+ \lineskiplimit\lineskip
+ \ialign\bgroup\ifx c#1\hfil\fi
+ $\m@th\scriptstyle##$\hfil\crcr
+}{%
+ \crcr\egroup\egroup
+}
+\newcommand{\substack}[1]{\subarray{c}#1\endsubarray}
+\newenvironment{smallmatrix}{\null\,\vcenter\bgroup
+ \Let@\restore@math@cr\default@tag
+ \baselineskip6\ex@ \lineskip1.5\ex@ \lineskiplimit\lineskip
+ \ialign\bgroup\hfil$\m@th\scriptstyle##$\hfil&&\thickspace\hfil
+ $\m@th\scriptstyle##$\hfil\crcr
+}{%
+ \crcr\egroup\egroup\,%
+}
+\renewenvironment{matrix}{%
+ \matrix@check\matrix\env@matrix
+}{%
+ \endarray \hskip -\arraycolsep
+}
+\def\env@matrix{\hskip -\arraycolsep
+ \let\@ifnextchar\new@ifnextchar
+ \array{*\c@MaxMatrixCols c}}
+\newcount\c@MaxMatrixCols \c@MaxMatrixCols=10
+\def\matrix@check#1{%
+ \@xp\ifx\csname\@currenvir\endcsname#1%
+ \else\matrix@error#1%
+ \@xp\@gobble
+ \fi
+}
+\def\matrix@error#1{%
+ \@amsmath@err{%
+Old form `\string#1' should be \string\begin{\@xp\@gobble\string#1}%
+ }{%
+`\string#1{...}' is old Plain-TeX syntax whose use is
+ill-advised in LaTeX.%
+ }%
+}
+\renewenvironment{pmatrix}{%
+ \left(%
+ \matrix@check\pmatrix\env@matrix
+}{
+ \endmatrix\right)%
+}
+\newenvironment{bmatrix}{\left[\env@matrix}{\endmatrix\right]}
+\newenvironment{Bmatrix}{%
+ \left\lbrace\env@matrix
+}{%
+ \endmatrix\right\rbrace
+}
+\newenvironment{vmatrix}{\left\lvert\env@matrix}{\endmatrix\right\rvert}
+\newenvironment{Vmatrix}{\left\lVert\env@matrix}{\endmatrix\right\rVert}
+\let\hdots\@ldots
+\newcommand{\hdotsfor}[1]{%
+ \ifx[#1\@xp\shdots@for\else\hdots@for\@ne{#1}\fi}
+\newmuskip\dotsspace@
+\def\shdots@for#1]{\hdots@for{#1}}
+\def\hdots@for#1#2{\multicolumn{#2}c%
+ {\m@th\dotsspace@1.5mu\mkern-#1\dotsspace@
+ \xleaders\hbox{$\m@th\mkern#1\dotsspace@.\mkern#1\dotsspace@$}%
+ \hfill
+ \mkern-#1\dotsspace@}%
+ }
+\renewenvironment{cases}{%
+ \matrix@check\cases\env@cases
+}{%
+ \endarray\right.%
+}
+\def\env@cases{%
+ \let\@ifnextchar\new@ifnextchar
+ \left\lbrace
+ \def\arraystretch{1.2}%
+ \array{@{}l@{\quad}l@{}}%
+}
+\newcounter{parentequation}% Counter for ``parent equation''.
+\@ifundefined{ignorespacesafterend}{%
+ \def\ignorespacesafterend{\global\@ignoretrue}%
+}{}
+\newenvironment{subequations}{%
+ \refstepcounter{equation}%
+ \protected@edef\theparentequation{\theequation}%
+ \setcounter{parentequation}{\value{equation}}%
+ \setcounter{equation}{0}%
+ \def\theequation{\theparentequation\alph{equation}}%
+ \ignorespaces
+}{%
+ \setcounter{equation}{\value{parentequation}}%
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+\newcommand{\numberwithin}[3][\arabic]{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@nocounterr{#2}}{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#3}{\@nocnterr{#3}}{%
+ \@addtoreset{#2}{#3}%
+ \@xp\xdef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
+ \@xp\@nx\csname the#3\endcsname .\@nx#1{#2}}}}%
+}
+\newcommand{\eqref}[1]{\textup{\tagform@{\ref{#1}}}}
+\newcount\dspbrk@lvl
+\dspbrk@lvl=-1
+\interdisplaylinepenalty\@M
+\newcommand{\allowdisplaybreaks}[1][4]{%
+ \interdisplaylinepenalty\getdsp@pen{#1}\relax
+}
+\def\getdsp@pen#1{%
+ \ifcase #1\@M \or 9999 \or 6999 \or 2999 \or \z@\fi
+}
+\newcommand{\displaybreak}{\new@ifnextchar[\dspbrk@{\dspbrk@[4]}}
+\chardef\dspbrk@context=\sixt@@n
+\def\dspbrk@[#1]{%
+ \ifmeasuring@
+ \else
+ \ifcase\dspbrk@context % case 0 --- OK
+ \global\dspbrk@lvl #1\relax
+ \or % case 1 --- inside a box
+ \nogood@displaybreak
+ \else % other cases --- outside of a display
+ \@amsmath@err{\Invalid@@\displaybreak}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\nogood@displaybreak{%
+ \@amsmath@err{\protect
+\displaybreak\space cannot be applied here}%
+{One of the enclosing environments creates an
+ unbreakable box\MessageBreak
+(e.g., split, aligned, gathered, ...).}%
+}
+\def\math@cr{\relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \@ifstar{\global\@eqpen\@M\math@cr@}%
+ {\global\@eqpen
+ \ifnum\dspbrk@lvl <\z@ \interdisplaylinepenalty
+ \else -\@getpen\dspbrk@lvl \fi
+ \math@cr@}}
+\def\math@cr@{\new@ifnextchar[\math@cr@@{\math@cr@@[\z@]}}
+\def\math@cr@@[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi \iffalse}\fi\math@cr@@@
+ \noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
+\def\Let@{\let\\\math@cr}
+\def\restore@math@cr{\def\math@cr@@@{\cr}}
+\restore@math@cr
+\newcommand{\intertext}{\@amsmath@err{\Invalid@@\intertext}\@eha}
+\def\intertext@{%
+ \def\intertext##1{%
+ \ifvmode\else\\\@empty\fi
+ \noalign{%
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty\vskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \vbox{\normalbaselines
+ \ifdim\linewidth=\columnwidth
+ \else \parshape\@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \fi
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##1\par}%
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty\vskip\abovedisplayskip%
+ }%
+}}
+\newhelp\tag@help
+ {tag cannot be used at this point.\space
+ If you don't understand why^^Jyou should consult
+ the documentation.^^JBut don't worry: just continue, and I'll
+ forget what happened.}
+\def\gobble@tag{\@ifstar\@gobble\@gobble}
+\def\invalid@tag#1{\@amsmath@err{#1}{\the\tag@help}\gobble@tag}
+\def\dft@tag{\invalid@tag{\string\tag\space not allowed here}}
+\def\default@tag{\let\tag\dft@tag}
+\default@tag
+\def\maketag@@{\@ifstar\maketag@@@\tagform@}
+\def\maketag@@@#1{\hbox{\m@th\normalfont#1}}
+\def\tagform@#1{\maketag@@@{(\ignorespaces#1\unskip\@@italiccorr)}}
+\iftagsleft@
+ \def\@eqnnum{\hbox to1sp{}\rlap{\normalfont\normalcolor
+ \hskip -\displaywidth\tagform@\theequation}}
+\else
+ \def\@eqnnum{{\normalfont\normalcolor \tagform@\theequation}}
+\fi
+\newcommand{\thetag}{\leavevmode\tagform@}
+\let\df@tag\@empty
+\def\make@df@tag{\@ifstar\make@df@tag@@\make@df@tag@@@}
+\def\make@df@tag@@#1{%
+ \gdef\df@tag{\maketag@@@{#1}\def\@currentlabel{#1}}}
+\def\make@df@tag@@@#1{\gdef\df@tag{\tagform@{#1}%
+ \toks@\@xp{\p@equation{#1}}\edef\@currentlabel{\the\toks@}}}
+\let\ltx@label\label
+\def\label@in@display{%
+ \ifx\df@label\@empty\else
+ \@amsmath@err{Multiple \string\label's:
+ label '\df@label' will be lost}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \gdef\df@label
+}
+\toks@\@xp{\@arrayparboxrestore \let\label\ltx@label}%
+\edef\@arrayboxrestore{\the\toks@}
+\let\df@label\@empty
+\def\make@display@tag{%
+ \if@eqnsw \incr@eqnum \print@eqnum
+ \else \iftag@ \df@tag \global\let\df@tag\@empty \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifmeasuring@
+ \else
+ \ifx\df@label\@empty
+ \else
+ \@xp\ltx@label\@xp{\df@label}%
+ \global\let\df@label\@empty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\tag@in@align{%
+ \relax
+ \iftag@
+ \DN@{\invalid@tag{Multiple \string\tag}}%
+ \else
+ \global\tag@true
+ \nonumber
+ \let\next@\make@df@tag
+ \fi
+ \next@
+}
+\newcommand{\raisetag}[1]{\skip@#1\relax
+ \xdef\raise@tag{\vskip\iftagsleft@\else-\fi\the\skip@\relax}%
+}
+\let\raise@tag\@empty
+\newcommand{\notag}{\nonumber}
+\renewcommand{\nonumber}{%
+ \if@eqnsw
+ \ifx\incr@eqnum\@empty \addtocounter{equation}\m@ne \fi
+ \fi
+ \let\print@eqnum\@empty \let\incr@eqnum\@empty
+ \global\@eqnswfalse
+}
+\def\print@eqnum{\tagform@\theequation}
+\def\incr@eqnum{\refstepcounter{equation}\let\incr@eqnum\@empty}
+\newif\ifinalign@
+\newif\ifingather@
+\@xp\def\@xp\@arrayparboxrestore\@xp{\@arrayparboxrestore
+ \ingather@false\inalign@false \default@tag
+ \let\spread@equation\@spread@equation
+ \let\reset@equation\@empty
+ \def\print@eqnum{\tagform@\theequation}%
+ \def\incr@eqnum{\refstepcounter{equation}\let\incr@eqnum\@empty}%
+}
+\newif\iftag@
+\newif\ifst@rred
+\newif\ifmeasuring@
+\newif\ifshifttag@
+\newcount\row@
+\newcount\column@
+\def\column@plus{%
+ \global\advance\column@\@ne
+}
+\newcount\maxfields@
+\def\add@amp#1{\if m#1&\@xp\add@amp\fi}
+\def\add@amps#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \count@#1\advance\count@-\column@
+ \edef\@tempa{\endgroup
+ \@xp\add@amp\romannumeral\number\count@ 000q}%
+ \@tempa
+}
+\newhelp\andhelp@
+{An extra & here is so disastrous that you should probably exit^^J
+and fix things up.}
+\newdimen\eqnshift@
+\newdimen\alignsep@
+\newdimen\tagshift@
+\newcommand{\mintagsep}{.5\fontdimen6\textfont\tw@}
+\newcommand{\minalignsep}{10pt}
+\newdimen\tagwidth@
+\newdimen\totwidth@
+\newdimen\lineht@
+\def\tag@width#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\tag@lengths\fi
+}
+
+\def\savetaglength@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\tag@lengths{\tag@lengths\or \the\wdz@}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\shift@tag#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\tag@shifts\fi\relax
+}
+
+\let\tag@shifts\@empty
+\def\saveshift@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\tag@shifts{\or#1\tag@shifts}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+\def\spread@equation{\reset@strutbox@
+ \openup\jot \let\spread@equation\@empty}
+\let\@spread@equation\spread@equation
+\def\displ@y{\@display@init{}}
+\def\@display@init#1{%
+ \global\dt@ptrue \spread@equation
+ \everycr{%
+ \noalign{%
+ #1%
+ \ifdt@p
+ \global\dt@pfalse
+ \vskip-\lineskiplimit
+ \vskip\normallineskiplimit
+ \else
+ \penalty\@eqpen \global\dspbrk@lvl\m@ne
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+\def\displ@y@{\@display@init{%
+ \global\column@\z@ \global\dspbrk@lvl\m@ne
+ \global\tag@false \global\let\raise@tag\@empty
+}}
+\def\black@#1{%
+ \noalign{%
+ \ifdim#1>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\prevdepth
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \vskip-\ht\strutbox@
+ \vskip-\dp\strutbox@
+ \vbox{\noindent\hbox to\displaywidth{\hbox to#1{\strut@\hfill}}}%
+ \prevdepth\dimen@
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+\def\savecounters@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\@elt##1{%
+ \global\csname c@##1\endcsname\the\csname c@##1\endcsname}%
+ \xdef\@gtempa{%
+ \cl@@ckpt
+ \let\@nx\restorecounters@\@nx\@empty
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \let\restorecounters@\@gtempa
+}
+\let\restorecounters@\@empty
+\def\savealignstate@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\@gtempa{%
+ \global\totwidth@\the\totwidth@
+ \global\row@\the\row@
+ \gdef\@nx\tag@lengths{\tag@lengths}%
+ \let\@nx\restorealignstate@\@nx\@empty
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \let\restorealignstate@\@gtempa
+}
+
+\let\restorealignstate@\@empty
+\def\savecolumn@{%
+ \edef\restorecolumn@{%
+ \global\column@\number\column@
+ \let\@nx\restorecolumn@\@nx\@empty
+ }%
+}
+\let\restorecolumn@\@empty
+\newtoks\@envbody
+\def\addto@envbody#1{\global\@envbody\@xp{\the\@envbody#1}}
+\def\collect@body#1{%
+ \@envbody{\@xp#1\@xp{\the\@envbody}}%
+ \edef\process@envbody{\the\@envbody\@nx\end{\@currenvir}}%
+ \@envbody\@emptytoks \def\begin@stack{b}%
+ \begingroup
+ \@xp\let\csname\@currenvir\endcsname\collect@@body
+ \edef\process@envbody{\@xp\@nx\csname\@currenvir\endcsname}%
+ \process@envbody
+}
+\def\push@begins#1\begin#2{%
+ \ifx\end#2\else b\@xp\push@begins\fi
+}
+\def\collect@@body#1\end#2{%
+ \edef\begin@stack{\push@begins#1\begin\end \@xp\@gobble\begin@stack}%
+ \ifx\@empty\begin@stack
+ \endgroup
+ \@checkend{#2}%
+ \addto@envbody{#1}%
+ \else
+ \addto@envbody{#1\end{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \process@envbody % A little tricky! Note the grouping
+}
+\def\math@cr@@@aligned{%
+ \ifodd\column@ \let\next@\@empty
+ \else \def\next@{&\kern-\alignsep@}%
+ \fi
+ \next@ \cr
+}
+\newcommand{\start@aligned}[2]{%
+ \RIfM@\else
+ \nonmatherr@{\begin{\@currenvir}}%
+ \fi
+ \savecolumn@ % Assumption: called inside a group
+ \alignedspace@left
+ \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b \vbox \else \vcenter \fi \fi \bgroup
+ \maxfields@#2\relax
+ \ifnum\maxfields@>\m@ne
+ \multiply\maxfields@\tw@
+ \let\math@cr@@@\math@cr@@@alignedat
+ \alignsep@\z@skip
+ \else
+ \let\math@cr@@@\math@cr@@@aligned
+ \alignsep@\minalignsep
+ \fi
+ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk@context\@ne
+ \default@tag
+ \spread@equation % no-op if already called
+ \global\column@\z@
+ \ialign\bgroup
+ &\column@plus
+ \hfil
+ \strut@
+ $\m@th\displaystyle{##}$%
+ \tabskip\z@skip
+ &\column@plus
+ $\m@th\displaystyle{{}##}$%
+ \hfil
+ \tabskip\alignsep@
+ \crcr
+}
+\def\math@cr@@@alignedat{%
+ \ifnum\column@>\maxfields@
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring@false
+ \@amsmath@err{Extra & on this line}%
+ {\the\andhelp@}% "An extra & here is disastrous"
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \global\column@\z@
+ \cr
+}
+\def\alignsafe@testopt#1#2{%
+ \relax\iffalse{\fi\ifnum`}=0\fi
+ \@ifnextchar[%
+ {\let\@let@token\relax \ifnum`{=\z@\fi\iffalse}\fi#1}%
+ {\let\@let@token\relax \ifnum`{=\z@\fi\iffalse}\fi#1[#2]}%
+}
+\newenvironment{aligned}{%
+ \let\@testopt\alignsafe@testopt
+ \aligned@a
+}{%
+ \crcr\egroup
+ \restorecolumn@
+ \egroup
+}
+\newcommand{\aligned@a}[1][c]{\start@aligned{#1}\m@ne}
+\newenvironment{alignedat}{%
+ \let\@testopt\alignsafe@testopt
+ \alignedat@a
+}{%
+ \endaligned
+}
+\newcommand{\alignedat@a}[1][c]{\start@aligned{#1}}
+\newenvironment{gathered}[1][c]{%
+ \RIfM@\else
+ \nonmatherr@{\begin{gathered}}%
+ \fi
+ \alignedspace@left
+ \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi\fi \bgroup
+ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk@context\@ne \restore@math@cr
+ \spread@equation
+ \ialign\bgroup
+ \hfil\strut@$\m@th\displaystyle##$\hfil
+ \crcr
+}{%
+ \endaligned
+}
+\def\start@gather#1{%
+ \RIfM@
+ \nomath@env
+ \DN@{\@namedef{end\@currenvir}{}\@gobble}%
+ \else
+ $$%
+ #1%
+ \ifst@rred \else \global\@eqnswtrue \fi
+ \let\next@\gather@
+ \fi
+ \collect@body\next@
+}
+\newenvironment{gather}{%
+ \start@gather\st@rredfalse
+}{%
+ \math@cr \black@\totwidth@ \egroup
+ $$\ignorespacesafterend
+}
+
+\newenvironment{gather*}{%
+ \start@gather\st@rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endgather
+}
+\def\gather@#1{%
+ \ingather@true \let\split\insplit@
+ \let\tag\tag@in@align \let\label\label@in@display
+ \chardef\dspbrk@context\z@
+ \intertext@ \displ@y@ \Let@
+ \let\math@cr@@@\math@cr@@@gather
+ \gmeasure@{#1}%
+ \global\shifttag@false
+ \tabskip\z@skip
+ \global\row@\@ne
+ \halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
+ \strut@
+ \setboxz@h{$\m@th\displaystyle{##}$}%
+ \calc@shift@gather
+ \set@gather@field
+ \tabskip\@centering
+ &\setboxz@h{\strut@{##}}%
+ \place@tag@gather
+ \tabskip \iftagsleft@ \gdisplaywidth@ \else \z@skip \span\fi
+ \crcr
+ #1%
+}
+\def\gmeasure@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring@true
+ \totwidth@\z@
+ \global\let\tag@lengths\@empty
+ \savecounters@
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox{%
+ \everycr{\noalign{\global\tag@false
+ \global\let\raise@tag\@empty \global\column@\z@}}%
+ \let\label\@gobble
+ \halign{%
+ \setboxz@h{$\m@th\displaystyle{##}$}%
+ \ifdim\wdz@>\totwidth@
+ \global\totwidth@\wdz@
+ \fi
+ &\setboxz@h{\strut@{##}}%
+ \savetaglength@
+ \crcr
+ #1%
+ \math@cr@@@
+ }%
+ }%
+ \restorecounters@
+ \if@fleqn
+ \global\advance\totwidth@\@mathmargin
+ \fi
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifdim\totwidth@>\displaywidth
+ \global\let\gdisplaywidth@\totwidth@
+ \else
+ \global\let\gdisplaywidth@\displaywidth
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+\def\math@cr@@@gather{%
+ \ifst@rred\nonumber\fi
+ &\relax
+ \make@display@tag
+ \ifst@rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \cr
+}
+\def\calc@shift@gather{%
+ \dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \tagwidth@\tag@width\row@\relax
+ \if@fleqn
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin
+ \ifdim\tagwidth@>\z@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\@mathmargin
+ \global\shifttag@true
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \advance\dimen@\@mathmargin
+ \advance\dimen@\wdz@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \global\shifttag@true
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global\eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \global\advance\eqnshift@-\wdz@
+ \ifdim\tagwidth@>\z@
+ \multiply\dimen@\tw@
+ \advance\dimen@\wdz@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \global\shifttag@true
+ \else
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@<4\tagwidth@
+ \global\advance\eqnshift@-\tagwidth@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\tw@
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \global\eqnshift@-\eqnshift@
+ \global\advance\eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \global\advance\eqnshift@-\wdz@
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@<\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\place@tag@gather{%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \kern-\gdisplaywidth@
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \rlap{\vbox{%
+ \normalbaselines
+ \boxz@
+ \vbox to\lineht@{}%
+ \raise@tag
+ }}%
+ \global\shifttag@false
+ \else
+ \rlap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifdim\totwidth@>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\totwidth@
+ \advance\dimen@-\displaywidth
+ \kern-\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \llap{\vtop{%
+ \raise@tag
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\@ne\null
+ \dp\@ne\lineht@
+ \box\@ne
+ \boxz@
+ }}%
+ \global\shifttag@false
+ \else
+ \llap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\set@gather@field{%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \global\lineht@\ht\z@
+ \else
+ \global\lineht@\dp\z@
+ \fi
+ \kern\eqnshift@
+ \boxz@
+ \hfil
+}
+\newif\ifxxat@
+
+\newif\ifcheckat@
+
+\let\xatlevel@\@empty
+\def\start@align#1#2#3{%
+ \let\xatlevel@#1% always \z@, \@ne, or \tw@
+ \maxfields@#3\relax
+ \ifnum\maxfields@>\m@ne
+ \checkat@true
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \xxat@true
+ \fi
+ \multiply\maxfields@\tw@
+ \else
+ \checkat@false
+ \fi
+ \ifingather@
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \DN@{\vcenter\bgroup\savealignstate@\align@#2}%
+ \else
+ \ifmmode
+ \if@display
+ \DN@{\align@recover}%
+ \else
+ \nomath@env
+ \DN@{\@namedef{end\@currenvir}{}\@gobble}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ $$%
+ \let\split\insplit@
+ \DN@{\align@#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \collect@body\next@
+}
+\def\align@recover#1#2#3{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@amsmath@err{%
+Erroneous nesting of equation structures;\MessageBreak
+trying to recover with `aligned'%
+ }\@ehc
+ \begin{aligned}\relax#1\end{aligned}%
+}
+\newenvironment{alignat}{%
+ \start@align\z@\st@rredfalse
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{alignat*}{%
+ \start@align\z@\st@rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{xalignat}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredfalse
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{xalignat*}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{xxalignat}{%
+ \start@align\tw@\st@rredtrue
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{align}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredfalse\m@ne
+}{%
+ \math@cr \black@\totwidth@
+ \egroup
+ \ifingather@
+ \restorealignstate@
+ \egroup
+ \nonumber
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi\iffalse}\fi
+ \else
+ $$%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+\newenvironment{align*}{%
+ \start@align\@ne\st@rredtrue\m@ne
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{flalign}{%
+ \start@align\tw@\st@rredfalse\m@ne
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\newenvironment{flalign*}{%
+ \start@align\tw@\st@rredtrue\m@ne
+}{%
+ \endalign
+}
+\def\align@#1#2{%
+ \inalign@true \intertext@ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk@context\z@
+ \ifingather@\else\displ@y@\fi
+ \let\math@cr@@@\math@cr@@@align
+ \ifxxat@\else \let\tag\tag@in@align \fi
+ \let\label\label@in@display
+ #1% set st@r
+ \ifst@rred\else \global\@eqnswtrue \fi
+ \measure@{#2}%
+ \global\row@\z@
+ \tabskip\eqnshift@
+ \halign\bgroup
+ \span\align@preamble\crcr
+ #2%
+}
+\def\math@cr@@@align{%
+ \ifst@rred\nonumber\fi
+ \if@eqnsw \global\tag@true \fi
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \add@amps\maxfields@
+ \omit
+ \kern-\alignsep@
+ \iftag@
+ \setboxz@h{\@lign\strut@{\make@display@tag}}%
+ \place@tag
+ \fi
+ \ifst@rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+ \global\lineht@\z@
+ \cr
+}
+\def\math@cr@@@align@measure{%
+ &\omit
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \ifst@rred\nonumber\fi
+ \if@eqnsw \global\tag@true \fi
+ \ifnum\column@>\maxfields@
+ \ifcheckat@
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring@false
+ \@amsmath@err{Extra & on this line}%
+ {\the\andhelp@}% "An extra & here is disastrous"
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \global\maxfields@\column@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \setboxz@h{\@lign\strut@{%
+ \if@eqnsw
+ \stepcounter{equation}%
+ \tagform@\theequation
+ \else
+ \iftag@\df@tag\fi
+ \fi
+ }}%
+ \savetaglength@
+ \ifst@rred\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+ \cr
+}
+\let\field@lengths\@empty
+
+\def\savefieldlength@{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \xdef\field@lengths{%
+ \field@lengths
+ \ifnum\column@=0
+ \or
+ \else
+ ,%
+ \fi
+ \the\wdz@
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\fieldlengths@#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\field@lengths\fi
+}
+\let\maxcolumn@widths\@empty
+\def\maxcol@width#1{%
+ \ifcase\@xp#1\maxcolumn@widths\fi\relax
+}
+\def\measure@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring@true
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \global\alignsep@\z@
+ \global\let\tag@lengths\@empty
+ \global\let\field@lengths\@empty
+ \savecounters@
+ \global\setbox0\vbox{%
+ \let\math@cr@@@\math@cr@@@align@measure
+ \everycr{\noalign{\global\tag@false
+ \global\let\raise@tag\@empty \global\column@\z@}}%
+ \let\label\@gobble
+ \global\row@\z@
+ \tabskip\z@
+ \halign{\span\align@preamble\crcr
+ #1%
+ \math@cr@@@
+ \global\column@\z@
+ \add@amps\maxfields@\cr
+ }%
+ }%
+ \restorecounters@
+ \ifodd\maxfields@
+ \global\advance\maxfields@\@ne
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \ifnum\maxfields@<\thr@@
+ \let\xatlevel@\z@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\z@ \unpenalty \global\setbox\@ne\lastbox
+ }%
+ \global\totwidth@\wd\@ne
+ \if@fleqn \global\advance\totwidth@\@mathmargin \fi
+ \global\let\maxcolumn@widths\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \let\or\relax
+ \loop
+ \global\setbox\@ne\hbox{%
+ \unhbox\@ne \unskip \global\setbox\thr@@\lastbox
+ }%
+ \ifhbox\thr@@
+ \xdef\maxcolumn@widths{ \or \the\wd\thr@@ \maxcolumn@widths}%
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen@-\totwidth@
+ \ifcase\xatlevel@
+ \global\alignsep@\z@
+ \let\minalignsep\z@
+ \@tempcntb\z@
+ \if@fleqn
+ \@tempcnta\@ne
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin
+ \else
+ \@tempcnta\tw@
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\@tempcnta
+ \fi
+ \or
+ \@tempcntb\maxfields@
+ \divide\@tempcntb\tw@
+ \@tempcnta\@tempcntb
+ \advance\@tempcntb\m@ne
+ \if@fleqn
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \global\divide\alignsep@\@tempcnta
+ \else
+ \global\advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\@tempcnta
+ \global\alignsep@\eqnshift@
+ \fi
+ \or
+ \@tempcntb\maxfields@
+ \divide\@tempcntb\tw@
+ \global\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne
+ \global\@tempcnta\@tempcntb
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \if@fleqn
+ \global\advance\alignsep@\@mathmargin\relax
+ \fi
+ \global\divide\alignsep@\@tempcntb
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\alignsep@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@>\z@
+ \if@fleqn\else
+ \global\eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \global\advance\eqnshift@-\totwidth@
+ \global\advance\eqnshift@-\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\tw@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@<\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \fi
+ \calc@shift@align
+ \global\tagshift@\totwidth@
+ \global\advance\tagshift@\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \if@fleqn
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \global\advance\tagshift@-\@mathmargin\relax
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global\advance\tagshift@\eqnshift@
+ \fi
+ \iftagsleft@ \else
+ \global\advance\tagshift@-\displaywidth
+ \fi
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\advance\totwidth@\@tempcntb\dimen@
+ \ifdim\totwidth@>\displaywidth
+ \global\let\displaywidth@\totwidth@
+ \else
+ \global\let\displaywidth@\displaywidth
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+\iftagsleft@\if@fleqn
+ \def\calc@shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag@shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempdima\@mathmargin\relax
+ \advance\@tempdima-\mintagsep\relax
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>0
+ \ifdim\tag@width\row@>\z@
+ \x@calc@shift@lf
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m@ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+ \def\x@calc@shift@lf{%
+ \ifdim\eqnshift@=\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\@mathmargin\relax
+ \alignsep@\displaywidth
+ \advance\alignsep@-\totwidth@
+ \global\divide\alignsep@\@tempcntb
+ \ifdim\alignsep@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\tag@width\row@>\@tempdima
+ \saveshift@1%
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi\fi
+\iftagsleft@\else\if@fleqn
+ \def\calc@shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag@shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>0
+ \ifdim\tag@width\row@>\z@
+ \x@calc@shift@rf
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m@ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+ \def\x@calc@shift@rf{%
+ \column@\z@
+ \@tempdimb\z@
+ \@tempdimc\z@
+ \edef\@tempb{\fieldlengths@\row@}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{%
+ \advance\column@\@ne
+ \x@rcalc@width
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\column@\m@ne
+ \divide\column@\tw@
+ \ifnum\@tempcntb>\column@
+ \advance\@tempcnta-\@tempcntb
+ \advance\@tempcnta\column@
+ \@tempcntb\column@
+ \fi
+ \tagwidth@\tag@width\row@\relax
+ \@tempdima\eqnshift@
+ \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimc\relax
+ \advance\@tempdima\tagwidth@
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \saveshift@1%
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \dimen@\alignsep@\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen@-\@tempdima
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \advance\dimen@-\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \divide\dimen@\@tempcnta
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \else
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }
+\fi\fi
+\iftagsleft@\else\if@fleqn\else
+ \def\calc@shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag@shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>0
+ \ifdim\tag@width\row@>\z@
+ \x@calc@shift@rc
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m@ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+ \def\x@calc@shift@rc{%
+ \column@\z@
+ \@tempdimb\z@
+ \@tempdimc\z@
+ \edef\@tempb{\fieldlengths@\row@}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{%
+ \advance\column@\@ne
+ \x@rcalc@width
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\column@\m@ne
+ \divide\column@\tw@
+ \ifnum\@tempcntb>\column@
+ \advance\@tempcnta-\@tempcntb
+ \advance\@tempcnta\column@
+ \@tempcntb\column@
+ \fi
+ \tagwidth@\tag@width\row@\relax
+ \@tempdima\@tempdimc
+ \advance\@tempdima\tagwidth@
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@ \else
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \saveshift@1%
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \dimen@\eqnshift@
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen@-\@tempdima
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \advance\dimen@-\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \divide\dimen@\@tempcnta
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \eqnshift@\displaywidth
+ \advance\eqnshift@-\@tempdima
+ \advance\eqnshift@-\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \global\divide\eqnshift@\tw@
+ \else
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\eqnshift@
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\z@
+ \global\eqnshift@\z@
+ \else
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\alignsep@
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }
+\fi\fi
+\iftagsleft@\else
+ \def\x@rcalc@width{%
+ \ifdim\@tempa > \z@
+ \advance\@tempdimc\@tempdimb
+ \ifodd\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimc\maxcol@width\column@
+ \@tempdimb\z@
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempdimc\@tempa\relax
+ \@tempdimb\maxcol@width\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempa\relax
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempdimb\maxcol@width\column@\relax
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi
+\iftagsleft@\if@fleqn\else
+ \def\calc@shift@align{%
+ \global\let\tag@shifts\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\row@>\z@
+ \ifdim\tag@width\row@>\z@
+ \x@calc@shift@lc
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \fi
+ \advance\row@\m@ne
+ \repeat
+ \endgroup
+ }
+ \def\x@calc@shift@lc{%
+ \column@\z@
+ \@tempdima\z@ % ``width of equation''
+ \@tempdimb\z@ % ``indent of equation''
+ \edef\@tempb{\fieldlengths@\row@}%
+ \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{%
+ \advance\column@\@ne
+ \x@lcalc@width
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \tagwidth@\tag@width\row@\relax
+ \@tempdima\totwidth@
+ \advance\@tempdima-\@tempdimb
+ \advance\@tempdima\tagwidth@
+ \dimen@\minalignsep\relax
+ \multiply\dimen@\@tempcntb
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@ \else
+ \advance\dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdima
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \saveshift@1%
+ \else
+ \saveshift@0%
+ \dimen@\alignsep@
+ \multiply\dimen@\count@
+ \advance\dimen@\eqnshift@
+ \advance\dimen@\@tempdimb
+ \ifdim\dimen@<2\tagwidth@
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen@-\@tempdima
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \advance\dimen@-\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
+ \divide\dimen@\@tempcnta
+ \else \dimen@\z@
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\minalignsep\relax
+ \global\alignsep@\minalignsep\relax
+ \dimen@\displaywidth
+ \advance\dimen@-\@tempdima
+ \advance\dimen@-\@tempcntb\alignsep@
+ \global\divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \else
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\alignsep@
+ \global\alignsep@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\xatlevel@=\tw@
+ \dimen@\mintagsep\relax
+ \fi
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \advance\dimen@-\@tempdimb
+ \advance\dimen@-\count@\alignsep@
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\eqnshift@
+ \global\eqnshift@\dimen@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ }
+ \def\x@lcalc@width{%
+ \ifdim\@tempdima = \z@
+ \ifdim\@tempa > \z@
+ \@tempdima\p@
+ \ifodd\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimb \maxcol@width\column@
+ \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempa
+ \fi
+ \count@\column@
+ \advance\count@\m@ne
+ \divide\count@\tw@
+ \advance\@tempcnta-\count@
+ \advance\@tempcntb-\count@
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempdimb \maxcol@width\column@\relax
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi\fi
+\def\place@tag{%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \kern-\tagshift@
+ \if1\shift@tag\row@\relax
+ \rlap{\vbox{%
+ \normalbaselines
+ \boxz@
+ \vbox to\lineht@{}%
+ \raise@tag
+ }}%
+ \else
+ \rlap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \kern\displaywidth@
+ \else
+ \kern-\tagshift@
+ \if1\shift@tag\row@\relax
+ \llap{\vtop{%
+ \raise@tag
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\@ne\null
+ \dp\@ne\lineht@
+ \box\@ne
+ \boxz@
+ }}%
+ \else
+ \llap{\boxz@}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\align@preamble{%
+ &\hfil
+ \strut@
+ \setboxz@h{\@lign$\m@th\displaystyle{##}$}%
+ \ifmeasuring@\savefieldlength@\fi
+ \set@field
+ \tabskip\z@skip
+ &\setboxz@h{\@lign$\m@th\displaystyle{{}##}$}%
+ \ifmeasuring@\savefieldlength@\fi
+ \set@field
+ \hfil
+ \tabskip\alignsep@
+}
+\def\set@field{%
+ \column@plus
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifdim\ht\z@>\lineht@
+ \global\lineht@\ht\z@
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifdim\dp\z@>\lineht@
+ \global\lineht@\dp\z@
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \boxz@
+}
+\edef\split@err#1{%
+ \@nx\@amsmath@err{%
+ \string\begin{split} won't work here%
+ }{%
+ \@xp\@nx\csname
+ Did you forget a preceding \string\begin{equation}?^^J%
+ If not, perhaps the `aligned' environment is what
+ you want.\endcsname}%
+}
+\newenvironment{split}{%
+ \if@display
+ \ifinner
+ \@xp\@xp\@xp\split@aligned
+ \else
+ \ifst@rred \else \global\@eqnswtrue \fi
+ \fi
+ \else \let\endsplit\@empty \@xp\collect@body\@xp\split@err
+ \fi
+ \collect@body\gather@split
+}{%
+ \crcr
+ \egroup
+ \egroup
+ \iftagsleft@ \@xp\lendsplit@ \else \@xp\rendsplit@ \fi
+}
+\let\split@tag\relax % init
+\def\gather@split#1#2#3{%
+ \@xp\endgroup \reset@equation % math@cr will handle equation numbering
+ \iftag@
+ \toks@\@xp{\df@tag}%
+ \edef\split@tag{%
+ \gdef\@nx\df@tag{\the\toks@}%
+ \global\@nx\tag@true \@nx\nonumber
+ }%
+ \else \let\split@tag\@empty
+ \fi
+ \spread@equation
+ \vcenter\bgroup
+ \gather@{\split@tag \begin{split}#1\end{split}}%
+ \def\endmathdisplay@a{%
+ \math@cr \black@ \totwidth@ \egroup
+ \egroup
+ }%
+}
+\def\insplit@{%
+ \global\setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \Let@ \chardef\dspbrk@context\@ne \restore@math@cr
+ \default@tag % disallow use of \tag here
+ \ialign\bgroup
+ \hfil
+ \strut@
+ $\m@th\displaystyle{##}$%
+ &$\m@th\displaystyle{{}##}$%
+ \hfill % Why not \hfil?---dmj, 1994/12/28
+ \crcr
+}
+\def\rendsplit@{%
+ \ifinalign@
+ \global\setbox9 \vtop{%
+ \unvcopy\z@
+ \global\setbox8 \lastbox
+ \unskip
+ }%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{%
+ \unhcopy8
+ \unskip
+ \global\setbox\tw@\lastbox
+ \unskip
+ \global\setbox\thr@@\lastbox
+ }%
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \hbox to\wd\thr@@{}%
+ &\vcenter{\vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\boxz@}}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \global\setbox7 \hbox{\unhbox\tw@\unskip}%
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \global\@tempcnta\column@
+ &\setboxz@h{}%
+ \savetaglength@
+ \global\advance\row@\@ne
+ \vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\box9}%
+ \crcr
+ \noalign{\global\lineht@\z@}%
+ \add@amps\@tempcnta
+ \box\thr@@
+ &\box7
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{\vcenter{\boxz@}}%
+ \else
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \boxz@
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \aftergroup\split@
+}
+\def\lendsplit@{%
+ \global\setbox9\vtop{\unvcopy\z@}%
+ \ifinalign@
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox{%
+ \unvcopy\z@
+ \global\setbox8\lastbox
+ }%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{%
+ \unhcopy8%
+ \unskip
+ \setbox\tw@\lastbox
+ \unskip
+ \global\setbox\thr@@\lastbox
+ }%
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \hbox to\wd\thr@@{}%
+ &\vcenter{\vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\box9}}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \gdef\split@{%
+ \hbox to\wd\thr@@{}%
+ &\vbox{\moveleft\wd\thr@@\box9}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \gdef\split@{\vcenter{\box9}}%
+ \else
+ \gdef\split@{\box9}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \aftergroup\split@
+}
+\def\split@aligned#1#2{%
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \collect@body\split@al@a}
+\def\split@al@a#1#2#3{%
+ \split@warning
+ \endgroup
+ \toks@{\begin{aligned}}%
+ \if@fleqn \split@al@tagcheck \fi
+ \the\toks@\relax#1\end{aligned}%
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi\iffalse}\fi
+}
+\def\split@al@tagcheck{%
+ \ifctagsplit@
+ \else
+ \iftagsleft@ \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@ [t]}%
+ \else \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@ [b]}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\split@warning{%
+ \PackageWarning{amsmath}{%
+Cannot use `split' here;\MessageBreak trying to recover with `aligned'}%
+}
+\newskip\multlinegap
+\multlinegap10pt
+\newskip\multlinetaggap
+\multlinetaggap10pt
+\def\start@multline#1{%
+ \RIfM@
+ \nomath@env
+ \DN@{\@namedef{end\@currenvir}{}\@gobble}%
+ \else
+ $$%
+ #1%
+ \ifst@rred
+ \nonumber
+ \else
+ \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \fi
+ \let\next@\multline@
+ \fi
+ \collect@body\next@
+}
+\newenvironment{multline}{%
+ \start@multline\st@rredfalse
+}{%
+ \iftagsleft@ \@xp\lendmultline@ \else \@xp\rendmultline@ \fi
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+\newenvironment{multline*}{\start@multline\st@rredtrue}{\endmultline}
+\def\multline@#1{%
+ \Let@
+ \@display@init{\global\advance\row@\@ne \global\dspbrk@lvl\m@ne}%
+ \chardef\dspbrk@context\z@
+ \restore@math@cr
+ \let\tag\tag@in@align
+ \global\tag@false \global\let\raise@tag\@empty
+ \mmeasure@{#1}%
+ \let\tag\gobble@tag \let\label\@gobble
+ \tabskip \if@fleqn \@mathmargin \else \z@skip \fi
+ \totwidth@\displaywidth
+ \if@fleqn
+ \advance\totwidth@-\@mathmargin
+ \fi
+ \halign\bgroup
+ \hbox to\totwidth@{%
+ \if@fleqn
+ \hskip \@centering \relax
+ \else
+ \hfil
+ \fi
+ \strut@
+ $\m@th\displaystyle{}##\endmultline@math
+ \hfil
+ }%
+ \crcr
+ \if@fleqn
+ \hskip-\@mathmargin
+ \def\multline@indent{\hskip\@mathmargin}% put it back
+ \else
+ \hfilneg
+ \def\multline@indent{\hskip\multlinegap}%
+ \fi
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \iftag@
+ \begingroup
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \rlap{\vbox{%
+ \normalbaselines
+ \hbox{%
+ \strut@
+ \make@display@tag
+ }%
+ \vbox to\lineht@{}%
+ \raise@tag
+ }}%
+ \multline@indent
+ \else
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{\make@display@tag}%
+ \dimen@\@mathmargin \advance\dimen@-\wd\z@
+ \ifdim\dimen@<\multlinetaggap
+ \dimen@\multlinetaggap
+ \fi
+ \box\z@ \hskip\dimen@\relax
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \multline@indent
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \multline@indent
+ \fi
+ #1%
+}
+\def\endmultline@math{$}
+\def\lendmultline@{%
+ \hfilneg
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \math@cr
+ \egroup
+ $$%
+}
+\def\rendmultline@{%
+ \iftag@
+ $\let\endmultline@math\relax
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \llap{\vtop{%
+ \raise@tag
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\@ne\null
+ \dp\@ne\lineht@
+ \box\@ne
+ \hbox{\strut@\make@display@tag}%
+ }}%
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinetaggap
+ \make@display@tag
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \fi
+ \hfilneg
+ \math@cr
+ \egroup$$%
+}
+\def\mmeasure@#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \measuring@true
+ \def\label##1{%
+ \begingroup\measuring@false\label@in@display{##1}\endgroup}%
+ \def\math@cr@@@{\cr}%
+ \let\shoveleft\@iden \let\shoveright\@iden
+ \savecounters@
+ \global\row@\z@
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox{%
+ \global\let\df@tag\@empty
+ \halign{%
+ \setboxz@h{\@lign$\m@th\displaystyle{}##$}%
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \ifnum\row@=\@ne
+ \global\totwidth@\wdz@
+ \global\lineht@\ht\z@
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global\totwidth@\wdz@
+ \global\lineht@\dp\z@
+ \fi
+ \crcr
+ #1%
+ \crcr
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ifx\df@tag\@empty\else\global\tag@true\fi
+ \if@eqnsw\global\tag@true\fi
+ \iftag@
+ \setboxz@h{%
+ \if@eqnsw
+ \stepcounter{equation}%
+ \tagform@\theequation
+ \else
+ \df@tag
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \global\tagwidth@\wdz@
+ \dimen@\totwidth@
+ \advance\dimen@\tagwidth@
+ \advance\dimen@\multlinetaggap
+ \iftagsleft@\else
+ \if@fleqn
+ \advance\dimen@\@mathmargin
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifdim\dimen@>\displaywidth
+ \global\shifttag@true
+ \else
+ \global\shifttag@false
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \restorecounters@
+ \endgroup
+}
+\iftagsleft@
+ \def\shoveright#1{%
+ #1%
+ \hfilneg
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ }
+\else
+ \def\shoveright#1{%
+ #1%
+ \hfilneg
+ \iftag@
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \else
+ \hskip\tagwidth@
+ \hskip\multlinetaggap
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi
+
+\if@fleqn
+ \def\shoveleft#1{#1}%
+\else
+ \iftagsleft@
+ \def\shoveleft#1{%
+ \setboxz@h{$\m@th\displaystyle{}#1$}%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m@th\displaystyle#1$}%
+ \hfilneg
+ \iftag@
+ \ifshifttag@
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \else
+ \hskip\tagwidth@
+ \hskip\multlinetaggap
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \fi
+ \hskip.5\wd\@ne
+ \hskip-.5\wdz@
+ #1%
+ }
+ \else
+ \def\shoveleft#1{%
+ \setboxz@h{$\m@th\displaystyle{}#1$}%
+ \setbox\@ne\hbox{$\m@th\displaystyle#1$}%
+ \hfilneg
+ \hskip\multlinegap
+ \hskip.5\wd\@ne
+ \hskip-.5\wdz@
+ #1%
+ }
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@saveprimitive\leqno\@@leqno
+\@saveprimitive\eqno\@@eqno
+\def\eqno{\@@eqno\let\eqno\relax\let\leqno\relax}
+\def\leqno{\@@leqno\let\leqno\relax\let\eqno\relax}
+\let\veqno=\@@eqno
+\iftagsleft@ \let\veqno=\@@leqno \fi
+\@ifundefined{SK@@label}{%
+ \let\SK@@label\relax \let\SK@equationtrue\relax
+}{}
+\let\reset@equation\@empty
+\let\alt@tag\@empty
+\def\tag@in@display#1#{\relax\tag@in@display@a{#1}}
+\def\tag@in@display@a#1#2{%
+ \iftag@
+ \invalid@tag{Multiple \string\tag}\relax
+ \else
+ \global\tag@true \nonumber \reset@equation \st@rredtrue
+ \if *\string#1%
+ \gdef\alt@tag{\def\SK@tagform@{#2\@gobble}%
+ \ifx\SK@@label\relax \let\tagform@\SK@tagform@ \fi
+ }%
+ \make@df@tag@@{#2}%
+ \else
+ \make@df@tag@@@{#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\let\restore@hfuzz\@empty
+\def\mathdisplay#1{%
+ \ifmmode \@badmath
+ \else
+ $$\def\@currenvir{#1}%
+ \let\dspbrk@context\z@
+ \let\tag\tag@in@display \let\label\label@in@display \SK@equationtrue
+ \global\let\df@label\@empty \global\let\df@tag\@empty
+ \global\tag@false
+ \let\mathdisplay@push\mathdisplay@@push
+ \let\mathdisplay@pop\mathdisplay@@pop
+ \if@fleqn
+ \edef\restore@hfuzz{\hfuzz\the\hfuzz\relax}%
+ \hfuzz\maxdimen
+ \setbox\z@\hbox to\displaywidth\bgroup
+ \let\split@warning\relax \restore@hfuzz
+ \everymath\@emptytoks \m@th $\displaystyle
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\endmathdisplay#1{%
+ \ifmmode \else \@badmath \fi
+ \endmathdisplay@a
+ $$%
+ \global\let\df@label\@empty \global\let\df@tag\@empty
+ \global\tag@false \global\let\alt@tag\@empty
+ \global\@eqnswfalse
+}
+\def\endmathdisplay@a{%
+ \if@eqnsw \gdef\df@tag{\tagform@\theequation}\fi
+ \if@fleqn \@xp\endmathdisplay@fleqn
+ \else \ifx\df@tag\@empty \else \veqno \alt@tag \df@tag \fi
+ \ifx\df@label\@empty \else \@xp\ltx@label\@xp{\df@label}\fi
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\dspbrk@lvl>\m@ne
+ \postdisplaypenalty -\@getpen\dspbrk@lvl
+ \global\dspbrk@lvl\m@ne
+ \fi
+}
+\let\too@wide\@ne
+\def\endmathdisplay@fleqn{%
+ $\hfil\hskip\@mathmargin\egroup
+ \ifnum\badness<\inf@bad \let\too@wide\@ne \else \let\too@wide\z@ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty\df@tag
+ \else
+ \setbox4\hbox{\df@tag
+ \ifx\df@label\@empty \else \@xp\ltx@label\@xp{\df@label}\fi
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \csname emdf@%
+ \ifx\df@tag\@empty U\else \iftagsleft@ L\else R\fi\fi
+ \endcsname
+}
+\def\emdf@U{%
+ \restore@hfuzz
+ \ifodd\too@wide % not too wide: just need to swap the glue around
+ \hbox to\displaywidth{\hskip\@mathmargin\unhbox\z@\unskip}%
+ \else % M+B > displaywidth
+ \emdf@Ua
+ \fi
+}
+\def\emdf@Ua{%
+ \hbox to\columnwidth{%
+ \ifdim\displayindent>\z@
+ \hskip\displayindent minus\displayindent
+ \fi
+ \hskip\@mathmargin \unhbox\z@ \unskip
+ }%
+ \displayindent\z@ \displaywidth\columnwidth
+}
+\def\emdf@R{%
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox to\displaywidth{%
+ \hskip\@mathmargin \unhcopy\z@\unskip\hfil\hskip\mintagsep\copy4
+ }%
+ \restore@hfuzz
+ \ifnum\badness<\inf@bad \box\tw@ \else \emdf@Ra \fi
+}
+\def\emdf@Ra{%
+ \skip@\displayindent minus\displayindent
+ \displayindent\z@ \displaywidth\columnwidth
+ \spread@equation \everycr{}\tabskip\z@skip
+ \halign{\hbox to\displaywidth{##}\cr
+ \relax
+ \ifdim\skip@>\z@ \hskip\skip@ \fi
+ \hskip\@mathmargin\unhbox\z@\unskip\hfil\cr
+ \noalign{\raise@tag}%
+ \hfil\box4 \cr}%
+}
+\def\emdf@L{%
+ \@tempdima\@mathmargin
+ \advance\@tempdima-\wd4 \advance\@tempdima-\mintagsep
+ \skip@\@tempdima minus\@tempdima
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox to\displaywidth{%
+ \copy4\hskip\mintagsep
+ \ifdim\skip@>\z@ \hskip\skip@\fi
+ \unhcopy\z@\unskip
+ }%
+ \restore@hfuzz
+ \ifnum\badness<\inf@bad \box\tw@ \else \emdf@La \fi
+}
+\def\emdf@La{%
+ \spread@equation \everycr{}\tabskip\z@skip
+ \halign{\hbox to\displaywidth{##}\cr
+ \box4 \hfil \cr
+ \noalign{\raise@tag}%
+ \hskip\@mathmargin\unhbox\z@\unskip\hfil\cr}%
+}
+\newtoks\mathdisplay@stack
+\let\mathdisplay@push\@empty
+\def\mathdisplay@@push{%
+ \begingroup
+ \toks@\@xp{\df@label}\@temptokena\@xp{\df@tag}%
+ \toks8\@xp{\alt@tag}%
+ \edef\@tempa{%
+ \global\if@eqnsw\@nx\@eqnswtrue\else\@nx\@eqnswfalse\fi
+ \global\iftag@\@nx\tag@false\else\@nx\tag@true\fi
+ \gdef\@nx\df@label{\the\toks@}\gdef\@nx\df@tag{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \gdef\@nx\alt@tag{\the\toks8}%
+ \global\mathdisplay@stack{\the\mathdisplay@stack}%
+ }%
+ \global\mathdisplay@stack\@xp{\@tempa}
+ \endgroup
+}
+\let\mathdisplay@pop\@empty
+\def\mathdisplay@@pop{\the\mathdisplay@stack}
+\renewenvironment{equation}{%
+ \incr@eqnum
+ \mathdisplay@push
+ \st@rredfalse \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \mathdisplay{equation}%
+}{%
+ \endmathdisplay{equation}%
+ \mathdisplay@pop
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+\newenvironment{equation*}{%
+ \mathdisplay@push
+ \st@rredtrue \global\@eqnswfalse
+ \mathdisplay{equation*}%
+}{%
+ \endmathdisplay{equation*}%
+ \mathdisplay@pop
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\[}{\begin{equation*}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\]}{\end{equation*}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `amsmath.sty'.
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
index b470b49082..71b273d85c 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsmath.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
index bf55cb2b5b..1543a5c08e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsopn.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdf
index b79a9aec65..73e4af364a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amstext.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
index 989c9c7207..77ac075445 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/amsxtra.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt
index eddb5f581a..054633ff2d 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/changes.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,12 @@
#########################
+# 2019-10-01b Release
+#########################
+
+2019-10-11 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org>
+
+ * build.lua: package amsmath-2018-12-01.sty (only ctan build script no source changes)
+
+#########################
# 2019-10-01 Release
#########################
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
index ecbe8ec55f..9250612b54 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/subeqn.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdf
index f1d59590fe..4db485d6c8 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/technote.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdf b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdf
index 37d487af69..f1af9357a3 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/amsmath/testmath.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md b/macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md
index aa93b7b76a..a3fbe5d733 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/README.md
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
The LaTeX `graphics` bundle
===========================
-Release 2019-10-01
+Release 2019-10-01 patch level 1
Overview
--------
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt b/macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt
index 0859498863..71e91fc85f 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/changes.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,10 @@ completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that
are not part of the distribution.
=======================================================================
+2019-10-08 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org>
+
+ * graphics.dtx: fallback definitions of \set@curr@file etc added
+
#########################
# 2019-10-01 Release
#########################
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdf
index 5fcf4004c8..e92ca964da 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/color.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdf
index c42c229781..85849cfb08 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/drivers.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdf
index 8cea591b62..6f3b273256 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/epsfig.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx b/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx
index f2471e94bb..b6de6023d4 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.dtx
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
%<driver> \ProvidesFile{graphics.drv}
% \fi
% \ProvidesFile{graphics.dtx}
- [2019/07/20 v1.3b Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)]
+ [2019/10/08 v1.3c Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)]
%
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
@@ -1043,6 +1043,38 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@curr@file}
+% \begin{macro}{\quote@name}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{2019/10/08}
+% {Definitions added for old formats}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Gin@temp#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m@ne
+ \xdef\@curr@file{\expandafter\string\csname #1\endcsname}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+\ifx\set@curr@file\@Gin@temp
+ \let\set@curr@file\@undefined
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\set@curr@file\@undefined
+\def\set@curr@file#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m@ne
+ \xdef\@curr@file{\expandafter\string\csname\@firstofone#1\@empty\endcsname}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+\def\quote@name#1{"\quote@@name#1\@gobble""}
+\def\quote@@name#1"{#1\quote@@name}
+\def\unquote@name#1{\quote@@name#1\@gobble"}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
% \begin{macro}{\Ginclude@graphics}
% The main internal function implementing graphics file inclusion.
% |#1| is the file name.
@@ -1069,6 +1101,7 @@
\let\input@path\Ginput@path
% \end{macrocode}
% A lot of quote juggling going on here (room for improvements).
+%
% \begin{macrocode}
\set@curr@file{#1}%
\edef\uq@curr@file{\expandafter\unquote@name\expandafter{\@curr@file}}%
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdf
index 09b9ccf731..59f74f7709 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphics.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdf
index 03c7c82bf0..70a0feb1fb 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/graphicx.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf
index cc7e1453f7..f73199435e 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdf
index bcc003adc5..96954471f1 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/keyval.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdf
index e3109c11b7..b5b1b4bd11 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/lscape.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdf
index 1cc137e63c..523c139cb8 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotating.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdf
index 1171570641..0fd60e327a 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/rotex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdf b/macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdf
index 954700105f..067a595954 100644
--- a/macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdf
+++ b/macros/latex/required/graphics/trig.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-backend.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-backend.tex
index 21cdd728c1..e99a95ed26 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-backend.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-backend.tex
@@ -1,1084 +1,1084 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-backend
-
-\startchapter[reference=backend,title={The backend libraries}]
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {pdf} library}][library=pdf]
-
-\topicindex{backend}
-\topicindex{\PDF}
-
-This library contains variables and functions that are related to the \PDF\
-backend. You can find more details about the expected values to setters in \in
-{section} [backendprimitives].
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {mapfile}, \type {mapline}}]
-
-\topicindex{map files}
-\topicindex{files+map}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-pdf.mapfile(<string> map file)
-pdf.mapline(<string> map line)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-These two functions can be used to replace primitives \orm {pdfmapfile} and
-\orm {pdfmapline} inherited from \PDFTEX. They expect a string as only
-parameter and have no return value. The first character in a map line can be
-\type {-}, \type {+} or \type {=} which means as much as remove, add or replace
-this line. They are not state setters but act immediately.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][catalog|info|names|trailer]}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+trailer}
-\topicindex{\PDF+catalog}
-\topicindex{\PDF+info}
-
-\libindex{setcatalog} \libindex{getcatalog}
-\libindex{setinfo} \libindex{getinfo}
-\libindex{setnames} \libindex{getnames}
-\libindex{settrailer} \libindex{gettrailer}
-
-These functions complement the corresponding \PDF\ backend token lists dealing
-with metadata. The value types are strings and they are written to the \PDF\
-file directly after the token registers set at the \TEX\ end are written.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][pageattributes|pageresources|pagesattributes]}}]
-
-\libindex{setpageattributes} \libindex{getpageattributes}
-\libindex{setpageresources} \libindex{getpageresources}
-\libindex{setpagesattributes} \libindex{getpagesattributes}
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+page attributes}
-\topicindex{\PDF+page resources}
-
-These functions complement the corresponding \PDF\ backend token lists dealing
-with page resources. The variables have no interaction with the corresponding \PDF\
-backend token register. They are written to the \PDF\ file directly after the
-token registers set at the \TEX\ end are written.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][xformattributes|xformresources]}}]
-
-\libindex{setxformattributes} \libindex{getxformattributes}
-\libindex{setxformresources} \libindex{getxformresources}
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+xform attributes}
-\topicindex{\PDF+xform resources}
-
-These functions complement the corresponding \PDF\ backend token lists dealing
-with reuseable boxes and images. The variables have no interaction with the
-corresponding \PDF\ backend token register. They are written to the \PDF\
-file directly after the token registers set at the \TEX\ end are written.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][major|minor]version}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+version}
-
-\libindex{getmajorversion} \libindex{setmajorversion}
-\libindex{getminorversion} \libindex{setminorversion}
-
-You can set both the major and minor version of the output. The major version is
-normally~1 but when set to~2 some data will not be written to the file in order
-to comply with the standard. What minor version you set depends on what \PDF\
-features you use. This is out of control of \LUATEX.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getcreationdate}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+date}
-
-\libindex{getcreationdate}
-
-This function returns a string with the date in the format that ends up in the
-\PDF\ file, in this case it's: {\tttf \cldcontext{pdf.getcreationdate()}}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]inclusionerrorlevel} and \type {[set|get]ignoreunknownimages}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+options}
-
-\libindex{getinclusionerrorlevel} \libindex{setinclusionerrorlevel}
-\libindex{getignoreunknownimages} \libindex{setignoreunknownimages}
-
-These variable control how error in included image are treated. They are modeled
-after the \PDFTEX\ equivalents.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]suppressoptionalinfo}, \type {[set|get]trailerid}
-and \type {[set|get]omitcidset}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+options}
-\topicindex{\PDF+trailer}
-
-\libindex{getsuppressoptionalinfo} \libindex{setsuppressoptionalinfo}
-\libindex{gettrailerid} \libindex{settrailerid}
-\libindex{getomitcidset} \libindex{setomitcidset}
-\libindex{getomitcharset} \libindex{setomitcharset}
-
-The optional info bitset (a number) determines what kind of info gets flushed.
-By default we flush all. See \in {section} [sec:pdfextensions] for more details.
-
-You can set your own trailer id. This has to be string containing valid \PDF\
-array content with checksums.
-
-The cidset and charset flags (numbers) disables inclusion of a so called \type
-{CIDSet} and \type {CharSet} entries, which can be handy when aiming at some of
-the many \PDF\ substandards.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][obj|]compresslevel} and \type {[set|get]recompress}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+compression}
-
-\libindex{getcompresslevel} \libindex{setcompresslevel}
-\libindex{getobjcompresslevel} \libindex{setobjcompresslevel}
-\libindex{getrecompress} \libindex{setrecompress}
-
-These functions set the level stream compression. When object compression is
-enabled multiple objects will be packed in a compressed stream which saves space.
-The minimum values are~0, the maxima are~9.
-
-When recompression is to~1 compressed objects will be decompressed and when
-compresslevel is larger than zero they will then be recompressed. This is mostly
-a debugging feature and should not be relied upon.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]gentounicode}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+unicode}
-
-\libindex{getgentounicode} \libindex{setgentounicode}
-
-This flag enables tounicode generation (like in \PDFTEX). Normally the values are
-provided by the font loader.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]decimaldigits}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+precision}
-
-\libindex{getdecimaldigits} \libindex{setdecimaldigits}
-
-These two functions set the accuracy of floats written to the \PDF file. You can
-set any value but the backend will not go below~3 and above~6.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]pkresolution}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+resolution}
-
-\libindex{getpkresolution} \libindex{setpkresolution}
-
-These setter takes two arguments: the resolution and an optional zero or one that
-indicates if this is a fixed one. The getter returns these two values.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getlast[obj|link|annot]} and \type {getretval}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
-\topicindex{\PDF+annotations}
-
-\libindex{getlastobj} \libindex{setlastobj}
-\libindex{getlastlink} \libindex{setlastlink}
-\libindex{getlastannot} \libindex{setlastannot}
-\libindex{getretval}
-
-These status variables are similar to the ones traditionally used in the backend
-interface at the \TEX\ end.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getmaxobjnum} and \type {getobjtype}, \type {getfontname},
-\type {getfontobjnum}, \type {getfontsize}, \type {getxformname}}]
-
-\libindex{getmaxobjnum}
-\libindex{getobjtype}
-\libindex{getfontname}
-\libindex{getfontobjnum}
-\libindex{getfontsize}
-\libindex{getxformname}
-
-These introspective helpers are mostly used when you construct \PDF\ objects
-yourself and need for instance information about a (to be) embedded font.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]origin}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+positioning}
-
-\libindex{setorigin} \libindex{getorigin}
-
-This one is used to set the horizonal and|/|or vertical offset, a traditional
-backend property.
-
-\starttyping
-pdf.setorigin() -- sets both to 0pt
-pdf.setorigin(tex.sp("1in")) -- sets both to 1in
-pdf.setorigin(tex.sp("1in"),tex.sp("1in"))
-\stoptyping
-
-The counterpart of this function returns two values.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]imageresolution}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+resolution}
-
-\libindex{setimageresolution} \libindex{getimageresolution}
-
-These two functions relate to the imageresolution that is used when the image
-itself doesn't provide a non|-|zero x or y resolution.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][link|dest|thread|xform]margin}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+margins}
-
-\libindex{getlinkmargin} \libindex{setlinkmargin}
-\libindex{getdestmargin} \libindex{setdestmargin}
-\libindex{getthreadmargin} \libindex{setthreadmargin}
-\libindex{getxformmargin} \libindex{setxformmargin}
-\libindex{getmarginmargin} \libindex{setmarginmargin}
-
-These functions can be used to set and retrieve the margins that are added to the
-natural bounding boxes of the respective objects.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {get[pos|hpos|vpos]}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+positions}
-
-\libindex{getpos}
-\libindex{gethpos}
-\libindex{getvpos}
-
-These functions get current location on the output page, measured from its lower
-left corner. The values return scaled points as units.
-
-\starttyping
-local h, v = pdf.getpos()
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[has|get]matrix}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+matrix}
-
-\libindex{getmatrix} \libindex{hasmatrix}
-
-The current matrix transformation is available via the \type {getmatrix} command,
-which returns 6 values: \type {sx}, \type {rx}, \type {ry}, \type {sy}, \type
-{tx}, and \type {ty}. The \type {hasmatrix} function returns \type {true} when a
-matrix is applied.
-
-\starttyping
-if pdf.hasmatrix() then
- local sx, rx, ry, sy, tx, ty = pdf.getmatrix()
- -- do something useful or not
-end
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {print}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+print to}
-
-\libindex{print}
-
-You can print a string to the \PDF\ document from within a \lpr {latelua} call.
-This function is not to be used inside \prm {directlua} unless you know {\it
-exactly} what you are doing.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-pdf.print(<string> s)
-pdf.print(<string> type, <string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The optional parameter can be used to mimic the behavior of \PDF\ literals: the
-\type {type} is \type {direct} or \type {page}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {immediateobj}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
-
-\libindex{immediateobj}
-
-This function creates a \PDF\ object and immediately writes it to the \PDF\ file.
-It is modelled after \PDFTEX's \prm {immediate} \orm {pdfobj} primitives. All
-function variants return the object number of the newly generated object.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj(<string> objtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj("file", <string> filename)
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj("stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj("streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The first version puts the \type {objtext} raw into an object. Only the object
-wrapper is automatically generated, but any internal structure (like \type {<<
->>} dictionary markers) needs to be provided by the user. The second version with
-keyword \type {file} as first argument puts the contents of the file with name
-\type {filename} raw into the object. The third version with keyword \type
-{stream} creates a stream object and puts the \type {streamtext} raw into the
-stream. The stream length is automatically calculated. The optional \type
-{attrtext} goes into the dictionary of that object. The fourth version with
-keyword \type {streamfile} does the same as the third one, it just reads the
-stream data raw from a file.
-
-An optional first argument can be given to make the function use a previously
-reserved \PDF\ object.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, <string> objtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, "file", <string> filename)
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, "stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, "streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type{obj}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
-
-\libindex{obj}
-
-This function creates a \PDF\ object, which is written to the \PDF\ file only
-when referenced, e.g., by \type {refobj()}.
-
-All function variants return the object number of the newly generated object, and
-there are two separate calling modes. The first mode is modelled after \PDFTEX's
-\orm {pdfobj} primitive.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj(<string> objtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj("file", <string> filename)
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj("stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj("streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-An optional first argument can be given to make the function use a previously
-reserved \PDF\ object.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj(<integer> n, <string> objtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj(<integer> n, "file", <string> filename)
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj(<integer> n, "stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
-<number> n =
- pdf.obj(<integer> n, "streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The second mode accepts a single argument table with key--value pairs.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = pdf.obj {
- type = <string>,
- immediate = <boolean>,
- objnum = <number>,
- attr = <string>,
- compresslevel = <number>,
- objcompression = <boolean>,
- file = <string>,
- string = <string>,
- nolength = <boolean>,
-}
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {type} field can have the values \type {raw} and \type {stream}, this
-field is required, the others are optional (within constraints). When \type
-{nolength} is set, there will be no \type {/Length} entry added to the
-dictionary.
-
-Note: this mode makes \type{obj} look more flexible than it actually is: the
-constraints from the separate parameter version still apply, so for example you
-can't have both \type {string} and \type {file} at the same time.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {refobj}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
-
-\libindex{refobj}
-
-This function, the \LUA\ version of the \orm {pdfrefobj} primitive, references an
-object by its object number, so that the object will be written to the \PDF\ file.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-pdf.refobj(<integer> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function works in both the \prm {directlua} and \lpr {latelua} environment.
-Inside \prm {directlua} a new whatsit node \quote {pdf_refobj} is created, which
-will be marked for flushing during page output and the object is then written
-directly after the page, when also the resources objects are written to the \PDF\
-file. Inside \lpr {latelua} the object will be marked for flushing.
-
-This function has no return values.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {reserveobj}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
-
-\libindex{reserveobj}
-
-This function creates an empty \PDF\ object and returns its number.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = pdf.reserveobj()
-<number> n = pdf.reserveobj("annot")
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getpageref}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+pages}
-
-\libindex{getpageref}
-
-The object number of a page can be fetched with this function. This can be a
-forward reference so when you ask for a future page, you do get a number back.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = pdf.getpageref(123)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {registerannot}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+annotations}
-
-\libindex{registerannot}
-
-This function adds an object number to the \type {/Annots} array for the current
-page without doing anything else. This function can only be used from within
-\lpr {latelua}.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-pdf.registerannot (<number> objnum)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {newcolorstack}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+color stack}
-
-\libindex{newcolorstack}
-
-This function allocates a new color stack and returns it's id. The arguments
-are the same as for the similar backend extension primitive.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-pdf.newcolorstack("0 g","page",true) -- page|direct|origin
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {setfontattributes}}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+fonts}
-
-\libindex{setfontattributes}
-
-This function will force some additional code into the font resource. It can for
-instance be used to add a custom \type {ToUnicode} vector to a bitmap file.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-pdf.setfontattributes(<number> font id, <string> pdf code)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {pdfe} library}][library=pdfe]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Introduction}]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+analyze}
-\topicindex{\PDF+\type{pdfe}}
-
-The \type {pdfe} library replaces the \type {epdf} library and provides an
-interface to \PDF\ files. It uses the same code as is used for \PDF\ image
-inclusion. The \type {pplib} library by Paweł Jackowski replaces the \type
-{poppler} (derived from \type {xpdf}) library.
-
-A \PDF\ file is basically a tree of objects and one descends into the tree via
-dictionaries (key/value) and arrays (index/value). There are a few topmost
-dictionaries that start at root that are accessed more directly.
-
-Although everything in \PDF\ is basically an object we only wrap a few in so
-called userdata \LUA\ objects.
-
-\starttabulate
-\BC \PDF \BC \LUA \NC \NR
-\NC null \NC nil \NC \NR
-\NC boolean \NC boolean \NC \NR
-\NC integer \NC integer \NC \NR
-\NC float \NC number \NC \NR
-\NC name \NC string \NC \NR
-\NC string \NC string \NC \NR
-\NC array \NC array userdatum \NC \NR
-\NC dictionary \NC dictionary userdatum \NC \NR
-\NC stream \NC stream userdatum (with related dictionary) \NC \NR
-\NC reference \NC reference userdatum \NC \NR
-\stoptabulate
-
-The regular getters return these \LUA\ data types but one can also get more
-detailed information.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {open}, \type {new}, \type {getstatus}, \type {close}, \type {unencrypt}}]
-
-\libindex {open}
-\libindex {new}
-\libindex {new}
-\libindex {getstatus}
-\libindex {close}
-\libindex {unencrypt}
-
-A document is loaded from a file or string
-
-\starttyping
-<pdfe document> = pdfe.open(filename)
-<pdfe document> = pdfe.new(somestring,somelength)
-\stoptyping
-
-Such a document is closed with:
-
-\starttyping
-pdfe.close(<pdfe document>)
-\stoptyping
-
-You can check if a document opened well by:
-
-\starttyping
-pdfe.getstatus(<pdfe document>)
-\stoptyping
-
-The returned codes are:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {-2} \NC the document failed to open \NC \NR
-\NC \type {-1} \NC the document is (still) protected \NC \NR
-\NC \type {0} \NC the document is not encrypted \NC \NR
-\NC \type {2} \NC the document has been unencrypted \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-An encrypted document can be unencrypted by the next command where instead of
-either password you can give \type {nil}:
-
-\starttyping
-pdfe.unencrypt(<pdfe document>,userpassword,ownerpassword)
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getsize}, \type {getversion}, \type {getnofobjects}, \type {getnofpages}}]
-
-\libindex {getsize}
-\libindex {getversion}
-\libindex {getnofobjects}
-\libindex {getnofpages}
-
-A successfully opened document can provide some information:
-
-\starttyping
-bytes = getsize(<pdfe document>)
-major, minor = getversion(<pdfe document>)
-n = getnofobjects(<pdfe document>)
-n = getnofpages(<pdfe document>)
-bytes, waste = getnofpages(<pdfe document>)
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {get[catalog|trailer|info]}}]
-
-\libindex {getcatalog}
-\libindex {gettrailer}
-\libindex {getinfo}
-
-For accessing the document structure you start with the so called catalog, a
-dictionary:
-
-\starttyping
-<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.getcatalog(<pdfe document>)
-\stoptyping
-
-The other two root dictionaries are accessed with:
-
-\starttyping
-<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.gettrailer(<pdfe document>)
-<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.getinfo(<pdfe document>)
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getpage}, \type {getbox}}]
-
-\libindex {getpage}
-\libindex {getbox}
-
-A specific page can conveniently be reached with the next command, which
-returns a dictionary. The first argument is to be a page dictionary.
-
-\starttyping
-<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.getpage(<pdfe dictionary>,pagenumber)
-\stoptyping
-
-Another convenience command gives you the (bounding) box of a (normally page)
-which can be inheritted from the document itself. An example of a valid box name
-is \type {MediaBox}.
-
-\starttyping
-pages = pdfe.getbox(<pdfe document>,boxname)
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {get[string|integer|number|boolean|name]}}]
-
-\libindex {getstring}
-\libindex {getinteger}
-\libindex {getnumber}
-\libindex {getboolean}
-\libindex {getname}
-
-Common values in dictionaries and arrays are strings, integers, floats, booleans
-and names (which are also strings) and these are also normal \LUA\ objects:
-
-\starttyping
-s = getstring (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-i = getinteger(<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-n = getnumber (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-b = getboolean(<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-n = getname (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {get[from][dictionary|array|stream]}}]
-
-\libindex {getdictionary} \libindex {getfromdictionary}
-\libindex {getarray} \libindex {getfromarray}
-\libindex {getstream} \libindex {getfromstream}
-
-Normally you will use an index in an array and key in a dictionary but dictionaries
-also accept an index. The size of an array or dictionary is available with the
-usual \type {#} operator.
-
-\starttyping
-<pdfe dictionary> = getdictionary(<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-<pdfe array> = getarray (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-<pdfe stream>,
-<pdfe dictionary> = getstream (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
-\stoptyping
-
-These commands return dictionaries, arrays and streams, which are dictionaries
-with a blob of data attached.
-
-Before we come to an alternative access mode, we mention that the objects provide
-access in a different way too, for instance this is valid:
-
-\starttyping
-print(pdfe.open("foo.pdf").Catalog.Type)
-\stoptyping
-
-At the topmost level there are \type {Catalog}, \type {Info}, \type {Trailer}
-and \type {Pages}, so this is also okay:
-
-\starttyping
-print(pdfe.open("foo.pdf").Pages[1])
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[open|close|readfrom][whole|]stream}}]
-
-\libindex {openstream}
-\libindex {closestream}
-\libindex {readfromstream}
-\libindex {readfromwholestream}
-
-Streams are sort of special. When your index or key hits a stream you get back a
-stream object and dictionary object. The dictionary you can access in the usual
-way and for the stream there are the following methods:
-
-\starttyping
-okay = openstream(<pdfe stream>,[decode])
- closestream(<pdfe stream>)
-str, n = readfromstream(<pdfe stream>)
-str, n = readwholestream(<pdfe stream>,[decode])
-\stoptyping
-
-You either read in chunks, or you ask for the whole. When reading in chunks, you
-need to open and close the stream yourself. The \type {n} value indicates the
-length read. The \type {decode} parameter controls if the stream data gets
-uncompressed.
-
-As with dictionaries, you can access fields in a stream dictionary in the usual
-\LUA\ way too. You get the content when you \quote {call} the stream. You can
-pass a boolean that indicates if the stream has to be decompressed.
-
-% pdfe.objectcodes = objectcodes
-% pdfe.stringcodes = stringcodes
-% pdfe.encryptioncodes = encryptioncodes
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getfrom[dictionary|array]}}]
-
-\libindex {getfromdictionary}
-\libindex {getfromarray}
-
-In addition to the interface described before, there is also a bit lower level
-interface available.
-
-\starttyping
-key, type, value, detail = getfromdictionary(<pdfe dictionary>,index)
-type, value, detail = getfromarray(<pdfe array>,index)
-\stoptyping
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|l|l|]
-\DB type \BC meaning \BC value \BC detail \NC \NR
-\NC \type {0} \NC none \NC nil \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type {1} \NC null \NC nil \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type {2} \NC boolean \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type {3} \NC boolean \NC integer \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type {4} \NC number \NC float \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type {5} \NC name \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type {6} \NC string \NC string \NC hex \NC \NR
-\NC \type {7} \NC array \NC arrayobject \NC size \NC \NR
-\NC \type {8} \NC dictionary \NC dictionaryobject \NC size \NC \NR
-\NC \type {9} \NC stream \NC streamobject \NC dictionary size \NC \NR
-\NC \type {10} \NC reference \NC integer \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-A \type {hex} string is (in the \PDF\ file) surrounded by \type {<>} while plain
-strings are bounded by \type {<>}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {[dictionary|array]totable}}]
-
-\libindex {dictionarytotable}
-\libindex {arraytotable}
-
-All entries in a dictionary or table can be fetched with the following commands
-where the return values are a hashed or indexed table.
-
-\starttyping
-hash = dictionarytotable(<pdfe dictionary>)
-list = arraytotable(<pdfe array>)
-\stoptyping
-
-You can get a list of pages with:
-
-\starttyping
-{ { <pdfe dictionary>, size, objnum }, ... } = pagestotable(<pdfe document>)
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {getfromreference}}]
-
-\libindex {getfromreference}
-
-Because you can have unresolved references, a reference object can be resolved
-with:
-
-\starttyping
-<pdfe dictionary|array|stream> = getfromreference(<pdfe reference>)
-\stoptyping
-
-So, you get back a new \type {pdfe} userdata object that you can query.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Memory streams}][library=pdfe]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+memory streams}
-
-\libindex {new}
-
-The \type {pdfe.new} that takes three arguments:
-
-\starttabulate
-\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {stream} \NC this is a (in low level \LUA\ speak) light userdata
- object, i.e.\ a pointer to a sequence of bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type {length} \NC this is the length of the stream in bytes (the stream can
- have embedded zeros) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {name} \NC optional, this is a unique identifier that is used for
- hashing the stream, so that multiple doesn't use more
- memory \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The third argument is optional. When it is not given the function will return an
-\type {pdfe} document object as with a regular file, otherwise it will return a
-filename that can be used elsewhere (e.g.\ in the image library) to reference the
-stream as pseudo file.
-
-Instead of a light userdata stream (which is actually fragile but handy when you
-come from a library) you can also pass a \LUA\ string, in which case the given
-length is (at most) the string length.
-
-The function returns an \type {pdfe} object and a string. The string can be used in
-the \type {img} library instead of a filename. You need to prevent garbage
-collection of the object when you use it as image (for instance by storing it
-somewhere).
-
-Both the memory stream and it's use in the image library is experimental and can
-change. In case you wonder where this can be used: when you use the swiglib
-library for \type {graphicmagick}, it can return such a userdata object. This
-permits conversion in memory and passing the result directly to the backend. This
-might save some runtime in one|-|pass workflows. This feature is currently not
-meant for production and we might come up with a better implementation.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {pdfscanner} library}][library=pdfscanner]
-
-\topicindex{\PDF+scanner}
-
-\libindex {scan}
-
-The \type {pdfscanner} library allows interpretation of \PDF\ content streams and
-\type {/ToUnicode} (cmap) streams. You can get those streams from the \type
-{pdfe} library, as explained in an earlier section. There is only a single
-top|-|level function in this library:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-pdfscanner.scan (<pdfe stream>, <table> operatortable, <table> info)
-pdfscanner.scan (<pdfe array>, <table> operatortable, <table> info)
-pdfscanner.scan (<string>, <table> operatortable, <table> info)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The first argument should be a \LUA\ string or a stream or array onject coming
-from the \type {pdfe} library. The second argument, \type {operatortable}, should
-be a \LUA\ table where the keys are \PDF\ operator name strings and the values
-are \LUA\ functions (defined by you) that are used to process those operators.
-The functions are called whenever the scanner finds one of these \PDF\ operators
-in the content stream(s). The functions are called with two arguments: the \type
-{scanner} object itself, and the \type {info} table that was passed are the third
-argument to \type {pdfscanner.scan}.
-
-Internally, \type {pdfscanner.scan} loops over the \PDF\ operators in the
-stream(s), collecting operands on an internal stack until it finds a \PDF\
-operator. If that \PDF\ operator's name exists in \type {operatortable}, then the
-associated function is executed. After the function has run (or when there is no
-function to execute) the internal operand stack is cleared in preparation for the
-next operator, and processing continues.
-
-The \type {scanner} argument to the processing functions is needed because it
-offers various methods to get the actual operands from the internal operand
-stack.
-
-A simple example of processing a \PDF's document stream could look like this:
-
-\starttyping
-local operatortable = { }
-
-operatortable.Do = function(scanner,info)
- local resources = info.resources
- if resources then
- local val = scanner:pop()
- local name = val[2]
- local xobject = resources.XObject
- print(info.space .. "Uses XObject " .. name)
- local resources = xobject.Resources
- if resources then
- local newinfo = {
- space = info.space .. " ",
- resources = resources,
- }
- pdfscanner.scan(entry, operatortable, newinfo)
- end
- end
-end
-
-local function Analyze(filename)
- local doc = pdfe.open(filename)
- if doc then
- local pages = doc.Pages
- for i=1,#pages do
- local page = pages[i]
- local info = {
- space = " " ,
- resources = page.Resources,
- }
- print("Page " .. i)
- -- pdfscanner.scan(page.Contents,operatortable,info)
- pdfscanner.scan(page.Contents(),operatortable,info)
- end
- end
-end
-
-Analyze("foo.pdf")
-\stoptyping
-
-This example iterates over all the actual content in the \PDF, and prints out the
-found \type {XObject} names. While the code demonstrates quite some of the \type
-{pdfe} functions, let's focus on the type \type {pdfscanner} specific code
-instead.
-
-From the bottom up, the following line runs the scanner with the \PDF\ page's
-top|-|level content given in the first argument.
-
-The third argument, \type {info}, contains two entries: \type {space} is used to
-indent the printed output, and \type {resources} is needed so that embedded \type
-{XForms} can find their own content.
-
-The second argument, \type {operatortable} defines a processing function for a
-single \PDF\ operator, \type {Do}.
-
-The function \type {Do} prints the name of the current \type {XObject}, and then
-starts a new scanner for that object's content stream, under the condition that
-the \type {XObject} is in fact a \type {/Form}. That nested scanner is called
-with new \type {info} argument with an updated \type {space} value so that the
-indentation of the output nicely nests, and with a new \type {resources} field
-to help the next iteration down to properly process any other, embedded \type
-{XObject}s.
-
-Of course, this is not a very useful example in practice, but for the purpose of
-demonstrating \type {pdfscanner}, it is just long enough. It makes use of only
-one \type {scanner} method: \type {scanner:pop()}. That function pops the top
-operand of the internal stack, and returns a \LUA\ table where the object at index
-one is a string representing the type of the operand, and object two is its
-value.
-
-The list of possible operand types and associated \LUA\ value types is:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB types \BC type \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{integer} \NC <number> \NC \NR
-\NC \type{real} \NC <number> \NC \NR
-\NC \type{boolean} \NC <boolean> \NC \NR
-\NC \type{name} \NC <string> \NC \NR
-\NC \type{operator} \NC <string> \NC \NR
-\NC \type{string} \NC <string> \NC \NR
-\NC \type{array} \NC <table> \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dict} \NC <table> \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-In case of \type {integer} or \type {real}, the value is always a \LUA\ (floating
-point) number. In case of \type {name}, the leading slash is always stripped.
-
-In case of \type {string}, please bear in mind that \PDF\ actually supports
-different types of strings (with different encodings) in different parts of the
-\PDF\ document, so you may need to reencode some of the results; \type {pdfscanner}
-always outputs the byte stream without reencoding anything. \type {pdfscanner}
-does not differentiate between literal strings and hexadecimal strings (the
-hexadecimal values are decoded), and it treats the stream data for inline images
-as a string that is the single operand for \type {EI}.
-
-In case of \type {array}, the table content is a list of \type {pop} return
-values and in case of \type {dict}, the table keys are \PDF\ name strings and the
-values are \type {pop} return values.
-
-\libindex{pop}
-\libindex{popnumber}
-\libindex{popname}
-\libindex{popstring}
-\libindex{poparray}
-\libindex{popdictionary}
-\libindex{popboolean}
-\libindex{done}
-
-There are a few more methods defined that you can ask \type {scanner}:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB method \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{pop} \NC see above \NC \NR
-\NC \type{popnumber} \NC return only the value of a \type {real} or \type {integer} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{popname} \NC return only the value of a \type {name} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{popstring} \NC return only the value of a \type {string} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{poparray} \NC return only the value of a \type {array} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{popdictionary} \NC return only the value of a \type {dict} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{popboolean} \NC return only the value of a \type {boolean} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{done} \NC abort further processing of this \type {scan()} call \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {pop*} are convenience functions, and come in handy when you know the
-type of the operands beforehand (which you usually do, in \PDF). For example, the
-\type {Do} function could have used \type {local name = scanner:popname()}
-instead, because the single operand to the \type {Do} operator is always a \PDF\
-name object.
-
-The \type {done} function allows you to abort processing of a stream once you
-have learned everything you want to learn. This comes in handy while parsing
-\type {/ToUnicode}, because there usually is trailing garbage that you are not
-interested in. Without \type {done}, processing only ends at the end of the
-stream, possibly wasting \CPU\ cycles.
-
-{\em We keep the older names \type {popNumber}, \type {popName}, \type
-{popString}, \type {popArray}, \type {popDict} and \type {popBool} around.}
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-backend
+
+\startchapter[reference=backend,title={The backend libraries}]
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {pdf} library}][library=pdf]
+
+\topicindex{backend}
+\topicindex{\PDF}
+
+This library contains variables and functions that are related to the \PDF\
+backend. You can find more details about the expected values to setters in \in
+{section} [backendprimitives].
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {mapfile}, \type {mapline}}]
+
+\topicindex{map files}
+\topicindex{files+map}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+pdf.mapfile(<string> map file)
+pdf.mapline(<string> map line)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+These two functions can be used to replace primitives \orm {pdfmapfile} and
+\orm {pdfmapline} inherited from \PDFTEX. They expect a string as only
+parameter and have no return value. The first character in a map line can be
+\type {-}, \type {+} or \type {=} which means as much as remove, add or replace
+this line. They are not state setters but act immediately.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][catalog|info|names|trailer]}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+trailer}
+\topicindex{\PDF+catalog}
+\topicindex{\PDF+info}
+
+\libindex{setcatalog} \libindex{getcatalog}
+\libindex{setinfo} \libindex{getinfo}
+\libindex{setnames} \libindex{getnames}
+\libindex{settrailer} \libindex{gettrailer}
+
+These functions complement the corresponding \PDF\ backend token lists dealing
+with metadata. The value types are strings and they are written to the \PDF\
+file directly after the token registers set at the \TEX\ end are written.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][pageattributes|pageresources|pagesattributes]}}]
+
+\libindex{setpageattributes} \libindex{getpageattributes}
+\libindex{setpageresources} \libindex{getpageresources}
+\libindex{setpagesattributes} \libindex{getpagesattributes}
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+page attributes}
+\topicindex{\PDF+page resources}
+
+These functions complement the corresponding \PDF\ backend token lists dealing
+with page resources. The variables have no interaction with the corresponding \PDF\
+backend token register. They are written to the \PDF\ file directly after the
+token registers set at the \TEX\ end are written.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][xformattributes|xformresources]}}]
+
+\libindex{setxformattributes} \libindex{getxformattributes}
+\libindex{setxformresources} \libindex{getxformresources}
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+xform attributes}
+\topicindex{\PDF+xform resources}
+
+These functions complement the corresponding \PDF\ backend token lists dealing
+with reuseable boxes and images. The variables have no interaction with the
+corresponding \PDF\ backend token register. They are written to the \PDF\
+file directly after the token registers set at the \TEX\ end are written.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][major|minor]version}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+version}
+
+\libindex{getmajorversion} \libindex{setmajorversion}
+\libindex{getminorversion} \libindex{setminorversion}
+
+You can set both the major and minor version of the output. The major version is
+normally~1 but when set to~2 some data will not be written to the file in order
+to comply with the standard. What minor version you set depends on what \PDF\
+features you use. This is out of control of \LUATEX.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getcreationdate}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+date}
+
+\libindex{getcreationdate}
+
+This function returns a string with the date in the format that ends up in the
+\PDF\ file, in this case it's: {\tttf \cldcontext{pdf.getcreationdate()}}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]inclusionerrorlevel} and \type {[set|get]ignoreunknownimages}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+options}
+
+\libindex{getinclusionerrorlevel} \libindex{setinclusionerrorlevel}
+\libindex{getignoreunknownimages} \libindex{setignoreunknownimages}
+
+These variable control how error in included image are treated. They are modeled
+after the \PDFTEX\ equivalents.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]suppressoptionalinfo}, \type {[set|get]trailerid}
+and \type {[set|get]omitcidset}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+options}
+\topicindex{\PDF+trailer}
+
+\libindex{getsuppressoptionalinfo} \libindex{setsuppressoptionalinfo}
+\libindex{gettrailerid} \libindex{settrailerid}
+\libindex{getomitcidset} \libindex{setomitcidset}
+\libindex{getomitcharset} \libindex{setomitcharset}
+
+The optional info bitset (a number) determines what kind of info gets flushed.
+By default we flush all. See \in {section} [sec:pdfextensions] for more details.
+
+You can set your own trailer id. This has to be string containing valid \PDF\
+array content with checksums.
+
+The cidset and charset flags (numbers) disables inclusion of a so called \type
+{CIDSet} and \type {CharSet} entries, which can be handy when aiming at some of
+the many \PDF\ substandards.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][obj|]compresslevel} and \type {[set|get]recompress}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+compression}
+
+\libindex{getcompresslevel} \libindex{setcompresslevel}
+\libindex{getobjcompresslevel} \libindex{setobjcompresslevel}
+\libindex{getrecompress} \libindex{setrecompress}
+
+These functions set the level stream compression. When object compression is
+enabled multiple objects will be packed in a compressed stream which saves space.
+The minimum values are~0, the maxima are~9.
+
+When recompression is to~1 compressed objects will be decompressed and when
+compresslevel is larger than zero they will then be recompressed. This is mostly
+a debugging feature and should not be relied upon.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]gentounicode}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+unicode}
+
+\libindex{getgentounicode} \libindex{setgentounicode}
+
+This flag enables tounicode generation (like in \PDFTEX). Normally the values are
+provided by the font loader.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]decimaldigits}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+precision}
+
+\libindex{getdecimaldigits} \libindex{setdecimaldigits}
+
+These two functions set the accuracy of floats written to the \PDF file. You can
+set any value but the backend will not go below~3 and above~6.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]pkresolution}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+resolution}
+
+\libindex{getpkresolution} \libindex{setpkresolution}
+
+These setter takes two arguments: the resolution and an optional zero or one that
+indicates if this is a fixed one. The getter returns these two values.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getlast[obj|link|annot]} and \type {getretval}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
+\topicindex{\PDF+annotations}
+
+\libindex{getlastobj} \libindex{setlastobj}
+\libindex{getlastlink} \libindex{setlastlink}
+\libindex{getlastannot} \libindex{setlastannot}
+\libindex{getretval}
+
+These status variables are similar to the ones traditionally used in the backend
+interface at the \TEX\ end.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getmaxobjnum} and \type {getobjtype}, \type {getfontname},
+\type {getfontobjnum}, \type {getfontsize}, \type {getxformname}}]
+
+\libindex{getmaxobjnum}
+\libindex{getobjtype}
+\libindex{getfontname}
+\libindex{getfontobjnum}
+\libindex{getfontsize}
+\libindex{getxformname}
+
+These introspective helpers are mostly used when you construct \PDF\ objects
+yourself and need for instance information about a (to be) embedded font.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]origin}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+positioning}
+
+\libindex{setorigin} \libindex{getorigin}
+
+This one is used to set the horizonal and|/|or vertical offset, a traditional
+backend property.
+
+\starttyping
+pdf.setorigin() -- sets both to 0pt
+pdf.setorigin(tex.sp("1in")) -- sets both to 1in
+pdf.setorigin(tex.sp("1in"),tex.sp("1in"))
+\stoptyping
+
+The counterpart of this function returns two values.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get]imageresolution}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+resolution}
+
+\libindex{setimageresolution} \libindex{getimageresolution}
+
+These two functions relate to the imageresolution that is used when the image
+itself doesn't provide a non|-|zero x or y resolution.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[set|get][link|dest|thread|xform]margin}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+margins}
+
+\libindex{getlinkmargin} \libindex{setlinkmargin}
+\libindex{getdestmargin} \libindex{setdestmargin}
+\libindex{getthreadmargin} \libindex{setthreadmargin}
+\libindex{getxformmargin} \libindex{setxformmargin}
+\libindex{getmarginmargin} \libindex{setmarginmargin}
+
+These functions can be used to set and retrieve the margins that are added to the
+natural bounding boxes of the respective objects.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {get[pos|hpos|vpos]}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+positions}
+
+\libindex{getpos}
+\libindex{gethpos}
+\libindex{getvpos}
+
+These functions get current location on the output page, measured from its lower
+left corner. The values return scaled points as units.
+
+\starttyping
+local h, v = pdf.getpos()
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[has|get]matrix}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+matrix}
+
+\libindex{getmatrix} \libindex{hasmatrix}
+
+The current matrix transformation is available via the \type {getmatrix} command,
+which returns 6 values: \type {sx}, \type {rx}, \type {ry}, \type {sy}, \type
+{tx}, and \type {ty}. The \type {hasmatrix} function returns \type {true} when a
+matrix is applied.
+
+\starttyping
+if pdf.hasmatrix() then
+ local sx, rx, ry, sy, tx, ty = pdf.getmatrix()
+ -- do something useful or not
+end
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {print}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+print to}
+
+\libindex{print}
+
+You can print a string to the \PDF\ document from within a \lpr {latelua} call.
+This function is not to be used inside \prm {directlua} unless you know {\it
+exactly} what you are doing.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+pdf.print(<string> s)
+pdf.print(<string> type, <string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The optional parameter can be used to mimic the behavior of \PDF\ literals: the
+\type {type} is \type {direct} or \type {page}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {immediateobj}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
+
+\libindex{immediateobj}
+
+This function creates a \PDF\ object and immediately writes it to the \PDF\ file.
+It is modelled after \PDFTEX's \prm {immediate} \orm {pdfobj} primitives. All
+function variants return the object number of the newly generated object.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj(<string> objtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj("file", <string> filename)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj("stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj("streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The first version puts the \type {objtext} raw into an object. Only the object
+wrapper is automatically generated, but any internal structure (like \type {<<
+>>} dictionary markers) needs to be provided by the user. The second version with
+keyword \type {file} as first argument puts the contents of the file with name
+\type {filename} raw into the object. The third version with keyword \type
+{stream} creates a stream object and puts the \type {streamtext} raw into the
+stream. The stream length is automatically calculated. The optional \type
+{attrtext} goes into the dictionary of that object. The fourth version with
+keyword \type {streamfile} does the same as the third one, it just reads the
+stream data raw from a file.
+
+An optional first argument can be given to make the function use a previously
+reserved \PDF\ object.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, <string> objtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, "file", <string> filename)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, "stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.immediateobj(<integer> n, "streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type{obj}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
+
+\libindex{obj}
+
+This function creates a \PDF\ object, which is written to the \PDF\ file only
+when referenced, e.g., by \type {refobj()}.
+
+All function variants return the object number of the newly generated object, and
+there are two separate calling modes. The first mode is modelled after \PDFTEX's
+\orm {pdfobj} primitive.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj(<string> objtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj("file", <string> filename)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj("stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj("streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+An optional first argument can be given to make the function use a previously
+reserved \PDF\ object.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj(<integer> n, <string> objtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj(<integer> n, "file", <string> filename)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj(<integer> n, "stream", <string> streamtext, <string> attrtext)
+<number> n =
+ pdf.obj(<integer> n, "streamfile", <string> filename, <string> attrtext)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The second mode accepts a single argument table with key--value pairs.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = pdf.obj {
+ type = <string>,
+ immediate = <boolean>,
+ objnum = <number>,
+ attr = <string>,
+ compresslevel = <number>,
+ objcompression = <boolean>,
+ file = <string>,
+ string = <string>,
+ nolength = <boolean>,
+}
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {type} field can have the values \type {raw} and \type {stream}, this
+field is required, the others are optional (within constraints). When \type
+{nolength} is set, there will be no \type {/Length} entry added to the
+dictionary.
+
+Note: this mode makes \type{obj} look more flexible than it actually is: the
+constraints from the separate parameter version still apply, so for example you
+can't have both \type {string} and \type {file} at the same time.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {refobj}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
+
+\libindex{refobj}
+
+This function, the \LUA\ version of the \orm {pdfrefobj} primitive, references an
+object by its object number, so that the object will be written to the \PDF\ file.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+pdf.refobj(<integer> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function works in both the \prm {directlua} and \lpr {latelua} environment.
+Inside \prm {directlua} a new whatsit node \quote {pdf_refobj} is created, which
+will be marked for flushing during page output and the object is then written
+directly after the page, when also the resources objects are written to the \PDF\
+file. Inside \lpr {latelua} the object will be marked for flushing.
+
+This function has no return values.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {reserveobj}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
+
+\libindex{reserveobj}
+
+This function creates an empty \PDF\ object and returns its number.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = pdf.reserveobj()
+<number> n = pdf.reserveobj("annot")
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getpageref}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+pages}
+
+\libindex{getpageref}
+
+The object number of a page can be fetched with this function. This can be a
+forward reference so when you ask for a future page, you do get a number back.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = pdf.getpageref(123)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {registerannot}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+annotations}
+
+\libindex{registerannot}
+
+This function adds an object number to the \type {/Annots} array for the current
+page without doing anything else. This function can only be used from within
+\lpr {latelua}.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+pdf.registerannot (<number> objnum)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {newcolorstack}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+color stack}
+
+\libindex{newcolorstack}
+
+This function allocates a new color stack and returns it's id. The arguments
+are the same as for the similar backend extension primitive.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+pdf.newcolorstack("0 g","page",true) -- page|direct|origin
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {setfontattributes}}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+fonts}
+
+\libindex{setfontattributes}
+
+This function will force some additional code into the font resource. It can for
+instance be used to add a custom \type {ToUnicode} vector to a bitmap file.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+pdf.setfontattributes(<number> font id, <string> pdf code)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {pdfe} library}][library=pdfe]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Introduction}]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+objects}
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+analyze}
+\topicindex{\PDF+\type{pdfe}}
+
+The \type {pdfe} library replaces the \type {epdf} library and provides an
+interface to \PDF\ files. It uses the same code as is used for \PDF\ image
+inclusion. The \type {pplib} library by Paweł Jackowski replaces the \type
+{poppler} (derived from \type {xpdf}) library.
+
+A \PDF\ file is basically a tree of objects and one descends into the tree via
+dictionaries (key/value) and arrays (index/value). There are a few topmost
+dictionaries that start at root that are accessed more directly.
+
+Although everything in \PDF\ is basically an object we only wrap a few in so
+called userdata \LUA\ objects.
+
+\starttabulate
+\BC \PDF \BC \LUA \NC \NR
+\NC null \NC nil \NC \NR
+\NC boolean \NC boolean \NC \NR
+\NC integer \NC integer \NC \NR
+\NC float \NC number \NC \NR
+\NC name \NC string \NC \NR
+\NC string \NC string \NC \NR
+\NC array \NC array userdatum \NC \NR
+\NC dictionary \NC dictionary userdatum \NC \NR
+\NC stream \NC stream userdatum (with related dictionary) \NC \NR
+\NC reference \NC reference userdatum \NC \NR
+\stoptabulate
+
+The regular getters return these \LUA\ data types but one can also get more
+detailed information.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {open}, \type {new}, \type {getstatus}, \type {close}, \type {unencrypt}}]
+
+\libindex {open}
+\libindex {new}
+\libindex {new}
+\libindex {getstatus}
+\libindex {close}
+\libindex {unencrypt}
+
+A document is loaded from a file or string
+
+\starttyping
+<pdfe document> = pdfe.open(filename)
+<pdfe document> = pdfe.new(somestring,somelength)
+\stoptyping
+
+Such a document is closed with:
+
+\starttyping
+pdfe.close(<pdfe document>)
+\stoptyping
+
+You can check if a document opened well by:
+
+\starttyping
+pdfe.getstatus(<pdfe document>)
+\stoptyping
+
+The returned codes are:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {-2} \NC the document failed to open \NC \NR
+\NC \type {-1} \NC the document is (still) protected \NC \NR
+\NC \type {0} \NC the document is not encrypted \NC \NR
+\NC \type {2} \NC the document has been unencrypted \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+An encrypted document can be unencrypted by the next command where instead of
+either password you can give \type {nil}:
+
+\starttyping
+pdfe.unencrypt(<pdfe document>,userpassword,ownerpassword)
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getsize}, \type {getversion}, \type {getnofobjects}, \type {getnofpages}}]
+
+\libindex {getsize}
+\libindex {getversion}
+\libindex {getnofobjects}
+\libindex {getnofpages}
+
+A successfully opened document can provide some information:
+
+\starttyping
+bytes = getsize(<pdfe document>)
+major, minor = getversion(<pdfe document>)
+n = getnofobjects(<pdfe document>)
+n = getnofpages(<pdfe document>)
+bytes, waste = getnofpages(<pdfe document>)
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {get[catalog|trailer|info]}}]
+
+\libindex {getcatalog}
+\libindex {gettrailer}
+\libindex {getinfo}
+
+For accessing the document structure you start with the so called catalog, a
+dictionary:
+
+\starttyping
+<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.getcatalog(<pdfe document>)
+\stoptyping
+
+The other two root dictionaries are accessed with:
+
+\starttyping
+<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.gettrailer(<pdfe document>)
+<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.getinfo(<pdfe document>)
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getpage}, \type {getbox}}]
+
+\libindex {getpage}
+\libindex {getbox}
+
+A specific page can conveniently be reached with the next command, which
+returns a dictionary. The first argument is to be a page dictionary.
+
+\starttyping
+<pdfe dictionary> = pdfe.getpage(<pdfe dictionary>,pagenumber)
+\stoptyping
+
+Another convenience command gives you the (bounding) box of a (normally page)
+which can be inheritted from the document itself. An example of a valid box name
+is \type {MediaBox}.
+
+\starttyping
+pages = pdfe.getbox(<pdfe document>,boxname)
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {get[string|integer|number|boolean|name]}}]
+
+\libindex {getstring}
+\libindex {getinteger}
+\libindex {getnumber}
+\libindex {getboolean}
+\libindex {getname}
+
+Common values in dictionaries and arrays are strings, integers, floats, booleans
+and names (which are also strings) and these are also normal \LUA\ objects:
+
+\starttyping
+s = getstring (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+i = getinteger(<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+n = getnumber (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+b = getboolean(<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+n = getname (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {get[from][dictionary|array|stream]}}]
+
+\libindex {getdictionary} \libindex {getfromdictionary}
+\libindex {getarray} \libindex {getfromarray}
+\libindex {getstream} \libindex {getfromstream}
+
+Normally you will use an index in an array and key in a dictionary but dictionaries
+also accept an index. The size of an array or dictionary is available with the
+usual \type {#} operator.
+
+\starttyping
+<pdfe dictionary> = getdictionary(<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+<pdfe array> = getarray (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+<pdfe stream>,
+<pdfe dictionary> = getstream (<pdfe array|dictionary>,index|key)
+\stoptyping
+
+These commands return dictionaries, arrays and streams, which are dictionaries
+with a blob of data attached.
+
+Before we come to an alternative access mode, we mention that the objects provide
+access in a different way too, for instance this is valid:
+
+\starttyping
+print(pdfe.open("foo.pdf").Catalog.Type)
+\stoptyping
+
+At the topmost level there are \type {Catalog}, \type {Info}, \type {Trailer}
+and \type {Pages}, so this is also okay:
+
+\starttyping
+print(pdfe.open("foo.pdf").Pages[1])
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[open|close|readfrom][whole|]stream}}]
+
+\libindex {openstream}
+\libindex {closestream}
+\libindex {readfromstream}
+\libindex {readfromwholestream}
+
+Streams are sort of special. When your index or key hits a stream you get back a
+stream object and dictionary object. The dictionary you can access in the usual
+way and for the stream there are the following methods:
+
+\starttyping
+okay = openstream(<pdfe stream>,[decode])
+ closestream(<pdfe stream>)
+str, n = readfromstream(<pdfe stream>)
+str, n = readwholestream(<pdfe stream>,[decode])
+\stoptyping
+
+You either read in chunks, or you ask for the whole. When reading in chunks, you
+need to open and close the stream yourself. The \type {n} value indicates the
+length read. The \type {decode} parameter controls if the stream data gets
+uncompressed.
+
+As with dictionaries, you can access fields in a stream dictionary in the usual
+\LUA\ way too. You get the content when you \quote {call} the stream. You can
+pass a boolean that indicates if the stream has to be decompressed.
+
+% pdfe.objectcodes = objectcodes
+% pdfe.stringcodes = stringcodes
+% pdfe.encryptioncodes = encryptioncodes
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getfrom[dictionary|array]}}]
+
+\libindex {getfromdictionary}
+\libindex {getfromarray}
+
+In addition to the interface described before, there is also a bit lower level
+interface available.
+
+\starttyping
+key, type, value, detail = getfromdictionary(<pdfe dictionary>,index)
+type, value, detail = getfromarray(<pdfe array>,index)
+\stoptyping
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|l|l|]
+\DB type \BC meaning \BC value \BC detail \NC \NR
+\NC \type {0} \NC none \NC nil \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type {1} \NC null \NC nil \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type {2} \NC boolean \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type {3} \NC boolean \NC integer \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type {4} \NC number \NC float \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type {5} \NC name \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type {6} \NC string \NC string \NC hex \NC \NR
+\NC \type {7} \NC array \NC arrayobject \NC size \NC \NR
+\NC \type {8} \NC dictionary \NC dictionaryobject \NC size \NC \NR
+\NC \type {9} \NC stream \NC streamobject \NC dictionary size \NC \NR
+\NC \type {10} \NC reference \NC integer \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+A \type {hex} string is (in the \PDF\ file) surrounded by \type {<>} while plain
+strings are bounded by \type {<>}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {[dictionary|array]totable}}]
+
+\libindex {dictionarytotable}
+\libindex {arraytotable}
+
+All entries in a dictionary or table can be fetched with the following commands
+where the return values are a hashed or indexed table.
+
+\starttyping
+hash = dictionarytotable(<pdfe dictionary>)
+list = arraytotable(<pdfe array>)
+\stoptyping
+
+You can get a list of pages with:
+
+\starttyping
+{ { <pdfe dictionary>, size, objnum }, ... } = pagestotable(<pdfe document>)
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {getfromreference}}]
+
+\libindex {getfromreference}
+
+Because you can have unresolved references, a reference object can be resolved
+with:
+
+\starttyping
+<pdfe dictionary|array|stream> = getfromreference(<pdfe reference>)
+\stoptyping
+
+So, you get back a new \type {pdfe} userdata object that you can query.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Memory streams}][library=pdfe]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+memory streams}
+
+\libindex {new}
+
+The \type {pdfe.new} that takes three arguments:
+
+\starttabulate
+\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {stream} \NC this is a (in low level \LUA\ speak) light userdata
+ object, i.e.\ a pointer to a sequence of bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type {length} \NC this is the length of the stream in bytes (the stream can
+ have embedded zeros) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {name} \NC optional, this is a unique identifier that is used for
+ hashing the stream, so that multiple doesn't use more
+ memory \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The third argument is optional. When it is not given the function will return an
+\type {pdfe} document object as with a regular file, otherwise it will return a
+filename that can be used elsewhere (e.g.\ in the image library) to reference the
+stream as pseudo file.
+
+Instead of a light userdata stream (which is actually fragile but handy when you
+come from a library) you can also pass a \LUA\ string, in which case the given
+length is (at most) the string length.
+
+The function returns an \type {pdfe} object and a string. The string can be used in
+the \type {img} library instead of a filename. You need to prevent garbage
+collection of the object when you use it as image (for instance by storing it
+somewhere).
+
+Both the memory stream and it's use in the image library is experimental and can
+change. In case you wonder where this can be used: when you use the swiglib
+library for \type {graphicmagick}, it can return such a userdata object. This
+permits conversion in memory and passing the result directly to the backend. This
+might save some runtime in one|-|pass workflows. This feature is currently not
+meant for production and we might come up with a better implementation.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {pdfscanner} library}][library=pdfscanner]
+
+\topicindex{\PDF+scanner}
+
+\libindex {scan}
+
+The \type {pdfscanner} library allows interpretation of \PDF\ content streams and
+\type {/ToUnicode} (cmap) streams. You can get those streams from the \type
+{pdfe} library, as explained in an earlier section. There is only a single
+top|-|level function in this library:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+pdfscanner.scan (<pdfe stream>, <table> operatortable, <table> info)
+pdfscanner.scan (<pdfe array>, <table> operatortable, <table> info)
+pdfscanner.scan (<string>, <table> operatortable, <table> info)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The first argument should be a \LUA\ string or a stream or array onject coming
+from the \type {pdfe} library. The second argument, \type {operatortable}, should
+be a \LUA\ table where the keys are \PDF\ operator name strings and the values
+are \LUA\ functions (defined by you) that are used to process those operators.
+The functions are called whenever the scanner finds one of these \PDF\ operators
+in the content stream(s). The functions are called with two arguments: the \type
+{scanner} object itself, and the \type {info} table that was passed are the third
+argument to \type {pdfscanner.scan}.
+
+Internally, \type {pdfscanner.scan} loops over the \PDF\ operators in the
+stream(s), collecting operands on an internal stack until it finds a \PDF\
+operator. If that \PDF\ operator's name exists in \type {operatortable}, then the
+associated function is executed. After the function has run (or when there is no
+function to execute) the internal operand stack is cleared in preparation for the
+next operator, and processing continues.
+
+The \type {scanner} argument to the processing functions is needed because it
+offers various methods to get the actual operands from the internal operand
+stack.
+
+A simple example of processing a \PDF's document stream could look like this:
+
+\starttyping
+local operatortable = { }
+
+operatortable.Do = function(scanner,info)
+ local resources = info.resources
+ if resources then
+ local val = scanner:pop()
+ local name = val[2]
+ local xobject = resources.XObject
+ print(info.space .. "Uses XObject " .. name)
+ local resources = xobject.Resources
+ if resources then
+ local newinfo = {
+ space = info.space .. " ",
+ resources = resources,
+ }
+ pdfscanner.scan(entry, operatortable, newinfo)
+ end
+ end
+end
+
+local function Analyze(filename)
+ local doc = pdfe.open(filename)
+ if doc then
+ local pages = doc.Pages
+ for i=1,#pages do
+ local page = pages[i]
+ local info = {
+ space = " " ,
+ resources = page.Resources,
+ }
+ print("Page " .. i)
+ -- pdfscanner.scan(page.Contents,operatortable,info)
+ pdfscanner.scan(page.Contents(),operatortable,info)
+ end
+ end
+end
+
+Analyze("foo.pdf")
+\stoptyping
+
+This example iterates over all the actual content in the \PDF, and prints out the
+found \type {XObject} names. While the code demonstrates quite some of the \type
+{pdfe} functions, let's focus on the type \type {pdfscanner} specific code
+instead.
+
+From the bottom up, the following line runs the scanner with the \PDF\ page's
+top|-|level content given in the first argument.
+
+The third argument, \type {info}, contains two entries: \type {space} is used to
+indent the printed output, and \type {resources} is needed so that embedded \type
+{XForms} can find their own content.
+
+The second argument, \type {operatortable} defines a processing function for a
+single \PDF\ operator, \type {Do}.
+
+The function \type {Do} prints the name of the current \type {XObject}, and then
+starts a new scanner for that object's content stream, under the condition that
+the \type {XObject} is in fact a \type {/Form}. That nested scanner is called
+with new \type {info} argument with an updated \type {space} value so that the
+indentation of the output nicely nests, and with a new \type {resources} field
+to help the next iteration down to properly process any other, embedded \type
+{XObject}s.
+
+Of course, this is not a very useful example in practice, but for the purpose of
+demonstrating \type {pdfscanner}, it is just long enough. It makes use of only
+one \type {scanner} method: \type {scanner:pop()}. That function pops the top
+operand of the internal stack, and returns a \LUA\ table where the object at index
+one is a string representing the type of the operand, and object two is its
+value.
+
+The list of possible operand types and associated \LUA\ value types is:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB types \BC type \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{integer} \NC <number> \NC \NR
+\NC \type{real} \NC <number> \NC \NR
+\NC \type{boolean} \NC <boolean> \NC \NR
+\NC \type{name} \NC <string> \NC \NR
+\NC \type{operator} \NC <string> \NC \NR
+\NC \type{string} \NC <string> \NC \NR
+\NC \type{array} \NC <table> \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dict} \NC <table> \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+In case of \type {integer} or \type {real}, the value is always a \LUA\ (floating
+point) number. In case of \type {name}, the leading slash is always stripped.
+
+In case of \type {string}, please bear in mind that \PDF\ actually supports
+different types of strings (with different encodings) in different parts of the
+\PDF\ document, so you may need to reencode some of the results; \type {pdfscanner}
+always outputs the byte stream without reencoding anything. \type {pdfscanner}
+does not differentiate between literal strings and hexadecimal strings (the
+hexadecimal values are decoded), and it treats the stream data for inline images
+as a string that is the single operand for \type {EI}.
+
+In case of \type {array}, the table content is a list of \type {pop} return
+values and in case of \type {dict}, the table keys are \PDF\ name strings and the
+values are \type {pop} return values.
+
+\libindex{pop}
+\libindex{popnumber}
+\libindex{popname}
+\libindex{popstring}
+\libindex{poparray}
+\libindex{popdictionary}
+\libindex{popboolean}
+\libindex{done}
+
+There are a few more methods defined that you can ask \type {scanner}:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB method \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{pop} \NC see above \NC \NR
+\NC \type{popnumber} \NC return only the value of a \type {real} or \type {integer} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{popname} \NC return only the value of a \type {name} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{popstring} \NC return only the value of a \type {string} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{poparray} \NC return only the value of a \type {array} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{popdictionary} \NC return only the value of a \type {dict} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{popboolean} \NC return only the value of a \type {boolean} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{done} \NC abort further processing of this \type {scan()} call \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {pop*} are convenience functions, and come in handy when you know the
+type of the operands beforehand (which you usually do, in \PDF). For example, the
+\type {Do} function could have used \type {local name = scanner:popname()}
+instead, because the single operand to the \type {Do} operator is always a \PDF\
+name object.
+
+The \type {done} function allows you to abort processing of a stream once you
+have learned everything you want to learn. This comes in handy while parsing
+\type {/ToUnicode}, because there usually is trailing garbage that you are not
+interested in. Without \type {done}, processing only ends at the end of the
+stream, possibly wasting \CPU\ cycles.
+
+{\em We keep the older names \type {popNumber}, \type {popName}, \type
+{popString}, \type {popArray}, \type {popDict} and \type {popBool} around.}
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-callbacks.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-callbacks.tex
index b2b706ea91..9be3e36354 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-callbacks.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-callbacks.tex
@@ -1,1149 +1,1165 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-callbacks
-
-\startchapter[reference=callbacks,title={\LUA\ callbacks}]
-
-\startsection[title={Registering callbacks}][library=callback]
-
-\topicindex{callbacks}
-
-\libindex{register}
-\libindex{list}
-\libindex{find}
-
-This library has functions that register, find and list callbacks. Callbacks are
-\LUA\ functions that are called in well defined places. There are two kind of
-callbacks: those that mix with existing functionality, and those that (when
-enabled) replace functionality. In mosty cases the second category is expected to
-behave similar to the built in functionality because in a next step specific
-data is expected. For instance, you can replace the hyphenation routine. The
-function gets a list that can be hyphenated (or not). The final list should be
-valid and is (normally) used for constructing a paragraph. Another function can
-replace the ligature builder and|/|or kerner. Doing something else is possible
-but in the end might not give the user the expected outcome.
-
-The first thing you need to do is registering a callback:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-id, error =
- callback.register(<string> callback_name, <function> func)
-id, error =
- callback.register(<string> callback_name, nil)
-id, error =
- callback.register(<string> callback_name, false)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Here the \syntax {callback_name} is a predefined callback name, see below. The
-function returns the internal \type {id} of the callback or \type {nil}, if the
-callback could not be registered. In the latter case, \type {error} contains an
-error message, otherwise it is \type {nil}.
-
-\LUATEX\ internalizes the callback function in such a way that it does not matter
-if you redefine a function accidentally.
-
-Callback assignments are always global. You can use the special value \type {nil}
-instead of a function for clearing the callback.
-
-For some minor speed gain, you can assign the boolean \type {false} to the
-non|-|file related callbacks, doing so will prevent \LUATEX\ from executing
-whatever it would execute by default (when no callback function is registered at
-all). Be warned: this may cause all sorts of grief unless you know \notabene
-{exactly} what you are doing!
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> info =
- callback.list()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The keys in the table are the known callback names, the value is a boolean where
-\type {true} means that the callback is currently set (active).
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<function> f = callback.find(callback_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-If the callback is not set, \type {find} returns \type {nil}.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={File discovery callbacks}][library=callback]
-
-The behaviour documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
-there will not be backward|-|incompatible changes any more.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_read_file} and \cbk {find_write_file}}
-
-Your callback function should have the following conventions:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> actual_name =
- function (<number> id_number, <string> asked_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Arguments:
-
-\startitemize
-
-\sym{id_number}
-
-This number is zero for the log or \prm {input} files. For \TEX's \prm {read}
-or \prm {write} the number is incremented by one, so \type {\read0} becomes~1.
-
-\sym{asked_name}
-
-This is the user|-|supplied filename, as found by \prm {input}, \prm {openin}
-or \prm {openout}.
-
-\stopitemize
-
-Return value:
-
-\startitemize
-
-\sym{actual_name}
-
-This is the filename used. For the very first file that is read in by \TEX, you
-have to make sure you return an \type {actual_name} that has an extension and
-that is suitable for use as \type {jobname}. If you don't, you will have to
-manually fix the name of the log file and output file after \LUATEX\ is finished,
-and an eventual format filename will become mangled. That is because these file
-names depend on the jobname.
-
-You have to return \type {nil} if the file cannot be found.
-
-\stopitemize
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_font_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
-
-Your callback function should have the following conventions:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> actual_name =
- function (<string> asked_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {asked_name} is an \OTF\ or \TFM\ font metrics file.
-
-Return \type {nil} if the file cannot be found.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_output_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+output file}
-
-Your callback function should have the following conventions:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> actual_name =
- function (<string> asked_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {asked_name} is the \PDF\ or \DVI\ file for writing.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_format_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+format file}
-
-Your callback function should have the following conventions:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> actual_name =
- function (<string> asked_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {asked_name} is a format file for reading (the format file for writing
-is always opened in the current directory).
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_vf_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
-
-Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for virtual fonts. This applies to both \ALEPH's
-\OVF\ files and traditional Knuthian \VF\ files.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_map_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
-
-Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for map files.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_enc_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
-
-Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for enc files.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_pk_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
-
-Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for pk bitmap files. This callback takes two
-arguments: \type {name} and \type {dpi}. In your callback you can decide to
-look for:
-
-\starttyping
-<base res>dpi/<fontname>.<actual res>pk
-\stoptyping
-
-but other strategies are possible. It is up to you to find a \quote {reasonable}
-bitmap file to go with that specification.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_data_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+data files}
-
-Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for embedded files (\type {\pdfobj file '...'}).
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_opentype_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
-
-Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for \OPENTYPE\ font files.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_truetype_file} and \cbk {find_type1_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
-
-Your callback function should have the following conventions:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> actual_name =
- function (<string> asked_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {asked_name} is a font file. This callback is called while \LUATEX\ is
-building its internal list of needed font files, so the actual timing may
-surprise you. Your return value is later fed back into the matching \type
-{read_file} callback.
-
-Strangely enough, \cbk {find_type1_file} is also used for \OPENTYPE\ (\OTF)
-fonts.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {find_image_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+image files}
-
-Your callback function should have the following conventions:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> actual_name =
- function (<string> asked_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {asked_name} is an image file. Your return value is used to open a file
-from the hard disk, so make sure you return something that is considered the name
-of a valid file by your operating system.
-
-\subsection[iocallback]{File reading callbacks}
-
-The behavior documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
-there will not be backward-incompatible changes any more.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {open_read_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+opening files}
-
-Your callback function should have the following conventions:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> env =
- function (<string> file_name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Argument:
-
-\startitemize
-
-\sym{file_name}
-
-The filename returned by a previous \cbk {find_read_file} or the return value of
-\type {kpse.find_file()} if there was no such callback defined.
-
-\stopitemize
-
-Return value:
-
-\startitemize
-
-\sym{env}
-
-This is a table containing at least one required and one optional callback
-function for this file. The required field is \type {reader} and the associated
-function will be called once for each new line to be read, the optional one is
-\type {close} that will be called once when \LUATEX\ is done with the file.
-
-\LUATEX\ never looks at the rest of the table, so you can use it to store your
-private per|-|file data. Both the callback functions will receive the table as
-their only argument.
-
-\stopitemize
-
-\subsubsection{\type {reader}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+reader}
-
-\LUATEX\ will run this function whenever it needs a new input line from the file.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<table> env)
- return <string> line
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Your function should return either a string or \type {nil}. The value \type {nil}
-signals that the end of file has occurred, and will make \TEX\ call the optional
-\type {close} function next.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {close}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+closing files}
-
-\LUATEX\ will run this optional function when it decides to close the file.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<table> env)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Your function should not return any value.
-
-\subsection{General file readers}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+readers}
-
-There is a set of callbacks for the loading of binary data files. These all use
-the same interface:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> name)
- return <boolean> success, <string> data, <number> data_size
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {name} will normally be a full path name as it is returned by either
-one of the file discovery callbacks or the internal version of \type
-{kpse.find_file()}.
-
-\startitemize
-
-\sym{success}
-
-Return \type {false} when a fatal error occurred (e.g.\ when the file cannot be
-found, after all).
-
-\sym{data}
-
-The bytes comprising the file.
-
-\sym{data_size}
-
-The length of the \type {data}, in bytes.
-
-\stopitemize
-
-Return an empty string and zero if the file was found but there was a
-reading problem.
-
-The list of functions is:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB function \BC usage \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{read_font_file} \NC ofm or tfm files \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_vf_file} \NC virtual fonts \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_map_file} \NC map files \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_enc_file} \NC encoding files \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_pk_file} \NC pk bitmap files \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_data_file} \NC embedded files (as is possible with \PDF\ objects) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_truetype_file} \NC \TRUETYPE\ font files \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_type1_file} \NC \TYPEONE\ font files \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read_opentype_file} \NC \OPENTYPE\ font files \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Data processing callbacks}][library=callback]
-
-\subsection{\cbk {process_input_buffer}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+input buffer}
-
-This callback allows you to change the contents of the line input buffer just
-before \LUATEX\ actually starts looking at it.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> buffer)
- return <string> adjusted_buffer
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-If you return \type {nil}, \LUATEX\ will pretend like your callback never
-happened. You can gain a small amount of processing time from that. This callback
-does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {process_output_buffer}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+output buffer}
-
-This callback allows you to change the contents of the line output buffer just
-before \LUATEX\ actually starts writing it to a file as the result of a \prm
-{write} command. It is only called for output to an actual file (that is,
-excluding the log, the terminal, and so called \prm {write} 18 calls).
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> buffer)
- return <string> adjusted_buffer
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-If you return \type {nil}, \LUATEX\ will pretend like your callback never
-happened. You can gain a small amount of processing time from that. This callback
-does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {process_jobname}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+jobname}
-
-This callback allows you to change the jobname given by \prm {jobname} in \TEX\
-and \type {tex.jobname} in Lua. It does not affect the internal job name or the
-name of the output or log files.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> jobname)
- return <string> adjusted_jobname
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The only argument is the actual job name; you should not use \type {tex.jobname}
-inside this function or infinite recursion may occur. If you return \type {nil},
-\LUATEX\ will pretend your callback never happened. This callback does not
-replace any internal code.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Node list processing callbacks}][library=callback]
-
-The description of nodes and node lists is in~\in{chapter}[nodes].
-
-\subsection{\cbk {contribute_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+contributions}
-
-This callback is called when \LUATEX\ adds contents to list:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> extrainfo)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The string reports the group code. From this you can deduce from
-what list you can give a treat.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{pre_box} \NC interline material is being added \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pre_adjust} \NC \prm {vadjust} material is being added \NC \NR
-\NC \type{box} \NC a typeset box is being added (always called) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{adjust} \NC \prm {vadjust} material is being added \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\cbk {buildpage_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+building pages}
-
-This callback is called whenever \LUATEX\ is ready to move stuff to the main
-vertical list. You can use this callback to do specialized manipulation of the
-page building stage like imposition or column balancing.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> extrainfo)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The string \type {extrainfo} gives some additional information about what \TEX's
-state is with respect to the \quote {current page}. The possible values for the
-\cbk {buildpage_filter} callback are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{alignment} \NC a (partial) alignment is being added \NC \NR
-\NC \type{after_output} \NC an output routine has just finished \NC \NR
-\NC \type{new_graf} \NC the beginning of a new paragraph \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vmode_par} \NC \prm {par} was found in vertical mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hmode_par} \NC \prm {par} was found in horizontal mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type{insert} \NC an insert is added \NC \NR
-\NC \type{penalty} \NC a penalty (in vertical mode) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{before_display} \NC immediately before a display starts \NC \NR
-\NC \type{after_display} \NC a display is finished \NC \NR
-\NC \type{end} \NC \LUATEX\ is terminating (it's all over) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\cbk {build_page_insert}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+inserts}
-
-This callback is called when the pagebuilder adds an insert. There is not much
-control over this mechanism but this callback permits some last minute
-manipulations of the spacing before an insert, something that might be handy when
-for instance multiple inserts (types) are appended in a row.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<number> n, <number> i)
- return <number> register
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-with
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{n} \NC the insert class \NC \NR
-\NC \type{i} \NC the order of the insert \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The return value is a number indicating the skip register to use for the
-prepended spacing. This permits for instance a different top space (when \type
-{i} equals one) and intermediate space (when \type {i} is larger than one). Of
-course you can mess with the insert box but you need to make sure that \LUATEX\
-is happy afterwards.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {pre_linebreak_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+linebreaks}
-
-This callback is called just before \LUATEX\ starts converting a list of nodes
-into a stack of \prm {hbox}es, after the addition of \prm {parfillskip}.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <string> groupcode)
- return true | false | <node> newhead
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The string called \type {groupcode} identifies the nodelist's context within
-\TEX's processing. The range of possibilities is given in the table below, but
-not all of those can actually appear in \cbk {pre_linebreak_filter}, some are
-for the \cbk {hpack_filter} and \cbk {vpack_filter} callbacks that will be
-explained in the next two paragraphs.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{<empty>} \NC main vertical list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hbox} \NC \prm {hbox} in horizontal mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type{adjusted_hbox} \NC \prm {hbox} in vertical mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vbox} \NC \prm {vbox} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vtop} \NC \prm {vtop} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{align} \NC \prm {halign} or \prm {valign} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{disc} \NC discretionaries \NC \NR
-\NC \type{insert} \NC packaging an insert \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vcenter} \NC \prm {vcenter} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{local_box} \NC \lpr {localleftbox} or \lpr {localrightbox} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{split_off} \NC top of a \prm {vsplit} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{split_keep} \NC remainder of a \prm {vsplit} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{align_set} \NC alignment cell \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fin_row} \NC alignment row \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-As for all the callbacks that deal with nodes, the return value can be one of
-three things:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- boolean \type {true} signals successful processing
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {<node>} signals that the \quote {head} node should be replaced by the
- returned node
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- boolean \type {false} signals that the \quote {head} node list should be
- ignored and flushed from memory
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-This callback does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {linebreak_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+linebreaks}
-
-This callback replaces \LUATEX's line breaking algorithm.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <boolean> is_display)
- return <node> newhead
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The returned node is the head of the list that will be added to the main vertical
-list, the boolean argument is true if this paragraph is interrupted by a
-following math display.
-
-If you return something that is not a \type {<node>}, \LUATEX\ will apply the
-internal linebreak algorithm on the list that starts at \type {<head>}.
-Otherwise, the \type {<node>} you return is supposed to be the head of a list of
-nodes that are all allowed in vertical mode, and at least one of those has to
-represent a hbox. Failure to do so will result in a fatal error.
-
-Setting this callback to \type {false} is possible, but dangerous, because it is
-possible you will end up in an unfixable \quote {deadcycles loop}.
-
-\subsection{\type {append_to_vlist_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+contributions}
-
-This callback is called whenever \LUATEX\ adds a box to a vertical list:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> box, <string> locationcode, <number prevdepth>,
- <boolean> mirrored)
- return list, prevdepth
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-It is ok to return nothing in which case you also need to flush the box or deal
-with it yourself. The prevdepth is also optional. Locations are \type {box},
-\type {alignment}, \type {equation}, \type {equation_number} and \type
-{post_linebreak}.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {post_linebreak_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+linebreaks}
-
-This callback is called just after \LUATEX\ has converted a list of nodes into a
-stack of \prm {hbox}es.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <string> groupcode)
- return true | false | <node> newhead
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {hpack_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
-
-This callback is called when \TEX\ is ready to start boxing some horizontal mode
-material. Math items and line boxes are ignored at the moment.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <string> groupcode, <number> size,
- <string> packtype [, <string> direction] [, <node> attributelist])
- return true | false | <node> newhead
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {packtype} is either \type {additional} or \type {exactly}. If \type
-{additional}, then the \type {size} is a \type {\hbox spread ...} argument. If
-\type {exactly}, then the \type {size} is a \type {\hbox to ...}. In both cases,
-the number is in scaled points.
-
-The \type {direction} is either one of the three-letter direction specifier
-strings, or \type {nil}.
-
-This callback does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {vpack_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
-
-This callback is called when \TEX\ is ready to start boxing some vertical mode
-material. Math displays are ignored at the moment.
-
-This function is very similar to the \cbk {hpack_filter}. Besides the fact
-that it is called at different moments, there is an extra variable that matches
-\TEX's \prm {maxdepth} setting.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <string> groupcode, <number> size, <string> packtype,
- <number> maxdepth [, <string> direction] [, <node> attributelist]))
- return true | false | <node> newhead
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\type {hpack_quality}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
-
-This callback can be used to intercept the overfull messages that can result from
-packing a horizontal list (as happens in the par builder). The function takes a
-few arguments:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> incident, <number> detail, <node> head, <number> first,
- <number> last)
- return <node> whatever
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The incident is one of \type {overfull}, \type {underfull}, \type {loose} or
-\type {tight}. The detail is either the amount of overflow in case of \type
-{overfull}, or the badness otherwise. The head is the list that is constructed
-(when protrusion or expansion is enabled, this is an intermediate list).
-Optionally you can return a node, for instance an overfull rule indicator. That
-node will be appended to the list (just like \TEX's own rule would).
-
-\subsection{\type {vpack_quality}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
-
-This callback can be used to intercept the overfull messages that can result from
-packing a vertical list (as happens in the page builder). The function takes a
-few arguments:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> incident, <number> detail, <node> head, <number> first,
- <number> last)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The incident is one of \type {overfull}, \type {underfull}, \type {loose} or
-\type {tight}. The detail is either the amount of overflow in case of \type
-{overfull}, or the badness otherwise. The head is the list that is constructed.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {process_rule}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+rules}
-
-This is an experimental callback. It can be used with rules of subtype~4
-(user). The callback gets three arguments: the node, the width and the
-height. The callback can use \type {pdf.print} to write code to the \PDF\
-file but beware of not messing up the final result. No checking is done.
-
-\subsection{\type {pre_output_filter}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+output}
-
-This callback is called when \TEX\ is ready to start boxing the box 255 for \prm
-{output}.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <string> groupcode, <number> size, <string> packtype,
- <number> maxdepth [, <string> direction])
- return true | false | <node> newhead
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {hyphenate}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+hyphenation}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <node> tail)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-No return values. This callback has to insert discretionary nodes in the node
-list it receives.
-
-Setting this callback to \type {false} will prevent the internal discretionary
-insertion pass.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {ligaturing}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+ligature building}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <node> tail)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-No return values. This callback has to apply ligaturing to the node list it
-receives.
-
-You don't have to worry about return values because the \type {head} node that is
-passed on to the callback is guaranteed not to be a glyph_node (if need be, a
-temporary node will be prepended), and therefore it cannot be affected by the
-mutations that take place. After the callback, the internal value of the \quote
-{tail of the list} will be recalculated.
-
-The \type {next} of \type {head} is guaranteed to be non-nil.
-
-The \type {next} of \type {tail} is guaranteed to be nil, and therefore the
-second callback argument can often be ignored. It is provided for orthogonality,
-and because it can sometimes be handy when special processing has to take place.
-
-Setting this callback to \type {false} will prevent the internal ligature
-creation pass.
-
-You must not ruin the node list. For instance, the head normally is a local par node,
-and the tail a glue. Messing too much can push \LUATEX\ into panic mode.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {kerning}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+kerning}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <node> tail)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-No return values. This callback has to apply kerning between the nodes in the
-node list it receives. See \cbk {ligaturing} for calling conventions.
-
-Setting this callback to \type {false} will prevent the internal kern insertion
-pass.
-
-You must not ruin the node list. For instance, the head normally is a local par node,
-and the tail a glue. Messing too much can push \LUATEX\ into panic mode.
-
-\subsection{\type {insert_local_par}}
-
-Each paragraph starts with a local par node that keeps track of for instance
-the direction. You can hook a callback into the creator:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> local_par, <string> location)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-There is no return value and you should make sure that the node stays valid
-as otherwise \TEX\ can get confused.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {mlist_to_hlist}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+math}
-
-This callback replaces \LUATEX's math list to node list conversion algorithm.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<node> head, <string> display_type, <boolean> need_penalties)
- return <node> newhead
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The returned node is the head of the list that will be added to the vertical or
-horizontal list, the string argument is either \quote {text} or \quote {display}
-depending on the current math mode, the boolean argument is \type {true} if
-penalties have to be inserted in this list, \type {false} otherwise.
-
-Setting this callback to \type {false} is bad, it will almost certainly result in
-an endless loop.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Information reporting callbacks}][library=callback]
-
-\subsection{\cbk {pre_dump}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+dump}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function is called just before dumping to a format file starts. It does not
-replace any code and there are neither arguments nor return values.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {start_run}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+job run}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's banner. Note that for
-successful use, this callback has to be set in the \LUA\ initialization script,
-otherwise it will be seen only after the run has already started.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {stop_run}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+job run}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's statistics and \quote
-{output written to} messages. The engine can still do housekeeping and therefore
-you should not rely on this hook for postprocessing the \PDF\ or log file.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {start_page_number}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+pages}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Replaces the code that prints the \type {[} and the page number at the begin of
-\prm {shipout}. This callback will also override the printing of box information
-that normally takes place when \prm {tracingoutput} is positive.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {stop_page_number}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+pages}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Replaces the code that prints the \type {]} at the end of \prm {shipout}.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {show_error_hook}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+errors}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback is run from inside the \TEX\ error function, and the idea is to
-allow you to do some extra reporting on top of what \TEX\ already does (none of
-the normal actions are removed). You may find some of the values in the \type
-{status} table useful. This callback does not replace any internal code.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {show_error_message}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+errors}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback replaces the code that prints the error message. The usual
-interaction after the message is not affected.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {show_lua_error_hook}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+errors}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback replaces the code that prints the extra \LUA\ error message.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {start_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+files}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(category,filename)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's when a file is opened like
-\type {(filename} for regular files. The category is a number:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 1 \NC a normal data file, like a \TEX\ source \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC a font map coupling font names to resources \NC \NR
-\NC 3 \NC an image file (\type {png}, \type {pdf}, etc) \NC \NR
-\NC 4 \NC an embedded font subset \NC \NR
-\NC 5 \NC a fully embedded font \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\cbk {stop_file}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+files}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(category)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's when a file is closed like
-the \type {)} for regular files.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {call_edit}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+editing}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(filename,linenumber)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback replaces the call to an external editor when \quote{E} is pressed
-in reply to an error message. Processing will end immediately after the callback
-returns control to the main program.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {finish_synctex}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+synctex}
-
-This callback can be used to wrap up alternative synctex methods. It kicks in
-after the normal synctex finalizer (that happens to remove the synctex files
-after a run when native synctex is not enabled).
-
-\subsection{\cbk {wrapup_run}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+wrapping up}
-
-This callback is called after the \PDF\ and log files are closed. Use it at your own
-risk.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={\PDF\ related callbacks}][library=callback]
-
-\subsection{\cbk {finish_pdffile}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+\PDF\ file}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function()
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback is called when all document pages are already written to the \PDF\
-file and \LUATEX\ is about to finalize the output document structure. Its
-intended use is final update of \PDF\ dictionaries such as \type {/Catalog} or
-\type {/Info}. The callback does not replace any code. There are neither
-arguments nor return values.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {finish_pdfpage}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+\PDF\ file}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(shippingout)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This callback is called after the \PDF\ page stream has been assembled and before
-the page object gets finalized.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {page_objnum_provider}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+\PDF\ file}
-
-This is one that experts can use to juggle the page tree, a data structure
-that determines the order in a \PDF\ file:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(objnum)
- return objnum
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-We can for instance swap the first and last page:
-
-\starttyping
-local n = 0
-callback.register("page_objnum_provider",function(objnum)
- n = n + 1
- if n == 1 then
- return pdf.getpageref(tex.count[0])
- elseif n == tex.count[0] then
- return pdf.getpageref(1)
- else
- return objnum
- end
-end)
-\stoptyping
-
-When you mess things up \unknown\ don't complain.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {process_pdf_image_content}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+image content}
-
-When a page from a \PDF\ file is embedded its page stream as well as related
-objects are copied to the target file. However, it can be that the page stream
-has operators that assume additional resources, for instance marked text. You can
-decide to filter that for which \LUATEX\ provides a callback. Here is a simple
-demonstration of use:
-
-\starttyping
-pdf.setrecompress(1)
-
-callback.register("process_pdf_image_content",function(s)
- print(s)
- return s
-end)
-\stoptyping
-
-You need to explicitly enable recompression because otherwise the content stream
-gets just passed on in its original compressed form.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Font-related callbacks}][library=callback]
-
-\subsection{\cbk {define_font}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+fonts}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<string> name, <number> size, <number> id)
- return <table> font | <number> id
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The string \type {name} is the filename part of the font specification, as given
-by the user.
-
-The number \type {size} is a bit special:
-
-\startitemize[packed]
-\startitem
- If it is positive, it specifies an \quote{at size} in scaled points.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- If it is negative, its absolute value represents a \quote {scaled} setting
- relative to the designsize of the font.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The \type {id} is the internal number assigned to the font.
-
-The internal structure of the \type {font} table that is to be returned is
-explained in \in {chapter} [fonts]. That table is saved internally, so you can
-put extra fields in the table for your later \LUA\ code to use. In alternative,
-\type {retval} can be a previously defined fontid. This is useful if a previous
-definition can be reused instead of creating a whole new font structure.
-
-Setting this callback to \type {false} is pointless as it will prevent font
-loading completely but will nevertheless generate errors.
-
-\subsection{\cbk {glyph_not_found}}
-
-\topicindex{callbacks+fonts}
-
-This callback kicks in when the backend cannot insert a glyph. When no callback
-is defined a message is written to the log.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-function(<number> id, <number> char)
- -- do something with font id and char code
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-callbacks
+
+\startchapter[reference=callbacks,title={\LUA\ callbacks}]
+
+\startsection[title={Registering callbacks}][library=callback]
+
+\topicindex{callbacks}
+
+\libindex{register}
+\libindex{list}
+\libindex{find}
+
+This library has functions that register, find and list callbacks. Callbacks are
+\LUA\ functions that are called in well defined places. There are two kind of
+callbacks: those that mix with existing functionality, and those that (when
+enabled) replace functionality. In mosty cases the second category is expected to
+behave similar to the built in functionality because in a next step specific
+data is expected. For instance, you can replace the hyphenation routine. The
+function gets a list that can be hyphenated (or not). The final list should be
+valid and is (normally) used for constructing a paragraph. Another function can
+replace the ligature builder and|/|or kerner. Doing something else is possible
+but in the end might not give the user the expected outcome.
+
+The first thing you need to do is registering a callback:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+id, error =
+ callback.register(<string> callback_name, <function> func)
+id, error =
+ callback.register(<string> callback_name, nil)
+id, error =
+ callback.register(<string> callback_name, false)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Here the \syntax {callback_name} is a predefined callback name, see below. The
+function returns the internal \type {id} of the callback or \type {nil}, if the
+callback could not be registered. In the latter case, \type {error} contains an
+error message, otherwise it is \type {nil}.
+
+\LUATEX\ internalizes the callback function in such a way that it does not matter
+if you redefine a function accidentally.
+
+Callback assignments are always global. You can use the special value \type {nil}
+instead of a function for clearing the callback.
+
+For some minor speed gain, you can assign the boolean \type {false} to the
+non|-|file related callbacks, doing so will prevent \LUATEX\ from executing
+whatever it would execute by default (when no callback function is registered at
+all). Be warned: this may cause all sorts of grief unless you know \notabene
+{exactly} what you are doing!
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> info =
+ callback.list()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The keys in the table are the known callback names, the value is a boolean where
+\type {true} means that the callback is currently set (active).
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<function> f = callback.find(callback_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+If the callback is not set, \type {find} returns \type {nil}.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={File discovery callbacks}][library=callback]
+
+The behaviour documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
+there will not be backward|-|incompatible changes any more.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_read_file} and \cbk {find_write_file}}
+
+Your callback function should have the following conventions:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> actual_name =
+ function (<number> id_number, <string> asked_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Arguments:
+
+\startitemize
+
+\sym{id_number}
+
+This number is zero for the log or \prm {input} files. For \TEX's \prm {read}
+or \prm {write} the number is incremented by one, so \type {\read0} becomes~1.
+
+\sym{asked_name}
+
+This is the user|-|supplied filename, as found by \prm {input}, \prm {openin}
+or \prm {openout}.
+
+\stopitemize
+
+Return value:
+
+\startitemize
+
+\sym{actual_name}
+
+This is the filename used. For the very first file that is read in by \TEX, you
+have to make sure you return an \type {actual_name} that has an extension and
+that is suitable for use as \type {jobname}. If you don't, you will have to
+manually fix the name of the log file and output file after \LUATEX\ is finished,
+and an eventual format filename will become mangled. That is because these file
+names depend on the jobname.
+
+You have to return \type {nil} if the file cannot be found.
+
+\stopitemize
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_font_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
+
+Your callback function should have the following conventions:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> actual_name =
+ function (<string> asked_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {asked_name} is an \OTF\ or \TFM\ font metrics file.
+
+Return \type {nil} if the file cannot be found.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_output_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+output file}
+
+Your callback function should have the following conventions:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> actual_name =
+ function (<string> asked_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {asked_name} is the \PDF\ or \DVI\ file for writing.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_format_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+format file}
+
+Your callback function should have the following conventions:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> actual_name =
+ function (<string> asked_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {asked_name} is a format file for reading (the format file for writing
+is always opened in the current directory).
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_vf_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
+
+Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for virtual fonts. This applies to both \ALEPH's
+\OVF\ files and traditional Knuthian \VF\ files.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_map_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
+
+Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for map files.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_enc_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
+
+Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for enc files.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_pk_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
+
+Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for pk bitmap files. This callback takes two
+arguments: \type {name} and \type {dpi}. In your callback you can decide to
+look for:
+
+\starttyping
+<base res>dpi/<fontname>.<actual res>pk
+\stoptyping
+
+but other strategies are possible. It is up to you to find a \quote {reasonable}
+bitmap file to go with that specification.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_data_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+data files}
+
+Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for embedded files (\type {\pdfobj file '...'}).
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_opentype_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
+
+Like \cbk {find_font_file}, but for \OPENTYPE\ font files.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_truetype_file} and \cbk {find_type1_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+font files}
+
+Your callback function should have the following conventions:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> actual_name =
+ function (<string> asked_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {asked_name} is a font file. This callback is called while \LUATEX\ is
+building its internal list of needed font files, so the actual timing may
+surprise you. Your return value is later fed back into the matching \type
+{read_file} callback.
+
+Strangely enough, \cbk {find_type1_file} is also used for \OPENTYPE\ (\OTF)
+fonts.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {find_image_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+image files}
+
+Your callback function should have the following conventions:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> actual_name =
+ function (<string> asked_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {asked_name} is an image file. Your return value is used to open a file
+from the hard disk, so make sure you return something that is considered the name
+of a valid file by your operating system.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[iocallback][title={File reading callbacks}]
+
+The behavior documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
+there will not be backward-incompatible changes any more.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {open_read_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+opening files}
+
+Your callback function should have the following conventions:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> env =
+ function (<string> file_name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Argument:
+
+\startitemize
+
+\sym{file_name}
+
+The filename returned by a previous \cbk {find_read_file} or the return value of
+\type {kpse.find_file()} if there was no such callback defined.
+
+\stopitemize
+
+Return value:
+
+\startitemize
+
+\sym{env}
+
+This is a table containing at least one required and one optional callback
+function for this file. The required field is \type {reader} and the associated
+function will be called once for each new line to be read, the optional one is
+\type {close} that will be called once when \LUATEX\ is done with the file.
+
+\LUATEX\ never looks at the rest of the table, so you can use it to store your
+private per|-|file data. Both the callback functions will receive the table as
+their only argument.
+
+\stopitemize
+
+\subsubsection{\type {reader}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+reader}
+
+\LUATEX\ will run this function whenever it needs a new input line from the file.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<table> env)
+ return <string> line
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Your function should return either a string or \type {nil}. The value \type {nil}
+signals that the end of file has occurred, and will make \TEX\ call the optional
+\type {close} function next.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {close}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+closing files}
+
+\LUATEX\ will run this optional function when it decides to close the file.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<table> env)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Your function should not return any value.
+
+\subsection{General file readers}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+readers}
+
+There is a set of callbacks for the loading of binary data files. These all use
+the same interface:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> name)
+ return <boolean> success, <string> data, <number> data_size
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {name} will normally be a full path name as it is returned by either
+one of the file discovery callbacks or the internal version of \type
+{kpse.find_file()}.
+
+\startitemize
+
+\sym{success}
+
+Return \type {false} when a fatal error occurred (e.g.\ when the file cannot be
+found, after all).
+
+\sym{data}
+
+The bytes comprising the file.
+
+\sym{data_size}
+
+The length of the \type {data}, in bytes.
+
+\stopitemize
+
+Return an empty string and zero if the file was found but there was a
+reading problem.
+
+The list of functions is:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB function \BC usage \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{read_font_file} \NC ofm or tfm files \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_vf_file} \NC virtual fonts \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_map_file} \NC map files \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_enc_file} \NC encoding files \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_pk_file} \NC pk bitmap files \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_data_file} \NC embedded files (as is possible with \PDF\ objects) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_truetype_file} \NC \TRUETYPE\ font files \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_type1_file} \NC \TYPEONE\ font files \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read_opentype_file} \NC \OPENTYPE\ font files \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Data processing callbacks}][library=callback]
+
+\subsection{\cbk {process_input_buffer}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+input buffer}
+
+This callback allows you to change the contents of the line input buffer just
+before \LUATEX\ actually starts looking at it.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> buffer)
+ return <string> adjusted_buffer
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+If you return \type {nil}, \LUATEX\ will pretend like your callback never
+happened. You can gain a small amount of processing time from that. This callback
+does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {process_output_buffer}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+output buffer}
+
+This callback allows you to change the contents of the line output buffer just
+before \LUATEX\ actually starts writing it to a file as the result of a \prm
+{write} command. It is only called for output to an actual file (that is,
+excluding the log, the terminal, and so called \prm {write} 18 calls).
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> buffer)
+ return <string> adjusted_buffer
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+If you return \type {nil}, \LUATEX\ will pretend like your callback never
+happened. You can gain a small amount of processing time from that. This callback
+does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {process_jobname}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+jobname}
+
+This callback allows you to change the jobname given by \prm {jobname} in \TEX\
+and \type {tex.jobname} in Lua. It does not affect the internal job name or the
+name of the output or log files.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> jobname)
+ return <string> adjusted_jobname
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The only argument is the actual job name; you should not use \type {tex.jobname}
+inside this function or infinite recursion may occur. If you return \type {nil},
+\LUATEX\ will pretend your callback never happened. This callback does not
+replace any internal code.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Node list processing callbacks}][library=callback]
+
+The description of nodes and node lists is in~\in{chapter}[nodes].
+
+\subsection{\cbk {contribute_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+contributions}
+
+This callback is called when \LUATEX\ adds contents to list:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> extrainfo)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The string reports the group code. From this you can deduce from
+what list you can give a treat.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{pre_box} \NC interline material is being added \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pre_adjust} \NC \prm {vadjust} material is being added \NC \NR
+\NC \type{box} \NC a typeset box is being added (always called) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{adjust} \NC \prm {vadjust} material is being added \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\cbk {buildpage_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+building pages}
+
+This callback is called whenever \LUATEX\ is ready to move stuff to the main
+vertical list. You can use this callback to do specialized manipulation of the
+page building stage like imposition or column balancing.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> extrainfo)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The string \type {extrainfo} gives some additional information about what \TEX's
+state is with respect to the \quote {current page}. The possible values for the
+\cbk {buildpage_filter} callback are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{alignment} \NC a (partial) alignment is being added \NC \NR
+\NC \type{after_output} \NC an output routine has just finished \NC \NR
+\NC \type{new_graf} \NC the beginning of a new paragraph \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vmode_par} \NC \prm {par} was found in vertical mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hmode_par} \NC \prm {par} was found in horizontal mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type{insert} \NC an insert is added \NC \NR
+\NC \type{penalty} \NC a penalty (in vertical mode) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{before_display} \NC immediately before a display starts \NC \NR
+\NC \type{after_display} \NC a display is finished \NC \NR
+\NC \type{end} \NC \LUATEX\ is terminating (it's all over) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\cbk {build_page_insert}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+inserts}
+
+This callback is called when the pagebuilder adds an insert. There is not much
+control over this mechanism but this callback permits some last minute
+manipulations of the spacing before an insert, something that might be handy when
+for instance multiple inserts (types) are appended in a row.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<number> n, <number> i)
+ return <number> register
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+with
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{n} \NC the insert class \NC \NR
+\NC \type{i} \NC the order of the insert \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The return value is a number indicating the skip register to use for the
+prepended spacing. This permits for instance a different top space (when \type
+{i} equals one) and intermediate space (when \type {i} is larger than one). Of
+course you can mess with the insert box but you need to make sure that \LUATEX\
+is happy afterwards.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {pre_linebreak_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+linebreaks}
+
+This callback is called just before \LUATEX\ starts converting a list of nodes
+into a stack of \prm {hbox}es, after the addition of \prm {parfillskip}.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <string> groupcode)
+ return true | false | <node> newhead
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The string called \type {groupcode} identifies the nodelist's context within
+\TEX's processing. The range of possibilities is given in the table below, but
+not all of those can actually appear in \cbk {pre_linebreak_filter}, some are
+for the \cbk {hpack_filter} and \cbk {vpack_filter} callbacks that will be
+explained in the next two paragraphs.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{<empty>} \NC main vertical list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hbox} \NC \prm {hbox} in horizontal mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type{adjusted_hbox} \NC \prm {hbox} in vertical mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vbox} \NC \prm {vbox} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vtop} \NC \prm {vtop} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{align} \NC \prm {halign} or \prm {valign} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{disc} \NC discretionaries \NC \NR
+\NC \type{insert} \NC packaging an insert \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vcenter} \NC \prm {vcenter} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{local_box} \NC \lpr {localleftbox} or \lpr {localrightbox} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{split_off} \NC top of a \prm {vsplit} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{split_keep} \NC remainder of a \prm {vsplit} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{align_set} \NC alignment cell \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fin_row} \NC alignment row \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+As for all the callbacks that deal with nodes, the return value can be one of
+three things:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ boolean \type {true} signals successful processing
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {<node>} signals that the \quote {head} node should be replaced by the
+ returned node
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ boolean \type {false} signals that the \quote {head} node list should be
+ ignored and flushed from memory
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+This callback does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {linebreak_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+linebreaks}
+
+This callback replaces \LUATEX's line breaking algorithm.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <boolean> is_display)
+ return <node> newhead
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The returned node is the head of the list that will be added to the main vertical
+list, the boolean argument is true if this paragraph is interrupted by a
+following math display.
+
+If you return something that is not a \type {<node>}, \LUATEX\ will apply the
+internal linebreak algorithm on the list that starts at \type {<head>}.
+Otherwise, the \type {<node>} you return is supposed to be the head of a list of
+nodes that are all allowed in vertical mode, and at least one of those has to
+represent a hbox. Failure to do so will result in a fatal error.
+
+Setting this callback to \type {false} is possible, but dangerous, because it is
+possible you will end up in an unfixable \quote {deadcycles loop}.
+
+\subsection{\type {append_to_vlist_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+contributions}
+
+This callback is called whenever \LUATEX\ adds a box to a vertical list:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> box, <string> locationcode, <number prevdepth>,
+ <boolean> mirrored)
+ return list, prevdepth
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+It is ok to return nothing in which case you also need to flush the box or deal
+with it yourself. The prevdepth is also optional. Locations are \type {box},
+\type {alignment}, \type {equation}, \type {equation_number} and \type
+{post_linebreak}.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {post_linebreak_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+linebreaks}
+
+This callback is called just after \LUATEX\ has converted a list of nodes into a
+stack of \prm {hbox}es.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <string> groupcode)
+ return true | false | <node> newhead
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {hpack_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
+
+This callback is called when \TEX\ is ready to start boxing some horizontal mode
+material. Math items and line boxes are ignored at the moment.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <string> groupcode, <number> size,
+ <string> packtype [, <string> direction] [, <node> attributelist])
+ return true | false | <node> newhead
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {packtype} is either \type {additional} or \type {exactly}. If \type
+{additional}, then the \type {size} is a \type {\hbox spread ...} argument. If
+\type {exactly}, then the \type {size} is a \type {\hbox to ...}. In both cases,
+the number is in scaled points.
+
+The \type {direction} is either one of the three-letter direction specifier
+strings, or \type {nil}.
+
+This callback does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {vpack_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
+
+This callback is called when \TEX\ is ready to start boxing some vertical mode
+material. Math displays are ignored at the moment.
+
+This function is very similar to the \cbk {hpack_filter}. Besides the fact
+that it is called at different moments, there is an extra variable that matches
+\TEX's \prm {maxdepth} setting.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <string> groupcode, <number> size, <string> packtype,
+ <number> maxdepth [, <string> direction] [, <node> attributelist]))
+ return true | false | <node> newhead
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\type {hpack_quality}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
+
+This callback can be used to intercept the overfull messages that can result from
+packing a horizontal list (as happens in the par builder). The function takes a
+few arguments:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> incident, <number> detail, <node> head, <number> first,
+ <number> last)
+ return <node> whatever
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The incident is one of \type {overfull}, \type {underfull}, \type {loose} or
+\type {tight}. The detail is either the amount of overflow in case of \type
+{overfull}, or the badness otherwise. The head is the list that is constructed
+(when protrusion or expansion is enabled, this is an intermediate list).
+Optionally you can return a node, for instance an overfull rule indicator. That
+node will be appended to the list (just like \TEX's own rule would).
+
+\subsection{\type {vpack_quality}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+packing}
+
+This callback can be used to intercept the overfull messages that can result from
+packing a vertical list (as happens in the page builder). The function takes a
+few arguments:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> incident, <number> detail, <node> head, <number> first,
+ <number> last)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The incident is one of \type {overfull}, \type {underfull}, \type {loose} or
+\type {tight}. The detail is either the amount of overflow in case of \type
+{overfull}, or the badness otherwise. The head is the list that is constructed.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {process_rule}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+rules}
+
+This is an experimental callback. It can be used with rules of subtype~4
+(user). The callback gets three arguments: the node, the width and the
+height. The callback can use \type {pdf.print} to write code to the \PDF\
+file but beware of not messing up the final result. No checking is done.
+
+\subsection{\type {pre_output_filter}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+output}
+
+This callback is called when \TEX\ is ready to start boxing the box 255 for \prm
+{output}.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <string> groupcode, <number> size, <string> packtype,
+ <number> maxdepth [, <string> direction])
+ return true | false | <node> newhead
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {hyphenate}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+hyphenation}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <node> tail)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+No return values. This callback has to insert discretionary nodes in the node
+list it receives.
+
+Setting this callback to \type {false} will prevent the internal discretionary
+insertion pass.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {ligaturing}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+ligature building}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <node> tail)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+No return values. This callback has to apply ligaturing to the node list it
+receives.
+
+You don't have to worry about return values because the \type {head} node that is
+passed on to the callback is guaranteed not to be a glyph_node (if need be, a
+temporary node will be prepended), and therefore it cannot be affected by the
+mutations that take place. After the callback, the internal value of the \quote
+{tail of the list} will be recalculated.
+
+The \type {next} of \type {head} is guaranteed to be non-nil.
+
+The \type {next} of \type {tail} is guaranteed to be nil, and therefore the
+second callback argument can often be ignored. It is provided for orthogonality,
+and because it can sometimes be handy when special processing has to take place.
+
+Setting this callback to \type {false} will prevent the internal ligature
+creation pass.
+
+You must not ruin the node list. For instance, the head normally is a local par node,
+and the tail a glue. Messing too much can push \LUATEX\ into panic mode.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {kerning}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+kerning}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <node> tail)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+No return values. This callback has to apply kerning between the nodes in the
+node list it receives. See \cbk {ligaturing} for calling conventions.
+
+Setting this callback to \type {false} will prevent the internal kern insertion
+pass.
+
+You must not ruin the node list. For instance, the head normally is a local par node,
+and the tail a glue. Messing too much can push \LUATEX\ into panic mode.
+
+\subsection{\type {insert_local_par}}
+
+Each paragraph starts with a local par node that keeps track of for instance
+the direction. You can hook a callback into the creator:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> local_par, <string> location)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+There is no return value and you should make sure that the node stays valid
+as otherwise \TEX\ can get confused.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {mlist_to_hlist}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+math}
+
+This callback replaces \LUATEX's math list to node list conversion algorithm.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> head, <string> display_type, <boolean> need_penalties)
+ return <node> newhead
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The returned node is the head of the list that will be added to the vertical or
+horizontal list, the string argument is either \quote {text} or \quote {display}
+depending on the current math mode, the boolean argument is \type {true} if
+penalties have to be inserted in this list, \type {false} otherwise.
+
+Setting this callback to \type {false} is bad, it will almost certainly result in
+an endless loop.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Information reporting callbacks}][library=callback]
+
+\subsection{\cbk {pre_dump}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+dump}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function is called just before dumping to a format file starts. It does not
+replace any code and there are neither arguments nor return values.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {start_run}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+job run}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's banner. Note that for
+successful use, this callback has to be set in the \LUA\ initialization script,
+otherwise it will be seen only after the run has already started.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {stop_run}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+job run}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's statistics and \quote
+{output written to} messages. The engine can still do housekeeping and therefore
+you should not rely on this hook for postprocessing the \PDF\ or log file.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {start_page_number}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+pages}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Replaces the code that prints the \type {[} and the page number at the begin of
+\prm {shipout}. This callback will also override the printing of box information
+that normally takes place when \prm {tracingoutput} is positive.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {stop_page_number}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+pages}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Replaces the code that prints the \type {]} at the end of \prm {shipout}.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {show_error_hook}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+errors}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback is run from inside the \TEX\ error function, and the idea is to
+allow you to do some extra reporting on top of what \TEX\ already does (none of
+the normal actions are removed). You may find some of the values in the \type
+{status} table useful. This callback does not replace any internal code.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {show_error_message}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+errors}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback replaces the code that prints the error message. The usual
+interaction after the message is not affected.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {show_lua_error_hook}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+errors}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback replaces the code that prints the extra \LUA\ error message.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {start_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+files}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(category,filename)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's when a file is opened like
+\type {(filename} for regular files. The category is a number:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 1 \NC a normal data file, like a \TEX\ source \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC a font map coupling font names to resources \NC \NR
+\NC 3 \NC an image file (\type {png}, \type {pdf}, etc) \NC \NR
+\NC 4 \NC an embedded font subset \NC \NR
+\NC 5 \NC a fully embedded font \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\cbk {stop_file}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+files}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(category)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback replaces the code that prints \LUATEX's when a file is closed like
+the \type {)} for regular files.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {call_edit}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+editing}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(filename,linenumber)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback replaces the call to an external editor when \quote{E} is pressed
+in reply to an error message. Processing will end immediately after the callback
+returns control to the main program.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {finish_synctex}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+synctex}
+
+This callback can be used to wrap up alternative synctex methods. It kicks in
+after the normal synctex finalizer (that happens to remove the synctex files
+after a run when native synctex is not enabled).
+
+\subsection{\cbk {wrapup_run}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+wrapping up}
+
+This callback is called after the \PDF\ and log files are closed. Use it at your own
+risk.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={\PDF\ related callbacks}][library=callback]
+
+\subsection{\cbk {finish_pdffile}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+\PDF\ file}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function()
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback is called when all document pages are already written to the \PDF\
+file and \LUATEX\ is about to finalize the output document structure. Its
+intended use is final update of \PDF\ dictionaries such as \type {/Catalog} or
+\type {/Info}. The callback does not replace any code. There are neither
+arguments nor return values.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {finish_pdfpage}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+\PDF\ file}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(shippingout)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This callback is called after the \PDF\ page stream has been assembled and before
+the page object gets finalized.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {page_objnum_provider}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+\PDF\ file}
+
+This is one that experts can use to juggle the page tree, a data structure
+that determines the order in a \PDF\ file:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(objnum)
+ return objnum
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+We can for instance swap the first and last page:
+
+\starttyping
+local n = 0
+callback.register("page_objnum_provider",function(objnum)
+ n = n + 1
+ if n == 1 then
+ return pdf.getpageref(tex.count[0])
+ elseif n == tex.count[0] then
+ return pdf.getpageref(1)
+ else
+ return objnum
+ end
+end)
+\stoptyping
+
+When you mess things up \unknown\ don't complain.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {process_pdf_image_content}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+image content}
+
+When a page from a \PDF\ file is embedded its page stream as well as related
+objects are copied to the target file. However, it can be that the page stream
+has operators that assume additional resources, for instance marked text. You can
+decide to filter that for which \LUATEX\ provides a callback. Here is a simple
+demonstration of use:
+
+\starttyping
+pdf.setrecompress(1)
+
+callback.register("process_pdf_image_content",function(s)
+ print(s)
+ return s
+end)
+\stoptyping
+
+You need to explicitly enable recompression because otherwise the content stream
+gets just passed on in its original compressed form.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Font-related callbacks}][library=callback]
+
+\subsection{\cbk {define_font}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+fonts}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<string> name, <number> size, <number> id)
+ return <table> font | <number> id
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The string \type {name} is the filename part of the font specification, as given
+by the user.
+
+The number \type {size} is a bit special:
+
+\startitemize[packed]
+\startitem
+ If it is positive, it specifies an \quote{at size} in scaled points.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ If it is negative, its absolute value represents a \quote {scaled} setting
+ relative to the designsize of the font.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The \type {id} is the internal number assigned to the font.
+
+The internal structure of the \type {font} table that is to be returned is
+explained in \in {chapter} [fonts]. That table is saved internally, so you can
+put extra fields in the table for your later \LUA\ code to use. In alternative,
+\type {retval} can be a previously defined fontid. This is useful if a previous
+definition can be reused instead of creating a whole new font structure.
+
+Setting this callback to \type {false} is pointless as it will prevent font
+loading completely but will nevertheless generate errors.
+
+\subsection{\cbk {glyph_not_found} and \cbk {glyph_info}}
+
+\topicindex{callbacks+fonts}
+
+The \type {glyph_not_found} callback, when set, kicks in when the backend cannot
+insert a glyph. When no callback is defined a message is written to the log.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<number> id, <number> char)
+ -- do something with font id and char code
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {glyph_info} callback can be set to report a useful representation of a
+glyph.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+function(<node> g)
+ -- return a string or nil
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+When \type {nil} is returned the character code is printed, otherwise the
+returned string is used. By default the \UTF\ representation is shown which is
+not always that useful, especially when there is no real representation. Keep in
+mind that setting this callback can change the log in an incompatible way.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-contents.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-contents.tex
index 815ca4bbe7..2582a81c72 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-contents.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-contents.tex
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-contents
-
-\starttitle[title=Contents]
-
-\start
-
- \definecolor[maincolor][black]
-
- \placelist
- [chapter,section,subsection]
- [criterium=text]
-
-\stop
-
-\stoptitle
-
-\stopcomponent
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-contents
+
+\starttitle[title=Contents]
+
+\start
+
+ \definecolor[maincolor][black]
+
+ \placelist
+ [chapter,section,subsection]
+ [criterium=text]
+
+\stop
+
+\stoptitle
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-enhancements.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-enhancements.tex
index d6651507a2..b81e1dbdae 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-enhancements.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-enhancements.tex
@@ -1,1371 +1,1371 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-enhancements
-
-\startchapter[reference=enhancements,title={Basic \TEX\ enhancements}]
-
-\startsection[title={Introduction}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Primitive behaviour}]
-
-From day one, \LUATEX\ has offered extra features compared to the superset of
-\PDFTEX, which includes \ETEX, and \ALEPH. This has not been limited to the
-possibility to execute \LUA\ code via \prm {directlua}, but \LUATEX\ also adds
-functionality via new \TEX|-|side primitives or extensions to existing ones.
-
-When \LUATEX\ starts up in \quote {iniluatex} mode (\type {luatex -ini}), it
-defines only the primitive commands known by \TEX82 and the one extra command
-\prm {directlua}. As is fitting, a \LUA\ function has to be called to add the
-extra primitives to the user environment. The simplest method to get access to
-all of the new primitive commands is by adding this line to the format generation
-file:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua { tex.enableprimitives('',tex.extraprimitives()) }
-\stoptyping
-
-But be aware that the curly braces may not have the proper \prm {catcode}
-assigned to them at this early time (giving a \quote {Missing number} error), so
-it may be needed to put these assignments before the above line:
-
-\starttyping
-\catcode `\{=1
-\catcode `\}=2
-\stoptyping
-
-More fine|-|grained primitives control is possible and you can look up the
-details in \in {section} [luaprimitives]. For simplicity's sake, this manual
-assumes that you have executed the \prm {directlua} command as given above.
-
-The startup behaviour documented above is considered stable in the sense that
-there will not be backward|-|incompatible changes any more. We have promoted some
-rather generic \PDFTEX\ primitives to core \LUATEX\ ones, and the few that we
-inherited from \ALEPH\ (\OMEGA) are also promoted. Effectively this means that we
-now only have the \type {tex}, \type {etex} and \type {luatex} sets left.
-
-In \in {Chapter} [modifications] we discuss several primitives that are derived
-from \PDFTEX\ and \ALEPH\ (\OMEGA). Here we stick to real new ones. In the
-chapters on fonts and math we discuss a few more new ones.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Version information}]
-
-\startsubsubsection[title={\lpr {luatexbanner}, \lpr {luatexversion} and \lpr {luatexrevision}}]
-
-\topicindex{version}
-\topicindex{banner}
-
-There are three new primitives to test the version of \LUATEX:
-
-\unexpanded\def\VersionHack#1% otherwise different luatex and luajittex runs
- {\ctxlua{%
- local banner = "\luatexbanner"
- local banner = string.match(banner,"(.+)\letterpercent(") or banner
- context(string.gsub(banner ,"jit",""))%
- }}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|pl|]
-\DB primitive \BC value
- \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \lpr {luatexbanner} \NC \VersionHack{\luatexbanner}
- \NC the banner reported on the command line \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {luatexversion} \NC \the\luatexversion
- \NC a combination of major and minor number \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {luatexrevision} \NC \luatexrevision
- \NC the revision number, the current value is \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The official \LUATEX\ version is defined as follows:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- The major version is the integer result of \lpr {luatexversion} divided by
- 100. The primitive is an \quote {internal variable}, so you may need to prefix
- its use with \prm {the} depending on the context.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The minor version is the two|-|digit result of \lpr {luatexversion} modulo 100.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The revision is reported by \lpr {luatexrevision}. This primitive expands to
- a positive integer.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The full version number consists of the major version, minor version and
- revision, separated by dots.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-\stopsubsubsection
-
-\startsubsubsection[title={\lpr {formatname}}]
-
-\topicindex{format}
-
-The \lpr {formatname} syntax is identical to \prm {jobname}. In \INITEX, the
-expansion is empty. Otherwise, the expansion is the value that \prm {jobname} had
-during the \INITEX\ run that dumped the currently loaded format. You can use this
-token list to provide your own version info.
-
-\stopsubsubsection
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={\UNICODE\ text support}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Extended ranges}]
-
-\topicindex{\UNICODE}
-
-Text input and output is now considered to be \UNICODE\ text, so input characters
-can use the full range of \UNICODE\ ($2^{20}+2^{16}-1 = \hbox{0x10FFFF}$). Later
-chapters will talk of characters and glyphs. Although these are not
-interchangeable, they are closely related. During typesetting, a character is
-always converted to a suitable graphic representation of that character in a
-specific font. However, while processing a list of to|-|be|-|typeset nodes, its
-contents may still be seen as a character. Inside \LUATEX\ there is no clear
-separation between the two concepts. Because the subtype of a glyph node can be
-changed in \LUA\ it is up to the user. Subtypes larger than 255 indicate that
-font processing has happened.
-
-A few primitives are affected by this, all in a similar fashion: each of them has
-to accommodate for a larger range of acceptable numbers. For instance, \prm
-{char} now accepts values between~0 and $1{,}114{,}111$. This should not be a
-problem for well|-|behaved input files, but it could create incompatibilities for
-input that would have generated an error when processed by older \TEX|-|based
-engines. The affected commands with an altered initial (left of the equal sign)
-or secondary (right of the equal sign) value are: \prm {char}, \prm {lccode},
-\prm {uccode}, \lpr {hjcode}, \prm {catcode}, \prm {sfcode}, \lpr {efcode}, \lpr
-{lpcode}, \lpr {rpcode}, \prm {chardef}.
-
-As far as the core engine is concerned, all input and output to text files is
-\UTF-8 encoded. Input files can be pre|-|processed using the \type {reader}
-callback. This will be explained in \in {section} [iocallback]. Normalization of
-the \UNICODE\ input is on purpose not built|-|in and can be handled by a macro
-package during callback processing. We have made some practical choices and the
-user has to live with those.
-
-Output in byte|-|sized chunks can be achieved by using characters just outside of
-the valid \UNICODE\ range, starting at the value $1{,}114{,}112$ (0x110000). When
-the time comes to print a character $c>=1{,}114{,}112$, \LUATEX\ will actually
-print the single byte corresponding to $c$ minus 1{,}114{,}112.
-
-Output to the terminal uses \type {^^} notation for the lower control range
-($c<32$), with the exception of \type {^^I}, \type {^^J} and \type {^^M}. These
-are considered \quote {safe} and therefore printed as|-|is. You can disable
-escaping with \type {texio.setescape(false)} in which case you get the normal
-characters on the console.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {Uchar}}]
-
-\topicindex{\UNICODE}
-
-The expandable command \lpr {Uchar} reads a number between~0 and $1{,}114{,}111$
-and expands to the associated \UNICODE\ character.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Extended tables}]
-
-All traditional \TEX\ and \ETEX\ registers can be 16-bit numbers. The affected
-commands are:
-
-\startfourcolumns
-\startlines
-\prm {count}
-\prm {dimen}
-\prm {skip}
-\prm {muskip}
-\prm {marks}
-\prm {toks}
-\prm {countdef}
-\prm {dimendef}
-\prm {skipdef}
-\prm {muskipdef}
-\prm {toksdef}
-\prm {insert}
-\prm {box}
-\prm {unhbox}
-\prm {unvbox}
-\prm {copy}
-\prm {unhcopy}
-\prm {unvcopy}
-\prm {wd}
-\prm {ht}
-\prm {dp}
-\prm {setbox}
-\prm {vsplit}
-\stoplines
-\stopfourcolumns
-
-Because font memory management has been rewritten, character properties in fonts
-are no longer shared among font instances that originate from the same metric
-file. Of course we share fonts in the backend when possible so that the resulting
-\PDF\ file is as efficient as possible, but for instance also expansion and
-protrusion no longer use copies as in \PDFTEX.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Attributes}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Nodes}]
-
-\topicindex {nodes}
-
-When \TEX\ reads input it will interpret the stream according to the properties
-of the characters. Some signal a macro name and trigger expansion, others open
-and close groups, trigger math mode, etc. What's left over becomes the typeset
-text. Internally we get linked list of nodes. Characters become \nod {glyph}
-nodes that have for instance a \type {font} and \type {char} property and \typ
-{\kern 10pt} becomes a \nod {kern} node with a \type {width} property. Spaces are
-alien to \TEX\ as they are turned into \nod {glue} nodes. So, a simple paragraph
-is mostly a mix of sequences of \nod {glyph} nodes (words) and \nod {glue} nodes
-(spaces).
-
-The sequences of characters at some point are extended with \nod {disc} nodes
-that relate to hyphenation. After that font logic can be applied and we get a
-list where some characters can be replaced, for instance multiple characters can
-become one ligature, and font kerns can be injected. This is driven by the
-font properties.
-
-Boxes (like \prm {hbox} and \prm {vbox}) become \nod {hlist} or \nod {vlist}
-nodes with \type {width}, \type {height}, \type {depth} and \type {shift}
-properties and a pointer \type {list} to its actual content. Boxes can be
-constructed explicitly or can be the result of subprocesses. For instance, when
-lines are broken into paragraphs, the lines are a linked list of \nod {hlist}
-nodes.
-
-So, to summarize: all that you enter as content eventually becomes a node, often
-as part of a (nested) list structure. They have a relative small memory footprint
-and carry only the minimal amount of information needed. In traditional \TEX\ a
-character node only held the font and slot number, in \LUATEX\ we also store some
-language related information, the expansion factor, etc. Now that we have access
-to these nodes from \LUA\ it makes sense to be able to carry more information
-with an node and this is where attributes kick in.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Attribute registers}]
-
-\topicindex {attributes}
-
-Attributes are a completely new concept in \LUATEX. Syntactically, they behave a
-lot like counters: attributes obey \TEX's nesting stack and can be used after
-\prm {the} etc.\ just like the normal \prm {count} registers.
-
-\startsyntax
-\attribute <16-bit number> <optional equals> <32-bit number>!crlf
-\attributedef <csname> <optional equals> <16-bit number>
-\stopsyntax
-
-Conceptually, an attribute is either \quote {set} or \quote {unset}. Unset
-attributes have a special negative value to indicate that they are unset, that
-value is the lowest legal value: \type {-"7FFFFFFF} in hexadecimal, a.k.a.
-$-2147483647$ in decimal. It follows that the value \type {-"7FFFFFFF} cannot be
-used as a legal attribute value, but you {\it can\/} assign \type {-"7FFFFFFF} to
-\quote {unset} an attribute. All attributes start out in this \quote {unset}
-state in \INITEX.
-
-Attributes can be used as extra counter values, but their usefulness comes mostly
-from the fact that the numbers and values of all \quote {set} attributes are
-attached to all nodes created in their scope. These can then be queried from any
-\LUA\ code that deals with node processing. Further information about how to use
-attributes for node list processing from \LUA\ is given in~\in {chapter}[nodes].
-
-Attributes are stored in a sorted (sparse) linked list that are shared when
-possible. This permits efficient testing and updating. You can define many
-thousands of attributes but normally such a large number makes no sense and is
-also not that efficient because each node carries a (possibly shared) link to a
-list of currently set attributes. But they are a convenient extension and one of
-the first extensions we implemented in \LUATEX.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Box attributes}]
-
-\topicindex {attributes}
-\topicindex {boxes}
-
-Nodes typically receive the list of attributes that is in effect when they are
-created. This moment can be quite asynchronous. For example: in paragraph
-building, the individual line boxes are created after the \prm {par} command has
-been processed, so they will receive the list of attributes that is in effect
-then, not the attributes that were in effect in, say, the first or third line of
-the paragraph.
-
-Similar situations happen in \LUATEX\ regularly. A few of the more obvious
-problematic cases are dealt with: the attributes for nodes that are created
-during hyphenation, kerning and ligaturing borrow their attributes from their
-surrounding glyphs, and it is possible to influence box attributes directly.
-
-When you assemble a box in a register, the attributes of the nodes contained in
-the box are unchanged when such a box is placed, unboxed, or copied. In this
-respect attributes act the same as characters that have been converted to
-references to glyphs in fonts. For instance, when you use attributes to implement
-color support, each node carries information about its eventual color. In that
-case, unless you implement mechanisms that deal with it, applying a color to
-already boxed material will have no effect. Keep in mind that this
-incompatibility is mostly due to the fact that separate specials and literals are
-a more unnatural approach to colors than attributes.
-
-It is possible to fine-tune the list of attributes that are applied to a \type
-{hbox}, \type {vbox} or \type {vtop} by the use of the keyword \type {attr}. The
-\type {attr} keyword(s) should come before a \type {to} or \type {spread}, if
-that is also specified. An example is:
-
-\startbuffer[tex]
-\attribute997=123
-\attribute998=456
-\setbox0=\hbox {Hello}
-\setbox2=\hbox attr 999 = 789 attr 998 = -"7FFFFFFF{Hello}
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startbuffer[lua]
- for b=0,2,2 do
- for a=997, 999 do
- tex.sprint("box ", b, " : attr ",a," : ",tostring(tex.box[b] [a]))
- tex.sprint("\\quad\\quad")
- tex.sprint("list ",b, " : attr ",a," : ",tostring(tex.box[b].list[a]))
- tex.sprint("\\par")
- end
- end
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer[tex]
-
-Box 0 now has attributes 997 and 998 set while box 2 has attributes 997 and 999
-set while the nodes inside that box will all have attributes 997 and 998 set.
-Assigning the maximum negative value causes an attribute to be ignored.
-
-To give you an idea of what this means at the \LUA\ end, take the following
-code:
-
-\typebuffer[lua]
-
-Later we will see that you can access properties of a node. The boxes here are so
-called \nod {hlist} nodes that have a field \type {list} that points to the
-content. Because the attributes are a list themselves you can access them by
-indexing the node (here we do that with \type {[a]}. Running this snippet gives:
-
-\start
- \getbuffer[tex]
- \startpacked \tt
- \ctxluabuffer[lua]
- \stoppacked
-\stop
-
-Because some values are not set we need to apply the \type {tostring} function
-here so that we get the word \type {nil}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={\LUA\ related primitives}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={\prm {directlua}}]
-
-In order to merge \LUA\ code with \TEX\ input, a few new primitives are needed.
-The primitive \prm {directlua} is used to execute \LUA\ code immediately. The
-syntax is
-
-\startsyntax
-\directlua <general text>!crlf
-\directlua <16-bit number> <general text>
-\stopsyntax
-
-The \syntax {<general text>} is expanded fully, and then fed into the \LUA\
-interpreter. After reading and expansion has been applied to the \syntax
-{<general text>}, the resulting token list is converted to a string as if it was
-displayed using \type {\the\toks}. On the \LUA\ side, each \prm {directlua} block
-is treated as a separate chunk. In such a chunk you can use the \type {local}
-directive to keep your variables from interfering with those used by the macro
-package.
-
-The conversion to and from a token list means that you normally can not use \LUA\
-line comments (starting with \type {--}) within the argument. As there typically
-will be only one \quote {line} the first line comment will run on until the end
-of the input. You will either need to use \TEX|-|style line comments (starting
-with \%), or change the \TEX\ category codes locally. Another possibility is to
-say:
-
-\starttyping
-\begingroup
-\endlinechar=10
-\directlua ...
-\endgroup
-\stoptyping
-
-Then \LUA\ line comments can be used, since \TEX\ does not replace line endings
-with spaces. Of course such an approach depends on the macro package that you
-use.
-
-The \syntax {<16-bit number>} designates a name of a \LUA\ chunk and is
-taken from the \type {lua.name} array (see the documentation of the \type {lua}
-table further in this manual). When a chunk name starts with a \type {@} it will
-be displayed as a file name. This is a side effect of the way \LUA\ implements
-error handling.
-
-The \prm {directlua} command is expandable. Since it passes \LUA\ code to the
-\LUA\ interpreter its expansion from the \TEX\ viewpoint is usually empty.
-However, there are some \LUA\ functions that produce material to be read by \TEX,
-the so called print functions. The most simple use of these is \type
-{tex.print(<string> s)}. The characters of the string \type {s} will be placed on
-the \TEX\ input buffer, that is, \quote {before \TEX's eyes} to be read by \TEX\
-immediately. For example:
-
-\startbuffer
-\count10=20
-a\directlua{tex.print(tex.count[10]+5)}b
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-expands to
-
-\getbuffer
-
-Here is another example:
-
-\startbuffer
-$\pi = \directlua{tex.print(math.pi)}$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-will result in
-
-\getbuffer
-
-Note that the expansion of \prm {directlua} is a sequence of characters, not of
-tokens, contrary to all \TEX\ commands. So formally speaking its expansion is
-null, but it places material on a pseudo-file to be immediately read by \TEX, as
-\ETEX's \prm {scantokens}. For a description of print functions look at \in
-{section} [sec:luaprint].
-
-Because the \syntax {<general text>} is a chunk, the normal \LUA\ error handling
-is triggered if there is a problem in the included code. The \LUA\ error messages
-should be clear enough, but the contextual information is still pretty bad.
-Often, you will only see the line number of the right brace at the end of the
-code.
-
-While on the subject of errors: some of the things you can do inside \LUA\ code
-can break up \LUATEX\ pretty bad. If you are not careful while working with the
-node list interface, you may even end up with assertion errors from within the
-\TEX\ portion of the executable.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {latelua} and \lpr {lateluafunction}}]
-
-Contrary to \prm {directlua}, \lpr {latelua} stores \LUA\ code in a whatsit
-that will be processed at the time of shipping out. Its intended use is a cross
-between \PDF\ literals (often available as \orm {pdfliteral}) and the
-traditional \TEX\ extension \prm {write}. Within the \LUA\ code you can print
-\PDF\ statements directly to the \PDF\ file via \type {pdf.print}, or you can
-write to other output streams via \type {texio.write} or simply using \LUA\ \IO\
-routines.
-
-\startsyntax
-\latelua <general text>!crlf
-\latelua <16-bit number> <general text>
-\stopsyntax
-
-Expansion of macros in the final \type {<general text>} is delayed until just
-before the whatsit is executed (like in \prm {write}). With regard to \PDF\
-output stream \lpr {latelua} behaves as \PDF\ page literals. The \syntax
-{name <general text>} and \syntax {<16-bit number>} behave in the same way as
-they do for \prm {directlua}.
-
-The \lpr {lateluafunction} primitive takes a number and is similar to \lpr
-{luafunction} but gets delated to shipout time. It's just there for completeness.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {luaescapestring}}]
-
-\topicindex {escaping}
-
-This primitive converts a \TEX\ token sequence so that it can be safely used as
-the contents of a \LUA\ string: embedded backslashes, double and single quotes,
-and newlines and carriage returns are escaped. This is done by prepending an
-extra token consisting of a backslash with category code~12, and for the line
-endings, converting them to \type {n} and \type {r} respectively. The token
-sequence is fully expanded.
-
-\startsyntax
-\luaescapestring <general text>
-\stopsyntax
-
-Most often, this command is not actually the best way to deal with the
-differences between \TEX\ and \LUA. In very short bits of \LUA\ code it is often
-not needed, and for longer stretches of \LUA\ code it is easier to keep the code
-in a separate file and load it using \LUA's \type {dofile}:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua { dofile('mysetups.lua') }
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {luafunction}, \lpr {luafunctioncall} and \lpr {luadef}}]
-
-The \prm {directlua} commands involves tokenization of its argument (after
-picking up an optional name or number specification). The tokenlist is then
-converted into a string and given to \LUA\ to turn into a function that is
-called. The overhead is rather small but when you have millions of calls it can
-have some impact. For this reason there is a variant call available: \lpr
-{luafunction}. This command is used as follows:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- local t = lua.get_functions_table()
- t[1] = function() tex.print("!") end
- t[2] = function() tex.print("?") end
-}
-
-\luafunction1
-\luafunction2
-\stoptyping
-
-Of course the functions can also be defined in a separate file. There is no limit
-on the number of functions apart from normal \LUA\ limitations. Of course there
-is the limitation of no arguments but that would involve parsing and thereby give
-no gain. The function, when called in fact gets one argument, being the index, so
-in the following example the number \type {8} gets typeset.
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- local t = lua.get_functions_table()
- t[8] = function(slot) tex.print(slot) end
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-The \lpr {luafunctioncall} primitive does the same but is unexpandable, for
-instance in an \prm {edef}. In addition \LUATEX\ provides a definer:
-
-\starttyping
- \luadef\MyFunctionA 1
- \global\luadef\MyFunctionB 2
-\protected\global\luadef\MyFunctionC 3
-\stoptyping
-
-You should really use these commands with care. Some references get stored in
-tokens and assume that the function is available when that token expands. On the
-other hand, as we have tested this functionality in relative complex situations
-normal usage should not give problems.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {luabytecode} and \lpr {luabytecodecall}}]
-
-Analogue to the function callers discussed in the previous section we have byte
-code callers. Again the call variant is unexpandable.
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- lua.bytecode[9998] = function(s)
- tex.sprint(s*token.scan_int())
- end
- lua.bytecode[5555] = function(s)
- tex.sprint(s*token.scan_dimen())
- end
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-This works with:
-
-\starttyping
-\luabytecode 9998 5 \luabytecode 5555 5sp
-\luabytecodecall9998 5 \luabytecodecall5555 5sp
-\stoptyping
-
-The variable \type {s} in the code is the number of the byte code register that
-can be used for diagnostic purposes. The advantage of bytecode registers over
-function calls is that they are stored in the format (but without upvalues).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Catcode tables}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Catcodes}]
-
-\topicindex {catcodes}
-
-Catcode tables are a new feature that allows you to switch to a predefined
-catcode regime in a single statement. You can have a practically unlimited number
-of different tables. This subsystem is backward compatible: if you never use the
-following commands, your document will not notice any difference in behaviour
-compared to traditional \TEX. The contents of each catcode table is independent
-from any other catcode table, and its contents is stored and retrieved from the
-format file.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {catcodetable}}]
-
-\startsyntax
-\catcodetable <15-bit number>
-\stopsyntax
-
-The primitive \lpr {catcodetable} switches to a different catcode table. Such a
-table has to be previously created using one of the two primitives below, or it
-has to be zero. Table zero is initialized by \INITEX.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {initcatcodetable}}]
-
-\startsyntax
-\initcatcodetable <15-bit number>
-\stopsyntax
-
-The primitive \lpr {initcatcodetable} creates a new table with catcodes
-identical to those defined by \INITEX. The new catcode table is allocated
-globally: it will not go away after the current group has ended. If the supplied
-number is identical to the currently active table, an error is raised. The
-initial values are:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|c|l|l|]
-\DB catcode \BC character \BC equivalent \BC category \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC \tttf \letterbackslash \NC \NC \type {escape} \NC \NR
-\NC 5 \NC \tttf \letterhat\letterhat M \NC return \NC \type {car_ret} \NC \NR
-\NC 9 \NC \tttf \letterhat\letterhat @ \NC null \NC \type {ignore} \NC \NR
-\NC 10 \NC \tttf <space> \NC space \NC \type {spacer} \NC \NR
-\NC 11 \NC {\tttf a} \endash\ {\tttf z} \NC \NC \type {letter} \NC \NR
-\NC 11 \NC {\tttf A} \endash\ {\tttf Z} \NC \NC \type {letter} \NC \NR
-\NC 12 \NC everything else \NC \NC \type {other} \NC \NR
-\NC 14 \NC \tttf \letterpercent \NC \NC \type {comment} \NC \NR
-\NC 15 \NC \tttf \letterhat\letterhat ? \NC delete \NC \type {invalid_char} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {savecatcodetable}}]
-
-\startsyntax
-\savecatcodetable <15-bit number>
-\stopsyntax
-
-\lpr {savecatcodetable} copies the current set of catcodes to a new table with
-the requested number. The definitions in this new table are all treated as if
-they were made in the outermost level.
-
-The new table is allocated globally: it will not go away after the current group
-has ended. If the supplied number is the currently active table, an error is
-raised.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Suppressing errors}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressfontnotfounderror}}]
-
-\topicindex {errors}
-
-If this integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain about
-font metrics that are not found. Instead it will silently skip the font
-assignment, making the requested csname for the font \prm {ifx} equal to \prm
-{nullfont}, so that it can be tested against that without bothering the user.
-
-\startsyntax
-\suppressfontnotfounderror = 1
-\stopsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppresslongerror}}]
-
-\topicindex {errors}
-
-If this integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain about
-\prm {par} commands encountered in contexts where that is normally prohibited
-(most prominently in the arguments of macros not defined as \prm {long}).
-
-\startsyntax
-\suppresslongerror = 1
-\stopsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressifcsnameerror}}]
-
-\topicindex {errors}
-
-If this integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain about
-non-expandable commands appearing in the middle of a \prm {ifcsname} expansion.
-Instead, it will keep getting expanded tokens from the input until it encounters
-an \prm {endcsname} command. If the input expansion is unbalanced with respect
-to \prm {csname} \ldots \prm {endcsname} pairs, the \LUATEX\ process may hang
-indefinitely.
-
-\startsyntax
-\suppressifcsnameerror = 1
-\stopsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressoutererror}}]
-
-\topicindex {errors}
-
-If this new integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain
-about \prm {outer} commands encountered in contexts where that is normally
-prohibited.
-
-\startsyntax
-\suppressoutererror = 1
-\stopsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressmathparerror}}]
-
-\topicindex {errors}
-\topicindex {math}
-
-The following setting will permit \prm {par} tokens in a math formula:
-
-\startsyntax
-\suppressmathparerror = 1
-\stopsyntax
-
-So, the next code is valid then:
-
-\starttyping
-$ x + 1 =
-
-a $
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressprimitiveerror}}]
-
-\topicindex {errors}
-\topicindex {primitives}
-
-When set to a non|-|zero value the following command will not issue an error:
-
-\startsyntax
-\suppressprimitiveerror = 1
-
-\primitive\notaprimitive
-\stopsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Fonts}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Font syntax}]
-
-\topicindex {fonts}
-
-\LUATEX\ will accept a braced argument as a font name:
-
-\starttyping
-\font\myfont = {cmr10}
-\stoptyping
-
-This allows for embedded spaces, without the need for double quotes. Macro
-expansion takes place inside the argument.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {fontid} and \lpr {setfontid}}]
-
-\startsyntax
-\fontid\font
-\stopsyntax
-
-This primitive expands into a number. It is not a register so there is no need to
-prefix with \prm {number} (and using \prm {the} gives an error). The currently
-used font id is \fontid\font. Here are some more:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
-\DB style \BC command \BC font id \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC normal \NC \type {\tf} \NC \bf \fontid\font \NC \NR
-\NC bold \NC \type {\bf} \NC \bf \fontid\font \NC \NR
-\NC italic \NC \type {\it} \NC \it \fontid\font \NC \NR
-\NC bold italic \NC \type {\bi} \NC \bi \fontid\font \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-These numbers depend on the macro package used because each one has its own way
-of dealing with fonts. They can also differ per run, as they can depend on the
-order of loading fonts. For instance, when in \CONTEXT\ virtual math \UNICODE\
-fonts are used, we can easily get over a hundred ids in use. Not all ids have to
-be bound to a real font, after all it's just a number.
-
-The primitive \lpr {setfontid} can be used to enable a font with the given id,
-which of course needs to be a valid one.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {noligs} and \lpr {nokerns}}]
-
-\topicindex {ligatures+suppress}
-\topicindex {kerns+suppress}
-
-These primitives prohibit ligature and kerning insertion at the time when the
-initial node list is built by \LUATEX's main control loop. You can enable these
-primitives when you want to do node list processing of \quote {characters}, where
-\TEX's normal processing would get in the way.
-
-\startsyntax
-\noligs <integer>!crlf
-\nokerns <integer>
-\stopsyntax
-
-These primitives can also be implemented by overloading the ligature building and
-kerning functions, i.e.\ by assigning dummy functions to their associated
-callbacks. Keep in mind that when you define a font (using \LUA) you can also
-omit the kern and ligature tables, which has the same effect as the above.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type{\nospaces}}]
-
-\topicindex {spaces+suppress}
-
-This new primitive can be used to overrule the usual \prm {spaceskip} related
-heuristics when a space character is seen in a text flow. The value~\type{1}
-triggers no injection while \type{2} results in injection of a zero skip. In \in
-{figure} [fig:nospaces] we see the results for four characters separated by a
-space.
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=fig:nospaces,title={The \lpr {nospaces} options.}]
-\startcombination[3*2]
- {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 10mm\nospaces=0\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {0 / hsize 10mm}}
- {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 10mm\nospaces=1\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {1 / hsize 10mm}}
- {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 10mm\nospaces=2\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {2 / hsize 10mm}}
- {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 1mm\nospaces=0\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {0 / hsize 1mm}}
- {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 1mm\nospaces=1\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {1 / hsize 1mm}}
- {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 1mm\nospaces=2\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {2 / hsize 1mm}}
-\stopcombination
-\stopplacefigure
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Tokens, commands and strings}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {scantextokens}}]
-
-\topicindex {tokens+scanning}
-
-The syntax of \lpr {scantextokens} is identical to \prm {scantokens}. This
-primitive is a slightly adapted version of \ETEX's \prm {scantokens}. The
-differences are:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- The last (and usually only) line does not have a \prm {endlinechar}
- appended.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \lpr {scantextokens} never raises an EOF error, and it does not execute
- \prm {everyeof} tokens.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- There are no \quote {\unknown\ while end of file \unknown} error tests
- executed. This allows the expansion to end on a different grouping level or
- while a conditional is still incomplete.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {toksapp}, \lpr {tokspre}, \lpr {etoksapp}, \lpr {etokspre},
-\lpr {gtoksapp}, \lpr {gtokspre}, \lpr {xtoksapp}, \lpr {xtokspre}}]
-
-Instead of:
-
-\starttyping
-\toks0\expandafter{\the\toks0 foo}
-\stoptyping
-
-you can use:
-
-\starttyping
-\etoksapp0{foo}
-\stoptyping
-
-The \type {pre} variants prepend instead of append, and the \type {e} variants
-expand the passed general text. The \type {g} and \type {x} variants are global.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\prm {csstring}, \lpr {begincsname} and \lpr {lastnamedcs}}]
-
-These are somewhat special. The \prm {csstring} primitive is like
-\prm {string} but it omits the leading escape character. This can be
-somewhat more efficient than stripping it afterwards.
-
-The \lpr {begincsname} primitive is like \prm {csname} but doesn't create
-a relaxed equivalent when there is no such name. It is equivalent to
-
-\starttyping
-\ifcsname foo\endcsname
- \csname foo\endcsname
-\fi
-\stoptyping
-
-The advantage is that it saves a lookup (don't expect much speedup) but more
-important is that it avoids using the \prm {if} test. The \lpr {lastnamedcs}
-is one that should be used with care. The above example could be written as:
-
-\starttyping
-\ifcsname foo\endcsname
- \lastnamedcs
-\fi
-\stoptyping
-
-This is slightly more efficient than constructing the string twice (deep down in
-\LUATEX\ this also involves some \UTF8 juggling), but probably more relevant is
-that it saves a few tokens and can make code a bit more readable.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {clearmarks}}]
-
-\topicindex {marks}
-
-This primitive complements the \ETEX\ mark primitives and clears a mark class
-completely, resetting all three connected mark texts to empty. It is an
-immediate command.
-
-\startsyntax
-\clearmarks <16-bit number>
-\stopsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {alignmark} and \lpr {aligntab}}]
-
-The primitive \lpr {alignmark} duplicates the functionality of \type {#} inside
-alignment preambles, while \lpr {aligntab} duplicates the functionality of \type
-{&}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {letcharcode}}]
-
-This primitive can be used to assign a meaning to an active character, as in:
-
-\starttyping
-\def\foo{bar} \letcharcode123=\foo
-\stoptyping
-
-This can be a bit nicer than using the uppercase tricks (using the property of
-\prm {uppercase} that it treats active characters special).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {glet}}]
-
-This primitive is similar to:
-
-\starttyping
-\protected\def\glet{\global\let}
-\stoptyping
-
-but faster (only measurable with millions of calls) and probably more convenient
-(after all we also have \type {\gdef}).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {expanded}, \lpr {immediateassignment} and \lpr {immediateassigned}}]
-
-\topicindex {expansion}
-
-The \lpr {expanded} primitive takes a token list and expands it content which can
-come in handy: it avoids a tricky mix of \prm {expandafter} and \prm {noexpand}.
-You can compare it with what happens inside the body of an \prm {edef}. But this
-kind of expansion it still doesn't expand some primitive operations.
-
-\startbuffer
-\newcount\NumberOfCalls
-
-\def\TestMe{\advance\NumberOfCalls1 }
-
-\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
-\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
-\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
-
-\meaning\Tested
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-The result is a macro that has the not expanded code in its body:
-
-\getbuffer
-
-Instead we can define \tex {TestMe} in a way that expands the assignment
-immediately. You need of course to be aware of preventing look ahead interference
-by using a space or \tex {relax} (often an expression works better as it doesn't
-leave an \tex {relax}).
-
-\startbuffer
-\def\TestMe{\immediateassignment\advance\NumberOfCalls1 }
-
-\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
-\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
-\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
-
-\meaning\Tested
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-This time the counter gets updates and we don't see interference in the
-resulting \tex {Tested} macro:
-
-\getbuffer
-
-Here is a somewhat silly example of expanded comparison:
-
-\startbuffer
-\def\expandeddoifelse#1#2#3#4%
- {\immediateassignment\edef\tempa{#1}%
- \immediateassignment\edef\tempb{#2}%
- \ifx\tempa\tempb
- \immediateassignment\def\next{#3}%
- \else
- \immediateassignment\def\next{#4}%
- \fi
- \next}
-
-\edef\Tested
- {(\expandeddoifelse{abc}{def}{yes}{nop}/%
- \expandeddoifelse{abc}{abc}{yes}{nop})}
-
-\meaning\Tested
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-It gives:
-
-\getbuffer
-
-A variant is:
-
-\starttyping
-\def\expandeddoifelse#1#2#3#4%
- {\immediateassigned{
- \edef\tempa{#1}%
- \edef\tempb{#2}%
- }%
- \ifx\tempa\tempb
- \immediateassignment\def\next{#3}%
- \else
- \immediateassignment\def\next{#4}%
- \fi
- \next}
-\stoptyping
-
-The possible error messages are the same as using assignments in preambles of
-alignments and after the \prm {accent} command. The supported assignments are the
-so called prefixed commands (except box assignments).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {ifcondition}}]
-
-\topicindex {conditions}
-
-This is a somewhat special one. When you write macros conditions need to be
-properly balanced in order to let \TEX's fast branch skipping work well. This new
-primitive is basically a no||op flagged as a condition so that the scanner can
-recognize it as an if|-|test. However, when a real test takes place the work is
-done by what follows, in the next example \tex {something}.
-
-\starttyping
-\unexpanded\def\something#1#2%
- {\edef\tempa{#1}%
- \edef\tempb{#2}
- \ifx\tempa\tempb}
-
-\ifcondition\something{a}{b}%
- \ifcondition\something{a}{a}%
- true 1
- \else
- false 1
- \fi
-\else
- \ifcondition\something{a}{a}%
- true 2
- \else
- false 2
- \fi
-\fi
-\stoptyping
-
-If you are familiar with \METAPOST, this is a bit like \type {vardef} where the macro
-has a return value. Here the return value is a test.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Boxes, rules and leaders}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {outputbox}}]
-
-\topicindex {output}
-
-This integer parameter allows you to alter the number of the box that will be
-used to store the page sent to the output routine. Its default value is 255, and
-the acceptable range is from 0 to 65535.
-
-\startsyntax
-\outputbox = 12345
-\stopsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\prm {vpack}, \prm {hpack} and \prm {tpack}}]
-
-These three primitives are like \prm {vbox}, \prm {hbox} and \prm {vtop}
-but don't apply the related callbacks.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\prm {vsplit}}]
-
-\topicindex {splitting}
-
-The \prm {vsplit} primitive has to be followed by a specification of the required
-height. As alternative for the \type {to} keyword you can use \type {upto} to get
-a split of the given size but result has the natural dimensions then.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Images and reused box objects},reference=sec:imagedandforms]
-
-These two concepts are now core concepts and no longer whatsits. They are in fact
-now implemented as rules with special properties. Normal rules have subtype~0,
-saved boxes have subtype~1 and images have subtype~2. This has the positive side
-effect that whenever we need to take content with dimensions into account, when
-we look at rule nodes, we automatically also deal with these two types.
-
-The syntax of the \type {\save...resource} is the same as in \PDFTEX\ but you
-should consider them to be backend specific. This means that a macro package
-should treat them as such and check for the current output mode if applicable.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB command \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \lpr {saveboxresource} \NC save the box as an object to be included later \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {saveimageresource} \NC save the image as an object to be included later \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {useboxresource} \NC include the saved box object here (by index) \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {useimageresource} \NC include the saved image object here (by index) \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {lastsavedboxresourceindex} \NC the index of the last saved box object \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourceindex} \NC the index of the last saved image object \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourcepages} \NC the number of pages in the last saved image object \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\LUATEX\ accepts optional dimension parameters for \type {\use...resource} in the
-same format as for rules. With images, these dimensions are then used instead of
-the ones given to \lpr {useimageresource} but the original dimensions are not
-overwritten, so that a \lpr {useimageresource} without dimensions still
-provides the image with dimensions defined by \lpr {saveimageresource}. These
-optional parameters are not implemented for \lpr {saveboxresource}.
-
-\starttyping
-\useimageresource width 20mm height 10mm depth 5mm \lastsavedimageresourceindex
-\useboxresource width 20mm height 10mm depth 5mm \lastsavedboxresourceindex
-\stoptyping
-
-The box resources are of course implemented in the backend and therefore we do
-support the \type {attr} and \type {resources} keys that accept a token list. New
-is the \type {type} key. When set to non|-|zero the \type {/Type} entry is
-omitted. A value of 1 or 3 still writes a \type {/BBox}, while 2 or 3 will write
-a \type {/Matrix}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {nohrule} and \lpr {novrule}}]
-
-\topicindex {rules}
-
-Because introducing a new keyword can cause incompatibilities, two new primitives
-were introduced: \lpr {nohrule} and \lpr {novrule}. These can be used to
-reserve space. This is often more efficient than creating an empty box with fake
-dimensions.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {gleaders}}]
-
-\topicindex {leaders}
-
-This type of leaders is anchored to the origin of the box to be shipped out. So
-they are like normal \prm {leaders} in that they align nicely, except that the
-alignment is based on the {\it largest\/} enclosing box instead of the {\it
-smallest\/}. The \type {g} stresses this global nature.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Languages}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {hyphenationmin}}]
-
-\topicindex {languages}
-\topicindex {hyphenation}
-
-This primitive can be used to set the minimal word length, so setting it to a value
-of~$5$ means that only words of 6 characters and more will be hyphenated, of course
-within the constraints of the \prm {lefthyphenmin} and \prm {righthyphenmin}
-values (as stored in the glyph node). This primitive accepts a number and stores
-the value with the language.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\prm {boundary}, \prm {noboundary}, \prm {protrusionboundary} and \prm {wordboundary}}]
-
-The \prm {noboundary} command is used to inject a whatsit node but now injects a normal
-node with type \nod {boundary} and subtype~0. In addition you can say:
-
-\starttyping
-x\boundary 123\relax y
-\stoptyping
-
-This has the same effect but the subtype is now~1 and the value~123 is stored.
-The traditional ligature builder still sees this as a cancel boundary directive
-but at the \LUA\ end you can implement different behaviour. The added benefit of
-passing this value is a side effect of the generalization. The subtypes~2 and~3
-are used to control protrusion and word boundaries in hyphenation and have
-related primitives.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Control and debugging}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Tracing}]
-
-\topicindex {tracing}
-
-If \prm {tracingonline} is larger than~2, the node list display will also print
-the node number of the nodes.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {outputmode}}]
-
-\topicindex {output}
-\topicindex {backend}
-
-The \lpr {outputmode} variable tells \LUATEX\ what it has to produce:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB value \BC output \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {0} \NC \DVI\ code \NC \NR
-\NC \type {1} \NC \PDF\ code \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr {draftmode}}]
-
-The value of the \lpr {draftmode} counter signals the backend if it should output
-less. The \PDF\ backend accepts a value of~1, while the \DVI\ backend ignores the
-value. This is no critical feature so we can remove it in future versions when it
-can make the backend cleaner.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Files}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={File syntax}]
-
-\topicindex {files+names}
-
-\LUATEX\ will accept a braced argument as a file name:
-
-\starttyping
-\input {plain}
-\openin 0 {plain}
-\stoptyping
-
-This allows for embedded spaces, without the need for double quotes. Macro
-expansion takes place inside the argument.
-
-The \lpr {tracingfonts} primitive that has been inherited from \PDFTEX\ has
-been adapted to support variants in reporting the font. The reason for this
-extension is that a csname not always makes sense. The zero case is the default.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB value \BC reported \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{0} \NC \type{\foo xyz} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{1} \NC \type{\foo (bar)} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{2} \NC \type{<bar> xyz} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{3} \NC \type{<bar @ ..pt> xyz} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{4} \NC \type{<id>} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{5} \NC \type{<id: bar>} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{6} \NC \type{<id: bar @ ..pt> xyz} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Writing to file}]
-
-\topicindex {files+writing}
-
-You can now open upto 127 files with \prm {openout}. When no file is open
-writes will go to the console and log. As a consequence a system command is
-no longer possible but one can use \type {os.execute} to do the same.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Math}]
-
-\topicindex {math}
-
-We will cover math extensions in its own chapter because not only the font
-subsystem and spacing model have been enhanced (thereby introducing many new
-primitives) but also because some more control has been added to existing
-functionality. Much of this relates to the different approaches of traditional
-\TEX\ fonts and \OPENTYPE\ math.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-enhancements
+
+\startchapter[reference=enhancements,title={Basic \TEX\ enhancements}]
+
+\startsection[title={Introduction}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Primitive behaviour}]
+
+From day one, \LUATEX\ has offered extra features compared to the superset of
+\PDFTEX, which includes \ETEX, and \ALEPH. This has not been limited to the
+possibility to execute \LUA\ code via \prm {directlua}, but \LUATEX\ also adds
+functionality via new \TEX|-|side primitives or extensions to existing ones.
+
+When \LUATEX\ starts up in \quote {iniluatex} mode (\type {luatex -ini}), it
+defines only the primitive commands known by \TEX82 and the one extra command
+\prm {directlua}. As is fitting, a \LUA\ function has to be called to add the
+extra primitives to the user environment. The simplest method to get access to
+all of the new primitive commands is by adding this line to the format generation
+file:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua { tex.enableprimitives('',tex.extraprimitives()) }
+\stoptyping
+
+But be aware that the curly braces may not have the proper \prm {catcode}
+assigned to them at this early time (giving a \quote {Missing number} error), so
+it may be needed to put these assignments before the above line:
+
+\starttyping
+\catcode `\{=1
+\catcode `\}=2
+\stoptyping
+
+More fine|-|grained primitives control is possible and you can look up the
+details in \in {section} [luaprimitives]. For simplicity's sake, this manual
+assumes that you have executed the \prm {directlua} command as given above.
+
+The startup behaviour documented above is considered stable in the sense that
+there will not be backward|-|incompatible changes any more. We have promoted some
+rather generic \PDFTEX\ primitives to core \LUATEX\ ones, and the few that we
+inherited from \ALEPH\ (\OMEGA) are also promoted. Effectively this means that we
+now only have the \type {tex}, \type {etex} and \type {luatex} sets left.
+
+In \in {Chapter} [modifications] we discuss several primitives that are derived
+from \PDFTEX\ and \ALEPH\ (\OMEGA). Here we stick to real new ones. In the
+chapters on fonts and math we discuss a few more new ones.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Version information}]
+
+\startsubsubsection[title={\lpr {luatexbanner}, \lpr {luatexversion} and \lpr {luatexrevision}}]
+
+\topicindex{version}
+\topicindex{banner}
+
+There are three new primitives to test the version of \LUATEX:
+
+\unexpanded\def\VersionHack#1% otherwise different luatex and luajittex runs
+ {\ctxlua{%
+ local banner = "\luatexbanner"
+ local banner = string.match(banner,"(.+)\letterpercent(") or banner
+ context(string.gsub(banner ,"jit",""))%
+ }}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|pl|]
+\DB primitive \BC value
+ \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \lpr {luatexbanner} \NC \VersionHack{\luatexbanner}
+ \NC the banner reported on the command line \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {luatexversion} \NC \the\luatexversion
+ \NC a combination of major and minor number \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {luatexrevision} \NC \luatexrevision
+ \NC the revision number, the current value is \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The official \LUATEX\ version is defined as follows:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ The major version is the integer result of \lpr {luatexversion} divided by
+ 100. The primitive is an \quote {internal variable}, so you may need to prefix
+ its use with \prm {the} depending on the context.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The minor version is the two|-|digit result of \lpr {luatexversion} modulo 100.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The revision is reported by \lpr {luatexrevision}. This primitive expands to
+ a positive integer.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The full version number consists of the major version, minor version and
+ revision, separated by dots.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+\stopsubsubsection
+
+\startsubsubsection[title={\lpr {formatname}}]
+
+\topicindex{format}
+
+The \lpr {formatname} syntax is identical to \prm {jobname}. In \INITEX, the
+expansion is empty. Otherwise, the expansion is the value that \prm {jobname} had
+during the \INITEX\ run that dumped the currently loaded format. You can use this
+token list to provide your own version info.
+
+\stopsubsubsection
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={\UNICODE\ text support}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Extended ranges}]
+
+\topicindex{\UNICODE}
+
+Text input and output is now considered to be \UNICODE\ text, so input characters
+can use the full range of \UNICODE\ ($2^{20}+2^{16}-1 = \hbox{0x10FFFF}$). Later
+chapters will talk of characters and glyphs. Although these are not
+interchangeable, they are closely related. During typesetting, a character is
+always converted to a suitable graphic representation of that character in a
+specific font. However, while processing a list of to|-|be|-|typeset nodes, its
+contents may still be seen as a character. Inside \LUATEX\ there is no clear
+separation between the two concepts. Because the subtype of a glyph node can be
+changed in \LUA\ it is up to the user. Subtypes larger than 255 indicate that
+font processing has happened.
+
+A few primitives are affected by this, all in a similar fashion: each of them has
+to accommodate for a larger range of acceptable numbers. For instance, \prm
+{char} now accepts values between~0 and $1{,}114{,}111$. This should not be a
+problem for well|-|behaved input files, but it could create incompatibilities for
+input that would have generated an error when processed by older \TEX|-|based
+engines. The affected commands with an altered initial (left of the equal sign)
+or secondary (right of the equal sign) value are: \prm {char}, \prm {lccode},
+\prm {uccode}, \lpr {hjcode}, \prm {catcode}, \prm {sfcode}, \lpr {efcode}, \lpr
+{lpcode}, \lpr {rpcode}, \prm {chardef}.
+
+As far as the core engine is concerned, all input and output to text files is
+\UTF-8 encoded. Input files can be pre|-|processed using the \type {reader}
+callback. This will be explained in \in {section} [iocallback]. Normalization of
+the \UNICODE\ input is on purpose not built|-|in and can be handled by a macro
+package during callback processing. We have made some practical choices and the
+user has to live with those.
+
+Output in byte|-|sized chunks can be achieved by using characters just outside of
+the valid \UNICODE\ range, starting at the value $1{,}114{,}112$ (0x110000). When
+the time comes to print a character $c>=1{,}114{,}112$, \LUATEX\ will actually
+print the single byte corresponding to $c$ minus 1{,}114{,}112.
+
+Output to the terminal uses \type {^^} notation for the lower control range
+($c<32$), with the exception of \type {^^I}, \type {^^J} and \type {^^M}. These
+are considered \quote {safe} and therefore printed as|-|is. You can disable
+escaping with \type {texio.setescape(false)} in which case you get the normal
+characters on the console.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {Uchar}}]
+
+\topicindex{\UNICODE}
+
+The expandable command \lpr {Uchar} reads a number between~0 and $1{,}114{,}111$
+and expands to the associated \UNICODE\ character.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Extended tables}]
+
+All traditional \TEX\ and \ETEX\ registers can be 16-bit numbers. The affected
+commands are:
+
+\startfourcolumns
+\startlines
+\prm {count}
+\prm {dimen}
+\prm {skip}
+\prm {muskip}
+\prm {marks}
+\prm {toks}
+\prm {countdef}
+\prm {dimendef}
+\prm {skipdef}
+\prm {muskipdef}
+\prm {toksdef}
+\prm {insert}
+\prm {box}
+\prm {unhbox}
+\prm {unvbox}
+\prm {copy}
+\prm {unhcopy}
+\prm {unvcopy}
+\prm {wd}
+\prm {ht}
+\prm {dp}
+\prm {setbox}
+\prm {vsplit}
+\stoplines
+\stopfourcolumns
+
+Because font memory management has been rewritten, character properties in fonts
+are no longer shared among font instances that originate from the same metric
+file. Of course we share fonts in the backend when possible so that the resulting
+\PDF\ file is as efficient as possible, but for instance also expansion and
+protrusion no longer use copies as in \PDFTEX.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Attributes}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Nodes}]
+
+\topicindex {nodes}
+
+When \TEX\ reads input it will interpret the stream according to the properties
+of the characters. Some signal a macro name and trigger expansion, others open
+and close groups, trigger math mode, etc. What's left over becomes the typeset
+text. Internally we get linked list of nodes. Characters become \nod {glyph}
+nodes that have for instance a \type {font} and \type {char} property and \typ
+{\kern 10pt} becomes a \nod {kern} node with a \type {width} property. Spaces are
+alien to \TEX\ as they are turned into \nod {glue} nodes. So, a simple paragraph
+is mostly a mix of sequences of \nod {glyph} nodes (words) and \nod {glue} nodes
+(spaces).
+
+The sequences of characters at some point are extended with \nod {disc} nodes
+that relate to hyphenation. After that font logic can be applied and we get a
+list where some characters can be replaced, for instance multiple characters can
+become one ligature, and font kerns can be injected. This is driven by the
+font properties.
+
+Boxes (like \prm {hbox} and \prm {vbox}) become \nod {hlist} or \nod {vlist}
+nodes with \type {width}, \type {height}, \type {depth} and \type {shift}
+properties and a pointer \type {list} to its actual content. Boxes can be
+constructed explicitly or can be the result of subprocesses. For instance, when
+lines are broken into paragraphs, the lines are a linked list of \nod {hlist}
+nodes.
+
+So, to summarize: all that you enter as content eventually becomes a node, often
+as part of a (nested) list structure. They have a relative small memory footprint
+and carry only the minimal amount of information needed. In traditional \TEX\ a
+character node only held the font and slot number, in \LUATEX\ we also store some
+language related information, the expansion factor, etc. Now that we have access
+to these nodes from \LUA\ it makes sense to be able to carry more information
+with an node and this is where attributes kick in.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Attribute registers}]
+
+\topicindex {attributes}
+
+Attributes are a completely new concept in \LUATEX. Syntactically, they behave a
+lot like counters: attributes obey \TEX's nesting stack and can be used after
+\prm {the} etc.\ just like the normal \prm {count} registers.
+
+\startsyntax
+\attribute <16-bit number> <optional equals> <32-bit number>!crlf
+\attributedef <csname> <optional equals> <16-bit number>
+\stopsyntax
+
+Conceptually, an attribute is either \quote {set} or \quote {unset}. Unset
+attributes have a special negative value to indicate that they are unset, that
+value is the lowest legal value: \type {-"7FFFFFFF} in hexadecimal, a.k.a.
+$-2147483647$ in decimal. It follows that the value \type {-"7FFFFFFF} cannot be
+used as a legal attribute value, but you {\it can\/} assign \type {-"7FFFFFFF} to
+\quote {unset} an attribute. All attributes start out in this \quote {unset}
+state in \INITEX.
+
+Attributes can be used as extra counter values, but their usefulness comes mostly
+from the fact that the numbers and values of all \quote {set} attributes are
+attached to all nodes created in their scope. These can then be queried from any
+\LUA\ code that deals with node processing. Further information about how to use
+attributes for node list processing from \LUA\ is given in~\in {chapter}[nodes].
+
+Attributes are stored in a sorted (sparse) linked list that are shared when
+possible. This permits efficient testing and updating. You can define many
+thousands of attributes but normally such a large number makes no sense and is
+also not that efficient because each node carries a (possibly shared) link to a
+list of currently set attributes. But they are a convenient extension and one of
+the first extensions we implemented in \LUATEX.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Box attributes}]
+
+\topicindex {attributes}
+\topicindex {boxes}
+
+Nodes typically receive the list of attributes that is in effect when they are
+created. This moment can be quite asynchronous. For example: in paragraph
+building, the individual line boxes are created after the \prm {par} command has
+been processed, so they will receive the list of attributes that is in effect
+then, not the attributes that were in effect in, say, the first or third line of
+the paragraph.
+
+Similar situations happen in \LUATEX\ regularly. A few of the more obvious
+problematic cases are dealt with: the attributes for nodes that are created
+during hyphenation, kerning and ligaturing borrow their attributes from their
+surrounding glyphs, and it is possible to influence box attributes directly.
+
+When you assemble a box in a register, the attributes of the nodes contained in
+the box are unchanged when such a box is placed, unboxed, or copied. In this
+respect attributes act the same as characters that have been converted to
+references to glyphs in fonts. For instance, when you use attributes to implement
+color support, each node carries information about its eventual color. In that
+case, unless you implement mechanisms that deal with it, applying a color to
+already boxed material will have no effect. Keep in mind that this
+incompatibility is mostly due to the fact that separate specials and literals are
+a more unnatural approach to colors than attributes.
+
+It is possible to fine-tune the list of attributes that are applied to a \type
+{hbox}, \type {vbox} or \type {vtop} by the use of the keyword \type {attr}. The
+\type {attr} keyword(s) should come before a \type {to} or \type {spread}, if
+that is also specified. An example is:
+
+\startbuffer[tex]
+\attribute997=123
+\attribute998=456
+\setbox0=\hbox {Hello}
+\setbox2=\hbox attr 999 = 789 attr 998 = -"7FFFFFFF{Hello}
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startbuffer[lua]
+ for b=0,2,2 do
+ for a=997, 999 do
+ tex.sprint("box ", b, " : attr ",a," : ",tostring(tex.box[b] [a]))
+ tex.sprint("\\quad\\quad")
+ tex.sprint("list ",b, " : attr ",a," : ",tostring(tex.box[b].list[a]))
+ tex.sprint("\\par")
+ end
+ end
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer[tex]
+
+Box 0 now has attributes 997 and 998 set while box 2 has attributes 997 and 999
+set while the nodes inside that box will all have attributes 997 and 998 set.
+Assigning the maximum negative value causes an attribute to be ignored.
+
+To give you an idea of what this means at the \LUA\ end, take the following
+code:
+
+\typebuffer[lua]
+
+Later we will see that you can access properties of a node. The boxes here are so
+called \nod {hlist} nodes that have a field \type {list} that points to the
+content. Because the attributes are a list themselves you can access them by
+indexing the node (here we do that with \type {[a]}. Running this snippet gives:
+
+\start
+ \getbuffer[tex]
+ \startpacked \tt
+ \ctxluabuffer[lua]
+ \stoppacked
+\stop
+
+Because some values are not set we need to apply the \type {tostring} function
+here so that we get the word \type {nil}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={\LUA\ related primitives}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={\prm {directlua}}]
+
+In order to merge \LUA\ code with \TEX\ input, a few new primitives are needed.
+The primitive \prm {directlua} is used to execute \LUA\ code immediately. The
+syntax is
+
+\startsyntax
+\directlua <general text>!crlf
+\directlua <16-bit number> <general text>
+\stopsyntax
+
+The \syntax {<general text>} is expanded fully, and then fed into the \LUA\
+interpreter. After reading and expansion has been applied to the \syntax
+{<general text>}, the resulting token list is converted to a string as if it was
+displayed using \type {\the\toks}. On the \LUA\ side, each \prm {directlua} block
+is treated as a separate chunk. In such a chunk you can use the \type {local}
+directive to keep your variables from interfering with those used by the macro
+package.
+
+The conversion to and from a token list means that you normally can not use \LUA\
+line comments (starting with \type {--}) within the argument. As there typically
+will be only one \quote {line} the first line comment will run on until the end
+of the input. You will either need to use \TEX|-|style line comments (starting
+with \%), or change the \TEX\ category codes locally. Another possibility is to
+say:
+
+\starttyping
+\begingroup
+\endlinechar=10
+\directlua ...
+\endgroup
+\stoptyping
+
+Then \LUA\ line comments can be used, since \TEX\ does not replace line endings
+with spaces. Of course such an approach depends on the macro package that you
+use.
+
+The \syntax {<16-bit number>} designates a name of a \LUA\ chunk and is
+taken from the \type {lua.name} array (see the documentation of the \type {lua}
+table further in this manual). When a chunk name starts with a \type {@} it will
+be displayed as a file name. This is a side effect of the way \LUA\ implements
+error handling.
+
+The \prm {directlua} command is expandable. Since it passes \LUA\ code to the
+\LUA\ interpreter its expansion from the \TEX\ viewpoint is usually empty.
+However, there are some \LUA\ functions that produce material to be read by \TEX,
+the so called print functions. The most simple use of these is \type
+{tex.print(<string> s)}. The characters of the string \type {s} will be placed on
+the \TEX\ input buffer, that is, \quote {before \TEX's eyes} to be read by \TEX\
+immediately. For example:
+
+\startbuffer
+\count10=20
+a\directlua{tex.print(tex.count[10]+5)}b
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+expands to
+
+\getbuffer
+
+Here is another example:
+
+\startbuffer
+$\pi = \directlua{tex.print(math.pi)}$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+will result in
+
+\getbuffer
+
+Note that the expansion of \prm {directlua} is a sequence of characters, not of
+tokens, contrary to all \TEX\ commands. So formally speaking its expansion is
+null, but it places material on a pseudo-file to be immediately read by \TEX, as
+\ETEX's \prm {scantokens}. For a description of print functions look at \in
+{section} [sec:luaprint].
+
+Because the \syntax {<general text>} is a chunk, the normal \LUA\ error handling
+is triggered if there is a problem in the included code. The \LUA\ error messages
+should be clear enough, but the contextual information is still pretty bad.
+Often, you will only see the line number of the right brace at the end of the
+code.
+
+While on the subject of errors: some of the things you can do inside \LUA\ code
+can break up \LUATEX\ pretty bad. If you are not careful while working with the
+node list interface, you may even end up with assertion errors from within the
+\TEX\ portion of the executable.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {latelua} and \lpr {lateluafunction}}]
+
+Contrary to \prm {directlua}, \lpr {latelua} stores \LUA\ code in a whatsit
+that will be processed at the time of shipping out. Its intended use is a cross
+between \PDF\ literals (often available as \orm {pdfliteral}) and the
+traditional \TEX\ extension \prm {write}. Within the \LUA\ code you can print
+\PDF\ statements directly to the \PDF\ file via \type {pdf.print}, or you can
+write to other output streams via \type {texio.write} or simply using \LUA\ \IO\
+routines.
+
+\startsyntax
+\latelua <general text>!crlf
+\latelua <16-bit number> <general text>
+\stopsyntax
+
+Expansion of macros in the final \type {<general text>} is delayed until just
+before the whatsit is executed (like in \prm {write}). With regard to \PDF\
+output stream \lpr {latelua} behaves as \PDF\ page literals. The \syntax
+{name <general text>} and \syntax {<16-bit number>} behave in the same way as
+they do for \prm {directlua}.
+
+The \lpr {lateluafunction} primitive takes a number and is similar to \lpr
+{luafunction} but gets delated to shipout time. It's just there for completeness.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {luaescapestring}}]
+
+\topicindex {escaping}
+
+This primitive converts a \TEX\ token sequence so that it can be safely used as
+the contents of a \LUA\ string: embedded backslashes, double and single quotes,
+and newlines and carriage returns are escaped. This is done by prepending an
+extra token consisting of a backslash with category code~12, and for the line
+endings, converting them to \type {n} and \type {r} respectively. The token
+sequence is fully expanded.
+
+\startsyntax
+\luaescapestring <general text>
+\stopsyntax
+
+Most often, this command is not actually the best way to deal with the
+differences between \TEX\ and \LUA. In very short bits of \LUA\ code it is often
+not needed, and for longer stretches of \LUA\ code it is easier to keep the code
+in a separate file and load it using \LUA's \type {dofile}:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua { dofile('mysetups.lua') }
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {luafunction}, \lpr {luafunctioncall} and \lpr {luadef}}]
+
+The \prm {directlua} commands involves tokenization of its argument (after
+picking up an optional name or number specification). The tokenlist is then
+converted into a string and given to \LUA\ to turn into a function that is
+called. The overhead is rather small but when you have millions of calls it can
+have some impact. For this reason there is a variant call available: \lpr
+{luafunction}. This command is used as follows:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ local t = lua.get_functions_table()
+ t[1] = function() tex.print("!") end
+ t[2] = function() tex.print("?") end
+}
+
+\luafunction1
+\luafunction2
+\stoptyping
+
+Of course the functions can also be defined in a separate file. There is no limit
+on the number of functions apart from normal \LUA\ limitations. Of course there
+is the limitation of no arguments but that would involve parsing and thereby give
+no gain. The function, when called in fact gets one argument, being the index, so
+in the following example the number \type {8} gets typeset.
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ local t = lua.get_functions_table()
+ t[8] = function(slot) tex.print(slot) end
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+The \lpr {luafunctioncall} primitive does the same but is unexpandable, for
+instance in an \prm {edef}. In addition \LUATEX\ provides a definer:
+
+\starttyping
+ \luadef\MyFunctionA 1
+ \global\luadef\MyFunctionB 2
+\protected\global\luadef\MyFunctionC 3
+\stoptyping
+
+You should really use these commands with care. Some references get stored in
+tokens and assume that the function is available when that token expands. On the
+other hand, as we have tested this functionality in relative complex situations
+normal usage should not give problems.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {luabytecode} and \lpr {luabytecodecall}}]
+
+Analogue to the function callers discussed in the previous section we have byte
+code callers. Again the call variant is unexpandable.
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ lua.bytecode[9998] = function(s)
+ tex.sprint(s*token.scan_int())
+ end
+ lua.bytecode[5555] = function(s)
+ tex.sprint(s*token.scan_dimen())
+ end
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+This works with:
+
+\starttyping
+\luabytecode 9998 5 \luabytecode 5555 5sp
+\luabytecodecall9998 5 \luabytecodecall5555 5sp
+\stoptyping
+
+The variable \type {s} in the code is the number of the byte code register that
+can be used for diagnostic purposes. The advantage of bytecode registers over
+function calls is that they are stored in the format (but without upvalues).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Catcode tables}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Catcodes}]
+
+\topicindex {catcodes}
+
+Catcode tables are a new feature that allows you to switch to a predefined
+catcode regime in a single statement. You can have a practically unlimited number
+of different tables. This subsystem is backward compatible: if you never use the
+following commands, your document will not notice any difference in behaviour
+compared to traditional \TEX. The contents of each catcode table is independent
+from any other catcode table, and its contents is stored and retrieved from the
+format file.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {catcodetable}}]
+
+\startsyntax
+\catcodetable <15-bit number>
+\stopsyntax
+
+The primitive \lpr {catcodetable} switches to a different catcode table. Such a
+table has to be previously created using one of the two primitives below, or it
+has to be zero. Table zero is initialized by \INITEX.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {initcatcodetable}}]
+
+\startsyntax
+\initcatcodetable <15-bit number>
+\stopsyntax
+
+The primitive \lpr {initcatcodetable} creates a new table with catcodes
+identical to those defined by \INITEX. The new catcode table is allocated
+globally: it will not go away after the current group has ended. If the supplied
+number is identical to the currently active table, an error is raised. The
+initial values are:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|c|l|l|]
+\DB catcode \BC character \BC equivalent \BC category \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC \tttf \letterbackslash \NC \NC \type {escape} \NC \NR
+\NC 5 \NC \tttf \letterhat\letterhat M \NC return \NC \type {car_ret} \NC \NR
+\NC 9 \NC \tttf \letterhat\letterhat @ \NC null \NC \type {ignore} \NC \NR
+\NC 10 \NC \tttf <space> \NC space \NC \type {spacer} \NC \NR
+\NC 11 \NC {\tttf a} \endash\ {\tttf z} \NC \NC \type {letter} \NC \NR
+\NC 11 \NC {\tttf A} \endash\ {\tttf Z} \NC \NC \type {letter} \NC \NR
+\NC 12 \NC everything else \NC \NC \type {other} \NC \NR
+\NC 14 \NC \tttf \letterpercent \NC \NC \type {comment} \NC \NR
+\NC 15 \NC \tttf \letterhat\letterhat ? \NC delete \NC \type {invalid_char} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {savecatcodetable}}]
+
+\startsyntax
+\savecatcodetable <15-bit number>
+\stopsyntax
+
+\lpr {savecatcodetable} copies the current set of catcodes to a new table with
+the requested number. The definitions in this new table are all treated as if
+they were made in the outermost level.
+
+The new table is allocated globally: it will not go away after the current group
+has ended. If the supplied number is the currently active table, an error is
+raised.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Suppressing errors}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressfontnotfounderror}}]
+
+\topicindex {errors}
+
+If this integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain about
+font metrics that are not found. Instead it will silently skip the font
+assignment, making the requested csname for the font \prm {ifx} equal to \prm
+{nullfont}, so that it can be tested against that without bothering the user.
+
+\startsyntax
+\suppressfontnotfounderror = 1
+\stopsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppresslongerror}}]
+
+\topicindex {errors}
+
+If this integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain about
+\prm {par} commands encountered in contexts where that is normally prohibited
+(most prominently in the arguments of macros not defined as \prm {long}).
+
+\startsyntax
+\suppresslongerror = 1
+\stopsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressifcsnameerror}}]
+
+\topicindex {errors}
+
+If this integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain about
+non-expandable commands appearing in the middle of a \prm {ifcsname} expansion.
+Instead, it will keep getting expanded tokens from the input until it encounters
+an \prm {endcsname} command. If the input expansion is unbalanced with respect
+to \prm {csname} \ldots \prm {endcsname} pairs, the \LUATEX\ process may hang
+indefinitely.
+
+\startsyntax
+\suppressifcsnameerror = 1
+\stopsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressoutererror}}]
+
+\topicindex {errors}
+
+If this new integer parameter is non|-|zero, then \LUATEX\ will not complain
+about \prm {outer} commands encountered in contexts where that is normally
+prohibited.
+
+\startsyntax
+\suppressoutererror = 1
+\stopsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressmathparerror}}]
+
+\topicindex {errors}
+\topicindex {math}
+
+The following setting will permit \prm {par} tokens in a math formula:
+
+\startsyntax
+\suppressmathparerror = 1
+\stopsyntax
+
+So, the next code is valid then:
+
+\starttyping
+$ x + 1 =
+
+a $
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {suppressprimitiveerror}}]
+
+\topicindex {errors}
+\topicindex {primitives}
+
+When set to a non|-|zero value the following command will not issue an error:
+
+\startsyntax
+\suppressprimitiveerror = 1
+
+\primitive\notaprimitive
+\stopsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Fonts}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Font syntax}]
+
+\topicindex {fonts}
+
+\LUATEX\ will accept a braced argument as a font name:
+
+\starttyping
+\font\myfont = {cmr10}
+\stoptyping
+
+This allows for embedded spaces, without the need for double quotes. Macro
+expansion takes place inside the argument.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {fontid} and \lpr {setfontid}}]
+
+\startsyntax
+\fontid\font
+\stopsyntax
+
+This primitive expands into a number. It is not a register so there is no need to
+prefix with \prm {number} (and using \prm {the} gives an error). The currently
+used font id is \fontid\font. Here are some more:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
+\DB style \BC command \BC font id \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC normal \NC \type {\tf} \NC \bf \fontid\font \NC \NR
+\NC bold \NC \type {\bf} \NC \bf \fontid\font \NC \NR
+\NC italic \NC \type {\it} \NC \it \fontid\font \NC \NR
+\NC bold italic \NC \type {\bi} \NC \bi \fontid\font \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+These numbers depend on the macro package used because each one has its own way
+of dealing with fonts. They can also differ per run, as they can depend on the
+order of loading fonts. For instance, when in \CONTEXT\ virtual math \UNICODE\
+fonts are used, we can easily get over a hundred ids in use. Not all ids have to
+be bound to a real font, after all it's just a number.
+
+The primitive \lpr {setfontid} can be used to enable a font with the given id,
+which of course needs to be a valid one.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {noligs} and \lpr {nokerns}}]
+
+\topicindex {ligatures+suppress}
+\topicindex {kerns+suppress}
+
+These primitives prohibit ligature and kerning insertion at the time when the
+initial node list is built by \LUATEX's main control loop. You can enable these
+primitives when you want to do node list processing of \quote {characters}, where
+\TEX's normal processing would get in the way.
+
+\startsyntax
+\noligs <integer>!crlf
+\nokerns <integer>
+\stopsyntax
+
+These primitives can also be implemented by overloading the ligature building and
+kerning functions, i.e.\ by assigning dummy functions to their associated
+callbacks. Keep in mind that when you define a font (using \LUA) you can also
+omit the kern and ligature tables, which has the same effect as the above.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type{\nospaces}}]
+
+\topicindex {spaces+suppress}
+
+This new primitive can be used to overrule the usual \prm {spaceskip} related
+heuristics when a space character is seen in a text flow. The value~\type{1}
+triggers no injection while \type{2} results in injection of a zero skip. In \in
+{figure} [fig:nospaces] we see the results for four characters separated by a
+space.
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=fig:nospaces,title={The \lpr {nospaces} options.}]
+\startcombination[3*2]
+ {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 10mm\nospaces=0\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {0 / hsize 10mm}}
+ {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 10mm\nospaces=1\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {1 / hsize 10mm}}
+ {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 10mm\nospaces=2\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {2 / hsize 10mm}}
+ {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 1mm\nospaces=0\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {0 / hsize 1mm}}
+ {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 1mm\nospaces=1\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {1 / hsize 1mm}}
+ {\ruledhbox to 5cm{\vtop{\hsize 1mm\nospaces=2\relax x x x x \par}\hss}} {\type {2 / hsize 1mm}}
+\stopcombination
+\stopplacefigure
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Tokens, commands and strings}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {scantextokens}}]
+
+\topicindex {tokens+scanning}
+
+The syntax of \lpr {scantextokens} is identical to \prm {scantokens}. This
+primitive is a slightly adapted version of \ETEX's \prm {scantokens}. The
+differences are:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ The last (and usually only) line does not have a \prm {endlinechar}
+ appended.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \lpr {scantextokens} never raises an EOF error, and it does not execute
+ \prm {everyeof} tokens.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ There are no \quote {\unknown\ while end of file \unknown} error tests
+ executed. This allows the expansion to end on a different grouping level or
+ while a conditional is still incomplete.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {toksapp}, \lpr {tokspre}, \lpr {etoksapp}, \lpr {etokspre},
+\lpr {gtoksapp}, \lpr {gtokspre}, \lpr {xtoksapp}, \lpr {xtokspre}}]
+
+Instead of:
+
+\starttyping
+\toks0\expandafter{\the\toks0 foo}
+\stoptyping
+
+you can use:
+
+\starttyping
+\etoksapp0{foo}
+\stoptyping
+
+The \type {pre} variants prepend instead of append, and the \type {e} variants
+expand the passed general text. The \type {g} and \type {x} variants are global.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\prm {csstring}, \lpr {begincsname} and \lpr {lastnamedcs}}]
+
+These are somewhat special. The \prm {csstring} primitive is like
+\prm {string} but it omits the leading escape character. This can be
+somewhat more efficient than stripping it afterwards.
+
+The \lpr {begincsname} primitive is like \prm {csname} but doesn't create
+a relaxed equivalent when there is no such name. It is equivalent to
+
+\starttyping
+\ifcsname foo\endcsname
+ \csname foo\endcsname
+\fi
+\stoptyping
+
+The advantage is that it saves a lookup (don't expect much speedup) but more
+important is that it avoids using the \prm {if} test. The \lpr {lastnamedcs}
+is one that should be used with care. The above example could be written as:
+
+\starttyping
+\ifcsname foo\endcsname
+ \lastnamedcs
+\fi
+\stoptyping
+
+This is slightly more efficient than constructing the string twice (deep down in
+\LUATEX\ this also involves some \UTF8 juggling), but probably more relevant is
+that it saves a few tokens and can make code a bit more readable.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {clearmarks}}]
+
+\topicindex {marks}
+
+This primitive complements the \ETEX\ mark primitives and clears a mark class
+completely, resetting all three connected mark texts to empty. It is an
+immediate command.
+
+\startsyntax
+\clearmarks <16-bit number>
+\stopsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {alignmark} and \lpr {aligntab}}]
+
+The primitive \lpr {alignmark} duplicates the functionality of \type {#} inside
+alignment preambles, while \lpr {aligntab} duplicates the functionality of \type
+{&}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {letcharcode}}]
+
+This primitive can be used to assign a meaning to an active character, as in:
+
+\starttyping
+\def\foo{bar} \letcharcode123=\foo
+\stoptyping
+
+This can be a bit nicer than using the uppercase tricks (using the property of
+\prm {uppercase} that it treats active characters special).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {glet}}]
+
+This primitive is similar to:
+
+\starttyping
+\protected\def\glet{\global\let}
+\stoptyping
+
+but faster (only measurable with millions of calls) and probably more convenient
+(after all we also have \type {\gdef}).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {expanded}, \lpr {immediateassignment} and \lpr {immediateassigned}}]
+
+\topicindex {expansion}
+
+The \lpr {expanded} primitive takes a token list and expands it content which can
+come in handy: it avoids a tricky mix of \prm {expandafter} and \prm {noexpand}.
+You can compare it with what happens inside the body of an \prm {edef}. But this
+kind of expansion it still doesn't expand some primitive operations.
+
+\startbuffer
+\newcount\NumberOfCalls
+
+\def\TestMe{\advance\NumberOfCalls1 }
+
+\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
+\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
+\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
+
+\meaning\Tested
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+The result is a macro that has the not expanded code in its body:
+
+\getbuffer
+
+Instead we can define \tex {TestMe} in a way that expands the assignment
+immediately. You need of course to be aware of preventing look ahead interference
+by using a space or \tex {relax} (often an expression works better as it doesn't
+leave an \tex {relax}).
+
+\startbuffer
+\def\TestMe{\immediateassignment\advance\NumberOfCalls1 }
+
+\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
+\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
+\edef\Tested{\TestMe foo:\the\NumberOfCalls}
+
+\meaning\Tested
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+This time the counter gets updates and we don't see interference in the
+resulting \tex {Tested} macro:
+
+\getbuffer
+
+Here is a somewhat silly example of expanded comparison:
+
+\startbuffer
+\def\expandeddoifelse#1#2#3#4%
+ {\immediateassignment\edef\tempa{#1}%
+ \immediateassignment\edef\tempb{#2}%
+ \ifx\tempa\tempb
+ \immediateassignment\def\next{#3}%
+ \else
+ \immediateassignment\def\next{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \next}
+
+\edef\Tested
+ {(\expandeddoifelse{abc}{def}{yes}{nop}/%
+ \expandeddoifelse{abc}{abc}{yes}{nop})}
+
+\meaning\Tested
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+It gives:
+
+\getbuffer
+
+A variant is:
+
+\starttyping
+\def\expandeddoifelse#1#2#3#4%
+ {\immediateassigned{
+ \edef\tempa{#1}%
+ \edef\tempb{#2}%
+ }%
+ \ifx\tempa\tempb
+ \immediateassignment\def\next{#3}%
+ \else
+ \immediateassignment\def\next{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \next}
+\stoptyping
+
+The possible error messages are the same as using assignments in preambles of
+alignments and after the \prm {accent} command. The supported assignments are the
+so called prefixed commands (except box assignments).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {ifcondition}}]
+
+\topicindex {conditions}
+
+This is a somewhat special one. When you write macros conditions need to be
+properly balanced in order to let \TEX's fast branch skipping work well. This new
+primitive is basically a no||op flagged as a condition so that the scanner can
+recognize it as an if|-|test. However, when a real test takes place the work is
+done by what follows, in the next example \tex {something}.
+
+\starttyping
+\unexpanded\def\something#1#2%
+ {\edef\tempa{#1}%
+ \edef\tempb{#2}
+ \ifx\tempa\tempb}
+
+\ifcondition\something{a}{b}%
+ \ifcondition\something{a}{a}%
+ true 1
+ \else
+ false 1
+ \fi
+\else
+ \ifcondition\something{a}{a}%
+ true 2
+ \else
+ false 2
+ \fi
+\fi
+\stoptyping
+
+If you are familiar with \METAPOST, this is a bit like \type {vardef} where the macro
+has a return value. Here the return value is a test.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Boxes, rules and leaders}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {outputbox}}]
+
+\topicindex {output}
+
+This integer parameter allows you to alter the number of the box that will be
+used to store the page sent to the output routine. Its default value is 255, and
+the acceptable range is from 0 to 65535.
+
+\startsyntax
+\outputbox = 12345
+\stopsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\prm {vpack}, \prm {hpack} and \prm {tpack}}]
+
+These three primitives are like \prm {vbox}, \prm {hbox} and \prm {vtop}
+but don't apply the related callbacks.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\prm {vsplit}}]
+
+\topicindex {splitting}
+
+The \prm {vsplit} primitive has to be followed by a specification of the required
+height. As alternative for the \type {to} keyword you can use \type {upto} to get
+a split of the given size but result has the natural dimensions then.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Images and reused box objects},reference=sec:imagedandforms]
+
+These two concepts are now core concepts and no longer whatsits. They are in fact
+now implemented as rules with special properties. Normal rules have subtype~0,
+saved boxes have subtype~1 and images have subtype~2. This has the positive side
+effect that whenever we need to take content with dimensions into account, when
+we look at rule nodes, we automatically also deal with these two types.
+
+The syntax of the \type {\save...resource} is the same as in \PDFTEX\ but you
+should consider them to be backend specific. This means that a macro package
+should treat them as such and check for the current output mode if applicable.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB command \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \lpr {saveboxresource} \NC save the box as an object to be included later \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {saveimageresource} \NC save the image as an object to be included later \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {useboxresource} \NC include the saved box object here (by index) \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {useimageresource} \NC include the saved image object here (by index) \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {lastsavedboxresourceindex} \NC the index of the last saved box object \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourceindex} \NC the index of the last saved image object \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourcepages} \NC the number of pages in the last saved image object \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\LUATEX\ accepts optional dimension parameters for \type {\use...resource} in the
+same format as for rules. With images, these dimensions are then used instead of
+the ones given to \lpr {useimageresource} but the original dimensions are not
+overwritten, so that a \lpr {useimageresource} without dimensions still
+provides the image with dimensions defined by \lpr {saveimageresource}. These
+optional parameters are not implemented for \lpr {saveboxresource}.
+
+\starttyping
+\useimageresource width 20mm height 10mm depth 5mm \lastsavedimageresourceindex
+\useboxresource width 20mm height 10mm depth 5mm \lastsavedboxresourceindex
+\stoptyping
+
+The box resources are of course implemented in the backend and therefore we do
+support the \type {attr} and \type {resources} keys that accept a token list. New
+is the \type {type} key. When set to non|-|zero the \type {/Type} entry is
+omitted. A value of 1 or 3 still writes a \type {/BBox}, while 2 or 3 will write
+a \type {/Matrix}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {nohrule} and \lpr {novrule}}]
+
+\topicindex {rules}
+
+Because introducing a new keyword can cause incompatibilities, two new primitives
+were introduced: \lpr {nohrule} and \lpr {novrule}. These can be used to
+reserve space. This is often more efficient than creating an empty box with fake
+dimensions.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {gleaders}}]
+
+\topicindex {leaders}
+
+This type of leaders is anchored to the origin of the box to be shipped out. So
+they are like normal \prm {leaders} in that they align nicely, except that the
+alignment is based on the {\it largest\/} enclosing box instead of the {\it
+smallest\/}. The \type {g} stresses this global nature.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Languages}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {hyphenationmin}}]
+
+\topicindex {languages}
+\topicindex {hyphenation}
+
+This primitive can be used to set the minimal word length, so setting it to a value
+of~$5$ means that only words of 6 characters and more will be hyphenated, of course
+within the constraints of the \prm {lefthyphenmin} and \prm {righthyphenmin}
+values (as stored in the glyph node). This primitive accepts a number and stores
+the value with the language.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\prm {boundary}, \prm {noboundary}, \prm {protrusionboundary} and \prm {wordboundary}}]
+
+The \prm {noboundary} command is used to inject a whatsit node but now injects a normal
+node with type \nod {boundary} and subtype~0. In addition you can say:
+
+\starttyping
+x\boundary 123\relax y
+\stoptyping
+
+This has the same effect but the subtype is now~1 and the value~123 is stored.
+The traditional ligature builder still sees this as a cancel boundary directive
+but at the \LUA\ end you can implement different behaviour. The added benefit of
+passing this value is a side effect of the generalization. The subtypes~2 and~3
+are used to control protrusion and word boundaries in hyphenation and have
+related primitives.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Control and debugging}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Tracing}]
+
+\topicindex {tracing}
+
+If \prm {tracingonline} is larger than~2, the node list display will also print
+the node number of the nodes.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {outputmode}}]
+
+\topicindex {output}
+\topicindex {backend}
+
+The \lpr {outputmode} variable tells \LUATEX\ what it has to produce:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB value \BC output \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {0} \NC \DVI\ code \NC \NR
+\NC \type {1} \NC \PDF\ code \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr {draftmode}}]
+
+The value of the \lpr {draftmode} counter signals the backend if it should output
+less. The \PDF\ backend accepts a value of~1, while the \DVI\ backend ignores the
+value. This is no critical feature so we can remove it in future versions when it
+can make the backend cleaner.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Files}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={File syntax}]
+
+\topicindex {files+names}
+
+\LUATEX\ will accept a braced argument as a file name:
+
+\starttyping
+\input {plain}
+\openin 0 {plain}
+\stoptyping
+
+This allows for embedded spaces, without the need for double quotes. Macro
+expansion takes place inside the argument.
+
+The \lpr {tracingfonts} primitive that has been inherited from \PDFTEX\ has
+been adapted to support variants in reporting the font. The reason for this
+extension is that a csname not always makes sense. The zero case is the default.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB value \BC reported \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{0} \NC \type{\foo xyz} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{1} \NC \type{\foo (bar)} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{2} \NC \type{<bar> xyz} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{3} \NC \type{<bar @ ..pt> xyz} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{4} \NC \type{<id>} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{5} \NC \type{<id: bar>} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{6} \NC \type{<id: bar @ ..pt> xyz} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Writing to file}]
+
+\topicindex {files+writing}
+
+You can now open upto 127 files with \prm {openout}. When no file is open
+writes will go to the console and log. As a consequence a system command is
+no longer possible but one can use \type {os.execute} to do the same.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Math}]
+
+\topicindex {math}
+
+We will cover math extensions in its own chapter because not only the font
+subsystem and spacing model have been enhanced (thereby introducing many new
+primitives) but also because some more control has been added to existing
+functionality. Much of this relates to the different approaches of traditional
+\TEX\ fonts and \OPENTYPE\ math.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-export-titlepage.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-export-titlepage.tex
index db841a7851..4417b52310 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-export-titlepage.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-export-titlepage.tex
@@ -1,31 +1,31 @@
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-export-titlepage
-
-\setupexport
- [cssfile=extra-styles.css]
-
-\settaggedmetadata
- [ title={LuaTeX Reference Manual},
- copyright={LuaTeX Development Team},
- version={\documentvariable{version}},
- status={\documentvariable{status}},
- snapshot={\documentvariable{snapshot}},
- date={\rawdate[weekday,day,month,year]},
- url={www.luatex.org}]
-
-\setupbackgrounds
- [leftpage]
- [setups=pagenumber:left]
-
-\setupbackgrounds
- [rightpage]
- [setups=pagenumber:right]
-
-\startpreamble
- This document is derived from the original manual. When examples are given,
- they assume processing by \LUATEX\ and therefore will not show up as
- intended. The \PDF\ version is the real reference.
-\stoppreamble
-
-\stopcomponent
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-export-titlepage
+
+\setupexport
+ [cssfile=extra-styles.css]
+
+\settaggedmetadata
+ [ title={LuaTeX Reference Manual},
+ copyright={LuaTeX Development Team},
+ version={\documentvariable{version}},
+ status={\documentvariable{status}},
+ snapshot={\documentvariable{snapshot}},
+ date={\rawdate[weekday,day,month,year]},
+ url={www.luatex.org}]
+
+\setupbackgrounds
+ [leftpage]
+ [setups=pagenumber:left]
+
+\setupbackgrounds
+ [rightpage]
+ [setups=pagenumber:right]
+
+\startpreamble
+ This document is derived from the original manual. When examples are given,
+ they assume processing by \LUATEX\ and therefore will not show up as
+ intended. The \PDF\ version is the real reference.
+\stoppreamble
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-firstpage.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-firstpage.tex
index e64cc61528..772fbb3fe2 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-firstpage.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-firstpage.tex
@@ -1,32 +1,32 @@
-\startcomponent luatex-firstpage
-
-\startstandardmakeup
-
- \start
- \raggedleft
- \definedfont[Bold*default at 48pt]
- \setupinterlinespace
- \blue \documentvariable{manual} \endgraf Reference \endgraf Manual \endgraf
- \stop
-
- \vfill
-
- \definedfont[Bold*default at 12pt]
-
- \starttabulate[|l|l|]
- \NC copyright \EQ Lua\TeX\ development team \NC \NR
- \NC more info \EQ www.luatex.org \NC \NR
- \NC version \EQ \currentdate \doifsomething{\documentvariable{snapshot}}{(snapshot \documentvariable{snapshot})} \NC \NR
- \stoptabulate
-
-\stopstandardmakeup
-
-\setupbackgrounds
- [leftpage]
- [setups=pagenumber:left]
-
-\setupbackgrounds
- [rightpage]
- [setups=pagenumber:right]
-
-\stopcomponent
+\startcomponent luatex-firstpage
+
+\startstandardmakeup
+
+ \start
+ \raggedleft
+ \definedfont[Bold*default at 48pt]
+ \setupinterlinespace
+ \blue \documentvariable{manual} \endgraf Reference \endgraf Manual \endgraf
+ \stop
+
+ \vfill
+
+ \definedfont[Bold*default at 12pt]
+
+ \starttabulate[|l|l|]
+ \NC copyright \EQ Lua\TeX\ development team \NC \NR
+ \NC more info \EQ www.luatex.org \NC \NR
+ \NC version \EQ \currentdate \doifsomething{\documentvariable{snapshot}}{(snapshot \documentvariable{snapshot})} \NC \NR
+ \stoptabulate
+
+\stopstandardmakeup
+
+\setupbackgrounds
+ [leftpage]
+ [setups=pagenumber:left]
+
+\setupbackgrounds
+ [rightpage]
+ [setups=pagenumber:right]
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fontloader.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fontloader.tex
index e99ea1d2ff..0a830ed003 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fontloader.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fontloader.tex
@@ -1,1164 +1,1164 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-fontloader
-
-\startchapter[reference=fontloader,title={The fontloader}]
-
-\topicindex {fonts+loading}
-
-The fontloader library is sort of independent of the rest in the sense that it
-can load font into a \LUA\ table that then can be converted into a table suitable
-for \TEX. The library is an adapted subset of \FONTFORGE\ and as such gives a
-similar view on a font (which has advantages when you want to debug). We will not
-discuss \OPENTYPE\ in detail here as the \MICROSOFT\ website offers enough
-information about it. The tables returned by the loader are not that far from the
-standard. We have no plans to extend the loader (it may even become an external
-module at some time).
-
-\startsection[title={Getting quick information on a font}][library=fontloader]
-
-\topicindex {fonts+information}
-
-\libindex{info}
-
-When you want to locate font by name you need some basic information that is
-hidden in the font files. For that reason we provide an efficient helper that
-gets the basic information without loading all of the font. Normally this helper
-is used to create a font (name) database.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> info =
- fontloader.info(<string> filename)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns either \type {nil}, or a \type {table}, or an array of
-small tables (in the case of a \TRUETYPE\ collection). The returned table(s) will
-contain some fairly interesting information items from the font(s) defined by the
-file:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{fontname} \NC string \NC the \POSTSCRIPT\ name of the font\NC \NR
-\NC \type{fullname} \NC string \NC the formal name of the font\NC \NR
-\NC \type{familyname} \NC string \NC the family name this font belongs to\NC \NR
-\NC \type{weight} \NC string \NC a string indicating the color value of the font\NC \NR
-\NC \type{version} \NC string \NC the internal font version\NC \NR
-\NC \type{italicangle} \NC float \NC the slant angle\NC \NR
-\NC \type{units_per_em} \NC number \NC 1000 for \POSTSCRIPT-based fonts, usually 2048 for \TRUETYPE\NC \NR
-\NC \type{pfminfo} \NC table \NC (see \in{section}[fontloaderpfminfotable])\NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Getting information through this function is (sometimes much) more efficient than
-loading the font properly, and is therefore handy when you want to create a
-dictionary of available fonts based on a directory contents.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Loading an \OPENTYPE\ or \TRUETYPE\ file}][library=fontloader]
-
-\topicindex {\OPENTYPE}
-\topicindex {\TRUETYPE}
-
-\libindex{open}
-\libindex{close}
-\libindex{to_table}
-
-If you want to use an \OPENTYPE\ font, you have to get the metric information
-from somewhere. Using the \type {fontloader} library, the simplest way to get
-that information is thus:
-
-\starttyping
-function load_font (filename)
- local metrics = nil
- local font = fontloader.open(filename)
- if font then
- metrics = fontloader.to_table(font)
- fontloader.close(font)
- end
- return metrics
-end
-
-myfont = load_font('/opt/tex/texmf/fonts/data/arial.ttf')
-\stoptyping
-
-The main function call is
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<userdata> f, <table> w = fontloader.open(<string> filename)
-<userdata> f, <table> w = fontloader.open(<string> filename, <string> fontname)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The first return value is a userdata representation of the font. The second
-return value is a table containing any warnings and errors reported by fontloader
-while opening the font. In normal typesetting, you would probably ignore the
-second argument, but it can be useful for debugging purposes.
-
-For \TRUETYPE\ collections (when filename ends in 'ttc') and \DFONT\ collections,
-you have to use a second string argument to specify which font you want from the
-collection. Use the \type {fontname} strings that are returned by \type
-{fontloader.info} for that.
-
-To turn the font into a table, \type {fontloader.to_table} is used on the font
-returned by \type {fontloader.open}.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> f = fontloader.to_table(<userdata> font)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This table cannot be used directly by \LUATEX\ and should be turned into another
-one as described in~\in {chapter} [fonts]. Do not forget to store the \type
-{fontname} value in the \type {psname} field of the metrics table to be returned
-to \LUATEX, otherwise the font inclusion backend will not be able to find the
-correct font in the collection.
-
-See \in {section} [fontloadertables] for details on the userdata object returned
-by \type {fontloader.open} and the layout of the \type {metrics} table returned
-by \type {fontloader.to_table}.
-
-The font file is parsed and partially interpreted by the font loading routines
-from \FONTFORGE. The file format can be \OPENTYPE, \TRUETYPE, \TRUETYPE\
-Collection, \CFF, or \TYPEONE.
-
-There are a few advantages to this approach compared to reading the actual font
-file ourselves:
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- The font is automatically re|-|encoded, so that the \type {metrics} table for
- \TRUETYPE\ and \OPENTYPE\ fonts is using \UNICODE\ for the character indices.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Many features are pre|-|processed into a format that is easier to handle than
- just the bare tables would be.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \POSTSCRIPT|-|based \OPENTYPE\ fonts do not store the character height and
- depth in the font file, so the character boundingbox has to be calculated in
- some way.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-A loaded font is discarded with:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-fontloader.close(<userdata> font)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Applying a \quote{feature file}}][library=fontloader]
-
-\libindex{apply_featurefile}
-
-You can apply a \quote{feature file} to a loaded font:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> errors = fontloader.apply_featurefile(<userdata> font, <string> filename)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-A \quote {feature file} is a textual representation of the features in an
-\OPENTYPE\ font. See
-
-\starttyping
-http://www.adobe.com/devnet/opentype/afdko/topic_feature_file_syntax.html
-\stoptyping
-
-and
-
-\starttyping
-http://fontforge.sourceforge.net/featurefile.html
-\stoptyping
-
-for a more detailed description of feature files.
-
-If the function fails, the return value is a table containing any errors reported
-by fontloader while applying the feature file. On success, \type {nil} is
-returned.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Applying an \quote{\AFM\ file}}][library=fontloader]
-
-\topicindex {\TYPEONE}
-
-\libindex{apply_afmfile}
-
-You can apply an \quote {\AFM\ file} to a loaded font:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> errors = fontloader.apply_afmfile(<userdata> font, <string> filename)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-An \AFM\ file is a textual representation of (some of) the meta information
-in a \TYPEONE\ font. See
-
-\starttyping
-ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/u/ma/hohn/linux/postscript/5004.AFM_Spec.pdf
-\stoptyping
-
-for more information about \AFM\ files.
-
-Note: If you \type {fontloader.open} a \TYPEONE\ file named \type {font.pfb},
-the library will automatically search for and apply \type {font.afm} if it exists
-in the same directory as the file \type {font.pfb}. In that case, there is no
-need for an explicit call to \type {apply_afmfile()}.
-
-If the function fails, the return value is a table containing any errors reported
-by fontloader while applying the AFM file. On success, \type {nil} is returned.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Fontloader font tables},reference=fontloadertables][library=fontloader]
-
-\topicindex {fontloader+tables}
-
-\libindex{fields}
-
-As mentioned earlier, the return value of \type {fontloader.open} is a userdata
-object. One way to have access to the actual metrics is to call \type
-{fontloader.to_table} on this object, returning the table structure that is
-explained in the following sections. In teh following sections we will not
-explain each field in detail. Most fields are self descriptive and for the more
-technical aspects you need to consult the relevant font references.
-
-It turns out that the result from \type {fontloader.to_table} sometimes needs
-very large amounts of memory (depending on the font's complexity and size) so it
-is possible to access the userdata object directly.
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- All top|-|level keys that would be returned by \type {to_table()}
- can also be accessed directly.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The top|-|level key \quote {glyphs} returns a {\it virtual\/} array that
- allows indices from \type {f.glyphmin} to (\type {f.glyphmax}).
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The items in that virtual array (the actual glyphs) are themselves also
- userdata objects, and each has accessors for all of the keys explained in the
- section \quote {Glyph items} below.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The top|-|level key \quote {subfonts} returns an {\it actual} array of userdata
- objects, one for each of the subfonts (or nil, if there are no subfonts).
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-A short example may be helpful. This code generates a printout of all
-the glyph names in the font \type {PunkNova.kern.otf}:
-
-\starttyping
-local f = fontloader.open('PunkNova.kern.otf')
-print (f.fontname)
-local i = 0
-if f.glyphcnt > 0 then
- for i=f.glyphmin,f.glyphmax do
- local g = f.glyphs[i]
- if g then
- print(g.name)
- end
- i = i + 1
- end
-end
-fontloader.close(f)
-\stoptyping
-
-In this case, the \LUATEX\ memory requirement stays below 100MB on the test
-computer, while the internal structure generated by \type {to_table()} needs more
-than 2GB of memory (the font itself is 6.9MB in disk size).
-
-Only the top|-|level font, the subfont table entries, and the glyphs are virtual
-objects, everything else still produces normal \LUA\ values and tables.
-
-If you want to know the valid fields in a font or glyph structure, call the \type
-{fields} function on an object of a particular type (either glyph or font):
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> fields = fontloader.fields(<userdata> font)
-<table> fields = fontloader.fields(<userdata> font_glyph)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-For instance:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-local fields = fontloader.fields(f)
-local fields = fontloader.fields(f.glyphs[0])
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Table types}][library=fontloader]
-
-\startsubsection[title={The main table}]
-
-The top|-|level keys in the returned table are (the explanations in this part of
-the documentation are not yet finished):
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \NC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{table_version} \NC number \NC indicates the metrics version (currently~0.3)\NC \NR
-\NC \type{fontname} \NC string \NC \POSTSCRIPT\ font name\NC \NR
-\NC \type{fullname} \NC string \NC official (human-oriented) font name\NC \NR
-\NC \type{familyname} \NC string \NC family name\NC \NR
-\NC \type{weight} \NC string \NC weight indicator\NC \NR
-\NC \type{copyright} \NC string \NC copyright information\NC \NR
-\NC \type{filename} \NC string \NC the file name\NC \NR
-\NC \type{version} \NC string \NC font version\NC \NR
-\NC \type{italicangle} \NC float \NC slant angle\NC \NR
-\NC \type{units_per_em} \NC number \NC 1000 for \POSTSCRIPT-based fonts, usually 2048 for \TRUETYPE\NC \NR
-\NC \type{ascent} \NC number \NC height of ascender in \type {units_per_em}\NC \NR
-\NC \type{descent} \NC number \NC depth of descender in \type {units_per_em}\NC \NR
-\NC \type{upos} \NC float \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{uwidth} \NC float \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{uniqueid} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{glyphs} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{glyphcnt} \NC number \NC number of included glyphs\NC \NR
-\NC \type{glyphmax} \NC number \NC maximum used index the glyphs array\NC \NR
-\NC \type{glyphmin} \NC number \NC minimum used index the glyphs array\NC \NR
-\NC \type{notdef_loc} \NC number \NC location of the \type {.notdef} glyph
- or \type {-1} when not present \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hasvmetrics} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{onlybitmaps} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{serifcheck} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{isserif} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{issans} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{encodingchanged} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{strokedfont} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{use_typo_metrics} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{weight_width_slope_only} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{head_optimized_for_cleartype} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{uni_interp} \NC enum \NC \nod {unset}, \type {none}, \type {adobe},
- \type {greek}, \type {japanese}, \type {trad_chinese},
- \type {simp_chinese}, \type {korean}, \type {ams}\NC \NR
-\NC \type{origname} \NC string \NC the file name, as supplied by the user\NC \NR
-\NC \type{map} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{private} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{xuid} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pfminfo} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{names} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{cidinfo} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{subfonts} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{commments} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fontlog} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{cvt_names} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{anchor_classes} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ttf_tables} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ttf_tab_saved} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{kerns} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vkerns} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{texdata} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lookups} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{gpos} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{gsub} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mm} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{chosenname} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{macstyle} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fondname} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-%NC \type{design_size} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fontstyle_id} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fontstyle_name} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-%NC \type{design_range_bottom} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-%NC \type{design_range_top} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{strokewidth} \NC float \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mark_classes} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{creationtime} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{modificationtime} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_version} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{math} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{validation_state} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{horiz_base} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vert_base} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{extrema_bound} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{truetype} \NC boolean \NC signals a \TRUETYPE\ font \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {glyphs}}]
-
-The \type {glyphs} is an array containing the per|-|character
-information (quite a few of these are only present if non|-|zero).
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC the glyph name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{unicode} \NC number \NC unicode code point, or -1 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{boundingbox} \NC array \NC array of four numbers, see note below \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC only for horizontal fonts \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vwidth} \NC number \NC only for vertical fonts \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tsidebearing} \NC number \NC only for vertical ttf/otf fonts, and only if non|-|zero \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lsidebearing} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero and not equal to boundingbox[1] \NC \NR
-\NC \type{class} \NC string \NC one of "none", "base", "ligature", "mark", "component"
- (if not present, the glyph class is \quote {automatic}) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{kerns} \NC array \NC only for horizontal fonts, if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vkerns} \NC array \NC only for vertical fonts, if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dependents} \NC array \NC linear array of glyph name strings, only if nonempty\NC \NR
-\NC \type{lookups} \NC table \NC only if nonempty \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ligatures} \NC table \NC only if nonempty \NC \NR
-\NC \type{anchors} \NC table \NC only if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{comment} \NC string \NC only if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tex_height} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tex_depth} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{italic_correction} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{top_accent} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_extended_shape} \NC number \NC only if this character is part of a math extension list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{altuni} \NC table \NC alternate \UNICODE\ items \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vert_variants} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{horiz_variants} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mathkern} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-On \type {boundingbox}: The boundingbox information for \TRUETYPE\ fonts and
-\TRUETYPE-based \OTF\ fonts is read directly from the font file.
-\POSTSCRIPT-based fonts do not have this information, so the boundingbox of
-traditional \POSTSCRIPT\ fonts is generated by interpreting the actual bezier
-curves to find the exact boundingbox. This can be a slow process, so the
-boundingboxes of \POSTSCRIPT-based \OTF\ fonts (and raw \CFF\ fonts) are
-calculated using an approximation of the glyph shape based on the actual glyph
-points only, instead of taking the whole curve into account. This means that
-glyphs that have missing points at extrema will have a too|-|tight boundingbox,
-but the processing is so much faster that in our opinion the tradeoff is worth
-it.
-
-The \type {kerns} and \type {vkerns} are linear arrays of small hashes:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{char} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{off} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lookup} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {lookups} is a hash, based on lookup subtable names, with
-the value of each key inside that a linear array of small hashes:
-
-% TODO: fix this description
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{type} \NC enum \NC \type {position}, \type {pair}, \type
- {substitution}, \type {alternate}, \type
- {multiple}, \type {ligature}, \type
- {lcaret}, \cbk {kerning}, \type {vkerning},
- \type {anchors}, \type {contextpos}, \type
- {contextsub}, \type {chainpos}, \type
- {chainsub}, \type {reversesub}, \type
- {max}, \type {kernback}, \type {vkernback}
- \NC \NR
-\NC \type{specification} \NC table \NC extra data \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-For the first seven values of \type {type}, there can be additional
-sub|-|information, stored in the sub-table \type {specification}:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{position} \NC table \NC a table of the \type {offset_specs} type \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pair} \NC table \NC one string: \type {paired}, and an array of one
- or two \type {offset_specs} tables: \type {offsets} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{substitution} \NC table \NC one string: \type {variant} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{alternate} \NC table \NC one string: \type {components} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{multiple} \NC table \NC one string: \type {components} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ligature} \NC table \NC two strings: \type {components}, \type {char} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lcaret} \NC array \NC linear array of numbers \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Tables for \type {offset_specs} contain up to four number|-|valued fields: \type
-{x} (a horizontal offset), \type {y} (a vertical offset), \type {h} (an advance
-width correction) and \type {v} (an advance height correction).
-
-The \type {ligatures} is a linear array of small hashes:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{lig} \NC table \NC uses the same substructure as a single item in
- the \type {lookups} table explained above \NC \NR
-\NC \type{char} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{components} \NC array \NC linear array of named components \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ccnt} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {anchor} table is indexed by a string signifying the anchor type, which
-is one of:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{mark} \NC table \NC placement mark \NC \NR
-\NC \type{basechar} \NC table \NC mark for attaching combining items to a base char \NC \NR
-\NC \type{baselig} \NC table \NC mark for attaching combining items to a ligature \NC \NR
-\NC \type{basemark} \NC table \NC generic mark for attaching combining items to connect to \NC \NR
-\NC \type{centry} \NC table \NC cursive entry point \NC \NR
-\NC \type{cexit} \NC table \NC cursive exit point \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The content of these is a short array of defined anchors, with the
-entry keys being the anchor names. For all except \type {baselig}, the
-value is a single table with this definition:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{x} \NC number \NC x location \NC \NR
-\NC \type{y} \NC number \NC y location \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ttf_pt_index} \NC number \NC truetype point index, only if given \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-For \type {baselig}, the value is a small array of such anchor sets sets, one for
-each constituent item of the ligature.
-
-For clarification, an anchor table could for example look like this :
-
-\starttyping
-['anchor'] = {
- ['basemark'] = {
- ['Anchor-7'] = { ['x']=170, ['y']=1080 }
- },
- ['mark'] ={
- ['Anchor-1'] = { ['x']=160, ['y']=810 },
- ['Anchor-4'] = { ['x']=160, ['y']=800 }
- },
- ['baselig'] = {
- [1] = { ['Anchor-2'] = { ['x']=160, ['y']=650 } },
- [2] = { ['Anchor-2'] = { ['x']=460, ['y']=640 } }
- }
- }
-\stoptyping
-
-Note: The \type {baselig} table can be sparse!
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {map}}]
-
-The top|-|level map is a list of encoding mappings. Each of those is a table
-itself.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{enccount} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{encmax} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{backmax} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{remap} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{map} \NC array \NC non|-|linear array of mappings\NC \NR
-\NC \type{backmap} \NC array \NC non|-|linear array of backward mappings\NC \NR
-\NC \type{enc} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {remap} table is very small:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{firstenc} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lastenc} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{infont} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {enc} table is a bit more verbose:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{enc_name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{char_cnt} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{char_max} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{unicode} \NC array \NC of \UNICODE\ position numbers\NC \NR
-\NC \type{psnames} \NC array \NC of \POSTSCRIPT\ glyph names\NC \NR
-\NC \type{builtin} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hidden} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{only_1byte} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{has_1byte} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{has_2byte} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_unicodebmp} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_unicodefull} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_custom} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_original} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_compact} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_japanese} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_korean} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_tradchinese} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero [name?]\NC \NR
-\NC \type{is_simplechinese} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
-\NC \type{low_page} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{high_page} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{iconv_name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{iso_2022_escape} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {private}}]
-
-This is the font's private \POSTSCRIPT\ dictionary, if any. Keys and values are
-both strings.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {cidinfo}}]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{registry} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ordering} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{supplement} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{version} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[reference=fontloaderpfminfotable,title={\type {pfminfo}}]
-
-The \type {pfminfo} table contains most of the OS/2 information:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{pfmset} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{winascent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{windescent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hheadascent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hheaddescent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{typoascent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{typodescent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{subsuper_set} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{panose_set} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hheadset} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vheadset} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pfmfamily} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{weight} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{avgwidth} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{firstchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lastchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fstype} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{linegap} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{vlinegap} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hhead_ascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hhead_descent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_typoascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_typodescent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_typolinegap} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_winascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_windescent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_subxsize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_subysize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_subxoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_subyoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_supxsize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_supysize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_supxoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_supyoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_strikeysize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_strikeypos} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_family_class} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_xheight} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_capheight} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_defaultchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_breakchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{os2_vendor} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{codepages} \NC table \NC A two-number array of encoded code pages \NC \NR
-\NC \type{unicoderages} \NC table \NC A four-number array of encoded unicode ranges \NC \NR
-\NC \type{panose} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {panose} subtable has exactly 10 string keys:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{familytype} \NC string \NC Values as in the \OPENTYPE\ font
- specification: \type {Any}, \type {No Fit},
- \type {Text and Display}, \type {Script},
- \type {Decorative}, \type {Pictorial} \NC
- \NR
-\NC \type{serifstyle} \NC string \NC See the \OPENTYPE\ font specification for
- values \NC \NR
-\NC \type{weight} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\NC \type{proportion} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\NC \type{contrast} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\NC \type{strokevariation} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\NC \type{armstyle} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\NC \type{letterform} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\NC \type{midline} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\NC \type{xheight} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[reference=fontloadernamestable,title={\type {names}}]
-
-Each item has two top|-|level keys:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{lang} \NC string \NC language for this entry \NC \NR
-\NC \type{names} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {names} keys are the actual \TRUETYPE\ name strings. The possible keys
-are: \type {copyright}, \type {family}, \type {subfamily}, \type {uniqueid},
-\type {fullname}, \type {version}, \type {postscriptname}, \type {trademark},
-\type {manufacturer}, \type {designer}, \type {descriptor}, \type {venderurl},
-\type {designerurl}, \type {license}, \type {licenseurl}, \type {idontknow},
-\type {preffamilyname}, \type {prefmodifiers}, \type {compatfull}, \type
-{sampletext}, \type {cidfindfontname}, \type {wwsfamily} and \type
-{wwssubfamily}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {anchor_classes}}]
-
-The anchor_classes classes:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC a descriptive id of this anchor class\NC \NR
-\NC \type{lookup} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC one of \nod {mark}, \type {mkmk}, \type {curs}, \type {mklg} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-% type is actually a lookup subtype, not a feature name. Officially, these
-% strings should be gpos_mark2mark etc.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {gpos}}]
-
-The \type {gpos} table has one array entry for each lookup. (The \type {gpos_}
-prefix is somewhat redundant.)
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC one of \type {gpos_single}, \type {gpos_pair},
- \type {gpos_cursive}, \type {gpos_mark2base},\crlf
- \type {gpos_mark2ligature}, \type {gpos_mark2mark}, \type {gpos_context},\crlf \type {gpos_contextchain} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{flags} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{features} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{subtables} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The flags table has a true value for each of the lookup flags that is actually
-set:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{r2l} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ignorebaseglyphs} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ignoreligatures} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ignorecombiningmarks} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mark_class} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The features subtable items of gpos have:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scripts} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The scripts table within features has:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{script} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{langs} \NC array of strings \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The subtables table has:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{suffix} \NC string \NC (only if used)\NC \NR % used by gpos_single to get a default
-\NC \type{anchor_classes} \NC number \NC (only if used)\NC \NR
-\NC \type{vertical_kerning} \NC number \NC (only if used)\NC \NR
-\NC \type{kernclass} \NC table \NC (only if used)\NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The kernclass with subtables table has:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{firsts} \NC array of strings \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{seconds} \NC array of strings \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lookup} \NC string or array \NC associated lookup(s) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{offsets} \NC array of numbers \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note: the kernclass (as far as we can see) always has one entry so it could be one level
-deep instead. Also the seconds start at \type {[2]} which is close to the fontforge
-internals so we keep that too.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {gsub}}]
-
-This has identical layout to the \type {gpos} table, except for the
-type:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC one of \type {gsub_single}, \type {gsub_multiple},
- \type {gsub_alternate}, \type {gsub_ligature},\crlf
- \type {gsub_context}, \type {gsub_contextchain},
- \type {gsub_reversecontextchain} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {ttf_tables} and \type {ttf_tab_saved}}]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{len} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{maxlen} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {mm}}]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{axes} \NC table \NC array of axis names \NC \NR
-\NC \type{instance_count} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{positions} \NC table \NC array of instance positions
- (\#axes * instances )\NC \NR
-\NC \type{defweights} \NC table \NC array of default weights for instances \NC \NR
-\NC \type{cdv} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ndv} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{axismaps} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {axismaps}:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{blends} \NC table \NC an array of blend points \NC \NR
-\NC \type{designs} \NC table \NC an array of design values \NC \NR
-\NC \type{min} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{def} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {mark_classes}}]
-
-The keys in this table are mark class names, and the values are a
-space|-|separated string of glyph names in this class.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {math}}]
-
-The math table has the variables that are also discussed in the chapter aboout
-math: \type {ScriptPercentScaleDown}, \type {ScriptScriptPercentScaleDown}, \type
-{DelimitedSubFormulaMinHeight}, \type {DisplayOperatorMinHeight}, \type
-{MathLeading}, \type {AxisHeight}, \type {AccentBaseHeight}, \type
-{FlattenedAccentBaseHeight}, \type {SubscriptShiftDown}, \type {SubscriptTopMax},
-\type {SubscriptBaselineDropMin}, \type {SuperscriptShiftUp}, \type
-{SuperscriptShiftUpCramped}, \type {SuperscriptBottomMin}, \type
-{SuperscriptBaselineDropMax}, \type {SubSuperscriptGapMin}, \type
-{SuperscriptBottomMaxWithSubscript}, \type {SpaceAfterScript}, \type
-{UpperLimitGapMin}, \type {UpperLimitBaselineRiseMin}, \type {LowerLimitGapMin},
-\type {LowerLimitBaselineDropMin}, \type {StackTopShiftUp}, \type
-{StackTopDisplayStyleShiftUp}, \type {StackBottomShiftDown}, \type
-{StackBottomDisplayStyleShiftDown}, \type {StackGapMin}, \type
-{StackDisplayStyleGapMin}, \type {StretchStackTopShiftUp}, \type
-{StretchStackBottomShiftDown}, \type {StretchStackGapAboveMin}, \type
-{StretchStackGapBelowMin}, \type {FractionNumeratorShiftUp}, \type
-{FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleShiftUp}, \type {FractionDenominatorShiftDown},
-\type {FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleShiftDown}, \type
-{FractionNumeratorGapMin}, \type {FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleGapMin} \type
-{FractionRuleThickness}, \type {FractionDenominatorGapMin}, \type
-{FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleGapMin}, \type {SkewedFractionHorizontalGap},
-\type {SkewedFractionVerticalGap}, \type {OverbarVerticalGap}, \type
-{OverbarRuleThickness}, \type {OverbarExtraAscender}, \type
-{UnderbarVerticalGap}, \type {UnderbarRuleThickness}, \type
-{UnderbarExtraDescender}, \type {RadicalVerticalGap}, \type
-{RadicalDisplayStyleVerticalGap}, \type {RadicalRuleThickness}, \type
-{RadicalExtraAscender}, \type {RadicalKernBeforeDegree}, \type
-{RadicalKernAfterDegree}, \type {RadicalDegreeBottomRaisePercent}, \type
-{MinConnectorOverlap}, \type {FractionDelimiterSize} and \type
-{FractionDelimiterDisplayStyleSize}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {validation_state}}]
-
-This is just a bonus table with keys: \type {bad_ps_fontname}, \type {bad_glyph_table}, \type {bad_cff_table}, \type {bad_metrics_table}, \type {bad_cmap_table}, \type {bad_bitmaps_table}, \type {bad_gx_table}, \type {bad_ot_table}, \type {bad_os2_version} and \type {bad_sfnt_header}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {horiz_base} and \type {vert_base}}]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{tags} \NC table \NC an array of script list tags\NC \NR
-\NC \type{scripts} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {scripts} subtable:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{baseline} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{default_baseline} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lang} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-
-The \type {lang} subtable:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC a script tag \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{descent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{features} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {features} points to an array of tables with the same layout except
-that in those nested tables, the tag represents a language.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {altuni}}]
-
-An array of alternate \UNICODE\ values. Inside that array are hashes with:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{unicode} \NC number \NC this glyph is also used for this unicode \NC \NR
-\NC \type{variant} \NC number \NC the alternative is driven by this unicode selector \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {vert_variants} and \type {horiz_variants}}]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{variants} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{italic_correction} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{parts} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {parts} table is an array of smaller tables:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{component} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{extender} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{start} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{end} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{advance} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {mathkern}}]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{top_right} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{bottom_right} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{top_left} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{bottom_left} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Each of the subtables is an array of small hashes with two keys:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{kern} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {kerns}}]
-
-Substructure is identical to the per|-|glyph subtable.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {vkerns}}]
-
-Substructure is identical to the per|-|glyph subtable.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {texdata}}]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC \nod {unset}, \type {text}, \nod {math}, \type {mathext} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{params} \NC array \NC 22 font numeric parameters \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {lookups}}]
-
-Top|-|level \type {lookups} is quite different from the ones at character level.
-The keys in this hash are strings, the values the actual lookups, represented as
-dictionary tables.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{format} \NC enum \NC one of \type {glyphs}, \type {class}, \type {coverage},
- \type {reversecoverage} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{current_class} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{before_class} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{after_class} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{rules} \NC array \NC an array of rule items\NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Rule items have one common item and one specialized item:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{lookups} \NC array \NC a linear array of lookup names \NC \NR
-\NC \type{glyphs} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {glyphs} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{class} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {class} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{coverage} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {coverage} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{reversecoverage} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {reversecoverage} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-A glyph table is:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{names} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{back} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fore} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-A class table is:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{current} \NC array \NC of numbers \NC \NR
-\NC \type{before} \NC array \NC of numbers \NC \NR
-\NC \type{after} \NC array \NC of numbers \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-for coverage:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{current} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{before} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{after} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-and for reverse coverage:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{current} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{before} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{after} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{replacements} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-fontloader
+
+\startchapter[reference=fontloader,title={The fontloader}]
+
+\topicindex {fonts+loading}
+
+The fontloader library is sort of independent of the rest in the sense that it
+can load font into a \LUA\ table that then can be converted into a table suitable
+for \TEX. The library is an adapted subset of \FONTFORGE\ and as such gives a
+similar view on a font (which has advantages when you want to debug). We will not
+discuss \OPENTYPE\ in detail here as the \MICROSOFT\ website offers enough
+information about it. The tables returned by the loader are not that far from the
+standard. We have no plans to extend the loader (it may even become an external
+module at some time).
+
+\startsection[title={Getting quick information on a font}][library=fontloader]
+
+\topicindex {fonts+information}
+
+\libindex{info}
+
+When you want to locate font by name you need some basic information that is
+hidden in the font files. For that reason we provide an efficient helper that
+gets the basic information without loading all of the font. Normally this helper
+is used to create a font (name) database.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> info =
+ fontloader.info(<string> filename)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns either \type {nil}, or a \type {table}, or an array of
+small tables (in the case of a \TRUETYPE\ collection). The returned table(s) will
+contain some fairly interesting information items from the font(s) defined by the
+file:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{fontname} \NC string \NC the \POSTSCRIPT\ name of the font\NC \NR
+\NC \type{fullname} \NC string \NC the formal name of the font\NC \NR
+\NC \type{familyname} \NC string \NC the family name this font belongs to\NC \NR
+\NC \type{weight} \NC string \NC a string indicating the color value of the font\NC \NR
+\NC \type{version} \NC string \NC the internal font version\NC \NR
+\NC \type{italicangle} \NC float \NC the slant angle\NC \NR
+\NC \type{units_per_em} \NC number \NC 1000 for \POSTSCRIPT-based fonts, usually 2048 for \TRUETYPE\NC \NR
+\NC \type{pfminfo} \NC table \NC (see \in{section}[fontloaderpfminfotable])\NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Getting information through this function is (sometimes much) more efficient than
+loading the font properly, and is therefore handy when you want to create a
+dictionary of available fonts based on a directory contents.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Loading an \OPENTYPE\ or \TRUETYPE\ file}][library=fontloader]
+
+\topicindex {\OPENTYPE}
+\topicindex {\TRUETYPE}
+
+\libindex{open}
+\libindex{close}
+\libindex{to_table}
+
+If you want to use an \OPENTYPE\ font, you have to get the metric information
+from somewhere. Using the \type {fontloader} library, the simplest way to get
+that information is thus:
+
+\starttyping
+function load_font (filename)
+ local metrics = nil
+ local font = fontloader.open(filename)
+ if font then
+ metrics = fontloader.to_table(font)
+ fontloader.close(font)
+ end
+ return metrics
+end
+
+myfont = load_font('/opt/tex/texmf/fonts/data/arial.ttf')
+\stoptyping
+
+The main function call is
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<userdata> f, <table> w = fontloader.open(<string> filename)
+<userdata> f, <table> w = fontloader.open(<string> filename, <string> fontname)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The first return value is a userdata representation of the font. The second
+return value is a table containing any warnings and errors reported by fontloader
+while opening the font. In normal typesetting, you would probably ignore the
+second argument, but it can be useful for debugging purposes.
+
+For \TRUETYPE\ collections (when filename ends in 'ttc') and \DFONT\ collections,
+you have to use a second string argument to specify which font you want from the
+collection. Use the \type {fontname} strings that are returned by \type
+{fontloader.info} for that.
+
+To turn the font into a table, \type {fontloader.to_table} is used on the font
+returned by \type {fontloader.open}.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> f = fontloader.to_table(<userdata> font)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This table cannot be used directly by \LUATEX\ and should be turned into another
+one as described in~\in {chapter} [fonts]. Do not forget to store the \type
+{fontname} value in the \type {psname} field of the metrics table to be returned
+to \LUATEX, otherwise the font inclusion backend will not be able to find the
+correct font in the collection.
+
+See \in {section} [fontloadertables] for details on the userdata object returned
+by \type {fontloader.open} and the layout of the \type {metrics} table returned
+by \type {fontloader.to_table}.
+
+The font file is parsed and partially interpreted by the font loading routines
+from \FONTFORGE. The file format can be \OPENTYPE, \TRUETYPE, \TRUETYPE\
+Collection, \CFF, or \TYPEONE.
+
+There are a few advantages to this approach compared to reading the actual font
+file ourselves:
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ The font is automatically re|-|encoded, so that the \type {metrics} table for
+ \TRUETYPE\ and \OPENTYPE\ fonts is using \UNICODE\ for the character indices.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Many features are pre|-|processed into a format that is easier to handle than
+ just the bare tables would be.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \POSTSCRIPT|-|based \OPENTYPE\ fonts do not store the character height and
+ depth in the font file, so the character boundingbox has to be calculated in
+ some way.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+A loaded font is discarded with:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+fontloader.close(<userdata> font)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Applying a \quote{feature file}}][library=fontloader]
+
+\libindex{apply_featurefile}
+
+You can apply a \quote{feature file} to a loaded font:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> errors = fontloader.apply_featurefile(<userdata> font, <string> filename)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+A \quote {feature file} is a textual representation of the features in an
+\OPENTYPE\ font. See
+
+\starttyping
+http://www.adobe.com/devnet/opentype/afdko/topic_feature_file_syntax.html
+\stoptyping
+
+and
+
+\starttyping
+http://fontforge.sourceforge.net/featurefile.html
+\stoptyping
+
+for a more detailed description of feature files.
+
+If the function fails, the return value is a table containing any errors reported
+by fontloader while applying the feature file. On success, \type {nil} is
+returned.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Applying an \quote{\AFM\ file}}][library=fontloader]
+
+\topicindex {\TYPEONE}
+
+\libindex{apply_afmfile}
+
+You can apply an \quote {\AFM\ file} to a loaded font:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> errors = fontloader.apply_afmfile(<userdata> font, <string> filename)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+An \AFM\ file is a textual representation of (some of) the meta information
+in a \TYPEONE\ font. See
+
+\starttyping
+ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/u/ma/hohn/linux/postscript/5004.AFM_Spec.pdf
+\stoptyping
+
+for more information about \AFM\ files.
+
+Note: If you \type {fontloader.open} a \TYPEONE\ file named \type {font.pfb},
+the library will automatically search for and apply \type {font.afm} if it exists
+in the same directory as the file \type {font.pfb}. In that case, there is no
+need for an explicit call to \type {apply_afmfile()}.
+
+If the function fails, the return value is a table containing any errors reported
+by fontloader while applying the AFM file. On success, \type {nil} is returned.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Fontloader font tables},reference=fontloadertables][library=fontloader]
+
+\topicindex {fontloader+tables}
+
+\libindex{fields}
+
+As mentioned earlier, the return value of \type {fontloader.open} is a userdata
+object. One way to have access to the actual metrics is to call \type
+{fontloader.to_table} on this object, returning the table structure that is
+explained in the following sections. In teh following sections we will not
+explain each field in detail. Most fields are self descriptive and for the more
+technical aspects you need to consult the relevant font references.
+
+It turns out that the result from \type {fontloader.to_table} sometimes needs
+very large amounts of memory (depending on the font's complexity and size) so it
+is possible to access the userdata object directly.
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ All top|-|level keys that would be returned by \type {to_table()}
+ can also be accessed directly.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The top|-|level key \quote {glyphs} returns a {\it virtual\/} array that
+ allows indices from \type {f.glyphmin} to (\type {f.glyphmax}).
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The items in that virtual array (the actual glyphs) are themselves also
+ userdata objects, and each has accessors for all of the keys explained in the
+ section \quote {Glyph items} below.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The top|-|level key \quote {subfonts} returns an {\it actual} array of userdata
+ objects, one for each of the subfonts (or nil, if there are no subfonts).
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+A short example may be helpful. This code generates a printout of all
+the glyph names in the font \type {PunkNova.kern.otf}:
+
+\starttyping
+local f = fontloader.open('PunkNova.kern.otf')
+print (f.fontname)
+local i = 0
+if f.glyphcnt > 0 then
+ for i=f.glyphmin,f.glyphmax do
+ local g = f.glyphs[i]
+ if g then
+ print(g.name)
+ end
+ i = i + 1
+ end
+end
+fontloader.close(f)
+\stoptyping
+
+In this case, the \LUATEX\ memory requirement stays below 100MB on the test
+computer, while the internal structure generated by \type {to_table()} needs more
+than 2GB of memory (the font itself is 6.9MB in disk size).
+
+Only the top|-|level font, the subfont table entries, and the glyphs are virtual
+objects, everything else still produces normal \LUA\ values and tables.
+
+If you want to know the valid fields in a font or glyph structure, call the \type
+{fields} function on an object of a particular type (either glyph or font):
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> fields = fontloader.fields(<userdata> font)
+<table> fields = fontloader.fields(<userdata> font_glyph)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+For instance:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+local fields = fontloader.fields(f)
+local fields = fontloader.fields(f.glyphs[0])
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Table types}][library=fontloader]
+
+\startsubsection[title={The main table}]
+
+The top|-|level keys in the returned table are (the explanations in this part of
+the documentation are not yet finished):
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \NC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{table_version} \NC number \NC indicates the metrics version (currently~0.3)\NC \NR
+\NC \type{fontname} \NC string \NC \POSTSCRIPT\ font name\NC \NR
+\NC \type{fullname} \NC string \NC official (human-oriented) font name\NC \NR
+\NC \type{familyname} \NC string \NC family name\NC \NR
+\NC \type{weight} \NC string \NC weight indicator\NC \NR
+\NC \type{copyright} \NC string \NC copyright information\NC \NR
+\NC \type{filename} \NC string \NC the file name\NC \NR
+\NC \type{version} \NC string \NC font version\NC \NR
+\NC \type{italicangle} \NC float \NC slant angle\NC \NR
+\NC \type{units_per_em} \NC number \NC 1000 for \POSTSCRIPT-based fonts, usually 2048 for \TRUETYPE\NC \NR
+\NC \type{ascent} \NC number \NC height of ascender in \type {units_per_em}\NC \NR
+\NC \type{descent} \NC number \NC depth of descender in \type {units_per_em}\NC \NR
+\NC \type{upos} \NC float \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{uwidth} \NC float \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{uniqueid} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{glyphs} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{glyphcnt} \NC number \NC number of included glyphs\NC \NR
+\NC \type{glyphmax} \NC number \NC maximum used index the glyphs array\NC \NR
+\NC \type{glyphmin} \NC number \NC minimum used index the glyphs array\NC \NR
+\NC \type{notdef_loc} \NC number \NC location of the \type {.notdef} glyph
+ or \type {-1} when not present \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hasvmetrics} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{onlybitmaps} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{serifcheck} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{isserif} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{issans} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{encodingchanged} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{strokedfont} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{use_typo_metrics} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{weight_width_slope_only} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{head_optimized_for_cleartype} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{uni_interp} \NC enum \NC \nod {unset}, \type {none}, \type {adobe},
+ \type {greek}, \type {japanese}, \type {trad_chinese},
+ \type {simp_chinese}, \type {korean}, \type {ams}\NC \NR
+\NC \type{origname} \NC string \NC the file name, as supplied by the user\NC \NR
+\NC \type{map} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{private} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{xuid} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pfminfo} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{names} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{cidinfo} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{subfonts} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{commments} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fontlog} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{cvt_names} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{anchor_classes} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ttf_tables} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ttf_tab_saved} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{kerns} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vkerns} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{texdata} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lookups} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{gpos} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{gsub} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mm} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{chosenname} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{macstyle} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fondname} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+%NC \type{design_size} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fontstyle_id} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fontstyle_name} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+%NC \type{design_range_bottom} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+%NC \type{design_range_top} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{strokewidth} \NC float \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mark_classes} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{creationtime} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{modificationtime} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_version} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{math} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{validation_state} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{horiz_base} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vert_base} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{extrema_bound} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{truetype} \NC boolean \NC signals a \TRUETYPE\ font \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {glyphs}}]
+
+The \type {glyphs} is an array containing the per|-|character
+information (quite a few of these are only present if non|-|zero).
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC the glyph name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{unicode} \NC number \NC unicode code point, or -1 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{boundingbox} \NC array \NC array of four numbers, see note below \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC only for horizontal fonts \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vwidth} \NC number \NC only for vertical fonts \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tsidebearing} \NC number \NC only for vertical ttf/otf fonts, and only if non|-|zero \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lsidebearing} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero and not equal to boundingbox[1] \NC \NR
+\NC \type{class} \NC string \NC one of "none", "base", "ligature", "mark", "component"
+ (if not present, the glyph class is \quote {automatic}) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{kerns} \NC array \NC only for horizontal fonts, if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vkerns} \NC array \NC only for vertical fonts, if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dependents} \NC array \NC linear array of glyph name strings, only if nonempty\NC \NR
+\NC \type{lookups} \NC table \NC only if nonempty \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ligatures} \NC table \NC only if nonempty \NC \NR
+\NC \type{anchors} \NC table \NC only if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{comment} \NC string \NC only if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tex_height} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tex_depth} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{italic_correction} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{top_accent} \NC number \NC only if set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_extended_shape} \NC number \NC only if this character is part of a math extension list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{altuni} \NC table \NC alternate \UNICODE\ items \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vert_variants} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{horiz_variants} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mathkern} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+On \type {boundingbox}: The boundingbox information for \TRUETYPE\ fonts and
+\TRUETYPE-based \OTF\ fonts is read directly from the font file.
+\POSTSCRIPT-based fonts do not have this information, so the boundingbox of
+traditional \POSTSCRIPT\ fonts is generated by interpreting the actual bezier
+curves to find the exact boundingbox. This can be a slow process, so the
+boundingboxes of \POSTSCRIPT-based \OTF\ fonts (and raw \CFF\ fonts) are
+calculated using an approximation of the glyph shape based on the actual glyph
+points only, instead of taking the whole curve into account. This means that
+glyphs that have missing points at extrema will have a too|-|tight boundingbox,
+but the processing is so much faster that in our opinion the tradeoff is worth
+it.
+
+The \type {kerns} and \type {vkerns} are linear arrays of small hashes:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{char} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{off} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lookup} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {lookups} is a hash, based on lookup subtable names, with
+the value of each key inside that a linear array of small hashes:
+
+% TODO: fix this description
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{type} \NC enum \NC \type {position}, \type {pair}, \type
+ {substitution}, \type {alternate}, \type
+ {multiple}, \type {ligature}, \type
+ {lcaret}, \cbk {kerning}, \type {vkerning},
+ \type {anchors}, \type {contextpos}, \type
+ {contextsub}, \type {chainpos}, \type
+ {chainsub}, \type {reversesub}, \type
+ {max}, \type {kernback}, \type {vkernback}
+ \NC \NR
+\NC \type{specification} \NC table \NC extra data \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+For the first seven values of \type {type}, there can be additional
+sub|-|information, stored in the sub-table \type {specification}:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{position} \NC table \NC a table of the \type {offset_specs} type \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pair} \NC table \NC one string: \type {paired}, and an array of one
+ or two \type {offset_specs} tables: \type {offsets} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{substitution} \NC table \NC one string: \type {variant} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{alternate} \NC table \NC one string: \type {components} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{multiple} \NC table \NC one string: \type {components} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ligature} \NC table \NC two strings: \type {components}, \type {char} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lcaret} \NC array \NC linear array of numbers \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Tables for \type {offset_specs} contain up to four number|-|valued fields: \type
+{x} (a horizontal offset), \type {y} (a vertical offset), \type {h} (an advance
+width correction) and \type {v} (an advance height correction).
+
+The \type {ligatures} is a linear array of small hashes:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{lig} \NC table \NC uses the same substructure as a single item in
+ the \type {lookups} table explained above \NC \NR
+\NC \type{char} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{components} \NC array \NC linear array of named components \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ccnt} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {anchor} table is indexed by a string signifying the anchor type, which
+is one of:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{mark} \NC table \NC placement mark \NC \NR
+\NC \type{basechar} \NC table \NC mark for attaching combining items to a base char \NC \NR
+\NC \type{baselig} \NC table \NC mark for attaching combining items to a ligature \NC \NR
+\NC \type{basemark} \NC table \NC generic mark for attaching combining items to connect to \NC \NR
+\NC \type{centry} \NC table \NC cursive entry point \NC \NR
+\NC \type{cexit} \NC table \NC cursive exit point \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The content of these is a short array of defined anchors, with the
+entry keys being the anchor names. For all except \type {baselig}, the
+value is a single table with this definition:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{x} \NC number \NC x location \NC \NR
+\NC \type{y} \NC number \NC y location \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ttf_pt_index} \NC number \NC truetype point index, only if given \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+For \type {baselig}, the value is a small array of such anchor sets sets, one for
+each constituent item of the ligature.
+
+For clarification, an anchor table could for example look like this :
+
+\starttyping
+['anchor'] = {
+ ['basemark'] = {
+ ['Anchor-7'] = { ['x']=170, ['y']=1080 }
+ },
+ ['mark'] ={
+ ['Anchor-1'] = { ['x']=160, ['y']=810 },
+ ['Anchor-4'] = { ['x']=160, ['y']=800 }
+ },
+ ['baselig'] = {
+ [1] = { ['Anchor-2'] = { ['x']=160, ['y']=650 } },
+ [2] = { ['Anchor-2'] = { ['x']=460, ['y']=640 } }
+ }
+ }
+\stoptyping
+
+Note: The \type {baselig} table can be sparse!
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {map}}]
+
+The top|-|level map is a list of encoding mappings. Each of those is a table
+itself.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{enccount} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{encmax} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{backmax} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{remap} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{map} \NC array \NC non|-|linear array of mappings\NC \NR
+\NC \type{backmap} \NC array \NC non|-|linear array of backward mappings\NC \NR
+\NC \type{enc} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {remap} table is very small:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{firstenc} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lastenc} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{infont} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {enc} table is a bit more verbose:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{enc_name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{char_cnt} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{char_max} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{unicode} \NC array \NC of \UNICODE\ position numbers\NC \NR
+\NC \type{psnames} \NC array \NC of \POSTSCRIPT\ glyph names\NC \NR
+\NC \type{builtin} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hidden} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{only_1byte} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{has_1byte} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{has_2byte} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_unicodebmp} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_unicodefull} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_custom} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_original} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_compact} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_japanese} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_korean} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_tradchinese} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero [name?]\NC \NR
+\NC \type{is_simplechinese} \NC number \NC only if non|-|zero\NC \NR
+\NC \type{low_page} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{high_page} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{iconv_name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{iso_2022_escape} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {private}}]
+
+This is the font's private \POSTSCRIPT\ dictionary, if any. Keys and values are
+both strings.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {cidinfo}}]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{registry} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ordering} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{supplement} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{version} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[reference=fontloaderpfminfotable,title={\type {pfminfo}}]
+
+The \type {pfminfo} table contains most of the OS/2 information:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{pfmset} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{winascent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{windescent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hheadascent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hheaddescent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{typoascent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{typodescent_add} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{subsuper_set} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{panose_set} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hheadset} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vheadset} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pfmfamily} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{weight} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{avgwidth} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{firstchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lastchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fstype} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{linegap} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{vlinegap} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hhead_ascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hhead_descent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_typoascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_typodescent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_typolinegap} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_winascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_windescent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_subxsize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_subysize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_subxoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_subyoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_supxsize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_supysize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_supxoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_supyoff} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_strikeysize} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_strikeypos} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_family_class} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_xheight} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_capheight} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_defaultchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_breakchar} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{os2_vendor} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{codepages} \NC table \NC A two-number array of encoded code pages \NC \NR
+\NC \type{unicoderages} \NC table \NC A four-number array of encoded unicode ranges \NC \NR
+\NC \type{panose} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {panose} subtable has exactly 10 string keys:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{familytype} \NC string \NC Values as in the \OPENTYPE\ font
+ specification: \type {Any}, \type {No Fit},
+ \type {Text and Display}, \type {Script},
+ \type {Decorative}, \type {Pictorial} \NC
+ \NR
+\NC \type{serifstyle} \NC string \NC See the \OPENTYPE\ font specification for
+ values \NC \NR
+\NC \type{weight} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\NC \type{proportion} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\NC \type{contrast} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\NC \type{strokevariation} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\NC \type{armstyle} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\NC \type{letterform} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\NC \type{midline} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\NC \type{xheight} \NC string \NC idem \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[reference=fontloadernamestable,title={\type {names}}]
+
+Each item has two top|-|level keys:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{lang} \NC string \NC language for this entry \NC \NR
+\NC \type{names} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {names} keys are the actual \TRUETYPE\ name strings. The possible keys
+are: \type {copyright}, \type {family}, \type {subfamily}, \type {uniqueid},
+\type {fullname}, \type {version}, \type {postscriptname}, \type {trademark},
+\type {manufacturer}, \type {designer}, \type {descriptor}, \type {venderurl},
+\type {designerurl}, \type {license}, \type {licenseurl}, \type {idontknow},
+\type {preffamilyname}, \type {prefmodifiers}, \type {compatfull}, \type
+{sampletext}, \type {cidfindfontname}, \type {wwsfamily} and \type
+{wwssubfamily}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {anchor_classes}}]
+
+The anchor_classes classes:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC a descriptive id of this anchor class\NC \NR
+\NC \type{lookup} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC one of \nod {mark}, \type {mkmk}, \type {curs}, \type {mklg} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+% type is actually a lookup subtype, not a feature name. Officially, these
+% strings should be gpos_mark2mark etc.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {gpos}}]
+
+The \type {gpos} table has one array entry for each lookup. (The \type {gpos_}
+prefix is somewhat redundant.)
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC one of \type {gpos_single}, \type {gpos_pair},
+ \type {gpos_cursive}, \type {gpos_mark2base},\crlf
+ \type {gpos_mark2ligature}, \type {gpos_mark2mark}, \type {gpos_context},\crlf \type {gpos_contextchain} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{flags} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{features} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{subtables} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The flags table has a true value for each of the lookup flags that is actually
+set:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{r2l} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ignorebaseglyphs} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ignoreligatures} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ignorecombiningmarks} \NC boolean \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mark_class} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The features subtable items of gpos have:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scripts} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The scripts table within features has:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{script} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{langs} \NC array of strings \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The subtables table has:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{suffix} \NC string \NC (only if used)\NC \NR % used by gpos_single to get a default
+\NC \type{anchor_classes} \NC number \NC (only if used)\NC \NR
+\NC \type{vertical_kerning} \NC number \NC (only if used)\NC \NR
+\NC \type{kernclass} \NC table \NC (only if used)\NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The kernclass with subtables table has:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{firsts} \NC array of strings \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{seconds} \NC array of strings \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lookup} \NC string or array \NC associated lookup(s) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{offsets} \NC array of numbers \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note: the kernclass (as far as we can see) always has one entry so it could be one level
+deep instead. Also the seconds start at \type {[2]} which is close to the fontforge
+internals so we keep that too.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {gsub}}]
+
+This has identical layout to the \type {gpos} table, except for the
+type:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC one of \type {gsub_single}, \type {gsub_multiple},
+ \type {gsub_alternate}, \type {gsub_ligature},\crlf
+ \type {gsub_context}, \type {gsub_contextchain},
+ \type {gsub_reversecontextchain} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {ttf_tables} and \type {ttf_tab_saved}}]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{len} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{maxlen} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {mm}}]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{axes} \NC table \NC array of axis names \NC \NR
+\NC \type{instance_count} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{positions} \NC table \NC array of instance positions
+ (\#axes * instances )\NC \NR
+\NC \type{defweights} \NC table \NC array of default weights for instances \NC \NR
+\NC \type{cdv} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ndv} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{axismaps} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {axismaps}:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{blends} \NC table \NC an array of blend points \NC \NR
+\NC \type{designs} \NC table \NC an array of design values \NC \NR
+\NC \type{min} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{def} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {mark_classes}}]
+
+The keys in this table are mark class names, and the values are a
+space|-|separated string of glyph names in this class.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {math}}]
+
+The math table has the variables that are also discussed in the chapter aboout
+math: \type {ScriptPercentScaleDown}, \type {ScriptScriptPercentScaleDown}, \type
+{DelimitedSubFormulaMinHeight}, \type {DisplayOperatorMinHeight}, \type
+{MathLeading}, \type {AxisHeight}, \type {AccentBaseHeight}, \type
+{FlattenedAccentBaseHeight}, \type {SubscriptShiftDown}, \type {SubscriptTopMax},
+\type {SubscriptBaselineDropMin}, \type {SuperscriptShiftUp}, \type
+{SuperscriptShiftUpCramped}, \type {SuperscriptBottomMin}, \type
+{SuperscriptBaselineDropMax}, \type {SubSuperscriptGapMin}, \type
+{SuperscriptBottomMaxWithSubscript}, \type {SpaceAfterScript}, \type
+{UpperLimitGapMin}, \type {UpperLimitBaselineRiseMin}, \type {LowerLimitGapMin},
+\type {LowerLimitBaselineDropMin}, \type {StackTopShiftUp}, \type
+{StackTopDisplayStyleShiftUp}, \type {StackBottomShiftDown}, \type
+{StackBottomDisplayStyleShiftDown}, \type {StackGapMin}, \type
+{StackDisplayStyleGapMin}, \type {StretchStackTopShiftUp}, \type
+{StretchStackBottomShiftDown}, \type {StretchStackGapAboveMin}, \type
+{StretchStackGapBelowMin}, \type {FractionNumeratorShiftUp}, \type
+{FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleShiftUp}, \type {FractionDenominatorShiftDown},
+\type {FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleShiftDown}, \type
+{FractionNumeratorGapMin}, \type {FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleGapMin} \type
+{FractionRuleThickness}, \type {FractionDenominatorGapMin}, \type
+{FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleGapMin}, \type {SkewedFractionHorizontalGap},
+\type {SkewedFractionVerticalGap}, \type {OverbarVerticalGap}, \type
+{OverbarRuleThickness}, \type {OverbarExtraAscender}, \type
+{UnderbarVerticalGap}, \type {UnderbarRuleThickness}, \type
+{UnderbarExtraDescender}, \type {RadicalVerticalGap}, \type
+{RadicalDisplayStyleVerticalGap}, \type {RadicalRuleThickness}, \type
+{RadicalExtraAscender}, \type {RadicalKernBeforeDegree}, \type
+{RadicalKernAfterDegree}, \type {RadicalDegreeBottomRaisePercent}, \type
+{MinConnectorOverlap}, \type {FractionDelimiterSize} and \type
+{FractionDelimiterDisplayStyleSize}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {validation_state}}]
+
+This is just a bonus table with keys: \type {bad_ps_fontname}, \type {bad_glyph_table}, \type {bad_cff_table}, \type {bad_metrics_table}, \type {bad_cmap_table}, \type {bad_bitmaps_table}, \type {bad_gx_table}, \type {bad_ot_table}, \type {bad_os2_version} and \type {bad_sfnt_header}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {horiz_base} and \type {vert_base}}]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{tags} \NC table \NC an array of script list tags\NC \NR
+\NC \type{scripts} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {scripts} subtable:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{baseline} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{default_baseline} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lang} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+
+The \type {lang} subtable:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC a script tag \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ascent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{descent} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{features} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {features} points to an array of tables with the same layout except
+that in those nested tables, the tag represents a language.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {altuni}}]
+
+An array of alternate \UNICODE\ values. Inside that array are hashes with:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{unicode} \NC number \NC this glyph is also used for this unicode \NC \NR
+\NC \type{variant} \NC number \NC the alternative is driven by this unicode selector \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {vert_variants} and \type {horiz_variants}}]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{variants} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{italic_correction} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{parts} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {parts} table is an array of smaller tables:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{component} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{extender} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{start} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{end} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{advance} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {mathkern}}]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{top_right} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{bottom_right} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{top_left} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{bottom_left} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Each of the subtables is an array of small hashes with two keys:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{kern} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {kerns}}]
+
+Substructure is identical to the per|-|glyph subtable.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {vkerns}}]
+
+Substructure is identical to the per|-|glyph subtable.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {texdata}}]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC \nod {unset}, \type {text}, \nod {math}, \type {mathext} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{params} \NC array \NC 22 font numeric parameters \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {lookups}}]
+
+Top|-|level \type {lookups} is quite different from the ones at character level.
+The keys in this hash are strings, the values the actual lookups, represented as
+dictionary tables.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{type} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{format} \NC enum \NC one of \type {glyphs}, \type {class}, \type {coverage},
+ \type {reversecoverage} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tag} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{current_class} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{before_class} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{after_class} \NC array \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{rules} \NC array \NC an array of rule items\NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Rule items have one common item and one specialized item:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{lookups} \NC array \NC a linear array of lookup names \NC \NR
+\NC \type{glyphs} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {glyphs} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{class} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {class} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{coverage} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {coverage} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{reversecoverage} \NC array \NC only if the parent's format is \type {reversecoverage} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+A glyph table is:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{names} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{back} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fore} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+A class table is:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{current} \NC array \NC of numbers \NC \NR
+\NC \type{before} \NC array \NC of numbers \NC \NR
+\NC \type{after} \NC array \NC of numbers \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+for coverage:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{current} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{before} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{after} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+and for reverse coverage:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{current} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{before} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{after} \NC array \NC of strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{replacements} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fonts.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fonts.tex
index 0e1cc8cc5a..d49c63afec 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fonts.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-fonts.tex
@@ -1,858 +1,858 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-fonts
-
-\startchapter[reference=fonts,title={Font structure}]
-
-\startsection[title={The font tables}]
-
-\topicindex {fonts}
-\topicindex {fonts+tables}
-
-All \TEX\ fonts are represented to \LUA\ code as tables, and internally as
-\CCODE~structures. All keys in the table below are saved in the internal font
-structure if they are present in the table returned by the \cbk {define_font}
-callback, or if they result from the normal \TFM|/|\VF\ reading routines if there
-is no \cbk {define_font} callback defined.
-
-The column \quote {\VF} means that this key will be created by the \type
-{font.read_vf()} routine, \quote {\TFM} means that the key will be created by the
-\type {font.read_tfm()} routine, and \quote {used} means whether or not the
-\LUATEX\ engine itself will do something with the key. The top|-|level keys in
-the table are as follows:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|c|c|l|pl|]
-\DB key \BC vf \BC tfm \BC used \BC value type \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{name} \NC yes \NC yes \NC yes \NC string \NC metric (file) name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{area} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC string \NC (directory) location, typically empty \NC \NR
-\NC \type{used} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC boolean \NC indicates usage (initial: false) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{characters} \NC yes \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC the defined glyphs of this font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{checksum} \NC yes \NC yes \NC no \NC number \NC default: 0 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{designsize} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC expected size (default: 655360 == 10pt) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{direction} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC default: 0 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{encodingbytes} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC default: depends on \type {format} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{encodingname} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC encoding name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fonts} \NC yes \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC locally used fonts \NC \NR
-\NC \type{psname} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC This is the \POSTSCRIPT\ fontname in the incoming font
- source, and it's used as fontname identifier in the \PDF\
- output. This has to be a valid string, e.g.\ no spaces
- and such, as the backend will not do a cleanup. This gives
- complete control to the loader. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fullname} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC output font name, used as a fallback in the \PDF\ output
- if the \type {psname} is not set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{header} \NC yes \NC no \NC no \NC string \NC header comments, if any \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hyphenchar} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC default: \TEX's \prm {hyphenchar} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{parameters} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC hash \NC default: 7 parameters, all zero \NC \NR
-\NC \type{size} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC the required scaling (by default the same as designsize) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{skewchar} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC default: \TEX's \prm {skewchar} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{type} \NC yes \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC basic type of this font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{format} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC disk format type \NC \NR
-\NC \type{embedding} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC \PDF\ inclusion \NC \NR
-\NC \type{filename} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC the name of the font on disk \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tounicode} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC When this is set to~1 \LUATEX\ assumes per|-|glyph
- tounicode entries are present in the font. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stretch} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {stretch} value from \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{shrink} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {shrink} value from \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{step} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {step} value from \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{expansion_factor} \NC no \NC no \NC no \NC number \NC the actual expansion factor of an expanded font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attributes} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC the \orm {pdffontattr} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{cache} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC This key controls caching of the \LUA\ table on the
- \TEX\ end where \type {yes} means: use a reference to
- the table that is passed to \LUATEX\ (this is the
- default), and \type {no} means: don't store the
- table reference, don't cache any \LUA\ data for this
- font while \type {renew} means: don't store the table
- reference, but save a reference to the table that is
- created at the first access to one of its fields in the
- font. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nomath} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC boolean \NC This key allows a minor speedup for text fonts. If it
- is present and true, then \LUATEX\ will not check the
- character entries for math|-|specific keys. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{oldmath} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC boolean \NC This key flags a font as representing an old school \TEX\
- math font and disables the \OPENTYPE\ code path. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{slant} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC This parameter will tilt the font and
- does the same as \type {SlantFont} in the map file for
- \TYPEONE\ fonts. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{extend} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC This parameter will scale the font horizontally and
- does the same as \type {ExtendFont} in the map file for
- \TYPEONE\ fonts. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{squeeze} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC This parameter will scale the font vertically and has
- no equivalent in the map file. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC The backend will inject \PDF\ operators that set the
- penwidth. The value is (as usual in \TEX) divided by 1000.
- It works with the \type {mode} file. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mode} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC The backend will inject \PDF\ operators that relate to the
- drawing mode with 0~being a fill, 1~being an outline,
- 2~both draw and fill and 3~no painting at all. \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The saved reference in the \type {cache} option is thread|-|local, so be careful
-when you are using coroutines: an error will be thrown if the table has been
-cached in one thread, but you reference it from another thread.
-
-The key \type {name} is always required. The keys \type {stretch}, \type
-{shrink}, \type {step} only have meaning when used together: they can be used to
-replace a post|-|loading \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} command. The \type
-{auto_expand} option is not supported in \LUATEX. In fact, the primitives that
-create expanded or protruding copies are probably only useful when used with
-traditional fonts because all these extra \OPENTYPE\ properties are kept out of
-the picture. The \type {expansion_factor} is value that can be present inside a
-font in \type {font.fonts}. It is the actual expansion factor (a value between
-\type {-shrink} and \type {stretch}, with step \type {step}) of a font that was
-automatically generated by the font expansion algorithm.
-
-Because we store the actual state of expansion with each glyph and don't have
-special font instances, we can change some font related parameters before lines
-are constructed, like:
-
-\starttyping
-font.setexpansion(font.current(),100,100,20)
-\stoptyping
-
-This is mostly meant for experiments (or an optimizing routing written in \LUA)
-so there is no primitive.
-
-The key \type {attributes} can be used to set font attributes in the \PDF\ file.
-The key \type {used} is set by the engine when a font is actively in use, this
-makes sure that the font's definition is written to the output file (\DVI\ or
-\PDF). The \TFM\ reader sets it to false. The \type {direction} is a number
-signalling the \quote {normal} direction for this font. There are sixteen
-possibilities:
-
-\starttabulate[|Tc|c|Tc|c|Tc|c|Tc|c|]
-\DB \# \BC dir \BC \# \BC dir \BC \# \BC dir \BC \# \BC dir \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC LT \NC 4 \NC RT \NC 8 \NC TT \NC 12 \NC BT \NC \NR
-\NC 1 \NC LL \NC 5 \NC RL \NC 9 \NC TL \NC 13 \NC BL \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC LB \NC 6 \NC RB \NC 10 \NC TB \NC 14 \NC BB \NC \NR
-\NC 3 \NC LR \NC 7 \NC RR \NC 11 \NC TR \NC 15 \NC BR \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-These are \OMEGA|-|style direction abbreviations: the first character indicates
-the \quote {first} edge of the character glyphs (the edge that is seen first in
-the writing direction), the second the \quote {top} side. Keep in mind that
-\LUATEX\ has a bit different directional model so these values are not used for
-anything.
-
-The \type {parameters} is a hash with mixed key types. There are seven possible
-string keys, as well as a number of integer indices (these start from 8 up). The
-seven strings are actually used instead of the bottom seven indices, because that
-gives a nicer user interface.
-
-The names and their internal remapping are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|]
-\DB name \BC remapping \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {slant} \NC 1 \NC \NR
-\NC \type {space} \NC 2 \NC \NR
-\NC \type {space_stretch} \NC 3 \NC \NR
-\NC \type {space_shrink} \NC 4 \NC \NR
-\NC \type {x_height} \NC 5 \NC \NR
-\NC \type {quad} \NC 6 \NC \NR
-\NC \type {extra_space} \NC 7 \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The keys \type {type}, \type {format}, \type {embedding}, \type {fullname} and
-\type {filename} are used to embed \OPENTYPE\ fonts in the result \PDF.
-
-The \type {characters} table is a list of character hashes indexed by an integer
-number. The number is the \quote {internal code} \TEX\ knows this character by.
-
-Two very special string indexes can be used also: \type {left_boundary} is a
-virtual character whose ligatures and kerns are used to handle word boundary
-processing. \type {right_boundary} is similar but not actually used for anything
-(yet).
-
-Each character hash itself is a hash. For example, here is the character \quote
-{f} (decimal 102) in the font \type {cmr10 at 10pt}. The numbers that represent
-dimensions are in scaled points.
-
-\starttyping
-[102] = {
- ["width"] = 200250,
- ["height"] = 455111,
- ["depth"] = 0,
- ["italic"] = 50973,
- ["kerns"] = {
- [63] = 50973,
- [93] = 50973,
- [39] = 50973,
- [33] = 50973,
- [41] = 50973
- },
- ["ligatures"] = {
- [102] = { ["char"] = 11, ["type"] = 0 },
- [108] = { ["char"] = 13, ["type"] = 0 },
- [105] = { ["char"] = 12, ["type"] = 0 }
- }
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-The following top|-|level keys can be present inside a character hash:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|c|c|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC vf \BC tfm \BC used \BC type \BC description \NC\NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{width} \NC yes \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's width, in sp (default 0) \NC\NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's height, in sp (default 0) \NC\NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's depth, in sp (default 0) \NC\NR
-\NC \type{italic} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's italic correction, in sp (default zero) \NC\NR
-\NC \type{top_accent} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's top accent alignment place, in sp (default zero) \NC\NR
-\NC \type{bot_accent} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's bottom accent alignment place, in sp (default zero) \NC\NR
-\NC \type{left_protruding} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's \lpr {lpcode} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{right_protruding} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's \lpr {rpcode} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{expansion_factor} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's \lpr {efcode} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{tounicode} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC string \NC character's \UNICODE\ equivalent(s), in \UTF|-|16BE hexadecimal format \NC\NR
-\NC \type{next} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {next larger} character index \NC\NR
-\NC \type{extensible} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC the constituent parts of an extensible recipe \NC\NR
-\NC \type{vert_variants} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC constituent parts of a vertical variant set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{horiz_variants} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC constituent parts of a horizontal variant set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{kerns} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC kerning information \NC\NR
-\NC \type{ligatures} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC ligaturing information \NC\NR
-\NC \type{commands} \NC yes \NC no \NC yes \NC array \NC virtual font commands \NC\NR
-\NC \type{name} \NC no \NC no \NC no \NC string \NC the character (\POSTSCRIPT) name \NC\NR
-\NC \type{index} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the (\OPENTYPE\ or \TRUETYPE) font glyph index \NC\NR
-\NC \type{used} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC boolean \NC typeset already (default: false) \NC\NR
-\NC \type{mathkern} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC math cut-in specifications \NC\NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The values of \type {top_accent}, \type {bot_accent} and \type {mathkern} are
-used only for math accent and superscript placement, see \at {page} [math] in
-this manual for details. The values of \type {left_protruding} and \type
-{right_protruding} are used only when \lpr {protrudechars} is non-zero. Whether
-or not \type {expansion_factor} is used depends on the font's global expansion
-settings, as well as on the value of \lpr {adjustspacing}.
-
-The usage of \type {tounicode} is this: if this font specifies a \type
-{tounicode=1} at the top level, then \LUATEX\ will construct a \type {/ToUnicode}
-entry for the \PDF\ font (or font subset) based on the character|-|level \type
-{tounicode} strings, where they are available. If a character does not have a
-sensible \UNICODE\ equivalent, do not provide a string either (no empty strings).
-
-If the font level \type {tounicode} is not set, then \LUATEX\ will build up \type
-{/ToUnicode} based on the \TEX\ code points you used, and any character-level
-\type {tounicodes} will be ignored. The string format is exactly the format that
-is expected by Adobe \CMAP\ files (\UTF-16BE in hexadecimal encoding), minus the
-enclosing angle brackets. For instance the \type {tounicode} for a \type {fi}
-ligature would be \type {00660069}. When you pass a number the conversion will be
-done for you.
-
-A math character can have a \type {next} field that points to a next larger
-shape. However, the presence of \type {extensible} will overrule \type {next}, if
-that is also present. The \type {extensible} field in turn can be overruled by
-\type {vert_variants}, the \OPENTYPE\ version. The \type {extensible} table is
-very simple:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC description \NC\NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{top} \NC number \NC top character index \NC\NR
-\NC \type{mid} \NC number \NC middle character index \NC\NR
-\NC \type{bot} \NC number \NC bottom character index \NC\NR
-\NC \type{rep} \NC number \NC repeatable character index \NC\NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {horiz_variants} and \type {vert_variants} are arrays of components.
-Each of those components is itself a hash of up to five keys:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{glyph} \NC number \NC The character index. Note that this is an encoding number, not a name. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{extender} \NC number \NC One (1) if this part is repeatable, zero (0) otherwise. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{start} \NC number \NC The maximum overlap at the starting side (in scaled points). \NC \NR
-\NC \type{end} \NC number \NC The maximum overlap at the ending side (in scaled points). \NC \NR
-\NC \type{advance} \NC number \NC The total advance width of this item. It can be zero or missing,
- then the natural size of the glyph for character \type {component}
- is used. \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {kerns} table is a hash indexed by character index (and \quote
-{character index} is defined as either a non|-|negative integer or the string
-value \type {right_boundary}), with the values of the kerning to be applied, in
-scaled points.
-
-The \type {ligatures} table is a hash indexed by character index (and \quote
-{character index} is defined as either a non|-|negative integer or the string
-value \type {right_boundary}), with the values being yet another small hash, with
-two fields:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{type} \NC number \NC the type of this ligature command, default 0 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{char} \NC number \NC the character index of the resultant ligature \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {char} field in a ligature is required. The \type {type} field inside a
-ligature is the numerical or string value of one of the eight possible ligature
-types supported by \TEX. When \TEX\ inserts a new ligature, it puts the new glyph
-in the middle of the left and right glyphs. The original left and right glyphs
-can optionally be retained, and when at least one of them is kept, it is also
-possible to move the new \quote {insertion point} forward one or two places. The
-glyph that ends up to the right of the insertion point will become the next
-\quote {left}.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|l|l|]
-\DB textual (Knuth) \BC number \BC string \BC result \NC\NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{l + r =: n} \NC 0 \NC \type{=:} \NC \type{|n} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{l + r =:| n} \NC 1 \NC \type{=:|} \NC \type{|nr} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{l + r |=: n} \NC 2 \NC \type{|=:} \NC \type{|ln} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{l + r |=:| n} \NC 3 \NC \type{|=:|} \NC \type{|lnr} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{l + r =:|> n} \NC 5 \NC \type{=:|>} \NC \type{n|r} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{l + r |=:> n} \NC 6 \NC \type{|=:>} \NC \type{l|n} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{l + r |=:|> n} \NC 7 \NC \type{|=:|>} \NC \type{l|nr} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{l + r |=:|>> n} \NC 11 \NC \type{|=:|>>} \NC \type{ln|r} \NC\NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The default value is~0, and can be left out. That signifies a \quote {normal}
-ligature where the ligature replaces both original glyphs. In this table the~\type {|}
-indicates the final insertion point.
-
-The \type {commands} array is explained below.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Real fonts}]
-
-\topicindex {fonts+real}
-\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
-
-Whether or not a \TEX\ font is a \quote {real} font that should be written to the
-\PDF\ document is decided by the \type {type} value in the top|-|level font
-structure. If the value is \type {real}, then this is a proper font, and the
-inclusion mechanism will attempt to add the needed font object definitions to the
-\PDF. Values for \type {type} are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC description \NC\NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{real} \NC this is a base font \NC\NR
-\NC \type{virtual} \NC this is a virtual font \NC\NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The actions to be taken depend on a number of different variables:
-
-\startitemize[packed]
-\startitem
- Whether the used font fits in an 8-bit encoding scheme or not. This is true for
- traditional \TEX\ fonts that communicate via \TFM\ files.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The type of the disk font file, for instance a bitmap file or an outline
- \TYPEONE, \TRUETYPE\ or \OPENTYPE\ font.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The level of embedding requested, although in most cases a subset of
- characters is embedded. The times when nothing got embedded are (in our
- opinion at least) basically gone.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-A font that uses anything other than an 8-bit encoding vector has to be written
-to the \PDF\ in a different way. When the font table has \type {encodingbytes}
-set to~2, then it is a wide font, in all other cases it isn't. The value~2 is the
-default for \OPENTYPE\ and \TRUETYPE\ fonts loaded via \LUA. For \TYPEONE\ fonts,
-you have to set \type {encodingbytes} to~2 explicitly. For \PK\ bitmap fonts,
-wide font encoding is not supported at all.
-
-If no special care is needed, \LUATEX\ falls back to the mapfile|-|based solution
-used by \PDFTEX\ and \DVIPS, so that legacy fonts are supported transparently. If
-a \quote {wide} font is used, the new subsystem kicks in, and some extra fields
-have to be present in the font structure. In this case, \LUATEX\ does not use a
-map file at all. These extra fields are: \type {format}, \type {embedding}, \type
-{fullname}, \type {cidinfo} (as explained above), \type {filename}, and the \type
-{index} key in the separate characters.
-
-The \type {format} variable can have the following values. \type {type3} fonts
-are provided for backward compatibility only, and do not support the new wide
-encoding options.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{type1} \NC this is a \POSTSCRIPT\ \TYPEONE\ font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{type3} \NC this is a bitmapped (\PK) font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{truetype} \NC this is a \TRUETYPE\ or \TRUETYPE|-|based \OPENTYPE\ font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{opentype} \NC this is a \POSTSCRIPT|-|based \OPENTYPE\ font \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Valid values for the \type {embedding} variable are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB value \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{no} \NC don't embed the font at all \NC \NR
-\NC \type{subset} \NC include and atttempt to subset the font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{full} \NC include this font in its entirety \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The other fields are used as follows. The \type {fullname} will be the
-\POSTSCRIPT|/|\PDF\ font name. The \type {cidinfo} will be used as the character
-set: the CID \type {/Ordering} and \type {/Registry} keys. The \type {filename}
-points to the actual font file. If you include the full path in the \type
-{filename} or if the file is in the local directory, \LUATEX\ will run a little
-bit more efficient because it will not have to re|-|run the \type {find_*_file}
-callback in that case.
-
-Be careful: when mixing old and new fonts in one document, it is possible to
-create \POSTSCRIPT\ name clashes that can result in printing errors. When this
-happens, you have to change the \type {fullname} of the font to a more unique
-one.
-
-Typeset strings are written out in a wide format using 2~bytes per glyph, using
-the \type {index} key in the character information as value. The overall effect
-is like having an encoding based on numbers instead of traditional (\POSTSCRIPT)
-name|-|based reencoding. One way to get the correct \type {index} numbers for
-\TYPEONE\ fonts is by loading the font via \type {fontloader.open} and use the
-table indices as \type {index} fields.
-
-In order to make sure that cut and paste of the final document works okay you can
-best make sure that there is a \type {tounicode} vector enforced. Not all \PDF\
-viewers handle this right so take \ACROBAT\ as reference.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[reference=virtualfonts,title={Virtual fonts}]
-
-\subsection{The structure}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
-
-You have to take the following steps if you want \LUATEX\ to treat the returned
-table from \cbk {define_font} as a virtual font:
-
-\startitemize[packed]
-\startitem
- Set the top|-|level key \type {type} to \type {virtual}. In most cases it's
- optional because we look at the \type {commands} entry anyway.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Make sure there is at least one valid entry in \type {fonts} (see below),
- although recent versions of \LUATEX\ add a default entry when this table is
- missing.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Add a \type {commands} array to those characters that matter. A virtual
- character can itself point to virtual characters but be careful with nesting
- as you can create loops and overflow the stack (which often indicates an
- error anyway).
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The presence of the toplevel \type {type} key with the specific value \type
-{virtual} will trigger handling of the rest of the special virtual font fields in
-the table, but the mere existence of 'type' is enough to prevent \LUATEX\ from
-looking for a virtual font on its own. This also works \quote {in reverse}: if
-you are absolutely certain that a font is not a virtual font, assigning the value
-\type {real} to \type {type} will inhibit \LUATEX\ from looking for a virtual
-font file, thereby saving you a disk search. This only matters when we load a
-\TFM\ file.
-
-The \type {fonts} is an (indexed) \LUA\ table. The values are one- or two|-|key
-hashes themselves, each entry indicating one of the base fonts in a virtual font.
-In case your font is referring to itself, you can use the \type {font.nextid()}
-function which returns the index of the next to be defined font which is probably
-the currently defined one. So, a table looks like this:
-
-\starttyping
-fonts = {
- { name = "ptmr8a", size = 655360 },
- { name = "psyr", size = 600000 },
- { id = 38 }
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-The first referenced font (at index~1) in this virtual font is \type {ptrmr8a}
-loaded at 10pt, and the second is \type {psyr} loaded at a little over 9pt. The
-third one is a previously defined font that is known to \LUATEX\ as font id~38.
-The array index numbers are used by the character command definitions that are
-part of each character.
-
-The \type {commands} array is a hash where each item is another small array,
-with the first entry representing a command and the extra items being the
-parameters to that command. The allowed commands and their arguments are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|l|p|]
-\DB command \BC arguments \BC type \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{font} \NC 1 \NC number \NC select a new font from the local \type {fonts} table \NC \NR
-\NC \type{char} \NC 1 \NC number \NC typeset this character number from the current font,
- and move right by the character's width \NC \NR
-\NC \type{node} \NC 1 \NC node \NC output this node (list), and move right
- by the width of this list\NC \NR
-\NC \type{slot} \NC 2 \NC 2 numbers \NC a shortcut for the combination of a font and char command\NC \NR
-\NC \type{push} \NC 0 \NC \NC save current position\NC \NR
-\NC \type{nop} \NC 0 \NC \NC do nothing \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pop} \NC 0 \NC \NC pop position \NC \NR
-\NC \type{rule} \NC 2 \NC 2 numbers \NC output a rule $ht*wd$, and move right. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{down} \NC 1 \NC number \NC move down on the page \NC \NR
-\NC \type{right} \NC 1 \NC number \NC move right on the page \NC \NR
-\NC \type{special} \NC 1 \NC string \NC output a \prm {special} command \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf} \NC 2 \NC 2 strings \NC output a \PDF\ literal, the first string is one of \type {origin},
- \type {page}, \type {text}, \type {font}, \type {direct} or \type {raw}; if you
- have one string only \type {origin} is assumed \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lua} \NC 1 \NC string,
- function \NC execute a \LUA\ script when the glyph is embedded; in case of a
- function it gets the font id and character code passed \NC \NR
-\NC \type{image} \NC 1 \NC image \NC output an image (the argument can be either an \type {<image>} variable or an \type {image_spec} table) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{comment} \NC any \NC any \NC the arguments of this command are ignored \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-When a font id is set to~0 then it will be replaced by the currently assigned
-font id. This prevents the need for hackery with future id's. Normally one could
-use \type {font.nextid} but when more complex fonts are built in the meantime
-other instances could have been loaded.
-
-The \type {pdf} option also accepts a \type {mode} keyword in which case the
-third argument sets the mode. That option will change the mode in an efficient
-way (passing an empty string would result in an extra empty lines in the \PDF\
-file. This option only makes sense for virtual fonts. The \type {font} mode only
-makes sense in virtual fonts. Modes are somewhat fuzzy and partially inherited
-from \PDFTEX.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB mode \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {origin} \NC enter page mode and set the position \NC \NR
-\NC \type {page} \NC enter page mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type {text} \NC enter text mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type {font} \NC enter font mode (kind of text mode, only in virtual fonts) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {always} \NC finish the current string and force a transform if needed \NC \NR
-\NC \type {raw} \NC finish the current string \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-You always need to check what \PDF\ code is generated because there can be all
-kind of interferences with optimization in the backend and fonts are complicated
-anyway. Here is a rather elaborate glyph commands example using such keys:
-
-\starttyping
-...
-commands = {
- { "push" }, -- remember where we are
- { "right", 5000 }, -- move right about 0.08pt
- { "font", 3 }, -- select the fonts[3] entry
- { "char", 97 }, -- place character 97 (ASCII 'a')
- -- { "slot", 2, 97 }, -- an alternative for the previous two
- { "pop" }, -- go all the way back
- { "down", -200000 }, -- move upwards by about 3pt
- { "special", "pdf: 1 0 0 rg" } -- switch to red color
- -- { "pdf", "origin", "1 0 0 rg" } -- switch to red color (alternative)
- { "rule", 500000, 20000 } -- draw a bar
- { "special", "pdf: 0 g" } -- back to black
- -- { "pdf", "origin", "0 g" } -- back to black (alternative)
-}
-...
-\stoptyping
-
-The default value for \type {font} is always~1 at the start of the
-\type {commands} array. Therefore, if the virtual font is essentially only a
-re|-|encoding, then you do usually not have created an explicit \quote {font}
-command in the array.
-
-Rules inside of \type {commands} arrays are built up using only two dimensions:
-they do not have depth. For correct vertical placement, an extra \type {down}
-command may be needed.
-
-Regardless of the amount of movement you create within the \type {commands}, the
-output pointer will always move by exactly the width that was given in the \type
-{width} key of the character hash. Any movements that take place inside the \type
-{commands} array are ignored on the upper level.
-
-The special can have a \type {pdf:}, \type {pdf:origin:}, \type {pdf:page:},
-\type {pdf:direct:} or \type {pdf:raw:} prefix. When you have to concatenate
-strings using the \type {pdf} command might be more efficient.
-
-\subsection{Artificial fonts}
-
-Even in a \quote {real} font, there can be virtual characters. When \LUATEX\
-encounters a \type {commands} field inside a character when it becomes time to
-typeset the character, it will interpret the commands, just like for a true
-virtual character. In this case, if you have created no \quote {fonts} array,
-then the default (and only) \quote {base} font is taken to be the current font
-itself. In practice, this means that you can create virtual duplicates of
-existing characters which is useful if you want to create composite characters.
-
-Note: this feature does {\it not\/} work the other way around. There can not be
-\quote {real} characters in a virtual font! You cannot use this technique for
-font re-encoding either; you need a truly virtual font for that (because
-characters that are already present cannot be altered).
-
-\subsection{Example virtual font}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
-
-Finally, here is a plain \TEX\ input file with a virtual font demonstration:
-
-\startbuffer
-\directlua {
- callback.register('define_font',
- function (name,size)
- if name == 'cmr10-red' then
- local f = font.read_tfm('cmr10',size)
- f.name = 'cmr10-red'
- f.type = 'virtual'
- f.fonts = {
- { name = 'cmr10', size = size }
- }
- for i,v in pairs(f.characters) do
- if string.char(i):find('[tacohanshartmut]') then
- v.commands = {
- { "special", "pdf: 1 0 0 rg" },
- { "char", i },
- { "special", "pdf: 0 g" },
- }
- end
- end
- return f
- else
- return font.read_tfm(name,size)
- end
- end
- )
-}
-
-\font\myfont = cmr10-red at 10pt \myfont This is a line of text \par
-\font\myfontx = cmr10 at 10pt \myfontx Here is another line of text \par
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {vf} library}]
-
-The \type {vf} library can be used when \LUA\ code, as defined in the \type
-{commands} of the font, is executed. The functions provided are similar as the
-commands: \type {char}, \type {down}, \type {fontid}, \type {image}, \type
-{node}, \type {nop}, \type {pop}, \type {push}, \type {right}, \nod {rule}, \type
-{special} and \type {pdf}. This library has been present for a while but not been
-advertised and tested much, if only because it's easy to define an invalid font
-(or mess up the \PDF\ stream). Keep in mind that the \LUA\ snippets are executed
-each time when a character is output.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {font} library}]
-
-\topicindex {fonts+library}
-
-The font library provides the interface into the internals of the font system,
-and it also contains helper functions to load traditional \TEX\ font metrics
-formats. Other font loading functionality is provided by the \type {fontloader}
-library that will be discussed in the next section.
-
-\subsection{Loading a \TFM\ file}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+tfm}
-
-The behaviour documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
-there will not be backward|-|incompatible changes any more.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> fnt =
- font.read_tfm(<string> name, <number> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The number is a bit special:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- If it is positive, it specifies an \quote {at size} in scaled points.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- If it is negative, its absolute value represents a \quote {scaled}
- setting relative to the designsize of the font.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-\subsection{Loading a \VF\ file}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+vf}
-
-The behavior documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
-there will not be backward-incompatible changes any more.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> vf_fnt =
- font.read_vf(<string> name, <number> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The meaning of the number \type {s} and the format of the returned table are
-similar to the ones in the \type {read_tfm} function.
-
-\subsection{The fonts array}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
-
-The whole table of \TEX\ fonts is accessible from \LUA\ using a virtual array.
-
-\starttyping
-font.fonts[n] = { ... }
-<table> f = font.fonts[n]
-\stoptyping
-
-Because this is a virtual array, you cannot call \type {pairs} on it, but see
-below for the \type {font.each} iterator.
-
-The two metatable functions implementing the virtual array are:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> f = font.getfont(<number> n)
-font.setfont(<number> n, <table> f)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Note that at the moment, each access to the \type {font.fonts} or call to \type
-{font.getfont} creates a \LUA\ table for the whole font unless you cached it.
-This process can be quite slow.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> p = font.getparameters(<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This one will return a table of the parameters as known to \TEX. These can be
-different from the ones in the cached table.
-
-Also note the following: assignments can only be made to fonts that have already
-been defined in \TEX, but have not been accessed {\it at all\/} since that
-definition. This limits the usability of the write access to \type {font.fonts}
-quite a lot, a less stringent ruleset will likely be implemented later.
-
-\subsection{Checking a font's status}
-
-You can test for the status of a font by calling this function:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean> f =
- font.frozen(<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The return value is one of \type {true} (unassignable), \type {false} (can be
-changed) or \type {nil} (not a valid font at all).
-
-\subsection{Defining a font directly}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+define}
-
-You can define your own font into \type {font.fonts} by calling this function:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- font.define(<table> f)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The return value is the internal id number of the defined font (the index into
-\type {font.fonts}). If the font creation fails, an error is raised. The table is
-a font structure. An alternative call is:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- font.define(<number> n, <table> f)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Where the first argument is a reserved font id (see below).
-
-\subsection{Extending a font}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+extend}
-
-Within reasonable bounds you can extend a font after it has been defined. Because
-some properties are best left unchanged this is limited to adding characters.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-font.addcharacters(<number n>, <table> f)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The table passed can have the fields \type {characters} which is a (sub)table
-like the one used in define, and for virtual fonts a \type {fonts} table can be
-added. The characters defined in the \type {characters} table are added (when not
-yet present) or replace an existing entry. Keep in mind that replacing can have
-side effects because a character already can have been used. Instead of posing
-restrictions we expect the user to be careful. (The \type {setfont} helper is
-a more drastic replacer.)
-
-\subsection{Projected next font id}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+id}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- font.nextid()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This returns the font id number that would be returned by a \type {font.define}
-call if it was executed at this spot in the code flow. This is useful for virtual
-fonts that need to reference themselves. If you pass \type {true} as argument,
-the id gets reserved and you can pass to \type {font.define} as first argument.
-This can be handy when you create complex virtual fonts.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- font.nextid(true)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{Font ids}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+id}
-\topicindex {fonts+current}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- font.id(<string> csname)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This returns the font id associated with \type {csname}, or $-1$ if \type
-{csname} is not defined.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- font.max()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This is the largest used index in \type {font.fonts}.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i = font.current()
-font.current(<number> i)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This gets or sets the currently used font number.
-
-\subsection{Iterating over all fonts}
-
-\topicindex {fonts+iterate}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-for i,v in font.each() do
- ...
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This is an iterator over each of the defined \TEX\ fonts. The first returned
-value is the index in \type {font.fonts}, the second the font itself, as a \LUA\
-table. The indices are listed incrementally, but they do not always form an array
-of consecutive numbers: in some cases there can be holes in the sequence.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-fonts
+
+\startchapter[reference=fonts,title={Font structure}]
+
+\startsection[title={The font tables}]
+
+\topicindex {fonts}
+\topicindex {fonts+tables}
+
+All \TEX\ fonts are represented to \LUA\ code as tables, and internally as
+\CCODE~structures. All keys in the table below are saved in the internal font
+structure if they are present in the table returned by the \cbk {define_font}
+callback, or if they result from the normal \TFM|/|\VF\ reading routines if there
+is no \cbk {define_font} callback defined.
+
+The column \quote {\VF} means that this key will be created by the \type
+{font.read_vf()} routine, \quote {\TFM} means that the key will be created by the
+\type {font.read_tfm()} routine, and \quote {used} means whether or not the
+\LUATEX\ engine itself will do something with the key. The top|-|level keys in
+the table are as follows:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|c|c|l|pl|]
+\DB key \BC vf \BC tfm \BC used \BC value type \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{name} \NC yes \NC yes \NC yes \NC string \NC metric (file) name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{area} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC string \NC (directory) location, typically empty \NC \NR
+\NC \type{used} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC boolean \NC indicates usage (initial: false) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{characters} \NC yes \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC the defined glyphs of this font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{checksum} \NC yes \NC yes \NC no \NC number \NC default: 0 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{designsize} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC expected size (default: 655360 == 10pt) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{direction} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC default: 0 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{encodingbytes} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC default: depends on \type {format} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{encodingname} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC encoding name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fonts} \NC yes \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC locally used fonts \NC \NR
+\NC \type{psname} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC This is the \POSTSCRIPT\ fontname in the incoming font
+ source, and it's used as fontname identifier in the \PDF\
+ output. This has to be a valid string, e.g.\ no spaces
+ and such, as the backend will not do a cleanup. This gives
+ complete control to the loader. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fullname} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC output font name, used as a fallback in the \PDF\ output
+ if the \type {psname} is not set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{header} \NC yes \NC no \NC no \NC string \NC header comments, if any \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hyphenchar} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC default: \TEX's \prm {hyphenchar} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{parameters} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC hash \NC default: 7 parameters, all zero \NC \NR
+\NC \type{size} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC the required scaling (by default the same as designsize) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{skewchar} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC default: \TEX's \prm {skewchar} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{type} \NC yes \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC basic type of this font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{format} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC disk format type \NC \NR
+\NC \type{embedding} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC \PDF\ inclusion \NC \NR
+\NC \type{filename} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC the name of the font on disk \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tounicode} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC When this is set to~1 \LUATEX\ assumes per|-|glyph
+ tounicode entries are present in the font. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stretch} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {stretch} value from \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{shrink} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {shrink} value from \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{step} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {step} value from \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{expansion_factor} \NC no \NC no \NC no \NC number \NC the actual expansion factor of an expanded font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attributes} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC the \orm {pdffontattr} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{cache} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC string \NC This key controls caching of the \LUA\ table on the
+ \TEX\ end where \type {yes} means: use a reference to
+ the table that is passed to \LUATEX\ (this is the
+ default), and \type {no} means: don't store the
+ table reference, don't cache any \LUA\ data for this
+ font while \type {renew} means: don't store the table
+ reference, but save a reference to the table that is
+ created at the first access to one of its fields in the
+ font. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nomath} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC boolean \NC This key allows a minor speedup for text fonts. If it
+ is present and true, then \LUATEX\ will not check the
+ character entries for math|-|specific keys. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{oldmath} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC boolean \NC This key flags a font as representing an old school \TEX\
+ math font and disables the \OPENTYPE\ code path. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{slant} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC This parameter will tilt the font and
+ does the same as \type {SlantFont} in the map file for
+ \TYPEONE\ fonts. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{extend} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC This parameter will scale the font horizontally and
+ does the same as \type {ExtendFont} in the map file for
+ \TYPEONE\ fonts. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{squeeze} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC This parameter will scale the font vertically and has
+ no equivalent in the map file. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC The backend will inject \PDF\ operators that set the
+ penwidth. The value is (as usual in \TEX) divided by 1000.
+ It works with the \type {mode} file. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mode} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC The backend will inject \PDF\ operators that relate to the
+ drawing mode with 0~being a fill, 1~being an outline,
+ 2~both draw and fill and 3~no painting at all. \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The saved reference in the \type {cache} option is thread|-|local, so be careful
+when you are using coroutines: an error will be thrown if the table has been
+cached in one thread, but you reference it from another thread.
+
+The key \type {name} is always required. The keys \type {stretch}, \type
+{shrink}, \type {step} only have meaning when used together: they can be used to
+replace a post|-|loading \lpr {expandglyphsinfont} command. The \type
+{auto_expand} option is not supported in \LUATEX. In fact, the primitives that
+create expanded or protruding copies are probably only useful when used with
+traditional fonts because all these extra \OPENTYPE\ properties are kept out of
+the picture. The \type {expansion_factor} is value that can be present inside a
+font in \type {font.fonts}. It is the actual expansion factor (a value between
+\type {-shrink} and \type {stretch}, with step \type {step}) of a font that was
+automatically generated by the font expansion algorithm.
+
+Because we store the actual state of expansion with each glyph and don't have
+special font instances, we can change some font related parameters before lines
+are constructed, like:
+
+\starttyping
+font.setexpansion(font.current(),100,100,20)
+\stoptyping
+
+This is mostly meant for experiments (or an optimizing routing written in \LUA)
+so there is no primitive.
+
+The key \type {attributes} can be used to set font attributes in the \PDF\ file.
+The key \type {used} is set by the engine when a font is actively in use, this
+makes sure that the font's definition is written to the output file (\DVI\ or
+\PDF). The \TFM\ reader sets it to false. The \type {direction} is a number
+signalling the \quote {normal} direction for this font. There are sixteen
+possibilities:
+
+\starttabulate[|Tc|c|Tc|c|Tc|c|Tc|c|]
+\DB \# \BC dir \BC \# \BC dir \BC \# \BC dir \BC \# \BC dir \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC LT \NC 4 \NC RT \NC 8 \NC TT \NC 12 \NC BT \NC \NR
+\NC 1 \NC LL \NC 5 \NC RL \NC 9 \NC TL \NC 13 \NC BL \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC LB \NC 6 \NC RB \NC 10 \NC TB \NC 14 \NC BB \NC \NR
+\NC 3 \NC LR \NC 7 \NC RR \NC 11 \NC TR \NC 15 \NC BR \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+These are \OMEGA|-|style direction abbreviations: the first character indicates
+the \quote {first} edge of the character glyphs (the edge that is seen first in
+the writing direction), the second the \quote {top} side. Keep in mind that
+\LUATEX\ has a bit different directional model so these values are not used for
+anything.
+
+The \type {parameters} is a hash with mixed key types. There are seven possible
+string keys, as well as a number of integer indices (these start from 8 up). The
+seven strings are actually used instead of the bottom seven indices, because that
+gives a nicer user interface.
+
+The names and their internal remapping are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|]
+\DB name \BC remapping \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {slant} \NC 1 \NC \NR
+\NC \type {space} \NC 2 \NC \NR
+\NC \type {space_stretch} \NC 3 \NC \NR
+\NC \type {space_shrink} \NC 4 \NC \NR
+\NC \type {x_height} \NC 5 \NC \NR
+\NC \type {quad} \NC 6 \NC \NR
+\NC \type {extra_space} \NC 7 \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The keys \type {type}, \type {format}, \type {embedding}, \type {fullname} and
+\type {filename} are used to embed \OPENTYPE\ fonts in the result \PDF.
+
+The \type {characters} table is a list of character hashes indexed by an integer
+number. The number is the \quote {internal code} \TEX\ knows this character by.
+
+Two very special string indexes can be used also: \type {left_boundary} is a
+virtual character whose ligatures and kerns are used to handle word boundary
+processing. \type {right_boundary} is similar but not actually used for anything
+(yet).
+
+Each character hash itself is a hash. For example, here is the character \quote
+{f} (decimal 102) in the font \type {cmr10 at 10pt}. The numbers that represent
+dimensions are in scaled points.
+
+\starttyping
+[102] = {
+ ["width"] = 200250,
+ ["height"] = 455111,
+ ["depth"] = 0,
+ ["italic"] = 50973,
+ ["kerns"] = {
+ [63] = 50973,
+ [93] = 50973,
+ [39] = 50973,
+ [33] = 50973,
+ [41] = 50973
+ },
+ ["ligatures"] = {
+ [102] = { ["char"] = 11, ["type"] = 0 },
+ [108] = { ["char"] = 13, ["type"] = 0 },
+ [105] = { ["char"] = 12, ["type"] = 0 }
+ }
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+The following top|-|level keys can be present inside a character hash:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|c|c|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC vf \BC tfm \BC used \BC type \BC description \NC\NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{width} \NC yes \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's width, in sp (default 0) \NC\NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's height, in sp (default 0) \NC\NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's depth, in sp (default 0) \NC\NR
+\NC \type{italic} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC character's italic correction, in sp (default zero) \NC\NR
+\NC \type{top_accent} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's top accent alignment place, in sp (default zero) \NC\NR
+\NC \type{bot_accent} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's bottom accent alignment place, in sp (default zero) \NC\NR
+\NC \type{left_protruding} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's \lpr {lpcode} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{right_protruding} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's \lpr {rpcode} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{expansion_factor} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC number \NC character's \lpr {efcode} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{tounicode} \NC no \NC no \NC maybe \NC string \NC character's \UNICODE\ equivalent(s), in \UTF|-|16BE hexadecimal format \NC\NR
+\NC \type{next} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC number \NC the \quote {next larger} character index \NC\NR
+\NC \type{extensible} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC the constituent parts of an extensible recipe \NC\NR
+\NC \type{vert_variants} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC constituent parts of a vertical variant set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{horiz_variants} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC constituent parts of a horizontal variant set \NC \NR
+\NC \type{kerns} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC kerning information \NC\NR
+\NC \type{ligatures} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC table \NC ligaturing information \NC\NR
+\NC \type{commands} \NC yes \NC no \NC yes \NC array \NC virtual font commands \NC\NR
+\NC \type{name} \NC no \NC no \NC no \NC string \NC the character (\POSTSCRIPT) name \NC\NR
+\NC \type{index} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC number \NC the (\OPENTYPE\ or \TRUETYPE) font glyph index \NC\NR
+\NC \type{used} \NC no \NC yes \NC yes \NC boolean \NC typeset already (default: false) \NC\NR
+\NC \type{mathkern} \NC no \NC no \NC yes \NC table \NC math cut-in specifications \NC\NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The values of \type {top_accent}, \type {bot_accent} and \type {mathkern} are
+used only for math accent and superscript placement, see \at {page} [math] in
+this manual for details. The values of \type {left_protruding} and \type
+{right_protruding} are used only when \lpr {protrudechars} is non-zero. Whether
+or not \type {expansion_factor} is used depends on the font's global expansion
+settings, as well as on the value of \lpr {adjustspacing}.
+
+The usage of \type {tounicode} is this: if this font specifies a \type
+{tounicode=1} at the top level, then \LUATEX\ will construct a \type {/ToUnicode}
+entry for the \PDF\ font (or font subset) based on the character|-|level \type
+{tounicode} strings, where they are available. If a character does not have a
+sensible \UNICODE\ equivalent, do not provide a string either (no empty strings).
+
+If the font level \type {tounicode} is not set, then \LUATEX\ will build up \type
+{/ToUnicode} based on the \TEX\ code points you used, and any character-level
+\type {tounicodes} will be ignored. The string format is exactly the format that
+is expected by Adobe \CMAP\ files (\UTF-16BE in hexadecimal encoding), minus the
+enclosing angle brackets. For instance the \type {tounicode} for a \type {fi}
+ligature would be \type {00660069}. When you pass a number the conversion will be
+done for you.
+
+A math character can have a \type {next} field that points to a next larger
+shape. However, the presence of \type {extensible} will overrule \type {next}, if
+that is also present. The \type {extensible} field in turn can be overruled by
+\type {vert_variants}, the \OPENTYPE\ version. The \type {extensible} table is
+very simple:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC description \NC\NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{top} \NC number \NC top character index \NC\NR
+\NC \type{mid} \NC number \NC middle character index \NC\NR
+\NC \type{bot} \NC number \NC bottom character index \NC\NR
+\NC \type{rep} \NC number \NC repeatable character index \NC\NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {horiz_variants} and \type {vert_variants} are arrays of components.
+Each of those components is itself a hash of up to five keys:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{glyph} \NC number \NC The character index. Note that this is an encoding number, not a name. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{extender} \NC number \NC One (1) if this part is repeatable, zero (0) otherwise. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{start} \NC number \NC The maximum overlap at the starting side (in scaled points). \NC \NR
+\NC \type{end} \NC number \NC The maximum overlap at the ending side (in scaled points). \NC \NR
+\NC \type{advance} \NC number \NC The total advance width of this item. It can be zero or missing,
+ then the natural size of the glyph for character \type {component}
+ is used. \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {kerns} table is a hash indexed by character index (and \quote
+{character index} is defined as either a non|-|negative integer or the string
+value \type {right_boundary}), with the values of the kerning to be applied, in
+scaled points.
+
+The \type {ligatures} table is a hash indexed by character index (and \quote
+{character index} is defined as either a non|-|negative integer or the string
+value \type {right_boundary}), with the values being yet another small hash, with
+two fields:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{type} \NC number \NC the type of this ligature command, default 0 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{char} \NC number \NC the character index of the resultant ligature \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {char} field in a ligature is required. The \type {type} field inside a
+ligature is the numerical or string value of one of the eight possible ligature
+types supported by \TEX. When \TEX\ inserts a new ligature, it puts the new glyph
+in the middle of the left and right glyphs. The original left and right glyphs
+can optionally be retained, and when at least one of them is kept, it is also
+possible to move the new \quote {insertion point} forward one or two places. The
+glyph that ends up to the right of the insertion point will become the next
+\quote {left}.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|l|l|]
+\DB textual (Knuth) \BC number \BC string \BC result \NC\NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{l + r =: n} \NC 0 \NC \type{=:} \NC \type{|n} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{l + r =:| n} \NC 1 \NC \type{=:|} \NC \type{|nr} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{l + r |=: n} \NC 2 \NC \type{|=:} \NC \type{|ln} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{l + r |=:| n} \NC 3 \NC \type{|=:|} \NC \type{|lnr} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{l + r =:|> n} \NC 5 \NC \type{=:|>} \NC \type{n|r} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{l + r |=:> n} \NC 6 \NC \type{|=:>} \NC \type{l|n} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{l + r |=:|> n} \NC 7 \NC \type{|=:|>} \NC \type{l|nr} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{l + r |=:|>> n} \NC 11 \NC \type{|=:|>>} \NC \type{ln|r} \NC\NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The default value is~0, and can be left out. That signifies a \quote {normal}
+ligature where the ligature replaces both original glyphs. In this table the~\type {|}
+indicates the final insertion point.
+
+The \type {commands} array is explained below.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Real fonts}]
+
+\topicindex {fonts+real}
+\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
+
+Whether or not a \TEX\ font is a \quote {real} font that should be written to the
+\PDF\ document is decided by the \type {type} value in the top|-|level font
+structure. If the value is \type {real}, then this is a proper font, and the
+inclusion mechanism will attempt to add the needed font object definitions to the
+\PDF. Values for \type {type} are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC description \NC\NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{real} \NC this is a base font \NC\NR
+\NC \type{virtual} \NC this is a virtual font \NC\NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The actions to be taken depend on a number of different variables:
+
+\startitemize[packed]
+\startitem
+ Whether the used font fits in an 8-bit encoding scheme or not. This is true for
+ traditional \TEX\ fonts that communicate via \TFM\ files.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The type of the disk font file, for instance a bitmap file or an outline
+ \TYPEONE, \TRUETYPE\ or \OPENTYPE\ font.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The level of embedding requested, although in most cases a subset of
+ characters is embedded. The times when nothing got embedded are (in our
+ opinion at least) basically gone.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+A font that uses anything other than an 8-bit encoding vector has to be written
+to the \PDF\ in a different way. When the font table has \type {encodingbytes}
+set to~2, then it is a wide font, in all other cases it isn't. The value~2 is the
+default for \OPENTYPE\ and \TRUETYPE\ fonts loaded via \LUA. For \TYPEONE\ fonts,
+you have to set \type {encodingbytes} to~2 explicitly. For \PK\ bitmap fonts,
+wide font encoding is not supported at all.
+
+If no special care is needed, \LUATEX\ falls back to the mapfile|-|based solution
+used by \PDFTEX\ and \DVIPS, so that legacy fonts are supported transparently. If
+a \quote {wide} font is used, the new subsystem kicks in, and some extra fields
+have to be present in the font structure. In this case, \LUATEX\ does not use a
+map file at all. These extra fields are: \type {format}, \type {embedding}, \type
+{fullname}, \type {cidinfo} (as explained above), \type {filename}, and the \type
+{index} key in the separate characters.
+
+The \type {format} variable can have the following values. \type {type3} fonts
+are provided for backward compatibility only, and do not support the new wide
+encoding options.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{type1} \NC this is a \POSTSCRIPT\ \TYPEONE\ font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{type3} \NC this is a bitmapped (\PK) font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{truetype} \NC this is a \TRUETYPE\ or \TRUETYPE|-|based \OPENTYPE\ font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{opentype} \NC this is a \POSTSCRIPT|-|based \OPENTYPE\ font \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Valid values for the \type {embedding} variable are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB value \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{no} \NC don't embed the font at all \NC \NR
+\NC \type{subset} \NC include and atttempt to subset the font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{full} \NC include this font in its entirety \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The other fields are used as follows. The \type {fullname} will be the
+\POSTSCRIPT|/|\PDF\ font name. The \type {cidinfo} will be used as the character
+set: the CID \type {/Ordering} and \type {/Registry} keys. The \type {filename}
+points to the actual font file. If you include the full path in the \type
+{filename} or if the file is in the local directory, \LUATEX\ will run a little
+bit more efficient because it will not have to re|-|run the \type {find_*_file}
+callback in that case.
+
+Be careful: when mixing old and new fonts in one document, it is possible to
+create \POSTSCRIPT\ name clashes that can result in printing errors. When this
+happens, you have to change the \type {fullname} of the font to a more unique
+one.
+
+Typeset strings are written out in a wide format using 2~bytes per glyph, using
+the \type {index} key in the character information as value. The overall effect
+is like having an encoding based on numbers instead of traditional (\POSTSCRIPT)
+name|-|based reencoding. One way to get the correct \type {index} numbers for
+\TYPEONE\ fonts is by loading the font via \type {fontloader.open} and use the
+table indices as \type {index} fields.
+
+In order to make sure that cut and paste of the final document works okay you can
+best make sure that there is a \type {tounicode} vector enforced. Not all \PDF\
+viewers handle this right so take \ACROBAT\ as reference.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[reference=virtualfonts,title={Virtual fonts}]
+
+\subsection{The structure}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
+
+You have to take the following steps if you want \LUATEX\ to treat the returned
+table from \cbk {define_font} as a virtual font:
+
+\startitemize[packed]
+\startitem
+ Set the top|-|level key \type {type} to \type {virtual}. In most cases it's
+ optional because we look at the \type {commands} entry anyway.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Make sure there is at least one valid entry in \type {fonts} (see below),
+ although recent versions of \LUATEX\ add a default entry when this table is
+ missing.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Add a \type {commands} array to those characters that matter. A virtual
+ character can itself point to virtual characters but be careful with nesting
+ as you can create loops and overflow the stack (which often indicates an
+ error anyway).
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The presence of the toplevel \type {type} key with the specific value \type
+{virtual} will trigger handling of the rest of the special virtual font fields in
+the table, but the mere existence of 'type' is enough to prevent \LUATEX\ from
+looking for a virtual font on its own. This also works \quote {in reverse}: if
+you are absolutely certain that a font is not a virtual font, assigning the value
+\type {real} to \type {type} will inhibit \LUATEX\ from looking for a virtual
+font file, thereby saving you a disk search. This only matters when we load a
+\TFM\ file.
+
+The \type {fonts} is an (indexed) \LUA\ table. The values are one- or two|-|key
+hashes themselves, each entry indicating one of the base fonts in a virtual font.
+In case your font is referring to itself, you can use the \type {font.nextid()}
+function which returns the index of the next to be defined font which is probably
+the currently defined one. So, a table looks like this:
+
+\starttyping
+fonts = {
+ { name = "ptmr8a", size = 655360 },
+ { name = "psyr", size = 600000 },
+ { id = 38 }
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+The first referenced font (at index~1) in this virtual font is \type {ptrmr8a}
+loaded at 10pt, and the second is \type {psyr} loaded at a little over 9pt. The
+third one is a previously defined font that is known to \LUATEX\ as font id~38.
+The array index numbers are used by the character command definitions that are
+part of each character.
+
+The \type {commands} array is a hash where each item is another small array,
+with the first entry representing a command and the extra items being the
+parameters to that command. The allowed commands and their arguments are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|l|p|]
+\DB command \BC arguments \BC type \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{font} \NC 1 \NC number \NC select a new font from the local \type {fonts} table \NC \NR
+\NC \type{char} \NC 1 \NC number \NC typeset this character number from the current font,
+ and move right by the character's width \NC \NR
+\NC \type{node} \NC 1 \NC node \NC output this node (list), and move right
+ by the width of this list\NC \NR
+\NC \type{slot} \NC 2 \NC 2 numbers \NC a shortcut for the combination of a font and char command\NC \NR
+\NC \type{push} \NC 0 \NC \NC save current position\NC \NR
+\NC \type{nop} \NC 0 \NC \NC do nothing \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pop} \NC 0 \NC \NC pop position \NC \NR
+\NC \type{rule} \NC 2 \NC 2 numbers \NC output a rule $ht*wd$, and move right. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{down} \NC 1 \NC number \NC move down on the page \NC \NR
+\NC \type{right} \NC 1 \NC number \NC move right on the page \NC \NR
+\NC \type{special} \NC 1 \NC string \NC output a \prm {special} command \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf} \NC 2 \NC 2 strings \NC output a \PDF\ literal, the first string is one of \type {origin},
+ \type {page}, \type {text}, \type {font}, \type {direct} or \type {raw}; if you
+ have one string only \type {origin} is assumed \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lua} \NC 1 \NC string,
+ function \NC execute a \LUA\ script when the glyph is embedded; in case of a
+ function it gets the font id and character code passed \NC \NR
+\NC \type{image} \NC 1 \NC image \NC output an image (the argument can be either an \type {<image>} variable or an \type {image_spec} table) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{comment} \NC any \NC any \NC the arguments of this command are ignored \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+When a font id is set to~0 then it will be replaced by the currently assigned
+font id. This prevents the need for hackery with future id's. Normally one could
+use \type {font.nextid} but when more complex fonts are built in the meantime
+other instances could have been loaded.
+
+The \type {pdf} option also accepts a \type {mode} keyword in which case the
+third argument sets the mode. That option will change the mode in an efficient
+way (passing an empty string would result in an extra empty lines in the \PDF\
+file. This option only makes sense for virtual fonts. The \type {font} mode only
+makes sense in virtual fonts. Modes are somewhat fuzzy and partially inherited
+from \PDFTEX.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB mode \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {origin} \NC enter page mode and set the position \NC \NR
+\NC \type {page} \NC enter page mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type {text} \NC enter text mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type {font} \NC enter font mode (kind of text mode, only in virtual fonts) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {always} \NC finish the current string and force a transform if needed \NC \NR
+\NC \type {raw} \NC finish the current string \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+You always need to check what \PDF\ code is generated because there can be all
+kind of interferences with optimization in the backend and fonts are complicated
+anyway. Here is a rather elaborate glyph commands example using such keys:
+
+\starttyping
+...
+commands = {
+ { "push" }, -- remember where we are
+ { "right", 5000 }, -- move right about 0.08pt
+ { "font", 3 }, -- select the fonts[3] entry
+ { "char", 97 }, -- place character 97 (ASCII 'a')
+ -- { "slot", 2, 97 }, -- an alternative for the previous two
+ { "pop" }, -- go all the way back
+ { "down", -200000 }, -- move upwards by about 3pt
+ { "special", "pdf: 1 0 0 rg" } -- switch to red color
+ -- { "pdf", "origin", "1 0 0 rg" } -- switch to red color (alternative)
+ { "rule", 500000, 20000 } -- draw a bar
+ { "special", "pdf: 0 g" } -- back to black
+ -- { "pdf", "origin", "0 g" } -- back to black (alternative)
+}
+...
+\stoptyping
+
+The default value for \type {font} is always~1 at the start of the
+\type {commands} array. Therefore, if the virtual font is essentially only a
+re|-|encoding, then you do usually not have created an explicit \quote {font}
+command in the array.
+
+Rules inside of \type {commands} arrays are built up using only two dimensions:
+they do not have depth. For correct vertical placement, an extra \type {down}
+command may be needed.
+
+Regardless of the amount of movement you create within the \type {commands}, the
+output pointer will always move by exactly the width that was given in the \type
+{width} key of the character hash. Any movements that take place inside the \type
+{commands} array are ignored on the upper level.
+
+The special can have a \type {pdf:}, \type {pdf:origin:}, \type {pdf:page:},
+\type {pdf:direct:} or \type {pdf:raw:} prefix. When you have to concatenate
+strings using the \type {pdf} command might be more efficient.
+
+\subsection{Artificial fonts}
+
+Even in a \quote {real} font, there can be virtual characters. When \LUATEX\
+encounters a \type {commands} field inside a character when it becomes time to
+typeset the character, it will interpret the commands, just like for a true
+virtual character. In this case, if you have created no \quote {fonts} array,
+then the default (and only) \quote {base} font is taken to be the current font
+itself. In practice, this means that you can create virtual duplicates of
+existing characters which is useful if you want to create composite characters.
+
+Note: this feature does {\it not\/} work the other way around. There can not be
+\quote {real} characters in a virtual font! You cannot use this technique for
+font re-encoding either; you need a truly virtual font for that (because
+characters that are already present cannot be altered).
+
+\subsection{Example virtual font}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
+
+Finally, here is a plain \TEX\ input file with a virtual font demonstration:
+
+\startbuffer
+\directlua {
+ callback.register('define_font',
+ function (name,size)
+ if name == 'cmr10-red' then
+ local f = font.read_tfm('cmr10',size)
+ f.name = 'cmr10-red'
+ f.type = 'virtual'
+ f.fonts = {
+ { name = 'cmr10', size = size }
+ }
+ for i,v in pairs(f.characters) do
+ if string.char(i):find('[tacohanshartmut]') then
+ v.commands = {
+ { "special", "pdf: 1 0 0 rg" },
+ { "char", i },
+ { "special", "pdf: 0 g" },
+ }
+ end
+ end
+ return f
+ else
+ return font.read_tfm(name,size)
+ end
+ end
+ )
+}
+
+\font\myfont = cmr10-red at 10pt \myfont This is a line of text \par
+\font\myfontx = cmr10 at 10pt \myfontx Here is another line of text \par
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {vf} library}]
+
+The \type {vf} library can be used when \LUA\ code, as defined in the \type
+{commands} of the font, is executed. The functions provided are similar as the
+commands: \type {char}, \type {down}, \type {fontid}, \type {image}, \type
+{node}, \type {nop}, \type {pop}, \type {push}, \type {right}, \nod {rule}, \type
+{special} and \type {pdf}. This library has been present for a while but not been
+advertised and tested much, if only because it's easy to define an invalid font
+(or mess up the \PDF\ stream). Keep in mind that the \LUA\ snippets are executed
+each time when a character is output.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {font} library}]
+
+\topicindex {fonts+library}
+
+The font library provides the interface into the internals of the font system,
+and it also contains helper functions to load traditional \TEX\ font metrics
+formats. Other font loading functionality is provided by the \type {fontloader}
+library that will be discussed in the next section.
+
+\subsection{Loading a \TFM\ file}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+tfm}
+
+The behaviour documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
+there will not be backward|-|incompatible changes any more.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> fnt =
+ font.read_tfm(<string> name, <number> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The number is a bit special:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ If it is positive, it specifies an \quote {at size} in scaled points.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ If it is negative, its absolute value represents a \quote {scaled}
+ setting relative to the designsize of the font.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+\subsection{Loading a \VF\ file}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+vf}
+
+The behavior documented in this subsection is considered stable in the sense that
+there will not be backward-incompatible changes any more.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> vf_fnt =
+ font.read_vf(<string> name, <number> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The meaning of the number \type {s} and the format of the returned table are
+similar to the ones in the \type {read_tfm} function.
+
+\subsection{The fonts array}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+virtual}
+
+The whole table of \TEX\ fonts is accessible from \LUA\ using a virtual array.
+
+\starttyping
+font.fonts[n] = { ... }
+<table> f = font.fonts[n]
+\stoptyping
+
+Because this is a virtual array, you cannot call \type {pairs} on it, but see
+below for the \type {font.each} iterator.
+
+The two metatable functions implementing the virtual array are:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> f = font.getfont(<number> n)
+font.setfont(<number> n, <table> f)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Note that at the moment, each access to the \type {font.fonts} or call to \type
+{font.getfont} creates a \LUA\ table for the whole font unless you cached it.
+This process can be quite slow.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> p = font.getparameters(<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This one will return a table of the parameters as known to \TEX. These can be
+different from the ones in the cached table.
+
+Also note the following: assignments can only be made to fonts that have already
+been defined in \TEX, but have not been accessed {\it at all\/} since that
+definition. This limits the usability of the write access to \type {font.fonts}
+quite a lot, a less stringent ruleset will likely be implemented later.
+
+\subsection{Checking a font's status}
+
+You can test for the status of a font by calling this function:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean> f =
+ font.frozen(<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The return value is one of \type {true} (unassignable), \type {false} (can be
+changed) or \type {nil} (not a valid font at all).
+
+\subsection{Defining a font directly}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+define}
+
+You can define your own font into \type {font.fonts} by calling this function:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ font.define(<table> f)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The return value is the internal id number of the defined font (the index into
+\type {font.fonts}). If the font creation fails, an error is raised. The table is
+a font structure. An alternative call is:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ font.define(<number> n, <table> f)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Where the first argument is a reserved font id (see below).
+
+\subsection{Extending a font}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+extend}
+
+Within reasonable bounds you can extend a font after it has been defined. Because
+some properties are best left unchanged this is limited to adding characters.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+font.addcharacters(<number n>, <table> f)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The table passed can have the fields \type {characters} which is a (sub)table
+like the one used in define, and for virtual fonts a \type {fonts} table can be
+added. The characters defined in the \type {characters} table are added (when not
+yet present) or replace an existing entry. Keep in mind that replacing can have
+side effects because a character already can have been used. Instead of posing
+restrictions we expect the user to be careful. (The \type {setfont} helper is
+a more drastic replacer.)
+
+\subsection{Projected next font id}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+id}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ font.nextid()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This returns the font id number that would be returned by a \type {font.define}
+call if it was executed at this spot in the code flow. This is useful for virtual
+fonts that need to reference themselves. If you pass \type {true} as argument,
+the id gets reserved and you can pass to \type {font.define} as first argument.
+This can be handy when you create complex virtual fonts.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ font.nextid(true)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{Font ids}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+id}
+\topicindex {fonts+current}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ font.id(<string> csname)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This returns the font id associated with \type {csname}, or $-1$ if \type
+{csname} is not defined.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ font.max()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This is the largest used index in \type {font.fonts}.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i = font.current()
+font.current(<number> i)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This gets or sets the currently used font number.
+
+\subsection{Iterating over all fonts}
+
+\topicindex {fonts+iterate}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+for i,v in font.each() do
+ ...
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This is an iterator over each of the defined \TEX\ fonts. The first returned
+value is the index in \type {font.fonts}, the second the font itself, as a \LUA\
+table. The indices are listed incrementally, but they do not always form an array
+of consecutive numbers: in some cases there can be holes in the sequence.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-graphics.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-graphics.tex
index 038710cd58..3f12762b68 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-graphics.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-graphics.tex
@@ -1,831 +1,831 @@
-% language=uk
-
-% mp solve_path
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-graphics
-
-\startchapter[reference=graphics,title={The graphic libraries}]
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {img} library}][library=img]
-
-\topicindex {images}
-\topicindex {images+library}
-\topicindex {graphics}
-
-The \type {img} library can be used as an alternative to \orm {pdfximage} and
-\orm {pdfrefximage}, and the associated \quote {satellite} commands like \type
-{\pdfximagebbox}. Image objects can also be used within virtual fonts via the
-\type {image} command listed in~\in {section} [virtualfonts].
-
-\subsection{\type {new}}
-
-\libindex{new}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<image> var = img.new()
-<image> var = img.new(<table> image_spec)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function creates a userdata object of type \quote {image}. The \type
-{image_spec} argument is optional. If it is given, it must be a table, and that
-table must contain a \type {filename} key. A number of other keys can also be
-useful, these are explained below.
-
-You can either say
-
-\starttyping
-a = img.new()
-\stoptyping
-
-followed by
-
-\starttyping
-a.filename = "foo.png"
-\stoptyping
-
-or you can put the file name (and some or all of the other keys) into a table
-directly, like so:
-
-\starttyping
-a = img.new({filename='foo.pdf', page=1})
-\stoptyping
-
-The generated \type {<image>} userdata object allows access to a set of
-user|-|specified values as well as a set of values that are normally filled in
-and updated automatically by \LUATEX\ itself. Some of those are derived from the
-actual image file, others are updated to reflect the \PDF\ output status of the
-object.
-
-There is one required user-specified field: the file name (\type {filename}). It
-can optionally be augmented by the requested image dimensions (\type {width},
-\type {depth}, \type {height}), user|-|specified image attributes (\type {attr}),
-the requested \PDF\ page identifier (\type {page}), the requested boundingbox
-(\type {pagebox}) for \PDF\ inclusion, the requested color space object (\type
-{colorspace}).
-
-The function \type {img.new} does not access the actual image file, it just
-creates the \type {<image>} userdata object and initializes some memory
-structures. The \type {<image>} object and its internal structures are
-automatically garbage collected.
-
-Once the image is scanned, all the values in the \type {<image>} except \type
-{width}, \type {height} and \type {depth}, become frozen, and you cannot change
-them any more.
-
-You can use \type {pdf.setignoreunknownimages(1)} (or at the \TEX\ end the \lpr
-{pdfvariable} \type {ignoreunknownimages}) to get around a quit when no known
-image type is found (based on name or preamble). Beware: this will not catch
-invalid images and we cannot guarantee side effects. A zero dimension image is
-still included when requested. No special flags are set. A proper workflow will
-not rely in such a catch but make sure that images are valid.
-
-\subsection{\type {fields}}
-
-\libindex{fields}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> keys = img.fields()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns a list of all the possible \type {image_spec} keys, both
-user-supplied and automatic ones.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field name \BC type \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC string \NC the image attributes for \LUATEX \NC \NR
-\NC \type{bbox} \NC table \NC table with 4 boundingbox dimensions \type
- {llx}, \type {lly}, \type {urx} and \type
- {ury} overruling the \type {pagebox} entry \NC \NR
-\NC \type{colordepth} \NC number \NC the number of bits used by the color space \NC \NR
-\NC \type{colorspace} \NC number \NC the color space object number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the image depth for \LUATEX \NC \NR
-\NC \type{filename} \NC string \NC the image file name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{filepath} \NC string \NC the full (expanded) file name of the image\NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the image height for \LUATEX \NC \NR
-\NC \type{imagetype} \NC string \NC one of \type {pdf}, \type {png}, \type {jpg},
- \type {jp2} or \type {jbig2} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{index} \NC number \NC the \PDF\ image name suffix \NC \NR
-\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the \PDF\ image object number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{page} \NC number \NC the identifier for the requested image page \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pagebox} \NC string \NC the requested bounding box, one of
- \type {none}, \type {media}, \type {crop},
- \type {bleed}, \type {trim}, \type {art} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pages} \NC number \NC the total number of available pages \NC \NR
-\NC \type{rotation} \NC number \NC the image rotation from included \PDF\ file,
- in multiples of 90~deg. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stream} \NC string \NC the raw stream data for an \type {/Xobject}
- \type {/Form} object\NC \NR
-\NC \type{transform} \NC number \NC the image transform, integer number 0..7 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{orientation} \NC number \NC the (jpeg) image orientation, integer number 1..8
- (0 for unset) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the image width for \LUATEX \NC \NR
-\NC \type{xres} \NC number \NC the horizontal natural image resolution
- (in \DPI) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{xsize} \NC number \NC the natural image width \NC \NR
-\NC \type{yres} \NC number \NC the vertical natural image resolution
- (in \DPI) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ysize} \NC number \NC the natural image height \NC \NR
-\NC \type{visiblefilename} \NC string \NC when set, this name will find its way in the
- \PDF\ file as \type {PTEX} specification; when
- an empty string is assigned nothing is written
- to file; otherwise the natural filename is
- taken \NC \NR
-\NC \type{userpassword} \NC string \NC the userpassword needed for opening a \PDF\ file \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ownerpassword} \NC string \NC the ownerpassword needed for opening a \PDF\ file \NC \NR
-\NC \type{keepopen} \NC boolean \NC keep the \PDF\ file open \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nobbox} \NC boolean \NC don't add a boundingbox specification for streams \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nolength} \NC boolean \NC don't add length key nor compress for streams \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nosize} \NC boolean \NC don't add size fields for streams \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-A running (undefined) dimension in \type {width}, \type {height}, or \type
-{depth} is represented as \type {nil} in \LUA, so if you want to load an image at
-its \quote {natural} size, you do not have to specify any of those three fields.
-
-The \type {stream} parameter allows to fabricate an \type {/XObject} \type
-{/Form} object from a string giving the stream contents, e.g., for a filled
-rectangle:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-a.stream = "0 0 20 10 re f"
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-When writing the image, an \type {/Xobject} \type {/Form} object is created, like
-with embedded \PDF\ file writing. The object is written out only once. The \type
-{stream} key requires that also the \type {bbox} table is given. The \type
-{stream} key conflicts with the \type {filename} key. The \type {transform} key
-works as usual also with \type {stream}.
-
-The \type {bbox} key needs a table with four boundingbox values, e.g.:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-a.bbox = { "30bp", 0, "225bp", "200bp" }
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This replaces and overrules any given \type {pagebox} value; with given \type
-{bbox} the box dimensions coming with an embedded \PDF\ file are ignored. The
-\type {xsize} and \type {ysize} dimensions are set accordingly, when the image is
-scaled. The \type {bbox} parameter is ignored for non-\PDF\ images.
-
-The \type {transform} allows to mirror and rotate the image in steps of 90~deg.
-The default value~$0$ gives an unmirrored, unrotated image. Values $1-3$ give
-counterclockwise rotation by $90$, $180$, or $270$~degrees, whereas with values
-$4-7$ the image is first mirrored and then rotated counterclockwise by $90$,
-$180$, or $270$~degrees. The \type {transform} operation gives the same visual
-result as if you would externally preprocess the image by a graphics tool and
-then use it by \LUATEX. If a \PDF\ file to be embedded already contains a \type
-{/Rotate} specification, the rotation result is the combination of the \type
-{/Rotate} rotation followed by the \type {transform} operation.
-
-\subsection{\type {scan}}
-
-\libindex{scan}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<image> var = img.scan(<image> var)
-<image> var = img.scan(<table> image_spec)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-When you say \type {img.scan(a)} for a new image, the file is scanned, and
-variables such as \type {xsize}, \type {ysize}, image \type {type}, number of
-\type {pages}, and the resolution are extracted. Each of the \type {width}, \type
-{height}, \type {depth} fields are set up according to the image dimensions, if
-they were not given an explicit value already. An image file will never be
-scanned more than once for a given image variable. With all subsequent \type
-{img.scan(a)} calls only the dimensions are again set up (if they have been
-changed by the user in the meantime).
-
-For ease of use, you can do right-away a
-
-\starttyping
-<image> a = img.scan { filename = "foo.png" }
-\stoptyping
-
-without a prior \type {img.new}.
-
-Nothing is written yet at this point, so you can do \type {a=img.scan}, retrieve
-the available info like image width and height, and then throw away \type {a}
-again by saying \type {a=nil}. In that case no image object will be reserved in
-the PDF, and the used memory will be cleaned up automatically.
-
-\subsection{\type {copy}}
-
-\libindex{copy}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<image> var = img.copy(<image> var)
-<image> var = img.copy(<table> image_spec)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-If you say \type {a = b}, then both variables point to the same \type {<image>}
-object. if you want to write out an image with different sizes, you can do
-\type {b = img.copy(a)}.
-
-Afterwards, \type {a} and \type {b} still reference the same actual image
-dictionary, but the dimensions for \type {b} can now be changed from their
-initial values that were just copies from \type {a}.
-
-\subsection{\type {write}, \type {immediatewrite}, \type {immediatewriteobject}}
-
-\topicindex {images+injection}
-\topicindex {images+immediate}
-\topicindex {images+object}
-
-\libindex{write}
-\libindex{immediatewrite}
-\libindex{immediatewriteobject}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<image> var = img.write(<image> var)
-<image> var = img.write(<table> image_spec)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-By \type {img.write(a)} a \PDF\ object number is allocated, and a rule node of
-subtype \type {image} is generated and put into the output list. By this the
-image \type {a} is placed into the page stream, and the image file is written out
-into an image stream object after the shipping of the current page is finished.
-
-Again you can do a terse call like
-
-\starttyping
-img.write { filename = "foo.png" }
-\stoptyping
-
-The \type {<image>} variable is returned in case you want it for later
-processing. You can also write an object.
-
-By \type {img.immediatewrite(a)} a \PDF\ object number is allocated, and the
-image file for image \type {a} is written out immediately into the \PDF\ file as
-an image stream object (like with \prm {immediate}\orm {pdfximage}). The object
-number of the image stream dictionary is then available by the \type {objnum}
-key. No \type {pdf_refximage} whatsit node is generated. You will need an
-\type {img.write(a)} or \type {img.node(a)} call to let the image appear on the
-page, or reference it by another trick; else you will have a dangling image
-object in the \PDF\ file.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<image> var = img.immediatewrite(<image> var)
-<image> var = img.immediatewrite(<table> image_spec)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Also here you can do a terse call like
-
-\starttyping
-a = img.immediatewrite { filename = "foo.png" }
-\stoptyping
-
-The \type {<image>} variable is returned and you will most likely need it.
-
-The next function is kind of special as it copies an object from a (\PDF) image
-file. This features is experimental and might disappear.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<integer> objnum = img.immediatewriteobject(<image> var, <integer> objnum)
-<integer> objnum = img.immediatewriteobject(<table> image_spec, <integer> objnum)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {node}}
-
-\libindex{node}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n = img.node(<image> var)
-<node> n = img.node(<table> image_spec)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function allocates a \PDF\ object number and returns a whatsit node of
-subtype \type {pdf_refximage}, filled with the image parameters \type {width},
-\type {height}, \type {depth}, and \type {objnum}. Also here you can do a terse
-call like:
-
-\starttyping
-n = img.node ({ filename = "foo.png" })
-\stoptyping
-
-This example outputs an image:
-
-\starttyping
-node.write(img.node{filename="foo.png"})
-\stoptyping
-
-\subsection{\type {types}}
-
-\topicindex {images+types}
-
-\libindex{types}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> types = img.types()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns a list with the supported image file type names, currently
-these are \type {pdf}, \type {png}, \type {jpg}, \type {jp2} (JPEG~2000), and
-\type {jbig2}.
-
-\subsection{\type {boxes}}
-
-\libindex{boxes}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> boxes = img.boxes()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns a list with the supported \PDF\ page box names, currently
-these are \type {media}, \type {crop}, \type {bleed}, \type {trim}, and \type
-{art}, all in lowercase.
-
-The \PDF\ file is kept open after its properties are determined. After inclusion,
-which happens when the page that references the image is flushed, the file is
-closed. This means that when you have thousands of images on one page, your
-operating system might decide to abort the run. When you include more than one
-page from a \PDF\ file you can set the \type {keepopen} flag when you allocate an
-image object, or pass the \type {keepopen} directive when you refer to the image
-with \lpr {useimageresource}. This only makes sense when you embed many pages.
-An \prm {immediate} applied to \lpr {saveimageresource} will also force a
-close after inclusion.
-
-\starttyping
-\immediate\useimageresource{foo.pdf}%
- \saveimageresource \lastsavedimageresourceindex % closed
- \useimageresource{foo.pdf}%
- \saveimageresource \lastsavedimageresourceindex % kept open
- \useimageresource{foo.pdf}%
- \saveimageresource keepopen\lastsavedimageresourceindex % kept open
-
-\directlua{img.write(img.scan{ file = "foo.pdf" })} % closed
-\directlua{img.write(img.scan{ file = "foo.pdf", keepopen = true })} % kept open
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {mplib} library}][library=mplib]
-
-\topicindex {\METAPOST}
-\topicindex {\METAPOST+mplib}
-\topicindex {images+mplib}
-\topicindex {images+\METAPOST}
-
-\libindex{version}
-
-The \MP\ library interface registers itself in the table \type {mplib}. It is
-based on \MPLIB\ version \ctxlua {context(mplib.version())}.
-
-\subsection{\type {new}}
-
-\libindex{new}
-
-To create a new \METAPOST\ instance, call
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<mpinstance> mp = mplib.new({...})
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This creates the \type {mp} instance object. The argument hash can have a number
-of different fields, as follows:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|pl|pl|]
-\DB name \BC type \BC description \BC default \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{error_line} \NC number \NC error line width \NC 79 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{print_line} \NC number \NC line length in ps output \NC 100 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{random_seed} \NC number \NC the initial random seed \NC variable \NC \NR
-\NC \type{math_mode} \NC string \NC the number system to use:
- \type {scaled},
- \type {double} or
- % \type {binary} or
- \type {decimal} \NC \type {scaled} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{interaction} \NC string \NC the interaction mode:
- \type {batch},
- \type {nonstop},
- \type {scroll} or
- \type {errorstop} \NC \type {errorstop} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{job_name} \NC string \NC \type {--jobname} \NC \type {mpout} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{find_file} \NC function \NC a function to find files \NC only local files \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The binary mode is no longer available in the \LUATEX\ version of \MPLIB. It
-offers no real advantage and brings a ton of extra libraries with platform
-specific properties that we can now avoid. We might introduce a high resolution
-scaled variant at some point but only when it pays of performance wise.
-
-The \type {find_file} function should be of this form:
-
-\starttyping
-<string> found = finder (<string> name, <string> mode, <string> type)
-\stoptyping
-
-with:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB name \BC the requested file \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{mode} \NC the file mode: \type {r} or \type {w} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{type} \NC the kind of file, one of: \type {mp}, \type {tfm}, \type {map},
- \type {pfb}, \type {enc} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Return either the full path name of the found file, or \type {nil} if the file
-cannot be found.
-
-Note that the new version of \MPLIB\ no longer uses binary mem files, so the way
-to preload a set of macros is simply to start off with an \type {input} command
-in the first \type {execute} call.
-
-When you are processing a snippet of text starting with \type {btex} and
-ending with either \type {etex} or \type {verbatimtex}, the \METAPOST\
-\type {texscriptmode} parameter controls how spaces and newlines get honoured.
-The default value is~1. Possible values are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB name \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {0} \NC no newlines \NC \NR
-\NC \type {1} \NC newlines in \type {verbatimtex} \NC \NR
-\NC \type {2} \NC newlines in \type {verbatimtex} and \type {etex} \NC \NR
-\NC \type {3} \NC no leading and trailing strip in \type {verbatimtex} \NC \NR
-\NC \type {4} \NC no leading and trailing strip in \type {verbatimtex} and \type {btex} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-That way the \LUA\ handler (assigned to \type {make_text}) can do what it likes.
-An \type {etex} has to be followed by a space or \type {;} or be at the end of a
-line and preceded by a space or at the beginning of a line.
-
-\subsection{\type {statistics}}
-
-\libindex{statistics}
-
-You can request statistics with:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> stats = mp:statistics()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns the vital statistics for an \MPLIB\ instance. There are
-four fields, giving the maximum number of used items in each of four allocated
-object classes:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{main_memory} \NC number \NC memory size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hash_size} \NC number \NC hash size\NC \NR
-\NC \type{param_size} \NC number \NC simultaneous macro parameters\NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_in_open} \NC number \NC input file nesting levels\NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note that in the new version of \MPLIB, this is informational only. The objects
-are all allocated dynamically, so there is no chance of running out of space
-unless the available system memory is exhausted.
-
-\subsection{\type {execute}}
-
-\libindex{execute}
-
-You can ask the \METAPOST\ interpreter to run a chunk of code by calling
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> rettable = execute(mp,"metapost code")
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-for various bits of \METAPOST\ language input. Be sure to check the \type
-{rettable.status} (see below) because when a fatal \METAPOST\ error occurs the
-\MPLIB\ instance will become unusable thereafter.
-
-Generally speaking, it is best to keep your chunks small, but beware that all
-chunks have to obey proper syntax, like each of them is a small file. For
-instance, you cannot split a single statement over multiple chunks.
-
-In contrast with the normal stand alone \type {mpost} command, there is
-\notabene {no} implied \quote{input} at the start of the first chunk.
-
-\subsection{\type {finish}}
-
-\libindex{finish}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> rettable = finish(mp)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-If for some reason you want to stop using an \MPLIB\ instance while processing is
-not yet actually done, you can call \type finish}. Eventually, used memory
-will be freed and open files will be closed by the \LUA\ garbage collector, but
-an explicit \type finish} is the only way to capture the final part of the
-output streams.
-
-\subsection{Result table}
-
-\libindex {fields}
-
-The return value of \type {execute} and \type {finish} is a table with a
-few possible keys (only \type {status} is always guaranteed to be present).
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{log} \NC string \NC output to the \quote {log} stream \NC \NR
-\NC \type{term} \NC string \NC output to the \quote {term} stream \NC \NR
-\NC \type{error} \NC string \NC output to the \quote {error} stream
- (only used for \quote {out of memory}) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{status} \NC number \NC the return value:
- \type {0} = good,
- \type {1} = warning,
- \type {2} = errors,
- \type {3} = fatal error \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fig} \NC table \NC an array of generated figures (if any) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-When \type {status} equals~3, you should stop using this \MPLIB\ instance
-immediately, it is no longer capable of processing input.
-
-If it is present, each of the entries in the \type {fig} array is a userdata
-representing a figure object, and each of those has a number of object methods
-you can call:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{boundingbox} \NC function \NC returns the bounding box, as an array of 4
- values \NC \NR
-\NC \type{postscript} \NC function \NC returns a string that is the ps output of the
- \type {fig}. this function accepts two optional
- integer arguments for specifying the values of
- \type {prologues} (first argument) and \type
- {procset} (second argument) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{svg} \NC function \NC returns a string that is the svg output of the
- \type {fig}. This function accepts an optional
- integer argument for specifying the value of
- \type {prologues} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{objects} \NC function \NC returns the actual array of graphic objects in
- this \type {fig} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{copy_objects} \NC function \NC returns a deep copy of the array of graphic
- objects in this \type {fig} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{filename} \NC function \NC the filename this \type {fig}'s \POSTSCRIPT\
- output would have written to in stand alone
- mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC function \NC the \type {fontcharwd} value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC function \NC the \type {fontcharht} value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC function \NC the \type {fontchardp} value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{italcorr} \NC function \NC the \type {fontcharit} value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{charcode} \NC function \NC the (rounded) \type {charcode} value \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note: you can call \type {fig:objects()} only once for any one \type {fig}
-object!
-
-When the boundingbox represents a \quote {negated rectangle}, i.e.\ when the
-first set of coordinates is larger than the second set, the picture is empty.
-
-Graphical objects come in various types that each has a different list of
-accessible values. The types are: \type {fill}, \type {outline}, \type {text},
-\type {start_clip}, \type {stop_clip}, \type {start_bounds}, \type {stop_bounds},
-\type {special}.
-
-There is a helper function (\type {mplib.fields(obj)}) to get the list of
-accessible values for a particular object, but you can just as easily use the
-tables given below.
-
-All graphical objects have a field \type {type} that gives the object type as a
-string value; it is not explicit mentioned in the following tables. In the
-following, \type {number}s are \POSTSCRIPT\ points represented as a floating
-point number, unless stated otherwise. Field values that are of type \type
-{table} are explained in the next section.
-
-\subsubsection{fill}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{path} \NC table \NC the list of knots \NC \NR
-\NC \type{htap} \NC table \NC the list of knots for the reversed trajectory \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pen} \NC table \NC knots of the pen \NC \NR
-\NC \type{color} \NC table \NC the object's color \NC \NR
-\NC \type{linejoin} \NC number \NC line join style (bare number)\NC \NR
-\NC \type{miterlimit} \NC number \NC miterlimit\NC \NR
-\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC the prescript text \NC \NR
-\NC \type{postscript} \NC string \NC the postscript text \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The entries \type {htap} and \type {pen} are optional.
-
-\subsubsection{outline}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{path} \NC table \NC the list of knots \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pen} \NC table \NC knots of the pen \NC \NR
-\NC \type{color} \NC table \NC the object's color \NC \NR
-\NC \type{linejoin} \NC number \NC line join style (bare number) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{miterlimit} \NC number \NC miterlimit \NC \NR
-\NC \type{linecap} \NC number \NC line cap style (bare number) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dash} \NC table \NC representation of a dash list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC the prescript text \NC \NR
-\NC \type{postscript} \NC string \NC the postscript text \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The entry \type {dash} is optional.
-
-\subsubsection{text}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{text} \NC string \NC the text \NC \NR
-\NC \type{font} \NC string \NC font tfm name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dsize} \NC number \NC font size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{color} \NC table \NC the object's color \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{transform} \NC table \NC a text transformation \NC \NR
-\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC the prescript text \NC \NR
-\NC \type{postscript} \NC string \NC the postscript text \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsubsection{special}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC special text \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsubsection{start_bounds, start_clip}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{path} \NC table \NC the list of knots \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsubsection{stop_bounds, stop_clip}
-
-Here are no fields available.
-
-\subsection{Subsidiary table formats}
-
-\subsubsection{Paths and pens}
-
-Paths and pens (that are really just a special type of paths as far as \MPLIB\ is
-concerned) are represented by an array where each entry is a table that
-represents a knot.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{left_type} \NC string \NC when present: endpoint, but usually absent \NC \NR
-\NC \type{right_type} \NC string \NC like \type {left_type} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{x_coord} \NC number \NC X coordinate of this knot \NC \NR
-\NC \type{y_coord} \NC number \NC Y coordinate of this knot \NC \NR
-\NC \type{left_x} \NC number \NC X coordinate of the precontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
-\NC \type{left_y} \NC number \NC Y coordinate of the precontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
-\NC \type{right_x} \NC number \NC X coordinate of the postcontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
-\NC \type{right_y} \NC number \NC Y coordinate of the postcontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-There is one special case: pens that are (possibly transformed) ellipses have an
-extra string-valued key \type {type} with value \type {elliptical} besides the
-array part containing the knot list.
-
-\subsubsection{Colors}
-
-A color is an integer array with 0, 1, 3 or 4 values:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{0} \NC marking only \NC no values \NC \NR
-\NC \type{1} \NC greyscale \NC one value in the range $(0,1)$, \quote {black} is $0$ \NC \NR
-\NC \type{3} \NC \RGB \NC three values in the range $(0,1)$, \quote {black} is $0,0,0$ \NC \NR
-\NC \type{4} \NC \CMYK \NC four values in the range $(0,1)$, \quote {black} is $0,0,0,1$ \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-If the color model of the internal object was \type {uninitialized}, then it was
-initialized to the values representing \quote {black} in the colorspace \type
-{defaultcolormodel} that was in effect at the time of the \type {shipout}.
-
-\subsubsection{Transforms}
-
-Each transform is a six|-|item array.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB index \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{1} \NC number \NC represents x \NC \NR
-\NC \type{2} \NC number \NC represents y \NC \NR
-\NC \type{3} \NC number \NC represents xx \NC \NR
-\NC \type{4} \NC number \NC represents yx \NC \NR
-\NC \type{5} \NC number \NC represents xy \NC \NR
-\NC \type{6} \NC number \NC represents yy \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note that the translation (index 1 and 2) comes first. This differs from the
-ordering in \POSTSCRIPT, where the translation comes last.
-
-\subsubsection{Dashes}
-
-Each \type {dash} is two-item hash, using the same model as \POSTSCRIPT\ for the
-representation of the dashlist. \type {dashes} is an array of \quote {on} and
-\quote {off}, values, and \type {offset} is the phase of the pattern.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{dashes} \NC hash \NC an array of on-off numbers \NC \NR
-\NC \type{offset} \NC number \NC the starting offset value \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{Pens and \type {pen_info}}
-
-\libindex{pen_info}
-
-There is helper function (\type {pen_info(obj)}) that returns a table containing
-a bunch of vital characteristics of the used pen (all values are floats):
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC width of the pen \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sx} \NC number \NC $x$ scale \NC \NR
-\NC \type{rx} \NC number \NC $xy$ multiplier \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ry} \NC number \NC $yx$ multiplier \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sy} \NC number \NC $y$ scale \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tx} \NC number \NC $x$ offset \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ty} \NC number \NC $y$ offset \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{Character size information}
-
-These functions find the size of a glyph in a defined font. The \type {fontname}
-is the same name as the argument to \type {infont}; the \type {char} is a glyph
-id in the range 0 to 255; the returned \type {w} is in AFM units.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {char_width}}
-
-\libindex{char_width}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> w = char_width(mp,<string> fontname, <number> char)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsubsection{\type {char_height}}
-
-\libindex{char_height}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> w = char_height(mp,<string> fontname, <number> char)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsubsection{\type {char_depth}}
-
-\libindex{char_depth}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> w = char_depth(mp,<string> fontname, <number> char)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsubsection{\type {get_[boolean|numeric|string|path]}}
-
-\libindex{get_boolean}
-\libindex{get_numeric}
-\libindex{get_path}
-\libindex{get_string}
-
-When a script call brings you from the \METAPOST\ run (temporarily) back to
-\LUA\ you can access variables, but only if they are known (so for instance
-anonymous capsules like loop variables are not accessible).
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean> w = get_boolean(mp,<string> name)
-<number> n = get_numeric(mp,<string> name)
-<string> s = get_string (mp,<string> name)
-<table> p = get_path (mp,<string> name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The path is returned a a table with subtables that have six numbers: the
-coordinates of the point, pre- and postcontrol. A \type {cycle} fields indicates
-if a path is cyclic.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
+% language=uk
+
+% mp solve_path
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-graphics
+
+\startchapter[reference=graphics,title={The graphic libraries}]
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {img} library}][library=img]
+
+\topicindex {images}
+\topicindex {images+library}
+\topicindex {graphics}
+
+The \type {img} library can be used as an alternative to \orm {pdfximage} and
+\orm {pdfrefximage}, and the associated \quote {satellite} commands like \type
+{\pdfximagebbox}. Image objects can also be used within virtual fonts via the
+\type {image} command listed in~\in {section} [virtualfonts].
+
+\subsection{\type {new}}
+
+\libindex{new}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<image> var = img.new()
+<image> var = img.new(<table> image_spec)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function creates a userdata object of type \quote {image}. The \type
+{image_spec} argument is optional. If it is given, it must be a table, and that
+table must contain a \type {filename} key. A number of other keys can also be
+useful, these are explained below.
+
+You can either say
+
+\starttyping
+a = img.new()
+\stoptyping
+
+followed by
+
+\starttyping
+a.filename = "foo.png"
+\stoptyping
+
+or you can put the file name (and some or all of the other keys) into a table
+directly, like so:
+
+\starttyping
+a = img.new({filename='foo.pdf', page=1})
+\stoptyping
+
+The generated \type {<image>} userdata object allows access to a set of
+user|-|specified values as well as a set of values that are normally filled in
+and updated automatically by \LUATEX\ itself. Some of those are derived from the
+actual image file, others are updated to reflect the \PDF\ output status of the
+object.
+
+There is one required user-specified field: the file name (\type {filename}). It
+can optionally be augmented by the requested image dimensions (\type {width},
+\type {depth}, \type {height}), user|-|specified image attributes (\type {attr}),
+the requested \PDF\ page identifier (\type {page}), the requested boundingbox
+(\type {pagebox}) for \PDF\ inclusion, the requested color space object (\type
+{colorspace}).
+
+The function \type {img.new} does not access the actual image file, it just
+creates the \type {<image>} userdata object and initializes some memory
+structures. The \type {<image>} object and its internal structures are
+automatically garbage collected.
+
+Once the image is scanned, all the values in the \type {<image>} except \type
+{width}, \type {height} and \type {depth}, become frozen, and you cannot change
+them any more.
+
+You can use \type {pdf.setignoreunknownimages(1)} (or at the \TEX\ end the \lpr
+{pdfvariable} \type {ignoreunknownimages}) to get around a quit when no known
+image type is found (based on name or preamble). Beware: this will not catch
+invalid images and we cannot guarantee side effects. A zero dimension image is
+still included when requested. No special flags are set. A proper workflow will
+not rely in such a catch but make sure that images are valid.
+
+\subsection{\type {fields}}
+
+\libindex{fields}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> keys = img.fields()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns a list of all the possible \type {image_spec} keys, both
+user-supplied and automatic ones.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field name \BC type \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC string \NC the image attributes for \LUATEX \NC \NR
+\NC \type{bbox} \NC table \NC table with 4 boundingbox dimensions \type
+ {llx}, \type {lly}, \type {urx} and \type
+ {ury} overruling the \type {pagebox} entry \NC \NR
+\NC \type{colordepth} \NC number \NC the number of bits used by the color space \NC \NR
+\NC \type{colorspace} \NC number \NC the color space object number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the image depth for \LUATEX \NC \NR
+\NC \type{filename} \NC string \NC the image file name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{filepath} \NC string \NC the full (expanded) file name of the image\NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the image height for \LUATEX \NC \NR
+\NC \type{imagetype} \NC string \NC one of \type {pdf}, \type {png}, \type {jpg},
+ \type {jp2} or \type {jbig2} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{index} \NC number \NC the \PDF\ image name suffix \NC \NR
+\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the \PDF\ image object number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{page} \NC number \NC the identifier for the requested image page \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pagebox} \NC string \NC the requested bounding box, one of
+ \type {none}, \type {media}, \type {crop},
+ \type {bleed}, \type {trim}, \type {art} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pages} \NC number \NC the total number of available pages \NC \NR
+\NC \type{rotation} \NC number \NC the image rotation from included \PDF\ file,
+ in multiples of 90~deg. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stream} \NC string \NC the raw stream data for an \type {/Xobject}
+ \type {/Form} object\NC \NR
+\NC \type{transform} \NC number \NC the image transform, integer number 0..7 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{orientation} \NC number \NC the (jpeg) image orientation, integer number 1..8
+ (0 for unset) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the image width for \LUATEX \NC \NR
+\NC \type{xres} \NC number \NC the horizontal natural image resolution
+ (in \DPI) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{xsize} \NC number \NC the natural image width \NC \NR
+\NC \type{yres} \NC number \NC the vertical natural image resolution
+ (in \DPI) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ysize} \NC number \NC the natural image height \NC \NR
+\NC \type{visiblefilename} \NC string \NC when set, this name will find its way in the
+ \PDF\ file as \type {PTEX} specification; when
+ an empty string is assigned nothing is written
+ to file; otherwise the natural filename is
+ taken \NC \NR
+\NC \type{userpassword} \NC string \NC the userpassword needed for opening a \PDF\ file \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ownerpassword} \NC string \NC the ownerpassword needed for opening a \PDF\ file \NC \NR
+\NC \type{keepopen} \NC boolean \NC keep the \PDF\ file open \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nobbox} \NC boolean \NC don't add a boundingbox specification for streams \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nolength} \NC boolean \NC don't add length key nor compress for streams \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nosize} \NC boolean \NC don't add size fields for streams \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+A running (undefined) dimension in \type {width}, \type {height}, or \type
+{depth} is represented as \type {nil} in \LUA, so if you want to load an image at
+its \quote {natural} size, you do not have to specify any of those three fields.
+
+The \type {stream} parameter allows to fabricate an \type {/XObject} \type
+{/Form} object from a string giving the stream contents, e.g., for a filled
+rectangle:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+a.stream = "0 0 20 10 re f"
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+When writing the image, an \type {/Xobject} \type {/Form} object is created, like
+with embedded \PDF\ file writing. The object is written out only once. The \type
+{stream} key requires that also the \type {bbox} table is given. The \type
+{stream} key conflicts with the \type {filename} key. The \type {transform} key
+works as usual also with \type {stream}.
+
+The \type {bbox} key needs a table with four boundingbox values, e.g.:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+a.bbox = { "30bp", 0, "225bp", "200bp" }
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This replaces and overrules any given \type {pagebox} value; with given \type
+{bbox} the box dimensions coming with an embedded \PDF\ file are ignored. The
+\type {xsize} and \type {ysize} dimensions are set accordingly, when the image is
+scaled. The \type {bbox} parameter is ignored for non-\PDF\ images.
+
+The \type {transform} allows to mirror and rotate the image in steps of 90~deg.
+The default value~$0$ gives an unmirrored, unrotated image. Values $1-3$ give
+counterclockwise rotation by $90$, $180$, or $270$~degrees, whereas with values
+$4-7$ the image is first mirrored and then rotated counterclockwise by $90$,
+$180$, or $270$~degrees. The \type {transform} operation gives the same visual
+result as if you would externally preprocess the image by a graphics tool and
+then use it by \LUATEX. If a \PDF\ file to be embedded already contains a \type
+{/Rotate} specification, the rotation result is the combination of the \type
+{/Rotate} rotation followed by the \type {transform} operation.
+
+\subsection{\type {scan}}
+
+\libindex{scan}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<image> var = img.scan(<image> var)
+<image> var = img.scan(<table> image_spec)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+When you say \type {img.scan(a)} for a new image, the file is scanned, and
+variables such as \type {xsize}, \type {ysize}, image \type {type}, number of
+\type {pages}, and the resolution are extracted. Each of the \type {width}, \type
+{height}, \type {depth} fields are set up according to the image dimensions, if
+they were not given an explicit value already. An image file will never be
+scanned more than once for a given image variable. With all subsequent \type
+{img.scan(a)} calls only the dimensions are again set up (if they have been
+changed by the user in the meantime).
+
+For ease of use, you can do right-away a
+
+\starttyping
+<image> a = img.scan { filename = "foo.png" }
+\stoptyping
+
+without a prior \type {img.new}.
+
+Nothing is written yet at this point, so you can do \type {a=img.scan}, retrieve
+the available info like image width and height, and then throw away \type {a}
+again by saying \type {a=nil}. In that case no image object will be reserved in
+the PDF, and the used memory will be cleaned up automatically.
+
+\subsection{\type {copy}}
+
+\libindex{copy}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<image> var = img.copy(<image> var)
+<image> var = img.copy(<table> image_spec)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+If you say \type {a = b}, then both variables point to the same \type {<image>}
+object. if you want to write out an image with different sizes, you can do
+\type {b = img.copy(a)}.
+
+Afterwards, \type {a} and \type {b} still reference the same actual image
+dictionary, but the dimensions for \type {b} can now be changed from their
+initial values that were just copies from \type {a}.
+
+\subsection{\type {write}, \type {immediatewrite}, \type {immediatewriteobject}}
+
+\topicindex {images+injection}
+\topicindex {images+immediate}
+\topicindex {images+object}
+
+\libindex{write}
+\libindex{immediatewrite}
+\libindex{immediatewriteobject}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<image> var = img.write(<image> var)
+<image> var = img.write(<table> image_spec)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+By \type {img.write(a)} a \PDF\ object number is allocated, and a rule node of
+subtype \type {image} is generated and put into the output list. By this the
+image \type {a} is placed into the page stream, and the image file is written out
+into an image stream object after the shipping of the current page is finished.
+
+Again you can do a terse call like
+
+\starttyping
+img.write { filename = "foo.png" }
+\stoptyping
+
+The \type {<image>} variable is returned in case you want it for later
+processing. You can also write an object.
+
+By \type {img.immediatewrite(a)} a \PDF\ object number is allocated, and the
+image file for image \type {a} is written out immediately into the \PDF\ file as
+an image stream object (like with \prm {immediate}\orm {pdfximage}). The object
+number of the image stream dictionary is then available by the \type {objnum}
+key. No \type {pdf_refximage} whatsit node is generated. You will need an
+\type {img.write(a)} or \type {img.node(a)} call to let the image appear on the
+page, or reference it by another trick; else you will have a dangling image
+object in the \PDF\ file.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<image> var = img.immediatewrite(<image> var)
+<image> var = img.immediatewrite(<table> image_spec)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Also here you can do a terse call like
+
+\starttyping
+a = img.immediatewrite { filename = "foo.png" }
+\stoptyping
+
+The \type {<image>} variable is returned and you will most likely need it.
+
+The next function is kind of special as it copies an object from a (\PDF) image
+file. This features is experimental and might disappear.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<integer> objnum = img.immediatewriteobject(<image> var, <integer> objnum)
+<integer> objnum = img.immediatewriteobject(<table> image_spec, <integer> objnum)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {node}}
+
+\libindex{node}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n = img.node(<image> var)
+<node> n = img.node(<table> image_spec)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function allocates a \PDF\ object number and returns a whatsit node of
+subtype \type {pdf_refximage}, filled with the image parameters \type {width},
+\type {height}, \type {depth}, and \type {objnum}. Also here you can do a terse
+call like:
+
+\starttyping
+n = img.node ({ filename = "foo.png" })
+\stoptyping
+
+This example outputs an image:
+
+\starttyping
+node.write(img.node{filename="foo.png"})
+\stoptyping
+
+\subsection{\type {types}}
+
+\topicindex {images+types}
+
+\libindex{types}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> types = img.types()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns a list with the supported image file type names, currently
+these are \type {pdf}, \type {png}, \type {jpg}, \type {jp2} (JPEG~2000), and
+\type {jbig2}.
+
+\subsection{\type {boxes}}
+
+\libindex{boxes}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> boxes = img.boxes()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns a list with the supported \PDF\ page box names, currently
+these are \type {media}, \type {crop}, \type {bleed}, \type {trim}, and \type
+{art}, all in lowercase.
+
+The \PDF\ file is kept open after its properties are determined. After inclusion,
+which happens when the page that references the image is flushed, the file is
+closed. This means that when you have thousands of images on one page, your
+operating system might decide to abort the run. When you include more than one
+page from a \PDF\ file you can set the \type {keepopen} flag when you allocate an
+image object, or pass the \type {keepopen} directive when you refer to the image
+with \lpr {useimageresource}. This only makes sense when you embed many pages.
+An \prm {immediate} applied to \lpr {saveimageresource} will also force a
+close after inclusion.
+
+\starttyping
+\immediate\useimageresource{foo.pdf}%
+ \saveimageresource \lastsavedimageresourceindex % closed
+ \useimageresource{foo.pdf}%
+ \saveimageresource \lastsavedimageresourceindex % kept open
+ \useimageresource{foo.pdf}%
+ \saveimageresource keepopen\lastsavedimageresourceindex % kept open
+
+\directlua{img.write(img.scan{ file = "foo.pdf" })} % closed
+\directlua{img.write(img.scan{ file = "foo.pdf", keepopen = true })} % kept open
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {mplib} library}][library=mplib]
+
+\topicindex {\METAPOST}
+\topicindex {\METAPOST+mplib}
+\topicindex {images+mplib}
+\topicindex {images+\METAPOST}
+
+\libindex{version}
+
+The \MP\ library interface registers itself in the table \type {mplib}. It is
+based on \MPLIB\ version \ctxlua {context(mplib.version())}.
+
+\subsection{\type {new}}
+
+\libindex{new}
+
+To create a new \METAPOST\ instance, call
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<mpinstance> mp = mplib.new({...})
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This creates the \type {mp} instance object. The argument hash can have a number
+of different fields, as follows:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|pl|pl|]
+\DB name \BC type \BC description \BC default \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{error_line} \NC number \NC error line width \NC 79 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{print_line} \NC number \NC line length in ps output \NC 100 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{random_seed} \NC number \NC the initial random seed \NC variable \NC \NR
+\NC \type{math_mode} \NC string \NC the number system to use:
+ \type {scaled},
+ \type {double} or
+ % \type {binary} or
+ \type {decimal} \NC \type {scaled} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{interaction} \NC string \NC the interaction mode:
+ \type {batch},
+ \type {nonstop},
+ \type {scroll} or
+ \type {errorstop} \NC \type {errorstop} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{job_name} \NC string \NC \type {--jobname} \NC \type {mpout} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{find_file} \NC function \NC a function to find files \NC only local files \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The binary mode is no longer available in the \LUATEX\ version of \MPLIB. It
+offers no real advantage and brings a ton of extra libraries with platform
+specific properties that we can now avoid. We might introduce a high resolution
+scaled variant at some point but only when it pays of performance wise.
+
+The \type {find_file} function should be of this form:
+
+\starttyping
+<string> found = finder (<string> name, <string> mode, <string> type)
+\stoptyping
+
+with:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB name \BC the requested file \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{mode} \NC the file mode: \type {r} or \type {w} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{type} \NC the kind of file, one of: \type {mp}, \type {tfm}, \type {map},
+ \type {pfb}, \type {enc} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Return either the full path name of the found file, or \type {nil} if the file
+cannot be found.
+
+Note that the new version of \MPLIB\ no longer uses binary mem files, so the way
+to preload a set of macros is simply to start off with an \type {input} command
+in the first \type {execute} call.
+
+When you are processing a snippet of text starting with \type {btex} and
+ending with either \type {etex} or \type {verbatimtex}, the \METAPOST\
+\type {texscriptmode} parameter controls how spaces and newlines get honoured.
+The default value is~1. Possible values are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB name \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {0} \NC no newlines \NC \NR
+\NC \type {1} \NC newlines in \type {verbatimtex} \NC \NR
+\NC \type {2} \NC newlines in \type {verbatimtex} and \type {etex} \NC \NR
+\NC \type {3} \NC no leading and trailing strip in \type {verbatimtex} \NC \NR
+\NC \type {4} \NC no leading and trailing strip in \type {verbatimtex} and \type {btex} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+That way the \LUA\ handler (assigned to \type {make_text}) can do what it likes.
+An \type {etex} has to be followed by a space or \type {;} or be at the end of a
+line and preceded by a space or at the beginning of a line.
+
+\subsection{\type {statistics}}
+
+\libindex{statistics}
+
+You can request statistics with:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> stats = mp:statistics()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns the vital statistics for an \MPLIB\ instance. There are
+four fields, giving the maximum number of used items in each of four allocated
+object classes:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{main_memory} \NC number \NC memory size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hash_size} \NC number \NC hash size\NC \NR
+\NC \type{param_size} \NC number \NC simultaneous macro parameters\NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_in_open} \NC number \NC input file nesting levels\NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note that in the new version of \MPLIB, this is informational only. The objects
+are all allocated dynamically, so there is no chance of running out of space
+unless the available system memory is exhausted.
+
+\subsection{\type {execute}}
+
+\libindex{execute}
+
+You can ask the \METAPOST\ interpreter to run a chunk of code by calling
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> rettable = execute(mp,"metapost code")
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+for various bits of \METAPOST\ language input. Be sure to check the \type
+{rettable.status} (see below) because when a fatal \METAPOST\ error occurs the
+\MPLIB\ instance will become unusable thereafter.
+
+Generally speaking, it is best to keep your chunks small, but beware that all
+chunks have to obey proper syntax, like each of them is a small file. For
+instance, you cannot split a single statement over multiple chunks.
+
+In contrast with the normal stand alone \type {mpost} command, there is
+\notabene {no} implied \quote{input} at the start of the first chunk.
+
+\subsection{\type {finish}}
+
+\libindex{finish}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> rettable = finish(mp)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+If for some reason you want to stop using an \MPLIB\ instance while processing is
+not yet actually done, you can call \type finish}. Eventually, used memory
+will be freed and open files will be closed by the \LUA\ garbage collector, but
+an explicit \type finish} is the only way to capture the final part of the
+output streams.
+
+\subsection{Result table}
+
+\libindex {fields}
+
+The return value of \type {execute} and \type {finish} is a table with a
+few possible keys (only \type {status} is always guaranteed to be present).
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{log} \NC string \NC output to the \quote {log} stream \NC \NR
+\NC \type{term} \NC string \NC output to the \quote {term} stream \NC \NR
+\NC \type{error} \NC string \NC output to the \quote {error} stream
+ (only used for \quote {out of memory}) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{status} \NC number \NC the return value:
+ \type {0} = good,
+ \type {1} = warning,
+ \type {2} = errors,
+ \type {3} = fatal error \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fig} \NC table \NC an array of generated figures (if any) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+When \type {status} equals~3, you should stop using this \MPLIB\ instance
+immediately, it is no longer capable of processing input.
+
+If it is present, each of the entries in the \type {fig} array is a userdata
+representing a figure object, and each of those has a number of object methods
+you can call:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{boundingbox} \NC function \NC returns the bounding box, as an array of 4
+ values \NC \NR
+\NC \type{postscript} \NC function \NC returns a string that is the ps output of the
+ \type {fig}. this function accepts two optional
+ integer arguments for specifying the values of
+ \type {prologues} (first argument) and \type
+ {procset} (second argument) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{svg} \NC function \NC returns a string that is the svg output of the
+ \type {fig}. This function accepts an optional
+ integer argument for specifying the value of
+ \type {prologues} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{objects} \NC function \NC returns the actual array of graphic objects in
+ this \type {fig} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{copy_objects} \NC function \NC returns a deep copy of the array of graphic
+ objects in this \type {fig} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{filename} \NC function \NC the filename this \type {fig}'s \POSTSCRIPT\
+ output would have written to in stand alone
+ mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC function \NC the \type {fontcharwd} value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC function \NC the \type {fontcharht} value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC function \NC the \type {fontchardp} value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{italcorr} \NC function \NC the \type {fontcharit} value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{charcode} \NC function \NC the (rounded) \type {charcode} value \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note: you can call \type {fig:objects()} only once for any one \type {fig}
+object!
+
+When the boundingbox represents a \quote {negated rectangle}, i.e.\ when the
+first set of coordinates is larger than the second set, the picture is empty.
+
+Graphical objects come in various types that each has a different list of
+accessible values. The types are: \type {fill}, \type {outline}, \type {text},
+\type {start_clip}, \type {stop_clip}, \type {start_bounds}, \type {stop_bounds},
+\type {special}.
+
+There is a helper function (\type {mplib.fields(obj)}) to get the list of
+accessible values for a particular object, but you can just as easily use the
+tables given below.
+
+All graphical objects have a field \type {type} that gives the object type as a
+string value; it is not explicit mentioned in the following tables. In the
+following, \type {number}s are \POSTSCRIPT\ points represented as a floating
+point number, unless stated otherwise. Field values that are of type \type
+{table} are explained in the next section.
+
+\subsubsection{fill}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{path} \NC table \NC the list of knots \NC \NR
+\NC \type{htap} \NC table \NC the list of knots for the reversed trajectory \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pen} \NC table \NC knots of the pen \NC \NR
+\NC \type{color} \NC table \NC the object's color \NC \NR
+\NC \type{linejoin} \NC number \NC line join style (bare number)\NC \NR
+\NC \type{miterlimit} \NC number \NC miterlimit\NC \NR
+\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC the prescript text \NC \NR
+\NC \type{postscript} \NC string \NC the postscript text \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The entries \type {htap} and \type {pen} are optional.
+
+\subsubsection{outline}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{path} \NC table \NC the list of knots \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pen} \NC table \NC knots of the pen \NC \NR
+\NC \type{color} \NC table \NC the object's color \NC \NR
+\NC \type{linejoin} \NC number \NC line join style (bare number) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{miterlimit} \NC number \NC miterlimit \NC \NR
+\NC \type{linecap} \NC number \NC line cap style (bare number) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dash} \NC table \NC representation of a dash list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC the prescript text \NC \NR
+\NC \type{postscript} \NC string \NC the postscript text \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The entry \type {dash} is optional.
+
+\subsubsection{text}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{text} \NC string \NC the text \NC \NR
+\NC \type{font} \NC string \NC font tfm name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dsize} \NC number \NC font size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{color} \NC table \NC the object's color \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{transform} \NC table \NC a text transformation \NC \NR
+\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC the prescript text \NC \NR
+\NC \type{postscript} \NC string \NC the postscript text \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsubsection{special}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{prescript} \NC string \NC special text \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsubsection{start_bounds, start_clip}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{path} \NC table \NC the list of knots \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsubsection{stop_bounds, stop_clip}
+
+Here are no fields available.
+
+\subsection{Subsidiary table formats}
+
+\subsubsection{Paths and pens}
+
+Paths and pens (that are really just a special type of paths as far as \MPLIB\ is
+concerned) are represented by an array where each entry is a table that
+represents a knot.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{left_type} \NC string \NC when present: endpoint, but usually absent \NC \NR
+\NC \type{right_type} \NC string \NC like \type {left_type} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{x_coord} \NC number \NC X coordinate of this knot \NC \NR
+\NC \type{y_coord} \NC number \NC Y coordinate of this knot \NC \NR
+\NC \type{left_x} \NC number \NC X coordinate of the precontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
+\NC \type{left_y} \NC number \NC Y coordinate of the precontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
+\NC \type{right_x} \NC number \NC X coordinate of the postcontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
+\NC \type{right_y} \NC number \NC Y coordinate of the postcontrol point of this knot \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+There is one special case: pens that are (possibly transformed) ellipses have an
+extra string-valued key \type {type} with value \type {elliptical} besides the
+array part containing the knot list.
+
+\subsubsection{Colors}
+
+A color is an integer array with 0, 1, 3 or 4 values:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{0} \NC marking only \NC no values \NC \NR
+\NC \type{1} \NC greyscale \NC one value in the range $(0,1)$, \quote {black} is $0$ \NC \NR
+\NC \type{3} \NC \RGB \NC three values in the range $(0,1)$, \quote {black} is $0,0,0$ \NC \NR
+\NC \type{4} \NC \CMYK \NC four values in the range $(0,1)$, \quote {black} is $0,0,0,1$ \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+If the color model of the internal object was \type {uninitialized}, then it was
+initialized to the values representing \quote {black} in the colorspace \type
+{defaultcolormodel} that was in effect at the time of the \type {shipout}.
+
+\subsubsection{Transforms}
+
+Each transform is a six|-|item array.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB index \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{1} \NC number \NC represents x \NC \NR
+\NC \type{2} \NC number \NC represents y \NC \NR
+\NC \type{3} \NC number \NC represents xx \NC \NR
+\NC \type{4} \NC number \NC represents yx \NC \NR
+\NC \type{5} \NC number \NC represents xy \NC \NR
+\NC \type{6} \NC number \NC represents yy \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note that the translation (index 1 and 2) comes first. This differs from the
+ordering in \POSTSCRIPT, where the translation comes last.
+
+\subsubsection{Dashes}
+
+Each \type {dash} is two-item hash, using the same model as \POSTSCRIPT\ for the
+representation of the dashlist. \type {dashes} is an array of \quote {on} and
+\quote {off}, values, and \type {offset} is the phase of the pattern.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{dashes} \NC hash \NC an array of on-off numbers \NC \NR
+\NC \type{offset} \NC number \NC the starting offset value \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{Pens and \type {pen_info}}
+
+\libindex{pen_info}
+
+There is helper function (\type {pen_info(obj)}) that returns a table containing
+a bunch of vital characteristics of the used pen (all values are floats):
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC width of the pen \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sx} \NC number \NC $x$ scale \NC \NR
+\NC \type{rx} \NC number \NC $xy$ multiplier \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ry} \NC number \NC $yx$ multiplier \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sy} \NC number \NC $y$ scale \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tx} \NC number \NC $x$ offset \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ty} \NC number \NC $y$ offset \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{Character size information}
+
+These functions find the size of a glyph in a defined font. The \type {fontname}
+is the same name as the argument to \type {infont}; the \type {char} is a glyph
+id in the range 0 to 255; the returned \type {w} is in AFM units.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {char_width}}
+
+\libindex{char_width}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> w = char_width(mp,<string> fontname, <number> char)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsubsection{\type {char_height}}
+
+\libindex{char_height}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> w = char_height(mp,<string> fontname, <number> char)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsubsection{\type {char_depth}}
+
+\libindex{char_depth}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> w = char_depth(mp,<string> fontname, <number> char)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsubsection{\type {get_[boolean|numeric|string|path]}}
+
+\libindex{get_boolean}
+\libindex{get_numeric}
+\libindex{get_path}
+\libindex{get_string}
+
+When a script call brings you from the \METAPOST\ run (temporarily) back to
+\LUA\ you can access variables, but only if they are known (so for instance
+anonymous capsules like loop variables are not accessible).
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean> w = get_boolean(mp,<string> name)
+<number> n = get_numeric(mp,<string> name)
+<string> s = get_string (mp,<string> name)
+<table> p = get_path (mp,<string> name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The path is returned a a table with subtables that have six numbers: the
+coordinates of the point, pre- and postcontrol. A \type {cycle} fields indicates
+if a path is cyclic.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-introduction.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-introduction.tex
index c03725357b..93d0215a82 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-introduction.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-introduction.tex
@@ -1,174 +1,174 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-introduction
-
-\startchapter[title=Introduction]
-
-This is the reference manual of \LUATEX. We don't claim it is complete and we
-assume that the reader knows about \TEX\ as described in \quotation {The \TEX\
-Book}, the \quotation {\ETEX\ manual}, the \quotation {\PDFTEX\ manual}, etc.
-Additional reference material is published in journals of user groups and
-\CONTEXT\ related documentation.
-
-It took about a decade to reach stable version 1.0, but for good reason.
-Successive versions brought new functionality, more control, some cleanup of
-internals. Experimental features evolved into stable ones or were dropped.
-Already quite early \LUATEX\ could be used for production and it was used on a
-daily basis by the authors. Successive versions sometimes demanded an adaption to
-the \LUA\ interfacing, but the concepts were unchanged. The current version can
-be considered stable in functionality and there will be no fundamental changes.
-Of course we then can decide to move towards version 2.00 with different
-properties.
-
-Don't expect \LUATEX\ to behave the same as \PDFTEX ! Although the core
-functionality of that 8 bit engine was starting point, it has been combined with
-the directional support of \OMEGA\ (\ALEPH). But, \LUATEX\ can behave different
-due to its wide (32 bit) characters, many registers and large memory support. The
-\PDF\ code produced differs from \PDFTEX\ but users will normally not notice
-that. There is native \UTF\ input, support for large (more than 8 bit) fonts, and
-the math machinery is tuned for \OPENTYPE\ math. There is support for directional
-typesetting too. The log output can differ from other engines and will likely
-differ more as we move forward. When you run plain \TEX\ for sure \LUATEX\ runs
-slower than \PDFTEX\ but when you run for instance \CONTEXT\ \MKIV\ in many cases
-it runs faster, especially when you have a bit more complex documents or input.
-Anyway, 32 bit all||over combined with more features has a price, but on a modern
-machine this is no real problem.
-
-Testing is done with \CONTEXT, but \LUATEX\ should work fine with other macro
-packages too. For that purpose we provide generic font handlers that are mostly
-the same as used in \CONTEXT. Discussing specific implementations is beyond this
-manual. Even when we keep \LUATEX\ lean and mean, we already have enough to
-discuss here.
-
-\LUATEX\ consists of a number of interrelated but (still) distinguishable parts.
-The organization of the source code is adapted so that it can glue all these
-components together. We continue cleaning up side effects of the accumulated
-code in \TEX\ engines (especially code that is not needed any longer).
-
-\startitemize [unpacked]
- \startitem
- We started out with most of \PDFTEX\ version 1.40.9. The code base was
- converted to \CCODE\ and split in modules. Experimental features were
- removed and utility macros are not inherited because their functionality
- can be programmed in \LUA. The number of backend interface commands has
- been reduced to a few. The so called extensions are separated from the
- core (which we try to keep close to the original \TEX\ core). Some
- mechanisms like expansion and protrusion can behave different from the
- original due to some cleanup and optimization. Some whatsit based
- functionality (image support and reusable content) is now core
- functionality. We don't stay in sync with \PDFTEX\ development.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- The direction model from \ALEPH\ RC4 (which is derived from \OMEGA) is
- included. The related primitives are part of core \LUATEX\ but at the
- node level directional support is no longer based on so called whatsits
- but on real nodes with relevant properties. The number of directions is
- limited to the useful set and the backend has been made direction aware.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- Neither \ALEPH's I/O translation processes, nor tcx files, nor \ENCTEX\
- are available. These encoding|-|related functions are superseded by a
- \LUA|-|based solution (reader callbacks). In a similar fashion all file
- \IO\ can be intercepted.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- We currently use \LUA\ 5.3.*. There are few \LUA\ libraries that we
- consider part of the core \LUA\ machinery, for instance \type {lpeg}.
- There are additional \LUA\ libraries that interface to the internals of
- \TEX. We also keep the \LUA\ 5.2 \type {bit32} library around.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- There are various \TEX\ extensions but only those that cannot be done
- using the \LUA\ interfaces. The math machinery often has two code paths:
- one traditional and the other more suitable for wide \OPENTYPE\ fonts. Here
- we follow the \MICROSOFT\ specifications as much as possible. Some math
- functionality has been opened up a bit so that users have more control.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- The fontloader uses parts of \FONTFORGE\ 2008.11.17 combined with
- additional code specific for usage in a \TEX\ engine. We try to minimize
- specific font support to what \TEX\ needs: character references and
- dimensions and delegate everything else to \LUA. That way we keep \TEX\
- open for extensions without touching the core. In order to minimize
- dependencies at some point we may decide to make this an optional
- library.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- The \METAPOST\ library is integral part of \LUATEX. This gives \TEX\ some
- graphical capabilities using a relative high speed graphical subsystem.
- Again \LUA\ is used as glue between the frontend and backend. Further
- development of \METAPOST\ is closely related to \LUATEX.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- The virtual font technology that comes with \TEX\ has been integrated
- into the font machinery in a way that permits creating virtual fonts
- at runtime. Because \LUATEX\ can also act as a \LUA\ interpreter this
- means that a complete \TEX\ workflow can be built without the need for
- additional programs.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- The versions starting from 1.09 no longer use the poppler library for
- inclusion but a lightweight dedicated one. This removes a dependency but
- also makes the inclusion code of \LUATEX\ different from \PDFTEX. In fact
- it was already much different due to the \LUA\ image interfacing.
- \stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-We try to keep upcoming versions compatible but intermediate releases can contain
-experimental features. A general rule is that versions that end up on \TEXLIVE\
-and|/|or are released around \CONTEXT\ meetings are stable. Any version between
-the yearly \TEXLIVE\ releases are to be considered beta and in the repository end
-up as trunk releases. We have an experimental branch that we use for development
-but there is no support for any of its experimental features. Intermediate
-releases (from trunk) are normally available via the \CONTEXT\ distribution
-channels (the garden and so called minimals).
-
-Version 1.10 is more or less an endpoint in development: this is what you get.
-Because not only \CONTEXT, that we can adapt rather easily, uses \LUATEX, we
-cannot change fundamentals without unforeseen consequences. By now it has been
-proven that \LUA\ can be used to extend the core functionality so there is no
-need to add more, and definitely no hard coded solutions for (not so) common
-problems. Of course there will be bug fixes, maybe some optimization, and there
-might even be some additions or non|-|intrusive improvements, but only after
-testing outside the stable release. After all, the binary is already more than
-large enough and there is not that much to gain.
-
-You might find \LUA\ helpers that are not yet documented. These are considered
-experimental, although when you encounter them in a \CONTEXT\ version that has
-been around for a while you can assume that they will stay. Of course it can just
-be that we forgot to document them yet.
-
-A manual like this is not really meant as tutorial, for that we refer to
-documents that ship with \CONTEXT, articles, etc. It is also never complete
-enough for all readers. We try to keep up but the reader needs to realize that
-it's all volunteer work done in spare time. And for sure, complaining about a bad
-manual or crappy documentation will not really motivate us to spend more time on
-it. That being said, we hope that this document is useful.
-
-\blank[big]
-
-\testpage[5]
-
-\startlines
-Hans Hagen
-Harmut Henkel
-Taco Hoekwater
-Luigi Scarso
-\stoplines
-
-\blank[3*big]
-
-\starttabulate[|||]
-\NC Version \EQ \currentdate \NC \NR
-\NC \LUATEX \EQ \cldcontext{LUATEXENGINE} %
- \cldcontext{"\letterpercent 0.2f",LUATEXVERSION} / %
- \cldcontext{LUATEXFUNCTIONALITY}
- \NC \NR
-\NC \CONTEXT \EQ MkIV \contextversion \NC \NR
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-introduction
+
+\startchapter[title=Introduction]
+
+This is the reference manual of \LUATEX. We don't claim it is complete and we
+assume that the reader knows about \TEX\ as described in \quotation {The \TEX\
+Book}, the \quotation {\ETEX\ manual}, the \quotation {\PDFTEX\ manual}, etc.
+Additional reference material is published in journals of user groups and
+\CONTEXT\ related documentation.
+
+It took about a decade to reach stable version 1.0, but for good reason.
+Successive versions brought new functionality, more control, some cleanup of
+internals. Experimental features evolved into stable ones or were dropped.
+Already quite early \LUATEX\ could be used for production and it was used on a
+daily basis by the authors. Successive versions sometimes demanded an adaption to
+the \LUA\ interfacing, but the concepts were unchanged. The current version can
+be considered stable in functionality and there will be no fundamental changes.
+Of course we then can decide to move towards version 2.00 with different
+properties.
+
+Don't expect \LUATEX\ to behave the same as \PDFTEX ! Although the core
+functionality of that 8 bit engine was starting point, it has been combined with
+the directional support of \OMEGA\ (\ALEPH). But, \LUATEX\ can behave different
+due to its wide (32 bit) characters, many registers and large memory support. The
+\PDF\ code produced differs from \PDFTEX\ but users will normally not notice
+that. There is native \UTF\ input, support for large (more than 8 bit) fonts, and
+the math machinery is tuned for \OPENTYPE\ math. There is support for directional
+typesetting too. The log output can differ from other engines and will likely
+differ more as we move forward. When you run plain \TEX\ for sure \LUATEX\ runs
+slower than \PDFTEX\ but when you run for instance \CONTEXT\ \MKIV\ in many cases
+it runs faster, especially when you have a bit more complex documents or input.
+Anyway, 32 bit all||over combined with more features has a price, but on a modern
+machine this is no real problem.
+
+Testing is done with \CONTEXT, but \LUATEX\ should work fine with other macro
+packages too. For that purpose we provide generic font handlers that are mostly
+the same as used in \CONTEXT. Discussing specific implementations is beyond this
+manual. Even when we keep \LUATEX\ lean and mean, we already have enough to
+discuss here.
+
+\LUATEX\ consists of a number of interrelated but (still) distinguishable parts.
+The organization of the source code is adapted so that it can glue all these
+components together. We continue cleaning up side effects of the accumulated
+code in \TEX\ engines (especially code that is not needed any longer).
+
+\startitemize [unpacked]
+ \startitem
+ We started out with most of \PDFTEX\ version 1.40.9. The code base was
+ converted to \CCODE\ and split in modules. Experimental features were
+ removed and utility macros are not inherited because their functionality
+ can be programmed in \LUA. The number of backend interface commands has
+ been reduced to a few. The so called extensions are separated from the
+ core (which we try to keep close to the original \TEX\ core). Some
+ mechanisms like expansion and protrusion can behave different from the
+ original due to some cleanup and optimization. Some whatsit based
+ functionality (image support and reusable content) is now core
+ functionality. We don't stay in sync with \PDFTEX\ development.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ The direction model from \ALEPH\ RC4 (which is derived from \OMEGA) is
+ included. The related primitives are part of core \LUATEX\ but at the
+ node level directional support is no longer based on so called whatsits
+ but on real nodes with relevant properties. The number of directions is
+ limited to the useful set and the backend has been made direction aware.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ Neither \ALEPH's I/O translation processes, nor tcx files, nor \ENCTEX\
+ are available. These encoding|-|related functions are superseded by a
+ \LUA|-|based solution (reader callbacks). In a similar fashion all file
+ \IO\ can be intercepted.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ We currently use \LUA\ 5.3.*. There are few \LUA\ libraries that we
+ consider part of the core \LUA\ machinery, for instance \type {lpeg}.
+ There are additional \LUA\ libraries that interface to the internals of
+ \TEX. We also keep the \LUA\ 5.2 \type {bit32} library around.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ There are various \TEX\ extensions but only those that cannot be done
+ using the \LUA\ interfaces. The math machinery often has two code paths:
+ one traditional and the other more suitable for wide \OPENTYPE\ fonts. Here
+ we follow the \MICROSOFT\ specifications as much as possible. Some math
+ functionality has been opened up a bit so that users have more control.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ The fontloader uses parts of \FONTFORGE\ 2008.11.17 combined with
+ additional code specific for usage in a \TEX\ engine. We try to minimize
+ specific font support to what \TEX\ needs: character references and
+ dimensions and delegate everything else to \LUA. That way we keep \TEX\
+ open for extensions without touching the core. In order to minimize
+ dependencies at some point we may decide to make this an optional
+ library.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ The \METAPOST\ library is integral part of \LUATEX. This gives \TEX\ some
+ graphical capabilities using a relative high speed graphical subsystem.
+ Again \LUA\ is used as glue between the frontend and backend. Further
+ development of \METAPOST\ is closely related to \LUATEX.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ The virtual font technology that comes with \TEX\ has been integrated
+ into the font machinery in a way that permits creating virtual fonts
+ at runtime. Because \LUATEX\ can also act as a \LUA\ interpreter this
+ means that a complete \TEX\ workflow can be built without the need for
+ additional programs.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ The versions starting from 1.09 no longer use the poppler library for
+ inclusion but a lightweight dedicated one. This removes a dependency but
+ also makes the inclusion code of \LUATEX\ different from \PDFTEX. In fact
+ it was already much different due to the \LUA\ image interfacing.
+ \stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+We try to keep upcoming versions compatible but intermediate releases can contain
+experimental features. A general rule is that versions that end up on \TEXLIVE\
+and|/|or are released around \CONTEXT\ meetings are stable. Any version between
+the yearly \TEXLIVE\ releases are to be considered beta and in the repository end
+up as trunk releases. We have an experimental branch that we use for development
+but there is no support for any of its experimental features. Intermediate
+releases (from trunk) are normally available via the \CONTEXT\ distribution
+channels (the garden and so called minimals).
+
+Version 1.10 is more or less an endpoint in development: this is what you get.
+Because not only \CONTEXT, that we can adapt rather easily, uses \LUATEX, we
+cannot change fundamentals without unforeseen consequences. By now it has been
+proven that \LUA\ can be used to extend the core functionality so there is no
+need to add more, and definitely no hard coded solutions for (not so) common
+problems. Of course there will be bug fixes, maybe some optimization, and there
+might even be some additions or non|-|intrusive improvements, but only after
+testing outside the stable release. After all, the binary is already more than
+large enough and there is not that much to gain.
+
+You might find \LUA\ helpers that are not yet documented. These are considered
+experimental, although when you encounter them in a \CONTEXT\ version that has
+been around for a while you can assume that they will stay. Of course it can just
+be that we forgot to document them yet.
+
+A manual like this is not really meant as tutorial, for that we refer to
+documents that ship with \CONTEXT, articles, etc. It is also never complete
+enough for all readers. We try to keep up but the reader needs to realize that
+it's all volunteer work done in spare time. And for sure, complaining about a bad
+manual or crappy documentation will not really motivate us to spend more time on
+it. That being said, we hope that this document is useful.
+
+\blank[big]
+
+\testpage[5]
+
+\startlines
+Hans Hagen
+Harmut Henkel
+Taco Hoekwater
+Luigi Scarso
+\stoplines
+
+\blank[3*big]
+
+\starttabulate[|||]
+\NC Version \EQ \currentdate \NC \NR
+\NC \LUATEX \EQ \cldcontext{LUATEXENGINE} %
+ \cldcontext{"\letterpercent 0.2f",LUATEXVERSION} / %
+ \cldcontext{LUATEXFUNCTIONALITY}
+ \NC \NR
+\NC \CONTEXT \EQ MkIV \contextversion \NC \NR
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-languages.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-languages.tex
index 98960aa65d..d4a7bda607 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-languages.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-languages.tex
@@ -1,1113 +1,1113 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-languages
-
-\startchapter[reference=languages,title={Languages, characters, fonts and glyphs}]
-
-\startsection[title={Introduction}]
-
-\topicindex {languages}
-
-\LUATEX's internal handling of the characters and glyphs that eventually become
-typeset is quite different from the way \TEX82 handles those same objects. The
-easiest way to explain the difference is to focus on unrestricted horizontal mode
-(i.e.\ paragraphs) and hyphenation first. Later on, it will be easy to deal
-with the differences that occur in horizontal and math modes.
-
-In \TEX82, the characters you type are converted into \type {char} node records
-when they are encountered by the main control loop. \TEX\ attaches and processes
-the font information while creating those records, so that the resulting \quote
-{horizontal list} contains the final forms of ligatures and implicit kerning.
-This packaging is needed because we may want to get the effective width of for
-instance a horizontal box.
-
-When it becomes necessary to hyphenate words in a paragraph, \TEX\ converts (one
-word at time) the \type {char} node records into a string by replacing ligatures
-with their components and ignoring the kerning. Then it runs the hyphenation
-algorithm on this string, and converts the hyphenated result back into a \quote
-{horizontal list} that is consecutively spliced back into the paragraph stream.
-Keep in mind that the paragraph may contain unboxed horizontal material, which
-then already contains ligatures and kerns and the words therein are part of the
-hyphenation process.
-
-Those \type {char} node records are somewhat misnamed, as they are glyph
-positions in specific fonts, and therefore not really \quote {characters} in the
-linguistic sense. There is no language information inside the \type {char} node
-records at all. Instead, language information is passed along using \type
-{language whatsit} nodes inside the horizontal list.
-
-In \LUATEX, the situation is quite different. The characters you type are always
-converted into \nod {glyph} node records with a special subtype to identify them
-as being intended as linguistic characters. \LUATEX\ stores the needed language
-information in those records, but does not do any font|-|related processing at
-the time of node creation. It only stores the index of the current font and a
-reference to a character in that font.
-
-When it becomes necessary to typeset a paragraph, \LUATEX\ first inserts all
-hyphenation points right into the whole node list. Next, it processes all the
-font information in the whole list (creating ligatures and adjusting kerning),
-and finally it adjusts all the subtype identifiers so that the records are \quote
-{glyph nodes} from now on.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Characters, glyphs and discretionaries},reference=charsandglyphs]
-
-\topicindex {characters}
-\topicindex {glyphs}
-\topicindex {hyphenation}
-
-\TEX82 (including \PDFTEX) differentiates between \type {char} nodes and \type
-{lig} nodes. The former are simple items that contained nothing but a \quote
-{character} and a \quote {font} field, and they lived in the same memory as
-tokens did. The latter also contained a list of components, and a subtype
-indicating whether this ligature was the result of a word boundary, and it was
-stored in the same place as other nodes like boxes and kerns and glues.
-
-In \LUATEX, these two types are merged into one, somewhat larger structure called
-a \nod {glyph} node. Besides having the old character, font, and component
-fields there are a few more, like \quote {attr} that we will see in \in {section}
-[glyphnodes], these nodes also contain a subtype, that codes four main types and
-two additional ghost types. For ligatures, multiple bits can be set at the same
-time (in case of a single|-|glyph word).
-
-\startitemize
- \startitem
- \type {character}, for characters to be hyphenated: the lowest bit
- (bit 0) is set to 1.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- \nod {glyph}, for specific font glyphs: the lowest bit (bit 0) is
- not set.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- \type {ligature}, for constructed ligatures bit 1 is set.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- \type {ghost}, for so called \quote {ghost objects} bit 2 is set.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- \type {left}, for ligatures created from a left word boundary and for
- ghosts created from \lpr {leftghost} bit 3 gets set.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- \type {right}, for ligatures created from a right word boundary and
- for ghosts created from \lpr {rightghost} bit 4 is set.
- \stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The \nod {glyph} nodes also contain language data, split into four items that
-were current when the node was created: the \prm {setlanguage} (15~bits), \prm
-{lefthyphenmin} (8~bits), \prm {righthyphenmin} (8~bits), and \prm {uchyph}
-(1~bit).
-
-Incidentally, \LUATEX\ allows 16383 separate languages, and words can be 256
-characters long. The language is stored with each character. You can set
-\prm {firstvalidlanguage} to for instance~1 and make thereby language~0
-an ignored hyphenation language.
-
-The new primitive \lpr {hyphenationmin} can be used to signal the minimal length
-of a word. This value is stored with the (current) language.
-
-Because the \prm {uchyph} value is saved in the actual nodes, its handling is
-subtly different from \TEX82: changes to \prm {uchyph} become effective
-immediately, not at the end of the current partial paragraph.
-
-Typeset boxes now always have their language information embedded in the nodes
-themselves, so there is no longer a possible dependency on the surrounding
-language settings. In \TEX82, a mid|-|paragraph statement like \type {\unhbox0}
-would process the box using the current paragraph language unless there was a
-\prm {setlanguage} issued inside the box. In \LUATEX, all language variables
-are already frozen.
-
-In traditional \TEX\ the process of hyphenation is driven by \type {lccode}s. In
-\LUATEX\ we made this dependency less strong. There are several strategies
-possible. When you do nothing, the currently used \type {lccode}s are used, when
-loading patterns, setting exceptions or hyphenating a list.
-
-When you set \prm {savinghyphcodes} to a value greater than zero the current set
-of \type {lccode}s will be saved with the language. In that case changing a \type
-{lccode} afterwards has no effect. However, you can adapt the set with:
-
-\starttyping
-\hjcode`a=`a
-\stoptyping
-
-This change is global which makes sense if you keep in mind that the moment that
-hyphenation happens is (normally) when the paragraph or a horizontal box is
-constructed. When \prm {savinghyphcodes} was zero when the language got
-initialized you start out with nothing, otherwise you already have a set.
-
-When a \lpr {hjcode} is greater than 0 but less than 32 is indicates the
-to be used length. In the following example we map a character (\type {x}) onto
-another one in the patterns and tell the engine that \type {Å“} counts as one
-character. Because traditionally zero itself is reserved for inhibiting
-hyphenation, a value of 32 counts as zero.
-
-Here are some examples (we assume that French patterns are used):
-
-\starttabulate[||||]
-\NC \NC \type{foobar} \NC \type{foo-bar} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{\hjcode`x=`o} \NC \type{fxxbar} \NC \type{fxx-bar} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{\lefthyphenmin3} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“di-pus} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{\lefthyphenmin4} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{\hjcode`Å“=2} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“di-pus} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{\hjcode`i=32 \hjcode`d=32} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \NR
-\NC
-\stoptabulate
-
-Carrying all this information with each glyph would give too much overhead and
-also make the process of setting up these codes more complex. A solution with
-\type {hjcode} sets was considered but rejected because in practice the current
-approach is sufficient and it would not be compatible anyway.
-
-Beware: the values are always saved in the format, independent of the setting
-of \prm {savinghyphcodes} at the moment the format is dumped.
-
-A boundary node normally would mark the end of a word which interferes with for
-instance discretionary injection. For this you can use the \prm {wordboundary}
-as a trigger. Here are a few examples of usage:
-
-\startbuffer
- discrete---discrete
-\stopbuffer
-\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
-\startbuffer
- discrete\discretionary{}{}{---}discrete
-\stopbuffer
-\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
-\startbuffer
- discrete\wordboundary\discretionary{}{}{---}discrete
-\stopbuffer
-\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
-\startbuffer
- discrete\wordboundary\discretionary{}{}{---}\wordboundary discrete
-\stopbuffer
-\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
-\startbuffer
- discrete\wordboundary\discretionary{---}{}{}\wordboundary discrete
-\stopbuffer
-\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
-
-We only accept an explicit hyphen when there is a preceding glyph and we skip a
-sequence of explicit hyphens since that normally indicates a \type {--} or \type
-{---} ligature in which case we can in a worse case usage get bad node lists
-later on due to messed up ligature building as these dashes are ligatures in base
-fonts. This is a side effect of separating the hyphenation, ligaturing and
-kerning steps.
-
-The start and end of a sequence of characters is signalled by a \nod {glue}, \nod
-{penalty}, \nod {kern} or \nod {boundary} node. But by default also a \nod
-{hlist}, \nod {vlist}, \nod {rule}, \nod {dir}, \nod {whatsit}, \nod {ins}, and
-\nod {adjust} node indicate a start or end. You can omit the last set from the
-test by setting \lpr {hyphenationbounds} to a non|-|zero value:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB value \BC behaviour \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{0} \NC not strict \NC \NR
-\NC \type{1} \NC strict start \NC \NR
-\NC \type{2} \NC strict end \NC \NR
-\NC \type{3} \NC strict start and strict end \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The word start is determined as follows:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB node \BC behaviour \NC \NR
-\TB
-\BC boundary \NC yes when wordboundary \NC \NR
-\BC hlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC vlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC rule \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC dir \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC whatsit \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC glue \NC yes \NC \NR
-\BC math \NC skipped \NC \NR
-\BC glyph \NC exhyphenchar (one only) : yes (so no -- ---) \NC \NR
-\BC otherwise \NC yes \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The word end is determined as follows:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB node \BC behaviour \NC \NR
-\TB
-\BC boundary \NC yes \NC \NR
-\BC glyph \NC yes when different language \NC \NR
-\BC glue \NC yes \NC \NR
-\BC penalty \NC yes \NC \NR
-\BC kern \NC yes when not italic (for some historic reason) \NC \NR
-\BC hlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC vlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC rule \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC dir \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC whatsit \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC ins \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
-\BC adjust \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\in {Figures} [hb:1] upto \in [hb:5] show some examples. In all cases we set the
-min values to 1 and make sure that the words hyphenate at each character.
-
-\hyphenation{o-n-e t-w-o}
-
-\def\SomeTest#1#2%
- {\lefthyphenmin \plusone
- \righthyphenmin \plusone
- \parindent \zeropoint
- \everypar \emptytoks
- \dontcomplain
- \hbox to 2cm {%
- \vtop {%
- \hsize 1pt
- \hyphenationbounds#1
- #2
- \par}}}
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=hb:1,title={\type{one}}]
- \startcombination[4*1]
- {\SomeTest{0}{one}} {\type{0}}
- {\SomeTest{1}{one}} {\type{1}}
- {\SomeTest{2}{one}} {\type{2}}
- {\SomeTest{3}{one}} {\type{3}}
- \stopcombination
-\stopplacefigure
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=hb:2,title={\type{one\null two}}]
- \startcombination[4*1]
- {\SomeTest{0}{one\null two}} {\type{0}}
- {\SomeTest{1}{one\null two}} {\type{1}}
- {\SomeTest{2}{one\null two}} {\type{2}}
- {\SomeTest{3}{one\null two}} {\type{3}}
- \stopcombination
-\stopplacefigure
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=hb:3,title={\type{\null one\null two}}]
- \startcombination[4*1]
- {\SomeTest{0}{\null one\null two}} {\type{0}}
- {\SomeTest{1}{\null one\null two}} {\type{1}}
- {\SomeTest{2}{\null one\null two}} {\type{2}}
- {\SomeTest{3}{\null one\null two}} {\type{3}}
- \stopcombination
-\stopplacefigure
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=hb:4,title={\type{one\null two\null}}]
- \startcombination[4*1]
- {\SomeTest{0}{one\null two\null}} {\type{0}}
- {\SomeTest{1}{one\null two\null}} {\type{1}}
- {\SomeTest{2}{one\null two\null}} {\type{2}}
- {\SomeTest{3}{one\null two\null}} {\type{3}}
- \stopcombination
-\stopplacefigure
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=hb:5,title={\type{\null one\null two\null}}]
- \startcombination[4*1]
- {\SomeTest{0}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{0}}
- {\SomeTest{1}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{1}}
- {\SomeTest{2}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{2}}
- {\SomeTest{3}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{3}}
- \stopcombination
-\stopplacefigure
-
-% (Future versions of \LUATEX\ might provide more granularity.)
-
-In traditional \TEX\ ligature building and hyphenation are interwoven with the
-line break mechanism. In \LUATEX\ these phases are isolated. As a consequence we
-deal differently with (a sequence of) explicit hyphens. We already have added
-some control over aspects of the hyphenation and yet another one concerns
-automatic hyphens (e.g.\ \type {-} characters in the input).
-
-When \lpr {automatichyphenmode} has a value of 0, a hyphen will be turned into
-an automatic discretionary. The snippets before and after it will not be
-hyphenated. A side effect is that a leading hyphen can lead to a split but one
-will seldom run into that situation. Setting a pre and post character makes this
-more prominent. A value of 1 will prevent this side effect and a value of 2 will
-not turn the hyphen into a discretionary. Experiments with other options, like
-permitting hyphenation of the words on both sides were discarded.
-
-\startbuffer[a]
-before-after \par
-before--after \par
-before---after \par
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startbuffer[b]
--before \par
-after- \par
---before \par
-after-- \par
----before \par
-after--- \par
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startbuffer[c]
-before-after \par
-before--after \par
-before---after \par
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startbuffer[demo]
-\startcombination[nx=4,ny=3,location=top]
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize6em \getbuffer[a]}} {A~0~6em}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize2pt \getbuffer[a]}} {A~0~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plusone \hsize2pt \getbuffer[a]}} {A~1~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plustwo \hsize2pt \getbuffer[a]}} {A~2~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize6em \getbuffer[b]}} {B~0~6em}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize2pt \getbuffer[b]}} {B~0~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plusone \hsize2pt \getbuffer[b]}} {B~1~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plustwo \hsize2pt \getbuffer[b]}} {B~2~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize6em \getbuffer[c]}} {C~0~6em}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize2pt \getbuffer[c]}} {C~0~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plusone \hsize2pt \getbuffer[c]}} {C~1~2pt}
- {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plustwo \hsize2pt \getbuffer[c]}} {C~2~2pt}
-\stopcombination
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startplacefigure[locationreference=automatichyphenmode:1,title={The automatic modes \type {0} (default), \type {1} and \type {2}, with a \prm {hsize}
-of 6em and 2pt (which triggers a linebreak).}]
- \dontcomplain \tt \getbuffer[demo]
-\stopplacefigure
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=automatichyphenmode:2,title={The automatic modes \type {0} (default), \type {1} and \type {2}, with \lpr {preexhyphenchar} and \lpr {postexhyphenchar} set to characters \type {A} and \type {B}.}]
- \postexhyphenchar`A\relax
- \preexhyphenchar `B\relax
- \dontcomplain \tt \getbuffer[demo]
-\stopplacefigure
-
-In \in {figure} [automatichyphenmode:1] \in {and} [automatichyphenmode:2] we show
-what happens with three samples:
-
-Input A: \typebuffer[a]
-Input B: \typebuffer[b]
-Input C: \typebuffer[c]
-
-As with primitive companions of other single character commands, the \prm {-}
-command has a more verbose primitive version in \lpr {explicitdiscretionary}
-and the normally intercepted in the hyphenator character \type {-} (or whatever
-is configured) is available as \lpr {automaticdiscretionary}.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The main control loop}]
-
-\topicindex {main loop}
-\topicindex {hyphenation}
-
-In \LUATEX's main loop, almost all input characters that are to be typeset are
-converted into \nod {glyph} node records with subtype \quote {character}, but
-there are a few exceptions.
-
-\startitemize[n]
-
-\startitem
- The \prm {accent} primitive creates nodes with subtype \quote {glyph}
- instead of \quote {character}: one for the actual accent and one for the
- accentee. The primary reason for this is that \prm {accent} in \TEX82 is
- explicitly dependent on the current font encoding, so it would not make much
- sense to attach a new meaning to the primitive's name, as that would
- invalidate many old documents and macro packages. A secondary reason is that
- in \TEX82, \prm {accent} prohibits hyphenation of the current word. Since
- in \LUATEX\ hyphenation only takes place on \quote {character} nodes, it is
- possible to achieve the same effect. Of course, modern \UNICODE\ aware macro
- packages will not use the \prm {accent} primitive at all but try to map
- directly on composed characters.
-
- This change of meaning did happen with \prm {char}, that now generates
- \quote {glyph} nodes with a character subtype. In traditional \TEX\ there was
- a strong relationship between the 8|-|bit input encoding, hyphenation and
- glyphs taken from a font. In \LUATEX\ we have \UTF\ input, and in most cases
- this maps directly to a character in a font, apart from glyph replacement in
- the font engine. If you want to access arbitrary glyphs in a font directly
- you can always use \LUA\ to do so, because fonts are available as \LUA\
- table.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- All the results of processing in math mode eventually become nodes with
- \quote {glyph} subtypes. In fact, the result of processing math is just
- a regular list of glyphs, kerns, glue, penalties, boxes etc.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \ALEPH|-|derived commands \lpr {leftghost} and \lpr {rightghost}
- create nodes of a third subtype: \quote {ghost}. These nodes are ignored
- completely by all further processing until the stage where inter|-|glyph
- kerning is added.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Automatic discretionaries are handled differently. \TEX82 inserts an empty
- discretionary after sensing an input character that matches the \prm
- {hyphenchar} in the current font. This test is wrong in our opinion: whether
- or not hyphenation takes place should not depend on the current font, it is a
- language property. \footnote {When \TEX\ showed up we didn't have \UNICODE\
- yet and being limited to eight bits meant that one sometimes had to
- compromise between supporting character input, glyph rendering, hyphenation.}
-
- In \LUATEX, it works like this: if \LUATEX\ senses a string of input
- characters that matches the value of the new integer parameter \prm
- {exhyphenchar}, it will insert an explicit discretionary after that series of
- nodes. Initially \TEX\ sets the \type {\exhyphenchar=`\-}. Incidentally, this
- is a global parameter instead of a language-specific one because it may be
- useful to change the value depending on the document structure instead of the
- text language.
-
- The insertion of discretionaries after a sequence of explicit hyphens happens
- at the same time as the other hyphenation processing, {\it not\/} inside the
- main control loop.
-
- The only use \LUATEX\ has for \prm {hyphenchar} is at the check whether a
- word should be considered for hyphenation at all. If the \prm {hyphenchar}
- of the font attached to the first character node in a word is negative, then
- hyphenation of that word is abandoned immediately. This behaviour is added
- for backward compatibility only, and the use of \type {\hyphenchar=-1} as a
- means of preventing hyphenation should not be used in new \LUATEX\ documents.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \prm {setlanguage} command no longer creates whatsits. The meaning of
- \prm {setlanguage} is changed so that it is now an integer parameter like all
- others. That integer parameter is used in \type {\glyph_node} creation to add
- language information to the glyph nodes. In conjunction, the \prm {language}
- primitive is extended so that it always also updates the value of \prm
- {setlanguage}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \prm {noboundary} command (that prohibits word boundary processing
- where that would normally take place) now does create nodes. These nodes are
- needed because the exact place of the \prm {noboundary} command in the
- input stream has to be retained until after the ligature and font processing
- stages.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- There is no longer a \type {main_loop} label in the code. Remember that
- \TEX82 did quite a lot of processing while adding \type {char_nodes} to the
- horizontal list? For speed reasons, it handled that processing code outside
- of the \quote {main control} loop, and only the first character of any \quote
- {word} was handled by that \quote {main control} loop. In \LUATEX, there is
- no longer a need for that (all hard work is done later), and the (now very
- small) bits of character|-|handling code have been moved back inline. When
- \prm {tracingcommands} is on, this is visible because the full word is
- reported, instead of just the initial character.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-Because we tend to make hard coded behaviour configurable a few new primitives
-have been added:
-
-\starttyping
-\hyphenpenaltymode
-\automatichyphenpenalty
-\explicithyphenpenalty
-\stoptyping
-
-The first parameter has the following consequences for automatic discs (the ones
-resulting from an \prm {exhyphenchar}:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|l|]
-\DB mode \BC automatic disc \type {-} \BC explicit disc \prm{-} \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{0} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{1} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{2} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{3} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{4} \NC \lpr {automatichyphenpenalty} \NC \lpr {explicithyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{5} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \lpr {explicithyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{6} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \lpr {explicithyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{7} \NC \lpr {automatichyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{8} \NC \lpr {automatichyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-other values do what we always did in \LUATEX: insert \prm {exhyphenpenalty}.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Loading patterns and exceptions},reference=patternsexceptions]
-
-\topicindex {hyphenation}
-\topicindex {hyphenation+patterns}
-\topicindex {hyphenation+exceptions}
-\topicindex {patterns}
-\topicindex {exceptions}
-
-Although we keep the traditional approach towards hyphenation (which is still
-superior) the implementation of the hyphenation algorithm in \LUATEX\ is quite
-different from the one in \TEX82.
-
-After expansion, the argument for \prm {patterns} has to be proper \UTF8 with
-individual patterns separated by spaces, no \prm {char} or \prm {chardef}d
-commands are allowed. The current implementation is quite strict and will reject
-all non|-|\UNICODE\ characters. Likewise, the expanded argument for \prm
-{hyphenation} also has to be proper \UTF8, but here a bit of extra syntax is
-provided:
-
-\startitemize[n]
-\startitem
- Three sets of arguments in curly braces (\type {{}{}{}}) indicate a desired
- complex discretionary, with arguments as in \prm {discretionary}'s command in
- normal document input.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- A \type {-} indicates a desired simple discretionary, cf.\ \type {\-} and
- \type {\discretionary{-}{}{}} in normal document input.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Internal command names are ignored. This rule is provided especially for \prm
- {discretionary}, but it also helps to deal with \prm {relax} commands that
- may sneak in.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- An \type {=} indicates a (non|-|discretionary) hyphen in the document input.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The expanded argument is first converted back to a space|-|separated string while
-dropping the internal command names. This string is then converted into a
-dictionary by a routine that creates key|-|value pairs by converting the other
-listed items. It is important to note that the keys in an exception dictionary
-can always be generated from the values. Here are a few examples:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|l|]
-\DB value \BC implied key (input) \BC effect \NC\NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {ta-ble} \NC table \NC \type {ta\-ble} ($=$ \type {ta\discretionary{-}{}{}ble}) \NC\NR
-\NC \type {ba{k-}{}{c}ken} \NC backen \NC \type {ba\discretionary{k-}{}{c}ken} \NC\NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The resultant patterns and exception dictionary will be stored under the language
-code that is the present value of \prm {language}.
-
-In the last line of the table, you see there is no \prm {discretionary} command
-in the value: the command is optional in the \TEX-based input syntax. The
-underlying reason for that is that it is conceivable that a whole dictionary of
-words is stored as a plain text file and loaded into \LUATEX\ using one of the
-functions in the \LUA\ \type {lang} library. This loading method is quite a bit
-faster than going through the \TEX\ language primitives, but some (most?) of that
-speed gain would be lost if it had to interpret command sequences while doing so.
-
-It is possible to specify extra hyphenation points in compound words by using
-\type {{-}{}{-}} for the explicit hyphen character (replace \type {-} by the
-actual explicit hyphen character if needed). For example, this matches the word
-\quote {multi|-|word|-|boundaries} and allows an extra break inbetween \quote
-{boun} and \quote {daries}:
-
-\starttyping
-\hyphenation{multi{-}{}{-}word{-}{}{-}boun-daries}
-\stoptyping
-
-The motivation behind the \ETEX\ extension \prm {savinghyphcodes} was that
-hyphenation heavily depended on font encodings. This is no longer true in
-\LUATEX, and the corresponding primitive is basically ignored. Because we now
-have \lpr {hjcode}, the case relate codes can be used exclusively for \prm
-{uppercase} and \prm {lowercase}.
-
-The three curly brace pair pattern in an exception can be somewhat unexpected so
-we will try to explain it by example. The pattern \type {foo{}{}{x}bar} pattern
-creates a lookup \type {fooxbar} and the pattern \type {foo{}{}{}bar} creates
-\type {foobar}. Then, when a hit happens there is a replacement text (\type {x})
-or none. Because we introduced penalties in discretionary nodes, the exception
-syntax now also can take a penalty specification. The value between square brackets
-is a multiplier for \lpr {exceptionpenalty}. Here we have set it to 10000 so
-effectively we get 30000 in the example.
-
-\def\ShowSample#1#2%
- {\startlinecorrection[blank]
- \hyphenation{#1}%
- \exceptionpenalty=10000
- \bTABLE[foregroundstyle=type]
- \bTR
- \bTD[align=middle,nx=4] \type{#1} \eTD
- \eTR
- \bTR
- \bTD[align=middle] \type{10em} \eTD
- \bTD[align=middle] \type {3em} \eTD
- \bTD[align=middle] \type {0em} \eTD
- \bTD[align=middle] \type {6em} \eTD
- \eTR
- \bTR
- \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\hsize 10em 123 #2 123\par}\eTD
- \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\hsize 3em 123 #2 123\par}\eTD
- \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\hsize 0em 123 #2 123\par}\eTD
- \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\setupalign[verytolerant,stretch]\rmtf\hsize 6em 123 #2 #2 #2 #2 123\par}\eTD
- \eTR
- \eTABLE
- \stoplinecorrection}
-
-\ShowSample{x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}xx}{xxxxxx}
-\ShowSample{x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}[3]x{a-}{-b}{}[1]x{a-}{-b}{}xx}{xxxxxx}
-
-\ShowSample{z{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}z}{zzzzzz}
-\ShowSample{z{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}[3]{a-}{-b}{z}[1]{a-}{-b}{z}z}{zzzzzz}
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Applying hyphenation}]
-
-\topicindex {hyphenation+how it works}
-\topicindex {hyphenation+discretionaries}
-\topicindex {discretionaries}
-
-The internal structures \LUATEX\ uses for the insertion of discretionaries in
-words is very different from the ones in \TEX82, and that means there are some
-noticeable differences in handling as well.
-
-First and foremost, there is no \quote {compressed trie} involved in hyphenation.
-The algorithm still reads pattern files generated by \PATGEN, but \LUATEX\ uses a
-finite state hash to match the patterns against the word to be hyphenated. This
-algorithm is based on the \quote {libhnj} library used by \OPENOFFICE, which in
-turn is inspired by \TEX.
-
-There are a few differences between \LUATEX\ and \TEX82 that are a direct result
-of the implementation:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- \LUATEX\ happily hyphenates the full \UNICODE\ character range.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Pattern and exception dictionary size is limited by the available memory
- only, all allocations are done dynamically. The trie|-|related settings in
- \type {texmf.cnf} are ignored.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Because there is no \quote {trie preparation} stage, language patterns never
- become frozen. This means that the primitive \prm {patterns} (and its \LUA\
- counterpart \type {lang.patterns}) can be used at any time, not only in
- ini\TEX.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Only the string representation of \prm {patterns} and \prm {hyphenation} is
- stored in the format file. At format load time, they are simply
- re|-|evaluated. It follows that there is no real reason to preload languages
- in the format file. In fact, it is usually not a good idea to do so. It is
- much smarter to load patterns no sooner than the first time they are actually
- needed.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \LUATEX\ uses the language-specific variables \lpr {prehyphenchar} and \lpr
- {posthyphenchar} in the creation of implicit discretionaries, instead of
- \TEX82's \prm {hyphenchar}, and the values of the language|-|specific
- variables \lpr {preexhyphenchar} and \lpr {postexhyphenchar} for explicit
- discretionaries (instead of \TEX82's empty discretionary).
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The value of the two counters related to hyphenation, \prm {hyphenpenalty}
- and \prm {exhyphenpenalty}, are now stored in the discretionary nodes. This
- permits a local overload for explicit \prm {discretionary} commands. The
- value current when the hyphenation pass is applied is used. When no callbacks
- are used this is compatible with traditional \TEX. When you apply the \LUA\
- \type {lang.hyphenate} function the current values are used.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The hyphenation exception dictionary is maintained as key|-|value hash, and
- that is also dynamic, so the \type {hyph_size} setting is not used either.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-Because we store penalties in the disc node the \prm {discretionary} command has
-been extended to accept an optional penalty specification, so you can do the
-following:
-
-\startbuffer
-\hsize1mm
-1:foo{\hyphenpenalty 10000\discretionary{}{}{}}bar\par
-2:foo\discretionary penalty 10000 {}{}{}bar\par
-3:foo\discretionary{}{}{}bar\par
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-This results in:
-
-\blank \start \getbuffer \stop \blank
-
-Inserted characters and ligatures inherit their attributes from the nearest glyph
-node item (usually the preceding one, but the following one for the items
-inserted at the left-hand side of a word).
-
-Word boundaries are no longer implied by font switches, but by language switches.
-One word can have two separate fonts and still be hyphenated correctly (but it
-can not have two different languages, the \prm {setlanguage} command forces a
-word boundary).
-
-All languages start out with \type {\prehyphenchar=`\-}, \type {\posthyphenchar=0},
-\type {\preexhyphenchar=0} and \type {\postexhyphenchar=0}. When you assign the
-values of one of these four parameters, you are actually changing the settings
-for the current \prm {language}, this behaviour is compatible with \prm {patterns}
-and \prm {hyphenation}.
-
-\LUATEX\ also hyphenates the first word in a paragraph. Words can be up to 256
-characters long (up from 64 in \TEX82). Longer words are ignored right now, but
-eventually either the limitation will be removed or perhaps it will become
-possible to silently ignore the excess characters (this is what happens in
-\TEX82, but there the behaviour cannot be controlled).
-
-If you are using the \LUA\ function \type {lang.hyphenate}, you should be aware
-that this function expects to receive a list of \quote {character} nodes. It will
-not operate properly in the presence of \quote {glyph}, \quote {ligature}, or
-\quote {ghost} nodes, nor does it know how to deal with kerning.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Applying ligatures and kerning}]
-
-\topicindex {ligatures}
-\topicindex {kerning}
-
-After all possible hyphenation points have been inserted in the list, \LUATEX\
-will process the list to convert the \quote {character} nodes into \quote {glyph}
-and \quote {ligature} nodes. This is actually done in two stages: first all
-ligatures are processed, then all kerning information is applied to the result
-list. But those two stages are somewhat dependent on each other: If the used font
-makes it possible to do so, the ligaturing stage adds virtual \quote {character}
-nodes to the word boundaries in the list. While doing so, it removes and
-interprets \prm {noboundary} nodes. The kerning stage deletes those word
-boundary items after it is done with them, and it does the same for \quote
-{ghost} nodes. Finally, at the end of the kerning stage, all remaining \quote
-{character} nodes are converted to \quote {glyph} nodes.
-
-This word separation is worth mentioning because, if you overrule from \LUA\ only
-one of the two callbacks related to font handling, then you have to make sure you
-perform the tasks normally done by \LUATEX\ itself in order to make sure that the
-other, non|-|overruled, routine continues to function properly.
-
-Although we could improve the situation the reality is that in modern \OPENTYPE\
-fonts ligatures can be constructed in many ways: by replacing a sequence of
-characters by one glyph, or by selectively replacing individual glyphs, or by
-kerning, or any combination of this. Add to that contextual analysis and it will
-be clear that we have to let \LUA\ do that job instead. The generic font handler
-that we provide (which is part of \CONTEXT) distinguishes between base mode
-(which essentially is what we describe here and which delegates the task to \TEX)
-and node mode (which deals with more complex fonts.
-
-Let's look at an example. Take the word \type {office}, hyphenated \type
-{of-fice}, using a \quote {normal} font with all the \type {f}-\type {f} and
-\type {f}-\type {i} type ligatures:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\NC initial \NC \type {{o}{f}{f}{i}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
-\NC after hyphenation \NC \type {{o}{f}{{-},{},{}}{f}{i}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
-\NC first ligature stage \NC \type {{o}{{f-},{f},{<ff>}}{i}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
-\NC final result \NC \type {{o}{{f-},{<fi>},{<ffi>}}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
-\stoptabulate
-
-That's bad enough, but let us assume that there is also a hyphenation point
-between the \type {f} and the \type {i}, to create \type {of-f-ice}. Then the
-final result should be:
-
-\starttyping
-{o}{{f-},
- {{f-},
- {i},
- {<fi>}},
- {{<ff>-},
- {i},
- {<ffi>}}}{c}{e}
-\stoptyping
-
-with discretionaries in the post-break text as well as in the replacement text of
-the top-level discretionary that resulted from the first hyphenation point.
-
-Here is that nested solution again, in a different representation:
-
-\testpage[4]
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|]
-\DB \BC pre \BC \BC post \BC \BC replace \BC \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC topdisc \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NC sub 1 \NC \NC sub 2 \NC \NR
-\NC sub 1 \NC \type {f-} \NC (2) \NC \type {i} \NC (3) \NC \type {<fi>} \NC (4) \NC \NR
-\NC sub 2 \NC \type {<ff>-} \NC (5) \NC \type {i} \NC (6) \NC \type {<ffi>} \NC (7) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-When line breaking is choosing its breakpoints, the following fields will
-eventually be selected:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
-\NC \type {of-f-ice} \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NR
-\NC \NC \type {f-} \NC (2) \NC \NR
-\NC \NC \type {i} \NC (3) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {of-fice} \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NR
-\NC \NC \type {<fi>} \NC (4) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {off-ice} \NC \type {<ff>-} \NC (5) \NC \NR
-\NC \NC \type {i} \NC (6) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {office} \NC \type {<ffi>} \NC (7) \NC \NR
-\stoptabulate
-
-The current solution in \LUATEX\ is not able to handle nested discretionaries,
-but it is in fact smart enough to handle this fictional \type {of-f-ice} example.
-It does so by combining two sequential discretionary nodes as if they were a
-single object (where the second discretionary node is treated as an extension of
-the first node).
-
-One can observe that the \type {of-f-ice} and \type {off-ice} cases both end with
-the same actual post replacement list (\type {i}), and that this would be the
-case even if \type {i} was the first item of a potential following ligature like
-\type {ic}. This allows \LUATEX\ to do away with one of the fields, and thus make
-the whole stuff fit into just two discretionary nodes.
-
-The mapping of the seven list fields to the six fields in this discretionary node
-pair is as follows:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
-\DB field \BC description \NC \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {disc1.pre} \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {disc1.post} \NC \type {<fi>} \NC (4) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {disc1.replace} \NC \type {<ffi>} \NC (7) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {disc2.pre} \NC \type {f-} \NC (2) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {disc2.post} \NC \type {i} \NC (3,6) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {disc2.replace} \NC \type {<ff>-} \NC (5) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-What is actually generated after ligaturing has been applied is therefore:
-
-\starttyping
-{o}{{f-},
- {<fi>},
- {<ffi>}}
- {{f-},
- {i},
- {<ff>-}}{c}{e}
-\stoptyping
-
-The two discretionaries have different subtypes from a discretionary appearing on
-its own: the first has subtype 4, and the second has subtype 5. The need for
-these special subtypes stems from the fact that not all of the fields appear in
-their \quote {normal} location. The second discretionary especially looks odd,
-with things like the \type {<ff>-} appearing in \type {disc2.replace}. The fact
-that some of the fields have different meanings (and different processing code
-internally) is what makes it necessary to have different subtypes: this enables
-\LUATEX\ to distinguish this sequence of two joined discretionary nodes from the
-case of two standalone discretionaries appearing in a row.
-
-Of course there is still that relationship with fonts: ligatures can be implemented by
-mapping a sequence of glyphs onto one glyph, but also by selective replacement and
-kerning. This means that the above examples are just representing the traditional
-approach.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Breaking paragraphs into lines}]
-
-\topicindex {linebreaks}
-\topicindex {paragraphs}
-\topicindex {discretionaries}
-
-This code is almost unchanged, but because of the above|-|mentioned changes
-with respect to discretionaries and ligatures, line breaking will potentially be
-different from traditional \TEX. The actual line breaking code is still based on
-the \TEX82 algorithms, and it does not expect there to be discretionaries inside
-of discretionaries. But, as patterns evolve and font handling can influence
-discretionaries, you need to be aware of the fact that long term consistency is not
-an engine matter only.
-
-But that situation is now fairly common in \LUATEX, due to the changes to the
-ligaturing mechanism. And also, the \LUATEX\ discretionary nodes are implemented
-slightly different from the \TEX82 nodes: the \type {no_break} text is now
-embedded inside the disc node, where previously these nodes kept their place in
-the horizontal list. In traditional \TEX\ the discretionary node contains a
-counter indicating how many nodes to skip, but in \LUATEX\ we store the pre, post
-and replace text in the discretionary node.
-
-The combined effect of these two differences is that \LUATEX\ does not always use
-all of the potential breakpoints in a paragraph, especially when fonts with many
-ligatures are used. Of course kerning also complicates matters here.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {lang} library}][library=lang]
-
-\subsection {\type {new} and \type {id}}
-
-\topicindex {languages+library}
-
-\libindex {new}
-\libindex {id}
-
-This library provides the interface to \LUATEX's structure representing a
-language, and the associated functions.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<language> l = lang.new()
-<language> l = lang.new(<number> id)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function creates a new userdata object. An object of type \type {<language>}
-is the first argument to most of the other functions in the \type {lang} library.
-These functions can also be used as if they were object methods, using the colon
-syntax. Without an argument, the next available internal id number will be
-assigned to this object. With argument, an object will be created that links to
-the internal language with that id number.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = lang.id(<language> l)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The number returned is the internal \prm {language} id number this object refers to.
-
-\subsection {\type {hyphenation}}
-
-\libindex {hyphenation}
-
-You can hyphenate a string directly with:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> n = lang.hyphenation(<language> l)
-lang.hyphenation(<language> l, <string> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection {\type {clear_hyphenation} and \type {clean}}
-
-\libindex {clear_hyphenation}
-\libindex {clean}
-
-This either returns the current hyphenation exceptions for this language, or adds
-new ones. The syntax of the string is explained in~\in {section}
-[patternsexceptions].
-
-\startfunctioncall
-lang.clear_hyphenation(<language> l)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This call clears the exception dictionary (string) for this language.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> n = lang.clean(<language> l, <string> o)
-<string> n = lang.clean(<string> o)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function creates a hyphenation key from the supplied hyphenation value. The
-syntax of the argument string is explained in \in {section} [patternsexceptions].
-This function is useful if you want to do something else based on the words in a
-dictionary file, like spell|-|checking.
-
-\subsection {\type {patterns} and \type {clear_patterns}}
-
-\libindex {patterns}
-\libindex {clear_patterns}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> n = lang.patterns(<language> l)
-lang.patterns(<language> l, <string> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This adds additional patterns for this language object, or returns the current
-set. The syntax of this string is explained in \in {section}
-[patternsexceptions].
-
-\startfunctioncall
-lang.clear_patterns(<language> l)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This can be used to clear the pattern dictionary for a language.
-
-\subsection {\type {hyphenationmin}}
-
-\libindex {hyphenationmin}
-
-This function sets (or gets) the value of the \TEX\ parameter
-\type {\hyphenationmin}.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-n = lang.hyphenationmin(<language> l)
-lang.hyphenationmin(<language> l, <number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection {\type {[pre|post][ex|]hyphenchar}}
-
-\libindex {prehyphenchar}
-\libindex {posthyphenchar}
-\libindex {preexhyphenchar}
-\libindex {postexhyphenchar}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = lang.prehyphenchar(<language> l)
-lang.prehyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
-
-<number> n = lang.posthyphenchar(<language> l)
-lang.posthyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-These two are used to get or set the \quote {pre|-|break} and \quote
-{post|-|break} hyphen characters for implicit hyphenation in this language. The
-intial values are decimal 45 (hyphen) and decimal~0 (indicating emptiness).
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = lang.preexhyphenchar(<language> l)
-lang.preexhyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
-
-<number> n = lang.postexhyphenchar(<language> l)
-lang.postexhyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-These gets or set the \quote {pre|-|break} and \quote {post|-|break} hyphen
-characters for explicit hyphenation in this language. Both are initially
-decimal~0 (indicating emptiness).
-
-\subsection {\type {hyphenate}}
-
-\libindex {hyphenate}
-
-The next call inserts hyphenation points (discretionary nodes) in a node list. If
-\type {tail} is given as argument, processing stops on that node. Currently,
-\type {success} is always true if \type {head} (and \type {tail}, if specified)
-are proper nodes, regardless of possible other errors.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean> success = lang.hyphenate(<node> head)
-<boolean> success = lang.hyphenate(<node> head, <node> tail)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Hyphenation works only on \quote {characters}, a special subtype of all the glyph
-nodes with the node subtype having the value \type {1}. Glyph modes with
-different subtypes are not processed. See \in {section} [charsandglyphs] for
-more details.
-
-\subsection {\type {[set|get]hjcode}}
-
-\libindex {sethjcode}
-\libindex {gethjcode}
-
-The following two commands can be used to set or query hj codes:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-lang.sethjcode(<language> l, <number> char, <number> usedchar)
-<number> usedchar = lang.gethjcode(<language> l, <number> char)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-When you set a hjcode the current sets get initialized unless the set was already
-initialized due to \prm {savinghyphcodes} being larger than zero.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
-
-% \parindent0pt \hsize=1.1cm
-% 12-34-56 \par
-% 12-34-\hbox{56} \par
-% 12-34-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex \par
-% 12-\hbox{34}-56 \par
-% 12-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex-56 \par
-% \hjcode`\1=`\1 \hjcode`\2=`\2 \hjcode`\3=`\3 \hjcode`\4=`\4 \vskip.5cm
-% 12-34-56 \par
-% 12-34-\hbox{56} \par
-% 12-34-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex \par
-% 12-\hbox{34}-56 \par
-% 12-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex-56 \par
-
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-languages
+
+\startchapter[reference=languages,title={Languages, characters, fonts and glyphs}]
+
+\startsection[title={Introduction}]
+
+\topicindex {languages}
+
+\LUATEX's internal handling of the characters and glyphs that eventually become
+typeset is quite different from the way \TEX82 handles those same objects. The
+easiest way to explain the difference is to focus on unrestricted horizontal mode
+(i.e.\ paragraphs) and hyphenation first. Later on, it will be easy to deal
+with the differences that occur in horizontal and math modes.
+
+In \TEX82, the characters you type are converted into \type {char} node records
+when they are encountered by the main control loop. \TEX\ attaches and processes
+the font information while creating those records, so that the resulting \quote
+{horizontal list} contains the final forms of ligatures and implicit kerning.
+This packaging is needed because we may want to get the effective width of for
+instance a horizontal box.
+
+When it becomes necessary to hyphenate words in a paragraph, \TEX\ converts (one
+word at time) the \type {char} node records into a string by replacing ligatures
+with their components and ignoring the kerning. Then it runs the hyphenation
+algorithm on this string, and converts the hyphenated result back into a \quote
+{horizontal list} that is consecutively spliced back into the paragraph stream.
+Keep in mind that the paragraph may contain unboxed horizontal material, which
+then already contains ligatures and kerns and the words therein are part of the
+hyphenation process.
+
+Those \type {char} node records are somewhat misnamed, as they are glyph
+positions in specific fonts, and therefore not really \quote {characters} in the
+linguistic sense. There is no language information inside the \type {char} node
+records at all. Instead, language information is passed along using \type
+{language whatsit} nodes inside the horizontal list.
+
+In \LUATEX, the situation is quite different. The characters you type are always
+converted into \nod {glyph} node records with a special subtype to identify them
+as being intended as linguistic characters. \LUATEX\ stores the needed language
+information in those records, but does not do any font|-|related processing at
+the time of node creation. It only stores the index of the current font and a
+reference to a character in that font.
+
+When it becomes necessary to typeset a paragraph, \LUATEX\ first inserts all
+hyphenation points right into the whole node list. Next, it processes all the
+font information in the whole list (creating ligatures and adjusting kerning),
+and finally it adjusts all the subtype identifiers so that the records are \quote
+{glyph nodes} from now on.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Characters, glyphs and discretionaries},reference=charsandglyphs]
+
+\topicindex {characters}
+\topicindex {glyphs}
+\topicindex {hyphenation}
+
+\TEX82 (including \PDFTEX) differentiates between \type {char} nodes and \type
+{lig} nodes. The former are simple items that contained nothing but a \quote
+{character} and a \quote {font} field, and they lived in the same memory as
+tokens did. The latter also contained a list of components, and a subtype
+indicating whether this ligature was the result of a word boundary, and it was
+stored in the same place as other nodes like boxes and kerns and glues.
+
+In \LUATEX, these two types are merged into one, somewhat larger structure called
+a \nod {glyph} node. Besides having the old character, font, and component
+fields there are a few more, like \quote {attr} that we will see in \in {section}
+[glyphnodes], these nodes also contain a subtype, that codes four main types and
+two additional ghost types. For ligatures, multiple bits can be set at the same
+time (in case of a single|-|glyph word).
+
+\startitemize
+ \startitem
+ \type {character}, for characters to be hyphenated: the lowest bit
+ (bit 0) is set to 1.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ \nod {glyph}, for specific font glyphs: the lowest bit (bit 0) is
+ not set.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ \type {ligature}, for constructed ligatures bit 1 is set.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ \type {ghost}, for so called \quote {ghost objects} bit 2 is set.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ \type {left}, for ligatures created from a left word boundary and for
+ ghosts created from \lpr {leftghost} bit 3 gets set.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ \type {right}, for ligatures created from a right word boundary and
+ for ghosts created from \lpr {rightghost} bit 4 is set.
+ \stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The \nod {glyph} nodes also contain language data, split into four items that
+were current when the node was created: the \prm {setlanguage} (15~bits), \prm
+{lefthyphenmin} (8~bits), \prm {righthyphenmin} (8~bits), and \prm {uchyph}
+(1~bit).
+
+Incidentally, \LUATEX\ allows 16383 separate languages, and words can be 256
+characters long. The language is stored with each character. You can set
+\prm {firstvalidlanguage} to for instance~1 and make thereby language~0
+an ignored hyphenation language.
+
+The new primitive \lpr {hyphenationmin} can be used to signal the minimal length
+of a word. This value is stored with the (current) language.
+
+Because the \prm {uchyph} value is saved in the actual nodes, its handling is
+subtly different from \TEX82: changes to \prm {uchyph} become effective
+immediately, not at the end of the current partial paragraph.
+
+Typeset boxes now always have their language information embedded in the nodes
+themselves, so there is no longer a possible dependency on the surrounding
+language settings. In \TEX82, a mid|-|paragraph statement like \type {\unhbox0}
+would process the box using the current paragraph language unless there was a
+\prm {setlanguage} issued inside the box. In \LUATEX, all language variables
+are already frozen.
+
+In traditional \TEX\ the process of hyphenation is driven by \type {lccode}s. In
+\LUATEX\ we made this dependency less strong. There are several strategies
+possible. When you do nothing, the currently used \type {lccode}s are used, when
+loading patterns, setting exceptions or hyphenating a list.
+
+When you set \prm {savinghyphcodes} to a value greater than zero the current set
+of \type {lccode}s will be saved with the language. In that case changing a \type
+{lccode} afterwards has no effect. However, you can adapt the set with:
+
+\starttyping
+\hjcode`a=`a
+\stoptyping
+
+This change is global which makes sense if you keep in mind that the moment that
+hyphenation happens is (normally) when the paragraph or a horizontal box is
+constructed. When \prm {savinghyphcodes} was zero when the language got
+initialized you start out with nothing, otherwise you already have a set.
+
+When a \lpr {hjcode} is greater than 0 but less than 32 is indicates the
+to be used length. In the following example we map a character (\type {x}) onto
+another one in the patterns and tell the engine that \type {Å“} counts as one
+character. Because traditionally zero itself is reserved for inhibiting
+hyphenation, a value of 32 counts as zero.
+
+Here are some examples (we assume that French patterns are used):
+
+\starttabulate[||||]
+\NC \NC \type{foobar} \NC \type{foo-bar} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{\hjcode`x=`o} \NC \type{fxxbar} \NC \type{fxx-bar} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{\lefthyphenmin3} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“di-pus} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{\lefthyphenmin4} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{\hjcode`Å“=2} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“di-pus} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{\hjcode`i=32 \hjcode`d=32} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \type{Å“dipus} \NC \NR
+\NC
+\stoptabulate
+
+Carrying all this information with each glyph would give too much overhead and
+also make the process of setting up these codes more complex. A solution with
+\type {hjcode} sets was considered but rejected because in practice the current
+approach is sufficient and it would not be compatible anyway.
+
+Beware: the values are always saved in the format, independent of the setting
+of \prm {savinghyphcodes} at the moment the format is dumped.
+
+A boundary node normally would mark the end of a word which interferes with for
+instance discretionary injection. For this you can use the \prm {wordboundary}
+as a trigger. Here are a few examples of usage:
+
+\startbuffer
+ discrete---discrete
+\stopbuffer
+\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
+\startbuffer
+ discrete\discretionary{}{}{---}discrete
+\stopbuffer
+\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
+\startbuffer
+ discrete\wordboundary\discretionary{}{}{---}discrete
+\stopbuffer
+\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
+\startbuffer
+ discrete\wordboundary\discretionary{}{}{---}\wordboundary discrete
+\stopbuffer
+\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
+\startbuffer
+ discrete\wordboundary\discretionary{---}{}{}\wordboundary discrete
+\stopbuffer
+\typebuffer \startnarrower \dontcomplain \hsize 1pt \getbuffer \par \stopnarrower
+
+We only accept an explicit hyphen when there is a preceding glyph and we skip a
+sequence of explicit hyphens since that normally indicates a \type {--} or \type
+{---} ligature in which case we can in a worse case usage get bad node lists
+later on due to messed up ligature building as these dashes are ligatures in base
+fonts. This is a side effect of separating the hyphenation, ligaturing and
+kerning steps.
+
+The start and end of a sequence of characters is signalled by a \nod {glue}, \nod
+{penalty}, \nod {kern} or \nod {boundary} node. But by default also a \nod
+{hlist}, \nod {vlist}, \nod {rule}, \nod {dir}, \nod {whatsit}, \nod {ins}, and
+\nod {adjust} node indicate a start or end. You can omit the last set from the
+test by setting \lpr {hyphenationbounds} to a non|-|zero value:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB value \BC behaviour \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{0} \NC not strict \NC \NR
+\NC \type{1} \NC strict start \NC \NR
+\NC \type{2} \NC strict end \NC \NR
+\NC \type{3} \NC strict start and strict end \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The word start is determined as follows:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB node \BC behaviour \NC \NR
+\TB
+\BC boundary \NC yes when wordboundary \NC \NR
+\BC hlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC vlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC rule \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC dir \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC whatsit \NC when hyphenationbounds 1 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC glue \NC yes \NC \NR
+\BC math \NC skipped \NC \NR
+\BC glyph \NC exhyphenchar (one only) : yes (so no -- ---) \NC \NR
+\BC otherwise \NC yes \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The word end is determined as follows:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB node \BC behaviour \NC \NR
+\TB
+\BC boundary \NC yes \NC \NR
+\BC glyph \NC yes when different language \NC \NR
+\BC glue \NC yes \NC \NR
+\BC penalty \NC yes \NC \NR
+\BC kern \NC yes when not italic (for some historic reason) \NC \NR
+\BC hlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC vlist \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC rule \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC dir \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC whatsit \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC ins \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
+\BC adjust \NC when hyphenationbounds 2 or 3 \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\in {Figures} [hb:1] upto \in [hb:5] show some examples. In all cases we set the
+min values to 1 and make sure that the words hyphenate at each character.
+
+\hyphenation{o-n-e t-w-o}
+
+\def\SomeTest#1#2%
+ {\lefthyphenmin \plusone
+ \righthyphenmin \plusone
+ \parindent \zeropoint
+ \everypar \emptytoks
+ \dontcomplain
+ \hbox to 2cm {%
+ \vtop {%
+ \hsize 1pt
+ \hyphenationbounds#1
+ #2
+ \par}}}
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=hb:1,title={\type{one}}]
+ \startcombination[4*1]
+ {\SomeTest{0}{one}} {\type{0}}
+ {\SomeTest{1}{one}} {\type{1}}
+ {\SomeTest{2}{one}} {\type{2}}
+ {\SomeTest{3}{one}} {\type{3}}
+ \stopcombination
+\stopplacefigure
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=hb:2,title={\type{one\null two}}]
+ \startcombination[4*1]
+ {\SomeTest{0}{one\null two}} {\type{0}}
+ {\SomeTest{1}{one\null two}} {\type{1}}
+ {\SomeTest{2}{one\null two}} {\type{2}}
+ {\SomeTest{3}{one\null two}} {\type{3}}
+ \stopcombination
+\stopplacefigure
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=hb:3,title={\type{\null one\null two}}]
+ \startcombination[4*1]
+ {\SomeTest{0}{\null one\null two}} {\type{0}}
+ {\SomeTest{1}{\null one\null two}} {\type{1}}
+ {\SomeTest{2}{\null one\null two}} {\type{2}}
+ {\SomeTest{3}{\null one\null two}} {\type{3}}
+ \stopcombination
+\stopplacefigure
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=hb:4,title={\type{one\null two\null}}]
+ \startcombination[4*1]
+ {\SomeTest{0}{one\null two\null}} {\type{0}}
+ {\SomeTest{1}{one\null two\null}} {\type{1}}
+ {\SomeTest{2}{one\null two\null}} {\type{2}}
+ {\SomeTest{3}{one\null two\null}} {\type{3}}
+ \stopcombination
+\stopplacefigure
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=hb:5,title={\type{\null one\null two\null}}]
+ \startcombination[4*1]
+ {\SomeTest{0}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{0}}
+ {\SomeTest{1}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{1}}
+ {\SomeTest{2}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{2}}
+ {\SomeTest{3}{\null one\null two\null}} {\type{3}}
+ \stopcombination
+\stopplacefigure
+
+% (Future versions of \LUATEX\ might provide more granularity.)
+
+In traditional \TEX\ ligature building and hyphenation are interwoven with the
+line break mechanism. In \LUATEX\ these phases are isolated. As a consequence we
+deal differently with (a sequence of) explicit hyphens. We already have added
+some control over aspects of the hyphenation and yet another one concerns
+automatic hyphens (e.g.\ \type {-} characters in the input).
+
+When \lpr {automatichyphenmode} has a value of 0, a hyphen will be turned into
+an automatic discretionary. The snippets before and after it will not be
+hyphenated. A side effect is that a leading hyphen can lead to a split but one
+will seldom run into that situation. Setting a pre and post character makes this
+more prominent. A value of 1 will prevent this side effect and a value of 2 will
+not turn the hyphen into a discretionary. Experiments with other options, like
+permitting hyphenation of the words on both sides were discarded.
+
+\startbuffer[a]
+before-after \par
+before--after \par
+before---after \par
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startbuffer[b]
+-before \par
+after- \par
+--before \par
+after-- \par
+---before \par
+after--- \par
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startbuffer[c]
+before-after \par
+before--after \par
+before---after \par
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startbuffer[demo]
+\startcombination[nx=4,ny=3,location=top]
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize6em \getbuffer[a]}} {A~0~6em}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize2pt \getbuffer[a]}} {A~0~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plusone \hsize2pt \getbuffer[a]}} {A~1~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plustwo \hsize2pt \getbuffer[a]}} {A~2~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize6em \getbuffer[b]}} {B~0~6em}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize2pt \getbuffer[b]}} {B~0~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plusone \hsize2pt \getbuffer[b]}} {B~1~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plustwo \hsize2pt \getbuffer[b]}} {B~2~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize6em \getbuffer[c]}} {C~0~6em}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\zerocount \hsize2pt \getbuffer[c]}} {C~0~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plusone \hsize2pt \getbuffer[c]}} {C~1~2pt}
+ {\framed[align=normal,strut=no,top=\vskip.5ex,bottom=\vskip.5ex]{\automatichyphenmode\plustwo \hsize2pt \getbuffer[c]}} {C~2~2pt}
+\stopcombination
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startplacefigure[locationreference=automatichyphenmode:1,title={The automatic modes \type {0} (default), \type {1} and \type {2}, with a \prm {hsize}
+of 6em and 2pt (which triggers a linebreak).}]
+ \dontcomplain \tt \getbuffer[demo]
+\stopplacefigure
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=automatichyphenmode:2,title={The automatic modes \type {0} (default), \type {1} and \type {2}, with \lpr {preexhyphenchar} and \lpr {postexhyphenchar} set to characters \type {A} and \type {B}.}]
+ \postexhyphenchar`A\relax
+ \preexhyphenchar `B\relax
+ \dontcomplain \tt \getbuffer[demo]
+\stopplacefigure
+
+In \in {figure} [automatichyphenmode:1] \in {and} [automatichyphenmode:2] we show
+what happens with three samples:
+
+Input A: \typebuffer[a]
+Input B: \typebuffer[b]
+Input C: \typebuffer[c]
+
+As with primitive companions of other single character commands, the \prm {-}
+command has a more verbose primitive version in \lpr {explicitdiscretionary}
+and the normally intercepted in the hyphenator character \type {-} (or whatever
+is configured) is available as \lpr {automaticdiscretionary}.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The main control loop}]
+
+\topicindex {main loop}
+\topicindex {hyphenation}
+
+In \LUATEX's main loop, almost all input characters that are to be typeset are
+converted into \nod {glyph} node records with subtype \quote {character}, but
+there are a few exceptions.
+
+\startitemize[n]
+
+\startitem
+ The \prm {accent} primitive creates nodes with subtype \quote {glyph}
+ instead of \quote {character}: one for the actual accent and one for the
+ accentee. The primary reason for this is that \prm {accent} in \TEX82 is
+ explicitly dependent on the current font encoding, so it would not make much
+ sense to attach a new meaning to the primitive's name, as that would
+ invalidate many old documents and macro packages. A secondary reason is that
+ in \TEX82, \prm {accent} prohibits hyphenation of the current word. Since
+ in \LUATEX\ hyphenation only takes place on \quote {character} nodes, it is
+ possible to achieve the same effect. Of course, modern \UNICODE\ aware macro
+ packages will not use the \prm {accent} primitive at all but try to map
+ directly on composed characters.
+
+ This change of meaning did happen with \prm {char}, that now generates
+ \quote {glyph} nodes with a character subtype. In traditional \TEX\ there was
+ a strong relationship between the 8|-|bit input encoding, hyphenation and
+ glyphs taken from a font. In \LUATEX\ we have \UTF\ input, and in most cases
+ this maps directly to a character in a font, apart from glyph replacement in
+ the font engine. If you want to access arbitrary glyphs in a font directly
+ you can always use \LUA\ to do so, because fonts are available as \LUA\
+ table.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ All the results of processing in math mode eventually become nodes with
+ \quote {glyph} subtypes. In fact, the result of processing math is just
+ a regular list of glyphs, kerns, glue, penalties, boxes etc.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \ALEPH|-|derived commands \lpr {leftghost} and \lpr {rightghost}
+ create nodes of a third subtype: \quote {ghost}. These nodes are ignored
+ completely by all further processing until the stage where inter|-|glyph
+ kerning is added.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Automatic discretionaries are handled differently. \TEX82 inserts an empty
+ discretionary after sensing an input character that matches the \prm
+ {hyphenchar} in the current font. This test is wrong in our opinion: whether
+ or not hyphenation takes place should not depend on the current font, it is a
+ language property. \footnote {When \TEX\ showed up we didn't have \UNICODE\
+ yet and being limited to eight bits meant that one sometimes had to
+ compromise between supporting character input, glyph rendering, hyphenation.}
+
+ In \LUATEX, it works like this: if \LUATEX\ senses a string of input
+ characters that matches the value of the new integer parameter \prm
+ {exhyphenchar}, it will insert an explicit discretionary after that series of
+ nodes. Initially \TEX\ sets the \type {\exhyphenchar=`\-}. Incidentally, this
+ is a global parameter instead of a language-specific one because it may be
+ useful to change the value depending on the document structure instead of the
+ text language.
+
+ The insertion of discretionaries after a sequence of explicit hyphens happens
+ at the same time as the other hyphenation processing, {\it not\/} inside the
+ main control loop.
+
+ The only use \LUATEX\ has for \prm {hyphenchar} is at the check whether a
+ word should be considered for hyphenation at all. If the \prm {hyphenchar}
+ of the font attached to the first character node in a word is negative, then
+ hyphenation of that word is abandoned immediately. This behaviour is added
+ for backward compatibility only, and the use of \type {\hyphenchar=-1} as a
+ means of preventing hyphenation should not be used in new \LUATEX\ documents.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \prm {setlanguage} command no longer creates whatsits. The meaning of
+ \prm {setlanguage} is changed so that it is now an integer parameter like all
+ others. That integer parameter is used in \type {\glyph_node} creation to add
+ language information to the glyph nodes. In conjunction, the \prm {language}
+ primitive is extended so that it always also updates the value of \prm
+ {setlanguage}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \prm {noboundary} command (that prohibits word boundary processing
+ where that would normally take place) now does create nodes. These nodes are
+ needed because the exact place of the \prm {noboundary} command in the
+ input stream has to be retained until after the ligature and font processing
+ stages.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ There is no longer a \type {main_loop} label in the code. Remember that
+ \TEX82 did quite a lot of processing while adding \type {char_nodes} to the
+ horizontal list? For speed reasons, it handled that processing code outside
+ of the \quote {main control} loop, and only the first character of any \quote
+ {word} was handled by that \quote {main control} loop. In \LUATEX, there is
+ no longer a need for that (all hard work is done later), and the (now very
+ small) bits of character|-|handling code have been moved back inline. When
+ \prm {tracingcommands} is on, this is visible because the full word is
+ reported, instead of just the initial character.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+Because we tend to make hard coded behaviour configurable a few new primitives
+have been added:
+
+\starttyping
+\hyphenpenaltymode
+\automatichyphenpenalty
+\explicithyphenpenalty
+\stoptyping
+
+The first parameter has the following consequences for automatic discs (the ones
+resulting from an \prm {exhyphenchar}:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|l|]
+\DB mode \BC automatic disc \type {-} \BC explicit disc \prm{-} \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{0} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{1} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{2} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{3} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{4} \NC \lpr {automatichyphenpenalty} \NC \lpr {explicithyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{5} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \lpr {explicithyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{6} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \lpr {explicithyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{7} \NC \lpr {automatichyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{8} \NC \lpr {automatichyphenpenalty} \NC \prm {hyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+other values do what we always did in \LUATEX: insert \prm {exhyphenpenalty}.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Loading patterns and exceptions},reference=patternsexceptions]
+
+\topicindex {hyphenation}
+\topicindex {hyphenation+patterns}
+\topicindex {hyphenation+exceptions}
+\topicindex {patterns}
+\topicindex {exceptions}
+
+Although we keep the traditional approach towards hyphenation (which is still
+superior) the implementation of the hyphenation algorithm in \LUATEX\ is quite
+different from the one in \TEX82.
+
+After expansion, the argument for \prm {patterns} has to be proper \UTF8 with
+individual patterns separated by spaces, no \prm {char} or \prm {chardef}d
+commands are allowed. The current implementation is quite strict and will reject
+all non|-|\UNICODE\ characters. Likewise, the expanded argument for \prm
+{hyphenation} also has to be proper \UTF8, but here a bit of extra syntax is
+provided:
+
+\startitemize[n]
+\startitem
+ Three sets of arguments in curly braces (\type {{}{}{}}) indicate a desired
+ complex discretionary, with arguments as in \prm {discretionary}'s command in
+ normal document input.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ A \type {-} indicates a desired simple discretionary, cf.\ \type {\-} and
+ \type {\discretionary{-}{}{}} in normal document input.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Internal command names are ignored. This rule is provided especially for \prm
+ {discretionary}, but it also helps to deal with \prm {relax} commands that
+ may sneak in.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ An \type {=} indicates a (non|-|discretionary) hyphen in the document input.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The expanded argument is first converted back to a space|-|separated string while
+dropping the internal command names. This string is then converted into a
+dictionary by a routine that creates key|-|value pairs by converting the other
+listed items. It is important to note that the keys in an exception dictionary
+can always be generated from the values. Here are a few examples:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|l|]
+\DB value \BC implied key (input) \BC effect \NC\NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {ta-ble} \NC table \NC \type {ta\-ble} ($=$ \type {ta\discretionary{-}{}{}ble}) \NC\NR
+\NC \type {ba{k-}{}{c}ken} \NC backen \NC \type {ba\discretionary{k-}{}{c}ken} \NC\NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The resultant patterns and exception dictionary will be stored under the language
+code that is the present value of \prm {language}.
+
+In the last line of the table, you see there is no \prm {discretionary} command
+in the value: the command is optional in the \TEX-based input syntax. The
+underlying reason for that is that it is conceivable that a whole dictionary of
+words is stored as a plain text file and loaded into \LUATEX\ using one of the
+functions in the \LUA\ \type {lang} library. This loading method is quite a bit
+faster than going through the \TEX\ language primitives, but some (most?) of that
+speed gain would be lost if it had to interpret command sequences while doing so.
+
+It is possible to specify extra hyphenation points in compound words by using
+\type {{-}{}{-}} for the explicit hyphen character (replace \type {-} by the
+actual explicit hyphen character if needed). For example, this matches the word
+\quote {multi|-|word|-|boundaries} and allows an extra break inbetween \quote
+{boun} and \quote {daries}:
+
+\starttyping
+\hyphenation{multi{-}{}{-}word{-}{}{-}boun-daries}
+\stoptyping
+
+The motivation behind the \ETEX\ extension \prm {savinghyphcodes} was that
+hyphenation heavily depended on font encodings. This is no longer true in
+\LUATEX, and the corresponding primitive is basically ignored. Because we now
+have \lpr {hjcode}, the case relate codes can be used exclusively for \prm
+{uppercase} and \prm {lowercase}.
+
+The three curly brace pair pattern in an exception can be somewhat unexpected so
+we will try to explain it by example. The pattern \type {foo{}{}{x}bar} pattern
+creates a lookup \type {fooxbar} and the pattern \type {foo{}{}{}bar} creates
+\type {foobar}. Then, when a hit happens there is a replacement text (\type {x})
+or none. Because we introduced penalties in discretionary nodes, the exception
+syntax now also can take a penalty specification. The value between square brackets
+is a multiplier for \lpr {exceptionpenalty}. Here we have set it to 10000 so
+effectively we get 30000 in the example.
+
+\def\ShowSample#1#2%
+ {\startlinecorrection[blank]
+ \hyphenation{#1}%
+ \exceptionpenalty=10000
+ \bTABLE[foregroundstyle=type]
+ \bTR
+ \bTD[align=middle,nx=4] \type{#1} \eTD
+ \eTR
+ \bTR
+ \bTD[align=middle] \type{10em} \eTD
+ \bTD[align=middle] \type {3em} \eTD
+ \bTD[align=middle] \type {0em} \eTD
+ \bTD[align=middle] \type {6em} \eTD
+ \eTR
+ \bTR
+ \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\hsize 10em 123 #2 123\par}\eTD
+ \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\hsize 3em 123 #2 123\par}\eTD
+ \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\hsize 0em 123 #2 123\par}\eTD
+ \bTD[width=10em]\vtop{\setupalign[verytolerant,stretch]\rmtf\hsize 6em 123 #2 #2 #2 #2 123\par}\eTD
+ \eTR
+ \eTABLE
+ \stoplinecorrection}
+
+\ShowSample{x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}xx}{xxxxxx}
+\ShowSample{x{a-}{-b}{}x{a-}{-b}{}[3]x{a-}{-b}{}[1]x{a-}{-b}{}xx}{xxxxxx}
+
+\ShowSample{z{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}z}{zzzzzz}
+\ShowSample{z{a-}{-b}{z}{a-}{-b}{z}[3]{a-}{-b}{z}[1]{a-}{-b}{z}z}{zzzzzz}
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Applying hyphenation}]
+
+\topicindex {hyphenation+how it works}
+\topicindex {hyphenation+discretionaries}
+\topicindex {discretionaries}
+
+The internal structures \LUATEX\ uses for the insertion of discretionaries in
+words is very different from the ones in \TEX82, and that means there are some
+noticeable differences in handling as well.
+
+First and foremost, there is no \quote {compressed trie} involved in hyphenation.
+The algorithm still reads pattern files generated by \PATGEN, but \LUATEX\ uses a
+finite state hash to match the patterns against the word to be hyphenated. This
+algorithm is based on the \quote {libhnj} library used by \OPENOFFICE, which in
+turn is inspired by \TEX.
+
+There are a few differences between \LUATEX\ and \TEX82 that are a direct result
+of the implementation:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ \LUATEX\ happily hyphenates the full \UNICODE\ character range.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Pattern and exception dictionary size is limited by the available memory
+ only, all allocations are done dynamically. The trie|-|related settings in
+ \type {texmf.cnf} are ignored.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Because there is no \quote {trie preparation} stage, language patterns never
+ become frozen. This means that the primitive \prm {patterns} (and its \LUA\
+ counterpart \type {lang.patterns}) can be used at any time, not only in
+ ini\TEX.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Only the string representation of \prm {patterns} and \prm {hyphenation} is
+ stored in the format file. At format load time, they are simply
+ re|-|evaluated. It follows that there is no real reason to preload languages
+ in the format file. In fact, it is usually not a good idea to do so. It is
+ much smarter to load patterns no sooner than the first time they are actually
+ needed.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \LUATEX\ uses the language-specific variables \lpr {prehyphenchar} and \lpr
+ {posthyphenchar} in the creation of implicit discretionaries, instead of
+ \TEX82's \prm {hyphenchar}, and the values of the language|-|specific
+ variables \lpr {preexhyphenchar} and \lpr {postexhyphenchar} for explicit
+ discretionaries (instead of \TEX82's empty discretionary).
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The value of the two counters related to hyphenation, \prm {hyphenpenalty}
+ and \prm {exhyphenpenalty}, are now stored in the discretionary nodes. This
+ permits a local overload for explicit \prm {discretionary} commands. The
+ value current when the hyphenation pass is applied is used. When no callbacks
+ are used this is compatible with traditional \TEX. When you apply the \LUA\
+ \type {lang.hyphenate} function the current values are used.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The hyphenation exception dictionary is maintained as key|-|value hash, and
+ that is also dynamic, so the \type {hyph_size} setting is not used either.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+Because we store penalties in the disc node the \prm {discretionary} command has
+been extended to accept an optional penalty specification, so you can do the
+following:
+
+\startbuffer
+\hsize1mm
+1:foo{\hyphenpenalty 10000\discretionary{}{}{}}bar\par
+2:foo\discretionary penalty 10000 {}{}{}bar\par
+3:foo\discretionary{}{}{}bar\par
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+This results in:
+
+\blank \start \getbuffer \stop \blank
+
+Inserted characters and ligatures inherit their attributes from the nearest glyph
+node item (usually the preceding one, but the following one for the items
+inserted at the left-hand side of a word).
+
+Word boundaries are no longer implied by font switches, but by language switches.
+One word can have two separate fonts and still be hyphenated correctly (but it
+can not have two different languages, the \prm {setlanguage} command forces a
+word boundary).
+
+All languages start out with \type {\prehyphenchar=`\-}, \type {\posthyphenchar=0},
+\type {\preexhyphenchar=0} and \type {\postexhyphenchar=0}. When you assign the
+values of one of these four parameters, you are actually changing the settings
+for the current \prm {language}, this behaviour is compatible with \prm {patterns}
+and \prm {hyphenation}.
+
+\LUATEX\ also hyphenates the first word in a paragraph. Words can be up to 256
+characters long (up from 64 in \TEX82). Longer words are ignored right now, but
+eventually either the limitation will be removed or perhaps it will become
+possible to silently ignore the excess characters (this is what happens in
+\TEX82, but there the behaviour cannot be controlled).
+
+If you are using the \LUA\ function \type {lang.hyphenate}, you should be aware
+that this function expects to receive a list of \quote {character} nodes. It will
+not operate properly in the presence of \quote {glyph}, \quote {ligature}, or
+\quote {ghost} nodes, nor does it know how to deal with kerning.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Applying ligatures and kerning}]
+
+\topicindex {ligatures}
+\topicindex {kerning}
+
+After all possible hyphenation points have been inserted in the list, \LUATEX\
+will process the list to convert the \quote {character} nodes into \quote {glyph}
+and \quote {ligature} nodes. This is actually done in two stages: first all
+ligatures are processed, then all kerning information is applied to the result
+list. But those two stages are somewhat dependent on each other: If the used font
+makes it possible to do so, the ligaturing stage adds virtual \quote {character}
+nodes to the word boundaries in the list. While doing so, it removes and
+interprets \prm {noboundary} nodes. The kerning stage deletes those word
+boundary items after it is done with them, and it does the same for \quote
+{ghost} nodes. Finally, at the end of the kerning stage, all remaining \quote
+{character} nodes are converted to \quote {glyph} nodes.
+
+This word separation is worth mentioning because, if you overrule from \LUA\ only
+one of the two callbacks related to font handling, then you have to make sure you
+perform the tasks normally done by \LUATEX\ itself in order to make sure that the
+other, non|-|overruled, routine continues to function properly.
+
+Although we could improve the situation the reality is that in modern \OPENTYPE\
+fonts ligatures can be constructed in many ways: by replacing a sequence of
+characters by one glyph, or by selectively replacing individual glyphs, or by
+kerning, or any combination of this. Add to that contextual analysis and it will
+be clear that we have to let \LUA\ do that job instead. The generic font handler
+that we provide (which is part of \CONTEXT) distinguishes between base mode
+(which essentially is what we describe here and which delegates the task to \TEX)
+and node mode (which deals with more complex fonts.
+
+Let's look at an example. Take the word \type {office}, hyphenated \type
+{of-fice}, using a \quote {normal} font with all the \type {f}-\type {f} and
+\type {f}-\type {i} type ligatures:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\NC initial \NC \type {{o}{f}{f}{i}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
+\NC after hyphenation \NC \type {{o}{f}{{-},{},{}}{f}{i}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
+\NC first ligature stage \NC \type {{o}{{f-},{f},{<ff>}}{i}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
+\NC final result \NC \type {{o}{{f-},{<fi>},{<ffi>}}{c}{e}} \NC\NR
+\stoptabulate
+
+That's bad enough, but let us assume that there is also a hyphenation point
+between the \type {f} and the \type {i}, to create \type {of-f-ice}. Then the
+final result should be:
+
+\starttyping
+{o}{{f-},
+ {{f-},
+ {i},
+ {<fi>}},
+ {{<ff>-},
+ {i},
+ {<ffi>}}}{c}{e}
+\stoptyping
+
+with discretionaries in the post-break text as well as in the replacement text of
+the top-level discretionary that resulted from the first hyphenation point.
+
+Here is that nested solution again, in a different representation:
+
+\testpage[4]
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|c|c|c|c|c|]
+\DB \BC pre \BC \BC post \BC \BC replace \BC \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC topdisc \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NC sub 1 \NC \NC sub 2 \NC \NR
+\NC sub 1 \NC \type {f-} \NC (2) \NC \type {i} \NC (3) \NC \type {<fi>} \NC (4) \NC \NR
+\NC sub 2 \NC \type {<ff>-} \NC (5) \NC \type {i} \NC (6) \NC \type {<ffi>} \NC (7) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+When line breaking is choosing its breakpoints, the following fields will
+eventually be selected:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
+\NC \type {of-f-ice} \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NR
+\NC \NC \type {f-} \NC (2) \NC \NR
+\NC \NC \type {i} \NC (3) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {of-fice} \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NR
+\NC \NC \type {<fi>} \NC (4) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {off-ice} \NC \type {<ff>-} \NC (5) \NC \NR
+\NC \NC \type {i} \NC (6) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {office} \NC \type {<ffi>} \NC (7) \NC \NR
+\stoptabulate
+
+The current solution in \LUATEX\ is not able to handle nested discretionaries,
+but it is in fact smart enough to handle this fictional \type {of-f-ice} example.
+It does so by combining two sequential discretionary nodes as if they were a
+single object (where the second discretionary node is treated as an extension of
+the first node).
+
+One can observe that the \type {of-f-ice} and \type {off-ice} cases both end with
+the same actual post replacement list (\type {i}), and that this would be the
+case even if \type {i} was the first item of a potential following ligature like
+\type {ic}. This allows \LUATEX\ to do away with one of the fields, and thus make
+the whole stuff fit into just two discretionary nodes.
+
+The mapping of the seven list fields to the six fields in this discretionary node
+pair is as follows:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
+\DB field \BC description \NC \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {disc1.pre} \NC \type {f-} \NC (1) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {disc1.post} \NC \type {<fi>} \NC (4) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {disc1.replace} \NC \type {<ffi>} \NC (7) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {disc2.pre} \NC \type {f-} \NC (2) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {disc2.post} \NC \type {i} \NC (3,6) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {disc2.replace} \NC \type {<ff>-} \NC (5) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+What is actually generated after ligaturing has been applied is therefore:
+
+\starttyping
+{o}{{f-},
+ {<fi>},
+ {<ffi>}}
+ {{f-},
+ {i},
+ {<ff>-}}{c}{e}
+\stoptyping
+
+The two discretionaries have different subtypes from a discretionary appearing on
+its own: the first has subtype 4, and the second has subtype 5. The need for
+these special subtypes stems from the fact that not all of the fields appear in
+their \quote {normal} location. The second discretionary especially looks odd,
+with things like the \type {<ff>-} appearing in \type {disc2.replace}. The fact
+that some of the fields have different meanings (and different processing code
+internally) is what makes it necessary to have different subtypes: this enables
+\LUATEX\ to distinguish this sequence of two joined discretionary nodes from the
+case of two standalone discretionaries appearing in a row.
+
+Of course there is still that relationship with fonts: ligatures can be implemented by
+mapping a sequence of glyphs onto one glyph, but also by selective replacement and
+kerning. This means that the above examples are just representing the traditional
+approach.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Breaking paragraphs into lines}]
+
+\topicindex {linebreaks}
+\topicindex {paragraphs}
+\topicindex {discretionaries}
+
+This code is almost unchanged, but because of the above|-|mentioned changes
+with respect to discretionaries and ligatures, line breaking will potentially be
+different from traditional \TEX. The actual line breaking code is still based on
+the \TEX82 algorithms, and it does not expect there to be discretionaries inside
+of discretionaries. But, as patterns evolve and font handling can influence
+discretionaries, you need to be aware of the fact that long term consistency is not
+an engine matter only.
+
+But that situation is now fairly common in \LUATEX, due to the changes to the
+ligaturing mechanism. And also, the \LUATEX\ discretionary nodes are implemented
+slightly different from the \TEX82 nodes: the \type {no_break} text is now
+embedded inside the disc node, where previously these nodes kept their place in
+the horizontal list. In traditional \TEX\ the discretionary node contains a
+counter indicating how many nodes to skip, but in \LUATEX\ we store the pre, post
+and replace text in the discretionary node.
+
+The combined effect of these two differences is that \LUATEX\ does not always use
+all of the potential breakpoints in a paragraph, especially when fonts with many
+ligatures are used. Of course kerning also complicates matters here.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {lang} library}][library=lang]
+
+\subsection {\type {new} and \type {id}}
+
+\topicindex {languages+library}
+
+\libindex {new}
+\libindex {id}
+
+This library provides the interface to \LUATEX's structure representing a
+language, and the associated functions.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<language> l = lang.new()
+<language> l = lang.new(<number> id)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function creates a new userdata object. An object of type \type {<language>}
+is the first argument to most of the other functions in the \type {lang} library.
+These functions can also be used as if they were object methods, using the colon
+syntax. Without an argument, the next available internal id number will be
+assigned to this object. With argument, an object will be created that links to
+the internal language with that id number.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = lang.id(<language> l)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The number returned is the internal \prm {language} id number this object refers to.
+
+\subsection {\type {hyphenation}}
+
+\libindex {hyphenation}
+
+You can hyphenate a string directly with:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> n = lang.hyphenation(<language> l)
+lang.hyphenation(<language> l, <string> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection {\type {clear_hyphenation} and \type {clean}}
+
+\libindex {clear_hyphenation}
+\libindex {clean}
+
+This either returns the current hyphenation exceptions for this language, or adds
+new ones. The syntax of the string is explained in~\in {section}
+[patternsexceptions].
+
+\startfunctioncall
+lang.clear_hyphenation(<language> l)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This call clears the exception dictionary (string) for this language.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> n = lang.clean(<language> l, <string> o)
+<string> n = lang.clean(<string> o)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function creates a hyphenation key from the supplied hyphenation value. The
+syntax of the argument string is explained in \in {section} [patternsexceptions].
+This function is useful if you want to do something else based on the words in a
+dictionary file, like spell|-|checking.
+
+\subsection {\type {patterns} and \type {clear_patterns}}
+
+\libindex {patterns}
+\libindex {clear_patterns}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> n = lang.patterns(<language> l)
+lang.patterns(<language> l, <string> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This adds additional patterns for this language object, or returns the current
+set. The syntax of this string is explained in \in {section}
+[patternsexceptions].
+
+\startfunctioncall
+lang.clear_patterns(<language> l)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This can be used to clear the pattern dictionary for a language.
+
+\subsection {\type {hyphenationmin}}
+
+\libindex {hyphenationmin}
+
+This function sets (or gets) the value of the \TEX\ parameter
+\type {\hyphenationmin}.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+n = lang.hyphenationmin(<language> l)
+lang.hyphenationmin(<language> l, <number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection {\type {[pre|post][ex|]hyphenchar}}
+
+\libindex {prehyphenchar}
+\libindex {posthyphenchar}
+\libindex {preexhyphenchar}
+\libindex {postexhyphenchar}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = lang.prehyphenchar(<language> l)
+lang.prehyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
+
+<number> n = lang.posthyphenchar(<language> l)
+lang.posthyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+These two are used to get or set the \quote {pre|-|break} and \quote
+{post|-|break} hyphen characters for implicit hyphenation in this language. The
+intial values are decimal 45 (hyphen) and decimal~0 (indicating emptiness).
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = lang.preexhyphenchar(<language> l)
+lang.preexhyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
+
+<number> n = lang.postexhyphenchar(<language> l)
+lang.postexhyphenchar(<language> l, <number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+These gets or set the \quote {pre|-|break} and \quote {post|-|break} hyphen
+characters for explicit hyphenation in this language. Both are initially
+decimal~0 (indicating emptiness).
+
+\subsection {\type {hyphenate}}
+
+\libindex {hyphenate}
+
+The next call inserts hyphenation points (discretionary nodes) in a node list. If
+\type {tail} is given as argument, processing stops on that node. Currently,
+\type {success} is always true if \type {head} (and \type {tail}, if specified)
+are proper nodes, regardless of possible other errors.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean> success = lang.hyphenate(<node> head)
+<boolean> success = lang.hyphenate(<node> head, <node> tail)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Hyphenation works only on \quote {characters}, a special subtype of all the glyph
+nodes with the node subtype having the value \type {1}. Glyph modes with
+different subtypes are not processed. See \in {section} [charsandglyphs] for
+more details.
+
+\subsection {\type {[set|get]hjcode}}
+
+\libindex {sethjcode}
+\libindex {gethjcode}
+
+The following two commands can be used to set or query hj codes:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+lang.sethjcode(<language> l, <number> char, <number> usedchar)
+<number> usedchar = lang.gethjcode(<language> l, <number> char)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+When you set a hjcode the current sets get initialized unless the set was already
+initialized due to \prm {savinghyphcodes} being larger than zero.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
+
+% \parindent0pt \hsize=1.1cm
+% 12-34-56 \par
+% 12-34-\hbox{56} \par
+% 12-34-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex \par
+% 12-\hbox{34}-56 \par
+% 12-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex-56 \par
+% \hjcode`\1=`\1 \hjcode`\2=`\2 \hjcode`\3=`\3 \hjcode`\4=`\4 \vskip.5cm
+% 12-34-56 \par
+% 12-34-\hbox{56} \par
+% 12-34-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex \par
+% 12-\hbox{34}-56 \par
+% 12-\vrule width 1em height 1.5ex-56 \par
+
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-logos.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-logos.tex
index d67ce5c0b1..3172336ec3 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-logos.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-logos.tex
@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
-\startenvironment luatex-logos
-
-\usemodule[abr-02]
-
-\logo[DFONT] {dfont}
-\logo[CFF] {cff}
-\logo[CMAP] {CMap}
-\logo[PATGEN] {patgen}
-\logo[MP] {MetaPost}
-\logo[METAPOST] {MetaPost}
-\logo[MPLIB] {MPlib}
-\logo[COCO] {coco}
-\logo[SUNOS] {SunOS}
-\logo[BSD] {bsd}
-\logo[SYSV] {sysv}
-\logo[DPI] {dpi}
-\logo[DLL] {dll}
-\logo[OPENOFFICE]{OpenOffice}
-\logo[OCP] {OCP}
-
-\stopenvironment
+\startenvironment luatex-logos
+
+\usemodule[abr-02]
+
+\logo[DFONT] {dfont}
+\logo[CFF] {cff}
+\logo[CMAP] {CMap}
+\logo[PATGEN] {patgen}
+\logo[MP] {MetaPost}
+\logo[METAPOST] {MetaPost}
+\logo[MPLIB] {MPlib}
+\logo[COCO] {coco}
+\logo[SUNOS] {SunOS}
+\logo[BSD] {bsd}
+\logo[SYSV] {sysv}
+\logo[DPI] {dpi}
+\logo[DLL] {dll}
+\logo[OPENOFFICE]{OpenOffice}
+\logo[OCP] {OCP}
+
+\stopenvironment
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-lua.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-lua.tex
index 3d6d20c35d..f9107fa1f9 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-lua.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-lua.tex
@@ -1,760 +1,760 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-lua
-
-\startchapter[reference=lua,title={Using \LUATEX}]
-
-\startsection[title={Initialization},reference=init]
-
-\startsubsection[title={\LUATEX\ as a \LUA\ interpreter}]
-
-\topicindex {initialization}
-\topicindex {\LUA+interpreter}
-
-There are some situations that make \LUATEX\ behave like a standalone \LUA\
-interpreter:
-
-\startitemize[packed]
-\startitem
- if a \type {--luaonly} option is given on the commandline, or
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- if the executable is named \type {texlua} or \type {luatexlua}, or
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- if the only non|-|option argument (file) on the commandline has the extension
- \type {lua} or \type {luc}.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-In this mode, it will set \LUA's \type {arg[0]} to the found script name, pushing
-preceding options in negative values and the rest of the command line in the
-positive values, just like the \LUA\ interpreter.
-
-\LUATEX\ will exit immediately after executing the specified \LUA\ script and is,
-in effect, a somewhat bulky stand alone \LUA\ interpreter with a bunch of extra
-preloaded libraries.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\LUATEX\ as a \LUA\ byte compiler}]
-
-\topicindex {\LUA+byte code}
-
-There are two situations that make \LUATEX\ behave like the \LUA\ byte compiler:
-
-\startitemize[packed]
-\startitem if a \type {--luaconly} option is given on the command line, or \stopitem
-\startitem if the executable is named \type {texluac} \stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-In this mode, \LUATEX\ is exactly like \type {luac} from the stand alone \LUA\
-distribution, except that it does not have the \type {-l} switch, and that it
-accepts (but ignores) the \type {--luaconly} switch. The current version of \LUA\
-can dump bytecode using \type {string.dump} so we might decide to drop this
-version of \LUATEX.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Other commandline processing}]
-
-\topicindex {command line}
-
-When the \LUATEX\ executable starts, it looks for the \type {--lua} command line
-option. If there is no \type {--lua} option, the command line is interpreted in a
-similar fashion as the other \TEX\ engines. Some options are accepted but have no
-consequence. The following command|-|line options are understood:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB commandline argument \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{--credits} \NC display credits and exit \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--debug-format} \NC enable format debugging \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--draftmode} \NC switch on draft mode i.e.\ generate no output in \PDF\ mode \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--[no-]file-line-error} \NC disable/enable \type {file:line:error} style messages \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--[no-]file-line-error-style} \NC aliases of \type {--[no-]file-line-error} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--fmt=FORMAT} \NC load the format file \type {FORMAT} \NC\NR
-\NC \type{--halt-on-error} \NC stop processing at the first error\NC \NR
-\NC \type{--help} \NC display help and exit \NC\NR
-\NC \type{--ini} \NC be \type {iniluatex}, for dumping formats \NC\NR
-\NC \type{--interaction=STRING} \NC set interaction mode: \type {batchmode}, \type {nonstopmode},
- \type {scrollmode} or \type {errorstopmode} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--jobname=STRING} \NC set the job name to \type {STRING} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--kpathsea-debug=NUMBER} \NC set path searching debugging flags according to the bits of
- \type {NUMBER} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--lua=FILE} \NC load and execute a \LUA\ initialization script \NC\NR
-\NC \type{--[no-]mktex=FMT} \NC disable/enable \type {mktexFMT} generation with \type {FMT} is
- \type {tex} or \type {tfm} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--nosocket} \NC disable the \LUA\ socket library \NC\NR
-\NC \type{--output-comment=STRING} \NC use \type {STRING} for \DVI\ file comment instead of date (no
- effect for \PDF) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--output-directory=DIR} \NC use \type {DIR} as the directory to write files to \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--output-format=FORMAT} \NC use \type {FORMAT} for job output; \type {FORMAT} is \type {dvi}
- or \type {pdf} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--progname=STRING} \NC set the program name to \type {STRING} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--recorder} \NC enable filename recorder \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--safer} \NC disable easily exploitable \LUA\ commands \NC\NR
-\NC \type{--[no-]shell-escape} \NC disable/enable system calls \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--shell-restricted} \NC restrict system calls to a list of commands given in \type
- {texmf.cnf} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--synctex=NUMBER} \NC enable \type {synctex} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--utc} \NC use utc times when applicable \NC \NR
-\NC \type{--version} \NC display version and exit \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-We don't support \prm {write} 18 because \type {os.execute} can do the same. It
-simplifies the code and makes more write targets possible.
-
-The value to use for \prm {jobname} is decided as follows:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- If \type {--jobname} is given on the command line, its argument will be the
- value for \prm {jobname}, without any changes. The argument will not be
- used for actual input so it need not exist. The \type {--jobname} switch only
- controls the \prm {jobname} setting.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Otherwise, \prm {jobname} will be the name of the first file that is read
- from the file system, with any path components and the last extension (the
- part following the last \type {.}) stripped off.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- There is an exception to the previous point: if the command line goes into
- interactive mode (by starting with a command) and there are no files input
- via \prm {everyjob} either, then the \prm {jobname} is set to \type
- {texput} as a last resort.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The file names for output files that are generated automatically are created by
-attaching the proper extension (\type {log}, \type {pdf}, etc.) to the found
-\prm {jobname}. These files are created in the directory pointed to by \type
-{--output-directory}, or in the current directory, if that switch is not present.
-
-Without the \type {--lua} option, command line processing works like it does in
-any other \WEBC|-|based typesetting engine, except that \LUATEX\ has a few extra
-switches and lacks some others. Also, if the \type {--lua} option is present,
-\LUATEX\ will enter an alternative mode of command line processing in comparison
-to the standard \WEBC\ programs. In this mode, a small series of actions is taken
-in the following order:
-
-\startitemize[n]
-
-\startitem
- First, it will parse the command line as usual, but it will only interpret a
- small subset of the options immediately: \type {--safer}, \type {--nosocket},
- \type {--[no-]shell-escape}, \type {--enable-write18}, \type
- {--disable-write18}, \type {--shell-restricted}, \type {--help}, \type
- {--version}, and \type {--credits}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Next \LUATEX\ searches for the requested \LUA\ initialization script. If it
- cannot be found using the actual name given on the command line, a second
- attempt is made by prepending the value of the environment variable \type
- {LUATEXDIR}, if that variable is defined in the environment.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Then it checks the various safety switches. You can use those to disable some
- \LUA\ commands that can easily be abused by a malicious document. At the
- moment, \type {--safer} \type {nil}s the following functions:
-
- \blank
-
- \starttabulate[|c|l|]
- \DB library \BC functions \NC \NR
- \TB
- \NC \type {os} \NC \type {execute} \type {exec} \type {spawn} \type {setenv}
- \type {rename} \type {remove} \type {tmpdir} \NC \NR
- \NC \type {io} \NC \type {popen} \type {output} \type {tmpfile} \NC \NR
- \NC \type {lfs} \NC \type {rmdir} \type {mkdir} \type {chdir} \type {lock}
- \type {touch} \NC \NR
- \LL
- \stoptabulate
-
- \blank
-
- Furthermore, it disables loading of compiled \LUA\ libraries and it makes
- \type {io.open()} fail on files that are opened for anything besides reading.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- When \LUATEX\ starts it sets the \type {locale} to a neutral value. If for
- some reason you use \type {os.locale}, you need to make sure you \type {nil}
- it afterwards because otherwise it can interfere with code that for instance
- generates dates. You can ignore the \type {locale} with:
-
- \starttyping
- os.setlocale(nil,nil)
- \stoptyping
-
- The \type {--nosocket} option makes the socket library unavailable, so that \LUA\
- cannot use networking.
-
- The switches \type {--[no-]shell-escape}, \type {--[enable|disable]-write18}, and
- \type {--shell-restricted} have the same effects as in \PDFTEX, and additionally
- make \type {io.popen()}, \type {os.execute}, \type {os.exec} and \type {os.spawn}
- adhere to the requested option.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Next the initialization script is loaded and executed. From within the
- script, the entire command line is available in the \LUA\ table \type {arg},
- beginning with \type {arg[0]}, containing the name of the executable. As
- consequence warnings about unrecognized options are suppressed.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-Command line processing happens very early on. So early, in fact, that none of
-\TEX's initializations have taken place yet. For that reason, the tables that
-deal with typesetting, like \type {tex}, \type {token}, \type {node} and
-\type {pdf}, are off|-|limits during the execution of the startup file (they
-are \type {nil}'d). Special care is taken that \type {texio.write} and \type
-{texio.write_nl} function properly, so that you can at least report your actions
-to the log file when (and if) it eventually becomes opened (note that \TEX\ does
-not even know its \prm {jobname} yet at this point).
-
-Everything you do in the \LUA\ initialization script will remain visible during
-the rest of the run, with the exception of the \TEX\ specific libraries like
-\type {tex}, \type {token}, \type {node} and \type {pdf} tables. These will be
-initialized to their documented state after the execution of the script. You
-should not store anything in variables or within tables with these four global
-names, as they will be overwritten completely.
-
-We recommend you use the startup file only for your own \TEX|-|independent
-initializations (if you need any), to parse the command line, set values in the
-\type {texconfig} table, and register the callbacks you need.
-
-\LUATEX\ allows some of the command line options to be overridden by reading
-values from the \type {texconfig} table at the end of script execution (see the
-description of the \type {texconfig} table later on in this document for more
-details on which ones exactly).
-
-Unless the \type {texconfig} table tells \LUATEX\ not to initialize \KPATHSEA\
-at all (set \type {texconfig.kpse_init} to \type {false} for that), \LUATEX\
-acts on some more command line options after the initialization script is
-finished: in order to initialize the built|-|in \KPATHSEA\ library properly,
-\LUATEX\ needs to know the correct program name to use, and for that it needs to
-check \type {--progname}, or \type {--ini} and \type {--fmt}, if \type
-{--progname} is missing.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={\LUA\ behaviour}]
-
-\startsubsection[title={The \LUA\ version}]
-
-\topicindex {\LUA+libraries}
-\topicindex {\LUA+extensions}
-
-We currently use \LUA\ 5.3 and will follow developments of the language but
-normally with some delay. Therefore the user needs to keep an eye on (subtle)
-differences in successive versions of the language. Also, \LUAJITTEX\ lags behind
-in the sense that \LUAJIT\ is not in sync with regular \LUA\ development. Here is
-an example of one aspect.
-
-\LUA s \type {tostring} function (and \type {string.format} may return values in
-scientific notation, thereby confusing the \TEX\ end of things when it is used as
-the right|-|hand side of an assignment to a \prm {dimen} or \prm {count}. The
-output of these serializers also depend on the \LUA\ version, so in \LUA\ 5.3 you
-can get different output than from 5.2.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Integration in the \TDS\ ecosystem}]
-
-The main \TEX\ distributions follow the \TEX\ directory structure (\TDS).
-\LUATEX\ is able to use the kpathsea library to find \type {require()}d modules.
-For this purpose, \type {package.searchers[2]} is replaced by a different loader
-function, that decides at runtime whether to use kpathsea or the built|-|in core
-\LUA\ function. It uses \KPATHSEA\ when that is already initialized at that point
-in time, otherwise it reverts to using the normal \type {package.path} loader.
-
-Initialization of \KPATHSEA\ can happen either implicitly (when \LUATEX\ starts
-up and the startup script has not set \type {texconfig.kpse_init} to false), or
-explicitly by calling the \LUA\ function \type {kpse.set_program_name()}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Loading libraries}]
-
-\LUATEX\ is able to use dynamically loadable \LUA\ libraries, unless
-\type {--safer} was given as an option on the command line. For this purpose,
-\type {package.searchers[3]} is replaced by a different loader function, that
-decides at runtime whether to use \KPATHSEA\ or the built|-|in core \LUA\
-function. It uses \KPATHSEA\ when that is already initialized at that point in
-time, otherwise it reverts to using the normal \type {package.cpath} loader.
-
-This functionality required an extension to kpathsea. There is a new kpathsea
-file format: \type {kpse_clua_format} that searches for files with extension
-\type {.dll} and \type {.so}. The \type {texmf.cnf} setting for this variable is
-\type {CLUAINPUTS}, and by default it has this value:
-
-\starttyping
-CLUAINPUTS=.:$SELFAUTOLOC/lib/{$progname,$engine,}/lua//
-\stoptyping
-
-This path is imperfect (it requires a \TDS\ subtree below the binaries
-directory), but the architecture has to be in the path somewhere, and the
-currently simplest way to do that is to search below the binaries directory only.
-Of course it no big deal to write an alternative loader and use that in a macro
-package. One level up (a \type {lib} directory parallel to \type {bin}) would
-have been nicer, but that is not doable because \TEXLIVE\ uses a \type
-{bin/<arch>} structure.
-
-Loading dynamic \LUA\ libraries will fail if there are two \LUA\ libraries loaded
-at the same time (which will typically happen on \type {win32}, because there is
-one \LUA\ 5.3 inside \LUATEX, and another will likely be linked to the \DLL\ file
-of the module itself).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Executing programs}]
-
-In keeping with the other \TEX|-|like programs in \TEXLIVE, the two \LUA\ functions
-\type {os.execute} and \type {io.popen}, as well as the two new functions \type
-{os.exec} and \type {os.spawn} that are explained below, take the value of \type
-{shell_escape} and|/|or \type {shell_escape_commands} in account. Whenever
-\LUATEX\ is run with the assumed intention to typeset a document (and by that we
-mean that it is called as \type {luatex}, as opposed to \type {texlua}, and that
-the command line option \type {--luaonly} was not given), it will only run the
-four functions above if the matching \type {texmf.cnf} variable(s) or their \type
-{texconfig} (see \in {section} [texconfig]) counterparts allow execution of the
-requested system command. In \quote {script interpreter} runs of \LUATEX, these
-settings have no effect, and all four functions have their original meaning.
-
-Some libraries have a few more functions, either coded in \CCODE\ or in \LUA. For
-instance, when we started with \LUATEX\ we added some helpers to the \type
-{luafilesystem} namespace \type {lfs}. The two boolean functions \type
-{lfs.isdir} and \type {lfs.isfile} were speedy and better variants of what could
-be done with \type {lfs.attributes}. The additional function \type
-{lfs.shortname} takes a file name and returns its short name on \type {win32}
-platforms. Finally, for non|-|\type {win32} platforms only, we provided \type
-{lfs.readlink} that takes an existing symbolic link as argument and returns its
-name. However, the \type library evolved so we have dropped these in favour of
-pure \LUA\ variants. The \type {shortname} helper is obsolete and now just
-returns the name.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Multibyte \type {string} functions}]
-
-The \type {string} library has a few extra functions, for example \libidx
-{string} {explode}. This function takes upto two arguments: \type
-{string.explode(s[,m])} and returns an array containing the string argument \type
-{s} split into sub-strings based on the value of the string argument \type {m}.
-The second argument is a string that is either empty (this splits the string into
-characters), a single character (this splits on each occurrence of that
-character, possibly introducing empty strings), or a single character followed by
-the plus sign \type {+} (this special version does not create empty sub-strings).
-The default value for \type {m} is \quote {\type { +}} (multiple spaces). Note:
-\type {m} is not hidden by surrounding braces as it would be if this function was
-written in \TEX\ macros.
-
-The \type {string} library also has six extra iterators that return strings
-piecemeal: \libidx {string} {utfvalues}, \libidx {string} {utfcharacters},
-\libidx {string} {characters}, \libidx {string} {characterpairs}, \libidx
-{string} {bytes} and \libidx {string} {bytepairs}.
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- \type {string.utfvalues(s)}: an integer value in the \UNICODE\ range
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {string.utfcharacters(s)}: a string with a single \UTF-8 token in it
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {string.cWharacters(s)}: a string containing one byte
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {string.characterpairs(s)}: two strings each containing one byte or an
- empty second string if the string length was odd
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {string.bytes(s)}: a single byte value
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {string.bytepairs(s)}: two byte values or nil instead of a number as
- its second return value if the string length was odd
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The \type {string.characterpairs()} and \type {string.bytepairs()} iterators
-are useful especially in the conversion of \UTF16 encoded data into \UTF8.
-
-There is also a two|-|argument form of \type {string.dump()}. The second argument
-is a boolean which, if true, strips the symbols from the dumped data. This
-matches an extension made in \type {luajit}. This is typically a function that
-gets adapted as \LUA\ itself progresses.
-
-The \type {string} library functions \type {len}, \type {lower}, \type {sub}
-etc.\ are not \UNICODE|-|aware. For strings in the \UTF8 encoding, i.e., strings
-containing characters above code point 127, the corresponding functions from the
-\type {slnunicode} library can be used, e.g., \type {unicode.utf8.len}, \type
-{unicode.utf8.lower} etc.\ The exceptions are \type {unicode.utf8.find}, that
-always returns byte positions in a string, and \type {unicode.utf8.match} and
-\type {unicode.utf8.gmatch}. While the latter two functions in general {\it
-are} \UNICODE|-|aware, they fall|-|back to non|-|\UNICODE|-|aware behavior when
-using the empty capture \type {()} but other captures work as expected. For the
-interpretation of character classes in \type {unicode.utf8} functions refer to
-the library sources at \hyphenatedurl {http://luaforge.net/projects/sln}.
-
-Version 5.3 of \LUA\ provides some native \UTF8 support but we have added a few
-similar helpers too: \libidx {string} {utfvalue}, \libidx {string} {utfcharacter}
-and \libidx {string} {utflength}.
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- \type {string.utfvalue(s)}: returns the codepoints of the characters in the
- given string
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {string.utfcharacter(c,...)}: returns a string with the characters of
- the given code points
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {string.utflength(s)}: returns the length oif the given string
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-These three functions are relative fast and don't do much checking. They can be
-used as building blocks for other helpers.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Extra \type {os} library functions}]
-
-The \type {os} library has a few extra functions and variables: \libidx {os}
-{selfdir}, \libidx {os} {exec}, \libidx {os} {spawn}, \libidx {os} {setenv},
-\libidx {os} {env}, \libidx {os} {gettimeofday}, \libidx {os} {times}, \libidx
-{os} {tmpdir}, \libidx {os} {type}, \libidx {os} {name} and \libidx {os} {uname},
-that we will discuss here.
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.selfdir} is a variable that holds the directory path of the
- actual executable. For example: \type {\directlua {tex.sprint(os.selfdir)}}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.exec(commandline)} is a variation on \type {os.execute}. Here
- \type {commandline} can be either a single string or a single table.
-
- \startitemize
-
- \startitem
- If the argument is a table \LUATEX\ first checks if there is a value at
- integer index zero. If there is, this is the command to be executed.
- Otherwise, it will use the value at integer index one. If neither are
- present, nothing at all happens.
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- The set of consecutive values starting at integer~1 in the table are the
- arguments that are passed on to the command (the value at index~1 becomes
- \type {arg[0]}). The command is searched for in the execution path, so
- there is normally no need to pass on a fully qualified path name.
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- If the argument is a string, then it is automatically converted into a
- table by splitting on whitespace. In this case, it is impossible for the
- command and first argument to differ from each other.
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- In the string argument format, whitespace can be protected by putting
- (part of) an argument inside single or double quotes. One layer of quotes
- is interpreted by \LUATEX, and all occurrences of \type {\"}, \type {\'}
- or \type {\\} within the quoted text are unescaped. In the table format,
- there is no string handling taking place.
- \stopitem
-
- \stopitemize
-
- This function normally does not return control back to the \LUA\ script: the
- command will replace the current process. However, it will return the two
- values \type {nil} and \type {error} if there was a problem while
- attempting to execute the command.
-
- On \MSWINDOWS, the current process is actually kept in memory until after the
- execution of the command has finished. This prevents crashes in situations
- where \TEXLUA\ scripts are run inside integrated \TEX\ environments.
-
- The original reason for this command is that it cleans out the current
- process before starting the new one, making it especially useful for use in
- \TEXLUA.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.spawn(commandline)} is a returning version of \type {os.exec},
- with otherwise identical calling conventions.
-
- If the command ran ok, then the return value is the exit status of the
- command. Otherwise, it will return the two values \type {nil} and \type
- {error}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.setenv(key,value)} sets a variable in the environment. Passing
- \type {nil} instead of a value string will remove the variable.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.env} is a hash table containing a dump of the variables and
- values in the process environment at the start of the run. It is writeable,
- but the actual environment is \notabene {not} updated automatically.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.gettimeofday()} returns the current \quote {\UNIX\ time}, but as a
- float. This function is not available on the \SUNOS\ platforms, so do not use
- this function for portable documents.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.times()}returns the current process times according to \ the
- \UNIX\ C library function \quote {times}. This function is not available on
- the \MSWINDOWS\ and \SUNOS\ platforms, so do not use this function for
- portable documents.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.tmpdir()} creates a directory in the \quote {current directory}
- with the name \type {luatex.XXXXXX} where the \type {X}-es are replaced by a
- unique string. The function also returns this string, so you can \type
- {lfs.chdir()} into it, or \type {nil} if it failed to create the directory.
- The user is responsible for cleaning up at the end of the run, it does not
- happen automatically.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.type} is a string that gives a global indication of the class of
- operating system. The possible values are currently \type {windows}, \type
- {unix}, and \type {msdos} (you are unlikely to find this value \quote {in the
- wild}).
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.name} is a string that gives a more precise indication of the
- operating system. These possible values are not yet fixed, and for \type
- {os.type} values \type {windows} and \type {msdos}, the \type {os.name}
- values are simply \type {windows} and \type {msdos}
-
- The list for the type \type {unix} is more precise: \type {linux}, \type
- {freebsd}, \type {kfreebsd}, \type {cygwin}, \type {openbsd}, \type
- {solaris}, \type {sunos} (pre-solaris), \type {hpux}, \type {irix}, \type
- {macosx}, \type {gnu} (hurd), \type {bsd} (unknown, but \BSD|-|like), \type
- {sysv} (unknown, but \SYSV|-|like), \type {generic} (unknown).
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {os.uname} returns a table with specific operating system
- information acquired at runtime. The keys in the returned table are all
- string values, and their names are: \type {sysname}, \type {machine}, \type
- {release}, \type {version}, and \type {nodename}.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Binary input from files with \type {fio}}]
-
-There is a whole set of helpers for reading numbers and strings from a file:
-\libidx {fio} {readcardinal1}, \libidx {fio} {readcardinal2}, \libidx {fio}
-{readcardinal3}, \libidx {fio} {readcardinal4}, \libidx {fio}
-{readcardinaltable}, \libidx {fio} {readinteger1}, \libidx {fio} {readinteger2},
-\libidx {fio} {readinteger3}, \libidx {fio} {readinteger4}, \libidx {fio}
-{readintegertable}, \libidx {fio} {readfixed2}, \libidx {fio} {readfixed4},
-\libidx {fio} {read2dot14}, \libidx {fio} {setposition}, \libidx {fio}
-{getposition}, \libidx {fio} {skipposition}, \libidx {fio} {readbytes}, \libidx
-{fio} {readbytetable}. They work on normal \LUA\ file handles.
-
-%libidx{fio}{readline}
-%libidx{fio}{recordfilename}
-%libidx{fio}{checkpermission}
-
-This library provides a set of functions for reading numbers from a file and
-in addition to the regular \type {io} library functions.
-
-\starttabulate
-\NC \type{readcardinal1(f)} \NC a 1 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readcardinal2(f)} \NC a 2 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readcardinal3(f)} \NC a 3 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readcardinal4(f)} \NC a 4 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readcardinaltable(f,n,b)} \NC \type {n} cardinals of \type {b} bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readinteger1(f)} \NC a 1 byte signed integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readinteger2(f)} \NC a 2 byte signed integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readinteger3(f)} \NC a 3 byte signed integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readinteger4(f)} \NC a 4 byte signed integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readintegertable(f,n,b)} \NC \type {n} integers of \type {b} bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readfixed2(f)} \NC a 2 byte float (used in font files) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readfixed4(f)} \NC a 4 byte float (used in font files) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{read2dot14(f)} \NC a 2 byte float (used in font files) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{setposition(f,p)} \NC goto position \type {p} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getposition(f)} \NC get the current position \NC \NR
-\NC \type{skipposition(f,n)} \NC skip \type {n} positions \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readbytes(f,n)} \NC \type {n} bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{readbytetable(f,n)} \NC \type {n} bytes\NC \NR
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Binary input from strings with \type {sio}}]
-
-A similar set of function as in the \type {fio} library is available in the \type
-{sio} library: \libidx {sio} {readcardinal1}, \libidx {sio} {readcardinal2},
-\libidx {sio} {readcardinal3}, \libidx {sio} {readcardinal4}, \libidx {sio}
-{readcardinaltable}, \libidx {sio} {readinteger1}, \libidx {sio} {readinteger2},
-\libidx {sio} {readinteger3}, \libidx {sio} {readinteger4}, \libidx {sio}
-{readintegertable}, \libidx {sio} {readfixed2}, \libidx {sio} {readfixed4},
-\libidx {sio} {read2dot14}, \libidx {sio} {setposition}, \libidx {sio}
-{getposition}, \libidx {sio} {skipposition}, \libidx {sio} {readbytes} and
-\libidx {sio} {readbytetable}. Here the first argument is a string instead of a
-file handle. More details can be found in the previous section.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Hashes conform \type {sha2}}]
-
-This library is a side effect of the \type {pdfe} library that needs such
-helpers. The \libidx{sha2}{digest256}, \libidx{sha2}{digest384} and
-\libidx{sha2}{digest512} functions accept a string and return a string with the
-hash.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Locales}]
-
-\index {locales}
-
-In stock \LUA, many things depend on the current locale. In \LUATEX, we can't do
-that, because it makes documents unportable. While \LUATEX\ is running if
-forces the following locale settings:
-
-\starttyping
-LC_CTYPE=C
-LC_COLLATE=C
-LC_NUMERIC=C
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={\LUA\ modules}]
-
-\topicindex {\LUA+libraries}
-\topicindex {\LUA+modules}
-
-Some modules that are normally external to \LUA\ are statically linked in with
-\LUATEX, because they offer useful functionality:
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- \type {lpeg}, by Roberto Ierusalimschy, \hyphenatedurl
- {http://www.inf.puc-rio.br/~roberto/lpeg/lpeg.html}. This library is not
- \UNICODE|-|aware, but interprets strings on a byte|-|per|-|byte basis. This
- mainly means that \type {lpeg.S} cannot be used with \UTF8 characters encoded
- in more than two bytes, and thus \type {lpeg.S} will look for one of those
- two bytes when matching, not the combination of the two. The same is true for
- \type {lpeg.R}, although the latter will display an error message if used
- with multibyte characters. Therefore \type {lpeg.R('aä')} results in the
- message \type {bad argument #1 to 'R' (range must have two characters)},
- since to \type {lpeg}, \type {ä} is two 'characters' (bytes), so \type {aä}
- totals three. In practice this is no real issue and with some care you can
- deal with \UNICODE\ just fine.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {slnunicode}, from the \type {selene} libraries, \hyphenatedurl
- {http://luaforge.net/projects/sln}. This library has been slightly extended
- so that the \type {unicode.utf8.*} functions also accept the first 256 values
- of plane~18. This is the range \LUATEX\ uses for raw binary output, as
- explained above. We have no plans to provide more like this because you can
- basically do all that you want in \LUA.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {luazip}, from the kepler project, \hyphenatedurl
- {http://www.keplerproject.org/luazip/}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {luafilesystem}, also from the kepler project, \hyphenatedurl
- {http://www.keplerproject.org/luafilesystem/}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {lzlib}, by Tiago Dionizio, \hyphenatedurl
- {http://luaforge.net/projects/lzlib/}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {md5}, by Roberto Ierusalimschy \hyphenatedurl
- {http://www.inf.puc-rio.br/~roberto/md5/md5-5/md5.html}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \type {luasocket}, by Diego Nehab \hyphenatedurl
- {http://w3.impa.br/~diego/software/luasocket/}. The \type {.lua} support
- modules from \type {luasocket} are also preloaded inside the executable,
- there are no external file dependencies.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Testing}]
-
-\topicindex {testing}
-\topicindex {\PDF+date}
-
-For development reasons you can influence the used startup date and time. This can
-be done in two ways.
-
-\startitemize[n]
-
-\startitem
- By setting the environmment variable \type {SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH}. This will
- influence the \TEX\ parameters \type {time} and \type {date}, the random seed,
- the \PDF\ timestamp and the \PDF\ id that is derived from the time as well. This
- variable is consulted when the \KPSE\ library is enabled. Resolving is
- delegated to this library.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- By setting the \type {start_time} variable in the \type {texconfig} table; as
- with other variables we use the internal name there. For compatibility
- reasons we also honour a \type {SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} entry. It should be noted
- that there are no such variables in other engines and this method is only
- relevant in case the while setup happens in \LUA.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-When Universal Time is needed, you can pass the flag \type {utc} to the engine. This
-property also works when the date and time are set by \LUATEX\ itself. It has a
-complementary entry \type {use_utc_time} in the \type {texconfig} table.
-
-There is some control possible, for instance prevent filename to be written to
-the \PDF\ file. This is discussed elsewhere. In \CONTEXT\ we provide the command
-line argument \type {--nodates} that does a bit more disabling of dates.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-lua
+
+\startchapter[reference=lua,title={Using \LUATEX}]
+
+\startsection[title={Initialization},reference=init]
+
+\startsubsection[title={\LUATEX\ as a \LUA\ interpreter}]
+
+\topicindex {initialization}
+\topicindex {\LUA+interpreter}
+
+There are some situations that make \LUATEX\ behave like a standalone \LUA\
+interpreter:
+
+\startitemize[packed]
+\startitem
+ if a \type {--luaonly} option is given on the commandline, or
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ if the executable is named \type {texlua} or \type {luatexlua}, or
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ if the only non|-|option argument (file) on the commandline has the extension
+ \type {lua} or \type {luc}.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+In this mode, it will set \LUA's \type {arg[0]} to the found script name, pushing
+preceding options in negative values and the rest of the command line in the
+positive values, just like the \LUA\ interpreter.
+
+\LUATEX\ will exit immediately after executing the specified \LUA\ script and is,
+in effect, a somewhat bulky stand alone \LUA\ interpreter with a bunch of extra
+preloaded libraries.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\LUATEX\ as a \LUA\ byte compiler}]
+
+\topicindex {\LUA+byte code}
+
+There are two situations that make \LUATEX\ behave like the \LUA\ byte compiler:
+
+\startitemize[packed]
+\startitem if a \type {--luaconly} option is given on the command line, or \stopitem
+\startitem if the executable is named \type {texluac} \stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+In this mode, \LUATEX\ is exactly like \type {luac} from the stand alone \LUA\
+distribution, except that it does not have the \type {-l} switch, and that it
+accepts (but ignores) the \type {--luaconly} switch. The current version of \LUA\
+can dump bytecode using \type {string.dump} so we might decide to drop this
+version of \LUATEX.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Other commandline processing}]
+
+\topicindex {command line}
+
+When the \LUATEX\ executable starts, it looks for the \type {--lua} command line
+option. If there is no \type {--lua} option, the command line is interpreted in a
+similar fashion as the other \TEX\ engines. Some options are accepted but have no
+consequence. The following command|-|line options are understood:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB commandline argument \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{--credits} \NC display credits and exit \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--debug-format} \NC enable format debugging \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--draftmode} \NC switch on draft mode i.e.\ generate no output in \PDF\ mode \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--[no-]file-line-error} \NC disable/enable \type {file:line:error} style messages \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--[no-]file-line-error-style} \NC aliases of \type {--[no-]file-line-error} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--fmt=FORMAT} \NC load the format file \type {FORMAT} \NC\NR
+\NC \type{--halt-on-error} \NC stop processing at the first error\NC \NR
+\NC \type{--help} \NC display help and exit \NC\NR
+\NC \type{--ini} \NC be \type {iniluatex}, for dumping formats \NC\NR
+\NC \type{--interaction=STRING} \NC set interaction mode: \type {batchmode}, \type {nonstopmode},
+ \type {scrollmode} or \type {errorstopmode} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--jobname=STRING} \NC set the job name to \type {STRING} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--kpathsea-debug=NUMBER} \NC set path searching debugging flags according to the bits of
+ \type {NUMBER} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--lua=FILE} \NC load and execute a \LUA\ initialization script \NC\NR
+\NC \type{--[no-]mktex=FMT} \NC disable/enable \type {mktexFMT} generation with \type {FMT} is
+ \type {tex} or \type {tfm} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--nosocket} \NC disable the \LUA\ socket library \NC\NR
+\NC \type{--output-comment=STRING} \NC use \type {STRING} for \DVI\ file comment instead of date (no
+ effect for \PDF) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--output-directory=DIR} \NC use \type {DIR} as the directory to write files to \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--output-format=FORMAT} \NC use \type {FORMAT} for job output; \type {FORMAT} is \type {dvi}
+ or \type {pdf} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--progname=STRING} \NC set the program name to \type {STRING} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--recorder} \NC enable filename recorder \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--safer} \NC disable easily exploitable \LUA\ commands \NC\NR
+\NC \type{--[no-]shell-escape} \NC disable/enable system calls \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--shell-restricted} \NC restrict system calls to a list of commands given in \type
+ {texmf.cnf} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--synctex=NUMBER} \NC enable \type {synctex} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--utc} \NC use utc times when applicable \NC \NR
+\NC \type{--version} \NC display version and exit \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+We don't support \prm {write} 18 because \type {os.execute} can do the same. It
+simplifies the code and makes more write targets possible.
+
+The value to use for \prm {jobname} is decided as follows:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ If \type {--jobname} is given on the command line, its argument will be the
+ value for \prm {jobname}, without any changes. The argument will not be
+ used for actual input so it need not exist. The \type {--jobname} switch only
+ controls the \prm {jobname} setting.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Otherwise, \prm {jobname} will be the name of the first file that is read
+ from the file system, with any path components and the last extension (the
+ part following the last \type {.}) stripped off.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ There is an exception to the previous point: if the command line goes into
+ interactive mode (by starting with a command) and there are no files input
+ via \prm {everyjob} either, then the \prm {jobname} is set to \type
+ {texput} as a last resort.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The file names for output files that are generated automatically are created by
+attaching the proper extension (\type {log}, \type {pdf}, etc.) to the found
+\prm {jobname}. These files are created in the directory pointed to by \type
+{--output-directory}, or in the current directory, if that switch is not present.
+
+Without the \type {--lua} option, command line processing works like it does in
+any other \WEBC|-|based typesetting engine, except that \LUATEX\ has a few extra
+switches and lacks some others. Also, if the \type {--lua} option is present,
+\LUATEX\ will enter an alternative mode of command line processing in comparison
+to the standard \WEBC\ programs. In this mode, a small series of actions is taken
+in the following order:
+
+\startitemize[n]
+
+\startitem
+ First, it will parse the command line as usual, but it will only interpret a
+ small subset of the options immediately: \type {--safer}, \type {--nosocket},
+ \type {--[no-]shell-escape}, \type {--enable-write18}, \type
+ {--disable-write18}, \type {--shell-restricted}, \type {--help}, \type
+ {--version}, and \type {--credits}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Next \LUATEX\ searches for the requested \LUA\ initialization script. If it
+ cannot be found using the actual name given on the command line, a second
+ attempt is made by prepending the value of the environment variable \type
+ {LUATEXDIR}, if that variable is defined in the environment.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Then it checks the various safety switches. You can use those to disable some
+ \LUA\ commands that can easily be abused by a malicious document. At the
+ moment, \type {--safer} \type {nil}s the following functions:
+
+ \blank
+
+ \starttabulate[|c|l|]
+ \DB library \BC functions \NC \NR
+ \TB
+ \NC \type {os} \NC \type {execute} \type {exec} \type {spawn} \type {setenv}
+ \type {rename} \type {remove} \type {tmpdir} \NC \NR
+ \NC \type {io} \NC \type {popen} \type {output} \type {tmpfile} \NC \NR
+ \NC \type {lfs} \NC \type {rmdir} \type {mkdir} \type {chdir} \type {lock}
+ \type {touch} \NC \NR
+ \LL
+ \stoptabulate
+
+ \blank
+
+ Furthermore, it disables loading of compiled \LUA\ libraries and it makes
+ \type {io.open()} fail on files that are opened for anything besides reading.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ When \LUATEX\ starts it sets the \type {locale} to a neutral value. If for
+ some reason you use \type {os.locale}, you need to make sure you \type {nil}
+ it afterwards because otherwise it can interfere with code that for instance
+ generates dates. You can ignore the \type {locale} with:
+
+ \starttyping
+ os.setlocale(nil,nil)
+ \stoptyping
+
+ The \type {--nosocket} option makes the socket library unavailable, so that \LUA\
+ cannot use networking.
+
+ The switches \type {--[no-]shell-escape}, \type {--[enable|disable]-write18}, and
+ \type {--shell-restricted} have the same effects as in \PDFTEX, and additionally
+ make \type {io.popen()}, \type {os.execute}, \type {os.exec} and \type {os.spawn}
+ adhere to the requested option.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Next the initialization script is loaded and executed. From within the
+ script, the entire command line is available in the \LUA\ table \type {arg},
+ beginning with \type {arg[0]}, containing the name of the executable. As
+ consequence warnings about unrecognized options are suppressed.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+Command line processing happens very early on. So early, in fact, that none of
+\TEX's initializations have taken place yet. For that reason, the tables that
+deal with typesetting, like \type {tex}, \type {token}, \type {node} and
+\type {pdf}, are off|-|limits during the execution of the startup file (they
+are \type {nil}'d). Special care is taken that \type {texio.write} and \type
+{texio.write_nl} function properly, so that you can at least report your actions
+to the log file when (and if) it eventually becomes opened (note that \TEX\ does
+not even know its \prm {jobname} yet at this point).
+
+Everything you do in the \LUA\ initialization script will remain visible during
+the rest of the run, with the exception of the \TEX\ specific libraries like
+\type {tex}, \type {token}, \type {node} and \type {pdf} tables. These will be
+initialized to their documented state after the execution of the script. You
+should not store anything in variables or within tables with these four global
+names, as they will be overwritten completely.
+
+We recommend you use the startup file only for your own \TEX|-|independent
+initializations (if you need any), to parse the command line, set values in the
+\type {texconfig} table, and register the callbacks you need.
+
+\LUATEX\ allows some of the command line options to be overridden by reading
+values from the \type {texconfig} table at the end of script execution (see the
+description of the \type {texconfig} table later on in this document for more
+details on which ones exactly).
+
+Unless the \type {texconfig} table tells \LUATEX\ not to initialize \KPATHSEA\
+at all (set \type {texconfig.kpse_init} to \type {false} for that), \LUATEX\
+acts on some more command line options after the initialization script is
+finished: in order to initialize the built|-|in \KPATHSEA\ library properly,
+\LUATEX\ needs to know the correct program name to use, and for that it needs to
+check \type {--progname}, or \type {--ini} and \type {--fmt}, if \type
+{--progname} is missing.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={\LUA\ behaviour}]
+
+\startsubsection[title={The \LUA\ version}]
+
+\topicindex {\LUA+libraries}
+\topicindex {\LUA+extensions}
+
+We currently use \LUA\ 5.3 and will follow developments of the language but
+normally with some delay. Therefore the user needs to keep an eye on (subtle)
+differences in successive versions of the language. Also, \LUAJITTEX\ lags behind
+in the sense that \LUAJIT\ is not in sync with regular \LUA\ development. Here is
+an example of one aspect.
+
+\LUA s \type {tostring} function (and \type {string.format} may return values in
+scientific notation, thereby confusing the \TEX\ end of things when it is used as
+the right|-|hand side of an assignment to a \prm {dimen} or \prm {count}. The
+output of these serializers also depend on the \LUA\ version, so in \LUA\ 5.3 you
+can get different output than from 5.2.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Integration in the \TDS\ ecosystem}]
+
+The main \TEX\ distributions follow the \TEX\ directory structure (\TDS).
+\LUATEX\ is able to use the kpathsea library to find \type {require()}d modules.
+For this purpose, \type {package.searchers[2]} is replaced by a different loader
+function, that decides at runtime whether to use kpathsea or the built|-|in core
+\LUA\ function. It uses \KPATHSEA\ when that is already initialized at that point
+in time, otherwise it reverts to using the normal \type {package.path} loader.
+
+Initialization of \KPATHSEA\ can happen either implicitly (when \LUATEX\ starts
+up and the startup script has not set \type {texconfig.kpse_init} to false), or
+explicitly by calling the \LUA\ function \type {kpse.set_program_name()}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Loading libraries}]
+
+\LUATEX\ is able to use dynamically loadable \LUA\ libraries, unless
+\type {--safer} was given as an option on the command line. For this purpose,
+\type {package.searchers[3]} is replaced by a different loader function, that
+decides at runtime whether to use \KPATHSEA\ or the built|-|in core \LUA\
+function. It uses \KPATHSEA\ when that is already initialized at that point in
+time, otherwise it reverts to using the normal \type {package.cpath} loader.
+
+This functionality required an extension to kpathsea. There is a new kpathsea
+file format: \type {kpse_clua_format} that searches for files with extension
+\type {.dll} and \type {.so}. The \type {texmf.cnf} setting for this variable is
+\type {CLUAINPUTS}, and by default it has this value:
+
+\starttyping
+CLUAINPUTS=.:$SELFAUTOLOC/lib/{$progname,$engine,}/lua//
+\stoptyping
+
+This path is imperfect (it requires a \TDS\ subtree below the binaries
+directory), but the architecture has to be in the path somewhere, and the
+currently simplest way to do that is to search below the binaries directory only.
+Of course it no big deal to write an alternative loader and use that in a macro
+package. One level up (a \type {lib} directory parallel to \type {bin}) would
+have been nicer, but that is not doable because \TEXLIVE\ uses a \type
+{bin/<arch>} structure.
+
+Loading dynamic \LUA\ libraries will fail if there are two \LUA\ libraries loaded
+at the same time (which will typically happen on \type {win32}, because there is
+one \LUA\ 5.3 inside \LUATEX, and another will likely be linked to the \DLL\ file
+of the module itself).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Executing programs}]
+
+In keeping with the other \TEX|-|like programs in \TEXLIVE, the two \LUA\ functions
+\type {os.execute} and \type {io.popen}, as well as the two new functions \type
+{os.exec} and \type {os.spawn} that are explained below, take the value of \type
+{shell_escape} and|/|or \type {shell_escape_commands} in account. Whenever
+\LUATEX\ is run with the assumed intention to typeset a document (and by that we
+mean that it is called as \type {luatex}, as opposed to \type {texlua}, and that
+the command line option \type {--luaonly} was not given), it will only run the
+four functions above if the matching \type {texmf.cnf} variable(s) or their \type
+{texconfig} (see \in {section} [texconfig]) counterparts allow execution of the
+requested system command. In \quote {script interpreter} runs of \LUATEX, these
+settings have no effect, and all four functions have their original meaning.
+
+Some libraries have a few more functions, either coded in \CCODE\ or in \LUA. For
+instance, when we started with \LUATEX\ we added some helpers to the \type
+{luafilesystem} namespace \type {lfs}. The two boolean functions \type
+{lfs.isdir} and \type {lfs.isfile} were speedy and better variants of what could
+be done with \type {lfs.attributes}. The additional function \type
+{lfs.shortname} takes a file name and returns its short name on \type {win32}
+platforms. Finally, for non|-|\type {win32} platforms only, we provided \type
+{lfs.readlink} that takes an existing symbolic link as argument and returns its
+name. However, the \type library evolved so we have dropped these in favour of
+pure \LUA\ variants. The \type {shortname} helper is obsolete and now just
+returns the name.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Multibyte \type {string} functions}]
+
+The \type {string} library has a few extra functions, for example \libidx
+{string} {explode}. This function takes upto two arguments: \type
+{string.explode(s[,m])} and returns an array containing the string argument \type
+{s} split into sub-strings based on the value of the string argument \type {m}.
+The second argument is a string that is either empty (this splits the string into
+characters), a single character (this splits on each occurrence of that
+character, possibly introducing empty strings), or a single character followed by
+the plus sign \type {+} (this special version does not create empty sub-strings).
+The default value for \type {m} is \quote {\type { +}} (multiple spaces). Note:
+\type {m} is not hidden by surrounding braces as it would be if this function was
+written in \TEX\ macros.
+
+The \type {string} library also has six extra iterators that return strings
+piecemeal: \libidx {string} {utfvalues}, \libidx {string} {utfcharacters},
+\libidx {string} {characters}, \libidx {string} {characterpairs}, \libidx
+{string} {bytes} and \libidx {string} {bytepairs}.
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ \type {string.utfvalues(s)}: an integer value in the \UNICODE\ range
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {string.utfcharacters(s)}: a string with a single \UTF-8 token in it
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {string.cWharacters(s)}: a string containing one byte
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {string.characterpairs(s)}: two strings each containing one byte or an
+ empty second string if the string length was odd
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {string.bytes(s)}: a single byte value
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {string.bytepairs(s)}: two byte values or nil instead of a number as
+ its second return value if the string length was odd
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The \type {string.characterpairs()} and \type {string.bytepairs()} iterators
+are useful especially in the conversion of \UTF16 encoded data into \UTF8.
+
+There is also a two|-|argument form of \type {string.dump()}. The second argument
+is a boolean which, if true, strips the symbols from the dumped data. This
+matches an extension made in \type {luajit}. This is typically a function that
+gets adapted as \LUA\ itself progresses.
+
+The \type {string} library functions \type {len}, \type {lower}, \type {sub}
+etc.\ are not \UNICODE|-|aware. For strings in the \UTF8 encoding, i.e., strings
+containing characters above code point 127, the corresponding functions from the
+\type {slnunicode} library can be used, e.g., \type {unicode.utf8.len}, \type
+{unicode.utf8.lower} etc.\ The exceptions are \type {unicode.utf8.find}, that
+always returns byte positions in a string, and \type {unicode.utf8.match} and
+\type {unicode.utf8.gmatch}. While the latter two functions in general {\it
+are} \UNICODE|-|aware, they fall|-|back to non|-|\UNICODE|-|aware behavior when
+using the empty capture \type {()} but other captures work as expected. For the
+interpretation of character classes in \type {unicode.utf8} functions refer to
+the library sources at \hyphenatedurl {http://luaforge.net/projects/sln}.
+
+Version 5.3 of \LUA\ provides some native \UTF8 support but we have added a few
+similar helpers too: \libidx {string} {utfvalue}, \libidx {string} {utfcharacter}
+and \libidx {string} {utflength}.
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ \type {string.utfvalue(s)}: returns the codepoints of the characters in the
+ given string
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {string.utfcharacter(c,...)}: returns a string with the characters of
+ the given code points
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {string.utflength(s)}: returns the length oif the given string
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+These three functions are relative fast and don't do much checking. They can be
+used as building blocks for other helpers.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Extra \type {os} library functions}]
+
+The \type {os} library has a few extra functions and variables: \libidx {os}
+{selfdir}, \libidx {os} {exec}, \libidx {os} {spawn}, \libidx {os} {setenv},
+\libidx {os} {env}, \libidx {os} {gettimeofday}, \libidx {os} {times}, \libidx
+{os} {tmpdir}, \libidx {os} {type}, \libidx {os} {name} and \libidx {os} {uname},
+that we will discuss here.
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.selfdir} is a variable that holds the directory path of the
+ actual executable. For example: \type {\directlua {tex.sprint(os.selfdir)}}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.exec(commandline)} is a variation on \type {os.execute}. Here
+ \type {commandline} can be either a single string or a single table.
+
+ \startitemize
+
+ \startitem
+ If the argument is a table \LUATEX\ first checks if there is a value at
+ integer index zero. If there is, this is the command to be executed.
+ Otherwise, it will use the value at integer index one. If neither are
+ present, nothing at all happens.
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ The set of consecutive values starting at integer~1 in the table are the
+ arguments that are passed on to the command (the value at index~1 becomes
+ \type {arg[0]}). The command is searched for in the execution path, so
+ there is normally no need to pass on a fully qualified path name.
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ If the argument is a string, then it is automatically converted into a
+ table by splitting on whitespace. In this case, it is impossible for the
+ command and first argument to differ from each other.
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ In the string argument format, whitespace can be protected by putting
+ (part of) an argument inside single or double quotes. One layer of quotes
+ is interpreted by \LUATEX, and all occurrences of \type {\"}, \type {\'}
+ or \type {\\} within the quoted text are unescaped. In the table format,
+ there is no string handling taking place.
+ \stopitem
+
+ \stopitemize
+
+ This function normally does not return control back to the \LUA\ script: the
+ command will replace the current process. However, it will return the two
+ values \type {nil} and \type {error} if there was a problem while
+ attempting to execute the command.
+
+ On \MSWINDOWS, the current process is actually kept in memory until after the
+ execution of the command has finished. This prevents crashes in situations
+ where \TEXLUA\ scripts are run inside integrated \TEX\ environments.
+
+ The original reason for this command is that it cleans out the current
+ process before starting the new one, making it especially useful for use in
+ \TEXLUA.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.spawn(commandline)} is a returning version of \type {os.exec},
+ with otherwise identical calling conventions.
+
+ If the command ran ok, then the return value is the exit status of the
+ command. Otherwise, it will return the two values \type {nil} and \type
+ {error}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.setenv(key,value)} sets a variable in the environment. Passing
+ \type {nil} instead of a value string will remove the variable.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.env} is a hash table containing a dump of the variables and
+ values in the process environment at the start of the run. It is writeable,
+ but the actual environment is \notabene {not} updated automatically.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.gettimeofday()} returns the current \quote {\UNIX\ time}, but as a
+ float. This function is not available on the \SUNOS\ platforms, so do not use
+ this function for portable documents.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.times()}returns the current process times according to \ the
+ \UNIX\ C library function \quote {times}. This function is not available on
+ the \MSWINDOWS\ and \SUNOS\ platforms, so do not use this function for
+ portable documents.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.tmpdir()} creates a directory in the \quote {current directory}
+ with the name \type {luatex.XXXXXX} where the \type {X}-es are replaced by a
+ unique string. The function also returns this string, so you can \type
+ {lfs.chdir()} into it, or \type {nil} if it failed to create the directory.
+ The user is responsible for cleaning up at the end of the run, it does not
+ happen automatically.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.type} is a string that gives a global indication of the class of
+ operating system. The possible values are currently \type {windows}, \type
+ {unix}, and \type {msdos} (you are unlikely to find this value \quote {in the
+ wild}).
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.name} is a string that gives a more precise indication of the
+ operating system. These possible values are not yet fixed, and for \type
+ {os.type} values \type {windows} and \type {msdos}, the \type {os.name}
+ values are simply \type {windows} and \type {msdos}
+
+ The list for the type \type {unix} is more precise: \type {linux}, \type
+ {freebsd}, \type {kfreebsd}, \type {cygwin}, \type {openbsd}, \type
+ {solaris}, \type {sunos} (pre-solaris), \type {hpux}, \type {irix}, \type
+ {macosx}, \type {gnu} (hurd), \type {bsd} (unknown, but \BSD|-|like), \type
+ {sysv} (unknown, but \SYSV|-|like), \type {generic} (unknown).
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {os.uname} returns a table with specific operating system
+ information acquired at runtime. The keys in the returned table are all
+ string values, and their names are: \type {sysname}, \type {machine}, \type
+ {release}, \type {version}, and \type {nodename}.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Binary input from files with \type {fio}}]
+
+There is a whole set of helpers for reading numbers and strings from a file:
+\libidx {fio} {readcardinal1}, \libidx {fio} {readcardinal2}, \libidx {fio}
+{readcardinal3}, \libidx {fio} {readcardinal4}, \libidx {fio}
+{readcardinaltable}, \libidx {fio} {readinteger1}, \libidx {fio} {readinteger2},
+\libidx {fio} {readinteger3}, \libidx {fio} {readinteger4}, \libidx {fio}
+{readintegertable}, \libidx {fio} {readfixed2}, \libidx {fio} {readfixed4},
+\libidx {fio} {read2dot14}, \libidx {fio} {setposition}, \libidx {fio}
+{getposition}, \libidx {fio} {skipposition}, \libidx {fio} {readbytes}, \libidx
+{fio} {readbytetable}. They work on normal \LUA\ file handles.
+
+%libidx{fio}{readline}
+%libidx{fio}{recordfilename}
+%libidx{fio}{checkpermission}
+
+This library provides a set of functions for reading numbers from a file and
+in addition to the regular \type {io} library functions.
+
+\starttabulate
+\NC \type{readcardinal1(f)} \NC a 1 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readcardinal2(f)} \NC a 2 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readcardinal3(f)} \NC a 3 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readcardinal4(f)} \NC a 4 byte unsigned integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readcardinaltable(f,n,b)} \NC \type {n} cardinals of \type {b} bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readinteger1(f)} \NC a 1 byte signed integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readinteger2(f)} \NC a 2 byte signed integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readinteger3(f)} \NC a 3 byte signed integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readinteger4(f)} \NC a 4 byte signed integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readintegertable(f,n,b)} \NC \type {n} integers of \type {b} bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readfixed2(f)} \NC a 2 byte float (used in font files) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readfixed4(f)} \NC a 4 byte float (used in font files) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{read2dot14(f)} \NC a 2 byte float (used in font files) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{setposition(f,p)} \NC goto position \type {p} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getposition(f)} \NC get the current position \NC \NR
+\NC \type{skipposition(f,n)} \NC skip \type {n} positions \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readbytes(f,n)} \NC \type {n} bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{readbytetable(f,n)} \NC \type {n} bytes\NC \NR
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Binary input from strings with \type {sio}}]
+
+A similar set of function as in the \type {fio} library is available in the \type
+{sio} library: \libidx {sio} {readcardinal1}, \libidx {sio} {readcardinal2},
+\libidx {sio} {readcardinal3}, \libidx {sio} {readcardinal4}, \libidx {sio}
+{readcardinaltable}, \libidx {sio} {readinteger1}, \libidx {sio} {readinteger2},
+\libidx {sio} {readinteger3}, \libidx {sio} {readinteger4}, \libidx {sio}
+{readintegertable}, \libidx {sio} {readfixed2}, \libidx {sio} {readfixed4},
+\libidx {sio} {read2dot14}, \libidx {sio} {setposition}, \libidx {sio}
+{getposition}, \libidx {sio} {skipposition}, \libidx {sio} {readbytes} and
+\libidx {sio} {readbytetable}. Here the first argument is a string instead of a
+file handle. More details can be found in the previous section.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Hashes conform \type {sha2}}]
+
+This library is a side effect of the \type {pdfe} library that needs such
+helpers. The \libidx{sha2}{digest256}, \libidx{sha2}{digest384} and
+\libidx{sha2}{digest512} functions accept a string and return a string with the
+hash.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Locales}]
+
+\index {locales}
+
+In stock \LUA, many things depend on the current locale. In \LUATEX, we can't do
+that, because it makes documents unportable. While \LUATEX\ is running if
+forces the following locale settings:
+
+\starttyping
+LC_CTYPE=C
+LC_COLLATE=C
+LC_NUMERIC=C
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={\LUA\ modules}]
+
+\topicindex {\LUA+libraries}
+\topicindex {\LUA+modules}
+
+Some modules that are normally external to \LUA\ are statically linked in with
+\LUATEX, because they offer useful functionality:
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ \type {lpeg}, by Roberto Ierusalimschy, \hyphenatedurl
+ {http://www.inf.puc-rio.br/~roberto/lpeg/lpeg.html}. This library is not
+ \UNICODE|-|aware, but interprets strings on a byte|-|per|-|byte basis. This
+ mainly means that \type {lpeg.S} cannot be used with \UTF8 characters encoded
+ in more than two bytes, and thus \type {lpeg.S} will look for one of those
+ two bytes when matching, not the combination of the two. The same is true for
+ \type {lpeg.R}, although the latter will display an error message if used
+ with multibyte characters. Therefore \type {lpeg.R('aä')} results in the
+ message \type {bad argument #1 to 'R' (range must have two characters)},
+ since to \type {lpeg}, \type {ä} is two 'characters' (bytes), so \type {aä}
+ totals three. In practice this is no real issue and with some care you can
+ deal with \UNICODE\ just fine.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {slnunicode}, from the \type {selene} libraries, \hyphenatedurl
+ {http://luaforge.net/projects/sln}. This library has been slightly extended
+ so that the \type {unicode.utf8.*} functions also accept the first 256 values
+ of plane~18. This is the range \LUATEX\ uses for raw binary output, as
+ explained above. We have no plans to provide more like this because you can
+ basically do all that you want in \LUA.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {luazip}, from the kepler project, \hyphenatedurl
+ {http://www.keplerproject.org/luazip/}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {luafilesystem}, also from the kepler project, \hyphenatedurl
+ {http://www.keplerproject.org/luafilesystem/}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {lzlib}, by Tiago Dionizio, \hyphenatedurl
+ {http://luaforge.net/projects/lzlib/}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {md5}, by Roberto Ierusalimschy \hyphenatedurl
+ {http://www.inf.puc-rio.br/~roberto/md5/md5-5/md5.html}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \type {luasocket}, by Diego Nehab \hyphenatedurl
+ {http://w3.impa.br/~diego/software/luasocket/}. The \type {.lua} support
+ modules from \type {luasocket} are also preloaded inside the executable,
+ there are no external file dependencies.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Testing}]
+
+\topicindex {testing}
+\topicindex {\PDF+date}
+
+For development reasons you can influence the used startup date and time. This can
+be done in two ways.
+
+\startitemize[n]
+
+\startitem
+ By setting the environmment variable \type {SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH}. This will
+ influence the \TEX\ parameters \type {time} and \type {date}, the random seed,
+ the \PDF\ timestamp and the \PDF\ id that is derived from the time as well. This
+ variable is consulted when the \KPSE\ library is enabled. Resolving is
+ delegated to this library.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ By setting the \type {start_time} variable in the \type {texconfig} table; as
+ with other variables we use the internal name there. For compatibility
+ reasons we also honour a \type {SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} entry. It should be noted
+ that there are no such variables in other engines and this method is only
+ relevant in case the while setup happens in \LUA.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+When Universal Time is needed, you can pass the flag \type {utc} to the engine. This
+property also works when the date and time are set by \LUATEX\ itself. It has a
+complementary entry \type {use_utc_time} in the \type {texconfig} table.
+
+There is some control possible, for instance prevent filename to be written to
+the \PDF\ file. This is discussed elsewhere. In \CONTEXT\ we provide the command
+line argument \type {--nodates} that does a bit more disabling of dates.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-math.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-math.tex
index fd038150f5..4623ce706d 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-math.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-math.tex
@@ -1,1647 +1,1647 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-math
-
-\startchapter[reference=math,title={Math}]
-
-\startsection[title={Traditional alongside \OPENTYPE}]
-
-\topicindex {math}
-
-The handling of mathematics in \LUATEX\ differs quite a bit from how \TEX82 (and
-therefore \PDFTEX) handles math. First, \LUATEX\ adds primitives and extends some
-others so that \UNICODE\ input can be used easily. Second, all of \TEX82's
-internal special values (for example for operator spacing) have been made
-accessible and changeable via control sequences. Third, there are extensions that
-make it easier to use \OPENTYPE\ math fonts. And finally, there are some
-extensions that have been proposed or considered in the past that are now added
-to the engine.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Unicode math characters}]
-
-\topicindex {math+\UNICODE}
-\topicindex {\UNICODE+math}
-
-Character handling is now extended up to the full \UNICODE\ range (the \type {\U}
-prefix), which is compatible with \XETEX.
-
-The math primitives from \TEX\ are kept as they are, except for the ones that
-convert from input to math commands: \type {mathcode}, and \type {delcode}. These
-two now allow for a 21-bit character argument on the left hand side of the equals
-sign.
-
-Some of the new \LUATEX\ primitives read more than one separate value. This is
-shown in the tables below by a plus sign.
-
-The input for such primitives would look like this:
-
-\starttyping
-\def\overbrace{\Umathaccent 0 1 "23DE }
-\stoptyping
-
-The altered \TEX82 primitives are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|r|c|l|r|]
-\DB primitive \BC min \BC max \BC \kern 2em \BC min \BC max \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \prm {mathcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0 \NC 8000 \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {delcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0 \NC FFFFFF \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The unaltered ones are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|r|]
-\DB primitive \BC min \BC max \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \prm {mathchardef} \NC 0 \NC 8000 \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {mathchar} \NC 0 \NC 7FFF \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {mathaccent} \NC 0 \NC 7FFF \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {delimiter} \NC 0 \NC 7FFFFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {radical} \NC 0 \NC 7FFFFFF \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-For practical reasons \prm {mathchardef} will silently accept values larger
-that \type {0x8000} and interpret it as \lpr {Umathcharnumdef}. This is needed
-to satisfy older macro packages.
-
-The following new primitives are compatible with \XETEX:
-
-% somewhat fuzzy:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|r|c|l|r|]
-\DB primitive \BC min \BC max \BC \kern 2em \BC min \BC max \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \lpr {Umathchardef} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathcharnumdef}\rlap{\high{5}} \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Udelcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0+0 \NC FF+10FFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathchar} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathaccent} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Udelimiter} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Uradical} \NC 0+0 \NC FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathcharnum} \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathcodenum} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Udelcodenum} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Specifications typically look like:
-
-\starttyping
-\Umathchardef\xx="1"0"456
-\Umathcode 123="1"0"789
-\stoptyping
-
-The new primitives that deal with delimiter|-|style objects do not set up a
-\quote {large family}. Selecting a suitable size for display purposes is expected
-to be dealt with by the font via the \lpr {Umathoperatorsize} parameter.
-
-For some of these primitives, all information is packed into a single signed
-integer. For the first two (\lpr {Umathcharnum} and \lpr {Umathcodenum}), the
-lowest 21 bits are the character code, the 3 bits above that represent the math
-class, and the family data is kept in the topmost bits. This means that the values
-for math families 128--255 are actually negative. For \lpr {Udelcodenum} there
-is no math class. The math family information is stored in the bits directly on
-top of the character code. Using these three commands is not as natural as using
-the two- and three|-|value commands, so unless you know exactly what you are
-doing and absolutely require the speedup resulting from the faster input
-scanning, it is better to use the verbose commands instead.
-
-The \lpr {Umathaccent} command accepts optional keywords to control various
-details regarding math accents. See \in {section} [mathacc] below for details.
-
-There are more new primitives and all of these will be explained in following
-sections:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB primitive \BC value range (in hex) \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \lpr {Uroot} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Uoverdelimiter} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Uunderdelimiter} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Udelimiterover} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Udelimiterunder} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Math styles}]
-
-\subsection{\lpr {mathstyle}}
-
-\topicindex {math+styles}
-
-It is possible to discover the math style that will be used for a formula in an
-expandable fashion (while the math list is still being read). To make this
-possible, \LUATEX\ adds the new primitive: \lpr {mathstyle}. This is a \quote
-{convert command} like e.g. \prm {romannumeral}: its value can only be read,
-not set.
-
-The returned value is between 0 and 7 (in math mode), or $-1$ (all other modes).
-For easy testing, the eight math style commands have been altered so that they can
-be used as numeric values, so you can write code like this:
-
-\starttyping
-\ifnum\mathstyle=\textstyle
- \message{normal text style}
-\else \ifnum\mathstyle=\crampedtextstyle
- \message{cramped text style}
-\fi \fi
-\stoptyping
-
-Sometimes you won't get what you expect so a bit of explanation might help to
-understand what happens. When math is parsed and expanded it gets turned into a
-linked list. In a second pass the formula will be build. This has to do with the
-fact that in order to determine the automatically chosen sizes (in for instance
-fractions) following content can influence preceding sizes. A side effect of this
-is for instance that one cannot change the definition of a font family (and
-thereby reusing numbers) because the number that got used is stored and used in
-the second pass (so changing \type {\fam 12} mid|-|formula spoils over to
-preceding use of that family).
-
-The style switching primitives like \prm {textstyle} are turned into nodes so the
-styles set there are frozen. The \prm {mathchoice} primitive results in four
-lists being constructed of which one is used in the second pass. The fact that
-some automatic styles are not yet known also means that the \lpr {mathstyle}
-primitive expands to the current style which can of course be different from the
-one really used. It's a snapshot of the first pass state. As a consequence in the
-following example you get a style number (first pass) typeset that can actually
-differ from the used style (second pass). In the case of a math choice used
-ungrouped, the chosen style is used after the choice too, unless you group.
-
-\startbuffer[1]
- [a:\mathstyle]\quad
- \bgroup
- \mathchoice
- {\bf \scriptstyle (x:d :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:t :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:s :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:ss:\mathstyle)}
- \egroup
- \quad[b:\mathstyle]\quad
- \mathchoice
- {\bf \scriptstyle (y:d :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:t :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:s :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:ss:\mathstyle)}
- \quad[c:\mathstyle]\quad
- \bgroup
- \mathchoice
- {\bf \scriptstyle (z:d :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:t :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:s :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:ss:\mathstyle)}
- \egroup
- \quad[d:\mathstyle]
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startbuffer[2]
- [a:\mathstyle]\quad
- \begingroup
- \mathchoice
- {\bf \scriptstyle (x:d :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:t :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:s :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:ss:\mathstyle)}
- \endgroup
- \quad[b:\mathstyle]\quad
- \mathchoice
- {\bf \scriptstyle (y:d :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:t :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:s :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:ss:\mathstyle)}
- \quad[c:\mathstyle]\quad
- \begingroup
- \mathchoice
- {\bf \scriptstyle (z:d :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:t :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:s :\mathstyle)}
- {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:ss:\mathstyle)}
- \endgroup
- \quad[d:\mathstyle]
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer[1]
-
-% \typebuffer[2]
-
-This gives:
-
-\blank $\displaystyle \getbuffer[1]$ \blank
-\blank $\textstyle \getbuffer[1]$ \blank
-
-Using \prm {begingroup} \unknown\ \prm {endgroup} instead gives:
-
-\blank $\displaystyle \getbuffer[2]$ \blank
-\blank $\textstyle \getbuffer[2]$ \blank
-
-This might look wrong but it's just a side effect of \lpr {mathstyle} expanding
-to the current (first pass) style and the number being injected in the list that
-gets converted in the second pass. It all makes sense and it illustrates the
-importance of grouping. In fact, the math choice style being effective afterwards
-has advantages. It would be hard to get it otherwise.
-
-\subsection{\lpr {Ustack}}
-
-\topicindex {math+stacks}
-
-There are a few math commands in \TEX\ where the style that will be used is not
-known straight from the start. These commands (\prm {over}, \prm {atop},
-\prm {overwithdelims}, \prm {atopwithdelims}) would therefore normally return
-wrong values for \lpr {mathstyle}. To fix this, \LUATEX\ introduces a special
-prefix command: \lpr {Ustack}:
-
-\starttyping
-$\Ustack {a \over b}$
-\stoptyping
-
-The \lpr {Ustack} command will scan the next brace and start a new math group
-with the correct (numerator) math style.
-
-\subsection{Cramped math styles}
-
-\topicindex {math+styles}
-\topicindex {math+spacing}
-\topicindex {math+cramped}
-
-\LUATEX\ has four new primitives to set the cramped math styles directly:
-
-\starttyping
-\crampeddisplaystyle
-\crampedtextstyle
-\crampedscriptstyle
-\crampedscriptscriptstyle
-\stoptyping
-
-These additional commands are not all that valuable on their own, but they come
-in handy as arguments to the math parameter settings that will be added shortly.
-
-In Eijkhouts \quotation {\TEX\ by Topic} the rules for handling styles in scripts
-are described as follows:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- In any style superscripts and subscripts are taken from the next smaller style.
- Exception: in display style they are in script style.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Subscripts are always in the cramped variant of the style; superscripts are only
- cramped if the original style was cramped.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- In an \type {..\over..} formula in any style the numerator and denominator are
- taken from the next smaller style.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- The denominator is always in cramped style; the numerator is only in cramped
- style if the original style was cramped.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Formulas under a \type {\sqrt} or \prm {overline} are in cramped style.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-In \LUATEX\ one can set the styles in more detail which means that you sometimes
-have to set both normal and cramped styles to get the effect you want. (Even) if
-we force styles in the script using \prm {scriptstyle} and \lpr
-{crampedscriptstyle} we get this:
-
-\startbuffer[demo]
-\starttabulate
-\DB style \BC example \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC default \NC $b_{x=xx}^{x=xx}$ \NC \NR
-\NC script \NC $b_{\scriptstyle x=xx}^{\scriptstyle x=xx}$ \NC \NR
-\NC crampedscript \NC $b_{\crampedscriptstyle x=xx}^{\crampedscriptstyle x=xx}$ \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-\stopbuffer
-
-\getbuffer[demo]
-
-Now we set the following parameters
-
-\startbuffer[setup]
-\Umathordrelspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
-\Umathordordspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer[setup]
-
-This gives a different result:
-
-\start\getbuffer[setup,demo]\stop
-
-But, as this is not what is expected (visually) we should say:
-
-\startbuffer[setup]
-\Umathordrelspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
-\Umathordordspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
-\Umathordrelspacing\crampedscriptstyle=30mu
-\Umathordordspacing\crampedscriptstyle=30mu
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer[setup]
-
-Now we get:
-
-\start\getbuffer[setup,demo]\stop
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Math parameter settings}]
-
-\subsection {Many new \lpr {Umath*} primitives}
-
-\topicindex {math+parameters}
-
-In \LUATEX, the font dimension parameters that \TEX\ used in math typesetting are
-now accessible via primitive commands. In fact, refactoring of the math engine
-has resulted in many more parameters than were not accessible before.
-
-\starttabulate
-\DB primitive name \BC description \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \lpr {Umathquad} \NC the width of 18 mu's \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathaxis} \NC height of the vertical center axis of
- the math formula above the baseline \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathoperatorsize} \NC minimum size of large operators in display mode \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathoverbarkern} \NC vertical clearance above the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathoverbarrule} \NC the width of the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathoverbarvgap} \NC vertical clearance below the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathunderbarkern} \NC vertical clearance below the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathunderbarrule} \NC the width of the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathunderbarvgap} \NC vertical clearance above the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathradicalkern} \NC vertical clearance above the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathradicalrule} \NC the width of the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathradicalvgap} \NC vertical clearance below the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathradicaldegreebefore}\NC the forward kern that takes place before placement of
- the radical degree \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeafter} \NC the backward kern that takes place after placement of
- the radical degree \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeraise} \NC this is the percentage of the total height and depth of
- the radical sign that the degree is raised by; it is
- expressed in \type {percents}, so 60\% is expressed as the
- integer $60$ \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathstackvgap} \NC vertical clearance between the two
- elements in a \prm {atop} stack \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathstacknumup} \NC numerator shift upward in \prm {atop} stack \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathstackdenomdown} \NC denominator shift downward in \prm {atop} stack \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathfractionrule} \NC the width of the rule in a \prm {over} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathfractionnumvgap} \NC vertical clearance between the numerator and the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathfractionnumup} \NC numerator shift upward in \prm {over} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathfractiondenomvgap} \NC vertical clearance between the denominator and the rule \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathfractiondenomdown} \NC denominator shift downward in \prm {over} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathfractiondelsize} \NC minimum delimiter size for \type {\...withdelims} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathlimitabovevgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits above operators \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathlimitabovebgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits above operators \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathlimitabovekern} \NC space reserved at the top of the limit \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathlimitbelowvgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits below operators \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathlimitbelowbgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits below operators \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathlimitbelowkern} \NC space reserved at the bottom of the limit \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathoverdelimitervgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits above delimiters \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathoverdelimiterbgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits above delimiters \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathunderdelimitervgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits below delimiters \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathunderdelimiterbgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits below delimiters \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsubshiftdrop} \NC subscript drop for boxes and subformulas \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsubshiftdown} \NC subscript drop for characters \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsupshiftdrop} \NC superscript drop (raise, actually) for boxes and subformulas \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsupshiftup} \NC superscript raise for characters \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsubsupshiftdown} \NC subscript drop in the presence of a superscript \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsubtopmax} \NC the top of standalone subscripts cannot be higher than this
- above the baseline \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsupbottommin} \NC the bottom of standalone superscripts cannot be less than
- this above the baseline \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsupsubbottommax} \NC the bottom of the superscript of a combined super- and subscript
- be at least as high as this above the baseline \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathsubsupvgap} \NC vertical clearance between super- and subscript \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathspaceafterscript} \NC additional space added after a super- or subscript \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Umathconnectoroverlapmin}\NC minimum overlap between parts in an extensible recipe \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Each of the parameters in this section can be set by a command like this:
-
-\starttyping
-\Umathquad\displaystyle=1em
-\stoptyping
-
-they obey grouping, and you can use \type {\the\Umathquad\displaystyle} if
-needed.
-
-\subsection{Font|-|based math parameters}
-
-\topicindex {math+parameters}
-
-While it is nice to have these math parameters available for tweaking, it would
-be tedious to have to set each of them by hand. For this reason, \LUATEX\
-initializes a bunch of these parameters whenever you assign a font identifier to
-a math family based on either the traditional math font dimensions in the font
-(for assignments to math family~2 and~3 using \TFM|-|based fonts like \type
-{cmsy} and \type {cmex}), or based on the named values in a potential \type
-{MathConstants} table when the font is loaded via Lua. If there is a \type
-{MathConstants} table, this takes precedence over font dimensions, and in that
-case no attention is paid to which family is being assigned to: the \type
-{MathConstants} tables in the last assigned family sets all parameters.
-
-In the table below, the one|-|letter style abbreviations and symbolic tfm font
-dimension names match those used in the \TeX book. Assignments to \prm
-{textfont} set the values for the cramped and uncramped display and text styles,
-\prm {scriptfont} sets the script styles, and \prm {scriptscriptfont} sets the
-scriptscript styles, so we have eight parameters for three font sizes. In the
-\TFM\ case, assignments only happen in family~2 and family~3 (and of course only
-for the parameters for which there are font dimensions).
-
-Besides the parameters below, \LUATEX\ also looks at the \quote {space} font
-dimension parameter. For math fonts, this should be set to zero.
-
-\def\MathLine#1#2#3#4#5%
- {\TB
- \NC \llap{\high{\tx #2\enspace}}\ttbf \string #1 \NC \tt #5 \NC \NR
- \NC \tx #3 \NC \tt #4 \NC \NR}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB variable / style \BC tfm / opentype \NC \NR
-\MathLine{\Umathaxis} {} {} {AxisHeight} {axis_height}
-\MathLine{\Umathoperatorsize} {6} {D, D'} {DisplayOperatorMinHeight} {\emdash}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractiondelsize} {9} {D, D'} {FractionDelimiterDisplayStyleSize} {delim1}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractiondelsize} {9} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionDelimiterSize} {delim2}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomdown} {} {D, D'} {FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleShiftDown}{denom1}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomdown} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionDenominatorShiftDown} {denom2}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomvgap} {} {D, D'} {FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleGapMin} {3*default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomvgap} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionDenominatorGapMin} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumup} {} {D, D'} {FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleShiftUp} {num1}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumup} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionNumeratorShiftUp} {num2}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumvgap} {} {D, D'} {FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleGapMin} {3*default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumvgap} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionNumeratorGapMin} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathfractionrule} {} {} {FractionRuleThickness} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathskewedfractionhgap} {} {} {SkewedFractionHorizontalGap} {math_quad/2}
-\MathLine{\Umathskewedfractionvgap} {} {} {SkewedFractionVerticalGap} {math_x_height}
-\MathLine{\Umathlimitabovebgap} {} {} {UpperLimitBaselineRiseMin} {big_op_spacing3}
-\MathLine{\Umathlimitabovekern} {1} {} {0} {big_op_spacing5}
-\MathLine{\Umathlimitabovevgap} {} {} {UpperLimitGapMin} {big_op_spacing1}
-\MathLine{\Umathlimitbelowbgap} {} {} {LowerLimitBaselineDropMin} {big_op_spacing4}
-\MathLine{\Umathlimitbelowkern} {1} {} {0} {big_op_spacing5}
-\MathLine{\Umathlimitbelowvgap} {} {} {LowerLimitGapMin} {big_op_spacing2}
-\MathLine{\Umathoverdelimitervgap} {} {} {StretchStackGapBelowMin} {big_op_spacing1}
-\MathLine{\Umathoverdelimiterbgap} {} {} {StretchStackTopShiftUp} {big_op_spacing3}
-\MathLine{\Umathunderdelimitervgap} {} {} {StretchStackGapAboveMin} {big_op_spacing2}
-\MathLine{\Umathunderdelimiterbgap} {} {} {StretchStackBottomShiftDown} {big_op_spacing4}
-\MathLine{\Umathoverbarkern} {} {} {OverbarExtraAscender} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathoverbarrule} {} {} {OverbarRuleThickness} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathoverbarvgap} {} {} {OverbarVerticalGap} {3*default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathquad} {1} {} {<font_size(f)>} {math_quad}
-\MathLine{\Umathradicalkern} {} {} {RadicalExtraAscender} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathradicalrule} {2} {} {RadicalRuleThickness} {<not set>}
-\MathLine{\Umathradicalvgap} {3} {D, D'} {RadicalDisplayStyleVerticalGap} {default_rule_thickness+abs(math_x_height)/4}
-\MathLine{\Umathradicalvgap} {3} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{RadicalVerticalGap} {default_rule_thickness+abs(default_rule_thickness)/4}
-\MathLine{\Umathradicaldegreebefore}{2} {} {RadicalKernBeforeDegree} {<not set>}
-\MathLine{\Umathradicaldegreeafter} {2} {} {RadicalKernAfterDegree} {<not set>}
-\MathLine{\Umathradicaldegreeraise} {2,7}{} {RadicalDegreeBottomRaisePercent} {<not set>}
-\MathLine{\Umathspaceafterscript} {4} {} {SpaceAfterScript} {script_space}
-\MathLine{\Umathstackdenomdown} {} {D, D'} {StackBottomDisplayStyleShiftDown} {denom1}
-\MathLine{\Umathstackdenomdown} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{StackBottomShiftDown} {denom2}
-\MathLine{\Umathstacknumup} {} {D, D'} {StackTopDisplayStyleShiftUp} {num1}
-\MathLine{\Umathstacknumup} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{StackTopShiftUp} {num3}
-\MathLine{\Umathstackvgap} {} {D, D'} {StackDisplayStyleGapMin} {7*default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathstackvgap} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{StackGapMin} {3*default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathsubshiftdown} {} {} {SubscriptShiftDown} {sub1}
-\MathLine{\Umathsubshiftdrop} {} {} {SubscriptBaselineDropMin} {sub_drop}
-\MathLine{\Umathsubsupshiftdown} {8} {} {SubscriptShiftDownWithSuperscript} {\emdash}
-\MathLine{\Umathsubtopmax} {} {} {SubscriptTopMax} {abs(math_x_height*4)/5}
-\MathLine{\Umathsubsupvgap} {} {} {SubSuperscriptGapMin} {4*default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathsupbottommin} {} {} {SuperscriptBottomMin} {abs(math_x_height/4)}
-\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftdrop} {} {} {SuperscriptBaselineDropMax} {sup_drop}
-\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftup} {} {D} {SuperscriptShiftUp} {sup1}
-\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftup} {} {T, S, SS,} {SuperscriptShiftUp} {sup2}
-\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftup} {} {D', T', S', SS'} {SuperscriptShiftUpCramped} {sup3}
-\MathLine{\Umathsupsubbottommax} {} {} {SuperscriptBottomMaxWithSubscript} {abs(math_x_height*4)/5}
-\MathLine{\Umathunderbarkern} {} {} {UnderbarExtraDescender} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathunderbarrule} {} {} {UnderbarRuleThickness} {default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathunderbarvgap} {} {} {UnderbarVerticalGap} {3*default_rule_thickness}
-\MathLine{\Umathconnectoroverlapmin}{5} {} {MinConnectorOverlap} {0}
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note 1: \OPENTYPE\ fonts set \lpr {Umathlimitabovekern} and \lpr
-{Umathlimitbelowkern} to zero and set \lpr {Umathquad} to the font size of the
-used font, because these are not supported in the \type {MATH} table,
-
-Note 2: Traditional \TFM\ fonts do not set \lpr {Umathradicalrule} because
-\TEX82\ uses the height of the radical instead. When this parameter is indeed not
-set when \LUATEX\ has to typeset a radical, a backward compatibility mode will
-kick in that assumes that an oldstyle \TEX\ font is used. Also, they do not set
-\lpr {Umathradicaldegreebefore}, \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeafter}, and \lpr
-{Umathradicaldegreeraise}. These are then automatically initialized to
-$5/18$quad, $-10/18$quad, and 60.
-
-Note 3: If \TFM\ fonts are used, then the \lpr {Umathradicalvgap} is not set
-until the first time \LUATEX\ has to typeset a formula because this needs
-parameters from both family~2 and family~3. This provides a partial backward
-compatibility with \TEX82, but that compatibility is only partial: once the \lpr
-{Umathradicalvgap} is set, it will not be recalculated any more.
-
-Note 4: When \TFM\ fonts are used a similar situation arises with respect to \lpr
-{Umathspaceafterscript}: it is not set until the first time \LUATEX\ has to
-typeset a formula. This provides some backward compatibility with \TEX82. But
-once the \lpr {Umathspaceafterscript} is set, \prm {scriptspace} will never be
-looked at again.
-
-Note 5: Traditional \TFM\ fonts set \lpr {Umathconnectoroverlapmin} to zero
-because \TEX82\ always stacks extensibles without any overlap.
-
-Note 6: The \lpr {Umathoperatorsize} is only used in \prm {displaystyle}, and is
-only set in \OPENTYPE\ fonts. In \TFM\ font mode, it is artificially set to one
-scaled point more than the initial attempt's size, so that always the \quote
-{first next} will be tried, just like in \TEX82.
-
-Note 7: The \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeraise} is a special case because it is the
-only parameter that is expressed in a percentage instead of a number of scaled
-points.
-
-Note 8: \type {SubscriptShiftDownWithSuperscript} does not actually exist in the
-\quote {standard} \OPENTYPE\ math font Cambria, but it is useful enough to be
-added.
-
-Note 9: \type {FractionDelimiterDisplayStyleSize} and \type
-{FractionDelimiterSize} do not actually exist in the \quote {standard} \OPENTYPE\
-math font Cambria, but were useful enough to be added.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Math spacing}]
-
-\subsection{Inline surrounding space}
-
-\topicindex {math+spacing}
-
-Inline math is surrounded by (optional) \prm {mathsurround} spacing but that is a fixed
-dimension. There is now an additional parameter \lpr {mathsurroundskip}. When set to a
-non|-|zero value (or zero with some stretch or shrink) this parameter will replace
-\prm {mathsurround}. By using an additional parameter instead of changing the nature
-of \prm {mathsurround}, we can remain compatible. In the meantime a bit more
-control has been added via \lpr {mathsurroundmode}. This directive can take 6 values
-with zero being the default behaviour.
-
-\start
-
-\def\OneLiner#1#2%
- {\NC \type{#1}
- \NC \dontleavehmode\inframed[align=normal,offset=0pt,frame=off]{\mathsurroundmode#1\relax\hsize 100pt x$x$x}
- \NC \dontleavehmode\inframed[align=normal,offset=0pt,frame=off]{\mathsurroundmode#1\relax\hsize 100pt x $x$ x}
- \NC #2
- \NC \NR}
-
-\startbuffer
-\mathsurround 10pt
-\mathsurroundskip20pt
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer \getbuffer
-
-\starttabulate[|c|c|c|pl|]
-\DB mode \BC x\$x\$x \BC x \$x\$ x \BC effect \NC \NR
-\TB
-\OneLiner{0}{obey \prm {mathsurround} when \lpr {mathsurroundskip} is 0pt}
-\OneLiner{1}{only add skip to the left}
-\OneLiner{2}{only add skip to the right}
-\OneLiner{3}{add skip to the left and right}
-\OneLiner{4}{ignore the skip setting, obey \prm {mathsurround}}
-\OneLiner{5}{disable all spacing around math}
-\OneLiner{6}{only apply \lpr {mathsurroundskip} when also spacing}
-\OneLiner{7}{only apply \lpr {mathsurroundskip} when no spacing}
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stop
-
-Method six omits the surround glue when there is (x)spacing glue present while
-method seven does the opposite, the glue is only applied when there is (x)space
-glue present too. Anything more fancy, like checking the begining or end of a
-paragraph (or edges of a box) would not be robust anyway. If you want that you
-can write a callback that runs over a list and analyzes a paragraph. Actually, in
-that case you could also inject glue (or set the properties of a math node)
-explicitly. So, these modes are in practice mostly useful for special purposes
-and experiments (they originate in a tracker item). Keep in mind that this glue
-is part of the math node and not always treated as normal glue: it travels with
-the begin and end math nodes. Also, method 6 and 7 will zero the skip related
-fields in a node when applicable in the first occasion that checks them
-(linebreaking or packaging).
-
-\subsection{Pairwise spacing}
-
-\topicindex {math+spacing}
-
-Besides the parameters mentioned in the previous sections, there are also 64 new
-primitives to control the math spacing table (as explained in Chapter~18 of the
-\TEX book). The primitive names are a simple matter of combining two math atom
-types, but for completeness' sake, here is the whole list:
-
-\starttwocolumns
-\startlines
-\lpr {Umathordordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathordopspacing}
-\lpr {Umathordbinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathordrelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathordopenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathordclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathordpunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathordinnerspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopopspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopbinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathoprelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopopenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathoppunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopinnerspacing}
-\lpr {Umathbinordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathbinopspacing}
-\lpr {Umathbinbinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathbinrelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathbinopenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathbinclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathbinpunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathbininnerspacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelopspacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelbinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelrelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelopenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelpunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathrelinnerspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopenordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopenopspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopenbinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopenrelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopenopenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopenclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathopenpunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathopeninnerspacing}
-\lpr {Umathcloseordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathcloseopspacing}
-\lpr {Umathclosebinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathcloserelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathcloseopenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathcloseclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathclosepunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathcloseinnerspacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctopspacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctbinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctrelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctopenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctpunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathpunctinnerspacing}
-\lpr {Umathinnerordspacing}
-\lpr {Umathinneropspacing}
-\lpr {Umathinnerbinspacing}
-\lpr {Umathinnerrelspacing}
-\lpr {Umathinneropenspacing}
-\lpr {Umathinnerclosespacing}
-\lpr {Umathinnerpunctspacing}
-\lpr {Umathinnerinnerspacing}
-\stoplines
-\stoptwocolumns
-
-These parameters are of type \prm {muskip}, so setting a parameter can be done
-like this:
-
-\starttyping
-\Umathopordspacing\displaystyle=4mu plus 2mu
-\stoptyping
-
-They are all initialized by \type {initex} to the values mentioned in the table
-in Chapter~18 of the \TEX book.
-
-Note 1: for ease of use as well as for backward compatibility, \prm {thinmuskip},
-\prm {medmuskip} and \prm {thickmuskip} are treated specially. In their case a
-pointer to the corresponding internal parameter is saved, not the actual \prm
-{muskip} value. This means that any later changes to one of these three
-parameters will be taken into account.
-
-Note 2: Careful readers will realise that there are also primitives for the items
-marked \type {*} in the \TEX book. These will not actually be used as those
-combinations of atoms cannot actually happen, but it seemed better not to break
-orthogonality. They are initialized to zero.
-
-\subsection{Skips around display math}
-
-\topicindex {math+spacing}
-
-The injection of \prm {abovedisplayskip} and \prm {belowdisplayskip} is not
-symmetrical. An above one is always inserted, also when zero, but the below is
-only inserted when larger than zero. Especially the latter makes it sometimes hard
-to fully control spacing. Therefore \LUATEX\ comes with a new directive: \lpr
-{mathdisplayskipmode}. The following values apply:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC normal \TEX\ behaviour \NC \NR
-\NC 1 \NC always (same as 0) \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC only when not zero \NC \NR
-\NC 3 \NC never, not even when not zero \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection {Nolimit correction}
-
-\topicindex {math+limits}
-
-There are two extra math parameters \lpr {Umathnolimitsupfactor} and \lpr
-{Umathnolimitsubfactor} that were added to provide some control over how limits
-are spaced (for example the position of super and subscripts after integral
-operators). They relate to an extra parameter \lpr {mathnolimitsmode}. The half
-corrections are what happens when scripts are placed above and below. The
-problem with italic corrections is that officially that correction italic is used
-for above|/|below placement while advanced kerns are used for placement at the
-right end. The question is: how often is this implemented, and if so, do the
-kerns assume correction too. Anyway, with this parameter one can control it.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|ck1|ck1|ck1|ck1|ck1|ck1|]
- \NC
- \NC \mathnolimitsmode0 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
- \NC \mathnolimitsmode1 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
- \NC \mathnolimitsmode2 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
- \NC \mathnolimitsmode3 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
- \NC \mathnolimitsmode4 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
- \NC \mathnolimitsmode8000 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
- \NC \NR
- \TB
- \BC mode
- \NC \tttf 0
- \NC \tttf 1
- \NC \tttf 2
- \NC \tttf 3
- \NC \tttf 4
- \NC \tttf 8000
- \NC \NR
- \BC superscript
- \NC 0
- \NC font
- \NC 0
- \NC 0
- \NC +ic/2
- \NC 0
- \NC \NR
- \BC subscript
- \NC -ic
- \NC font
- \NC 0
- \NC -ic/2
- \NC -ic/2
- \NC 8000ic/1000
- \NC \NR
-\stoptabulate
-
-When the mode is set to one, the math parameters are used. This way a macro
-package writer can decide what looks best. Given the current state of fonts in
-\CONTEXT\ we currently use mode 1 with factor 0 for the superscript and 750 for
-the subscripts. Positive values are used for both parameters but the subscript
-shifts to the left. A \lpr {mathnolimitsmode} larger that 15 is considered to
-be a factor for the subscript correction. This feature can be handy when
-experimenting.
-
-\subsection {Math italic mess}
-
-\topicindex {math+italics}
-
-The \lpr {mathitalicsmode} parameter can be set to~1 to force italic correction
-before noads that represent some more complex structure (read: everything
-that is not an ord, bin, rel, open, close, punct or inner). We show a Cambria
-example.
-
-\starttexdefinition Whatever #1
- \NC \type{\mathitalicsmode = #1}
- \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$\left|T^1\right|$}
- \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$\left|T\right|$}
- \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$T+1$}
- \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$T{1\over2}$}
- \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$T\sqrt{1}$}
- \NC \NR
-\stoptexdefinition
-
-\start
- \switchtobodyfont[cambria]
- \starttabulate[|c|c|c|c|c|c|]
- \Whatever{0}%
- \Whatever{1}%
- \stoptabulate
-\stop
-
-This kind of parameters relate to the fact that italic correction in \OPENTYPE\
-math is bound to fuzzy rules. So, control is the solution.
-
-\subsection {Script and kerning}
-
-\topicindex {math+kerning}
-\topicindex {math+scripts}
-
-If you want to typeset text in math macro packages often provide something \type
-{\text} which obeys the script sizes. As the definition can be anything there is
-a good chance that the kerning doesn't come out well when used in a script. Given
-that the first glyph ends up in a \prm {hbox} we have some control over this.
-And, as a bonus we also added control over the normal sublist kerning. The \lpr
-{mathscriptboxmode} parameter defaults to~1.
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {0} \NC forget about kerning \NC \NR
-\NC \type {1} \NC kern math sub lists with a valid glyph \NC \NR
-\NC \type {2} \NC also kern math sub boxes that have a valid glyph \NC \NR
-\NC \type {2} \NC only kern math sub boxes with a boundary node present\NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Here we show some examples. Of course this doesn't solve all our problems, if
-only because some fonts have characters with bounding boxes that compensate for
-italics, while other fonts can lack kerns.
-
-\startbuffer[1]
- $T_{\tf fluff}$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startbuffer[2]
- $T_{\text{fluff}}$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startbuffer[3]
- $T_{\text{\boundary1 fluff}}$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\unexpanded\def\Show#1#2#3%
- {\doifelsenothing{#3}
- {\small\tx\typeinlinebuffer[#1]}
- {\doifelse{#3}{-}
- {\small\bf\tt mode #2}
- {\switchtobodyfont[#3]\showfontkerns\showglyphs\mathscriptboxmode#2\relax\inlinebuffer[#1]}}}
-
-\starttabulate[|lBT|c|c|c|c|c|]
- \NC \NC \Show{1}{0}{} \NC\Show{1}{1}{} \NC \Show{2}{1}{} \NC \Show{2}{2}{} \NC \Show{3}{3}{} \NC \NR
- \NC \NC \Show{1}{0}{-} \NC\Show{1}{1}{-} \NC \Show{2}{1}{-} \NC \Show{2}{2}{-} \NC \Show{3}{3}{-} \NC \NR
- \NC modern \NC \Show{1}{0}{modern} \NC\Show{1}{1}{modern} \NC \Show{2}{1}{modern} \NC \Show{2}{2}{modern} \NC \Show{3}{3}{modern} \NC \NR
- \NC lucidaot \NC \Show{1}{0}{lucidaot} \NC\Show{1}{1}{lucidaot} \NC \Show{2}{1}{lucidaot} \NC \Show{2}{2}{lucidaot} \NC \Show{3}{3}{lucidaot} \NC \NR
- \NC pagella \NC \Show{1}{0}{pagella} \NC\Show{1}{1}{pagella} \NC \Show{2}{1}{pagella} \NC \Show{2}{2}{pagella} \NC \Show{3}{3}{pagella} \NC \NR
- \NC cambria \NC \Show{1}{0}{cambria} \NC\Show{1}{1}{cambria} \NC \Show{2}{1}{cambria} \NC \Show{2}{2}{cambria} \NC \Show{3}{3}{cambria} \NC \NR
- \NC dejavu \NC \Show{1}{0}{dejavu} \NC\Show{1}{1}{dejavu} \NC \Show{2}{1}{dejavu} \NC \Show{2}{2}{dejavu} \NC \Show{3}{3}{dejavu} \NC \NR
-\stoptabulate
-
-Kerning between a character subscript is controlled by \lpr {mathscriptcharmode}
-which also defaults to~1.
-
-Here is another example. Internally we tag kerns as italic kerns or font kerns
-where font kerns result from the staircase kern tables. In 2018 fonts like Latin
-Modern and Pagella rely on cheats with the boundingbox, Cambria uses staircase
-kerns and Lucida a mixture. Depending on how fonts evolve we might add some more
-control over what one can turn on and off.
-
-\def\MathSample#1#2#3%
- {\NC
- #1 \NC
- #2 \NC
- \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3T_{f}$ \NC
- \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3\gamma_{e}$ \NC
- \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3\gamma_{ee}$ \NC
- \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3T_{\tf fluff}$ \NC
- \NR}
-
-\starttabulate[|Tl|Tl|l|l|l|l|]
- \FL
- \MathSample{normal}{modern} {\mr}
- \MathSample{} {pagella} {\mr}
- \MathSample{} {cambria} {\mr}
- \MathSample{} {lucidaot}{\mr}
- \ML
- \MathSample{bold} {modern} {\mb}
- \MathSample{} {pagella} {\mb}
- \MathSample{} {cambria} {\mb}
- \MathSample{} {lucidaot}{\mb}
- \LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{Fixed scripts}
-
-We have three parameters that are used for this fixed anchoring:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB parameter \BC register \NC \NR
-\NC $d$ \NC \lpr {Umathsubshiftdown} \NC \NR
-\NC $u$ \NC \lpr {Umathsupshiftup} \NC \NR
-\NC $s$ \NC \lpr {Umathsubsupshiftdown} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-When we set \lpr {mathscriptsmode} to a value other than zero these are used
-for calculating fixed positions. This is something that is needed for instance
-for chemistry. You can manipulate the mentioned variables to achieve different
-effects.
-
-\def\SampleMath#1%
- {$\mathscriptsmode#1\mathupright CH_2 + CH^+_2 + CH^2_2$}
-
-\starttabulate[|c|c|c|p|]
-\DB mode \BC down \BC up \BC example \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC dynamic \NC dynamic \NC \SampleMath{0} \NC \NR
-\NC 1 \NC $d$ \NC $u$ \NC \SampleMath{1} \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC $s$ \NC $u$ \NC \SampleMath{2} \NC \NR
-\NC 3 \NC $s$ \NC $u + s - d$ \NC \SampleMath{3} \NC \NR
-\NC 4 \NC $d + (s-d)/2$ \NC $u + (s-d)/2$ \NC \SampleMath{4} \NC \NR
-\NC 5 \NC $d$ \NC $u + s - d$ \NC \SampleMath{5} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The value of this parameter obeys grouping but applies to the whole current
-formula.
-
-% if needed we can put the value in stylenodes but maybe more should go there
-
-\subsection{Penalties: \lpr {mathpenaltiesmode}}
-
-\topicindex {math+penalties}
-
-Only in inline math penalties will be added in a math list. You can force
-penalties (also in display math) by setting:
-
-\starttyping
-\mathpenaltiesmode = 1
-\stoptyping
-
-This primnitive is not really needed in \LUATEX\ because you can use the callback
-\cbk {mlist_to_hlist} to force penalties by just calling the regular routine
-with forced penalties. However, as part of opening up and control this primitive
-makes sense. As a bonus we also provide two extra penalties:
-
-\starttyping
-\prebinoppenalty = -100 % example value
-\prerelpenalty = 900 % example value
-\stoptyping
-
-They default to inifinite which signals that they don't need to be inserted. When
-set they are injected before a binop or rel noad. This is an experimental feature.
-
-\subsection{Equation spacing: \lpr {matheqnogapstep}}
-
-By default \TEX\ will add one quad between the equation and the number. This is
-hard coded. A new primitive can control this:
-
-\startsyntax
-\matheqnogapstep = 1000
-\stopsyntax
-
-Because a math quad from the math text font is used instead of a dimension, we
-use a step to control the size. A value of zero will suppress the gap. The step
-is divided by 1000 which is the usual way to mimmick floating point factors in
-\TEX.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Math constructs}]
-
-\subsection {Unscaled fences}
-
-\topicindex {math+fences}
-
-The \lpr {mathdelimitersmode} primitive is experimental and deals with the
-following (potential) problems. Three bits can be set. The first bit prevents an
-unwanted shift when the fence symbol is not scaled (a cambria side effect). The
-second bit forces italic correction between a preceding character ordinal and the
-fenced subformula, while the third bit turns that subformula into an ordinary so
-that the same spacing applies as with unfenced variants. Here we show Cambria
-(with \lpr {mathitalicsmode} enabled).
-
-\starttexdefinition Whatever #1
- \NC \type{\mathdelimitersmode = #1}
- \NC \mathitalicsmode1\mathdelimitersmode#1\ruledhbox{\showglyphs\showfontkerns\showfontitalics$f(x)$}
- \NC \mathitalicsmode1\mathdelimitersmode#1\ruledhbox{\showglyphs\showfontkerns\showfontitalics$f\left(x\right)$}
- \NC \NR
-\stoptexdefinition
-
-\start
- \switchtobodyfont[cambria]
- \starttabulate[|l|l|l|]
- \Whatever{0}\Whatever{1}\Whatever{2}\Whatever{3}%
- \Whatever{4}\Whatever{5}\Whatever{6}\Whatever{7}%
- \stoptabulate
-\stop
-
-So, when set to 7 fenced subformulas with unscaled delimiters come out the same
-as unfenced ones. This can be handy for cases where one is forced to use \prm
-{left} and \prm {right} always because of unpredictable content. As said, it's an
-experimental feature (which somehow fits in the exceptional way fences are dealt
-with in the engine). The full list of flags is given in the next table:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{"01} \NC don't apply the usual shift \NC \NR
-\NC \type{"02} \NC apply italic correction when possible \NC \NR
-\NC \type{"04} \NC force an ordinary subformula \NC \NR
-\NC \type{"08} \NC no shift when a base character \NC \NR
-\NC \type{"10} \NC only shift when an extensible \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The effect can depend on the font (and for Cambria one can use for instance \type {"16}).
-
-\subsection[mathacc]{Accent handling}
-
-\topicindex {math+accents}
-
-\LUATEX\ supports both top accents and bottom accents in math mode, and math
-accents stretch automatically (if this is supported by the font the accent comes
-from, of course). Bottom and combined accents as well as fixed-width math accents
-are controlled by optional keywords following \lpr {Umathaccent}.
-
-The keyword \type {bottom} after \lpr {Umathaccent} signals that a bottom accent
-is needed, and the keyword \type {both} signals that both a top and a bottom
-accent are needed (in this case two accents need to be specified, of course).
-
-Then the set of three integers defining the accent is read. This set of integers
-can be prefixed by the \type {fixed} keyword to indicate that a non-stretching
-variant is requested (in case of both accents, this step is repeated).
-
-A simple example:
-
-\starttyping
-\Umathaccent both fixed 0 0 "20D7 fixed 0 0 "20D7 {example}
-\stoptyping
-
-If a math top accent has to be placed and the accentee is a character and has a
-non-zero \type {top_accent} value, then this value will be used to place the
-accent instead of the \prm {skewchar} kern used by \TEX82.
-
-The \type {top_accent} value represents a vertical line somewhere in the
-accentee. The accent will be shifted horizontally such that its own \type
-{top_accent} line coincides with the one from the accentee. If the \type
-{top_accent} value of the accent is zero, then half the width of the accent
-followed by its italic correction is used instead.
-
-The vertical placement of a top accent depends on the \type {x_height} of the
-font of the accentee (as explained in the \TEX book), but if a value turns out
-to be zero and the font had a \type {MathConstants} table, then \type
-{AccentBaseHeight} is used instead.
-
-The vertical placement of a bottom accent is straight below the accentee, no
-correction takes place.
-
-Possible locations are \type {top}, \type {bottom}, \type {both} and \type
-{center}. When no location is given \type {top} is assumed. An additional
-parameter \nod {fraction} can be specified followed by a number; a value of for
-instance 1200 means that the criterium is 1.2 times the width of the nucleus. The
-fraction only applies to the stepwise selected shapes and is mostly meant for the
-\type {overlay} location. It also works for the other locations but then it
-concerns the width.
-
-\subsection{Radical extensions}
-
-\topicindex {math+radicals}
-
-The new primitive \lpr {Uroot} allows the construction of a radical noad
-including a degree field. Its syntax is an extension of \lpr {Uradical}:
-
-\starttyping
-\Uradical <fam integer> <char integer> <radicand>
-\Uroot <fam integer> <char integer> <degree> <radicand>
-\stoptyping
-
-The placement of the degree is controlled by the math parameters \lpr
-{Umathradicaldegreebefore}, \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeafter}, and \lpr
-{Umathradicaldegreeraise}. The degree will be typeset in \prm
-{scriptscriptstyle}.
-
-\subsection{Super- and subscripts}
-
-The character fields in a \LUA|-|loaded \OPENTYPE\ math font can have a \quote
-{mathkern} table. The format of this table is the same as the \quote {mathkern}
-table that is returned by the \type {fontloader} library, except that all height
-and kern values have to be specified in actual scaled points.
-
-When a super- or subscript has to be placed next to a math item, \LUATEX\ checks
-whether the super- or subscript and the nucleus are both simple character items.
-If they are, and if the fonts of both character items are \OPENTYPE\ fonts (as
-opposed to legacy \TEX\ fonts), then \LUATEX\ will use the \OPENTYPE\ math
-algorithm for deciding on the horizontal placement of the super- or subscript.
-
-This works as follows:
-
-\startitemize
- \startitem
- The vertical position of the script is calculated.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- The default horizontal position is flat next to the base character.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- For superscripts, the italic correction of the base character is added.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- For a superscript, two vertical values are calculated: the bottom of the
- script (after shifting up), and the top of the base. For a subscript, the two
- values are the top of the (shifted down) script, and the bottom of the base.
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- For each of these two locations:
- \startitemize
- \startitem
- find the math kern value at this height for the base (for a subscript
- placement, this is the bottom_right corner, for a superscript
- placement the top_right corner)
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- find the math kern value at this height for the script (for a
- subscript placement, this is the top_left corner, for a superscript
- placement the bottom_left corner)
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- add the found values together to get a preliminary result.
- \stopitem
- \stopitemize
- \stopitem
- \startitem
- The horizontal kern to be applied is the smallest of the two results from
- previous step.
- \stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The math kern value at a specific height is the kern value that is specified by the
-next higher height and kern pair, or the highest one in the character (if there is no
-value high enough in the character), or simply zero (if the character has no math kern
-pairs at all).
-
-\subsection{Scripts on extensibles}
-
-\topicindex {math+scripts}
-\topicindex {math+delimiters}
-\topicindex {math+extensibles}
-
-The primitives \lpr {Uunderdelimiter} and \lpr {Uoverdelimiter} allow the
-placement of a subscript or superscript on an automatically extensible item and
-\lpr {Udelimiterunder} and \lpr {Udelimiterover} allow the placement of an
-automatically extensible item as a subscript or superscript on a nucleus. The
-input:
-
-% these produce radical noads .. in fact the code base has the numbers wrong for
-% quite a while, so no one seems to use this
-
-\startbuffer
-$\Uoverdelimiter 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut overdelimiter}}$
-$\Uunderdelimiter 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut underdelimiter}}$
-$\Udelimiterover 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut delimiterover}}$
-$\Udelimiterunder 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut delimiterunder}}$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer will render this:
-
-\blank \startnarrower \getbuffer \stopnarrower \blank
-
-The vertical placements are controlled by \lpr {Umathunderdelimiterbgap}, \lpr
-{Umathunderdelimitervgap}, \lpr {Umathoverdelimiterbgap}, and \lpr
-{Umathoverdelimitervgap} in a similar way as limit placements on large operators.
-The superscript in \lpr {Uoverdelimiter} is typeset in a suitable scripted style,
-the subscript in \lpr {Uunderdelimiter} is cramped as well.
-
-These primitives accepts an option \type {width} specification. When used the
-also optional keywords \type {left}, \type {middle} and \type {right} will
-determine what happens when a requested size can't be met (which can happen when
-we step to successive larger variants).
-
-An extra primitive \lpr {Uhextensible} is available that can be used like this:
-
-\startbuffer
-$\Uhextensible width 10cm 0 "2194$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer This will render this:
-
-\blank \startnarrower \getbuffer \stopnarrower \blank
-
-Here you can also pass options, like:
-
-\startbuffer
-$\Uhextensible width 1pt middle 0 "2194$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer This gives:
-
-\blank \startnarrower \getbuffer \stopnarrower \blank
-
-\LUATEX\ internally uses a structure that supports \OPENTYPE\ \quote
-{MathVariants} as well as \TFM\ \quote {extensible recipes}. In most cases where
-font metrics are involved we have a different code path for traditional fonts end
-\OPENTYPE\ fonts.
-
-\subsection{Fractions}
-
-\topicindex {math+fractions}
-
-The \prm {abovewithdelims} command accepts a keyword \type {exact}. When issued
-the extra space relative to the rule thickness is not added. One can of course
-use the \type {\Umathfraction..gap} commands to influence the spacing. Also the
-rule is still positioned around the math axis.
-
-\starttyping
-$$ { {a} \abovewithdelims() exact 4pt {b} }$$
-\stoptyping
-
-The math parameter table contains some parameters that specify a horizontal and
-vertical gap for skewed fractions. Of course some guessing is needed in order to
-implement something that uses them. And so we now provide a primitive similar to the
-other fraction related ones but with a few options so that one can influence the
-rendering. Of course a user can also mess around a bit with the parameters
-\lpr {Umathskewedfractionhgap} and \lpr {Umathskewedfractionvgap}.
-
-The syntax used here is:
-
-\starttyping
-{ {1} \Uskewed / <options> {2} }
-{ {1} \Uskewedwithdelims / () <options> {2} }
-\stoptyping
-
-where the options can be \type {noaxis} and \type {exact}. By default we add half
-the axis to the shifts and by default we zero the width of the middle character.
-For Latin Modern the result looks as follows:
-
-\def\ShowA#1#2#3{$x + { {#1} \Uskewed / #3 {#2} } + x$}
-\def\ShowB#1#2#3{$x + { {#1} \Uskewedwithdelims / () #3 {#2} } + x$}
-
-\start
- \switchtobodyfont[modern]
- \starttabulate[||||||]
- \NC \NC
- \ShowA{a}{b}{} \NC
- \ShowA{1}{2}{} \NC
- \ShowB{a}{b}{} \NC
- \ShowB{1}{2}{} \NC
- \NR
- \NC \type{exact} \NC
- \ShowA{a}{b}{exact} \NC
- \ShowA{1}{2}{exact} \NC
- \ShowB{a}{b}{exact} \NC
- \ShowB{1}{2}{exact} \NC
- \NR
- \NC \type{noaxis} \NC
- \ShowA{a}{b}{noaxis} \NC
- \ShowA{1}{2}{noaxis} \NC
- \ShowB{a}{b}{noaxis} \NC
- \ShowB{1}{2}{noaxis} \NC
- \NR
- \NC \type{exact noaxis} \NC
- \ShowA{a}{b}{exact noaxis} \NC
- \ShowA{1}{2}{exact noaxis} \NC
- \ShowB{a}{b}{exact noaxis} \NC
- \ShowB{1}{2}{exact noaxis} \NC
- \NR
- \stoptabulate
-\stop
-
-\subsection {Delimiters: \type{\Uleft}, \prm {Umiddle} and \prm {Uright}}
-
-\topicindex {math+delimiters}
-
-Normally you will force delimiters to certain sizes by putting an empty box or
-rule next to it. The resulting delimiter will either be a character from the
-stepwise size range or an extensible. The latter can be quite differently
-positioned than the characters as it depends on the fit as well as the fact if
-the used characters in the font have depth or height. Commands like (plain \TEX
-s) \type {\big} need use this feature. In \LUATEX\ we provide a bit more control
-by three variants that support optional parameters \type {height}, \type {depth}
-and \type {axis}. The following example uses this:
-
-\startbuffer
-\Uleft height 30pt depth 10pt \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000028
-\quad x\quad
-\Umiddle height 40pt depth 15pt \Udelimiter "0 "0 "002016
-\quad x\quad
-\Uright height 30pt depth 10pt \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000029
-\quad \quad \quad
-\Uleft height 30pt depth 10pt axis \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000028
-\quad x\quad
-\Umiddle height 40pt depth 15pt axis \Udelimiter "0 "0 "002016
-\quad x\quad
-\Uright height 30pt depth 10pt axis \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000029
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-\startlinecorrection
-\ruledhbox{\mathematics{\getbuffer}}
-\stoplinecorrection
-
-The keyword \type {exact} can be used as directive that the real dimensions
-should be applied when the criteria can't be met which can happen when we're
-still stepping through the successively larger variants. When no dimensions are
-given the \type {noaxis} command can be used to prevent shifting over the axis.
-
-You can influence the final class with the keyword \type {class} which will
-influence the spacing. The numbers are the same as for character classes.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Extracting values}]
-
-\subsection{Codes}
-
-\topicindex {math+codes}
-
-You can extract the components of a math character. Say that we have defined:
-
-\starttyping
-\Umathcode 1 2 3 4
-\stoptyping
-
-then
-
-\starttyping
-[\Umathcharclass1] [\Umathcharfam1] [\Umathcharslot1]
-\stoptyping
-
-will return:
-
-\starttyping
-[2] [3] [4]
-\stoptyping
-
-These commands are provides as convenience. Before they come available you could
-do the following:
-
-\starttyping
-\def\Umathcharclass{\directlua{tex.print(tex.getmathcode(token.scan_int())[1])}}
-\def\Umathcharfam {\directlua{tex.print(tex.getmathcode(token.scan_int())[2])}}
-\def\Umathcharslot {\directlua{tex.print(tex.getmathcode(token.scan_int())[3])}}
-\stoptyping
-
-\subsection {Last lines}
-
-\topicindex {math+last line}
-
-There is a new primitive to control the overshoot in the calculation of the
-previous line in mid|-|paragraph display math. The default value is 2 times
-the em width of the current font:
-
-\starttyping
-\predisplaygapfactor=2000
-\stoptyping
-
-If you want to have the length of the last line independent of math i.e.\ you don't
-want to revert to a hack where you insert a fake display math formula in order to
-get the length of the last line, the following will often work too:
-
-\starttyping
-\def\lastlinelength{\dimexpr
- \directlua {tex.sprint (
- (nodes.dimensions(node.tail(tex.lists.page_head).list))
- )}sp
-\relax}
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Math mode}]
-
-\subsection {Verbose versions of single|-|character math commands}
-
-\topicindex {math+styles}
-
-\LUATEX\ defines six new primitives that have the same function as
-\type {^}, \type {_}, \type {$}, and \type {$$}:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB primitive \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \lpr {Usuperscript} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {^} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Usubscript} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {_} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Ustartmath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$}, % $
- when used in non-math mode. \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Ustopmath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$}, % $
- when used in inline math mode. \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Ustartdisplaymath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$$}, % $$
- when used in non-math mode. \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {Ustopdisplaymath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$$}, % $$
- when used in display math mode. \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \lpr {Ustopmath} and \lpr {Ustopdisplaymath} primitives check if the current
-math mode is the correct one (inline vs.\ displayed), but you can freely intermix
-the four mathon|/|mathoff commands with explicit dollar sign(s).
-
-\subsection{Script commands \lpr {Unosuperscript} and \lpr {Unosubscript}}
-
-\topicindex {math+styles}
-\topicindex {math+scripts}
-
-These two commands result in super- and subscripts but with the current style (at the
-time of rendering). So,
-
-\startbuffer[script]
-$
- x\Usuperscript {1}\Usubscript {2} =
- x\Unosuperscript{1}\Unosubscript{2} =
- x\Usuperscript {1}\Unosubscript{2} =
- x\Unosuperscript{1}\Usubscript {2}
-$
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-results in \inlinebuffer[script].
-
-\subsection{Allowed math commands in non|-|math modes}
-
-\topicindex {math+text}
-\topicindex {text+math}
-
-The commands \prm {mathchar}, and \lpr {Umathchar} and control sequences that are
-the result of \prm {mathchardef} or \lpr {Umathchardef} are also acceptable in
-the horizontal and vertical modes. In those cases, the \prm {textfont} from the
-requested math family is used.
-
-% \startsection[title={Math todo}]
-%
-% The following items are still todo.
-%
-% \startitemize
-% \startitem
-% Pre-scripts.
-% \stopitem
-% \startitem
-% Multi-story stacks.
-% \stopitem
-% \startitem
-% Flattened accents for high characters (maybe).
-% \stopitem
-% \startitem
-% Better control over the spacing around displays and handling of equation numbers.
-% \stopitem
-% \startitem
-% Support for multi|-|line displays using \MATHML\ style alignment points.
-% \stopitem
-% \stopitemize
-%
-% \stopsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Goodies}]
-
-\subsection {Flattening: \lpr {mathflattenmode}}
-
-\topicindex {math+flattening}
-
-The \TEX\ math engine collapses \type {ord} noads without sub- and superscripts
-and a character as nucleus. and which has the side effect that in \OPENTYPE\ mode
-italic corrections are applied (given that they are enabled).
-
-\startbuffer[sample]
-\switchtobodyfont[modern]
-$V \mathbin{\mathbin{v}} V$\par
-$V \mathord{\mathord{v}} V$\par
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer[sample]
-
-This renders as:
-
-\blank \start \mathflattenmode\plusone \getbuffer[sample] \stop \blank
-
-When we set \lpr {mathflattenmode} to 31 we get:
-
-\blank \start \mathflattenmode\numexpr1+2+4+8+16\relax \getbuffer[sample] \stop \blank
-
-When you see no difference, then the font probably has the proper character
-dimensions and no italic correction is needed. For Latin Modern (at least till
-2018) there was a visual difference. In that respect this parameter is not always
-needed unless of course you want efficient math lists anyway.
-
-You can influence flattening by adding the appropriate number to the value of the
-mode parameter. The default value is~1.
-
-\starttabulate[|Tc|c|]
-\DB mode \BC class \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 1 \NC ord \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC bin \NC \NR
-\NC 4 \NC rel \NC \NR
-\NC 8 \NC punct \NC \NR
-\NC 16 \NC inner \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection {Less Tracing}
-
-\topicindex {math+tracing}
-
-Because there are quite some math related parameters and values, it is possible
-to limit tracing. Only when \type {tracingassigns} and|/|or \type
-{tracingrestores} are set to~2 or more they will be traced.
-
-\subsection {Math options with \lpr {mathoption}}
-
-The logic in the math engine is rather complex and there are often no universal
-solutions (read: what works out well for one font, fails for another). Therefore
-some variations in the implementation are driven by parameters (modes). In
-addition there is a new primitive \lpr {mathoption} which will be used for
-testing. Don't rely on any option to be there in a production version as they are
-meant for development.
-
-This option was introduced for testing purposes when the math engine got split
-code paths and it forces the engine to treat new fonts as old ones with respect
-to italic correction etc. There are no guarantees given with respect to the final
-result and unexpected side effects are not seen as bugs as they relate to font
-properties. Ther eis currently only one option:
-
-\startbuffer
-\mathoption old 1
-\stopbuffer
-
-The \type {oldmath} boolean flag in the \LUA\ font table is the official way to
-force old treatment as it's bound to fonts. Like with all options we may
-temporarily introduce with this command this feature is not meant for production.
-
-% % obsolete:
-%
-% \subsubsection {\type {\mathoption noitaliccompensation}}
-%
-% This option compensates placement for characters with a built|-|in italic
-% correction.
-%
-% \startbuffer
-% {\showboxes\int}\quad
-% {\showboxes\int_{|}^{|}}\quad
-% {\showboxes\int\limits_{|}^{|}}
-% \stopbuffer
-%
-% \typebuffer
-%
-% Gives (with computer modern that has such italics):
-%
-% \startlinecorrection[blank]
-% \switchtobodyfont[modern]
-% \startcombination[nx=2,ny=2,distance=5em]
-% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 0\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{0:inline}}
-% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 0\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{0:display}}
-% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 1\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{1:inline}}
-% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 1\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{1:display}}
-% \stopcombination
-% \stoplinecorrection
-
-% % obsolete:
-%
-% \subsubsection {\type {\mathoption nocharitalic}}
-%
-% When two characters follow each other italic correction can interfere. The
-% following example shows what this option does:
-%
-% \startbuffer
-% \catcode"1D443=11
-% \catcode"1D444=11
-% \catcode"1D445=11
-% P( PP PQR
-% \stopbuffer
-%
-% \typebuffer
-%
-% Gives (with computer modern that has such italics):
-%
-% \startlinecorrection[blank]
-% \switchtobodyfont[modern]
-% \startcombination[nx=2,ny=2,distance=5em]
-% {\mathoption nocharitalic 0\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{0:inline}}
-% {\mathoption nocharitalic 0\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{0:display}}
-% {\mathoption nocharitalic 1\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{1:inline}}
-% {\mathoption nocharitalic 1\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
-% {\nohyphens\type{1:display}}
-% \stopcombination
-% \stoplinecorrection
-
-% % obsolete:
-%
-% \subsubsection {\type {\mathoption useoldfractionscaling}}
-%
-% This option has been introduced as solution for tracker item 604 for fuzzy cases
-% around either or not present fraction related settings for new fonts.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-math
+
+\startchapter[reference=math,title={Math}]
+
+\startsection[title={Traditional alongside \OPENTYPE}]
+
+\topicindex {math}
+
+The handling of mathematics in \LUATEX\ differs quite a bit from how \TEX82 (and
+therefore \PDFTEX) handles math. First, \LUATEX\ adds primitives and extends some
+others so that \UNICODE\ input can be used easily. Second, all of \TEX82's
+internal special values (for example for operator spacing) have been made
+accessible and changeable via control sequences. Third, there are extensions that
+make it easier to use \OPENTYPE\ math fonts. And finally, there are some
+extensions that have been proposed or considered in the past that are now added
+to the engine.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Unicode math characters}]
+
+\topicindex {math+\UNICODE}
+\topicindex {\UNICODE+math}
+
+Character handling is now extended up to the full \UNICODE\ range (the \type {\U}
+prefix), which is compatible with \XETEX.
+
+The math primitives from \TEX\ are kept as they are, except for the ones that
+convert from input to math commands: \type {mathcode}, and \type {delcode}. These
+two now allow for a 21-bit character argument on the left hand side of the equals
+sign.
+
+Some of the new \LUATEX\ primitives read more than one separate value. This is
+shown in the tables below by a plus sign.
+
+The input for such primitives would look like this:
+
+\starttyping
+\def\overbrace{\Umathaccent 0 1 "23DE }
+\stoptyping
+
+The altered \TEX82 primitives are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|r|c|l|r|]
+\DB primitive \BC min \BC max \BC \kern 2em \BC min \BC max \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \prm {mathcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0 \NC 8000 \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {delcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0 \NC FFFFFF \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The unaltered ones are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|r|]
+\DB primitive \BC min \BC max \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \prm {mathchardef} \NC 0 \NC 8000 \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {mathchar} \NC 0 \NC 7FFF \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {mathaccent} \NC 0 \NC 7FFF \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {delimiter} \NC 0 \NC 7FFFFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {radical} \NC 0 \NC 7FFFFFF \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+For practical reasons \prm {mathchardef} will silently accept values larger
+that \type {0x8000} and interpret it as \lpr {Umathcharnumdef}. This is needed
+to satisfy older macro packages.
+
+The following new primitives are compatible with \XETEX:
+
+% somewhat fuzzy:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|r|c|l|r|]
+\DB primitive \BC min \BC max \BC \kern 2em \BC min \BC max \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \lpr {Umathchardef} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathcharnumdef}\rlap{\high{5}} \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Udelcode} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC 0+0 \NC FF+10FFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathchar} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathaccent} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Udelimiter} \NC 0+0+0 \NC 7+FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Uradical} \NC 0+0 \NC FF+10FFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathcharnum} \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NC \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathcodenum} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Udelcodenum} \NC 0 \NC 10FFFF \NC = \NC -80000000 \NC 7FFFFFFF \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Specifications typically look like:
+
+\starttyping
+\Umathchardef\xx="1"0"456
+\Umathcode 123="1"0"789
+\stoptyping
+
+The new primitives that deal with delimiter|-|style objects do not set up a
+\quote {large family}. Selecting a suitable size for display purposes is expected
+to be dealt with by the font via the \lpr {Umathoperatorsize} parameter.
+
+For some of these primitives, all information is packed into a single signed
+integer. For the first two (\lpr {Umathcharnum} and \lpr {Umathcodenum}), the
+lowest 21 bits are the character code, the 3 bits above that represent the math
+class, and the family data is kept in the topmost bits. This means that the values
+for math families 128--255 are actually negative. For \lpr {Udelcodenum} there
+is no math class. The math family information is stored in the bits directly on
+top of the character code. Using these three commands is not as natural as using
+the two- and three|-|value commands, so unless you know exactly what you are
+doing and absolutely require the speedup resulting from the faster input
+scanning, it is better to use the verbose commands instead.
+
+The \lpr {Umathaccent} command accepts optional keywords to control various
+details regarding math accents. See \in {section} [mathacc] below for details.
+
+There are more new primitives and all of these will be explained in following
+sections:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB primitive \BC value range (in hex) \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \lpr {Uroot} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Uoverdelimiter} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Uunderdelimiter} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Udelimiterover} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Udelimiterunder} \NC 0 + 0--FF + 10FFFF \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Math styles}]
+
+\subsection{\lpr {mathstyle}}
+
+\topicindex {math+styles}
+
+It is possible to discover the math style that will be used for a formula in an
+expandable fashion (while the math list is still being read). To make this
+possible, \LUATEX\ adds the new primitive: \lpr {mathstyle}. This is a \quote
+{convert command} like e.g. \prm {romannumeral}: its value can only be read,
+not set.
+
+The returned value is between 0 and 7 (in math mode), or $-1$ (all other modes).
+For easy testing, the eight math style commands have been altered so that they can
+be used as numeric values, so you can write code like this:
+
+\starttyping
+\ifnum\mathstyle=\textstyle
+ \message{normal text style}
+\else \ifnum\mathstyle=\crampedtextstyle
+ \message{cramped text style}
+\fi \fi
+\stoptyping
+
+Sometimes you won't get what you expect so a bit of explanation might help to
+understand what happens. When math is parsed and expanded it gets turned into a
+linked list. In a second pass the formula will be build. This has to do with the
+fact that in order to determine the automatically chosen sizes (in for instance
+fractions) following content can influence preceding sizes. A side effect of this
+is for instance that one cannot change the definition of a font family (and
+thereby reusing numbers) because the number that got used is stored and used in
+the second pass (so changing \type {\fam 12} mid|-|formula spoils over to
+preceding use of that family).
+
+The style switching primitives like \prm {textstyle} are turned into nodes so the
+styles set there are frozen. The \prm {mathchoice} primitive results in four
+lists being constructed of which one is used in the second pass. The fact that
+some automatic styles are not yet known also means that the \lpr {mathstyle}
+primitive expands to the current style which can of course be different from the
+one really used. It's a snapshot of the first pass state. As a consequence in the
+following example you get a style number (first pass) typeset that can actually
+differ from the used style (second pass). In the case of a math choice used
+ungrouped, the chosen style is used after the choice too, unless you group.
+
+\startbuffer[1]
+ [a:\mathstyle]\quad
+ \bgroup
+ \mathchoice
+ {\bf \scriptstyle (x:d :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:t :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:s :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:ss:\mathstyle)}
+ \egroup
+ \quad[b:\mathstyle]\quad
+ \mathchoice
+ {\bf \scriptstyle (y:d :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:t :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:s :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:ss:\mathstyle)}
+ \quad[c:\mathstyle]\quad
+ \bgroup
+ \mathchoice
+ {\bf \scriptstyle (z:d :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:t :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:s :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:ss:\mathstyle)}
+ \egroup
+ \quad[d:\mathstyle]
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startbuffer[2]
+ [a:\mathstyle]\quad
+ \begingroup
+ \mathchoice
+ {\bf \scriptstyle (x:d :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:t :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:s :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (x:ss:\mathstyle)}
+ \endgroup
+ \quad[b:\mathstyle]\quad
+ \mathchoice
+ {\bf \scriptstyle (y:d :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:t :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:s :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (y:ss:\mathstyle)}
+ \quad[c:\mathstyle]\quad
+ \begingroup
+ \mathchoice
+ {\bf \scriptstyle (z:d :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:t :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:s :\mathstyle)}
+ {\bf \scriptscriptstyle (z:ss:\mathstyle)}
+ \endgroup
+ \quad[d:\mathstyle]
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer[1]
+
+% \typebuffer[2]
+
+This gives:
+
+\blank $\displaystyle \getbuffer[1]$ \blank
+\blank $\textstyle \getbuffer[1]$ \blank
+
+Using \prm {begingroup} \unknown\ \prm {endgroup} instead gives:
+
+\blank $\displaystyle \getbuffer[2]$ \blank
+\blank $\textstyle \getbuffer[2]$ \blank
+
+This might look wrong but it's just a side effect of \lpr {mathstyle} expanding
+to the current (first pass) style and the number being injected in the list that
+gets converted in the second pass. It all makes sense and it illustrates the
+importance of grouping. In fact, the math choice style being effective afterwards
+has advantages. It would be hard to get it otherwise.
+
+\subsection{\lpr {Ustack}}
+
+\topicindex {math+stacks}
+
+There are a few math commands in \TEX\ where the style that will be used is not
+known straight from the start. These commands (\prm {over}, \prm {atop},
+\prm {overwithdelims}, \prm {atopwithdelims}) would therefore normally return
+wrong values for \lpr {mathstyle}. To fix this, \LUATEX\ introduces a special
+prefix command: \lpr {Ustack}:
+
+\starttyping
+$\Ustack {a \over b}$
+\stoptyping
+
+The \lpr {Ustack} command will scan the next brace and start a new math group
+with the correct (numerator) math style.
+
+\subsection{Cramped math styles}
+
+\topicindex {math+styles}
+\topicindex {math+spacing}
+\topicindex {math+cramped}
+
+\LUATEX\ has four new primitives to set the cramped math styles directly:
+
+\starttyping
+\crampeddisplaystyle
+\crampedtextstyle
+\crampedscriptstyle
+\crampedscriptscriptstyle
+\stoptyping
+
+These additional commands are not all that valuable on their own, but they come
+in handy as arguments to the math parameter settings that will be added shortly.
+
+In Eijkhouts \quotation {\TEX\ by Topic} the rules for handling styles in scripts
+are described as follows:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ In any style superscripts and subscripts are taken from the next smaller style.
+ Exception: in display style they are in script style.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Subscripts are always in the cramped variant of the style; superscripts are only
+ cramped if the original style was cramped.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ In an \type {..\over..} formula in any style the numerator and denominator are
+ taken from the next smaller style.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ The denominator is always in cramped style; the numerator is only in cramped
+ style if the original style was cramped.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Formulas under a \type {\sqrt} or \prm {overline} are in cramped style.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+In \LUATEX\ one can set the styles in more detail which means that you sometimes
+have to set both normal and cramped styles to get the effect you want. (Even) if
+we force styles in the script using \prm {scriptstyle} and \lpr
+{crampedscriptstyle} we get this:
+
+\startbuffer[demo]
+\starttabulate
+\DB style \BC example \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC default \NC $b_{x=xx}^{x=xx}$ \NC \NR
+\NC script \NC $b_{\scriptstyle x=xx}^{\scriptstyle x=xx}$ \NC \NR
+\NC crampedscript \NC $b_{\crampedscriptstyle x=xx}^{\crampedscriptstyle x=xx}$ \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+\stopbuffer
+
+\getbuffer[demo]
+
+Now we set the following parameters
+
+\startbuffer[setup]
+\Umathordrelspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
+\Umathordordspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer[setup]
+
+This gives a different result:
+
+\start\getbuffer[setup,demo]\stop
+
+But, as this is not what is expected (visually) we should say:
+
+\startbuffer[setup]
+\Umathordrelspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
+\Umathordordspacing\scriptstyle=30mu
+\Umathordrelspacing\crampedscriptstyle=30mu
+\Umathordordspacing\crampedscriptstyle=30mu
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer[setup]
+
+Now we get:
+
+\start\getbuffer[setup,demo]\stop
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Math parameter settings}]
+
+\subsection {Many new \lpr {Umath*} primitives}
+
+\topicindex {math+parameters}
+
+In \LUATEX, the font dimension parameters that \TEX\ used in math typesetting are
+now accessible via primitive commands. In fact, refactoring of the math engine
+has resulted in many more parameters than were not accessible before.
+
+\starttabulate
+\DB primitive name \BC description \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \lpr {Umathquad} \NC the width of 18 mu's \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathaxis} \NC height of the vertical center axis of
+ the math formula above the baseline \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathoperatorsize} \NC minimum size of large operators in display mode \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathoverbarkern} \NC vertical clearance above the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathoverbarrule} \NC the width of the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathoverbarvgap} \NC vertical clearance below the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathunderbarkern} \NC vertical clearance below the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathunderbarrule} \NC the width of the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathunderbarvgap} \NC vertical clearance above the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathradicalkern} \NC vertical clearance above the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathradicalrule} \NC the width of the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathradicalvgap} \NC vertical clearance below the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathradicaldegreebefore}\NC the forward kern that takes place before placement of
+ the radical degree \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeafter} \NC the backward kern that takes place after placement of
+ the radical degree \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeraise} \NC this is the percentage of the total height and depth of
+ the radical sign that the degree is raised by; it is
+ expressed in \type {percents}, so 60\% is expressed as the
+ integer $60$ \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathstackvgap} \NC vertical clearance between the two
+ elements in a \prm {atop} stack \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathstacknumup} \NC numerator shift upward in \prm {atop} stack \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathstackdenomdown} \NC denominator shift downward in \prm {atop} stack \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathfractionrule} \NC the width of the rule in a \prm {over} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathfractionnumvgap} \NC vertical clearance between the numerator and the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathfractionnumup} \NC numerator shift upward in \prm {over} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathfractiondenomvgap} \NC vertical clearance between the denominator and the rule \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathfractiondenomdown} \NC denominator shift downward in \prm {over} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathfractiondelsize} \NC minimum delimiter size for \type {\...withdelims} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathlimitabovevgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits above operators \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathlimitabovebgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits above operators \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathlimitabovekern} \NC space reserved at the top of the limit \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathlimitbelowvgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits below operators \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathlimitbelowbgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits below operators \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathlimitbelowkern} \NC space reserved at the bottom of the limit \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathoverdelimitervgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits above delimiters \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathoverdelimiterbgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits above delimiters \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathunderdelimitervgap} \NC vertical clearance for limits below delimiters \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathunderdelimiterbgap} \NC vertical baseline clearance for limits below delimiters \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsubshiftdrop} \NC subscript drop for boxes and subformulas \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsubshiftdown} \NC subscript drop for characters \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsupshiftdrop} \NC superscript drop (raise, actually) for boxes and subformulas \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsupshiftup} \NC superscript raise for characters \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsubsupshiftdown} \NC subscript drop in the presence of a superscript \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsubtopmax} \NC the top of standalone subscripts cannot be higher than this
+ above the baseline \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsupbottommin} \NC the bottom of standalone superscripts cannot be less than
+ this above the baseline \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsupsubbottommax} \NC the bottom of the superscript of a combined super- and subscript
+ be at least as high as this above the baseline \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathsubsupvgap} \NC vertical clearance between super- and subscript \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathspaceafterscript} \NC additional space added after a super- or subscript \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Umathconnectoroverlapmin}\NC minimum overlap between parts in an extensible recipe \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Each of the parameters in this section can be set by a command like this:
+
+\starttyping
+\Umathquad\displaystyle=1em
+\stoptyping
+
+they obey grouping, and you can use \type {\the\Umathquad\displaystyle} if
+needed.
+
+\subsection{Font|-|based math parameters}
+
+\topicindex {math+parameters}
+
+While it is nice to have these math parameters available for tweaking, it would
+be tedious to have to set each of them by hand. For this reason, \LUATEX\
+initializes a bunch of these parameters whenever you assign a font identifier to
+a math family based on either the traditional math font dimensions in the font
+(for assignments to math family~2 and~3 using \TFM|-|based fonts like \type
+{cmsy} and \type {cmex}), or based on the named values in a potential \type
+{MathConstants} table when the font is loaded via Lua. If there is a \type
+{MathConstants} table, this takes precedence over font dimensions, and in that
+case no attention is paid to which family is being assigned to: the \type
+{MathConstants} tables in the last assigned family sets all parameters.
+
+In the table below, the one|-|letter style abbreviations and symbolic tfm font
+dimension names match those used in the \TeX book. Assignments to \prm
+{textfont} set the values for the cramped and uncramped display and text styles,
+\prm {scriptfont} sets the script styles, and \prm {scriptscriptfont} sets the
+scriptscript styles, so we have eight parameters for three font sizes. In the
+\TFM\ case, assignments only happen in family~2 and family~3 (and of course only
+for the parameters for which there are font dimensions).
+
+Besides the parameters below, \LUATEX\ also looks at the \quote {space} font
+dimension parameter. For math fonts, this should be set to zero.
+
+\def\MathLine#1#2#3#4#5%
+ {\TB
+ \NC \llap{\high{\tx #2\enspace}}\ttbf \string #1 \NC \tt #5 \NC \NR
+ \NC \tx #3 \NC \tt #4 \NC \NR}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB variable / style \BC tfm / opentype \NC \NR
+\MathLine{\Umathaxis} {} {} {AxisHeight} {axis_height}
+\MathLine{\Umathoperatorsize} {6} {D, D'} {DisplayOperatorMinHeight} {\emdash}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractiondelsize} {9} {D, D'} {FractionDelimiterDisplayStyleSize} {delim1}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractiondelsize} {9} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionDelimiterSize} {delim2}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomdown} {} {D, D'} {FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleShiftDown}{denom1}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomdown} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionDenominatorShiftDown} {denom2}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomvgap} {} {D, D'} {FractionDenominatorDisplayStyleGapMin} {3*default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractiondenomvgap} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionDenominatorGapMin} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumup} {} {D, D'} {FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleShiftUp} {num1}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumup} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionNumeratorShiftUp} {num2}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumvgap} {} {D, D'} {FractionNumeratorDisplayStyleGapMin} {3*default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractionnumvgap} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{FractionNumeratorGapMin} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathfractionrule} {} {} {FractionRuleThickness} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathskewedfractionhgap} {} {} {SkewedFractionHorizontalGap} {math_quad/2}
+\MathLine{\Umathskewedfractionvgap} {} {} {SkewedFractionVerticalGap} {math_x_height}
+\MathLine{\Umathlimitabovebgap} {} {} {UpperLimitBaselineRiseMin} {big_op_spacing3}
+\MathLine{\Umathlimitabovekern} {1} {} {0} {big_op_spacing5}
+\MathLine{\Umathlimitabovevgap} {} {} {UpperLimitGapMin} {big_op_spacing1}
+\MathLine{\Umathlimitbelowbgap} {} {} {LowerLimitBaselineDropMin} {big_op_spacing4}
+\MathLine{\Umathlimitbelowkern} {1} {} {0} {big_op_spacing5}
+\MathLine{\Umathlimitbelowvgap} {} {} {LowerLimitGapMin} {big_op_spacing2}
+\MathLine{\Umathoverdelimitervgap} {} {} {StretchStackGapBelowMin} {big_op_spacing1}
+\MathLine{\Umathoverdelimiterbgap} {} {} {StretchStackTopShiftUp} {big_op_spacing3}
+\MathLine{\Umathunderdelimitervgap} {} {} {StretchStackGapAboveMin} {big_op_spacing2}
+\MathLine{\Umathunderdelimiterbgap} {} {} {StretchStackBottomShiftDown} {big_op_spacing4}
+\MathLine{\Umathoverbarkern} {} {} {OverbarExtraAscender} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathoverbarrule} {} {} {OverbarRuleThickness} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathoverbarvgap} {} {} {OverbarVerticalGap} {3*default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathquad} {1} {} {<font_size(f)>} {math_quad}
+\MathLine{\Umathradicalkern} {} {} {RadicalExtraAscender} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathradicalrule} {2} {} {RadicalRuleThickness} {<not set>}
+\MathLine{\Umathradicalvgap} {3} {D, D'} {RadicalDisplayStyleVerticalGap} {default_rule_thickness+abs(math_x_height)/4}
+\MathLine{\Umathradicalvgap} {3} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{RadicalVerticalGap} {default_rule_thickness+abs(default_rule_thickness)/4}
+\MathLine{\Umathradicaldegreebefore}{2} {} {RadicalKernBeforeDegree} {<not set>}
+\MathLine{\Umathradicaldegreeafter} {2} {} {RadicalKernAfterDegree} {<not set>}
+\MathLine{\Umathradicaldegreeraise} {2,7}{} {RadicalDegreeBottomRaisePercent} {<not set>}
+\MathLine{\Umathspaceafterscript} {4} {} {SpaceAfterScript} {script_space}
+\MathLine{\Umathstackdenomdown} {} {D, D'} {StackBottomDisplayStyleShiftDown} {denom1}
+\MathLine{\Umathstackdenomdown} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{StackBottomShiftDown} {denom2}
+\MathLine{\Umathstacknumup} {} {D, D'} {StackTopDisplayStyleShiftUp} {num1}
+\MathLine{\Umathstacknumup} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{StackTopShiftUp} {num3}
+\MathLine{\Umathstackvgap} {} {D, D'} {StackDisplayStyleGapMin} {7*default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathstackvgap} {} {T, T', S, S', SS, SS'}{StackGapMin} {3*default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathsubshiftdown} {} {} {SubscriptShiftDown} {sub1}
+\MathLine{\Umathsubshiftdrop} {} {} {SubscriptBaselineDropMin} {sub_drop}
+\MathLine{\Umathsubsupshiftdown} {8} {} {SubscriptShiftDownWithSuperscript} {\emdash}
+\MathLine{\Umathsubtopmax} {} {} {SubscriptTopMax} {abs(math_x_height*4)/5}
+\MathLine{\Umathsubsupvgap} {} {} {SubSuperscriptGapMin} {4*default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathsupbottommin} {} {} {SuperscriptBottomMin} {abs(math_x_height/4)}
+\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftdrop} {} {} {SuperscriptBaselineDropMax} {sup_drop}
+\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftup} {} {D} {SuperscriptShiftUp} {sup1}
+\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftup} {} {T, S, SS,} {SuperscriptShiftUp} {sup2}
+\MathLine{\Umathsupshiftup} {} {D', T', S', SS'} {SuperscriptShiftUpCramped} {sup3}
+\MathLine{\Umathsupsubbottommax} {} {} {SuperscriptBottomMaxWithSubscript} {abs(math_x_height*4)/5}
+\MathLine{\Umathunderbarkern} {} {} {UnderbarExtraDescender} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathunderbarrule} {} {} {UnderbarRuleThickness} {default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathunderbarvgap} {} {} {UnderbarVerticalGap} {3*default_rule_thickness}
+\MathLine{\Umathconnectoroverlapmin}{5} {} {MinConnectorOverlap} {0}
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note 1: \OPENTYPE\ fonts set \lpr {Umathlimitabovekern} and \lpr
+{Umathlimitbelowkern} to zero and set \lpr {Umathquad} to the font size of the
+used font, because these are not supported in the \type {MATH} table,
+
+Note 2: Traditional \TFM\ fonts do not set \lpr {Umathradicalrule} because
+\TEX82\ uses the height of the radical instead. When this parameter is indeed not
+set when \LUATEX\ has to typeset a radical, a backward compatibility mode will
+kick in that assumes that an oldstyle \TEX\ font is used. Also, they do not set
+\lpr {Umathradicaldegreebefore}, \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeafter}, and \lpr
+{Umathradicaldegreeraise}. These are then automatically initialized to
+$5/18$quad, $-10/18$quad, and 60.
+
+Note 3: If \TFM\ fonts are used, then the \lpr {Umathradicalvgap} is not set
+until the first time \LUATEX\ has to typeset a formula because this needs
+parameters from both family~2 and family~3. This provides a partial backward
+compatibility with \TEX82, but that compatibility is only partial: once the \lpr
+{Umathradicalvgap} is set, it will not be recalculated any more.
+
+Note 4: When \TFM\ fonts are used a similar situation arises with respect to \lpr
+{Umathspaceafterscript}: it is not set until the first time \LUATEX\ has to
+typeset a formula. This provides some backward compatibility with \TEX82. But
+once the \lpr {Umathspaceafterscript} is set, \prm {scriptspace} will never be
+looked at again.
+
+Note 5: Traditional \TFM\ fonts set \lpr {Umathconnectoroverlapmin} to zero
+because \TEX82\ always stacks extensibles without any overlap.
+
+Note 6: The \lpr {Umathoperatorsize} is only used in \prm {displaystyle}, and is
+only set in \OPENTYPE\ fonts. In \TFM\ font mode, it is artificially set to one
+scaled point more than the initial attempt's size, so that always the \quote
+{first next} will be tried, just like in \TEX82.
+
+Note 7: The \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeraise} is a special case because it is the
+only parameter that is expressed in a percentage instead of a number of scaled
+points.
+
+Note 8: \type {SubscriptShiftDownWithSuperscript} does not actually exist in the
+\quote {standard} \OPENTYPE\ math font Cambria, but it is useful enough to be
+added.
+
+Note 9: \type {FractionDelimiterDisplayStyleSize} and \type
+{FractionDelimiterSize} do not actually exist in the \quote {standard} \OPENTYPE\
+math font Cambria, but were useful enough to be added.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Math spacing}]
+
+\subsection{Inline surrounding space}
+
+\topicindex {math+spacing}
+
+Inline math is surrounded by (optional) \prm {mathsurround} spacing but that is a fixed
+dimension. There is now an additional parameter \lpr {mathsurroundskip}. When set to a
+non|-|zero value (or zero with some stretch or shrink) this parameter will replace
+\prm {mathsurround}. By using an additional parameter instead of changing the nature
+of \prm {mathsurround}, we can remain compatible. In the meantime a bit more
+control has been added via \lpr {mathsurroundmode}. This directive can take 6 values
+with zero being the default behaviour.
+
+\start
+
+\def\OneLiner#1#2%
+ {\NC \type{#1}
+ \NC \dontleavehmode\inframed[align=normal,offset=0pt,frame=off]{\mathsurroundmode#1\relax\hsize 100pt x$x$x}
+ \NC \dontleavehmode\inframed[align=normal,offset=0pt,frame=off]{\mathsurroundmode#1\relax\hsize 100pt x $x$ x}
+ \NC #2
+ \NC \NR}
+
+\startbuffer
+\mathsurround 10pt
+\mathsurroundskip20pt
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer \getbuffer
+
+\starttabulate[|c|c|c|pl|]
+\DB mode \BC x\$x\$x \BC x \$x\$ x \BC effect \NC \NR
+\TB
+\OneLiner{0}{obey \prm {mathsurround} when \lpr {mathsurroundskip} is 0pt}
+\OneLiner{1}{only add skip to the left}
+\OneLiner{2}{only add skip to the right}
+\OneLiner{3}{add skip to the left and right}
+\OneLiner{4}{ignore the skip setting, obey \prm {mathsurround}}
+\OneLiner{5}{disable all spacing around math}
+\OneLiner{6}{only apply \lpr {mathsurroundskip} when also spacing}
+\OneLiner{7}{only apply \lpr {mathsurroundskip} when no spacing}
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stop
+
+Method six omits the surround glue when there is (x)spacing glue present while
+method seven does the opposite, the glue is only applied when there is (x)space
+glue present too. Anything more fancy, like checking the begining or end of a
+paragraph (or edges of a box) would not be robust anyway. If you want that you
+can write a callback that runs over a list and analyzes a paragraph. Actually, in
+that case you could also inject glue (or set the properties of a math node)
+explicitly. So, these modes are in practice mostly useful for special purposes
+and experiments (they originate in a tracker item). Keep in mind that this glue
+is part of the math node and not always treated as normal glue: it travels with
+the begin and end math nodes. Also, method 6 and 7 will zero the skip related
+fields in a node when applicable in the first occasion that checks them
+(linebreaking or packaging).
+
+\subsection{Pairwise spacing}
+
+\topicindex {math+spacing}
+
+Besides the parameters mentioned in the previous sections, there are also 64 new
+primitives to control the math spacing table (as explained in Chapter~18 of the
+\TEX book). The primitive names are a simple matter of combining two math atom
+types, but for completeness' sake, here is the whole list:
+
+\starttwocolumns
+\startlines
+\lpr {Umathordordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathordopspacing}
+\lpr {Umathordbinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathordrelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathordopenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathordclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathordpunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathordinnerspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopopspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopbinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathoprelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopopenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathoppunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopinnerspacing}
+\lpr {Umathbinordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathbinopspacing}
+\lpr {Umathbinbinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathbinrelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathbinopenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathbinclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathbinpunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathbininnerspacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelopspacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelbinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelrelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelopenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelpunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathrelinnerspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopenordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopenopspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopenbinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopenrelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopenopenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopenclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathopenpunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathopeninnerspacing}
+\lpr {Umathcloseordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathcloseopspacing}
+\lpr {Umathclosebinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathcloserelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathcloseopenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathcloseclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathclosepunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathcloseinnerspacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctopspacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctbinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctrelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctopenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctpunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathpunctinnerspacing}
+\lpr {Umathinnerordspacing}
+\lpr {Umathinneropspacing}
+\lpr {Umathinnerbinspacing}
+\lpr {Umathinnerrelspacing}
+\lpr {Umathinneropenspacing}
+\lpr {Umathinnerclosespacing}
+\lpr {Umathinnerpunctspacing}
+\lpr {Umathinnerinnerspacing}
+\stoplines
+\stoptwocolumns
+
+These parameters are of type \prm {muskip}, so setting a parameter can be done
+like this:
+
+\starttyping
+\Umathopordspacing\displaystyle=4mu plus 2mu
+\stoptyping
+
+They are all initialized by \type {initex} to the values mentioned in the table
+in Chapter~18 of the \TEX book.
+
+Note 1: for ease of use as well as for backward compatibility, \prm {thinmuskip},
+\prm {medmuskip} and \prm {thickmuskip} are treated specially. In their case a
+pointer to the corresponding internal parameter is saved, not the actual \prm
+{muskip} value. This means that any later changes to one of these three
+parameters will be taken into account.
+
+Note 2: Careful readers will realise that there are also primitives for the items
+marked \type {*} in the \TEX book. These will not actually be used as those
+combinations of atoms cannot actually happen, but it seemed better not to break
+orthogonality. They are initialized to zero.
+
+\subsection{Skips around display math}
+
+\topicindex {math+spacing}
+
+The injection of \prm {abovedisplayskip} and \prm {belowdisplayskip} is not
+symmetrical. An above one is always inserted, also when zero, but the below is
+only inserted when larger than zero. Especially the latter makes it sometimes hard
+to fully control spacing. Therefore \LUATEX\ comes with a new directive: \lpr
+{mathdisplayskipmode}. The following values apply:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC normal \TEX\ behaviour \NC \NR
+\NC 1 \NC always (same as 0) \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC only when not zero \NC \NR
+\NC 3 \NC never, not even when not zero \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection {Nolimit correction}
+
+\topicindex {math+limits}
+
+There are two extra math parameters \lpr {Umathnolimitsupfactor} and \lpr
+{Umathnolimitsubfactor} that were added to provide some control over how limits
+are spaced (for example the position of super and subscripts after integral
+operators). They relate to an extra parameter \lpr {mathnolimitsmode}. The half
+corrections are what happens when scripts are placed above and below. The
+problem with italic corrections is that officially that correction italic is used
+for above|/|below placement while advanced kerns are used for placement at the
+right end. The question is: how often is this implemented, and if so, do the
+kerns assume correction too. Anyway, with this parameter one can control it.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|ck1|ck1|ck1|ck1|ck1|ck1|]
+ \NC
+ \NC \mathnolimitsmode0 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
+ \NC \mathnolimitsmode1 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
+ \NC \mathnolimitsmode2 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
+ \NC \mathnolimitsmode3 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
+ \NC \mathnolimitsmode4 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
+ \NC \mathnolimitsmode8000 $\displaystyle\int\nolimits^0_1$
+ \NC \NR
+ \TB
+ \BC mode
+ \NC \tttf 0
+ \NC \tttf 1
+ \NC \tttf 2
+ \NC \tttf 3
+ \NC \tttf 4
+ \NC \tttf 8000
+ \NC \NR
+ \BC superscript
+ \NC 0
+ \NC font
+ \NC 0
+ \NC 0
+ \NC +ic/2
+ \NC 0
+ \NC \NR
+ \BC subscript
+ \NC -ic
+ \NC font
+ \NC 0
+ \NC -ic/2
+ \NC -ic/2
+ \NC 8000ic/1000
+ \NC \NR
+\stoptabulate
+
+When the mode is set to one, the math parameters are used. This way a macro
+package writer can decide what looks best. Given the current state of fonts in
+\CONTEXT\ we currently use mode 1 with factor 0 for the superscript and 750 for
+the subscripts. Positive values are used for both parameters but the subscript
+shifts to the left. A \lpr {mathnolimitsmode} larger that 15 is considered to
+be a factor for the subscript correction. This feature can be handy when
+experimenting.
+
+\subsection {Math italic mess}
+
+\topicindex {math+italics}
+
+The \lpr {mathitalicsmode} parameter can be set to~1 to force italic correction
+before noads that represent some more complex structure (read: everything
+that is not an ord, bin, rel, open, close, punct or inner). We show a Cambria
+example.
+
+\starttexdefinition Whatever #1
+ \NC \type{\mathitalicsmode = #1}
+ \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$\left|T^1\right|$}
+ \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$\left|T\right|$}
+ \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$T+1$}
+ \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$T{1\over2}$}
+ \NC \mathitalicsmode#1\ruledhbox{$T\sqrt{1}$}
+ \NC \NR
+\stoptexdefinition
+
+\start
+ \switchtobodyfont[cambria]
+ \starttabulate[|c|c|c|c|c|c|]
+ \Whatever{0}%
+ \Whatever{1}%
+ \stoptabulate
+\stop
+
+This kind of parameters relate to the fact that italic correction in \OPENTYPE\
+math is bound to fuzzy rules. So, control is the solution.
+
+\subsection {Script and kerning}
+
+\topicindex {math+kerning}
+\topicindex {math+scripts}
+
+If you want to typeset text in math macro packages often provide something \type
+{\text} which obeys the script sizes. As the definition can be anything there is
+a good chance that the kerning doesn't come out well when used in a script. Given
+that the first glyph ends up in a \prm {hbox} we have some control over this.
+And, as a bonus we also added control over the normal sublist kerning. The \lpr
+{mathscriptboxmode} parameter defaults to~1.
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {0} \NC forget about kerning \NC \NR
+\NC \type {1} \NC kern math sub lists with a valid glyph \NC \NR
+\NC \type {2} \NC also kern math sub boxes that have a valid glyph \NC \NR
+\NC \type {2} \NC only kern math sub boxes with a boundary node present\NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Here we show some examples. Of course this doesn't solve all our problems, if
+only because some fonts have characters with bounding boxes that compensate for
+italics, while other fonts can lack kerns.
+
+\startbuffer[1]
+ $T_{\tf fluff}$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startbuffer[2]
+ $T_{\text{fluff}}$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startbuffer[3]
+ $T_{\text{\boundary1 fluff}}$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\unexpanded\def\Show#1#2#3%
+ {\doifelsenothing{#3}
+ {\small\tx\typeinlinebuffer[#1]}
+ {\doifelse{#3}{-}
+ {\small\bf\tt mode #2}
+ {\switchtobodyfont[#3]\showfontkerns\showglyphs\mathscriptboxmode#2\relax\inlinebuffer[#1]}}}
+
+\starttabulate[|lBT|c|c|c|c|c|]
+ \NC \NC \Show{1}{0}{} \NC\Show{1}{1}{} \NC \Show{2}{1}{} \NC \Show{2}{2}{} \NC \Show{3}{3}{} \NC \NR
+ \NC \NC \Show{1}{0}{-} \NC\Show{1}{1}{-} \NC \Show{2}{1}{-} \NC \Show{2}{2}{-} \NC \Show{3}{3}{-} \NC \NR
+ \NC modern \NC \Show{1}{0}{modern} \NC\Show{1}{1}{modern} \NC \Show{2}{1}{modern} \NC \Show{2}{2}{modern} \NC \Show{3}{3}{modern} \NC \NR
+ \NC lucidaot \NC \Show{1}{0}{lucidaot} \NC\Show{1}{1}{lucidaot} \NC \Show{2}{1}{lucidaot} \NC \Show{2}{2}{lucidaot} \NC \Show{3}{3}{lucidaot} \NC \NR
+ \NC pagella \NC \Show{1}{0}{pagella} \NC\Show{1}{1}{pagella} \NC \Show{2}{1}{pagella} \NC \Show{2}{2}{pagella} \NC \Show{3}{3}{pagella} \NC \NR
+ \NC cambria \NC \Show{1}{0}{cambria} \NC\Show{1}{1}{cambria} \NC \Show{2}{1}{cambria} \NC \Show{2}{2}{cambria} \NC \Show{3}{3}{cambria} \NC \NR
+ \NC dejavu \NC \Show{1}{0}{dejavu} \NC\Show{1}{1}{dejavu} \NC \Show{2}{1}{dejavu} \NC \Show{2}{2}{dejavu} \NC \Show{3}{3}{dejavu} \NC \NR
+\stoptabulate
+
+Kerning between a character subscript is controlled by \lpr {mathscriptcharmode}
+which also defaults to~1.
+
+Here is another example. Internally we tag kerns as italic kerns or font kerns
+where font kerns result from the staircase kern tables. In 2018 fonts like Latin
+Modern and Pagella rely on cheats with the boundingbox, Cambria uses staircase
+kerns and Lucida a mixture. Depending on how fonts evolve we might add some more
+control over what one can turn on and off.
+
+\def\MathSample#1#2#3%
+ {\NC
+ #1 \NC
+ #2 \NC
+ \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3T_{f}$ \NC
+ \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3\gamma_{e}$ \NC
+ \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3\gamma_{ee}$ \NC
+ \showglyphdata \switchtobodyfont[#2,17.3pt]$#3T_{\tf fluff}$ \NC
+ \NR}
+
+\starttabulate[|Tl|Tl|l|l|l|l|]
+ \FL
+ \MathSample{normal}{modern} {\mr}
+ \MathSample{} {pagella} {\mr}
+ \MathSample{} {cambria} {\mr}
+ \MathSample{} {lucidaot}{\mr}
+ \ML
+ \MathSample{bold} {modern} {\mb}
+ \MathSample{} {pagella} {\mb}
+ \MathSample{} {cambria} {\mb}
+ \MathSample{} {lucidaot}{\mb}
+ \LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{Fixed scripts}
+
+We have three parameters that are used for this fixed anchoring:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB parameter \BC register \NC \NR
+\NC $d$ \NC \lpr {Umathsubshiftdown} \NC \NR
+\NC $u$ \NC \lpr {Umathsupshiftup} \NC \NR
+\NC $s$ \NC \lpr {Umathsubsupshiftdown} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+When we set \lpr {mathscriptsmode} to a value other than zero these are used
+for calculating fixed positions. This is something that is needed for instance
+for chemistry. You can manipulate the mentioned variables to achieve different
+effects.
+
+\def\SampleMath#1%
+ {$\mathscriptsmode#1\mathupright CH_2 + CH^+_2 + CH^2_2$}
+
+\starttabulate[|c|c|c|p|]
+\DB mode \BC down \BC up \BC example \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC dynamic \NC dynamic \NC \SampleMath{0} \NC \NR
+\NC 1 \NC $d$ \NC $u$ \NC \SampleMath{1} \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC $s$ \NC $u$ \NC \SampleMath{2} \NC \NR
+\NC 3 \NC $s$ \NC $u + s - d$ \NC \SampleMath{3} \NC \NR
+\NC 4 \NC $d + (s-d)/2$ \NC $u + (s-d)/2$ \NC \SampleMath{4} \NC \NR
+\NC 5 \NC $d$ \NC $u + s - d$ \NC \SampleMath{5} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The value of this parameter obeys grouping but applies to the whole current
+formula.
+
+% if needed we can put the value in stylenodes but maybe more should go there
+
+\subsection{Penalties: \lpr {mathpenaltiesmode}}
+
+\topicindex {math+penalties}
+
+Only in inline math penalties will be added in a math list. You can force
+penalties (also in display math) by setting:
+
+\starttyping
+\mathpenaltiesmode = 1
+\stoptyping
+
+This primnitive is not really needed in \LUATEX\ because you can use the callback
+\cbk {mlist_to_hlist} to force penalties by just calling the regular routine
+with forced penalties. However, as part of opening up and control this primitive
+makes sense. As a bonus we also provide two extra penalties:
+
+\starttyping
+\prebinoppenalty = -100 % example value
+\prerelpenalty = 900 % example value
+\stoptyping
+
+They default to inifinite which signals that they don't need to be inserted. When
+set they are injected before a binop or rel noad. This is an experimental feature.
+
+\subsection{Equation spacing: \lpr {matheqnogapstep}}
+
+By default \TEX\ will add one quad between the equation and the number. This is
+hard coded. A new primitive can control this:
+
+\startsyntax
+\matheqnogapstep = 1000
+\stopsyntax
+
+Because a math quad from the math text font is used instead of a dimension, we
+use a step to control the size. A value of zero will suppress the gap. The step
+is divided by 1000 which is the usual way to mimmick floating point factors in
+\TEX.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Math constructs}]
+
+\subsection {Unscaled fences}
+
+\topicindex {math+fences}
+
+The \lpr {mathdelimitersmode} primitive is experimental and deals with the
+following (potential) problems. Three bits can be set. The first bit prevents an
+unwanted shift when the fence symbol is not scaled (a cambria side effect). The
+second bit forces italic correction between a preceding character ordinal and the
+fenced subformula, while the third bit turns that subformula into an ordinary so
+that the same spacing applies as with unfenced variants. Here we show Cambria
+(with \lpr {mathitalicsmode} enabled).
+
+\starttexdefinition Whatever #1
+ \NC \type{\mathdelimitersmode = #1}
+ \NC \mathitalicsmode1\mathdelimitersmode#1\ruledhbox{\showglyphs\showfontkerns\showfontitalics$f(x)$}
+ \NC \mathitalicsmode1\mathdelimitersmode#1\ruledhbox{\showglyphs\showfontkerns\showfontitalics$f\left(x\right)$}
+ \NC \NR
+\stoptexdefinition
+
+\start
+ \switchtobodyfont[cambria]
+ \starttabulate[|l|l|l|]
+ \Whatever{0}\Whatever{1}\Whatever{2}\Whatever{3}%
+ \Whatever{4}\Whatever{5}\Whatever{6}\Whatever{7}%
+ \stoptabulate
+\stop
+
+So, when set to 7 fenced subformulas with unscaled delimiters come out the same
+as unfenced ones. This can be handy for cases where one is forced to use \prm
+{left} and \prm {right} always because of unpredictable content. As said, it's an
+experimental feature (which somehow fits in the exceptional way fences are dealt
+with in the engine). The full list of flags is given in the next table:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{"01} \NC don't apply the usual shift \NC \NR
+\NC \type{"02} \NC apply italic correction when possible \NC \NR
+\NC \type{"04} \NC force an ordinary subformula \NC \NR
+\NC \type{"08} \NC no shift when a base character \NC \NR
+\NC \type{"10} \NC only shift when an extensible \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The effect can depend on the font (and for Cambria one can use for instance \type {"16}).
+
+\subsection[mathacc]{Accent handling}
+
+\topicindex {math+accents}
+
+\LUATEX\ supports both top accents and bottom accents in math mode, and math
+accents stretch automatically (if this is supported by the font the accent comes
+from, of course). Bottom and combined accents as well as fixed-width math accents
+are controlled by optional keywords following \lpr {Umathaccent}.
+
+The keyword \type {bottom} after \lpr {Umathaccent} signals that a bottom accent
+is needed, and the keyword \type {both} signals that both a top and a bottom
+accent are needed (in this case two accents need to be specified, of course).
+
+Then the set of three integers defining the accent is read. This set of integers
+can be prefixed by the \type {fixed} keyword to indicate that a non-stretching
+variant is requested (in case of both accents, this step is repeated).
+
+A simple example:
+
+\starttyping
+\Umathaccent both fixed 0 0 "20D7 fixed 0 0 "20D7 {example}
+\stoptyping
+
+If a math top accent has to be placed and the accentee is a character and has a
+non-zero \type {top_accent} value, then this value will be used to place the
+accent instead of the \prm {skewchar} kern used by \TEX82.
+
+The \type {top_accent} value represents a vertical line somewhere in the
+accentee. The accent will be shifted horizontally such that its own \type
+{top_accent} line coincides with the one from the accentee. If the \type
+{top_accent} value of the accent is zero, then half the width of the accent
+followed by its italic correction is used instead.
+
+The vertical placement of a top accent depends on the \type {x_height} of the
+font of the accentee (as explained in the \TEX book), but if a value turns out
+to be zero and the font had a \type {MathConstants} table, then \type
+{AccentBaseHeight} is used instead.
+
+The vertical placement of a bottom accent is straight below the accentee, no
+correction takes place.
+
+Possible locations are \type {top}, \type {bottom}, \type {both} and \type
+{center}. When no location is given \type {top} is assumed. An additional
+parameter \nod {fraction} can be specified followed by a number; a value of for
+instance 1200 means that the criterium is 1.2 times the width of the nucleus. The
+fraction only applies to the stepwise selected shapes and is mostly meant for the
+\type {overlay} location. It also works for the other locations but then it
+concerns the width.
+
+\subsection{Radical extensions}
+
+\topicindex {math+radicals}
+
+The new primitive \lpr {Uroot} allows the construction of a radical noad
+including a degree field. Its syntax is an extension of \lpr {Uradical}:
+
+\starttyping
+\Uradical <fam integer> <char integer> <radicand>
+\Uroot <fam integer> <char integer> <degree> <radicand>
+\stoptyping
+
+The placement of the degree is controlled by the math parameters \lpr
+{Umathradicaldegreebefore}, \lpr {Umathradicaldegreeafter}, and \lpr
+{Umathradicaldegreeraise}. The degree will be typeset in \prm
+{scriptscriptstyle}.
+
+\subsection{Super- and subscripts}
+
+The character fields in a \LUA|-|loaded \OPENTYPE\ math font can have a \quote
+{mathkern} table. The format of this table is the same as the \quote {mathkern}
+table that is returned by the \type {fontloader} library, except that all height
+and kern values have to be specified in actual scaled points.
+
+When a super- or subscript has to be placed next to a math item, \LUATEX\ checks
+whether the super- or subscript and the nucleus are both simple character items.
+If they are, and if the fonts of both character items are \OPENTYPE\ fonts (as
+opposed to legacy \TEX\ fonts), then \LUATEX\ will use the \OPENTYPE\ math
+algorithm for deciding on the horizontal placement of the super- or subscript.
+
+This works as follows:
+
+\startitemize
+ \startitem
+ The vertical position of the script is calculated.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ The default horizontal position is flat next to the base character.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ For superscripts, the italic correction of the base character is added.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ For a superscript, two vertical values are calculated: the bottom of the
+ script (after shifting up), and the top of the base. For a subscript, the two
+ values are the top of the (shifted down) script, and the bottom of the base.
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ For each of these two locations:
+ \startitemize
+ \startitem
+ find the math kern value at this height for the base (for a subscript
+ placement, this is the bottom_right corner, for a superscript
+ placement the top_right corner)
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ find the math kern value at this height for the script (for a
+ subscript placement, this is the top_left corner, for a superscript
+ placement the bottom_left corner)
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ add the found values together to get a preliminary result.
+ \stopitem
+ \stopitemize
+ \stopitem
+ \startitem
+ The horizontal kern to be applied is the smallest of the two results from
+ previous step.
+ \stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The math kern value at a specific height is the kern value that is specified by the
+next higher height and kern pair, or the highest one in the character (if there is no
+value high enough in the character), or simply zero (if the character has no math kern
+pairs at all).
+
+\subsection{Scripts on extensibles}
+
+\topicindex {math+scripts}
+\topicindex {math+delimiters}
+\topicindex {math+extensibles}
+
+The primitives \lpr {Uunderdelimiter} and \lpr {Uoverdelimiter} allow the
+placement of a subscript or superscript on an automatically extensible item and
+\lpr {Udelimiterunder} and \lpr {Udelimiterover} allow the placement of an
+automatically extensible item as a subscript or superscript on a nucleus. The
+input:
+
+% these produce radical noads .. in fact the code base has the numbers wrong for
+% quite a while, so no one seems to use this
+
+\startbuffer
+$\Uoverdelimiter 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut overdelimiter}}$
+$\Uunderdelimiter 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut underdelimiter}}$
+$\Udelimiterover 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut delimiterover}}$
+$\Udelimiterunder 0 "2194 {\hbox{\strut delimiterunder}}$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer will render this:
+
+\blank \startnarrower \getbuffer \stopnarrower \blank
+
+The vertical placements are controlled by \lpr {Umathunderdelimiterbgap}, \lpr
+{Umathunderdelimitervgap}, \lpr {Umathoverdelimiterbgap}, and \lpr
+{Umathoverdelimitervgap} in a similar way as limit placements on large operators.
+The superscript in \lpr {Uoverdelimiter} is typeset in a suitable scripted style,
+the subscript in \lpr {Uunderdelimiter} is cramped as well.
+
+These primitives accepts an option \type {width} specification. When used the
+also optional keywords \type {left}, \type {middle} and \type {right} will
+determine what happens when a requested size can't be met (which can happen when
+we step to successive larger variants).
+
+An extra primitive \lpr {Uhextensible} is available that can be used like this:
+
+\startbuffer
+$\Uhextensible width 10cm 0 "2194$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer This will render this:
+
+\blank \startnarrower \getbuffer \stopnarrower \blank
+
+Here you can also pass options, like:
+
+\startbuffer
+$\Uhextensible width 1pt middle 0 "2194$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer This gives:
+
+\blank \startnarrower \getbuffer \stopnarrower \blank
+
+\LUATEX\ internally uses a structure that supports \OPENTYPE\ \quote
+{MathVariants} as well as \TFM\ \quote {extensible recipes}. In most cases where
+font metrics are involved we have a different code path for traditional fonts end
+\OPENTYPE\ fonts.
+
+\subsection{Fractions}
+
+\topicindex {math+fractions}
+
+The \prm {abovewithdelims} command accepts a keyword \type {exact}. When issued
+the extra space relative to the rule thickness is not added. One can of course
+use the \type {\Umathfraction..gap} commands to influence the spacing. Also the
+rule is still positioned around the math axis.
+
+\starttyping
+$$ { {a} \abovewithdelims() exact 4pt {b} }$$
+\stoptyping
+
+The math parameter table contains some parameters that specify a horizontal and
+vertical gap for skewed fractions. Of course some guessing is needed in order to
+implement something that uses them. And so we now provide a primitive similar to the
+other fraction related ones but with a few options so that one can influence the
+rendering. Of course a user can also mess around a bit with the parameters
+\lpr {Umathskewedfractionhgap} and \lpr {Umathskewedfractionvgap}.
+
+The syntax used here is:
+
+\starttyping
+{ {1} \Uskewed / <options> {2} }
+{ {1} \Uskewedwithdelims / () <options> {2} }
+\stoptyping
+
+where the options can be \type {noaxis} and \type {exact}. By default we add half
+the axis to the shifts and by default we zero the width of the middle character.
+For Latin Modern the result looks as follows:
+
+\def\ShowA#1#2#3{$x + { {#1} \Uskewed / #3 {#2} } + x$}
+\def\ShowB#1#2#3{$x + { {#1} \Uskewedwithdelims / () #3 {#2} } + x$}
+
+\start
+ \switchtobodyfont[modern]
+ \starttabulate[||||||]
+ \NC \NC
+ \ShowA{a}{b}{} \NC
+ \ShowA{1}{2}{} \NC
+ \ShowB{a}{b}{} \NC
+ \ShowB{1}{2}{} \NC
+ \NR
+ \NC \type{exact} \NC
+ \ShowA{a}{b}{exact} \NC
+ \ShowA{1}{2}{exact} \NC
+ \ShowB{a}{b}{exact} \NC
+ \ShowB{1}{2}{exact} \NC
+ \NR
+ \NC \type{noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowA{a}{b}{noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowA{1}{2}{noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowB{a}{b}{noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowB{1}{2}{noaxis} \NC
+ \NR
+ \NC \type{exact noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowA{a}{b}{exact noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowA{1}{2}{exact noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowB{a}{b}{exact noaxis} \NC
+ \ShowB{1}{2}{exact noaxis} \NC
+ \NR
+ \stoptabulate
+\stop
+
+\subsection {Delimiters: \type{\Uleft}, \prm {Umiddle} and \prm {Uright}}
+
+\topicindex {math+delimiters}
+
+Normally you will force delimiters to certain sizes by putting an empty box or
+rule next to it. The resulting delimiter will either be a character from the
+stepwise size range or an extensible. The latter can be quite differently
+positioned than the characters as it depends on the fit as well as the fact if
+the used characters in the font have depth or height. Commands like (plain \TEX
+s) \type {\big} need use this feature. In \LUATEX\ we provide a bit more control
+by three variants that support optional parameters \type {height}, \type {depth}
+and \type {axis}. The following example uses this:
+
+\startbuffer
+\Uleft height 30pt depth 10pt \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000028
+\quad x\quad
+\Umiddle height 40pt depth 15pt \Udelimiter "0 "0 "002016
+\quad x\quad
+\Uright height 30pt depth 10pt \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000029
+\quad \quad \quad
+\Uleft height 30pt depth 10pt axis \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000028
+\quad x\quad
+\Umiddle height 40pt depth 15pt axis \Udelimiter "0 "0 "002016
+\quad x\quad
+\Uright height 30pt depth 10pt axis \Udelimiter "0 "0 "000029
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+\startlinecorrection
+\ruledhbox{\mathematics{\getbuffer}}
+\stoplinecorrection
+
+The keyword \type {exact} can be used as directive that the real dimensions
+should be applied when the criteria can't be met which can happen when we're
+still stepping through the successively larger variants. When no dimensions are
+given the \type {noaxis} command can be used to prevent shifting over the axis.
+
+You can influence the final class with the keyword \type {class} which will
+influence the spacing. The numbers are the same as for character classes.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Extracting values}]
+
+\subsection{Codes}
+
+\topicindex {math+codes}
+
+You can extract the components of a math character. Say that we have defined:
+
+\starttyping
+\Umathcode 1 2 3 4
+\stoptyping
+
+then
+
+\starttyping
+[\Umathcharclass1] [\Umathcharfam1] [\Umathcharslot1]
+\stoptyping
+
+will return:
+
+\starttyping
+[2] [3] [4]
+\stoptyping
+
+These commands are provides as convenience. Before they come available you could
+do the following:
+
+\starttyping
+\def\Umathcharclass{\directlua{tex.print(tex.getmathcode(token.scan_int())[1])}}
+\def\Umathcharfam {\directlua{tex.print(tex.getmathcode(token.scan_int())[2])}}
+\def\Umathcharslot {\directlua{tex.print(tex.getmathcode(token.scan_int())[3])}}
+\stoptyping
+
+\subsection {Last lines}
+
+\topicindex {math+last line}
+
+There is a new primitive to control the overshoot in the calculation of the
+previous line in mid|-|paragraph display math. The default value is 2 times
+the em width of the current font:
+
+\starttyping
+\predisplaygapfactor=2000
+\stoptyping
+
+If you want to have the length of the last line independent of math i.e.\ you don't
+want to revert to a hack where you insert a fake display math formula in order to
+get the length of the last line, the following will often work too:
+
+\starttyping
+\def\lastlinelength{\dimexpr
+ \directlua {tex.sprint (
+ (nodes.dimensions(node.tail(tex.lists.page_head).list))
+ )}sp
+\relax}
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Math mode}]
+
+\subsection {Verbose versions of single|-|character math commands}
+
+\topicindex {math+styles}
+
+\LUATEX\ defines six new primitives that have the same function as
+\type {^}, \type {_}, \type {$}, and \type {$$}:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB primitive \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \lpr {Usuperscript} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {^} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Usubscript} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {_} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Ustartmath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$}, % $
+ when used in non-math mode. \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Ustopmath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$}, % $
+ when used in inline math mode. \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Ustartdisplaymath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$$}, % $$
+ when used in non-math mode. \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {Ustopdisplaymath} \NC duplicates the functionality of \type {$$}, % $$
+ when used in display math mode. \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \lpr {Ustopmath} and \lpr {Ustopdisplaymath} primitives check if the current
+math mode is the correct one (inline vs.\ displayed), but you can freely intermix
+the four mathon|/|mathoff commands with explicit dollar sign(s).
+
+\subsection{Script commands \lpr {Unosuperscript} and \lpr {Unosubscript}}
+
+\topicindex {math+styles}
+\topicindex {math+scripts}
+
+These two commands result in super- and subscripts but with the current style (at the
+time of rendering). So,
+
+\startbuffer[script]
+$
+ x\Usuperscript {1}\Usubscript {2} =
+ x\Unosuperscript{1}\Unosubscript{2} =
+ x\Usuperscript {1}\Unosubscript{2} =
+ x\Unosuperscript{1}\Usubscript {2}
+$
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+results in \inlinebuffer[script].
+
+\subsection{Allowed math commands in non|-|math modes}
+
+\topicindex {math+text}
+\topicindex {text+math}
+
+The commands \prm {mathchar}, and \lpr {Umathchar} and control sequences that are
+the result of \prm {mathchardef} or \lpr {Umathchardef} are also acceptable in
+the horizontal and vertical modes. In those cases, the \prm {textfont} from the
+requested math family is used.
+
+% \startsection[title={Math todo}]
+%
+% The following items are still todo.
+%
+% \startitemize
+% \startitem
+% Pre-scripts.
+% \stopitem
+% \startitem
+% Multi-story stacks.
+% \stopitem
+% \startitem
+% Flattened accents for high characters (maybe).
+% \stopitem
+% \startitem
+% Better control over the spacing around displays and handling of equation numbers.
+% \stopitem
+% \startitem
+% Support for multi|-|line displays using \MATHML\ style alignment points.
+% \stopitem
+% \stopitemize
+%
+% \stopsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Goodies}]
+
+\subsection {Flattening: \lpr {mathflattenmode}}
+
+\topicindex {math+flattening}
+
+The \TEX\ math engine collapses \type {ord} noads without sub- and superscripts
+and a character as nucleus. and which has the side effect that in \OPENTYPE\ mode
+italic corrections are applied (given that they are enabled).
+
+\startbuffer[sample]
+\switchtobodyfont[modern]
+$V \mathbin{\mathbin{v}} V$\par
+$V \mathord{\mathord{v}} V$\par
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer[sample]
+
+This renders as:
+
+\blank \start \mathflattenmode\plusone \getbuffer[sample] \stop \blank
+
+When we set \lpr {mathflattenmode} to 31 we get:
+
+\blank \start \mathflattenmode\numexpr1+2+4+8+16\relax \getbuffer[sample] \stop \blank
+
+When you see no difference, then the font probably has the proper character
+dimensions and no italic correction is needed. For Latin Modern (at least till
+2018) there was a visual difference. In that respect this parameter is not always
+needed unless of course you want efficient math lists anyway.
+
+You can influence flattening by adding the appropriate number to the value of the
+mode parameter. The default value is~1.
+
+\starttabulate[|Tc|c|]
+\DB mode \BC class \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 1 \NC ord \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC bin \NC \NR
+\NC 4 \NC rel \NC \NR
+\NC 8 \NC punct \NC \NR
+\NC 16 \NC inner \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection {Less Tracing}
+
+\topicindex {math+tracing}
+
+Because there are quite some math related parameters and values, it is possible
+to limit tracing. Only when \type {tracingassigns} and|/|or \type
+{tracingrestores} are set to~2 or more they will be traced.
+
+\subsection {Math options with \lpr {mathoption}}
+
+The logic in the math engine is rather complex and there are often no universal
+solutions (read: what works out well for one font, fails for another). Therefore
+some variations in the implementation are driven by parameters (modes). In
+addition there is a new primitive \lpr {mathoption} which will be used for
+testing. Don't rely on any option to be there in a production version as they are
+meant for development.
+
+This option was introduced for testing purposes when the math engine got split
+code paths and it forces the engine to treat new fonts as old ones with respect
+to italic correction etc. There are no guarantees given with respect to the final
+result and unexpected side effects are not seen as bugs as they relate to font
+properties. Ther eis currently only one option:
+
+\startbuffer
+\mathoption old 1
+\stopbuffer
+
+The \type {oldmath} boolean flag in the \LUA\ font table is the official way to
+force old treatment as it's bound to fonts. Like with all options we may
+temporarily introduce with this command this feature is not meant for production.
+
+% % obsolete:
+%
+% \subsubsection {\type {\mathoption noitaliccompensation}}
+%
+% This option compensates placement for characters with a built|-|in italic
+% correction.
+%
+% \startbuffer
+% {\showboxes\int}\quad
+% {\showboxes\int_{|}^{|}}\quad
+% {\showboxes\int\limits_{|}^{|}}
+% \stopbuffer
+%
+% \typebuffer
+%
+% Gives (with computer modern that has such italics):
+%
+% \startlinecorrection[blank]
+% \switchtobodyfont[modern]
+% \startcombination[nx=2,ny=2,distance=5em]
+% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 0\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{0:inline}}
+% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 0\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{0:display}}
+% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 1\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{1:inline}}
+% {\mathoption noitaliccompensation 1\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{1:display}}
+% \stopcombination
+% \stoplinecorrection
+
+% % obsolete:
+%
+% \subsubsection {\type {\mathoption nocharitalic}}
+%
+% When two characters follow each other italic correction can interfere. The
+% following example shows what this option does:
+%
+% \startbuffer
+% \catcode"1D443=11
+% \catcode"1D444=11
+% \catcode"1D445=11
+% P( PP PQR
+% \stopbuffer
+%
+% \typebuffer
+%
+% Gives (with computer modern that has such italics):
+%
+% \startlinecorrection[blank]
+% \switchtobodyfont[modern]
+% \startcombination[nx=2,ny=2,distance=5em]
+% {\mathoption nocharitalic 0\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{0:inline}}
+% {\mathoption nocharitalic 0\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{0:display}}
+% {\mathoption nocharitalic 1\relax \mathematics{\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{1:inline}}
+% {\mathoption nocharitalic 1\relax \mathematics{\displaymath\getbuffer}}
+% {\nohyphens\type{1:display}}
+% \stopcombination
+% \stoplinecorrection
+
+% % obsolete:
+%
+% \subsubsection {\type {\mathoption useoldfractionscaling}}
+%
+% This option has been introduced as solution for tracker item 604 for fuzzy cases
+% around either or not present fraction related settings for new fonts.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-modifications.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-modifications.tex
index 294f3fc3f8..b7ce6ca2bd 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-modifications.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-modifications.tex
@@ -1,1380 +1,1389 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-modifications
-
-\startchapter[reference=modifications,title={Modifications}]
-
-\startsection[title=The merged engines]
-
-\startsubsection[title=The need for change]
-
-\topicindex {engines}
-\topicindex {history}
-
-The first version of \LUATEX\ only had a few extra primitives and it was largely
-the same as \PDFTEX. Then we merged substantial parts of \ALEPH\ into the code
-and got more primitives. When we got more stable the decision was made to clean
-up the rather hybrid nature of the program. This means that some primitives have
-been promoted to core primitives, often with a different name, and that others
-were removed. This made it possible to start cleaning up the code base. In \in
-{chapter} [enhancements] we discussed some new primitives, here we will cover
-most of the adapted ones.
-
-Besides the expected changes caused by new functionality, there are a number of
-not|-|so|-|expected changes. These are sometimes a side|-|effect of a new
-(conflicting) feature, or, more often than not, a change necessary to clean up
-the internal interfaces. These will also be mentioned.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Changes from \TEX\ 3.1415926]
-
-\topicindex {\TEX}
-
-Of course it all starts with traditional \TEX. Even if we started with \PDFTEX,
-most still comes from the original. But we divert a bit.
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- The current code base is written in \CCODE, not \PASCAL. We use \CWEB\ when
- possible. As a consequence instead of one large file plus change files, we
- now have multiple files organized in categories like \type {tex}, \type
- {pdf}, \type {lang}, \type {font}, \type {lua}, etc. There are some artifacts
- of the conversion to \CCODE, but in due time we will clean up the source code
- and make sure that the documentation is done right. Many files are in the
- \CWEB\ format, but others, like those interfacing to \LUA, are \CCODE\ files.
- Of course we want to stay as close as possible to the original so that the
- documentation of the fundamentals behind \TEX\ by Don Knuth still applies.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- See \in {chapter} [languages] for many small changes related to paragraph
- building, language handling and hyphenation. The most important change is
- that adding a brace group in the middle of a word (like in \type {of{}fice})
- does not prevent ligature creation.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- There is no pool file, all strings are embedded during compilation.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The specifier \type {plus 1 fillll} does not generate an error. The extra
- \quote{l} is simply typeset.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The upper limit to \prm {endlinechar} and \prm {newlinechar} is 127.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Magnification (\prm {mag}) is only supported in \DVI\ output mode. You can
- set this parameter and it even works with \type {true} units till you switch
- to \PDF\ output mode. When you use \PDF\ output you can best not touch the
- \prm {mag} variable. This fuzzy behaviour is not much different from using
- \PDF\ backend related functionality while eventually \DVI\ output is
- required.
-
- After the output mode has been frozen (normally that happens when the first
- page is shipped out) or when \PDF\ output is enabled, the \type {true}
- specification is ignored. When you preload a plain format adapted to
- \LUATEX\ it can be that the \prm {mag} parameter already has been set.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Changes from \ETEX\ 2.2]
-
-\topicindex {\ETEX}
-
-Being the de factor standard extension of course we provide the \ETEX\
-functionality, but with a few small adaptations.
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- The \ETEX\ functionality is always present and enabled so the prepended
- asterisk or \type {-etex} switch for \INITEX\ is not needed.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \TEXXET\ extension is not present, so the primitives \type
- {\TeXXeTstate}, \type {\beginR}, \type {\beginL}, \type {\endR} and \type
- {\endL} are missing. Instead we used the \OMEGA/\ALEPH\ approach to
- directionality as starting point.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Some of the tracing information that is output by \ETEX's \prm
- {tracingassigns} and \prm {tracingrestores} is not there.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Register management in \LUATEX\ uses the \OMEGA/\ALEPH\ model, so the maximum
- value is 65535 and the implementation uses a flat array instead of the mixed
- flat & sparse model from \ETEX.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- When kpathsea is used to find files, \LUATEX\ uses the \type {ofm} file
- format to search for font metrics. In turn, this means that \LUATEX\ looks at
- the \type {OFMFONTS} configuration variable (like \OMEGA\ and \ALEPH) instead
- of \type {TFMFONTS} (like \TEX\ and \PDFTEX). Likewise for virtual fonts
- (\LUATEX\ uses the variable \type {OVFFONTS} instead of \type {VFFONTS}).
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Changes from \PDFTEX\ 1.40]
-
-\topicindex {\PDFTEX}
-
-Because we want to produce \PDF\ the most natural starting point was the popular
-\PDFTEX\ program. We inherit the stable features, dropped most of the
-experimental code and promoted some functionality to core \LUATEX\ functionality
-which in turn triggered renaming primitives.
-
-For compatibility reasons we still refer to \type {\pdf...} commands but \LUATEX\
-has a different backend interface. Instead of these primitives there are three
-interfacing primitives: \lpr {pdfextension}, \lpr {pdfvariable} and \lpr
-{pdffeedback} that take keywords and optional further arguments (below we will
-still use the \tex {pdf} prefix names as reference). This way we can extend the
-features when needed but don't need to adapt the core engine. The front- and
-backend are decoupled as much as possible.
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- The (experimental) support for snap nodes has been removed, because it is
- much more natural to build this functionality on top of node processing and
- attributes. The associated primitives that are gone are: \orm
- {pdfsnaprefpoint}, \orm {pdfsnapy}, and \orm {pdfsnapycomp}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The (experimental) support for specialized spacing around nodes has also been
- removed. The associated primitives that are gone are: \orm
- {pdfadjustinterwordglue}, \orm {pdfprependkern}, and \orm {pdfappendkern}, as
- well as the five supporting primitives \orm {knbscode}, \orm {stbscode}, \orm
- {shbscode}, \orm {knbccode}, and \orm {knaccode}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- A number of \quote {\PDFTEX\ primitives} have been removed as they can be
- implemented using \LUA: \orm {pdfelapsedtime}, \orm {pdfescapehex}, \orm
- {pdfescapename}, \orm {pdfescapestring}, \orm {pdffiledump}, \orm
- {pdffilemoddate}, \orm {pdffilesize}, \orm {pdfforcepagebox}, \orm
- {pdflastmatch}, \orm {pdfmatch}, \orm {pdfmdfivesum}, \orm {pdfmovechars},
- \orm {pdfoptionalwaysusepdfpagebox}, \orm {pdfoptionpdfinclusionerrorlevel},
- \orm {pdfresettimer}, \orm {pdfshellescape}, \orm {pdfstrcmp} and \orm
- {pdfunescapehex}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The version related primitives \orm {pdftexbanner}, \orm {pdftexversion}
- and \orm {pdftexrevision} are no longer present as there is no longer a
- relationship with \PDFTEX\ development.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The experimental snapper mechanism has been removed and therefore also the
- primitives \orm {pdfignoreddimen}, \orm {pdffirstlineheight}, \orm
- {pdfeachlineheight}, \orm {pdfeachlinedepth} and \orm {pdflastlinedepth}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The experimental primitives \lpr {primitive}, \lpr {ifprimitive}, \lpr
- {ifabsnum} and \lpr {ifabsdim} are promoted to core primitives. The \type
- {\pdf*} prefixed originals are not available.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Because \LUATEX\ has a different subsystem for managing images, more
- diversion from its ancestor happened in the meantime. We don't adapt to
- changes in \PDFTEX.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Two extra token lists are provided, \orm {pdfxformresources} and \orm
- {pdfxformattr}, as an alternative to \orm {pdfxform} keywords.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Image specifications also support \type {visiblefilename}, \type
- {userpassword} and \type {ownerpassword}. The password options are only
- relevant for encrypted \PDF\ files.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The current version of \LUATEX\ no longer replaces and|/|or merges fonts in
- embedded \PDF\ files with fonts of the enveloping \PDF\ document. This
- regression may be temporary, depending on how the rewritten font backend will
- look like.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The primitives \orm {pdfpagewidth} and \orm {pdfpageheight} have been removed
- because \lpr {pagewidth} and \lpr {pageheight} have that purpose.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The primitives \orm {pdfnormaldeviate}, \orm {pdfuniformdeviate}, \orm
- {pdfsetrandomseed} and \orm {pdfrandomseed} have been promoted to core
- primitives without \type {pdf} prefix so the original commands are no longer
- recognized.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The primitives \lpr {ifincsname}, \lpr {expanded} and \lpr {quitvmode}
- are now core primitives.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- As the hz and protrusion mechanism are part of the core the related
- primitives \lpr {lpcode}, \lpr {rpcode}, \lpr {efcode}, \lpr
- {leftmarginkern}, \lpr {rightmarginkern} are promoted to core primitives. The
- two commands \lpr {protrudechars} and \lpr {adjustspacing} replace their
- prefixed with \type {\pdf} originals.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The hz optimization code has been partially redone so that we no longer need
- to create extra font instances. The front- and backend have been decoupled
- and more efficient (\PDF) code is generated.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- When \lpr {adjustspacing} has value~2, hz optimization will be applied to
- glyphs and kerns. When the value is~3, only glyphs will be treated. A value
- smaller than~2 disables this feature.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \lpr {tagcode} primitive is promoted to core primitive.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \lpr {letterspacefont} feature is now part of the core but will not be
- changed (improved). We just provide it for legacy use.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \orm {pdfnoligatures} primitive is now \lpr {ignoreligaturesinfont}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \orm {pdfcopyfont} primitive is now \lpr {copyfont}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \orm {pdffontexpand} primitive is now \lpr {expandglyphsinfont}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Because position tracking is also available in \DVI\ mode the \lpr {savepos},
- \lpr {lastxpos} and \lpr {lastypos} commands now replace their \type {pdf}
- prefixed originals.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The introspective primitives \type {\pdflastximagecolordepth} and \type
- {\pdfximagebbox} have been removed. One can use external applications to
- determine these properties or use the built|-|in \type {img} library.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The initializers \orm {pdfoutput} has been replaced by \lpr {outputmode} and
- \orm {pdfdraftmode} is now \lpr {draftmode}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The pixel multiplier dimension \orm {pdfpxdimen} lost its prefix and is now
- called \lpr {pxdimen}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- An extra \orm {pdfimageaddfilename} option has been added that can be used to
- block writing the filename to the \PDF\ file.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The primitive \orm {pdftracingfonts} is now \lpr {tracingfonts} as it
- doesn't relate to the backend.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The experimental primitive \orm {pdfinsertht} is kept as \lpr {insertht}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- There is some more control over what metadata goes into the \PDF\ file.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The promotion of primitives to core primitives as well as the separation of
- font- and backend means that the initialization namespace \type {pdftex} is
- gone.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-One change involves the so called xforms and ximages. In \PDFTEX\ these are
-implemented as so called whatsits. But contrary to other whatsits they have
-dimensions that need to be taken into account when for instance calculating
-optimal line breaks. In \LUATEX\ these are now promoted to a special type of rule
-nodes, which simplifies code that needs those dimensions.
-
-Another reason for promotion is that these are useful concepts. Backends can
-provide the ability to use content that has been rendered in several places, and
-images are also common. As already mentioned in \in {section}
-[sec:imagedandforms], we now have:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB \LUATEX \BC \PDFTEX \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \lpr {saveboxresource} \NC \orm {pdfxform} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {saveimageresource} \NC \orm {pdfximage} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {useboxresource} \NC \orm {pdfrefxform} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {useimageresource} \NC \orm {pdfrefximage} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {lastsavedboxresourceindex} \NC \orm {pdflastxform} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourceindex} \NC \orm {pdflastximage} \NC \NR
-\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourcepages} \NC \orm {pdflastximagepages} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-There are a few \lpr {pdffeedback} features that relate to this but these are
-typical backend specific ones. The index that gets returned is to be considered
-as \quote {just a number} and although it still has the same meaning (object
-related) as before, you should not depend on that.
-
-The protrusion detection mechanism is enhanced a bit to enable a bit more complex
-situations. When protrusion characters are identified some nodes are skipped:
-
-\startitemize[packed,columns,two]
-\startitem zero glue \stopitem
-\startitem penalties \stopitem
-\startitem empty discretionaries \stopitem
-\startitem normal zero kerns \stopitem
-\startitem rules with zero dimensions \stopitem
-\startitem math nodes with a surround of zero \stopitem
-\startitem dir nodes \stopitem
-\startitem empty horizontal lists \stopitem
-\startitem local par nodes \stopitem
-\startitem inserts, marks and adjusts \stopitem
-\startitem boundaries \stopitem
-\startitem whatsits \stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-Because this can not be enough, you can also use a protrusion boundary node to
-make the next node being ignored. When the value is~1 or~3, the next node will be
-ignored in the test when locating a left boundary condition. When the value is~2
-or~3, the previous node will be ignored when locating a right boundary condition
-(the search goes from right to left). This permits protrusion combined with for
-instance content moved into the margin:
-
-\starttyping
-\protrusionboundary1\llap{!\quad}«Who needs protrusion?»
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Changes from \ALEPH\ RC4]
-
-\topicindex {\ALEPH}
-
-Because we wanted proper directional typesetting the \ALEPH\ mechanisms looked
-most attractive. These are rather close to the ones provided by \OMEGA, so what
-we say next applies to both these programs.
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- The extended 16-bit math primitives (\orm {omathcode} etc.) have been
- removed.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \OCP\ processing has been removed completely and as a consequence, the
- following primitives have been removed: \orm {ocp}, \orm {externalocp}, \orm
- {ocplist}, \orm {pushocplist}, \orm {popocplist}, \orm {clearocplists}, \orm
- {addbeforeocplist}, \orm {addafterocplist}, \orm {removebeforeocplist}, \orm
- {removeafterocplist} and \orm {ocptracelevel}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- \LUATEX\ only understands 4~of the 16~direction specifiers of \ALEPH: \type
- {TLT} (latin), \type {TRT} (arabic), \type {RTT} (cjk), \type {LTL} (mongolian).
- All other direction specifiers generate an error. In addition to a keyword
- driven model we also provide an integer driven one.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The input translations from \ALEPH\ are not implemented, the related
- primitives are not available: \orm {DefaultInputMode}, \orm
- {noDefaultInputMode}, \orm {noInputMode}, \orm {InputMode}, \orm
- {DefaultOutputMode}, \orm {noDefaultOutputMode}, \orm {noOutputMode}, \orm
- {OutputMode}, \orm {DefaultInputTranslation}, \orm
- {noDefaultInputTranslation}, \orm {noInputTranslation}, \orm
- {InputTranslation}, \orm {DefaultOutputTranslation}, \orm
- {noDefaultOutputTranslation}, \orm {noOutputTranslation} and \orm
- {OutputTranslation}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Several bugs have been fixed and confusing implementation details have been
- sorted out.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The scanner for direction specifications now allows an optional space after
- the direction is completely parsed.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \type {^^} notation has been extended: after \type {^^^^} four
- hexadecimal characters are expected and after \type {^^^^^^} six hexadecimal
- characters have to be given. The original \TEX\ interpretation is still valid
- for the \type {^^} case but the four and six variants do no backtracking,
- i.e.\ when they are not followed by the right number of hexadecimal digits
- they issue an error message. Because \type{^^^} is a normal \TEX\ case, we
- don't support the odd number of \type {^^^^^} either.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Glues {\it immediately after} direction change commands are not legal
- breakpoints.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Several mechanisms that need to be right|-|to|-|left aware have been
- improved. For instance placement of formula numbers.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The page dimension related primitives \lpr {pagewidth} and \lpr {pageheight}
- have been promoted to core primitives. The \prm {hoffset} and \prm {voffset}
- primitives have been fixed.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The primitives \type {\charwd}, \type {\charht}, \type {\chardp} and \type
- {\charit} have been removed as we have the \ETEX\ variants \type
- {\fontchar*}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The two dimension registers \lpr {pagerightoffset} and \lpr
- {pagebottomoffset} are now core primitives.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The direction related primitives \lpr {pagedir}, \lpr {bodydir}, \lpr
- {pardir}, \lpr {textdir}, \lpr {mathdir} and \lpr {boxdir} are now core
- primitives.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The promotion of primitives to core primitives as well as removing of all
- others means that the initialization namespace \type {aleph} that early
- versions of \LUATEX\ provided is gone.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-The above let's itself summarize as: we took the 32 bit aspects and much of the
-directional mechanisms and merged it into the \PDFTEX\ code base as starting
-point for further development. Then we simplified directionality, fixed it and
-opened it up.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Changes from standard \WEBC]
-
-\topicindex {\WEBC}
-
-The compilation framework is \WEBC\ and we keep using that but without the
-\PASCAL\ to \CCODE\ step. This framework also provides some common features that
-deal with reading bytes from files and locating files in \TDS. This is what we do
-different:
-
-\startitemize
-
-\startitem
- There is no mltex support.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- There is no enctex support.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The following encoding related command line switches are silently ignored,
- even in non|-|\LUA\ mode: \type {-8bit}, \type {-translate-file}, \type
- {-mltex}, \type {-enc} and \type {-etex}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \prm {openout} whatsits are not written to the log file.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- Some of the so|-|called \WEBC\ extensions are hard to set up in non|-|\KPSE\
- mode because \type {texmf.cnf} is not read: \type {shell-escape} is off (but
- that is not a problem because of \LUA's \type {os.execute}), and the paranoia
- checks on \type {openin} and \type {openout} do not happen. However, it is
- easy for a \LUA\ script to do this itself by overloading \type {io.open} and
- alike.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \quote{E} option does not do anything useful.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[reference=backendprimitives,title=The backend primitives]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Less primitives}]
-
-\topicindex {backend}
-\topicindex {\PDF+backend}
-
-In a previous section we mentioned that some \PDFTEX\ primitives were removed and
-others promoted to core \LUATEX\ primitives. That is only part of the story. In
-order to separate the backend specific primitives in de code these commands are
-now replaced by only a few. In traditional \TEX\ we only had the \DVI\ backend
-but now we have two: \DVI\ and \PDF. Additional functionality is implemented as
-\quote {extensions} in \TEX\ speak. By separating more strickly we are able to
-keep the core (frontend) clean and stable and isolate these extensions. If for
-some reason an extra backend option is needed, it can be implemented without
-touching the core. The three \PDF\ backend related primitives are:
-
-\starttyping
-\pdfextension command [specification]
-\pdfvariable name
-\pdffeedback name
-\stoptyping
-
-An extension triggers further parsing, depending on the command given. A variable is
-a (kind of) register and can be read and written, while a feedback is reporting
-something (as it comes from the backend it's normally a sequence of tokens).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\lpr{pdfextension}, \lpr {pdfvariable} and \lpr {pdffeedback}},reference=sec:pdfextensions]
-
-In order for \LUATEX\ to be more than just \TEX\ you need to enable primitives. That
-has already been the case right from the start. If you want the traditional \PDFTEX\
-primitives (for as far their functionality is still around) you now can do this:
-
-\starttyping
-\protected\def\pdfliteral {\pdfextension literal}
-\protected\def\pdfcolorstack {\pdfextension colorstack}
-\protected\def\pdfsetmatrix {\pdfextension setmatrix}
-\protected\def\pdfsave {\pdfextension save\relax}
-\protected\def\pdfrestore {\pdfextension restore\relax}
-\protected\def\pdfobj {\pdfextension obj }
-\protected\def\pdfrefobj {\pdfextension refobj }
-\protected\def\pdfannot {\pdfextension annot }
-\protected\def\pdfstartlink {\pdfextension startlink }
-\protected\def\pdfendlink {\pdfextension endlink\relax}
-\protected\def\pdfoutline {\pdfextension outline }
-\protected\def\pdfdest {\pdfextension dest }
-\protected\def\pdfthread {\pdfextension thread }
-\protected\def\pdfstartthread {\pdfextension startthread }
-\protected\def\pdfendthread {\pdfextension endthread\relax}
-\protected\def\pdfinfo {\pdfextension info }
-\protected\def\pdfcatalog {\pdfextension catalog }
-\protected\def\pdfnames {\pdfextension names }
-\protected\def\pdfincludechars {\pdfextension includechars }
-\protected\def\pdffontattr {\pdfextension fontattr }
-\protected\def\pdfmapfile {\pdfextension mapfile }
-\protected\def\pdfmapline {\pdfextension mapline }
-\protected\def\pdftrailer {\pdfextension trailer }
-\protected\def\pdfglyphtounicode {\pdfextension glyphtounicode }
-\stoptyping
-
-The introspective primitives can be defined as:
-
-\starttyping
-\def\pdftexversion {\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
-\def\pdftexrevision {\pdffeedback revision}
-\def\pdflastlink {\numexpr\pdffeedback lastlink\relax}
-\def\pdfretval {\numexpr\pdffeedback retval\relax}
-\def\pdflastobj {\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
-\def\pdflastannot {\numexpr\pdffeedback lastannot\relax}
-\def\pdfxformname {\numexpr\pdffeedback xformname\relax}
-\def\pdfcreationdate {\pdffeedback creationdate}
-\def\pdffontname {\numexpr\pdffeedback fontname\relax}
-\def\pdffontobjnum {\numexpr\pdffeedback fontobjnum\relax}
-\def\pdffontsize {\dimexpr\pdffeedback fontsize\relax}
-\def\pdfpageref {\numexpr\pdffeedback pageref\relax}
-\def\pdfcolorstackinit {\pdffeedback colorstackinit}
-\stoptyping
-
-The configuration related registers have become:
-
-\starttyping
-\edef\pdfcompresslevel {\pdfvariable compresslevel}
-\edef\pdfobjcompresslevel {\pdfvariable objcompresslevel}
-\edef\pdfrecompress {\pdfvariable recompress}
-\edef\pdfdecimaldigits {\pdfvariable decimaldigits}
-\edef\pdfgamma {\pdfvariable gamma}
-\edef\pdfimageresolution {\pdfvariable imageresolution}
-\edef\pdfimageapplygamma {\pdfvariable imageapplygamma}
-\edef\pdfimagegamma {\pdfvariable imagegamma}
-\edef\pdfimagehicolor {\pdfvariable imagehicolor}
-\edef\pdfimageaddfilename {\pdfvariable imageaddfilename}
-\edef\pdfpkresolution {\pdfvariable pkresolution}
-\edef\pdfpkfixeddpi {\pdfvariable pkfixeddpi}
-\edef\pdfinclusioncopyfonts {\pdfvariable inclusioncopyfonts}
-\edef\pdfinclusionerrorlevel {\pdfvariable inclusionerrorlevel}
-\edef\pdfignoreunknownimages {\pdfvariable ignoreunknownimages}
-\edef\pdfgentounicode {\pdfvariable gentounicode}
-\edef\pdfomitcidset {\pdfvariable omitcidset}
-\edef\pdfomitcharset {\pdfvariable omitcharset}
-\edef\pdfpagebox {\pdfvariable pagebox}
-\edef\pdfminorversion {\pdfvariable minorversion}
-\edef\pdfuniqueresname {\pdfvariable uniqueresname}
-
-\edef\pdfhorigin {\pdfvariable horigin}
-\edef\pdfvorigin {\pdfvariable vorigin}
-\edef\pdflinkmargin {\pdfvariable linkmargin}
-\edef\pdfdestmargin {\pdfvariable destmargin}
-\edef\pdfthreadmargin {\pdfvariable threadmargin}
-\edef\pdfxformmargin {\pdfvariable xformmargin}
-
-\edef\pdfpagesattr {\pdfvariable pagesattr}
-\edef\pdfpageattr {\pdfvariable pageattr}
-\edef\pdfpageresources {\pdfvariable pageresources}
-\edef\pdfxformattr {\pdfvariable xformattr}
-\edef\pdfxformresources {\pdfvariable xformresources}
-\edef\pdfpkmode {\pdfvariable pkmode}
-
-\edef\pdfsuppressoptionalinfo {\pdfvariable suppressoptionalinfo }
-\edef\pdftrailerid {\pdfvariable trailerid }
-\stoptyping
-
-The variables are internal ones, so they are anonymous. When you ask for the
-meaning of a few previously defined ones:
-
-\starttyping
-\meaning\pdfhorigin
-\meaning\pdfcompresslevel
-\meaning\pdfpageattr
-\stoptyping
-
-you will get:
-
-\starttyping
-macro:->[internal backend dimension]
-macro:->[internal backend integer]
-macro:->[internal backend tokenlist]
-\stoptyping
-
-The \prm {edef} can also be a \prm {def} but it's a bit more efficient to expand
-the lookup related register beforehand.
-
-The backend is derived from \PDFTEX\ so the same syntax applies. However, the
-\type {outline} command accepts a \type {objnum} followed by a number. No
-checking takes place so when this is used it had better be a valid (flushed)
-object.
-
-In order to be (more or less) compatible with \PDFTEX\ we also support the option
-to suppress some info but we do so via a bitset:
-
-\starttyping
-\pdfvariable suppressoptionalinfo \numexpr
- 0
- + 1 % PTEX.FullBanner
- + 2 % PTEX.FileName
- + 4 % PTEX.PageNumber
- + 8 % PTEX.InfoDict
- + 16 % Creator
- + 32 % CreationDate
- + 64 % ModDate
- + 128 % Producer
- + 256 % Trapped
- + 512 % ID
-\relax
-\stoptyping
-
-In addition you can overload the trailer id, but we don't do any checking on
-validity, so you have to pass a valid array. The following is like the ones
-normally generated by the engine. You even need to include the brackets here!
-
-\starttyping
-\pdfvariable trailerid {[
- <FA052949448907805BA83C1E78896398>
- <FA052949448907805BA83C1E78896398>
-]}
-\stoptyping
-
-Although we started from a merge of \PDFTEX\ and \ALEPH, by now the code base as
-well as functionality has diverted from those parents. Here we show the options
-that can be passed to the extensions.
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension literal
- [ direct | page | raw ] { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension dest
- num integer | name { tokens }!crlf
- [ fitbh | fitbv | fitb | fith| fitv | fit |
- fitr <rule spec> | xyz [ zoom <integer> ]
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension annot
- reserveobjnum | useobjnum <integer>
- { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension save
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension restore
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension setmatrix
- { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-[ \immediate ] \pdfextension obj
- reserveobjnum
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-[ \immediate ] \pdfextension obj
- [ useobjnum <integer> ]
- [ uncompressed ]
- [ stream [ attr { tokens } ] ]
- [ file ]
- { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension refobj
- <integer>
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension colorstack
- <integer>
- set { tokens } | push { tokens } | pop | current
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension startlink
- [ attr { tokens } ]
- user { tokens } | goto | thread
- [ file { tokens } ]
- [ page <integer> { tokens } | name { tokens } | num integer ]
- [ newwindow | nonewwindow ]
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension endlink
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension startthread
- num <integer> | name { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension endthread
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension thread
- num <integer> | name { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension outline
- [ attr { tokens } ]
- [ useobjnum <integer> ]
- [ count <integer> ]
- { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension glyphtounicode
- { tokens }
- { tokens }
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension catalog
- { tokens }
- [ openaction
- user { tokens } | goto | thread
- [ file { tokens } ]
- [ page <integer> { tokens } | name { tokens } | num <integer> ]
- [ newwindow | nonewwindow ] ]
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension fontattr
- <integer>
- {tokens}
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension mapfile
- {tokens}
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension mapline
- {tokens}
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension includechars
- {tokens}
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension info
- {tokens}
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension names
- {tokens}
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\starttexsyntax
-\pdfextension trailer
- {tokens}
-\stoptexsyntax
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Defaults}]
-
-The engine sets the following defaults.
-
-\starttyping
-\pdfcompresslevel 9
-\pdfobjcompresslevel 1 % used: (0,9)
-\pdfrecompress 0 % mostly for debugging
-\pdfdecimaldigits 4 % used: (3,6)
-\pdfgamma 1000
-\pdfimageresolution 71
-\pdfimageapplygamma 0
-\pdfimagegamma 2200
-\pdfimagehicolor 1
-\pdfimageaddfilename 1
-\pdfpkresolution 72
-\pdfpkfixeddpi 0
-\pdfinclusioncopyfonts 0
-\pdfinclusionerrorlevel 0
-\pdfignoreunknownimages 0
-\pdfgentounicode 0
-\pdfomitcidset 0
-\pdfomitcharset 0
-\pdfpagebox 0
-\pdfminorversion 4
-\pdfuniqueresname 0
-
-\pdfhorigin 1in
-\pdfvorigin 1in
-\pdflinkmargin 0pt
-\pdfdestmargin 0pt
-\pdfthreadmargin 0pt
-\pdfxformmargin 0pt
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Backward compatibility}]
-
-If you also want some backward compatibility, you can add:
-
-\starttyping
-\let\pdfpagewidth \pagewidth
-\let\pdfpageheight \pageheight
-
-\let\pdfadjustspacing \adjustspacing
-\let\pdfprotrudechars \protrudechars
-\let\pdfnoligatures \ignoreligaturesinfont
-\let\pdffontexpand \expandglyphsinfont
-\let\pdfcopyfont \copyfont
-
-\let\pdfxform \saveboxresource
-\let\pdflastxform \lastsavedboxresourceindex
-\let\pdfrefxform \useboxresource
-
-\let\pdfximage \saveimageresource
-\let\pdflastximage \lastsavedimageresourceindex
-\let\pdflastximagepages\lastsavedimageresourcepages
-\let\pdfrefximage \useimageresource
-
-\let\pdfsavepos \savepos
-\let\pdflastxpos \lastxpos
-\let\pdflastypos \lastypos
-
-\let\pdfoutput \outputmode
-\let\pdfdraftmode \draftmode
-
-\let\pdfpxdimen \pxdimen
-
-\let\pdfinsertht \insertht
-
-\let\pdfnormaldeviate \normaldeviate
-\let\pdfuniformdeviate \uniformdeviate
-\let\pdfsetrandomseed \setrandomseed
-\let\pdfrandomseed \randomseed
-
-\let\pdfprimitive \primitive
-\let\ifpdfprimitive \ifprimitive
-
-\let\ifpdfabsnum \ifabsnum
-\let\ifpdfabsdim \ifabsdim
-\stoptyping
-
-And even:
-
-\starttyping
-\newdimen\pdfeachlineheight
-\newdimen\pdfeachlinedepth
-\newdimen\pdflastlinedepth
-\newdimen\pdffirstlineheight
-\newdimen\pdfignoreddimen
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title=Directions]
-
-\topicindex {\OMEGA}
-\topicindex {\ALEPH}
-\topicindex {directions}
-
-\startsubsection[title={Four directions}]
-
-The directional model in \LUATEX\ is inherited from \OMEGA|/|\ALEPH\ but we tried
-to improve it a bit. At some point we played with recovery of modes but that was
-disabled later on when we found that it interfered with nested directions. That
-itself had as side effect that the node list was no longer balanced with respect
-to directional nodes which in turn can give side effects when a series of dir
-changes happens without grouping.
-
-When extending the \PDF\ backend to support directions some inconsistencies were
-found and as a result we decided to support only the four models that make sense
-\type {TLT} (latin), \type {TRT} (arabic), \type {RTT} (cjk) and \type {LTL}
-(mongolian).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={How it works}]
-
-The approach is that we again make the list balanced but try to avoid some side
-effects. What happens is quite intuitive if we forget about spaces (turned into
-glue) but even there what happens makes sense if you look at it in detail.
-However that logic makes in|-|group switching kind of useless when no proper
-nested grouping is used: switching from right to left several times nested,
-results in spacing ending up after each other due to nested mirroring. Of course
-a sane macro package will manage this for the user but here we are discussing the
-low level dir injection.
-
-This is what happens:
-
-\starttyping
-\textdir TRT nur {\textdir TLT run \textdir TRT NUR} nur
-\stoptyping
-
-This becomes stepwise:
-
-\startnarrower
-\starttyping
-injected: [+TRT]nur {[+TLT]run [+TRT]NUR} nur
-balanced: [+TRT]nur {[+TLT]run [-TLT][+TRT]NUR[-TRT]} nur[-TRT]
-result : run {RUNrun } run
-\stoptyping
-\stopnarrower
-
-And this:
-
-\starttyping
-\textdir TRT nur {nur \textdir TLT run \textdir TRT NUR} nur
-\stoptyping
-
-becomes:
-
-\startnarrower
-\starttyping
-injected: [+TRT]nur {nur [+TLT]run [+TRT]NUR} nur
-balanced: [+TRT]nur {nur [+TLT]run [-TLT][+TRT]NUR[-TRT]} nur[-TRT]
-result : run {run RUNrun } run
-\stoptyping
-\stopnarrower
-
-Now, in the following examples watch where we put the braces:
-
-\startbuffer
-\textdir TRT nur {{\textdir TLT run} {\textdir TRT NUR}} nur
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-This becomes:
-
-\startnarrower
-\getbuffer
-\stopnarrower
-
-Compare this to:
-
-\startbuffer
-\textdir TRT nur {{\textdir TLT run }{\textdir TRT NUR}} nur
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-Which renders as:
-
-\startnarrower
-\getbuffer
-\stopnarrower
-
-So how do we deal with the next?
-
-\startbuffer
-\def\ltr{\textdir TLT\relax}
-\def\rtl{\textdir TRT\relax}
-
-run {\rtl nur {\ltr run \rtl NUR \ltr run \rtl NUR} nur}
-run {\ltr run {\rtl nur \ltr RUN \rtl nur \ltr RUN} run}
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer
-
-It gets typeset as:
-
-\startnarrower
-\startlines
-\getbuffer
-\stoplines
-\stopnarrower
-
-We could define the two helpers to look back, pick up a skip, remove it and
-inject it after the dir node. But that way we loose the subtype information that
-for some applications can be handy to be kept as|-|is. This is why we now have a
-variant of \lpr {textdir} which injects the balanced node before the skip.
-Instead of the previous definition we can use:
-
-\startbuffer[def]
-\def\ltr{\linedir TLT\relax}
-\def\rtl{\linedir TRT\relax}
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer[def]
-
-and this time:
-
-\startbuffer[txt]
-run {\rtl nur {\ltr run \rtl NUR \ltr run \rtl NUR} nur}
-run {\ltr run {\rtl nur \ltr RUN \rtl nur \ltr RUN} run}
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer[txt]
-
-comes out as a properly spaced:
-
-\startnarrower
-\startlines
-\getbuffer[def,txt]
-\stoplines
-\stopnarrower
-
-Anything more complex that this, like combination of skips and penalties, or
-kerns, should be handled in the input or macro package because there is no way we
-can predict the expected behaviour. In fact, the \lpr {linedir} is just a
-convenience extra which could also have been implemented using node list parsing.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Controlling glue with \lpr {breakafterdirmode}}]
-
-Glue after a dir node is ignored in the linebreak decision but you can bypass that
-by setting \lpr {breakafterdirmode} to~\type {1}. The following table shows the
-difference. Watch your spaces.
-
-\def\ShowSome#1{%
- \BC \type{#1}
- \NC \breakafterdirmode\zerocount\hsize\zeropoint#1
- \NC
- \NC \breakafterdirmode\plusone\hsize\zeropoint#1
- \NC
- \NC \NR
-}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|Tp(1pt)|w(5em)|Tp(1pt)|w(5em)|]
- \DB
- \BC \type{0}
- \NC
- \BC \type{1}
- \NC
- \NC \NR
- \TB
- \ShowSome{pre {\textdir TLT xxx} post}
- \ShowSome{pre {\textdir TLT xxx }post}
- \ShowSome{pre{ \textdir TLT xxx} post}
- \ShowSome{pre{ \textdir TLT xxx }post}
- \ShowSome{pre { \textdir TLT xxx } post}
- \ShowSome{pre {\textdir TLT\relax\space xxx} post}
- \LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Controling parshapes with \lpr {shapemode}}]
-
-Another adaptation to the \ALEPH\ directional model is control over shapes driven
-by \prm {hangindent} and \prm {parshape}. This is controlled by a new parameter
-\lpr {shapemode}:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|l|]
-\DB value \BC \prm {hangindent} \BC \prm {parshape} \NC \NR
-\TB
-\BC \type{0} \NC normal \NC normal \NC \NR
-\BC \type{1} \NC mirrored \NC normal \NC \NR
-\BC \type{2} \NC normal \NC mirrored \NC \NR
-\BC \type{3} \NC mirrored \NC mirrored \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The value is reset to zero (like \prm {hangindent} and \prm {parshape})
-after the paragraph is done with. You can use negative values to prevent
-this. In \in {figure} [fig:shapemode] a few examples are given.
-
-\startplacefigure[reference=fig:shapemode,title={The effect of \type {shapemode}.}]
- \startcombination[2*3]
- {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
- \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
- \pardir TLT \textdir TLT
- \hangindent 40pt \hangafter -3
- \leftskip10pt \input tufte \par
- \egroup} {TLT: hangindent}
- {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
- \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
- \pardir TLT \textdir TLT
- \parshape 4 0pt .8\hsize 10pt .8\hsize 20pt .8\hsize 0pt \hsize
- \input tufte \par
- \egroup} {TLT: parshape}
- {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
- \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
- \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
- \hangindent 40pt \hangafter -3
- \leftskip10pt \input tufte \par
- \egroup} {TRT: hangindent mode 0}
- {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
- \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
- \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
- \parshape 4 0pt .8\hsize 10pt .8\hsize 20pt .8\hsize 0pt \hsize
- \input tufte \par
- \egroup} {TRT: parshape mode 0}
- {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
- \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
- \shapemode=3
- \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
- \hangindent 40pt \hangafter -3
- \leftskip10pt \input tufte \par
- \egroup} {TRT: hangindent mode 1 & 3}
- {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
- \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
- \shapemode=3
- \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
- \parshape 4 0pt .8\hsize 10pt .8\hsize 20pt .8\hsize 0pt \hsize
- \input tufte \par
- \egroup} {TRT: parshape mode 2 & 3}
- \stopcombination
-\stopplacefigure
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Symbols or numbers}]
-
-Internally the implementation is different from \ALEPH. First of all we use no
-whatsits but dedicated nodes, but also we have only 4 directions that are mapped
-onto 4 numbers. A text direction node can mark the start or end of a sequence of
-nodes, and therefore has two states. At the \TEX\ end we don't see these states
-because \TEX\ itself will add proper end state nodes if needed.
-
-The symbolic names \type {TLT}, \type {TRT}, etc.\ originate in \OMEGA. In
-\LUATEX\ we also have a number based model which sometimes makes more sense.
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|l|]
-\DB value \BC equivalent \NC \NR
-\TB
-\BC \type {0} \NC TLT \NC \NR
-\BC \type {1} \NC TRT \NC \NR
-\BC \type {2} \NC LTL \NC \NR
-\BC \type {3} \NC RTT \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-We support the \OMEGA\ primitives \orm {textdir}, \orm {pardir}, \orm {pagedir},
-\orm {pardir} and \orm {mathdir}. These accept three character keywords. The
-primitives that set the direction by number are: \lpr {textdirection}, \lpr
-{pardirection}, \lpr {pagedirection} and \lpr {bodydirection} and \lpr
-{mathdirection}. When specifying a direction for a box you can use \type {bdir}
-instead of \type {dir}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title=Implementation notes]
-
-\startsubsection[title=Memory allocation]
-
-\topicindex {memory}
-
-The single internal memory heap that traditional \TEX\ used for tokens and nodes
-is split into two separate arrays. Each of these will grow dynamically when
-needed.
-
-The \type {texmf.cnf} settings related to main memory are no longer used (these
-are: \type {main_memory}, \type {mem_bot}, \type {extra_mem_top} and \type
-{extra_mem_bot}). \quote {Out of main memory} errors can still occur, but the
-limiting factor is now the amount of RAM in your system, not a predefined limit.
-
-Also, the memory (de)allocation routines for nodes are completely rewritten. The
-relevant code now lives in the C file \type {texnode.c}, and basically uses a
-dozen or so \quote {avail} lists instead of a doubly|-|linked model. An extra
-function layer is added so that the code can ask for nodes by type instead of
-directly requisitioning a certain amount of memory words.
-
-Because of the split into two arrays and the resulting differences in the data
-structures, some of the macros have been duplicated. For instance, there are now
-\type {vlink} and \type {vinfo} as well as \type {token_link} and \type
-{token_info}. All access to the variable memory array is now hidden behind a
-macro called \type {vmem}. We mention this because using the \TEX book as
-reference is still quite valid but not for memory related details. Another
-significant detail is that we have double linked node lists and that most nodes
-carry more data.
-
-The input line buffer and pool size are now also reallocated when needed, and the
-\type {texmf.cnf} settings \type {buf_size} and \type {pool_size} are silently
-ignored.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Sparse arrays]
-
-The \prm {mathcode}, \prm {delcode}, \prm {catcode}, \prm {sfcode}, \prm {lccode}
-and \prm {uccode} (and the new \lpr {hjcode}) tables are now sparse arrays that
-are implemented in~\CCODE. They are no longer part of the \TEX\ \quote
-{equivalence table} and because each had 1.1 million entries with a few memory
-words each, this makes a major difference in memory usage. Performance is not
-really hurt by this.
-
-The \prm {catcode}, \prm {sfcode}, \prm {lccode}, \prm {uccode} and \lpr {hjcode}
-assignments don't show up when using the \ETEX\ tracing routines \prm
-{tracingassigns} and \prm {tracingrestores} but we don't see that as a real
-limitation.
-
-A side|-|effect of the current implementation is that \prm {global} is now more
-expensive in terms of processing than non|-|global assignments but not many users
-will notice that.
-
-The glyph ids within a font are also managed by means of a sparse array as glyph
-ids can go up to index $2^{21}-1$ but these are never accessed directly so again
-users will not notice this.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Simple single|-|character csnames]
-
-\topicindex {csnames}
-
-Single|-|character commands are no longer treated specially in the internals,
-they are stored in the hash just like the multiletter csnames.
-
-The code that displays control sequences explicitly checks if the length is one
-when it has to decide whether or not to add a trailing space.
-
-Active characters are internally implemented as a special type of multi|-|letter
-control sequences that uses a prefix that is otherwise impossible to obtain.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=The compressed format file]
-
-\topicindex {format}
-
-The format is passed through \type {zlib}, allowing it to shrink to roughly half
-of the size it would have had in uncompressed form. This takes a bit more \CPU\
-cycles but much less disk \IO, so it should still be faster. We use a level~3
-compression which we found to be the optimal trade|-|off between filesize and
-decompression speed.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Binary file reading]
-
-\topicindex {files+binary}
-
-All of the internal code is changed in such a way that if one of the \type
-{read_xxx_file} callbacks is not set, then the file is read by a \CCODE\ function
-using basically the same convention as the callback: a single read into a buffer
-big enough to hold the entire file contents. While this uses more memory than the
-previous code (that mostly used \type {getc} calls), it can be quite a bit faster
-(depending on your \IO\ subsystem).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title=Tabs and spaces]
-
-\topicindex {space}
-\topicindex {newline}
-
-We conform to the way other \TEX\ engines handle trailing tabs and spaces. For
-decades trailing tabs and spaces (before a newline) were removed from the input
-but this behaviour was changed in September 2017 to only handle spaces. We are
-aware that this can introduce compatibility issues in existing workflows but
-because we don't want too many differences with upstream \TEXLIVE\ we just follow
-up on that patch (which is a functional one and not really a fix). It is up to
-macro packages maintainers to deal with possible compatibility issues and in
-\LUATEX\ they can do so via the callbacks that deal with reading from files.
-
-The previous behaviour was a known side effect and (as that kind of input
-normally comes from generated sources) it was normally dealt with by adding a
-comment token to the line in case the spaces and|/|or tabs were intentional and
-to be kept. We are aware of the fact that this contradicts some of our other
-choices but consistency with other engines and the fact that in \KPSE\ mode a
-common file \IO\ layer is used can have a side effect of breaking compatibility.
-We still stick to our view that at the log level we can (and might be) more
-incompatible. We already expose some more details.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-modifications
+
+\startchapter[reference=modifications,title={Modifications}]
+
+\startsection[title=The merged engines]
+
+\startsubsection[title=The need for change]
+
+\topicindex {engines}
+\topicindex {history}
+
+The first version of \LUATEX\ only had a few extra primitives and it was largely
+the same as \PDFTEX. Then we merged substantial parts of \ALEPH\ into the code
+and got more primitives. When we got more stable the decision was made to clean
+up the rather hybrid nature of the program. This means that some primitives have
+been promoted to core primitives, often with a different name, and that others
+were removed. This made it possible to start cleaning up the code base. In \in
+{chapter} [enhancements] we discussed some new primitives, here we will cover
+most of the adapted ones.
+
+Besides the expected changes caused by new functionality, there are a number of
+not|-|so|-|expected changes. These are sometimes a side|-|effect of a new
+(conflicting) feature, or, more often than not, a change necessary to clean up
+the internal interfaces. These will also be mentioned.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Changes from \TEX\ 3.1415926]
+
+\topicindex {\TEX}
+
+Of course it all starts with traditional \TEX. Even if we started with \PDFTEX,
+most still comes from the original. But we divert a bit.
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ The current code base is written in \CCODE, not \PASCAL. We use \CWEB\ when
+ possible. As a consequence instead of one large file plus change files, we
+ now have multiple files organized in categories like \type {tex}, \type
+ {pdf}, \type {lang}, \type {font}, \type {lua}, etc. There are some artifacts
+ of the conversion to \CCODE, but in due time we will clean up the source code
+ and make sure that the documentation is done right. Many files are in the
+ \CWEB\ format, but others, like those interfacing to \LUA, are \CCODE\ files.
+ Of course we want to stay as close as possible to the original so that the
+ documentation of the fundamentals behind \TEX\ by Don Knuth still applies.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ See \in {chapter} [languages] for many small changes related to paragraph
+ building, language handling and hyphenation. The most important change is
+ that adding a brace group in the middle of a word (like in \type {of{}fice})
+ does not prevent ligature creation.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ There is no pool file, all strings are embedded during compilation.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The specifier \type {plus 1 fillll} does not generate an error. The extra
+ \quote{l} is simply typeset.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The upper limit to \prm {endlinechar} and \prm {newlinechar} is 127.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Magnification (\prm {mag}) is only supported in \DVI\ output mode. You can
+ set this parameter and it even works with \type {true} units till you switch
+ to \PDF\ output mode. When you use \PDF\ output you can best not touch the
+ \prm {mag} variable. This fuzzy behaviour is not much different from using
+ \PDF\ backend related functionality while eventually \DVI\ output is
+ required.
+
+ After the output mode has been frozen (normally that happens when the first
+ page is shipped out) or when \PDF\ output is enabled, the \type {true}
+ specification is ignored. When you preload a plain format adapted to
+ \LUATEX\ it can be that the \prm {mag} parameter already has been set.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Changes from \ETEX\ 2.2]
+
+\topicindex {\ETEX}
+
+Being the de factor standard extension of course we provide the \ETEX\
+functionality, but with a few small adaptations.
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ The \ETEX\ functionality is always present and enabled so the prepended
+ asterisk or \type {-etex} switch for \INITEX\ is not needed.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \TEXXET\ extension is not present, so the primitives \type
+ {\TeXXeTstate}, \type {\beginR}, \type {\beginL}, \type {\endR} and \type
+ {\endL} are missing. Instead we used the \OMEGA/\ALEPH\ approach to
+ directionality as starting point.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Some of the tracing information that is output by \ETEX's \prm
+ {tracingassigns} and \prm {tracingrestores} is not there.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Register management in \LUATEX\ uses the \OMEGA/\ALEPH\ model, so the maximum
+ value is 65535 and the implementation uses a flat array instead of the mixed
+ flat & sparse model from \ETEX.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ When kpathsea is used to find files, \LUATEX\ uses the \type {ofm} file
+ format to search for font metrics. In turn, this means that \LUATEX\ looks at
+ the \type {OFMFONTS} configuration variable (like \OMEGA\ and \ALEPH) instead
+ of \type {TFMFONTS} (like \TEX\ and \PDFTEX). Likewise for virtual fonts
+ (\LUATEX\ uses the variable \type {OVFFONTS} instead of \type {VFFONTS}).
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The primitives that report a stretch or shrink order report a value in a
+ convenient range zero upto four. Because some macro packages can break on
+ that we also provide \type {\eTeXgluestretchorder} and \type
+ {\eTeXglueshrinkorder} which report values compatible with \ETEX. The (new)
+ \type {fi} value is reported as \type {-1} (so when used in an \type
+ {\ifcase} test that value makes one end up in the \type {\else}).
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Changes from \PDFTEX\ 1.40]
+
+\topicindex {\PDFTEX}
+
+Because we want to produce \PDF\ the most natural starting point was the popular
+\PDFTEX\ program. We inherit the stable features, dropped most of the
+experimental code and promoted some functionality to core \LUATEX\ functionality
+which in turn triggered renaming primitives.
+
+For compatibility reasons we still refer to \type {\pdf...} commands but \LUATEX\
+has a different backend interface. Instead of these primitives there are three
+interfacing primitives: \lpr {pdfextension}, \lpr {pdfvariable} and \lpr
+{pdffeedback} that take keywords and optional further arguments (below we will
+still use the \tex {pdf} prefix names as reference). This way we can extend the
+features when needed but don't need to adapt the core engine. The front- and
+backend are decoupled as much as possible.
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ The (experimental) support for snap nodes has been removed, because it is
+ much more natural to build this functionality on top of node processing and
+ attributes. The associated primitives that are gone are: \orm
+ {pdfsnaprefpoint}, \orm {pdfsnapy}, and \orm {pdfsnapycomp}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The (experimental) support for specialized spacing around nodes has also been
+ removed. The associated primitives that are gone are: \orm
+ {pdfadjustinterwordglue}, \orm {pdfprependkern}, and \orm {pdfappendkern}, as
+ well as the five supporting primitives \orm {knbscode}, \orm {stbscode}, \orm
+ {shbscode}, \orm {knbccode}, and \orm {knaccode}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ A number of \quote {\PDFTEX\ primitives} have been removed as they can be
+ implemented using \LUA: \orm {pdfelapsedtime}, \orm {pdfescapehex}, \orm
+ {pdfescapename}, \orm {pdfescapestring}, \orm {pdffiledump}, \orm
+ {pdffilemoddate}, \orm {pdffilesize}, \orm {pdfforcepagebox}, \orm
+ {pdflastmatch}, \orm {pdfmatch}, \orm {pdfmdfivesum}, \orm {pdfmovechars},
+ \orm {pdfoptionalwaysusepdfpagebox}, \orm {pdfoptionpdfinclusionerrorlevel},
+ \orm {pdfresettimer}, \orm {pdfshellescape}, \orm {pdfstrcmp} and \orm
+ {pdfunescapehex}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The version related primitives \orm {pdftexbanner}, \orm {pdftexversion}
+ and \orm {pdftexrevision} are no longer present as there is no longer a
+ relationship with \PDFTEX\ development.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The experimental snapper mechanism has been removed and therefore also the
+ primitives \orm {pdfignoreddimen}, \orm {pdffirstlineheight}, \orm
+ {pdfeachlineheight}, \orm {pdfeachlinedepth} and \orm {pdflastlinedepth}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The experimental primitives \lpr {primitive}, \lpr {ifprimitive}, \lpr
+ {ifabsnum} and \lpr {ifabsdim} are promoted to core primitives. The \type
+ {\pdf*} prefixed originals are not available.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Because \LUATEX\ has a different subsystem for managing images, more
+ diversion from its ancestor happened in the meantime. We don't adapt to
+ changes in \PDFTEX.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Two extra token lists are provided, \orm {pdfxformresources} and \orm
+ {pdfxformattr}, as an alternative to \orm {pdfxform} keywords.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Image specifications also support \type {visiblefilename}, \type
+ {userpassword} and \type {ownerpassword}. The password options are only
+ relevant for encrypted \PDF\ files.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The current version of \LUATEX\ no longer replaces and|/|or merges fonts in
+ embedded \PDF\ files with fonts of the enveloping \PDF\ document. This
+ regression may be temporary, depending on how the rewritten font backend will
+ look like.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The primitives \orm {pdfpagewidth} and \orm {pdfpageheight} have been removed
+ because \lpr {pagewidth} and \lpr {pageheight} have that purpose.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The primitives \orm {pdfnormaldeviate}, \orm {pdfuniformdeviate}, \orm
+ {pdfsetrandomseed} and \orm {pdfrandomseed} have been promoted to core
+ primitives without \type {pdf} prefix so the original commands are no longer
+ recognized.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The primitives \lpr {ifincsname}, \lpr {expanded} and \lpr {quitvmode}
+ are now core primitives.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ As the hz and protrusion mechanism are part of the core the related
+ primitives \lpr {lpcode}, \lpr {rpcode}, \lpr {efcode}, \lpr
+ {leftmarginkern}, \lpr {rightmarginkern} are promoted to core primitives. The
+ two commands \lpr {protrudechars} and \lpr {adjustspacing} replace their
+ prefixed with \type {\pdf} originals.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The hz optimization code has been partially redone so that we no longer need
+ to create extra font instances. The front- and backend have been decoupled
+ and more efficient (\PDF) code is generated.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ When \lpr {adjustspacing} has value~2, hz optimization will be applied to
+ glyphs and kerns. When the value is~3, only glyphs will be treated. A value
+ smaller than~2 disables this feature.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \lpr {tagcode} primitive is promoted to core primitive.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \lpr {letterspacefont} feature is now part of the core but will not be
+ changed (improved). We just provide it for legacy use.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \orm {pdfnoligatures} primitive is now \lpr {ignoreligaturesinfont}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \orm {pdfcopyfont} primitive is now \lpr {copyfont}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \orm {pdffontexpand} primitive is now \lpr {expandglyphsinfont}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Because position tracking is also available in \DVI\ mode the \lpr {savepos},
+ \lpr {lastxpos} and \lpr {lastypos} commands now replace their \type {pdf}
+ prefixed originals.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The introspective primitives \type {\pdflastximagecolordepth} and \type
+ {\pdfximagebbox} have been removed. One can use external applications to
+ determine these properties or use the built|-|in \type {img} library.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The initializers \orm {pdfoutput} has been replaced by \lpr {outputmode} and
+ \orm {pdfdraftmode} is now \lpr {draftmode}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The pixel multiplier dimension \orm {pdfpxdimen} lost its prefix and is now
+ called \lpr {pxdimen}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ An extra \orm {pdfimageaddfilename} option has been added that can be used to
+ block writing the filename to the \PDF\ file.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The primitive \orm {pdftracingfonts} is now \lpr {tracingfonts} as it
+ doesn't relate to the backend.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The experimental primitive \orm {pdfinsertht} is kept as \lpr {insertht}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ There is some more control over what metadata goes into the \PDF\ file.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The promotion of primitives to core primitives as well as the separation of
+ font- and backend means that the initialization namespace \type {pdftex} is
+ gone.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+One change involves the so called xforms and ximages. In \PDFTEX\ these are
+implemented as so called whatsits. But contrary to other whatsits they have
+dimensions that need to be taken into account when for instance calculating
+optimal line breaks. In \LUATEX\ these are now promoted to a special type of rule
+nodes, which simplifies code that needs those dimensions.
+
+Another reason for promotion is that these are useful concepts. Backends can
+provide the ability to use content that has been rendered in several places, and
+images are also common. As already mentioned in \in {section}
+[sec:imagedandforms], we now have:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB \LUATEX \BC \PDFTEX \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \lpr {saveboxresource} \NC \orm {pdfxform} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {saveimageresource} \NC \orm {pdfximage} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {useboxresource} \NC \orm {pdfrefxform} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {useimageresource} \NC \orm {pdfrefximage} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {lastsavedboxresourceindex} \NC \orm {pdflastxform} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourceindex} \NC \orm {pdflastximage} \NC \NR
+\NC \lpr {lastsavedimageresourcepages} \NC \orm {pdflastximagepages} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+There are a few \lpr {pdffeedback} features that relate to this but these are
+typical backend specific ones. The index that gets returned is to be considered
+as \quote {just a number} and although it still has the same meaning (object
+related) as before, you should not depend on that.
+
+The protrusion detection mechanism is enhanced a bit to enable a bit more complex
+situations. When protrusion characters are identified some nodes are skipped:
+
+\startitemize[packed,columns,two]
+\startitem zero glue \stopitem
+\startitem penalties \stopitem
+\startitem empty discretionaries \stopitem
+\startitem normal zero kerns \stopitem
+\startitem rules with zero dimensions \stopitem
+\startitem math nodes with a surround of zero \stopitem
+\startitem dir nodes \stopitem
+\startitem empty horizontal lists \stopitem
+\startitem local par nodes \stopitem
+\startitem inserts, marks and adjusts \stopitem
+\startitem boundaries \stopitem
+\startitem whatsits \stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+Because this can not be enough, you can also use a protrusion boundary node to
+make the next node being ignored. When the value is~1 or~3, the next node will be
+ignored in the test when locating a left boundary condition. When the value is~2
+or~3, the previous node will be ignored when locating a right boundary condition
+(the search goes from right to left). This permits protrusion combined with for
+instance content moved into the margin:
+
+\starttyping
+\protrusionboundary1\llap{!\quad}«Who needs protrusion?»
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Changes from \ALEPH\ RC4]
+
+\topicindex {\ALEPH}
+
+Because we wanted proper directional typesetting the \ALEPH\ mechanisms looked
+most attractive. These are rather close to the ones provided by \OMEGA, so what
+we say next applies to both these programs.
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ The extended 16-bit math primitives (\orm {omathcode} etc.) have been
+ removed.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \OCP\ processing has been removed completely and as a consequence, the
+ following primitives have been removed: \orm {ocp}, \orm {externalocp}, \orm
+ {ocplist}, \orm {pushocplist}, \orm {popocplist}, \orm {clearocplists}, \orm
+ {addbeforeocplist}, \orm {addafterocplist}, \orm {removebeforeocplist}, \orm
+ {removeafterocplist} and \orm {ocptracelevel}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ \LUATEX\ only understands 4~of the 16~direction specifiers of \ALEPH: \type
+ {TLT} (latin), \type {TRT} (arabic), \type {RTT} (cjk), \type {LTL} (mongolian).
+ All other direction specifiers generate an error. In addition to a keyword
+ driven model we also provide an integer driven one.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The input translations from \ALEPH\ are not implemented, the related
+ primitives are not available: \orm {DefaultInputMode}, \orm
+ {noDefaultInputMode}, \orm {noInputMode}, \orm {InputMode}, \orm
+ {DefaultOutputMode}, \orm {noDefaultOutputMode}, \orm {noOutputMode}, \orm
+ {OutputMode}, \orm {DefaultInputTranslation}, \orm
+ {noDefaultInputTranslation}, \orm {noInputTranslation}, \orm
+ {InputTranslation}, \orm {DefaultOutputTranslation}, \orm
+ {noDefaultOutputTranslation}, \orm {noOutputTranslation} and \orm
+ {OutputTranslation}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Several bugs have been fixed and confusing implementation details have been
+ sorted out.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The scanner for direction specifications now allows an optional space after
+ the direction is completely parsed.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \type {^^} notation has been extended: after \type {^^^^} four
+ hexadecimal characters are expected and after \type {^^^^^^} six hexadecimal
+ characters have to be given. The original \TEX\ interpretation is still valid
+ for the \type {^^} case but the four and six variants do no backtracking,
+ i.e.\ when they are not followed by the right number of hexadecimal digits
+ they issue an error message. Because \type{^^^} is a normal \TEX\ case, we
+ don't support the odd number of \type {^^^^^} either.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Glues {\it immediately after} direction change commands are not legal
+ breakpoints.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Several mechanisms that need to be right|-|to|-|left aware have been
+ improved. For instance placement of formula numbers.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The page dimension related primitives \lpr {pagewidth} and \lpr {pageheight}
+ have been promoted to core primitives. The \prm {hoffset} and \prm {voffset}
+ primitives have been fixed.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The primitives \type {\charwd}, \type {\charht}, \type {\chardp} and \type
+ {\charit} have been removed as we have the \ETEX\ variants \type
+ {\fontchar*}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The two dimension registers \lpr {pagerightoffset} and \lpr
+ {pagebottomoffset} are now core primitives.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The direction related primitives \lpr {pagedir}, \lpr {bodydir}, \lpr
+ {pardir}, \lpr {textdir}, \lpr {mathdir} and \lpr {boxdir} are now core
+ primitives.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The promotion of primitives to core primitives as well as removing of all
+ others means that the initialization namespace \type {aleph} that early
+ versions of \LUATEX\ provided is gone.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+The above let's itself summarize as: we took the 32 bit aspects and much of the
+directional mechanisms and merged it into the \PDFTEX\ code base as starting
+point for further development. Then we simplified directionality, fixed it and
+opened it up.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Changes from standard \WEBC]
+
+\topicindex {\WEBC}
+
+The compilation framework is \WEBC\ and we keep using that but without the
+\PASCAL\ to \CCODE\ step. This framework also provides some common features that
+deal with reading bytes from files and locating files in \TDS. This is what we do
+different:
+
+\startitemize
+
+\startitem
+ There is no mltex support.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ There is no enctex support.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The following encoding related command line switches are silently ignored,
+ even in non|-|\LUA\ mode: \type {-8bit}, \type {-translate-file}, \type
+ {-mltex}, \type {-enc} and \type {-etex}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \prm {openout} whatsits are not written to the log file.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ Some of the so|-|called \WEBC\ extensions are hard to set up in non|-|\KPSE\
+ mode because \type {texmf.cnf} is not read: \type {shell-escape} is off (but
+ that is not a problem because of \LUA's \type {os.execute}), and the paranoia
+ checks on \type {openin} and \type {openout} do not happen. However, it is
+ easy for a \LUA\ script to do this itself by overloading \type {io.open} and
+ alike.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \quote{E} option does not do anything useful.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[reference=backendprimitives,title=The backend primitives]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Less primitives}]
+
+\topicindex {backend}
+\topicindex {\PDF+backend}
+
+In a previous section we mentioned that some \PDFTEX\ primitives were removed and
+others promoted to core \LUATEX\ primitives. That is only part of the story. In
+order to separate the backend specific primitives in de code these commands are
+now replaced by only a few. In traditional \TEX\ we only had the \DVI\ backend
+but now we have two: \DVI\ and \PDF. Additional functionality is implemented as
+\quote {extensions} in \TEX\ speak. By separating more strickly we are able to
+keep the core (frontend) clean and stable and isolate these extensions. If for
+some reason an extra backend option is needed, it can be implemented without
+touching the core. The three \PDF\ backend related primitives are:
+
+\starttyping
+\pdfextension command [specification]
+\pdfvariable name
+\pdffeedback name
+\stoptyping
+
+An extension triggers further parsing, depending on the command given. A variable is
+a (kind of) register and can be read and written, while a feedback is reporting
+something (as it comes from the backend it's normally a sequence of tokens).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\lpr{pdfextension}, \lpr {pdfvariable} and \lpr {pdffeedback}},reference=sec:pdfextensions]
+
+In order for \LUATEX\ to be more than just \TEX\ you need to enable primitives. That
+has already been the case right from the start. If you want the traditional \PDFTEX\
+primitives (for as far their functionality is still around) you now can do this:
+
+\starttyping
+\protected\def\pdfliteral {\pdfextension literal}
+\protected\def\pdfcolorstack {\pdfextension colorstack}
+\protected\def\pdfsetmatrix {\pdfextension setmatrix}
+\protected\def\pdfsave {\pdfextension save\relax}
+\protected\def\pdfrestore {\pdfextension restore\relax}
+\protected\def\pdfobj {\pdfextension obj }
+\protected\def\pdfrefobj {\pdfextension refobj }
+\protected\def\pdfannot {\pdfextension annot }
+\protected\def\pdfstartlink {\pdfextension startlink }
+\protected\def\pdfendlink {\pdfextension endlink\relax}
+\protected\def\pdfoutline {\pdfextension outline }
+\protected\def\pdfdest {\pdfextension dest }
+\protected\def\pdfthread {\pdfextension thread }
+\protected\def\pdfstartthread {\pdfextension startthread }
+\protected\def\pdfendthread {\pdfextension endthread\relax}
+\protected\def\pdfinfo {\pdfextension info }
+\protected\def\pdfcatalog {\pdfextension catalog }
+\protected\def\pdfnames {\pdfextension names }
+\protected\def\pdfincludechars {\pdfextension includechars }
+\protected\def\pdffontattr {\pdfextension fontattr }
+\protected\def\pdfmapfile {\pdfextension mapfile }
+\protected\def\pdfmapline {\pdfextension mapline }
+\protected\def\pdftrailer {\pdfextension trailer }
+\protected\def\pdfglyphtounicode {\pdfextension glyphtounicode }
+\stoptyping
+
+The introspective primitives can be defined as:
+
+\starttyping
+\def\pdftexversion {\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
+\def\pdftexrevision {\pdffeedback revision}
+\def\pdflastlink {\numexpr\pdffeedback lastlink\relax}
+\def\pdfretval {\numexpr\pdffeedback retval\relax}
+\def\pdflastobj {\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
+\def\pdflastannot {\numexpr\pdffeedback lastannot\relax}
+\def\pdfxformname {\numexpr\pdffeedback xformname\relax}
+\def\pdfcreationdate {\pdffeedback creationdate}
+\def\pdffontname {\numexpr\pdffeedback fontname\relax}
+\def\pdffontobjnum {\numexpr\pdffeedback fontobjnum\relax}
+\def\pdffontsize {\dimexpr\pdffeedback fontsize\relax}
+\def\pdfpageref {\numexpr\pdffeedback pageref\relax}
+\def\pdfcolorstackinit {\pdffeedback colorstackinit}
+\stoptyping
+
+The configuration related registers have become:
+
+\starttyping
+\edef\pdfcompresslevel {\pdfvariable compresslevel}
+\edef\pdfobjcompresslevel {\pdfvariable objcompresslevel}
+\edef\pdfrecompress {\pdfvariable recompress}
+\edef\pdfdecimaldigits {\pdfvariable decimaldigits}
+\edef\pdfgamma {\pdfvariable gamma}
+\edef\pdfimageresolution {\pdfvariable imageresolution}
+\edef\pdfimageapplygamma {\pdfvariable imageapplygamma}
+\edef\pdfimagegamma {\pdfvariable imagegamma}
+\edef\pdfimagehicolor {\pdfvariable imagehicolor}
+\edef\pdfimageaddfilename {\pdfvariable imageaddfilename}
+\edef\pdfpkresolution {\pdfvariable pkresolution}
+\edef\pdfpkfixeddpi {\pdfvariable pkfixeddpi}
+\edef\pdfinclusioncopyfonts {\pdfvariable inclusioncopyfonts}
+\edef\pdfinclusionerrorlevel {\pdfvariable inclusionerrorlevel}
+\edef\pdfignoreunknownimages {\pdfvariable ignoreunknownimages}
+\edef\pdfgentounicode {\pdfvariable gentounicode}
+\edef\pdfomitcidset {\pdfvariable omitcidset}
+\edef\pdfomitcharset {\pdfvariable omitcharset}
+\edef\pdfpagebox {\pdfvariable pagebox}
+\edef\pdfminorversion {\pdfvariable minorversion}
+\edef\pdfuniqueresname {\pdfvariable uniqueresname}
+
+\edef\pdfhorigin {\pdfvariable horigin}
+\edef\pdfvorigin {\pdfvariable vorigin}
+\edef\pdflinkmargin {\pdfvariable linkmargin}
+\edef\pdfdestmargin {\pdfvariable destmargin}
+\edef\pdfthreadmargin {\pdfvariable threadmargin}
+\edef\pdfxformmargin {\pdfvariable xformmargin}
+
+\edef\pdfpagesattr {\pdfvariable pagesattr}
+\edef\pdfpageattr {\pdfvariable pageattr}
+\edef\pdfpageresources {\pdfvariable pageresources}
+\edef\pdfxformattr {\pdfvariable xformattr}
+\edef\pdfxformresources {\pdfvariable xformresources}
+\edef\pdfpkmode {\pdfvariable pkmode}
+
+\edef\pdfsuppressoptionalinfo {\pdfvariable suppressoptionalinfo }
+\edef\pdftrailerid {\pdfvariable trailerid }
+\stoptyping
+
+The variables are internal ones, so they are anonymous. When you ask for the
+meaning of a few previously defined ones:
+
+\starttyping
+\meaning\pdfhorigin
+\meaning\pdfcompresslevel
+\meaning\pdfpageattr
+\stoptyping
+
+you will get:
+
+\starttyping
+macro:->[internal backend dimension]
+macro:->[internal backend integer]
+macro:->[internal backend tokenlist]
+\stoptyping
+
+The \prm {edef} can also be a \prm {def} but it's a bit more efficient to expand
+the lookup related register beforehand.
+
+The backend is derived from \PDFTEX\ so the same syntax applies. However, the
+\type {outline} command accepts a \type {objnum} followed by a number. No
+checking takes place so when this is used it had better be a valid (flushed)
+object.
+
+In order to be (more or less) compatible with \PDFTEX\ we also support the option
+to suppress some info but we do so via a bitset:
+
+\starttyping
+\pdfvariable suppressoptionalinfo \numexpr
+ 0
+ + 1 % PTEX.FullBanner
+ + 2 % PTEX.FileName
+ + 4 % PTEX.PageNumber
+ + 8 % PTEX.InfoDict
+ + 16 % Creator
+ + 32 % CreationDate
+ + 64 % ModDate
+ + 128 % Producer
+ + 256 % Trapped
+ + 512 % ID
+\relax
+\stoptyping
+
+In addition you can overload the trailer id, but we don't do any checking on
+validity, so you have to pass a valid array. The following is like the ones
+normally generated by the engine. You even need to include the brackets here!
+
+\starttyping
+\pdfvariable trailerid {[
+ <FA052949448907805BA83C1E78896398>
+ <FA052949448907805BA83C1E78896398>
+]}
+\stoptyping
+
+Although we started from a merge of \PDFTEX\ and \ALEPH, by now the code base as
+well as functionality has diverted from those parents. Here we show the options
+that can be passed to the extensions.
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension literal
+ [ direct | page | raw ] { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension dest
+ num integer | name { tokens }!crlf
+ [ fitbh | fitbv | fitb | fith| fitv | fit |
+ fitr <rule spec> | xyz [ zoom <integer> ]
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension annot
+ reserveobjnum | useobjnum <integer>
+ { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension save
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension restore
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension setmatrix
+ { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+[ \immediate ] \pdfextension obj
+ reserveobjnum
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+[ \immediate ] \pdfextension obj
+ [ useobjnum <integer> ]
+ [ uncompressed ]
+ [ stream [ attr { tokens } ] ]
+ [ file ]
+ { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension refobj
+ <integer>
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension colorstack
+ <integer>
+ set { tokens } | push { tokens } | pop | current
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension startlink
+ [ attr { tokens } ]
+ user { tokens } | goto | thread
+ [ file { tokens } ]
+ [ page <integer> { tokens } | name { tokens } | num integer ]
+ [ newwindow | nonewwindow ]
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension endlink
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension startthread
+ num <integer> | name { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension endthread
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension thread
+ num <integer> | name { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension outline
+ [ attr { tokens } ]
+ [ useobjnum <integer> ]
+ [ count <integer> ]
+ { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension glyphtounicode
+ { tokens }
+ { tokens }
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension catalog
+ { tokens }
+ [ openaction
+ user { tokens } | goto | thread
+ [ file { tokens } ]
+ [ page <integer> { tokens } | name { tokens } | num <integer> ]
+ [ newwindow | nonewwindow ] ]
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension fontattr
+ <integer>
+ {tokens}
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension mapfile
+ {tokens}
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension mapline
+ {tokens}
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension includechars
+ {tokens}
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension info
+ {tokens}
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension names
+ {tokens}
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\starttexsyntax
+\pdfextension trailer
+ {tokens}
+\stoptexsyntax
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Defaults}]
+
+The engine sets the following defaults.
+
+\starttyping
+\pdfcompresslevel 9
+\pdfobjcompresslevel 1 % used: (0,9)
+\pdfrecompress 0 % mostly for debugging
+\pdfdecimaldigits 4 % used: (3,6)
+\pdfgamma 1000
+\pdfimageresolution 71
+\pdfimageapplygamma 0
+\pdfimagegamma 2200
+\pdfimagehicolor 1
+\pdfimageaddfilename 1
+\pdfpkresolution 72
+\pdfpkfixeddpi 0
+\pdfinclusioncopyfonts 0
+\pdfinclusionerrorlevel 0
+\pdfignoreunknownimages 0
+\pdfgentounicode 0
+\pdfomitcidset 0
+\pdfomitcharset 0
+\pdfpagebox 0
+\pdfminorversion 4
+\pdfuniqueresname 0
+
+\pdfhorigin 1in
+\pdfvorigin 1in
+\pdflinkmargin 0pt
+\pdfdestmargin 0pt
+\pdfthreadmargin 0pt
+\pdfxformmargin 0pt
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Backward compatibility}]
+
+If you also want some backward compatibility, you can add:
+
+\starttyping
+\let\pdfpagewidth \pagewidth
+\let\pdfpageheight \pageheight
+
+\let\pdfadjustspacing \adjustspacing
+\let\pdfprotrudechars \protrudechars
+\let\pdfnoligatures \ignoreligaturesinfont
+\let\pdffontexpand \expandglyphsinfont
+\let\pdfcopyfont \copyfont
+
+\let\pdfxform \saveboxresource
+\let\pdflastxform \lastsavedboxresourceindex
+\let\pdfrefxform \useboxresource
+
+\let\pdfximage \saveimageresource
+\let\pdflastximage \lastsavedimageresourceindex
+\let\pdflastximagepages\lastsavedimageresourcepages
+\let\pdfrefximage \useimageresource
+
+\let\pdfsavepos \savepos
+\let\pdflastxpos \lastxpos
+\let\pdflastypos \lastypos
+
+\let\pdfoutput \outputmode
+\let\pdfdraftmode \draftmode
+
+\let\pdfpxdimen \pxdimen
+
+\let\pdfinsertht \insertht
+
+\let\pdfnormaldeviate \normaldeviate
+\let\pdfuniformdeviate \uniformdeviate
+\let\pdfsetrandomseed \setrandomseed
+\let\pdfrandomseed \randomseed
+
+\let\pdfprimitive \primitive
+\let\ifpdfprimitive \ifprimitive
+
+\let\ifpdfabsnum \ifabsnum
+\let\ifpdfabsdim \ifabsdim
+\stoptyping
+
+And even:
+
+\starttyping
+\newdimen\pdfeachlineheight
+\newdimen\pdfeachlinedepth
+\newdimen\pdflastlinedepth
+\newdimen\pdffirstlineheight
+\newdimen\pdfignoreddimen
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title=Directions]
+
+\topicindex {\OMEGA}
+\topicindex {\ALEPH}
+\topicindex {directions}
+
+\startsubsection[title={Four directions}]
+
+The directional model in \LUATEX\ is inherited from \OMEGA|/|\ALEPH\ but we tried
+to improve it a bit. At some point we played with recovery of modes but that was
+disabled later on when we found that it interfered with nested directions. That
+itself had as side effect that the node list was no longer balanced with respect
+to directional nodes which in turn can give side effects when a series of dir
+changes happens without grouping.
+
+When extending the \PDF\ backend to support directions some inconsistencies were
+found and as a result we decided to support only the four models that make sense
+\type {TLT} (latin), \type {TRT} (arabic), \type {RTT} (cjk) and \type {LTL}
+(mongolian).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={How it works}]
+
+The approach is that we again make the list balanced but try to avoid some side
+effects. What happens is quite intuitive if we forget about spaces (turned into
+glue) but even there what happens makes sense if you look at it in detail.
+However that logic makes in|-|group switching kind of useless when no proper
+nested grouping is used: switching from right to left several times nested,
+results in spacing ending up after each other due to nested mirroring. Of course
+a sane macro package will manage this for the user but here we are discussing the
+low level dir injection.
+
+This is what happens:
+
+\starttyping
+\textdir TRT nur {\textdir TLT run \textdir TRT NUR} nur
+\stoptyping
+
+This becomes stepwise:
+
+\startnarrower
+\starttyping
+injected: [+TRT]nur {[+TLT]run [+TRT]NUR} nur
+balanced: [+TRT]nur {[+TLT]run [-TLT][+TRT]NUR[-TRT]} nur[-TRT]
+result : run {RUNrun } run
+\stoptyping
+\stopnarrower
+
+And this:
+
+\starttyping
+\textdir TRT nur {nur \textdir TLT run \textdir TRT NUR} nur
+\stoptyping
+
+becomes:
+
+\startnarrower
+\starttyping
+injected: [+TRT]nur {nur [+TLT]run [+TRT]NUR} nur
+balanced: [+TRT]nur {nur [+TLT]run [-TLT][+TRT]NUR[-TRT]} nur[-TRT]
+result : run {run RUNrun } run
+\stoptyping
+\stopnarrower
+
+Now, in the following examples watch where we put the braces:
+
+\startbuffer
+\textdir TRT nur {{\textdir TLT run} {\textdir TRT NUR}} nur
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+This becomes:
+
+\startnarrower
+\getbuffer
+\stopnarrower
+
+Compare this to:
+
+\startbuffer
+\textdir TRT nur {{\textdir TLT run }{\textdir TRT NUR}} nur
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+Which renders as:
+
+\startnarrower
+\getbuffer
+\stopnarrower
+
+So how do we deal with the next?
+
+\startbuffer
+\def\ltr{\textdir TLT\relax}
+\def\rtl{\textdir TRT\relax}
+
+run {\rtl nur {\ltr run \rtl NUR \ltr run \rtl NUR} nur}
+run {\ltr run {\rtl nur \ltr RUN \rtl nur \ltr RUN} run}
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer
+
+It gets typeset as:
+
+\startnarrower
+\startlines
+\getbuffer
+\stoplines
+\stopnarrower
+
+We could define the two helpers to look back, pick up a skip, remove it and
+inject it after the dir node. But that way we loose the subtype information that
+for some applications can be handy to be kept as|-|is. This is why we now have a
+variant of \lpr {textdir} which injects the balanced node before the skip.
+Instead of the previous definition we can use:
+
+\startbuffer[def]
+\def\ltr{\linedir TLT\relax}
+\def\rtl{\linedir TRT\relax}
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer[def]
+
+and this time:
+
+\startbuffer[txt]
+run {\rtl nur {\ltr run \rtl NUR \ltr run \rtl NUR} nur}
+run {\ltr run {\rtl nur \ltr RUN \rtl nur \ltr RUN} run}
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer[txt]
+
+comes out as a properly spaced:
+
+\startnarrower
+\startlines
+\getbuffer[def,txt]
+\stoplines
+\stopnarrower
+
+Anything more complex that this, like combination of skips and penalties, or
+kerns, should be handled in the input or macro package because there is no way we
+can predict the expected behaviour. In fact, the \lpr {linedir} is just a
+convenience extra which could also have been implemented using node list parsing.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Controlling glue with \lpr {breakafterdirmode}}]
+
+Glue after a dir node is ignored in the linebreak decision but you can bypass that
+by setting \lpr {breakafterdirmode} to~\type {1}. The following table shows the
+difference. Watch your spaces.
+
+\def\ShowSome#1{%
+ \BC \type{#1}
+ \NC \breakafterdirmode\zerocount\hsize\zeropoint#1
+ \NC
+ \NC \breakafterdirmode\plusone\hsize\zeropoint#1
+ \NC
+ \NC \NR
+}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|Tp(1pt)|w(5em)|Tp(1pt)|w(5em)|]
+ \DB
+ \BC \type{0}
+ \NC
+ \BC \type{1}
+ \NC
+ \NC \NR
+ \TB
+ \ShowSome{pre {\textdir TLT xxx} post}
+ \ShowSome{pre {\textdir TLT xxx }post}
+ \ShowSome{pre{ \textdir TLT xxx} post}
+ \ShowSome{pre{ \textdir TLT xxx }post}
+ \ShowSome{pre { \textdir TLT xxx } post}
+ \ShowSome{pre {\textdir TLT\relax\space xxx} post}
+ \LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Controling parshapes with \lpr {shapemode}}]
+
+Another adaptation to the \ALEPH\ directional model is control over shapes driven
+by \prm {hangindent} and \prm {parshape}. This is controlled by a new parameter
+\lpr {shapemode}:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|l|]
+\DB value \BC \prm {hangindent} \BC \prm {parshape} \NC \NR
+\TB
+\BC \type{0} \NC normal \NC normal \NC \NR
+\BC \type{1} \NC mirrored \NC normal \NC \NR
+\BC \type{2} \NC normal \NC mirrored \NC \NR
+\BC \type{3} \NC mirrored \NC mirrored \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The value is reset to zero (like \prm {hangindent} and \prm {parshape})
+after the paragraph is done with. You can use negative values to prevent
+this. In \in {figure} [fig:shapemode] a few examples are given.
+
+\startplacefigure[reference=fig:shapemode,title={The effect of \type {shapemode}.}]
+ \startcombination[2*3]
+ {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
+ \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
+ \pardir TLT \textdir TLT
+ \hangindent 40pt \hangafter -3
+ \leftskip10pt \input tufte \par
+ \egroup} {TLT: hangindent}
+ {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
+ \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
+ \pardir TLT \textdir TLT
+ \parshape 4 0pt .8\hsize 10pt .8\hsize 20pt .8\hsize 0pt \hsize
+ \input tufte \par
+ \egroup} {TLT: parshape}
+ {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
+ \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
+ \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
+ \hangindent 40pt \hangafter -3
+ \leftskip10pt \input tufte \par
+ \egroup} {TRT: hangindent mode 0}
+ {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
+ \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
+ \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
+ \parshape 4 0pt .8\hsize 10pt .8\hsize 20pt .8\hsize 0pt \hsize
+ \input tufte \par
+ \egroup} {TRT: parshape mode 0}
+ {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
+ \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
+ \shapemode=3
+ \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
+ \hangindent 40pt \hangafter -3
+ \leftskip10pt \input tufte \par
+ \egroup} {TRT: hangindent mode 1 & 3}
+ {\ruledvbox \bgroup \setuptolerance[verytolerant]
+ \hsize .45\textwidth \switchtobodyfont[6pt]
+ \shapemode=3
+ \pardir TRT \textdir TRT
+ \parshape 4 0pt .8\hsize 10pt .8\hsize 20pt .8\hsize 0pt \hsize
+ \input tufte \par
+ \egroup} {TRT: parshape mode 2 & 3}
+ \stopcombination
+\stopplacefigure
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Symbols or numbers}]
+
+Internally the implementation is different from \ALEPH. First of all we use no
+whatsits but dedicated nodes, but also we have only 4 directions that are mapped
+onto 4 numbers. A text direction node can mark the start or end of a sequence of
+nodes, and therefore has two states. At the \TEX\ end we don't see these states
+because \TEX\ itself will add proper end state nodes if needed.
+
+The symbolic names \type {TLT}, \type {TRT}, etc.\ originate in \OMEGA. In
+\LUATEX\ we also have a number based model which sometimes makes more sense.
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|l|]
+\DB value \BC equivalent \NC \NR
+\TB
+\BC \type {0} \NC TLT \NC \NR
+\BC \type {1} \NC TRT \NC \NR
+\BC \type {2} \NC LTL \NC \NR
+\BC \type {3} \NC RTT \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+We support the \OMEGA\ primitives \orm {textdir}, \orm {pardir}, \orm {pagedir},
+\orm {pardir} and \orm {mathdir}. These accept three character keywords. The
+primitives that set the direction by number are: \lpr {textdirection}, \lpr
+{pardirection}, \lpr {pagedirection} and \lpr {bodydirection} and \lpr
+{mathdirection}. When specifying a direction for a box you can use \type {bdir}
+instead of \type {dir}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title=Implementation notes]
+
+\startsubsection[title=Memory allocation]
+
+\topicindex {memory}
+
+The single internal memory heap that traditional \TEX\ used for tokens and nodes
+is split into two separate arrays. Each of these will grow dynamically when
+needed.
+
+The \type {texmf.cnf} settings related to main memory are no longer used (these
+are: \type {main_memory}, \type {mem_bot}, \type {extra_mem_top} and \type
+{extra_mem_bot}). \quote {Out of main memory} errors can still occur, but the
+limiting factor is now the amount of RAM in your system, not a predefined limit.
+
+Also, the memory (de)allocation routines for nodes are completely rewritten. The
+relevant code now lives in the C file \type {texnode.c}, and basically uses a
+dozen or so \quote {avail} lists instead of a doubly|-|linked model. An extra
+function layer is added so that the code can ask for nodes by type instead of
+directly requisitioning a certain amount of memory words.
+
+Because of the split into two arrays and the resulting differences in the data
+structures, some of the macros have been duplicated. For instance, there are now
+\type {vlink} and \type {vinfo} as well as \type {token_link} and \type
+{token_info}. All access to the variable memory array is now hidden behind a
+macro called \type {vmem}. We mention this because using the \TEX book as
+reference is still quite valid but not for memory related details. Another
+significant detail is that we have double linked node lists and that most nodes
+carry more data.
+
+The input line buffer and pool size are now also reallocated when needed, and the
+\type {texmf.cnf} settings \type {buf_size} and \type {pool_size} are silently
+ignored.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Sparse arrays]
+
+The \prm {mathcode}, \prm {delcode}, \prm {catcode}, \prm {sfcode}, \prm {lccode}
+and \prm {uccode} (and the new \lpr {hjcode}) tables are now sparse arrays that
+are implemented in~\CCODE. They are no longer part of the \TEX\ \quote
+{equivalence table} and because each had 1.1 million entries with a few memory
+words each, this makes a major difference in memory usage. Performance is not
+really hurt by this.
+
+The \prm {catcode}, \prm {sfcode}, \prm {lccode}, \prm {uccode} and \lpr {hjcode}
+assignments don't show up when using the \ETEX\ tracing routines \prm
+{tracingassigns} and \prm {tracingrestores} but we don't see that as a real
+limitation.
+
+A side|-|effect of the current implementation is that \prm {global} is now more
+expensive in terms of processing than non|-|global assignments but not many users
+will notice that.
+
+The glyph ids within a font are also managed by means of a sparse array as glyph
+ids can go up to index $2^{21}-1$ but these are never accessed directly so again
+users will not notice this.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Simple single|-|character csnames]
+
+\topicindex {csnames}
+
+Single|-|character commands are no longer treated specially in the internals,
+they are stored in the hash just like the multiletter csnames.
+
+The code that displays control sequences explicitly checks if the length is one
+when it has to decide whether or not to add a trailing space.
+
+Active characters are internally implemented as a special type of multi|-|letter
+control sequences that uses a prefix that is otherwise impossible to obtain.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=The compressed format file]
+
+\topicindex {format}
+
+The format is passed through \type {zlib}, allowing it to shrink to roughly half
+of the size it would have had in uncompressed form. This takes a bit more \CPU\
+cycles but much less disk \IO, so it should still be faster. We use a level~3
+compression which we found to be the optimal trade|-|off between filesize and
+decompression speed.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Binary file reading]
+
+\topicindex {files+binary}
+
+All of the internal code is changed in such a way that if one of the \type
+{read_xxx_file} callbacks is not set, then the file is read by a \CCODE\ function
+using basically the same convention as the callback: a single read into a buffer
+big enough to hold the entire file contents. While this uses more memory than the
+previous code (that mostly used \type {getc} calls), it can be quite a bit faster
+(depending on your \IO\ subsystem).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title=Tabs and spaces]
+
+\topicindex {space}
+\topicindex {newline}
+
+We conform to the way other \TEX\ engines handle trailing tabs and spaces. For
+decades trailing tabs and spaces (before a newline) were removed from the input
+but this behaviour was changed in September 2017 to only handle spaces. We are
+aware that this can introduce compatibility issues in existing workflows but
+because we don't want too many differences with upstream \TEXLIVE\ we just follow
+up on that patch (which is a functional one and not really a fix). It is up to
+macro packages maintainers to deal with possible compatibility issues and in
+\LUATEX\ they can do so via the callbacks that deal with reading from files.
+
+The previous behaviour was a known side effect and (as that kind of input
+normally comes from generated sources) it was normally dealt with by adding a
+comment token to the line in case the spaces and|/|or tabs were intentional and
+to be kept. We are aware of the fact that this contradicts some of our other
+choices but consistency with other engines and the fact that in \KPSE\ mode a
+common file \IO\ layer is used can have a side effect of breaking compatibility.
+We still stick to our view that at the log level we can (and might be) more
+incompatible. We already expose some more details.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-nodes.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-nodes.tex
index 1b8de8d767..21e8a2808f 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-nodes.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-nodes.tex
@@ -1,2664 +1,2664 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-nodes
-
-\startchapter[reference=nodes,title={Nodes}]
-
-\startsection[title={\LUA\ node representation}][library=node]
-
-\topicindex {nodes}
-
-\libindex {fields}
-\libindex {subtypes}
-\libindex {values}
-
-\TEX's nodes are represented in \LUA\ as userdata objects with a variable set of
-fields. In the following syntax tables, such as the type of such a userdata object
-is represented as \syntax {<node>}.
-
-The current return value of \type {node.types()} is:
-\startluacode
- for id, name in table.sortedhash(node.types()) do
- context.type(name)
- context(" (%s), ",id)
- end
- context.removeunwantedspaces()
- context.removepunctuation()
-\stopluacode
-. % period
-
-The \prm {lastnodetype} primitive is \ETEX\ compliant. The valid range is still
-$[-1,15]$ and glyph nodes (formerly known as char nodes) have number~0 while
-ligature nodes are mapped to~7. That way macro packages can use the same symbolic
-names as in traditional \ETEX. Keep in mind that these \ETEX\ node numbers are
-different from the real internal ones and that there are more \ETEX\ node types
-than~15.
-
-You can ask for a list of fields with \type {node.fields} and for valid subtypes
-with \type {node.subtypes}. The \type {node.values} function reports some used
-values. Valid arguments are \nod {dir}, \type {direction}, \nod {glue}, \whs
-{pdf_literal}, \whs {pdf_action}, \whs {pdf_window} and \whs {color_stack}. Keep
-in mind that the setters normally expect a number, but this helper gives you a
-list of what numbers matter. For practical reason the \type {pagestate} values
-are also reported with this helper.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Main text nodes}]
-
-\topicindex {nodes+text}
-
-These are the nodes that comprise actual typesetting commands. A few fields are
-present in all nodes regardless of their type, these are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{next} \NC node \NC the next node in a list, or nil \NC \NR
-\NC \type{id} \NC number \NC the node's type (\type {id}) number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC the node \type {subtype} identifier \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {subtype} is sometimes just a dummy entry because not all nodes
-actually use the \type {subtype}, but this way you can be sure that all nodes
-accept it as a valid field name, and that is often handy in node list traversal.
-In the following tables \type {next} and \type {id} are not explicitly mentioned.
-
-Besides these three fields, almost all nodes also have an \type {attr} field, and
-there is a also a field called \type {prev}. That last field is always present,
-but only initialized on explicit request: when the function \type {node.slide()}
-is called, it will set up the \type {prev} fields to be a backwards pointer in
-the argument node list. By now most of \TEX's node processing makes sure that the
-\type {prev} nodes are valid but there can be exceptions, especially when the
-internal magic uses a leading \nod {temp} nodes to temporarily store a state.
-
-\subsection{\nod {hlist} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{list} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width of the box \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height of the box \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth of the box \NC \NR
-\NC \type{shift} \NC number \NC a displacement perpendicular to the character
- progression direction \NC \NR
-\NC \type{glue_order} \NC number \NC a number in the range $[0,4]$, indicating the
- glue order \NC \NR
-\NC \type{glue_set} \NC number \NC the calculated glue ratio \NC \NR
-\NC \type{glue_sign} \NC number \NC 0 = \type {normal}, 1 = \type {stretching}, 2 =
- \type {shrinking} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC the first node of the body of this list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction of this box, see~\in [dirnodes] \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\topicindex {nodes+lists}
-\topicindex {lists}
-
-A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
-its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may result.
-
-Note: the field name \type {head} and \type {list} are both valid. Sometimes it
-makes more sense to refer to a list by \type {head}, sometimes \type {list} makes
-more sense.
-
-\subsection{\nod {vlist} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+lists}
-\topicindex {lists}
-
-This node is similar to \nod {hlist}, except that \quote {shift} is a displacement
-perpendicular to the line progression direction, and \quote {subtype} only has
-the values 0, 4, and~5.
-
-\subsection{\nod {rule} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+rules}
-\topicindex {rules}
-
-Contrary to traditional \TEX, \LUATEX\ has more \prm {rule} subtypes because we
-also use rules to store reuseable objects and images. User nodes are invisible
-and can be intercepted by a callback.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes {rule} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width of the rule where the special value
- $-1073741824$ is used for \quote {running} glue dimensions \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height of the rule (can be negative) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth of the rule (can be negative) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{left} \NC number \NC shift at the left end (also subtracted from width) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{right} \NC number \NC (subtracted from width) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction of this rule, see~\in[dirnodes] \NC \NR
-\NC \type{index} \NC number \NC an optional index that can be referred to \NC \NR
-\NC \type{transform} \NC number \NC an private variable (also used to specify outline width) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {left} and type {right} keys are somewhat special (and experimental).
-When rules are auto adapting to the surrounding box width you can enforce a shift
-to the right by setting \type {left}. The value is also subtracted from the width
-which can be a value set by the engine itself and is not entirely under user
-control. The \type {right} is also subtracted from the width. It all happens in
-the backend so these are not affecting the calculations in the frontend (actually
-the auto settings also happen in the backend). For a vertical rule \type {left}
-affects the height and \type {right} affects the depth. There is no matching
-interface at the \TEX\ end (although we can have more keywords for rules it would
-complicate matters and introduce a speed penalty.) However, you can just
-construct a rule node with \LUA\ and write it to the \TEX\ input. The \type
-{outline} subtype is just a convenient variant and the \type {transform} field
-specifies the width of the outline.
-
-\subsection{\nod {ins} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+insertions}
-\topicindex {insertions}
-
-This node relates to the \prm {insert} primitive.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC the insertion class \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{cost} \NC number \NC the penalty associated with this insert \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC height of the insert \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC depth of the insert \NC \NR
-\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC the first node of the body of this insert \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-There is a set of extra fields that concern the associated glue: \type {width},
-\type {stretch}, \type {stretch_order}, \type {shrink} and \type {shrink_order}.
-These are all numbers.
-
-A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
-its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may result. You can use
-\type {list} instead (often in functions you want to use local variable with similar
-names and both names are equally sensible).
-
-\subsection{\nod {mark} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+marks}
-\topicindex {marks}
-
-This one relates to the \prm {mark} primitive.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC unused \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{class} \NC number \NC the mark class \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mark} \NC table \NC a table representing a token list \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\nod {adjust} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+adjust}
-\topicindex {adjust}
-
-This node comes from \prm {vadjust} primitive.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{adjust} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC adjusted material \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
-its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may be the result.
-
-\subsection{\nod {disc} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+discretionaries}
-\topicindex {discretionaries}
-
-The \prm {discretionary} and \prm {-}, the \type {-} character but also the
-hyphenation mechanism produces these nodes.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{disc} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pre} \NC node \NC pointer to the pre|-|break text \NC \NR
-\NC \type{post} \NC node \NC pointer to the post|-|break text \NC \NR
-\NC \type{replace} \NC node \NC pointer to the no|-|break text \NC \NR
-\NC \type{penalty} \NC number \NC the penalty associated with the break, normally
- \prm {hyphenpenalty} or \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The subtype numbers~4 and~5 belong to the \quote {of-f-ice} explanation given
-elsewhere. These disc nodes are kind of special as at some point they also keep
-information about breakpoints and nested ligatures.
-
-The \type {pre}, \type {post} and \type {replace} fields at the \LUA\ end are in
-fact indirectly accessed and have a \type {prev} pointer that is not \type {nil}.
-This means that when you mess around with the head of these (three) lists, you
-also need to reassign them because that will restore the proper \type {prev}
-pointer, so:
-
-\starttyping
-pre = d.pre
--- change the list starting with pre
-d.pre = pre
-\stoptyping
-
-Otherwise you can end up with an invalid internal perception of reality and
-\LUATEX\ might even decide to crash on you. It also means that running forward
-over for instance \type {pre} is ok but backward you need to stop at \type {pre}.
-And you definitely must not mess with the node that \type {prev} points to, if
-only because it is not really a node but part of the disc data structure (so
-freeing it again might crash \LUATEX).
-
-\subsection{\nod {math} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+math}
-\topicindex {math+nodes}
-
-Math nodes represent the boundaries of a math formula, normally wrapped into
-\type {$} signs.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{math} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{surround} \NC number \NC width of the \prm {mathsurround} kern \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-There is a set of extra fields that concern the associated glue: \type {width},
-\type {stretch}, \type {stretch_order}, \type {shrink} and \type {shrink_order}.
-These are all numbers.
-
-\subsection{\nod {glue} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+glue}
-\topicindex {glue}
-
-Skips are about the only type of data objects in traditional \TEX\ that are not a
-simple value. They are inserted when \TEX\ sees a space in the text flow but also
-by \prm {hskip} and \prm {vskip}. The structure that represents the glue
-components of a skip is called a \nod {glue_spec}, and it has the following
-accessible fields:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the horizontal or vertical displacement \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stretch} \NC number \NC extra (positive) displacement or stretch amount \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stretch_order} \NC number \NC factor applied to stretch amount \NC \NR
-\NC \type{shrink} \NC number \NC extra (negative) displacement or shrink amount\NC \NR
-\NC \type{shrink_order} \NC number \NC factor applied to shrink amount \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The effective width of some glue subtypes depends on the stretch or shrink needed
-to make the encapsulating box fit its dimensions. For instance, in a paragraph
-lines normally have glue representing spaces and these stretch or shrink to make
-the content fit in the available space. The \type {effective_glue} function that
-takes a glue node and a parent (hlist or vlist) returns the effective width of
-that glue item. When you pass \type {true} as third argument the value will be
-rounded.
-
-A \nod {glue_spec} node is a special kind of node that is used for storing a set
-of glue values in registers. Originally they were also used to store properties
-of glue nodes (using a system of reference counts) but we now keep these
-properties in the glue nodes themselves, which gives a cleaner interface to \LUA.
-
-The indirect spec approach was in fact an optimization in the original \TEX\
-code. First of all it can save quite some memory because all these spaces that
-become glue now share the same specification (only the reference count is
-incremented), and zero testing is also a bit faster because only the pointer has
-to be checked (this is no longer true for engines that implement for instance
-protrusion where we really need to ensure that zero is zero when we test for
-bounds). Another side effect is that glue specifications are read|-|only, so in
-the end copies need to be made when they are used from \LUA\ (each assignment to
-a field can result in a new copy). So in the end the advantages of sharing are
-not that high (and nowadays memory is less an issue, also given that a glue node
-is only a few memory words larger than a spec).
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{glue} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{leader} \NC node \NC pointer to a box or rule for leaders \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-In addition there are the \type {width}, \type {stretch} \type {stretch_order},
-\type {shrink}, and \type {shrink_order} fields. Note that we use the key \type
-{width} in both horizontal and vertical glue. This suits the \TEX\ internals well
-so we decided to stick to that naming.
-
-A regular word space also results in a \type {spaceskip} subtype (this used to be
-a \type {userskip} with subtype zero).
-
-\subsection{\nod {kern} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+kerns}
-\topicindex {kerns}
-
-The \prm {kern} command creates such nodes but for instance the font and math
-machinery can also add them.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{kern} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{kern} \NC number \NC fixed horizontal or vertical advance \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\nod {penalty} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+penalty}
-\topicindex {penalty}
-
-The \prm {penalty} command is one that generates these nodes.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{penalty} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{penalty} \NC number \NC the penalty value \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The subtypes are just informative and \TEX\ itself doesn't use them. When you
-run into an \type {linebreakpenalty} you need to keep in mind that it's a
-accumulation of \type {club}, \type{widow} and other relevant penalties.
-
-\subsection[glyphnodes]{\nod {glyph} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+glyph}
-\topicindex {glyphs}
-
-These are probably the mostly used nodes and although you can push them in the
-current list with for instance \prm {char} \TEX\ will normally do it for you when
-it considers some input to be text.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC bit field \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{char} \NC number \NC the character index in the font \NC \NR
-\NC \type{font} \NC number \NC the font identifier \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lang} \NC number \NC the language identifier \NC \NR
-\NC \type{left} \NC number \NC the frozen \type {\lefthyphenmnin} value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{right} \NC number \NC the frozen \type {\righthyphenmnin} value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{uchyph} \NC boolean \NC the frozen \prm {uchyph} value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{components} \NC node \NC pointer to ligature components \NC \NR
-\NC \type{xoffset} \NC number \NC a virtual displacement in horizontal direction \NC \NR
-\NC \type{yoffset} \NC number \NC a virtual displacement in vertical direction \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the (original) width of the character \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the (original) height of the character\NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the (original) depth of the character\NC \NR
-\NC \type{expansion_factor} \NC number \NC the to be applied expansion_factor \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC number \NC a general purpose field for users (we had room for it) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {width}, \type {height} and \type {depth} values are read|-|only. The
-\type {expansion_factor} is assigned in the par builder and used in the backend.
-
-A warning: never assign a node list to the components field unless you are sure
-its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may be result. Valid
-bits for the \type {subtype} field are:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|l|]
-\DB bit \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC character \NC \NR
-\NC 1 \NC ligature \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC ghost \NC \NR
-\NC 3 \NC left \NC \NR
-\NC 4 \NC right \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-See \in {section} [charsandglyphs] for a detailed description of the \type
-{subtype} field.
-
-The \type {expansion_factor} has been introduced as part of the separation
-between font- and backend. It is the result of extensive experiments with a more
-efficient implementation of expansion. Early versions of \LUATEX\ already
-replaced multiple instances of fonts in the backend by scaling but contrary to
-\PDFTEX\ in \LUATEX\ we now also got rid of font copies in the frontend and
-replaced them by expansion factors that travel with glyph nodes. Apart from a
-cleaner approach this is also a step towards a better separation between front-
-and backend.
-
-The \type {is_char} function checks if a node is a glyph node with a subtype still
-less than 256. This function can be used to determine if applying font logic to a
-glyph node makes sense. The value \type {nil} gets returned when the node is not
-a glyph, a character number is returned if the node is still tagged as character
-and \type {false} gets returned otherwise. When nil is returned, the id is also
-returned. The \type {is_glyph} variant doesn't check for a subtype being less
-than 256, so it returns either the character value or nil plus the id. These
-helpers are not always faster than separate calls but they sometimes permit
-making more readable tests. The \type {uses_font} helpers takes a node
-and font id and returns true when a glyph or disc node references that font.
-
-\subsection{\nod {boundary} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+boundary}
-\topicindex {boundary}
-
-This node relates to the \prm {noboundary}, \prm {boundary}, \prm
-{protrusionboundary} and \prm {wordboundary} primitives.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{boundary} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{value} \NC number \NC values 0--255 are reserved \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\nod {local_par} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+paragraphs}
-\topicindex {paragraphs}
-
-This node is inserted at the start of a paragraph. You should not mess
-too much with this one.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pen_inter} \NC number \NC local interline penalty (from \lpr {localinterlinepenalty}) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pen_broken} \NC number \NC local broken penalty (from \lpr {localbrokenpenalty}) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction of this par. see~\in [dirnodes] \NC \NR
-\NC \type{box_left} \NC node \NC the \lpr {localleftbox} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{box_left_width} \NC number \NC width of the \lpr {localleftbox} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{box_right} \NC node \NC the \lpr {localrightbox} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{box_right_width} \NC number \NC width of the \lpr {localrightbox} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {box_left} or \type {box_right}
-field unless you are sure its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an
-error may result.
-
-\subsection[dirnodes]{\nod {dir} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+direction}
-\topicindex {directions}
-
-Direction nodes mark parts of the running text that need a change of direction and \
-the \prm {textdir} command generates them.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction (but see below) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{level} \NC number \NC nesting level of this direction whatsit \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Direction specifiers are three|-|letter combinations of \type {T}, \type {B},
-\type {R}, and \type {L}. These are built up out of three separate items:
-
-\startitemize[packed]
-\startitem
- the first is the direction of the \quote{top} of paragraphs
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- the second is the direction of the \quote{start} of lines
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- the third is the direction of the \quote{top} of glyphs
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-However, only four combinations are accepted: \type {TLT}, \type {TRT}, \type
-{RTT}, and \type {LTL}. Inside actual \nod {dir} nodes, the representation of
-\nod {dir} is not a three|-|letter but a combination of numbers. When printed the
-direction is indicated by a \type {+} or \type {-}, indicating whether the value
-is pushed or popped from the direction stack.
-
-\subsection{\nod {marginkern} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+paragraphs}
-\topicindex {paragraphs}
-\topicindex {protrusion}
-
-Margin kerns result from protrusion.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{marginkern} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the advance of the kern \NC \NR
-\NC \type{glyph} \NC node \NC the glyph to be used \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Math noads}]
-
-\topicindex {nodes+math}
-\topicindex {math+nodes}
-
-These are the so||called \quote {noad}s and the nodes that are specifically
-associated with math processing. Most of these nodes contain subnodes so that the
-list of possible fields is actually quite small. First, the subnodes:
-
-\subsection{Math kernel subnodes}
-
-Many object fields in math mode are either simple characters in a specific family
-or math lists or node lists. There are four associated subnodes that represent
-these cases (in the following node descriptions these are indicated by the word
-\type {<kernel>}).
-
-The \type {next} and \type {prev} fields for these subnodes are unused.
-
-\subsection{\nod {math_char} and \nod {math_text_char} subnodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{char} \NC number \NC the character index \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fam} \NC number \NC the family number \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \nod {math_char} is the simplest subnode field, it contains the character
-and family for a single glyph object. The \nod {math_text_char} is a special
-case that you will not normally encounter, it arises temporarily during math list
-conversion (its sole function is to suppress a following italic correction).
-
-\subsection{\nod {sub_box} and \nod {sub_mlist} subnodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC list of nodes \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-These two subnode types are used for subsidiary list items. For \nod {sub_box},
-the \type {head} points to a \quote {normal} vbox or hbox. For \nod {sub_mlist},
-the \type {head} points to a math list that is yet to be converted.
-
-A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
-its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error is triggered.
-
-\subsection{\nod {delim} subnodes}
-
-There is a fifth subnode type that is used exclusively for delimiter fields. As
-before, the \type {next} and \type {prev} fields are unused.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{small_char} \NC number \NC character index of base character \NC \NR
-\NC \type{small_fam} \NC number \NC family number of base character \NC \NR
-\NC \type{large_char} \NC number \NC character index of next larger character \NC \NR
-\NC \type{large_fam} \NC number \NC family number of next larger character \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The fields \type {large_char} and \type {large_fam} can be zero, in that case the
-font that is set for the \type {small_fam} is expected to provide the large
-version as an extension to the \type {small_char}.
-
-\subsection{Math core nodes}
-
-First, there are the objects (the \TEX book calls them \quote {atoms}) that are
-associated with the simple math objects: ord, op, bin, rel, open, close, punct,
-inner, over, under, vcent. These all have the same fields, and they are combined
-into a single node type with separate subtypes for differentiation.
-
-Some noads have an option field. The values in this bitset are common:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|r|]
-\DB meaning \BC bits \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC set \NC \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC internal \NC \type{0x00} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC internal \NC \type{0x01} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC axis \NC \type{0x02} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC no axis \NC \type{0x04} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC exact \NC \type{0x10} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC left \NC \type{0x11} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC middle \NC \type{0x12} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC right \NC \type{0x14} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC no sub script \NC \type{0x21} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC no super script \NC \type{0x22} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\NC no script \NC \type{0x23} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{simple \nod {noad} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{noad} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nucleus} \NC kernel node \NC base \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sub} \NC kernel node \NC subscript \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sup} \NC kernel node \NC superscript \NC \NR
-\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\nod {accent} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{accent} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nucleus} \NC kernel node \NC base \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sub} \NC kernel node \NC subscript \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sup} \NC kernel node \NC superscript \NC \NR
-\NC \type{accent} \NC kernel node \NC top accent \NC \NR
-\NC \type{bot_accent} \NC kernel node \NC bottom accent \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fraction} \NC number \NC larger step criterium (divided by 1000) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\nod {style} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{style} \NC string \NC contains the style \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-There are eight possibilities for the string value: one of \type {display},
-\type {text}, \type {script}, or \type {scriptscript}. Each of these can have
-be prefixed by \type {cramped}.
-
-\subsection{\nod {choice} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{display} \NC node \NC list of display size alternatives \NC \NR
-\NC \type{text} \NC node \NC list of text size alternatives \NC \NR
-\NC \type{script} \NC node \NC list of scriptsize alternatives \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scriptscript} \NC node \NC list of scriptscriptsize alternatives \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Warning: never assign a node list to the \type {display}, \type {text}, \type
-{script}, or \type {scriptscript} field unless you are sure its internal link
-structure is correct, otherwise an error can occur.
-
-\subsection{\nod {radical} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{radical} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nucleus} \NC kernel node \NC base \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sub} \NC kernel node \NC subscript \NC \NR
-\NC \type{sup} \NC kernel node \NC superscript \NC \NR
-\NC \type{left} \NC delimiter node \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{degree} \NC kernel node \NC only set by \lpr {Uroot} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC required width \NC \NR
-\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Warning: never assign a node list to the \type {nucleus}, \type {sub}, \type
-{sup}, \type {left}, or \type {degree} field unless you are sure its internal
-link structure is correct, otherwise an error can be triggered.
-
-\subsection{\nod {fraction} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC (optional) width of the fraction \NC \NR
-\NC \type{num} \NC kernel node \NC numerator \NC \NR
-\NC \type{denom} \NC kernel node \NC denominator \NC \NR
-\NC \type{left} \NC delimiter node \NC left side symbol \NC \NR
-\NC \type{right} \NC delimiter node \NC right side symbol \NC \NR
-\NC \type{middle} \NC delimiter node \NC middle symbol \NC \NR
-\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Warning: never assign a node list to the \type {num}, or \type {denom} field
-unless you are sure its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error
-can result.
-
-\subsection{\nod {fence} nodes}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{fence} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{delim} \NC delimiter node \NC delimiter specification \NC \NR
-\NC \type{italic} \NC number \NC italic correction \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC required height \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC required depth \NC \NR
-\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
-\NC \type{class} \NC number \NC spacing related class \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Warning: some of these fields are used by the renderer and might get adapted in
-the process.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Front|-|end whatsits}]
-
-Whatsit nodes come in many subtypes that you can ask for them by running
-\type {node.whatsits}:
-\startluacode
- for id, name in table.sortedpairs(node.whatsits()) do
- context.type(name)
- context(" (%s), ",id)
- end
- context.removeunwantedspaces()
- context.removepunctuation()
-\stopluacode
-. % period
-
-Some of them are generic and independent of the output mode and others are
-specific to the chosen backend: \DVI\ or \PDF. Here we discuss the generic
-font|-|end nodes nodes.
-
-\subsection{\whs {open}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stream} \NC number \NC \TEX's stream id number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC file name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ext} \NC string \NC file extension \NC \NR
-\NC \type{area} \NC string \NC file area (this may become obsolete) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {write}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stream} \NC number \NC \TEX's stream id number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC table \NC a table representing the token list to be written \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {close}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stream} \NC number \NC \TEX's stream id number \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {user_defined}}
-
-User|-|defined whatsit nodes can only be created and handled from \LUA\ code. In
-effect, they are an extension to the extension mechanism. The \LUATEX\ engine
-will simply step over such whatsits without ever looking at the contents.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{user_id} \NC number \NC id number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{type} \NC number \NC type of the value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{value} \NC number \NC a \LUA\ number \NC \NR
-\NC \NC node \NC a node list \NC \NR
-\NC \NC string \NC a \LUA\ string \NC \NR
-\NC \NC table \NC a \LUA\ table \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {type} can have one of six distinct values. The number is the \ASCII\
-value if the first character of the type name (so you can use string.byte("l")
-instead of \type {108}).
-
-\starttabulate[|r|c|p|]
-\DB value \BC meaning \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 97 \NC a \NC list of attributes (a node list) \NC \NR
-\NC 100 \NC d \NC a \LUA\ number \NC \NR
-\NC 108 \NC l \NC a \LUA\ value (table, number, boolean, etc) \NC \NR
-\NC 110 \NC n \NC a node list \NC \NR
-\NC 115 \NC s \NC a \LUA\ string \NC \NR
-\NC 116 \NC t \NC a \LUA\ token list in \LUA\ table form (a list of triplets) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {save_pos}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {late_lua}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC string or function \NC the to be written information stored as \LUA\ value \NC \NR
-\NC \type{token} \NC string \NC the to be written information stored as token list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC the name to use for \LUA\ error reporting \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The difference between \type {data} and \type {string} is that on assignment, the
-\type {data} field is converted to a token list, cf.\ use as \lpr {latelua}. The
-\type {string} version is treated as a literal string.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={\DVI\ backend whatsits}]
-
-\subsection{\whs {special}}
-
-There is only one \DVI\ backend whatsit, and it just flushes its content to the
-output file.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the \prm {special} information \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={\PDF\ backend whatsits}]
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_literal}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mode} \NC number \NC the \quote {mode} setting of this literal \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the to be written information stored as \LUA\ string \NC \NR
-\NC \type{token} \NC string \NC the to be written information stored as token list \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Possible mode values are:
-
-\starttabulate[|c|p|]
-\DB value \BC keyword \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC \type{origin} \NC \NR
-\NC 1 \NC \type{page} \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC \type{direct} \NC \NR
-\NC 3 \NC \type{raw} \NC \NR
-\NC 4 \NC \type{text} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The higher the number, the less checking and the more you can run into trouble.
-Especially the \type {raw} variant can produce bad \PDF\ so you can best check
-what you generate.
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_refobj}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the referenced \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_annot}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the referenced \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the annotation data \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_start_link}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the referenced \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{link_attr} \NC table \NC the link attribute token list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{action} \NC node \NC the action to perform \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_end_link}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_dest}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC is the \type {dest_id} a string value? \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dest_id} \NC number \NC the destination id \NC \NR
-\NC \NC string \NC the destination name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dest_type} \NC number \NC type of destination \NC \NR
-\NC \type{xyz_zoom} \NC number \NC the zoom factor (times 1000) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_action}}
-
-These are a special kind of items that only appear inside \PDF\ start link
-objects.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{action_type} \NC number \NC the kind of action involved \NC \NR
-\NC \type{action_id} \NC number or string \NC token list reference or string \NC \NR
-\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC the index of the destination \NC \NR
-\NC \type{file} \NC string \NC the target filename \NC \NR
-\NC \type{new_window} \NC number \NC the window state of the target \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the name of the destination \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Valid action types are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC \type{page} \NC \NR
-\NC 1 \NC \type{goto} \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC \type{thread} \NC \NR
-\NC 3 \NC \type{user} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Valid window types are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|]
-\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC 0 \NC \type{notset} \NC \NR
-\NC 1 \NC \type{new} \NC \NR
-\NC 2 \NC \type{nonew} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_thread}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC is \type {tread_id} a string value? \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tread_id} \NC number \NC the thread id \NC \NR
-\NC \NC string \NC the thread name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{thread_attr} \NC number \NC extra thread information \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_start_thread}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC is \type {tread_id} a string value? \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tread_id} \NC number \NC the thread id \NC \NR
-\NC \NC string \NC the thread name \NC \NR
-\NC \type{thread_attr} \NC number \NC extra thread information \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_end_thread}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_colorstack}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stack} \NC number \NC colorstack id number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{command} \NC number \NC command to execute \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC data \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_setmatrix}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC data \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_save}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\whs {pdf_restore}}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {node} library}][library=node]
-
-\subsection {Introduction}
-
-The \type {node} library contains functions that facilitate dealing with (lists
-of) nodes and their values. They allow you to create, alter, copy, delete, and
-insert \LUATEX\ node objects, the core objects within the typesetter.
-
-\LUATEX\ nodes are represented in \LUA\ as userdata with the metadata type
-\type {luatex.node}. The various parts within a node can be accessed using
-named fields.
-
-Each node has at least the three fields \type {next}, \type {id}, and \type {subtype}:
-
-\startitemize[intro]
-
-\startitem
- The \type {next} field returns the userdata object for the next node in a
- linked list of nodes, or \type {nil}, if there is no next node.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \type {id} indicates \TEX's \quote{node type}. The field \type {id} has a
- numeric value for efficiency reasons, but some of the library functions also
- accept a string value instead of \type {id}.
-\stopitem
-
-\startitem
- The \type {subtype} is another number. It often gives further information
- about a node of a particular \type {id}, but it is most important when
- dealing with \quote {whatsits}, because they are differentiated solely based
- on their \type {subtype}.
-\stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-The other available fields depend on the \type {id} (and for \quote {whatsits},
-the \type {subtype}) of the node.
-
-Support for \nod {unset} (alignment) nodes is partial: they can be queried and
-modified from \LUA\ code, but not created.
-
-Nodes can be compared to each other, but: you are actually comparing indices into
-the node memory. This means that equality tests can only be trusted under very
-limited conditions. It will not work correctly in any situation where one of the
-two nodes has been freed and|/|or reallocated: in that case, there will be false
-positives.
-
-At the moment, memory management of nodes should still be done explicitly by the
-user. Nodes are not \quote {seen} by the \LUA\ garbage collector, so you have to
-call the node freeing functions yourself when you are no longer in need of a node
-(list). Nodes form linked lists without reference counting, so you have to be
-careful that when control returns back to \LUATEX\ itself, you have not deleted
-nodes that are still referenced from a \type {next} pointer elsewhere, and that
-you did not create nodes that are referenced more than once. Normally the setters
-and getters handle this for you.
-
-There are statistics available with regards to the allocated node memory, which
-can be handy for tracing.
-
-\subsection{\type {is_node}}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+functions}
-
-\libindex {is_node}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean|integer> t =
- node.is_node(<any> item)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns a number (the internal index of the node) if the argument
-is a userdata object of type \type {<node>} and false when no node is passed.
-
-\subsection{\type {types} and \type {whatsits}}
-
-\libindex {types}
-\libindex {whatsits}
-
-This function returns an array that maps node id numbers to node type strings,
-providing an overview of the possible top|-|level \type {id} types.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> t =
- node.types()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\TEX's \quote {whatsits} all have the same \type {id}. The various subtypes are
-defined by their \type {subtype} fields. The function is much like \type {types},
-except that it provides an array of \type {subtype} mappings.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> t =
- node.whatsits()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {id}}
-
-\libindex{id}
-
-This converts a single type name to its internal numeric representation.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> id =
- node.id(<string> type)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {type} and \type {subtype}}
-
-\libindex {type}
-\libindex {subtype}
-
-In the argument is a number, then the next function converts an internal numeric
-representation to an external string representation. Otherwise, it will return
-the string \type {node} if the object represents a node, and \type {nil}
-otherwise.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> type =
- node.type(<any> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This next one converts a single whatsit name to its internal numeric
-representation (\type {subtype}).
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> subtype =
- node.subtype(<string> type)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {fields}}
-
-\libindex {fields}
-
-This function returns an array of valid field names for a particular type of
-node. If you want to get the valid fields for a \quote {whatsit}, you have to
-supply the second argument also. In other cases, any given second argument will
-be silently ignored.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> t =
- node.fields(<number> id)
-<table> t =
- node.fields(<number> id, <number> subtype)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The function accepts string \type {id} and \type {subtype} values as well.
-
-\subsection{\type {has_field}}
-
-\libindex {has_field}
-
-This function returns a boolean that is only true if \type {n} is
-actually a node, and it has the field.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean> t =
- node.has_field(<node> n, <string> field)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {new}}
-
-\libindex{new}
-
-The \type {new} function creates a new node. All its fields are initialized to
-either zero or \type {nil} except for \type {id} and \type {subtype}. Instead of
-numbers you can also use strings (names). If you create a new \nod {whatsit} node
-the second argument is required. As with all node functions, this function
-creates a node at the \TEX\ level.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n =
- node.new(<number> id)
-<node> n =
- node.new(<number> id, <number> subtype)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {free}, \type {flush_node} and \type {flush_list}}
-
-\libindex{free}
-\libindex{flush_node}
-\libindex{flush_list}
-
-The next one the node \type {n} from \TEX's memory. Be careful: no checks are
-done on whether this node is still pointed to from a register or some \type
-{next} field: it is up to you to make sure that the internal data structures
-remain correct.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> next =
- node.free(<node> n)
-flush_node(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type {free} function returns the next field of the freed node, while the
-\type {flush_node} alternative returns nothing.
-
-A list starting with node \type {n} can be flushed from \TEX's memory too. Be
-careful: no checks are done on whether any of these nodes is still pointed to
-from a register or some \type {next} field: it is up to you to make sure that the
-internal data structures remain correct.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.flush_list(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {copy} and \type {copy_list}}
-
-\libindex{copy}
-\libindex{copy_list}
-
-This creates a deep copy of node \type {n}, including all nested lists as in the case
-of a hlist or vlist node. Only the \type {next} field is not copied.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> m =
- node.copy(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-A deep copy of the node list that starts at \type {n} can be created too. If
-\type {m} is also given, the copy stops just before node \type {m}.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> m =
- node.copy_list(<node> n)
-<node> m =
- node.copy_list(<node> n, <node> m)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Note that you cannot copy attribute lists this way. However, there is normally no
-need to copy attribute lists as when you do assignments to the \type {attr} field
-or make changes to specific attributes, the needed copying and freeing takes
-place automatically.
-
-\subsection{\type {prev} and \type{next}}
-
-\libindex{prev}
-\libindex{next}
-
-These returns the node preceding or following the given node, or \type {nil} if
-there is no such node.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> m =
- node.next(<node> n)
-<node> m =
- node.prev(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {current_attr}}
-
-\libindex{current_attr}
-
-This returns the currently active list of attributes, if there is one.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> m =
- node.current_attr()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The intended usage of \type {current_attr} is as follows:
-
-\starttyping
-local x1 = node.new("glyph")
-x1.attr = node.current_attr()
-local x2 = node.new("glyph")
-x2.attr = node.current_attr()
-\stoptyping
-
-or:
-
-\starttyping
-local x1 = node.new("glyph")
-local x2 = node.new("glyph")
-local ca = node.current_attr()
-x1.attr = ca
-x2.attr = ca
-\stoptyping
-
-The attribute lists are ref counted and the assignment takes care of incrementing
-the refcount. You cannot expect the value \type {ca} to be valid any more when
-you assign attributes (using \type {tex.setattribute}) or when control has been
-passed back to \TEX.
-
-Note: this function is somewhat experimental, and it returns the {\it actual}
-attribute list, not a copy thereof. Therefore, changing any of the attributes in
-the list will change these values for all nodes that have the current attribute
-list assigned to them.
-
-\subsection{\type {hpack}}
-
-\libindex {hpack}
-
-This function creates a new hlist by packaging the list that begins at node \type
-{n} into a horizontal box. With only a single argument, this box is created using
-the natural width of its components. In the three argument form, \type {info}
-must be either \type {additional} or \type {exactly}, and \type {w} is the
-additional (\type {\hbox spread}) or exact (\type {\hbox to}) width to be used.
-The second return value is the badness of the generated box.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> h, <number> b =
- node.hpack(<node> n)
-<node> h, <number> b =
- node.hpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info)
-<node> h, <number> b =
- node.hpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info, <string> dir)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Caveat: there can be unexpected side|-|effects to this function, like updating
-some of the \prm {marks} and \type {\inserts}. Also note that the content of
-\type {h} is the original node list \type {n}: if you call \type {node.free(h)}
-you will also free the node list itself, unless you explicitly set the \type
-{list} field to \type {nil} beforehand. And in a similar way, calling \type
-{node.free(n)} will invalidate \type {h} as well!
-
-\subsection{\type {vpack}}
-
-\libindex {vpack}
-
-This function creates a new vlist by packaging the list that begins at node \type
-{n} into a vertical box. With only a single argument, this box is created using
-the natural height of its components. In the three argument form, \type {info}
-must be either \type {additional} or \type {exactly}, and \type {w} is the
-additional (\type {\vbox spread}) or exact (\type {\vbox to}) height to be used.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> h, <number> b =
- node.vpack(<node> n)
-<node> h, <number> b =
- node.vpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info)
-<node> h, <number> b =
- node.vpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info, <string> dir)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The second return value is the badness of the generated box. See the description
-of \type {hpack} for a few memory allocation caveats.
-
-\subsection{\type {prepend_prevdepth}}
-
-\libindex {prepend_prevdepth}
-
-This function is somewhat special in the sense that it is an experimental helper
-that adds the interlinespace to a line keeping the baselineskip and lineskip into
-account.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n, <number> delta =
- node.prepend_prevdepth(<node> n,<number> prevdepth)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {dimensions} and \type {rangedimensions}}
-
-\libindex{dimensions}
-\libindex{rangedimensions}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<node> n)
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<node> n, <string> dir)
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<node> n, <node> t)
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<node> n, <node> t, <string> dir)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function calculates the natural in|-|line dimensions of the node list starting
-at node \type {n} and terminating just before node \type {t} (or the end of the
-list, if there is no second argument). The return values are scaled points. An
-alternative format that starts with glue parameters as the first three arguments
-is also possible:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
- <node> n)
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
- <node> n, <string> dir)
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
- <node> n, <node> t)
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
- <node> n, <node> t, <string> dir)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This calling method takes glue settings into account and is especially useful for
-finding the actual width of a sublist of nodes that are already boxed, for
-example in code like this, which prints the width of the space in between the
-\type {a} and \type {b} as it would be if \type {\box0} was used as-is:
-
-\starttyping
-\setbox0 = \hbox to 20pt {a b}
-
-\directlua{print (node.dimensions(
- tex.box[0].glue_set,
- tex.box[0].glue_sign,
- tex.box[0].glue_order,
- tex.box[0].head.next,
- node.tail(tex.box[0].head)
-)) }
-\stoptyping
-
-You need to keep in mind that this is one of the few places in \TEX\ where floats
-are used, which means that you can get small differences in rounding when you
-compare the width reported by \type {hpack} with \type {dimensions}.
-
-The second alternative saves a few lookups and can be more convenient in some
-cases:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.rangedimensions(<node> parent, <node> first)
-<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
- node.rangedimensions(<node> parent, <node> first, <node> last)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {mlist_to_hlist}}
-
-\libindex {mlist_to_hlist}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> h =
- node.mlist_to_hlist(<node> n, <string> display_type, <boolean> penalties)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This runs the internal mlist to hlist conversion, converting the math list in
-\type {n} into the horizontal list \type {h}. The interface is exactly the same
-as for the callback \cbk {mlist_to_hlist}.
-
-\subsection{\type {slide}}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> m =
- node.slide(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Returns the last node of the node list that starts at \type {n}. As a
-side|-|effect, it also creates a reverse chain of \type {prev} pointers between
-nodes.
-
-\subsection{\type {tail}}
-
-\libindex {tail}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> m =
- node.tail(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Returns the last node of the node list that starts at \type {n}.
-
-\subsection{\type {length} and type {count}}
-
-\libindex {length}
-\libindex {count}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- node.length(<node> n)
-<number> i =
- node.length(<node> n, <node> m)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Returns the number of nodes contained in the node list that starts at \type {n}.
-If \type {m} is also supplied it stops at \type {m} instead of at the end of the
-list. The node \type {m} is not counted.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> i =
- node.count(<number> id, <node> n)
-<number> i =
- node.count(<number> id, <node> n, <node> m)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Returns the number of nodes contained in the node list that starts at \type {n}
-that have a matching \type {id} field. If \type {m} is also supplied, counting
-stops at \type {m} instead of at the end of the list. The node \type {m} is not
-counted. This function also accept string \type {id}'s.
-
-\subsection{\type {is_char} and \type {is_glyph}}
-
-\libindex {is_char}
-\libindex {is_glyph}
-
-The subtype of a glyph node signals if the glyph is already turned into a character reference
-or not.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean> b =
- node.is_char(<node> n)
-<boolean> b =
- node.is_glyph(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {traverse}}
-
-\libindex {traverse}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> t, id, subtype =
- node.traverse(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This is a \LUA\ iterator that loops over the node list that starts at \type {n}.
-Typically code looks like this:
-
-\starttyping
-for n in node.traverse(head) do
- ...
-end
-\stoptyping
-
-is functionally equivalent to:
-
-\starttyping
-do
- local n
- local function f (head,var)
- local t
- if var == nil then
- t = head
- else
- t = var.next
- end
- return t
- end
- while true do
- n = f (head, n)
- if n == nil then break end
- ...
- end
-end
-\stoptyping
-
-It should be clear from the definition of the function \type {f} that even though
-it is possible to add or remove nodes from the node list while traversing, you
-have to take great care to make sure all the \type {next} (and \type {prev})
-pointers remain valid.
-
-If the above is unclear to you, see the section \quote {For Statement} in the
-\LUA\ Reference Manual.
-
-\subsection{\type {traverse_id}}
-
-\libindex {traverse_id}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> t, subtype =
- node.traverse_id(<number> id, <node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This is an iterator that loops over all the nodes in the list that starts at
-\type {n} that have a matching \type {id} field.
-
-See the previous section for details. The change is in the local function \type
-{f}, which now does an extra while loop checking against the upvalue \type {id}:
-
-\starttyping
- local function f(head,var)
- local t
- if var == nil then
- t = head
- else
- t = var.next
- end
- while not t.id == id do
- t = t.next
- end
- return t
- end
-\stoptyping
-
-\subsection{\type {traverse_char} and \type {traverse_glyph}}
-
-\libindex {traverse_char}
-\libindex {traverse_glyph}
-
-The \type{traverse_char} iterator loops over the \nod {glyph} nodes in a list.
-Only nodes with a subtype less than 256 are seen.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n, font, char =
- node.traverse_char(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The \type{traverse_glyph} iterator loops over a list and returns the list and
-filters all glyphs:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n, font, char =
- node.traverse_glyph(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {traverse_list}}
-
-\libindex {traverse_list}
-
-This iterator loops over the \nod {hlist} and \nod {vlist} nodes in a list.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n, id, subtype, list =
- node.traverse_list(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The four return values can save some time compared to fetching these fields but
-in practice you seldom need them all. So consider it a (side effect of
-experimental) convenience.
-
-\subsection{\type {has_glyph}}
-
-\libindex {has_glyph}
-
-This function returns the first glyph or disc node in the given list:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n =
- node.has_glyph(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {end_of_math}}
-
-\libindex {end_of_math}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> t =
- node.end_of_math(<node> start)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Looks for and returns the next \type {math_node} following the \type {start}. If
-the given node is a math end node this helper returns that node, else it follows
-the list and returns the next math endnote. If no such node is found nil is
-returned.
-
-\subsection{\type {remove}}
-
-\libindex {remove}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> head, current =
- node.remove(<node> head, <node> current)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function removes the node \type {current} from the list following \type
-{head}. It is your responsibility to make sure it is really part of that list.
-The return values are the new \type {head} and \type {current} nodes. The
-returned \type {current} is the node following the \type {current} in the calling
-argument, and is only passed back as a convenience (or \type {nil}, if there is
-no such node). The returned \type {head} is more important, because if the
-function is called with \type {current} equal to \type {head}, it will be
-changed.
-
-\subsection{\type {insert_before}}
-
-\libindex {insert_before}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> head, new =
- node.insert_before(<node> head, <node> current, <node> new)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function inserts the node \type {new} before \type {current} into the list
-following \type {head}. It is your responsibility to make sure that \type
-{current} is really part of that list. The return values are the (potentially
-mutated) \type {head} and the node \type {new}, set up to be part of the list
-(with correct \type {next} field). If \type {head} is initially \type {nil}, it
-will become \type {new}.
-
-\subsection{\type {insert_after}}
-
-\libindex {insert_after}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> head, new =
- node.insert_after(<node> head, <node> current, <node> new)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function inserts the node \type {new} after \type {current} into the list
-following \type {head}. It is your responsibility to make sure that \type
-{current} is really part of that list. The return values are the \type {head} and
-the node \type {new}, set up to be part of the list (with correct \type {next}
-field). If \type {head} is initially \type {nil}, it will become \type {new}.
-
-\subsection{\type {first_glyph}}
-
-\libindex {first_glyph}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n =
- node.first_glyph(<node> n)
-<node> n =
- node.first_glyph(<node> n, <node> m)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Returns the first node in the list starting at \type {n} that is a glyph node
-with a subtype indicating it is a glyph, or \type {nil}. If \type {m} is given,
-processing stops at (but including) that node, otherwise processing stops at the
-end of the list.
-
-\subsection{\type {ligaturing}}
-
-\libindex {ligaturing}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
- node.ligaturing(<node> n)
-<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
- node.ligaturing(<node> n, <node> m)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Apply \TEX-style ligaturing to the specified nodelist. The tail node \type {m} is
-optional. The two returned nodes \type {h} and \type {t} are the new head and
-tail (both \type {n} and \type {m} can change into a new ligature).
-
-\subsection{\type {kerning}}
-
-\libindex {kerning}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
- node.kerning(<node> n)
-<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
- node.kerning(<node> n, <node> m)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Apply \TEX|-|style kerning to the specified node list. The tail node \type {m} is
-optional. The two returned nodes \type {h} and \type {t} are the head and tail
-(either one of these can be an inserted kern node, because special kernings with
-word boundaries are possible).
-
-\subsection{\type {unprotect_glyph[s]}}
-
-\libindex {unprotect_glyphs}
-\libindex {unprotect_glyph}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.unprotect_glyph(<node> n)
-node.unprotect_glyphs(<node> n,[<node> n])
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Subtracts 256 from all glyph node subtypes. This and the next function are
-helpers to convert from \type {characters} to \type {glyphs} during node
-processing. The second argument is optional and indicates the end of a range.
-
-\subsection{\type {protect_glyph[s]}}
-
-\libindex {protect_glyphs}
-\libindex {protect_glyph}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.protect_glyph(<node> n)
-node.protect_glyphs(<node> n,[<node> n])
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Adds 256 to all glyph node subtypes in the node list starting at \type {n},
-except that if the value is 1, it adds only 255. The special handling of 1 means
-that \type {characters} will become \type {glyphs} after subtraction of 256. A
-single character can be marked by the singular call. The second argument is
-optional and indicates the end of a range.
-
-\subsection{\type {last_node}}
-
-\libindex {last_node}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> n =
- node.last_node()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function pops the last node from \TEX's \quote{current list}. It returns
-that node, or \type {nil} if the current list is empty.
-
-\subsection{\type {write}}
-
-\libindex {write}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.write(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function that will append a node list to \TEX's \quote {current list}. The
-node list is not deep|-|copied! There is no error checking either! You mignt need
-to enforce horizontal mode in order for this to work as expected.
-
-\subsection{\type {protrusion_skippable}}
-
-\libindex {protrusion_skippable}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean> skippable =
- node.protrusion_skippable(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Returns \type {true} if, for the purpose of line boundary discovery when
-character protrusion is active, this node can be skipped.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Glue handling}][library=node]
-
-\subsection{\type {setglue}}
-
-\libindex {setglue}
-
-You can set the properties of a glue in one go. If you pass no values, the glue
-will become a zero glue.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.setglue(<node> n)
-node.setglue(<node> n,width,stretch,shrink,stretch_order,shrink_order)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-When you pass values, only arguments that are numbers are assigned so
-
-\starttyping
-node.setglue(n,655360,false,65536)
-\stoptyping
-
-will only adapt the width and shrink.
-
-When a list node is passed, you set the glue, order and sign instead.
-
-\subsection{\type {getglue}}
-
-\libindex {getglue}
-
-The next call will return 5 values or nothing when no glue is passed.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<integer> width, <integer> stretch, <integer> shrink, <integer> stretch_order,
- <integer> shrink_order = node.getglue(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-When the second argument is false, only the width is returned (this is consistent
-with \type {tex.get}).
-
-When a list node is passed, you get back the glue that is set, the order of that
-glue and the sign.
-
-\subsection{\type {is_zero_glue}}
-
-\libindex {is_zero_glue}
-
-This function returns \type {true} when the width, stretch and shrink properties
-are zero.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<boolean> isglue =
- node.is_zero_glue(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Attribute handling}][library=node]
-
-\subsection{Attributes}
-
-\topicindex {attributes}
-
-The newly introduced attribute registers are non|-|trivial, because the value
-that is attached to a node is essentially a sparse array of key|-|value pairs. It
-is generally easiest to deal with attribute lists and attributes by using the
-dedicated functions in the \type {node} library, but for completeness, here is
-the low|-|level interface.
-
-Attributes appear as linked list of userdata objects in the \type {attr} field of
-individual nodes. They can be handled individually, but it is much safer and more
-efficient to use the dedicated functions associated with them.
-
-\subsection{\nod {attribute_list} nodes}
-
-\topicindex {nodes+attributes}
-
-An \nod {attribute_list} item is used as a head pointer for a list of attribute
-items. It has only one user-visible field:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{next} \NC node \NC pointer to the first attribute \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\subsection{\nod {attr} nodes}
-
-A normal node's attribute field will point to an item of type \nod
-{attribute_list}, and the \type {next} field in that item will point to the first
-defined \quote {attribute} item, whose \type {next} will point to the second
-\quote {attribute} item, etc.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{next} \NC node \NC pointer to the next attribute \NC \NR
-\NC \type{number} \NC number \NC the attribute type id \NC \NR
-\NC \type{value} \NC number \NC the attribute value \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-As mentioned it's better to use the official helpers rather than edit these
-fields directly. For instance the \type {prev} field is used for other purposes
-and there is no double linked list.
-
-\subsection{\type {has_attribute}}
-
-\libindex {has_attribute}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> v =
- node.has_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
-<number> v =
- node.has_attribute(<node> n, <number> id, <number> val)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Tests if a node has the attribute with number \type {id} set. If \type {val} is
-also supplied, also tests if the value matches \type {val}. It returns the value,
-or, if no match is found, \type {nil}.
-
-\subsection{\type {get_attribute}}
-
-\libindex {get_attribute}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> v =
- node.get_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Tests if a node has an attribute with number \type {id} set. It returns the
-value, or, if no match is found, \type {nil}. If no \type {id} is given then the
-zero attributes is assumed.
-
-\subsection{\type {find_attribute}}
-
-\libindex {find_attribute}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> v, <node> n =
- node.find_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Finds the first node that has attribute with number \type {id} set. It returns
-the value and the node if there is a match and otherwise nothing.
-
-\subsection{\type {set_attribute}}
-
-\libindex {set_attribute}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.set_attribute(<node> n, <number> id, <number> val)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Sets the attribute with number \type {id} to the value \type {val}. Duplicate
-assignments are ignored.
-
-\subsection{\type {unset_attribute}}
-
-\libindex {unset_attribute}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> v =
- node.unset_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
-<number> v =
- node.unset_attribute(<node> n, <number> id, <number> val)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Unsets the attribute with number \type {id}. If \type {val} is also supplied, it
-will only perform this operation if the value matches \type {val}. Missing
-attributes or attribute|-|value pairs are ignored.
-
-If the attribute was actually deleted, returns its old value. Otherwise, returns
-\type {nil}.
-
-\subsection{\type {slide}}
-
-\libindex {slide}
-
-This helper makes sure that the node lists is double linked and returns the found
-tail node.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> tail =
- node.slide(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-After some callbacks automatic sliding takes place. This feature can be turned
-off with \type {node.fix_node_lists(false)} but you better make sure then that
-you don't mess up lists. In most cases \TEX\ itself only uses \type {next}
-pointers but your other callbacks might expect proper \type {prev} pointers too.
-Future versions of \LUATEX\ can add more checking but this will not influence
-usage.
-
-\subsection{\type {check_discretionary}, \type {check_discretionaries}}
-
-\libindex{check_discretionary}
-\libindex{check_discretionaries}
-
-When you fool around with disc nodes you need to be aware of the fact that they
-have a special internal data structure. As long as you reassign the fields when
-you have extended the lists it's ok because then the tail pointers get updated,
-but when you add to list without reassigning you might end up in trouble when
-the linebreak routine kicks in. You can call this function to check the list for
-issues with disc nodes.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.check_discretionary(<node> n)
-node.check_discretionaries(<node> head)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The plural variant runs over all disc nodes in a list, the singular variant
-checks one node only (it also checks if the node is a disc node).
-
-\subsection{\type {flatten_discretionaries}}
-
-\libindex {flatten_discretionaries}
-
-This function will remove the discretionaries in the list and inject the replace
-field when set.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<node> head, count = node.flatten_discretionaries(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsection{\type {family_font}}
-
-\libindex {family_font}
-
-When you pass a proper family identifier the next helper will return the font
-currently associated with it. You can normally also access the font with the
-normal font field or getter because it will resolve the family automatically for
-noads.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<integer> id =
- node.family_font(<integer> fam)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Two access models}][library=node]
-
-\topicindex{nodes+direct}
-\topicindex{direct nodes}
-
-\libindex {todirect}
-\libindex {tonode}
-\libindex {tostring}
-
-Deep down in \TEX\ a node has a number which is a numeric entry in a memory
-table. In fact, this model, where \TEX\ manages memory is real fast and one of
-the reasons why plugging in callbacks that operate on nodes is quite fast too.
-Each node gets a number that is in fact an index in the memory table and that
-number often is reported when you print node related information. You go from
-userdata nodes and there numeric references and back with:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<integer> d = node.todirect(<node> n))
-<node> n = node.tonode(<integer> d))
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The userdata model is rather robust as it is a virtual interface with some
-additional checking while the more direct access which uses the node numbers
-directly. However, even with userdata you can get into troubles when you free
-nodes that are no longer allocated or mess up lists. if you apply \type
-{tostring} to a node you see its internal (direct) number and id.
-
-The first model provides key based access while the second always accesses fields
-via functions:
-
-\starttyping
-nodeobject.char
-getfield(nodenumber,"char")
-\stoptyping
-
-If you use the direct model, even if you know that you deal with numbers, you
-should not depend on that property but treat it as an abstraction just like
-traditional nodes. In fact, the fact that we use a simple basic datatype has the
-penalty that less checking can be done, but less checking is also the reason why
-it's somewhat faster. An important aspect is that one cannot mix both methods,
-but you can cast both models. So, multiplying a node number makes no sense.
-
-So our advice is: use the indexed (table) approach when possible and investigate
-the direct one when speed might be a real issue. For that reason \LUATEX\ also
-provide the \type {get*} and \type {set*} functions in the top level node
-namespace. There is a limited set of getters. When implementing this direct
-approach the regular index by key variant was also optimized, so direct access
-only makes sense when nodes are accessed millions of times (which happens in some
-font processing for instance).
-
-We're talking mostly of getters because setters are less important. Documents
-have not that many content related nodes and setting many thousands of properties
-is hardly a burden contrary to millions of consultations.
-
-Normally you will access nodes like this:
-
-\starttyping
-local next = current.next
-if next then
- -- do something
-end
-\stoptyping
-
-Here \type {next} is not a real field, but a virtual one. Accessing it results in
-a metatable method being called. In practice it boils down to looking up the node
-type and based on the node type checking for the field name. In a worst case you
-have a node type that sits at the end of the lookup list and a field that is last
-in the lookup chain. However, in successive versions of \LUATEX\ these lookups
-have been optimized and the most frequently accessed nodes and fields have a
-higher priority.
-
-Because in practice the \type {next} accessor results in a function call, there
-is some overhead involved. The next code does the same and performs a tiny bit
-faster (but not that much because it is still a function call but one that knows
-what to look up).
-
-\starttyping
-local next = node.next(current)
-if next then
- -- do something
-end
-\stoptyping
-
-Some accessors are used frequently and for these we provide more efficient helpers:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB function \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{getnext} \NC parsing nodelist always involves this one \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getprev} \NC used less but a logical companion to \type {getnext} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getboth} \NC returns the next and prev pointer of a node \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getid} \NC consulted a lot \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getsubtype} \NC consulted less but also a topper \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getfont} \NC used a lot in \OPENTYPE\ handling (glyph nodes are consulted a lot) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getchar} \NC idem and also in other places \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getwhd} \NC returns the \type {width}, \type {height} and \type {depth} of a list, rule or
- (unexpanded) glyph as well as glue (its spec is looked at) and unset nodes\NC \NR
-\NC \type{getdisc} \NC returns the \type {pre}, \type {post} and \type {replace} fields and
- optionally when true is passed also the tail fields \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getlist} \NC we often parse nested lists so this is a convenient one too \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getleader} \NC comparable to list, seldom used in \TEX\ (but needs frequent consulting
- like lists; leaders could have been made a dedicated node type) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getfield} \NC generic getter, sufficient for the rest (other field names are
- often shared so a specific getter makes no sense then) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getbox} \NC gets the given box (a list node) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{getoffsets} \NC gets the \type {xoffset} and \type {yoffset} of a glyph or
- \type {left} and \type {right} values of a rule \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-In the direct namespace there are more such helpers and most of them are
-accompanied by setters. The getters and setters are clever enough to see what
-node is meant. We don't deal with whatsit nodes: their fields are always accessed
-by name. It doesn't make sense to add getters for all fields, we just identifier
-the most likely candidates. In complex documents, many node and fields types
-never get seen, or seen only a few times, but for instance glyphs are candidates
-for such optimization. The \type {node.direct} interface has some more helpers.
-\footnote {We can define the helpers in the node namespace with \type {getfield}
-which is about as efficient, so at some point we might provide that as module.}
-
-The \type {setdisc} helper takes three (optional) arguments plus an optional
-fourth indicating the subtype. Its \type {getdisc} takes an optional boolean;
-when its value is \type {true} the tail nodes will also be returned. The \type
-{setfont} helper takes an optional second argument, it being the character. The
-directmode setter \type {setlink} takes a list of nodes and will link them,
-thereby ignoring \type {nil} entries. The first valid node is returned (beware:
-for good reason it assumes single nodes). For rarely used fields no helpers are
-provided and there are a few that probably are used seldom too but were added for
-consistency. You can of course always define additional accessors using \type
-{getfield} and \type {setfield} with little overhead. When the second argument of
-\type {setattributelist} is \type {true} the current attribute list is assumed.
-
-\def\yes{$+$} \def\nop{$-$}
-
-\def\supported#1#2#3%
- {\NC \type{#1}
- \NC \ifx#2\yes\lix{node} {#1}\fi #2
- \NC \ifx#3\yes\lix{node.direct}{#1}\fi #3 \NC
- \NR}
-
-\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
-\DB function \BC node \BC direct \NC \NR
-\TB
-\supported {check_discretionaries} \yes \yes
-\supported {check_discretionary} \yes \yes
-\supported {copy_list} \yes \yes
-\supported {copy} \yes \yes
-\supported {count} \yes \yes
-\supported {current_attr} \yes \yes
-\supported {dimensions} \yes \yes
-\supported {effective_glue} \yes \yes
-\supported {end_of_math} \yes \yes
-\supported {family_font} \yes \nop
-\supported {fields} \yes \nop
-\supported {find_attribute} \yes \yes
-\supported {first_glyph} \yes \yes
-\supported {flatten_discretionaries} \yes \yes
-\supported {flush_list} \yes \yes
-\supported {flush_node} \yes \yes
-\supported {free} \yes \yes
-\supported {get_attribute} \yes \yes
-\supported {get_synctex_fields} \nop \yes
-\supported {getattributelist} \nop \yes
-\supported {getboth} \yes \yes
-\supported {getbox} \nop \yes
-\supported {getchar} \yes \yes
-\supported {getcomponents} \nop \yes
-\supported {getdepth} \nop \yes
-\supported {getdirection} \nop \yes
-\supported {getdir} \nop \yes
-\supported {getdisc} \yes \yes
-\supported {getfam} \nop \yes
-\supported {getfield} \yes \yes
-\supported {getfont} \yes \yes
-\supported {getglue} \yes \yes
-\supported {getheight} \nop \yes
-\supported {getid} \yes \yes
-\supported {getkern} \nop \yes
-\supported {getlang} \nop \yes
-\supported {getleader} \yes \yes
-\supported {getlist} \yes \yes
-\supported {getnext} \yes \yes
-\supported {getnucleus} \nop \yes
-\supported {getoffsets} \nop \yes
-\supported {getpenalty} \nop \yes
-\supported {getprev} \yes \yes
-\supported {getproperty} \yes \yes
-\supported {getshift} \nop \yes
-\supported {getsubtype} \yes \yes
-\supported {getsub} \nop \yes
-\supported {getsup} \nop \yes
-\supported {getdata} \nop \yes
-\supported {getwhd} \yes \yes
-\supported {getwidth} \nop \yes
-\supported {has_attribute} \yes \yes
-\supported {has_field} \yes \yes
-\supported {has_glyph} \yes \yes
-\supported {hpack} \yes \yes
-\supported {id} \yes \nop
-\supported {insert_after} \yes \yes
-\supported {insert_before} \yes \yes
-\supported {is_char} \yes \yes
-\supported {is_direct} \nop \yes
-\supported {is_glyph} \yes \yes
-\supported {is_node} \yes \yes
-\supported {is_zero_glue} \yes \yes
-\supported {kerning} \yes \yes
-\supported {last_node} \yes \yes
-\supported {length} \yes \yes
-\supported {ligaturing} \yes \yes
-\supported {mlist_to_hlist} \yes \nop
-\supported {new} \yes \yes
-\supported {next} \yes \nop
-\supported {prepend_prevdepth} \nop \yes
-\supported {prev} \yes \nop
-\supported {protect_glyphs} \yes \yes
-\supported {protect_glyph} \yes \yes
-\supported {protrusion_skippable} \yes \yes
-\supported {rangedimensions} \yes \yes
-\supported {remove} \yes \yes
-\supported {set_attribute} \yes \yes
-\supported {set_synctex_fields} \nop \yes
-\supported {setattributelist} \nop \yes
-\supported {setboth} \nop \yes
-\supported {setbox} \nop \yes
-\supported {setchar} \nop \yes
-\supported {setcomponents} \nop \yes
-\supported {setdepth} \nop \yes
-\supported {setdirection} \nop \yes
-\supported {setdir} \nop \yes
-\supported {setdisc} \nop \yes
-\supported {setfam} \nop \yes
-\supported {setfield} \yes \yes
-\supported {setfont} \nop \yes
-\supported {setexpansion} \nop \yes
-\supported {setglue} \yes \yes
-\supported {setheight} \nop \yes
-\supported {setkern} \nop \yes
-\supported {setlang} \nop \yes
-\supported {setleader} \nop \yes
-\supported {setlink} \nop \yes
-\supported {setlist} \nop \yes
-\supported {setnext} \nop \yes
-\supported {setnucleus} \nop \yes
-\supported {setoffsets} \nop \yes
-\supported {setpenalty} \nop \yes
-\supported {setprev} \nop \yes
-\supported {setproperty} \yes \yes
-\supported {setshift} \nop \yes
-\supported {setsplit} \nop \yes
-\supported {setsubtype} \nop \yes
-\supported {setsub} \nop \yes
-\supported {setsup} \nop \yes
-\supported {setwhd} \nop \yes
-\supported {setwidth} \nop \yes
-\supported {slide} \yes \yes
-\supported {subtypes} \yes \nop
-\supported {subtype} \yes \nop
-\supported {tail} \yes \yes
-\supported {todirect} \yes \yes
-\supported {tonode} \yes \yes
-\supported {tostring} \yes \yes
-\supported {traverse_char} \yes \yes
-\supported {traverse_glyph} \yes \yes
-\supported {traverse_id} \yes \yes
-\supported {traverse} \yes \yes
-\supported {types} \yes \nop
-\supported {type} \yes \nop
-\supported {unprotect_glyphs} \yes \yes
-\supported {unprotect_glyph} \yes \yes
-\supported {unset_attribute} \yes \yes
-\supported {usedlist} \yes \yes
-\supported {uses_font} \yes \yes
-\supported {vpack} \yes \yes
-\supported {whatsits} \yes \nop
-\supported {write} \yes \yes
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {node.next} and \type {node.prev} functions will stay but for
-consistency there are variants called \type {getnext} and \type {getprev}. We had
-to use \type {get} because \type {node.id} and \type {node.subtype} are already
-taken for providing meta information about nodes. Note: The getters do only basic
-checking for valid keys. You should just stick to the keys mentioned in the
-sections that describe node properties.
-
-Some of the getters and setters handle multiple node types, given that the field
-is relevant. In that case, some field names are considered similar (like \type
-{kern} and \type {width}, or \type {data} and \type {value}. In retrospect we
-could have normalized field names better but we decided to stick to the original
-(internal) names as much as possible. After all, at the \LUA\ end one can easily
-create synonyms.
-
-Some nodes have indirect references. For instance a math character refers to a
-family instead of a font. In that case we provide a virtual font field as
-accessor. So, \type {getfont} and \type {.font} can be used on them. The same is
-true for the \type {width}, \type {height} and \type {depth} of glue nodes. These
-actually access the spec node properties, and here we can set as well as get the
-values.
-
-In some places \LUATEX\ can do a bit of extra checking for valid node lists and
-you can enable that with:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.fix_node_lists(<boolean> b)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-You can set and query the \SYNCTEX\ fields, a file number aka tag and a line
-number, for a glue, kern, hlist, vlist, rule and math nodes as well as glyph
-nodes (although this last one is not used in native \SYNCTEX).
-
-\startfunctioncall
-node.set_synctex_fields(<integer> f, <integer> l)
-<integer> f, <integer> l =
- node.get_synctex_fields(<node> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Of course you need to know what you're doing as no checking on sane values takes
-place. Also, the synctex interpreter used in editors is rather peculiar and has
-some assumptions (heuristics).
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={Properties}][library=node]
-
-\topicindex {nodes+properties}
-\topicindex {properties}
-
-\libindex{flush_properties_table}
-\libindex{get_properties_table}
-\libindex{set_properties_mode}
-
-Attributes are a convenient way to relate extra information to a node. You can
-assign them at the \TEX\ end as well as at the \LUA\ end and and consult them at
-the \LUA\ end. One big advantage is that they obey grouping. They are linked
-lists and normally checking for them is pretty efficient, even if you use a lot
-of them. A macro package has to provide some way to manage these attributes at the
-\TEX\ end because otherwise clashes in their usage can occur.
-
-Each node also can have a properties table and you can assign values to this
-table using the \type {setproperty} function and get properties using the \type
-{getproperty} function. Managing properties is way more demanding than managing
-attributes.
-
-Take the following example:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- local n = node.new("glyph")
-
- node.setproperty(n,"foo")
- print(node.getproperty(n))
-
- node.setproperty(n,"bar")
- print(node.getproperty(n))
-
- node.free(n)
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-This will print \type {foo} and \type {bar} which in itself is not that useful
-when multiple mechanisms want to use this feature. A variant is:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- local n = node.new("glyph")
-
- node.setproperty(n,{ one = "foo", two = "bar" })
- print(node.getproperty(n).one)
- print(node.getproperty(n).two)
-
- node.free(n)
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-This time we store two properties with the node. It really makes sense to have a
-table as property because that way we can store more. But in order for that to
-work well you need to do it this way:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- local n = node.new("glyph")
-
- local t = node.getproperty(n)
-
- if not t then
- t = { }
- node.setproperty(n,t)
- end
- t.one = "foo"
- t.two = "bar"
-
- print(node.getproperty(n).one)
- print(node.getproperty(n).two)
-
- node.free(n)
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-Here our own properties will not overwrite other users properties unless of
-course they use the same keys. So, eventually you will end up with something:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- local n = node.new("glyph")
-
- local t = node.getproperty(n)
-
- if not t then
- t = { }
- node.setproperty(n,t)
- end
- t.myself = { one = "foo", two = "bar" }
-
- print(node.getproperty(n).myself.one)
- print(node.getproperty(n).myself.two)
-
- node.free(n)
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-This assumes that only you use \type {myself} as subtable. The possibilities are
-endless but care is needed. For instance, the generic font handler that ships
-with \CONTEXT\ uses the \type {injections} subtable and you should not mess with
-that one!
-
-There are a few helper functions that you normally should not touch as user: \typ
-{flush_properties_table} will wipe the table (normally a bad idea), \typ
-{get_properties_table} and will give the table that stores properties (using
-direct entries) and you can best not mess too much with that one either because
-\LUATEX\ itself will make sure that entries related to nodes will get wiped when
-nodes get freed, so that the \LUA\ garbage collector can do its job. In fact, the
-main reason why we have this mechanism is that it saves the user (or macro
-package) some work. One can easily write a property mechanism in \LUA\ where
-after a shipout properties gets cleaned up but it's not entirely trivial to make
-sure that with each freed node also its properties get freed, due to the fact
-that there can be nodes left over for a next page. And having a callback bound to
-the node deallocator would add way to much overhead.
-
-Managing properties in the node (de)allocator functions is disabled by default
-and is enabled by:
-
-\starttyping
-node.set_properties_mode(true)
-\stoptyping
-
-When we copy a node list that has a table as property, there are several possibilities: we do the same as
-a new node, we copy the entry to the table in properties (a reference), we do
-a deep copy of a table in the properties, we create a new table and give it
-the original one as a metatable. After some experiments (that also included
-timing) with these scenarios we decided that a deep copy made no sense, nor
-did nilling. In the end both the shallow copy and the metatable variant were
-both ok, although the second one is slower. The most important aspect to keep
-in mind is that references to other nodes in properties no longer can be
-valid for that copy. We could use two tables (one unique and one shared) or
-metatables but that only complicates matters.
-
-When defining a new node, we could already allocate a table but it is rather easy
-to do that at the lua end e.g.\ using a metatable \type {__index} method. That
-way it is under macro package control. When deleting a node, we could keep the
-slot (e.g. setting it to false) but it could make memory consumption raise
-unneeded when we have temporary large node lists and after that only small lists.
-Both are not done.
-
-So in the end this is what happens now: when a node is copied, and it has a table
-as property, the new node will share that table. If the second argument of \typ
-{set_properties_mode} is \type {true} then a metatable approach is chosen: the
-copy gets its own table with the original table as metatable. If you use the
-generic font loader the mode is enabled that way.
-
-A few more xperiments were done. For instance: copy attributes to the properties
-so that we have fast access at the \LUA\ end. In the end the overhead is not
-compensated by speed and convenience, in fact, attributes are not that slow when
-it comes to accessing them. So this was rejected.
-
-Another experiment concerned a bitset in the node but again the gain compared to
-attributes was neglectable and given the small amount of available bits it also
-demands a pretty strong agreement over what bit represents what, and this is
-unlikely to succeed in the \TEX\ community. It doesn't pay off.
-
-Just in case one wonders why properties make sense: it is not so much speed that
-we gain, but more convenience: storing all kind of (temporary) data in attributes
-is no fun and this mechanism makes sure that properties are cleaned up when a
-node is freed. Also, the advantage of a more or less global properties table is
-that we stay at the \LUA\ end. An alternative is to store a reference in the node
-itself but that is complicated by the fact that the register has some limitations
-(no numeric keys) and we also don't want to mess with it too much.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-nodes
+
+\startchapter[reference=nodes,title={Nodes}]
+
+\startsection[title={\LUA\ node representation}][library=node]
+
+\topicindex {nodes}
+
+\libindex {fields}
+\libindex {subtypes}
+\libindex {values}
+
+\TEX's nodes are represented in \LUA\ as userdata objects with a variable set of
+fields. In the following syntax tables, such as the type of such a userdata object
+is represented as \syntax {<node>}.
+
+The current return value of \type {node.types()} is:
+\startluacode
+ for id, name in table.sortedhash(node.types()) do
+ context.type(name)
+ context(" (%s), ",id)
+ end
+ context.removeunwantedspaces()
+ context.removepunctuation()
+\stopluacode
+. % period
+
+The \prm {lastnodetype} primitive is \ETEX\ compliant. The valid range is still
+$[-1,15]$ and glyph nodes (formerly known as char nodes) have number~0 while
+ligature nodes are mapped to~7. That way macro packages can use the same symbolic
+names as in traditional \ETEX. Keep in mind that these \ETEX\ node numbers are
+different from the real internal ones and that there are more \ETEX\ node types
+than~15.
+
+You can ask for a list of fields with \type {node.fields} and for valid subtypes
+with \type {node.subtypes}. The \type {node.values} function reports some used
+values. Valid arguments are \nod {dir}, \type {direction}, \nod {glue}, \whs
+{pdf_literal}, \whs {pdf_action}, \whs {pdf_window} and \whs {color_stack}. Keep
+in mind that the setters normally expect a number, but this helper gives you a
+list of what numbers matter. For practical reason the \type {pagestate} values
+are also reported with this helper.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Main text nodes}]
+
+\topicindex {nodes+text}
+
+These are the nodes that comprise actual typesetting commands. A few fields are
+present in all nodes regardless of their type, these are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{next} \NC node \NC the next node in a list, or nil \NC \NR
+\NC \type{id} \NC number \NC the node's type (\type {id}) number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC the node \type {subtype} identifier \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {subtype} is sometimes just a dummy entry because not all nodes
+actually use the \type {subtype}, but this way you can be sure that all nodes
+accept it as a valid field name, and that is often handy in node list traversal.
+In the following tables \type {next} and \type {id} are not explicitly mentioned.
+
+Besides these three fields, almost all nodes also have an \type {attr} field, and
+there is a also a field called \type {prev}. That last field is always present,
+but only initialized on explicit request: when the function \type {node.slide()}
+is called, it will set up the \type {prev} fields to be a backwards pointer in
+the argument node list. By now most of \TEX's node processing makes sure that the
+\type {prev} nodes are valid but there can be exceptions, especially when the
+internal magic uses a leading \nod {temp} nodes to temporarily store a state.
+
+\subsection{\nod {hlist} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{list} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width of the box \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height of the box \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth of the box \NC \NR
+\NC \type{shift} \NC number \NC a displacement perpendicular to the character
+ progression direction \NC \NR
+\NC \type{glue_order} \NC number \NC a number in the range $[0,4]$, indicating the
+ glue order \NC \NR
+\NC \type{glue_set} \NC number \NC the calculated glue ratio \NC \NR
+\NC \type{glue_sign} \NC number \NC 0 = \type {normal}, 1 = \type {stretching}, 2 =
+ \type {shrinking} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC the first node of the body of this list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction of this box, see~\in [dirnodes] \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\topicindex {nodes+lists}
+\topicindex {lists}
+
+A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
+its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may result.
+
+Note: the field name \type {head} and \type {list} are both valid. Sometimes it
+makes more sense to refer to a list by \type {head}, sometimes \type {list} makes
+more sense.
+
+\subsection{\nod {vlist} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+lists}
+\topicindex {lists}
+
+This node is similar to \nod {hlist}, except that \quote {shift} is a displacement
+perpendicular to the line progression direction, and \quote {subtype} only has
+the values 0, 4, and~5.
+
+\subsection{\nod {rule} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+rules}
+\topicindex {rules}
+
+Contrary to traditional \TEX, \LUATEX\ has more \prm {rule} subtypes because we
+also use rules to store reuseable objects and images. User nodes are invisible
+and can be intercepted by a callback.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes {rule} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width of the rule where the special value
+ $-1073741824$ is used for \quote {running} glue dimensions \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height of the rule (can be negative) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth of the rule (can be negative) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{left} \NC number \NC shift at the left end (also subtracted from width) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{right} \NC number \NC (subtracted from width) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction of this rule, see~\in[dirnodes] \NC \NR
+\NC \type{index} \NC number \NC an optional index that can be referred to \NC \NR
+\NC \type{transform} \NC number \NC an private variable (also used to specify outline width) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {left} and type {right} keys are somewhat special (and experimental).
+When rules are auto adapting to the surrounding box width you can enforce a shift
+to the right by setting \type {left}. The value is also subtracted from the width
+which can be a value set by the engine itself and is not entirely under user
+control. The \type {right} is also subtracted from the width. It all happens in
+the backend so these are not affecting the calculations in the frontend (actually
+the auto settings also happen in the backend). For a vertical rule \type {left}
+affects the height and \type {right} affects the depth. There is no matching
+interface at the \TEX\ end (although we can have more keywords for rules it would
+complicate matters and introduce a speed penalty.) However, you can just
+construct a rule node with \LUA\ and write it to the \TEX\ input. The \type
+{outline} subtype is just a convenient variant and the \type {transform} field
+specifies the width of the outline.
+
+\subsection{\nod {ins} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+insertions}
+\topicindex {insertions}
+
+This node relates to the \prm {insert} primitive.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC the insertion class \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{cost} \NC number \NC the penalty associated with this insert \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC height of the insert \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC depth of the insert \NC \NR
+\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC the first node of the body of this insert \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+There is a set of extra fields that concern the associated glue: \type {width},
+\type {stretch}, \type {stretch_order}, \type {shrink} and \type {shrink_order}.
+These are all numbers.
+
+A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
+its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may result. You can use
+\type {list} instead (often in functions you want to use local variable with similar
+names and both names are equally sensible).
+
+\subsection{\nod {mark} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+marks}
+\topicindex {marks}
+
+This one relates to the \prm {mark} primitive.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC unused \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{class} \NC number \NC the mark class \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mark} \NC table \NC a table representing a token list \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\nod {adjust} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+adjust}
+\topicindex {adjust}
+
+This node comes from \prm {vadjust} primitive.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{adjust} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC adjusted material \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
+its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may be the result.
+
+\subsection{\nod {disc} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+discretionaries}
+\topicindex {discretionaries}
+
+The \prm {discretionary} and \prm {-}, the \type {-} character but also the
+hyphenation mechanism produces these nodes.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{disc} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pre} \NC node \NC pointer to the pre|-|break text \NC \NR
+\NC \type{post} \NC node \NC pointer to the post|-|break text \NC \NR
+\NC \type{replace} \NC node \NC pointer to the no|-|break text \NC \NR
+\NC \type{penalty} \NC number \NC the penalty associated with the break, normally
+ \prm {hyphenpenalty} or \prm {exhyphenpenalty} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The subtype numbers~4 and~5 belong to the \quote {of-f-ice} explanation given
+elsewhere. These disc nodes are kind of special as at some point they also keep
+information about breakpoints and nested ligatures.
+
+The \type {pre}, \type {post} and \type {replace} fields at the \LUA\ end are in
+fact indirectly accessed and have a \type {prev} pointer that is not \type {nil}.
+This means that when you mess around with the head of these (three) lists, you
+also need to reassign them because that will restore the proper \type {prev}
+pointer, so:
+
+\starttyping
+pre = d.pre
+-- change the list starting with pre
+d.pre = pre
+\stoptyping
+
+Otherwise you can end up with an invalid internal perception of reality and
+\LUATEX\ might even decide to crash on you. It also means that running forward
+over for instance \type {pre} is ok but backward you need to stop at \type {pre}.
+And you definitely must not mess with the node that \type {prev} points to, if
+only because it is not really a node but part of the disc data structure (so
+freeing it again might crash \LUATEX).
+
+\subsection{\nod {math} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+math}
+\topicindex {math+nodes}
+
+Math nodes represent the boundaries of a math formula, normally wrapped into
+\type {$} signs.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{math} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{surround} \NC number \NC width of the \prm {mathsurround} kern \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+There is a set of extra fields that concern the associated glue: \type {width},
+\type {stretch}, \type {stretch_order}, \type {shrink} and \type {shrink_order}.
+These are all numbers.
+
+\subsection{\nod {glue} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+glue}
+\topicindex {glue}
+
+Skips are about the only type of data objects in traditional \TEX\ that are not a
+simple value. They are inserted when \TEX\ sees a space in the text flow but also
+by \prm {hskip} and \prm {vskip}. The structure that represents the glue
+components of a skip is called a \nod {glue_spec}, and it has the following
+accessible fields:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the horizontal or vertical displacement \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stretch} \NC number \NC extra (positive) displacement or stretch amount \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stretch_order} \NC number \NC factor applied to stretch amount \NC \NR
+\NC \type{shrink} \NC number \NC extra (negative) displacement or shrink amount\NC \NR
+\NC \type{shrink_order} \NC number \NC factor applied to shrink amount \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The effective width of some glue subtypes depends on the stretch or shrink needed
+to make the encapsulating box fit its dimensions. For instance, in a paragraph
+lines normally have glue representing spaces and these stretch or shrink to make
+the content fit in the available space. The \type {effective_glue} function that
+takes a glue node and a parent (hlist or vlist) returns the effective width of
+that glue item. When you pass \type {true} as third argument the value will be
+rounded.
+
+A \nod {glue_spec} node is a special kind of node that is used for storing a set
+of glue values in registers. Originally they were also used to store properties
+of glue nodes (using a system of reference counts) but we now keep these
+properties in the glue nodes themselves, which gives a cleaner interface to \LUA.
+
+The indirect spec approach was in fact an optimization in the original \TEX\
+code. First of all it can save quite some memory because all these spaces that
+become glue now share the same specification (only the reference count is
+incremented), and zero testing is also a bit faster because only the pointer has
+to be checked (this is no longer true for engines that implement for instance
+protrusion where we really need to ensure that zero is zero when we test for
+bounds). Another side effect is that glue specifications are read|-|only, so in
+the end copies need to be made when they are used from \LUA\ (each assignment to
+a field can result in a new copy). So in the end the advantages of sharing are
+not that high (and nowadays memory is less an issue, also given that a glue node
+is only a few memory words larger than a spec).
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{glue} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{leader} \NC node \NC pointer to a box or rule for leaders \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+In addition there are the \type {width}, \type {stretch} \type {stretch_order},
+\type {shrink}, and \type {shrink_order} fields. Note that we use the key \type
+{width} in both horizontal and vertical glue. This suits the \TEX\ internals well
+so we decided to stick to that naming.
+
+A regular word space also results in a \type {spaceskip} subtype (this used to be
+a \type {userskip} with subtype zero).
+
+\subsection{\nod {kern} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+kerns}
+\topicindex {kerns}
+
+The \prm {kern} command creates such nodes but for instance the font and math
+machinery can also add them.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{kern} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{kern} \NC number \NC fixed horizontal or vertical advance \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\nod {penalty} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+penalty}
+\topicindex {penalty}
+
+The \prm {penalty} command is one that generates these nodes.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{penalty} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{penalty} \NC number \NC the penalty value \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The subtypes are just informative and \TEX\ itself doesn't use them. When you
+run into an \type {linebreakpenalty} you need to keep in mind that it's a
+accumulation of \type {club}, \type{widow} and other relevant penalties.
+
+\subsection[glyphnodes]{\nod {glyph} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+glyph}
+\topicindex {glyphs}
+
+These are probably the mostly used nodes and although you can push them in the
+current list with for instance \prm {char} \TEX\ will normally do it for you when
+it considers some input to be text.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC bit field \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{char} \NC number \NC the character index in the font \NC \NR
+\NC \type{font} \NC number \NC the font identifier \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lang} \NC number \NC the language identifier \NC \NR
+\NC \type{left} \NC number \NC the frozen \type {\lefthyphenmnin} value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{right} \NC number \NC the frozen \type {\righthyphenmnin} value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{uchyph} \NC boolean \NC the frozen \prm {uchyph} value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{components} \NC node \NC pointer to ligature components \NC \NR
+\NC \type{xoffset} \NC number \NC a virtual displacement in horizontal direction \NC \NR
+\NC \type{yoffset} \NC number \NC a virtual displacement in vertical direction \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the (original) width of the character \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the (original) height of the character\NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the (original) depth of the character\NC \NR
+\NC \type{expansion_factor} \NC number \NC the to be applied expansion_factor \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC number \NC a general purpose field for users (we had room for it) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {width}, \type {height} and \type {depth} values are read|-|only. The
+\type {expansion_factor} is assigned in the par builder and used in the backend.
+
+A warning: never assign a node list to the components field unless you are sure
+its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error may be result. Valid
+bits for the \type {subtype} field are:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|l|]
+\DB bit \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC character \NC \NR
+\NC 1 \NC ligature \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC ghost \NC \NR
+\NC 3 \NC left \NC \NR
+\NC 4 \NC right \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+See \in {section} [charsandglyphs] for a detailed description of the \type
+{subtype} field.
+
+The \type {expansion_factor} has been introduced as part of the separation
+between font- and backend. It is the result of extensive experiments with a more
+efficient implementation of expansion. Early versions of \LUATEX\ already
+replaced multiple instances of fonts in the backend by scaling but contrary to
+\PDFTEX\ in \LUATEX\ we now also got rid of font copies in the frontend and
+replaced them by expansion factors that travel with glyph nodes. Apart from a
+cleaner approach this is also a step towards a better separation between front-
+and backend.
+
+The \type {is_char} function checks if a node is a glyph node with a subtype still
+less than 256. This function can be used to determine if applying font logic to a
+glyph node makes sense. The value \type {nil} gets returned when the node is not
+a glyph, a character number is returned if the node is still tagged as character
+and \type {false} gets returned otherwise. When nil is returned, the id is also
+returned. The \type {is_glyph} variant doesn't check for a subtype being less
+than 256, so it returns either the character value or nil plus the id. These
+helpers are not always faster than separate calls but they sometimes permit
+making more readable tests. The \type {uses_font} helpers takes a node
+and font id and returns true when a glyph or disc node references that font.
+
+\subsection{\nod {boundary} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+boundary}
+\topicindex {boundary}
+
+This node relates to the \prm {noboundary}, \prm {boundary}, \prm
+{protrusionboundary} and \prm {wordboundary} primitives.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{boundary} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{value} \NC number \NC values 0--255 are reserved \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\nod {local_par} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+paragraphs}
+\topicindex {paragraphs}
+
+This node is inserted at the start of a paragraph. You should not mess
+too much with this one.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pen_inter} \NC number \NC local interline penalty (from \lpr {localinterlinepenalty}) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pen_broken} \NC number \NC local broken penalty (from \lpr {localbrokenpenalty}) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction of this par. see~\in [dirnodes] \NC \NR
+\NC \type{box_left} \NC node \NC the \lpr {localleftbox} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{box_left_width} \NC number \NC width of the \lpr {localleftbox} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{box_right} \NC node \NC the \lpr {localrightbox} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{box_right_width} \NC number \NC width of the \lpr {localrightbox} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {box_left} or \type {box_right}
+field unless you are sure its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an
+error may result.
+
+\subsection[dirnodes]{\nod {dir} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+direction}
+\topicindex {directions}
+
+Direction nodes mark parts of the running text that need a change of direction and \
+the \prm {textdir} command generates them.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dir} \NC string \NC the direction (but see below) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{level} \NC number \NC nesting level of this direction whatsit \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Direction specifiers are three|-|letter combinations of \type {T}, \type {B},
+\type {R}, and \type {L}. These are built up out of three separate items:
+
+\startitemize[packed]
+\startitem
+ the first is the direction of the \quote{top} of paragraphs
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ the second is the direction of the \quote{start} of lines
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ the third is the direction of the \quote{top} of glyphs
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+However, only four combinations are accepted: \type {TLT}, \type {TRT}, \type
+{RTT}, and \type {LTL}. Inside actual \nod {dir} nodes, the representation of
+\nod {dir} is not a three|-|letter but a combination of numbers. When printed the
+direction is indicated by a \type {+} or \type {-}, indicating whether the value
+is pushed or popped from the direction stack.
+
+\subsection{\nod {marginkern} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+paragraphs}
+\topicindex {paragraphs}
+\topicindex {protrusion}
+
+Margin kerns result from protrusion.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{marginkern} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the advance of the kern \NC \NR
+\NC \type{glyph} \NC node \NC the glyph to be used \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Math noads}]
+
+\topicindex {nodes+math}
+\topicindex {math+nodes}
+
+These are the so||called \quote {noad}s and the nodes that are specifically
+associated with math processing. Most of these nodes contain subnodes so that the
+list of possible fields is actually quite small. First, the subnodes:
+
+\subsection{Math kernel subnodes}
+
+Many object fields in math mode are either simple characters in a specific family
+or math lists or node lists. There are four associated subnodes that represent
+these cases (in the following node descriptions these are indicated by the word
+\type {<kernel>}).
+
+The \type {next} and \type {prev} fields for these subnodes are unused.
+
+\subsection{\nod {math_char} and \nod {math_text_char} subnodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{char} \NC number \NC the character index \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fam} \NC number \NC the family number \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \nod {math_char} is the simplest subnode field, it contains the character
+and family for a single glyph object. The \nod {math_text_char} is a special
+case that you will not normally encounter, it arises temporarily during math list
+conversion (its sole function is to suppress a following italic correction).
+
+\subsection{\nod {sub_box} and \nod {sub_mlist} subnodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{head/list} \NC node \NC list of nodes \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+These two subnode types are used for subsidiary list items. For \nod {sub_box},
+the \type {head} points to a \quote {normal} vbox or hbox. For \nod {sub_mlist},
+the \type {head} points to a math list that is yet to be converted.
+
+A warning: never assign a node list to the \type {head} field unless you are sure
+its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error is triggered.
+
+\subsection{\nod {delim} subnodes}
+
+There is a fifth subnode type that is used exclusively for delimiter fields. As
+before, the \type {next} and \type {prev} fields are unused.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{small_char} \NC number \NC character index of base character \NC \NR
+\NC \type{small_fam} \NC number \NC family number of base character \NC \NR
+\NC \type{large_char} \NC number \NC character index of next larger character \NC \NR
+\NC \type{large_fam} \NC number \NC family number of next larger character \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The fields \type {large_char} and \type {large_fam} can be zero, in that case the
+font that is set for the \type {small_fam} is expected to provide the large
+version as an extension to the \type {small_char}.
+
+\subsection{Math core nodes}
+
+First, there are the objects (the \TEX book calls them \quote {atoms}) that are
+associated with the simple math objects: ord, op, bin, rel, open, close, punct,
+inner, over, under, vcent. These all have the same fields, and they are combined
+into a single node type with separate subtypes for differentiation.
+
+Some noads have an option field. The values in this bitset are common:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|r|]
+\DB meaning \BC bits \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC set \NC \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC internal \NC \type{0x00} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC internal \NC \type{0x01} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC axis \NC \type{0x02} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC no axis \NC \type{0x04} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC exact \NC \type{0x10} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC left \NC \type{0x11} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC middle \NC \type{0x12} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC right \NC \type{0x14} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC no sub script \NC \type{0x21} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC no super script \NC \type{0x22} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\NC no script \NC \type{0x23} + \type{0x08} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{simple \nod {noad} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{noad} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nucleus} \NC kernel node \NC base \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sub} \NC kernel node \NC subscript \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sup} \NC kernel node \NC superscript \NC \NR
+\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\nod {accent} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{accent} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nucleus} \NC kernel node \NC base \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sub} \NC kernel node \NC subscript \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sup} \NC kernel node \NC superscript \NC \NR
+\NC \type{accent} \NC kernel node \NC top accent \NC \NR
+\NC \type{bot_accent} \NC kernel node \NC bottom accent \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fraction} \NC number \NC larger step criterium (divided by 1000) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\nod {style} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{style} \NC string \NC contains the style \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+There are eight possibilities for the string value: one of \type {display},
+\type {text}, \type {script}, or \type {scriptscript}. Each of these can have
+be prefixed by \type {cramped}.
+
+\subsection{\nod {choice} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{display} \NC node \NC list of display size alternatives \NC \NR
+\NC \type{text} \NC node \NC list of text size alternatives \NC \NR
+\NC \type{script} \NC node \NC list of scriptsize alternatives \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scriptscript} \NC node \NC list of scriptscriptsize alternatives \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Warning: never assign a node list to the \type {display}, \type {text}, \type
+{script}, or \type {scriptscript} field unless you are sure its internal link
+structure is correct, otherwise an error can occur.
+
+\subsection{\nod {radical} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{radical} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nucleus} \NC kernel node \NC base \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sub} \NC kernel node \NC subscript \NC \NR
+\NC \type{sup} \NC kernel node \NC superscript \NC \NR
+\NC \type{left} \NC delimiter node \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{degree} \NC kernel node \NC only set by \lpr {Uroot} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC required width \NC \NR
+\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Warning: never assign a node list to the \type {nucleus}, \type {sub}, \type
+{sup}, \type {left}, or \type {degree} field unless you are sure its internal
+link structure is correct, otherwise an error can be triggered.
+
+\subsection{\nod {fraction} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC (optional) width of the fraction \NC \NR
+\NC \type{num} \NC kernel node \NC numerator \NC \NR
+\NC \type{denom} \NC kernel node \NC denominator \NC \NR
+\NC \type{left} \NC delimiter node \NC left side symbol \NC \NR
+\NC \type{right} \NC delimiter node \NC right side symbol \NC \NR
+\NC \type{middle} \NC delimiter node \NC middle symbol \NC \NR
+\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Warning: never assign a node list to the \type {num}, or \type {denom} field
+unless you are sure its internal link structure is correct, otherwise an error
+can result.
+
+\subsection{\nod {fence} nodes}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{subtype} \NC number \NC \showsubtypes{fence} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{delim} \NC delimiter node \NC delimiter specification \NC \NR
+\NC \type{italic} \NC number \NC italic correction \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC required height \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC required depth \NC \NR
+\NC \type{options} \NC number \NC bitset of rendering options \NC \NR
+\NC \type{class} \NC number \NC spacing related class \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Warning: some of these fields are used by the renderer and might get adapted in
+the process.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Front|-|end whatsits}]
+
+Whatsit nodes come in many subtypes that you can ask for them by running
+\type {node.whatsits}:
+\startluacode
+ for id, name in table.sortedpairs(node.whatsits()) do
+ context.type(name)
+ context(" (%s), ",id)
+ end
+ context.removeunwantedspaces()
+ context.removepunctuation()
+\stopluacode
+. % period
+
+Some of them are generic and independent of the output mode and others are
+specific to the chosen backend: \DVI\ or \PDF. Here we discuss the generic
+font|-|end nodes nodes.
+
+\subsection{\whs {open}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stream} \NC number \NC \TEX's stream id number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC file name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ext} \NC string \NC file extension \NC \NR
+\NC \type{area} \NC string \NC file area (this may become obsolete) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {write}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stream} \NC number \NC \TEX's stream id number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC table \NC a table representing the token list to be written \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {close}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stream} \NC number \NC \TEX's stream id number \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {user_defined}}
+
+User|-|defined whatsit nodes can only be created and handled from \LUA\ code. In
+effect, they are an extension to the extension mechanism. The \LUATEX\ engine
+will simply step over such whatsits without ever looking at the contents.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{user_id} \NC number \NC id number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{type} \NC number \NC type of the value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{value} \NC number \NC a \LUA\ number \NC \NR
+\NC \NC node \NC a node list \NC \NR
+\NC \NC string \NC a \LUA\ string \NC \NR
+\NC \NC table \NC a \LUA\ table \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {type} can have one of six distinct values. The number is the \ASCII\
+value if the first character of the type name (so you can use string.byte("l")
+instead of \type {108}).
+
+\starttabulate[|r|c|p|]
+\DB value \BC meaning \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 97 \NC a \NC list of attributes (a node list) \NC \NR
+\NC 100 \NC d \NC a \LUA\ number \NC \NR
+\NC 108 \NC l \NC a \LUA\ value (table, number, boolean, etc) \NC \NR
+\NC 110 \NC n \NC a node list \NC \NR
+\NC 115 \NC s \NC a \LUA\ string \NC \NR
+\NC 116 \NC t \NC a \LUA\ token list in \LUA\ table form (a list of triplets) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {save_pos}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {late_lua}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC string or function \NC the to be written information stored as \LUA\ value \NC \NR
+\NC \type{token} \NC string \NC the to be written information stored as token list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{name} \NC string \NC the name to use for \LUA\ error reporting \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The difference between \type {data} and \type {string} is that on assignment, the
+\type {data} field is converted to a token list, cf.\ use as \lpr {latelua}. The
+\type {string} version is treated as a literal string.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={\DVI\ backend whatsits}]
+
+\subsection{\whs {special}}
+
+There is only one \DVI\ backend whatsit, and it just flushes its content to the
+output file.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the \prm {special} information \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={\PDF\ backend whatsits}]
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_literal}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mode} \NC number \NC the \quote {mode} setting of this literal \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the to be written information stored as \LUA\ string \NC \NR
+\NC \type{token} \NC string \NC the to be written information stored as token list \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Possible mode values are:
+
+\starttabulate[|c|p|]
+\DB value \BC keyword \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC \type{origin} \NC \NR
+\NC 1 \NC \type{page} \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC \type{direct} \NC \NR
+\NC 3 \NC \type{raw} \NC \NR
+\NC 4 \NC \type{text} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The higher the number, the less checking and the more you can run into trouble.
+Especially the \type {raw} variant can produce bad \PDF\ so you can best check
+what you generate.
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_refobj}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the referenced \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_annot}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the referenced \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the annotation data \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_start_link}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the referenced \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{link_attr} \NC table \NC the link attribute token list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{action} \NC node \NC the action to perform \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_end_link}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_dest}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC is the \type {dest_id} a string value? \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dest_id} \NC number \NC the destination id \NC \NR
+\NC \NC string \NC the destination name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dest_type} \NC number \NC type of destination \NC \NR
+\NC \type{xyz_zoom} \NC number \NC the zoom factor (times 1000) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{objnum} \NC number \NC the \PDF\ object number \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_action}}
+
+These are a special kind of items that only appear inside \PDF\ start link
+objects.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{action_type} \NC number \NC the kind of action involved \NC \NR
+\NC \type{action_id} \NC number or string \NC token list reference or string \NC \NR
+\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC the index of the destination \NC \NR
+\NC \type{file} \NC string \NC the target filename \NC \NR
+\NC \type{new_window} \NC number \NC the window state of the target \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC the name of the destination \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Valid action types are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC \type{page} \NC \NR
+\NC 1 \NC \type{goto} \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC \type{thread} \NC \NR
+\NC 3 \NC \type{user} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Valid window types are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|]
+\DB value \BC meaning \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC 0 \NC \type{notset} \NC \NR
+\NC 1 \NC \type{new} \NC \NR
+\NC 2 \NC \type{nonew} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_thread}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC is \type {tread_id} a string value? \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tread_id} \NC number \NC the thread id \NC \NR
+\NC \NC string \NC the thread name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{thread_attr} \NC number \NC extra thread information \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_start_thread}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{width} \NC number \NC the width (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{height} \NC number \NC the height (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{depth} \NC number \NC the depth (not used in calculations) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{named_id} \NC number \NC is \type {tread_id} a string value? \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tread_id} \NC number \NC the thread id \NC \NR
+\NC \NC string \NC the thread name \NC \NR
+\NC \type{thread_attr} \NC number \NC extra thread information \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_end_thread}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_colorstack}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stack} \NC number \NC colorstack id number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{command} \NC number \NC command to execute \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC data \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_setmatrix}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{data} \NC string \NC data \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_save}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\whs {pdf_restore}}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{attr} \NC node \NC list of attributes \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {node} library}][library=node]
+
+\subsection {Introduction}
+
+The \type {node} library contains functions that facilitate dealing with (lists
+of) nodes and their values. They allow you to create, alter, copy, delete, and
+insert \LUATEX\ node objects, the core objects within the typesetter.
+
+\LUATEX\ nodes are represented in \LUA\ as userdata with the metadata type
+\type {luatex.node}. The various parts within a node can be accessed using
+named fields.
+
+Each node has at least the three fields \type {next}, \type {id}, and \type {subtype}:
+
+\startitemize[intro]
+
+\startitem
+ The \type {next} field returns the userdata object for the next node in a
+ linked list of nodes, or \type {nil}, if there is no next node.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \type {id} indicates \TEX's \quote{node type}. The field \type {id} has a
+ numeric value for efficiency reasons, but some of the library functions also
+ accept a string value instead of \type {id}.
+\stopitem
+
+\startitem
+ The \type {subtype} is another number. It often gives further information
+ about a node of a particular \type {id}, but it is most important when
+ dealing with \quote {whatsits}, because they are differentiated solely based
+ on their \type {subtype}.
+\stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+The other available fields depend on the \type {id} (and for \quote {whatsits},
+the \type {subtype}) of the node.
+
+Support for \nod {unset} (alignment) nodes is partial: they can be queried and
+modified from \LUA\ code, but not created.
+
+Nodes can be compared to each other, but: you are actually comparing indices into
+the node memory. This means that equality tests can only be trusted under very
+limited conditions. It will not work correctly in any situation where one of the
+two nodes has been freed and|/|or reallocated: in that case, there will be false
+positives.
+
+At the moment, memory management of nodes should still be done explicitly by the
+user. Nodes are not \quote {seen} by the \LUA\ garbage collector, so you have to
+call the node freeing functions yourself when you are no longer in need of a node
+(list). Nodes form linked lists without reference counting, so you have to be
+careful that when control returns back to \LUATEX\ itself, you have not deleted
+nodes that are still referenced from a \type {next} pointer elsewhere, and that
+you did not create nodes that are referenced more than once. Normally the setters
+and getters handle this for you.
+
+There are statistics available with regards to the allocated node memory, which
+can be handy for tracing.
+
+\subsection{\type {is_node}}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+functions}
+
+\libindex {is_node}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean|integer> t =
+ node.is_node(<any> item)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns a number (the internal index of the node) if the argument
+is a userdata object of type \type {<node>} and false when no node is passed.
+
+\subsection{\type {types} and \type {whatsits}}
+
+\libindex {types}
+\libindex {whatsits}
+
+This function returns an array that maps node id numbers to node type strings,
+providing an overview of the possible top|-|level \type {id} types.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> t =
+ node.types()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\TEX's \quote {whatsits} all have the same \type {id}. The various subtypes are
+defined by their \type {subtype} fields. The function is much like \type {types},
+except that it provides an array of \type {subtype} mappings.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> t =
+ node.whatsits()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {id}}
+
+\libindex{id}
+
+This converts a single type name to its internal numeric representation.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> id =
+ node.id(<string> type)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {type} and \type {subtype}}
+
+\libindex {type}
+\libindex {subtype}
+
+In the argument is a number, then the next function converts an internal numeric
+representation to an external string representation. Otherwise, it will return
+the string \type {node} if the object represents a node, and \type {nil}
+otherwise.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> type =
+ node.type(<any> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This next one converts a single whatsit name to its internal numeric
+representation (\type {subtype}).
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> subtype =
+ node.subtype(<string> type)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {fields}}
+
+\libindex {fields}
+
+This function returns an array of valid field names for a particular type of
+node. If you want to get the valid fields for a \quote {whatsit}, you have to
+supply the second argument also. In other cases, any given second argument will
+be silently ignored.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> t =
+ node.fields(<number> id)
+<table> t =
+ node.fields(<number> id, <number> subtype)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The function accepts string \type {id} and \type {subtype} values as well.
+
+\subsection{\type {has_field}}
+
+\libindex {has_field}
+
+This function returns a boolean that is only true if \type {n} is
+actually a node, and it has the field.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean> t =
+ node.has_field(<node> n, <string> field)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {new}}
+
+\libindex{new}
+
+The \type {new} function creates a new node. All its fields are initialized to
+either zero or \type {nil} except for \type {id} and \type {subtype}. Instead of
+numbers you can also use strings (names). If you create a new \nod {whatsit} node
+the second argument is required. As with all node functions, this function
+creates a node at the \TEX\ level.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n =
+ node.new(<number> id)
+<node> n =
+ node.new(<number> id, <number> subtype)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {free}, \type {flush_node} and \type {flush_list}}
+
+\libindex{free}
+\libindex{flush_node}
+\libindex{flush_list}
+
+The next one the node \type {n} from \TEX's memory. Be careful: no checks are
+done on whether this node is still pointed to from a register or some \type
+{next} field: it is up to you to make sure that the internal data structures
+remain correct.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> next =
+ node.free(<node> n)
+flush_node(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type {free} function returns the next field of the freed node, while the
+\type {flush_node} alternative returns nothing.
+
+A list starting with node \type {n} can be flushed from \TEX's memory too. Be
+careful: no checks are done on whether any of these nodes is still pointed to
+from a register or some \type {next} field: it is up to you to make sure that the
+internal data structures remain correct.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.flush_list(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {copy} and \type {copy_list}}
+
+\libindex{copy}
+\libindex{copy_list}
+
+This creates a deep copy of node \type {n}, including all nested lists as in the case
+of a hlist or vlist node. Only the \type {next} field is not copied.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> m =
+ node.copy(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+A deep copy of the node list that starts at \type {n} can be created too. If
+\type {m} is also given, the copy stops just before node \type {m}.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> m =
+ node.copy_list(<node> n)
+<node> m =
+ node.copy_list(<node> n, <node> m)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Note that you cannot copy attribute lists this way. However, there is normally no
+need to copy attribute lists as when you do assignments to the \type {attr} field
+or make changes to specific attributes, the needed copying and freeing takes
+place automatically.
+
+\subsection{\type {prev} and \type{next}}
+
+\libindex{prev}
+\libindex{next}
+
+These returns the node preceding or following the given node, or \type {nil} if
+there is no such node.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> m =
+ node.next(<node> n)
+<node> m =
+ node.prev(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {current_attr}}
+
+\libindex{current_attr}
+
+This returns the currently active list of attributes, if there is one.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> m =
+ node.current_attr()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The intended usage of \type {current_attr} is as follows:
+
+\starttyping
+local x1 = node.new("glyph")
+x1.attr = node.current_attr()
+local x2 = node.new("glyph")
+x2.attr = node.current_attr()
+\stoptyping
+
+or:
+
+\starttyping
+local x1 = node.new("glyph")
+local x2 = node.new("glyph")
+local ca = node.current_attr()
+x1.attr = ca
+x2.attr = ca
+\stoptyping
+
+The attribute lists are ref counted and the assignment takes care of incrementing
+the refcount. You cannot expect the value \type {ca} to be valid any more when
+you assign attributes (using \type {tex.setattribute}) or when control has been
+passed back to \TEX.
+
+Note: this function is somewhat experimental, and it returns the {\it actual}
+attribute list, not a copy thereof. Therefore, changing any of the attributes in
+the list will change these values for all nodes that have the current attribute
+list assigned to them.
+
+\subsection{\type {hpack}}
+
+\libindex {hpack}
+
+This function creates a new hlist by packaging the list that begins at node \type
+{n} into a horizontal box. With only a single argument, this box is created using
+the natural width of its components. In the three argument form, \type {info}
+must be either \type {additional} or \type {exactly}, and \type {w} is the
+additional (\type {\hbox spread}) or exact (\type {\hbox to}) width to be used.
+The second return value is the badness of the generated box.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> h, <number> b =
+ node.hpack(<node> n)
+<node> h, <number> b =
+ node.hpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info)
+<node> h, <number> b =
+ node.hpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info, <string> dir)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Caveat: there can be unexpected side|-|effects to this function, like updating
+some of the \prm {marks} and \type {\inserts}. Also note that the content of
+\type {h} is the original node list \type {n}: if you call \type {node.free(h)}
+you will also free the node list itself, unless you explicitly set the \type
+{list} field to \type {nil} beforehand. And in a similar way, calling \type
+{node.free(n)} will invalidate \type {h} as well!
+
+\subsection{\type {vpack}}
+
+\libindex {vpack}
+
+This function creates a new vlist by packaging the list that begins at node \type
+{n} into a vertical box. With only a single argument, this box is created using
+the natural height of its components. In the three argument form, \type {info}
+must be either \type {additional} or \type {exactly}, and \type {w} is the
+additional (\type {\vbox spread}) or exact (\type {\vbox to}) height to be used.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> h, <number> b =
+ node.vpack(<node> n)
+<node> h, <number> b =
+ node.vpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info)
+<node> h, <number> b =
+ node.vpack(<node> n, <number> w, <string> info, <string> dir)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The second return value is the badness of the generated box. See the description
+of \type {hpack} for a few memory allocation caveats.
+
+\subsection{\type {prepend_prevdepth}}
+
+\libindex {prepend_prevdepth}
+
+This function is somewhat special in the sense that it is an experimental helper
+that adds the interlinespace to a line keeping the baselineskip and lineskip into
+account.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n, <number> delta =
+ node.prepend_prevdepth(<node> n,<number> prevdepth)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {dimensions} and \type {rangedimensions}}
+
+\libindex{dimensions}
+\libindex{rangedimensions}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<node> n)
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<node> n, <string> dir)
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<node> n, <node> t)
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<node> n, <node> t, <string> dir)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function calculates the natural in|-|line dimensions of the node list starting
+at node \type {n} and terminating just before node \type {t} (or the end of the
+list, if there is no second argument). The return values are scaled points. An
+alternative format that starts with glue parameters as the first three arguments
+is also possible:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
+ <node> n)
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
+ <node> n, <string> dir)
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
+ <node> n, <node> t)
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.dimensions(<number> glue_set, <number> glue_sign, <number> glue_order,
+ <node> n, <node> t, <string> dir)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This calling method takes glue settings into account and is especially useful for
+finding the actual width of a sublist of nodes that are already boxed, for
+example in code like this, which prints the width of the space in between the
+\type {a} and \type {b} as it would be if \type {\box0} was used as-is:
+
+\starttyping
+\setbox0 = \hbox to 20pt {a b}
+
+\directlua{print (node.dimensions(
+ tex.box[0].glue_set,
+ tex.box[0].glue_sign,
+ tex.box[0].glue_order,
+ tex.box[0].head.next,
+ node.tail(tex.box[0].head)
+)) }
+\stoptyping
+
+You need to keep in mind that this is one of the few places in \TEX\ where floats
+are used, which means that you can get small differences in rounding when you
+compare the width reported by \type {hpack} with \type {dimensions}.
+
+The second alternative saves a few lookups and can be more convenient in some
+cases:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.rangedimensions(<node> parent, <node> first)
+<number> w, <number> h, <number> d =
+ node.rangedimensions(<node> parent, <node> first, <node> last)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {mlist_to_hlist}}
+
+\libindex {mlist_to_hlist}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> h =
+ node.mlist_to_hlist(<node> n, <string> display_type, <boolean> penalties)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This runs the internal mlist to hlist conversion, converting the math list in
+\type {n} into the horizontal list \type {h}. The interface is exactly the same
+as for the callback \cbk {mlist_to_hlist}.
+
+\subsection{\type {slide}}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> m =
+ node.slide(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Returns the last node of the node list that starts at \type {n}. As a
+side|-|effect, it also creates a reverse chain of \type {prev} pointers between
+nodes.
+
+\subsection{\type {tail}}
+
+\libindex {tail}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> m =
+ node.tail(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Returns the last node of the node list that starts at \type {n}.
+
+\subsection{\type {length} and type {count}}
+
+\libindex {length}
+\libindex {count}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ node.length(<node> n)
+<number> i =
+ node.length(<node> n, <node> m)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Returns the number of nodes contained in the node list that starts at \type {n}.
+If \type {m} is also supplied it stops at \type {m} instead of at the end of the
+list. The node \type {m} is not counted.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> i =
+ node.count(<number> id, <node> n)
+<number> i =
+ node.count(<number> id, <node> n, <node> m)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Returns the number of nodes contained in the node list that starts at \type {n}
+that have a matching \type {id} field. If \type {m} is also supplied, counting
+stops at \type {m} instead of at the end of the list. The node \type {m} is not
+counted. This function also accept string \type {id}'s.
+
+\subsection{\type {is_char} and \type {is_glyph}}
+
+\libindex {is_char}
+\libindex {is_glyph}
+
+The subtype of a glyph node signals if the glyph is already turned into a character reference
+or not.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean> b =
+ node.is_char(<node> n)
+<boolean> b =
+ node.is_glyph(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {traverse}}
+
+\libindex {traverse}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> t, id, subtype =
+ node.traverse(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This is a \LUA\ iterator that loops over the node list that starts at \type {n}.
+Typically code looks like this:
+
+\starttyping
+for n in node.traverse(head) do
+ ...
+end
+\stoptyping
+
+is functionally equivalent to:
+
+\starttyping
+do
+ local n
+ local function f (head,var)
+ local t
+ if var == nil then
+ t = head
+ else
+ t = var.next
+ end
+ return t
+ end
+ while true do
+ n = f (head, n)
+ if n == nil then break end
+ ...
+ end
+end
+\stoptyping
+
+It should be clear from the definition of the function \type {f} that even though
+it is possible to add or remove nodes from the node list while traversing, you
+have to take great care to make sure all the \type {next} (and \type {prev})
+pointers remain valid.
+
+If the above is unclear to you, see the section \quote {For Statement} in the
+\LUA\ Reference Manual.
+
+\subsection{\type {traverse_id}}
+
+\libindex {traverse_id}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> t, subtype =
+ node.traverse_id(<number> id, <node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This is an iterator that loops over all the nodes in the list that starts at
+\type {n} that have a matching \type {id} field.
+
+See the previous section for details. The change is in the local function \type
+{f}, which now does an extra while loop checking against the upvalue \type {id}:
+
+\starttyping
+ local function f(head,var)
+ local t
+ if var == nil then
+ t = head
+ else
+ t = var.next
+ end
+ while not t.id == id do
+ t = t.next
+ end
+ return t
+ end
+\stoptyping
+
+\subsection{\type {traverse_char} and \type {traverse_glyph}}
+
+\libindex {traverse_char}
+\libindex {traverse_glyph}
+
+The \type{traverse_char} iterator loops over the \nod {glyph} nodes in a list.
+Only nodes with a subtype less than 256 are seen.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n, font, char =
+ node.traverse_char(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The \type{traverse_glyph} iterator loops over a list and returns the list and
+filters all glyphs:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n, font, char =
+ node.traverse_glyph(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {traverse_list}}
+
+\libindex {traverse_list}
+
+This iterator loops over the \nod {hlist} and \nod {vlist} nodes in a list.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n, id, subtype, list =
+ node.traverse_list(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The four return values can save some time compared to fetching these fields but
+in practice you seldom need them all. So consider it a (side effect of
+experimental) convenience.
+
+\subsection{\type {has_glyph}}
+
+\libindex {has_glyph}
+
+This function returns the first glyph or disc node in the given list:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n =
+ node.has_glyph(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {end_of_math}}
+
+\libindex {end_of_math}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> t =
+ node.end_of_math(<node> start)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Looks for and returns the next \type {math_node} following the \type {start}. If
+the given node is a math end node this helper returns that node, else it follows
+the list and returns the next math endnote. If no such node is found nil is
+returned.
+
+\subsection{\type {remove}}
+
+\libindex {remove}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> head, current =
+ node.remove(<node> head, <node> current)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function removes the node \type {current} from the list following \type
+{head}. It is your responsibility to make sure it is really part of that list.
+The return values are the new \type {head} and \type {current} nodes. The
+returned \type {current} is the node following the \type {current} in the calling
+argument, and is only passed back as a convenience (or \type {nil}, if there is
+no such node). The returned \type {head} is more important, because if the
+function is called with \type {current} equal to \type {head}, it will be
+changed.
+
+\subsection{\type {insert_before}}
+
+\libindex {insert_before}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> head, new =
+ node.insert_before(<node> head, <node> current, <node> new)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function inserts the node \type {new} before \type {current} into the list
+following \type {head}. It is your responsibility to make sure that \type
+{current} is really part of that list. The return values are the (potentially
+mutated) \type {head} and the node \type {new}, set up to be part of the list
+(with correct \type {next} field). If \type {head} is initially \type {nil}, it
+will become \type {new}.
+
+\subsection{\type {insert_after}}
+
+\libindex {insert_after}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> head, new =
+ node.insert_after(<node> head, <node> current, <node> new)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function inserts the node \type {new} after \type {current} into the list
+following \type {head}. It is your responsibility to make sure that \type
+{current} is really part of that list. The return values are the \type {head} and
+the node \type {new}, set up to be part of the list (with correct \type {next}
+field). If \type {head} is initially \type {nil}, it will become \type {new}.
+
+\subsection{\type {first_glyph}}
+
+\libindex {first_glyph}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n =
+ node.first_glyph(<node> n)
+<node> n =
+ node.first_glyph(<node> n, <node> m)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Returns the first node in the list starting at \type {n} that is a glyph node
+with a subtype indicating it is a glyph, or \type {nil}. If \type {m} is given,
+processing stops at (but including) that node, otherwise processing stops at the
+end of the list.
+
+\subsection{\type {ligaturing}}
+
+\libindex {ligaturing}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
+ node.ligaturing(<node> n)
+<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
+ node.ligaturing(<node> n, <node> m)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Apply \TEX-style ligaturing to the specified nodelist. The tail node \type {m} is
+optional. The two returned nodes \type {h} and \type {t} are the new head and
+tail (both \type {n} and \type {m} can change into a new ligature).
+
+\subsection{\type {kerning}}
+
+\libindex {kerning}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
+ node.kerning(<node> n)
+<node> h, <node> t, <boolean> success =
+ node.kerning(<node> n, <node> m)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Apply \TEX|-|style kerning to the specified node list. The tail node \type {m} is
+optional. The two returned nodes \type {h} and \type {t} are the head and tail
+(either one of these can be an inserted kern node, because special kernings with
+word boundaries are possible).
+
+\subsection{\type {unprotect_glyph[s]}}
+
+\libindex {unprotect_glyphs}
+\libindex {unprotect_glyph}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.unprotect_glyph(<node> n)
+node.unprotect_glyphs(<node> n,[<node> n])
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Subtracts 256 from all glyph node subtypes. This and the next function are
+helpers to convert from \type {characters} to \type {glyphs} during node
+processing. The second argument is optional and indicates the end of a range.
+
+\subsection{\type {protect_glyph[s]}}
+
+\libindex {protect_glyphs}
+\libindex {protect_glyph}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.protect_glyph(<node> n)
+node.protect_glyphs(<node> n,[<node> n])
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Adds 256 to all glyph node subtypes in the node list starting at \type {n},
+except that if the value is 1, it adds only 255. The special handling of 1 means
+that \type {characters} will become \type {glyphs} after subtraction of 256. A
+single character can be marked by the singular call. The second argument is
+optional and indicates the end of a range.
+
+\subsection{\type {last_node}}
+
+\libindex {last_node}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> n =
+ node.last_node()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function pops the last node from \TEX's \quote{current list}. It returns
+that node, or \type {nil} if the current list is empty.
+
+\subsection{\type {write}}
+
+\libindex {write}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.write(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function that will append a node list to \TEX's \quote {current list}. The
+node list is not deep|-|copied! There is no error checking either! You mignt need
+to enforce horizontal mode in order for this to work as expected.
+
+\subsection{\type {protrusion_skippable}}
+
+\libindex {protrusion_skippable}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean> skippable =
+ node.protrusion_skippable(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Returns \type {true} if, for the purpose of line boundary discovery when
+character protrusion is active, this node can be skipped.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Glue handling}][library=node]
+
+\subsection{\type {setglue}}
+
+\libindex {setglue}
+
+You can set the properties of a glue in one go. If you pass no values, the glue
+will become a zero glue.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.setglue(<node> n)
+node.setglue(<node> n,width,stretch,shrink,stretch_order,shrink_order)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+When you pass values, only arguments that are numbers are assigned so
+
+\starttyping
+node.setglue(n,655360,false,65536)
+\stoptyping
+
+will only adapt the width and shrink.
+
+When a list node is passed, you set the glue, order and sign instead.
+
+\subsection{\type {getglue}}
+
+\libindex {getglue}
+
+The next call will return 5 values or nothing when no glue is passed.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<integer> width, <integer> stretch, <integer> shrink, <integer> stretch_order,
+ <integer> shrink_order = node.getglue(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+When the second argument is false, only the width is returned (this is consistent
+with \type {tex.get}).
+
+When a list node is passed, you get back the glue that is set, the order of that
+glue and the sign.
+
+\subsection{\type {is_zero_glue}}
+
+\libindex {is_zero_glue}
+
+This function returns \type {true} when the width, stretch and shrink properties
+are zero.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<boolean> isglue =
+ node.is_zero_glue(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Attribute handling}][library=node]
+
+\subsection{Attributes}
+
+\topicindex {attributes}
+
+The newly introduced attribute registers are non|-|trivial, because the value
+that is attached to a node is essentially a sparse array of key|-|value pairs. It
+is generally easiest to deal with attribute lists and attributes by using the
+dedicated functions in the \type {node} library, but for completeness, here is
+the low|-|level interface.
+
+Attributes appear as linked list of userdata objects in the \type {attr} field of
+individual nodes. They can be handled individually, but it is much safer and more
+efficient to use the dedicated functions associated with them.
+
+\subsection{\nod {attribute_list} nodes}
+
+\topicindex {nodes+attributes}
+
+An \nod {attribute_list} item is used as a head pointer for a list of attribute
+items. It has only one user-visible field:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{next} \NC node \NC pointer to the first attribute \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\subsection{\nod {attr} nodes}
+
+A normal node's attribute field will point to an item of type \nod
+{attribute_list}, and the \type {next} field in that item will point to the first
+defined \quote {attribute} item, whose \type {next} will point to the second
+\quote {attribute} item, etc.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{next} \NC node \NC pointer to the next attribute \NC \NR
+\NC \type{number} \NC number \NC the attribute type id \NC \NR
+\NC \type{value} \NC number \NC the attribute value \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+As mentioned it's better to use the official helpers rather than edit these
+fields directly. For instance the \type {prev} field is used for other purposes
+and there is no double linked list.
+
+\subsection{\type {has_attribute}}
+
+\libindex {has_attribute}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> v =
+ node.has_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
+<number> v =
+ node.has_attribute(<node> n, <number> id, <number> val)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Tests if a node has the attribute with number \type {id} set. If \type {val} is
+also supplied, also tests if the value matches \type {val}. It returns the value,
+or, if no match is found, \type {nil}.
+
+\subsection{\type {get_attribute}}
+
+\libindex {get_attribute}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> v =
+ node.get_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Tests if a node has an attribute with number \type {id} set. It returns the
+value, or, if no match is found, \type {nil}. If no \type {id} is given then the
+zero attributes is assumed.
+
+\subsection{\type {find_attribute}}
+
+\libindex {find_attribute}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> v, <node> n =
+ node.find_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Finds the first node that has attribute with number \type {id} set. It returns
+the value and the node if there is a match and otherwise nothing.
+
+\subsection{\type {set_attribute}}
+
+\libindex {set_attribute}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.set_attribute(<node> n, <number> id, <number> val)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Sets the attribute with number \type {id} to the value \type {val}. Duplicate
+assignments are ignored.
+
+\subsection{\type {unset_attribute}}
+
+\libindex {unset_attribute}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> v =
+ node.unset_attribute(<node> n, <number> id)
+<number> v =
+ node.unset_attribute(<node> n, <number> id, <number> val)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Unsets the attribute with number \type {id}. If \type {val} is also supplied, it
+will only perform this operation if the value matches \type {val}. Missing
+attributes or attribute|-|value pairs are ignored.
+
+If the attribute was actually deleted, returns its old value. Otherwise, returns
+\type {nil}.
+
+\subsection{\type {slide}}
+
+\libindex {slide}
+
+This helper makes sure that the node lists is double linked and returns the found
+tail node.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> tail =
+ node.slide(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+After some callbacks automatic sliding takes place. This feature can be turned
+off with \type {node.fix_node_lists(false)} but you better make sure then that
+you don't mess up lists. In most cases \TEX\ itself only uses \type {next}
+pointers but your other callbacks might expect proper \type {prev} pointers too.
+Future versions of \LUATEX\ can add more checking but this will not influence
+usage.
+
+\subsection{\type {check_discretionary}, \type {check_discretionaries}}
+
+\libindex{check_discretionary}
+\libindex{check_discretionaries}
+
+When you fool around with disc nodes you need to be aware of the fact that they
+have a special internal data structure. As long as you reassign the fields when
+you have extended the lists it's ok because then the tail pointers get updated,
+but when you add to list without reassigning you might end up in trouble when
+the linebreak routine kicks in. You can call this function to check the list for
+issues with disc nodes.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.check_discretionary(<node> n)
+node.check_discretionaries(<node> head)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The plural variant runs over all disc nodes in a list, the singular variant
+checks one node only (it also checks if the node is a disc node).
+
+\subsection{\type {flatten_discretionaries}}
+
+\libindex {flatten_discretionaries}
+
+This function will remove the discretionaries in the list and inject the replace
+field when set.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<node> head, count = node.flatten_discretionaries(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsection{\type {family_font}}
+
+\libindex {family_font}
+
+When you pass a proper family identifier the next helper will return the font
+currently associated with it. You can normally also access the font with the
+normal font field or getter because it will resolve the family automatically for
+noads.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<integer> id =
+ node.family_font(<integer> fam)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Two access models}][library=node]
+
+\topicindex{nodes+direct}
+\topicindex{direct nodes}
+
+\libindex {todirect}
+\libindex {tonode}
+\libindex {tostring}
+
+Deep down in \TEX\ a node has a number which is a numeric entry in a memory
+table. In fact, this model, where \TEX\ manages memory is real fast and one of
+the reasons why plugging in callbacks that operate on nodes is quite fast too.
+Each node gets a number that is in fact an index in the memory table and that
+number often is reported when you print node related information. You go from
+userdata nodes and there numeric references and back with:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<integer> d = node.todirect(<node> n))
+<node> n = node.tonode(<integer> d))
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The userdata model is rather robust as it is a virtual interface with some
+additional checking while the more direct access which uses the node numbers
+directly. However, even with userdata you can get into troubles when you free
+nodes that are no longer allocated or mess up lists. if you apply \type
+{tostring} to a node you see its internal (direct) number and id.
+
+The first model provides key based access while the second always accesses fields
+via functions:
+
+\starttyping
+nodeobject.char
+getfield(nodenumber,"char")
+\stoptyping
+
+If you use the direct model, even if you know that you deal with numbers, you
+should not depend on that property but treat it as an abstraction just like
+traditional nodes. In fact, the fact that we use a simple basic datatype has the
+penalty that less checking can be done, but less checking is also the reason why
+it's somewhat faster. An important aspect is that one cannot mix both methods,
+but you can cast both models. So, multiplying a node number makes no sense.
+
+So our advice is: use the indexed (table) approach when possible and investigate
+the direct one when speed might be a real issue. For that reason \LUATEX\ also
+provide the \type {get*} and \type {set*} functions in the top level node
+namespace. There is a limited set of getters. When implementing this direct
+approach the regular index by key variant was also optimized, so direct access
+only makes sense when nodes are accessed millions of times (which happens in some
+font processing for instance).
+
+We're talking mostly of getters because setters are less important. Documents
+have not that many content related nodes and setting many thousands of properties
+is hardly a burden contrary to millions of consultations.
+
+Normally you will access nodes like this:
+
+\starttyping
+local next = current.next
+if next then
+ -- do something
+end
+\stoptyping
+
+Here \type {next} is not a real field, but a virtual one. Accessing it results in
+a metatable method being called. In practice it boils down to looking up the node
+type and based on the node type checking for the field name. In a worst case you
+have a node type that sits at the end of the lookup list and a field that is last
+in the lookup chain. However, in successive versions of \LUATEX\ these lookups
+have been optimized and the most frequently accessed nodes and fields have a
+higher priority.
+
+Because in practice the \type {next} accessor results in a function call, there
+is some overhead involved. The next code does the same and performs a tiny bit
+faster (but not that much because it is still a function call but one that knows
+what to look up).
+
+\starttyping
+local next = node.next(current)
+if next then
+ -- do something
+end
+\stoptyping
+
+Some accessors are used frequently and for these we provide more efficient helpers:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB function \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{getnext} \NC parsing nodelist always involves this one \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getprev} \NC used less but a logical companion to \type {getnext} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getboth} \NC returns the next and prev pointer of a node \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getid} \NC consulted a lot \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getsubtype} \NC consulted less but also a topper \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getfont} \NC used a lot in \OPENTYPE\ handling (glyph nodes are consulted a lot) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getchar} \NC idem and also in other places \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getwhd} \NC returns the \type {width}, \type {height} and \type {depth} of a list, rule or
+ (unexpanded) glyph as well as glue (its spec is looked at) and unset nodes\NC \NR
+\NC \type{getdisc} \NC returns the \type {pre}, \type {post} and \type {replace} fields and
+ optionally when true is passed also the tail fields \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getlist} \NC we often parse nested lists so this is a convenient one too \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getleader} \NC comparable to list, seldom used in \TEX\ (but needs frequent consulting
+ like lists; leaders could have been made a dedicated node type) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getfield} \NC generic getter, sufficient for the rest (other field names are
+ often shared so a specific getter makes no sense then) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getbox} \NC gets the given box (a list node) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{getoffsets} \NC gets the \type {xoffset} and \type {yoffset} of a glyph or
+ \type {left} and \type {right} values of a rule \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+In the direct namespace there are more such helpers and most of them are
+accompanied by setters. The getters and setters are clever enough to see what
+node is meant. We don't deal with whatsit nodes: their fields are always accessed
+by name. It doesn't make sense to add getters for all fields, we just identifier
+the most likely candidates. In complex documents, many node and fields types
+never get seen, or seen only a few times, but for instance glyphs are candidates
+for such optimization. The \type {node.direct} interface has some more helpers.
+\footnote {We can define the helpers in the node namespace with \type {getfield}
+which is about as efficient, so at some point we might provide that as module.}
+
+The \type {setdisc} helper takes three (optional) arguments plus an optional
+fourth indicating the subtype. Its \type {getdisc} takes an optional boolean;
+when its value is \type {true} the tail nodes will also be returned. The \type
+{setfont} helper takes an optional second argument, it being the character. The
+directmode setter \type {setlink} takes a list of nodes and will link them,
+thereby ignoring \type {nil} entries. The first valid node is returned (beware:
+for good reason it assumes single nodes). For rarely used fields no helpers are
+provided and there are a few that probably are used seldom too but were added for
+consistency. You can of course always define additional accessors using \type
+{getfield} and \type {setfield} with little overhead. When the second argument of
+\type {setattributelist} is \type {true} the current attribute list is assumed.
+
+\def\yes{$+$} \def\nop{$-$}
+
+\def\supported#1#2#3%
+ {\NC \type{#1}
+ \NC \ifx#2\yes\lix{node} {#1}\fi #2
+ \NC \ifx#3\yes\lix{node.direct}{#1}\fi #3 \NC
+ \NR}
+
+\starttabulate[|l|c|c|]
+\DB function \BC node \BC direct \NC \NR
+\TB
+\supported {check_discretionaries} \yes \yes
+\supported {check_discretionary} \yes \yes
+\supported {copy_list} \yes \yes
+\supported {copy} \yes \yes
+\supported {count} \yes \yes
+\supported {current_attr} \yes \yes
+\supported {dimensions} \yes \yes
+\supported {effective_glue} \yes \yes
+\supported {end_of_math} \yes \yes
+\supported {family_font} \yes \nop
+\supported {fields} \yes \nop
+\supported {find_attribute} \yes \yes
+\supported {first_glyph} \yes \yes
+\supported {flatten_discretionaries} \yes \yes
+\supported {flush_list} \yes \yes
+\supported {flush_node} \yes \yes
+\supported {free} \yes \yes
+\supported {get_attribute} \yes \yes
+\supported {get_synctex_fields} \nop \yes
+\supported {getattributelist} \nop \yes
+\supported {getboth} \yes \yes
+\supported {getbox} \nop \yes
+\supported {getchar} \yes \yes
+\supported {getcomponents} \nop \yes
+\supported {getdepth} \nop \yes
+\supported {getdirection} \nop \yes
+\supported {getdir} \nop \yes
+\supported {getdisc} \yes \yes
+\supported {getfam} \nop \yes
+\supported {getfield} \yes \yes
+\supported {getfont} \yes \yes
+\supported {getglue} \yes \yes
+\supported {getheight} \nop \yes
+\supported {getid} \yes \yes
+\supported {getkern} \nop \yes
+\supported {getlang} \nop \yes
+\supported {getleader} \yes \yes
+\supported {getlist} \yes \yes
+\supported {getnext} \yes \yes
+\supported {getnucleus} \nop \yes
+\supported {getoffsets} \nop \yes
+\supported {getpenalty} \nop \yes
+\supported {getprev} \yes \yes
+\supported {getproperty} \yes \yes
+\supported {getshift} \nop \yes
+\supported {getsubtype} \yes \yes
+\supported {getsub} \nop \yes
+\supported {getsup} \nop \yes
+\supported {getdata} \nop \yes
+\supported {getwhd} \yes \yes
+\supported {getwidth} \nop \yes
+\supported {has_attribute} \yes \yes
+\supported {has_field} \yes \yes
+\supported {has_glyph} \yes \yes
+\supported {hpack} \yes \yes
+\supported {id} \yes \nop
+\supported {insert_after} \yes \yes
+\supported {insert_before} \yes \yes
+\supported {is_char} \yes \yes
+\supported {is_direct} \nop \yes
+\supported {is_glyph} \yes \yes
+\supported {is_node} \yes \yes
+\supported {is_zero_glue} \yes \yes
+\supported {kerning} \yes \yes
+\supported {last_node} \yes \yes
+\supported {length} \yes \yes
+\supported {ligaturing} \yes \yes
+\supported {mlist_to_hlist} \yes \nop
+\supported {new} \yes \yes
+\supported {next} \yes \nop
+\supported {prepend_prevdepth} \nop \yes
+\supported {prev} \yes \nop
+\supported {protect_glyphs} \yes \yes
+\supported {protect_glyph} \yes \yes
+\supported {protrusion_skippable} \yes \yes
+\supported {rangedimensions} \yes \yes
+\supported {remove} \yes \yes
+\supported {set_attribute} \yes \yes
+\supported {set_synctex_fields} \nop \yes
+\supported {setattributelist} \nop \yes
+\supported {setboth} \nop \yes
+\supported {setbox} \nop \yes
+\supported {setchar} \nop \yes
+\supported {setcomponents} \nop \yes
+\supported {setdepth} \nop \yes
+\supported {setdirection} \nop \yes
+\supported {setdir} \nop \yes
+\supported {setdisc} \nop \yes
+\supported {setfam} \nop \yes
+\supported {setfield} \yes \yes
+\supported {setfont} \nop \yes
+\supported {setexpansion} \nop \yes
+\supported {setglue} \yes \yes
+\supported {setheight} \nop \yes
+\supported {setkern} \nop \yes
+\supported {setlang} \nop \yes
+\supported {setleader} \nop \yes
+\supported {setlink} \nop \yes
+\supported {setlist} \nop \yes
+\supported {setnext} \nop \yes
+\supported {setnucleus} \nop \yes
+\supported {setoffsets} \nop \yes
+\supported {setpenalty} \nop \yes
+\supported {setprev} \nop \yes
+\supported {setproperty} \yes \yes
+\supported {setshift} \nop \yes
+\supported {setsplit} \nop \yes
+\supported {setsubtype} \nop \yes
+\supported {setsub} \nop \yes
+\supported {setsup} \nop \yes
+\supported {setwhd} \nop \yes
+\supported {setwidth} \nop \yes
+\supported {slide} \yes \yes
+\supported {subtypes} \yes \nop
+\supported {subtype} \yes \nop
+\supported {tail} \yes \yes
+\supported {todirect} \yes \yes
+\supported {tonode} \yes \yes
+\supported {tostring} \yes \yes
+\supported {traverse_char} \yes \yes
+\supported {traverse_glyph} \yes \yes
+\supported {traverse_id} \yes \yes
+\supported {traverse} \yes \yes
+\supported {types} \yes \nop
+\supported {type} \yes \nop
+\supported {unprotect_glyphs} \yes \yes
+\supported {unprotect_glyph} \yes \yes
+\supported {unset_attribute} \yes \yes
+\supported {usedlist} \yes \yes
+\supported {uses_font} \yes \yes
+\supported {vpack} \yes \yes
+\supported {whatsits} \yes \nop
+\supported {write} \yes \yes
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {node.next} and \type {node.prev} functions will stay but for
+consistency there are variants called \type {getnext} and \type {getprev}. We had
+to use \type {get} because \type {node.id} and \type {node.subtype} are already
+taken for providing meta information about nodes. Note: The getters do only basic
+checking for valid keys. You should just stick to the keys mentioned in the
+sections that describe node properties.
+
+Some of the getters and setters handle multiple node types, given that the field
+is relevant. In that case, some field names are considered similar (like \type
+{kern} and \type {width}, or \type {data} and \type {value}. In retrospect we
+could have normalized field names better but we decided to stick to the original
+(internal) names as much as possible. After all, at the \LUA\ end one can easily
+create synonyms.
+
+Some nodes have indirect references. For instance a math character refers to a
+family instead of a font. In that case we provide a virtual font field as
+accessor. So, \type {getfont} and \type {.font} can be used on them. The same is
+true for the \type {width}, \type {height} and \type {depth} of glue nodes. These
+actually access the spec node properties, and here we can set as well as get the
+values.
+
+In some places \LUATEX\ can do a bit of extra checking for valid node lists and
+you can enable that with:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.fix_node_lists(<boolean> b)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+You can set and query the \SYNCTEX\ fields, a file number aka tag and a line
+number, for a glue, kern, hlist, vlist, rule and math nodes as well as glyph
+nodes (although this last one is not used in native \SYNCTEX).
+
+\startfunctioncall
+node.set_synctex_fields(<integer> f, <integer> l)
+<integer> f, <integer> l =
+ node.get_synctex_fields(<node> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Of course you need to know what you're doing as no checking on sane values takes
+place. Also, the synctex interpreter used in editors is rather peculiar and has
+some assumptions (heuristics).
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={Properties}][library=node]
+
+\topicindex {nodes+properties}
+\topicindex {properties}
+
+\libindex{flush_properties_table}
+\libindex{get_properties_table}
+\libindex{set_properties_mode}
+
+Attributes are a convenient way to relate extra information to a node. You can
+assign them at the \TEX\ end as well as at the \LUA\ end and and consult them at
+the \LUA\ end. One big advantage is that they obey grouping. They are linked
+lists and normally checking for them is pretty efficient, even if you use a lot
+of them. A macro package has to provide some way to manage these attributes at the
+\TEX\ end because otherwise clashes in their usage can occur.
+
+Each node also can have a properties table and you can assign values to this
+table using the \type {setproperty} function and get properties using the \type
+{getproperty} function. Managing properties is way more demanding than managing
+attributes.
+
+Take the following example:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ local n = node.new("glyph")
+
+ node.setproperty(n,"foo")
+ print(node.getproperty(n))
+
+ node.setproperty(n,"bar")
+ print(node.getproperty(n))
+
+ node.free(n)
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+This will print \type {foo} and \type {bar} which in itself is not that useful
+when multiple mechanisms want to use this feature. A variant is:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ local n = node.new("glyph")
+
+ node.setproperty(n,{ one = "foo", two = "bar" })
+ print(node.getproperty(n).one)
+ print(node.getproperty(n).two)
+
+ node.free(n)
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+This time we store two properties with the node. It really makes sense to have a
+table as property because that way we can store more. But in order for that to
+work well you need to do it this way:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ local n = node.new("glyph")
+
+ local t = node.getproperty(n)
+
+ if not t then
+ t = { }
+ node.setproperty(n,t)
+ end
+ t.one = "foo"
+ t.two = "bar"
+
+ print(node.getproperty(n).one)
+ print(node.getproperty(n).two)
+
+ node.free(n)
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+Here our own properties will not overwrite other users properties unless of
+course they use the same keys. So, eventually you will end up with something:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ local n = node.new("glyph")
+
+ local t = node.getproperty(n)
+
+ if not t then
+ t = { }
+ node.setproperty(n,t)
+ end
+ t.myself = { one = "foo", two = "bar" }
+
+ print(node.getproperty(n).myself.one)
+ print(node.getproperty(n).myself.two)
+
+ node.free(n)
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+This assumes that only you use \type {myself} as subtable. The possibilities are
+endless but care is needed. For instance, the generic font handler that ships
+with \CONTEXT\ uses the \type {injections} subtable and you should not mess with
+that one!
+
+There are a few helper functions that you normally should not touch as user: \typ
+{flush_properties_table} will wipe the table (normally a bad idea), \typ
+{get_properties_table} and will give the table that stores properties (using
+direct entries) and you can best not mess too much with that one either because
+\LUATEX\ itself will make sure that entries related to nodes will get wiped when
+nodes get freed, so that the \LUA\ garbage collector can do its job. In fact, the
+main reason why we have this mechanism is that it saves the user (or macro
+package) some work. One can easily write a property mechanism in \LUA\ where
+after a shipout properties gets cleaned up but it's not entirely trivial to make
+sure that with each freed node also its properties get freed, due to the fact
+that there can be nodes left over for a next page. And having a callback bound to
+the node deallocator would add way to much overhead.
+
+Managing properties in the node (de)allocator functions is disabled by default
+and is enabled by:
+
+\starttyping
+node.set_properties_mode(true)
+\stoptyping
+
+When we copy a node list that has a table as property, there are several possibilities: we do the same as
+a new node, we copy the entry to the table in properties (a reference), we do
+a deep copy of a table in the properties, we create a new table and give it
+the original one as a metatable. After some experiments (that also included
+timing) with these scenarios we decided that a deep copy made no sense, nor
+did nilling. In the end both the shallow copy and the metatable variant were
+both ok, although the second one is slower. The most important aspect to keep
+in mind is that references to other nodes in properties no longer can be
+valid for that copy. We could use two tables (one unique and one shared) or
+metatables but that only complicates matters.
+
+When defining a new node, we could already allocate a table but it is rather easy
+to do that at the lua end e.g.\ using a metatable \type {__index} method. That
+way it is under macro package control. When deleting a node, we could keep the
+slot (e.g. setting it to false) but it could make memory consumption raise
+unneeded when we have temporary large node lists and after that only small lists.
+Both are not done.
+
+So in the end this is what happens now: when a node is copied, and it has a table
+as property, the new node will share that table. If the second argument of \typ
+{set_properties_mode} is \type {true} then a metatable approach is chosen: the
+copy gets its own table with the original table as metatable. If you use the
+generic font loader the mode is enabled that way.
+
+A few more xperiments were done. For instance: copy attributes to the properties
+so that we have fast access at the \LUA\ end. In the end the overhead is not
+compensated by speed and convenience, in fact, attributes are not that slow when
+it comes to accessing them. So this was rejected.
+
+Another experiment concerned a bitset in the node but again the gain compared to
+attributes was neglectable and given the small amount of available bits it also
+demands a pretty strong agreement over what bit represents what, and this is
+unlikely to succeed in the \TEX\ community. It doesn't pay off.
+
+Just in case one wonders why properties make sense: it is not so much speed that
+we gain, but more convenience: storing all kind of (temporary) data in attributes
+is no fun and this mechanism makes sure that properties are cleaned up when a
+node is freed. Also, the advantage of a more or less global properties table is
+that we stay at the \LUA\ end. An alternative is to store a reference in the node
+itself but that is complicated by the fact that the register has some limitations
+(no numeric keys) and we also don't want to mess with it too much.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-preamble.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-preamble.tex
index 635ff4134b..8293179776 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-preamble.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-preamble.tex
@@ -1,110 +1,110 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-preamble
-
-\startchapter[reference=preamble,title={Preamble}]
-
-\topicindex{nodes}
-\topicindex{boxes}
-\topicindex{\LUA}
-
-This is a reference manual, not a tutorial. This means that we discuss changes
-relative to traditonal \TEX\ and also present new functionality. As a consequence
-we will refer to concepts that we assume to be known or that might be explained
-later.
-
-The average user doesn't need to know much about what is in this manual. For
-instance fonts and languages are normally dealt with in the macro package that
-you use. Messing around with node lists is also often not really needed at the
-user level. If you do mess around, you'd better know what you're dealing with.
-Reading \quotation {The \TEX\ Book} by Donald Knuth is a good investment of time
-then also because it's good to know where it all started. A more summarizing
-overview is given by \quotation {\TEX\ by Topic} by Victor Eijkhout. You might
-want to peek in \quotation {The \ETEX\ manual} and documentation about \PDFTEX.
-
-But \unknown\ if you're here because of \LUA, then all you need to know is that
-you can call it from within a run. The macro package that you use probably will
-provide a few wrapper mechanisms but the basic \lpr {directlua} command that
-does the job is:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua{tex.print("Hi there")}
-\stoptyping
-
-You can put code between curly braces but if it's a lot you can also put it in a
-file and load that file with the usual \LUA\ commands.
-
-If you still decide to read on, then it's good to know what nodes are, so we do a
-quick introduction here. If you input this text:
-
-\starttyping
-Hi There
-\stoptyping
-
-eventually we will get a linked lists of nodes, which in \ASCII\ art looks like:
-
-\starttyping
-H <=> i <=> [glue] <=> T <=> h <=> e <=> r <=> e
-\stoptyping
-
-When we have a paragraph, we actually get something:
-
-\starttyping
-[localpar] <=> H <=> i <=> [glue] <=> T <=> h <=> e <=> r <=> e <=> [glue]
-\stoptyping
-
-Each character becomes a so called glyph node, a record with properties like the
-current font, the character code and the current language. Spaces become glue
-nodes. There are many node types that we will discuss later. Each node points
-back to a previous node or next node, given that these exist.
-
-It's also good to know beforehand that \TEX\ is basically centered around
-creating paragraphs and pages. The par builder takes a list and breaks it into
-lines. We turn horizontal material into vertical. Lines are so called boxes and
-can be separated by glue, penalties and more. The page builder accumulates lines
-and when feasible triggers an output routine that will take the list so far.
-Constructing the actual page is not part of \TEX\ but done using primitives that
-permit manipulation of boxes. The result is handled back to \TEX\ and flushed to
-a (often \PDF) file.
-
-The \LUATEX\ engine provides hooks for \LUA\ code at nearly every reasonable
-point in the process: collecting content, hyphenating, applying font features,
-breaking into lines, etc. This means that you can overload \TEX's natural
-behaviour, which still is the benchmark. When we refer to \quote {callbacks} we
-means these hooks.
-
-Where plain \TEX\ is basically a basic framework for writing a specific style,
-macro packages like \CONTEXT\ and \LATEX\ provide the user a whole lot of
-additional tools to make documents look good. They hide the dirty details of font
-management, language demands, turning structure into typeset results, wrapping
-pages, including images, and so on. You should be aware of the fact that when you
-hook in your own code to manipulate lists, this can interfere with the macro
-package that you use.
-
-When you read about nodes in the following chapters it's good to keep in mind their
-commands that relate to then. Here are a few:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB command \BC node \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \prm {hbox} \NC \nod {hlist} \NC horizontal box \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {vbox} \NC \nod {vlist} \NC vertical box with the baseline at the bottom \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {vtop} \NC \nod {vlist} \NC vertical box with the baseline at the top \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {hskip} \NC \nod {glue} \NC horizontal skip with optional stretch and shrink \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {vskip} \NC \nod {glue} \NC vertical skip with optional stretch and shrink \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {kern} \NC \nod {kern} \NC horizontal or vertical fixed skip \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {discretionary} \NC \nod {disc} \NC hyphenation point (pre, post, replace) \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {char} \NC \nod {glyph} \NC a character \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {hrule} \NC \nod {rule} \NC a horizontal rule \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {vrule} \NC \nod {rule} \NC a vertical rule \NC \NR
-\NC \prm {textdir(ection)} \NC \nod {dir} \NC a change in text direction \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-For now this should be enough to enable you to understand the next chapters.
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-preamble
+
+\startchapter[reference=preamble,title={Preamble}]
+
+\topicindex{nodes}
+\topicindex{boxes}
+\topicindex{\LUA}
+
+This is a reference manual, not a tutorial. This means that we discuss changes
+relative to traditonal \TEX\ and also present new functionality. As a consequence
+we will refer to concepts that we assume to be known or that might be explained
+later.
+
+The average user doesn't need to know much about what is in this manual. For
+instance fonts and languages are normally dealt with in the macro package that
+you use. Messing around with node lists is also often not really needed at the
+user level. If you do mess around, you'd better know what you're dealing with.
+Reading \quotation {The \TEX\ Book} by Donald Knuth is a good investment of time
+then also because it's good to know where it all started. A more summarizing
+overview is given by \quotation {\TEX\ by Topic} by Victor Eijkhout. You might
+want to peek in \quotation {The \ETEX\ manual} and documentation about \PDFTEX.
+
+But \unknown\ if you're here because of \LUA, then all you need to know is that
+you can call it from within a run. The macro package that you use probably will
+provide a few wrapper mechanisms but the basic \lpr {directlua} command that
+does the job is:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua{tex.print("Hi there")}
+\stoptyping
+
+You can put code between curly braces but if it's a lot you can also put it in a
+file and load that file with the usual \LUA\ commands.
+
+If you still decide to read on, then it's good to know what nodes are, so we do a
+quick introduction here. If you input this text:
+
+\starttyping
+Hi There
+\stoptyping
+
+eventually we will get a linked lists of nodes, which in \ASCII\ art looks like:
+
+\starttyping
+H <=> i <=> [glue] <=> T <=> h <=> e <=> r <=> e
+\stoptyping
+
+When we have a paragraph, we actually get something:
+
+\starttyping
+[localpar] <=> H <=> i <=> [glue] <=> T <=> h <=> e <=> r <=> e <=> [glue]
+\stoptyping
+
+Each character becomes a so called glyph node, a record with properties like the
+current font, the character code and the current language. Spaces become glue
+nodes. There are many node types that we will discuss later. Each node points
+back to a previous node or next node, given that these exist.
+
+It's also good to know beforehand that \TEX\ is basically centered around
+creating paragraphs and pages. The par builder takes a list and breaks it into
+lines. We turn horizontal material into vertical. Lines are so called boxes and
+can be separated by glue, penalties and more. The page builder accumulates lines
+and when feasible triggers an output routine that will take the list so far.
+Constructing the actual page is not part of \TEX\ but done using primitives that
+permit manipulation of boxes. The result is handled back to \TEX\ and flushed to
+a (often \PDF) file.
+
+The \LUATEX\ engine provides hooks for \LUA\ code at nearly every reasonable
+point in the process: collecting content, hyphenating, applying font features,
+breaking into lines, etc. This means that you can overload \TEX's natural
+behaviour, which still is the benchmark. When we refer to \quote {callbacks} we
+means these hooks.
+
+Where plain \TEX\ is basically a basic framework for writing a specific style,
+macro packages like \CONTEXT\ and \LATEX\ provide the user a whole lot of
+additional tools to make documents look good. They hide the dirty details of font
+management, language demands, turning structure into typeset results, wrapping
+pages, including images, and so on. You should be aware of the fact that when you
+hook in your own code to manipulate lists, this can interfere with the macro
+package that you use.
+
+When you read about nodes in the following chapters it's good to keep in mind their
+commands that relate to then. Here are a few:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB command \BC node \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \prm {hbox} \NC \nod {hlist} \NC horizontal box \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {vbox} \NC \nod {vlist} \NC vertical box with the baseline at the bottom \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {vtop} \NC \nod {vlist} \NC vertical box with the baseline at the top \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {hskip} \NC \nod {glue} \NC horizontal skip with optional stretch and shrink \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {vskip} \NC \nod {glue} \NC vertical skip with optional stretch and shrink \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {kern} \NC \nod {kern} \NC horizontal or vertical fixed skip \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {discretionary} \NC \nod {disc} \NC hyphenation point (pre, post, replace) \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {char} \NC \nod {glyph} \NC a character \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {hrule} \NC \nod {rule} \NC a horizontal rule \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {vrule} \NC \nod {rule} \NC a vertical rule \NC \NR
+\NC \prm {textdir(ection)} \NC \nod {dir} \NC a change in text direction \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+For now this should be enough to enable you to understand the next chapters.
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-registers.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-registers.tex
index 2930230070..36b1ec0513 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-registers.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-registers.tex
@@ -1,47 +1,47 @@
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-registers
-
-\startchapter[title=Topics]
-
- \placeregister[topicindex]
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\startchapter[title=Primitives]
-
- This register contains the primitives that are mentioned in the manual. There
- are of course many more primitives. The \LUATEX\ primitives are typeset in
- bold. The primitives from \PDFTEX\ are not supported that way but mentioned
- anyway.
-
- \placeregister[primitiveindex][indicator=no]
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\startchapter[title=Callbacks]
-
- \placeregister[callbackindex]
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\startchapter[title=Nodes]
-
- This register contains the nodes that are known to \LUATEX. The primary nodes
- are in bold, whatsits that are determined by their subtype are normal. The
- names prefixed by \type {pdf_} are backend specific.
-
- \placeregister[nodeindex]
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\startchapter[title=Libraries]
-
- This register contains the functions available in libraries. Not all functions
- are documented, for instance because they can be experimental or obsolete.
-
- \placeregister[libraryindex]
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-registers
+
+\startchapter[title=Topics]
+
+ \placeregister[topicindex]
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\startchapter[title=Primitives]
+
+ This register contains the primitives that are mentioned in the manual. There
+ are of course many more primitives. The \LUATEX\ primitives are typeset in
+ bold. The primitives from \PDFTEX\ are not supported that way but mentioned
+ anyway.
+
+ \placeregister[primitiveindex][indicator=no]
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\startchapter[title=Callbacks]
+
+ \placeregister[callbackindex]
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\startchapter[title=Nodes]
+
+ This register contains the nodes that are known to \LUATEX. The primary nodes
+ are in bold, whatsits that are determined by their subtype are normal. The
+ names prefixed by \type {pdf_} are backend specific.
+
+ \placeregister[nodeindex]
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\startchapter[title=Libraries]
+
+ This register contains the functions available in libraries. Not all functions
+ are documented, for instance because they can be experimental or obsolete.
+
+ \placeregister[libraryindex]
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-statistics.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-statistics.tex
index 2428a2929d..efd7f1c75c 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-statistics.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-statistics.tex
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
-% language=uk
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-statistics
-
-\startchapter[title={Statistics}]
-
- \topicindex{fonts+used}
-
- The following fonts are used in this document:
-
- \showfontusage
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-statistics
+
+\startchapter[title={Statistics}]
+
+ \topicindex{fonts+used}
+
+ The following fonts are used in this document:
+
+ \showfontusage
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-style.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-style.tex
index 502e894a8c..aa0a7edc3f 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-style.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-style.tex
@@ -1,443 +1,443 @@
-\startenvironment luatex-style
-
-% todo: use \useMPlibrary[lua]
-
-\enabletrackers[fonts.usage]
-
-\usemodule[fonts-statistics]
-
-\setuplayout
- [height=middle,
- width=middle,
- backspace=2cm,
- topspace=10mm,
- bottomspace=10mm,
- header=10mm,
- footer=10mm,
- footerdistance=10mm,
- headerdistance=10mm]
-
-\setuppagenumbering
- [alternative=doublesided]
-
-\setuptolerance
- [stretch,tolerant]
-
-\setuptype
- [lines=hyphenated]
-
-\setuptyping
- [lines=hyphenated]
-
-\setupitemize
- [each]
- [packed]
-
-\definesymbol[1][\Uchar"2023]
-\definesymbol[2][\endash]
-\definesymbol[3][\wait] % we want to catch it
-
-\setupitemize
- [each]
- [headcolor=maincolor,
- symbolcolor=maincolor,
- color=maincolor]
-
-\setupwhitespace
- [medium]
-
-\setuptabulate
- [blank={small,samepage},
- headstyle=bold,
- rulecolor=maincolor,
- rulethickness=1pt,
- foregroundcolor=white,
- foregroundstyle=\ss\bfx\WORD,
- backgroundcolor=maincolor]
-
-\setupcaptions
- [headcolor=darkblue]
-
-\startluacode
- local skipped = table.tohash { 'id', 'subtype', 'next', 'prev' }
-
- function document.functions.showfields(s)
- local t = string.split(s,',')
- local f = node.fields(t[1],t[2])
- if f then
- local d = false
- for i=1,#f do
- local fi = f[i]
- if skipped[fi] then
- -- okay
- elseif d then
- context(', {\tttf %s}', fi)
- else
- context('{\tttf %s}', fi)
- d = true
- end
- end
- end
- end
-
- function document.functions.showid(s)
- local t = string.split(s,',')
- context('{tttf %s}',node.id(t[1]))
- if t[2] then
- context(', {tttf %s}',node.subtype(t[2]))
- end
- end
-
- function document.functions.showsubtypes(s)
- local s = node.subtypes(s)
- local d = false
- for k, v in table.sortedhash(s) do
- if d then
- context(', %s = {\\tttf %s}',k,v)
- else
- context('%s = {\\tttf %s}',k,v)
- d = true
- end
- end
- end
-\stopluacode
-
-\unexpanded\def\showfields #1{\ctxlua{document.functions.showfields("#1")}}
-\unexpanded\def\showid #1{\ctxlua{document.functions.showid("#1")}}
-\unexpanded\def\showsubtypes#1{\ctxlua{document.functions.showsubtypes("#1")}}
-
-\definecolor[blue] [b=.5]
-\definecolor[red] [r=.5]
-\definecolor[green] [g=.5]
-\definecolor[maincolor] [b=.5]
-\definecolor[keptcolor] [b=.5]
-\definecolor[othercolor][r=.5,g=.5]
-
-\writestatus{luatex manual}{}
-\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining lucodaot} \usebodyfont [lucidaot]
-\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining pagella} \usebodyfont [pagella]
-\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining cambria} \usebodyfont [cambria]
-\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining modern} \usebodyfont [modern]
-\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining dejavu} \setupbodyfont[dejavu,10pt]
-\writestatus{luatex manual}{}
-
-\setuphead [chapter] [align={flushleft,broad},style=\bfd]
-\setuphead [section] [align={flushleft,broad},style=\bfb]
-\setuphead [subsection] [align={flushleft,broad},style=\bfa]
-\setuphead [subsubsection][align={flushleft,broad},style=\bf]
-
-\setuphead [chapter] [color=maincolor]
-\setuphead [section] [color=maincolor]
-\setuphead [subsection] [color=maincolor]
-\setuphead [subsubsection][color=maincolor]
-
-\setupfloats
- [ntop=4]
-
-\definehead
- [remark]
- [subsubsubject]
-
-\setupheadertexts
- []
-
-% \setuplayout
-% [style=bold,
-% color=maincolor]
-
-\definemixedcolumns
- [twocolumns]
- [n=2,
- balance=yes,
- before=\blank,
- after=\blank]
-
-\definemixedcolumns
- [threecolumns]
- [twocolumns]
- [n=3]
-
-\definemixedcolumns
- [fourcolumns]
- [threecolumns]
- [n=4]
-
-% if we do this we also need to do it in table cells
-%
-% \setuptyping
-% [color=maincolor]
-%
-% \setuptype
-% [color=maincolor]
-
-\definetyping
- [functioncall]
-
-\startMPdefinitions
-
- color luaplanetcolor ; luaplanetcolor := \MPcolor{maincolor} ;
- color luaholecolor ; luaholecolor := white ;
- numeric luaextraangle ; luaextraangle := 0 ;
- numeric luaorbitfactor ; luaorbitfactor := .25 ;
-
- vardef lualogo = image (
-
- % Graphic design by A. Nakonechnyj. Copyright (c) 1998, All rights reserved.
-
- save d, r, p ; numeric d, r, p ;
-
- d := sqrt(2)/4 ; r := 1/4 ; p := r/8 ;
-
- fill fullcircle scaled 1
- withcolor luaplanetcolor ;
- draw fullcircle rotated 40.5 scaled (1+r)
- dashed evenly scaled p
- withpen pencircle scaled (p/2)
- withcolor (luaorbitfactor * luaholecolor) ;
- fill fullcircle scaled r shifted (d+1/8,d+1/8)
- rotated - luaextraangle
- withcolor luaplanetcolor ;
- fill fullcircle scaled r shifted (d-1/8,d-1/8)
- withcolor luaholecolor ;
- luaorbitfactor := .25 ;
- ) enddef ;
-
-\stopMPdefinitions
-
-\startuseMPgraphic{luapage}
- StartPage ;
-
- fill Page withcolor \MPcolor{othercolor} ;
-
- luaorbitfactor := 1 ;
-
- picture p ; p := lualogo ysized (5*\measure{paperheight}/10) ;
- draw p
- shifted - center p
- shifted (
- \measure{spreadwidth} - .5*\measure{paperwidth} + \measure{spinewidth},
- .375*\measure{paperheight}
- )
- ;
-
- StopPage ;
-\stopuseMPgraphic
-
-% \starttexdefinition luaextraangle
-% % we can also just access the last page and so in mp directly
-% \ctxlua {
-% context(\lastpage == 0 and 0 or \realfolio*360/\lastpage)
-% }
-% \stoptexdefinition
-
-\startuseMPgraphic{luanumber}
- % luaextraangle := \luaextraangle;
- luaextraangle := if (LastPageNumber < 10) : 10 else : (RealPageNumber / LastPageNumber) * 360 fi;
- luaorbitfactor := 0.25 ;
- picture p ; p := lualogo ;
- setbounds p to boundingbox fullcircle ;
- draw p ysized 1cm ;
-\stopuseMPgraphic
-
-\definelayer
- [page]
- [width=\paperwidth,
- height=\paperheight]
-
-\setupbackgrounds
- [leftpage]
- [background=page]
-
-\setupbackgrounds
- [rightpage]
- [background=page]
-
-\definemeasure[banneroffset][\bottomspace-\footerheight-\footerdistance+2cm]
-
-\startsetups pagenumber:right
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=rightbottom,x=1.0cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
- [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay]
- {\strut\useMPgraphic{luanumber}}
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=rightbottom,x=2.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
- [frame=off,height=1cm,width=1cm,offset=overlay,
- foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
- {\strut\pagenumber}
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=rightbottom,x=3.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
- [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay,
- foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
- {\strut\getmarking[chapter]}
-\stopsetups
-
-\startsetups pagenumber:left
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=leftbottom,x=3.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
- [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay,
- foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
- {\strut\getmarking[chapter]}
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=leftbottom,x=2.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
- [frame=off,height=1cm,width=1cm,offset=overlay,
- foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
- {\strut\pagenumber}
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=leftbottom,x=1.0cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
- [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay]
- {\strut\useMPgraphic{luanumber}}
-\stopsetups
-
-\unexpanded\def\nonterminal#1>{\mathematics{\langle\hbox{\rm #1}\rangle}}
-
-% taco's brainwave -) .. todo: create a typing variant so that we can avoid the !crlf
-
-\newcatcodetable\syntaxcodetable
-
-\unexpanded\def\makesyntaxcodetable
- {\begingroup
- \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\|=12
- \catcode`\!= 0 \catcode`\\=12
- \savecatcodetable\syntaxcodetable
- \endgroup}
-
-\makesyntaxcodetable
-
-\unexpanded\def\startsyntax {\begingroup\catcodetable\syntaxcodetable \dostartsyntax}
-\unexpanded\def\syntax {\begingroup\catcodetable\syntaxcodetable \dosyntax}
- \let\stopsyntax \relax
-
-\unexpanded\def\syntaxenvbody#1%
- {\par
- \tt
- \startnarrower
- % \maincolor
- #1
- \stopnarrower
- \par}
-
-\unexpanded\def\syntaxbody#1%
- {\begingroup
- % \maincolor
- \tt #1%
- \endgroup}
-
-\bgroup \catcodetable\syntaxcodetable
-
-!gdef!dostartsyntax#1\stopsyntax{!let<!nonterminal!syntaxenvbody{#1}!endgroup}
-!gdef!dosyntax #1{!let<!nonterminal!syntaxbody{#1}!endgroup}
-
-!egroup
-
-\definetyping
- [texsyntax]
-% [color=maincolor]
-
-% end of wave
-
-\setupinteraction
- [state=start,
- focus=standard,
- style=,
- color=,
- contrastcolor=]
-
-\placebookmarks
- [chapter,section,subsection]
-
-\setuplist
- [chapter,section,subsection,subsubsection]
- [interaction=all,
- width=3em]
-
-\setuplist
- [chapter]
- [style=bold,
- before={\testpage[4]\blank},
- color=keptcolor]
-
-\setuplist
- [section]
- [before={\testpage[3]}]
-
-\setuplist
- [subsection,subsubsection]
- [margin=3em,
- width=5em]
-
-\definestartstop
- [notabene]
- [style=slanted]
-
-\definestartstop
- [preamble]
- [style=normal,
- before=\blank,
- after=\blank]
-
-% Hans doesn't like the bookmarks opening by default so we comment this:
-%
-% \setupinteractionscreen
-% [option=bookmark]
-
-\startbuffer[stylecalculations]
-
- \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[spinewidth] [0pt]}
- \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[paperwidth] [\the\paperwidth ]}
- \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[paperheight][\the\paperheight]}
- \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[spreadwidth][\measure{paperwidth}]}
-
-\stopbuffer
-
-\getbuffer[stylecalculations]
-
-\dontcomplain
-
-\environment luatex-logos
-
-\defineregister[topicindex]
-\defineregister[primitiveindex]
-\defineregister[callbackindex]
-\defineregister[nodeindex]
-\defineregister[libraryindex]
-
-\unexpanded\def\lpr#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\primitiveindex[#1]{\bf\tex {#1}}}\tex {#1}}
-\unexpanded\def\prm#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\primitiveindex[#1]{\tex {#1}}}\tex {#1}}
-\unexpanded\def\orm#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\primitiveindex[#1]{\tex {#1}}}\tex {#1}}
-\unexpanded\def\cbk#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\callbackindex [#1]{\type {#1}}}\type{#1}}
-\unexpanded\def\nod#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\nodeindex [#1]{\bf\type{#1}}}\type{#1}}
-\unexpanded\def\whs#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\nodeindex [#1]{\type {#1}}}\type{#1}}
-\unexpanded\def\noa#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\nodeindex [#1]{\type {#1}}}\type{#1}}
-
-\hyphenation{sub-nodes}
-
-\def\currentlibraryindex{\namedstructureuservariable{section}{library}}
-
-\setupregister
- [libraryindex]
- [indicator=no,before=]
-
-\setupregister
- [libraryindex]
- [1]
- [textstyle=\ttbf]
-
-\setupregister
- [libraryindex]
- [2]
- [textstyle=\tttf]
-
-\unexpanded\def\lib #1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{\currentlibraryindex+#1}}\type{\currentlibraryindex.#1}}}
-\unexpanded\def\libindex#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{\currentlibraryindex+#1}}}}
-\unexpanded\def\libidx#1#2{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{#1+#2}}\type{#1.#2}}}
-\unexpanded\def\lix #1#2{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{#1+#2}}}}
-
-% \setstructurepageregister[][keys:1=,entries:1=]
-
-\stopenvironment
+\startenvironment luatex-style
+
+% todo: use \useMPlibrary[lua]
+
+\enabletrackers[fonts.usage]
+
+\usemodule[fonts-statistics]
+
+\setuplayout
+ [height=middle,
+ width=middle,
+ backspace=2cm,
+ topspace=10mm,
+ bottomspace=10mm,
+ header=10mm,
+ footer=10mm,
+ footerdistance=10mm,
+ headerdistance=10mm]
+
+\setuppagenumbering
+ [alternative=doublesided]
+
+\setuptolerance
+ [stretch,tolerant]
+
+\setuptype
+ [lines=hyphenated]
+
+\setuptyping
+ [lines=hyphenated]
+
+\setupitemize
+ [each]
+ [packed]
+
+\definesymbol[1][\Uchar"2023]
+\definesymbol[2][\endash]
+\definesymbol[3][\wait] % we want to catch it
+
+\setupitemize
+ [each]
+ [headcolor=maincolor,
+ symbolcolor=maincolor,
+ color=maincolor]
+
+\setupwhitespace
+ [medium]
+
+\setuptabulate
+ [blank={small,samepage},
+ headstyle=bold,
+ rulecolor=maincolor,
+ rulethickness=1pt,
+ foregroundcolor=white,
+ foregroundstyle=\ss\bfx\WORD,
+ backgroundcolor=maincolor]
+
+\setupcaptions
+ [headcolor=darkblue]
+
+\startluacode
+ local skipped = table.tohash { 'id', 'subtype', 'next', 'prev' }
+
+ function document.functions.showfields(s)
+ local t = string.split(s,',')
+ local f = node.fields(t[1],t[2])
+ if f then
+ local d = false
+ for i=1,#f do
+ local fi = f[i]
+ if skipped[fi] then
+ -- okay
+ elseif d then
+ context(', {\tttf %s}', fi)
+ else
+ context('{\tttf %s}', fi)
+ d = true
+ end
+ end
+ end
+ end
+
+ function document.functions.showid(s)
+ local t = string.split(s,',')
+ context('{tttf %s}',node.id(t[1]))
+ if t[2] then
+ context(', {tttf %s}',node.subtype(t[2]))
+ end
+ end
+
+ function document.functions.showsubtypes(s)
+ local s = node.subtypes(s)
+ local d = false
+ for k, v in table.sortedhash(s) do
+ if d then
+ context(', %s = {\\tttf %s}',k,v)
+ else
+ context('%s = {\\tttf %s}',k,v)
+ d = true
+ end
+ end
+ end
+\stopluacode
+
+\unexpanded\def\showfields #1{\ctxlua{document.functions.showfields("#1")}}
+\unexpanded\def\showid #1{\ctxlua{document.functions.showid("#1")}}
+\unexpanded\def\showsubtypes#1{\ctxlua{document.functions.showsubtypes("#1")}}
+
+\definecolor[blue] [b=.5]
+\definecolor[red] [r=.5]
+\definecolor[green] [g=.5]
+\definecolor[maincolor] [b=.5]
+\definecolor[keptcolor] [b=.5]
+\definecolor[othercolor][r=.5,g=.5]
+
+\writestatus{luatex manual}{}
+\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining lucodaot} \usebodyfont [lucidaot]
+\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining pagella} \usebodyfont [pagella]
+\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining cambria} \usebodyfont [cambria]
+\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining modern} \usebodyfont [modern]
+\writestatus{luatex manual}{defining dejavu} \setupbodyfont[dejavu,10pt]
+\writestatus{luatex manual}{}
+
+\setuphead [chapter] [align={flushleft,broad},style=\bfd]
+\setuphead [section] [align={flushleft,broad},style=\bfb]
+\setuphead [subsection] [align={flushleft,broad},style=\bfa]
+\setuphead [subsubsection][align={flushleft,broad},style=\bf]
+
+\setuphead [chapter] [color=maincolor]
+\setuphead [section] [color=maincolor]
+\setuphead [subsection] [color=maincolor]
+\setuphead [subsubsection][color=maincolor]
+
+\setupfloats
+ [ntop=4]
+
+\definehead
+ [remark]
+ [subsubsubject]
+
+\setupheadertexts
+ []
+
+% \setuplayout
+% [style=bold,
+% color=maincolor]
+
+\definemixedcolumns
+ [twocolumns]
+ [n=2,
+ balance=yes,
+ before=\blank,
+ after=\blank]
+
+\definemixedcolumns
+ [threecolumns]
+ [twocolumns]
+ [n=3]
+
+\definemixedcolumns
+ [fourcolumns]
+ [threecolumns]
+ [n=4]
+
+% if we do this we also need to do it in table cells
+%
+% \setuptyping
+% [color=maincolor]
+%
+% \setuptype
+% [color=maincolor]
+
+\definetyping
+ [functioncall]
+
+\startMPdefinitions
+
+ color luaplanetcolor ; luaplanetcolor := \MPcolor{maincolor} ;
+ color luaholecolor ; luaholecolor := white ;
+ numeric luaextraangle ; luaextraangle := 0 ;
+ numeric luaorbitfactor ; luaorbitfactor := .25 ;
+
+ vardef lualogo = image (
+
+ % Graphic design by A. Nakonechnyj. Copyright (c) 1998, All rights reserved.
+
+ save d, r, p ; numeric d, r, p ;
+
+ d := sqrt(2)/4 ; r := 1/4 ; p := r/8 ;
+
+ fill fullcircle scaled 1
+ withcolor luaplanetcolor ;
+ draw fullcircle rotated 40.5 scaled (1+r)
+ dashed evenly scaled p
+ withpen pencircle scaled (p/2)
+ withcolor (luaorbitfactor * luaholecolor) ;
+ fill fullcircle scaled r shifted (d+1/8,d+1/8)
+ rotated - luaextraangle
+ withcolor luaplanetcolor ;
+ fill fullcircle scaled r shifted (d-1/8,d-1/8)
+ withcolor luaholecolor ;
+ luaorbitfactor := .25 ;
+ ) enddef ;
+
+\stopMPdefinitions
+
+\startuseMPgraphic{luapage}
+ StartPage ;
+
+ fill Page withcolor \MPcolor{othercolor} ;
+
+ luaorbitfactor := 1 ;
+
+ picture p ; p := lualogo ysized (5*\measure{paperheight}/10) ;
+ draw p
+ shifted - center p
+ shifted (
+ \measure{spreadwidth} - .5*\measure{paperwidth} + \measure{spinewidth},
+ .375*\measure{paperheight}
+ )
+ ;
+
+ StopPage ;
+\stopuseMPgraphic
+
+% \starttexdefinition luaextraangle
+% % we can also just access the last page and so in mp directly
+% \ctxlua {
+% context(\lastpage == 0 and 0 or \realfolio*360/\lastpage)
+% }
+% \stoptexdefinition
+
+\startuseMPgraphic{luanumber}
+ % luaextraangle := \luaextraangle;
+ luaextraangle := if (LastPageNumber < 10) : 10 else : (RealPageNumber / LastPageNumber) * 360 fi;
+ luaorbitfactor := 0.25 ;
+ picture p ; p := lualogo ;
+ setbounds p to boundingbox fullcircle ;
+ draw p ysized 1cm ;
+\stopuseMPgraphic
+
+\definelayer
+ [page]
+ [width=\paperwidth,
+ height=\paperheight]
+
+\setupbackgrounds
+ [leftpage]
+ [background=page]
+
+\setupbackgrounds
+ [rightpage]
+ [background=page]
+
+\definemeasure[banneroffset][\bottomspace-\footerheight-\footerdistance+2cm]
+
+\startsetups pagenumber:right
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=rightbottom,x=1.0cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
+ [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay]
+ {\strut\useMPgraphic{luanumber}}
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=rightbottom,x=2.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
+ [frame=off,height=1cm,width=1cm,offset=overlay,
+ foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
+ {\strut\pagenumber}
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=rightbottom,x=3.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
+ [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay,
+ foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
+ {\strut\getmarking[chapter]}
+\stopsetups
+
+\startsetups pagenumber:left
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=leftbottom,x=3.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
+ [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay,
+ foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
+ {\strut\getmarking[chapter]}
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=leftbottom,x=2.5cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
+ [frame=off,height=1cm,width=1cm,offset=overlay,
+ foregroundstyle=bold,foregroundcolor=maincolor]
+ {\strut\pagenumber}
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=leftbottom,x=1.0cm,y=\measure{banneroffset}]
+ [frame=off,height=1cm,offset=overlay]
+ {\strut\useMPgraphic{luanumber}}
+\stopsetups
+
+\unexpanded\def\nonterminal#1>{\mathematics{\langle\hbox{\rm #1}\rangle}}
+
+% taco's brainwave -) .. todo: create a typing variant so that we can avoid the !crlf
+
+\newcatcodetable\syntaxcodetable
+
+\unexpanded\def\makesyntaxcodetable
+ {\begingroup
+ \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\|=12
+ \catcode`\!= 0 \catcode`\\=12
+ \savecatcodetable\syntaxcodetable
+ \endgroup}
+
+\makesyntaxcodetable
+
+\unexpanded\def\startsyntax {\begingroup\catcodetable\syntaxcodetable \dostartsyntax}
+\unexpanded\def\syntax {\begingroup\catcodetable\syntaxcodetable \dosyntax}
+ \let\stopsyntax \relax
+
+\unexpanded\def\syntaxenvbody#1%
+ {\par
+ \tt
+ \startnarrower
+ % \maincolor
+ #1
+ \stopnarrower
+ \par}
+
+\unexpanded\def\syntaxbody#1%
+ {\begingroup
+ % \maincolor
+ \tt #1%
+ \endgroup}
+
+\bgroup \catcodetable\syntaxcodetable
+
+!gdef!dostartsyntax#1\stopsyntax{!let<!nonterminal!syntaxenvbody{#1}!endgroup}
+!gdef!dosyntax #1{!let<!nonterminal!syntaxbody{#1}!endgroup}
+
+!egroup
+
+\definetyping
+ [texsyntax]
+% [color=maincolor]
+
+% end of wave
+
+\setupinteraction
+ [state=start,
+ focus=standard,
+ style=,
+ color=,
+ contrastcolor=]
+
+\placebookmarks
+ [chapter,section,subsection]
+
+\setuplist
+ [chapter,section,subsection,subsubsection]
+ [interaction=all,
+ width=3em]
+
+\setuplist
+ [chapter]
+ [style=bold,
+ before={\testpage[4]\blank},
+ color=keptcolor]
+
+\setuplist
+ [section]
+ [before={\testpage[3]}]
+
+\setuplist
+ [subsection,subsubsection]
+ [margin=3em,
+ width=5em]
+
+\definestartstop
+ [notabene]
+ [style=slanted]
+
+\definestartstop
+ [preamble]
+ [style=normal,
+ before=\blank,
+ after=\blank]
+
+% Hans doesn't like the bookmarks opening by default so we comment this:
+%
+% \setupinteractionscreen
+% [option=bookmark]
+
+\startbuffer[stylecalculations]
+
+ \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[spinewidth] [0pt]}
+ \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[paperwidth] [\the\paperwidth ]}
+ \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[paperheight][\the\paperheight]}
+ \normalexpanded{\definemeasure[spreadwidth][\measure{paperwidth}]}
+
+\stopbuffer
+
+\getbuffer[stylecalculations]
+
+\dontcomplain
+
+\environment luatex-logos
+
+\defineregister[topicindex]
+\defineregister[primitiveindex]
+\defineregister[callbackindex]
+\defineregister[nodeindex]
+\defineregister[libraryindex]
+
+\unexpanded\def\lpr#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\primitiveindex[#1]{\bf\tex {#1}}}\tex {#1}}
+\unexpanded\def\prm#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\primitiveindex[#1]{\tex {#1}}}\tex {#1}}
+\unexpanded\def\orm#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\primitiveindex[#1]{\tex {#1}}}\tex {#1}}
+\unexpanded\def\cbk#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\callbackindex [#1]{\type {#1}}}\type{#1}}
+\unexpanded\def\nod#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\nodeindex [#1]{\bf\type{#1}}}\type{#1}}
+\unexpanded\def\whs#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\nodeindex [#1]{\type {#1}}}\type{#1}}
+\unexpanded\def\noa#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\nodeindex [#1]{\type {#1}}}\type{#1}}
+
+\hyphenation{sub-nodes}
+
+\def\currentlibraryindex{\namedstructureuservariable{section}{library}}
+
+\setupregister
+ [libraryindex]
+ [indicator=no,before=]
+
+\setupregister
+ [libraryindex]
+ [1]
+ [textstyle=\ttbf]
+
+\setupregister
+ [libraryindex]
+ [2]
+ [textstyle=\tttf]
+
+\unexpanded\def\lib #1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{\currentlibraryindex+#1}}\type{\currentlibraryindex.#1}}}
+\unexpanded\def\libindex#1{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{\currentlibraryindex+#1}}}}
+\unexpanded\def\libidx#1#2{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{#1+#2}}\type{#1.#2}}}
+\unexpanded\def\lix #1#2{\doifmode{*bodypart}{\expanded{\libraryindex{#1+#2}}}}
+
+% \setstructurepageregister[][keys:1=,entries:1=]
+
+\stopenvironment
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-tex.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-tex.tex
index 48bdeef119..65b9458619 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-tex.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-tex.tex
@@ -1,2774 +1,2775 @@
-% language=uk
-
-% lua.newtable
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-tex
-
-\startchapter[reference=tex,title={The \TEX\ related libraries}]
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {lua} library}][library=lua]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Version information}]
-
-\topicindex{libraries+\type{lua}}
-\topicindex{version}
-
-\libindex{version}
-
-This library contains one read|-|only item:
-
-\starttyping
-<string> s = lua.version
-\stoptyping
-
-This returns the \LUA\ version identifier string. The value is currently
-\directlua {tex.print(lua.version)}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Bytecode registers}]
-
-\topicindex{bytecodes}
-\topicindex{registers+bytecodes}
-
-\libindex{bytecode}
-\libindex{setbytecode}
-\libindex{getbytecode}
-
-\LUA\ registers can be used to store \LUA\ code chunks. The accepted values for
-assignments are functions and \type {nil}. Likewise, the retrieved value is
-either a function or \type {nil}.
-
-\starttyping
-lua.bytecode[<number> n] = <function> f
-lua.bytecode[<number> n]()
-\stoptyping
-
-The contents of the \type {lua.bytecode} array is stored inside the format file
-as actual \LUA\ bytecode, so it can also be used to preload \LUA\ code. The
-function must not contain any upvalues. The associated function calls are:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<function> f = lua.getbytecode(<number> n)
-lua.setbytecode(<number> n, <function> f)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Note: Since a \LUA\ file loaded using \type {loadfile(filename)} is essentially
-an anonymous function, a complete file can be stored in a bytecode register like
-this:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-lua.bytecode[n] = loadfile(filename)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Now all definitions (functions, variables) contained in the file can be
-created by executing this bytecode register:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-lua.bytecode[n]()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Note that the path of the file is stored in the \LUA\ bytecode to be used in
-stack backtraces and therefore dumped into the format file if the above code is
-used in \INITEX. If it contains private information, i.e. the user name, this
-information is then contained in the format file as well. This should be kept in
-mind when preloading files into a bytecode register in \INITEX.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Chunk name registers}]
-
-\libindex{name}
-\libindex{setluaname}
-\libindex{getluaname}
-
-There is an array of 65536 (0--65535) potential chunk names for use with the
-\prm {directlua} and \lpr {latelua} primitives.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-lua.name[<number> n] = <string> s
-<string> s = lua.name[<number> n]
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-If you want to unset a \LUA\ name, you can assign \type {nil} to it. The function
-accessors are:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-lua.setluaname(<string> s,<number> n])
-<string> s = lua.getluaname(<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Introspection}]
-
-\libindex{getstacktop}
-\libindex{getcalllevel}
-
-The \type {getstacktop} and\type {getcalllevel} functions return numbers
-indicating how much nesting is going on. They are only of use as breakpoints when
-checking some mechanism going haywire.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {status} library}][library=status]
-
-\topicindex{libraries+\type{status}}
-
-\libindex{list}
-\libindex{resetmessages}
-\libindex{setexitcode}
-
-This contains a number of run|-|time configuration items that you may find useful
-in message reporting, as well as an iterator function that gets all of the names
-and values as a table.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> info = status.list()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The keys in the table are the known items, the value is the current value. Almost
-all of the values in \type {status} are fetched through a metatable at run|-|time
-whenever they are accessed, so you cannot use \type {pairs} on \type {status},
-but you {\it can\/} use \type {pairs} on \type {info}, of course. If you do not
-need the full list, you can also ask for a single item by using its name as an
-index into \type {status}. The current list is:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{banner} \NC terminal display banner \NC \NR
-\NC \type{best_page_break} \NC the current best break (a node) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{buf_size} \NC current allocated size of the line buffer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{callbacks} \NC total number of executed callbacks so far \NC \NR
-\NC \type{cs_count} \NC number of control sequences \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dest_names_size} \NC \PDF\ destination table size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dvi_gone} \NC written \DVI\ bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dvi_ptr} \NC not yet written \DVI\ bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dyn_used} \NC token (multi|-|word) memory in use \NC \NR
-\NC \type{filename} \NC name of the current input file \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fix_mem_end} \NC maximum number of used tokens \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fix_mem_min} \NC minimum number of allocated words for tokens \NC \NR
-\NC \type{fix_mem_max} \NC maximum number of allocated words for tokens \NC \NR
-\NC \type{font_ptr} \NC number of active fonts \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hash_extra} \NC extra allowed hash \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hash_size} \NC size of hash \NC \NR
-\NC \type{indirect_callbacks} \NC number of those that were themselves a result of other callbacks (e.g. file readers) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{ini_version} \NC \type {true} if this is an \INITEX\ run \NC \NR
-\NC \type{init_pool_ptr} \NC \INITEX\ string pool index \NC \NR
-\NC \type{init_str_ptr} \NC number of \INITEX\ strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{input_ptr} \NC the level of input we're at \NC \NR
-\NC \type{inputid} \NC numeric id of the current input \NC \NR
-\NC \type{largest_used_mark} \NC max referenced marks class \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lasterrorcontext} \NC last error context string (with newlines) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lasterrorstring} \NC last \TEX\ error string \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lastluaerrorstring} \NC last \LUA\ error string \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lastwarningstring} \NC last warning tag, normally an indication of in what part\NC \NR
-\NC \type{lastwarningtag} \NC last warning string\NC \NR
-\NC \type{linenumber} \NC location in the current input file \NC \NR
-\NC \type{log_name} \NC name of the log file \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luabytecode_bytes} \NC number of bytes in \LUA\ bytecode registers \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luabytecodes} \NC number of active \LUA\ bytecode registers \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luastate_bytes} \NC number of bytes in use by \LUA\ interpreters \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luatex_engine} \NC the \LUATEX\ engine identifier \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luatex_hashchars} \NC length to which \LUA\ hashes strings ($2^n$) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luatex_hashtype} \NC the hash method used (in \LUAJITTEX) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luatex_version} \NC the \LUATEX\ version number \NC \NR
-\NC \type{luatex_revision} \NC the \LUATEX\ revision string \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_buf_stack} \NC max used buffer position \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_in_stack} \NC max used input stack entries \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_nest_stack} \NC max used nesting stack entries \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_param_stack} \NC max used parameter stack entries \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_save_stack} \NC max used save stack entries \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_strings} \NC maximum allowed strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nest_size} \NC nesting stack size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{node_mem_usage} \NC a string giving insight into currently used nodes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{obj_ptr} \NC max \PDF\ object pointer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{obj_tab_size} \NC \PDF\ object table size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{output_active} \NC \type {true} if the \prm {output} routine is active \NC \NR
-\NC \type{output_file_name} \NC name of the \PDF\ or \DVI\ file \NC \NR
-\NC \type{param_size} \NC parameter stack size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf_dest_names_ptr} \NC max \PDF\ destination pointer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf_gone} \NC written \PDF\ bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf_mem_ptr} \NC max \PDF\ memory used \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf_mem_size} \NC \PDF\ memory size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf_os_cntr} \NC max \PDF\ object stream pointer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf_os_objidx} \NC \PDF\ object stream index \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdf_ptr} \NC not yet written \PDF\ bytes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pool_ptr} \NC string pool index \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pool_size} \NC current size allocated for string characters \NC \NR
-\NC \type{save_size} \NC save stack size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{shell_escape} \NC \type {0} means disabled, \type {1} means anything is permitted, and \type {2} is restricted \NC \NR
-\NC \type{safer_option} \NC \type {1} means safer is enforced \NC \NR
-\NC \type{kpse_used} \NC \type {1} means that kpse is used \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stack_size} \NC input stack size \NC \NR
-\NC \type{str_ptr} \NC number of strings \NC \NR
-\NC \type{total_pages} \NC number of written pages \NC \NR
-\NC \type{var_mem_max} \NC number of allocated words for nodes \NC \NR
-\NC \type{var_used} \NC variable (one|-|word) memory in use \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lc_collate} \NC the value of \type {LC_COLLATE} at startup time (becomes \type {C} at startup) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lc_ctype} \NC the value of \type {LC_CTYPE} at startup time (becomes \type {C} at startup) \NC \NR
-%NC \type{lc_monetary} \NC the value of \type {LC_MONETARY} at startup time \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lc_numeric} \NC the value of \type {LC_NUMERIC} at startup time \NC \NR
-%NC \type{lc_time} \NC the value of \type {LC_TIME} at startup time (becomes \type {C} at startup) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The error and warning messages can be wiped with the \type {resetmessages}
-function. A return value can be set with \type {setexitcode}.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {tex} library}][library=tex]
-
-\startsubsection[title={Introduction}]
-
-\topicindex{libraries+\type{tex}}
-
-The \type {tex} table contains a large list of virtual internal \TEX\
-parameters that are partially writable.
-
-The designation \quote {virtual} means that these items are not properly defined
-in \LUA, but are only front\-ends that are handled by a metatable that operates
-on the actual \TEX\ values. As a result, most of the \LUA\ table operators (like
-\type {pairs} and \type {#}) do not work on such items.
-
-At the moment, it is possible to access almost every parameter that you can use
-after \prm {the}, is a single tokens or is sort of special in \TEX. This excludes
-parameters that need extra arguments, like \type {\the\scriptfont}. The subset
-comprising simple integer and dimension registers are writable as well as
-readable (like \prm {tracingcommands} and \prm {parindent}).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Internal parameter values, \type {set} and \type {get}}]
-
-\topicindex{parameters+internal}
-
-\libindex{set} \libindex{get}
-
-For all the parameters in this section, it is possible to access them directly
-using their names as index in the \type {tex} table, or by using one of the
-functions \type {tex.get} and \type {tex.set}.
-
-The exact parameters and return values differ depending on the actual parameter,
-and so does whether \type {tex.set} has any effect. For the parameters that {\em
-can} be set, it is possible to use \type {global} as the first argument to \type
-{tex.set}; this makes the assignment global instead of local.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.set (["global",] <string> n, ...)
-... = tex.get (<string> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Glue is kind of special because there are five values involved. The return value
-is a \nod {glue_spec} node but when you pass \type {false} as last argument to
-\type {tex.get} you get the width of the glue and when you pass \type {true} you
-get all five values. Otherwise you get a node which is a copy of the internal
-value so you are responsible for its freeing at the \LUA\ end. When you set a
-glue quantity you can either pass a \nod {glue_spec} or upto five numbers. If
-you pass \type {true} to \type {get} you get 5 values returned for a glue and
-when you pass \type {false} you only get the width returned.
-
-\subsubsection{Integer parameters}
-
-The integer parameters accept and return \LUA\ numbers. These are read|-|write:
-
-\starttwocolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.adjdemerits
-tex.binoppenalty
-tex.brokenpenalty
-tex.catcodetable
-tex.clubpenalty
-tex.day
-tex.defaulthyphenchar
-tex.defaultskewchar
-tex.delimiterfactor
-tex.displaywidowpenalty
-tex.doublehyphendemerits
-tex.endlinechar
-tex.errorcontextlines
-tex.escapechar
-tex.exhyphenpenalty
-tex.fam
-tex.finalhyphendemerits
-tex.floatingpenalty
-tex.globaldefs
-tex.hangafter
-tex.hbadness
-tex.holdinginserts
-tex.hyphenpenalty
-tex.interlinepenalty
-tex.language
-tex.lastlinefit
-tex.lefthyphenmin
-tex.linepenalty
-tex.localbrokenpenalty
-tex.localinterlinepenalty
-tex.looseness
-tex.mag
-tex.maxdeadcycles
-tex.month
-tex.newlinechar
-tex.outputpenalty
-tex.pausing
-tex.postdisplaypenalty
-tex.predisplaydirection
-tex.predisplaypenalty
-tex.pretolerance
-tex.relpenalty
-tex.righthyphenmin
-tex.savinghyphcodes
-tex.savingvdiscards
-tex.showboxbreadth
-tex.showboxdepth
-tex.time
-tex.tolerance
-tex.tracingassigns
-tex.tracingcommands
-tex.tracinggroups
-tex.tracingifs
-tex.tracinglostchars
-tex.tracingmacros
-tex.tracingnesting
-tex.tracingonline
-tex.tracingoutput
-tex.tracingpages
-tex.tracingparagraphs
-tex.tracingrestores
-tex.tracingscantokens
-tex.tracingstats
-tex.uchyph
-tex.vbadness
-tex.widowpenalty
-tex.year
-\stoptyping
-\stoptwocolumns
-
-These are read|-|only:
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.deadcycles
-tex.insertpenalties
-tex.parshape
-tex.prevgraf
-tex.spacefactor
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-\subsubsection{Dimension parameters}
-
-The dimension parameters accept \LUA\ numbers (signifying scaled points) or
-strings (with included dimension). The result is always a number in scaled
-points. These are read|-|write:
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.boxmaxdepth
-tex.delimitershortfall
-tex.displayindent
-tex.displaywidth
-tex.emergencystretch
-tex.hangindent
-tex.hfuzz
-tex.hoffset
-tex.hsize
-tex.lineskiplimit
-tex.mathsurround
-tex.maxdepth
-tex.nulldelimiterspace
-tex.overfullrule
-tex.pagebottomoffset
-tex.pageheight
-tex.pageleftoffset
-tex.pagerightoffset
-tex.pagetopoffset
-tex.pagewidth
-tex.parindent
-tex.predisplaysize
-tex.scriptspace
-tex.splitmaxdepth
-tex.vfuzz
-tex.voffset
-tex.vsize
-tex.prevdepth
-tex.prevgraf
-tex.spacefactor
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-These are read|-|only:
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.pagedepth
-tex.pagefilllstretch
-tex.pagefillstretch
-tex.pagefilstretch
-tex.pagegoal
-tex.pageshrink
-tex.pagestretch
-tex.pagetotal
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-Beware: as with all \LUA\ tables you can add values to them. So, the following is
-valid:
-
-\starttyping
-tex.foo = 123
-\stoptyping
-
-When you access a \TEX\ parameter a look up takes place. For read||only variables
-that means that you will get something back, but when you set them you create a
-new entry in the table thereby making the original invisible.
-
-There are a few special cases that we make an exception for: \type {prevdepth},
-\type {prevgraf} and \type {spacefactor}. These normally are accessed via the
-\type {tex.nest} table:
-
-\starttyping
-tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr].prevdepth = p
-tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr].spacefactor = s
-\stoptyping
-
-However, the following also works:
-
-\starttyping
-tex.prevdepth = p
-tex.spacefactor = s
-\stoptyping
-
-Keep in mind that when you mess with node lists directly at the \LUA\ end you
-might need to update the top of the nesting stack's \type {prevdepth} explicitly
-as there is no way \LUATEX\ can guess your intentions. By using the accessor in
-the \type {tex} tables, you get and set the values at the top of the nesting
-stack.
-
-\subsubsection{Direction parameters}
-
-The direction parameters are read|-|only and return a \LUA\ string.
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.bodydir
-tex.mathdir
-tex.pagedir
-tex.pardir
-tex.textdir
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-\subsubsection{Glue parameters}
-
-The glue parameters accept and return a userdata object that represents a \nod {glue_spec} node.
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.abovedisplayshortskip
-tex.abovedisplayskip
-tex.baselineskip
-tex.belowdisplayshortskip
-tex.belowdisplayskip
-tex.leftskip
-tex.lineskip
-tex.parfillskip
-tex.parskip
-tex.rightskip
-tex.spaceskip
-tex.splittopskip
-tex.tabskip
-tex.topskip
-tex.xspaceskip
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-\subsubsection{Muglue parameters}
-
-All muglue parameters are to be used read|-|only and return a \LUA\ string.
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.medmuskip
-tex.thickmuskip
-tex.thinmuskip
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-\subsubsection{Tokenlist parameters}
-
-The tokenlist parameters accept and return \LUA\ strings. \LUA\ strings are
-converted to and from token lists using \prm {the} \prm {toks} style expansion:
-all category codes are either space (10) or other (12). It follows that assigning
-to some of these, like \quote {tex.output}, is actually useless, but it feels bad
-to make exceptions in view of a coming extension that will accept full|-|blown
-token strings.
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.errhelp
-tex.everycr
-tex.everydisplay
-tex.everyeof
-tex.everyhbox
-tex.everyjob
-tex.everymath
-tex.everypar
-tex.everyvbox
-tex.output
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Convert commands}]
-
-\topicindex{convert commands}
-
-All \quote {convert} commands are read|-|only and return a \LUA\ string. The
-supported commands at this moment are:
-
-\starttwocolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.eTeXVersion
-tex.eTeXrevision
-tex.formatname
-tex.jobname
-tex.luatexbanner
-tex.luatexrevision
-tex.fontname(number)
-tex.uniformdeviate(number)
-tex.number(number)
-tex.romannumeral(number)
-tex.fontidentifier(number)
-\stoptyping
-\stoptwocolumns
-
-If you are wondering why this list looks haphazard; these are all the cases of
-the \quote {convert} internal command that do not require an argument, as well as
-the ones that require only a simple numeric value. The special (\LUA|-|only) case
-of \type {tex.fontidentifier} returns the \type {csname} string that matches a
-font id number (if there is one).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Last item commands}]
-
-\topicindex{last items}
-
-All \quote {last item} commands are read|-|only and return a number. The
-supported commands at this moment are:
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.lastpenalty
-tex.lastkern
-tex.lastskip
-tex.lastnodetype
-tex.inputlineno
-tex.lastxpos
-tex.lastypos
-tex.randomseed
-tex.luatexversion
-tex.eTeXminorversion
-tex.eTeXversion
-tex.currentgrouplevel
-tex.currentgrouptype
-tex.currentiflevel
-tex.currentiftype
-tex.currentifbranch
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Accessing registers: \type {set*}, \type {get*} and \type {is*}}]
-
-\topicindex{attributes}
-\topicindex{registers}
-
-\libindex{attribute} \libindex{setattribute} \libindex{getattribute} \libindex{isattribute}
-\libindex{count} \libindex{setcount} \libindex{getcount} \libindex{iscount}
-\libindex{dimen} \libindex{setdimen} \libindex{getdimen} \libindex{isdimen}
-\libindex{skip} \libindex{setskip} \libindex{getskip} \libindex{isskip}
-\libindex{muskip} \libindex{setmuskip} \libindex{getmuskip} \libindex{ismuskip}
-\libindex{glue} \libindex{setglue} \libindex{getglue} \libindex{isglue}
-\libindex{muglue} \libindex{setmuglue} \libindex{getmuglue} \libindex{ismuglue}
-\libindex{toks} \libindex{settoks} \libindex{gettoks} \libindex{istoks}
-\libindex{box} \libindex{setbox} \libindex{getbox} \libindex{isbox}
-
-\libindex{scantoks}
-
-\TEX's attributes (\lpr {attribute}), counters (\prm {count}), dimensions (\prm
-{dimen}), skips (\prm {skip}, \prm {muskip}) and token (\prm {toks}) registers
-can be accessed and written to using two times five virtual sub|-|tables of the
-\type {tex} table:
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.attribute
-tex.count
-tex.dimen
-tex.skip
-tex.glue
-tex.muskip
-tex.muglue
-tex.toks
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-It is possible to use the names of relevant \lpr {attributedef}, \prm {countdef},
-\prm {dimendef}, \prm {skipdef}, or \prm {toksdef} control sequences as indices
-to these tables:
-
-\starttyping
-tex.count.scratchcounter = 0
-enormous = tex.dimen['maxdimen']
-\stoptyping
-
-In this case, \LUATEX\ looks up the value for you on the fly. You have to use a
-valid \prm {countdef} (or \lpr {attributedef}, or \prm {dimendef}, or \prm
-{skipdef}, or \prm {toksdef}), anything else will generate an error (the intent
-is to eventually also allow \type {<chardef tokens>} and even macros that expand
-into a number).
-
-\startitemize
-
- \startitem
- The count registers accept and return \LUA\ numbers.
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- The dimension registers accept \LUA\ numbers (in scaled points) or
- strings (with an included absolute dimension; \type {em} and \type {ex}
- and \type {px} are forbidden). The result is always a number in scaled
- points.
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- The token registers accept and return \LUA\ strings. \LUA\ strings are
- converted to and from token lists using \prm {the} \prm {toks} style
- expansion: all category codes are either space (10) or other (12).
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- The skip registers accept and return \nod {glue_spec} userdata node
- objects (see the description of the node interface elsewhere in this
- manual).
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- The glue registers are just skip registers but instead of userdata
- are verbose.
- \stopitem
-
- \startitem
- Like the counts, the attribute registers accept and return \LUA\ numbers.
- \stopitem
-
-\stopitemize
-
-As an alternative to array addressing, there are also accessor functions defined
-for all cases, for example, here is the set of possibilities for \prm {skip}
-registers:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setskip (["global",] <number> n, <node> s)
-tex.setskip (["global",] <string> s, <node> s)
-<node> s = tex.getskip (<number> n)
-<node> s = tex.getskip (<string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-We have similar setters for \type {count}, \type {dimen}, \type {muskip}, and
-\type {toks}. Counters and dimen are represented by numbers, skips and muskips by
-nodes, and toks by strings.
-
-Again the glue variants are not using the \nod {glue-spec} userdata nodes. The
-\type {setglue} function accepts upto 5 arguments: width, stretch, shrink,
-stretch order and shrink order and the \type {getglue} function reports them,
-unless the second argument is \type {false} in which care only the width is
-returned.
-
-Here is an example usign a threesome:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-local d = tex.getdimen("foo")
-if tex.isdimen("bar") then
- tex.setdimen("bar",d)
-end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-There are six extra skip (glue) related helpers:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setglue (["global"], <number> n,
- width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order)
-tex.setglue (["global"], <string> s,
- width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order)
-width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order =
- tex.getglue (<number> n)
-width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order =
- tex.getglue (<string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The other two are \type {tex.setmuglue} and \type {tex.getmuglue}.
-
-There are such helpers for \type {dimen}, \type {count}, \type {skip}, \type
-{muskip}, \type {box} and \type {attribute} registers but the glue ones
-are special because they have to deal with more properties.
-
-As with the general \type {get} and \type {set} function discussed before, for
-the skip registers \type {getskip} returns a node and \type {getglue} returns
-numbers, while \type {setskip} accepts a node and \type {setglue} expects upto 5
-numbers. Again, when you pass \type {false} as second argument to \type {getglue}
-you only get the width returned. The same is true for the \type {mu} variants
-\type {getmuskip}, \type {setmuskip}, \type {getmuskip} and\type {setmuskip}.
-
-For tokens registers we have an alternative where a catcode table is specified:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.scantoks(0,3,"$e=mc^2$")
-tex.scantoks("global",0,"$\int\limits^1_2$")
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-In the function-based interface, it is possible to define values globally by
-using the string \type {global} as the first function argument.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Character code registers: \type {[get|set]*code[s]}}]
-
-\topicindex{characters+codes}
-
-\libindex{lccode} \libindex{setlccode} \libindex{getlccode}
-\libindex{uccode} \libindex{setuccode} \libindex{getuccode}
-\libindex{sfcode} \libindex{setsfcode} \libindex{getsfcode}
-\libindex{catcode} \libindex{setcatcode} \libindex{getcatcode}
-\libindex{mathcode} \libindex{setmathcode} \libindex{getmathcode}
-\libindex{delcode} \libindex{setdelcode} \libindex{getdelcode}
-
-\libindex{setdelcodes} \libindex{getdelcodes}
-\libindex{setmathcodes} \libindex{getmathcodes}
-
-\TEX's character code tables (\prm {lccode}, \prm {uccode}, \prm {sfcode}, \prm
-{catcode}, \prm {mathcode}, \prm {delcode}) can be accessed and written to using
-six virtual subtables of the \type {tex} table
-
-\startthreecolumns
-\starttyping
-tex.lccode
-tex.uccode
-tex.sfcode
-tex.catcode
-tex.mathcode
-tex.delcode
-\stoptyping
-\stopthreecolumns
-
-The function call interfaces are roughly as above, but there are a few twists.
-\type {sfcode}s are the simple ones:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setsfcode (["global",] <number> n, <number> s)
-<number> s = tex.getsfcode (<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The function call interface for \type {lccode} and \type {uccode} additionally
-allows you to set the associated sibling at the same time:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setlccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> lc)
-tex.setlccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> lc, <number> uc)
-<number> lc = tex.getlccode (<number> n)
-tex.setuccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> uc)
-tex.setuccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> uc, <number> lc)
-<number> uc = tex.getuccode (<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The function call interface for \type {catcode} also allows you to specify a
-category table to use on assignment or on query (default in both cases is the
-current one):
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setcatcode (["global"], <number> n, <number> c)
-tex.setcatcode (["global"], <number> cattable, <number> n, <number> c)
-<number> lc = tex.getcatcode (<number> n)
-<number> lc = tex.getcatcode (<number> cattable, <number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The interfaces for \type {delcode} and \type {mathcode} use small array tables to
-set and retrieve values:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setmathcode (["global"], <number> n, <table> mval )
-<table> mval = tex.getmathcode (<number> n)
-tex.setdelcode (["global"], <number> n, <table> dval )
-<table> dval = tex.getdelcode (<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Where the table for \type {mathcode} is an array of 3 numbers, like this:
-
-\starttyping
-{
- <number> class,
- <number> family,
- <number> character
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-And the table for \type {delcode} is an array with 4 numbers, like this:
-
-\starttyping
-{
- <number> small_fam,
- <number> small_char,
- <number> large_fam,
- <number> large_char
-}
-\stoptyping
-
-You can also avoid the table:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setmathcode (["global"], <number> n, <number> class,
- <number> family, <number> character)
-class, family, char =
- tex.getmathcodes (<number> n)
-tex.setdelcode (["global"], <number> n, <number> smallfam,
- <number> smallchar, <number> largefam, <number> largechar)
-smallfam, smallchar, largefam, largechar =
- tex.getdelcodes (<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Normally, the third and fourth values in a delimiter code assignment will be zero
-according to \lpr {Udelcode} usage, but the returned table can have values there
-(if the delimiter code was set using \prm {delcode}, for example). Unset \type
-{delcode}'s can be recognized because \type {dval[1]} is $-1$.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Box registers: \type {[get|set]box}}]
-
-\topicindex{registers}
-\topicindex{boxes}
-
-\libindex{box}
-\libindex{setbox} \libindex{getbox}
-
-It is possible to set and query actual boxes, coming for instance from \prm
-{hbox}, \prm {vbox} or \prm {vtop}, using the node interface as defined in the
-\type {node} library:
-
-\starttyping
-tex.box
-\stoptyping
-
-for array access, or
-
-\starttyping
-tex.setbox(["global",] <number> n, <node> s)
-tex.setbox(["global",] <string> cs, <node> s)
-<node> n = tex.getbox(<number> n)
-<node> n = tex.getbox(<string> cs)
-\stoptyping
-
-for function|-|based access. In the function-based interface, it is possible to
-define values globally by using the string \type {global} as the first function
-argument.
-
-Be warned that an assignment like
-
-\starttyping
-tex.box[0] = tex.box[2]
-\stoptyping
-
-does not copy the node list, it just duplicates a node pointer. If \type {\box2}
-will be cleared by \TEX\ commands later on, the contents of \type {\box0} becomes
-invalid as well. To prevent this from happening, always use \type
-{node.copy_list} unless you are assigning to a temporary variable:
-
-\starttyping
-tex.box[0] = node.copy_list(tex.box[2])
-\stoptyping
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Reusing boxes: \type {[use|save]boxresource} and \type {getboxresourcedimensions}}]
-
-\topicindex{boxes+reuse}
-
-\libindex{useboxresource}
-\libindex{saveboxresource}
-\libindex{getboxresourcedimensions}
-
-The following function will register a box for reuse (this is modelled after so
-called xforms in \PDF). You can (re)use the box with \lpr {useboxresource} or
-by creating a rule node with subtype~2.
-
-\starttyping
-local index = tex.saveboxresource(n,attributes,resources,immediate,type,margin)
-\stoptyping
-
-The optional second and third arguments are strings, the fourth is a boolean. The
-fifth argument is a type. When set to non|-|zero the \type {/Type} entry is
-omitted. A value of 1 or 3 still writes a \type {/BBox}, while 2 or 3 will write
-a \type {/Matrix}. The sixth argument is the (virtual) margin that extends beyond
-the effective boundingbox as seen by \TEX. Instead of a box number one can also
-pass a \type {[h|v]list} node.
-
-You can generate the reference (a rule type) with:
-
-\starttyping
-local reused = tex.useboxresource(n,wd,ht,dp)
-\stoptyping
-
-The dimensions are optional and the final ones are returned as extra values. The
-following is just a bonus (no dimensions returned means that the resource is
-unknown):
-
-\starttyping
-local w, h, d, m = tex.getboxresourcedimensions(n)
-\stoptyping
-
-This returns the width, height, depth and margin of the resource.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {triggerbuildpage}}]
-
-\topicindex{pages}
-
-\libindex{triggerbuildpage}
-
-You should not expect to much from the \type {triggerbuildpage} helpers because
-often \TEX\ doesn't do much if it thinks nothing has to be done, but it might be
-useful for some applications. It just does as it says it calls the internal
-function that build a page, given that there is something to build.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {splitbox}}]
-
-\topicindex{boxes+split}
-
-\libindex{splitbox}
-
-You can split a box:
-
-\starttyping
-local vlist = tex.splitbox(n,height,mode)
-\stoptyping
-
-The remainder is kept in the original box and a packaged vlist is returned. This
-operation is comparable to the \prm {vsplit} operation. The mode can be \type
-{additional} or \type {exactly} and concerns the split off box.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Accessing math parameters: \type {[get|set]math}}]
-
-\topicindex{math+parameters}
-\topicindex{parameters+math}
-
-\libindex{setmath}
-\libindex{getmath}
-
-It is possible to set and query the internal math parameters using:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setmath(["global",] <string> n, <string> t, <number> n)
-<number> n = tex.getmath(<string> n, <string> t)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-As before an optional first parameter \type {global} indicates a global
-assignment.
-
-The first string is the parameter name minus the leading \quote {Umath}, and the
-second string is the style name minus the trailing \quote {style}. Just to be
-complete, the values for the math parameter name are:
-
-\starttyping
-quad axis operatorsize
-overbarkern overbarrule overbarvgap
-underbarkern underbarrule underbarvgap
-radicalkern radicalrule radicalvgap
-radicaldegreebefore radicaldegreeafter radicaldegreeraise
-stackvgap stacknumup stackdenomdown
-fractionrule fractionnumvgap fractionnumup
-fractiondenomvgap fractiondenomdown fractiondelsize
-limitabovevgap limitabovebgap limitabovekern
-limitbelowvgap limitbelowbgap limitbelowkern
-underdelimitervgap underdelimiterbgap
-overdelimitervgap overdelimiterbgap
-subshiftdrop supshiftdrop subshiftdown
-subsupshiftdown subtopmax supshiftup
-supbottommin supsubbottommax subsupvgap
-spaceafterscript connectoroverlapmin
-ordordspacing ordopspacing ordbinspacing ordrelspacing
-ordopenspacing ordclosespacing ordpunctspacing ordinnerspacing
-opordspacing opopspacing opbinspacing oprelspacing
-opopenspacing opclosespacing oppunctspacing opinnerspacing
-binordspacing binopspacing binbinspacing binrelspacing
-binopenspacing binclosespacing binpunctspacing bininnerspacing
-relordspacing relopspacing relbinspacing relrelspacing
-relopenspacing relclosespacing relpunctspacing relinnerspacing
-openordspacing openopspacing openbinspacing openrelspacing
-openopenspacing openclosespacing openpunctspacing openinnerspacing
-closeordspacing closeopspacing closebinspacing closerelspacing
-closeopenspacing closeclosespacing closepunctspacing closeinnerspacing
-punctordspacing punctopspacing punctbinspacing punctrelspacing
-punctopenspacing punctclosespacing punctpunctspacing punctinnerspacing
-innerordspacing inneropspacing innerbinspacing innerrelspacing
-inneropenspacing innerclosespacing innerpunctspacing innerinnerspacing
-\stoptyping
-
-The values for the style parameter are:
-
-\starttyping
-display crampeddisplay
-text crampedtext
-script crampedscript
-scriptscript crampedscriptscript
-\stoptyping
-
-The value is either a number (representing a dimension or number) or a glue spec
-node representing a muskip for \type {ordordspacing} and similar spacing
-parameters.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Special list heads: \type {[get|set]list}}]
-
-\topicindex{lists}
-
-\libindex{lists}
-\libindex{setlist}
-\libindex{getlist}
-
-The virtual table \type {tex.lists} contains the set of internal registers that
-keep track of building page lists.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB field \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{page_ins_head} \NC circular list of pending insertions \NC \NR
-\NC \type{contrib_head} \NC the recent contributions \NC \NR
-\NC \type{page_head} \NC the current page content \NC \NR
-%NC \type{temp_head} \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hold_head} \NC used for held-over items for next page \NC \NR
-\NC \type{adjust_head} \NC head of the current \prm {vadjust} list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pre_adjust_head} \NC head of the current \type {\vadjust pre} list \NC \NR
-%NC \type{align_head} \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{page_discards_head} \NC head of the discarded items of a page break \NC \NR
-\NC \type{split_discards_head} \NC head of the discarded items in a vsplit \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The getter and setter functions are \type {getlist} and \type {setlist}. You have
-to be careful with what you set as \TEX\ can have expectations with regards to
-how a list is constructed or in what state it is.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Semantic nest levels: \type {getnest} and \type {ptr}}]
-
-\topicindex{nesting}
-
-\libindex{nest}
-\libindex{ptr}
-%libindex{setnest} % only a message
-\libindex{getnest}
-
-The virtual table \type {nest} contains the currently active semantic nesting
-state. It has two main parts: a zero-based array of userdata for the semantic
-nest itself, and the numerical value \type {ptr}, which gives the highest
-available index. Neither the array items in \type {nest[]} nor \type {ptr} can be
-assigned to (as this would confuse the typesetting engine beyond repair), but you
-can assign to the individual values inside the array items, e.g.\ \type
-{tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr].prevdepth}.
-
-\type {tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr]} is the current nest state, \type {nest[0]} the
-outermost (main vertical list) level. The getter function is \type {getnest}. You
-can pass a number (which gives you a list), nothing or \type {top}, which returns
-the topmost list, or the string \type {ptr} which gives you the index of the
-topmost list.
-
-The known fields are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC modes \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{mode} \NC number \NC all \NC a string:
- \type {none} (this happens during \prm {write}),
- \type {vmode}, \type {hmode}, \type {displaymath},
- \type {innervmode}, \type {innerhmode}, \type {inlinemath};
- these fields cannot be set \NC \NR
-\NC \type{modeline} \NC number \NC all \NC source input line where this mode was entered in,
- negative inside the output routine \NC \NR
-\NC \type{head} \NC node \NC all \NC the head of the current list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tail} \NC node \NC all \NC the tail of the current list \NC \NR
-\NC \type{prevgraf} \NC number \NC vmode \NC number of lines in the previous paragraph \NC \NR
-\NC \type{prevdepth} \NC number \NC vmode \NC depth of the previous paragraph \NC \NR
-\NC \type{spacefactor} \NC number \NC hmode \NC the current space factor \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dirs} \NC node \NC hmode \NC used for temporary storage by the line break algorithm\NC \NR
-\NC \type{noad} \NC node \NC mmode \NC used for temporary storage of a pending fraction numerator,
- for \prm {over} etc. \NC \NR
-\NC \type{delimptr} \NC node \NC mmode \NC used for temporary storage of the previous math delimiter,
- for \prm {middle} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mathdir} \NC boolean \NC mmode \NC true when during math processing the \lpr {mathdir} is not
- the same as the surrounding \lpr {textdir} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{mathstyle} \NC number \NC mmode \NC the current \lpr {mathstyle} \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[reference=sec:luaprint,title={Print functions}]
-
-\topicindex{printing}
-
-The \type {tex} table also contains the three print functions that are the major
-interface from \LUA\ scripting to \TEX. The arguments to these three functions
-are all stored in an in|-|memory virtual file that is fed to the \TEX\ scanner as
-the result of the expansion of \prm {directlua}.
-
-The total amount of returnable text from a \prm {directlua} command is only
-limited by available system \RAM. However, each separate printed string has to
-fit completely in \TEX's input buffer. The result of using these functions from
-inside callbacks is undefined at the moment.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {print}}
-
-\libindex{print}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.print(<string> s, ...)
-tex.print(<number> n, <string> s, ...)
-tex.print(<table> t)
-tex.print(<number> n, <table> t)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Each string argument is treated by \TEX\ as a separate input line. If there is a
-table argument instead of a list of strings, this has to be a consecutive array
-of strings to print (the first non-string value will stop the printing process).
-
-The optional parameter can be used to print the strings using the catcode regime
-defined by \lpr {catcodetable}~\type {n}. If \type {n} is $-1$, the currently
-active catcode regime is used. If \type {n} is $-2$, the resulting catcodes are
-the result of \prm {the} \prm {toks}: all category codes are 12 (other) except for
-the space character, that has category code 10 (space). Otherwise, if \type {n}
-is not a valid catcode table, then it is ignored, and the currently active
-catcode regime is used instead.
-
-The very last string of the very last \type {tex.print} command in a \prm
-{directlua} will not have the \prm {endlinechar} appended, all others do.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {sprint}}
-
-\libindex{sprint}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.sprint(<string> s, ...)
-tex.sprint(<number> n, <string> s, ...)
-tex.sprint(<table> t)
-tex.sprint(<number> n, <table> t)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Each string argument is treated by \TEX\ as a special kind of input line that
-makes it suitable for use as a partial line input mechanism:
-
-\startitemize[packed]
-\startitem
- \TEX\ does not switch to the \quote {new line} state, so that leading spaces
- are not ignored.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- No \prm {endlinechar} is inserted.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- Trailing spaces are not removed. Note that this does not prevent \TEX\ itself
- from eating spaces as result of interpreting the line. For example, in
-
- \starttyping
- before\directlua{tex.sprint("\\relax")tex.sprint(" inbetween")}after
- \stoptyping
-
- the space before \type {in between} will be gobbled as a result of the \quote
- {normal} scanning of \prm {relax}.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-If there is a table argument instead of a list of strings, this has to be a
-consecutive array of strings to print (the first non-string value will stop the
-printing process).
-
-The optional argument sets the catcode regime, as with \type {tex.print}. This
-influences the string arguments (or numbers turned into strings).
-
-Although this needs to be used with care, you can also pass token or node
-userdata objects. These get injected into the stream. Tokens had best be valid
-tokens, while nodes need to be around when they get injected. Therefore it is
-important to realize the following:
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- When you inject a token, you need to pass a valid token userdata object. This
- object will be collected by \LUA\ when it no longer is referenced. When it gets
- printed to \TEX\ the token itself gets copied so there is no interference with the
- \LUA\ garbage collection. You manage the object yourself. Because tokens are
- actually just numbers, there is no real extra overhead at the \TEX\ end.
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- When you inject a node, you need to pass a valid node userdata object. The
- node related to the object will not be collected by \LUA\ when it no longer
- is referenced. It lives on at the \TEX\ end in its own memory space. When it
- gets printed to \TEX\ the node reference is used assuming that node stays
- around. There is no \LUA\ garbage collection involved. Again, you manage the
- object yourself. The node itself is freed when \TEX\ is done with it.
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-If you consider the last remark you might realize that we have a problem when a
-printed mix of strings, tokens and nodes is reused. Inside \TEX\ the sequence
-becomes a linked list of input buffers. So, \type {"123"} or \type {"\foo{123}"}
-gets read and parsed on the fly, while \typ {<token userdata>} already is
-tokenized and effectively is a token list now. A \typ {<node userdata>} is also
-tokenized into a token list but it has a reference to a real node. Normally this
-goes fine. But now assume that you store the whole lot in a macro: in that case
-the tokenized node can be flushed many times. But, after the first such flush the
-node is used and its memory freed. You can prevent this by using copies which is
-controlled by setting \lpr {luacopyinputnodes} to a non|-|zero value. This is one
-of these fuzzy areas you have to live with if you really mess with these low
-level issues.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {tprint}}
-
-\libindex{tprint}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.tprint({<number> n, <string> s, ...}, {...})
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function is basically a shortcut for repeated calls to \type
-{tex.sprint(<number> n, <string> s, ...)}, once for each of the supplied argument
-tables.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {cprint}}
-
-\libindex{cprint}
-
-This function takes a number indicating the to be used catcode, plus either a
-table of strings or an argument list of strings that will be pushed into the
-input stream.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.cprint( 1," 1: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- a lot of \bgroup s
-tex.cprint( 2," 2: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- matching \egroup s
-tex.cprint( 9," 9: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- all get ignored
-tex.cprint(10,"10: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- all become spaces
-tex.cprint(11,"11: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- letters
-tex.cprint(12,"12: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- other characters
-tex.cprint(14,"12: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- comment triggers
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-% \subsubsection{\type {write}, \type {twrite}, \type {nwrite}}
-\subsubsection{\type {write}}
-
-\libindex{write}
-% \libindex{twrite}
-% \libindex{nwrite}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.write(<string> s, ...)
-tex.write(<table> t)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Each string argument is treated by \TEX\ as a special kind of input line that
-makes it suitable for use as a quick way to dump information:
-
-\startitemize
-\item All catcodes on that line are either \quote{space} (for '~') or \quote
- {character} (for all others).
-\item There is no \prm {endlinechar} appended.
-\stopitemize
-
-If there is a table argument instead of a list of strings, this has to be a
-consecutive array of strings to print (the first non-string value will stop the
-printing process).
-
-% The functions \type {twrite} and \type {nwrite} can be used to write a token or
-% node back to \TEX\, possibly intermixed with regular strings that will be
-% tokenized. You have to make sure that you pass the right data because sometimes
-% \TEX\ has expectations that need to be met.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Helper functions}]
-
-\subsubsection{\type {round}}
-
-\topicindex {helpers}
-
-\libindex{round}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = tex.round(<number> o)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Rounds \LUA\ number \type {o}, and returns a number that is in the range of a
-valid \TEX\ register value. If the number starts out of range, it generates a
-\quote {number too big} error as well.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {scale}}
-
-\libindex{scale}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = tex.scale(<number> o, <number> delta)
-<table> n = tex.scale(table o, <number> delta)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Multiplies the \LUA\ numbers \type {o} and \nod {delta}, and returns a rounded
-number that is in the range of a valid \TEX\ register value. In the table
-version, it creates a copy of the table with all numeric top||level values scaled
-in that manner. If the multiplied number(s) are of range, it generates
-\quote{number too big} error(s) as well.
-
-Note: the precision of the output of this function will depend on your computer's
-architecture and operating system, so use with care! An interface to \LUATEX's
-internal, 100\% portable scale function will be added at a later date.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {number} and \type {romannumeral}}
-
-\libindex{number}
-\libindex{romannumeral}
-
-These are the companions to the primitives \prm {number} and \prm
-{romannumeral}. They can be used like:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.print(tex.romannumeral(123))
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsubsection{\type {fontidentifier} and \type {fontname}}
-
-\libindex{fontidentifier}
-\libindex{fontname}
-
-The first one returns the name only, the second one reports the size too.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.print(tex.fontname(tex.fontname))
-tex.print(tex.fontname(tex.fontidentidier))
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\subsubsection{\type {sp}}
-
-\libindex{sp}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> n = tex.sp(<number> o)
-<number> n = tex.sp(<string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Converts the number \type {o} or a string \type {s} that represents an explicit
-dimension into an integer number of scaled points.
-
-For parsing the string, the same scanning and conversion rules are used that
-\LUATEX\ would use if it was scanning a dimension specifier in its \TEX|-|like
-input language (this includes generating errors for bad values), expect for the
-following:
-
-\startitemize[n]
-\startitem
- only explicit values are allowed, control sequences are not handled
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- infinite dimension units (\type {fil...}) are forbidden
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- \type {mu} units do not generate an error (but may not be useful either)
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-\subsubsection{\type {tex.getlinenumber} and \type {tex.setlinenumber}}
-
-\libindex{getlinenumber}
-\libindex{setlinenumber}
-
-You can mess with the current line number:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-local n = tex.getlinenumber()
-tex.setlinenumber(n+10)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-which can be shortcut to:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.setlinenumber(10,true)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This might be handy when you have a callback that read numbers from a file and
-combines them in one line (in which case an error message probably has to refer
-to the original line). Interference with \TEX's internal handling of numbers is
-of course possible.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {error} and \type {show_context}}
-
-\topicindex{errors}
-
-\libindex{error}
-\libindex{show_context}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.error(<string> s)
-tex.error(<string> s, <table> help)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This creates an error somewhat like the combination of \prm {errhelp} and \prm
-{errmessage} would. During this error, deletions are disabled.
-
-The array part of the \type {help} table has to contain strings, one for each
-line of error help.
-
-In case of an error the \type {show_context} function will show the current
-context where we're at (in the expansion).
-
-\subsubsection{\type {run}, \type {finish}}
-
-\libindex{run}
-\libindex{finish}
-
-These two functions start the interpretations and force its end. A runs normally
-boils down to \TEX\ entering the so called main loop. A token is fetched and
-depending on it current meaning some actions takes place. Sometimes that actions
-comes immediately, sometimes more scanning is needed. Quite often tokens get
-pushed back into the input. This all means that the \TEX\ scanner is constantly
-pushing and popping input states, but in the end after all the action is done
-returns to the main loop.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {runtoks}}
-
-Because of the fact that \TEX\ is in a complex dance of expanding, dealing with
-fonts, typesetting paragraphs, messing around with boxes, building pages, and so
-on, you cannot easily run a nested \TEX\ run (read nested main loop). However,
-there is an option to force a local run with \type {runtoks}. The content of the
-given token list register gets expanded locally after which we return to where we
-triggered this expansion, at the \LUA\ end. Instead a function can get passed
-that does some work. You have to make sure that at the end \TEX\ is in a sane
-state and this is not always trivial. A more complex mechanism would complicate
-\TEX\ itself (and probably also harm performance) so this simple local expansion
-loop has to do.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.runtoks(<token register>)
-tex.runtoks(<lua function>)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-When the \prm {tracingnesting} parameter is set to a value larger than~2 some
-information is reported about the state of the local loop.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {forcehmode}}
-
-\libindex{forcehmode}
-
-An example of a (possible error triggering) complication is that \TEX\ expects to
-be in some state, say horizontal mode, and you have to make sure it is when you
-start feeding back something from \LUA\ into \TEX. Normally a user will not run
-into issues but when you start writing tokens or nodes or have a nested run there
-can be situations that you need to run \type {forcehmode}. There is no recipe for
-this and intercepting possible cases would weaken \LUATEX's flexibility.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {hashtokens}}
-
-\libindex{hashtokens}
-
-\topicindex{hash}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-for i,v in pairs (tex.hashtokens()) do ... end
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Returns a list of names. This can be useful for debugging, but note that this
-also reports control sequences that may be unreachable at this moment due to
-local redefinitions: it is strictly a dump of the hash table. You can use \type
-{token.create} to inspect properties, for instance when the \type {command} key
-in a created table equals \type {123}, you have the \type {cmdname} value \type
-{undefined_cs}.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {definefont}}
-
-\topicindex{fonts+defining}
-
-\libindex{definefont}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.definefont(<string> csname, <number> fontid)
-tex.definefont(<boolean> global, <string> csname, <number> fontid)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Associates \type {csname} with the internal font number \type {fontid}. The
-definition is global if (and only if) \type {global} is specified and true (the
-setting of \type {globaldefs} is not taken into account).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[reference=luaprimitives,title={Functions for dealing with primitives}]
-
-\subsubsection{\type {enableprimitives}}
-
-\libindex{enableprimitives}
-
-\topicindex{initialization}
-\topicindex{primitives}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.enableprimitives(<string> prefix, <table> primitive names)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function accepts a prefix string and an array of primitive names. For each
-combination of \quote {prefix} and \quote {name}, the \type
-{tex.enableprimitives} first verifies that \quote {name} is an actual primitive
-(it must be returned by one of the \type {tex.extraprimitives} calls explained
-below, or part of \TEX82, or \prm {directlua}). If it is not, \type
-{tex.enableprimitives} does nothing and skips to the next pair.
-
-But if it is, then it will construct a csname variable by concatenating the
-\quote {prefix} and \quote {name}, unless the \quote {prefix} is already the
-actual prefix of \quote {name}. In the latter case, it will discard the \quote
-{prefix}, and just use \quote {name}.
-
-Then it will check for the existence of the constructed csname. If the csname is
-currently undefined (note: that is not the same as \prm {relax}), it will
-globally define the csname to have the meaning: run code belonging to the
-primitive \quote {name}. If for some reason the csname is already defined, it
-does nothing and tries the next pair.
-
-An example:
-
-\starttyping
-tex.enableprimitives('LuaTeX', {'formatname'})
-\stoptyping
-
-will define \type {\LuaTeXformatname} with the same intrinsic meaning as the
-documented primitive \lpr {formatname}, provided that the control sequences \type
-{\LuaTeXformatname} is currently undefined.
-
-When \LUATEX\ is run with \type {--ini} only the \TEX82 primitives and \prm
-{directlua} are available, so no extra primitives {\bf at all}.
-
-If you want to have all the new functionality available using their default
-names, as it is now, you will have to add
-
-\starttyping
-\ifx\directlua\undefined \else
- \directlua {tex.enableprimitives('',tex.extraprimitives ())}
-\fi
-\stoptyping
-
-near the beginning of your format generation file. Or you can choose different
-prefixes for different subsets, as you see fit.
-
-Calling some form of \type {tex.enableprimitives} is highly important though,
-because if you do not, you will end up with a \TEX82-lookalike that can run \LUA\
-code but not do much else. The defined csnames are (of course) saved in the
-format and will be available at runtime.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {extraprimitives}}
-
-\libindex{extraprimitives}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> t = tex.extraprimitives(<string> s, ...)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns a list of the primitives that originate from the engine(s)
-given by the requested string value(s). The possible values and their (current)
-return values are given in the following table. In addition the somewhat special
-primitives \quote{\tex{ }}, \quote{\tex {/}} and \quote{\type {-}} are defined.
-
-\startluacode
-function document.showprimitives(tag)
- for k, v in table.sortedpairs(tex.extraprimitives(tag)) do
- if v ~= ' ' and v ~= "/" and v ~= "-" then
- context.type(v)
- context.space()
- end
- end
-end
-\stopluacode
-
-\starttabulate[|l|pl|]
-\DB name \BC values \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC tex \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('tex') } \NC \NR
-\NC core \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('core') } \NC \NR
-\NC etex \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('etex') } \NC \NR
-\NC luatex \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('luatex') } \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note that \type {luatex} does not contain \type {directlua}, as that is
-considered to be a core primitive, along with all the \TEX82 primitives, so it is
-part of the list that is returned from \type {'core'}.
-
-Running \type {tex.extraprimitives} will give you the complete list of
-primitives \type {-ini} startup. It is exactly equivalent to \type
-{tex.extraprimitives("etex","luatex")}.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {primitives}}
-
-\libindex{primitives}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<table> t = tex.primitives()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function returns a list of all primitives that \LUATEX\ knows about.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Core functionality interfaces}]
-
-\subsubsection{\type {badness}}
-
-\libindex{badness}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<number> b = tex.badness(<number> t, <number> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This helper function is useful during linebreak calculations. \type {t} and \type
-{s} are scaled values; the function returns the badness for when total \type {t}
-is supposed to be made from amounts that sum to \type {s}. The returned number is
-a reasonable approximation of \mathematics {100(t/s)^3};
-
-\subsubsection{\type {tex.resetparagraph}}
-
-\topicindex {paragraphs+reset}
-
-\libindex{resetparagraph}
-
-This function resets the parameters that \TEX\ normally resets when a new paragraph
-is seen.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {linebreak}}
-
-\topicindex {linebreaks}
-
-\libindex{linebreak}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-local <node> nodelist, <table> info =
- tex.linebreak(<node> listhead, <table> parameters)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The understood parameters are as follows:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB name \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{pardir} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pretolerance} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tracingparagraphs} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{tolerance} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{looseness} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hyphenpenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{exhyphenpenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdfadjustspacing} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{adjdemerits} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pdfprotrudechars} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{linepenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{lastlinefit} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{doublehyphendemerits} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{finalhyphendemerits} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hangafter} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{interlinepenalty} \NC number or table \NC if a table, then it is an array like \prm {interlinepenalties} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{clubpenalty} \NC number or table \NC if a table, then it is an array like \prm {clubpenalties} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{widowpenalty} \NC number or table \NC if a table, then it is an array like \prm {widowpenalties} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{brokenpenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{emergencystretch} \NC number \NC in scaled points \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hangindent} \NC number \NC in scaled points \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hsize} \NC number \NC in scaled points \NC \NR
-\NC \type{leftskip} \NC glue_spec node \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{rightskip} \NC glue_spec node \NC \NC \NR
-\NC \type{parshape} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note that there is no interface for \prm {displaywidowpenalties}, you have to
-pass the right choice for \type {widowpenalties} yourself.
-
-It is your own job to make sure that \type {listhead} is a proper paragraph list:
-this function does not add any nodes to it. To be exact, if you want to replace
-the core line breaking, you may have to do the following (when you are not
-actually working in the \cbk {pre_linebreak_filter} or \cbk {linebreak_filter}
-callbacks, or when the original list starting at listhead was generated in
-horizontal mode):
-
-\startitemize
-\startitem
- add an \quote {indent box} and perhaps a \nod {local_par} node at the start
- (only if you need them)
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- replace any found final glue by an infinite penalty (or add such a penalty,
- if the last node is not a glue)
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- add a glue node for the \prm {parfillskip} after that penalty node
-\stopitem
-\startitem
- make sure all the \type {prev} pointers are OK
-\stopitem
-\stopitemize
-
-The result is a node list, it still needs to be vpacked if you want to assign it
-to a \prm {vbox}. The returned \type {info} table contains four values that are
-all numbers:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB name \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC prevdepth \NC depth of the last line in the broken paragraph \NC \NR
-\NC prevgraf \NC number of lines in the broken paragraph \NC \NR
-\NC looseness \NC the actual looseness value in the broken paragraph \NC \NR
-\NC demerits \NC the total demerits of the chosen solution \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note there are a few things you cannot interface using this function: You cannot
-influence font expansion other than via \type {pdfadjustspacing}, because the
-settings for that take place elsewhere. The same is true for hbadness and hfuzz
-etc. All these are in the \type {hpack} routine, and that fetches its own
-variables via globals.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {shipout}}
-
-\topicindex {shipout}
-
-\libindex{shipout}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.shipout(<number> n)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Ships out box number \type {n} to the output file, and clears the box register.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {getpagestate}}
-
-\topicindex {pages}
-
-\libindex{getpagestate}
-
-This helper reports the current page state: \type {empty}, \type {box_there} or
-\type {inserts_only} as integer value.
-
-\subsubsection{\type {getlocallevel}}
-
-\topicindex {nesting}
-
-\libindex{getlocallevel}
-
-This integer reports the current level of the local loop. It's only useful for
-debugging and the (relative state) numbers can change with the implementation.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Randomizers}]
-
-\libindex{lua_math_random}
-\libindex{lua_math_randomseed}
-\libindex{init_rand}
-\libindex{normal_rand}
-\libindex{uniform_rand}
-\libindex{uniformdeviate}
-
-For practical reasons \LUATEX\ has its own random number generator. The original
-\LUA\ random function is available as \typ {tex.lua_math_random}. You can
-initialize with a new seed with \type {init_rand} (\typ {lua_math_randomseed} is
-equivalent to this one.
-
-There are three generators: \type {normal_rand} (no argument is used), \type
-{uniform_rand} (takes a number that will get rounded before being used) and \type
-{uniformdeviate} which behaves like the primitive and expects a scaled integer, so
-
-\startfunctioncall
-tex.print(tex.uniformdeviate(65536)/65536)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-will give a random number between zero and one.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[reference=synctex,title={Functions related to synctex}]
-
-\topicindex {synctex}
-
-\libindex{set_synctex_mode} \libindex{get_synctex_mode}
-\libindex{set_synctex_no_files}
-\libindex{set_synctex_tag} \libindex{get_synctex_tag} \libindex{force_synctex_tag}
-\libindex{set_synctex_line} \libindex{get_synctex_line} \libindex{force_synctex_line}
-
-The next helpers only make sense when you implement your own synctex logic. Keep in
-mind that the library used in editors assumes a certain logic and is geared for
-plain and \LATEX, so after a decade users expect a certain behaviour.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB name \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{set_synctex_mode} \NC \type {0} is the default and used normal synctex
- logic, \type {1} uses the values set by the next
- helpers while \type {2} also sets these for glyph
- nodes; \type{3} sets glyphs and glue and \type {4}
- sets only glyphs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{set_synctex_tag} \NC set the current tag (file) value (obeys save stack) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{set_synctex_line} \NC set the current line value (obeys save stack) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{set_synctex_no_files} \NC disable synctex file logging \NC \NR
-\NC \type{get_synctex_mode} \NC returns the current mode (for values see above) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{get_synctex_tag} \NC get the currently set value of tag (file) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{get_synctex_line} \NC get the currently set value of line \NC \NR
-\NC \type{force_synctex_tag} \NC overload the tag (file) value (\type {0} resets) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{force_synctex_line} \NC overload the line value (\type {0} resets) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The last one is somewhat special. Due to the way files are registered in \SYNCTEX\ we need
-to explicitly disable that feature if we provide our own alternative if we want to avoid
-that overhead. Passing a value of 1 disables registering.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {texconfig} table},reference=texconfig][library=texconfig]
-
-\topicindex{libraries+\type{texconfig}}
-
-\topicindex {configuration}
-
-This is a table that is created empty. A startup \LUA\ script could
-fill this table with a number of settings that are read out by
-the executable after loading and executing the startup file.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC default \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{kpse_init} \NC boolean \NC true
-\NC
- \type {false} totally disables \KPATHSEA\ initialisation, and enables
- interpretation of the following numeric key--value pairs. (only ever unset
- this if you implement {\it all\/} file find callbacks!)
-\NC \NR
-\NC
- \type{shell_escape} \NC string \NC \type {'f'} \NC Use \type {'y'} or \type
- {'t'} or \type {'1'} to enable \type {\write18} unconditionally, \type {'p'}
- to enable the commands that are listed in \type {shell_escape_commands}
-\NC \NR
-\NC
- shell_escape_commands \NC string \NC \NC Comma-separated list of command
- names that may be executed by \type {\write18} even if \type {shell_escape}
- is set to \type {'p'}. Do {\it not\/} use spaces around commas, separate any
- required command arguments by using a space, and use the \ASCII\ double quote
- (\type {"}) for any needed argument or path quoting
-\NC \NR
-\NC \type{string_vacancies} \NC number \NC 75000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pool_free} \NC number \NC 5000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_strings} \NC number \NC 15000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{strings_free} \NC number \NC 100 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{nest_size} \NC number \NC 50 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_in_open} \NC number \NC 15 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{param_size} \NC number \NC 60 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{save_size} \NC number \NC 4000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{stack_size} \NC number \NC 300 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{dvi_buf_size} \NC number \NC 16384 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{error_line} \NC number \NC 79 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{half_error_line} \NC number \NC 50 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{max_print_line} \NC number \NC 79 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{hash_extra} \NC number \NC 0 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{pk_dpi} \NC number \NC 72 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{trace_file_names} \NC boolean \NC true
-\NC
- \type {false} disables \TEX's normal file open|-|close feedback (the
- assumption is that callbacks will take care of that)
-\NC \NR
-\NC \type{file_line_error} \NC boolean \NC false
-\NC
- do \type {file:line} style error messages
-\NC \NR
-\NC \type{halt_on_error} \NC boolean \NC false
-\NC
- abort run on the first encountered error
-\NC \NR
-\NC \type{formatname} \NC string \NC
-\NC
- if no format name was given on the command line, this key will be tested first
- instead of simply quitting
-\NC \NR
-\NC \type{jobname} \NC string \NC
-\NC
- if no input file name was given on the command line, this key will be tested
- first instead of simply giving up
-\NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Note: the numeric values that match web2c parameters are only used if \type
-{kpse_init} is explicitly set to \type {false}. In all other cases, the normal
-values from \type {texmf.cnf} are used.
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {texio} library}][library=texio]
-
-\topicindex{libraries+\type{texio}}
-\topicindex{\IO}
-
-This library takes care of the low|-|level I/O interface: writing to the log file
-and|/|or console.
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {write}}]
-
-\libindex{write}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-texio.write(<string> target, <string> s, ...)
-texio.write(<string> s, ...)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Without the \type {target} argument, writes all given strings to the same
-location(s) \TEX\ writes messages to at this moment. If \prm {batchmode} is in
-effect, it writes only to the log, otherwise it writes to the log and the
-terminal. The optional \type {target} can be one of three possibilities: \type
-{term}, \type {log} or \type {term and log}.
-
-Note: If several strings are given, and if the first of these strings is or might
-be one of the targets above, the \type {target} must be specified explicitly to
-prevent \LUA\ from interpreting the first string as the target.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {write_nl}}]
-
-\libindex{write_nl}
-
-\startfunctioncall
-texio.write_nl(<string> target, <string> s, ...)
-texio.write_nl(<string> s, ...)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-This function behaves like \type {texio.write}, but make sure that the given
-strings will appear at the beginning of a new line. You can pass a single empty
-string if you only want to move to the next line.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {setescape}}]
-
-\libindex{setescape}
-
-You can disable \type {^^} escaping of control characters by passing a value of
-zero.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {closeinput}}]
-
-\libindex{closeinput}
-
-This function that should be used with care. It acts as \prm {endinput} but at
-the \LUA\ end. You can use it to (sort of) force a jump back to \TEX. Normally a
-\LUA\ will just collect prints and at the end bump an input level and flush these
-prints. This function can help you stay at the current level but you need to know
-what you're doing (or more precise: what \TEX\ is doing with input).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {token} library}][library=token]
-
-\startsubsection[title={The scanner}]
-
-\topicindex{libraries+\type{token}}
-\topicindex{tokens}
-
-\libindex{scan_keyword}
-\libindex{scan_keywordcs}
-\libindex{scan_int}
-\libindex{scan_real}
-\libindex{scan_float}
-\libindex{scan_dimen}
-\libindex{scan_glue}
-\libindex{scan_toks}
-\libindex{scan_code}
-\libindex{scan_string}
-\libindex{scan_argument}
-\libindex{scan_word}
-\libindex{scan_csname}
-\libindex{scan_list}
-
-The token library provides means to intercept the input and deal with it at the
-\LUA\ level. The library provides a basic scanner infrastructure that can be used
-to write macros that accept a wide range of arguments. This interface is on
-purpose kept general and as performance is quite ok. One can build additional
-parsers without too much overhead. It's up to macro package writers to see how
-they can benefit from this as the main principle behind \LUATEX\ is to provide a
-minimal set of tools and no solutions. The scanner functions are probably the
-most intriguing.
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB function \BC argument \BC result \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{scan_keyword} \NC string \NC returns true if the given keyword is gobbled; as with
- the regular \TEX\ keyword scanner this is case insensitive
- (and \ASCII\ based) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_keywordcs} \NC string \NC returns true if the given keyword is gobbled; this variant
- is case sensitive and also suitable for \UTF8 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_int} \NC \NC returns an integer \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_real} \NC \NC returns a number from e.g.\ \type {1}, \type {1.1}, \type {.1} with optional collapsed signs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_float} \NC \NC returns a number from e.g.\ \type {1}, \type {1.1}, \type {.1}, \type {1.1E10}, , \type {.1e-10} with optional collapsed signs \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_dimen} \NC infinity, mu-units \NC returns a number representing a dimension and or two numbers being the filler and order \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_glue} \NC mu-units \NC returns a glue spec node \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_toks} \NC definer, expand \NC returns a table of tokens tokens \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_code} \NC bitset \NC returns a character if its category is in the given bitset (representing catcodes) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_string} \NC \NC returns a string given between \type {{}}, as \type {\macro} or as sequence of characters with catcode 11 or 12 \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_argument} \NC \NC this one is simular to \type {scanstring} but also accepts a \type {\cs}
- (which then get expanded) \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_word} \NC \NC returns a sequence of characters with catcode 11 or 12 as string \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_csname} \NC \NC returns \type {foo} after scanning \type {\foo} \NC \NR
-\NC \type{scan_list} \NC \NC picks up a box specification and returns a \type {[h|v]list} node \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The scanners can be considered stable apart from the one scanning for a token.
-The \type {scan_code} function takes an optional number, the \type {keyword}
-function a normal \LUA\ string. The \type {infinity} boolean signals that we also
-permit \type {fill} as dimension and the \type {mu-units} flags the scanner that
-we expect math units. When scanning tokens we can indicate that we are defining a
-macro, in which case the result will also provide information about what
-arguments are expected and in the result this is separated from the meaning by a
-separator token. The \type {expand} flag determines if the list will be expanded.
-
-The string scanner scans for something between curly braces and expands on the
-way, or when it sees a control sequence it will return its meaning. Otherwise it
-will scan characters with catcode \type {letter} or \type {other}. So, given the
-following definition:
-
-\startbuffer
-\def\bar{bar}
-\def\foo{foo-\bar}
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer \getbuffer
-
-we get:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|Tl|l|]
-\DB name \BC result \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {\directlua{token.scan_string()}{foo}} \NC \directlua{context("{\\red\\type {"..token.scan_string().."}}")} {foo} \NC full expansion \NC \NR
-\NC \type {\directlua{token.scan_string()}foo} \NC \directlua{context("{\\red\\type {"..token.scan_string().."}}")} foo \NC letters and others \NC \NR
-\NC \type {\directlua{token.scan_string()}\foo} \NC \directlua{context("{\\red\\type {"..token.scan_string().."}}")}\foo \NC meaning \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-The \type {\foo} case only gives the meaning, but one can pass an already
-expanded definition (\prm {edef}'d). In the case of the braced variant one can of
-course use the \prm {detokenize} and \prm {unexpanded} primitives since there we
-do expand.
-
-The \type {scan_word} scanner can be used to implement for instance a number scanner:
-
-\starttyping
-function token.scan_number(base)
- return tonumber(token.scan_word(),base)
-end
-\stoptyping
-
-This scanner accepts any valid \LUA\ number so it is a way to pick up floats
-in the input.
-
-You can use the \LUA\ interface as follows:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- function mymacro(n)
- ...
- end
-}
-
-\def\mymacro#1{%
- \directlua {
- mymacro(\number\dimexpr#1)
- }%
-}
-
-\mymacro{12pt}
-\mymacro{\dimen0}
-\stoptyping
-
-You can also do this:
-
-\starttyping
-\directlua {
- function mymacro()
- local d = token.scan_dimen()
- ...
- end
-}
-
-\def\mymacro{%
- \directlua {
- mymacro()
- }%
-}
-
-\mymacro 12pt
-\mymacro \dimen0
-\stoptyping
-
-It is quite clear from looking at the code what the first method needs as
-argument(s). For the second method you need to look at the \LUA\ code to see what
-gets picked up. Instead of passing from \TEX\ to \LUA\ we let \LUA\ fetch from
-the input stream.
-
-In the first case the input is tokenized and then turned into a string, then it
-is passed to \LUA\ where it gets interpreted. In the second case only a function
-call gets interpreted but then the input is picked up by explicitly calling the
-scanner functions. These return proper \LUA\ variables so no further conversion
-has to be done. This is more efficient but in practice (given what \TEX\ has to
-do) this effect should not be overestimated. For numbers and dimensions it saves
-a bit but for passing strings conversion to and from tokens has to be done anyway
-(although we can probably speed up the process in later versions if needed).
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title= {Picking up one token}]
-
-\libindex {get_next}
-\libindex {scan_token}
-\libindex {expand}
-
-The scanners look for a sequence. When you want to pick up one token from the
-input you use \type {get_next}. This creates a token with the (low level)
-properties as discussed next. This token is just the next one. If you want to
-enforce expansion first you can use \type {scan_token}. Internally tokens are
-characterized by a number that packs a lot of information. In order to access
-the bits of information a token is wrapped in a userdata object.
-
-The \type {expand} function will trigger expansion of the next token in the
-input. This can be quite unpredictable but when you call it you probably know
-enough about \TEX\ not to be too worried about that. It basically is a call to
-the internal expand related function.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Creating tokens}]
-
-\libindex{create}
-\libindex{new}
-
-\libindex{is_defined}
-\libindex{is_token}
-\libindex{biggest_char}
-
-\libindex{commands}
-\libindex{command_id}
-
-\libindex{get_command}
-\libindex{get_cmdname}
-\libindex{get_csname}
-\libindex{get_id}
-\libindex{get_active}
-\libindex{get_expandable}
-\libindex{get_protected}
-\libindex{get_mode}
-\libindex{get_index}
-\libindex{get_tok}
-
-\libindex{get_next}
-
-The creator function can be used as follows:
-
-\starttyping
-local t = token.create("relax")
-\stoptyping
-
-This gives back a token object that has the properties of the \prm {relax}
-primitive. The possible properties of tokens are:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|p|]
-\DB name \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type {command} \NC a number representing the internal command number \NC \NR
-\NC \type {cmdname} \NC the type of the command (for instance the catcode in case of a
- character or the classifier that determines the internal
- treatment \NC \NR
-\NC \type {csname} \NC the associated control sequence (if applicable) \NC \NR
-\NC \type {id} \NC the unique id of the token \NC \NR
-\NC \type {tok} \NC the full token number as stored in \TEX \NC \NR
-\NC \type {active} \NC a boolean indicating the active state of the token \NC \NR
-\NC \type {expandable} \NC a boolean indicating if the token (macro) is expandable \NC \NR
-\NC \type {protected} \NC a boolean indicating if the token (macro) is protected \NC \NR
-\NC \type {mode} \NC a number either representing a character or another entity \NC \NR
-\NC \type {index} \NC a number running from 0x0000 upto 0xFFFF indicating a \TEX\ register index \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-Alternatively you can use a getter \type {get_<fieldname>} to access a property
-of a token.
-
-The numbers that represent a catcode are the same as in \TEX\ itself, so using
-this information assumes that you know a bit about \TEX's internals. The other
-numbers and names are used consistently but are not frozen. So, when you use them
-for comparing you can best query a known primitive or character first to see the
-values.
-
-You can ask for a list of commands:
-
-\starttyping
-local t = token.commands()
-\stoptyping
-
-The id of a token class can be queried as follows:
-
-\starttyping
-local id = token.command_id("math_shift")
-\stoptyping
-
-If you really know what you're doing you can create character tokens by not
-passing a string but a number:
-
-\starttyping
-local letter_x = token.create(string.byte("x"))
-local other_x = token.create(string.byte("x"),12)
-\stoptyping
-
-Passing weird numbers can give side effects so don't expect too much help with
-that. As said, you need to know what you're doing. The best way to explore the
-way these internals work is to just look at how primitives or macros or \prm
-{chardef}'d commands are tokenized. Just create a known one and inspect its
-fields. A variant that ignores the current catcode table is:
-
-\starttyping
-local whatever = token.new(123,12)
-\stoptyping
-
-You can test if a control sequence is defined with \type {is_defined}, which
-accepts a string and returns a boolean:
-
-\starttyping
-local okay = token.is_defined("foo")
-\stoptyping
-
-The largest character possible is returned by \type {biggest_char}, just in case you
-need to know that boundary condition.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Macros}]
-
-\topicindex {macros}
-
-\libindex{set_macro}
-\libindex{get_macro}
-\libindex{get_meaning}
-\libindex{set_char}
-\libindex{set_lua}
-\libindex{get_functions_table}
-
-The \type {set_macro} function can get upto 4 arguments:
-
-\starttyping
-set_macro("csname","content")
-set_macro("csname","content","global")
-set_macro("csname")
-\stoptyping
-
-You can pass a catcodetable identifier as first argument:
-
-\starttyping
-set_macro(catcodetable,"csname","content")
-set_macro(catcodetable,"csname","content","global")
-set_macro(catcodetable,"csname")
-\stoptyping
-
-The results are like:
-
-\starttyping
- \def\csname{content}
-\gdef\csname{content}
- \def\csname{}
-\stoptyping
-
-The \type {get_macro} function can be used to get the content of a macro while
-the \type {get_meaning} function gives the meaning including the argument
-specification (as usual in \TEX\ separated by \type {->}).
-
-The \type {set_char} function can be used to do a \prm {chardef} at the
-\LUA\ end, where invalid assignments are silently ignored:
-
-\starttyping
-set_char("csname",number)
-set_char("csname",number,"global")
-\stoptyping
-
-A special one is the following:
-
-\starttyping
-set_lua("mycode",id)
-set_lua("mycode",id,"global","protected")
-\stoptyping
-
-This creates a token that refers to a \LUA\ function with an entry in the table
-that you can access with \type {lua.get_functions_table}. It is the companion
-to \lpr {luadef}.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Pushing back}]
-
-\libindex{get_next}
-\libindex{put_next}
-
-There is a (for now) experimental putter:
-
-\starttyping
-local t1 = token.get_next()
-local t2 = token.get_next()
-local t3 = token.get_next()
-local t4 = token.get_next()
--- watch out, we flush in sequence
-token.put_next { t1, t2 }
--- but this one gets pushed in front
-token.put_next ( t3, t4 )
-\stoptyping
-
-When we scan \type {wxyz!} we get \type {yzwx!} back. The argument is either a table
-with tokens or a list of tokens. The \type {token.expand} function will trigger
-expansion but what happens really depends on what you're doing where.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={Nota bene}]
-
-When scanning for the next token you need to keep in mind that we're not scanning
-like \TEX\ does: expanding, changing modes and doing things as it goes. When we
-scan with \LUA\ we just pick up tokens. Say that we have:
-
-\starttyping
-\bar
-\stoptyping
-
-but \type {\bar} is undefined. Normally \TEX\ will then issue an error message.
-However, when we have:
-
-\starttyping
-\def\foo{\bar}
-\stoptyping
-
-We get no error, unless we expand \type {\foo} while \type {\bar} is still
-undefined. What happens is that as soon as \TEX\ sees an undefined macro it will
-create a hash entry and when later it gets defined that entry will be reused. So,
-\type {\bar} really exists but can be in an undefined state.
-
-\startbuffer[demo]
-bar : \directlua{tex.print(token.scan_csname())}\bar
-foo : \directlua{tex.print(token.scan_csname())}\foo
-myfirstbar : \directlua{tex.print(token.scan_csname())}\myfirstbar
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startlines
-\getbuffer[demo]
-\stoplines
-
-This was entered as:
-
-\typebuffer[demo]
-
-The reason that you see \type {bar} reported and not \type {myfirstbar} is that
-\type {\bar} was already used in a previous paragraph.
-
-If we now say:
-
-\startbuffer
-\def\foo{}
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer \getbuffer
-
-we get:
-
-\startlines
-\getbuffer[demo]
-\stoplines
-
-And if we say
-
-\startbuffer
-\def\foo{\bar}
-\stopbuffer
-
-\typebuffer \getbuffer
-
-we get:
-
-\startlines
-\getbuffer[demo]
-\stoplines
-
-When scanning from \LUA\ we are not in a mode that defines (undefined) macros at
-all. There we just get the real primitive undefined macro token.
-
-\startbuffer
-\directlua{local t = token.get_next() tex.print(t.id.." "..t.tok)}\myfirstbar
-\directlua{local t = token.get_next() tex.print(t.id.." "..t.tok)}\mysecondbar
-\directlua{local t = token.get_next() tex.print(t.id.." "..t.tok)}\mythirdbar
-\stopbuffer
-
-\startlines
-\getbuffer
-\stoplines
-
-This was generated with:
-
-\typebuffer
-
-So, we do get a unique token because after all we need some kind of \LUA\ object
-that can be used and garbage collected, but it is basically the same one,
-representing an undefined control sequence.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\startsection[title={The \type {kpse} library}][library=kpse]
-
-\topicindex{libraries+\type{kpse}}
-
-This library provides two separate, but nearly identical interfaces to the
-\KPATHSEA\ file search functionality: there is a \quote {normal} procedural
-interface that shares its kpathsea instance with \LUATEX\ itself, and an object
-oriented interface that is completely on its own.
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {set_program_name} and \type {new}}]
-
-\libindex{set_program_name}
-\libindex{default_texmfcnf}
-\libindex{new}
-
-The way the library looks up variables is driven by the \type {texmf.cmf} file
-where the currently set program name acts as filter. You can check what file is
-used by with \type {default_texmfcnf}.
-
-Before the search library can be used at all, its database has to be initialized.
-There are three possibilities, two of which belong to the procedural interface.
-
-First, when \LUATEX\ is used to typeset documents, this initialization happens
-automatically and the \KPATHSEA\ executable and program names are set to \type
-{luatex} (that is, unless explicitly prohibited by the user's startup script.
-See~\in {section} [init] for more details).
-
-Second, in \TEXLUA\ mode, the initialization has to be done explicitly via the
-\type {kpse.set_program_name} function, which sets the \KPATHSEA\ executable
-(and optionally program) name.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-kpse.set_program_name(<string> name)
-kpse.set_program_name(<string> name, <string> progname)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The second argument controls the use of the \quote {dotted} values in the \type
-{texmf.cnf} configuration file, and defaults to the first argument.
-
-Third, if you prefer the object oriented interface, you have to call a different
-function. It has the same arguments, but it returns a userdata variable.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-local kpathsea = kpse.new(<string> name)
-local kpathsea = kpse.new(<string> name, <string> progname)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Apart from these two functions, the calling conventions of the interfaces are
-identical. Depending on the chosen interface, you either call \type
-{kpse.find_file} or \type {kpathsea:find_file}, with identical arguments and
-return values.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {record_input_file} and \type {record_output_file}}]
-
-\topicindex {files+recording}
-
-\libindex{record_input_file}
-\libindex{record_output_file}
-
-These two function can be used to register used files. Because callbacks can load
-files themselves you might need these helpers (if you use recording at all).
-
-\startfunctioncall
-kpse.record_input_file(<string> name)
-kpse.record_output_file(<string> name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {find_file}}]
-
-\topicindex {files+finding}
-
-\libindex {find_file}
-
-The most often used function in the library is \type {find_file}:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename)
-<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <string> ftype)
-<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <boolean> mustexist)
-<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <string> ftype, <boolean> mustexist)
-<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <string> ftype, <number> dpi)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-Arguments:
-
-\startitemize[intro]
-
-\sym{filename}
-
-the name of the file you want to find, with or without extension.
-
-\sym{ftype}
-
-maps to the \type {-format} argument of \KPSEWHICH. The supported \type {ftype}
-values are the same as the ones supported by the standalone \type {kpsewhich}
-program: \startluacode
- local list = {
- "afm",
- "base",
- "bib",
- "bitmap font",
- "bst",
- "cid maps",
- "clua",
- "cmap files",
- "cnf",
- "cweb",
- "dvips config",
- "enc files",
- "fmt",
- "font feature files",
- "gf",
- "graphic|/|figure",
- "ist",
- "lig files",
- "ls-R",
- "lua",
- "map",
- "mem",
- "MetaPost support",
- "mf",
- "mfpool",
- "mft",
- "misc fonts",
- "mlbib",
- "mlbst",
- "mp",
- "mppool",
- "ocp",
- "ofm",
- "opentype fonts",
- "opl",
- "other binary files",
- "other text files",
- "otp",
- "ovf",
- "ovp",
- "pdftex config",
- "pk",
- "PostScript header",
- "subfont definition files",
- "tex",
- "TeX system documentation",
- "TeX system sources",
- "texmfscripts",
- "texpool",
- "tfm",
- "Troff fonts",
- "truetype fonts",
- "type1 fonts",
- "type42 fonts",
- "vf",
- "web",
- "web2c files",
- }
- table.sort(list)
- context("{\\tttf \letterpercent, t}",list)
-\stopluacode
-
-The default type is \type {tex}. Note: this is different from \KPSEWHICH, which
-tries to deduce the file type itself from looking at the supplied extension.
-
-\sym{mustexist}
-
-is similar to \KPSEWHICH's \type {-must-exist}, and the default is \type {false}.
-If you specify \type {true} (or a non|-|zero integer), then the \KPSE\ library
-will search the disk as well as the \type {ls-R} databases.
-
-\sym{dpi}
-
-This is used for the size argument of the formats \type {pk}, \type {gf}, and
-\type {bitmap font}. \stopitemize
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {lookup}}]
-
-\libindex{lookup}
-
-A more powerful (but slower) generic method for finding files is also available.
-It returns a string for each found file.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> f, ... = kpse.lookup(<string> filename, <table> options)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The options match commandline arguments from \type {kpsewhich}:
-
-\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
-\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
-\TB
-\NC \type{debug} \NC number \NC set debugging flags for this lookup\NC \NR
-\NC \type{format} \NC string \NC use specific file type (see list above)\NC \NR
-\NC \type{dpi} \NC number \NC use this resolution for this lookup; default 600\NC \NR
-\NC \type{path} \NC string \NC search in the given path\NC \NR
-\NC \type{all} \NC boolean \NC output all matches, not just the first\NC \NR
-\NC \type{mustexist} \NC boolean \NC search the disk as well as ls-R if necessary\NC \NR
-\NC \type{mktexpk} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktexpk generation for this lookup\NC \NR
-\NC \type{mktextex} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktextex generation for this lookup\NC \NR
-\NC \type{mktexmf} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktexmf generation for this lookup\NC \NR
-\NC \type{mktextfm} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktextfm generation for this lookup\NC \NR
-\NC \type{subdir} \NC string
- or table \NC only output matches whose directory part
- ends with the given string(s) \NC \NR
-\LL
-\stoptabulate
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {init_prog}}]
-
-\topicindex {initialization+bitmaps}
-
-\libindex{init_prog}
-
-Extra initialization for programs that need to generate bitmap fonts.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-kpse.init_prog(<string> prefix, <number> base_dpi, <string> mfmode)
-kpse.init_prog(<string> prefix, <number> base_dpi, <string> mfmode, <string> fallback)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {readable_file}}]
-
-\libindex{readable_file}
-
-Test if an (absolute) file name is a readable file.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> f = kpse.readable_file(<string> name)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-The return value is the actual absolute filename you should use, because the disk
-name is not always the same as the requested name, due to aliases and
-system|-|specific handling under e.g.\ \MSDOS. Returns \type {nil} if the file
-does not exist or is not readable.
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {expand_path}}]
-
-\libindex{expand_path}
-
-Like kpsewhich's \type {-expand-path}:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> r = kpse.expand_path(<string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {expand_var}}]
-
-\libindex{expand_var}
-
-Like kpsewhich's \type {-expand-var}:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> r = kpse.expand_var(<string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {expand_braces}}]
-
-\libindex{expand_braces}
-
-Like kpsewhich's \type {-expand-braces}:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> r = kpse.expand_braces(<string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {show_path}}]
-
-\libindex{show_path}
-
-Like kpsewhich's \type {-show-path}:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> r = kpse.show_path(<string> ftype)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {var_value}}]
-
-\libindex{var_value}
-
-Like kpsewhich's \type {-var-value}:
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> r = kpse.var_value(<string> s)
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\startsubsection[title={\type {version}}]
-
-\libindex{version}
-
-Returns the kpathsea version string.
-
-\startfunctioncall
-<string> r = kpse.version()
-\stopfunctioncall
-
-\stopsubsection
-
-\stopsection
-
-\stopchapter
-
-\stopcomponent
+% language=uk
+
+% lua.newtable
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-tex
+
+\startchapter[reference=tex,title={The \TEX\ related libraries}]
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {lua} library}][library=lua]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Version information}]
+
+\topicindex{libraries+\type{lua}}
+\topicindex{version}
+
+\libindex{version}
+
+This library contains one read|-|only item:
+
+\starttyping
+<string> s = lua.version
+\stoptyping
+
+This returns the \LUA\ version identifier string. The value is currently
+\directlua {tex.print(lua.version)}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Bytecode registers}]
+
+\topicindex{bytecodes}
+\topicindex{registers+bytecodes}
+
+\libindex{bytecode}
+\libindex{setbytecode}
+\libindex{getbytecode}
+
+\LUA\ registers can be used to store \LUA\ code chunks. The accepted values for
+assignments are functions and \type {nil}. Likewise, the retrieved value is
+either a function or \type {nil}.
+
+\starttyping
+lua.bytecode[<number> n] = <function> f
+lua.bytecode[<number> n]()
+\stoptyping
+
+The contents of the \type {lua.bytecode} array is stored inside the format file
+as actual \LUA\ bytecode, so it can also be used to preload \LUA\ code. The
+function must not contain any upvalues. The associated function calls are:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<function> f = lua.getbytecode(<number> n)
+lua.setbytecode(<number> n, <function> f)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Note: Since a \LUA\ file loaded using \type {loadfile(filename)} is essentially
+an anonymous function, a complete file can be stored in a bytecode register like
+this:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+lua.bytecode[n] = loadfile(filename)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Now all definitions (functions, variables) contained in the file can be
+created by executing this bytecode register:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+lua.bytecode[n]()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Note that the path of the file is stored in the \LUA\ bytecode to be used in
+stack backtraces and therefore dumped into the format file if the above code is
+used in \INITEX. If it contains private information, i.e. the user name, this
+information is then contained in the format file as well. This should be kept in
+mind when preloading files into a bytecode register in \INITEX.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Chunk name registers}]
+
+\libindex{name}
+\libindex{setluaname}
+\libindex{getluaname}
+
+There is an array of 65536 (0--65535) potential chunk names for use with the
+\prm {directlua} and \lpr {latelua} primitives.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+lua.name[<number> n] = <string> s
+<string> s = lua.name[<number> n]
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+If you want to unset a \LUA\ name, you can assign \type {nil} to it. The function
+accessors are:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+lua.setluaname(<string> s,<number> n])
+<string> s = lua.getluaname(<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Introspection}]
+
+\libindex{getstacktop}
+\libindex{getcalllevel}
+
+The \type {getstacktop} and\type {getcalllevel} functions return numbers
+indicating how much nesting is going on. They are only of use as breakpoints when
+checking some mechanism going haywire.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {status} library}][library=status]
+
+\topicindex{libraries+\type{status}}
+
+\libindex{list}
+\libindex{resetmessages}
+\libindex{setexitcode}
+
+This contains a number of run|-|time configuration items that you may find useful
+in message reporting, as well as an iterator function that gets all of the names
+and values as a table.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> info = status.list()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The keys in the table are the known items, the value is the current value. Almost
+all of the values in \type {status} are fetched through a metatable at run|-|time
+whenever they are accessed, so you cannot use \type {pairs} on \type {status},
+but you {\it can\/} use \type {pairs} on \type {info}, of course. If you do not
+need the full list, you can also ask for a single item by using its name as an
+index into \type {status}. The current list is:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{banner} \NC terminal display banner \NC \NR
+\NC \type{best_page_break} \NC the current best break (a node) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{buf_size} \NC current allocated size of the line buffer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{callbacks} \NC total number of executed callbacks so far \NC \NR
+\NC \type{cs_count} \NC number of control sequences \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dest_names_size} \NC \PDF\ destination table size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dvi_gone} \NC written \DVI\ bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dvi_ptr} \NC not yet written \DVI\ bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dyn_used} \NC token (multi|-|word) memory in use \NC \NR
+\NC \type{filename} \NC name of the current input file \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fix_mem_end} \NC maximum number of used tokens \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fix_mem_min} \NC minimum number of allocated words for tokens \NC \NR
+\NC \type{fix_mem_max} \NC maximum number of allocated words for tokens \NC \NR
+\NC \type{font_ptr} \NC number of active fonts \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hash_extra} \NC extra allowed hash \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hash_size} \NC size of hash \NC \NR
+\NC \type{indirect_callbacks} \NC number of those that were themselves a result of other callbacks (e.g. file readers) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{ini_version} \NC \type {true} if this is an \INITEX\ run \NC \NR
+\NC \type{init_pool_ptr} \NC \INITEX\ string pool index \NC \NR
+\NC \type{init_str_ptr} \NC number of \INITEX\ strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{input_ptr} \NC the level of input we're at \NC \NR
+\NC \type{inputid} \NC numeric id of the current input \NC \NR
+\NC \type{largest_used_mark} \NC max referenced marks class \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lasterrorcontext} \NC last error context string (with newlines) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lasterrorstring} \NC last \TEX\ error string \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lastluaerrorstring} \NC last \LUA\ error string \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lastwarningstring} \NC last warning tag, normally an indication of in what part\NC \NR
+\NC \type{lastwarningtag} \NC last warning string\NC \NR
+\NC \type{linenumber} \NC location in the current input file \NC \NR
+\NC \type{log_name} \NC name of the log file \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luabytecode_bytes} \NC number of bytes in \LUA\ bytecode registers \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luabytecodes} \NC number of active \LUA\ bytecode registers \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luastate_bytes} \NC number of bytes in use by \LUA\ interpreters \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luatex_engine} \NC the \LUATEX\ engine identifier \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luatex_hashchars} \NC length to which \LUA\ hashes strings ($2^n$) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luatex_hashtype} \NC the hash method used (in \LUAJITTEX) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luatex_version} \NC the \LUATEX\ version number \NC \NR
+\NC \type{luatex_revision} \NC the \LUATEX\ revision string \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_buf_stack} \NC max used buffer position \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_in_stack} \NC max used input stack entries \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_nest_stack} \NC max used nesting stack entries \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_param_stack} \NC max used parameter stack entries \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_save_stack} \NC max used save stack entries \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_strings} \NC maximum allowed strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nest_size} \NC nesting stack size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{node_mem_usage} \NC a string giving insight into currently used nodes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{obj_ptr} \NC max \PDF\ object pointer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{obj_tab_size} \NC \PDF\ object table size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{output_active} \NC \type {true} if the \prm {output} routine is active \NC \NR
+\NC \type{output_file_name} \NC name of the \PDF\ or \DVI\ file \NC \NR
+\NC \type{param_size} \NC parameter stack size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf_dest_names_ptr} \NC max \PDF\ destination pointer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf_gone} \NC written \PDF\ bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf_mem_ptr} \NC max \PDF\ memory used \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf_mem_size} \NC \PDF\ memory size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf_os_cntr} \NC max \PDF\ object stream pointer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf_os_objidx} \NC \PDF\ object stream index \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdf_ptr} \NC not yet written \PDF\ bytes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pool_ptr} \NC string pool index \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pool_size} \NC current size allocated for string characters \NC \NR
+\NC \type{save_size} \NC save stack size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{shell_escape} \NC \type {0} means disabled, \type {1} means anything is permitted, and \type {2} is restricted \NC \NR
+\NC \type{safer_option} \NC \type {1} means safer is enforced \NC \NR
+\NC \type{kpse_used} \NC \type {1} means that kpse is used \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stack_size} \NC input stack size \NC \NR
+\NC \type{str_ptr} \NC number of strings \NC \NR
+\NC \type{total_pages} \NC number of written pages \NC \NR
+\NC \type{var_mem_max} \NC number of allocated words for nodes \NC \NR
+\NC \type{var_used} \NC variable (one|-|word) memory in use \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lc_collate} \NC the value of \type {LC_COLLATE} at startup time (becomes \type {C} at startup) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lc_ctype} \NC the value of \type {LC_CTYPE} at startup time (becomes \type {C} at startup) \NC \NR
+%NC \type{lc_monetary} \NC the value of \type {LC_MONETARY} at startup time \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lc_numeric} \NC the value of \type {LC_NUMERIC} at startup time \NC \NR
+%NC \type{lc_time} \NC the value of \type {LC_TIME} at startup time (becomes \type {C} at startup) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The error and warning messages can be wiped with the \type {resetmessages}
+function. A return value can be set with \type {setexitcode}.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {tex} library}][library=tex]
+
+\startsubsection[title={Introduction}]
+
+\topicindex{libraries+\type{tex}}
+
+The \type {tex} table contains a large list of virtual internal \TEX\
+parameters that are partially writable.
+
+The designation \quote {virtual} means that these items are not properly defined
+in \LUA, but are only front\-ends that are handled by a metatable that operates
+on the actual \TEX\ values. As a result, most of the \LUA\ table operators (like
+\type {pairs} and \type {#}) do not work on such items.
+
+At the moment, it is possible to access almost every parameter that you can use
+after \prm {the}, is a single tokens or is sort of special in \TEX. This excludes
+parameters that need extra arguments, like \type {\the\scriptfont}. The subset
+comprising simple integer and dimension registers are writable as well as
+readable (like \prm {tracingcommands} and \prm {parindent}).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Internal parameter values, \type {set} and \type {get}}]
+
+\topicindex{parameters+internal}
+
+\libindex{set} \libindex{get}
+
+For all the parameters in this section, it is possible to access them directly
+using their names as index in the \type {tex} table, or by using one of the
+functions \type {tex.get} and \type {tex.set}.
+
+The exact parameters and return values differ depending on the actual parameter,
+and so does whether \type {tex.set} has any effect. For the parameters that {\em
+can} be set, it is possible to use \type {global} as the first argument to \type
+{tex.set}; this makes the assignment global instead of local.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.set (["global",] <string> n, ...)
+... = tex.get (<string> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Glue is kind of special because there are five values involved. The return value
+is a \nod {glue_spec} node but when you pass \type {false} as last argument to
+\type {tex.get} you get the width of the glue and when you pass \type {true} you
+get all five values. Otherwise you get a node which is a copy of the internal
+value so you are responsible for its freeing at the \LUA\ end. When you set a
+glue quantity you can either pass a \nod {glue_spec} or upto five numbers. If
+you pass \type {true} to \type {get} you get 5 values returned for a glue and
+when you pass \type {false} you only get the width returned.
+
+\subsubsection{Integer parameters}
+
+The integer parameters accept and return \LUA\ numbers. These are read|-|write:
+
+\starttwocolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.adjdemerits
+tex.binoppenalty
+tex.brokenpenalty
+tex.catcodetable
+tex.clubpenalty
+tex.day
+tex.defaulthyphenchar
+tex.defaultskewchar
+tex.delimiterfactor
+tex.displaywidowpenalty
+tex.doublehyphendemerits
+tex.endlinechar
+tex.errorcontextlines
+tex.escapechar
+tex.exhyphenpenalty
+tex.fam
+tex.finalhyphendemerits
+tex.floatingpenalty
+tex.globaldefs
+tex.hangafter
+tex.hbadness
+tex.holdinginserts
+tex.hyphenpenalty
+tex.interlinepenalty
+tex.language
+tex.lastlinefit
+tex.lefthyphenmin
+tex.linepenalty
+tex.localbrokenpenalty
+tex.localinterlinepenalty
+tex.looseness
+tex.mag
+tex.maxdeadcycles
+tex.month
+tex.newlinechar
+tex.outputpenalty
+tex.pausing
+tex.postdisplaypenalty
+tex.predisplaydirection
+tex.predisplaypenalty
+tex.pretolerance
+tex.relpenalty
+tex.righthyphenmin
+tex.savinghyphcodes
+tex.savingvdiscards
+tex.showboxbreadth
+tex.showboxdepth
+tex.time
+tex.tolerance
+tex.tracingassigns
+tex.tracingcommands
+tex.tracinggroups
+tex.tracingifs
+tex.tracinglostchars
+tex.tracingmacros
+tex.tracingnesting
+tex.tracingonline
+tex.tracingoutput
+tex.tracingpages
+tex.tracingparagraphs
+tex.tracingrestores
+tex.tracingscantokens
+tex.tracingstats
+tex.uchyph
+tex.vbadness
+tex.widowpenalty
+tex.year
+\stoptyping
+\stoptwocolumns
+
+These are read|-|only:
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.deadcycles
+tex.insertpenalties
+tex.parshape
+tex.prevgraf
+tex.spacefactor
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+\subsubsection{Dimension parameters}
+
+The dimension parameters accept \LUA\ numbers (signifying scaled points) or
+strings (with included dimension). The result is always a number in scaled
+points. These are read|-|write:
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.boxmaxdepth
+tex.delimitershortfall
+tex.displayindent
+tex.displaywidth
+tex.emergencystretch
+tex.hangindent
+tex.hfuzz
+tex.hoffset
+tex.hsize
+tex.lineskiplimit
+tex.mathsurround
+tex.maxdepth
+tex.nulldelimiterspace
+tex.overfullrule
+tex.pagebottomoffset
+tex.pageheight
+tex.pageleftoffset
+tex.pagerightoffset
+tex.pagetopoffset
+tex.pagewidth
+tex.parindent
+tex.predisplaysize
+tex.scriptspace
+tex.splitmaxdepth
+tex.vfuzz
+tex.voffset
+tex.vsize
+tex.prevdepth
+tex.prevgraf
+tex.spacefactor
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+These are read|-|only:
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.pagedepth
+tex.pagefilllstretch
+tex.pagefillstretch
+tex.pagefilstretch
+tex.pagegoal
+tex.pageshrink
+tex.pagestretch
+tex.pagetotal
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+Beware: as with all \LUA\ tables you can add values to them. So, the following is
+valid:
+
+\starttyping
+tex.foo = 123
+\stoptyping
+
+When you access a \TEX\ parameter a look up takes place. For read||only variables
+that means that you will get something back, but when you set them you create a
+new entry in the table thereby making the original invisible.
+
+There are a few special cases that we make an exception for: \type {prevdepth},
+\type {prevgraf} and \type {spacefactor}. These normally are accessed via the
+\type {tex.nest} table:
+
+\starttyping
+tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr].prevdepth = p
+tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr].spacefactor = s
+\stoptyping
+
+However, the following also works:
+
+\starttyping
+tex.prevdepth = p
+tex.spacefactor = s
+\stoptyping
+
+Keep in mind that when you mess with node lists directly at the \LUA\ end you
+might need to update the top of the nesting stack's \type {prevdepth} explicitly
+as there is no way \LUATEX\ can guess your intentions. By using the accessor in
+the \type {tex} tables, you get and set the values at the top of the nesting
+stack.
+
+\subsubsection{Direction parameters}
+
+The direction parameters are read|-|only and return a \LUA\ string.
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.bodydir
+tex.mathdir
+tex.pagedir
+tex.pardir
+tex.textdir
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+\subsubsection{Glue parameters}
+
+The glue parameters accept and return a userdata object that represents a \nod {glue_spec} node.
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.abovedisplayshortskip
+tex.abovedisplayskip
+tex.baselineskip
+tex.belowdisplayshortskip
+tex.belowdisplayskip
+tex.leftskip
+tex.lineskip
+tex.parfillskip
+tex.parskip
+tex.rightskip
+tex.spaceskip
+tex.splittopskip
+tex.tabskip
+tex.topskip
+tex.xspaceskip
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+\subsubsection{Muglue parameters}
+
+All muglue parameters are to be used read|-|only and return a \LUA\ string.
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.medmuskip
+tex.thickmuskip
+tex.thinmuskip
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+\subsubsection{Tokenlist parameters}
+
+The tokenlist parameters accept and return \LUA\ strings. \LUA\ strings are
+converted to and from token lists using \prm {the} \prm {toks} style expansion:
+all category codes are either space (10) or other (12). It follows that assigning
+to some of these, like \quote {tex.output}, is actually useless, but it feels bad
+to make exceptions in view of a coming extension that will accept full|-|blown
+token strings.
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.errhelp
+tex.everycr
+tex.everydisplay
+tex.everyeof
+tex.everyhbox
+tex.everyjob
+tex.everymath
+tex.everypar
+tex.everyvbox
+tex.output
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Convert commands}]
+
+\topicindex{convert commands}
+
+All \quote {convert} commands are read|-|only and return a \LUA\ string. The
+supported commands at this moment are:
+
+\starttwocolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.eTeXVersion
+tex.eTeXrevision
+tex.formatname
+tex.jobname
+tex.luatexbanner
+tex.luatexrevision
+tex.fontname(number)
+tex.uniformdeviate(number)
+tex.number(number)
+tex.romannumeral(number)
+tex.fontidentifier(number)
+\stoptyping
+\stoptwocolumns
+
+If you are wondering why this list looks haphazard; these are all the cases of
+the \quote {convert} internal command that do not require an argument, as well as
+the ones that require only a simple numeric value. The special (\LUA|-|only) case
+of \type {tex.fontidentifier} returns the \type {csname} string that matches a
+font id number (if there is one).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Last item commands}]
+
+\topicindex{last items}
+
+All \quote {last item} commands are read|-|only and return a number. The
+supported commands at this moment are:
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.lastpenalty
+tex.lastkern
+tex.lastskip
+tex.lastnodetype
+tex.inputlineno
+tex.lastxpos
+tex.lastypos
+tex.randomseed
+tex.luatexversion
+tex.eTeXminorversion
+tex.eTeXversion
+tex.currentgrouplevel
+tex.currentgrouptype
+tex.currentiflevel
+tex.currentiftype
+tex.currentifbranch
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Accessing registers: \type {set*}, \type {get*} and \type {is*}}]
+
+\topicindex{attributes}
+\topicindex{registers}
+
+\libindex{attribute} \libindex{setattribute} \libindex{getattribute} \libindex{isattribute}
+\libindex{count} \libindex{setcount} \libindex{getcount} \libindex{iscount}
+\libindex{dimen} \libindex{setdimen} \libindex{getdimen} \libindex{isdimen}
+\libindex{skip} \libindex{setskip} \libindex{getskip} \libindex{isskip}
+\libindex{muskip} \libindex{setmuskip} \libindex{getmuskip} \libindex{ismuskip}
+\libindex{glue} \libindex{setglue} \libindex{getglue} \libindex{isglue}
+\libindex{muglue} \libindex{setmuglue} \libindex{getmuglue} \libindex{ismuglue}
+\libindex{toks} \libindex{settoks} \libindex{gettoks} \libindex{istoks}
+\libindex{box} \libindex{setbox} \libindex{getbox} \libindex{isbox}
+
+\libindex{scantoks}
+
+\TEX's attributes (\lpr {attribute}), counters (\prm {count}), dimensions (\prm
+{dimen}), skips (\prm {skip}, \prm {muskip}) and token (\prm {toks}) registers
+can be accessed and written to using two times five virtual sub|-|tables of the
+\type {tex} table:
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.attribute
+tex.count
+tex.dimen
+tex.skip
+tex.glue
+tex.muskip
+tex.muglue
+tex.toks
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+It is possible to use the names of relevant \lpr {attributedef}, \prm {countdef},
+\prm {dimendef}, \prm {skipdef}, or \prm {toksdef} control sequences as indices
+to these tables:
+
+\starttyping
+tex.count.scratchcounter = 0
+enormous = tex.dimen['maxdimen']
+\stoptyping
+
+In this case, \LUATEX\ looks up the value for you on the fly. You have to use a
+valid \prm {countdef} (or \lpr {attributedef}, or \prm {dimendef}, or \prm
+{skipdef}, or \prm {toksdef}), anything else will generate an error (the intent
+is to eventually also allow \type {<chardef tokens>} and even macros that expand
+into a number).
+
+\startitemize
+
+ \startitem
+ The count registers accept and return \LUA\ numbers.
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ The dimension registers accept \LUA\ numbers (in scaled points) or
+ strings (with an included absolute dimension; \type {em} and \type {ex}
+ and \type {px} are forbidden). The result is always a number in scaled
+ points.
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ The token registers accept and return \LUA\ strings. \LUA\ strings are
+ converted to and from token lists using \prm {the} \prm {toks} style
+ expansion: all category codes are either space (10) or other (12).
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ The skip registers accept and return \nod {glue_spec} userdata node
+ objects (see the description of the node interface elsewhere in this
+ manual).
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ The glue registers are just skip registers but instead of userdata
+ are verbose.
+ \stopitem
+
+ \startitem
+ Like the counts, the attribute registers accept and return \LUA\ numbers.
+ \stopitem
+
+\stopitemize
+
+As an alternative to array addressing, there are also accessor functions defined
+for all cases, for example, here is the set of possibilities for \prm {skip}
+registers:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setskip (["global",] <number> n, <node> s)
+tex.setskip (["global",] <string> s, <node> s)
+<node> s = tex.getskip (<number> n)
+<node> s = tex.getskip (<string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+We have similar setters for \type {count}, \type {dimen}, \type {muskip}, and
+\type {toks}. Counters and dimen are represented by numbers, skips and muskips by
+nodes, and toks by strings.
+
+Again the glue variants are not using the \nod {glue-spec} userdata nodes. The
+\type {setglue} function accepts upto 5 arguments: width, stretch, shrink,
+stretch order and shrink order and the \type {getglue} function reports them,
+unless the second argument is \type {false} in which care only the width is
+returned.
+
+Here is an example usign a threesome:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+local d = tex.getdimen("foo")
+if tex.isdimen("bar") then
+ tex.setdimen("bar",d)
+end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+There are six extra skip (glue) related helpers:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setglue (["global"], <number> n,
+ width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order)
+tex.setglue (["global"], <string> s,
+ width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order)
+width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order =
+ tex.getglue (<number> n)
+width, stretch, shrink, stretch_order, shrink_order =
+ tex.getglue (<string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The other two are \type {tex.setmuglue} and \type {tex.getmuglue}.
+
+There are such helpers for \type {dimen}, \type {count}, \type {skip}, \type
+{muskip}, \type {box} and \type {attribute} registers but the glue ones
+are special because they have to deal with more properties.
+
+As with the general \type {get} and \type {set} function discussed before, for
+the skip registers \type {getskip} returns a node and \type {getglue} returns
+numbers, while \type {setskip} accepts a node and \type {setglue} expects upto 5
+numbers. Again, when you pass \type {false} as second argument to \type {getglue}
+you only get the width returned. The same is true for the \type {mu} variants
+\type {getmuskip}, \type {setmuskip}, \type {getmuskip} and\type {setmuskip}.
+
+For tokens registers we have an alternative where a catcode table is specified:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.scantoks(0,3,"$e=mc^2$")
+tex.scantoks("global",0,"$\int\limits^1_2$")
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+In the function-based interface, it is possible to define values globally by
+using the string \type {global} as the first function argument.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Character code registers: \type {[get|set]*code[s]}}]
+
+\topicindex{characters+codes}
+
+\libindex{lccode} \libindex{setlccode} \libindex{getlccode}
+\libindex{uccode} \libindex{setuccode} \libindex{getuccode}
+\libindex{sfcode} \libindex{setsfcode} \libindex{getsfcode}
+\libindex{catcode} \libindex{setcatcode} \libindex{getcatcode}
+\libindex{mathcode} \libindex{setmathcode} \libindex{getmathcode}
+\libindex{delcode} \libindex{setdelcode} \libindex{getdelcode}
+
+\libindex{setdelcodes} \libindex{getdelcodes}
+\libindex{setmathcodes} \libindex{getmathcodes}
+
+\TEX's character code tables (\prm {lccode}, \prm {uccode}, \prm {sfcode}, \prm
+{catcode}, \prm {mathcode}, \prm {delcode}) can be accessed and written to using
+six virtual subtables of the \type {tex} table
+
+\startthreecolumns
+\starttyping
+tex.lccode
+tex.uccode
+tex.sfcode
+tex.catcode
+tex.mathcode
+tex.delcode
+\stoptyping
+\stopthreecolumns
+
+The function call interfaces are roughly as above, but there are a few twists.
+\type {sfcode}s are the simple ones:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setsfcode (["global",] <number> n, <number> s)
+<number> s = tex.getsfcode (<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The function call interface for \type {lccode} and \type {uccode} additionally
+allows you to set the associated sibling at the same time:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setlccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> lc)
+tex.setlccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> lc, <number> uc)
+<number> lc = tex.getlccode (<number> n)
+tex.setuccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> uc)
+tex.setuccode (["global"], <number> n, <number> uc, <number> lc)
+<number> uc = tex.getuccode (<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The function call interface for \type {catcode} also allows you to specify a
+category table to use on assignment or on query (default in both cases is the
+current one):
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setcatcode (["global"], <number> n, <number> c)
+tex.setcatcode (["global"], <number> cattable, <number> n, <number> c)
+<number> lc = tex.getcatcode (<number> n)
+<number> lc = tex.getcatcode (<number> cattable, <number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The interfaces for \type {delcode} and \type {mathcode} use small array tables to
+set and retrieve values:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setmathcode (["global"], <number> n, <table> mval )
+<table> mval = tex.getmathcode (<number> n)
+tex.setdelcode (["global"], <number> n, <table> dval )
+<table> dval = tex.getdelcode (<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Where the table for \type {mathcode} is an array of 3 numbers, like this:
+
+\starttyping
+{
+ <number> class,
+ <number> family,
+ <number> character
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+And the table for \type {delcode} is an array with 4 numbers, like this:
+
+\starttyping
+{
+ <number> small_fam,
+ <number> small_char,
+ <number> large_fam,
+ <number> large_char
+}
+\stoptyping
+
+You can also avoid the table:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setmathcode (["global"], <number> n, <number> class,
+ <number> family, <number> character)
+class, family, char =
+ tex.getmathcodes (<number> n)
+tex.setdelcode (["global"], <number> n, <number> smallfam,
+ <number> smallchar, <number> largefam, <number> largechar)
+smallfam, smallchar, largefam, largechar =
+ tex.getdelcodes (<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Normally, the third and fourth values in a delimiter code assignment will be zero
+according to \lpr {Udelcode} usage, but the returned table can have values there
+(if the delimiter code was set using \prm {delcode}, for example). Unset \type
+{delcode}'s can be recognized because \type {dval[1]} is $-1$.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Box registers: \type {[get|set]box}}]
+
+\topicindex{registers}
+\topicindex{boxes}
+
+\libindex{box}
+\libindex{setbox} \libindex{getbox}
+
+It is possible to set and query actual boxes, coming for instance from \prm
+{hbox}, \prm {vbox} or \prm {vtop}, using the node interface as defined in the
+\type {node} library:
+
+\starttyping
+tex.box
+\stoptyping
+
+for array access, or
+
+\starttyping
+tex.setbox(["global",] <number> n, <node> s)
+tex.setbox(["global",] <string> cs, <node> s)
+<node> n = tex.getbox(<number> n)
+<node> n = tex.getbox(<string> cs)
+\stoptyping
+
+for function|-|based access. In the function-based interface, it is possible to
+define values globally by using the string \type {global} as the first function
+argument.
+
+Be warned that an assignment like
+
+\starttyping
+tex.box[0] = tex.box[2]
+\stoptyping
+
+does not copy the node list, it just duplicates a node pointer. If \type {\box2}
+will be cleared by \TEX\ commands later on, the contents of \type {\box0} becomes
+invalid as well. To prevent this from happening, always use \type
+{node.copy_list} unless you are assigning to a temporary variable:
+
+\starttyping
+tex.box[0] = node.copy_list(tex.box[2])
+\stoptyping
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Reusing boxes: \type {[use|save]boxresource} and \type {getboxresourcedimensions}}]
+
+\topicindex{boxes+reuse}
+
+\libindex{useboxresource}
+\libindex{saveboxresource}
+\libindex{getboxresourcedimensions}
+
+The following function will register a box for reuse (this is modelled after so
+called xforms in \PDF). You can (re)use the box with \lpr {useboxresource} or
+by creating a rule node with subtype~2.
+
+\starttyping
+local index = tex.saveboxresource(n,attributes,resources,immediate,type,margin)
+\stoptyping
+
+The optional second and third arguments are strings, the fourth is a boolean. The
+fifth argument is a type. When set to non|-|zero the \type {/Type} entry is
+omitted. A value of 1 or 3 still writes a \type {/BBox}, while 2 or 3 will write
+a \type {/Matrix}. The sixth argument is the (virtual) margin that extends beyond
+the effective boundingbox as seen by \TEX. Instead of a box number one can also
+pass a \type {[h|v]list} node.
+
+You can generate the reference (a rule type) with:
+
+\starttyping
+local reused = tex.useboxresource(n,wd,ht,dp)
+\stoptyping
+
+The dimensions are optional and the final ones are returned as extra values. The
+following is just a bonus (no dimensions returned means that the resource is
+unknown):
+
+\starttyping
+local w, h, d, m = tex.getboxresourcedimensions(n)
+\stoptyping
+
+This returns the width, height, depth and margin of the resource.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {triggerbuildpage}}]
+
+\topicindex{pages}
+
+\libindex{triggerbuildpage}
+
+You should not expect to much from the \type {triggerbuildpage} helpers because
+often \TEX\ doesn't do much if it thinks nothing has to be done, but it might be
+useful for some applications. It just does as it says it calls the internal
+function that build a page, given that there is something to build.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {splitbox}}]
+
+\topicindex{boxes+split}
+
+\libindex{splitbox}
+
+You can split a box:
+
+\starttyping
+local vlist = tex.splitbox(n,height,mode)
+\stoptyping
+
+The remainder is kept in the original box and a packaged vlist is returned. This
+operation is comparable to the \prm {vsplit} operation. The mode can be \type
+{additional} or \type {exactly} and concerns the split off box.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Accessing math parameters: \type {[get|set]math}}]
+
+\topicindex{math+parameters}
+\topicindex{parameters+math}
+
+\libindex{setmath}
+\libindex{getmath}
+
+It is possible to set and query the internal math parameters using:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setmath(["global",] <string> n, <string> t, <number> n)
+<number> n = tex.getmath(<string> n, <string> t)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+As before an optional first parameter \type {global} indicates a global
+assignment.
+
+The first string is the parameter name minus the leading \quote {Umath}, and the
+second string is the style name minus the trailing \quote {style}. Just to be
+complete, the values for the math parameter name are:
+
+\starttyping
+quad axis operatorsize
+overbarkern overbarrule overbarvgap
+underbarkern underbarrule underbarvgap
+radicalkern radicalrule radicalvgap
+radicaldegreebefore radicaldegreeafter radicaldegreeraise
+stackvgap stacknumup stackdenomdown
+fractionrule fractionnumvgap fractionnumup
+fractiondenomvgap fractiondenomdown fractiondelsize
+limitabovevgap limitabovebgap limitabovekern
+limitbelowvgap limitbelowbgap limitbelowkern
+underdelimitervgap underdelimiterbgap
+overdelimitervgap overdelimiterbgap
+subshiftdrop supshiftdrop subshiftdown
+subsupshiftdown subtopmax supshiftup
+supbottommin supsubbottommax subsupvgap
+spaceafterscript connectoroverlapmin
+ordordspacing ordopspacing ordbinspacing ordrelspacing
+ordopenspacing ordclosespacing ordpunctspacing ordinnerspacing
+opordspacing opopspacing opbinspacing oprelspacing
+opopenspacing opclosespacing oppunctspacing opinnerspacing
+binordspacing binopspacing binbinspacing binrelspacing
+binopenspacing binclosespacing binpunctspacing bininnerspacing
+relordspacing relopspacing relbinspacing relrelspacing
+relopenspacing relclosespacing relpunctspacing relinnerspacing
+openordspacing openopspacing openbinspacing openrelspacing
+openopenspacing openclosespacing openpunctspacing openinnerspacing
+closeordspacing closeopspacing closebinspacing closerelspacing
+closeopenspacing closeclosespacing closepunctspacing closeinnerspacing
+punctordspacing punctopspacing punctbinspacing punctrelspacing
+punctopenspacing punctclosespacing punctpunctspacing punctinnerspacing
+innerordspacing inneropspacing innerbinspacing innerrelspacing
+inneropenspacing innerclosespacing innerpunctspacing innerinnerspacing
+\stoptyping
+
+The values for the style parameter are:
+
+\starttyping
+display crampeddisplay
+text crampedtext
+script crampedscript
+scriptscript crampedscriptscript
+\stoptyping
+
+The value is either a number (representing a dimension or number) or a glue spec
+node representing a muskip for \type {ordordspacing} and similar spacing
+parameters.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Special list heads: \type {[get|set]list}}]
+
+\topicindex{lists}
+
+\libindex{lists}
+\libindex{setlist}
+\libindex{getlist}
+
+The virtual table \type {tex.lists} contains the set of internal registers that
+keep track of building page lists.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB field \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{page_ins_head} \NC circular list of pending insertions \NC \NR
+\NC \type{contrib_head} \NC the recent contributions \NC \NR
+\NC \type{page_head} \NC the current page content \NC \NR
+%NC \type{temp_head} \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hold_head} \NC used for held-over items for next page \NC \NR
+\NC \type{adjust_head} \NC head of the current \prm {vadjust} list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pre_adjust_head} \NC head of the current \type {\vadjust pre} list \NC \NR
+%NC \type{align_head} \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{page_discards_head} \NC head of the discarded items of a page break \NC \NR
+\NC \type{split_discards_head} \NC head of the discarded items in a vsplit \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The getter and setter functions are \type {getlist} and \type {setlist}. You have
+to be careful with what you set as \TEX\ can have expectations with regards to
+how a list is constructed or in what state it is.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Semantic nest levels: \type {getnest} and \type {ptr}}]
+
+\topicindex{nesting}
+
+\libindex{nest}
+\libindex{ptr}
+%libindex{setnest} % only a message
+\libindex{getnest}
+
+The virtual table \type {nest} contains the currently active semantic nesting
+state. It has two main parts: a zero-based array of userdata for the semantic
+nest itself, and the numerical value \type {ptr}, which gives the highest
+available index. Neither the array items in \type {nest[]} nor \type {ptr} can be
+assigned to (as this would confuse the typesetting engine beyond repair), but you
+can assign to the individual values inside the array items, e.g.\ \type
+{tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr].prevdepth}.
+
+\type {tex.nest[tex.nest.ptr]} is the current nest state, \type {nest[0]} the
+outermost (main vertical list) level. The getter function is \type {getnest}. You
+can pass a number (which gives you a list), nothing or \type {top}, which returns
+the topmost list, or the string \type {ptr} which gives you the index of the
+topmost list.
+
+The known fields are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC modes \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{mode} \NC number \NC all \NC the meaning of these numbers depends on the engine
+ and sometimes even the version; you can use \typ
+ {tex.getmodevalues()} to get the mapping: positive
+ values signal vertical, horizontal and math mode,
+ while negative values indicate inner and inline
+ variants \NC \NR
+\NC \type{modeline} \NC number \NC all \NC source input line where this mode was entered in,
+ negative inside the output routine \NC \NR
+\NC \type{head} \NC node \NC all \NC the head of the current list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tail} \NC node \NC all \NC the tail of the current list \NC \NR
+\NC \type{prevgraf} \NC number \NC vmode \NC number of lines in the previous paragraph \NC \NR
+\NC \type{prevdepth} \NC number \NC vmode \NC depth of the previous paragraph \NC \NR
+\NC \type{spacefactor} \NC number \NC hmode \NC the current space factor \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dirs} \NC node \NC hmode \NC used for temporary storage by the line break algorithm\NC \NR
+\NC \type{noad} \NC node \NC mmode \NC used for temporary storage of a pending fraction numerator,
+ for \prm {over} etc. \NC \NR
+\NC \type{delimptr} \NC node \NC mmode \NC used for temporary storage of the previous math delimiter,
+ for \prm {middle} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mathdir} \NC boolean \NC mmode \NC true when during math processing the \lpr {mathdir} is not
+ the same as the surrounding \lpr {textdir} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{mathstyle} \NC number \NC mmode \NC the current \lpr {mathstyle} \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[reference=sec:luaprint,title={Print functions}]
+
+\topicindex{printing}
+
+The \type {tex} table also contains the three print functions that are the major
+interface from \LUA\ scripting to \TEX. The arguments to these three functions
+are all stored in an in|-|memory virtual file that is fed to the \TEX\ scanner as
+the result of the expansion of \prm {directlua}.
+
+The total amount of returnable text from a \prm {directlua} command is only
+limited by available system \RAM. However, each separate printed string has to
+fit completely in \TEX's input buffer. The result of using these functions from
+inside callbacks is undefined at the moment.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {print}}
+
+\libindex{print}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.print(<string> s, ...)
+tex.print(<number> n, <string> s, ...)
+tex.print(<table> t)
+tex.print(<number> n, <table> t)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Each string argument is treated by \TEX\ as a separate input line. If there is a
+table argument instead of a list of strings, this has to be a consecutive array
+of strings to print (the first non-string value will stop the printing process).
+
+The optional parameter can be used to print the strings using the catcode regime
+defined by \lpr {catcodetable}~\type {n}. If \type {n} is $-1$, the currently
+active catcode regime is used. If \type {n} is $-2$, the resulting catcodes are
+the result of \prm {the} \prm {toks}: all category codes are 12 (other) except for
+the space character, that has category code 10 (space). Otherwise, if \type {n}
+is not a valid catcode table, then it is ignored, and the currently active
+catcode regime is used instead.
+
+The very last string of the very last \type {tex.print} command in a \prm
+{directlua} will not have the \prm {endlinechar} appended, all others do.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {sprint}}
+
+\libindex{sprint}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.sprint(<string> s, ...)
+tex.sprint(<number> n, <string> s, ...)
+tex.sprint(<table> t)
+tex.sprint(<number> n, <table> t)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Each string argument is treated by \TEX\ as a special kind of input line that
+makes it suitable for use as a partial line input mechanism:
+
+\startitemize[packed]
+\startitem
+ \TEX\ does not switch to the \quote {new line} state, so that leading spaces
+ are not ignored.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ No \prm {endlinechar} is inserted.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ Trailing spaces are not removed. Note that this does not prevent \TEX\ itself
+ from eating spaces as result of interpreting the line. For example, in
+
+ \starttyping
+ before\directlua{tex.sprint("\\relax")tex.sprint(" inbetween")}after
+ \stoptyping
+
+ the space before \type {in between} will be gobbled as a result of the \quote
+ {normal} scanning of \prm {relax}.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+If there is a table argument instead of a list of strings, this has to be a
+consecutive array of strings to print (the first non-string value will stop the
+printing process).
+
+The optional argument sets the catcode regime, as with \type {tex.print}. This
+influences the string arguments (or numbers turned into strings).
+
+Although this needs to be used with care, you can also pass token or node
+userdata objects. These get injected into the stream. Tokens had best be valid
+tokens, while nodes need to be around when they get injected. Therefore it is
+important to realize the following:
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ When you inject a token, you need to pass a valid token userdata object. This
+ object will be collected by \LUA\ when it no longer is referenced. When it gets
+ printed to \TEX\ the token itself gets copied so there is no interference with the
+ \LUA\ garbage collection. You manage the object yourself. Because tokens are
+ actually just numbers, there is no real extra overhead at the \TEX\ end.
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ When you inject a node, you need to pass a valid node userdata object. The
+ node related to the object will not be collected by \LUA\ when it no longer
+ is referenced. It lives on at the \TEX\ end in its own memory space. When it
+ gets printed to \TEX\ the node reference is used assuming that node stays
+ around. There is no \LUA\ garbage collection involved. Again, you manage the
+ object yourself. The node itself is freed when \TEX\ is done with it.
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+If you consider the last remark you might realize that we have a problem when a
+printed mix of strings, tokens and nodes is reused. Inside \TEX\ the sequence
+becomes a linked list of input buffers. So, \type {"123"} or \type {"\foo{123}"}
+gets read and parsed on the fly, while \typ {<token userdata>} already is
+tokenized and effectively is a token list now. A \typ {<node userdata>} is also
+tokenized into a token list but it has a reference to a real node. Normally this
+goes fine. But now assume that you store the whole lot in a macro: in that case
+the tokenized node can be flushed many times. But, after the first such flush the
+node is used and its memory freed. You can prevent this by using copies which is
+controlled by setting \lpr {luacopyinputnodes} to a non|-|zero value. This is one
+of these fuzzy areas you have to live with if you really mess with these low
+level issues.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {tprint}}
+
+\libindex{tprint}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.tprint({<number> n, <string> s, ...}, {...})
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function is basically a shortcut for repeated calls to \type
+{tex.sprint(<number> n, <string> s, ...)}, once for each of the supplied argument
+tables.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {cprint}}
+
+\libindex{cprint}
+
+This function takes a number indicating the to be used catcode, plus either a
+table of strings or an argument list of strings that will be pushed into the
+input stream.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.cprint( 1," 1: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- a lot of \bgroup s
+tex.cprint( 2," 2: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- matching \egroup s
+tex.cprint( 9," 9: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- all get ignored
+tex.cprint(10,"10: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- all become spaces
+tex.cprint(11,"11: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- letters
+tex.cprint(12,"12: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- other characters
+tex.cprint(14,"12: $&{\\foo}") tex.print("\\par") -- comment triggers
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+% \subsubsection{\type {write}, \type {twrite}, \type {nwrite}}
+\subsubsection{\type {write}}
+
+\libindex{write}
+% \libindex{twrite}
+% \libindex{nwrite}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.write(<string> s, ...)
+tex.write(<table> t)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Each string argument is treated by \TEX\ as a special kind of input line that
+makes it suitable for use as a quick way to dump information:
+
+\startitemize
+\item All catcodes on that line are either \quote{space} (for '~') or \quote
+ {character} (for all others).
+\item There is no \prm {endlinechar} appended.
+\stopitemize
+
+If there is a table argument instead of a list of strings, this has to be a
+consecutive array of strings to print (the first non-string value will stop the
+printing process).
+
+% The functions \type {twrite} and \type {nwrite} can be used to write a token or
+% node back to \TEX\, possibly intermixed with regular strings that will be
+% tokenized. You have to make sure that you pass the right data because sometimes
+% \TEX\ has expectations that need to be met.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Helper functions}]
+
+\subsubsection{\type {round}}
+
+\topicindex {helpers}
+
+\libindex{round}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = tex.round(<number> o)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Rounds \LUA\ number \type {o}, and returns a number that is in the range of a
+valid \TEX\ register value. If the number starts out of range, it generates a
+\quote {number too big} error as well.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {scale}}
+
+\libindex{scale}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = tex.scale(<number> o, <number> delta)
+<table> n = tex.scale(table o, <number> delta)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Multiplies the \LUA\ numbers \type {o} and \nod {delta}, and returns a rounded
+number that is in the range of a valid \TEX\ register value. In the table
+version, it creates a copy of the table with all numeric top||level values scaled
+in that manner. If the multiplied number(s) are of range, it generates
+\quote{number too big} error(s) as well.
+
+Note: the precision of the output of this function will depend on your computer's
+architecture and operating system, so use with care! An interface to \LUATEX's
+internal, 100\% portable scale function will be added at a later date.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {number} and \type {romannumeral}}
+
+\libindex{number}
+\libindex{romannumeral}
+
+These are the companions to the primitives \prm {number} and \prm
+{romannumeral}. They can be used like:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.print(tex.romannumeral(123))
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsubsection{\type {fontidentifier} and \type {fontname}}
+
+\libindex{fontidentifier}
+\libindex{fontname}
+
+The first one returns the name only, the second one reports the size too.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.print(tex.fontname(tex.fontname))
+tex.print(tex.fontname(tex.fontidentidier))
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\subsubsection{\type {sp}}
+
+\libindex{sp}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> n = tex.sp(<number> o)
+<number> n = tex.sp(<string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Converts the number \type {o} or a string \type {s} that represents an explicit
+dimension into an integer number of scaled points.
+
+For parsing the string, the same scanning and conversion rules are used that
+\LUATEX\ would use if it was scanning a dimension specifier in its \TEX|-|like
+input language (this includes generating errors for bad values), expect for the
+following:
+
+\startitemize[n]
+\startitem
+ only explicit values are allowed, control sequences are not handled
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ infinite dimension units (\type {fil...}) are forbidden
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ \type {mu} units do not generate an error (but may not be useful either)
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+\subsubsection{\type {tex.getlinenumber} and \type {tex.setlinenumber}}
+
+\libindex{getlinenumber}
+\libindex{setlinenumber}
+
+You can mess with the current line number:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+local n = tex.getlinenumber()
+tex.setlinenumber(n+10)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+which can be shortcut to:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.setlinenumber(10,true)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This might be handy when you have a callback that read numbers from a file and
+combines them in one line (in which case an error message probably has to refer
+to the original line). Interference with \TEX's internal handling of numbers is
+of course possible.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {error} and \type {show_context}}
+
+\topicindex{errors}
+
+\libindex{error}
+\libindex{show_context}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.error(<string> s)
+tex.error(<string> s, <table> help)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This creates an error somewhat like the combination of \prm {errhelp} and \prm
+{errmessage} would. During this error, deletions are disabled.
+
+The array part of the \type {help} table has to contain strings, one for each
+line of error help.
+
+In case of an error the \type {show_context} function will show the current
+context where we're at (in the expansion).
+
+\subsubsection{\type {run}, \type {finish}}
+
+\libindex{run}
+\libindex{finish}
+
+These two functions start the interpretations and force its end. A runs normally
+boils down to \TEX\ entering the so called main loop. A token is fetched and
+depending on it current meaning some actions takes place. Sometimes that actions
+comes immediately, sometimes more scanning is needed. Quite often tokens get
+pushed back into the input. This all means that the \TEX\ scanner is constantly
+pushing and popping input states, but in the end after all the action is done
+returns to the main loop.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {runtoks}}
+
+Because of the fact that \TEX\ is in a complex dance of expanding, dealing with
+fonts, typesetting paragraphs, messing around with boxes, building pages, and so
+on, you cannot easily run a nested \TEX\ run (read nested main loop). However,
+there is an option to force a local run with \type {runtoks}. The content of the
+given token list register gets expanded locally after which we return to where we
+triggered this expansion, at the \LUA\ end. Instead a function can get passed
+that does some work. You have to make sure that at the end \TEX\ is in a sane
+state and this is not always trivial. A more complex mechanism would complicate
+\TEX\ itself (and probably also harm performance) so this simple local expansion
+loop has to do.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.runtoks(<token register>)
+tex.runtoks(<lua function>)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+When the \prm {tracingnesting} parameter is set to a value larger than~2 some
+information is reported about the state of the local loop.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {forcehmode}}
+
+\libindex{forcehmode}
+
+An example of a (possible error triggering) complication is that \TEX\ expects to
+be in some state, say horizontal mode, and you have to make sure it is when you
+start feeding back something from \LUA\ into \TEX. Normally a user will not run
+into issues but when you start writing tokens or nodes or have a nested run there
+can be situations that you need to run \type {forcehmode}. There is no recipe for
+this and intercepting possible cases would weaken \LUATEX's flexibility.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {hashtokens}}
+
+\libindex{hashtokens}
+
+\topicindex{hash}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+for i,v in pairs (tex.hashtokens()) do ... end
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Returns a list of names. This can be useful for debugging, but note that this
+also reports control sequences that may be unreachable at this moment due to
+local redefinitions: it is strictly a dump of the hash table. You can use \type
+{token.create} to inspect properties, for instance when the \type {command} key
+in a created table equals \type {123}, you have the \type {cmdname} value \type
+{undefined_cs}.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {definefont}}
+
+\topicindex{fonts+defining}
+
+\libindex{definefont}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.definefont(<string> csname, <number> fontid)
+tex.definefont(<boolean> global, <string> csname, <number> fontid)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Associates \type {csname} with the internal font number \type {fontid}. The
+definition is global if (and only if) \type {global} is specified and true (the
+setting of \type {globaldefs} is not taken into account).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[reference=luaprimitives,title={Functions for dealing with primitives}]
+
+\subsubsection{\type {enableprimitives}}
+
+\libindex{enableprimitives}
+
+\topicindex{initialization}
+\topicindex{primitives}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.enableprimitives(<string> prefix, <table> primitive names)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function accepts a prefix string and an array of primitive names. For each
+combination of \quote {prefix} and \quote {name}, the \type
+{tex.enableprimitives} first verifies that \quote {name} is an actual primitive
+(it must be returned by one of the \type {tex.extraprimitives} calls explained
+below, or part of \TEX82, or \prm {directlua}). If it is not, \type
+{tex.enableprimitives} does nothing and skips to the next pair.
+
+But if it is, then it will construct a csname variable by concatenating the
+\quote {prefix} and \quote {name}, unless the \quote {prefix} is already the
+actual prefix of \quote {name}. In the latter case, it will discard the \quote
+{prefix}, and just use \quote {name}.
+
+Then it will check for the existence of the constructed csname. If the csname is
+currently undefined (note: that is not the same as \prm {relax}), it will
+globally define the csname to have the meaning: run code belonging to the
+primitive \quote {name}. If for some reason the csname is already defined, it
+does nothing and tries the next pair.
+
+An example:
+
+\starttyping
+tex.enableprimitives('LuaTeX', {'formatname'})
+\stoptyping
+
+will define \type {\LuaTeXformatname} with the same intrinsic meaning as the
+documented primitive \lpr {formatname}, provided that the control sequences \type
+{\LuaTeXformatname} is currently undefined.
+
+When \LUATEX\ is run with \type {--ini} only the \TEX82 primitives and \prm
+{directlua} are available, so no extra primitives {\bf at all}.
+
+If you want to have all the new functionality available using their default
+names, as it is now, you will have to add
+
+\starttyping
+\ifx\directlua\undefined \else
+ \directlua {tex.enableprimitives('',tex.extraprimitives ())}
+\fi
+\stoptyping
+
+near the beginning of your format generation file. Or you can choose different
+prefixes for different subsets, as you see fit.
+
+Calling some form of \type {tex.enableprimitives} is highly important though,
+because if you do not, you will end up with a \TEX82-lookalike that can run \LUA\
+code but not do much else. The defined csnames are (of course) saved in the
+format and will be available at runtime.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {extraprimitives}}
+
+\libindex{extraprimitives}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> t = tex.extraprimitives(<string> s, ...)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns a list of the primitives that originate from the engine(s)
+given by the requested string value(s). The possible values and their (current)
+return values are given in the following table. In addition the somewhat special
+primitives \quote{\tex{ }}, \quote{\tex {/}} and \quote{\type {-}} are defined.
+
+\startluacode
+function document.showprimitives(tag)
+ for k, v in table.sortedpairs(tex.extraprimitives(tag)) do
+ if v ~= ' ' and v ~= "/" and v ~= "-" then
+ context.type(v)
+ context.space()
+ end
+ end
+end
+\stopluacode
+
+\starttabulate[|l|pl|]
+\DB name \BC values \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC tex \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('tex') } \NC \NR
+\NC core \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('core') } \NC \NR
+\NC etex \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('etex') } \NC \NR
+\NC luatex \NC \ctxlua{document.showprimitives('luatex') } \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note that \type {luatex} does not contain \type {directlua}, as that is
+considered to be a core primitive, along with all the \TEX82 primitives, so it is
+part of the list that is returned from \type {'core'}.
+
+Running \type {tex.extraprimitives} will give you the complete list of
+primitives \type {-ini} startup. It is exactly equivalent to \type
+{tex.extraprimitives("etex","luatex")}.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {primitives}}
+
+\libindex{primitives}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<table> t = tex.primitives()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function returns a list of all primitives that \LUATEX\ knows about.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Core functionality interfaces}]
+
+\subsubsection{\type {badness}}
+
+\libindex{badness}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<number> b = tex.badness(<number> t, <number> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This helper function is useful during linebreak calculations. \type {t} and \type
+{s} are scaled values; the function returns the badness for when total \type {t}
+is supposed to be made from amounts that sum to \type {s}. The returned number is
+a reasonable approximation of \mathematics {100(t/s)^3};
+
+\subsubsection{\type {tex.resetparagraph}}
+
+\topicindex {paragraphs+reset}
+
+\libindex{resetparagraph}
+
+This function resets the parameters that \TEX\ normally resets when a new paragraph
+is seen.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {linebreak}}
+
+\topicindex {linebreaks}
+
+\libindex{linebreak}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+local <node> nodelist, <table> info =
+ tex.linebreak(<node> listhead, <table> parameters)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The understood parameters are as follows:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB name \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{pardir} \NC string \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pretolerance} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tracingparagraphs} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{tolerance} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{looseness} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hyphenpenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{exhyphenpenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdfadjustspacing} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{adjdemerits} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pdfprotrudechars} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{linepenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{lastlinefit} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{doublehyphendemerits} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{finalhyphendemerits} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hangafter} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{interlinepenalty} \NC number or table \NC if a table, then it is an array like \prm {interlinepenalties} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{clubpenalty} \NC number or table \NC if a table, then it is an array like \prm {clubpenalties} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{widowpenalty} \NC number or table \NC if a table, then it is an array like \prm {widowpenalties} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{brokenpenalty} \NC number \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{emergencystretch} \NC number \NC in scaled points \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hangindent} \NC number \NC in scaled points \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hsize} \NC number \NC in scaled points \NC \NR
+\NC \type{leftskip} \NC glue_spec node \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{rightskip} \NC glue_spec node \NC \NC \NR
+\NC \type{parshape} \NC table \NC \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note that there is no interface for \prm {displaywidowpenalties}, you have to
+pass the right choice for \type {widowpenalties} yourself.
+
+It is your own job to make sure that \type {listhead} is a proper paragraph list:
+this function does not add any nodes to it. To be exact, if you want to replace
+the core line breaking, you may have to do the following (when you are not
+actually working in the \cbk {pre_linebreak_filter} or \cbk {linebreak_filter}
+callbacks, or when the original list starting at listhead was generated in
+horizontal mode):
+
+\startitemize
+\startitem
+ add an \quote {indent box} and perhaps a \nod {local_par} node at the start
+ (only if you need them)
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ replace any found final glue by an infinite penalty (or add such a penalty,
+ if the last node is not a glue)
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ add a glue node for the \prm {parfillskip} after that penalty node
+\stopitem
+\startitem
+ make sure all the \type {prev} pointers are OK
+\stopitem
+\stopitemize
+
+The result is a node list, it still needs to be vpacked if you want to assign it
+to a \prm {vbox}. The returned \type {info} table contains four values that are
+all numbers:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB name \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC prevdepth \NC depth of the last line in the broken paragraph \NC \NR
+\NC prevgraf \NC number of lines in the broken paragraph \NC \NR
+\NC looseness \NC the actual looseness value in the broken paragraph \NC \NR
+\NC demerits \NC the total demerits of the chosen solution \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note there are a few things you cannot interface using this function: You cannot
+influence font expansion other than via \type {pdfadjustspacing}, because the
+settings for that take place elsewhere. The same is true for hbadness and hfuzz
+etc. All these are in the \type {hpack} routine, and that fetches its own
+variables via globals.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {shipout}}
+
+\topicindex {shipout}
+
+\libindex{shipout}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.shipout(<number> n)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Ships out box number \type {n} to the output file, and clears the box register.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {getpagestate}}
+
+\topicindex {pages}
+
+\libindex{getpagestate}
+
+This helper reports the current page state: \type {empty}, \type {box_there} or
+\type {inserts_only} as integer value.
+
+\subsubsection{\type {getlocallevel}}
+
+\topicindex {nesting}
+
+\libindex{getlocallevel}
+
+This integer reports the current level of the local loop. It's only useful for
+debugging and the (relative state) numbers can change with the implementation.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Randomizers}]
+
+\libindex{lua_math_random}
+\libindex{lua_math_randomseed}
+\libindex{init_rand}
+\libindex{normal_rand}
+\libindex{uniform_rand}
+\libindex{uniformdeviate}
+
+For practical reasons \LUATEX\ has its own random number generator. The original
+\LUA\ random function is available as \typ {tex.lua_math_random}. You can
+initialize with a new seed with \type {init_rand} (\typ {lua_math_randomseed} is
+equivalent to this one.
+
+There are three generators: \type {normal_rand} (no argument is used), \type
+{uniform_rand} (takes a number that will get rounded before being used) and \type
+{uniformdeviate} which behaves like the primitive and expects a scaled integer, so
+
+\startfunctioncall
+tex.print(tex.uniformdeviate(65536)/65536)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+will give a random number between zero and one.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[reference=synctex,title={Functions related to synctex}]
+
+\topicindex {synctex}
+
+\libindex{set_synctex_mode} \libindex{get_synctex_mode}
+\libindex{set_synctex_no_files}
+\libindex{set_synctex_tag} \libindex{get_synctex_tag} \libindex{force_synctex_tag}
+\libindex{set_synctex_line} \libindex{get_synctex_line} \libindex{force_synctex_line}
+
+The next helpers only make sense when you implement your own synctex logic. Keep in
+mind that the library used in editors assumes a certain logic and is geared for
+plain and \LATEX, so after a decade users expect a certain behaviour.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB name \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{set_synctex_mode} \NC \type {0} is the default and used normal synctex
+ logic, \type {1} uses the values set by the next
+ helpers while \type {2} also sets these for glyph
+ nodes; \type{3} sets glyphs and glue and \type {4}
+ sets only glyphs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{set_synctex_tag} \NC set the current tag (file) value (obeys save stack) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{set_synctex_line} \NC set the current line value (obeys save stack) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{set_synctex_no_files} \NC disable synctex file logging \NC \NR
+\NC \type{get_synctex_mode} \NC returns the current mode (for values see above) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{get_synctex_tag} \NC get the currently set value of tag (file) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{get_synctex_line} \NC get the currently set value of line \NC \NR
+\NC \type{force_synctex_tag} \NC overload the tag (file) value (\type {0} resets) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{force_synctex_line} \NC overload the line value (\type {0} resets) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The last one is somewhat special. Due to the way files are registered in \SYNCTEX\ we need
+to explicitly disable that feature if we provide our own alternative if we want to avoid
+that overhead. Passing a value of 1 disables registering.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {texconfig} table},reference=texconfig][library=texconfig]
+
+\topicindex{libraries+\type{texconfig}}
+
+\topicindex {configuration}
+
+This is a table that is created empty. A startup \LUA\ script could
+fill this table with a number of settings that are read out by
+the executable after loading and executing the startup file.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC default \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{kpse_init} \NC boolean \NC true
+\NC
+ \type {false} totally disables \KPATHSEA\ initialisation, and enables
+ interpretation of the following numeric key--value pairs. (only ever unset
+ this if you implement {\it all\/} file find callbacks!)
+\NC \NR
+\NC
+ \type{shell_escape} \NC string \NC \type {'f'} \NC Use \type {'y'} or \type
+ {'t'} or \type {'1'} to enable \type {\write18} unconditionally, \type {'p'}
+ to enable the commands that are listed in \type {shell_escape_commands}
+\NC \NR
+\NC
+ shell_escape_commands \NC string \NC \NC Comma-separated list of command
+ names that may be executed by \type {\write18} even if \type {shell_escape}
+ is set to \type {'p'}. Do {\it not\/} use spaces around commas, separate any
+ required command arguments by using a space, and use the \ASCII\ double quote
+ (\type {"}) for any needed argument or path quoting
+\NC \NR
+\NC \type{string_vacancies} \NC number \NC 75000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pool_free} \NC number \NC 5000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_strings} \NC number \NC 15000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{strings_free} \NC number \NC 100 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{nest_size} \NC number \NC 50 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_in_open} \NC number \NC 15 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{param_size} \NC number \NC 60 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{save_size} \NC number \NC 4000 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{stack_size} \NC number \NC 300 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{dvi_buf_size} \NC number \NC 16384 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{error_line} \NC number \NC 79 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{half_error_line} \NC number \NC 50 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{max_print_line} \NC number \NC 79 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{hash_extra} \NC number \NC 0 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{pk_dpi} \NC number \NC 72 \NC cf.\ web2c docs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{trace_file_names} \NC boolean \NC true
+\NC
+ \type {false} disables \TEX's normal file open|-|close feedback (the
+ assumption is that callbacks will take care of that)
+\NC \NR
+\NC \type{file_line_error} \NC boolean \NC false
+\NC
+ do \type {file:line} style error messages
+\NC \NR
+\NC \type{halt_on_error} \NC boolean \NC false
+\NC
+ abort run on the first encountered error
+\NC \NR
+\NC \type{formatname} \NC string \NC
+\NC
+ if no format name was given on the command line, this key will be tested first
+ instead of simply quitting
+\NC \NR
+\NC \type{jobname} \NC string \NC
+\NC
+ if no input file name was given on the command line, this key will be tested
+ first instead of simply giving up
+\NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Note: the numeric values that match web2c parameters are only used if \type
+{kpse_init} is explicitly set to \type {false}. In all other cases, the normal
+values from \type {texmf.cnf} are used.
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {texio} library}][library=texio]
+
+\topicindex{libraries+\type{texio}}
+\topicindex{\IO}
+
+This library takes care of the low|-|level I/O interface: writing to the log file
+and|/|or console.
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {write}}]
+
+\libindex{write}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+texio.write(<string> target, <string> s, ...)
+texio.write(<string> s, ...)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Without the \type {target} argument, writes all given strings to the same
+location(s) \TEX\ writes messages to at this moment. If \prm {batchmode} is in
+effect, it writes only to the log, otherwise it writes to the log and the
+terminal. The optional \type {target} can be one of three possibilities: \type
+{term}, \type {log} or \type {term and log}.
+
+Note: If several strings are given, and if the first of these strings is or might
+be one of the targets above, the \type {target} must be specified explicitly to
+prevent \LUA\ from interpreting the first string as the target.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {write_nl}}]
+
+\libindex{write_nl}
+
+\startfunctioncall
+texio.write_nl(<string> target, <string> s, ...)
+texio.write_nl(<string> s, ...)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+This function behaves like \type {texio.write}, but make sure that the given
+strings will appear at the beginning of a new line. You can pass a single empty
+string if you only want to move to the next line.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {setescape}}]
+
+\libindex{setescape}
+
+You can disable \type {^^} escaping of control characters by passing a value of
+zero.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {closeinput}}]
+
+\libindex{closeinput}
+
+This function that should be used with care. It acts as \prm {endinput} but at
+the \LUA\ end. You can use it to (sort of) force a jump back to \TEX. Normally a
+\LUA\ will just collect prints and at the end bump an input level and flush these
+prints. This function can help you stay at the current level but you need to know
+what you're doing (or more precise: what \TEX\ is doing with input).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {token} library}][library=token]
+
+\startsubsection[title={The scanner}]
+
+\topicindex{libraries+\type{token}}
+\topicindex{tokens}
+
+\libindex{scan_keyword}
+\libindex{scan_keywordcs}
+\libindex{scan_int}
+\libindex{scan_real}
+\libindex{scan_float}
+\libindex{scan_dimen}
+\libindex{scan_glue}
+\libindex{scan_toks}
+\libindex{scan_code}
+\libindex{scan_string}
+\libindex{scan_argument}
+\libindex{scan_word}
+\libindex{scan_csname}
+\libindex{scan_list}
+
+The token library provides means to intercept the input and deal with it at the
+\LUA\ level. The library provides a basic scanner infrastructure that can be used
+to write macros that accept a wide range of arguments. This interface is on
+purpose kept general and as performance is quite ok. One can build additional
+parsers without too much overhead. It's up to macro package writers to see how
+they can benefit from this as the main principle behind \LUATEX\ is to provide a
+minimal set of tools and no solutions. The scanner functions are probably the
+most intriguing.
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB function \BC argument \BC result \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{scan_keyword} \NC string \NC returns true if the given keyword is gobbled; as with
+ the regular \TEX\ keyword scanner this is case insensitive
+ (and \ASCII\ based) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_keywordcs} \NC string \NC returns true if the given keyword is gobbled; this variant
+ is case sensitive and also suitable for \UTF8 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_int} \NC \NC returns an integer \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_real} \NC \NC returns a number from e.g.\ \type {1}, \type {1.1}, \type {.1} with optional collapsed signs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_float} \NC \NC returns a number from e.g.\ \type {1}, \type {1.1}, \type {.1}, \type {1.1E10}, , \type {.1e-10} with optional collapsed signs \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_dimen} \NC infinity, mu-units \NC returns a number representing a dimension and or two numbers being the filler and order \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_glue} \NC mu-units \NC returns a glue spec node \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_toks} \NC definer, expand \NC returns a table of tokens tokens \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_code} \NC bitset \NC returns a character if its category is in the given bitset (representing catcodes) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_string} \NC \NC returns a string given between \type {{}}, as \type {\macro} or as sequence of characters with catcode 11 or 12 \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_argument} \NC \NC this one is simular to \type {scanstring} but also accepts a \type {\cs}
+ (which then get expanded) \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_word} \NC \NC returns a sequence of characters with catcode 11 or 12 as string \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_csname} \NC \NC returns \type {foo} after scanning \type {\foo} \NC \NR
+\NC \type{scan_list} \NC \NC picks up a box specification and returns a \type {[h|v]list} node \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The scanners can be considered stable apart from the one scanning for a token.
+The \type {scan_code} function takes an optional number, the \type {keyword}
+function a normal \LUA\ string. The \type {infinity} boolean signals that we also
+permit \type {fill} as dimension and the \type {mu-units} flags the scanner that
+we expect math units. When scanning tokens we can indicate that we are defining a
+macro, in which case the result will also provide information about what
+arguments are expected and in the result this is separated from the meaning by a
+separator token. The \type {expand} flag determines if the list will be expanded.
+
+The string scanner scans for something between curly braces and expands on the
+way, or when it sees a control sequence it will return its meaning. Otherwise it
+will scan characters with catcode \type {letter} or \type {other}. So, given the
+following definition:
+
+\startbuffer
+\def\bar{bar}
+\def\foo{foo-\bar}
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer \getbuffer
+
+we get:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|Tl|l|]
+\DB name \BC result \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {\directlua{token.scan_string()}{foo}} \NC \directlua{context("{\\red\\type {"..token.scan_string().."}}")} {foo} \NC full expansion \NC \NR
+\NC \type {\directlua{token.scan_string()}foo} \NC \directlua{context("{\\red\\type {"..token.scan_string().."}}")} foo \NC letters and others \NC \NR
+\NC \type {\directlua{token.scan_string()}\foo} \NC \directlua{context("{\\red\\type {"..token.scan_string().."}}")}\foo \NC meaning \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+The \type {\foo} case only gives the meaning, but one can pass an already
+expanded definition (\prm {edef}'d). In the case of the braced variant one can of
+course use the \prm {detokenize} and \prm {unexpanded} primitives since there we
+do expand.
+
+The \type {scan_word} scanner can be used to implement for instance a number scanner:
+
+\starttyping
+function token.scan_number(base)
+ return tonumber(token.scan_word(),base)
+end
+\stoptyping
+
+This scanner accepts any valid \LUA\ number so it is a way to pick up floats
+in the input.
+
+You can use the \LUA\ interface as follows:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ function mymacro(n)
+ ...
+ end
+}
+
+\def\mymacro#1{%
+ \directlua {
+ mymacro(\number\dimexpr#1)
+ }%
+}
+
+\mymacro{12pt}
+\mymacro{\dimen0}
+\stoptyping
+
+You can also do this:
+
+\starttyping
+\directlua {
+ function mymacro()
+ local d = token.scan_dimen()
+ ...
+ end
+}
+
+\def\mymacro{%
+ \directlua {
+ mymacro()
+ }%
+}
+
+\mymacro 12pt
+\mymacro \dimen0
+\stoptyping
+
+It is quite clear from looking at the code what the first method needs as
+argument(s). For the second method you need to look at the \LUA\ code to see what
+gets picked up. Instead of passing from \TEX\ to \LUA\ we let \LUA\ fetch from
+the input stream.
+
+In the first case the input is tokenized and then turned into a string, then it
+is passed to \LUA\ where it gets interpreted. In the second case only a function
+call gets interpreted but then the input is picked up by explicitly calling the
+scanner functions. These return proper \LUA\ variables so no further conversion
+has to be done. This is more efficient but in practice (given what \TEX\ has to
+do) this effect should not be overestimated. For numbers and dimensions it saves
+a bit but for passing strings conversion to and from tokens has to be done anyway
+(although we can probably speed up the process in later versions if needed).
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title= {Picking up one token}]
+
+\libindex {get_next}
+\libindex {scan_token}
+\libindex {expand}
+
+The scanners look for a sequence. When you want to pick up one token from the
+input you use \type {get_next}. This creates a token with the (low level)
+properties as discussed next. This token is just the next one. If you want to
+enforce expansion first you can use \type {scan_token}. Internally tokens are
+characterized by a number that packs a lot of information. In order to access
+the bits of information a token is wrapped in a userdata object.
+
+The \type {expand} function will trigger expansion of the next token in the
+input. This can be quite unpredictable but when you call it you probably know
+enough about \TEX\ not to be too worried about that. It basically is a call to
+the internal expand related function.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Creating tokens}]
+
+\libindex{create}
+\libindex{new}
+
+\libindex{is_defined}
+\libindex{is_token}
+\libindex{biggest_char}
+
+\libindex{commands}
+\libindex{command_id}
+
+\libindex{get_command}
+\libindex{get_cmdname}
+\libindex{get_csname}
+\libindex{get_id}
+\libindex{get_active}
+\libindex{get_expandable}
+\libindex{get_protected}
+\libindex{get_mode}
+\libindex{get_index}
+\libindex{get_tok}
+
+\libindex{get_next}
+
+The creator function can be used as follows:
+
+\starttyping
+local t = token.create("relax")
+\stoptyping
+
+This gives back a token object that has the properties of the \prm {relax}
+primitive. The possible properties of tokens are:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|p|]
+\DB name \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type {command} \NC a number representing the internal command number \NC \NR
+\NC \type {cmdname} \NC the type of the command (for instance the catcode in case of a
+ character or the classifier that determines the internal
+ treatment \NC \NR
+\NC \type {csname} \NC the associated control sequence (if applicable) \NC \NR
+\NC \type {id} \NC the unique id of the token \NC \NR
+\NC \type {tok} \NC the full token number as stored in \TEX \NC \NR
+\NC \type {active} \NC a boolean indicating the active state of the token \NC \NR
+\NC \type {expandable} \NC a boolean indicating if the token (macro) is expandable \NC \NR
+\NC \type {protected} \NC a boolean indicating if the token (macro) is protected \NC \NR
+\NC \type {mode} \NC a number either representing a character or another entity \NC \NR
+\NC \type {index} \NC a number running from 0x0000 upto 0xFFFF indicating a \TEX\ register index \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+Alternatively you can use a getter \type {get_<fieldname>} to access a property
+of a token.
+
+The numbers that represent a catcode are the same as in \TEX\ itself, so using
+this information assumes that you know a bit about \TEX's internals. The other
+numbers and names are used consistently but are not frozen. So, when you use them
+for comparing you can best query a known primitive or character first to see the
+values.
+
+You can ask for a list of commands:
+
+\starttyping
+local t = token.commands()
+\stoptyping
+
+The id of a token class can be queried as follows:
+
+\starttyping
+local id = token.command_id("math_shift")
+\stoptyping
+
+If you really know what you're doing you can create character tokens by not
+passing a string but a number:
+
+\starttyping
+local letter_x = token.create(string.byte("x"))
+local other_x = token.create(string.byte("x"),12)
+\stoptyping
+
+Passing weird numbers can give side effects so don't expect too much help with
+that. As said, you need to know what you're doing. The best way to explore the
+way these internals work is to just look at how primitives or macros or \prm
+{chardef}'d commands are tokenized. Just create a known one and inspect its
+fields. A variant that ignores the current catcode table is:
+
+\starttyping
+local whatever = token.new(123,12)
+\stoptyping
+
+You can test if a control sequence is defined with \type {is_defined}, which
+accepts a string and returns a boolean:
+
+\starttyping
+local okay = token.is_defined("foo")
+\stoptyping
+
+The largest character possible is returned by \type {biggest_char}, just in case you
+need to know that boundary condition.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Macros}]
+
+\topicindex {macros}
+
+\libindex{set_macro}
+\libindex{get_macro}
+\libindex{get_meaning}
+\libindex{set_char}
+\libindex{set_lua}
+\libindex{get_functions_table}
+
+The \type {set_macro} function can get upto 4 arguments:
+
+\starttyping
+set_macro("csname","content")
+set_macro("csname","content","global")
+set_macro("csname")
+\stoptyping
+
+You can pass a catcodetable identifier as first argument:
+
+\starttyping
+set_macro(catcodetable,"csname","content")
+set_macro(catcodetable,"csname","content","global")
+set_macro(catcodetable,"csname")
+\stoptyping
+
+The results are like:
+
+\starttyping
+ \def\csname{content}
+\gdef\csname{content}
+ \def\csname{}
+\stoptyping
+
+The \type {get_macro} function can be used to get the content of a macro while
+the \type {get_meaning} function gives the meaning including the argument
+specification (as usual in \TEX\ separated by \type {->}).
+
+The \type {set_char} function can be used to do a \prm {chardef} at the
+\LUA\ end, where invalid assignments are silently ignored:
+
+\starttyping
+set_char("csname",number)
+set_char("csname",number,"global")
+\stoptyping
+
+A special one is the following:
+
+\starttyping
+set_lua("mycode",id)
+set_lua("mycode",id,"global","protected")
+\stoptyping
+
+This creates a token that refers to a \LUA\ function with an entry in the table
+that you can access with \type {lua.get_functions_table}. It is the companion
+to \lpr {luadef}.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Pushing back}]
+
+\libindex{get_next}
+\libindex{put_next}
+
+There is a (for now) experimental putter:
+
+\starttyping
+local t1 = token.get_next()
+local t2 = token.get_next()
+local t3 = token.get_next()
+local t4 = token.get_next()
+-- watch out, we flush in sequence
+token.put_next { t1, t2 }
+-- but this one gets pushed in front
+token.put_next ( t3, t4 )
+\stoptyping
+
+When we scan \type {wxyz!} we get \type {yzwx!} back. The argument is either a table
+with tokens or a list of tokens. The \type {token.expand} function will trigger
+expansion but what happens really depends on what you're doing where.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={Nota bene}]
+
+When scanning for the next token you need to keep in mind that we're not scanning
+like \TEX\ does: expanding, changing modes and doing things as it goes. When we
+scan with \LUA\ we just pick up tokens. Say that we have:
+
+\starttyping
+\bar
+\stoptyping
+
+but \type {\bar} is undefined. Normally \TEX\ will then issue an error message.
+However, when we have:
+
+\starttyping
+\def\foo{\bar}
+\stoptyping
+
+We get no error, unless we expand \type {\foo} while \type {\bar} is still
+undefined. What happens is that as soon as \TEX\ sees an undefined macro it will
+create a hash entry and when later it gets defined that entry will be reused. So,
+\type {\bar} really exists but can be in an undefined state.
+
+\startbuffer[demo]
+bar : \directlua{tex.print(token.scan_csname())}\bar
+foo : \directlua{tex.print(token.scan_csname())}\foo
+myfirstbar : \directlua{tex.print(token.scan_csname())}\myfirstbar
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startlines
+\getbuffer[demo]
+\stoplines
+
+This was entered as:
+
+\typebuffer[demo]
+
+The reason that you see \type {bar} reported and not \type {myfirstbar} is that
+\type {\bar} was already used in a previous paragraph.
+
+If we now say:
+
+\startbuffer
+\def\foo{}
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer \getbuffer
+
+we get:
+
+\startlines
+\getbuffer[demo]
+\stoplines
+
+And if we say
+
+\startbuffer
+\def\foo{\bar}
+\stopbuffer
+
+\typebuffer \getbuffer
+
+we get:
+
+\startlines
+\getbuffer[demo]
+\stoplines
+
+When scanning from \LUA\ we are not in a mode that defines (undefined) macros at
+all. There we just get the real primitive undefined macro token.
+
+\startbuffer
+\directlua{local t = token.get_next() tex.print(t.id.." "..t.tok)}\myfirstbar
+\directlua{local t = token.get_next() tex.print(t.id.." "..t.tok)}\mysecondbar
+\directlua{local t = token.get_next() tex.print(t.id.." "..t.tok)}\mythirdbar
+\stopbuffer
+
+\startlines
+\getbuffer
+\stoplines
+
+This was generated with:
+
+\typebuffer
+
+So, we do get a unique token because after all we need some kind of \LUA\ object
+that can be used and garbage collected, but it is basically the same one,
+representing an undefined control sequence.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\startsection[title={The \type {kpse} library}][library=kpse]
+
+\topicindex{libraries+\type{kpse}}
+
+This library provides two separate, but nearly identical interfaces to the
+\KPATHSEA\ file search functionality: there is a \quote {normal} procedural
+interface that shares its kpathsea instance with \LUATEX\ itself, and an object
+oriented interface that is completely on its own.
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {set_program_name} and \type {new}}]
+
+\libindex{set_program_name}
+\libindex{default_texmfcnf}
+\libindex{new}
+
+The way the library looks up variables is driven by the \type {texmf.cmf} file
+where the currently set program name acts as filter. You can check what file is
+used by with \type {default_texmfcnf}.
+
+Before the search library can be used at all, its database has to be initialized.
+There are three possibilities, two of which belong to the procedural interface.
+
+First, when \LUATEX\ is used to typeset documents, this initialization happens
+automatically and the \KPATHSEA\ executable and program names are set to \type
+{luatex} (that is, unless explicitly prohibited by the user's startup script.
+See~\in {section} [init] for more details).
+
+Second, in \TEXLUA\ mode, the initialization has to be done explicitly via the
+\type {kpse.set_program_name} function, which sets the \KPATHSEA\ executable
+(and optionally program) name.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+kpse.set_program_name(<string> name)
+kpse.set_program_name(<string> name, <string> progname)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The second argument controls the use of the \quote {dotted} values in the \type
+{texmf.cnf} configuration file, and defaults to the first argument.
+
+Third, if you prefer the object oriented interface, you have to call a different
+function. It has the same arguments, but it returns a userdata variable.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+local kpathsea = kpse.new(<string> name)
+local kpathsea = kpse.new(<string> name, <string> progname)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Apart from these two functions, the calling conventions of the interfaces are
+identical. Depending on the chosen interface, you either call \type
+{kpse.find_file} or \type {kpathsea:find_file}, with identical arguments and
+return values.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {record_input_file} and \type {record_output_file}}]
+
+\topicindex {files+recording}
+
+\libindex{record_input_file}
+\libindex{record_output_file}
+
+These two function can be used to register used files. Because callbacks can load
+files themselves you might need these helpers (if you use recording at all).
+
+\startfunctioncall
+kpse.record_input_file(<string> name)
+kpse.record_output_file(<string> name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {find_file}}]
+
+\topicindex {files+finding}
+
+\libindex {find_file}
+
+The most often used function in the library is \type {find_file}:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename)
+<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <string> ftype)
+<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <boolean> mustexist)
+<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <string> ftype, <boolean> mustexist)
+<string> f = kpse.find_file(<string> filename, <string> ftype, <number> dpi)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+Arguments:
+
+\startitemize[intro]
+
+\sym{filename}
+
+the name of the file you want to find, with or without extension.
+
+\sym{ftype}
+
+maps to the \type {-format} argument of \KPSEWHICH. The supported \type {ftype}
+values are the same as the ones supported by the standalone \type {kpsewhich}
+program: \startluacode
+ local list = {
+ "afm",
+ "base",
+ "bib",
+ "bitmap font",
+ "bst",
+ "cid maps",
+ "clua",
+ "cmap files",
+ "cnf",
+ "cweb",
+ "dvips config",
+ "enc files",
+ "fmt",
+ "font feature files",
+ "gf",
+ "graphic|/|figure",
+ "ist",
+ "lig files",
+ "ls-R",
+ "lua",
+ "map",
+ "mem",
+ "MetaPost support",
+ "mf",
+ "mfpool",
+ "mft",
+ "misc fonts",
+ "mlbib",
+ "mlbst",
+ "mp",
+ "mppool",
+ "ocp",
+ "ofm",
+ "opentype fonts",
+ "opl",
+ "other binary files",
+ "other text files",
+ "otp",
+ "ovf",
+ "ovp",
+ "pdftex config",
+ "pk",
+ "PostScript header",
+ "subfont definition files",
+ "tex",
+ "TeX system documentation",
+ "TeX system sources",
+ "texmfscripts",
+ "texpool",
+ "tfm",
+ "Troff fonts",
+ "truetype fonts",
+ "type1 fonts",
+ "type42 fonts",
+ "vf",
+ "web",
+ "web2c files",
+ }
+ table.sort(list)
+ context("{\\tttf \letterpercent, t}",list)
+\stopluacode
+
+The default type is \type {tex}. Note: this is different from \KPSEWHICH, which
+tries to deduce the file type itself from looking at the supplied extension.
+
+\sym{mustexist}
+
+is similar to \KPSEWHICH's \type {-must-exist}, and the default is \type {false}.
+If you specify \type {true} (or a non|-|zero integer), then the \KPSE\ library
+will search the disk as well as the \type {ls-R} databases.
+
+\sym{dpi}
+
+This is used for the size argument of the formats \type {pk}, \type {gf}, and
+\type {bitmap font}. \stopitemize
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {lookup}}]
+
+\libindex{lookup}
+
+A more powerful (but slower) generic method for finding files is also available.
+It returns a string for each found file.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> f, ... = kpse.lookup(<string> filename, <table> options)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The options match commandline arguments from \type {kpsewhich}:
+
+\starttabulate[|l|l|p|]
+\DB key \BC type \BC explanation \NC \NR
+\TB
+\NC \type{debug} \NC number \NC set debugging flags for this lookup\NC \NR
+\NC \type{format} \NC string \NC use specific file type (see list above)\NC \NR
+\NC \type{dpi} \NC number \NC use this resolution for this lookup; default 600\NC \NR
+\NC \type{path} \NC string \NC search in the given path\NC \NR
+\NC \type{all} \NC boolean \NC output all matches, not just the first\NC \NR
+\NC \type{mustexist} \NC boolean \NC search the disk as well as ls-R if necessary\NC \NR
+\NC \type{mktexpk} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktexpk generation for this lookup\NC \NR
+\NC \type{mktextex} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktextex generation for this lookup\NC \NR
+\NC \type{mktexmf} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktexmf generation for this lookup\NC \NR
+\NC \type{mktextfm} \NC boolean \NC disable/enable mktextfm generation for this lookup\NC \NR
+\NC \type{subdir} \NC string
+ or table \NC only output matches whose directory part
+ ends with the given string(s) \NC \NR
+\LL
+\stoptabulate
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {init_prog}}]
+
+\topicindex {initialization+bitmaps}
+
+\libindex{init_prog}
+
+Extra initialization for programs that need to generate bitmap fonts.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+kpse.init_prog(<string> prefix, <number> base_dpi, <string> mfmode)
+kpse.init_prog(<string> prefix, <number> base_dpi, <string> mfmode, <string> fallback)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {readable_file}}]
+
+\libindex{readable_file}
+
+Test if an (absolute) file name is a readable file.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> f = kpse.readable_file(<string> name)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+The return value is the actual absolute filename you should use, because the disk
+name is not always the same as the requested name, due to aliases and
+system|-|specific handling under e.g.\ \MSDOS. Returns \type {nil} if the file
+does not exist or is not readable.
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {expand_path}}]
+
+\libindex{expand_path}
+
+Like kpsewhich's \type {-expand-path}:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> r = kpse.expand_path(<string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {expand_var}}]
+
+\libindex{expand_var}
+
+Like kpsewhich's \type {-expand-var}:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> r = kpse.expand_var(<string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {expand_braces}}]
+
+\libindex{expand_braces}
+
+Like kpsewhich's \type {-expand-braces}:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> r = kpse.expand_braces(<string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {show_path}}]
+
+\libindex{show_path}
+
+Like kpsewhich's \type {-show-path}:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> r = kpse.show_path(<string> ftype)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {var_value}}]
+
+\libindex{var_value}
+
+Like kpsewhich's \type {-var-value}:
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> r = kpse.var_value(<string> s)
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\startsubsection[title={\type {version}}]
+
+\libindex{version}
+
+Returns the kpathsea version string.
+
+\startfunctioncall
+<string> r = kpse.version()
+\stopfunctioncall
+
+\stopsubsection
+
+\stopsection
+
+\stopchapter
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-titlepage.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-titlepage.tex
index 5a91f73e8b..d9ca4b3f93 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-titlepage.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex-titlepage.tex
@@ -1,53 +1,53 @@
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startcomponent luatex-titlepage
-
-\startstandardmakeup
-
- \switchtobodyfont
- [mainfacemedium]
-
- \definedfont[Bold*default at \the\dimexpr.06\paperheight\relax] \setupinterlinespace
-
- \setlayer
- [page]
- {\useMPgraphic{luapage}}
-
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=righttop,
- location=middletop,
- hoffset=.500\measured{paperwidth},
- voffset=.175\measured{paperheight}]
- [align=middle,
- foregroundcolor=white,
- frame=off]
- {\documentvariable{manual}\crlf Reference\crlf Manual}
-
- \definedfont[Bold*default at 14pt] \setupinterlinespace
-
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=rightbottom,
- offset=.025\measured{paperheight}]
- [align=flushright,
- foregroundcolor=white,
- frame=off]
- {\doifsomething{\documentvariable{status}}{\documentvariable{status}\par}
- \currentdate[month,space,year]\par
- Version \documentvariable{version}}
-
- \setlayerframed
- [page]
- [preset=middle,
- hoffset=-.5\dimexpr\measured{paperwidth}-\measured{spinewidth}\relax]
- [width=.7\measured{paperwidth},
- align=normal,
- foregroundstyle=\bf,
- foregroundcolor=white,
- frame=off]
- {\getbuffer[backpage]}
-
-\stopstandardmakeup
-
-\stopcomponent
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startcomponent luatex-titlepage
+
+\startstandardmakeup
+
+ \switchtobodyfont
+ [mainfacemedium]
+
+ \definedfont[Bold*default at \the\dimexpr.06\paperheight\relax] \setupinterlinespace
+
+ \setlayer
+ [page]
+ {\useMPgraphic{luapage}}
+
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=righttop,
+ location=middletop,
+ hoffset=.500\measured{paperwidth},
+ voffset=.175\measured{paperheight}]
+ [align=middle,
+ foregroundcolor=white,
+ frame=off]
+ {\documentvariable{manual}\crlf Reference\crlf Manual}
+
+ \definedfont[Bold*default at 14pt] \setupinterlinespace
+
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=rightbottom,
+ offset=.025\measured{paperheight}]
+ [align=flushright,
+ foregroundcolor=white,
+ frame=off]
+ {\doifsomething{\documentvariable{status}}{\documentvariable{status}\par}
+ \currentdate[month,space,year]\par
+ Version \documentvariable{version}}
+
+ \setlayerframed
+ [page]
+ [preset=middle,
+ hoffset=-.5\dimexpr\measured{paperwidth}-\measured{spinewidth}\relax]
+ [width=.7\measured{paperwidth},
+ align=normal,
+ foregroundstyle=\bf,
+ foregroundcolor=white,
+ frame=off]
+ {\getbuffer[backpage]}
+
+\stopstandardmakeup
+
+\stopcomponent
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.pdf b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.pdf
index 572b75d842..23abaa0a55 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.pdf
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.tex b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.tex
index 2d1d4efec6..0230af7384 100644
--- a/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.tex
+++ b/systems/doc/luatex/luatex.tex
@@ -1,103 +1,103 @@
-% macros=mkvi
-
-% \nopdfcompression
-
-% \disabledirectives[vspacing.synchronizepage]
-
-% wsl /data/context/runcontext.sh --global --path=/mnt/c/data/develop/context/manuals/mkiv/external/luatex luatex.tex
-%
-% same runtime as regular context or linux
-% author : Hans Hagen with Taco Hoekwater, Luigi Scarso & Hartmut Henkel
-% copyright : PRAGMA ADE & ConTeXt Development Team
-% license : Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 4.0 International
-% reference : pragma-ade.nl | contextgarden.net | texlive (related) distributions
-% origin : the ConTeXt distribution
-%
-% comment : Because this manual is distributed with TeX distributions it comes with a rather
-% liberal license. We try to adapt these documents to upgrades in the (sub)systems
-% that they describe. Using parts of the content otherwise can therefore conflict
-% with existing functionality and we cannot be held responsible for that. Many of
-% the manuals contain characteristic graphics and personal notes or examples that
-% make no sense when used out-of-context.
-%
-% comment : Some (parts of) chapters might have been published in TugBoat, the NTG Maps, the
-% ConTeXt Group journal or otherwise. Thanks to the editors for corrections. Also
-% thanks to users for testing, feedback and corrections.
-
-% \tex vs \type vs \syntax vs. \luatex
-% \em \it \/
-
-% "context --nodates --nocompression luatex" can be used for comparison
-% runs, not that we do it
-
-% todo: all (sub)section to start/stop
-
-% \enabledirectives[hyphenator.flatten]
-
-% \setupsynctex[state=start,method=max] % adds 5 pct overhead
-
-% compoundhyphenmode : looks okay
-% endlocalcontrol : very experimental
-% fixupboxesmode : very experimental
-% mathflattenmode : looks okay
-% mathrulethicknessmode : looks okay
-
-% after adding primitives: context mult-prm.mkiv
-
-\environment luatex-style
-
-\startmode[book]
- \environment luatex-style-book
-\stopmode
-
-\environment luatex-logos
-\environment luatex-private
-
-\startmode[export]
-
- \setupbackend
- [export=luatex]
-
-\stopmode
-
-\startdocument
- [manual=Lua\TeX,
- status=stable,
- version=1.10]
-
-\startnotmode[*export]
- \component luatex-titlepage
- \component luatex-firstpage
-\stopnotmode
-
-\startmode[*export]
- \component luatex-export-titlepage
-\stopmode
-
-\startfrontmatter
- \component luatex-contents
- \component luatex-introduction
-\stopfrontmatter
-
-\startbodymatter
- \component luatex-preamble
- \component luatex-enhancements
- \component luatex-modifications
- \component luatex-lua
- \component luatex-languages
- \component luatex-fonts
- \component luatex-math
- \component luatex-nodes
- \component luatex-callbacks
- \component luatex-tex
- \component luatex-graphics
- \component luatex-fontloader
- \component luatex-backend
-\stopbodymatter
-
-\startbackmatter
- \component luatex-registers
- \component luatex-statistics
-\stopbackmatter
-
-\stopdocument
+% macros=mkvi
+
+% \nopdfcompression
+
+% \disabledirectives[vspacing.synchronizepage]
+
+% wsl /data/context/runcontext.sh --global --path=/mnt/c/data/develop/context/manuals/mkiv/external/luatex luatex.tex
+%
+% same runtime as regular context or linux
+% author : Hans Hagen with Taco Hoekwater, Luigi Scarso & Hartmut Henkel
+% copyright : PRAGMA ADE & ConTeXt Development Team
+% license : Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 4.0 International
+% reference : pragma-ade.nl | contextgarden.net | texlive (related) distributions
+% origin : the ConTeXt distribution
+%
+% comment : Because this manual is distributed with TeX distributions it comes with a rather
+% liberal license. We try to adapt these documents to upgrades in the (sub)systems
+% that they describe. Using parts of the content otherwise can therefore conflict
+% with existing functionality and we cannot be held responsible for that. Many of
+% the manuals contain characteristic graphics and personal notes or examples that
+% make no sense when used out-of-context.
+%
+% comment : Some (parts of) chapters might have been published in TugBoat, the NTG Maps, the
+% ConTeXt Group journal or otherwise. Thanks to the editors for corrections. Also
+% thanks to users for testing, feedback and corrections.
+
+% \tex vs \type vs \syntax vs. \luatex
+% \em \it \/
+
+% "context --nodates --nocompression luatex" can be used for comparison
+% runs, not that we do it
+
+% todo: all (sub)section to start/stop
+
+% \enabledirectives[hyphenator.flatten]
+
+% \setupsynctex[state=start,method=max] % adds 5 pct overhead
+
+% compoundhyphenmode : looks okay
+% endlocalcontrol : very experimental
+% fixupboxesmode : very experimental
+% mathflattenmode : looks okay
+% mathrulethicknessmode : looks okay
+
+% after adding primitives: context mult-prm.mkiv
+
+\environment luatex-style
+
+\startmode[book]
+ \environment luatex-style-book
+\stopmode
+
+\environment luatex-logos
+\environment luatex-private
+
+\startmode[export]
+
+ \setupbackend
+ [export=luatex]
+
+\stopmode
+
+\startdocument
+ [manual=Lua\TeX,
+ status=stable,
+ version=1.10]
+
+\startnotmode[*export]
+ \component luatex-titlepage
+ \component luatex-firstpage
+\stopnotmode
+
+\startmode[*export]
+ \component luatex-export-titlepage
+\stopmode
+
+\startfrontmatter
+ \component luatex-contents
+ \component luatex-introduction
+\stopfrontmatter
+
+\startbodymatter
+ \component luatex-preamble
+ \component luatex-enhancements
+ \component luatex-modifications
+ \component luatex-lua
+ \component luatex-languages
+ \component luatex-fonts
+ \component luatex-math
+ \component luatex-nodes
+ \component luatex-callbacks
+ \component luatex-tex
+ \component luatex-graphics
+ \component luatex-fontloader
+ \component luatex-backend
+\stopbodymatter
+
+\startbackmatter
+ \component luatex-registers
+ \component luatex-statistics
+\stopbackmatter
+
+\stopdocument
diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl
index 758dfbdcad..635aee07b1 100644
--- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl
+++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl
@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ $mirrors = {
'http://mirror.iopb.res.in/tex-archive/' => 1
},
'Iran' => {
+ 'http://ctan.asis.ai/' => 1,
'http://ctan.yazd.ac.ir/' => 1
},
'Japan' => {
@@ -141,9 +142,6 @@ $mirrors = {
'http://mirror.its.dal.ca/ctan/' => 1,
'http://muug.ca/mirror/ctan/' => 1
},
- 'Costa Rica' => {
- 'http://mirrors.ucr.ac.cr/CTAN/' => 1
- },
'USA' => {
'http://ctan.math.illinois.edu/' => 1,
'http://ctan.math.washington.edu/tex-archive/' => 1,
diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb
index 2aef58540c..700e60a9ac 100644
--- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb
+++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb
@@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ depend container_split_src_files/1
depend frozen/0
depend minrelease/2016
depend release/2019
-depend revision/52357
+depend revision/52376
name 00texlive.image
category TLCore
-revision 52353
+revision 52376
shortdesc TeX Live files only in the source repository
longdesc The files here are not copied by the installer and containers
longdesc are not built for them; they exist only in the source
@@ -2009,7 +2009,6 @@ runfiles size=4953
tlpkg/tlpsrc/image-gallery.tlpsrc
tlpkg/tlpsrc/imakeidx.tlpsrc
tlpkg/tlpsrc/imfellenglish.tlpsrc
- tlpkg/tlpsrc/imfellflowers.tlpsrc
tlpkg/tlpsrc/impatient-cn.tlpsrc
tlpkg/tlpsrc/impatient-fr.tlpsrc
tlpkg/tlpsrc/impatient.tlpsrc
@@ -4048,7 +4047,7 @@ depend opt_w32_multi_user:1
name 00texlive.installer
category TLCore
-revision 52348
+revision 52359
shortdesc TeX Live standalone installer package
longdesc This package defines the files to go into the installer
longdesc archives (install-tl-unx.tar.gz, install-tl.zip) built by the
@@ -7384,7 +7383,7 @@ catalogue-version 1.3
name acro
category Package
-revision 52303
+revision 52373
shortdesc Typeset acronyms
relocated 1
longdesc The package enables the author to create acronyms in a simple
@@ -7394,10 +7393,10 @@ longdesc package option 'single' instructs the package to ignore
longdesc acronyms that are used only once in the whole document. As an
longdesc experimental feature the package also offers the option 'sort'
longdesc which automatically sorts the list created by \printacronyms.
-containersize 21456
-containerchecksum d35ec2e05a04966ed2eee4f3c9b2c8e016ab6157723e6c24e65488d8a10eb1a435f2635948d737b28d711dd5c2449d6056d6fdf0029bd41fe6fb329c02c71ad5
-doccontainersize 589912
-doccontainerchecksum 61061316f523e287da525b412be03fef8dbf43df149904848ddc83db7b07f4cfdd76df6c3419c0aff664e462403e7a07981260b33d0bf0f2260e943541e381ff
+containersize 21484
+containerchecksum bd768e27445f1557019cd3a7f598205fbacf14bee45e31b2da8f1d9958f90f486b6ef01788584565c61bf7bda2a03f12f4e64fb851f750f9b424e65def4daf03
+doccontainersize 589356
+doccontainerchecksum 9a795393e82518fa5c9a50eeff22f5f6bc1efb42e6bb7cb4b58378799cfbbad6f1b676e5c5e502c509950c6d318649c6b60cdcf6f8947a590326f49eac9e5735
docfiles size=168
RELOC/doc/latex/acro/README details="Readme"
RELOC/doc/latex/acro/acro.history
@@ -7410,10 +7409,10 @@ runfiles size=35
catalogue-contact-bugs https://bitbucket.org/cgnieder/acro/issues
catalogue-contact-repository https://bitbucket.org/cgnieder/acro/
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/acro
-catalogue-date 2019-10-06 14:32:37 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-12 17:03:04 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3
catalogue-topics acronym expl3
-catalogue-version 2.10b
+catalogue-version 2.10c
name acronym
category Package
@@ -7695,7 +7694,7 @@ catalogue-version 2.42
name adforn
category Package
-revision 52265
+revision 52364
shortdesc OrnementsADF font with TeX/LaTeX support
relocated 1
longdesc The bundle provides the Ornements ADF font in PostScript type 1
@@ -7704,14 +7703,15 @@ longdesc GPL v2 or later with font exception. (See NOTICE, COPYING,
longdesc README.) The TeX/LaTeX support is licensed under LPPL. (See
longdesc README, manifest.txt.)
execute addMap OrnementsADF.map
-containersize 36512
-containerchecksum 116d186caba7d64318f69dd0cf6f54a52890a23c880ce9e47576f5eed23c01e33cfedef8addebcee1c9fd42fa66c03f9f575e988c09a999528307933c10e2b52
-doccontainersize 11236
-doccontainerchecksum 7670786aceb0607ef3ad86831ddc6197e1f24f36894a7e8b4b18d797ea953882b84e7ac7b06da797d30b8390bd96072c257a6ccb97ab3ce7d5e84e36ed8690b1
-docfiles size=12
+containersize 36516
+containerchecksum 50369d5874b6ebd35498ab4502661de8630ed3175df02cf938817e17c858cadf0915dbf7c34ddfb0861a0063f7cdeeb40b1097573f77a4696f08354fd28d2a64
+doccontainersize 362884
+doccontainerchecksum b2521044ab8869c114579b7ed59ba9b58a66049ead3202d5f62797c9de0fde442b4f39c7083e1626f50b0011fd57fdb4227cab7571bbf85d6076b88e8eece61a
+docfiles size=98
RELOC/doc/fonts/adforn/COPYING
RELOC/doc/fonts/adforn/NOTICE
RELOC/doc/fonts/adforn/README details="Readme"
+ RELOC/doc/fonts/adforn/adforn.pdf details="Package documentation and font tables"
RELOC/doc/fonts/adforn/adforn.tex
RELOC/doc/fonts/adforn/manifest.txt
runfiles size=17
@@ -7723,14 +7723,14 @@ runfiles size=17
RELOC/tex/latex/adforn/adforn.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/adforn/uornementsadf.fd
catalogue-ctan /fonts/adforn
-catalogue-date 2019-10-03 06:24:14 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 19:16:05 +0200
catalogue-license lpplgpl2
catalogue-topics font font-ornmnt font-type1
-catalogue-version 1.1a
+catalogue-version 1.1b
name adfsymbols
category Package
-revision 52264
+revision 52365
shortdesc SymbolsADF with TeX/LaTeX support
relocated 1
longdesc The package provides Arkandis foundry's ArrowsADF and
@@ -7738,14 +7738,15 @@ longdesc BulletsADF fonts in Adobe Type 1 format, together with
longdesc TeX/LaTeX support files.
execute addMap ArrowsADF.map
execute addMap BulletsADF.map
-containersize 26816
-containerchecksum 8dc04d26daeba469c13cc28b699a22363a614a813d6325678bf6a702e7bc93469ea71e8fc62dc4a6dee26565c0ff21465894493f13f3a7a94ff1ea8e1da633c3
-doccontainersize 11532
-doccontainerchecksum 4c24c05ad57b4ae330fb0b37ade3c6162ee558b1e38097c69750354d9f087e5691a1a13ae37d51a45b21796a5d0661013bbb29bec78fd3dc149c01b2d248b891
-docfiles size=12
+containersize 26820
+containerchecksum d5ad659516da1a4df4b2244f90db9a35fd4ae1415e78067a378d389a536380c1c642d7910491d4d49273c9f3e03a8a916cb418d8e608329b2701df44f8011de2
+doccontainersize 384920
+doccontainerchecksum 39bebc154e84ea1286e25e8f7b9439e1c1441b7df83db770a75e26580c452cec7ac8be97bd77e2a99448f100d30ea9d5f40f3282a54e5fcfe940cb40c9917cdf
+docfiles size=104
RELOC/doc/fonts/adfsymbols/COPYING
RELOC/doc/fonts/adfsymbols/NOTICE
RELOC/doc/fonts/adfsymbols/README details="Readme"
+ RELOC/doc/fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.pdf details="Package documentation"
RELOC/doc/fonts/adfsymbols/adfsymbols.tex
RELOC/doc/fonts/adfsymbols/manifest.txt
runfiles size=19
@@ -7763,10 +7764,10 @@ runfiles size=19
RELOC/tex/latex/adfsymbols/uarrowsadf.fd
RELOC/tex/latex/adfsymbols/ubulletsadf.fd
catalogue-ctan /fonts/adfsymbols
-catalogue-date 2019-10-03 06:30:33 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 19:43:43 +0200
catalogue-license lpplgpl2
-catalogue-topics font font-symbol font-type1
-catalogue-version 1.2a
+catalogue-topics font font-symbol font-type1 font-supp
+catalogue-version 1.2b
name adhocfilelist
category Package
@@ -14807,7 +14808,7 @@ catalogue-version 2.1.1
name almendra
category Package
-revision 52149
+revision 52374
shortdesc Almendra fonts with LaTeX support
relocated 1
longdesc This package provides LaTeX, pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX
@@ -14818,9 +14819,9 @@ longdesc are regular and bold weights with matching italics. There is
longdesc also a regular-weight small-caps.
execute addMap almendra.map
containersize 357444
-containerchecksum 7f4d1d3c06b941ec2f4c9ab49c11b197915b7edc946485dbb11afe9244c22092beda3585a1df47a335beca987752b5a5ab76c0e599a59b7a4b06ff064b5ac068
-doccontainersize 31188
-doccontainerchecksum b8035ebbd9e9aabe0dc935a90171216a9f99dffa1be33377e8263e9e74e8c0c5d58182aea238cbfa9836be6cc8f10581db7bbc64207911a588669b7c93f5e1bd
+containerchecksum dccb1938af6f4de3a4135f2ed58d31ad1444d78ba7c415bc8d22d57f0c93d1b28b88634cad238df129fa5c40e4971998a70d4f753b0a7b8bf54b036d181c151b
+doccontainersize 31192
+doccontainerchecksum da7305ec5775fea53d96985d2d859a490211dda1eaca56934db20f52fcccc9ed811932b498878c896d82300033432288f179c588b55eb774269602096880e3eb
docfiles size=12
RELOC/doc/fonts/almendra/OFL.txt
RELOC/doc/fonts/almendra/README details="Readme"
@@ -14919,7 +14920,7 @@ runfiles size=203
RELOC/tex/latex/almendra/almendra.sty
catalogue-contact-home https://fonts.google.com/specimen/Almendra
catalogue-ctan /fonts/almendra
-catalogue-date 2019-09-18 23:06:35 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-12 16:45:12 +0200
catalogue-license lpplofl
catalogue-topics font font-serif font-calligraphic font-proportional font-body font-ttf font-type1 font-t1enc
@@ -16190,7 +16191,7 @@ catalogue-version 2.0
name amsmath
category Package
-revision 52286
+revision 52372
catalogue latex-amsmath
shortdesc AMS mathematical facilities for LaTeX
relocated 1
@@ -16206,10 +16207,10 @@ longdesc contributed packages add still further to its appeal; examples
longdesc are empheq, which provides functions for decorating and
longdesc highlighting mathematics, and ntheorem, for specifying theorem
longdesc (and similar) definitions.
-containersize 30088
-containerchecksum 41c56493d0e6f19b52b4794c4d98eb8a3ab4f51dd0e7d0be046121d66be8ae953e2eb9bdbff4f59ce58ebac69cd1212a4f25ada178899b00f1843cb6cdb6128f
-doccontainersize 2323880
-doccontainerchecksum 08b3c6aad67e38cbc4be88c3de8912004dbb52070344217a8466aa42d3a7315b9432c7e6f4cae59f479b69c9e2ba7315617bac661effacb32765a0328e3dd5ab
+containersize 30252
+containerchecksum eb80cfebfbfba8403c2063fefbd9f779ea3d547fc6e7d15f47def3a77ec327e2674fe68d9303f7a3600c04be563f62272e2919387fb1c757246b8d4c33e4c24d
+doccontainersize 2323932
+doccontainerchecksum 4b426d8e89c6291d7325e665d2de8d33fa5552d348478c34495bff3afee29f1ce12a8c37c60d07f555d381099707b1378923ddbe12bbe52afbd33e1db5001ae3
docfiles size=660
RELOC/doc/latex/amsmath/README.md details="General README" language="en"
RELOC/doc/latex/amsmath/ams-external.txt
@@ -16232,8 +16233,8 @@ docfiles size=660
RELOC/doc/latex/amsmath/technote.tex
RELOC/doc/latex/amsmath/testmath.pdf details="Examples paper" language="en"
RELOC/doc/latex/amsmath/testmath.tex
-srccontainersize 63936
-srccontainerchecksum 886b3f87b155d7d57a4e26f1996a192c3bdb88474baad0af17060c445a4d5050a4ab508afc1af7894d5a6bf24c958a7a0ee66ee897c810b856ae4766f9a7dcb7
+srccontainersize 63940
+srccontainerchecksum 8571ad765aa182bafdb6dd257020595e454222d00314eaf5acf08285383dcfa99fd900a74ce5b87446430c8ec158f001b79da9f4fe3e509e6d24b7db7f26f7d0
srcfiles size=79
RELOC/source/latex/amsmath/amsbsy.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/amsmath/amsbsy.ins
@@ -16249,10 +16250,11 @@ srcfiles size=79
RELOC/source/latex/amsmath/amstext.ins
RELOC/source/latex/amsmath/amsxtra.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/amsmath/amsxtra.ins
-runfiles size=48
+runfiles size=69
RELOC/tex/latex/amsmath/amsbsy.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/amsmath/amscd.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/amsmath/amsgen.sty
+ RELOC/tex/latex/amsmath/amsmath-2018-12-01.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/amsmath/amsmath.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/amsmath/amsopn.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/amsmath/amstex.sty
@@ -16261,9 +16263,10 @@ runfiles size=48
catalogue-also nath mathtools
catalogue-contact-home http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/required/amsmath
-catalogue-date 2019-10-04 20:23:10 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 16:16:31 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3c
catalogue-topics maths
+catalogue-version 2019-10-01 PL1
name amsmath-it
category Package
@@ -49394,18 +49397,18 @@ catalogue-version 1.41
name chemformula
category Package
-revision 52223
+revision 52368
shortdesc Command for typesetting chemical formulas and reactions
relocated 1
longdesc The package provides a command to typeset chemical formulas and
longdesc reactions in support of other chemistry packages (such as
longdesc chemmacros). The package used to be distributed as a part of
longdesc chemmacros.
-containersize 18584
-containerchecksum e3fb464e1b8639245b27b3e308c8a6a4bcd509d3b23fd2eaab4c6ddf25b3d0a282a8c3ca2c1fcf88c1323ad5a9f74594ae6addda30779da40995707240e94e8d
-doccontainersize 965800
-doccontainerchecksum b48970db7c1590df106bafe316311afd050f9eef096e0201b7debdeb209241111370dc88b0ac9bef3e9cdf477eb5b9dbfa8a934d84c941baa4c06b4d3e74ce4e
-docfiles size=250
+containersize 18608
+containerchecksum 4ab3d7f4b86899a2088ef210b4ec03f6a511d17140c0b0ccb8fbe61057107e018415c5ed591096e27eec701775ded1d2e3c6cf90e76a25ba58a47a6cf79e5ab5
+doccontainersize 872760
+doccontainerchecksum 1b2edd7ba989074cc19eb5789a5f87baab32d7ef0ec96991e76c8c864293dad38bee3ea2f1def3b7fcafec01afbe4de4b3e34aceb8ac5e4140058245cd02e2e1
+docfiles size=227
RELOC/doc/latex/chemformula/README details="Readme"
RELOC/doc/latex/chemformula/chemformula_en.pdf details="Package documentation"
RELOC/doc/latex/chemformula/chemformula_en.tex
@@ -49413,10 +49416,10 @@ runfiles size=33
RELOC/tex/latex/chemformula/chemformula.sty
catalogue-contact-repository https://github.com/cgnieder/chemformula/
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/chemformula
-catalogue-date 2019-09-30 20:18:56 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 19:31:03 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3
catalogue-topics chemistry expl3
-catalogue-version 4.15g
+catalogue-version 4.15h
name chemgreek
category Package
@@ -60985,7 +60988,7 @@ containerchecksum 21aa181d7a3e8c16dbb30e12e30822d18db1386e088103a0987dc2a0a4d611
name collection-fontsextra
category Collection
-revision 52353
+revision 52376
shortdesc Additional fonts
relocated 1
depend collection-basic
@@ -61148,7 +61151,6 @@ depend hfbright
depend hfoldsty
depend ifsym
depend imfellenglish
-depend imfellflowers
depend inconsolata
depend initials
depend inriafonts
@@ -61281,8 +61283,8 @@ depend yfonts
depend yfonts-t1
depend yinit-otf
depend zlmtt
-containersize 1748
-containerchecksum 429508d59ee5a6c71e5561b4406b4f94d51518a2592c12b89e4defef0728229b246f93c17be60fd7ae14bd18ea1ce634b2c8a7e2521cd5ea191e9488382149ed
+containersize 1740
+containerchecksum 76ac1206ba9618472b23d739823635d9a3832917adf5c94f1e3a8aad663a01a5594f6f2d3b170013fc5dc30ae120b00f87482fa6034dceefed0749eef3c4977f
name collection-fontsrecommended
category Collection
@@ -81938,22 +81940,22 @@ catalogue-version 1.2a
name datetime2-usorbian
category Package
-revision 36700
+revision 52375
shortdesc Upper Sorbian language module for the datetime2 package
relocated 1
longdesc This module provides the "usorbian" style that can be set using
longdesc \DTMsetstyle provided by datetime2.sty. This package is
longdesc currently unmaintained. Please see the README for the procedure
longdesc to follow if you want to take over the maintenance.
-containersize 2764
-containerchecksum 83c30e65f19e53706a6ce46e8118c0b862ccfb0d99721f3f9a24bb2a83ece07570742ce6158e6d0592e643acc4fb9ee9e28227ae322cde4da006d5b04c2354f8
-doccontainersize 84884
-doccontainerchecksum e4ffb7b7dbab64ff7ea53a5c7b1797010ee1f93eb26aa4eb6fa78fdd2a621c9cdcebe461a731810d66026b43cf79b065b82ac4923bf96426d354175153497aa6
-docfiles size=22
+containersize 2760
+containerchecksum bae799fc523f01f7c70c7818ced0294bbb57a849567e05768c4f1c3f9cbe241755ac2dbda0a9ce0e3bb3f70eec45bae1c0607410302b458370a4c05951d791cf
+doccontainersize 76044
+doccontainerchecksum bacc067e851e4b58b2978472551cf869cc9d3d4412ba930b2ab81f39c4fa9ca352188b6a6bffc5b5dc4a6bcf611146b3d1344d221732a7caaf45f95bb67d5589
+docfiles size=20
RELOC/doc/latex/datetime2-usorbian/README details="Readme"
RELOC/doc/latex/datetime2-usorbian/datetime2-usorbian.pdf details="Package documentation"
-srccontainersize 5024
-srccontainerchecksum c4b32e6e6b03b0d194abac79b08186119fb03e52ba9e9f19d4c724a48fc5054427724b822e852fc20d3b1e2baacae001dca4d8531689767ea7e54baa49cb2926
+srccontainersize 5048
+srccontainerchecksum dcc7b42ec9873ef0d23026d07165301deda63b829462ab7f4074ae7c828945bc5cff2e2dba372782e250175b596b1be536dd27271e4b2f0913f42fb1a17ff320
srcfiles size=6
RELOC/source/latex/datetime2-usorbian/datetime2-usorbian.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/datetime2-usorbian/datetime2-usorbian.ins
@@ -81962,10 +81964,10 @@ runfiles size=4
RELOC/tex/latex/datetime2-usorbian/datetime2-usorbian-utf8.ldf
RELOC/tex/latex/datetime2-usorbian/datetime2-usorbian.ldf
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/datetime2-contrib/datetime2-usorbian
-catalogue-date 2016-06-24 19:18:15 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-10 13:19:18 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3
catalogue-topics date-time multilingual
-catalogue-version 1.0
+catalogue-version 1.1
name datetime2-welsh
category Package
@@ -92482,7 +92484,7 @@ catalogue-version 4
name ebgaramond
category Package
-revision 51134
+revision 52362
shortdesc LaTeX support for EBGaramond fonts
relocated 1
longdesc EB Garamond is a revival by Georg Duffner of the 16th century
@@ -92490,10 +92492,10 @@ longdesc fonts designed by Claude Garamond. The LaTeX support package
longdesc works for (pdf)LaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX users; configuration
longdesc files for use with microtype are provided.
execute addMap EBGaramond.map
-containersize 11866392
-containerchecksum 62f678cc395883315756361f26abcba6027e71cfb67a42f5e2e342734dd60b329ce6fc3527cf13f15c6e29ff8b7996cbb28e35eab7bf675e22ad560f6208bcc9
+containersize 11860748
+containerchecksum 36ee434fc88f4b72e0d1b5fa1cd0a912b1416bc3d74881e78494c2e9eedd1eca6c8bc5ad684969ee8b2bdd83d31c944e3f01bb4e26a6c6581d67cfc9bded6184
doccontainersize 510184
-doccontainerchecksum 3572018938e2d0e490ef1ace5e3811a2c6292e08c8056322232880bc0db2e6e01febc072384ffded7545c22a6d9893f1c5f2c7308a91af7dbd9a9a7257aab19c
+doccontainerchecksum da563ee20f8271177944ba4c891e91fe54a778bfdf2c17f5ae106357b12ed34ae9db71e4e82680b008184c6ed18a5fe645d848e450dac7b031246821fdafa925
docfiles size=142
RELOC/doc/fonts/ebgaramond/AUTHORS.txt
RELOC/doc/fonts/ebgaramond/CONTRIBUTORS.txt
@@ -92503,99 +92505,105 @@ docfiles size=142
RELOC/doc/fonts/ebgaramond/README details="Readme"
RELOC/doc/fonts/ebgaramond/ebgaramond-samples.pdf details="Font samples"
RELOC/doc/fonts/ebgaramond/ebgaramond-samples.tex
-runfiles size=6050
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_23xtno.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_2xdej5.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_3e4qg2.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_4dov45.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_54ujiw.enc
+runfiles size=6056
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_2hp5cx.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_2ybfsp.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_34tkje.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_3veehr.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_3zuots.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_4ljeza.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_4v7kvs.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_524p5k.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_535mcm.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_57ulwi.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_5tyv6c.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_5vgwa5.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_6napgq.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_7o6wgg.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_5cvcse.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_5xwr64.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_5ysuwq.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_67ivnh.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_6qtp6p.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_7tc6ve.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_7zbjeb.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_7zgzer.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_a23bap.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_a253pk.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_a37mnv.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_abyljl.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_a56nal.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ancics.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ao6kf7.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_bevor6.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_bisgyq.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_bj5npy.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_bszlvl.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_byuyni.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_c4ggco.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_c6t5bp.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_cjjoj4.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_chpilv.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_cqx43s.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_d2h6lj.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_dmjlse.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_dto4r5.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_e3brkz.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_doset5.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_egoty6.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_fjpe6p.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_epwp2l.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_fbpsnn.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_fc2mbn.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_fc5dte.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_fhs5ay.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_fl2mea.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_g63n4u.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_gaaohp.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_gf4ecr.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_gfppum.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_gspomo.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_h2c7fw.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_h5djnb.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_hfyizy.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_hlpoev.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ioh3dp.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_izfhxe.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_hrbra6.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_i3ibnm.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ipm435.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_j2crie.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_j2gtbm.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_j2xr5d.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_j4bgam.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_j66zy6.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_jedt67.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_joewos.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_jyhls2.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_k24cav.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_k5z2jz.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_k7jns3.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_kfeykp.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_lbrscz.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ld6df2.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ldtcgl.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_liamow.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_lvcw6s.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_m26xaf.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_mj3jkq.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_mnvma6.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_muwakt.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_mvrjgh.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ljow5q.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_lmhdpa.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_lybnup.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ndsebz.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_nhfy4v.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_noegxq.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_nxqm35.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_oahxim.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ob4q4u.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_oge4ze.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ontdi6.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_oskdwa.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_pdqo3a.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_pnjcqf.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ptk5md.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_qckgoz.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_puit2n.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_qhp2au.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_qip76a.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_qnljit.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_qnvfe4.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_rbkzlu.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_rs3zoq.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_qwnohr.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_rdmgdp.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_rtavnu.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_s7tpqt.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_slocg6.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_sqqqn7.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_t4t3wm.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_tbwoon.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_t3ctnr.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_t6g5sq.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_tcdnmr.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_tsrvmb.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_u7qtot.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_uj47dd.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_uxrhpx.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_utfkrl.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_vqv3w3.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_wsnb7l.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_wxmaa6.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_w7jvgc.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_xgcnbw.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_xhqcff.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_xoskhe.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_xxcxg5.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ybjcp2.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_yddfsn.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_yjkoc2.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_ylzvsz.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_yow7vo.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_yqpahr.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_yyibz2.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_z6dm7r.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_zgunbq.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_zjrm7o.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_z6ekgm.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_zbngqq.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_zcffwk.enc
RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/ebgaramond/ebgm_zor4nh.enc
RELOC/fonts/map/dvips/ebgaramond/EBGaramond.map
+ RELOC/fonts/map/dvips/ebgaramond/EBGaramondInitials.map
RELOC/fonts/opentype/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond-Bold.otf
RELOC/fonts/opentype/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond-BoldItalic.otf
RELOC/fonts/opentype/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond-ExtraBold.otf
@@ -93486,6 +93494,7 @@ runfiles size=6050
RELOC/fonts/type1/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond-SemiBoldItalic.pfb
RELOC/fonts/type1/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond12-Italic.pfb
RELOC/fonts/type1/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramondInitials.pfb
+ RELOC/fonts/type1/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramondInitialsLCDFJ.pfb
RELOC/fonts/vf/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond-Bold-inf-t1.vf
RELOC/fonts/vf/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-ly1.vf
RELOC/fonts/vf/public/ebgaramond/EBGaramond-Bold-lf-sc-ot1.vf
@@ -93785,7 +93794,7 @@ runfiles size=6050
RELOC/tex/latex/ebgaramond/TS1EBGaramondInitials-TLF.fd
RELOC/tex/latex/ebgaramond/ebgaramond.sty
catalogue-ctan /fonts/ebgaramond
-catalogue-date 2019-05-15 08:12:45 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-12 22:51:55 +0200
catalogue-license ofllppl
catalogue-topics font font-body font-proportional font-t1enc font-serif font-otf font-type1
@@ -123870,7 +123879,7 @@ catalogue-version 0.2
name gofonts
category Package
-revision 51314
+revision 52366
shortdesc GoSans and GoMono fonts with LaTeX support
relocated 1
longdesc This package provides LaTeX, pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX
@@ -123881,10 +123890,10 @@ longdesc corresponding italics). GoMono is available in regular and
longdesc bold, with italics. Notes on the design may be found at
longdesc https://blog.golang.org/go-fonts.
execute addMap go.map
-containersize 1361728
-containerchecksum 7f4c9b7da339eafd524288a82d7ba65c8a6f25dc0d6a3c6c95cc6f49eb8e3a38296e23df0a830212adb28cce565276d9d4e281dd0f16ee59d2f2df2a664ccab2
-doccontainersize 304040
-doccontainerchecksum 57d58c7d7924278c05aaf52eee0ba23dd08d52be186da7558a40094fb54dc282a75c824780ae54edc69b85b64ec03fb49470446be8af147447fcb92d71606562
+containersize 1361752
+containerchecksum 564685c341571d012c0ba80b44470c257714cb03644791bb4d0dc771a4c8234aa980adac503caad9defb0a6230bbb65c6aa552989c25fe59d42b0e623077b538
+doccontainersize 304036
+doccontainerchecksum 0ba8fe236f77ca7bb32fa7420a8c6dcbc1a493837c6fb78aa5f32fae80614c4e3a413aae9e691a33eccb747f297ae0c2e3dd3da9d483b15ed043aa21c0a01c74
docfiles size=81
RELOC/doc/fonts/gofonts/License
RELOC/doc/fonts/gofonts/README details="Readme"
@@ -124098,9 +124107,9 @@ runfiles size=897
RELOC/tex/latex/gofonts/TS1Go-TLF.fd
RELOC/tex/latex/gofonts/TS1GoMono-TLF.fd
catalogue-ctan /fonts/gofonts
-catalogue-date 2019-06-04 20:00:09 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 08:09:40 +0200
catalogue-license other-freelppl
-catalogue-topics font font-body font-proportional font-sans font-mono font-ttf font-type1 font-supp font-t1enc
+catalogue-topics font font-body font-multilingual font-greek font-cyrillic font-proportional font-mono font-sans font-serif font-ttf font-type1 font-supp font-t1enc
name gost
category Package
@@ -124635,7 +124644,7 @@ catalogue-version 1.1
name graphics
category Package
-revision 52286
+revision 52372
catalogue latex-graphics
shortdesc The LaTeX standard graphics bundle
relocated 1
@@ -124644,10 +124653,10 @@ longdesc including graphics (eg PostScript) files rotation and scaling
longdesc of text in LaTeX documents. It comprises the packages color,
longdesc graphics, graphicx, trig, epsfig, keyval, and lscape.
depend graphics-cfg
-containersize 14868
-containerchecksum 8a66c8fa210c960223f80d4f358073b0409ca19f15479f01f2e3673e3f0e5eb219b87e1c7dbfbb906c2ebe8ae302bdaa5f06dc70d1969fa8910fa746a838b0be
-doccontainersize 1998372
-doccontainerchecksum d22a9d032478bc979d9859f0dc2567d9dfcffb72894c89c0b64b542ecd3ff7eac9e9ce0e6cd870ee790cf7cdbd154cbd7b5c57444f34e2090eb8feb35cb317e8
+containersize 14964
+containerchecksum 56507f63739bc8257e849d77f08fe2a4daf70ded39bb474d7da6dc6013ed6484fff7505fddacd445d6510848da6a955ab15e1752e5abe566fecb47419d4b9000
+doccontainersize 1998636
+doccontainerchecksum c938e463d63715e7d5803608ef567d7dd58fdfed49acaad19c079c30239ef9d5738d2308b1178b9a77c06b472d91f1e42fc724c56bc34cda9885d6e7d1f3a899
docfiles size=622
RELOC/doc/latex/graphics/README.md details="Readme"
RELOC/doc/latex/graphics/cat.eps
@@ -124665,8 +124674,8 @@ docfiles size=622
RELOC/doc/latex/graphics/rotex.pdf
RELOC/doc/latex/graphics/rotex.tex
RELOC/doc/latex/graphics/trig.pdf
-srccontainersize 51428
-srccontainerchecksum 4c36afc18a8fa4a107ded6aa18f344fa3de6696cd8ef87db2a88dd23972aa83c5b83ef387e919d59bc22157d7ac2a6ac0df6a04b0495b3542432a0a545271f32
+srccontainersize 51592
+srccontainerchecksum 057f7744323cf220bdebb07ff17f5f83882b3f0b35d48198bf1e7503d4f67b2c0db770c81d7ca21fbf7b7f7c38e8036520d8acc71f93e2652c8b92de2d08c3a8
srcfiles size=62
RELOC/source/latex/graphics/color.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/graphics/drivers.dtx
@@ -124679,7 +124688,7 @@ srcfiles size=62
RELOC/source/latex/graphics/lscape.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/graphics/rotating.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/graphics/trig.dtx
-runfiles size=35
+runfiles size=36
RELOC/tex/latex/graphics/color.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/graphics/dvipdf.def
RELOC/tex/latex/graphics/dvipsnam.def
@@ -124703,9 +124712,10 @@ runfiles size=35
catalogue-contact-bugs https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/
catalogue-contact-home https://www.latex-project.org/
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/required/graphics
-catalogue-date 2019-10-03 19:39:53 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 15:19:15 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3c
catalogue-topics graphics collection
+catalogue-version 2019-10-01 PL1
name graphics-cfg
category Package
@@ -132795,33 +132805,6 @@ catalogue-date 2016-06-24 19:18:15 +0200
catalogue-license ofl
catalogue-topics font font-otf font-type1
-name imfellflowers
-category Package
-revision 52353
-shortdesc IM Fell Flower OpenType fonts
-relocated 1
-longdesc The package provides two flower fonts in OpenType format by IM
-longdesc Fell, as revived by Igino Marini.
-containersize 143340
-containerchecksum 4b0bcc02b7f1c4e7c106d8a37608f6ef73b4d2ca34758369f346551db7a01c6a5160c1626dbf13c4913f6dbc64679ef6cc8223a9b54014d30d74e3ab4e54a793
-doccontainersize 351692
-doccontainerchecksum b788c5127ba3339188a495576a5445da38e42d8e2cd2474242df06f4401654ce69d2c110458d21bef034663dbca4487e2eeb090cdbdd5f8d4e63a224653e272b
-docfiles size=133
- RELOC/doc/fonts/imfellflowers/README details="Readme"
- RELOC/doc/fonts/imfellflowers/fell_flW.jpg
- RELOC/doc/fonts/imfellflowers/imfellFlowers.pdf
- RELOC/doc/fonts/imfellflowers/imfellFlowers.tex
- RELOC/doc/fonts/imfellflowers/imfellflowers-glyphs.pdf details="Sample"
- RELOC/doc/fonts/imfellflowers/imfellflowers-glyphs.tex
-runfiles size=55
- RELOC/fonts/opentype/public/imfellflowers/FeFlow1.otf
- RELOC/fonts/opentype/public/imfellflowers/FeFlow2.otf
-catalogue-contact-home http://iginomarini.com/fell/the-revival-fonts/
-catalogue-ctan /fonts/imfellflowers
-catalogue-date 2019-10-12 12:34:39 +0200
-catalogue-license nosell
-catalogue-topics font font-otf
-
name impatient
category Package
revision 35573
@@ -145548,7 +145531,7 @@ catalogue-version 0.5
name koma-script
category TLCore
-revision 49929
+revision 52369
shortdesc A bundle of versatile classes and packages
relocated 1
longdesc The KOMA-Script bundle provides replacements for the article,
@@ -145564,14 +145547,15 @@ longdesc with the standard classes. Since every package has its own
longdesc version number, the version number quoted only refers to the
longdesc version of scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl, scrlttr2 and typearea
longdesc (which are the main parts of the bundle).
-containersize 13756660
-containerchecksum d74028ac12eaf367fbffc4656512c5b7b85b7f00737fa5b72967aecd3d564c6a8aaa4845ba0d1c65e64061474894e3f372bd78337975e0f40ce35b38206a66ff
-runfiles size=5663
+containersize 14168688
+containerchecksum 9a87386ea77897100dc1edb17665ad32cd1282b0243de956c7c1d60983988fd22f54dac9d519ecd7d0b3b00bf619a83ff1782baef6012299a8159d6c5264b1e7
+runfiles size=5878
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/INSTALL.txt
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/INSTALLD.txt
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/README
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/koma-script.html
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/komabug.tex
+ RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/komamarks.pdf
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/komascr.html
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/komascript.html
RELOC/doc/latex/koma-script/lppl-de.txt
@@ -145743,6 +145727,7 @@ runfiles size=5663
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/doc/tocbasic.html
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/doc/typearea.html
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/japanlco.dtx
+ RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/komamarks.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/scraddr.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/scrdoc.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/scrdocstrip.tex
@@ -145788,6 +145773,8 @@ runfiles size=5663
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/tocbasic.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/koma-script/tocstyle.dtx
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/DIN.lco
+ RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/DIN5008A.lco
+ RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/DIN5008B.lco
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/DINmtext.lco
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/KOMAold.lco
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/KakuLL.lco
@@ -145804,11 +145791,13 @@ runfiles size=5663
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/float.hak
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/floatrow.hak
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/hyperref.hak
+ RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/komamarks.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/listings.hak
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/lscape.hak
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/nomencl.hak
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scraddr.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrartcl.cls
+ RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrarticle.cls
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrbase.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrbook.cls
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrdate.sty
@@ -145822,10 +145811,12 @@ runfiles size=5663
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrlayer-notecolumn.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrlayer-scrpage.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrlayer.sty
+ RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrletter.cls
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrletter.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrlfile.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrlttr2.cls
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrpage2.sty
+ RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrreport.cls
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrreprt.cls
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrsize10pt.clo
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrsize11pt.clo
@@ -145833,6 +145824,7 @@ runfiles size=5663
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrtime.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/scrwfile.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/setspace.hak
+ RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/standardsections.hak
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/tocbasic.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/tocstyle.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/koma-script/typearea.sty
@@ -145840,10 +145832,10 @@ runfiles size=5663
catalogue-also scrartcl scrbook
catalogue-contact-home http://www.komascript.de/
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/koma-script
-catalogue-date 2019-02-03 20:31:24 +0100
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 15:33:54 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3c
catalogue-topics class letter book-pub page-hf geometry
-catalogue-version 3.26b
+catalogue-version 3.27
name koma-script-examples
category Package
@@ -150966,7 +150958,7 @@ catalogue-version 1.2m
name latex
category Package
-revision 52286
+revision 52372
shortdesc A TeX macro package that defines LaTeX
relocated 1
longdesc LaTeX is a widely-used macro package for TeX, providing many
@@ -150988,11 +150980,11 @@ depend luatex
depend pdftex
depend latexconfig
depend latex-fonts
-containersize 160292
-containerchecksum b649e32a96dc7d8d19c6b66e6e9a4a60f4fe19e46b7458a42079f358573c649097e075eb6fd152b86e19ce90837f7fef59dab7392a7273553f6a9dbefabf1c42
-doccontainersize 16556588
-doccontainerchecksum edec1dc520b26e744d233fcd8feb57751d4d45d849004d88dbc31b3614830bf4a13e1caa4025e50b101bedf315c1052f3ec464e86fb58b3b43d86cdec75a77da
-docfiles size=5134
+containersize 160288
+containerchecksum c1238a06abcf973717a49441d243bf7cd30ce4f641db3ede8c04796ae5be38b5724c3431d44ad0d2e83998b7421443ecc7feba2ea318eeafbecd33d959704dc5
+doccontainersize 16270808
+doccontainerchecksum 7dca728cb9733a93de6265b4504f2ab5bd4b9b518a28c7980e658564c32f800aa3a9ed8cca7e43252b54b9888077efaca385308b33d7cfbe8ffb942e170d4756
+docfiles size=5155
RELOC/doc/latex/base/README.md
RELOC/doc/latex/base/alltt.pdf
RELOC/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt
@@ -151110,9 +151102,9 @@ docfiles size=5134
RELOC/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf
RELOC/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex
RELOC/doc/latex/base/utf8ienc.pdf
-srccontainersize 498252
-srccontainerchecksum ab83143c1ff90be787d0173ae898f5c093ca6a561b34e302cc158da3926e8b1270d59a6affe2be74bd979d3c28ca18671e060c9baae4a630d730b9929da6c0fe
-srcfiles size=734
+srccontainersize 498472
+srccontainerchecksum c28ca4c596a1fd0357fafb3f67332ead41ab0445c6f2258fed19249a67e25864f70fbe1a08d5879db918d102d30a0249b88e5897097538578c5c52b8523447a1
+srcfiles size=735
RELOC/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
RELOC/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
@@ -151365,9 +151357,10 @@ runfiles size=428
RELOC/tex/latex/base/utf8enc.dfu
RELOC/tex/latex/base/x2enc.dfu
catalogue-contact-home http://www.latex-project.org/
-catalogue-date 2019-10-04 12:05:53 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 13:30:41 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3c
catalogue-topics format
+catalogue-version 2019-10-01 PL1
name latex-amsmath-dev
category Package
@@ -166440,30 +166433,32 @@ catalogue-topics font font-type1 font-otf
name librefranklin
category Package
-revision 51100
+revision 52363
shortdesc LaTeX support for the Libre-Franklin family of fonts
relocated 1
longdesc Libre Franklin is an interpretation and expansion based on the
longdesc 1912 Morris Fuller Benton's classic, designed by Pablo
longdesc Impallari, Rodrigo Fuenzalida and Nhung Nguyen.
execute addMap LibreFranklin.map
-containersize 2995308
-containerchecksum 1d60e5fb8afe84200872de5adbabdca3b9969771864c5b24554110f5ab831acf84c2ba0a4b6a29542c0feba11938343a9dc34505883eccdc3f4ed51ce9cee772
-doccontainersize 31676
-doccontainerchecksum 0cbb5d3fb9853fe9d6cd4a974225f49659b4ecd36f4a9abb607386969d0ca9ce16cb7644d31d38302be55384d98253da723d57a4e878e142f6d7705bb8df39d5
+containersize 2997436
+containerchecksum 4a258f30ad74b965b0fef4b4c77dd78e9671a2bc22d06e73d2b27954872a50e0a82547ab8fe81f4bdb0127722eed9f8ce178d7973211454e5cb6dce75ee09dbb
+doccontainersize 31688
+doccontainerchecksum 553531afe6ecc96b3a2abd24a86b1a0bf21c0f321ca7963ebac8bb2ac9fe6f16b025e129fc592a890bf299093de9e4eff9ad33f213e72475953892706eb14e5a
docfiles size=13
RELOC/doc/fonts/librefranklin/OFL.txt
RELOC/doc/fonts/librefranklin/README details="Readme"
RELOC/doc/fonts/librefranklin/librefranklin-samples.pdf details="Package documentation"
RELOC/doc/fonts/librefranklin/librefranklin-samples.tex
-runfiles size=1538
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_5xld5w.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_f6scsm.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_hau3x5.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_kctjno.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_ljoz2a.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_wpyws4.enc
- RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_yhzmyq.enc
+runfiles size=1547
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_ejn2og.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_hlvv6p.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_nb4g6w.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_spbxfw.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_tdlrq7.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_tf5jo5.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_w4rwtq.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_wmouhf.enc
+ RELOC/fonts/enc/dvips/librefranklin/lbfr_xsutkk.enc
RELOC/fonts/map/dvips/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.map
RELOC/fonts/opentype/impallari/librefranklin/LibreFranklin-Black.otf
RELOC/fonts/opentype/impallari/librefranklin/LibreFranklin-BlackItalic.otf
@@ -166915,8 +166910,11 @@ runfiles size=1538
RELOC/fonts/vf/impallari/librefranklin/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ly1.vf
RELOC/fonts/vf/impallari/librefranklin/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-t1.vf
RELOC/fonts/vf/impallari/librefranklin/LibreFranklin-ThinItalic-tlf-ts1.vf
+ RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/LGRLibreFranklin-Sup.fd
+ RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/LGRLibreFranklin-TLF.fd
RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/LY1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/LY1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
+ RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/LibreFranklin.sty
RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/OT1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/OT1LibreFranklin-TLF.fd
RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/T1LibreFranklin-Sup.fd
@@ -166925,7 +166923,7 @@ runfiles size=1538
RELOC/tex/latex/librefranklin/librefranklin.sty
catalogue-contact-home https://github.com/impallari/Libre-Franklin
catalogue-ctan /fonts/librefranklin
-catalogue-date 2019-05-11 18:46:20 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 18:12:02 +0200
catalogue-license lpplofl
catalogue-topics font font-sans font-proportional font-body font-otf font-type1 font-t1enc
@@ -174001,7 +173999,7 @@ catalogue-topics maths luatex
name luatex
category TLCore
-revision 50602
+revision 52360
shortdesc The LuaTeX engine
longdesc LuaTeX is an extended version of pdfTeX using Lua as an
longdesc embedded scripting language. The LuaTeX project's main
@@ -174025,10 +174023,10 @@ execute AddFormat name=luatex engine=luatex options="luatex.ini" patterns=lang
execute AddFormat name=dviluatex engine=luatex options="dviluatex.ini" patterns=language.def,language.dat.lua fmttriggers=cm,etex,hyphen-base,knuth-lib,plain,tex-ini-files,unicode-data
execute AddFormat name=luajittex engine=luajittex options="luatex.ini" patterns=language.def,language.dat.lua fmttriggers=cm,etex,hyphen-base,knuth-lib,plain,tex-ini-files,unicode-data
containersize 12932
-containerchecksum 4706ab295a8cc72b6fbafa92132bbef82be4241f2b6b04a20230f763ae52e1a3be112b951d0537ef1c0fd64acb81be6726e71151b45332e90d70b05f3f8c2ccd
-doccontainersize 1681640
-doccontainerchecksum 5084702c17f70541fb6def483908cdf9f60cde4c142501aad47498547acba117580284f00c502f7feba0d27dc8e5939d9d8c92e11f498ee03ad654b4be9d8ae0
-docfiles size=591
+containerchecksum 56929e4ffaf6a6ae19bed3f1df50f0d31716b1f777cacfc4399abe1a6ebea329d6526a33468e4c047ad2ab2090a828c4b58d3f3b5534dc234144421e5649c0cc
+doccontainersize 1682808
+doccontainerchecksum 7664148b8e871cabf52a336938759ff0246a697632f486bf06ff42ddcaf23a89706907a73c725d69a999a4906d5546a2061d7334b859fa588d7f50ed1a1a5122
+docfiles size=590
texmf-dist/doc/luatex/base/luatex-backend.tex
texmf-dist/doc/luatex/base/luatex-callbacks.tex
texmf-dist/doc/luatex/base/luatex-contents.tex
@@ -177147,7 +177145,7 @@ catalogue-topics index-multi
name marcellus
category Package
-revision 52124
+revision 52367
shortdesc Marcellus fonts with LaTeX support
relocated 1
longdesc This package provides LaTeX, pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX
@@ -177157,10 +177155,10 @@ longdesc classic Roman inscription letterforms. There is currently just
longdesc a regular weight and small-caps. The regular weight will be
longdesc silently substituted for bold.
execute addMap marcellus.map
-containersize 181756
-containerchecksum 406d6c88b0af8ad649213ac0ad1fcc8fcb134d6770c5eb295ac2c76557116a3517c877f49036497c9a07d37d1ef9a3a33a1c1757fe9973064ea59868d8780b39
-doccontainersize 16984
-doccontainerchecksum c58ce84fee7faf83296feea80e5cb697aba68f48a3a55b81729ad62d43110afce0d3d2016b93edc99320fc1ba35639b70f4f3cf1165f8a48cbf2ca229170c2c6
+containersize 181752
+containerchecksum dbb5f27d0bdcc0ac304a45b06afb800c002b299cb70f86fefcc25f9aee288c2cf4eb8bbbc37eb97d380bf1d1e2371fa77c196e87fbb92c22d2cb248243dc35d0
+doccontainersize 16980
+doccontainerchecksum a9c4fd90385e9ab3b39e4744084d2730dabb4091b09270855ca0d1bbd21b3f0518300a4f2ae0243121f5174f3a491a460ed6c5d617298bf4392a23368cd57f8f
docfiles size=8
RELOC/doc/fonts/marcellus/OFL.txt
RELOC/doc/fonts/marcellus/README details="Readme"
@@ -177234,7 +177232,7 @@ runfiles size=127
RELOC/tex/latex/marcellus/marcellus.sty
catalogue-contact-home https://fonts.google.com/specimen/Marcellus
catalogue-ctan /fonts/marcellus
-catalogue-date 2019-09-18 22:57:49 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 19:30:48 +0200
catalogue-license ofllppl
catalogue-topics font font-body font-proportional font-ttf font-type1 font-t1enc
@@ -199729,7 +199727,7 @@ catalogue-topics font font-type1 font-decor
name nicematrix
category Package
-revision 52296
+revision 52370
shortdesc Several features to improve the typesetting of mathematical matrices with TikZ
relocated 1
longdesc This package provides new environments similar to the
@@ -199744,27 +199742,27 @@ longdesc provides a control over the width of the columns and the
longdesc possibility to add an exterior line and an exterior column.
longdesc nicematrix requires and loads amsmath, array, expl3, l3keys2e,
longdesc xparse, tikz, as well as the TikZ library fit.
-containersize 11884
-containerchecksum 0aeb6e2d3d35b4ce689d7e4c7b02cfa979f0fece046baab8441d31139859fb162d309795b74f8cc36017becbd117259ae8a9777eee5c008fc321668640a6023b
-doccontainersize 952048
-doccontainerchecksum 899fb9c2e7c20c1cd3c8c38bde3812f86dbfe412e0740dbf0d9f7e89baeecd4ff915c4ccee7b503b9a310c72fcb2418856079568081873ad5f1295e24adbdf6c
-docfiles size=258
+containersize 12024
+containerchecksum 03b9289b7d8edb6a042fb4f9facd7b933d882ad1b88a8f70da8772e1d40628a59b331638a1cc149f2fc946dc252b7878b5950cd92b9944e34adebf6e2d1f3b87
+doccontainersize 957728
+doccontainerchecksum 71089524b9cf67d7ba7156e3f7d1bef56ce699e2b39f8879731d692f2f9352f772d04714d7f7f2826d1db6a0f1ca0860bc490644f0df82e8e52ba0d5d85d9992
+docfiles size=260
RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/README.md details="Readme"
- RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf details="Package documentation in French"
+ RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf details="Package documentation in French" language="fr"
RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex
RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf details="Package documentation"
-srccontainersize 42164
-srccontainerchecksum 8f5ca2502d6259f27a561b57a5e85a92bfaed3dc6411306e3fd4565a906fa86ff6e510e439c809932e77fa0af6c877a40f43632dd9bd0cb826bf1ef15d37b4ee
+srccontainersize 42360
+srccontainerchecksum 7f71495b48f8563ab8adeaf021dd998847001f5c05c9d643619fb370126bf31a1ed269b53c7be670549c94d13d32ceb9a5aebe65bafaa6815d696cbe2f7afc6b
srcfiles size=60
RELOC/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx
RELOC/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.ins
runfiles size=21
RELOC/tex/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.sty
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix
-catalogue-date 2019-10-05 15:37:47 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 12:36:56 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3
catalogue-topics maths matrix pgf-tikz expl3
-catalogue-version 3.4
+catalogue-version 3.5
name nicetext
category Package
@@ -274459,7 +274457,7 @@ binfiles arch=x86_64-solaris size=1
name tex4ht
category Package
-revision 52328
+revision 52361
shortdesc Convert (La)TeX to HTML/XML
longdesc A converter from TeX and LaTeX to SGML-based formats such as
longdesc (X)HTML, MathML, OpenDocument, and DocBook, providing a
@@ -274474,10 +274472,10 @@ longdesc restricted-syntax systems such as hyperlatex and gellmu. Note
longdesc that CTAN no longer holds the definitive sources of the
longdesc package: see the 'Readme' file.
depend tex4ht.ARCH
-containersize 896776
-containerchecksum 9035464a95cfe6e36f9aa37936410f86339fcd3dd8a75a598cf5beed322b55c70d735990c2e1235888b8cfb3769784f8ed40d44cbf451166efddb67af5486b3d
+containersize 896712
+containerchecksum 77e2375bbe314857b33e50d89e8301f357a27bc450cf50eea8078294e90f8f52c6713e8f49fd29d82aa2bac784a19da23eb3eecbd722548dce9f12dd263b2124
doccontainersize 61192
-doccontainerchecksum 35add16149e988c355506c50ab6cecc4d5ef78888a7adf4e7e61e795eade866246a630fcc21a5780438bbea9c5a302ad73e4f7a9bbf34f6a17ba8f6ed8dea868
+doccontainerchecksum e87372ae997895f2eea72b22f47be898eda817544c87a96695bb0ed8e5a353c2cfae18ae218d95bacdef010c5ea8c0dd326fd19b4eec06d589124879034385e0
docfiles size=195
texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex4ht/bugfixes.css
texmf-dist/doc/generic/tex4ht/bugfixes.html
@@ -282703,15 +282701,15 @@ docfiles size=572
name texlive-docindex
category TLCore
-revision 52336
+revision 52359
shortdesc top-level TeX Live doc.html, etc.
longdesc These files are regenerated as needed, which is often, so we
longdesc make them a separate package. See the tl-update-auto script
longdesc for the process.
containersize 109876
-containerchecksum 4dae375ee08011fb21af04e7a14022c32f723e6414a24f0f77726685d90abf8f6762f9ec0315bc4e9f546935c7851173fa3b8e9eb2bd02a9ad64fcec7a7d24b8
-doccontainersize 154992
-doccontainerchecksum 95661fd4416dd06e7f17246d1c5d914c727266102894ebae97537928aa0e73a961326ba382c42d7086e3bbd7e29a4b018d7b4cc9dab83ebd15bf9c7e5a28700b
+containerchecksum eda1747f14aa07cf249dbf4130c77088ebd73a272f01e6d3cca21dcd40c77ead85133d7065175283626adb72c4a78995b74882f17a14a6dd1d15cfd013e92cd3
+doccontainersize 155024
+doccontainerchecksum 6f6352fb1af7c4e107266ec12f4f207638e44c02f9c0782d3bcc03d7d4c6fcfeee04f4054f284ec46fb3efe6f87039ad8971fdeed2bcc180526dfdf52b531483
docfiles size=304
doc.html
runfiles size=270
@@ -282928,17 +282926,17 @@ docfiles size=503
name texlive-scripts
category TLCore
-revision 52348
+revision 52359
shortdesc TeX Live infrastructure programs
longdesc Includes install-tl, tl-portable, rungs, etc.; not needed for
longdesc tlmgr to run but still ours. Not included in tlcritical.
depend texlive.infra
depend texlive-scripts.ARCH
postaction shortcut type=menu name="TeX Live command-line" cmd=TEXDIR/tlpkg/installer/tl-cmd.bat
-containersize 85084
-containerchecksum 1c699dae442bbe99c5ddc1668d1020464d4fbc8ded5d091120abb7f49e0c7373165bf0d308bb4d905dce358f1d723e2e86b2da08e88bbc884fea0fdb3c8ee2b0
+containersize 85068
+containerchecksum 183c13cb5a61136edbf8f0a62be26e2af8bb186aadd7805367b54ef7e498917ae6252c3632577a19a2fbbfe12f8ebe69801c1ceff22a22f5a70f712550f93f9c
doccontainersize 51244
-doccontainerchecksum ca8f337e39ec3fb53ac1d23e91a1b68430742e9513513f5a1a18939cf4838434cf6f71fd4411f6c3f9a5a169e94f5a6a832cab7a1a95196d3e01c7195a3b8639
+doccontainerchecksum 3c82dd297e1402f12020a60ac621f5a2c20dbf21dc6fe6881af7ed52a8c2f5665bee8f0ccc8cee06fcf57b8ad5ef2ded3c68302b4a39ff0cff1590d12cb89940
docfiles size=20
texmf-dist/doc/man/man1/install-tl.1
texmf-dist/doc/man/man1/install-tl.man1.pdf
@@ -316031,17 +316029,17 @@ catalogue-version 0.14
name xsim
category Package
-revision 52314
+revision 52371
shortdesc eXercise Sheets IMproved
relocated 1
longdesc This package helps in creating exercises and the corresponding
longdesc solutions. It is the official successor of the exsheets package
longdesc and fixes/improves various long-standing issues.
-containersize 30508
-containerchecksum 32c00e8d25958f3e5582e47074d3f1b3be59286fb0401cfcd0324f4488eb8268a5511a0a61fc61ad62ff8d4ab467213bb84bd6e75f574d32e77e241bbe3fe2f0
-doccontainersize 2563508
-doccontainerchecksum 007eb9423cfd4bd2a79298fb56e2f5ac04e88ce5af99867be138dde63ad7dcb1c45614f14546f273661b6d3dc2cdd8797ca5ccc2ab8e24765c37b8e2ba730ba6
-docfiles size=761
+containersize 30836
+containerchecksum 4cacf876c020262540a136554d065844a428ec754c03f2ca2784eb9e0b7815c3fef01d6ccee44e789a5115a1d563317cef3c3d80bd8b1306d9a441cf6b049581
+doccontainersize 2594488
+doccontainerchecksum 842a1fe4af1c6689be3f647d464a521a42277bac34829a483312e188656c6366493cc0e0fbb1769552a9cc8ea50ceb2c6f17adee97b264e67593ed4a71307f53
+docfiles size=778
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/README details="Readme"
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.blanks.pdf
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.blanks.tex
@@ -316109,6 +316107,8 @@ docfiles size=761
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.texsx-395273.tex
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.pdf
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.texwelt-15093.tex
+ RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.pdf
+ RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.texwelt-23968.tex
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.pdf
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.texwelt-6698.tex
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/examples/xsim.various.pdf
@@ -316117,7 +316117,7 @@ docfiles size=761
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/xsim.ideas
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/xsim_manual.pdf details="Package documentation"
RELOC/doc/latex/xsim/xsim_manual.tex
-runfiles size=64
+runfiles size=65
RELOC/tex/latex/xsim/xsim-manual.cls
RELOC/tex/latex/xsim/xsim.auxfile.code.tex
RELOC/tex/latex/xsim/xsim.base.code.tex
@@ -316143,10 +316143,10 @@ runfiles size=64
catalogue-contact-bugs https://github.com/cgnieder/xsim/issues
catalogue-contact-repository https://github.com/cgnieder/xsim/
catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/xsim
-catalogue-date 2019-10-07 19:09:14 +0200
+catalogue-date 2019-10-13 18:03:44 +0200
catalogue-license lppl1.3
catalogue-topics exercise exam expl3
-catalogue-version 0.13
+catalogue-version 0.14
name xskak
category Package
diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5
index 54b65b2b44..ad662dff42 100644
--- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5
+++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5
@@ -1 +1 @@
-01e77c1ae3b3ff790f0d9abad83c7b3f texlive.tlpdb
+32b934d6cc93b5149d71f48863a0a1d6 texlive.tlpdb
diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512
index 2d202b5618..a880d73866 100644
--- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512
+++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512
@@ -1 +1 @@
-bb1dd771427ead6691f92257db57bcac515fbb1ae76a60be505761ce9b1c04f8abf4b9a78cacc1b5f3c7315754737ea37e1bfe03ac4a5a015c1c9fcaf52e3d1b texlive.tlpdb
+c85968fc35926825450891731e0119712fcd51e5f3adc690170c3c009cb7a661df09da0f96a04be639427af6d7e4a8d5db0008a46cb242a5c1846b343d6b3bff texlive.tlpdb
diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc
index 1fbcd67c76..fc11f93e2e 100644
--- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc
+++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE-----
-iQEcBAEBCgAGBQJdomfyAAoJEEzhh34ZQ4xwkVkH/jTnP5fl8aykTaQY1c7/gCpG
-i29vgZOOGlEDlRz4JgDJrbhEe+BQoST7VFbcChRwtdjSK2SLh/mdE1/z1CgNcCps
-8o3xgUyDp/4qQ7edRaYu9TZ0lnJQ+GybzvOVRWVRVMBc9vKbIgwsvJidK/FkVyXQ
-WiXwZLylH5oXXLG5fFrn2URlejbdCfM69NBtxW9nZKSHplv1dSjaXPVrFx9jkkZ4
-SFYxfH0z2vd0btgOJpdzn70eA69vje3zb9rSgzkx80w1cC+9h7aT9Onk+MTC6fgk
-Lqc6HJn/3JyUZMGCDekokKoEJPu3+Qu1q1+mA09Yo1uZCr8K5Y3XobXNRQkHhvo=
-=hIcl
+iQEcBAEBCgAGBQJdo7lRAAoJEEzhh34ZQ4xwd3oIALIgR67Jyc2v7u1lXgn+0oNj
+qXa2dxyrq3dFQydKMXCJMX5wsEXcItgvmvIDA+8gGfkYt4pn5guLJGDfL7beiUTc
++qP7hl0uMiYmFREsTFp9kMRj+FQbySRqzndPnYXDVPZX8GeP5TC0emL3uEXYORbV
+QyaLihqu//kUegexaTGQZuJX5wuBosskqU1cLtlu3WzeM1ZH6f99GQAsWekuitdh
+hqN7Ek/Zv749M7a1IUvjjoYYFAiZxZtudnxI6UJav+h31dKV3qo090obxijAbFni
+pmu54axQrRprvgYrcKXtfeuiSEZbhckQy6EfH8abmlh2v/Phrg+5ahZLvIByBpk=
+=nTAi
-----END PGP SIGNATURE-----
diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz
index 5cdd440385..1ee999d309 100644
--- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz
+++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz
Binary files differ
diff --git a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini
index 94b82b11a4..17d2588d10 100644
--- a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini
+++ b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini
@@ -2,9 +2,9 @@
[repository]
-date=1570911370
+date=1570997767
lastupd=miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9 miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9 miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-autosp-bin-2.9 miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9 miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9 miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9 miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9 miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9 miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-cairo-bin-2.9 miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-chktex-bin-2.9 miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9
-lstdigest=8f7b0f6e8497718d90d428dd9df7eac8
+lstdigest=f86a1e60772aa9465eb6fca27cd65b38
numpkg=3757
relstate=next
-version=7224
+version=7225
diff --git a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini
index f4d23ae231..a85029c7c1 100644
--- a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini
+++ b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini
@@ -2,9 +2,9 @@
[repository]
-date=1570911130
+date=1570997532
lastupd=alegreya apxproof booktabs datetime2-turkish datetime2-usorbian fei lwarp metrix newpx newtx pxchfon siunitx stickstoo aeb-minitoc dccpaper gindex practicalreports shipunov tasks xecyr
-lstdigest=ce1bd5145b0ec13d56c82052d2deece9
+lstdigest=37b58ac3a9db8d60a725e2f445273d41
numpkg=3757
relstate=stable
-version=7224
+version=7225
diff --git a/systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog b/systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog
index 4a613243a2..24410ce79a 100644
--- a/systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog
+++ b/systems/win32/w32tex/ChangeLog
@@ -1,5 +1,17 @@
W32TeX (x86 & x64) ChangeLog
+[2019/10/13]
+(01) luajittex-exp-w32.tar.xz
+ Update luajittex.dll, and luajithbtex.dll.
+(02) luatex-exp-w32.tar.xz
+ Update luatex.dll, and luahbtex.dll.
+(03) pgfcontrib.tar.xz
+ Update circuitikz.
+(04) win64/luajittex-exp-w64.tar.xz
+ Update luajittex.dll, and luajithbtex.dll.
+(05) win64/luatex-exp-w64.tar.xz
+ Update luatex.dll, and luahbtex.dll.
+
[2019/10/12]
(01) context.tar.xz
ConTeXt version: 2019.10.11 15:47.
diff --git a/timestamp b/timestamp
index 5106ab00ec..7ff0f6be16 100644
--- a/timestamp
+++ b/timestamp
@@ -2,4 +2,4 @@
# The source CTAN of this site's material:
dante.ctan.org
# The year-month-day-hour-minute of this site's material:
-2019-10-13-02-02
+2019-10-14-02-02